[Title 12 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - January 1, 2018 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Publishing Office]



[[Page i]]

          

          Title 12

Banks and Banking


________________________

Parts 300 to 499

                         Revised as of January 1, 2018

          Containing a codification of documents of general 
          applicability and future effect

          As of January 1, 2018
                    Published by the Office of the Federal Register 
                    National Archives and Records Administration as 
                    Special Edition of the Federal Register

[[Page ii]]

          U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE

          Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos
          
          
          The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration 
              (NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as 
              the official codification of Federal regulations established 
              under the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44 
              U.S.C. 1507, the contents of the CFR, a special edition of the 
              Federal Register, shall be judicially noticed. The CFR is 
              prima facie evidence of the original documents published in 
              the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).

          It is prohibited to use NARA's official seal and the stylized Code 
              of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this 
              material without the express, written permission of the 
              Archivist of the United States or the Archivist's designee. 
              Any person using NARA's official seals and logos in a manner 
              inconsistent with the provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is 
              subject to the penalties specified in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and 
              1017.

          Use of ISBN Prefix

          This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication 
              and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of 
              the 0-16 ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Publishing Office 
              Official Editions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the 
              U.S. Government Publishing Office requests that any reprinted 
              edition clearly be labeled as a copy of the authentic work 
              with a new ISBN.

              
              
          U . S . G O V E R N M E N T P U B L I S H I N G O F F I C E

          ------------------------------------------------------------------

          U.S. Superintendent of Documents  Washington, DC 20402-
              0001

          http://bookstore.gpo.gov

          Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

[[Page iii]]




                            Table of Contents



                                                                    Page
  Explanation.................................................       v

  Title 12:
          Chapter III--Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation         3
          Chapter IV--Export-Import Bank of the United States     1351
  Finding Aids:
      Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................    1409
      Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR......    1429
      List of CFR Sections Affected...........................    1439

[[Page iv]]


      


                     ----------------------------

                     Cite this Code:  CFR
                     To cite the regulations in 
                       this volume use title, 
                       part and section number. 
                       Thus, 12 CFR 303.0 refers 
                       to title 12, part 303, 
                       section 0.

                     ----------------------------

[[Page v]]



                               EXPLANATION

    The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and 
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive 
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided 
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal 
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the 
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into 
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
    Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year 
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:

Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1

    The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each 
volume.

LEGAL STATUS

    The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially 
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie 
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).

HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

    The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual 
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used 
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
    To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its 
revision date (in this case, January 1, 2018), consult the ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative 
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of 
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal 
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.

EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES

    Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal 
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source 
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page 
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication 
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be 
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In 
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the 
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In 
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register 
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be 
inserted following the text.

OMB CONTROL NUMBERS

    The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires 
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information 
collection request.

[[Page vi]]

Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as 
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are 
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting 
requirements.

PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE

    Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of 
the revision date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried. 
Code users may find the text of provisions in effect on any given date 
in the past by using the appropriate List of CFR Sections Affected 
(LSA). For the convenience of the reader, a ``List of CFR Sections 
Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume. For changes to 
the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume, consult 
previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to 
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published 
for 1949-1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.

``[RESERVED]'' TERMINOLOGY

    The term ``[Reserved]'' is used as a place holder within the Code of 
Federal Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a 
``[Reserved]'' location at any time. Occasionally ``[Reserved]'' is used 
editorially to indicate that a portion of the CFR was left vacant and 
not accidentally dropped due to a printing or computer error.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

    What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was 
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the 
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring 
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be 
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal 
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as 
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)). 
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force 
of law.
    What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the 
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when 
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which 
approval is based are:
    (a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of 
material published in the Federal Register.
    (b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent 
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative 
process.
    (c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for 
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
    What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If 
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as 
an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency that 
issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after 
contacting the agency, you find the material is not available, please 
notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives and 
Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001, 
or call 202-741-6010.

CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES

    A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a 
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index 
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities 
and Rules. A list of CFR titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an 
alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in 
this volume.

[[Page vii]]

    An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within 
that volume.
    The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. 
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in 
the daily Federal Register.
    A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to 
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.

REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL

    There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing 
in the Code of Federal Regulations.

INQUIRIES

    For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this 
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at 
the top of odd-numbered pages.
    For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000 
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National 
Archives and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 
20740-6001 or e-mail [email protected].

SALES

    The Government Publishing Office (GPO) processes all sales and 
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free, 
866-512-1800, or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or 
fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours a day. For payment by check, 
write to: US Government Publishing Office - New Orders, P.O. Box 979050, 
St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.

ELECTRONIC SERVICES

    The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of 
CFR Sections Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal 
Register, Public Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United 
States, Compilation of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act 
Compilation are available in electronic format via www.ofr.gov. For more 
information, contact the GPO Customer Contact Center, U.S. Government 
Publishing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-512-1800 (toll-free). E-
mail, [email protected].
    The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the 
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web 
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related 
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.archives.gov/federal-
register.
    The e-CFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation 
of CFR material and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office 
of the Federal Register and the Government Publishing Office. It is 
available at www.ecfr.gov.

    Oliver A. Potts,
    Director,
    Office of the Federal Register
    January 1, 2018

                                
                                      
                            

  

[[Page ix]]



                               THIS TITLE

    Title 12--Banks and Banking is composed of ten volumes. The parts in 
these volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 1-199, 200-219, 
220-229, 230-299, 300-499, 500-599, 600-899, 900-1025, 1026-1099, and 
1100-end. The contents of these volumes represent all current 
regulations codified under this title of the CFR as of January 1, 2018.

    For this volume, Gabrielle E. Burns was Chief Editor. The Code of 
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of John 
Hyrum Martinez, assisted by Stephen J. Frattini.

[[Page 1]]



                       TITLE 12--BANKS AND BANKING




                  (This book contains parts 300 to 499)

  --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                    Part

chapter iii--Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation..........         303

chapter iv--Export-Import Bank of the United States.........         400

[[Page 3]]



           CHAPTER III--FEDERAL DEPOSIT INSURANCE CORPORATION




  --------------------------------------------------------------------

              SUBCHAPTER A--PROCEDURE AND RULES OF PRACTICE
Part                                                                Page
300-302         [Reserved]

303             Filing procedures...........................           7
304             Forms, instructions, and reports............          52
305-306         [Reserved]

307             Certification of assumption of deposits and 
                    notification of changes of insured 
                    status..................................          54
308             Rules of practice and procedure.............          56
309             Disclosure of information...................         141
310             Privacy Act regulations.....................         156
311             Rules governing public observation of 
                    meetings of the Corporation's Board of 
                    Directors...............................         161
312             [Reserved]

313             Procedures for corporate debt collection....         165
       SUBCHAPTER B--REGULATIONS AND STATEMENTS OF GENERAL POLICY
323             Appraisals..................................         185
324             Capital adequacy of FDIC-Supervised 
                    institutions............................         193
325             Capital maintenance.........................         401
326             Minimum security devices and procedures and 
                    Bank Secrecy Act compliance.............         528
327             Assessments.................................         530
328             Advertisement of membership.................         613
329             Liquidity risk measurement standards........         616
330             Deposit insurance coverage..................         644
331             [Reserved]

332             Privacy of consumer financial information...         660
333             Extension of corporate powers...............         688
334             Fair credit reporting.......................         690
335             Securities of State nonmember banks and 
                    State savings associations..............         697
336             FDIC employees..............................         705
337             Unsafe and unsound banking practices........         709
338             Fair housing................................         716

[[Page 4]]

339             Loans in areas having special flood hazards.         719
340             Restrictions on sale of assets of a failed 
                    institution by the Federal Deposit 
                    Insurance Corporation...................         727
341             Registration of securities transfer agents..         730
342             [Reserved]

343             Consumer protection in sales of insurance...         732
344             Recordkeeping and confirmation requirements 
                    for securities transactions.............         736
345             Community reinvestment......................         743
346             Disclosure and reporting of CRA-related 
                    agreements..............................         764
347             International banking.......................         777
348             Management official interlocks..............         801
349             Derivatives.................................         805
350             Disclosure of financial and other 
                    information by FDIC-insured State 
                    nonmember banks.........................         841
351             Proprietary trading and certain interests in 
                    and relationships with covered funds....         843
352             Nondiscrimination on the basis of disability         887
353             Suspicious activity reports.................         891
357             Determination of economically depressed 
                    regions.................................         893
359             Golden parachute and indemnification 
                    payments................................         894
360             Resolution and receivership rules...........         901
361             Minority and Women Outreach Program 
                    contracting.............................         943
362             Activities of insured State banks and 
                    insured savings associations............         945
363             Annual independent audits and reporting 
                    requirements............................         967
364             Standards for safety and soundness..........         994
365             Real estate lending standards...............        1003
366             Minimum standards of integrity and fitness 
                    for an FDIC contractor..................        1015
367             Suspension and exclusion of contractor and 
                    termination of contracts................        1019
368             Government securities sales practices.......        1028
369             Prohibition against use of interstate 
                    branches primarily for deposit 
                    production..............................        1031
370             Recordkeeping for timely deposit insurance 
                    determination...........................        1033
371             Recordkeeping requirements for qualified 
                    financial contracts.....................        1044
373             Credit risk retention.......................        1072
380             Orderly liquidation authority...............        1114
381             Resolution plans............................        1146
382             Restrictions on qualified financial 
                    contracts...............................        1157

[[Page 5]]

390             Regulations transferred from the Office of 
                    Thrift Supervision......................        1167
391             Former Office of Thrift Supervision 
                    regulations.............................        1347
392-399         [Reserved]

[[Page 7]]



              SUBCHAPTER A_PROCEDURE AND RULES OF PRACTICE



                        PARTS 300	302 [RESERVED]



PART 303_FILING PROCEDURES--Table of Contents



Sec.
303.0  Scope.

                Subpart A_Rules of General Applicability

303.1  Scope.
303.2  Definitions.
303.3  General filing procedures.
303.4  Computation of time.
303.5  Effect of Community Reinvestment Act performance on filings.
303.6  Investigations and examinations.
303.7  Public notice requirements.
303.8  Public access to filing.
303.9  Comments.
303.10  Hearings and other meetings.
303.11  Decisions.
303.12  Waivers.
303.13  [Reserved]
303.14  Being ``engaged in the business of receiving deposits other than 
          trust funds.''
303.15  Certain limited liability companies deemed incorporated under 
          State law.
303.16-303.19  [Reserved]

                       Subpart B_Deposit Insurance

303.20  Scope.
303.21  Filing procedures.
303.22  Processing.
303.23  Public notice requirements.
303.24  Application for deposit insurance for an interim institution.
303.25  Continuation of deposit insurance upon withdrawing from 
          membership in the Federal Reserve System.
303.26-303.39  [Reserved]

 Subpart C_Establishment and Relocation of Domestic Branches and Offices

303.40  Scope.
303.41  Definitions.
303.42  Filing procedures.
303.43  Processing.
303.44  Public notice requirements.
303.45  Special provisions.
303.46  Financial education programs that include the provision of bank 
          products and services.
303.47-303.59  [Reserved]

                      Subpart D_Merger Transactions

303.60  Scope.
303.61  Definitions.
303.62  Transactions requiring prior approval.
303.63  Filing procedures.
303.64  Processing.
303.65  Public notice requirements.
303.66-303.79  [Reserved]

                  Subpart E_Change in Bank Control Act

303.80  Scope.
303.81  Definitions.
303.82  Transactions that require prior notice.
303.83  Transactions that require notice, but not prior notice.
303.84  Transactions that do not require notice.
303.85  Filing procedures.
303.86  Processing.
303.87  Public notice requirements.
303.88  Reporting of stock loans and changes in chief executive officers 
          and directors.
303.89-303.99  [Reserved]

        Subpart F_Change of Director or Senior Executive Officer

303.100  Scope.
303.101  Definitions.
303.102  Filing procedures and waiver of prior notice.
303.103  Processing.
303.104-303.119  [Reserved]

               Subpart G_Activities of Insured State Banks

303.120  Scope.
303.121  Filing procedures.
303.122  Processing.
303.123-303.139  [Reserved]

          Subpart H_Activities of Insured Savings Associations

303.140  Scope.
303.141  Filing procedures.
303.142  Processing.
303.143-303.159  [Reserved]

                  Subpart I_Mutual-to-Stock Conversions

303.160  Scope.
303.161  Filing procedures.
303.162  Waiver from compliance.
303.163  Processing.
303.164-303.179  [Reserved]

                     Subpart J_International Banking

303.180  Scope.
303.181  Definitions.
303.182  Establishing, moving or closing a foreign branch of a state 
          nonmember bank; Sec. 347.103.

[[Page 8]]

303.183  Investment by insured state nonmember banks in foreign 
          organizations; Sec. 347.108.
303.184  Moving an insured branch of a foreign bank.
303.185  Merger transactions involving foreign banks or foreign 
          organizations.
303.186  Exemptions from insurance requirement for a state branch of a 
          foreign bank; Sec. 347.206.
303.187  Approval for an insured state branch of a foreign bank to 
          conduct activities not permissible for federal branches; 
          Sec. 347.213
303.188-303.199  [Reserved]

                   Subpart K_Prompt Corrective Action

303.200  Scope.
303.201  Filing procedures.
303.202  Processing.
303.203  Applications for capital distribution.
303.204  Applicationsfor acquisitions, branching, and new lines of 
          business.
303.205  Applications for bonuses and increased compensation for senior 
          executive officers.
303.206  Application for payment of principal or interest on 
          subordinated debt.
303.207  Restricted activities for critically undercapitalized 
          institutions.
303.208-303.219  [Reserved]

   Subpart L_Section 19 of the FDI Act (Consent to Service of Persons 
                 Convicted of Certain Criminal Offenses)

303.220  Scope.
303.221  Filing procedures.
303.222  Service at another insured depository institution.
303.223  Applicant's right to hearing following denial.
303.224-303.239  [Reserved]

                         Subpart M_Other Filings

303.240  General.
303.241  Reduce or retire capital stock or capital debt instruments.
303.242  Exercise of trust powers.
303.243  Brokered deposit waivers.
303.244  Golden parachute and severance plan payments.
303.245  Waiver of liability for commonly controlled depository 
          institutions.
303.246  Conversion with diminution of capital.
303.247  Continue or resume status as an insured institution following 
          termination under section 8 of the FDI Act.
303.248  Truth in Lending Act--Relief from reimbursement.
303.2490  Management official interlocks.
303.250  Modification of conditions.
303.251  Extension of time.
303.252-303.259  [Reserved]

Subpart N [Reserved]

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 378, 1464, 1813, 1815, 1817, 1818, 1819(a) 
(Seventh and Tenth), 1820, 1823, 1828, 1831a, 1831e, 1831o, 1831p-1, 
1831w, 1835a, 1843(l), 3104, 3105, 3108, 3207, 5414; 15 U.S.C. 1601-
1607.

    Source: 67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 303.0  Scope.

    (a) This part describes the procedures to be followed by both the 
FDIC and applicants with respect to applications, requests, or notices 
(filings) required to be filed by statute or regulation. Additional 
details concerning processing are explained in related FDIC statements 
of policy.
    (b) Additional application procedures may be found in the following 
FDIC regulations:
    (1) 12 CFR part 327--Assessments (Request for review of assessment 
risk classification);
    (2) 12 CFR part 328--Advertisement of Membership (Application for 
temporary waiver of advertising requirements);
    (3) 12 CFR part 345--Community Reinvestment (CRA strategic plans and 
requests for designation as a wholesale or limited purpose institution);



                Subpart A_Rules of General Applicability



Sec. 303.1  Scope.

    Subpart A prescribes the general procedures for submitting filings 
to the FDIC which are required by statute or regulation. This subpart 
also prescribes the procedures to be followed by the FDIC, applicants 
and interested parties during the process of considering a filing, 
including public notice and comment. This subpart explains the 
availability of expedited processing for eligible depository 
institutions (defined in Sec. 303.2(r)). Certain terms used throughout 
this part are also defined in this subpart.



Sec. 303.2  Definitions.

    Except as modified or otherwise defined in this part, terms used in 
this part that are defined in the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1811 et seq.) have the meanings provided in the

[[Page 9]]

Federal Deposit Insurance Act. Additional definitions of terms used in 
this part are as follows:
    (a) Act or FDI Act means the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1811 et seq.).
    (b) Adjusted part 325 total assets means adjusted 12 CFR part 325 or 
part 324, as applicable, total assets as calculated and reflected in the 
FDIC's Report of Examination.
    (c) Adverse comment means any objection, protest, or other adverse 
written statement submitted by an interested party relative to a filing. 
The term adverse comment shall not include any comment concerning the 
Community Reinvestment Act (CRA), fair lending, consumer protection, or 
civil rights that the appropriate regional director or designee 
determines to be frivolous (for example, raising issues between the 
commenter and the applicant that have been resolved). The term adverse 
comment also shall not include any other comment that the appropriate 
regional director or designee determines to be frivolous (for example, a 
non-substantive comment submitted primarily as a means of delaying 
action on the filing).
    (d) Amended order to pay means an order to forfeit and pay civil 
money penalties, the amount of which has been changed from that assessed 
in the original notice of assessment of civil money penalties.
    (e) Applicant means a person or entity that submits a filing to the 
FDIC.
    (f) Application means a submission requesting FDIC approval to 
engage in various corporate activities and transactions.
    (g) Appropriate FDIC region and appropriate regional director mean, 
respectively, the FDIC region and the FDIC regional director which the 
FDIC designates as follows:
    (1) When an institution or proposed institution that is the subject 
of a filing or administrative action is not and will not be part of a 
group of related institutions, the appropriate FDIC region for the 
institution and any individual associated with the institution is the 
FDIC region in which the institution or proposed institution is or will 
be located, and the appropriate regional director is the regional 
director for that region; or
    (2) When an institution or proposed institution that is the subject 
of a filing or administrative action is or will be part of a group of 
related institutions, the appropriate FDIC region for the institution 
and any individual associated with the institution is the FDIC region in 
which the group's major policy and decision makers are located, or any 
other region the FDIC designates on a case-by-case basis, and the 
appropriate regional director is the regional director for that region.
    (h) Associate director means any associate director of the Division 
of Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC) or, in the event such title 
become obsolete, any official of equivalent authority within the 
division.
    (i) Book capital means total equity capital which is comprised of 
perpetual preferred stock, common stock, surplus, undivided profits and 
capital reserves, as those items are defined in the instructions of the 
Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council (FFIEC) for the 
preparation of Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income for insured 
banks.
    (j) Comment means any written statement of fact or opinion submitted 
by an interested party relative to a filing.
    (k) Corporation or FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation.
    (l) CRA protest means any adverse comment from the public related to 
a pending filing which raises a negative issue relative to the Community 
Reinvestment Act (CRA) (12 U.S.C. 2901 et seq.), whether or not it is 
labeled a protest and whether or not a hearing is requested.
    (m) Deputy director means the deputy director of the Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC) or, in the event such title 
become obsolete, any official of equivalent or higher authority within 
the division.
    (n) Deputy regional director means any deputy regional director of 
the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC) or, in the 
event such title become obsolete, any official of equivalent authority 
within the same FDIC region of DSC.

[[Page 10]]

    (o) Appropriate FDIC office means the office designated by the 
appropriate regional director or designee.
    (p) DSC means the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection 
or, in the event the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection is 
reorganized, such successor division.
    (q) Director means the Director of the Division of Supervision and 
Consumer Protection (DSC) or, in the event such title become obsolete, 
any official of equivalent or higher authority within the division.
    (r) Eligible depository institution means a depository institution 
that meets the following criteria:
    (1) Received an FDIC-assigned composite rating of 1 or 2 under the 
Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System (UFIRS) as a result of its 
most recent federal or state examination;
    (2) Received a satisfactory or better Community Reinvestment Act 
(CRA) rating from its primary federal regulator at its most recent 
examination, if the depository institution is subject to examination 
under part 345 of this chapter;
    (3) Received a compliance rating of 1 or 2 from its primary federal 
regulator at its most recent examination;
    (4) Is well-capitalized as defined in the appropriate capital 
regulation and guidance of the institution's primary federal regulator; 
and
    (5) Is not subject to a cease and desist order, consent order, 
prompt corrective action directive, written agreement, memorandum of 
understanding, or other administrative agreement with its primary 
federal regulator or chartering authority.
    (s) Filing means an application, notice or request submitted to the 
FDIC under this part.
    (t) General Counsel means the head of the Legal Division of the FDIC 
or any official within the Legal Division exercising equivalent 
authority for purposes of this part.
    (u) Insider means a person who is or is proposed to be a director, 
officer, organizer, or incorporator of an applicant; a shareholder who 
directly or indirectly controls 10 percent or more of any class of the 
applicant's outstanding voting stock; or the associates or interests of 
any such person.
    (v) Institution-affiliated party shall have the same meaning as 
provided in section 3(u) of the Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(u)).
    (w) NEPA means the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (42 
U.S.C. 4321 et seq.).
    (x) NHPA means the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16 
U.S.C. 470 et seq.).
    (y) Notice means a submission notifying the FDIC that a depository 
institution intends to engage in or has commenced certain corporate 
activities or transactions.
    (z) Notice to primary regulator means the notice described in 
section 8(a)(2)(A) of the Act concerning termination of deposit 
insurance (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(2)(A)).
    (aa) Regional counsel means a regional counsel of the Legal Division 
or, in the event the title becomes obsolete, any official of equivalent 
authority within the Legal Division.
    (bb) Regional director means any regional director in the Division 
of Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC), or in the event such title 
become obsolete, any official of equivalent authority within the 
division.
    (cc) [Reserved]
    (dd) Standard conditions means the conditions that the FDIC may 
impose as a routine matter when approving a filing, whether or not the 
applicant has agreed to their inclusion. The following conditions, or 
variations thereof, are standard conditions:
    (1) That the applicant has obtained all necessary and final 
approvals from the appropriate federal or state authority or other 
appropriate authority;
    (2) That if the transaction does not take effect within a specified 
time period, or unless, in the meantime, a request for an extension of 
time has been approved, the consent granted shall expire at the end of 
the specified time period;
    (3) That until the conditional commitment of the FDIC becomes 
effective, the FDIC retains the right to alter, suspend or withdraw its 
commitment should any interim development be deemed to warrant such 
action; and
    (4) In the case of a merger transaction (as defined in  303.61(a) 
of this

[[Page 11]]

part), including a corporate reorganization, that the proposed 
transaction not be consummated before the 30th calendar day (or shorter 
time period as may be prescribed by the FDIC with the concurrence of the 
Attorney General) after the date of the order approving the merger 
transaction.
    (ee) Tier 1 capital shall have the same meaning as provided in 
Sec. 325.2(v) of this chapter (12 CFR 325.2(v)) or Sec. 324.2, as 
applicable.
    (ff) Total assets shall have the same meaning as provided in 
Sec. 325.2(x) of this chapter (12 CFR 325.2(x)) or Sec. 324.401(g), as 
applicable.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 50459, Aug. 21, 2003; 
78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 303.3  General filing procedures.

    Unless stated otherwise, filings should be submitted to the 
appropriate FDIC office. Forms and instructions for submitting filings 
may be obtained from any FDIC regional director. If no form is 
prescribed, the filing should be in writing; be signed by the applicant 
or a duly authorized agent; and contain a concise statement of the 
action requested. For specific filing and content requirements, consult 
the appropriate subparts of this part. The FDIC may require the 
applicant to submit additional information.



Sec. 303.4  Computation of time.

    For purposes of this part, and except as otherwise specifically 
provided, the FDIC begins computing the relevant period on the day after 
an event occurs (e.g., the day after a substantially complete filing is 
received by the FDIC or the day after publication begins) through the 
last day of the relevant period. When the last day is a Saturday, Sunday 
or federal holiday, the period runs until the end of the next business 
day.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 50459, Aug. 21, 2003]



Sec. 303.5  Effect of Community Reinvestment Act performance on
filings.

    Among other factors, the FDIC takes into account the record of 
performance under the Community Reinvestment Act (CRA) of each applicant 
in considering a filing for approval of:
    (a) The establishment of a domestic branch;
    (b) The relocation of the bank's main office or a domestic branch;
    (c) The relocation of an insured branch of a foreign bank;
    (d) A transaction subject to the Bank Merger Act; and
    (e) Deposit insurance.



Sec. 303.6  Investigations and examinations.

    The FDIC may examine or investigate and evaluate facts related to 
any filing under this chapter to the extent necessary to reach an 
informed decision and take any action necessary or appropriate under the 
circumstances.



Sec. 303.7  Public notice requirements.

    (a) General. The public must be provided with prior notice of a 
filing to establish a domestic branch, relocate a domestic branch or the 
main office, relocate an insured branch of a foreign bank, engage in a 
merger transaction, initiate a change of control transaction, or request 
deposit insurance. The public has the right to comment on, or to 
protest, these types of proposed transactions during the relevant 
comment period. In order to fully apprise the public of this right, an 
applicant shall publish a public notice of its filing in a newspaper of 
general circulation. For specific publication requirements, consult 
subparts B (Deposit Insurance), C (Branches and Relocations), D (Merger 
Transactions), E (Change in Bank Control), and J (International Banking) 
of this part.
    (b) Confirmation of publication. The applicant shall mail or 
otherwise deliver a copy of the newspaper notice to the appropriate FDIC 
office as part of its filing, or, if a copy is not available at the time 
of filing, promptly after publication.
    (c) Content of notice. (1) The public notice referred to in 
paragraph (a) of this section shall consist of the following:
    (i) Name and address of the applicant(s). In the case of an 
application for deposit insurance for a de novo bank, include the names 
of all organizers or

[[Page 12]]

incorporators. In the case of an application to establish a branch, 
include the location of the proposed branch or, in the case of an 
application to relocate a branch or main office, include the current and 
proposed address of the office. In the case of a merger application, 
include the names of all parties to the transaction. In the case of a 
notice of acquisition of control, include the name(s) of the acquiring 
parties. In the case of an application to relocate an insured branch of 
a foreign bank, include the current and proposed address of the branch.
    (ii) Type of filing being made;
    (iii) Name of the depository institution(s) that is the subject 
matter of the filing;
    (iv) That the public may submit comments to the appropriate FDIC 
regional director;
    (v) The address of the appropriate FDIC office where comments may be 
sent (the same location where the filing will be made);
    (vi) The closing date of the public comment period as specified in 
the appropriate subpart; and
    (vii) That the nonconfidential portions of the application are on 
file in the appropriate FDIC office and are available for public 
inspection during regular business hours; photocopies of the 
nonconfidential portion of the application file will be made available 
upon request.
    (2) The requirements of paragraphs (c)(1)(iv) through (vii) of this 
section may be satisfied through use of the following notice:

Any person wishing to comment on this application may file his or her 
comments in writing with the regional director of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation at the appropriate FDIC office [insert address of 
office] not later than [insert closing date of the public comment period 
specified in the appropriate subpart of part 303]. The non-confidential 
portions of the application are on file at the appropriate FDIC office 
and are available for public inspection during regular business hours. 
Photocopies of the nonconfidential portion of the application file will 
be made available upon request.

    (d) Multiple transactions. The FDIC may consider more than one 
transaction, or a series of transactions, to be a single filing for 
purposes of the publication requirements of this section. When 
publishing a single public notice for multiple transactions, the 
applicant shall explain in the public notice how the transactions are 
related. The closing date of the comment period shall be the closing 
date of the longest public comment period that applies to any of the 
related transactions.
    (e) Joint public notices. For a transaction subject to public notice 
requirements by the FDIC and another federal or state banking authority, 
the FDIC will accept publication of a single joint notice containing all 
the information required by both the FDIC and the other federal agency 
or state banking authority, provided that the notice states that 
comments must be submitted to the appropriate FDIC office and, if 
applicable, the other federal or state banking authority.
    (f) Where public notice is required, the FDIC may determine on a 
case-by-case basis that unusual circumstances surrounding a particular 
filing warrant modification of the publication requirements.



Sec. 303.8  Public access to filing.

    (a) General. For filings subject to a public notice requirement, any 
person may inspect or request a copy of the non-confidential portions of 
a filing (the public file) until 180 days following final disposition of 
a filing. Following the 180-day period, non-confidential portions of an 
application file will be made available in accordance with ' 303.8(c). 
The public file generally consists of portions of the filing, supporting 
data, supplementary information, and comments submitted by interested 
persons (if any) to the extent that the documents have not been afforded 
confidential treatment. To view or request photocopies of the public 
file, an oral or written request should be submitted to the appropriate 
FDIC office. The public file will be produced for review not more than 
one business day after receipt by the appropriate FDIC office of the 
request (either written or oral) to see the file. The FDIC may impose a 
fee for photocopying in accordance with Sec. 309.5(f) of this chapter at 
the rates the FDIC publishes annually in the Federal Register.

[[Page 13]]

    (b) Confidential treatment. (1) The applicant may request that 
specific information be treated as confidential. The following 
information generally is considered confidential:
    (i) Personal information, the release of which would constitute a 
clearly unwarranted invasion of privacy;
    (ii) Commercial or financial information, the disclosure of which 
could result in substantial competitive harm to the submitter; and
    (iii) Information, the disclosure of which could seriously affect 
the financial condition of any depository institution.
    (2) If an applicant requests confidential treatment for information 
that the FDIC does not consider to be confidential, the FDIC may include 
that information in the public file after notifying the applicant. On 
its own initiative, the FDIC may determine that certain information 
should be treated as confidential and withhold that information from the 
public file.
    (c) FOIA requests. A written request for information withheld from 
the public file, or copies of the public file following closure of the 
file 180 days after final disposition, should be submitted pursuant to 
the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552) and part 309 of this 
chapter to the FDIC, Attn: FOIA/Privacy Group, Legal Division, 550 17th 
Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429.



Sec. 303.9  Comments.

    (a) Submission of comments. For filings subject to a public notice 
requirement, any person may submit comments to the appropriate FDIC 
regional director during the comment period.
    (b) Comment period--(1) General. Consult appropriate subparts of 
this part for the comment period applicable to a particular filing.
    (2) Extension. The FDIC may extend or reopen the comment period if:
    (i) The applicant fails to file all required information on a timely 
basis to permit review by the public or makes a request for confidential 
treatment not granted by the FDIC that delays the public availability of 
that information;
    (ii) Any person requesting an extension of time satisfactorily 
demonstrates to the FDIC that additional time is necessary to develop 
factual information that the FDIC determines may materially affect the 
application; or
    (iii) The FDIC determines that other good cause exists.
    (3) Solicitation of comments. Whenever appropriate, the appropriate 
regional director may solicit comments from any person or institution 
which might have an interest in or be affected by the pending filing.
    (4) Applicant response. The FDIC will provide copies of all comments 
received to the applicant and may give the applicant an opportunity to 
respond.



Sec. 303.10  Hearings and other meetings.

    (a) Matters covered. This section covers hearings and other 
proceedings in connection with filings and determinations for or by:
    (1) Deposit insurance by a proposed new depository institution or 
operating non-insured institution;
    (2) An insured state nonmember bank to establish a domestic branch 
or to relocate a main office or domestic branch;
    (3) Relocation of an insured branch of a foreign bank;
    (4)(i) Merger transaction which requires the FDIC's prior approval 
under the Bank Merger Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(c));
    (ii) Except as otherwise expressly provided, the provisions of this 
Sec. 303.10 shall not be applicable to any proposed merger transaction 
which the FDIC Board of Directors determines must be acted upon 
immediately to prevent the probable failure of one of the institutions 
involved, or must be handled with expeditious action due to an existing 
emergency condition, as permitted by the Bank Merger Act (12 U.S.C. 
1828(c)(6));
    (5) Nullification of a decision on a filing; and
    (6) Any other purpose or matter which the FDIC Board of Directors in 
its sole discretion deems appropriate.
    (b) Hearing requests. (1) Any person may submit a written request 
for a hearing on a filing:
    (i) To the appropriate regional director before the end of the 
comment period; or
    (ii) To the appropriate regional director, pursuant to a notice to 
nullify a

[[Page 14]]

decision on a filing issued pursuant to Sec. 303.11(g)(2)(i) or (ii).


(2) The request must describe the nature of the issues or facts to be 
presented and the reasons why written submissions would be insufficient 
to make an adequate presentation of those issues or facts to the FDIC. A 
person requesting a hearing shall simultaneously submit a copy of the 
request to the applicant.

    (c) Action on a hearing request. The appropriate regional director, 
after consultation with the Legal Division, may grant or deny a request 
for a hearing and may limit the issues that he or she deems relevant or 
material. The FDIC generally grants a hearing request only if it 
determines that written submissions would be insufficient or that a 
hearing otherwise would be in the public interest.
    (d) Denial of a hearing request. If the appropriate regional 
director, after consultation with the Legal Division, denies a hearing 
request, he or she shall notify the person requesting the hearing of the 
reason for the denial. A decision to deny a hearing request shall be a 
final agency determination and is not appealable.
    (e) FDIC procedures prior to the hearing--(1) Notice of hearing. The 
FDIC shall issue a notice of hearing if it grants a request for a 
hearing or orders a hearing because it is in the public interest. The 
notice of hearing shall state the subject and date of the filing, the 
time and place of the hearing, and the issues to be addressed. The FDIC 
shall send a copy of the notice of hearing to the applicant, to the 
person requesting the hearing, and to anyone else requesting a copy.
    (2) The presiding officer shall be the regional director or designee 
or such other person as may be named by the Board or the Director. The 
presiding officer is responsible for conducting the hearing and 
determining all procedural questions not governed by this section.
    (f) Participation in the hearing. Any person who wishes to appear 
(participant) shall notify the appropriate regional director of his or 
her intent to participate in the hearing no later than 10 days from the 
date that the FDIC issues the Notice of Hearing. At least 5 days before 
the hearing, each participant shall submit to the appropriate regional 
director, as well as to the applicant and any other person as required 
by the FDIC, the names of witnesses, a statement describing the proposed 
testimony of each witness, and one copy of each exhibit the participant 
intends to present.
    (g) Transcripts. The FDIC shall arrange for a hearing transcript. 
The person requesting the hearing and the applicant each shall bear the 
cost of one copy of the transcript for his or her use unless such cost 
is waived by the presiding officer and incurred by the FDIC.
    (h) Conduct of the hearing--(1) Presentations. Subject to the 
rulings of the presiding officer, the applicant and participants may 
make opening and closing statements and present and examine witnesses, 
material, and data.
    (2) Information submitted. Any person presenting material shall 
furnish one copy to the FDIC, one copy to the applicant, and one copy to 
each participant.
    (3) Laws not applicable to hearings. The Administrative Procedure 
Act (5 U.S.C. 551 et seq.), the Federal Rules of Evidence (28 U.S.C. 
Appendix), the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure (28 U.S.C. Rule 1 et 
seq.), and the FDIC's Rules of Practice and Procedure (12 CFR part 308) 
do not govern hearings under this Sec. 303.10.
    (i) Closing the hearing record. At the applicant's or any 
participant's request, or at the FDIC's discretion, the FDIC may keep 
the hearing record open for up to 10 days following the FDIC's receipt 
of the transcript. The FDIC shall resume processing the filing after the 
record closes.
    (j) Disposition and notice thereof. The presiding officer shall make 
a recommendation to the FDIC within 20 days following the date the 
hearing and record on the proceeding are closed. The FDIC shall notify 
the applicant and all participants of the final disposition of a filing 
and shall provide a statement of the reasons for the final disposition.
    (k) Computation of time. In computing periods of time under this 
section, the provisions of Sec. 308.12 of the FDIC's

[[Page 15]]

Rules of Practice and Procedure (12 CFR 308.12) shall apply.
    (l) Informal proceedings. The FDIC may arrange for an informal 
proceeding with an applicant and other interested parties in connection 
with a filing, either upon receipt of a written request for such a 
meeting made during the comment period, or upon the FDIC's own 
initiative. No later than 10 days prior to an informal proceeding, the 
appropriate regional director shall notify the applicant and each person 
who requested a hearing or oral presentation of the date, time, and 
place of the proceeding. The proceeding may assume any form, including a 
meeting with FDIC representatives at which participants will be asked to 
present their views orally. The regional director may hold separate 
meetings with each of the participants.
    (m) Authority retained by FDIC Board of Directors to modify 
procedures. The FDIC Board of Directors may delegate authority by 
resolution on a case-by-case basis to the presiding officer to adopt 
different procedures in individual matters and on such terms and 
conditions as the Board of Directors determines in its discretion. The 
resolution shall be made available for public inspection and copying in 
the Office of the General Counsel, Executive Secretary Section under the 
Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552(a)(2)).



Sec. 303.11  Decisions.

    (a) General procedures. The FDIC may approve, conditionally approve, 
deny, or not object to a filing after appropriate review and 
consideration of the record. The FDIC will promptly notify the applicant 
and any person who makes a written request of the final disposition of a 
filing. If the FDIC denies a filing, the FDIC will immediately notify 
the applicant in writing of the reasons for the denial.
    (b) Authority retained by FDIC Board of Directors to modify 
procedures. In acting on any filing under this part, the FDIC Board of 
Directors may by resolution adopt procedures which differ from those 
contained in this part when it deems it necessary or in the public 
interest to do so. The resolution shall be made available for public 
inspection and copying in the Office of the General Counsel, Executive 
Secretary Section under the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 
552(a)(2)).
    (c) Expedited processing. (1) A filing submitted by an eligible 
depository institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) will receive 
expedited processing as specified in the appropriate subparts of this 
part unless the FDIC determines to remove the filing from expedited 
processing for any of the reasons set forth in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section. Except for filings made pursuant to subpart J (International 
Banking), expedited processing will not be available for any filing that 
the appropriate regional director does not have delegated authority to 
approve.
    (2) Removal of filing from expedited processing. The FDIC may remove 
a filing from expedited processing at any time prior to final 
disposition if:
    (i) For filings subject to public notice under Sec. 303.7, an 
adverse comment is received that warrants additional investigation or 
review;
    (ii) For filings subject to evaluation of CRA performance under 
Sec. 303.5, a CRA protest is received that warrants additional 
investigation or review, or the appropriate regional director determines 
that the filing presents a significant CRA or compliance concern;
    (iii) For any filing, the appropriate regional director determines 
that the filing presents a significant supervisory concern, or raises a 
significant legal or policy issue; or
    (iv) For any filing, the appropriate regional director determines 
that other good cause exists for removal.
    (3) For purposes of this section, a significant CRA concern 
includes, but is not limited to, a determination by the appropriate 
regional director that, although a depository institution may have an 
institution-wide rating of satisfactory or better, a depository 
institution's CRA rating is less than satisfactory in a state or multi-
state metropolitan statistical area, or a depository institution's CRA 
performance is less than satisfactory in a metropolitan statistical area 
as defined in 12 CFR 345.12 (MSA) or in the non-MSA portion of a state 
in which it seeks to expand through approval of an application for a 
deposit facility as defined in 12 U.S.C. 2902(3).

[[Page 16]]

    (4) If the FDIC determines that it is necessary to remove a filing 
from expedited processing pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section, 
the FDIC promptly will provide the applicant with a written explanation
    (d) Multiple transactions. If the FDIC is considering related 
transactions, some or all of which have been granted expedited 
processing, then the longest processing time for any of the related 
transactions shall govern for purposes of approval.
    (e) Abandonment of filing. A filing must contain all information set 
forth in the applicable subpart of this part. To the extent necessary to 
evaluate a filing, the FDIC may require an applicant to provide 
additional information. If information requested by the FDIC is not 
provided within the time period specified by the agency, the FDIC may 
deem the filing abandoned and shall provide written notification to the 
applicant and any interested parties that submitted comments to the FDIC 
that the file has been closed.
    (f) Appeals and requests for reconsideration--(1) General. Appeal 
procedures for a denial of a change in bank control (subpart E), change 
in senior executive officer or board of directors (subpart F) or denial 
of an application pursuant to section 19 of the FDI Act (subpart L) are 
contained in 12 CFR part 308, subparts D, L, and M, respectively. For 
all other filings covered by this chapter for which appeal procedures 
are not provided by regulation or other written guidance, the procedures 
specified in paragraphs (f) (2) and (3) of this section shall apply. A 
decision to deny a request for a hearing is a final agency determination 
and is not appealable.
    (2) Filing procedures. Within 15 days of receipt of notice from the 
FDIC that its filing has been denied, any applicant may file a request 
for reconsideration with the appropriate regional director.
    (3) Content of filing. A request for reconsideration must contain 
the following information:
    (i) A resolution of the board of directors of the applicant 
authorizing filing of the request if the applicant is a corporation, or 
a letter signed by the individual(s) filing the request if the applicant 
is not a corporation;
    (ii) Relevant, substantive information that for good cause was not 
previously set forth in the filing; and
    (iii) Specific reasons why the FDIC should reconsider its prior 
decision.
    (4)-(5) [Reserved]
    (6) Processing. The FDIC will notify the applicant whether 
reconsideration will be granted or denied within 15 days of receipt of a 
request for reconsideration. If a request for reconsideration is granted 
pursuant to Sec. 303.11(f), the FDIC will notify the applicant of the 
final agency decision on such filing within 60 days of its receipt of 
the request for reconsideration.
    (g) Nullification, withdrawal, revocation, amendment, and suspension 
of decisions on filings--(1) Grounds for action. Except as otherwise 
provided by law or regulation, the FDIC may nullify, withdraw, revoke, 
amend or suspend a decision on a filing if it becomes aware at anytime:
    (i) Of any material misrepresentation or omission related to the 
filing or of any material change in circumstance that occurred prior to 
the consummation of the transaction or commencement of the activity 
authorized by the decision on the filing; or
    (ii) That the decision on the filing is contrary to law or 
regulation or was granted due to clerical or administrative error.
    (iii) Any person responsible for a material misrepresentation or 
omission in a filing or supporting materials may be subject to an 
enforcement action and other penalties, including criminal penalties 
provided in title 18 of the United States Code.
    (2) Notice of intent and temporary order. (i) Except as provided in 
Sec. 303.11(g)(2)(ii), before taking action under this Sec. 303.11(g), 
the FDIC shall issue and serve on an applicant written notice of its 
intent to take such action. A notice of intent to act on a filing shall 
include:
    (A) The reasons for the proposed action; and
    (B) The date by which the applicant may file a written response with 
the FDIC.
    (ii) The FDIC may issue a temporary order on a decision on a filing 
without providing an applicant a prior notice of intent if the FDIC 
determines that:

[[Page 17]]

    (A) It is necessary to reevaluate the impact of a change in 
circumstance prior to the consummation of the transaction or 
commencement of the activity authorized by the decision on the filing; 
or
    (B) The activity authorized by the filing may pose a threat to the 
interests of the depository institution's depositors or may threaten to 
impair public confidence in the depository institution.
    (iii) A temporary order shall provide the applicant with an 
opportunity to make a written response in accordance with 
Sec. 303.11(g)(3) of this section.
    (3) Response to notice of intent or temporary order. An applicant 
may file a written response to a notice of intent or a temporary order 
within 15 days from the date of service of the notice or temporary 
order. The written response should include:
    (i) An explanation of why the proposed action or temporary order is 
not warranted; and
    (ii)(A) Any other relevant information, mitigation circumstance, 
documentation, or other evidence in support of the applicant's position. 
An applicant may also request a hearing under Sec. 303.10.
    (B) Failure by an applicant to file a written response with the FDIC 
to a notice of intent or a temporary order within the specified time 
period, shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity to respond and 
shall constitute consent to a final order under this paragraph (g). The 
FDIC shall consider any such response, if filed in a timely manner, 
within 30 days of receiving the response.
    (4) Effective date. All orders issued pursuant to this section shall 
become effective immediately upon issuance unless otherwise stated 
therein.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 50459, Aug. 21, 2003]



Sec. 303.12  Waivers.

    (a) The Board of Directors, of the FDIC (Board) may, for good cause 
and to the extent permitted by statute, waiver the applicability of any 
provision of this chapter.
    (b) The provisions of this chapter may be suspended, revoked, 
amended or waived for good cause shown, in whole or in part, at any time 
by the Board, subject to the provisions of the Administrative Procedure 
Act and the provisions of this chapter. Any provision of the rules may 
be waived by the Board on its own motion or on petition if good cause 
thereof is shown.

[68 FR 50459, Aug. 21, 2003]



Sec. 303.13  [Reserved]



Sec. 303.14  Being ``engaged in the business of receiving deposits
other than trust funds.''

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this 
section, a depository institution shall be ``engaged in the business of 
receiving deposits other than trust funds'' only if it maintains one or 
more non-trust deposit accounts in the minimum aggregate amount of 
$500,000.
    (b) An applicant for federal deposit insurance under section 5 of 
the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1815(a), shall be deemed to be ``engaged in the 
business of receiving deposits other than trust funds'' from the date 
that the FDIC approves deposit insurance for the institution until one 
year after it opens for business.
    (c) Any depository institution that fails to satisfy the minimum 
deposit standard specified in paragraph (a) of this section as of two 
consecutive call report dates (i.e., March 31st, June 30th, September 
30th, and December 31st) shall be subject to a determination by the FDIC 
that the institution is not ``engaged in the business of receiving 
deposits other than trust funds'' and to termination of its insured 
status under section 8(p) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1818(p). For 
purposes of this paragraph, the first three call report dates after the 
institution opens for business are excluded.
    (d) Notwithstanding any failure by an insured depository institution 
to satisfy the minimum deposit standard in paragraph (a) of this 
section, the institution shall continue to be ``engaged in the business 
of receiving deposits other than trust funds'' for purposes of section 3 
of the FDI Act until the institution's insured status is terminated by 
the FDIC pursuant to a proceeding under section 8(a) or section 8(p) of 
the FDI Act. 12 U.S.C. 1818(a) or 1818(p).

[[Page 18]]



Sec. 303.15  Certain limited liability companies deemed incorporated 
under State law.

    (a) For purposes of the definition of ``State bank'' in 12 U.S.C. 
1813(a)(2) and this Chapter, a banking institution that is chartered as 
a limited liability company (LLC) under the law of any State is deemed 
to be ``incorporated'' under the law of the State, if
    (1) The institution is not subject to automatic termination, 
dissolution, or suspension upon the happening of some event (including, 
e.g., the death, disability, bankruptcy, expulsion, or withdrawal of an 
owner of the institution), other than the passage of time;
    (2) The exclusive authority to manage the institution is vested in a 
board of managers or directors that is elected or appointed by the 
owners, and that operates in substantially the same manner as, and has 
substantially the same rights, powers, privileges, duties, 
responsibilities, as a board of directors of a bank chartered as a 
corporation in the State;
    (3) Neither State law, nor the institution's operating agreement, 
bylaws, or other organizational documents provide that an owner of the 
institution is liable for the debts, liabilities, and obligations of the 
institution in excess of the amount of the owner's investment; and
    (4) Neither State law, nor the institution's operating agreement, 
bylaws, or other organizational documents require the consent of any 
other owner of the institution in order for an owner to transfer an 
ownership interest in the institution, including voting rights.
    (b) For purposes of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act and this 
Chapter,
    (1) Each of the terms ``stockholder'' and ``shareholder'' includes 
an owner of any interest in a bank chartered as an LLC, including a 
member or participant;
    (2) The term ``director'' includes a manager or director of a bank 
chartered as an LLC, or other person who has, with respect to such a 
bank, authority substantially similar to that of a director of a 
corporation;
    (3) The term ``officer'' includes an officer of a bank chartered as 
an LLC, or other person who has, with respect to such a bank, authority 
substantially similar to that of an officer of a corporation; and
    (4) Each of the terms ``voting stock,'' ``voting shares,'' and 
``voting securities'' includes ownership interests in a bank chartered 
as an LLC, as well as any certificates or other evidence of such 
ownership interests.

[68 FR 7308, Feb. 13, 2003]



Secs. 303.16-303.19  [Reserved]



                       Subpart B_Deposit Insurance



Sec. 303.20  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth the procedures for applying for deposit 
insurance for a proposed depository institution or an operating 
noninsured depository institution under section 5 of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1815). It also sets forth the procedures for requesting 
continuation of deposit insurance for a state-chartered bank withdrawing 
from membership in the Federal Reserve System and for interim 
institutions chartered to facilitate a merger transaction. Each bank 
that results from the conversion of a Federal savings association into 
multiple banks pursuant to section 5(i)(5) of the Home Owners' Loan Act, 
12 U.S.C. 1464(i)(5), is treated as a proposed depository institution or 
a de novo institution, as appropriate, for purposes of this subpart.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 73 FR 2145, Jan. 14, 2008]



Sec. 303.21  Filing procedures.

    (a) Applications for deposit insurance shall be filed with the 
appropriate FDIC office. The relevant application forms and instructions 
for applying for deposit insurance for an existing or proposed 
depository institution may be obtained from any FDIC regional director.
    (b) An application for deposit insurance for an interim depository 
institution shall be filed and processed in accordance with the 
procedures set forth in Sec. 303.24, subject to the provisions of 
Sec. 303.62(b)(2) regarding deposit insurance for interim institutions. 
An interim institution is defined as a state-

[[Page 19]]

or federally-chartered depository institution that does not operate 
independently but exists solely as a vehicle to accomplish a merger 
transaction.
    (c) A request for continuation of deposit insurance upon withdrawing 
from membership in the Federal Reserve System shall be in letter form 
and shall provide the information prescribed in Sec. 303.25.



Sec. 303.22  Processing.

    (a) Expedited processing for proposed institutions. (1) An 
application for deposit insurance for a proposed institution which will 
be a subsidiary of an eligible depository institution as defined in 
Sec. 303.2(r) or an eligible holding company will be acknowledged in 
writing by the FDIC and will receive expedited processing unless the 
applicant is notified in writing to the contrary and provided with the 
basis for that decision. An eligible holding company is defined as a 
bank or thrift holding company that has consolidated assets of at least 
$150 million or more; a BOPEC rating of at least ``2'' for bank holding 
companies or an above average or ``A'' rating for thrift holding 
companies; and at least 75 percent of its consolidated depository 
institution assets comprised of eligible depository institutions. The 
FDIC may remove an application from expedited processing for any of the 
reasons set forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2).
    (2) Under expedited processing, the FDIC will take action on an 
application within 60 days of receipt of a substantially complete 
application or 5 days after the expiration of the comment period 
described in Sec. 303.23, whichever is later. Final action may be 
withheld until the FDIC has assurance that permission to organize the 
proposed institution will be granted by the chartering authority. 
Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, if the FDIC does not 
act within the expedited processing period, it does not constitute an 
automatic or default approval.
    (b) Standard processing. For those applications that are not 
processed pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the applicant with written notification of the final action when the 
decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 50459, Aug. 21, 2003]



Sec. 303.23  Public notice requirements.

    (a) De novo institutions and operating noninsured institutions. The 
applicant shall publish a notice as prescribed in Sec. 303.7 in a 
newspaper of general circulation in the community in which the main 
office of the depository institution is or will be located. Notice shall 
be published as close as practicable to, but no sooner than five days 
before, the date the application is mailed or delivered to the 
appropriate FDIC office. Comments by interested parties must be received 
by the appropriate regional director within 30 days following the date 
of publication, unless the comment period has been extended or reopened 
in accordance with Sec. 303.9(b)(2).
    (b) Exceptions to public notice requirements. No publication shall 
be required in connection with the granting of insurance to a new 
depository institution established pursuant to the resolution of a 
depository institution in default, or to an interim depository 
institution formed solely to facilitate a merger transaction, or for a 
request for continuation of federal deposit insurance by a state-
chartered bank withdrawing from membership in the Federal Reserve 
System.



Sec. 303.24  Application for deposit insurance for an interim 
institution.

    (a) Application required. Subject to Sec. 303.62(b)(2), a deposit 
insurance application is required for a state-chartered interim 
institution if the related merger transaction is subject to approval by 
a federal banking agency other than the FDIC. A separate application for 
deposit insurance for an interim institution is not required in 
connection with any merger requiring FDIC approval pursuant to subpart D 
of this part.
    (b) Content of separate application. A letter application for 
deposit insurance for an interim institution, accompanied by a copy of 
the related merger

[[Page 20]]

application, shall be filed with the appropriate FDIC office. The letter 
application shall briefly describe the transaction and contain a 
statement that deposit insurance is being requested for an interim 
institution that does not operate independently but exists solely as a 
vehicle to accomplish a merger transaction which will be reviewed by a 
federal banking agency other than the FDIC.
    (c) Processing. An application for deposit insurance for an interim 
depository institution will be acknowledged in writing by the FDIC. 
Final action will be taken within 21 days after receipt of a 
substantially complete application, unless the applicant is notified in 
writing that additional review is warranted. If the FDIC does not act 
within the expedited processing period, it does not constitute an 
automatic or default approval.



Sec. 303.25  Continuation of deposit insurance upon withdrawing 
from membership in the Federal Reserve System.

    (a) Content of application. To continue its insured status upon 
withdrawal from membership in the Federal Reserve System, a state-
chartered bank shall submit a letter application to the appropriate FDIC 
office. A complete application shall consist of the following 
information:
    (1) A copy of the letter, and any attachments thereto, sent to the 
appropriate Federal Reserve Bank setting forth the bank's intention to 
terminate its membership;
    (2) A copy of the letter from the Federal Reserve Bank acknowledging 
the bank's notice to terminate membership;
    (3) A statement regarding any anticipated changes in the bank's 
general business plan during the next 12-month period; and
    (4)(i) A statement by the bank's management that there are no 
outstanding or proposed corrective programs or supervisory agreements 
with the Federal Reserve System.
    (ii) If such programs or agreements exist, a statement by the 
applicant that its Board of Directors is willing to enter into similar 
programs or agreements with the FDIC which would become effective upon 
withdrawal from the Federal Reserve System.
    (b) Processing. An application for deposit insurance under this 
section will be acknowledged in writing by the FDIC. The FDIC shall 
notify the applicant, within 15 days of receipt of a substantially 
complete application, either that federal deposit insurance will 
continue upon termination of membership in the Federal Reserve System or 
that additional review is warranted and the applicant will be notified, 
in writing, of the FDIC's final decision regarding continuation of 
deposit insurance. If the FDIC does not act within the expedited 
processing period, it does not constitute an automatic or default 
approval.



Secs. 303.26-303.39  [Reserved]



 Subpart C_Establishment and Relocation of Domestic Branches
 and Offices



Sec. 303.40  Scope.

    (a) General. This subpart sets forth the application requirements 
and procedures for insured state nonmember banks to establish a branch, 
relocate a branch or main office, and retain existing branches after the 
interstate relocation of the main office subject to the approval by the 
FDIC pursuant to sections 13(f), 13(k), 18(d) and 44 of the FDI Act.
    (b) Merger transaction. Applications for approval of the acquisition 
and establishment of branches in connection with a merger transaction 
under section 18(c) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(c)), are processed in 
accordance with subpart D (Merger Transactions) of this part.
    (c) Insured branches of foreign banks and foreign branches of 
domestic banks. Applications regarding insured branches of foreign banks 
and foreign branches of domestic banks are processed in accordance with 
subpart J (International Banking) of this part.
    (d) Interstate acquisition of individual branch. Applications 
requesting approval of the interstate acquisition of an individual 
branch or branches located in a state other than the applicant's home 
state without the acquisition of the whole bank are treated as

[[Page 21]]

interstate bank merger transactions under section 44 of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831a(u)), and are processed in accordance with subpart D (Merger 
Transactions) of this part.



Sec. 303.41  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Branch, except as provided in this paragraph, includes any 
branch bank, branch office, additional office, or any branch place of 
business located in any State of the United States or in any territory 
of the United States, Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the Trust 
Territory of the Pacific Islands, the Virgin Islands, and the Northern 
Mariana Islands at which deposits are received or checks paid or money 
lent. A branch does not include an automated teller machine, an 
automated loan machine, a remote service unit, or a facility described 
in section 303.46. The term branch also includes the following:
    (1) A messenger service that is operated by a bank or its affiliate 
that picks up and delivers items relating to transactions in which 
deposits are received or checks paid or money lent. A messenger service 
established and operated by a non-affiliated third party generally does 
not constitute a branch for purposes of this subpart. Banks contracting 
with third parties to provide messenger services should consult with the 
FDIC to determine if the messenger service constitutes a branch.
    (2) A mobile branch, other than a messenger service, that does not 
have a single, permanent site and uses a vehicle that travels to various 
locations to enable the public to conduct banking business. A mobile 
branch may serve defined locations on a regular schedule or may serve a 
defined area at varying times and locations.
    (3) A temporary branch that operates for a limited period of time 
not to exceed one year as a public service, such as during an emergency 
or disaster situation.
    (4) A seasonal branch that operates at various periodically 
recurring intervals, such as during state and local fairs, college 
registration periods, and other similar occasions.
    (b) Branch relocation means a move within the same immediate 
neighborhood of the existing branch that does not substantially affect 
the nature of the business of the branch or the customers of the branch. 
Moving a branch to a location outside its immediate neighborhood is 
considered the closing of an existing branch and the establishment of a 
new branch. Closing of a branch is covered in the FDIC Statement of 
Policy Concerning Branch Closing Notices and Policies. 1 FDIC Law, 
Regulations, Related Acts 5391; see Sec. 309.4 (a) and (b) of this 
chapter for availability.
    (c) De novo branch means a branch of a bank which is established by 
the bank as a branch and does not become a branch of such bank as a 
result of:
    (1) The acquisition by the bank of an insured depository institution 
or a branch of an insured depository institution; or
    (2) The conversion, merger, or consolidation of any such institution 
or branch.
    (d) Home state means the state by which the bank is chartered.
    (e) Host state means a state, other than the home state of the bank, 
in which the bank maintains, or seeks to establish and maintain, a 
branch.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 73 FR 35338, June 23, 2008; 
73 FR 55432, Sept. 25, 2008]



Sec. 303.42  Filing procedures.

    (a) General. An applicant shall submit an application to the 
appropriate FDIC office on the date the notice required by Sec. 303.44 
is published, or within 5 days after the date of the last required 
publication.
    (b) Content of filing. A complete letter application shall include 
the following information:
    (1) A statement of intent to establish a branch, or to relocate the 
main office or a branch;
    (2) The exact location of the proposed site including the street 
address. With regard to messenger services, specify the geographic area 
in which the services will be available. With regard to a mobile branch 
specify the community or communities in which the vehicle will operate 
and the manner in which it will be used;
    (3) Details concerning any involvement in the proposal by an insider 
of

[[Page 22]]

the bank as defined in Sec. 303.2(u), including any financial 
arrangements relating to fees, the acquisition of property, leasing of 
property, and construction contracts;
    (4) A statement on the impact of the proposal on the human 
environment, including, information on compliance with local zoning laws 
and regulations and the effect on traffic patterns for purposes of 
complying with the applicable provisions of the NEPA and the FDIC 
Statement of Policy on NEPA (1 FDIC Law, Regulations, Related Acts 5185; 
see Sec. 309.4 (a) and (b) of this chapter for availability);
    (5) A statement as to whether or not the site is eligible for 
inclusion in the National Register of Historic Places for purposes of 
complying with applicable provisions of the NHPA and the FDIC Statement 
of Policy on NHPA (1 FDIC Law, Regulations, Related Acts 5175; see 
Sec. 309.4 (a) and (b) of this chapter for availability) including 
documentation of consultation with the State Historic Preservation 
Officer, as appropriate;
    (6) Comments on any changes in services to be offered, the community 
to be served, or any other effect the proposal may have on the 
applicant's compliance with the CRA;
    (7) A copy of each newspaper publication required by Sec. 303.44 of 
this subpart, the name and address of the newspaper, and date of the 
publication;
    (8) When an application is submitted to relocate the main office of 
the applicant from one state to another, a statement of the applicant's 
intent regarding retention of branches in the state where the main 
office exists prior to relocation.
    (c) Undercapitalized institutions. Applications to establish a 
branch by applicants subject to section 38 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1831o) also should provide the information required by Sec. 303.204. 
Applications pursuant to sections 38 and 18(d) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1831o and 1828(d)) may be filed concurrently or as a single application.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.



Sec. 303.43  Processing.

    (a) Expedited processing for eligible depository institutions. An 
application filed under this subpart by an eligible depository 
institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) will be acknowledged in writing 
by the FDIC and will receive expedited processing, unless the applicant 
is notified in writing to the contrary and provided with the basis for 
that decision. The FDIC may remove an application from expedited 
processing for any of the reasons set forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2). Absent 
such removal, an application processed under expedited processing will 
be deemed approved on the latest of the following:
    (1) The 21st day after receipt by the FDIC of a substantially 
complete filing;
    (2) The 5th day after expiration of the comment period described 
inSec. 303.44; or
    (3) In the case of an application to establish and operate a de novo 
branch in a state that is not the applicant's home state and in which 
the applicant does not maintain a branch, the 5th day after the FDIC 
receives confirmation from the host state that the applicant has both 
complied with the filing requirements of the host state and submitted a 
copy of the application with the FDIC to the host state bank supervisor.
    (b) Standard processing. For those applications which are not 
processed pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the applicant with written notification of the final action when the 
decision is rendered.



Sec. 303.44  Public notice requirements.

    (a) Newspaper publications. For applications to establish or 
relocate a branch, a notice as described in Sec. 303.7(c) shall be 
published once in a newspaper of general circulation. For applications 
to relocate a main office, notice shall be published at least once each 
week on the same day for two consecutive weeks. The required publication 
shall be made in the following communities:
    (1) To establish a branch. In the community in which the main office 
is located and in the communities to be served by the branch (including 
messenger services and mobile branches).
    (2) To relocate a main office. In the community in which the main 
office is

[[Page 23]]

currently located and in the community to which it is proposed the main 
office will relocate.
    (3) To relocate a branch. In the community in which the branch is 
located.
    (b) Public comments. Comments by interested parties must be received 
by the appropriate regional director within 15 days after the date of 
the last newspaper publication required by paragraph (a) of this 
section, unless the comment period has been extended or reopened in 
accordance with Sec. 303.9(b)(2).
    (c) Lobby notices. In the case of applications to relocate a main 
office or a branch, a copy of the required newspaper publication shall 
be posted in the public lobby of the office to be relocated for at least 
15 days beginning on the date of the last published notice required by 
paragraph (a) of this section.



Sec. 303.45  Special provisions.

    (a) Emergency or disaster events. (1) In the case of an emergency or 
disaster at a main office or a branch which requires that an office be 
immediately relocated to a temporary location, applicants shall notify 
the appropriate FDIC office within 3 days of such temporary relocation.
    (2) Within 10 days of the temporary relocation resulting from an 
emergency or disaster, the bank shall submit a written application to 
the appropriate FDIC office, that identifies the nature of the emergency 
or disaster, specifies the location of the temporary branch, and 
provides an estimate of the duration the bank plans to operate the 
temporary branch.
    (3) As part of the review process, the FDIC will determine on a case 
by case basis whether additional information is necessary and may waive 
public notice requirements.
    (b) Redesignation of main office and existing branch. In cases where 
an applicant desires to redesignate its main office as a branch and 
redesignate an existing branch as the main office, a single application 
shall be submitted. The FDIC may waive the public notice requirements in 
instances where an application presents no significant or novel policy, 
supervisory, CRA, compliance or legal concerns. A waiver will be granted 
only to a redesignation within the applicant's home state.
    (c) Expiration of approval. Approval of an application expires if 
within 18 months after the approval date a branch has not commenced 
business or a relocation has not been completed.



Sec. 303.46  Financial education programs that include the provision
of bank products and services.

    No branch application or prior approval is required in order for a 
state nonmember bank to participate in one or more financial education 
programs that involve receiving deposits, paying withdrawals, or lending 
money if:
    (a) Such service or services are provided on school premises, or a 
facility used by the school;
    (b) Such service or services are provided at the discretion of the 
school;
    (c) The principal purpose of each program is financial education. 
For example, the principal purpose of a program would be considered to 
be financial education if the program is designed to teach students the 
principles of personal financial management, banking operations, or the 
benefits of saving for the future, and is not designed for the purpose 
of profit-making; and
    (d) Each program is conducted in a manner that is consistent with 
safe and sound banking practices and complies with applicable law.

[73 FR 35338, June 23, 2008]



Secs. 303.47-303.59  [Reserved]



                      Subpart D_Merger Transactions



Sec. 303.60  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth the application requirements and procedures 
for transactions subject to FDIC approval under the Bank Merger Act, 
section 18(c) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(c)). Additional guidance is 
contained in the FDIC ``Statement of Policy on Bank Merger 
Transactions'' (1 FDIC Law, Regulations, Related Acts 5145; see 
Sec. 309.4(a) and (b) of this chapter for availability).



Sec. 303.61  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Merger transaction includes any transaction:

[[Page 24]]

    (1) In which an insured depository institution merges or 
consolidates with any other insured depository institution or, either 
directly or indirectly, acquires the assets of, or assumes liability to 
pay any deposits made in, any other insured depository institution; or
    (2) In which an insured depository institution merges or 
consolidates with any noninsured bank or institution or assumes 
liability to pay any deposits made in, or similar liabilities of, any 
noninsured bank or institution, or in which an insured depository 
institution transfers assets to any noninsured bank or institution in 
consideration of the assumption of any portion of the deposits made in 
the insured depository institution.
    (b) Corporate reorganization means a merger transaction that 
involves solely an insured depository institution and one or more of its 
affiliates.
    (c) Interim merger transaction means a merger transaction (other 
than a purchase and assumption transaction) between an operating 
depository institution and a newly-formed depository institution or 
corporation that will not operate independently and that exists solely 
for the purpose of facilitating a corporate reorganization.
    (d) Resulting institution refers to the acquiring, assuming or 
resulting institution in a merger transaction.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006; 
73 FR 2145, Jan. 14, 2008]



Sec. 303.62  Transactions requiring prior approval.

    (a) Merger transactions. The following merger transactions require 
the prior written approval of the FDIC under this subpart:
    (1) Any merger transaction, including any corporate reorganization, 
interim merger transaction, or optional conversion, in which the 
resulting institution is to be an insured state nonmember bank; and
    (2) Any merger transaction, including any corporate reorganization 
or interim merger transaction, that involves an uninsured bank or 
institution.
    (b) Related provisions. Transactions covered by this subpart also 
may be subject to other provisions or application requirements, 
including the following:
    (1) Interstate merger transactions. Merger transactions between 
insured banks that are chartered in different states are subject to the 
provisions of section 44 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831u). In the case 
of a merger transaction that consists of the acquisition by an out of 
state bank of a branch without acquisition of the bank, the branch is 
treated for section 44 purposes as a bank whose home state is the state 
in which the branch is located.
    (2) Deposit insurance. An application for deposit insurance will be 
required in connection with a merger transaction between a state-
chartered interim institution and an insured depository institution if 
the related merger application is being acted upon by a federal banking 
agency other than the FDIC. If the FDIC is the federal banking agency 
responsible for acting on the related merger application, a separate 
application for deposit insurance is not necessary. Procedures for 
applying for deposit insurance are set forth in subpart B of this part. 
An application for deposit insurance will not be required in connection 
with a merger transaction (other than a purchase and assumption 
transaction) of a federally-chartered interim institution and an insured 
institution, even if the resulting institution is to operate under the 
charter of the federal interim institution.
    (3) Branch closings. Branch closings in connection with a merger 
transaction are subject to the notice requirements of section 42 of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831r-1), including requirements for notice to 
customers. These requirements are addressed in the ``Interagency Policy 
Statement Concerning Branch Closings Notices and Policies'' (1 FDIC Law, 
Regulations, Related Acts (FDIC) 5391; see Sec. 309.4(a) and (b) of this 
chapter for availability.)
    (4) Undercapitalized institutions. Applications for a merger 
transaction by applicants subject to section 38 of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831o) should also provide the information required by 
Sec. 303.204. Applications pursuant to sections 38 and 18(c) of the FDI 
Act (12

[[Page 25]]

U.S.C, 1831o and 1828(c)) may be filed concurrently or as a single 
application.
    (5) Certification of assumption of deposit liability. An insured 
depository institution assuming deposit liabilities of another insured 
institution must provide certification of assumption of deposit 
liability to the FDIC in accordance with 12 CFR part 307.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.63  Filing procedures.

    (a) General. Applications required under this subpart shall be filed 
with the appropriate FDIC office. The appropriate forms and instructions 
may be obtained upon request from any FDIC regional director.
    (b) Merger transactions. Applications for approval of merger 
transactions shall be accompanied by copies of all agreements or 
proposed agreements relating to the merger transaction and any other 
information requested by the FDIC.
    (c) Interim merger transactions. Applications for approval of 
interim merger transactions and any related deposit insurance 
applications shall be made by filing the forms and other documents 
required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section and such other 
information as may be required by the FDIC for consideration of the 
request for deposit insurance.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 73 FR 2145, Jan. 14, 2008]



Sec. 303.64  Processing.

    (a) Expedited processing for eligible depository institutions--(1) 
General. An application filed under this subpart by an eligible 
depository institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) and which meets the 
additional criteria in paragraph (a)(4) of this section will be 
acknowledged by the FDIC in writing and will receive expedited 
processing, unless the applicant is notified in writing to the contrary 
and provided with the basis for that decision. The FDIC may remove an 
application from expedited processing for any of the reasons set forth 
in Sec. 303.11(c)(2).
    (2) Under expedited processing, the FDIC will take action on an 
application by the date that is the latest of:
    (i) 45 days after the date of the FDIC's receipt of a substantially 
complete merger application; or
    (ii) 10 days after the date of the last notice publication required 
under Sec. 303.65 of this subpart; or
    (iii) 5 days after receipt of the Attorney General's report on the 
competitive factors involved in the proposed transaction; or
    (iv) For an interstate merger transaction subject to the provisions 
of section 44 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831u), 5 days after the FDIC 
receives confirmation from the host state (as defined in Sec. 303.41(e)) 
that the applicant has both complied with the filing requirements of the 
host state and submitted a copy of the FDIC merger application to the 
host state's bank supervisor.
    (3) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, if the FDIC 
does not act within the expedited processing period, it does not 
constitute an automatic or default approval.
    (4) Criteria. The FDIC will process an application using expedited 
procedures if:
    (i) Immediately following the merger transaction, the resulting 
institution will be ``well-capitalized'' pursuant to subpart B of part 
325 of this chapter (12 CFR part 325) or subpart H of part 324 of this 
chapter (12 CFR part 324), as applicable; and
    (ii)(A) All parties to the merger transaction are eligible 
depository institutions as defined in Sec. 303.2(r); or
    (B) The acquiring party is an eligible depository institution as 
defined in Sec. 303.2(r) and the amount of the total assets to be 
transferred does not exceed an amount equal to 10 percent of the 
acquiring institution's total assets as reported in its report of 
condition for the quarter immediately preceding the filing of the merger 
application.
    (b) Standard processing. For those applications not processed 
pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide the 
applicant with written notification of the final action taken by the 
FDIC on the application when the decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]

[[Page 26]]



Sec. 303.65  Public notice requirements.

    (a) General. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, an 
applicant for approval of a merger transaction must publish notice of 
the proposed transaction on at least three occasions at approximately 
equal intervals in a newspaper of general circulation in the community 
or communities where the main offices of the merging institutions are 
located or, if there is no such newspaper in the community, then in the 
newspaper of general circulation published nearest thereto.
    (1) First publication. The first publication of the notice should be 
as close as practicable to the date on which the application is filed 
with the FDIC, but no more than 5 days prior to the filing date.
    (2) Last publication. The last publication of the notice shall be on 
the 25th day after the first publication or, if the newspaper does not 
publish on the 25th day, on the newspaper's publication date that is 
closest to the 25th day.
    (b) Exceptions--(1) Emergency requiring expeditious action. If the 
FDIC determines that an emergency exists requiring expeditious action, 
notice shall be published twice. The first notice shall be published as 
soon as possible after the FDIC notifies the applicant of such 
determination. The second notice shall be published on the 7th day after 
the first publication or, if the newspaper does not publish on the 7th 
day, on the newspaper's publication date that is closest to the 7th day.
    (2) Probable failure. If the FDIC determines that it must act 
immediately to prevent the probable failure of one of the institutions 
involved in a proposed merger transaction, publication is not required.
    (c) Content of notice--(1) General. The notice shall conform to the 
public notice requirements set forth in Sec. 303.7.
    (2) Branches. If it is contemplated that the resulting institution 
will operate offices of the other institution(s) as branches, the 
following statement shall be included in the notice required in 
Sec. 303.7(b):

It is contemplated that all offices of the above-named institutions will 
continue to be operated (with the exception of [insert identity and 
location of each office that will not be operated]).

    (3) Emergency requiring expeditious action. If the FDIC determines 
that an emergency exists requiring expeditious action, the notice shall 
specify as the closing date of the public comment period the date that 
is the 10th day after the date of the first publication.
    (d) Public comments. Comments must be received by the appropriate 
FDIC office within 30 days after the first publication of the notice, 
unless the comment period has been extended or reopened in accordance 
with Sec. 303.9(b)(2). If the FDIC has determined that an emergency 
exists requiring expeditious action, comments must be received by the 
appropriate FDIC office within 10 days after the first publication.



Secs. 303.66-303.79  [Reserved]



                    Subpart E_Change in Bank Control

    Source: 80 FR 65899, Oct. 28, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 303.80  Scope.

    This subpart implements the provisions of the Change in Bank Control 
Act of 1978, section 7(j) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)) (CBCA), and 
sets forth the filing requirements and processing procedures for a 
notice of change in control with respect to the acquisition of control 
of a State nonmember bank, a State savings association, or certain 
parent companies of either a State nonmember bank or a State savings 
association.



Sec. 303.81  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Acting in concert means knowing participation in a joint 
activity or parallel action towards a common goal of acquiring control 
of a covered institution whether or not pursuant to an express 
agreement.
    (b) Company means a company as defined in section 2 of the Bank 
Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1841 et seq.) and any 
person that is not an individual including for example, a limited 
liability company.
    (c) Control means the power, directly or indirectly, to direct the 
management or policies of a covered institution or to vote 25 percent or 
more of

[[Page 27]]

any class of voting securities of a covered institution.
    (d) Convertible securities mean debt or equity interests that may be 
converted into voting securities.
    (e) Covered institution means an insured State nonmember bank, an 
insured State savings association, and any company that controls, 
directly or indirectly, an insured State nonmember bank or an insured 
State savings association other than a holding company that is the 
subject of an exemption described in either section 303.84(a)(3) or 
(a)(8).
    (f) Immediate family means a person's parents, mother-in-law, 
father-in-law, children, step-children, siblings, step-siblings, 
brothers-in-law, sisters-in-law, grandparents, and grandchildren, 
whether biological, adoptive, adjudicated, contractual, or de facto; the 
spouse of any of the foregoing; and the person's spouse.
    (g) Person means an individual, corporation, limited liability 
company (LLC), partnership, trust, association, joint venture, pool, 
syndicate, sole proprietorship, unincorporated organization, voting 
trust, or any other form of entity; and includes each party to a voting 
agreement and any group of persons acting in concert.
    (h) Management official means any officer, LLC manager, director, 
partner, or trustee of an entity, or other person with similar functions 
and powers with respect to a company.
    (i)(1) Voting securities means shares of common or preferred stock, 
general or limited partnership shares or interests, membership 
interests, or similar interests if the shares or interests, by statute, 
charter, or in any manner, entitle the holder:
    (i) To vote for, or to select, directors, trustees, managers of an 
LLC, partners, or other persons exercising similar functions of the 
issuing entity; or
    (ii) To vote on, or to direct, the conduct of the operations or 
significant policies of the issuing entity.
    (2) Nonvoting shares: Shares of common or preferred stock, limited 
partnership shares or interests, membership interests, or similar 
interests are not ``voting securities'' if:
    (i) Any voting rights associated with the shares or interests are 
limited solely to the type customarily provided by State statute with 
regard to matters that would significantly and adversely affect the 
rights or preference of the security or other interest, such as the 
issuance of additional amounts or classes of senior securities, the 
modification of the terms of the security or interest, the dissolution 
of the issuing entity, or the payment of dividends by the issuing entity 
when preferred dividends are in arrears;
    (ii) The shares or interests represent an essentially passive 
investment or financing device and do not otherwise provide the holder 
with control over the issuing entity; and
    (iii) The shares or interests do not entitle the holder, by statute, 
charter, or in any manner, to select, or to vote for the selection of, 
directors, trustees, managers of an LLC, partners, or persons exercising 
similar functions of the issuing entity.
    (3) Class of voting securities: Voting securities issued by a single 
issuer are deemed to be the same class of voting securities, regardless 
of differences in dividend rights or liquidation preference, if the 
securities are voted together as a single class on all matters for which 
the securities have voting rights other than matters described in 
paragraph (i)(2)(i) of this section that affect solely the rights or 
preferences of the securities.



Sec. 303.82  Transactions that require prior notice.

    (a) Prior notice requirement. (1) Except as provided in Secs. 303.83 
and 303.84, no person, acting directly or indirectly, or through or in 
concert with one or more persons, shall acquire control of a covered 
institution unless the person shall have given the FDIC prior notice of 
the proposed acquisition as provided in the CBCA and this subpart, and 
the FDIC has not disapproved the acquisition within 60 days or such 
longer period as may be permitted under the CBCA; and
    (2) Except as provided in Secs. 303.83 and 303.84, and unless waived 
by the FDIC, no person who has been approved to acquire control of a 
covered institution and who has maintained that control shall acquire, 
directly or indirectly, or through or in concert with one or more

[[Page 28]]

persons, voting securities of such covered institution if that person's 
ownership, control, or power to vote will increase from less than 25 
percent to 25 percent or more of any class of voting securities of the 
covered institution, unless the person shall have given the FDIC prior 
notice of the proposed acquisition as provided in the CBCA and this 
subpart, and the FDIC has not disapproved the acquisition within 60 days 
or such longer period as may be permitted under the CBCA.
    (b) Rebuttable presumptions--(1) Rebuttable presumptions of control. 
The FDIC presumes that an acquisition of voting securities of a covered 
institution constitutes the acquisition of the power to direct the 
management or policies of that institution requiring prior notice to the 
FDIC, if, immediately after the transaction, the acquiring person will 
own, control, or hold with power to vote 10 percent or more of any class 
of voting securities of the institution, and if:
    (i) The institution has registered securities under section 12 of 
the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78l); or
    (ii) No other person will own, control or hold the power to vote a 
greater percentage of that class of voting securities immediately after 
the transaction.
    (2) Rebuttable presumptions of acting in concert. The following 
persons who own or control, or propose to own or control voting 
securities in a covered institution, shall be presumed to be acting in 
concert for purposes of this subpart:
    (i) A company and any controlling shareholder or management official 
of the company;
    (ii) An individual and one or more members of the individual's 
immediate family;
    (iii) Companies under common control or a company and each company 
it controls;
    (iv) Two or more persons that have made, or propose to make, a joint 
filing related to the proposed acquisition under sections 13 or 14 of 
the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78m or 78n), and the 
rules promulgated thereunder by the Securities and Exchange Commission;
    (v) A person and any trust for which the person serves as trustee or 
any trust for which the person is a beneficiary; and
    (vi) Persons that are parties to any agreement, contract, 
understanding, relationship, or other arrangement, whether written or 
otherwise, regarding the acquisition, voting, or transfer of control of 
voting securities of a covered institution, other than through revocable 
proxies as described in Sec. 303.84(a)(5).
    (3) Convertible securities, options, and warrants. The acquisition 
of convertible securities, or options or warrants to acquire voting 
securities is presumed to constitute the acquisition of voting 
securities.
    (4) Rebuttal of presumptions. The FDIC will afford any person 
seeking to rebut a presumption in this paragraph (b) an opportunity to 
present its views in writing.
    (c) Acquisition of loans in default. An acquisition of a loan in 
default that is secured by voting securities of a covered institution is 
deemed to be an acquisition of the underlying securities for purposes of 
this subpart. Before acquiring a loan in default that upon foreclosure 
would result in the acquiring person owning, controlling, or holding 
with the power to vote a controlling amount of a covered institution's 
voting securities, the potential acquirer must give the FDIC prior 
written notice as specified in this subpart.



Sec. 303.83  Transactions that require notice, but not prior notice.

    (a) Notice within 90 days after the acquisition. The following 
acquisitions of voting securities of a covered institution, which 
otherwise would require prior notice under this subpart, instead require 
the acquirer to provide to the appropriate FDIC office within 90 
calendar days after the acquisition all relevant information requested 
by the FDIC:
    (1) The acquisition of voting securities as a bona fide gift;
    (2) The acquisition of voting securities in satisfaction of a debt 
previously contracted in good faith, except as provided in 
Sec. 303.82(c); and
    (3) The acquisition of voting securities through inheritance.

[[Page 29]]

    (b) Notice within 90 days after receiving notice of the event giving 
rise to the acquisition of control. The following acquisitions of 
control of a covered institution, which otherwise would require prior 
notice under this subpart, instead require the person acquiring control 
to provide to the appropriate FDIC office, within 90 calendar days after 
receiving notice of the event giving rise to the acquisition of control, 
all relevant information requested by the FDIC:
    (1) The acquisition of control resulting from a redemption of voting 
securities by the issuing covered institution; and
    (2) The acquisition of control as a result of any event or action 
(including without limitation the sale of securities) by any third party 
that is not within the control of the person acquiring control.
    (c) The FDIC may disapprove a notice filed after an acquisition of 
control, and nothing in this section limits the authority of the FDIC to 
disapprove a notice pursuant to Sec. 303.86(c).
    (d) The relevant information that the FDIC may require under this 
section may include all information and documents routinely required for 
a prior notice as provided in Sec. 303.85.
    (e) If the FDIC disapproves a Notice filed under this Sec. 303.83, 
the notificant(s) must divest control of the covered institution which 
may include, without limitation, disposing of some or all of the voting 
securities so that the notificant(s) is no longer in control of the 
covered institution, within such period of time and in the manner that 
the FDIC may determine.



Sec. 303.84  Transactions that do not require notice.

    (a) Exempt transactions. The following transactions do not require 
notice to the FDIC under this subpart:
    (1) The acquisition of additional voting securities of a covered 
institution by a person who:
    (i) Held the power to vote 25 percent or more of any class of voting 
securities of the institution continuously since the later of March 9, 
1979, or the date that the institution commenced business; or
    (ii) Is presumed, under Sec. 303.82(b) to have controlled the 
institution continuously since March 9, 1979, if the aggregate amount of 
voting securities held does not exceed 25 percent or more of any class 
of voting securities of the institution or, in other cases, where the 
FDIC determines that the person has controlled the institution 
continuously since March 9, 1979;
    (2) The acquisition of additional voting securities of a covered 
institution by a person who has lawfully acquired and maintained control 
of the institution (for purposes of Sec. 303.82) after obtaining the 
FDIC's non-objection under the CBCA and the FDIC's regulations or the 
OTS's non-objection under the repealed Change in Savings and Loan 
Control Act, 12 U.S.C. 1730(q), and the regulations thereunder then in 
effect, to acquire control of the institution, unless a notice is 
required for an increase in ownership described in 12 CFR 303.82(a)(2);
    (3) Acquisitions of voting securities subject to approval under 
section 3 of the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1842(a)), section 
18(c) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(c)), or section 10 of the Home 
Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1467a);
    (4) Any transaction described in sections 2(a)(5), 3(a)(A), or 
3(a)(B) of the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841(a)(5), 
1842(a)(A), or 1842(a)(B)) by a person described in those provisions;
    (5) A customary one-time solicitation of a revocable proxy;
    (6) The receipt of voting securities of a covered institution 
through a pro rata stock dividend or stock split if the proportional 
interests of the recipients remain substantially the same;
    (7) The acquisition of voting securities in a foreign bank that has 
an insured branch in the United States. (This exemption does not extend 
to the reports and information required under paragraphs 9, 10, and 12 
of the CBCA (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(9), (10), and (12)); and
    (8) The acquisition of voting securities of a depository institution 
holding company for which the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System reviews a notice pursuant to the CBCA (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)).



Sec. 303.85  Filing procedures.

    (a) Filing notice. (1) A notice required under this subpart shall be 
filed with

[[Page 30]]

the appropriate FDIC office and shall contain all the information 
required by paragraph 6 of the CBCA, section 7(j) of the FDI Act, (12 
U.S.C. 1817(j)(6)), or prescribed in the designated interagency forms 
which may be obtained from any FDIC regional director.
    (2) The FDIC may waive any of the informational requirements of the 
notice if the FDIC determines that it is in the public interest.
    (3) A notificant shall notify the appropriate FDIC office 
immediately of any material changes in the information contained in a 
notice submitted to the FDIC, including changes in financial or other 
conditions.
    (4) When the acquiring person is an individual, or group of 
individuals acting in concert, the requirement to provide personal 
financial data may be satisfied by a current statement of assets and 
liabilities and an income summary, as required in the designated 
interagency form, together with a statement of any material changes 
since the date of the statement or summary. The FDIC may require 
additional information if appropriate.
    (b) Other laws. Nothing in this subpart shall affect any obligation 
which the acquiring person(s) may have to comply with the federal 
securities laws or other laws.



Sec. 303.86  Processing.

    (a) Acceptance of notice, additional information. The FDIC shall 
notify the person or persons submitting a notice under this subpart in 
writing of the date the notice is accepted as substantially complete. 
The FDIC may request additional information at any time.
    (b) Commencement of the 60-day notice period: consummation of 
acquisition. (1) The 60-day notice period specified in Sec. 303.82 shall 
commence on the day after the date of acceptance of a substantially 
complete notice by the appropriate regional director. The notificant(s) 
may consummate the proposed acquisition after the expiration of the 60-
day notice period, unless the FDIC disapproves the proposed acquisition 
or extends the notice period as provided in the CBCA.
    (2) The notificant(s) may consummate the proposed transaction before 
the expiration of the 60-day period, including any extensions, if the 
FDIC notifies the notificant(s) in writing of its intention not to 
disapprove the acquisition.
    (c) Disapproval of acquisition of control. Subpart D of 12 CFR part 
308 sets forth the rules of practice and procedure for a notice of 
disapproval.



Sec. 303.87  Public notice requirements.

    (a) Publication--(1) Newspaper announcement. Any person(s) filing a 
notice under this subpart shall publish an announcement soliciting 
public comment on the proposed acquisition. The announcement shall be 
published in a newspaper of general circulation in the community in 
which the home office of the covered institution to be acquired is 
located.
    (2) Timing of publication. The announcement shall be published as 
close as is practicable to the date the notice is filed with the 
appropriate FDIC office, but in no event more than 10 calendar days 
before or after the filing date. If the filing is not filed in 
accordance with the CBCA and this subpart within the time periods 
specified herein, the acquiring person(s) shall, within 10 days of being 
directed by the FDIC to file a Notice, publish an announcement of the 
acquisition of control.
    (3) Contents of newspaper announcement. The newspaper announcement 
shall conform to the public notice requirements set forth in Sec. 303.7. 
If the filing is not filed in accordance with the CBCA and this subpart 
within the time periods specified herein, the announcement shall also 
include the date of the acquisition and contain a statement indicating 
that the FDIC is currently reviewing the acquisition of control.
    (b) Delay of publication. The FDIC may permit delay in the 
publication required by this section if the FDIC determines, for good 
cause, that it is in the public interest to grant such a delay. Requests 
for delay of publication may be submitted to the appropriate FDIC 
office.
    (c) Shortening or waiving public comment period, waiving 
publications; acting before close of public comment period. The FDIC may 
shorten the public comment period to a period of not less than 10 days, 
or waive the public comment or

[[Page 31]]

newspaper publication requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, or 
act on a notice before the expiration of a public comment period, if it 
determines in writing either that an emergency exists or that disclosure 
of the notice, solicitation of public comment, or delay until expiration 
of the public comment period would seriously threaten the safety and 
soundness of the State nonmember bank or State savings association to be 
acquired.
    (d) Consideration of public comments. In acting upon a notice filed 
under this subpart, the FDIC shall consider all public comments received 
in writing within 20 days following the required newspaper publication 
or, if the FDIC has shortened the public comment period pursuant to 
paragraph (c) of this section, within such shorter period.



Sec. 303.88  Reporting of stock loans and changes in chief executive
officers and directors.

    (a) Requirements of reporting stock loans. (1) Any foreign bank or 
affiliate of a foreign bank that has credit outstanding to any person or 
group of persons, in the aggregate, which is secured, directly or 
indirectly, by 25 percent or more of any class of voting securities of a 
covered institution, shall file a consolidated report with the 
appropriate FDIC office.
    (2) Any voting securities of the covered institution held by the 
foreign bank or any affiliate of the foreign bank as principal must be 
included in the calculation of the number of voting securities in which 
the foreign bank or its affiliate has a security interest for purposes 
of this paragraph (a).
    (b) Definitions. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section:
    (1) Foreign bank shall have the same meaning as in section 1(b) of 
the International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3101).
    (2) Affiliate shall have the same meaning as in section 1(b) of the 
International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3101).
    (3) Credit outstanding includes any loan or extension of credit; the 
issuance of a guarantee, acceptance, or letter of credit, including an 
endorsement or standby letter of credit; and any other type of 
transaction that extends credit or financing to the person or group of 
persons.
    (4) Group of persons includes any number of persons that the foreign 
bank or any affiliate of a foreign bank has reason to believe:
    (i) Are acting together, in concert, or with one another to acquire 
or control voting securities of the same covered institution, including 
an acquisition of voting securities of the same covered institution at 
approximately the same time under substantially the same terms; or
    (ii) Have made, or propose to make, a joint filing under section 13 
or 14 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78m or 78n), and 
the rules promulgated thereunder by the Securities and Exchange 
Commission regarding ownership of the voting securities of the same 
covered institution.
    (c) Exceptions. Compliance with paragraph (a) of this section is not 
required if:
    (1) The person or group of persons referred to in paragraph (a) has 
disclosed the amount borrowed and the security interest therein to the 
appropriate FDIC office in connection with a notice filed under the 
CBCA, an application filed under either 12 U.S.C. 1841, et seq. or 12 
U.S.C. 1467a, or any other application filed with the FDIC as a 
substitute for a notice under Sec. 303.82 of this subpart, including an 
application filed under section 18(c) of the FDI Act (Bank Merger Act, 
12 U.S.C. 1828(c)) or section 5 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1815); or
    (2) The transaction involves a person or group of persons that has 
been the owner or owners of record of the stock for a period of one year 
or more; or, if the transaction involves stock issued by a newly 
chartered bank, before the bank is opened for business.
    (d) Report requirements for purposes of paragraph (a) of this 
section. (1) The consolidated report must indicate the number and 
percentage of voting securities securing each applicable extension of 
credit, the identity of the borrower, the number of voting securities 
held as principal by the foreign bank and any affiliate thereof, and any 
additional information that the FDIC may require in connection with a 
particular report.

[[Page 32]]

    (2) A foreign bank, or any affiliate of a foreign bank, shall file 
the consolidated report in writing within 30 days of the date on which 
the foreign bank or affiliate first believes that the security for any 
outstanding credit consists of 25 percent or more of any class of voting 
securities of a covered institution.
    (e) Foreign bank or affiliate not supervised by FDIC. If the foreign 
bank, or any affiliate thereof, is not supervised by the FDIC, it shall 
file a copy of the report filed under paragraph (a) of this section with 
its appropriate Federal banking agency.
    (f) Reporting requirement. After the consummation of a change in 
control, a covered institution must notify the FDIC in writing of any 
changes or replacements of its chief executive officer or of any 
director occurring during the 12-month period beginning on the date of 
consummation. This notice must be filed within 10 days of such change or 
replacement and must include a statement of the past and current 
business and professional affiliations of the new chief executive 
officers or directors.



Secs. 303.89-303.99  [Reserved]



        Subpart F_Change of Director or Senior Executive Officer



Sec. 303.100  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth the circumstances under which an insured 
state nonmember bank must notify the FDIC of a change in any member of 
its board of directors or any senior executive officer and the 
procedures for filing such notice. This subpart implements section 32 of 
the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831i).



Sec. 303.101  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Director means a person who serves on the board of directors or 
board of trustees of an insured state nonmember bank, except that this 
term does not include an advisory director who:
    (1) Is not elected by the shareholders;
    (2) Is not authorized to vote on any matters before the board of 
directors or board of trustees or any committee thereof;
    (3) Solely provides general policy advice to the board of directors 
or board of trustees and any committee thereof; and
    (4) Has not been identified by the FDIC as a person who performs the 
functions of a director for purposes of this subpart.
    (b) Senior executive officer means a person who holds the title of 
president, chief executive officer, chief operating officer, chief 
managing official (in an insured state branch of a foreign bank), chief 
financial officer, chief lending officer, or chief investment officer, 
or, without regard to title, salary, or compensation, performs the 
function of one or more of these positions. Senior executive officer 
also includes any other person identified by the FDIC, whether or not 
hired as an employee, with significant influence over, or who 
participates in, major policymaking decisions of the insured state 
nonmember bank.
    (c) Troubled condition means any insured state nonmember bank that:
    (1) Has a composite rating, as determined in its most recent report 
of examination, of 4 or 5 under the Uniform Financial Institutions 
Rating System (UFIRS), or in the case of an insured state branch of a 
foreign bank, an equivalent rating; or
    (2) Is subject to a proceeding initiated by the FDIC for termination 
or suspension of deposit insurance; or
    (3) Is subject to a cease-and-desist order or written agreement 
issued by either the FDIC or the appropriate state banking authority 
that requires action to improve the financial condition of the bank or 
is subject to a proceeding initiated by the FDIC or state authority 
which contemplates the issuance of an order that requires action to 
improve the financial condition of the bank, unless otherwise informed 
in writing by the FDIC; or
    (4) Is informed in writing by the FDIC that it is in troubled 
condition for purposes of the requirements of this subpart on the basis 
of the bank's most recent report of condition or report of examination, 
or other information available to the FDIC.

[[Page 33]]



Sec. 303.102  Filing procedures and waiver of prior notice.

    (a) Insured state nonmember banks. An insured state nonmember bank 
shall give the FDIC written notice, as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of 
this section, at least 30 days prior to adding or replacing any member 
of its board of directors, employing any person as a senior executive 
officer of the bank, or changing the responsibilities of any senior 
executive officer so that the person would assume a different senior 
executive officer position, if:
    (1) The bank is not in compliance with all minimum capital 
requirements applicable to the bank as determined on the basis of the 
bank's most recent report of condition or report of examination;
    (2) The bank is in troubled condition; or
    (3) The FDIC determines, in connection with its review of a capital 
restoration plan required under section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831o(e)(2)) or otherwise, that such notice is appropriate.
    (b) Insured branches of foreign banks. In the case of the addition 
of a member of the board of directors or a change in senior executive 
officer in a foreign bank having an insured state branch, the notice 
requirement shall not apply to such additions and changes in the foreign 
bank parent, but only to changes in senior executive officers in the 
state branch.
    (c) Waiver of prior notice--(1) Waiver requests. The FDIC may permit 
an individual, upon petition by the bank to the appropriate FDIC office, 
to serve as a senior executive officer or director before filing the 
notice required under this subpart if the FDIC finds that:
    (i) Delay would threaten the safety or soundness of the bank;
    (ii) Delay would not be in the public interest; or
    (iii) Other extraordinary circumstances exist that justify waiver of 
prior notice.
    (2) Automatic waiver. In the case of the election of a new director 
not proposed by management at a meeting of the shareholders of an 
insured state nonmember bank, the prior 30-day notice is automatically 
waived and the individual immediately may begin serving, provided that a 
complete notice is filed with the appropriate FDIC office within two 
business days after the individual's election.
    (3) Effect on disapproval authority. A waiver shall not affect the 
authority of the FDIC to disapprove a notice within 30 days after a 
waiver is granted under paragraph (c)(1) of this section or the election 
of an individual who has filed a notice and is serving pursuant to an 
automatic waiver under paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (d)(1) Content of filing. The notice required by paragraph (a) of 
this section shall be filed with the appropriate FDIC office and shall 
contain information pertaining to the competence, experience, character, 
or integrity of the individual with respect to whom the notice is 
submitted, as prescribed in the designated interagency form which is 
available from any FDIC regional director. The FDIC may require 
additional information.
    (2) Modification. The FDIC may modify or accept other information in 
place of the requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this section for a 
notice filed under this subpart.



Sec. 303.103  Processing.

    (a) Processing. The 30-day notice period specified in 
Sec. 303.102(a) shall begin on the date substantially all information 
required to be submitted by the notificant pursuant to 
Sec. 303.102(c)(1) is received by the appropriate FDIC office. The FDIC 
shall notify the bank submitting the notice of the date on which the 
notice is accepted for processing and of the date on which the 30-day 
notice period will expire. If processing cannot be completed within 30 
days, the notificant will be advised in writing, prior to expiration of 
the 30-day period, of the reason for the delay in processing and of the 
additional time period, not to exceed 60 days, in which processing will 
be completed.
    (b) Commencement of service--(1) At expiration of period. A proposed 
director or senior executive officer may begin service after the end of 
the 30-day period or any other additional period as provided under 
paragraph (a) of this section, unless the FDIC disapproves the notice 
before the end of the period.

[[Page 34]]

    (2) Prior to expiration of period. A proposed director or senior 
executive officer may begin service before the end of the 30-day period 
or any additional time period as provided under paragraph (a) of this 
section, if the FDIC notifies the bank and the individual in writing of 
the FDIC's intention not to disapprove the notice.
    (c) Notice of disapproval. The FDIC may disapprove a notice filed 
under Sec. 303.102 if the FDIC finds that the competence, experience, 
character, or integrity of the individual with respect to whom the 
notice is submitted indicates that it would not be in the best interests 
of the depositors of the bank or in the best interests of the public to 
permit the individual to be employed by, or associated with, the bank. 
Subpart L of 12 CFR part 308 sets forth the rules of practice and 
procedure for a notice of disapproval.



Secs. 303.104-303.119  [Reserved]



               Subpart G_Activities of Insured State Banks



Sec. 303.120  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth procedures for complying with notice and 
application requirements contained in subpart A of part 362 of this 
chapter, governing insured state banks and their subsidiaries engaging 
in activities which are not permissible for national banks and their 
subsidiaries. This subpart sets forth procedures for complying with 
notice and application requirements contained in subpart B of part 362 
of this chapter, governing certain activities of insured state nonmember 
banks, their subsidiaries, and certain affiliates. This subpart also 
sets forth procedures for complying with the notice requirements 
contained in subpart E of part 362 of this chapter, governing 
subsidiaries of insured state nonmember banks engaging in financial 
activities.



Sec. 303.121  Filing procedures.

    (a) Where to file. A notice or application required by subpart A, 
subpart B, or subpart E of part 362 of this chapter shall be submitted 
in writing to the appropriate FDIC office.
    (b) Contents of filing. A complete letter notice or letter 
application shall include the following information:
    (1) Filings generally. (i) A brief description of the activity and 
the manner in which it will be conducted;
    (ii) The amount of the bank's existing or proposed direct or 
indirect investment in the activity as well as calculations sufficient 
to indicate compliance with any specific capital ratio or investment 
percentage limitation detailed in subpart A, B, or E of part 362 of this 
chapter;
    (iii) A copy of the bank's business plan regarding the conduct of 
the activity;
    (iv) A citation to the state statutory or regulatory authority for 
the conduct of the activity;
    (v) A copy of the order or other document from the appropriate 
regulatory authority granting approval for the bank to conduct the 
activity if such approval is necessary and has already been granted;
    (vi) A brief description of the bank's policy and practice with 
regard to any anticipated involvement in the activity by a director, 
executive office or principal shareholder of the bank or any related 
interest of such a person; and
    (vii) A description of the bank's expertise in the activity.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (3) Copy of application or notice filed with another agency. If an 
insured state bank has filed an application or notice with another 
federal or state regulatory authority which contains all of the 
information required by paragraph (b) (1) of this section, the insured 
state bank may submit a copy to the FDIC in lieu of a separate filing.
    (4) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.



Sec. 303.122  Processing.

    (a) Expedited processing. A notice filed by an insured state bank 
seeking to commence or continue an activity under 
Sec. 362.3(a)(2)(iii)(A)(2), Sec. 362.4(b)(3)(i), or Sec. 362.4(b)(5) of 
this chapter will be acknowledged in writing by the FDIC and will 
receive expedited processing, unless the applicant is notified in 
writing to the contrary

[[Page 35]]

and provided a basis for that decision. The FDIC may remove the notice 
from expedited processing for any of the reasons set forth in 
Sec. 303.11(c)(2). Absent such removal, a notice processed under 
expedited processing is deemed approved 30 days after receipt of a 
complete notice by the FDIC (subject to extension for an additional 15 
days upon written notice to the bank) or on such earlier date authorized 
by the FDIC in writing.
    (b) Standard processing for applications and notices that have been 
removed from expedited processing. For an application filed by an 
insured state bank seeking to commence or continue an activity under 
Sec. 362.3(a)(2)(iii)(A)(2), Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(i), 
Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(ii)(A), Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(ii)(C), Sec. 362.4(b)(1), 
Sec. 362.4(b)(4), Sec. 362.5(b)(2), or Sec. 362.8(b) or seeking a waiver 
or modification under Sec. 362.18(e) or Sec. 362.18(g)(3) of this 
chapter or for notices which are not processed pursuant to the expedited 
processing procedures, the FDIC will provide the insured State bank with 
written notification of the final action as soon as the decision is 
rendered. The FDIC will normally review and act in such cases within 60 
days after receipt of a completed application or notice (subject to 
extension for an additional 30 days upon written notice to the bank), 
but failure of the FDIC to act prior to the expiration of these periods 
does not constitute approval.



Secs. 303.123-303.139  [Reserved]



          Subpart H_Activities of Insured Savings Associations



Sec. 303.140  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth procedures for complying with the notice and 
application requirements contained in subpart C of part 362 of this 
chapter, governing insured state savings associations and their service 
corporations engaging in activities which are not permissible for 
federal savings associations and their service corporations. This 
subpart also sets forth procedures for complying with the notice 
requirements contained in subpart D of part 362 of this chapter, 
governing insured savings associations which establish or engage in new 
activities through a subsidiary.



Sec. 303.141  Filing procedures.

    (a) Where to file. All applications and notices required by subpart 
C or subpart D of part 362 of this chapter are to be in writing and 
filed with the appropriate FDIC office.
    (b) Contents of filing--(1) Filings generally. A complete letter 
notice or letter application shall include the following information:
    (i) A brief description of the activity and the manner in which it 
will be conducted;
    (ii) The amount of the association's existing or proposed direct or 
indirect investment in the activity as well as calculations sufficient 
to indicate compliance with any specific capital ratio or investment 
percentage limitation detailed in subpart C or D of part 362 of this 
chapter;
    (iii) A copy of the association's business plan regarding the 
conduct of the activity;
    (iv) A citation to the state statutory or regulatory authority for 
the conduct of the activity;
    (v) A copy of the order or other document from the appropriate 
regulatory authority granting approval for the association to conduct 
the activity if such approval is necessary and has already been granted;
    (vi) A brief description of the association's policy and practice 
with regard to any anticipated involvement in the activity by a 
director, executive officer or principal shareholder of the association 
or any related interest of such a person; and
    (vii) A description of the association's expertise in the activity.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (3) Copy of application or notice filed with another agency. If an 
insured savings association has filed an application or notice with 
another federal or state regulatory authority which contains all of the 
information required by paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the insured 
state bank may submit a copy to the FDIC in lieu of a separate filing.
    (4) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.



Sec. 303.142  Processing.

    (a) Expedited processing. A notice filed by an insured state savings 
association

[[Page 36]]

seeking to commence or continue an activity under Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(ii) 
of this chapter will be acknowledged in writing by the FDIC and will 
receive expedited processing, unless the applicant is notified in 
writing to the contrary and provided a basis for that decision. The FDIC 
may remove the notice from expedited processing for any of the reasons 
set forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2). Absent such removal, a notice processed 
under expedited processing is deemed approved 30 days after receipt of a 
complete notice by the FDIC (subject to extension for an additional 15 
days upon written notice to the bank) or on such earlier date authorized 
by the FDIC in writing.
    (b) Standard processing for applications and notices that have been 
removed from expedited processing. For an application filed by an 
insured state savings association seeking to commence or continue an 
activity under Sec. 362.11(a)(2)(ii), Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(i), 
Sec. 362.12(b)(1) of this chapter or for notices which are not processed 
pursuant to the expedited processing procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the insured state savings association with written notification of the 
final action as soon as the decision is rendered. The FDIC will normally 
review and act in such cases within 60 days after receipt of a completed 
application or notice (subject to extension for an additional 30 days 
upon written notice to the bank), but failure of the FDIC to act prior 
to the expiration of these periods does not constitute approval.
    (c) Notices of activities in excess of an amount permissible for a 
federal savings association; subsidiary notices. Receipt of a notice 
filed by an insured state savings association as required by 
Sec. 362.11(b)(3) or Sec. 362.15 of this chapter will be acknowledged in 
writing by the FDIC. The notice will be reviewed at the appropriate FDIC 
office, which will take such action as it deems necessary and 
appropriate.



Secs. 303.143-303.159  [Reserved]



                  Subpart I_Mutual-To-Stock Conversions



Sec. 303.160  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth the notice requirements and procedures for 
the conversion of an insured mutual state-chartered savings bank to the 
stock form of ownership. The substantive requirements governing such 
conversions are contained in Sec. 333.4 of this chapter.



Sec. 303.161  Filing procedures.

    (a) Prior notice required. In addition to complying with the 
substantive requirements in Sec. 333.4 of this chapter, an insured 
state-chartered mutually owned savings bank that proposes to convert 
from mutual to stock form shall file with the FDIC a notice of intent to 
convert to stock form.
    (b) General. (1) A notice required under this subpart shall be filed 
in letter form with the appropriate FDIC office at the same time as 
required conversion application materials are filed with the 
institution's state regulator.
    (2) An insured mutual savings bank chartered by a state that does 
not require the filing of a conversion application shall file a notice 
in letter form with the appropriate FDIC office as soon as practicable 
after adoption of its plan of conversion.
    (c) Content of notice. The notice shall provide a description of the 
proposed conversion and include all materials that have been filed with 
any state or federal banking regulator and any state or federal 
securities regulator. At a minimum, the notice shall include, as 
applicable, copies of:
    (1) The plan of conversion, with specific information concerning the 
record date used for determining eligible depositors and the 
subscription offering priority established in connection with any 
proposed stock offering;
    (2) Certified board resolutions relating to the conversion;
    (3) A business plan, including a detailed discussion of how the 
capital acquired in the conversion will be used, expected earnings for 
at least a three-year period following the conversion, and a 
justification for any proposed stock repurchases;

[[Page 37]]

    (4) The charter and bylaws of the converted institution;
    (5) The bylaws and operating plans of any other entities formed in 
connection with the conversion transaction, such as a holding company or 
charitable foundation;
    (6) A full appraisal report, prepared by an independent appraiser, 
of the value of the converting institution and the pricing of the stock 
to be sold in the conversion transaction;
    (7) Detailed descriptions of any proposed management or employee 
stock benefit plans or employment agreements and a discussion of the 
rationale for the level of benefits proposed, individually and by 
participant group;
    (8) Indemnification agreements;
    (9) A preliminary proxy statement and sample proxy;
    (10) Offering circular(s) and order form;
    (11) All contracts or agreements relating to solicitation, 
underwriting, market-making, or listing of conversion stock and any 
agreements among members of a group regarding the purchase of 
unsubscribed shares;
    (12) A tax opinion concerning the federal income tax consequences of 
the proposed conversion;
    (13) Consents from experts to use their opinions as part of the 
notice; and
    (14) An estimate of conversion-related expenses.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC, in its discretion, may request 
any additional information it deems necessary to evaluate the proposed 
conversion. The institution proposing to convert from mutual to stock 
form shall promptly provide such information to the FDIC.
    (e) Acceptance of notice. The 60-day notice period specified 
inSec. 303.163 shall commence on the date of receipt of a substantially 
complete notice. The FDIC shall notify the institution proposing to 
convert in writing of the date the notice is accepted.
    (f) Related applications. Related applications that require FDIC 
action may include:
    (1) Applications for deposit insurance, as required by subpart B of 
this part; and
    (2) Applications for consent to merge, as required by subpart D of 
this part.



Sec. 303.162  Waiver from compliance.

    (a) General. An institution proposing to convert from mutual to 
stock form may file with the appropriate FDIC office a letter requesting 
waiver of compliance with this subpart or Sec. 333.4 of this chapter:
    (1) When compliance with any provision of this section or Sec. 333.4 
of this chapter would be inconsistent or in conflict with applicable 
state law, or
    (2) For any other good cause shown.
    (b) Content of filing. In making a request for waiver under 
paragraph (a) of this section, the institution shall demonstrate that 
the requested waiver, if granted, would not result in any effects that 
would be detrimental to the safety and soundness of the institution, 
entail a breach of fiduciary duty on part of the institution's 
management or otherwise be detrimental or inequitable to the 
institution, its depositors, any other insured depository 
institution(s), the Deposit Insurance Fund, or to the public interest.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.163  Processing.

    (a) General considerations. The FDIC shall review the notice and 
other materials submitted by the institution proposing to convert from 
mutual to stock form, specifically considering the following factors:
    (1) The proposed use of the proceeds from the sale of stock, as set 
forth in the business plan;
    (2) The adequacy of the disclosure materials;
    (3) The participation of depositors in approving the transaction;
    (4) The form of the proxy statement required for the vote of the 
depositors/members on the conversion;
    (5) Any proposed increased compensation and other remuneration 
(including stock grants, stock option rights and other similar benefits) 
to be granted to officers and directors/trustees of the bank in 
connection with the conversion;

[[Page 38]]

    (6) The adequacy and independence of the appraisal of the value of 
the mutual savings bank for purposes of determining the price of the 
shares of stock to be sold;
    (7) The process by which the bank's trustees approved the appraisal, 
the pricing of the stock, and the proposed compensation arrangements for 
insiders;
    (8) The nature and apportionment of stock subscription rights; and
    (9) The bank's plans to fulfill its commitment to serving the 
convenience and needs of its community.
    (b) Additional considerations. (1) In reviewing the notice and other 
materials submitted under this subpart, the FDIC will take into account 
the extent to which the proposed conversion transaction conforms with 
the various provisions of the mutual-to-stock conversion regulations of 
the Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS) (12 CFR part 563b), as currently 
in effect at the time the notice is submitted. Any non-conformity with 
those provisions will be closely reviewed.
    (2) Conformity with the OTS requirements will not be sufficient for 
FDIC regulatory purposes if the FDIC determines that the proposed 
conversion transaction would pose a risk to the bank's safety or 
soundness, violate any law or regulation, or present a breach of 
fiduciary duty.
    (c) Notice period. (1) The period in which the FDIC may object to 
the proposed conversion transaction shall be the later of:
    (i) 60 days after receipt of a substantially complete notice of 
proposed conversion; or
    (ii) 20 days after the last applicable state or other federal 
regulator has approved the proposed conversion.
    (2) The FDIC may, in its discretion, extend the initial 60-day 
period for up to an additional 60 days by providing written notice to 
the institution.
    (d) Letter of non-objection. If the FDIC determines, in its 
discretion, that the proposed conversion transaction would not pose a 
risk to the institution's safety or soundness, violate any law or 
regulation, or present a breach of fiduciary duty, then the FDIC shall 
issue to the institution proposing to convert a letter of non-objection 
to the proposed conversion.
    (e) Letter of objection. If the FDIC determines, in its discretion, 
that the proposed conversion transaction poses a risk to the 
institution's safety or soundness, violates any law or regulation, or 
presents a breach of fiduciary duty, then the FDIC shall issue a letter 
to the institution stating its objection(s) to the proposed conversion 
and advising the institution not to consummate the proposed conversion 
until such letter is rescinded. A copy of the letter of objection shall 
be furnished to the institution's primary state regulator and any other 
state or federal banking regulator and state or federal securities 
regulator involved in the conversion.
    (f) Consummation of the conversion. (1) An institution may 
consummate the proposed conversion upon either:
    (i) The receipt of a letter of non-objection; or
    (ii) The expiration of the notice period.
    (2) If a letter of objection is issued, then the institution shall 
not consummate the proposed conversion until the FDIC rescinds such 
letter.



Secs. 303.164-303.179  [Reserved]



                     Subpart J_International Banking



Sec. 303.180  Scope.

    This subpart sets forth procedures for complying with application 
requirements relating to the foreign activities of insured state 
nonmember banks, U.S. activities of insured branches of foreign banks, 
and certain foreign mergers of insured depository institutions.



Sec. 303.181  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart, the following additional 
definitions apply:
    (a) Board of Governors means the Board of Governors of the Federal 
Reserve System.
    (b) Comptroller means the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.
    (c) Eligible insured branch. An insured branch will be treated as an 
eligible depository institution within the meaning of Sec. 303.2(r) if 
the insured branch:

[[Page 39]]

    (1) Received an FDIC-assigned composite ROCA supervisory rating 
(which rates risk management, operational controls, compliance, and 
asset quality) of 1 or 2 as a result of its most recent federal or state 
examination, and the FDIC, Comptroller, or Board of Governors have not 
expressed concern about the condition or operations of the foreign 
banking organization or the support it offers the branch;
    (2) Received a satisfactory or better Community Reinvestment Act 
(CRA) rating from its primary federal regulator at its most recent 
examination, if the depository institution is subject to examination 
under part 345 of this chapter;
    (3) Received a compliance rating of 1 or 2 from its primary federal 
regulator at its most recent examination;
    (4) Is well-capitalized as defined in subpart B of part 325 of this 
chapter or subpart H of part 324 of this chapter, as applicable; and
    (5) Is not subject to a cease and desist order, consent order, 
prompt corrective action directive, written agreement, memorandum of 
understanding, or other administrative agreement with any U.S. bank 
regulatory authority.
    (d) Federal branch means a federal branch of a foreign bank as 
defined by Sec. 347.202 of this chapter.
    (e) Foreign bank means a foreign bank as defined by Sec. 347.202 of 
this chapter.
    (f) Foreign branch means a foreign branch of an insured state 
nonmember bank as defined by Sec. 347.102 of this chapter.
    (g) Foreign organization means a foreign organization as defined by 
Sec. 347.102 of this chapter.
    (h) Insured branch means an insured branch of a foreign bank as 
defined by Sec. 347.202 of this chapter.
    (i) Noninsured branch means a noninsured branch of a foreign bank as 
defined by Sec. 347.202 of this chapter.
    (j) State branch means a state branch of a foreign bank as defined 
by Sec. 347.202 of this chapter.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 303.182  Establishing, moving or closing a foreign branch of an
insured state nonmember bank.

    (a) Notice procedures for general consent. Notice in the form of a 
letter from an eligible depository institution establishing or 
relocating a foreign branch pursuant to Sec. 347.117(a) of this chapter 
must be provided to the appropriate FDIC office no later than 30 days 
after taking such action. The notice must include the location of the 
foreign branch, including a street address, and a statement that the 
foreign branch has not been located on a site on the World Heritage List 
or on the foreign country's equivalent of the National Register of 
Historic Places (National Register), in accordance with section 402 of 
the National Historic Preservation Act Amendments of 1980 (NHPA 
Amendments Act) (16 U.S.C. 470a-2). The FDIC will provide written 
acknowledgment of receipt of the notice.
    (b) Filing procedures for other branch establishments--(1) Where to 
file. An applicant seeking to establish a foreign branch other than 
under Sec. 347.117(a) of this chapter shall submit an application to the 
appropriate FDIC office.
    (2) Content of filing. A complete letter application must include 
the following information:
    (i) The exact location of the proposed foreign branch, including the 
street address, and a statement whether the foreign branch will be 
located on a site on the World Heritage List or on the foreign country's 
equivalent of the National Register, in accordance with section 402 of 
the NHPA Amendments Act;
    (ii) Details concerning any involvement in the proposal by an 
insider of the applicant, as defined in Sec. 303.2(u) of this part, 
including any financial arrangements relating to fees, the acquisition 
of property, leasing of property, and construction contracts;
    (iii) A brief description of the applicant's business plan with 
respect to the foreign branch; and
    (iv) A brief description of the proposed activities of the branch 
and, to the extent any of the proposed activities are not authorized by 
Sec. 347.115 of this chapter, the applicant's reasons why they should be 
approved.

[[Page 40]]

    (3) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.
    (c) Processing--(1) Expedited processing for eligible depository 
institutions. An application filed under Sec. 347.118(a) of this chapter 
by an eligible depository institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) of 
this part seeking to establish a foreign branch by expedited processing 
will be acknowledged in writing by the FDIC and will receive expedited 
processing, unless the applicant is notified in writing to the contrary 
and provided with the basis for that decision. The FDIC may remove the 
application from expedited processing for any of the reasons set forth 
in Sec. 303.11(c)(2) of this part. Absent such removal, an application 
processed under expedited processing is deemed approved 45 days after 
receipt of a substantially complete application by the FDIC, or on such 
earlier date authorized by the FDIC in writing.
    (2) Standard processing. For those applications that are not 
processed pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the applicant with written notification of the final action when the 
decision is rendered.
    (d) Closing. Notices of branch closing under Sec. 347.121 of this 
chapter, in the form of a letter including the name, location, and date 
of closing of the closed branch, shall be filed with the appropriate 
FDIC office no later than 30 days after the branch is closed.

[70 FR 17558, Apr. 6, 2005]



Sec. 303.183  Investment by insured state nonmember banks in foreign
organization.

    (a) Notice procedures for general consent. Notice in the form of a 
letter from an eligible depository institution making direct or indirect 
investments in a foreign organization pursuant to Sec. 347.117(b) of 
this chapter shall be provided to the appropriate FDIC office no later 
than 30 days after taking such action. The FDIC will provide written 
acknowledgment of receipt of the notice.
    (b) Filing procedures for other investments--(1) Where to file. An 
applicant seeking to make a foreign investment other than under 
Sec. 347.117(b) of this chapter shall submit an application to the 
appropriate FDIC office.
    (2) Content of filing. A complete application shall include the 
following information:
    (i) Basic information about the terms of the proposed transaction, 
the amount of the investment in the foreign organization and the 
proportion of its ownership to be acquired;
    (ii) Basic information about the foreign organization, its financial 
position and income, including any available balance sheet and income 
statement for the prior year, or financial projections for a new foreign 
organization;
    (iii) A listing of all shareholders known to hold ten percent or 
more of any class of the foreign organization's stock or other evidence 
of ownership, and the amount held by each;
    (iv) A brief description of the applicant's business plan with 
respect to the foreign organization;
    (v) A brief description of any business or activities which the 
foreign organization will conduct directly or indirectly in the United 
States, and to the extent such activities are not authorized by subpart 
A of part 347, the applicant's reasons why they should be approved;
    (vi) A brief description of the foreign organization's activities, 
and to the extent such activities are not authorized by subpart A of 
part 347, the applicant's reasons why they should be approved; and
    (vii) If the applicant seeks approval to engage in underwriting or 
dealing activities, a description of the applicant's plans and 
procedures to address all relevant risks.
    (3) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.
    (c) Processing--(1) Expedited processing for eligible depository 
institutions. An application filed under Sec. 347.118(b) of this chapter 
by an eligible depository institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) of 
this part seeking to make direct or indirect investments in a foreign 
organization will be acknowledged in writing by the FDIC and will 
receive expedited processing, unless the applicant is notified in 
writing to the contrary and provided with the basis for that decision. 
The FDIC may remove the application from expedited processing for any of 
the reasons set forth

[[Page 41]]

in Sec. 303.11(c)(2) of this part. Absent such removal, an application 
processed under expedited processing is deemed approved 45 days after 
receipt of a substantially complete application by the FDIC, or on such 
earlier date authorized by the FDIC in writing.
    (2) Standard processing. For those applications which are not 
processed pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the applicant with written notification of the final action when the 
decision is rendered.
    (d) Divestiture. If an insured state nonmember bank holding 50 
percent or more of the voting equity interests of a foreign organization 
or otherwise controlling the foreign organization divests itself of such 
ownership or control, the insured state nonmember bank shall file a 
notice in the form of a letter, including the name, location, and date 
of divestiture of the foreign organization, with the appropriate FDIC 
office no later than 30 days after the divestiture.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 70 FR 17558, Apr. 6, 2005]



Sec. 303.184  Moving an insured branch of a foreign bank.

    (a) Filing procedures--(1) Where and when to file. An application by 
an insured branch of a foreign bank seeking the FDIC's consent to move 
from one location to another, as required by section 18(d)(1) of the FDI 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(d)(1)), shall be submitted in writing to the 
appropriate FDIC office on the date the notice required by paragraph (c) 
of this section is published, or within 5 days after the date of the 
last required publication.
    (2) Content of filing. A complete letter application shall include 
the following information:
    (i) The exact location of the proposed site, including the street 
address;
    (ii) Details concerning any involvement in the proposal by an 
insider of the applicant, as defined in Sec. 303.2(u), including any 
financial arrangements relating to fees, the acquisition of property, 
leasing of property, and construction contracts;
    (iii) A statement of the impact of the proposal on the human 
environment, including information on compliance with local zoning laws 
and regulations and the effect on traffic patterns, for purposes of 
complying with the applicable provisions of the NEPA, and the FDIC 
``Statement of Policy on NEPA'' (1 FDIC Law, Regulations, Related Acts 
5185; see Sec. 309.4(a) and (b) of this chapter for availability).
    (iv) A statement as to whether or not the site is eligible for 
inclusion in the National Register of Historic Places for purposes of 
complying with the applicable provisions of the NHPA, and the FDIC 
AStatement of Policy on NHPA'' (1 FDIC Law, Regulations, Related Acts 
5175; see Sec. 309.4(a) and (b) of this chapter for availability), 
including documentation of consultation with the State Historic 
Preservation Officer, as appropriate.
    (v) Comments on any changes in services to be offered, the community 
to be served, or any other effect the proposal may have on the 
applicant's compliance with the CRA; and
    (vi) A copy of the newspaper publication required by paragraph (c) 
of this section, as well as the name and address of the newspaper and 
the date of the publication.
    (3) Comptroller's application. If the applicant is filing an 
application with the Comptroller which contains the information required 
by paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the applicant may submit a copy to 
the FDIC in lieu of a separate application.
    (4) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.
    (b) Processing--(1) Expedited processing for eligible insured 
branches. An application filed by an eligible insured branch as defined 
in Sec. 303.181(c) of this part will be acknowledged in writing by the 
FDIC and will receive expedited processing if the applicant is proposing 
to move within the same state, unless the applicant is notified to the 
contrary and provided with the basis for that decision. The FDIC may 
remove an application from expedited processing for any of the reasons 
set forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2) of this part. Absent such removal, an 
application processed under expedited processing will be deemed approved 
on the latest of the following:

[[Page 42]]

    (i) The 21st day after the FDIC's receipt of a substantially 
complete application; or
    (ii) The 5th day after expiration of the comment period described in 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (2) Standard processing. For those applications that are not 
processed pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the applicant with written notification of the final action as soon as 
the decision is rendered.
    (c) Publication requirement and comment period--(1) Newspaper 
publications. The applicant shall publish a notice of its proposal to 
move from one location to another, as described in Sec. 303.7(b), in a 
newspaper of general circulation in the community in which the insured 
branch is located prior to its being moved and in the community to which 
it is to be moved. The notice shall include the insured branch's current 
and proposed addresses.
    (2) Public comments. All public comments must be received by the 
appropriate regional director within 15 days after the date of the last 
newspaper publication required by paragraph (c)(1) of this section, 
unless the comment period has been extended or reopened in accordance 
with Sec. 303.9(b)(2).
    (3) Lobby notices. If the insured branch has a public lobby, a copy 
of the newspaper publication shall be posted in the public lobby for at 
least 15 days beginning on the date of the publication required by 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
    (d) Other approval criteria. (1) The FDIC may approve an application 
under this section if the criteria in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through 
(d)(1)(vi) of this section is satisfied.
    (i) The factors set forth in section 6 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1816) have been considered and favorably resolved;
    (ii) The applicant is at least adequately capitalized as defined in 
subpart B of part 325 of this chapter or subpart H of part 324 of this 
chapter, as applicable;
    (iii) Any financial arrangements which have been made in connection 
with the proposed relocation and which involve the applicant's 
directors, officers, major shareholders, or their interests are fair and 
reasonable in comparison to similar arrangements that could have been 
made with independent third parties;
    (iv) Compliance with the CRA, the NEPA, the NHPA and any applicable 
related regulations, including 12 CFR part 345, has been considered and 
favorably resolved;
    (v) No CRA protest as defined in Sec. 303.2(l) has been filed which 
remains unresolved or, where such a protest has been filed and remains 
unresolved, the Director or designee concurs that approval is consistent 
with the purposes of the CRA and the applicant agrees in writing to any 
conditions imposed regarding the CRA; and
    (vi) The applicant agrees in writing to comply with any conditions 
imposed by the FDIC, other than the standard conditions defined in 
Sec. 303.2(dd) which may be imposed without the applicant's written 
consent.
    (e) Relocation of insured branch from one state to another. If the 
foreign bank proposes to relocate an insured state branch to a state 
that is outside the state where the branch is presently located, in 
addition to meeting the approval criteria contained in paragraph (d) of 
this section, the foreign bank must:
    (i) Comply with any applicable state laws or regulations of the 
states affected by the proposed relocation; and
    (ii) Obtain any required regulatory approvals from the appropriate 
state licensing authority of the state to which the insured branch 
proposes to relocate before relocating the existing branch operations 
and surrendering its existing license to the appropriate state licensing 
authority of the state from which the branch is relocating.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 70 FR 17559, Apr. 6, 2005; 78 
FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 303.185  Merger transactions involving foreign banks or foreign
organizations.

    (a) Merger transactions involving an insured branch of a foreign 
bank. Merger transactions requiring the FDIC's prior approval as set 
forth in Sec. 303.62 include any merger transaction in which the 
resulting institution is an insured branch of a foreign bank which is 
not a federal branch, or any merger transaction which involves any 
insured

[[Page 43]]

branch and any uninsured institution. In such cases:
    (1) References to an eligible depository institution in subpart D of 
this part include an eligible insured branch as defined in Sec. 303.181;
    (2) The definition of a corporate reorganization in Sec. 303.61(b) 
includes a merger transaction between an insured branch and other 
branches, agencies, or subsidiaries in the United States of the same 
foreign bank; and
    (3) For the purposes of Sec. 303.62(b)(1) on interstate mergers, a 
merger transaction involving an insured branch is one involving the 
acquisition of a branch of an insured bank without the acquisition of 
the bank for purposes of section 44 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831u) 
only when the merger transaction involves fewer than all the insured 
branches of the same foreign bank in the same state.
    (b) Certain merger transactions with foreign organizations outside 
any State. Merger transactions requiring the FDIC's prior approval as 
set forth in Sec. 303.62 include any merger transaction in which an 
insured depository institution becomes directly liable for obligations 
which will, after the merger transaction, be treated as deposits under 
section 3(l)(5)(A)(i)-(ii) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(l)(5)(A)(i)-
(ii)), as a result of a merger or consolidation with a foreign 
organization or an assumption of liabilities of a foreign organization.



Sec. 303.186  Exemptions from insurance requirements for a state 
branch of a foreign bank.

    (a) Filing procedures--(1) Where to file. An application by a 
foreign bank for consent to operate as a noninsured state branch, as 
permitted by Sec. 347.215(b) of this chapter, shall be submitted in 
writing to the appropriate FDIC office.
    (2) Content of filing. A complete letter application shall include 
the following information:
    (i) The kinds of deposit activities in which the state branch 
proposes to engage;
    (ii) The expected source of deposits;
    (iii) The manner in which deposits will be solicited;
    (iv) How the activity will maintain or improve the availability of 
credit to all sectors of the United States economy, including the 
international trade finance sector;
    (v) That the activity will not give the foreign bank an unfair 
competitive advantage over United States banking organizations; and
    (vi) A resolution by the applicant's board of directors, or evidence 
of approval by senior management if a resolution is not required 
pursuant to the applicant's organizational documents, authorizing the 
filing of the application.
    (3) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.
    (4) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with written 
notification of the final action taken.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 70 FR 17559, Apr. 6, 2005]



Sec. 303.187  Approval for an insured state branch of a foreign bank
to conduct activities not permissible for federal branches.

    (a) Filing procedures--(1) Where to file. An application by an 
insured state branch seeking approval to conduct activities not 
permissible for a federal branch, as required by Sec. 347.212(a) of this 
chapter, shall be submitted in writing to the appropriate FDIC office.
    (2) Content of filing. A complete letter application shall include 
the following information:
    (i) A brief description of the activity, including the manner in 
which it will be conducted and an estimate of the expected dollar volume 
associated with the activity;
    (ii) An analysis of the impact of the proposed activity on the 
condition of the United States operations of the foreign bank in general 
and of the branch in particular, including a copy of the feasibility 
study, management plan, financial projections, business plan, or similar 
document concerning the conduct of the activity;
    (iii) A resolution by the applicant's board of directors, or 
evidence of approval by senior management if a resolution is not 
required pursuant to the applicant's organizational documents,

[[Page 44]]

authorizing the filing of the application;
    (iv) A statement by the applicant of whether it is in compliance 
with sections 347.209 and 347.210 of this chapter;
    (v) A statement by the applicant that it has complied with all 
requirements of the Board of Governors concerning applications to 
conduct the activity in question and the status of each such 
application, including a copy of the Board of Governors' disposition of 
such application, if applicable; and
    (vi) A statement of why the activity will pose no significant risk 
to the Deposit Insurance Fund.
    (3) Board of Governors application. If the application to the Board 
of Governors contains the information required by paragraph (a) of this 
section, the applicant may submit a copy to the FDIC in lieu of a 
separate letter application.
    (4) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.
    (b) Divestiture or cessation--(1) Where to file. Divestiture plans 
necessitated by a change in law or other authority, as required by 
Sec. 347.212(e) of this chapter, shall be submitted in writing to the 
appropriate FDIC office.
    (2) Content of filing. A complete letter application shall include 
the following information:
    (i) A detailed description of the manner in which the applicant 
proposes to divest itself of or cease the activity in question; and
    (ii) A projected timetable describing how long the divestiture or 
cessation is expected to take.
    (3) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete processing.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 70 FR 17559, Apr. 6, 2005; 71 
FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Secs. 303.188-303.199  [Reserved]



                   Subpart K_Prompt Corrective Action



Sec. 303.200  Scope.

    (a) General. (1) This subpart covers applications filed pursuant to 
section 38 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o), which requires insured 
depository institutions that are not adequately capitalized to receive 
approval prior to engaging in certain activities. Section 38 restricts 
or prohibits certain activities and requires an insured depository 
institution to submit a capital restoration plan when it becomes 
undercapitalized. The restrictions and prohibitions become more severe 
as an institution's capital level declines.
    (2) Definitions of the capital categories referenced in this Prompt 
Corrective Action subpart may be found in subpart B of part 325 of this 
chapter, Sec. 325.103(b) for state nonmember banks and Sec. 325.103(c) 
for insured branches of foreign banks, or subpart H of part 324 of this 
chapter, Sec. 324.403(b) for state nonmember banks and Sec. 324.403(c) 
for insured branches of foreign banks, as applicable.
    (b) Institutions covered. Restrictions and prohibitions contained in 
subpart B of part 325 of this chapter, and subpart H of part 324 of this 
chapter, as applicable, apply primarily to state nonmember banks and 
insured branches of foreign banks, as well as to directors and senior 
executive officers of those institutions. Portions of subpart B of part 
325 of this chapter or subpart H of part 324 of this chapter, as 
applicable, also apply to all insured depository institutions that are 
deemed to be critically undercapitalized.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 303.201  Filing procedures.

    Applications shall be filed with the appropriate FDIC office. The 
application shall contain the information specified in each respective 
section of this subpart, and shall be in letter form as prescribed in 
Sec. 303.3. Additional information may be requested by the FDIC. Such 
letter shall be signed by the president, senior officer or a duly 
authorized agent of the insured depository institution and be 
accompanied by a certified copy of a resolution adopted by the 
institution's board of directors or trustees authorizing the 
application.



Sec. 303.202  Processing.

    The FDIC will provide the applicant with a subsequent written 
notification of the final action taken as soon as the decision is 
rendered.

[[Page 45]]



Sec. 303.203  Applications for capital distributions.

    (a) Scope. An insured state nonmember bank and any insured branch of 
a foreign bank shall submit an application for capital distribution if, 
after having made a capital distribution, the institution would be 
undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or critically 
undercapitalized.
    (b) Content of filing. An application to repurchase, redeem, retire 
or otherwise acquire shares or ownership interests of the insured 
depository institution shall describe the proposal, the shares or 
obligations which are the subject thereof, and the additional shares or 
obligations of the institution which will be issued in at least an 
amount equivalent to the distribution. The application also shall 
explain how the proposal will reduce the institution's financial 
obligations or otherwise improve its financial condition. If the 
proposed action also requires an application under section 18(i) of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(i)) as implemented by Sec. 303.241 of this part 
regarding prior consent to retire capital, such application should be 
filed concurrently with, or made a part of, the application filed 
pursuant to section 38 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o).



Sec. 303.204  Applications for acquisitions, branching, and new
lines of business.

    (a) Scope. (1) Any insured state nonmember bank and any insured 
branch of a foreign bank which is undercapitalized or significantly 
undercapitalized, and any insured depository institution which is 
critically undercapitalized, shall submit an application to engage in 
acquisitions, branching or new lines of business.
    (2) A new line of business will include any new activity exercised 
which, although it may be permissible, has not been exercised by the 
institution.
    (b) Content of filing. Applications shall describe the proposal, 
state the date the institution's capital restoration plan was accepted 
by its primary federal regulator, describe the institution's status in 
implementing the plan, and explain how the proposed action is consistent 
with and will further the achievement of the plan or otherwise further 
the purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act. If the FDIC is not the 
applicant's primary federal regulator, the application also should state 
whether approval has been requested from the applicant's primary federal 
regulator, the date of such request and the disposition of the request, 
if any. If the proposed action also requires applications pursuant to 
section 18 (c) or (d) of the FDI Act (mergers and branches) (12 U.S.C. 
1828 (c) or (d)), such applications should be filed concurrently with, 
or made a part of, the application filed pursuant to section 38 of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o).



Sec. 303.205  Applications for bonuses and increased compensation
for senior executive officers.

    (a) Scope. Any insured state nonmember bank or insured branch of a 
foreign bank that is significantly or critically undercapitalized, or 
any insured state nonmember bank or any insured branch of a foreign bank 
that is undercapitalized and which has failed to submit or implement in 
any material respect an acceptable capital restoration plan, shall 
submit an application to pay a bonus or increase compensation for any 
senior executive officer.
    (b) Content of filing. Applications shall list each proposed bonus 
or increase in compensation, and for the latter shall identify 
compensation for each of the twelve calendar months preceding the 
calendar month in which the institution became undercapitalized. 
Applications also shall state the date the institution's capital 
restoration plan was accepted by the FDIC, and describe any progress 
made in implementing the plan.



Sec. 303.206  Application for payment of principal or interest on
subordinated debt.

    (a) Scope. Any critically undercapitalized insured depository 
institution shall submit an application to pay principal or interest on 
subordinated debt.
    (b) Content of filing. Applications shall describe the proposed 
payment and provide an explanation of action taken under section 
38(h)(3)(A)(ii) of

[[Page 46]]

the FDI Act (action other than receivership or conservatorship). The 
application also shall explain how such payments would further the 
purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o). Existing 
approvals pursuant to requests filed under section 18(i)(1) of the FDI 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(i)(1)) (capital stock reductions or retirements) 
shall not be deemed to be the permission needed pursuant to section 38.



Sec. 303.207  Restricted activities for critically undercapitalized
institutions.

    (a) Scope. Any critically undercapitalized insured depository 
institution shall submit an application to engage in certain restricted 
activities.
    (b) Content of filing. Applications to engage in any of the 
following activities, as set forth in sections 38(i)(2) (A) through (G) 
of the FDI Act, shall describe the proposed activity and explain how the 
activity would further the purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831o):
    (1) Enter into any material transaction other than in the usual 
course of business including any action with respect to which the 
institution is required to provide notice to the appropriate federal 
banking agency. Materiality will be determined on a case-by-case basis;
    (2) Extend credit for any highly leveraged transaction. A highly 
leveraged transaction means an extension of credit to or investment in a 
business by an insured depository institution where the financing 
transaction involves a buyout, acquisition, or recapitalization of an 
existing business and one of the following criteria is met:
    (i) The transaction results in a liabilities-to-assets leverage 
ratio higher than 75 percent; or
    (ii) The transaction at least doubles the subject company's 
liabilities and results in a liabilities-to-assets leverage ratio higher 
than 50 percent; or
    (iii) The transaction is designated an highly leverage transaction 
by a syndication agent or a federal bank regulator.
    (iv) Loans and exposures to any obligor in which the total financing 
package, including all obligations held by all participants is $20 
million or more, or such lower level as the FDIC may establish by order 
on a case-by-case basis, will be excluded from this definition.
    (3) Amend the institution's charter or bylaws, except to the extent 
necessary to carry out any other requirement of any law, regulation, or 
order;
    (4) Make any material change in accounting methods;
    (5) Engage in any covered transaction (as defined in section 23A(b) 
of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b));
    (6) Pay excessive compensation or bonuses. Part 364 of this chapter 
provides guidance for determining excessive compensation; or
    (7) Pay interest on new or renewed liabilities at a rate that would 
increase the institution's weighted average cost of funds to a level 
significantly exceeding the prevailing rates of interest on insured 
deposits in the institution's normal market area. Section 337.6 of this 
chapter (Brokered deposits) provides guidance for defining the relevant 
terms of this provision; however this provision does not supersede the 
general prohibitions contained in Sec. 337.6.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Secs. 303.208-303.219  [Reserved]



   Subpart L_Section 19 of the FDI Act (Consent to Service of Persons 
                 Convicted of Certain Criminal Offenses)



Sec. 303.220  Scope.

    This subpart covers applications under section 19 of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1829). Pursuant to section 19, any person who has been convicted 
of any criminal offense involving dishonesty, breach of trust, or money 
laundering, or has agreed to enter into a pretrial diversion or similar 
program in connection with a prosecution for such offense, may not 
become, or continue as, an institution-affiliated party of an insured 
depository institution; own or control, directly or indirectly, any 
insured depository institution; or otherwise participate, directly or 
indirectly, in the conduct of the affairs of any insured depository 
institution

[[Page 47]]

without the prior written consent of the FDIC.



Sec. 303.221  Filing procedures.

    (a) Where to file. An application under section 19 of the FDI Act 
shall be filed with the appropriate FDIC office.
    (b) Contents of filing. Application forms may be obtained from any 
FDIC regional director. The FDIC may require additional information 
beyond that sought in the form, as warranted, in individual cases.



Sec. 303.222  Service at another insured depository institution.

    In the case of a person who has already been approved by the FDIC 
under this subpart or section 19 of the FDI Act in connection with a 
particular insured depository institution, such person may not become an 
institution affiliated party, or own or control directly or indirectly 
another insured depository institution, or participate in the conduct of 
the affairs of another insured depository institution, without the prior 
written consent of the FDIC.



Sec. 303.223  Applicant's right to hearing following denial.

    An applicant may request a hearing following a denial of an 
application in accordance with the provisions of part 308 of this 
chapter.



Secs. 303.224-303.239  [Reserved]



                         Subpart M_Other Filings



Sec. 303.240  General.

    This subpart sets forth the filing procedures to be followed when 
seeking the FDIC's consent to engage in certain activities or accomplish 
other matters as specified in the individual sections contained herein. 
For those matters covered by this subpart that also have substantive 
FDIC regulations or related statements of policy, references to the 
relevant regulations or statements of policy are contained in the 
specific sections.



Sec. 303.241  Reduce or retire capital stock or capital debt instruments.

    (a) Scope. This section contains the procedures to be followed by an 
insured state nonmember bank to seek the prior approval of the FDIC to 
reduce the amount or retire any part of its common or preferred stock, 
or to retire any part of its capital notes or debentures pursuant to 
section 18(i)(1) of the Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(i)(1)).
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.
    (c) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following:
    (1) The type and amount of the proposed change to the capital 
structure and the reason for the change;
    (2) A schedule detailing the present and proposed capital structure;
    (3) The time period that the proposal will encompass;
    (4) If the proposal involves a series of transactions affecting Tier 
1 capital components which will be consummated over a period of time 
which shall not exceed twelve months, the application shall certify that 
the insured depository institution will maintain itself as a well-
capitalized institution as defined in part 325 of this chapter or part 
324 of this chapter, as applicable, both before and after each of the 
proposed transactions;
    (5) If the proposal involves the repurchase of capital instruments, 
the amount of the repurchase price and the basis for establishing the 
fair market value of the repurchase price;
    (6) A statement that the proposal will be available to all holders 
of a particular class of outstanding capital instruments on an equal 
basis, and if not, the details of any restrictions; and
    (7) The date that the applicant's board of directors approved the 
proposal.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the application.
    (e) Undercapitalized institutions. Procedures regarding applications 
by an undercapitalized insured depository institution to retire capital 
stock or capital debt instruments pursuant to section 38 of the FDI Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1831o) are set forth in subpart K (Prompt Corrective Action), 
Sec. 303.203. Applications pursuant to sections 38 and 18(i) may be 
filed concurrently, or as a single application.

[[Page 48]]

    (f) Expedited processing for eligible depository institutions. An 
application filed under this section by an eligible depository 
institution as defined inSec. 303.2(r) will be acknowledged in writing 
by the FDIC and will receive expedited processing, unless the applicant 
is notified in writing to the contrary and provided with the basis for 
that decision. The FDIC may remove an application from expedited 
processing for any of the reasons set forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2). Absent 
such removal, an application processed under expedited processing will 
be deemed approved 20 days after the FDIC's receipt of a substantially 
complete application.
    (g) Standard processing. For those applications that are not 
processed pursuant to expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide the 
applicant with written notification of the final action as soon as the 
decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 78 FR 55470, Sept. 30, 2013]



Sec. 303.242  Exercise of trust powers.

    (a) Scope. This section contains the procedures to be followed by a 
state nonmember bank to seek the FDIC's prior consent to exercise trust 
powers. The FDIC's prior consent to exercise trust powers is not 
required in the following circumstances:
    (1) Where a state nonmember bank received authority to exercise 
trust powers from its chartering authority prior to December 1, 1950; or
    (2) Where an insured depository institution continues to conduct 
trust activities pursuant to authority granted by its chartering 
authority subsequent to a charter conversion or withdrawal from 
membership in the Federal Reserve System.
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit to the appropriate FDIC 
office a completed form, ``Application for Consent To Exercise Trust 
Powers''. This form may be obtained from any FDIC regional director.
    (c) Content of filing. The filing shall consist of the completed 
trust application form.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the filing.
    (e) Expedited processing for eligible depository institutions. An 
application filed under this section by an eligible depository 
institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) will be acknowledged in writing 
by the FDIC and will receive expedited processing, unless the applicant 
is notified in writing to the contrary and provided with the basis for 
that decision. The FDIC may remove an application from expedited 
processing for any of the reasons set forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2). Absent 
such removal, an application processed under expedited procedures will 
be deemed approved 30 days after the FDIC's receipt of a substantially 
complete application.
    (f) Standard processing. For those applications that are not 
processed pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide 
the applicant with written notification of the final action when the 
decision is rendered.



Sec. 303.243  Brokered deposit waivers.

    (a) Scope. Pursuant to section 29 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831f) 
and part 337 of this chapter, an adequately capitalized insured 
depository institution may not accept, renew or roll over any brokered 
deposits unless it has obtained a waiver from the FDIC. A well-
capitalized insured depository institution may accept brokered deposits 
without a waiver, and an undercapitalized insured depository institution 
may not accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposits under any 
circumstances. This section contains the procedures to be followed to 
file with the FDIC for a brokered deposit waiver. The FDIC will provide 
notice to the depository institution's appropriate federal banking 
agency and any state regulatory agency, as appropriate, that a request 
for a waiver has been filed and will consult with such agency or 
agencies, prior to taking action on the institution's request for a 
waiver. Prior notice and/or consultation shall not be required in any 
particular case if the FDIC determines that the circumstances require it 
to take action without giving such notice and opportunity for 
consultation.
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.

[[Page 49]]

    (c) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following:
    (1) The time period for which the waiver is requested;
    (2) A statement of the policy governing the use of brokered deposits 
in the institution's overall funding and liquidity management program;
    (3) The volume, rates and maturities of the brokered deposits held 
currently and anticipated during the waiver period sought, including any 
internal limits placed on the terms, solicitation and use of brokered 
deposits;
    (4) How brokered deposits are costed and compared to other funding 
alternatives and how they are used in the institution's lending and 
investment activities, including a detailed discussion of asset growth 
plans;
    (5) Procedures and practices used to solicit brokered deposits, 
including an identification of the principal sources of such deposits;
    (6) Management systems overseeing the solicitation, acceptance and 
use of brokered deposits;
    (7) A recent consolidated financial statement with balance sheet and 
income statements; and
    (8) The reasons the institution believes its acceptance, renewal or 
rollover of brokered deposits would pose no undue risk.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the application.
    (e) Expedited processing for eligible depository institutions. An 
application filed under this section by an eligible depository 
institution as defined in this paragraph will be acknowledged in writing 
by the FDIC and will receive expedited processing, unless the applicant 
is notified in writing to the contrary and provided with the basis for 
that decision. For the purpose of this section, an applicant will be 
deemed an eligible depository institution if it satisfies all of the 
criteria contained in Sec. 303.2(r) except that the applicant may be 
adequately capitalized rather than well-capitalized. The FDIC may remove 
an application from expedited processing for any of the reasons set 
forth in Sec. 303.11(c)(2). Absent such removal, an application 
processed under expedited procedures will be deemed approved 21 days 
after the FDIC's receipt of a substantially complete application.
    (f) Standard processing. For those filings which are not processed 
pursuant to the expedited procedures, the FDIC will provide the 
applicant with written notification of the final action as soon as the 
decision is rendered.
    (g) Conditions for approval. A waiver issued pursuant to this 
section shall:
    (1) Be for a fixed period, generally no longer than two years, but 
may be extended upon refiling; and
    (2) May be revoked by the FDIC at any time by written notice to the 
institution.



Sec. 303.244  Golden parachute and severance plan payments.

    (a) Scope. Pursuant to section 18(k) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1828(k)) and part 359 of this chapter, an insured depository institution 
or depository institution holding company may not make golden parachute 
payments or excess nondiscriminatory severance plan payments unless the 
depository institution or holding company obtains permission to make 
such payments in accordance with the rules contained in part 359 of this 
chapter. This section contains the procedures to file for the FDIC's 
consent when such consent is necessary under part 359 of this chapter.
    (1) Golden parachute payments. A troubled insured depository 
institution or a troubled depository institution holding company is 
prohibited from making golden parachute payments (as defined in 
Sec. 359.1(f)(1) of this chapter) unless it obtains the consent of the 
appropriate federal banking agency and the written concurrence of the 
FDIC. Therefore, in the case of golden parachute payments, the 
procedures in this section apply to all troubled insured depository 
institutions and troubled depository institution holding companies.
    (2) Excess nondiscriminatory severance plan payments. In the case of 
excess nondiscriminatory severance plan payments as provided by 
Sec. 359.1(f)(2)(v) of this chapter, the FDIC's consent is necessary for 
state nonmember banks that meet the criteria set forth in 
Sec. 359.1(f)(1)(ii) of this chapter. In addition, the FDIC's consent is 
required for all insured depository institutions or

[[Page 50]]

depository institution holding companies that meet the same criteria and 
seek to make payments in excess of the 12-month amount specified in 
Sec. 359.1(f)(2)(v).
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC regional director.
    (c) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following:
    (1) The reasons why the applicant seeks to make the payment;
    (2) An identification of the institution-affiliated party who will 
receive the payment;
    (3) A copy of any contract or agreement regarding the subject matter 
of the filing;
    (4) The cost of the proposed payment and its impact on the 
institution's capital and earnings;
    (5) The reasons why the consent to the payment should be granted; 
and
    (6) Certification and documentation as to each of the points cited 
in Sec. 359.4(a)(4).
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the filing.
    (e) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with a 
subsequent written notification of the final action taken as soon as the 
decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 68 FR 50461, Aug. 21, 2003]



Sec. 303.245  Waiver of liability for commonly controlled depository
institutions.

    (a) Scope. Section 5(e) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1815(e)) creates 
liability for commonly controlled insured depository institutions for 
losses incurred or anticipated to be incurred by the FDIC in connection 
with the default of a commonly controlled insured depository institution 
or any assistance provided by the FDIC to any commonly controlled 
insured depository institution in danger of default. In addition to 
certain statutory exceptions and exclusions contained in sections 
5(e)(6), (7) and (8), the FDI Act also permits the FDIC, in its 
discretion, to exempt any insured depository institution from this 
liability if it determines that such exemption is in the best interests 
of the Deposit Insurance Fund. This section describes procedures to 
request a conditional waiver of liability pursuant to section 5 of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1815(e)(5)(A)).
    (b) Definition. Conditional waiver of liability means an exemption 
from liability pursuant to section 5(e) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1815(e)) subject to terms and conditions.
    (c) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.
    (d) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following 
information:
    (1) The basis for requesting a waiver;
    (2) The existence of any significant events (e.g., change in 
control, capital injection, etc.) that may have an impact upon the 
applicant and/or any potentially liable institution;
    (3) Current, and if applicable, pro forma financial information 
regarding the applicant and potentially liable institution(s); and
    (4) The benefits to the appropriate FDIC insurance fund resulting 
from the waiver and any related events.
    (e) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during the processing of the filing.
    (f) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with written 
notification of the final action as soon as the decision is rendered.
    (g) Failure to comply with terms of conditional waiver. In the event 
a conditional waiver of liability is issued, failure to comply with the 
terms specified therein may result in the termination of the conditional 
waiver of liability. The FDIC reserves the right to revoke the 
conditional waiver of liability after giving the applicant written 
notice of such revocation and a reasonable opportunity to be heard on 
the matter pursuant to Sec. 303.10.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.246  Conversion with diminution of capital.

    (a) Scope. This section contains the procedures to be followed by an 
insured federal depository institution seeking the prior written consent 
of the FDIC pursuant to section 18(i)(2) of the FDI

[[Page 51]]

Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(i)(2)) to convert from an insured federal depository 
institution to an insured state nonmember bank (except a District bank) 
where the capital stock or surplus of the resulting bank will be less 
than the capital stock or surplus, respectively, of the converting 
institution at the time of the shareholders' meeting approving such 
conversion.
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.
    (c) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following 
information:
    (1) A description of the proposed transaction;
    (2) A schedule detailing the present and proposed capital structure; 
and
    (3) A copy of any documents submitted to the state chartering 
authority with respect to the charter conversion.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during the processing.
    (e) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with written 
notification of the final action when the decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.247  Continue or resume status as an insured institution
following termination under section 8 of the FDI Act.

    (a) Scope. This section relates to an application by a depository 
institution whose insured status has been terminated under section 8 of 
the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1818) for permission to continue or resume its 
status as an insured depository institution. This section covers 
institutions whose deposit insurance continues in effect for any purpose 
or for any length of time under the terms of an FDIC order terminating 
deposit insurance, but does not cover operating non-insured depository 
institutions which were previously insured by the FDIC, or any non-
insured, non-operating depository institution whose charter has not been 
surrendered or revoked.
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.
    (c) Content of filing. The filing shall contain the following 
information:
    (1) A complete statement of the action requested, all relevant 
facts, and the reason for such requested action; and
    (2) A certified copy of the resolution of the depository 
institution's board of directors authorizing submission of the filing.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the filing.
    (e) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with written 
notification of the final action as soon as the decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.248  Truth in Lending Act--Relief from reimbursement.

    (a) Scope. This section applies to requests for relief from 
reimbursement pursuant to the Truth in Lending Act (15 U.S.C. 1601 et 
seq.) and Regulation Z (12 CFR part 226). Related delegations of 
authority are also set forth.
    (b) Procedures to be followed in filing initial requests for relief. 
Requests for relief from reimbursement shall be filed with the 
appropriate FDIC office or within 60 days after receipt of the 
compliance report of examination containing the request to conduct a 
file search and make restitution to affected customers. The filing shall 
contain a complete and concise statement of the action requested, all 
relevant facts, the reasons and analysis relied upon as the basis for 
such requested action, and all supporting documentation.
    (c) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of any such requests.
    (d) Processing. The FDIC will acknowledge receipt of the request for 
reconsideration and provide the applicant with written notification of 
its determination within 60 days of its receipt of the request for 
reconsideration.
    (e) Procedures to be followed in filing requests for 
reconsideration. Within 15 days of receipt of written notice that its 
request for relief has been denied,

[[Page 52]]

the requestor may petition the appropriate FDIC office for 
reconsideration of such request in accordance with the procedures set 
forth inSec. 303.11(f).

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.249  Management official interlocks.

    (a) Scope. This section contains the procedures to be followed by an 
insured state nonmember bank to seek the approval of FDIC to establish 
an interlock pursuant to the Depository Institutions Management 
Interlocks Act (12 U.S.C. 3207), section 13 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1823(k)) and part 348 of this chapter (12 CFR part 348).
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.
    (c) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following:
    (1) A description of the proposed interlock;
    (2) A statement of reason as to why the interlock will not result in 
a monopoly or a substantial lessening of competition; and
    (3) If the applicant is seeking an exemption set forth in Sec. 348.5 
or 348.6 of this chapter, a description of the particular exemption 
which is being requested and a statement of reasons as to why the 
exemption is applicable.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the filing.
    (e) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with written 
notification of the final action when the decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.250  Modification of conditions.

    (a) Scope. This section contains the procedures to be followed by an 
insured depository institution to seek the prior consent of the FDIC to 
modify the requirement of a prior approval of a filing issued by the 
FDIC.
    (b) Where to file. Applicants should submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC regional director.
    (c) Content of filing. The application should contain the following 
information:
    (1) A description of the original approved application;
    (2) A description of the modification requested; and
    (3) The reason for the request.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the filing.
    (e) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with a written 
notification of the final action as soon as the decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 303.251  Extension of time.

    (a) Scope. This section contains the procedures to be followed by an 
insured depository institution to seek the prior consent of the FDIC for 
additional time to fulfill a condition required in an approval of a 
filing issued by the FDIC or to consummate a transaction which was the 
subject of an approval by the FDIC.
    (b) Where to file. Applicants shall submit a letter application to 
the appropriate FDIC office.
    (c) Content of filing. The application shall contain the following 
information:
    (1) A description of the original approved application;
    (2) Identification of the original time limitation;
    (3) The additional time period requested; and
    (4) The reason for the request.
    (d) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information at any time during processing of the filing.
    (e) Processing. The FDIC will provide the applicant with written 
notification of the final action as soon as the decision is rendered.

[67 FR 79247, Dec. 27, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006]



Secs. 303.252-303.259  [Reserved]



PART 304_FORMS, INSTRUCTIONS, AND REPORTS--Table of Contents



Sec.
304.1  Purpose.
304.2  Where to obtain forms and instructions.

[[Page 53]]

304.3  Reports.

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552; 12 U.S.C. 1817, 1831, 1867.

    Source: 67 FR 18793, Apr. 17, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 304.1  Purpose.

    Part 304 informs the public where it may obtain forms and 
instructions for reports, applications, and other submittals used by the 
FDIC, and also describes certain forms that are not described elsewhere 
in FDIC regulations.



Sec. 304.2  Where to obtain forms and instructions.

    Forms and instructions used in connection with applications, 
reports, and other submittals used by the FDIC can be obtained by 
contacting the FDIC Public Information Center (801 17th Street, NW., 
Washington, DC 20434; telephone: 800-276-6003 or 202-416-6940), except 
as noted below in Sec. 304.3. In addition, many forms and instructions 
can be obtained from FDIC regional offices. A list of FDIC regional 
offices can be obtained from the FDIC Public Information Center or found 
at the FDIC's web site at http://www.fdic.gov, or in the directory of 
FDIC Law, Regulations and Related Acts published by the FDIC.



Sec. 304.3  Reports.

    (a) Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income, Forms FFIEC 031 
and 041. Pursuant to section 7(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1817(a)), every national bank, state member bank, and insured 
state nonmember bank is required to file Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income (also known as the Call Report) in accordance with 
the instructions for these reports. All assets and liabilities, 
including contingent assets and liabilities, must be reported in, or 
otherwise taken into account in the preparation of, the Call Report. The 
FDIC uses Call Report data to calculate deposit insurance assessments 
and monitor the condition, performance, and risk profile of individual 
banks and the banking industry. Reporting banks must also submit 
annually such information on small business and small farm lending as 
the FDIC may need to assess the availability of credit to these sectors 
of the economy. The report forms and instructions can be obtained from 
the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC), FDIC, 
Washington, DC 20429.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
3064-0052)

    (b) Report of Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and Agencies 
of Foreign Banks, Form FFIEC 002. Pursuant to section 7(a) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1817(a)), every insured U.S. 
branch of a foreign bank is required to file a Report of Assets and 
Liabilities of U.S. Branches and Agencies of Foreign Banks in accordance 
with the instructions for the report. All assets and liabilities, 
including contingent assets and liabilities, must be reported in, or 
otherwise taken into account in the preparation of the report. The FDIC 
uses the reported data to calculate deposit insurance assessments and 
monitor the condition, performance, and risk profile of individual 
insured branches and the banking industry. Insured branches must also 
submit annually such information on small business and small farm 
lending as the FDIC may need to assess the availability of credit to 
these sectors of the economy. Because the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System collects and processes this report on behalf of 
the FDIC, the report forms and instructions can be obtained from Federal 
Reserve District Banks or through the web site of the Federal Financial 
Institutions Examination Council, http://www.ffiec.gov/.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
7100-0032)

    (c) Summary of Deposits, Form FDIC 8020/05. Form 8020/05 is a report 
on the amount of deposits for each authorized office of an insured bank 
with branches; unit banks do not report. Reports as of June 30 of each 
year must be submitted no later than the immediately succeeding July 31. 
The report forms and the instructions for completing the reports will be 
furnished to all such banks by, or may be obtained upon request from, 
the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection

[[Page 54]]

(DSC), FDIC, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
3064-0061)

    (d) Notification of Performance of Bank Services, Form FDIC 6120/06. 
Pursuant to Section 7 of the Bank Service Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1867), 
as amended, FDIC supervised banks must notify the agency about the 
existence of a service relationship within thirty days after the making 
of the contract or the performance of the service, whichever occurs 
first. Form FDIC 6120/06 may be used to satisfy the notice requirement. 
The form contains identification, location and contact information for 
the bank, the servicer, and a description of the services provided. In 
lieu of the form, notification may be provided by letter. Either the 
form or the letter containing the notice information must be submitted 
to the regional director--Division of Supervision and Consumer 
Protection (DSC) of the region in which the bank's main office is 
located.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
3064-0029)

                        PARTS 305	306 [RESERVED]



PART 307_CERTIFICATION OF ASSUMPTION OF DEPOSITS AND NOTIFICATION
OF CHANGES OF INSURED STATUS--Table of Contents



Sec.
307.1   Scope and purpose.
307.2   Certification of assumption of deposit liabilities.
307.3   Notice to depositors when insured status is voluntarily 
          terminated and deposits are not assumed.

Appendix A to Part 307--Transferring Institution Letterhead
Appendix B to Part 307--Institution Letterhead

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(6); 1818(q); and 1819(a) [Tenth].

    Source: 71 FR 8791, Feb. 21, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 307.1  Scope and purpose.

    (a) Scope. This Part applies to all insured depository institutions, 
as defined in section 3(c)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI 
Act) (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(2)).
    (b) Purpose. This Part sets forth the rules governing:
    (1) The time and manner for providing certification to the FDIC 
regarding the assumption of all of the deposit liabilities of an insured 
depository institution by one or more insured depository institutions; 
and
    (2) The notification that an insured depository institution shall 
provide its depositors when a depository institution's insured status is 
being voluntarily terminated without its deposits being assumed by one 
or more insured depository institutions.



Sec. 307.2  Certification of assumption of deposit liabilities.

    (a) When certification is required. Whenever all of the deposit 
liabilities of an insured depository institution are assumed by one or 
more insured depository institutions by merger, consolidation, other 
statutory assumption, or by contract, the transferring insured 
depository institution, or its legal successor, shall provide an 
accurate written certification to the FDIC that its deposit liabilities 
have been assumed. No certification shall be required when deposit 
liabilities are assumed by an operating insured depository institution 
from an insured depository institution in default, as defined in section 
3(x)(1) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(x)(1)), and that has been placed 
under FDIC receivership.
    (b) Certification requirements. The certification required by 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be provided on official letterhead 
of the transferring insured depository institution or its legal 
successor, signed by a duly authorized official, and state the date the 
assumption took effect. The certification shall indicate the date on 
which the transferring institution's authority to engage in banking has 
terminated or will terminate as well as the method of termination (e.g., 
whether by the surrender of its charter, by the cancellation of its 
charter or license to conduct a banking business, or otherwise). The 
certification may follow the form contained in Appendix A of this part. 
In a merger or consolidation where there is only one surviving entity 
which is the

[[Page 55]]

legal successor to both the transferring and assuming institutions, the 
surviving entity shall provide any required certification.
    (c) Filing. The certification required by paragraph (a) of this 
section shall be provided within 30 calendar days after the assumption 
takes effect, and shall be submitted to the appropriate Regional 
Director of the FDIC's Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection, 
as defined in 12 CFR 303.2(g).
    (d) Evidence of assumption. The receipt by the FDIC of an accurate 
certification for a total assumption as required by paragraphs (a), (b) 
and (c) of this section shall constitute satisfactory evidence of such 
deposit assumption, as required by section 8(q) of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1818(q)), and the insured status of the transferring institution 
shall terminate on the date of the receipt of the certification. In 
appropriate circumstances, the FDIC, in its sole discretion, may require 
additional information, or may consider other evidence of a deposit 
assumption to constitute satisfactory evidence of such assumption for 
purposes of section 8(q).
    (e) Issuance of an order. The Executive Secretary, upon request from 
the Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection and 
with the concurrence of the General Counsel, or their respective 
designees, shall issue an order terminating the insured status of the 
transferring insured depository institution as of the date of receipt by 
the FDIC of satisfactory evidence of such assumption, pursuant to 
section 8(q) of the FDI Act and this regulation. Generally, no order 
shall be issued, under this paragraph, and insured status shall be 
cancelled by operation of law:
    (1) If the charter of the transferring institution has been 
cancelled, revoked, rescinded, or otherwise terminated by operation of 
applicable state or federal statutes or regulations, or by action of the 
chartering authority for the transferring institution essentially 
contemporaneously, that is, generally within five business days after 
all deposits have been assumed; or
    (2) If the transferring institution is an insured depository 
institution in default and for which the FDIC has been appointed 
receiver.



Sec. 307.3  Notice to depositors when insured status is voluntarily
terminated and deposits are not assumed.

    (a) Notice required. An insured depository institution that has 
obtained authority from the FDIC to terminate its insured status under 
sections 8(a), 8(p) or 18(i)(3) of the FDI Act without its deposit 
liabilities being assumed by one or more insured depository institutions 
shall provide to each of its depositors, at the depositor's last known 
address of record on the books of the institution, prior written 
notification of the date the institution's insured status shall 
terminate.
    (b) Prior approval of notice. The insured depository institution 
shall provide the appropriate Regional Director of the FDIC's Division 
of Supervision and Consumer Protection, as defined in 12 CFR 303.2(g), a 
copy of the proposed notice for approval. After being approved, the 
notice shall be provided to depositors by the insured depository 
institution at the time and in the manner specified by the appropriate 
Regional Director.
    (c) Form of notice. The notice to depositors required by paragraph 
(a) of this section shall be provided on the official letterhead of the 
insured depository institution, shall bear the signature of a duly 
authorized officer, and, unless otherwise specified by the appropriate 
Regional Director, may follow the form of the notice contained in 
Appendix B of this part.
    (d) Other requirements possible. The FDIC may require the insured 
depository institution to take such other actions as the FDIC considers 
necessary and appropriate for the protection of depositors.



    Sec. Appendix A to Part 307--Transferring Institution Letterhead

[Date]

[Name and Address of appropriate FDIC Regional Director]

SUBJECT: Certification of Total Assumption of Deposits

    This certification is being provided pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(q) 
and 12 CFR 307.2. On [state the date the deposit assumption took 
effect], [state the name of the depository institution assuming the 
deposit liabilities] assumed

[[Page 56]]

all of the deposits of [state the name and location of the transferring 
institution whose deposits were assumed]. [If applicable, state the date 
and method by which the transferring institution's authority to engage 
in banking was or will be terminated.] Please contact the undersigned, 
at [telephone number], if additional information is needed.

Sincerely,

By:

[Name and Title of Authorized Representative]



           Sec. Appendix B to Part 307--Institution Letterhead

[Date]

[Name and Address of Depositor]

SUBJECT: Notice to Depositor of Voluntary Termination of Insured Status

    The insured status of [name of insured depository institution], 
under the provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, will 
terminate as of the close of business on [state the date] (``termination 
date''). Insured deposits in the [name of insured depository 
institution] on the termination date, less all withdrawals from such 
deposits made subsequent to that date, will continue to be insured by 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, to the extent provided by 
law, until [state the date]. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
will not insure any new deposits or additions to existing deposits made 
by you after the termination date.
    This Notice is being provided pursuant to 12 CFR 307.3.
    Please contact [name of institution official in charge of depositor 
inquiries], at [name and address of insured depository institution] if 
additional information is needed regarding this Notice or the insured 
status of your account(s).

Sincerely,

By:

[Name and Title of Authorized Representative]



PART 308_RULES OF PRACTICE AND PROCEDURE--Table of Contents



            Subpart A_Uniform Rules of Practice and Procedure

Sec.
308.1  Scope.
308.2  Rules of construction.
308.3  Definitions.
308.4  Authority of Board of Directors.
308.5  Authority of the administrative law judge.
308.6  Appearance and practice in adjudicatory proceedings.
308.7  Good faith certification.
308.8  Conflicts of interest.
308.9  Ex parte communications.
308.10  Filing of papers.
308.11  Service of papers.
308.12  Construction of time limits.
308.13  Change of time limits.
308.14  Witness fees and expenses.
308.15  Opportunity for informal settlement.
308.16  FDIC's right to conduct examination.
308.17  Collateral attacks on adjudicatory proceeding.
308.18  Commencement of proceeding and contents of notice.
308.19  Answer.
308.20  Amended pleadings.
308.21  Failure to appear.
308.22  Consolidation and severance of actions.
308.23  Motions.
308.24  Scope of document discovery.
308.25  Request for document discovery from parties.
308.26  Document subpoenas to nonparties.
308.27  Deposition of witness unavailable for hearing.
308.28  Interlocutory review.
308.29  Summary disposition.
308.30  Partial summary disposition.
308.31  Scheduling and prehearing conferences.
308.32  Prehearing submissions.
308.33  Public hearings.
308.34  Hearing subpoenas.
308.35  Conduct of hearings.
308.36  Evidence.
308.37  Post-hearing filings.
308.38  Recommended decision and filing of record.
308.39  Exceptions to recommended decision.
308.40  Review by Board of Directors.
308.41  Stays pending judicial review.

                  Subpart B_General Rules of Procedure

308.101  Scope of Local Rules.
308.102  Authority of Board of Directors and Executive Secretary.
308.103  Appointment of administrative law judge.
308.104  Filings with the Board of Directors.
308.105  Custodian of the record.
308.106  Written testimony in lieu of oral hearing.
308.107  Document discovery.

  Subpart C_Rules of Practice Before the FDIC and Standards of Conduct

308.108  Sanctions.
308.109  Suspension and disbarment.

  Subpart D_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
                  Disapproval of Acquisition of Control

308.110  Scope.
308.111  Grounds for disapproval.

[[Page 57]]

308.112  Notice of disapproval.
308.113  Answer to notice of disapproval.
308.114  Burden of proof.

  Subpart E_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
 Assessment of Civil Penalties for Willful Violations of the Change in 
                            Bank Control Act

308.115  Scope.
308.116  Assessment of penalties.
308.117  Effective date of, and payment under, an order to pay.
308.118  Collection of penalties.

Subpart F_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings for Involuntary 
                      Termination of Insured Status

308.119  Scope.
308.120  Grounds for termination of insurance.
308.121  Notification to primary regulator.
308.122  Notice of intent to terminate.
308.123  Notice to depositors.
308.124  Involuntary termination of insured status for failure to 
          receive deposits.
308.125  Temporary suspension of deposit insurance.
308.126  Special supervisory associations.

  Subpart G_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
                         Cease-and-Desist Orders

308.127  Scope.
308.128  Grounds for cease-and-desist orders.
308.129  Notice to state supervisory authority.
308.130  Effective date of order and service on bank.
308.131  Temporary cease-and-desist order.

  Subpart H_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
  Assessment and Collection of Civil Money Penalties for Violation of 
Cease-and-Desist Orders and of Certain Federal Statutes, Including Call 
                            Report Penalties

308.132  Assessment of penalties.
308.133  Effective date of, and payment under, an order to pay.

    Subpart I_Rules and Procedures for Imposition of Sanctions Upon 
    Municipal Securities Dealers or Persons Associated With Them and 
                  Clearing Agencies or Transfer Agents

308.134  Scope.
308.135  Grounds for imposition of sanctions.
308.136  Notice to and consultation with the Securities and Exchange 
          Commission.
308.137  Effective date of order imposing sanctions.

 Subpart J_Rules and Procedures Relating to Exemption Proceedings Under 
          Section 12(h) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

308.138  Scope.
308.139  Application for exemption.
308.140  Newspaper notice.
308.141  Notice of hearing.
308.142  Hearing.
308.143  Decision of Board of Directors.

 Subpart K_Procedures Applicable to Investigations Pursuant to Section 
                            10(c) of the FDIA

308.144  Scope.
308.145  Conduct of investigation.
308.146  Powers of person conducting investigation.
308.147  Investigations confidential.
308.148  Rights of witnesses.
308.149  Service of subpoena.
308.150  Transcripts.

 Subpart L_Procedures and Standards Applicable to a Notice of Change in 
 Senior Executive Officer or Director Pursuant to Section 32 of the FDIA

308.151  Scope.
308.152  Grounds for disapproval of notice.
308.153  Procedures where notice of disapproval issues pursuant to 
          Sec. 303.103(c) of this chapter.
308.154  Decision on review.
308.155  Hearing.

Subpart M_Procedures and Standards Applicable to an Application Pursuant 
                        to Section 19 of the FDIA

308.156  Scope.
308.157  Relevant considerations.
308.158  Filing papers and effective date.
308.159  Denial of applications.
308.160  Hearings.

  Subpart N_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
     Suspension, Removal, and Prohibition Where a Felony Is Charged

308.161  Scope.
308.162  Relevant considerations.
308.163  Notice of suspension or prohibition, and orders of removal or 
          prohibition.
308.164  Hearings.

   Subpart O_Liability of Commonly Controlled Depository Institutions

308.165  Scope.
308.166  Grounds for assessment of liability.

[[Page 58]]

308.167  Notice of assessment of liability.
308.168  Effective date of and payment under an order to pay.

Subpart P_Rules and Procedures Relating to the Recovery of Attorney Fees 
                           and Other Expenses

308.169  Scope.
308.170  Filing, content, and service of documents.
308.171  Responses to application.
308.172  Eligibility of applicants.
308.173  Prevailing party.
308.174  Standards for awards.
308.175  Measure of awards.
308.176  Application for awards.
308.177  Statement of net worth.
308.178  Statement of fees and expenses.
308.179  Settlement negotiations.
308.180  Further proceedings.
308.181  Recommended decision.
308.182  Board of Directors action.
308.183  Payment of awards.

     Subpart Q_Issuance and Review of Orders Pursuant to the Prompt 
    Corrective Action Provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act

308.200  Scope.
308.201  Directives to take prompt corrective action.
308.202  Procedures for reclassifying a bank based on criteria other 
          than capital.
308.203  Order to dismiss a director or senior executive officer.
308.204  Enforcement of directives.

Subpart R_Submission and Review of Safety and Soundness Compliance Plans 
   and Issuance of Orders To Correct Safety and Soundness Deficiencies

308.300  Scope.
308.301  Purpose.
308.302  Determination and notification of failure to meet a safety and 
          soundness standard and request for compliance plan.
308.303  Filing of safety and soundness compliance plan.
308.304  Issuance of orders to correct deficiencies and to take or 
          refrain from taking other actions.
308.305  Enforcement of orders.

Subpart S_Applications for a Stay or Review of Actions of Bank Clearing 
                                Agencies

308.400  Scope.
308.401  Applications for stays of disciplinary sanctions or summary 
          suspensions by a bank clearing agency.
308.402  Applications for review of final disciplinary sanctions, 
          denials of participation, or prohibitions or limitations of 
          access to services imposed by bank clearing agencies.

          Subpart T_Program Fraud Civil Remedies and Procedures

308.500  Basis, purpose, and scope.
308.501  Definitions.
308.502  Basis for civil penalties and assessments.
308.503  Investigations.
308.504  Review by the reviewing official.
308.505  Prerequisites for issuing a complaint.
308.506  Complaint.
308.507  Service of complaint.
308.508  Answer.
308.509  Default upon failure to file an answer.
308.510  Referral of complaint and answer to the ALJ.
308.511  Notice of hearing.
308.512  Parties to the hearing.
308.513  Separation of functions.
308.514  Ex parte contacts.
308.515  Disqualification of reviewing official or ALJ.
308.516  Rights of parties.
308.517  Authority of the ALJ.
308.518  Prehearing conferences.
308.519  Disclosure of documents.
308.520  Discovery.
308.521  Exchange of witness lists, statements, and exhibits.
308.522  Subpoenas for attendance at hearing.
308.523  Protective order.
308.524  Witness fees.
308.525  Form, filing, and service of papers.
308.526  Computation of time.
308.527  Motions.
308.528  Sanctions.
308.529  The hearing and burden of proof.
308.530  Determining the amount of penalties and assessments.
308.531  Location of hearing.
308.532  Witnesses.
308.533  Evidence.
308.534  The record.
308.535  Post-hearing briefs.
308.536  Initial decision.
308.537  Reconsideration of initial decision.
308.538  Appeal to the Board of Directors.
308.539  Stays ordered by the Department of Justice.
308.540  Stay pending appeal.
308.541  Judicial review.
308.542  Collection of civil penalties and assessments.
308.543  Right to administrative offset.
308.544  Deposit in Treasury of United States.
308.545  Compromise or settlement.

[[Page 59]]

308.546  Limitations.

    Subpart U_Removal, Suspension, and Debarment of Accountants From 
                        Performing Audit Services

308.600  Scope.
308.601  Definitions.
308.602  Removal, suspension, or debarment.
308.603  Automatic removal, suspension, and debarment.
308.604  Notice of removal, suspension, or debarment.
308.605  Application for reinstatement.

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 504, 554-557; 12 U.S.C. 93(b), 164, 505, 1464, 
1467(d), 1467a, 1468, 1815(e), 1817, 1818, 1819, 1820, 1828, 1829, 
1829(b), 1831i, 1831m(g)(4), 1831o, 1831p-1, 1832(c), 1884(b), 1972, 
3102, 3108(a), 3349, 3909, 4717, 5412(b)(2)(C), 5414(b)(3); 15 U.S.C. 
78(h) and (i), 78o(c)(4), 78o-4(c), 78o-5, 78q-1, 78s, 78u, 78u-2, 78u-
3, 78w, 6801(b), 6805(b)(1); 28 U.S.C. 2461 note; 31 U.S.C. 330, 5321; 
42 U.S.C. 4012a; Pub. L. 104-134, sec. 31001(s), 110 Stat. 1321; Pub. L. 
109-351, 120 Stat. 1966; Pub. L. 111-203, 124 Stat. 1376; Pub. L. 114-
74, sec. 701, 129 Stat. 584.

    Source: 56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, unless otherwise noted.



            Subpart A_Uniform Rules of Practice and Procedure



Sec. 308.1  Scope.

    This subpart prescribes rules of practice and procedure applicable 
to adjudicatory proceedings as to which hearings on the record are 
provided for by the following statutory provisions:
    (a) Cease-and-desist proceedings under section 8(b) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (``FDIA'') (12 U.S.C. 1818(b));
    (b) Removal and prohibition proceedings under section 8(e) of the 
FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(e));
    (c) Change-in-control proceedings under section 7(j)(4) of the FDIA 
(12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(4)) to determine whether the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation (``FDIC''), should issue an order to approve or 
disapprove a person's proposed acquisition of an institution and/or 
institution holding company;
    (d) Proceedings under section 15C(c)(2) of the Securities Exchange 
Act of 1934 (``Exchange Act'') (15 U.S.C. 78o-5), to impose sanctions 
upon any government securities broker or dealer or upon any person 
associated or seeking to become associated with a government securities 
broker or dealer for which the FDIC is the appropriate regulatory 
agency;
    (e) Assessment of civil money penalties by the FDIC against 
institutions, institution-affiliated parties, and certain other persons 
for which it is the appropriate regulatory agency for any violation of:
    (1) Sections 22(h) and 23 of the Federal Reserve Act (FRA), or any 
regulation issued thereunder, and certain unsafe or unsound practices or 
breaches of fiduciary duty, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1828(j) or 12 U.S.C. 
1468;
    (2) Section 106(b) of the Bank Holding Company Act Amendments of 
1970 (``BHCA Amendments of 1970''), and certain unsafe or unsound 
practices or breaches of fiduciary duty, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
1972(2)(F);
    (3) Any provision of the Change in Bank Control Act of 1978, as 
amended (the ``CBCA''), or any regulation or order issued thereunder, 
and certain unsafe or unsound practices, or breaches of fiduciary duty, 
pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(16);
    (4) Section 7(a)(1) of the FDIA, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1817(a)(1);
    (5) Any provision of the International Lending Supervision Act of 
1983 (``ILSA''), or any rule, regulation or order issued thereunder, 
pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3909;
    (6) Any provision of the International Banking Act of 1978 
(``IBA''), or any rule, regulation or order issued thereunder, pursuant 
to 12 U.S.C. 3108;
    (7) Certain provisions of the Exchange Act, pursuant to section 21B 
of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78u-2);
    (8) Section 1120 of the Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery, and 
Enforcement Act of 1989 (``FIRREA'') (12 U.S.C. 3349), or any order or 
regulation issued thereunder;
    (9) The terms of any final or temporary order issued under section 8 
of the FDIA or of any written agreement executed by the FDIC or the 
former Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS), the terms of any condition 
imposed in writing by the FDIC in connection with the grant of an 
application or request, certain unsafe or unsound practices or breaches 
of fiduciary duty, or any law or regulation not otherwise provided 
herein pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2);

[[Page 60]]

    (10) Any provision of law referenced in section 102(f) of the Flood 
Disaster Protection Act of 1973 (42 U.S.C. 4012a(f)) or any order or 
regulation issued thereunder; and
    (11) Any provision of law referenced in 31 U.S.C. 5321 or any order 
or regulation issued thereunder;
    (12) Certain provisions of Section 5 of the Home Owners' Loan Act 
(HOLA) or any regulation or order issued thereunder, pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 1464(d)(1), (5)-(8), (s), and (v);
    (13) Section 9 of the HOLA or any regulation or order issued 
thereunder, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1467(d);
    (14) Section 10 of HOLA, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1467a(a)(2)(D), (g), 
(i)(2)-(4) and (r); and
    (f) Remedial action under section 102(g) of the Flood Disaster 
Protection Act of 1973 (42 U.S.C. 4012a(g));
    (g) Proceedings under section 10(k) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1820(k)) 
to impose penalties for violations of the post-employment restrictions 
under that subsection; and
    (h) This subpart also applies to all other adjudications required by 
statute to be determined on the record after opportunity for an agency 
hearing, unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Local Rules.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20347, May 6, 1996; 70 
FR 69639, Nov. 17, 2005; 80 FR 5011, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.2  Rules of construction.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Any term in the singular includes the plural, and the plural 
includes the singular, if such use would be appropriate;
    (b) Any use of a masculine, feminine, or neuter gender encompasses 
all three, if such use would be appropriate;
    (c) The term counsel includes a non-attorney representative; and
    (d) Unless the context requires otherwise, a party's counsel of 
record, if any, may, on behalf of that party, take any action required 
to be taken by the party.



Sec. 308.3  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart, unless explicitly stated to the 
contrary:
    (a) Administrative law judge means one who presides at an 
administrative hearing under authority set forth at 5 U.S.C. 556.
    (b) Adjudicatory proceeding means a proceeding conducted pursuant to 
these rules and leading to the formulation of a final order other than a 
regulation.
    (c) Board of Directors or Board means the Board of Directors of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or its designee.
    (d) Decisional employee means any member of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation's or administrative law judge's staff who has not 
engaged in an investigative or prosecutorial role in a proceeding and 
who may assist the Board of Directors or the administrative law judge, 
respectively, in preparing orders, recommended decisions, decisions, and 
other documents under the Uniform Rules.
    (e) Designee of the Board of Directors means officers or officials 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation acting pursuant to 
authority delegated by the Board of Directors.
    (f) Enforcement Counsel means any individual who files a notice of 
appearance as counsel on behalf of the FDIC in an adjudicatory 
proceeding.
    (g) Executive Secretary means the Executive Secretary of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation or his or her designee.
    (h) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (i) Final order means an order issued by the FDIC with or without 
the consent of the affected institution or the institution-affiliated 
party, that has become final, without regard to the pendency of any 
petition for reconsideration or review.
    (j) Institution includes:
    (1) Any bank as that term is defined in section 3(a) of the FDIA (12 
U.S.C. 1813(a));
    (2) Any bank holding company or any subsidiary (other than a bank) 
of a bank holding company as those terms are defined in the BHCA (12 
U.S.C. 1841 et seq.);
    (3) Any savings association as that term is defined in section 3(b) 
of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1813(b)), any savings and loan holding company or 
any subsidiary thereof (other than a bank) as

[[Page 61]]

those terms are defined in section 10(a) of the HOLA (12 U.S.C. 
1467a(a));
    (4) Any organization operating under section 25 of the FRA (12 
U.S.C. 601 et seq.);
    (5) Any foreign bank or company to which section 8 of the IBA (12 
U.S.C. 3106), applies or any subsidiary (other than a bank) thereof; and
    (6) Any federal agency as that term is defined in section 1(b) of 
the IBA (12 U.S.C. 3101(5)).
    (l) Investigation means any investigation conducted pursuant to 
section 10(c) of the FDIA or pursuant to section 5(d)(1)(B) of HOLA (12 
U.S.C. 1464(d)(1)(B)).
    (m) Local Rules means those rules promulgated by the FDIC in those 
subparts of this part other than subpart A.
    (n) Office of Financial Institution Adjudication (OFIA) means the 
executive body charged with overseeing the administration of 
administrative enforcement proceedings of the Office of the Comptroller 
of the Currency (OCC), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
Board (FRB), the FDIC, and the National Credit Union Administration 
(NCUA).
    (o) Party means the FDIC and any person named as a party in any 
notice.
    (p) Person means an individual, sole proprietor, partnership, 
corporation, unincorporated association, trust, joint venture, pool, 
syndicate, agency or other entity or organization, including an 
institution as defined in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (q) Respondent means any party other than the FDIC.
    (r) Uniform Rules means those rules in subpart A of this part that 
pertain to the types of formal administrative enforcement actions set 
forth at Sec. 308.1 and as specified in subparts B through P of this 
part.
    (s) Violation includes any action (alone or with another or others) 
for or toward causing, bringing about, participating in, counseling, or 
aiding or abetting a violation.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 80 FR 5012, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.4  Authority of Board of Directors.

    The Board of Directors may, at any time during the pendency of a 
proceeding, perform, direct the performance of, or waive performance of, 
any act which could be done or ordered by the administrative law judge.



Sec. 308.5  Authority of the administrative law judge.

    (a) General rule. All proceedings governed by this part shall be 
conducted in accordance with the provisions of chapter 5 of title 5 of 
the United States Code. The administrative law judge shall have all 
powers necessary to conduct a proceeding in a fair and impartial manner 
and to avoid unnecessary delay.
    (b) Powers. The administrative law judge shall have all powers 
necessary to conduct the proceeding in accordance with paragraph (a) of 
this section, including the following powers:
    (1) To administer oaths and affirmations;
    (2) To issue subpoenas, subpoenas duces tecum, and protective 
orders, as authorized by this part, and to quash or modify any such 
subpoenas and orders;
    (3) To receive relevant evidence and to rule upon the admission of 
evidence and offers of proof;
    (4) To take or cause depositions to be taken as authorized by this 
subpart;
    (5) To regulate the course of the hearing and the conduct of the 
parties and their counsel;
    (6) To hold scheduling and/or pre-hearing conferences as set forth 
in Sec. 308.31;
    (7) To consider and rule upon all procedural and other motions 
appropriate in an adjudicatory proceeding, provided that only the Board 
of Directors shall have the power to grant any motion to dismiss the 
proceeding or to decide any other motion that results in a final 
determination of the merits of the proceeding;
    (8) To prepare and present to the Board of Directors a recommended 
decision as provided herein;
    (9) To recuse himself or herself by motion made by a party or on his 
or her own motion;
    (10) To establish time, place and manner limitations on the 
attendance of the public and the media for any public hearing; and

[[Page 62]]

    (11) To do all other things necessary and appropriate to discharge 
the duties of a presiding officer.



Sec. 308.6  Appearance and practice in adjudicatory proceedings.

    (a) Appearance before the FDIC or an administrative law judge--(1) 
By attorneys. Any member in good standing of the bar of the highest 
court of any state, commonwealth, possession, territory of the United 
States, or the District of Columbia may represent others before the FDIC 
if such attorney is not currently suspended or debarred from practice 
before the FDIC.
    (2) By non-attorneys. An individual may appear on his or her own 
behalf; a member of a partnership may represent the partnership; a duly 
authorized officer, director, or employee of any government unit, 
agency, institution, corporation or authority may represent that unit, 
agency, institution, corporation or authority if such officer; director, 
or employee is not currently suspended or debarred from practice before 
the FDIC.
    (3) Notice of appearance. Any individual acting as counsel on behalf 
of a party, including the FDIC, shall file a notice of appearance with 
OFIA at or before the time that individual submits papers or otherwise 
appears on behalf of a party in the adjudicatory proceeding. The notice 
of appearance must include a written declaration that the individual is 
currently qualified as provided in paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this 
section and is authorized to represent the particular party. By filing a 
notice of appearance on behalf of a party in an adjudicatory proceeding, 
the counsel agrees and represents that he or she is authorized to accept 
service on behalf of the represented party and that, in the event of 
withdrawal from representation, he or she will, if required by the 
administrative law judge, continue to accept service until new counsel 
has filed a notice of appearance or until the represented party 
indicates that he or she will proceed on a pro se basis.
    (b) Sanctions. Dilatory, obstructionist, egregious, contemptuous or 
contumacious conduct at any phase of any adjudicatory proceeding may be 
grounds for exclusion or suspension of counsel from the proceeding.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20347, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.7  Good faith certification.

    (a) General requirement. Every filing or submission of record 
following the issuance of a notice shall be signed by at least one 
counsel of record in his or her individual name and shall state that 
counsel's address and telephone number. A party who acts as his or her 
own counsel shall sign his or her individual name and state his or her 
address and telephone number on every filing or submission of record.
    (b) Effect of signature. (1) The signature of counsel or a party 
shall constitute a certification that: The counsel or party has read the 
filing or submission of record; to the best of his or her knowledge, 
information, and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the filing or 
submission of record is well-grounded in fact and is warranted by 
existing law or a good faith argument for the extension, modification, 
or reversal of existing law; and the filing or submission of record is 
not made for any improper purpose, such as to harass or to cause 
unnecessary delay or needless increase in the cost of litigation.
    (2) If a filing or submission of record is not signed, the 
administrative law judge shall strike the filing or submission of 
record, unless it is signed promptly after the omission is called to the 
attention of the pleader or movant.
    (c) Effect of making oral motion or argument. The act of making any 
oral motion or oral argument by any counsel or party constitutes a 
certification that to the best of his or her knowledge, information, and 
belief formed after reasonable inquiry, his or her statements are well-
grounded in fact and are warranted by existing law or a good faith 
argument for the extension, modification, or reversal of existing law, 
and are not made for any improper purpose, such as to harass or to cause 
unnecessary delay or needless increase in the cost of litigation.

[[Page 63]]



Sec. 308.8  Conflicts of interest.

    (a) Conflict of interest in representation. No person shall appear 
as counsel for another person in an adjudicatory proceeding if it 
reasonably appears that such representation may be materially limited by 
that counsel's responsibilities to a third person or by the counsel's 
own interests. The administrative law judge may take corrective measures 
at any stage of a proceeding to cure a conflict of interest in 
representation, including the issuance of an order limiting the scope of 
representation or disqualifying an individual from appearing in a 
representative capacity for the duration of the proceeding.
    (b) Certification and waiver. If any person appearing as counsel 
represents two or more parties to an adjudicatory proceeding or also 
represents a non-party on a matter relevant to an issue in the 
proceeding, counsel must certify in writing at the time of filing the 
notice of appearance required by Sec. 308.6(a):
    (1) That the counsel has personally and fully discussed the 
possibility of conflicts of interest with each such party and non-party; 
and
    (2) That each such party and non-party waives any right it might 
otherwise have had to assert any known conflicts of interest or to 
assert any non-material conflicts of interest during the course of the 
proceeding.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20347, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.9  Ex parte communications.

    (a) Definition--(1) Ex parte communication means any material oral 
or written communication relevant to the merits of an adjudicatory 
proceeding that was neither on the record nor on reasonable prior notice 
to all parties that takes place between:
    (i) An interested person outside the FDIC (including such person's 
counsel); and
    (ii) The administrative law judge handling that proceeding, the 
Board of Directors, or a decisional employee.
    (2) Exception. A request for status of the proceeding does not 
constitute an ex parte communication.
    (b) Prohibition of ex parte communications. From the time the notice 
is issued by the FDIC until the date that the Board of Directors issues 
its final decision pursuant to Sec. 308.40(c):
    (1) No interested person outside the FDIC shall make or knowingly 
cause to be made an ex parte communication to any member of the Board of 
Directors, the administrative law judge, or a decisional employee; and
    (2) No member of the Board of Directors, no administrative law 
judge, or decisional employee shall make or knowingly cause to be made 
to any interested person outside the FDIC any ex parte communication.
    (c) Procedure upon occurrence of ex parte communication. If an ex 
parte communication is received by the administrative law judge, any 
member of the Board of Directors or other person identified in paragraph 
(a) of this section, that person shall cause all such written 
communications (or, if the communication is oral, a memorandum stating 
the substance of the communication) to be placed on the record of the 
proceeding and served on all parties. All other parties to the 
proceeding shall have an opportunity, within ten days of receipt of 
service of the ex parte communication, to file responses thereto and to 
recommend any sanctions that they believe to be appropriate under the 
circumstances. The administrative law judge or the Board of Directors 
shall then determine whether any action should be taken concerning the 
ex parte communication in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.
    (d) Sanctions. Any party or his or her counsel who makes a 
prohibited ex parte communication, or who encourages or solicits another 
to make any such communication, may be subject to any appropriate 
sanction or sanctions imposed by the Board of Directors or the 
administrative law judge including, but not limited to, exclusion from 
the proceedings and an adverse ruling on the issue which is the subject 
of the prohibited communication.
    (e) Separation of functions. Except to the extent required for the 
disposition of ex parte matters as authorized by law, the administrative 
law judge may not consult a person or party on any matter relevant to 
the merits of the

[[Page 64]]

adjudication, unless on notice and opportunity for all parties to 
participate. An employee or agent engaged in the performance of 
investigative or prosecuting functions for the FDIC in a case may not, 
in that or a factually related case, participate or advise in the 
decision, recommended decision, or agency review of the recommended 
decision under Sec. 308.40 except as witness or counsel in public 
proceedings.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 60 FR 24762, May 10, 1995]



Sec. 308.10  Filing of papers.

    (a) Filing. Any papers required to be filed, excluding documents 
produced in response to a discovery request pursuant to Secs. 308.25 and 
308.26, shall be filed with the OFIA, except as otherwise provided.
    (b) Manner of filing. Unless otherwise specified by the Board of 
Directors or the administrative law judge, filing may be accomplished 
by:
    (1) Personal service;
    (2) Delivering the papers to a reliable commercial courier service, 
overnight delivery service, or to the U.S. Post Office for Express Mail 
delivery;
    (3) Mailing the papers by first class, registered, or certified 
mail; or
    (4) Transmission by electronic media, only if expressly authorized, 
and upon any conditions specified, by the Board of Directors or the 
administrative law judge. All papers filed by electronic media shall 
also concurrently be filed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (c) Formal requirements as to papers filed--(1) Form. All papers 
filed must set forth the name, address, and telephone number of the 
counsel or party making the filing and must be accompanied by a 
certification setting forth when and how service has been made on all 
other parties. All papers filed must be double-spaced and printed or 
typewritten on 8\1/2\  x  11 inch paper, and must be clear and legible.
    (2) Signature. All papers must be dated and signed as provided in 
Sec. 308.7.
    (3) Caption. All papers filed must include at the head thereof, or 
on a title page, the name of the FDIC and of the filing party, the title 
and docket number of the proceeding, and the subject of the particular 
paper.
    (4) Number of copies. Unless otherwise specified by the Board of 
Directors, or the administrative law judge, an original and one copy of 
all documents and papers shall be filed, except that only one copy of 
transcripts of testimony and exhibits shall be filed.



Sec. 308.11  Service of papers.

    (a) By the parties. Except as otherwise provided, a party filing 
papers shall serve a copy upon the counsel of record for all other 
parties to the proceeding so represented, and upon any party not so 
represented.
    (b) Method of service. Except as provided in paragraphs (c)(2) and 
(d) of this section, a serving party shall use one or more of the 
following methods of service:
    (1) Personal service;
    (2) Delivering the papers to a reliable commercial courier service, 
overnight delivery service, or to the U.S. Post Office for Express Mail 
delivery;
    (3) Mailing the papers by first class, registered, or certified 
mail; or
    (4) Transmission by electronic media, only if the parties mutually 
agree. Any papers served by electronic media shall also concurrently be 
served in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 308.10(c).
    (c) By the Board of Directors. (1) All papers required to be served 
by the Board of Directors or the administrative law judge upon a party 
who has appeared in the proceeding in accordance with Sec. 308.6, shall 
be served by any means specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) If a party has not appeared in the proceeding in accordance with 
Sec. 308.6, the Board of Directors or the administrative law judge shall 
make service by any of the following methods:
    (i) By personal service;
    (ii) If the person to be served is an individual, by delivery to a 
person of suitable age and discretion at the physical location where the 
individual resides or works;
    (iii) If the person to be served is a corporation or other 
association, by delivery to an officer, managing or general agent, or to 
any other agent authorized by appointment or by law to receive service 
and, if the agent is one authorized by statute to receive service

[[Page 65]]

and the statute so requires, by also mailing a copy to the party;
    (iv) By registered or certified mail addressed to the party's last 
known address; or
    (v) By any other method reasonably calculated to give actual notice.
    (d) Subpoenas. Service of a subpoena may be made:
    (1) By personal service;
    (2) If the person to be served is an individual, by delivery to a 
person of suitable age and discretion at the physical location where the 
individual resides or works;
    (3) By delivery to an agent which, in the case of a corporation or 
other association, is delivery to an officer, managing or general agent, 
or to any other agent authorized by appointment or by law to receive 
service and, if the agent is one authorized by statute to receive 
service and the statute so requires, by also mailing a copy to the 
party;
    (4) By registered or certified mail addressed to the person's last 
known address; or
    (5) In such other manner as is reasonably calculated to give actual 
notice.
    (e) Area of service. Service in any state, territory, possession of 
the United States, or the District of Columbia, on any person or company 
doing business in any state, territory, possession of the United States, 
or the District of Columbia, or on any person as otherwise provided by 
law, is effective without regard to the place where the hearing is held, 
provided that if service is made on a foreign bank in connection with an 
action or proceeding involving one or more of its branches or agencies 
located in any state, territory, possession of the United States, or the 
District of Columbia, service shall be made on at least one branch or 
agency so involved.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20347, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.12  Construction of time limits.

    (a) General rule. In computing any period of time prescribed by this 
subpart, the date of the act or event that commences the designated 
period of time is not included. The last day so computed is included 
unless it is a Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday. When the last day 
is a Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday, the period runs until the end 
of the next day that is not a Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday. 
Intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and Federal holidays are included in 
the computation of time. However, when the time period within which an 
act is to be performed is ten days or less, not including any additional 
time allowed for in paragraph (c) of this section, intermediate 
Saturdays, Sundays, and Federal holidays are not included.
    (b) When papers are deemed to be filed or served. (1) Filing and 
service are deemed to be effective:
    (i) In the case of personal service or same day commercial courier 
delivery, upon actual service;
    (ii) In the case of overnight commercial delivery service, U.S. 
Express Mail delivery, or first class, registered, or certified mail, 
upon deposit in or delivery to an appropriate point of collection;
    (iii) In the case of transmission by electronic media, as specified 
by the authority receiving the filing, in the case of filing, and as 
agreed among the parties, in the case of service.
    (2) The effective filing and service dates specified in paragraph 
(b) (1) of this section may be modified by the Board of Directors or 
administrative law judge in the case of filing or by agreement of the 
parties in the case of service.
    (c) Calculation of time for service and filing of responsive papers. 
Whenever a time limit is measured by a prescribed period from the 
service of any notice or paper, the applicable time limits are 
calculated as follows:
    (1) If service is made by first class, registered, or certified 
mail, add three calendar days to the prescribed period;
    (2) If service is made by express mail or overnight delivery 
service, add one calendar day to the prescribed period; or
    (3) If service is made by electronic media transmission, add one 
calendar day to the prescribed period, unless otherwise determined by 
the Board of Directors or the administrative law judge in the case of 
filing, or by agreement among the parties in the case of service.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20348, May 6, 1996]

[[Page 66]]



Sec. 308.13  Change of time limits.

    Except as otherwise provided by law, the administrative law judge 
may, for good cause shown, extend the time limits prescribed by the 
Uniform Rules or by any notice or order issued in the proceedings. After 
the referral of the case to the Board of Directors pursuant to 
Sec. 308.38, the Board of Directors may grant extensions of the time 
limits for good cause shown. Extensions may be granted at the motion of 
a party or of the Board of Directors after notice and opportunity to 
respond is afforded all non-moving parties, or on the administrative law 
judge's own motion.



Sec. 308.14  Witness fees and expenses.

    Witnesses subpoenaed for testimony or depositions shall be paid the 
same fees for attendance and mileage as are paid in the United States 
district courts in proceedings in which the United States is a party, 
provided that, in the case of a discovery subpoena addressed to a party, 
no witness fees or mileage need be paid. Fees for witnesses shall be 
tendered in advance by the party requesting the subpoena, except that 
fees and mileage need not be tendered in advance where the FDIC is the 
party requesting the subpoena. The FDIC shall not be required to pay any 
fees to, or expenses of, any witness not subpoenaed by the FDIC.



Sec. 308.15  Opportunity for informal settlement.

    Any respondent may, at any time in the proceeding, unilaterally 
submit to Enforcement Counsel written offers or proposals for settlement 
of a proceeding, without prejudice to the rights of any of the parties. 
No such offer or proposal shall be made to any FDIC representative other 
than Enforcement Counsel. Submission of a written settlement offer does 
not provide a basis for adjourning or otherwise delaying all or any 
portion of a proceeding under this part. No settlement offer or 
proposal, or any subsequent negotiation or resolution, is admissible as 
evidence in any proceeding.



Sec. 308.16  FDIC's right to conduct examination.

    Nothing contained in this subpart limits in any manner the right of 
the FDIC to conduct any examination, inspection, or visitation of any 
institution or institution-affiliated party, or the right of the FDIC to 
conduct or continue any form of investigation authorized by law.



Sec. 308.17  Collateral attacks on adjudicatory proceeding.

    If an interlocutory appeal or collateral attack is brought in any 
court concerning all or any part of an adjudicatory proceeding, the 
challenged adjudicatory proceeding shall continue without regard to the 
pendency of that court proceeding. No default or other failure to act as 
directed in the adjudicatory proceeding within the times prescribed in 
this subpart shall be excused based on the pendency before any court of 
any interlocutory appeal or collateral attack.



Sec. 308.18  Commencement of proceeding and contents of notice.

    (a) Commencement of proceeding. (1)(i) Except for change-in-control 
proceedings under section 7(j)(4) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(4)), a 
proceeding governed by this subpart is commenced by issuance of a notice 
by the FDIC.
    (ii) The notice must be served by the Executive Secretary upon the 
respondent and given to any other appropriate financial institution 
supervisory authority where required by law.
    (iii) The notice must be filed with the OFIA.
    (2) Change-in-control proceedings under section 7(j)(4) of the FDIA 
(12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(4)) commence with the issuance of an order by the 
FDIC.
    (b) Contents of notice. The notice must set forth:
    (1) The legal authority for the proceeding and for the FDIC's 
jurisdiction over the proceeding;
    (2) A statement of the matters of fact or law showing that the FDIC 
is entitled to relief;
    (3) A proposed order or prayer for an order granting the requested 
relief;
    (4) The time, place, and nature of the hearing as required by law or 
regulation;
    (5) The time within which to file an answer as required by law or 
regulation;

[[Page 67]]

    (6) The time within which to request a hearing as required by law or 
regulation; and
    (7) That the answer and/or request for a hearing shall be filed with 
OFIA.



Sec. 308.19  Answer.

    (a) When. Within 20 days of service of the notice, respondent shall 
file an answer as designated in the notice. In a civil money penalty 
proceeding, respondent shall also file a request for a hearing within 20 
days of service of the notice.
    (b) Content of answer. An answer must specifically respond to each 
paragraph or allegation of fact contained in the notice and must admit, 
deny, or state that the party lacks sufficient information to admit or 
deny each allegation of fact. A statement of lack of information has the 
effect of a denial. Denials must fairly meet the substance of each 
allegation of fact denied; general denials are not permitted. When a 
respondent denies part of an allegation, that part must be denied and 
the remainder specifically admitted. Any allegation of fact in the 
notice which is not denied in the answer must be deemed admitted for 
purposes of the proceeding. A respondent is not required to respond to 
the portion of a notice that constitutes the prayer for relief or 
proposed order. The answer must set forth affirmative defenses, if any, 
asserted by the respondent.
    (c) Default--(1) Effect of failure to answer. Failure of a 
respondent to file an answer required by this section within the time 
provided constitutes a waiver of his or her right to appear and contest 
the allegations in the notice. If no timely answer is filed, Enforcement 
Counsel may file a motion for entry of an order of default. Upon a 
finding that no good cause has been shown for the failure to file a 
timely answer, the administrative law judge shall file with the Board of 
Directors a recommended decision containing the findings and the relief 
sought in the notice. Any final order issued by the Board of Directors 
based upon a respondent's failure to answer is deemed to be an order 
issued upon consent.
    (2) Effect of failure to request a hearing in civil money penalty 
proceedings. If respondent fails to request a hearing as required by law 
within the time provided, the notice of assessment constitutes a final 
and unappealable order.



Sec. 308.20  Amended pleadings.

    (a) Amendments. The notice or answer may be amended or supplemented 
at any stage of the proceeding. The respondent must answer an amended 
notice within the time remaining for the respondent's answer to the 
original notice, or within ten days after service of the amended notice, 
whichever period is longer, unless the Board of Directors or 
administrative law judge orders otherwise for good cause.
    (b) Amendments to conform to the evidence. When issues not raised in 
the notice or answer are tried at the hearing by express or implied 
consent of the parties, they will be treated in all respects as if they 
had been raised in the notice or answer, and no formal amendments are 
required. If evidence is objected to at the hearing on the ground that 
it is not within the issues raised by the notice or answer, the 
administrative law judge may admit the evidence when admission is likely 
to assist in adjudicating the merits of the action and the objecting 
party fails to satisfy the administrative law judge that the admission 
of such evidence would unfairly prejudice that party's action or defense 
upon the merits. The administrative law judge may grant a continuance to 
enable the objecting party to meet such evidence.

[61 FR 20348, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.21  Failure to appear.

    Failure of a respondent to appear in person at the hearing or by a 
duly authorized counsel constitutes a waiver of respondent's right to a 
hearing and is deemed an admission of the facts as alleged and consent 
to the relief sought in the notice. Without further proceedings or 
notice to the respondent, the administrative law judge shall file with 
the Board of Directors a recommended decision containing the findings 
and the relief sought in the notice.



Sec. 308.22  Consolidation and severance of actions.

    (a) Consolidation. (1) On the motion of any party, or on the 
administrative

[[Page 68]]

law judge's own motion, the administrative law judge may consolidate, 
for some or all purposes, any two or more proceedings, if each such 
proceeding involves or arises out of the same transaction, occurrence or 
series of transactions or occurrences, or involves at least one common 
respondent or a material common question of law or fact, unless such 
consolidation would cause unreasonable delay or injustice.
    (2) In the event of consolidation under paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section, appropriate adjustment to the prehearing schedule must be made 
to avoid unnecessary expense, inconvenience, or delay.
    (b) Severance. The administrative law judge may, upon the motion of 
any party, sever the proceeding for separate resolution of the matter as 
to any respondent only if the administrative law judge finds that:
    (1) Undue prejudice or injustice to the moving party would result 
from not severing the proceeding; and
    (2) Such undue prejudice or injustice would outweigh the interests 
of judicial economy and expedition in the complete and final resolution 
of the proceeding.



Sec. 308.23  Motions.

    (a) In writing. (1) Except as otherwise provided herein, an 
application or request for an order or ruling must be made by written 
motion.
    (2) All written motions must state with particularity the relief 
sought and must be accompanied by a proposed order.
    (3) No oral argument may be held on written motions except as 
otherwise directed by the administrative law judge. Written memoranda, 
briefs, affidavits or other relevant material or documents may be filed 
in support of or in opposition to a motion.
    (b) Oral motions. A motion may be made orally on the record unless 
the administrative law judge directs that such motion be reduced to 
writing.
    (c) Filing of motions. Motions must be filed with the administrative 
law judge, except that following the filing of the recommended decision, 
motions must be filed with the Executive Secretary for disposition by 
the Board of Directors.
    (d) Responses. (1) Except as otherwise provided herein, within ten 
days after service of any written motion, or within such other period of 
time as may be established by the administrative law judge or the 
Executive Secretary, any party may file a written response to a motion. 
The administrative law judge shall not rule on any oral or written 
motion before each party has had an opportunity to file a response.
    (2) The failure of a party to oppose a written motion or an oral 
motion made on the record is deemed a consent by that party to the entry 
of an order substantially in the form of the order accompanying the 
motion.
    (e) Dilatory motions. Frivolous, dilatory or repetitive motions are 
prohibited. The filing of such motions may form the basis for sanctions.
    (f) Dispositive motions. Dispositive motions are governed by 
Secs. 308.29 and 308.30.



Sec. 308.24  Scope of document discovery.

    (a) Limits on discovery. (1) Subject to the limitations set out in 
paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, a party to a proceeding 
under this subpart may obtain document discovery by serving a written 
request to produce documents. For purposes of a request to produce 
documents, the term ``documents'' may be defined to include drawings, 
graphs, charts, photographs, recordings, data stored in electronic form, 
and other data compilations from which information can be obtained, or 
translated, if necessary, by the parties through detection devices into 
reasonably usable form, as well as written material of all kinds.
    (2) Discovery by use of deposition is governed by subpart I of this 
part.
    (3) Discovery by use of interrogatories is not permitted.
    (b) Relevance. A party may obtain document discovery regarding any 
matter, not privileged, that has material relevance to the merits of the 
pending action. Any request to produce documents that calls for 
irrelevant material, that is unreasonable, oppressive, excessive in 
scope, unduly burdensome, or repetitive of previous requests, or

[[Page 69]]

that seeks to obtain privileged documents will be denied or modified. A 
request is unreasonable, oppressive, excessive in scope or unduly 
burdensome if, among other things, it fails to include justifiable 
limitations on the time period covered and the geographic locations to 
be searched, the time provided to respond in the request is inadequate, 
or the request calls for copies of documents to be delivered to the 
requesting party and fails to include the requestor's written agreement 
to pay in advance for the copying, in accordance with Sec. 308.25.
    (c) Privileged matter. Privileged documents are not discoverable. 
Privileges include the attorney-client privilege, work-product 
privilege, any government's or government agency's deliberative-process 
privilege, and any other privileges the Constitution, any applicable act 
of Congress, or the principles of common law provide.
    (d) Time limits. All discovery, including all responses to discovery 
requests, shall be completed at least 20 days prior to the date 
scheduled for the commencement of the hearing. No exceptions to this 
time limit shall be permitted, unless the administrative law judge finds 
on the record that good cause exists for waiving the requirements of 
this paragraph.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20348, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.25  Request for document discovery from parties.

    (a) General rule. Any party may serve on any other party a request 
to produce for inspection any discoverable documents that are in the 
possession, custody, or control of the party upon whom the request is 
served. The request must identify the documents to be produced either by 
individual item or by category, and must describe each item and category 
with reasonable particularity. Documents must be produced as they are 
kept in the usual course of business or must be organized to correspond 
with the categories in the request.
    (b) Production or copying. The request must specify a reasonable 
time, place, and manner for production and performing any related acts. 
In lieu of inspecting the documents, the requesting party may specify 
that all or some of the responsive documents be copied and the copies 
delivered to the requesting party. If copying of fewer than 250 pages is 
requested, the party to whom the request is addressed shall bear the 
cost of copying and shipping charges. If a party requests 250 pages or 
more of copying, the requesting party shall pay for the copying and 
shipping charges. Copying charges are the current per page copying rate 
imposed by 12 CFR part 309 implementing the Freedom of Information Act 
(5 U.S.C. 552). The party to whom the request is addressed may require 
payment in advance before producing the documents.
    (c) Obligation to update responses. A party who has responded to a 
discovery request with a response that was complete when made is not 
required to supplement the response to include documents thereafter 
acquired, unless the responding party learns that:
    (1) The response was materially incorrect when made; or
    (2) The response, though correct when made, is no longer true and a 
failure to amend the response is, in substance, a knowing concealment.
    (d) Motions to limit discovery. (1) Any party that objects to a 
discovery request may, within ten days of being served with such 
request, file a motion in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 308.23 
to strike or otherwise limit the request. If an objection is made to 
only a portion of an item or category in a request, the portion objected 
to shall be specified. Any objections not made in accordance with this 
paragraph and Sec. 308.23 are waived.
    (2) The party who served the request that is the subject of a motion 
to strike or limit may file a written response within five days of 
service of the motion. No other party may file a response.
    (e) Privilege. At the time other documents are produced, the 
producing party must reasonably identify all documents withheld on the 
grounds of privilege and must produce a statement of the basis for the 
assertion of privilege. When similar documents that are protected by 
deliberative process, attorney-work-product, or attorney-client 
privilege are voluminous, these documents may be identified by

[[Page 70]]

category instead of by individual document. The administrative law judge 
retains discretion to determine when the identification by category is 
insufficient.
    (f) Motions to compel production. (1) If a party withholds any 
documents as privileged or fails to comply fully with a discovery 
request, the requesting party may, within ten days of the assertion of 
privilege or of the time the failure to comply becomes known to the 
requesting party, file a motion in accordance with the provisions of 
Sec. 308.23 for the issuance of a subpoena compelling production.
    (2) The party who asserted the privilege or failed to comply with 
the request may file a written response to a motion to compel within 
five days of service of the motion. No other party may file a response.
    (g) Ruling on motions. After the time for filing responses pursuant 
to this section has expired, the administrative law judge shall rule 
promptly on all motions filed pursuant to this section. If the 
administrative law judge determines that a discovery request, or any of 
its terms, calls for irrelevant material, is unreasonable, oppressive, 
excessive in scope, unduly burdensome, or repetitive of previous 
requests, or seeks to obtain privileged documents, he or she may deny or 
modify the request, and may issue appropriate protective orders, upon 
such conditions as justice may require. The pendency of a motion to 
strike or limit discovery or to compel production is not a basis for 
staying or continuing the proceeding, unless otherwise ordered by the 
administrative law judge. Notwithstanding any other provision in this 
part, the administrative law judge may not release, or order a party to 
produce, documents withheld on grounds of privilege if the party has 
stated to the administrative law judge its intention to file a timely 
motion for interlocutory review of the administrative law judge's order 
to produce the documents, and until the motion for interlocutory review 
has been decided.
    (h) Enforcing discovery subpoenas. If the administrative law judge 
issues a subpoena compelling production of documents by a party, the 
subpoenaing party may, in the event of noncompliance and to the extent 
authorized by applicable law, apply to any appropriate United States 
district court for an order requiring compliance with the subpoena. A 
party's right to seek court enforcement of a subpoena shall not in any 
manner limit the sanctions that may be imposed by the administrative law 
judge against a party who fails to produce subpoenaed documents.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20348, May 6, 1996; 80 
FR 5011, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.26  Document subpoenas to nonparties.

    (a) General rules. (1) Any party may apply to the administrative law 
judge for the issuance of a document discovery subpoena addressed to any 
person who is not a party to the proceeding. The application must 
contain a proposed document subpoena and a brief statement showing the 
general relevance and reasonableness of the scope of documents sought. 
The subpoenaing party shall specify a reasonable time, place, and manner 
for making production in response to the document subpoena.
    (2) A party shall only apply for a document subpoena under this 
section within the time period during which such party could serve a 
discovery request under Sec. 308.24(d). The party obtaining the document 
subpoena is responsible for serving it on the subpoenaed person and for 
serving copies on all parties. Document subpoenas may be served in any 
state, territory, or possession of the United States, the District of 
Columbia, or as otherwise provided by law.
    (3) The administrative law judge shall promptly issue any document 
subpoena requested pursuant to this section. If the administrative law 
judge determines that the application does not set forth a valid basis 
for the issuance of the subpoena, or that any of its terms are 
unreasonable, oppressive, excessive in scope, or unduly burdensome, he 
or she may refuse to issue the subpoena or may issue it in a modified 
form upon such conditions as may be consistent with the Uniform Rules.
    (b) Motion to quash or modify. (1) Any person to whom a document 
subpoena is directed may file a motion to quash

[[Page 71]]

or modify such subpoena, accompanied by a statement of the basis for 
quashing or modifying the subpoena. The movant shall serve the motion on 
all parties, and any party may respond to such motion within ten days of 
service of the motion.
    (2) Any motion to quash or modify a document subpoena must be filed 
on the same basis, including the assertion of privilege, upon which a 
party could object to a discovery request under Sec. 308.25(d), and 
during the same time limits during which such an objection could be 
filed.
    (c) Enforcing document subpoenas. If a subpoenaed person fails to 
comply with any subpoena issued pursuant to this section or any order of 
the administrative law judge which directs compliance with all or any 
portion of a document subpoena, the subpoenaing party or any other 
aggrieved party may, to the extent authorized by applicable law, apply 
to an appropriate United States district court for an order requiring 
compliance with so much of the document subpoena as the administrative 
law judge has not quashed or modified. A party's right to seek court 
enforcement of a document subpoena shall in no way limit the sanctions 
that may be imposed by the administrative law judge on a party who 
induces a failure to comply with subpoenas issued under this section.



Sec. 308.27  Deposition of witness unavailable for hearing.

    (a) General rules. (1) If a witness will not be available for the 
hearing, a party desiring to preserve that witness' testimony for the 
record may apply in accordance with the procedures set forth in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, to the administrative law judge for 
the issuance of a subpoena, including a subpoena duces tecum, requiring 
the attendance of the witness at a deposition. The administrative law 
judge may issue a deposition subpoena under this section upon showing 
that:
    (i) The witness will be unable to attend or may be prevented from 
attending the hearing because of age, sickness or infirmity, or will 
otherwise be unavailable;
    (ii) The witness' unavailability was not procured or caused by the 
subpoenaing party;
    (iii) The testimony is reasonably expected to be material; and
    (iv) Taking the deposition will not result in any undue burden to 
any other party and will not cause undue delay of the proceeding.
    (2) The application must contain a proposed deposition subpoena and 
a brief statement of the reasons for the issuance of the subpoena. The 
subpoena must name the witness whose deposition is to be taken and 
specify the time and place for taking the deposition. A deposition 
subpoena may require the witness to be deposed at any place within the 
country in which that witness resides or has a regular place of 
employment or such other convenient place as the administrative law 
judge shall fix.
    (3) Any requested subpoena that sets forth a valid basis for its 
issuance must be promptly issued, unless the administrative law judge on 
his or her own motion, requires a written response or requires 
attendance at a conference concerning whether the requested subpoena 
should be issued.
    (4) The party obtaining a deposition subpoena is responsible for 
serving it on the witness and for serving copies on all parties. Unless 
the administrative law judge orders otherwise, no deposition under this 
section shall be taken on fewer than ten days' notice to the witness and 
all parties. Deposition subpoenas may be served in any state, territory, 
possession of the United States, or the District of Columbia, on any 
person or company doing business in any state, territory, possession of 
the United States, or the District of Columbia, or as otherwise 
permitted by law.
    (b) Objections to deposition subpoenas. (1) The witness and any 
party who has not had an opportunity to oppose a deposition subpoena 
issued under this section may file a motion with the administrative law 
judge to quash or modify the subpoena prior to the time for compliance 
specified in the subpoena, but not more than ten days after service of 
the subpoena.
    (2) A statement of the basis for the motion to quash or modify a 
subpoena

[[Page 72]]

issued under this section must accompany the motion. The motion must be 
served on all parties.
    (c) Procedure upon deposition. (1) Each witness testifying pursuant 
to a deposition subpoena must be duly sworn, and each party shall have 
the right to examine the witness. Objections to questions or documents 
must be in short form, stating the grounds for the objection. Failure to 
object to questions or documents is not deemed a waiver except where the 
ground for the objection might have been avoided if the objection had 
been timely presented. All questions, answers, and objections must be 
recorded.
    (2) Any party may move before the administrative law judge for an 
order compelling the witness to answer any questions the witness has 
refused to answer or submit any evidence the witness has refused to 
submit during the deposition.
    (3) The deposition must be subscribed by the witness, unless the 
parties and the witness, by stipulation, have waived the signing, or the 
witness is ill, cannot be found, or has refused to sign. If the 
deposition is not subscribed by the witness, the court reporter taking 
the deposition shall certify that the transcript is a true and complete 
transcript of the deposition.
    (d) Enforcing subpoenas. If a subpoenaed person fails to comply with 
any order of the administrative law judge which directs compliance with 
all or any portion of a deposition subpoena under paragraph (b) or 
(c)(3) of this section, the subpoenaing party or other aggrieved party 
may, to the extent authorized by applicable law, apply to an appropriate 
United States district court for an order requiring compliance with the 
portions of the subpoena that the administrative law judge has ordered 
enforced. A party's right to seek court enforcement of a deposition 
subpoena in no way limits the sanctions that may be imposed by the 
administrative law judge on a party who fails to comply with, or 
procures a failure to comply with, a subpoena issued under this section.



Sec. 308.28  Interlocutory review.

    (a) General rule. The Board of Directors may review a ruling of the 
administrative law judge prior to the certification of the record to the 
Board of Directors only in accordance with the procedures set forth in 
this section and Sec. 308.23.
    (b) Scope of review. The Board of Directors may exercise 
interlocutory review of a ruling of, the administrative law judge if the 
Board of Directors finds that:
    (1) The ruling involves a controlling question of law or policy as 
to which substantial grounds exist for a difference of opinion;
    (2) Immediate review of the ruling may materially advance the 
ultimate termination of the proceeding;
    (3) Subsequent modification of the ruling at the conclusion of the 
proceeding would be an inadequate remedy; or
    (4) Subsequent modification of the ruling would cause unusual delay 
or expense.
    (c) Procedure. Any request for interlocutory review shall be filed 
by a party with the administrative law judge within ten days of his or 
her ruling and shall otherwise comply with Sec. 308.23. Any party may 
file a response to a request for interlocutory review in accordance with 
Sec. 308.23(d). Upon the expiration of the time for filing all 
responses, the administrative law judge shall refer the matter to the 
Board of Directors for final disposition.
    (d) Suspension of proceeding. Neither a request for interlocutory 
review nor any disposition of such a request by the Board of Directors 
under this section suspends or stays the proceeding unless otherwise 
ordered by the administrative law judge or the Board of Directors.



Sec. 308.29  Summary disposition.

    (a) In general. The administrative law judge shall recommend that 
the Board of Directors issue a final order granting a motion for summary 
disposition if the undisputed pleaded facts, admissions, affidavits, 
stipulations, documentary evidence, matters as to which official notice 
may be taken, and any other evidentiary materials properly submitted in 
connection with a motion for summary disposition show that:
    (1) There is no genuine issue as to any material fact; and

[[Page 73]]

    (2) The moving party is entitled to a decision in its favor as a 
matter of law.
    (b) Filing of motions and responses. (1) Any party who believes that 
there is no genuine issue of material fact to be determined and that he 
or she is entitled to a decision as a matter of law may move at any time 
for summary disposition in its favor of all or any part of the 
proceeding. Any party, within 20 days after service of such a motion, or 
within such time period as allowed by the administrative law judge, may 
file a response to such motion.
    (2) A motion for summary disposition must be accompanied by a 
statement of the material facts as to which the moving party contends 
there is no genuine issue. Such motion must be supported by documentary 
evidence, which may take the form of admissions in pleadings, 
stipulations, depositions, investigatory depositions, transcripts, 
affidavits and any other evidentiary materials that the moving party 
contends support his or her position. The motion must also be 
accompanied by a brief containing the points and authorities in support 
of the contention of the moving party. Any party opposing a motion for 
summary disposition must file a statement setting forth those material 
facts as to which he or she contends a genuine dispute exists. Such 
opposition must be supported by evidence of the same type as that 
submitted with the motion for summary disposition and a brief containing 
the points and authorities in support of the contention that summary 
disposition would be inappropriate.
    (c) Hearing on motion. At the request of any party or on his or her 
own motion, the administrative law judge may hear oral argument on the 
motion for summary disposition.
    (d) Decision on motion. Following receipt of a motion for summary 
disposition and all responses thereto, the administrative law judge 
shall determine whether the moving party is entitled to summary 
disposition. If the administrative law judge determines that summary 
disposition is warranted, the administrative law judge shall submit a 
recommended decision to that effect to the Board of Directors. If the 
administrative law judge finds that no party is entitled to summary 
disposition, he or she shall make a ruling denying the motion.



Sec. 308.30  Partial summary disposition.

    If the administrative law judge determines that a party is entitled 
to summary disposition as to certain claims only, he or she shall defer 
submitting a recommended decision as to those claims. A hearing on the 
remaining issues must be ordered. Those claims for which the 
administrative law judge has determined that summary disposition is 
warranted will be addressed in the recommended decision filed at the 
conclusion of the hearing.



Sec. 308.31  Scheduling and prehearing conferences.

    (a) Scheduling conference. Within 30 days of service of the notice 
or order commencing a proceeding or such other time as parties may 
agree, the administrative law judge shall direct counsel for all parties 
to meet with him or her in person at a specified time and place prior to 
the hearing or to confer by telephone for the purpose of scheduling the 
course and conduct of the proceeding. This meeting or telephone 
conference is called a ``scheduling conference.'' The identification of 
potential witnesses, the time for and manner of discovery, and the 
exchange of any prehearing materials including witness lists, statements 
of issues, stipulations, exhibits and any other materials may also be 
determined at the scheduling conference.
    (b) Prehearing conferences. The administrative law judge may, in 
addition to the scheduling conference, on his or her own motion or at 
the request of any party, direct counsel for the parties to meet with 
him or her (in person or by telephone) at a prehearing conference to 
address any or all of the following:
    (1) Simplification and clarification of the issues;
    (2) Stipulations, admissions of fact, and the contents, authenticity 
and admissibility into evidence of documents;
    (3) Matters of which official notice may be taken;
    (4) Limitation of the number of witnesses;
    (5) Summary disposition of any or all issues;

[[Page 74]]

    (6) Resolution of discovery issues or disputes;
    (7) Amendments to pleadings; and
    (8) Such other matters as may aid in the orderly disposition of the 
proceeding.
    (c) Transcript. The administrative law judge, in his or her 
discretion, may require that a scheduling or prehearing conference be 
recorded by a court reporter. A transcript of the conference and any 
materials filed, including orders, becomes part of the record of the 
proceeding. A party may obtain a copy of the transcript at his or her 
expense.
    (d) Scheduling or prehearing orders. At or within a reasonable time 
following the conclusion of the scheduling conference or any prehearing 
conference, the administrative law judge shall serve on each party an 
order setting forth any agreements reached and any procedural 
determinations made.



Sec. 308.32  Prehearing submissions.

    (a) Within the time set by the administrative law judge, but in no 
case later than 14 days before the start of the hearing, each party 
shall serve on every other party, his or her:
    (1) Prehearing statement;
    (2) Final list of witnesses to be called to testify at the hearing, 
including name and address of each witness and a short summary of the 
expected testimony of each witness;
    (3) List of the exhibits to be introduced at the hearing along with 
a copy of each exhibit; and
    (4) Stipulations of fact, if any.
    (b) Effect of failure to comply. No witness may testify and no 
exhibits may be introduced at the hearing if such witness or exhibit is 
not listed in the prehearing submissions pursuant to paragraph (a) of 
this section, except for good cause shown.



Sec. 308.33  Public hearings.

    (a) General rule. All hearings shall be open to the public, unless 
the FDIC, in its discretion, determines that holding an open hearing 
would be contrary to the public interest. Within 20 days of service of 
the notice or, in the case of change-in-control proceedings under 
section 7(j)(4) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(4)), within 20 days from 
service of the hearing order, any respondent may file with the Executive 
Secretary a request for a private hearing, and any party may file a 
reply to such a request. A party must serve on the administrative law 
judge a copy of any request or reply the party files with the Executive 
Secretary. The form of, and procedure for, these requests and replies 
are governed by Sec. 308.23. A party's failure to file a request or a 
reply constitutes a waiver of any objections regarding whether the 
hearing will be public or private.
    (b) Filing document under seal. Enforcement Counsel, in his or her 
discretion, may file any document or part of a document under seal if 
disclosure of the document would be contrary to the public interest. The 
administrative law judge shall take all appropriate steps to preserve 
the confidentiality of such documents or parts thereof, including 
closing portions of the hearing to the public.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20349, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.34  Hearing subpoenas.

    (a) Issuance. (1) Upon application of a party showing general 
relevance and reasonableness of scope of the testimony or other evidence 
sought, the administrative law judge may issue a subpoena or a subpoena 
duces tecum requiring the attendance of a witness at the hearing or the 
production of documentary or physical evidence at the hearing. The 
application for a hearing subpoena must also contain a proposed subpoena 
specifying the attendance of a witness or the production of evidence 
from any state, territory, or possession of the United States, the 
District of Columbia, or as otherwise provided by law at any designated 
place where the hearing is being conducted. The party making the 
application shall serve a copy of the application and the proposed 
subpoena on every other party.
    (2) A party may apply for a hearing subpoena at any time before the 
commencement of a hearing. During a hearing, a party may make an 
application for a subpoena orally on the record before the 
administrative law judge.

[[Page 75]]

    (3) The administrative law judge shall promptly issue any hearing 
subpoena requested pursuant to this section. If the administrative law 
judge determines that the application does not set forth a valid basis 
for the issuance of the subpoena, or that any of its terms are 
unreasonable, oppressive, excessive in scope, or unduly burdensome, he 
or she may refuse to issue the subpoena or may issue it in a modified 
form upon any conditions consistent with this subpart. Upon issuance by 
the administrative law judge, the party making the application shall 
serve the subpoena on the person named in the subpoena and on each 
party.
    (b) Motion to quash or modify. (1) Any person to whom a hearing 
subpoena is directed or any party may file a motion to quash or modify 
the subpoena, accompanied by a statement of the basis for quashing or 
modifying the subpoena. The movant must serve the motion on each party 
and on the person named in the subpoena. Any party may respond to the 
motion within ten days of service of the motion.
    (2) Any motion to quash or modify a hearing subpoena must be filed 
prior to the time specified in the subpoena for compliance, but not more 
than ten days after the date of service of the subpoena upon the movant.
    (c) Enforcing subpoenas. If a subpoenaed person fails to comply with 
any subpoena issued pursuant to this section or any order of the 
administrative law judge which directs compliance with all or any 
portion of a document subpoena, the subpoenaing party or any other 
aggrieved party may seek enforcement of the subpoena pursuant to 
Sec. 308.26(c).

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20349, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.35  Conduct of hearings.

    (a) General rules. (1) Hearings shall be conducted so as to provide 
a fair and expeditious presentation of the relevant disputed issues. 
Each party has the right to present its case or defense by oral and 
documentary evidence and to conduct such cross examination as may be 
required for full disclosure of the facts.
    (2) Order of hearing. Enforcement Counsel shall present its case-in-
chief first, unless otherwise ordered by the administrative law judge, 
or unless otherwise expressly specified by law or regulation. 
Enforcement Counsel shall be the first party to present an opening 
statement and a closing statement, and may make a rebuttal statement 
after the respondent's closing statement. If there are multiple 
respondents, respondents may agree among themselves as to their order of 
presentation of their cases, but if they do not agree the administrative 
law judge shall fix the order.
    (3) Examination of witnesses. Only one counsel for each party may 
conduct an examination of a witness, except that in the case of 
extensive direct examination, the administrative law judge may permit 
more than one counsel for the party presenting the witness to conduct 
the examination. A party may have one counsel conduct the direct 
examination and another counsel conduct re-direct examination of a 
witness, or may have one counsel conduct the cross examination of a 
witness and another counsel conduct the re-cross examination of a 
witness.
    (4) Stipulations. Unless the administrative law judge directs 
otherwise, all stipulations of fact and law previously agreed upon by 
the parties, and all documents, the admissibility of which have been 
previously stipulated, will be admitted into evidence upon commencement 
of the hearing.
    (b) Transcript. The hearing must be recorded and transcribed. The 
reporter will make the transcript available to any party upon payment by 
that party to the reporter of the cost of the transcript. The 
administrative law judge may order the record corrected, either upon 
motion to correct, upon stipulation of the parties, or following notice 
to the parties upon the administrative law judge's own motion.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20349, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.36  Evidence.

    (a) Admissibility. (1) Except as is otherwise set forth in this 
section, relevant, material, and reliable evidence that is not unduly 
repetitive is admissible to the fullest extent authorized

[[Page 76]]

by the Administrative Procedure Act and other applicable law.
    (2) Evidence that would be admissible under the Federal Rules of 
Evidence is admissible in a proceeding conducted pursuant to this 
subpart.
    (3) Evidence that would be inadmissible under the Federal Rules of 
Evidence may not be deemed or ruled to be inadmissible in a proceeding 
conducted pursuant to this subpart if such evidence is relevant, 
material, reliable and not unduly repetitive.
    (b) Official notice. (1) Official notice may be taken of any 
material fact which may be judicially noticed by a United States 
district court and any material information in the official public 
records of any Federal or state government agency.
    (2) All matters officially noticed by the administrative law judge 
or Board of Directors shall appear on the record.
    (3) If official notice is requested or taken of any material fact, 
the parties, upon timely request, shall be afforded an opportunity to 
object.
    (c) Documents. (1) A duplicate copy of a document is admissible to 
the same extent as the original, unless a genuine issue is raised as to 
whether the copy is in some material respect not a true and legible copy 
of the original.
    (2) Subject to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, 
any document, including a report of examination, supervisory activity, 
inspection or visitation, prepared by an appropriate Federal financial 
institution regulatory agency or state regulatory agency, is admissible 
either with or without a sponsoring witness.
    (3) Witnesses may use existing or newly created charts, exhibits, 
calendars, calculations, outlines or other graphic material to 
summarize, illustrate, or simplify the presentation of testimony. Such 
materials may, subject to the administrative law judge's discretion, be 
used with or without being admitted into evidence.
    (d) Objections. (1) Objections to the admissibility of evidence must 
be timely made and rulings on all objections must appear on the record.
    (2) When an objection to a question or line of questioning 
propounded to a witness is sustained, the examining counsel may make a 
specific proffer on the record of what he or she expected to prove by 
the expected testimony of the witness, either by representation of 
counsel or by direct interrogation of the witness.
    (3) The administrative law judge shall retain rejected exhibits, 
adequately marked for identification, for the record, and transmit such 
exhibits to the Board of Directors.
    (4) Failure to object to admission of evidence or to any ruling 
constitutes a waiver of the objection.
    (e) Stipulations. The parties may stipulate as to any relevant 
matters of fact or the authentication of any relevant documents. Such 
stipulations must be received in evidence at a hearing, and are binding 
on the parties with respect to the matters therein stipulated.
    (f) Depositions of unavailable witnesses. (1) If a witness is 
unavailable to testify at a hearing, and that witness has testified in a 
deposition to which all parties in a proceeding had notice and an 
opportunity to participate, a party may offer as evidence all or any 
part of the transcript of the deposition, including deposition exhibits, 
if any.
    (2) Such deposition transcript is admissible to the same extent that 
testimony would have been admissible had that person testified at the 
hearing, provided that if a witness refused to answer proper questions 
during the depositions, the administrative law judge may, on that basis, 
limit the admissibility of the deposition in any manner that justice 
requires.
    (3) Only those portions of a deposition received in evidence at the 
hearing constitute a part of the record.



Sec. 308.37  Post-hearing filings.

    (a) Proposed findings and conclusions and supporting briefs. (1) 
Using the same method of service for each party, the administrative law 
judge shall serve notice upon each party, that the certified transcript, 
together with all hearing exhibits and exhibits introduced but not 
admitted into evidence at the hearing, has been filed. Any party may 
file with the administrative law judge proposed findings of fact, 
proposed conclusions of law, and a proposed order within 30 days 
following service of this notice by the administrative law judge or 
within such longer

[[Page 77]]

period as may be ordered by the administrative law judge.
    (2) Proposed findings and conclusions must be supported by citation 
to any relevant authorities and by page references to any relevant 
portions of the record. A post-hearing brief may be filed in support of 
proposed findings and conclusions, either as part of the same document 
or in a separate document. Any party who fails to file timely with the 
administrative law judge any proposed finding or conclusion is deemed to 
have waived the right to raise in any subsequent filing or submission 
any issue not addressed in such party's proposed finding or conclusion.
    (b) Reply briefs. Reply briefs may be filed within 15 days after the 
date on which the parties' proposed findings, conclusions, and order are 
due. Reply briefs must be strictly limited to responding to new matters, 
issues, or arguments raised in another party's papers. A party who has 
not filed proposed findings of fact and conclusions of law or a post-
hearing brief may not file a reply brief.
    (c) Simultaneous filing required. The administrative law judge shall 
not order the filing by any party of any brief or reply brief in advance 
of the other party's filing of its brief.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 20349, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.38  Recommended decision and filing of record.

    (a) Filing of recommended decision and record. Within 45 days after 
expiration of the time allowed for filing reply briefs under 
Sec. 308.37(b), the administrative law judge shall file with and certify 
to the Executive Secretary, for decision, the record of the proceeding. 
The record must include the administrative law judge's recommended 
decision, recommended findings of fact, recommended conclusions of law, 
and proposed order; all prehearing and hearing transcripts, exhibits, 
and rulings; and the motions, briefs, memoranda, and other supporting 
papers filed in connection with the hearing. The administrative law 
judge shall serve upon each party the recommended decision, findings, 
conclusions, and proposed order.
    (b) Filing of index. At the same time the administrative law judge 
files with and certifies to the Executive Secretary for final 
determination the record of the proceeding, the administrative law judge 
shall furnish to the Executive Secretary a certified index of the entire 
record of the proceeding. The certified index shall include, at a 
minimum, an entry for each paper, document or motion filed with the 
administrative law judge in the proceeding, the date of the filing, and 
the identity of the filer. The certified index shall also include an 
exhibit index containing, at a minimum, an entry consisting of exhibit 
number and title or description for: Each exhibit introduced and 
admitted into evidence at the hearing; each exhibit introduced but not 
admitted into evidence at the hearing; each exhibit introduced and 
admitted into evidence after the completion of the hearing; and each 
exhibit introduced but not admitted into evidence after the completion 
of the hearing.

[61 FR 20350, May 6, 1996]



Sec. 308.39  Exceptions to recommended decision.

    (a) Filing exceptions. Within 30 days after service of the 
recommended decision, findings, conclusions, and proposed order under 
Sec. 308.38, a party may file with the Executive Secretary written 
exceptions to the administrative law judge's recommended decision, 
findings, conclusions or proposed order, to the admission or exclusion 
of evidence, or to the failure of the administrative law judge to make a 
ruling proposed by a party. A supporting brief may be filed at the time 
the exceptions are filed, either as part of the same document or in a 
separate document.
    (b) Effect of failure to file or raise exceptions. (1) Failure of a 
party to file exceptions to those matters specified in paragraph (a) of 
this section within the time prescribed is deemed a waiver of objection 
thereto.
    (2) No exception need be considered by the Board of Directors if the 
party taking exception had an opportunity to raise the same objection, 
issue, or argument before the administrative law judge and failed to do 
so.

[[Page 78]]

    (c) Contents. (1) All exceptions and briefs in support of such 
exceptions must be confined to the particular matters in, or omissions 
from, the administrative law judge's recommendations to which that party 
takes exception.
    (2) All exceptions and briefs in support of exceptions must set 
forth page or paragraph references to the specific parts of the 
administrative law judge's recommendations to which exception is taken, 
the page or paragraph references to those portions of the record relied 
upon to support each exception, and the legal authority relied upon to 
support each exception.



Sec. 308.40  Review by Board of Directors.

    (a) Notice of submission to Board of Directors. When the Executive 
Secretary determines that the record in the proceeding is complete, the 
Executive Secretary shall serve notice upon the parties that the 
proceeding has been submitted to the Board of Directors for final 
decision.
    (b) Oral argument before the Board of Directors. Upon the initiative 
of the Board of Directors or on the written request of any party filed 
with the Executive Secretary within the time for filing exceptions, the 
Board of Directors may order and hear oral argument on the recommended 
findings, conclusions, decision, and order of the administrative law 
judge. A written request by a party must show good cause for oral 
argument and state reasons why arguments cannot be presented adequately 
in writing. A denial of a request for oral argument may be set forth in 
the Board of Directors' final decision. Oral argument before the Board 
of Directors must be on the record.
    (c) Final decision. (1) Decisional employees may advise and assist 
the Board of Directors in the consideration and disposition of the case. 
The final decision of the Board of Directors will be based upon review 
of the entire record of the proceeding, except that the Board of 
Directors may limit the issues to be reviewed to those findings and 
conclusions to which opposing arguments or exceptions have been filed by 
the parties.
    (2) The Board of Directors shall render a final decision within 90 
days after notification of the parties that the case has been submitted 
for final decision, or 90 days after oral argument, whichever is later, 
unless the Board of Directors orders that the action or any aspect 
thereof be remanded to the administrative law judge for further 
proceedings. Copies of the final decision and order of the Board of 
Directors shall be served upon each party to the proceeding, upon other 
persons required by statute, and, if directed by the Board of Directors 
or required by statute, upon any appropriate state or Federal 
supervisory authority.



Sec. 308.41  Stays pending judicial review.

    The commencement of proceedings for judicial review of a final 
decision and order of the FDIC may not, unless specifically ordered by 
the Board of Directors or a reviewing court, operate as a stay of any 
order issued by the FDIC. The Board of Directors may, in its discretion, 
and on such terms as it finds just, stay the effectiveness of all or any 
part of its order pending a final decision on a petition for review of 
that order.



                  Subpart B_General Rules of Procedure



Sec. 308.101  Scope of Local Rules.

    (a) Subparts B and C of the Local Rules prescribe rules of practice 
and procedure to be followed in the administrative enforcement 
proceedings initiated by the FDIC as set forth in Sec. 308.1 of the 
Uniform Rules.
    (b) Except as otherwise specifically provided, the Uniform Rules and 
subpart B of the Local Rules shall not apply to subparts D through T of 
the Local Rules.
    (c) Subpart C of the Local Rules shall apply to any administrative 
proceeding initiated by the FDIC.
    (d) Subparts A, B, and C of this part prescribe the rules of 
practice and procedure to applicable to adjudicatory proceedings as to 
which hearings on the record are provided for by the assessment of civil 
money penalties by the FDIC against institutions, institution-affiliated 
parties, and certain

[[Page 79]]

other persons for which it is the appropriate regulatory agency for any 
violation of section 15(c)(4) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o(c)(4)).

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62100, Nov. 16, 1999; 66 
FR 9189, Feb. 7, 2001; 80 FR 5012, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.102  Authority of Board of Directors and Executive Secretary.

    (a) The Board of Directors. (1) The Board of Directors may, at any 
time during the pendency of a proceeding, perform, direct the 
performance of, or waive performance of, any act which could be done or 
ordered by the Executive Secretary.
    (2) Nothing contained in this part 308 shall be construed to limit 
the power of the Board of Directors granted by applicable statutes or 
regulations.
    (b) The Executive Secretary. (1) When no administrative law judge 
has jurisdiction over a proceeding, the Executive Secretary may act in 
place of, and with the same authority as, an administrative law judge, 
except that the Executive Secretary may not hear a case on the merits or 
make a recommended decision on the merits to the Board of Directors.
    (2) Pursuant to authority delegated by the Board of Directors, the 
Executive Secretary and Assistant Executive Secretary, upon the advice 
and recommendation of the Deputy General Counsel for Litigation or, in 
his absence, the Assistant General Counsel, Trial Litigation Section, 
may issue rulings in proceedings under sections 7(j), 8, 18(j), 19, 32 
and 38 of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1817(j), 1818, 1828(j), 1829, 1831i and 
1831o concerning:
    (i) Denials of requests for private hearing;
    (ii) Interlocutory appeals;
    (iii) Stays pending judicial review;
    (iv) Reopenings of the record and/or remands of the record to the 
ALJ;
    (v) Supplementation of the evidence in the record;
    (vi) All remands from the courts of appeals not involving 
substantive issues;
    (vii) Extensions of stays of orders terminating deposit insurance; 
and
    (viii) All matters, including final decisions, in proceedings under 
section 8(g) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(g)).

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62100, Nov. 16, 1999; 67 
FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]



Sec. 308.103  Appointment of administrative law judge.

    (a) Appointment. Unless otherwise directed by the Board of Directors 
or as otherwise provided in the Local Rules, a hearing within the scope 
of this part 308 shall be held before an administrative law judge of the 
Office of Financial Institution Adjudication (``OFIA'').
    (b) Procedures. (1) The Executive Secretary shall promptly after 
issuance of the notice refer the matter to the OFIA which shall secure 
the appointment of an administrative law judge to hear the proceeding.
    (2) OFIA shall advise the parties, in writing, that an 
administrative law judge has been appointed.



Sec. 308.104  Filings with the Board of Directors.

    (a) General rule. All materials required to be filed with or 
referred to the Board of Directors in any proceedings under this part 
308 shall be filed with the Executive Secretary, Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429.
    (b) Scope. Filings to be made with the Executive Secretary include 
pleadings and motions filed during the proceeding; the record filed by 
the administrative law judge after the issuance of a recommended 
decision; the recommended decision filed by the administrative law judge 
following a motion for summary disposition; referrals by the 
administrative law judge of motions for interlocutory review; motions 
and responses to motions filed by the parties after the record has been 
certified to the Board of Directors; exceptions and requests for oral 
argument; and any other papers required to be filed with the Board of 
Directors under this part 308.



Sec. 308.105  Custodian of the record.

    The Executive Secretary is the official custodian of the record when 
no

[[Page 80]]

administrative law judge has jurisdiction over the proceeding. As the 
official custodian, the Executive Secretary shall maintain the official 
record of all papers filed in each proceeding.



Sec. 308.106  Written testimony in lieu of oral hearing.

    (a) General rule. (1) At any time more than fifteen days before the 
hearing is to commence, on the motion of any party or on his or her own 
motion, the administrative law judge may order that the parties present 
part or all of their case-in-chief and, if ordered, their rebuttal, in 
the form of exhibits and written statements sworn to by the witness 
offering such statements as evidence, provided that if any party 
objects, the administrative law judge shall not require such a format if 
that format would violate the objecting party's right under the 
Administrative Procedure Act, or other applicable law, or would 
otherwise unfairly prejudice that party.
    (2) Any such order shall provide that each party shall, upon 
request, have the same right of oral cross-examination (or redirect 
examination) as would exist had the witness testified orally rather than 
through a written statement. Such order shall also provide that any 
party has a right to call any hostile witness or adverse party to 
testify orally.
    (b) Scheduling of submission of written testimony. (1) If written 
direct testimony and exhibits are ordered under paragraph (a) of this 
section, the administrative law judge shall require that it be filed 
within the time period for commencement of the hearing, and the hearing 
shall be deemed to have commenced on the day such testimony is due.
    (2) Absent good cause shown, written rebuttal, if any, shall be 
submitted and the oral portion of the hearing begun within 30 days of 
the date set for filing written direct testimony.
    (3) The administrative law judge shall direct, unless good cause 
requires otherwise, that--
    (i) All parties shall simultaneously file any exhibits and written 
direct testimony required under paragraph (b)(1) of this section; and
    (ii) All parties shall simultaneously file any exhibits and written 
rebuttal required under paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (c) Failure to comply with order to file written testimony. (1) The 
failure of any party to comply with an order to file written testimony 
or exhibits at the time and in the manner required under this section 
shall be deemed a waiver of that party's right to present any evidence, 
except testimony of a previously identified adverse party or hostile 
witness. Failure to file written testimony or exhibits is, however, not 
a waiver of that party's right of cross-examination or a waiver of the 
right to present rebuttal evidence that was not required to be submitted 
in written form.
    (2) Late filings of papers under this section may be allowed and 
accepted only upon good cause shown.



Sec. 308.107  Document discovery.

    (a) Parties to proceedings set forth at Sec. 308.1 of the Uniform 
Rules and as provided in the Local Rules may obtain discovery only 
through the production of documents. No other form of discovery shall be 
allowed.
    (b) Any questioning at a deposition of a person producing documents 
pursuant to a document subpoena shall be strictly limited to the 
identification of documents produced by that person and a reasonable 
examination to determine whether the subpoenaed person made an adequate 
search for, and has produced, all subpoenaed documents.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 80 FR 5012, Jan. 30, 2015]



  Subpart C_Rules of Practice Before the FDIC and Standards of Conduct



Sec. 308.108  Sanctions.

    (a) General rule. Appropriate sanctions may be imposed when any 
counsel or party has acted, or failed to act, in a manner required by 
applicable statute, regulations, or order, and that act or failure to 
act:
    (1) Constitutes contemptuous conduct;
    (2) Has in a material way injured or prejudiced some other party in 
terms

[[Page 81]]

of substantive injury, incurring additional expenses including 
attorney's fees, prejudicial delay, or otherwise;
    (3) Is a clear and unexcused violation of an applicable statute, 
regulation, or order; or
    (4) Has unduly delayed the proceeding.
    (b) Sanctions. Sanctions which may be imposed include any one or 
more of the following:
    (1) Issuing an order against the party;
    (2) Rejecting or striking any testimony or documentary evidence 
offered, or other papers filed, by the party;
    (3) Precluding the party from contesting specific issues or 
findings;
    (4) Precluding the party from offering certain evidence or from 
challenging or contesting certain evidence offered by another party;
    (5) Precluding the party from making a late filing or conditioning a 
late filing on any terms that are just; and
    (6) Assessing reasonable expenses, including attorney's fees, 
incurred by any other party as a result of the improper action or 
failure to act.
    (c) Limits on dismissal as a sanction. No recommendation of 
dismissal shall be made by the administrative law judge or granted by 
the Board of Directors based on the failure to hold a hearing within the 
time period called for in this part 308, or on the failure of an 
administrative law judge to render a recommended decision within the 
time period called for in this part 308, absent a finding:
    (1) That the delay resulted solely or principally from the conduct 
of the FDIC enforcement counsel;
    (2) That the conduct of the FDIC enforcement counsel is unexcused;
    (3) That the moving respondent took all reasonable steps to oppose 
and prevent the subject delay;
    (4) That the moving respondent has been materially prejudiced or 
injured; and
    (5) That no lesser or different sanction is adequate.
    (d) Procedure for imposition of sanctions. (1) The administrative 
law judge, upon the request of any party, or on his or her own motion, 
may impose sanctions in accordance with this section, provided that the 
administrative law judge may only recommend to the Board of Directors 
the sanction of entering a final order determining the case on the 
merits.
    (2) No sanction, other than refusing to accept late papers, 
authorized by this section shall be imposed without prior notice to all 
parties and an opportunity for any counsel or party against whom 
sanctions would be imposed to be heard. Such opportunity to be heard may 
be on such notice, and the response may be in such form, as the 
administrative law judge directs. The opportunity to be heard may be 
limited to an opportunity to respond orally immediately after the act or 
inaction covered by this section is noted by the administrative law 
judge.
    (3) Requests for the imposition of sanctions by any party, and the 
imposition of sanctions, shall be treated for interlocutory review 
purposes in the same manner as any other ruling by the administrative 
law judge.
    (4) Section not exclusive. Nothing in this section shall be read as 
precluding the administrative law judge or the Board of Directors from 
taking any other action, or imposing any restriction or sanction, 
authorized by applicable statute or regulation.



Sec. 308.109  Suspension and disbarment.

    (a) Discretionary suspension and disbarment. (1) The Board of 
Directors may suspend or revoke the privilege of any counsel to appear 
or practice before the FDIC if, after notice of and opportunity for 
hearing in the matter, that counsel is found by the Board of Directors:
    (i) Not to possess the requisite qualifications to represent others;
    (ii) To be seriously lacking in character or integrity or to have 
engaged in material unethical or improper professional conduct;
    (iii) To have engaged in, or aided and abetted, a material and 
knowing violation of the FDIA; or
    (iv) To have engaged in contemptuous conduct before the FDIC. 
Suspension or revocation on the grounds set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) 
(ii), (iii), and (iv) of this section shall only be ordered upon a 
further finding that the

[[Page 82]]

counsel's conduct or character was sufficiently egregious as to justify 
suspension or revocation.
    (2) Unless otherwise ordered by the Board of Directors, an 
application for reinstatement by a person suspended or disbarred under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section may be made in writing at any time more 
than three years after the effective date of the suspension or 
disbarment and, thereafter, at any time more than one year after the 
person's most recent application for reinstatement. The suspension or 
disbarment shall continue until the applicant has been reinstated by the 
Board of Directors for good cause shown or until, in the case of a 
suspension, the suspension period has expired. An applicant for 
reinstatement under this provision may, in the Board of Directors' sole 
discretion, be afforded a hearing.
    (b) Mandatory suspension and disbarment. (1) Any counsel who has 
been and remains suspended or disbarred by a court of the United States 
or of any state, territory, district, commonwealth, or possession; or 
any person who has been and remains suspended or barred from practice 
before the OCC, Board of Governors, the OTS, the NCUA, the Securities 
and Exchange Commission, or the Commodity Futures Trading Commission; or 
any person who has been, within the last ten years, convicted of a 
felony, or of a misdemeanor involving moral turpitude, shall be 
suspended automatically from appearing or practicing before the FDIC. A 
disbarment, suspension, or conviction within the meaning of this 
paragraph (b) shall be deemed to have occurred when the disbarring, 
suspending, or convicting agency or tribunal enters its judgment or 
order, regardless of whether an appeal is pending or could be taken, and 
includes a judgment or an order on a plea of nolo contendere or on 
consent, regardless of whether a violation is admitted in the consent.
    (2) Any person appearing or practicing before the FDIC who is the 
subject of an order, judgment, decree, or finding of the types set forth 
in paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall promptly file with the 
Executive Secretary a copy thereof, together with any related opinion or 
statement of the agency or tribunal involved. Any person who fails to so 
file a copy of the order, judgment, decree, or finding within 30 days 
after the entry of the order, judgment, decree, or finding or the date 
such person initiates practice before the FDIC, for that reason alone 
may be disqualified from practicing before the FDIC until such time as 
the appropriate filing shall be made. Failure to file any such paper 
shall not impair the operation of any other provision of this section.
    (3) A suspension or disbarment under paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section from practice before the FDIC shall continue until the applicant 
has been reinstated by the Board of Directors for good cause shown, 
provided that any person suspended or disbarred under paragraph (b)(1) 
of this section shall be automatically reinstated by the Executive 
Secretary, upon appropriate application, if all the grounds for 
suspension or disbarment under paragraph (b)(1) of this section are 
subsequently removed by a reversal of the conviction (or the passage of 
time since the conviction) or termination of the underlying suspension 
or disbarment. An application for reinstatement on any other grounds by 
any person suspended or disbarred under paragraph (b)(1) of this section 
may be filed no sooner than one year after the suspension or disbarment, 
and thereafter, a new request for reinstatement may be made no sooner 
than one year after the counsel's most recent reinstatement application. 
The application must comply with the requirements of Sec. 303.3 of this 
chapter. An applicant for reinstatement under this provision may, in the 
Board of Directors' sole discretion, be afforded a hearing.
    (c) Hearings under this section. Hearings conducted under this 
section shall be conducted in substantially the same manner as other 
hearings under the Uniform Rules, provided that in proceedings to 
terminate an existing FDIC suspension or disbarment order, the person 
seeking the termination of the order shall bear the burden of going 
forward with an application and with the burden of proving the grounds 
supporting the application, and that the Board of Directors may, in its 
sole discretion, direct that any proceeding to

[[Page 83]]

terminate an existing suspension or disbarment by the FDIC be limited to 
written submissions.
    (d) Summary suspension for contemptuous conduct. A finding by the 
administrative law judge of contemptuous conduct during the course of 
any proceeding shall be grounds for summary suspension by the 
administrative law judge of a counsel or other representative from any 
further participation in that proceeding for the duration of that 
proceeding.
    (e) Practice defined. Unless the Board of Directors orders 
otherwise, for the purposes of this section, practicing before the FDIC 
includes, but is not limited to, transacting any business with the FDIC 
as counsel or agent for any other person and the preparation of any 
statement, opinion, or other paper by a counsel, which statement, 
opinion, or paper is filed with the FDIC in any registration statement, 
notification, application, report, or other document, with the consent 
of such counsel.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62100, Nov. 16, 1999; 68 
FR 48270, Aug. 13, 2003; 80 FR 5012, Jan. 30, 2015]



  Subpart D_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
                  Disapproval of Acquisition of Control



Sec. 308.110  Scope.

    Except as specifically indicated in this subpart, the rules and 
procedures in this subpart, subpart B of the Local Rules, and the 
Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings in connection with the 
disapproval by the Board of Directors or its designee of a proposed 
acquisition of control of an insured nonmember bank.



Sec. 308.111  Grounds for disapproval.

    The following are grounds for disapproval of a proposed acquisition 
of control of an insured nonmember bank:
    (a) The proposed acquisition of control would result in a monopoly 
or would be in furtherance of any combination or conspiracy to 
monopolize or attempt to monopolize the banking business in any part of 
the United States;
    (b) The effect of the proposed acquisition of control in any section 
of the United States may be to substantially lessen competition or to 
tend to create a monopoly or would in any other manner be in restraint 
of trade, and the anticompetitive effects of the proposed acquisition of 
control are not clearly outweighed in the public interest by the 
probable effect of the transaction in meeting the convenience and needs 
of the community to be served;
    (c) Either the financial condition of any acquiring person or the 
future prospects of the institution might jeopardize the financial 
stability of the bank or prejudice the interest of the depositors of the 
bank.
    (d) The competence, experience, or integrity of any acquiring person 
or of any of the proposed management personnel indicates that it would 
not be in the interest of the depositors of the bank, or in the interest 
of the public, to permit such person to control the bank;
    (e) Any acquiring person neglects, fails, or refuses to furnish to 
the FDIC all the information required by the FDIC; or
    (f) The FDIC determines that the proposed acquisition would result 
in an adverse effect on the Deposit Insurance Fund.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006; 73 
FR 2145, Jan. 14, 2008]



Sec. 308.112  Notice of disapproval.

    (a) General rule. (1) Within three days of the decision by the Board 
of Directors or its designee to disapprove a proposed acquisition of 
control of an insured nonmember bank, a written notice of disapproval 
shall be mailed by first class mail to, or otherwise served upon, the 
party seeking acquire control.
    (2) The notice of disapproval shall:
    (i) Contain a statement of the basis for the disapproval; and
    (ii) Indicate that a hearing may be requested by filing a written 
request with the Executive Secretary within ten days after service of 
the notice of disapproval; and if a hearing is requested, that an answer 
to the notice of disapproval, as required by Sec. 308.113,

[[Page 84]]

must be filed within 20 days after service of the notice of disapproval.
    (b) Waiver of hearing. Failure to request a hearing pursuant to this 
section shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity for a hearing and 
the notice of disapproval shall constitute a final and unappealable 
order.
    (c) Section 308.18(b) of the Uniform Rules shall not apply to the 
content of the Notice of Disapproval.



Sec. 308.113  Answer to notice of disapproval.

    (a) Contents. (1) An answer to the notice of disapproval of a 
proposed acquisition of control shall be filed within 20 days after 
service of the notice of disapproval and shall specifically deny those 
portions of the notice of disapproval which are disputed. Those portions 
of the notice of disapproval which are not specifically denied are 
deemed admitted by the applicant.
    (2) Any hearing under this subpart shall be limited to those parts 
of the notice of disapproval that are specifically denied.
    (b) Failure to answer. Failure of a respondent to file an answer 
required by this section within the time provided constitutes a waiver 
of his or her right to appear and contest the allegations in the notice 
of disapproval. If no timely answer is filed, Enforcement Counsel may 
file a motion for entry of an order of default. Upon a finding that no 
good cause has been shown for the failure to file a timely answer, the 
administrative law judge shall file a recommended decision containing 
the findings and relief sought in the notice. A final order issued by 
the Board of Directors based upon a respondent's failure to answer is 
deemed to be an order issued upon consent.



Sec. 308.114  Burden of proof.

    The ultimate burden of proof shall be upon the person proposing to 
acquire a depository institution. The burden of going forward with a 
prima facie case shall be upon the FDIC.



  Subpart E_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
 Assessment of Civil Penalties for Willful Violations of the Change in 
                            Bank Control Act



Sec. 308.115  Scope.

    The rules and procedures of this subpart, subpart B of the Local 
Rules and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings to assess civil 
penalties against any person for willful violation of the Change in Bank 
Control Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)), or any regulation or order 
issued pursuant thereto, in connection with the affairs of an insured 
nonmember bank.



Sec. 308.116  Assessment of penalties.

    (a) In general. The civil money penalty shall be assessed upon the 
service of a Notice of Assessment which shall become final and 
unappealable unless the respondent requests a hearing pursuant to 
Sec. 308.19(c)(2).
    (b) Amount. (1) Any person who violates any provision of the Change 
in Bank Control Act or any rule, regulation, or order issued by the FDIC 
pursuant thereto, shall forfeit and pay a civil money penalty of not 
more than $5,000 for each day the violation continues.
    (2) Any person who violates any provision of the Change in Bank 
Control Act or any rule, regulation, or order issued by the FDIC 
pursuant thereto; or recklessly engages in any unsafe or unsound 
practice in conducting the affairs of a depository institution; or 
breaches any fiduciary duty; which violation, practice or breach is part 
of a pattern of misconduct; or causes or is likely to cause more than a 
minimal loss to such institution; or results in pecuniary gain or other 
benefit to such person, shall forfeit and pay a civil money penalty of 
not more than $25,000 for each day such violation, practice or breach 
continues.
    (3) Any person who knowingly violates any provision of the Change in 
Bank Control Act or any rule, regulation, or order issued by the FDIC 
pursuant thereto; or engages in any unsafe or unsound practice in 
conducting the affairs of a depository institution; or

[[Page 85]]

breaches any fiduciary duty; and knowingly or recklessly causes a 
substantial loss to such institution or a substantial pecuniary gain or 
other benefit to such institution or a substantial pecuniary gain or 
other benefit to such person by reason of such violation, practice or 
breach, shall forfeit and pay a civil money penalty not to exceed:
    (i) In the case of a person other than a depository institution--
$1,000,000 per day for each day the violation, practice or breach 
continues; or
    (ii) In the case of a depository institution--an amount not to 
exceed the lesser of $1,000,000 or one percent of the total assets of 
such institution for each day the violation, practice or breach 
continues.
    (4) Adjustment of civil money penalties by the rate of inflation 
pursuant to the Federal Civil Penalties Inflation Adjustment Act 
Improvements Act of 2015. After January 15, 2017, for violations that 
occurred on or after November 2, 2015:
    (i) Any person who has engaged in a violation as set forth in 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall forfeit and pay a civil money 
penalty of not more than $9,623 for each day the violation continued.
    (ii) Any person who has engaged in a violation, unsafe or unsound 
practice or breach of fiduciary duty, as set forth in paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section, shall forfeit and pay a civil money penalty of not more 
than $48,114 for each day such violation, practice or breach continued.
    (iii) Any person who has knowingly engaged in a violation, unsafe or 
unsound practice or breach of fiduciary duty, as set forth in paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section, shall forfeit and pay a civil money penalty not 
to exceed:
    (A) In the case of a person other than a depository institution--
$1,924,589 per day for each day the violation, practice or breach 
continued; or
    (B) In the case of a depository institution--an amount not to exceed 
the lesser of $1,924,589 or one percent of the total assets of such 
institution for each day the violation, practice or breach continued.
    (c) Mitigating factors. In assessing the amount of the penalty, the 
Board of Directors or its designee shall consider the gravity of the 
violation, the history of previous violations, respondent's financial 
resources, good faith, and any other matters as justice may require.
    (d) Failure to answer. Failure of a respondent to file an answer 
required by this section within the time provided constitutes a waiver 
of his or her right to appear and contest the allegations in the notice 
of disapproval. If no timely answer is filed, Enforcement Counsel may 
file a motion for entry of an order of default. Upon a finding that no 
good cause has been shown for the failure to file a timely answer, the 
administrative law judge shall file a recommended decision containing 
the findings and relief sought in the notice. A final order issued by 
the Board of Directors based upon a respondent's failure to answer is 
deemed to be an order issued upon consent.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 61 FR 57990, Nov. 12, 1996; 65 
FR 64887, Oct. 31, 2000; 69 FR 61305, Oct. 18, 2004; 73 FR 73157, Dec. 
2, 2008; 77 FR 75477, Dec. 17, 2012; 81 FR 42239, June 29, 2016; 81 FR 
95416, Dec. 28, 2016]



Sec. 308.117  Effective date of, and payment under, an order to pay.

    If the respondent both requests a hearing and serves an answer, 
civil penalties assessed pursuant to this subpart are due and payable 60 
days after an order to pay, issued after the hearing or upon default, is 
served upon the respondent, unless the order provides for a different 
period of payment. Civil penalties assessed pursuant to an order to pay 
issued upon consent are due and payable within the time specified 
therein.



Sec. 308.118  Collection of penalties.

    The FDIC may collect any civil penalty assessed pursuant to this 
subpart by agreement with the respondent, or the FDIC may bring an 
action against the respondent to recover the penalty amount in the 
appropriate United States district court. All penalties collected under 
this section shall be paid over to the Treasury of the United States.

[[Page 86]]



Subpart F_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings for Involuntary 
                      Termination of Insured Status



Sec. 308.119  Scope.

    (a) Involuntary termination of insurance pursuant to section 8(a) of 
the FDIA. The rules and procedures in this subpart, subpart B of the 
Local Rules and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings in 
connection with the involuntary termination of the insured status of an 
insured bank depository institution or an insured branch of a foreign 
bank pursuant to section 8(a) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)), except 
that the Uniform Rules and subpart B of the Local Rules shall not apply 
to the temporary suspension of insurance pursuant to section 8(a)(8) of 
the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(8)).
    (b) Involuntary termination of insurance pursuant to section 8(p) of 
the Act. The rules and procedures in Sec. 308.124 of this subpart F 
shall apply to proceedings in connection with the involuntary 
termination of the insured status of an insured depository institution 
or an insured branch of a foreign bank pursuant to section 8(p) of the 
FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(p)). The Uniform Rules shall not apply to 
proceedings under section 8(p) of the FDIA.



Sec. 308.120  Grounds for termination of insurance.

    (a) General rule. The following are grounds for involuntary 
termination of insurance pursuant to section 8(a) of the FDIA:
    (1) An insured depository institution or its directors or trustees 
have engaged or are engaging in unsafe or unsound practices in 
conducting the business of such depository institution;
    (2) An insured depository institution is in an unsafe or unsound 
condition such that it should not continue operations as an insured 
depository institution; or
    (3) An insured depository institution or its directors or trustees 
have violated an applicable law, rule, regulation, order, condition 
imposed in writing by the FDIC in connection with the granting of any 
application or other request by the insured depository institution or 
have violated any written agreement entered into between the insured 
depository institution and the FDIC.
    (b) Extraterritorial acts of foreign banks. An act or practice 
committed outside the United States by a foreign bank or its directors 
or trustees which would otherwise be a ground for termination of insured 
status under this section shall be a ground for termination if the Board 
of Directors finds:
    (1) The act or practice has been, is, or is likely to be a cause of, 
or carried on in connection with or in furtherance of, an act or 
practice committed within any state, territory, or possession of the 
United States or the District of Columbia that, in and of itself, would 
be an appropriate basis for action by the FDIC; or
    (2) The act or practice committed outside the United States, if 
proven, would adversely affect the insurance risk of the FDIC.
    (c) Failure of foreign bank to secure removal of personnel. The 
failure of a foreign bank to comply with any order of removal or 
prohibition issued by the Board of Directors or the failure of any 
person associated with a foreign bank to appear promptly as a party to a 
proceeding pursuant to section 8(e) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(e)), 
shall be a ground for termination of insurance of deposits in any branch 
of the bank.



Sec. 308.121  Notification to primary regulator.

    (a) Service of notification. (1) Upon a determination by the Board 
of Directors or its designee pursuant to Sec. 308.120 of an unsafe or 
unsound practice or condition or of a violation, a notification shall be 
served upon the appropriate Federal banking agency of the insured 
depository institution, or the State banking supervisor if the FDIC is 
the appropriate Federal banking agency.


The notification shall be served not less than 30 days before the Notice 
of Intent to Terminate Insured Status required by section 8(a)(2)(B) of 
the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(2)(B)), and Sec. 308.122, except that this 
period for notification may be reduced or eliminated with the agreement 
of the appropriate Federal banking agency.

[[Page 87]]

    (2) Appropriate Federal banking agency shall have the meaning given 
that term in section 3(q) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1813(q)), and shall be 
the OCC in the case of a national bank, a District bank or an insured 
Federal branch of a foreign bank; the FDIC in the case of an insured 
nonmember bank, including an insured State branch of a foreign bank; the 
Board of Governors in the case of a state member bank; or the OTS in the 
case of an insured Federal or state savings association.
    (3) In the case of a state nonmember bank, insured Federal branch of 
a foreign bank, or state member bank, in addition to service of the 
notification upon the appropriate Federal banking agency, a copy of the 
notification shall be sent to the appropriate State banking supervisor.
    (4) In instances in which a Temporary Order Suspending Insurance is 
issued pursuant to section 8(a)(8) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(8)), 
the notification may be served concurrently with such order.
    (b) Contents of notification. The notification shall contain the 
FDIC's determination, and the facts and circumstances upon which such 
determination is based, for the purpose of securing correction of such 
practice, condition, or violation.



Sec. 308.122  Notice of intent to terminate.

    (a) If, after serving the notification under Sec. 308.121, the Board 
of Directors determines that any unsafe or unsound practices, condition, 
or violation, specified in the notification, requires the termination of 
the insured status of the insured depository institution, the Board of 
Directors or its designee, if it determines to proceed further, shall 
cause to be served upon the insured depository institution a notice of 
its intention to terminate insured status not less than 30 days after 
service of the notification, unless a shorter time period has been 
agreed upon by the appropriate Federal banking agency.
    (b) The Board of Directors or its designee shall cause a copy of the 
notice to be sent to the appropriate Federal banking agency and to the 
appropriate state banking supervisor, if any.



Sec. 308.123  Notice to depositors.

    If the Board of Directors enters an order terminating the insured 
status of an insured depository institution or branch, the insured 
depository institution shall, on the day that order becomes final, or on 
such other day as that order prescribes, mail a notification of 
termination of insured status to each depositor at the depositor's last 
address of record on the books of the insured depository institution or 
branch. The insured depository institution shall also publish the 
notification in two issues of a local newspaper of general circulation 
and shall furnish the FDIC with proof of such publications. The 
notification to depositors shall include information provided in 
substantially the following form:

                                 Notice

    (Date)_____.
    1. The status of the _____, as an (insured depository institution) 
(insured branch) under the provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act, will terminate as of the close of business on the ____ day 
of______, 19__.
    2. Any deposits made by you after that date, either new deposits or 
additions to existing deposits, will not be insured by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    3. Insured deposits in the (depository institution) (branch) on the 
____ day of______, 19__, will continue to be insured, as provided by 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, for 2 years after the close of business 
on the ____ day of ______, 19__. Provided, however, that any withdrawals 
after the close of business on the ____ day of ______, 19__, will reduce 
the insurance coverage by the amount of such withdrawals.
________________________________________________________________________
(Name of (depository institution or branch)
________________________________________________________________________
(Address)

The notification may include any additional information the depository 
institution deems advisable, provided that the information required by 
this section shall be set forth in a conspicuous manner on the first 
page of the notification.



Sec. 308.124  Involuntary termination of insured status for failure
to receive deposits.

    (a) Notice to show cause. When the Board of Directors or its 
designee has evidence that an insured depository institution is not 
engaged in the business

[[Page 88]]

of receiving deposits, other than trust funds, the Board of Directors or 
its designee shall give written notice of this evidence to the 
depository institution and shall direct the depository institution to 
show cause why its insured status should not be terminated under the 
provisions of section 8(p) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(p)). The insured 
depository institution shall have 30 days after receipt of the notice, 
or such longer period as is prescribed in the notice, to submit 
affidavits, other written proof, and any legal arguments that it is 
engaged in the business of receiving deposits other than trust funds.
    (b) Notice of termination date. If, upon consideration of the 
affidavits, other written proof, and legal arguments, the Board of 
Directors determines that the depository institution is not engaged in 
the business of receiving deposits, other than trust funds, the finding 
shall be conclusive and the Board of Directors shall notify the 
depository institution that its insured status will terminate at the 
expiration of the first full semiannual assessment period following 
issuance of that notification.
    (c) Notification to depositors of termination of insured status. 
Within the time specified by the Board of Directors and prior to the 
date of termination of its insured status, the depository institution 
shall mail a notification of termination of insured status to each 
depositor at the depositor's last address of record on the books of the 
depository institution. The depository institution shall also publish 
the notification in two issues of a local newspaper of general 
circulation and shall furnish the FDIC with proof of such publications. 
The notification to depositors shall include information provided in 
substantially the following form:

                                 Notice

    (Date)_____.
    The status of the _____, as an (insured depository institution) 
(insured branch) under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, will terminate 
on the ____ day of______, 19__, and its deposits will thereupon cease to 
be insured.
________________________________________________________________________
(Name of depository institution or branch)
________________________________________________________________________
(Address)


The notification may include any additional information the depository 
institution deems advisable, provided that the information required by 
this section shall be set forth in a conspicuous manner on the first 
page of the notification.



Sec. 308.125  Temporary suspension of deposit insurance.

    (a) If, while an action is pending under section 8(a)(2) of the FDIA 
(12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(2)), the Board of Directors, after consultation with 
the appropriate Federal banking agency, finds that an insured depository 
institution (other than a special supervisory association to which 
Sec. 308.126 of this subpart applies) has no tangible capital under the 
capital guidelines or regulations of the appropriate Federal banking 
agency, the Board of Directors may issue a Temporary Order Suspending 
Deposit Insurance, pending completion of the proceedings under section 
8(a)(2) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(2)).
    (b) The temporary order shall be served upon the insured institution 
and a copy sent to the appropriate Federal banking agency and to the 
appropriate State banking supervisor.
    (c) The temporary order shall become effective ten days from the 
date of service upon the insured depository institution. Unless set 
aside, limited, or suspended in proceedings under section 8(a)(8)(D) of 
the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818 (a)(8)(D)), the temporary order shall remain 
effective and enforceable until an order terminating the insured status 
of the institution is entered by the Board of Directors and becomes 
final, or the Board of Directors dismisses the proceedings.
    (d) Notification to depositors of suspension of insured status. 
Within the time specified by the Board of Directors and prior to the 
suspension of insured status, the depository institution shall mail a 
notification of suspension of insured status to each depositor at the 
depositor's last address of record on the books of the depository 
institution. The depository institution shall also publish the 
notification in two issues of a local newspaper of general circulation 
and shall furnish the FDIC with

[[Page 89]]

proof of such publications. The notification to depositors shall include 
information provided in substantially the following form:

                                 Notice

    (Date)______.
    1. The status of the _____, as an (insured depository institution) 
(insured branch) under the provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act, will be suspended as of the close of business on the ____ day of 
______, 19__, pending the completion of administrative proceedings under 
section 8(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    2. Any deposits made by you after that date, either new deposits or 
additions to existing deposits, will not be insured by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    3. Insured deposits in the (depository institution) (branch) on the 
____ day of ______, 19__, will continue to be insured for ______ after 
the close of business on the_____ day of _____, 19__. Provided, however, 
that any withdrawals after the close of business on the ____ day 
of______, 19__, will reduce the insurance coverage by the amount of such 
withdrawals.
________________________________________________________________________
(Name of depository institution or branch)
________________________________________________________________________
(Address)


The notification may include any additional information the depository 
institution deems advisable, provided that the information required by 
this section shall be set forth in a conspicuous manner on the first 
page of the notification.



Sec. 308.126  Special supervisory associations.

    If the Board of Directors finds that a savings association is a 
special supervisory association under the provisions of section 
8(a)(8)(B) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(a)(8)(B)) for purposes of 
temporary suspension of insured status, the Board of Directors shall 
serve upon the association its findings with regard to the determination 
that the capital of the association, as computed using applicable 
accounting standards, has suffered a material decline; that such 
association or its directors or officers, is engaging in an unsafe or 
unsound practice in conducting the business of the association; that 
such association is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue 
operating as an insured association; or that such association or its 
directors or officers, has violated any law, rule, regulation, order, 
condition imposed in writing by any Federal banking agency, or any 
written agreement, or that the association failed to enter into a 
capital improvement plan acceptable to the Corporation prior to January, 
1990.



  Subpart G_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
                         Cease-and-Desist Orders



Sec. 308.127  Scope.

    (a) Cease-and-desist proceedings under sections 8 and 50 of the 
FDIA. The rules and procedures of this subpart, subpart B of the Local 
Rules and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings to order an 
insured nonmember bank or an institution-affiliated party to cease and 
desist from practices and violations described in section 8(b) of the 
FDIA, 12 U.S.C. 1818(b), and section 50 of the FDIA, 12 U.S.C. 1831aa.
    (b) Proceedings under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. (1) The 
rules and procedures of this subpart, subpart B of the Local Rules and 
the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings by the Board of Directors 
to order a municipal securities dealer to cease and desist from any 
violation of law or regulation specified in section 15B(c)(5) of the 
Securities Exchange Act, as amended (15 U.S.C. 78o-4(c)(5)) where the 
municipal securities dealer is an insured nonmember bank or a subsidiary 
thereof.
    (2) The rules and procedures of this subpart, subpart B of the Local 
Rules and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings by the Board of 
Directors to order a clearing agency or transfer agent to cease and 
desist from failure to comply with the applicable provisions of section 
17, 17A and 19 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (15 
U.S.C. 78q, 78q-l, 78s), and the applicable rules and regulations 
thereunder, where the clearing agency or transfer agent is an insured 
nonmember bank or a subsidiary thereof.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62100, Nov. 16, 1999; 72 
FR 67235, Nov. 28, 2007]

[[Page 90]]



Sec. 308.128  Grounds for cease-and-desist orders.

    (a) General rule. The Board of Directors or its designee may issue 
and have served upon any insured nonmember bank or an institution-
affiliated party a notice, as set forth in Sec. 308.18 of the Uniform 
Rules for practices and violations as described in Sec. 308.127.
    (b) Extraterritorial acts of foreign banks. An act, violation or 
practice committed outside the United States by a foreign bank or an 
institution-affiliated party that would otherwise be a ground for 
issuing a cease-and-desist order under paragraph (a) of this section or 
a temporary cease-and-desist order under Sec. 308.131 of this subpart, 
shall be a ground for an order if the Board of Directors or its designee 
finds that:
    (1) The act, violation or practice has been, is, or is likely to be 
a cause of, or carried on in connection with or in furtherance of, an 
act, violation or practice committed within any state, territory, or 
possession of the United States or the District of Columbia which act, 
violation or practice, in and of itself, would be an appropriate basis 
for action by the FDIC; or
    (2) The act, violation or practice, if proven, would adversely 
affect the insurance risk of the FDIC.



Sec. 308.129  Notice to state supervisory authority.

    The Board of Directors or its designee shall give the appropriate 
state supervisory authority notification of its intent to institute a 
proceeding pursuant to subpart G of this part, and the grounds thereof. 
Any proceedings shall be conducted according to subpart G of this part, 
unless, within the time period specified in such notification, the state 
supervisory authority has effected satisfactory corrective action. No 
insured institution or other party who is the subject of any notice or 
order issued by the FDIC under this section shall have standing to raise 
the requirements of this subpart as grounds for attacking the validity 
of any such notice or order.



Sec. 308.130  Effective date of order and service on bank.

    (a) Effective date. A cease-and-desist order issued by the Board of 
Directors after a hearing, and a cease-and-desist order issued based 
upon a default, shall become effective at the expiration of 30 days 
after the service of the order upon the bank or its official. A cease-
and-desist order issued upon consent shall become effective at the time 
specified therein. All cease-and-desist orders shall remain effective 
and enforceable, except to the extent they are stayed, modified, 
terminated, or set aside by the Board of Directors or its designee or by 
a reviewing court.
    (b) Service on banks. In cases where the bank is not the respondent, 
the cease-and-desist order shall also be served upon the bank.



Sec. 308.131  Temporary cease-and-desist order.

    (a) Issuance. (1) When the Board of Directors or its designee 
determines that the violation, or the unsafe or unsound practice, as 
specified in the notice, or the continuation thereof, is likely to cause 
insolvency or significant dissipation of assets or earnings of the bank, 
or is likely to weaken the condition of the bank or otherwise prejudice 
the interests of its depositors prior to the completion of the 
proceedings under section 8(b) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)) and 
Sec. 308.128 of this subpart, the Board of Directors or its designee may 
issue a temporary order requiring the bank or an institution-affiliated 
party to immediately cease and desist from any such violation, practice 
or to take affirmative action to prevent such insolvency, dissipation, 
condition or prejudice pending completion of the proceedings under 
section 8(b) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)).
    (2) When the Board of Directors or its designee issues a Notice of 
charges pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(b)(1) which specifies on the basis of 
particular facts and circumstances that a bank's books and records are 
so incomplete or inaccurate that the FDIC is unable, through the normal 
supervisory process, to determine the financial condition of the bank or 
the details or purpose of any transaction or transactions that may have 
a material effect on the

[[Page 91]]

financial condition of the bank, then the Board of Directors or its 
designee may issue a temporary order requiring:
    (i) The cessation of any activity or practice which gave rise, 
whether in whole or in part, to the incomplete or inaccurate state of 
the books or records; or
    (ii) Affirmative action to restore such books or records to a 
complete and accurate state, until the completion of the proceedings 
under section 8(b) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)).
    (3) The temporary order shall be served upon the bank or the 
institution-affiliated party named therein and shall also be served upon 
the bank in the case where the temporary order applies only to an 
institution-affiliated party.
    (b) Effective date. A temporary order shall become effective when 
served upon the bank or the institution-affiliated party. Unless the 
temporary order is set aside, limited, or suspended by a court in 
proceedings authorized under section 8(c)(2) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 
1818(c)(2)), the temporary order shall remain effective and enforceable 
pending completion of administrative proceedings pursuant to section 
8(b) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)) and entry of an order which has 
become final, or with respect to paragraph (a)(2) of this section the 
FDIC determines by examination or otherwise that the bank's books and 
records are accurate and reflect the financial condition of the bank.
    (c) Uniform Rules do not apply. The Uniform Rules and subpart B of 
the Local Rules shall not apply to the issuance of temporary orders 
under this section.



  Subpart H_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
  Assessment and Collection of Civil Money Penalties for Violation of 
Cease-and-Desist Orders and of Certain Federal Statutes, Including Call 
                            Report Penalties



Sec. 308.132  Assessment of penalties.

    (a) Scope. The rules and procedures of this subpart, subpart B of 
the Local Rules, and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings to 
assess and collect civil money penalties.
    (b) Relevant considerations. In determining the amount of the civil 
penalty to be assessed, the Board of Directors or its designee shall 
consider the financial resources and good faith of the institution or 
official, the gravity of the violation, the history of previous 
violations, and any such other matters as justice may require.
    (c) Authority of the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors or 
its designee may assess civil money penalties under section 8(i) of the 
FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)), and Sec. 308.1(e) of the Uniform Rules (this 
part).
    (d) Maximum civil money penalty amounts. Pursuant to the Federal 
Civil Penalties Inflation Adjustment Act Improvements Act of 2015, after 
January 15, 2017, for violations that occurred on or after November 2, 
2015, the Board of Directors or its designee may assess civil money 
penalties in the maximum amounts as follows:
    (1) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1464(v) for 
late filing or the submission of false or misleading certified 
statements by State savings associations. Pursuant to section 5(v) of 
the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1464(v)), the Board of Directors or 
its designee may assess civil money penalties as follows:
    (i) Late filing--Tier One penalties. In cases in which an 
institution fails to make or publish its Report of Condition and Income 
(Call Report) within the appropriate time periods, a civil money penalty 
of not more than $3,849 per day may be assessed where the institution 
maintains procedures in place reasonably adapted to avoid inadvertent 
error and the late filing occurred unintentionally and as a result of 
such error; or the institution inadvertently transmitted a Call Report 
that is minimally late. For penalties assessed after January 15, 2017, 
for violations of this paragraph (d)(3)(i) that occurred on or after 
November 2, 2015, the following maximum Tier One penalty amounts 
contained in paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of this section shall apply 
for each day that the violation continues.
    (A) First offense. Generally, in such cases, the amount assessed 
shall be $527

[[Page 92]]

per day for each of the first 15 days for which the failure continues, 
and $1,056 per day for each subsequent day the failure continues, 
beginning on the sixteenth day. For institutions with less than 
$25,000,000 in assets, the amount assessed shall be the greater of $176 
per day or 1/1000th of the institution's total assets (1/10th of a basis 
point) for each of the first 15 days for which the failure continues, 
and $352 or 1/500th of the institution's total assets, \1/5\ of a basis 
point) for each subsequent day the failure continues, beginning on the 
sixteenth day.
    (B) Subsequent offense. Where the institution has been delinquent in 
making or publishing its Call Report within the preceding five quarters, 
the amount assessed for the most current failure shall generally be $879 
per day for each of the first 15 days for which the failure continues, 
and $1,759 per day for each subsequent day the failure continues, 
beginning on the sixteenth day. For institutions with less than 
$25,000,000 in assets, those amounts, respectively, shall be 1/500th of 
the bank's total assets and 1/250th of the institution's total assets.
    (C) Lengthy or repeated violations. The amounts set forth in this 
paragraph (d)(1)(i) will be assessed on a case by case basis where the 
amount of time of the institution's delinquency is lengthy or the 
institution has been delinquent repeatedly in making or publishing its 
Call Reports.
    (D) Waiver. Absent extraordinary circumstances outside the control 
of the institution, penalties assessed for late filing shall not be 
waived.
    (ii) Late-filing--Tier Two penalties. Where an institution fails to 
make or publish its Call Report within the appropriate time period, the 
Board of Directors or its designee may assess a civil money penalty of 
not more than $38,492 per day for each day the failure continues.
    (iii) False or misleading reports or information--(A) Tier One 
penalties. In cases in which an institution submits or publishes any 
false or misleading Call Report or information, the Board of Directors 
or its designee may assess a civil money penalty of not more than $3,849 
per day for each day the information is not corrected, where the 
institution maintains procedures in place reasonably adapted to avoid 
inadvertent error and the violation occurred unintentionally and as a 
result of such error; or the institution inadvertently transmits a Call 
Report or information that is false or misleading.
    (B) Tier Two penalties. Where an institution submits or publishes 
any false or misleading Call Report or other information, the Board of 
Directors or its designee may assess a civil money penalty of not more 
than $38,492 per day for each day the information is not corrected.
    (C) Tier Three penalties. Where an institution knowingly or with 
reckless disregard for the accuracy of any Call Report or information 
submits or publishes any false or misleading Call Report or other 
information, the Board of Directors or its designee may assess a civil 
money penalty of not more than the lesser of $1,924,589 or 1 percent of 
the institution's total assets per day for each day the information is 
not corrected.
    (iv) Mitigating factors. The amounts set forth in this paragraph 
(d)(1) may be reduced based upon the factors set forth in paragraph (b) 
of this section.
    (2) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1467(d) for 
refusal by an affiliate of a State savings association to allow 
examination or to provide required information during an examination. 
Pursuant to section 9(d) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1467(d)), civil money penalties may be assessed against any State 
savings association if an affiliate of such an institution refuses to 
permit a duly-appointed examiner to conduct an examination or refuses to 
provide information during the course of an examination as set forth 12 
U.S.C. 1467(d), in an amount not to exceed $9,623 for each day the 
refusal continues.
    (3) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1817(a) for 
late filings or the submission of false or misleading reports of 
condition. Pursuant to section 7(a) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1817(a)), the 
Board of Directors or its designee may assess civil money penalties as 
follows:
    (i) Late filing--Tier One penalties. In cases in which an 
institution fails to make or publish its Report of Condition and Income 
(Call Report) within

[[Page 93]]

the appropriate time periods, a civil money penalty of not more than 
$3,849 per day may be assessed where the institution maintains 
procedures in place reasonably adapted to avoid inadvertent error and 
the late filing occurred unintentionally and as a result of such error; 
or the institution inadvertently transmitted a Call Report that is 
minimally late. For penalties assessed after January 15, 2017, for 
violations of this paragraph (d)(3)(i) that occurred on or after 
November 2, 2015, the following maximum Tier One penalty amounts 
contained in paragraphs (d)(3)(i)(A) and (B) of this section shall apply 
for each day that the violation continues.
    (A) First offense. Generally, in such cases, the amount assessed 
shall be $527 per day for each of the first 15 days for which the 
failure continues, and $1,056 per day for each subsequent day the 
failure continues, beginning on the sixteenth day. For institutions with 
less than $25,000,000 in assets, the amount assessed shall be the 
greater of $176 per day or 1/1000th of the institution's total assets 
(1/10th of a basis point) for each of the first 15 days for which the 
failure continues, and $352 or 1/500th of the institution's total 
assets, (\1/5\ of a basis point) for each subsequent day the failure 
continues, beginning on the sixteenth day.
    (B) Subsequent offense. Where the institution has been delinquent in 
making or publishing its Call Report within the preceding five quarters, 
the amount assessed for the most current failure shall generally be $879 
per day for each of the first 15 days for which the failure continues, 
and $1,759 per day for each subsequent day the failure continues, 
beginning on the sixteenth day. For institutions with less than 
$25,000,000 in assets, those amounts, respectively, shall be 1/500th of 
the bank's total assets and 1/250th of the institution's total assets.
    (C) Lengthy or repeated violations. The amounts set forth in this 
paragraph (d)(3)(i) will be assessed on a case by case basis where the 
amount of time of the institution's delinquency is lengthy or the 
institution has been delinquent repeatedly in making or publishing its 
Call Reports.
    (D) Waiver. Absent extraordinary circumstances outside the control 
of the institution, penalties assessed for late filing shall not be 
waived.
    (ii) Late-filing--Tier Two penalties. Where an institution fails to 
make or publish its Call Report within the appropriate time period, the 
Board of Directors or its designee may assess a civil money penalty of 
not more than $38,492 per day for each day the failure continues.
    (iii) False or misleading reports or information--(A) Tier One 
penalties. In cases in which an institution submits or publishes any 
false or misleading Call Report or information, the Board of Directors 
or its designee may assess a civil money penalty of not more than $3,849 
per day for each day the information is not corrected, where the 
institution maintains procedures in place reasonably adapted to avoid 
inadvertent error and the violation occurred unintentionally and as a 
result of such error; or the institution inadvertently transmits a Call 
Report or information that is false or misleading.
    (B) Tier Two penalties. Where an institution submits or publishes 
any false or misleading Call Report or other information, the Board of 
Directors or its designee may assess a civil money penalty of not more 
than $38,492 per day for each day the information is not corrected.
    (C) Tier Three penalties. Where an institution knowingly or with 
reckless disregard for the accuracy of any Call Report or information 
submits or publishes any false or misleading Call Report or other 
information, the Board of Directors or its designee may assess a civil 
money penalty of not more than the lesser of $1,924,589 or 1 percent of 
the institution's total assets per day for each day the information is 
not corrected.
    (iv) Mitigating factors. The amounts set forth in this paragraph 
(d)(3) may be reduced based upon the factors set forth in paragraph (b) 
of this section.
    (4) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1817(c) for 
late filing or the submission of false or misleading certified 
statements. Tier One civil money penalties may be assessed pursuant to 
section 7(c)(4)(A) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C.

[[Page 94]]

1817(c)(4)(A)) in an amount not to exceed $3,519 for each day during 
which the failure to file continues or the false or misleading 
information is not corrected. Tier Two civil money penalties may be 
assessed pursuant to section 7(c)(4)(B) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 
1817(c)(4)(B)) in an amount not to exceed $35,186 for each day during 
which the failure to file continues or the false or misleading 
information is not corrected. Tier Three civil money penalties may be 
assessed pursuant to section 7(c)(4)(C) in an amount not to exceed the 
lesser of $1,759,309 or 1 percent of the total assets of the institution 
for each day during which the failure to file continues or the false or 
misleading information is not corrected.
    (5) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to section 8(i)(2) of 
the FDIA. Tier One civil money penalties may be assessed pursuant to 
section 8(i)(2)(A) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)(A)) in an amount 
not to exceed $9,623 for each day during which the violation continues. 
Tier Two civil money penalties may be assessed pursuant to section 
8(i)(2)(B) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)(B)) in an amount not to 
exceed $48,114 for each day during which the violation, practice or 
breach continues. Tier Three civil money penalties may be assessed 
pursuant to section 8(i)(2)(C) (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)(C)) in an amount 
not to exceed, in the case of any person other than an insured 
depository institution $1,924,589 or, in the case of any insured 
depository institution, an amount not to exceed the lesser of $1,924,589 
or 1 percent of the total assets of such institution for each day during 
which the violation, practice, or breach continues.
    (i) Pursuant to 7(j)(16) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(16)), a 
civil money penalty may be assessed for violations of change in control 
of insured depository institution provisions pursuant to section 8(i)(2) 
of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)) in the amounts set forth in this 
paragraph (d)(5).
    (ii) Pursuant to the International Banking Act of 1978 (IBA) (12 
U.S.C. 3108(b)), civil money penalties may be assessed for failure to 
comply with the requirements of the IBA pursuant to section 8(i)(2) of 
the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)), in the amounts set forth in this 
paragraph (d)(5).
    (iii) Pursuant to section 1120(b) of the Financial Institutions 
Recovery, Reform, and Enforcement Act of 1989 (FIRREA) (12 U.S.C. 
3349(b)), where a financial institution seeks, obtains, or gives any 
other thing of value in exchange for the performance of an appraisal by 
a person that the institution knows is not a state certified or licensed 
appraiser in connection with a federally related transaction, a civil 
money penalty may be assessed pursuant to section 8(i)(2) of the FDIA 
(12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)) in the amounts set forth in this paragraph 
(d)(5).
    (iv) Pursuant to the Community Development Banking and Financial 
Institution Act (Community Development Banking Act) (12 U.S.C. 4717(b)) 
a civil money penalty may be assessed for violations of the Community 
Development Banking Act pursuant to section 8(i)(2) of the FDIA (12 
U.S.C. 1818(i)(2)), in the amount set forth in this paragraph (d)(5).
    (v) Civil money penalties may be assessed pursuant to section 
8(i)(2) of the FDIA in the amounts set forth in this paragraph (d)(5) 
for violations of various consumer laws, including, but not limited to, 
the Home Mortgage Disclosure Act (12 U.S.C. 2804 et seq. and 12 CFR 
203.6), the Expedited Funds Availability Act (12 U.S.C. 4001 et seq.), 
the Truth in Savings Act (12 U.S.C. 4301 et seq.), the Real Estate 
Settlement Procedures Act (12 U.S.C. 2601 et seq.), the Truth in Lending 
Act (15 U.S.C. 1601 et seq.), the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 
1681 et seq.), the Equal Credit Opportunity Act (15 U.S.C. 1691 et 
seq.), the Fair Debt Collection Practices Act (15 U.S.C. 1692 et seq.), 
the Electronic Funds Transfer Act (15 U.S.C. 1693 et seq.) and the Fair 
Housing Act (42 U.S.C. 3601 et seq.).
    (6) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1820(e) for 
refusal to allow examination or to provide required information during 
an examination. Pursuant to section 10(e)(4) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 
1820(e)(4)), civil money penalties may be assessed against any affiliate 
of an insured depository institution that refuses to permit a duly-
appointed examiner to conduct an examination or to provide information 
during the

[[Page 95]]

course of an examination as set forth in section 20(b) of the FDIA (12 
U.S.C. 1820(b)), in an amount not to exceed $8,797 for each day the 
refusal continues.
    (7) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1820(k) for 
violation of one-year restriction on Federal examiners of financial 
institutions. Pursuant to section 10(k) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1820(k)), 
the Board of Directors or its designee may assess a civil money penalty 
of up to $316,566 against any covered former Federal examiner of a 
financial institution who, in violation of section 10(k) of the FDIA (12 
U.S.C. 1820(k)) and within the one-year period following termination of 
government service as an employee, serves as an officer, director, or 
consultant of a financial or depository institution, a holding company, 
or of any other entity listed in section 10(k) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 
1820(k)), without the written waiver or permission by the appropriate 
Federal banking agency or authority under section 10(k)(5) of the FDIA 
(12 U.S.C. 1820(k)(5)).
    (8) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1828(a) for 
incorrect display of insurance logo. Pursuant to section 18(a)(3) of the 
FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1828(a)(3)), civil money penalties may be assessed 
against an insured depository institution that fails to correctly 
display its insurance logo pursuant to that section, in an amount not to 
exceed $120 for each day the violation continues.
    (9) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1828(h) for 
failure to timely pay assessment--(i) In general. Subject to paragraph 
(d)(9)(iii) of this section, any insured depository institution that 
fails or refuses to pay any assessment shall be subject to a penalty in 
an amount of not more than 1 percent of the amount of the assessment due 
for each day that such violation continues.
    (ii) Exception in case of dispute. Paragraph (d)(9)(i) of this 
section shall not apply if--
    (A) The failure to pay an assessment is due to a dispute between the 
insured depository institution and the Corporation over the amount of 
such assessment; and
    (B) The insured depository institution deposits security 
satisfactory to the Corporation for payment upon final determination of 
the issue.
    (iii) Special rule for small assessment amounts. If the amount of 
the assessment that an insured depository institution fails or refuses 
to pay is less than $10,000 at the time of such failure or refusal, the 
amount of any penalty to which such institution is subject under 
paragraph (d)(9)(i) of this section shall not exceed $120 for each day 
that such violation continues.
    (iv) Authority to modify or remit penalty. The Corporation, in the 
sole discretion of the Corporation, may compromise, modify, or remit any 
penalty that the Corporation may assess or has already assessed under 
paragraph (d)(9)(i) of this section upon a finding that good cause 
prevented the timely payment of an assessment.
    (10) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1829b(j) 
for recordkeeping violations. Pursuant to section 19b(j) of the FDIA (12 
U.S.C. 1829b(j)), civil money penalties may be assessed against an 
insured depository institution and any director, officer or employee 
thereof who willfully or through gross negligence violates or causes a 
violation of the recordkeeping requirements of that section or its 
implementing regulations in an amount not to exceed $20,111 per 
violation.
    (11) Civil money penalties pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1832(c) for 
violation of provisions regarding interest-bearing demand deposit 
accounts. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1832(c), any depository institution that 
violates the prohibition regarding interest-bearing demand deposit 
accounts shall be subject to a fine of $2,795 per violation.
    (12) Civil penalties for violations of security measure requirements 
under 12 U.S.C. 1884. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1884, an institution that 
violates a rule establishing minimum security requirements as set forth 
in 12 U.S.C. 1882, shall be subject to a civil penalty not to exceed 
$279 for each day of the violation.
    (13) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1972(2)(F) 
for prohibited tying arrangements. Pursuant to the Bank Holding Company 
Act of 1970, Tier One civil money penalties may be

[[Page 96]]

assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1972(2)(F)(i) in an amount not to exceed 
$9,623 for each day during which the violation continues. Tier Two civil 
money penalties may be assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1972(2)(F)(ii) in 
an amount not to exceed $48,114 for each day during which the violation, 
practice or breach continues. Tier Three civil money penalties may be 
assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1972(2)(F)(iii) in an amount not to 
exceed, in the case of any person other than an insured depository 
institution $1,924,589 for each day during which the violation, 
practice, or breach continues or, in the case of any insured depository 
institution, an amount not to exceed the lesser of $1,924,589 or 1 
percent of the total assets of such institution for each day during 
which the violation, practice, or breach continues.
    (14) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3909(d). 
Pursuant to the International Lending Supervision Act (ILSA) (12 U.S.C. 
3909(d)), civil money penalties may be assessed against any institution 
or any officer, director, employee, agent or other person participating 
in the conduct of the affairs of such institution is an amount not to 
exceed $2,394 for each day a violation of the ILSA or any rule, 
regulation or order issued pursuant to ILSA continues.
    (15) Civil money penalties assessed for violations of 15 U.S.C. 78u-
2. Pursuant to section 21B of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 
(Exchange Act) (15 U.S.C. 78u-2), civil money penalties may be assessed 
for violations of certain provisions of the Exchange Act, where such 
penalties are in the public interest. Tier One civil money penalties may 
be assessed pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 78u-2(b)(1) in an amount not to exceed 
$9,054 for a natural person or $90,535 for any other person for 
violations set forth in 15 U.S.C. 78u-2(a). Tier Two civil money 
penalties may be assessed pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 78u-2(b)(2) in an amount 
not to exceed--for each violation set forth in 15 U.S.C. 78u-2(a)--
$90,535 for a natural person or $452,677 for any other person if the act 
or omission involved fraud, deceit, manipulation, or deliberate or 
reckless disregard of a regulatory requirement. Tier Three civil money 
penalties may be assessed pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 78u-2(b)(3) for each 
violation set forth in 15 U.S.C. 78u-2(a), in an amount not to exceed 
$181,071 for a natural person or $905,353 for any other person, if the 
act or omission involved fraud, deceit, manipulation, or deliberate or 
reckless disregard of a regulatory requirement; and such act or omission 
directly or indirectly resulted in substantial losses, or created a 
significant risk of substantial losses to other persons or resulted in 
substantial pecuniary gain to the person who committed the act or 
omission.
    (16) Civil money penalties assessed pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 1639e(k) 
for appraisal independence violations. Pursuant to section 1472(a) of 
the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (Appraisal 
Independence Rule) (15 U.S.C. 1639e(k)), civil money penalties may be 
assessed for an initial violation of the Appraisal Independence Rule in 
an amount not to exceed $11,053 for each day during which the violation 
continues and, for subsequent violations, $22,105 for each day during 
which the violation continues.
    (17) Civil money penalties assessed for false claims and statements 
pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 3802. Pursuant to the Program Fraud Civil Remedies 
Act (31 U.S.C. 3802), civil money penalties of not more than $10,957 per 
claim or statement may be assessed for violations involving false claims 
and statements.
    (18) Civil money penalties assessed for violations of 42 U.S.C. 
4012a(f). Pursuant to the Flood Disaster Protection Act (FDPA) (42 
U.S.C. 4012a(f)), civil money penalties may be assessed against any 
regulated lending institution that engages in a pattern or practice of 
violations of the FDPA in an amount not to exceed $2,090 per violation.

[77 FR 75477, Dec. 17, 2012, as amended at 81 FR 42239, June 29, 2016; 
81 FR 95416, Dec. 28, 2016]



Sec. 308.133  Effective date of, and payment under, an order to pay.

    (a) Effective date. (1) Unless otherwise provided in the Notice, 
except in situations covered by paragraph (a)(2) of this section, civil 
penalties assessed pursuant to this subpart are due and payable 60 days 
after the Notice is served upon the respondent.

[[Page 97]]

    (2) If the respondent both requests a hearing and serves an answer, 
civil penalties assessed pursuant to this subpart are due and payable 60 
days after an order to pay, issued after the hearing or upon default, is 
served upon the respondent, unless the order provides for a different 
period of payment. Civil penalties assessed pursuant to an order to pay 
issued upon consent are due and payable within the time specified 
therein.
    (b) Payment. All penalties collected under this section shall be 
paid over to the Treasury of the United States.



    Subpart I_Rules and Procedures for Imposition of Sanctions Upon 
    Municipal Securities Dealers or Persons Associated With Them and 
                  Clearing Agencies or Transfer Agents



Sec. 308.134  Scope.

    The rules and procedures in this subpart, subpart B of the Local 
Rules and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings by the Board of 
Directors or its designee:
    (a) To censure, limit the activities of, suspend, or revoke the 
registration of, any municipal securities dealer for which the FDIC is 
the appropriate regulatory agency;
    (b) To censure, suspend, or bar from being associated with such a 
municipal securities dealer, any person associated with such a municipal 
securities dealer; and
    (c) To deny registration, to censure limit the activities of, 
suspend, or revoke the registration of, any transfer agent or clearing 
agency for which the FDIC is the appropriate regulatory agency. This 
subpart and the Uniform Rules shall not apply to proceedings to postpone 
or suspend registration of a transfer agent or clearing agency pending 
final determination of denial or revocation of registration.



Sec. 308.135  Grounds for imposition of sanctions.

    (a) Action under section 15(b)(4) of the Exchange Act. The Board of 
Directors or its designee may issue and have served upon any municipal 
securities dealer for which the FDIC is the appropriate regulatory 
agency, or any person associated or seeking to become associated with a 
municipal securities dealer for which the FDIC is the appropriate 
regulatory agency, a written notice of its intention to censure, limit 
the activities or functions or operations of, suspend, or revoke the 
registration of, such municipal securities dealer, or to censure, 
suspend, or bar the person from being associated with the municipal 
securities dealer, when the Board of Directors or its designee 
determines:
    (1) That such municipal securities dealer or such person
    (i) Has committed any prohibited act or omitted any required act 
specified in subparagraph (A), (D), or (E) of section 15(b)(4) of the 
Exchange Act, as amended (15 U.S.C. 78o);
    (ii) Has been convicted of any offense specified in section 
15(b)(4)(B) of the Exchange Act within ten years of commencement of 
proceedings under this subpart; or
    (iii) Is enjoined from any act, conduct, or practice specified in 
section 15(b)(4)(C) of the Exchange Act; and
    (2) That it is in the public interest to impose any of the sanctions 
set forth in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (b) Action under sections 17 and 17A of the Exchange Act. The Board 
of Directors or its designee may issue, and have served upon any 
transfer agent or clearing agency for which the FDIC is the appropriate 
regulatory agency, a written Notice of its intention to deny 
registration to, censure, place limitations on the activities or 
function or operations of, suspend, or revoke the registration of, the 
transfer agent or clearing agency, when the Board of Directors or its 
designee determines:
    (1) That the transfer agent or clearing agency has willfully 
violated, or is unable to comply with, any applicable provision of 
section 17 or 17A of the Exchange Act, as amended, or any applicable 
rule or regulation issued pursuant thereto; and
    (2) That it is in the public interest to impose any of the sanctions 
set forth in paragraph (b) of this section.

[[Page 98]]



Sec. 308.136  Notice to and consultation with the Securities and
Exchange Commission.

    Before initiating any proceedings under Sec. 308.135, the FDIC 
shall:
    (a) Notify the Securities and Exchange Commission of the identity of 
the municipal securities dealer or associated person against whom 
proceedings are to be initiated, and the nature of and basis for the 
proposed action; and
    (b) Consult with the Commission concerning the effect of the 
proposed action on the protection of investors and the possibility of 
coordinating the action with any proceeding by the Commission against 
the municipal securities dealer or associated person.



Sec. 308.137  Effective date of order imposing sanctions.

    An order issued by the Board of Directors after a hearing or an 
order issued upon default shall become effective at the expiration of 30 
days after the service of the order, except that an order of censure, 
denial, or revocation of registration is effective when served. An order 
issued upon consent shall become effective at the time specified 
therein. All orders shall remain effective and enforceable except to the 
extent they are stayed, modified, terminated, or set aside by the Board 
of Directors, its designee, or a reviewing court, provided that orders 
of suspension shall continue in effect no longer than 12 months.



 Subpart J_Rules and Procedures Relating to Exemption Proceedings Under 
          Section 12(h) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934



Sec. 308.138  Scope.

    The rules and procedures of this subpart J shall apply to 
proceedings by the Board of Directors or its designee to exempt, in 
whole or in part, an issuer of securities from the provisions of 
sections 12(g), 13, 14(a), 14(c), 14(d), or 14(f) of the Exchange Act, 
as amended (15 U.S.C. 781, 78m, 78n (a), (c) (d) or (f)), or to exempt 
an officer or a director or beneficial owner of securities of such an 
issuer from the provisions of section 16 of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 
78p).



Sec. 308.139  Application for exemption.

    Any interested person may file a written application for an 
exemption under this subpart with the Executive Secretary, Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC 
20429. The application shall specify the exemption sought and the reason 
therefor, and shall include a statement indicating why the exemption 
would be consistent with the public interest or the protection of 
investors.



Sec. 308.140  Newspaper notice.

    (a) General rule. If the Board of Directors or its designee, in its 
sole discretion, decides to further consider an application for 
exemption, there shall be served upon the applicant instructions to 
publish one notification in a newspaper of general circulation in the 
community where the main office of the issuer is located. The applicant 
shall furnish proof of such publication to the Executive Secretary or 
such other person as may be directed in the instructions.
    (b) Contents. The notification shall contain the name and address of 
the issuer and the name and title of the applicant, the exemption 
sought, a statement that a hearing will be held, and a statement that 
within 30 days of publication of the newspaper notice, interested 
persons may submit to the FDIC written comments on the application for 
exemption and a written request for an opportunity to be heard. The 
address of the FDIC must appear in the notice.



Sec. 308.141  Notice of hearing.

    Within ten days after expiration of the period for receipt of 
comments pursuant to Sec. 308.140, the Executive Secretary shall serve 
upon the applicant and any person who has requested an opportunity to be 
heard written notification indicating the place and time of the hearing. 
The hearing shall be held not later than 30 days after service of the 
notification of hearing. The notification shall contain the name and 
address of the presiding officer designated by the Executive Secretary 
and

[[Page 99]]

a statement of the matters to be considered.



Sec. 308.142  Hearing.

    (a) Proceedings are informal. Formal rules of evidence, the 
adjudicative procedures of the APA (5 U.S.C. 554-557), the Uniform Rules 
and Sec. 308.108 of subpart B of the Local Rules shall not apply to 
hearings under this subpart.
    (b) Hearing Procedure. (1) Parties to the hearing may appear 
personally or through counsel and shall have the right to introduce 
relevant and material documents and to make an oral statement.
    (2) There shall be no discovery in proceeding under this subpart J.
    (3) The presiding officer shall have discretion to permit 
presentation of witnesses within specified time limits, provided that a 
list of witnesses is furnished to the presiding officer prior to the 
hearing. Witnesses shall be sworn, unless otherwise directed by the 
presiding officer. The presiding officer may ask questions of any 
witness and each party may cross-examine any witness presented by an 
opposing party.
    (4) The proceedings shall be on the record and the transcript shall 
be promptly submitted to the Board of Directors. The presiding officer 
shall make recommendations to the Board of Directors, unless the Board 
of Directors, in its sole discretion, directs otherwise.



Sec. 308.143  Decision of Board of Directors.

    Following submission of the hearing transcript to the Board of 
Directors, the Board of Directors may grant the exemption where it 
determines, by reason of the number of public investors, the amount of 
trading interest in the securities, the nature and extent of the 
issuer's activities, the issuer's income or assets, or otherwise, that 
the exemption is consistent with the public interest or the protection 
of investors. Any exemption shall be set forth in an order specifying 
the terms of the exemption, the person to whom it is granted, and the 
period for which it is granted. A copy of the order shall be served upon 
each party to the proceeding.



 Subpart K_Procedures Applicable to Investigations Pursuant to Section 
                            10(c) of the FDIA



Sec. 308.144  Scope.

    The procedures of this subpart shall be followed when an 
investigation is instituted and conducted in connection with any open or 
failed insured depository institution, any institutions making 
application to become insured depository institutions, and affiliates 
thereof, or with other types of investigations to determine compliance 
with applicable law and regulations, pursuant to section 10(c) of the 
FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1820(c)) or section 5(d)(1)(B) of HOLA (12 U.S.C. 
1464(d)(1)(B)). The Uniform Rules and subpart B of the Local Rules shall 
not apply to investigations under this subpart.

[80 FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.145  Conduct of investigation.

    An investigation shall be initiated only upon issuance of an order 
by the Board of Directors; or by the General Counsel, the Director of 
the Division of Risk Management Supervision, the Director of the 
Division of Depositor and Consumer Protection, or their respective 
designees. The order shall indicate the purpose of the investigation and 
designate FDIC's representative(s) to direct the conduct of the 
investigation. Upon application and for good cause shown, the persons 
who issue the order of investigation may limit, quash, modify, or 
withdraw it. Upon the conclusion of the investigation, an order of 
termination of the investigation shall be issued by the persons issuing 
the order of investigation.

[80 FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.146  Powers of person conducting investigation.

    The person designated to conduct the investigation shall have the 
power, among other things, to administer oaths and affirmations, to take 
and preserve testimony under oath, to issue subpoenas and subpoenas 
duces tecum and to apply for their enforcement to the United States 
District Court for the judicial district or the United States court in 
any territory in which

[[Page 100]]

the main office of the bank, institution, or affiliate is located or in 
which the witness resides or conducts business. The person conducting 
the investigation may obtain the assistance of counsel or others from 
both within and outside the FDIC. The persons who issue the order of 
investigation may limit, quash, or modify any subpoena or subpoena duces 
tecum, upon application and for good cause shown. The person conducting 
an investigation may report to the Board of Directors any instance where 
any attorney has engaged in contemptuous, dilatory, obstructionist, or 
contumacious conduct or has otherwise violated any provision of this 
part during the course of an investigation. The Board of Directors, upon 
motion of the person conducting the investigation, or on its own motion, 
may make a finding of contempt and may then summarily suspend, without a 
hearing, any attorney representing a witness from further participation 
in the investigation.

[80 FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.147  Investigations confidential.

    Investigations shall be confidential. Information and documents 
obtained by the FDIC in the course of such investigations shall not be 
disclosed, except as provided in part 309 of this chapter and as 
otherwise required by law.

[80 FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.148  Rights of witnesses.

    In an investigation:
    (a) Any person compelled or requested to furnish testimony, 
documentary evidence, or other information, shall upon request be shown 
and provided with a copy of the order initiating the proceeding;
    (b) Any person compelled or requested to provide testimony as a 
witness or to furnish documentary evidence may be represented by a 
counsel who meets the requirements of Sec. 308.6 of the Uniform Rules. 
That counsel may be present and may:
    (1) Advise the witness before, during, and after such testimony;
    (2) Briefly question the witness at the conclusion of such testimony 
for clarification purposes; and
    (3) Make summary notes during such testimony solely for the use and 
benefit of the witness;
    (c) All persons testifying shall be sequestered. Such persons and 
their counsel shall not be present during the testimony of any other 
person, unless permitted in the discretion of the person conducting the 
investigation. Neither attorney(s) for the institution that is the 
subject of the investigation, nor attorney(s) for any other interested 
persons, shall have any right to be present during the testimony of any 
witness not personally represented by such attorney;
    (d) In cases of a perceived or actual conflict of interest arising 
out of an attorney's or law firm's representation of multiple witnesses, 
the person conducting the investigation may require the attorney to 
comply with the provisions of Sec. 308.8 of the Uniform Rules; and
    (e) Witness fees shall be paid in accordance with Sec. 308.14 of the 
Uniform Rules.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62100, Nov. 16, 1999; 80 
FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.149  Service of subpoena.

    Service of a subpoena shall be accomplished in accordance with 
Sec. 308.11 of the Uniform Rules.



Sec. 308.150  Transcripts.

    (a) General rule. Transcripts of testimony, if any, shall be 
recorded by an official reporter, or by any other person or means 
designated by the person conducting the investigation. A witness may, 
solely for the use and benefit of the witness, obtain a copy of the 
transcript of his or her testimony at the conclusion of the 
investigation or, at the discretion of the person conducting the 
investigation, at an earlier time, provided that the witness submits a 
written request for the transcript and the transcript is available. The 
witness requesting a copy of his or her testimony shall bear the cost 
thereof.
    (b) Subscription by witness. The transcript of testimony shall be 
subscribed by the witness, unless the person conducting the 
investigation and the witness, by stipulation, have waived the

[[Page 101]]

signing, or the witness is ill, cannot be found, or has refused to sign. 
If the transcript of the testimony is not subscribed by the witness, the 
official reporter taking the testimony shall certify that the transcript 
is a true and complete transcript of the testimony.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 80 FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



 Subpart L_Procedures and Standards Applicable to a Notice of Change in 
 Senior Executive Officer or Director Pursuant to Section 32 of the FDIA



Sec. 308.151  Scope.

    The rules and procedures set forth in this subpart shall apply to 
the notice filed by a state nonmember bank pursuant to section 32 of the 
FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1831i) and Sec. 303.102 of this chapter for the consent 
of the FDIC to add or replace an individual on the Board of Directors, 
or to employ any individual as a senior executive officer, or change the 
responsibilities of any individual to a position of senior executive 
officer where:
    (a) The bank is not in compliance with all minimum capital 
requirements applicable to it as determined by the FDIC on the basis of 
such institution's most recent report of condition or report of 
examination or inspection;
    (b) The bank is in a troubled condition as defined in 
Sec. 303.101(c) of this chapter; or
    (c) The FDIC determines, in connection with the review of a capital 
restoration plan required under section 38(e)(2) of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 
1831o(e)(2)) or otherwise, that such prior notice is appropriate.

[64 FR 62100, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.152  Grounds for disapproval of notice.

    The Board of Directors or its designee may issue a notice of 
disapproval with respect to a notice submitted by a state nonmember bank 
pursuant to section 32 of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1831i) where:
    (a) The competence, experience, character, or integrity of the 
individual with respect to whom such notice is submitted indicates that 
it would not be in the best interests of the depositors of the state 
nonmember bank to permit the individual to be employed by or associated 
with such bank; or
    (b) The competence, experience, character, or integrity of the 
individual with respect to whom such notice is submitted indicates that 
it would not be in the best interests of the public to permit the 
individual to be employed by, or associated with, the state nonmember 
bank.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.153  Procedures where notice of disapproval issues pursuant
to Sec. 303.103(c) of this chapter.

    (a) The Notice of Disapproval shall be served upon the insured state 
nonmember bank and the candidate for director or senior executive 
officer. The Notice of Disapproval shall:
    (1) Summarize or cite the relevant considerations specified in 
Sec. 308.152;
    (2) Inform the individual and the bank that a request for review of 
the disapproval may be filed within fifteen days of receipt of the 
Notice of Disapproval; and
    (3) Specify that additional information, if any, must be contained 
in the request for review.
    (b) The request for review must be filed at the appropriate regional 
office.
    (c) The request for review must be in writing and should:
    (1) Specify the reasons why the FDIC should reconsider its 
disapproval; and
    (2) Set forth relevant, substantive and material documents, if any, 
that for good cause were not previously set forth in the notice required 
to be filed pursuant to section 32 of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1831i).

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.154  Decision on review.

    (a) Within 30 days of receipt of the request for review, the Board 
of Directors or its designee, shall notify the bank and/or the 
individual filing the reconsideration (hereafter ``petitioner'') of the 
FDIC's decision on review.
    (b) If the decision is to grant the review and approve the notice, 
the bank

[[Page 102]]

and the individual involved shall be so notified.
    (c) A denial of the request for review pursuant to section 32 of the 
FDIA shall:
    (1) Inform the petitioner that a written request for a hearing, 
stating the relief desired and the grounds therefore, may be filed with 
the Executive Secretary within 15 days after the receipt of the denial; 
and
    (2) Summarize or cite the relevant considerations specified in 
Sec. 308.152.
    (d) If a decision is not rendered within 30 days, the petitioner may 
file a request for a hearing within fifteen days from the date of 
expiration.



Sec. 308.155  Hearing.

    (a) Hearing dates. The Executive Secretary shall order a hearing to 
be commenced within 30 days after receipt of a request for a hearing 
filed pursuant to Sec. 308.154. Upon request of the petitioner or the 
FDIC, the presiding officer or the Executive Secretary may order a later 
hearing date.
    (b) Burden of proof. The ultimate burden of proof shall be upon the 
candidate for director or senior executive officer. The burden of going 
forward with a prima facie case shall be upon the FDIC.
    (c) Hearing procedure. (1) The hearing shall be held in Washington, 
DC or at another designated place, before a presiding officer designated 
by the Executive Secretary.
    (2) The provisions of Secs. 308.6 through 308.12, 308.16, and 308.21 
of the Uniform Rules and Secs. 308.101 through 308.102, and 308.104 
through 308.106 of subpart B of the Local Rules shall apply to hearings 
held pursuant to this subpart.
    (3) The petitioner may appear at the hearing and shall have the 
right to introduce relevant and material documents and make an oral 
presentation. Members of the FDIC enforcement staff may attend the 
hearing and participate as representatives of the FDIC enforcement 
staff.
    (4) There shall be no discovery in proceedings under this subpart.
    (5) At the discretion of the presiding officer, witnesses may be 
presented within specified time limits, provided that a list of 
witnesses is furnished to the presiding officer and to all other parties 
prior to the hearing. Witnesses shall be sworn, unless otherwise 
directed by the presiding officer. The presiding officer may ask 
questions of any witness. Each party shall have the opportunity to 
cross-examine any witness presented by an opposing party. The transcript 
of the proceedings shall be furnished, upon request and payment of the 
cost thereof, to the petitioner afforded the hearing.
    (6) In the course of or in connection with any hearing under 
paragraph (c) of this section the presiding officer shall have the power 
to administer oaths and affirmations, to take or cause to be taken 
depositions of unavailable witnesses, and to issue, revoke, quash, or 
modify subpoenas and subpoenas duces tecum. Where the presentation of 
witnesses is permitted, the presiding officer may require the attendance 
of witnesses from any state, territory, or other place subject to the 
jurisdiction of the United States at any location where the proceeding 
is being conducted. Witness fees shall be paid in accordance with 
Sec. 308.14 of the Uniform Rules.
    (7) Upon the request of the applicant afforded the hearing, or the 
members of the FDIC enforcement staff, the record shall remain open for 
five business days following the hearing for the parties to make 
additional submissions to the record.
    (8) The presiding officer shall make recommendations to the Board of 
Directors or its designee, where possible, within fifteen days after the 
last day for the parties to submit additions to the record.
    (9) The presiding officer shall forward his or her recommendation to 
the Executive Secretary who shall promptly certify the entire record, 
including the recommendation to the Board of Directors or its designee. 
The Executive Secretary's certification shall close the record.
    (d) Written submissions in lieu of hearing. The petitioner may in 
writing waive a hearing and elect to have the matter determined on the 
basis of written submissions.
    (e) Failure to request or appear at hearing. Failure to request a 
hearing shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity for a hearing. 
Failure to appear at a

[[Page 103]]

hearing in person or through an authorized representative shall 
constitute a waiver of hearing. If a hearing is waived, the order shall 
be final and unappealable, and shall remain in full force and effect.
    (f) Decision by Board of Directors or its designee. Within 45 days 
following the Executive Secretary's certification of the record to the 
Board of Directors or its designee, the Board of Directors or its 
designee shall notify the affected individual whether the denial of the 
notice will be continued, terminated, or otherwise modified. The 
notification shall state the basis for any decision of the Board of 
Directors or its designee that is adverse to the petitioner. The Board 
of Directors or its designee shall promptly rescind or modify the denial 
where the decision is favorable to the petitioner.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999]



Subpart M_Procedures and Standards Applicable to an Application Pursuant 
                        to Section 19 of the FDIA



Sec. 308.156  Scope.

    The rules and procedures set forth in this subpart shall apply to an 
application filed pursuant to section 19 of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1829) by 
an insured depository institution and/or an individual, who has been 
convicted of any criminal offense involving dishonesty or a breach of 
trust or money laundering or who has agreed to enter into a pretrial 
diversion or similar program in connection with the prosecution of such 
offense, to seek the prior written consent of the FDIC to become or 
continue as an institution-affiliated party with respect to an insured 
depository institution; to own or control directly or indirectly an 
insured depository institution; or to participate directly or indirectly 
in any manner in the conduct of the affairs of an insured depository 
institution.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999; 64 
FR 72913, Dec. 29, 1999]



Sec. 308.157  Relevant considerations.

    (a) In proceedings under Sec. 308.156 on an application to become or 
continue as an institution-affiliated party with respect to an insured 
depository institution; to own or control directly or indirectly an 
insured depository institution; or to participate directly or indirectly 
in any manner in the conduct of the affairs of an insured depository 
institution, the following shall be considered:
    (1) Whether the conviction or entry into a pretrial diversion or 
similar program is for a criminal offense involving dishonesty or breach 
of trust or money laundering;
    (2) Whether participation directly or indirectly by the person in 
any manner in the conduct of the affairs of the insured depository 
institution constitutes a threat to the safety or soundness of the 
insured depository institution or the interests of its depositors, or 
threatens to impair public confidence in the insured depository 
institution;
    (3) Evidence of the applicant's rehabilitation;
    (4) The position to be held by the applicant;
    (5) The amount of influence and control the applicant will be able 
to exercise over the affairs and operations of the insured depository 
institution;
    (6) The ability of the management at the insured depository 
institution to supervise and control the activities of the applicant;
    (7) The level of ownership which the applicant will have at the 
insured depository institution;
    (8) Applicable fidelity bond coverage for the applicant; and
    (9) Additional factors in the specific case that appear relevant.
    (b) The question of whether a person, who was convicted of a crime 
or who agreed to enter a pretrial diversion or similar program, was 
guilty of that crime shall not be at issue in a proceeding under this 
subpart.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.158  Filing papers and effective date.

    (a) Filing with the regional office. Applications pursuant to 
section 19 shall

[[Page 104]]

be filed by in the appropriate regional office. Unless a waiver has been 
granted pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section, only an insured 
depository institution may file an application. Persons meeting the de 
minimis criteria set forth in the FDIC's Statement of Policy on Section 
19 of the FDIA (63 FR 66177 (1998)) need not file an application.
    (b) Effective date. An application pursuant to section 19 may be 
made in writing at any time more than one year after the issuance of a 
decision denying an application pursuant to section 19. The removal and/
or prohibition pursuant to section 19 shall continue until the 
individual has been reinstated by the Board of Directors or its designee 
for good cause shown.
    (c) Waiver applications. If an institution does not file an 
application regarding an individual, the individual may file a request 
for a waiver of the institution filing requirement for section 19 of the 
FDIA. Such a waiver application shall be filed with the appropriate 
regional office and shall set forth substantial good cause why the 
application should be granted. The Director of the Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC) and, where confirmed in 
writing by the director, a deputy director or an associate director may 
grant or deny applications requesting waivers of the institution filing 
requirement. The authority delegated under this section shall be 
exercised only upon the concurrent certification of the General Counsel 
or his designee that the action to be taken is not inconsistent with 
section 19 of the FDIA.

[64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.159  Denial of applications.

    A denial of an application pursuant to section 19 shall:
    (a) Inform the applicant that a written request for a hearing, 
stating the relief desired and the grounds therefor and any supporting 
evidence, may be filed with the Executive Secretary within 60 days after 
the denial; and
    (b) Summarize or cite the relevant considerations specified in 
Sec. 308.157 of this subpart.



Sec. 308.160  Hearings.

    (a) Hearing dates. The Executive Secretary shall order a hearing to 
be commenced within 60 days after receipt of a request for hearing on an 
application filed pursuant to Sec. 308.159. Upon the request of the 
applicant or FDIC enforcement counsel, the presiding officer or the 
Executive Secretary may order a later hearing date.
    (b) Burden of proof. The ultimate burden of proof shall be upon the 
person proposing to become or continue as an institution-affiliated 
party with respect to an insured depository institution; to own or 
control directly or indirectly an insured depository institution; or to 
participate directly or indirectly in any manner in the conduct of the 
affairs of an insured depository institution. The burden of going 
forward with a prima facie case shall be upon the FDIC.
    (c) Hearing procedure. (1) The hearing shall be held in Washington, 
DC, or at another designated place, before a presiding officer 
designated by the Executive Secretary.
    (2) The provisions of Secs. 308.6 through 308.12, 308.16, and 308.21 
of the Uniform Rules and Secs. 308.101 through 308.102 and 308.104 
through 308.106 of subpart B of the Local Rules shall apply to hearings 
held pursuant to this subpart.
    (3) The applicant may appear at the hearing and shall have the right 
to introduce relevant and material documents and oral argument. Members 
of the FDIC enforcement staff may attend the hearing and participate as 
a party.
    (4) There shall be no discovery in proceedings under this subpart.
    (5) At the discretion of the presiding officer, witnesses may be 
presented within specified time limits, provided that a list of 
witnesses is furnished to the presiding officer and to all other parties 
prior to the hearing. Witnesses shall be sworn, unless otherwise 
directed by the presiding officer. The presiding officer may ask 
questions of any witness. Each party shall have the opportunity to 
cross-examine any witness presented by an opposing party. The transcript 
of the proceedings shall be furnished, upon request and payment of the 
cost thereof, to the applicant afforded the hearing.

[[Page 105]]

    (6) In the course of or in connection with any hearing under this 
subsection, the presiding officer shall have the power to administer 
oaths and affirmations, to take or cause to be taken depositions of 
unavailable witnesses, and to issue, revoke, quash, or modify subpoenas 
and subpoenas duces tecum. Where the presentation of witnesses is 
permitted, the presiding officer may require the attendance of witnesses 
from any state, territory, or other place subject to the jurisdiction of 
the United States at any location where the proceeding is being 
conducted. Witness fees shall be paid in accordance with Sec. 308.14 of 
the Uniform Rules.
    (7) Upon the request of the applicant afforded the hearing, or FDIC 
enforcement staff, the record shall remain open for five business days 
following the hearing for the parties to make additional submissions to 
the record.
    (8) The presiding officer shall make recommendations to the Board of 
Directors, where possible, within 20 days after the last day for the 
parties to submit additions to the record.
    (9) The presiding officer shall forward his or her recommendation to 
the Executive Secretary who shall promptly certify the entire record, 
including the recommendation to the Board of Directors or its designee. 
The Executive Secretary's certification shall close the record.
    (d) Written submissions in lieu of hearing. The applicant or the 
bank may in writing waive a hearing and elect to have the matter 
determined on the basis of written submissions.
    (e) Failure to request or appear at hearing. Failure to request a 
hearing shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity for a hearing. 
Failure to appear at a hearing in person or through an authorized 
representative shall constitute a waiver of hearing. If a hearing is 
waived, the person shall remain barred under section 19.
    (f) Decision by Board of Directors or its designee. Within 60 days 
following the Executive Secretary's certification of the record to the 
Board of Directors or its designee, the Board of Directors or its 
designee shall notify the affected person whether the person shall 
remain barred under section 19. The notification shall state the basis 
for any decision of the Board of Directors or its designee that is 
adverse to the applicant.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62101, Nov. 16, 1999]



  Subpart N_Rules and Procedures Applicable to Proceedings Relating to 
     Suspension, Removal, and Prohibition Where a Felony ls Charged

    Source: 72 FR 67235, Nov. 28, 2007, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 308.161  Scope.

    The rules and procedures set forth in this subpart shall apply to 
the following:
    (a) Proceedings to suspend an institution-affiliated party of an 
insured State nonmember bank, or an insured State savings association, 
or to prohibit such party from further participation in the conduct of 
the affairs of any depository institution, if continued service or 
participation by such party posed, poses, or may pose a threat to the 
interests of the depositors of, or threatened, threatens, or may 
threaten to impair public confidence in, any relevant depository 
institution (as defined at section 1818(g)(1)(E) of Title 12), where the 
individual is the subject of any state or federal information, 
indictment, or complaint, involving the commission of, or participation 
in:
    (1) A crime involving dishonesty or breach of trust punishable by 
imprisonment exceeding one year under state or federal law; or
    (2) A criminal violation of section 1956, 1957, or 1960 of title 18 
or section 5322 or 5324 of title 31.
    (b) Proceedings to remove from office or to prohibit an institution-
affiliated party from further participation in the conduct of the 
affairs of any depository institution without the consent of the Board 
of Directors or its designee where:
    (1) A judgment of conviction or an agreement to enter a pre-trial 
diversion or other similar program has been

[[Page 106]]

entered against such party in connection with a crime described in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section that is not subject to further 
appellate review, if continued service or participation by such party 
posed, poses, or may pose a threat to the interests of the depositors 
of, or threatened, threatens, or may threaten to impair public 
confidence in, any relevant depository institution (as defined at 
section 1818(g)(1)(E) of title 12); or
    (2) A judgment of conviction or an agreement to enter a pre-trial 
diversion or other similar program has been entered against such party 
in connection with a crime described in paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 80 FR 5013, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.162  Relevant considerations.

    (a)(1) In proceedings under Sec. 308.161(a) and (b) for a notice of 
suspension or prohibition, or a removal or prohibition order, the 
following shall be considered:
    (i) Whether the alleged offense is a crime which is punishable by 
imprisonment for a term exceeding one year under state or federal law 
and which involves dishonesty or breach of trust; and
    (ii) Whether the alleged offense is a criminal violation of section 
1956, 1957, or 1960 of title 18 or section 5322 or 5324 of title 31; and
    (iii) Whether continued service or participation by the institution-
affiliated party posed, poses, or may pose a threat to the interests of 
the depositors of, or threatened, threatens, or may threaten to impair 
public confidence in, any relevant depository institution (as defined at 
section 1818(g)(1)(E) of title 12).
    (b) The question of whether an institution-affiliated party is 
guilty of the subject crime shall not be tried or considered in a 
proceeding under this subpart.



Sec. 308.163  Notice of suspension or prohibition, and orders 
of removal or prohibition.

    (a) Notice of suspension or prohibition.
    (1) The Board of Directors or its designee may suspend or prohibit 
from further participation in the conduct of the affairs of any 
depository institution an institution-affiliated party by written notice 
of suspension or prohibition upon a determination by the Board of 
Directors or its designee that the grounds for such suspension or 
prohibition exist. The written notice of suspension or prohibition shall 
be served upon the institution-affiliated party and any depository 
institution that the subject of the action is affiliated with at the 
time the notice is issued.
    (2) The suspension or prohibition shall be effective immediately 
upon service on the institution-affiliated party, who shall immediately 
comply with the requirements thereof, and shall remain in effect until 
final disposition of the information, indictment, complaint, or until it 
is terminated by the Board of Directors or its designee under the 
provisions of Sec. 308.164 or otherwise.
    (b) Order of removal or prohibition.
    (1) The Board of Directors or its designee may issue an order 
removing or prohibiting from further participation in the conduct of the 
affairs of any depository institution an institution-affiliated party, 
when a final judgment of conviction not subject to further appellate 
review is entered against the institution-affiliated party for a crime 
referred to in Sec. 308.161(a)(1) and continued service or participation 
by such party posed, poses, or may pose a threat to the interests of the 
depositors of, or threatened, threatens, or may threaten to impair 
public confidence in, any relevant depository institution (as defined at 
section 1818(g)(1)(E) of title 12).
    (2) An order of removal or prohibition shall be entered if a 
judgment of conviction is entered against the institution-affiliated 
party for a crime described in Sec. 308.161(a)(2).
    (c) The notice of suspension or prohibition or the order of removal 
or prohibition shall:
    (1) Inform the institution-affiliated party that a written request 
for a hearing, stating the relief desired and grounds therefore, and any 
supporting evidence, may be filed with the Executive Secretary within 30 
days after service of the written notice or order; and

[[Page 107]]

    (2) Set forth the basis and facts in support of the notice or order 
and address the relevant considerations specified in Sec. 308.162.
    (d) To obtain a hearing, the institution-affiliated party shall file 
with the Executive Secretary a written request for a hearing within 30 
days after service of the notice of suspension or prohibition or the 
order of removal or prohibition, which shall:
    (1) Admit or deny specifically each allegation in the notice or 
order, or state that the institution-affiliated party is without 
knowledge or information, which statement shall have the effect of a 
denial. Any allegation not denied shall be deemed to be admitted. When 
an institution-affiliated party intends in good faith to deny only a 
part of or to qualify an allegation, he shall specify so much of it as 
is true and shall deny only the remainder; and
    (2) Shall state whether the institution-affiliated party is 
requesting termination or modification of the notice or order, and shall 
state with particularity how he intends to show that his continued 
service to or participation in the conduct of the affairs of the 
depository institution would not, or is not likely to, pose a threat to 
the interests of its depositors or to impair public confidence in the 
depository institution.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 80 FR 5014, Jan. 30, 2015]



Sec. 308.164  Hearings.

    (a) Hearing dates. The Executive Secretary shall order a hearing to 
be commenced within 30 days after receipt of a request for hearing filed 
pursuant to Sec. 308.163. Upon the request of the institution-affiliated 
party, the presiding officer or the Executive Secretary may order a 
later hearing date.
    (b) Hearing procedure. (1) The hearing shall be held in Washington, 
DC, or at another designated place, before a presiding officer 
designated by the Executive Secretary.
    (2) The provisions of Secs. 308.6 through 308.12, 308.16, and 308.21 
of the Uniform Rules and Secs. 308.101 through 308.102 and 308.104 
through 308.106 of subpart B of the Local Rules shall apply to hearings 
held pursuant to this subpart.
    (3) The institution-affiliated party may appear at the hearing and 
shall have the right to introduce relevant and material documents. 
Members of the FDIC enforcement staff may attend the hearing and 
participate as representatives of the FDIC enforcement staff. Following 
the introduction of all evidence, the applicant and the representative 
of the FDIC enforcement staff shall have an opportunity for oral 
argument; however, the parties may jointly waive the right to oral 
argument, and, in lieu thereof, elect to submit written argument.
    (4) There shall be no discovery in proceedings under this subpart.
    (5) At the discretion of the presiding officer, witnesses may be 
presented within specified time limits, provided that a list of 
witnesses is furnished to the presiding officer and to all other parties 
prior to the hearing. Witnesses shall be sworn, unless otherwise 
directed by the presiding officer. The presiding officer may ask 
questions of any witness. Each party shall have the opportunity to 
cross-examine any witness presented by an opposing party. The transcript 
of the proceedings shall be furnished, upon request and payment of the 
cost thereof, to the institution-affiliated party afforded the hearing. 
A copy of the transcript shall be sent directly to the presiding 
officer, who shall have authority to correct the record sua sponte or 
upon the motion of any party.
    (6) In the course of or in connection with any hearing under 
paragraph (b) of this section, the presiding officer shall have the 
power to administer oaths and affirmations, to take or cause to be taken 
depositions of unavailable witnesses, and to issue, revoke, quash, or 
modify subpoenas and subpoenas duces tecum. Where the presentation of 
witnesses is permitted, the presiding officer may require the attendance 
of witnesses from any state, territory, or other place subject to the 
jurisdiction of the United States at any location where the proceeding 
is being conducted. Witness fees shall be paid in accordance with 
Sec. 308.14 of the Uniform Rules.

[[Page 108]]

    (7) Upon the request of the institution-affiliated party afforded 
the hearing, or the members of the FDIC enforcement staff, the record 
shall remain open for five business days following the hearing for the 
parties to make additional submissions to the record.
    (8) The presiding officer shall make recommendations to the Board of 
Directors, where possible, within 10 days after the last day for the 
parties to submit additions to the record.
    (9) The presiding officer shall forward his or her recommendation to 
the Executive Secretary who shall promptly certify the entire record, 
including the recommendation to the Board of Directors. The Executive 
Secretary's certification shall close the record.
    (10) The institution-affiliated party has the burden of showing, by 
a preponderance of the evidence, that his or her continued service to or 
participation in the conduct of the affairs of a depository institution 
does not, or is not likely to, pose a threat to the interests of the 
depository institution's depositors or threaten to impair public 
confidence in the depository institution.
    (c) Written submissions in lieu of hearing. The institution-
affiliated party may in writing waive a hearing and elect to have the 
matter determined on the basis of written submissions.
    (d) Failure to request or appear at hearing. Failure to request a 
hearing shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity for a hearing. 
Failure to appear at a hearing in person or through an authorized 
representative shall constitute a waiver of hearing. If a hearing is 
waived, the order shall be final and unappealable, and shall remain in 
full force and effect pursuant to Sec. 308.163.
    (e) Decision by Board of Directors or its designee. Within 60 days 
following the Executive Secretary's certification of the record to the 
Board of Directors or its designee, the Board of Directors or its 
designee shall notify the institution-affiliated party whether the 
notice of suspension or prohibition or the order of removal or 
prohibition will be continued, terminated, or otherwise modified. The 
notification shall state the basis for any decision of the Board of 
Directors or its designee that is adverse to the institution-affiliated 
party. The Board of Directors or its designee shall promptly rescind or 
modify a notice of suspension or prohibition or an order of removal or 
prohibition where the decision is favorable to the institution-
affiliated party.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 80 FR 5014, Jan. 30, 2015]



   Subpart O_Liability of Commonly Controlled Depository Institutions



Sec. 308.165  Scope.

    The rules and procedures in this subpart, subpart B of the Local 
Rules and the Uniform Rules shall apply to proceedings in connection 
with the assessment of cross-guaranty liability against commonly 
controlled depository institutions.



Sec. 308.166  Grounds for assessment of liability.

    Any insured depository institution shall be liable for any loss 
incurred or reasonably anticipated to be incurred by the corporation, 
subsequent to August 9, 1989, in connection with the default of a 
commonly controlled insured depository institution, or any loss incurred 
or reasonably anticipated to be incurred in connection with any 
assistance provided by the Corporation to any commonly controlled 
depository institution in danger of default.



Sec. 308.167  Notice of assessment of liability.

    (a) The amount of liability shall be assessed upon service of a 
Notice of Assessment of Liability upon the liable depository 
institution, within two years of the date the Corporation incurred the 
loss.
    (b) Contents of Notice. (1) The Notice of Assessment of Liability 
shall set forth:
    (i) The basis for the FDIC's jurisdiction over the proceeding;
    (ii) A statement of the Corporation's good faith estimate of the 
amount of loss it has incurred or anticipates incurring;
    (iii) A statement of the method by which the estimated loss was 
calculated;
    (iv) A proposed order directing payment by the liable institution of 
the

[[Page 109]]

FDIC's estimated amount of loss, and the schedule under which the 
payment will be due;
    (v) In cases involving more than one liable institution, the 
estimated amount of each institution's share of the liability.
    (2) The Notice of Assessment of Liability shall advise the liable 
institution(s):
    (i) That an answer must be filed within 20 days after service of the 
Notice;
    (ii) That, if a hearing is requested, a request for a hearing must 
be filed within 20 days after service of the Notice;
    (iii) That if a hearing is requested, such hearing will be held 
within the judicial district in which the liable institution is found, 
or, in cases involving more than one liable institution, within a 
judicial district in which at least one liable institution is found;
    (iv) That, unless the administrative law judge sets a different 
date, the hearing will commence 120 days after service of the Notice of 
Assessment of Liability; and
    (v) That failure to request a hearing shall render the Notice of 
Assessment a final and unappealable order.



Sec. 308.168  Effective date of and payment under an order to pay.

    (a) Unless otherwise provided in the Notice of Assessment of 
Liability, payment of the assessment shall be due on or before the 21st 
day after service of the Assessment of Liability, under the terms of the 
schedule for payment set forth therein.
    (b) All payments collected shall be paid to the Corporation.
    (c) Failure to request a hearing as prescribed herein shall render 
the order to pay final and unappealable.



Subpart P_Rules and Procedures Relating to the Recovery of Attorney Fees 
                           and Other Expenses



Sec. 308.169  Scope.

    This subpart, and the Equal Access to Justice Act (5 U.S.C. 504), 
which it implements, apply to adversary adjudications before the FDIC. 
The types of adjudication covered by this subpart are those listed in 
Sec. 308.01 of the Uniform Rules. The Uniform Rules and subpart B of the 
Local Rules apply to any proceedings to recover fees and expenses under 
this subpart.



Sec. 308.170  Filing, content, and service of documents.

    (a) Time to file. An application and any other pleading or document 
related to the application shall be filed with the Executive Secretary 
within 30 days after service of the final order of the Board of 
Directors in disposition of the proceeding whenever:
    (1) The applicant seeks an award pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(1) as 
the prevailing party in the adversary adjudication or in a discrete 
significant substantive portion of the proceeding; or
    (2) The applicant, in an adversary adjudication arising from an 
action to enforce compliance with a statutory or regulatory requirement, 
asserts pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(4) that the demand by the FDIC is 
substantially in excess of the decision of the administrative law judge 
and is unreasonable when compared with such decision under the facts and 
circumstances of the case.
    (b) Content. The application and related documents shall conform to 
the requirements of Sec. 308.10(b) and (c) of the Uniform Rules.
    (c) Service. The application and related documents shall be served 
on all parties to the adversary adjudication in accordance with 
Sec. 308.11 of the Uniform Rules, except that statements of net worth 
shall be served only on counsel for the FDIC.
    (d) Upon receipt of an application, the Executive Secretary shall 
refer the matter to the administrative law judge who heard the 
underlying adversary proceeding, provided that if the original 
administrative law judge is unavailable, or the Executive Secretary 
determines, in his or her sole discretion, that there is cause to refer 
the matter to a different administrative law judge, the matter shall be 
referred to a different administrative law judge.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]

[[Page 110]]



Sec. 308.171  Responses to application.

    (a) By FDIC. (1) Within 20 days after service of an application, 
counsel for the FDIC may file with the Executive Secretary and serve on 
all parties an answer to the application. Unless counsel for the FDIC 
requests and is granted an extension of time for filing or files a 
statement of intent to negotiate under Sec. 308.179 of this subpart, 
failure to file an answer within the 20-day period will be treated as a 
consent to the award requested.
    (2) The answer shall explain in detail any objections to the award 
requested and identify the facts relied on in support of the FDIC's 
position. If the answer is based on any alleged facts not already in the 
record of the proceeding, the answer shall include either supporting 
affidavits or a request for further proceedings under Sec. 308.180.
    (b) Reply to answer. The applicant may file a reply with regard to 
an application filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504 (a)(1), if the FDIC has 
addressed in its answer any of the following issues: that the position 
of the FDIC was substantially justified, that the applicant unduly 
protracted the proceedings, or that special circumstances make an award 
unjust. The applicant may file a reply with regard to an application 
filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504 (a)(4), if the FDIC has addressed in its 
answer any of the following issues: that the applicant has committed a 
willful violation of law or otherwise acted in bad faith, that the 
FDIC's demand is reasonable when compared to the decision of the 
administrative law judge or that special circumstances make an award 
unjust. The reply shall be filed within 15 days after service of the 
answer. If the reply is based on any alleged facts not already in the 
record of the proceeding, the reply shall include either supporting 
affidavits or a request for further proceedings under Sec. 308.180.
    (c) By other parties. Any party to the adversary adjudication, other 
than the applicant and the FDIC, may file comments on an application 
within 20 days after service of the application. If the applicant is 
entitled to file a reply to the FDIC's answer under paragraph (b) of 
this section, another party may file comments on the answer within 15 
days after service of the answer. A commenting party may not participate 
in any further proceedings on the application unless the administrative 
law judge determines that the public interest requires such 
participation in order to permit additional exploration of matters 
raised in the comments.
    (d) Additional response. Additional filings in the nature of 
pleadings may be submitted only by leave of the administrative law 
judge.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.172  Eligibility of applicants.

    (a) Genera1 rule. To be eligible for an award under this subpart, an 
applicant must have been named or admitted as a party to the proceeding. 
In addition, the applicant must show that it meets all other conditions 
of eligibility set out in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Types of eligible applicant. The types of eligible applicant 
are:
    (1) An individual with a net worth of not more than $2,000,000 at 
the time the adversary adjudication was initiated; or
    (2) Any owner of an unincorporated business, or any partnership, 
corporation, associations, unit of local government or organization, the 
net worth of which did not exceed $7,000,000 and which did not have more 
than 500 employees at the time the adversary adjudication was initiated.
    (3) For purposes of an application filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 
504(a)(4), a small entity as defined in 5 U.S.C. 601.
    (c) Factors to be considered. In determining the types of eligible 
applicants:
    (1) An applicant who owns an unincorporated business shall be 
considered as an individual rather than a sole owner of an 
unincorporated business if the issues on which he or she prevails are 
related to personal interests rather than to business interests.
    (2) An applicant's net worth includes the value of any assets 
disposed of for the purpose of meeting an eligibility standard and 
excludes the value of any obligations incurred for this purpose. 
Transfers of assets or obligations incurred for less than reasonably 
equivalent value will be presumed to have been made for this purpose.

[[Page 111]]

    (3) The net worth of a bank shall be established by the net worth 
information reported in conformity with applicable instructions and 
guidelines on the bank's Consolidated Report of Condition and Income 
filed for the last reporting date before the initiation of the adversary 
adjudication.
    (4) The employees of an applicant include all those persons who were 
regularly providing services for remuneration for the applicant, under 
its direction and control, on the date the adversary adjudication was 
initiated. Part-time employees are included as though they were full-
time employees.
    (5) The net worth and number of employees of the applicant and all 
of its affiliates shall be aggregated to determine eligibility. The 
aggregated net worth shall be adjusted if necessary to avoid counting 
the net worth of any entity twice. As used in this subpart, affiliates 
are individuals, corporations, and entities that directly or indirectly 
or acting through one or more entities control a majority of the voting 
shares of the applicant; and corporations and entities of which the 
applicant directly or indirectly owns or controls a majority of the 
voting shares. The Board of Directors may, however, on the 
recommendation of the administrative law judge, or otherwise, determine 
that such aggregation with regard to one or more of the applicant's 
affiliates would be unjust and contrary to the purposes of this subpart 
in light of the actual relationship between the affiliated entities. In 
such a case the net worth and employees of the relevant affiliate or 
affiliates will not be aggregated with those of the applicant. In 
addition, the Board of Directors may determine that financial 
relationships of the applicant other than those described in this 
paragraph constitute special circumstances that would make an award 
unjust.
    (6) An applicant that participates in a proceeding primarily on 
behalf of one or more other persons or entities that would be ineligible 
is not itself eligible for an award.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.173  Prevailing party.

    (a) General rule. An eligible applicant who, following an adversary 
adjudication has gained victory on the merits in the proceeding is a 
``prevailing party''. An eligible applicant may be a ``prevailing 
party'' if a settlement of the proceeding was effected on terms 
favorable to it or if the proceeding against it has been dismissed. In 
appropriate situations an applicant may also have prevailed if the 
outcome of the proceeding has substantially vindicated the applicant's 
position on the significant substantive matters at issue, even though 
the applicant has not totally avoided adverse final action.
    (b) Segregation of costs. When a proceeding has presented a number 
of discrete substantive issues, an applicant may have prevailed even 
though all the issues were not resolved in its favor. If such an 
applicant is deemed to have prevailed, any award shall be based on the 
fees and expenses incurred in connection with the discrete significant 
substantive issue or issues on which the applicant's position has been 
upheld. If such segregation of costs is not practicable, the award may 
be based on a fair proration of those fees and expenses incurred in the 
entire proceeding which would be recoverable under Sec. 308.175 if 
proration were not performed, whether separate or prorated treatment is 
appropriate, and the appropriate proration percentage, shall be 
determined on the facts of the particular case. Attention shall be given 
to the significance and nature of the respective issues and their 
separability and interrelationship.



Sec. 308.174  Standards for awards.

    (a) For applications filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(1), a 
prevailing applicant may receive an award for fees and expenses unless 
the position of the FDIC during the proceeding was substantially 
justified or special circumstances make the award unjust. An award will 
be reduced or denied if the applicant has unduly or unreasonably 
protracted the proceedings. Awards for fees and expenses incurred before 
the date on which the adversary adjudication was initiated are allowable 
if their incurrence was necessary to prepare for the proceeding.

[[Page 112]]

    (b) For applications filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(4), an 
applicant may receive an award unless the demand by the FDIC was 
reasonable when compared with the decision of the administrative law 
judge, the applicant has committed a willful violation of law or 
otherwise acted in bad faith, or special circumstances make an award 
unjust.

[64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.175  Measure of awards.

    (a) General rule. Awards will be based on rates customarily charged 
by persons engaged in the business of acting as attorneys, agents, and 
expert witnesses, even if the services were made available without 
charge or at a reduced rate, provided that no award under this subpart 
for the fee of an attorney or agent may exceed $125 per hour. No award 
to compensate an expert witness may exceed the highest rate at which the 
FDIC pays expert witnesses. An award may include the reasonable expenses 
of the attorney, agent, or expert witness as a separate item, if the 
attorney, agent, or expert witness ordinarily charges clients separately 
for such expenses. Fees and expenses awarded under 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(4) 
related to defending against an excessive demand shall be paid only as a 
consequence of appropriations paid in advance.
    (b) Determination of reasonableness of fees. In determining the 
reasonableness of the fee sought for an attorney, agent, or expert 
witness, the administrative law judge shall consider the following:
    (1) If the attorney, agent, or expert witness is in private 
practice, his or her customary fee for like services, or, if he or she 
is an employee of the applicant, the fully allocated cost of the 
services;
    (2) The prevailing rate for similar services in the community in 
which the attorney, agent, or expert witness ordinarily performs 
services;
    (3) The time actually spent in the representation of the applicant;
    (4) The time reasonably spent in light of the difficulty or 
complexity of the issues in the proceeding; and
    (5) Such other factors as may bear on the value of the services 
provided.
    (c) Awards for studies. The reasonable cost of any study, analysis, 
test, project, or similar matter prepared on behalf of an applicant may 
be awarded to the extent that the charge for the service does not exceed 
the prevailing rate payable for similar services, and the study or other 
matter was necessary for preparation of the applicant's case and not 
otherwise required by law or sound business or financial practice.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.176  Application for awards.

    (a) Contents. An application for an award of fees and expenses under 
this subpart shall contain:
    (1) The name of the applicant and an identification of the 
proceeding;
    (2) For applications filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(1), a showing 
that the applicant has prevailed, and an identification of each issue 
with regard to which the applicant believes that the position of the 
FDIC in the proceeding was not substantially justified;
    (3) For applications filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(4), a showing 
that the demand by the FDIC is substantially in excess of the decision 
of the administrative law judge and is unreasonable when compared with 
such decision under the facts and circumstances of the case;
    (4) A statement of the amount of fees and expenses for which an 
award is sought;
    (5) For applications filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(4), a 
statement of the amount of fees and expenses which constitute 
appropriations paid in advance;
    (6) If the applicant is not an individual, a statement of the number 
of its employees on the date the proceeding was initiated;
    (7) A description of any affiliated individuals or entities, as 
defined in Sec. 308.172(c)(5), or a statement that none exist;
    (8) A declaration that the applicant, together with any affiliates, 
had a net worth not more than the ceiling established for it by 
Sec. 308.172(b) as of the date the proceeding was initiated;
    (9) For applications filed pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 504(a)(1), a 
statement whether

[[Page 113]]

the applicant is a small entity as defined in 5 U.S.C. 601; and
    (10) Any other matters that the applicant wishes the FDIC to 
consider in determining whether and in what amount an award should be 
made.
    (b) Verification. The application shall be signed by the applicant 
or an authorized officer or attorney of the applicant. It shall also 
contain or be accompanied by a written verification under oath or under 
penalty of perjury that the information provided in the application and 
supporting documents is true and correct.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.177  Statement of net worth.

    (a) General rule. A statement of net worth must be filed with the 
application for an award of fees. The statement shall reflect the net 
worth of the applicant and all affiliates of the applicant.
    (b) Contents. (1) The statement of net worth may be in any form 
convenient to the applicant which fully discloses all the assets and 
liabilities of the applicant and all the assets and liabilities of its 
affiliates, as of the time of the initiation of the adversary 
adjudication. Unaudited financial statements are acceptable unless the 
administrative law judge or the Board of Directors otherwise requires. 
Financial statements or reports to a Federal or state agency, prepared 
before the initiation of the adversary adjudication for other purposes, 
and accurate as of a date not more than three months prior to the 
initiation of the proceeding, are acceptable in establishing net worth 
as of the time of the initiation of the proceeding, unless the 
administrative law judge or the Board of Directors otherwise requires.
    (2) In the case of applicants or affiliates that are not banks, net 
worth shall be considered for the purposes of this subpart to be the 
excess of total assets over total liabilities, as of the date the 
underlying proceeding was initiated, except as adjusted under 
Sec. 308.172(c)(2). Assets and liabilities of individuals shall include 
those beneficially owned within the meaning of the FDIC's rules and 
regulations.
    (3) If the applicant or any of its affiliates is a bank, the portion 
of the statement of net worth which relates to the bank shall consist of 
a copy of the bank's last Consolidated Report of Condition and Income 
filed before the initiation of the adversary adjudication. In all cases 
the administrative law judge or the Board of Directors may call for 
additional information needed to establish the applicant's net worth as 
of the initiation of the proceeding. Except as adjusted by additional 
information that was called for under the preceding sentence, net worth 
shall be considered for the purposes of this subpart to be the total 
equity capital (or, in the case of mutual savings banks, the total 
surplus accounts) as reported, in conformity with applicable 
instructions and guidelines, on the bank's Consolidated Report of 
Condition and Income filed for the last reporting date before the 
initiation of the proceeding.
    (c) Statement confidential. Unless otherwise ordered by the Board of 
Directors or required by law, the statement of net worth shall be for 
the confidential use of counsel for the FDIC, the Board of Directors, 
and the administrative law judge.



Sec. 308.178  Statement of fees and expenses.

    The application shall be accompanied by a statement fully 
documenting the fees and expenses for which an award is sought. A 
separate itemized statement shall be submitted for each professional 
firm or individual whose services are covered by the application, 
showing the hours spent in work in connection with the proceeding by 
each individual, a description of the specific services performed, the 
rate at which each fee has been computed, any expenses for which 
reimbursement is sought, the total amount claimed, and the total amount 
paid or payable by the applicant or by any other person or entity for 
the services performed. The administrative law judge or the Board of 
Directors may require the applicant to provide vouchers, receipts, or 
other substantiation for any expenses claimed.

[[Page 114]]



Sec. 308.179  Settlement negotiations.

    If counsel for the FDIC and the applicant believe that the issues in 
a fee application can be settled, they may jointly file with the 
Executive Secretary with a copy to the administrative law judge a 
statement of their intent to negotiate a settlement. The filing of this 
statement shall extend the time for filing an answer under Sec. 308.171 
for an additional 30 days, and further extensions may be granted by the 
administrative law judge upon the joint request of counsel for the FDIC 
and the applicant.

[56 FR 37975, Aug. 9, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999]



Sec. 308.180  Further proceedings.

    (a) General rule. Ordinarily, the determination of a recommended 
award will be made by the administrative law judge on the basis of the 
written record. However, on request of either the applicant or the FDIC, 
or on his or her own initiative, the administrative law judge may order 
further proceedings such as an informal conference, oral argument, 
additional written submissions, or an evidentiary hearing. Such further 
proceedings will be held only when necessary for full and fair 
resolution of the issues arising from the application and will be 
conducted promptly and expeditiously.
    (b) Request for further proceedings. A request for further 
proceedings under this section shall specifically identify the 
information sought or the issues in dispute and shall explain why 
additional proceedings are necessary.
    (c) Hearing. Ordinarily, the administrative law judge shall hold an 
oral evidentiary hearing only on disputed issues of material fact which 
cannot be adequately resolved through written submissions.



Sec. 308.181  Recommended decision.

    The administrative law judge shall file with the Executive Secretary 
a recommended decision on the fee application not later than 90 days 
after the filing of the application or 30 days after the conclusion of 
the hearing, whichever is later. The recommended decision shall include 
written proposed findings and conclusions on the applicant's eligibility 
and its status as a prevailing party and an explanation of the reasons 
for any difference between the amount requested and the amount of the 
recommended award. The recommended decision shall also include, if at 
issue, proposed findings on whether the FDIC's position was 
substantially justified, whether the applicant unduly protracted the 
proceedings, or whether special circumstances make an award unjust. The 
administrative law judge shall file the record of the proceeding on the 
fee application and, at the same time, serve upon each party a copy of 
the recommended decision, findings, conclusions, and proposed order.



Sec. 308.182  Board of Directors action.

    (a) Exceptions to recommended decision. Within 20 days after service 
of the recommended decision, findings, conclusions, and proposed order, 
the applicant or counsel for the FDIC may file with the Executive 
Secretary written exceptions thereto. A supporting brief may also be 
filed.
    (b) Decision of Board of Directors. The Board of Directors shall 
render its decision within 60 days after the matter is submitted to it 
by the Executive Secretary. The Executive Secretary shall furnish copies 
of the decision and order of the Board of Directors to the parties. 
Judicial review of the decision and order may be obtained as provided in 
5 U.S.C. 504(c)(2).



Sec. 308.183  Payment of awards.

    An applicant seeking payment of an award made by the Board of 
Directors shall submit to the Executive Secretary a statement that the 
applicant will not seek judicial review of the decision and order or 
that the time for seeking further review has passed and no further 
review has been sought. The FDIC will pay the amount awarded within 30 
days after receiving the applicant's statement, unless judicial review 
of the award or of the underlying decision of the adversary adjudication 
has been sought by the applicant or any other party to the proceeding.

[[Page 115]]



     Subpart Q_Issuance and Review of Orders Pursuant to the Prompt 
    Corrective Action Provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act

    Source: 57 FR 44897, Sept. 29, 1992, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 308.200  Scope.

    The rules and procedures set forth in this subpart apply to banks, 
insured branches of foreign banks and senior executive officers and 
directors of banks that are subject to the provisions of section 38 of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (section 38) (12 U.S.C. 1831o) and 
subpart B of part 325 of this chapter or subpart H of part 324 of this 
chapter, as applicable.

[78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 308.201  Directives to take prompt corrective action.

    (a) Notice of intent to issue directive--(1) In general. The FDIC 
shall provide an undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or 
critically undercapitalized bank prior written notice of the FDIC's 
intention to issue a directive requiring such bank to take actions or to 
follow proscriptions described in section 38 that are within the FDIC's 
discretion to require or impose under section 38 of the FDI Act, 
including sections 38 (e)(5), (f)(2), (f)(3), or (f)(5). The bank shall 
have such time to respond to a proposed directive as provided by the 
FDIC under paragraph (c) of this section.
    (2) Immediate issuance of final directive. If the FDIC finds it 
necessary in order to carry out the purposes of section 38 of the FDI 
Act, the FDIC may, without providing the notice prescribed in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, issue a directive requiring a bank immediately 
to take actions or to follow proscriptions described in section 38 that 
are within the FDIC's discretion to require or impose under section 38 
of the FDI Act, including section 38 (e)(5), (f)(2), (f)(3), or (f)(5). 
A bank that is subject to such an immediately effective directive may 
submit a written appeal of the directive to the FDIC. Such an appeal 
must be received by the FDIC within 14 calendar days of the issuance of 
the directive, unless the FDIC permits a longer period. The FDIC shall 
consider any such appeal, if filed in a timely matter, within 60 days of 
receiving the appeal. During such period of review, the directive shall 
remain in effect unless the FDIC, in its sole discretion, stays the 
effectiveness of the directive.
    (b) Contents of notice. A notice of intention to issue a directive 
shall include:
    (1) A statement of the bank's capital measures and capital levels;
    (2) A description of the restrictions, prohibitions or affirmative 
actions that the FDIC proposes to impose or require;
    (3) The proposed date when such restrictions or prohibitions would 
be effective or the proposed date for completion of such affirmative 
actions; and
    (4) The date by which the bank subject to the directive may file 
with the FDIC a written response to the notice.
    (c) Response to notice--(1) Time for response. A bank may file a 
written response to a notice of intent to issue a directive within the 
time period set by the FDIC. The date shall be at least 14 calendar days 
from the date of the notice unless the FDIC determines that a shorter 
period is appropriate in light of the financial condition of the bank or 
other relevant circumstances.
    (2) Content of response. The response should include:
    (i) An explanation why the action proposed by the FDIC is not an 
appropriate exercise of discretion under section 38;
    (ii) Any recommended modification of the proposed directive; and
    (iii) Any other relevant information, mitigating circumstances, 
documentation, or other evidence in support of the position of the bank 
regarding the proposed directive.
    (d) FDIC consideration of response. After considering the response, 
the FDIC may:
    (1) Issue the directive as proposed or in modified form;
    (2) Determine not to issue the directive and so notify the bank; or
    (3) Seek additional information or clarification of the response 
from the bank or any other relevant source.

[[Page 116]]

    (e) Failure to file response. Failure by a bank to file with the 
FDIC, within the specified time period, a written response to a proposed 
directive shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity to respond and 
shall constitute consent to the issuance of the directive.
    (f) Request for modification or rescission of directive. Any bank 
that is subject to a directive under this subpart may, upon a change in 
circumstances, request in writing that the FDIC reconsider the terms of 
the directive, and may propose that the directive be rescinded or 
modified. Unless otherwise ordered by the FDIC, the directive shall 
continue in place while such request is pending before the FDIC.



Sec. 308.202  Procedures for reclassifying a bank based on criteria
other than capital.

    (a) Reclassification based on unsafe or unsound condition or 
practice--(1) Issuance of notice of proposed reclassification--(i) 
Grounds for reclassification. (A) Pursuant to Sec. 325.103(d) of this 
chapter or Sec. 324.403(d) of this chapter, as applicable, the FDIC may 
reclassify a well-capitalized bank as adequately capitalized or subject 
an adequately capitalized or undercapitalized institution to the 
supervisory actions applicable to the next lower capital category if:
    (1) The FDIC determines that the bank is in unsafe or unsound 
condition; or
    (2) The FDIC, pursuant to section 8(b)(8) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 
1818(b)(8)), deems the bank to be engaged in an unsafe or unsound 
practice and not to have corrected the deficiency.
    (B) Any action pursuant to this paragraph (a)(1)(i) shall 
hereinafter be referred to as reclassification.
    (ii) Prior notice to institution. Prior to taking action pursuant to 
Sec. 325.103(d) of this chapter or Sec. 324.403(d) of this chapter, as 
applicable, the FDIC shall issue and serve on the bank a written notice 
of the FDIC's intention to reclassify it.
    (2) Contents of notice. A notice of intention to reclassify a bank 
based on unsafe or unsound condition shall include:
    (i) A statement of the bank's capital measures and capital levels 
and the category to which the bank would be reclassified;
    (ii) The reasons for reclassification of the bank;
    (iii) The date by which the bank subject to the notice of 
reclassification may file with the FDIC a written appeal of the proposed 
reclassification and a request for a hearing, which shall be at least 14 
calendar days from the date of service of the notice unless the FDIC 
determines that a shorter period is appropriate in light of the 
financial condition of the bank or other relevant circumstances.
    (3) Response to notice of proposed reclassification. A bank may file 
a written response to a notice of proposed reclassification within the 
time period set by the FDIC. The response should include:
    (i) An explanation of why the bank is not in an unsafe or unsound 
condition or otherwise should not be reclassified; and
    (ii) Any other relevant information, mitigating circumstances, 
documentation, or other evidence in support of the position of the bank 
regarding the reclassification.
    (4) Failure to file response. Failure by a bank to file, within the 
specified time period, a written response with the FDIC to a notice of 
proposed reclassification shall constitute a waiver of the opportunity 
to respond and shall constitute consent to the reclassification.
    (5) Request for hearing and presentation of oral testimony or 
witnesses. The response may include a request for an informal hearing 
before the FDIC under this section. If the bank desires to present oral 
testimony or witnesses at the hearing, the bank shall include a request 
to do so with the request for an informal hearing. A request to present 
oral testimony or witnesses shall specify the names of the witnesses and 
the general nature of their expected testimony. Failure to request a 
hearing shall constitute a waiver of any right to a hearing, and failure 
to request the opportunity to present oral testimony or witnesses shall 
constitute a waiver of any right to present oral testimony or witnesses.
    (6) Order for informal hearing. Upon receipt of a timely written 
request that includes a request for a hearing, the

[[Page 117]]

FDIC shall issue an order directing an informal hearing to commence no 
later than 30 days after receipt of the request, unless the bank 
requests a later date. The hearing shall be held in Washington, DC or at 
such other place as may be designated by the FDIC, before a presiding 
officer(s) designated by the FDIC to conduct the hearing.
    (7) Hearing procedures. (i) The bank shall have the right to 
introduce relevant written materials and to present oral argument at the 
hearing. The bank may introduce oral testimony and present witnesses 
only if expressly authorized by the FDIC or the presiding officer(s). 
Neither the provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. 
554-557) governing adjudications required by statute to be determined on 
the record nor the Uniform Rules of Practice and Procedure in this part 
apply to an informal hearing under this section unless the FDIC orders 
that such procedures shall apply.
    (ii) The informal hearing shall be recorded, and a transcript shall 
be furnished to the bank upon request and payment of the cost thereof. 
Witnesses need not be sworn, unless specifically requested by a party or 
the presiding officer(s). The presiding officer(s) may ask questions of 
any witness.
    (iii) The presiding officer(s) may order that the hearing be 
continued for a reasonable period (normally five business days) 
following completion of oral testimony or argument to allow additional 
written submissions to the hearing record.
    (8) Recommendation of presiding officers. Within 20 calendar days 
following the date the hearing and the record on the proceeding are 
closed, the presiding officer(s) shall make a recommendation to the FDIC 
on the reclassification.
    (9) Time for decision. Not later than 60 calendar days after the 
date the record is closed or the date of the response in a case where no 
hearing was requested, the FDIC will decide whether to reclassify the 
bank and notify the bank of the FDIC's decision.
    (b) Request for rescission of reclassification. Any bank that has 
been reclassified under this section, may, upon a change in 
circumstances, request in writing that the FDIC reconsider the 
reclassification, and may propose that the reclassification be rescinded 
and that any directives issued in connection with the reclassification 
be modified, rescinded, or removed. Unless otherwise ordered by the 
FDIC, the bank shall remain subject to the reclassification and to any 
directives issued in connection with that reclassification while such 
request is pending before the FDIC.

[57 FR 44897, Sept. 29, 1992, as amended at 78 FR 55470, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 308.203  Order to dismiss a director or senior executive officer.

    (a) Service of notice. When the FDIC issues and serves a directive 
on a bank pursuant to Sec. 308.201 of this part requiring the bank to 
dismiss from office any director or senior executive officer under 
Sec. 38(f)(2)(F)(ii) of the FDI Act, the FDIC shall also serve a copy of 
the directive, or the relevant portions of the directive where 
appropriate, upon the person to be dismissed.
    (b) Response to directive--(1) Request for reinstatement. A director 
or senior executive officer who has been served with a directive under 
paragraph (a) of this section (Respondent) may file a written request 
for reinstatement. The request for reinstatement shall be filed within 
10 calendar days of the receipt of the directive by the Respondent, 
unless further time is allowed by the FDIC at the request of the 
Respondent.
    (2) Contents of request; informal hearing. The request for 
reinstatement shall include reasons why the Respondent should be 
reinstated, and may include a request for an informal hearing before the 
FDIC under this section. If the Respondent desires to present oral 
testimony or witnesses at the hearing, the Respondent shall include a 
request to do so with the request for an informal hearing. The request 
to present oral testimony or witnesses shall specify the names of the 
witnesses and the general nature of their expected testimony. Failure to 
request a hearing shall constitute a waiver of any right to a hearing 
and failure to request the opportunity to present oral testimony or 
witnesses shall constitute a waiver of any right or opportunity to 
present oral testimony or witnesses.

[[Page 118]]

    (3) Effective date. Unless otherwise ordered by the FDIC, the 
dismissal shall remain in effect while a request for reinstatement is 
pending.
    (c) Order for informal hearing. Upon receipt of a timely written 
request from a Respondent for an informal hearing on the portion of a 
directive requiring a bank to dismiss from office any director or senior 
executive officer, the FDIC shall issue an order directing an informal 
hearing to commence no later than 30 days after receipt of the request, 
unless the Respondent requests a later date. The hearing shall be held 
in Washington, DC, or at such other place as may be designated by the 
FDIC, before a presiding officer(s) designated by the FDIC to conduct 
the hearing.
    (d) Hearing procedures. (1) A Respondent may appear at the hearing 
personally or through counsel. A Respondent shall have the right to 
introduce relevant written materials and to present oral argument. A 
Respondent may introduce oral testimony and present witnesses only if 
expressly authorized by the FDIC or the presiding officer(s). Neither 
the provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act governing 
adjudications required by statute to be determined on the record nor the 
Uniform Rules of Practice and Procedure in this part apply to an 
informal hearing under this section unless the FDIC orders that such 
procedures shall apply.
    (2) The informal hearing shall be recorded, and a transcript shall 
be furnished to the Respondent upon request and payment of the cost 
thereof. Witnesses need not be sworn, unless specifically requested by a 
party or the presiding officer(s). The presiding officer(s) may ask 
questions of any witness.
    (3) The presiding officer(s) may order that the hearing be continued 
for a reasonable period (normally five business days) following 
completion of oral testimony or argument to allow additional written 
submissions to the hearing record.
    (e) Standard for review. A Respondent shall bear the burden of 
demonstrating that his or her continued employment by or service with 
the bank would materially strengthen the bank's ability:
    (1) To become adequately capitalized, to the extent that the 
directive was issued as a result of the bank's capital level or failure 
to submit or implement a capital restoration plan; and
    (2) To correct the unsafe or unsound condition or unsafe or unsound 
practice, to the extent that the directive was issued as a result of 
classification of the bank based on supervisory criteria other than 
capital, pursuant to section 38(g) of the FDI Act.
    (f) Recommendation of presiding officers. Within 20 calendar days 
following the date the hearing and the record on the proceeding are 
closed, the presiding officer(s) shall make a recommendation to the FDIC 
concerning the Respondent's request for reinstatement with the bank.
    (g) Time for decision. Not later than 60 calendar days after the 
date the record is closed or the date of the response in a case where no 
hearing was requested, the FDIC shall grant or deny the request for 
reinstatement and notify the Respondent of the FDIC's decision. If the 
FDIC denies the request for reinstatement, the FDIC shall set forth in 
the notification the reasons for the FDIC's action.



Sec. 308.204  Enforcement of directives.

    (a) Judicial remedies. Whenever a bank fails to comply with a 
directive issued under section 38, the FDIC may seek enforcement of the 
directive in the appropriate United States district court pursuant to 
section 8(i)(1) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(i)(1)).
    (b) Administrative remedies--(1) Failure to comply with directive. 
Pursuant to section 8(i)(2)(A) of the FDI Act, the FDIC may assess a 
civil money penalty against any bank that violates or otherwise fails to 
comply with any final directive issued under section 38 and against any 
institution-affiliated party who participates in such violation or 
noncompliance.
    (2) Failure to implement capital restoration plan. The failure of a 
bank to implement a capital restoration plan required under section 38, 
or subpart B of part 325 of this chapter or subpart H of part 324 of 
this chapter, as applicable, or the failure of a company having control 
of a bank to fulfill a guarantee of

[[Page 119]]

a capital restoration plan made pursuant to section 38(e)(2) of the FDI 
Act shall subject the bank to the assessment of civil money penalties 
pursuant to section 8(i)(2)(A) of the FDI Act.
    (c) Other enforcement action. In addition to the actions described 
in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the FDIC may seek enforcement 
of the provisions of section 38 or subpart B of part 325 of this chapter 
or subpart H of part 324 of this chapter, as applicable, through any 
other judicial or administrative proceeding authorized by law.

[57 FR 44897, Sept. 29, 1992; 57 FR 48426, Oct. 23, 1992; 78 FR 55471, 
Sept. 10, 2013]



Subpart R_Submission and Review of Safety and Soundness Compliance Plans 
   and Issuance of Orders To Correct Safety and Soundness Deficiencies

    Source: 80 FR 65906, Oct. 28,2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 308.300  Scope.

    The rules and procedures set forth in this subpart apply to insured 
state nonmember banks, to state-licensed insured branches of foreign 
banks, that are subject to the provisions of section 39 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (section 39) (12 U.S.C. 1831p-1), and to state 
savings associations (in aggregate, bank or banks and state savings 
association or state savings associations).



Sec. 308.301  Purpose.

    Section 39 of the FDI Act requires the FDIC to establish safety and 
soundness standards. Pursuant to section 39, a bank or savings 
association may be required to submit a compliance plan if it is not in 
compliance with a safety and soundness standard established by guideline 
under section 39(a) or (b). An enforceable order under section 8 of the 
FDI Act may be issued if, after being notified that it is in violation 
of a safety and soundness standard established under section 39, the 
bank or savings association fails to submit an acceptable compliance 
plan or fails in any material respect to implement an accepted plan. 
This subpart establishes procedures for requiring submission of a 
compliance plan and issuing an enforceable order pursuant to section 39.



Sec. 308.302  Determination and notification of failure to meet
a safety and soundness standard and request for compliance plan.

    (a) Determination. The FDIC may, based upon an examination, 
inspection or any other information that becomes available to the FDIC, 
determine that a bank or state savings association has failed to satisfy 
the safety and soundness standards set out in part 364 of this chapter 
and in the Interagency Guidelines Establishing Standards for Safety and 
Soundness in appendix A and the Interagency Guidelines Establishing 
Information Security Standards in appendix B to part 364 of this 
chapter.
    (b) Request for compliance plan. If the FDIC determines that a bank 
or state savings association has failed a safety and soundness standard 
pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, the FDIC may request, by 
letter or through a report of examination, the submission of a 
compliance plan and the bank or state savings association shall be 
deemed to have notice of the request three days after mailing of the 
letter by the FDIC or delivery of the report of examination.



Sec. 308.303  Filing of safety and soundness compliance plan.

    (a) Schedule for filing compliance plan--(1) In general. A bank or 
state savings association shall file a written safety and soundness 
compliance plan with the FDIC within 30 days of receiving a request for 
a compliance plan pursuant to Sec. 308.302(b), unless the FDIC notifies 
the bank or state savings association in writing that the plan is to be 
filed within a different period.
    (2) Other plans. If a bank or state savings association is obligated 
to file, or is currently operating under, a capital restoration plan 
submitted pursuant to section 38 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o), a 
cease-and-desist order entered into pursuant to section 8 of the FDI 
Act, a formal or informal agreement, or a response to a report of 
examination or report of inspection, it may,

[[Page 120]]

with the permission of the FDIC, submit a compliance plan under this 
section as part of that plan, order, agreement, or response, subject to 
the deadline provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (b) Contents of plan. The compliance plan shall include a 
description of the steps the bank or state savings association will take 
to correct the deficiency and the time within which those steps will be 
taken.
    (c) Review of safety and soundness compliance plans. Within 30 days 
after receiving a safety and soundness compliance plan under this 
subpart, the FDIC shall provide written notice to the bank or state 
savings association of whether the plan has been approved or seek 
additional information from the bank or state savings association 
regarding the plan. The FDIC may extend the time within which notice 
regarding approval of a plan will be provided.
    (d) Failure to submit or implement a compliance plan--(1) 
Supervisory actions. If a bank or state savings association fails to 
submit an acceptable plan within the time specified by the FDIC or fails 
in any material respect to implement a compliance plan, then the FDIC 
shall, by order, require the bank or state savings association to 
correct the deficiency and may take further actions provided in section 
39(e)(2)(B). Pursuant to section 39(e)(3), the FDIC may be required to 
take certain actions if the bank or state savings association commenced 
operations or experienced a change in control within the previous 24-
month period, or the bank or state savings association experienced 
extraordinary growth during the previous 18-month period.
    (2) Extraordinary growth. For purposes of paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section, extraordinary growth means an increase in assets of more than 
7.5 percent during any quarter within the 18-month period preceding the 
issuance of a request for submission of a compliance plan, by a bank or 
state savings association that is not well capitalized for purposes of 
section 38 of the FDI Act. For purposes of calculating an increase in 
assets, assets acquired through merger or acquisition approved pursuant 
to the Bank Merger Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(c)) will be excluded.
    (e) Amendment of compliance plan. A bank or state savings 
association that has filed an approved compliance plan may, after prior 
written notice to and approval by the FDIC, amend the plan to reflect a 
change in circumstance. Until such time as a proposed amendment has been 
approved, the bank or state savings association shall implement the 
compliance plan as previously approved.



Sec. 308.304  Issuance of orders to correct deficiencies and to take
or refrain from taking other actions.

    (a) Notice of intent to issue order--(1) In general. The FDIC shall 
provide a bank or state savings association prior written notice of the 
FDIC's intention to issue an order requiring the bank or state savings 
association to correct a safety and soundness deficiency or to take or 
refrain from taking other actions pursuant to section 39 of the FDI Act. 
The bank or state savings association shall have such time to respond to 
a proposed order as provided by the FDIC under paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (2) Immediate issuance of final order. If the FDIC finds it 
necessary in order to carry out the purposes of section 39 of the FDI 
Act, the FDIC may, without providing the notice prescribed in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, issue an order requiring a bank or state savings 
association immediately to take actions to correct a safety and 
soundness deficiency or take or refrain from taking other actions 
pursuant to section 39. A bank or state savings association that is 
subject to such an immediately effective order may submit a written 
appeal of the order to the FDIC. Such an appeal must be received by the 
FDIC within 14 calendar days of the issuance of the order, unless the 
FDIC permits a longer period. The FDIC shall consider any such appeal, 
if filed in a timely matter, within 60 days of receiving the appeal. 
During such period of review, the order shall remain in effect unless 
the FDIC, in its sole discretion, stays the effectiveness of the order.
    (b) Contents of notice. A notice of intent to issue an order shall 
include:
    (1) A statement of the safety and soundness deficiency or 
deficiencies

[[Page 121]]

that have been identified at the bank or state savings association;
    (2) A description of any restrictions, prohibitions, or affirmative 
actions that the FDIC proposes to impose or require;
    (3) The proposed date when such restrictions or prohibitions would 
be effective or the proposed date for completion of any required action; 
and
    (4) The date by which the bank or state savings association subject 
to the order may file with the FDIC a written response to the notice.
    (c) Response to notice--(1) Time for response. A bank or state 
savings association may file a written response to a notice of intent to 
issue an order within the time period set by the FDIC. Such a response 
must be received by the FDIC within 14 calendar days from the date of 
the notice unless the FDIC determines that a different period is 
appropriate in light of the safety and soundness of the bank or state 
savings association or other relevant circumstances.
    (2) Contents of response. The response should include:
    (i) An explanation why the action proposed by the FDIC is not an 
appropriate exercise of discretion under section 39;
    (ii) Any recommended modification of the proposed order; and
    (iii) Any other relevant information, mitigating circumstances, 
documentation, or other evidence in support of the position of the bank 
or state savings association regarding the proposed order.
    (d) Agency consideration of response. After considering the 
response, the FDIC may:
    (1) Issue the order as proposed or in modified form;
    (2) Determine not to issue the order and so notify the bank or state 
savings association; or
    (3) Seek additional information or clarification of the response 
from the bank or state savings association, or any other relevant 
source.
    (e) Failure to file response. Failure by a bank or state savings 
association to file with the FDIC, within the specified time period, a 
written response to a proposed order shall constitute a waiver of the 
opportunity to respond and shall constitute consent to the issuance of 
the order.
    (f) Request for modification of rescission of order. Any bank or 
state savings association that is subject to an order under this subpart 
may, upon a change in circumstances, request in writing that the FDIC 
reconsider the terms of the order, and may propose that the order be 
rescinded or modified. Unless otherwise ordered by the FDIC, the order 
shall continue in place while such request is pending before the FDIC.



Sec. 308.305  Enforcement of orders.

    (a) Judicial remedies. Whenever a bank or state savings association 
fails to comply with an order issued under section 39, the FDIC may seek 
enforcement of the order in the appropriate United States district court 
pursuant to section 8(i)(1) of the FDI Act.
    (b) Failure to comply with order. Pursuant to section 8(i)(2)(A) of 
the FDI Act, the FDIC may assess a civil money penalty against any bank 
or state savings association that violates or otherwise fails to comply 
with any final order issued under section 39 and against any 
institution-affiliated party who participates in such violation or 
noncompliance.
    (c) Other enforcement action. In addition to the actions described 
in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the FDIC may seek enforcement 
of the provisions of section 39 or this part through any other judicial 
or administrative proceeding authorized by law.



Subpart S_Applications for a Stay or Review of Actions of Bank Clearing 
                                Agencies

    Source: 61 FR 48403, Sept. 11, 1996, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 308.400  Scope.

    This subpart is issued by the Corporation pursuant to sections 
17A(b)(3)(g), 17A(b)(5)(C), 19 and 23 of the Securities Exchange Act of 
1934 (Exchange Act), as amended (15 U.S.C. 78q-1 (b)(3)(g), (b)(5)(C), 
78s, 78w). It applies to applications by banks insured by the 
Corporation (other than members of the Federal Reserve System) for

[[Page 122]]

a stay or review of certain actions by clearing agencies registered 
under the Exchange Act, for which the Securities and Exchange Commission 
(Commission) is not the appropriate regulatory agency under section 
3(a)(34)(B) of the Exchange Act (bank clearing agencies).



Sec. 308.401  Applications for stays of disciplinary sanctions
or summary suspensions by a bank clearing agency.

    Applications to the Corporation for a stay of disciplinary action 
imposed by registered clearing agencies pursuant to section 17(b)(3)(G) 
of the Exchange Act, or summary suspension or limitation or prohibition 
of access under section 17(b)(5)(C) of the Exchange Act shall be made 
according to the rules adopted by the Commission (17 CFR 240.19d-2). 
References to the ``Commission'' in 17 CFR 240.19d-2 are deemed to refer 
to the ``Corporation.''



Sec. 308.402  Applications for review of final disciplinary sanctions,
denials of participation, or prohibitions or limitations of access 
to services imposed by bank clearing agencies.

    Proceedings on an application to the Corporation under section 
19(d)(2) of the Exchange Act for review of any final disciplinary 
sanctions, denials of participation, or prohibitions or limitations of 
access to services imposed by bank clearing agencies shall be conducted 
according to the procedures set forth in rules adopted by the Commission 
(17 CFR 240.19d-3). References to the ``Commission'' in 17 CFR 240.19d-3 
are deemed to refer to the ``Corporation.''



          Subpart T_Program Fraud Civil Remedies and Procedures

    Source: 66 FR 9189, Feb. 7, 2001, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 308.500  Basis, purpose, and scope.

    (a) Basis. This subpart implements the Program Fraud Civil Remedies 
Act, Pub. L. 99-509, sections 6101-6104, 100 Stat. 1874 (October 21, 
1986), codified at 31 U.S.C. 3801-3812, (PFCRA) and made applicable to 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) by section 23 of the 
Resolution Trust Corporation Completion Act (Pub. L. 103-204, 107 Stat. 
2369). 31 U.S.C. 3809 of the statute requires each Authority head to 
promulgate regulations necessary to implement the provisions of the 
statute.
    (b) Purpose. This subpart:
    (1) Establishes administrative procedures for imposing civil 
penalties and assessments against persons who make, submit, or present 
or cause to be made, submitted, or presented false, fictitious, or 
fraudulent claims or written statements to the FDIC or to its agents; 
and
    (2) Specifies the hearing and appeal rights of persons subject to 
allegations of liability for such penalties and assessments.
    (c) Scope. This subpart applies only to persons who make, submit, or 
present or cause to be made, submitted, or presented false, fictitious, 
or fraudulent claims or written statements to the FDIC or to its agents 
acting on behalf of the FDIC in connection with FDIC employment matters, 
FDIC contracting activities, and the FDIC Asset Purchaser Certification 
Program. It does not apply to false claims or statements made in 
connection with programs (other than as set forth in the preceding 
sentence) related to the FDIC's regulatory, supervision, enforcement, 
insurance, receivership or liquidation responsibilities. The FDIC is 
restricting the scope of applicability of this subpart because other 
civil and administrative remedies are adequate to redress fraud in the 
areas not covered.



Sec. 308.501  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) means the presiding officer 
appointed by the Office of Financial Institution Adjudication pursuant 
to 12 U.S.C. 1818 note and 5 U.S.C. 3105.
    (b) Authority means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
(FDIC).
    (c) Authority head or Board means the Board of Directors of the 
FDIC, which is herein designated by the Chairman of the FDIC to serve as 
head of the FDIC for PFCRA matters.
    (d) Benefit means, in the context of ``statement'' as defined in 31 
U.S.C. 3801(a)(9), any financial assistance received from the FDIC that 
amounts to

[[Page 123]]

$150,000 or less. The term does not include the FDIC's deposit insurance 
program.
    (e) Claim means any request, demand, or submission:
    (1) Made to the FDIC for property, services, or money (including 
money representing grants, loans, insurance, or benefits);
    (2) Made to a recipient of property, services, or money from the 
FDIC or to a party to a contract with the FDIC;
    (i) For property or services if the United States:
    (A) Provided such property or services;
    (B) Provided any portion of the funds for the purchase of such 
property or services; or
    (C) Will reimburse such recipient or party for the purchase of such 
property or services;
    (ii) For the payment of money (including money representing grants, 
loans, insurance, or benefits) if the United States:
    (A) Provided any portion of the money requested or demanded; or
    (B) Will reimburse such recipient or party for any portion of the 
money paid on such request or demand; or
    (3) Made to the FDIC that has the effect of decreasing an obligation 
to pay or account for property, services, or money.
    (f) Complaint means the administrative complaint served by the 
reviewing official on the defendant under Sec. 308.506 of this subpart.
    (g) Corporation means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (h) Defendant means any person alleged in a complaint under 
Sec. 308.506 of this subpart to be liable for a civil penalty or 
assessment under Sec. 308.502 of this subpart.
    (i) Government means the United States Government.
    (j) Individual means a natural person.
    (k) Initial decision means the written decision of the ALJ required 
by Sec. 308.509 or Sec. 308.536 of this subpart, and includes a revised 
initial decision issued following a remand or a motion for 
consideration.
    (l) Investigating official means the Inspector General of the FDIC, 
or an officer or employee of the Inspector General designated by the 
Inspector General. The investigating official must serve in a position 
that has a rate of basic pay under the pay scale utilized by the FDIC 
that is equal to or greater than 120 percent of the minimum rate of 
basic pay for grade 15 under the federal government's General Schedule.
    (m) Knows or has reason to know, means that a person, with respect 
to a claim or statement:
    (1) Has actual knowledge that the claim or statement is false, 
fictitious, or fraudulent;
    (2) Acts in deliberate ignorance of the truth or falsity of the 
claim or statement; or
    (3) Acts in reckless disregard of the truth or falsity of the claim 
or statement.
    (n) Makes, wherever it appears, includes the terms ``presents'', 
``submits'', and ``causes to be made, presented, or submitted.'' As the 
context requires, ``making'' or ``made'' likewise includes the 
corresponding forms of such terms.
    (o) Person means any individual, partnership, corporation, 
association, or private organization, and includes the plural of that 
term.
    (p) Representative means an attorney, who is a member in good 
standing of the bar of any state, territory, or possession of the United 
States or of the District of Columbia or the Commonwealth of Puerto 
Rico, and designated by a party in writing.
    (q) Reviewing official means the General Counsel of the FDIC or his 
designee who is:
    (1) Not subject to supervision by, or required to report to, the 
investigating official;
    (2) Not employed in the organizational unit of the FDIC in which the 
investigating official is employed; and
    (3) Serving in a position that has a rate of basic pay under the pay 
scale utilized by the FDIC that is equal to or greater than 120 percent 
of the minimum rate of basic pay for grade 15 under the federal 
government's General Schedule.
    (r) Statement means any representation, certification, affirmation, 
document, record, or accounting or bookkeeping entry made:
    (1) With respect to a claim or to obtain the approval or payment of 
a

[[Page 124]]

claim (including relating to eligibility to make a claim); or
    (2) With respect to (including relating to eligibility for):
    (i) A contract with, or a bid or proposal for a contract with; or
    (ii) A grant, loan, or benefit received, directly or indirectly, 
from the FDIC, or any state, political subdivision of a state, or other 
party, if the United States government provides any portion of the money 
or property under such contract or for such grant, loan, or benefit, or 
if the government will reimburse such state, political subdivision, or 
party for any portion of the money or property under such contract or 
for such grant, loan, or benefit.



Sec. 308.502  Basis for civil penalties and assessments.

    (a) Claims. (1) A person who makes a false, fictitious, or 
fraudulent claim to the FDIC is subject to a civil penalty of up to 
$5,000 per claim. A claim is false, fictitious, or fraudulent if the 
person making the claim knows, or has reason to know, that:
    (i) The claim is false, fictitious, or fraudulent; or
    (ii) The claim includes, or is supported by, a written statement 
that asserts a material fact which is false, fictitious or fraudulent; 
or
    (iii) The claim includes, or is supported by, a written statement 
that:
    (A) Omits a material fact; and
    (B) Is false, fictitious, or fraudulent as a result of that 
omission; and
    (C) Is a statement in which the person making the statement has a 
duty to include the material fact; or
    (iv) The claim seeks payment for providing property or services that 
the person has not provided as claimed.
    (2) Each voucher, invoice, claim form, or other individual request 
or demand for property, services, or money constitutes a separate claim.
    (3) A claim will be considered made to the FDIC, recipient, or party 
when the claim is actually made to an agent, fiscal intermediary, or 
other entity, including any state or political subdivision thereof, 
acting for or on behalf of the FDIC, recipient, or party.
    (4) Each claim for property, services, or money that constitutes any 
one of the elements in paragraph (a)(1) of this section is subject to a 
civil penalty regardless of whether the property, services, or money is 
actually delivered or paid.
    (5) If the FDIC has made any payment (including transferred property 
or provided services) on a claim, a person subject to a civil penalty 
under paragraph (a)(1) of this section will also be subject to an 
assessment of not more than twice the amount of such claim (or portion 
of the claim) that is determined to constitute a false, fictitious, or 
fraudulent claim under paragraph (a)(1) of this section. The assessment 
will be in lieu of damages sustained by the FDIC because of the claims.
    (6) The amount of any penalty assessed under paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section will be adjusted for inflation in accordance with 
Sec. 308.132(d)(17) of this part.
    (7) The penalty specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section is in 
addition to any other remedy allowable by law.
    (b) Statements. (1) A person who submits to the FDIC a false, 
fictitious or fraudulent statement is subject to a civil penalty of up 
to $5,000 per statement. A statement is false, fictitious or fraudulent 
if the person submitting the statement to the FDIC knows, or has reason 
to know, that:
    (i) The statement asserts a material fact which is false, 
fictitious, or fraudulent; or
    (ii) The statement omits a material fact that the person making the 
statement has a duty to include in the statement; and
    (iii) The statement contains or is accompanied by an express 
certification or affirmation of the truthfulness and accuracy of the 
contents of the statement.
    (2) Each written representation, certification, or affirmation 
constitutes a separate statement.
    (3) A statement will be considered made to the FDIC when the 
statement is actually made to an agent, fiscal intermediary, or other 
entity, including any state or political subdivision thereof, acting for 
or on behalf of the FDIC.
    (4) The amount of any penalty assessed under paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section will be adjusted for inflation in

[[Page 125]]

accordance with Sec. 308.132(d)(17) of this part.
    (5) The penalty specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section is in 
addition to any other remedy allowable by law.
    (c) Failure to file declaration/certification. Where, as a 
prerequisite to conducting business with the FDIC, a person is required 
by law to file one or more declarations and/or certifications, and the 
person intentionally fails to file such declaration/certification, the 
person will be subject to the civil penalties as prescribed by this 
subpart.
    (d) Civil money penalties that are assessed under this subpart are 
subject to annual adjustments to account for inflation as required by 
the Federal Civil Penalties Inflation Adjustment Act Improvements Act of 
2015 (Pub. L. 114-74, sec. 701, 129 Stat. 584) (see also 12 CFR 
308.132(d)(17)).
    (e) Liability. (1) In any case in which it is determined that more 
than one person is liable for making a claim or statement under this 
section, each such person may be held jointly and severally liable for a 
civil penalty under this section.
    (2) In any case in which it is determined that more than one person 
is liable for making a claim under this section on which the FDIC has 
made payment (including transferred property or provided services), an 
assessment may be imposed against any such person or jointly and 
severally against any combination of such persons.

[66 FR 9189, Feb. 7, 2001, as amended at 81 FR 42242, June 29, 2016]



Sec. 308.503  Investigations.

    (a) If an investigating official concludes that a subpoena pursuant 
to the authority conferred by 31 U.S.C. 3804(a) is warranted:
    (1) The subpoena will identify the person to whom it is addressed 
and the authority under which the subpoena is issued and will identify 
the records or documents sought;
    (2) The investigating official may designate a person to act on his 
or her behalf to receive the documents sought; and
    (3) The person receiving such subpoena will be required to provide 
the investigating official or the person designated to receive the 
documents a certification that the documents sought have been produced, 
or that such documents are not available, and the reasons therefor, or 
that such documents, suitably identified, have been withheld based upon 
the assertion of an identified privilege.
    (b) If the investigating official concludes that an action under the 
PFCRA may be warranted, the investigating official will submit a report 
containing the findings and conclusions of such investigation to the 
reviewing official.
    (c) Nothing in this section will preclude or limit an investigating 
official's discretion to refer allegations directly to the United States 
Department of Justice (DOJ) for suit under the False Claims Act (31 
U.S.C. 3729 et seq.) or other civil relief, or to preclude or limit the 
investigating official's discretion to defer or postpone a report or 
referral to the reviewing official to avoid interference with a criminal 
investigation or prosecution.
    (d) Nothing in this section modifies any responsibility of an 
investigating official to report violations of criminal law to the 
Attorney General.



Sec. 308.504  Review by the reviewing official.

    (a) If, based on the report of the investigating official under 
Sec. 308.503(b) of this subpart, the reviewing official determines that 
there is adequate evidence to believe that a person is liable under 
Sec. 308.502 of this subpart, the reviewing official will transmit to 
the Attorney General a written notice of the reviewing official's 
intention to issue a complaint under Sec. 308.506 of this subpart.
    (b) Such notice will include:
    (1) A statement of the reviewing official's reasons for issuing a 
complaint;
    (2) A statement specifying the evidence that supports the 
allegations of liability;
    (3) A description of the claims or statements upon which the 
allegations of liability are based;
    (4) An estimate of the amount of money or the value of property, 
services, or other benefits requested or demanded in violation of 
Sec. 308.502 of this subpart;

[[Page 126]]

    (5) A statement of any exculpatory or mitigating circumstances that 
may relate to the claims or statements known by the reviewing official 
or the investigating official; and
    (6) A statement that there is a reasonable prospect of collecting an 
appropriate amount of penalties and assessments. Such a statement may be 
based upon information then known, or upon an absence of any information 
indicating that the person may be unable to pay such amount.



Sec. 308.505  Prerequisites for issuing a complaint.

    (a) The reviewing official may issue a complaint under Sec. 308.506 
of this subpart only if:
    (1) The DOJ approves the issuance of a complaint in a written 
statement described in 31 U.S.C. 3803(b)(1); and
    (2) In the case of allegations of liability under Sec. 308.502(a) of 
this subpart with respect to a claim (or a group of related claims 
submitted at the same time as defined in paragraph (b) of this section) 
the reviewing official determines that the amount of money or the value 
of property or services demanded or requested does not exceed $150,000.
    (b) For the purposes of this section, a group of related claims 
submitted at the same time will include only those claims arising from 
the same transaction (e.g., grant, loan, application, or contract) that 
are submitted simultaneously as part of a single request, demand, or 
submission.
    (c) Nothing in this section will be construed to limit the reviewing 
official's authority to join in a single complaint against a person 
claims that are unrelated or were not submitted simultaneously, 
regardless of the amount of money, or the value of property or services, 
demanded or requested.



Sec. 308.506  Complaint.

    (a) On or after the date the DOJ approves the issuance of a 
complaint in accordance with 31 U.S.C. 3803(b)(1), the reviewing 
official may serve a complaint on the defendant, as provided in 
Sec. 308.507 of this subpart.
    (b) The complaint will state:
    (1) The allegations of liability against the defendant, including 
the statutory basis for liability, or identification of the claims or 
statements that are the basis for the alleged liability, and the reasons 
why liability allegedly arises from such claims or statements;
    (2) The maximum amount of penalties and assessments for which the 
defendant may be held liable;
    (3) Instructions for filing an answer and to request a hearing, 
including a specific statement of the defendant's right to request a 
hearing by filing an answer and to be represented by a representative; 
and
    (4) That failure to file an answer within 30 days of service of the 
complaint will result in the imposition of the maximum amount of 
penalties and assessments without right to appeal, as provided in 
Sec. 308.509 of this subpart.
    (c) At the same time the reviewing official serves the complaint, he 
or she will provide the defendant with a copy of this subpart.



Sec. 308.507  Service of complaint.

    (a) Service of a complaint will be made by certified or registered 
mail or by delivery in any manner authorized by rule 4(c) of the Federal 
Rules of Civil Procedure (28 U.S.C. App.). Service is complete upon 
receipt.
    (b) Proof of service, stating the name and address of the person on 
whom the complaint was served, and the manner and date of service, may 
be made by:
    (1) Affidavit of the individual serving the complaint by delivery;
    (2) A United States Postal Service return receipt card acknowledging 
receipt; or
    (3) Written acknowledgment of receipt by the defendant or his or her 
representative.



Sec. 308.508  Answer.

    (a) The defendant may request a hearing by filing an answer with the 
reviewing official within 30 days of service of the complaint. An answer 
will be deemed to be a request for hearing.
    (b) In the answer, the defendant:
    (1) Must admit or deny each of the allegations of liability made in 
the complaint;
    (2) Must state any defense on which the defendant intends to rely;

[[Page 127]]

    (3) May state any reasons why the defendant contends that the 
penalties and assessments should be less than the statutory maximum; and
    (4) Must state the name, address, and telephone number of the person 
authorized by the defendant to act as defendant's representative, if 
any.
    (c) If the defendant is unable to file an answer meeting the 
requirements of paragraph (b) of this section within the time provided:
    (1) The defendant may, before the expiration of 30 days from service 
of the complaint, file with the reviewing official a general answer 
denying liability and requesting a hearing, and a request for an 
extension of time within which to file an answer meeting the 
requirements of paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) The reviewing official will file promptly with the ALJ the 
complaint, the general answer denying liability, and the request for an 
extension of time as provided in Sec. 308.510 of this subpart.
    (3) For good cause shown, the ALJ may grant the defendant up to 30 
additional days within which to file an answer meeting the requirements 
of paragraph (b) of this section.



Sec. 308.509  Default upon failure to file an answer.

    (a) If the defendant does not file an answer within the time 
prescribed in Sec. 308.508(a) of this subpart, the reviewing official 
may refer the complaint to the ALJ.
    (b) Upon the referral of the complaint, the ALJ will promptly serve 
on defendant in the manner prescribed in Sec. 308.507 of this subpart, a 
notice that an initial decision will be issued under this section.
    (c) If the defendant fails to answer, the ALJ will assume the facts 
alleged in the complaint to be true, and, if such facts establish 
liability under Sec. 308.502 of this subpart, the ALJ will issue an 
initial decision imposing the maximum amount of penalties and 
assessments allowed under the statute.
    (d) Except as otherwise provided in this section, by failing to file 
a timely answer, the defendant waives any right to further review of the 
penalties and assessments imposed under paragraph (c) of this section, 
and the initial decision will become final and binding upon the parties 
30 days after it is issued.
    (e) If, before such an initial decision becomes final, the defendant 
files a motion with the ALJ seeking to reopen on the grounds that 
extraordinary circumstances prevented the defendant from filing an 
answer, the initial decision will be stayed pending the ALJ's decision 
on the motion.
    (f) If, in the motion to reopen under paragraph (e) of this section, 
the defendant can demonstrate extraordinary circumstances excusing the 
failure to file a timely answer, the ALJ will withdraw the initial 
decision in paragraph (c) of this section, if such a decision has been 
issued, and will grant the defendant an opportunity to answer the 
complaint.
    (g) A decision of the ALJ denying a defendant's motion to reopen 
under paragraph (e) of this section is not subject to reconsideration 
under Sec. 308.537 of this subpart.
    (h) The decision denying the motion to reopen under paragraph (e) of 
this section may be appealed by the defendant to the Board by filing a 
notice of appeal with the Board within 15 days after the ALJ denies the 
motion. The timely filing of a notice of appeal will stay the initial 
decision until the Board decides the issue.
    (i) If the defendant files a timely notice of appeal with the Board, 
the ALJ will forward the record of the proceeding to the Board.
    (j) The Board will decide whether extraordinary circumstances excuse 
the defendant's failure to file a timely answer based solely on the 
record before the ALJ.
    (k) If the Board decides that extraordinary circumstances excuse the 
defendant's failure to file a timely answer, the Board will remand the 
case to the ALJ with instructions to grant the defendant an opportunity 
to answer.
    (l) If the Board decides that the defendant's failure to file a 
timely answer is not excused, the Board will reinstate the initial 
decision of the ALJ, which will become final and binding upon the 
parties 30 days after the Board issues such decision.

[[Page 128]]



Sec. 308.510  Referral of complaint and answer to the ALJ.

    Upon receipt of an answer, the reviewing official will file the 
complaint and answer with the ALJ. The reviewing official will include 
the name, address, and telephone number of a representative of the 
Corporation.



Sec. 308.511  Notice of hearing.

    (a) When the ALJ receives the complaint and answer, the ALJ will 
promptly serve a notice of hearing upon the defendant in the manner 
prescribed by Sec. 308.507 of this subpart. At the same time, the ALJ 
will send a copy of such notice to the representative of the 
Corporation.
    (b) The notice will include:
    (1) The tentative time, date, and place, and the nature of the 
hearing;
    (2) The legal authority and jurisdiction under which the hearing is 
to be held;
    (3) The matters of fact and law to be asserted;
    (4) A description of the procedures for the conduct of the hearing;
    (5) The name, address, and telephone number of the representative of 
the Corporation and of the defendant, if any; and
    (6) Other matters as the ALJ deems appropriate.



Sec. 308.512  Parties to the hearing.

    (a) The parties to the hearing will be the defendant and the 
Corporation.
    (b) Pursuant to the False Claims Act (31 U.S.C. 3730(c)(5)), a 
private plaintiff under the False Claims Act may participate in these 
proceedings to the extent authorized by the provisions of that Act.



Sec. 308.513  Separation of functions.

    (a) The investigating official, the reviewing official, and any 
employee or agent of the FDIC who takes part in investigating, 
preparing, or presenting a particular case may not, in such case or a 
factually related case:
    (1) Participate in the hearing as the ALJ;
    (2) Participate or advise in the initial decision or the review of 
the initial decision by the Board, except as a witness or a 
representative in public proceedings; or
    (3) Make the collection of penalties and assessments under 31 U.S.C. 
3806.
    (b) The ALJ will not be responsible to, or subject to the 
supervision or direction of, the investigating official or the reviewing 
official.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (a) of this section, the 
representative for the FDIC will be an attorney employed in the FDIC's 
Legal Division; however, the representative of the FDIC may not 
participate or advise in the review of the initial decision by the 
Board.



Sec. 308.514  Ex parte contacts.

    No party or person (except employees of the ALJ's office) will 
communicate in any way with the ALJ on any matter at issue in a case, 
unless on notice and opportunity for all parties to participate. This 
provision does not prohibit a person or party from inquiring about the 
status of a case or asking routine questions concerning administrative 
functions or procedures.



Sec. 308.515  Disqualification of reviewing official or ALJ.

    (a) A reviewing official or ALJ in a particular case may disqualify 
himself or herself at any time.
    (b) A party may file with the ALJ a motion for disqualification of a 
reviewing official or an ALJ. An affidavit alleging conflict of interest 
or other reason for disqualification must accompany the motion.
    (c) Such motion and affidavit must be filed promptly upon the 
party's discovery of reasons requiring disqualification, or such 
objections will be deemed waived.
    (d) Such affidavit must state specific facts that support the 
party's belief that personal bias or other reason for disqualification 
exists and the time and circumstances of the party's discovery of such 
facts. The representative of record must certify that the affidavit is 
made in good faith and this certification must accompany the affidavit.
    (e) Upon the filing of such a motion and affidavit, the ALJ will 
proceed no further in the case until he or she resolves the matter of 
disqualification in accordance with paragraph (f) of this section.

[[Page 129]]

    (f)(1) If the ALJ determines that a reviewing official is 
disqualified, the ALJ will dismiss the complaint without prejudice.
    (2) If the ALJ disqualifies himself or herself, the case will be 
reassigned promptly to another ALJ.
    (3) If the ALJ denies a motion to disqualify, the Board may 
determine the matter only as part of the Board's review of the initial 
decision upon appeal, if any.



Sec. 308.516  Rights of parties.

    Except as otherwise limited by this subpart, all parties may:
    (a) Be accompanied, represented, and advised by a representative;
    (b) Participate in any conference held by the ALJ;
    (c) Conduct discovery;
    (d) Agree to stipulations of fact or law which will be made part of 
the record;
    (e) Present evidence relevant to the issues at the hearing;
    (f) Present and cross-examine witnesses;
    (g) Present oral arguments at the hearing as permitted by the ALJ; 
and
    (h) Submit written briefs and proposed findings of fact and 
conclusions of law.



Sec. 308.517  Authority of the ALJ.

    (a) The ALJ will conduct a fair and impartial hearing, avoid delay, 
maintain order, and assure that a record of the proceeding is made.
    (b) The ALJ has the authority to:
    (1) Set and change the date, time, and place of the hearing upon 
reasonable notice to the parties;
    (2) Continue or recess the hearing in whole or in part for a 
reasonable period of time;
    (3) Hold conferences to identify or simplify the issues, or to 
consider other matters that may aid in the expeditious disposition of 
the proceeding;
    (4) Administer oaths and affirmations;
    (5) Issue subpoenas requiring the attendance of witnesses and the 
production of documents at depositions or at hearings;
    (6) Rule on motions and other procedural matters;
    (7) Regulate the scope and timing of discovery;
    (8) Regulate the course of the hearing and the conduct of 
representatives and parties;
    (9) Examine witnesses;
    (10) Receive, rule on, exclude, or limit evidence;
    (11) Upon motion of a party, take official notice of facts, decide 
cases, in whole or in part, by summary judgment where there is no 
disputed issue of material fact;
    (12) Conduct any conference, argument, or hearing on motions in 
person or by telephone; and
    (13) Exercise such other authority as is necessary to carry out the 
responsibilities of the ALJ under this subpart.
    (c) The ALJ does not have the authority to make any determinations 
regarding the validity of federal statutes or regulations or of 
directives, rules, resolutions, policies, orders or other such general 
pronouncements issued by the Corporation.



Sec. 308.518  Prehearing conferences.

    (a) The ALJ may schedule prehearing conferences as appropriate.
    (b) Upon the motion of any party, the ALJ will schedule at least one 
prehearing conference at a reasonable time in advance of the hearing.
    (c) The ALJ may use prehearing conferences to discuss the following:
    (1) Simplification of the issues;
    (2) The necessity or desirability of amendments to the pleading, 
including the need for a more definite statement;
    (3) Stipulations and admissions of fact as to the contents and 
authenticity of documents;
    (4) Whether the parties can agree to submission of the case on a 
stipulated record;
    (5) Whether a party chooses (subject to the objection of other 
parties) to waive appearance at an oral hearing and to submit only 
documentary evidence and written argument;
    (6) Limitation of the number of witnesses;
    (7) Scheduling dates for the exchange of witness lists and of 
proposed exhibits;
    (8) Discovery;

[[Page 130]]

    (9) The time, date, and place for the hearing; and
    (10) Such other matters as may tend to expedite the fair and just 
disposition of the proceedings.
    (d) The ALJ may issue an order containing all matters agreed upon by 
the parties or ordered by the ALJ at a prehearing conference.



Sec. 308.519  Disclosure of documents.

    (a) Upon written request to the reviewing official, the defendant 
may review any relevant and material documents, transcripts, records, 
and other materials that relate to the allegations set out in the 
complaint and upon which the findings and conclusions of the 
investigating official under Sec. 308.503(b) of this subpart are based, 
unless such documents are subject to a privilege under federal law. Upon 
payment of fees for duplication, the defendant may obtain copies of such 
documents.
    (b) Upon written request to the reviewing official, the defendant 
also may obtain a copy of all exculpatory information in the possession 
of the reviewing official or investigating official relating to the 
allegations in the complaint, even if it is contained in a document that 
would otherwise be privileged. If the document would otherwise be 
privileged, only that portion containing exculpatory information must be 
disclosed.
    (c) The notice sent to the Attorney General from the reviewing 
official as described in Sec. 308.504 of this subpart is not 
discoverable under any circumstances.
    (d) The defendant may file a motion to compel disclosure of the 
documents subject to the provisions of this section. Such a motion may 
only be filed with the ALJ following the filing of an answer pursuant to 
Sec. 308.508 of this subpart.



Sec. 308.520  Discovery.

    (a) The following types of discovery are authorized:
    (1) Requests for production of documents for inspection and copying;
    (2) Requests for admission of the authenticity of any relevant 
document or of the truth of any relevant fact;
    (3) Written interrogatories; and
    (4) Depositions.
    (b) For the purpose of this section and Secs. 308.521 and 308.522 of 
this subpart, the term documents includes information, documents, 
reports, answers, records, accounts, papers, and other data or 
documentary evidence. Nothing contained in this subpart will be 
interpreted to require the creation of a document.
    (c) Unless mutually agreed to by the parties, discovery is available 
only as ordered by the ALJ. The ALJ will regulate the timing of 
discovery.
    (d) Motions for discovery. (1) A party seeking discovery may file a 
motion with the ALJ and a copy of the requested discovery, or in the 
case of depositions, a summary of the scope of the proposed deposition, 
must accompany such motions.
    (2) Within 10 days of service, a party may file an opposition to the 
motion and/or a motion for protective order as provided in Sec. 308.523 
of this subpart.
    (3) The ALJ may grant a motion for discovery only if he or she finds 
that the discovery sought:
    (i) Is necessary for the expeditious, fair, and reasonable 
consideration of the issues;
    (ii) Is not unduly costly or burdensome;
    (iii) Will not unduly delay the proceeding; and
    (iv) Does not seek privileged information.
    (4) The burden of showing that discovery should be allowed is on the 
party seeking discovery.
    (5) The ALJ may grant discovery subject to a protective order under 
Sec. 308.523 of this subpart.
    (e) Dispositions. (1) If a motion for deposition is granted, the ALJ 
will issue a subpoena for the deponent, which may require the deponent 
to produce documents. The subpoena will specify the time, date, and 
place at which the deposition will be held.
    (2) The party seeking to depose must serve the subpoena in the 
manner prescribed in Sec. 308.507 of this subpart.
    (3) The deponent may file with the ALJ a motion to quash the 
subpoena or a motion for a protective order within 10 days of service.
    (4) The party seeking to depose must provide for the taking of a 
verbatim

[[Page 131]]

transcript of the deposition, and must make the transcript available to 
all other parties for inspection and copying.
    (f) Each party must bear its own costs of discovery.



Sec. 308.521  Exchange of witness lists, statements, and exhibits.

    (a) At least 15 days before the hearing or at such other time as may 
be ordered by the ALJ, the parties must exchange witness lists, copies 
of prior statements of proposed witnesses, and copies of proposed 
hearing exhibits, including copies of any written statements that the 
party intends to offer in lieu of live testimony in accordance with 
Sec. 308.532(b) of this subpart. At the time such documents are 
exchanged, any party that intends to rely on the transcript of 
deposition testimony in lieu of live testimony at the hearing, if 
permitted by the ALJ, must provide each party with a copy of the 
specific pages of the transcript it intends to introduce into evidence.
    (b) If a party objects, the ALJ will not admit into evidence the 
testimony of any witness whose name does not appear on the witness list 
or any exhibit not provided to the opposing party as provided in 
paragraph (a) of this section unless the ALJ finds good cause for the 
failure or that there is no prejudice to the objecting party.
    (c) Unless another party objects within the time set by the ALJ, 
documents exchanged in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section 
will be deemed to be authentic for the purpose of admissibility at the 
hearing.



Sec. 308.522  Subpoenas for attendance at hearing.

    (a) A party wishing to procure the appearance and testimony of any 
individual at the hearing may request that the ALJ issue a subpoena.
    (b) A subpoena requiring the attendance and testimony of an 
individual may also require the individual to produce documents at the 
hearing.
    (c) A party seeking a subpoena must file a written request not less 
than 15 days before the date fixed for the hearing unless otherwise 
allowed by the ALJ for good cause shown. Such request must specify any 
documents to be produced and must designate the witnesses and describe 
the address and location thereof with sufficient particularity to permit 
such witnesses to be found.
    (d) The subpoena must specify the time, date, and place at which the 
witness is to appear and any documents the witness is to produce.
    (e) The party seeking the subpoena must serve it in the manner 
prescribed in Sec. 308.507 of this subpart. A subpoena on a party or 
upon an individual under the control of a party may be served by first 
class mail.
    (f) A party or the individual to whom the subpoena is directed may 
file with the ALJ a motion to quash the subpoena within 10 days after 
service or on or before the time specified in the subpoena for 
compliance if it is less than 10 days after service.



Sec. 308.523  Protective order.

    (a) A party or a prospective witness or deponent may file a motion 
for a protective order with respect to discovery sought by an opposing 
party or with respect to the hearing, seeking to limit the availability 
or disclosure of evidence.
    (b) In issuing a protective order, the ALJ may make any order which 
justice requires to protect a party or person from annoyance, 
embarrassment, oppression, or undue burden or expense, including one or 
more of the following:
    (1) That the discovery will not be conducted;
    (2) That the discovery will be conducted only on specified terms and 
conditions, including a designation of the time or place;
    (3) That the discovery will be conducted only through a method of 
discovery other than that requested;
    (4) That certain matters not be inquired into, or that the scope of 
discovery be limited to certain matters;
    (5) That discovery be conducted with no one present except persons 
designated by the ALJ;
    (6) That the contents of discovery or evidence be sealed or 
otherwise kept confidential;
    (7) That a deposition after being sealed be opened only by order of 
the ALJ;

[[Page 132]]

    (8) That a trade secret or other confidential research, development, 
commercial information, or facts pertaining to any criminal 
investigation, proceeding, or other administrative investigation not be 
disclosed or be disclosed only in a designated way; or
    (9) That the parties simultaneously file specified documents or 
information enclosed in sealed envelopes to be opened as directed by the 
ALJ.



Sec. 308.524  Witness fees.

    The party requesting a subpoena must pay the cost of the fees and 
mileage of any witness subpoenaed in the amounts that would be payable 
to a witness in a proceeding in United States District Court. A check 
for witness fees and mileage must accompany the subpoena when served, 
except that when a subpoena is issued on behalf of the FDIC, a check for 
witness fees and mileage need not accompany the subpoena.



Sec. 308.525  Form, filing, and service of papers.

    (a) Form. (1) Documents filed with the ALJ must include an original 
and two copies.
    (2) Every pleading and paper filed in the proceeding must contain a 
caption setting forth the title of the action, the case number assigned 
by the ALJ, and a designation of the paper (e.g., motion to quash 
subpoena).
    (3) Every pleading and paper must be signed by, and must contain the 
address and telephone number of the party or the person on whose behalf 
the paper was filed, or his or her representative.
    (4) Papers are considered filed when they are mailed by certified or 
registered mail. Date of mailing may be established by a certificate 
from the party or its representative or by proof that the document was 
sent by certified or registered mail.
    (b) Service. A party filing a document with the ALJ must, at the 
time of filing, serve a copy of such document on every other party. 
Service upon any party of any document other than those required to be 
served as prescribed in Sec. 308.507 of this subpart must be made by 
delivering a copy or by placing a copy of the document in the United 
States mail, postage prepaid, and addressed to the party's last known 
address. When a party is represented by a representative, service must 
be made upon such representative in lieu of the actual party. The ALJ 
may authorize facsimile transmission as an acceptable form of service.
    (c) Proof of service. A certificate by the individual serving the 
document by personal delivery or by mail, setting forth the manner of 
service, will be proof of service.



Sec. 308.526  Computation of time.

    (a) In computing any period of time under this subpart or in an 
order issued thereunder, the time begins with the day following the act, 
event, or default, and includes the last day of the period, unless it is 
a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday observed by the federal government, 
in which event it includes the next business day.
    (b) When the period of time allowed is less than 7 days, 
intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays observed by the 
federal government will be excluded from the computation.
    (c) Where a document has been served or issued by placing it in the 
mail, an additional 5 days will be added to the time permitted for any 
response.



Sec. 308.527  Motions.

    (a) Any application to the ALJ for an order or ruling must be by 
motion. Motions must state the relief sought, the authority relied upon, 
and the facts alleged, and must be filed with the ALJ and served on all 
other parties. Motions may include, without limitation, motions for 
summary judgment.
    (b) Except for motions made during a prehearing conference or at the 
hearing, all motions must be in writing. The ALJ may require that oral 
motions be reduced to writing.
    (c) Within 15 days after a written motion is served, or any other 
time as may be fixed by the ALJ, any party may file a response to such 
motion.
    (d) The ALJ may not grant a written motion before the time for 
filing responses thereto has expired, except upon consent of the parties 
or following a hearing on the motion, but may overrule or deny such 
motion without awaiting a response.

[[Page 133]]

    (e) The ALJ will make a reasonable effort to dispose of all 
outstanding motions prior to the beginning of the hearing.



Sec. 308.528  Sanctions.

    (a) The ALJ may sanction a person, including any party or 
representative for:
    (1) Failing to comply with an order, rule, or procedure governing 
the proceeding;
    (2) Failing to prosecute or defend an action; or
    (3) Engaging in other misconduct that interferes with the speedy, 
orderly, or fair conduct of the hearing.
    (b) Any such sanction, including but not limited to, those listed in 
paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section, must reasonably relate to 
the severity and nature of the failure or misconduct.
    (c) When a party fails to comply with an order, including an order 
for taking a deposition, the production of evidence within the party's 
control, or a request for admission, the ALJ may:
    (1) Draw an inference in favor of the requesting party with regard 
to the information sought;
    (2) In the case of requests for admission, deem each matter of which 
an admission is requested to be admitted;
    (3) Prohibit the party failing to comply with such order from 
introducing evidence concerning, or otherwise relying upon, testimony 
relating to the information sought; and
    (4) Strike any part of the related pleading or other submissions of 
the party failing to comply with such request.
    (d) If a party fails to prosecute or defend an action under this 
subpart commenced by service of a notice of hearing, the ALJ may dismiss 
the action or may issue an initial decision imposing penalties and 
assessments.
    (e) The ALJ may refuse to consider any motion, request, response, 
brief, or other document which is not filed in a timely fashion.



Sec. 308.529  The hearing and burden of proof.

    (a) The ALJ will conduct a hearing on the record in order to 
determine whether the defendant is liable for a civil penalty or 
assessment under Sec. 308.502 of this subpart, and, if so, the 
appropriate amount of any such civil penalty or assessment considering 
any aggravating or mitigating factors.
    (b) The FDIC must prove defendant's liability and any aggravating 
factors by a preponderance of the evidence.
    (c) The defendant must prove any affirmative defenses and any 
mitigating factors by a preponderance of the evidence.
    (d) The hearing will be open to the public unless otherwise ordered 
by the ALJ for good cause shown.



Sec. 308.530  Determining the amount of penalties and assessments.

    (a) In determining an appropriate amount of civil penalties and 
assessments, the ALJ and the Board, upon appeal, should evaluate any 
circumstances that mitigate or aggravate the violation and should 
articulate in their opinions the reasons that support the penalties and 
assessments they impose. Because of the intangible costs of fraud, the 
expense of investigating such conduct, and the need to deter others who 
might be similarly tempted, ordinarily double damages and a significant 
civil penalty should be imposed.
    (b) Although not exhaustive, the following factors are among those 
that may influence the ALJ and the Board in determining the amount of 
penalties and assessments to impose with respect to the misconduct 
(i.e., the false, fictitious, or fraudulent claims or statement) charged 
in the complaint:
    (1) The number of false, fictitious, or fraudulent claims or 
statements;
    (2) The time period over which such claims or statements were made;
    (3) The degree of the defendant's culpability with respect to the 
misconduct;
    (4) The amount of money or the value of the property, services, or 
benefit falsely claimed;
    (5) The value of the government's actual loss as a result of the 
misconduct, including foreseeable consequential damages and the costs of 
investigation;
    (6) The relationship of the amount imposed as civil penalties to the 
amount of the government's loss;

[[Page 134]]

    (7) The potential or actual impact of the misconduct upon national 
defense, public health or safety, or public confidence in the management 
of government programs and operations, including particularly the impact 
on the intended beneficiaries of such programs;
    (8) Whether the defendant has engaged in a pattern of the same or 
similar misconduct;
    (9) Whether the defendant attempted to conceal the misconduct;
    (10) The degree to which the defendant has involved others in the 
misconduct or in concealing it;
    (11) Where the misconduct of employees or agents is imputed to the 
defendant, the extent to which the defendant's practices fostered or 
attempted to preclude such misconduct;
    (12) Whether the defendant cooperated in or obstructed an 
investigation of the misconduct;
    (13) Whether the defendant assisted in identifying and prosecuting 
other wrongdoers;
    (14) The complexity of the program or transaction, and the degree of 
the defendant's sophistication with respect to it, including the extent 
of the defendant's prior participation in the program or in a similar 
transaction;
    (15) Whether the defendant has been found, in any criminal, civil, 
or administrative proceeding to have engaged in similar misconduct or to 
have dealt dishonestly with the Government of the United States or of a 
state, directly or indirectly; and
    (16) The need to deter the defendant and others from engaging in the 
same or similar misconduct.
    (c) Nothing in this section will be construed to limit the ALJ or 
the Board from considering any other factors that in any given case may 
mitigate or aggravate the offense for which penalties and assessments 
are imposed.
    (d) Civil money penalties that are assessed pursuant to this subpart 
are subject to adjustment on a four-year basis to account for inflation 
as required by section 4 of the Federal Civil Penalties Inflation 
Adjustment Act of 1990, as amended (codified at 28 U.S.C. 2461, note) 
(see also 12 CFR 308.132(c)(3)(xv)).



Sec. 308.531  Location of hearing.

    (a) The hearing may be held:
    (1) In any judicial district of the United States in which the 
defendant resides or transacts business;
    (2) In any judicial district of the United States in which the claim 
or statement at issue was made; or
    (3) In such other place as may be agreed upon by the defendant and 
the ALJ.
    (b) Each party will have the opportunity to present argument with 
respect to the location of the hearing.
    (c) The hearing will be held at the place and at the time ordered by 
the ALJ.



Sec. 308.532  Witnesses.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, testimony 
at the hearing will be given orally by witnesses under oath or 
affirmation.
    (b) At the discretion of the ALJ, testimony may be admitted in the 
form of a written statement or deposition. The party offering a written 
statement must provide all other parties with a copy of the written 
statement along with the last known address of the witness. Sufficient 
time must be allowed for other parties to subpoena the witness for 
cross-examination at the hearing. Prior written statements and 
deposition transcripts of witnesses identified to testify at the hearing 
must be exchanged as provided in Sec. 308.521(a) of this subpart.
    (c) The ALJ will exercise reasonable control over the mode and order 
of interrogating witnesses and presenting evidence so as to:
    (1) Make the interrogation and presentation effective for the 
ascertainment of the truth;
    (2) Avoid needless consumption of time; and
    (3) Protect witnesses from harassment or undue embarrassment.
    (d) The ALJ will permit the parties to conduct such cross-
examination as may be required for a full and true disclosure of the 
facts.
    (e) At the discretion of the ALJ, a witness may be cross-examined on 
matters relevant to the proceeding without regard to the scope of his or 
her direct examination. To the extent permitted

[[Page 135]]

by the ALJ, cross-examination on matters outside the scope of direct 
examination will be conducted in the manner of direct examination and 
may proceed by leading questions only if the witness is a hostile 
witness, an adverse party, or a witness identified with an adverse 
party.
    (f) Upon motion of any party, the ALJ will order witnesses excluded 
so that they cannot hear the testimony of other witnesses. This rule 
does not authorize exclusion of:
    (1) A party who is an individual;
    (2) In the case of a party that is not an individual, an officer or 
employee of the party appearing for the entity pro se or designated by 
the party's representative; or
    (3) An individual whose presence is shown by a party to be essential 
to the presentation of its case, including an individual employed by the 
Corporation engaged in assisting the representative for the Corporation.



Sec. 308.533  Evidence.

    (a) The ALJ will determine the admissibility of evidence.
    (b) Except as provided in this subpart, the ALJ will not be bound by 
the Federal Rules of Evidence (28 U.S.C. App.). However, the ALJ may 
apply the Federal Rules of Evidence where appropriate, e.g., to exclude 
unreliable evidence.
    (c) The ALJ will exclude irrelevant and immaterial evidence.
    (d) Although relevant, evidence may be excluded if its probative 
value is substantially outweighed by the danger of unfair prejudice, 
confusion of the issues, or by considerations of undue delay or needless 
presentation of cumulative evidence.
    (e) Although relevant, evidence may be excluded if it is privileged 
under federal law.
    (f) Evidence concerning offers of compromise or settlement will be 
inadmissible to the extent provided in rule 408 of the Federal Rules of 
Evidence.
    (g) The ALJ will permit the parties to introduce rebuttal witnesses 
and evidence.
    (h) All documents and other evidence offered or taken for the record 
must be open to examination by all parties, unless otherwise ordered by 
the ALJ pursuant to Sec. 308.523 of this subpart.



Sec. 308.534  The record.

    (a) The hearing will be recorded by audio or videotape and 
transcribed. Transcripts may be obtained following the hearing from the 
ALJ at a cost not to exceed the actual cost of duplication.
    (b) The transcript of testimony, exhibits, and other evidence 
admitted at the hearing, and all papers and requests filed in the 
proceeding constitute the record for the decision by the ALJ and the 
Board.
    (c) The record may be inspected and copied (upon payment of a 
reasonable fee) by anyone, unless otherwise ordered by the ALJ pursuant 
to Sec. 308.523 of this subpart.



Sec. 308.535  Post-hearing briefs.

    The ALJ may require the parties to file post-hearing briefs. In any 
event, any party may file a post-hearing brief. The ALJ will fix the 
time for filing such briefs, not to exceed 60 days from the date the 
parties receive the transcript of the hearing or, if applicable, the 
stipulated record. Such briefs may be accompanied by proposed findings 
of fact and conclusions of law. The ALJ may permit the parties to file 
reply briefs.



Sec. 308.536  Initial decision.

    (a) The ALJ will issue an initial decision based only on the record, 
which will contain findings of fact, conclusions of law, and the amount 
of any penalties and assessments imposed.
    (b) The findings of fact will include a finding on each of the 
following issues:
    (1) Whether the claims or statements identified in the complaint, or 
any portions of such claims or statements, violate Sec. 308.502 of this 
subpart; and
    (2) If the person is liable for penalties or assessments, the 
appropriate amount of any such penalties or assessments considering any 
mitigating or aggravating factors that he or she finds in the case, such 
as those described in Sec. 308.530 of this subpart.
    (c) The ALJ will promptly serve the initial decision on all parties 
within 90 days after the time for submission of post-hearing briefs and 
reply briefs (if

[[Page 136]]

permitted) has expired. The ALJ will at the same time serve all parties 
with a statement describing the right of any defendant determined to be 
liable for a civil penalty or assessment to file a motion for 
reconsideration with the ALJ or a notice of appeal with the Board. If 
the ALJ fails to meet the deadline contained in this paragraph, he or 
she will notify the parties of the reason for the delay and will set a 
new deadline.
    (d) Unless the initial decision of the ALJ is timely appealed to the 
Board, or a motion for reconsideration of the initial decision is timely 
filed, the initial decision will constitute the final decision of the 
Board and will be final and binding on the parties 30 days after it is 
issued by the ALJ.



Sec. 308.537  Reconsideration of initial decision.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, any party 
may file a motion for reconsideration of the initial decision within 20 
days of receipt of the initial decision. If service is made by mail, 
receipt will be presumed to be 5 days from the date of mailing in the 
absence of proof to the contrary.
    (b) Every motion for reconsideration must set forth the matters 
claimed to have been erroneously decided and the nature of the alleged 
errors. The motion must be accompanied by a supporting brief.
    (c) Responses to the motions will be allowed only upon order of the 
ALJ.
    (d) No party may file a motion for reconsideration of an initial 
decision that has been revised in response to a previous motion for 
reconsideration.
    (e) The ALJ may dispose of a motion for reconsideration by denying 
it or by issuing a revised initial decision.
    (f) If the ALJ denies a motion for reconsideration, the initial 
decision will constitute the final decision of the FDIC and will be 
final and binding on all parties 30 days after the ALJ denies the 
motion, unless the final decision is timely appealed to the Board in 
accordance with Sec. 308.538 of this subpart.
    (g) If the ALJ issues a revised initial decision, that decision will 
constitute the final decision of the FDIC and will be final and binding 
on the parties 30 days after it is issued, unless it is timely appealed 
to the Board in accordance with Sec. 308.538 of this subpart.



Sec. 308.538  Appeal to the Board of Directors.

    (a) Any defendant who has filed a timely answer and who is 
determined in an initial decision to be liable for a civil penalty or 
assessment may appeal such decision to the Board by filing a notice of 
appeal with the Board in accordance with this section.
    (b)(1) No notice of appeal may be filed until the time period for 
filing a motion for reconsideration under Sec. 308.537 of this subpart 
has expired.
    (2) If a motion for reconsideration is timely filed, a notice of 
appeal must be filed within 30 days after the ALJ denies the motion or 
issues a revised initial decision, whichever applies.
    (3) If no motion for reconsideration is timely filed, a notice of 
appeal must be filed within 30 days after the ALJ issues the initial 
decision.
    (4) The Board may extend the initial 30-day period for an additional 
30 days if the defendant files with the Board a request for an extension 
within the initial 30-day period and shows good cause.
    (c) If the defendant files a timely notice of appeal with the Board, 
the ALJ will forward the record of the proceeding to the Board.
    (d) A notice of appeal will be accompanied by a written brief 
specifying exceptions to the initial decision and reasons supporting the 
exceptions.
    (e) The representative for the Corporation may file a brief in 
opposition to exceptions within 30 days of receiving the notice of 
appeal and accompanying brief.
    (f) There is no right to appear personally before the Board.
    (g) There is no right to appeal any interlocutory ruling by the ALJ.
    (h) In reviewing the initial decision, the Board will not consider 
any objection that was not raised before the ALJ unless a demonstration 
is made of extraordinary circumstances causing the failure to raise the 
objection.
    (i) If any party demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Board that 
additional evidence not presented at such hearing is material and that 
there were reasonable grounds for the failure to

[[Page 137]]

present such evidence at such hearing, the Board will remand the matter 
to the ALJ for consideration of such additional evidence.
    (j) The Board may affirm, reduce, reverse, compromise, remand, or 
settle any penalty or assessment determined by the ALJ in any initial 
decision.
    (k) The Board will promptly serve each party to the appeal with a 
copy of the decision of the Board and a statement describing the right 
of any person determined to be liable for a penalty or an assessment to 
seek judicial review.
    (l) Unless a petition for review is filed as provided in 31 U.S.C. 
3805 after a defendant has exhausted all administrative remedies under 
this subpart and within 60 days after the date on which the Board serves 
the defendant with a copy of the Board's decision, a determination that 
a defendant is liable under Sec. 308.502 of this subpart is final and is 
not subject to judicial review.



Sec. 308.539  Stays ordered by the Department of Justice.

    If at any time the Attorney General or an Assistant Attorney General 
designated by the Attorney General transmits to the Board a written 
finding that continuation of the administrative process described in 
this subpart with respect to a claim or statement may adversely affect 
any pending or potential criminal or civil action related to such claim 
or statement, the Board will stay the process immediately. The Board may 
order the process resumed only upon receipt of the written authorization 
of the Attorney General.



Sec. 308.540  Stay pending appeal.

    (a) An initial decision is stayed automatically pending disposition 
of a motion for reconsideration or of an appeal to the Board.
    (b) No administrative stay is available following a final decision 
of the Board.



Sec. 308.541  Judicial review.

    Section 3805 of title 31, United States Code, authorizes judicial 
review by an appropriate United States District Court of a final 
decision of the Board imposing penalties or assessments under this 
subpart and specifies the procedures for such review.



Sec. 308.542  Collection of civil penalties and assessments.

    Sections 3806 and 3808(b) of title 31, United States Code, authorize 
actions for collection of civil penalties and assessments imposed under 
this subpart and specify the procedures for such actions.



Sec. 308.543  Right to administrative offset.

    The amount of any penalty or assessment which has become final, or 
for which a judgment has been entered under Sec. 308.541 or Sec. 308.542 
of this subpart, or any amount agreed upon in a compromise or settlement 
under Sec. 308.545 of this subpart, may be collected by administrative 
offset under 31 U.S.C. 3716, except that an administrative offset may 
not be made under this section against a refund of an overpayment of 
federal taxes, then or later owing by the United States to the 
defendant.



Sec. 308.544  Deposit in Treasury of United States.

    All amounts collected pursuant to this subpart will be deposited as 
miscellaneous receipts in the Treasury of the United States, except as 
provided in 31 U.S.C. 3806(g).



Sec. 308.545  Compromise or settlement.

    (a) Parties may make offers of compromise or settlement at any time.
    (b) The reviewing official has the exclusive authority to compromise 
or settle a case under this subpart at any time after the date on which 
the reviewing official is permitted to issue a complaint and before the 
date on which the ALJ issues an initial decision.
    (c) The Board has exclusive authority to compromise or settle a case 
under this subpart any time after the date on which the ALJ issues an 
initial decision, except during the pendency of any review under 
Sec. 308.541 of this subpart or during the pendency of any action to 
collect penalties and assessments under Sec. 308.542 of this subpart.
    (d) The Attorney General has exclusive authority to compromise or 
settle a case under this subpart during the

[[Page 138]]

pendency of any review under Sec. 308.541 of this subpart or of any 
action to recover penalties and assessments under 31 U.S.C. 3806.
    (e) The investigating official may recommend settlement terms to the 
reviewing official, the Board, or the Attorney General, as appropriate. 
The reviewing official may recommend settlement terms to the Board, or 
the Attorney General, as appropriate.
    (f) Any compromise or settlement must be in writing.



Sec. 308.546  Limitations.

    (a) The notice of hearing with respect to a claim or statement will 
be served in the manner specified in Sec. 308.507 of this subpart within 
6 years after the date on which such claim or statement is made.
    (b) If the defendant fails to file a timely answer, service of 
notice under Sec. 308.509(b) of this subpart will be deemed a notice of 
a hearing for purposes of this section.
    (c) The statute of limitations may be extended by agreement of the 
parties.



    Subpart U_Removal, Suspension, and Debarment of Accountants From 
                        Performing Audit Services

    Source: 68 FR 48270, Aug. 13, 2003, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 308.600  Scope.

    This subpart, which implements section 36(g)(4) of the FDIA (12 
U.S.C. 1831m(g)(4)), provides rules and procedures for the removal, 
suspension, or debarment of independent public accountants and 
accounting firms from performing independent audit and attestation 
services required by section 36 of the FDIA (12 U.S.C. 1831m) for 
insured depository institutions for which the FDIC is the appropriate 
Federal banking agency.



Sec. 308.601  Definitions.

    As used in this subpart, the following terms shall have the meaning 
given below unless the context requires otherwise:
    (a) Accounting firm means a corporation, proprietorship, 
partnership, or other business firm providing audit services.
    (b) Audit services means any service required to be performed by an 
independent public accountant by section 36 of the FDIA and 12 CFR part 
363, including attestation services.
    (c) Independent public accountant (accountant) means any individual 
who performs or participates in providing audit services.



Sec. 308.602  Removal, suspension, or debarment.

    (a) Good cause for removal, suspension, or debarment--(1) 
Individuals. The Board of Directors may remove, suspend, or debar an 
independent public accountant under section 36 of the FDIA from 
performing audit services for insured depository institutions for which 
the FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency if, after service of 
a notice of intention and opportunity for hearing in the matter, the 
Board of Directors finds that the accountant:
    (i) Lacks the requisite qualifications to perform audit services;
    (ii) Has knowingly or recklessly engaged in conduct that results in 
a violation of applicable professional standards, including those 
standards and conflicts of interest provisions applicable to accountants 
through the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Pub. L. 107-204, 116 Stat. 745 
(2002)) (Sarbanes-Oxley Act) and developed by the Public Company 
Accounting Oversight Board and the Securities and Exchange Commission;
    (iii) Has engaged in negligent conduct in the form of:
    (A) A single instance of highly unreasonable conduct that results in 
a violation of applicable professional standards in circumstances in 
which an accountant knows, or should know, that heightened scrutiny is 
warranted; or
    (B) Repeated instances of unreasonable conduct, each resulting in a 
violation of applicable professional standards, that indicate a lack of 
competence to perform audit services;
    (iv) Has knowingly or recklessly given false or misleading 
information, or knowingly or recklessly participated in any way in the 
giving of false or misleading information, to the FDIC or any officer or 
employee of the FDIC;

[[Page 139]]

    (v) Has engaged in, or aided and abetted, a material and knowing or 
reckless violation of any provision of the Federal banking or securities 
laws or the rules and regulations thereunder, or any other law;
    (vi) Has been removed, suspended, or debarred from practice before 
any Federal or state agency regulating the banking, insurance, or 
securities industries, other than by an action listed in Sec. 308.603, 
on grounds relevant to the provision of audit services; or
    (vii) Is suspended or debarred for cause from practice as an 
accountant by any duly constituted licensing authority of any state, 
possession, commonwealth, or the District of Columbia.
    (2) Accounting firms. If the Board of Directors determines that 
there is good cause for the removal, suspension, or debarment of a 
member or employee of an accounting firm under paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section, the Board of Directors also may remove, suspend, or debar such 
firm or one or more offices of such firm. In considering whether to 
remove, suspend, or debar an accounting firm or an office thereof, and 
the term of any sanction against an accounting firm under this section, 
the Board of Directors may consider, for example:
    (i) The gravity, scope, or repetition of the act or failure to act 
that constitutes good cause for the removal, suspension, or debarment;
    (ii) The adequacy of, and adherence to, applicable policies, 
practices, or procedures for the accounting firm's conduct of its 
business and the performance of audit services;
    (iii) The selection, training, supervision, and conduct of members 
or employees of the accounting firm involved in the performance of audit 
services;
    (iv) The extent to which managing partners or senior officers of the 
accounting firm have participated, directly, or indirectly through 
oversight or review, in the act or failure to act; and
    (v) The extent to which the accounting firm has, since the 
occurrence of the act or failure to act, implemented corrective internal 
controls to prevent its recurrence.
    (3) Limited scope orders. An order of removal, suspension (including 
an immediate suspension), or debarment may, at the discretion of the 
Board of Directors, be made applicable to a limited number of insured 
depository institutions for which the FDIC is the appropriate Federal 
banking agency.
    (4) Remedies not exclusive. The remedies provided in this subpart 
are in addition to any other remedies the FDIC may have under any other 
applicable provision of law, rule, or regulation.
    (b) Proceedings to remove, suspend or debar--(1) Initiation of 
formal removal, suspension, or debarment proceedings. The Board of 
Directors may initiate a proceeding to remove, suspend, or debar an 
accountant or accounting firm from performing audit services by issuing 
a written notice of intention to take such action that names the 
individual or firm as a respondent and describes the nature of the 
conduct that constitutes good cause for such action.
    (2) Hearings under paragraph (b) of this section. An accountant or 
firm named as a respondent in the notice issued under paragraph (b)(1) 
of this section may request a hearing on the allegations contained in 
the notice. Hearings conducted under this paragraph shall be conducted 
in the same manner as other hearings under the Uniform Rules of Practice 
and Procedure (12 CFR part 308, subpart A) (Uniform Rules).
    (c) Immediate suspension from performing audit services--(1) In 
general. If the Board of Directors serves a written notice of intention 
to remove, suspend, or debar an accountant or accounting firm from 
performing audit services, the Board of Directors may, with due regard 
for the public interest and without a preliminary hearing, immediately 
suspend such accountant or firm from performing audit services for 
insured depository institutions for which the FDIC is the appropriate 
Federal banking agency if the Board of Directors:
    (i) Has a reasonable basis to believe that the accountant or 
accounting firm has engaged in conduct (specified in the notice served 
upon the accountant or accounting firm under paragraph

[[Page 140]]

(b)(1) of this section) that would constitute grounds for removal, 
suspension, or debarment under paragraph (a) of this section;
    (ii) Determines that immediate suspension is necessary to avoid 
immediate harm to an insured depository institution or its depositors or 
to the depository system as a whole; and
    (iii) Serves such respondent with written notice of the immediate 
suspension.
    (2) Procedures. An immediate suspension notice issued under this 
paragraph will become effective upon service. Such suspension will 
remain in effect until the date the Board of Directors dismisses the 
charges contained in the notice of intention, or the effective date of a 
final order of removal, suspension, or debarment issued by the Board of 
Directors to the respondent.
    (3) Petition to stay. Any accountant or accounting firm immediately 
suspended from performing audit services in accordance with paragraph 
(c)(1) of this section may, within 10 calendar days after service of the 
notice of immediate suspension, file a petition with the Executive 
Secretary for a stay of such immediate suspension. If no petition is 
filed within 10 calendar days, the immediate suspension shall remain in 
effect.
    (4) Hearing on petition. Upon receipt of a stay petition, the 
Executive Secretary will designate a presiding officer who will fix a 
place and time (not more than 10 calendar days after receipt of the 
petition, unless extended at the request of petitioner) at which the 
immediately suspended party may appear, personally or through counsel, 
to submit written materials and oral argument. Any FDIC employee engaged 
in investigative or prosecuting functions for the FDIC in a case may 
not, in that or a factually related case, serve as a presiding officer 
or participate or advise in the decision of the presiding officer or of 
the FDIC, except as witness or counsel in the proceeding. In the sole 
discretion of the presiding officer, upon a specific showing of 
compelling need, oral testimony of witnesses also may be presented. 
Enforcement counsel may represent the agency at the hearing. In hearings 
held pursuant to this paragraph there shall be no discovery, and the 
provisions of Secs. 308.6 through 308.12, Sec. 308.16, and Sec. 308.21 
of the Uniform Rules will apply.
    (5) Decision on petition. Within 30 calendar days after the hearing, 
the presiding officer will issue a decision. The presiding officer will 
grant a stay upon a demonstration that a substantial likelihood exists 
of the respondent's success on the issues raised by the notice of 
intention and that, absent such relief, the respondent will suffer 
immediate and irreparable injury, loss, or damage. In the absence of 
such a demonstration, the presiding officer will notify the parties that 
the immediate suspension will be continued pending the completion of the 
administrative proceedings pursuant to the notice of intention. The 
presiding officer will serve a copy of the decision on, and 
simultaneously certify the record to, the Executive Secretary.
    (6) Review of presiding officer's decision. The parties may seek 
review of the presiding officer's decision by filing a petition for 
review with the Executive Secretary within 10 calendar days after 
service of the decision. Replies must be filed within 10 calendar days 
after the petition filing date. Upon receipt of a petition for review 
and any reply, the Executive Secretary will promptly certify the entire 
record to the Board of Directors. Within 60 calendar days of the 
Executive Secretary's certification, the Board of Directors will issue 
an order notifying the affected party whether or not the immediate 
suspension should be continued or reinstated. The order will state the 
basis of the Board's decision.



Sec. 308.603  Automatic removal, suspension, and debarment.

    (a) An independent public accountant or accounting firm may not 
perform audit services for insured depository institutions for which the 
FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency if the accountant or 
firm:
    (1) Is subject to a final order of removal, suspension, or debarment 
(other than a limited scope order) issued by the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System, the Office of the Comptroller of the 
Currency, or the Office of Thrift Supervision under section 36 of the 
FDIA;

[[Page 141]]

    (2) Is subject to a temporary suspension or permanent revocation of 
registration or a temporary or permanent suspension or bar from further 
association with any registered public accounting firm issued by the 
Public Company Accounting Oversight Board or the Securities and Exchange 
Commission under sections 105(c)(4)(A) or (B) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 
(15 U.S.C. 7215(c)(4)(A) or (B)); or
    (3) Is subject to an order of suspension or denial of the privilege 
of appearing or practicing before the Securities and Exchange 
Commission.
    (b) Upon written request, the FDIC, for good cause shown, may grant 
written permission to such accountant or firm to perform audit services 
for insured depository institutions for which the FDIC is the 
appropriate Federal banking agency. The written request must comply with 
the requirements of Sec. 303.3 of this chapter.



Sec. 308.604  Notice of removal, suspension, or debarment.

    (a) Notice to the public. Upon the issuance of a final order for 
removal, suspension, or debarment of an independent public accountant or 
accounting firm from providing audit services, the FDIC will make the 
order publicly available and provide notice of the order to the other 
Federal banking agencies.
    (b) Notice to the FDIC by accountants and firms. An accountant or 
accounting firm that provides audit services to any insured depository 
institution for which the FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency 
must provide the FDIC with written notice of:
    (1) any currently effective order or other action described in 
Secs. 308.602(a)(1)(vi) through (a)(1)(vii) or Secs. 308.603(a)(2) 
through (a)(3); and
    (2) any currently effective action by the Public Company Accounting 
Oversight Board under sections 105(c)(4)(C) or (G) of the Sarbanes-Oxley 
Act (15 U.S.C. 7215(c)(4)(C) or (G)).
    (c) Timing and place of notice. Written notice required by this 
paragraph shall be given no later than 15 calendar days following the 
effective date of an order or action, or 15 calendar days before an 
accountant or accounting firm accepts an engagement to provide audit 
services, whichever date is earlier. The written notice must be filed by 
the independent public accountant or accounting firm with the FDIC, 
Accounting and Securities Disclosure Section, 550 17th Street, NW., 
Washington, DC 20429.

[68 FR 48270, Aug. 13, 2003, as amended at 74 FR 32245, July 7, 2009; 74 
FR 35745, July 20, 2009]



Sec. 308.605  Application for reinstatement.

    (a) Form of petition. Unless otherwise ordered by the Board of 
Directors, an application for reinstatement by an independent public 
accountant, an accounting firm, or an office of a firm that was removed, 
suspended, or debarred under Sec. 308.602 may be made in writing at any 
time. The application must comply with the requirements of Sec. 303.3 of 
this chapter.
    (b) Procedure. An applicant for reinstatement under this section 
may, in the sole discretion of the Board of Directors, be afforded a 
hearing. In reinstatement proceedings, the person seeking reinstatement 
shall bear the burden of going forward with an application and proving 
the grounds asserted in support of the application, and the Board of 
Directors may, in its sole discretion, direct that any reinstatement 
proceeding be limited to written submissions. The removal, suspension, 
or debarment shall continue until the Board of Directors, for good cause 
shown, has reinstated the applicant or until the suspension period has 
expired. The filing of an application for reinstatement will not stay 
the effectiveness of the removal, suspension, or debarment of an 
accountant or firm.



PART 309_DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION--Table of Contents



Sec.
309.1  Purpose and scope.
309.2  Definitions.
309.3  Federal Register publication.
309.4  Publicly available records.
309.5  Procedures for requesting records.
309.6  Disclosure of exempt records.
309.7  Service of process.

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552; 12 U.S.C. 1819 ``Seventh'' and ``Tenth.''

[[Page 142]]


    Source: 60 FR 61465, Nov. 30, 1995, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 309.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part sets forth the basic policies of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation regarding information it maintains and the 
procedures for obtaining access to such information, including 
disclosure of information transferred to Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation from the Office of Thrift Supervision pursuant to section 
312 and 323 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection 
Act, Public Law 111-203. Section 309.2 sets forth definitions applicable 
to this part 309. Section 309.3 describes the types of information and 
documents typically published in the Federal Register. Section 309.4 
explains how to access public records maintained on the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation's World Wide Web page and in the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation's Public Information Center or ``PIC,'' and 
describes the categories of records generally found there. Section 309.5 
implements the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552). Section 309.6 
authorizes the discretionary disclosure of exempt records under certain 
limited circumstances. Section 309.7 outlines procedures for serving a 
subpoena or other legal process to obtain information maintained by the 
FDIC.

[76 FR 35965, June 21, 2011]



Sec. 309.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) The term depository institution, as used in Sec. 309.6, includes 
depository institutions that have applied to the Corporation for federal 
deposit insurance, closed depository institutions, presently operating 
federally insured depository institutions, foreign banks, branches of 
foreign banks, and all affiliates of any of the foregoing.
    (b) The terms Corporation or FDIC mean the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation.
    (c) The words disclose or disclosure, as used in Sec. 309.6, mean to 
give access to a record, whether by producing the written record or by 
oral discussion of its contents. Where the Corporation employee 
authorized to release Corporation documents makes a determination that 
furnishing copies of the documents is necessary, the words disclose or 
disclosure include the furnishing of copies of documents or records. In 
addition, disclose or disclosure as used in Sec. 309.6 is synonymous 
with the term transfer as used in the Right to Financial Privacy Act of 
1978 (12 U.S.C. 3401 et seq.).
    (d) The term examination includes, but is not limited to, formal and 
informal investigations of irregularities involving suspected violations 
of federal or state civil or criminal laws, or unsafe and unsound 
practices as well as such other investigations as may be conducted 
pursuant to law.
    (e) The term record means:
    (1) Any information that would be an agency record subject to the 
requirements of this section when maintained by the FDIC in any format, 
including an electronic format; and
    (2) Any information described under paragraph (e)(1) of this section 
that is maintained for the FDIC by an entity under Government contract, 
for purposes of records management.
    (f) The term report of examination includes, but is not limited to, 
examination reports resulting from examinations of depository 
institutions conducted jointly by Corporation examiners and state 
banking authority examiners or other federal financial institution 
examiners, as well as reports resulting from examinations conducted 
solely by Corporation examiners. The term also includes compliance 
examination reports.
    (g) The term customer financial records, as used in Sec. 309.6, 
means an original of, a copy of, or information known to have been 
derived from, any record held by a depository institution pertaining to 
a customer's relationship with the depository institution but does not 
include any record that contains information not identified with or 
identifiable as being derived from the financial records of a particular 
customer. The term customer as used in Sec. 309.6 refers to individuals 
or partnerships of five or fewer persons.
    (h) The term Director of the Division having primary authority 
includes Deputies to the Chairman and directors of FDIC Divisions and 
Offices that create,

[[Page 143]]

maintain custody, or otherwise have primary responsibility for the 
handling of FDIC records or information.

[60 FR 61465, Nov. 30, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 16404, Apr. 3, 1998; 81 
FR 83646, Nov. 22, 2016]



Sec. 309.3  Federal Register publication.

    The FDIC publishes the following information in the Federal Register 
for the guidance of the public:
    (a) Descriptions of its central and field organization and the 
established places at which, the officers from whom, and the methods 
whereby, the public may secure information, make submittals or requests, 
or obtain decisions;
    (b) Statements of the general course and method by which its 
functions are channeled and determined, including the nature and 
requirements of all formal and informal procedures available;
    (c) Rules of procedure, descriptions of forms available or the 
places at which forms may be obtained, and instructions as to the scope 
and contents of all papers, reports or examinations;
    (d) Substantive rules of general applicability adopted as authorized 
by law, and statements of general policy or interpretations of general 
applicability formulated and adopted by the FDIC;
    (e) Every amendment, revision or repeal of the foregoing; and
    (f) General notices of proposed rule-making.



Sec. 309.4  Publicly available records.

    (a) Records available on the FDIC's World Wide Web page--(1) 
Discretionary release of documents. The FDIC encourages the public to 
explore the wealth of resources available on the FDIC's World Wide Web 
page, located at: http://www.fdic.gov. The FDIC has elected to publish a 
broad range of materials on its World Wide Web page, including consumer 
guides; financial and statistical information of interest to the banking 
industry; and information concerning the FDIC's responsibilities and 
structure.
    (2) Documents required to be made available for inspection in an 
electronic format. (i) The following types of documents created on or 
after November 1, 1996, and required to be made available for inspection 
in an electronic format, may be found on the FDIC's World Wide Web page 
located at: http://www.fdic.gov:
    (A) Final opinions, including concurring and dissenting opinions, as 
well as final orders and written agreements, made in the adjudication of 
cases;
    (B) Statements of policy and interpretations adopted by the Board of 
Directors that are not published in the Federal Register;
    (C) Administrative staff manuals and instructions to staff that 
affect the public;
    (D) Copies of all records released to any person under Sec. 309.5:
    (1) That, because of the nature of their subject matter, the FDIC 
determines have become or are likely to become the subject of subsequent 
requests for substantially the same records; or
    (2) That have been requested 3 or more times; and
    (E) A general index of the records referred to in paragraph 
(a)(2)(i)(D) of this section.
    (ii) To the extent permitted by law, the FDIC may delete identifying 
details when it makes available or publishes a final opinion, final 
order, statement of policy, interpretation or staff manual or 
instruction. If redaction is necessary, the FDIC will, to the extent 
technically feasible, indicate the amount of material deleted at the 
place in the record where such deletion is made unless that indication 
in and of itself will jeopardize the purpose for the redaction.
    (b) Public Information Center. The FDIC maintains a Public 
Information Center or ``PIC'' that contains Corporate records that the 
Freedom of Information Act requires be made available for regular 
inspection and copying, as well as any records or information the FDIC, 
in its discretion, has regularly made available, to the public. The PIC 
has extensive materials of interest to the public, including many 
Reports, Summaries and Manuals used or published by the Corporation that 
are made available, by appointment, for inspection and copying. The PIC 
is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, excepting Federal 
holidays. It is located at 3501 North

[[Page 144]]

Fairfax Drive, Room E-1005, Arlington, VA 22226. The PIC may be reached 
during business hours by calling 1(877) 275-3342 or 1-(703) 562-2200.
    (c) Applicable fees. (i) If applicable, fees for furnishing records 
under this section are as set forth in Sec. 309.5(f) except that all 
categories of requesters shall be charged duplication costs.
    (ii) Information on the FDIC's World Wide Web page is available to 
the public without charge. If, however, information available on the 
FDIC's World Wide Web page is provided pursuant to a Freedom of 
Information Act request processed under Sec. 309.5, then fees apply and 
will be assessed pursuant to Sec. 309.5(f).

[63 FR 16404, Apr. 3, 1998, as amended at 76 FR 35965, June 21, 2011; 81 
FR 83646, Nov. 22, 2016]



Sec. 309.5  Procedures for requesting records.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
    (1) Commercial use request means a request from or on behalf of a 
requester who seeks records for a use or purpose that furthers the 
commercial, trade, or profit interests of the requester or the person on 
whose behalf the request is made. In determining whether a request falls 
within this category, the FDIC will determine the use to which a 
requester will put the records requested and seek additional information 
as it deems necessary.
    (2) Direct costs means those expenditures the FDIC actually incurs 
in searching for, duplicating, and, in the case of commercial 
requesters, reviewing records in response to a request for records.
    (3) Duplication means the process of making a copy of a record 
necessary to respond to a request for records or for inspection of 
original records that contain exempt material or that cannot otherwise 
be directly inspected. Such copies can take the form of paper copy, 
microfilm, audiovisual records, or machine readable records (e.g., 
magnetic tape or computer disk).
    (4) Educational institution means a preschool, a public or private 
elementary or secondary school, an institution of undergraduate or 
graduate higher education, an institution of professional education, and 
an institution of vocational education, which operates a program or 
programs of scholarly research.
    (5) Noncommercial scientific institution means an institution that 
is not operated on a commercial basis as that term is defined in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and which is operated solely for the 
purpose of conducting scientific research, the results of which are not 
intended to promote any particular product or industry.
    (6) Representative of the news media means any person or entity that 
gathers information of potential interest to a segment of the public, 
uses its editorial skills to turn the raw materials into a distinct 
work, and distributes that work to an audience. The term news means 
information that is about current events or that would be of current 
interest to the public. Examples of news-media entities are television 
or radio stations broadcasting to the public at large and publishers of 
periodicals (but only if such entities qualify as disseminators of news) 
who make their products available for purchase by or subscription by or 
free distribution to the general public. These examples are not all-
inclusive. Moreover, as methods of news delivery evolve (for example, 
the adoption of the electronic dissemination of newspapers through 
telecommunications services), such alternative media will be considered 
to be news-media entities. A freelance journalist will be regarded as 
working for a news-media entity if the journalist can demonstrate a 
solid basis for expecting publication through that entity, whether or 
not the journalist is actually employed by that entity. A publication 
contract would present a solid basis for such an expectation; the FDIC 
may also consider the past publication record of the requester in making 
this determination.
    (7) Review means the process of examining records located in 
response to a request for records to determine whether any portion of 
any record is permitted to be withheld as exempt information. It 
includes processing any record for disclosure, e.g., doing all that is 
necessary to excise them or otherwise prepare them for release.

[[Page 145]]

    (8) Search includes all time spent looking for material that is 
responsive to a request, including page-by-page or line-by-line 
identification of material within records. Searches may be done manually 
and/or by computer using existing programming.
    (b) Making a request for records. (1) The request shall be submitted 
in writing to the Freedom of Information Act/Privacy Act Group (``FOIA/
PA Group''), Legal Division :
    (i) By completing the online request form located on the FDIC's 
World Wide Web page, found at: http://www.fdic.gov;
    (ii) By facsimile clearly marked Freedom of Information Act Request 
to the FOIA/PA Group: (703) 562-2797; or
    (iii) By sending a letter to: Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 
Attn: FOIA/PA Group, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429.
    (2) The request shall contain the following information:
    (i) The name and address of the requester, an electronic mail 
address, if available, and the telephone number at which the requester 
may be reached during normal business hours;
    (ii) Whether the requester is an educational institution, 
noncommercial scientific institution, or news media representative;
    (iii) A statement agreeing to pay the applicable fees, or a 
statement identifying a maximum fee that is acceptable to the requester, 
or a request for a waiver or reduction of fees that satisfies paragraph 
(f)(1)(x) of this section; and
    (iv) The preferred form and format of any responsive information 
requested, if other than paper copies.
    (3) A request for identifiable records shall reasonably describe the 
records in a way that enables the FDIC's staff to identify and produce 
the records with reasonable effort and without unduly burdening or 
significantly interfering with any of the FDIC's operations.
    (c) Defective requests. The FDIC need not accept or process a 
request that does not reasonably describe the records requested or that 
does not otherwise comply with the requirements of this part. The FDIC 
may return a defective request, specifying the deficiency. The requester 
may submit a corrected request, which will be treated as a new request.
    (d) Processing requests--(1) Receipt of requests. Upon receipt of a 
request that satisfies paragraph (b) of this section, the FOIA/PA Group 
will acknowledge receipt of the request in writing to the requester and 
provide the requester with an individualized tracking number for the 
request. The date of receipt for such request, including one that is 
addressed incorrectly or that is referred by another agency, is the date 
the FOIA/PA Group actually receives the request.
    (2) Multitrack processing. (i) The FDIC provides different levels of 
processing for categories of requests under this part. Requests for 
records that are readily identifiable by the FOIA/PA Group, and that 
have already been cleared for public release may qualify for fast-track 
processing. All other requests shall be handled under normal processing 
procedures, unless expedited processing has been granted pursuant to 
paragraph (d)(3) of this section.
    (ii) The FDIC will make the determination whether a request 
qualifies for fast-track processing. A requester may contact the FOIA/PA 
Group to learn whether a particular request has been assigned to fast-
track processing. If the request has not qualified for fast-track 
processing, the requester will be given an opportunity to refine the 
request in order to qualify for fast-track processing. Changes made to 
requests to obtain faster processing must be in writing.
    (3) Expedited processing. (i) Where a person requesting expedited 
access to records has demonstrated a compelling need for the records, or 
where the FDIC has determined to expedite the response, the FDIC shall 
process the request as soon as practicable. To show a compelling need 
for expedited processing, the requester shall provide a statement 
demonstrating that:
    (A) The failure to obtain the records on an expedited basis could 
reasonably be expected to pose an imminent threat to the life or 
physical safety of an individual; or
    (B) The requester can establish that they are primarily engaged in 
information dissemination as their main professional occupation or 
activity, and

[[Page 146]]

there is urgency to inform the public of the government activity 
involved in the request; and
    (C) The requester's statement must be certified to be true and 
correct to the best of the person's knowledge and belief and explain in 
detail the basis for requesting expedited processing.
    (ii) The formality of the certification required to obtain expedited 
treatment may be waived by the FDIC as a matter of administrative 
discretion.
    (4) A requester seeking expedited processing will be notified 
whether expedited processing has been granted within ten (10) working 
days of the receipt of the request. If the request for expedited 
processing is denied, the requester may file an appeal pursuant to the 
procedures set forth in paragraph (i) of this section, and the FDIC 
shall respond to the appeal within ten (10) working days after receipt 
of the appeal.
    (5) Priority of responses. Consistent with sound administrative 
process the FDIC processes requests in the order they are received in 
the separate processing tracks. However, in the agency's discretion, or 
upon a court order in a matter to which the FDIC is a party, a 
particular request may be processed out of turn.
    (6) Checking status of request. A requester may check on the status 
of a request using the tracking number assigned to the request to obtain 
information about the request including the date on which the FDIC 
originally received the request and an estimated date on which the FDIC 
will complete action on the request. The status of a request may be 
obtained:
    (i) Online at the FDIC's FOIA Service Center, at http://
www.fdic.gov, if the request was submitted electronically using the 
FDIC's online FOIA request form; or
    (ii) By calling the FDIC's FOIA Service Center at (202) 898-7021, if 
the request was submitted by email, facsimile or regular mail.
    (7) Notification. (i) The time for response to requests will be 
twenty (20) working days except:
    (A) In the case of expedited treatment under paragraph (d)(3) of 
this section;
    (B) Where the running of such time is suspended for the calculation 
of a cost estimate for the requester if the FDIC determines that the 
processing of the request may exceed the requester's maximum fee 
provision or if the charges are likely to exceed $250 as provided for in 
paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section;
    (C) Where the running of such time is suspended for the payment of 
fees pursuant to the paragraphs (d)(6)(i)(B) and (f)(1) of this section; 
or
    (D) In unusual circumstances, as defined in 5 U.S.C. 552(a)(6)(B) 
and further described in paragraph (d)(6)(iii) of this section.
    (ii) In unusual circumstances as referred to in paragraph 
(d)(6)(i)(D) of this section, the time limit may be extended for a 
period of:
    (A) Ten (10) working days as provided by written notice to the 
requester, setting forth the reasons for the extension and the date on 
which a determination is expected to be dispatched; or
    (B) Such alternative time period as agreed to by the requester or as 
reasonably determined by the FDIC when the FDIC notifies the requester 
that the request cannot be processed in the specified time limit.
    (iii) Unusual circumstances may arise when:
    (A) The records are in facilities, such as field offices or storage 
centers, that are not located at the FDIC's Washington office;
    (B) The records requested are voluminous or are not in close 
proximity to one another; or
    (C) There is a need to consult with another agency or among two or 
more components of the FDIC having a substantial interest in the 
determination.
    (8) Response to request. In response to a request that satisfies the 
requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, a search shall be 
conducted of records maintained by the FDIC in existence on the date of 
receipt of the request, and a review made of any responsive information 
located. The FDIC shall notify the requester of:
    (i) The FDIC's determination of the request;
    (ii) The reasons for the determination;

[[Page 147]]

    (iii) The right of the requester to seek assistance from the FDIC's 
FOIA Public Liaison; and
    (iv) If the response is a denial of an initial request or if any 
information is withheld, the FDIC will advise the requester in writing:
    (A) If the denial is in part or in whole;
    (B) The name and title of each person responsible for the denial 
(when other than the person signing the notification);
    (C) The exemptions relied on for the denial;
    (D) The right of the requester to appeal the denial to the FDIC's 
General Counsel within 90 calendar days following receipt of the 
notification, as specified in paragraph (i) of this section; and
    (E) The right of the requester to seek dispute resolution services 
from the FDIC's FOIA Public Liaison and/or the Office of Government 
Information Services (OGIS).
    (e) Providing responsive records. (1) Copies of requested records 
shall be sent to the requester by regular U.S. mail to the address 
indicated in the request, unless the requester elects to take delivery 
of the documents at the FDIC or makes other acceptable arrangements, or 
the FDIC deems it appropriate to send the documents by another means.
    (2) The FDIC shall provide a copy of the record in any form or 
format requested if the record is readily reproducible by the FDIC in 
that form or format, but the FDIC need not provide more than one copy of 
any record to a requester.
    (3) By arrangement with the requester, the FDIC may elect to send 
the responsive records electronically if a substantial portion of the 
request is in electronic format. If the information requested is made 
pursuant to the Privacy Act of 1974, 5 U.S.C. 552a, it will not be sent 
by electronic means unless reasonable security measures can be provided.
    (f) Fees--(1) General rules. (i) Persons requesting records of the 
FDIC shall be charged for the direct costs of search, duplication, and 
review as set forth in paragraphs (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section, 
unless such costs are less than the FDIC's cost of processing the 
requester's remittance.
    (ii) Requesters will be charged for search and review costs even if 
responsive records are not located or, if located, are determined to be 
exempt from disclosure.
    (iii) Multiple requests seeking similar or related records from the 
same requester or group of requesters will be aggregated for the 
purposes of this section.
    (iv) If the FDIC determines that the estimated costs of search, 
duplication, or review of requested records will exceed the dollar 
amount specified in the request, or if no dollar amount is specified, 
the FDIC will advise the requester of the estimated costs (if greater 
than the FDIC's cost of processing the requester's remittance). The 
requester must agree in writing to pay the costs of search, duplication, 
and review prior to the FDIC initiating any records search.
    (v) If the FDIC estimates that its search, duplication, and review 
costs will exceed $250.00, the requester must pay an amount equal to 20 
percent of the estimated costs prior to the FDIC initiating any records 
search.
    (vi) The FDIC shall ordinarily collect all applicable fees under the 
final invoice before releasing copies of requested records to the 
requester.
    (vii) The FDIC may require any requester who has previously failed 
to pay the charges under this section within 30 calendar days of mailing 
of the invoice to pay in advance the total estimated costs of search, 
duplication, and review. The FDIC may also require a requester who has 
any charges outstanding in excess of 30 calendar days following mailing 
of the invoice to pay the full amount due, or demonstrate that the fee 
has been paid in full, prior to the FDIC initiating any additional 
records search.
    (viii) The FDIC may begin assessing interest charges on unpaid bills 
on the 31st day following the day on which the invoice was sent. 
Interest will be at the rate prescribed in section 3717 of title 31 of 
the United States Code and will accrue from the date of the invoice.
    (ix) The time limit for the FDIC to respond to a request will not 
begin to

[[Page 148]]

run until the FDIC has received the requester's written agreement under 
paragraph (f)(1)(iv) of this section, and advance payment under 
paragraph (f)(1) (v) or (vii) of this section, or payment of outstanding 
charges under paragraph (f)(1)(vii) or (viii) of this section.
    (x) As part of the initial request, a requester may ask that the 
FDIC waive or reduce fees if disclosure of the records is in the public 
interest because it is likely to contribute significantly to public 
understanding of the operations or activities of the government and is 
not primarily in the commercial interest of the requester. 
Determinations as to a waiver or reduction of fees will be made by the 
FOIA/PA Group, Legal Division (or designee) and the requester will be 
notified in writing of his/her determination. A determination not to 
grant a request for a waiver or reduction of fees under this paragraph 
may be appealed to the FDIC's General Counsel (or designee) pursuant to 
the procedure set forth in paragraph (i) of this section.
    (2) Chargeable fees by category of requester. (i) Commercial use 
requesters shall be charged search, duplication and review costs.
    (ii) Educational institutions, non-commercial scientific 
institutions and news media representatives shall be charged duplication 
costs, except for the first 100 pages.
    (iii) Requesters not described in paragraph (f)(2) (i) or (ii) of 
this section shall be charged the full reasonable direct cost of search 
and duplication, except for the first two hours of search time and first 
100 pages of duplication.
    (3) Fee schedule. The dollar amount of fees which the FDIC may 
charge to records requesters will be established by the Chief Financial 
Officer of the FDIC (or designee). The FDIC may charge fees that recoup 
the full allowable direct costs it incurs. Fees are subject to change as 
costs change.
    (i) Manual searches for records. The FDIC will charge for manual 
searches for records at the basic rate of pay of the employee making the 
search plus 16 percent to cover employee benefit costs. Where a single 
class of personnel (e.g., all clerical, all professional, or all 
executive) is used exclusively, the FDIC, at its discretion, may 
establish and charge an average rate for the range of grades typically 
involved.
    (ii) Computer searches for records. The fee for searches of 
computerized records is the actual direct cost of the search, including 
computer time, computer runs, and the operator's time apportioned to the 
search. The fee for a computer printout is the actual cost. The fees for 
computer supplies are the actual costs. The FDIC may, at its discretion, 
establish and charge a fee for computer searches based upon a reasonable 
FDIC-wide average rate for central processing unit operating costs and 
the operator's basic rate of pay plus 16 percent to cover employee 
benefit costs.
    (iii) Duplication of records. (A) The per-page fee for paper copy 
reproduction of documents is the average FDIC-wide cost based upon the 
reasonable direct costs of making such copies.
    (B) For other methods of reproduction or duplication, the FDIC will 
charge the actual direct costs of reproducing or duplicating the 
documents.
    (iv) Review of records. The FDIC will charge commercial use 
requesters for the review of records at the time of processing the 
initial request to determine whether they are exempt from mandatory 
disclosure at the basic rate of pay of the employee making the search 
plus 16 percent to cover employee benefit costs. Where a single class of 
personnel (e.g., all clerical, all professional, or all executive) is 
used exclusively, the FDIC, at its discretion, may establish and charge 
an average rate for the range of grades typically involved. The FDIC 
will not charge at the administrative appeal level for review of an 
exemption already applied. When records or portions of records are 
withheld in full under an exemption which is subsequently determined not 
to apply, the FDIC may charge for a subsequent review to determine the 
applicability of other exemptions not previously considered.
    (v) Other services. Complying with requests for special services, 
other than a readily produced electronic form or format, is at the 
FDIC's discretion. The FDIC may recover the full costs of providing such 
services to the requester.

[[Page 149]]

    (4) Publication of fee schedule and effective date of changes. (i) 
The fee schedule is made available on the FDIC's World Wide Web page, 
found at http://www.fdic.gov.
    (ii) The fee schedule will be set forth in the ``Notice of Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation Records Fees'' issued in December of each 
year or in such ``Interim Notice of Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation Records Fees'' as may be issued. Copies of such notices may 
be obtained at no charge from the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 
FOIA/PA Group, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC 20429, and are 
available on the FDIC's World Wide Web page as noted in paragraph 
(f)(4)(i) of this section.
    (iii) The fees implemented in the December or Interim Notice will be 
effective 30 days after issuance.
    (5) Use of contractors. The FDIC may contract with independent 
contractors to locate, reproduce, and/or disseminate records; provided, 
however, that the FDIC has determined that the ultimate cost to the 
requester will be no greater than it would be if the FDIC performed 
these tasks itself. In no case will the FDIC contract out 
responsibilities which the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) (5 U.S.C. 
552) provides that the FDIC alone may discharge, such as determining the 
applicability of an exemption or whether to waive or reduce fees.
    (g) Exempt information. A request for records may be denied if the 
requested record contains information which falls into one or more of 
the following categories. \1\ If the requested record contains both 
exempt and nonexempt information, the nonexempt portions which may 
reasonably be segregated from the exempt portions will be released to 
the requester. If redaction is necessary, the FDIC will, to the extent 
technically feasible, indicate the amount of material deleted at the 
place in the record where such deletion is made unless that indication 
in and of itself will jeopardize the purpose for the redaction. The 
categories of exempt records are as follows:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Classification of a record as exempt from disclosure under the 
provisions of this paragraph (g) shall not be construed as authority to 
withhold the record if it is otherwise subject to disclosure under the 
Privacy Act of 1974 (5 U.S.C. 552a) or other federal statute, any 
applicable regulation of FDIC or any other federal agency having 
jurisdiction thereof, or any directive or order of any court of 
competent jurisdiction.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) Records that are specifically authorized under criteria 
established by an Executive Order to be kept secret in the interest of 
national defense or foreign policy and are in fact properly classified 
pursuant to such Executive Order;
    (2) Records related solely to the internal personnel rules and 
practices of the FDIC;
    (3) Records specifically exempted from disclosure by statute, 
provided that such statute:
    (i)(A) Requires that the matters be withheld from the public in such 
a manner as to leave no discretion on the issue; or
    (B) Establishes particular criteria for withholding or refers to 
particular types of matters to be withheld; and
    (ii) if enacted after the date of enactment of the OPEN FOIA Act of 
2009, specifically cites to 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(3);
    (4) Trade secrets and commercial or financial information obtained 
from a person that is privileged or confidential;
    (5) Interagency or intra-agency memoranda or letters that would not 
be available by law to a private party in litigation with the FDIC;
    (6) Personnel, medical, and similar files (including financial 
files) the disclosure of which would constitute a clearly unwarranted 
invasion of personal privacy;
    (7) Records compiled for law enforcement purposes, but only to the 
extent that the production of such law enforcement records:
    (i) Could reasonably be expected to interfere with enforcement 
proceedings;
    (ii) Would deprive a person of a right to a fair trial or an 
impartial adjudication;
    (iii) Could reasonably be expected to constitute an unwarranted 
invasion of personal privacy;
    (iv) Could reasonably be expected to disclose the identity of a 
confidential

[[Page 150]]

source, including a state, local, or foreign agency or authority or any 
private institution which furnished records on a confidential basis;
    (v) Would disclose techniques and procedures for law enforcement 
investigations or prosecutions, or would disclose guidelines for law 
enforcement investigations or prosecutions if such disclosure could 
reasonably be expected to risk circumvention of the law; or
    (vi) Could reasonably be expected to endanger the life or physical 
safety of any individual;
    (8) Records that are contained in or related to examination, 
operating, or condition reports prepared by, on behalf of, or for the 
use of the FDIC or any agency responsible for the regulation or 
supervision of financial institutions; or
    (9) geological and geophysical information and data, including maps, 
concerning wells.
    (h) Dispute resolution. A requester seeking to engage in dispute 
resolution may make a request to the FOIA Public Liaison and/or OGIS by 
following the procedures set forth online in the FDIC's FOIA Service 
Center at http://www.fdic.gov.
    (i) Appeals. (1) Appeals should be addressed to the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, Attn: FOIA/PA Group, FDIC, 550 17th Street, NW., 
Washington, DC 20429.
    (2) A person whose initial request for records under this section, 
or whose request for a waiver of fees under paragraph (f)(1)(x) of this 
section, has been denied, either in part or in whole, has the right to 
appeal the denial to the FDIC's General Counsel (or designee) within 90 
calendar days after receipt of notification of the denial. Appeals of 
denials of initial requests or for a waiver of fees must be in writing 
and include any additional information relevant to consideration of the 
appeal.
    (3) Except in the case of an appeal for expedited treatment under 
paragraph (d)(3) of this section, the FDIC will notify the appellant in 
writing within 20 business days after receipt of the appeal and will 
state:
    (i) Whether it is granted or denied in whole or in part;
    (ii) The name and title of each person responsible for the denial 
(if other than the person signing the notification);
    (iii) The exemptions relied upon for the denial in the case of 
initial requests for records; and
    (iv) The right to judicial review of the denial under the FOIA.
    (4) If a requester is appealing for denial of expedited treatment, 
the FDIC will notify the appellant within 10 business days after receipt 
of the appeal of the FDIC's disposition.
    (5) Complete payment of any outstanding fee invoice will be required 
before an appeal is processed.
    (j) Records of another agency. If a requested record is the property 
of another federal agency or department, and that agency or department, 
either in writing or by regulation, expressly retains ownership of such 
record, upon receipt of a request for the record the FDIC will promptly 
inform the requester of this ownership and immediately shall forward the 
request to the proprietary agency or department either for processing in 
accordance with the latter's regulations or for guidance with respect to 
disposition.

[63 FR 16404, Apr. 3, 1998, as amended at 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002; 76 
FR 35965, June 21, 2011; 76 FR 63818, Oct. 14, 2011; 81 FR 83647, Nov. 
22, 2016]



Sec. 309.6  Disclosure of exempt records.

    (a) Disclosure prohibited. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of 
this section or by 12 CFR part 310, \2\ no person shall disclose or 
permit the disclosure of any exempt records, or information contained 
therein, to any persons other than those officers, directors, employees, 
or agents of the Corporation who have a need for such records in the 
performance of their official duties. In any instance in which any 
person has possession, custody or control of FDIC exempt records or 
information contained therein, all copies of such records shall remain 
the property of the Corporation and under no circumstances shall any 
person, entity or agency disclose or make public in any manner the 
exempt records or information without written

[[Page 151]]

authorization from the Director of the Corporation's Division having 
primary authority over the records or information as provided in this 
section.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ The procedures for disclosing records under the Privacy Act are 
separately set forth in 12 CFR part 310.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Disclosure authorized. Exempt records or information of the 
Corporation may be disclosed only in accordance with the conditions and 
requirements set forth in this paragraph (b). Requests for discretionary 
disclosure of exempt records or information pursuant to this paragraph 
(b) may be submitted directly to the Division having primary authority 
over the exempt records or information or to the FOIA/PA Group for 
forwarding to the appropriate Division having primary authority over the 
records sought. Such administrative request must clearly state that it 
seeks discretionary disclosure of exempt records, clearly identify the 
records sought, provide sufficient information for the Corporation to 
evaluate whether there is good cause for disclosure, and meet all other 
conditions set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (10) of this section. 
Information regarding the appropriate FDIC Division having primary 
authority over a particular record or records may be obtained from the 
FOIA/PA Group. Authority to disclose or authorize disclosure of exempt 
records of the Corporation is delegated as follows:
    (1) Disclosure to depository institutions. The Director of the 
Corporation's Division having primary authority over the exempt records, 
or designee, may disclose to any director or authorized officer, 
employee or agent of any depository institution, information contained 
in, or copies of, exempt records pertaining to that depository 
institution.
    (2) Disclosure to state banking agencies. The Director of the 
Corporation's Division having primary authority over the exempt records, 
or designee, may in his or her discretion and for good cause, disclose 
to any authorized officer or employee of any state banking or securities 
department or agency, copies of any exempt records to the extent the 
records pertain to a state-chartered depository institution supervised 
by the agency or authority, or where the exempt records are requested in 
writing for a legitimate depository institution supervisory or 
regulatory purpose.
    (3) Disclosure to federal financial institutions supervisory 
agencies and certain other agencies. The Director of the Corporation's 
Division having primary authority over the exempt records, or designee, 
may in his or her discretion and for good cause, disclose to any 
authorized officer or employee of any federal financial institution 
supervisory agency including the Comptroller of the Currency, the Board 
of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, Bureau of Consumer Financial 
Protection, the Financial Stability Oversight Council, the Securities 
and Exchange Commission, the National Credit Union Administration, or 
any other agency included in section 1101(7) of the Right to Financial 
Privacy Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3401 et seq.) (RFPA), any exempt records 
for a legitimate depository institution supervisory or regulatory 
purpose. The Director, or designee, may in his or her discretion and for 
good cause, disclose exempt records, including customer financial 
records, to certain other federal agencies as referenced in section 1113 
of the RFPA for the purposes and to the extent permitted therein, or to 
any foreign bank regulatory or supervisory authority as provided, and to 
the extent permitted, by section 206 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 U.S.C. 3109). Finally, the 
Director, or designee, may in his or her discretion and for good cause, 
disclose reports of examination or other confidential supervisory 
information concerning any depository institution or other entity 
examined by the Corporation under authority of Federal law to: Any other 
Federal or State agency or authority with supervisory or regulatory 
authority over the depository institution or other entity; any officer, 
director, or receiver of such depository institution or entity; and any 
other person that the Corporation determines to be appropriate.
    (4) Disclosure to prosecuting or investigatory agencies or 
authorities. (i) Reports of Apparent Crime pertaining to suspected 
violations of law, which may contain customer financial records, may be 
disclosed to federal or state

[[Page 152]]

prosecuting or investigatory authorities without giving notice to the 
customer, as permitted in the relevant exceptions of the RFPA.
    (ii) The Director of the Corporation's Division having primary 
authority over the exempt records, or designee, may disclose to the 
proper federal or state prosecuting or investigatory authorities, or to 
any authorized officer or employee of such authority, copies of exempt 
records pertaining to irregularities discovered in depository 
institutions which are believed to constitute violations of any federal 
or state civil or criminal law, or unsafe or unsound banking practices, 
provided that customer financial records may be disclosed without giving 
notice to the customer, only as permitted by the relevant exceptions of 
the RFPA. Unless such disclosure is initiated by the FDIC, customer 
financial records shall be disclosed only in response to a written 
request which:
    (A) Is signed by an authorized official of the agency making the 
request;
    (B) Identifies the record or records to which access is requested; 
and
    (C) Gives the reasons for the request.
    (iii) When notice to the customer is required to be given under the 
RFPA, the Director of the Corporation's Division having primary 
authority over the exempt records, or designee, may disclose customer 
financial records to any federal or state prosecuting or investigatory 
agency or authority, provided, that:
    (A) The General Counsel, or designee, has determined that disclosure 
is authorized or required by law; or
    (B) Disclosure is pursuant to a written request that indicates the 
information is relevant to a legitimate law enforcement inquiry within 
the jurisdiction of the requesting agency and:
    (1) The Director of the Corporation's Division having primary 
authority over the exempt records, or designee, certifies pursuant to 
section 1112(a) \3\ of the RFPA that the records are believed relevant 
to a legitimate law enforcement inquiry within the jurisdiction of the 
receiving agency; and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ The form of certification generally is as follows. Additional 
information may be added:
    Pursuant to section 1112(a) of the Right to Financial Privacy Act of 
1978 (12 U.S.C. 3412), I, ___ [name and appropriate title] hereby 
certify that the financial records described below were transferred to 
(agency or department) in the belief that they were relevant to a 
legitimate law enforcement inquiry, within the jurisdiction of the 
receiving agency.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) A copy of such certification and the notice required by section 
1112(b) \4\ of the RFPA is sent within fourteen days of the disclosure 
to the customer whose records are disclosed. \5\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ The form of notice generally is as follows. Additional 
information may be added:
    Dear Mr./Ms. ___:
    Copies of, or information contained in, your financial records 
lawfully in the possession of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
have been furnished to (agency or department) pursuant to the Right to 
Financial Privacy Act of 1978 for the following purpose: ___. If you 
believe that this transfer has not been made to further a legitimate law 
enforcement inquiry, you may have legal rights under the Right to 
Financial Privacy Act of 1978 or the Privacy Act of 1974.
    \5\ Whenever the Corporation is subject to a court-ordered delay of 
the customer notice, the notice shall be sent immediately upon the 
expiration of the court-ordered delay.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (5) Disclosure to servicers and serviced institutions. The Director 
of the Corporation's Division having primary authority over the exempt 
records, or designee, may disclose copies of any exempt record related 
to a depository institution data center, service corporation, or any 
other data center that provides data processing or related services to 
an insured institution (hereinafter referred to as ``data center'') to:
    (i) The examined data center;
    (ii) Any insured institution that receives data processing or 
related services from the examined data center;
    (iii) Any state agency or authority which exercises general 
supervision over an institution serviced by the examined data center; 
and
    (iv) Any federal financial institution supervisory agency which 
exercises general supervision over an institution serviced by the 
examined data center. The federal supervisory agency may disclose any 
such examination report received from the Corporation to an insured 
institution over which it exercises general supervision and which is 
serviced by the examined data center.

[[Page 153]]

    (6) Disclosure to third parties. (i) Except as otherwise provided in 
paragraphs (c) (1) through (5) of this section, the Director of the 
Corporation's Division having primary authority over the exempt records, 
or designee, may in his or her discretion and for good cause, disclose 
copies of any exempt records to any third party where requested to do so 
in writing. Any such written request shall:
    (A) Specify, with reasonable particularity, the record or records to 
which access is requested; and
    (B) Give the reasons for the request.
    (ii) Either prior to or at the time of any disclosure, the Director 
or designee shall require such terms and conditions as he deems 
necessary to protect the confidential nature of the record, the 
financial integrity of any depository institution to which the record 
relates, and the legitimate privacy interests of any individual named in 
such records.
    (7) Authorization for disclosure by depository institutions or other 
third parties. (i) The Director of the Corporation's Division having 
primary authority over the exempt records, or designee, may, in his or 
her discretion and for good cause, authorize any director, officer, 
employee, or agent of a depository institution to disclose copies of any 
exempt record in his custody to anyone who is not a director, officer or 
employee of the depository institution. Such authorization must be in 
response to a written request from the party seeking the record or from 
management of the depository institution to which the report or record 
pertains. Any such request shall specify, with reasonable particularity, 
the record sought, the party's interest therein, and the party's 
relationship to the depository institution to which the record relates.
    (ii) The Director of the Corporation's Division having primary 
authority over the exempt records, or designee, may, in his or her 
discretion and for good cause, authorize any third party, including a 
federal or state agency, that has received a copy of a Corporation 
exempt record, to disclose such exempt record to another party or 
agency. Such authorization must be in response to a written request from 
the party that has custody of the copy of the exempt record. Any such 
request shall specify the record sought to be disclosed and the reasons 
why disclosure is necessary.
    (iii) Any subsidiary depository institution of a bank holding 
company or a savings and loan holding company may reproduce and furnish 
a copy of any report of examination of the subsidiary depository 
institution to the parent holding company without prior approval of the 
Director of the Division having primary authority over the exempt 
records and any depository institution may reproduce and furnish a copy 
of any report of examination of the disclosing depository institution to 
a majority shareholder if the following conditions are met:
    (A) The parent holding company or shareholder owns in excess of 50% 
of the voting stock of the depository institution or subsidiary 
depository institution;
    (B) The board of directors of the depository institution or 
subsidiary depository institution at least annually by resolution 
authorizes the reproduction and furnishing of reports of examination 
(the resolution shall specifically name the shareholder or parent 
holding company, state the address to which the reports are to be sent, 
and indicate that all reports furnished pursuant to the resolution 
remain the property of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and are 
not to be disclosed or made public in any manner without the prior 
written approval of the Director of the Corporation's Division having 
primary authority over the exempt records as provided in paragraph (b) 
of this section;
    (C) A copy of the resolution authorizing disclosure of the reports 
is sent to the shareholder or parent holding company; and
    (D) The minutes of the board of directors of the depository 
institution or subsidiary depository institution for the meeting 
immediately following disclosure of a report state:
    (1) That disclosure was made;
    (2) The date of the report which was disclosed;
    (3) To whom the report was sent; and
    (4) The date the report was disclosed.

[[Page 154]]

    (iv) With respect to any disclosure that is authorized under this 
paragraph (b)(7), the Director of the Corporation's Division having 
primary authority over the exempt records, or designee, shall only 
permit disclosure of records upon determining that good cause exists. If 
the exempt record contains information derived from depository 
institution customer financial records, disclosure is to be authorized 
only upon the condition that the requesting party and the party 
releasing the records comply with any applicable provision of the RFPA. 
Before authorizing the disclosure, the Director (or designee) may 
require that both the party having custody of a copy of a Corporation 
exempt record and the party seeking access to the record agree to such 
limitations as the Director (or designee) deems necessary to protect the 
confidential nature of the record, the financial integrity of any 
depository institution to which the record relates and the legitimate 
privacy interests of any persons named in such record.
    (8) Disclosure by General Counsel. (i) The Corporation's General 
Counsel, or designee, may disclose or authorize the disclosure of any 
exempt record in response to a valid judicial subpoena, court order, or 
other legal process, and authorize any current or former officer, 
director, employee, agent of the Corporation, or third party, to appear 
and testify regarding an exempt record or any information obtained in 
the performance of such person's official duties, at any administrative 
or judicial hearing or proceeding where such person has been served with 
a valid subpoena, court order, or other legal process requiring him or 
her to testify. The General Counsel shall consider the relevancy of such 
exempt records or testimony to the litigation, and the interests of 
justice, in determining whether to disclose such records or testimony. 
Third parties seeking disclosure of exempt records or testimony in 
litigation to which the FDIC is not a party shall submit a request for 
discretionary disclosure directly to the General Counsel. \6\ Such 
request shall specify the information sought with reasonable 
particularity and shall be accompanied by a statement with supporting 
documentation showing in detail the relevance of such exempt information 
to the litigation, justifying good cause for disclosure, and a 
commitment to be bound by a protective order. Failure to exhaust such 
administrative request prior to service of a subpoena or other legal 
process may, in the General Counsel's discretion, serve as a basis for 
objection to such subpoena or legal process. Customer financial records 
may not be disclosed to any federal agency that is not a federal 
financial supervisory agency pursuant to this paragraph unless notice to 
the customer and certification as required by the RFPA have been given 
except where disclosure is subject to the relevant exceptions set forth 
in the RFPA.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \6\ This administrative requirement does not apply to subpoenas, 
court orders or other legal process issued for records of depository 
institutions held by the FDIC as Receiver or Conservator. Subpoenas, 
court orders or other legal process issued for such records will be 
processed in accordance with State and Federal law, regulations, rules 
and privileges applicable to FDIC as Receiver or Conservator.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The General Counsel, or designee, may in his or her discretion 
and for good cause, disclose or authorize disclosure of any exempt 
record or testimony by a current or former officer, director, employee, 
agent of the Corporation, or third party, sought in connection with any 
civil or criminal hearing, proceeding or investigation without the 
service of a judicial subpoena, or other legal process requiring such 
disclosure or testimony, if he or she determines that the records or 
testimony are relevant to the hearing, proceeding or investigation and 
that disclosure is in the best interests of justice and not otherwise 
prohibited by Federal statute. Customer financial records shall not be 
disclosed to any federal agency pursuant to this paragraph that is not a 
federal financial supervisory agency, unless the records are sought 
under the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure (28 U.S.C. appendix) or the 
Federal Rules of Criminal Procedure (18 U.S.C. appendix) or comparable 
rules of other courts and in connection with litigation to which the 
receiving federal

[[Page 155]]

agency, employee, officer, director, or agent, and the customer are 
parties, or disclosure is otherwise subject to the relevant exceptions 
in the RFPA. Where the General Counsel or designee authorizes a current 
or former officer, director, employee or agent of the Corporation to 
testify or disclose exempt records pursuant to this paragraph (b)(8), he 
or she may, in his or her discretion, limit the authorization to so much 
of the record or testimony as is relevant to the issues at such hearing, 
proceeding or investigation, and he or she shall give authorization only 
upon fulfillment of such conditions as he or she deems necessary and 
practicable to protect the confidential nature of such records or 
testimony.
    (9) Authorization for disclosure by the Chairman of the 
Corporation's Board of Directors. Except where expressly prohibited by 
law, the Chairman of the Corporation's Board of Directors may in his or 
her discretion, authorize the disclosure of any Corporation records. 
Except where disclosure is required by law, the Chairman may direct any 
current or former officer, director, employee or agent of the 
Corporation to refuse to disclose any record or to give testimony if the 
Chairman determines, in his or her discretion, that refusal to permit 
such disclosure is in the public interest.
    (10) Limitations on disclosure. All steps practicable shall be taken 
to protect the confidentiality of exempt records and information. Any 
disclosure permitted by paragraph (b) of this section is discretionary 
and nothing in paragraph (b) of this section shall be construed as 
requiring the disclosure of information. Further, nothing in paragraph 
(b) of this section shall be construed as restricting, in any manner, 
the authority of the Board of Directors, the Chairman of the Board of 
Directors, the Director of the Corporation's Division having primary 
authority over the exempt records, the Corporation's General Counsel, or 
their designees, or any other Corporation Division or Office head, in 
their discretion and in light of the facts and circumstances attendant 
in any given case, to require conditions upon and to limit the form, 
manner, and extent of any disclosure permitted by this section. Wherever 
practicable, disclosure of exempt records shall be made pursuant to a 
protective order and redacted to exclude all irrelevant or non-
responsive exempt information.

[60 FR 61465, Nov. 30, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 16408, Apr. 3, 1998; 67 
FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002; 73 FR 2146, Jan. 14, 2008; 76 FR 35965, June 
21, 2011]



Sec. 309.7  Service of process.

    (a) Service. Any subpoena or other legal process to obtain 
information maintained by the FDIC shall be duly issued by a court 
having jurisdiction over the FDIC, and served upon either the Executive 
Secretary (or designee), FDIC, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 
20429, or the Regional Director or Regional Manager of the FDIC region 
where the legal action from which the subpoena or process was issued is 
pending. A list of the FDIC's regional offices is available from the 
Office of Public Affairs, FDIC, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 
20429 (telephone 202-898-6996). Where the FDIC is named as a party, 
service of process shall be made pursuant to the Federal Rules of Civil 
Procedure, and upon the Executive Secretary (or designee), FDIC, 550 
17th Street NW., Washington, DC 20429, or upon the agent designated to 
receive service of process in the state, territory, or jurisdiction in 
which any insured depository institution is located. Identification of 
the designated agent in the state, territory, or jurisdiction may be 
obtained from the Executive Secretary or from the Office of the General 
Counsel, FDIC, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC 20429. The Executive 
Secretary (or designee), Regional Director or designated agent shall 
immediately forward any subpoena, court order or legal process to the 
General Counsel. The Corporation may require the payment of fees, in 
accordance with the fee schedule referred to in Sec. 309.5(c)(3), prior 
to the release of any records requested pursuant to any subpoena or 
other legal process.
    (b) Notification by person served. If any current or former officer, 
director, employee or agent of the Corporation, or any other person who 
has custody of records belonging to the FDIC, is served with a subpoena, 
court order, or

[[Page 156]]

other process requiring that person's attendance as a witness concerning 
any matter related to official duties, or the production of any exempt 
record of the Corporation, such person shall promptly advise the General 
Counsel of such service, of the testimony and records described in the 
subpoena, and of all relevant facts which may be of assistance to the 
General Counsel in determining whether the individual in question should 
be authorized to testify or the records should be produced. Such person 
should also inform the court or tribunal which issued the process and 
the attorney for the party upon whose application the process was 
issued, if known, of the substance of this section.
    (c) Appearance by person served. Absent the written authorization of 
the Corporation's General Counsel, or designee, to disclose the 
requested information, any current or former officer, director, 
employee, or agent of the Corporation, and any other person having 
custody of records of the Corporation, who is required to respond to a 
subpoena or other legal process, shall attend at the time and place 
therein specified and respectfully decline to produce any such record or 
give any testimony with respect thereto, basing such refusal on this 
section.

[60 FR 61465, Nov. 30, 1995, as amended at 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]



PART 310_PRIVACY ACT REGULATIONS--Table of Contents



Sec.
310.1  Purpose and scope.
310.2  Definitions.
310.3  Procedures for requests pertaining to individual records in a 
          system of records.
310.4  Times, places, and requirements for identification of individuals 
          making requests.
310.5  Disclosure of requested information to individuals.
310.6  Special procedures: Medical records.
310.7  Request for amendment of record.
310.8  Agency review of request for amendment of record.
310.9  Appeal of adverse initial agency determination on access or 
          amendment.
310.10  Disclosure of record to person other than the individual to whom 
          it pertains.
310.11  Fees.
310.12  Penalties.
310.13  Exemptions.

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552a.

    Source: 40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 310.1  Purpose and scope.

    The purpose of this part is to establish regulations implementing 
the Privacy Act of 1974, 5 U.S.C. 552a. These regulations delineate the 
procedures that an individual must follow in exercising his or her 
access or amendment rights under the Privacy Act to records maintained 
by the Corporation in systems of records, including information 
transferred to Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation from the Office of 
Thrift Supervision pursuant to sections 312 and 323 of the Dodd-Frank 
Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, Public Law 111-203.

[76 FR 35965, June 21, 2011]



Sec. 310.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) The term Corporation means the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation;
    (b) The term individual means a natural person who is either a 
citizen of the United States or an alien lawfully admitted for permanent 
residence;
    (c) The term maintain includes maintain, collect, use, disseminate, 
or control;
    (d) The term record means any item, collection or grouping of 
information about an individual that contains his/her name, or the 
identifying number, symbol, or other identifying particular assigned to 
the individual;
    (e) The term system of records means a group of any records under 
the control of the Corporation from which information is retrieved by 
the name of the individual or some identifying number, symbol or other 
identifying particular assigned to the individual;
    (f) The term designated system of records means a system of records 
which has been listed and summarized in the Federal Register pursuant to 
the requirements of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e);
    (g) The term routine use means, with respect to disclosure of a 
record, the use of such record for a purpose which is compatible with 
the purpose for which it was created;
    (h) The terms amend or amendment mean any correction, addition to or 
deletion from a record; and

[[Page 157]]

    (i) The term system manager means the agency official responsible 
for a designated system of records, as denominated in the Federal 
Register publication of ``Systems of Records Maintained by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation.''

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 42 FR 6796, Feb. 4, 1977]



Sec. 310.3  Procedures for requests pertaining to individual records
in a system of records.

    (a) Any present or former employee of the Corporation seeking access 
to, or amendment of, his/her official personnel records maintained by 
the Corporation shall submit his/her request in such manner as is 
prescribed by the United States Office of Personnel Management in part 
297 of its rules and regulations (5 CFR part 297). For access to, or 
amendment of, other government-wide records systems maintained by the 
Corporation, the procedures prescribed in the respective Federal 
Register Privacy Act system notice shall be followed.
    (b) Requests by individuals for access to records pertaining to them 
and maintained within one of the Corporation's designated systems of 
records should be submitted in writing to the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, Attn: FOIA/PA Group, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 
20429. Each such request should contain a reasonable description of the 
records sought, the system or systems in which such record may be 
contained, and any additional identifying information, as specified in 
the Corporation's Federal Register ``Notice of Systems of Records'' for 
that particular system, copies of which are available upon request from 
the FOIA/PA Group.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 42 FR 6796, Feb. 4, 1977; 61 
FR 43419, Aug. 23, 1996; 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002; 76 FR 35965, June 
21, 2011]



Sec. 310.4  Times, places, and requirements for identification
of individuals making requests.

    (a) Individuals may request access to records pertaining to 
themselves by submitting a written request as provided in Sec. 310.3 of 
these regulations, or by appearing in person on weekdays, other than 
official holidays, at the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Attn: 
FOIA/PA Group, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429, between the 
hours of 8:30 a.m. and 5 p.m.
    (b) Individuals appearing in person at the Corporation seeking 
access to or amendment of their records shall present two forms of 
reasonable identification, such as employment identification cards, 
driver's licenses, or other identification cards or documents typically 
used for identification purposes.
    (c) Except for records that must be publicly disclosed pursuant to 
the Freedom of Information Act, 5 U.S.C. 552, where the Corporation 
determines it to be necessary for the individual's protection, a 
certification of a duly commissioned notary public, of any state or 
territory, attesting to the requesting individual's identity, or an 
unsworn declaration subscribed to as true under the penalty of perjury 
under the laws of the United States of America, at the election of the 
individual, may be required before a written request seeking access to 
or amendment of a record will be honored. The Corporation may also 
require that individuals provide minimal identifying data such as full 
name, date and place of birth, or other personal information necessary 
to ensure proper identity before processing requests for records.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 42 FR 6796, Feb. 4, 1977; 61 
FR 43419, Aug. 23, 1996; 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002; 76 FR 35966, June 
21, 2011]



Sec. 310.5  Disclosure of requested information to individuals.

    (a) Except to the extent that Corporation records pertaining to an 
individual:
    (1) Are exempt from disclosure under Secs. 310.6 and 310.13 of this 
part, or
    (2) Were compiled in reasonable anticipation of a civil action or 
proceeding, the Corporation will make such records available upon 
request for purposes of inspection and copying by the individual (after 
proper identity verification as provided in Sec. 310.4) and, upon the 
individual's request and written authorization, by another person of the 
individual's own choosing.

[[Page 158]]

    (b) The FOIA/PA Group will notify, in writing, the individual making 
a request, whenever practicable within ten business days following 
receipt of the request, whether any specified designated system of 
records maintained by the Corporation contains a record pertaining to 
the individual. Where such a record does exist, the FOIA/PA Group also 
will inform the individual of the system manager's decision whether to 
grant or deny the request for access. In the event existing records are 
determined not to be disclosable, the notification will inform the 
individual of the reasons for which disclosure will not be made and will 
provide a description of the individual's right to appeal the denial, as 
more fully set forth in Sec. 310.9. Where access is to be granted, the 
notification will specify the procedures for verifying the individual's 
identity, as set forth in Sec. 310.4.
    (c) Individuals will be granted access to records disclosable under 
this part 310 as soon as is practicable. The FOIA/PA Group will give 
written notification of a reasonable period within which individuals may 
inspect disclosable records pertaining to themselves at the offices of 
the FOIA/PA Group during normal business hours. Alternatively, 
individuals granted access to records under this part may request that 
copies of such records be forwarded to them. Fees for copying such 
records will be assessed as provided in Sec. 310.11.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 42 FR 6796, Feb. 4, 1977; 67 
FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]



Sec. 310.6  Special procedures: Medical records.

    Medical records shall be disclosed on request to the individuals to 
whom they pertain, except, if in the judgment of the Corporation, the 
transmission of the medical information directly to the requesting 
individual could have an adverse effect upon such individual. In the 
event medical information is withheld from a requesting individual due 
to any possible adverse effect such information may have upon the 
individual, the Corporation shall transmit such information to a medical 
doctor named by the requesting individual for release of the patient.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 61 FR 43420, Aug. 23, 1996]



Sec. 310.7  Request for amendment of record.

    The Corporation will maintain all records it uses in making any 
determination about any individual with such accuracy, relevance, 
timeliness and completeness as is reasonably necessary to assure 
fairness to the individual in the determination. An individual may 
request that the Corporation amend any portion of a record pertaining to 
that individual which the Corporation maintains in a designated system 
of records. Such a request should be submitted in writing to the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation, Attn: FOIA/PA Group, 550 17th Street, 
NW., Washington, DC 20429 and should contain the individual's reason for 
requesting the amendment and a description of the record (including the 
name of the appropriate designated system and category thereof) 
sufficient to enable the Corporation to identify the particular record 
or portion thereof with respect to which amendment is sought.

[76 FR 35966, June 21, 2011]



Sec. 310.8  Agency review of request for amendment of record.

    (a) Requests by individuals for the amendment of records will be 
acknowledged by the FOIA/PA Group, and referred to the system manager of 
the system of records in which the record is contained for 
determination, within ten business days following receipt of such 
requests. Promptly thereafter, the FOIA/PA Group will notify the 
individual of the system manager's decision to grant or deny the request 
to amend.
    (b) If the system manager denies a request to amend a record, the 
notification of such denial shall contain the reason for the denial and 
a description of the individual's right to appeal the denial as more 
fully set forth in Sec. 310.9.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 42 FR 6796, Feb. 4, 1977; 67 
FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002; 76 FR 35966, June 21, 2011]



Sec. 310.9  Appeal of adverse initial agency determination on access
or amendment.

    (a) A system manager's denial of an individual's request for access 
to or

[[Page 159]]

amendment of a record pertaining to him/her may be appealed in writing 
to the Corporation's General Counsel (or designee) within 30 business 
days following receipt of notification of the denial. Such an appeal 
should be addressed to the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Attn: 
FOIA/PA Group, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429, and contain 
all the information specified for requests for access in Sec. 310.3 or 
for initial requests to amend in Sec. 310.7, as well as any other 
additional information the individual deems relevant for the 
consideration by the General Counsel (or designee) of the appeal.
    (b) The General Counsel (or designee) will normally make a final 
determination with respect to an appeal made under this part within 30 
business days following receipt by the Office of the Executive Secretary 
of the appeal. The General Counsel (or designee) may, however, extend 
this 30-day time period for good cause. Where such an extension is 
required, the individual making the appeal will be notified of the 
reason for the extension and the expected date upon which a final 
decision will be given.
    (c) If the General Counsel (or designee) affirms the initial denial 
of a request for access or to amend, he or she will inform the 
individual affected of the decision, the reason therefor, and the right 
of judicial review of the decision. In addition, as pertains to a 
request for amendment, the individual may at that point submit to the 
Corporation a concise statement setting forth his or her reasons for 
disagreeing with the Corporation's refusal to amend.
    (d) Any statement of disagreement with the Corporation's refusal to 
amend, filed with the Corporation by an individual pursuant to 
Sec. 310.9(c), will be included in the disclosure of any records under 
the authority of Sec. 310.10(b). The Corporation may in its discretion 
also include a copy of a concise statement of its reasons for not making 
the requested amendment.
    (e) The General Counsel (or designee) may on his or her own motion 
refer an appeal to the Board of Directors for a determination, and the 
Board of Directors on its own motion may consider an appeal.

[52 FR 34290, Sept. 10, 1987, as amended at 61 FR 43420, Aug. 23, 1996; 
67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002; 76 FR 35966, June 21, 2011]



Sec. 310.10  Disclosure of record to person other than the individual
to whom it pertains.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the 
Corporation will not disclose any record contained in a designated 
system of records to any person or agency except with the prior written 
consent of the individual to whom the record pertains.
    (b) The restrictions on disclosure in paragraph (a) of this section 
do not apply to any of the following disclosures:
    (1) To those officers and employees of the Corporation who have a 
need for the record in the performance of their duties;
    (2) Which is required under the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 
552);
    (3) For a routine use listed with respect to a designated system of 
records;
    (4) To the Bureau of the Census for purposes of planning or carrying 
out a census or survey or related activity pursuant to the provisions of 
title 13 U.S.C.;
    (5) To a recipient who has provided the Corporation with advance 
adequate written assurance that the record will be used solely as a 
statistical research or reporting record, and the record is to be 
transferred in a form that is not individually identifiable;
    (6) To the National Archives and Records Administration as a record 
which has sufficient historical or other value to warrant its continued 
preservation by the United States Government, or for evaluation by the 
Archivist of the United States or his or her designee to determine 
whether the record has such value;
    (7) To another agency or to an instrumentality of any governmental 
jurisdiction within or under the control of the United States for a 
civil or criminal law enforcement activity if the activity is authorized 
by law, and if the head of the agency or instrumentality

[[Page 160]]

has made a written request to the Corporation specifying the particular 
portion desired and the law enforcement activity for which the record is 
sought;
    (8) To a person pursuant to a showing of compelling circumstances 
affecting the health or safety of an individual if, upon such 
disclosure, notification is transmitted to the last known address of 
such individual;
    (9) To either House of Congress, or, to the extent of matter within 
its jurisdiction, any committee or subcommittee thereof, any joint 
committee of Congress or subcommittee of any such joint committee;
    (10) To the Comptroller General, or any of his or her authorized 
representatives, in the course of the performance of the duties of the 
General Accounting Office;
    (11) Pursuant to the order of a court of competent jurisdiction.
    (12) To a consumer reporting agency in accordance with section 
3711(f) of title 31.
    (c) The Corporation will adhere to the following procedures in the 
case of disclosure of any record pursuant to the authority of paragraphs 
(b)(3) through (b)(12) of this section.
    (1) The Corporation will keep a record of the date, nature and 
purpose of each such disclosure, as well as the name and address of the 
person or agency to whom such disclosure is made; and
    (2) The Corporation will retain and, with the exception of 
disclosures made pursuant to paragraph (b)(7) of this section, make 
available to the individual named in the record for the greater of five 
years or the life of the record all material compiled under paragraph 
(d)(1) of this section with respect to disclosure of such record.
    (d) Whenever a record which has been disclosed by the Corporation 
under authority of paragraph (b) of this section is, within a reasonable 
amount of time after such disclosure, either amended by the Corporation 
or the subject of a statement of disagreement, the Corporation will 
transmit such additional information to any person or agency to whom the 
record was disclosed, if such disclosure was subject to the accounting 
requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 61 FR 43420, Aug. 23, 1996]



Sec. 310.11  Fees.

    The Corporation, upon a request for records disclosable pursuant to 
the Privacy Act of 1974 (5 U.S.C. 552a), shall charge a fee of $0.10 per 
page for duplicating, except as follows:
    (a) If the Corporation determines that it can grant access to a 
record only by providing a copy of the record, no fee will be charged 
for providing the first copy of the record or any portion thereof;
    (b) Whenever the aggregate fees computed under this section do not 
exceed $10 for any one request, the fee will be deemed waived by the 
Corporation; or
    (c) Whenever the Corporation determines that a reduction or waiver 
is warranted, it may reduce or waive any fees imposed for furnishing 
requested information pursuant to this section.

[40 FR 46274, Oct. 6, 1975, as amended at 61 FR 43420, Aug. 23, 1996]



Sec. 310.12  Penalties.

    Subsection (i)(3) of the Privacy Act of 1974 (5 U.S.C. 552a(i)(3)) 
imposes criminal penalties for obtaining Corporation records on 
individuals under false pretenses. The subsection provides as follows:

    Any person who knowingly and willfully requests or obtains any 
record concerning an individual from an agency under false pretenses 
shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and fined not more than $5,000.



Sec. 310.13  Exemptions.

    The following systems of records are exempt from Secs. 310.3 through 
310.9 and Sec. 310.10(c)(2) of these rules:
    (a) Investigatory material compiled for law enforcement purposes in 
the following systems of records is exempt from Secs. 310.3 through 
310.9 and Sec. 310.10(c)(2) of these rules;

    Provided, however, That if any individual is denied any right, 
privilege, or benefit to which he/she would otherwise be entitled under 
Federal law, or for which he/she would otherwise be eligible, as a 
result of the maintenance of such material, such material shall

[[Page 161]]

be disclosed to such individual, except to the extent that the 
disclosure of such material would reveal the identity of a source who 
furnished information to the Government under an express promise that 
the identity of the source would be held in confidence, or, prior to 
September 27, 1975, under an implied promise that the identity of the 
source would be held in confidence:

    30-64-0002--Financial institutions investigative and enforcement 
records system.
    30-64-0010--Investigative files and records.

    (b) Investigatory material compiled solely for the purpose of 
determining suitability, eligibility, or qualifications for Corporation 
employment to the extent that disclosure of such material would reveal 
the identity of a source who furnished information to the Corporation 
under an express promise that the identity of the source would be held 
in confidence, or, prior to September 27, 1975, under an implied promise 
that the identity of the source would be held in confidence, in the 
following systems of records, is exempt from Secs. 310.3 through 310.9 
and Sec. 310.10(c)(2) of these rules:

    30-64-0001--Attorney-legal intern applicant system.
    30-64-0010--Investigative files and records.

    (c) Testing or examination material used solely to determine or 
assess individual qualifications for appointment or promotion in the 
Corporation's service, the disclosure of which would compromise the 
objectivity or fairness of the testing, evaluation, or examination 
process in the following system of records, is exempt from Secs. 310.3 
through 310.9 and Sec. 310.10(c)(2) of these rules:

    30-64-0009--Examiner training and education records.

[42 FR 6797, Feb. 4, 1977, as amended at 42 FR 33720, July 1, 1977; 54 
FR 38507, Sept. 19, 1989; 61 FR 43420, Aug. 23, 1996]



PART 311_RULES GOVERNING PUBLIC OBSERVATION OF MEETINGS OF THE 
CORPORATION'S BOARD OF DIRECTORS--Table of Contents



Sec.
311.1  Purpose.
311.2  Definitions.
311.3  Meetings.
311.4  Procedures for announcing meetings.
311.5  Regular procedure for closing meetings.
311.6  Expedited procedure for announcing and closing certain meetings.
311.7  General Counsel certification.
311.8  Transcripts and minutes of meetings.

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552b and 12 U.S.C. 1819.

    Source: 42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 311.1  Purpose.

    This part implements the policy of the ``Government in the Sunshine 
Act'', section 552b of title 5 U.S.C., which is to provide the public 
with as much information as possible regarding the decision making 
process of certain Federal agencies, including the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, while preserving the rights of individuals and 
the ability of the agency to carry out its responsibilities.



Sec. 311.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) Board means Board of Directors of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation and includes any subdivision of the Board authorized to act 
on behalf of the Corporation.
    (b) Meeting means the deliberations (including those conducted by 
conference telephone call, or by any other method) of at least three 
members where such deliberations determine or result in the joint 
conduct or disposition of agency business but does not include:
    (1) Deliberations to determine whether meetings will be open or 
closed or whether information pertaining to closed meetings will be 
withheld;
    (2) Informal background discussions among Board members and staff 
which clarify issues and expose varying views;
    (3) Decision-making by circulating written material to individual 
Board members;
    (4) Sessions with individuals from outside the Corporation where 
Board members listen to a presentation and may elicit additional 
information.
    (c) Member means a member of the Board.
    (d) Open to public observation and open to the public mean that 
individuals may witness the meeting, but not participate in the 
deliberations. The meeting

[[Page 162]]

may be recorded, photographed, or otherwise reproduced if the 
reproduction does not disturb the meeting.
    (e) Public announcement and publicly announce mean making reasonable 
effort under the particular circumstances of each case to fully inform 
the public. This may include posting notice on the Corporation's public 
notice bulletin board maintained in the lobby of its offices located at 
550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429, issuing a press release and 
employing other methods of notification that may be desirable in a 
particular situation.

[42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977, as amended at 42 FR 59494, Nov. 18, 1977; 
54 FR 38965, Sept. 22, 1989; 61 FR 38357, July 24, 1996]



Sec. 311.3  Meetings.

    (a) Open meetings. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this 
section, every portion of every meeting of the Corporation's Board will 
be open to public observation. Board members will not jointly conduct or 
dispose of Corporation business other than in accordance with this part.
    (b) When meetings may be closed and announcements and disclosures 
withheld. Except where the Board finds that the public interest requires 
otherwise, a meeting or portion thereof may be closed, and announcements 
and disclosure pertaining thereto may be withheld when the Board 
determines that such meeting or portion of the meeting or the disclosure 
of such information is likely to:
    (1) Disclose matters that are: (i) Specifically authorized under 
criteria established by an Executive order to be kept secret in the 
interests of national defense or foreign policy and (ii) in fact 
properly classified pursuant to such Executive order;
    (2) Relate solely to the internal personnel rules and practices of 
the Corporation;
    (3) Disclose matters specifically exempted from disclosure by 
statute (other than the Freedom of Information Act, 5 U.S.C. 552): 
Provided, That such statute: (i) Requires that the matters be withheld 
from the public in such a manner as to leave no discretion on the issue, 
or (ii) establishes particular types of matters to be withheld;
    (4) Disclose trade secrets and commercial or financial information 
obtained from a person and privileged or confidential;
    (5) Involve accusing any person of a crime, or formally censuring 
any person;
    (6) Disclose information of a personal nature where disclosure would 
constitute a clearly unwarranted invasion of personal privacy;
    (7) Disclose investigatory records compiled for law enforcement 
purposes, or information which if written would be contained in such 
records, but only to the extent that the production of such records or 
information would: (i) Interfere with enforcement proceedings, (ii) 
deprive a person of a right to a fair trial or an impartial 
adjudication, (iii) constitute an unwarranted invasion of personal 
privacy, (iv) disclose the identity of a confidential source, (v) 
disclose investigative techniques and procedures, or (vi) endanger the 
life or physical safety of law enforcement personnel;
    (8) Disclose information contained in or related to examination, 
operating, or condition reports prepared by, on behalf of, or for the 
use of the Corporation or any other agency responsible for the 
supervision of financial institutions;
    (9) Disclose information the premature disclosure of which would be 
likely to:
    (i)(A) Lead to significant financial speculation in currencies, 
securities, or commodities, or
    (B) Significantly endanger the stability of any financial 
institution; or
    (ii) Significantly frustrate implementation of a proposed 
Corporation action, except that this paragraph (b)(9)(ii) shall not 
apply in any instance where the Corporation has already disclosed to the 
public the content or nature of its proposed action, or where the 
Corporation is required by law to make such disclosure on its own 
initiative prior to taking final action on such proposal; or
    (10) Specifically concern the Corporation's issuance of a subpoena, 
or the Corporation's participation in a civil action or proceeding, an 
action in a foreign court or international tribunal, or an arbitration, 
or the initiation,

[[Page 163]]

conduct, or disposition by the Corporation of a particular case of 
formal agency adjudication pursuant to the procedures in 5 U.S.C. 554 or 
otherwise involving a determination on the record after opportunity for 
a hearing.



Sec. 311.4  Procedures for announcing meetings.

    (a) Scope. Except to the extent that such announcements are exempt 
from disclosure under Sec. 311.3(b), announcements relating to open 
meetings, and meetings closed under the regular closing procedures of 
Sec. 311.5, will be made in the manner set forth in this section.
    (b) Time and content of announcement. The Corporation will make 
public announcement at least seven days before the meeting of the time, 
place, and subject matter of the meeting, whether it is to be open or 
closed to the public, and the name and telephone number of the official 
designated by the Corporation to respond to requests for information 
about the meeting. This announcement will be made unless a majority of 
the Board determines by a recorded vote that Corporation business 
requires that a meeting be called on lesser notice. In such cases, the 
Corporation will make public announcement of the time, place, and 
subject matter of the meeting, and whether it is open or closed to the 
public, at the earliest practicable time, which may be later than the 
commencement of the meeting.
    (c) Changing time or place of meeting. The time or place of a 
meeting may be changed following the public announcement required by 
paragraph (b) of this section only if the Corporation publicly announces 
the change at the earliest practicable time, which may be later than the 
commencement of the meeting.
    (d) Changing subject matter or nature of meeting. The subject matter 
of a meeting, or the determination to open or close a meeting or a 
portion of a meeting, may be changed following the public announcement 
only if:
    (1) A majority of the entire Board determines by recorded vote that 
agency business so requires and that no earlier announcement of the 
change was possible; and,
    (2) The Corporation publicly announces the change and the vote of 
each member upon such change at the earliest practicable time, which may 
be later than the commencement of the meeting.
    (e) Publication of announcements in Federal Register. Immediately 
following each public announcement under this section, such announcement 
will be submitted for publication in the Federal Register by the 
Executive Secretary.

[42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977, as amended at 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]



Sec. 311.5  Regular procedure for closing meetings.

    (a) Scope. Unless Sec. 311.6 is applicable, the procedures for 
closing meetings will be those set forth in this section.
    (b) Procedure. (1) A decision to close a meeting or portion of a 
meeting will be taken only when a majority of the entire Board votes to 
take such action. In deciding whether to close a meeting or portion of a 
meeting, the Board will consider whether the public interest requires an 
open meeting. A separate vote of the Board will be taken with respect to 
each meeting which is proposed to be closed in whole or in part to the 
public. A single vote may be taken with respect to a series of meetings 
which are proposed to be closed in whole or in part to the public, or 
with respect to any information concerning such series of meetings, so 
long as each meeting in the series involves the same particular matters 
and is scheduled to be held no more than thirty days after the initial 
meeting in the series. The vote of each Board member will be recorded 
and no proxies will be allowed.
    (2) Any individual whose interests may be directly affected may 
request that the Corporation close any portion of a meeting for any of 
the reasons referred to in paragraph (b) (5), (6), or (b)(7) of 
Sec. 311.3. Requests should be directed to the Executive Secretary, 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, 
DC 20429. After receiving notice that an individual desires a portion of 
a meeting to be closed, the Board, upon request of

[[Page 164]]

any one of its members, will vote by recorded vote whether to close the 
relevant portion of the meeting. This procedure will apply even if the 
individual's request is made subsequent to the announcement of a 
decision to hold an open meeting.
    (3) The Corporation's General Counsel will make the public 
certification required by Sec. 311.7.
    (4) Within 1 day after any vote taken pursuant to paragraphs (b)(1) 
or (2) of this section, the Corporation will make publicly available a 
written copy of the vote, reflecting the vote of each Board member. 
Except to the extent that such information is exempt from disclosure, if 
a meeting or portion of a meeting is to be closed to the public, the 
Corporation will make publicly available within 1 day after the required 
vote a full written explanation of its action, together with a list of 
all persons expected to attend the meeting and their affiliation.
    (5) The Corporation will publicly announce the time, place, and 
subject matter of the meeting, with determinations as to open and closed 
portions, in the manner and within the time limits prescribed in 
Sec. 311.4.

[42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977; 42 FR 16616, Mar. 29, 1977, as amended at 
42 FR 59494, Nov. 18, 1977; 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]



Sec. 311.6  Expedited procedure for announcing and closing certain
meetings.

    (a) Scope. Since a majority of its meetings may properly be closed 
pursuant to paragraph (b)(4), (8), (9)(i), or (b)(10) of Sec. 311.3, 
subsection (d)(4) of the Government in the Sunshine Act (5 U.S.C. 552b) 
allows the Corporation to use expedited procedures in closing meetings 
under these four subparagraphs. Absent a compelling public interest to 
the contrary, meetings or portions of meetings that can be expected to 
be closed using these procedures include, but are not limited to: 
Administrative enforcement proceedings under section 8 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818); appointment of the Corporation 
as conservator of a depository institution, or as receiver, liquidator 
or liquidating agent of a closed depository institution or a depository 
institution in danger of closing; and certain management and liquidation 
activities pursuant to such appointments; possible financial assistance 
by the Corporation under section 13 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1823); certain depository institution applications including 
applications to establish or move branches, applications to merge, and 
applications for insurance; and investigatory activity under section 
10(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1820(c)). In 
announcing and closing meetings or portions of meetings under this 
section, the following procedures will be observed.
    (b) Announcement. Except to the extent that such information is 
exempt from disclosure under the provisions of Sec. 311.3(b) the 
Corporation will make public announcement of the time, place and subject 
matter of the meeting and of each portion thereof at the earliest 
practicable time. This announcement will be published in the Federal 
Register if publication can be effected at least 1 day prior to the 
scheduled date of the meeting.
    (c) Procedure for closing. (1) The Corporation's General Counsel 
will make the public certification required by Sec. 311.7.
    (2) At the beginning of a meeting or portion of a meeting to be 
closed under this section, a recorded vote of the Board will be taken. 
The Board will determine by its vote whether to proceed with the 
closing. If a majority of the entire Board votes to close, the meeting 
will be closed to public observation. Even though a meeting or portion 
thereof could properly be closed under this section, a majority of the 
entire Board may find that the public interest requires an open session 
and vote, reflecting the vote of each Board member, will be made 
available to the public.

[42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977; 42 FR 16616, Mar. 29, 1977, as amended at 
54 FR 38965, Sept. 22, 1989]



Sec. 311.7  General Counsel certification.

    For every meeting or portion thereof closed under Sec. 311.5 or 
Sec. 311.6, the Corporation's General Counsel will publicly certify 
that, in the opinion of such General Counsel, the meeting may be closed 
to the public and will state

[[Page 165]]

each relevant exemptive provision. In the absence of the General 
Counsel, the next ranking official in the Legal Division may perform the 
certification. If the General Counsel and such next ranking official in 
the Legal Division are both absent, the official in the Legal Division 
who is then next in rank may provide the required certification. A copy 
of this certification, together with a statement from the presiding 
officer of the meeting setting forth the time and place of the meeting, 
and the persons present, will be retained in the Board's permanent 
files.

[42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977, as amended at 61 FR 38357, July 24, 1996]



Sec. 311.8  Transcripts and minutes of meetings.

    (a) When required. The Corporation will maintain a complete 
transcript, identifying each speaker, to record fully the proceedings of 
each meeting or portion of a meeting closed to the public, except that 
in the case of a meeting or portions of a meeting closed to the public 
pursuant to paragraph (b)(8), (9)(i), or (10) of Sec. 311.3, the 
Corporation may, in lieu of a transcript, maintain a set of minutes.
    (b) Content of minutes. If minutes are maintained, they will fully 
and clearly describe all matters discussed and will provide a full and 
accurate summary of any actions taken, and the reasons for taking such 
action. Minutes will also include a description of each of the views 
expressed by each person in attendance on any item and the record of any 
roll call vote, reflecting the vote of each member. All documents 
considered in connection with any action will be identified in the 
minutes.
    (c) Available material. The Corporation will maintain a complete 
verbatim copy of the transcript or minutes of each meeting or portion of 
a meeting closed to the public for a period of at least 2 years after 
the meeting, or until 1 year after the conclusion of any proceeding with 
respect to which the meeting or portion was held, whichever occurs 
later. The Corporation will make promptly available to the public the 
transcript, identifying each speaker, or minutes of items on the agenda 
or testimony of any witness received at the closed meeting except that 
in cases where the Privacy Act of 1974 (5 U.S.C. 552a) does not apply, 
the Corporation may withhold information exempt from disclosure under 
Sec. 311.3(b). For the convenience of members of the public who may be 
unable to attend open meetings of the Board, the Corporation will 
maintain for at least 2 years a set of minutes of each meeting of the 
Board or portion thereof open to public observation.
    (d) Procedures for inspecting or copying available material. (1) An 
individual may inspect materials made available under paragraph (c) of 
this section at the offices of the Executive Secretary, Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429, 
during normal business hours. If the individual desires a copy of such 
material, the Corporation will furnish copies at a cost of 10 cents per 
page. Whenever the Corporation determines that in the public interest a 
reduction or waiver is warranted, it may reduce or waive any fees 
imposed under this section.
    (2) An individual may also submit a written request for transcripts 
or minutes, reasonably identifying the records sought, to the Executive 
Secretary, Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., 
Washington, DC 20429.
    (e) Procedures for obtaining documents identified in minutes. Copies 
of documents identified in minutes or considered by the Board in 
connection with any action identified in the minutes may be made 
available to the public upon request, to the extent permitted by the 
Freedom of Information Act, under the provisions of 12 CFR part 309, 
Disclosure of Information.

[42 FR 14675, Mar. 16, 1977, as amended at 61 FR 38357, July 24, 1996; 
67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]

                           PART 312 [RESERVED]



PART 313_PROCEDURES FOR CORPORATE DEBT COLLECTION--Table of Contents



   Subpart A_Scope, Purpose, Definitions and Delegations of Authority

Sec.
313.1  Scope.
313.2  Purpose.

[[Page 166]]

313.3  Definitions.
313.4  Delegations of authority.
313.5-313.19  [Reserved]

                     Subpart B_Administrative Offset

313.20  Applicability and scope.
313.21  Definitions.
313.22  Collection.
313.23  Offset prior to completion of procedures.
313.24  Omission of procedures.
313.25  Debtor's rights.
313.26  Interest.
313.27  Refunds.
313.28  No requirement for duplicate notice.
313.29  Requests for offset to other federal agencies.
313.30  Requests for offset from other federal agencies.
313.31-313.39  [Reserved]

                         Subpart C_Salary Offset

313.40  Scope.
313.41  Notice requirement where FDIC is creditor agency.
313.42  Procedures to request a hearing.
313.43  Failure to timely submit request for hearing.
313.44  Procedure for hearing.
313.45  Certification of debt by FDIC as creditor agency.
313.46  Notice of salary offset where FDIC is the paying agency.
313.47  Voluntary repayment agreements as alternative to salary offset 
          where the FDIC is the creditor agency.
313.48  Special review of repayment agreement or salary offset due to 
          changed circumstances.
313.49  Coordinating salary offset with other agencies.
313.50  Interest, penalties, and administrative costs.
313.51  Refunds.
313.52  Request from a creditor agency for services of a hearing 
          official.
313.53  Non-waiver of rights by payments.
313.54  Exception to due process procedures.
313.55  Salary adjustments.
313.56-313.79  [Reserved]

                Subpart D_Administrative Wage Garnishment

313.80  Scope and purpose.
313.81  Notice.
313.82  Debtor's rights.
313.83  Form of hearing.
313.84  Effect of timely request.
313.85  Failure to timely request a hearing.
313.86  Hearing official.
313.87  Procedure.
313.88  Format of hearing.
313.89  Date of decision.
313.90  Content of decision.
313.91  Finality of agency action.
313.92  Failure to appear.
313.93  Wage garnishment order.
313.94  Certification by employer.
313.95  Amounts withheld.
313.96  Exclusions from garnishment.
313.97  Financial hardship.
313.98  Ending garnishment.
313.99  Prohibited actions by employer.
313.100  Refunds.
313.101  Right of action.
313.102-313.119  [Reserved]

                       Subpart E_Tax Refund Offset

313.120  Scope.
313.121  Definitions.
313.122  Notification of debt to FMS.
313.123  Certification and referral of debt.
313.124  Pre-offset notice and consideration of evidence.
313.125  No requirement for duplicate notice.
313.126  Referral of past-due, legally enforceable debt.
313.127  Correcting and updating referral.
313.128  Disposition of amounts collected.
313.129-313.139  [Reserved]

      Subpart F_Civil Service Retirement and Disability Fund Offset

313.140  Future benefits.
313.141  Notification to OPM.
313.142  Request for administrative offset.
313.143  Cancellation of deduction.
313.144-313.159  [Reserved]

          Subpart G_Mandatory Centralized Administrative Offset

313.160  Treasury notification.
313.161  Certification of debt.
313.162  Compliance with 31 CFR part 285.
313.163  Notification of debts of 180 days or less.
313.164-313.180  [Reserved]

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819(a); 5 U.S.C. 5514; Pub. L. 104-143; 110 
Stat. 1321 (31 U.S.C. 3701, 3711, 3716).

    Source: 67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



   Subpart A_Scope, Purpose, Definitions and Delegations of Authority



Sec. 313.1  Scope.

    This part establishes FDIC procedures for the collection of certain 
debts owed to the United States.
    (a) This part applies to collections by the FDIC from:
    (1) Federal employees who are indebted to the FDIC;

[[Page 167]]

    (2) Employees of the FDIC who are indebted to other agencies; and
    (3) Other persons, organizations, or entities that are indebted to 
the FDIC, except those excluded in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
    (b) This part does not apply:
    (1) To debts or claims arising under the Internal Revenue Code of 
1986 (Title 26, U.S. Code), the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 301 et 
seq.), or the tariff laws of the United States;
    (2) To a situation to which the Contract Disputes Act (41 U.S.C. 601 
et seq.) applies; or
    (3) In any case where collection of a debt is explicitly provided 
for or prohibited by another statute.
    (c) This part applies only to:
    (1) Debts owed to and payments made by the FDIC acting in its 
corporate capacity, that is, in connection with employee matters such as 
travel-related claims and erroneous overpayments, contracting activities 
involving corporate operations, debts related to requests to the FDIC 
for documents under the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA), or where a 
request for an offset is received by the FDIC from another federal 
agency; and
    (2) Criminal restitution debt owed to the FDIC in either its 
corporate capacity or its receivership capacity.
    (3) With the exception of criminal restitution debt noted in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, this part does not apply to debts owed 
to or payments made by the FDIC in connection with the FDIC's 
liquidation, supervision, enforcement, or insurance responsibilities, 
nor does it limit or affect the FDIC's authority with respect to debts 
and/or claims pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1819(a) and 1820(a).
    (d) Nothing in this part 313 precludes the compromise, suspension, 
or termination of collection actions, where appropriate, under: 
standards implementing the Debt Collection Improvement Act (DCIA) (31 
U.S.C. 3711 et seq.), the Federal Claims Collection Standards (FCCS) (31 
CFR chapter IX and parts 900 through 904); or any other applicable law.

[67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Sec. 313.2  Purpose.

    (a) The purpose of this part is to implement federal statutes and 
regulatory standards authorizing the FDIC to collect debts owed to the 
United States. This part is consistent with the following federal 
statutes and regulations:
    (1) DCIA at 31 U.S.C. 3711 (collection and compromise of claims); 
section 3716 (administrative offset), section 3717 (interest and penalty 
on claims), and section 3718 (contracts for collection services);
    (2) 5 U.S.C. 5514 (salary offset);
    (3) 5 U.S.C. 5584 (waiver of claims for overpayment);
    (4) 31 CFR chapter IX and parts 900 through 904 (Federal Claims 
Collection Standards);
    (5) 5 CFR part 550, subpart K (salary offset);
    (6) 31 U.S.C. 3720D, 31 CFR 285.11 (administrative wage 
garnishment);
    (7) 26 U.S.C. 6402(d), 31 U.S.C. 3720A and 31 CFR 285.2 (tax refund 
offset); and
    (8) 5 CFR 831.1801 through 1808 (U. S. Office of Personnel 
Management (OPM) offset).
    (b) Collectively, these statutes and regulations prescribe the 
manner in which federal agencies should proceed to establish the 
existence and validity of debts owed to the federal government and 
describe the remedies available to agencies to offset valid debts.



Sec. 313.3  Definitions.

    Except where the context clearly indicates otherwise or where the 
term is defined elsewhere in this subpart, the following definitions 
shall apply to this subpart.
    (a) Agency means a department, agency, court, court administrative 
office, or instrumentality in the executive, judicial, or legislative 
branch of government, including government corporations.
    (b) Board means the Board of Directors of the FDIC.
    (c) Centralized administrative offset means the mandatory referral 
to the Secretary of the Treasury by a creditor agency of a past due debt 
which is more than 180 days delinquent, for the purpose of collection 
under the Treasury's centralized offset program.

[[Page 168]]

    (d) Certification means a written statement transmitted from a 
creditor agency to a paying agency for purposes of administrative or 
salary offset, to FMS for offset or to the Secretary of the Treasury for 
centralized administrative offset. The certification confirms the 
existence and amount of the debt and verifies that required procedural 
protections have been afforded the debtor. Where the debtor requests a 
hearing on a claimed debt, the decision by a hearing official or 
administrative law judge constitutes a certification.
    (e) Chairman means the Chairman of the FDIC.
    (f) Compromise means the settlement or forgiveness of a debt under 
31 U.S.C. 3711, in accordance with standards set forth in the FCCS and 
applicable federal law.
    (g) Creditor agency means an agency of the federal government to 
which the debt is owed, or a debt collection center when acting on 
behalf of a creditor agency to collect a debt.
    (h) Debt means an amount owed to the United States from loans 
insured or guaranteed by the United States and all other amounts due the 
United States from fees, leases, rents, royalties, services, sales of 
real or personal property, overpayments, penalties, damages, interest, 
restitution, fines and forfeitures, and all other similar sources. For 
purposes of this part, a debt owed to the FDIC constitutes a debt owed 
to the United States.
    (i) Debt collection center means the Department of the Treasury or 
other government agency or division designated by the Secretary of the 
Treasury with authority to collect debts on behalf of creditor agencies 
in accordance with 31 U.S.C. 3711(g).
    (j) Director means the Director of the Division of Finance (DOF), 
the Director of the Division of Administration (DOA), or the Director of 
the Division of Resolutions and Receiverships (DRR), as applicable, or 
the applicable Director's delegate.
    (k) Disposable pay means that part of current adjusted basic pay, 
special pay, incentive pay, retired pay, retainer pay, and, in the case 
of an employee not entitled to adjusted basic pay, other authorized pay, 
remaining for each pay period after the deduction of any amount required 
by law to be withheld. The FDIC shall allow the following deductions in 
determining the amount of disposable pay that is subject to salary 
offset:
    (1) Federal employment taxes;
    (2) Federal, state, or local income taxes to the extent authorized 
or required by law, but no greater than would be the case if the 
employee claimed all dependents to which he or she is entitled and such 
additional amounts for which the employee presents evidence of a tax 
obligation supporting the additional withholding;
    (3) Medicare deductions;
    (4) Health insurance premiums;
    (5) Normal retirement contributions, including employee 
contributions to the Thrift Savings Plan or the FDIC 401(k) Plan;
    (6) Normal life insurance premiums (e.g., Serviceman's Group Life 
Insurance and ``Basic Life'' Federal Employee's Group Life Insurance 
premiums), not including amounts deducted for supplementary coverage;
    (7) Amounts mandatorily withheld for the United States Soldiers' and 
Airmen's Home;
    (8) Fines and forfeiture ordered by a court-martial or by a 
commanding officer.
    (l) Division of Administration (DOA) means the Division of 
Administration of the FDIC.
    (m) Division of Finance (DOF) means the Division of Finance of the 
FDIC.
    (n) Division of Resolutions and Receiverships (DRR) means the 
Division of Resolutions and Receiverships of the FDIC.
    (o) Federal Claims Collection Standards (FCCS) means standards 
published at 31 CFR chapter IX and parts 900 through 904.
    (p) Garnishment means the process of withholding amounts from the 
disposable pay of a person employed outside the federal government, and 
the paying of those amounts to a creditor in satisfaction of a 
withholding order.
    (q) Hearing official means an administrative law judge or other 
individual authorized to conduct a hearing and issue a final decision in 
response to a debtor's request for hearing. A hearing official may not 
be under the supervision or control of the Chairman or

[[Page 169]]

FDIC Board when the FDIC is the creditor agency.
    (r) Notice of Intent to Offset or Notice of Intent means a written 
notice from a creditor agency to an employee, organization, entity, or 
restitution debtor that claims a debt and informs the debtor that the 
creditor agency intends to collect the debt by administrative offset. 
The notice also informs the debtor of certain procedural rights with 
respect to the claimed debt and offset.
    (s) Notice of Salary Offset means a written notice from a paying 
agency to its employee informing the employee that salary offset to 
collect a debt due to the creditor agency will begin at the next 
officially established pay interval. The paying agency transmits this 
notice to its employee after receiving a certification from the creditor 
agency.
    (t) Paying agency means the agency of the federal government that 
employs the individual who owes a debt to an agency of the federal 
government. The same agency may be both the creditor agency and the 
paying agency.
    (u) Salary offset means an administrative offset to collect a debt 
under 5 U.S.C. 5514 by deduction(s) at one or more officially 
established pay intervals from the current pay account of an employee 
without his or her consent.
    (v) Waiver means the cancellation, remission, forgiveness or non-
recovery of a debt allegedly owed by an employee to an agency, as 
authorized or required by 5 U.S.C. 5584 or any other law.
    (w) Withholding order means any order for withholding or garnishment 
of pay issued by an agency, or judicial or administrative body. For 
purposes of administrative wage garnishment, the terms ``wage 
garnishment order'' and ``garnishment order'' have the same meaning as 
``withholding order.''

[67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Sec. 313.4  Delegations of authority.

    Authority to conduct the following activities to collect debt, other 
than criminal restitution debt, on behalf of the FDIC in its corporate 
capacity is delegated to the Director of DOA or Director of DOF, as 
applicable; and authority to collect criminal restitution debt on behalf 
of the FDIC in either its receivership or corporate capacity is 
delegated to the Director of DRR; or to the applicable Director's 
delegate; to:
    (a) Initiate and carry out the debt collection process on behalf of 
the FDIC, in accordance with the FCCS;
    (b) Accept or reject compromise offers and suspend or terminate 
collection actions to the full extent of the FDIC's legal authority 
under 12 U.S.C. 1819(a) and 1820(a), 31 U.S.C. 3711(a)(2), and any other 
applicable statute or regulation, provided, however, that no such claim 
shall be compromised or collection action terminated, except upon the 
concurrence of the FDIC General Counsel or his or her designee;
    (c) Report to consumer reporting agencies certain data pertaining to 
delinquent debts, where appropriate;
    (d) Use administrative offset procedures, including salary offset, 
to collect debts; and
    (e) Take any other action necessary to promptly and effectively 
collect debts owed to the United States in accordance with the policies 
contained herein and as otherwise provided by law.

[67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Secs. 313.5-313.19  [Reserved]



                     Subpart B_Administrative Offset



Sec. 313.20  Applicability and scope.

    The provisions of this subpart apply to the collection of debts owed 
to the United States arising from transactions with the FDIC. 
Administrative offset is authorized under the DCIA. This subpart is 
consistent with the FCCS on administrative offset issued by the 
Department of Justice.



Sec. 313.21  Definitions.

    (a) Administrative offset means withholding funds payable by the 
United States to, or held by the United States for, a person to satisfy 
a debt.
    (b) Person includes a natural person or persons, profit or nonprofit 
corporation, partnership, association, trust, estate, consortium, or 
other entity which is capable of owing a debt to the United States 
Government except that agencies of the United States, or any

[[Page 170]]

state or local government shall be excluded.



Sec. 313.22  Collection.

    (a) The Director may collect a claim from a person by administrative 
offset of monies payable by the Government only after:
    (1) Providing the debtor with due process required under this part; 
and
    (2) Providing the paying agency with written certification that the 
debtor owes the debt in the amount stated and that the FDIC, as creditor 
agency, has complied with this part.
    (b) Prior to initiating collection by administrative offset, the 
Director should determine that the proposed offset is within the scope 
of this remedy, as set forth in 31 CFR 901.3(a). Administrative offset 
under 31 U.S.C. 3716 may not be used to collect debts more than 10 years 
after the federal government's right to collect the debt first accrued, 
except as otherwise provided by law. In addition, administrative offset 
may not be used when a statute explicitly prohibits its use to collect 
the claim or type of claim involved.
    (c) Unless otherwise provided, debts or payments not subject to 
administrative offset under 31 U.S.C. 3716 may be collected by 
administrative offset under common law, or any other applicable 
statutory authority.



Sec. 313.23  Offset prior to completion of procedures.

    The FDIC may collect a debt by administrative offset prior to the 
completion of the procedures described in Sec. 313.25, if:
    (a) Failure to offset a payment would substantially prejudice the 
FDIC's ability to collect the debt; and
    (b) The time before the payment is to be made does not reasonably 
permit completion of the procedures described in Sec. 313.25. Such prior 
offsetting shall be followed promptly by the completion of the 
procedures described in Sec. 313.25.



Sec. 313.24  Omission of procedures.

    The FDIC shall not be required to follow the procedures described in 
Sec. 313.25 where:
    (a) The offset is in the nature of a recoupment (i.e., the FDIC may 
offset a payment due to the debtor when both the payment due to the 
debtor and the debt owed to the FDIC arose from the same transaction); 
or
    (b) The debt arises under a contract as set forth in Cecile 
Industries, Inc. v. Cheney, 995 F.2d 1052 (Fed. Cir. 1993), which 
provides that procedural protections under administrative offset do not 
supplant or restrict established procedures for contractual offsets 
accommodated by the Contracts Disputes Act; or
    (c) In the case of non-centralized administrative offsets, the FDIC 
first learns of the existence of a debt due when there would be 
insufficient time to afford the debtor due process under these 
procedures before the paying agency makes payment to the debtor; in such 
cases, the Director shall give the debtor notice and an opportunity for 
review as soon as practical and shall refund any money ultimately found 
not to be due to the U.S. Government.



Sec. 313.25  Debtor's rights.

    Unless the procedures described in Sec. 313.23 are used, prior to 
collecting any claim by administrative offset or referring such claim to 
another agency for collection through administrative offset, the 
Director shall provide the debtor with the following:
    (a) Written notification of the nature and amount of the claim, the 
intention of the Director to collect the claim through administrative 
offset, and a statement of the rights of the debtor under this 
paragraph;
    (b) An opportunity to inspect and copy the records of the FDIC with 
respect to the claim, unless such records are exempt from disclosure;
    (c) An opportunity to have the FDIC's determination of indebtedness 
reviewed by the Director:
    (1) Any request by the debtor for such review shall be in writing 
and shall be submitted to the FDIC within 30 calendar days of the date 
of the notice of the offset. The Director may waive the time limit for 
requesting review for good cause shown by the debtor;
    (2) Upon acceptance of a request for review by the debtor, the FDIC 
shall provide the debtor with a reasonable opportunity for an oral 
hearing when the determination turns on an issue of

[[Page 171]]

credibility or veracity, or the Director determines that the question of 
the indebtedness cannot be resolved by review of the documentary 
evidence alone. Unless otherwise required by law, an oral hearing under 
this section is not required to be a formal evidentiary hearing, 
although the Director shall document all significant matters discussed 
at the hearing. In cases where an oral hearing is not required by this 
section, the Director shall make his determination based on a 
documentary hearing consisting of a review of the written record; and
    (d) An opportunity to enter into a written agreement for the 
voluntary repayment of the amount of the claim at the discretion of the 
Director.



Sec. 313.26  Interest.

    Pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 3717, the FDIC shall assess interest, 
penalties and administrative costs on debts owed to the United States. 
The FDIC is authorized to assess interest and related charges on debts 
that are not subject to 31 U.S.C. 3717 to the extent authorized under 
the common law or other applicable statutory authority.



Sec. 313.27  Refunds.

    Amounts recovered by administrative offset but later found not to be 
owed to the Government shall be promptly refunded. Unless required by 
law or contract, such refunds shall not bear interest.



Sec. 313.28  No requirement for duplicate notice.

    Where the Director has previously given a debtor any of the required 
notice and review opportunities with respect to a particular debt, the 
Director is not required to duplicate such notice and review 
opportunities prior to initiating administrative offset.



Sec. 313.29  Requests for offset to other federal agencies.

    The Director may request that a debt owed to the FDIC be 
administratively offset against funds due and payable to a debtor by 
another federal agency. In requesting administrative offset, the FDIC, 
as the creditor agency, will certify in writing to the federal agency 
holding funds payable to the debtor:
    (a) That the debtor owes the debt;
    (b) The amount and basis of the debt; and
    (c) That the FDIC has complied with the requirements of its own 
administrative offset regulations and the applicable provisions of 31 
U.S.C. 3716 with respect to providing the debtor with due process, 
unless otherwise provided.



Sec. 313.30  Requests for offset from other federal agencies.

    Any federal agency may request that funds due and payable to its 
debtor by the FDIC be administratively offset by the FDIC in order to 
collect a debt owed to such agency by the debtor. The FDIC shall 
initiate the requested offset only upon:
    (a) Receipt of written certification from the creditor agency 
stating:
    (1) That the debtor owes the debt;
    (2) The amount and basis of the debt; and
    (3) That the agency has complied with its own administrative offset 
regulations and with the applicable provisions of 31 CFR 901.3, 
including providing any required hearing or review.
    (b) A determination by the creditor agency that collection by offset 
against funds payable by the FDIC would be in the best interest of the 
United States and that such offset would not otherwise be contrary to 
law.



Secs. 313.31-313.39  [Reserved]



                         Subpart C_Salary Offset



Sec. 313.40  Scope.

    These salary offset regulations are issued in compliance with 5 
U.S.C. 5514 and 5 CFR part 550, subpart K, and apply to the collection 
of debts owed by employees of the FDIC or other federal agencies. These 
salary offset procedures do not apply where an employee consents to the 
recovery of a debt from his current pay account. These procedures do not 
apply to debts arising under the Internal Revenue Code, the tariff laws 
of the United States or to any case where collection of a debt by salary 
offset is explicitly provided for or prohibited by another statute 
(e.g., travel advances under 5

[[Page 172]]

U.S.C. 5705 and employee training expenses under 5 U.S.C. 4108). These 
procedures do not preclude an employee from requesting waiver of an 
erroneous payment under 5 U.S.C. 5584, or in any way questioning the 
amount or validity of a debt, in the manner specified by law or these 
agency regulations. This section also does not preclude an employee from 
requesting waiver of the collection of a debt under any other applicable 
statutory authority. When possible, salary offset through centralized 
administrative offset procedures should be attempted before seeking 
salary offset from a paying agency different than the creditor agency.



Sec. 313.41  Notice requirement where FDIC is creditor agency.

    Where the FDIC seeks salary offset under 5 U.S.C. 5514 as the 
creditor agency, the FDIC shall first provide the employee with a 
written Notice of Intent to Offset at least 30 calendar days before 
salary offset is to commence. The Notice of Intent to Offset shall 
include the following information and statements:
    (a) That the Director has determined that a debt is owed to the FDIC 
and intends to collect the debt by means of deduction from the 
employee's current disposable pay account until the debt and all 
accumulated interest is paid in full or otherwise resolved;
    (b) The amount of the debt and the factual basis for the debt;
    (c) A salary offset schedule stating the frequency and amount of 
each deduction, stated as a fixed dollar amount or percentage of 
disposable pay (not to exceed 15%);
    (d) That in lieu of salary offset, the employee may propose a 
voluntary repayment plan to satisfy the debt on terms acceptable to the 
FDIC, which must be documented in writing, signed by the employee and 
the Director or the Director's designee, and documented in the FDIC's 
files;
    (e) The FDIC's policy concerning interest, penalties, and 
administrative costs, and a statement that such assessments must be 
made, unless excused in accordance with the FCCS;
    (f) That the employee has the right to inspect and copy FDIC records 
not exempt from disclosure relating to the debt claimed, or to receive 
copies of such records if the employee or the employee's representative 
is unable personally to inspect the records, due to geographical or 
other constraints:
    (1) That such requests be made in writing, and identify by name and 
address the Director or other designated individual to whom the request 
should be sent; and
    (2) That upon receipt of such a request, the Director or the 
Director's designee shall notify the employee of the time and location 
where the records may be inspected and copied;
    (g) That the employee has a right to request a hearing regarding the 
existence and amount of the debt claimed or the salary offset schedule 
proposed by the FDIC, provided that the employee files a request for 
such a hearing with the FDIC in accordance with Sec. 313.42 that such a 
hearing will be conducted by an impartial official who is an 
administrative law judge or other hearing official not under the 
supervision or control of the Board;
    (h) The procedure and deadline for requesting a hearing, including 
the name, address, and telephone number of the Director or other 
designated individual to whom a request for hearing must be sent;
    (i) That a request for hearing must be received by the FDIC on or 
before the 30th calendar day following receipt of the Notice of Intent, 
and that filing of a request for hearing will stay the collection 
proceedings;
    (j) That the FDIC will initiate salary offset procedures not less 
than 30 days from the date of the employee's receipt of the Notice of 
Intent to Offset, unless the employee files a timely request for a 
hearing;
    (k) That if a hearing is held, the administrative law judge or other 
hearing official will issue a decision at the earliest practical date, 
but not later than 60 days after the filing of the request for the 
hearing, unless the employee requests a delay in the proceedings which 
is granted by the hearing official;
    (l) That any knowingly false or frivolous statements, 
representations, or evidence may subject the employee to:
    (1) Disciplinary procedures appropriate under 5 U.S.C. chapter 75, 5 
CFR

[[Page 173]]

part 752, or any other applicable statutes or regulations;
    (2) Penalties under the False Claims Act, 31 U.S.C. 3729 through 
3731, or under any other applicable statutory authority; or
    (3) Criminal penalties under 18 U.S.C. 286, 287, 1001, and 1002 or 
under any other applicable statutory authority;
    (m) That the employee also has the right to request waiver of 
overpayment pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 5584, and may exercise any other rights 
and remedies available under statutes or regulations governing the 
program for which the collection is being made; and
    (n) That amounts paid on or deducted from debts that are later 
waived or found not to be owed to the United States will be promptly 
refunded to the employee, unless there are applicable contractual or 
statutory provisions to the contrary.



Sec. 313.42  Procedures to request a hearing.

    (a) To request a hearing, an employee must send a written request to 
the Director. The request must be received by the Director within 30 
calendar days after the employee's receipt of the Notice of Intent.
    (b) The request must be signed by the employee and must fully 
identify and explain with reasonable specificity all the facts, 
evidence, and witnesses, if any, that the employee believes support his 
or her position. The request for hearing must state whether the employee 
is requesting an oral or documentary hearing. If an oral hearing is 
requested, the request shall explain why the matter cannot be resolved 
by a review of documentary evidence alone.



Sec. 313.43  Failure to timely submit request for hearing.

    If the Director does not receive an employee's request for hearing 
within the 30-day period set forth in Sec. 313.42(a), the employee shall 
not be entitled to a hearing. However, the Director may accept an 
untimely request for hearing if the employee can show that the delay was 
the result of circumstances beyond his or her control or that he or she 
failed to receive actual notice of the filing deadline.



Sec. 313.44  Procedure for hearing.

    (a) Obtaining the services of a hearing official. When the FDIC is 
the creditor agency and the debtor is an FDIC employee, the FDIC shall 
designate an administrative law judge or contact any agent of another 
agency designated in appendix A to 5 CFR part 581 to arrange for a 
hearing official. When the FDIC is the creditor agency and the debtor is 
not an FDIC employee (i.e., the debtor is employed by another federal 
agency, also known as the paying agency), and the FDIC cannot provide a 
prompt and appropriate hearing before an administrative law judge or a 
hearing official furnished pursuant to a lawful arrangement, the FDIC 
may contact an agent of the paying agency designated in appendix A to 5 
CFR part 581 to arrange for a hearing official. The paying agency must 
cooperate with the FDIC to provide a hearing official, as required by 
the FCCS.
    (b) Notice and format of hearing--(1) Notice. The hearing official 
shall determine whether the hearing shall be oral or documentary and 
shall notify the employee of the form of the hearing. If the hearing 
will be oral, the notice shall set forth the date, time, and location of 
the hearing, which must be held within 30 calendar days after the 
request is received, unless the employee requests that the hearing be 
delayed. If the hearing will be documentary, the employee shall be 
notified to submit evidence and written arguments in support of his or 
her case to the hearing official within 30 calendar days.
    (2) Oral hearing. The hearing official may grant a request for an 
oral hearing if he or she determines that the issues raised by the 
employee cannot be resolved by review of documentary evidence alone 
(e.g., where credibility or veracity are at issue). An oral hearing is 
not required to be an adversarial adjudication, and the hearing official 
is not required to apply rules of evidence. Witnesses who testify in 
oral hearings shall do so under oath or affirmation. Oral hearings may 
take the form of, but are not limited to:
    (i) Informal conferences with the hearing official in which the 
employee and agency representative are given full opportunity to present 
evidence, witnesses, and argument;

[[Page 174]]

    (ii) Informal meetings in which the hearing examiner interviews the 
employee; or
    (iii) Formal written submissions followed by an opportunity for oral 
presentation.
    (3) Documentary hearing. If the hearing official determines that an 
oral hearing is not necessary, he or she shall decide the issues raised 
by the employee based upon a review of the written record.
    (4) Record. The hearing official shall maintain a summary record of 
any hearing conducted under this section.
    (c) Rescheduling of the hearing date. The hearing official shall 
reschedule a hearing if requested to do so by both parties, who shall be 
given reasonable notice of the time and place of this new hearing.
    (d) Failure to appear. In the absence of good cause, an employee who 
fails to appear at a hearing shall be deemed, for the purpose of this 
subpart, to admit the existence and amount of the debt as described in 
the Notice of Intent. If the representative of the creditor agency fails 
to appear, the hearing official shall proceed with the hearing as 
scheduled, and issue a decision based upon the oral testimony presented 
and the documentation submitted by both parties.
    (e) Date of decision. The hearing official shall issue a written 
decision based upon the evidence and information developed at the 
hearing, as soon as practicable after the hearing, but not later than 60 
calendar days after the date on which the request for hearing was 
received by the FDIC, unless the hearing was delayed at the request of 
the employee. In the event of such a delay, the 60-day decision period 
shall be extended by the number of days by which the hearing was 
postponed. The decision of the hearing official shall be final.
    (f) Content of decision. The written decision shall include:
    (1) A summary of the facts concerning the origin, nature, and amount 
of the debt;
    (2) The hearing official's findings, analysis, and conclusions; and
    (3) The terms of the repayment schedule, if applicable.
    (g) Official certification of debt. The hearing official's decision 
shall constitute an official certification regarding the existence and 
amount of the debt for purposes of executing salary offset under 5 
U.S.C. 5514. Where the FDIC is the creditor agency but not the current 
paying agency, the FDIC may make a certification regarding the existence 
and amount of the debt owed to the FDIC, based on the hearing official's 
certification. The FDIC may make this certification to: the Secretary of 
the Treasury so that Treasury may offset the employee's current pay 
account by means of centralized administrative offset (5 CFR 550.1108); 
or to the current paying agency (5 CFR 550.1109). If the hearing 
official determines that a debt may not be collected through salary 
offset but the FDIC as the creditor agency determines that the debt is 
still valid, the FDIC may seek collection of the debt through other 
means, including administrative offset of other federal payments or 
litigation.



Sec. 313.45  Certification of debt by FDIC as creditor agency.

    The Director may also issue a certification of the debt where there 
has not been a hearing, if the employee has admitted the debt, or failed 
to contest the existence and amount of the debt in a timely manner 
(e.g., by failing to request a hearing). The certification shall be in 
writing and shall state:
    (a) The amount and basis of the debt owed by the employee;
    (b) The date the FDIC's right to collect the debt first accrued;
    (c) That the FDIC's debt collection regulations have been approved 
by OPM pursuant to 5 CFR part 550, subpart K;
    (d) If the collection is to be made by lump-sum payment, the amount 
and date such payment will be collected;
    (e) If the collection is to be made in installments through salary 
offset, the number of installments to be collected, the amount of each 
installment, and the date of the first installment, if a date other than 
the next officially established pay period; and
    (f) The date the employee was notified of the debt, the action(s) 
taken

[[Page 175]]

pursuant to the FDIC's regulations, and the dates such actions were 
taken.



Sec. 313.46  Notice of salary offset where FDIC is the paying agency.

    (a) Upon issuance of a proper certification by the Director for 
debts owed to the FDIC, or upon receipt of a proper certification from a 
creditor agency, the Director shall send the employee a written notice 
of salary offset. Such notice shall advise the employee:
    (1) That certification has been issued by the Director or received 
from another creditor agency;
    (2) Of the amount of the debt and of the deductions to be made; and
    (3) Of the initiation of salary offset at the next officially 
established pay interval or as otherwise provided for in the 
certification.
    (b) Where appropriate, the Director shall provide a copy of the 
notice to the creditor agency and advise such agency of the dollar 
amount to be offset and the pay period when the offset will begin.



Sec. 313.47  Voluntary repayment agreements as alternative to salary
offset where the FDIC is the creditor agency.

    (a) In response to a Notice of Intent, an employee may propose to 
voluntarily repay the debt through scheduled voluntary payments, in lieu 
of salary offset. An employee who wishes to repay a debt in this manner 
shall submit to the Director a written agreement proposing a repayment 
schedule. This proposal must be received by the Director within 30 
calendar days after receipt of the Notice of Intent.
    (b) The Director shall notify the employee whether the employee's 
proposed voluntary repayment agreement is acceptable. It is within the 
discretion of the Director whether to accept or reject the debtor's 
proposal, or whether to propose to the debtor a modification of the 
proposed repayment agreement:
    (1) If the Director decides that the proposed repayment agreement is 
unacceptable, he or she shall notify the employee and the employee shall 
have 30 calendar days from the date he or she received notice of the 
decision in which to file a request for a hearing on the proposed 
repayment agreement, as provided in Sec. 313.42; or
    (2) If the Director decides that the proposed repayment agreement is 
acceptable or the debtor agrees to a modification proposed by the 
Director, the agreement shall be put in writing and signed by both the 
employee and the Director.



Sec. 313.48  Special review of repayment agreement or salary offset
due to changed circumstances.

    (a) An employee subject to a voluntary repayment agreement or salary 
offset payable to the FDIC as creditor agency may request a special 
review by the Director of the amount of the salary offset or voluntary 
repayment, based on materially changed circumstances, including, but not 
limited to, catastrophic illness, divorce, death, or disability. A 
request for special review may be made at any time.
    (b) In support of a request for special review, the employee shall 
submit to the Director a detailed statement and supporting documents for 
the employee, his or her spouse, and dependents indicating:
    (1) Income from all sources;
    (2) Assets;
    (3) Liabilities;
    (4) Number of dependents;
    (5) Monthly expenses for food, housing, clothing, and 
transportation;
    (6) Medical expenses; and
    (7) Exceptional expenses, if any.
    (c) The employee shall also file an alternative proposed offset or 
payment schedule and a statement, with supporting documents, showing why 
the current salary offset or payments result in extreme financial 
hardship to the employee.
    (d) The Director shall evaluate the statement and supporting 
documents and determine whether the original salary offset or repayment 
schedule imposes extreme financial hardship on the employee, for 
example, by preventing the employee from meeting essential subsistence 
expenses such as food, housing, clothing, transportation, and medical 
care. The Director shall notify the employee in writing within 30 
calendar days of his or her determination.

[[Page 176]]

    (e) If the special review results in a revised salary offset or 
repayment schedule, the Director shall provide a new certification to 
the paying agency.



Sec. 313.49  Coordinating salary offset with other agencies.

    (a) Responsibility of the FDIC as the creditor agency. Upon 
completion of the procedures established in Sec. 313.40 through 
Sec. 313.45, the Director shall take the following actions:
    (1) Submit a debt claim to the paying agency, containing the 
information described in paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) of this section, 
together with the certification of debt or an installment agreement (or 
other instruction regarding the payment schedule, if applicable).
    (2) If the collection must be made in installments, inform the 
paying agency of the amount or percentage of disposable pay to be 
collected in each installment. The Director may also inform the paying 
agency of the commencement date and number of installments to be paid, 
if a date other than the next officially established pay period is 
required.
    (3) Unless the employee has consented to the salary offset in 
writing or has signed a statement acknowledging receipt of the required 
procedures and the written consent or statement is forwarded to the 
paying agency, the Director must also advise the paying agency of the 
actions the FDIC has taken under 5 U.S.C. 5514 and state the dates such 
action was taken.
    (4) If the employee is in the process of separating from employment, 
the Director shall submit the debt claim to the employee's paying agency 
for collection by lump-sum deduction from the employee's final check. 
The paying agency shall certify the total amount of its collection and 
furnish a copy of the certification to the FDIC and to the employee.
    (5) If the employee is already separated and all payments due from 
his or her former paying agency have been paid, the Director may, unless 
otherwise prohibited, request that money due and payable to the employee 
from the federal government, including payments from the Civil Service 
Retirement and Disability Fund (5 CFR 831.1801), be administratively 
offset to collect the debt.
    (6) In the event an employee transfers to another paying agency, the 
Director shall not repeat the procedures described in Sec. 313.40 
through Sec. 313.45 in order to resume collecting the debt. Instead, the 
FDIC shall review the debt upon receiving the former paying agency's 
notice of the employee's transfer and shall ensure that collection is 
resumed by the new paying agency. The FDIC must submit a properly 
certified claim to the new paying agency before collection can be 
resumed.
    (b) Responsibility of the FDIC as the paying agency--(1) Complete 
claim. When the FDIC receives a properly certified claim from a creditor 
agency, the employee shall be given written notice of the certification, 
the date salary offset will begin, and the amount of the periodic 
deductions. The FDIC shall schedule deductions to begin at the next 
officially established pay interval or as otherwise provided for in the 
certification.
    (2) Incomplete claim. When the FDIC receives an incomplete 
certification of debt from a creditor agency, the FDIC shall return the 
debt claim with notice that procedures under 5 U.S.C. 5514 and 5 CFR 
550.1104 must be followed and that a properly certified debt claim must 
be received before action will be taken to collect from the employee's 
current pay account.
    (3) Review. The FDIC is not authorized to review the merits of the 
creditor agency's determination with respect to the amount or validity 
of the debt certified by the creditor agency.
    (4) Employees who transfer from one paying agency to another agency. 
If, after the creditor agency has submitted the debt claim to the FDIC, 
the employee transfers to a different paying agency before the debt is 
collected in full, the FDIC must certify the total amount collected on 
the debt. One copy of the certification shall be furnished to the 
employee, and one copy shall be sent to the creditor agency along with 
notice of the employee's transfer. If the FDIC is aware that the 
employee is entitled to payments from the Civil Service Retirement and 
Disability Fund, or other similar payments, it must provide written 
notification to the agency

[[Page 177]]

responsible for making such payments that the debtor owes a debt 
(including the amount) and that the requirements set forth herein and in 
the OPM's regulation (5 CFR part 550, subpart K) have been fully met.



Sec. 313.50  Interest, penalties, and administrative costs.

    Where the FDIC is the creditor agency, it shall assess interest, 
penalties, and administrative costs pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 3717 and 31 
CFR parts 900 through 904.



Sec. 313.51  Refunds.

    (a) Where the FDIC is the creditor agency, it shall promptly refund 
any amount deducted under the authority of 5 U.S.C. 5514 when the debt 
is compromised or otherwise found not to be owing to the United States, 
or when an administrative or judicial order directs the FDIC to make a 
refund.
    (b) Unless required by law or contract, such refunds shall not bear 
interest.



Sec. 313.52  Request from a creditor agency for services of a hearing
official.

    (a) The FDIC may provide a hearing official upon request of the 
creditor agency when the debtor is employed by the FDIC and the creditor 
agency cannot provide a prompt and appropriate hearing before a hearing 
official furnished pursuant to another lawful arrangement.
    (b) The FDIC may provide a hearing official upon request of a 
creditor agency when the debtor works for the creditor agency and that 
agency cannot arrange for a hearing official.
    (c) The Director shall arrange for qualified personnel to serve as 
hearing officials.
    (d) Services rendered under paragraph (a) of this section shall be 
provided on a fully reimbursable basis pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1535.



Sec. 313.53  Non-waiver of rights by payments.

    A debtor's payment, whether voluntary or involuntary, of all or any 
portion of a debt being collected pursuant to this section shall not be 
construed as a waiver of any rights that the debtor may have under any 
statute, regulation, or contract except as otherwise provided by law or 
contract.



Sec. 313.54  Exception to due process procedures.

    (a) The procedures set forth in this subpart shall not apply to 
routine intra-agency salary adjustments of pay, including the following:
    (1) Any adjustment to pay arising out of an employee's election of 
coverage or a change in coverage under a federal benefits program 
requiring periodic deductions from pay, if the amount to be recovered 
was accumulated over four pay periods or less;
    (2) A routine adjustment of pay that is made to correct an 
overpayment attributable to clerical or administrative errors or delays 
in processing pay documents, if the overpayment occurred within the four 
pay periods preceding the adjustment and, at the time of such adjustment 
or as soon thereafter as is practical, the individual is provided 
written notice of the nature and amount of the adjustment and the point 
of contact for contesting such adjustment; or
    (3) Any adjustment to collect a debt amount to $50 or less, if, at 
the time of such adjustment, or as soon thereafter as is practical, the 
individual is provided written notice of the nature and amount of the 
adjustment and the point of contact for contesting such adjustment.
    (b) The procedure for notice to the employee and collection of such 
adjustments is set forth in Sec. 313.55.



Sec. 313.55  Salary adjustments.

    Any negative adjustment to pay arising out of an employee's election 
of coverage, or a change in coverage, under a federal benefits program 
requiring periodic deductions from pay shall not be considered 
collection of a ``debt'' for the purposes of this section if the amount 
to be recovered was accumulated over four pay periods or less. In such 
cases, the FDIC shall not apply this subpart C, but will provide a clear 
and concise statement in the employee's earnings statement advising the 
employee of the previous overpayment at the time the adjustment is made.

[[Page 178]]



Secs. 313.56-313.79  [Reserved]



                Subpart D_Administrative Wage Garnishment



Sec. 313.80  Scope and purpose.

    (a) These administrative wage garnishment regulations are issued in 
compliance with 31 U.S.C. 3720D and 31 CFR 285.11(f). The subpart 
provides procedures for the FDIC to collect money from a debtor's 
disposable pay by means of administrative wage garnishment. The receipt 
of payments pursuant to this subpart does not preclude the FDIC from 
pursuing other debt collection remedies, including the offset of federal 
payments. The FDIC may pursue such debt collection remedies separately 
or in conjunction with administrative wage garnishment. This subpart 
does not apply to the collection of delinquent debts from the wages of 
federal employees from their federal employment. Federal pay is subject 
to the federal salary offset procedures set forth in 5 U.S.C. 5514 and 
other applicable laws.



Sec. 313.81  Notice.

    At least 30 days before the initiation of garnishment proceedings, 
the Director will send, by first class mail to the debtor's last known 
address, a written notice informing the debtor of:
    (a) The nature and amount of the debt;
    (b) The FDIC's intention to initiate proceedings to collect the debt 
through deductions from the debtor's pay until the debt and all 
accumulated interest penalties and administrative costs are paid in 
full;
    (c) An explanation of the debtor's rights as set forth in 
Sec. 313.82(c); and
    (d) The time frame within which the debtor may exercise these 
rights. The FDIC shall retain a stamped copy of the notice indicating 
the date the notice was mailed.



Sec. 313.82  Debtor's rights.

    The FDIC shall afford the debtor the opportunity:
    (a) To inspect and copy records related to the debt;
    (b) To enter into a written repayment agreement with the FDIC, under 
terms agreeable to the FDIC; and
    (c) To the extent that a debt owed has not been established by 
judicial or administrative order, to request a hearing concerning the 
existence or amount of the debt or the terms of the repayment schedule. 
With respect to debts established by a judicial or administrative order, 
a debtor may request a hearing concerning the payment or other discharge 
of the debt. The debtor is not entitled to a hearing concerning the 
terms of the proposed repayment schedule if these terms have been 
established by written agreement.



Sec. 313.83  Form of hearing.

    (a) If the debtor submits a timely written request for a hearing as 
provided in Sec. 313.82(c), the FDIC will afford the debtor a hearing, 
which at the FDIC's option may be oral or written. The FDIC will provide 
the debtor with a reasonable opportunity for an oral hearing when the 
Director determines that the issues in dispute cannot be resolved by 
review of the documentary evidence, for example, when the validity of 
the claim turns on the issue of credibility or veracity.
    (b) If the FDIC determines that an oral hearing is appropriate, the 
time and location of the hearing shall be established by the FDIC. An 
oral hearing may, at the debtor's option, be conducted either in person 
or by telephone conference. All travel expenses incurred by the debtor 
in connection with an in-person hearing will be borne by the debtor. All 
telephonic charges incurred during the hearing will be the 
responsibility of the agency.
    (c) In cases when it is determined that an oral hearing is not 
required by this section, the FDIC will accord the debtor a ``paper 
hearing,'' that is, the FDIC will decide the issues in dispute based 
upon a review of the written record.



Sec. 313.84  Effect of timely request.

    If the FDIC receives a debtor's written request for hearing within 
15 business days of the date the FDIC mailed its notice of intent to 
seek garnishment, the FDIC shall not issue a withholding order until the 
debtor has been

[[Page 179]]

provided the requested hearing, and a decision in accordance with 
Sec. 313.88 and Sec. 313.89 has been rendered.



Sec. 313.85  Failure to timely request a hearing.

    If the FDIC receives a debtor's written request for hearing after 15 
business days of the date the FDIC mailed its notice of intent to seek 
garnishment, the FDIC shall provide a hearing to the debtor. However, 
the FDIC will not delay issuance of a withholding order unless it 
determines that the untimely filing of the request was caused by factors 
over which the debtor had no control, or the FDIC receives information 
that the FDIC believes justifies a delay or cancellation of the 
withholding order.



Sec. 313.86  Hearing official.

    A hearing official may be any qualified individual, as determined by 
the FDIC, including an administrative law judge.



Sec. 313.87  Procedure.

    After the debtor requests a hearing, the hearing official shall 
notify the debtor of:
    (a) The date and time of a telephonic hearing;
    (b) The date, time, and location of an in-person oral hearing; or
    (c) The deadline for the submission of evidence for a written 
hearing.



Sec. 313.88  Format of hearing.

    The FDIC will have the burden of proof to establish the existence or 
amount of the debt. Thereafter, if the debtor disputes the existence or 
amount of the debt, the debtor must prove by a preponderance of the 
evidence that no debt exists, or that the amount of the debt is 
incorrect. In addition, the debtor may present evidence that the terms 
of the repayment schedule are unlawful, would cause a financial hardship 
to the debtor, or that collection of the debt may not be pursued due to 
operation of law. The hearing official shall maintain a record of any 
hearing held under this section. Hearings are not required to be formal, 
and evidence may be offered without regard to formal rules of evidence. 
Witnesses who testify in oral hearings shall do so under oath or 
affirmation.



Sec. 313.89  Date of decision.

    The hearing official shall issue a written opinion stating his or 
her decision as soon as practicable, but not later than sixty (60) days 
after the date on which the request for such hearing was received by the 
FDIC. If the FDIC is unable to provide the debtor with a hearing and 
decision within sixty (60) days after the receipt of the request for 
such hearing:
    (a) The FDIC may not issue a withholding order until the hearing is 
held and a decision rendered; or
    (b) If the FDIC had previously issued a withholding order to the 
debtor's employer, the withholding order will be suspended beginning on 
the 61st day after the date the FDIC received the hearing request and 
continuing until a hearing is held and a decision is rendered.



Sec. 313.90  Content of decision.

    The written decision shall include:
    (a) A summary of the facts presented;
    (b) The hearing official's findings, analysis and conclusions; and
    (c) The terms of any repayment schedule, if applicable.



Sec. 313.91  Finality of agency action.

    Unless the FDIC on its own initiative orders review of a decision by 
a hearing official pursuant to 17 CFR 201.431(c), a decision by a 
hearing official shall become the final decision of the FDIC for the 
purpose of judicial review under the Administrative Procedure Act.



Sec. 313.92  Failure to appear.

    In the absence of good cause shown, a debtor who fails to appear at 
a scheduled hearing will be deemed as not having timely filed a request 
for a hearing.



Sec. 313.93  Wage garnishment order.

    (a) Unless the FDIC receives information that it believes justifies 
a delay or cancellation of the withholding order, the FDIC will send by 
first class mail a withholding order to the debtor's employer within 30 
days after the debtor fails to make a timely request for a hearing 
(i.e., within 15 business days after the mailing of the notice of the

[[Page 180]]

FDIC's intent to seek garnishment) or, if a timely request for a hearing 
is made by the debtor, within 30 days after a decision to issue a 
withholding order becomes final.
    (b) The withholding order sent to the employer will be in the form 
prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury, on the FDIC's letterhead, 
and signed by the head of the agency or delegate. The order will contain 
all information necessary for the employer to comply with the 
withholding order, including the debtor's name, address, and social 
security number, as well as instructions for withholding and information 
as to where payments should be sent.
    (c) The FDIC will keep a stamped copy of the order indicating the 
date it was mailed.



Sec. 313.94  Certification by employer.

    Along with the withholding order, the FDIC will send to the employer 
a certification in a form prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. 
The employer shall complete and return the certification to the FDIC 
within the time frame prescribed in the instructions to the form. The 
certification will address matters such as information about the 
debtor's employment status and disposable pay available for withholding.



Sec. 313.95  Amounts withheld.

    (a) Upon receipt of the garnishment order issued under this section, 
the employer shall deduct from all disposable pay paid to the debtor 
during each pay period the amount of garnishment described in paragraphs 
(b) through (d) of this section.
    (b) Subject to the provisions of paragraphs (c) and (d) of this 
section, the amount of garnishment shall be the lesser of:
    (1) The amount indicated on the garnishment order up to 15% of the 
debtor's disposable pay; or
    (2) The amount set forth in 15 U.S.C. 1673(a)(2). The amount set 
forth at 15 U.S.C. 1673(a)(2) is the amount by which the debtor's 
disposable pay exceeds an amount equivalent to thirty times the minimum 
wage. See 29 CFR 870.10.
    (c) When a debtor's pay is subject to withholding orders with 
priority, the following shall apply:
    (1) Unless otherwise provided by federal law, withholding orders 
issued under this section shall be paid in the amounts set forth under 
paragraph (b) of this section and shall have priority over other 
withholding orders which are served later in time. However, withholding 
orders for family support shall have priority over withholding orders 
issued under this section.
    (2) If amounts are being withheld from a debtor's pay pursuant to a 
withholding order served on an employer before a withholding order 
issued pursuant to this section, or if a withholding order for family 
support is served on an employer at any time, the amounts withheld 
pursuant to the withholding order issued under this section shall be the 
lesser of:
    (i) The amount calculated under paragraph (b) of this section; or
    (ii) An amount equal to 25% of the debtor's disposable pay less the 
amount(s) withheld under the withholding order(s) with priority.
    (3) If a debtor owes more than one debt to the FDIC, the FDIC may 
issue multiple withholding orders. The total amount garnished from the 
debtor's pay for such orders will not exceed the amount set forth in 
paragraph (b) of this section.
    (d) An amount greater than that set forth in paragraphs (b) and (c) 
of this section may be withheld upon the written consent of the debtor.
    (e) The employer shall promptly pay to the FDIC all amounts withheld 
in accordance with the withholding order issued pursuant to this 
section.
    (f) An employer shall not be required to vary its normal pay and 
disbursement cycles in order to comply with the withholding order.
    (g) Any assignment or allotment by the employee of the employee's 
earnings shall be void to the extent it interferes with or prohibits 
execution of the withholding order under this section, except for any 
assignment or allotment made pursuant to a family support judgment or 
order.
    (h) The employer shall withhold the appropriate amount from the 
debtor's

[[Page 181]]

wages for each pay period until the employer receives notification from 
the FDIC to discontinue wage withholding. The garnishment order shall 
indicate a reasonable period of time within which the employer is 
required to commence wage withholding.



Sec. 313.96  Exclusions from garnishment.

    The FDIC will not garnish the wages of a debtor it knows has been 
involuntarily separated from employment until the debtor has been re-
employed continuously for at least 12 months. The debtor has the burden 
of informing the FDIC of the circumstances surrounding an involuntary 
separation from employment.



Sec. 313.97  Financial hardship.

    (a) A debtor whose wages are subject to a wage withholding order 
under this section, may, at any time, request a review by the FDIC of 
the amount garnished, based on materially changed circumstances such as 
disability, divorce, or catastrophic illness which result in financial 
hardship.
    (b) A debtor requesting a review under this section shall submit the 
basis for claiming that the current amount of garnishment results in a 
financial hardship to the debtor, along with supporting documentation.
    (c) If a financial hardship is found, the FDIC will downwardly 
adjust, by an amount and for a period of time agreeable to the FDIC, the 
amount garnished to reflect the debtor's financial condition. The FDIC 
will notify the employer of any adjustments to the amounts to be 
withheld.



Sec. 313.98  Ending garnishment.

    (a) Once the FDIC has fully recovered the amounts owed by the 
debtor, including interest, penalties, and administrative costs 
consistent with the FCCS, the FDIC will send the debtor's employer 
notification to discontinue wage withholding.
    (b) At least annually, the FDIC will review its debtors' accounts to 
ensure that garnishment has been terminated for accounts that have been 
paid in full.



Sec. 313.99  Prohibited actions by employer.

    The DCIA prohibits an employer from discharging, refusing to employ, 
or taking disciplinary action against the debtor due to the issuance of 
a withholding order under this subpart.



Sec. 313.100  Refunds.

    (a) If a hearing official determines that a debt is not legally due 
and owing to the United States, the FDIC shall promptly refund any 
amount collected by means of administrative wage garnishment.
    (b) Unless required by federal law or contract, refunds under this 
section shall not bear interest.



Sec. 313.101  Right of action.

    The FDIC may sue any employer for any amount that the employer fails 
to withhold from wages owed and payable to its employee in accordance 
with this subpart. However, a suit will not be filed before the 
termination of the collection action involving a particular debtor, 
unless earlier filing is necessary to avoid expiration of any applicable 
statute of limitations. For purposes of this subpart, ``termination of 
the collection action'' occurs when the agency has terminated collection 
action in accordance with the FCCS (31 CFR 903.1 through 903.5) or other 
applicable standards. In any event, termination of the collection action 
will have been deemed to occur if the FDIC has not received any payments 
to satisfy the debt from the particular debtor whose wages were subject 
to garnishment, in whole or in part, for a period of one (1) year.



Secs. 313.102-313.119  [Reserved]



                       Subpart E_Tax Refund Offset



Sec. 313.120  Scope.

    The provisions of 26 U.S.C. 6402(d) and 31 U.S.C. 3720A authorize 
the Secretary of the Treasury to offset a delinquent debt owed to the 
United States Government from the tax refund due a taxpayer when other 
collection efforts have failed to recover the amount due. In addition, 
the FDIC is authorized to collect debts by means of administrative 
offset under 31 U.S.C. 3716 and, as

[[Page 182]]

part of the debt collection process, to notify the Financial Management 
Service (FMS), a bureau of the Department of the Treasury, of the amount 
of such debt for collection by tax refund offset.



Sec. 313.121  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart E:
    (a) Debt or claim means an amount of money, funds or property which 
has been determined by the FDIC to be due to the United States from any 
person, organization, or entity, except another federal agency.
    (b) Debtor means a person who owes a debt or a claim. The term 
``person'' includes any individual, organization or entity, except 
another federal agency.
    (c) Tax refund offset means withholding or reducing a tax refund 
payment by an amount necessary to satisfy a debt owed by the payee(s) of 
a tax refund payment.
    (d) Tax refund payment means any overpayment of federal taxes to be 
refunded to the person making the overpayment after the Internal Revenue 
Service (IRS) makes the appropriate credits.



Sec. 313.122  Notification of debt to FMS.

    The FDIC shall notify FMS of the amount of any past due, legally 
enforceable non-tax debt owed to it by a person, for the purpose of 
collecting such debt by tax refund offset. Notification and referral to 
FMS of such debts does not preclude FDIC's use of any other debt 
collection procedures, such as wage garnishment, either separately or in 
conjunction with tax refund offset.



Sec. 313.123  Certification and referral of debt.

    When the FDIC refers a past-due, legally enforceable debt to FMS for 
tax refund offset, it will certify to FMS that:
    (a) The debt is past due and legally enforceable in the amount 
submitted to FMS and that the FDIC will ensure that collections are 
properly credited to the debt;
    (b) Except in the case of a judgment debt or as otherwise allowed by 
law, the debt is referred for offset within ten years after the FDIC's 
right of action accrues;
    (c) The FDIC has made reasonable efforts to obtain payment of the 
debt, in that it has:
    (1) Submitted the debt to FMS for collection by administrative 
offset and complied with the provisions of 31 U.S.C. 3716(a) and related 
regulations;
    (2) Notified, or has made a reasonable attempt to notify, the debtor 
that the debt is past-due, and unless repaid within 60 days after the 
date of the notice, will be referred to FMS for tax refund offset;
    (3) Given the debtor at least 60 days to present evidence that all 
or part of the debt is not past-due or legally enforceable, considered 
any evidence presented by the debtor, and determined that the debt is 
past-due and legally enforceable; and
    (4) Provided the debtor with an opportunity to make a written 
agreement to repay the debt; and
    (d) The debt is at least $25.



Sec. 313.124  Pre-offset notice and consideration of evidence.

    (a) For purposes of Sec. 313.123(c)(2), the FDIC has made a 
reasonable effort to notify the debtor if it uses the current address 
information contained in its records related to the debt. The FDIC may, 
but is not required to, obtain address information from the IRS pursuant 
to 26 U.S.C. 6103(m)(2), (4), (5).
    (b) For purposes of Sec. 313.123(c)(3), if evidence presented by a 
debtor is considered by an agent of the FDIC, or other entities or 
persons acting on behalf of the FDIC, the debtor must be accorded at 
least 30 days from the date the agent or other entity or person 
determines that all or part of the debt is past-due and legally 
enforceable to request review by an officer or employee of the FDIC of 
any unresolved dispute. The FDIC must then notify the debtor of its 
decision.



Sec. 313.125  No requirement for duplicate notice.

    Where the director has previously given a debtor any of the required 
notice and review opportunities with respect to a particular debt, the 
Director is not required to duplicate such notice

[[Page 183]]

and review opportunities prior to initiating tax refund offset.

[71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Sec. 313.126  Referral of past-due, legally enforceable debt.

    The FDIC shall submit past-due, legally enforceable debt information 
for tax refund offset to FMS, as prescribed by FMS. For each debt, the 
FDIC will include the following information:
    (a) The name and taxpayer identification number (as defined in 26 
U.S.C. 6109) of the debtor;
    (b) The amount of the past-due and legally enforceable debt;
    (c) The date on which the debt became past-due; and
    (d) The designation of FDIC as the agency referring the debt.

[67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Sec. 313.127  Correcting and updating referral.

    If, after referring a past-due legally enforceable debt to FMS as 
provided in Sec. 313.125, the FDIC determines that an error has been 
made with respect to the information transmitted to FMS, or if the FDIC 
receives a payment or credits a payment to the account of the debtor 
referred to FMS for offset, or if the debt amount is otherwise 
incorrect, the FDIC shall promptly notify FMS and make the appropriate 
correction of the FDIC's records. FDIC will provide certification as 
required under Sec. 313.123 for any increases to amounts owed. In the 
event FMS rejects an FDIC certification for failure to comply with 
Sec. 323.123, the FDIC may resubmit the debt with a corrected 
certification.

[67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Sec. 313.128  Disposition of amounts collected.

    FMS will transmit amounts collected for past-due, legally 
enforceable debts, less fees charged under this section, to the FDIC's 
account. The FDIC will reimburse FMS and the IRS for the cost of 
administering the tax refund offset program. FMS will deduct the fees 
from amounts collected prior to disposition and transmit a portion of 
the fees deducted to reimburse the IRS for its share of the cost of 
administering the tax refund offset program. To the extent allowed by 
law, the FDIC may add the offset fees to the debt.

[67 FR 48527, July 25, 2002. Redesignated at 71 FR 75661, Dec. 18, 2006]



Secs. 313.129-313.139  [Reserved]



      Subpart F_Civil Service Retirement and Disability Fund Offset



Sec. 313.140  Future benefits.

    Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the FDIC may request that a 
debtor's anticipated or future benefit payments under the Civil Service 
Retirement and Disability Fund (Fund) be administratively offset in 
accordance with regulations at 5 CFR 831.1801 through 831.1808.



Sec. 313.141  Notification to OPM.

    When making a request for administrative offset under Sec. 313.140, 
the FDIC shall provide OPM with a written certification that:
    (a) The debtor owes the FDIC a debt, including the amount of the 
debt;
    (b) The FDIC has complied with the applicable statutes, regulations, 
and procedures of OPM; and
    (c) The FDIC has complied with the requirements of 31 CFR parts 900 
through 904, including any required hearing or review.



Sec. 313.142  Request for administrative offset.

    The Director shall request administrative offset under Sec. 313.140, 
as soon as practical after completion of the applicable procedures in 
order to help ensure that offset be initiated prior to expiration of the 
applicable statute of limitations. At such time as the debtor makes a 
claim for payments from the Fund, if at least a year has elapsed since 
the offset request was originally made, the debtor shall be permitted to 
offer a satisfactory repayment plan in lieu of offset upon establishing 
that changed financial circumstances would render the offset unjust.



Sec. 313.143  Cancellation of deduction.

    If the FDIC collects part or all of the debt by other means before 
deductions

[[Page 184]]

are made or completed pursuant to Sec. 313.140, the FDIC shall act 
promptly to modify or terminate its request for such offset.



          Subpart G_Mandatory Centralized Administrative Offset



Sec. 313.160  Treasury notification.

    (a) In accordance with 31 U.S.C. 3716, the FDIC as a creditor agency 
must notify the Secretary of the Treasury of all debts that are 
delinquent (over 180 days past due), as defined in the FCCS, to enable 
the Secretary to seek collection by centralized administrative offset. 
This includes debts the FDIC seeks to recover from the pay account of an 
employee of another agency by means of salary offset.
    (b) For purposes of centralized administrative offset, a claim or 
debt is not delinquent if:
    (1) It is in litigation or foreclosure;
    (2) It will be disposed of under an asset sale program within one 
year after becoming eligible for sale;
    (3) It has been referred to a private collection contractor for 
collection;
    (4) It has been referred to a debt collection center;
    (5) It will be collected under internal offset, if such offset is 
sufficient to collect the claim within three years after the date the 
debt or claim is first delinquent; and
    (6) It is within a specific class of claims or debts which the 
Secretary of the Treasury has determined to be exempt, at the request of 
an agency.



Sec. 313.161  Certification of debt.

    Prior to referring a delinquent debt to the Secretary of the 
Treasury, the Director must have complied with the requirements of 5 
U.S.C. 5514, and 5 CFR part 550, subpart K, governing salary offset, and 
the FDIC regulations. The Director shall certify, in a form acceptable 
to the Secretary, that:
    (a) The debt is past due and legally enforceable; and
    (b) The FDIC has complied with all due process requirements under 31 
U.S.C. 3716 and the FDIC's administrative offset regulations.



Sec. 313.162  Compliance with 31 CFR part 285.

    The Director shall also comply with applicable procedures for 
referring a delinquent debt for purposes of centralized offset which are 
set forth at 31 CFR part 285 and the FCCS.



Sec. 313.163  Notification of debts of 180 days or less.

    The Director, in his discretion, may also notify the Secretary of 
the Treasury of debts that have been delinquent for 180 days or less, 
including debts the FDIC seeks to recover by means of salary offset.



Secs. 313.164-313.180  [Reserved]

[[Page 185]]



        SUBCHAPTER B_REGULATIONS AND STATEMENTS OF GENERAL POLICY





PART 323_APPRAISALS--Table of Contents



                     Subpart A_Appraisals Generally

Sec.
323.1  Authority, purpose, and scope.
323.2  Definitions.
323.3  Appraisals required; transactions requiring a State certified or 
          licensed appraiser.
323.4  Minimum appraisal standards.
323.5  Appraiser independence.
323.6  Professional association membership; competency.
323.7  Enforcement.

       Subpart B_Appraisal Management Company Minimum Requirements

323.8  Authority, purpose, and scope.
323.9  Definitions.
323.10  Appraiser panel--annual size calculation.
323.11  Appraisal management company registration.
323.12  Ownership limitations for State-registered appraisal management 
          companies.
323.13  Requirements for Federally regulated appraisal management 
          companies.
323.14  Information to be presented to the Appraisal Subcommittee by 
          participating States.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1818, 1819 [``Seventh'' and ``Tenth''] and 3331 
et seq.

    Source: 55 FR 33888, Aug. 20, 1990, unless otherwise noted.



                     Subpart A_Appraisals Generally



Sec. 323.1  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued under 12 U.S.C. 1818, 1819 
[``Seventh'' and ``Tenth''] and title XI of the Financial Institutions 
Reform, Recovery, and Enforcement Act of 1989 (``FIRREA'') (Pub. L. 101-
73, 103 Stat. 183, 12 U.S.C. 3331 et seq. (1989)).
    (b) Purpose and scope. (1) title XI provides protection for federal 
financial and public policy interests in real estate related 
transactions by requiring real estate appraisals used in connection with 
federally related transactions to be performed in writing, in accordance 
with uniform standards, by appraisers whose competency has been 
demonstrated and whose professional conduct will be subject to effective 
supervision. This subpart implements the requirements of title XI and 
applies to all federally related transactions entered into by the FDIC 
or by institutions regulated by the FDIC (regulated institutions).
    (2) This subpart: (i) Identifies which real estate-related financial 
transactions require the services of an appraiser;
    (ii) Prescribes which categories of federally related transactions 
shall be appraised by a State certified appraiser and which by a State 
licensed appraiser; and
    (iii) Prescribes minimum standards for the performance of real 
estate appraisals in connection with federally related transactions 
under the jurisdiction of the FDIC.

[55 FR 33888, Aug. 20, 1990, as amended at 80 FR 32684, June 9, 2015]



Sec. 323.2  Definitions.

    (a) Appraisal means a written statement independently and 
impartially prepared by a qualified appraiser setting forth an opinion 
as to the market value of an adequately described property as of a 
specific date(s), supported by the presentation and analysis of relevant 
market information.
    (b) Appraisal Foundation means the Appraisal Foundation established 
on November 30, 1987, as a not-for-profit corporation under the laws of 
Illinois.
    (c) Appraisal Subcommittee means the Appraisal Subcommittee of the 
Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council.
    (d) Business loan means a loan or extension of credit to any 
corporation, general or limited partnership, business trust, joint 
venture, pool, syndicate, sole proprietorship, or other business entity.
    (e) Complex 1-to-4 family residential property appraisal means one 
in which the property to be appraised, the form of ownership, or market 
conditions are atypical.

[[Page 186]]

    (f) Federally related transaction means any real estate-related 
financial transactions entered into after the effective date hereof 
that:
    (1) The FDIC or any regulated institution engages in or contracts 
for; and
    (2) Requires the services of an appraiser.
    (g) Market value means the most probable price which a property 
should bring in a competitive and open market under all conditions 
requisite to a fair sale, the buyer and seller each acting prudently and 
knowledgeably, and assuming the price is not affected by undue stimulus. 
Implicit in this definition is the consummation of a sale as of a 
specified date and the passing of title from seller to buyer under 
conditions whereby:
    (1) Buyer and seller are typically motivated;
    (2) Both parties are well informed or well advised, and acting in 
what they consider their own best interests;
    (3) A reasonable time is allowed for exposure in the open market;
    (4) Payment is made in terms of cash in U.S. dollars or in terms of 
financial arrangements comparable thereto; and
    (5) The price represents the normal consideration for the property 
sold unaffected by special or creative financing or sales concessions 
granted by anyone associated with the sale.
    (h) Real estate or real property means an identified parcel or tract 
of land, with improvements, and includes easements, rights of way, 
undivided or future interests and similar rights in a tract of land, but 
does not include mineral rights, timber rights, growing crops, water 
rights and similar interests severable from the land when the 
transaction does not involve the associated parcel or tract of land.
    (i) Real estate-related financial transaction means any transaction 
involving:
    (1) The sale, lease, purchase, investment in or exchange of real 
property, including interests in property, or the financing thereof; or
    (2) The refinancing of real property or interests in real property; 
or
    (3) The use of real property or interests in property as security 
for a loan or investment, including mortgage-backed securities.
    (j) State certified appraiser means any individual who has satisfied 
the requirements for certification in a State or territory whose 
criteria for certification as a real estate appraiser currently meet the 
minimum criteria for certification issued by the Appraiser 
Qualifications Board of the Appraisal Foundation. No individual shall be 
a State certified appraiser unless such individual has achieved a 
passing grade upon a suitable examination administered by a State or 
territory that is consistent with and equivalent to the Uniform State 
Certification Examination issued or endorsed by the Appraiser 
Qualifications Board. In addition, the Appraisal Subcommittee must not 
have issued a finding that the policies, practices, or procedures of a 
State or territory are inconsistent with title XI of FIRREA. The FDIC 
may, from time to time, impose additional qualification criteria for 
certified appraisers performing appraisals in connection with federally 
related transactions within its jurisdiction.
    (k) State licensed appraiser means any individual who has satisfied 
the requirements for licensing in a State or territory where the 
licensing procedures comply with title XI of FIRREA and where the 
Appraisal Subcommittee has not issued a finding that the policies, 
practices, or procedures of the State or territory are inconsistent with 
title XI. The FDIC may, from time to time, impose additional 
qualification criteria for licensed appraisers performing appraisals in 
connection with federally related transactions within its jurisdiction.
    (l) Tract development means a project of five units or more that is 
constructed or is to be constructed as a single development.
    (m) Transaction value means: (1) For loans or other extensions of 
credit, the amount of the loan or extension of credit;
    (2) For sales, leases, purchases, and investments in or exchanges of 
real property, the market value of the real property interest involved; 
and

[[Page 187]]

    (3) For the pooling of loans or interests in real property for 
resale or purchase, the amount of the loan or market value of the real 
property calculated with respect to each such loan or interest in real 
property.

[55 FR 33888, Aug. 20, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 9049, Mar. 16, 1992; 59 
FR 29501, June 7, 1994]



Sec. 323.3  Appraisals required; transactions requiring a State
certified or licensed appraiser.

    (a) Appraisals required. An appraisal performed by a State certified 
or licensed appraiser is required for all real estate-related financial 
transactions except those in which:
    (1) The transaction value is $250,000 or less;
    (2) A lien on real estate has been taken as collateral in an 
abundance of caution;
    (3) The transaction is not secured by real estate;
    (4) A lien on real estate has been taken for purposes other than the 
real estate's value;
    (5) The transaction is a business loan that:
    (i) Has a transaction value of $1 million or less; and
    (ii) Is not dependent on the sale of, or rental income derived from, 
real estate as the primary source of repayment;
    (6) A lease of real estate is entered into, unless the lease is the 
economic equivalent of a purchase or sale of the leased real estate;
    (7) The transaction involves an existing extension of credit at the 
lending institution, provided that:
    (i) There has been no obvious and material change in market 
conditions or physical aspects of the property that threatens the 
adequacy of the institution's real estate collateral protection after 
the transaction, even with the advancement of new monies; or
    (ii) There is no advancement of new monies, other than funds 
necessary to cover reasonable closing costs;
    (8) The transaction involves the purchase, sale, investment in, 
exchange of, or extension of credit secured by, a loan or interest in a 
loan, pooled loans, or interests in real property, including mortgaged-
backed securities, and each loan or interest in a loan, pooled loan, or 
real property interest met FDIC regulatory requirements for appraisals 
at the time of origination;
    (9) The transaction is wholly or partially insured or guaranteed by 
a United States government agency or United States government sponsored 
agency;
    (10) The transaction either:
    (i) Qualifies for sale to a United States government agency or 
United States government sponsored agency; or
    (ii) Involves a residential real estate transaction in which the 
appraisal conforms to the Federal National Mortgage Association or 
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation appraisal standards applicable to 
that category of real estate;
    (11) The regulated institution is acting in a fiduciary capacity and 
is not required to obtain an appraisal under other law; or
    (12) The FDIC determines that the services of an appraiser are not 
necessary in order to protect Federal financial and public policy 
interests in real estate-related financial transactions or to protect 
the safety and soundness of the institution.
    (b) Evaluations required. For a transaction that does not require 
the services of a State certified or licensed appraiser under paragraph 
(a)(1), (a)(5) or (a)(7) of this section, the institution shall obtain 
an appropriate evaluation of real property collateral that is consistent 
with safe and sound banking practices.
    (c) Appraisals to address safety and soundness concerns. The FDIC 
reserves the right to require an appraisal under this subpart whenever 
the agency believes it is necessary to address safety and soundness 
concerns.
    (d) Transactions requiring a State certified appraiser--(1) All 
transactions of $1,000,000 or more. All federally related transactions 
having a transaction value of $1,000,000 or more shall require an 
appraisal prepared by a State certified appraiser.
    (2) Nonresidential transactions of $250,000 or more. All federally 
related transactions having a transaction value of $250,000 or more, 
other than those involving appraisals of 1-to-4

[[Page 188]]

family residential properties, shall require an appraisal prepared by a 
State certified appraiser.
    (3) Complex residential transactions of $250,000 or more. All 
complex 1-to-4 family residential property appraisals rendered in 
connection with federally related transactions shall require a State 
certified appraiser if the transaction value is $250,000 or more. A 
regulated institution may presume that appraisals of 1-to-4 family 
residential properties are not complex, unless the institution has 
readily available information that a given appraisal will be complex. 
The regulated institution shall be responsible for making the final 
determination of whether the appraisal is complex. If during the course 
of the appraisal a licensed appraiser identifies factors that would 
result in the property, form of ownership, or market conditions being 
considered atypical, then either:
    (i) The regulated institution may ask the licensed appraiser to 
complete the appraisal and have a certified appraiser approve and co-
sign the appraisal; or
    (ii) The institution may engage a certified appraiser to complete 
the appraisal.
    (e) Transactions requiring either a State certified or licensed 
appraiser. All appraisals for federally related transactions not 
requiring the services of a State certified appraiser shall be prepared 
by either a State certified appraiser or a State licensed appraiser.
    (f) Effective date. Regulated institutions are required to use state 
certified or licensed appraisers as set forth in this section no later 
than December 31, 1992, unless otherwise required by law.

[55 FR 33888, Aug. 20, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 9050, Mar. 16, 1992; 59 
FR 29501, June 7, 1994; 80 FR 32684, June 9, 2015]



Sec. 323.4  Minimum appraisal standards.

    For federally related transactions, all appraisals shall, at a 
minimum:
    (a) Conform to generally accepted appraisal standards as evidenced 
by the Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice (USPAP) 
promulgated by the Appraisal Standards Board of the Appraisal 
Foundation, 1029 Vermont Ave., NW., Washington, DC 20005, unless 
principles of safe and sound banking require compliance with stricter 
standards;
    (b) Be written and contain sufficient information and analysis to 
support the institution's decision to engage in the transaction;
    (c) Analyze and report appropriate deductions and discounts for 
proposed construction or renovation, partially leased buildings, non-
market lease terms, and tract developments with unsold units;
    (d) Be based upon the definition of market value as set forth in 
this subpart; and
    (e) Be performed by State licensed or certified appraisers in 
accordance with requirements set forth in this subpart.

[59 FR 29502, June 7, 1994, as amended at 80 FR 32684, June 9, 2015]



Sec. 323.5  Appraiser independence.

    (a) Staff appraisers. If an appraisal is prepared by a staff 
appraiser, that appraiser must be independent of the lending, 
investment, and collection functions and not involved, except as an 
appraiser, in the federally related transaction, and have no direct or 
indirect interest, financial or otherwise, in the property. If the only 
qualified persons available to perform an appraisal are involved in the 
lending, investment, or collection functions of the regulated 
institution, the regulated institution shall take appropriate steps to 
ensure that the appraisers exercise independent judgment and that the 
appraisal is adequate. Such steps include, but are not limited to, 
prohibiting an individual from performing appraisals in connection with 
federally related transactions in which the appraiser is otherwise 
involved and prohibiting directors and officers from participating in 
any vote or approval involving assets on which they performed an 
appraisal.
    (b) Fee appraisers. (1) If an appraisal is prepared by a fee 
appraiser, the appraiser shall be engaged directly by the regulated 
institution or its agent, and have no direct or indirect interest, 
financial or otherwise, in the property or the transaction.
    (2) A regulated institution also may accept an appraisal that was 
prepared by an appraiser engaged directly by another financial services 
institution, if:

[[Page 189]]

    (i) The appraiser has no direct or indirect interest, financial or 
otherwise, in the property or the transaction; and
    (ii) The regulated institution determines that the appraisal 
conforms to the requirements of this subpart and is otherwise 
acceptable.

[55 FR 33888, Aug. 20, 1990, as amended at 59 FR 29502, June 7, 1994; 80 
FR 32684, June 9, 2015]



Sec. 323.6  Professional association membership; competency.

    (a) Membership in appraisal organizations. A State certified 
appraiser or a State licensed appraiser may not be excluded from 
consideration for an assignment for a federally related transaction 
solely by virtue of membership or lack of membership in any particular 
appraisal organization.
    (b) Competency. All staff and fee appraisers performing appraisals 
in connection with federally related transactions must be State 
certified or licensed, as appropriate. However, a State certified or 
licensed appraiser may not be considered competent solely by virtue of 
being certified or licensed. Any determination of competency shall be 
based upon the individual's experience and educational background as 
they relate to the particular appraisal assignment for which he or she 
is being considered.



Sec. 323.7  Enforcement.

    Institutions and institution-affiliated parties, including staff 
appraisers and fee appraisers, may be subject to removal and/or 
prohibition orders, cease and desist orders, and the imposition of civil 
money penalties pursuant to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 
1811 et seq., as amended, or other applicable law.



       Subpart B_Appraisal Management Company Minimum Requirements

    Source: 80 FR 32684, June 9, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 323.8  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued pursuant to12 U.S.C. 1818, 
1819 [``Seventh'' and ``Tenth''] and Title XI of the Financial 
Institutions Reform, Recovery, and Enforcement Act (FIRREA), as amended 
by the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the 
Dodd-Frank Act) (Pub. L. 111-203, 124 Stat. 1376 (2010)), 12 U.S.C. 3331 
et seq.
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of this subpart is to implement sections 
1109, 1117, 1121, and 1124 of FIRREA Title XI, 12 U.S.C. 3338, 3346, 
3350, and 3353.
    (c) Scope. This subpart applies to States and to appraisal 
management companies (AMCs) providing appraisal management services in 
connection with consumer credit transactions secured by a consumer's 
principal dwelling or securitizations of those transactions.
    (d) Rule of construction. Nothing in this subpart should be 
construed to prevent a State from establishing requirements in addition 
to those in this subpart. In addition, nothing in this subpart should be 
construed to alter guidance in, and applicability of, the Interagency 
Appraisal and Evaluation Guidelines \1\ or other relevant agency 
guidance that cautions banks, bank holding companies, Federal savings 
associations, state savings association, and credit unions, as 
applicable, that each such entity is accountable for overseeing the 
activities of third-party service providers and ensuring that any 
services provided by a third party comply with applicable laws, 
regulations, and supervisory guidance applicable directly to the 
financial institution.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ https://www.fdic.gov/regulations/laws/rules/5000-4800.html.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 323.9  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Affiliate has the meaning provided in 12 U.S.C. 1841.
    (b) AMC National Registry means the registry of State-registered 
AMCs and Federally regulated AMCs maintained by the Appraisal 
Subcommittee.
    (c)(1) Appraisal management company (AMC) means a person that:
    (i) Provides appraisal management services to creditors or to 
secondary mortgage market participants, including affiliates;

[[Page 190]]

    (ii) Provides such services in connection with valuing a consumer's 
principal dwelling as security for a consumer credit transaction or 
incorporating such transactions into securitizations; and
    (iii) Within a given 12-month period, as defined in Sec. 323.10(d), 
oversees an appraiser panel of more than 15 State-certified or State-
licensed appraisers in a State or 25 or more State-certified or State-
licensed appraisers in two or more States, as described in Sec. 323.12;
    (2) An AMC does not include a department or division of an entity 
that provides appraisal management services only to that entity.
    (d) Appraisal management services means one or more of the 
following:
    (1) Recruiting, selecting, and retaining appraisers;
    (2) Contracting with State-certified or State-licensed appraisers to 
perform appraisal assignments;
    (3) Managing the process of having an appraisal performed, including 
providing administrative services such as receiving appraisal orders and 
appraisal reports, submitting completed appraisal reports to creditors 
and secondary market participants, collecting fees from creditors and 
secondary market participants for services provided, and paying 
appraisers for services performed; and
    (4) Reviewing and verifying the work of appraisers.
    (e) Appraiser panel means a network, list or roster of licensed or 
certified appraisers approved by an AMC to perform appraisals as 
independent contractors for the AMC. Appraisers on an AMC's ``appraiser 
panel'' under this part include both appraisers accepted by the AMC for 
consideration for future appraisal assignments in covered transactions 
or for secondary mortgage market participants in connection with covered 
transactions and appraisers engaged by the AMC to perform one or more 
appraisals in covered transactions or for secondary mortgage market 
participants in connection with covered transactions. An appraiser is an 
independent contractor for purposes of this subpart if the appraiser is 
treated as an independent contractor by the AMC for purposes of Federal 
income taxation.
    (f) Appraisal Subcommittee means the Appraisal Subcommittee of the 
Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council.
    (g) Consumer credit means credit offered or extended to a consumer 
primarily for personal, family, or household purposes.
    (h) Covered transaction means any consumer credit transaction 
secured by the consumer's principal dwelling.
    (i) Creditor means:
    (1) A person who regularly extends consumer credit that is subject 
to a finance charge or is payable by written agreement in more than four 
installments (not including a down payment), and to whom the obligation 
is initially payable, either on the face of the note or contract, or by 
agreement when there is no note or contract.
    (2) A person regularly extends consumer credit if the person 
extended credit (other than credit subject to the requirements of 12 CFR 
1026.32) more than 5 times for transactions secured by a dwelling in the 
preceding calendar year. If a person did not meet these numerical 
standards in the preceding calendar year, the numerical standards shall 
be applied to the current calendar year. A person regularly extends 
consumer credit if, in any 12-month period, the person originates more 
than one credit extension that is subject to the requirements of 12 CFR 
1026.32 or one or more such credit extensions through a mortgage broker.
    (j) Dwelling means:
    (1) A residential structure that contains one to four units, whether 
or not that structure is attached to real property. The term includes an 
individual condominium unit, cooperative unit, mobile home, and trailer, 
if it is used as a residence.
    (2) A consumer can have only one ``principal'' dwelling at a time. 
Thus, a vacation or other second home would not be a principal dwelling. 
However, if a consumer buys or builds a new dwelling that will become 
the consumer's principal dwelling within a year or upon the completion 
of construction, the new dwelling is considered the principal dwelling 
for purposes of this section.
    (k) Federally regulated AMC means an AMC that is owned and 
controlled by

[[Page 191]]

an insured depository institution, as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813 and 
regulated by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System, or the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation.
    (l) Federally related transaction regulations means regulations 
established by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, the Board 
of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, or the National Credit Union Administration, 
pursuant to sections 1112, 1113, and 1114 of FIRREA Title XI, 12 U.S.C. 
3341-3343.
    (m) Person means a natural person or an organization, including a 
corporation, partnership, proprietorship, association, cooperative, 
estate, trust, or government unit.
    (n) Secondary mortgage market participant means a guarantor or 
insurer of mortgage-backed securities, or an underwriter or issuer of 
mortgage-backed securities. Secondary mortgage market participant only 
includes an individual investor in a mortgage-backed security if that 
investor also serves in the capacity of a guarantor, insurer, 
underwriter, or issuer for the mortgage-backed security.
    (o) States mean the 50 States and the District of Columbia and the 
territories of Guam, Mariana Islands, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin 
Islands.
    (p) Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice (USPAP) 
means the appraisal standards promulgated by the Appraisal Standards 
Board of the Appraisal Foundation.



Sec. 323.10  Appraiser panel--annual size calculation.

    For purposes of determining whether, within a 12-month period, an 
AMC oversees an appraiser panel of more than 15 State-certified or 
State-licensed appraisers in a State or 25 or more State-certified or 
State-licensed appraisers in two or more States pursuant to 
Sec. 323.9(c)(1)(iii)--
    (a) An appraiser is deemed part of the AMC's appraiser panel as of 
the earliest date on which the AMC:
    (1) Accepts the appraiser for the AMC's consideration for future 
appraisal assignments in covered transactions or for secondary mortgage 
market participants in connection with covered transactions; or
    (2) Engages the appraiser to perform one or more appraisals on 
behalf of a creditor for a covered transaction or secondary mortgage 
market participant in connection with a covered transaction.
    (b) An appraiser who is deemed part of the AMC's appraiser panel 
pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section is deemed to remain on the 
panel until the date on which the AMC:
    (1) Sends written notice to the appraiser removing the appraiser 
from the appraiser panel, with an explanation of its action; or
    (2) Receives written notice from the appraiser asking to be removed 
from the appraiser panel or notice of the death or incapacity of the 
appraiser.
    (c) If an appraiser is removed from an AMC's appraiser panel 
pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, but the AMC subsequently 
accepts the appraiser for consideration for future assignments or 
engages the appraiser at any time during the twelve months after the 
AMC's removal, the removal will be deemed not to have occurred, and the 
appraiser will be deemed to have been part of the AMC's appraiser panel 
without interruption.
    (d) The period for purposes of counting appraisers on an AMC's 
appraiser panel may be the calendar year or a 12-month period 
established by law or rule of each State with which the AMC is required 
to register.



Sec. 323.11  Appraisal management company registration.

    Each State electing to register AMCs pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section must:
    (a) Establish and maintain within the State appraiser certifying and 
licensing agency a licensing program that is subject to the limitations 
set forth in Sec. 323.12 and with the legal authority and mechanisms to:
    (1) Review and approve or deny an AMC's application for initial 
registration;
    (2) Review and renew or review and deny an AMC's registration 
periodically;

[[Page 192]]

    (3) Examine the books and records of an AMC operating in the State 
and require the AMC to submit reports, information, and documents;
    (4) Verify that the appraisers on the AMC's appraiser panel hold 
valid State certifications or licenses, as applicable;
    (5) Conduct investigations of AMCs to assess potential violations of 
applicable appraisal-related laws, regulations, or orders;
    (6) Discipline, suspend, terminate, or deny renewal of the 
registration of an AMC that violates applicable appraisal-related laws, 
regulations, or orders; and
    (7) Report an AMC's violation of applicable appraisal-related laws, 
regulations, or orders, as well as disciplinary and enforcement actions 
and other relevant information about an AMC's operations, to the 
Appraisal Subcommittee.
    (b) Impose requirements on AMCs that are not owned and controlled by 
an insured depository institution and not regulated by a Federal 
financial institution regulatory agency to:
    (1) Register with and be subject to supervision by the State 
appraiser certifying and licensing agency;
    (2) Engage only State-certified or State-licensed appraisers for 
Federally regulated transactions in conformity with any Federally 
related transaction regulations;
    (3) Establish and comply with processes and controls reasonably 
designed to ensure that the AMC, in engaging an appraiser, selects an 
appraiser who is independent of the transaction and who has the 
requisite education, expertise, and experience necessary to competently 
complete the appraisal assignment for the particular market and property 
type;
    (4) Direct the appraiser to perform the assignment in accordance 
with USPAP; and
    (5) Establish and comply with processes and controls reasonably 
designed to ensure that the AMC conducts its appraisal management 
services in accordance with the requirements of section 129E(a)-(i) of 
the Truth in Lending Act, 15 U.S.C. 1639e(a)-(i), and regulations 
thereunder.



Sec. 323.12  Ownership limitations for State-registered appraisal 
management companies.

    (a) Appraiser certification or licensing of owners. (1) An AMC 
subject to State registration pursuant to this section shall not be 
registered by a State or included on the AMC National Registry if such 
AMC, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, is owned by any person 
who has had an appraiser license or certificate refused, denied, 
cancelled, surrendered in lieu of revocation, or revoked in any State 
for a substantive cause, as determined by the appropriate State 
appraiser certifying and licensing agency.
    (2) An AMC subject to State registration pursuant to this section is 
not barred by Sec. 323.11(a)(1) from being registered by a State or 
included on the AMC National Registry if the license or certificate of 
the appraiser with an ownership interest was not revoked for a 
substantive cause and has been reinstated by the State or States in 
which the appraiser was licensed or certified.
    (b) Good moral character of owners. An AMC shall not be registered 
by a State if any person that owns more than 10 percent of the AMC--
    (1) Is determined by the State appraiser certifying and licensing 
agency not to have good moral character; or
    (2) Fails to submit to a background investigation carried out by the 
State appraiser certifying and licensing agency.



Sec. 323.13  Requirements for Federally regulated appraisal management
companies.

    (a) Requirements in providing services. To provide appraisal 
management services for a creditor or secondary mortgage market 
participant relating to a covered transaction, a Federally regulated AMC 
must comply with the requirements in Sec. 323.11(b)(2) through (5).
    (b) Ownership limitations. (1) A Federally regulated AMC shall not 
be included on the AMC National Registry if such AMC, in whole or in 
part, directly or indirectly, is owned by any person who has had an 
appraiser license or certificate refused, denied, cancelled, surrendered 
in lieu of revocation, or revoked in any State for a substantive cause, 
as determined by the ASC.

[[Page 193]]

    (2) A Federally regulated AMC is not barred by Sec. 323.12(b) from 
being included on the AMC National Registry if the license or 
certificate of the appraiser with an ownership interest was not revoked 
for a substantive cause and has been reinstated by the State or States 
in which the appraiser was licensed or certified.
    (c) Reporting information for the AMC National Registry. A Federally 
regulated AMC must report to the State or States in which it operates 
the information required to be submitted by the State pursuant to the 
Appraisal Subcommittee's policies regarding the determination of the AMC 
National Registry fee, including but not necessarily limited to the 
collection of information related to the limitations set forth in 
Sec. 323.12, as applicable.
      



Sec. 323.14  Information to be presented to the Appraisal Subcommittee
by participating States.

    Each State electing to register AMCs for purposes of permitting AMCs 
to provide appraisal management services relating to covered 
transactions in the State must submit to the Appraisal Subcommittee the 
information required to be submitted by Appraisal Subcommittee 
regulations or guidance concerning AMCs that operate in the State.
      



PART 324_CAPITAL ADEQUACY OF FDIC-SUPERVISED INSTITUTIONS--
Table of Contents



                      Subpart A_General Provisions

Sec.
324.1  Purpose, applicability, reservations of authority, and timing.
324.2  Definitions.
324.3  Operational requirements for counterparty credit risk.
324.4  Inadequate capital as an unsafe or unsound practice or condition.
324.5  Issuance of directives.
324.6-324.9  [Reserved]

            Subpart B_Capital Ratio Requirements and Buffers

324.10  Minimum capital requirements.
324.11  Capital conservation buffer and countercyclical capital buffer 
          amount.
324.12-324.19  [Reserved]

                     Subpart C_Definition of Capital

324.20  Capital components and eligibility criteria for regulatory 
          capital instruments.
324.21  Minority interest.
324.22  Regulatory capital adjustments and deductions.
324.23-324.29  [Reserved]

          Subpart D_Risk-Weighted Assets_Standardized Approach

324.30  Applicability.

              Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk

324.31  Mechanics for calculating risk-weighted assets for general 
          credit risk.
324.32  General risk weights.
324.33  Off-balance sheet exposures.
324.34  OTC derivative contracts.
324.35  Cleared transactions.
324.36  Guarantees and credit derivatives: substitution treatment.
324.37  Collateralized transactions.

             Risk-Weighted Assets for Unsettled Transactions

324.38  Unsettled transactions.
324.39-324.40  [Reserved]

            Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures

324.41  Operational requirements for securitization exposures.
324.42  Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures.
324.43  Simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA) and the gross-up 
          approach.
324.44  Securitization exposures to which the SSFA and gross-up approach 
          do not apply.
324.45  Recognition of credit risk mitigants for securitization 
          exposures.
324.46-324.50  [Reserved]

                Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures

324.51  Introduction and exposure measurement.
324.52  Simple risk-weight approach (SRWA).
324.53  Equity exposures to investment funds.
324.54-324.60  [Reserved]

                               Disclosures

324.61  Purpose and scope.
324.62  Disclosure requirements.
324.63  Disclosures by FDIC-supervised institutions described in 
          Sec. 324.61.

[[Page 194]]

324.64-324.99  [Reserved]

   Subpart E_Risk-Weighted Assets_Internal Ratings-Based and Advanced 
                         Measurement Approaches

324.100  Purpose, applicability, and principle of conservatism.
324.101  Definitions.
324.102-324.120  [Reserved]

                              Qualification

324.121  Qualification process.
324.122  Qualification requirements.
324.123  Ongoing qualification.
324.124  Merger and acquisition transitional arrangements.
324.125-324.130  [Reserved]

              Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk

324.131  Mechanics for calculating total wholesale and retail risk-
          weighted assets.
324.132  Counterparty credit risk of repo-style transactions, eligible 
          margin loans, and OTC derivative contracts.
324.133  Cleared transactions.
324.134  Guarantees and credit derivatives: PD substitution and LGD 
          adjustment approaches.
324.135  Guarantees and credit derivatives: double default treatment.
324.136  Unsettled transactions.
324.137-324.140  [Reserved]

            Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures

324.141  Operational criteria for recognizing the transfer of risk.
324.142  Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures.
324.143  Supervisory formula approach (SFA).
324.144  Simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA).
324.145  Recognition of credit risk mitigants for securitization 
          exposures.
324.146-324.150  [Reserved]

                Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures

324.151  Introduction and exposure measurement.
324.152  Simple risk weight approach (SRWA).
324.153  Internal models approach (IMA).
324.154  Equity exposures to investment funds.
324.155  Equity derivative contracts.
324.156-324.160  [Reserved]

                Risk-Weighted Assets for Operational Risk

324.161  Qualification requirements for incorporation of operational 
          risk mitigants.
324.162  Mechanics of risk-weighted asset calculation.
324.163-324.170  [Reserved]

                               Disclosures

324.171  Purpose and scope.
324.172  Disclosure requirements.
324.173  Disclosures by certain advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
          institutions.
324.174-324.200  [Reserved]

               Subpart F_Risk-Weighted Assets_Market Risk

324.201  Purpose, applicability, and reservation of authority.
324.202  Definitions.
324.203  Requirements for application of this subpart F.
324.204  Measure for market risk.
324.205  VaR-based measure.
324.206  Stressed VaR-based measure.
324.207  Specific risk.
324.208  Incremental risk.
324.209  Comprehensive risk.
324.210  Standardized measurement method for specific risk.
324.211  Simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA).
324.212  Market risk disclosures.
324.213-324.299  [Reserved]

                     Subpart G_Transition Provisions

324.300  Transitions.
324.301-324.399  [Reserved]

                   Subpart H_Prompt Corrective Action

324.401  Authority, purpose, scope, other supervisory authority, 
          disclosure of capital categories, and transition procedures.
324.402  Notice of capital category.
324.403  Capital measures and capital category definitions.
324.404  Capital restoration plans.
324.405  Mandatory and discretionary supervisory actions.
324.406-324.999  [Reserved]

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1815(a), 1815(b), 1816, 1818(a), 1818(b), 
1818(c), 1818(t), 1819(Tenth), 1828(c), 1828(d), 1828(i), 1828(n), 
1828(o), 1831o, 1835, 3907, 3909, 4808; 5371; 5412; Pub. L. 102-233, 105 
Stat. 1761, 1789, 1790 (12 U.S.C. 1831n note); Pub. L. 102-242, 105 
Stat. 2236, 2355, as amended by Pub. L. 103-325, 108 Stat. 2160, 2233 
(12 U.S.C. 1828 note); Pub. L. 102-242, 105 Stat. 2236, 2386, as amended 
by Pub. L. 102-550, 106 Stat. 3672, 4089 (12 U.S.C. 1828 note); Pub. L. 
111-203, 124 Stat. 1376, 1887 (15 U.S.C. 78o-7 note).

    Source: 78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, unless otherwise noted.
      

[[Page 195]]



                      Subpart A_General Provisions

      



Sec. 324.1  Purpose, applicability, reservations of authority,
and timing.

    (a) Purpose. This part 324 establishes minimum capital requirements 
and overall capital adequacy standards for FDIC-supervised institutions. 
This part 324 includes methodologies for calculating minimum capital 
requirements, public disclosure requirements related to the capital 
requirements, and transition provisions for the application of this part 
324.
    (b) Limitation of authority. Nothing in this part 324 shall be read 
to limit the authority of the FDIC to take action under other provisions 
of law, including action to address unsafe or unsound practices or 
conditions, deficient capital levels, or violations of law or 
regulation, under section 8 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (c) Applicability. Subject to the requirements in paragraphs (d) and 
(f) of this section:
    (1) Minimum capital requirements and overall capital adequacy 
standards. Each FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its minimum 
capital requirements and meet the overall capital adequacy standards in 
subpart B of this part.
    (2) Regulatory capital. Each FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate its regulatory capital in accordance with subpart C of this 
part.
    (3) Risk-weighted assets. (i) Each FDIC-supervised institution must 
use the methodologies in subpart D of this part (and subpart F of this 
part for a market risk FDIC-supervised institution) to calculate 
standardized total risk-weighted assets.
    (ii) Each advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must use 
the methodologies in subpart E (and subpart F of this part for a market 
risk FDIC-supervised institution) to calculate advanced approaches total 
risk-weighted assets.
    (4) Disclosures. (i) Except for an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution that is making public disclosures pursuant to the 
requirements in subpart E of this part, each FDIC-supervised institution 
with total consolidated assets of $50 billion or more must make the 
public disclosures described in subpart D of this part.
    (ii) Each market risk FDIC-supervised institution must make the 
public disclosures described in subpart F of this part.
    (iii) Each advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must make 
the public disclosures described in subpart E of this part.
    (d) Reservation of authority. (1) Additional capital in the 
aggregate. The FDIC may require an FDIC-supervised institution to hold 
an amount of regulatory capital greater than otherwise required under 
this part if the FDIC determines that the FDIC-supervised institution's 
capital requirements under this part are not commensurate with the FDIC-
supervised institution's credit, market, operational, or other risks.
    (2) Regulatory capital elements. (i) If the FDIC determines that a 
particular common equity tier 1, additional tier 1, or tier 2 capital 
element has characteristics or terms that diminish its ability to absorb 
losses, or otherwise present safety and soundness concerns, the FDIC may 
require the FDIC-supervised institution to exclude all or a portion of 
such element from common equity tier 1 capital, additional tier 1 
capital, or tier 2 capital, as appropriate.
    (ii) Notwithstanding the criteria for regulatory capital instruments 
set forth in subpart C of this part, the FDIC may find that a capital 
element may be included in an FDIC-supervised institution's common 
equity tier 1 capital, additional tier 1 capital, or tier 2 capital on a 
permanent or temporary basis consistent with the loss absorption 
capacity of the element and in accordance with Sec. 324.20(e).
    (3) Risk-weighted asset amounts. If the FDIC determines that the 
risk-weighted asset amount calculated under this part by the FDIC-
supervised institution for one or more exposures is not commensurate 
with the risks associated with those exposures, the FDIC may require the 
FDIC-supervised institution to assign a different risk-weighted asset 
amount to the exposure(s) or to deduct the amount of the exposure(s) 
from its regulatory capital.
    (4) Total leverage. If the FDIC determines that the total leverage 
exposure,

[[Page 196]]

or the amount reflected in the FDIC-supervised institution's reported 
average total consolidated assets, for an on- or off-balance sheet 
exposure calculated by an FDIC-supervised institution under Sec. 324.10 
is inappropriate for the exposure(s) or the circumstances of the FDIC-
supervised institution, the FDIC may require the FDIC-supervised 
institution to adjust this exposure amount in the numerator and the 
denominator for purposes of the leverage ratio calculations.
    (5) Consolidation of certain exposures. The FDIC may determine that 
the risk-based capital treatment for an exposure or the treatment 
provided to an entity that is not consolidated on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's balance sheet is not commensurate with the risk of the 
exposure or the relationship of the FDIC-supervised institution to the 
entity. Upon making this determination, the FDIC may require the FDIC-
supervised institution to treat the exposure or entity as if it were 
consolidated on the balance sheet of the FDIC-supervised institution for 
purposes of determining the FDIC-supervised institution's risk-based 
capital requirements and calculating the FDIC-supervised institution's 
risk-based capital ratios accordingly. The FDIC will look to the 
substance of, and risk associated with, the transaction, as well as 
other relevant factors the FDIC deems appropriate in determining whether 
to require such treatment.
    (6) Other reservation of authority. With respect to any deduction or 
limitation required under this part, the FDIC may require a different 
deduction or limitation, provided that such alternative deduction or 
limitation is commensurate with the FDIC-supervised institution's risk 
and consistent with safety and soundness.
    (e) Notice and response procedures. In making a determination under 
this section, the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures in the 
same manner as the notice and response procedures in Sec. 324.5(c).
    (f) Timing. (1) Subject to the transition provisions in subpart G of 
this part, an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution that is 
not a savings and loan holding company must:
    (i) Except as described in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, 
beginning on January 1, 2014, calculate advanced approaches total risk-
weighted assets in accordance with subpart E and, if applicable, subpart 
F of this part and, beginning on January 1, 2015, calculate standardized 
total risk-weighted assets in accordance with subpart D and, if 
applicable, subpart F of this part;
    (ii) From January 1, 2014 to December 31, 2014:
    (A) Calculate risk-weighted assets in accordance with the general 
risk-based capital rules under 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, and, if 
applicable appendix C (state nonmember banks), or 12 CFR part 390, 
subpart Z and, if applicable, 12 CFR part 325, appendix C (state savings 
associations) \1\ and substitute such risk-weighted assets for 
standardized total risk-weighted assets for purposes of Sec. 324.10;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ For the purpose of calculating its general risk-based capital 
ratios from January 1, 2014 to December 31, 2014, an advanced approaches 
FDIC-supervised institution shall adjust, as appropriate, its risk-
weighted asset measure (as that amount is calculated under 12 CFR part 
325, appendix A, (state nonmember banks), and 12 CFR part 390, subpart Z 
(state savings associations) in the general risk-based capital rules) by 
excluding those assets that are deducted from its regulatory capital 
under Sec. 324.22.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) If applicable, calculate general market risk equivalent assets 
in accordance with 12 CFR part 325, appendix C, section 4(a)(3) and 
substitute such general market risk equivalent assets for standardized 
market risk-weighted assets for purposes of Sec. 324.20(d)(3); and
    (C) Substitute the corresponding provision or provisions of 12 CFR 
part 325, appendix A, and, if applicable, appendix C (state nonmember 
banks), and 12 CFR part 390, subpart Z and, if applicable, 12 CFR part 
325, appendix C (state savings associations) for any reference to 
subpart D of this part in: Sec. 324.121(c); Sec. 324.124(a) and (b); 
Sec. 324.144(b); Sec. 324.154(c) and (d); Sec. 324.202(b) (definition of 
covered position in paragraph (b)(3)(iv)); and Sec. 324.211(b); \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ In addition, for purposes of Sec. 324.201(c)(3), from January 1, 
2014 to December 31, 2014, for any circumstance in which the FDIC may 
require an FDIC-supervised institution to calculate risk-based capital 
requirements for specific positions or portfolios under subpart D of 
this part, the FDIC will instead require the FDIC-supervised institution 
to make such calculations according to 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, and, 
if applicable, appendix C (state nonmember banks), or 12 CFR part 390, 
subpart Z and, if applicable, 12 CFR part 325, appendix C (state savings 
associations).

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 197]]

    (iii) Beginning on January 1, 2014, calculate and maintain minimum 
capital ratios in accordance with subparts A, B, and C of this part, 
provided, however, that such FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (A) From January 1, 2014 to December 31, 2014, maintain a minimum 
common equity tier 1 capital ratio of 4 percent, a minimum tier 1 
capital ratio of 5.5 percent, a minimum total capital ratio of 8 
percent, and a minimum leverage ratio of 4 percent; and
    (B) From January 1, 2015 to December 31, 2017, an advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution:
    (1) Is not required to maintain a supplementary leverage ratio; and
    (2) Must calculate a supplementary leverage ratio in accordance with 
Sec. 324.10(c), and must report the calculated supplementary leverage 
ratio on any applicable regulatory reports.
    (2) Subject to the transition provisions in subpart G of this part, 
an FDIC-supervised institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution or a savings and loan holding company that is an 
advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (i) Beginning on January 1, 2015, calculate standardized total risk-
weighted assets in accordance with subpart D, and if applicable, subpart 
F of this part; and
    (ii) Beginning on January 1, 2015, calculate and maintain minimum 
capital ratios in accordance with subparts A, B and C of this part, 
provided, however, that from January 1, 2015, to December 31, 2017, a 
savings and loan holding company that is an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution:
    (A) Is not required to maintain a supplementary leverage ratio; and
    (B) Must calculate a supplementary leverage ratio in accordance with 
Sec. 324.10(c), and must report the calculated supplementary leverage 
ratio on any applicable regulatory reports.
    (3) Beginning on January 1, 2016, and subject to the transition 
provisions in subpart G of this part, an FDIC-supervised institution is 
subject to limitations on distributions and discretionary bonus payments 
with respect to its capital conservation buffer and any applicable 
countercyclical capital buffer amount, in accordance with subpart B of 
this part.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 57448, Sept. 26, 2014]
      
      



Sec. 324.2  Definitions.

    As used in this part:
    Additional tier 1 capital is defined in Sec. 324.20(c).
    Advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution means an FDIC-
supervised institution that is described in Sec. 324.100(b)(1).
    Advanced approaches total risk-weighted assets means:
    (1) The sum of:
    (i) Credit-risk-weighted assets;
    (ii) Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) risk-weighted assets;
    (iii) Risk-weighted assets for operational risk; and
    (iv) For a market risk FDIC-supervised institution only, advanced 
market risk-weighted assets; minus
    (2) Excess eligible credit reserves not included in the FDIC-
supervised institution's tier 2 capital.
    Advanced market risk-weighted assets means the advanced measure for 
market risk calculated under Sec. 324.204 multiplied by 12.5.
    Affiliate with respect to a company, means any company that 
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the 
company.
    Allocated transfer risk reserves means reserves that have been 
established in accordance with section 905(a) of the International 
Lending Supervision Act, against certain assets whose value U.S. 
supervisory authorities have found to be significantly impaired by 
protracted transfer risk problems.
    Allowances for loan and lease losses (ALLL) means valuation 
allowances that have been established through a charge against earnings 
to cover estimated credit losses on loans, lease financing receivables 
or other extensions

[[Page 198]]

of credit as determined in accordance with GAAP. ALLL excludes 
``allocated transfer risk reserves.'' For purposes of this part, ALLL 
includes allowances that have been established through a charge against 
earnings to cover estimated credit losses associated with off-balance 
sheet credit exposures as determined in accordance with GAAP.
    Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program means a program 
established primarily for the purpose of issuing commercial paper that 
is investment grade and backed by underlying exposures held in a 
bankruptcy-remote special purpose entity (SPE).
    Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program sponsor means an FDIC-
supervised institution that:
    (1) Establishes an ABCP program;
    (2) Approves the sellers permitted to participate in an ABCP 
program;
    (3) Approves the exposures to be purchased by an ABCP program; or
    (4) Administers the ABCP program by monitoring the underlying 
exposures, underwriting or otherwise arranging for the placement of debt 
or other obligations issued by the program, compiling monthly reports, 
or ensuring compliance with the program documents and with the program's 
credit and investment policy.
    Assets classified loss means:
    (1) When measured as of the date of examination of an FDIC-
supervised institution, those assets that have been determined by an 
evaluation made by a state or Federal examiner as of that date to be a 
loss; and
    (2) When measured as of any other date, those assets:
    (i) That have been determined--
    (A) By an evaluation made by a state or Federal examiner at the most 
recent examination of an FDIC-supervised institution to be a loss; or
    (B) By evaluations made by the FDIC-supervised institution since its 
most recent examination to be a loss; and
    (ii) That have not been charged off from the FDIC-supervised 
institution's books or collected.
    Bank means an FDIC-insured, state-chartered commercial or savings 
bank that is not a member of the Federal Reserve System and for which 
the FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency pursuant to section 
3(q) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(q)).
    Bank holding company means a bank holding company as defined in 
section 2 of the Bank Holding Company Act.
    Bank Holding Company Act means the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, 
as amended (12 U.S.C. 1841 et seq.).
    Bankruptcy remote means, with respect to an entity or asset, that 
the entity or asset would be excluded from an insolvent entity's estate 
in receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding.
    Call Report means Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income.
    Carrying value means, with respect to an asset, the value of the 
asset on the balance sheet of the FDIC-supervised institution, 
determined in accordance with GAAP.
    Central counterparty (CCP) means a counterparty (for example, a 
clearing house) that facilitates trades between counterparties in one or 
more financial markets by either guaranteeing trades or novating 
contracts.
    CFTC means the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission.
    Clean-up call means a contractual provision that permits an 
originating FDIC-supervised institution or servicer to call 
securitization exposures before their stated maturity or call date.
    Cleared transaction means an exposure associated with an outstanding 
derivative contract or repo-style transaction that an FDIC-supervised 
institution or clearing member has entered into with a central 
counterparty (that is, a transaction that a central counterparty has 
accepted).
    (1) The following transactions are cleared transactions:
    (i) A transaction between a CCP and an FDIC-supervised institution 
that is a clearing member of the CCP where the FDIC-supervised 
institution enters into the transaction with the CCP for the FDIC-
supervised institution's own account;
    (ii) A transaction between a CCP and an FDIC-supervised institution 
that is a clearing member of the CCP where the FDIC-supervised 
institution is acting as a financial intermediary on behalf of a 
clearing member client and

[[Page 199]]

the transaction offsets another transaction that satisfies the 
requirements set forth in Sec. 324.3(a);
    (iii) A transaction between a clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution and a clearing member where the clearing member acts as a 
financial intermediary on behalf of the clearing member client and 
enters into an offsetting transaction with a CCP, provided that the 
requirements set forth in Sec. 324.3(a) are met; or
    (iv) A transaction between a clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution and a CCP where a clearing member guarantees the performance 
of the clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution to the CCP and 
the transaction meets the requirements of Sec. 324.3(a)(2) and (3).
    (2) The exposure of an FDIC-supervised institution that is a 
clearing member to its clearing member client is not a cleared 
transaction where the FDIC-supervised institution is either acting as a 
financial intermediary and enters into an offsetting transaction with a 
CCP or where the FDIC-supervised institution provides a guarantee to the 
CCP on the performance of the client.\3\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ For the standardized approach treatment of these exposures, see 
Sec. 324.34(e) (OTC derivative contracts) or Sec. 324.37(c) (repo-style 
transactions). For the advanced approaches treatment of these exposures, 
see Sec. 324.132(c)(8) and (d) (OTC derivative contracts) or 
Sec. 324.132(b) and 324.132(d) (repo-style transactions) and for 
calculation of the margin period of risk, see Sec. 324.132(d)(5)(iii)(C) 
(OTC derivative contracts) and Sec. 324.132(d)(5)(iii)(A) (repo-style 
transactions).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Clearing member means a member of, or direct participant in, a CCP 
that is entitled to enter into transactions with the CCP.
    Clearing member client means a party to a cleared transaction 
associated with a CCP in which a clearing member acts either as a 
financial intermediary with respect to the party or guarantees the 
performance of the party to the CCP.
    Collateral agreement means a legal contract that specifies the time 
when, and circumstances under which, a counterparty is required to 
pledge collateral to an FDIC-supervised institution for a single 
financial contract or for all financial contracts in a netting set and 
confers upon the FDIC-supervised institution a perfected, first-priority 
security interest (notwithstanding the prior security interest of any 
custodial agent), or the legal equivalent thereof, in the collateral 
posted by the counterparty under the agreement. This security interest 
must provide the FDIC-supervised institution with a right to close-out 
the financial positions and liquidate the collateral upon an event of 
default of, or failure to perform by, the counterparty under the 
collateral agreement. A contract would not satisfy this requirement if 
the FDIC-supervised institution's exercise of rights under the agreement 
may be stayed or avoided.
    (1) Under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions, other than:
    (i) In receivership, conservatorship, or resolution under the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act, or under 
any similar insolvency law applicable to GSEs, or laws of foreign 
jurisdictions that are substantially similar \4\ to the U.S. laws 
referenced in this paragraph (1)(i) in order to facilitate the orderly 
resolution of the defaulting counterparty;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ The FDIC expects to evaluate jointly with the Federal Reserve 
and the OCC whether foreign special resolution regimes meet the 
requirements of this paragraph.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Where the agreement is subject by its terms to, or 
incorporates, any of the laws referenced in paragraph (1)(i) of this 
definition; or
    (2) Other than to the extent necessary for the counterparty to 
comply with the requirements of part 382 of this title, subpart I of 
part 252 of this title or part 47 of this title, as applicable.
    Commitment means any legally binding arrangement that obligates an 
FDIC-supervised institution to extend credit or to purchase assets.
    Commodity derivative contract means a commodity-linked swap, 
purchased commodity-linked option, forward commodity-linked contract, or 
any other instrument linked to commodities that gives rise to similar 
counterparty credit risks.

[[Page 200]]

    Commodity Exchange Act means the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 
U.S.C. 1 et seq.)
    Common equity tier 1 capital is defined in Sec. 324.20(b).
    Common equity tier 1 minority interest means the common equity tier 
1 capital of a depository institution or foreign bank that is:
    (1) A consolidated subsidiary of an FDIC-supervised institution; and
    (2) Not owned by the FDIC-supervised institution.
    Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability company, 
depository institution, business trust, special purpose entity, 
association, or similar organization.
    Control. A person or company controls a company if it:
    (1) Owns, controls, or holds with power to vote 25 percent or more 
of a class of voting securities of the company; or
    (2) Consolidates the company for financial reporting purposes.
    Core capital means Tier 1 capital, as defined in Sec. 324.2 of 
subpart A of this part.
    Corporate exposure means an exposure to a company that is not:
    (1) An exposure to a sovereign, the Bank for International 
Settlements, the European Central Bank, the European Commission, the 
International Monetary Fund, a multi-lateral development bank (MDB), a 
depository institution, a foreign bank, a credit union, or a public 
sector entity (PSE);
    (2) An exposure to a GSE;
    (3) A residential mortgage exposure;
    (4) A pre-sold construction loan;
    (5) A statutory multifamily mortgage;
    (6) A high volatility commercial real estate (HVCRE) exposure;
    (7) A cleared transaction;
    (8) A default fund contribution;
    (9) A securitization exposure;
    (10) An equity exposure; or
    (11) An unsettled transaction.
    Country risk classification (CRC) with respect to a sovereign, means 
the most recent consensus CRC published by the Organization for Economic 
Cooperation and Development (OECD) as of December 31st of the prior 
calendar year that provides a view of the likelihood that the sovereign 
will service its external debt.
    Covered savings and loan holding company means a top-tier savings 
and loan holding company other than:
    (1) A top-tier savings and loan holding company that is:
    (i) A grandfathered unitary savings and loan holding company as 
defined in section 10(c)(9)(A) of HOLA; and
    (ii) As of June 30 of the previous calendar year, derived 50 percent 
or more of its total consolidated assets or 50 percent of its total 
revenues on an enterprise-wide basis (as calculated under GAAP) from 
activities that are not financial in nature under section 4(k) of the 
Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1842(k));
    (2) A top-tier savings and loan holding company that is an insurance 
underwriting company; or
    (3)(i) A top-tier savings and loan holding company that, as of June 
30 of the previous calendar year, held 25 percent or more of its total 
consolidated assets in subsidiaries that are insurance underwriting 
companies (other than assets associated with insurance for credit risk); 
and
    (ii) For purposes of paragraph 3(i) of this definition, the company 
must calculate its total consolidated assets in accordance with GAAP, or 
if the company does not calculate its total consolidated assets under 
GAAP for any regulatory purpose (including compliance with applicable 
securities laws), the company may estimate its total consolidated 
assets, subject to review and adjustment by the Federal Reserve.
    Credit derivative means a financial contract executed under standard 
industry credit derivative documentation that allows one party (the 
protection purchaser) to transfer the credit risk of one or more 
exposures (reference exposure(s)) to another party (the protection 
provider) for a certain period of time.
    Credit-enhancing interest-only strip (CEIO) means an on-balance 
sheet asset that, in form or in substance:
    (1) Represents a contractual right to receive some or all of the 
interest and no more than a minimal amount of principal due on the 
underlying exposures of a securitization; and

[[Page 201]]

    (2) Exposes the holder of the CEIO to credit risk directly or 
indirectly associated with the underlying exposures that exceeds a pro 
rata share of the holder's claim on the underlying exposures, whether 
through subordination provisions or other credit-enhancement techniques.
    Credit-enhancing representations and warranties means 
representations and warranties that are made or assumed in connection 
with a transfer of underlying exposures (including loan servicing 
assets) and that obligate an FDIC-supervised institution to protect 
another party from losses arising from the credit risk of the underlying 
exposures. Credit-enhancing representations and warranties include 
provisions to protect a party from losses resulting from the default or 
nonperformance of the counterparties of the underlying exposures or from 
an insufficiency in the value of the collateral backing the underlying 
exposures. Credit-enhancing representations and warranties do not 
include:
    (1) Early default clauses and similar warranties that permit the 
return of, or premium refund clauses covering, 1-4 family residential 
first mortgage loans that qualify for a 50 percent risk weight for a 
period not to exceed 120 days from the date of transfer. These 
warranties may cover only those loans that were originated within 1 year 
of the date of transfer;
    (2) Premium refund clauses that cover assets guaranteed, in whole or 
in part, by the U.S. Government, a U.S. Government agency or a GSE, 
provided the premium refund clauses are for a period not to exceed 120 
days from the date of transfer; or
    (3) Warranties that permit the return of underlying exposures in 
instances of misrepresentation, fraud, or incomplete documentation.
    Credit risk mitigant means collateral, a credit derivative, or a 
guarantee.
    Credit-risk-weighted assets means 1.06 multiplied by the sum of:
    (1) Total wholesale and retail risk-weighted assets as calculated 
under Sec. 324.131;
    (2) Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures as calculated 
under Sec. 324.142; and
    (3) Risk-weighted assets for equity exposures as calculated under 
Sec. 324.151.
    Credit union means an insured credit union as defined under the 
Federal Credit Union Act (12 U.S.C. 1751 et seq.).
    Current exposure means, with respect to a netting set, the larger of 
zero or the fair value of a transaction or portfolio of transactions 
within the netting set that would be lost upon default of the 
counterparty, assuming no recovery on the value of the transactions. 
Current exposure is also called replacement cost.
    Current exposure methodology means the method of calculating the 
exposure amount for over-the-counter derivative contracts in 
Sec. 324.34(a) and exposure at default (EAD) in Sec. 324.132(c)(5) or 
(6), as applicable.
    Custodian means a financial institution that has legal custody of 
collateral provided to a CCP.
    Default fund contribution means the funds contributed or commitments 
made by a clearing member to a CCP's mutualized loss sharing 
arrangement.
    Depository institution means a depository institution as defined in 
section 3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    Depository institution holding company means a bank holding company 
or savings and loan holding company.
    Derivative contract means a financial contract whose value is 
derived from the values of one or more underlying assets, reference 
rates, or indices of asset values or reference rates. Derivative 
contracts include interest rate derivative contracts, exchange rate 
derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, commodity derivative 
contracts, credit derivative contracts, and any other instrument that 
poses similar counterparty credit risks. Derivative contracts also 
include unsettled securities, commodities, and foreign exchange 
transactions with a contractual settlement or delivery lag that is 
longer than the lesser of the market standard for the particular 
instrument or five business days.
    Discretionary bonus payment means a payment made to an executive 
officer of an FDIC-supervised institution, where:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution retains discretion as to whether 
to make, and the amount of, the payment

[[Page 202]]

until the payment is awarded to the executive officer;
    (2) The amount paid is determined by the FDIC-supervised institution 
without prior promise to, or agreement with, the executive officer; and
    (3) The executive officer has no contractual right, whether express 
or implied, to the bonus payment.
    Distribution means:
    (1) A reduction of tier 1 capital through the repurchase of a tier 1 
capital instrument or by other means, except when an FDIC-supervised 
institution, within the same quarter when the repurchase is announced, 
fully replaces a tier 1 capital instrument it has repurchased by issuing 
another capital instrument that meets the eligibility criteria for:
    (i) A common equity tier 1 capital instrument if the instrument 
being repurchased was part of the FDIC-supervised institution's common 
equity tier 1 capital, or
    (ii) A common equity tier 1 or additional tier 1 capital instrument 
if the instrument being repurchased was part of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's tier 1 capital;
    (2) A reduction of tier 2 capital through the repurchase, or 
redemption prior to maturity, of a tier 2 capital instrument or by other 
means, except when an FDIC-supervised institution, within the same 
quarter when the repurchase or redemption is announced, fully replaces a 
tier 2 capital instrument it has repurchased by issuing another capital 
instrument that meets the eligibility criteria for a tier 1 or tier 2 
capital instrument;
    (3) A dividend declaration or payment on any tier 1 capital 
instrument;
    (4) A dividend declaration or interest payment on any tier 2 capital 
instrument if the FDIC-supervised institution has full discretion to 
permanently or temporarily suspend such payments without triggering an 
event of default; or
    (5) Any similar transaction that the FDIC determines to be in 
substance a distribution of capital.
    Dodd-Frank Act means the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer 
Protection Act of 2010 (Pub. L. 111-203, 124 Stat. 1376).
    Early amortization provision means a provision in the documentation 
governing a securitization that, when triggered, causes investors in the 
securitization exposures to be repaid before the original stated 
maturity of the securitization exposures, unless the provision:
    (1) Is triggered solely by events not directly related to the 
performance of the underlying exposures or the originating FDIC-
supervised institution (such as material changes in tax laws or 
regulations); or
    (2) Leaves investors fully exposed to future draws by borrowers on 
the underlying exposures even after the provision is triggered.
    Effective notional amount means for an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative, the lesser of the contractual notional 
amount of the credit risk mitigant and the exposure amount (or EAD for 
purposes of subpart E of this part) of the hedged exposure, multiplied 
by the percentage coverage of the credit risk mitigant.
    Eligible ABCP liquidity facility means a liquidity facility 
supporting ABCP, in form or in substance, that is subject to an asset 
quality test at the time of draw that precludes funding against assets 
that are 90 days or more past due or in default. Notwithstanding the 
preceding sentence, a liquidity facility is an eligible ABCP liquidity 
facility if the assets or exposures funded under the liquidity facility 
that do not meet the eligibility requirements are guaranteed by a 
sovereign that qualifies for a 20 percent risk weight or lower.
    Eligible clean-up call means a clean-up call that:
    (1) Is exercisable solely at the discretion of the originating FDIC-
supervised institution or servicer;
    (2) Is not structured to avoid allocating losses to securitization 
exposures held by investors or otherwise structured to provide credit 
enhancement to the securitization; and
    (3)(i) For a traditional securitization, is only exercisable when 10 
percent or less of the principal amount of the underlying exposures or 
securitization exposures (determined as of the inception of the 
securitization) is outstanding; or
    (ii) For a synthetic securitization, is only exercisable when 10 
percent or less

[[Page 203]]

of the principal amount of the reference portfolio of underlying 
exposures (determined as of the inception of the securitization) is 
outstanding.
    Eligible credit derivative means a credit derivative in the form of 
a credit default swap, nth-to-default swap, total return swap, or any 
other form of credit derivative approved by the FDIC, provided that:
    (1) The contract meets the requirements of an eligible guarantee and 
has been confirmed by the protection purchaser and the protection 
provider;
    (2) Any assignment of the contract has been confirmed by all 
relevant parties;
    (3) If the credit derivative is a credit default swap or nth-to-
default swap, the contract includes the following credit events:
    (i) Failure to pay any amount due under the terms of the reference 
exposure, subject to any applicable minimal payment threshold that is 
consistent with standard market practice and with a grace period that is 
closely in line with the grace period of the reference exposure; and
    (ii) Receivership, insolvency, liquidation, conservatorship or 
inability of the reference exposure issuer to pay its debts, or its 
failure or admission in writing of its inability generally to pay its 
debts as they become due, and similar events;
    (4) The terms and conditions dictating the manner in which the 
contract is to be settled are incorporated into the contract;
    (5) If the contract allows for cash settlement, the contract 
incorporates a robust valuation process to estimate loss reliably and 
specifies a reasonable period for obtaining post-credit event valuations 
of the reference exposure;
    (6) If the contract requires the protection purchaser to transfer an 
exposure to the protection provider at settlement, the terms of at least 
one of the exposures that is permitted to be transferred under the 
contract provide that any required consent to transfer may not be 
unreasonably withheld;
    (7) If the credit derivative is a credit default swap or nth-to-
default swap, the contract clearly identifies the parties responsible 
for determining whether a credit event has occurred, specifies that this 
determination is not the sole responsibility of the protection provider, 
and gives the protection purchaser the right to notify the protection 
provider of the occurrence of a credit event; and
    (8) If the credit derivative is a total return swap and the FDIC-
supervised institution records net payments received on the swap as net 
income, the FDIC-supervised institution records offsetting deterioration 
in the value of the hedged exposure (either through reductions in fair 
value or by an addition to reserves).
    Eligible credit reserves means all general allowances that have been 
established through a charge against earnings to cover estimated credit 
losses associated with on- or off-balance sheet wholesale and retail 
exposures, including the ALLL associated with such exposures, but 
excluding allocated transfer risk reserves established pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 3904 and other specific reserves created against recognized 
losses.

Eligible guarantee means a guarantee that:

    (1) Is written;
    (2) Is either:
    (i) Unconditional, or
    (ii) A contingent obligation of the U.S. government or its agencies, 
the enforceability of which is dependent upon some affirmative action on 
the part of the beneficiary of the guarantee or a third party (for 
example, meeting servicing requirements);
    (3) Covers all or a pro rata portion of all contractual payments of 
the obligated party on the reference exposure;
    (4) Gives the beneficiary a direct claim against the protection 
provider;
    (5) Is not unilaterally cancelable by the protection provider for 
reasons other than the breach of the contract by the beneficiary;
    (6) Except for a guarantee by a sovereign, is legally enforceable 
against the protection provider in a jurisdiction where the protection 
provider has sufficient assets against which a judgment may be attached 
and enforced;
    (7) Requires the protection provider to make payment to the 
beneficiary on the occurrence of a default (as defined in the guarantee) 
of the obligated party on the reference exposure in a

[[Page 204]]

timely manner without the beneficiary first having to take legal actions 
to pursue the obligor for payment;
    (8) Does not increase the beneficiary's cost of credit protection on 
the guarantee in response to deterioration in the credit quality of the 
reference exposure;
    (9) Is not provided by an affiliate of the FDIC-supervised 
institution, unless the affiliate is an insured depository institution, 
foreign bank, securities broker or dealer, or insurance company that:
    (i) Does not control the FDIC-supervised institution; and
    (ii) Is subject to consolidated supervision and regulation 
comparable to that imposed on depository institutions, U.S. securities 
broker-dealers, or U.S. insurance companies (as the case may be); and
    (10) For purposes of Secs. 324.141 through 324.145 and subpart D of 
this part, is provided by an eligible guarantor.
    Eligible guarantor means:
    (1) A sovereign, the Bank for International Settlements, the 
International Monetary Fund, the European Central Bank, the European 
Commission, a Federal Home Loan Bank, Federal Agricultural Mortgage 
Corporation (Farmer Mac), a multilateral development bank (MDB), a 
depository institution, a bank holding company, a savings and loan 
holding company, a credit union, a foreign bank, or a qualifying central 
counterparty; or
    (2) An entity (other than a special purpose entity):
    (i) That at the time the guarantee is issued or anytime thereafter, 
has issued and outstanding an unsecured debt security without credit 
enhancement that is investment grade;
    (ii) Whose creditworthiness is not positively correlated with the 
credit risk of the exposures for which it has provided guarantees; and
    (iii) That is not an insurance company engaged predominately in the 
business of providing credit protection (such as a monoline bond insurer 
or re-insurer).
    Eligible margin loan means:
    (1) An extension of credit where:
    (i) The extension of credit is collateralized exclusively by liquid 
and readily marketable debt or equity securities, or gold;
    (ii) The collateral is marked to fair value daily, and the 
transaction is subject to daily margin maintenance requirements; and
    (iii) The extension of credit is conducted under an agreement that 
provides the FDIC-supervised institution the right to accelerate and 
terminate the extension of credit and to liquidate or set-off collateral 
promptly upon an event of default, including upon an event of 
receivership, insolvency, liquidation, conservatorship, or similar 
proceeding, of the counterparty, provided that, in any such case,
    (A) Any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions, other than
    (1) In receivership, conservatorship, or resolution under the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act, or under 
any similar insolvency law applicable to GSEs,\5\ or laws of foreign 
jurisdictions that are substantially similar \6\ to the U.S. laws 
referenced in this paragraph (1)(iii)(A)(1) in order to facilitate the 
orderly resolution of the defaulting counterparty; or
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \5\ This requirement is met where all transactions under the 
agreement are (i) executed under U.S. law and (ii) constitute 
``securities contracts'' under section 555 of the Bankruptcy Code (11 
U.S.C. 555), qualified financial contracts under section 11(e)(8) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, or netting contracts between or among 
financial institutions under sections 401-407 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation Improvement Act or the Federal Reserve Board's 
Regulation EE (12 CFR part 231).
    \6\ The FDIC expects to evaluate jointly with the Federal Reserve 
and the OCC whether foreign special resolution regimes meet the 
requirements of this paragraph.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Where the agreement is subject by its terms to, or incorporates, 
any of the laws referenced in paragraph (1)(iii)(A)(1) of this 
definition; and
    (B) The agreement may limit the right to accelerate, terminate, and 
close-out on a net basis all transactions under the agreement and to 
liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon an event of default of the 
counterparty to the extent necessary for the counterparty to comply with

[[Page 205]]

the requirements of part 382 of this title, subpart I of part 252 of 
this title or part 47 of this title, as applicable.
    (2) In order to recognize an exposure as an eligible margin loan for 
purposes of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution must comply 
with the requirements of Sec. 324.3(b) with respect to that exposure.
    Eligible servicer cash advance facility means a servicer cash 
advance facility in which:
    (1) The servicer is entitled to full reimbursement of advances, 
except that a servicer may be obligated to make non-reimbursable 
advances for a particular underlying exposure if any such advance is 
contractually limited to an insignificant amount of the outstanding 
principal balance of that exposure;
    (2) The servicer's right to reimbursement is senior in right of 
payment to all other claims on the cash flows from the underlying 
exposures of the securitization; and
    (3) The servicer has no legal obligation to, and does not make 
advances to the securitization if the servicer concludes the advances 
are unlikely to be repaid.
    Employee stock ownership plan has the same meaning as in 29 CFR 
2550.407d-6.
    Equity derivative contract means an equity-linked swap, purchased 
equity-linked option, forward equity-linked contract, or any other 
instrument linked to equities that gives rise to similar counterparty 
credit risks.
    Equity exposure means:
    (1) A security or instrument (whether voting or non-voting) that 
represents a direct or an indirect ownership interest in, and is a 
residual claim on, the assets and income of a company, unless:
    (i) The issuing company is consolidated with the FDIC-supervised 
institution under GAAP;
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution is required to deduct the 
ownership interest from tier 1 or tier 2 capital under this part;
    (iii) The ownership interest incorporates a payment or other similar 
obligation on the part of the issuing company (such as an obligation to 
make periodic payments); or
    (iv) The ownership interest is a securitization exposure;
    (2) A security or instrument that is mandatorily convertible into a 
security or instrument described in paragraph (1) of this definition;
    (3) An option or warrant that is exercisable for a security or 
instrument described in paragraph (1) of this definition; or
    (4) Any other security or instrument (other than a securitization 
exposure) to the extent the return on the security or instrument is 
based on the performance of a security or instrument described in 
paragraph (1) of this definition.
    ERISA means the Employee Retirement Income and Security Act of 1974 
(29 U.S.C. 1001 et seq.).
    Exchange rate derivative contract means a cross-currency interest 
rate swap, forward foreign-exchange contract, currency option purchased, 
or any other instrument linked to exchange rates that gives rise to 
similar counterparty credit risks.
    Executive officer means a person who holds the title or, without 
regard to title, salary, or compensation, performs the function of one 
or more of the following positions: president, chief executive officer, 
executive chairman, chief operating officer, chief financial officer, 
chief investment officer, chief legal officer, chief lending officer, 
chief risk officer, or head of a major business line, and other staff 
that the board of directors of the FDIC-supervised institution deems to 
have equivalent responsibility.
    Expected credit loss (ECL) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor or segment 
of non-defaulted retail exposures that is carried at fair value with 
gains and losses flowing through earnings or that is classified as held-
for-sale and is carried at the lower of cost or fair value with losses 
flowing through earnings, zero.
    (2) For all other wholesale exposures to non-defaulted obligors or 
segments of non-defaulted retail exposures, the product of the 
probability of default (PD) times the loss given default (LGD) times the 
exposure at default (EAD) for the exposure or segment.
    (3) For a wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor or segment of 
defaulted retail exposures, the FDIC-supervised institution's impairment 
estimate for

[[Page 206]]

allowance purposes for the exposure or segment.
    (4) Total ECL is the sum of expected credit losses for all wholesale 
and retail exposures other than exposures for which the FDIC-supervised 
institution has applied the double default treatment in Sec. 324.135.
    Exposure amount means:
    (1) For the on-balance sheet component of an exposure (other than an 
available-for-sale or held-to-maturity security, if the FDIC-supervised 
institution has made an AOCI opt-out election (as defined in 
Sec. 324.22(b)(2)); an OTC derivative contract; a repo-style transaction 
or an eligible margin loan for which the FDIC-supervised institution 
determines the exposure amount under Sec. 324.37; a cleared transaction; 
a default fund contribution; or a securitization exposure), the FDIC-
supervised institution's carrying value of the exposure.
    (2) For a security (that is not a securitization exposure, an equity 
exposure, or preferred stock classified as an equity security under 
GAAP) classified as available-for-sale or held-to-maturity if the FDIC-
supervised institution has made an AOCI opt-out election (as defined in 
Sec. 324.22(b)(2)), the FDIC-supervised institution's carrying value 
(including net accrued but unpaid interest and fees) for the exposure 
less any net unrealized gains on the exposure and plus any net 
unrealized losses on the exposure.
    (3) For available-for-sale preferred stock classified as an equity 
security under GAAP if the FDIC-supervised institution has made an AOCI 
opt-out election (as defined in Sec. 324.22(b)(2)), the FDIC-supervised 
institution's carrying value of the exposure less any net unrealized 
gains on the exposure that are reflected in such carrying value but 
excluded from the FDIC-supervised institution's regulatory capital 
components.
    (4) For the off-balance sheet component of an exposure (other than 
an OTC derivative contract; a repo-style transaction or an eligible 
margin loan for which the FDIC-supervised institution calculates the 
exposure amount under Sec. 324.37; a cleared transaction; a default fund 
contribution; or a securitization exposure), the notional amount of the 
off-balance sheet component multiplied by the appropriate credit 
conversion factor (CCF) in Sec. 324.33.
    (5) For an exposure that is an OTC derivative contract, the exposure 
amount determined under Sec. 324.34;
    (6) For an exposure that is a cleared transaction, the exposure 
amount determined under Sec. 324.35.
    (7) For an exposure that is an eligible margin loan or repo-style 
transaction for which the FDIC-supervised institution calculates the 
exposure amount as provided in Sec. 324.37, the exposure amount 
determined under Sec. 324.37.
    (8) For an exposure that is a securitization exposure, the exposure 
amount determined under Sec. 324.42.
    FDIC-supervised institution means any bank or state savings 
association.
    Federal Deposit Insurance Act means the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq.).
    Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act means the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 ((Pub. L. 
102-242, 105 Stat. 2236).
    Federal Reserve means the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System.
    Financial collateral means collateral:
    (1) In the form of:
    (i) Cash on deposit with the FDIC-supervised institution (including 
cash held for the FDIC-supervised institution by a third-party custodian 
or trustee);
    (ii) Gold bullion;
    (iii) Long-term debt securities that are not resecuritization 
exposures and that are investment grade;
    (iv) Short-term debt instruments that are not resecuritization 
exposures and that are investment grade;
    (v) Equity securities that are publicly traded;
    (vi) Convertible bonds that are publicly traded; or
    (vii) Money market fund shares and other mutual fund shares if a 
price for the shares is publicly quoted daily; and
    (2) In which the FDIC-supervised institution has a perfected, first-
priority security interest or, outside of the United States, the legal 
equivalent thereof (with the exception of cash on deposit and 
notwithstanding the prior security interest of any custodial agent).

[[Page 207]]

    Financial institution means:
    (1) A bank holding company; savings and loan holding company; 
nonbank financial institution supervised by the Federal Reserve under 
Title I of the Dodd-Frank Act; depository institution; foreign bank; 
credit union; industrial loan company, industrial bank, or other similar 
institution described in section 2 of the Bank Holding Company Act; 
national association, state member bank, or state non-member bank that 
is not a depository institution; insurance company; securities holding 
company as defined in section 618 of the Dodd-Frank Act; broker or 
dealer registered with the SEC under section 15 of the Securities 
Exchange Act; futures commission merchant as defined in section 1a of 
the Commodity Exchange Act; swap dealer as defined in section 1a of the 
Commodity Exchange Act; or security-based swap dealer as defined in 
section 3 of the Securities Exchange Act;
    (2) Any designated financial market utility, as defined in section 
803 of the Dodd-Frank Act;
    (3) Any entity not domiciled in the United States (or a political 
subdivision thereof) that is supervised and regulated in a manner 
similar to entities described in paragraphs (1) or (2) of this 
definition; or
    (4) Any other company:
    (i) Of which the FDIC-supervised institution owns:
    (A) An investment in GAAP equity instruments of the company with an 
adjusted carrying value or exposure amount equal to or greater than $10 
million; or
    (B) More than 10 percent of the company's issued and outstanding 
common shares (or similar equity interest), and
    (ii) Which is predominantly engaged in the following activities:
    (A) Lending money, securities or other financial instruments, 
including servicing loans;
    (B) Insuring, guaranteeing, indemnifying against loss, harm, damage, 
illness, disability, or death, or issuing annuities;
    (C) Underwriting, dealing in, making a market in, or investing as 
principal in securities or other financial instruments; or
    (D) Asset management activities (not including investment or 
financial advisory activities).
    (5) For the purposes of this definition, a company is 
``predominantly engaged'' in an activity or activities if:
    (i) 85 percent or more of the total consolidated annual gross 
revenues (as determined in accordance with applicable accounting 
standards) of the company is either of the two most recent calendar 
years were derived, directly or indirectly, by the company on a 
consolidated basis from the activities; or
    (ii) 85 percent or more of the company's consolidated total assets 
(as determined in accordance with applicable accounting standards) as of 
the end of either of the two most recent calendar years were related to 
the activities.
    (6) Any other company that the FDIC may determine is a financial 
institution based on activities similar in scope, nature, or operation 
to those of the entities included in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this 
definition.
    (7) For purposes of this part, ``financial institution'' does not 
include the following entities:
    (i) GSEs;
    (ii) Small business investment companies, as defined in section 102 
of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 661 et seq.);
    (iii) Entities designated as Community Development Financial 
Institutions (CDFIs) under 12 U.S.C. 4701 et seq. and 12 CFR part 1805;
    (iv) Entities registered with the SEC under the Investment Company 
Act or foreign equivalents thereof;
    (v) Entities to the extent that the FDIC-supervised institution's 
investment in such entities would qualify as a community development 
investment under section 24 (Eleventh) of the National Bank Act; and
    (vi) An employee benefit plan as defined in paragraphs (3) and (32) 
of section 3 of ERISA, a ``governmental plan'' (as defined in 29 U.S.C. 
1002(32)) that complies with the tax deferral qualification requirements 
provided in the Internal Revenue Code, or any similar employee benefit 
plan established under the laws of a foreign jurisdiction.

[[Page 208]]

    First-lien residential mortgage exposure means a residential 
mortgage exposure secured by a first lien.
    Foreign bank means a foreign bank as defined in Sec. 211.2 of the 
Federal Reserve's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2) (other than a depository 
institution).
    Forward agreement means a legally binding contractual obligation to 
purchase assets with certain drawdown at a specified future date, not 
including commitments to make residential mortgage loans or forward 
foreign exchange contracts.
    GAAP means generally accepted accounting principles as used in the 
United States.
    Gain-on-sale means an increase in the equity capital of an FDIC-
supervised institution (as reported on Schedule RC of the Call Report) 
resulting from a traditional securitization (other than an increase in 
equity capital resulting from the FDIC-supervised institution's receipt 
of cash in connection with the securitization or reporting of a mortgage 
servicing asset on Schedule RC of the Call Report.
    General obligation means a bond or similar obligation that is backed 
by the full faith and credit of a public sector entity (PSE).
    Government-sponsored enterprise (GSE) means an entity established or 
chartered by the U.S. government to serve public purposes specified by 
the U.S. Congress but whose debt obligations are not explicitly 
guaranteed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. government.
    Guarantee means a financial guarantee, letter of credit, insurance, 
or other similar financial instrument (other than a credit derivative) 
that allows one party (beneficiary) to transfer the credit risk of one 
or more specific exposures (reference exposure) to another party 
(protection provider).
    High volatility commercial real estate (HVCRE) exposure means a 
credit facility that, prior to conversion to permanent financing, 
finances or has financed the acquisition, development, or construction 
(ADC) of real property, unless the facility finances:
    (1) One- to four-family residential properties;
    (2) Real property that:
    (i) Would qualify as an investment in community development under 12 
U.S.C. 338a or 12 U.S.C. 24 (Eleventh), as applicable, or as a 
``qualified investment'' under 12 CFR part 345, and
    (ii) Is not an ADC loan to any entity described in 12 CFR 
345.12(g)(3), unless it is otherwise described in paragraph (1), (2)(i), 
(3) or (4) of this definition;
    (3) The purchase or development of agricultural land, which includes 
all land known to be used or usable for agricultural purposes (such as 
crop and livestock production), provided that the valuation of the 
agricultural land is based on its value for agricultural purposes and 
the valuation does not take into consideration any potential use of the 
land for non-agricultural commercial development or residential 
development; or
    (4) Commercial real estate projects in which:
    (i) The loan-to-value ratio is less than or equal to the applicable 
maximum supervisory loan-to-value ratio in the FDIC's real estate 
lending standards at 12 CFR part 365, subpart A (state nonmember banks), 
12 CFR 390.264 and 390.265 (state savings associations);
    (ii) The borrower has contributed capital to the project in the form 
of cash or unencumbered readily marketable assets (or has paid 
development expenses out-of-pocket) of at least 15 percent of the real 
estate's appraised ``as completed'' value; and
    (iii) The borrower contributed the amount of capital required by 
paragraph (4)(ii) of this definition before the FDIC-supervised 
institution advances funds under the credit facility, and the capital 
contributed by the borrower, or internally generated by the project, is 
contractually required to remain in the project throughout the life of 
the project. The life of a project concludes only when the credit 
facility is converted to permanent financing or is sold or paid in full. 
Permanent financing may be provided by the FDIC-supervised institution 
that provided the ADC facility as long as the permanent financing is 
subject to the FDIC-supervised institution's underwriting criteria for 
long-term mortgage loans.

[[Page 209]]

    Home country means the country where an entity is incorporated, 
chartered, or similarly established.
    Identified losses means:
    (1) When measured as of the date of examination of an FDIC-
supervised institution, those items that have been determined by an 
evaluation made by a state or Federal examiner as of that date to be 
chargeable against income, capital and/or general valuation allowances 
such as the allowance for loan and lease losses (examples of identified 
losses would be assets classified loss, off-balance sheet items 
classified loss, any provision expenses that are necessary for the FDIC-
supervised institution to record in order to replenish its general 
valuation allowances to an adequate level, liabilities not shown on the 
FDIC-supervised institution's books, estimated losses in contingent 
liabilities, and differences in accounts which represent shortages); and
    (2) When measured as of any other date, those items:
    (i) That have been determined--
    (A) By an evaluation made by a state or Federal examiner at the most 
recent examination of an FDIC-supervised institution to be chargeable 
against income, capital and/or general valuation allowances; or
    (B) By evaluations made by the FDIC-supervised institution since its 
most recent examination to be chargeable against income, capital and/or 
general valuation allowances; and
    (ii) For which the appropriate accounting entries to recognize the 
loss have not yet been made on the FDIC-supervised institution's books 
nor has the item been collected or otherwise settled.
    Indirect exposure means an exposure that arises from the FDIC-
supervised institution's investment in an investment fund which holds an 
investment in the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital instrument 
or an investment in the capital of an unconsolidated financial 
institution.
    Insurance company means an insurance company as defined in section 
201 of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 5381).
    Insurance underwriting company means an insurance company as defined 
in section 201 of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 5381) that engages in 
insurance underwriting activities.
    Insured depository institution means an insured depository 
institution as defined in section 3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act.
    Interest rate derivative contract means a single-currency interest 
rate swap, basis swap, forward rate agreement, purchased interest rate 
option, when-issued securities, or any other instrument linked to 
interest rates that gives rise to similar counterparty credit risks.
    International Lending Supervision Act means the International 
Lending Supervision Act of 1983 (12 U.S.C. 3901 et seq.).
    Investing bank means, with respect to a securitization, an FDIC-
supervised institution that assumes the credit risk of a securitization 
exposure (other than an originating FDIC-supervised institution of the 
securitization). In the typical synthetic securitization, the investing 
FDIC-supervised institution sells credit protection on a pool of 
underlying exposures to the originating FDIC-supervised institution.
    Investment Company Act means the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 
U.S.C. 80 a-1 et seq.)
    Investment fund means a company:
    (1) Where all or substantially all of the assets of the company are 
financial assets; and
    (2) That has no material liabilities.
    Investment grade means that the entity to which the FDIC-supervised 
institution is exposed through a loan or security, or the reference 
entity with respect to a credit derivative, has adequate capacity to 
meet financial commitments for the projected life of the asset or 
exposure. Such an entity or reference entity has adequate capacity to 
meet financial commitments if the risk of its default is low and the 
full and timely repayment of principal and interest is expected.
    Investment in the capital of an unconsolidated financial institution 
means a net long position calculated in accordance with Sec. 324.22(h) 
in an instrument that is recognized as capital for regulatory purposes 
by the primary supervisor of an unconsolidated regulated financial 
institution and is an instrument that is part of the GAAP equity

[[Page 210]]

of an unconsolidated unregulated financial institution, including 
direct, indirect, and synthetic exposures to capital instruments, 
excluding underwriting positions held by the FDIC-supervised institution 
for five or fewer business days.
    Investment in the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital 
instrument means a net long position calculated in accordance with 
Sec. 324.22(h) in the FDIC-supervised institution's own common stock 
instrument, own additional tier 1 capital instrument or own tier 2 
capital instrument, including direct, indirect, or synthetic exposures 
to such capital instruments. An investment in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's own capital instrument includes any contractual obligation 
to purchase such capital instrument.
    Junior-lien residential mortgage exposure means a residential 
mortgage exposure that is not a first-lien residential mortgage 
exposure.
    Main index means the Standard & Poor's 500 Index, the FTSE All-World 
Index, and any other index for which the FDIC-supervised institution can 
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that the equities 
represented in the index have comparable liquidity, depth of market, and 
size of bid-ask spreads as equities in the Standard & Poor's 500 Index 
and FTSE All-World Index.
    Market risk FDIC-supervised institution means an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is described in Sec. 324.201(b).
    Money market fund means an investment fund that is subject to 17 CFR 
270.2a-7 or any foreign equivalent thereof.
    Mortgage servicing assets (MSAs) means the contractual rights owned 
by an FDIC-supervised institution to service for a fee mortgage loans 
that are owned by others.
    Multilateral development bank (MDB) means the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the Multilateral Investment Guarantee 
Agency, the International Finance Corporation, the Inter-American 
Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the African Development 
Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the European 
Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, the Nordic Investment 
Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic Development Bank, the 
Council of Europe Development Bank, and any other multilateral lending 
institution or regional development bank in which the U.S. government is 
a shareholder or contributing member or which the FDIC determines poses 
comparable credit risk.
    National Bank Act means the National Bank Act (12 U.S.C. 1 et seq.).
    Netting set means a group of transactions with a single counterparty 
that are subject to a qualifying master netting agreement or a 
qualifying cross-product master netting agreement. For purposes of 
calculating risk-based capital requirements using the internal models 
methodology in subpart E of this part, this term does not cover a 
transaction:
    (1) That is not subject to such a master netting agreement; or
    (2) Where the FDIC-supervised institution has identified specific 
wrong-way risk.
    Non-significant investment in the capital of an unconsolidated 
financial institution means an investment in the capital of an 
unconsolidated financial institution where the FDIC-supervised 
institution owns 10 percent or less of the issued and outstanding common 
stock of the unconsolidated financial institution.
    N\th\-to-default credit derivative means a credit derivative that 
provides credit protection only for the nth-defaulting reference 
exposure in a group of reference exposures.
    OCC means the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, U.S. 
Treasury.
    Operating entity means a company established to conduct business 
with clients with the intention of earning a profit in its own right.
    Original maturity with respect to an off-balance sheet commitment 
means the length of time between the date a commitment is issued and:
    (1) For a commitment that is not subject to extension or renewal, 
the stated expiration date of the commitment; or
    (2) For a commitment that is subject to extension or renewal, the 
earliest

[[Page 211]]

date on which the FDIC-supervised institution can, at its option, 
unconditionally cancel the commitment.
    Originating FDIC-supervised institution, with respect to a 
securitization, means an FDIC-supervised institution that:
    (1) Directly or indirectly originated or securitized the underlying 
exposures included in the securitization; or
    (2) Serves as an ABCP program sponsor to the securitization.
    Over-the-counter (OTC) derivative contract means a derivative 
contract that is not a cleared transaction. An OTC derivative includes a 
transaction:
    (1) Between an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member 
and a counterparty where the FDIC-supervised institution is acting as a 
financial intermediary and enters into a cleared transaction with a CCP 
that offsets the transaction with the counterparty; or
    (2) In which an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing 
member provides a CCP a guarantee on the performance of the counterparty 
to the transaction.
    Performance standby letter of credit (or performance bond) means an 
irrevocable obligation of an FDIC-supervised institution to pay a third-
party beneficiary when a customer (account party) fails to perform on 
any contractual nonfinancial or commercial obligation. To the extent 
permitted by law or regulation, performance standby letters of credit 
include arrangements backing, among other things, subcontractors' and 
suppliers' performance, labor and materials contracts, and construction 
bids.
    Pre-sold construction loan means any one-to-four family residential 
construction loan to a builder that meets the requirements of section 
618(a)(1) or (2) of the Resolution Trust Corporation Refinancing, 
Restructuring, and Improvement Act of 1991 (Pub. L. 102-233, 105 Stat. 
1761) and the following criteria:
    (1) The loan is made in accordance with prudent underwriting 
standards, meaning that the FDIC-supervised institution has obtained 
sufficient documentation that the buyer of the home has a legally 
binding written sales contract and has a firm written commitment for 
permanent financing of the home upon completion;
    (2) The purchaser is an individual(s) that intends to occupy the 
residence and is not a partnership, joint venture, trust, corporation, 
or any other entity (including an entity acting as a sole 
proprietorship) that is purchasing one or more of the residences for 
speculative purposes;
    (3) The purchaser has entered into a legally binding written sales 
contract for the residence;
    (4) The purchaser has not terminated the contract;
    (5) The purchaser has made a substantial earnest money deposit of no 
less than 3 percent of the sales price, which is subject to forfeiture 
if the purchaser terminates the sales contract; provided that, the 
earnest money deposit shall not be subject to forfeiture by reason of 
breach or termination of the sales contract on the part of the builder;
    (6) The earnest money deposit must be held in escrow by the FDIC-
supervised institution or an independent party in a fiduciary capacity, 
and the escrow agreement must provide that in an event of default 
arising from the cancellation of the sales contract by the purchaser of 
the residence, the escrow funds shall be used to defray any cost 
incurred by the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (7) The builder must incur at least the first 10 percent of the 
direct costs of construction of the residence (that is, actual costs of 
the land, labor, and material) before any drawdown is made under the 
loan;
    (8) The loan may not exceed 80 percent of the sales price of the 
presold residence; and
    (9) The loan is not more than 90 days past due, or on nonaccrual.
    Protection amount (P) means, with respect to an exposure hedged by 
an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative, the effective 
notional amount of the guarantee or credit derivative, reduced to 
reflect any currency mismatch, maturity mismatch, or lack of 
restructuring coverage (as provided in Sec. 324.36 or Sec. 324.134, as 
appropriate).
    Publicly-traded means traded on:
    (1) Any exchange registered with the SEC as a national securities 
exchange

[[Page 212]]

under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act; or
    (2) Any non-U.S.-based securities exchange that:
    (i) Is registered with, or approved by, a national securities 
regulatory authority; and
    (ii) Provides a liquid, two-way market for the instrument in 
question.
    Public sector entity (PSE) means a state, local authority, or other 
governmental subdivision below the sovereign level.
    Qualifying central counterparty (QCCP) means a central counterparty 
that:
    (1)(i) Is a designated financial market utility (FMU) under Title 
VIII of the Dodd-Frank Act;
    (ii) If not located in the United States, is regulated and 
supervised in a manner equivalent to a designated FMU; or
    (iii) Meets the following standards:
    (A) The central counterparty requires all parties to contracts 
cleared by the counterparty to be fully collateralized on a daily basis;
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution demonstrates to the satisfaction 
of the FDIC that the central counterparty:
    (1) Is in sound financial condition;
    (2) Is subject to supervision by the Federal Reserve, the CFTC, or 
the Securities Exchange Commission (SEC), or, if the central 
counterparty is not located in the United States, is subject to 
effective oversight by a national supervisory authority in its home 
country; and
    (3) Meets or exceeds the risk-management standards for central 
counterparties set forth in regulations established by the Federal 
Reserve, the CFTC, or the SEC under Title VII or Title VIII of the Dodd-
Frank Act; or if the central counterparty is not located in the United 
States, meets or exceeds similar risk-management standards established 
under the law of its home country that are consistent with international 
standards for central counterparty risk management as established by the 
relevant standard setting body of the Bank of International Settlements; 
and
    (2)(i) Provides the FDIC-supervised institution with the central 
counterparty's hypothetical capital requirement or the information 
necessary to calculate such hypothetical capital requirement, and other 
information the FDIC-supervised institution is required to obtain under 
Secs. 324.35(d)(3) and 324.133(d)(3);
    (ii) Makes available to the FDIC and the CCP's regulator the 
information described in paragraph (2)(i) of this definition; and
    (iii) Has not otherwise been determined by the FDIC to not be a QCCP 
due to its financial condition, risk profile, failure to meet 
supervisory risk management standards, or other weaknesses or 
supervisory concerns that are inconsistent with the risk weight assigned 
to qualifying central counterparties under Secs. 324.35 and 324.133.
    (3) Exception. A QCCP that fails to meet the requirements of a QCCP 
in the future may still be treated as a QCCP under the conditions 
specified in Sec. 324.3(f).
    Qualifying master netting agreement means a written, legally 
enforceable agreement provided that:
    (1) The agreement creates a single legal obligation for all 
individual transactions covered by the agreement upon an event of 
default following any stay permitted by paragraph (2) of this 
definition, including upon an event of receivership, conservatorship, 
insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the counterparty;
    (2) The agreement provides the FDIC-supervised institution the right 
to accelerate, terminate, and close-out on a net basis all transactions 
under the agreement and to liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon 
an event of default, including upon an event of receivership, 
conservatorship, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the 
counterparty, provided that, in any such case,
    (i) Any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions, other than:
    (A) In receivership, conservatorship, or resolution under the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act, or under 
any similar insolvency law applicable to GSEs, or laws

[[Page 213]]

of foreign jurisdictions that are substantially similar \7\ to the U.S. 
laws referenced in this paragraph (2)(i)(A) in order to facilitate the 
orderly resolution of the defaulting counterparty; or
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \7\ The FDIC expects to evaluate jointly with the Federal Reserve 
and the OCC whether foreign special resolution regimes meet the 
requirements of this paragraph.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) Where the agreement is subject by its terms to, or incorporates, 
any of the laws referenced in paragraph (2)(i)(A) of this definition; 
and
    (ii) The agreement may limit the right to accelerate, terminate, and 
close-out on a net basis all transactions under the agreement and to 
liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon an event of default of the 
counterparty to the extent necessary for the counterparty to comply with 
the requirements of part 382 of this title, subpart I of part 252 of 
this title or part 47 of this title, as applicable;
    (3) The agreement does not contain a walkaway clause (that is, a 
provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make a lower 
payment than it otherwise would make under the agreement, or no payment 
at all, to a defaulter or the estate of a defaulter, even if the 
defaulter or the estate of the defaulter is a net creditor under the 
agreement); and
    (4) In order to recognize an agreement as a qualifying master 
netting agreement for purposes of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must comply with the requirements of Sec. 324.3(d) with 
respect to that agreement.
    Regulated financial institution means a financial institution 
subject to consolidated supervision and regulation comparable to that 
imposed on the following U.S. financial institutions: Depository 
institutions, depository institution holding companies, nonbank 
financial companies supervised by the Federal Reserve, designated 
financial market utilities, securities broker-dealers, credit unions, or 
insurance companies.
    Repo-style transaction means a repurchase or reverse repurchase 
transaction, or a securities borrowing or securities lending 
transaction, including a transaction in which the FDIC-supervised 
institution acts as agent for a customer and indemnifies the customer 
against loss, provided that:
    (1) The transaction is based solely on liquid and readily marketable 
securities, cash, or gold;
    (2) The transaction is marked-to-fair value daily and subject to 
daily margin maintenance requirements;
    (3)(i) The transaction is a ``securities contract'' or ``repurchase 
agreement'' under section 555 or 559, respectively, of the Bankruptcy 
Code (11 U.S.C. 555 or 559), a qualified financial contract under 
section 11(e)(8) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, or a netting 
contract between or among financial institutions under sections 401-407 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act or the 
Federal Reserve's Regulation EE (12 CFR part 231); or
    (ii) If the transaction does not meet the criteria set forth in 
paragraph (3)(i) of this definition, then either:
    (A) The transaction is executed under an agreement that provides the 
FDIC-supervised institution the right to accelerate, terminate, and 
close-out the transaction on a net basis and to liquidate or set-off 
collateral promptly upon an event of default, including upon an event of 
receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the 
counterparty, provided that, in any such case,
    (1) Any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions, other than
    (i) In receivership, conservatorship, or resolution under the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act, or under 
any similar insolvency law applicable to GSEs, or laws of foreign 
jurisdictions that are substantially similar \8\ to the U.S. laws 
referenced in this paragraph (3)(ii)(A)(1)(i) in order to facilitate the 
orderly resolution of the defaulting counterparty;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \8\ The FDIC expects to evaluate jointly with the Federal Reserve 
and the OCC whether foreign special resolution regimes meet the 
requirements of this paragraph.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Where the agreement is subject by its terms to, or 
incorporates, any of the laws referenced in paragraph (3)(ii)(A)(1)(i) 
of this definition; and

[[Page 214]]

    (2) The agreement may limit the right to accelerate, terminate, and 
close-out on a net basis all transactions under the agreement and to 
liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon an event of default of the 
counterparty to the extent necessary for the counterparty to comply with 
the requirements of part 382 of this title, subpart I of part 252 of 
this title or part 47 of this title, as applicable; or
    (B) The transaction is:
    (1) Either overnight or unconditionally cancelable at any time by 
the FDIC-supervised institution; and
    (2) Executed under an agreement that provides the FDIC-supervised 
institution the right to accelerate, terminate, and close-out the 
transaction on a net basis and to liquidate or set off collateral 
promptly upon an event of counterparty default; and
    (4) In order to recognize an exposure as a repo-style transaction 
for purposes of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution must comply 
with the requirements of Sec. 324.3(e) of this part with respect to that 
exposure.
    Resecuritization means a securitization which has more than one 
underlying exposure and in which one or more of the underlying exposures 
is a securitization exposure.
    Resecuritization exposure means:
    (1) An on- or off-balance sheet exposure to a resecuritization;
    (2) An exposure that directly or indirectly references a 
resecuritization exposure.
    (3) An exposure to an asset-backed commercial paper program is not a 
resecuritization exposure if either:
    (i) The program-wide credit enhancement does not meet the definition 
of a resecuritization exposure; or
    (ii) The entity sponsoring the program fully supports the commercial 
paper through the provision of liquidity so that the commercial paper 
holders effectively are exposed to the default risk of the sponsor 
instead of the underlying exposures.
    Residential mortgage exposure means an exposure (other than a 
securitization exposure, equity exposure, statutory multifamily 
mortgage, or presold construction loan):
    (1)(i) That is primarily secured by a first or subsequent lien on 
one-to-four family residential property; or
    (ii) With an original and outstanding amount of $1 million or less 
that is primarily secured by a first or subsequent lien on residential 
property that is not one-to-four family; and
    (2) For purposes of calculating capital requirements under subpart E 
of this part, managed as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous 
risk characteristics and not on an individual-exposure basis.
    Revenue obligation means a bond or similar obligation that is an 
obligation of a PSE, but which the PSE is committed to repay with 
revenues from the specific project financed rather than general tax 
funds.
    Savings and loan holding company means a savings and loan holding 
company as defined in section 10 of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1467a).
    Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) means the U.S. Securities 
and Exchange Commission.
    Securities Exchange Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 
(15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.).
    Securitization exposure means:
    (1) An on-balance sheet or off-balance sheet credit exposure 
(including credit-enhancing representations and warranties) that arises 
from a traditional securitization or synthetic securitization (including 
a resecuritization), or
    (2) An exposure that directly or indirectly references a 
securitization exposure described in paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Securitization special purpose entity (securitization SPE) means a 
corporation, trust, or other entity organized for the specific purpose 
of holding underlying exposures of a securitization, the activities of 
which are limited to those appropriate to accomplish this purpose, and 
the structure of which is intended to isolate the underlying exposures 
held by the entity from the credit risk of the seller of the underlying 
exposures to the entity.
    Separate account means a legally segregated pool of assets owned and 
held by an insurance company and maintained separately from the 
insurance

[[Page 215]]

company's general account assets for the benefit of an individual 
contract holder. To be a separate account:
    (1) The account must be legally recognized as a separate account 
under applicable law;
    (2) The assets in the account must be insulated from general 
liabilities of the insurance company under applicable law in the event 
of the insurance company's insolvency;
    (3) The insurance company must invest the funds within the account 
as directed by the contract holder in designated investment alternatives 
or in accordance with specific investment objectives or policies; and
    (4) All investment gains and losses, net of contract fees and 
assessments, must be passed through to the contract holder, provided 
that the contract may specify conditions under which there may be a 
minimum guarantee but must not include contract terms that limit the 
maximum investment return available to the policyholder.
    Servicer cash advance facility means a facility under which the 
servicer of the underlying exposures of a securitization may advance 
cash to ensure an uninterrupted flow of payments to investors in the 
securitization, including advances made to cover foreclosure costs or 
other expenses to facilitate the timely collection of the underlying 
exposures.
    Significant investment in the capital of an unconsolidated financial 
institution means an investment in the capital of an unconsolidated 
financial institution where the FDIC-supervised institution owns more 
than 10 percent of the issued and outstanding common stock of the 
unconsolidated financial institution.
    Small Business Act means the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 631 et 
seq.).
    Small Business Investment Act means the Small Business Investment 
Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 681 et seq.).
    Sovereign means a central government (including the U.S. government) 
or an agency, department, ministry, or central bank of a central 
government.
    Sovereign default means noncompliance by a sovereign with its 
external debt service obligations or the inability or unwillingness of a 
sovereign government to service an existing loan according to its 
original terms, as evidenced by failure to pay principal and interest 
timely and fully, arrearages, or restructuring.
    Sovereign exposure means:
    (1) A direct exposure to a sovereign; or
    (2) An exposure directly and unconditionally backed by the full 
faith and credit of a sovereign.
    Specific wrong-way risk means wrong-way risk that arises when 
either:
    (1) The counterparty and issuer of the collateral supporting the 
transaction; or
    (2) The counterparty and the reference asset of the transaction, are 
affiliates or are the same entity.
    Standardized market risk-weighted assets means the standardized 
measure for market risk calculated under Sec. 324.204 multiplied by 
12.5.
    Standardized total risk-weighted assets means:
    (1) The sum of:
    (i) Total risk-weighted assets for general credit risk as calculated 
under Sec. 324.31;
    (ii) Total risk-weighted assets for cleared transactions and default 
fund contributions as calculated under Sec. 324.35;
    (iii) Total risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions as 
calculated under Sec. 324.38;
    (iv) Total risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures as 
calculated under Sec. 324.42;
    (v) Total risk-weighted assets for equity exposures as calculated 
under Secs. 324.52 and 324.53; and
    (vi) For a market risk FDIC-supervised institution only, 
standardized market risk-weighted assets; minus
    (2) Any amount of the FDIC-supervised institution's allowance for 
loan and lease losses that is not included in tier 2 capital and any 
amount of allocated transfer risk reserves.
    State savings association means a State savings association as 
defined in section 3(b)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1813(b)(3)), the deposits of which are insured by the 
Corporation. It includes a building and loan, savings and loan, or 
homestead association, or a cooperative bank (other than a cooperative 
bank which is a state bank as defined in section

[[Page 216]]

3(a)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) organized and operating 
according to the laws of the State in which it is chartered or 
organized, or a corporation (other than a bank as defined in section 
3(a)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) that the Board of 
Directors of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation determine to be 
operating substantially in the same manner as a state savings 
association.
    Statutory multifamily mortgage means a loan secured by a multifamily 
residential property that meets the requirements under section 618(b)(1) 
of the Resolution Trust Corporation Refinancing, Restructuring, and 
Improvement Act of 1991, and that meets the following criteria: \9\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \9\ The types of loans that qualify as loans secured by multifamily 
residential properties are listed in the instructions for preparation of 
the Call Report.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) The loan is made in accordance with prudent underwriting 
standards;
    (2) The principal amount of the loan at origination does not exceed 
80 percent of the value of the property (or 75 percent of the value of 
the property if the loan is based on an interest rate that changes over 
the term of the loan) where the value of the property is the lower of 
the acquisition cost of the property or the appraised (or, if 
appropriate, evaluated) value of the property;
    (3) All principal and interest payments on the loan must have been 
made on a timely basis in accordance with the terms of the loan for at 
least one year prior to applying a 50 percent risk weight to the loan, 
or in the case where an existing owner is refinancing a loan on the 
property, all principal and interest payments on the loan being 
refinanced must have been made on a timely basis in accordance with the 
terms of the loan for at least one year prior to applying a 50 percent 
risk weight to the loan;
    (4) Amortization of principal and interest on the loan must occur 
over a period of not more than 30 years and the minimum original 
maturity for repayment of principal must not be less than 7 years;
    (5) Annual net operating income (before making any payment on the 
loan) generated by the property securing the loan during its most recent 
fiscal year must not be less than 120 percent of the loan's current 
annual debt service (or 115 percent of current annual debt service if 
the loan is based on an interest rate that changes over the term of the 
loan) or, in the case of a cooperative or other not-for-profit housing 
project, the property must generate sufficient cash flow to provide 
comparable protection to the FDIC-supervised institution; and
    (6) The loan is not more than 90 days past due, or on nonaccrual.
    Subsidiary means, with respect to a company, a company controlled by 
that company.
    Synthetic exposure means an exposure whose value is linked to the 
value of an investment in the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital 
instrument or to the value of an investment in the capital of an 
unconsolidated financial institution.
    Synthetic securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is retained or transferred to one or more third parties 
through the use of one or more credit derivatives or guarantees (other 
than a guarantee that transfers only the credit risk of an individual 
retail exposure);
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches reflecting different levels of 
seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures; and
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities).
    Tangible capital means the amount of core capital (Tier 1 capital), 
as defined in accordance with Sec. 324.2, plus the amount of outstanding 
perpetual preferred stock (including related surplus) not included in 
Tier 1 capital.
    Tangible equity means the amount of Tier 1 capital, as calculated in 
accordance with Sec. 324.2, plus the amount of outstanding perpetual 
preferred stock

[[Page 217]]

(including related surplus) not included in Tier 1 capital.
    Tier 1 capital means the sum of common equity tier 1 capital and 
additional tier 1 capital.
    Tier 1 minority interest means the tier 1 capital of a consolidated 
subsidiary of an FDIC-supervised institution that is not owned by the 
FDIC-supervised institution.
    Tier 2 capital is defined in Sec. 324.20(d).
    Total capital means the sum of tier 1 capital and tier 2 capital.
    Total capital minority interest means the total capital of a 
consolidated subsidiary of an FDIC-supervised institution that is not 
owned by the FDIC-supervised institution.
    Total leverage exposure is defined in Sec. 324.10(c)(4)(ii).
    Traditional securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties other than through 
the use of credit derivatives or guarantees;
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches reflecting different levels of 
seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures;
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities);
    (5) The underlying exposures are not owned by an operating company;
    (6) The underlying exposures are not owned by a small business 
investment company defined in section 302 of the Small Business 
Investment Act;
    (7) The underlying exposures are not owned by a firm an investment 
in which qualifies as a community development investment under section 
24 (Eleventh) of the National Bank Act;
    (8) The FDIC may determine that a transaction in which the 
underlying exposures are owned by an investment firm that exercises 
substantially unfettered control over the size and composition of its 
assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet exposures is not a 
traditional securitization based on the transaction's leverage, risk 
profile, or economic substance;
    (9) The FDIC may deem a transaction that meets the definition of a 
traditional securitization, notwithstanding paragraph (5), (6), or (7) 
of this definition, to be a traditional securitization based on the 
transaction's leverage, risk profile, or economic substance; and
    (10) The transaction is not:
    (i) An investment fund;
    (ii) A collective investment fund (as defined in 12 CFR 344.3 (state 
nonmember bank), and 12 CFR 390.203 (state savings association);
    (iii) An employee benefit plan (as defined in paragraphs (3) and 
(32) of section 3 of ERISA), a ``governmental plan'' (as defined in 29 
U.S.C. 1002(32)) that complies with the tax deferral qualification 
requirements provided in the Internal Revenue Code, or any similar 
employee benefit plan established under the laws of a foreign 
jurisdiction;
    (iv) A synthetic exposure to the capital of a financial institution 
to the extent deducted from capital under Sec. 324.22; or
    (v) Registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act or 
foreign equivalents thereof.
    Tranche means all securitization exposures associated with a 
securitization that have the same seniority level.
    Two-way market means a market where there are independent bona fide 
offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last 
sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations 
can be determined within one day and settled at that price within a 
relatively short time frame conforming to trade custom.
    Unconditionally cancelable means with respect to a commitment, that 
an FDIC-supervised institution may, at any time, with or without cause, 
refuse to extend credit under the commitment (to the extent permitted 
under applicable law).
    Underlying exposures means one or more exposures that have been 
securitized in a securitization transaction.

[[Page 218]]

    Unregulated financial institution means, for purposes of 
Sec. 324.131, a financial institution that is not a regulated financial 
institution, including any financial institution that would meet the 
definition of ``financial institution'' under this section but for the 
ownership interest thresholds set forth in paragraph (4)(i) of that 
definition.
    U.S. Government agency means an instrumentality of the U.S. 
Government whose obligations are fully and explicitly guaranteed as to 
the timely payment of principal and interest by the full faith and 
credit of the U.S. Government.
    Value-at-Risk (VaR) means the estimate of the maximum amount that 
the value of one or more exposures could decline due to market price or 
rate movements during a fixed holding period within a stated confidence 
interval.
    Wrong-way risk means the risk that arises when an exposure to a 
particular counterparty is positively correlated with the probability of 
default of such counterparty itself.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20758, Apr. 14, 2014; 
79 FR 44124, July 30, 2014; 79 FR 57748, Sept. 26, 2014; 80 FR 41422, 
July 15, 2015; 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016; 82 FR 50260, Oct. 30, 2017]
      



Sec. 324.3  Operational requirements for counterparty credit risk.

    For purposes of calculating risk-weighted assets under subparts D 
and E of this part:
    (a) Cleared transaction. In order to recognize certain exposures as 
cleared transactions pursuant to paragraphs (1)(ii), (iii), or (iv) of 
the definition of ``cleared transaction'' in Sec. 324.2, the exposures 
must meet the applicable requirements set forth in this paragraph (a).
    (1) The offsetting transaction must be identified by the CCP as a 
transaction for the clearing member client.
    (2) The collateral supporting the transaction must be held in a 
manner that prevents the FDIC-supervised institution from facing any 
loss due to an event of default, including from a liquidation, 
receivership, insolvency, or similar proceeding of either the clearing 
member or the clearing member's other clients. Omnibus accounts 
established under 17 CFR parts 190 and 300 satisfy the requirements of 
this paragraph (a).
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution must conduct sufficient legal 
review to conclude with a well-founded basis (and maintain sufficient 
written documentation of that legal review) that in the event of a legal 
challenge (including one resulting from a default or receivership, 
insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding) the relevant court and 
administrative authorities would find the arrangements of paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section to be legal, valid, binding and enforceable under 
the law of the relevant jurisdictions.
    (4) The offsetting transaction with a clearing member must be 
transferable under the transaction documents and applicable laws in the 
relevant jurisdiction(s) to another clearing member should the clearing 
member default, become insolvent, or enter receivership, insolvency, 
liquidation, or similar proceedings.
    (b) Eligible margin loan. In order to recognize an exposure as an 
eligible margin loan as defined in Sec. 324.2, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must conduct sufficient legal review to conclude with a 
well-founded basis (and maintain sufficient written documentation of 
that legal review) that the agreement underlying the exposure:
    (1) Meets the requirements of paragraph (1)(iii) of the definition 
of eligible margin loan in Sec. 324.2, and
    (2) Is legal, valid, binding, and enforceable under applicable law 
in the relevant jurisdictions.
    (c) Qualifying cross-product master netting agreement. In order to 
recognize an agreement as a qualifying cross-product master netting 
agreement as defined in Sec. 324.101, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must obtain a written legal opinion verifying the validity and 
enforceability of the agreement under applicable law of the relevant 
jurisdictions if the counterparty fails to perform upon an event of 
default, including upon receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or 
similar proceeding.
    (d) Qualifying master netting agreement. In order to recognize an 
agreement as a qualifying master netting

[[Page 219]]

agreement as defined in Sec. 324.2, an FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (1) Conduct sufficient legal review to conclude with a well-founded 
basis (and maintain sufficient written documentation of that legal 
review) that:
    (i) The agreement meets the requirements of paragraph (2) of the 
definition of qualifying master netting agreement in Sec. 324.2; and
    (ii) In the event of a legal challenge (including one resulting from 
default or from receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar 
proceeding) the relevant court and administrative authorities would find 
the agreement to be legal, valid, binding, and enforceable under the law 
of the relevant jurisdictions; and
    (2) Establish and maintain written procedures to monitor possible 
changes in relevant law and to ensure that the agreement continues to 
satisfy the requirements of the definition of qualifying master netting 
agreement in Sec. 324.2.
    (e) Repo-style transaction. In order to recognize an exposure as a 
repo-style transaction as defined in Sec. 324.2, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must conduct sufficient legal review to conclude with a 
well-founded basis (and maintain sufficient written documentation of 
that legal review) that the agreement underlying the exposure:
    (1) Meets the requirements of paragraph (3) of the definition of 
repo-style transaction in Sec. 324.2, and
    (2) Is legal, valid, binding, and enforceable under applicable law 
in the relevant jurisdictions.
    (f) Failure of a QCCP to satisfy the rule's requirements. If an 
FDIC-supervised institution determines that a CCP ceases to be a QCCP 
due to the failure of the CCP to satisfy one or more of the requirements 
set forth in paragraphs (2)(i) through (2)(iii) of the definition of a 
QCCP in Sec. 324.2, the FDIC-supervised institution may continue to 
treat the CCP as a QCCP for up to three months following the 
determination. If the CCP fails to remedy the relevant deficiency within 
three months after the initial determination, or the CCP fails to 
satisfy the requirements set forth in paragraphs (2)(i) through (2)(iii) 
of the definition of a QCCP continuously for a three-month period after 
remedying the relevant deficiency, an FDIC-supervised institution may 
not treat the CCP as a QCCP for the purposes of this part until after 
the FDIC-supervised institution has determined that the CCP has 
satisfied the requirements in paragraphs (2)(i) through (2)(iii) of the 
definition of a QCCP for three continuous months.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20758, Apr. 14, 2014]
      



Sec. 324.4  Inadequate capital as an unsafe or unsound practice
or condition.

    (a) General. As a condition of Federal deposit insurance, all 
insured depository institutions must remain in a safe and sound 
condition.
    (b) Unsafe or unsound practice. Any insured depository institution 
which has less than its minimum leverage capital requirement is deemed 
to be engaged in an unsafe or unsound practice pursuant to section 
8(b)(1) and/or 8(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1818(b)(1) and/or 1818(c)). Except that such an insured depository 
institution which has entered into and is in compliance with a written 
agreement with the FDIC or has submitted to the FDIC and is in 
compliance with a plan approved by the FDIC to increase its leverage 
capital ratio to such level as the FDIC deems appropriate and to take 
such other action as may be necessary for the insured depository 
institution to be operated so as not to be engaged in such an unsafe or 
unsound practice will not be deemed to be engaged in an unsafe or 
unsound practice pursuant to section 8(b)(1) and/or 8(c) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)(1) and/or 1818(c)) on account 
of its capital ratios. The FDIC is not precluded from taking action 
under section 8(b)(1), section 8(c) or any other enforcement action 
against an insured depository institution with capital above the minimum 
requirement if the specific circumstances deem such action to be 
appropriate.
    (c) Unsafe or unsound condition. Any insured depository institution 
with a

[[Page 220]]

ratio of tier 1 capital to total assets \10\ that is less than two 
percent is deemed to be operating in an unsafe or unsound condition 
pursuant to section 8(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1818(a)).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \10\ For purposes of this paragraph (c), until January 1, 2015, the 
term total assets shall have the same meaning as provided in 12 CFR 
325.2(x). As of January 1, 2015, the term total assets shall have the 
same meaning as provided in 12 CFR 324.401(g).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) An insured depository institution with a ratio of tier 1 capital 
to total assets of less than two percent which has entered into and is 
in compliance with a written agreement with the FDIC (or any other 
insured depository institution with a ratio of tier 1 capital to total 
assets of less than two percent which has entered into and is in 
compliance with a written agreement with its primary Federal regulator 
and to which agreement the FDIC is a party) to increase its tier 1 
leverage capital ratio to such level as the FDIC deems appropriate and 
to take such other action as may be necessary for the insured depository 
institution to be operated in a safe and sound manner, will not be 
subject to a proceeding by the FDIC pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(a) on 
account of its capital ratios.
    (2) An insured depository institution with a ratio of tier 1 capital 
to total assets that is equal to or greater than two percent may be 
operating in an unsafe or unsound condition. The FDIC is not precluded 
from bringing an action pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(a) where an insured 
depository institution has a ratio of tier 1 capital to total assets 
that is equal to or greater than two percent.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Sec. 324.5  Issuance of directives.

    (a) General. A directive is a final order issued to an FDIC-
supervised institution that fails to maintain capital at or above the 
minimum leverage capital requirement as set forth in Secs. 324.4 and 
324.10. A directive issued pursuant to this section, including a plan 
submitted under a directive, is enforceable in the same manner and to 
the same extent as a final cease-and-desist order issued under section 
8(b) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)).
    (b) Issuance of directives. If an FDIC-supervised institution is 
operating with less than the minimum leverage capital requirement 
established by this regulation, the FDIC Board of Directors, or its 
designee(s), may issue and serve upon any FDIC-supervised institution a 
directive requiring the FDIC-supervised institution to restore its 
capital to the minimum leverage capital requirement within a specified 
time period. The directive may require the FDIC-supervised institution 
to submit to the appropriate FDIC regional director, or other specified 
official, for review and approval, a plan describing the means and 
timing by which the FDIC-supervised institution shall achieve the 
minimum leverage capital requirement. After the FDIC has approved the 
plan, the FDIC-supervised institution may be required under the terms of 
the directive to adhere to and monitor compliance with the plan. The 
directive may be issued during the course of an examination of the FDIC-
supervised institution, or at any other time that the FDIC deems 
appropriate, if the FDIC-supervised institution is found to be operating 
with less than the minimum leverage capital requirement.
    (c) Notice and opportunity to respond to issuance of a directive. 
(1) If the FDIC makes an initial determination that a directive should 
be issued to an FDIC-supervised institution pursuant to paragraph (b) of 
this section, the FDIC, through the appropriate designated official(s), 
shall serve written notification upon the FDIC-supervised institution of 
its intent to issue a directive. The notice shall include the current 
leverage capital ratio, the basis upon which said ratio was calculated, 
the proposed capital injection, the proposed date for achieving the 
minimum leverage capital requirement and any other relevant information 
concerning the decision to issue a directive. When deemed appropriate, 
specific requirements of a proposed plan for meeting the minimum 
leverage capital requirement may be included in the notice.
    (2) Within 14 days of receipt of notification, the FDIC-supervised 
institution

[[Page 221]]

may file with the appropriate designated FDIC official(s) a written 
response, explaining why the directive should not be issued, seeking 
modification of its terms, or other appropriate relief. The FDIC-
supervised institution's response shall include any information, 
mitigating circumstances, documentation, or other relevant evidence 
which supports its position, and may include a plan for attaining the 
minimum leverage capital requirement.
    (3)(i) After considering the FDIC-supervised institution's response, 
the appropriate designated FDIC official(s) shall serve upon the FDIC-
supervised institution a written determination addressing the FDIC-
supervised institution's response and setting forth the FDIC's findings 
and conclusions in support of any decision to issue or not to issue a 
directive. The directive may be issued as originally proposed or in 
modified form. The directive may order the FDIC-supervised institution 
to:
    (A) Achieve the minimum leverage capital requirement established by 
this regulation by a certain date;
    (B) Submit for approval and adhere to a plan for achieving the 
minimum leverage capital requirement;
    (C) Take other action as is necessary to achieve the minimum 
leverage capital requirement; or
    (D) A combination of the above actions.
    (ii) If a directive is to be issued, it may be served upon the FDIC-
supervised institution along with the final determination.
    (4) Any FDIC-supervised institution, upon a change in circumstances, 
may request the FDIC to reconsider the terms of a directive and may 
propose changes in the plan under which it is operating to meet the 
minimum leverage capital requirement. The directive and plan continue in 
effect while such request is pending before the FDIC.
    (5) All papers filed with the FDIC must be postmarked or received by 
the appropriate designated FDIC official(s) within the prescribed time 
limit for filing.
    (6) Failure by the FDIC-supervised institution to file a written 
response to notification of intent to issue a directive within the 
specified time period shall constitute consent to the issuance of such 
directive.
    (d) Enforcement of a directive. (1) Whenever an FDIC-supervised 
institution fails to follow the directive or to submit or adhere to its 
capital adequacy plan, the FDIC may seek enforcement of the directive in 
the appropriate United States district court, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
3907(b)(2)(B)(ii), in the same manner and to the same extent as if the 
directive were a final cease-and-desist order. In addition to 
enforcement of the directive, the FDIC may seek assessment of civil 
money penalties for violation of the directive against any FDIC-
supervised institution, any officer, director, employee, agent, or other 
person participating in the conduct of the affairs of the FDIC-
supervised institution, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3909(d).
    (2) The directive may be issued separately, in conjunction with, or 
in addition to, any other enforcement mechanisms available to the FDIC, 
including cease-and-desist orders, orders of correction, the approval or 
denial of applications, or any other actions authorized by law. In 
addition to addressing an FDIC-supervised institution's minimum leverage 
capital requirement, the capital directive may also address minimum 
risk-based capital requirements that are to be maintained and calculated 
in accordance with Sec. 324.10, and, for state savings associations, the 
minimum tangible capital requirements set for in Sec. 324.10.



Secs. 324.6-324.9  [Reserved]



            Subpart B_Capital Ratio Requirements and Buffers



Sec. 324.10  Minimum capital requirements.

    (a) Minimum capital requirements. An FDIC-supervised institution 
must maintain the following minimum capital ratios:
    (1) A common equity tier 1 capital ratio of 4.5 percent.
    (2) A tier 1 capital ratio of 6 percent.
    (3) A total capital ratio of 8 percent.
    (4) A leverage ratio of 4 percent.
    (5) For advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institutions, a 
supplementary leverage ratio of 3 percent.

[[Page 222]]

    (6) For state savings associations, a tangible capital ratio of 1.5 
percent.
    (b) Standardized capital ratio calculations. Other than as provided 
in paragraph (c) of this section:
    (1) Common equity tier 1 capital ratio. An FDIC-supervised 
institution's common equity tier 1 capital ratio is the ratio of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's common equity tier 1 capital to 
standardized total risk-weighted assets;
    (2) Tier 1 capital ratio. An FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 
capital ratio is the ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 
capital to standardized total risk-weighted assets;
    (3) Total capital ratio. An FDIC-supervised institution's total 
capital ratio is the ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's total 
capital to standardized total risk-weighted assets; and
    (4) Leverage ratio. An FDIC-supervised institution's leverage ratio 
is the ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 capital to the 
FDIC-supervised institution's average total consolidated assets as 
reported on the FDIC-supervised institution's Call Report minus amounts 
deducted from tier 1 capital under Sec. 324.22(a), (c), and (d).
    (5) State savings association tangible capital ratio. (i) Until 
January 1, 2015, a state savings association shall determine its 
tangible capital ratio in accordance with 12 CFR 390.468.
    (ii) As of January 1, 2015, a state savings association's tangible 
capital ratio is the ratio of the state savings association's core 
capital (tier 1 capital) to total assets. For purposes of this 
paragraph, the term total assets shall have the meaning provided in 
Sec. 324.401(g).
    (c) Advanced approaches capital ratio calculations. An advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution that has completed the parallel 
run process and received notification from the FDIC pursuant to 
Sec. 324.121(d) must determine its regulatory capital ratios as 
described in paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this section. An advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution must determine its supplementary 
leverage ratio in accordance with paragraph (c)(4) of this section, 
beginning with the calendar quarter immediately following the quarter in 
which the FDIC-supervised institution meets any of the criteria in 
Sec. 324.100(b)(1).
    (1) Common equity tier 1 capital ratio. The FDIC-supervised 
institution's common equity tier 1 capital ratio is the lower of:
    (i) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's common equity 
tier 1 capital to standardized total risk-weighted assets; and
    (ii) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's common equity 
tier 1 capital to advanced approaches total risk-weighted assets.
    (2) Tier 1 capital ratio. The FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 
capital ratio is the lower of:
    (i) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 capital to 
standardized total risk-weighted assets; and
    (ii) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 capital 
to advanced approaches total risk-weighted assets.
    (3) Total capital ratio. The FDIC-supervised institution's total 
capital ratio is the lower of:
    (i) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's total capital to 
standardized total risk-weighted assets; and
    (ii) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's advanced-
approaches-adjusted total capital to advanced approaches total risk-
weighted assets. An FDIC-supervised institution's advanced-approaches-
adjusted total capital is the FDIC-supervised institution's total 
capital after being adjusted as follows:
    (A) An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must deduct 
from its total capital any allowance for loan and lease losses included 
in its tier 2 capital in accordance with Sec. 324.20(d)(3); and
    (B) An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must add to 
its total capital any eligible credit reserves that exceed the FDIC-
supervised institution's total expected credit losses to the extent that 
the excess reserve amount does not exceed 0.6 percent of the FDIC-
supervised institution's credit risk-weighted assets.
    (4) Supplementary leverage ratio. (i) An advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution's supplementary leverage ratio is the ratio of 
its tier 1 capital to total leverage exposure, the latter which is 
calculated as the sum of:

[[Page 223]]

    (A) The mean of the on-balance sheet assets calculated as of each 
day of the reporting quarter; and
    (B) The mean of the off-balance sheet exposures calculated as of the 
last day of each of the most recent three months, minus the applicable 
deductions under Sec. 324.22(a), (c), and (d).
    (ii) For purposes of this part, total leverage exposure means the 
sum of the items described in paragraphs (c)(4)(ii)(A) through (H) of 
this section, as adjusted pursuant to paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(I) for a 
clearing member FDIC-supervised institution:
    (A) The balance sheet carrying value of all of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's on-balance sheet assets, plus the value of securities sold 
under a repurchase transaction or a securities lending transaction that 
qualifies for sales treatment under U.S. GAAP, less amounts deducted 
from tier 1 capital under Sec. 324.22(a), (c), and (d), and less the 
value of securities received in security-for-security repo-style 
transactions, where the FDIC-supervised institution acts as a securities 
lender and includes the securities received in its on-balance sheet 
assets but has not sold or re-hypothecated the securities received;
    (B) The PFE for each derivative contract or each single-product 
netting set of derivative contracts (including a cleared transaction 
except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(I) of this section and, at 
the discretion of the FDIC-supervised institution, excluding a forward 
agreement treated as a derivative contract that is part of a repurchase 
or reverse repurchase or a securities borrowing or lending transaction 
that qualifies for sales treatment under U.S. GAAP), to which the FDIC-
supervised institution is a counterparty as determined under 
Sec. 324.34, but without regard to Sec. 324.34(b), provided that:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution may choose to exclude the PFE of 
all credit derivatives or other similar instruments through which it 
provides credit protection when calculating the PFE under Sec. 324.34, 
but without regard to Sec. 324.34(b), provided that it does not adjust 
the net-to-gross ratio (NGR); and
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that chooses to exclude the PFE 
of credit derivatives or other similar instruments through which it 
provides credit protection pursuant to paragraph (c)(4)(ii)(B)(1) of 
this section must do so consistently over time for the calculation of 
the PFE for all such instruments;
    (C) The amount of cash collateral that is received from a 
counterparty to a derivative contract and that has offset the mark-to-
fair value of the derivative asset, or cash collateral that is posted to 
a counterparty to a derivative contract and that has reduced the FDIC-
supervised institution's on-balance sheet assets, unless such cash 
collateral is all or part of variation margin that satisfies the 
following requirements:
    (1) For derivative contracts that are not cleared through a QCCP, 
the cash collateral received by the recipient counterparty is not 
segregated (by law, regulation or an agreement with the counterparty);
    (2) Variation margin is calculated and transferred on a daily basis 
based on the mark-to-fair value of the derivative contract;
    (3) The variation margin transferred under the derivative contract 
or the governing rules for a cleared transaction is the full amount that 
is necessary to fully extinguish the net current credit exposure to the 
counterparty of the derivative contracts, subject to the threshold and 
minimum transfer amounts applicable to the counterparty under the terms 
of the derivative contract or the governing rules for a cleared 
transaction;
    (4) The variation margin is in the form of cash in the same currency 
as the currency of settlement set forth in the derivative contract, 
provided that for the purposes of this paragraph, currency of settlement 
means any currency for settlement specified in the governing qualifying 
master netting agreement and the credit support annex to the qualifying 
master netting agreement, or in the governing rules for a cleared 
transaction;
    (5) The derivative contract and the variation margin are governed by 
a qualifying master netting agreement between the legal entities that 
are the counterparties to the derivative contract or by the governing 
rules for a

[[Page 224]]

cleared transaction, and the qualifying master netting agreement or the 
governing rules for a cleared transaction must explicitly stipulate that 
the counterparties agree to settle any payment obligations on a net 
basis, taking into account any variation margin received or provided 
under the contract if a credit event involving either counterparty 
occurs;
    (6) The variation margin is used to reduce the current credit 
exposure of the derivative contract, calculated as described in 
Sec. 324.34(a), and not the PFE; and
    (7) For the purpose of the calculation of the NGR described in 
Sec. 324.34(a)(2)(ii)(B), variation margin described in paragraph 
(c)(4)(ii)(C)(6) of this section may not reduce the net current credit 
exposure or the gross current credit exposure;
    (D) The effective notional principal amount (that is, the apparent 
or stated notional principal amount multiplied by any multiplier in the 
derivative contract) of a credit derivative, or other similar 
instrument, through which the FDIC-supervised institution provides 
credit protection, provided that:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution may reduce the effective 
notional principal amount of the credit derivative by the amount of any 
reduction in the mark-to-fair value of the credit derivative if the 
reduction is recognized in common equity tier 1 capital;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution may reduce the effective 
notional principal amount of the credit derivative by the effective 
notional principal amount of a purchased credit derivative or other 
similar instrument, provided that the remaining maturity of the 
purchased credit derivative is equal to or greater than the remaining 
maturity of the credit derivative through which the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides credit protection and that:
    (i) With respect to a credit derivative that references a single 
exposure, the reference exposure of the purchased credit derivative is 
to the same legal entity and ranks pari passu with, or is junior to, the 
reference exposure of the credit derivative through which the FDIC-
supervised institution provides credit protection; or
    (ii) With respect to a credit derivative that references multiple 
exposures, the reference exposures of the purchased credit derivative 
are to the same legal entities and rank pari passu with the reference 
exposures of the credit derivative through which the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides credit protection, and the level of seniority of 
the purchased credit derivative ranks pari passu to the level of 
seniority of the credit derivative through which the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides credit protection;
    (iii) Where an FDIC-supervised institution has reduced the effective 
notional amount of a credit derivative through which the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides credit protection in accordance with paragraph 
(c)(4)(ii)(D)(1) of this section, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
also reduce the effective notional principal amount of a purchased 
credit derivative used to offset the credit derivative through which the 
FDIC-supervised institution provides credit protection, by the amount of 
any increase in the mark-to-fair value of the purchased credit 
derivative that is recognized in common equity tier 1 capital; and
    (iv) Where the FDIC-supervised institution purchases credit 
protection through a total return swap and records the net payments 
received on a credit derivative through which the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides credit protection in net income, but does not 
record offsetting deterioration in the mark-to-fair value of the credit 
derivative through which the FDIC-supervised institution provides credit 
protection in net income (either through reductions in fair value or by 
additions to reserves), the FDIC-supervised institution may not use the 
purchased credit protection to offset the effective notional principal 
amount of the related credit derivative through which the FDIC-
supervised institution provides credit protection;
    (E) Where an FDIC-supervised institution acting as a principal has 
more than one repo-style transaction with the same counterparty and has 
offset the gross value of receivables due from a counterparty under 
reverse repurchase transactions by the gross value

[[Page 225]]

of payables under repurchase transactions due to the same counterparty, 
the gross value of receivables associated with the repo-style 
transactions less any on-balance sheet receivables amount associated 
with these repo-style transactions included under paragraph 
(c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section, unless the following criteria are met:
    (1) The offsetting transactions have the same explicit final 
settlement date under their governing agreements;
    (2) The right to offset the amount owed to the counterparty with the 
amount owed by the counterparty is legally enforceable in the normal 
course of business and in the event of receivership, insolvency, 
liquidation, or similar proceeding; and
    (3) Under the governing agreements, the counterparties intend to 
settle net, settle simultaneously, or settle according to a process that 
is the functional equivalent of net settlement, (that is, the cash flows 
of the transactions are equivalent, in effect, to a single net amount on 
the settlement date), where both transactions are settled through the 
same settlement system, the settlement arrangements are supported by 
cash or intraday credit facilities intended to ensure that settlement of 
both transactions will occur by the end of the business day, and the 
settlement of the underlying securities does not interfere with the net 
cash settlement;
    (F) The counterparty credit risk of a repo-style transaction, 
including where the FDIC-supervised institution acts as an agent for a 
repo-style transaction and indemnifies the customer with respect to the 
performance of the customer's counterparty in an amount limited to the 
difference between the fair value of the security or cash its customer 
has lent and the fair value of the collateral the borrower has provided, 
calculated as follows:
    (1) If the transaction is not subject to a qualifying master netting 
agreement, the counterparty credit risk (E*) for transactions with a 
counterparty must be calculated on a transaction by transaction basis, 
such that each transaction i is treated as its own netting set, in 
accordance with the following formula, where Ei is the fair 
value of the instruments, gold, or cash that the FDIC-supervised 
institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or provided as 
collateral to the counterparty, and Ci is the fair value of 
the instruments, gold, or cash that the FDIC-supervised institution has 
borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or received as collateral from 
the counterparty:


Ei* = max 0, [Ei^Ci]   ]; and

    (2) If the transaction is subject to a qualifying master netting 
agreement, the counterparty credit risk (E*) must be calculated as the 
greater of zero and the total fair value of the instruments, gold, or 
cash that the FDIC-supervised institution has lent, sold subject to 
repurchase or provided as collateral to a counterparty for all 
transactions included in the qualifying master netting agreement 
(SEi), less the total fair value of the instruments, gold, or 
cash that the FDIC-supervised institution borrowed, purchased subject to 
resale or received as collateral from the counterparty for those 
transactions (SCi), in accordance with the following formula:

E* = max 0, [SEi--SCi] ^

    (G) If an FDIC-supervised institution acting as an agent for a repo-
style transaction provides a guarantee to a customer of the security or 
cash its customer has lent or borrowed with respect to the performance 
of the customer's counterparty and the guarantee is not limited to the 
difference between the fair value of the security or cash its customer 
has lent and the fair value of the collateral the borrower has provided, 
the amount of the guarantee that is greater than the difference between 
the fair value of the security or cash its customer has lent and the 
value of the collateral the borrower has provided;
    (H) The credit equivalent amount of all off-balance sheet exposures 
of the FDIC-supervised institution, excluding repo-style transactions, 
repurchase or reverse repurchase or securities borrowing or lending 
transactions that qualify for sales treatment under U.S. GAAP, and 
derivative transactions, determined using the applicable credit 
conversation factor under Sec. 324.33(b), provided, however, that the 
minimum credit conversion factor that may be

[[Page 226]]

assigned to an off-balance sheet exposure under this paragraph is 10 
percent; and
    (I) For an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member:
    (1) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution that guarantees 
the performance of a clearing member client with respect to a cleared 
transaction must treat its exposure to the clearing member client as a 
derivative contract for purposes of determining its total leverage 
exposure;
    (2) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution that guarantees 
the performance of a CCP with respect to a transaction cleared on behalf 
of a clearing member client must treat its exposure to the CCP as a 
derivative contract for purposes of determining its total leverage 
exposure;
    (3) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution that does not 
guarantee the performance of a CCP with respect to a transaction cleared 
on behalf of a clearing member client may exclude its exposure to the 
CCP for purposes of determining its total leverage exposure;
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member may 
exclude from its total leverage exposure the effective notional 
principal amount of credit protection sold through a credit derivative 
contract, or other similar instrument, that it clears on behalf of a 
clearing member client through a CCP as calculated in accordance with 
part (c)(4)(ii)(D); and
    (5) Notwithstanding paragraphs (c)(4)(ii)(I)(1) through (3) of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution may exclude from its total 
leverage exposure a clearing member's exposure to a clearing member 
client for a derivative contract, if the clearing member client and the 
clearing member are affiliates and consolidated for financial reporting 
purposes on the FDIC-supervised institution's balance sheet.
    (5) State savings association tangible capital ratio. (i) Until 
January 1, 2014, a state savings association shall determine its 
tangible capital ratio in accordance with 12 CFR 390.468.
    (ii) As of January 1, 2014, a state savings association's tangible 
capital ratio is the ratio of the state savings association's core 
capital (tier 1 capital) to total assets. For purposes of this 
paragraph, the term total assets shall have the meaning provided in 12 
CFR 324.401(g).
    (d) Capital adequacy. (1) Notwithstanding the minimum requirements 
in this part, An FDIC-supervised institution must maintain capital 
commensurate with the level and nature of all risks to which the FDIC-
supervised institution is exposed.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must have a process for assessing 
its overall capital adequacy in relation to its risk profile and a 
comprehensive strategy for maintaining an appropriate level of capital.
    (3) Insured depository institutions with less than the minimum 
leverage capital requirement. (i) An insured depository institution 
making an application to the FDIC operating with less than the minimum 
leverage capital requirement does not have adequate capital and 
therefore has inadequate financial resources.
    (ii) Any insured depository institution operating with an inadequate 
capital structure, and therefore inadequate financial resources, will 
not receive approval for an application requiring the FDIC to consider 
the adequacy of its capital structure or its financial resources.
    (iii) In any merger, acquisition, or other type of business 
combination where the FDIC must give its approval, where it is required 
to consider the adequacy of the financial resources of the existing and 
proposed institutions, and where the resulting entity is either insured 
by the FDIC or not otherwise federally insured, approval will not be 
granted when the resulting entity does not meet the minimum leverage 
capital requirement.
    (iv) Exceptions. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 
(d)(3)(i), (ii) and (iii) of this section:
    (A) The FDIC, in its discretion, may approve an application pursuant 
to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act where it is required to consider 
the adequacy of capital if it finds that such approval must be taken to 
prevent the closing of a depository institution or to facilitate the 
acquisition of a closed depository institution, or, when severe 
financial conditions exist which threaten the

[[Page 227]]

stability of an insured depository institution or of a significant 
number of depository institutions insured by the FDIC or of insured 
depository institutions possessing significant financial resources, if 
such action is taken to lessen the risk to the FDIC posed by an insured 
depository institution under such threat of instability.
    (B) The FDIC, in its discretion, may approve an application pursuant 
to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act where it is required to consider 
the adequacy of capital or the financial resources of the insured 
depository institution where it finds that the applicant has committed 
to and is in compliance with a reasonable plan to meet its minimum 
leverage capital requirements within a reasonable period of time.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20758, Apr. 14, 2014; 
79 FR 57748, Sept. 26, 2014; 80 FR 41422, July 15, 2015]



Sec. 324.11  Capital conservation buffer and countercyclical capital
buffer amount.

    (a) Capital conservation buffer. (1) Composition of the capital 
conservation buffer. The capital conservation buffer is composed solely 
of common equity tier 1 capital.
    (2) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions apply:
    (i) Eligible retained income. The eligible retained income of an 
FDIC-supervised institution is the FDIC-supervised institution's net 
income for the four calendar quarters preceding the current calendar 
quarter, based on the FDIC-supervised institution's quarterly Call 
Reports, net of any distributions and associated tax effects not already 
reflected in net income.
    (ii) Maximum payout ratio. The maximum payout ratio is the 
percentage of eligible retained income that an FDIC-supervised 
institution can pay out in the form of distributions and discretionary 
bonus payments during the current calendar quarter. The maximum payout 
ratio is based on the FDIC-supervised institution's capital conservation 
buffer, calculated as of the last day of the previous calendar quarter, 
as set forth in Table 1 to Sec. 324.11.
    (iii) Maximum payout amount. An FDIC-supervised institution's 
maximum payout amount for the current calendar quarter is equal to the 
FDIC-supervised institution's eligible retained income, multiplied by 
the applicable maximum payout ratio, as set forth in Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.11.
    (iv) Private sector credit exposure. Private sector credit exposure 
means an exposure to a company or an individual that is not an exposure 
to a sovereign, the Bank for International Settlements, the European 
Central Bank, the European Commission, the International Monetary Fund, 
an MDB, a PSE, or a GSE.
    (3) Calculation of capital conservation buffer. (i) An FDIC-
supervised institution's capital conservation buffer is equal to the 
lowest of the following ratios, calculated as of the last day of the 
previous calendar quarter based on the FDIC-supervised institution's 
most recent Call Report:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution's common equity tier 1 capital 
ratio minus the FDIC-supervised institution's minimum common equity tier 
1 capital ratio requirement under Sec. 324.10;
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 capital ratio minus the 
FDIC-supervised institution's minimum tier 1 capital ratio requirement 
under Sec. 324.10; and
    (C) The FDIC-supervised institution's total capital ratio minus the 
FDIC-supervised institution's minimum total capital ratio requirement 
under Sec. 324.10; or
    (ii) Notwithstanding paragraphs (a)(3)(i)(A)-(C) of this section, if 
the FDIC-supervised institution's common equity tier 1, tier 1 or total 
capital ratio is less than or equal to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
minimum common equity tier 1, tier 1 or total capital ratio requirement 
under Sec. 324.10, respectively, the FDIC-supervised institution's 
capital conservation buffer is zero.
    (4) Limits on distributions and discretionary bonus payments. (i) An 
FDIC-supervised institution shall not make distributions or 
discretionary bonus payments or create an obligation to make such 
distributions or payments during the current calendar quarter that, in

[[Page 228]]

the aggregate, exceed the maximum payout amount.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution with a capital conservation 
buffer that is greater than 2.5 percent plus 100 percent of its 
applicable countercyclical capital buffer, in accordance with paragraph 
(b) of this section, is not subject to a maximum payout amount under 
this section.
    (iii) Negative eligible retained income. Except as provided in 
paragraph (a)(4)(iv) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution may 
not make distributions or discretionary bonus payments during the 
current calendar quarter if the FDIC-supervised institution's:
    (A) Eligible retained income is negative; and
    (B) Capital conservation buffer was less than 2.5 percent as of the 
end of the previous calendar quarter.
    (iv) Prior approval. Notwithstanding the limitations in paragraphs 
(a)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section, the FDIC may permit an FDIC-
supervised institution to make a distribution or discretionary bonus 
payment upon a request of the FDIC-supervised institution, if the FDIC 
determines that the distribution or discretionary bonus payment would 
not be contrary to the purposes of this section, or to the safety and 
soundness of the FDIC-supervised institution. In making such a 
determination, the FDIC will consider the nature and extent of the 
request and the particular circumstances giving rise to the request.

      Table 1 to Sec. 324.11--Calculation of Maximum Payout Amount
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Maximum payout ratio (as a
        Capital conservation buffer             percentage of eligible
                                                   retained income)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Greater than 2.5 percent plus 100 percent    No payout ratio limitation
 of the FDIC-supervised institution's         applies.
 applicable countercyclical capital buffer
 amount.
Less than or equal to 2.5 percent plus 100   60 percent.
 percent of the FDIC-supervised
 institution's applicable countercyclical
 capital buffer amount, and greater than
 1.875 percent plus 75 percent of the FDIC-
 supervised institution's applicable
 countercyclical capital buffer amount.
Less than or equal to 1.875 percent plus 75  40 percent.
 percent of the FDIC-supervised
 institution's applicable countercyclical
 capital buffer amount, and greater than
 1.25 percent plus 50 percent of the FDIC-
 supervised institution's applicable
 countercyclical capital buffer amount.
Less than or equal to 1.25 percent plus 50   20 percent.
 percent of the FDIC-supervised
 institution's applicable countercyclical
 capital buffer amount, and greater than
 0.625 percent plus 25 percent of the FDIC-
 supervised institution's applicable
 countercyclical capital buffer amount.
Less than or equal to 0.625 percent plus 25  0 percent.
 percent of the FDIC-supervised
 institution's applicable countercyclical
 capital buffer amount.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (v) Other limitations on distributions. Additional limitations on 
distributions may apply to an FDIC-supervised institution under 12 CFR 
303.241 and subpart H of this part.
    (b) Countercyclical capital buffer amount--(1) General. An advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a countercyclical 
capital buffer amount in accordance with the following paragraphs for 
purposes of determining its maximum payout ratio under Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.11.
    (i) Extension of capital conservation buffer. The countercyclical 
capital buffer amount is an extension of the capital conservation buffer 
as described in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (ii) Amount. An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution has 
a countercyclical capital buffer amount determined by calculating the 
weighted average of the countercyclical capital buffer amounts 
established for the national jurisdictions where the FDIC-supervised 
institution's private sector credit exposures are located, as specified 
in paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this section.
    (iii) Weighting. The weight assigned to a jurisdiction's 
countercyclical capital buffer amount is calculated by dividing the 
total risk-weighted assets for the FDIC-supervised institution's private 
sector credit exposures located in the jurisdiction by the total risk-
weighted assets for all of the FDIC-supervised institution's private 
sector credit exposures. The methodology an FDIC-supervised institution 
uses for determining risk-weighted assets for purposes of this paragraph 
(b) must be

[[Page 229]]

the methodology that determines its risk-based capital ratios under 
Sec. 324.10. Notwithstanding the previous sentence, the risk-weighted 
asset amount for a private sector credit exposure that is a covered 
position under subpart F of this part is its specific risk add-on as 
determined under Sec. 324.210 multiplied by 12.5.
    (iv) Location. (A) Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(1)(iv)(B) 
and (b)(1)(iv)(C) of this section, the location of a private sector 
credit exposure is the national jurisdiction where the borrower is 
located (that is, where it is incorporated, chartered, or similarly 
established or, if the borrower is an individual, where the borrower 
resides).
    (B) If, in accordance with subparts D or E of this part, the FDIC-
supervised institution has assigned to a private sector credit exposure 
a risk weight associated with a protection provider on a guarantee or 
credit derivative, the location of the exposure is the national 
jurisdiction where the protection provider is located.
    (C) The location of a securitization exposure is the location of the 
underlying exposures, or, if the underlying exposures are located in 
more than one national jurisdiction, the national jurisdiction where the 
underlying exposures with the largest aggregate unpaid principal balance 
are located. For purposes of this paragraph (b), the location of an 
underlying exposure shall be the location of the borrower, determined 
consistent with paragraph (b)(1)(iv)(A) of this section.
    (2) Countercyclical capital buffer amount for credit exposures in 
the United States--(i) Initial countercyclical capital buffer amount 
with respect to credit exposures in the United States. The initial 
countercyclical capital buffer amount in the United States is zero.
    (ii) Adjustment of the countercyclical capital buffer amount. The 
FDIC will adjust the countercyclical capital buffer amount for credit 
exposures in the United States in accordance with applicable law.\11\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \11\ The FDIC expects that any adjustment will be based on a 
determination made jointly by the Board, OCC, and FDIC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) Range of countercyclical capital buffer amount. The FDIC will 
adjust the countercyclical capital buffer amount for credit exposures in 
the United States between zero percent and 2.5 percent of risk-weighted 
assets.
    (iv) Adjustment determination. The FDIC will base its decision to 
adjust the countercyclical capital buffer amount under this section on a 
range of macroeconomic, financial, and supervisory information 
indicating an increase in systemic risk including, but not limited to, 
the ratio of credit to gross domestic product, a variety of asset 
prices, other factors indicative of relative credit and liquidity 
expansion or contraction, funding spreads, credit condition surveys, 
indices based on credit default swap spreads, options implied 
volatility, and measures of systemic risk.
    (v) Effective date of adjusted countercyclical capital buffer 
amount--(A) Increase adjustment. A determination by the FDIC under 
paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section to increase the countercyclical 
capital buffer amount will be effective 12 months from the date of 
announcement, unless the FDIC establishes an earlier effective date and 
includes a statement articulating the reasons for the earlier effective 
date.
    (B) Decrease adjustment. A determination by the FDIC to decrease the 
established countercyclical capital buffer amount under paragraph 
(b)(2)(ii) of this section will be effective on the day following 
announcement of the final determination or the earliest date permissible 
under applicable law or regulation, whichever is later.
    (vi) Twelve month sunset. The countercyclical capital buffer amount 
will return to zero percent 12 months after the effective date that the 
adjusted countercyclical capital buffer amount is announced, unless the 
FDIC announces a decision to maintain the adjusted countercyclical 
capital buffer amount or adjust it again before the expiration of the 
12-month period.
    (3) Countercyclical capital buffer amount for foreign jurisdictions. 
The FDIC will adjust the countercyclical capital buffer amount for 
private sector credit exposures to reflect decisions made by foreign 
jurisdictions consistent with due process requirements

[[Page 230]]

described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20758, Apr. 14, 2014; 
81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Secs. 324.12-324.19  [Reserved]



                     Subpart C_Definition of Capital



Sec. 324.20  Capital components and eligibility criteria for 
regulatory capital instruments.

    (a) Regulatory capital components. An FDIC-supervised institution's 
regulatory capital components are:
    (1) Common equity tier 1 capital;
    (2) Additional tier 1 capital; and
    (3) Tier 2 capital.
    (b) Common equity tier 1 capital. Common equity tier 1 capital is 
the sum of the common equity tier 1 capital elements in this paragraph 
(b), minus regulatory adjustments and deductions in Sec. 324.22. The 
common equity tier 1 capital elements are:
    (1) Any common stock instruments (plus any related surplus) issued 
by the FDIC-supervised institution, net of treasury stock, and any 
capital instruments issued by mutual banking organizations, that meet 
all the following criteria:
    (i) The instrument is paid-in, issued directly by the FDIC-
supervised institution, and represents the most subordinated claim in a 
receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding of the 
FDIC-supervised institution;
    (ii) The holder of the instrument is entitled to a claim on the 
residual assets of the FDIC-supervised institution that is proportional 
with the holder's share of the FDIC-supervised institution's issued 
capital after all senior claims have been satisfied in a receivership, 
insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding;
    (iii) The instrument has no maturity date, can only be redeemed via 
discretionary repurchases with the prior approval of the FDIC, and does 
not contain any term or feature that creates an incentive to redeem;
    (iv) The FDIC-supervised institution did not create at issuance of 
the instrument through any action or communication an expectation that 
it will buy back, cancel, or redeem the instrument, and the instrument 
does not include any term or feature that might give rise to such an 
expectation;
    (v) Any cash dividend payments on the instrument are paid out of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's net income and retained earnings and are 
not subject to a limit imposed by the contractual terms governing the 
instrument. An FDIC-supervised institution must obtain prior FDIC 
approval for any dividend payment involving a reduction or retirement of 
capital stock in accordance with 12 CFR 303.241;
    (vi) The FDIC-supervised institution has full discretion at all 
times to refrain from paying any dividends and making any other 
distributions on the instrument without triggering an event of default, 
a requirement to make a payment-in-kind, or an imposition of any other 
restrictions on the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (vii) Dividend payments and any other distributions on the 
instrument may be paid only after all legal and contractual obligations 
of the FDIC-supervised institution have been satisfied, including 
payments due on more senior claims;
    (viii) The holders of the instrument bear losses as they occur 
equally, proportionately, and simultaneously with the holders of all 
other common stock instruments before any losses are borne by holders of 
claims on the FDIC-supervised institution with greater priority in a 
receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding;
    (ix) The paid-in amount is classified as equity under GAAP;
    (x) The FDIC-supervised institution, or an entity that the FDIC-
supervised institution controls, did not purchase or directly or 
indirectly fund the purchase of the instrument;
    (xi) The instrument is not secured, not covered by a guarantee of 
the FDIC-supervised institution or of an affiliate of the FDIC-
supervised institution, and is not subject to any other arrangement that 
legally or economically enhances the seniority of the instrument;
    (xii) The instrument has been issued in accordance with applicable 
laws and regulations; and

[[Page 231]]

    (xiii) The instrument is reported on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's regulatory financial statements separately from other 
capital instruments.
    (2) Retained earnings.
    (3) Accumulated other comprehensive income (AOCI) as reported under 
GAAP.\12\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \12\ See Sec. 324.22 for specific adjustments related to AOCI.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Any common equity tier 1 minority interest, subject to the 
limitations in Sec. 324.21(c).
    (5) Notwithstanding the criteria for common stock instruments 
referenced above, an FDIC-supervised institution's common stock issued 
and held in trust for the benefit of its employees as part of an 
employee stock ownership plan does not violate any of the criteria in 
paragraph (b)(1)(iii), paragraph (b)(1)(iv) or paragraph (b)(1)(xi) of 
this section, provided that any repurchase of the stock is required 
solely by virtue of ERISA for an instrument of an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is not publicly-traded. In addition, an instrument 
issued by an FDIC-supervised institution to its employee stock ownership 
plan does not violate the criterion in paragraph (b)(1)(x) of this 
section.
    (c) Additional tier 1 capital. Additional tier 1 capital is the sum 
of additional tier 1 capital elements and any related surplus, minus the 
regulatory adjustments and deductions in Sec. 324.22. Additional tier 1 
capital elements are:
    (1) Instruments (plus any related surplus) that meet the following 
criteria:
    (i) The instrument is issued and paid-in;
    (ii) The instrument is subordinated to depositors, general 
creditors, and subordinated debt holders of the FDIC-supervised 
institution in a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar 
proceeding;
    (iii) The instrument is not secured, not covered by a guarantee of 
the FDIC-supervised institution or of an affiliate of the FDIC-
supervised institution, and not subject to any other arrangement that 
legally or economically enhances the seniority of the instrument;
    (iv) The instrument has no maturity date and does not contain a 
dividend step-up or any other term or feature that creates an incentive 
to redeem; and
    (v) If callable by its terms, the instrument may be called by the 
FDIC-supervised institution only after a minimum of five years following 
issuance, except that the terms of the instrument may allow it to be 
called earlier than five years upon the occurrence of a regulatory event 
that precludes the instrument from being included in additional tier 1 
capital, a tax event, or if the issuing entity is required to register 
as an investment company pursuant to the Investment Company Act. In 
addition:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution must receive prior approval from 
the FDIC to exercise a call option on the instrument.
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution does not create at issuance of 
the instrument, through any action or communication, an expectation that 
the call option will be exercised.
    (C) Prior to exercising the call option, or immediately thereafter, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must either: Replace the instrument to 
be called with an equal amount of instruments that meet the criteria 
under paragraph (b) of this section or this paragraph (c); \13\ or 
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that following redemption, 
the FDIC-supervised institution will continue to hold capital 
commensurate with its risk.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \13\ Replacement can be concurrent with redemption of existing 
additional tier 1 capital instruments.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (vi) Redemption or repurchase of the instrument requires prior 
approval from the FDIC.
    (vii) The FDIC-supervised institution has full discretion at all 
times to cancel dividends or other distributions on the instrument 
without triggering an event of default, a requirement to make a payment-
in-kind, or an imposition of other restrictions on the FDIC-supervised 
institution except in relation to any distributions to holders of common 
stock or instruments that are pari passu with the instrument.
    (viii) Any cash dividend payments on the instrument are paid out of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's net income and retained earnings and 
are not

[[Page 232]]

subject to a limit imposed by the contractual terms governing the 
instrument. An FDIC-supervised institution must obtain prior FDIC 
approval for any dividend payment involving a reduction or retirement of 
capital stock in accordance with 12 CFR 303.241.
    (ix) The instrument does not have a credit-sensitive feature, such 
as a dividend rate that is reset periodically based in whole or in part 
on the FDIC-supervised institution's credit quality, but may have a 
dividend rate that is adjusted periodically independent of the FDIC-
supervised institution's credit quality, in relation to general market 
interest rates or similar adjustments.
    (x) The paid-in amount is classified as equity under GAAP.
    (xi) The FDIC-supervised institution, or an entity that the FDIC-
supervised institution controls, did not purchase or directly or 
indirectly fund the purchase of the instrument.
    (xii) The instrument does not have any features that would limit or 
discourage additional issuance of capital by the FDIC-supervised 
institution, such as provisions that require the FDIC-supervised 
institution to compensate holders of the instrument if a new instrument 
is issued at a lower price during a specified time frame.
    (xiii) If the instrument is not issued directly by the FDIC-
supervised institution or by a subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised 
institution that is an operating entity, the only asset of the issuing 
entity is its investment in the capital of the FDIC-supervised 
institution, and proceeds must be immediately available without 
limitation to the FDIC-supervised institution or to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's top-tier holding company in a form which meets or exceeds 
all of the other criteria for additional tier 1 capital instruments.\14\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \14\ See 77 FR 52856 (August 30, 2012).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (xiv) For an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, the 
governing agreement, offering circular, or prospectus of an instrument 
issued after the date upon which the FDIC-supervised institution becomes 
subject to this part as set forth in Sec. 324.1(f) must disclose that 
the holders of the instrument may be fully subordinated to interests 
held by the U.S. government in the event that the FDIC-supervised 
institution enters into a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or 
similar proceeding.
    (2) Tier 1 minority interest, subject to the limitations in 
Sec. 324.21(d), that is not included in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's common equity tier 1 capital.
    (3) Any and all instruments that qualified as tier 1 capital under 
the FDIC's general risk-based capital rules under 12 CFR part 325, 
appendix A (state nonmember banks) and 12 CFR part 390, subpart Z (state 
savings associations) as then in effect, that were issued under the 
Small Business Jobs Act of 2010 \15\ or prior to October 4, 2010, under 
the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008.\16\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \15\ Public Law 111-240; 124 Stat. 2504 (2010).
    \16\ Public Law 110-343, 122 Stat. 3765 (2008).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Notwithstanding the criteria for additional tier 1 capital 
instruments referenced above:
    (i) An instrument issued by an FDIC-supervised institution and held 
in trust for the benefit of its employees as part of an employee stock 
ownership plan does not violate any of the criteria in paragraph 
(c)(1)(iii) of this section, provided that any repurchase is required 
solely by virtue of ERISA for an instrument of an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is not publicly-traded. In addition, an instrument 
issued by an FDIC-supervised institution to its employee stock ownership 
plan does not violate the criteria in paragraph (c)(1)(v) or paragraph 
(c)(1)(xi) of this section; and
    (ii) An instrument with terms that provide that the instrument may 
be called earlier than five years upon the occurrence of a rating agency 
event does not violate the criterion in paragraph (c)(1)(v) of this 
section provided that the instrument was issued and included in an FDIC-
supervised institution's tier 1 capital prior to the January 1, 2014, 
and that such instrument satisfies all other criteria under this 
paragraph (c).
    (d) Tier 2 Capital. Tier 2 capital is the sum of tier 2 capital 
elements and any

[[Page 233]]

related surplus, minus regulatory adjustments and deductions in 
Sec. 324.22. Tier 2 capital elements are:
    (1) Instruments (plus related surplus) that meet the following 
criteria:
    (i) The instrument is issued and paid-in;
    (ii) The instrument is subordinated to depositors and general 
creditors of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (iii) The instrument is not secured, not covered by a guarantee of 
the FDIC-supervised institution or of an affiliate of the FDIC-
supervised institution, and not subject to any other arrangement that 
legally or economically enhances the seniority of the instrument in 
relation to more senior claims;
    (iv) The instrument has a minimum original maturity of at least five 
years. At the beginning of each of the last five years of the life of 
the instrument, the amount that is eligible to be included in tier 2 
capital is reduced by 20 percent of the original amount of the 
instrument (net of redemptions) and is excluded from regulatory capital 
when the remaining maturity is less than one year. In addition, the 
instrument must not have any terms or features that require, or create 
significant incentives for, the FDIC-supervised institution to redeem 
the instrument prior to maturity; \17\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \17\ An instrument that by its terms automatically converts into a 
tier 1 capital instrument prior to five years after issuance complies 
with the five-year maturity requirement of this criterion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (v) The instrument, by its terms, may be called by the FDIC-
supervised institution only after a minimum of five years following 
issuance, except that the terms of the instrument may allow it to be 
called sooner upon the occurrence of an event that would preclude the 
instrument from being included in tier 2 capital, a tax event, or if the 
issuing entity is required to register as an investment company pursuant 
to the Investment Company Act. In addition:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution must receive the prior approval 
of the FDIC to exercise a call option on the instrument.
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution does not create at issuance, 
through action or communication, an expectation the call option will be 
exercised.
    (C) Prior to exercising the call option, or immediately thereafter, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must either: Replace any amount called 
with an equivalent amount of an instrument that meets the criteria for 
regulatory capital under this section; \18\ or demonstrate to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC that following redemption, the FDIC-supervised 
institution would continue to hold an amount of capital that is 
commensurate with its risk.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \18\ A FDIC-supervised institution may replace tier 2 capital 
instruments concurrent with the redemption of existing tier 2 capital 
instruments.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (vi) The holder of the instrument must have no contractual right to 
accelerate payment of principal or interest on the instrument, except in 
the event of a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar 
proceeding of the FDIC-supervised institution.
    (vii) The instrument has no credit-sensitive feature, such as a 
dividend or interest rate that is reset periodically based in whole or 
in part on the FDIC-supervised institution's credit standing, but may 
have a dividend rate that is adjusted periodically independent of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's credit standing, in relation to general 
market interest rates or similar adjustments.
    (viii) The FDIC-supervised institution, or an entity that the FDIC-
supervised institution controls, has not purchased and has not directly 
or indirectly funded the purchase of the instrument.
    (ix) If the instrument is not issued directly by the FDIC-supervised 
institution or by a subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution that 
is an operating entity, the only asset of the issuing entity is its 
investment in the capital of the FDIC-supervised institution, and 
proceeds must be immediately available without limitation to the FDIC-
supervised institution or the FDIC-supervised institution's top-tier 
holding company in a form that meets or exceeds all the other criteria 
for tier

[[Page 234]]

2 capital instruments under this section.\19\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \19\ A FDIC-supervised institution may disregard de minimis assets 
related to the operation of the issuing entity for purposes of this 
criterion.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (x) Redemption of the instrument prior to maturity or repurchase 
requires the prior approval of the FDIC.
    (xi) For an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, the 
governing agreement, offering circular, or prospectus of an instrument 
issued after the date on which the advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution becomes subject to this part under Sec. 324.1(f) must 
disclose that the holders of the instrument may be fully subordinated to 
interests held by the U.S. government in the event that the FDIC-
supervised institution enters into a receivership, insolvency, 
liquidation, or similar proceeding.
    (2) Total capital minority interest, subject to the limitations set 
forth in Sec. 324.21(e), that is not included in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's tier 1 capital.
    (3) ALLL up to 1.25 percent of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
standardized total risk-weighted assets not including any amount of the 
ALLL (and excluding in the case of a market risk FDIC-supervised 
institution, its standardized market risk-weighted assets).
    (4) Any instrument that qualified as tier 2 capital under the FDIC's 
general risk-based capital rules under 12 CFR part 325, appendix A 
(state nonmember banks) and 12 CFR part 390, appendix Z (state saving 
associations) as then in effect, that were issued under the Small 
Business Jobs Act of 2010,\20\ or prior to October 4, 2010, under the 
Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008.\21\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \20\ Public Law 111-240; 124 Stat. 2504 (2010)
    \21\ Public Law 110-343, 122 Stat. 3765 (2008)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (5) For an FDIC-supervised institution that makes an AOCI opt-out 
election (as defined in Sec. 324.22(b)(2), 45 percent of pretax net 
unrealized gains on available-for-sale preferred stock classified as an 
equity security under GAAP and available-for-sale equity exposures.
    (6) Notwithstanding the criteria for tier 2 capital instruments 
referenced above, an instrument with terms that provide that the 
instrument may be called earlier than five years upon the occurrence of 
a rating agency event does not violate the criterion in paragraph 
(d)(1)(v) of this section provided that the instrument was issued and 
included in an FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 or tier 2 capital 
prior to January 1, 2014, and that such instrument satisfies all other 
criteria under this paragraph (d).
    (e) FDIC approval of a capital element. (1) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must receive FDIC prior approval to include a capital 
element (as listed in this section) in its common equity tier 1 capital, 
additional tier 1 capital, or tier 2 capital unless the element:
    (i) Was included in an FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 capital 
or tier 2 capital prior to May 19, 2010, in accordance with the FDIC's 
risk-based capital rules that were effective as of that date and the 
underlying instrument may continue to be included under the criteria set 
forth in this section; or
    (ii) Is equivalent, in terms of capital quality and ability to 
absorb losses with respect to all material terms, to a regulatory 
capital element the FDIC determined may be included in regulatory 
capital pursuant to paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
    (2) When considering whether an FDIC-supervised institution may 
include a regulatory capital element in its common equity tier 1 
capital, additional tier 1 capital, or tier 2 capital, the FDIC will 
consult with the OCC and the Federal Reserve.
    (3) After determining that a regulatory capital element may be 
included in an FDIC-supervised institution's common equity tier 1 
capital, additional tier 1 capital, or tier 2 capital, the FDIC will 
make its decision publicly available, including a brief description of 
the material terms of the regulatory capital element and the rationale 
for the determination.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Sec. 324.21  Minority interest.

    (a) Applicability. For purposes of Sec. 324.20, an FDIC-supervised 
institution

[[Page 235]]

is subject to the minority interest limitations in this section if:
    (1) A consolidated subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution has 
issued regulatory capital that is not owned by the FDIC-supervised 
institution; and
    (2) For each relevant regulatory capital ratio of the consolidated 
subsidiary, the ratio exceeds the sum of the subsidiary's minimum 
regulatory capital requirements plus its capital conservation buffer.
    (b) Difference in capital adequacy standards at the subsidiary 
level. For purposes of the minority interest calculations in this 
section, if the consolidated subsidiary issuing the capital is not 
subject to capital adequacy standards similar to those of the FDIC-
supervised institution, the FDIC-supervised institution must assume that 
the capital adequacy standards of the FDIC-supervised institution apply 
to the subsidiary.
    (c) Common equity tier 1 minority interest includable in the common 
equity tier 1 capital of the FDIC-supervised institution. For each 
consolidated subsidiary of an FDIC-supervised institution, the amount of 
common equity tier 1 minority interest the FDIC-supervised institution 
may include in common equity tier 1 capital is equal to:
    (1) The common equity tier 1 minority interest of the subsidiary; 
minus
    (2) The percentage of the subsidiary's common equity tier 1 capital 
that is not owned by the FDIC-supervised institution, multiplied by the 
difference between the common equity tier 1 capital of the subsidiary 
and the lower of:
    (i) The amount of common equity tier 1 capital the subsidiary must 
hold, or would be required to hold pursuant to paragraph (b) of this 
section, to avoid restrictions on distributions and discretionary bonus 
payments under Sec. 324.11 or equivalent standards established by the 
subsidiary's home country supervisor; or
    (ii)(A) The standardized total risk-weighted assets of the FDIC-
supervised institution that relate to the subsidiary multiplied by
    (B) The common equity tier 1 capital ratio the subsidiary must 
maintain to avoid restrictions on distributions and discretionary bonus 
payments under Sec. 324.11 or equivalent standards established by the 
subsidiary's home country supervisor.
    (d) Tier 1 minority interest includable in the tier 1 capital of the 
FDIC-supervised institution. For each consolidated subsidiary of the 
FDIC-supervised institution, the amount of tier 1 minority interest the 
FDIC-supervised institution may include in tier 1 capital is equal to:
    (1) The tier 1 minority interest of the subsidiary; minus
    (2) The percentage of the subsidiary's tier 1 capital that is not 
owned by the FDIC-supervised institution multiplied by the difference 
between the tier 1 capital of the subsidiary and the lower of:
    (i) The amount of tier 1 capital the subsidiary must hold, or would 
be required to hold pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, to avoid 
restrictions on distributions and discretionary bonus payments under 
Sec. 324.11 or equivalent standards established by the subsidiary's home 
country supervisor, or
    (ii)(A) The standardized total risk-weighted assets of the FDIC-
supervised institution that relate to the subsidiary multiplied by
    (B) The tier 1 capital ratio the subsidiary must maintain to avoid 
restrictions on distributions and discretionary bonus payments under 
Sec. 324.11 or equivalent standards established by the subsidiary's home 
country supervisor.
    (e) Total capital minority interest includable in the total capital 
of the FDIC-supervised institution. For each consolidated subsidiary of 
the FDIC-supervised institution, the amount of total capital minority 
interest the FDIC-supervised institution may include in total capital is 
equal to:
    (1) The total capital minority interest of the subsidiary; minus
    (2) The percentage of the subsidiary's total capital that is not 
owned by the FDIC-supervised institution multiplied by the difference 
between the total capital of the subsidiary and the lower of:
    (i) The amount of total capital the subsidiary must hold, or would 
be required to hold pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, to avoid 
restrictions on distributions and discretionary

[[Page 236]]

bonus payments under Sec. 324.11 or equivalent standards established by 
the subsidiary's home country supervisor, or
    (ii)(A) The standardized total risk-weighted assets of the FDIC-
supervised institution that relate to the subsidiary multiplied by
    (B) The total capital ratio the subsidiary must maintain to avoid 
restrictions on distributions and discretionary bonus payments under 
Sec. 324.11 or equivalent standards established by the subsidiary's home 
country supervisor.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20759, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.22  Regulatory capital adjustments and deductions.

    (a) Regulatory capital deductions from common equity tier 1 capital. 
An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct from the sum of its common 
equity tier 1 capital elements the items set forth in this paragraph 
(a):
    (1) Goodwill, net of associated deferred tax liabilities (DTLs) in 
accordance with paragraph (e) of this section, including goodwill that 
is embedded in the valuation of a significant investment in the capital 
of an unconsolidated financial institution in the form of common stock 
(and that is reflected in the consolidated financial statements of the 
FDIC-supervised institution), in accordance with paragraph (d) of this 
section;
    (2) Intangible assets, other than MSAs, net of associated DTLs in 
accordance with paragraph (e) of this section;
    (3) Deferred tax assets (DTAs) that arise from net operating loss 
and tax credit carryforwards net of any related valuation allowances and 
net of DTLs in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section;
    (4) Any gain-on-sale in connection with a securitization exposure;
    (5)(i) Any defined benefit pension fund net asset, net of any 
associated DTL in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section, held by 
a depository institution holding company. With the prior approval of the 
FDIC, this deduction is not required for any defined benefit pension 
fund net asset to the extent the depository institution holding company 
has unrestricted and unfettered access to the assets in that fund.
    (ii) For an insured depository institution, no deduction is 
required.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must risk weight any portion of 
the defined benefit pension fund asset that is not deducted under 
paragraphs (a)(5)(i) or (a)(5)(ii) of this section as if the FDIC-
supervised institution directly holds a proportional ownership share of 
each exposure in the defined benefit pension fund.
    (6) For an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution that has 
completed the parallel run process and that has received notification 
from the FDIC pursuant to Sec. 324.121(d), the amount of expected credit 
loss that exceeds its eligible credit reserves; and
    (7) With respect to a financial subsidiary, the aggregate amount of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's outstanding equity investment, 
including retained earnings, in its financial subsidiaries (as defined 
in 12 CFR 362.17). An FDIC-supervised institution must not consolidate 
the assets and liabilities of a financial subsidiary with those of the 
parent bank, and no other deduction is required under paragraph (c) of 
this section for investments in the capital instruments of financial 
subsidiaries.
    (8) (i) A state savings association must deduct the aggregate amount 
of its outstanding investments, (both equity and debt) in, and 
extensions of credit to, subsidiaries that are not includable 
subsidiaries as defined in paragraph (a)(8)(iv) of this section and may 
not consolidate the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary with those 
of the state savings association. Any such deductions shall be from 
assets and common equity tier 1 capital, except as provided in 
paragraphs (a)(8)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (ii) If a state savings association has any investments (both debt 
and equity) in, or extensions of credit to, one or more subsidiaries 
engaged in any activity that would not fall within the scope of 
activities in which includable subsidiaries as defined in paragraph 
(a)(8)(iv) of this section may engage, it must deduct such investments 
and extensions of credit from assets and, thus, common equity tier 1 
capital in

[[Page 237]]

accordance with paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section.
    (iii) If a state savings association holds a subsidiary (either 
directly or through a subsidiary) that is itself a domestic depository 
institution, the FDIC may, in its sole discretion upon determining that 
the amount of common equity tier 1 capital that would be required would 
be higher if the assets and liabilities of such subsidiary were 
consolidated with those of the parent state savings association than the 
amount that would be required if the parent state savings association's 
investment were deducted pursuant to paragraphs (a)(8)(i) and (ii) of 
this section, consolidate the assets and liabilities of that subsidiary 
with those of the parent state savings association in calculating the 
capital adequacy of the parent state savings association, regardless of 
whether the subsidiary would otherwise be an includable subsidiary as 
defined in paragraph (a)(8)(iv) of this section.
    (iv) For purposes of this section, the term includable subsidiary 
means a subsidiary of a state savings association that is:
    (A) Engaged solely in activities that are permissible for a national 
bank;
    (B) Engaged in activities not permissible for a national bank, but 
only if acting solely as agent for its customers and such agency 
position is clearly documented in the state savings association's files;
    (C) Engaged solely in mortgage-banking activities;
    (D)(1) Itself an insured depository institution or a company the 
sole investment of which is an insured depository institution, and
    (2) Was acquired by the parent state savings association prior to 
May 1, 1989; or
    (E) A subsidiary of any state savings association existing as a 
state savings association on August 9, 1989 that--
    (1) Was chartered prior to October 15, 1982, as a savings bank or a 
cooperative bank under state law, or
    (2) Acquired its principal assets from an association that was 
chartered prior to October 15, 1982, as a savings bank or a cooperative 
bank under state law.
    (9) Identified losses. An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct 
identified losses (to the extent that common equity tier 1 capital would 
have been reduced if the appropriate accounting entries to reflect the 
identified losses had been recorded on the FDIC-supervised institution's 
books).
    (b) Regulatory adjustments to common equity tier 1 capital. (1) An 
FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the sum of common equity tier 1 
capital elements pursuant to the requirements set forth in this 
paragraph (b). Such adjustments to common equity tier 1 capital must be 
made net of the associated deferred tax effects.
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that makes an AOCI opt-out 
election (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section) must make the 
adjustments required under Sec. 324.22(b)(2)(i).
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that is an advanced approaches 
FDIC-supervised institution, and an FDIC-supervised institution that has 
not made an AOCI opt-out election (as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section), must deduct any accumulated net gains and add any 
accumulated net losses on cash flow hedges included in AOCI that relate 
to the hedging of items that are not recognized at fair value on the 
balance sheet.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct any net gain and 
add any net loss related to changes in the fair value of liabilities 
that are due to changes in the FDIC-supervised institution's own credit 
risk. An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must deduct the 
difference between its credit spread premium and the risk-free rate for 
derivatives that are liabilities as part of this adjustment.
    (2) AOCI opt-out election. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that 
is not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution may make a 
one-time election to opt out of the requirement to include all 
components of AOCI (with the exception of accumulated net gains and 
losses on cash flow hedges related to items that are not fair-valued on 
the balance sheet) in common equity tier 1 capital (AOCI opt-out 
election). An FDIC-supervised institution that makes an AOCI opt-out 
election in accordance with this paragraph (b)(2)

[[Page 238]]

must adjust common equity tier 1 capital as follows:
    (A) Subtract any net unrealized gains and add any net unrealized 
losses on available-for-sale securities;
    (B) Subtract any net unrealized losses on available-for-sale 
preferred stock classified as an equity security under GAAP and 
available-for-sale equity exposures;
    (C) Subtract any accumulated net gains and add any accumulated net 
losses on cash flow hedges;
    (D) Subtract any amounts recorded in AOCI attributed to defined 
benefit postretirement plans resulting from the initial and subsequent 
application of the relevant GAAP standards that pertain to such plans 
(excluding, at the FDIC-supervised institution's option, the portion 
relating to pension assets deducted under paragraph (a)(5) of this 
section); and
    (E) Subtract any net unrealized gains and add any net unrealized 
losses on held-to-maturity securities that are included in AOCI.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that is not an advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution must make its AOCI opt-out 
election in its Call Report filed for the first reporting period after 
the date required for such FDIC-supervised institution to comply with 
subpart A of this part as set forth in Sec. 324.1(f).
    (iii) With respect to an FDIC-supervised institution that is not an 
advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, each of its subsidiary 
banking organizations that is subject to regulatory capital requirements 
issued by the Federal Reserve, the FDIC, or the OCC \22\ must elect the 
same option as the FDIC-supervised institution pursuant to this 
paragraph (b)(2).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \22\ These rules include the regulatory capital requirements set 
forth at 12 CFR part 3 (OCC); 12 CFR part 225 (Board); 12 CFR part 325, 
and 12 CFR part 390 (FDIC).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iv) With prior notice to the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution 
resulting from a merger, acquisition, or purchase transaction and that 
is not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution may change its 
AOCI opt-out election in its Call Report filed for the first reporting 
period after the date required for such FDIC-supervised institution to 
comply with subpart A of this part as set forth in Sec. 324.1(f) if:
    (A) Other than as set forth in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(C) of this 
section, the merger, acquisition, or purchase transaction involved the 
acquisition or purchase of all or substantially all of either the assets 
or voting stock of another banking organization that is subject to 
regulatory capital requirements issued by the Federal Reserve, the FDIC, 
or the OCC;
    (B) Prior to the merger, acquisition, or purchase transaction, only 
one of the banking organizations involved in the transaction made an 
AOCI opt-out election under this section; and
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution may, with the prior approval of 
the FDIC, change its AOCI opt-out election under this paragraph (b) in 
the case of a merger, acquisition, or purchase transaction that meets 
the requirements set forth at paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this section, 
but does not meet the requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(A). In making 
such a determination, the FDIC may consider the terms of the merger, 
acquisition, or purchase transaction, as well as the extent of any 
changes to the risk profile, complexity, and scope of operations of the 
FDIC-supervised institution resulting from the merger, acquisition, or 
purchase transaction.
    (c) Deductions from regulatory capital related to investments in 
capital instruments--\23\ (1) Investment in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's own capital instruments. An FDIC-supervised institution 
must deduct an investment in the FDIC-supervised institution's own 
capital instruments as follows:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \23\ The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate amounts deducted 
under paragraphs (c) through (f) of this section after it calculates the 
amount of ALLL includable in tier 2 capital under Sec. 324.20(d)(3).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct an investment in the 
FDIC-supervised institution's own common stock instruments from its 
common equity tier 1 capital elements to the extent such instruments are 
not excluded from regulatory capital under Sec. 324.20(b)(1);
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct an investment in the

[[Page 239]]

FDIC-supervised institution's own additional tier 1 capital instruments 
from its additional tier 1 capital elements; and
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct an investment in 
the FDIC-supervised institution's own tier 2 capital instruments from 
its tier 2 capital elements.
    (2) Corresponding deduction approach. For purposes of subpart C of 
this part, the corresponding deduction approach is the methodology used 
for the deductions from regulatory capital related to reciprocal cross 
holdings (as described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section), non-
significant investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial 
institutions (as described in paragraph (c)(4) of this section), and 
non-common stock significant investments in the capital of 
unconsolidated financial institutions (as described in paragraph (c)(5) 
of this section). Under the corresponding deduction approach, an FDIC-
supervised institution must make deductions from the component of 
capital for which the underlying instrument would qualify if it were 
issued by the FDIC-supervised institution itself, as described in 
paragraphs (c)(2)(i)-(iii) of this section. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution does not have a sufficient amount of a specific component of 
capital to effect the required deduction, the shortfall must be deducted 
according to paragraph (f) of this section.
    (i) If an investment is in the form of an instrument issued by a 
financial institution that is not a regulated financial institution, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must treat the instrument as:
    (A) A common equity tier 1 capital instrument if it is common stock 
or represents the most subordinated claim in liquidation of the 
financial institution; and
    (B) An additional tier 1 capital instrument if it is subordinated to 
all creditors of the financial institution and is senior in liquidation 
only to common shareholders.
    (ii) If an investment is in the form of an instrument issued by a 
regulated financial institution and the instrument does not meet the 
criteria for common equity tier 1, additional tier 1 or tier 2 capital 
instruments under Sec. 324.20, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
treat the instrument as:
    (A) A common equity tier 1 capital instrument if it is common stock 
included in GAAP equity or represents the most subordinated claim in 
liquidation of the financial institution;
    (B) An additional tier 1 capital instrument if it is included in 
GAAP equity, subordinated to all creditors of the financial institution, 
and senior in a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, or similar 
proceeding only to common shareholders; and
    (C) A tier 2 capital instrument if it is not included in GAAP equity 
but considered regulatory capital by the primary supervisor of the 
financial institution.
    (iii) If an investment is in the form of a non-qualifying capital 
instrument (as defined in Sec. 324.300(c)), the FDIC-supervised 
institution must treat the instrument as:
    (A) An additional tier 1 capital instrument if such instrument was 
included in the issuer's tier 1 capital prior to May 19, 2010; or
    (B) A tier 2 capital instrument if such instrument was included in 
the issuer's tier 2 capital (but not includable in tier 1 capital) prior 
to May 19, 2010.
    (3) Reciprocal cross holdings in the capital of financial 
institutions. An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct investments in 
the capital of other financial institutions it holds reciprocally, where 
such reciprocal cross holdings result from a formal or informal 
arrangement to swap, exchange, or otherwise intend to hold each other's 
capital instruments, by applying the corresponding deduction approach.
    (4) Non-significant investments in the capital of unconsolidated 
financial institutions. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct 
its non-significant investments in the capital of unconsolidated 
financial institutions (as defined in Sec. 324.2) that, in the 
aggregate, exceed 10 percent of the sum of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's common equity tier 1 capital elements minus all deductions 
from and adjustments to common equity tier 1 capital elements required 
under paragraphs (a) through (c)(3) of this section (the 10 percent 
threshold

[[Page 240]]

for non-significant investments) by applying the corresponding deduction 
approach.\24\ The deductions described in this section are net of 
associated DTLs in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section. In 
addition, an FDIC-supervised institution that underwrites a failed 
underwriting, with the prior written approval of the FDIC, for the 
period of time stipulated by the FDIC, is not required to deduct a non-
significant investment in the capital of an unconsolidated financial 
institution pursuant to this paragraph (c) to the extent the investment 
is related to the failed underwriting.\25\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \24\ With the prior written approval of the FDIC, for the period of 
time stipulated by the FDIC, a FDIC-supervised institution is not 
required to deduct a non-significant investment in the capital 
instrument of an unconsolidated financial institution pursuant to this 
paragraph if the financial institution is in distress and if such 
investment is made for the purpose of providing financial support to the 
financial institution, as determined by the FDIC.
    \25\ Any non-significant investments in the capital of 
unconsolidated financial institutions that do not exceed the 10 percent 
threshold for non-significant investments under this section must be 
assigned the appropriate risk weight under subparts D, E, or F of this 
part, as applicable.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The amount to be deducted under this section from a specific 
capital component is equal to:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution's non-significant investments in 
the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions exceeding the 10 
percent threshold for non-significant investments, multiplied by
    (B) The ratio of the FDIC-supervised institution's non-significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in 
the form of such capital component to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
total non-significant investments in unconsolidated financial 
institutions.
    (5) Significant investments in the capital of unconsolidated 
financial institutions that are not in the form of common stock. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must deduct its significant investments in 
the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions that are not in the 
form of common stock by applying the corresponding deduction 
approach.\26\ The deductions described in this section are net of 
associated DTLs in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section. In 
addition, with the prior written approval of the FDIC, for the period of 
time stipulated by the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution that 
underwrites a failed underwriting is not required to deduct a 
significant investment in the capital of an unconsolidated financial 
institution pursuant to this paragraph (c) if such investment is related 
to such failed underwriting.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \26\ With prior written approval of the FDIC, for the period of time 
stipulated by the FDIC, a FDIC-supervised institution is not required to 
deduct a significant investment in the capital instrument of an 
unconsolidated financial institution in distress which is not in the 
form of common stock pursuant to this section if such investment is made 
for the purpose of providing financial support to the financial 
institution as determined by the FDIC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) Items subject to the 10 and 15 percent common equity tier 1 
capital deduction thresholds. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must 
deduct from common equity tier 1 capital elements the amount of each of 
the items set forth in this paragraph (d) that, individually, exceeds 10 
percent of the sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's common equity 
tier 1 capital elements, less adjustments to and deductions from common 
equity tier 1 capital required under paragraphs (a) through (c) of this 
section (the 10 percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction 
threshold).
    (i) DTAs arising from temporary differences that the FDIC-supervised 
institution could not realize through net operating loss carrybacks, net 
of any related valuation allowances and net of DTLs, in accordance with 
paragraph (e) of this section. An FDIC-supervised institution is not 
required to deduct from the sum of its common equity tier 1 capital 
elements DTAs (net of any related valuation allowances and net of DTLs, 
in accordance with Sec. 324.22(e)) arising from timing differences that 
the FDIC-supervised institution could realize through net operating loss 
carrybacks. The FDIC-supervised institution must risk weight these 
assets at

[[Page 241]]

100 percent. For an FDIC-supervised institution that is a member of a 
consolidated group for tax purposes, the amount of DTAs that could be 
realized through net operating loss carrybacks may not exceed the amount 
that the FDIC-supervised institution could reasonably expect to have 
refunded by its parent holding company.
    (ii) MSAs net of associated DTLs, in accordance with paragraph (e) 
of this section.
    (iii) Significant investments in the capital of unconsolidated 
financial institutions in the form of common stock, net of associated 
DTLs in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section.\27\ Significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in 
the form of common stock subject to the 10 percent common equity tier 1 
capital deduction threshold may be reduced by any goodwill embedded in 
the valuation of such investments deducted by the FDIC-supervised 
institution pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section. In addition, 
with the prior written approval of the FDIC, for the period of time 
stipulated by the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution that underwrites 
a failed underwriting is not required to deduct a significant investment 
in the capital of an unconsolidated financial institution in the form of 
common stock pursuant to this paragraph (d) if such investment is 
related to such failed underwriting.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \27\ With the prior written approval of the FDIC, for the period of 
time stipulated by the FDIC, a FDIC-supervised institution is not 
required to deduct a significant investment in the capital instrument of 
an unconsolidated financial institution in distress in the form of 
common stock pursuant to this section if such investment is made for the 
purpose of providing financial support to the financial institution as 
determined by the FDIC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct from common equity 
tier 1 capital elements the items listed in paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section that are not deducted as a result of the application of the 10 
percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction threshold, and that, in 
aggregate, exceed 17.65 percent of the sum of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's common equity tier 1 capital elements, minus adjustments 
to and deductions from common equity tier 1 capital required under 
paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, minus the items listed in 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section (the 15 percent common equity tier 1 
capital deduction threshold). Any goodwill that has been deducted under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section can be excluded from the significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in 
the form of common stock.\28\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \28\ The amount of the items in paragraph (d) of this section that 
is not deducted from common equity tier 1 capital pursuant to this 
section must be included in the risk-weighted assets of the FDIC-
supervised institution and assigned a 250 percent risk weight.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) For purposes of calculating the amount of DTAs subject to the 10 
and 15 percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction thresholds, an 
FDIC-supervised institution may exclude DTAs and DTLs relating to 
adjustments made to common equity tier 1 capital under Sec. paragraph 
(b) of this section. An FDIC-supervised institution that elects to 
exclude DTAs relating to adjustments under paragraph (b) of this section 
also must exclude DTLs and must do so consistently in all future 
calculations. An FDIC-supervised institution may change its exclusion 
preference only after obtaining the prior approval of the FDIC.
    (e) Netting of DTLs against assets subject to deduction. (1) Except 
as described in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, netting of DTLs 
against assets that are subject to deduction under this section is 
permitted, but not required, if the following conditions are met:
    (i) The DTL is associated with the asset; and
    (ii) The DTL would be extinguished if the associated asset becomes 
impaired or is derecognized under GAAP.
    (2) A DTL may only be netted against a single asset.
    (3) For purposes of calculating the amount of DTAs subject to the 
threshold deduction in paragraph (d) of this section, the amount of DTAs 
that arise from net operating loss and tax credit carryforwards, net of 
any related valuation allowances, and of DTAs arising from temporary 
differences that the FDIC-supervised institution could not

[[Page 242]]

realize through net operating loss carrybacks, net of any related 
valuation allowances, may be offset by DTLs (that have not been netted 
against assets subject to deduction pursuant to paragraph (e)(1) of this 
section) subject to the conditions set forth in this paragraph (e).
    (i) Only the DTAs and DTLs that relate to taxes levied by the same 
taxation authority and that are eligible for offsetting by that 
authority may be offset for purposes of this deduction.
    (ii) The amount of DTLs that the FDIC-supervised institution nets 
against DTAs that arise from net operating loss and tax credit 
carryforwards, net of any related valuation allowances, and against DTAs 
arising from temporary differences that the FDIC-supervised institution 
could not realize through net operating loss carrybacks, net of any 
related valuation allowances, must be allocated in proportion to the 
amount of DTAs that arise from net operating loss and tax credit 
carryforwards (net of any related valuation allowances, but before any 
offsetting of DTLs) and of DTAs arising from temporary differences that 
the FDIC-supervised institution could not realize through net operating 
loss carrybacks (net of any related valuation allowances, but before any 
offsetting of DTLs), respectively.
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution may offset DTLs embedded in the 
carrying value of a leveraged lease portfolio acquired in a business 
combination that are not recognized under GAAP against DTAs that are 
subject to paragraph (d) of this section in accordance with this 
paragraph (e).
    (5) An FDIC-supervised institution must net DTLs against assets 
subject to deduction under this section in a consistent manner from 
reporting period to reporting period. An FDIC-supervised institution may 
change its preference regarding the manner in which it nets DTLs against 
specific assets subject to deduction under this section only after 
obtaining the prior approval of the FDIC.
    (f) Insufficient amounts of a specific regulatory capital component 
to effect deductions. Under the corresponding deduction approach, if an 
FDIC-supervised institution does not have a sufficient amount of a 
specific component of capital to effect the required deduction after 
completing the deductions required under paragraph (d) of this section, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must deduct the shortfall from the next 
higher (that is, more subordinated) component of regulatory capital.
    (g) Treatment of assets that are deducted. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must exclude from standardized total risk-weighted assets 
and, as applicable, advanced approaches total risk-weighted assets any 
item deducted from regulatory capital under paragraphs (a), (c), and (d) 
of this section.
    (h) Net long position. (1) For purposes of calculating an investment 
in the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital instrument and an 
investment in the capital of an unconsolidated financial institution 
under this section, the net long position is the gross long position in 
the underlying instrument determined in accordance with paragraph (h)(2) 
of this section, as adjusted to recognize a short position in the same 
instrument calculated in accordance with paragraph (h)(3) of this 
section.
    (2) Gross long position. The gross long position is determined as 
follows:
    (i) For an equity exposure that is held directly, the adjusted 
carrying value as that term is defined in Sec. 324.51(b);
    (ii) For an exposure that is held directly and is not an equity 
exposure or a securitization exposure, the exposure amount as that term 
is defined in Sec. 324.2;
    (iii) For an indirect exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution's 
carrying value of the investment in the investment fund, provided that, 
alternatively:
    (A) An FDIC-supervised institution may, with the prior approval of 
the FDIC, use a conservative estimate of the amount of its investment in 
its own capital instruments or the capital of an unconsolidated 
financial institution held through a position in an index; or
    (B) An FDIC-supervised institution may calculate the gross long 
position for the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital instruments 
or the capital

[[Page 243]]

of an unconsolidated financial institution by multiplying the FDIC-
supervised institution's carrying value of its investment in the 
investment fund by either:
    (1) The highest stated investment limit (in percent) for investments 
in the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital instruments or the 
capital of unconsolidated financial institutions as stated in the 
prospectus, partnership agreement, or similar contract defining 
permissible investments of the investment fund; or
    (2) The investment fund's actual holdings of own capital instruments 
or the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions.
    (iv) For a synthetic exposure, the amount of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's loss on the exposure if the reference capital instrument 
were to have a value of zero.
    (3) Adjustments to reflect a short position. In order to adjust the 
gross long position to recognize a short position in the same 
instrument, the following criteria must be met:
    (i) The maturity of the short position must match the maturity of 
the long position, or the short position has a residual maturity of at 
least one year (maturity requirement); or
    (ii) For a position that is a trading asset or trading liability 
(whether on- or off-balance sheet) as reported on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's Call Report, if the FDIC-supervised institution has a 
contractual right or obligation to sell the long position at a specific 
point in time and the counterparty to the contract has an obligation to 
purchase the long position if the FDIC-supervised institution exercises 
its right to sell, this point in time may be treated as the maturity of 
the long position such that the maturity of the long position and short 
position are deemed to match for purposes of the maturity requirement, 
even if the maturity of the short position is less than one year; and
    (iii) For an investment in the FDIC-supervised institution's own 
capital instrument under paragraph (c)(1) of this section or an 
investment in a capital of an unconsolidated financial institution under 
paragraphs (c)(4), (c)(5), and (d)(1)(iii) of this section:
    (A) An FDIC-supervised institution may only net a short position 
against a long position in the FDIC-supervised institution's own capital 
instrument under paragraph (c)(1) of this section if the short position 
involves no counterparty credit risk.
    (B) A gross long position in an FDIC-supervised institution's own 
capital instrument or in a capital instrument of an unconsolidated 
financial institution resulting from a position in an index may be 
netted against a short position in the same index. Long and short 
positions in the same index without maturity dates are considered to 
have matching maturities.
    (C) A short position in an index that is hedging a long cash or 
synthetic position in an FDIC-supervised institution's own capital 
instrument or in a capital instrument of an unconsolidated financial 
institution can be decomposed to provide recognition of the hedge. More 
specifically, the portion of the index that is composed of the same 
underlying instrument that is being hedged may be used to offset the 
long position if both the long position being hedged and the short 
position in the index are reported as a trading asset or trading 
liability (whether on- or off-balance sheet) on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's Call Report, and the hedge is deemed effective by the 
FDIC-supervised institution's internal control processes, which have not 
been found to be inadequate by the FDIC.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20759, Apr. 14, 2014; 
80 FR 41422, July 15, 2015; 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Secs. 324.23-324.29  [Reserved]



          Subpart D_Risk-Weighted Assets_Standardized Approach



Sec. 324.30  Applicability.

    (a) This subpart sets forth methodologies for determining risk-
weighted assets for purposes of the generally applicable risk-based 
capital requirements for all FDIC-supervised institutions.
    (b) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this section, a market risk 
FDIC-supervised institution must exclude from its calculation of risk-
weighted assets under this subpart the risk-weighted

[[Page 244]]

asset amounts of all covered positions, as defined in subpart F of this 
part (except foreign exchange positions that are not trading positions, 
OTC derivative positions, cleared transactions, and unsettled 
transactions).

              Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk



Sec. 324.31  Mechanics for calculating risk-weighted assets for 
general credit risk.

    (a) General risk-weighting requirements. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must apply risk weights to its exposures as follows:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must determine the exposure 
amount of each on-balance sheet exposure, each OTC derivative contract, 
and each off-balance sheet commitment, trade and transaction-related 
contingency, guarantee, repo-style transaction, financial standby letter 
of credit, forward agreement, or other similar transaction that is not:
    (i) An unsettled transaction subject to Sec. 324.38;
    (ii) A cleared transaction subject to Sec. 324.35;
    (iii) A default fund contribution subject to Sec. 324.35;
    (iv) A securitization exposure subject to Secs. 324.41 through 
324.45; or
    (v) An equity exposure (other than an equity OTC derivative 
contract) subject to Secs. 324.51 through 324.53.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must multiply each exposure 
amount by the risk weight appropriate to the exposure based on the 
exposure type or counterparty, eligible guarantor, or financial 
collateral to determine the risk-weighted asset amount for each 
exposure.
    (b) Total risk-weighted assets for general credit risk equals the 
sum of the risk-weighted asset amounts calculated under this section.



Sec. 324.32  General risk weights.

    (a) Sovereign exposures--(1) Exposures to the U.S. government. (i) 
Notwithstanding any other requirement in this subpart, an FDIC-
supervised institution must assign a zero percent risk weight to:
    (A) An exposure to the U.S. government, its central bank, or a U.S. 
government agency; and
    (B) The portion of an exposure that is directly and unconditionally 
guaranteed by the U.S. government, its central bank, or a U.S. 
government agency. This includes a deposit or other exposure, or the 
portion of a deposit or other exposure, that is insured or otherwise 
unconditionally guaranteed by the FDIC or National Credit Union 
Administration.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 20 percent risk 
weight to the portion of an exposure that is conditionally guaranteed by 
the U.S. government, its central bank, or a U.S. government agency. This 
includes an exposure, or the portion of an exposure, that is 
conditionally guaranteed by the FDIC or National Credit Union 
Administration.
    (2) Other sovereign exposures. In accordance with Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.32, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk weight to 
a sovereign exposure based on the CRC applicable to the sovereign or the 
sovereign's OECD membership status if there is no CRC applicable to the 
sovereign.

      Table 1 to Sec. 324.32--Risk Weights for Sovereign Exposures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Risk Weight
                                                           (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC............................................    0-1                0
                                                     2               20
                                                     3               50
                                                   4-6              100
                                                     7              150
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OECD Member with No CRC................................               0
Non-OECD Member with No CRC............................             100
Sovereign Default......................................             150
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Certain sovereign exposures. Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(2) of 
this section, an FDIC-supervised institution may assign to a sovereign 
exposure a risk weight that is lower than the applicable risk weight in 
Table 1 to Sec. 324.32 if:
    (i) The exposure is denominated in the sovereign's currency;

[[Page 245]]

    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution has at least an equivalent 
amount of liabilities in that currency; and
    (iii) The risk weight is not lower than the risk weight that the 
home country supervisor allows FDIC-supervised institutions under its 
jurisdiction to assign to the same exposures to the sovereign.
    (4) Exposures to a non-OECD member sovereign with no CRC. Except as 
provided in paragraphs (a)(3), (a)(5) and (a)(6) of this section, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk weight to an 
exposure to a sovereign if the sovereign does not have a CRC.
    (5) Exposures to an OECD member sovereign with no CRC. Except as 
provided in paragraph (a)(6) of this section, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must assign a 0 percent risk weight to an exposure to a 
sovereign that is a member of the OECD if the sovereign does not have a 
CRC.
    (6) Sovereign default. An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 
150 percent risk weight to a sovereign exposure immediately upon 
determining that an event of sovereign default has occurred, or if an 
event of sovereign default has occurred during the previous five years.
    (b) Certain supranational entities and multilateral development 
banks (MDBs). An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a zero percent 
risk weight to an exposure to the Bank for International Settlements, 
the European Central Bank, the European Commission, the International 
Monetary Fund, or an MDB.
    (c) Exposures to GSEs. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must 
assign a 20 percent risk weight to an exposure to a GSE other than an 
equity exposure or preferred stock.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk 
weight to preferred stock issued by a GSE.
    (d) Exposures to depository institutions, foreign banks, and credit 
unions--(1) Exposures to U.S. depository institutions and credit unions. 
An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 20 percent risk weight to 
an exposure to a depository institution or credit union that is 
organized under the laws of the United States or any state thereof, 
except as otherwise provided under paragraph (d)(3) of this section.
    (2) Exposures to foreign banks. (i) Except as otherwise provided 
under paragraphs (d)(2)(iv) and (d)(3) of this section, an FDIC-
supervised institution must assign a risk weight to an exposure to a 
foreign bank, in accordance with Table 2 to Sec. 324.32, based on the 
CRC that corresponds to the foreign bank's home country or the OECD 
membership status of the foreign bank's home country if there is no CRC 
applicable to the foreign bank's home country.

  Table 2 to Sec. 324.32--Risk Weights for Exposures to Foreign Banks
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Risk Weight
                                                           (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC............................................    0-1               20
                                                     2               50
                                                     3              100
                                                   4-7              150
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OECD Member with No CRC................................              20
Non-OECD Member with No CRC............................             100
Sovereign Default......................................             150
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 20 percent risk 
weight to an exposure to a foreign bank whose home country is a member 
of the OECD and does not have a CRC.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk 
weight to an exposure to a foreign bank whose home country is not a 
member of the OECD and does not have a CRC, with the exception of self-
liquidating, trade-related contingent items that arise from the movement 
of goods, and that have a maturity of three months or less, which may be 
assigned a 20 percent risk weight.
    (iv) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 150 percent risk 
weight to an exposure to a foreign bank immediately upon determining 
that an event of sovereign default has occurred in the bank's home 
country, or if an event of sovereign default has occurred in the foreign 
bank's home country during the previous five years.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk 
weight

[[Page 246]]

to an exposure to a financial institution if the exposure may be 
included in that financial institution's capital unless the exposure is:
    (i) An equity exposure;
    (ii) A significant investment in the capital of an unconsolidated 
financial institution in the form of common stock pursuant to 
Sec. 324.22(d)(iii);
    (iii) Deducted from regulatory capital under Sec. 324.22; or
    (iv) Subject to a 150 percent risk weight under paragraph (d)(2)(iv) 
or Table 2 of paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
    (e) Exposures to public sector entities (PSEs)--(1) Exposures to 
U.S. PSEs. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 20 percent 
risk weight to a general obligation exposure to a PSE that is organized 
under the laws of the United States or any state or political 
subdivision thereof.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 50 percent risk 
weight to a revenue obligation exposure to a PSE that is organized under 
the laws of the United States or any state or political subdivision 
thereof.
    (2) Exposures to foreign PSEs. (i) Except as provided in paragraphs 
(e)(1) and (e)(3) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution must 
assign a risk weight to a general obligation exposure to a PSE, in 
accordance with Table 3 to Sec. 324.32, based on the CRC that 
corresponds to the PSE's home country or the OECD membership status of 
the PSE's home country if there is no CRC applicable to the PSE's home 
country.
    (ii) Except as provided in paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(3) of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk weight to a 
revenue obligation exposure to a PSE, in accordance with Table 4 to 
Sec. 324.32, based on the CRC that corresponds to the PSE's home 
country; or the OECD membership status of the PSE's home country if 
there is no CRC applicable to the PSE's home country.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a lower risk weight 
than would otherwise apply under Tables 3 or 4 to Sec. 324.32 to an 
exposure to a foreign PSE if:
    (i) The PSE's home country supervisor allows banks under its 
jurisdiction to assign a lower risk weight to such exposures; and
    (ii) The risk weight is not lower than the risk weight that 
corresponds to the PSE's home country in accordance with Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.32.

     Table 3 to Sec. 324.32--Risk Weights for non-U.S. PSE General
                               Obligations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Risk Weight
                                                           (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC............................................    0-1               20
                                                     2               50
                                                     3              100
                                                   4-7              150
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OECD Member with No CRC................................              20
Non-OECD Member with No CRC............................             100
Sovereign Default......................................             150
------------------------------------------------------------------------


     Table 4 to Sec. 324.32--Risk Weights for non-U.S. PSE Revenue
                               Obligations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Risk Weight
                                                           (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC............................................    0-1               50
                                                   2-3               50
                                                   4-7              150
OECD Member with No CRC................................              50
Non-OECD Member with No CRC............................             100
Sovereign Default......................................             150
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Exposures to PSEs from an OECD member sovereign with no CRC. (i) 
An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 20 percent risk weight to a 
general obligation exposure to a PSE whose home country is an OECD 
member sovereign with no CRC.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 50 percent risk 
weight to a revenue obligation exposure to a PSE whose home country is 
an OECD member sovereign with no CRC.
    (5) Exposures to PSEs whose home country is not an OECD member 
sovereign with no CRC. An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 
percent risk weight to an exposure to a PSE whose home country is not a 
member of the OECD and does not have a CRC.
    (6) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 150 percent risk 
weight to a PSE exposure immediately upon

[[Page 247]]

determining that an event of sovereign default has occurred in a PSE's 
home country or if an event of sovereign default has occurred in the 
PSE's home country during the previous five years.
    (f) Corporate exposures. An FDIC-supervised institution must assign 
a 100 percent risk weight to all its corporate exposures.
    (g) Residential mortgage exposures. (1) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must assign a 50 percent risk weight to a first-lien 
residential mortgage exposure that:
    (i) Is secured by a property that is either owner-occupied or 
rented;
    (ii) Is made in accordance with prudent underwriting standards, 
including standards relating to the loan amount as a percent of the 
appraised value of the property;
    (iii) Is not 90 days or more past due or carried in nonaccrual 
status; and
    (iv) Is not restructured or modified.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk 
weight to a first-lien residential mortgage exposure that does not meet 
the criteria in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, and to junior-lien 
residential mortgage exposures.
    (3) For the purpose of this paragraph (g), if an FDIC-supervised 
institution holds the first-lien and junior-lien(s) residential mortgage 
exposures, and no other party holds an intervening lien, the FDIC-
supervised institution must combine the exposures and treat them as a 
single first-lien residential mortgage exposure.
    (4) A loan modified or restructured solely pursuant to the U.S. 
Treasury's Home Affordable Mortgage Program is not modified or 
restructured for purposes of this section.
    (h) Pre-sold construction loans. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
assign a 50 percent risk weight to a pre-sold construction loan unless 
the purchase contract is cancelled, in which case an FDIC-supervised 
institution must assign a 100 percent risk weight.
    (i) Statutory multifamily mortgages. An FDIC-supervised institution 
must assign a 50 percent risk weight to a statutory multifamily 
mortgage.
    (j) High-volatility commercial real estate (HVCRE) exposures. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 150 percent risk weight to an 
HVCRE exposure.
    (k) Past due exposures. Except for a sovereign exposure or a 
residential mortgage exposure, an FDIC-supervised institution must 
determine a risk weight for an exposure that is 90 days or more past due 
or on nonaccrual according to the requirements set forth in this 
paragraph (k).
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 150 percent risk 
weight to the portion of the exposure that is not guaranteed or that is 
unsecured.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a risk weight to the 
guaranteed portion of a past due exposure based on the risk weight that 
applies under Sec. 324.36 if the guarantee or credit derivative meets 
the requirements of that section.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a risk weight to the 
collateralized portion of a past due exposure based on the risk weight 
that applies under Sec. 324.37 if the collateral meets the requirements 
of that section.
    (l) Other assets. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 
zero percent risk weight to cash owned and held in all offices of the 
FDIC-supervised institution or in transit; to gold bullion held in the 
FDIC-supervised institution's own vaults or held in another depository 
institution's vaults on an allocated basis, to the extent the gold 
bullion assets are offset by gold bullion liabilities; and to exposures 
that arise from the settlement of cash transactions (such as equities, 
fixed income, spot foreign exchange and spot commodities) with a central 
counterparty where there is no assumption of ongoing counterparty credit 
risk by the central counterparty after settlement of the trade and 
associated default fund contributions.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 20 percent risk 
weight to cash items in the process of collection.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk 
weight to DTAs arising from temporary differences that the FDIC-
supervised institution could realize through net operating loss 
carrybacks.
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 250 percent risk 
weight to the portion of each of the following

[[Page 248]]

items that is not deducted from common equity tier 1 capital pursuant to 
Sec. 324.22(d):
    (i) MSAs; and
    (ii) DTAs arising from temporary differences that the FDIC-
supervised institution could not realize through net operating loss 
carrybacks.
    (5) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 100 percent risk 
weight to all assets not specifically assigned a different risk weight 
under this subpart and that are not deducted from tier 1 or tier 2 
capital pursuant to Sec. 324.22.
    (6) Notwithstanding the requirements of this section, an FDIC-
supervised institution may assign an asset that is not included in one 
of the categories provided in this section to the risk weight category 
applicable under the capital rules applicable to bank holding companies 
and savings and loan holding companies at 12 CFR part 217, provided that 
all of the following conditions apply:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution is not authorized to hold the 
asset under applicable law other than debt previously contracted or 
similar authority; and
    (ii) The risks associated with the asset are substantially similar 
to the risks of assets that are otherwise assigned to a risk weight 
category of less than 100 percent under this subpart.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20759, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.33  Off-balance sheet exposures.

    (a) General. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the 
exposure amount of an off-balance sheet exposure using the credit 
conversion factors (CCFs) in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) Where an FDIC-supervised institution commits to provide a 
commitment, the FDIC-supervised institution may apply the lower of the 
two applicable CCFs.
    (3) Where an FDIC-supervised institution provides a commitment 
structured as a syndication or participation, the FDIC-supervised 
institution is only required to calculate the exposure amount for its 
pro rata share of the commitment.
    (4) Where an FDIC-supervised institution provides a commitment, 
enters into a repurchase agreement, or provides a credit-enhancing 
representation and warranty, and such commitment, repurchase agreement, 
or credit-enhancing representation and warranty is not a securitization 
exposure, the exposure amount shall be no greater than the maximum 
contractual amount of the commitment, repurchase agreement, or credit-
enhancing representation and warranty, as applicable.
    (b) Credit conversion factors--(1) Zero percent CCF. An FDIC-
supervised institution must apply a zero percent CCF to the unused 
portion of a commitment that is unconditionally cancelable by the FDIC-
supervised institution.
    (2) 20 percent CCF. An FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 20 
percent CCF to the amount of:
    (i) Commitments with an original maturity of one year or less that 
are not unconditionally cancelable by the FDIC-supervised institution; 
and
    (ii) Self-liquidating, trade-related contingent items that arise 
from the movement of goods, with an original maturity of one year or 
less.
    (3) 50 percent CCF. An FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 50 
percent CCF to the amount of:
    (i) Commitments with an original maturity of more than one year that 
are not unconditionally cancelable by the FDIC-supervised institution; 
and
    (ii) Transaction-related contingent items, including performance 
bonds, bid bonds, warranties, and performance standby letters of credit.
    (4) 100 percent CCF. An FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 100 
percent CCF to the amount of the following off-balance-sheet items and 
other similar transactions:
    (i) Guarantees;
    (ii) Repurchase agreements (the off-balance sheet component of which 
equals the sum of the current fair values of all positions the FDIC-
supervised institution has sold subject to repurchase);
    (iii) Credit-enhancing representations and warranties that are not 
securitization exposures;
    (iv) Off-balance sheet securities lending transactions (the off-
balance sheet component of which equals the sum of

[[Page 249]]

the current fair values of all positions the FDIC-supervised institution 
has lent under the transaction);
    (v) Off-balance sheet securities borrowing transactions (the off-
balance sheet component of which equals the sum of the current fair 
values of all non-cash positions the FDIC-supervised institution has 
posted as collateral under the transaction);
    (vi) Financial standby letters of credit; and
    (vii) Forward agreements.



Sec. 324.34  OTC derivative contracts.

    (a) Exposure amount--(1) Single OTC derivative contract. Except as 
modified by paragraph (b) of this section, the exposure amount for a 
single OTC derivative contract that is not subject to a qualifying 
master netting agreement is equal to the sum of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's current credit exposure and potential future credit 
exposure (PFE) on the OTC derivative contract.
    (i) Current credit exposure. The current credit exposure for a 
single OTC derivative contract is the greater of the mark-to-fair value 
of the OTC derivative contract or zero.
    (ii) PFE. (A) The PFE for a single OTC derivative contract, 
including an OTC derivative contract with a negative mark-to-fair value, 
is calculated by multiplying the notional principal amount of the OTC 
derivative contract by the appropriate conversion factor in Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.34.
    (B) For purposes of calculating either the PFE under this paragraph 
(a) or the gross PFE under paragraph (a)(2) of this section for exchange 
rate contracts and other similar contracts in which the notional 
principal amount is equivalent to the cash flows, notional principal 
amount is the net receipts to each party falling due on each value date 
in each currency.
    (C) For an OTC derivative contract that does not fall within one of 
the specified categories in Table 1 to Sec. 324.34, the PFE must be 
calculated using the appropriate ``other'' conversion factor.
    (D) An FDIC-supervised institution must use an OTC derivative 
contract's effective notional principal amount (that is, the apparent or 
stated notional principal amount multiplied by any multiplier in the OTC 
derivative contract) rather than the apparent or stated notional 
principal amount in calculating PFE.
    (E) The PFE of the protection provider of a credit derivative is 
capped at the net present value of the amount of unpaid premiums.

                                     Table 1 to Sec. 324.34--Conversion Factor Matrix for Derivative Contracts \1\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                               Credit    Credit (non-
                                                                                  Foreign   (investment  investment-               Precious
                      Remaining maturity \2\                         Interest    exchange      grade        grade       Equity      metals       Other
                                                                       rate      rate and    reference    reference                 (except
                                                                                   gold      asset) \3\     asset)                   gold)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
One year or less..................................................        0.00        0.01         0.05         0.10        0.06        0.07        0.10
Greater than one year and less than or equal to five years........       0.005        0.05         0.05         0.10        0.08        0.07        0.12
Greater than five years...........................................       0.015       0.075         0.05         0.10        0.10        0.08        0.15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For a derivative contract with multiple exchanges of principal, the conversion factor is multiplied by the number of remaining payments in the
  derivative contract.
\2\ For an OTC derivative contract that is structured such that on specified dates any outstanding exposure is settled and the terms are reset so that
  the fair value of the contract is zero, the remaining maturity equals the time until the next reset date. For an interest rate derivative contract
  with a remaining maturity of greater than one year that meets these criteria, the minimum conversion factor is 0.005.
\3\ An FDIC-supervised institution must use the column labeled ``Credit (investment-grade reference asset)'' for a credit derivative whose reference
  asset is an outstanding unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement that is investment grade. An FDIC-supervised institution must use
  the column labeled ``Credit (non-investment-grade reference asset)'' for all other credit derivatives.


[[Page 250]]

    (2) Multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master 
netting agreement. Except as modified by paragraph (b) of this section, 
the exposure amount for multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a 
qualifying master netting agreement is equal to the sum of the net 
current credit exposure and the adjusted sum of the PFE amounts for all 
OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying master netting 
agreement.
    (i) Net current credit exposure. The net current credit exposure is 
the greater of the net sum of all positive and negative mark-to-fair 
values of the individual OTC derivative contracts subject to the 
qualifying master netting agreement or zero.
    (ii) Adjusted sum of the PFE amounts. The adjusted sum of the PFE 
amounts, Anet, is calculated as Anet = (0.4  x  Agross) + (0.6  x  NGR 
x  Agross), where:
    (A) Agross equals the gross PFE (that is, the sum of the PFE amounts 
as determined under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section for each 
individual derivative contract subject to the qualifying master netting 
agreement); and
    (B) Net-to-gross Ratio (NGR) equals the ratio of the net current 
credit exposure to the gross current credit exposure. In calculating the 
NGR, the gross current credit exposure equals the sum of the positive 
current credit exposures (as determined under paragraph (a)(1)(i) of 
this section) of all individual derivative contracts subject to the 
qualifying master netting agreement.
    (b) Recognition of credit risk mitigation of collateralized OTC 
derivative contracts. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution may recognize 
the credit risk mitigation benefits of financial collateral that secures 
an OTC derivative contract or multiple OTC derivative contracts subject 
to a qualifying master netting agreement (netting set) by using the 
simple approach in Sec. 324.37(b).
    (2) As an alternative to the simple approach, an FDIC-supervised 
institution may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of 
financial collateral that secures such a contract or netting set if the 
financial collateral is marked-to-fair value on a daily basis and 
subject to a daily margin maintenance requirement by applying a risk 
weight to the exposure as if it were uncollateralized and adjusting the 
exposure amount calculated under paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section 
using the collateral haircut approach in Sec. 324.37(c). The FDIC-
supervised institution must substitute the exposure amount calculated 
under paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section for SE in the equation in 
Sec. 324.37(c)(2).
    (c) Counterparty credit risk for OTC credit derivatives--(1) 
Protection purchasers. An FDIC-supervised institution that purchases an 
OTC credit derivative that is recognized under Sec. 324.36 as a credit 
risk mitigant for an exposure that is not a covered position under 
subpart F is not required to compute a separate counterparty credit risk 
capital requirement under Sec. 324.32 provided that the FDIC-supervised 
institution does so consistently for all such credit derivatives. The 
FDIC-supervised institution must either include all or exclude all such 
credit derivatives that are subject to a qualifying master netting 
agreement from any measure used to determine counterparty credit risk 
exposure to all relevant counterparties for risk-based capital purposes.
    (2) Protection providers. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that is 
the protection provider under an OTC credit derivative must treat the 
OTC credit derivative as an exposure to the underlying reference asset. 
The FDIC-supervised institution is not required to compute a 
counterparty credit risk capital requirement for the OTC credit 
derivative under Sec. 324.32, provided that this treatment is applied 
consistently for all such OTC credit derivatives. The FDIC-supervised 
institution must either include all or exclude all such OTC credit 
derivatives that are subject to a qualifying master netting agreement 
from any measure used to determine counterparty credit risk exposure.
    (ii) The provisions of this paragraph (c)(2) apply to all relevant 
counterparties for risk-based capital purposes unless the FDIC-
supervised institution is treating the OTC credit derivative as a 
covered position under subpart F, in which case the FDIC-supervised 
institution must compute a supplemental counterparty credit risk capital 
requirement under this section.

[[Page 251]]

    (d) Counterparty credit risk for OTC equity derivatives. (1) An 
FDIC-supervised institution must treat an OTC equity derivative contract 
as an equity exposure and compute a risk-weighted asset amount for the 
OTC equity derivative contract under Secs. 324.51 through 324.53 (unless 
the FDIC-supervised institution is treating the contract as a covered 
position under subpart F of this part).
    (2) In addition, the FDIC-supervised institution must also calculate 
a risk-based capital requirement for the counterparty credit risk of an 
OTC equity derivative contract under this section if the FDIC-supervised 
institution is treating the contract as a covered position under subpart 
F of this part.
    (3) If the FDIC-supervised institution risk weights the contract 
under the Simple Risk-Weight Approach (SRWA) in Sec. 324.52, the FDIC-
supervised institution may choose not to hold risk-based capital against 
the counterparty credit risk of the OTC equity derivative contract, as 
long as it does so for all such contracts. Where the OTC equity 
derivative contracts are subject to a qualified master netting 
agreement, an FDIC-supervised institution using the SRWA must either 
include all or exclude all of the contracts from any measure used to 
determine counterparty credit risk exposure.
    (e) Clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's exposure amount. A 
clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's exposure amount for an OTC 
derivative contract or netting set of OTC derivative contracts where the 
FDIC-supervised institution is either acting as a financial intermediary 
and enters into an offsetting transaction with a QCCP or where the FDIC-
supervised institution provides a guarantee to the QCCP on the 
performance of the client equals the exposure amount calculated 
according to paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section multiplied by the 
scaling factor 0.71. If the FDIC-supervised institution determines that 
a longer period is appropriate, the FDIC-supervised institution must use 
a larger scaling factor to adjust for a longer holding period as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.014


where H equals the holding period greater than five days. Additionally, 
the FDIC may require the FDIC-supervised institution to set a longer 
holding period if the FDIC determines that a longer period is 
appropriate due to the nature, structure, or characteristics of the 
transaction or is commensurate with the risks associated with the 
transaction.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.35  Cleared transactions.

    (a) General requirements--(1) Clearing member clients. An FDIC-
supervised institution that is a clearing member client must use the 
methodologies described in paragraph (b) of this section to calculate 
risk-weighted assets for a cleared transaction.
    (2) Clearing members. An FDIC-supervised institution that is a 
clearing member must use the methodologies described in paragraph (c) of 
this section to calculate its risk-weighted assets for a cleared 
transaction and paragraph (d) of this section to calculate its risk-
weighted assets for its default fund contribution to a CCP.
    (b) Clearing member client FDIC-supervised institutions--(1) Risk-
weighted assets for cleared transactions. (i) To determine the risk-
weighted asset amount for a cleared transaction, an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is a clearing member client must multiply the trade 
exposure amount for the cleared transaction, calculated in accordance 
with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, by the risk weight appropriate 
for the cleared transaction, determined in accordance with paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section.

[[Page 252]]

    (ii) A clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution's total 
risk-weighted assets for cleared transactions is the sum of the risk-
weighted asset amounts for all its cleared transactions.
    (2) Trade exposure amount. (i) For a cleared transaction that is 
either a derivative contract or a netting set of derivative contracts, 
the trade exposure amount equals:
    (A) The exposure amount for the derivative contract or netting set 
of derivative contracts, calculated using the methodology used to 
calculate exposure amount for OTC derivative contracts under 
Sec. 324.34; plus
    (B) The fair value of the collateral posted by the clearing member 
client FDIC-supervised institution and held by the CCP, clearing member, 
or custodian in a manner that is not bankruptcy remote.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction that is a repo-style transaction or 
netting set of repo-style transactions, the trade exposure amount 
equals:
    (A) The exposure amount for the repo-style transaction calculated 
using the methodologies under Sec. 324.37(c); plus
    (B) The fair value of the collateral posted by the clearing member 
client FDIC-supervised institution and held by the CCP, clearing member, 
or custodian in a manner that is not bankruptcy remote.
    (3) Cleared transaction risk weights. (i) For a cleared transaction 
with a QCCP, a clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution must 
apply a risk weight of:
    (A) 2 percent if the collateral posted by the FDIC-supervised 
institution to the QCCP or clearing member is subject to an arrangement 
that prevents any losses to the clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution due to the joint default or a concurrent insolvency, 
liquidation, or receivership proceeding of the clearing member and any 
other clearing member clients of the clearing member; and the clearing 
member client FDIC-supervised institution has conducted sufficient legal 
review to conclude with a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient 
written documentation of that legal review) that in the event of a legal 
challenge (including one resulting from an event of default or from 
liquidation, insolvency, or receivership proceedings) the relevant court 
and administrative authorities would find the arrangements to be legal, 
valid, binding and enforceable under the law of the relevant 
jurisdictions; or
    (B) 4 percent if the requirements of Sec. 324.35(b)(3)(A) are not 
met.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction with a CCP that is not a QCCP, a 
clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution must apply the risk 
weight appropriate for the CCP according to Sec. 324.32.
    (4) Collateral. (i) Notwithstanding any other requirements in this 
section, collateral posted by a clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution that is held by a custodian (in its capacity as custodian) 
in a manner that is bankruptcy remote from the CCP, the custodian, 
clearing member and other clearing member clients of the clearing 
member, is not subject to a capital requirement under this section.
    (ii) A clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate a risk-weighted asset amount for any collateral provided to a 
CCP, clearing member, or custodian in connection with a cleared 
transaction in accordance with the requirements under Sec. 324.32.
    (c) Clearing member FDIC-supervised institutions--(1) Risk-weighted 
assets for cleared transactions. (i) To determine the risk-weighted 
asset amount for a cleared transaction, a clearing member FDIC-
supervised institution must multiply the trade exposure amount for the 
cleared transaction, calculated in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section, by the risk weight appropriate for the cleared 
transaction, determined in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this 
section.
    (ii) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's total risk-
weighted assets for cleared transactions is the sum of the risk-weighted 
asset amounts for all of its cleared transactions.
    (2) Trade exposure amount. A clearing member FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate its trade exposure amount for a cleared 
transaction as follows:

[[Page 253]]

    (i) For a cleared transaction that is either a derivative contract 
or a netting set of derivative contracts, the trade exposure amount 
equals:
    (A) The exposure amount for the derivative contract, calculated 
using the methodology to calculate exposure amount for OTC derivative 
contracts under Sec. 324.34; plus
    (B) The fair value of the collateral posted by the clearing member 
FDIC-supervised institution and held by the CCP in a manner that is not 
bankruptcy remote.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction that is a repo-style transaction or 
netting set of repo-style transactions, trade exposure amount equals:
    (A) The exposure amount for repo-style transactions calculated using 
methodologies under Sec. 324.37(c); plus
    (B) The fair value of the collateral posted by the clearing member 
FDIC-supervised institution and held by the CCP in a manner that is not 
bankruptcy remote.
    (3) Cleared transaction risk weight. (i) A clearing member FDIC-
supervised institution must apply a risk weight of 2 percent to the 
trade exposure amount for a cleared transaction with a QCCP.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction with a CCP that is not a QCCP, a 
clearing member FDIC-supervised institution must apply the risk weight 
appropriate for the CCP according to Sec. 324.32.
    (4) Collateral. (i) Notwithstanding any other requirement in this 
section, collateral posted by a clearing member FDIC-supervised 
institution that is held by a custodian in a manner that is bankruptcy 
remote from the CCP is not subject to a capital requirement under this 
section.
    (ii) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a 
risk-weighted asset amount for any collateral provided to a CCP, 
clearing member, or a custodian in connection with a cleared transaction 
in accordance with requirements under Sec. 324.32.
    (d) Default fund contributions--(1) General requirement. A clearing 
member FDIC-supervised institution must determine the risk-weighted 
asset amount for a default fund contribution to a CCP at least 
quarterly, or more frequently if, in the opinion of the FDIC-supervised 
institution or the FDIC, there is a material change in the financial 
condition of the CCP.
    (2) Risk-weighted asset amount for default fund contributions to 
non-qualifying CCPs. A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's 
risk-weighted asset amount for default fund contributions to CCPs that 
are not QCCPs equals the sum of such default fund contributions 
multiplied by 1,250 percent, or an amount determined by the FDIC, based 
on factors such as size, structure and membership characteristics of the 
CCP and riskiness of its transactions, in cases where such default fund 
contributions may be unlimited.
    (3) Risk-weighted asset amount for default fund contributions to 
QCCPs. A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted 
asset amount for default fund contributions to QCCPs equals the sum of 
its capital requirement, KCM for each QCCP, as calculated 
under the methodology set forth in paragraphs (d)(3)(i) through (iii) of 
this section (Method 1), multiplied by 1,250 percent or in paragraph 
(d)(3)(iv) of this section (Method 2).
    (i) Method 1. The hypothetical capital requirement of a QCCP 
(KCCP) equals:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.015

Where

(A) EBRMi equals the exposure amount for each transaction 
          cleared through the QCCP by clearing member i, calculated in 
          accordance with Sec. 324.34 for OTC derivative contracts and 
          Sec. 324.37(c)(2) for repo-style transactions, provided that:
(1) For purposes of this section, in calculating the exposure amount the 
          FDIC-supervised institution may replace the formula provided 
          in Sec. 324.34(a)(2)(ii) with the following: Anet = (0.15  x  
          Agross) + (0.85  x  NGR  x  Agross); and
(2) For option derivative contracts that are cleared transactions, the 
          PFE described

[[Page 254]]

          in Sec. 324.34(a)(1)(ii) must be adjusted by multiplying the 
          notional principal amount of the derivative contract by the 
          appropriate conversion factor in Table 1 to Sec. 324.34 and 
          the absolute value of the option's delta, that is, the ratio 
          of the change in the value of the derivative contract to the 
          corresponding change in the price of the underlying asset.
(3) For repo-style transactions, when applying Sec. 324.37(c)(2), the 
          FDIC-supervised institution must use the methodology in 
          Sec. 324.37(c)(3);
(B) VMi equals any collateral posted by clearing member i to 
          the QCCP that it is entitled to receive from the QCCP, but has 
          not yet received, and any collateral that the QCCP has 
          actually received from clearing member i;
(C) IMi equals the collateral posted as initial margin by 
          clearing member i to the QCCP;
(D) DFi equals the funded portion of clearing member i's 
          default fund contribution that will be applied to reduce the 
          QCCP's loss upon a default by clearing member i;
(E) RW equals 20 percent, except when the FDIC has determined that a 
          higher risk weight is more appropriate based on the specific 
          characteristics of the QCCP and its clearing members; and
(F) Where a QCCP has provided its KCCP, an FDIC-supervised 
          institution must rely on such disclosed figure instead of 
          calculating KCCP under this paragraph (d), unless 
          the FDIC-supervised institution determines that a more 
          conservative figure is appropriate based on the nature, 
          structure, or characteristics of the QCCP.

    (ii) For an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member of 
a QCCP with a default fund supported by funded commitments, 
KCM equals:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.016

    (A) Subscripts 1 and 2 denote the clearing members with the two 
largest ANet values. For purposes of this paragraph (d), for 
derivatives ANet is defined in Sec. 324.34(a)(2)(ii) and for 
repo-style transactions, ANet means the exposure amount as 
defined in Sec. 324.37(c)(2) using the methodology in Sec. 324.37(c)(3);
    (B) N equals the number of clearing members in the QCCP;
    (C) DFCCP equals the QCCP's own funds and other financial 
resources that would be used to cover its losses before clearing 
members' default fund contributions are used to cover losses;
    (D) DFCM equals funded default fund contributions from 
all clearing members and any other clearing member contributed financial 
resources that are available to absorb mutualized QCCP losses;
    (E) DF = DFCCP + DFCM (that is, the total 
funded default fund contribution);

[[Page 255]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.017

Where

(1) DFi equals the FDIC-supervised institution's unfunded 
          commitment to the default fund;
(2) DFCM equals the total of all clearing members' unfunded 
          commitment to the default fund; and
(3) K*CM as defined in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section.

    (B) For an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member of 
a QCCP with a default fund supported by unfunded commitments and is 
unable to calculate KCM using the methodology described in 
paragraph (d)(3)(iii) of this section, KCM equals:

[[Page 256]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.018

Where

(1) IMi = the FDIC-supervised institution's initial margin 
          posted to the QCCP;
(2) IMCM equals the total of initial margin posted to the 
          QCCP; and
(3) K*CM as defined in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section.

    (iv) Method 2. A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's risk-
weighted asset amount for its default fund contribution to a QCCP, 
RWADF, equals:


RWADF = Min 12.5 * DF; 0.18 * TE
Where
(A) TE equals the FDIC-supervised institution's trade exposure amount to 
          the QCCP, calculated according to Sec. 324.35(c)(2);
(B) DF equals the funded portion of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
          default fund contribution to the QCCP.

    (4) Total risk-weighted assets for default fund contributions. Total 
risk-weighted assets for default fund contributions is the sum of a 
clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted assets for 
all of its default fund contributions to all CCPs of which the FDIC-
supervised institution is a clearing member.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.36  Guarantees and credit derivatives: Substitution 
treatment.

    (a) Scope. (1) General. An FDIC-supervised institution may recognize 
the credit risk mitigation benefits of an eligible guarantee or eligible 
credit derivative by substituting the risk weight associated with the 
protection provider for the risk weight assigned to an exposure, as 
provided under this section.
    (2) This section applies to exposures for which:
    (i) Credit risk is fully covered by an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative; or
    (ii) Credit risk is covered on a pro rata basis (that is, on a basis 
in which the FDIC-supervised institution and the protection provider 
share losses proportionately) by an eligible guarantee or eligible 
credit derivative.
    (3) Exposures on which there is a tranching of credit risk 
(reflecting at least two different levels of seniority) generally are 
securitization exposures subject to Secs. 324.41 through 324.45.
    (4) If multiple eligible guarantees or eligible credit derivatives 
cover a single exposure described in this section, an FDIC-supervised 
institution may treat the hedged exposure as multiple separate exposures 
each covered by a single eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative and may calculate a separate risk-weighted asset amount for 
each separate exposure as described in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (5) If a single eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative 
covers multiple hedged exposures described in paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution must treat each hedged exposure 
as covered by a separate eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative and must calculate a separate risk-weighted asset amount for 
each exposure as described in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Rules of recognition. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution may 
only recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of eligible 
guarantees and eligible credit derivatives.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution may only recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefits of an eligible credit derivative to hedge an 
exposure that is different from the credit derivative's reference 
exposure used for determining the derivative's cash settlement value, 
deliverable obligation, or occurrence of a credit event if:
    (i) The reference exposure ranks pari passu with, or is subordinated 
to, the hedged exposure; and
    (ii) The reference exposure and the hedged exposure are to the same 
legal entity, and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-
acceleration clauses are in place to ensure payments under the credit 
derivative are triggered when the obligated party of the hedged

[[Page 257]]

exposure fails to pay under the terms of the hedged exposure.
    (c) Substitution approach--(1) Full coverage. If an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative meets the conditions in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section and the protection amount (P) of 
the guarantee or credit derivative is greater than or equal to the 
exposure amount of the hedged exposure, an FDIC-supervised institution 
may recognize the guarantee or credit derivative in determining the 
risk-weighted asset amount for the hedged exposure by substituting the 
risk weight applicable to the guarantor or credit derivative protection 
provider under Sec. 324.32 for the risk weight assigned to the exposure.
    (2) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs(a) and (b) of this section 
and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit derivative is 
less than the exposure amount of the hedged exposure, the FDIC-
supervised institution must treat the hedged exposure as two separate 
exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefit of the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution may calculate the risk-weighted 
asset amount for the protected exposure under Sec. 324.32, where the 
applicable risk weight is the risk weight applicable to the guarantor or 
credit derivative protection provider.
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the risk-
weighted asset amount for the unprotected exposure under Sec. 324.32, 
where the applicable risk weight is that of the unprotected portion of 
the hedged exposure.
    (iii) The treatment provided in this section is applicable when the 
credit risk of an exposure is covered on a partial pro rata basis and 
may be applicable when an adjustment is made to the effective notional 
amount of the guarantee or credit derivative under paragraphs (d), (e), 
or (f) of this section.
    (d) Maturity mismatch adjustment. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution 
that recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative in 
determining the risk-weighted asset amount for a hedged exposure must 
adjust the effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant to 
reflect any maturity mismatch between the hedged exposure and the credit 
risk mitigant.
    (2) A maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of a 
credit risk mitigant is less than that of the hedged exposure(s).
    (3) The residual maturity of a hedged exposure is the longest 
possible remaining time before the obligated party of the hedged 
exposure is scheduled to fulfil its obligation on the hedged exposure. 
If a credit risk mitigant has embedded options that may reduce its term, 
the FDIC-supervised institution (protection purchaser) must use the 
shortest possible residual maturity for the credit risk mitigant. If a 
call is at the discretion of the protection provider, the residual 
maturity of the credit risk mitigant is at the first call date. If the 
call is at the discretion of the FDIC-supervised institution (protection 
purchaser), but the terms of the arrangement at origination of the 
credit risk mitigant contain a positive incentive for the FDIC-
supervised institution to call the transaction before contractual 
maturity, the remaining time to the first call date is the residual 
maturity of the credit risk mitigant.
    (4) A credit risk mitigant with a maturity mismatch may be 
recognized only if its original maturity is greater than or equal to one 
year and its residual maturity is greater than three months.
    (5) When a maturity mismatch exists, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must apply the following adjustment to reduce the effective notional 
amount of the credit risk mitigant: Pm = E  x  (t-0.25)/(T-0.25), where:
    (i) Pm equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for maturity mismatch;
    (ii) E equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant;
    (iii) t equals the lesser of T or the residual maturity of the 
credit risk mitigant, expressed in years; and
    (iv) T equals the lesser of five or the residual maturity of the 
hedged exposure, expressed in years.
    (e) Adjustment for credit derivatives without restructuring as a 
credit event. If

[[Page 258]]

an FDIC-supervised institution recognizes an eligible credit derivative 
that does not include as a credit event a restructuring of the hedged 
exposure involving forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest, 
or fees that results in a credit loss event (that is, a charge-off, 
specific provision, or other similar debit to the profit and loss 
account), the FDIC-supervised institution must apply the following 
adjustment to reduce the effective notional amount of the credit 
derivative: Pr = Pm  x  0.60, where:
    (1) Pr equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for lack of restructuring event (and maturity mismatch, if 
applicable); and
    (2) Pm equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant 
(adjusted for maturity mismatch, if applicable).
    (f) Currency mismatch adjustment. (1) If an FDIC-supervised 
institution recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative that is denominated in a currency different from that in 
which the hedged exposure is denominated, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must apply the following formula to the effective notional 
amount of the guarantee or credit derivative: Pc = Pr  x  (1-
HFX), where:
    (i) Pc equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for currency mismatch (and maturity mismatch and lack of 
restructuring event, if applicable);
    (ii) Pr equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant 
(adjusted for maturity mismatch and lack of restructuring event, if 
applicable); and
    (iii) HFX equals haircut appropriate for the currency 
mismatch between the credit risk mitigant and the hedged exposure.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must set HFX equal to 
eight percent unless it qualifies for the use of and uses its own 
internal estimates of foreign exchange volatility based on a ten-
business-day holding period. An FDIC-supervised institution qualifies 
for the use of its own internal estimates of foreign exchange volatility 
if it qualifies for the use of its own-estimates haircuts in 
Sec. 324.37(c)(4).
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must adjust HFX 
calculated in paragraph (f)(2) of this section upward if the FDIC-
supervised institution revalues the guarantee or credit derivative less 
frequently than once every 10 business days using the following square 
root of time formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.019



Sec. 324.37  Collateralized transactions.

    (a) General. (1) To recognize the risk-mitigating effects of 
financial collateral, an FDIC-supervised institution may use:
    (i) The simple approach in paragraph (b) of this section for any 
exposure; or
    (ii) The collateral haircut approach in paragraph (c) of this 
section for repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, 
collateralized derivative contracts, and single-product netting sets of 
such transactions.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution may use any approach described in 
this section that is valid for a particular type of exposure or 
transaction; however, it must use the same approach for similar 
exposures or transactions.
    (b) The simple approach. (1) General requirements. (i) An FDIC-
supervised institution may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits 
of financial collateral that secures any exposure.
    (ii) To qualify for the simple approach, the financial collateral 
must meet the following requirements:
    (A) The collateral must be subject to a collateral agreement for at 
least the life of the exposure;

[[Page 259]]

    (B) The collateral must be revalued at least every six months; and
    (C) The collateral (other than gold) and the exposure must be 
denominated in the same currency.
    (2) Risk weight substitution. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution may 
apply a risk weight to the portion of an exposure that is secured by the 
fair value of financial collateral (that meets the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section) based on the risk weight assigned to 
the collateral under Sec. 324.32. For repurchase agreements, reverse 
repurchase agreements, and securities lending and borrowing 
transactions, the collateral is the instruments, gold, and cash the 
FDIC-supervised institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, 
or taken as collateral from the counterparty under the transaction. 
Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, the risk weight 
assigned to the collateralized portion of the exposure may not be less 
than 20 percent.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must apply a risk weight to the 
unsecured portion of the exposure based on the risk weight applicable to 
the exposure under this subpart.
    (3) Exceptions to the 20 percent risk-weight floor and other 
requirements. Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section:
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a zero percent risk 
weight to an exposure to an OTC derivative contract that is marked-to-
market on a daily basis and subject to a daily margin maintenance 
requirement, to the extent the contract is collateralized by cash on 
deposit.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a 10 percent risk 
weight to an exposure to an OTC derivative contract that is marked-to-
market daily and subject to a daily margin maintenance requirement, to 
the extent that the contract is collateralized by an exposure to a 
sovereign that qualifies for a zero percent risk weight under 
Sec. 324.32.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a zero percent risk 
weight to the collateralized portion of an exposure where:
    (A) The financial collateral is cash on deposit; or
    (B) The financial collateral is an exposure to a sovereign that 
qualifies for a zero percent risk weight under Sec. 324.32, and the 
FDIC-supervised institution has discounted the fair value of the 
collateral by 20 percent.
    (c) Collateral haircut approach--(1) General. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of 
financial collateral that secures an eligible margin loan, repo-style 
transaction, collateralized derivative contract, or single-product 
netting set of such transactions, and of any collateral that secures a 
repo-style transaction that is included in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's VaR-based measure under subpart F of this part by using 
the collateral haircut approach in this section. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may use the standard supervisory haircuts in paragraph 
(c)(3) of this section or, with prior written approval of the FDIC, its 
own estimates of haircuts according to paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
    (2) Exposure amount equation. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
determine the exposure amount for an eligible margin loan, repo-style 
transaction, collateralized derivative contract, or a single-product 
netting set of such transactions by setting the exposure amount equal to 
max 0, [(SE ^ SC) + S(Es  x  Hs) + S(Efx  x  Hfx)] , where:
    (i)(A) For eligible margin loans and repo-style transactions and 
netting sets thereof, SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of 
the current fair values of all instruments, gold, and cash the FDIC-
supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted 
as collateral to the counterparty under the transaction (or netting 
set)); and
    (B) For collateralized derivative contracts and netting sets 
thereof, SE equals the exposure amount of the OTC derivative contract 
(or netting set) calculated under Sec. 324.34 (a)(1) or (2).
    (ii) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
fair values of all instruments, gold and cash the FDIC-supervised 
institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from the

[[Page 260]]

counterparty under the transaction (or netting set));
    (iii) Es equals the absolute value of the net position in a given 
instrument or in gold (where the net position in the instrument or gold 
equals the sum of the current fair values of the instrument or gold the 
FDIC-supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or 
posted as collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current 
fair values of that same instrument or gold the FDIC-supervised 
institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from the counterparty);
    (iv) Hs equals the market price volatility haircut appropriate to 
the instrument or gold referenced in Es;
    (v) Efx equals the absolute value of the net position of instruments 
and cash in a currency that is different from the settlement currency 
(where the net position in a given currency equals the sum of the 
current fair values of any instruments or cash in the currency the FDIC-
supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted 
as collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current fair 
values of any instruments or cash in the currency the FDIC-supervised 
institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from the counterparty); and
    (vi) Hfx equals the haircut appropriate to the mismatch between the 
currency referenced in Efx and the settlement currency.
    (3) Standard supervisory haircuts. (i) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must use the haircuts for market price volatility (Hs) 
provided in Table 1 to Sec. 324.37, as adjusted in certain circumstances 
in accordance with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(3)(iii) and (iv) 
of this section.

                                    Table 1 to Sec. 324.37--Standard Supervisory Market Price Volatility Haircuts\1\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Haircut (in percent) assigned based on:
                                                              ------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Sovereign issuers risk weight     Non-sovereign issuers risk weight   Investment grade
                      Residual maturity                          under Sec. 324.32 (in percent)     under Sec. 324.32 (in percent)     securitization
                                                                               \2\                ------------------------------------   exposures (in
                                                              ------------------------------------                                          percent)
                                                                  Zero      20 or 50       100         20
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than or equal to 1 year.................................         0.5         1.0        15.0         1.0         2.0         4.0                4.0
Greater than 1 year and less than or equal to 5 years........         2.0         3.0        15.0         4.0         6.0         8.0               12.0
Greater than 5 years.........................................         4.0         6.0        15.0         8.0        12.0        16.0               24.0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Main index equities (including convertible bonds) and gold..........................15.0.........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other publicly traded equities (including convertible bonds)........................25.0.........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mutual funds....................................................Highest haircut applicable to any security in
                                                                         which the fund can invest.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cash collateral held................................................................Zero.........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other exposure types................................................................25.0.........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The market price volatility haircuts in Table 1 to Sec. 324.37 are based on a 10 business-day holding period.
\2\ Includes a foreign PSE that receives a zero percent risk weight.

    (ii) For currency mismatches, an FDIC-supervised institution must 
use a haircut for foreign exchange rate volatility (Hfx) of 8.0 percent, 
as adjusted in certain circumstances under paragraphs (c)(3)(iii) and 
(iv) of this section.
    (iii) For repo-style transactions, an FDIC-supervised institution 
may multiply the standard supervisory haircuts provided in paragraphs 
(c)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section by the square root of \1/2\ (which 
equals 0.707107).
    (iv) If the number of trades in a netting set exceeds 5,000 at any 
time during a quarter, an FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the 
supervisory haircuts provided in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) and (ii) of this 
section upward on the basis of a holding period of

[[Page 261]]

twenty business days for the following quarter except in the calculation 
of the exposure amount for purposes of Sec. 324.35. If a netting set 
contains one or more trades involving illiquid collateral or an OTC 
derivative that cannot be easily replaced, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must adjust the supervisory haircuts upward on the basis of 
a holding period of twenty business days. If over the two previous 
quarters more than two margin disputes on a netting set have occurred 
that lasted more than the holding period, then the FDIC-supervised 
institution must adjust the supervisory haircuts upward for that netting 
set on the basis of a holding period that is at least two times the 
minimum holding period for that netting set. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must adjust the standard supervisory haircuts upward using 
the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.020

(A) TM equals a holding period of longer than 10 business 
          days for eligible margin loans and derivative contracts or 
          longer than 5 business days for repo-style transactions;
(B) HS equals the standard supervisory haircut; and
(C) TS equals 10 business days for eligible margin loans and 
          derivative contracts or 5 business days for repo-style 
          transactions.

    (v) If the instrument an FDIC-supervised institution has lent, sold 
subject to repurchase, or posted as collateral does not meet the 
definition of financial collateral, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
use a 25.0 percent haircut for market price volatility (Hs).
    (4) Own internal estimates for haircuts. With the prior written 
approval of the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may calculate 
haircuts (Hs and Hfx) using its own internal estimates of the 
volatilities of market prices and foreign exchange rates:
    (i) To receive FDIC approval to use its own internal estimates, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must satisfy the following minimum 
standards:
    (A) An FDIC-supervised institution must use a 99th percentile one-
tailed confidence interval.
    (B) The minimum holding period for a repo-style transaction is five 
business days and for an eligible margin loan is ten business days 
except for transactions or netting sets for which paragraph (c)(4)(i)(C) 
of this section applies. When an FDIC-supervised institution calculates 
an own-estimates haircut on a TN-day holding period, which is 
different from the minimum holding period for the transaction type, the 
applicable haircut (HM) is calculated using the following 
square root of time formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.021

(1) TM equals 5 for repo-style transactions and 10 for 
          eligible margin loans;
(2) TN equals the holding period used by the FDIC-supervised 
          institution to derive HN; and
(3) HN equals the haircut based on the holding period 
          TN.

    (C) If the number of trades in a netting set exceeds 5,000 at any 
time during a quarter, an FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the 
haircut using a minimum holding period of twenty business days for the 
following quarter except in the calculation of the exposure amount for 
purposes of

[[Page 262]]

Sec. 324.35. If a netting set contains one or more trades involving 
illiquid collateral or an OTC derivative that cannot be easily replaced, 
an FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the haircut using a 
minimum holding period of twenty business days. If over the two previous 
quarters more than two margin disputes on a netting set have occurred 
that lasted more than the holding period, then the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the haircut for transactions in that netting 
set on the basis of a holding period that is at least two times the 
minimum holding period for that netting set.
    (D) An FDIC-supervised institution is required to calculate its own 
internal estimates with inputs calibrated to historical data from a 
continuous 12-month period that reflects a period of significant 
financial stress appropriate to the security or category of securities.
    (E) An FDIC-supervised institution must have policies and procedures 
that describe how it determines the period of significant financial 
stress used to calculate the FDIC-supervised institution's own internal 
estimates for haircuts under this section and must be able to provide 
empirical support for the period used. The FDIC-supervised institution 
must obtain the prior approval of the FDIC for, and notify the FDIC if 
the FDIC-supervised institution makes any material changes to, these 
policies and procedures.
    (F) Nothing in this section prevents the FDIC from requiring an 
FDIC-supervised institution to use a different period of significant 
financial stress in the calculation of own internal estimates for 
haircuts.
    (G) An FDIC-supervised institution must update its data sets and 
calculate haircuts no less frequently than quarterly and must also 
reassess data sets and haircuts whenever market prices change 
materially.
    (ii) With respect to debt securities that are investment grade, an 
FDIC-supervised institution may calculate haircuts for categories of 
securities. For a category of securities, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the haircut on the basis of internal 
volatility estimates for securities in that category that are 
representative of the securities in that category that the FDIC-
supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as 
collateral, borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral. In determining relevant categories, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must at a minimum take into account:
    (A) The type of issuer of the security;
    (B) The credit quality of the security;
    (C) The maturity of the security; and
    (D) The interest rate sensitivity of the security.
    (iii) With respect to debt securities that are not investment grade 
and equity securities, an FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a 
separate haircut for each individual security.
    (iv) Where an exposure or collateral (whether in the form of cash or 
securities) is denominated in a currency that differs from the 
settlement currency, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a 
separate currency mismatch haircut for its net position in each 
mismatched currency based on estimated volatilities of foreign exchange 
rates between the mismatched currency and the settlement currency.
    (v) An FDIC-supervised institution's own estimates of market price 
and foreign exchange rate volatilities may not take into account the 
correlations among securities and foreign exchange rates on either the 
exposure or collateral side of a transaction (or netting set) or the 
correlations among securities and foreign exchange rates between the 
exposure and collateral sides of the transaction (or netting set).

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]

             Risk-Weighted Assets for Unsettled Transactions



Sec. 324.38  Unsettled transactions.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
    (1) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) transaction means a securities or 
commodities transaction in which the buyer is obligated to make payment 
only if the seller has made delivery of the securities or commodities 
and the seller is obligated to deliver the securities or commodities 
only if the buyer has made payment.

[[Page 263]]

    (2) Payment-versus-payment (PvP) transaction means a foreign 
exchange transaction in which each counterparty is obligated to make a 
final transfer of one or more currencies only if the other counterparty 
has made a final transfer of one or more currencies.
    (3) A transaction has a normal settlement period if the contractual 
settlement period for the transaction is equal to or less than the 
market standard for the instrument underlying the transaction and equal 
to or less than five business days.
    (4) Positive current exposure of an FDIC-supervised institution for 
a transaction is the difference between the transaction value at the 
agreed settlement price and the current market price of the transaction, 
if the difference results in a credit exposure of the FDIC-supervised 
institution to the counterparty.
    (b) Scope. This section applies to all transactions involving 
securities, foreign exchange instruments, and commodities that have a 
risk of delayed settlement or delivery. This section does not apply to:
    (1) Cleared transactions that are marked-to-market daily and subject 
to daily receipt and payment of variation margin;
    (2) Repo-style transactions, including unsettled repo-style 
transactions;
    (3) One-way cash payments on OTC derivative contracts; or
    (4) Transactions with a contractual settlement period that is longer 
than the normal settlement period (which are treated as OTC derivative 
contracts as provided in Sec. 324.34).
    (c) System-wide failures. In the case of a system-wide failure of a 
settlement, clearing system or central counterparty, the FDIC may waive 
risk-based capital requirements for unsettled and failed transactions 
until the situation is rectified.
    (d) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) and payment-versus-payment (PvP) 
transactions. An FDIC-supervised institution must hold risk-based 
capital against any DvP or PvP transaction with a normal settlement 
period if the FDIC-supervised institution's counterparty has not made 
delivery or payment within five business days after the settlement date. 
The FDIC-supervised institution must determine its risk-weighted asset 
amount for such a transaction by multiplying the positive current 
exposure of the transaction for the FDIC-supervised institution by the 
appropriate risk weight in Table 1 to Sec. 324.38.

     Table 1 to Sec. 324.38--Risk Weights for Unsettled DvP and PvP
                              Transactions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Risk weight to
                                                           be applied to
  Number of business days after contractual settlement       positive
                          date                                current
                                                           exposure (in
                                                             percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
From 5 to 15............................................           100.0
From 16 to 30...........................................           625.0
From 31 to 45...........................................           937.5
46 or more..............................................         1,250.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Non-DvP/non-PvP (non-delivery-versus-payment/non-payment-versus-
payment) transactions. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must hold 
risk-based capital against any non-DvP/non-PvP transaction with a normal 
settlement period if the FDIC-supervised institution has delivered cash, 
securities, commodities, or currencies to its counterparty but has not 
received its corresponding deliverables by the end of the same business 
day. The FDIC-supervised institution must continue to hold risk-based 
capital against the transaction until the FDIC-supervised institution 
has received its corresponding deliverables.
    (2) From the business day after the FDIC-supervised institution has 
made its delivery until five business days after the counterparty 
delivery is due, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the 
risk-weighted asset amount for the transaction by treating the current 
fair value of the deliverables owed to the FDIC-supervised institution 
as an exposure to the counterparty and using the applicable counterparty 
risk weight under Sec. 324.32.
    (3) If the FDIC-supervised institution has not received its 
deliverables by the fifth business day after counterparty delivery was 
due, the FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 1,250 percent risk 
weight to the current fair value of the deliverables owed to the FDIC-
supervised institution.
    (f) Total risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions. Total 
risk-weighted

[[Page 264]]

assets for unsettled transactions is the sum of the risk-weighted asset 
amounts of all DvP, PvP, and non-DvP/non-PvP transactions.



Secs. 324.39-324.40  [Reserved]

            Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures



Sec. 324.41  Operational requirements for securitization exposures.

    (a) Operational criteria for traditional securitizations. An FDIC-
supervised institution that transfers exposures it has originated or 
purchased to a securitization SPE or other third party in connection 
with a traditional securitization may exclude the exposures from the 
calculation of its risk-weighted assets only if each condition in this 
section is satisfied. An FDIC-supervised institution that meets these 
conditions must hold risk-based capital against any credit risk it 
retains in connection with the securitization. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that fails to meet these conditions must hold risk-based 
capital against the transferred exposures as if they had not been 
securitized and must deduct from common equity tier 1 capital any after-
tax gain-on-sale resulting from the transaction. The conditions are:
    (1) The exposures are not reported on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's consolidated balance sheet under GAAP;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution has transferred to one or more 
third parties credit risk associated with the underlying exposures;
    (3) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls; and
    (4) The securitization does not:
    (i) Include one or more underlying exposures in which the borrower 
is permitted to vary the drawn amount within an agreed limit under a 
line of credit; and
    (ii) Contain an early amortization provision.
    (b) Operational criteria for synthetic securitizations. For 
synthetic securitizations, an FDIC-supervised institution may recognize 
for risk-based capital purposes the use of a credit risk mitigant to 
hedge underlying exposures only if each condition in this paragraph (b) 
is satisfied. An FDIC-supervised institution that meets these conditions 
must hold risk-based capital against any credit risk of the exposures it 
retains in connection with the synthetic securitization. An FDIC-
supervised institution that fails to meet these conditions or chooses 
not to recognize the credit risk mitigant for purposes of this section 
must instead hold risk-based capital against the underlying exposures as 
if they had not been synthetically securitized. The conditions are:
    (1) The credit risk mitigant is:
    (i) Financial collateral;
    (ii) A guarantee that meets all criteria as set forth in the 
definition of ``eligible guarantee'' in Sec. 324.2, except for the 
criteria in paragraph (3) of that definition; or
    (iii) A credit derivative that meets all criteria as set forth in 
the definition of ``eligible credit derivative'' in Sec. 324.2, except 
for the criteria in paragraph (3) of the definition of ``eligible 
guarantee'' in Sec. 324.2.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution transfers credit risk associated 
with the underlying exposures to one or more third parties, and the 
terms and conditions in the credit risk mitigants employed do not 
include provisions that:
    (i) Allow for the termination of the credit protection due to 
deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures;
    (ii) Require the FDIC-supervised institution to alter or replace the 
underlying exposures to improve the credit quality of the underlying 
exposures;
    (iii) Increase the FDIC-supervised institution's cost of credit 
protection in response to deterioration in the credit quality of the 
underlying exposures;
    (iv) Increase the yield payable to parties other than the FDIC-
supervised institution in response to a deterioration in the credit 
quality of the underlying exposures; or
    (v) Provide for increases in a retained first loss position or 
credit enhancement provided by the FDIC-supervised institution after the 
inception of the securitization;
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution obtains a well-reasoned opinion 
from

[[Page 265]]

legal counsel that confirms the enforceability of the credit risk 
mitigant in all relevant jurisdictions; and
    (4) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls.
    (c) Due diligence requirements for securitization exposures. (1) 
Except for exposures that are deducted from common equity tier 1 capital 
and exposures subject to Sec. 324.42(h), if an FDIC-supervised 
institution is unable to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC a 
comprehensive understanding of the features of a securitization exposure 
that would materially affect the performance of the exposure, the FDIC-
supervised institution must assign the securitization exposure a risk 
weight of 1,250 percent. The FDIC-supervised institution's analysis must 
be commensurate with the complexity of the securitization exposure and 
the materiality of the exposure in relation to its capital.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate its 
comprehensive understanding of a securitization exposure under paragraph 
(c)(1) of this section, for each securitization exposure by:
    (i) Conducting an analysis of the risk characteristics of a 
securitization exposure prior to acquiring the exposure, and documenting 
such analysis within three business days after acquiring the exposure, 
considering:
    (A) Structural features of the securitization that would materially 
impact the performance of the exposure, for example, the contractual 
cash flow waterfall, waterfall-related triggers, credit enhancements, 
liquidity enhancements, fair value triggers, the performance of 
organizations that service the exposure, and deal-specific definitions 
of default;
    (B) Relevant information regarding the performance of the underlying 
credit exposure(s), for example, the percentage of loans 30, 60, and 90 
days past due; default rates; prepayment rates; loans in foreclosure; 
property types; occupancy; average credit score or other measures of 
creditworthiness; average LTV ratio; and industry and geographic 
diversification data on the underlying exposure(s);
    (C) Relevant market data of the securitization, for example, bid-ask 
spread, most recent sales price and historic price volatility, trading 
volume, implied market rating, and size, depth and concentration level 
of the market for the securitization; and
    (D) For resecuritization exposures, performance information on the 
underlying securitization exposures, for example, the issuer name and 
credit quality, and the characteristics and performance of the exposures 
underlying the securitization exposures; and
    (ii) On an on-going basis (no less frequently than quarterly), 
evaluating, reviewing, and updating as appropriate the analysis required 
under paragraph (c)(1) of this section for each securitization exposure.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.42  Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures.

    (a) Securitization risk weight approaches. Except as provided 
elsewhere in this section or in Sec. 324.41:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct from common equity 
tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from a 
securitization and apply a 1,250 percent risk weight to the portion of a 
CEIO that does not constitute after-tax gain-on-sale.
    (2) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution may 
assign a risk weight to the securitization exposure using the simplified 
supervisory formula approach (SSFA) in accordance with Secs. 324.43(a) 
through 324.43(d) and subject to the limitation under paragraph (e) of 
this section. Alternatively, an FDIC-supervised institution that is not 
subject to subpart F of this part may assign a risk weight to the 
securitization exposure using the gross-up approach in accordance with 
Sec. 324.43(e), provided, however, that such FDIC-supervised institution 
must apply either the SSFA or the gross-up approach consistently across 
all of its securitization exposures, except as provided in paragraphs 
(a)(1), (a)(3), and (a)(4) of this section.
    (3) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph

[[Page 266]]

(a)(1) of this section and the FDIC-supervised institution cannot, or 
chooses not to apply the SSFA or the gross-up approach to the exposure, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk weight to the 
exposure as described in Sec. 324.44.
    (4) If a securitization exposure is a derivative contract (other 
than protection provided by an FDIC-supervised institution in the form 
of a credit derivative) that has a first priority claim on the cash 
flows from the underlying exposures (notwithstanding amounts due under 
interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other 
similar payments), an FDIC-supervised institution may choose to set the 
risk-weighted asset amount of the exposure equal to the amount of the 
exposure as determined in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (b) Total risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures. An 
FDIC-supervised institution's total risk-weighted assets for 
securitization exposures equals the sum of the risk-weighted asset 
amount for securitization exposures that the FDIC-supervised institution 
risk weights under Secs. 324.41(c), 324.42(a)(1), and 324.43, 324.44, or 
324.45, and paragraphs (e) through (j) of this section, as applicable.
    (c) Exposure amount of a securitization exposure--(1) On-balance 
sheet securitization exposures. The exposure amount of an on-balance 
sheet securitization exposure (excluding an available-for-sale or held-
to-maturity security where the FDIC-supervised institution has made an 
AOCI opt-out election under Sec. 324.22(b)(2), a repo-style transaction, 
eligible margin loan, OTC derivative contract, or cleared transaction) 
is equal to the carrying value of the exposure.
    (2) On-balance sheet securitization exposures held by an FDIC-
supervised institution that has made an AOCI opt-out election. The 
exposure amount of an on-balance sheet securitization exposure that is 
an available-for-sale or held-to-maturity security held by an FDIC-
supervised institution that has made an AOCI opt-out election under 
Sec. 324.22(b)(2) is the FDIC-supervised institution's carrying value 
(including net accrued but unpaid interest and fees), less any net 
unrealized gains on the exposure and plus any net unrealized losses on 
the exposure.
    (3) Off-balance sheet securitization exposures. (i) Except as 
provided in paragraph (j) of this section, the exposure amount of an 
off-balance sheet securitization exposure that is not a repo-style 
transaction, eligible margin loan, cleared transaction (other than a 
credit derivative), or an OTC derivative contract (other than a credit 
derivative) is the notional amount of the exposure. For an off-balance 
sheet securitization exposure to an ABCP program, such as an eligible 
ABCP liquidity facility, the notional amount may be reduced to the 
maximum potential amount that the FDIC-supervised institution could be 
required to fund given the ABCP program's current underlying assets 
(calculated without regard to the current credit quality of those 
assets).
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must determine the exposure 
amount of an eligible ABCP liquidity facility for which the SSFA does 
not apply by multiplying the notional amount of the exposure by a CCF of 
50 percent.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must determine the exposure 
amount of an eligible ABCP liquidity facility for which the SSFA applies 
by multiplying the notional amount of the exposure by a CCF of 100 
percent.
    (4) Repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and derivative 
contracts. The exposure amount of a securitization exposure that is a 
repo-style transaction, eligible margin loan, or derivative contract 
(other than a credit derivative) is the exposure amount of the 
transaction as calculated under Sec. 324.34 or Sec. 324.37, as 
applicable.
    (d) Overlapping exposures. If an FDIC-supervised institution has 
multiple securitization exposures that provide duplicative coverage to 
the underlying exposures of a securitization (such as when an FDIC-
supervised institution provides a program-wide credit enhancement and 
multiple pool-specific liquidity facilities to an ABCP program), the 
FDIC-supervised institution is not required to hold duplicative risk-
based capital against the overlapping position. Instead, the FDIC-
supervised institution may apply to the overlapping position the 
applicable risk-based

[[Page 267]]

capital treatment that results in the highest risk-based capital 
requirement.
    (e) Implicit support. If an FDIC-supervised institution provides 
support to a securitization in excess of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's contractual obligation to provide credit support to the 
securitization (implicit support):
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution must include in risk-weighted 
assets all of the underlying exposures associated with the 
securitization as if the exposures had not been securitized and must 
deduct from common equity tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale 
resulting from the securitization; and
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must disclose publicly:
    (i) That it has provided implicit support to the securitization; and
    (ii) The risk-based capital impact to the FDIC-supervised 
institution of providing such implicit support.
    (f) Undrawn portion of a servicer cash advance facility. (1) 
Notwithstanding any other provision of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is a servicer under an eligible servicer cash advance 
facility is not required to hold risk-based capital against potential 
future cash advance payments that it may be required to provide under 
the contract governing the facility.
    (2) For an FDIC-supervised institution that acts as a servicer, the 
exposure amount for a servicer cash advance facility that is not an 
eligible servicer cash advance facility is equal to the amount of all 
potential future cash advance payments that the FDIC-supervised 
institution may be contractually required to provide during the 
subsequent 12 month period under the contract governing the facility.
    (g) Interest-only mortgage-backed securities. Regardless of any 
other provisions in this subpart, the risk weight for a non-credit-
enhancing interest-only mortgage-backed security may not be less than 
100 percent.
    (h) Small-business loans and leases on personal property transferred 
with retained contractual exposure. (1) Regardless of any other 
provision of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution that has 
transferred small-business loans and leases on personal property (small-
business obligations) with recourse must include in risk-weighted assets 
only its contractual exposure to the small-business obligations if all 
the following conditions are met:
    (i) The transaction must be treated as a sale under GAAP.
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution establishes and maintains, 
pursuant to GAAP, a non-capital reserve sufficient to meet the FDIC-
supervised institution's reasonably estimated liability under the 
contractual obligation.
    (iii) The small-business obligations are to businesses that meet the 
criteria for a small-business concern established by the Small Business 
Administration under section 3(a) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 
632 et seq.).
    (iv) The FDIC-supervised institution is well capitalized, as defined 
in subpart H of this part. For purposes of determining whether an FDIC-
supervised institution is well capitalized for purposes of this 
paragraph (h), the FDIC-supervised institution's capital ratios must be 
calculated without regard to the capital treatment for transfers of 
small-business obligations under this paragraph (h).
    (2) The total outstanding amount of contractual exposure retained by 
an FDIC-supervised institution on transfers of small-business 
obligations receiving the capital treatment specified in paragraph 
(h)(1) of this section cannot exceed 15 percent of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's total capital.
    (3) If an FDIC-supervised institution ceases to be well capitalized 
under subpart H of this part or exceeds the 15 percent capital 
limitation provided in paragraph (h)(2) of this section, the capital 
treatment under paragraph (h)(1) of this section will continue to apply 
to any transfers of small-business obligations with retained contractual 
exposure that occurred during the time that the FDIC-supervised 
institution was well capitalized and did not exceed the capital limit.
    (4) The risk-based capital ratios of the FDIC-supervised institution 
must be calculated without regard to the capital treatment for transfers 
of small-business obligations specified in paragraph (h)(1) of this 
section for purposes of:
    (i) Determining whether an FDIC-supervised institution is adequately 
capitalized, undercapitalized, significantly

[[Page 268]]

undercapitalized, or critically undercapitalized under subpart H of this 
part; and
    (ii) Reclassifying a well-capitalized FDIC-supervised institution to 
adequately capitalized and requiring an adequately capitalized FDIC-
supervised institution to comply with certain mandatory or discretionary 
supervisory actions as if the FDIC-supervised institution were in the 
next lower prompt-corrective-action category.
    (i) Nth-to-default credit derivatives--(1) Protection provider. An 
FDIC-supervised institution may assign a risk weight using the SSFA in 
Sec. 324.43 to an n\th\-to-default credit derivative in accordance with 
this paragraph (i). An FDIC-supervised institution must determine its 
exposure in the nth-to-default credit derivative as the largest notional 
amount of all the underlying exposures.
    (2) For purposes of determining the risk weight for an nth-to-
default credit derivative using the SSFA, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the attachment point and detachment point of 
its exposure as follows:
    (i) The attachment point (parameter A) is the ratio of the sum of 
the notional amounts of all underlying exposures that are subordinated 
to the FDIC-supervised institution's exposure to the total notional 
amount of all underlying exposures. The ratio is expressed as a decimal 
value between zero and one. In the case of a first-to-default credit 
derivative, there are no underlying exposures that are subordinated to 
the FDIC-supervised institution's exposure. In the case of a second-or-
subsequent-to-default credit derivative, the smallest (n-1) notional 
amounts of the underlying exposure(s) are subordinated to the FDIC-
supervised institution's exposure.
    (ii) The detachment point (parameter D) equals the sum of parameter 
A plus the ratio of the notional amount of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposure in the nth-to-default credit derivative to the 
total notional amount of all underlying exposures. The ratio is 
expressed as a decimal value between zero and one.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution that does not use the SSFA to 
determine a risk weight for its nth-to-default credit derivative must 
assign a risk weight of 1,250 percent to the exposure.
    (4) Protection purchaser--(i) First-to-default credit derivatives. 
An FDIC-supervised institution that obtains credit protection on a group 
of underlying exposures through a first-to-default credit derivative 
that meets the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.36(b) must determine its 
risk-based capital requirement for the underlying exposures as if the 
FDIC-supervised institution synthetically securitized the underlying 
exposure with the smallest risk-weighted asset amount and had obtained 
no credit risk mitigant on the other underlying exposures. An FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate a risk-based capital requirement 
for counterparty credit risk according to Sec. 324.34 for a first-to-
default credit derivative that does not meet the rules of recognition of 
Sec. 324.36(b).
    (ii) Second-or-subsequent-to-default credit derivatives. (A) An 
FDIC-supervised institution that obtains credit protection on a group of 
underlying exposures through a nth-to-default credit derivative that 
meets the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.36(b) (other than a first-to-
default credit derivative) may recognize the credit risk mitigation 
benefits of the derivative only if:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution also has obtained credit 
protection on the same underlying exposures in the form of first-
through-(n-1)-to-default credit derivatives; or
    (2) If n-1 of the underlying exposures have already defaulted.
    (B) If an FDIC-supervised institution satisfies the requirements of 
paragraph (i)(4)(ii)(A) of this section, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must determine its risk-based capital requirement for the underlying 
exposures as if the FDIC-supervised institution had only synthetically 
securitized the underlying exposure with the nth smallest risk-weighted 
asset amount and had obtained no credit risk mitigant on the other 
underlying exposures.
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a risk-based 
capital requirement for counterparty credit risk according to 
Sec. 324.34 for a nth-to-default credit derivative that does not meet 
the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.36(b).

[[Page 269]]

    (j) Guarantees and credit derivatives other than nth-to-default 
credit derivatives--(1) Protection provider. For a guarantee or credit 
derivative (other than an nth-to-default credit derivative) provided by 
an FDIC-supervised institution that covers the full amount or a pro rata 
share of a securitization exposure's principal and interest, the FDIC-
supervised institution must risk weight the guarantee or credit 
derivative as if it holds the portion of the reference exposure covered 
by the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (2) Protection purchaser. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that 
purchases a guarantee or OTC credit derivative (other than an nth-to-
default credit derivative) that is recognized under Sec. 324.45 as a 
credit risk mitigant (including via collateral recognized under 
Sec. 324.37) is not required to compute a separate counterparty credit 
risk capital requirement under Sec. 324.31, in accordance with 
Sec. 324.34(c).
    (ii) If an FDIC-supervised institution cannot, or chooses not to, 
recognize a purchased credit derivative as a credit risk mitigant under 
Sec. 324.45, the FDIC-supervised institution must determine the exposure 
amount of the credit derivative under Sec. 324.34.
    (A) If the FDIC-supervised institution purchases credit protection 
from a counterparty that is not a securitization SPE, the FDIC-
supervised institution must determine the risk weight for the exposure 
according to general risk weights under Sec. 324.32.
    (B) If the FDIC-supervised institution purchases the credit 
protection from a counterparty that is a securitization SPE, the FDIC-
supervised institution must determine the risk weight for the exposure 
according to section Sec. 324.42, including Sec. 324.42(a)(4) for a 
credit derivative that has a first priority claim on the cash flows from 
the underlying exposures of the securitization SPE (notwithstanding 
amounts due under interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees 
due, or other similar payments).

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.43  Simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA) and the
gross-up approach.

    (a) General requirements for the SSFA. To use the SSFA to determine 
the risk weight for a securitization exposure, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must have data that enables it to assign accurately the 
parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section. Data used to 
assign the parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section must be 
the most currently available data; if the contracts governing the 
underlying exposures of the securitization require payments on a monthly 
or quarterly basis, the data used to assign the parameters described in 
paragraph (b) of this section must be no more than 91 calendar days old. 
An FDIC-supervised institution that does not have the appropriate data 
to assign the parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section must 
assign a risk weight of 1,250 percent to the exposure.
    (b) SSFA parameters. To calculate the risk weight for a 
securitization exposure using the SSFA, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must have accurate information on the following five inputs to the SSFA 
calculation:
    (1) KG is the weighted-average (with unpaid principal 
used as the weight for each exposure) total capital requirement of the 
underlying exposures calculated using this subpart. KG is 
expressed as a decimal value between zero and one (that is, an average 
risk weight of 100 percent represents a value of KG equal to 
0.08).
    (2) Parameter W is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 
one. Parameter W is the ratio of the sum of the dollar amounts of any 
underlying exposures of the securitization that meet any of the criteria 
as set forth in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (vi) of this section to the 
balance, measured in dollars, of underlying exposures:
    (i) Ninety days or more past due;
    (ii) Subject to a bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding;
    (iii) In the process of foreclosure;
    (iv) Held as real estate owned;
    (v) Has contractually deferred payments for 90 days or more, other 
than principal or interest payments deferred on:

[[Page 270]]

    (A) Federally-guaranteed student loans, in accordance with the terms 
of those guarantee programs; or
    (B) Consumer loans, including non-federally-guaranteed student 
loans, provided that such payments are deferred pursuant to provisions 
included in the contract at the time funds are disbursed that provide 
for period(s) of deferral that are not initiated based on changes in the 
creditworthiness of the borrower; or
    (vi) Is in default.
    (3) Parameter A is the attachment point for the exposure, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses will first be allocated 
to the exposure. Except as provided in Sec. 324.42(i) for n\th\-to-
default credit derivatives, parameter A equals the ratio of the current 
dollar amount of underlying exposures that are subordinated to the 
exposure of the FDIC-supervised institution to the current dollar amount 
of underlying exposures. Any reserve account funded by the accumulated 
cash flows from the underlying exposures that is subordinated to the 
FDIC-supervised institution's securitization exposure may be included in 
the calculation of parameter A to the extent that cash is present in the 
account. Parameter A is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 
one.
    (4) Parameter D is the detachment point for the exposure, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses of principal allocated 
to the exposure would result in a total loss of principal. Except as 
provided in Sec. 324.42(i) for n\th\-to-default credit derivatives, 
parameter D equals parameter A plus the ratio of the current dollar 
amount of the securitization exposures that are pari passu with the 
exposure (that is, have equal seniority with respect to credit risk) to 
the current dollar amount of the underlying exposures. Parameter D is 
expressed as a decimal value between zero and one.
    (5) A supervisory calibration parameter, p, is equal to 0.5 for 
securitization exposures that are not resecuritization exposures and 
equal to 1.5 for resecuritization exposures.
    (c) Mechanics of the SSFA. KG and W are used to calculate 
KA, the augmented value of KG, which reflects the 
observed credit quality of the underlying exposures. KA is 
defined in paragraph (d) of this section. The values of parameters A and 
D, relative to KA determine the risk weight assigned to a 
securitization exposure as described in paragraph (d) of this section. 
The risk weight assigned to a securitization exposure, or portion of a 
securitization exposure, as appropriate, is the larger of the risk 
weight determined in accordance with this paragraph (c) or paragraph (d) 
of this section and a risk weight of 20 percent.
    (1) When the detachment point, parameter D, for a securitization 
exposure is less than or equal to KA, the exposure must be 
assigned a risk weight of 1,250 percent.
    (2) When the attachment point, parameter A, for a securitization 
exposure is greater than or equal to KA, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the risk weight in accordance with paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (3) When A is less than KA and D is greater than 
KA, the risk weight is a weighted-average of 1,250 percent 
and 1,250 percent times KSSFA calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section. For the purpose of this weighted-average 
calculation:

[[Page 271]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.022

    (e) Gross-up approach--(1) Applicability. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that is not subject to subpart F of this part may apply the 
gross-up approach set forth in this section instead of the SSFA to 
determine the risk weight of its securitization exposures, provided that 
it applies the gross-up approach to all of its securitization exposures, 
except as otherwise provided for certain securitization exposures in 
Secs. 324.44 and 324.45.
    (2) To use the gross-up approach, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must calculate the following four inputs:
    (i) Pro rata share, which is the par value of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's securitization exposure as a percent of the par value of 
the tranche in which the securitization exposure resides;

[[Page 272]]

    (ii) Enhanced amount, which is the par value of tranches that are 
more senior to the tranche in which the FDIC-supervised institution's 
securitization resides;
    (iii) Exposure amount of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
securitization exposure calculated under Sec. 324.42(c); and
    (iv) Risk weight, which is the weighted-average risk weight of 
underlying exposures of the securitization as calculated under this 
subpart.
    (3) Credit equivalent amount. The credit equivalent amount of a 
securitization exposure under this section equals the sum of:
    (i) The exposure amount of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
securitization exposure; and
    (ii) The pro rata share multiplied by the enhanced amount, each 
calculated in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
    (4) Risk-weighted assets. To calculate risk-weighted assets for a 
securitization exposure under the gross-up approach, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must apply the risk weight required under paragraph (e)(2) 
of this section to the credit equivalent amount calculated in paragraph 
(e)(3) of this section.
    (f) Limitations. Notwithstanding any other provision of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk weight of not 
less than 20 percent to a securitization exposure.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.44  Securitization exposures to which the SSFA and gross-up 
approach do not apply.

    (a) General Requirement. An FDIC-supervised institution must assign 
a 1,250 percent risk weight to all securitization exposures to which the 
FDIC-supervised institution does not apply the SSFA or the gross-up 
approach under Sec. 324.43, except as set forth in this section.
    (b) Eligible ABCP liquidity facilities. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may determine the risk-weighted asset amount of an eligible 
ABCP liquidity facility by multiplying the exposure amount by the 
highest risk weight applicable to any of the individual underlying 
exposures covered by the facility.
    (c) A securitization exposure in a second loss position or better to 
an ABCP program--(1) Risk weighting. An FDIC-supervised institution may 
determine the risk-weighted asset amount of a securitization exposure 
that is in a second loss position or better to an ABCP program that 
meets the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section by 
multiplying the exposure amount by the higher of the following risk 
weights:
    (i) 100 percent; and
    (ii) The highest risk weight applicable to any of the individual 
underlying exposures of the ABCP program.
    (2) Requirements. (i) The exposure is not an eligible ABCP liquidity 
facility;
    (ii) The exposure must be economically in a second loss position or 
better, and the first loss position must provide significant credit 
protection to the second loss position;
    (iii) The exposure qualifies as investment grade; and
    (iv) The FDIC-supervised institution holding the exposure must not 
retain or provide protection to the first loss position.



Sec. 324.45  Recognition of credit risk mitigants for securitization
exposures.

    (a) General. (1) An originating FDIC-supervised institution that has 
obtained a credit risk mitigant to hedge its exposure to a synthetic or 
traditional securitization that satisfies the operational criteria 
provided in Sec. 324.41 may recognize the credit risk mitigant under 
Secs. 324.36 or 324.37, but only as provided in this section.
    (2) An investing FDIC-supervised institution that has obtained a 
credit risk mitigant to hedge a securitization exposure may recognize 
the credit risk mitigant under Secs. 324.36 or 324.37, but only as 
provided in this section.
    (b) Mismatches. An FDIC-supervised institution must make any 
applicable adjustment to the protection amount of an eligible guarantee 
or credit derivative as required in Sec. 324.36(d), (e), and (f) for any 
hedged securitization exposure. In the context of a synthetic

[[Page 273]]

securitization, when an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative 
covers multiple hedged exposures that have different residual 
maturities, the FDIC-supervised institution must use the longest 
residual maturity of any of the hedged exposures as the residual 
maturity of all hedged exposures.



Secs. 324.46-324.50  [Reserved]

                Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures



Sec. 324.51  Introduction and exposure measurement.

    (a) General. (1) To calculate its risk-weighted asset amounts for 
equity exposures that are not equity exposures to an investment fund, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must use the Simple Risk-Weight Approach 
(SRWA) provided in Sec. 324.52. An FDIC-supervised institution must use 
the look-through approaches provided in Sec. 324.53 to calculate its 
risk-weighted asset amounts for equity exposures to investment funds.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must treat an investment in a 
separate account (as defined in Sec. 324.2) as if it were an equity 
exposure to an investment fund as provided in Sec. 324.53.
    (3) Stable value protection. (i) Stable value protection means a 
contract where the provider of the contract is obligated to pay:
    (A) The policy owner of a separate account an amount equal to the 
shortfall between the fair value and cost basis of the separate account 
when the policy owner of the separate account surrenders the policy; or
    (B) The beneficiary of the contract an amount equal to the shortfall 
between the fair value and book value of a specified portfolio of 
assets.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that purchases stable value 
protection on its investment in a separate account must treat the 
portion of the carrying value of its investment in the separate account 
attributable to the stable value protection as an exposure to the 
provider of the protection and the remaining portion of the carrying 
value of its separate account as an equity exposure to an investment 
fund.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution that provides stable value 
protection must treat the exposure as an equity derivative with an 
adjusted carrying value determined as the sum of paragraphs (b)(1) and 
(3) of this section.
    (b) Adjusted carrying value. For purposes of Secs. 324.51 through 
324.53, the adjusted carrying value of an equity exposure is:
    (1) For the on-balance sheet component of an equity exposure (other 
than an equity exposure that is classified as available-for-sale where 
the FDIC-supervised institution has made an AOCI opt-out election under 
Sec. 324.22(b)(2)), the FDIC-supervised institution's carrying value of 
the exposure;
    (2) For the on-balance sheet component of an equity exposure that is 
classified as available-for-sale where the FDIC-supervised institution 
has made an AOCI opt-out election under Sec. 324.22(b)(2), the FDIC-
supervised institution's carrying value of the exposure less any net 
unrealized gains on the exposure that are reflected in such carrying 
value but excluded from the FDIC-supervised institution's regulatory 
capital components;
    (3) For the off-balance sheet component of an equity exposure that 
is not an equity commitment, the effective notional principal amount of 
the exposure, the size of which is equivalent to a hypothetical on-
balance sheet position in the underlying equity instrument that would 
evidence the same change in fair value (measured in dollars) given a 
small change in the price of the underlying equity instrument, minus the 
adjusted carrying value of the on-balance sheet component of the 
exposure as calculated in paragraph (b)(1) of this section; and
    (4) For a commitment to acquire an equity exposure (an equity 
commitment), the effective notional principal amount of the exposure is 
multiplied by the following conversion factors (CFs):
    (i) Conditional equity commitments with an original maturity of one 
year or less receive a CF of 20 percent.
    (ii) Conditional equity commitments with an original maturity of 
over one year receive a CF of 50 percent.
    (iii) Unconditional equity commitments receive a CF of 100 percent.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]

[[Page 274]]



Sec. 324.52  Simple risk-weight approach (SRWA).

    (a) General. Under the SRWA, an FDIC-supervised institution's total 
risk-weighted assets for equity exposures equals the sum of the risk-
weighted asset amounts for each of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
individual equity exposures (other than equity exposures to an 
investment fund) as determined under this section and the risk-weighted 
asset amounts for each of the FDIC-supervised institution's individual 
equity exposures to an investment fund as determined under Sec. 324.53.
    (b) SRWA computation for individual equity exposures. An FDIC-
supervised institution must determine the risk-weighted asset amount for 
an individual equity exposure (other than an equity exposure to an 
investment fund) by multiplying the adjusted carrying value of the 
equity exposure or the effective portion and ineffective portion of a 
hedge pair (as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) by the lowest 
applicable risk weight in this paragraph (b).
    (1) Zero percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to 
a sovereign, the Bank for International Settlements, the European 
Central Bank, the European Commission, the International Monetary Fund, 
an MDB, and any other entity whose credit exposures receive a zero 
percent risk weight under Sec. 324.32 may be assigned a zero percent 
risk weight.
    (2) 20 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to a 
PSE, Federal Home Loan Bank or the Federal Agricultural Mortgage 
Corporation (Farmer Mac) must be assigned a 20 percent risk weight.
    (3) 100 percent risk weight equity exposures. The equity exposures 
set forth in this paragraph (b)(3) must be assigned a 100 percent risk 
weight.
    (i) Community development equity exposures. An equity exposure that 
qualifies as a community development investment under section 24 
(Eleventh) of the National Bank Act, excluding equity exposures to an 
unconsolidated small business investment company and equity exposures 
held through a consolidated small business investment company described 
in section 302 of the Small Business Investment Act.
    (ii) Effective portion of hedge pairs. The effective portion of a 
hedge pair.
    (iii) Non-significant equity exposures. Equity exposures, excluding 
significant investments in the capital of an unconsolidated financial 
institution in the form of common stock and exposures to an investment 
firm that would meet the definition of a traditional securitization were 
it not for the application of paragraph (8) of that definition in 
Sec. 324.2 and has greater than immaterial leverage, to the extent that 
the aggregate adjusted carrying value of the exposures does not exceed 
10 percent of the FDIC-supervised institution's total capital.
    (A) To compute the aggregate adjusted carrying value of an FDIC-
supervised institution's equity exposures for purposes of this section, 
the FDIC-supervised institution may exclude equity exposures described 
in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3)(i), and (b)(3)(ii) of this section, 
the equity exposure in a hedge pair with the smaller adjusted carrying 
value, and a proportion of each equity exposure to an investment fund 
equal to the proportion of the assets of the investment fund that are 
not equity exposures or that meet the criterion of paragraph (b)(3)(i) 
of this section. If an FDIC-supervised institution does not know the 
actual holdings of the investment fund, the FDIC-supervised institution 
may calculate the proportion of the assets of the fund that are not 
equity exposures based on the terms of the prospectus, partnership 
agreement, or similar contract that defines the fund's permissible 
investments. If the sum of the investment limits for all exposure 
classes within the fund exceeds 100 percent, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must assume for purposes of this section that the investment 
fund invests to the maximum extent possible in equity exposures.
    (B) When determining which of an FDIC-supervised institution's 
equity exposures qualify for a 100 percent risk weight under this 
paragraph (b), an FDIC-supervised institution first must include equity 
exposures to unconsolidated small business investment companies or held 
through consolidated small business investment companies described in 
section 302 of the Small

[[Page 275]]

Business Investment Act, then must include publicly traded equity 
exposures (including those held indirectly through investment funds), 
and then must include non-publicly traded equity exposures (including 
those held indirectly through investment funds).
    (4) 250 percent risk weight equity exposures. Significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in 
the form of common stock that are not deducted from capital pursuant to 
Sec. 324.22(d) are assigned a 250 percent risk weight.
    (5) 300 percent risk weight equity exposures. A publicly traded 
equity exposure (other than an equity exposure described in paragraph 
(b)(7) of this section and including the ineffective portion of a hedge 
pair) must be assigned a 300 percent risk weight.
    (6) 400 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure 
(other than an equity exposure described in paragraph (b)(7) of this 
section) that is not publicly traded must be assigned a 400 percent risk 
weight.
    (7) 600 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to 
an investment firm must be assigned a 600 percent risk weight, provided 
that the investment firm:
    (i) Would meet the definition of a traditional securitization were 
it not for the application of paragraph (8) of that definition; and
    (ii) Has greater than immaterial leverage.
    (c) Hedge transactions--(1) Hedge pair. A hedge pair is two equity 
exposures that form an effective hedge so long as each equity exposure 
is publicly traded or has a return that is primarily based on a publicly 
traded equity exposure.
    (2) Effective hedge. Two equity exposures form an effective hedge if 
the exposures either have the same remaining maturity or each has a 
remaining maturity of at least three months; the hedge relationship is 
formally documented in a prospective manner (that is, before the FDIC-
supervised institution acquires at least one of the equity exposures); 
the documentation specifies the measure of effectiveness (E) the FDIC-
supervised institution will use for the hedge relationship throughout 
the life of the transaction; and the hedge relationship has an E greater 
than or equal to 0.8. An FDIC-supervised institution must measure E at 
least quarterly and must use one of three alternative measures of E as 
set forth in this paragraph (c).
    (i) Under the dollar-offset method of measuring effectiveness, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must determine the ratio of value change 
(RVC). The RVC is the ratio of the cumulative sum of the changes in 
value of one equity exposure to the cumulative sum of the changes in the 
value of the other equity exposure. If RVC is positive, the hedge is not 
effective and E equals 0. If RVC is negative and greater than or equal 
to ^1 (that is, between zero and ^1), then E equals the absolute value 
of RVC. If RVC is negative and less than ^1, then E equals 2 plus RVC.
    (ii) Under the variability-reduction method of measuring 
effectiveness:

[[Page 276]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.023

    (iii) Under the regression method of measuring effectiveness, E 
equals the coefficient of determination of a regression in which the 
change in value of one exposure in a hedge pair is the dependent 
variable and the change in value of the other exposure in a hedge pair 
is the independent variable. However, if the estimated regression 
coefficient is positive, then E equals zero.
    (3) The effective portion of a hedge pair is E multiplied by the 
greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures forming 
a hedge pair.
    (4) The ineffective portion of a hedge pair is (1-E) multiplied by 
the greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures 
forming a hedge pair.



Sec. 324.53  Equity exposures to investment funds.

    (a) Available approaches. (1) Unless the exposure meets the 
requirements for a community development equity exposure under 
Sec. 324.52(b)(3)(i), an FDIC-supervised institution must determine the 
risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an investment fund 
under the full look-through approach described in paragraph (b) of this 
section, the simple modified look-through approach described in 
paragraph (c) of this section, or the alterative modified look-through 
approach described paragraph (d) of this section, provided, however, 
that the minimum risk weight that may be assigned to an equity exposure 
under this section is 20 percent.
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an 
investment fund that meets the requirements for a community development 
equity exposure in Sec. 324.52(b)(3)(i) is its adjusted carrying value.
    (3) If an equity exposure to an investment fund is part of a hedge 
pair and the FDIC-supervised institution does not use the full look-
through approach, the FDIC-supervised institution must use the 
ineffective portion of the hedge pair as determined under Sec. 324.52(c) 
as the adjusted carrying value for the equity exposure to the investment 
fund. The risk-weighted asset amount of the effective portion of the 
hedge pair is equal to its adjusted carrying value.
    (b) Full look-through approach. An FDIC-supervised institution that 
is able to calculate a risk-weighted asset amount for its proportional 
ownership share of each exposure held by the investment fund (as 
calculated under this subpart as if the proportional ownership share of 
the adjusted carrying value of each exposure were held directly by the 
FDIC-supervised institution) may set the risk-weighted asset amount of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's exposure to the fund equal to the 
product of:
    (1) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amounts of the exposures held 
by the fund as if they were held directly by the FDIC-supervised 
institution; and
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution's proportional ownership share 
of the fund.

[[Page 277]]

    (c) Simple modified look-through approach. Under the simple modified 
look-through approach, the risk-weighted asset amount for an FDIC-
supervised institution's equity exposure to an investment fund equals 
the adjusted carrying value of the equity exposure multiplied by the 
highest risk weight that applies to any exposure the fund is permitted 
to hold under the prospectus, partnership agreement, or similar 
agreement that defines the fund's permissible investments (excluding 
derivative contracts that are used for hedging rather than speculative 
purposes and that do not constitute a material portion of the fund's 
exposures).
    (d) Alternative modified look-through approach. Under the 
alternative modified look-through approach, an FDIC-supervised 
institution may assign the adjusted carrying value of an equity exposure 
to an investment fund on a pro rata basis to different risk weight 
categories under this subpart based on the investment limits in the 
fund's prospectus, partnership agreement, or similar contract that 
defines the fund's permissible investments. The risk-weighted asset 
amount for the FDIC-supervised institution's equity exposure to the 
investment fund equals the sum of each portion of the adjusted carrying 
value assigned to an exposure type multiplied by the applicable risk 
weight under this subpart. If the sum of the investment limits for all 
exposure types within the fund exceeds 100 percent, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must assume that the fund invests to the maximum extent 
permitted under its investment limits in the exposure type with the 
highest applicable risk weight under this subpart and continues to make 
investments in order of the exposure type with the next highest 
applicable risk weight under this subpart until the maximum total 
investment level is reached. If more than one exposure type applies to 
an exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution must use the highest 
applicable risk weight. An FDIC-supervised institution may exclude 
derivative contracts held by the fund that are used for hedging rather 
than for speculative purposes and do not constitute a material portion 
of the fund's exposures.



Secs. 324.54-324.60  [Reserved]

                               Disclosures



Sec. 324.61  Purpose and scope.

    Sections 324.61-324.63 of this subpart establish public disclosure 
requirements related to the capital requirements described in subpart B 
of this part for an FDIC-supervised institution with total consolidated 
assets of $50 billion or more as reported on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's most recent year-end Call Report that is not an advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution making public disclosures 
pursuant to Sec. 324.172. An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution that has not received approval from the FDIC to exit 
parallel run pursuant to Sec. 324.121(d) is subject to the disclosure 
requirements described in Secs. 324.62 and 324.63. Such an FDIC-
supervised institution must comply with Sec. 324.62 unless it is a 
consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding company, savings and loan 
holding company, or depository institution that is subject to these 
disclosure requirements or a subsidiary of a non-U.S. banking 
organization that is subject to comparable public disclosure 
requirements in its home jurisdiction. For purposes of this section, 
total consolidated assets are determined based on the average of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's total consolidated assets in the four most 
recent quarters as reported on the Call Report; or the average of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's total consolidated assets in the most 
recent consecutive quarters as reported quarterly on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's Call Report if the FDIC-supervised institution has not 
filed such a report for each of the most recent four quarters.



Sec. 324.62  Disclosure requirements.

    (a) An FDIC-supervised institution described in Sec. 324.61 must 
provide timely public disclosures each calendar quarter of the 
information in the applicable tables in Sec. 324.63. If a significant 
change occurs, such that the most recent reported amounts are no longer 
reflective of the FDIC-supervised institution's capital adequacy and 
risk profile, then a brief discussion of this change and its likely 
impact must be

[[Page 278]]

disclosed as soon as practicable thereafter. Qualitative disclosures 
that typically do not change each quarter (for example, a general 
summary of the FDIC-supervised institution's risk management objectives 
and policies, reporting system, and definitions) may be disclosed 
annually after the end of the fourth calendar quarter, provided that any 
significant changes are disclosed in the interim. The FDIC-supervised 
institution's management may provide all of the disclosures required by 
Secs. 324.61 through 324.63 in one place on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's public Web site or may provide the disclosures in more 
than one public financial report or other regulatory reports, provided 
that the FDIC-supervised institution publicly provides a summary table 
specifically indicating the location(s) of all such disclosures.
    (b) An FDIC-supervised institution described in Sec. 324.61 must 
have a formal disclosure policy approved by the board of directors that 
addresses its approach for determining the disclosures it makes. The 
policy must address the associated internal controls and disclosure 
controls and procedures. The board of directors and senior management 
are responsible for establishing and maintaining an effective internal 
control structure over financial reporting, including the disclosures 
required by this subpart, and must ensure that appropriate review of the 
disclosures takes place. One or more senior officers of the FDIC-
supervised institution must attest that the disclosures meet the 
requirements of this subpart.
    (c) If an FDIC-supervised institution described in Sec. 324.61 
concludes that specific commercial or financial information that it 
would otherwise be required to disclose under this section would be 
exempt from disclosure by the FDIC under the Freedom of Information Act 
(5 U.S.C. 552), then the FDIC-supervised institution is not required to 
disclose that specific information pursuant to this section, but must 
disclose more general information about the subject matter of the 
requirement, together with the fact that, and the reason why, the 
specific items of information have not been disclosed.



Sec. 324.63  Disclosures by FDIC-supervised institutions described
in Sec. 324.61.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 324.62, an FDIC-supervised 
institution described in Sec. 324.61 must make the disclosures described 
in Tables 1 through 10 of this section. The FDIC-supervised institution 
must make these disclosures publicly available for each of the last 
three years (that is, twelve quarters) or such shorter period beginning 
on January 1, 2015.
    (b) An FDIC-supervised institution must publicly disclose each 
quarter the following:
    (1) Common equity tier 1 capital, additional tier 1 capital, tier 2 
capital, tier 1 and total capital ratios, including the regulatory 
capital elements and all the regulatory adjustments and deductions 
needed to calculate the numerator of such ratios;
    (2) Total risk-weighted assets, including the different regulatory 
adjustments and deductions needed to calculate total risk-weighted 
assets;
    (3) Regulatory capital ratios during any transition periods, 
including a description of all the regulatory capital elements and all 
regulatory adjustments and deductions needed to calculate the numerator 
and denominator of each capital ratio during any transition period; and
    (4) A reconciliation of regulatory capital elements as they relate 
to its balance sheet in any audited consolidated financial statements.

              Table 1 to Sec. 324.63--Scope of Application
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures.......  (a)..............  The name of the top
                                                    corporate entity in
                                                    the group to which
                                                    subpart D of this
                                                    part applies.

[[Page 279]]

 
                                (b)..............  A brief description
                                                    of the differences
                                                    in the basis for
                                                    consolidating
                                                    entities \1\ for
                                                    accounting and
                                                    regulatory purposes,
                                                    with a description
                                                    of those entities:
                                                   (1) That are fully
                                                    consolidated;
                                                   (2) That are
                                                    deconsolidated and
                                                    deducted from total
                                                    capital;
                                                   (3) For which the
                                                    total capital
                                                    requirement is
                                                    deducted; and
                                                   (4) That are neither
                                                    consolidated nor
                                                    deducted (for
                                                    example, where the
                                                    investment in the
                                                    entity is assigned a
                                                    risk weight in
                                                    accordance with this
                                                    subpart).
                                (c)..............  Any restrictions, or
                                                    other major
                                                    impediments, on
                                                    transfer of funds or
                                                    total capital within
                                                    the group.
Quantitative Disclosures......  (d)..............  The aggregate amount
                                                    of surplus capital
                                                    of insurance
                                                    subsidiaries
                                                    included in the
                                                    total capital of the
                                                    consolidated group.
                                (e)..............  The aggregate amount
                                                    by which actual
                                                    total capital is
                                                    less than the
                                                    minimum total
                                                    capital requirement
                                                    in all subsidiaries,
                                                    with total capital
                                                    requirements and the
                                                    name(s) of the
                                                    subsidiaries with
                                                    such deficiencies.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Entities include securities, insurance and other financial
  subsidiaries, commercial subsidiaries (where permitted), and
  significant minority equity investments in insurance, financial and
  commercial entities.


               Table 2 to Sec. 324.63--Capital Structure
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures.......  (a)..............  Summary information
                                                    on the terms and
                                                    conditions of the
                                                    main features of all
                                                    regulatory capital
                                                    instruments.
Quantitative Disclosures......  (b)..............  The amount of common
                                                    equity tier 1
                                                    capital, with
                                                    separate disclosure
                                                    of:
                                                   (1) Common stock and
                                                    related surplus;
                                                   (2) Retained
                                                    earnings;
                                                   (3) Common equity
                                                    minority interest;
                                                   (4) AOCI; and
                                                   (5) Regulatory
                                                    adjustments and
                                                    deductions made to
                                                    common equity tier 1
                                                    capital.
                                (c)..............  The amount of tier 1
                                                    capital, with
                                                    separate disclosure
                                                    of:
                                                   (1) Additional tier 1
                                                    capital elements,
                                                    including additional
                                                    tier 1 capital
                                                    instruments and tier
                                                    1 minority interest
                                                    not included in
                                                    common equity tier 1
                                                    capital; and
                                                   (2) Regulatory
                                                    adjustments and
                                                    deductions made to
                                                    tier 1 capital.
                                (d)..............  The amount of total
                                                    capital, with
                                                    separate disclosure
                                                    of:
                                                   (1) Tier 2 capital
                                                    elements, including
                                                    tier 2 capital
                                                    instruments and
                                                    total capital
                                                    minority interest
                                                    not included in tier
                                                    1 capital; and
                                                   (2) Regulatory
                                                    adjustments and
                                                    deductions made to
                                                    total capital.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                Table 3 to Sec. 324.63--Capital Adequacy
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures.......  (a)..............  A summary discussion
                                                    of the FDIC-
                                                    supervised
                                                    institution's
                                                    approach to
                                                    assessing the
                                                    adequacy of its
                                                    capital to support
                                                    current and future
                                                    activities.

[[Page 280]]

 
Quantitative disclosures......  (b)..............  Risk-weighted assets
                                                    for:
                                                   (1) Exposures to
                                                    sovereign entities;
                                                   (2) Exposures to
                                                    certain
                                                    supranational
                                                    entities and MDBs;
                                                   (3) Exposures to
                                                    depository
                                                    institutions,
                                                    foreign banks, and
                                                    credit unions;
                                                   (4) Exposures to
                                                    PSEs;
                                                   (5) Corporate
                                                    exposures;
                                                   (6) Residential
                                                    mortgage exposures;
                                                   (7) Statutory
                                                    multifamily
                                                    mortgages and pre-
                                                    sold construction
                                                    loans;
                                                   (8) HVCRE loans;
                                                   (9) Past due loans;
                                                   (10) Other assets;
                                                   (11) Cleared
                                                    transactions;
                                                   (12) Default fund
                                                    contributions;
                                                   (13) Unsettled
                                                    transactions;
                                                   (14) Securitization
                                                    exposures; and
                                                   (15) Equity
                                                    exposures.
                                (c)..............  Standardized market
                                                    risk-weighted assets
                                                    as calculated under
                                                    subpart F of this
                                                    part.
                                (d)..............  Common equity tier 1,
                                                    tier 1 and total
                                                    risk-based capital
                                                    ratios:
                                                   (1) For the top
                                                    consolidated group;
                                                    and
                                                   (2) For each
                                                    depository
                                                    institution
                                                    subsidiary.
                                (e)..............  Total standardized
                                                    risk-weighted
                                                    assets.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


          Table 4 to Sec. 324.63--Capital Conservation Buffer
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quantitative Disclosures......  (a)..............  At least quarterly,
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution must
                                                    calculate and
                                                    publicly disclose
                                                    the capital
                                                    conservation buffer
                                                    as described under
                                                    Sec. 324.11.
                                (b)..............  At least quarterly,
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution must
                                                    calculate and
                                                    publicly disclose
                                                    the eligible
                                                    retained income of
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution, as
                                                    described under Sec.
                                                     324.11.
                                (c)..............  At least quarterly,
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution must
                                                    calculate and
                                                    publicly disclose
                                                    any limitations it
                                                    has on distributions
                                                    and discretionary
                                                    bonus payments
                                                    resulting from the
                                                    capital conservation
                                                    buffer framework
                                                    described under Sec.
                                                     324.11, including
                                                    the maximum payout
                                                    amount for the
                                                    quarter.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) General qualitative disclosure requirement. For each separate 
risk area described in Tables 5 through 10, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must describe its risk management objectives and policies, 
including: strategies and processes; the structure and organization of 
the relevant risk management function; the scope and nature of risk 
reporting and/or measurement systems; policies for hedging and/or 
mitigating risk and strategies and processes for monitoring the 
continuing effectiveness of hedges/mitigants.

[[Page 281]]



        Table 5 to Sec. 324.63--Credit Risk: General Disclosures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures.......  (a)..............  The general
                                                    qualitative
                                                    disclosure
                                                    requirement with
                                                    respect to credit
                                                    risk (excluding
                                                    counterparty credit
                                                    risk disclosed in
                                                    accordance with
                                                    Table 6 to Sec.
                                                    324.63), including
                                                    the:
                                                   (1) Policy for
                                                    determining past due
                                                    or delinquency
                                                    status;
                                                   (2) Policy for
                                                    placing loans on
                                                    nonaccrual;
                                                   (3) Policy for
                                                    returning loans to
                                                    accrual status;
                                                   (4) Definition of and
                                                    policy for
                                                    identifying impaired
                                                    loans (for financial
                                                    accounting
                                                    purposes);
                                                   (5) Description of
                                                    the methodology that
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution uses to
                                                    estimate its
                                                    allowance for loan
                                                    and lease losses,
                                                    including
                                                    statistical methods
                                                    used where
                                                    applicable;
                                                   (6) Policy for
                                                    charging-off
                                                    uncollectible
                                                    amounts; and
                                                   (7) Discussion of the
                                                    FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution's credit
                                                    risk management
                                                    policy.
Quantitative Disclosures......  (b)..............  Total credit risk
                                                    exposures and
                                                    average credit risk
                                                    exposures, after
                                                    accounting offsets
                                                    in accordance with
                                                    GAAP, without taking
                                                    into account the
                                                    effects of credit
                                                    risk mitigation
                                                    techniques (for
                                                    example, collateral
                                                    and netting not
                                                    permitted under
                                                    GAAP), over the
                                                    period categorized
                                                    by major types of
                                                    credit exposure. For
                                                    example, FDIC-
                                                    supervised
                                                    institutions could
                                                    use categories
                                                    similar to that used
                                                    for financial
                                                    statement purposes.
                                                    Such categories
                                                    might include, for
                                                    instance:
                                                   (1) Loans, off-
                                                    balance sheet
                                                    commitments, and
                                                    other non-derivative
                                                    off-balance sheet
                                                    exposures;
                                                   (2) Debt securities;
                                                    and
                                                   (3) OTC
                                                    derivatives.\2\
                                (c)..............  Geographic
                                                    distribution of
                                                    exposures,
                                                    categorized in
                                                    significant areas by
                                                    major types of
                                                    credit exposure.\3\
                                (d)..............  Industry or
                                                    counterparty type
                                                    distribution of
                                                    exposures,
                                                    categorized by major
                                                    types of credit
                                                    exposure.
                                (e)..............  By major industry or
                                                    counterparty type:
                                                   (1) Amount of
                                                    impaired loans for
                                                    which there was a
                                                    related allowance
                                                    under GAAP;
                                                   (2) Amount of
                                                    impaired loans for
                                                    which there was no
                                                    related allowance
                                                    under GAAP;
                                                   (3) Amount of loans
                                                    past due 90 days and
                                                    on nonaccrual;
                                                   (4) Amount of loans
                                                    past due 90 days and
                                                    still accruing; \4\
                                                   (5) The balance in
                                                    the allowance for
                                                    loan and lease
                                                    losses at the end of
                                                    each period,
                                                    disaggregated on the
                                                    basis of the FDIC-
                                                    supervised
                                                    institution's
                                                    impairment method.
                                                    To disaggregate the
                                                    information required
                                                    on the basis of
                                                    impairment
                                                    methodology, an
                                                    entity shall
                                                    separately disclose
                                                    the amounts based on
                                                    the requirements in
                                                    GAAP; and
                                                   (6) Charge-offs
                                                    during the period.
                                (f)..............  Amount of impaired
                                                    loans and, if
                                                    available, the
                                                    amount of past due
                                                    loans categorized by
                                                    significant
                                                    geographic areas
                                                    including, if
                                                    practical, the
                                                    amounts of
                                                    allowances related
                                                    to each geographical
                                                    area \5\, further
                                                    categorized as
                                                    required by GAAP.
                                (g)..............  Reconciliation of
                                                    changes in ALLL.\6\
                                (h)..............  Remaining contractual
                                                    maturity delineation
                                                    (for example, one
                                                    year or less) of the
                                                    whole portfolio,
                                                    categorized by
                                                    credit exposure.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Table 5 to Sec. 324.63 does not cover equity exposures, which
  should be reported in Table 9 to Sec. 324.63.
\2\ See, for example, ASC Topic 815-10 and 210, as they may be amended
  from time to time.
\3\ Geographical areas may consist of individual countries, groups of
  countries, or regions within countries. An FDIC-supervised institution
  might choose to define the geographical areas based on the way the
  FDIC-supervised institution's portfolio is geographically managed. The
  criteria used to allocate the loans to geographical areas must be
  specified.
\4\ An FDIC-supervised institution is encouraged also to provide an
  analysis of the aging of past-due loans.
\5\ The portion of the general allowance that is not allocated to a
  geographical area should be disclosed separately.

[[Page 282]]

 
\6\ The reconciliation should include the following: a description of
  the allowance; the opening balance of the allowance; charge-offs taken
  against the allowance during the period; amounts provided (or
  reversed) for estimated probable loan losses during the period; any
  other adjustments (for example, exchange rate differences, business
  combinations, acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries), including
  transfers between allowances; and the closing balance of the
  allowance. Charge-offs and recoveries that have been recorded directly
  to the income statement should be disclosed separately.


Table 6 to Sec. 324.63--General Disclosure for Counterparty Credit Risk-
                            Related Exposures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures.......  (a)..............  The general
                                                    qualitative
                                                    disclosure
                                                    requirement with
                                                    respect to OTC
                                                    derivatives,
                                                    eligible margin
                                                    loans, and repo-
                                                    style transactions,
                                                    including a
                                                    discussion of:
                                                   (1) The methodology
                                                    used to assign
                                                    credit limits for
                                                    counterparty credit
                                                    exposures;
                                                   (2) Policies for
                                                    securing collateral,
                                                    valuing and managing
                                                    collateral, and
                                                    establishing credit
                                                    reserves;
                                                   (3) The primary types
                                                    of collateral taken;
                                                    and
                                                   (4) The impact of the
                                                    amount of collateral
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution would
                                                    have to provide
                                                    given a
                                                    deterioration in the
                                                    FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution's own
                                                    creditworthiness.
Quantitative Disclosures......  (b)..............  Gross positive fair
                                                    value of contracts,
                                                    collateral held
                                                    (including type, for
                                                    example, cash,
                                                    government
                                                    securities), and net
                                                    unsecured credit
                                                    exposure.\1\ An FDIC-
                                                    supervised
                                                    institution also
                                                    must disclose the
                                                    notional value of
                                                    credit derivative
                                                    hedges purchased for
                                                    counterparty credit
                                                    risk protection and
                                                    the distribution of
                                                    current credit
                                                    exposure by exposure
                                                    type.\2\
                                (c)..............  Notional amount of
                                                    purchased and sold
                                                    credit derivatives,
                                                    segregated between
                                                    use for the FDIC-
                                                    supervised
                                                    institution's own
                                                    credit portfolio and
                                                    in its
                                                    intermediation
                                                    activities,
                                                    including the
                                                    distribution of the
                                                    credit derivative
                                                    products used,
                                                    categorized further
                                                    by protection bought
                                                    and sold within each
                                                    product group.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Net unsecured credit exposure is the credit exposure after
  considering both the benefits from legally enforceable netting
  agreements and collateral arrangements without taking into account
  haircuts for price volatility, liquidity, etc.
\2\ This may include interest rate derivative contracts, foreign
  exchange derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, credit
  derivatives, commodity or other derivative contracts, repo-style
  transactions, and eligible margin loans.


           Table 7 to Sec. 324.63--Credit Risk Mitigation 1 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures.......  (a)..............  The general
                                                    qualitative
                                                    disclosure
                                                    requirement with
                                                    respect to credit
                                                    risk mitigation,
                                                    including:
                                                   (1) Policies and
                                                    processes for
                                                    collateral valuation
                                                    and management;
                                                   (2) A description of
                                                    the main types of
                                                    collateral taken by
                                                    the FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution;
                                                   (3) The main types of
                                                    guarantors/credit
                                                    derivative
                                                    counterparties and
                                                    their
                                                    creditworthiness;
                                                    and
                                                   (4) Information about
                                                    (market or credit)
                                                    risk concentrations
                                                    with respect to
                                                    credit risk
                                                    mitigation.
Quantitative Disclosures......  (b)..............  For each separately
                                                    disclosed credit
                                                    risk portfolio, the
                                                    total exposure that
                                                    is covered by
                                                    eligible financial
                                                    collateral, and
                                                    after the
                                                    application of
                                                    haircuts.
                                (c)..............  For each separately
                                                    disclosed portfolio,
                                                    the total exposure
                                                    that is covered by
                                                    guarantees/credit
                                                    derivatives and the
                                                    risk-weighted asset
                                                    amount associated
                                                    with that exposure.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ At a minimum, an FDIC-supervised institution must provide the
  disclosures in Table 7 in relation to credit risk mitigation that has
  been recognized for the purposes of reducing capital requirements
  under this subpart. Where relevant, FDIC-supervised institutions are
  encouraged to give further information about mitigants that have not
  been recognized for that purpose.
\2\ Credit derivatives that are treated, for the purposes of this
  subpart, as synthetic securitization exposures should be excluded from
  the credit risk mitigation disclosures and included within those
  relating to securitization (Table 8 to Sec. 324.63).


[[Page 283]]


                 Table 8 to Sec. 324.63--Securitization
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures........  (a)...............  The general
                                                      qualitative
                                                      disclosure
                                                      requirement with
                                                      respect to a
                                                      securitization
                                                      (including
                                                      synthetic
                                                      securitizations),
                                                      including a
                                                      discussion of:
                                                     (1) The FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution's
                                                      objectives for
                                                      securitizing
                                                      assets, including
                                                      the extent to
                                                      which these
                                                      activities
                                                      transfer credit
                                                      risk of the
                                                      underlying
                                                      exposures away
                                                      from the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution to
                                                      other entities and
                                                      including the type
                                                      of risks assumed
                                                      and retained with
                                                      resecuritization
                                                      activity;\1\
                                                     (2) The nature of
                                                      the risks (e.g.
                                                      liquidity risk)
                                                      inherent in the
                                                      securitized
                                                      assets;
                                                     (3) The roles
                                                      played by the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution in the
                                                      securitization
                                                      process \2\ and an
                                                      indication of the
                                                      extent of the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution's
                                                      involvement in
                                                      each of them;
                                                     (4) The processes
                                                      in place to
                                                      monitor changes in
                                                      the credit and
                                                      market risk of
                                                      securitization
                                                      exposures
                                                      including how
                                                      those processes
                                                      differ for
                                                      resecuritization
                                                      exposures;
                                                     (5) The FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution's
                                                      policy for
                                                      mitigating the
                                                      credit risk
                                                      retained through
                                                      securitization and
                                                      resecuritization
                                                      exposures; and
                                                     (6) The risk-based
                                                      capital approaches
                                                      that the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution
                                                      follows for its
                                                      securitization
                                                      exposures
                                                      including the type
                                                      of securitization
                                                      exposure to which
                                                      each approach
                                                      applies.
                                 (b)...............  A list of:
                                                     (1) The type of
                                                      securitization
                                                      SPEs that the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution, as
                                                      sponsor, uses to
                                                      securitize third-
                                                      party exposures.
                                                      The FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution must
                                                      indicate whether
                                                      it has exposure to
                                                      these SPEs, either
                                                      on- or off-balance
                                                      sheet; and
                                                     (2) Affiliated
                                                      entities:
                                                     (i) That the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution
                                                      manages or
                                                      advises; and
                                                     (ii) That invest
                                                      either in the
                                                      securitization
                                                      exposures that the
                                                      FDIC-supervised
                                                      institution has
                                                      securitized or in
                                                      securitization
                                                      SPEs that the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution
                                                      sponsors.\3\
                                 (c)...............  Summary of the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution's
                                                      accounting
                                                      policies for
                                                      securitization
                                                      activities,
                                                      including:
                                                     (1) Whether the
                                                      transactions are
                                                      treated as sales
                                                      or financings;
                                                     (2) Recognition of
                                                      gain-on-sale;
                                                     (3) Methods and key
                                                      assumptions
                                                      applied in valuing
                                                      retained or
                                                      purchased
                                                      interests;
                                                     (4) Changes in
                                                      methods and key
                                                      assumptions from
                                                      the previous
                                                      period for valuing
                                                      retained interests
                                                      and impact of the
                                                      changes;
                                                     (5) Treatment of
                                                      synthetic
                                                      securitizations;
                                                     (6) How exposures
                                                      intended to be
                                                      securitized are
                                                      valued and whether
                                                      they are recorded
                                                      under subpart D of
                                                      this part; and
                                                     (7) Policies for
                                                      recognizing
                                                      liabilities on the
                                                      balance sheet for
                                                      arrangements that
                                                      could require the
                                                      FDIC-supervised
                                                      institution to
                                                      provide financial
                                                      support for
                                                      securitized
                                                      assets.
                                 (d)...............  An explanation of
                                                      significant
                                                      changes to any
                                                      quantitative
                                                      information since
                                                      the last reporting
                                                      period.

[[Page 284]]

 
Quantitative Disclosures.......  (e)...............  The total
                                                      outstanding
                                                      exposures
                                                      securitized by the
                                                      FDIC-supervised
                                                      institution in
                                                      securitizations
                                                      that meet the
                                                      operational
                                                      criteria provided
                                                      in Sec. 324.41
                                                      (categorized into
                                                      traditional and
                                                      synthetic
                                                      securitizations),
                                                      by exposure type,
                                                      separately for
                                                      securitizations of
                                                      third-party
                                                      exposures for
                                                      which the FDIC-
                                                      supervised
                                                      institution acts
                                                      only as
                                                      sponsor.\4\
                                 (f)...............  For exposures
                                                      securitized by the
                                                      FDIC-supervised
                                                      institution in
                                                      securitizations
                                                      that meet the
                                                      operational
                                                      criteria in Sec.
                                                      324.41:
                                                     (1) Amount of
                                                      securitized assets
                                                      that are impaired/
                                                      past due
                                                      categorized by
                                                      exposure type; \5\
                                                      and
                                                     (2) Losses
                                                      recognized by the
                                                      FDIC-supervised
                                                      institution during
                                                      the current period
                                                      categorized by
                                                      exposure type.\6\
                                 (g)...............  The total amount of
                                                      outstanding
                                                      exposures intended
                                                      to be securitized
                                                      categorized by
                                                      exposure type.
                                 (h)...............  Aggregate amount
                                                      of:
                                                     (1) On-balance
                                                      sheet
                                                      securitization
                                                      exposures retained
                                                      or purchased
                                                      categorized by
                                                      exposure type; and
                                                     (2) Off-balance
                                                      sheet
                                                      securitization
                                                      exposures
                                                      categorized by
                                                      exposure type.
                                 (i)...............  (1) Aggregate
                                                      amount of
                                                      securitization
                                                      exposures retained
                                                      or purchased and
                                                      the associated
                                                      capital
                                                      requirements for
                                                      these exposures,
                                                      categorized
                                                      between
                                                      securitization and
                                                      resecuritization
                                                      exposures, further
                                                      categorized into a
                                                      meaningful number
                                                      of risk weight
                                                      bands and by risk-
                                                      based capital
                                                      approach (e.g.,
                                                      SSFA); and
                                                     (2) Exposures that
                                                      have been deducted
                                                      entirely from tier
                                                      1 capital, CEIOs
                                                      deducted from
                                                      total capital (as
                                                      described in Sec.
                                                      324.42(a)(1)), and
                                                      other exposures
                                                      deducted from
                                                      total capital
                                                      should be
                                                      disclosed
                                                      separately by
                                                      exposure type.
                                 (j)...............  Summary of current
                                                      year's
                                                      securitization
                                                      activity,
                                                      including the
                                                      amount of
                                                      exposures
                                                      securitized (by
                                                      exposure type),
                                                      and recognized
                                                      gain or loss on
                                                      sale by exposure
                                                      type.
                                 (k)...............  Aggregate amount of
                                                      resecuritization
                                                      exposures retained
                                                      or purchased
                                                      categorized
                                                      according to:
                                                     (1) Exposures to
                                                      which credit risk
                                                      mitigation is
                                                      applied and those
                                                      not applied; and
                                                     (2) Exposures to
                                                      guarantors
                                                      categorized
                                                      according to
                                                      guarantor
                                                      creditworthiness
                                                      categories or
                                                      guarantor name.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The FDIC-supervised institution should describe the structure of
  resecuritizations in which it participates; this description should be
  provided for the main categories of resecuritization products in which
  the FDIC-supervised institution is active.
\2\ For example, these roles may include originator, investor, servicer,
  provider of credit enhancement, sponsor, liquidity provider, or swap
  provider.
\3\ Such affiliated entities may include, for example, money market
  funds, to be listed individually, and personal and private trusts, to
  be noted collectively.
\4\ ``Exposures securitized'' include underlying exposures originated by
  the FDIC-supervised institution, whether generated by them or
  purchased, and recognized in the balance sheet, from third parties,
  and third-party exposures included in sponsored transactions.
  Securitization transactions (including underlying exposures originally
  on the FDIC-supervised institution's balance sheet and underlying
  exposures acquired by the FDIC-supervised institution from third-party
  entities) in which the originating bank does not retain any
  securitization exposure should be shown separately but need only be
  reported for the year of inception. FDIC-supervised institutions are
  required to disclose exposures regardless of whether there is a
  capital charge under this part.
\5\ Include credit-related other than temporary impairment (OTTI).
\6\ For example, charge-offs/allowances (if the assets remain on the
  FDIC-supervised institution's balance sheet) or credit-related OTTI of
  interest-only strips and other retained residual interests, as well as
  recognition of liabilities for probable future financial support
  required of the FDIC-supervised institution with respect to
  securitized assets.


[[Page 285]]


 Table 9 to Sec. 324.63--Equities Not Subject to Subpart F of This Part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures.......  (a)..............  The general
                                                    qualitative
                                                    disclosure
                                                    requirement with
                                                    respect to equity
                                                    risk for equities
                                                    not subject to
                                                    subpart F of this
                                                    part, including:
                                                   (1) Differentiation
                                                    between holdings on
                                                    which capital gains
                                                    are expected and
                                                    those taken under
                                                    other objectives
                                                    including for
                                                    relationship and
                                                    strategic reasons;
                                                    and
                                                   (2) Discussion of
                                                    important policies
                                                    covering the
                                                    valuation of and
                                                    accounting for
                                                    equity holdings not
                                                    subject to subpart F
                                                    of this part. This
                                                    includes the
                                                    accounting
                                                    techniques and
                                                    valuation
                                                    methodologies used,
                                                    including key
                                                    assumptions and
                                                    practices affecting
                                                    valuation as well as
                                                    significant changes
                                                    in these practices.
Quantitative Disclosures......  (b)..............  Value disclosed on
                                                    the balance sheet of
                                                    investments, as well
                                                    as the fair value of
                                                    those investments;
                                                    for securities that
                                                    are publicly traded,
                                                    a comparison to
                                                    publicly-quoted
                                                    share values where
                                                    the share price is
                                                    materially different
                                                    from fair value.
                                (c)..............  The types and nature
                                                    of investments,
                                                    including the amount
                                                    that is:
                                                   (1) Publicly traded;
                                                    and
                                                   (2) Non publicly
                                                    traded.
                                (d)..............  The cumulative
                                                    realized gains
                                                    (losses) arising
                                                    from sales and
                                                    liquidations in the
                                                    reporting period.
                                (e)..............  (1) Total unrealized
                                                    gains (losses).\1\
                                                   (2) Total latent
                                                    revaluation gains
                                                    (losses).\2\
                                                   (3) Any amounts of
                                                    the above included
                                                    in tier 1 or tier 2
                                                    capital.
                                (f)..............  Capital requirements
                                                    categorized by
                                                    appropriate equity
                                                    groupings,
                                                    consistent with the
                                                    FDIC-supervised
                                                    institution's
                                                    methodology, as well
                                                    as the aggregate
                                                    amounts and the type
                                                    of equity
                                                    investments subject
                                                    to any supervisory
                                                    transition regarding
                                                    regulatory capital
                                                    requirements.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Unrealized gains (losses) recognized on the balance sheet but not
  through earnings.
\2\ Unrealized gains (losses) not recognized either on the balance sheet
  or through earnings.


 Table 10 to Sec. 324.63--Interest Rate Risk for Non-Trading Activities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures.......  (a)..............  The general
                                                    qualitative
                                                    disclosure
                                                    requirement,
                                                    including the nature
                                                    of interest rate
                                                    risk for non-trading
                                                    activities and key
                                                    assumptions,
                                                    including
                                                    assumptions
                                                    regarding loan
                                                    prepayments and
                                                    behavior of non-
                                                    maturity deposits,
                                                    and frequency of
                                                    measurement of
                                                    interest rate risk
                                                    for non-trading
                                                    activities.
Quantitative disclosures......  (b)..............  The increase
                                                    (decline) in
                                                    earnings or economic
                                                    value (or relevant
                                                    measure used by
                                                    management) for
                                                    upward and downward
                                                    rate shocks
                                                    according to
                                                    management's method
                                                    for measuring
                                                    interest rate risk
                                                    for non-trading
                                                    activities,
                                                    categorized by
                                                    currency (as
                                                    appropriate).
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 286]]


[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 78 FR 62417, Oct. 22, 2013; 
79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Secs. 324.64-324.99  [Reserved]



   Subpart E_Risk-Weighted Assets_Internal Ratings-Based and Advanced 
                         Measurement Approaches



Sec. 324.100  Purpose, applicability, and principle of conservatism.

    (a) Purpose. This subpart E establishes:
    (1) Minimum qualifying criteria for FDIC-supervised institutions 
using institution-specific internal risk measurement and management 
processes for calculating risk-based capital requirements; and
    (2) Methodologies for such FDIC-supervised institutions to calculate 
their total risk-weighted assets.
    (b) Applicability. (1) This subpart applies to an FDIC-supervised 
institution that:
    (i) Has consolidated total assets, as reported on its most recent 
year-end Call Report equal to $250 billion or more;
    (ii) Has consolidated total on-balance sheet foreign exposure on its 
most recent year-end Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 
(FFIEC) 009 Report equal to $10 billion or more (where total on-balance 
sheet foreign exposure equals total foreign countries cross-border 
claims on an ultimate-risk basis, plus total foreign countries claims on 
local residents on an ultimate-risk basis, plus total foreign countries 
fair value of foreign exchange and derivative products), calculated in 
accordance with the FFIEC 009 Country Exposure Report;
    (iii) Is a subsidiary of a depository institution that uses this 
subpart or the advanced approaches pursuant to subpart E of 12 CFR part 
3 (OCC), or 12 CFR part 217 (Federal Reserve) to calculate its total 
risk-weighted assets;
    (iv) Is a subsidiary of a bank holding company or savings and loan 
holding company that uses the advanced approaches pursuant to 12 CFR 
part 217 to calculate its total risk-weighted assets; or
    (v) Elects to use this subpart to calculate its total risk-weighted 
assets.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that is subject to this subpart 
shall remain subject to this subpart unless the FDIC determines in 
writing that application of this subpart is not appropriate in light of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's asset size, level of complexity, risk 
profile, or scope of operations. In making a determination under this 
paragraph (b), the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures in the 
same manner and to the same extent as the notice and response procedures 
in Sec. 324.5.
    (3) A market risk FDIC-supervised institution must exclude from its 
calculation of risk-weighted assets under this subpart the risk-weighted 
asset amounts of all covered positions, as defined in subpart F of this 
part (except foreign exchange positions that are not trading positions, 
over-the-counter derivative positions, cleared transactions, and 
unsettled transactions).
    (c) Principle of conservatism. Notwithstanding the requirements of 
this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution may choose not to apply a 
provision of this subpart to one or more exposures provided that:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution can demonstrate on an ongoing 
basis to the satisfaction of the FDIC that not applying the provision 
would, in all circumstances, unambiguously generate a risk-based capital 
requirement for each such exposure greater than that which would 
otherwise be required under this subpart;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution appropriately manages the risk 
of each such exposure;
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution notifies the FDIC in writing 
prior to applying this principle to each such exposure; and
    (4) The exposures to which the FDIC-supervised institution applies 
this principle are not, in the aggregate, material to the FDIC-
supervised institution.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 80 FR 41423, July 15, 2015]



Sec. 324.101  Definitions.

    (a) Terms that are set forth in Sec. 324.2 and used in this subpart 
have the definitions assigned thereto in Sec. 324.2.

[[Page 287]]

    (b) For the purposes of this subpart, the following terms are 
defined as follows:
    Advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) systems means an advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution's internal risk rating and 
segmentation system; risk parameter quantification system; data 
management and maintenance system; and control, oversight, and 
validation system for credit risk of wholesale and retail exposures.
    Advanced systems means an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution's advanced IRB systems, operational risk management 
processes, operational risk data and assessment systems, operational 
risk quantification systems, and, to the extent used by the FDIC-
supervised institution, the internal models methodology, advanced CVA 
approach, double default excessive correlation detection process, and 
internal models approach (IMA) for equity exposures.
    Backtesting means the comparison of an FDIC-supervised institution's 
internal estimates with actual outcomes during a sample period not used 
in model development. In this context, backtesting is one form of out-
of-sample testing.
    Benchmarking means the comparison of an FDIC-supervised 
institution's internal estimates with relevant internal and external 
data or with estimates based on other estimation techniques.
    Bond option contract means a bond option, bond future, or any other 
instrument linked to a bond that gives rise to similar counterparty 
credit risk.
    Business environment and internal control factors means the 
indicators of an FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk profile 
that reflect a current and forward-looking assessment of the FDIC-
supervised institution's underlying business risk factors and internal 
control environment.
    Credit default swap (CDS) means a financial contract executed under 
standard industry documentation that allows one party (the protection 
purchaser) to transfer the credit risk of one or more exposures 
(reference exposure(s)) to another party (the protection provider) for a 
certain period of time.
    Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) means the fair value adjustment to 
reflect counterparty credit risk in valuation of OTC derivative 
contracts.
    Default--For the purposes of calculating capital requirements under 
this subpart:
    (1) Retail. (i) A retail exposure of an FDIC-supervised institution 
is in default if:
    (A) The exposure is 180 days past due, in the case of a residential 
mortgage exposure or revolving exposure;
    (B) The exposure is 120 days past due, in the case of retail 
exposures that are not residential mortgage exposures or revolving 
exposures; or
    (C) The FDIC-supervised institution has taken a full or partial 
charge-off, write-down of principal, or material negative fair value 
adjustment of principal on the exposure for credit-related reasons.
    (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (1)(i) of this definition, for a 
retail exposure held by a non-U.S. subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised 
institution that is subject to an internal ratings-based approach to 
capital adequacy consistent with the Basel Committee on Banking 
Supervision's ``International Convergence of Capital Measurement and 
Capital Standards: A Revised Framework'' in a non-U.S. jurisdiction, the 
FDIC-supervised institution may elect to use the definition of default 
that is used in that jurisdiction, provided that the FDIC-supervised 
institution has obtained prior approval from the FDIC to use the 
definition of default in that jurisdiction.
    (iii) A retail exposure in default remains in default until the 
FDIC-supervised institution has reasonable assurance of repayment and 
performance for all contractual principal and interest payments on the 
exposure.
    (2) Wholesale. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution's wholesale 
obligor is in default if:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution determines that the obligor is 
unlikely to pay its credit obligations to the FDIC-supervised 
institution in full, without recourse by the FDIC-supervised institution 
to actions such as realizing collateral (if held); or

[[Page 288]]

    (B) The obligor is past due more than 90 days on any material credit 
obligation(s) to the FDIC-supervised institution.\29\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \29\ Overdrafts are past due once the obligor has breached an 
advised limit or been advised of a limit smaller than the current 
outstanding balance.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) An obligor in default remains in default until the FDIC-
supervised institution has reasonable assurance of repayment and 
performance for all contractual principal and interest payments on all 
exposures of the FDIC-supervised institution to the obligor (other than 
exposures that have been fully written-down or charged-off).
    Dependence means a measure of the association among operational 
losses across and within units of measure.
    Economic downturn conditions means, with respect to an exposure held 
by the FDIC-supervised institution, those conditions in which the 
aggregate default rates for that exposure's wholesale or retail exposure 
subcategory (or subdivision of such subcategory selected by the FDIC-
supervised institution) in the exposure's national jurisdiction (or 
subdivision of such jurisdiction selected by the FDIC-supervised 
institution) are significantly higher than average.
    Effective maturity (M) of a wholesale exposure means:
    (1) For wholesale exposures other than repo-style transactions, 
eligible margin loans, and OTC derivative contracts described in 
paragraph (2) or (3) of this definition:
    (i) The weighted-average remaining maturity (measured in years, 
whole or fractional) of the expected contractual cash flows from the 
exposure, using the undiscounted amounts of the cash flows as weights; 
or
    (ii) The nominal remaining maturity (measured in years, whole or 
fractional) of the exposure.
    (2) For repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and OTC 
derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master netting agreement 
for which the FDIC-supervised institution does not apply the internal 
models approach in Sec. 324.132(d), the weighted-average remaining 
maturity (measured in years, whole or fractional) of the individual 
transactions subject to the qualifying master netting agreement, with 
the weight of each individual transaction set equal to the notional 
amount of the transaction.
    (3) For repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and OTC 
derivative contracts for which the FDIC-supervised institution applies 
the internal models approach in Sec. 324.132(d), the value determined in 
Sec. 324.132(d)(4).
    Eligible double default guarantor, with respect to a guarantee or 
credit derivative obtained by an FDIC-supervised institution, means:
    (1) U.S.-based entities. A depository institution, a bank holding 
company, a savings and loan holding company, or a securities broker or 
dealer registered with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act, if at 
the time the guarantee is issued or anytime thereafter, has issued and 
outstanding an unsecured debt security without credit enhancement that 
is investment grade.
    (2) Non-U.S.-based entities. A foreign bank, or a non-U.S.-based 
securities firm if the FDIC-supervised institution demonstrates that the 
guarantor is subject to consolidated supervision and regulation 
comparable to that imposed on U.S. depository institutions (or 
securities broker-dealers), if at the time the guarantee is issued or 
anytime thereafter, has issued and outstanding an unsecured debt 
security without credit enhancement that is investment grade.
    Eligible operational risk offsets means amounts, not to exceed 
expected operational loss, that:
    (1) Are generated by internal business practices to absorb highly 
predictable and reasonably stable operational losses, including reserves 
calculated consistent with GAAP; and
    (2) Are available to cover expected operational losses with a high 
degree of certainty over a one-year horizon.
    Eligible purchased wholesale exposure means a purchased wholesale 
exposure that:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution or securitization SPE purchased 
from an unaffiliated seller and did not directly or indirectly 
originate;
    (2) Was generated on an arm's-length basis between the seller and 
the obligor (intercompany accounts receivable and receivables subject to 
contra-accounts

[[Page 289]]

between firms that buy and sell to each other do not satisfy this 
criterion);
    (3) Provides the FDIC-supervised institution or securitization SPE 
with a claim on all proceeds from the exposure or a pro rata interest in 
the proceeds from the exposure;
    (4) Has an M of less than one year; and
    (5) When consolidated by obligor, does not represent a concentrated 
exposure relative to the portfolio of purchased wholesale exposures.
    Expected exposure (EE) means the expected value of the probability 
distribution of non-negative credit risk exposures to a counterparty at 
any specified future date before the maturity date of the longest term 
transaction in the netting set. Any negative fair values in the 
probability distribution of fair values to a counterparty at a specified 
future date are set to zero to convert the probability distribution of 
fair values to the probability distribution of credit risk exposures.
    Expected operational loss (EOL) means the expected value of the 
distribution of potential aggregate operational losses, as generated by 
the FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk quantification system 
using a one-year horizon.
    Expected positive exposure (EPE) means the weighted average over 
time of expected (non-negative) exposures to a counterparty where the 
weights are the proportion of the time interval that an individual 
expected exposure represents. When calculating risk-based capital 
requirements, the average is taken over a one-year horizon.
    Exposure at default (EAD) means:
    (1) For the on-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, a 
repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan for which the FDIC-
supervised institution determines EAD under Sec. 324.132, a cleared 
transaction, or default fund contribution), EAD means the FDIC-
supervised institution's carrying value (including net accrued but 
unpaid interest and fees) for the exposure or segment less any allocated 
transfer risk reserve for the exposure or segment.
    (2) For the off-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, a 
repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan for which the FDIC-
supervised institution determines EAD under Sec. 324.132, cleared 
transaction, or default fund contribution) in the form of a loan 
commitment, line of credit, trade-related letter of credit, or 
transaction-related contingency, EAD means the FDIC-supervised 
institution's best estimate of net additions to the outstanding amount 
owed the FDIC-supervised institution, including estimated future 
additional draws of principal and accrued but unpaid interest and fees, 
that are likely to occur over a one-year horizon assuming the wholesale 
exposure or the retail exposures in the segment were to go into default. 
This estimate of net additions must reflect what would be expected 
during economic downturn conditions. For the purposes of this 
definition:
    (i) Trade-related letters of credit are short-term, self-liquidating 
instruments that are used to finance the movement of goods and are 
collateralized by the underlying goods.
    (ii) Transaction-related contingencies relate to a particular 
transaction and include, among other things, performance bonds and 
performance-based letters of credit.
    (3) For the off-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, a 
repo-style transaction, or eligible margin loan for which the FDIC-
supervised institution determines EAD under Sec. 324.132, cleared 
transaction, or default fund contribution) in the form of anything other 
than a loan commitment, line of credit, trade-related letter of credit, 
or transaction-related contingency, EAD means the notional amount of the 
exposure or segment.
    (4) EAD for OTC derivative contracts is calculated as described in 
Sec. 324.132. An FDIC-supervised institution also may determine EAD for 
repo-style transactions and eligible margin loans as described in 
Sec. 324.132.
    Exposure category means any of the wholesale, retail, 
securitization, or equity exposure categories.

[[Page 290]]

    External operational loss event data means, with respect to an FDIC-
supervised institution, gross operational loss amounts, dates, 
recoveries, and relevant causal information for operational loss events 
occurring at organizations other than the FDIC-supervised institution.
    IMM exposure means a repo-style transaction, eligible margin loan, 
or OTC derivative for which an FDIC-supervised institution calculates 
its EAD using the internal models methodology of Sec. 324.132(d).
    Internal operational loss event data means, with respect to an FDIC-
supervised institution, gross operational loss amounts, dates, 
recoveries, and relevant causal information for operational loss events 
occurring at the FDIC-supervised institution.
    Loss given default (LGD) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure, the greatest of:
    (i) Zero;
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution's empirically based best 
estimate of the long-run default-weighted average economic loss, per 
dollar of EAD, the FDIC-supervised institution would expect to incur if 
the obligor (or a typical obligor in the loss severity grade assigned by 
the FDIC-supervised institution to the exposure) were to default within 
a one-year horizon over a mix of economic conditions, including economic 
downturn conditions; or
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution's empirically based best 
estimate of the economic loss, per dollar of EAD, the FDIC-supervised 
institution would expect to incur if the obligor (or a typical obligor 
in the loss severity grade assigned by the FDIC-supervised institution 
to the exposure) were to default within a one-year horizon during 
economic downturn conditions.
    (2) For a segment of retail exposures, the greatest of:
    (i) Zero;
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution's empirically based best 
estimate of the long-run default-weighted average economic loss, per 
dollar of EAD, the FDIC-supervised institution would expect to incur if 
the exposures in the segment were to default within a one-year horizon 
over a mix of economic conditions, including economic downturn 
conditions; or
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution's empirically based best 
estimate of the economic loss, per dollar of EAD, the FDIC-supervised 
institution would expect to incur if the exposures in the segment were 
to default within a one-year horizon during economic downturn 
conditions.
    (3) The economic loss on an exposure in the event of default is all 
material credit-related losses on the exposure (including accrued but 
unpaid interest or fees, losses on the sale of collateral, direct 
workout costs, and an appropriate allocation of indirect workout costs). 
Where positive or negative cash flows on a wholesale exposure to a 
defaulted obligor or a defaulted retail exposure (including proceeds 
from the sale of collateral, workout costs, additional extensions of 
credit to facilitate repayment of the exposure, and draw-downs of unused 
credit lines) occur after the date of default, the economic loss must 
reflect the net present value of cash flows as of the default date using 
a discount rate appropriate to the risk of the defaulted exposure.
    Obligor means the legal entity or natural person contractually 
obligated on a wholesale exposure, except that an FDIC-supervised 
institution may treat the following exposures as having separate 
obligors:
    (1) Exposures to the same legal entity or natural person denominated 
in different currencies;
    (2)(i) An income-producing real estate exposure for which all or 
substantially all of the repayment of the exposure is reliant on the 
cash flows of the real estate serving as collateral for the exposure; 
the FDIC-supervised institution, in economic substance, does not have 
recourse to the borrower beyond the real estate collateral; and no 
cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place other than 
clauses obtained solely out of an abundance of caution; and
    (ii) Other credit exposures to the same legal entity or natural 
person; and
    (3)(i) A wholesale exposure authorized under section 364 of the U.S. 
Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.C. 364) to a legal

[[Page 291]]

entity or natural person who is a debtor-in-possession for purposes of 
Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code; and
    (ii) Other credit exposures to the same legal entity or natural 
person.
    Operational loss means a loss (excluding insurance or tax effects) 
resulting from an operational loss event. Operational loss includes all 
expenses associated with an operational loss event except for 
opportunity costs, forgone revenue, and costs related to risk management 
and control enhancements implemented to prevent future operational 
losses.
    Operational loss event means an event that results in loss and is 
associated with any of the following seven operational loss event type 
categories:
    (1) Internal fraud, which means the operational loss event type 
category that comprises operational losses resulting from an act 
involving at least one internal party of a type intended to defraud, 
misappropriate property, or circumvent regulations, the law, or company 
policy excluding diversity- and discrimination-type events.
    (2) External fraud, which means the operational loss event type 
category that comprises operational losses resulting from an act by a 
third party of a type intended to defraud, misappropriate property, or 
circumvent the law. Retail credit card losses arising from non-
contractual, third-party-initiated fraud (for example, identity theft) 
are external fraud operational losses. All other third-party-initiated 
credit losses are to be treated as credit risk losses.
    (3) Employment practices and workplace safety, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from an act inconsistent with employment, health, or safety 
laws or agreements, payment of personal injury claims, or payment 
arising from diversity- and discrimination-type events.
    (4) Clients, products, and business practices, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from the nature or design of a product or from an 
unintentional or negligent failure to meet a professional obligation to 
specific clients (including fiduciary and suitability requirements).
    (5) Damage to physical assets, which means the operational loss 
event type category that comprises operational losses resulting from the 
loss of or damage to physical assets from natural disaster or other 
events.
    (6) Business disruption and system failures, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from disruption of business or system failures.
    (7) Execution, delivery, and process management, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from failed transaction processing or process management or 
losses arising from relations with trade counterparties and vendors.
    Operational risk means the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or 
failed internal processes, people, and systems or from external events 
(including legal risk but excluding strategic and reputational risk).
    Operational risk exposure means the 99.9th percentile of the 
distribution of potential aggregate operational losses, as generated by 
the FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk quantification system 
over a one-year horizon (and not incorporating eligible operational risk 
offsets or qualifying operational risk mitigants).
    Other retail exposure means an exposure (other than a securitization 
exposure, an equity exposure, a residential mortgage exposure, a pre-
sold construction loan, a qualifying revolving exposure, or the residual 
value portion of a lease exposure) that is managed as part of a segment 
of exposures with homogeneous risk characteristics, not on an 
individual-exposure basis, and is either:
    (1) An exposure to an individual for non-business purposes; or
    (2) An exposure to an individual or company for business purposes if 
the FDIC-supervised institution's consolidated business credit exposure 
to the individual or company is $1 million or less.
    Probability of default (PD) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor, the FDIC-
supervised

[[Page 292]]

institution's empirically based best estimate of the long-run average 
one-year default rate for the rating grade assigned by the FDIC-
supervised institution to the obligor, capturing the average default 
experience for obligors in the rating grade over a mix of economic 
conditions (including economic downturn conditions) sufficient to 
provide a reasonable estimate of the average one-year default rate over 
the economic cycle for the rating grade.
    (2) For a segment of non-defaulted retail exposures, the FDIC-
supervised institution's empirically based best estimate of the long-run 
average one-year default rate for the exposures in the segment, 
capturing the average default experience for exposures in the segment 
over a mix of economic conditions (including economic downturn 
conditions) sufficient to provide a reasonable estimate of the average 
one-year default rate over the economic cycle for the segment.
    (3) For a wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor or segment of 
defaulted retail exposures, 100 percent.
    Qualifying cross-product master netting agreement means a qualifying 
master netting agreement that provides for termination and close-out 
netting across multiple types of financial transactions or qualifying 
master netting agreements in the event of a counterparty's default, 
provided that the underlying financial transactions are OTC derivative 
contracts, eligible margin loans, or repo-style transactions. In order 
to treat an agreement as a qualifying cross-product master netting 
agreement for purposes of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must comply with the requirements of Sec. 324.3(c) of this part with 
respect to that agreement.
    Qualifying revolving exposure (QRE) means an exposure (other than a 
securitization exposure or equity exposure) to an individual that is 
managed as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, not on an individual-exposure basis, and:
    (1) Is revolving (that is, the amount outstanding fluctuates, 
determined largely by a borrower's decision to borrow and repay up to a 
pre-established maximum amount, except for an outstanding amount that 
the borrower is required to pay in full every month);
    (2) Is unsecured and unconditionally cancelable by the FDIC-
supervised institution to the fullest extent permitted by Federal law; 
and
    (3)(i) Has a maximum contractual exposure amount (drawn plus 
undrawn) of up to $100,000; or
    (ii) With respect to a product with an outstanding amount that the 
borrower is required to pay in full every month, the total outstanding 
amount does not in practice exceed $100,000.
    (4) A segment of exposures that contains one or more exposures that 
fails to meet paragraph (3)(ii) of this definition must be treated as a 
segment of other retail exposures for the 24 month period following the 
month in which the total outstanding amount of one or more exposures 
individually exceeds $100,000.
    Retail exposure means a residential mortgage exposure, a qualifying 
revolving exposure, or an other retail exposure.
    Retail exposure subcategory means the residential mortgage exposure, 
qualifying revolving exposure, or other retail exposure subcategory.
    Risk parameter means a variable used in determining risk-based 
capital requirements for wholesale and retail exposures, specifically 
probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD), exposure at 
default (EAD), or effective maturity (M).
    Scenario analysis means a systematic process of obtaining expert 
opinions from business managers and risk management experts to derive 
reasoned assessments of the likelihood and loss impact of plausible 
high-severity operational losses. Scenario analysis may include the 
well-reasoned evaluation and use of external operational loss event 
data, adjusted as appropriate to ensure relevance to an FDIC-supervised 
institution's operational risk profile and control structure.
    Total wholesale and retail risk-weighted assets means the sum of:
    (1) Risk-weighted assets for wholesale exposures that are not IMM 
exposures, cleared transactions, or default fund contributions to non-
defaulted obligors and segments of non-defaulted retail exposures;

[[Page 293]]

    (2) Risk-weighted assets for wholesale exposures to defaulted 
obligors and segments of defaulted retail exposures;
    (3) Risk-weighted assets for assets not defined by an exposure 
category;
    (4) Risk-weighted assets for non-material portfolios of exposures;
    (5) Risk-weighted assets for IMM exposures (as determined in 
Sec. 324.132(d));
    (6) Risk-weighted assets for cleared transactions and risk-weighted 
assets for default fund contributions (as determined in Sec. 324.133); 
and
    (7) Risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions (as determined 
in Sec. 324.136).
    Unexpected operational loss (UOL) means the difference between the 
FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk exposure and the FDIC-
supervised institution's expected operational loss.
    Unit of measure means the level (for example, organizational unit or 
operational loss event type) at which the FDIC-supervised institution's 
operational risk quantification system generates a separate distribution 
of potential operational losses.
    Wholesale exposure means a credit exposure to a company, natural 
person, sovereign, or governmental entity (other than a securitization 
exposure, retail exposure, pre-sold construction loan, or equity 
exposure).
    Wholesale exposure subcategory means the HVCRE or non-HVCRE 
wholesale exposure subcategory.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Secs. 324.102-324.120  [Reserved]

                              Qualification



Sec. 324.121  Qualification process.

    (a) Timing. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution that is described in 
Sec. 324.100(b)(1)(i) through (iv) must adopt a written implementation 
plan no later than six months after the date the FDIC-supervised 
institution meets a criterion in that section. The implementation plan 
must incorporate an explicit start date no later than 36 months after 
the date the FDIC-supervised institution meets at least one criterion 
under Sec. 324.100(b)(1)(i) through (iv). The FDIC may extend the start 
date.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that elects to be subject to this 
subpart under Sec. 324.100(b)(1)(v) must adopt a written implementation 
plan.
    (b) Implementation plan. (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's 
implementation plan must address in detail how the FDIC-supervised 
institution complies, or plans to comply, with the qualification 
requirements in Sec. 324.122. The FDIC-supervised institution also must 
maintain a comprehensive and sound planning and governance process to 
oversee the implementation efforts described in the plan. At a minimum, 
the plan must:
    (i) Comprehensively address the qualification requirements in 
Sec. 324.122 for the FDIC-supervised institution and each consolidated 
subsidiary (U.S. and foreign-based) of the FDIC-supervised institution 
with respect to all portfolios and exposures of the FDIC-supervised 
institution and each of its consolidated subsidiaries;
    (ii) Justify and support any proposed temporary or permanent 
exclusion of business lines, portfolios, or exposures from the 
application of the advanced approaches in this subpart (which business 
lines, portfolios, and exposures must be, in the aggregate, immaterial 
to the FDIC-supervised institution);
    (iii) Include the FDIC-supervised institution's self-assessment of:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution's current status in meeting the 
qualification requirements in Sec. 324.122; and
    (B) The consistency of the FDIC-supervised institution's current 
practices with the FDIC's supervisory guidance on the qualification 
requirements;
    (iv) Based on the FDIC-supervised institution's self-assessment, 
identify and describe the areas in which the FDIC-supervised institution 
proposes to undertake additional work to comply with the qualification 
requirements in Sec. 324.122 or to improve the consistency of the FDIC-
supervised institution's current practices with the FDIC's supervisory 
guidance on the qualification requirements (gap analysis);
    (v) Describe what specific actions the FDIC-supervised institution 
will take to address the areas identified in the

[[Page 294]]

gap analysis required by paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section;
    (vi) Identify objective, measurable milestones, including delivery 
dates and a date when the FDIC-supervised institution's implementation 
of the methodologies described in this subpart will be fully 
operational;
    (vii) Describe resources that have been budgeted and are available 
to implement the plan; and
    (viii) Receive approval of the FDIC-supervised institution's board 
of directors.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must submit the implementation 
plan, together with a copy of the minutes of the board of directors' 
approval, to the FDIC at least 60 days before the FDIC-supervised 
institution proposes to begin its parallel run, unless the FDIC waives 
prior notice.
    (c) Parallel run. Before determining its risk-weighted assets under 
this subpart and following adoption of the implementation plan, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must conduct a satisfactory parallel run. A 
satisfactory parallel run is a period of no less than four consecutive 
calendar quarters during which the FDIC-supervised institution complies 
with the qualification requirements in Sec. 324.122 to the satisfaction 
of the FDIC. During the parallel run, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must report to the FDIC on a calendar quarterly basis its risk-based 
capital ratios determined in accordance with Sec. 324.10(b)(1) through 
(3) and Sec. 324.10(c)(1) through (3). During this period, the FDIC-
supervised institution's minimum risk-based capital ratios are 
determined as set forth in subpart D of this part.
    (d) Approval to calculate risk-based capital requirements under this 
subpart. The FDIC will notify the FDIC-supervised institution of the 
date that the FDIC-supervised institution must begin to use this subpart 
for purposes of Sec. 324.10 if the FDIC determines that:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution fully complies with all the 
qualification requirements in Sec. 324.122;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution has conducted a satisfactory 
parallel run under paragraph (c) of this section; and
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution has an adequate process to 
ensure ongoing compliance with the qualification requirements in 
Sec. 324.122.



Sec. 324.122  Qualification requirements.

    (a) Process and systems requirements. (1) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must have a rigorous process for assessing its overall 
capital adequacy in relation to its risk profile and a comprehensive 
strategy for maintaining an appropriate level of capital.
    (2) The systems and processes used by an FDIC-supervised institution 
for risk-based capital purposes under this subpart must be consistent 
with the FDIC-supervised institution's internal risk management 
processes and management information reporting systems.
    (3) Each FDIC-supervised institution must have an appropriate 
infrastructure with risk measurement and management processes that meet 
the qualification requirements of this section and are appropriate given 
the FDIC-supervised institution's size and level of complexity. 
Regardless of whether the systems and models that generate the risk 
parameters necessary for calculating an FDIC-supervised institution's 
risk-based capital requirements are located at any affiliate of the 
FDIC-supervised institution, the FDIC-supervised institution itself must 
ensure that the risk parameters and reference data used to determine its 
risk-based capital requirements are representative of long run 
experience with respect to its own credit risk and operational risk 
exposures.
    (b) Risk rating and segmentation systems for wholesale and retail 
exposures. (1)(i) An FDIC-supervised institution must have an internal 
risk rating and segmentation system that accurately, reliably, and 
meaningfully differentiates among degrees of credit risk for the FDIC-
supervised institution's wholesale and retail exposures. When assigning 
an internal risk rating, an FDIC-supervised institution may consider a 
third-party assessment of credit risk, provided that the FDIC-supervised 
institution's internal risk rating assignment does not rely solely on 
the external assessment.

[[Page 295]]

    (ii) If an FDIC-supervised institution uses multiple rating or 
segmentation systems, the FDIC-supervised institution's rationale for 
assigning an obligor or exposure to a particular system must be 
documented and applied in a manner that best reflects the obligor or 
exposure's level of risk. An FDIC-supervised institution must not 
inappropriately allocate obligors or exposures across systems to 
minimize regulatory capital requirements.
    (iii) In assigning ratings to wholesale obligors and exposures, 
including loss severity ratings grades to wholesale exposures, and 
assigning retail exposures to retail segments, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must use all relevant and material information and ensure 
that the information is current.
    (iv) When assigning an obligor to a PD rating or retail exposure to 
a PD segment, an FDIC-supervised institution must assess the obligor or 
retail borrower's ability and willingness to contractually perform, 
taking a conservative view of projected information.
    (2) For wholesale exposures:
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must have an internal risk rating 
system that accurately and reliably assigns each obligor to a single 
rating grade (reflecting the obligor's likelihood of default). An FDIC-
supervised institution may elect, however, not to assign to a rating 
grade an obligor to whom the FDIC-supervised institution extends credit 
based solely on the financial strength of a guarantor, provided that all 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's exposures to the obligor are fully 
covered by eligible guarantees, the FDIC-supervised institution applies 
the PD substitution approach in Sec. 324.134(c)(1) to all exposures to 
that obligor, and the FDIC-supervised institution immediately assigns 
the obligor to a rating grade if a guarantee can no longer be recognized 
under this part. The FDIC-supervised institution's wholesale obligor 
rating system must have at least seven discrete rating grades for non-
defaulted obligors and at least one rating grade for defaulted obligors.
    (ii) Unless the FDIC-supervised institution has chosen to directly 
assign LGD estimates to each wholesale exposure, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must have an internal risk rating system that accurately and 
reliably assigns each wholesale exposure to a loss severity rating grade 
(reflecting the FDIC-supervised institution's estimate of the LGD of the 
exposure). An FDIC-supervised institution employing loss severity rating 
grades must have a sufficiently granular loss severity grading system to 
avoid grouping together exposures with widely ranging LGDs.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must have an effective process 
to obtain and update in a timely manner relevant and material 
information on obligor and exposure characteristics that affect PD, LGD 
and EAD.
    (3) For retail exposures:
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must have an internal system that 
groups retail exposures into the appropriate retail exposure subcategory 
and groups the retail exposures in each retail exposure subcategory into 
separate segments with homogeneous risk characteristics that provide a 
meaningful differentiation of risk. The FDIC-supervised institution's 
system must identify and group in separate segments by subcategories 
exposures identified in Sec. 324.131(c)(2)(ii) and (iii).
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must have an internal system 
that captures all relevant exposure risk characteristics, including 
borrower credit score, product and collateral types, as well as exposure 
delinquencies, and must consider cross-collateral provisions, where 
present.
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution must review and, if 
appropriate, update assignments of individual retail exposures to 
segments and the loss characteristics and delinquency status of each 
identified risk segment. These reviews must occur whenever the FDIC-
supervised institution receives new material information, but generally 
no less frequently than quarterly, and, in all cases, at least annually.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution's internal risk rating policy 
for wholesale exposures must describe the FDIC-supervised institution's 
rating philosophy (that is, must describe how wholesale obligor rating 
assignments

[[Page 296]]

are affected by the FDIC-supervised institution's choice of the range of 
economic, business, and industry conditions that are considered in the 
obligor rating process).
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution's internal risk rating system 
for wholesale exposures must provide for the review and update (as 
appropriate) of each obligor rating and (if applicable) each loss 
severity rating whenever the FDIC-supervised institution obtains 
relevant and material information on the obligor or exposure that 
affects PD, LGD and EAD, but no less frequently than annually.
    (c) Quantification of risk parameters for wholesale and retail 
exposures. (1) The FDIC-supervised institution must have a comprehensive 
risk parameter quantification process that produces accurate, timely, 
and reliable estimates of the risk parameters on a consistent basis for 
the FDIC-supervised institution's wholesale and retail exposures.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution's estimates of PD, LGD, and EAD 
must incorporate all relevant, material, and available data that is 
reflective of the FDIC-supervised institution's actual wholesale and 
retail exposures and of sufficient quality to support the determination 
of risk-based capital requirements for the exposures. In particular, the 
population of exposures in the data used for estimation purposes, the 
lending standards in use when the data were generated, and other 
relevant characteristics, should closely match or be comparable to the 
FDIC-supervised institution's exposures and standards. In addition, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (i) Demonstrate that its estimates are representative of long run 
experience, including periods of economic downturn conditions, whether 
internal or external data are used;
    (ii) Take into account any changes in lending practice or the 
process for pursuing recoveries over the observation period;
    (iii) Promptly reflect technical advances, new data, and other 
information as they become available;
    (iv) Demonstrate that the data used to estimate risk parameters 
support the accuracy and robustness of those estimates; and
    (v) Demonstrate that its estimation technique performs well in out-
of-sample tests whenever possible.
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution's risk parameter quantification 
process must produce appropriately conservative risk parameter estimates 
where the FDIC-supervised institution has limited relevant data, and any 
adjustments that are part of the quantification process must not result 
in a pattern of bias toward lower risk parameter estimates.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution's risk parameter estimation 
process should not rely on the possibility of U.S. government financial 
assistance, except for the financial assistance that the U.S. government 
has a legally binding commitment to provide.
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must be able to demonstrate 
which variables have been found to be statistically significant with 
regard to EAD. The FDIC-supervised institution's EAD estimates must 
reflect its specific policies and strategies with regard to account 
management, including account monitoring and payment processing, and its 
ability and willingness to prevent further drawdowns in circumstances 
short of payment default. The FDIC-supervised institution must have 
adequate systems and procedures in place to monitor current outstanding 
amounts against committed lines, and changes in outstanding amounts per 
obligor and obligor rating grade and per retail segment. The FDIC-
supervised institution must be able to monitor outstanding amounts on a 
daily basis.
    (6) At a minimum, PD estimates for wholesale obligors and retail 
segments must be based on at least five years of default data. LGD 
estimates for wholesale exposures must be based on at least seven years 
of loss severity data, and LGD estimates for retail segments must be 
based on at least five years of loss severity data. EAD estimates for 
wholesale exposures must be based on at least seven years of exposure 
amount data, and EAD estimates for retail segments must be based on at 
least five years of exposure amount data. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution has relevant and material reference data that span a longer 
period

[[Page 297]]

of time than the minimum time periods specified above, the FDIC-
supervised institution must incorporate such data in its estimates, 
provided that it does not place undue weight on periods of favorable or 
benign economic conditions relative to periods of economic downturn 
conditions.
    (7) Default, loss severity, and exposure amount data must include 
periods of economic downturn conditions, or the FDIC-supervised 
institution must adjust its estimates of risk parameters to compensate 
for the lack of data from periods of economic downturn conditions.
    (8) The FDIC-supervised institution's PD, LGD, and EAD estimates 
must be based on the definition of default in Sec. 324.101.
    (9) If an FDIC-supervised institution uses internal data obtained 
prior to becoming subject to this subpart E or external data to arrive 
at PD, LGD, or EAD estimates, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
demonstrate to the FDIC that the FDIC-supervised institution has made 
appropriate adjustments if necessary to be consistent with the 
definition of default in Sec. 324.101. Internal data obtained after the 
FDIC-supervised institution becomes subject to this subpart E must be 
consistent with the definition of default in Sec. 324.101.
    (10) The FDIC-supervised institution must review and update (as 
appropriate) its risk parameters and its risk parameter quantification 
process at least annually.
    (11) The FDIC-supervised institution must, at least annually, 
conduct a comprehensive review and analysis of reference data to 
determine relevance of the reference data to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposures, quality of reference data to support PD, LGD, 
and EAD estimates, and consistency of reference data to the definition 
of default in Sec. 324.101.
    (d) Counterparty credit risk model. An FDIC-supervised institution 
must obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC under Sec. 324.132 to 
use the internal models methodology for counterparty credit risk and the 
advanced CVA approach for the CVA capital requirement.
    (e) Double default treatment. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC under Sec. 324.135 to use 
the double default treatment.
    (f) Equity exposures model. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC under Sec. 324.153 to use 
the internal models approach for equity exposures.
    (g) Operational risk. (1) Operational risk management processes. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (i) Have an operational risk management function that:
    (A) Is independent of business line management; and
    (B) Is responsible for designing, implementing, and overseeing the 
FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk data and assessment 
systems, operational risk quantification systems, and related processes;
    (ii) Have and document a process (which must capture business 
environment and internal control factors affecting the FDIC-supervised 
institution's operational risk profile) to identify, measure, monitor, 
and control operational risk in the FDIC-supervised institution's 
products, activities, processes, and systems; and
    (iii) Report operational risk exposures, operational loss events, 
and other relevant operational risk information to business unit 
management, senior management, and the board of directors (or a 
designated committee of the board).
    (2) Operational risk data and assessment systems. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must have operational risk data and assessment systems that 
capture operational risks to which the FDIC-supervised institution is 
exposed. The FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk data and 
assessment systems must:
    (i) Be structured in a manner consistent with the FDIC-supervised 
institution's current business activities, risk profile, technological 
processes, and risk management processes; and
    (ii) Include credible, transparent, systematic, and verifiable 
processes that incorporate the following elements on an ongoing basis:
    (A) Internal operational loss event data. The FDIC-supervised 
institution must have a systematic process for capturing and using 
internal operational

[[Page 298]]

loss event data in its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk data and 
assessment systems must include a historical observation period of at 
least five years for internal operational loss event data (or such 
shorter period approved by the FDIC to address transitional situations, 
such as integrating a new business line).
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must be able to map its internal 
operational loss event data into the seven operational loss event type 
categories.
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution may refrain from collecting 
internal operational loss event data for individual operational losses 
below established dollar threshold amounts if the FDIC-supervised 
institution can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that the 
thresholds are reasonable, do not exclude important internal operational 
loss event data, and permit the FDIC-supervised institution to capture 
substantially all the dollar value of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
operational losses.
    (B) External operational loss event data. The FDIC-supervised 
institution must have a systematic process for determining its 
methodologies for incorporating external operational loss event data 
into its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (C) Scenario analysis. The FDIC-supervised institution must have a 
systematic process for determining its methodologies for incorporating 
scenario analysis into its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (D) Business environment and internal control factors. The FDIC-
supervised institution must incorporate business environment and 
internal control factors into its operational risk data and assessment 
systems. The FDIC-supervised institution must also periodically compare 
the results of its prior business environment and internal control 
factor assessments against its actual operational losses incurred in the 
intervening period.
    (3) Operational risk quantification systems. (i) The FDIC-supervised 
institution's operational risk quantification systems:
    (A) Must generate estimates of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
operational risk exposure using its operational risk data and assessment 
systems;
    (B) Must employ a unit of measure that is appropriate for the FDIC-
supervised institution's range of business activities and the variety of 
operational loss events to which it is exposed, and that does not 
combine business activities or operational loss events with demonstrably 
different risk profiles within the same loss distribution;
    (C) Must include a credible, transparent, systematic, and verifiable 
approach for weighting each of the four elements, described in paragraph 
(g)(2)(ii) of this section, that an FDIC-supervised institution is 
required to incorporate into its operational risk data and assessment 
systems;
    (D) May use internal estimates of dependence among operational 
losses across and within units of measure if the FDIC-supervised 
institution can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that its 
process for estimating dependence is sound, robust to a variety of 
scenarios, and implemented with integrity, and allows for uncertainty 
surrounding the estimates. If the FDIC-supervised institution has not 
made such a demonstration, it must sum operational risk exposure 
estimates across units of measure to calculate its total operational 
risk exposure; and
    (E) Must be reviewed and updated (as appropriate) whenever the FDIC-
supervised institution becomes aware of information that may have a 
material effect on the FDIC-supervised institution's estimate of 
operational risk exposure, but the review and update must occur no less 
frequently than annually.
    (ii) With the prior written approval of the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised 
institution may generate an estimate of its operational risk exposure 
using an alternative approach to that specified in paragraph (g)(3)(i) 
of this section. An FDIC-supervised institution proposing to use such an 
alternative operational risk quantification system must submit a 
proposal to the FDIC. In determining whether to approve an FDIC-
supervised institution's proposal to use

[[Page 299]]

an alternative operational risk quantification system, the FDIC will 
consider the following principles:
    (A) Use of the alternative operational risk quantification system 
will be allowed only on an exception basis, considering the size, 
complexity, and risk profile of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate that its 
estimate of its operational risk exposure generated under the 
alternative operational risk quantification system is appropriate and 
can be supported empirically; and
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must not use an allocation of 
operational risk capital requirements that includes entities other than 
depository institutions or the benefits of diversification across 
entities.
    (h) Data management and maintenance. (1) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must have data management and maintenance systems that 
adequately support all aspects of its advanced systems and the timely 
and accurate reporting of risk-based capital requirements.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must retain data using an 
electronic format that allows timely retrieval of data for analysis, 
validation, reporting, and disclosure purposes.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must retain sufficient data 
elements related to key risk drivers to permit adequate monitoring, 
validation, and refinement of its advanced systems.
    (i) Control, oversight, and validation mechanisms. (1) The FDIC-
supervised institution's senior management must ensure that all 
components of the FDIC-supervised institution's advanced systems 
function effectively and comply with the qualification requirements in 
this section.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution's board of directors (or a 
designated committee of the board) must at least annually review the 
effectiveness of, and approve, the FDIC-supervised institution's 
advanced systems.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must have an effective system of 
controls and oversight that:
    (i) Ensures ongoing compliance with the qualification requirements 
in this section;
    (ii) Maintains the integrity, reliability, and accuracy of the FDIC-
supervised institution's advanced systems; and
    (iii) Includes adequate governance and project management processes.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution must validate, on an ongoing 
basis, its advanced systems. The FDIC-supervised institution's 
validation process must be independent of the advanced systems' 
development, implementation, and operation, or the validation process 
must be subjected to an independent review of its adequacy and 
effectiveness. Validation must include:
    (i) An evaluation of the conceptual soundness of (including 
developmental evidence supporting) the advanced systems;
    (ii) An ongoing monitoring process that includes verification of 
processes and benchmarking; and
    (iii) An outcomes analysis process that includes backtesting.
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must have an internal audit 
function or equivalent function that is independent of business-line 
management that at least annually:
    (i) Reviews the FDIC-supervised institution's advanced systems and 
associated operations, including the operations of its credit function 
and estimations of PD, LGD, and EAD;
    (ii) Assesses the effectiveness of the controls supporting the FDIC-
supervised institution's advanced systems; and
    (iii) Documents and reports its findings to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's board of directors (or a committee thereof).
    (6) The FDIC-supervised institution must periodically stress test 
its advanced systems. The stress testing must include a consideration of 
how economic cycles, especially downturns, affect risk-based capital 
requirements (including migration across rating grades and segments and 
the credit risk mitigation benefits of double default treatment).
    (j) Documentation. The FDIC-supervised institution must adequately 
document all material aspects of its advanced systems.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 80 FR 41423, July 15, 2015]

[[Page 300]]



Sec. 324.123  Ongoing qualification.

    (a) Changes to advanced systems. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
meet all the qualification requirements in Sec. 324.122 on an ongoing 
basis. An FDIC-supervised institution must notify the FDIC when the 
FDIC-supervised institution makes any change to an advanced system that 
would result in a material change in the FDIC-supervised institution's 
advanced approaches total risk-weighted asset amount for an exposure 
type or when the FDIC-supervised institution makes any significant 
change to its modeling assumptions.
    (b) Failure to comply with qualification requirements. (1) If the 
FDIC determines that an FDIC-supervised institution that uses this 
subpart and that has conducted a satisfactory parallel run fails to 
comply with the qualification requirements in Sec. 324.122, the FDIC 
will notify the FDIC-supervised institution in writing of the FDIC-
supervised institution's failure to comply.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must establish and submit a plan 
satisfactory to the FDIC to return to compliance with the qualification 
requirements.
    (3) In addition, if the FDIC determines that the FDIC-supervised 
institution's advanced approaches total risk-weighted assets are not 
commensurate with the FDIC-supervised institution's credit, market, 
operational, or other risks, the FDIC may require such an FDIC-
supervised institution to calculate its advanced approaches total risk-
weighted assets with any modifications provided by the FDIC.



Sec. 324.124  Merger and acquisition transitional arrangements.

    (a) Mergers and acquisitions of companies without advanced systems. 
If an FDIC-supervised institution merges with or acquires a company that 
does not calculate its risk-based capital requirements using advanced 
systems, the FDIC-supervised institution may use subpart D of this part 
to determine the risk-weighted asset amounts for the merged or acquired 
company's exposures for up to 24 months after the calendar quarter 
during which the merger or acquisition consummates. The FDIC may extend 
this transition period for up to an additional 12 months. Within 90 days 
of consummating the merger or acquisition, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must submit to the FDIC an implementation plan for using its 
advanced systems for the acquired company. During the period in which 
subpart D of this part applies to the merged or acquired company, any 
ALLL, net of allocated transfer risk reserves established pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 3904, associated with the merged or acquired company's exposures 
may be included in the acquiring FDIC-supervised institution's tier 2 
capital up to 1.25 percent of the acquired company's risk-weighted 
assets. All general allowances of the merged or acquired company must be 
excluded from the FDIC-supervised institution's eligible credit 
reserves. In addition, the risk-weighted assets of the merged or 
acquired company are not included in the FDIC-supervised institution's 
credit-risk-weighted assets but are included in total risk-weighted 
assets. If an FDIC-supervised institution relies on this paragraph (a), 
the FDIC-supervised institution must disclose publicly the amounts of 
risk-weighted assets and qualifying capital calculated under this 
subpart for the acquiring FDIC-supervised institution and under subpart 
D of this part for the acquired company.
    (b) Mergers and acquisitions of companies with advanced systems. (1) 
If an FDIC-supervised institution merges with or acquires a company that 
calculates its risk-based capital requirements using advanced systems, 
the FDIC-supervised institution may use the acquired company's advanced 
systems to determine total risk-weighted assets for the merged or 
acquired company's exposures for up to 24 months after the calendar 
quarter during which the acquisition or merger consummates. The FDIC may 
extend this transition period for up to an additional 12 months. Within 
90 days of consummating the merger or acquisition, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must submit to the FDIC an implementation plan for using its 
advanced systems for the merged or acquired company.

[[Page 301]]

    (2) If the acquiring FDIC-supervised institution is not subject to 
the advanced approaches in this subpart at the time of acquisition or 
merger, during the period when subpart D of this part applies to the 
acquiring FDIC-supervised institution, the ALLL associated with the 
exposures of the merged or acquired company may not be directly included 
in tier 2 capital. Rather, any excess eligible credit reserves 
associated with the merged or acquired company's exposures may be 
included in the FDIC-supervised institution's tier 2 capital up to 0.6 
percent of the credit-risk-weighted assets associated with those 
exposures.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20760, Apr. 14, 2014]



Secs. 324.125-324.130  [Reserved]

              Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk



Sec. 324.131  Mechanics for calculating total wholesale and retail
risk-weighted assets.

    (a) Overview. An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its 
total wholesale and retail risk-weighted asset amount in four distinct 
phases:
    (1) Phase 1--categorization of exposures;
    (2) Phase 2--assignment of wholesale obligors and exposures to 
rating grades and segmentation of retail exposures;
    (3) Phase 3--assignment of risk parameters to wholesale exposures 
and segments of retail exposures; and
    (4) Phase 4--calculation of risk-weighted asset amounts.
    (b) Phase 1--Categorization. The FDIC-supervised institution must 
determine which of its exposures are wholesale exposures, retail 
exposures, securitization exposures, or equity exposures. The FDIC-
supervised institution must categorize each retail exposure as a 
residential mortgage exposure, a QRE, or an other retail exposure. The 
FDIC-supervised institution must identify which wholesale exposures are 
HVCRE exposures, sovereign exposures, OTC derivative contracts, repo-
style transactions, eligible margin loans, eligible purchased wholesale 
exposures, cleared transactions, default fund contributions, unsettled 
transactions to which Sec. 324.136 applies, and eligible guarantees or 
eligible credit derivatives that are used as credit risk mitigants. The 
FDIC-supervised institution must identify any on-balance sheet asset 
that does not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, equity, or 
securitization exposure, as well as any non-material portfolio of 
exposures described in paragraph (e)(4) of this section.
    (c) Phase 2--Assignment of wholesale obligors and exposures to 
rating grades and retail exposures to segments--(1) Assignment of 
wholesale obligors and exposures to rating grades. (i) The FDIC-
supervised institution must assign each obligor of a wholesale exposure 
to a single obligor rating grade and must assign each wholesale exposure 
to which it does not directly assign an LGD estimate to a loss severity 
rating grade.
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution must identify which of its 
wholesale obligors are in default.
    (2) Segmentation of retail exposures. (i) The FDIC-supervised 
institution must group the retail exposures in each retail subcategory 
into segments that have homogeneous risk characteristics.
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution must identify which of its 
retail exposures are in default. The FDIC-supervised institution must 
segment defaulted retail exposures separately from non-defaulted retail 
exposures.
    (iii) If the FDIC-supervised institution determines the EAD for 
eligible margin loans using the approach in Sec. 324.132(b), the FDIC-
supervised institution must identify which of its retail exposures are 
eligible margin loans for which the FDIC-supervised institution uses 
this EAD approach and must segment such eligible margin loans separately 
from other retail exposures.
    (3) Eligible purchased wholesale exposures. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may group its eligible purchased wholesale exposures into 
segments that have homogeneous risk characteristics. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must use the wholesale exposure formula in Table 1 of this 
section to determine the risk-based capital requirement for each segment 
of eligible purchased wholesale exposures.

[[Page 302]]

    (d) Phase 3--Assignment of risk parameters to wholesale exposures 
and segments of retail exposures. (1) Quantification process. Subject to 
the limitations in this paragraph (d), the FDIC-supervised institution 
must:
    (i) Associate a PD with each wholesale obligor rating grade;
    (ii) Associate an LGD with each wholesale loss severity rating grade 
or assign an LGD to each wholesale exposure;
    (iii) Assign an EAD and M to each wholesale exposure; and
    (iv) Assign a PD, LGD, and EAD to each segment of retail exposures.
    (2) Floor on PD assignment. The PD for each wholesale obligor or 
retail segment may not be less than 0.03 percent, except for exposures 
to or directly and unconditionally guaranteed by a sovereign entity, the 
Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, the 
European Commission, the European Central Bank, or a multilateral 
development bank, to which the FDIC-supervised institution assigns a 
rating grade associated with a PD of less than 0.03 percent.
    (3) Floor on LGD estimation. The LGD for each segment of residential 
mortgage exposures may not be less than 10 percent, except for segments 
of residential mortgage exposures for which all or substantially all of 
the principal of each exposure is either:
    (i) Directly and unconditionally guaranteed by the full faith and 
credit of a sovereign entity; or
    (ii) Guaranteed by a contingent obligation of the U.S. government or 
its agencies, the enforceability of which is dependent upon some 
affirmative action on the part of the beneficiary of the guarantee or a 
third party (for example, meeting servicing requirements).
    (4) Eligible purchased wholesale exposures. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must assign a PD, LGD, EAD, and M to each segment of 
eligible purchased wholesale exposures. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution can estimate ECL (but not PD or LGD) for a segment of 
eligible purchased wholesale exposures, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must assume that the LGD of the segment equals 100 percent and that the 
PD of the segment equals ECL divided by EAD. The estimated ECL must be 
calculated for the exposures without regard to any assumption of 
recourse or guarantees from the seller or other parties.
    (5) Credit risk mitigation: credit derivatives, guarantees, and 
collateral. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution may take into account the 
risk reducing effects of eligible guarantees and eligible credit 
derivatives in support of a wholesale exposure by applying the PD 
substitution or LGD adjustment treatment to the exposure as provided in 
Sec. 324.134 or, if applicable, applying double default treatment to the 
exposure as provided in Sec. 324.135. An FDIC-supervised institution may 
decide separately for each wholesale exposure that qualifies for the 
double default treatment under Sec. 324.135 whether to apply the double 
default treatment or to use the PD substitution or LGD adjustment 
treatment without recognizing double default effects.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution may take into account the risk 
reducing effects of guarantees and credit derivatives in support of 
retail exposures in a segment when quantifying the PD and LGD of the 
segment. In doing so, an FDIC-supervised institution must consider all 
relevant available information.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(6) of this section, an 
FDIC-supervised institution may take into account the risk reducing 
effects of collateral in support of a wholesale exposure when 
quantifying the LGD of the exposure, and may take into account the risk 
reducing effects of collateral in support of retail exposures when 
quantifying the PD and LGD of the segment. In order to do so, an FDIC-
supervised institution must have established internal requirements for 
collateral management, legal certainty, and risk management processes.
    (6) EAD for OTC derivative contracts, repo-style transactions, and 
eligible margin loans. An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its 
EAD for an OTC derivative contract as provided in Sec. 324.132 (c) and 
(d). An FDIC-supervised institution may take into account the

[[Page 303]]

risk-reducing effects of financial collateral in support of a repo-style 
transaction or eligible margin loan and of any collateral in support of 
a repo-style transaction that is included in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's VaR-based measure under subpart F of this part through an 
adjustment to EAD as provided in Sec. 324.132(b) and (d). An FDIC-
supervised institution that takes collateral into account through such 
an adjustment to EAD under Sec. 324.132 may not reflect such collateral 
in LGD.
    (7) Effective maturity. An exposure's M must be no greater than five 
years and no less than one year, except that an exposure's M must be no 
less than one day if the exposure is a trade related letter of credit, 
or if the exposure has an original maturity of less than one year and is 
not part of an FDIC-supervised institution's ongoing financing of the 
obligor. An exposure is not part of an FDIC-supervised institution's 
ongoing financing of the obligor if the FDIC-supervised institution:
    (i) Has a legal and practical ability not to renew or roll over the 
exposure in the event of credit deterioration of the obligor;
    (ii) Makes an independent credit decision at the inception of the 
exposure and at every renewal or roll over; and
    (iii) Has no substantial commercial incentive to continue its credit 
relationship with the obligor in the event of credit deterioration of 
the obligor.
    (8) EAD for exposures to certain central counterparties. An FDIC-
supervised institution may attribute an EAD of zero to exposures that 
arise from the settlement of cash transactions (such as equities, fixed 
income, spot foreign exchange, and spot commodities) with a central 
counterparty where there is no assumption of ongoing counterparty credit 
risk by the central counterparty after settlement of the trade and 
associated default fund contributions.
    (e) Phase 4--Calculation of risk-weighted assets. (1) Non-defaulted 
exposures.
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the dollar risk-
based capital requirement for each of its wholesale exposures to a non-
defaulted obligor (except for eligible guarantees and eligible credit 
derivatives that hedge another wholesale exposure, IMM exposures, 
cleared transactions, default fund contributions, unsettled 
transactions, and exposures to which the FDIC-supervised institution 
applies the double default treatment in Sec. 324.135) and segments of 
non-defaulted retail exposures by inserting the assigned risk parameters 
for the wholesale obligor and exposure or retail segment into the 
appropriate risk-based capital formula specified in Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.131 and multiplying the output of the formula (K) by the EAD of 
the exposure or segment. Alternatively, an FDIC-supervised institution 
may apply a 300 percent risk weight to the EAD of an eligible margin 
loan if the FDIC-supervised institution is not able to meet the FDIC's 
requirements for estimation of PD and LGD for the margin loan.

[[Page 304]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.024


[[Page 305]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.025

    (ii) The sum of all the dollar risk-based capital requirements for 
each wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor and segment of non-
defaulted retail exposures calculated in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this 
section and in Sec. 324.135(e) equals the total dollar risk-based 
capital requirement for those exposures and segments.
    (iii) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for wholesale 
exposures to non-defaulted obligors and segments of non-defaulted retail 
exposures equals the total dollar risk-based capital requirement in 
paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section multiplied by 12.5.
    (2) Wholesale exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of 
defaulted retail exposures--(i) Not covered by an eligible U.S. 
government guarantee: The dollar risk-based capital requirement for each 
wholesale exposure not covered by an eligible guarantee from the U.S. 
government to a defaulted obligor and each segment of defaulted retail 
exposures not covered by an eligible guarantee from the U.S. government 
equals 0.08 multiplied by the EAD of the exposure or segment.
    (ii) Covered by an eligible U.S. government guarantee: The dollar 
risk-based capital requirement for each wholesale exposure to a 
defaulted obligor covered by an eligible guarantee from the U.S. 
government and each segment of defaulted retail exposures covered by an

[[Page 306]]

eligible guarantee from the U.S. government equals the sum of:
    (A) The sum of the EAD of the portion of each wholesale exposure to 
a defaulted obligor covered by an eligible guarantee from the U.S. 
government plus the EAD of the portion of each segment of defaulted 
retail exposures that is covered by an eligible guarantee from the U.S. 
government and the resulting sum is multiplied by 0.016, and
    (B) The sum of the EAD of the portion of each wholesale exposure to 
a defaulted obligor not covered by an eligible guarantee from the U.S. 
government plus the EAD of the portion of each segment of defaulted 
retail exposures that is not covered by an eligible guarantee from the 
U.S. government and the resulting sum is multiplied by 0.08.
    (iii) The sum of all the dollar risk-based capital requirements for 
each wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor and each segment of 
defaulted retail exposures calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(i) of this 
section plus the dollar risk-based capital requirements each wholesale 
exposure to a defaulted obligor and for each segment of defaulted retail 
exposures calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section equals the 
total dollar risk-based capital requirement for those exposures and 
segments.
    (iv) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for wholesale 
exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of defaulted retail 
exposures equals the total dollar risk-based capital requirement 
calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section multiplied by 12.5.
    (3) Assets not included in a defined exposure category. (i) An FDIC-
supervised institution may assign a risk-weighted asset amount of zero 
to cash owned and held in all offices of the FDIC-supervised institution 
or in transit and for gold bullion held in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's own vaults, or held in another depository institution's 
vaults on an allocated basis, to the extent the gold bullion assets are 
offset by gold bullion liabilities.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk-weighted 
asset amount equal to 20 percent of the carrying value of cash items in 
the process of collection.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk-weighted 
asset amount equal to 50 percent of the carrying value to a pre-sold 
construction loan unless the purchase contract is cancelled, in which 
case an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a risk-weighted asset 
amount equal to a 100 percent of the carrying value of the pre-sold 
construction loan.
    (iv) The risk-weighted asset amount for the residual value of a 
retail lease exposure equals such residual value.
    (v) The risk-weighted asset amount for DTAs arising from temporary 
differences that the FDIC-supervised institution could realize through 
net operating loss carrybacks equals the carrying value, netted in 
accordance with Sec. 324.22.
    (vi) The risk-weighted asset amount for MSAs, DTAs arising from 
temporary timing differences that the FDIC-supervised institution could 
not realize through net operating loss carrybacks, and significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in 
the form of common stock that are not deducted pursuant to 
Sec. 324.22(d) equals the amount not subject to deduction multiplied by 
250 percent.
    (vii) The risk-weighted asset amount for any other on-balance-sheet 
asset that does not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, 
securitization, IMM, or equity exposure, cleared transaction, or default 
fund contribution and is not subject to deduction under Sec. 324.22(a), 
(c), or (d) equals the carrying value of the asset.
    (4) Non-material portfolios of exposures. The risk-weighted asset 
amount of a portfolio of exposures for which the FDIC-supervised 
institution has demonstrated to the FDIC's satisfaction that the 
portfolio (when combined with all other portfolios of exposures that the 
FDIC-supervised institution seeks to treat under this paragraph (e)) is 
not material to the FDIC-supervised institution is the sum of the 
carrying values of on-balance sheet exposures plus the notional amounts 
of off-balance sheet exposures in the portfolio. For purposes of this 
paragraph (e)(4), the notional amount of an OTC derivative contract that 
is not a credit derivative

[[Page 307]]

is the EAD of the derivative as calculated in Sec. 324.132.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014; 
80 FR 41424, July 15, 2015]



Sec. 324.132  Counterparty credit risk of repo-style transactions,
eligible margin loans, and OTC derivative contracts.

    (a) Methodologies for collateral recognition. (1) Instead of an LGD 
estimation methodology, an FDIC-supervised institution may use the 
following methodologies to recognize the benefits of financial 
collateral in mitigating the counterparty credit risk of repo-style 
transactions, eligible margin loans, collateralized OTC derivative 
contracts and single product netting sets of such transactions, and to 
recognize the benefits of any collateral in mitigating the counterparty 
credit risk of repo-style transactions that are included in an FDIC-
supervised institution's VaR-based measure under subpart F of this part:
    (i) The collateral haircut approach set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section;
    (ii) The internal models methodology set forth in paragraph (d) of 
this section; and
    (iii) For single product netting sets of repo-style transactions and 
eligible margin loans, the simple VaR methodology set forth in paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution may use any combination of the 
three methodologies for collateral recognition; however, it must use the 
same methodology for transactions in the same category.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must use the methodology in 
paragraph (c) of this section, or with prior written approval of the 
FDIC, the internal model methodology in paragraph (d) of this section, 
to calculate EAD for an OTC derivative contract or a set of OTC 
derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master netting agreement. 
To estimate EAD for qualifying cross-product master netting agreements, 
an FDIC-supervised institution may only use the internal models 
methodology in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution must also use the methodology in 
paragraph (e) of this section to calculate the risk-weighted asset 
amounts for CVA for OTC derivatives.
    (b) EAD for eligible margin loans and repo-style transactions. (1) 
General. An FDIC-supervised institution may recognize the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of financial collateral that secures an eligible 
margin loan, repo-style transaction, or single-product netting set of 
such transactions by factoring the collateral into its LGD estimates for 
the exposure. Alternatively, an FDIC-supervised institution may estimate 
an unsecured LGD for the exposure, as well as for any repo-style 
transaction that is included in the FDIC-supervised institution's VaR-
based measure under subpart F of this part, and determine the EAD of the 
exposure using:
    (i) The collateral haircut approach described in paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section;
    (ii) For netting sets only, the simple VaR methodology described in 
paragraph (b)(3) of this section; or
    (iii) The internal models methodology described in paragraph (d) of 
this section.
    (2) Collateral haircut approach--(i) EAD equation. An FDIC-
supervised institution may determine EAD for an eligible margin loan, 
repo-style transaction, or netting set by setting EAD equal to max 0, 
[(SE ^ SC) + S(Es  x  Hs) + S(Efx  x  
Hfx)] , where:
    (A) SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of the current fair 
values of all instruments, gold, and cash the FDIC-supervised 
institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted as 
collateral to the counterparty under the transaction (or netting set));
    (B) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
fair values of all instruments, gold, and cash the FDIC-supervised 
institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from the counterparty under the transaction (or netting 
set));
    (C) Es equals the absolute value of the net position in a 
given instrument or in gold (where the net position in a given 
instrument or in gold equals the

[[Page 308]]

sum of the current fair values of the instrument or gold the FDIC-
supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted 
as collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current fair 
values of that same instrument or gold the FDIC-supervised institution 
has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral from 
the counterparty);
    (D) Hs equals the market price volatility haircut 
appropriate to the instrument or gold referenced in Es;
    (E) Efx equals the absolute value of the net position of 
instruments and cash in a currency that is different from the settlement 
currency (where the net position in a given currency equals the sum of 
the current fair values of any instruments or cash in the currency the 
FDIC-supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or 
posted as collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current 
fair values of any instruments or cash in the currency the FDIC-
supervised institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or 
taken as collateral from the counterparty); and
    (F) Hfx equals the haircut appropriate to the mismatch 
between the currency referenced in Efx and the settlement 
currency.
    (ii) Standard supervisory haircuts. (A) Under the standard 
supervisory haircuts approach:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must use the haircuts for market 
price volatility (Hs) in Table 1 to Sec. 324.132, as adjusted 
in certain circumstances as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A)(3) and 
(4) of this section;

                                   Table 1 to Sec. 324.132--Standard Supervisory Market Price Volatility Haircuts \1\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Haircut (in percent) assigned based on:
                                                              ------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Sovereign issuers risk weight     Non-sovereign issuers risk weight   Investment grade
                      Residual maturity                            under Sec. 324.32 \2\ (in        under Sec. 324.32 (in percent)     securitization
                                                                            percent)              ------------------------------------   exposures (in
                                                              ------------------------------------                                          percent)
                                                                  Zero      20 or 50       100         20          50          100
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than or equal to 1 year.................................         0.5         1.0        15.0         1.0         2.0         4.0                4.0
Greater than 1 year and less than or equal to 5 years........         2.0         3.0        15.0         4.0         6.0         8.0               12.0
Greater than 5 years.........................................         4.0         6.0        15.0         8.0        12.0        16.0               24.0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Main index equities (including convertible bonds) and gold..........................15.0.........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other publicly traded equities (including convertible bonds)........................25.0.........
Mutual funds....................................................Highest haircut applicable to any security in
                                                                         which the fund can invest.
Cash collateral held................................................................Zero.........
Other exposure types................................................................25.0.........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The market price volatility haircuts in Table 1 to Sec. 324.132 are based on a 10 business-day holding period.
\2\ Includes a foreign PSE that receives a zero percent risk weight.

    (2) For currency mismatches, an FDIC-supervised institution must use 
a haircut for foreign exchange rate volatility (Hfx) of 8 
percent, as adjusted in certain circumstances as provided in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(ii)(A)(3) and (4) of this section.
    (3) For repo-style transactions, an FDIC-supervised institution may 
multiply the supervisory haircuts provided in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(ii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section by the square root of \1/2\ 
(which equals 0.707107).
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the supervisory 
haircuts upward on the basis of a holding period longer than ten 
business days (for eligible margin loans) or five business days (for 
repo-style transactions) where the following conditions apply. If the 
number of trades in a netting set exceeds 5,000 at any time during a 
quarter, an FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the supervisory 
haircuts upward on the basis of a holding period of twenty business days 
for the following quarter (except when an FDIC-supervised institution is 
calculating EAD for a cleared transaction under Sec. 324.133). If a 
netting set contains one or more

[[Page 309]]

trades involving illiquid collateral or an OTC derivative that cannot be 
easily replaced, an FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the 
supervisory haircuts upward on the basis of a holding period of twenty 
business days. If over the two previous quarters more than two margin 
disputes on a netting set have occurred that lasted more than the 
holding period, then the FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the 
supervisory haircuts upward for that netting set on the basis of a 
holding period that is at least two times the minimum holding period for 
that netting set. An FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the 
standard supervisory haircuts upward using the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.026

(i) TM equals a holding period of longer than 10 business 
          days for eligible margin loans and derivative contracts or 
          longer than 5 business days for repo-style transactions;
(ii) Hs equals the standard supervisory haircut; and
(iii) Ts equals 10 business days for eligible margin loans 
          and derivative contracts or 5 business days for repo-style 
          transactions.

    (5) If the instrument an FDIC-supervised institution has lent, sold 
subject to repurchase, or posted as collateral does not meet the 
definition of financial collateral, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
use a 25.0 percent haircut for market price volatility (Hs).
    (iii) Own internal estimates for haircuts. With the prior written 
approval of the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may calculate 
haircuts (Hs and Hfx) using its own internal 
estimates of the volatilities of market prices and foreign exchange 
rates.
    (A) To receive FDIC approval to use its own internal estimates, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must satisfy the following minimum 
quantitative standards:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must use a 99th percentile one-
tailed confidence interval.
    (2) The minimum holding period for a repo-style transaction is five 
business days and for an eligible margin loan is ten business days 
except for transactions or netting sets for which paragraph 
(b)(2)(iii)(A)(3) of this section applies. When an FDIC-supervised 
institution calculates an own-estimates haircut on a TN-day 
holding period, which is different from the minimum holding period for 
the transaction type, the applicable haircut (HM) is 
calculated using the following square root of time formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.027

(i) TM equals 5 for repo-style transactions and 10 for 
          eligible margin loans;
(ii) TN equals the holding period used by the FDIC-supervised 
          institution to derive HN; and
(iii) HN equals the haircut based on the holding period 
          TN.

    (3) If the number of trades in a netting set exceeds 5,000 at any 
time during a quarter, an FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the 
haircut using a minimum holding period of twenty business days for the 
following quarter (except when an FDIC-supervised institution is 
calculating EAD for a cleared transaction under Sec. 324.133). If a 
netting set contains one or more trades involving illiquid collateral or

[[Page 310]]

an OTC derivative that cannot be easily replaced, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the haircut using a minimum holding period of 
twenty business days. If over the two previous quarters more than two 
margin disputes on a netting set have occurred that lasted more than the 
holding period, then the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the 
haircut for transactions in that netting set on the basis of a holding 
period that is at least two times the minimum holding period for that 
netting set.
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution is required to calculate its own 
internal estimates with inputs calibrated to historical data from a 
continuous 12-month period that reflects a period of significant 
financial stress appropriate to the security or category of securities.
    (5) An FDIC-supervised institution must have policies and procedures 
that describe how it determines the period of significant financial 
stress used to calculate the FDIC-supervised institution's own internal 
estimates for haircuts under this section and must be able to provide 
empirical support for the period used. The FDIC-supervised institution 
must obtain the prior approval of the FDIC for, and notify the FDIC if 
the FDIC-supervised institution makes any material changes to, these 
policies and procedures.
    (6) Nothing in this section prevents the FDIC from requiring an 
FDIC-supervised institution to use a different period of significant 
financial stress in the calculation of own internal estimates for 
haircuts.
    (7) An FDIC-supervised institution must update its data sets and 
calculate haircuts no less frequently than quarterly and must also 
reassess data sets and haircuts whenever market prices change 
materially.
    (B) With respect to debt securities that are investment grade, an 
FDIC-supervised institution may calculate haircuts for categories of 
securities. For a category of securities, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the haircut on the basis of internal 
volatility estimates for securities in that category that are 
representative of the securities in that category that the FDIC-
supervised institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as 
collateral, borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral. In determining relevant categories, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must at a minimum take into account:
    (1) The type of issuer of the security;
    (2) The credit quality of the security;
    (3) The maturity of the security; and
    (4) The interest rate sensitivity of the security.
    (C) With respect to debt securities that are not investment grade 
and equity securities, an FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a 
separate haircut for each individual security.
    (D) Where an exposure or collateral (whether in the form of cash or 
securities) is denominated in a currency that differs from the 
settlement currency, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a 
separate currency mismatch haircut for its net position in each 
mismatched currency based on estimated volatilities of foreign exchange 
rates between the mismatched currency and the settlement currency.
    (E) An FDIC-supervised institution's own estimates of market price 
and foreign exchange rate volatilities may not take into account the 
correlations among securities and foreign exchange rates on either the 
exposure or collateral side of a transaction (or netting set) or the 
correlations among securities and foreign exchange rates between the 
exposure and collateral sides of the transaction (or netting set).
    (3) Simple VaR methodology. With the prior written approval of the 
FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may estimate EAD for a netting set 
using a VaR model that meets the requirements in paragraph (b)(3)(iii) 
of this section. In such event, the FDIC-supervised institution must set 
EAD equal to max 0, [(SE ^ SC) + PFE] , where:
    (i) SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of the current fair 
values of all instruments, gold, and cash the FDIC-supervised 
institution has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted as 
collateral to the counterparty under the netting set);
    (ii) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
fair values of all instruments, gold, and cash the FDIC-supervised 
institution has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or

[[Page 311]]

taken as collateral from the counterparty under the netting set); and
    (iii) PFE (potential future exposure) equals the FDIC-supervised 
institution's empirically based best estimate of the 99th percentile, 
one-tailed confidence interval for an increase in the value of (SE ^ SC) 
over a five-business-day holding period for repo-style transactions, or 
over a ten-business-day holding period for eligible margin loans except 
for netting sets for which paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section applies 
using a minimum one-year historical observation period of price data 
representing the instruments that the FDIC-supervised institution has 
lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as collateral, borrowed, 
purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral. The FDIC-supervised 
institution must validate its VaR model by establishing and maintaining 
a rigorous and regular backtesting regime.
    (iv) If the number of trades in a netting set exceeds 5,000 at any 
time during a quarter, an FDIC-supervised institution must use a twenty-
business-day holding period for the following quarter (except when an 
FDIC-supervised institution is calculating EAD for a cleared transaction 
under Sec. 324.133). If a netting set contains one or more trades 
involving illiquid collateral, an FDIC-supervised institution must use a 
twenty-business-day holding period. If over the two previous quarters 
more than two margin disputes on a netting set have occurred that lasted 
more than the holding period, then the FDIC-supervised institution must 
set its PFE for that netting set equal to an estimate over a holding 
period that is at least two times the minimum holding period for that 
netting set.
    (c) EAD for OTC derivative contracts--(1) OTC derivative contracts 
not subject to a qualifying master netting agreement. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must determine the EAD for an OTC derivative contract that 
is not subject to a qualifying master netting agreement using the 
current exposure methodology in paragraph (c)(5) of this section or 
using the internal models methodology described in paragraph (d) of this 
section. An FDIC-supervised institution may reduce the EAD calculated 
according to paragraph (c)(5) of this section by the credit valuation 
adjustment that the FDIC-supervised institution has recognized in its 
balance sheet valuation of any OTC derivative contracts in the netting 
set. For purposes of this paragraph (c)(1), the credit valuation 
adjustment does not include any adjustments to common equity tier 1 
capital attributable to changes in the fair value of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's liabilities that are due to changes in its own credit risk 
since the inception of the transaction with the counterparty.
    (2) OTC derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master netting 
agreement. An FDIC-supervised institution must determine the EAD for 
multiple OTC derivative contracts that are subject to a qualifying 
master netting agreement using the current exposure methodology in 
paragraph (c)(6) of this section or using the internal models 
methodology described in paragraph (d) of this section. An FDIC-
supervised institution may reduce the EAD calculated according to 
paragraph (c)(6) of this section by the credit valuation adjustment that 
the FDIC-supervised institution has recognized in its balance sheet 
valuation of any OTC derivative contracts in the netting set. For 
purposes of this paragraph (c)(2), the credit valuation adjustment does 
not include any adjustments to common equity tier 1 capital attributable 
to changes in the fair value of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
liabilities that are due to changes in its own credit risk since the 
inception of the transaction with the counterparty.
    (3) Credit derivatives. Notwithstanding paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) 
of this section:
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that purchases a credit 
derivative that is recognized under Sec. 324.134 or Sec. 324.135 as a 
credit risk mitigant for an exposure that is not a covered position 
under subpart F of this part is not required to calculate a separate 
counterparty credit risk capital requirement under this section so long 
as the FDIC-supervised institution does so consistently for all such 
credit derivatives and either includes or excludes all such credit 
derivatives that are subject to a master netting agreement from

[[Page 312]]

any measure used to determine counterparty credit risk exposure to all 
relevant counterparties for risk-based capital purposes.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that is the protection provider 
in a credit derivative must treat the credit derivative as a wholesale 
exposure to the reference obligor and is not required to calculate a 
counterparty credit risk capital requirement for the credit derivative 
under this section, so long as it does so consistently for all such 
credit derivatives and either includes all or excludes all such credit 
derivatives that are subject to a master netting agreement from any 
measure used to determine counterparty credit risk exposure to all 
relevant counterparties for risk-based capital purposes (unless the 
FDIC-supervised institution is treating the credit derivative as a 
covered position under subpart F of this part, in which case the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate a supplemental counterparty credit 
risk capital requirement under this section).
    (4) Equity derivatives. An FDIC-supervised institution must treat an 
equity derivative contract as an equity exposure and compute a risk-
weighted asset amount for the equity derivative contract under 
Secs. 324.151-324.155 (unless the FDIC-supervised institution is 
treating the contract as a covered position under subpart F of this 
part). In addition, if the FDIC-supervised institution is treating the 
contract as a covered position under subpart F of this part, and under 
certain other circumstances described in Sec. 324.155, the FDIC-
supervised institution must also calculate a risk-based capital 
requirement for the counterparty credit risk of an equity derivative 
contract under this section.
    (5) Single OTC derivative contract. Except as modified by paragraph 
(c)(7) of this section, the EAD for a single OTC derivative contract 
that is not subject to a qualifying master netting agreement is equal to 
the sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's current credit exposure and 
potential future credit exposure (PFE) on the derivative contract.
    (i) Current credit exposure. The current credit exposure for a 
single OTC derivative contract is the greater of the mark-to-fair value 
of the derivative contract or zero; and
    (ii) PFE. The PFE for a single OTC derivative contract, including an 
OTC derivative contract with a negative mark-to-fair value, is 
calculated by multiplying the notional principal amount of the 
derivative contract by the appropriate conversion factor in Table 2 to 
Sec. 324.132. For purposes of calculating either the PFE under paragraph 
(c)(5) of this section or the gross PFE under paragraph (c)(6) of this 
section for exchange rate contracts and other similar contracts in which 
the notional principal amount is equivalent to the cash flows, the 
notional principal amount is the net receipts to each party falling due 
on each value date in each currency. For any OTC derivative contract 
that does not fall within one of the specified categories in Table 2 to 
Sec. 324.132, the PFE must be calculated using the ``other'' conversion 
factors. An FDIC-supervised institution must use an OTC derivative 
contract's effective notional principal amount (that is, its apparent or 
stated notional principal amount multiplied by any multiplier in the OTC 
derivative contract) rather than its apparent or stated notional 
principal amount in calculating PFE. PFE of the protection provider of a 
credit derivative is capped at the net present value of the amount of 
unpaid premiums.

                                   Table 2 to Sec. 324.132--Conversion Factor Matrix for OTC Derivative Contracts \1\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Credit       Credit (non-
                                                                        Foreign      (investment-     investment-                 Precious
                 Remaining maturity \2\                    Interest  exchange rate       grade           grade        Equity   metals (except    Other
                                                             rate       and gold       reference       reference                    gold)
                                                                                      asset) \3\        asset)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
One year or less........................................      0.00           0.01             0.05            0.10       0.06            0.07       0.10
Over one to five years..................................      0.005          0.05             0.05            0.10       0.08            0.07       0.12
Over five years.........................................      0.015          0.075            0.05            0.10       0.10            0.08       0.15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For an OTC derivative contract with multiple exchanges of principal, the conversion factor is multiplied by the number of remaining payments in the
  derivative contract.

[[Page 313]]

 
\2\ For an OTC derivative contract that is structured such that on specified dates any outstanding exposure is settled and the terms are reset so that
  the fair value of the contract is zero, the remaining maturity equals the time until the next reset date. For an interest rate derivative contract
  with a remaining maturity of greater than one year that meets these criteria, the minimum conversion factor is 0.005.
\3\ An FDIC-supervised institution must use the column labeled ``Credit (investment-grade reference asset)'' for a credit derivative whose reference
  asset is an outstanding unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement that is investment grade. An FDIC-supervised institution must use
  the column labeled ``Credit (non-investment-grade reference asset)'' for all other credit derivatives.

    (6) Multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master 
netting agreement. Except as modified by paragraph (c)(7) of this 
section, the EAD for multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a 
qualifying master netting agreement is equal to the sum of the net 
current credit exposure and the adjusted sum of the PFE exposure for all 
OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying master netting 
agreement.
    (i) Net current credit exposure. The net current credit exposure is 
the greater of:
    (A) The net sum of all positive and negative fair values of the 
individual OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying master 
netting agreement; or
    (B) Zero; and
    (ii) Adjusted sum of the PFE. The adjusted sum of the PFE, 
Anet, is calculated as Anet = (0.4  x  
Agross) + (0.6  x  NGR  x  Agross), where:
    (A) Agross equals the gross PFE (that is, the sum of the 
PFE amounts (as determined under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section) 
for each individual derivative contract subject to the qualifying master 
netting agreement); and
    (B) NGR equals the net to gross ratio (that is, the ratio of the net 
current credit exposure to the gross current credit exposure). In 
calculating the NGR, the gross current credit exposure equals the sum of 
the positive current credit exposures (as determined under paragraph 
(c)(6)(i) of this section) of all individual derivative contracts 
subject to the qualifying master netting agreement.
    (7) Collateralized OTC derivative contracts. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of 
financial collateral that secures an OTC derivative contract or single-
product netting set of OTC derivatives by factoring the collateral into 
its LGD estimates for the contract or netting set. Alternatively, an 
FDIC-supervised institution may recognize the credit risk mitigation 
benefits of financial collateral that secures such a contract or netting 
set that is marked-to-market on a daily basis and subject to a daily 
margin maintenance requirement by estimating an unsecured LGD for the 
contract or netting set and adjusting the EAD calculated under paragraph 
(c)(5) or (c)(6) of this section using the collateral haircut approach 
in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. The FDIC-supervised institution 
must substitute the EAD calculated under paragraph (c)(5) or (c)(6) of 
this section for SE in the equation in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this 
section and must use a ten-business day minimum holding period 
(TM = 10) unless a longer holding period is required by 
paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(A)(3) of this section.
    (8) Clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's EAD. A clearing 
member FDIC-supervised institution's EAD for an OTC derivative contract 
or netting set of OTC derivative contracts where the FDIC-supervised 
institution is either acting as a financial intermediary and enters into 
an offsetting transaction with a QCCP or where the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides a guarantee to the QCCP on the performance of the 
client equals the exposure amount calculated according to paragraph 
(c)(5) or (6) of this section multiplied by the scaling factor 0.71. If 
the FDIC-supervised institution determines that a longer period is 
appropriate, it must use a larger scaling factor to adjust for a longer 
holding period as follows:

[[Page 314]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.028


where H equals the holding period greater than five days. Additionally, 
the FDIC may require the FDIC-supervised institution to set a longer 
holding period if the FDIC determines that a longer period is 
appropriate due to the nature, structure, or characteristics of the 
transaction or is commensurate with the risks associated with the 
transaction.
    (d) Internal models methodology. (1)(i) With prior written approval 
from the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may use the internal 
models methodology in this paragraph (d) to determine EAD for 
counterparty credit risk for derivative contracts (collateralized or 
uncollateralized) and single-product netting sets thereof, for eligible 
margin loans and single-product netting sets thereof, and for repo-style 
transactions and single-product netting sets thereof.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that uses the internal models 
methodology for a particular transaction type (derivative contracts, 
eligible margin loans, or repo-style transactions) must use the internal 
models methodology for all transactions of that transaction type. An 
FDIC-supervised institution may choose to use the internal models 
methodology for one or two of these three types of exposures and not the 
other types.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution may also use the internal 
models methodology for derivative contracts, eligible margin loans, and 
repo-style transactions subject to a qualifying cross-product netting 
agreement if:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution effectively integrates the risk 
mitigating effects of cross-product netting into its risk management and 
other information technology systems; and
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution obtains the prior written 
approval of the FDIC.
    (iv) An FDIC-supervised institution that uses the internal models 
methodology for a transaction type must receive approval from the FDIC 
to cease using the methodology for that transaction type or to make a 
material change to its internal model.
    (2) Risk-weighted assets using IMM. Under the IMM, an FDIC-
supervised institution uses an internal model to estimate the expected 
exposure (EE) for a netting set and then calculates EAD based on that 
EE. An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate two EEs and two EADs 
(one stressed and one unstressed) for each netting set as follows:
    (i) EADunstressed is calculated using an EE estimate 
based on the most recent data meeting the requirements of paragraph 
(d)(3)(vii) of this section;
    (ii) EADstressed is calculated using an EE estimate based 
on a historical period that includes a period of stress to the credit 
default spreads of the FDIC-supervised institution's counterparties 
according to paragraph (d)(3)(viii) of this section;
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution must use its internal model's 
probability distribution for changes in the fair value of a netting set 
that are attributable to changes in market variables to determine EE; 
and
    (iv) Under the internal models methodology, EAD = Max (0, a  x  
effective EPE^CVA), or, subject to the prior written approval of FDIC as 
provided in paragraph (d)(10) of this section, a more conservative 
measure of EAD.
    (A) CVA equals the credit valuation adjustment that the FDIC-
supervised institution has recognized in its balance sheet valuation of 
any OTC derivative contracts in the netting set. For purposes of this 
paragraph (d), CVA does not include any adjustments to common equity 
tier 1 capital attributable to changes in the fair value of the FDIC-
supervised institution's liabilities that are due to changes in its own 
credit risk since the inception of the transaction with the 
counterparty.

[[Page 315]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.029


(that is, effective EPE is the time-weighted average of effective EE 
where the weights are the proportion that an individual effective EE 
represents in a one-year time interval) where:
    (1) EffectiveEEtk = max(Effective EEtk^1, EEtk) (that is, for a 
specific date tk, effective EE is the greater of EE at that 
date or the effective EE at the previous date); and
    (2) tk represents the kth future time period 
in the model and there are n time periods represented in the model over 
the first year, and
    (C) a = 1.4 except as provided in paragraph (d)(6) of this section, 
or when the FDIC has determined that the FDIC-supervised institution 
must set a higher based on the FDIC-supervised institution's specific 
characteristics of counterparty credit risk or model performance.
    (v) An FDIC-supervised institution may include financial collateral 
currently posted by the counterparty as collateral (but may not include 
other forms of collateral) when calculating EE.
    (vi) If an FDIC-supervised institution hedges some or all of the 
counterparty credit risk associated with a netting set using an eligible 
credit derivative, the FDIC-supervised institution may take the 
reduction in exposure to the counterparty into account when estimating 
EE. If the FDIC-supervised institution recognizes this reduction in 
exposure to the counterparty in its estimate of EE, it must also use its 
internal model to estimate a separate EAD for the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposure to the protection provider of the credit 
derivative.
    (3) Prior approval relating to EAD calculation. To obtain FDIC 
approval to calculate the distributions of exposures upon which the EAD 
calculation is based, the FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate 
to the satisfaction of the FDIC that it has been using for at least one 
year an internal model that broadly meets the following minimum 
standards, with which the FDIC-supervised institution must maintain 
compliance:
    (i) The model must have the systems capability to estimate the 
expected exposure to the counterparty on a daily basis (but is not 
expected to estimate or report expected exposure on a daily basis);
    (ii) The model must estimate expected exposure at enough future 
dates to reflect accurately all the future cash flows of contracts in 
the netting set;
    (iii) The model must account for the possible non-normality of the 
exposure distribution, where appropriate;
    (iv) The FDIC-supervised institution must measure, monitor, and 
control current counterparty exposure and the exposure to the 
counterparty over the whole life of all contracts in the netting set;
    (v) The FDIC-supervised institution must be able to measure and 
manage current exposures gross and net of collateral held, where 
appropriate. The FDIC-supervised institution must estimate expected 
exposures for OTC derivative contracts both with and without the effect 
of collateral agreements;
    (vi) The FDIC-supervised institution must have procedures to 
identify, monitor, and control wrong-way risk throughout the life of an 
exposure. The procedures must include stress testing and scenario 
analysis;
    (vii) The model must use current market data to compute current 
exposures. The FDIC-supervised institution must estimate model 
parameters using historical data from the most recent three-year period 
and update the data quarterly or more frequently if market conditions 
warrant. The FDIC-supervised institution should consider using model 
parameters based on forward-looking measures, where appropriate;
    (viii) When estimating model parameters based on a stress period, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must use at least three years of 
historical data that include a period of stress to the credit default 
spreads of the FDIC-supervised institution's counterparties.

[[Page 316]]

The FDIC-supervised institution must review the data set and update the 
data as necessary, particularly for any material changes in its 
counterparties. The FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate, at 
least quarterly, and maintain documentation of such demonstration, that 
the stress period coincides with increased CDS or other credit spreads 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's counterparties. The FDIC-supervised 
institution must have procedures to evaluate the effectiveness of its 
stress calibration that include a process for using benchmark portfolios 
that are vulnerable to the same risk factors as the FDIC-supervised 
institution's portfolio. The FDIC may require the FDIC-supervised 
institution to modify its stress calibration to better reflect actual 
historic losses of the portfolio;
    (ix) An FDIC-supervised institution must subject its internal model 
to an initial validation and annual model review process. The model 
review should consider whether the inputs and risk factors, as well as 
the model outputs, are appropriate. As part of the model review process, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must have a backtesting program for its 
model that includes a process by which unacceptable model performance 
will be determined and remedied;
    (x) An FDIC-supervised institution must have policies for the 
measurement, management and control of collateral and margin amounts; 
and
    (xi) An FDIC-supervised institution must have a comprehensive stress 
testing program that captures all credit exposures to counterparties, 
and incorporates stress testing of principal market risk factors and 
creditworthiness of counterparties.
    (4) Calculating the maturity of exposures. (i) If the remaining 
maturity of the exposure or the longest-dated contract in the netting 
set is greater than one year, the FDIC-supervised institution must set M 
for the exposure or netting set equal to the lower of five years or 
M(EPE), where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.030

    (ii) If the remaining maturity of the exposure or the longest-dated 
contract in the netting set is one year or less, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must set M for the exposure or netting set equal to one 
year, except as provided in Sec. 324.131(d)(7).
    (iii) Alternatively, an FDIC-supervised institution that uses an 
internal model to calculate a one-sided credit valuation adjustment may 
use the effective credit duration estimated by the model as M(EPE) in 
place of the formula in paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section.
    (5) Effects of collateral agreements on EAD. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may capture the effect on EAD of a collateral agreement that 
requires receipt of collateral when exposure to the counterparty 
increases, but may not capture the effect on EAD of a collateral 
agreement that requires receipt of collateral when counterparty credit 
quality deteriorates. Two methods are

[[Page 317]]

available to capture the effect of a collateral agreement, as set forth 
in paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section:
    (i) With prior written approval from the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised 
institution may include the effect of a collateral agreement within its 
internal model used to calculate EAD. The FDIC-supervised institution 
may set EAD equal to the expected exposure at the end of the margin 
period of risk. The margin period of risk means, with respect to a 
netting set subject to a collateral agreement, the time period from the 
most recent exchange of collateral with a counterparty until the next 
required exchange of collateral, plus the period of time required to 
sell and realize the proceeds of the least liquid collateral that can be 
delivered under the terms of the collateral agreement and, where 
applicable, the period of time required to re-hedge the resulting market 
risk upon the default of the counterparty. The minimum margin period of 
risk is set according to paragraph (d)(5)(iii) of this section; or
    (ii) As an alternative to paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section, an 
FDIC-supervised institution that can model EPE without collateral 
agreements but cannot achieve the higher level of modeling 
sophistication to model EPE with collateral agreements can set effective 
EPE for a collateralized netting set equal to the lesser of:
    (A) An add-on that reflects the potential increase in exposure of 
the netting set over the margin period of risk, plus the larger of:
    (1) The current exposure of the netting set reflecting all 
collateral held or posted by the FDIC-supervised institution excluding 
any collateral called or in dispute; or
    (2) The largest net exposure including all collateral held or posted 
under the margin agreement that would not trigger a collateral call. For 
purposes of this section, the add-on is computed as the expected 
increase in the netting set's exposure over the margin period of risk 
(set in accordance with paragraph (d)(5)(iii) of this section); or
    (B) Effective EPE without a collateral agreement plus any collateral 
the FDIC-supervised institution posts to the counterparty that exceeds 
the required margin amount.
    (iii) For purposes of this part, including paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and 
(ii) of this section, the margin period of risk for a netting set 
subject to a collateral agreement is:
    (A) Five business days for repo-style transactions subject to daily 
remargining and daily marking-to-market, and ten business days for other 
transactions when liquid financial collateral is posted under a daily 
margin maintenance requirement, or
    (B) Twenty business days if the number of trades in a netting set 
exceeds 5,000 at any time during the previous quarter (except if the 
FDIC-supervised institution is calculating EAD for a cleared transaction 
under Sec. 324.133) or contains one or more trades involving illiquid 
collateral or any derivative contract that cannot be easily replaced. If 
over the two previous quarters more than two margin disputes on a 
netting set have occurred that lasted more than the margin period of 
risk, then the FDIC-supervised institution must use a margin period of 
risk for that netting set that is at least two times the minimum margin 
period of risk for that netting set. If the periodicity of the receipt 
of collateral is N-days, the minimum margin period of risk is the 
minimum margin period of risk under this paragraph (d) plus N minus 1. 
This period should be extended to cover any impediments to prompt re-
hedging of any market risk.
    (C) Five business days for an OTC derivative contract or netting set 
of OTC derivative contracts where the FDIC-supervised institution is 
either acting as a financial intermediary and enters into an offsetting 
transaction with a CCP or where the FDIC-supervised institution provides 
a guarantee to the CCP on the performance of the client. An FDIC-
supervised institution must use a longer holding period if the FDIC-
supervised institution determines that a longer period is appropriate. 
Additionally, the FDIC may require the FDIC-supervised institution to 
set a longer holding period if the FDIC determines that a longer period 
is appropriate due to the nature, structure, or characteristics of the 
transaction or is commensurate with the risks associated with the 
transaction.

[[Page 318]]

    (6) Own estimate of alpha. With prior written approval of the FDIC, 
an FDIC-supervised institution may calculate alpha as the ratio of 
economic capital from a full simulation of counterparty exposure across 
counterparties that incorporates a joint simulation of market and credit 
risk factors (numerator) and economic capital based on EPE 
(denominator), subject to a floor of 1.2. For purposes of this 
calculation, economic capital is the unexpected losses for all 
counterparty credit risks measured at a 99.9 percent confidence level 
over a one-year horizon. To receive approval, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must meet the following minimum standards to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution's own estimate of alpha must 
capture in the numerator the effects of:
    (A) The material sources of stochastic dependency of distributions 
of fair values of transactions or portfolios of transactions across 
counterparties;
    (B) Volatilities and correlations of market risk factors used in the 
joint simulation, which must be related to the credit risk factor used 
in the simulation to reflect potential increases in volatility or 
correlation in an economic downturn, where appropriate; and
    (C) The granularity of exposures (that is, the effect of a 
concentration in the proportion of each counterparty's exposure that is 
driven by a particular risk factor).
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution must assess the potential model 
uncertainty in its estimates of alpha.
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the numerator 
and denominator of alpha in a consistent fashion with respect to 
modeling methodology, parameter specifications, and portfolio 
composition.
    (iv) The FDIC-supervised institution must review and adjust as 
appropriate its estimates of the numerator and denominator of alpha on 
at least a quarterly basis and more frequently when the composition of 
the portfolio varies over time.
    (7) Risk-based capital requirements for transactions with specific 
wrong-way risk. An FDIC-supervised institution must determine if a repo-
style transaction, eligible margin loan, bond option, or equity 
derivative contract or purchased credit derivative to which the FDIC-
supervised institution applies the internal models methodology under 
this paragraph (d) has specific wrong-way risk. If a transaction has 
specific wrong-way risk, the FDIC-supervised institution must treat the 
transaction as its own netting set and exclude it from the model 
described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section and instead calculate the 
risk-based capital requirement for the transaction as follows:
    (i) For an equity derivative contract, by multiplying:
    (A) K, calculated using the appropriate risk-based capital formula 
specified in Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 using the PD of the counterparty 
and LGD equal to 100 percent, by
    (B) The maximum amount the FDIC-supervised institution could lose on 
the equity derivative.
    (ii) For a purchased credit derivative by multiplying:
    (A) K, calculated using the appropriate risk-based capital formula 
specified in Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 using the PD of the counterparty 
and LGD equal to 100 percent, by
    (B) The fair value of the reference asset of the credit derivative.
    (iii) For a bond option, by multiplying:
    (A) K, calculated using the appropriate risk-based capital formula 
specified in Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 using the PD of the counterparty 
and LGD equal to 100 percent, by
    (B) The smaller of the notional amount of the underlying reference 
asset and the maximum potential loss under the bond option contract.
    (iv) For a repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan by 
multiplying:
    (A) K, calculated using the appropriate risk-based capital formula 
specified in Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 using the PD of the counterparty 
and LGD equal to 100 percent, by
    (B) The EAD of the transaction determined according to the EAD 
equation in Sec. 324.132(b)(2), substituting the estimated value of the 
collateral assuming a default of the counterparty for the value of the 
collateral in SC of the equation.

[[Page 319]]

    (8) Risk-weighted asset amount for IMM exposures with specific 
wrong-way risk. The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for IMM 
exposures with specific wrong-way risk is the sum of an FDIC-supervised 
institution's risk-based capital requirement for purchased credit 
derivatives that are not bond options with specific wrong-way risk as 
calculated under paragraph (d)(7)(ii) of this section, an FDIC-
supervised institution's risk-based capital requirement for equity 
derivatives with specific wrong-way risk as calculated under paragraph 
(d)(7)(i) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution's risk-based 
capital requirement for bond options with specific wrong-way risk as 
calculated under paragraph (d)(7)(iii) of this section, and an FDIC-
supervised institution's risk-based capital requirement for repo-style 
transactions and eligible margin loans with specific wrong-way risk as 
calculated under paragraph (d)(7)(iv) of this section, multiplied by 
12.5.
    (9) Risk-weighted assets for IMM exposures. (i) The FDIC-supervised 
institution must insert the assigned risk parameters for each 
counterparty and netting set into the appropriate formula specified in 
Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 and multiply the output of the formula by the 
EADunstressed of the netting set to obtain the unstressed 
capital requirement for each netting set. An FDIC-supervised institution 
that uses an advanced CVA approach that captures migrations in credit 
spreads under paragraph (e)(3) of this section must set the maturity 
adjustment (b) in the formula equal to zero. The sum of the unstressed 
capital requirement calculated for each netting set equals 
Kunstressed.
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution must insert the assigned risk 
parameters for each wholesale obligor and netting set into the 
appropriate formula specified in Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 and multiply 
the output of the formula by the EADstressed of the netting 
set to obtain the stressed capital requirement for each netting set. An 
FDIC-supervised institution that uses an advanced CVA approach that 
captures migrations in credit spreads under paragraph (e)(6) of this 
section must set the maturity adjustment (b) in the formula equal to 
zero. The sum of the stressed capital requirement calculated for each 
netting set equals Kstressed.
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution's dollar risk-based capital 
requirement under the internal models methodology equals the larger of 
Kunstressed and Kstressed. An FDIC-supervised 
institution's risk-weighted assets amount for IMM exposures is equal to 
the capital requirement multiplied by 12.5, plus risk-weighted assets 
for IMM exposures with specific wrong-way risk in paragraph (d)(8) of 
this section and those in paragraph (d)(10) of this section.
    (10) Other measures of counterparty exposure. (i) With prior written 
approval of the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may set EAD equal 
to a measure of counterparty credit risk exposure, such as peak EAD, 
that is more conservative than an alpha of 1.4 (or higher under the 
terms of paragraph (d)(7)(iv)(C) of this section) times the larger of 
EPEunstressed and EPEstressed for every 
counterparty whose EAD will be measured under the alternative measure of 
counterparty exposure. The FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate 
the conservatism of the measure of counterparty credit risk exposure 
used for EAD. With respect to paragraph (d)(10)(i) of this section:
    (A) For material portfolios of new OTC derivative products, the 
FDIC-supervised institution may assume that the current exposure 
methodology in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section meets the 
conservatism requirement of this section for a period not to exceed 180 
days.
    (B) For immaterial portfolios of OTC derivative contracts, the FDIC-
supervised institution generally may assume that the current exposure 
methodology in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section meets the 
conservatism requirement of this section.
    (ii) To calculate risk-weighted assets for purposes of the approach 
in paragraph (d)(10)(i) of this section, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must insert the assigned risk parameters for each counterparty and 
netting set into the appropriate formula specified in Table 1 of 
Sec. 324.131, multiply the output

[[Page 320]]

of the formula by the EAD for the exposure as specified above, and 
multiply by 12.5.
    (e) Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) risk-weighted assets. (1) In 
general. With respect to its OTC derivative contracts, an FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate a CVA risk-weighted asset amount 
for its portfolio of OTC derivative transactions that are subject to the 
CVA capital requirement using the simple CVA approach described in 
paragraph (e)(5) of this section or, with prior written approval of the 
FDIC, the advanced CVA approach described in paragraph (e)(6) of this 
section. An FDIC-supervised institution that receives prior FDIC 
approval to calculate its CVA risk-weighted asset amounts for a class of 
counterparties using the advanced CVA approach must continue to use that 
approach for that class of counterparties until it notifies the FDIC in 
writing that the FDIC-supervised institution expects to begin 
calculating its CVA risk-weighted asset amount using the simple CVA 
approach. Such notice must include an explanation of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's rationale and the date upon which the FDIC-supervised 
institution will begin to calculate its CVA risk-weighted asset amount 
using the simple CVA approach.
    (2) Market risk FDIC-supervised institutions. Notwithstanding the 
prior approval requirement in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, a market 
risk FDIC-supervised institution may calculate its CVA risk-weighted 
asset amount using the advanced CVA approach if the FDIC-supervised 
institution has FDIC approval to:
    (i) Determine EAD for OTC derivative contracts using the internal 
models methodology described in paragraph (d) of this section; and
    (ii) Determine its specific risk add-on for debt positions issued by 
the counterparty using a specific risk model described in 
Sec. 324.207(b).
    (3) Recognition of hedges. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution may 
recognize a single name CDS, single name contingent CDS, any other 
equivalent hedging instrument that references the counterparty directly, 
and index credit default swaps (CDSind) as a CVA hedge under 
paragraph (e)(5)(ii) of this section or paragraph (e)(6) of this 
section, provided that the position is managed as a CVA hedge in 
accordance with the FDIC-supervised institution's hedging policies.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution shall not recognize as a CVA 
hedge any tranched or n\th\-to-default credit derivative.
    (4) Total CVA risk-weighted assets. Total CVA risk-weighted assets 
is the CVA capital requirement, KCVA, calculated for an FDIC-
supervised institution's entire portfolio of OTC derivative 
counterparties that are subject to the CVA capital requirement, 
multiplied by 12.5.
    (5) Simple CVA approach. (i) Under the simple CVA approach, the CVA 
capital requirement, KCVA, is calculated according to the 
following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.031

    (A) wi equals the weight applicable to counterparty i under Table 3 
to Sec. 324.132;
    (B) Mi equals the EAD-weighted average of the effective maturity of 
each netting set with counterparty i (where each netting set's effective 
maturity can be no less than one year.)

[[Page 321]]

    (C) EADi total equals the sum of the EAD for all netting sets of OTC 
derivative contracts with counterparty i calculated using the current 
exposure methodology described in paragraph (c) of this section or the 
internal models methodology described in paragraph (d) of this section. 
When the FDIC-supervised institution calculates EAD under paragraph (c) 
of this section, such EAD may be adjusted for purposes of calculating 
EADi total by multiplying EAD by (1-exp(-0.05  x  Mi))/(0.05  x  Mi), 
where ``exp'' is the exponential function. When the FDIC-supervised 
institution calculates EAD under paragraph (d) of this section, EADi 
total equals EADunstressed.
    (D) M i hedge equals the notional weighted average maturity of the 
hedge instrument.
    (E) Bi equals the sum of the notional amounts of any purchased 
single name CDS referencing counterparty i that is used to hedge CVA 
risk to counterparty i multiplied by (1-exp(-0.05  x  Mi hedge))/(0.05 
x  Mi hedge).
    (F) Mind equals the maturity of the CDSind or the notional weighted 
average maturity of any CDSind purchased to hedge CVA risk of 
counterparty i.
    (G) Bind equals the notional amount of one or more CDSind 
purchased to hedge CVA risk for counterparty i multiplied by (1-exp(-
0.05  x  Mind))/(0.05  x  Mind)
    (H) wind equals the weight applicable to the CDSind based 
on the average weight of the underlying reference names that comprise 
the index under Table 3 to Sec. 324.132.
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution may treat the notional amount 
of the index attributable to a counterparty as a single name hedge of 
counterparty i (Bi,) when calculating KCVA, and subtract the 
notional amount of Bi from the notional amount of the CDSind. 
An FDIC-supervised institution must treat the CDSind hedge 
with the notional amount reduced by Bi as a CVA hedge.

       Table 3 to Sec. 324.132--Assignment of Counterparty Weight
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Weight wi (in
                Internal PD (in percent)                     percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.00-0.07..............................................             0.70
>0.070-0.15............................................             0.80
>0.15-0.40.............................................             1.00
>0.40-2.00.............................................             2.00
>2.00-6.00.............................................             3.00
>6.00..................................................            10.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (6) Advanced CVA approach. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution may 
use the VaR model that it uses to determine specific risk under 
Sec. 324.207(b) or another VaR model that meets the quantitative 
requirements of Sec. 324.205(b) and Sec. 324.207(b)(1) to calculate its 
CVA capital requirement for a counterparty by modeling the impact of 
changes in the counterparties' credit spreads, together with any 
recognized CVA hedges, on the CVA for the counterparties, subject to the 
following requirements:
    (A) The VaR model must incorporate only changes in the 
counterparties' credit spreads, not changes in other risk factors. The 
VaR model does not need to capture jump-to-default risk;
    (B) An FDIC-supervised institution that qualifies to use the 
advanced CVA approach must include in that approach any immaterial OTC 
derivative portfolios for which it uses the current exposure methodology 
in paragraph (c) of this section according to paragraph (e)(6)(viii) of 
this section; and
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must have the systems capability 
to calculate the CVA capital requirement for a counterparty on a daily 
basis (but is not required to calculate the CVA capital requirement on a 
daily basis).
    (ii) Under the advanced CVA approach, the CVA capital requirement, 
KCVA, is calculated according to the following formulas:

[[Page 322]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.032

Where

(A) ti equals the time of the i-th revaluation time bucket starting from 
          t0 = 0.
(B) tT equals the longest contractual maturity across the OTC derivative 
          contracts with the counterparty.
(C) si equals the CDS spread for the counterparty at tenor ti used to 
          calculate the CVA for the counterparty. If a CDS spread is not 
          available, the FDIC-supervised institution must use a proxy 
          spread based on the credit quality, industry and region of the 
          counterparty.
(D) LGDMKT equals the loss given default of the counterparty based on 
          the spread of a publicly traded debt instrument of the 
          counterparty, or, where a publicly traded debt instrument 
          spread is not available, a proxy spread based on the credit 
          quality, industry, and region of the counterparty. Where no 
          market information and no reliable proxy based on the credit 
          quality, industry, and region of the counterparty are 
          available to determine LGDMKT, an FDIC-supervised 
          institution may use a conservative estimate when determining 
          LGDMKT, subject to approval by the FDIC.
(E) EEi equals the sum of the expected exposures for all netting sets 
          with the counterparty at revaluation time ti, calculated 
          according to paragraphs (e)(6)(iv)(A) and (e)(6)(v)(A) of this 
          section.
(F) Di equals the risk-free discount factor at time ti, where D0 = 1.
(G) Exp is the exponential function.
(H) The subscript j refers either to a stressed or an unstressed 
          calibration as described in paragraphs (e)(6)(iv) and (v) of 
          this section.

    (iii) Notwithstanding paragraphs (e)(6)(i) and (e)(6)(ii) of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution must use the formulas in 
paragraphs (e)(6)(iii)(A) or (e)(6)(iii)(B) of this section to calculate 
credit spread sensitivities if its VaR model is not based on full 
repricing.
    (A) If the VaR model is based on credit spread sensitivities for 
specific tenors, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate each 
credit spread sensitivity according to the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.033

    (B) If the VaR model uses credit spread sensitivities to parallel 
shifts in credit spreads, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate 
each credit spread sensitivity according to the following formula:

[[Page 323]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.034

    (iv) To calculate the CVAUnstressed measure for purposes of 
paragraph (e)(6)(ii) of this section, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must:
    (A) Use the EEi calculated using the calibration of paragraph 
(d)(3)(vii) of this section, except as provided in Sec. 324.132 
(e)(6)(vi), and
    (B) Use the historical observation period required under 
Sec. 324.205(b)(2).
    (v) To calculate the CVAStressed measure for purposes of paragraph 
(e)(6)(ii) of this section, the FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (A) Use the EEi calculated using the stress calibration in paragraph 
(d)(3)(viii) of this section except as provided in paragraph (e)(6)(vi) 
of this section.
    (B) Calibrate VaR model inputs to historical data from the most 
severe twelve-month stress period contained within the three-year stress 
period used to calculate EEi. The FDIC may require an FDIC-supervised 
institution to use a different period of significant financial stress in 
the calculation of the CVAStressed measure.
    (vi) If an FDIC-supervised institution captures the effect of a 
collateral agreement on EAD using the method described in paragraph 
(d)(5)(ii) of this section, for purposes of paragraph (e)(6)(ii) of this 
section, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate EEi using the 
method in paragraph (d)(5)(ii) of this section and keep that EE constant 
with the maturity equal to the maximum of:
    (A) Half of the longest maturity of a transaction in the netting 
set, and
    (B) The notional weighted average maturity of all transactions in 
the netting set.
    (vii) For purposes of paragraph (e)(6) of this section, the FDIC-
supervised institution's VaR model must capture the basis between the 
spreads of any CDSind that is used as the hedging instrument 
and the hedged counterparty exposure over various time periods, 
including benign and stressed environments. If the VaR model does not 
capture that basis, the FDIC-supervised institution must reflect only 50 
percent of the notional amount of the CDSind hedge in the VaR 
model.
    (viii) If an FDIC-supervised institution uses the current exposure 
methodology described in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section to 
calculate the EAD for any immaterial portfolios of OTC derivative 
contracts, the FDIC-supervised institution must use that EAD as a 
constant EE in the formula for the calculation of CVA with the maturity 
equal to the maximum of:
    (A) Half of the longest maturity of a transaction in the netting 
set, and
    (B) The notional weighted average maturity of all transactions in 
the netting set.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014; 
80 FR 41424, July 15, 2015]



Sec. 324.133  Cleared transactions.

    (a) General requirements. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution that is 
a clearing member client must use the methodologies described in 
paragraph (b) of this section to calculate risk-weighted assets for a 
cleared transaction.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member must 
use the methodologies described in paragraph (c) of this section to 
calculate its risk-weighted assets for cleared transactions and 
paragraph (d) of this section to calculate its risk-weighted assets for 
its default fund contribution to a CCP.

[[Page 324]]

    (b) Clearing member client FDIC-supervised institutions--(1) Risk-
weighted assets for cleared transactions. (i) To determine the risk-
weighted asset amount for a cleared transaction, an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is a clearing member client must multiply the trade 
exposure amount for the cleared transaction, calculated in accordance 
with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, by the risk weight appropriate 
for the cleared transaction, determined in accordance with paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section.
    (ii) A clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution's total 
risk-weighted assets for cleared transactions is the sum of the risk-
weighted asset amounts for all of its cleared transactions.
    (2) Trade exposure amount. (i) For a cleared transaction that is a 
derivative contract or a netting set of derivative contracts, trade 
exposure amount equals the EAD for the derivative contract or netting 
set of derivative contracts calculated using the methodology used to 
calculate EAD for OTC derivative contracts set forth in Sec. 324.132(c) 
or (d), plus the fair value of the collateral posted by the clearing 
member client FDIC-supervised institution and held by the CCP or a 
clearing member in a manner that is not bankruptcy remote. When the 
FDIC-supervised institution calculates EAD for the cleared transaction 
using the methodology in Sec. 324.132(d), EAD equals 
EADunstressed.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction that is a repo-style transaction or 
netting set of repo-style transactions, trade exposure amount equals the 
EAD for the repo-style transaction calculated using the methodology set 
forth in Sec. 324.132(b)(2), (b)(3), or (d), plus the fair value of the 
collateral posted by the clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution and held by the CCP or a clearing member in a manner that is 
not bankruptcy remote. When the FDIC-supervised institution calculates 
EAD for the cleared transaction under Sec. 324.132(d), EAD equals 
EADunstressed.
    (3) Cleared transaction risk weights. (i) For a cleared transaction 
with a QCCP, a clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution must 
apply a risk weight of:
    (A) 2 percent if the collateral posted by the FDIC-supervised 
institution to the QCCP or clearing member is subject to an arrangement 
that prevents any loss to the clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution due to the joint default or a concurrent insolvency, 
liquidation, or receivership proceeding of the clearing member and any 
other clearing member clients of the clearing member; and the clearing 
member client FDIC-supervised institution has conducted sufficient legal 
review to conclude with a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient 
written documentation of that legal review) that in the event of a legal 
challenge (including one resulting from an event of default or from 
liquidation, insolvency or receivership proceedings) the relevant court 
and administrative authorities would find the arrangements to be legal, 
valid, binding and enforceable under the law of the relevant 
jurisdictions.
    (B) 4 percent, if the requirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i)(A) of this 
section are not met.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction with a CCP that is not a QCCP, a 
clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution must apply the risk 
weight applicable to the CCP under Sec. 324.32.
    (4) Collateral. (i) Notwithstanding any other requirement of this 
section, collateral posted by a clearing member client FDIC-supervised 
institution that is held by a custodian (in its capacity as custodian) 
in a manner that is bankruptcy remote from the CCP, the custodian, 
clearing member, and other clearing member clients of the clearing 
member, is not subject to a capital requirement under this section.
    (ii) A clearing member client FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate a risk-weighted asset amount for any collateral provided to a 
CCP, clearing member or a custodian in connection with a cleared 
transaction in accordance with requirements under subparts E or F of 
this part, as applicable.
    (c) Clearing member FDIC-supervised institution--(1) Risk-weighted 
assets for cleared transactions. (i) To determine the risk-weighted 
asset amount for a cleared transaction, a clearing member FDIC-
supervised institution must multiply the trade exposure amount for

[[Page 325]]

the cleared transaction, calculated in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) 
of this section by the risk weight appropriate for the cleared 
transaction, determined in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of this 
section.
    (ii) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's total risk-
weighted assets for cleared transactions is the sum of the risk-weighted 
asset amounts for all of its cleared transactions.
    (2) Trade exposure amount. A clearing member FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate its trade exposure amount for a cleared 
transaction as follows:
    (i) For a cleared transaction that is a derivative contract or a 
netting set of derivative contracts, trade exposure amount equals the 
EAD calculated using the methodology used to calculate EAD for OTC 
derivative contracts set forth in Sec. 324.132(c) or Sec. 324.132(d), 
plus the fair value of the collateral posted by the clearing member 
FDIC-supervised institution and held by the CCP in a manner that is not 
bankruptcy remote. When the clearing member FDIC-supervised institution 
calculates EAD for the cleared transaction using the methodology in 
Sec. 324.132(d), EAD equals EADunstressed.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction that is a repo-style transaction or 
netting set of repo-style transactions, trade exposure amount equals the 
EAD calculated under Secs. 324.132(b)(2), (b)(3), or (d), plus the fair 
value of the collateral posted by the clearing member FDIC-supervised 
institution and held by the CCP in a manner that is not bankruptcy 
remote. When the clearing member FDIC-supervised institution calculates 
EAD for the cleared transaction under Sec. 324.132(d), EAD equals 
EADunstressed.
    (3) Cleared transaction risk weights. (i) A clearing member FDIC-
supervised institution must apply a risk weight of 2 percent to the 
trade exposure amount for a cleared transaction with a QCCP.
    (ii) For a cleared transaction with a CCP that is not a QCCP, a 
clearing member FDIC-supervised institution must apply the risk weight 
applicable to the CCP according to Sec. 324.32.
    (iii) Notwithstanding paragraphs (c)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, 
a clearing member FDIC-supervised institution may apply a risk weight of 
0 percent to the trade exposure amount for a cleared transaction with a 
CCP where the clearing member FDIC-supervised institution is acting as a 
financial intermediary on behalf of a clearing member client, the 
transaction offsets another transaction that satisfies the requirements 
set forth in Sec. 324.3(a), and the clearing member FDIC-supervised 
institution is not obligated to reimburse the clearing member client in 
the event of the CCP default.
    (4) Collateral. (i) Notwithstanding any other requirement of this 
section, collateral posted by a clearing member FDIC-supervised 
institution that is held by a custodian in a manner that is bankruptcy 
remote from the CCP is not subject to a capital requirement under this 
section.
    (ii) A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a 
risk-weighted asset amount for any collateral provided to a CCP, 
clearing member or a custodian in connection with a cleared transaction 
in accordance with requirements under subparts E or F of this part, as 
applicable.
    (d) Default fund contributions--(1) General requirement. A clearing 
member FDIC-supervised institution must determine the risk-weighted 
asset amount for a default fund contribution to a CCP at least 
quarterly, or more frequently if, in the opinion of the FDIC-supervised 
institution or the FDIC, there is a material change in the financial 
condition of the CCP.
    (2) Risk-weighted asset amount for default fund contributions to 
non-qualifying CCPs. A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's 
risk-weighted asset amount for default fund contributions to CCPs that 
are not QCCPs equals the sum of such default fund contributions 
multiplied by 1,250 percent or an amount determined by the FDIC, based 
on factors such as size, structure and membership characteristics of the 
CCP and riskiness of its transactions, in cases where such default fund 
contributions may be unlimited.
    (3) Risk-weighted asset amount for default fund contributions to 
QCCPs. A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted 
asset amount for default fund contributions to

[[Page 326]]

QCCPs equals the sum of its capital requirement, KCM for each 
QCCP, as calculated under the methodology set forth in paragraph 
(d)(3)(i) of this section (Method 1), multiplied by 1,250 percent or 
paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section (Method 2).
    (i) Method 1. The hypothetical capital requirement of a QCCP 
(KCCP) equals:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.035

Where

(A) EBRMi equals the EAD for each transaction cleared through 
          the QCCP by clearing member i, calculated using the 
          methodology used to calculate EAD for OTC derivative contracts 
          set forth in Sec. 324.132(c)(5) and Sec. 324.132.(c)(6) or the 
          methodology used to calculate EAD for repo-style transactions 
          set forth in Sec. 324.132(b)(2) for repo-style transactions, 
          provided that:
(1) For purposes of this section, when calculating the EAD, the FDIC-
          supervised institution may replace the formula provided in 
          Sec. 324.132 (c)(6)(ii) with the following formula:
          [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.047
          
    (2) For option derivative contracts that are cleared transactions, 
the PFE described in Sec. 324.132(c)(5) must be adjusted by multiplying 
the notional principal amount of the derivative contract by the 
appropriate conversion factor in Table 2 to Sec. 324.132 and the 
absolute value of the option's delta, that is, the ratio of the change 
in the value of the derivative contract to the corresponding change in 
the price of the underlying asset.
    (3) For repo-style transactions, when applying Sec. 324.132(b)(2), 
the FDIC-supervised institution must use the methodology in 
Sec. 324.132(b)(2)(ii).
    (B) VMi equals any collateral posted by clearing member i 
to the QCCP that it is entitled to receive from the QCCP but has not yet 
received, and any collateral that the QCCP has actually received from 
clearing member i;
    (C) IMi equals the collateral posted as initial margin by 
clearing member i to the QCCP;
    (D) DFi equals the funded portion of clearing member i's 
default fund contribution that will be applied to reduce the QCCP's loss 
upon a default by clearing member i; and
    (E) RW equals 20 percent, except when the FDIC has determined that a 
higher risk weight is more appropriate based on the specific 
characteristics of the QCCP and its clearing members; and
    (F) Where a QCCP has provided its KCCP, an FDIC-
supervised institution must rely on such disclosed figure instead of 
calculating KCCP under this paragraph (d), unless the FDIC-
supervised institution determines that a more conservative figure is 
appropriate based on the nature, structure, or characteristics of the 
QCCP.

    (ii) For an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member of 
a QCCP with a default fund supported by funded commitments, 
KCM equals:

[[Page 327]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.036


[[Page 328]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.037

Where

(A) DFi equals the FDIC-supervised institution's unfunded 
          commitment to the default fund;
(B) DFCM equals the total of all clearing members' unfunded 
          commitments to the default fund; and
(C) K*CM as defined in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section.
(D) For an FDIC-supervised institution that is a clearing member of a 
          QCCP with a default fund supported by unfunded commitments and 
          that is unable to calculate KCM using the 
          methodology described above in this paragraph (d)(3)(iii), 
          KCM equals:

[[Page 329]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.038

Where

(1) IMi equals the FDIC-supervised institution's initial 
          margin posted to the QCCP;
(2) IMCM = the total of initial margin posted to the QCCP; 
          and
(3) K*CM as defined above in this paragraph (d)(3)(iii).
(iv) Method 2. A clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's risk-
          weighted asset amount for its default fund contribution to a 
          QCCP, RWADF, equals:
RWADF = Min 12.5 * DF; 0.18 * TE

Where

(A) TE equals the FDIC-supervised institution's trade exposure amount to 
          the QCCP calculated according to section 133(c)(2);
(B) DF equals the funded portion of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
          default fund contribution to the QCCP.

    (v) Total risk-weighted assets for default fund contributions. Total 
risk-weighted assets for default fund contributions is the sum of a 
clearing member FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted assets for 
all of its default fund contributions to all CCPs of which the FDIC-
supervised institution is a clearing member.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014; 
80 FR 41425, July 15, 2015]



Sec. 324.134  Guarantees and credit derivatives: PD substitution
and LGD adjustment approaches.

    (a) Scope. (1) This section applies to wholesale exposures for 
which:
    (i) Credit risk is fully covered by an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative; or
    (ii) Credit risk is covered on a pro rata basis (that is, on a basis 
in which the FDIC-supervised institution and the protection provider 
share losses proportionately) by an eligible guarantee or eligible 
credit derivative.
    (2) Wholesale exposures on which there is a tranching of credit risk 
(reflecting at least two different levels of seniority) are 
securitization exposures subject to Secs. 324.141 through 324.145.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution may elect to recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefits of an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative covering an exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section by using the PD substitution approach or the LGD adjustment 
approach in paragraph (c) of this section or, if the transaction 
qualifies, using the double default treatment in Sec. 324.135. An FDIC-
supervised institution's PD and LGD for the hedged exposure may not be 
lower than the PD and LGD floors described in Sec. 324.131(d)(2) and 
(d)(3).
    (4) If multiple eligible guarantees or eligible credit derivatives 
cover a single exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, 
an FDIC-supervised institution may treat the hedged exposure as multiple 
separate exposures each covered by a single eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative and may calculate a separate risk-based 
capital requirement for each separate exposure as described in paragraph 
(a)(3) of this section.
    (5) If a single eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative 
covers multiple hedged wholesale exposures described in paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution must treat each hedged 
exposure as covered by a separate eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative and must calculate a separate risk-based capital requirement 
for each exposure as described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (6) An FDIC-supervised institution must use the same risk parameters 
for calculating ECL as it uses for calculating the risk-based capital 
requirement for the exposure.
    (b) Rules of recognition. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution may 
only recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of eligible 
guarantees and eligible credit derivatives.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution may only recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefits of an eligible credit derivative to hedge an 
exposure that is different from the credit derivative's

[[Page 330]]

reference exposure used for determining the derivative's cash settlement 
value, deliverable obligation, or occurrence of a credit event if:
    (i) The reference exposure ranks pari passu (that is, equally) with 
or is junior to the hedged exposure; and
    (ii) The reference exposure and the hedged exposure are exposures to 
the same legal entity, and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-
acceleration clauses are in place to assure payments under the credit 
derivative are triggered when the obligor fails to pay under the terms 
of the hedged exposure.
    (c) Risk parameters for hedged exposures--(1) PD substitution 
approach--(i) Full coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is greater than or equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure, 
an FDIC-supervised institution may recognize the guarantee or credit 
derivative in determining the FDIC-supervised institution's risk-based 
capital requirement for the hedged exposure by substituting the PD 
associated with the rating grade of the protection provider for the PD 
associated with the rating grade of the obligor in the risk-based 
capital formula applicable to the guarantee or credit derivative in 
Table 1 of Sec. 324.131 and using the appropriate LGD as described in 
paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution determines that full substitution of the protection 
provider's PD leads to an inappropriate degree of risk mitigation, the 
FDIC-supervised institution may substitute a higher PD than that of the 
protection provider.
    (ii) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and P of the guarantee or credit derivative is less than the EAD 
of the hedged exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution must treat the 
hedged exposure as two separate exposures (protected and unprotected) in 
order to recognize the credit risk mitigation benefit of the guarantee 
or credit derivative.
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for the protected exposure under Sec. 324.131, where 
PD is the protection provider's PD, LGD is determined under paragraph 
(c)(1)(iii) of this section, and EAD is P. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution determines that full substitution leads to an inappropriate 
degree of risk mitigation, the FDIC-supervised institution may use a 
higher PD than that of the protection provider.
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for the unprotected exposure under Sec. 324.131, 
where PD is the obligor's PD, LGD is the hedged exposure's LGD (not 
adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative), and EAD is the 
EAD of the original hedged exposure minus P.
    (C) The treatment in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section is 
applicable when the credit risk of a wholesale exposure is covered on a 
partial pro rata basis or when an adjustment is made to the effective 
notional amount of the guarantee or credit derivative under paragraphs 
(d), (e), or (f) of this section.
    (iii) LGD of hedged exposures. The LGD of a hedged exposure under 
the PD substitution approach is equal to:
    (A) The lower of the LGD of the hedged exposure (not adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative) and the LGD of the guarantee 
or credit derivative, if the guarantee or credit derivative provides the 
FDIC-supervised institution with the option to receive immediate payout 
upon triggering the protection; or
    (B) The LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee 
or credit derivative does not provide the FDIC-supervised institution 
with the option to receive immediate payout upon triggering the 
protection.
    (2) LGD adjustment approach--(i) Full coverage. If an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative meets the conditions in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section and the protection amount (P) of 
the guarantee or credit derivative is greater than or equal to the EAD 
of the hedged exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution's risk-based 
capital requirement for the hedged exposure is the greater of:

[[Page 331]]

    (A) The risk-based capital requirement for the exposure as 
calculated under Sec. 324.131, with the LGD of the exposure adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative; or
    (B) The risk-based capital requirement for a direct exposure to the 
protection provider as calculated under Sec. 324.131, using the PD for 
the protection provider, the LGD for the guarantee or credit derivative, 
and an EAD equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure.
    (ii) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged exposure, the FDIC-
supervised institution must treat the hedged exposure as two separate 
exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefit of the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution's risk-based capital requirement 
for the protected exposure would be the greater of:
    (1) The risk-based capital requirement for the protected exposure as 
calculated under Sec. 324.131, with the LGD of the exposure adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative and EAD set equal to P; or
    (2) The risk-based capital requirement for a direct exposure to the 
guarantor as calculated under Sec. 324.131, using the PD for the 
protection provider, the LGD for the guarantee or credit derivative, and 
an EAD set equal to P.
    (B) The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for the unprotected exposure under Sec. 324.131, 
where PD is the obligor's PD, LGD is the hedged exposure's LGD (not 
adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative), and EAD is the 
EAD of the original hedged exposure minus P.
    (3) M of hedged exposures. For purposes of this paragraph (c), the M 
of the hedged exposure is the same as the M of the exposure if it were 
unhedged.
    (d) Maturity mismatch. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution that 
recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative in 
determining its risk-based capital requirement for a hedged exposure 
must adjust the effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant to 
reflect any maturity mismatch between the hedged exposure and the credit 
risk mitigant.
    (2) A maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of a 
credit risk mitigant is less than that of the hedged exposure(s).
    (3) The residual maturity of a hedged exposure is the longest 
possible remaining time before the obligor is scheduled to fulfil its 
obligation on the exposure. If a credit risk mitigant has embedded 
options that may reduce its term, the FDIC-supervised institution 
(protection purchaser) must use the shortest possible residual maturity 
for the credit risk mitigant. If a call is at the discretion of the 
protection provider, the residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant 
is at the first call date. If the call is at the discretion of the FDIC-
supervised institution (protection purchaser), but the terms of the 
arrangement at origination of the credit risk mitigant contain a 
positive incentive for the FDIC-supervised institution to call the 
transaction before contractual maturity, the remaining time to the first 
call date is the residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant.\30\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \30\ For example, where there is a step-up in cost in conjunction 
with a call feature or where the effective cost of protection increases 
over time even if credit quality remains the same or improves, the 
residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant will be the remaining time 
to the first call.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) A credit risk mitigant with a maturity mismatch may be 
recognized only if its original maturity is greater than or equal to one 
year and its residual maturity is greater than three months.
    (5) When a maturity mismatch exists, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must apply the following adjustment to the effective notional amount of 
the credit risk mitigant: Pm = E  x  (t^0.25)/(T^0.25), 
where:
    (i) Pm equals effective notional amount of the credit 
risk mitigant, adjusted for maturity mismatch;
    (ii) E equals effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant;

[[Page 332]]

    (iii) t equals the lesser of T or the residual maturity of the 
credit risk mitigant, expressed in years; and
    (iv) T equals the lesser of five or the residual maturity of the 
hedged exposure, expressed in years.
    (e) Credit derivatives without restructuring as a credit event. If 
an FDIC-supervised institution recognizes an eligible credit derivative 
that does not include as a credit event a restructuring of the hedged 
exposure involving forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest, 
or fees that results in a credit loss event (that is, a charge-off, 
specific provision, or other similar debit to the profit and loss 
account), the FDIC-supervised institution must apply the following 
adjustment to the effective notional amount of the credit derivative: 
Pr = Pm  x  0.60, where:
    (1) Pr equals effective notional amount of the credit 
risk mitigant, adjusted for lack of restructuring event (and maturity 
mismatch, if applicable); and
    (2) Pm equals effective notional amount of the credit 
risk mitigant adjusted for maturity mismatch (if applicable).
    (f) Currency mismatch. (1) If an FDIC-supervised institution 
recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative that is 
denominated in a currency different from that in which the hedged 
exposure is denominated, the FDIC-supervised institution must apply the 
following formula to the effective notional amount of the guarantee or 
credit derivative: Pc = Pr  x  (1^HFX), 
where:
    (i) Pc equals effective notional amount of the credit 
risk mitigant, adjusted for currency mismatch (and maturity mismatch and 
lack of restructuring event, if applicable);
    (ii) Pr equals effective notional amount of the credit 
risk mitigant (adjusted for maturity mismatch and lack of restructuring 
event, if applicable); and
    (iii) HFX equals haircut appropriate for the currency 
mismatch between the credit risk mitigant and the hedged exposure.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must set HFX equal to 
8 percent unless it qualifies for the use of and uses its own internal 
estimates of foreign exchange volatility based on a ten-business-day 
holding period and daily marking-to-market and remargining. An FDIC-
supervised institution qualifies for the use of its own internal 
estimates of foreign exchange volatility if it qualifies for:
    (i) The own-estimates haircuts in Sec. 324.132(b)(2)(iii);
    (ii) The simple VaR methodology in Sec. 324.132(b)(3); or
    (iii) The internal models methodology in Sec. 324.132(d).
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must adjust HFX 
calculated in paragraph (f)(2) of this section upward if the FDIC-
supervised institution revalues the guarantee or credit derivative less 
frequently than once every ten business days using the square root of 
time formula provided in Sec. 324.132(b)(2)(iii)(A)(2).

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Sec. 324.135  Guarantees and credit derivatives: Double default
treatment.

    (a) Eligibility and operational criteria for double default 
treatment. An FDIC-supervised institution may recognize the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of a guarantee or credit derivative covering an 
exposure described in Sec. 324.134(a)(1) by applying the double default 
treatment in this section if all the following criteria are satisfied:
    (1) The hedged exposure is fully covered or covered on a pro rata 
basis by:
    (i) An eligible guarantee issued by an eligible double default 
guarantor; or
    (ii) An eligible credit derivative that meets the requirements of 
Sec. 324.134(b)(2) and that is issued by an eligible double default 
guarantor.
    (2) The guarantee or credit derivative is:
    (i) An uncollateralized guarantee or uncollateralized credit 
derivative (for example, a credit default swap) that provides protection 
with respect to a single reference obligor; or
    (ii) An nth-to-default credit derivative (subject to the 
requirements of Sec. 324.142(m)).
    (3) The hedged exposure is a wholesale exposure (other than a 
sovereign exposure).
    (4) The obligor of the hedged exposure is not:

[[Page 333]]

    (i) An eligible double default guarantor or an affiliate of an 
eligible double default guarantor; or
    (ii) An affiliate of the guarantor.
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution does not recognize any credit 
risk mitigation benefits of the guarantee or credit derivative for the 
hedged exposure other than through application of the double default 
treatment as provided in this section.
    (6) The FDIC-supervised institution has implemented a process (which 
has received the prior, written approval of the FDIC) to detect 
excessive correlation between the creditworthiness of the obligor of the 
hedged exposure and the protection provider. If excessive correlation is 
present, the FDIC-supervised institution may not use the double default 
treatment for the hedged exposure.
    (b) Full coverage. If a transaction meets the criteria in paragraph 
(a) of this section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or 
credit derivative is at least equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure, 
the FDIC-supervised institution may determine its risk-weighted asset 
amount for the hedged exposure under paragraph (e) of this section.
    (c) Partial coverage. If a transaction meets the criteria in 
paragraph (a) of this section and the protection amount (P) of the 
guarantee or credit derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged 
exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution must treat the hedged exposure 
as two separate exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to 
recognize double default treatment on the protected portion of the 
exposure:
    (1) For the protected exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
set EAD equal to P and calculate its risk-weighted asset amount as 
provided in paragraph (e) of this section; and
    (2) For the unprotected exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must set EAD equal to the EAD of the original exposure minus P and then 
calculate its risk-weighted asset amount as provided in Sec. 324.131.
    (d) Mismatches. For any hedged exposure to which an FDIC-supervised 
institution applies double default treatment under this part, the FDIC-
supervised institution must make applicable adjustments to the 
protection amount as required in Secs. 324.134(d), (e), and (f).
    (e) The double default dollar risk-based capital requirement. The 
dollar risk-based capital requirement for a hedged exposure to which an 
FDIC-supervised institution has applied double default treatment is 
KDD multiplied by the EAD of the exposure. KDD is 
calculated according to the following formula: KDD = 
Ko  x  (0.15 + 160  x  PDg),

where:
(1)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.039

(2) PDg equals PD of the protection provider.
(3) PDo equals PD of the obligor of the hedged exposure.
(4) LGDg equals:
(i) The lower of the LGD of the hedged exposure (not adjusted to reflect 
          the guarantee or credit derivative) and the LGD of the 
          guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee or credit 
          derivative provides the FDIC-supervised institution with the 
          option to receive immediate payout on triggering the 
          protection; or
(ii) The LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee or 
          credit derivative does not provide the FDIC-supervised 
          institution with the option to receive immediate payout on 
          triggering the protection; and
(5) ros (asset value correlation of the obligor) is 
          calculated according to the appropriate formula for (R) 
          provided in Table 1 in Sec. 324.131, with PD equal to 
          PDo.
(6) b (maturity adjustment coefficient) is calculated according to the 
          formula for b provided in Table 1 in Sec. 324.131, with PD 
          equal to the lesser of PDo and PDg; and
(7) M (maturity) is the effective maturity of the guarantee or credit 
          derivative, which may not be less than one year or greater 
          than five years.

[[Page 334]]



Sec. 324.136  Unsettled transactions.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
    (1) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) transaction means a securities or 
commodities transaction in which the buyer is obligated to make payment 
only if the seller has made delivery of the securities or commodities 
and the seller is obligated to deliver the securities or commodities 
only if the buyer has made payment.
    (2) Payment-versus-payment (PvP) transaction means a foreign 
exchange transaction in which each counterparty is obligated to make a 
final transfer of one or more currencies only if the other counterparty 
has made a final transfer of one or more currencies.
    (3) A transaction has a normal settlement period if the contractual 
settlement period for the transaction is equal to or less than the 
market standard for the instrument underlying the transaction and equal 
to or less than five business days.
    (4) The positive current exposure of an FDIC-supervised institution 
for a transaction is the difference between the transaction value at the 
agreed settlement price and the current market price of the transaction, 
if the difference results in a credit exposure of the FDIC-supervised 
institution to the counterparty.
    (b) Scope. This section applies to all transactions involving 
securities, foreign exchange instruments, and commodities that have a 
risk of delayed settlement or delivery. This section does not apply to:
    (1) Cleared transactions that are subject to daily marking-to-market 
and daily receipt and payment of variation margin;
    (2) Repo-style transactions, including unsettled repo-style 
transactions (which are addressed in Secs. 324.131 and 324.132);
    (3) One-way cash payments on OTC derivative contracts (which are 
addressed in Secs. 324.131 and 324.132); or
    (4) Transactions with a contractual settlement period that is longer 
than the normal settlement period (which are treated as OTC derivative 
contracts and addressed in Secs. 324.131 and 324.132).
    (c) System-wide failures. In the case of a system-wide failure of a 
settlement or clearing system, or a central counterparty, the FDIC may 
waive risk-based capital requirements for unsettled and failed 
transactions until the situation is rectified.
    (d) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) and payment-versus-payment (PvP) 
transactions. An FDIC-supervised institution must hold risk-based 
capital against any DvP or PvP transaction with a normal settlement 
period if the FDIC-supervised institution's counterparty has not made 
delivery or payment within five business days after the settlement date. 
The FDIC-supervised institution must determine its risk-weighted asset 
amount for such a transaction by multiplying the positive current 
exposure of the transaction for the FDIC-supervised institution by the 
appropriate risk weight in Table 1 to Sec. 324.136.

    Table 1 to Sec. 324.136--Risk Weights for Unsettled DvP and PvP
                              Transactions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                      Risk weight to be
     Number of business days after contractual       applied to positive
                  settlement date                      current exposure
                                                         (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
From 5 to 15.......................................                100
From 16 to 30......................................                625
From 31 to 45......................................                937.5
46 or more.........................................              1,250
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Non-DvP/non-PvP (non-delivery-versus-payment/non-payment-versus-
payment) transactions. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must hold 
risk-based capital against any non-DvP/non-PvP transaction with a normal 
settlement period if the FDIC-supervised institution has delivered cash, 
securities, commodities, or currencies to its counterparty but has not 
received its corresponding deliverables by the end of the same business 
day. The FDIC-supervised institution must continue to hold risk-based 
capital against the transaction until the FDIC-supervised institution 
has received its corresponding deliverables.
    (2) From the business day after the FDIC-supervised institution has 
made its delivery until five business days after the counterparty 
delivery is due, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its 
risk-based capital requirement for the transaction by treating

[[Page 335]]

the current fair value of the deliverables owed to the FDIC-supervised 
institution as a wholesale exposure.
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution may use a 45 percent LGD for the 
transaction rather than estimating LGD for the transaction provided the 
FDIC-supervised institution uses the 45 percent LGD for all transactions 
described in paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) of this section.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution may use a 100 percent risk 
weight for the transaction provided the FDIC-supervised institution uses 
this risk weight for all transactions described in paragraphs (e)(1) and 
(e)(2) of this section.
    (3) If the FDIC-supervised institution has not received its 
deliverables by the fifth business day after the counterparty delivery 
was due, the FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 1,250 percent risk 
weight to the current fair value of the deliverables owed to the FDIC-
supervised institution.
    (f) Total risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions. Total 
risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions is the sum of the risk-
weighted asset amounts of all DvP, PvP, and non-DvP/non-PvP 
transactions.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 80 FR 41425, July 15, 2015]



Secs. 324.137-324.140  [Reserved]

            Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures



Sec. 324.141  Operational criteria for recognizing the transfer
of risk.

    (a) Operational criteria for traditional securitizations. An FDIC-
supervised institution that transfers exposures it has originated or 
purchased to a securitization SPE or other third party in connection 
with a traditional securitization may exclude the exposures from the 
calculation of its risk-weighted assets only if each of the conditions 
in this paragraph (a) is satisfied. An FDIC-supervised institution that 
meets these conditions must hold risk-based capital against any 
securitization exposures it retains in connection with the 
securitization. An FDIC-supervised institution that fails to meet these 
conditions must hold risk-based capital against the transferred 
exposures as if they had not been securitized and must deduct from 
common equity tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from 
the transaction. The conditions are:
    (1) The exposures are not reported on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's consolidated balance sheet under GAAP;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution has transferred to one or more 
third parties credit risk associated with the underlying exposures;
    (3) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls; and
    (4) The securitization does not:
    (i) Include one or more underlying exposures in which the borrower 
is permitted to vary the drawn amount within an agreed limit under a 
line of credit; and
    (ii) Contain an early amortization provision.
    (b) Operational criteria for synthetic securitizations. For 
synthetic securitizations, an FDIC-supervised institution may recognize 
for risk-based capital purposes under this subpart the use of a credit 
risk mitigant to hedge underlying exposures only if each of the 
conditions in this paragraph (b) is satisfied. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that meets these conditions must hold risk-based capital 
against any credit risk of the exposures it retains in connection with 
the synthetic securitization. An FDIC-supervised institution that fails 
to meet these conditions or chooses not to recognize the credit risk 
mitigant for purposes of this section must hold risk-based capital under 
this subpart against the underlying exposures as if they had not been 
synthetically securitized. The conditions are:
    (1) The credit risk mitigant is:
    (i) Financial collateral; or
    (ii) A guarantee that meets all of the requirements of an eligible 
guarantee in Sec. 324.2 except for paragraph (3) of the definition; or
    (iii) A credit derivative that meets all of the requirements of an 
eligible credit derivative except for paragraph (3) of the definition of 
eligible guarantee in Sec. 324.2.

[[Page 336]]

    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution transfers credit risk associated 
with the underlying exposures to third parties, and the terms and 
conditions in the credit risk mitigants employed do not include 
provisions that:
    (i) Allow for the termination of the credit protection due to 
deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures;
    (ii) Require the FDIC-supervised institution to alter or replace the 
underlying exposures to improve the credit quality of the underlying 
exposures;
    (iii) Increase the FDIC-supervised institution's cost of credit 
protection in response to deterioration in the credit quality of the 
underlying exposures;
    (iv) Increase the yield payable to parties other than the FDIC-
supervised institution in response to a deterioration in the credit 
quality of the underlying exposures; or
    (v) Provide for increases in a retained first loss position or 
credit enhancement provided by the FDIC-supervised institution after the 
inception of the securitization;
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution obtains a well-reasoned opinion 
from legal counsel that confirms the enforceability of the credit risk 
mitigant in all relevant jurisdictions; and
    (4) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls.
    (c) Due diligence requirements for securitization exposures. (1) 
Except for exposures that are deducted from common equity tier 1 capital 
and exposures subject to Sec. 324.142(k), if an FDIC-supervised 
institution is unable to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC a 
comprehensive understanding of the features of a securitization exposure 
that would materially affect the performance of the exposure, the FDIC-
supervised institution must assign a 1,250 percent risk weight to the 
securitization exposure. The FDIC-supervised institution's analysis must 
be commensurate with the complexity of the securitization exposure and 
the materiality of the position in relation to regulatory capital 
according to this part.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate its 
comprehensive understanding of a securitization exposure under paragraph 
(c)(1) of this section, for each securitization exposure by:
    (i) Conducting an analysis of the risk characteristics of a 
securitization exposure prior to acquiring the exposure and document 
such analysis within three business days after acquiring the exposure, 
considering:
    (A) Structural features of the securitization that would materially 
impact the performance of the exposure, for example, the contractual 
cash flow waterfall, waterfall-related triggers, credit enhancements, 
liquidity enhancements, fair value triggers, the performance of 
organizations that service the position, and deal-specific definitions 
of default;
    (B) Relevant information regarding the performance of the underlying 
credit exposure(s), for example, the percentage of loans 30, 60, and 90 
days past due; default rates; prepayment rates; loans in foreclosure; 
property types; occupancy; average credit score or other measures of 
creditworthiness; average loan-to-value ratio; and industry and 
geographic diversification data on the underlying exposure(s);
    (C) Relevant market data of the securitization, for example, bid-ask 
spreads, most recent sales price and historical price volatility, 
trading volume, implied market rating, and size, depth and concentration 
level of the market for the securitization; and
    (D) For resecuritization exposures, performance information on the 
underlying securitization exposures, for example, the issuer name and 
credit quality, and the characteristics and performance of the exposures 
underlying the securitization exposures; and
    (ii) On an on-going basis (no less frequently than quarterly), 
evaluating, reviewing, and updating as appropriate the analysis required 
under this section for each securitization exposure.



Sec. 324.142  Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures.

    (a) Hierarchy of approaches. Except as provided elsewhere in this 
section and in Sec. 324.141:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct from common equity 
tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from a 
securitization and must

[[Page 337]]

apply a 1,250 percent risk weight to the portion of any CEIO that does 
not constitute after tax gain-on-sale;
    (2) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction or a 
1,250 percent risk weight under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must apply the supervisory formula approach 
in Sec. 324.143 to the exposure if the FDIC-supervised institution and 
the exposure qualify for the supervisory formula approach according to 
Sec. 324.143(a);
    (3) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction or a 
1,250 percent risk weight under paragraph (a)(1) of this section and 
does not qualify for the supervisory formula approach, the FDIC-
supervised institution may apply the simplified supervisory formula 
approach under Sec. 324.144;
    (4) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction or a 
1,250 percent risk weight under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, does 
not qualify for the supervisory formula approach in Sec. 324.143, and 
the FDIC-supervised institution does not apply the simplified 
supervisory formula approach in Sec. 324.144, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must apply a 1,250 percent risk weight to the exposure; and
    (5) If a securitization exposure is a derivative contract (other 
than protection provided by an FDIC-supervised institution in the form 
of a credit derivative) that has a first priority claim on the cash 
flows from the underlying exposures (notwithstanding amounts due under 
interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other 
similar payments), an FDIC-supervised institution may choose to set the 
risk-weighted asset amount of the exposure equal to the amount of the 
exposure as determined in paragraph (e) of this section rather than 
apply the hierarchy of approaches described in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(4) of this section.
    (b) Total risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures. An 
FDIC-supervised institution's total risk-weighted assets for 
securitization exposures is equal to the sum of its risk-weighted assets 
calculated using Secs. 324.141 through 146.
    (c) Deductions. An FDIC-supervised institution may calculate any 
deduction from common equity tier 1 capital for a securitization 
exposure net of any DTLs associated with the securitization exposure.
    (d) Maximum risk-based capital requirement. Except as provided in 
Sec. 324.141(c), unless one or more underlying exposures does not meet 
the definition of a wholesale, retail, securitization, or equity 
exposure, the total risk-based capital requirement for all 
securitization exposures held by a single FDIC-supervised institution 
associated with a single securitization (excluding any risk-based 
capital requirements that relate to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
gain-on-sale or CEIOs associated with the securitization) may not exceed 
the sum of:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's total risk-based capital 
requirement for the underlying exposures calculated under this subpart 
as if the FDIC-supervised institution directly held the underlying 
exposures; and
    (2) The total ECL of the underlying exposures calculated under this 
subpart.
    (e) Exposure amount of a securitization exposure. (1) The exposure 
amount of an on-balance sheet securitization exposure that is not a 
repo-style transaction, eligible margin loan, OTC derivative contract, 
or cleared transaction is the FDIC-supervised institution's carrying 
value.
    (2) Except as provided in paragraph (m) of this section, the 
exposure amount of an off-balance sheet securitization exposure that is 
not an OTC derivative contract (other than a credit derivative), repo-
style transaction, eligible margin loan, or cleared transaction (other 
than a credit derivative) is the notional amount of the exposure. For an 
off-balance-sheet securitization exposure to an ABCP program, such as an 
eligible ABCP liquidity facility, the notional amount may be reduced to 
the maximum potential amount that the FDIC-supervised institution could 
be required to fund given the ABCP program's current underlying assets 
(calculated without regard to the current credit quality of those 
assets).
    (3) The exposure amount of a securitization exposure that is a repo-
style transaction, eligible margin loan, or OTC derivative contract 
(other than

[[Page 338]]

a credit derivative) or cleared transaction (other than a credit 
derivative) is the EAD of the exposure as calculated in 
Sec. 324.132 or Sec. 324.133.
    (f) Overlapping exposures. If an FDIC-supervised institution has 
multiple securitization exposures that provide duplicative coverage of 
the underlying exposures of a securitization (such as when an FDIC-
supervised institution provides a program-wide credit enhancement and 
multiple pool-specific liquidity facilities to an ABCP program), the 
FDIC-supervised institution is not required to hold duplicative risk-
based capital against the overlapping position. Instead, the FDIC-
supervised institution may assign to the overlapping securitization 
exposure the applicable risk-based capital treatment under this subpart 
that results in the highest risk-based capital requirement.
    (g) Securitizations of non-IRB exposures. Except as provided in 
Sec. 324.141(c), if an FDIC-supervised institution has a securitization 
exposure where any underlying exposure is not a wholesale exposure, 
retail exposure, securitization exposure, or equity exposure, the FDIC-
supervised institution:
    (1) Must deduct from common equity tier 1 capital any after-tax 
gain-on-sale resulting from the securitization and apply a 1,250 percent 
risk weight to the portion of any CEIO that does not constitute gain-on-
sale, if the FDIC-supervised institution is an originating FDIC-
supervised institution;
    (2) May apply the simplified supervisory formula approach in 
Sec. 324.144 to the exposure, if the securitization exposure does not 
require deduction or a 1,250 percent risk weight under paragraph (g)(1) 
of this section;
    (3) Must assign a 1,250 percent risk weight to the exposure if the 
securitization exposure does not require deduction or a 1,250 percent 
risk weight under paragraph (g)(1) of this section, does not qualify for 
the supervisory formula approach in Sec. 324.143, and the FDIC-
supervised institution does not apply the simplified supervisory formula 
approach in Sec. 324.144 to the exposure.
    (h) Implicit support. If an FDIC-supervised institution provides 
support to a securitization in excess of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's contractual obligation to provide credit support to the 
securitization (implicit support):
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a risk-weighted 
asset amount for underlying exposures associated with the securitization 
as if the exposures had not been securitized and must deduct from common 
equity tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from the 
securitization; and
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must disclose publicly:
    (i) That it has provided implicit support to the securitization; and
    (ii) The regulatory capital impact to the FDIC-supervised 
institution of providing such implicit support.
    (i) Undrawn portion of a servicer cash advance facility. (1) 
Notwithstanding any other provision of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is a servicer under an eligible servicer cash advance 
facility is not required to hold risk-based capital against potential 
future cash advance payments that it may be required to provide under 
the contract governing the facility.
    (2) For an FDIC-supervised institution that acts as a servicer, the 
exposure amount for a servicer cash advance facility that is not an 
eligible servicer cash advance facility is equal to the amount of all 
potential future cash advance payments that the FDIC-supervised 
institution may be contractually required to provide during the 
subsequent 12 month period under the contract governing the facility.
    (j) Interest-only mortgage-backed securities. Regardless of any 
other provisions in this part, the risk weight for a non-credit-
enhancing interest-only mortgage-backed security may not be less than 
100 percent.
    (k) Small-business loans and leases on personal property transferred 
with recourse. (1) Notwithstanding any other provisions of this subpart 
E, an FDIC-supervised institution that has transferred small-business 
loans and leases on personal property (small-business obligations) with 
recourse must include in risk-weighted assets only the contractual 
amount of retained recourse if all the following conditions are met:
    (i) The transaction is a sale under GAAP.

[[Page 339]]

    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution establishes and maintains, 
pursuant to GAAP, a non-capital reserve sufficient to meet the FDIC-
supervised institution's reasonably estimated liability under the 
recourse arrangement.
    (iii) The loans and leases are to businesses that meet the criteria 
for a small-business concern established by the Small Business 
Administration under section 3(a) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 
632 et seq.); and
    (iv) The FDIC-supervised institution is well-capitalized, as defined 
in subpart H of this part. For purposes of determining whether an FDIC-
supervised institution is well capitalized for purposes of this 
paragraph (k), the FDIC-supervised institution's capital ratios must be 
calculated without regard to the capital treatment for transfers of 
small-business obligations with recourse specified in paragraph (k)(1) 
of this section.
    (2) The total outstanding amount of recourse retained by an FDIC-
supervised institution on transfers of small-business obligations 
subject to paragraph (k)(1) of this section cannot exceed 15 percent of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's total capital.
    (3) If an FDIC-supervised institution ceases to be well capitalized 
or exceeds the 15 percent capital limitation in paragraph (k)(2) of this 
section, the preferential capital treatment specified in paragraph 
(k)(1) of this section will continue to apply to any transfers of small-
business obligations with recourse that occurred during the time that 
the FDIC-supervised institution was well capitalized and did not exceed 
the capital limit.
    (4) The risk-based capital ratios of an FDIC-supervised institution 
must be calculated without regard to the capital treatment for transfers 
of small-business obligations with recourse specified in paragraph 
(k)(1) of this section.
    (l) Nth-to-default credit derivatives-- (1) Protection provider. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must determine a risk weight using the 
supervisory formula approach (SFA) pursuant to Sec. 324.143 or the 
simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA) pursuant to Sec. 324.144 
for an nth-to-default credit derivative in accordance with this 
paragraph (l). In the case of credit protection sold, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must determine its exposure in the nth-to-default 
credit derivative as the largest notional amount of all the underlying 
exposures.
    (2) For purposes of determining the risk weight for an 
nth-to-default credit derivative using the SFA or the SSFA, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the attachment point and 
detachment point of its exposure as follows:
    (i) The attachment point (parameter A) is the ratio of the sum of 
the notional amounts of all underlying exposures that are subordinated 
to the FDIC-supervised institution's exposure to the total notional 
amount of all underlying exposures. For purposes of the SSFA, parameter 
A is expressed as a decimal value between zero and one. For purposes of 
using the SFA to calculate the risk weight for its exposure in an 
nth-to-default credit derivative, parameter A must be set 
equal to the credit enhancement level (L) input to the SFA formula. In 
the case of a first-to-default credit derivative, there are no 
underlying exposures that are subordinated to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposure. In the case of a second-or-subsequent-to-default 
credit derivative, the smallest (n-1) risk-weighted asset amounts of the 
underlying exposure(s) are subordinated to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposure.
    (ii) The detachment point (parameter D) equals the sum of parameter 
A plus the ratio of the notional amount of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposure in the nth-to-default credit 
derivative to the total notional amount of all underlying exposures. For 
purposes of the SSFA, parameter W is expressed as a decimal value 
between zero and one. For purposes of the SFA, parameter D must be set 
to equal L plus the thickness of tranche T input to the SFA formula.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution that does not use the SFA or the 
SSFA to determine a risk weight for its exposure in an nth-
to-default credit derivative must assign a risk weight of 1,250 percent 
to the exposure.
    (4) Protection purchaser--(i) First-to-default credit derivatives. 
An FDIC-supervised institution that obtains credit

[[Page 340]]

protection on a group of underlying exposures through a first-to-default 
credit derivative that meets the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.134(b) 
must determine its risk-based capital requirement under this subpart for 
the underlying exposures as if the FDIC-supervised institution 
synthetically securitized the underlying exposure with the lowest risk-
based capital requirement and had obtained no credit risk mitigant on 
the other underlying exposures. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate a risk-based capital requirement for counterparty credit risk 
according to Sec. 324.132 for a first-to-default credit derivative that 
does not meet the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.134(b).
    (ii) Second-or-subsequent-to-default credit derivatives. (A) An 
FDIC-supervised institution that obtains credit protection on a group of 
underlying exposures through a nth-to-default credit 
derivative that meets the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.134(b) (other 
than a first-to-default credit derivative) may recognize the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of the derivative only if:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution also has obtained credit 
protection on the same underlying exposures in the form of first-
through-(n-1)-to-default credit derivatives; or
    (2) If n-1 of the underlying exposures have already defaulted.
    (B) If an FDIC-supervised institution satisfies the requirements of 
paragraph (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must determine its risk-based capital requirement for the underlying 
exposures as if the bank had only synthetically securitized the 
underlying exposure with the nth smallest risk-based capital 
requirement and had obtained no credit risk mitigant on the other 
underlying exposures.
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a risk-based 
capital requirement for counterparty credit risk according to 
Sec. 324.132 for a nth-to-default credit derivative that does not meet 
the rules of recognition of Sec. 324.134(b).
    (m) Guarantees and credit derivatives other than nth-to-default 
credit derivatives--(1) Protection provider. For a guarantee or credit 
derivative (other than an nth-to-default credit derivative) provided by 
an FDIC-supervised institution that covers the full amount or a pro rata 
share of a securitization exposure's principal and interest, the FDIC-
supervised institution must risk weight the guarantee or credit 
derivative as if it holds the portion of the reference exposure covered 
by the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (2) Protection purchaser. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that 
purchases an OTC credit derivative (other than an nth-to-
default credit derivative) that is recognized under Sec. 324.145 as a 
credit risk mitigant (including via recognized collateral) is not 
required to compute a separate counterparty credit risk capital 
requirement under Sec. 324.131 in accordance with Sec. 324.132(c)(3).
    (ii) If an FDIC-supervised institution cannot, or chooses not to, 
recognize a purchased credit derivative as a credit risk mitigant under 
Sec. 324.145, the FDIC-supervised institution must determine the 
exposure amount of the credit derivative under Sec. 324.132(c).
    (A) If the FDIC-supervised institution purchases credit protection 
from a counterparty that is not a securitization SPE, the FDIC-
supervised institution must determine the risk weight for the exposure 
according to Sec. 324.131.
    (B) If the FDIC-supervised institution purchases the credit 
protection from a counterparty that is a securitization SPE, the FDIC-
supervised institution must determine the risk weight for the exposure 
according to this section, including paragraph (a)(5) of this section 
for a credit derivative that has a first priority claim on the cash 
flows from the underlying exposures of the securitization SPE 
(notwithstanding amounts due under interest rate or currency derivative 
contracts, fees due, or other similar payments).

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.143  Supervisory formula approach (SFA).

    (a) Eligibility requirements. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
use the SFA to determine its risk-weighted asset amount for a 
securitization exposure if the FDIC-supervised institution can calculate 
on an ongoing basis each of the SFA parameters in paragraph (e) of this 
section.

[[Page 341]]

    (b) Mechanics. The risk-weighted asset amount for a securitization 
exposure equals its SFA risk-based capital requirement as calculated 
under paragraph (c) and (d) of this section, multiplied by 12.5.
    (c) The SFA risk-based capital requirement. (1) If KIRB 
is greater than or equal to L + T, an exposure's SFA risk-based capital 
requirement equals the exposure amount.
    (2) If KIRB is less than or equal to L, an exposure's SFA 
risk-based capital requirement is UE multiplied by TP multiplied by the 
greater of:
    (i) F . T (where F is 0.016 for all securitization exposures); or
    (ii) S[L + T] ^ S[L].
    (3) If KIRB is greater than L and less than L + T, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 1,250 percent risk weight to an 
amount equal to UE . TP . (KIRB ^ L), and the exposure's SFA 
risk-based capital requirement is UE multiplied by TP multiplied by the 
greater of:
    (i) F . (T ^ (KIRB ^ L)) (where F is 0.016 for all other 
securitization exposures); or
    (ii) S[L + T] ^ S[KIRB].
    (d) The supervisory formula:

[[Page 342]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.040

    (e) SFA parameters. For purposes of the calculations in paragraphs 
(c) and (d) of this section:
    (1) Amount of the underlying exposures (UE). UE is the EAD of any 
underlying exposures that are wholesale and retail exposures (including 
the amount of any funded spread accounts, cash collateral accounts, and 
other similar funded credit enhancements) plus the amount of any 
underlying exposures that are securitization exposures (as defined in 
Sec. 324.142(e)) plus the adjusted carrying value of any underlying 
exposures that are equity exposures (as defined in Sec. 324.151(b)).
    (2) Tranche percentage (TP). TP is the ratio of the amount of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's securitization exposure to the amount of 
the tranche that contains the securitization exposure.
    (3) Capital requirement on underlying exposures (KIRB). (i) 
KIRB is the ratio of:
    (A) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements for the 
underlying exposures plus the expected credit losses of the underlying 
exposures (as determined under this subpart E as if the

[[Page 343]]

underlying exposures were directly held by the FDIC-supervised 
institution); to
    (B) UE.
    (ii) The calculation of KIRB must reflect the effects of 
any credit risk mitigant applied to the underlying exposures (either to 
an individual underlying exposure, to a group of underlying exposures, 
or to all of the underlying exposures).
    (iii) All assets related to the securitization are treated as 
underlying exposures, including assets in a reserve account (such as a 
cash collateral account).
    (4) Credit enhancement level (L). (i) L is the ratio of:
    (A) The amount of all securitization exposures subordinated to the 
tranche that contains the FDIC-supervised institution's securitization 
exposure; to
    (B) UE.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must determine L before 
considering the effects of any tranche-specific credit enhancements.
    (iii) Any gain-on-sale or CEIO associated with the securitization 
may not be included in L.
    (iv) Any reserve account funded by accumulated cash flows from the 
underlying exposures that is subordinated to the tranche that contains 
the FDIC-supervised institution's securitization exposure may be 
included in the numerator and denominator of L to the extent cash has 
accumulated in the account. Unfunded reserve accounts (that is, reserve 
accounts that are to be funded from future cash flows from the 
underlying exposures) may not be included in the calculation of L.
    (v) In some cases, the purchase price of receivables will reflect a 
discount that provides credit enhancement (for example, first loss 
protection) for all or certain tranches of the securitization. When this 
arises, L should be calculated inclusive of this discount if the 
discount provides credit enhancement for the securitization exposure.
    (5) Thickness of tranche (T). T is the ratio of:
    (i) The amount of the tranche that contains the FDIC-supervised 
institution's securitization exposure; to
    (ii) UE.
    (6) Effective number of exposures (N). (i) Unless the FDIC-
supervised institution elects to use the formula provided in paragraph 
(f) of this section,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.041

where EADi represents the EAD associated with the 
          ith instrument in the underlying exposures.

    (ii) Multiple exposures to one obligor must be treated as a single 
underlying exposure.
    (iii) In the case of a resecuritization, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must treat each underlying exposure as a single underlying 
exposure and must not look through to the originally securitized 
underlying exposures.
    (7) Exposure-weighted average loss given default (EWALGD). EWALGD is 
calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.042


[[Page 344]]


where LGDi represents the average LGD associated with all 
          exposures to the ith obligor. In the case of a 
          resecuritization, an LGD of 100 percent must be assumed for 
          the underlying exposures that are themselves securitization 
          exposures.

    (f) Simplified method for computing N and EWALGD. (1) If all 
underlying exposures of a securitization are retail exposures, an FDIC-
supervised institution may apply the SFA using the following 
simplifications:
    (i) h = 0; and
    (ii) v = 0.
    (2) Under the conditions in Secs. 324.143(f)(3) and (f)(4), an FDIC-
supervised institution may employ a simplified method for calculating N 
and EWALGD.
    (3) If C1 is no more than 0.03, an FDIC-supervised 
institution may set EWALGD = 0.50 if none of the underlying exposures is 
a securitization exposure, or may set EWALGD = 1 if one or more of the 
underlying exposures is a securitization exposure, and may set N equal 
to the following amount:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.043

where:
(i) Cm is the ratio of the sum of the amounts of the `m' 
          largest underlying exposures to UE; and
(ii) The level of m is to be selected by the FDIC-supervised 
          institution.

    (4) Alternatively, if only C1 is available and 
C1 is no more than 0.03, the FDIC-supervised institution may 
set EWALGD = 0.50 if none of the underlying exposures is a 
securitization exposure, or may set EWALGD = 1 if one or more of the 
underlying exposures is a securitization exposure and may set N = 1/
C1.



Sec. 324.144  Simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA).

    (a) General requirements for the SSFA. To use the SSFA to determine 
the risk weight for a securitization exposure, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must have data that enables it to assign accurately the 
parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section. Data used to 
assign the parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section must be 
the most currently available data; if the contracts governing the 
underlying exposures of the securitization require payments on a monthly 
or quarterly basis, the data used to assign the parameters described in 
paragraph (b) of this section must be no more than 91 calendar days old. 
An FDIC-supervised institution that does not have the appropriate data 
to assign the parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section must 
assign a risk weight of 1,250 percent to the exposure.
    (b) SSFA parameters. To calculate the risk weight for a 
securitization exposure using the SSFA, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must have accurate information on the following five inputs to the SSFA 
calculation:
    (1) KG is the weighted-average (with unpaid principal 
used as the weight for each exposure) total capital requirement of the 
underlying exposures calculated using subpart D of this part. 
KG is expressed as a decimal value between zero and one (that 
is, an average risk weight of 100 percent represents a value of 
KG equal to 0.08).
    (2) Parameter W is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 
one. Parameter W is the ratio of the sum of the dollar amounts of any 
underlying exposures of the securitization that meet any of the criteria 
as set forth in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (vi) of this section to the 
balance, measured in dollars, of underlying exposures:
    (i) Ninety days or more past due;
    (ii) Subject to a bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding;
    (iii) In the process of foreclosure;
    (iv) Held as real estate owned;
    (v) Has contractually deferred payments for 90 days or more, other 
than

[[Page 345]]

principal or interest payments deferred on:
    (A) Federally-guaranteed student loans, in accordance with the terms 
of those guarantee programs; or
    (B) Consumer loans, including non-federally-guaranteed student 
loans, provided that such payments are deferred pursuant to provisions 
included in the contract at the time funds are disbursed that provide 
for period(s) of deferral that are not initiated based on changes in the 
creditworthiness of the borrower; or
    (vi) Is in default.
    (3) Parameter A is the attachment point for the exposure, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses will first be allocated 
to the exposure. Except as provided in Sec. 324.142(l) for nth-to-
default credit derivatives, parameter A equals the ratio of the current 
dollar amount of underlying exposures that are subordinated to the 
exposure of the FDIC-supervised institution to the current dollar amount 
of underlying exposures. Any reserve account funded by the accumulated 
cash flows from the underlying exposures that is subordinated to the 
FDIC-supervised institution's securitization exposure may be included in 
the calculation of parameter A to the extent that cash is present in the 
account. Parameter A is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 
one.
    (4) Parameter D is the detachment point for the exposure, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses of principal allocated 
to the exposure would result in a total loss of principal. Except as 
provided in Sec. 324.142(l) for nth-to-default credit 
derivatives, parameter D equals parameter A plus the ratio of the 
current dollar amount of the securitization exposures that are pari 
passu with the exposure (that is, have equal seniority with respect to 
credit risk) to the current dollar amount of the underlying exposures. 
Parameter D is expressed as a decimal value between zero and one.
    (5) A supervisory calibration parameter, p, is equal to 0.5 for 
securitization exposures that are not resecuritization exposures and 
equal to 1.5 for resecuritization exposures.
    (c) Mechanics of the SSFA. KG and W are used to calculate 
KA, the augmented value of KG, which reflects the 
observed credit quality of the underlying exposures. KA is 
defined in paragraph (d) of this section. The values of parameters A and 
D, relative to KA determine the risk weight assigned to a 
securitization exposure as described in paragraph (d) of this section. 
The risk weight assigned to a securitization exposure, or portion of a 
securitization exposure, as appropriate, is the larger of the risk 
weight determined in accordance with this paragraph (c), paragraph (d) 
of this section, and a risk weight of 20 percent.
    (1) When the detachment point, parameter D, for a securitization 
exposure is less than or equal to KA, the exposure must be 
assigned a risk weight of 1,250 percent;
    (2) When the attachment point, parameter A, for a securitization 
exposure is greater than or equal to KA, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the risk weight in accordance with paragraph 
(d) of this section;
    (3) When A is less than KA and D is greater than 
KA, the risk weight is a weighted-average of 1,250 percent 
and 1,250 percent times KSSFA calculated in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section. For the purpose of this weighted-average 
calculation:

[[Page 346]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.044


[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.145  Recognition of credit risk mitigants for securitization
exposures.

    (a) General. An originating FDIC-supervised institution that has 
obtained a credit risk mitigant to hedge its securitization exposure to 
a synthetic or traditional securitization that satisfies the operational 
criteria in Sec. 324.141 may recognize the credit risk mitigant, but 
only as provided in this section. An investing FDIC-supervised 
institution that has obtained a credit risk mitigant to hedge a 
securitization exposure may recognize the credit risk

[[Page 347]]

mitigant, but only as provided in this section.
    (b) Collateral--(1) Rules of recognition. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may recognize financial collateral in determining the FDIC-
supervised institution's risk-weighted asset amount for a securitization 
exposure (other than a repo-style transaction, an eligible margin loan, 
or an OTC derivative contract for which the FDIC-supervised institution 
has reflected collateral in its determination of exposure amount under 
Sec. 324.132) as follows. The FDIC-supervised institution's risk-
weighted asset amount for the collateralized securitization exposure is 
equal to the risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure 
as calculated under the SSFA in Sec. 324.144 or under the SFA in 
Sec. 324.143 multiplied by the ratio of adjusted exposure amount (SE*) 
to original exposure amount (SE), where:
    (i) SE* equals max 0, [SE ^ C  x  (1^ Hs ^ 
Hfx)] ;
    (ii) SE equals the amount of the securitization exposure calculated 
under Sec. 324.142(e);
    (iii) C equals the current fair value of the collateral;
    (iv) Hs equals the haircut appropriate to the collateral 
type; and
    (v) Hfx equals the haircut appropriate for any currency 
mismatch between the collateral and the exposure.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.048

    (3) Standard supervisory haircuts. Unless an FDIC-supervised 
institution qualifies for use of and uses own-estimates haircuts in 
paragraph (b)(4) of this section:
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must use the collateral type 
haircuts (Hs) in Table 1 to Sec. 324.132 of this subpart;
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must use a currency mismatch 
haircut (Hfx) of 8 percent if the exposure and the collateral 
are denominated in different currencies;
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must multiply the supervisory 
haircuts obtained in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section by 
the square root of 6.5 (which equals 2.549510); and
    (iv) An FDIC-supervised institution must adjust the supervisory 
haircuts upward on the basis of a holding period longer than 65 business 
days where and as appropriate to take into account the illiquidity of 
the collateral.
    (4) Own estimates for haircuts. With the prior written approval of 
the FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may calculate haircuts using 
its own internal estimates of market price volatility and foreign 
exchange volatility, subject to Sec. 324.132(b)(2)(iii). The minimum 
holding period (TM) for securitization exposures is 65 
business days.
    (c) Guarantees and credit derivatives--(1) Limitations on 
recognition. An FDIC-supervised institution may only recognize an 
eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative provided by an eligible 
guarantor in determining the FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted 
asset amount for a securitization exposure.
    (2) ECL for securitization exposures. When an FDIC-supervised 
institution recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative provided by an eligible guarantor in determining the FDIC-
supervised institution's risk-weighted asset amount for a securitization 
exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution must also:
    (i) Calculate ECL for the protected portion of the exposure using 
the same

[[Page 348]]

risk parameters that it uses for calculating the risk-weighted asset 
amount of the exposure as described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section; 
and
    (ii) Add the exposure's ECL to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
total ECL.
    (3) Rules of recognition. An FDIC-supervised institution may 
recognize an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative provided 
by an eligible guarantor in determining the FDIC-supervised 
institution's risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure 
as follows:
    (i) Full coverage. If the protection amount of the eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative equals or exceeds the amount of 
the securitization exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution may set the 
risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure equal to the 
risk-weighted asset amount for a direct exposure to the eligible 
guarantor (as determined in the wholesale risk weight function described 
in Sec. 324.131), using the FDIC-supervised institution's PD for the 
guarantor, the FDIC-supervised institution's LGD for the guarantee or 
credit derivative, and an EAD equal to the amount of the securitization 
exposure (as determined in Sec. 324.142(e)).
    (ii) Partial coverage. If the protection amount of the eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative is less than the amount of the 
securitization exposure, the FDIC-supervised institution may set the 
risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure equal to the 
sum of:
    (A) Covered portion. The risk-weighted asset amount for a direct 
exposure to the eligible guarantor (as determined in the wholesale risk 
weight function described in Sec. 324.131), using the FDIC-supervised 
institution's PD for the guarantor, the FDIC-supervised institution's 
LGD for the guarantee or credit derivative, and an EAD equal to the 
protection amount of the credit risk mitigant; and
    (B) Uncovered portion. (1) 1.0 minus the ratio of the protection 
amount of the eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative to the 
amount of the securitization exposure); multiplied by
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure 
without the credit risk mitigant (as determined in Secs. 324.142 through 
324.146).
    (4) Mismatches. The FDIC-supervised institution must make applicable 
adjustments to the protection amount as required in Sec. 324.134(d), 
(e), and (f) for any hedged securitization exposure and any more senior 
securitization exposure that benefits from the hedge. In the context of 
a synthetic securitization, when an eligible guarantee or eligible 
credit derivative covers multiple hedged exposures that have different 
residual maturities, the FDIC-supervised institution must use the 
longest residual maturity of any of the hedged exposures as the residual 
maturity of all the hedged exposures.



Secs. 324.146-324.150  [Reserved]

                Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures



Sec. 324.151  Introduction and exposure measurement.

    (a) General. (1) To calculate its risk-weighted asset amounts for 
equity exposures that are not equity exposures to investment funds, an 
FDIC-supervised institution may apply either the Simple Risk Weight 
Approach (SRWA) in Sec. 324.152 or, if it qualifies to do so, the 
Internal Models Approach (IMA) in Sec. 324.153. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must use the look-through approaches provided in 
Sec. 324.154 to calculate its risk-weighted asset amounts for equity 
exposures to investment funds.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must treat an investment in a 
separate account (as defined in Sec. 324.2), as if it were an equity 
exposure to an investment fund as provided in Sec. 324.154.
    (3) Stable value protection. (i) Stable value protection means a 
contract where the provider of the contract is obligated to pay:
    (A) The policy owner of a separate account an amount equal to the 
shortfall between the fair value and cost basis of the separate account 
when the policy owner of the separate account surrenders the policy, or
    (B) The beneficiary of the contract an amount equal to the shortfall 
between the fair value and book value of a specified portfolio of 
assets.

[[Page 349]]

    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that purchases stable value 
protection on its investment in a separate account must treat the 
portion of the carrying value of its investment in the separate account 
attributable to the stable value protection as an exposure to the 
provider of the protection and the remaining portion of the carrying 
value of its separate account as an equity exposure to an investment 
fund.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution that provides stable value 
protection must treat the exposure as an equity derivative with an 
adjusted carrying value determined as the sum of Sec. 324.151(b)(1) and 
(2).
    (b) Adjusted carrying value. For purposes of this subpart, the 
adjusted carrying value of an equity exposure is:
    (1) For the on-balance sheet component of an equity exposure, the 
FDIC-supervised institution's carrying value of the exposure;
    (2) For the off-balance sheet component of an equity exposure, the 
effective notional principal amount of the exposure, the size of which 
is equivalent to a hypothetical on-balance sheet position in the 
underlying equity instrument that would evidence the same change in fair 
value (measured in dollars) for a given small change in the price of the 
underlying equity instrument, minus the adjusted carrying value of the 
on-balance sheet component of the exposure as calculated in paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section.
    (3) For unfunded equity commitments that are unconditional, the 
effective notional principal amount is the notional amount of the 
commitment. For unfunded equity commitments that are conditional, the 
effective notional principal amount is the FDIC-supervised institution's 
best estimate of the amount that would be funded under economic downturn 
conditions.



Sec. 324.152  Simple risk weight approach (SRWA).

    (a) General. Under the SRWA, an FDIC-supervised institution's 
aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for its equity exposures is equal 
to the sum of the risk-weighted asset amounts for each of the FDIC-
supervised institution's individual equity exposures (other than equity 
exposures to an investment fund) as determined in this section and the 
risk-weighted asset amounts for each of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's individual equity exposures to an investment fund as 
determined in Sec. 324.154.
    (b) SRWA computation for individual equity exposures. An FDIC-
supervised institution must determine the risk-weighted asset amount for 
an individual equity exposure (other than an equity exposure to an 
investment fund) by multiplying the adjusted carrying value of the 
equity exposure or the effective portion and ineffective portion of a 
hedge pair (as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) by the lowest 
applicable risk weight in this section.
    (1) Zero percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to 
an entity whose credit exposures are exempt from the 0.03 percent PD 
floor in Sec. 324.131(d)(2) is assigned a zero percent risk weight.
    (2) 20 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to a 
Federal Home Loan Bank or the Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation 
(Farmer Mac) is assigned a 20 percent risk weight.
    (3) 100 percent risk weight equity exposures. The following equity 
exposures are assigned a 100 percent risk weight:
    (i) Community development equity exposures. An equity exposure that 
qualifies as a community development investment under section 24 
(Eleventh) of the National Bank Act, excluding equity exposures to an 
unconsolidated small business investment company and equity exposures 
held through a consolidated small business investment company described 
in section 302 of the Small Business Investment Act.
    (ii) Effective portion of hedge pairs. The effective portion of a 
hedge pair.
    (iii) Non-significant equity exposures. Equity exposures, excluding 
significant investments in the capital of an unconsolidated institution 
in the form of common stock and exposures to an investment firm that 
would meet the definition of a traditional securitization were it not 
for the FDIC's application of paragraph (8) of that definition in 
Sec. 324.2 and has greater than immaterial

[[Page 350]]

leverage, to the extent that the aggregate adjusted carrying value of 
the exposures does not exceed 10 percent of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's total capital.
    (A) To compute the aggregate adjusted carrying value of an FDIC-
supervised institution's equity exposures for purposes of this section, 
the FDIC-supervised institution may exclude equity exposures described 
in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3)(i), and (b)(3)(ii) of this section, 
the equity exposure in a hedge pair with the smaller adjusted carrying 
value, and a proportion of each equity exposure to an investment fund 
equal to the proportion of the assets of the investment fund that are 
not equity exposures or that meet the criterion of paragraph (b)(3)(i) 
of this section. If an FDIC-supervised institution does not know the 
actual holdings of the investment fund, the FDIC-supervised institution 
may calculate the proportion of the assets of the fund that are not 
equity exposures based on the terms of the prospectus, partnership 
agreement, or similar contract that defines the fund's permissible 
investments. If the sum of the investment limits for all exposure 
classes within the fund exceeds 100 percent, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must assume for purposes of this section that the investment 
fund invests to the maximum extent possible in equity exposures.
    (B) When determining which of an FDIC-supervised institution's 
equity exposures qualifies for a 100 percent risk weight under this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution first must include equity 
exposures to unconsolidated small business investment companies or held 
through consolidated small business investment companies described in 
section 302 of the Small Business Investment Act, then must include 
publicly traded equity exposures (including those held indirectly 
through investment funds), and then must include non-publicly traded 
equity exposures (including those held indirectly through investment 
funds).
    (4) 250 percent risk weight equity exposures. Significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in 
the form of common stock that are not deducted from capital pursuant to 
Sec. 324.22(b)(4) are assigned a 250 percent risk weight.
    (5) 300 percent risk weight equity exposures. A publicly traded 
equity exposure (other than an equity exposure described in paragraph 
(b)(6) of this section and including the ineffective portion of a hedge 
pair) is assigned a 300 percent risk weight.
    (6) 400 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure 
(other than an equity exposure described in paragraph (b)(6) of this 
section) that is not publicly traded is assigned a 400 percent risk 
weight.
    (7) 600 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to 
an investment firm that:
    (i) Would meet the definition of a traditional securitization were 
it not for the FDIC's application of paragraph (8) of that definition in 
Sec. 324.2; and
    (ii) Has greater than immaterial leverage is assigned a 600 percent 
risk weight.
    (c) Hedge transactions--(1) Hedge pair. A hedge pair is two equity 
exposures that form an effective hedge so long as each equity exposure 
is publicly traded or has a return that is primarily based on a publicly 
traded equity exposure.
    (2) Effective hedge. Two equity exposures form an effective hedge if 
the exposures either have the same remaining maturity or each has a 
remaining maturity of at least three months; the hedge relationship is 
formally documented in a prospective manner (that is, before the FDIC-
supervised institution acquires at least one of the equity exposures); 
the documentation specifies the measure of effectiveness (E) the FDIC-
supervised institution will use for the hedge relationship throughout 
the life of the transaction; and the hedge relationship has an E greater 
than or equal to 0.8. An FDIC-supervised institution must measure E at 
least quarterly and must use one of three alternative measures of E:
    (i) Under the dollar-offset method of measuring effectiveness, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must determine the ratio of value change 
(RVC). The RVC is the ratio of the cumulative sum of the periodic 
changes in value of one equity exposure to the cumulative sum of the 
periodic changes in the value of the other equity exposure. If RVC is

[[Page 351]]

positive, the hedge is not effective and E equals zero. If RVC is 
negative and greater than or equal to ^1 (that is, between zero and ^1), 
then E equals the absolute value of RVC. If RVC is negative and less 
than ^1, then E equals 2 plus RVC.
    (ii) Under the variability-reduction method of measuring 
effectiveness:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.045

    (iii) Under the regression method of measuring effectiveness, E 
equals the coefficient of determination of a regression in which the 
change in value of one exposure in a hedge pair is the dependent 
variable and the change in value of the other exposure in a hedge pair 
is the independent variable. However, if the estimated regression 
coefficient is positive, then the value of E is zero.
    (3) The effective portion of a hedge pair is E multiplied by the 
greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures forming 
a hedge pair.
    (4) The ineffective portion of a hedge pair is (1-E) multiplied by 
the greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures 
forming a hedge pair.



Sec. 324.153  Internal models approach (IMA).

    (a) General. An FDIC-supervised institution may calculate its risk-
weighted asset amount for equity exposures using the IMA by modeling 
publicly traded and non-publicly traded equity exposures (in accordance 
with paragraph (c) of this section) or by modeling only publicly traded 
equity exposures (in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this 
section).
    (b) Qualifying criteria. To qualify to use the IMA to calculate 
risk-weighted assets for equity exposures, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must receive prior written approval from the FDIC. To 
receive such approval, the FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate 
to the FDIC's satisfaction that the FDIC-supervised institution meets 
the following criteria:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution must have one or more models 
that:
    (i) Assess the potential decline in value of its modeled equity 
exposures;
    (ii) Are commensurate with the size, complexity, and composition of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's modeled equity exposures; and
    (iii) Adequately capture both general market risk and idiosyncratic 
risk.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution's model must produce an estimate 
of potential losses for its modeled equity exposures that is no less 
than the estimate of potential losses produced by a VaR methodology 
employing a 99th percentile one-tailed confidence interval of the 
distribution of quarterly returns for a benchmark portfolio of equity 
exposures comparable to the FDIC-supervised institution's modeled

[[Page 352]]

equity exposures using a long-term sample period.
    (3) The number of risk factors and exposures in the sample and the 
data period used for quantification in the FDIC-supervised institution's 
model and benchmarking exercise must be sufficient to provide confidence 
in the accuracy and robustness of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
estimates.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution's model and benchmarking process 
must incorporate data that are relevant in representing the risk profile 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's modeled equity exposures, and must 
include data from at least one equity market cycle containing adverse 
market movements relevant to the risk profile of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's modeled equity exposures. In addition, the FDIC-supervised 
institution's benchmarking exercise must be based on daily market prices 
for the benchmark portfolio. If the FDIC-supervised institution's model 
uses a scenario methodology, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
demonstrate that the model produces a conservative estimate of potential 
losses on the FDIC-supervised institution's modeled equity exposures 
over a relevant long-term market cycle. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution employs risk factor models, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must demonstrate through empirical analysis the appropriateness of the 
risk factors used.
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must be able to demonstrate, 
using theoretical arguments and empirical evidence, that any proxies 
used in the modeling process are comparable to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's modeled equity exposures and that the FDIC-supervised 
institution has made appropriate adjustments for differences. The FDIC-
supervised institution must derive any proxies for its modeled equity 
exposures and benchmark portfolio using historical market data that are 
relevant to the FDIC-supervised institution's modeled equity exposures 
and benchmark portfolio (or, where not, must use appropriately adjusted 
data), and such proxies must be robust estimates of the risk of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's modeled equity exposures.
    (c) Risk-weighted assets calculation for an FDIC-supervised 
institution using the IMA for publicly traded and non-publicly traded 
equity exposures. If an FDIC-supervised institution models publicly 
traded and non-publicly traded equity exposures, the FDIC-supervised 
institution's aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for its equity 
exposures is equal to the sum of:
    (1) The risk-weighted asset amount of each equity exposure that 
qualifies for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
Sec. 324.152(b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) (as determined under Sec. 324.152) 
and each equity exposure to an investment fund (as determined under 
Sec. 324.154); and
    (2) The greater of:
    (i) The estimate of potential losses on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's equity exposures (other than equity exposures referenced 
in paragraph (c)(1) of this section) generated by the FDIC-supervised 
institution's internal equity exposure model multiplied by 12.5; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's publicly traded equity exposures 
that do not belong to a hedge pair, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 
percent, or 100 percent risk weight under Sec. 324.152(b)(1) through 
(b)(3)(i), and are not equity exposures to an investment fund;
    (B) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate ineffective portion of 
all hedge pairs; and
    (C) 300 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's equity exposures that are not 
publicly traded, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 
percent risk weight under Sec. 324.152(b)(1) through (b)(3)(i), and are 
not equity exposures to an investment fund.
    (d) Risk-weighted assets calculation for an FDIC-supervised 
institution using the IMA only for publicly traded equity exposures. If 
an FDIC-supervised institution models only publicly traded equity 
exposures, the FDIC-supervised institution's aggregate risk-weighted 
asset amount for its equity exposures is equal to the sum of:
    (1) The risk-weighted asset amount of each equity exposure that 
qualifies for

[[Page 353]]

a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
Secs. 324.152(b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) (as determined under 
Sec. 324.152), each equity exposure that qualifies for a 400 percent 
risk weight under Sec. 324.152(b)(5) or a 600 percent risk weight under 
Sec. 324.152(b)(6) (as determined under Sec. 324.152), and each equity 
exposure to an investment fund (as determined under Sec. 324.154); and
    (2) The greater of:
    (i) The estimate of potential losses on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's equity exposures (other than equity exposures referenced 
in paragraph (d)(1) of this section) generated by the FDIC-supervised 
institution's internal equity exposure model multiplied by 12.5; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's publicly traded equity exposures 
that do not belong to a hedge pair, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 
percent, or 100 percent risk weight under Sec. 324.152(b)(1) through 
(b)(3)(i), and are not equity exposures to an investment fund; and
    (B) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate ineffective portion of 
all hedge pairs.



Sec. 324.154  Equity exposures to investment funds.

    (a) Available approaches. (1) Unless the exposure meets the 
requirements for a community development equity exposure in 
Sec. 324.152(b)(3)(i), an FDIC-supervised institution must determine the 
risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an investment fund 
under the full look-through approach in paragraph (b) of this section, 
the simple modified look-through approach in paragraph (c) of this 
section, or the alternative modified look-through approach in paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an 
investment fund that meets the requirements for a community development 
equity exposure in Sec. 324.152(b)(3)(i) is its adjusted carrying value.
    (3) If an equity exposure to an investment fund is part of a hedge 
pair and the FDIC-supervised institution does not use the full look-
through approach, the FDIC-supervised institution may use the 
ineffective portion of the hedge pair as determined under 
Sec. 324.152(c) as the adjusted carrying value for the equity exposure 
to the investment fund. The risk-weighted asset amount of the effective 
portion of the hedge pair is equal to its adjusted carrying value.
    (b) Full look-through approach. An FDIC-supervised institution that 
is able to calculate a risk-weighted asset amount for its proportional 
ownership share of each exposure held by the investment fund (as 
calculated under this subpart E of this part as if the proportional 
ownership share of each exposure were held directly by the FDIC-
supervised institution) may either:
    (1) Set the risk-weighted asset amount of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's exposure to the fund equal to the product of:
    (i) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amounts of the exposures held 
by the fund as if they were held directly by the FDIC-supervised 
institution; and
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution's proportional ownership share 
of the fund; or
    (2) Include the FDIC-supervised institution's proportional ownership 
share of each exposure held by the fund in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's IMA.
    (c) Simple modified look-through approach. Under this approach, the 
risk-weighted asset amount for an FDIC-supervised institution's equity 
exposure to an investment fund equals the adjusted carrying value of the 
equity exposure multiplied by the highest risk weight assigned according 
to subpart D of this part that applies to any exposure the fund is 
permitted to hold under its prospectus, partnership agreement, or 
similar contract that defines the fund's permissible investments 
(excluding derivative contracts that are used for hedging rather than 
speculative purposes and that do not constitute a material portion of 
the fund's exposures).
    (d) Alternative modified look-through approach. Under this approach, 
an FDIC-supervised institution may assign the adjusted carrying value of 
an equity exposure to an investment fund on a pro rata basis to 
different risk weight categories assigned according to subpart D of this 
part based on the investment limits in the fund's prospectus, 
partnership agreement, or

[[Page 354]]

similar contract that defines the fund's permissible investments. The 
risk-weighted asset amount for the FDIC-supervised institution's equity 
exposure to the investment fund equals the sum of each portion of the 
adjusted carrying value assigned to an exposure class multiplied by the 
applicable risk weight. If the sum of the investment limits for all 
exposure types within the fund exceeds 100 percent, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must assume that the fund invests to the maximum extent 
permitted under its investment limits in the exposure type with the 
highest risk weight under subpart D of this part, and continues to make 
investments in order of the exposure type with the next highest risk 
weight under subpart D of this part until the maximum total investment 
level is reached. If more than one exposure type applies to an exposure, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must use the highest applicable risk 
weight. An FDIC-supervised institution may exclude derivative contracts 
held by the fund that are used for hedging rather than for speculative 
purposes and do not constitute a material portion of the fund's 
exposures.



Sec. 324.155  Equity derivative contracts.

    (a) Under the IMA, in addition to holding risk-based capital against 
an equity derivative contract under this part, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must hold risk-based capital against the counterparty credit 
risk in the equity derivative contract by also treating the equity 
derivative contract as a wholesale exposure and computing a supplemental 
risk-weighted asset amount for the contract under Sec. 324.132.
    (b) Under the SRWA, an FDIC-supervised institution may choose not to 
hold risk-based capital against the counterparty credit risk of equity 
derivative contracts, as long as it does so for all such contracts. 
Where the equity derivative contracts are subject to a qualified master 
netting agreement, an FDIC-supervised institution using the SRWA must 
either include all or exclude all of the contracts from any measure used 
to determine counterparty credit risk exposure.



Secs. 324.161-324.160  [Reserved]

                Risk-Weighted Assets for Operational Risk



Sec. 324.161  Qualification requirements for incorporation of
operational risk mitigants.

    (a) Qualification to use operational risk mitigants. An FDIC-
supervised institution may adjust its estimate of operational risk 
exposure to reflect qualifying operational risk mitigants if:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk 
quantification system is able to generate an estimate of the FDIC-
supervised institution's operational risk exposure (which does not 
incorporate qualifying operational risk mitigants) and an estimate of 
the FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk exposure adjusted to 
incorporate qualifying operational risk mitigants; and
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution's methodology for incorporating 
the effects of insurance, if the FDIC-supervised institution uses 
insurance as an operational risk mitigant, captures through appropriate 
discounts to the amount of risk mitigation:
    (i) The residual term of the policy, where less than one year;
    (ii) The cancellation terms of the policy, where less than one year;
    (iii) The policy's timeliness of payment;
    (iv) The uncertainty of payment by the provider of the policy; and
    (v) Mismatches in coverage between the policy and the hedged 
operational loss event.
    (b) Qualifying operational risk mitigants. Qualifying operational 
risk mitigants are:
    (1) Insurance that:
    (i) Is provided by an unaffiliated company that the FDIC-supervised 
institution deems to have strong capacity to meet its claims payment 
obligations and the obligor rating category to which the FDIC-supervised 
institution assigns the company is assigned a PD equal to or less than 
10 basis points;
    (ii) Has an initial term of at least one year and a residual term of 
more than 90 days;
    (iii) Has a minimum notice period for cancellation by the provider 
of 90 days;

[[Page 355]]

    (iv) Has no exclusions or limitations based upon regulatory action 
or for the receiver or liquidator of a failed depository institution; 
and
    (v) Is explicitly mapped to a potential operational loss event;
    (2) Operational risk mitigants other than insurance for which the 
FDIC has given prior written approval. In evaluating an operational risk 
mitigant other than insurance, the FDIC will consider whether the 
operational risk mitigant covers potential operational losses in a 
manner equivalent to holding total capital.



Sec. 324.162  Mechanics of risk-weighted asset calculation.

    (a) If an FDIC-supervised institution does not qualify to use or 
does not have qualifying operational risk mitigants, the FDIC-supervised 
institution's dollar risk-based capital requirement for operational risk 
is its operational risk exposure minus eligible operational risk offsets 
(if any).
    (b) If an FDIC-supervised institution qualifies to use operational 
risk mitigants and has qualifying operational risk mitigants, the FDIC-
supervised institution's dollar risk-based capital requirement for 
operational risk is the greater of:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk exposure 
adjusted for qualifying operational risk mitigants minus eligible 
operational risk offsets (if any); or
    (2) 0.8 multiplied by the difference between:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution's operational risk exposure; and
    (ii) Eligible operational risk offsets (if any).
    (c) The FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted asset amount for 
operational risk equals the FDIC-supervised institution's dollar risk-
based capital requirement for operational risk determined under sections 
162(a) or (b) multiplied by 12.5.



Secs. 324.163-324.170  [ Reserved]

                               Disclosures



Sec. 324.171  Purpose and scope.

    Secs. 324.171 through 324.173 establish public disclosure 
requirements related to the capital requirements of an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution.



Sec. 324.172  Disclosure requirements.

    (a) An FDIC-supervised institution that is an advanced approaches 
FDIC-supervised institution that has completed the parallel run process 
and that has received notification from the FDIC pursuant to 
Sec. 324.121(d) must publicly disclose each quarter its total and tier 1 
risk-based capital ratios and their components as calculated under this 
subpart (that is, common equity tier 1 capital, additional tier 1 
capital, tier 2 capital, total qualifying capital, and total risk-
weighted assets).
    (b) An FDIC-supervised institution that is an advanced approaches 
FDIC-supervised institution that has completed the parallel run process 
and that has received notification from the FDIC pursuant to section 
Sec. 324.121(d) must comply with paragraph (c) of this section unless it 
is a consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding company, savings and loan 
holding company, or depository institution that is subject to these 
disclosure requirements or a subsidiary of a non-U.S. banking 
organization that is subject to comparable public disclosure 
requirements in its home jurisdiction.
    (c)(1) An FDIC-supervised institution described in paragraph (b) of 
this section must provide timely public disclosures each calendar 
quarter of the information in the applicable tables in Sec. 324.173. If 
a significant change occurs, such that the most recent reported amounts 
are no longer reflective of the FDIC-supervised institution's capital 
adequacy and risk profile, then a brief discussion of this change and 
its likely impact must be disclosed as soon as practicable thereafter. 
Qualitative disclosures that typically do not change each quarter (for 
example, a general summary of the FDIC-supervised institution's risk 
management objectives and policies, reporting system, and definitions) 
may be disclosed annually after the end of the fourth calendar quarter, 
provided that any significant changes to these are disclosed in the 
interim. Management may provide all

[[Page 356]]

of the disclosures required by this subpart in one place on the FDIC-
supervised institution's public Web site or may provide the disclosures 
in more than one public financial report or other regulatory reports, 
provided that the FDIC-supervised institution publicly provides a 
summary table specifically indicating the location(s) of all such 
disclosures.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution described in paragraph (b) of 
this section must have a formal disclosure policy approved by the board 
of directors that addresses its approach for determining the disclosures 
it makes. The policy must address the associated internal controls and 
disclosure controls and procedures. The board of directors and senior 
management are responsible for establishing and maintaining an effective 
internal control structure over financial reporting, including the 
disclosures required by this subpart, and must ensure that appropriate 
review of the disclosures takes place. One or more senior officers of 
the FDIC-supervised institution must attest that the disclosures meet 
the requirements of this subpart.
    (3) If an FDIC-supervised institution described in paragraph (b) of 
this section believes that disclosure of specific commercial or 
financial information would prejudice seriously its position by making 
public information that is either proprietary or confidential in nature, 
the FDIC-supervised institution is not required to disclose those 
specific items, but must disclose more general information about the 
subject matter of the requirement, together with the fact that, and the 
reason why, the specific items of information have not been disclosed.
    (d)(1) An FDIC-supervised institution that meets any of the criteria 
in Sec. 324.100(b)(1) before January 1, 2015, must publicly disclose 
each quarter its supplementary leverage ratio and the components thereof 
(that is, tier 1 capital and total leverage exposure) as calculated 
under subpart B of this part, beginning with the first quarter in 2015. 
This disclosure requirement applies without regard to whether the FDIC-
supervised institution has completed the parallel run process and 
received notification from the FDIC pursuant to Sec. 324.121(d).
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that meets any of the criteria in 
Sec. 324.100(b)(1) on or after January 1, 2015, must publicly disclose 
each quarter its supplementary leverage ratio and the components thereof 
(that is, tier 1 capital and total leverage exposure) as calculated 
under subpart B of this part beginning with the calendar quarter 
immediately following the quarter in which the FDIC-supervised 
institution becomes an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution. 
This disclosure requirement applies without regard to whether the FDIC-
supervised institution has completed the parallel run process and has 
received notification from the FDIC pursuant to Sec. 324.121(d).

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 57750, Sept. 26, 2014; 
80 FR 41425, July 15, 2015]



Sec. 324.173  Disclosures by certain advanced approaches FDIC
-supervised institutions.

    (a)(1) An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution described 
in Sec. 324.172(b) must make the disclosures described in Tables 1 
through 12 to Sec. 324.173.
    (2) An advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution that is 
required to publicly disclose its supplementary leverage ratio pursuant 
to Sec. 324.172(d) must make the disclosures required under Table 13 to 
Sec. 324.173, unless the FDIC-supervised institution is a consolidated 
subsidiary of a bank holding company, savings and loan holding company, 
or depository institution that is subject to these disclosures 
requirements or a subsidiary of a non-U.S. banking organization that is 
subject to comparable public disclosure requirements in its home 
jurisdiction.
    (3) The disclosures described in Tables 1 through 12 to Sec. 324.173 
must be made publicly available for twelve consecutive quarters 
beginning on January 1, 2014, or a shorter period, as applicable, for 
the quarters after the FDIC-supervised institution has completed the 
parallel run process and received notification from the FDIC pursuant to 
Sec. 324.121(d). The disclosures described in

[[Page 357]]

Table 13 to Sec. 324.173 must be made publicly available for twelve 
consecutive quarters beginning on January 1, 2015, or a shorter period, 
as applicable, for the quarters after the FDIC-supervised institution 
becomes subject to the disclosure of the supplementary leverage ratio 
pursuant to Sec. 324.172(d) and Sec. 324.173(a)(2).

             Table 1 to Sec. 324.173--Scope of Application
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The name of the top
                                                 corporate entity in the
                                                 group to which subpart
                                                 E of this part applies.
                               (b)............  A brief description of
                                                 the differences in the
                                                 basis for consolidating
                                                 entities \1\ for
                                                 accounting and
                                                 regulatory purposes,
                                                 with a description of
                                                 those entities:
                                                (1) That are fully
                                                 consolidated;
                                                (2) That are
                                                 deconsolidated and
                                                 deducted from total
                                                 capital;
                                                (3) For which the total
                                                 capital requirement is
                                                 deducted; and
                                                (4) That are neither
                                                 consolidated nor
                                                 deducted (for example,
                                                 where the investment in
                                                 the entity is assigned
                                                 a risk weight in
                                                 accordance with this
                                                 subpart E).
                               (c)............  Any restrictions, or
                                                 other major
                                                 impediments, on
                                                 transfer of funds or
                                                 total capital within
                                                 the group.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (d)............  The aggregate amount of
                                                 surplus capital of
                                                 insurance subsidiaries
                                                 included in the total
                                                 capital of the
                                                 consolidated group.
                               ((e)...........  The aggregate amount by
                                                 which actual total
                                                 capital is less than
                                                 the minimum total
                                                 capital requirement in
                                                 all subsidiaries, with
                                                 total capital
                                                 requirements and the
                                                 name(s) of the
                                                 subsidiaries with such
                                                 deficiencies.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Such entities include securities, insurance and other financial
  subsidiaries, commercial subsidiaries (where permitted), and
  significant minority equity investments in insurance, financial and
  commercial entities.


               Table 2 to Sec. 324.173--Capital Structure
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  Summary information on
                                                 the terms and
                                                 conditions of the main
                                                 features of all
                                                 regulatory capital
                                                 instruments.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  The amount of common
                                                 equity tier 1 capital,
                                                 with separate
                                                 disclosure of:
                                                (1) Common stock and
                                                 related surplus;
                                                (2) Retained earnings;
                                                (3) Common equity
                                                 minority interest;
                                                (4) AOCI (net of tax)
                                                 and other reserves; and
                                                (5) Regulatory
                                                 adjustments and
                                                 deductions made to
                                                 common equity tier 1
                                                 capital.
                               (c)............  The amount of tier 1
                                                 capital, with separate
                                                 disclosure of:
                                                (1) Additional tier 1
                                                 capital elements,
                                                 including additional
                                                 tier 1 capital
                                                 instruments and tier 1
                                                 minority interest not
                                                 included in common
                                                 equity tier 1 capital;
                                                 and
                                                (2) Regulatory
                                                 adjustments and
                                                 deductions made to tier
                                                 1 capital.
                               (d)............  The amount of total
                                                 capital, with separate
                                                 disclosure of:
                                                (1) Tier 2 capital
                                                 elements, including
                                                 tier 2 capital
                                                 instruments and total
                                                 capital minority
                                                 interest not included
                                                 in tier 1 capital; and
                                                (2) Regulatory
                                                 adjustments and
                                                 deductions made to
                                                 total capital.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


               Table 3 to Sec. 324.173--Capital Adequacy
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  A summary discussion of
                                                 the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's approach
                                                 to assessing the
                                                 adequacy of its capital
                                                 to support current and
                                                 future activities.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  Risk-weighted assets for
                                                 credit risk from:
                                                (1) Wholesale exposures;
                                                (2) Residential mortgage
                                                 exposures;
                                                (3) Qualifying revolving
                                                 exposures;
                                                (4) Other retail
                                                 exposures;
                                                (5) Securitization
                                                 exposures;
                                                (6) Equity exposures:
                                                (7) Equity exposures
                                                 subject to the simple
                                                 risk weight approach;
                                                 and
                                                (8) Equity exposures
                                                 subject to the internal
                                                 models approach.

[[Page 358]]

 
                               (c)............  Standardized market risk-
                                                 weighted assets and
                                                 advanced market risk-
                                                 weighted assets as
                                                 calculated under
                                                 subpart F of this part:
                                                (1) Standardized
                                                 approach for specific
                                                 risk; and
                                                (2) Internal models
                                                 approach for specific
                                                 risk.
                               (d)............  Risk-weighted assets for
                                                 operational risk.
                               (e)............  Common equity tier 1,
                                                 tier 1 and total risk-
                                                 based capital ratios:
                                                (1) For the top
                                                 consolidated group; and
                                                (2) For each depository
                                                 institution subsidiary.
                               (f)............  Total risk-weighted
                                                 assets.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


   Table 4 to Sec. 324.173--Capital Conservation and Countercyclical
                             Capital Buffers
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution must
                                                 publicly disclose the
                                                 geographic breakdown of
                                                 its private sector
                                                 credit exposures used
                                                 in the calculation of
                                                 the countercyclical
                                                 capital buffer.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  At least quarterly, the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution must
                                                 calculate and publicly
                                                 disclose the capital
                                                 conservation buffer and
                                                 the countercyclical
                                                 capital buffer as
                                                 described under Sec.
                                                 324.11 of subpart B.
                               (c)............  At least quarterly, the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution must
                                                 calculate and publicly
                                                 disclose the buffer
                                                 retained income of the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution, as
                                                 described under Sec.
                                                 324.11 of subpart B.
                               (d)............  At least quarterly, the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution must
                                                 calculate and publicly
                                                 disclose any
                                                 limitations it has on
                                                 distributions and
                                                 discretionary bonus
                                                 payments resulting from
                                                 the capital
                                                 conservation buffer and
                                                 the countercyclical
                                                 capital buffer
                                                 framework described
                                                 under Sec. 324.11 of
                                                 subpart B, including
                                                 the maximum payout
                                                 amount for the quarter.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) General qualitative disclosure requirement. For each separate 
risk area described in Tables 5 through 12 to Sec. 324.173, the FDIC-
supervised institution must describe its risk management objectives and 
policies, including:
    (1) Strategies and processes;
    (2) The structure and organization of the relevant risk management 
function;
    (3) The scope and nature of risk reporting and/or measurement 
systems; and
    (4) Policies for hedging and/or mitigating risk and strategies and 
processes for monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges/
mitigants.

      Table 5\1\ to Sec. 324.173--Credit Risk: General Disclosures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement
                                                 with respect to credit
                                                 risk (excluding
                                                 counterparty credit
                                                 risk disclosed in
                                                 accordance with Table 7
                                                 to Sec. 324.173),
                                                 including:
                                                (1) Policy for
                                                 determining past due or
                                                 delinquency status;
                                                (2) Policy for placing
                                                 loans on nonaccrual;
                                                (3) Policy for returning
                                                 loans to accrual
                                                 status;
                                                (4) Definition of and
                                                 policy for identifying
                                                 impaired loans (for
                                                 financial accounting
                                                 purposes).
                                                (5) Description of the
                                                 methodology that the
                                                 entity uses to estimate
                                                 its allowance for loan
                                                 and lease losses,
                                                 including statistical
                                                 methods used where
                                                 applicable;
                                                (6) Policy for charging-
                                                 off uncollectible
                                                 amounts; and
                                                (7) Discussion of the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's credit
                                                 risk management policy

[[Page 359]]

 
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  Total credit risk
                                                 exposures and average
                                                 credit risk exposures,
                                                 after accounting
                                                 offsets in accordance
                                                 with GAAP,\2\ without
                                                 taking into account the
                                                 effects of credit risk
                                                 mitigation techniques
                                                 (for example,
                                                 collateral and netting
                                                 not permitted under
                                                 GAAP), over the period
                                                 categorized by major
                                                 types of credit
                                                 exposure. For example,
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institutions could use
                                                 categories similar to
                                                 that used for financial
                                                 statement purposes.
                                                 Such categories might
                                                 include, for instance:
                                                (1) Loans, off-balance
                                                 sheet commitments, and
                                                 other non-derivative
                                                 off-balance sheet
                                                 exposures;
                                                (2) Debt securities; and
                                                (3) OTC derivatives.
                               (c)............  Geographic \3\
                                                 distribution of
                                                 exposures, categorized
                                                 in significant areas by
                                                 major types of credit
                                                 exposure.
                               (d)............  Industry or counterparty
                                                 type distribution of
                                                 exposures, categorized
                                                 by major types of
                                                 credit exposure.
                               (e)............  By major industry or
                                                 counterparty type:
                                                (1) Amount of impaired
                                                 loans for which there
                                                 was a related allowance
                                                 under GAAP;
                                                (2) Amount of impaired
                                                 loans for which there
                                                 was no related
                                                 allowance under GAAP;
                                                (3) Amount of loans past
                                                 due 90 days and on
                                                 nonaccrual;
                                                (4) Amount of loans past
                                                 due 90 days and still
                                                 accruing; \4\
                                                (5) The balance in the
                                                 allowance for loan and
                                                 lease losses at the end
                                                 of each period,
                                                 disaggregated on the
                                                 basis of the entity's
                                                 impairment method. To
                                                 disaggregate the
                                                 information required on
                                                 the basis of impairment
                                                 methodology, an entity
                                                 shall separately
                                                 disclose the amounts
                                                 based on the
                                                 requirements in GAAP;
                                                 and
                                                (6) Charge-offs during
                                                 the period.
                               (f)............  Amount of impaired loans
                                                 and, if available, the
                                                 amount of past due
                                                 loans categorized by
                                                 significant geographic
                                                 areas including, if
                                                 practical, the amounts
                                                 of allowances related
                                                 to each geographical
                                                 area,\5\ further
                                                 categorized as required
                                                 by GAAP.
                               (g)............  Reconciliation of
                                                 changes in ALLL.\6\
                               (h)............  Remaining contractual
                                                 maturity breakdown (for
                                                 example, one year or
                                                 less) of the whole
                                                 portfolio, categorized
                                                 by credit exposure.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Table 5 to Sec. 324.173 does not cover equity exposures, which
  should be reported in Table 9 to Sec. 324.173.
\2\ See, for example, ASC Topic 815-10 and 210-20, as they may be
  amended from time to time.
\3\ Geographical areas may comprise individual countries, groups of
  countries, or regions within countries. An FDIC-supervised institution
  might choose to define the geographical areas based on the way the
  company's portfolio is geographically managed. The criteria used to
  allocate the loans to geographical areas must be specified.
\4\ An FDIC-supervised institution is encouraged also to provide an
  analysis of the aging of past-due loans.
\5\ The portion of the general allowance that is not allocated to a
  geographical area should be disclosed separately.
\6\ The reconciliation should include the following: a description of
  the allowance; the opening balance of the allowance; charge-offs taken
  against the allowance during the period; amounts provided (or
  reversed) for estimated probable loan losses during the period; any
  other adjustments (for example, exchange rate differences, business
  combinations, acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries), including
  transfers between allowances; and the closing balance of the
  allowance. Charge-offs and recoveries that have been recorded directly
  to the income statement should be disclosed separately.


    Table 6 to Sec. 324.173--Credit Risk: Disclosures for Portfolios
               Subject to IRB Risk-Based Capital Formulas
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  Explanation and review
                                                 of the:
                                                (1) Structure of
                                                 internal rating systems
                                                 and if the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 considers external
                                                 ratings, the relation
                                                 between internal and
                                                 external ratings;
                                                (2) Use of risk
                                                 parameter estimates
                                                 other than for
                                                 regulatory capital
                                                 purposes;
                                                (3) Process for managing
                                                 and recognizing credit
                                                 risk mitigation (see
                                                 Table 8 to Sec.
                                                 324.173); and
                                                (4) Control mechanisms
                                                 for the rating system,
                                                 including discussion of
                                                 independence,
                                                 accountability, and
                                                 rating systems review.

[[Page 360]]

 
                               (b)............  (1) Description of the
                                                 internal ratings
                                                 process, provided
                                                 separately for the
                                                 following:
                                                (i) Wholesale category;
                                                (ii) Retail
                                                 subcategories;
                                                (iii) Residential
                                                 mortgage exposures;
                                                (iv) Qualifying
                                                 revolving exposures;
                                                 and
                                                (v) Other retail
                                                 exposures.
                                                (2) For each category
                                                 and subcategory above
                                                 the description should
                                                 include:
                                                (i) The types of
                                                 exposure included in
                                                 the category/
                                                 subcategories; and
                                                (ii) The definitions,
                                                 methods and data for
                                                 estimation and
                                                 validation of PD, LGD,
                                                 and EAD, including
                                                 assumptions employed in
                                                 the derivation of these
                                                 variables.\1\
Quantitative disclosures:      (c)............  (1) For wholesale
 risk assessment.                                exposures, present the
                                                 following information
                                                 across a sufficient
                                                 number of PD grades
                                                 (including default) to
                                                 allow for a meaningful
                                                 differentiation of
                                                 credit risk: \2\
                                                (i) Total EAD; \3\
                                                (ii) Exposure-weighted
                                                 average LGD
                                                 (percentage);
                                                (iii) Exposure-weighted
                                                 average risk weight;
                                                 and
                                                (iv) Amount of undrawn
                                                 commitments and
                                                 exposure-weighted
                                                 average EAD including
                                                 average drawdowns prior
                                                 to default for
                                                 wholesale exposures.
                                                (2) For each retail
                                                 subcategory, present
                                                 the disclosures
                                                 outlined above across a
                                                 sufficient number of
                                                 segments to allow for a
                                                 meaningful
                                                 differentiation of
                                                 credit risk.
Quantitative disclosures:      (d)............  Actual losses in the
 historical results.                             preceding period for
                                                 each category and
                                                 subcategory and how
                                                 this differs from past
                                                 experience. A
                                                 discussion of the
                                                 factors that impacted
                                                 the loss experience in
                                                 the preceding period--
                                                 for example, has the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution experienced
                                                 higher than average
                                                 default rates, loss
                                                 rates or EADs.
                               (e)............  The FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's estimates
                                                 compared against actual
                                                 outcomes over a longer
                                                 period.\4\ At a
                                                 minimum, this should
                                                 include information on
                                                 estimates of losses
                                                 against actual losses
                                                 in the wholesale
                                                 category and each
                                                 retail subcategory over
                                                 a period sufficient to
                                                 allow for a meaningful
                                                 assessment of the
                                                 performance of the
                                                 internal rating
                                                 processes for each
                                                 category/
                                                 subcategory.\5\ Where
                                                 appropriate, the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 should further
                                                 decompose this to
                                                 provide analysis of PD,
                                                 LGD, and EAD outcomes
                                                 against estimates
                                                 provided in the
                                                 quantitative risk
                                                 assessment disclosures
                                                 above.\6\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ This disclosure item does not require a detailed description of the
  model in full--it should provide the reader with a broad overview of
  the model approach, describing definitions of the variables and
  methods for estimating and validating those variables set out in the
  quantitative risk disclosures below. This should be done for each of
  the four category/subcategories. The FDIC-supervised institution must
  disclose any significant differences in approach to estimating these
  variables within each category/subcategories.
\2\ The PD, LGD and EAD disclosures in Table 6 (c) to Sec. 324.173
  should reflect the effects of collateral, qualifying master netting
  agreements, eligible guarantees and eligible credit derivatives as
  defined under this part. Disclosure of each PD grade should include
  the exposure-weighted average PD for each grade. Where an FDIC-
  supervised institution aggregates PD grades for the purposes of
  disclosure, this should be a representative breakdown of the
  distribution of PD grades used for regulatory capital purposes.
\3\ Outstanding loans and EAD on undrawn commitments can be presented on
  a combined basis for these disclosures.
\4\ These disclosures are a way of further informing the reader about
  the reliability of the information provided in the ``quantitative
  disclosures: risk assessment'' over the long run. The disclosures are
  requirements from year-end 2010; in the meantime, early adoption is
  encouraged. The phased implementation is to allow an FDIC-supervised
  institution sufficient time to build up a longer run of data that will
  make these disclosures meaningful.
\5\ This disclosure item is not intended to be prescriptive about the
  period used for this assessment. Upon implementation, it is expected
  that an FDIC-supervised institution would provide these disclosures
  for as long a set of data as possible--for example, if an FDIC-
  supervised institution has 10 years of data, it might choose to
  disclose the average default rates for each PD grade over that 10-year
  period. Annual amounts need not be disclosed.
\6\ An FDIC-supervised institution must provide this further
  decomposition where it will allow users greater insight into the
  reliability of the estimates provided in the ``quantitative
  disclosures: risk assessment.'' In particular, it must provide this
  information where there are material differences between its estimates
  of PD, LGD or EAD compared to actual outcomes over the long run. The
  FDIC-supervised institution must also provide explanations for such
  differences.


[[Page 361]]


  Table 7 to Sec. 324.173--General Disclosure for Counterparty Credit
 Risk of OTC Derivative Contracts, Repo-Style Transactions, and Eligible
                              Margin Loans
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement
                                                 with respect to OTC
                                                 derivatives, eligible
                                                 margin loans, and repo-
                                                 style transactions,
                                                 including:
                                                (1) Discussion of
                                                 methodology used to
                                                 assign economic capital
                                                 and credit limits for
                                                 counterparty credit
                                                 exposures;
                                                (2) Discussion of
                                                 policies for securing
                                                 collateral, valuing and
                                                 managing collateral,
                                                 and establishing credit
                                                 reserves;
                                                (3) Discussion of the
                                                 primary types of
                                                 collateral taken;
                                                (4) Discussion of
                                                 policies with respect
                                                 to wrong-way risk
                                                 exposures; and
                                                (5) Discussion of the
                                                 impact of the amount of
                                                 collateral the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 would have to provide
                                                 if the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution were to
                                                 receive a credit rating
                                                 downgrade.
Quantitative Disclosures.....  (b)............  Gross positive fair
                                                 value of contracts,
                                                 netting benefits,
                                                 netted current credit
                                                 exposure, collateral
                                                 held (including type,
                                                 for example, cash,
                                                 government securities),
                                                 and net unsecured
                                                 credit exposure.\1\
                                                 Also report measures
                                                 for EAD used for
                                                 regulatory capital for
                                                 these transactions, the
                                                 notional value of
                                                 credit derivative
                                                 hedges purchased for
                                                 counterparty credit
                                                 risk protection, and,
                                                 for FDIC-supervised
                                                 institutions not using
                                                 the internal models
                                                 methodology in Sec.
                                                 324.132(d), the
                                                 distribution of current
                                                 credit exposure by
                                                 types of credit
                                                 exposure.\2\
                               (c)............  Notional amount of
                                                 purchased and sold
                                                 credit derivatives,
                                                 segregated between use
                                                 for the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's own
                                                 credit portfolio and
                                                 for its intermediation
                                                 activities, including
                                                 the distribution of the
                                                 credit derivative
                                                 products used,
                                                 categorized further by
                                                 protection bought and
                                                 sold within each
                                                 product group.
                               (d)............  The estimate of alpha if
                                                 the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution has
                                                 received supervisory
                                                 approval to estimate
                                                 alpha.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Net unsecured credit exposure is the credit exposure after
  considering the benefits from legally enforceable netting agreements
  and collateral arrangements, without taking into account haircuts for
  price volatility, liquidity, etc.
\2\ This may include interest rate derivative contracts, foreign
  exchange derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, credit
  derivatives, commodity or other derivative contracts, repo-style
  transactions, and eligible margin loans.


          Table 8 to Sec. 324.173--Credit Risk Mitigation 1 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement
                                                 with respect to credit
                                                 risk mitigation,
                                                 including:
                                                (1) Policies and
                                                 processes for, and an
                                                 indication of the
                                                 extent to which the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution uses, on-
                                                 or off-balance sheet
                                                 netting;
                                                (2) Policies and
                                                 processes for
                                                 collateral valuation
                                                 and management;
                                                (3) A description of the
                                                 main types of
                                                 collateral taken by the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution;
                                                (4) The main types of
                                                 guarantors/credit
                                                 derivative
                                                 counterparties and
                                                 their creditworthiness;
                                                 and
                                                (5) Information about
                                                 (market or credit) risk
                                                 concentrations within
                                                 the mitigation taken.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  For each separately
                                                 disclosed portfolio,
                                                 the total exposure
                                                 (after, where
                                                 applicable, on- or off-
                                                 balance sheet netting)
                                                 that is covered by
                                                 guarantees/credit
                                                 derivatives.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ At a minimum, an FDIC-supervised institution must provide the
  disclosures in Table 8 to Sec. 324.173 in relation to credit risk
  mitigation that has been recognized for the purposes of reducing
  capital requirements under this subpart. Where relevant, FDIC-
  supervised institutions are encouraged to give further information
  about mitigants that have not been recognized for that purpose.
\2\ Credit derivatives and other credit mitigation that are treated for
  the purposes of this subpart as synthetic securitization exposures
  should be excluded from the credit risk mitigation disclosures (in
  Table 8 to Sec. 324.173) and included within those relating to
  securitization (in Table 9 to Sec. 324.173).


[[Page 362]]


                Table 9 to Sec. 324.173--Securitization
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement
                                                 with respect to
                                                 securitization
                                                 (including synthetic
                                                 securitizations),
                                                 including a discussion
                                                 of:
                                                (1) The FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's
                                                 objectives for
                                                 securitizing assets,
                                                 including the extent to
                                                 which these activities
                                                 transfer credit risk of
                                                 the underlying
                                                 exposures away from the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution to other
                                                 entities and including
                                                 the type of risks
                                                 assumed and retained
                                                 with resecuritization
                                                 activity; \1\
                                                (2) The nature of the
                                                 risks (e.g. liquidity
                                                 risk) inherent in the
                                                 securitized assets;
                                                (3) The roles played by
                                                 the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution in the
                                                 securitization process
                                                 \2\ and an indication
                                                 of the extent of the
                                                 FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's
                                                 involvement in each of
                                                 them;
                                                (4) The processes in
                                                 place to monitor
                                                 changes in the credit
                                                 and market risk of
                                                 securitization
                                                 exposures including how
                                                 those processes differ
                                                 for resecuritization
                                                 exposures;
                                                (5) The FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution's policy
                                                 for mitigating the
                                                 credit risk retained
                                                 through securitization
                                                 and resecuritization
                                                 exposures; and
                                                (6) The risk-based
                                                 capital approaches that
                                                 the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution follows for
                                                 its securitization
                                                 exposures including the
                                                 type of securitization
                                                 exposure to which each
                                                 approach applies.
                               (b)............  A list of:
                                                (1) The type of
                                                 securitization SPEs
                                                 that the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution,
                                                 as sponsor, uses to
                                                 securitize third-party
                                                 exposures. The FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 must indicate whether
                                                 it has exposure to
                                                 these SPEs, either on-
                                                 or off- balance sheet;
                                                 and
                                                (2) Affiliated entities:
                                                (i) That the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 manages or advises; and
                                                (ii) That invest either
                                                 in the securitization
                                                 exposures that the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 has securitized or in
                                                 securitization SPEs
                                                 that the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 sponsors.\3\
                               (c)............  Summary of the FDIC-
                                                 supervised
                                                 institution's
                                                 accounting policies for
                                                 securitization
                                                 activities, including:
                                                (1) Whether the
                                                 transactions are
                                                 treated as sales or
                                                 financings;
                                                (2) Recognition of gain-
                                                 on-sale;
                                                (3) Methods and key
                                                 assumptions and inputs
                                                 applied in valuing
                                                 retained or purchased
                                                 interests;
                                                (4) Changes in methods
                                                 and key assumptions and
                                                 inputs from the
                                                 previous period for
                                                 valuing retained
                                                 interests and impact of
                                                 the changes;
                                                (5) Treatment of
                                                 synthetic
                                                 securitizations;
                                                (6) How exposures
                                                 intended to be
                                                 securitized are valued
                                                 and whether they are
                                                 recorded under subpart
                                                 E of this part; and
                                                (7) Policies for
                                                 recognizing liabilities
                                                 on the balance sheet
                                                 for arrangements that
                                                 could require the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 to provide financial
                                                 support for securitized
                                                 assets.
                               (d)............  An explanation of
                                                 significant changes to
                                                 any of the quantitative
                                                 information set forth
                                                 below since the last
                                                 reporting period.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (e)............  The total outstanding
                                                 exposures securitized
                                                 \4\ by the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 in securitizations that
                                                 meet the operational
                                                 criteria in Sec.
                                                 324.141 (categorized
                                                 into traditional/
                                                 synthetic), by
                                                 underlying exposure
                                                 type \5\ separately for
                                                 securitizations of
                                                 third-party exposures
                                                 for which the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 acts only as sponsor.
                               (f)............  For exposures
                                                 securitized by the FDIC-
                                                 supervised institution
                                                 in securitizations that
                                                 meet the operational
                                                 criteria in Sec.
                                                 324.141:
                                                (1) Amount of
                                                 securitized assets that
                                                 are impaired \6\/past
                                                 due categorized by
                                                 exposure type; and
                                                (2) Losses recognized by
                                                 the FDIC-supervised
                                                 institution during the
                                                 current period
                                                 categorized by exposure
                                                 type.\7\
                               (g)............  The total amount of
                                                 outstanding exposures
                                                 intended to be
                                                 securitized categorized
                                                 by exposure type.

[[Page 363]]

 
                               (h)............  Aggregate amount of:
                                                (1) On-balance sheet
                                                 securitization
                                                 exposures retained or
                                                 purchased categorized
                                                 by exposure type; and
                                                (2) Off-balance sheet
                                                 securitization
                                                 exposures categorized
                                                 by exposure type.
                               (i)............  (1) Aggregate amount of
                                                 securitization
                                                 exposures retained or
                                                 purchased and the
                                                 associated capital
                                                 requirements for these
                                                 exposures, categorized
                                                 between securitization
                                                 and resecuritization
                                                 exposures, further
                                                 categorized into a
                                                 meaningful number of
                                                 risk weight bands and
                                                 by risk-based capital
                                                 approach (e.g. SA, SFA,
                                                 or SSFA).
                                                (2) Aggregate amount
                                                 disclosed separately by
                                                 type of underlying
                                                 exposure in the pool of
                                                 any:
                                                (i) After-tax gain-on-
                                                 sale on a
                                                 securitization that has
                                                 been deducted from
                                                 common equity tier 1
                                                 capital; and
                                                (ii) Credit-enhancing
                                                 interest-only strip
                                                 that is assigned a
                                                 1,250 percent risk
                                                 weight.
                               (j)............  Summary of current
                                                 year's securitization
                                                 activity, including the
                                                 amount of exposures
                                                 securitized (by
                                                 exposure type), and
                                                 recognized gain or loss
                                                 on sale by asset type.
                               (k)............  Aggregate amount of
                                                 resecuritization
                                                 exposures retained or
                                                 purchased categorized
                                                 according to:
                                                (1) Exposures to which
                                                 credit risk mitigation
                                                 is applied and those
                                                 not applied; and
                                                (2) Exposures to
                                                 guarantors categorized
                                                 according to guarantor
                                                 creditworthiness
                                                 categories or guarantor
                                                 name.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The FDIC-supervised institution must describe the structure of
  resecuritizations in which it participates; this description must be
  provided for the main categories of resecuritization products in which
  the FDIC-supervised institution is active.
\2\ For example, these roles would include originator, investor,
  servicer, provider of credit enhancement, sponsor, liquidity provider,
  or swap provider.
\3\ For example, money market mutual funds should be listed
  individually, and personal and private trusts, should be noted
  collectively.
\4\ ``Exposures securitized'' include underlying exposures originated by
  the FDIC-supervised institution, whether generated by them or
  purchased, and recognized in the balance sheet, from third parties,
  and third-party exposures included in sponsored transactions.
  Securitization transactions (including underlying exposures originally
  on the FDIC-supervised institution's balance sheet and underlying
  exposures acquired by the FDIC-supervised institution from third-party
  entities) in which the originating bank does not retain any
  securitization exposure should be shown separately but need only be
  reported for the year of inception.
\5\ An FDIC-supervised institution is required to disclose exposures
  regardless of whether there is a capital charge under this part.
\6\ An FDIC-supervised institution must include credit-related other
  than temporary impairment (OTTI).
\7\ For example, charge-offs/allowances (if the assets remain on the
  FDIC-supervised institution's balance sheet) or credit-related OTTI of
  I/O strips and other retained residual interests, as well as
  recognition of liabilities for probable future financial support
  required of the FDIC-supervised institution with respect to
  securitized assets.


               Table 10 to Sec. 324.173--Operational Risk
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement
                                                 for operational risk.
                               (b)............  Description of the AMA,
                                                 including a discussion
                                                 of relevant internal
                                                 and external factors
                                                 considered in the FDIC-
                                                 supervised
                                                 institution's
                                                 measurement approach.
                               (c)............  A description of the use
                                                 of insurance for the
                                                 purpose of mitigating
                                                 operational risk.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


  Table 11 to Sec. 324.173--Equities Not Subject to Subpart F of This
                                  Part
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement
                                                 with respect to the
                                                 equity risk of equity
                                                 holdings not subject to
                                                 subpart F of this part,
                                                 including:
                                                (1) Differentiation
                                                 between holdings on
                                                 which capital gains are
                                                 expected and those held
                                                 for other objectives,
                                                 including for
                                                 relationship and
                                                 strategic reasons; and
                                                (2) Discussion of
                                                 important policies
                                                 covering the valuation
                                                 of and accounting for
                                                 equity holdings not
                                                 subject to subpart F of
                                                 this part. This
                                                 includes the accounting
                                                 methodology and
                                                 valuation methodologies
                                                 used, including key
                                                 assumptions and
                                                 practices affecting
                                                 valuation as well as
                                                 significant changes in
                                                 these practices.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  Carrying value on the
                                                 balance sheet of equity
                                                 investments, as well as
                                                 the fair value of those
                                                 investments.

[[Page 364]]

 
                               (c)............  The types and nature of
                                                 investments, including
                                                 the amount that is:
                                                (1) Publicly traded; and
                                                (2) Non-publicly traded.
                               (d)............  The cumulative realized
                                                 gains (losses) arising
                                                 from sales and
                                                 liquidations in the
                                                 reporting period.
                               (e)............  (1) Total unrealized
                                                 gains (losses) \1\
                                                (2) Total latent
                                                 revaluation gains
                                                 (losses) \2\
                                                (3) Any amounts of the
                                                 above included in tier
                                                 1 and/or tier 2
                                                 capital.
                               (f)............  Capital requirements
                                                 categorized by
                                                 appropriate equity
                                                 groupings, consistent
                                                 with the FDIC-
                                                 supervised
                                                 institution's
                                                 methodology, as well as
                                                 the aggregate amounts
                                                 and the type of equity
                                                 investments subject to
                                                 any supervisory
                                                 transition regarding
                                                 total capital
                                                 requirements.\3\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Unrealized gains (losses) recognized in the balance sheet but not
  through earnings.
\2\ Unrealized gains (losses) not recognized either in the balance sheet
  or through earnings.
\3\ This disclosure must include a breakdown of equities that are
  subject to the 0 percent, 20 percent, 100 percent, 300 percent, 400
  percent, and 600 percent risk weights, as applicable.


Table 12 to Sec. 324.173--Interest Rate Risk for Non-trading Activities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative disclosures......  (a)............  The general qualitative
                                                 disclosure requirement,
                                                 including the nature of
                                                 interest rate risk for
                                                 non-trading activities
                                                 and key assumptions,
                                                 including assumptions
                                                 regarding loan
                                                 prepayments and
                                                 behavior of non-
                                                 maturity deposits, and
                                                 frequency of
                                                 measurement of interest
                                                 rate risk for non-
                                                 trading activities.
Quantitative disclosures.....  (b)............  The increase (decline)
                                                 in earnings or economic
                                                 value (or relevant
                                                 measure used by
                                                 management) for upward
                                                 and downward rate
                                                 shocks according to
                                                 management's method for
                                                 measuring interest rate
                                                 risk for non-trading
                                                 activities, categorized
                                                 by currency (as
                                                 appropriate).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Except as provided in Sec. 324.172(b), an FDIC-supervised 
institution described in Sec. 324.172(d) must make the disclosures 
described in Table 13 to Sec. 324.173; provided, however, the 
disclosures required under this paragraph are required without regard to 
whether the FDIC-supervised institution has completed the parallel run 
process and has received notification from the FDIC pursuant to 
Sec. 324.121(d). The FDIC-supervised institution must make these 
disclosures publicly available beginning on January 1, 2015.

                             Table 13 to Sec. 324.173--Supplementary Leverage Ratio
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                          Dollar amounts in thousands
                                                             ---------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Tril         Bil          Mil          Thou
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Part 1: Summary comparison of accounting assets and total leverage exposure
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1  Total consolidated assets as reported in published
 financial statements.......................................
2  Adjustment for investments in banking, financial,
 insurance or commercial entities that are consolidated for
 accounting purposes but outside the scope of regulatory
 consolidation..............................................
3  Adjustment for fiduciary assets recognized on balance
 sheet but excluded from total leverage exposure............
4  Adjustment for derivative exposures......................
5  Adjustment for repo-style transactions...................
6  Adjustment for off-balance sheet exposures (that is,
 conversion to credit equivalent amounts of off-balance
 sheet exposures)...........................................
7  Other adjustments........................................
8  Total leverage exposure..................................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Part 2: Supplementary leverage ratio
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 On-balance sheet exposures
 
1  On-balance sheet assets (excluding on-balance sheet
 assets for repo-style transactions and derivative
 exposures, but including cash collateral received in
 derivative transactions)...................................
2  LESS: Amounts deducted from tier 1 capital...............

[[Page 365]]

 
3  Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding on-balance
 sheet assets for repo-style transactions and derivative
 exposures, but including cash collateral received in
 derivative transactions) (sum of lines 1 and 2)............
 
                    Derivative exposures
 
4  Replacement cost for derivative exposures (that is, net
 of cash variation margin)..................................
5  Add-on amounts for potential future exposure (PFE) for
 derivative exposures.......................................
6  Gross-up for cash collateral posted if deducted from the
 on-balance sheet assets, except for cash variation margin..
7  LESS: Deductions of receivable assets for cash variation
 margin posted in derivative transactions, if included in on-
 balance sheet assets.......................................
8  LESS: Exempted CCP leg of client-cleared transactions....
9  Effective notional principal amount of sold credit
 protection.................................................
10  LESS: Effective notional principal amount offsets and
 PFE adjustments for sold credit protection.................
11  Total derivative exposures (sum of lines 4 to 10).......
 
                   Repo-style transactions
 
12  On-balance sheet assets for repo-style transactions,
 except include the gross value of receivables for reverse
 repurchase transactions. Exclude from this item the value
 of securities received in a security-for-security repo-
 style transaction where the securities lender has not sold
 or re-hypothecated the securities received. Include in this
 item the value of securities that qualified for sales
 treatment that must be reversed............................
13  LESS: Reduction of the gross value of receivables in
 reverse repurchase transactions by cash payables in
 repurchase transactions under netting agreements...........
14  Counterparty credit risk for all repo-style transactions
15  Exposure for repo-style transactions where a banking
 organization acts as an agent..............................
16  Total exposures for repo-style transactions (sum of
 lines 12 to 15)............................................
 
              Other off-balance sheet exposures
 
17  Off-balance sheet exposures at gross notional amounts...
18  LESS: Adjustments for conversion to credit equivalent
 amounts....................................................
19  Off-balance sheet exposures (sum of lines 17 and 18)....
 
             Capital and total leverage exposure
 
20  Tier 1 capital..........................................
21  Total leverage exposure (sum of lines 3, 11, 16 and 19).
 
                Supplementary leverage ratio
                                                             ---------------------------------------------------
 
22  Supplementary leverage ratio............................                     (in percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 57750, Sept. 26, 2014; 
80 FR 41425, July 15, 2015]



Secs. 324.174-324.200  [Reserved]



               Subpart F_Risk-Weighted Assets_Market Risk



Sec. 324.201  Purpose, applicability, and reservation of authority.

    (a) Purpose. This subpart F establishes risk-based capital 
requirements for FDIC-supervised institutions with significant exposure 
to market risk, provides methods for these FDIC-supervised institutions 
to calculate their standardized measure for market risk and, if 
applicable, advanced measure for market risk, and establishes public 
disclosure requirements.
    (b) Applicability. (1) This subpart F applies to any FDIC-supervised 
institution with aggregate trading assets and trading liabilities (as 
reported in the FDIC-supervised institution's most recent quarterly Call 
Report), equal to:

[[Page 366]]

    (i) 10 percent or more of quarter-end total assets as reported on 
the most recent quarterly Call Report; or
    (ii) $1 billion or more.
    (2) The FDIC may apply this subpart to any FDIC-supervised 
institution if the FDIC deems it necessary or appropriate because of the 
level of market risk of the FDIC-supervised institution or to ensure 
safe and sound banking practices.
    (3) The FDIC may exclude an FDIC-supervised institution that meets 
the criteria of paragraph (b)(1) of this section from application of 
this subpart if the FDIC determines that the exclusion is appropriate 
based on the level of market risk of the FDIC-supervised institution and 
is consistent with safe and sound banking practices.
    (c) Reservation of authority (1) The FDIC may require an FDIC-
supervised institution to hold an amount of capital greater than 
otherwise required under this subpart if the FDIC determines that the 
FDIC-supervised institution's capital requirement for market risk as 
calculated under this subpart is not commensurate with the market risk 
of the FDIC-supervised institution's covered positions. In making 
determinations under paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section, 
the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures generally in the same 
manner as the notice and response procedures set forth in Sec. 324.5(c).
    (2) If the FDIC determines that the risk-based capital requirement 
calculated under this subpart by the FDIC-supervised institution for one 
or more covered positions or portfolios of covered positions is not 
commensurate with the risks associated with those positions or 
portfolios, the FDIC may require the FDIC-supervised institution to 
assign a different risk-based capital requirement to the positions or 
portfolios that more accurately reflects the risk of the positions or 
portfolios.
    (3) The FDIC may also require an FDIC-supervised institution to 
calculate risk-based capital requirements for specific positions or 
portfolios under this subpart, or under subpart D or subpart E of this 
part, as appropriate, to more accurately reflect the risks of the 
positions.
    (4) Nothing in this subpart limits the authority of the FDIC under 
any other provision of law or regulation to take supervisory or 
enforcement action, including action to address unsafe or unsound 
practices or conditions, deficient capital levels, or violations of law.



Sec. 324.202  Definitions.

    (a) Terms set forth in Sec. 324.2 and used in this subpart have the 
definitions assigned thereto in Sec. 324.2.
    (b) For the purposes of this subpart, the following terms are 
defined as follows:
    Backtesting means the comparison of an FDIC-supervised institution's 
internal estimates with actual outcomes during a sample period not used 
in model development. For purposes of this subpart, backtesting is one 
form of out-of-sample testing.
    Commodity position means a position for which price risk arises from 
changes in the price of a commodity.
    Corporate debt position means a debt position that is an exposure to 
a company that is not a sovereign entity, the Bank for International 
Settlements, the European Central Bank, the European Commission, the 
International Monetary Fund, a multilateral development bank, a 
depository institution, a foreign bank, a credit union, a public sector 
entity, a GSE, or a securitization.
    Correlation trading position means:
    (1) A securitization position for which all or substantially all of 
the value of the underlying exposures is based on the credit quality of 
a single company for which a two-way market exists, or on commonly 
traded indices based on such exposures for which a two-way market exists 
on the indices; or
    (2) A position that is not a securitization position and that hedges 
a position described in paragraph (1) of this definition; and
    (3) A correlation trading position does not include:
    (i) A resecuritization position;
    (ii) A derivative of a securitization position that does not provide 
a pro rata share in the proceeds of a securitization tranche; or

[[Page 367]]

    (iii) A securitization position for which the underlying assets or 
reference exposures are retail exposures, residential mortgage 
exposures, or commercial mortgage exposures.
    Covered position means the following positions:
    (1) A trading asset or trading liability (whether on- or off-balance 
sheet),\31\ as reported on Call Report, that meets the following 
conditions:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \31\ Securities subject to repurchase and lending agreements are 
included as if they are still owned by the lender.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) The position is a trading position or hedges another covered 
position; \32\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \32\ A position that hedges a trading position must be within the 
scope of the bank's hedging strategy as described in paragraph (a)(2) of 
Sec. 324.203.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The position is free of any restrictive covenants on its 
tradability or the FDIC-supervised institution is able to hedge the 
material risk elements of the position in a two-way market;
    (2) A foreign exchange or commodity position, regardless of whether 
the position is a trading asset or trading liability (excluding any 
structural foreign currency positions that the FDIC-supervised 
institution chooses to exclude with prior supervisory approval); and
    (3) Notwithstanding paragraphs (1) and (2) of this definition, a 
covered position does not include:
    (i) An intangible asset, including any servicing asset;
    (ii) Any hedge of a trading position that the FDIC determines to be 
outside the scope of the FDIC-supervised institution's hedging strategy 
required in paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 324.203;
    (iii) Any position that, in form or substance, acts as a liquidity 
facility that provides support to asset-backed commercial paper;
    (iv) A credit derivative the FDIC-supervised institution recognizes 
as a guarantee for risk-weighted asset amount calculation purposes under 
subpart D or subpart E of this part;
    (v) Any position that is recognized as a credit valuation adjustment 
hedge under Sec. 324.132(e)(5) or Sec. 324.132(e)(6), except as provided 
in Sec. 324.132(e)(6)(vii);
    (vi) Any equity position that is not publicly traded, other than a 
derivative that references a publicly traded equity and other than a 
position in an investment company as defined in and registered with the 
SEC under the Investment Company Act, provided that all the underlying 
equities held by the investment company are publicly traded;
    (vii) Any equity position that is not publicly traded, other than a 
derivative that references a publicly traded equity and other than a 
position in an entity not domiciled in the United States (or a political 
subdivision thereof) that is supervised and regulated in a manner 
similar to entities described in paragraph (3)(vi) of this definition;
    (viii) Any position an FDIC-supervised institution holds with the 
intent to securitize; or
    (ix) Any direct real estate holding.
    Debt position means a covered position that is not a securitization 
position or a correlation trading position and that has a value that 
reacts primarily to changes in interest rates or credit spreads.
    Default by a sovereign entity has the same meaning as the term 
sovereign default under Sec. 324.2.
    Equity position means a covered position that is not a 
securitization position or a correlation trading position and that has a 
value that reacts primarily to changes in equity prices.
    Event risk means the risk of loss on equity or hybrid equity 
positions as a result of a financial event, such as the announcement or 
occurrence of a company merger, acquisition, spin-off, or dissolution.
    Foreign exchange position means a position for which price risk 
arises from changes in foreign exchange rates.
    General market risk means the risk of loss that could result from 
broad market movements, such as changes in the general level of interest 
rates, credit spreads, equity prices, foreign exchange rates, or 
commodity prices.
    Hedge means a position or positions that offset all, or 
substantially all, of one or more material risk factors of another 
position.
    Idiosyncratic risk means the risk of loss in the value of a position 
that arises from changes in risk factors unique to that position.

[[Page 368]]

    Incremental risk means the default risk and credit migration risk of 
a position. Default risk means the risk of loss on a position that could 
result from the failure of an obligor to make timely payments of 
principal or interest on its debt obligation, and the risk of loss that 
could result from bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding. Credit 
migration risk means the price risk that arises from significant changes 
in the underlying credit quality of the position.
    Market risk means the risk of loss on a position that could result 
from movements in market prices.
    Resecuritization position means a covered position that is:
    (1) An on- or off-balance sheet exposure to a resecuritization; or
    (2) An exposure that directly or indirectly references a 
resecuritization exposure in paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties;
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches that reflect different levels 
of seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures;
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities);
    (5) For non-synthetic securitizations, the underlying exposures are 
not owned by an operating company;
    (6) The underlying exposures are not owned by a small business 
investment company described in section 302 of the Small Business 
Investment Act;
    (7) The underlying exposures are not owned by a firm an investment 
in which qualifies as a community development investment under section 
24(Eleventh) of the National Bank Act;
    (8) The FDIC may determine that a transaction in which the 
underlying exposures are owned by an investment firm that exercises 
substantially unfettered control over the size and composition of its 
assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet exposures is not a 
securitization based on the transaction's leverage, risk profile, or 
economic substance;
    (9) The FDIC may deem an exposure to a transaction that meets the 
definition of a securitization, notwithstanding paragraph (5), (6), or 
(7) of this definition, to be a securitization based on the 
transaction's leverage, risk profile, or economic substance; and
    (10) The transaction is not:
    (i) An investment fund;
    (ii) A collective investment fund (as defined in 12 CFR 344.3 (state 
nonmember bank) and 12 CFR 390.203 (state savings association));
    (iii) An employee benefit plan as defined in paragraphs (3) and (32) 
of section 3 of ERISA, a ``governmental plan'' (as defined in 29 USC 
1002(32)) that complies with the tax deferral qualification requirements 
provided in the Internal Revenue Code, or any similar employee benefit 
plan established under the laws of a foreign jurisdiction; or
    (iv) Registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act or 
foreign equivalents thereof.
    Securitization position means a covered position that is:
    (1) An on-balance sheet or off-balance sheet credit exposure 
(including credit-enhancing representations and warranties) that arises 
from a securitization (including a resecuritization); or
    (2) An exposure that directly or indirectly references a 
securitization exposure described in paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Sovereign debt position means a direct exposure to a sovereign 
entity.
    Specific risk means the risk of loss on a position that could result 
from factors other than broad market movements and includes event risk, 
default risk, and idiosyncratic risk.
    Structural position in a foreign currency means a position that is 
not a trading position and that is:
    (1) Subordinated debt, equity, or minority interest in a 
consolidated subsidiary that is denominated in a foreign currency;

[[Page 369]]

    (2) Capital assigned to foreign branches that is denominated in a 
foreign currency;
    (3) A position related to an unconsolidated subsidiary or another 
item that is denominated in a foreign currency and that is deducted from 
the FDIC-supervised institution's tier 1 or tier 2 capital; or
    (4) A position designed to hedge an FDIC-supervised institution's 
capital ratios or earnings against the effect on paragraphs (1), (2), or 
(3) of this definition of adverse exchange rate movements.
    Term repo-style transaction means a repo-style transaction that has 
an original maturity in excess of one business day.
    Trading position means a position that is held by the FDIC-
supervised institution for the purpose of short-term resale or with the 
intent of benefiting from actual or expected short-term price movements, 
or to lock in arbitrage profits.
    Two-way market means a market where there are independent bona fide 
offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last 
sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations 
can be determined within one day and settled at that price within a 
relatively short time frame conforming to trade custom.
    Value-at-Risk (VaR) means the estimate of the maximum amount that 
the value of one or more positions could decline due to market price or 
rate movements during a fixed holding period within a stated confidence 
interval.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Sec. 324.203  Requirements for application of this subpart F.

    (a) Trading positions--(1) Identification of trading positions. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must have clearly defined policies and 
procedures for determining which of its trading assets and trading 
liabilities are trading positions and which of its trading positions are 
correlation trading positions. These policies and procedures must take 
into account:
    (i) The extent to which a position, or a hedge of its material 
risks, can be marked-to-market daily by reference to a two-way market; 
and
    (ii) Possible impairments to the liquidity of a position or its 
hedge.
    (2) Trading and hedging strategies. An FDIC-supervised institution 
must have clearly defined trading and hedging strategies for its trading 
positions that are approved by senior management of the FDIC-supervised 
institution.
    (i) The trading strategy must articulate the expected holding period 
of, and the market risk associated with, each portfolio of trading 
positions.
    (ii) The hedging strategy must articulate for each portfolio of 
trading positions the level of market risk the FDIC-supervised 
institution is willing to accept and must detail the instruments, 
techniques, and strategies the FDIC-supervised institution will use to 
hedge the risk of the portfolio.
    (b) Management of covered positions--(1) Active management. An FDIC-
supervised institution must have clearly defined policies and procedures 
for actively managing all covered positions. At a minimum, these 
policies and procedures must require:
    (i) Marking positions to market or to model on a daily basis;
    (ii) Daily assessment of the FDIC-supervised institution's ability 
to hedge position and portfolio risks, and of the extent of market 
liquidity;
    (iii) Establishment and daily monitoring of limits on positions by a 
risk control unit independent of the trading business unit;
    (iv) Daily monitoring by senior management of information described 
in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of this section;
    (v) At least annual reassessment of established limits on positions 
by senior management; and
    (vi) At least annual assessments by qualified personnel of the 
quality of market inputs to the valuation process, the soundness of key 
assumptions, the reliability of parameter estimation in pricing models, 
and the stability and accuracy of model calibration under alternative 
market scenarios.
    (2) Valuation of covered positions. The FDIC-supervised institution 
must have a process for prudent valuation of its

[[Page 370]]

covered positions that includes policies and procedures on the valuation 
of positions, marking positions to market or to model, independent price 
verification, and valuation adjustments or reserves. The valuation 
process must consider, as appropriate, unearned credit spreads, close-
out costs, early termination costs, investing and funding costs, 
liquidity, and model risk.
    (c) Requirements for internal models. (1) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC before 
using any internal model to calculate its risk-based capital requirement 
under this subpart.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must meet all of the requirements 
of this section on an ongoing basis. The FDIC-supervised institution 
must promptly notify the FDIC when:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution plans to extend the use of a 
model that the FDIC has approved under this subpart to an additional 
business line or product type;
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution makes any change to an internal 
model approved by the FDIC under this subpart that would result in a 
material change in the FDIC-supervised institution's risk-weighted asset 
amount for a portfolio of covered positions; or
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution makes any material change to 
its modeling assumptions.
    (3) The FDIC may rescind its approval of the use of any internal 
model (in whole or in part) or of the determination of the approach 
under Sec. 324.209(a)(2)(ii) for an FDIC-supervised institution's 
modeled correlation trading positions and determine an appropriate 
capital requirement for the covered positions to which the model would 
apply, if the FDIC determines that the model no longer complies with 
this subpart or fails to reflect accurately the risks of the FDIC-
supervised institution's covered positions.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution must periodically, but no less 
frequently than annually, review its internal models in light of 
developments in financial markets and modeling technologies, and enhance 
those models as appropriate to ensure that they continue to meet the 
FDIC's standards for model approval and employ risk measurement 
methodologies that are most appropriate for the FDIC-supervised 
institution's covered positions.
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must incorporate its internal 
models into its risk management process and integrate the internal 
models used for calculating its VaR-based measure into its daily risk 
management process.
    (6) The level of sophistication of an FDIC-supervised institution's 
internal models must be commensurate with the complexity and amount of 
its covered positions. An FDIC-supervised institution's internal models 
may use any of the generally accepted approaches, including but not 
limited to variance-covariance models, historical simulations, or Monte 
Carlo simulations, to measure market risk.
    (7) The FDIC-supervised institution's internal models must properly 
measure all the material risks in the covered positions to which they 
are applied.
    (8) The FDIC-supervised institution's internal models must 
conservatively assess the risks arising from less liquid positions and 
positions with limited price transparency under realistic market 
scenarios.
    (9) The FDIC-supervised institution must have a rigorous and well-
defined process for re-estimating, re-evaluating, and updating its 
internal models to ensure continued applicability and relevance.
    (10) If an FDIC-supervised institution uses internal models to 
measure specific risk, the internal models must also satisfy the 
requirements in paragraph (b)(1) of Sec. 324.207.
    (d) Control, oversight, and validation mechanisms. (1) The FDIC-
supervised institution must have a risk control unit that reports 
directly to senior management and is independent from the business 
trading units.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution must validate its internal 
models initially and on an ongoing basis. The FDIC-supervised 
institution's validation process must be independent of the internal 
models' development, implementation, and operation, or the validation 
process must be subjected to an independent review of its adequacy and 
effectiveness. Validation must include:

[[Page 371]]

    (i) An evaluation of the conceptual soundness of (including 
developmental evidence supporting) the internal models;
    (ii) An ongoing monitoring process that includes verification of 
processes and the comparison of the FDIC-supervised institution's model 
outputs with relevant internal and external data sources or estimation 
techniques; and
    (iii) An outcomes analysis process that includes backtesting. For 
internal models used to calculate the VaR-based measure, this process 
must include a comparison of the changes in the FDIC-supervised 
institution's portfolio value that would have occurred were end-of-day 
positions to remain unchanged (therefore, excluding fees, commissions, 
reserves, net interest income, and intraday trading) with VaR-based 
measures during a sample period not used in model development.
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution must stress test the market risk 
of its covered positions at a frequency appropriate to each portfolio, 
and in no case less frequently than quarterly. The stress tests must 
take into account concentration risk (including but not limited to 
concentrations in single issuers, industries, sectors, or markets), 
illiquidity under stressed market conditions, and risks arising from the 
FDIC-supervised institution's trading activities that may not be 
adequately captured in its internal models.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution must have an internal audit 
function independent of business-line management that at least annually 
assesses the effectiveness of the controls supporting the FDIC-
supervised institution's market risk measurement systems, including the 
activities of the business trading units and independent risk control 
unit, compliance with policies and procedures, and calculation of the 
FDIC-supervised institution's measures for market risk under this 
subpart. At least annually, the internal audit function must report its 
findings to the FDIC-supervised institution's board of directors (or a 
committee thereof).
    (e) Internal assessment of capital adequacy. The FDIC-supervised 
institution must have a rigorous process for assessing its overall 
capital adequacy in relation to its market risk. The assessment must 
take into account risks that may not be captured fully in the VaR-based 
measure, including concentration and liquidity risk under stressed 
market conditions.
    (f) Documentation. The FDIC-supervised institution must adequately 
document all material aspects of its internal models, management and 
valuation of covered positions, control, oversight, validation and 
review processes and results, and internal assessment of capital 
adequacy.



Sec. 324.204  Measure for market risk.

    (a) General requirement. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate its standardized measure for market risk by following the 
steps described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. An advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution also must calculate an advanced 
measure for market risk by following the steps in paragraph (a)(2) of 
this section.
    (2) Measure for market risk. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate the standardized measure for market risk, which equals the sum 
of the VaR-based capital requirement, stressed VaR-based capital 
requirement, specific risk add-ons, incremental risk capital 
requirement, comprehensive risk capital requirement, and capital 
requirement for de minimis exposures all as defined under this paragraph 
(a)(2), (except, that the FDIC-supervised institution may not use the 
SFA in Sec. 324.210(b)(2)(vii)(B) for purposes of this calculation), 
plus any additional capital requirement established by the FDIC. An 
advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution that has completed the 
parallel run process and that has received notifications from the FDIC 
pursuant to Sec. 324.121(d) also must calculate the advanced measure for 
market risk, which equals the sum of the VaR-based capital requirement, 
stressed VaR-based capital requirement, specific risk add-ons, 
incremental risk capital requirement, comprehensive risk capital 
requirement, and capital requirement for de minimis exposures as defined 
under this paragraph (a)(2), plus any additional capital requirement 
established by the FDIC.

[[Page 372]]

    (i) VaR-based capital requirement. An FDIC-supervised institution's 
VaR-based capital requirement equals the greater of:
    (A) The previous day's VaR-based measure as calculated under 
Sec. 324.205; or
    (B) The average of the daily VaR-based measures as calculated under 
Sec. 324.205 for each of the preceding 60 business days multiplied by 
three, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (ii) Stressed VaR-based capital requirement. An FDIC-supervised 
institution's stressed VaR-based capital requirement equals the greater 
of:
    (A) The most recent stressed VaR-based measure as calculated under 
Sec. 324.206; or
    (B) The average of the stressed VaR-based measures as calculated 
under Sec. 324.206 for each of the preceding 12 weeks multiplied by 
three, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (iii) Specific risk add-ons. An FDIC-supervised institution's 
specific risk add-ons equal any specific risk add-ons that are required 
under Sec. 324.207 and are calculated in accordance with Sec. 324.210.
    (iv) Incremental risk capital requirement. An FDIC-supervised 
institution's incremental risk capital requirement equals any 
incremental risk capital requirement as calculated under Sec. 324.208.
    (v) Comprehensive risk capital requirement. An FDIC-supervised 
institution's comprehensive risk capital requirement equals any 
comprehensive risk capital requirement as calculated under Sec. 324.209.
    (vi) Capital requirement for de minimis exposures. An FDIC-
supervised institution's capital requirement for de minimis exposures 
equals:
    (A) The absolute value of the fair value of those de minimis 
exposures that are not captured in the FDIC-supervised institution's 
VaR-based measure or under paragraph (a)(2)(vi)(B) of this section; and
    (B) With the prior written approval of the FDIC, the capital 
requirement for any de minimis exposures using alternative techniques 
that appropriately measure the market risk associated with those 
exposures.
    (b) Backtesting. An FDIC-supervised institution must compare each of 
its most recent 250 business days' trading losses (excluding fees, 
commissions, reserves, net interest income, and intraday trading) with 
the corresponding daily VaR-based measures calibrated to a one-day 
holding period and at a one-tail, 99.0 percent confidence level. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must begin backtesting as required by this 
paragraph (b) no later than one year after the later of January 1, 2014, 
and the date on which the FDIC-supervised institution becomes subject to 
this subpart. In the interim, consistent with safety and soundness 
principles, an FDIC-supervised institution subject to this subpart as of 
January 1, 2014 should continue to follow backtesting procedures in 
accordance with the FDIC's supervisory expectations.
    (1) Once each quarter, the FDIC-supervised institution must identify 
the number of exceptions (that is, the number of business days for which 
the actual daily net trading loss, if any, exceeds the corresponding 
daily VaR-based measure) that have occurred over the preceding 250 
business days.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must use the multiplication 
factor in Table 1 to Sec. 324.204 that corresponds to the number of 
exceptions identified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section to determine 
its VaR-based capital requirement for market risk under paragraph 
(a)(2)(i) of this section and to determine its stressed VaR-based 
capital requirement for market risk under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this 
section until it obtains the next quarter's backtesting results, unless 
the FDIC notifies the FDIC-supervised institution in writing that a 
different adjustment or other action is appropriate.

  Table 1 to Sec. 324.204--Multiplication Factors Based on Results of
                               Backtesting
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Multiplication
                 Number of exceptions                        factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 or fewer...........................................               3.00
5....................................................               3.40
6....................................................               3.50
7....................................................               3.65
8....................................................               3.75
9....................................................               3.85
10 or more...........................................               4.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 373]]



Sec. 324.205  VaR-based measure.

    (a) General requirement. An FDIC-supervised institution must use one 
or more internal models to calculate daily a VaR-based measure of the 
general market risk of all covered positions. The daily VaR-based 
measure also may reflect the FDIC-supervised institution's specific risk 
for one or more portfolios of debt and equity positions, if the internal 
models meet the requirements of Sec. 324.207(b)(1). The daily VaR-based 
measure must also reflect the FDIC-supervised institution's specific 
risk for any portfolio of correlation trading positions that is modeled 
under Sec. 324.209. An FDIC-supervised institution may elect to include 
term repo-style transactions in its VaR-based measure, provided that the 
FDIC-supervised institution includes all such term repo-style 
transactions consistently over time.
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's internal models for 
calculating its VaR-based measure must use risk factors sufficient to 
measure the market risk inherent in all covered positions. The market 
risk categories must include, as appropriate, interest rate risk, credit 
spread risk, equity price risk, foreign exchange risk, and commodity 
price risk. For material positions in the major currencies and markets, 
modeling techniques must incorporate enough segments of the yield 
curve--in no case less than six--to capture differences in volatility 
and less than perfect correlation of rates along the yield curve.
    (2) The VaR-based measure may incorporate empirical correlations 
within and across risk categories, provided the FDIC-supervised 
institution validates and demonstrates the reasonableness of its process 
for measuring correlations. If the VaR-based measure does not 
incorporate empirical correlations across risk categories, the FDIC-
supervised institution must add the separate measures from its internal 
models used to calculate the VaR-based measure for the appropriate 
market risk categories (interest rate risk, credit spread risk, equity 
price risk, foreign exchange rate risk, and/or commodity price risk) to 
determine its aggregate VaR-based measure.
    (3) The VaR-based measure must include the risks arising from the 
nonlinear price characteristics of options positions or positions with 
embedded optionality and the sensitivity of the fair value of the 
positions to changes in the volatility of the underlying rates, prices, 
or other material risk factors. An FDIC-supervised institution with a 
large or complex options portfolio must measure the volatility of 
options positions or positions with embedded optionality by different 
maturities and/or strike prices, where material.
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution must be able to justify to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC the omission of any risk factors from the 
calculation of its VaR-based measure that the FDIC-supervised 
institution uses in its pricing models.
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC the appropriateness of any proxies used to 
capture the risks of the FDIC-supervised institution's actual positions 
for which such proxies are used.
    (b) Quantitative requirements for VaR-based measure. (1) The VaR-
based measure must be calculated on a daily basis using a one-tail, 99.0 
percent confidence level, and a holding period equivalent to a 10-
business-day movement in underlying risk factors, such as rates, 
spreads, and prices. To calculate VaR-based measures using a 10-
business-day holding period, the FDIC-supervised institution may 
calculate 10-business-day measures directly or may convert VaR-based 
measures using holding periods other than 10 business days to the 
equivalent of a 10-business-day holding period. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that converts its VaR-based measure in such a manner must be 
able to justify the reasonableness of its approach to the satisfaction 
of the FDIC.
    (2) The VaR-based measure must be based on a historical observation 
period of at least one year. Data used to determine the VaR-based 
measure must be relevant to the FDIC-supervised institution's actual 
exposures and of sufficient quality to support the calculation of risk-
based capital requirements. The FDIC-supervised institution must update 
data sets at least monthly or more frequently as changes

[[Page 374]]

in market conditions or portfolio composition warrant. For an FDIC-
supervised institution that uses a weighting scheme or other method for 
the historical observation period, the FDIC-supervised institution must 
either:
    (i) Use an effective observation period of at least one year in 
which the average time lag of the observations is at least six months; 
or
    (ii) Demonstrate to the FDIC that its weighting scheme is more 
effective than a weighting scheme with an average time lag of at least 
six months representing the volatility of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's trading portfolio over a full business cycle. An FDIC-
supervised institution using this option must update its data more 
frequently than monthly and in a manner appropriate for the type of 
weighting scheme.
    (c) An FDIC-supervised institution must divide its portfolio into a 
number of significant subportfolios approved by the FDIC for 
subportfolio backtesting purposes. These subportfolios must be 
sufficient to allow the FDIC-supervised institution and the FDIC to 
assess the adequacy of the VaR model at the risk factor level; the FDIC 
will evaluate the appropriateness of these subportfolios relative to the 
value and composition of the FDIC-supervised institution's covered 
positions. The FDIC-supervised institution must retain and make 
available to the FDIC the following information for each subportfolio 
for each business day over the previous two years (500 business days), 
with no more than a 60-day lag:
    (1) A daily VaR-based measure for the subportfolio calibrated to a 
one-tail, 99.0 percent confidence level;
    (2) The daily profit or loss for the subportfolio (that is, the net 
change in price of the positions held in the portfolio at the end of the 
previous business day); and
    (3) The p-value of the profit or loss on each day (that is, the 
probability of observing a profit that is less than, or a loss that is 
greater than, the amount reported for purposes of paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section based on the model used to calculate the VaR-based measure 
described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section).



Sec. 324.206  Stressed VaR-based measure.

    (a) General requirement. At least weekly, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must use the same internal model(s) used to calculate its 
VaR-based measure to calculate a stressed VaR-based measure.
    (b) Quantitative requirements for stressed VaR-based measure. (1) An 
FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a stressed VaR-based measure 
for its covered positions using the same model(s) used to calculate the 
VaR-based measure, subject to the same confidence level and holding 
period applicable to the VaR-based measure under Sec. 324.205, but with 
model inputs calibrated to historical data from a continuous 12-month 
period that reflects a period of significant financial stress 
appropriate to the FDIC-supervised institution's current portfolio.
    (2) The stressed VaR-based measure must be calculated at least 
weekly and be no less than the FDIC-supervised institution's VaR-based 
measure.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must have policies and procedures 
that describe how it determines the period of significant financial 
stress used to calculate the FDIC-supervised institution's stressed VaR-
based measure under this section and must be able to provide empirical 
support for the period used. The FDIC-supervised institution must obtain 
the prior approval of the FDIC for, and notify the FDIC if the FDIC-
supervised institution makes any material changes to, these policies and 
procedures. The policies and procedures must address:
    (i) How the FDIC-supervised institution links the period of 
significant financial stress used to calculate the stressed VaR-based 
measure to the composition and directional bias of its current 
portfolio; and
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution's process for selecting, 
reviewing, and updating the period of significant financial stress used 
to calculate the stressed VaR-based measure and for monitoring the 
appropriateness of the period to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
current portfolio.
    (4) Nothing in this section prevents the FDIC from requiring an 
FDIC-supervised institution to use a different period of significant 
financial stress in

[[Page 375]]

the calculation of the stressed VaR-based measure.



Sec. 324.207  Specific risk.

    (a) General requirement. An FDIC-supervised institution must use one 
of the methods in this section to measure the specific risk for each of 
its debt, equity, and securitization positions with specific risk.
    (b) Modeled specific risk. An FDIC-supervised institution may use 
models to measure the specific risk of covered positions as provided in 
Sec. 324.205(a) (therefore, excluding securitization positions that are 
not modeled under Sec. 324.209). An FDIC-supervised institution must use 
models to measure the specific risk of correlation trading positions 
that are modeled under Sec. 324.209.
    (1) Requirements for specific risk modeling. (i) If an FDIC-
supervised institution uses internal models to measure the specific risk 
of a portfolio, the internal models must:
    (A) Explain the historical price variation in the portfolio;
    (B) Be responsive to changes in market conditions;
    (C) Be robust to an adverse environment, including signaling rising 
risk in an adverse environment; and
    (D) Capture all material components of specific risk for the debt 
and equity positions in the portfolio. Specifically, the internal models 
must:
    (1) Capture event risk and idiosyncratic risk; and
    (2) Capture and demonstrate sensitivity to material differences 
between positions that are similar but not identical and to changes in 
portfolio composition and concentrations.
    (ii) If an FDIC-supervised institution calculates an incremental 
risk measure for a portfolio of debt or equity positions under 
Sec. 324.208, the FDIC-supervised institution is not required to capture 
default and credit migration risks in its internal models used to 
measure the specific risk of those portfolios.
    (2) Specific risk fully modeled for one or more portfolios. If the 
FDIC-supervised institution's VaR-based measure captures all material 
aspects of specific risk for one or more of its portfolios of debt, 
equity, or correlation trading positions, the FDIC-supervised 
institution has no specific risk add-on for those portfolios for 
purposes of Sec. 324.204(a)(2)(iii).
    (c) Specific risk not modeled. (1) If the FDIC-supervised 
institution's VaR-based measure does not capture all material aspects of 
specific risk for a portfolio of debt, equity, or correlation trading 
positions, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a specific-
risk add-on for the portfolio under the standardized measurement method 
as described in Sec. 324.210.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a specific risk 
add-on under the standardized measurement method as described in 
Sec. 324.210 for all of its securitization positions that are not 
modeled under Sec. 324.209.



Sec. 324.208  Incremental risk.

    (a) General requirement. An FDIC-supervised institution that 
measures the specific risk of a portfolio of debt positions under 
Sec. 324.207(b) using internal models must calculate at least weekly an 
incremental risk measure for that portfolio according to the 
requirements in this section. The incremental risk measure is the FDIC-
supervised institution's measure of potential losses due to incremental 
risk over a one-year time horizon at a one-tail, 99.9 percent confidence 
level, either under the assumption of a constant level of risk, or under 
the assumption of constant positions. With the prior approval of the 
FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may choose to include portfolios of 
equity positions in its incremental risk model, provided that it 
consistently includes such equity positions in a manner that is 
consistent with how the FDIC-supervised institution internally measures 
and manages the incremental risk of such positions at the portfolio 
level. If equity positions are included in the model, for modeling 
purposes default is considered to have occurred upon the default of any 
debt of the issuer of the equity position. An FDIC-supervised 
institution may not include correlation trading positions or 
securitization positions in its incremental risk measure.
    (b) Requirements for incremental risk modeling. For purposes of 
calculating the incremental risk measure, the incremental risk model 
must:

[[Page 376]]

    (1) Measure incremental risk over a one-year time horizon and at a 
one-tail, 99.9 percent confidence level, either under the assumption of 
a constant level of risk, or under the assumption of constant positions.
    (i) A constant level of risk assumption means that the FDIC-
supervised institution rebalances, or rolls over, its trading positions 
at the beginning of each liquidity horizon over the one-year horizon in 
a manner that maintains the FDIC-supervised institution's initial risk 
level. The FDIC-supervised institution must determine the frequency of 
rebalancing in a manner consistent with the liquidity horizons of the 
positions in the portfolio. The liquidity horizon of a position or set 
of positions is the time required for an FDIC-supervised institution to 
reduce its exposure to, or hedge all of its material risks of, the 
position(s) in a stressed market. The liquidity horizon for a position 
or set of positions may not be less than the shorter of three months or 
the contractual maturity of the position.
    (ii) A constant position assumption means that the FDIC-supervised 
institution maintains the same set of positions throughout the one-year 
horizon. If an FDIC-supervised institution uses this assumption, it must 
do so consistently across all portfolios.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution's selection of a constant 
position or a constant risk assumption must be consistent between the 
FDIC-supervised institution's incremental risk model and its 
comprehensive risk model described in Sec. 324.209, if applicable.
    (iv) An FDIC-supervised institution's treatment of liquidity 
horizons must be consistent between the FDIC-supervised institution's 
incremental risk model and its comprehensive risk model described in 
Sec. 324.209, if applicable.
    (2) Recognize the impact of correlations between default and 
migration events among obligors.
    (3) Reflect the effect of issuer and market concentrations, as well 
as concentrations that can arise within and across product classes 
during stressed conditions.
    (4) Reflect netting only of long and short positions that reference 
the same financial instrument.
    (5) Reflect any material mismatch between a position and its hedge.
    (6) Recognize the effect that liquidity horizons have on dynamic 
hedging strategies. In such cases, an FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (i) Choose to model the rebalancing of the hedge consistently over 
the relevant set of trading positions;
    (ii) Demonstrate that the inclusion of rebalancing results in a more 
appropriate risk measurement;
    (iii) Demonstrate that the market for the hedge is sufficiently 
liquid to permit rebalancing during periods of stress; and
    (iv) Capture in the incremental risk model any residual risks 
arising from such hedging strategies.
    (7) Reflect the nonlinear impact of options and other positions with 
material nonlinear behavior with respect to default and migration 
changes.
    (8) Maintain consistency with the FDIC-supervised institution's 
internal risk management methodologies for identifying, measuring, and 
managing risk.
    (c) Calculation of incremental risk capital requirement. The 
incremental risk capital requirement is the greater of:
    (1) The average of the incremental risk measures over the previous 
12 weeks; or
    (2) The most recent incremental risk measure.



Sec. 324.209  Comprehensive risk.

    (a) General requirement. (1) Subject to the prior approval of the 
FDIC, an FDIC-supervised institution may use the method in this section 
to measure comprehensive risk, that is, all price risk, for one or more 
portfolios of correlation trading positions.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that measures the price risk of a 
portfolio of correlation trading positions using internal models must 
calculate at least weekly a comprehensive risk measure that captures all 
price risk according to the requirements of this section. The 
comprehensive risk measure is either:
    (i) The sum of:

[[Page 377]]

    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution's modeled measure of all price 
risk determined according to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this 
section; and
    (B) A surcharge for the FDIC-supervised institution's modeled 
correlation trading positions equal to the total specific risk add-on 
for such positions as calculated under Sec. 324.210 multiplied by 8.0 
percent; or
    (ii) With approval of the FDIC and provided the FDIC-supervised 
institution has met the requirements of this section for a period of at 
least one year and can demonstrate the effectiveness of the model 
through the results of ongoing model validation efforts including robust 
benchmarking, the greater of:
    (A) The FDIC-supervised institution's modeled measure of all price 
risk determined according to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this 
section; or
    (B) The total specific risk add-on that would apply to the bank's 
modeled correlation trading positions as calculated under Sec. 324.210 
multiplied by 8.0 percent.
    (b) Requirements for modeling all price risk. If an FDIC-supervised 
institution uses an internal model to measure the price risk of a 
portfolio of correlation trading positions:
    (1) The internal model must measure comprehensive risk over a one-
year time horizon at a one-tail, 99.9 percent confidence level, either 
under the assumption of a constant level of risk, or under the 
assumption of constant positions.
    (2) The model must capture all material price risk, including but 
not limited to the following:
    (i) The risks associated with the contractual structure of cash 
flows of the position, its issuer, and its underlying exposures;
    (ii) Credit spread risk, including nonlinear price risks;
    (iii) The volatility of implied correlations, including nonlinear 
price risks such as the cross-effect between spreads and correlations;
    (iv) Basis risk;
    (v) Recovery rate volatility as it relates to the propensity for 
recovery rates to affect tranche prices; and
    (vi) To the extent the comprehensive risk measure incorporates the 
benefits of dynamic hedging, the static nature of the hedge over the 
liquidity horizon must be recognized. In such cases, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must:
    (A) Choose to model the rebalancing of the hedge consistently over 
the relevant set of trading positions;
    (B) Demonstrate that the inclusion of rebalancing results in a more 
appropriate risk measurement;
    (C) Demonstrate that the market for the hedge is sufficiently liquid 
to permit rebalancing during periods of stress; and
    (D) Capture in the comprehensive risk model any residual risks 
arising from such hedging strategies;
    (3) The FDIC-supervised institution must use market data that are 
relevant in representing the risk profile of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's correlation trading positions in order to ensure that the 
FDIC-supervised institution fully captures the material risks of the 
correlation trading positions in its comprehensive risk measure in 
accordance with this section; and
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution must be able to demonstrate that 
its model is an appropriate representation of comprehensive risk in 
light of the historical price variation of its correlation trading 
positions.
    (c) Requirements for stress testing. (1) An FDIC-supervised 
institution must at least weekly apply specific, supervisory stress 
scenarios to its portfolio of correlation trading positions that capture 
changes in:
    (i) Default rates;
    (ii) Recovery rates;
    (iii) Credit spreads;
    (iv) Correlations of underlying exposures; and
    (v) Correlations of a correlation trading position and its hedge.
    (2) Other requirements. (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must 
retain and make available to the FDIC the results of the supervisory 
stress testing, including comparisons with the capital requirements 
generated by the FDIC-supervised institution's comprehensive risk model.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must report to the FDIC promptly 
any

[[Page 378]]

instances where the stress tests indicate any material deficiencies in 
the comprehensive risk model.
    (d) Calculation of comprehensive risk capital requirement. The 
comprehensive risk capital requirement is the greater of:
    (1) The average of the comprehensive risk measures over the previous 
12 weeks; or
    (2) The most recent comprehensive risk measure.



Sec. 324.210  Standardized measurement method for specific risk.

    (a) General requirement. An FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate a total specific risk add-on for each portfolio of debt and 
equity positions for which the FDIC-supervised institution's VaR-based 
measure does not capture all material aspects of specific risk and for 
all securitization positions that are not modeled under Sec. 324.209. An 
FDIC-supervised institution must calculate each specific risk add-on in 
accordance with the requirements of this section. Notwithstanding any 
other definition or requirement in this subpart, a position that would 
have qualified as a debt position or an equity position but for the fact 
that it qualifies as a correlation trading position under paragraph (2) 
of the definition of correlation trading position in Sec. 324.2, shall 
be considered a debt position or an equity position, respectively, for 
purposes of this Sec. 324.210.
    (1) The specific risk add-on for an individual debt or 
securitization position that represents sold credit protection is capped 
at the notional amount of the credit derivative contract. The specific 
risk add-on for an individual debt or securitization position that 
represents purchased credit protection is capped at the current fair 
value of the transaction plus the absolute value of the present value of 
all remaining payments to the protection seller under the transaction. 
This sum is equal to the value of the protection leg of the transaction.
    (2) For debt, equity, or securitization positions that are 
derivatives with linear payoffs, an FDIC-supervised institution must 
assign a specific risk-weighting factor to the fair value of the 
effective notional amount of the underlying instrument or index 
portfolio, except for a securitization position for which the FDIC-
supervised institution directly calculates a specific risk add-on using 
the SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section. A swap must be 
included as an effective notional position in the underlying instrument 
or portfolio, with the receiving side treated as a long position and the 
paying side treated as a short position. For debt, equity, or 
securitization positions that are derivatives with nonlinear payoffs, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must risk weight the fair value of the 
effective notional amount of the underlying instrument or portfolio 
multiplied by the derivative's delta.
    (3) For debt, equity, or securitization positions, an FDIC-
supervised institution may net long and short positions (including 
derivatives) in identical issues or identical indices. An FDIC-
supervised institution may also net positions in depositary receipts 
against an opposite position in an identical equity in different 
markets, provided that the FDIC-supervised institution includes the 
costs of conversion.
    (4) A set of transactions consisting of either a debt position and 
its credit derivative hedge or a securitization position and its credit 
derivative hedge has a specific risk add-on of zero if:
    (i) The debt or securitization position is fully hedged by a total 
return swap (or similar instrument where there is a matching of swap 
payments and changes in fair value of the debt or securitization 
position);
    (ii) There is an exact match between the reference obligation of the 
swap and the debt or securitization position;
    (iii) There is an exact match between the currency of the swap and 
the debt or securitization position; and
    (iv) There is either an exact match between the maturity date of the 
swap and the maturity date of the debt or securitization position; or, 
in cases where a total return swap references a portfolio of positions 
with different maturity dates, the total return swap maturity date must 
match the maturity date of the underlying asset in that portfolio that 
has the latest maturity date.

[[Page 379]]

    (5) The specific risk add-on for a set of transactions consisting of 
either a debt position and its credit derivative hedge or a 
securitization position and its credit derivative hedge that does not 
meet the criteria of paragraph (a)(4) of this section is equal to 20.0 
percent of the capital requirement for the side of the transaction with 
the higher specific risk add-on when:
    (i) The credit risk of the position is fully hedged by a credit 
default swap or similar instrument;
    (ii) There is an exact match between the reference obligation of the 
credit derivative hedge and the debt or securitization position;
    (iii) There is an exact match between the currency of the credit 
derivative hedge and the debt or securitization position; and
    (iv) There is either an exact match between the maturity date of the 
credit derivative hedge and the maturity date of the debt or 
securitization position; or, in the case where the credit derivative 
hedge has a standard maturity date:
    (A) The maturity date of the credit derivative hedge is within 30 
business days of the maturity date of the debt or securitization 
position; or
    (B) For purchased credit protection, the maturity date of the credit 
derivative hedge is later than the maturity date of the debt or 
securitization position, but is no later than the standard maturity date 
for that instrument that immediately follows the maturity date of the 
debt or securitization position. The maturity date of the credit 
derivative hedge may not exceed the maturity date of the debt or 
securitization position by more than 90 calendar days.
    (6) The specific risk add-on for a set of transactions consisting of 
either a debt position and its credit derivative hedge or a 
securitization position and its credit derivative hedge that does not 
meet the criteria of either paragraph (a)(4) or (a)(5) of this section, 
but in which all or substantially all of the price risk has been hedged, 
is equal to the specific risk add-on for the side of the transaction 
with the higher specific risk add-on.
    (b) Debt and securitization positions. (1) The total specific risk 
add-on for a portfolio of debt or securitization positions is the sum of 
the specific risk add-ons for individual debt or securitization 
positions, as computed under this section. To determine the specific 
risk add-on for individual debt or securitization positions, an FDIC-
supervised institution must multiply the absolute value of the current 
fair value of each net long or net short debt or securitization position 
in the portfolio by the appropriate specific risk-weighting factor as 
set forth in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(vii) of this section.
    (2) For the purpose of this section, the appropriate specific risk-
weighting factors include:
    (i) Sovereign debt positions. (A) In accordance with Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.210, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a specific 
risk-weighting factor to a sovereign debt position based on the CRC 
applicable to the sovereign, and, as applicable, the remaining 
contractual maturity of the position, or if there is no CRC applicable 
to the sovereign, based on whether the sovereign entity is a member of 
the OECD. Notwithstanding any other provision in this subpart, sovereign 
debt positions that are backed by the full faith and credit of the 
United States are treated as having a CRC of 0.

             Table 1 to Sec. 324.210--Specific Risk-Weighting Factors for Sovereign Debt Positions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Specific risk-weighting factor (in percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC........................................             0-1                          0.0
                                            --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        2-3  Remaining contractual maturity of 6            0.25
                                                              months or less.
                                                            ----------------------------------------------------

[[Page 380]]

 
                                                             Remaining contractual maturity of               1.0
                                                              greater than 6 and up to and
                                                              including 24 months.
                                                            ----------------------------------------------------
                                                             Remaining contractual maturity                  1.6
                                                              exceeds 24 months.
                                            --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        4-6                          8.0
                                            --------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          7                          12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OECD Member with No CRC                                              0.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Non-OECD Member with No CRC                                          8.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sovereign Default                                                    12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(2)(i)(A) of this section, an FDIC-
supervised institution may assign to a sovereign debt position a 
specific risk-weighting factor that is lower than the applicable 
specific risk-weighting factor in Table 1 to Sec. 324.210 if:
    (1) The position is denominated in the sovereign entity's currency;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution has at least an equivalent 
amount of liabilities in that currency; and
    (3) The sovereign entity allows banks under its jurisdiction to 
assign the lower specific risk-weighting factor to the same exposures to 
the sovereign entity.
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 12.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to a sovereign debt position immediately 
upon determination a default has occurred; or if a default has occurred 
within the previous five years.
    (D) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 0.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to a sovereign debt position if the 
sovereign entity is a member of the OECD and does not have a CRC 
assigned to it, except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(i)(C) of this 
section.
    (E) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign an 8.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to a sovereign debt position if the 
sovereign is not a member of the OECD and does not have a CRC assigned 
to it, except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(i)(C) of this section.
    (ii) Certain supranational entity and multilateral development bank 
debt positions. An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a 0.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to a debt position that is an exposure to 
the Bank for International Settlements, the European Central Bank, the 
European Commission, the International Monetary Fund, or an MDB.
    (iii) GSE debt positions. An FDIC-supervised institution must assign 
a 1.6 percent specific risk-weighting factor to a debt position that is 
an exposure to a GSE. Notwithstanding the foregoing, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must assign an 8.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor to 
preferred stock issued by a GSE.
    (iv) Depository institution, foreign bank, and credit union debt 
positions. (A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a specific risk-
weighting factor to a debt position that is an exposure to a depository 
institution, a foreign bank, or a credit union, in accordance with Table 
2 to Sec. 324.210 of this section, based on the CRC that corresponds to 
that entity's home country or the OECD membership status of that 
entity's home

[[Page 381]]

country if there is no CRC applicable to the entity's home country, and, 
as applicable, the remaining contractual maturity of the position.

Table 2 to Sec. 324.210--Specific Risk-weighting Factors for Depository
       Institution, Foreign Bank, and Credit Union Debt Positions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Specific risk-            Percent
                                       weighting factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC 0-2 or OECD Member with No CRC  Remaining                       0.25
                                     contractual
                                     maturity of 6
                                     months or less.
                                    Remaining                        1.0
                                     contractual
                                     maturity of greater
                                     than 6 and up to
                                     and including 24
                                     months.
                                    Remaining                        1.6
                                     contractual
                                     maturity exceeds 24
                                     months.
CRC 3.............................    ..................             8.0
CRC 4-7...........................    ..................            12.0
Non-OECD Member with No CRC.......    ..................             8.0
Sovereign Default.................    ..................            12.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a specific risk-
weighting factor of 8.0 percent to a debt position that is an exposure 
to a depository institution or a foreign bank that is includable in the 
depository institution's or foreign bank's regulatory capital and that 
is not subject to deduction as a reciprocal holding under Sec. 324.22.
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 12.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to a debt position that is an exposure to 
a foreign bank immediately upon determination that a default by the 
foreign bank's home country has occurred or if a default by the foreign 
bank's home country has occurred within the previous five years.
    (v) PSE debt positions. (A) Except as provided in paragraph 
(b)(2)(v)(B) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign 
a specific risk-weighting factor to a debt position that is an exposure 
to a PSE in accordance with Tables 3 and 4 to Sec. 324.210 depending on 
the position's categorization as a general obligation or revenue 
obligation based on the CRC that corresponds to the PSE's home country 
or the OECD membership status of the PSE's home country if there is no 
CRC applicable to the PSE's home country, and, as applicable, the 
remaining contractual maturity of the position, as set forth in Tables 3 
and 4 to Sec. 324.210.
    (B) An FDIC-supervised institution may assign a lower specific risk-
weighting factor than would otherwise apply under Tables 3 and 4 to 
Sec. 324.210 to a debt position that is an exposure to a foreign PSE if:
    (1) The PSE's home country allows banks under its jurisdiction to 
assign a lower specific risk-weighting factor to such position; and
    (2) The specific risk-weighting factor is not lower than the risk 
weight that corresponds to the PSE's home country in Table 1 to 
Sec. 324.210.
    (C) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 12.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to a PSE debt position immediately upon 
determination that a default by the PSE's home country has occurred or 
if a default by the PSE's home country has occurred within the previous 
five years.

    Table 3 to Sec. 324.210--Specific Risk-weighting Factors for PSE
                    General Obligation Debt Positions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      General obligation      Percent
                                        specific risk-
                                       weighting factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 382]]

 
CRC 0-2 or OECD Member with No CRC  Remaining contractual           0.25
                                     maturity of 6 months
                                     or less.
                                    Remaining contractual           1.0
                                     maturity of greater
                                     than 6 and up to and
                                     including 24 months.
                                    Remaining contractual           1.6
                                     maturity exceeds 24
                                     months.
CRC 3.............................    ...................           8.0
CRC 4-7...........................    ...................          12.0
Non-OECD Member with No CRC.......    ...................           8.0
Sovereign Default.................    ...................          12.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------


    Table 4 to Sec. 324.210--Specific Risk-weighting Factors for PSE
                    Revenue Obligation Debt Positions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      Revenue obligation      Percent
                                        specific risk-
                                       weighting factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CRC 0-1 or OECD Member with No CRC  Remaining contractual           0.25
                                     maturity of 6 months
                                     or less.
                                    Remaining contractual           1.0
                                     maturity of greater
                                     than 6 and up to and
                                     including 24 months.
                                    Remaining contractual           1.6
                                     maturity exceeds 24
                                     months.
CRC 2-3...........................  .....................           8.0
CRC 4-7...........................  .....................          12.0
Non-OECD Member with No CRC.......  .....................           8.0
Sovereign Default.................  .....................          12.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (vi) Corporate debt positions. Except as otherwise provided in 
paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(B) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must assign a specific risk-weighting factor to a corporate debt 
position in accordance with the investment grade methodology in 
paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(A) of this section.
    (A) Investment grade methodology. (1) For corporate debt positions 
that are exposures to entities that have issued and outstanding publicly 
traded instruments, an FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 
specific risk-weighting factor based on the category and remaining 
contractual maturity of the position, in accordance with Table 5 to 
Sec. 324.210. For purposes of this paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(A)(1), the FDIC-
supervised institution must determine whether the position is in the 
investment grade or not investment grade category.

   Table 5 to Sec. 324.210--Specific Risk-weighting Factors for Corporate Debt Positions Under the Investment
                                                Grade Methodology
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                         Specific risk-weighting
                    Category                         Remaining contractual maturity        factor (in percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Investment Grade...............................  6 months or less......................                     0.50
                                                 Greater than 6 and up to and including                     2.00
                                                  24 months.
                                                 Greater than 24 months................                     4.00
Non-investment Grade...........................    ....................................                    12.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 383]]

    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign an 8.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor for corporate debt positions that are 
exposures to entities that do not have publicly traded instruments 
outstanding.
    (B) Limitations. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution must assign a 
specific risk-weighting factor of at least 8.0 percent to an interest-
only mortgage-backed security that is not a securitization position.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution shall not assign a corporate debt 
position a specific risk-weighting factor that is lower than the 
specific risk-weighting factor that corresponds to the CRC of the 
issuer's home country, if applicable, in Table 1 to Sec. 324.210.
    (vii) Securitization positions. (A) General requirements. (1) An 
FDIC-supervised institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution must assign a specific risk-weighting factor to a 
securitization position using either the simplified supervisory formula 
approach (SSFA) in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(C) of this section (and 
Sec. 324.211) or assign a specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent 
to the position.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that is an advanced approaches 
FDIC-supervised institution must calculate a specific risk add-on for a 
securitization position in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of 
this section if the FDIC-supervised institution and the securitization 
position each qualifies to use the SFA in Sec. 324.143. An FDIC-
supervised institution that is an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution with a securitization position that does not qualify for the 
SFA under paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section may assign a specific 
risk-weighting factor to the securitization position using the SSFA in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(C) of this section or assign a 
specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent to the position.
    (3) An FDIC-supervised institution must treat a short securitization 
position as if it is a long securitization position solely for 
calculation purposes when using the SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of 
this section or the SSFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(C) of this section.
    (B) SFA. To calculate the specific risk add-on for a securitization 
position using the SFA, an FDIC-supervised institution that is an 
advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must set the specific 
risk add-on for the position equal to the risk-based capital requirement 
as calculated under Sec. 324.143.
    (C) SSFA. To use the SSFA to determine the specific risk-weighting 
factor for a securitization position, an FDIC-supervised institution 
must calculate the specific risk-weighting factor in accordance with 
Sec. 324.211.
    (D) Nth-to-default credit derivatives. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must determine a specific risk add-on using the SFA in 
paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or assign a specific risk-
weighting factor using the SSFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(C) of this 
section to an nth-to-default credit derivative in accordance 
with this paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(D), regardless of whether the FDIC-
supervised institution is a net protection buyer or net protection 
seller. An FDIC-supervised institution must determine its position in 
the nth-to-default credit derivative as the largest notional 
amount of all the underlying exposures.
    (1) For purposes of determining the specific risk add-on using the 
SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section or the specific risk-
weighting factor for an nth-to-default credit derivative 
using the SSFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(C) of this section the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate the attachment point and 
detachment point of its position as follows:
    (i) The attachment point (parameter A) is the ratio of the sum of 
the notional amounts of all underlying exposures that are subordinated 
to the FDIC-supervised institution's position to the total notional 
amount of all underlying exposures. For purposes of the SSFA, parameter 
A is expressed as a decimal value between zero and one. For purposes of 
using the SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section to calculate 
the specific add-on for its position in an nth-to-default 
credit derivative, parameter A must be set equal to the credit 
enhancement level (L) input to the SFA formula in Sec. 324.143. In the

[[Page 384]]

case of a first-to-default credit derivative, there are no underlying 
exposures that are subordinated to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
position. In the case of a second-or-subsequent-to-default credit 
derivative, the smallest (n-1) notional amounts of the underlying 
exposure(s) are subordinated to the FDIC-supervised institution's 
position.
    (ii) The detachment point (parameter D) equals the sum of parameter 
A plus the ratio of the notional amount of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's position in the nth-to-default credit 
derivative to the total notional amount of all underlying exposures. For 
purposes of the SSFA, parameter A is expressed as a decimal value 
between zero and one. For purposes of using the SFA in paragraph 
(b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section to calculate the specific risk add-on for 
its position in an nth-to-default credit derivative, 
parameter D must be set to equal the L input plus the thickness of 
tranche (T) input to the SFA formula in Sec. 324.143.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution that does not use the SFA in 
paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section to determine a specific risk-
add on, or the SSFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(C) of this section to 
determine a specific risk-weighting factor for its position in an 
nth-to-default credit derivative must assign a specific risk-
weighting factor of 100 percent to the position.
    (c) Modeled correlation trading positions. For purposes of 
calculating the comprehensive risk measure for modeled correlation 
trading positions under either paragraph (a)(2)(i) or (a)(2)(ii) of 
Sec. 324.209, the total specific risk add-on is the greater of:
    (1) The sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's specific risk add-
ons for each net long correlation trading position calculated under this 
section; or
    (2) The sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's specific risk add-
ons for each net short correlation trading position calculated under 
this section.
    (d) Non-modeled securitization positions. For securitization 
positions that are not correlation trading positions and for 
securitizations that are correlation trading positions not modeled under 
Sec. 324.209, the total specific risk add-on is the greater of:
    (1) The sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's specific risk add-
ons for each net long securitization position calculated under this 
section; or
    (2) The sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's specific risk add-
ons for each net short securitization position calculated under this 
section.
    (e) Equity positions. The total specific risk add-on for a portfolio 
of equity positions is the sum of the specific risk add-ons of the 
individual equity positions, as computed under this section. To 
determine the specific risk add-on of individual equity positions, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must multiply the absolute value of the 
current fair value of each net long or net short equity position by the 
appropriate specific risk-weighting factor as determined under this 
paragraph (e):
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution must multiply the absolute value 
of the current fair value of each net long or net short equity position 
by a specific risk-weighting factor of 8.0 percent. For equity positions 
that are index contracts comprising a well-diversified portfolio of 
equity instruments, the absolute value of the current fair value of each 
net long or net short position is multiplied by a specific risk-
weighting factor of 2.0 percent.\33\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \33\ A portfolio is well-diversified if it contains a large number 
of individual equity positions, with no single position representing a 
substantial portion of the portfolio's total fair value.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For equity positions arising from the following futures-related 
arbitrage strategies, an FDIC-supervised institution may apply a 2.0 
percent specific risk-weighting factor to one side (long or short) of 
each position with the opposite side exempt from an additional capital 
requirement:
    (i) Long and short positions in exactly the same index at different 
dates or in different market centers; or
    (ii) Long and short positions in index contracts at the same date in 
different, but similar indices.
    (3) For futures contracts on main indices that are matched by 
offsetting positions in a basket of stocks comprising the index, an 
FDIC-supervised

[[Page 385]]

institution may apply a 2.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor to 
the futures and stock basket positions (long and short), provided that 
such trades are deliberately entered into and separately controlled, and 
that the basket of stocks is comprised of stocks representing at least 
90.0 percent of the capitalization of the index.
    (f) Due diligence requirements for securitization positions. (1) An 
FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the 
FDIC a comprehensive understanding of the features of a securitization 
position that would materially affect the performance of the position by 
conducting and documenting the analysis set forth in paragraph (f)(2) of 
this section. The FDIC-supervised institution's analysis must be 
commensurate with the complexity of the securitization position and the 
materiality of the position in relation to capital.
    (2) An FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate its 
comprehensive understanding for each securitization position by:
    (i) Conducting an analysis of the risk characteristics of a 
securitization position prior to acquiring the position and document 
such analysis within three business days after acquiring position, 
considering:
    (A) Structural features of the securitization that would materially 
impact the performance of the position, for example, the contractual 
cash flow waterfall, waterfall-related triggers, credit enhancements, 
liquidity enhancements, fair value triggers, the performance of 
organizations that service the position, and deal-specific definitions 
of default;
    (B) Relevant information regarding the performance of the underlying 
credit exposure(s), for example, the percentage of loans 30, 60, and 90 
days past due; default rates; prepayment rates; loans in foreclosure; 
property types; occupancy; average credit score or other measures of 
creditworthiness; average loan-to-value ratio; and industry and 
geographic diversification data on the underlying exposure(s);
    (C) Relevant market data of the securitization, for example, bid-ask 
spreads, most recent sales price and historical price volatility, 
trading volume, implied market rating, and size, depth and concentration 
level of the market for the securitization; and
    (D) For resecuritization positions, performance information on the 
underlying securitization exposures, for example, the issuer name and 
credit quality, and the characteristics and performance of the exposures 
underlying the securitization exposures.
    (ii) On an on-going basis (no less frequently than quarterly), 
evaluating, reviewing, and updating as appropriate the analysis required 
under paragraph (f)(1) of this section for each securitization position.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014; 
81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016]



Sec. 324.211  Simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA).

    (a) General requirements. To use the SSFA to determine the specific 
risk-weighting factor for a securitization position, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must have data that enables it to assign accurately the 
parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section. Data used to 
assign the parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section must be 
the most currently available data; if the contracts governing the 
underlying exposures of the securitization require payments on a monthly 
or quarterly basis, the data used to assign the parameters described in 
paragraph (b) of this section must be no more than 91 calendar days old. 
An FDIC-supervised institution that does not have the appropriate data 
to assign the parameters described in paragraph (b) of this section must 
assign a specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent to the position.
    (b) SSFA parameters. To calculate the specific risk-weighting factor 
for a securitization position using the SSFA, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must have accurate information on the five inputs to the 
SSFA calculation described in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(5) of this 
section.
    (1) KG is the weighted-average (with unpaid principal 
used as the weight for each exposure) total capital requirement of the 
underlying exposures calculated using subpart D. KG is 
expressed as a decimal value between

[[Page 386]]

zero and one (that is, an average risk weight of 100 percent represents 
a value of KG equal to 0.08).
    (2) Parameter W is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 
one. Parameter W is the ratio of the sum of the dollar amounts of any 
underlying exposures of the securitization that meet any of the criteria 
as set forth in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (vi) of this section to the 
balance, measured in dollars, of underlying exposures:
    (i) Ninety days or more past due;
    (ii) Subject to a bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding;
    (iii) In the process of foreclosure;
    (iv) Held as real estate owned;
    (v) Has contractually deferred payments for 90 days or more, other 
than principal or interest payments deferred on:
    (A) Federally-guaranteed student loans, in accordance with the terms 
of those guarantee programs; or
    (B) Consumer loans, including non-federally-guaranteed student 
loans, provided that such payments are deferred pursuant to provisions 
included in the contract at the time funds are disbursed that provide 
for period(s) of deferral that are not initiated based on changes in the 
creditworthiness of the borrower; or
    (vi) Is in default.
    (3) Parameter A is the attachment point for the position, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses will first be allocated 
to the position. Except as provided in Sec. 324.210(b)(2)(vii)(D) for 
nth-to-default credit derivatives, parameter A equals the 
ratio of the current dollar amount of underlying exposures that are 
subordinated to the position of the FDIC-supervised institution to the 
current dollar amount of underlying exposures. Any reserve account 
funded by the accumulated cash flows from the underlying exposures that 
is subordinated to the position that contains the FDIC-supervised 
institution's securitization exposure may be included in the calculation 
of parameter A to the extent that cash is present in the account. 
Parameter A is expressed as a decimal value between zero and one.
    (4) Parameter D is the detachment point for the position, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses of principal allocated 
to the position would result in a total loss of principal. Except as 
provided in Sec. 324.210(b)(2)(vii)(D) for nth-to-default 
credit derivatives, parameter D equals parameter A plus the ratio of the 
current dollar amount of the securitization positions that are pari 
passu with the position (that is, have equal seniority with respect to 
credit risk) to the current dollar amount of the underlying exposures. 
Parameter D is expressed as a decimal value between zero and one.
    (5) A supervisory calibration parameter, p, is equal to 0.5 for 
securitization positions that are not resecuritization positions and 
equal to 1.5 for resecuritization positions.
    (c) Mechanics of the SSFA. KG and W are used to calculate 
KA, the augmented value of KG, which reflects the 
observed credit quality of the underlying exposures. KA is 
defined in paragraph (d) of this section. The values of parameters A and 
D, relative to KA determine the specific risk-weighting 
factor assigned to a position as described in this paragraph (c) and 
paragraph (d) of this section. The specific risk-weighting factor 
assigned to a securitization position, or portion of a position, as 
appropriate, is the larger of the specific risk-weighting factor 
determined in accordance with this paragraph (c), paragraph (d) of this 
section, and a specific risk-weighting factor of 1.6 percent.
    (1) When the detachment point, parameter D, for a securitization 
position is less than or equal to KA, the position must be 
assigned a specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent.
    (2) When the attachment point, parameter A, for a securitization 
position is greater than or equal to KA, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate the specific risk-weighting factor in 
accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.
    (3) When A is less than KA and D is greater than 
KA, the specific risk-weighting factor is a weighted-average 
of 1.00 and KSSFA calculated under paragraphs (c)(3)(i) and 
(c)(3)(ii) of this section. For the purpose of this calculation:

[[Page 387]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR10SE13.046


[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 79 FR 20761, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 324.212  Market risk disclosures.

    (a) Scope. An FDIC-supervised institution must comply with this 
section unless it is a consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding company 
or a depository institution that is subject to these requirements or of 
a non-U.S. banking organization that is subject to comparable public 
disclosure requirements in its home jurisdiction. An FDIC-supervised 
institution must make timely public disclosures each calendar quarter. 
If a significant change occurs, such that the most recent reporting 
amounts are no longer reflective of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
capital adequacy and risk profile, then a brief discussion of this 
change and its likely impact must be provided as soon as practicable 
thereafter. Qualitative disclosures that typically do not change

[[Page 388]]

each quarter may be disclosed annually, provided any significant changes 
are disclosed in the interim. If an FDIC-supervised institution believes 
that disclosure of specific commercial or financial information would 
prejudice seriously its position by making public certain information 
that is either proprietary or confidential in nature, the FDIC-
supervised institution is not required to disclose these specific items, 
but must disclose more general information about the subject matter of 
the requirement, together with the fact that, and the reason why, the 
specific items of information have not been disclosed. The FDIC-
supervised institution's management may provide all of the disclosures 
required by this section in one place on the FDIC-supervised 
institution's public Web site or may provide the disclosures in more 
than one public financial report or other regulatory reports, provided 
that the FDIC-supervised institution publicly provides a summary table 
specifically indicating the location(s) of all such disclosures.
    (b) Disclosure policy. The FDIC-supervised institution must have a 
formal disclosure policy approved by the board of directors that 
addresses the FDIC-supervised institution's approach for determining its 
market risk disclosures. The policy must address the associated internal 
controls and disclosure controls and procedures. The board of directors 
and senior management must ensure that appropriate verification of the 
disclosures takes place and that effective internal controls and 
disclosure controls and procedures are maintained. One or more senior 
officers of the FDIC-supervised institution must attest that the 
disclosures meet the requirements of this subpart, and the board of 
directors and senior management are responsible for establishing and 
maintaining an effective internal control structure over financial 
reporting, including the disclosures required by this section.
    (c) Quantitative disclosures. (1) For each material portfolio of 
covered positions, the FDIC-supervised institution must provide timely 
public disclosures of the following information at least quarterly:
    (i) The high, low, and mean VaR-based measures over the reporting 
period and the VaR-based measure at period-end;
    (ii) The high, low, and mean stressed VaR-based measures over the 
reporting period and the stressed VaR-based measure at period-end;
    (iii) The high, low, and mean incremental risk capital requirements 
over the reporting period and the incremental risk capital requirement 
at period-end;
    (iv) The high, low, and mean comprehensive risk capital requirements 
over the reporting period and the comprehensive risk capital requirement 
at period-end, with the period-end requirement broken down into 
appropriate risk classifications (for example, default risk, migration 
risk, correlation risk);
    (v) Separate measures for interest rate risk, credit spread risk, 
equity price risk, foreign exchange risk, and commodity price risk used 
to calculate the VaR-based measure; and
    (vi) A comparison of VaR-based estimates with actual gains or losses 
experienced by the FDIC-supervised institution, with an analysis of 
important outliers.
    (2) In addition, the FDIC-supervised institution must disclose 
publicly the following information at least quarterly:
    (i) The aggregate amount of on-balance sheet and off-balance sheet 
securitization positions by exposure type; and
    (ii) The aggregate amount of correlation trading positions.
    (d) Qualitative disclosures. For each material portfolio of covered 
positions, the FDIC-supervised institution must provide timely public 
disclosures of the following information at least annually after the end 
of the fourth calendar quarter, or more frequently in the event of 
material changes for each portfolio:
    (1) The composition of material portfolios of covered positions;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution's valuation policies, 
procedures, and methodologies for covered positions including, for 
securitization positions, the methods and key assumptions used

[[Page 389]]

for valuing such positions, any significant changes since the last 
reporting period, and the impact of such change;
    (3) The characteristics of the internal models used for purposes of 
this subpart. For the incremental risk capital requirement and the 
comprehensive risk capital requirement, this must include:
    (i) The approach used by the FDIC-supervised institution to 
determine liquidity horizons;
    (ii) The methodologies used to achieve a capital assessment that is 
consistent with the required soundness standard; and
    (iii) The specific approaches used in the validation of these 
models;
    (4) A description of the approaches used for validating and 
evaluating the accuracy of internal models and modeling processes for 
purposes of this subpart;
    (5) For each market risk category (that is, interest rate risk, 
credit spread risk, equity price risk, foreign exchange risk, and 
commodity price risk), a description of the stress tests applied to the 
positions subject to the factor;
    (6) The results of the comparison of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's internal estimates for purposes of this subpart with 
actual outcomes during a sample period not used in model development;
    (7) The soundness standard on which the FDIC-supervised 
institution's internal capital adequacy assessment under this subpart is 
based, including a description of the methodologies used to achieve a 
capital adequacy assessment that is consistent with the soundness 
standard;
    (8) A description of the FDIC-supervised institution's processes for 
monitoring changes in the credit and market risk of securitization 
positions, including how those processes differ for resecuritization 
positions; and
    (9) A description of the FDIC-supervised institution's policy 
governing the use of credit risk mitigation to mitigate the risks of 
securitization and resecuritization positions.



Secs. 324.213-324.299  [Reserved]



                     Subpart G_Transition Provisions



Sec. 324.300  Transitions.

    (a) Capital conservation and countercyclical capital buffer. (1) 
From January 1, 2014, through December 31, 2015, an FDIC-supervised 
institution is not subject to limits on distributions and discretionary 
bonus payments under Sec. 324.11 notwithstanding the amount of its 
capital conservation buffer or any applicable countercyclical capital 
buffer amount.
    (2) Beginning January 1, 2016, through December 31, 2018, an FDIC-
supervised institution's maximum payout ratio shall be determined as set 
forth in Table 1 to Sec. 324.300.

                                            Table 1 to Sec. 324.300
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                      Maximum payout ratio (as a
            Transition period                     Capital conservation buffer           percentage of eligible
                                                                                           retained income)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2016......................  Greater than 0.625 percent (plus 25         No payout ratio limitation
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical   applies under this
                                           capital buffer amount).                     section.
                                          Less than or equal to 0.625 percent (plus   60 percent.
                                           25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.469 percent (plus
                                           17.25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.469 percent (plus   40 percent.
                                           17.25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.313 percent (plus 12.5
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical
                                           capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.313 percent (plus   20 percent.
                                           12.5 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.156 percent (plus 6.25
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical
                                           capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.156 percent (plus   0 percent.
                                           6.25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount).
Calendar year 2017......................  Greater than 1.25 percent (plus 50 percent  No payout ratio limitation
                                           of any applicable countercyclical capital   applies under this
                                           buffer amount).                             section.

[[Page 390]]

 
                                          Less than or equal to 1.25 percent (plus    60 percent.
                                           50 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.938 percent (plus 37.5
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical
                                           capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.938 percent (plus   40 percent.
                                           37.5 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.625 percent (plus 25
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical
                                           capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.625 percent (plus   20 percent.
                                           25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.313 percent (plus 12.5
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical
                                           capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.313 percent (plus   0 percent.
                                           12.5 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount).
Calendar year 2018......................  Greater than 1.875 percent (plus 75         No payout ratio limitation
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical   applies under this
                                           capital buffer amount).                     section.
                                          Less than or equal to 1.875 percent (plus   60 percent.
                                           75 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 1.406 percent (plus
                                           56.25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 1.406 percent (plus   40 percent.
                                           56.25 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.938 percent (plus 37.5
                                           percent of any applicable countercyclical
                                           capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.938 percent (plus   20 percent.
                                           37.5 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount),
                                           and greater than 0.469 percent (plus
                                           18.75 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount).
                                          Less than or equal to 0.469 percent (plus   0 percent.
                                           18.75 percent of any applicable
                                           countercyclical capital buffer amount).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Regulatory capital adjustments and deductions. Beginning January 
1, 2014, for an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, and 
beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-supervised institution that is 
not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, and in each case 
through December 31, 2017, an FDIC-supervised institution must make the 
capital adjustments and deductions in Sec. 324.22 in accordance with the 
transition requirements in this paragraph (b). Beginning January 1, 
2018, an FDIC-supervised institution must make all regulatory capital 
adjustments and deductions in accordance with Sec. 324.22.
    (1) Transition deductions from common equity tier 1 capital. 
Beginning January 1, 2014, for an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution, and beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution, and in each case through December 31, 2017, an FDIC-
supervised institution, must make the deductions required under 
Sec. 324.22(a)(1)--(7) from common equity tier 1 or tier 1 capital 
elements in accordance with the percentages set forth in Tables 2 and 3 
to Sec. 324.300.
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct the following items 
from common equity tier 1 and additional tier 1 capital in accordance 
with the percentages set forth in Table 2 to Sec. 324.300: Goodwill 
(Sec. 324.22(a)(1)), DTAs that arise from net operating loss and tax 
credit carryforwards (Sec. 324.22(a)(3)), a gain-on-sale in connection 
with a securitization exposure (Sec. 324.22(a)(4)), defined benefit 
pension fund assets (Sec. 324.22(a)(5)), expected credit loss that 
exceeds eligible credit reserves (for advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institutions that have completed the parallel run process and 
that have received notifications from the FDIC pursuant to 
Sec. 324.121(d) of subpart E) (Sec. 324.22(a)(6)), and financial 
subsidiaries (Sec. 324.22(a)(7)).

[[Page 391]]



                                            Table 2 to Sec. 324.300
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Transition deductions        Transition deductions under Sec.
                                                   under Sec. 324.22(a)(3)-(6)
                                             324.22(a)(1), (a)(7), ---------------------------------------------
                                               (a)(8), and (a)(9)
 
             Transition period              -----------------------   Percentage of the      Percentage of the
                                               Percentage of the       deductions from      deductions from tier
                                                deductions from      common equity tier 1        1 capital
                                              common equity tier 1         capital
                                                    capital
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014.........................                   100                     20                     80
Calendar year 2015.........................                   100                     40                     60
Calendar year 2016.........................                   100                     60                     40
Calendar year 2017.........................                   100                     80                     20
Calendar year 2018, and thereafter.........                   100                    100                      0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must deduct from common equity 
tier 1 capital any intangible assets other than goodwill and MSAs in 
accordance with the percentages set forth in Table 3 to Sec. 324.300.
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 100 percent risk-
weight to the aggregate amount of intangible assets other than goodwill 
and MSAs that are not required to be deducted from common equity tier 1 
capital under this section.

                        Table 3 to Sec. 324.300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Transition deductions under Sec.
                              324.22(a)(2)--Percentage of the deductions
      Transition period            from common equity tier 1 capital
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014..........                                         20
Calendar year 2015..........                                         40
Calendar year 2016..........                                         60
Calendar year 2017..........                                         80
Calendar year 2018, and                                             100
 thereafter.................
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Transition adjustments to common equity tier 1 capital. 
Beginning January 1, 2014, for an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution, and beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised 
institution, and in each case through December 31, 2017, an FDIC-
supervised institution, must allocate the regulatory adjustments related 
to changes in the fair value of liabilities due to changes in the FDIC-
supervised institution's own credit risk (Sec. 324.22(b)(1)(iii)) 
between common equity tier 1 capital and tier 1 capital in accordance 
with the percentages set forth in Table 4 to Sec. 324.300.
    (i) If the aggregate amount of the adjustment is positive, the FDIC-
supervised institution must allocate the deduction between common equity 
tier 1 and tier 1 capital in accordance with Table 4 to Sec. 324.300.
    (ii) If the aggregate amount of the adjustment is negative, the 
FDIC-supervised institution must add back the adjustment to common 
equity tier 1 capital or to tier 1 capital, in accordance with Table 4 
to Sec. 324.300.

                                                                Table 4 to Sec. 324.300
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                       Transition adjustments under Sec. 324.22(b)(2)
                                                                   -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Transition period                           Percentage of the adjustment applied to    Percentage of the adjustment applied to
                                                                           common equity tier 1 capital                      tier 1 capital
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014................................................                                        20                                         80
Calendar year 2015................................................                                        40                                         60
Calendar year 2016................................................                                        60                                         40
Calendar year 2017................................................                                        80                                         20
Calendar year 2018, and thereafter................................                                       100                                          0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 392]]

    (3) Transition adjustments to AOCI for an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution and an FDIC-supervised institution that has not 
made an AOCI opt-out election under Sec. 324.22(b)(2). Beginning January 
1, 2014, for an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, and 
beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-supervised institution that is 
not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution and that has not 
made an AOCI opt-out election under Sec. 324.22(b)(2), and in each case 
through December 31, 2017, an FDIC-supervised institution must adjust 
common equity tier 1 capital with respect to the transition AOCI 
adjustment amount (transition AOCI adjustment amount):
    (i) The transition AOCI adjustment amount is the aggregate amount of 
an FDIC-supervised institution's:
    (A) Unrealized gains on available-for-sale securities that are 
preferred stock classified as an equity security under GAAP or 
available-for-sale equity exposures, plus
    (B) Net unrealized gains or losses on available-for-sale securities 
that are not preferred stock classified as an equity security under GAAP 
or available-for-sale equity exposures, plus
    (C) Any amounts recorded in AOCI attributed to defined benefit 
postretirement plans resulting from the initial and subsequent 
application of the relevant GAAP standards that pertain to such plans 
(excluding, at the FDIC-supervised institution's option, the portion 
relating to pension assets deducted under Sec. 324.22(a)(5)), plus
    (D) Accumulated net gains or losses on cash flow hedges related to 
items that are reported on the balance sheet at fair value included in 
AOCI, plus
    (E) Net unrealized gains or losses on held-to-maturity securities 
that are included in AOCI.
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution must make the following 
adjustment to its common equity tier 1 capital:
    (A) If the transition AOCI adjustment amount is positive, the 
appropriate amount must be deducted from common equity tier 1 capital in 
accordance with Table 5 to Sec. 324.300.
    (B) If the transition AOCI adjustment amount is negative, the 
appropriate amount must be added back to common equity tier 1 capital in 
accordance with Table 5 to Sec. 324.300.

                        Table 5 to Sec. 324.300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Percentage of the transition AOCI
      Transition period        adjustment amount to be applied to common
                                         equity tier 1 capital
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014..........                                         80
Calendar year 2015..........                                         60
Calendar year 2016..........                                         40
Calendar year 2017..........                                         20
Calendar year 2018 and                                                0
 thereafter.................
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution may include in tier 2 capital 
the percentage of unrealized gains on available-for-sale preferred stock 
classified as an equity security under GAAP and available-for-sale 
equity exposures as set forth in Table 6 to Sec. 324.300.

                        Table 6 to Sec. 324.300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Percentage of unrealized gains on
                                  available-for-sale preferred stock
                                classified as an equity security under
      Transition period           GAAP and available-for-sale equity
                               exposures that may be included in tier 2
                                                capital
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014..........                                         36
Calendar year 2015..........                                         27
Calendar year 2016..........                                         18
Calendar year 2017..........                                          9
Calendar year 2018 and                                                0
 thereafter.................
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 393]]

    (4) Additional transition deductions from regulatory capital. Except 
as provided in paragraph (b)(5) of this section:
    (i) Beginning January 1, 2014, for an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution, and beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-
supervised institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution, and in each case through December 31, 2017, an 
FDIC-supervised institution, must use Table 7 to Sec. 324.300 to 
determine the amount of investments in capital instruments and the items 
subject to the 10 and 15 percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction 
thresholds (Sec. 324.22(d)) (that is, MSAs, DTAs arising from temporary 
differences that the FDIC-supervised institution could not realize 
through net operating loss carrybacks, and significant investments in 
the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in the form of 
common stock) that must be deducted from common equity tier 1 capital.
    (ii) Beginning January 1, 2014, for an FDIC-supervised advanced 
approaches institution, and beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-
supervised institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution, and in each case through December 31, 2017, an 
FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 100 percent risk weight to the 
aggregate amount of the items subject to the 10 and 15 percent common 
equity tier 1 capital deduction thresholds that are not deducted under 
this section. As set forth in Sec. 324.22(d)(2), beginning January 1, 
2018, an FDIC-supervised institution must apply a 250 percent risk 
weight to the aggregate amount of the items subject to the 10 and 15 
percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction thresholds that are not 
deducted from common equity tier 1 capital.

                        Table 7 to Sec. 324.300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Transitions for
                                                        deductions under
                                                        Sec. 324.22(c)
                                                           and (d)--
                  Transition period                      percentage of
                                                           additional
                                                        deductions from
                                                           regulatory
                                                            capital
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014...................................                 20
Calendar year 2015...................................                 40
Calendar year 2016...................................                 60
Calendar year 2017...................................                 80
Calendar year 2018 and thereafter....................                100
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) For purposes of calculating the transition deductions in this 
paragraph (b)(4) beginning January 1, 2014, for an advanced approaches 
FDIC-supervised institution, and beginning January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-
supervised institution that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution, and in each case through December 31, 2017, an 
FDIC-supervised institution's 15 percent common equity tier 1 capital 
deduction threshold for MSAs, DTAs arising from temporary differences 
that the FDIC-supervised institution could not realize through net 
operating loss carrybacks, and significant investments in the capital of 
unconsolidated financial institutions in the form of common stock is 
equal to 15 percent of the sum of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
common equity tier 1 elements, after regulatory adjustments and 
deductions required under Sec. 324.22(a) through (c) (transition 15 
percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction threshold).
    (iv) Beginning January 1, 2018, an FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate the 15 percent common equity tier 1 capital deduction 
threshold in accordance with Sec. 324.22(d).
    (5) Special transition provisions for non-significant investments in 
the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions, significant 
investments in the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions that 
are not in the form of common stock, MSAs, DTAs arising from temporary 
differences that the FDIC-supervised institution could not realize 
through net operating loss carrybacks, and significant investments in 
the capital of unconsolidated financial institutions in the form of 
common stock. Beginning January 1, 2018, an FDIC-supervised institution 
that is not an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution must 
continue to apply the transition provisions described in paragraphs 
(b)(4)(i), (ii), and (iii) of this section applicable to calendar year 
2017 to items that are subject to deduction under Sec. 324.22(c)(4), 
(c)(5), and (d), respectively.
    (c) Non-qualifying capital instruments. Depository institutions. (1) 
Beginning on January 1, 2014, a depository institution that is an 
advanced approaches

[[Page 394]]

FDIC-supervised institution, and beginning on January 1, 2015, all other 
depository institutions may include in regulatory capital debt or equity 
instruments issued prior to September 12, 2010, that do not meet the 
criteria for additional tier 1 or tier 2 capital instruments in 
Sec. 324.20 but that were included in tier 1 or tier 2 capital 
respectively as of September 12, 2010 (non-qualifying capital 
instruments issued prior to September 12, 2010) up to the percentage of 
the outstanding principal amount of such non-qualifying capital 
instruments as of January 1, 2014 in accordance with Table 8 to 
Sec. 324.300.
    (2) Table 8 to Sec. 324.300 applies separately to tier 1 and tier 2 
non-qualifying capital instruments.
    (3) The amount of non-qualifying capital instruments that cannot be 
included in additional tier 1 capital under this section may be included 
in tier 2 capital without limitation, provided that the instruments meet 
the criteria for tier 2 capital instruments under Sec. 324.20(d).

                        Table 8 to Sec. 324.300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Percentage of non-qualifying capital
 Transition period (calendar   instruments includable in additional tier
            year)                         1 or tier 2 capital
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014..........                                         80
Calendar year 2015..........                                         70
Calendar year 2016..........                                         60
Calendar year 2017..........                                         50
Calendar year 2018..........                                         40
Calendar year 2019..........                                         30
Calendar year 2020..........                                         20
Calendar year 2021..........                                         10
Calendar year 2022 and                                                0
 thereafter.................
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) Minority interest--(1) Surplus minority interest--(i) Advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution surplus minority interest. 
Beginning January 1, 2014, through December 31, 2017, an advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution may include in common equity tier 
1 capital, tier 1 capital, or total capital the percentage of the common 
equity tier 1 minority interest, tier 1 minority interest and total 
capital minority interest outstanding as of January 1, 2014 that exceeds 
any common equity tier 1 minority interest, tier 1 minority interest or 
total capital minority interest includable under Sec. 324.21 (surplus 
minority interest), respectively, as set forth in Table 9 to 
Sec. 324.300.
    (ii) Non-advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution surplus 
minority interest. An FDIC-supervised institution that is not an 
advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution may include in common 
equity tier 1 capital, tier 1 capital, or total capital 20 percent of 
the common equity tier 1 minority interest, tier 1 minority interest and 
total capital minority interest outstanding as of January 1, 2014 that 
exceeds any common equity tier 1 minority interest, tier 1 minority 
interest or total capital minority interest includable under Sec. 324.21 
(surplus minority interest), respectively.
    (2) Non-qualifying minority interest. Beginning January 1, 2014, for 
an advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, and beginning 
January 1, 2015, for an FDIC-supervised institution that is not an 
advanced approaches FDIC-supervised institution, and in each case 
through December 31, 2017, an FDIC-supervised institution may include in 
tier 1 capital or total capital the percentage of the tier 1 minority 
interest and total capital minority interest outstanding as of January 
1, 2014 that does not meet the criteria for additional tier 1 or tier 2 
capital instruments in Sec. 324.20 (non-qualifying minority interest), 
as set forth in Table 9 to Sec. 324.300.

[[Page 395]]



                        Table 9 to Sec. 324.300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                       Percentage of the
                                                       amount of surplus
                                                       or non-qualifying
                                                       minority interest
                                                          that can be
                  Transition period                       included in
                                                           regulatory
                                                        capital  during
                                                        the  transition
                                                             period
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calendar year 2014...................................                 80
Calendar year 2015...................................                 60
Calendar year 2016...................................                 40
Calendar year 2017...................................                 20
Calendar year 2018 and thereafter....................                  0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Prompt corrective action. For purposes of subpart H of this 
part, an FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its capital measures 
and tangible equity ratio in accordance with the transition provisions 
in this section.

[78 FR 55471, Sept. 10, 2013, as amended at 82 FR 55317, Nov. 21, 2017]



Secs. 324.301-324.399  [Reserved]



                   Subpart H_Prompt Corrective Action



Sec. 324.401  Authority, purpose, scope, other supervisory authority,
disclosure of capital categories, and transition procedures.

    (a) Authority. This subpart H is issued by the FDIC pursuant to 
section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act), as added by 
section 131 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act 
of 1991 (Pub.L. 102-242, 105 Stat. 2236 (1991)) (12 U.S.C. 1831o).
    (b) Purpose. Section 38 of the FDI Act establishes a framework of 
supervisory actions for insured depository institutions that are not 
adequately capitalized. The principal purpose of this subpart is to 
define, for FDIC-supervised institutions, the capital measures and 
capital levels, and for insured branches of foreign banks, comparable 
asset-based measures and levels, that are used for determining the 
supervisory actions authorized under section 38 of the FDI Act. This 
subpart also establishes procedures for submission and review of capital 
restoration plans and for issuance and review of directives and orders 
pursuant to section 38 of the FDI Act.
    (c) Scope. Until January 1, 2015, subpart B of part 325 of this 
chapter will continue to apply to banks and insured branches of foreign 
banks for which the FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency. 
Until January 1, 2015, subpart Y of part 390 of this chapter will 
continue to apply to state savings associations. Beginning on, and 
thereafter, January 1, 2015, this subpart H implements the provisions of 
section 38 of the FDI Act as they apply to FDIC-supervised institutions 
and insured branches of foreign banks for which the FDIC is the 
appropriate Federal banking agency. Certain of these provisions also 
apply to officers, directors and employees of those insured 
institutions. In addition, certain provisions of this subpart apply to 
all insured depository institutions that are deemed critically 
undercapitalized.
    (d) Other supervisory authority. Neither section 38 of the FDI Act 
nor this subpart H in any way limits the authority of the FDIC under any 
other provision of law to take supervisory actions to address unsafe or 
unsound practices, deficient capital levels, violations of law, unsafe 
or unsound conditions, or other practices. Action under section 38 of 
the FDI Act and this subpart H may be taken independently of, in 
conjunction with, or in addition to any other enforcement action 
available to the FDIC, including issuance of cease and desist orders, 
capital directives, approval or denial of applications or notices, 
assessment of civil money penalties, or any other actions authorized by 
law.
    (e) Disclosure of capital categories. The assignment of an FDIC-
supervised institution or an insured branch of a foreign bank for which 
the FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency under this subpart H 
within a particular capital category is for purposes of implementing and 
applying the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act. Unless permitted 
by the FDIC or otherwise required by law, no FDIC-supervised institution 
or insured branch of a foreign bank for which the FDIC is the 
appropriate Federal banking agency may state in any advertisement or 
promotional material its capital category under this subpart H or that 
the FDIC or any other Federal banking agency

[[Page 396]]

has assigned it to a particular capital category.
    (f) Transition procedures--(1) Definitions applicable before January 
1, 2015, for certain FDIC-supervised institutions. Before January 1, 
2015, notwithstanding any other requirement in this subpart H and with 
respect to any FDIC-supervised institution that is not an advanced 
approaches FDIC-supervised institution:
    (i) The definitions of leverage ratio, tangible equity, tier 1 
capital, tier 1 risk-based capital, and total risk-based capital as 
calculated or defined under Appendix A to part 325 or Appendix B to part 
325, as applicable, remain in effect for purposes of this subpart H; and
    (ii) The term total assets shall have the meaning provided in 12 CFR 
325.2(x).
    (2) Timing. The calculation of the definitions of common equity tier 
1 capital, the common equity tier 1 risk-based capital ratio, the 
leverage ratio, the supplementary leverage ratio, tangible equity, tier 
1 capital, the tier 1 risk-based capital ratio, total assets, total 
leverage exposure, the total risk-based capital ratio, and total risk-
weighted assets under this subpart H is subject to the timing provisions 
at 12 CFR 324.1(f) and the transitions at 12 CFR part 324, subpart G.
    (g) For purposes of subpart H, as of January 1, 2015, total assets 
means quarterly average total assets as reported in an FDIC-supervised 
institution's Call Report, minus amounts deducted from tier 1 capital 
under Sec. 324.22(a), (c), and (d). At its discretion, the FDIC may 
calculate total assets using an FDIC-supervised institution's period-end 
assets rather than quarterly average assets.



Sec. 324.402  Notice of capital category.

    (a) Effective date of determination of capital category. An FDIC-
supervised institution shall be deemed to be within a given capital 
category for purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart H as 
of the date the FDIC-supervised institution is notified of, or is deemed 
to have notice of, its capital category, pursuant to paragraph (b) of 
this section.
    (b) Notice of capital category. An FDIC-supervised institution shall 
be deemed to have been notified of its capital levels and its capital 
category as of the most recent date:
    (1) A Call Report is required to be filed with the FDIC;
    (2) A final report of examination is delivered to the FDIC-
supervised institution; or
    (3) Written notice is provided by the FDIC to the FDIC-supervised 
institution of its capital category for purposes of section 38 of the 
FDI Act and this subpart or that the FDIC-supervised institution's 
capital category has changed as provided in Sec. 324.403(d).
    (c) Adjustments to reported capital levels and capital category -- 
(1) Notice of adjustment by bank or state savings association. An FDIC-
supervised institution shall provide the appropriate FDIC regional 
director with written notice that an adjustment to the FDIC-supervised 
institution's capital category may have occurred no later than 15 
calendar days following the date that any material event has occurred 
that would cause the FDIC-supervised institution to be placed in a lower 
capital category from the category assigned to the FDIC-supervised 
institution for purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart H 
on the basis of the FDIC-supervised institution's most recent Call 
Report or report of examination.
    (2) Determination by the FDIC to change capital category. After 
receiving notice pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the FDIC 
shall determine whether to change the capital category of the FDIC-
supervised institution and shall notify the bank or state savings 
association of the FDIC's determination.



Sec. 324.403  Capital measures and capital category definitions.

    (a) Capital measures. For purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act and 
this subpart H, the relevant capital measures shall be:
    (1) The total risk-based capital ratio;
    (2) The Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio; and
    (3) The common equity tier 1 ratio;
    (4) The leverage ratio;
    (5) The tangible equity to total assets ratio; and

[[Page 397]]

    (6) Beginning January 1, 2018, the supplementary leverage ratio 
calculated in accordance with Sec. 324.11 for advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institutions that are subject to subpart E of this part.
    (b) Capital categories. For purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act 
and this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution shall be deemed to be:
    (1) ``Well capitalized'' if it:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio of 10.0 percent or greater; 
and
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 8.0 percent or 
greater; and
    (iii) Has a common equity tier 1 capital ratio of 6.5 percent or 
greater; and
    (iv) Has a leverage ratio of 5.0 percent or greater;
    (v) Beginning on Jan. 1, 2018 and thereafter, an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is a subsidiary of a covered BHC will be deemed to be 
well capitalized if the FDIC-supervised institution satisfies paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section and has a supplementary leverage 
ratio of 6.0 percent or greater. For purposes of this paragraph, a 
covered BHC means a U.S. top-tier bank holding company with more than 
$700 billion in total assets as reported on the company's most recent 
Consolidated Financial Statement for Bank Holding Companies (FR Y-9C) or 
more than $10 trillion in assets under custody as reported on the 
company's most recent Banking Organization Systemic Risk Report (FR Y-
15); and
    (vi) Beginning on January 1, 2018 and thereafter, an FDIC-supervised 
institution that is a subsidiary of a covered BHC will be deemed to be 
well capitalized if the FDIC-supervised institution satisfies paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) through (v) of this section and has a supplementary leverage 
ratio of 6.0 percent or greater. For purposes of this paragraph, a 
covered BHC means a U.S. top-tier bank holding company with more than 
$700 billion in total assets as reported on the company's most recent 
Consolidated Financial Statement for Bank Holding Companies (FR Y-9C) or 
more than $10 trillion in assets under custody as reported on the 
company's most recent Banking Organization Systemic Risk Report (FR Y-
15).
    (2) ``Adequately capitalized'' if it:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio of 8.0 percent or greater; 
and
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6.0 percent or 
greater; and
    (iii) Has a common equity tier 1 capital ratio of 4.5 percent or 
greater; and
    (iv) Has a leverage ratio of 4.0 percent or greater; and
    (v) Does not meet the definition of a well capitalized bank.
    (vi) Beginning January 1, 2018, an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution will be deemed to be ``adequately capitalized'' 
if it satisfies paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (v) of this section and has 
a supplementary leverage ratio of 3.0 percent or greater, as calculated 
in accordance with Sec. 324.11 of subpart B of this part.
    (3) ``Undercapitalized'' if it:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 8.0 
percent; or
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio that is less than 6.0 
percent; or
    (iii) Has a common equity tier 1 capital ratio that is less than 4.5 
percent; or
    (iv) Has a leverage ratio that is less than 4.0 percent.
    (v) Beginning January 1, 2018, an advanced approaches FDIC-
supervised institution will be deemed to be ``undercapitalized'' if it 
has a supplementary leverage ratio of less than 3.0 percent, as 
calculated in accordance with Sec. 324.11.
    (4) ``Significantly undercapitalized'' if it has:
    (i) A total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 6.0 percent; 
or
    (ii) A Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio that is less than 4.0 
percent; or
    (iii) A common equity tier 1 capital ratio that is less than 3.0 
percent; or
    (iv) A leverage ratio that is less than 3.0 percent.
    (5) ``Critically undercapitalized'' if the insured depository 
institution has a ratio of tangible equity to total assets that is equal 
to or less than 2.0 percent.
    (c) Capital categories for insured branches of foreign banks. For 
purposes of the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart 
H, an insured branch of a foreign bank shall be deemed to be:
    (1) ``Well capitalized'' if the insured branch:

[[Page 398]]

    (i) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (ii) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 108 percent or more of the preceding quarter's average 
book value of the insured branch's third-party liabilities; and
    (iii) Has not received written notification from:
    (A) The OCC to increase its capital equivalency deposit pursuant to 
12 CFR 28.15, or to comply with asset maintenance requirements pursuant 
to 12 CFR 28.20; or
    (B) The FDIC to pledge additional assets pursuant to Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter or to maintain a higher ratio of eligible assets pursuant 
to Sec. 347.210 of this chapter.
    (2) ``Adequately capitalized'' if the insured branch:
    (i) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (ii) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 106 percent or more of the preceding quarter's average 
book value of the insured branch's third-party liabilities; and
    (iii) Does not meet the definition of a well capitalized insured 
branch.
    (3) ``Undercapitalized'' if the insured branch:
    (i) Fails to maintain the pledge of assets required under 
Sec. 347.209 of this chapter; or
    (ii) Fails to maintain the eligible assets prescribed under 
Sec. 347.210 of this chapter at 106 percent or more of the preceding 
quarter's average book value of the insured branch's third-party 
liabilities.
    (4) ``Significantly undercapitalized'' if it fails to maintain the 
eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of this chapter at 104 
percent or more of the preceding quarter's average book value of the 
insured branch's third-party liabilities.
    (5) ``Critically undercapitalized'' if it fails to maintain the 
eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of this chapter at 102 
percent or more of the preceding quarter's average book value of the 
insured branch's third-party liabilities.
    (d) Reclassifications based on supervisory criteria other than 
capital. The FDIC may reclassify a well capitalized FDIC-supervised 
institution as adequately capitalized and may require an adequately 
capitalized FDIC-supervised institution or an undercapitalized FDIC-
supervised institution to comply with certain mandatory or discretionary 
supervisory actions as if the FDIC-supervised institution were in the 
next lower capital category (except that the FDIC may not reclassify a 
significantly undercapitalized FDIC-supervised institution as critically 
undercapitalized) (each of these actions are hereinafter referred to 
generally as ``reclassifications'') in the following circumstances:
    (1) Unsafe or unsound condition. The FDIC has determined, after 
notice and opportunity for hearing pursuant to Sec. 308.202(a) of this 
chapter, that the FDIC-supervised institution is in unsafe or unsound 
condition; or
    (2) Unsafe or unsound practice. The FDIC has determined, after 
notice and opportunity for hearing pursuant to Sec. 308.202(a) of this 
chapter, that, in the most recent examination of the FDIC-supervised 
institution, the FDIC-supervised institution received and has not 
corrected a less-than-satisfactory rating for any of the categories of 
asset quality, management, earnings, or liquidity.

[81 FR 22173, Apr. 15, 2016, as amended at 79 FR 24541, May 1, 2014]



Sec. 324.404  Capital restoration plans.

    (a) Schedule for filing plan--(1) In general. An FDIC-supervised 
institution shall file a written capital restoration plan with the 
appropriate FDIC regional director within 45 days of the date that the 
FDIC-supervised institution receives notice or is deemed to have notice 
that the FDIC-supervised institution is undercapitalized, significantly 
undercapitalized, or critically undercapitalized, unless the FDIC 
notifies the FDIC-supervised institution in writing that the plan is to 
be filed within a different period. An adequately capitalized FDIC-
supervised institution that has been required pursuant to 
Sec. 324.403(d) to comply with supervisory actions as if the FDIC-
supervised institution were undercapitalized

[[Page 399]]

is not required to submit a capital restoration plan solely by virtue of 
the reclassification.
    (2) Additional capital restoration plans. Notwithstanding paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution that has already 
submitted and is operating under a capital restoration plan approved 
under section 38 and this subpart H is not required to submit an 
additional capital restoration plan based on a revised calculation of 
its capital measures or a reclassification of the institution under 
Sec. 324.403 unless the FDIC notifies the FDIC-supervised institution 
that it must submit a new or revised capital plan. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that is notified that it must submit a new or revised 
capital restoration plan shall file the plan in writing with the 
appropriate FDIC regional director within 45 days of receiving such 
notice, unless the FDIC notifies it in writing that the plan must be 
filed within a different period.
    (b) Contents of plan. All financial data submitted in connection 
with a capital restoration plan shall be prepared in accordance with the 
instructions provided on the Call Report, unless the FDIC instructs 
otherwise. The capital restoration plan shall include all of the 
information required to be filed under section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act. 
An FDIC-supervised institution that is required to submit a capital 
restoration plan as a result of its reclassification pursuant to 
Sec. 324.403(d) shall include a description of the steps the FDIC-
supervised institution will take to correct the unsafe or unsound 
condition or practice. No plan shall be accepted unless it includes any 
performance guarantee described in section 38(e)(2)(C) of the FDI Act by 
each company that controls the FDIC-supervised institution.
    (c) Review of capital restoration plans. Within 60 days after 
receiving a capital restoration plan under this subpart, the FDIC shall 
provide written notice to the FDIC-supervised institution of whether the 
plan has been approved. The FDIC may extend the time within which notice 
regarding approval of a plan shall be provided.
    (d) Disapproval of capital plan. If a capital restoration plan is 
not approved by the FDIC, the FDIC-supervised institution shall submit a 
revised capital restoration plan within the time specified by the FDIC. 
Upon receiving notice that its capital restoration plan has not been 
approved, any undercapitalized FDIC-supervised institution (as defined 
in Sec. 324.403(b)) shall be subject to all of the provisions of section 
38 of the FDI Act and this subpart H applicable to significantly 
undercapitalized institutions. These provisions shall be applicable 
until such time as a new or revised capital restoration plan submitted 
by the FDIC-supervised institution has been approved by the FDIC.
    (e) Failure to submit capital restoration plan. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that is undercapitalized (as defined in Sec. 324.403(b)) and 
that fails to submit a written capital restoration plan within the 
period provided in this section shall, upon the expiration of that 
period, be subject to all of the provisions of section 38 and this 
subpart applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions.
    (f) Failure to implement capital restoration plan. Any 
undercapitalized FDIC-supervised institution that fails in any material 
respect to implement a capital restoration plan shall be subject to all 
of the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart H 
applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions.
    (g) Amendment of capital restoration plan. An FDIC-supervised 
institution that has filed an approved capital restoration plan may, 
after prior written notice to and approval by the FDIC, amend the plan 
to reflect a change in circumstance. Until such time as a proposed 
amendment has been approved, the FDIC-supervised institution shall 
implement the capital restoration plan as approved prior to the proposed 
amendment.
    (h) Performance guarantee by companies that control an FDIC-
supervised institution--(1) Limitation on liability--(i) Amount 
limitation. The aggregate liability under the guarantee provided under 
section 38 and this subpart H for all companies that control a specific 
FDIC-supervised institution that is required to submit a capital 
restoration plan under this subpart H shall be limited to the lesser of:

[[Page 400]]

    (A) An amount equal to 5.0 percent of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's total assets at the time the FDIC-supervised institution 
was notified or deemed to have notice that the FDIC-supervised 
institution was undercapitalized; or
    (B) The amount necessary to restore the relevant capital measures of 
the FDIC-supervised institution to the levels required for the FDIC-
supervised institution to be classified as adequately capitalized, as 
those capital measures and levels are defined at the time that the FDIC-
supervised institution initially fails to comply with a capital 
restoration plan under this subpart H.
    (ii) Limit on duration. The guarantee and limit of liability under 
section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart H shall expire after the FDIC 
notifies the FDIC-supervised institution that it has remained adequately 
capitalized for each of four consecutive calendar quarters. The 
expiration or fulfillment by a company of a guarantee of a capital 
restoration plan shall not limit the liability of the company under any 
guarantee required or provided in connection with any capital 
restoration plan filed by the same FDIC-supervised institution after 
expiration of the first guarantee.
    (iii) Collection on guarantee. Each company that controls a given 
FDIC-supervised institution shall be jointly and severally liable for 
the guarantee for such FDIC-supervised institution as required under 
section 38 and this subpart H, and the FDIC may require and collect 
payment of the full amount of that guarantee from any or all of the 
companies issuing the guarantee.
    (2) Failure to provide guarantee. In the event that an FDIC-
supervised institution that is controlled by any company submits a 
capital restoration plan that does not contain the guarantee required 
under section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act, the FDIC-supervised institution 
shall, upon submission of the plan, be subject to the provisions of 
section 38 and this subpart H that are applicable to FDIC-supervised 
institutions that have not submitted an acceptable capital restoration 
plan.
    (3) Failure to perform guarantee. Failure by any company that 
controls an FDIC-supervised institution to perform fully its guarantee 
of any capital plan shall constitute a material failure to implement the 
plan for purposes of section 38(f) of the FDI Act. Upon such failure, 
the FDIC-supervised institution shall be subject to the provisions of 
section 38 and this subpart H that are applicable to FDIC-supervised 
institutions that have failed in a material respect to implement a 
capital restoration plan.



Sec. 324.405  Mandatory and discretionary supervisory actions.

    (a) Mandatory supervisory actions--(1) Provisions applicable to all 
FDIC-supervised institutions. All FDIC-supervised institutions are 
subject to the restrictions contained in section 38(d) of the FDI Act on 
payment of capital distributions and management fees.
    (2) Provisions applicable to undercapitalized, significantly 
undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized FDIC-supervised 
institution. Immediately upon receiving notice or being deemed to have 
notice, as provided in Sec. 324.402, that the FDIC-supervised 
institution is undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or 
critically undercapitalized, it shall become subject to the provisions 
of section 38 of the FDI Act:
    (i) Restricting payment of capital distributions and management fees 
(section 38(d) of the FDI Act);
    (ii) Requiring that the FDIC monitor the condition of the FDIC-
supervised institution (section 38(e)(1) of the FDI Act);
    (iii) Requiring submission of a capital restoration plan within the 
schedule established in this subpart (section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act);
    (iv) Restricting the growth of the FDIC-supervised institution's 
assets (section 38(e)(3) of the FDI Act); and
    (v) Requiring prior approval of certain expansion proposals (section 
38(e)(4) of the FDI Act).
    (3) Additional provisions applicable to significantly 
undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized FDIC-supervised 
institutions. In addition to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act 
described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, immediately upon 
receiving notice or being deemed to have notice, as provided in 
Sec. 324.402, that the FDIC-supervised institution is significantly

[[Page 401]]

undercapitalized, or critically undercapitalized, or that the FDIC-
supervised institution is subject to the provisions applicable to 
institutions that are significantly undercapitalized because the FDIC-
supervised institution failed to submit or implement in any material 
respect an acceptable capital restoration plan, the FDIC-supervised 
institution shall become subject to the provisions of section 38 of the 
FDI Act that restrict compensation paid to senior executive officers of 
the institution (section 38(f)(4) of the FDI Act).
    (4) Additional provisions applicable to critically undercapitalized 
institutions. (i) In addition to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI 
Act described in paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) of this section, 
immediately upon receiving notice or being deemed to have notice, as 
provided in Sec. 324.402, that the insured depository institution is 
critically undercapitalized, the institution is prohibited from doing 
any of the following without the FDIC's prior written approval:
    (A) Entering into any material transaction other than in the usual 
course of business, including any investment, expansion, acquisition, 
sale of assets, or other similar action with respect to which the 
depository institution is required to provide notice to the appropriate 
Federal banking agency;
    (B) Extending credit for any highly leveraged transaction;
    (C) Amending the institution's charter or bylaws, except to the 
extent necessary to carry out any other requirement of any law, 
regulation, or order;
    (D) Making any material change in accounting methods;
    (E) Engaging in any covered transaction (as defined in section 
23A(b) of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b)));
    (F) Paying excessive compensation or bonuses;
    (G) Paying interest on new or renewed liabilities at a rate that 
would increase the institution's weighted average cost of funds to a 
level significantly exceeding the prevailing rates of interest on 
insured deposits in the institution's normal market areas; and
    (H) Making any principal or interest payment on subordinated debt 
beginning 60 days after becoming critically undercapitalized except that 
this restriction shall not apply, until July 15, 1996, with respect to 
any subordinated debt outstanding on July 15, 1991, and not extended or 
otherwise renegotiated after July 15, 1991.
    (ii) In addition, the FDIC may further restrict the activities of 
any critically undercapitalized institution to carry out the purposes of 
section 38 of the FDI Act.
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution must remain in compliance with 
the plan or is operating under a written agreement with the appropriate 
Federal banking agency.
    (b) Discretionary supervisory actions. In taking any action under 
section 38 of the FDI Act that is within the FDIC's discretion to take 
in connection with:
    (1) An insured depository institution that is deemed to be 
undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or critically 
undercapitalized, or has been reclassified as undercapitalized, or 
significantly undercapitalized; or
    (2) An officer or director of such institution, the FDIC shall 
follow the procedures for issuing directives under Secs. 308.201 and 
308.203 of this chapter, unless otherwise provided in section 38 of the 
FDI Act or this subpart H.



PART 325_CAPITAL MAINTENANCE--Table of Contents



                 Subpart A_Minimum Capital Requirements

Sec.
325.1  Scope.
325.2  Definitions.
325.3  Minimum leverage capital requirement.
325.4  Inadequate capital as an unsafe or unsound practice or condition.
325.5  Miscellaneous.
325.6  Issuance of directives.

                   Subpart B_Prompt Corrective Action

325.101  Authority, purpose, scope, other supervisory authority, and 
          disclosure of capital categories.
325.102  Notice of capital category.
325.103  Capital measures and capital category definitions.
325.104  Capital restoration plans.
325.105  Mandatory and discretionary supervisory actions under section 
          38.

[[Page 402]]

                      Subpart C_Annual Stress Test

325.201  Authority, purpose, and reservation of authority.
325.202  Definitions.
325.203  Applicability.
325.204  Annual stress tests required.
325.205  Methodologies and practices.
325.206  Required reports of stress test results to the FDIC and the 
          Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.
325.207  Publication of stress test results.

Appendix A to Part 325--Statement of Policy on Risk-Based Capital
Appendix B to Part 325--Statement of Policy on Capital Adequacy
Appendix C to Part 325--Risk-Based Capital for State Nonmember Banks: 
          Market Risk
Appendix D to Part 325--Capital Adequacy Guidelines for Banks: Internal-
          Ratings-Based and Advanced Measurement Approaches

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 5365(i)(2); 12 U.S.C. 5412(b)(2)(C); 12 U.S.C. 
1818, 12 U.S.C. 1819(a)(Tenth), 12 U.S.C. 1831o, and 12 U.S.C. 1831p-1.



                 Subpart A_Minimum Capital Requirements



Sec. 325.1  Scope.

    The provisions of this subpart A apply to those circumstances for 
which the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or this chapter requires an 
evaluation of the adequacy of an insured depository institution's 
capital structure. The FDIC is required to evaluate capital before 
approving various applications by insured depository institutions. The 
FDIC also must evaluate capital, as an essential component, in 
determining the safety and soundness of state nonmember banks it insures 
and supervises and in determining whether depository institutions are in 
an unsafe or unsound condition. This subpart A establishes the criteria 
and standards the FDIC will use in calculating the minimum leverage 
capital requirement and in determining capital adequacy. In addition, 
appendix A to this subpart sets forth the FDIC's risk-based capital 
policy statement and appendix B to this subpart includes a statement of 
policy on capital adequacy that provides interpretational guidance as to 
how this subpart will be administered and enforced. In accordance with 
subpart B of part 325, the FDIC also must evaluate an institution's 
capital for purposes of determining whether the institution is subject 
to the prompt corrective action provisions set forth in section 38 of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o).

[58 FR 8219, Feb. 12, 1993]



Sec. 325.2  Definitions.

    (a) Allowance for loan and lease losses means those general 
valuation allowances that have been established through charges against 
earnings to absorb losses on loans and lease financing receivables. 
Allowances for loan and lease losses exclude allocated transfer risk 
reserves established pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3904 and specific reserves 
created against identified losses.
    (b) Assets classified loss means:
    (1) When measured as of the date of examination of an insured 
depository institution, those assets that have been determined by an 
evaluation made by a state or federal examiner as of that date to be a 
loss; and
    (2) When measured as of any other date, those assets:
    (i) That have been determined--
    (A) By an evaluation made by a state or federal examiner at the most 
recent examination of an insured depository institution to be a loss; or
    (B) By evaluations made by the insured depository institution since 
its most recent examination to be a loss; and
    (ii) That have not been charged off from the insured depository 
institution's books or collected.
    (c) Bank means an FDIC-insured, state-chartered commercial or 
savings bank that is not a member of the Federal Reserve System and for 
which the FDIC is the appropriate federal banking agency pursuant to 
section 3(q) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(q)).
    (d) Common stockholders' equity means the sum of common stock and 
related surplus, undivided profits, disclosed capital reserves that 
represent a segregation of undivided profits, and foreign currency 
translation adjustments, less net unrealized holding losses on 
available-for-sale equity securities with readily determinable fair 
values.
    (e)(1) Control has the same meaning assigned to it in section 2 of 
the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841),

[[Page 403]]

and the term controlled shall be construed consistently with the term 
control.
    (2) Exclusion for fiduciary ownership. No insured depository 
institution or company controls another insured depository institution 
or company by virtue of its ownership or control of shares in a 
fiduciary capacity. Shares shall not be deemed to have been acquired in 
a fiduciary capacity if the acquiring insured depository institution or 
company has sole discretionary authority to exercise voting rights with 
respect thereto.
    (3) Exclusion for debts previously contracted. No insured depository 
institution or company controls another insured depository institution 
or company by virtue of its ownership or control of shares acquired in 
securing or collecting a debt previously contracted in good faith, until 
two years after the date of acquisition. The two-year period may be 
extended at the discretion of the appropriate federal banking agency for 
up to three one-year periods.
    (f) Controlling person means any person having control of an insured 
depository institution and any company controlled by that person.
    (g)(1) Credit-enhancing interest-only strip means an on-balance 
sheet asset that, in form or in substance:
    (i) Represents the contractual right to receive some or all of the 
interest due on transferred assets; and
    (ii) Exposes the bank to credit risk directly or indirectly 
associated with the transferred assets that exceeds a pro rata share of 
the bank's claim on the assets, whether through subordination provisions 
or other credit enhancement techniques.
    (2) Reservation of authority. In determining whether a particular 
interest cash flow functions, directly or indirectly, as a credit-
enhancing interest-only strip, the FDIC will consider the economic 
substance of the transaction. The FDIC, through the Director of 
Supervision, or other designated FDIC official reserves the right to 
identify other interest cash flows or related assets as credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips.
    (h) Face amount means the notional principal, or face value, amount 
of an off-balance sheet item; the amortized cost of an asset not held 
for trading purposes; and the fair value of a trading asset.
    (i)(1) Highly leveraged transaction means an extension of credit to 
or investment in a business by an insured depository institution where 
the financing transaction involves a buyout, acquisition, or 
recapitalization of an existing business and one of the following 
criteria is met:
    (i) The transaction results in a liabilities-to-assets leverage 
ratio higher than 75 percent; or
    (ii) The transaction at least doubles the subject company's 
liabilities and results in a liabilities-to-assets leverage ratio higher 
than 50 percent; or
    (iii) The transaction is designated an HLT by a syndication agent or 
a federal bank regulator.
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (g)(1) of this section, loans and 
exposures to any obligor in which the total financing package, including 
all obligations held by all participants is $20 million or more, or such 
lower level as the FDIC may establish by order on a case-by-case basis, 
will be excluded from this definition.
    (j) Identified losses means:
    (1) When measured as of the date of examination of an insured 
depository institution, those items that have been determined by an 
evaluation made by a state or federal examiner as of that date to be 
chargeable against income, capital and/or general valuation allowances 
such as the allowance for loan and lease losses (examples of identified 
losses would be assets classified loss, off-balance sheet items 
classified loss, any provision expenses that are necessary for the 
institution to record in order to replenish its general valuation 
allowances to an adequate level, liabilities not shown on the 
institution's books, estimated losses in contingent liabilities, and 
differences in accounts which represent shortages); and
    (2) When measured as of any other date, those items:
    (i) That have been determined--
    (A) By an evaluation made by a state or federal examiner at the most 
recent examination of an insured depository

[[Page 404]]

institution to be chargeable against income, capital and/or general 
valuation allowances; or
    (B) By evaluations made by the insured depository institution since 
its most recent examination to be chargeable against income, capital 
and/or general valuation allowances; and
    (ii) For which the appropriate accounting entries to recognize the 
loss have not yet been made on the insured depository institution's 
books nor has the item been collected or otherwise settled.
    (k) Insured depository institution means any depository institution 
(except for a foreign bank having an insured branch) the deposits of 
which are insured in accordance with the provisions of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq.)
    (l) Intangible assets means those assets that are required to be 
reported as intangible assets in a banking institution's ``Reports of 
Condition and Income'' (Call Report) or in a savings association's 
``Thrift Financial Report.''
    (m) Leverage ratio means the ratio of Tier 1 capital to total 
assets, as calculated under this part.
    (n) Management fee means any payment of money or provision of any 
other thing of value to a company or individual for the provision of 
management services or advice to the bank or related overhead expenses, 
including payments related to supervisory, executive, managerial, or 
policymaking functions, other than compensation to an individual in the 
individual's capacity as an officer or employee of the bank.
    (o) Minority interests in consolidated subsidiaries means minority 
interests in equity capital accounts of those subsidiaries that have 
been consolidated for the purpose of computing regulatory capital under 
this part, except that minority interests which fail to provide 
meaningful capital support are excluded from this definition.
    (p) Mortgage servicing assets means those assets (net of any related 
valuation allowances) that result from contracts to service loans 
secured by real estate (that have been securitized or are owned by 
others) for which the benefits of servicing are expected to more than 
adequately compensate the servicer for performing the servicing. For 
purposes of determining regulatory capital under this part, mortgage 
servicing assets will be recognized only to the extent that the assets 
meet the conditions, limitations, and restrictions described in 
Sec. 325.5 (f).
    (q) Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock means perpetual 
preferred stock (and related surplus) where the issuer has the option to 
waive payment of dividends and where the dividends so waived do not 
accumulate to future periods nor do they represent a contingent claim on 
the issuer. Preferred stock issues where the dividend is reset 
periodically based, in whole or in part, upon the bank's current credit 
standing, including but not limited to, auction rate, money market and 
remarketable preferred stock, are excluded from this definition of 
noncumulative perpetual preferred stock, regardless of whether the 
dividends are cumulative or noncumulative.
    (r) Perpetual preferred stock means a preferred stock that does not 
have a maturity date, that cannot be redeemed at the option of the 
holder, and that has no other provisions that will require future 
redemption of the issue. It includes those issues of preferred stock 
that automatically convert into common stock at a stated date. It 
excludes those issues, the rate on which increases, or can increase, in 
such a manner that would effectively require the issuer to redeem the 
issue.
    (s) Risk-weighted assets means total risk-weighted assets, as 
calculated in accordance with the FDIC's Statement of Policy on Risk-
Based Capital (appendix A to part 325).
    (t) Savings association means any federally-chartered savings 
association, any state-chartered savings association, and any 
corporation (other than a bank) that the Board of Directors of the FDIC 
and the Director of the Office of Thrift Supervision jointly determine 
to be operating in substantially the same manner as a savings 
association.
    (u) Tangible equity means the amount of core capital elements as 
defined in Section I.A.1. of the FDIC's Statement of Policy on Risk-
Based Capital (appendix A to this Part 325), plus the

[[Page 405]]

amount of outstanding cumulative perpetual preferred stock (including 
related surplus), minus all intangible assets except mortgage servicing 
assets to the extent that the FDIC determines pursuant to Sec. 325.5(f) 
of this part that mortgage servicing assets may be included in 
calculating the bank's Tier 1 capital.
    (v) Tier 1 capital or core capital means the sum of common 
stockholders' equity, noncumulative perpetual preferred stock (including 
any related surplus), and minority interests in consolidated 
subsidiaries, minus all intangible assets (other than mortgage servicing 
assets, nonmortgage servicing assets, and purchased credit card 
relationships eligible for inclusion in core capital pursuant to 
Sec. 325.5(f)), minus credit-enhancing interest-only strips that are not 
eligible for inclusion in core capital pursuant to Sec. 325.5(f), minus 
deferred tax assets in excess of the limit set forth in Sec. 325.5(g), 
minus identified losses (to the extent that Tier 1 capital would have 
been reduced if the appropriate accounting entries to reflect the 
identified losses had been recorded on the insured depository 
institution's books), minus investments in financial subsidiaries 
subject to 12 CFR part 362, subpart E, and minus the amount of the total 
adjusted carrying value of nonfinancial equity investments that is 
subject to a deduction from Tier 1 capital as set forth in section 
II.B.(6) of appendix A to this part.
    (w) Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio means the ratio of Tier 1 
capital to risk-weighted assets, as calculated in accordance with the 
FDIC's Statement of Policy on Risk-Based Capital (appendix A to part 
325).
    (x) Total assets means the average of total assets required to be 
included in a banking institution's ``Reports of Condition and Income'' 
(Call Report) or, for savings associations, the consolidated total 
assets required to be included in the ``Thrift Financial Report,'' as 
these reports may from time to time be revised, as of the most recent 
report date (and after making any necessary subsidiary adjustments for 
state nonmember banks as described in Secs. 325.5(c) and 325.5(d) of 
this part), minus intangible assets (other than mortgage servicing 
assets, nonmortgage servicing assets, and purchased credit card 
relationships eligible for inclusion in core capital pursuant to 
Sec. 325.5(f)), minus credit-enhancing interest-only strips that are not 
eligible for inclusion in core capital pursuant to Sec. 325.5(f), minus 
deferred tax assets in excess of the limit set forth in Sec. 325.5(g), 
minus assets classified loss and any other assets that are deducted in 
determining Tier 1 capital, and minus the amount of the total adjusted 
carrying value of nonfinancial equity investments that is subject to a 
deduction from Tier 1 capital as set forth in section II.B.(6) of 
appendix A to this part. For banking institutions, the average of total 
assets is found in the Call Report schedule of quarterly averages. For 
savings associations, the consolidated total assets figure is found in 
Schedule CSC of the Thrift Financial Report.
    (y) Total risk-based capital ratio means the ratio of qualifying 
total capital to risk-weighted assets, as calculated in accordance with 
the FDIC's Statement of Policy on Risk-Based Capital (appendix A to part 
325).
    (z) Written agreement means an agreement in writing executed by 
authorized representatives entered into with the FDIC by an insured 
depository institution which is enforceable by an action under section 
8(a) and/or section 8(b) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1818 (a), (b)).

[56 FR 10160, Mar. 11, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 44899, Sept. 29, 1992; 
58 FR 6368, 6369, Jan. 28, 1993; 58 FR 8219, Feb. 12, 1993; 58 FR 60103, 
Nov. 15, 1993; 59 FR 66666, Dec. 28, 1994; 60 FR 8187, Feb. 13, 1995; 60 
FR 39232, Aug. 1, 1995; 63 FR 42677, Aug. 10, 1998; 66 FR 59652; Nov. 
29, 2001; 67 FR 3804, Jan. 25, 2002]



Sec. 325.3  Minimum leverage capital requirement.

    (a) General. Banks must maintain at least the minimum leverage 
capital requirement set forth in this section. The capital standards in 
this part are the minimum acceptable for banks whose overall financial 
condition is fundamentally sound, which are well-managed and which have 
no material or significant financial weaknesses. Thus, the FDIC is not 
precluded from requiring an institution to maintain a higher capital 
level based on the institution's

[[Page 406]]

particular risk profile. Where the FDIC determines that the financial 
history or condition, managerial resources and/or the future earnings 
prospects of a bank are not adequate, or where a bank has sizable off-
balance sheet or funding risks, significant risks from concentrations of 
credit or nontraditional activities, excessive interest rate risk 
exposure, or a significant volume of assets classified substandard, 
doubtful or loss or otherwise criticized, the FDIC will take these other 
factors into account in analyzing the bank's capital adequacy and may 
determine that the minimum amount of capital for that bank is greater 
than the minimum standards stated in this section. These same criteria 
will apply to any insured depository institution making an application 
to the FDIC that requires the FDIC to consider the adequacy of the 
institution's capital structure.
    (b) Minimum leverage capital requirement. (1) The minimum leverage 
capital requirement for a bank (or an insured depository institution 
making application to the FDIC) shall consist of a ratio of Tier 1 
capital to total assets of not less than 3 percent if the FDIC 
determines that the institution is not anticipating or experiencing 
significant growth and has well-diversified risk, including no undue 
interest rate risk exposure, excellent asset quality, high liquidity, 
good earnings and in general is considered a strong banking 
organization, rated composite 1 under the Uniform Financial Institutions 
Rating System (the CAMELS rating system) established by the Federal 
Financial Institutions Examination Council.
    (2) For all but the most highly-rated institutions meeting the 
conditions set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the minimum 
leverage capital requirement for a bank (or for an insured depository 
institution making an application to the FDIC) shall consist of a ratio 
of Tier 1 capital to total assets of not less than 4 percent.
    (c) Insured depository institutions with less than the minimum 
leverage capital requirement. (1) A bank (or an insured depository 
institution making an application to the FDIC) operating with less than 
the minimum leverage capital requirement does not have adequate capital 
and therefore has inadequate financial resources.
    (2) Any insured depository institution operating with an inadequate 
capital structure, and therefore inadequate financial resources, will 
not receive approval for an application requiring the FDIC to consider 
the adequacy of its capital structure or its financial resources.
    (3) As required under Sec. 325.104(a)(1) of this part, a bank must 
file a written capital restoration plan with the appropriate FDIC 
regional director within 45 days of the date that the bank receives 
notice or is deemed to have notice that the bank is undercapitalized, 
significantly undercapitalized or critically undercapitalized, unless 
the FDIC notifies the bank in writing that the plan is to be filed 
within a different period.
    (4) In any merger, acquisition or other type of business combination 
where the FDIC must give its approval, where it is required to consider 
the adequacy of the financial resources of the existing and proposed 
institutions, and where the resulting entity is either insured by the 
FDIC or not otherwise federally insured, approval will not be granted 
when the resulting entity does not meet the minimum leverage capital 
requirement.
    (d) Exceptions. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs (a), 
(b) and (c) of this section:
    (1) The FDIC, in its discretion, may approve an application pursuant 
to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act where it is required to consider 
the adequacy of capital if it finds that such approval must be taken to 
prevent the closing of a depository institution or to facilitate the 
acquisition of a closed depository institution, or, when severe 
financial conditions exist which threaten the stability of an insured 
depository institution or of a significant number of depository 
institutions insured by the FDIC or of insured depository institutions 
possessing significant financial resources, such action is taken to 
lessen the risk to the FDIC posed by an insured depository institution 
under such threat of instability.
    (2) The FDIC, in its discretion, may approve an application pursuant 
to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act where it

[[Page 407]]

is required to consider the adequacy of capital or the financial 
resources of the insured depository institution where it finds that the 
applicant has committed to and is in compliance with a reasonable plan 
to meet its minimum leverage capital requirements within a reasonable 
period of time.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
3064-0075 for use through December 31, 1993)

[56 FR 10162, Mar. 11, 1991, as amended at 58 FR 8219, Feb. 12, 1993; 59 
FR 64564, Dec. 15, 1994; 60 FR 45609, Aug. 31, 1995; 62 FR 55493, Oct. 
24, 1997; 64 FR 10200, Mar. 2, 1999; 66 FR 59652, Nov. 29, 2001]



Sec. 325.4  Inadequate capital as an unsafe or unsound practice
or condition.

    (a) General. As a condition of federal deposit insurance, all 
insured depository institutions must remain in a safe and sound 
condition.
    (b) Unsafe or unsound practice. Any bank which has less than its 
minimum leverage capital requirement is deemed to be engaged in an 
unsafe or unsound practice pursuant to section 8(b)(1) and/or 8(c) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)(1) and/or 1818(c)). 
Except that such a bank which has entered into and is in compliance with 
a written agreement with the FDIC or has submitted to the FDIC and is in 
compliance with a plan approved by the FDIC to increase its Tier 1 
leverage capital ratio to such level as the FDIC deems appropriate and 
to take such other action as may be necessary for the bank to be 
operated so as not to be engaged in such an unsafe or unsound practice 
will not be deemed to be engaged in an unsafe or unsound practice 
pursuant to section 8(b)(1) and/or 8(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(b)(1) and/or 1818(c)) on account of its capital 
ratios. The FDIC is not precluded from taking section 8(b)(1), section 
8(c) or any other enforcement action against a bank with capital above 
the minimum requirement if the specific circumstances deem such action 
to be appropriate. Under the conditions set forth in section 8(t) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(t)), the FDIC also may 
take section 8(b)(1) and/or 8(c) enforcement action against any savings 
association that is deemed to be engaged in an unsafe or unsound 
practice on account of its inadequate capital structure.
    (c) Unsafe or unsound condition. Any insured depository institution 
with a ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets that is less than two 
percent is deemed to be operating in an unsafe or unsound condition 
pursuant to section 8(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1818(a)).
    (1) A bank with a ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets of less 
than two percent which has entered into and is in compliance with a 
written agreement with the FDIC (or any other insured depository 
institution with a ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets of less than 
two percent which has entered into and is in compliance with a written 
agreement with its primary federal regulator and to which agreement the 
FDIC is a party) to increase its Tier 1 leverage capital ratio to such 
level as the FDIC deems appropriate and to take such other action as may 
be necessary for the insured depository institution to be operated in a 
safe and sound manner, will not be subject to a proceeding by the FDIC 
pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(a) on account of its capital ratios.
    (2) An insured depository institution with a ratio of Tier 1 capital 
to total assets that is equal to or greater than two percent may be 
operating in an unsafe or unsound condition. The FDIC is not precluded 
from bringing an action pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1818(a) where an insured 
depository institution has a ratio of Tier 1 capital to total assets 
that is equal to or greater than two percent.

[56 FR 10162, Mar. 11, 1991]



Sec. 325.5  Miscellaneous.

    (a) Intangible assets. Any intangible assets that were explicitly 
approved by the FDIC as part of the bank's regulatory capital on a 
specific case basis will be included in capital under the terms and 
conditions that were approved by the FDIC, provided that the intangible 
asset is being amortized over a period not to exceed 15 years or its 
estimated useful life, whichever is shorter. However, pursuant to 
section 18(n) of the Federal Deposit Insurance

[[Page 408]]

Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(n)), an unidentifiable intangible asset such as 
goodwill, if acquired after April 12, 1989, cannot be included in 
calculating regulatory capital under this part.
    (b) Reservation of authority. Notwithstanding the definition of Tier 
1 capital in Sec. 325.2(t) of this subpart and the risk-based capital 
definitions of Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital in appendix A to this subpart, 
the Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection 
(DSC) may, if the Director finds a newly developed or modified capital 
instrument or a particular balance sheet entry or account to be the 
functional equivalent of a component of Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital, permit 
one or more insured depository institutions to include all or a portion 
of such instrument, entry, or account as Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital, 
permanently, or on a temporary basis, for purposes of this part. 
Similarly, the Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer 
Protection (DSC) may, if the Director finds that a particular Tier 1 or 
Tier 2 capital component or balance sheet entry or account has 
characteristics or terms that diminish its contribution to an insured 
depository institution's ability to absorb losses, require the deduction 
of all or a portion of such component, entry, or account from Tier 1 or 
Tier 2 capital.
    (c) Securities subsidiary. For purposes of this part, any securities 
subsidiary subject to 12 CFR 337.4 shall not be consolidated with its 
bank parent and any investment therein shall be deducted from the bank 
parent's Tier 1 capital and total assets.
    (d) Depository institution subsidiary. Any domestic depository 
institution subsidiary that is not consolidated in the ``Reports of 
Condition and Income'' (Call Report) of its insured parent bank shall be 
consolidated with the insured parent bank for purposes of this part. The 
financial statements of the subsidiary that are to be used for this 
consolidation must be prepared in the same manner as the ``Reports of 
Condition and Income'' (Call Report). A domestic depository institution 
subsidiary of a savings association shall be consolidated for purposes 
of this part if such consolidation also is required pursuant to the 
capital requirements of the association's primary federal regulator.
    (e) Restrictions relating to capital components. To qualify as Tier 
1 capital under this part or Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital under appendix A 
to this part, a capital instrument must not contain or be subject to any 
conditions, covenants, terms, restrictions, or provisions that are 
inconsistent with safe and sound banking practices. A condition, 
covenant, term, restriction, or provision is inconsistent with safe and 
sound banking practices if it:
    (1) Unduly interferes with the ability of the issuer to conduct 
normal banking operations;
    (2) Results in significantly higher dividends or interest payments 
in the event of deterioration in the financial condition of the issuer;
    (3) Impairs the ability of the issuer to comply with statutory or 
regulatory requirements regarding the disposition of assets or 
incurrence of additional debt; or
    (4) Limits the ability of the FDIC or a similar regulatory authority 
to take any necessary action to resolve a problem bank or failing bank 
situation.

Other conditions and covenants that are not expressly listed in 
paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section also may be 
inconsistent with safe and sound banking practices.
    (f) Treatment of mortgage servicing assets, purchased credit card 
relationships, nonmortgage servicing assets, and credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips. For purposes of determining Tier 1 capital under 
this part, mortgage servicing assets, purchased credit card 
relationships, nonmortgage servicing assets, and credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips will be deducted from assets and from common 
stockholders' equity to the extent that these items do not meet the 
conditions, limitations, and restrictions described in this section. 
Banks may elect to deduct disallowed servicing assets and disallowed 
credit-enhancing interest-only strips on a basis that is net of a 
proportional amount of any associated deferred tax liability recorded on 
the balance sheet. Any deferred tax liability netted in this manner 
cannot also be netted

[[Page 409]]

against deferred tax assets when determining the amount of deferred tax 
assets that are dependent upon future taxable income and calculating the 
maximum allowable amount of these assets under paragraph (g) of this 
section.
    (1) Valuation. The fair value of mortgage servicing assets, 
purchased credit card relationships, nonmortgage servicing assets, and 
credit-enhancing interest-only strips shall be estimated at least 
quarterly. The quarterly fair value estimate shall include adjustments 
for any significant changes in the original valuation assumptions, 
including changes in prepayment estimates or attrition rates. The FDIC 
in its discretion may require independent fair value estimates on a 
case-by-case basis where it is deemed appropriate for safety and 
soundness purposes.
    (2) Fair value limitation. For purposes of calculating Tier 1 
capital under this part (but not for financial statement purposes), the 
balance sheet assets for mortgage servicing assets, purchased credit 
card relationships, and nonmortgage servicing assets will each be 
reduced to an amount equal to the lesser of:
    (i) 90 percent of the fair value of these assets, determined in 
accordance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section; or
    (ii) 100 percent of the remaining unamortized book value of these 
assets (net of any related valuation allowances), determined in 
accordance with the instructions for the preparation of the ``Reports of 
Income and Condition'' (Call Reports).
    (3) Tier 1 capital limitations. (i) The maximum allowable amount of 
mortgage servicing assets, purchased credit card relationships, and 
nonmortgage servicing assets in the aggregate will be limited to the 
lesser of:
    (A) 100 percent of the amount of Tier 1 capital that exists before 
the deduction of any disallowed mortgage servicing assets, any 
disallowed purchased credit card relationships, any disallowed 
nonmortgage servicing assets, any disallowed credit-enhancing interest-
only strips, any disallowed deferred tax assets, and any nonfinancial 
equity investments; or
    (B) The sum of the amounts of mortgage servicing assets, purchased 
credit card relationships, and nonmortgage servicing assets, determined 
in accordance with paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
    (ii) The maximum allowable amount of credit-enhancing interest-only 
strips, whether purchased or retained, will be limited to the lesser of:
    (A) 25 percent of the amount of Tier 1 capital that exists before 
the deduction of any disallowed mortgage servicing assets, any 
disallowed purchased credit card relationships, any disallowed 
nonmortgage servicing assets, any disallowed credit-enhancing interest-
only strips, any disallowed deferred tax assets, and any nonfinancial 
equity investments; or
    (B) The sum of the face amounts of all credit-enhancing interest-
only strips.
    (4) Tier 1 capital sublimit. In addition to the aggregate limitation 
on mortgage servicing assets, purchased credit card relationships, and 
nonmortgage servicing assets set forth in paragraph (f)(3) of this 
section, a sublimit will apply to purchased credit card relationships 
and nonmortgage servicing assets. The maximum allowable amount of the 
aggregate of purchased credit card relationships and nonmortgage 
servicing assets will be limited to the lesser of:
    (i) 25 percent of the amount of Tier 1 capital that exists before 
the deduction of any disallowed mortgage servicing assets, any 
disallowed purchased credit card relationships, any disallowed 
nonmortgage servicing assets, any disallowed credit-enhancing interest-
only strips, any disallowed deferred tax assets, and any nonfinancial 
equity investments; or
    (ii) The sum of the amounts of purchased credit card relationships 
and nonmortgage servicing assets determined in accordance with paragraph 
(f)(2) of this section.
    (g) Treatment of deferred tax assets. For purposes of calculating 
Tier 1 capital under this part (but not for financial statement 
purposes), deferred tax assets are subject to the conditions, 
limitations, and restrictions described in this section.
    (1) Deferred tax assets that are dependent upon future taxable 
income. These assets are:

[[Page 410]]

    (i) Deferred tax assets arising from deductible temporary 
differences that exceed the amount of taxes previously paid that could 
be recovered through loss carrybacks if existing temporary differences 
(both deductible and taxable and regardless of where the related 
deferred tax effects are reported on the balance sheet) fully reverse at 
the calendar quarter-end date; and
    (ii) Deferred tax assets arising from operating loss and tax credit 
carryforwards.
    (2) Tier 1 capital limitations. (i) The maximum allowable amount of 
deferred tax assets that are dependent upon future taxable income, net 
of any valuation allowance for deferred tax assets, will be limited to 
the lesser of:
    (A) The amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent upon future 
taxable income that is expected to be realized within one year of the 
calendar quarter-end date, based on projected future taxable income for 
that year; or
    (B) 10 percent of the amount of Tier 1 capital that exists before 
the deduction of any disallowed mortgage servicing assets, any 
disallowed nonmortgage servicing assets, any disallowed purchased credit 
card relationships, any disallowed credit-enhancing interest-only 
strips, any disallowed deferred tax assets, and any nonfinancial equity 
investments.
    (ii) For purposes of this limitation, all existing temporary 
differences should be assumed to fully reverse at the calendar quarter-
end date. The recorded amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent 
upon future taxable income, net of any valuation allowance for deferred 
tax assets, in excess of this limitation will be deducted from assets 
and from equity capital for purposes of determining Tier 1 capital under 
this part. The amount of deferred tax assets that can be realized from 
taxes paid in prior carryback years and from the reversal of existing 
taxable temporary differences generally would not be deducted from 
assets and from equity capital. However, notwithstanding the first three 
sentences in this paragraph, the amount of carryback potential that may 
be considered in calculating the amount of deferred tax assets that a 
member of a consolidated group (for tax purposes) may include in Tier 1 
capital may not exceed the amount which the member could reasonably 
expect to have refunded by its parent.
    (3) Projected future taxable income. Projected future taxable income 
should not include net operating loss carryforwards to be used within 
one year of the most recent calendar quarter-end date or the amount of 
existing temporary differences expected to reverse within that year. 
Projected future taxable income should include the estimated effect of 
tax planning strategies that are expected to be implemented to realize 
tax carryforwards that will otherwise expire during that year. Future 
taxable income projections for the current fiscal year (adjusted for any 
significant changes that have occurred or are expected to occur) may be 
used when applying the capital limit at an interim calendar quarter-end 
date rather then preparing a new projection each quarter.
    (4) Unrealized holding gains and losses on available-for-sale debt 
securities. The deferred tax effects of any unrealized holding gains and 
losses on available-for-sale debt securities may be excluded from the 
determination of the amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent 
upon future taxable income and the calculation of the maximum allowable 
amount of such assets. If these deferred tax effects are excluded, this 
treatment must be followed consistently over time.
    (5) Goodwill and other intangible assets. This paragraph (g)(5) 
provides the capital treatment for intangible assets acquired in a 
nontaxable business combination, and goodwill acquired in a taxable 
business combination.
    (i) Intangible assets acquired in nontaxable purchase business 
combinations. A deferred tax liability that is specifically related to 
an intangible asset (other than mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage 
servicing assets, and purchased credit card relationships) acquired in a 
nontaxable purchase business combination may be netted against this 
intangible asset. Only the net amount of this intangible asset must be 
deducted from Tier 1 capital.
    (ii) Goodwill acquired in a taxable purchase business combination. A 
deferred tax liability that is specifically related

[[Page 411]]

to goodwill acquired in a taxable purchase business combination may be 
netted against this goodwill. Only the net amount of this goodwill must 
be deducted from Tier 1 capital.
    (iii) Treatment of a netted deferred tax liability. When a deferred 
tax liability is netted in accordance with paragraph (g)(5)(i) or (ii) 
of this section, the taxable temporary difference that gives rise to 
this deferred tax liability must be excluded from existing taxable 
temporary differences when determining the amount of deferred tax assets 
that are dependent upon future taxable income and calculating the 
maximum allowable amount of such assets.
    (iv) Valuation. The FDIC in its discretion may require independent 
fair value estimates for goodwill and other intangible assets on a case-
by-case basis where it is deemed appropriate for safety and soundness 
purposes.

[56 FR 10163, Mar. 11, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 7647, Mar. 4, 1992; 58 
FR 6369, Jan. 28, 1993; 58 FR 8219, Feb. 12, 1993; 60 FR 8187, Feb. 13, 
1995; 60 FR 39232, Aug. 1, 1995; 63 FR 42677, Aug. 10, 1998; 66 FR 
59652, Nov. 29, 2001; 65 FR 3804, Jan. 25, 2002; 73 FR 79606, Dec. 30, 
2008]



Sec. 325.6  Issuance of directives.

    (a) General. A directive is a final order issued to a bank that 
fails to maintain capital at or above the minimum leverage capital 
requirement as set forth in Secs. 325.3 and 325.4. A directive issued 
pursuant to this section, including a plan submitted under a directive, 
is enforceable in the same manner and to the same extent as a final 
cease-and-desist order issued under 12 U.S.C. 1818(b).
    (b) Issuance of directives. If a bank is operating with less than 
the minimum leverage capital requirement established by this regulation, 
the Board of Directors, or its designee(s), may issue and serve upon any 
insured state nonmember bank a directive requiring the bank to restore 
its capital to the minimum leverage capital requirement within a 
specified time period. The directive may require the bank to submit to 
the appropriate FDIC regional director, or other specified official, for 
review and approval, a plan describing the means and timing by which the 
bank shall achieve the minimum leverage capital requirement. After the 
FDIC has approved the plan, the bank may be required under the terms of 
the directive to adhere to and monitor compliance with the plan. The 
directive may be issued during the course of an examination of the bank, 
or at any other time that the FDIC deems appropriate, if the bank is 
found to be operating with less than the minimum leverage capital 
requirement.
    (c) Notice and opportunity to respond to issuance of a directive. 
(1) If the FDIC makes an initial determination that a directive should 
be issued to a bank pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, the FDIC, 
through the appropriate designated official(s), shall serve written 
notification upon the bank of its intent to issue a directive. The 
notice shall include the current Tier 1 leverage capital ratio, the 
basis upon which said ratio was calculated, the proposed capital 
injection, the proposed date for achieving the minimum leverage capital 
requirement and any other relevant information concerning the decision 
to issue a directive. When deemed appropriate, specific requirements of 
a proposed plan for meeting the minimum leverage capital requirement may 
be included in the notice.
    (2) Within 14 days of receipt of notification, the bank may file 
with the appropriate designated FDIC official(s) a written response, 
explaining why the directive should not be issued, seeking modification 
of its terms, or other appropriate relief. The bank's response shall 
include any information, mitigating circumstances, documentation or 
other relevant evidence which supports its position, and may include a 
plan for attaining the minimum leverage capital requirement.
    (3) After considering the bank's response, the appropriate 
designated FDIC official(s) shall serve upon the bank a written 
determination addressing the bank's response and setting forth the 
FDIC's findings and conclusions in support of any decision to issue or 
not to issue a directive. The directive may be issued as originally 
proposed or in modified form. The directive may order the bank to:
    (i) Achieve the minimum leverage capital requirement established by 
this regulation by a certain date;

[[Page 412]]

    (ii) Submit for approval and adhere to a plan for achieving the 
minimum leverage capital requirement;
    (iii) Take other action as is necessary to achieve the minimum 
leverage capital requirement; or
    (iv) A combination of the above actions.

If a directive is to be issued, it may be served upon the bank along 
with the final determination.
    (4) Any bank, upon a change in circumstances, may request the FDIC 
to reconsider the terms of a directive and may propose changes in the 
plan under which it is operating to meet the minimum leverage capital 
requirement. The directive and plan continue in effect while such 
request is pending before the FDIC.
    (5) All papers filed with the FDIC must be postmarked or received by 
the appropriate designated FDIC official(s) within the prescribed time 
limit for filing.
    (6) Failure by the bank to file a written response to notification 
of intent to issue a directive within the specified time period shall 
constitute consent to the issuance of such directive.
    (d) Enforcement of a directive. (1) Whenever a bank fails to follow 
the directive or to submit or adhere to its capital adequacy plan, the 
FDIC may seek enforcement of the directive in the appropriate United 
States district court, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3907(b)(2)(B)(ii), in the 
same manner and to the same extent as if the directive were a final 
cease-and-desist order. In addition to enforcement of the directive, the 
FDIC may seek assessment of civil money penalties for violation of the 
directive against any bank, any officer, director, employee, agent, or 
other person participating in the conduct of the affairs of the bank, 
pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3909(d).
    (2) The directive may be issued separately, in conjunction with, or 
in addition to, any other enforcement mechanisms available to the FDIC, 
including cease-and-desist orders, orders of correction, the approval or 
denial of applications, or any other actions authorized by law. In 
addition to addressing a bank's minimum leverage capital requirement, 
the capital directive may also address minimum risk-based capital 
requirements that are to be maintained and calculated in accordance with 
appendix A to this part.

[56 FR 10164, Mar. 11, 1991]



                   Subpart B_Prompt Corrective Action

    Source: 57 FR 44900, Sept. 29, 1992, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 325.101  Authority, purpose, scope, other supervisory authority,
and disclosure of capital categories.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued by the FDIC pursuant to 
section 38 (section 38) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act), 
as added by section 131 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
Improvement Act of 1991 (Pub. L. 102-242, 105 Stat. 2236 (1991)) (12 
U.S.C. 1831o).
    (b) Purpose. Section 38 of the FDI Act establishes a framework of 
supervisory actions for insured depository institutions that are not 
adequately capitalized. The principal purpose of this subpart is to 
define, for FDIC-insured state-chartered nonmember banks, the capital 
measures and capital levels, and for insured branches of foreign banks, 
comparable asset-based measures and levels, that are used for 
determining the supervisory actions authorized under section 38 of the 
FDI Act. This subpart also establishes procedures for submission and 
review of capital restoration plans and for issuance and review of 
directives and orders pursuant to section 38.
    (c) Scope. This subpart implements the provisions of section 38 of 
the FDI Act as they apply to FDIC-insured state-chartered nonmember 
banks and insured branches of foreign banks for which the FDIC is the 
appropriate Federal banking agency. Certain of these provisions also 
apply to officers, directors and employees of those insured 
institutions. In addition, certain provisions of this subpart apply to 
all insured depository institutions that are deemed critically 
undercapitalized.
    (d) Other supervisory authority. Neither section 38 nor this subpart 
in any way limits the authority of the FDIC under any other provision of 
law to

[[Page 413]]

take supervisory actions to address unsafe or unsound practices, 
deficient capital levels, violations of law, unsafe or unsound 
conditions, or other practices. Action under section 38 of the FDI Act 
and this subpart may be taken independently of, in conjunction with, or 
in addition to any other enforcement action available to the FDIC, 
including issuance of cease and desist orders, capital directives, 
approval or denial of applications or notices, assessment of civil money 
penalties, or any other actions authorized by law.
    (e) Disclosure of capital categories. The assignment of a bank or 
insured branch under this subpart within a particular capital category 
is for purposes of implementing and applying the provisions of section 
38. Unless permitted by the FDIC or otherwise required by law, no bank 
may state in any advertisement or promotional material its capital 
category under this subpart or that the FDIC or any other federal 
banking agency has assigned the bank to a particular capital category.



Sec. 325.102  Notice of capital category.

    (a) Effective date of determination of capital category. A bank 
shall be deemed to be within a given capital category for purposes of 
section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart as of the date the bank is 
notified of, or is deemed to have notice of, its capital category, 
pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Notice of capital category. A bank shall be deemed to have been 
notified of its capital levels and its capital category as of the most 
recent date:
    (1) A Consolidated Report of Condition and Income (Call Report) is 
required to be filed with the FDIC;
    (2) A final report of examination is delivered to the bank; or
    (3) Written notice is provided by the FDIC to the bank of its 
capital category for purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act and this 
subpart or that the bank's capital category has changed as provided in 
Sec. 325.103(d).
    (c) Adjustments to reported capital levels and capital category--(1) 
Notice of adjustment by bank. A bank shall provide the appropriate FDIC 
regional director with written notice that an adjustment to the bank's 
capital category may have occurred no later than 15 calendar days 
following the date that any material event has occurred that would cause 
the bank to be placed in a lower capital category from the category 
assigned to the bank for purposes of section 38 and this subpart on the 
basis of the bank's most recent Call Report or report of examination.
    (2) Determination by the FDIC to change capital category. After 
receiving notice pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the FDIC 
shall determine whether to change the capital category of the bank and 
shall notify the bank of the FDIC's determination.



Sec. 325.103  Capital measures and capital category definitions.

    (a) Capital measures. For purposes of section 38 and this subpart, 
the relevant capital measures shall be:
    (1) The total risk-based capital ratio;
    (2) The Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio; and
    (3) The leverage ratio.
    (b) Capital categories. For purposes of section 38 and this subpart, 
a bank shall be deemed to be:
    (1) Well capitalized if the bank:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio of 10.0 percent or greater; 
and
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6.0 percent or 
greater; and
    (iii) Has a leverage ratio of 5.0 percent or greater; and
    (iv) Is not subject to any written agreement, order, capital 
directive, or prompt corrective action directive issued by the FDIC 
pursuant to section 8 of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1818), the International 
Lending Supervision Act of 1983 (12 U.S.C. 3907), or section 38 of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831o), or any regulation thereunder, to meet and 
maintain a specific capital level for any capital measure.
    (2) Adequately capitalized if the bank:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio of 8.0 percent or greater; 
and
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 4.0 percent or 
greater; and
    (iii) Has:
    (A) A leverage ratio of 4.0 percent or greater; or
    (B) A leverage ratio of 3.0 percent or greater if the bank is rated 
composite 1 under the CAMELS rating system in the most recent 
examination of the

[[Page 414]]

bank and is not experiencing or anticipating significant growth; and
    (iv) Does not meet the definition of a well capitalized bank.
    (3) Undercapitalized if the bank:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 8.0 
percent; or
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio that is less than 4.0 
percent; or
    (iii)(A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(B) of this 
section, has a leverage ratio that is less than 4.0 percent; or
    (B) Has a leverage ratio that is less than 3.0 percent if the bank 
is rated composite 1 under the CAMELS rating system in the most recent 
examination of the bank and is not experiencing or anticipating 
significant growth.
    (4) Significantly undercapitalized if the bank has:
    (i) A total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 6.0 percent; 
or
    (ii) A Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio that is less than 3.0 
percent; or
    (iii) A leverage ratio that is less than 3.0 percent.
    (5) Critically undercapitalized if the insured depository 
institution has a ratio of tangible equity to total assets that is equal 
to or less than 2.0 percent.
    (c) Capital categories for insured branches of foreign banks. For 
purposes of the provisions of section 38 and this subpart, an insured 
branch of a foreign bank shall be deemed to be:
    (1) Well capitalized if the insured branch:
    (i) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (ii) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 108 percent or more of the preceding quarter's average 
book value of the insured branch's third-party liabilities; and
    (iii) Has not received written notification from:
    (A) The OCC to increase its capital equivalency deposit pursuant to 
12 CFR 28.15(b), or to comply with asset maintenance requirements 
pursuant to 12 CFR 28.20; or
    (B) The FDIC to pledge additional assets pursuant to Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter or to maintain a higher ratio of eligible assets pursuant 
to Sec. 347.210 of this chapter.
    (2) Adequately capitalized if the insured branch:
    (i) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (ii) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 106 percent or more of the preceding quarter's average 
book value of the insured branch's third-party liabilities; and
    (iii) Does not meet the definition of a well capitalized insured 
branch.
    (3) Undercapitalized if the insured branch:
    (i) Fails to maintain the pledge of assets required under 
Sec. 347.209 of this chapter; or
    (ii) Fails to maintain the eligible assets prescribed under 
Sec. 347.210 of this chapter at 106 percent or more of the preceding 
quarter's average book value of the insured branch's third-party 
liabilities.
    (4) Significantly undercapitalized if it fails to maintain the 
eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of this chapter at 104 
percent or more of the preceding quarter's average book value of the 
insured branch's third-party liabilities.
    (5) Critically undercapitalized if it fails to maintain the eligible 
assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of this chapter at 102 percent or 
more of the preceding quarter's average book value of the insured 
branch's third-party liabilities.
    (d) Reclassifications based on supervisory criteria other than 
capital. The FDIC may reclassify a well capitalized bank as adequately 
capitalized and may require an adequately capitalized bank or an 
undercapitalized bank to comply with certain mandatory or discretionary 
supervisory actions as if the bank were in the next lower capital 
category (except that the FDIC may not reclassify a significantly 
undercapitalized bank as critically undercapitalized) (each of these 
actions are hereinafter referred to generally as ``reclassifications'') 
in the following circumstances:
    (1) Unsafe or unsound condition. The FDIC has determined, after 
notice and opportunity for hearing pursuant to Sec. 308.202(a) of this 
chapter, that the

[[Page 415]]

bank is in unsafe or unsound condition; or
    (2) Unsafe or unsound practice. The FDIC has determined, after 
notice and opportunity for hearing pursuant to Sec. 308.202(a) of this 
chapter, that, in the most recent examination of the bank, the bank 
received and has not corrected a less-than-satisfactory rating for any 
of the categories of asset quality, management, earnings, or liquidity.

[57 FR 44900, Sept. 29, 1992, as amended at 63 FR 17074, Apr. 8, 1998; 
66 FR 59653, Nov. 29, 2001; 70 FR 17559, Apr. 6, 2005]



Sec. 325.104  Capital restoration plans.

    (a) Schedule for filing plan--(1) In general. A bank shall file a 
written capital restoration plan with the appropriate FDIC regional 
director within 45 days of the date that the bank receives notice or is 
deemed to have notice that the bank is undercapitalized, significantly 
undercapitalized, or critically undercapitalized, unless the FDIC 
notifies the bank in writing that the plan is to be filed within a 
different period. An adequately capitalized bank that has been required 
pursuant to Sec. 325.103(d) of this subpart to comply with supervisory 
actions as if the bank were undercapitalized is not required to submit a 
capital restoration plan solely by virtue of the reclassification.
    (2) Additional capital restoration plans. Notwithstanding paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, a bank that has already submitted and is 
operating under a capital restoration plan approved under section 38 and 
this subpart is not required to submit an additional capital restoration 
plan based on a revised calculation of its capital measures or a 
reclassification of the institution under Sec. 325.103 unless the FDIC 
notifies the bank that it must submit a new or revised capital plan. A 
bank that is notified that it must submit a new or revised capital 
restoration plan shall file the plan in writing with the appropriate 
FDIC regional director within 45 days of receiving such notice, unless 
the FDIC notifies the bank in writing that the plan must be filed within 
a different period.
    (b) Contents of plan. All financial data submitted in connection 
with a capital restoration plan shall be prepared in accordance with the 
instructions provided on the Call Report, unless the FDIC instructs 
otherwise. The capital restoration plan shall include all of the 
information required to be filed under section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act. 
A bank that is required to submit a capital restoration plan as a result 
of a reclassification of the bank pursuant to Sec. 325.103(d) of this 
subpart shall include a description of the steps the bank will take to 
correct the unsafe or unsound condition or practice. No plan shall be 
accepted unless it includes any performance guarantee described in 
section 38(e)(2)(C) of the FDI Act by each company that controls the 
bank.
    (c) Review of capital restoration plans. Within 60 days after 
receiving a capital restoration plan under this subpart, the FDIC shall 
provide written notice to the bank of whether the plan has been 
approved. The FDIC may extend the time within which notice regarding 
approval of a plan shall be provided.
    (d) Disapproval of capital plan. If a capital restoration plan is 
not approved by the FDIC, the bank shall submit a revised capital 
restoration plan within the time specified by the FDIC. Upon receiving 
notice that its capital restoration plan has not been approved, any 
undercapitalized bank (as defined in Sec. 325.103(b) of this subpart) 
shall be subject to all of the provisions of section 38 and this subpart 
applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions. These 
provisions shall be applicable until such time as a new or revised 
capital restoration plan submitted by the bank has been approved by the 
FDIC.
    (e) Failure to submit capital restoration plan. A bank that is 
undercapitalized (as defined in Sec. 325.103(b) of this subpart) and 
that fails to submit a written capital restoration plan within the 
period provided in this section shall, upon the expiration of that 
period, be subject to all of the provisions of section 38 and this 
subpart applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions.
    (f) Failure to implement capital restoration plan. Any 
undercapitalized bank that fails in any material respect to implement a 
capital restoration plan shall be subject to all of the provisions

[[Page 416]]

of section 38 and this subpart applicable to significantly 
undercapitalized institutions.
    (g) Amendment of capital restoration plan. A bank that has filed an 
approved capital restoration plan may, after prior written notice to and 
approval by the FDIC, amend the plan to reflect a change in 
circumstance. Until such time as a proposed amendment has been approved, 
the bank shall implement the capital restoration plan as approved prior 
to the proposed amendment.
    (h) Performance guarantee by companies that control a bank--(1) 
Limitation on liability--(i) Amount limitation. The aggregate liability 
under the guarantee provided under section 38 and this subpart for all 
companies that control a specific bank that is required to submit a 
capital restoration plan under this subpart shall be limited to the 
lesser of:
    (A) An amount equal to 5.0 percent of the bank's total assets at the 
time the bank was notified or deemed to have notice that the bank was 
undercapitalized; or
    (B) The amount necessary to restore the relevant capital measures of 
the bank to the levels required for the bank to be classified as 
adequately capitalized, as those capital measures and levels are defined 
at the time that the bank initially fails to comply with a capital 
restoration plan under this subpart.
    (ii) Limit on duration. The guarantee and limit of liability under 
section 38 and this subpart shall expire after the FDIC notifies the 
bank that it has remained adequately capitalized for each of four 
consecutive calendar quarters. The expiration or fulfillment by a 
company of a guarantee of a capital restoration plan shall not limit the 
liability of the company under any guarantee required or provided in 
connection with any capital restoration plan filed by the same bank 
after expiration of the first guarantee.
    (iii) Collection on guarantee. Each company that controls a given 
bank shall be jointly and severally liable for the guarantee for such 
bank as required under section 38 and this subpart, and the FDIC may 
require and collect payment of the full amount of that guarantee from 
any or all of the companies issuing the guarantee.
    (2) Failure to provide guarantee. In the event that a bank that is 
controlled by any company submits a capital restoration plan that does 
not contain the guarantee required under section 38(e)(2) of the FDI 
Act, the bank shall, upon submission of the plan, be subject to the 
provisions of section 38 and this subpart that are applicable to banks 
that have not submitted an acceptable capital restoration plan.
    (3) Failure to perform guarantee. Failure by any company that 
controls a bank to perform fully its guarantee of any capital plan shall 
constitute a material failure to implement the plan for purposes of 
section 38(f) of the FDI Act. Upon such failure, the bank shall be 
subject to the provisions of section 38 and this subpart that are 
applicable to banks that have failed in a material respect to implement 
a capital restoration plan.



Sec. 325.105  Mandatory and discretionary supervisory actions under
section 38.

    (a) Mandatory supervisory actions--(1) Provisions applicable to all 
banks. All banks are subject to the restrictions contained in section 
38(d) of the FDI Act on payment of capital distributions and management 
fees.
    (2) Provisions applicable to undercapitalized, significantly 
undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized banks. Immediately 
upon receiving notice or being deemed to have notice, as provided in 
Sec. 325.102 of this subpart, that the bank is undercapitalized, 
significantly undercapitalized, or critically undercapitalized, the bank 
shall become subject to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act:
    (i) Restricting payment of capital distributions and management fees 
(section 38(d));
    (ii) Requiring that the FDIC monitor the condition of the bank 
(section 38(e)(1));
    (iii) Requiring submission of a capital restoration plan within the 
schedule established in this subpart (section 38(e)(2));
    (iv) Restricting the growth of the bank's assets (section 38(e)(3)); 
and

[[Page 417]]

    (v) Requiring prior approval of certain expansion proposals (section 
38(e)(4)).
    (3) Additional provisions applicable to significantly 
undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized banks. In addition to 
the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act described in paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section, immediately upon receiving notice or being 
deemed to have notice, as provided in Sec. 325.102 of this subpart, that 
the bank is significantly undercapitalized, or critically 
undercapitalized, or that the bank is subject to the provisions 
applicable to institutions that are significantly undercapitalized 
because the bank failed to submit or implement in any material respect 
an acceptable capital restoration plan, the bank shall become subject to 
the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act that restrict compensation 
paid to senior executive officers of the institution (section 38(f)(4)).
    (4) Additional provisions applicable to critically undercapitalized 
institutions. (i) In addition to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI 
Act described in paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) of this section, 
immediately upon receiving notice or being deemed to have notice, as 
provided in Sec. 325.102 of this subpart, that the insured depository 
institution is critically undercapitalized, the institution is 
prohibited from doing any of the following without the FDIC's prior 
written approval:
    (A) Entering into any material transaction other than in the usual 
course of business, including any investment, expansion, acquisition, 
sale of assets, or other similar action with respect to which the 
depository institution is required to provide notice to the appropriate 
Federal banking agency;
    (B) Extending credit for any highly leveraged transaction;
    (C) Amending the institution's charter or bylaws, except to the 
extent necessary to carry out any other requirement of any law, 
regulation, or order;
    (D) Making any material change in accounting methods;
    (E) Engaging in any covered transaction (as defined in section 
23A(b) of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b));
    (F) Paying excessive compensation or bonuses;
    (G) Paying interest on new or renewed liabilities at a rate that 
would increase the institution's weighted average cost of funds to a 
level significantly exceeding the prevailing rates of interest on 
insured deposits in the institution's normal market areas; and
    (H) Making any principal or interest payment on subordinated debt 
beginning 60 days after becoming critically undercapitalized except that 
this restriction shall not apply, until July 15, 1996, with respect to 
any subordinated debt outstanding on July 15, 1991, and not extended or 
otherwise renegotiated after July 15, 1991.
    (ii) In addition, the FDIC may further restrict the activities of 
any critically undercapitalized institution to carry out the purposes of 
section 38 of the FDI Act.
    (5) Exception for certain savings associations. The restrictions in 
paragraph (a)(4) of this section shall not apply, before July 1, 1994, 
to any insured savings association if:
    (i) The savings association had submitted a plan meeting the 
requirements of section 5(t)(6)(A)(ii) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 
U.S.C. 1464(t)(6)(A)(ii)) prior to December 19, 1991;
    (ii) The Director of OTS had accepted the plan prior to December 19, 
1991; and
    (iii) The savings association remains in compliance with the plan or 
is operating under a written agreement with the appropriate federal 
banking agency.
    (b) Discretionary supervisory actions. In taking any action under 
section 38 that is within the FDIC's discretion to take in connection 
with:
    (1) An insured depository institution that is deemed to be 
undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or critically 
undercapitalized, or has been reclassified as undercapitalized, or 
significantly undercapitalized; or
    (2) An officer or director of such institution, the FDIC shall 
follow the procedures for issuing directives under Secs. 308.201 and 
308.203 of this chapter, unless otherwise provided in section 38 or this 
subpart.

[[Page 418]]



                      Subpart C_Annual Stress Test

    Source: 77 FR 62424, Oct. 15, 2012, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 325.201  Authority, purpose, and reservation of authority.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation (the ``Corporation'' or ``FDIC'') under 12 U.S.C. 
5365(i)(2), 12 U.S.C. 5412(b)(2)(B), 12 U.S.C. 1818, 12 U.S.C. 
1819(a)(Tenth), 12 U.S.C. 1831o, and 12 U.S.C. 1831p-1.
    (b) Purpose. This subpart implements 12 U.S.C. 5365(i)(2), which 
requires the Corporation (in coordination with the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System (``Board'') and the Federal Insurance Office) 
to issue regulations that require each covered bank to conduct annual 
stress tests and establishes a definition of stress test, methodologies 
for conducting stress tests, and reporting and disclosure requirements.
    (c) Reservation of authority. Notwithstanding any other provisions 
of this subpart, the Corporation may modify some or all of the 
requirements of this subpart.
    (1) The Corporation may accelerate or extend any deadline for stress 
testing, reporting, or publication of the stress test results.
    (2) The Corporation may require different or additional tests not 
otherwise required by this subpart or may require or permit different or 
additional analytical techniques and methodologies, different or 
additional scenarios (including components for the scenarios), or 
different assumptions for the covered bank to use in meeting the 
requirements of this subpart. In addition, the FDIC may specify a 
different as-of date for any or all categories of financial data used by 
the stress test.
    (3) The Corporation may modify the reporting requirements of a 
report under this subpart or may require additional reports. The 
Corporation may modify the publication requirements of this subpart and 
or may require different or additional publication disclosures.
    (4) Factors considered: Any exercise of authority under this section 
by the Corporation will be in writing and will consider the activities, 
level of complexity, risk profile, scope of operations, and the 
regulatory capital of the covered bank, in addition to any other 
relevant factors.
    (5) Notice and comment procedures: In exercising its authority to 
require different or additional stress tests and different or additional 
scenarios (including components for the scenarios) under paragraph 
(c)(2) of this section, the Corporation will apply notice and response 
procedures in the same manner and to the same extent as the notice and 
response procedures in 12 CFR 325.6, as appropriate.
    (6) Nothing in this subpart limits the authority of the Corporation 
under any other provision of law or regulation to take supervisory or 
enforcement action, including action to address unsafe and unsound 
practices or conditions, or violations of law or regulation.



Sec. 325.202  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart--
    (a) Adverse scenario means a set of conditions that affect the U.S. 
economy or the financial condition of a covered bank that are more 
adverse than those associated with the baseline scenario and may include 
trading or other additional components.
    (b) Average total consolidated assets means the average of the 
covered bank's total consolidated assets, as reported on the covered 
bank's Consolidated Report of Condition and Income (Call Report) for the 
four most recent consecutive quarters. If the covered bank has not filed 
a Call Report for each of the four most recent consecutive quarters, the 
covered bank's average total consolidated assets means the average of 
the covered bank's total consolidated assets, as reported on the covered 
bank's Call Reports, for the most recent one or more consecutive 
quarters. The date on which the state nonmember bank or the state 
savings association becomes a covered bank will be the as-of date of the 
most recent Call Report used in the calculation of the average.

[[Page 419]]

    (c) Baseline scenario means a set of conditions that affect the U.S. 
economy or the financial condition of a covered bank, and that reflect 
the consensus views of the economic and financial outlook.
    (d) Covered bank means any state nonmember bank or state savings 
association subject to the following categories:
    (1) $10 billion to $50 billion covered bank. Any state nonmember 
bank or state savings association with average total consolidated assets 
calculated as required under this subpart that are greater than $10 
billion but less than $50 billion.
    (2) Over $50 billion covered bank. Any state nonmember bank or state 
savings association with average total consolidated assets calculated as 
required under this subpart that are not less than $50 billion.
    (e) Planning horizon means the period of at least nine quarters over 
which the relevant projections extend.
    (f) Pre-provision net revenue means the sum of net interest income 
and non-interest income, less expenses, before adjusting for loss 
provisions.
    (g) Provision for loan and lease losses means the provision for loan 
and lease losses as reported by the covered bank on its Call Report.
    (h) Regulatory capital ratio means a capital ratio for which the 
Corporation established minimum requirements by regulation or order, 
including the leverage ratio and tier 1 and total risk-based capital 
ratios applicable to that covered bank as calculated under the 
Corporation's regulations.
    (i) Scenarios are those sets of conditions that affect the U.S. 
economy or the financial condition of a covered bank that the 
Corporation annually determines are appropriate for use in the company-
run stress tests, including, but not limited to, baseline, adverse, and 
severely adverse scenarios.
    (j) Severely adverse scenario means a set of conditions that affect 
the U.S. economy or the financial condition of a covered bank and that 
overall are more severe than those associated with the adverse scenario 
and may include trading or other additional components.
    (k) State nonmember bank and state savings association have the same 
meanings as those terms are defined in section 3 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    (l) Stress test means the process to assess the potential impact of 
scenarios on the consolidated earnings, losses, and capital of a covered 
bank over the planning horizon, taking into account the current 
condition of the covered bank and the covered bank's risks, exposures, 
strategies, and activities.
    (m) Stress test cycle means:
    (1) Until October 1, 2015, the period beginning October 1 of a 
calendar year and ending on September 30 of the following calendar year; 
and
    (2) Beginning October 1, 2015, the period beginning January 1 of a 
calendar year and ending on December 31 of that year.

[77 FR 62424, Oct. 15, 2012, as amended at 79 FR 69368, Nov. 21, 2014]



Sec. 325.203  Applicability.

    (a) First stress test for covered banks subject to stress testing 
requirements as of October 15, 2012. (1) A $10 billion to $50 billion 
covered bank as of October 15, 2012 must conduct its first stress test 
under this subpart using financial statement data as of September 30, 
2013, and report the results of its stress test on or before March 31, 
2014.
    (2) A $10 billion to $50 billion covered bank that is subject to its 
first annual stress test pursuant to section 203(a)(1) of this subpart 
must make its initial public disclosure in the period starting June 15 
and ending June 30 of 2015, by disclosing the results of a stress test 
conducted in 2014, using financial statement data as of September 30, 
2014.
    (3) A state nonmember bank or state savings association that is an 
over $50 billion covered bank as of October 15, 2012, must conduct its 
first stress test under this subpart using financial statement data as 
of September 30, 2012, and report the results of its stress test on or 
before January 5, 2013.
    (b)(1) A state nonmember bank or state savings association that 
becomes a covered bank after October 15, 2012 and on or before March 31, 
2014 shall conduct its first annual stress test under this subpart 
beginning in the next calendar year after the date the

[[Page 420]]

state nonmember bank or state savings association becomes a covered 
bank.
    (2) A state nonmember bank or state savings association that becomes 
a covered bank after March 31, 2014 and on or before March 31, 2015 
shall conduct its first annual stress test under this subpart in the 
January 1, 2016 stress testing cycle.
    (3) A state nonmember bank or state savings association that becomes 
a covered bank on or before March 31 in years following 2015 shall 
conduct its first annual stress test under this subpart in the stress 
testing cycle in the next calendar year after the date the state 
nonmember bank or state savings association becomes a covered bank. A 
state nonmember bank or state savings association that becomes a covered 
bank after March 31 in years following 2015 shall conduct its first 
annual stress test under this subpart in the second calendar year after 
the date the state nonmember bank or state savings association becomes a 
covered bank.
    (c) Ceasing to be a covered bank or changing categories. (1) A 
covered bank will remain subject to the stress test requirements based 
on its applicable category unless and until total consolidated assets of 
the covered bank falls below the relevant size threshold for each of 
four consecutive quarters as reported on the covered bank's most recent 
Call Reports. The calculation will be effective on the as-of date of the 
fourth consecutive Call Report.
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1) of this section, a state 
nonmember bank or state savings association that migrates from a $10 
billion to $50 billion covered bank to an over $50 billion covered bank 
will be subject to the stress test requirements applicable to an over 
$50 billion covered bank immediately as of the date the state nonmember 
bank or state savings association satisfies the size threshold for an 
over $50 billion covered bank.
    (d) Covered bank subsidiaries of a bank holding company or savings 
and loan holding company subject to annual stress test requirements. (1) 
Notwithstanding the requirements applicable to covered banks under this 
section, a covered bank that is a consolidated subsidiary of a bank 
holding company or savings and loan holding company that is required to 
conduct an annual company-run stress test under applicable regulations 
of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System may elect to 
conduct its stress test and report to the FDIC on the same timeline as 
its parent bank holding company or savings and loan holding company.
    (2) A covered bank that elects to conduct its stress test under 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section will remain subject to the same 
timeline requirements of its parent company until otherwise approved by 
the FDIC.

[77 FR 62424, Oct. 15, 2012, as amended at 79 FR 69368, Nov. 21, 2014]



Sec. 325.204  Annual stress tests required.

    (a) General requirements--(1) $10 billion to $50 billion covered 
bank. Prior to January 1, 2016, a $10 billion to $50 billion covered 
bank must conduct a stress test on or before March 31 of each calendar 
year based on financial data as of September 30 of the preceding 
calendar year. Beginning January 1, 2016, a $10 billion to $50 billion 
covered bank must conduct a stress test on or before July 31 of each 
calendar year based on financial data as of December 31 of the preceding 
calendar year.
    (2) Over $50 billion covered bank. Prior to January 1, 2016, an over 
$50 billion covered bank must conduct a stress test on or before January 
5 of each calendar year based on financial data as of September 30 of 
the preceding calendar year. Beginning January 1, 2016, an over $50 
billion covered bank must conduct a stress test on or before April 5 of 
each calendar year based on financial data as of December 31 of the 
preceding calendar year.
    (b) Scenarios provided by the Corporation. In conducting the stress 
test under this subpart, each covered bank must use the scenarios 
provided the Corporation. The scenarios provided by the Corporation will 
reflect a minimum of three sets of economic and financial conditions, 
including baseline, adverse, and severely adverse scenarios. The 
Corporation will provide a description of the scenarios required under 
this section to each covered bank no later than November 15 (for stress 
test cycle beginning October 1, 2014) or February 15 (for stress test 
cycle beginning January 1, 2016, and all

[[Page 421]]

stress test cycles thereafter) of that calendar year.
    (c) Significant trading activities. The Corporation may require a 
covered bank with significant trading activities, as determined by the 
Corporation, to include trading and counterparty components in its 
adverse and severely adverse scenarios. The trading and counterparty 
position data used in these components will be as of a date between 
October 1 and December 1 (for the stress test cycle beginning October 1, 
2014) or between January 1 and March 1 (for the stress test cycle 
beginning January 1, 2016, and all stress test cycles thereafter) of 
that calendar year selected by the Corporation and communicated to the 
covered bank no later than December 1 (for the stress test cycle 
beginning October 1, 2014) or March 1 (for the stress test cycle 
beginning January 1, 2016, and all stress test cycles thereafter) of the 
calendar year.

[79 FR 69368, Nov. 21, 2014]



Sec. 325.205  Methodologies and practices.

    (a) Potential impact on capital. In conducting a stress test under 
this subpart, during each quarter of the planning horizon, each covered 
bank must estimate the following for each scenario required to be used:
    (1) Pre-provision net revenues, losses, loan loss provisions and net 
income; and
    (2) The potential impact on the regulatory capital levels and ratios 
applicable to the covered bank, and any other capital ratios specified 
by the Corporation, incorporating the effects of any capital action over 
the planning horizon and maintenance of an allowance for loan losses 
appropriate for credit exposures throughout the planning horizon.
    (b) Controls and oversight of stress testing processes. (1) The 
senior management of a covered bank must establish and maintain a system 
of controls, oversight, and documentation, including policies and 
procedures, that are designed to ensure that its stress test processes 
satisfy the requirements in this subpart. These policies and procedures 
must, at a minimum, describe the covered bank's stress test practices 
and methodologies, and processes for validating and updating the covered 
bank's stress test practices and methodologies consistent with 
applicable laws, regulations, and supervisory guidance.
    (2) The board of directors, or a committee thereof, of a covered 
bank must approve and review the policies and procedures of the stress 
testing processes as frequently as economic conditions or the condition 
of the covered bank may warrant, but no less than annually. The board of 
directors and senior management of the covered bank must receive a 
summary of the results of the stress test.
    (3) The board of directors and senior management of each covered 
bank must consider the results of the stress tests in the normal course 
of business, including but not limited to, the covered bank's capital 
planning, assessment of capital adequacy, and risk management practices.



Sec. 325.206  Required reports of stress test results to the FDIC 
and the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.

    (a) Report required for annual stress test results--(1) $10 billion 
to $50 billion covered bank. Prior to January 1, 2016, a $10 billion to 
$50 billion covered bank must report to the FDIC and to the Board on or 
before March 31 the results of the stress test in the manner and form 
specified by the FDIC. Beginning January 1, 2016, a $10 billion to $50 
billion covered bank must report to the FDIC and to the Board on or 
before July 31 the results of the stress test in the manner and form 
specified by the FDIC.
    (2) Over $50 billion covered bank. Prior to January 1, 2016, an over 
$50 billion covered bank must report to the FDIC and to the Board, on or 
before January 5, the results of the stress test in the manner and form 
specified by the FDIC. Beginning January 1, 2016, an over $50 billion 
covered bank must report to the FDIC and to the Board, on or before 
April 5, the results of the stress test in the manner and form specified 
by the FDIC.
    (b) Content of reports. (1) The reports required under paragraph (a) 
of this section must include under the baseline scenario, adverse 
scenario, severely adverse scenario and any other

[[Page 422]]

scenario required by the Corporation under this subpart, a description 
of the types of risks being included in the stress test, a summary 
description of the methodologies used in the stress test, and, for each 
quarter of the planning horizon, estimates of aggregate losses, pre-
provision net revenue, provision for loan and lease losses, net income, 
and pro forma capital ratios (including regulatory and any other capital 
ratios specified by the FDIC). In addition, the report must include an 
explanation of the most significant causes for the changes in regulatory 
capital ratios and any other information required by the Corporation.
    (2) The description of aggregate losses and net income must include 
the cumulative losses and cumulative net income over the planning 
horizon, and the description of each regulatory capital ratio must 
include the beginning value, ending value, and minimum value of each 
ratio over the planning horizon.
    (c) Confidential treatment of information submitted. The 
confidentiality of information submitted to the Corporation under this 
subpart and related materials will be determined in accordance with 
applicable law including any available exemptions under the Freedom of 
Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552(b)) and the FDIC's Rules and Regulations 
regarding the Disclosure of Information (12 CFR Part 309).

[77 FR 62424, Oct. 15, 2012, as amended at 79 FR 69368, Nov. 21, 2014]



Sec. 325.207  Publication of stress test results.

    (a) Publication date--(1) $10 billion to $50 billion covered bank. 
(i) Prior to January 1, 2016, a $10 billion to $50 billion covered bank 
must publish a summary of the results of its annual stress test in the 
period starting June 15 and ending June 30 (for the stress test cycle 
beginning October 1, 2014).
    (ii) Beginning January 1, 2016, a $10 billion to $50 billion covered 
bank must publish a summary of the results of its annual stress test in 
the period starting October 15 and ending October 31 (for the stress 
test cycle beginning January 1, 2016 and for all stress test cycles 
thereafter).
    (2) Over $50 billion covered bank. (i) Prior to January 1, 2016, an 
over $50 billion covered bank must publish a summary of the results of 
its annual stress tests in the period starting March 15 and ending March 
31 (for the stress test cycle beginning October 1, 2014).
    (ii) Beginning January 1, 2016, an over $50 billion covered bank 
must publish a summary of the results of its annual stress tests in the 
period starting June 15 and ending July 15 (for the stress test cycle 
beginning January 1 2016, and for all stress test cycles thereafter) 
provided:
    (A) Unless the Corporation determines otherwise, if the over $50 
billion covered bank is a consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding 
company or savings and loan holding company subject to supervisory 
stress tests conducted by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System under 12 CFR part 252, then, within the June 15 to July 15 
period, such covered bank may not publish the required summary of its 
annual stress test earlier than the date that the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System publishes the supervisory stress test results 
of the covered bank's parent holding company.
    (B) If the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System 
publishes the supervisory stress test results of the covered bank's 
parent holding company prior to June 15, then such covered bank may 
publish its stress test results prior to June 15, but no later than July 
15, through actual publication by the covered bank or through 
publication by the parent holding company under paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (b) Publication method. The summary required under this section may 
be published on the covered bank's Web site or in any other forum that 
is reasonably accessible to the public. A covered bank that is a 
consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding company or savings and loan 
holding company that is required to conduct an annual company-run stress 
test under applicable regulations of the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System will be deemed to have satisfied the public 
disclosure requirements under this subpart if it publishes a summary of 
its stress test results with its parent bank

[[Page 423]]

holding company's or savings and loan holding company's summary of 
stress test results. Subsidiary covered banks electing to satisfy their 
public disclosure requirement in this manner must include a summary of 
changes in regulatory capital ratios of such covered bank over the 
planning horizon, and an explanation of the most significant causes for 
the changes in regulatory capital ratios.
    (c) Information to be disclosed in the summary. A covered bank must 
disclose the following information regarding the severely adverse 
scenario if it is not a consolidated subsidiary of a parent bank holding 
company or savings and loan holding company that has elected to make its 
disclosure under section 203(d):
    (1) A description of the types of risks included in the stress test;
    (2) A summary description of the methodologies used in the stress 
test;
    (3) Estimates of aggregate losses, pre-provision net revenue, 
provision for loan and lease losses, net income, and pro forma capital 
ratios (including regulatory and any other capital ratios specified by 
the FDIC); and
    (4) An explanation of the most significant causes for the changes in 
the regulatory capital ratios.
    (d) Content of results. (1) The disclosure of aggregate losses, pre-
provision net revenue, provisions for loan and lease losses, and net 
income under this section must be on a cumulative basis over the 
planning horizon.
    (2) The disclosure of regulatory capital ratios and any other 
capital ratios specified by the Corporation under this section must 
include the beginning value, ending value, and minimum value of each 
ratio over the planning horizon.

[77 FR 62424, Oct. 15, 2012, as amended at 79 FR 69369, Nov. 21, 2014]

  



 Sec. Appendix A to Part 325--Statement of Policy on Risk-Based
 Capital

    Capital adequacy is one of the critical factors that the FDIC is 
required to analyze when taking action on various types of applications 
and when conducting supervisory activities related to the safety and 
soundness of individual banks and the banking system. In view of this, 
the FDIC's Board of Directors has adopted part 325 of its regulations, 
which sets forth (1) minimum standards of capital adequacy for insured 
state nonmember banks and (2) standards for determining when an insured 
bank is in an unsafe or unsound condition by reason of the amount of its 
capital.
    This capital maintenance regulation was designed to establish, in 
conjunction with other Federal bank regulatory agencies, uniform capital 
standards for all federally-regulated banking organizations, regardless 
of size. The uniform capital standards were based on ratios of capital 
to total assets. While those leverage ratios have served as a useful 
tool for assessing capital adequacy, the FDIC believes there is a need 
for a capital measure that is more explicitly and systematically 
sensitive to the risk profiles of individual banks. As a result, the 
FDIC's Board of Directors has adopted this Statement of Policy on Risk-
Based Capital to supplement the part 325 regulation. This statement of 
policy does not replace or eliminate the existing part 325 capital-to-
total assets leverage ratios.
    The framework set forth in this statement of policy consists of (1) 
a definition of capital for risk-based capital purposes, and (2) a 
system for calculating risk-weighted assets by assigning assets and off 
balance sheet items to broad risk categories. A bank's risk-based 
capital ratio is calculated by dividing its qualifying total capital 
base (the numerator of the ratio) by its risk-weighted assets (the 
denominator). \1\ Table I outlines the definition of capital and 
provides a general explanation of how the risk-based capital ratio is 
calculated, Table II summarizes the risk weights and risk categories, 
and Table III sets forth the credit conversation factors for off-balance 
sheet items. Additional explanations of the capital definitions, the 
risk-weighted asset calculations, and the minimum risk-based capital 
ratio guidelines are provided in Sections I, II and III of this 
statement of policy.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Period-end amounts, rather than average balances, normally will 
be used when calculating risk-based capital ratios. However, on a case-
by-case basis, ratios based on average balances may also be required if 
supervisory concerns render it appropriate.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    In addition, when certain banks that engage in trading activities 
calculate their risk-based capital ratio under this appendix A, they 
must also refer to appendix C of this part, which incorporates capital 
charges for certain market risks into the risk-based capital ratio. When 
calculating their risk-based capital ratio under this appendix A, such 
banks are required to refer to appendix C of this part for supplemental 
rules to determine qualifying and excess capital, calculate risk-

[[Page 424]]

weighted assets, calculate market risk equivalent assets and add them to 
risk-weighted assets, and calculate risk-based capital ratios as 
adjusted for market risk.
    This statement of policy applies to all FDIC-insured state-chartered 
banks (excluding insured branches of foreign banks) that are not members 
of the Federal Reserve System, hereafter referred to as state nonmember 
banks, regardless of size, and to all circumstances in which the FDIC is 
required to evaluate the capital of a banking organization. Therefore, 
the risk-based capital framework set forth in this statement of policy 
will be used in the examination and supervisory process as well as in 
the analysis of applications that the FDIC is required to act upon.
    The risk-based capital ratio focuses principally on broad categories 
of credit risk, however, the ratio does not take account of many other 
factors that can affect a bank's financial condition. These factors 
include overall interest rate risk exposure, liquidity, funding and 
market risks; the quality and level of earnings; investment, loan 
portfolio, and other concentrations of credit risk, certain risks 
arising from nontraditional activities; the quality of loans and 
investments; the effectiveness of loan and investment policies; and 
management's overall ability to monitor and control financial and 
operating risks, including the risk presented by concentrations of 
credit and nontraditional activities. In addition to evaluating capital 
ratios, an overall assessment of capital adequacy must take account of 
each of these other factors, including, in particular, the level and 
severity of problem and adversely classified assets as well as a bank's 
interest rate risk as measured by the bank's exposure to declines in the 
economic value of its capital due to changes in interest rates. For this 
reason, the final supervisory judgment on a bank's capital adequacy may 
differ significantly from the conclusions that might be drawn solely 
from the absolute level of the bank's risk-based capital ratio.
    In light of these other considerations, banks generally are expected 
to operate above the minimum risk-based capital ratio. Banks 
contemplating significant expansion plans, as well as those institutions 
with high or inordinate levels of risk, should hold capital commensurate 
with the level and nature of the risks to which they are exposed.

        I. Definition of Capital for the Risk-Based Capital Ratio

    A bank's qualifying total capital base consists of two types of 
capital elements: core capital elements (Tier 1) and supplementary 
capital elements (Tier 2). To qualify as an element of Tier 1 or Tier 2 
capital, a capital instrument should not contain or be subject to any 
conditions, covenants, terms, restrictions, or provisions that are 
inconsistent with safe and sound banking practices.

          A. The Components of Qualifying Capital (see Table I)

    1. Core capital elements (Tier 1) consists of:
    i. Common stockholders' equity capital (includes common stock and 
related surplus, undivided profits, disclosed capital reserves that 
represent a segregation of undivided profits, and foreign currency 
translation adjustments, less net unrealized holding losses on 
available-for-sale equity securities with readily determinable fair 
values);
    ii. Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock, \2\ including any 
related surplus; and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ Preferred stock issues where the dividend is reset periodically 
based, in whole or in part, upon the bank's current credit standing, 
including but not limited to, auction rate, money market or remarketable 
preferred stock, are assigned to Tier 2 capital, regardless of whether 
the dividends are cumultive or noncumulative.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    iii. Minority interests in the equity capital accounts of 
consolidated subsidiaries.
    (a) At least 50 percent of the qualifying total capital base should 
consist of Tier 1 capital. Core (Tier 1) capital is defined as the sum 
of core capital elements minus all intangible assets (other than 
mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased 
credit card relationships eligible for inclusion in core capital 
pursuant to Sec. 325.5(f)), \3\ minus credit-enhancing interest-only 
strips that are not eligible for inclusion in core capital pursuant to 
Sec. 325.5(f), minus any disallowed deferred tax assets, and minus any 
amount of nonfinancial equity investments required to be deducted 
pursuant to section II.B.(6) of this Appendix.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ An exception is allowed for intanglble assets that are 
explicitly approved by the FDIC as part of the bank's regulatory capital 
on a specific case basis. These intangibles will be included in capital 
for risk-based capital purposes under the terms and conditions that are 
specifically approved by the FDIC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Although nonvoting common stock, noncumulative perpetual 
preferred stock, and minority interests in the equity capital accounts 
of consolidated subsidiaries are normally included in Tier 1 capital, 
voting common stockholders' equity generally will be expected to be the 
dominant form of Tier 1 capital. Thus, banks should avoid undue reliance 
on nonvoting equity, preferred stock and minority interests.
    (c) Although minority interests in consolidated subsidiaries are 
generally included in regulatory capital, exceptions to this general 
rule will be made if the minority interests fail to provide meaningful 
capital support to the consolidated bank. Such a situation

[[Page 425]]

could arise if the minority interests are entitled to a preferred claim 
on essentially low risk assets of the subsidiary. Similarly, although 
credit-enhancing interest-only strips and intangible assets in the form 
of mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased 
credit card relationships are generally recognized for risk-based 
capital purposes, the deduction of part or all of the credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips, mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing 
assets and purchased credit card relationships may be required if the 
carrying amounts of these assets are excessive in relation to their 
market value or the level of the bank's capital accounts. Credit-
enhancing interest-only strips, mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage 
servicing assets, purchased credit card relationships and deferred tax 
assets that do not meet the conditions, limitations and restrictions 
described in Sec. 325.5(f) and (g) of this part will not be recognized 
for risk-based capital purposes.
    (d) Minority interests in small business investment companies, 
investment funds that hold nonfinancial equity investments (as defined 
in section II.B.(6)(ii) of this appendix A), and subsidiaries that are 
engaged in non-financial activities are not included in the bank's Tier 
1 or total capital base if the bank's interest in the company or fund is 
held under one of the legal authorities listed in section II.B.(6)(ii) 
of this appendix A.
    2. Supplementary capital elements (Tier 2) consist of:
    i. Allowance for loan and lease losses, up to a maximum of 1.25 
percent of risk-weighted assets;
    ii. Cumulative perpetual preferred stock, long-term preferred stock 
(original maturity of at least 20 years), and any related surplus;
    iii. Perpetual preferred stock (and any related surplus) where the 
dividend is reset periodically based, in whole or part, on the bank's 
current credit standing, regardless of whether the dividends are 
cumulative or noncumulative;
    iv. Hybrid capital instruments, including mandatory convertible debt 
securities;
    v. Term subordinated debt and intermediate-term preferred stock 
(original average maturity of five years or more) and any related 
surplus; and
    vi. Net unrealized holding gains on equity securities (subject to 
the limitations discussed in paragraph I.A.2.(f) of this section).
    The maximum amount of Tier 2 capital that may be recognized for 
risk-based capital purposes is limited to 100 percent of Tier 1 capital 
(after any deductions for disallowed intangibles and disallowed deferred 
tax assets). In addition, the combined amount of term subordinated debt 
and intermediate-term preferred stock that may be treated as part of 
Tier 2 capital for risk-based capital purposes is limited to 50 percent 
of Tier 1 capital. Amounts in excess of these limits may be issued but 
are not included in the calculation of the risk-based capital ratio.
    (a) Allowance for loan and lease losses. Allowances for loan and 
lease losses are reserves that have been established through a charge 
against earnings to absorb future losses on loans or lease financing 
receivables. Allowances for loan and lease losses exclude allocated 
transfer risk reserves, \4\ and reserves created against identified 
losses.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ Allocated transfer risk reserves are reserves that have been 
established in accordance with section 905(a) of the International 
Lending Supervision Act of 1983 against certain assets whose value has 
been found by the U.S. supervisory authorities to have been 
significantly impaired by protracted transfer risk problems.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    This risk-based capital framework provides a phasedown during the 
transition period of the extent to which the allowance for loan and 
lease losses may be included in an institution's capital base. By year-
end 1990, the allowance for loan and lease losses, as an element of 
supplementary capital, may constitute no more than 1.5 percent of risk-
weighted assets and, by year-end 1992, no more than 1.25 percent of 
risk-weighted assets. \5\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \5\ The amount of the allowance for loan and lease losses that may 
be included as a supplementary capital element is based on a percentage 
of gross risk-weighted assets. A bank may deduct reserves for loan and 
lease losses that are in excess of the amount permitted to be included 
in capital, as well as allocated transfer risk reserves, from gross 
risk-weighted assets when computing the denominator of the risk-based 
capital ratio.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Preferred stock. Perpetual preferred stock is defined as 
preferred stock that does not have a maturity date, that cannot be 
redeemed at the option of the holder, and that has no other provisions 
that will require future redemption of the issue. Long-term preferred 
stock includes limited-life preferred stock with an original maturity of 
20 years or more, provided that the stock cannot be redeemed at the 
option of the holder prior to maturity, except with the prior approval 
of the FDIC.
    Cumulative perpetual preferred stock and long-term preferred stock 
qualify for inclusion in supplementary capital provided that the 
instruments can absorb losses while the issuer operates as a going 
concern (a fundamental characteristic of equity capital) and provided 
the issuer has the option to defer payment of dividends on these 
instruments. Given these conditions, and the perpetual or long-term 
nature of the intruments, there is no limit on the amount of these 
preferred stock instruments that may be included with Tier 2 capital.

[[Page 426]]

    Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock where the dividend is reset 
periodically based, in whole or in part, on the bank's current credit 
standing, including auction rate, money market, or remarketable 
preferred stock, are also assigned to Tier 2 capital without limit, 
provided the above conditions are met.
    (c) Hybrid capital instruments. Hybrid capital instruments include 
instruments that have certain characteristics of both debt and equity. 
In order to be included as supplementary capital elements, these 
instruments should meet the following criteria:
    (1) The instrument should be unsecured, subordinated to the claims 
of depositors and general creditors, and fully paid-up.
    (2) The instrument should not be redeemable at the option of the 
holder prior to maturity, except with the prior approval of the FDIC. 
This requirement implies that holders of such instruments may not 
accelerate the payment of principal except in the event of bankruptcy, 
insolvency, or reorganization.
    (3) The instrument should be available to participate in losses 
while the issuer is operating as a going concern. (Term subordinated 
debt would not meet this requirement.) To satisfy this requirement, the 
instrument should convert to common or perpetual preferred stock in the 
event that the sum of the undivided profits and capital surplus accounts 
of the issuer results in a negative balance.
    (4) The instrument should provide the option for the issuer to defer 
principal and interest payments if: (a) The issuer does not report a 
profit in the preceding annual period, defined as combined profits 
(i.e., net income) for the most recent four quarters, and (b) the issuer 
eliminates cash dividends on its common and preferred stock.
    Mandatory convertible debt securities, which are subordinated debt 
instruments that require the issuer to convert such instruments into 
common or perpetual preferred stock by a date at or before the maturity 
of the debt instruments, will qualify as hybrid capital instruments 
provided the maturity of these instruments is 12 years or less and the 
instruments meet the criteria set forth below for ``term subordinated 
debt.'' There is no limit on the amount of hybrid capital instruments 
that may be included within Tier 2 capital.
    (d) Term subordinated debt and intermediate-term preferred stock. 
The aggregate amount of term subordinated debt (excluding mandatory 
convertible debt securities) and intermediate-term preferred stock 
(including any related surplus) that may be treated as Tier 2 capital 
for risk-based capital purposes is limited to 50 percent of Tier 1 
capital. Term subordinated debt and intermediate-term preferred stock 
should have an original average maturity of at least five years to 
qualify as supplementary capital and should not be redeemable at the 
option of the holder prior to maturity, except with the prior approval 
of the FDIC. For state nonmember banks, a term subordinated debt 
instrument is an obligation other than a deposit obligation that:
    (1) Bears on its face, in boldface type, the following: This 
obligation is not a deposit and is not insured by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation;
    (2)(i) Has a maturity of at least five years; or
    (ii) In the case of an obligation or issue that provides for 
scheduled repayments of principal, has an average maturity of at least 
five years; provided that the Director of the Division of Supervision 
and Consumer Protection (DSC) may permit the issuance of an obligation 
or issue with a shorter maturity or average maturity if the Director has 
determined that exigent circumstances require the issuance of such 
obligation or issue; provided further that the provisions of this 
paragraph I.A.2.(d)(2) shall not apply to mandatory convertible debt 
obligations or issues;
    (3) States express that the obligation:
    (i) Is subordinated and junior in right of payment to the issuing 
bank's obligations to its depositors and to the bank's other obligations 
to its general and secured creditors; and
    (ii) Is ineligible as collateral for a loan by the issuing bank;
    (4) Is unsecured;
    (5) States expressly that the issuing bank may not retire any part 
of its obligation without the prior written consent of the FDIC or other 
primary federal regulator; and
    (6) Includes, if the obligation is issued to a depository 
institution, a specific waiver of the right of offset by the lending 
depository institution.

Subordinated debt obligations issued prior to December 2, 1987 that 
satisfied the definition of the term ``subordinated note and debenture'' 
that was in effect prior to that date also will be deemed to be term 
subordinated debt for risk-based capital purposes. An optional 
redemption (``call'') provision in a subordinated debt instrument that 
is exercisable by the issuing bank in less than five years will not be 
deemed to constitute a maturity of less than five years, provided that 
the obligation otherwise has a stated contractual maturity of at least 
five years; the call is exercisable solely at the discretion or option 
of the issuing bank, and not at the discretion or option of the holder 
of the obligation; and the call is exercisable only with the express 
prior written consent of the FDIC under 12 U.S.C. 1828(i)(1) at the time 
early redemption or retirement is sought, and such consent has not been 
given in advance at the time of issuance of the obligation. Optional 
redemption provisions will be accorded similar treatment when 
determining the perpetual nature and/or maturity

[[Page 427]]

of preferred stock and other capital instruments.
    (e) Discount of limited-life supplementary capital instruments. As a 
limited-life capital instrument approaches maturity, the instrument 
begins to take on charcteristics of a short-term obligation and becomes 
less like a component of capital. Therefore, for risk-based capital 
purposes, the outstanding amount of term subordinated debt and limited-
life preferred stock eligible for inclusion in capital will be adjusted 
downward, or discounted, as the instruments approach maturity. Each 
limited-life capital instrument will be discounted by reducing the 
outstanding amount of the capital instrument eligible for inclusion as 
supplementary capital by a fifth of the original amount (less 
redemptions) each year during the instrument's last five years before 
maturity. Such instruments, therefore, will have no capital value when 
they have a remaining maturity of less than a year.
    (f) Unrealized gains on equity securities and unrealized gains 
(losses) on other assets. Up to 45 percent of pretax net unrealized 
holding gains (that is, the excess, if any, of the fair value over 
historical cost) on available-for-sale equity securities with readily 
determinable fair values may be included in supplementary capital. 
However, the FDIC may exclude all or a portion of these unrealized gains 
from Tier 2 capital if the FDIC determines that the equity securities 
are not prudently valued. Unrealized gains (losses) on other types of 
assets, such as bank premises and available-for-sale debt securities, 
are not included in supplementary capital, but the FDIC may take these 
unrealized gains (losses) into account as additional factors when 
assessing a bank's overall capital adequacy.

            B. Deductions from Capital and Other Adjustments

    Certain assets are deducted from a bank's capital base for the 
purpose of calculating the numerator of the risk-based capital ratio. 
\6\ These assets include:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \6\ Any assets deducted from capital when computing the numerator of 
the risk-based capital ratio will also be excluded from risk-weighted 
assets when computing the denominator of the ratio.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) All intangible assets other than mortgage servicing assets, 
nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased credit card relationships. 
\7\ These disallowed intangibles are deducted from the core capital 
(Tier 1) elements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \7\ In addition to mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing 
assets and purchased credit card relationships, certain other 
intangibles may be allowed if explicitly approved by the FDIC as part of 
the bank's regulatory capital on a specific case basis. In evaluating 
whether other types of intangibles should be recognized for regulatory 
capital purposes on a specific case basis, the FDIC will accord special 
attention to the general characteristics of the intangibles, including: 
(1) The separability of the intangible asset and the ability to sell it 
separate and apart from the bank or the bulk of the bank's assets, (2) 
the certainty that a readily identifiable stream of cash flows 
associated with the intangible asset can hold its value notwithstanding 
the future prospects of the bank, and (3) the existence of a market of 
sufficient depth to provide liquidity for the intangible asset.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Investments in unconsolidated banking and finance subsidiaries. 
\8\ This includes any equity or debt capital investments in banking or 
finance subsidaries if the subsidiaries are not consolidated for 
regulatory capital requirements. \9\ Generally, these investments

[[Page 428]]

include equity and debt capital securities and any other instruments or 
commitments that are deemed to be capital of the subsidiary. These 
investments are deducted from the bank's total (Tier 1 plus Tier 2) 
capital base.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \8\ For risk-based capital purposes, these subsidiaries are 
generally defined as any company that is primarily engaged in banking or 
finance and in which the bank, either directly or indirectly, owns more 
than 50 percent of the outstanding voting stock but does not consolidate 
the company for regulatory capital purposes. In addition to investments 
in unconsolidated banking and finance subsidiaries, the FDIC may, on a 
case-by-case basis, deduct investments in associated companies or joint 
ventures, which are generally defined as any companies in which the 
bank, either directly or indirectly, owns 20 to 50 percent of the 
outstanding voting stock. Alternatively, the FDIC may, in certain cases, 
apply an appropriate risk-weighted capital charge against a bank's 
proportionate interest in the assets of associated companies and joint 
ventures. The definitions for subsidiaries, associated companies and 
joint ventures are contained in the instructions for the preparation of 
the Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income.
    \9\ Consolidation requirements for regulatory capital purposes 
generally follow the consolidation requirements set forth in the 
instructions for preparation of the consolidated Reports of Condition 
and Income. However, although investments in subsidiaries representing 
majority ownership in another Federally-insured depository institution 
are not consolidated for purposes of the consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income that are filed by the parent bank, they are 
generally consolidated for purposes of determining FDIC regulatory 
capital requirements. Therefore, investments in these depository 
institution subsidiaries generally will not be deducted for risk-based 
capital purposes; rather, assets and liabilities of such subsidiaries 
will be consolidated with those of the parent bank when calculating the 
risk-based capital ratio. In addition, although securities subsidiaries 
established pursuant to 12 CFR 337.4 are consolidated for Report of 
Condition and Income purposes, they are not consolidated for regulatory 
capital purposes.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Investments in securities subsidiaries established pursuant to 
12 CFR 337.4. The FDIC may also consider deducting investments in other 
subsidiaries, either on a case-by-case basis or, as with securities 
subsidiaries, based on the general characteristics or functional nature 
of the subsidiaries.
    (4) Reciprocal holdings of capital instruments of banks that 
represent intentional cross-holdings by the banks. These holdings are 
deducted from the bank's total capital base.
    (5) Deferred tax assets in excess of the limit set forth in 
Sec. 325.5(g). These disallowed deferred tax assets are deducted from 
the core capital (Tier 1) elements.
    On a case-by-case basis, and in conjunction with supervisory 
examinations, other deductions from capital may also be required, 
including any adjustments deemed appropriate for assets classified as 
loss.

            II. Procedures For Computing Risk-Weighted Assets

                          A. General Procedures

    1. Under the risk-based capital framework, a bank's balance sheet 
assets and credit equivalent amounts of off-balance sheet items are 
assigned to one of four broad risk categories according to the obligor 
or, if relevent, the guarantor or the nature of the collateral. The 
aggregate dollar amount in each category is then multiplied by the risk 
weight assigned to that category. The resulting weighted values from 
each of the four risk categories are added together and this sum is the 
risk-weighted assets total that, as adjusted. \10\ comprises the 
denominator of the risk-based capital ratio.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \10\ Any asset deducted from a bank's capital accounts when 
computing the numerator of the risk-based capital ratio will also be 
excluded from risk-weighted assets when calculating the denominator for 
the ratio.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    2. The risk-weighted amounts for all off-balance sheet items are 
determined by a two-step process. First, the notional principal, or face 
value, amount of each off-balance sheet item generally is multiplied by 
a credit conversion factor to arrive at a balance sheet credit 
equivalent amount. Second, the credit equivalent amount generally is 
assigned to the appropriate risk category, like any balance sheet asset, 
according to the obligor or, if relevant, the guarantor or the nature of 
the collateral.
    3. The Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer 
Protection (DSC) may, on a case-by-case basis, determine the appropriate 
risk weight for any asset or credit equivalent amount that does not fit 
wholly within one of the risk categories set forth in this Appendix A or 
that imposes risks on a bank that are not commensurate with the risk 
weight otherwise specified in this Appendix A for the asset or credit 
equivalent amount. In addition, the Director of the Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC) may, on a case-by-case basis, 
determine the appropriate credit conversion factor for any off-balance 
sheet item that does not fit wholly within one of the credit conversion 
factors set forth in this Appendix A or that imposes risks on a bank 
that are not commensurate with the credit conversion factor otherwise 
specified in this Appendix A for the off-balance sheet item. In making 
such a determination, the Director of the Division of Supervision and 
Consumer Protection (DSC) will consider the similarity of the asset or 
off-balance sheet item to assets or off-balance sheet items explicitly 
treated in sections II.B and II.C of this appendix A, as well as other 
relevant factors.
    4. The Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer 
Protection (DSC) may, on a case-by-case basis, determine that the 
regulatory capital treatment for an exposure or other relationship to an 
entity that is not subject to consolidation on the balance sheet is not 
commensurate with the risk of the exposure and the relationship of the 
bank to the entity. In making this determination, the Director of DSC 
may require the bank to treat the entity as if it were consolidated on 
the balance sheet of the bank for risk-based capital purposes and 
calculate the appropriate risk-based capital ratios accordingly.
    5. Optional Transition Provisions Related to the Implementation of 
Consolidation Requirements Under FAS 167
    Section II.A.5 of this appendix provides optional transition 
provisions for a State nonmember bank that is required for financial and 
regulatory reporting purposes, as a result of its implementation of 
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 167, Amendments to FASB 
Interpretation No. 46(R) (FAS 167), to consolidate certain variable 
interest entities (VIEs) as defined under United States generally 
accepted accounting principles (GAAP). These transition provisions apply 
through the end of the fourth quarter following the date of a bank's 
implementation of FAS 167 (implementation date).
    i. Exclusion period.
    (a) Exclusion of risk-weighted assets for the first and second 
quarters. For the first two

[[Page 429]]

quarters after the implementation date (exclusion period), including for 
the two calendar quarter-end regulatory report dates within those 
quarters, a bank may exclude from risk-weighted assets:
    (1) Subject to the limitations in paragraph iii. of this section 
II.A.5, assets held by a VIE, provided that the following conditions are 
met:
    (i) The VIE existed prior to the implementation date,
    (ii) The bank did not consolidate the VIE on its balance sheet for 
calendar quarter-end regulatory report dates prior to the implementation 
date,
    (iii) The bank must consolidate the VIE on its balance sheet 
beginning as of the implementation date as a result of its 
implementation of FAS 167, and
    (iv) The bank excludes all assets held by VIEs described in 
paragraphs i.(a)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section II.A.5; and
    (2) Subject to the limitations in paragraph iii. of this section 
II.A.5, assets held by a VIE that is a consolidated asset-backed 
commercial paper (ABCP) program, provided that the following conditions 
are met:
    (i) The bank is the sponsor of the ABCP program,
    (ii) Prior to the implementation date, the bank consolidated the VIE 
onto its balance sheet under GAAP and excluded the VIE's assets from the 
bank's risk-weighted assets, and
    (iii) The bank chooses to exclude all assets held by ABCP program 
VIEs described in paragraphs i.(a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section 
II.A.5.
    (b) Risk-weighted assets during exclusion period. During the 
exclusion period, including the two calendar quarter-end regulatory 
report dates within the exclusion period, a bank adopting the optional 
provisions of this paragraph i. of this section II.A.5 must calculate 
risk-weighted assets for its contractual exposures to the VIEs 
referenced in paragraph i.(a) of this section II.A.5 on the 
implementation date and include this calculated amount in its risk-
weighted assets. Such contractual exposures may include direct-credit 
substitutes, recourse obligations, residual interests, liquidity 
facilities, and loans.
    (c) Inclusion of ALLL in Tier 2 capital for the first and second 
quarters. During the exclusion period, including for the two calendar 
quarter-end regulatory report dates within the exclusion period, a bank 
that excludes VIE assets from risk-weighted assets pursuant to paragraph 
i.(a) of this section II.A.5 may include in Tier 2 capital the full 
amount of the allowance for loan and lease losses (ALLL) calculated as 
of the implementation date that is attributable to the assets it 
excludes pursuant to paragraph i.(a) of this section II.A.5 (inclusion 
amount). The amount of ALLL includable in Tier 2 capital in accordance 
with this paragraph shall not be subject to the limitations set forth in 
paragraph i. of section I.A.2.
    ii. Phase-in period.
    (a) Exclusion amount. For purposes of this paragraph ii. of this 
section II.A.5, exclusion amount is defined as the amount of risk-
weighted assets excluded in paragraph i.(a) of this section II.A.5 as of 
the implementation date.
    (b) Risk-weighted assets for the third and fourth quarters. A bank 
that excludes assets of consolidated VIEs from risk-weighted assets 
pursuant to paragraph i.(a) of this section II.A.5 may, for the third 
and fourth quarters after the implementation date (phase-in period), 
including for the two calendar quarter-end regulatory report dates 
within those quarters, exclude from risk-weighted assets 50 percent of 
the exclusion amount, provided that the bank may not include in risk-
weighted assets pursuant to this paragraph an amount less than the 
aggregate risk-weighted assets calculated pursuant to paragraph i.(b) of 
this section II.A.5.
    (c) Inclusion of ALLL in Tier 2 capital for the third and fourth 
quarters. A bank that excludes assets of consolidated VIEs from risk-
weighted assets pursuant to paragraph ii.(b) of this section II.A.5 may, 
for the phase-in period, include in Tier 2 capital 50 percent of the 
inclusion amount it included in Tier 2 capital during the exclusion 
period, notwithstanding the limit on including ALLL in Tier 2 capital in 
paragraph i. of section I.A.2.
    iii. Implicit recourse limitation. Notwithstanding any other 
provision in this section II.A.5, assets held by a VIE to which the bank 
has provided recourse through credit enhancement beyond any contractual 
obligation to support assets it has sold may not be excluded from risk-
weighted assets.

                         B. Other Considerations

    1. Indirect Holdings of Assets. Some of the assets on a bank's 
balance sheet may represent an indirect holding of a pool of assets; for 
example, mutual funds. An investment in shares of a mutual fund whose 
portfolio consists solely of various securities or money market 
instruments that, if held separately, would be assigned to different 
risk categories, generally is assigned to the risk category appropriate 
to the highest risk-weighted asset that the fund is permitted to hold in 
accordance with the stated investment objectives set forth in its 
prospectus. The bank may, at its option, assign the investment on a pro 
rata basis to different risk categories according to the investment 
limits in the fund's prospectus, but in no case will indirect holdings 
through shares in any mutual fund be assigned to a risk weight less than 
20 percent. If the bank chooses to assign its investment on a pro rata 
basis, and the sum of the investment limits in the fund's prospectus 
exceeds 100 percent, the bank must

[[Page 430]]

assign risk weights in descending order. If, in order to maintain a 
necessary degree of short-term liquidity, a fund is permitted to hold an 
insignificant amount of its assets in short-term, highly liquid 
securities of superior credit quality that do not qualify for a 
preferential risk weight, such securities will generally be disregarded 
in determining the risk category to which the bank's holdings in the 
overall fund should be assigned. The prudent use of hedging instruments 
by a mutual fund to reduce the risk of its assets will not increase the 
risk weighting of the mutual fund investment. For example, the use of 
hedging instruments by a mutual fund to reduce the interest rate risk of 
its government bond portfolio will not increase the risk weight of that 
fund above the 20 percent category. Nonetheless, if the fund engages in 
any activities that appear speculative in nature or has any other 
characteristics that are inconsistent with the preferential risk 
weighting assigned to the fund's assets, holdings in the fund will be 
assigned to the 100 percent risk category.
    2. Collateral. In determining risk weights of various assets, the 
only forms of collateral that are formally recognized by the risk-based 
capital framework are cash on deposit in the lending bank; securities 
issued or guaranteed by the central governments of the OECD-based group 
of countries, \11\ U.S. Government agencies, or U.S. Government-
sponsored agencies; and securities issued or guaranteed by multilateral 
lending institutions or regional development banks. Claims fully secured 
by such collateral are assigned to the 20 percent risk category. The 
extent to which these securities are recognized as collateral for risk-
based capital purposes is determined by their current market value. If a 
claim is partially secured, the portion of the claim that is not covered 
by the collateral is assigned to the risk category appropriate to the 
obligor or, if relevant, the guarantor.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \11\ The OECD-based group of countries comprises all full members of 
the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) 
regardless of entry date, as well as countries that have concluded 
special lending arrangements with the International Monetary Fund (IMF) 
associated with the IMF's General Arrangements to Borrow, but excludes 
any country that has rescheduled its external sovereign debt within the 
previous five years. As of November 1995, the OECD included the 
following countries: Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, Denmark, 
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Japan, 
Luxembourg, Mexico, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, 
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, the United Kingdom, and the United 
States; and Saudi Arabia had concluded special lending arrangements with 
the IMF associated with the IMF's General Arrangements to Borrow. A 
rescheduling of external sovereign debt generally would include any 
renegotiation of terms arising from a country's inability or 
unwillingness to meet its external debt service obligations, but 
generally would not include renegotiations of debt in the normal course 
of business, such as a renegotiation to allow the borrower to take 
advantage of a decline in interest rates or other change in market 
conditions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    3. Guarantees. Guarantees of the OECD and non-OECD central 
governments, U.S. Government agencies, U.S. Government-sponsored 
agencies, state and local governments of the OECD-based group of 
countries, multilateral lending institutions and regional development 
banks, U.S. depository institutions, foreign banks, and qualifying OECD-
based securities firms are also recognized. If a claim is partially 
guaranteed, the portion of the claim that is not fully covered by the 
guarantee is assigned to the risk category appropriate to the obligor 
or, if relevant, the collateral.
    4. Maturity. Maturity is generally not a factor in assigning items 
to risk categories with the exceptions of claims on non-OECD banks, 
commitments, and interest rate and foreign exchange rate related 
contracts. Except for commitments, short-term is defined as one year or 
less remaining maturity and long-term is defined as over one year 
remaining maturity. In the case of commitments, short-term is defined as 
one year or less original maturity and long-term is defined as over one 
year original maturity. \12\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \12\ Through year-end 1992, remaining rather than original maturity 
may be used for determining term to maturity for commitments.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    5. Recourse, Direct Credit Substitutes, Residual Interests and 
Mortgage- and Asset-Backed Securities. For purposes of this section 
II.B.5 of this appendix A, the following definitions will apply.
    a. Definitions--(1) Credit derivative means a contract that allows 
one party (the ``protection purchaser'') to transfer the credit risk of 
an asset or off-balance sheet credit exposure to another party (the 
``protection provider''). The value of a credit derivative is dependent, 
at least in part, on the credit performance of the ``reference asset.''
    (2) Credit-enhancing interest only strip is defined in 
Sec. 325.2(g).
    (3) Credit-enhancing representations and warranties means 
representations and warranties that are made or assumed in connection 
with a transfer of assets (including loan servicing assets) and that 
obligate the bank to protect investors from losses arising from credit 
risk in the assets transferred or the loans serviced. Credit-enhancing 
representations and

[[Page 431]]

warranties include promises to protect a party from losses resulting 
from the default or nonperformance of another party or from an 
insufficiency in the value of the collateral. Credit-enhancing 
representations and warranties do not include:
    (i) Early default clauses and similar warranties that permit the 
return of, or premium refund clauses covering, 1-4 family residential 
first mortgage loans that qualify for a 50 percent risk weight for a 
period not to exceed 120 days from the date of transfer. These 
warranties may cover only those loans that were originated within 1 year 
of the date of transfer;
    (ii) Premium refund clauses that cover assets guaranteed, in whole 
or in part, by the U.S. Government, a U.S. Government agency or a 
government-sponsored enterprise, provided the premium refund clauses are 
for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date of transfer; or
    (iii) Warranties that permit the return of assets in instances of 
misrepresentation, fraud or incomplete documentation.
    (4) Direct credit substitute means an arrangement in which a bank 
assumes, in form or in substance, credit risk associated with an on-or 
off-balance sheet credit exposure that was not previously owned by the 
bank (third-party asset) and the risk assumed by the bank exceeds the 
pro rata share of the bank's interest in the third-party asset. If the 
bank has no claim on the third-party asset, then the bank's assumption 
of any credit risk with respect to the third party asset is a direct 
credit substitute. Direct credit substitutes include, but are not 
limited to:
    (i) Financial standby letters of credit, which includes any letter 
of credit or similar arrangement, however named or described, that 
support financial claims on a third party that exceed a bank's pro rata 
share of losses in the financial claim;
    (ii) Guarantees, surety arrangements, credit derivatives, and 
similar instruments backing financial claims;
    (iii) Purchased subordinated interests or securities that absorb 
more than their pro rata share of credit losses from the underlying 
assets;
    (iv) Credit derivative contracts under which the bank assumes more 
than its pro rata share of credit risk on a third party asset or 
exposure;
    (v) Loans or lines of credit that provide credit enhancement for the 
financial obligations of an account party;
    (vi) Purchased loan servicing assets if the servicer:
    (A) Is responsible for credit losses with the loans being serviced,
    (B) Is responsible for making servicer cash advances (unless the 
advances are not direct credit substitutes because they meet the 
conditions specified in section II.B.5(a)(9) of this Appendix A), or
    (C) Makes or assumes credit-enhancing representations and warranties 
with respect to the loans serviced;
    (vii) Clean-up calls on third party assets. Clean-up calls that are 
exercisable at the option of the bank (as servicer or as an affiliate of 
the servicer) when the pool balance is 10 percent or less of the 
original pool balance are not direct credit substitutes; and
    (viii) Liquidity facilities that provide liquidity support to ABCP 
(other than eligible ABCP liquidity facilities).
    (5) Eligible ABCP liquidity facility means a liquidity facility 
supporting ABCP, in form or in substance, that is subject to an asset 
quality test at the time of draw that precludes funding against assets 
that are 90 days or more past due or in default. In addition, if the 
assets that an eligible ABCP liquidity facility is required to fund 
against are externally rated assets or exposures at the inception of the 
facility, the facility can be used to fund only those assets or 
exposures that are externally rated investment grade at the time of 
funding. Notwithstanding the eligibility requirements set forth in the 
two preceding sentences, a liquidity facility will be considered an 
eligible ABCP liquidity facility if the assets that are funded under the 
liquidity facility and which do not meet the eligibility requirements 
are guaranteed, either conditionally or unconditionally, by the U.S. 
government or its agencies, or by the central government of an OECD 
country.
    (6) Externally rated means that an instrument or obligation has 
received a credit rating from a nationally recognized statistical rating 
organization.
    (7) Face amount means the notional principal, or face value, amount 
of an off-balance sheet item; the amortized cost of an asset not held 
for trading purposes; and the fair value of a trading asset.
    (8) Financial asset means cash or other monetary instrument, 
evidence of debt, evidence of an ownership interest in an entity, or a 
contract that conveys a right to receive or exchange cash or another 
financial instrument from another party.
    (9) Financial standby letter of credit means a letter of credit or 
similar arrangement that represents an irrevocable obligation to a 
third-party beneficiary:
    (i) To receive money borrowed by, or advanced to, or advanced to, or 
for the account of, a second party (the account party), or
    (ii) To make payment on behalf of the account party, in the event 
that the account party fails to fulfill its obligation to the 
beneficiary.
    (10) Liquidity facility means a legally binding commitment to 
provide liquidity support to ABCP by lending to, or purchasing assets 
from, any structure, program, or conduit in the event that funds are 
required to repay maturing ABCP.

[[Page 432]]

    (11) Mortgage servicer cash advance means funds that a residential 
mortgage servicer advances to ensure an uninterrupted flow of payments, 
including advances made to cover foreclosure costs or other expenses to 
facilitate the timely collection of the loan. A mortgage servicer cash 
advance is not a recourse obligation or a direct credit substitute if:
    (i) The mortgage servicer is entitled to full reimbursement and this 
right is not subordinated to other claims on the cash flows from the 
underlying asset pool; or
    (ii) For any one loan, the servicer's obligation to make 
nonreimbursable advances is contractually limited to an insignificant 
amount of the outstanding principal of that loan.
    (12) Nationally recognized statistical rating organization (NRSRO) 
means an entity recognized by the Division of Market Regulation of the 
Securities and Exchange Commission (or any successor Division) 
(Commission) as a nationally recognized statistical rating organization 
for various purposes, including the Commission's uniform net capital 
requirements for brokers and dealers (17 CFR 240.15c3-1).
    (13) Recourse means an arrangement in which a bank retains, in form 
or in substance, of any credit risk directly or indirectly associated 
with an asset it has sold (in accordance with generally accepted 
accounting principles) that exceeds a pro rata share of the bank's claim 
on the asset. If a bank has no claim on an asset it has sold, then the 
retention of any credit risk is recourse. A recourse obligation 
typically arises when an institution transfers assets in a sale and 
retains an obligation to repurchase the assets or absorb losses due to a 
default of principal or interest or any other deficiency in the 
performance of the underlying obligor or some other party. Recourse may 
exist implicitly where a bank provides credit enhancement beyond any 
contractual obligation to support assets it has sold. The following are 
examples of recourse arrangements:
    (i) Credit-enhancing representations and warranties made on the 
transferred assets;
    (ii) Loan servicing assets retained pursuant to an agreement under 
which the bank:
    (A) Is responsible for losses associated with the loans being 
serviced, or
    (B) Is responsible for making mortgage servicer cash advances 
(unless the advances are not a recourse obligation because they meet the 
conditions specified in section II.B.5(a)(11) of this Appendix A).
    (iii) Retained subordinated interests that absorb more than their 
pro rata share of losses from the underlying assets;
    (iv) Assets sold under an agreement to repurchase, if the assets are 
not already included on the balance sheet;
    (v) Loan strips sold without contractual recourse where the maturity 
of the transferred portion of the loan is shorter than the maturity of 
the commitment under which the loan is drawn;
    (vi) Credit derivative contracts under which the bank retains more 
than its pro rata share of credit risk on transferred assets;
    (vii) Clean-up calls at inception that are greater than 10 percent 
of the balance of the original pool of transferred loans. Clean-up calls 
that are 10 percent or less of the original pool balance that are 
exercisable at the option of the bank are not recourse arrangements; and
    (viii.) Liquidity facilities that provide liquidity support to ABCP 
(other than eligible ABCP liquidity facilities).
    (14) Residual interest means any on-balance sheet asset that 
represents an interest (including a beneficial interest) created by a 
transfer that qualifies as a sale (in accordance with generally accepted 
accounting principles (GAAP)) of financial assets, whether through a 
securitization or otherwise, and that exposes a bank to credit risk 
directly or indirectly associated with the transferred assets that 
exceeds a pro rata share of the bank's claim on the assets, whether 
through subordination provisions or other credit enhancement techniques. 
Residual interests generally include credit-enhancing I/Os, spread 
accounts, cash collateral accounts, retained subordinated interests, 
other forms of over-collateralization, and similar assets that function 
as a credit enhancement. Residual interests further include those 
exposures that, in substance, cause the bank to retain the credit risk 
of an asset or exposure that had qualified as a residual interest before 
it was sold. Residual interests generally do not include interests 
purchased from a third party, except that purchased credit-enhancing I/
Os are residual interests for purposes of the risk-based capital 
treatment in this appendix.
    (15) Risk participation means a participation in which the 
originating party remains liable to the beneficiary for the full amount 
of an obligation (e.g., a direct credit substitute) notwithstanding that 
another party has acquired a participation in that obligation.
    (16) Securitization means the pooling and repackaging by a special 
purpose entity of assets or other credit exposures into securities that 
can be sold to investors. Securitization includes transactions that 
create stratified credit risk positions whose performance is dependent 
upon an underlying pool of credit exposures, including loans and 
commitments.
    (17) Sponsor means a bank that establishes an ABCP program; approves 
the sellers permitted to participate in the program; approves the asset 
pools to be purchased by the program; or administers the ABCP program

[[Page 433]]

by monitoring the assets, arranging for debt placement, compiling 
monthly reports, or ensuring compliance with the program documents and 
with the program's credit and investment policy.
    (18) Structured finance program means a program where receivable 
interests and asset-backed securities issued by multiple participants 
are purchased by a special purpose entity that repackages those 
exposures into securities that can be sold to investors. Structured 
finance programs allocate credit risks, generally, between the 
participants and credit enhancement provided to the program.
    (19) Traded position means a position that is externally rated and 
is retained, assumed or issued in connection with an asset 
securitization, where there is a reasonable expectation that, in the 
near future, the rating will be relied upon by unaffiliated investors to 
purchase the position; or an unaffiliated third party to enter into a 
transaction involving the position, such as a purchase, loan, or 
repurchase agreement.
    (b) Credit equivalent amounts and risk weights of recourse 
obligations and direct credit substitutes--(1) General rule for 
determining the credit-equivalent amount. Except as otherwise provided, 
the credit-equivalent amount for a recourse obligation or direct credit 
substitute is the full amount of the credit-enhanced assets for which 
the bank directly or indirectly retains or assumes credit risk 
multiplied by a 100% conversion factor. Thus, a bank that extends a 
partial direct credit substitute, e.g., a financial standby letter of 
credit that absorbs the first 10 percent of loss on a transaction, must 
maintain capital against the full amount of the assets being supported.
    (2) Risk-weight factor. To determine the bank's risk-weighted assets 
for an off-balance sheet recourse obligation or a direct credit 
substitute, the credit equivalent amount is assigned to the risk 
category appropriate to the obligor in the underlying transaction, after 
considering any associated guarantees or collateral. For a direct credit 
substitute that is an on-balance sheet asset, e.g., a purchased 
subordinated security, a bank must calculate risk-weighted assets using 
the amount of the direct credit substitute and the full amount of the 
assets it supports, i.e., all the more senior positions in the 
structure. The treatment covered in this paragraph (b) is subject to the 
low-level exposure rule provided in section II.B.5(h)(1) of this 
appendix A.
    (c) Credit equivalent amount and risk weight of participations in, 
and syndications of, direct credit substitutes. Subject to the low-level 
exposure rule provided in section II.B.5(h)(1) of this appendix A, the 
credit equivalent amount for a participation interest in, or syndication 
of, a direct credit substitute (excluding purchased credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips) is calculated and risk weighted as follows:
    (1) Treatment for direct credit substitutes for which a bank has 
conveyed a risk participation. In the case of a direct credit substitute 
in which a bank has conveyed a risk participation, the full amount of 
the assets that are supported by the direct credit substitute is 
converted to a credit equivalent amount using a 100% conversion factor. 
However, the pro rata share of the credit equivalent amount that has 
been conveyed through a risk participation is then assigned to whichever 
risk-weight category is lower: the risk-weight category appropriate to 
the obligor in the underlying transaction, after considering any 
associated guarantees or collateral, or the risk-weight category 
appropriate to the party acquiring the participation. The pro rata share 
of the credit equivalent amount that has not been participated out is 
assigned to the risk-weight category appropriate to the obligor, 
guarantor, or collateral. For example, the pro rata share of the full 
amount of the assets supported, in whole or in part, by a direct credit 
substitute conveyed as a risk participation to a U.S. domestic 
depository institution or an OECD bank is assigned to the 20 percent 
risk category. \13\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \13\ A risk participation with a remaining maturity of one year or 
less that is conveyed to a non-OECD bank is also assigned to the 20 
percent risk category.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Treatment for direct credit substitutes in which the bank has 
acquired a risk participation. In the case of a direct credit substitute 
in which the bank has acquired a risk participation, the acquiring 
bank's pro rata share of the direct credit substitute is multiplied by 
the full amount of the assets that are supported by the direct credit 
substitute and converted using a 100% credit conversion factor. The 
resulting credit equivalent amount is then assigned to the risk-weight 
category appropriate to the obligor in the underlying transaction, after 
considering any associated guarantees or collateral.
    (3) Treatment for direct credit substitutes related to syndications. 
In the case of a direct credit substitute that takes the form of a 
syndication where each party is obligated only for its pro rata share of 
the risk and there is no recourse to the originating entity, each bank's 
credit equivalent amount will be calculated by multiplying only its pro 
rata share of the assets supported by the direct credit substitute by a 
100% conversion factor. The resulting credit equivalent amount is then 
assigned to the risk-weight category appropriate to the obligor in the 
underlying transaction, after considering any associated guarantees or 
collateral.

[[Page 434]]

    (d) Externally rated positions: credit-equivalent amounts and risk 
weights--(1) Traded positions. With respect to a recourse obligation, 
direct credit substitute, residual interest (other than a credit-
enhancing interest-only strip) or mortgage- or asset-backed security 
that is a ``traded position'' and that has received an external rating 
on a long-term position that is one grade below investment grade or 
better or a short-term position that is investment grade, the bank may 
multiply the face amount of the position by the appropriate risk weight, 
determined in accordance with Table A or B of this appendix A, as 
appropriate. \14\ If a traded position receives more than one external 
rating, the lowest rating will apply.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \14\ Stripped mortgage-backed securities and similar instruments, 
such as interest-only strips that are not credit-enhancing and 
principal-only strips, must be assigned to the 100% risk category.

                                 Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Risk weight
     Long-term rating category            Examples         (In percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highest or second highest           AAA, AA.............              20
 investment grade.
Third highest investment grade....  A...................              50
Lowest investment grade...........  BBB.................             100
One category below investment       BB..................             200
 grade.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                 Table B
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Risk weight
    Short-term rating category            Examples         (In percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highest investment grade..........  A-1, P-1............              20
Second highest investment grade...  A-2, P-2............              50
Lowest investment grade...........  A-3, P-3............             100
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Non-traded positions. A recourse obligation, direct credit 
substitute, residual interest (but not a credit-enhancing interest-only 
strip) or mortgage- or asset-backed security extended in connection with 
a securitization that is not a ``traded position'' may be assigned a 
risk weight in accordance with section II.B.5(d)(1) of this appendix A 
if:
    (i) It has been externally rated by more than one NRSRO;
    (ii) It has received an external rating on a long-term position that 
is one category below investment grade or better or a short-term 
position that is investment grade by all NRSROs providing a rating;
    (iii) The ratings are publicly available; and
    (iv) The ratings are based on the same criteria used to rate traded 
positions. If the ratings are different, the lowest rating will 
determine the risk category to which the recourse obligation, direct 
credit substitute, residual interest, or mortgage- or asset-backed 
security will be assigned.
    (e) Senior positions not externally rated. For a recourse 
obligation, direct credit substitute, residual interest or mortgage- or 
asset-backed security that is not externally rated but is senior in all 
features to a traded position (including collateralization and 
maturity), a bank may apply a risk weight to the face amount of the 
senior position in accordance with section II.B.5(d)(1) of this appendix 
A, based upon the risk weight of the traded position, subject to any 
current or prospective supervisory guidance and the bank satisfying the 
FDIC that this treatment is appropriate. This section will apply only if 
the traded position provides substantial credit support for the entire 
life of the unrated position.
    (f) Residual interests--(1) Concentration limit on credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips. In addition to the capital requirement provided by 
section II.B.5(f)(2) of this appendix A, a bank must deduct from Tier 1 
capital the face amount of all credit-enhancing interest-only strips in 
excess of 25 percent of Tier 1 capital in accordance with 
Sec. 325.5(f)(3).
    (2) Credit-enhancing interest-only strip capital requirement. After 
applying the concentration limit to credit-enhancing interest-only 
strips in accordance with Sec. 325.5(f)(3), a bank must maintain risk-
based capital for a credit-enhancing interest-only strip, equal to the 
remaining face amount of the credit-enhancing interest-only strip (net 
of the remaining proportional amount of any existing associated deferred 
tax liability recorded on the balance sheet), even if the amount of 
risk-based capital required to be maintained exceeds the full risk-based 
capital requirement for the assets transferred. Transactions that, in 
substance, result in the retention of credit risk associated with a 
transferred credit-enhancing interest-only

[[Page 435]]

strip will be treated as if the credit-enhancing interest-only strip was 
retained by the bank and not transferred.
    (3) Other residual interests capital requirement. Except as 
otherwise provided in section II.B.5(d) or (e) of this appendix A, a 
bank must maintain risk-based capital for a residual interest (excluding 
a credit-enhancing interest-only strip) equal to the face amount of the 
residual interest (net of any existing associated deferred tax liability 
recorded on the balance sheet), even if the amount of risk-based capital 
required to be maintained exceeds the full risk-based capital 
requirement for the assets transferred. Transactions that, in substance, 
result in the retention of credit risk associated with a transferred 
residual interest will be treated as if the residual interest was 
retained by the bank and not transferred.
    (4) Residual interests and other recourse obligations. Where the 
aggregate capital requirement for residual interests (including credit-
enhancing interest-only strips) and recourse obligations arising from 
the same transfer of assets exceed the full risk-based capital 
requirement for assets transferred, a bank must maintain risk-based 
capital equal to the greater of the risk-based capital requirement for 
the residual interest as calculated under sections II.B.5(f)(2) through 
(3) of this appendix A or the full risk-based capital requirement for 
the assets transferred.
    (g) Positions that are not rated by an NRSRO. A bank's position 
(other than a residual interest) in a securitization or structured 
finance program that is not rated by an NRSRO may be risk-weighted based 
on the bank's determination of the credit rating of the position, as 
specified in Table C of this appendix A, multiplied by the face amount 
of the position. In order to qualify for this treatment, the bank's 
system for determining the credit rating of the position must meet one 
of the three alternative standards set out in section II.B.5(g)(1) 
through (3) of this appendix A.

                                 Table C
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Risk Weight
          Rating category                 Examples         (In percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Investment grade..................  BBB or better.......             100
One category below investment       BB..................             200
 grade.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) Internal risk rating used for asset-backed programs. A bank 
extends a direct credit substitute (but not a purchased credit-enhancing 
interest-only strip) to an asset-backed commercial paper program 
sponsored by the bank and the bank is able to demonstrate to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC, prior to relying upon its use, that the bank's 
internal credit risk rating system is adequate. Adequate internal credit 
risk rating systems usually contain the following criteria: \15\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \15\ The adequacy of a bank's use of its internal credit risk rating 
system must be demonstrated to the FDIC considering the criteria listed 
in this section and the size and complexity of the credit exposures 
assumed by the bank.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) The internal credit risk rating system is an integral part of 
the bank's risk management system that explicitly incorporates the full 
range of risks arising from a bank's participation in securitization 
activities;
    (ii) Internal credit ratings are linked to measurable outcomes, such 
as the probability that the position will experience any loss, the 
position's expected loss given default, and the degree of variance in 
losses given default on that position;
    (iii) The internal credit risk rating system must separately 
consider the risk associated with the underlying loans or borrowers, and 
the risk associated with the structure of a particular securitization 
transaction;
    (iv) The internal credit risk rating system identifies gradations of 
risk among ``pass'' assets and other risk positions;
    (v) The internal credit risk rating system must have clear, explicit 
criteria (including for subjective factors), that are used to classify 
assets into each internal risk grade;
    (vi) The bank must have independent credit risk management or loan 
review personnel assigning or reviewing the credit risk ratings;
    (vii) An internal audit procedure should periodically verify that 
internal risk ratings are assigned in accordance with the bank's 
established criteria;
    (viii) The bank must monitor the performance of the internal credit 
risk ratings assigned to nonrated, nontraded direct credit substitutes 
over time to determine the appropriateness of the initial credit risk 
rating assignment and adjust individual credit risk ratings, or the 
overall internal credit risk ratings system, as needed; and
    (ix) The internal credit risk rating system must make credit risk 
rating assumptions that are consistent with, or more conservative than, 
the credit risk rating assumptions and methodologies of NRSROs.
    (2) Program Ratings. A bank extends a direct credit substitute or 
retains a recourse obligation (but not a residual interest) in

[[Page 436]]

connection with a structured finance program and an NRSRO has reviewed 
the terms of the program and stated a rating for positions associated 
with the program. If the program has options for different combinations 
of assets, standards, internal credit enhancements and other relevant 
factors, and the NRSRO specifies ranges of rating categories to them, 
the bank may apply the rating category applicable to the option that 
corresponds to the bank's position. In order to rely on a program 
rating, the bank must demonstrate to the FDIC's satisfaction that the 
credit risk rating assigned to the program meets the same standards 
generally used by NRSROs for rating traded positions. The bank must also 
demonstrate to the FDIC's satisfaction that the criteria underlying the 
NRSRO's assignment of ratings for the program are satisfied for the 
particular position issued by the bank. If a bank participates in a 
securitization sponsored by another party, the FDIC may authorize the 
bank to use this approach based on a program rating obtained by the 
sponsor of the program.
    (3) Computer Program. A bank is using an acceptable credit 
assessment computer program that has been developed by an NRSRO to 
determine the rating of a direct credit substitute or recourse 
obligation (but not a residual interest) extended in connection with a 
structured finance program. In order to rely on the rating determined by 
the computer program, the bank must demonstrate to the FDIC's 
satisfaction that ratings under the program correspond credibly and 
reliably with the ratings of traded positions. The bank must also 
demonstrate to the FDIC's satisfaction the credibility of the program in 
financial markets, the reliability of the program in assessing credit 
risk, the applicability of the program to the bank's position, and the 
proper implementation of the program.
    (h) Limitations on risk-based capital requirements--(1) Low-level 
exposure rule. If the maximum exposure to loss retained or assumed by a 
bank in connection with a recourse obligation, a direct credit 
substitute, or a residual interest is less than the effective risk-based 
capital requirement for the credit-enhanced assets, the risk-based 
capital required under this appendix A is limited to the bank's maximum 
contractual exposure, less any recourse liability account established in 
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. This 
limitation does not apply when a bank provides credit enhancement beyond 
any contractual obligation to support assets it has sold.
    (2) Mortgage-related securities or participation certificates 
retained in a mortgage loan swap. If a bank holds a mortgage-related 
security or a participation certificate as a result of a mortgage loan 
swap with recourse, capital is required to support the recourse 
obligation plus the percentage of the mortgage-related security or 
participation certificate that is not covered by the recourse 
obligation. The total amount of capital required for the on-balance 
sheet asset and the recourse obligation, however, is limited to the 
capital requirement for the underlying loans, calculated as if the bank 
continued to hold these loans as an on-balance sheet asset.
    (3) Related on-balance sheet assets. If a recourse obligation or 
direct credit substitute also appears as a balance sheet asset, the 
asset is risk-weighted only under this section II.B.5 of this appendix 
A, except in the case of loan servicing assets and similar arrangements 
with embedded recourse obligations or direct credit substitutes. In that 
case, the on-balance sheet servicing assets and the related recourse 
obligations or direct credit substitutes must both be separately risk 
weighted and incorporated into the risk-based capital calculation.
    (i) Alternative Capital Calculation for Small Business Obligations--
(1) Definitions. For purposes of this section II.B. 5(i):
    (i) Qualified bank means a bank that:
    (A) Is well capitalized as defined in Sec. 325.103(b)(1) without 
applying the capital treatment described in this section II.B.5(i), or
    (B) Is adequately capitalized as defined in Sec. 325.103(b)(2) 
without applying the capital treatment described in this section 
II.B.5(i) and has received written permission by order of the FDIC to 
apply the capital treatment described in this section II.B.5(i).
    (iii) Small business means a business that meets the criteria for a 
small business concern established by the Small Business Administration 
in 13 CFR part 121 pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 632.
    (2) Capital and reserve requirements. Notwithstanding the risk-based 
capital treatment outlined in any other paragraph (other than paragraph 
(i) of this section II.B.5), with respect to a transfer with recourse of 
a small business loan or a lease to a small business of personal 
property that is a sale under generally accepted accounting principles, 
and for which the bank establishes and maintains a non-capital reserve 
under generally accepted accounting principles sufficient to meet the 
reasonable estimated liability of the bank under the recourse 
arrangement; a qualified bank may elect to include only the face amount 
of its recourse in its risk-weighted assets for purposes of calculating 
the bank's risk-based capital ratio.
    (3) Limit on aggregate amount of recourse. The total outstanding 
amount of recourse retained by a qualified bank with respect to 
transfers of small business loans and leases to small businesses of 
personal property and included in the risk-weighted assets of the bank 
as described in section II.B.5(i)(2) of this appendix A may not exceed 
15 percent of

[[Page 437]]

the bank's total risk-based capital, unless the FDIC specifies a greater 
amount by order.
    (4) Bank that ceases to be qualified or that exceeds aggregate 
limit. If a bank ceases to be a qualified bank or exceeds the aggregate 
limit in section II.B.5(i)(3) of this appendix A, the bank may continue 
to apply the capital treatment described in section II.B.5(i)(2) of this 
appendix A to transfers of small business loans and leases to small 
businesses of personal property that occurred when the bank was 
qualified and did not exceed the limit.
    (5) Prompt correction action not affected. (i) A bank shall compute 
its capital without regard to this section II.B.5(i) for purposes of 
prompt corrective action (12 U.S.C. 1831o) unless the bank is a well 
capitalized bank (without applying the capital treatment described in 
this section II.B.5(i)) and, after applying the capital treatment 
described in this section II.B.5(i), the bank would be well capitalized.
    (ii) A bank shall compute its capital without regard to this section 
II.B.5(i) for purposes of 12 U.S.C. 1831o(g) regardless of the bank's 
capital level.
    (6) Nonfinancial equity investments. (i) General. A bank must deduct 
from its Tier 1 capital the sum of the appropriate percentage (as 
determined below) of the adjusted carrying value of all nonfinancial 
equity investments held by the bank or by its direct or indirect 
subsidiaries. For purposes of this section II.B.(6), investments held by 
a bank include all investments held directly or indirectly by the bank 
or any of its subsidiaries.
    (ii) Scope of nonfinancial equity investments. A nonfinancial equity 
investment means any equity investment held by the bank in a 
nonfinancial company: through a small business investment company (SBIC) 
under section 302(b) of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 
U.S.C. 682(b));\16\ under the portfolio investment provisions of 
Regulation K issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System (12 CFR 211.8(c)(3)); or under section 24 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831a), other than an investment held in 
accordance with section 24(f) of that Act. \17\ A nonfinancial company 
is an entity that engages in any activity that has not been determined 
to be permissible for the bank to conduct directly, or to be financial 
in nature or incidental to financial activities under section 4(k) of 
the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \16\ An equity investment made under section 302(b) of the Small 
Business Investment Act of 1958 in a SBIC that is not consolidated with 
the bank is treated as a nonfinancial equity investment.
    \17\ The Board of Directors of the FDIC, acting directly, may, in 
exceptional cases and after a review of the proposed activity, permit a 
lower capital deduction for investments approved by the Board of 
Directors under section 24 of the FDI Act so long as the bank's 
investments under section 24 and SBIC investments represent, in the 
aggregate, less than 15 percent of the Tier 1 capital of the bank. The 
FDIC reserves the authority to impose higher capital charges on any 
investment where appropriate.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) Amount of deduction from core capital. (A) The bank must 
deduct from its Tier 1 capital the sum of the appropriate percentages, 
as set forth in the table following this paragraph, of the adjusted 
carrying value of all nonfinancial equity investments held by the bank. 
The amount of the percentage deduction increases as the aggregate amount 
of nonfinancial equity investments held by the bank increases as a 
percentage of the bank's Tier 1 capital.

              Deduction for Nonfinancial Equity Investments
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Aggregate adjusted carrying value
     of all nonfinancial equity
    investments held directly or     Deduction from Tier 1 Capital (as a
    indirectly by the bank (as a     percentage of the adjusted carrying
percentage of the Tier 1 capital of        value of the investment)
           the bank) \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 15 percent...............  8 percent.
15 percent to 24.99 percent........  12 percent.
25 percent and above...............  25 percent.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For purposes of calculating the adjusted carrying value of
  nonfinancial equity investments as a percentage of Tier 1 capital,
  Tier 1 capital is defined as the sum of core capital elements net of
  goodwill and net of all identifiable intangible assets other than
  mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased
  credit card relationships, but prior to the deduction for any
  disallowed mortgage servicing assets, any disallowed nonmortgage
  servicing assets, any disallowed purchased credit card relationships,
  any disallowed credit-enhancing interest-only strips (both purchased
  and retained), any disallowed deferred tax assets, and any
  nonfinancial equity investments.

    (B) These deductions are applied on a marginal basis to the portions 
of the adjusted carrying value of nonfinancial equity investments that 
fall within the specified ranges of the parent bank's Tier 1 capital. 
For example, if the adjusted carrying value of all nonfinancial equity 
investments held by a bank equals 20 percent of the Tier 1 capital of 
the bank, then the amount of the deduction would be 8 percent of the 
adjusted carrying

[[Page 438]]

value of all investments up to 15 percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital, 
and 12 percent of the adjusted carrying value of all investments in 
excess of 15 percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital.
    (C) The total adjusted carrying value of any nonfinancial equity 
investment that is subject to deduction under this paragraph is excluded 
from the bank's risk-weighted assets for purposes of computing the 
denominator of the bank's risk-based capital ratio and from total assets 
for purposes of calculating the denominator of the leverage ratio. \18\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \18\ For example, if 8 percent of the adjusted carrying value of a 
nonfinancial equity investment is deducted from Tier 1 capital, the 
entire adjusted carrying value of the investment will be excluded from 
both risk-weighted assets and total assets in calculating the respective 
denominators for the risk-based capital and leverage ratios.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (D) This Appendix establishes minimum risk-based capital ratios and 
banks are at all times expected to maintain capital commensurate with 
the level and nature of the risks to which they are exposed. The risk to 
a bank from nonfinancial equity investments increases with its 
concentration in such investments and strong capital levels above the 
minimum requirements are particularly important when a bank has a high 
degree of concentration in nonfinancial equity investments (e.g., in 
excess of 50 percent of Tier 1 capital). The FDIC intends to monitor 
banks and apply heightened supervision to equity investment activities 
as appropriate, including where the bank has a high degree of 
concentration in nonfinancial equity investments, to ensure that each 
bank maintains capital levels that are appropriate in light of its 
equity investment activities. The FDIC also reserves authority to impose 
a higher capital charge in any case where the circumstances, such as the 
level of risk of the particular investment or portfolio of investments, 
the risk management systems of the bank, or other information, indicate 
that a higher minimum capital requirement is appropriate.
    (iv) SBIC investments. (A) No deduction is required for nonfinancial 
equity investments that are held by a bank through one or more SBICs 
that are consolidated with the bank or in one or more SBICs that are not 
consolidated with the bank to the extent that all such investments, in 
the aggregate, do not exceed 15 percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital. 
Any nonfinancial equity investment that is held through an SBIC or in an 
SBIC and that is not required to be deducted from Tier 1 capital under 
this section II.B.(6)(iv) will be assigned a 100 percent risk-weight and 
included in the bank's consolidated risk-weighted assets. \19\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \19\ If a bank has an investment in a SBIC that is consolidated for 
accounting purposes but that is not wholly owned by the bank, the 
adjusted carrying value of the bank's nonfinancial equity investments 
through the SBIC is equal to the bank's proportionate share of the 
adjusted carrying value of the SBIC's investments in nonfinancial 
companies. The remainder of the SBIC's adjusted carrying value (i.e., 
the minority interest holders' proportionate share) is excluded from the 
risk-weighted assets of the bank. If a bank has an investment in a SBIC 
that is not consolidated for accounting purposes and has current 
information that identifies the percentage of the SBIC's assets that are 
equity investments in nonfinancial companies, the bank may reduce the 
adjusted carrying value of its investment in the SBIC proportionately to 
reflect the percentage of the adjusted carrying value of the SBIC's 
assets that are not equity investments in nonfinancial companies. If a 
bank reduces the adjusted carrying value of its investment in a non-
consolidated SBIC to reflect financial investments of the SBIC, the 
amount of the adjustment will be risk weighted at 100 percent and 
included in the bank's risk-weighted assets.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) To the extent the adjusted carrying value of all nonfinancial 
equity investments that a bank holds through one or more SBICs that are 
consolidated with the bank or in one or more SBICs that are not 
consolidated with the bank exceeds, in the aggregate, 15 percent of the 
bank's Tier 1 capital, the appropriate percentage of such amounts (as 
set forth in the table in section II.B.(6)(iii)(A)) must be deducted 
from the bank's common stockholders' equity in determining the bank's 
Tier 1 capital. In addition, the aggregate adjusted carrying value of 
all nonfinancial equity investments held by a bank through a 
consolidated SBIC and in a non-consolidated SBIC (including any 
investments for which no deduction is required) must be included in 
determining, for purposes of the table in section II.B.(6)(iii)(A), the 
total amount of nonfinancial equity investments held by the bank in 
relation to its Tier 1 capital.
    (v) Transition provisions. No deduction under this section II.B.(6) 
is required to be made with respect to the adjusted carrying value of 
any nonfinancial equity investment (or portion of such an investment) 
that was made by the bank prior to March 13, 2000, or that was made by 
the bank after such date pursuant to a binding written commit- ment \20\ 
entered into prior to March 13, 2000,

[[Page 439]]

provided that in either case the bank has continuously held the 
investment since the relevant investment date. \21\ For purposes of this 
section II.B.(6)(v) a nonfinancial equity investment made prior to March 
13, 2000, includes any shares or other interests received by the bank 
through a stock split or stock dividend on an investment made prior to 
March 13, 2000, provided the bank provides no consideration for the 
shares or interests received and the transaction does not materially 
increase the bank's proportional interest in the company. The exercise 
on or after March 13, 2000, of options or warrants acquired prior to 
March 13, 2000, is not considered to be an investment made prior to 
March 13, 2000, if the bank provides any consideration for the shares or 
interests received upon exercise of the options or warrants. Any 
nonfinancial equity investment (or portion thereof) that is not required 
to be deducted from Tier 1 capital under this section II.B.(6)(v) must 
be included in determining the total amount of nonfinancial equity 
investments held by the bank in relation to its Tier 1 capital for 
purposes of the table in section II.B.(6)(iii)(A). In addition, any 
nonfinancial equity investment (or portion thereof) that is not required 
to be deducted from Tier 1 capital under this section II.B.(6)(v) will 
be assigned a 100-percent risk weight and included in the bank's 
consolidated risk-weighted assets.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \20\ A ``binding written commitment'' means a legally binding 
written agreement that requires the bank to acquire shares or other 
equity of the company, or make a capital contribution to the company, 
under terms and conditions set forth in the agreement. Options, 
warrants, and other agreements that give a bank the right to acquire 
equity or make an investment, but do not require the bank to take such 
actions, are not considered a binding written commitment for purposes of 
this section II.B.(6)(v).
    \21\ For example, if a bank made an equity investment in 100 shares 
of a nonfinancial company prior to March 13, 2000, the adjusted carrying 
value of that investment would not be subject to a deduction under this 
section II.B.(6). However, if the bank made any additional equity 
investment in the company after March 13, 2000, such as by purchasing 
additional shares of the company (including through the exercise of 
options or warrants acquired before or after March 13, 2000) or by 
making a capital contribution to the company and such investment was not 
made pursuant to a binding written commitment entered into before March 
13, 2000, the adjusted carrying value of the additional investment would 
be subject to a deduction under this section II.B.(6). In addition, if 
the bank sold and repurchased, after March 13, 2000, 40 shares of the 
company, the adjusted carrying value of those 40 shares would be subject 
to a deduction under this section II.B.(6).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (vi) Adjusted carrying value. (A) For purposes of this section 
II.B.(6), the ``adjusted carrying value'' of investments is the 
aggregate value at which the investments are carried on the balance 
sheet of the bank reduced by any unrealized gains on those investments 
that are reflected in such carrying value but excluded from the bank's 
Tier 1 capital and associated deferred tax liabilities. For example, for 
equity investments held as available-for-sale (AFS), the adjusted 
carrying value of the investments would be the aggregate carrying value 
of those investments (as reflected on the consolidated balance sheet of 
the bank) less any unrealized gains on those investments that are 
included in other comprehensive income and not reflected in Tier 1 
capital, and associated deferred tax liabilities. \22\
    (B) As discussed above with respect to consolidated SBICs, some 
equity investments may be in companies that are consolidated for 
accounting purposes. For investments in a nonfinancial company that is 
consolidated for accounting purposes under generally accepted accounting 
principles, the bank's adjusted carrying value of the investment is 
determined under the equity method of accounting (net of any intangibles 
associated with the investment that are deducted from the bank's core 
capital in accordance with section I.A.(1) of this appendix A). Even 
though the assets of the nonfinancial company are consolidated for 
accounting purposes, these assets (as well as the credit equivalent 
amounts of the company's off-balance sheet items) should be excluded 
from the bank's risk-weighted assets for regulatory capital purposes.
    (vii) Equity investments. For purposes of this section II.B.(6), an 
equity investment means any equity instrument (including common stock, 
preferred stock, partnership interests, interests in limited liability 
companies, trust certificates and warrants and call options that give 
the holder the right to purchase an equity instrument), any equity 
feature of a debt instrument (such as a warrant or call option), and any 
debt instrument that is convertible into equity where the instrument or 
feature is held under one of the legal authorities listed in section 
II.B.(6)(ii) of this appendix A. An investment in any other instrument 
(including subordinated
--------------
  22 Unrealized gains on available-for-sale equity 
investments may be included in Tier 2 capital to the extent permitted 
under section I.A.(2)(f) of this appendix A. In addition, the net 
unrealized losses on available-for-sale equity investments are deducted 
from Tier 1 capital in accordance with section I.A.(1) of this appendix 
A.

[[Page 440]]

debt) may be treated as an equity investment if, in the judgment of the 
FDIC, the instrument is the functional equivalent of equity or exposes 
the bank to essentially the same risks as an equity instrument.
    6. Asset-backed commercial paper programs. a. An asset-backed 
commercial paper (ABCP) program means a program that primarily issues 
externally rated commercial paper backed by assets or other exposures 
held in a bankruptcy-remote, special purpose entity.
    b. If a bank has multiple overlapping exposures (such as a program-
wide credit enhancement and multiple pool-specific liquidity facilities) 
to an ABCP program that is not consolidated for risk-based capital 
purposes, the bank is not required to hold capital under duplicative 
risk-based capital requirements under this appendix against the 
overlapping position. Instead, the bank should apply to the overlapping 
position the applicable risk-based capital treatment that results in the 
highest capital charge.

         C. Risk Weights for Balance Sheet Assets (see Table II)

    The risk based capital framework contains five risk weight 
categories--0 percent, 20 percent, 50 percent, 100 percent, and 200 
percent. In general, if a particular item can be placed in more than one 
risk category, it is assigned to the category that has the lowest risk 
weight. An explanation of the components of each category follows:
    Category 1--Zero Percent Risk Weight. a. This category includes cash 
(domestic and foreign) owned and held in all offices of the bank or in 
transit; balances due from Federal Reserve Banks and central banks in 
other OECD countries; the portions of local currency claims on or 
unconditionally guaranteed by non-OECD central governments to the extent 
that the bank has liabilities booked in that currency; and gold bullion 
held in the bank's own vaults or in another bank's vaults on an 
allocated basis, to the extent it is offset by gold bullion liabilities. 
\23\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \23\ All other bullion holdings are to be assigned to the 100 
percent risk weight category.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    b. The zero percent risk category also includes direct claims \24\ 
(including securities, loans, and leases) on, and the portions of claims 
that are unconditionally guaranteedby, OECD central governments \25\ and 
U.S. Government agencies. \26\ Federal Reserve Bank stock also is 
included in this category.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \24\ For purposes of determining the appropriate risk weights for 
this risk-based capital framework, the terms claims and securities refer 
to loans or other debt obligations of the entity on whom the claim is 
held. Investments in the form of stock or equity holdings in commercial 
or financial firms are generally assigned to the 100 percent risk 
category.
    \25\ A central government is defined to include departments and 
ministries, including the central bank, of the central government. The 
U.S. central bank includes the 12 Federal Reserve Banks. The definition 
of central government does not include state, provincial or local 
governments or commercial enterprises owned by the central government. 
In addition, it does not include local government entities or commercial 
enterprises whose obligations are guaranteed by the central government. 
OECD central governments are defined as central governments of the OECD-
based group of countries. Non-OECD central governments are defined as 
central governments of countries that do not belong to the OECD-based 
group of countries.
    \26\ For risk-based capital purposes U.S. Government agency is 
defined as an instrumentality of the U.S. Government whose debt 
obligations are fully and explicitly guaranteed as to the timely payment 
of principal and interest by the full faith and credit of the U.S. 
Government. These agencies include the Government National Mortgage 
Association (GNMA), the Veterans Administration (VA), the Federal 
Housing Administration (FHA), the Farmers Home Administration (FHA), the 
Export-Import Bank (Exim Bank), the Overseas Private Investment 
Corporation (OPIC), the Commodity Credit Corporation (CCC), and the 
Small Business Administration (SBA). U.S. Government agencies generally 
do not directly issue securities to the public; however, a number of 
U.S. Government agencies, such as GNMA, guarantee securities that are 
publicly held.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    c. This category also includes claims on, and claims guaranteed by, 
qualifying securities firms incorporated in the United States or other 
members of the OECD-based group of countries that are collateralized by 
cash on deposit in the lending bank or by securities issued or 
guaranteed by the United States or OECD central governments (including 
U.S. government agencies), provided that a positive margin of collateral 
is required to be maintained on such a claim on a daily basis, taking 
into account any change in a bank's exposure to the obligor or 
counterparty under the claim in relation to the market value of the 
collateral held in support of the claim.
    Category 2--20 Percent Risk Weight. a. This category includes short-
term claims (including demand deposits) on, and portions of short-term 
claims that are guaranteed \27\ by,

[[Page 441]]

U.S. depository institutions \28\ and foreign banks;\29\ portions of 
claims collateralized by cash held in a segregated deposit account of 
the lending bank; cash items in process of collection, both foreign and 
domestic; and long-term claims on, and portions of long-term claims 
guaranteed by, U.S. depository institutions and OECD banks. \30\ This 
category also includes a claim \31\ on, or guaranteed by, qualifying 
securities firms incorporated in the United States or other member of 
the OECD-based group of countries \32\ provided that: the qualifying 
securities firm has a long-term issuer credit rating, or a rating on at 
least one issue of long-term debt, in one of the three highest 
investment grade rating categories from a nationally recognized 
statistical rating organization; or the claim is guaranteed by the 
firm's parent company and the parent company has such a rating. If 
ratings are available from more than one rating agency, the lowest 
rating will be used to determine whether the rating requirement has been 
met. This category also includes a collateralized claim on a qualifying 
securities firm in such a country, without regard to satisfaction of the 
rating standard, provided that the claim arises under a contract that:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \27\ Claims guaranteed by U.S. depository institutions and foreign 
banks include risk participations in both bankers acceptances and 
standby letters of credit, as well as participations in commitments, 
that are conveyed to other U.S. depository institutions or foreign 
banks.
    \28\ U.S. depository institutions are defined to include branches 
(foreign and domestic) of federally-insured banks and depository 
institutions chartered and headquartered in the 50 states of the United 
States, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and U.S. territories and 
possessions. The definition encompasses banks, mutual or stock savings 
banks, savings or building and loan associations, cooperative banks, 
credit unions, international banking facilities of domestic depository 
institutions, and U.S.-chartered depository institutions owned by 
foreigners. However, this definition excludes branches and agencies of 
foreign banks located in the U.S. and bank holding companies.
    \29\ Foreign banks are distinguished as either OECD banks or non-
OECD banks. OECD banks include banks and their branches (foreign and 
domestic) organized under the laws of countries (other than the U.S.) 
that belong to the OECD-based group of countries. Non-OECD banks include 
banks and their branches (foreign and domestic) organized under the laws 
of countries that do not belong to the OECD-based group of countries. 
For risk-based capital purposes, a bank is defined as an institution 
that engages in the business of banking; is recognized as a bank by the 
bank supervisory or monetary authorities of the country of its 
organization or principal banking operations; receives deposits to a 
substantial extent in the regular course of business; and has the power 
to accept demand deposits.
    \30\ Long-term claims on, or guaranteed by, non-OECD banks and all 
claims on bank holding companies are assigned to the 100 percent risk 
weight category, as are holdings of bank-issued securities that qualify 
as capital of the issuing banks for risk-based capital purposes.
    \31\ Claims on a qualifying securities firm that are instruments the 
firm, or its parent company, uses to satisfy its applicable capital 
requirements are not eligible for this risk weight.
    \32\ With regard to securities firms incorporated in the United 
States, qualifying securities firms are those securities firms that are 
broker-dealers registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission 
(SEC) and are in compliance with the SEC's net capital rule, 17 CFR 
240.15c3-1. With regard to securities firms incorporated in any other 
country in the OECD-based group of countries, qualifying securities 
firms are those securities firms that a bank is able to demonstrate are 
subject to consolidated supervision and regulation (covering their 
direct and indirect subsidiaries, but not necessarily their parent 
organizations) comparable to that imposed on banks in OECD countries. 
Such regulation must include risk-based capital requirements comparable 
to those applied to banks under the Accord on International Convergence 
of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards (1988, as amended in 1998) 
(Basel Accord). Claims on a qualifying securities firm that are 
instruments the firm, or its parent company, uses to satisfy its 
applicable capital requirements are not eligible for this risk weight 
and are generally assigned to at least a 100 percent risk weight. In 
addition, certain claims on qualifying securities firms are eligible for 
a zero percent risk weight if the claims are collateralized by cash on 
deposit in the lending bank or by securities issued or guaranteed by the 
United States or OECD central governments (including U.S. government 
agencies), provided that a positive margin of collateral is required to 
be maintained on such a claim on a daily basis, taking into account any 
change in a bank's exposure to the obligor or counterparty under the 
claim in relation to the market value of the collateral held in support 
of the claim.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) Is a reverse repurchase/repurchase agreement or securities 
lending/borrowing transaction executed using standard industry 
documentation;
    (2) Is collateralized by debt or equity securities that are liquid 
and readily marketable;
    (3) Is marked-to-market daily;

[[Page 442]]

    (4) Is subject to a daily margin maintenance requirement under the 
standardized documentation; and
    (5) Can be liquidated, terminated, or accelerated immediately in 
bankruptcy or similar proceeding, and the security or collateral 
agreement will not be stayed or avoided, under applicable law of the 
relevant jurisdiction. \33\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \33\ For example, a claim is exempt from the automatic stay in 
bankruptcy in the United States if it arises under a securities contract 
or a repurchase agreement subject to section 555 or 559 of the 
Bankruptcy Code, respectively (11 U.S.C. 555 or 559), a qualified 
financial contract under section 11(e)(8) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)), or a netting contract between 
financial institutions under sections 401-407 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 U.S.C. 4401-4407), or 
the Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR part 231).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    b. This category also includes claims on, or portions of claims 
guaranteed by, U.S. Government-sponsored agencies;\34\ and portions of 
claims (including repurchase agreements) collateralized by securities 
issued or guaranteed by OECD central governments, U.S. Government 
agencies, or U.S. Government-sponsored agencies. Also included in the 20 
percent risk category are portions of claims that are conditionally 
guaranteed by OECD central governments and U.S. Government agencies, 
\35\ as well as portions of local currency claims that are conditionally 
guaranteed by non-OECD central governments to the extent that the bank 
has liabilities booked in that currency.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \34\ For risk-based capital purposes, U.S. Government-sponsored 
agencies are defined as agencies originally established or chartered by 
the U.S. Government to serve public purposes specified by the U.S. 
Congress but whose debt obligations are not explicitly guaranteed by the 
full faith and credit of the U.S. Government. These agencies include the 
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (FHLMC), the Federal National 
Mortgage Association (FNMA), the Farm Credit System, the Federal Home 
Loan Bank System, and the Student Loan Marketing Association (SLMA). For 
risk-based capital purposes, claims on U.S. Government-sponsored 
agencies also include capital stock in a Federal Home Loan Bank that is 
held as a condition of membership in that Bank.
    \35\ For risk-based capital purposes, a conditional guarantee is 
deemed to exist if the validity of the guarantee by the OECD central 
government or the U.S. Government agency is dependent upon some 
affirmative action (e.g., servicing requirements on the part of the 
beneficiary of the guarantee). Portions of claims that are 
unconditionally guaranteed by OECD central governments or U.S. 
Government agencies are assigned to the zero percent risk category.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    c. General obligation claims on, or portions of claims guaranteed 
by, the full faith and credit of states or other political subdivisions 
of the United States or other countries of the OECD-based group are also 
assigned to this 20 percent risk category. \36\ In addition, this 
category includes claims on the International Bank for Reconstruction 
and Development (World Bank), International Finance Corporation the 
Inter-American Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the African 
Development Bank, the European Investment Bank, the European Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the Nordic Investment Bank, and other 
multilateral lending institutions or regional development institutions 
in which the U.S. Government is a shareholder or contributing member, as 
well as portions of claims guaranteed by such organizations or 
collateralized by their securities.
    d. This category also includes recourse obligations, direct credit 
substitutes, residual interests (other than a credit-enhancing interest-
only strip) and asset- or mortgage-backed securities rated in the 
highest or second highest investment grade category, e.g., AAA, AA, in 
the case of long-term ratings, or the highest rating category, e.g., A-
1, P-1, in the case of short-term ratings.
    a. Category 3--50 Percent Risk Weight. This category includes loans 
fully secured by first liens \37\ on one-to-four family residential 
properties, provided that such loans have been approved in accordance 
with prudent underwriting standards, including standards relating to the 
loan amount as a percent of the appraised value of the property, \38\ 
and provided that the loans are not past due 90 days or more or carried 
in nonaccrual status. \39\ The types of loans that qualify as loans
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \36\ Claims on, or guaranteed by, states or other political 
subdivisions of countries that do not belong to the OECD-based group of 
countries are to be placed in the 100 percent risk weight category.
    \37\ If a bank holds the first and junior lien(s) on a residential 
property and no other party holds an intervening lien, the transactions 
are treated as a single loan secured by a first lien for purposes of 
determining the loan-to-value ratio and assigning a risk weight.
    \38\ For risk-based capital purposes, the loan-to-value ratio 
generally is based upon the most current appraised value of the 
property. The appraisal should be performed in a manner consistent with 
the Federal banking agencies' real estate appraisal guidelines and with 
the bank's own appraisal guidelines.
    \39\ This category would also include a first-lien residential 
mortgage loan on a one-to-four family property that was appropriately 
assigned a 50 percent risk weight pursuant to this section immediately 
prior to modification (on a permanent or trial basis) under the Home 
Affordable Mortgage Program established by the U.S. Department of 
Treasury, so long as the loan, as modified, is not 90 days or more past 
due or in nonaccrual status and meets other applicable criteria for a 50 
percent risk weight. In addition, real estate loans that do not meet all 
of the specified criteria or that are made for the purpose of property 
development are placed in the 100 percent risk category.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 443]]

secured by one-to-four family residential properties are listed in the 
instructions for preparation of the Consolidated Reports of Condition 
and Income. These properties may be either owner-occupied or rented. In 
addition, for risk-based capital purposes, loans secured by one-to-four 
family residential properties include loans to builders with substantial 
project equity for the construction of one-to-four family residences 
that have been presold under firm contracts to purchasers who have 
obtained firm commitments for permanent qualifying mortgage loans and 
have made substantial earnest money deposits. Such loans to builders 
will be considered prudently underwritten only if the bank has obtained 
sufficient documentation that the buyer of the home intends to purchase 
the home (i.e., has a legally binding written sales contract) and has 
the ability to obtain a mortgage loan sufficient to purchase the home 
(i.e., has a firm written commitment for permanent financing of the home 
upon completion), provided the following criteria are met:
    By order of the Board of Directors.
    (1) The purchaser is an individual(s) who intends to occupy the 
residence and is not a partnership, joint venture, trust, corporation, 
or any other entity (including an entity acting as a sole 
proprietorship) that is purchasing one or more of the homes for 
speculative purposes;
    (2) The builder must incur at least the first ten percent of the 
direct costs (i.e., actual costs of the land, labor, and material) 
before any drawdown is made under the construction loan and the 
construction loan may not exceed 80 percent of the sales price of the 
presold home;
    (3) The purchaser has made a substantial ``earnest money deposit'' 
of no less than three percent of the sales price of the home and the 
deposit must be subject to forfeiture if the purchaser terminates the 
sales contract; and
    (4) The earnest money deposit must be held in escrow by the bank 
financing the builder or by an independent party in a fiduciary capacity 
and the escrow agreement must provide that, in the event of default 
arising from the cancellation of the sales contract by the buyer, the 
escrow funds must first be used to defray any costs incurred by the 
bank.
    b. This category also includes loans fully secured by first liens on 
multifamily residential properties, \40\ provided that:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \40\ The types of loans that qualify as loans secured by multifamily 
residential properties are listed in the instructions for preparation of 
the Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income. In addition, from the 
standpoint of the selling bank, when a multifamily residential property 
loan is sold subject to a pro rata loss sharing arrangement which 
provides for the purchaser of the loan to share in any loss incurred on 
the loan on a pro rata basis with the selling bank, that portion of the 
loan is not subject to the risk-based capital standards. In connection 
with sales of multifamily residential property loans in which the 
purchaser of the loan shares in any loss incurred on the loan with the 
selling bank on other than a pro rata basis, the selling bank must treat 
these other loss sharing arrangements in accordance with section II.B.5 
of this appendix A.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) The loan amount does not exceed 80 percent of the value \41\ of 
the property securing the loan as determined by the most current 
appraisal or evaluation, whichever may be appropriate (75 percent if the 
interest rate on the loan changes over the term of the loan);
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \41\ At the origination of a loan to purchase an existing property, 
the term ``value'' means the lesser of the actual acquisition cost or 
the estimate of value set forth in an appraisal or evaluation, whichever 
may be appropriate.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For the property's most recent fiscal year, the ratio of annual 
net operating income generated by the property (before payment of any 
debt service on the loan) to annual debt service on the loan is not less 
than 120 percent (115 percent if the interest rate on the loan changes 
over the term of the loan) or, in the case of a property owned by a 
cooperative housing corporation or nonprofit organization, the property 
generates sufficient cash flow to provide comparable protection to the 
bank;
    (3) Amortization of principal and interest on the loan occurs over a 
period of not more than 30 years;
    (4) The minimum original maturity for repayment of principal on the 
loan is not less than seven years;
    (5) All principal and interest payments have been made on a timely 
basis in accordance with the terms of the loan for at least one year 
before the loan is placed in this category; \42\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \42\ In the case where the existing owner of a multifamily 
residential property refinances a loan on that property, all principal 
and interest payments on the loan being refinanced must have been made 
on a timely basis in accordance with the terms of that loan for at least 
the preceding year. The new loan must meet all of the other eligibility 
criteria in order to qualify for a 50 percent risk weight.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 444]]

    (6) The loan is not 90 days or more past due or carried in 
nonaccrual status; and
    (7) The loan has been made in accordance with prudent underwriting 
standards.
    c. This category also includes revenue (non-general obligation) 
bonds or similar obligations, including loans and leases, that are 
obligations of states or political subdivisions of the United States or 
other OECD countries, but for which the government entity is committed 
to repay the debt with revenues from the specific projects financed, 
rather than from general tax funds (e.g., municipal revenue bonds). In 
addition, the credit equivalent amount of derivative contracts that do 
not qualify for a lower risk weight are assigned to the 50 percent risk 
category.
    d. This category also includes recourse obligations, direct credit 
substitutes, residual interests (other than a credit-enhancing interest-
only strip) and asset- or mortgage-backed securities rated in the third 
highest investment grade category, e.g., A, in the case of long-term 
ratings, or the second highest rating category, e.g., A-2, P-2, in the 
case of short-term ratings.
    Category 4--100 Percent Risk Weight. (a) All assets not included in 
the categories above in section II.C of this appendix A, except the 
assets specifically included in the 200 percent category below in 
section II.C of this appendix A and assets that are otherwise risk 
weighted in accordance with section II.B.5 of this appendix A, are 
assigned to this category, which comprises standard risk assets. The 
bulk of the assets typically found in a loan portfolio would be assigned 
to the 100 percent category.
    (b) This category includes:
    (1) Long-term claims on, and the portions of long-term claims that 
are guaranteed by, non-OECD banks, and all claims on non-OECD central 
governments that entail some degree of transfer risk; \43\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \43\ Such assets include all non-local currency claims on, and the 
portions of claims that are guaranteed by, non-OECD central governments 
and those portions of local currency claims on, or guaranteed by, non-
OECD central governments that exceed the local currency liabilities held 
by the bank.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) All claims on foreign and domestic private-sector obligors not 
included in the categories above in section II.C of this appendix A 
(including loans to nondepository financial institutions and bank 
holding companies);
    (3) Claims on commercial firms owned by the public sector;
    (4) Customer liabilities to the bank on acceptances outstanding 
involving standard risk claims; \44\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \44\ Customer liabilities on acceptances outstanding involving 
nonstandard risk claims, such as claims on U.S. depository institutions, 
are assigned to the risk category appropriate to the identity of the 
obligor or, if relevant, the nature of the collateral or guarantees 
backing the claims. Portions of acceptances conveyed as risk 
participations to U.S. depository institutions or foreign banks are 
assigned to the 20 percent risk category appropriate to short-term 
claims guaranteed by U.S. depository institutions and foreign banks.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (5) Investments in fixed assets, premises, and other real estate 
owned;
    (6) Common and preferred stock of corporations, including stock 
acquired for debts previously contracted;
    (7) Commercial and consumer loans (except those assigned to lower 
risk categories due to recognized guarantees or collateral and loans 
secured by residential property that qualify for a lower risk weight);
    (8) Recourse obligations, direct credit substitutes, residual 
interests (other than a credit-enhancing interest-only strip) and asset-
or mortgage-backed securities rated in the lowest investment grade 
category, e.g., BBB, as well as certain positions (but not residual 
interests) which the bank rates pursuant to section section II.B.5(g) of 
this appendix A.;
    (9) Industrial-development bonds and similar obligations issued 
under the auspices of states or political subdivisions of the OECD-based 
group of countries for the benefit of a private party or enterprise 
where that party or enterprise, not the government entity, is obligated 
to pay the principal and interest;
    (10) All obligations of states or political subdivisions of 
countries that do not belong to the OECD-based group; and
    (11) Stripped mortgage-backed securities and similar instruments, 
such as interest-only strips that are not credit-enhancing and 
principal-only strips.
    (12) Claims representing capital of a qualifying securities firm.
    (c) The following assets also are assigned a risk weight of 100 
percent if they have not already been deducted from capital: investments 
in unconsolidated companies, joint ventures, or associated companies; 
instruments that qualify as capital issued by other banks; deferred tax 
assets; and mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing assets, and 
purchased credit card relationships.
    (d) Subject to the requirements below, a bank may assign an asset 
not included in the categories above to the risk weight category 
applicable under the capital guidelines for

[[Page 445]]

bank holding companies (12 CFR part 225, appendix A), provided that all 
of the following conditions apply:
    (1) The bank is not authorized to hold the asset under applicable 
law other than debt previously contracted or similar authority; and
    (2) The risks associated with the asset are substantially similar to 
the risks of assets that are otherwise assigned to a risk weight 
category less than 100 percent under this appendix.
    Category 5--200 Percent Risk Weight. This category includes:
    (a) Externally rated recourse obligations, direct credit 
substitutes, residual interests (other than a credit-enhancing interest-
only strip), and asset- and mortgage-backed securities that are rated 
one category below the lowest investment grade category, e.g., BB, to 
the extent permitted in section II.B.5(d) of this appendix A; and
    (b) A position (but not a residual interest) in a securitization or 
structured finance program that is not rated by an NRSRO for which the 
bank determines that the credit risk is equivalent to one category below 
investment grade, e.g., BB, to the extent permitted in section 
II.B.5.(g) of this appendix A.

    D. Conversion Factors for Off-Balance Sheet Items (see Table III)

    The face amount of an off-balance sheet item is generally 
incorporated into the risk-weighted assets in two steps. The face amount 
is first multiplied by a credit conversion factor, except as otherwise 
specified in section II.B.5 of this appendix A for direct credit 
substitutes and recourse obligations. The resultant credit equivalent 
amount is assigned to the appropriate risk category according to the 
obligor or, if relevant, the guarantor, the nature of any collateral, or 
external credit ratings. \46\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \46\ The sufficiency of collateral and guarantees for off-balance-
sheet items is determined by the market value of the collateral or the 
amount of the guarantee in relation to the face amount of the item, 
except for derivative contracts, for which this determination is 
generally made in relation to the credit equivalent amount. Collateral 
and guarantees are subject to the same provisions noted under section 
II.B of this appendix A.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    1. Items With a 100 Percent Conversion Factor. (a) Except as 
otherwise provided in section II.B.5. of this appendix A, the full 
amount of an asset or transaction supported, in whole or in part, by a 
direct credit substitute or a recourse obligation. Direct credit 
substitutes and recourse obligations are defined in section II.B.5. of 
this appendix A.
    (b) Sale and repurchase agreements, if not already included on the 
balance sheet, and forward agreements. Forward agreements are legally 
binding contractual obligations to purchase assets with drawdown which 
is certain at a specified future date. Such obligations include forward 
purchases, forward forward deposits placed, \47\ and partly-paid shares 
and securities; they do not include commitments to make residential 
mortgage loans or forward foreign exchange contracts.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \47\ Forward forward deposits accepted are treated as interest rate 
contracts.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Securities lent by a bank are treated in one of two ways, 
depending upon whether the lender is exposed to risk of loss. If a bank, 
as agent for a customer, lends the customer's securities and does not 
indemnify the customer against loss, then the securities transaction is 
excluded from the risk-based capital calculation. On the other hand, if 
a bank lends its own securities or, acting as agent for a customer, 
lends the customer's securities and indemnifies the customer against 
loss, the transaction is converted at 100 percent and assigned to the 
risk weight category appropriate to the obligor or, if applicable, to 
the collateral delivered to the lending bank or the independent 
custodian acting on the lending bank's behalf.
    2. Items With a 50 Percent Conversion Factor. a. Transaction-related 
contingencies are to be converted at 50 percent. Such contingencies 
include bid bonds, performance bonds, warranties, and performance 
standby letters of credit related to particular transactions, as well as 
acquisitions of risk participations in performance standby letters of 
credits. Performance standby letters of credit (performance bonds) are 
irrevocable obligations of the bank to pay a third-party beneficiary 
when a customer (account party) fails to perform on some contractual 
nonfinancial obligation. Thus, performance standby letters of credit 
represent obligations backing the performance of nonfinancial or 
commercial contracts or undertakings. To the extent permitted by law or 
regulation, performance standby letters of credit include arrangements 
backing, among other things, subcontractors' and suppliers' performance, 
labor and materials contracts, and construction bids.
    b. The unused portion of commitments with an original maturity 
exceeding one year, including underwriting commitments and commercial 
and consumer credit commitments, also are to be converted at 50 percent. 
Original maturity is defined as the length of time between the date the 
commitment is issued and the earliest date on which: (1) The bank can at 
its option, unconditionally (without

[[Page 446]]

cause) cancel the commitment, \48\ and (2) the bank is scheduled to (and 
as a normal practice actually does) review the facility to determine 
whether or not it should be extended and, on at least an annual basis, 
continues to regularly review the facility. Facilities that are 
unconditionally cancelable (without cause) at any time by the bank are 
not deemed to be commitments, provided the bank makes a separate credit 
decision before each drawing under the facility.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \48\ In the case of home equity or mortgage lines of credit secured 
by liens on one-to-four family residential properties, a bank is deemed 
able to unconditionally cancel the commitment if, at its option, it can 
prohibit additional extensions of credit, reduce the credit line, and 
terminate the commitment to the full extent permitted by relevant 
Federal law.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    c.i. Commitments are defined as any legally binding arrangements 
that obligate a bank to extend credit in the form of loans or lease 
financing receivables; to purchase loans, securities, or other assets; 
or to participate in loans and leases. Commitments also include 
overdraft facilities, revolving credit, home equity and mortgage lines 
of credit, eligible ABCP liquidity facilities, and similar transactions. 
Normally, commitments involve a written contract or agreement and a 
commitment fee, or some other form of consideration. Commitments are 
included in weighted-risk assets regardless of whether they contain 
material adverse change clauses or other provisions that are intended to 
relieve the issuer of its funding obligation under certain conditions. 
In the case of commitments structured as syndications, where the bank is 
obligated solely for its pro rata share, only the bank's proportional 
share of the syndicated commitment is taken into account in calculating 
the risk-based capital ratio.
    ii. Banks that are subject to the market risk rules in appendix C to 
part 325 are required to convert the notional amount of eligible ABCP 
liquidity facilities, in form or in substance, with an original maturity 
of over one year that are carried in the trading account at 50 percent 
to determine the appropriate credit equivalent amount even though those 
facilities are structured or characterized as derivatives or other 
trading book assets. Liquidity facilities that support ABCP, in form or 
in substance, (including those positions to which the market risk rules 
may not be applied as set forth in section 2(a) of appendix C of this 
part) that are not eligible ABCP liquidity facilities are to be 
considered recourse obligations or direct credit substitutes, and 
assessed the appropriate risk-based capital treatment in accordance with 
section II.B.5. of this appendix.
    d. In the case of commitments structured as syndications where the 
bank is obligated only for its pro rata share, the risk-based capital 
framework includes only the bank's proportional share of such 
commitments. Thus, after a commitment has been converted at 50 percent, 
portions of commitments that have been conveyed to other U.S. depository 
institutions or OECD banks, but for which the originating bank retains 
the full obligation to the borrower if the participating bank fails to 
pay when the commitment is drawn upon, will be assigned to the 20 
percent risk category. The acquisition of such a participation in a 
commitment would be converted at 50 percent and the credit equivalent 
amount would be assigned to the risk category that is appropriate for 
the account party obligor or, if relevant, to the nature of the 
collateral or guarantees.
    e. Revolving underwriting facilities (RUFs), note issuance 
facilities (NIFs), and other similar arrangements also are converted at 
50 percent. These are facilities under which a borrower can issue on a 
revolving basis short-term notes in its own name, but for which the 
underwriting banks have a legally binding commitment either to purchase 
any notes the borrower is unable to sell by the rollover date or to 
advance funds to the borrower.
    3. Items With a 20 Percent Conversion Factor. Short-term, self-
liquidating, trade-related contingencies which arise from the movement 
of goods are converted at 20 percent. Such contingencies include 
commercial letters of credit and other documentary letters of credit 
collateralized by the underlying shipments.
    4. Items With a 10 Percent Conversion Factor. a. Unused portions of 
eligible ABCP liquidity facilities with an original maturity of one year 
or less that provide liquidity support to ABCP also are converted at 10 
percent.
    b. Banks that are subject to the market risk rules in appendix C to 
part 325 are required to convert the notional amount of eligible ABCP 
liquidity facilities, in form or in substance, with an original maturity 
of one year or less that are carried in the trading account at 10 
percent to determine the appropriate credit equivalent amount even 
though those facilities are structured or characterized as derivatives 
or other trading book assets. Liquidity facilities that provide 
liquidity support to ABCP, in form or in substance, (including those 
positions to which the market risk rules may not be applied as set forth 
in section 2(a) of appendix C of this part) that are not eligible ABCP 
liquidity facilities are to be considered recourse obligations or direct 
credit substitutes and assessed the appropriate risk-based capital 
requirement in accordance with section II.B.5. of this appendix.

[[Page 447]]

    5. Items With a Zero Percent Conversion Factor. These include unused 
portions of commitments, with the exception of eligible ABCP liquidity 
facilities, with an original maturity of one year or less, or which are 
unconditionally cancelable at any time, provided a separate credit 
decision is made before each drawing under the facility. Unused portions 
of retail credit card lines and related plans are deemed to be short-
term commitments if the bank, in accordance with applicable law, has the 
unconditional option to cancel the credit line at any time.
    E. Derivative Contracts (Interest Rate, Exchange Rate, Commodity 
(including precious metal) and Equity Derivative Contracts)
    1. Credit equivalent amounts are computed for each of the following 
off-balance-sheet derivative contracts:
    (a) Interest Rate Contracts
    (i) Single currency interest rate swaps.
    (ii) Basis swaps.
    (iii) Forward rate agreements.
    (iv) Interest rate options purchased (including caps, collars, and 
floors purchased).
    (v) Any other instrument linked to interest rates that gives rise to 
similar credit risks (including when-issued securities and forward 
deposits accepted).
    (b) Exchange Rate Contracts
    (i) Cross-currency interest rate swaps.
    (ii) Forward foreign exchange contracts.
    (iii) Currency options purchased.
    (iv) Any other instrument linked to exchange rates that gives rise 
to similar credit risks.
    (c) Commodity (including precious metal) or Equity Derivative 
Contracts
    (i) Commodity- or equity-linked swaps.
    (ii) Commodity- or equity-linked options purchased.
    (iii) Forward commodity- or equity-linked contracts.
    (iv) Any other instrument linked to commodities or equities that 
gives rise to similar credit risks.
    2. Exchange rate contracts with an original maturity of 14 calendar 
days or less and derivative contracts traded on exchanges that require 
daily receipt and payment of cash variation margin may be excluded from 
the risk-based ratio calculation. Gold contracts are accorded the same 
treatment as exchange rate contracts except gold contracts with an 
original maturity of 14 calendar days or less are included in the risk-
based calculation. Over-the-counter options purchased are included and 
treated in the same way as other derivative contracts.
    3. Credit Equivalent Amounts for Derivative Contracts. (a) The 
credit equivalent amount of a derivative contract that is not subject to 
a qualifying bilateral netting contract in accordance with section 
II.E.5. of this appendix A is equal to the sum of:
    (i) The current exposure (which is equal to the mark-to-market 
value, \49\ if positive, and is sometimes referred to as the replacement 
cost) of the contract; and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \49\ Mark-to-market values are measured in dollars, regardless of 
the currency or currencies specified in the contract and should reflect 
changes in both underlying rates, prices and indices, and counterparty 
credit quality.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) An estimate of the potential future credit exposure.
    (b) The current exposure is determined by the mark-to-market value 
of the contract. If the mark-to-market value is positive, then the 
current exposure is equal to that mark-to-market value. If the mark-to-
market value is zero or negative, then the current exposure is zero.
    (c) The potential future credit exposure of a contract, including a 
contract with a negative mark-to-market value, is estimated by 
multiplying the notional principal amount of the contract by a credit 
conversion factor. Banks should, subject to examiner review, use the 
effective rather than the apparent or stated notional amount in this 
calculation. The credit conversion factors are:

                                            Conversion Factor Matrix
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Exchange                  Precious
               Remaining maturity                  Interest     rate and      Equity      metals,       Other
                                                     rate         gold                  except gold  commodities
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
One year or less...............................         0.0%         1.0%         6.0%         7.0%        10.0%
More than one year to five years...............         0.5%         5.0%         8.0%         7.0%        12.0%
More than five years...........................         1.5%         7.5%        10.0%         8.0%        15.0%
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) For contracts that are structured to settle outstanding exposure 
on specified dates and where the terms are reset such that the market 
value of the contract is zero

[[Page 448]]

on these specified dates, the remaining maturity is equal to the time 
until the next reset date. For interest rate contracts with remaining 
maturities of more than one year and that meet these criteria, the 
conversion factor is subject to a minimum value of 0.5 percent.
    (e) For contracts with multiple exchanges of principal, the 
conversion factors are to be multiplied by the number of remaining 
payments in the contract. Derivative contracts not explicitly covered by 
any of the columns of the conversion factor matrix are to be treated as 
``other commodities.''
    (f) No potential future exposure is calculated for single currency 
interest rate swaps in which payments are made based upon two floating 
rate indices (so called floating/floating or basis swaps); the credit 
exposure on these contracts is evaluated solely on the basis of their 
mark-to-market values.
    4. Risk Weights and Avoidance of Double Counting. (a) Once the 
credit equivalent amount for a derivative contract, or a group of 
derivative contracts subject to a qualifying bilateral netting 
agreement, has been determined, that amount is assigned to the risk 
category appropriate to the counterparty, or, if relevant, the guarantor 
or the nature of any collateral. However, the maximum weight that will 
be applied to the credit equivalent amount of such contracts is 50 
percent.
    (b) In certain cases, credit exposures arising from the derivative 
contracts covered by these guidelines may already be reflected, in part, 
on the balance sheet. To avoid double counting such exposures in the 
assessment of capital adequacy and, perhaps, assigning inappropriate 
risk weights, counterparty credit exposures arising from the types of 
instruments covered by these guidelines may need to be excluded from 
balance sheet assets in calculating a bank's risk-based capital ratio.
    (c) The FDIC notes that the conversion factors set forth in section 
II.E.3. of appendix A, which are based on observed volatilities of the 
particular types of instruments, are subject to review and modification 
in light of changing volatilities or market conditions.
    (d) Examples of the calculation of credit equivalent amounts for 
these types of contracts are contained in Table IV of this appendix A.
    5. Netting. (a) For purposes of this appendix A, netting refers to 
the offsetting of positive and negative mark-to-market values when 
determining a current exposure to be used in the calculation of a credit 
equivalent amount. Any legally enforceable form of bilateral netting 
(that is, netting with a single counterparty) of derivative contracts is 
recognized for purposes of calculating the credit equivalent amount 
provided that:
    (i) The netting is accomplished under a written netting contract 
that creates a single legal obligation, covering all included individual 
contracts, with the effect that the bank would have a claim or 
obligation to receive or pay, respectively, only the net amount of the 
sum of the positive and negative mark-to-market values on included 
individual contracts in the event that a counterparty, or a counterparty 
to whom the contract has been validly assigned, fails to perform due to 
default, bankruptcy, liquidation, or similar circumstances;
    (ii) The bank obtains a written and reasoned legal opinion(s) 
representing that in the event of a legal challenge, including one 
resulting from default, insolvency, bankruptcy or similar circumstances, 
the relevant court and administrative authorities would find the bank's 
exposure to be such a net amount under:
    (1) The law of the jurisdiction in which the counterparty is 
chartered or the equivalent location in the case of noncorporate 
entities and, if a branch of the counterparty is involved, then also 
under the law of the jurisdiction in which the branch is located;
    (2) The law that governs the individual contracts covered by the 
netting contract; and
    (3) The law that governs the netting contract.
    (iii) The bank establishes and maintains procedures to ensure that 
the legal characteristics of netting contracts are kept under review in 
the light of possible changes in relevant law; and
    (iv) The bank maintains in its file documentation adequate to 
support the netting of derivative contracts, including a copy of the 
bilateral netting contract and necessary legal opinions.
    (b) A contract containing a walkaway clause is not eligible for 
netting for purposes of calculating the credit equivalent amount. \50\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \50\ For purposes of this section, a walkaway clause means a 
provision in a netting contract that permits a non-defaulting 
counterparty to make lower payments than it would make otherwise under 
the contract, or no payment at all, to a defaulter or to the estate of a 
defaulter, even if a defaulter or the estate of a defaulter is a net 
creditor under the contract.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) By netting individual contracts for the purpose of calculating 
its credit equivalent amount, a bank represents that it has met the 
requirements of this appendix A and all the appropriate documents are in 
the bank's files and available for inspection by the FDIC. Upon 
determination by the FDIC that a bank's files are inadequate or that a 
netting contract may not be legally enforceable under any one of the 
bodies of law described in paragraphs (ii)(1) through (3) of section

[[Page 449]]

II.E.5.(a) of this appendix A, underlying individual contracts may be 
treated as though they were not subject to the netting contract.
    (d) The credit equivalent amount of derivative contracts that are 
subject to a qualifying bilateral netting contract is calculated by 
adding:
    (i) The net current exposure of the netting contract; and
    (ii) The sum of the estimates of potential future exposure for all 
individual contracts subject to the netting contract, adjusted to take 
into account the effects of the netting contract. \51\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \51\ For purposes of calculating potential future credit exposure 
for foreign exchange contracts and other similar contracts in which 
notional principal is equivalent to cash flows, total notional principal 
is defined as the net receipts to each party falling due on each value 
date in each currency.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) The net current exposure is the sum of all positive and negative 
mark-to-market values of the individual contracts subject to the netting 
contract. If the net sum of the mark-to-market values is positive, then 
the net current exposure is equal to that sum. If the net sum of the 
mark-to-market values is zero or negative, then the net current exposure 
is zero.
    (f) The effects of the bilateral netting contract on the gross 
potential future exposure are recognized through application of a 
formula, resulting in an adjusted add-on amount (Anet). The 
formula, which employs the ratio of net current exposure to gross 
current exposure (NGR) is expressed as:

Anet = (0.4  x  Agross) + 0.6(NGR  x  
          Agross)

    The effect of this formula is that Anet is the weighted 
average of Agross, and Agross adjusted by the NGR.
    (g) The NGR may be calculated in either one of two ways--referred to 
as the counterparty-by-counterparty approach and the aggregate approach.
    (i) Under the counterparty-by-counterparty approach, the NGR is the 
ratio of the net current exposure of the netting contract to the gross 
current exposure of the netting contract. The gross current exposure is 
the sum of the current exposures of all individual contracts subject to 
the netting contract calculated in accordance with section II.E. of this 
appendix A.
    (ii) Under the aggregate approach, the NGR is the ratio of the sum 
of all of the net current exposures for qualifying bilateral netting 
contracts to the sum of all of the gross current exposures for those 
netting contracts (each gross current exposure is calculated in the same 
manner as in section II.E.5.(g)(i) of this appendix A). Net negative 
mark-to-market values to individual counterparties cannot be used to 
offset net positive current exposures to other counterparties.
    (iii) A bank must use consistently either the counterparty-by-
counterparty approach or the aggregate approach to calculate the NGR. 
Regardless of the approach used, the NGR should be applied individually 
to each qualifying bilateral netting contract to determine the adjusted 
add-on for that netting contract.

                  III. Minimum Risk-Based Capital Ratio

    Subject to section II.B.5. of this appendix A, banks generally will 
be expected to meet a minimum ratio of qualifying total capital to risk-
weighted assets of 8 percent, of which at least 4 percentage points 
should be in the form of core capital (Tier 1). Any bank that does not 
meet the minimum risk-based capital ratio, or whose capital is otherwise 
considered inadequate, generally will be expected to develop and 
implement a capital plan for achieving an adequate level of capital, 
consistent with the provisions of this risk-based capital framework and 
Sec. 325.104, the specific circumstances affecting the individual bank, 
and the requirements of any related agreements between the bank and the 
FDIC.

                Table I--Definition of Qualifying Capital
------------------------------------------------------------------------
               Components                      Minimum requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) CORE CAPITAL (Tier 1)..............  Must equal or exceed 4% of
                                          weighted-risk assets.
    (a) Common stockholders' equity....  No limit. \1\
    (b) Noncumulative perpetual          No limit. \1\
     preferred stock and any related
     surplus.
    (c) Minority interest in equity      No limit. \1\
     accounts of consolidated.
    (d) Less: All intangible assets      (\2\).
     other than certain mortgage
     servicing assets, nonmortgage
     servicing assets and purchased
     credit card relationships.
    (e) Less: Certain credit-enhancing   (\3\).
     interest-only strips and
     nonfinancial equity investments
     required to be deducted from
     capital.
    (f) Less: Certain deferred tax       (\4\).
     assets.
(2) SUPPLEMENTARY CAPITAL (Tier 2).....  Total of tier 2 is limited to
                                          100% of tier 1. \5\
    (a) Allowance for loan and lease     Limited to 1.25% of weighted-
     losses.                              risk assets. \5\

[[Page 450]]

 
    (b) Unrealized gains on certain      Limited to 45% of pretax net
     equity securities. \6\.              unrealized gains. \6\
    (c) Cumulative perpetual and long-   No limit within tier 2; long-
     term preferred stock (original       term preferred is amortized
     maturity of 20 years or more) and    for capital purposes as it
     any related surplus.                 approaches maturity.
    (d) Auction rate and similar         No limit within Tier 2.
     preferred stock (both cumulative
     and non-cumulative).
    (e) Hybrid capital instruments       No limit within Tier 2.
     (including mandatory convertible
     debt securities).
    (f) Term subordinated debt and       Term subordinated debt and
     intermediate-term preferred stock    intermediate-term preferred
     (original weighted average           stock are limited to 50% of
     maturity of five years or more).     Tier 1 \5\ and amortized for
                                          capital purposes as they
                                          approach maturity.
(3) DEDUCTIONS (from sum of tier 1 and
 tier 2)
    (a) Investments in banking and
     finance subsidiaries that are not
     consolidated for regulatory
     capital purposes
    (b) Intentional, reciprocal cross-
     holdings of capital securities
     issued by banks
    (c) Other deductions (such as        On a case-by-case basis or as a
     investment in other subsidiaries     matter of policy after formal
     or joint ventures) as determined     consideration of relevant
     by supervisory authority.            issues.
(4) TOTAL CAPITAL......................  Must equal or exceed 8% of
                                          weighted-risk assets.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ No express limits are placed on the amounts of nonvoting common,
  noncumulative perpetual preferred stock, and minority interests that
  may be recognized as part of Tier 1 capital. However, voting common
  stockholders' equity capital generally will be expected to be the
  dominant form of Tier 1 capital and banks should avoid undue reliance
  on other Tier 1 capital elements.
\2\ The amounts of mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing
  assets and purchased credit card relationships that can be recognized
  for purposes of calculating Tier 1 capital are subject to the
  limitations set forth in Sec. 325.5(f). All deductions are for
  capital purposes only; deductions would not affect accounting
  treatment.
\3\ The amounts of credit-enhancing interest-only strips that can be
  recognized for purposes of calculating Tier 1 capital are subject to
  the limitations set forth in Sec. 325.5(f). The amounts of
  nonfinancial equity investments that must be deducted for purposes of
  calculating Tier 1 capital are set forth in section II.B.(6) of
  appendix A to part 325.
\4\ Deferred tax assets are subject to the capital limitations set forth
  in Sec. 325.5(g).
\5\ Amounts in excess of limitations are permitted but do not qualify as
  capital.
\6\ Unrealized gains on equity securities are subject to the capital
  limitations set forth in paragraph I.A(2)(f) of appendix A to part
  325.

               Calculation of the Risk-Based Capital Ratio

    When calculating the risk-based capital ratio under the framework 
set forth in this statement of policy, qualifying total capital (the 
numerator) is divided by risk-weighted assets (the denominator). The 
process of determining the numerator for the ratio is summarized in 
Table I. The calculation of the denominator is based on the risk weights 
and conversion factors that are summarized in Tables II and III.
    When determining the amount of risk-weighted assets, balance sheet 
assets are assigned an appropriate risk weight (see Table II) and off-
balance sheet items are first converted to a credit equivalent amount 
(see Table III) and then assigned to one of the risk weight categories 
set forth in Table II.
    The balance sheet assets and the credit equivalent amount of off-
balance sheet items are then multiplied by the appropriate risk weight 
percentages and the sum of these risk-weighted amounts is the gross 
risk-weighted asset figure used in determining the denominator of the 
risk-based capital ratio. Any items deducted from capital when computing 
the amount of qualifying capital may also be excluded from risk-weighted 
assets when calculating the denominator for the risk-based capital 
ratio.

          Table II--Summary of Risk Weights and Risk Categories

                  Category 1--Zero Percent Risk Weight

    (1) Cash (domestic and foreign).
    (2) Balances due from Federal Reserve Banks and central banks in 
other OECD countries.
    (3) Direct claims on, and portions of claims unconditionally 
guaranteed by, the U.S. Treasury, U.S. Government agencies, \1\ or 
central governments in other OECD countries.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ For the purpose of calculating the risk-based capital ratio, a 
U.S. Government agency is defined as an instrumentality of the U.S. 
Government whose obligations are fully and explicitly guaranteed as to 
the timely repayment of principal and interest by the full faith and 
credit of the U.S. Government.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Portions of local currency claims on, or unconditionally 
guaranteed by, non-OECD central governments (including non-OECD central 
banks), to the extent the bank has liabilities booked in that currency.
    (5) Gold bullion held in the bank's own vaults or in another bank's 
vaults on an allocated basis, to the extent that it is offset by gold 
bullion liabilities
    (6) Federal Reserve Bank stock.

[[Page 451]]

    (7) Claims on, or guaranteed by, qualifying securities firms 
incorporated in the United States or other members of the OECD-based 
group of countries that are collateralized by cash on deposit in the 
lending bank or by securities issued or guaranteed by the United States 
or OECD central governments (including U.S. government agencies), 
provided that a positive margin of collateral is required to be 
maintained on such a claim on a daily basis, taking into account any 
change in a bank's exposure to the obligor or counterparty under the 
claim in relation to the market value of the collateral held in support 
of the claim.

                   Category 2--20 Percent Risk Weight

    (1) Cash items in the process of collection.
    (2) All claims (long- and short-term) on, and portions of claims 
(long- and short-term) guaranteed by, U.S. depository institutions and 
OECD banks.
    (3) Short-term (remaining maturity of one year or less) claims on, 
and portions of short-term claims guaranteed by, non-OECD banks.
    (4) Portions of loans and other claims conditionally guaranteed by 
the U.S. Treasury, U.S. Government agencies, \1\ or central governments 
in other OECD countries and portions of local currency claims 
conditionally guaranteed by non-OECD central governments to the extent 
that the bank has liabilities booked in that currency.
    (5) Securities and other claims on, and portions of claims 
guaranteed by, U.S. Government-sponsored agencies. \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ For the purpose of calculating the risk-based capital ratio, a 
U.S. Government-sponsored agency is defined as an agency originally 
established or chartered to serve public purposes specified by the U.S. 
Congress but whose obligations are not explicitly guaranteed by the full 
faith and credit of the U.S. Government.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (6) Portions of loans and other claims (including repurchase 
agreements) collateralized \3\ by securities issued or guaranteed by the 
U.S. Treasury, U.S. Government agencies, U.S. Government-sponsored 
agencies or central governments in other OECD countries.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ Degree of collateralization is determined by current market 
value.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (7) Portions of loans and other claims collateralized \3\ by cash on 
deposit in the lending bank.
    (8) General obligation claims on, and portions of claims guaranteed 
by, the full faith and credit of states or other political subdivisions 
of OECD countries, including U.S. state and local governments.
    (9) Claims on, and portions of claims guaranteed by, official 
multilateral lending institutions or regional development institutions 
in which the U.S. Government is a shareholder or a contributing member.
    (10) Portions of claims collateralized \3\ by securities issued by 
official multilateral lending institutions or regional development 
institutions in which the U.S. Government is a shareholder or 
contributing member.
    (11) Investments in shares of mutual funds whose portfolios are 
permitted to hold only assets that qualify for the zero or 20 percent 
risk categories.
    (12) Recourse obligations, direct credit substitutes, residual 
interests (other than credit-enhancing interest-only strips) and asset- 
or mortgage-backed securities rated in either of the two highest 
investment grade categories, e.g., AAA or AA, in the case of long-term 
ratings, or the highest rating category, e.g., A-1, P-1, in the case of 
short-term ratings.
    (13) Claims on, and claims guaranteed by, qualifying securities 
firms incorporated in the United States or other member of the OECD-
based group of countries provided that:
    a. The qualifying securities firm has a rating in one of the top 
three investment grade rating categories from a nationally recognized 
statistical rating organization; or
    b. The claim is guaranteed by a qualifying securities firm's parent 
company with such a rating.
    (14) Certain collateralized claims on qualifying securities firms in 
the United States or other member of the OECD-based group of countries, 
without regard to satisfaction of the rating standard, provided that the 
claim arises under a contract that:
    a. Is a reverse repurchase/repurchase agreement or securities 
lending/borrowing transaction executed under standard industry 
documentation;
    b. Is collateralized by liquid and readily marketable debt or equity 
securities;
    c. Is marked to market daily;
    d. Is subject to a daily margin maintenance requirement under the 
standard documentation; and
    e. Can be liquidated, terminated, or accelerated immediately in 
bankruptcy or similar proceeding, and the security or collateral 
agreement will not be stayed or avoided, under applicable law of the 
relevant country.

                   Category 3--50 Percent Risk Weight

    (1) Loans fully secured by first liens on one-to-four family 
residential properties (including certain presold residential 
construction loans), provided that the loans were approved in accordance 
with prudent underwriting standards and are not past due 90 days or more 
or carried in nonaccrual status.
    (2) Loans fully secured by first liens on multifamily residential 
properties that have been prudently underwritten and meet specified 
requirements with respect to loan-to-

[[Page 452]]

value ratio, level of annual net operating income to required debt 
service, maximum amortization period, minimum original maturity, and 
demonstrated timely repayment performance.
    (3) Recourse obligations, direct credit substitutes, residual 
interests (other than credit-enhancing interest-only strips) and asset- 
or mortgage-backed securities rated in the third-highest investment 
grade category, e.g., A, in the case of long-term ratings, or the second 
highest rating category, e.g., A-2, P-2, in the case of short-term 
ratings.
    (4) Revenue bonds or similar obligations, including loans and 
leases, that are obligations of U.S. state or political subdivisions of 
the United States or other OECD countries but for which the government 
entity is committed to repay the debt only out of revenues from the 
specific projects financed.
    (5) Credit equivalent amounts of interest rate and foreign exchange 
rate related contracts, except for those assigned to a lower risk 
category.

                   Category 4--100 Percent Risk Weight

    (1) All other claims on private obligors.
    (2) Claims on, or guaranteed by, non-OECD banks with a remaining 
maturity exceeding one year.
    (3) Claims on non-OECD central governments that are not included in 
item 4 of Category 1 or item 3 of Category 2, and all claims on non-OECD 
state and local governments.
    (4) Obligations issued by U.S. state or local governments or other 
OECD local governments (including industrial development authorities and 
similar entities) that are repayable solely by a private party or 
enterprise.
    (5) Premises, plant, and equipment; other fixed assets; and other 
real estate owned.
    (6) Investments in any unconsolidated subsidiaries, joint ventures, 
or associated companies--if not deducted from capital.
    (7) Instruments issued by other banking organizations that qualify 
as capital.
    (8) Claims on commercial firms owned by the U.S. Government or 
foreign governments.
    (9) Recourse obligations, direct credit substitutes, residual 
interests (other than credit-enhancing interest-only strips) and asset- 
or mortgage-backed securities rated in the lowest investment grade 
category, e.g., BBB, as well as certain positions (but not residual 
interests) which the bank rates pursuant to section II.B.5(g) of this 
appendix A.
    (10) All other assets, including any intangible assets that are not 
deducted from capital, and the credit equivalent amounts \4\ of off-
balance sheet items not assigned to a different risk category.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ In general, for each off-balance sheet item, a conversion factor 
(see Table III) must be applied to determine the ``credit equivalent 
amount'' prior to assigning the off-balance sheet item to a risk weight 
category.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                  Category 5--200 Percent Risk Weight.

    (1) Externally rated recourse obligations, direct credit 
substitutes, residual interests (other than credit-enhancing interest-
only strips), and asset- and mortgage-backed securities that are rated 
one category below the lowest investment grade category, e.g., BB, to 
the extent permitted in section II.B.5(d) of this appendix A; and
    (2) A position (but not a residual interest) extended in connection 
with a securitization or structured financing program that is not rated 
by an NRSRO for which the bank determines that the credit risk is 
equivalent to one category below investment grade, e.g., BB, to the 
extent permitted in section II.B.5.(g) of this appendix A.

[54 FR 11509, Mar. 21, 1989]

    Editorial Notes: 1. For Federal Register citations affecting 
appendix A to part 325, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which 
appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at 
www.fdsys.gov.

    2. At 76 FR 37629, June 28, 2011, appendix A to part 325 was 
amended, however, the amendment could not be incorporated due to the 
inaccurate amendatory instruction. The new footnote 45 could not be 
added because there was no text for a new 45 to incorporate.



  Sec. Appendix B to Part 325--Statement of Policy on Capital
  Adequacy

    Part 325 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation rules and 
regulations (12 CFR part 325) sets forth minimum leverage capital 
requirements for fundamentally sound, well-managed banks having no 
material or significant financial weaknesses. It also defines capital 
and sets forth sanctions which will be used against banks which are in 
violation of the part 325 regulation. This statement of policy on 
capital adequacy provides some interpretational and definitional 
guidance as to how this part 325 regulation will be administered and 
enforced by the FDIC. This statement of policy also addresses certain 
aspects of the FDIC's minimum risk-based capital guidelines that are set 
forth in appendix A to part 325. This statement of policy does not 
address the prompt corrective action provisions mandated by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991. However, section 
38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act and subpart B of part 325 
provide guidance on the prompt corrective action provisions, which 
generally

[[Page 453]]

apply to institutions with inadequate levels of capital.

             I. Enforcement of Minimum Capital Requirements

    Section 325.3(b)(1) specifies that FDIC-supervised, state-chartered 
nonmember commercial and savings banks (or other insured depository 
institutions making applications to the FDIC that require the FDIC to 
consider the adequacy of the institutions' capital structure) must 
maintain a minimum leverage ratio of Tier 1 (or core) capital to total 
assets of at least 3 percent; however, this minimum only applies to the 
most highly-rated banks (i.e., those with a composite CAMELS rating of 1 
under the Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System established by 
the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council) that are not 
anticipating or experiencing any significant growth. All other state 
nonmember banks would need to meet a minimum leverage ratio that is at 
least 100 to 200 basis points above this minimum. That is, in accordance 
with Sec. 325.3(b)(2), an absolute minimum leverage ratio of not less 
than 4 percent must be maintained by those banks that are not highly-
rated or that are anticipating or experiencing significant growth.
    In addition to the minimum leverage capital standards, section III 
of appendix A to part 325 indicates that state nonmember banks generally 
are expected to maintain a minimum risk-based capital ratio of 
qualifying total capital to risk-weighted assets of 8 percent, with at 
least one-half of that total capital amount consisting of Tier 1 
capital.
    State nonmember banks (hereinafter referred to as ``banks'') 
operating with leverage capital ratios below the minimums set forth in 
part 325 will be deemed to have inadequate capital and will be in 
violation of the part 325 regulation. Furthermore, banks operating with 
risk-based capital ratios below the minimums set forth in appendix A to 
part 325 generally will be deemed to have inadequate capital. Banks 
failing to meet the minimum leverage and/or risk-based capital ratios 
normally can expect to have any application submitted to the FDIC denied 
(if such application requires the FDIC to evaluate the adequacy of the 
institution's capital structure) and also can expect to be subject to 
the use of capital directives or other formal enforcement action by the 
FDIC to increase capital.
    Capital adequacy in banks which have capital ratios at or above the 
minimums will be assessed and enforced based on the following factors 
(these same criteria will apply to any insured depository institutions 
making applications to the FDIC and to any other circumstances in which 
the FDIC is requested or required to evaluate the adequacy of a 
depository institution's capital structure):

         A. Banks Which Are Fundamentally Sound and Well-Managed

    The minimum leverage capital ratios set forth in Sec. 325.3(b)(2) 
and the minimum risk-based capital ratios set forth in section III of 
appendix A to part 325 generally will be viewed as the minimum 
acceptable capital standards for banks whose overall financial condition 
is fundamentally sound, which are well-managed and which have no 
material or significant financial weaknesses. While the FDIC will make 
this determination in each bank based upon its own condition and 
specific circumstances, this definition will generally apply to those 
banks evidencing a level of risk which is no greater than that normally 
associated with a Composite rating of 1 or 2 under the Uniform Financial 
Institutions Rating System. Banks meeting this definition which are in 
compliance with the minimum leverage and risk-based capital ratio 
standards will not generally be required by the FDIC to raise new 
capital from external sources.
    The FDIC does, however, encourage such banks to maintain capital 
well above the minimums, particularly those institutions that are 
anticipating or experiencing significant growth, and will carefully 
evaluate their earnings and growth trends, dividend policies, capital 
planning procedures and other factors important to the continuous 
maintenance of adequate capital. Adverse trends or deficiencies in these 
areas will be subject to criticism at regular examinations and may be an 
important factor in the FDIC's action on applications submitted by such 
banks. In addition, the FDIC's consideration of capital adequacy in 
banks making applications to the FDIC will also fully examine the 
expected impact of those applications on the bank's ability to maintain 
its capital adequacy. In all cases, banks should maintain capital 
commensurate with the level and nature of risks, including the volume 
and severity of adversely classified assets, to which they are exposed.

                           B. All Other Banks

    Banks not meeting the definition set forth in I.A. of this appendix, 
that is, banks evidencing a level of risk which is at least as great as 
that normally associated with a Composite rating of 3, 4, or 5 under the 
Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System, will be required to 
maintain capital higher than the minimum regulatory requirement and at a 
level deemed appropriate in relation to the degree of risk within the 
institution. These higher capital levels will normally be addressed 
through memorandums of understanding between the FDIC and the bank or, 
in cases of more pronounced risk, through the use of formal enforcement 
actions under section 8 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1818).

[[Page 454]]

              C. Capital Requirements of Primary Regulator

    Notwithstanding I.A. and B. of this appendix, all banks (or other 
depository institutions making applications to the FDIC that require the 
FDIC to consider the adequacy of the institutions' capital structure) 
will be expected to meet any capital requirements established by their 
primary state or federal regulator which exceed the minimum capital 
requirement set forth in the FDIC's part 325 regulation. In addition, 
the FDIC will, when establishing capital requirements higher than the 
minimum set forth in the regulation, consult with an institution's 
primary state or federal regulator.

                            II. Capital Plans

    Section 325.4(b) specifies that any bank which has less than its 
minimum leverage capital requirement is deemed to be engaging in an 
unsafe or unsound banking practice unless it has submitted, and is in 
compliance with, a plan approved by the FDIC to increase its Tier 1 
leverage capital ratio to such level as the FDIC deems appropriate.
    As required under Sec. 325.104(a)(1) of this part, a bank must file 
a written capital restoration plan with the appropriate FDIC regional 
director within 45 days of the date that the bank receives notice or is 
deemed to have notice that the bank is undercapitalized, significantly 
undercapitalized or critically undercapitalized, unless the FDIC 
notifies the bank in writing that the plan is to be filed within a 
different period. The amount of time allowed to achieve the minimum 
leverage capital requirement will be evaluated by the FDIC on a case-by-
case basis and will depend on a number of factors, including the 
viability of the bank and whether it is fundamentally sound and well-
managed.
    Banks evidencing more than normal levels of risk will normally have 
their minimum capital requirements established in a formal or informal 
enforcement proceeding. The time frames for meeting these requirements 
will be set forth in such actions and will generally require some 
immediate action on the bank's part to meet its minimum capital 
requirement. The reasonableness of capital plans submitted by depository 
institutions in connection with applications as provided for in 
Sec. 325.3(d)(2) will be determined in conjunction with the FDIC's 
consideration of the application.

                         III. Written Agreements

    Section 325.4(c) provides that any insured depository institution 
with a Tier 1 capital to total assets (leverage) ratio of less than 2 
percent must enter into and be in compliance with a written agreement 
with the FDIC (or with its primary federal regulator with FDIC as a 
party to the agreement) to increase its Tier 1 leverage capital ratio to 
such level as the FDIC deems appropriate or may be subject to a section 
8(a) termination of insurance action by the FDIC. Except in the very 
rarest of circumstances, the FDIC will require that such agreements 
contemplate immediate efforts by the depository institution to acquire 
the required capital.
    The guidance in this section III is not intended to preclude the 
FDIC from taking section 8(a) or other enforcement action against any 
institution, regardless of its capital level, if the specific 
circumstances deem such action to be appropriate.

                         IV. Capital Components

    Section 325.2 sets forth the definition of Tier 1 capital for the 
leverage standard as well as the definitions for the various instruments 
and accounts which are included therein. Although nonvoting common 
stock, noncumulative perpetual preferred stock, and minority interests 
in consolidated subsidiaries are normally included in Tier 1 capital, 
voting common stockholders' equity generally will be expected to be the 
dominant form of Tier 1 capital. Thus, banks should avoid undue reliance 
on nonvoting equity, preferred stock and minority interests. The 
following provides some additional guidance with respect to some of the 
items that affect the calculation of Tier 1 capital.

                          A. Intangible Assets

    The FDIC permits state nonmember banks to record intangible assets 
on their books and to report the value of such assets in the 
Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income (``Call Report''). As noted 
in the instructions for preparation of the Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income (published by the Federal Financial Institutions 
Examination Council), intangible assets may arise from business 
combinations accounted for under the purchase method and acquisitions of 
portions or segments of another institution's business, such as branch 
offices, mortgage servicing portfolios, and credit card portfolios.
    Notwithstanding the authority to report all intangible assets in the 
Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income, Sec. 325.2(v) of the 
regulation specifies that mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage 
servicing assets and purchased credit card relationships are the only 
intangible assets which will be allowed as Tier 1 capital. \1\ The 
portion of equity capital represented by other types of intangible 
assets will be deducted from equity

[[Page 455]]

capital and assets in the computation of a bank's Tier 1 capital. 
Certain of these intangible assets may, however, be recognized for 
regulatory capital purposes if explicitly approved by the Director of 
the Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC) as part of the 
bank's regulatory capital on a specific case basis. These intangibles 
will be included in regulatory capital under the terms and conditions 
that are specifically approved by the FDIC. \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Although intangible assets in the form of mortgage servicing 
assets, nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased credit card 
relationships are generally recognized for regulatory capital purposes, 
the ^^deduction of part or all of the mortgage servicing assets, 
nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased credit card relationships may 
be required if the carrying amounts of these rights are excessive in 
relation to their market value or the level of the bank's capital 
accounts. In this regard, mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage 
servicing assets and purchased credit card relationships will be 
recognized for regulatory capital purposes only to the extent the rights 
meet the conditions, limitations and restrictions described in 
Sec. 325.5(f).
    \2\ This specific approval must be received in accordance with 
Sec. 325.5(b). In evaluating whether other types of intangibles should 
be recognized for regulatory capital purposes, the FDIC will accord 
special attention to the general characteristics of the intangibles, 
including: (1) The separability of the intangible asset and the ability 
to sell it separate and apart from the bank or the bulk of the bank's 
assets, (2) the certainty that a readily identifiable stream of cash 
flows associated with the intangible asset can hold its value 
notwithstanding the future prospects of the bank, and (3) the existence 
of a market of sufficient depth to provide liquidity for the intangible 
asset. However, pursuant to section 18(n) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(n)), specific approval cannot be given for 
an unidentifiable intangible asset, such as goodwill, if acquired after 
April 12, 1989.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    In certain instances banks may have investments in unconsolidated 
subsidiaries or joint ventures that have large volumes of intangible 
assets. In such instances the bank's consolidated statements will 
reflect an investment in a tangible asset even though such investment 
will, in fact, be represented by a large volume of intangible assets. In 
any such situation where this is material, the bank's investment in the 
unconsolidated subsidiary will be divided into a tangible and an 
intangible portion based on the percentage of intangible assets to total 
assets in the subsidiary. The intangible portion of the investment will 
be treated as if it were an intangible asset on the bank's books in the 
calculation of Tier 1 capital. However, intangible assets in the form of 
mortgage servicing assets, nonmortgage servicing assets and purchased 
credit card relationships, including servicing intangibles held by 
mortgage banking subsidiaries, are subject to the specific criteria set 
forth in Sec. 325.5(f).

                      B. Perpetual Preferred Stock

    Perpetual preferred stock is defined as preferred stock that does 
not have a maturity date, that cannot be redeemed at the option of the 
holder, and that has no other provisions that will require future 
redemption of the issue. Also, pursuant to section 18(i)(1) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(i)(1)), a state nonmember 
bank cannot, without the prior consent of the FDIC, reduce the amount or 
retire any part of its perferred stock. (This prior consent is also 
required for the reduction or retirement of any part of a state 
nonmember bank's common stock or capital notes and debentures.)
    Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock is generally included in 
Tier 1 capital. Nonetheless, it is possible for banks to issue preferred 
stock with a dividend rate which escalates to such a high rate that the 
terms become so onerous as to effectively force the bank to call the 
issue (for example, an issue with a low initial rate that is scheduled 
to escalate to much higher rates in subsequent periods). Preferred stock 
issues with such onerous terms have much the same characteristics as 
limited life preferred stock in that the bank would be effectively 
forced to redeem the issue to avoid performance of the onerous terms. 
Such instruments may be disallowed as Tier 1 capital and, for risk-based 
capital purposes, would be included in Tier 2 capital only to the extent 
that the instruments fall within the limitations applicable to 
intermediate-term preferred stock. Banks which are contemplating issues 
bearing terms which may be so characterized are encouraged to submit 
them to the appropriate FDIC regional office for review prior to 
issuance. Nothing herein shall prohibit banks from issuing floating rate 
preferred stock issues where the rate is constant in relation to some 
outside market or index rate. However, noncumulative floating rate 
instruments where the rate paid is based in some part on the current 
credit standing of the bank, and all cumulative preferred stock 
instruments, are excluded from Tier 1 capital. These instruments are 
included in Tier 2 capital for risk-based capital purposes in accordance 
with the limitations set forth in appendix A to part 325.
    The FDIC will also require that issues of perpetual preferred stock 
be consistent with safe and sound banking practices. Issues which would 
unduly enrich insiders or which contain dividend rates or other terms 
which are inconsistent with safe and sound banking practices will likely 
be the subject of appropriate supervisory response from the FDIC. Banks 
contemplating preferred stock issues which may pose safety and soundness 
concerns are encouraged to submit such issues

[[Page 456]]

to the appropriate FDIC regional office for review prior to sale. 
Pursuant to Sec. 325.5(e), capital instruments that contain or that are 
subject to any conditions, covenants, terms, restrictions or provisions 
that are inconsistent with safe and sound banking practices will not 
qualify as capital under part 325.

   C. Other Instruments or Transactions Which Fail To Provide Capital 
                                 Support

    Section 325.5(b) specifies that any capital component or balance 
sheet entry or account which has characteristics or terms that diminish 
its contribution to an insured depository institution's ability to 
absorb losses shall be deducted from capital. An example involves 
certain types of minority interests in consolidated subsidiaries. 
Minority interests in consolidated subsidiaries have been included in 
capital based on the fact that they provide capital support to the risk 
in the consolidated subsidiaries. Certain transactions have been 
structured where a bank forms a subsidiary by transferring essentially 
risk-free or low-risk assets to the subsidiary in exchange for common 
stock of the subsidiary. The subsidiary then sells preferred stock to 
third parties.
    The preferred stock becomes a minority interest in a consolidated 
subsidiary but, in effect, represents an essentially risk-free or low-
risk investment for the preferred stockholders. This type of minority 
interest fails to provide any meaningful capital support to the 
consolidated entity inasmuch as it has a preferred claim on the 
essentially risk-free or low-risk assets of the subsidiary. In addition, 
certain minority interests are not substantially equivalent to permanent 
equity in that the interests must be paid off on specified future dates, 
or at the option of the holders of the minority interests, or contain 
other provisions or features that limit the ability of the minority 
interests to effectively absorb losses. Capital instruments or 
transactions of this nature which fail to absorb losses or provide 
meaningful capital support will be deducted from Tier 1 capital.

                      D. Mandatory Convertible Debt

    Mandatory convertible debt securities are subordinated debt 
instruments that require the issuer to convert such instruments into 
common or perpetual preferred stock by a date at or before the maturity 
of the debt instruments. The maturity of these instruments must be 12 
years or less and the instruments must also meet the other criteria set 
forth in appendix A to part 325. Mandatory convertible debt is excluded 
from Tier 1 capital but, for risk-based capital purposes, is included in 
Tier 2 capital as a ``hybrid capital instrument.''
    So-called ``equity commitment notes,'' which merely require a bank 
to sell common or perpetual preferred stock during the life of the 
subordinated debt obligation, are specifically excluded from the 
definition of mandatory convertible debt securities and are only 
included in Tier 2 capital under the risk-based capital framework to the 
extent that they satisfy the requirements and limitations for ``term 
subordinated debt'' set forth in appendix A to part 325.

                  V. Analysis of Consolidated Companies

    In determining a bank's compliance with its minimum capital 
requirements the FDIC will, with two exceptions, generally utilize the 
bank's consolidated statements as defined in the instructions for the 
preparation of Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income.
    The first exception relates to securities subsidiaries of state 
nonmember banks which are subject to Sec. 337.4 of the FDIC's rules and 
regulations (12 CFR 337.4). Any subsidiary subject to this section must 
be a bona fide subsidiary which is adequately capitalized. In addition, 
Sec. 337.4(b)(3) requires that any insured state nonmember bank's 
investment in such a subsidiary shall not be counted towards the bank's 
capital. In those instances where the securities subsidiary is 
consolidated in the bank's Consolidated Report of Condition it will be 
necessary, for the purpose of calculating the bank's Tier 1 capital, to 
adjust the Consolidated Report of Condition in such a manner as to 
reflect the bank's investment in the securities subsidiary on the equity 
method. In this case, and in those cases where the securities subsidiary 
has not been consolidated, the investment in the subsidiary will then be 
deducted from the bank's capital and assets prior to calculation of the 
bank's Tier 1 capital ratio. (Where deemed appropriate, the FDIC may 
also consider deducting investments in other subsidiaries, either on a 
case-by-case basis or, as with securities subsidiaries, based on the 
general characteristics or functional nature of the subsidiaries.)
    The second exception relates to the treatment of subsidiaries of 
insured banks that are domestic depository institutions such as 
commercial banks, savings banks, or savings associations. These 
subsidiaries are not consolidated on a line-by-line basis with the 
insured bank parent in the bank parent's Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income. Rather, the instructions for these reports provide 
that bank investments in such depository institution subsidiaries are to 
be reported on an unconsolidated basis in accordance with the equity 
method. Since the FDIC believes that the minimum capital requirements 
should apply to a bank's depository activities in their entirety, 
regardless of the form that the organization's corporate structure 
takes, it will be necessary, for the purpose of calculating the bank's 
Tier 1 leverage

[[Page 457]]

and total risk-based capital ratios, to adjust a bank parent's 
Consolidated Report of Condition to consolidate its domestic depository 
institution subsidiaries on a line-by-line basis. The financial 
statements of the subsidiary that are used for this consolidation must 
be prepared in the same manner as the Consolidated Report of Condition.
    The FDIC will, in determining the capital adequacy of a bank which 
is a member of a bank holding company or chain banking group, consider 
the degree of leverage and risks undertaken by the parent company or 
other affiliates. Where the level of risk in a holding company system is 
no more than normal and the consolidated company is adequately 
capitalized at all appropriate levels, the FDIC generally will not 
require additional capital in subsidiary banks under its supervision 
over and above that which would be required for the subsidiary bank on 
its own merit. In cases where a holding company or other affiliated 
banks (or other companies) evidence more than a normal degree of risk 
(either by virtue of the quality of their assets, the nature of the 
activities conducted, or other factors) or where the affiliated 
organizations are inadequately capitalized, the FDIC will consider the 
potential impact of the additional risk or excess leverage upon an 
individual bank to determine if such factors will likely result in 
excessive requirements for dividends, management fees, or other support 
to the holding company or affiliated organizations which would be 
detrimental to the bank. Where the excessive risk or leverage in such 
organizations is determined to be potentially detrimental to the bank's 
condition or its ability to maintain adequate capital, the FDIC may 
initiate appropriate supervisory action to limit the bank's ability to 
support its weaker affiliates and/or require higher than minimum capital 
ratios in the bank.

          VI. Applicability of Part 325 to Savings Associations

    Section 325.3(c) indicates that, where the FDIC is required to 
evaluate the adequacy of any depository institution's (including any 
savings association's) capital structure in conjunction with an 
application filed by the institution, the FDIC will not approve the 
application if the depository institution does not meet the minimum 
leverage capital requirement set forth in Sec. 325.3(b).
    Also, Sec. 325.4(b) states that, under certain conditions specified 
in section 8(t) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, the FDIC may take 
section 8(b)(1) and/or 8(c) enforcement action against a savings 
association that is deemed to be engaged in an unsafe or unsound 
practice on account of its inadequate capital structure. Section 
325.4(c) further specifies that any insured depository institution with 
a Leverage ratio (as defined in part 325) of less than 2 percent is 
deemed to be operating in an unsafe or unsound condition pursuant to 
section 8(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    In addition, the Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS), as the primary 
federal regulator of savings associations, has established minimum core 
capital leverage, tangible capital and risk-based capital requirements 
for savings associations (12 CFR part 567). In this regard, certain 
differences exist between the methods used by the OTS to calculate a 
savings association's capital and the methods set forth by the FDIC in 
part 325. These differences include, among others, the core capital 
treatment for investments in subsidiaries and for certain intangible 
assets.
    In determining whether a savings association's application should be 
approved pursuant to Sec. 325.3(c), or whether an unsafe or unsound 
practice or condition exists pursuant to Secs. 325.4(b) and 325.4(c), 
the FDIC will consider the extent of the savings association's capital 
as determined in accordance with part 325. However, the FDIC will also 
consider the extent to which a savings association is in compliance with 
(a) the minimum capital requirements set forth by the OTS, (b) any 
related capital plans for meeting the minimum capital requirements 
approved by the OTS, and/or (c) any other criteria deemed by the FDIC as 
appropriate based on the association's specific circumstances.

[56 FR 10166, Mar. 11, 1991, as amended at 58 FR 6369, Jan. 28, 1993; 58 
FR 8219, Feb. 12, 1993; 58 FR 60103, Nov. 15, 1993; 60 FR 39232, Aug. 1, 
1995; 63 FR 42678, Aug. 10, 1998; 66 FR 59661, Nov. 29, 2001]



  Sec. Appendix C to Part 325--Risk-Based Capital for State Nonmember 
                           Banks: Market Risk

Section 1  Purpose, Applicability, and Reservation of Authority
Section 2  Definitions
Section 3  Requirements for Application of the Market Risk Capital Rule
Section 4  Adjustments to the Risk-Based Capital Ratio Calculations
Section 5  VaR-based Measure
Section 6  Stressed VaR-based Measure
Section 7  Specific Risk
Section 8  Incremental Risk
Section 9  Comprehensive Risk
Section 10  Standardized Measurement Method for Specific Risk
Section 11  Simplified Supervisory Formula Approach
Section 12  Market Risk Disclosures

     Section 1. Purpose, Applicability, and Reservation of Authority

    (a) Purpose. This appendix establishes risk-based capital 
requirements for banks with

[[Page 458]]

significant exposure to market risk and provides methods for these banks 
to calculate their risk-based capital requirements for market risk. This 
appendix supplements and adjusts the risk-based capital calculations 
under appendix A to this part and appendix D to this part and 
establishes public disclosure requirements.
    (b) Applicability. (1) This appendix applies to any bank with 
aggregate trading assets and trading liabilities (as reported in the 
bank's most recent quarterly Consolidated Reports of Condition and 
Income (Call Report)), equal to:
    (i) 10 percent or more of quarter-end total assets as reported on 
the most recent quarterly Call Report; or
    (ii) $1 billion or more.
    (2) The FDIC may apply this appendix to any bank if the FDIC deems 
it necessary or appropriate because of the level of market risk of the 
bank or to ensure safe and sound banking practices.
    (3) The FDIC may exclude a bank that meets the criteria of paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section from application of this appendix if the FDIC 
determines that the exclusion is appropriate based on the level of 
market risk of the bank and is consistent with safe and sound banking 
practices.
    (c) Reservation of authority. (1) The FDIC may require a bank to 
hold an amount of capital greater than otherwise required under this 
appendix if the FDIC determines that the bank's capital requirement for 
market risk as calculated under this appendix is not commensurate with 
the market risk of the bank's covered positions. In making 
determinations under paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section, 
the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures generally in the same 
manner as the notice and response procedures set forth in [12 CFR 3.12, 
12 CFR 263.202, 12 CFR 325.6(c), 12 CFR 567.3(d)].
    (2) If the FDIC determines that the risk-based capital requirement 
calculated under this appendix by the bank for one or more covered 
positions or portfolios of covered positions is not commensurate with 
the risks associated with those positions or portfolios, the FDIC may 
require the bank to assign a different risk-based capital requirement to 
the positions or portfolios that more accurately reflects the risk of 
the positions or portfolios.
    (3) The FDIC may also require a bank to calculate risk-based capital 
requirements for specific positions or portfolios under this appendix, 
or under appendix D to this part or appendix A to this part, as 
appropriate, to more accurately reflect the risks of the positions.
    (4) Nothing in this appendix limits the authority of the FDIC under 
any other provision of law or regulation to take supervisory or 
enforcement action, including action to address unsafe or unsound 
practices or conditions, deficient capital levels, or violations of law.

                         Section 2. Definitions

    For purposes of this appendix, the following definitions apply:
    Affiliate with respect to a company means any company that controls, 
is controlled by, or is under common control with, the company.
    Backtesting means the comparison of a bank's internal estimates with 
actual outcomes during a sample period not used in model development. 
For purposes of this appendix, backtesting is one form of out-of-sample 
testing.
    Bank holding company is defined in section 2(a) of the Bank Holding 
Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(a)).
    Commodity position means a position for which price risk arises from 
changes in the price of a commodity.
    Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability company, 
depository institution, business trust, special purpose entity, 
association, or similar organization.
    Control A person or company controls a company if it:
    (1) Owns, controls, or holds with power to vote 25 percent or more 
of a class of voting securities of the company; or
    (2) Consolidates the company for financial reporting purposes.
    Corporate debt position means a debt position that is an exposure to 
a company that is not a sovereign entity, the Bank for International 
Settlements, the European Central Bank, the European Commission, the 
International Monetary Fund, a multilateral development bank, a 
depository institution, a foreign bank, a credit union, a public sector 
entity, a government-sponsored entity, or a securitization.
    Correlation trading position means:
    (1) A securitization position for which all or substantially all of 
the value of the underlying exposures is based on the credit quality of 
a single company for which a two-way market exists, or on commonly 
traded indices based on such exposures for which a two-way market exists 
on the indices; or
    (2) A position that is not a securitization position and that hedges 
a position described in paragraph (1) of this definition; and
    (3) A correlation trading position does not include:
    (i) A resecuritization position;
    (ii) A derivative of a securitization position that does not provide 
a pro rata share in the proceeds of a securitization tranche; or
    (iii) A securitization position for which the underlying assets or 
reference exposures are retail exposures, residential mortgage 
exposures, or commercial mortgage exposures.
    Country risk classification (CRC) for a sovereign entity means the 
consensus CRC published from time to time by the Organization

[[Page 459]]

for Economic Cooperation and Development that provides a view of the 
likelihood that the sovereign entity will service its external debt.
    Covered position means the following positions:
    (1) A trading asset or trading liability (whether on- or off-balance 
sheet),\43\ as reported on Schedule RC-D of the Call Report or Schedule 
HC-D of the FR Y-9C, that meets the following conditions:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \43\ Securities subject to repurchase and lending agreements are 
included as if they are still owned by the lender.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) The position is a trading position or hedges another covered 
position; \44\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \44\ A position that hedges a trading position must be within the 
scope of the bank's hedging strategy as described in paragraph (a)(2) of 
section 3 of this appendix.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The position is free of any restrictive covenants on its 
tradability or the bank is able to hedge the material risk elements of 
the position in a two-way market;
    (2) A foreign exchange or commodity position, regardless of whether 
the position is a trading asset or trading liability (excluding any 
structural foreign currency positions that the bank chooses to exclude 
with prior supervisory approval); and
    (3) Notwithstanding paragraphs (1) and (2) of this definition, a 
covered position does not include:
    (i) An intangible asset, including any servicing asset;
    (ii) Any hedge of a trading position that the FDIC determines to be 
outside the scope of the bank's hedging strategy required in paragraph 
(a)(2) of section 3 of this appendix;
    (iii) Any position that, in form or substance, acts as a liquidity 
facility that provides support to asset-backed commercial paper;
    (iv) A credit derivative the bank recognizes as a guarantee for 
risk-weighted asset amount calculation purposes under appendix D to this 
part or appendix A to this part;
    (v) Any equity position that is not publicly traded, other than a 
derivative that references a publicly traded equity;
    (vi) Any position a bank holds with the intent to securitize; or
    (vii) Any direct real estate holding.
    Credit derivative means a financial contract executed under standard 
industry documentation that allows one party (the protection purchaser) 
to transfer the credit risk of one or more exposures (reference 
exposure(s)) to another party (the protection provider).
    Credit union means an insured credit union as defined under the 
Federal Credit Union Act (12 U.S.C. 1752).
    Default by a sovereign entity means noncompliance by the sovereign 
entity with its external debt service obligations or the inability or 
unwillingness of a sovereign entity to service an existing obligation 
according to its original contractual terms, as evidenced by failure to 
pay principal and interest timely and fully, arrearages, or 
restructuring.
    Debt position means a covered position that is not a securitization 
position or a correlation trading position and that has a value that 
reacts primarily to changes in interest rates or credit spreads.
    Depository institution is defined in section 3 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    Equity position means a covered position that is not a 
securitization position or a correlation trading position and that has a 
value that reacts primarily to changes in equity prices.
    Event risk means the risk of loss on equity or hybrid equity 
positions as a result of a financial event, such as the announcement or 
occurrence of a company merger, acquisition, spin-off, or dissolution.
    Foreign bank means a foreign bank as defined in Sec. 211.2 of the 
Federal Reserve Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2), other than a 
depository institution.
    Foreign exchange position means a position for which price risk 
arises from changes in foreign exchange rates.
    General market risk means the risk of loss that could result from 
broad market movements, such as changes in the general level of interest 
rates, credit spreads, equity prices, foreign exchange rates, or 
commodity prices.
    General obligation means a bond or similar obligation that is 
guaranteed by the full faith and credit of states or other political 
subdivisions of a sovereign entity.
    Government-sponsored entity (GSE) means an entity established or 
chartered by the U.S. government to serve public purposes specified by 
the U.S. Congress but whose debt obligations are not explicitly 
guaranteed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. government.
    Hedge means a position or positions that offset all, or 
substantially all, of one or more material risk factors of another 
position.
    Idiosyncratic risk means the risk of loss in the value of a position 
that arises from changes in risk factors unique to that position.
    Incremental risk means the default risk and credit migration risk of 
a position. Default risk means the risk of loss on a position that could 
result from the failure of an obligor to make timely payments of 
principal or interest on its debt obligation, and the risk of loss that 
could result from bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding. Credit 
migration risk means the price risk that arises from significant changes 
in the underlying credit quality of the position.

[[Page 460]]

    Investment grade means that the entity to which the bank is exposed 
through a loan or security, or the reference entity with respect to a 
credit derivative, has adequate capacity to meet financial commitments 
for the projected life of the asset or exposure. Such an entity or 
reference entity has adequate capacity to meet financial commitments if 
the risk of its default is low and the full and timely repayment of 
principal and interest is expected.
    Market risk means the risk of loss on a position that could result 
from movements in market prices.
    Multilateral development bank means the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the Multilateral Investment Guarantee 
Agency, the International Finance Corporation, the Inter-American 
Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the African Development 
Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the European 
Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, the Nordic Investment 
Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic Development Bank, the 
Council of Europe Development Bank, and any other multilateral lending 
institution or regional development bank in which the U.S. government is 
a shareholder or contributing member or which the FDIC determines poses 
comparable credit risk.
    Nth-to-default credit derivative means a credit derivative that 
provides credit protection only for the nth-defaulting reference 
exposure in a group of reference exposures.
    Over-the-counter (OTC) derivative means a derivative contract that 
is not traded on an exchange that requires the daily receipt and payment 
of cash-variation margin.
    Public sector entity (PSE) means a state, local authority, or other 
governmental subdivision below the sovereign entity level.
    Publicly traded means traded on:
    (1) Any exchange registered with the SEC as a national securities 
exchange under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78f); or
    (2) Any non-U.S.-based securities exchange that:
    (i) Is registered with, or approved by, a national securities 
regulatory authority; and
    (ii) Provides a liquid, two-way market for the instrument in 
question.
    Qualifying securities borrowing transaction means a cash-
collateralized securities borrowing transaction that meets the following 
conditions:
    (1) The transaction is based on liquid and readily marketable 
securities;
    (2) The transaction is marked-to-market daily;
    (3) The transaction is subject to daily margin maintenance 
requirements; and
    (4)(i) The transaction is a securities contract for the purposes of 
section 555 of the Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.C. 555), a qualified 
financial contract for the purposes of section 11(e)(8) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)), or a netting contract 
between or among financial institutions for the purposes of sections 
401-407 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 
1991 (12 U.S.C. 4401-4407) or the Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR part 
231); or
    (ii) If the transaction does not meet the criteria in paragraph 
(4)(i) of this definition, either:
    (A) The bank has conducted sufficient legal review to reach a well-
founded conclusion that:
    (1) The securities borrowing agreement executed in connection with 
the transaction provides the bank the right to accelerate, terminate, 
and close-out on a net basis all transactions under the agreement and to 
liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an event of counterparty 
default, including in a bankruptcy, insolvency, or other similar 
proceeding of the counterparty; and
    (2) Under applicable law of the relevant jurisdiction, its rights 
under the agreement are legal, valid, binding, and enforceable and any 
exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or avoided; or
    (B) The transaction is either overnight or unconditionally 
cancelable at any time by the bank, and the bank has conducted 
sufficient legal review to reach a well-founded conclusion that:
    (1) The securities borrowing agreement executed in connection with 
the transaction provides the bank the right to accelerate, terminate, 
and close-out on a net basis all transactions under the agreement and to 
liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an event of counterparty 
default; and
    (2) Under the law governing the agreement, its rights under the 
agreement are legal, valid, binding, and enforceable.
    Resecuritization means a securitization in which one or more of the 
underlying exposures is a securitization position.
    Resecuritization position means a covered position that is:
    (1) An on- or off-balance sheet exposure to a resecuritization; or
    (2) An exposure that directly or indirectly references a 
resecuritization exposure in paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Revenue obligation means a bond or similar obligation, including 
loans and leases, that is an obligation of a state or other political 
subdivision of a sovereign entity, but for which the government entity 
is committed to repay with revenues from the specific project financed 
rather than with general tax funds.
    SEC means the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.
    Securitization means a transaction in which:

[[Page 461]]

    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties;
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches that reflect different levels 
of seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures;
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities);
    (5) For non-synthetic securitizations, the underlying exposures are 
not owned by an operating company;
    (6) The underlying exposures are not owned by a small business 
investment company described in section 302 of the Small Business 
Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682); and
    (7) The underlying exposures are not owned by a firm an investment 
in which qualifies as a community development investment under 12 U.S.C. 
24 (Eleventh).
    (8) The FDIC may determine that a transaction in which the 
underlying exposures are owned by an investment firm that exercises 
substantially unfettered control over the size and composition of its 
assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet exposures is not a 
securitization based on the transaction's leverage, risk profile, or 
economic substance.
    (9) The FDIC may deem an exposure to a transaction that meets the 
definition of a securitization, notwithstanding paragraph (5), (6), or 
(7) of this definition, to be a securitization based on the 
transaction's leverage, risk profile, or economic substance.
    Securitization position means a covered position that is:
    (1) An on-balance sheet or off-balance sheet credit exposure 
(including credit-enhancing representations and warranties) that arises 
from a securitization (including a resecuritization); or
    (2) An exposure that directly or indirectly references a 
securitization exposure described in paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Sovereign debt position means a direct exposure to a sovereign 
entity.
    Sovereign entity means a central government (including the U.S. 
government) or an agency, department, ministry, or central bank of a 
central government.
    Sovereign of incorporation means the country where an entity is 
incorporated, chartered, or similarly established.
    Specific risk means the risk of loss on a position that could result 
from factors other than broad market movements and includes event risk, 
default risk, and idiosyncratic risk.
    Structural position in a foreign currency means a position that is 
not a trading position and that is:
    (1) Subordinated debt, equity, or minority interest in a 
consolidated subsidiary that is denominated in a foreign currency;
    (2) Capital assigned to foreign branches that is denominated in a 
foreign currency;
    (3) A position related to an unconsolidated subsidiary or another 
item that is denominated in a foreign currency and that is deducted from 
the bank's tier 1 and tier 2 capital; or
    (4) A position designed to hedge a bank's capital ratios or earnings 
against the effect on paragraphs (1), (2), or (3) of this definition of 
adverse exchange rate movements.
    Term repo-style transaction means a repurchase or reverse repurchase 
transaction, or a securities borrowing or securities lending 
transaction, including a transaction in which the bank acts as agent for 
a customer and indemnifies the customer against loss, that has an 
original maturity in excess of one business day, provided that:
    (1) The transaction is based solely on liquid and readily marketable 
securities or cash;
    (2) The transaction is marked-to-market daily and subject to daily 
margin maintenance requirements;
    (3) The transaction is executed under an agreement that provides the 
bank the right to accelerate, terminate, and close-out the transaction 
on a net basis and to liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an 
event of default (including bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar 
proceeding) of the counterparty, provided that, in any such case, any 
exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or avoided 
under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions; \45\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \45\ This requirement is met where all transactions under the 
agreement are (i) executed under U.S. law and (ii) constitute 
``securities contracts'' or ``repurchase agreements'' under section 555 
or 559, respectively, of the Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.C. 555 or 559), 
qualified financial contracts under section 11(e)(8) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)), or netting contracts 
between or among financial institutions under sections 401-407 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 U.S.C. 
4407), or the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR part 231).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) The bank has conducted and documented sufficient legal review to 
conclude with a well-founded basis that the agreement meets the 
requirements of paragraph (3) of this definition and is legal, valid, 
binding, and enforceable under applicable law in the relevant 
jurisdictions.

[[Page 462]]

    Tier 1 capital is defined in appendix A to this part or appendix D 
to this part, as applicable.
    Tier 2 capital is defined in appendix A to this part or appendix D 
to this part, as applicable.
    Trading position means a position that is held by the bank for the 
purpose of short-term resale or with the intent of benefiting from 
actual or expected short-term price movements, or to lock in arbitrage 
profits.
    Two-way market means a market where there are independent bona fide 
offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last 
sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations 
can be determined within one day and settled at that price within a 
relatively short time frame conforming to trade custom.
    Underlying exposure means one or more exposures that have been 
securitized in a securitization transaction.
    Value-at-Risk (VaR) means the estimate of the maximum amount that 
the value of one or more positions could decline due to market price or 
rate movements during a fixed holding period within a stated confidence 
interval.

 Section 3. Requirements for Application of the Market Risk Capital Rule

    (a) Trading positions. (1) Identification of trading positions. A 
bank must have clearly defined policies and procedures for determining 
which of its trading assets and trading liabilities are trading 
positions and which of its trading positions are correlation trading 
positions. These policies and procedures must take into account:
    (i) The extent to which a position, or a hedge of its material 
risks, can be marked-to-market daily by reference to a two-way market; 
and
    (ii) Possible impairments to the liquidity of a position or its 
hedge.
    (2) Trading and hedging strategies. A bank must have clearly defined 
trading and hedging strategies for its trading positions that are 
approved by senior management of the bank.
    (i) The trading strategy must articulate the expected holding period 
of, and the market risk associated with, each portfolio of trading 
positions.
    (ii) The hedging strategy must articulate for each portfolio of 
trading positions the level of market risk the bank is willing to accept 
and must detail the instruments, techniques, and strategies the bank 
will use to hedge the risk of the portfolio.
    (b) Management of covered positions. (1) Active management. A bank 
must have clearly defined policies and procedures for actively managing 
all covered positions. At a minimum, these policies and procedures must 
require:
    (i) Marking positions to market or to model on a daily basis;
    (ii) Daily assessment of the bank's ability to hedge position and 
portfolio risks, and of the extent of market liquidity;
    (iii) Establishment and daily monitoring of limits on positions by a 
risk control unit independent of the trading business unit;
    (iv) Daily monitoring by senior management of information described 
in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of this section;
    (v) At least annual reassessment of established limits on positions 
by senior management; and
    (vi) At least annual assessments by qualified personnel of the 
quality of market inputs to the valuation process, the soundness of key 
assumptions, the reliability of parameter estimation in pricing models, 
and the stability and accuracy of model calibration under alternative 
market scenarios.
    (2) Valuation of covered positions. The bank must have a process for 
prudent valuation of its covered positions that includes policies and 
procedures on the valuation of positions, marking positions to market or 
to model, independent price verification, and valuation adjustments or 
reserves. The valuation process must consider, as appropriate, unearned 
credit spreads, close-out costs, early termination costs, investing and 
funding costs, liquidity, and model risk.
    (c) Requirements for internal models. (1) A bank must obtain the 
prior written approval of the FDIC before using any internal model to 
calculate its risk-based capital requirement under this appendix.
    (2) A bank must meet all of the requirements of this section on an 
ongoing basis. The bank must promptly notify the FDIC when:
    (i) The bank plans to extend the use of a model that the FDIC has 
approved under this appendix to an additional business line or product 
type;
    (ii) The bank makes any change to an internal model approved by the 
FDIC under this appendix that would result in a material change in the 
bank's risk-weighted asset amount for a portfolio of covered positions; 
or
    (iii) The bank makes any material change to its modeling 
assumptions.
    (3) The FDIC may rescind its approval of the use of any internal 
model (in whole or in part) or of the determination of the approach 
under section 9(a)(2)(ii) of this appendix for a bank's modeled 
correlation trading positions and determine an appropriate capital 
requirement for the covered positions to which the model would apply, if 
the FDIC determines that the model no longer complies with this appendix 
or fails to reflect accurately the risks of the bank's covered 
positions.
    (4) The bank must periodically, but no less frequently than 
annually, review its internal

[[Page 463]]

models in light of developments in financial markets and modeling 
technologies, and enhance those models as appropriate to ensure that 
they continue to meet the FDIC's standards for model approval and employ 
risk measurement methodologies that are most appropriate for the bank's 
covered positions.
    (5) The bank must incorporate its internal models into its risk 
management process and integrate the internal models used for 
calculating its VaR-based measure into its daily risk management 
process.
    (6) The level of sophistication of a bank's internal models must be 
commensurate with the complexity and amount of its covered positions. A 
bank's internal models may use any of the generally accepted approaches, 
including but not limited to variance-covariance models, historical 
simulations, or Monte Carlo simulations, to measure market risk.
    (7) The bank's internal models must properly measure all the 
material risks in the covered positions to which they are applied.
    (8) The bank's internal models must conservatively assess the risks 
arising from less liquid positions and positions with limited price 
transparency under realistic market scenarios.
    (9) The bank must have a rigorous and well-defined process for re-
estimating, re-evaluating, and updating its internal models to ensure 
continued applicability and relevance.
    (10) If a bank uses internal models to measure specific risk, the 
internal models must also satisfy the requirements in paragraph (b)(1) 
of section 7 of this appendix.
    (d) Control, oversight, and validation mechanisms. (1) The bank must 
have a risk control unit that reports directly to senior management and 
is independent from the business trading units.
    (2) The bank must validate its internal models initially and on an 
ongoing basis. The bank's validation process must be independent of the 
internal models' development, implementation, and operation, or the 
validation process must be subjected to an independent review of its 
adequacy and effectiveness. Validation must include:
    (i) An evaluation of the conceptual soundness of (including 
developmental evidence supporting) the internal models;
    (ii) An ongoing monitoring process that includes verification of 
processes and the comparison of the bank's model outputs with relevant 
internal and external data sources or estimation techniques; and
    (iii) An outcomes analysis process that includes backtesting. For 
internal models used to calculate the VaR-based measure, this process 
must include a comparison of the changes in the bank's portfolio value 
that would have occurred were end-of-day positions to remain unchanged 
(therefore, excluding fees, commissions, reserves, net interest income, 
and intraday trading) with VaR-based measures during a sample period not 
used in model development.
    (3) The bank must stress test the market risk of its covered 
positions at a frequency appropriate to each portfolio, and in no case 
less frequently than quarterly. The stress tests must take into account 
concentration risk (including but not limited to concentrations in 
single issuers, industries, sectors, or markets), illiquidity under 
stressed market conditions, and risks arising from the bank's trading 
activities that may not be adequately captured in its internal models.
    (4) The bank must have an internal audit function independent of 
business-line management that at least annually assesses the 
effectiveness of the controls supporting the bank's market risk 
measurement systems, including the activities of the business trading 
units and independent risk control unit, compliance with policies and 
procedures, and calculation of the bank's measures for market risk under 
this appendix. At least annually, the internal audit function must 
report its findings to the bank's board of directors (or a committee 
thereof).
    (e) Internal assessment of capital adequacy. The bank must have a 
rigorous process for assessing its overall capital adequacy in relation 
to its market risk. The assessment must take into account risks that may 
not be captured fully in the VaR-based measure, including concentration 
and liquidity risk under stressed market conditions.
    (f) Documentation. The bank must adequately document all material 
aspects of its internal models, management and valuation of covered 
positions, control, oversight, validation and review processes and 
results, and internal assessment of capital adequacy.

   Section 4. Adjustments to the Risk-Based Capital Ratio Calculations

    (a) Risk-based capital ratio denominators. A bank must calculate its 
general risk-based capital ratio denominator by following the steps 
described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this section. A bank 
subject to appendix D to this part must use its general risk-based 
capital ratio denominator for purposes of determining its total risk-
based capital ratio and its tier 1 risk-based capital ratio under 
section 3(a)(2)(ii) and section 3(a)(3)(ii), respectively, of appendix D 
to this part, provided that the bank may not use the supervisory formula 
approach (SFA) in section 10(b)(2)(vii)(B) of this appendix for purposes 
of this calculation. A bank subject to appendix D to this part also must 
calculate an advanced risk-based capital ratio denominator by following 
the steps in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this section for 
purposes of determining its total risk-based capital ratio and its tier 
1 risk-based capital ratio under sections 3(a)(2)(i) and section

[[Page 464]]

3(a)(3)(i), respectively, of appendix D to this part.
    (1) Adjusted risk-weighted assets. (i) The bank must calculate:
    (A) General adjusted risk-weighted assets, which equals risk-
weighted assets as determined in accordance with appendix A to this part 
with the adjustments in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) and, if applicable, 
(a)(1)(iii) of this section; and
    (B) For a bank subject to appendix D to this part, advanced adjusted 
risk-weighted assets, which equal risk-weighted assets as determined in 
accordance with appendix D to this part with the adjustments in 
paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) For purposes of calculating its general and advanced adjusted 
risk-weighted assets under paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A) and (a)(1)(i)(B) of 
this section, respectively, the bank must exclude the risk-weighted 
asset amounts of all covered positions (except foreign exchange 
positions that are not trading positions and over-the-counter derivative 
positions).
    (iii) For purposes of calculating its general adjusted risk-weighted 
assets under paragraph (a)(1)(i)(A) of this section, a bank may exclude 
receivables that arise from the posting of cash collateral and are 
associated with qualifying securities borrowing transactions to the 
extent the receivable is collateralized by the market value of the 
borrowed securities.
    (2) Measure for market risk. The bank must calculate the general 
measure for market risk (except, as provided in paragraph (a) of this 
section, that the bank may not use the SFA in section 10(b)(2)(vii)(B) 
of this appendix for purposes of this calculation), which equals the sum 
of the VaR-based capital requirement, stressed VaR-based capital 
requirement, specific risk add-ons, incremental risk capital 
requirement, comprehensive risk capital requirement, and capital 
requirement for de minimis exposures all as defined under this paragraph 
(a)(2). A bank subject to appendix D to this part also must calculate 
the advanced measure for market risk, which equals the sum of the VaR-
based capital requirement, stressed VaR-based capital requirement, 
specific risk add-ons, incremental risk capital requirement, 
comprehensive risk capital requirement, and capital requirement for de 
minimis exposures as defined under this paragraph (a)(2).
    (i) VaR-based capital requirement. A bank's VaR-based capital 
requirement equals the greater of:
    (A) The previous day's VaR-based measure as calculated under section 
5 of this appendix; or
    (B) The average of the daily VaR-based measures as calculated under 
section 5 of this appendix for each of the preceding 60 business days 
multiplied by three, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (ii) Stressed VaR-based capital requirement. A bank's stressed VaR-
based capital requirement equals the greater of:
    (A) The most recent stressed VaR-based measure as calculated under 
section 6 of this appendix; or
    (B) The average of the stressed VaR-based measures as calculated 
under section 6 of this appendix for each of the preceding 12 weeks 
multiplied by three, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (iii) Specific risk add-ons. A bank's specific risk add-ons equal 
any specific risk add-ons that are required under section 7 of this 
appendix and are calculated in accordance with section 10 of this 
appendix.
    (iv) Incremental risk capital requirement. A bank's incremental risk 
capital requirement equals any incremental risk capital requirement as 
calculated under section 8 of this appendix.
    (v) Comprehensive risk capital requirement. A bank's comprehensive 
risk capital requirement equals any comprehensive risk capital 
requirement as calculated under section 9 of this appendix.
    (vi) Capital requirement for de minimis exposures. A bank's capital 
requirement for de minimis exposures equals:
    (A) The absolute value of the market value of those de minimis 
exposures that are not captured in the bank's VaR-based measure or under 
paragraph (a)(2)(vi)(B) of this section; and
    (B) With the prior written approval of the FDIC, the capital 
requirement for any de minimis exposures using alternative techniques 
that appropriately measure the market risk associated with those 
exposures.
    (3) Market risk equivalent assets. The bank must calculate general 
market risk equivalent assets as the general measure for market risk (as 
calculated in paragraph (a)(2) of this section) multiplied by 12.5. A 
bank subject to appendix D to this part also must calculate advanced 
market risk equivalent assets as the advanced measure for market risk 
(as calculated in paragraph (a)(2) of this section) multiplied by 12.5.
    (4) Denominator calculation. (i) The bank must add general market 
risk equivalent assets (as calculated in paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section) to general adjusted risk-weighted assets (as calculated in 
paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section). The resulting sum is the bank's 
general risk-based capital ratio denominator.
    (ii) A bank subject to appendix D to this part must add advanced 
market risk equivalent assets (as calculated in paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section) to advanced adjusted risk-weighted assets (as calculated in 
paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section). The resulting sum is the bank's 
advanced risk-based capital ratio denominator.
    (b) Backtesting. A bank must compare each of its most recent 250 
business days' trading

[[Page 465]]

losses (excluding fees, commissions, reserves, net interest income, and 
intraday trading) with the corresponding daily VaR-based measures 
calibrated to a one-day holding period and at a one-tail, 99.0 percent 
confidence level. A bank must begin backtesting as required by this 
paragraph no later than one year after the later of January 1, 2013, and 
the date on which the bank becomes subject to this appendix. In the 
interim, consistent with safety and soundness principles, a bank subject 
to this appendix as of its effective date should continue to follow 
backtesting procedures in accordance with the FDIC's supervisory 
expectations.
    (1) Once each quarter, the bank must identify the number of 
exceptions (that is, the number of business days for which the actual 
daily net trading loss, if any, exceeds the corresponding daily VaR-
based measure) that have occurred over the preceding 250 business days.
    (2) A bank must use the multiplication factor in table 1 of this 
appendix that corresponds to the number of exceptions identified in 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section to determine its VaR-based capital 
requirement for market risk under paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section 
and to determine its stressed VaR-based capital requirement for market 
risk under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section until it obtains the 
next quarter's backtesting results, unless the FDIC notifies the bank in 
writing that a different adjustment or other action is appropriate.

     Table 1--Multiplication Factors Based on Results of Backtesting
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Multiplication
                 Number of exceptions                        factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 or fewer............................................              3.00
5.....................................................              3.40
6.....................................................              3.50
7.....................................................              3.65
8.....................................................              3.75
9.....................................................              3.85
10 or more............................................              4.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                      Section 5. VaR-Based Measure

    (a) General requirement. A bank must use one or more internal models 
to calculate daily a VaR-based measure of the general market risk of all 
covered positions. The daily VaR-based measure also may reflect the 
bank's specific risk for one or more portfolios of debt and equity 
positions, if the internal models meet the requirements of paragraph 
(b)(1) of section 7 of this appendix. The daily VaR-based measure must 
also reflect the bank's specific risk for any portfolio of correlation 
trading positions that is modeled under section 9 of this appendix. A 
bank may elect to include term repo-style transactions in its VaR-based 
measure, provided that the bank includes all such term repo-style 
transactions consistently over time.
    (1) The bank's internal models for calculating its VaR-based measure 
must use risk factors sufficient to measure the market risk inherent in 
all covered positions. The market risk categories must include, as 
appropriate, interest rate risk, credit spread risk, equity price risk, 
foreign exchange risk, and commodity price risk. For material positions 
in the major currencies and markets, modeling techniques must 
incorporate enough segments of the yield curve--in no case less than 
six--to capture differences in volatility and less than perfect 
correlation of rates along the yield curve.
    (2) The VaR-based measure may incorporate empirical correlations 
within and across risk categories, provided the bank validates and 
demonstrates the reasonableness of its process for measuring 
correlations. If the VaR-based measure does not incorporate empirical 
correlations across risk categories, the bank must add the separate 
measures from its internal models used to calculate the VaR-based 
measure for the appropriate market risk categories (interest rate risk, 
credit spread risk, equity price risk, foreign exchange rate risk, and/
or commodity price risk) to determine its aggregate VaR-based measure.
    (3) The VaR-based measure must include the risks arising from the 
nonlinear price characteristics of options positions or positions with 
embedded optionality and the sensitivity of the market value of the 
positions to changes in the volatility of the underlying rates, prices, 
or other material risk factors. A bank with a large or complex options 
portfolio must measure the volatility of options positions or positions 
with embedded optionality by different maturities and/or strike prices, 
where material.
    (4) The bank must be able to justify to the satisfaction of the FDIC 
the omission of any risk factors from the calculation of its VaR-based 
measure that the bank uses in its pricing models.
    (5) The bank must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC the 
appropriateness of any proxies used to capture the risks of the bank's 
actual positions for which such proxies are used.
    (b) Quantitative requirements for VaR-based measure. (1) The VaR-
based measure must be calculated on a daily basis using a one-tail, 99.0 
percent confidence level, and a holding period equivalent to a 10-
business-day movement in underlying risk factors, such as rates, 
spreads, and prices. To calculate VaR-based measures using a 10-
business-day holding period, the bank may calculate 10-business-day 
measures directly or may convert VaR-based measures using holding 
periods other than 10 business days to the equivalent of a 10-business-
day holding period. A bank that converts its VaR-based measure in such

[[Page 466]]

a manner must be able to justify the reasonableness of its approach to 
the satisfaction of the FDIC.
    (2) The VaR-based measure must be based on a historical observation 
period of at least one year. Data used to determine the VaR-based 
measure must be relevant to the bank's actual exposures and of 
sufficient quality to support the calculation of risk-based capital 
requirements. The bank must update data sets at least monthly or more 
frequently as changes in market conditions or portfolio composition 
warrant. For a bank that uses a weighting scheme or other method for the 
historical observation period, the bank must either:
    (i) Use an effective observation period of at least one year in 
which the average time lag of the observations is at least six months; 
or
    (ii) Demonstrate to the FDIC that its weighting scheme is more 
effective than a weighting scheme with an average time lag of at least 
six months representing the volatility of the bank's trading portfolio 
over a full business cycle. A bank using this option must update its 
data more frequently than monthly and in a manner appropriate for the 
type of weighting scheme.
    (c) A bank must divide its portfolio into a number of significant 
subportfolios approved by the FDIC for subportfolio backtesting 
purposes. These subportfolios must be sufficient to allow the bank and 
the FDIC to assess the adequacy of the VaR model at the risk factor 
level; the FDIC will evaluate the appropriateness of these subportfolios 
relative to the value and composition of the bank's covered positions. 
The bank must retain and make available to the FDIC the following 
information for each subportfolio for each business day over the 
previous two years (500 business days), with no more than a 60-day lag:
    (1) A daily VaR-based measure for the subportfolio calibrated to a 
one-tail, 99.0 percent confidence level;
    (2) The daily profit or loss for the subportfolio (that is, the net 
change in price of the positions held in the portfolio at the end of the 
previous business day); and
    (3) The p-value of the profit or loss on each day (that is, the 
probability of observing a profit that is less than, or a loss that is 
greater than, the amount reported for purposes of paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section based on the model used to calculate the VaR-based measure 
described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section).

                  Section 6. Stressed VaR-Based Measure

    (a) General requirement. At least weekly, a bank must use the same 
internal model(s) used to calculate its VaR-based measure to calculate a 
stressed VaR-based measure.
    (b) Quantitative requirements for stressed VaR-based measure. (1) A 
bank must calculate a stressed VaR-based measure for its covered 
positions using the same model(s) used to calculate the VaR-based 
measure, subject to the same confidence level and holding period 
applicable to the VaR-based measure under section 5 of this appendix, 
but with model inputs calibrated to historical data from a continuous 
12-month period that reflects a period of significant financial stress 
appropriate to the bank's current portfolio.
    (2) The stressed VaR-based measure must be calculated at least 
weekly and be no less than the bank's VaR-based measure.
    (3) A bank must have policies and procedures that describe how it 
determines the period of significant financial stress used to calculate 
the bank's stressed VaR-based measure under this section and must be 
able to provide empirical support for the period used. The bank must 
obtain the prior approval of the FDIC for, and notify the FDIC if the 
bank makes any material changes to, these policies and procedures. The 
policies and procedures must address:
    (i) How the bank links the period of significant financial stress 
used to calculate the stressed VaR-based measure to the composition and 
directional bias of its current portfolio; and
    (ii) The bank's process for selecting, reviewing, and updating the 
period of significant financial stress used to calculate the stressed 
VaR-based measure and for monitoring the appropriateness of the period 
to the bank's current portfolio.
    (4) Nothing in this section prevents the FDIC from requiring a bank 
to use a different period of significant financial stress in the 
calculation of the stressed VaR-based measure.

                        Section 7. Specific Risk

    (a) General requirement. A bank must use one of the methods in this 
section to measure the specific risk for each of its debt, equity, and 
securitization positions with specific risk.
    (b) Modeled specific risk. A bank may use models to measure the 
specific risk of covered positions as provided in paragraph (a) of 
section 5 of this appendix (therefore, excluding securitization 
positions that are not modeled under section 9 of this appendix). A bank 
must use models to measure the specific risk of correlation trading 
positions that are modeled under section 9 of this appendix.
    (1) Requirements for specific risk modeling. (i) If a bank uses 
internal models to measure the specific risk of a portfolio, the 
internal models must:
    (A) Explain the historical price variation in the portfolio;
    (B) Be responsive to changes in market conditions;
    (C) Be robust to an adverse environment, including signaling rising 
risk in an adverse environment; and

[[Page 467]]

    (D) Capture all material components of specific risk for the debt 
and equity positions in the portfolio. Specifically, the internal models 
must:
    (1) Capture event risk and idiosyncratic risk;
    (2) Capture and demonstrate sensitivity to material differences 
between positions that are similar but not identical and to changes in 
portfolio composition and concentrations.
    (ii) If a bank calculates an incremental risk measure for a 
portfolio of debt or equity positions under section 8 of this appendix, 
the bank is not required to capture default and credit migration risks 
in its internal models used to measure the specific risk of those 
portfolios.
    (2) Specific risk fully modeled for one or more portfolios. If the 
bank's VaR-based measure captures all material aspects of specific risk 
for one or more of its portfolios of debt, equity, or correlation 
trading positions, the bank has no specific risk add-on for those 
portfolios for purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of section 4 of this 
appendix.
    (c) Specific risk not modeled. (1) If the bank's VaR-based measure 
does not capture all material aspects of specific risk for a portfolio 
of debt, equity, or correlation trading positions, the bank must 
calculate a specific-risk add-on for the portfolio under the 
standardized measurement method as described in section 10 of this 
appendix.
    (2) A bank must calculate a specific risk add-on under the 
standardized measurement method as described in section 10 of this 
appendix for all of its securitization positions that are not modeled 
under section 9 of this appendix.

                       Section 8. Incremental Risk

    (a) General requirement. A bank that measures the specific risk of a 
portfolio of debt positions under section 7(b) of this appendix using 
internal models must calculate at least weekly an incremental risk 
measure for that portfolio according to the requirements in this 
section. The incremental risk measure is the bank's measure of potential 
losses due to incremental risk over a one-year time horizon at a one-
tail, 99.9 percent confidence level, either under the assumption of a 
constant level of risk, or under the assumption of constant positions. 
With the prior approval of the FDIC, a bank may choose to include 
portfolios of equity positions in its incremental risk model, provided 
that it consistently includes such equity positions in a manner that is 
consistent with how the bank internally measures and manages the 
incremental risk of such positions at the portfolio level. If equity 
positions are included in the model, for modeling purposes default is 
considered to have occurred upon the default of any debt of the issuer 
of the equity position. A bank may not include correlation trading 
positions or securitization positions in its incremental risk measure.
    (b) Requirements for incremental risk modeling. For purposes of 
calculating the incremental risk measure, the incremental risk model 
must:
    (1) Measure incremental risk over a one-year time horizon and at a 
one-tail, 99.9 percent confidence level, either under the assumption of 
a constant level of risk, or under the assumption of constant positions.
    (i) A constant level of risk assumption means that the bank 
rebalances, or rolls over, its trading positions at the beginning of 
each liquidity horizon over the one-year horizon in a manner that 
maintains the bank's initial risk level. The bank must determine the 
frequency of rebalancing in a manner consistent with the liquidity 
horizons of the positions in the portfolio. The liquidity horizon of a 
position or set of positions is the time required for a bank to reduce 
its exposure to, or hedge all of its material risks of, the position(s) 
in a stressed market. The liquidity horizon for a position or set of 
positions may not be less than the shorter of three months or the 
contractual maturity of the position.
    (ii) A constant position assumption means that the bank maintains 
the same set of positions throughout the one-year horizon. If a bank 
uses this assumption, it must do so consistently across all portfolios.
    (iii) A bank's selection of a constant position or a constant risk 
assumption must be consistent between the bank's incremental risk model 
and its comprehensive risk model described in section 9 of this 
appendix, if applicable.
    (iv) A bank's treatment of liquidity horizons must be consistent 
between the bank's incremental risk model and its comprehensive risk 
model described in section 9 of this appendix, if applicable.
    (2) Recognize the impact of correlations between default and 
migration events among obligors.
    (3) Reflect the effect of issuer and market concentrations, as well 
as concentrations that can arise within and across product classes 
during stressed conditions.
    (4) Reflect netting only of long and short positions that reference 
the same financial instrument.
    (5) Reflect any material mismatch between a position and its hedge.
    (6) Recognize the effect that liquidity horizons have on dynamic 
hedging strategies. In such cases, a bank must:
    (i) Choose to model the rebalancing of the hedge consistently over 
the relevant set of trading positions;
    (ii) Demonstrate that the inclusion of rebalancing results in a more 
appropriate risk measurement;

[[Page 468]]

    (iii) Demonstrate that the market for the hedge is sufficiently 
liquid to permit rebalancing during periods of stress; and
    (iv) Capture in the incremental risk model any residual risks 
arising from such hedging strategies.
    (7) Reflect the nonlinear impact of options and other positions with 
material nonlinear behavior with respect to default and migration 
changes.
    (8) Maintain consistency with the bank's internal risk management 
methodologies for identifying, measuring, and managing risk.
    (c) Calculation of incremental risk capital requirement. The 
incremental risk capital requirement is the greater of:
    (1) The average of the incremental risk measures over the previous 
12 weeks; or
    (2) The most recent incremental risk measure.

                      Section 9. Comprehensive Risk

    (a) General requirement. (1) Subject to the prior approval of the 
FDIC, a bank may use the method in this section to measure comprehensive 
risk, that is, all price risk, for one or more portfolios of correlation 
trading positions.
    (2) A bank that measures the price risk of a portfolio of 
correlation trading positions using internal models must calculate at 
least weekly a comprehensive risk measure that captures all price risk 
according to the requirements of this section. The comprehensive risk 
measure is either:
    (i) The sum of:
    (A) The bank's modeled measure of all price risk determined 
according to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section; and
    (B) A surcharge for the bank's modeled correlation trading positions 
equal to the total specific risk add-on for such positions as calculated 
under section 10 of this appendix multiplied by 8.0 percent; or
    (ii) With approval of the FDIC and provided the bank has met the 
requirements of this section for a period of at least one year and can 
demonstrate the effectiveness of the model through the results of 
ongoing model validation efforts including robust benchmarking, the 
greater of:
    (A) The bank's modeled measure of all price risk determined 
according to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section; or
    (B) The total specific risk add-on that would apply to the bank's 
modeled correlation trading positions as calculated under section 10 of 
this appendix multiplied by 8.0 percent.
    (b) Requirements for modeling all price risk. If a bank uses an 
internal model to measure the price risk of a portfolio of correlation 
trading positions:
    (1) The internal model must measure comprehensive risk over a one-
year time horizon at a one-tail, 99.9 percent confidence level, either 
under the assumption of a constant level of risk, or under the 
assumption of constant positions.
    (2) The model must capture all material price risk, including but 
not limited to the following:
    (i) The risks associated with the contractual structure of cash 
flows of the position, its issuer, and its underlying exposures;
    (ii) Credit spread risk, including nonlinear price risks;
    (iii) The volatility of implied correlations, including nonlinear 
price risks such as the cross-effect between spreads and correlations;
    (iv) Basis risk;
    (v) Recovery rate volatility as it relates to the propensity for 
recovery rates to affect tranche prices; and
    (vi) To the extent the comprehensive risk measure incorporates the 
benefits of dynamic hedging, the static nature of the hedge over the 
liquidity horizon must be recognized. In such cases, a bank must:
    (A) Choose to model the rebalancing of the hedge consistently over 
the relevant set of trading positions;
    (B) Demonstrate that the inclusion of rebalancing results in a more 
appropriate risk measurement;
    (C) Demonstrate that the market for the hedge is sufficiently liquid 
to permit rebalancing during periods of stress; and
    (D) Capture in the comprehensive risk model any residual risks 
arising from such hedging strategies;
    (3) The bank must use market data that are relevant in representing 
the risk profile of the bank's correlation trading positions in order to 
ensure that the bank fully captures the material risks of the 
correlation trading positions in its comprehensive risk measure in 
accordance with this section; and
    (4) The bank must be able to demonstrate that its model is an 
appropriate representation of comprehensive risk in light of the 
historical price variation of its correlation trading positions.
    (c) Requirements for stress testing. (1) A bank must at least weekly 
apply specific, supervisory stress scenarios to its portfolio of 
correlation trading positions that capture changes in:
    (i) Default rates;
    (ii) Recovery rates;
    (iii) Credit spreads;
    (iv) Correlations of underlying exposures; and
    (v) Correlations of a correlation trading position and its hedge.
    (2) Other requirements. (i) A bank must retain and make available to 
the FDIC the results of the supervisory stress testing, including 
comparisons with the capital requirements generated by the bank's 
comprehensive risk model.

[[Page 469]]

    (ii) A bank must report to the FDIC promptly any instances where the 
stress tests indicate any material deficiencies in the comprehensive 
risk model.
    (d) Calculation of comprehensive risk capital requirement. The 
comprehensive risk capital requirement is the greater of:
    (1) The average of the comprehensive risk measures over the previous 
12 weeks; or
    (2) The most recent comprehensive risk measure.

      Section 10. Standardized Measurement Method for Specific Risk

    (a) General requirement. A bank must calculate a total specific risk 
add-on for each portfolio of debt and equity positions for which the 
bank's VaR-based measure does not capture all material aspects of 
specific risk and for all securitization positions that are not modeled 
under section 9 of this appendix. A bank must calculate each specific 
risk add-on in accordance with the requirements of this section. 
Notwithstanding any other definition or requirement in this appendix, a 
position that would have qualified as a debt position or an equity 
position but for the fact that it qualifies as a correlation trading 
position under paragraph (2) of the definition of correlation trading 
position, shall be considered a debt position or an equity position, 
respectively, for purposes of this section 10.
    (1) The specific risk add-on for an individual debt or 
securitization position that represents sold credit protection is capped 
at the notional amount of the credit derivative contract. The specific 
risk add-on for an individual debt or securitization position that 
represents purchased credit protection is capped at the current market 
value of the transaction plus the absolute value of the present value of 
all remaining payments to the protection seller under the transaction. 
This sum is equal to the value of the protection leg of the transaction.
    (2) For debt, equity, or securitization positions that are 
derivatives with linear payoffs, a bank must assign a specific risk-
weighting factor to the market value of the effective notional amount of 
the underlying instrument or index portfolio, except for a 
securitization position for which the bank directly calculates a 
specific risk add-on using the SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) of this 
section. A swap must be included as an effective notional position in 
the underlying instrument or portfolio, with the receiving side treated 
as a long position and the paying side treated as a short position. For 
debt, equity, or securitization positions that are derivatives with 
nonlinear payoffs, a bank must risk weight the market value of the 
effective notional amount of the underlying instrument or portfolio 
multiplied by the derivative's delta.
    (3) For debt, equity, or securitization positions, a bank may net 
long and short positions (including derivatives) in identical issues or 
identical indices. A bank may also net positions in depositary receipts 
against an opposite position in an identical equity in different 
markets, provided that the bank includes the costs of conversion.
    (4) A set of transactions consisting of either a debt position and 
its credit derivative hedge or a securitization position and its credit 
derivative hedge has a specific risk add-on of zero if:
    (i) The debt or securitization position is fully hedged by a total 
return swap (or similar instrument where there is a matching of swap 
payments and changes in market value of the debt or securitization 
position);
    (ii) There is an exact match between the reference obligation of the 
swap and the debt or securitization position;
    (iii) There is an exact match between the currency of the swap and 
the debt or securitization position; and
    (iv) There is either an exact match between the maturity date of the 
swap and the maturity date of the debt or securitization position; or, 
in cases where a total return swap references a portfolio of positions 
with different maturity dates, the total return swap maturity date must 
match the maturity date of the underlying asset in that portfolio that 
has the latest maturity date.
    (5) The specific risk add-on for a set of transactions consisting of 
either a debt position and its credit derivative hedge or a 
securitization position and its credit derivative hedge that does not 
meet the criteria of paragraph (a)(4) of this section is equal to 20.0 
percent of the capital requirement for the side of the transaction with 
the higher specific risk add-on when:
    (i) The credit risk of the position is fully hedged by a credit 
default swap or similar instrument;
    (ii) There is an exact match between the reference obligation of the 
credit derivative hedge and the debt or securitization position;
    (iii) There is an exact match between the currency of the credit 
derivative hedge and the debt or securitization position; and
    (iv) There is either an exact match between the maturity date of the 
credit derivative hedge and the maturity date of the debt or 
securitization position; or, in the case where the credit derivative 
hedge has a standard maturity date:
    (A) The maturity date of the credit derivative hedge is within 30 
business days of the maturity date of the debt or securitization 
position; or
    (B) For purchased credit protection, the maturity date of the credit 
derivative hedge is later than the maturity date of the debt or 
securitization position, but is no later than

[[Page 470]]

the standard maturity date for that instrument that immediately follows 
the maturity date of the debt or securitization position. The maturity 
date of the credit derivative hedge may not exceed the maturity date of 
the debt or securitization position by more than 90 calendar days.
    (6) The specific risk add-on for a set of transactions consisting of 
either a debt position and its credit derivative hedge or a 
securitization position and its credit derivative hedge that does not 
meet the criteria of either paragraph (a)(4) or (a)(5) of this section, 
but in which all or substantially all of the price risk has been hedged, 
is equal to the specific risk add-on for the side of the transaction 
with the higher specific risk add-on.
    (b) Debt and securitization positions. (1) The total specific risk 
add-on for a portfolio of debt or securitization positions is the sum of 
the specific risk add-ons for individual debt or securitization 
positions, as computed under this section. To determine the specific 
risk add-on for individual debt or securitization positions, a bank must 
multiply the absolute value of the current market value of each net long 
or net short debt or securitization position in the portfolio by the 
appropriate specific risk-weighting factor as set forth in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(vii) of this section.
    (2) For the purpose of this section, the appropriate specific risk-
weighting factors include:
    (i) Sovereign debt positions. (A) In general. A bank must assign a 
specific risk-weighting factor to a sovereign debt position based on the 
CRC applicable to the sovereign entity and, as applicable, the remaining 
contractual maturity of the position, in accordance with table 2. 
Sovereign debt positions that are backed by the full faith and credit of 
the United States are treated as having a CRC of 0.

                      Table 2--Specific Risk-Weighting Factors for Sovereign Debt Positions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Specific risk-weighting factor       Percent
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         0-1                                                0.0
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity of            0.25
                                                                6 months or less.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
CRC of Sovereign...............................          2-3   Remaining contractual maturity of            1.0
                                                                greater than 6 and up to and
                                                                including 24 months.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity               1.6
                                                                exceeds 24 months.
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         4-6                                                8.0
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           7                                               12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No CRC.......................................................                                               8.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Default by the Sovereign Entity..............................                                              12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(2)(i)(A) of this section, a bank 
may assign to a sovereign debt position a specific risk-weighting factor 
that is lower than the applicable specific risk-weighting factor in 
table 2 if:
    (1) The position is denominated in the sovereign entity's currency;
    (2) The bank has at least an equivalent amount of liabilities in 
that currency; and
    (3) The sovereign entity allows banks under its jurisdiction to 
assign the lower specific risk-weighting factor to the same exposures to 
the sovereign entity.
    (C) A bank must assign a 12.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor 
to a sovereign debt position immediately upon determination that a 
default has occurred; or if a default has occurred within the previous 
five years.
    (D) A bank must assign an 8.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor 
to a sovereign debt position if the sovereign entity does not have a CRC 
assigned to it, unless the sovereign debt position must be assigned a 
higher specific risk-weighting factor under paragraph (b)(2)(i)(C) of 
this section.

[[Page 471]]

    (ii) Certain supranational entity and multilateral development bank 
debt positions. A bank may assign a 0.0 percent specific risk-weighting 
factor to a debt position that is an exposure to the Bank for 
International Settlements, the European Central Bank, the European 
Commission, the International Monetary Fund, or an MDB.
    (iii) GSE debt positions. A bank must assign a 1.6 percent specific 
risk-weighting factor to a debt position that is an exposure to a GSE. 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, a bank must assign an 8.0 percent 
specific risk-weighting factor to preferred stock issued by a GSE.
    (iv) Depository institution, foreign bank, and credit union debt 
positions. (A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iv)(B) of this 
section, a bank must assign a specific risk-weighting factor to a debt 
position that is an exposure to a depository institution, a foreign 
bank, or a credit union using the specific risk-weighting factor that 
corresponds to that entity's sovereign of incorporation and, as 
applicable, the remaining contractual maturity of the position, in 
accordance with table 3.

    Table 3--Specific Risk-Weighting Factors for Depository Institution, Foreign Bank, and Credit Union Debt
                                                    Positions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Specific risk-weighting factor       Percent
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity of            0.25
                                                                6 months or less.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
CRC of Sovereign...............................          0-2   Remaining contractual maturity of            1.0
                                                                greater than 6 and up to and
                                                                including 24 months.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity               1.6
                                                                exceeds 24 months.
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           3                                                8.0
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         4-7                                               12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No CRC.......................................................                                               8.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Default by the Sovereign Entity..............................                                              12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) A bank must assign a specific risk-weighting factor of 8.0 
percent to a debt position that is an exposure to a depository 
institution or a foreign bank that is includable in the depository 
institution's or foreign bank's regulatory capital and that is not 
subject to deduction as a reciprocal holding under appendix A to this 
part.
    (C) A bank must assign a 12.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor 
to a debt position that is an exposure to a foreign bank immediately 
upon determination that a default by the foreign bank's sovereign of 
incorporation has occurred or if a default by the foreign bank's 
sovereign of incorporation has occurred within the previous five years.
    (v) PSE debt positions. (A) Except as provided in paragraph 
(b)(2)(v)(B) of this section, a bank must assign a specific risk-
weighting factor to a debt position that is an exposure to a PSE based 
on the specific risk-weighting factor that corresponds to the PSE's 
sovereign of incorporation and to the position's categorization as a 
general obligation or revenue obligation and, as applicable, the 
remaining contractual maturity of the position, as set forth in tables 4 
and 5.
    (B) A bank may assign a lower specific risk-weighting factor than 
would otherwise apply under tables 4 and 5 to a debt position that is an 
exposure to a foreign PSE if:
    (1) The PSE's sovereign of incorporation allows banks under its 
jurisdiction to assign a lower specific risk-weighting factor to such 
position; and
    (2) The specific risk-weighting factor is not lower than the risk 
weight that corresponds to the PSE's sovereign of incorporation in 
accordance with tables 4 and 5.
    (C) A bank must assign a 12.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor 
to a PSE debt position immediately upon determination that a default by 
the PSE's sovereign of incorporation has occurred or if a default by the 
PSE's sovereign of incorporation has occurred within the previous five 
years.

[[Page 472]]



               Table 4--Specific Risk-Weighting Factors for PSE General Obligation Debt Positions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               General obligation specific risk-      Percent
                                                                  weighting factor (in percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity of            0.25
                                                                6 months or less.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
CRC of Sovereign...............................          0-2   Remaining contractual maturity of            1.0
                                                                greater than 6 and up to and
                                                                including 24 months.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity               1.6
                                                                exceeds 24 months.
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           3                                                8.0
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         4-7                                               12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No CRC.......................................................                                               8.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Default by the Sovereign Entity..............................                                              12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


               Table 5--Specific Risk-Weighting Factors for PSE Revenue Obligation Debt Positions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Revenue obligation specific risk-      Percent
                                                                        weighting factor
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity of            0.25
                                                                6 months or less.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
CRC of Sovereign...............................          0-1   Remaining contractual maturity of            1.0
                                                                greater than 6 and up to and
                                                                including 24 months.
                                                              --------------------------------------------------
                                                               Remaining contractual maturity               1.6
                                                                exceeds 24 months.
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         2-3                                                8.0
                                                ----------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         4-7                                               12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No CRC.......................................................                                               8.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Default by the Sovereign Entity..............................                                              12.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (vi) Corporate debt positions. Except as otherwise provided in 
paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(B), a bank must assign a specific risk-weighting 
factor to a corporate debt position in accordance with the investment 
grade methodology in paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(A) of this section.
    (A) Investment grade methodology. (1) For corporate debt positions 
that are exposures to entities that have issued and outstanding publicly 
traded instruments, a bank must assign a specific risk-weighting factor 
based on the category and remaining contractual maturity of the 
position, in accordance with table 6. For purposes of this paragraph 
(A), the bank must determine whether the position is in the investment 
grade or not investment grade category.

[[Page 473]]



  Table 6--Specific Risk-Weighting Factors for Corporate Debt Positions
                 Under the Investment Grade Methodology
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Specific risk-
                                  Remaining contractual      weighting
            Category                     maturity           factor (in
                                                             percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Investment Grade...............  6 months or less.......            0.50
                                 Greater than 6 and up              2.00
                                  to and including 24
                                  months.
                                 Greater than 24 months.            4.00
Not-investment Grade...........  .......................           12.00
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) A bank must assign an 8.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor 
for corporate debt positions that are exposures to entities that do not 
have publicly traded instruments outstanding.
    (B) Limitations. (1) A bank must assign a specific risk-weighting 
factor of at least 8.0 percent to an interest-only mortgage-backed 
security that is not a securitization position.
    (2) A bank shall not assign a corporate debt position a specific 
risk-weighting factor that is lower than the specific risk-weighting 
factor that corresponds to the CRC of the issuer's sovereign of 
incorporation in table 1.
    (vii) Securitization positions. (A) General requirements. (1) A bank 
that does not use appendix D to this part must assign a specific risk-
weighting factor to a securitization position using either the 
simplified supervisory formula approach (SSFA) in accordance with 
section 11 of this appendix or assign a specific risk-weighting factor 
of 100 percent to the position.
    (2) A bank that uses appendix D to this part must calculate a 
specific risk add-on for a securitization position using the SFA in 
section 45 of appendix D to this part and in accordance with paragraph 
(b)(2)(vii)(B) of this section if the bank and the securitization 
position each qualifies to use the SFA under appendix D to this part. A 
bank that uses appendix D to this part and that has a securitization 
position that does not qualify for the SFA may assign a specific risk-
weighting factor to the securitization position using the SSFA in 
accordance with section 11 of this appendix or assign a specific risk-
weighting factor of 100 percent to the position.
    (3) A bank must treat a short securitization position as if it is a 
long securitization position solely for calculation purposes when using 
the SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) or the SSFA in section 11 of this 
appendix.
    (B) SFA. To calculate the specific risk add-on for a securitization 
position using the SFA, a bank that is subject to appendix D to this 
part must set the specific risk add-on for the position equal to the 
risk-based capital requirement, calculated under section 45 of appendix 
D to this part.
    (C) SSFA. To use the SSFA to determine the specific risk-weighting 
factor for a securitization position, a bank must calculate the specific 
risk-weighting factor in accordance with section 11 of this appendix.
    (D) Nth-to-default credit derivatives. A bank must determine a 
specific risk add-on using the SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B), or 
assign a specific risk-weighting factor using the SSFA in section 11 of 
this appendix to an nth-to-default credit derivative in accordance with 
this paragraph (D), irrespective of whether the bank is a net protection 
buyer or net protection seller. A bank must determine its position in 
the nth-to-default credit derivative as the largest notional dollar 
amount of all the underlying exposures.
    (1) For purposes of determining the specific risk add-on using the 
SFA in paragraph (b)(2)(vii)(B) or the specific risk-weighting factor 
for an nth-to-default credit derivative using the SSFA in section 11 of 
this appendix, the bank must calculate the attachment point and 
detachment point of its position as follows:
    (i) The attachment point (parameter A) is the ratio of the sum of 
the notional amounts of all underlying exposures that are subordinated 
to the bank's position to the total notional amount of all underlying 
exposures. For purposes of using the SFA to calculate the specific add-
on for its position in an nth-to-default credit derivative, parameter A 
must be set equal to the credit enhancement level (L) input to the SFA 
formula. In the case of a first-to-default credit derivative, there are 
no underlying exposures that are subordinated to the bank's position. In 
the case of a second-or-subsequent-to-default credit derivative, the 
smallest (n-1) notional amounts of the underlying exposure(s) are 
subordinated to the bank's position.
    (ii) The detachment point (parameter D) equals the sum of parameter 
A plus the ratio of the notional amount of the bank's position in the 
nth-to-default credit derivative to the total notional amount of all 
underlying exposures. For purposes of using the SFA to calculate the 
specific risk add-on for its position in an nth-to-default credit 
derivative, parameter D must be set to equal L plus the thickness of 
tranche (T) input to the SFA formula.

[[Page 474]]

    (2) A bank that does not use the SFA to determine a specific risk-
add on, or the SSFA to determine a specific risk-weighting factor for 
its position in an nth-to-default credit derivative must assign a 
specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent to the position.
    (c) Modeled correlation trading positions. For purposes of 
calculating the comprehensive risk measure for modeled correlation 
trading positions under either paragraph (a)(2)(i) or (a)(2)(ii) of 
section 9 of this appendix, the total specific risk add-on is the 
greater of:
    (1) The sum of the bank's specific risk add-ons for each net long 
correlation trading position calculated under this section; or
    (2) The sum of the bank's specific risk add-ons for each net short 
correlation trading position calculated under this section.
    (d) Non-modeled securitization positions. For securitization 
positions that are not correlation trading positions and for 
securitizations that are correlation trading positions not modeled under 
section 9 of this appendix, the total specific risk add-on is the 
greater of:
    (1) The sum of the bank's specific risk add-ons for each net long 
securitization position calculated under this section; or
    (2) The sum of the bank's specific risk add-ons for each net short 
securitization position calculated under this section.
    (e) Equity positions. The total specific risk add-on for a portfolio 
of equity positions is the sum of the specific risk add-ons of the 
individual equity positions, as computed under this section. To 
determine the specific risk add-on of individual equity positions, a 
bank must multiply the absolute value of the current market value of 
each net long or net short equity position by the appropriate specific 
risk-weighting factor as determined under this paragraph:
    (1) The bank must multiply the absolute value of the current market 
value of each net long or net short equity position by a specific risk-
weighting factor of 8.0 percent. For equity positions that are index 
contracts comprising a well-diversified portfolio of equity instruments, 
the absolute value of the current market value of each net long or net 
short position is multiplied by a specific risk-weighting factor of 2.0 
percent.\46\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \46\ A portfolio is well-diversified if it contains a large number 
of individual equity positions, with no single position representing a 
substantial portion of the portfolio's total market value.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For equity positions arising from the following futures-related 
arbitrage strategies, a bank may apply a 2.0 percent specific risk-
weighting factor to one side (long or short) of each position with the 
opposite side exempt from an additional capital requirement:
    (i) Long and short positions in exactly the same index at different 
dates or in different market centers; or
    (ii) Long and short positions in index contracts at the same date in 
different, but similar indices.
    (3) For futures contracts on main indices that are matched by 
offsetting positions in a basket of stocks comprising the index, a bank 
may apply a 2.0 percent specific risk-weighting factor to the futures 
and stock basket positions (long and short), provided that such trades 
are deliberately entered into and separately controlled, and that the 
basket of stocks is comprised of stocks representing at least 90.0 
percent of the capitalization of the index. A main index refers to the 
Standard & Poor's 500 Index, the FTSE All-World Index, and any other 
index for which the bank can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC 
that the equities represented in the index have liquidity, depth of 
market, and size of bid-ask spreads comparable to equities in the 
Standard & Poor's 500 Index and FTSE All-World Index.
    (f) Due diligence requirements. (1) A bank must demonstrate to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC a comprehensive understanding of the features 
of a securitization position that would materially affect the 
performance of the position by conducting and documenting the analysis 
set forth in paragraph (f)(2) of this section. The bank's analysis must 
be commensurate with the complexity of the securitization position and 
the materiality of the position in relation to capital.
    (2) To support the demonstration of its comprehensive understanding, 
for each securitization position a bank must:
    (i) Conduct an analysis of the risk characteristics of a 
securitization position prior to acquiring the position and document 
such analysis within three business days after acquiring the position, 
considering:
    (A) Structural features of the securitization that would materially 
impact the performance of the position, for example, the contractual 
cash flow waterfall, waterfall-related triggers, credit enhancements, 
liquidity enhancements, market value triggers, the performance of 
organizations that service the position, and deal-specific definitions 
of default;
    (B) Relevant information regarding the performance of the underlying 
credit exposure(s), for example, the percentage of loans 30, 60, and 90 
days past due; default rates; prepayment rates; loans in foreclosure; 
property types; occupancy; average credit score or other measures of 
creditworthiness; average loan-to-value ratio; and industry and 
geographic diversification data on the underlying exposure(s);
    (C) Relevant market data of the securitization, for example, bid-ask 
spreads, most recent sales price and historical price volatility, 
trading volume, implied market

[[Page 475]]

rating, and size, depth and concentration level of the market for the 
securitization; and
    (D) For resecuritization positions, performance information on the 
underlying securitization exposures, for example, the issuer name and 
credit quality, and the characteristics and performance of the exposures 
underlying the securitization exposures; and
    (ii) On an on-going basis (no less frequently than quarterly), 
evaluate, review, and update as appropriate the analysis required under 
paragraph (f)(1) of this section for each securitization position.

           Section 11. Simplified Supervisory Formula Approach

    (a) General requirements. To use the SSFA to determine the specific 
risk-weighting factor for a securitization position, a bank must have 
data that enables it to assign accurately the parameters described in 
paragraph (b) of this section. Data used to assign the parameters 
described in paragraph (b) of this section must be the most currently 
available data and no more than 91 calendar days old. A bank that does 
not have the appropriate data to assign the parameters described and 
defined, for purposes of this section, in paragraph (b) of this section 
must assign a specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent to the 
position.
    (b) SSFA parameters. To calculate the specific risk-weighting factor 
for a securitization position using the SSFA, a bank must have accurate 
information on the five inputs to the SSFA calculation described in 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(5) of this section:
    (1) KG is the weighted-average (with unpaid principal 
used as the weight for each exposure) total capital requirement of the 
underlying exposures calculated using appendix A to this part. 
KG is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 1 (that 
is, an average risk weight of 100 percent represents a value of 
KG equal to .08).
    (2) Parameter W is expressed as a decimal value between zero and 
one. Parameter W is the ratio of the sum of the dollar amounts of any 
underlying exposures within the securitized pool that meet any of the 
criteria as set forth in paragraphs (i) through (vi) of this paragraph 
(b)(2) to the ending balance, measured in dollars, of underlying 
exposures:
    (i) Ninety days or more past due;
    (ii) Subject to a bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding;
    (iii) In the process of foreclosure;
    (iv) Held as real estate owned;
    (v) Has contractually deferred interest payments for 90 days or 
more; or
    (vi) Is in default.
    (3) Parameter A is the attachment point for the position, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses will first be allocated 
to the position. Parameter A equals the ratio of the current dollar 
amount of underlying exposures that are subordinated to the position of 
the bank to the current dollar amount of underlying exposures. Any 
reserve account funded by the accumulated cash flows from the underlying 
exposures that is subordinated to the position that contains the bank's 
securitization exposure may be included in the calculation of parameter 
A to the extent that cash is present in the account. Parameter A is 
expressed as a decimal value between zero and one.
    (4) Parameter D is the detachment point for the position, which 
represents the threshold at which credit losses of principal allocated 
to the position would result in a total loss of principal. Parameter D 
equals parameter A plus the ratio of the current dollar amount of the 
securitization positions that are pari passu with the position (that is, 
have equal seniority with respect to credit risk) to the current dollar 
amount of the underlying exposures. Parameter D is expressed as a 
decimal value between zero and one.
    (5) A supervisory calibration parameter, p, is equal to 0.5 for 
securitization positions that are not resecuritization positions and 
equal to 1.5 for resecuritization positions.
    (c) Mechanics of the SSFA. KG and W are used to calculate 
KA, the augmented value of KG, which reflects the 
observed credit quality of the underlying pool of exposures. 
KA is defined in paragraph (d) of this section. The values of 
parameters A and D, relative to KA determine the specific 
risk-weighting factor assigned to a position as described in this 
paragraph and paragraph (d) of this section. The specific risk-weighting 
factor assigned to a securitization position, or portion of a position, 
as appropriate, is the larger of the specific risk-weighting factor 
determined in accordance with this paragraph and paragraph (d) of this 
section and a specific risk-weighting factor of 1.6 percent.
    (1) When the detachment point, parameter D, for a securitization 
position is less than or equal to KA, the position must be 
assigned a specific risk-weighting factor of 100 percent.
    (2) When the attachment point, parameter A, for a securitization 
position is greater than or equal to KA, the bank must 
calculate the specific risk-weighting factor in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (3) When A is less than KA and D is greater than 
KA, the specific risk-weighting factor is a weighted-average 
of 1.00 and KSSFA calculated in accordance with paragraph (d) 
of this section, but with the parameter A revised to be set equal to 
KA. For the purpose of this weighted-average calculation:

[[Page 476]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU12.005

                   Section 12. Market Risk Disclosures

    (a) Scope. A bank must comply with this section unless it is a 
consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding company or a depository 
institution that is subject to these requirements or of a non-U.S. 
banking organization that is subject to comparable public disclosure 
requirements in its home jurisdiction. A bank must make quantitative 
disclosures publicly each calendar quarter. If a significant change 
occurs, such that the most recent reporting amounts are no longer 
reflective of the bank's capital adequacy and risk profile, then a brief 
discussion of this change and its likely impact must be provided as soon 
as practicable thereafter. Qualitative disclosures that typically do not 
change each quarter may be disclosed annually, provided any significant 
changes are disclosed in the interim. If a bank believes that disclosure 
of specific commercial or financial information would prejudice 
seriously its position by making public certain information that is 
either proprietary or confidential in nature, the bank is not required 
to disclose these specific items, but must disclose more general 
information about the subject matter of the requirement, together with 
the fact that, and the reason why, the specific items of information 
have not been disclosed.
    (b) Disclosure policy. The bank must have a formal disclosure policy 
approved by the board of directors that addresses the bank's approach 
for determining its market risk

[[Page 477]]

disclosures. The policy must address the associated internal controls 
and disclosure controls and procedures. The board of directors and 
senior management must ensure that appropriate verification of the 
disclosures takes place and that effective internal controls and 
disclosure controls and procedures are maintained. One or more senior 
officers of the bank must attest that the disclosures meet the 
requirements of this appendix, and the board of directors and senior 
management are responsible for establishing and maintaining an effective 
internal control structure over financial reporting, including the 
disclosures required by this section.
    (c) Quantitative disclosures. (1) For each material portfolio of 
covered positions, the bank must disclose publicly the following 
information at least quarterly:
    (i) The high, low, and mean VaR-based measures over the reporting 
period and the VaR-based measure at period-end;
    (ii) The high, low, and mean stressed VaR-based measures over the 
reporting period and the stressed VaR-based measure at period-end;
    (iii) The high, low, and mean incremental risk capital requirements 
over the reporting period and the incremental risk capital requirement 
at period-end;
    (iv) The high, low, and mean comprehensive risk capital requirements 
over the reporting period and the comprehensive risk capital requirement 
at period-end, with the period-end requirement broken down into 
appropriate risk classifications (for example, default risk, migration 
risk, correlation risk);
    (v) Separate measures for interest rate risk, credit spread risk, 
equity price risk, foreign exchange risk, and commodity price risk used 
to calculate the VaR-based measure; and
    (vi) A comparison of VaR-based estimates with actual gains or losses 
experienced by the bank, with an analysis of important outliers.
    (2) In addition, the bank must disclose publicly the following 
information at least quarterly:
    (i) The aggregate amount of on-balance sheet and off-balance sheet 
securitization positions by exposure type; and
    (ii) The aggregate amount of correlation trading positions.
    (d) Qualitative disclosures. For each material portfolio of covered 
positions, the bank must disclose publicly the following information at 
least annually, or more frequently in the event of material changes for 
each portfolio:
    (1) The composition of material portfolios of covered positions;
    (2) The bank's valuation policies, procedures, and methodologies for 
covered positions including, for securitization positions, the methods 
and key assumptions used for valuing such positions, any significant 
changes since the last reporting period, and the impact of such change;
    (3) The characteristics of the internal models used for purposes of 
this appendix. For the incremental risk capital requirement and the 
comprehensive risk capital requirement, this must include:
    (i) The approach used by the bank to determine liquidity horizons;
    (ii) The methodologies used to achieve a capital assessment that is 
consistent with the required soundness standard; and
    (iii) The specific approaches used in the validation of these 
models;
    (4) A description of the approaches used for validating and 
evaluating the accuracy of internal models and modeling processes for 
purposes of this appendix;
    (5) For each market risk category (that is, interest rate risk, 
credit spread risk, equity price risk, foreign exchange risk, and 
commodity price risk), a description of the stress tests applied to the 
positions subject to the factor;
    (6) The results of the comparison of the bank's internal estimates 
for purposes of this appendix with actual outcomes during a sample 
period not used in model development;
    (7) The soundness standard on which the bank's internal capital 
adequacy assessment under this appendix is based, including a 
description of the methodologies used to achieve a capital adequacy 
assessment that is consistent with the soundness standard;
    (8) A description of the bank's processes for monitoring changes in 
the credit and market risk of securitization positions, including how 
those processes differ for resecuritization positions; and
    (8) A description of the bank's policy governing the use of credit 
risk mitigation to mitigate the risks of securitization and 
resecuritization positions.

[77 FR 53115, Aug. 30, 2012]
      



  Sec. Appendix D to Part 325--Capital Adequacy Guidelines for Banks: 
       Internal-Ratings-Based and Advanced Measurement Approaches

Part I  General Provisions
    Section 1  Purpose, Applicability, Reservation of Authority, and 
Principle of Conservatism
    Section 2  Definitions
    Section 3  Minimum Risk-Based Capital Requirements
Part II  Qualifying Capital
    Section 11  Additional Deductions
    Section 12  Deductions and Limitations Not Required
    Section 13  Eligible Credit Reserves

[[Page 478]]

Part III  Qualification
    Section 21  Qualification Process
    Section 22  Qualification Requirements
    Section 23  Ongoing Qualification
    Section 24  Merger and Acquisition Transitional Arrangements
Part IV  Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk
    Section 31  Mechanics for Calculating Total Wholesale and Retail 
Risk-Weighted Assets
    Section 32  Counterparty Credit Risk of Repo-Style Transactions, 
Eligible Margin Loans, and OTC Derivative Contracts
    Section 33  Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: PD Substitution and 
LGD Adjustment Approaches
    Section 34  Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: Double Default 
Treatment
    Section 35  Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Unsettled 
Transactions
Part V  Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures
    Section 41  Operational Criteria for Recognizing the Transfer of 
Risk
    Section 42  Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Securitization 
Exposures
    Section 43  Ratings-Based Approach (RBA)
    Section 44  Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)
    Section 45  Supervisory Formula Approach (SFA)
    Section 46  Recognition of Credit Risk Mitigants for Securitization 
Exposures
    Section 47  Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Early Amortization 
Provisions
Part VI  Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures
    Section 51  Introduction and Exposure Measurement
    Section 52  Simple Risk Weight Approach (SRWA)
    Section 53  Internal Models Approach (IMA)
    Section 54  Equity Exposures to Investment Funds
    Section 55  Equity Derivative Contracts
Part VII  Risk-Weighted Assets for Operational Risk
    Section 61  Qualification Requirements for Incorporation of 
Operational Risk Mitigants
    Section 62  Mechanics of Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation
Part VIII  Disclosure
    Section 71  Disclosure Requirements
Part IX  Transition Provisions
    Section 81  Optional Transition Provisions Related to the 
Implementation of Consolidation Requirements Under FAS 167

                       Part I. General Provisions

    Section 1. Purpose, Applicability, Reservation of Authority, and 
                        Principle of Conservatism

    (a) Purpose. This appendix establishes:
    (1) Minimum qualifying criteria for banks using bank-specific 
internal risk measurement and management processes for calculating risk-
based capital requirements;
    (2) Methodologies for such banks to calculate their risk-based 
capital requirements; and
    (3) Public disclosure requirements for such banks.
    (b) Applicability. (1) This appendix applies to a bank that:
    (i) Has consolidated assets, as reported on the most recent year-end 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income (Call Report) equal to $250 
billion or more;
    (ii) Has consolidated total on-balance sheet foreign exposure at the 
most recent year-end equal to $10 billion or more (where total on-
balance sheet foreign exposure equals total cross-border claims less 
claims with head office or guarantor located in another country plus 
redistributed guaranteed amounts to the country of head office or 
guarantor plus local country claims on local residents plus revaluation 
gains on foreign exchange and derivative products, calculated in 
accordance with the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 
(FFIEC) 009 Country Exposure Report);
    (iii) Is a subsidiary of a depository institution that uses 12 CFR 
part 3, appendix C, 12 CFR part 208, appendix F, 12 CFR part 325, 
appendix D, or 12 CFR part 567, appendix C, to calculate its risk-based 
capital requirements; or
    (iv) Is a subsidiary of a bank holding company that uses 12 CFR part 
225, appendix G, to calculate its risk-based capital requirements.
    (2) Any bank may elect to use this appendix to calculate its risk-
based capital requirements.
    (3) A bank that is subject to this appendix must use this appendix 
unless the FDIC determines in writing that application of this appendix 
is not appropriate in light of the bank's asset size, level of 
complexity, risk profile, or scope of operations. In making a 
determination under this paragraph, the FDIC will apply notice and 
response procedures in the same manner and to the same extent as the 
notice and response procedures in 12 CFR 325.6(c).
    (c) Reservation of authority--(1) Additional capital in the 
aggregate. The FDIC may require a bank to hold an amount of capital 
greater than otherwise required under this appendix if the FDIC 
determines that the bank's risk-based capital requirement under this 
appendix is not commensurate with the bank's credit, market, 
operational, or other risks. In making a determination under this 
paragraph, the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures in the 
same manner and to the same extent as the notice and response procedures 
in 12 CFR 325.6(c).
    (2) Specific risk-weighted asset amounts. (i) If the FDIC determines 
that the risk-weighted asset amount calculated under this appendix

[[Page 479]]

by the bank for one or more exposures is not commensurate with the risks 
associated with those exposures, the FDIC may require the bank to assign 
a different risk-weighted asset amount to the exposures, to assign 
different risk parameters to the exposures (if the exposures are 
wholesale or retail exposures), or to use different model assumptions 
for the exposures (if relevant), all as specified by the FDIC.
    (ii) If the FDIC determines that the risk-weighted asset amount for 
operational risk produced by the bank under this appendix is not 
commensurate with the operational risks of the bank, the FDIC may 
require the bank to assign a different risk-weighted asset amount for 
operational risk, to change elements of its operational risk analytical 
framework, including distributional and dependence assumptions, or to 
make other changes to the bank's operational risk management processes, 
data and assessment systems, or quantification systems, all as specified 
by the FDIC.
    (3) The FDIC may, on a case-by-case basis, determine that the 
regulatory capital treatment for an exposure or other relationship to an 
entity that is not subject to consolidation on the balance sheet is not 
commensurate with the risk of the exposure and the relationship of the 
bank to the entity. In making this determination, the FDIC may require 
the bank to treat the entity as if it were consolidated on the balance 
sheet of the bank for risk-based capital purposes and calculate the 
appropriate risk-based capital ratios accordingly.
    (4) Other supervisory authority. Nothing in this appendix limits the 
authority of the FDIC under any other provision of law or regulation to 
take supervisory or enforcement action, including action to address 
unsafe or unsound practices or conditions, deficient capital levels, or 
violations of law.
    (d) Principle of conservatism. Notwithstanding the requirements of 
this appendix, a bank may choose not to apply a provision of this 
appendix to one or more exposures, provided that:
    (1) The bank can demonstrate on an ongoing basis to the satisfaction 
of the FDIC that not applying the provision would, in all circumstances, 
unambiguously generate a risk-based capital requirement for each such 
exposure greater than that which would otherwise be required under this 
appendix;
    (2) The bank appropriately manages the risk of each such exposure;
    (3) The bank notifies the FDIC in writing prior to applying this 
principle to each such exposure; and
    (4) The exposures to which the bank applies this principle are not, 
in the aggregate, material to the bank.

                         Section 2. Definitions

    Advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) systems means a bank's 
internal risk rating and segmentation system; risk parameter 
quantification system; data management and maintenance system; and 
control, oversight, and validation system for credit risk of wholesale 
and retail exposures.
    Advanced systems means a bank's advanced IRB systems, operational 
risk management processes, operational risk data and assessment systems, 
operational risk quantification systems, and, to the extent the bank 
uses the following systems, the internal models methodology, double 
default excessive correlation detection process, IMA for equity 
exposures, and IAA for securitization exposures to ABCP programs.
    Affiliate with respect to a company means any company that controls, 
is controlled by, or is under common control with, the company.
    Applicable external rating means:
    (1) With respect to an exposure that has multiple external ratings 
assigned by NRSROs, the lowest solicited external rating assigned to the 
exposure by any NRSRO; and
    (2) With respect to an exposure that has a single external rating 
assigned by an NRSRO, the external rating assigned to the exposure by 
the NRSRO.
    Applicable inferred rating means:
    (1) With respect to an exposure that has multiple inferred ratings, 
the lowest inferred rating based on a solicited external rating; and
    (2) With respect to an exposure that has a single inferred rating, 
the inferred rating.
    Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program means a program that 
primarily issues commercial paper that:
    (1) Has an external rating; and
    (2) Is backed by underlying exposures held in a bankruptcy-remote 
SPE.
    Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program sponsor means a bank 
that:
    (1) Establishes an ABCP program;
    (2) Approves the sellers permitted to participate in an ABCP 
program;
    (3) Approves the exposures to be purchased by an ABCP program; or
    (4) Administers the ABCP program by monitoring the underlying 
exposures, underwriting or otherwise arranging for the placement of debt 
or other obligations issued by the program, compiling monthly reports, 
or ensuring compliance with the program documents and with the program's 
credit and investment policy.
    Backtesting means the comparison of a bank's internal estimates with 
actual outcomes during a sample period not used in model development. In 
this context, backtesting is one form of out-of-sample testing.

[[Page 480]]

    Bank holding company is defined in section 2 of the Bank Holding 
Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841).
    Benchmarking means the comparison of a bank's internal estimates 
with relevant internal and external data or with estimates based on 
other estimation techniques.
    Business environment and internal control factors means the 
indicators of a bank's operational risk profile that reflect a current 
and forward-looking assessment of the bank's underlying business risk 
factors and internal control environment.
    Carrying value means, with respect to an asset, the value of the 
asset on the balance sheet of the bank, determined in accordance with 
GAAP.
    Clean-up call means a contractual provision that permits an 
originating bank or servicer to call securitization exposures before 
their stated maturity or call date. See also eligible clean-up call.
    Commodity derivative contract means a commodity-linked swap, 
purchased commodity-linked option, forward commodity-linked contract, or 
any other instrument linked to commodities that gives rise to similar 
counterparty credit risks.
    Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability company, 
depository institution, business trust, special purpose entity, 
association, or similar organization.
    Control. A person or company controls a company if it:
    (1) Owns, controls, or holds with power to vote 25 percent or more 
of a class of voting securities of the company; or
    (2) Consolidates the company for financial reporting purposes.
    Controlled early amortization provision means an early amortization 
provision that meets all the following conditions:
    (1) The originating bank has appropriate policies and procedures to 
ensure that it has sufficient capital and liquidity available in the 
event of an early amortization;
    (2) Throughout the duration of the securitization (including the 
early amortization period), there is the same pro rata sharing of 
interest, principal, expenses, losses, fees, recoveries, and other cash 
flows from the underlying exposures based on the originating bank's and 
the investors' relative shares of the underlying exposures outstanding 
measured on a consistent monthly basis;
    (3) The amortization period is sufficient for at least 90 percent of 
the total underlying exposures outstanding at the beginning of the early 
amortization period to be repaid or recognized as in default; and
    (4) The schedule for repayment of investor principal is not more 
rapid than would be allowed by straight-line amortization over an 18-
month period.
    Credit derivative means a financial contract executed under standard 
industry credit derivative documentation that allows one party (the 
protection purchaser) to transfer the credit risk of one or more 
exposures (reference exposure) to another party (the protection 
provider). See also eligible credit derivative.
    Credit-enhancing interest-only strip (CEIO) means an on-balance 
sheet asset that, in form or in substance:
    (1) Represents a contractual right to receive some or all of the 
interest and no more than a minimal amount of principal due on the 
underlying exposures of a securitization; and
    (2) Exposes the holder to credit risk directly or indirectly 
associated with the underlying exposures that exceeds a pro rata share 
of the holder's claim on the underlying exposures, whether through 
subordination provisions or other credit-enhancement techniques.
    Credit-enhancing representations and warranties means 
representations and warranties that are made or assumed in connection 
with a transfer of underlying exposures (including loan servicing 
assets) and that obligate a bank to protect another party from losses 
arising from the credit risk of the underlying exposures. Credit-
enhancing representations and warranties include provisions to protect a 
party from losses resulting from the default or nonperformance of the 
obligors of the underlying exposures or from an insufficiency in the 
value of the collateral backing the underlying exposures. Credit-
enhancing representations and warranties do not include:
    (1) Early default clauses and similar warranties that permit the 
return of, or premium refund clauses that cover, first-lien residential 
mortgage exposures for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date of 
transfer, provided that the date of transfer is within one year of 
origination of the residential mortgage exposure;
    (2) Premium refund clauses that cover underlying exposures 
guaranteed, in whole or in part, by the U.S. government, a U.S. 
government agency, or a U.S. government sponsored enterprise, provided 
that the clauses are for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date 
of transfer; or
    (3) Warranties that permit the return of underlying exposures in 
instances of misrepresentation, fraud, or incomplete documentation.
    Credit risk mitigant means collateral, a credit derivative, or a 
guarantee.
    Credit-risk-weighted assets means 1.06 multiplied by the sum of:
    (1) Total wholesale and retail risk-weighted assets;
    (2) Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures; and
    (3) Risk-weighted assets for equity exposures.

[[Page 481]]

    Current exposure means, with respect to a netting set, the larger of 
zero or the market value of a transaction or portfolio of transactions 
within the netting set that would be lost upon default of the 
counterparty, assuming no recovery on the value of the transactions. 
Current exposure is also called replacement cost.
    Default--(1) Retail. (i) A retail exposure of a bank is in default 
if:
    (A) The exposure is 180 days past due, in the case of a residential 
mortgage exposure or revolving exposure;
    (B) The exposure is 120 days past due, in the case of all other 
retail exposures; or
    (C) The bank has taken a full or partial charge-off, write-down of 
principal, or material negative fair value adjustment of principal on 
the exposure for credit-related reasons.
    (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (1)(i) of this definition, for a 
retail exposure held by a non-U.S. subsidiary of the bank that is 
subject to an internal ratings-based approach to capital adequacy 
consistent with the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision's 
``International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital 
Standards: A Revised Framework'' in a non-U.S. jurisdiction, the bank 
may elect to use the definition of default that is used in that 
jurisdiction, provided that the bank has obtained prior approval from 
the FDIC to use the definition of default in that jurisdiction.
    (iii) A retail exposure in default remains in default until the bank 
has reasonable assurance of repayment and performance for all 
contractual principal and interest payments on the exposure.
    (2) Wholesale. (i) A bank's wholesale obligor is in default if:
    (A) The bank determines that the obligor is unlikely to pay its 
credit obligations to the bank in full, without recourse by the bank to 
actions such as realizing collateral (if held); or
    (B) The obligor is past due more than 90 days on any material credit 
obligation(s) to the bank. \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Overdrafts are past due once the obligor has breached an advised 
limit or been advised of a limit smaller than the current outstanding 
balance.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) An obligor in default remains in default until the bank has 
reasonable assurance of repayment and performance for all contractual 
principal and interest payments on all exposures of the bank to the 
obligor (other than exposures that have been fully written-down or 
charged-off).
    Dependence means a measure of the association among operational 
losses across and within units of measure.
    Depository institution is defined in section 3 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    Derivative contract means a financial contract whose value is 
derived from the values of one or more underlying assets, reference 
rates, or indices of asset values or reference rates. Derivative 
contracts include interest rate derivative contracts, exchange rate 
derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, commodity derivative 
contracts, credit derivatives, and any other instrument that poses 
similar counterparty credit risks. Derivative contracts also include 
unsettled securities, commodities, and foreign exchange transactions 
with a contractual settlement or delivery lag that is longer than the 
lesser of the market standard for the particular instrument or five 
business days.
    Early amortization provision means a provision in the documentation 
governing a securitization that, when triggered, causes investors in the 
securitization exposures to be repaid before the original stated 
maturity of the securitization exposures, unless the provision:
    (1) Is triggered solely by events not directly related to the 
performance of the underlying exposures or the originating bank (such as 
material changes in tax laws or regulations); or
    (2) Leaves investors fully exposed to future draws by obligors on 
the underlying exposures even after the provision is triggered.
    Economic downturn conditions means, with respect to an exposure held 
by the bank, those conditions in which the aggregate default rates for 
that exposure's wholesale or retail exposure subcategory (or subdivision 
of such subcategory selected by the bank) in the exposure's national 
jurisdiction (or subdivision of such jurisdiction selected by the bank) 
are significantly higher than average.
    Effective maturity (M) of a wholesale exposure means:
    (1) For wholesale exposures other than repo-style transactions, 
eligible margin loans, and OTC derivative contracts described in 
paragraph (2) or (3) of this definition:
    (i) The weighted-average remaining maturity (measured in years, 
whole or fractional) of the expected contractual cash flows from the 
exposure, using the undiscounted amounts of the cash flows as weights; 
or
    (ii) The nominal remaining maturity (measured in years, whole or 
fractional) of the exposure.
    (2) For repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and OTC 
derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master netting agreement 
for which the bank does not apply the internal models approach in 
paragraph (d) of section 32 of this appendix, the weighted-average 
remaining maturity (measured in years, whole or fractional) of the 
individual transactions subject to the qualifying master netting 
agreement, with the weight of each individual transaction set equal to 
the notional amount of the transaction.

[[Page 482]]

    (3) For repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and OTC 
derivative contracts for which the bank applies the internal models 
approach in paragraph (d) of section 32 of this appendix, the value 
determined in paragraph (d)(4) of section 32 of this appendix.
    Effective notional amount means, for an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative, the lesser of the contractual notional 
amount of the credit risk mitigant and the EAD of the hedged exposure, 
multiplied by the percentage coverage of the credit risk mitigant. For 
example, the effective notional amount of an eligible guarantee that 
covers, on a pro rata basis, 40 percent of any losses on a $100 bond 
would be $40.
    Eligible clean-up call means a clean-up call that:
    (1) Is exercisable solely at the discretion of the originating bank 
or servicer;
    (2) Is not structured to avoid allocating losses to securitization 
exposures held by investors or otherwise structured to provide credit 
enhancement to the securitization; and
    (3)(i) For a traditional securitization, is only exercisable when 10 
percent or less of the principal amount of the underlying exposures or 
securitization exposures (determined as of the inception of the 
securitization) is outstanding; or
    (ii) For a synthetic securitization, is only exercisable when 10 
percent or less of the principal amount of the reference portfolio of 
underlying exposures (determined as of the inception of the 
securitization) is outstanding.
    Eligible credit derivative means a credit derivative in the form of 
a credit default swap, n\th\-to-default swap, total return swap, or any 
other form of credit derivative approved by the FDIC, provided that:
    (1) The contract meets the requirements of an eligible guarantee and 
has been confirmed by the protection purchaser and the protection 
provider;
    (2) Any assignment of the contract has been confirmed by all 
relevant parties;
    (3) If the credit derivative is a credit default swap or n\th\-to-
default swap, the contract includes the following credit events:
    (i) Failure to pay any amount due under the terms of the reference 
exposure, subject to any applicable minimal payment threshold that is 
consistent with standard market practice and with a grace period that is 
closely in line with the grace period of the reference exposure; and
    (ii) Bankruptcy, insolvency, or inability of the obligor on the 
reference exposure to pay its debts, or its failure or admission in 
writing of its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due, 
and similar events;
    (4) The terms and conditions dictating the manner in which the 
contract is to be settled are incorporated into the contract;
    (5) If the contract allows for cash settlement, the contract 
incorporates a robust valuation process to estimate loss reliably and 
specifies a reasonable period for obtaining post-credit event valuations 
of the reference exposure;
    (6) If the contract requires the protection purchaser to transfer an 
exposure to the protection provider at settlement, the terms of at least 
one of the exposures that is permitted to be transferred under the 
contract provides that any required consent to transfer may not be 
unreasonably withheld;
    (7) If the credit derivative is a credit default swap or n\th\-to-
default swap, the contract clearly identifies the parties responsible 
for determining whether a credit event has occurred, specifies that this 
determination is not the sole responsibility of the protection provider, 
and gives the protection purchaser the right to notify the protection 
provider of the occurrence of a credit event; and
    (8) If the credit derivative is a total return swap and the bank 
records net payments received on the swap as net income, the bank 
records offsetting deterioration in the value of the hedged exposure 
(either through reductions in fair value or by an addition to reserves).
    Eligible credit reserves means all general allowances that have been 
established through a charge against earnings to absorb credit losses 
associated with on- or off-balance sheet wholesale and retail exposures, 
including the allowance for loan and lease losses (ALLL) associated with 
such exposures but excluding allocated transfer risk reserves 
established pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3904 and other specific reserves 
created against recognized losses.
    Eligible double default guarantor, with respect to a guarantee or 
credit derivative obtained by a bank, means:
    (1) U.S.-based entities. A depository institution, a bank holding 
company, a savings and loan holding company (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 
1467a) provided all or substantially all of the holding company's 
activities are permissible for a financial holding company under 12 
U.S.C. 1843(k), a securities broker or dealer registered with the SEC 
under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o et seq.), or an 
insurance company in the business of providing credit protection (such 
as a monoline bond insurer or re-insurer) that is subject to supervision 
by a State insurance regulator, if:
    (i) At the time the guarantor issued the guarantee or credit 
derivative or at any time thereafter, the bank assigned a PD to the 
guarantor's rating grade that was equal to or lower than the PD 
associated with a long-term external rating in the third-highest 
investment-grade rating category; and
    (ii) The bank currently assigns a PD to the guarantor's rating grade 
that is equal to or

[[Page 483]]

lower than the PD associated with a long-term external rating in the 
lowest investment-grade rating category; or
    (2) Non-U.S.-based entities. A foreign bank (as defined in 
Sec. 211.2 of the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2)), 
a non-U.S.-based securities firm, or a non-U.S.-based insurance company 
in the business of providing credit protection, if:
    (i) The bank demonstrates that the guarantor is subject to 
consolidated supervision and regulation comparable to that imposed on 
U.S. depository institutions, securities broker-dealers, or insurance 
companies (as the case may be), or has issued and outstanding an 
unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement that has a 
long-term applicable external rating of at least investment grade;
    (ii) At the time the guarantor issued the guarantee or credit 
derivative or at any time thereafter, the bank assigned a PD to the 
guarantor's rating grade that was equal to or lower than the PD 
associated with a long-term external rating in the third-highest 
investment-grade rating category; and
    (iii) The bank currently assigns a PD to the guarantor's rating 
grade that is equal to or lower than the PD associated with a long-term 
external rating in the lowest investment-grade rating category.
    Eligible guarantee means a guarantee that:
    (1) Is written and unconditional;
    (2) Covers all or a pro rata portion of all contractual payments of 
the obligor on the reference exposure;
    (3) Gives the beneficiary a direct claim against the protection 
provider;
    (4) Is not unilaterally cancelable by the protection provider for 
reasons other than the breach of the contract by the beneficiary;
    (5) Is legally enforceable against the protection provider in a 
jurisdiction where the protection provider has sufficient assets against 
which a judgment may be attached and enforced;
    (6) Requires the protection provider to make payment to the 
beneficiary on the occurrence of a default (as defined in the guarantee) 
of the obligor on the reference exposure in a timely manner without the 
beneficiary first having to take legal actions to pursue the obligor for 
payment;
    (7) Does not increase the beneficiary's cost of credit protection on 
the guarantee in response to deterioration in the credit quality of the 
reference exposure; and
    (8) Is not provided by an affiliate of the bank, unless the 
affiliate is an insured depository institution, bank, securities broker 
or dealer, or insurance company that:
    (i) Does not control the bank; and
    (ii) Is subject to consolidated supervision and regulation 
comparable to that imposed on U.S. depository institutions, securities 
broker-dealers, or insurance companies (as the case may be).
    Eligible margin loan means an extension of credit where:
    (1) The extension of credit is collateralized exclusively by liquid 
and readily marketable debt or equity securities, gold, or conforming 
residential mortgages;
    (2) The collateral is marked to market daily, and the transaction is 
subject to daily margin maintenance requirements;
    (3) The extension of credit is conducted under an agreement that 
provides the bank the right to accelerate and terminate the extension of 
credit and to liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an event of 
default (including upon an event of bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar 
proceeding) of the counterparty, provided that, in any such case, any 
exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or avoided 
under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions; \2\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ This requirement is met where all transactions under the 
agreement are (i) executed under U.S. law and (ii) constitute 
``securities contracts'' under section 555 of the Bankruptcy Code (11 
U.S.C. 555), qualified financial contracts under section 11(e)(8) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)), or netting 
contracts between or among financial institutions under sections 401-407 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 
U.S.C. 4401-4407) or the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR 
part 231).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) The bank has conducted sufficient legal review to conclude with 
a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient written documentation of 
that legal review) that the agreement meets the requirements of 
paragraph (3) of this definition and is legal, valid, binding, and 
enforceable under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions.
    Eligible operational risk offsets means amounts, not to exceed 
expected operational loss, that:
    (1) Are generated by internal business practices to absorb highly 
predictable and reasonably stable operational losses, including reserves 
calculated consistent with GAAP; and
    (2) Are available to cover expected operational losses with a high 
degree of certainty over a one-year horizon.
    Eligible purchased wholesale exposure means a purchased wholesale 
exposure that:
    (1) The bank or securitization SPE purchased from an unaffiliated 
seller and did not directly or indirectly originate;
    (2) Was generated on an arm's-length basis between the seller and 
the obligor (intercompany accounts receivable and receivables subject to 
contra-accounts between firms that buy and sell to each other do not 
satisfy this criterion);

[[Page 484]]

    (3) Provides the bank or securitization SPE with a claim on all 
proceeds from the exposure or a pro rata interest in the proceeds from 
the exposure;
    (4) Has an M of less than one year; and
    (5) When consolidated by obligor, does not represent a concentrated 
exposure relative to the portfolio of purchased wholesale exposures.
    Eligible securitization guarantor means:
    (1) A sovereign entity, the Bank for International Settlements, the 
International Monetary Fund, the European Central Bank, the European 
Commission, a Federal Home Loan Bank, Federal Agricultural Mortgage 
Corporation (Farmer Mac), a multilateral development bank, a depository 
institution, a bank holding company, a savings and loan holding company 
(as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1467a) provided all or substantially all of the 
holding company's activities are permissible for a financial holding 
company under 12 U.S.C. 1843(k), a foreign bank (as defined in 
Sec. 211.2 of the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2)), 
or a securities firm;
    (2) Any other entity (other than a securitization SPE) that has 
issued and outstanding an unsecured long-term debt security without 
credit enhancement that has a long-term applicable external rating in 
one of the three highest investment-grade rating categories; or
    (3) Any other entity (other than a securitization SPE) that has a PD 
assigned by the bank that is lower than or equal to the PD associated 
with a long-term external rating in the third highest investment-grade 
rating category.
    Eligible servicer cash advance facility means a servicer cash 
advance facility in which:
    (1) The servicer is entitled to full reimbursement of advances, 
except that a servicer may be obligated to make non-reimbursable 
advances for a particular underlying exposure if any such advance is 
contractually limited to an insignificant amount of the outstanding 
principal balance of that exposure;
    (2) The servicer's right to reimbursement is senior in right of 
payment to all other claims on the cash flows from the underlying 
exposures of the securitization; and
    (3) The servicer has no legal obligation to, and does not, make 
advances to the securitization if the servicer concludes the advances 
are unlikely to be repaid.
    Equity derivative contract means an equity-linked swap, purchased 
equity-linked option, forward equity-linked contract, or any other 
instrument linked to equities that gives rise to similar counterparty 
credit risks.
    Equity exposure means:
    (1) A security or instrument (whether voting or non-voting) that 
represents a direct or indirect ownership interest in, and is a residual 
claim on, the assets and income of a company, unless:
    (i) The issuing company is consolidated with the bank under GAAP;
    (ii) The bank is required to deduct the ownership interest from tier 
1 or tier 2 capital under this appendix;
    (iii) The ownership interest incorporates a payment or other similar 
obligation on the part of the issuing company (such as an obligation to 
make periodic payments); or
    (iv) The ownership interest is a securitization exposure;
    (2) A security or instrument that is mandatorily convertible into a 
security or instrument described in paragraph (1) of this definition;
    (3) An option or warrant that is exercisable for a security or 
instrument described in paragraph (1) of this definition; or
    (4) Any other security or instrument (other than a securitization 
exposure) to the extent the return on the security or instrument is 
based on the performance of a security or instrument described in 
paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Excess spread for a period means:
    (1) Gross finance charge collections and other income received by a 
securitization SPE (including market interchange fees) over a period 
minus interest paid to the holders of the securitization exposures, 
servicing fees, charge-offs, and other senior trust or similar expenses 
of the SPE over the period; divided by
    (2) The principal balance of the underlying exposures at the end of 
the period.
    Exchange rate derivative contract means a cross-currency interest 
rate swap, forward foreign-exchange contract, currency option purchased, 
or any other instrument linked to exchange rates that gives rise to 
similar counterparty credit risks.
    Excluded mortgage exposure means any one- to four-family residential 
pre-sold construction loan for a residence for which the purchase 
contract is cancelled that would receive a 100 percent risk weight under 
section 618(a)(2) of the Resolution Trust Corporation Refinancing, 
Restructuring, and Improvement Act and under 12 CFR part 325, appendix 
A, section II.C.
    Expected credit loss (ECL) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor or segment 
of non-defaulted retail exposures that is carried at fair value with 
gains and losses flowing through earnings or that is classified as held-
for-sale and is carried at the lower of cost or fair value with losses 
flowing through earnings, zero.
    (2) For all other wholesale exposures to non-defaulted obligors or 
segments of non-defaulted retail exposures, the product of PD times LGD 
times EAD for the exposure or segment.
    (3) For a wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor or segment of 
defaulted retail exposures, the bank's impairment estimate for

[[Page 485]]

allowance purposes for the exposure or segment.
    (4) Total ECL is the sum of expected credit losses for all wholesale 
and retail exposures other than exposures for which the bank has applied 
the double default treatment in section 34 of this appendix.
    Expected exposure (EE) means the expected value of the probability 
distribution of non-negative credit risk exposures to a counterparty at 
any specified future date before the maturity date of the longest term 
transaction in the netting set. Any negative market values in the 
probability distribution of market values to a counterparty at a 
specified future date are set to zero to convert the probability 
distribution of market values to the probability distribution of credit 
risk exposures.
    Expected operational loss (EOL) means the expected value of the 
distribution of potential aggregate operational losses, as generated by 
the bank's operational risk quantification system using a one-year 
horizon.
    Expected positive exposure (EPE) means the weighted average over 
time of expected (non-negative) exposures to a counterparty where the 
weights are the proportion of the time interval that an individual 
expected exposure represents. When calculating risk-based capital 
requirements, the average is taken over a one-year horizon.
    Exposure at default (EAD). (1) For the on-balance sheet component of 
a wholesale exposure or segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC 
derivative contract, or a repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan 
for which the bank determines EAD under section 32 of this appendix), 
EAD means:
    (i) If the exposure or segment is a security classified as 
available-for-sale, the bank's carrying value (including net accrued but 
unpaid interest and fees) for the exposure or segment less any allocated 
transfer risk reserve for the exposure or segment, less any unrealized 
gains on the exposure or segment, and plus any unrealized losses on the 
exposure or segment; or
    (ii) If the exposure or segment is not a security classified as 
available-for-sale, the bank's carrying value (including net accrued but 
unpaid interest and fees) for the exposure or segment less any allocated 
transfer risk reserve for the exposure or segment.
    (2) For the off-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, or a 
repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan for which the bank 
determines EAD under section 32 of this appendix) in the form of a loan 
commitment, line of credit, trade-related letter of credit, or 
transaction-related contingency, EAD means the bank's best estimate of 
net additions to the outstanding amount owed the bank, including 
estimated future additional draws of principal and accrued but unpaid 
interest and fees, that are likely to occur over a one-year horizon 
assuming the wholesale exposure or the retail exposures in the segment 
were to go into default. This estimate of net additions must reflect 
what would be expected during economic downturn conditions. Trade-
related letters of credit are short-term, self-liquidating instruments 
that are used to finance the movement of goods and are collateralized by 
the underlying goods. Transaction-related contingencies relate to a 
particular transaction and include, among other things, performance 
bonds and performance-based letters of credit.
    (3) For the off-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, or a 
repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan for which the bank 
determines EAD under section 32 of this appendix) in the form of 
anything other than a loan commitment, line of credit, trade-related 
letter of credit, or transaction-related contingency, EAD means the 
notional amount of the exposure or segment.
    (4) EAD for OTC derivative contracts is calculated as described in 
section 32 of this appendix. A bank also may determine EAD for repo-
style transactions and eligible margin loans as described in section 32 
of this appendix.
    (5) For wholesale or retail exposures in which only the drawn 
balance has been securitized, the bank must reflect its share of the 
exposures' undrawn balances in EAD. Undrawn balances of revolving 
exposures for which the drawn balances have been securitized must be 
allocated between the seller's and investors' interests on a pro rata 
basis, based on the proportions of the seller's and investors' shares of 
the securitized drawn balances.
    Exposure category means any of the wholesale, retail, 
securitization, or equity exposure categories.
    External operational loss event data means, with respect to a bank, 
gross operational loss amounts, dates, recoveries, and relevant causal 
information for operational loss events occurring at organizations other 
than the bank.
    External rating means a credit rating that is assigned by an NRSRO 
to an exposure, provided:
    (1) The credit rating fully reflects the entire amount of credit 
risk with regard to all payments owed to the holder of the exposure. If 
a holder is owed principal and interest on an exposure, the credit 
rating must fully reflect the credit risk associated with timely 
repayment of principal and interest. If a holder is owed only principal 
on an exposure, the credit rating must fully reflect only the credit 
risk associated with timely repayment of principal; and
    (2) The credit rating is published in an accessible form and is or 
will be included in the

[[Page 486]]

transition matrices made publicly available by the NRSRO that summarize 
the historical performance of positions rated by the NRSRO.
    Financial collateral means collateral:
    (1) In the form of:
    (i) Cash on deposit with the bank (including cash held for the bank 
by a third-party custodian or trustee);
    (ii) Gold bullion;
    (iii) Long-term debt securities that have an applicable external 
rating of one category below investment grade or higher;
    (iv) Short-term debt instruments that have an applicable external 
rating of at least investment grade;
    (v) Equity securities that are publicly traded;
    (vi) Convertible bonds that are publicly traded;
    (vii) Money market mutual fund shares and other mutual fund shares 
if a price for the shares is publicly quoted daily; or
    (viii) Conforming residential mortgages; and
    (2) In which the bank has a perfected, first priority security 
interest or, outside of the United States, the legal equivalent thereof 
(with the exception of cash on deposit and notwithstanding the prior 
security interest of any custodial agent).
    GAAP means generally accepted accounting principles as used in the 
United States.
    Gain-on-sale means an increase in the equity capital (as reported on 
Schedule RC of the Call Report) of a bank that results from a 
securitization (other than an increase in equity capital that results 
from the bank's receipt of cash in connection with the securitization).
    Guarantee means a financial guarantee, letter of credit, insurance, 
or other similar financial instrument (other than a credit derivative) 
that allows one party (beneficiary) to transfer the credit risk of one 
or more specific exposures (reference exposure) to another party 
(protection provider). See also eligible guarantee.
    High volatility commercial real estate (HVCRE) exposure means a 
credit facility that finances or has financed the acquisition, 
development, or construction (ADC) of real property, unless the facility 
finances:
    (1) One- to four-family residential properties; or
    (2) Commercial real estate projects in which:
    (i) The loan-to-value ratio is less than or equal to the applicable 
maximum supervisory loan-to-value ratio in the FDIC's real estate 
lending standards at 12 CFR part 365, appendix A.
    (ii) The borrower has contributed capital to the project in the form 
of cash or unencumbered readily marketable assets (or has paid 
development expenses out-of-pocket) of at least 15 percent of the real 
estate's appraised ``as completed'' value; and
    (iii) The borrower contributed the amount of capital required by 
paragraph (2)(ii) of this definition before the bank advances funds 
under the credit facility, and the capital contributed by the borrower, 
or internally generated by the project, is contractually required to 
remain in the project throughout the life of the project. The life of a 
project concludes only when the credit facility is converted to 
permanent financing or is sold or paid in full. Permanent financing may 
be provided by the bank that provided the ADC facility as long as the 
permanent financing is subject to the bank's underwriting criteria for 
long-term mortgage loans.
    Inferred rating. A securitization exposure has an inferred rating 
equal to the external rating referenced in paragraph (2)(i) of this 
definition if:
    (1) The securitization exposure does not have an external rating; 
and
    (2) Another securitization exposure issued by the same issuer and 
secured by the same underlying exposures:
    (i) Has an external rating;
    (ii) Is subordinated in all respects to the unrated securitization 
exposure;
    (iii) Does not benefit from any credit enhancement that is not 
available to the unrated securitization exposure; and
    (iv) Has an effective remaining maturity that is equal to or longer 
than that of the unrated securitization exposure.
    Interest rate derivative contract means a single-currency interest 
rate swap, basis swap, forward rate agreement, purchased interest rate 
option, when-issued securities, or any other instrument linked to 
interest rates that gives rise to similar counterparty credit risks.
    Internal operational loss event data means, with respect to a bank, 
gross operational loss amounts, dates, recoveries, and relevant causal 
information for operational loss events occurring at the bank.
    Investing bank means, with respect to a securitization, a bank that 
assumes the credit risk of a securitization exposure (other than an 
originating bank of the securitization). In the typical synthetic 
securitization, the investing bank sells credit protection on a pool of 
underlying exposures to the originating bank.
    Investment fund means a company:
    (1) All or substantially all of the assets of which are financial 
assets; and
    (2) That has no material liabilities.
    Investors' interest EAD means, with respect to a securitization, the 
EAD of the underlying exposures multiplied by the ratio of:
    (1) The total amount of securitization exposures issued by the 
securitization SPE to investors; divided by

[[Page 487]]

    (2) The outstanding principal amount of underlying exposures.
    Loss given default (LGD) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure, the greatest of:
    (i) Zero;
    (ii) The bank's empirically based best estimate of the long-run 
default-weighted average economic loss, per dollar of EAD, the bank 
would expect to incur if the obligor (or a typical obligor in the loss 
severity grade assigned by the bank to the exposure) were to default 
within a one-year horizon over a mix of economic conditions, including 
economic downturn conditions; or
    (iii) The bank's empirically based best estimate of the economic 
loss, per dollar of EAD, the bank would expect to incur if the obligor 
(or a typical obligor in the loss severity grade assigned by the bank to 
the exposure) were to default within a one-year horizon during economic 
downturn conditions.
    (2) For a segment of retail exposures, the greatest of:
    (i) Zero;
    (ii) The bank's empirically based best estimate of the long-run 
default-weighted average economic loss, per dollar of EAD, the bank 
would expect to incur if the exposures in the segment were to default 
within a one-year horizon over a mix of economic conditions, including 
economic downturn conditions; or
    (iii) The bank's empirically based best estimate of the economic 
loss, per dollar of EAD, the bank would expect to incur if the exposures 
in the segment were to default within a one-year horizon during economic 
downturn conditions.
    (3) The economic loss on an exposure in the event of default is all 
material credit-related losses on the exposure (including accrued but 
unpaid interest or fees, losses on the sale of collateral, direct 
workout costs, and an appropriate allocation of indirect workout costs). 
Where positive or negative cash flows on a wholesale exposure to a 
defaulted obligor or a defaulted retail exposure (including proceeds 
from the sale of collateral, workout costs, additional extensions of 
credit to facilitate repayment of the exposure, and draw-downs of unused 
credit lines) occur after the date of default, the economic loss must 
reflect the net present value of cash flows as of the default date using 
a discount rate appropriate to the risk of the defaulted exposure.
    Main index means the Standard & Poor's 500 Index, the FTSE All-World 
Index, and any other index for which the bank can demonstrate to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC that the equities represented in the index have 
comparable liquidity, depth of market, and size of bid-ask spreads as 
equities in the Standard & Poor's 500 Index and FTSE All-World Index.
    Multilateral development bank means the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the International Finance Corporation, 
the Inter-American Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the 
African Development Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and 
Development, the European Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, 
the Nordic Investment Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic 
Development Bank, the Council of Europe Development Bank, and any other 
multilateral lending institution or regional development bank in which 
the U.S. government is a shareholder or contributing member or which the 
FDIC determines poses comparable credit risk.
    Nationally recognized statistical rating organization (NRSRO) means 
an entity registered with the SEC as a nationally recognized statistical 
rating organization under section 15E of the Securities Exchange Act of 
1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o-7).
    Netting set means a group of transactions with a single counterparty 
that are subject to a qualifying master netting agreement or qualifying 
cross-product master netting agreement. For purposes of the internal 
models methodology in paragraph (d) of section 32 of this appendix, each 
transaction that is not subject to such a master netting agreement is 
its own netting set.
    N\th\-to-default credit derivative means a credit derivative that 
provides credit protection only for the n\th\-defaulting reference 
exposure in a group of reference exposures.
    Obligor means the legal entity or natural person contractually 
obligated on a wholesale exposure, except that a bank may treat the 
following exposures as having separate obligors:
    (1) Exposures to the same legal entity or natural person denominated 
in different currencies;
    (2)(i) An income-producing real estate exposure for which all or 
substantially all of the repayment of the exposure is reliant on the 
cash flows of the real estate serving as collateral for the exposure; 
the bank, in economic substance, does not have recourse to the borrower 
beyond the real estate collateral; and no cross-default or cross-
acceleration clauses are in place other than clauses obtained solely out 
of an abundance of caution; and
    (ii) Other credit exposures to the same legal entity or natural 
person; and
    (3)(i) A wholesale exposure authorized under section 364 of the U.S. 
Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.C. 364) to a legal entity or natural person who 
is a debtor-in-possession for purposes of Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy 
Code; and
    (ii) Other credit exposures to the same legal entity or natural 
person.
    Operational loss means a loss (excluding insurance or tax effects) 
resulting from an

[[Page 488]]

operational loss event. Operational loss includes all expenses 
associated with an operational loss event except for opportunity costs, 
forgone revenue, and costs related to risk management and control 
enhancements implemented to prevent future operational losses.
    Operational loss event means an event that results in loss and is 
associated with any of the following seven operational loss event type 
categories:
    (1) Internal fraud, which means the operational loss event type 
category that comprises operational losses resulting from an act 
involving at least one internal party of a type intended to defraud, 
misappropriate property, or circumvent regulations, the law, or company 
policy, excluding diversity- and discrimination-type events.
    (2) External fraud, which means the operational loss event type 
category that comprises operational losses resulting from an act by a 
third party of a type intended to defraud, misappropriate property, or 
circumvent the law. Retail credit card losses arising from non-
contractual, third-party initiated fraud (for example, identity theft) 
are external fraud operational losses. All other third-party initiated 
credit losses are to be treated as credit risk losses.
    (3) Employment practices and workplace safety, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from an act inconsistent with employment, health, or safety 
laws or agreements, payment of personal injury claims, or payment 
arising from diversity- and discrimination-type events.
    (4) Clients, products, and business practices, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from the nature or design of a product or from an 
unintentional or negligent failure to meet a professional obligation to 
specific clients (including fiduciary and suitability requirements).
    (5) Damage to physical assets, which means the operational loss 
event type category that comprises operational losses resulting from the 
loss of or damage to physical assets from natural disaster or other 
events.
    (6) Business disruption and system failures, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from disruption of business or system failures.
    (7) Execution, delivery, and process management, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from failed transaction processing or process management or 
losses arising from relations with trade counterparties and vendors.
    Operational risk means the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or 
failed internal processes, people, and systems or from external events 
(including legal risk but excluding strategic and reputational risk).
    Operational risk exposure means the 99.9\th\ percentile of the 
distribution of potential aggregate operational losses, as generated by 
the bank's operational risk quantification system over a one-year 
horizon (and not incorporating eligible operational risk offsets or 
qualifying operational risk mitigants).
    Originating bank, with respect to a securitization, means a bank 
that:
    (1) Directly or indirectly originated or securitized the underlying 
exposures included in the securitization; or
    (2) Serves as an ABCP program sponsor to the securitization.
    Other retail exposure means an exposure (other than a securitization 
exposure, an equity exposure, a residential mortgage exposure, an 
excluded mortgage exposure, a qualifying revolving exposure, or the 
residual value portion of a lease exposure) that is managed as part of a 
segment of exposures with homogeneous risk characteristics, not on an 
individual-exposure basis, and is either:
    (1) An exposure to an individual for non-business purposes; or
    (2) An exposure to an individual or company for business purposes if 
the bank's consolidated business credit exposure to the individual or 
company is $1 million or less.
    Over-the-counter (OTC) derivative contract means a derivative 
contract that is not traded on an exchange that requires the daily 
receipt and payment of cash-variation margin.
    Probability of default (PD) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor, the bank's 
empirically based best estimate of the long-run average one-year default 
rate for the rating grade assigned by the bank to the obligor, capturing 
the average default experience for obligors in the rating grade over a 
mix of economic conditions (including economic downturn conditions) 
sufficient to provide a reasonable estimate of the average one-year 
default rate over the economic cycle for the rating grade.
    (2) For a segment of non-defaulted retail exposures, the bank's 
empirically based best estimate of the long-run average one-year default 
rate for the exposures in the segment, capturing the average default 
experience for exposures in the segment over a mix of economic 
conditions (including economic downturn conditions) sufficient to 
provide a reasonable estimate of the average one-year default rate over 
the economic cycle for the segment and adjusted upward as appropriate 
for segments for which seasoning effects are material. For purposes of 
this definition, a segment for which seasoning effects are material is a 
segment where there is a material relationship between the time since 
origination of exposures within the segment and the bank's best estimate 
of the long-run average

[[Page 489]]

one-year default rate for the exposures in the segment.
    (3) For a wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor or segment of 
defaulted retail exposures, 100 percent.
    Protection amount (P) means, with respect to an exposure hedged by 
an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative, the effective 
notional amount of the guarantee or credit derivative, reduced to 
reflect any currency mismatch, maturity mismatch, or lack of 
restructuring coverage (as provided in section 33 of this appendix).
    Publicly traded means traded on:
    (1) Any exchange registered with the SEC as a national securities 
exchange under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78f); or
    (2) Any non-U.S.-based securities exchange that:
    (i) Is registered with, or approved by, a national securities 
regulatory authority; and
    (ii) Provides a liquid, two-way market for the instrument in 
question, meaning that there are enough independent bona fide offers to 
buy and sell so that a sales price reasonably related to the last sales 
price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations can be 
determined promptly and a trade can be settled at such a price within 
five business days.
    Qualifying central counterparty means a counterparty (for example, a 
clearinghouse) that:
    (1) Facilitates trades between counterparties in one or more 
financial markets by either guaranteeing trades or novating contracts;
    (2) Requires all participants in its arrangements to be fully 
collateralized on a daily basis; and
    (3) The bank demonstrates to the satisfaction of the FDIC is in 
sound financial condition and is subject to effective oversight by a 
national supervisory authority.
    Qualifying cross-product master netting agreement means a qualifying 
master netting agreement that provides for termination and close-out 
netting across multiple types of financial transactions or qualifying 
master netting agreements in the event of a counterparty's default, 
provided that:
    (1) The underlying financial transactions are OTC derivative 
contracts, eligible margin loans, or repo-style transactions; and
    (2) The bank obtains a written legal opinion verifying the validity 
and enforceability of the agreement under applicable law of the relevant 
jurisdictions if the counterparty fails to perform upon an event of 
default, including upon an event of bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar 
proceeding.
    Qualifying master netting agreement means any written, legally 
enforceable bilateral agreement, provided that:
    (1) The agreement creates a single legal obligation for all 
individual transactions covered by the agreement upon an event of 
default, including bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding, of the 
counterparty;
    (2) The agreement provides the bank the right to accelerate, 
terminate, and close-out on a net basis all transactions under the 
agreement and to liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an event 
of default, including upon an event of bankruptcy, insolvency, or 
similar proceeding, of the counterparty, provided that, in any such 
case, any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions;
    (3) The bank has conducted sufficient legal review to conclude with 
a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient written documentation of 
that legal review) that:
    (i) The agreement meets the requirements of paragraph (2) of this 
definition; and
    (ii) In the event of a legal challenge (including one resulting from 
default or from bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding) the 
relevant court and administrative authorities would find the agreement 
to be legal, valid, binding, and enforceable under the law of the 
relevant jurisdictions;
    (4) The bank establishes and maintains procedures to monitor 
possible changes in relevant law and to ensure that the agreement 
continues to satisfy the requirements of this definition; and
    (5) The agreement does not contain a walkaway clause (that is, a 
provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make a lower 
payment than it would make otherwise under the agreement, or no payment 
at all, to a defaulter or the estate of a defaulter, even if the 
defaulter or the estate of the defaulter is a net creditor under the 
agreement).
    Qualifying revolving exposure (QRE) means an exposure (other than a 
securitization exposure or equity exposure) to an individual that is 
managed as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, not on an individual-exposure basis, and:
    (1) Is revolving (that is, the amount outstanding fluctuates, 
determined largely by the borrower's decision to borrow and repay, up to 
a pre-established maximum amount);
    (2) Is unsecured and unconditionally cancelable by the bank to the 
fullest extent permitted by Federal law; and
    (3) Has a maximum exposure amount (drawn plus undrawn) of up to 
$100,000.
    Repo-style transaction means a repurchase or reverse repurchase 
transaction, or a securities borrowing or securities lending 
transaction, including a transaction in which the bank acts as agent for 
a customer and indemnifies the customer against loss, provided that:
    (1) The transaction is based solely on liquid and readily marketable 
securities, cash, gold, or conforming residential mortgages;

[[Page 490]]

    (2) The transaction is marked-to-market daily and subject to daily 
margin maintenance requirements;
    (3)(i) The transaction is a ``securities contract'' or ``repurchase 
agreement'' under section 555 or 559, respectively, of the Bankruptcy 
Code (11 U.S.C. 555 or 559), a qualified financial contract under 
section 11(e)(8) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1821(e)(8)), or a netting contract between or among financial 
institutions under sections 401-407 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 U.S.C. 4401-4407) or the Federal 
Reserve Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR part 231); or
    (ii) If the transaction does not meet the criteria set forth in 
paragraph (3)(i) of this definition, then either:
    (A) The transaction is executed under an agreement that provides the 
bank the right to accelerate, terminate, and close-out the transaction 
on a net basis and to liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an 
event of default (including upon an event of bankruptcy, insolvency, or 
similar proceeding) of the counterparty, provided that, in any such 
case, any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions; or
    (B) The transaction is:
    (1) Either overnight or unconditionally cancelable at any time by 
the bank; and
    (2) Executed under an agreement that provides the bank the right to 
accelerate, terminate, and close-out the transaction on a net basis and 
to liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon an event of 
counterparty default; and
    (4) The bank has conducted sufficient legal review to conclude with 
a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient written documentation of 
that legal review) that the agreement meets the requirements of 
paragraph (3) of this definition and is legal, valid, binding, and 
enforceable under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions.
    Residential mortgage exposure means an exposure (other than a 
securitization exposure, equity exposure, or excluded mortgage exposure) 
that is managed as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, not on an individual-exposure basis, and is:
    (1) An exposure that is primarily secured by a first or subsequent 
lien on one- to four-family residential property; or
    (2) An exposure with an original and outstanding amount of $1 
million or less that is primarily secured by a first or subsequent lien 
on residential property that is not one to four family.
    Retail exposure means a residential mortgage exposure, a qualifying 
revolving exposure, or an other retail exposure.
    Retail exposure subcategory means the residential mortgage exposure, 
qualifying revolving exposure, or other retail exposure subcategory.
    Risk parameter means a variable used in determining risk-based 
capital requirements for wholesale and retail exposures, specifically 
probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD), exposure at 
default (EAD), or effective maturity (M).
    Scenario analysis means a systematic process of obtaining expert 
opinions from business managers and risk management experts to derive 
reasoned assessments of the likelihood and loss impact of plausible 
high-severity operational losses. Scenario analysis may include the 
well-reasoned evaluation and use of external operational loss event 
data, adjusted as appropriate to ensure relevance to a bank's 
operational risk profile and control structure.
    SEC means the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.
    Securitization means a traditional securitization or a synthetic 
securitization.
    Securitization exposure means an on-balance sheet or off-balance 
sheet credit exposure that arises from a traditional or synthetic 
securitization (including credit-enhancing representations and 
warranties).
    Securitization special purpose entity (securitization SPE) means a 
corporation, trust, or other entity organized for the specific purpose 
of holding underlying exposures of a securitization, the activities of 
which are limited to those appropriate to accomplish this purpose, and 
the structure of which is intended to isolate the underlying exposures 
held by the entity from the credit risk of the seller of the underlying 
exposures to the entity.
    Senior securitization exposure means a securitization exposure that 
has a first priority claim on the cash flows from the underlying 
exposures. When determining whether a securitization exposure has a 
first priority claim on the cash flows from the underlying exposures, a 
bank is not required to consider amounts due under interest rate or 
currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other similar payments. Both 
the most senior commercial paper issued by an ABCP program and a 
liquidity facility that supports the ABCP program may be senior 
securitization exposures if the liquidity facility provider's right to 
reimbursement of the drawn amounts is senior to all claims on the cash 
flows from the underlying exposures except amounts due under interest 
rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other similar 
payments.
    Servicer cash advance facility means a facility under which the 
servicer of the underlying exposures of a securitization may advance 
cash to ensure an uninterrupted flow of payments to investors in the 
securitization, including advances made to cover foreclosure costs or 
other expenses to

[[Page 491]]

facilitate the timely collection of the underlying exposures. See also 
eligible servicer cash advance facility.
    Sovereign entity means a central government (including the U.S. 
government) or an agency, department, ministry, or central bank of a 
central government.
    Sovereign exposure means:
    (1) A direct exposure to a sovereign entity; or
    (2) An exposure directly and unconditionally backed by the full 
faith and credit of a sovereign entity.
    Subsidiary means, with respect to a company, a company controlled by 
that company.
    Synthetic securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties through the use of 
one or more credit derivatives or guarantees (other than a guarantee 
that transfers only the credit risk of an individual retail exposure);
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches reflecting different levels of 
seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures; and
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities).
    Tier 1 capital is defined in 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, as 
modified in part II of this appendix.
    Tier 2 capital is defined in 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, as 
modified in part II of this appendix.
    Total qualifying capital means the sum of tier 1 capital and tier 2 
capital, after all deductions required in this appendix.
    Total risk-weighted assets means:
    (1) The sum of:
    (i) Credit risk-weighted assets; and
    (ii) Risk-weighted assets for operational risk; minus
    (2) Excess eligible credit reserves not included in tier 2 capital.
    Total wholesale and retail risk-weighted assets means the sum of 
risk-weighted assets for wholesale exposures to non-defaulted obligors 
and segments of non-defaulted retail exposures; risk-weighted assets for 
wholesale exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of defaulted 
retail exposures; risk-weighted assets for assets not defined by an 
exposure category; and risk-weighted assets for non-material portfolios 
of exposures (all as determined in section 31 of this appendix) and 
risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions (as determined in 
section 35 of this appendix) minus the amounts deducted from capital 
pursuant to 12 CFR part 325, appendix A (excluding those deductions 
reversed in section 12 of this appendix).
    Traditional securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties other than through 
the use of credit derivatives or guarantees;
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches reflecting different levels of 
seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures;
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities);
    (5) The underlying exposures are not owned by an operating company;
    (6) The underlying exposures are not owned by a small business 
investment company described in section 302 of the Small Business 
Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682); and
    (7) The underlying exposures are not owned by a firm an investment 
in which qualifies as a community development investment under 12 U.S.C. 
24(Eleventh).
    (8) The FDIC may determine that a transaction in which the 
underlying exposures are owned by an investment firm that exercises 
substantially unfettered control over the size and composition of its 
assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet exposures is not a 
traditional securitization based on the transaction's leverage, risk 
profile, or economic substance.
    (9) The FDIC may deem a transaction that meets the definition of a 
traditional securitization, notwithstanding paragraph (5), (6), or (7) 
of this definition, to be a traditional securitization based on the 
transaction's leverage, risk profile, or economic substance.
    Tranche means all securitization exposures associated with a 
securitization that have the same seniority level.
    Underlying exposures means one or more exposures that have been 
securitized in a securitization transaction.
    Unexpected operational loss (UOL) means the difference between the 
bank's operational risk exposure and the bank's expected operational 
loss.
    Unit of measure means the level (for example, organizational unit or 
operational loss event type) at which the bank's operational risk 
quantification system generates a separate distribution of potential 
operational losses.

[[Page 492]]

    Value-at-Risk (VaR) means the estimate of the maximum amount that 
the value of one or more exposures could decline due to market price or 
rate movements during a fixed holding period within a stated confidence 
interval.
    Wholesale exposure means a credit exposure to a company, natural 
person, sovereign entity, or governmental entity (other than a 
securitization exposure, retail exposure, excluded mortgage exposure, or 
equity exposure). Examples of a wholesale exposure include:
    (1) A non-tranched guarantee issued by a bank on behalf of a 
company;
    (2) A repo-style transaction entered into by a bank with a company 
and any other transaction in which a bank posts collateral to a company 
and faces counterparty credit risk;
    (3) An exposure that a bank treats as a covered position under 12 
CFR part 325, appendix C for which there is a counterparty credit risk 
capital requirement;
    (4) A sale of corporate loans by a bank to a third party in which 
the bank retains full recourse;
    (5) An OTC derivative contract entered into by a bank with a 
company;
    (6) An exposure to an individual that is not managed by a bank as 
part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous risk characteristics; 
and
    (7) A commercial lease.
    Wholesale exposure subcategory means the HVCRE or non-HVCRE 
wholesale exposure subcategory.

           Section 3. Minimum Risk-Based Capital Requirements

    (a)(1) Except as modified by paragraph (c) of this section or by 
section 23 of this appendix, each bank must meet a minimum:
    (i) Total risk-based capital ratio of 8.0 percent; and
    (ii) Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 4.0 percent.
    (2) A bank's total risk-based capital ratio is the lower of:
    (i) Its total qualifying capital to total risk-weighted assets, and
    (ii) Its total risk-based capital ratio as calculated under appendix 
A of this part.
    (3) A bank's tier 1 risk-based capital ratio is the lower of:
    (i) Its tier 1 capital to total risk-weighted assets, and
    (ii) Its tier 1 risk-based capital ratio as calculated under 
appendix A of this part.
    (b) Each bank must hold capital commensurate with the level and 
nature of all risks to which the bank is exposed.
    (c) When a bank subject to appendix C of this part calculates its 
risk-based capital requirements under this appendix, the bank must also 
refer to appendix C of this part for supplemental rules to calculate 
risk-based capital requirements adjusted for market risk.

                       Part II. Qualifying Capital

                    Section 11. Additional Deductions

    (a) General. A bank that uses this appendix must make the same 
deductions from its tier 1 capital and tier 2 capital required in 12 CFR 
part 325, appendix A, except that:
    (1) A bank is not required to deduct certain equity investments and 
CEIOs (as provided in section 12 of this appendix); and
    (2) A bank also must make the deductions from capital required by 
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
    (b) Deductions from tier 1 capital. A bank must deduct from tier 1 
capital any gain-on-sale associated with a securitization exposure as 
provided in paragraph (a) of section 41 and paragraphs (a)(1), (c), 
(g)(1), and (h)(1) of section 42 of this appendix.
    (c) Deductions from tier 1 and tier 2 capital. A bank must deduct 
the exposures specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(7) in this 
section 50 percent from tier 1 capital and 50 percent from tier 2 
capital. If the amount deductible from tier 2 capital exceeds the bank's 
actual tier 2 capital, however, the bank must deduct the excess from 
tier 1 capital.
    (1) Credit-enhancing interest-only strips (CEIOs). In accordance 
with paragraphs (a)(1) and (c) of section 42 of this appendix, any CEIO 
that does not constitute gain-on-sale.
    (2) Non-qualifying securitization exposures. In accordance with 
paragraphs (a)(4) and (c) of section 42 of this appendix, any 
securitization exposure that does not qualify for the Ratings-Based 
Approach, the Internal Assessment Approach, or the Supervisory Formula 
Approach under sections 43, 44, and 45 of this appendix, respectively.
    (3) Securitizations of non-IRB exposures. In accordance with 
paragraphs (c) and (g)(4) of section 42 of this appendix, certain 
exposures to a securitization any underlying exposure of which is not a 
wholesale exposure, retail exposure, securitization exposure, or equity 
exposure.
    (4) Low-rated securitization exposures. In accordance with section 
43 and paragraph (c) of section 42 of this appendix, any securitization 
exposure that qualifies for and must be deducted under the Ratings-Based 
Approach.
    (5) High-risk securitization exposures subject to the Supervisory 
Formula Approach. In accordance with paragraphs (b) and (c) of section 
45 of this appendix and paragraph (c) of section 42 of this appendix, 
certain high-risk securitization exposures (or portions thereof) that 
qualify for the Supervisory Formula Approach.
    (6) Eligible credit reserves shortfall. In accordance with paragraph 
(a)(1) of section 13

[[Page 493]]

of this appendix, any eligible credit reserves shortfall.
    (7) Certain failed capital markets transactions. In accordance with 
paragraph (e)(3) of section 35 of this appendix, the bank's exposure on 
certain failed capital markets transactions.

           Section 12. Deductions and Limitations Not Required

    (a) Deduction of CEIOs. A bank is not required to make the 
deductions from capital for CEIOs in 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, 
section II.B.5.
    (b) Deduction for certain equity investments. A bank is not required 
to make the deductions from capital for nonfinancial equity investments 
in 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, section II.B.

                  Section 13. Eligible Credit Reserves

    (a) Comparison of eligible credit reserves to expected credit 
losses--(1) Shortfall of eligible credit reserves. If a bank's eligible 
credit reserves are less than the bank's total expected credit losses, 
the bank must deduct the shortfall amount 50 percent from tier 1 capital 
and 50 percent from tier 2 capital. If the amount deductible from tier 2 
capital exceeds the bank's actual tier 2 capital, the bank must deduct 
the excess amount from tier 1 capital.
    (2) Excess eligible credit reserves. If a bank's eligible credit 
reserves exceed the bank's total expected credit losses, the bank may 
include the excess amount in tier 2 capital to the extent that the 
excess amount does not exceed 0.6 percent of the bank's credit-risk-
weighted assets.
    (b) Treatment of allowance for loan and lease losses. Regardless of 
any provision in 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, the ALLL is included in 
tier 2 capital only to the extent provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section and in section 24 of this appendix.

                         Part III. Qualification

                    Section 21. Qualification Process

    (a) Timing. (1) A bank that is described in paragraph (b)(1) of 
section 1 of this appendix must adopt a written implementation plan no 
later than six months after the later of April 1, 2008, or the date the 
bank meets a criterion in that section. The implementation plan must 
incorporate an explicit first floor period start date no later than 36 
months after the later of April 1, 2008, or the date the bank meets at 
least one criterion under paragraph (b)(1) of section 1 of this 
appendix. The FDIC may extend the first floor period start date.
    (2) A bank that elects to be subject to this appendix under 
paragraph (b)(2) of section 1 of this appendix must adopt a written 
implementation plan.
    (b) Implementation plan. (1) The bank's implementation plan must 
address in detail how the bank complies, or plans to comply, with the 
qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix. The bank also 
must maintain a comprehensive and sound planning and governance process 
to oversee the implementation efforts described in the plan. At a 
minimum, the plan must:
    (i) Comprehensively address the qualification requirements in 
section 22 of this appendix for the bank and each consolidated 
subsidiary (U.S. and foreign-based) of the bank with respect to all 
portfolios and exposures of the bank and each of its consolidated 
subsidiaries;
    (ii) Justify and support any proposed temporary or permanent 
exclusion of business lines, portfolios, or exposures from application 
of the advanced approaches in this appendix (which business lines, 
portfolios, and exposures must be, in the aggregate, immaterial to the 
bank);
    (iii) Include the bank's self-assessment of:
    (A) The bank's current status in meeting the qualification 
requirements in section 22 of this appendix; and
    (B) The consistency of the bank's current practices with the FDIC's 
supervisory guidance on the qualification requirements;
    (iv) Based on the bank's self-assessment, identify and describe the 
areas in which the bank proposes to undertake additional work to comply 
with the qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix or to 
improve the consistency of the bank's current practices with the FDIC's 
supervisory guidance on the qualification requirements (gap analysis);
    (v) Describe what specific actions the bank will take to address the 
areas identified in the gap analysis required by paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of 
this section;
    (vi) Identify objective, measurable milestones, including delivery 
dates and a date when the bank's implementation of the methodologies 
described in this appendix will be fully operational;
    (vii) Describe resources that have been budgeted and are available 
to implement the plan; and
    (viii) Receive approval of the bank's board of directors.
    (2) The bank must submit the implementation plan, together with a 
copy of the minutes of the board of directors' approval, to the FDIC at 
least 60 days before the bank proposes to begin its parallel run, unless 
the FDIC waives prior notice.
    (c) Parallel run. Before determining its risk-based capital 
requirements under this appendix and following adoption of the 
implementation plan, the bank must conduct a satisfactory parallel run. 
A satisfactory parallel run is a period of no less than four consecutive 
calendar quarters during which the

[[Page 494]]

bank complies with the qualification requirements in section 22 of this 
appendix to the satisfaction of the FDIC. During the parallel run, the 
bank must report to the FDIC on a calendar quarterly basis its risk-
based capital ratios using 12 CFR part 325, appendix A and the risk-
based capital requirements described in this appendix. During this 
period, the bank is subject to 12 CFR part 325, appendix A.
    (d) Approval to calculate risk-based capital requirements under this 
appendix. The FDIC will notify the bank of the date that the bank may 
begin its first floor period if the FDIC determines that:
    (1) The bank fully complies with all the qualification requirements 
in section 22 of this appendix;
    (2) The bank has conducted a satisfactory parallel run under 
paragraph (c) of this section; and
    (3) The bank has an adequate process to ensure ongoing compliance 
with the qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix.

                 Section 22. Qualification Requirements

    (a) Process and systems requirements. (1) A bank must have a 
rigorous process for assessing its overall capital adequacy in relation 
to its risk profile and a comprehensive strategy for maintaining an 
appropriate level of capital.
    (2) The systems and processes used by a bank for risk-based capital 
purposes under this appendix must be consistent with the bank's internal 
risk management processes and management information reporting systems.
    (3) Each bank must have an appropriate infrastructure with risk 
measurement and management processes that meet the qualification 
requirements of this section and are appropriate given the bank's size 
and level of complexity. Regardless of whether the systems and models 
that generate the risk parameters necessary for calculating a bank's 
risk-based capital requirements are located at any affiliate of the 
bank, the bank itself must ensure that the risk parameters and reference 
data used to determine its risk-based capital requirements are 
representative of its own credit risk and operational risk exposures.
    (b) Risk rating and segmentation systems for wholesale and retail 
exposures. (1) A bank must have an internal risk rating and segmentation 
system that accurately and reliably differentiates among degrees of 
credit risk for the bank's wholesale and retail exposures.
    (2) For wholesale exposures:
    (i) A bank must have an internal risk rating system that accurately 
and reliably assigns each obligor to a single rating grade (reflecting 
the obligor's likelihood of default). A bank may elect, however, not to 
assign to a rating grade an obligor to whom the bank extends credit 
based solely on the financial strength of a guarantor, provided that all 
of the bank's exposures to the obligor are fully covered by eligible 
guarantees, the bank applies the PD substitution approach in paragraph 
(c)(1) of section 33 of this appendix to all exposures to that obligor, 
and the bank immediately assigns the obligor to a rating grade if a 
guarantee can no longer be recognized under this appendix. The bank's 
wholesale obligor rating system must have at least seven discrete rating 
grades for non-defaulted obligors and at least one rating grade for 
defaulted obligors.
    (ii) Unless the bank has chosen to directly assign LGD estimates to 
each wholesale exposure, the bank must have an internal risk rating 
system that accurately and reliably assigns each wholesale exposure to a 
loss severity rating grade (reflecting the bank's estimate of the LGD of 
the exposure). A bank employing loss severity rating grades must have a 
sufficiently granular loss severity grading system to avoid grouping 
together exposures with widely ranging LGDs.
    (3) For retail exposures, a bank must have an internal system that 
groups retail exposures into the appropriate retail exposure 
subcategory, groups the retail exposures in each retail exposure 
subcategory into separate segments with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, and assigns accurate and reliable PD and LGD estimates 
for each segment on a consistent basis. The bank's system must identify 
and group in separate segments by subcategories exposures identified in 
paragraphs (c)(2)(ii) and (iii) of section 31 of this appendix.
    (4) The bank's internal risk rating policy for wholesale exposures 
must describe the bank's rating philosophy (that is, must describe how 
wholesale obligor rating assignments are affected by the bank's choice 
of the range of economic, business, and industry conditions that are 
considered in the obligor rating process).
    (5) The bank's internal risk rating system for wholesale exposures 
must provide for the review and update (as appropriate) of each obligor 
rating and (if applicable) each loss severity rating whenever the bank 
receives new material information, but no less frequently than annually. 
The bank's retail exposure segmentation system must provide for the 
review and update (as appropriate) of assignments of retail exposures to 
segments whenever the bank receives new material information, but 
generally no less frequently than quarterly.
    (c) Quantification of risk parameters for wholesale and retail 
exposures. (1) The bank must have a comprehensive risk parameter 
quantification process that produces accurate, timely, and reliable 
estimates of the risk parameters for the bank's wholesale and retail 
exposures.

[[Page 495]]

    (2) Data used to estimate the risk parameters must be relevant to 
the bank's actual wholesale and retail exposures, and of sufficient 
quality to support the determination of risk-based capital requirements 
for the exposures.
    (3) The bank's risk parameter quantification process must produce 
appropriately conservative risk parameter estimates where the bank has 
limited relevant data, and any adjustments that are part of the 
quantification process must not result in a pattern of bias toward lower 
risk parameter estimates.
    (4) The bank's risk parameter estimation process should not rely on 
the possibility of U.S. government financial assistance, except for the 
financial assistance that the U.S. government has a legally binding 
commitment to provide.
    (5) Where the bank's quantifications of LGD directly or indirectly 
incorporate estimates of the effectiveness of its credit risk management 
practices in reducing its exposure to troubled obligors prior to 
default, the bank must support such estimates with empirical analysis 
showing that the estimates are consistent with its historical experience 
in dealing with such exposures during economic downturn conditions.
    (6) PD estimates for wholesale obligors and retail segments must be 
based on at least five years of default data. LGD estimates for 
wholesale exposures must be based on at least seven years of loss 
severity data, and LGD estimates for retail segments must be based on at 
least five years of loss severity data. EAD estimates for wholesale 
exposures must be based on at least seven years of exposure amount data, 
and EAD estimates for retail segments must be based on at least five 
years of exposure amount data.
    (7) Default, loss severity, and exposure amount data must include 
periods of economic downturn conditions, or the bank must adjust its 
estimates of risk parameters to compensate for the lack of data from 
periods of economic downturn conditions.
    (8) The bank's PD, LGD, and EAD estimates must be based on the 
definition of default in this appendix.
    (9) The bank must review and update (as appropriate) its risk 
parameters and its risk parameter quantification process at least 
annually.
    (10) The bank must at least annually conduct a comprehensive review 
and analysis of reference data to determine relevance of reference data 
to the bank's exposures, quality of reference data to support PD, LGD, 
and EAD estimates, and consistency of reference data to the definition 
of default contained in this appendix.
    (d) Counterparty credit risk model. A bank must obtain the prior 
written approval of the FDIC under section 32 of this appendix to use 
the internal models methodology for counterparty credit risk.
    (e) Double default treatment. A bank must obtain the prior written 
approval of the FDIC under section 34 of this appendix to use the double 
default treatment.
    (f) Securitization exposures. A bank must obtain the prior written 
approval of the FDIC under section 44 of this appendix to use the 
Internal Assessment Approach for securitization exposures to ABCP 
programs.
    (g) Equity exposures model. A bank must obtain the prior written 
approval of the FDIC under section 53 of this appendix to use the 
Internal Models Approach for equity exposures.
    (h) Operational risk--(1) Operational risk management processes. A 
bank must:
    (i) Have an operational risk management function that:
    (A) Is independent of business line management; and
    (B) Is responsible for designing, implementing, and overseeing the 
bank's operational risk data and assessment systems, operational risk 
quantification systems, and related processes;
    (ii) Have and document a process (which must capture business 
environment and internal control factors affecting the bank's 
operational risk profile) to identify, measure, monitor, and control 
operational risk in bank products, activities, processes, and systems; 
and
    (iii) Report operational risk exposures, operational loss events, 
and other relevant operational risk information to business unit 
management, senior management, and the board of directors (or a 
designated committee of the board).
    (2) Operational risk data and assessment systems. A bank must have 
operational risk data and assessment systems that capture operational 
risks to which the bank is exposed. The bank's operational risk data and 
assessment systems must:
    (i) Be structured in a manner consistent with the bank's current 
business activities, risk profile, technological processes, and risk 
management processes; and
    (ii) Include credible, transparent, systematic, and verifiable 
processes that incorporate the following elements on an ongoing basis:
    (A) Internal operational loss event data. The bank must have a 
systematic process for capturing and using internal operational loss 
event data in its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (1) The bank's operational risk data and assessment systems must 
include a historical observation period of at least five years for 
internal operational loss event data (or such shorter period approved by 
the FDIC to address transitional situations, such as integrating a new 
business line).
    (2) The bank must be able to map its internal operational loss event 
data into the seven operational loss event type categories.

[[Page 496]]

    (3) The bank may refrain from collecting internal operational loss 
event data for individual operational losses below established dollar 
threshold amounts if the bank can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the 
FDIC that the thresholds are reasonable, do not exclude important 
internal operational loss event data, and permit the bank to capture 
substantially all the dollar value of the bank's operational losses.
    (B) External operational loss event data. The bank must have a 
systematic process for determining its methodologies for incorporating 
external operational loss event data into its operational risk data and 
assessment systems.
    (C) Scenario analysis. The bank must have a systematic process for 
determining its methodologies for incorporating scenario analysis into 
its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (D) Business environment and internal control factors. The bank must 
incorporate business environment and internal control factors into its 
operational risk data and assessment systems. The bank must also 
periodically compare the results of its prior business environment and 
internal control factor assessments against its actual operational 
losses incurred in the intervening period.
    (3) Operational risk quantification systems. (i) The bank's 
operational risk quantification systems:
    (A) Must generate estimates of the bank's operational risk exposure 
using its operational risk data and assessment systems;
    (B) Must employ a unit of measure that is appropriate for the bank's 
range of business activities and the variety of operational loss events 
to which it is exposed, and that does not combine business activities or 
operational loss events with demonstrably different risk profiles within 
the same loss distribution;
    (C) Must include a credible, transparent, systematic, and verifiable 
approach for weighting each of the four elements, described in paragraph 
(h)(2)(ii) of this section, that a bank is required to incorporate into 
its operational risk data and assessment systems;
    (D) May use internal estimates of dependence among operational 
losses across and within units of measure if the bank can demonstrate to 
the satisfaction of the FDIC that its process for estimating dependence 
is sound, robust to a variety of scenarios, and implemented with 
integrity, and allows for the uncertainty surrounding the estimates. If 
the bank has not made such a demonstration, it must sum operational risk 
exposure estimates across units of measure to calculate its total 
operational risk exposure; and
    (E) Must be reviewed and updated (as appropriate) whenever the bank 
becomes aware of information that may have a material effect on the 
bank's estimate of operational risk exposure, but the review and update 
must occur no less frequently than annually.
    (ii) With the prior written approval of the FDIC, a bank may 
generate an estimate of its operational risk exposure using an 
alternative approach to that specified in paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this 
section. A bank proposing to use such an alternative operational risk 
quantification system must submit a proposal to the FDIC. In determining 
whether to approve a bank's proposal to use an alternative operational 
risk quantification system, the FDIC will consider the following 
principles:
    (A) Use of the alternative operational risk quantification system 
will be allowed only on an exception basis, considering the size, 
complexity, and risk profile of the bank;
    (B) The bank must demonstrate that its estimate of its operational 
risk exposure generated under the alternative operational risk 
quantification system is appropriate and can be supported empirically; 
and
    (C) A bank must not use an allocation of operational risk capital 
requirements that includes entities other than depository institutions 
or the benefits of diversification across entities.
    (i) Data management and maintenance. (1) A bank must have data 
management and maintenance systems that adequately support all aspects 
of its advanced systems and the timely and accurate reporting of risk-
based capital requirements.
    (2) A bank must retain data using an electronic format that allows 
timely retrieval of data for analysis, validation, reporting, and 
disclosure purposes.
    (3) A bank must retain sufficient data elements related to key risk 
drivers to permit adequate monitoring, validation, and refinement of its 
advanced systems.
    (j) Control, oversight, and validation mechanisms. (1) The bank's 
senior management must ensure that all components of the bank's advanced 
systems function effectively and comply with the qualification 
requirements in this section.
    (2) The bank's board of directors (or a designated committee of the 
board) must at least annually review the effectiveness of, and approve, 
the bank's advanced systems.
    (3) A bank must have an effective system of controls and oversight 
that:
    (i) Ensures ongoing compliance with the qualification requirements 
in this section;
    (ii) Maintains the integrity, reliability, and accuracy of the 
bank's advanced systems; and
    (iii) Includes adequate governance and project management processes.
    (4) The bank must validate, on an ongoing basis, its advanced 
systems. The bank's validation process must be independent of the

[[Page 497]]

advanced systems' development, implementation, and operation, or the 
validation process must be subjected to an independent review of its 
adequacy and effectiveness. Validation must include:
    (i) An evaluation of the conceptual soundness of (including 
developmental evidence supporting) the advanced systems;
    (ii) An ongoing monitoring process that includes verification of 
processes and benchmarking; and
    (iii) An outcomes analysis process that includes back-testing.
    (5) The bank must have an internal audit function independent of 
business-line management that at least annually assesses the 
effectiveness of the controls supporting the bank's advanced systems and 
reports its findings to the bank's board of directors (or a committee 
thereof).
    (6) The bank must periodically stress test its advanced systems. The 
stress testing must include a consideration of how economic cycles, 
especially downturns, affect risk-based capital requirements (including 
migration across rating grades and segments and the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of double default treatment).
    (k) Documentation. The bank must adequately document all material 
aspects of its advanced systems.

                    Section 23. Ongoing Qualification

    (a) Changes to advanced systems. A bank must meet all the 
qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix on an ongoing 
basis. A bank must notify the FDIC when the bank makes any change to an 
advanced system that would result in a material change in the bank's 
risk-weighted asset amount for an exposure type, or when the bank makes 
any significant change to its modeling assumptions.
    (b) Failure to comply with qualification requirements. (1) If the 
FDIC determines that a bank that uses this appendix and has conducted a 
satisfactory parallel run fails to comply with the qualification 
requirements in section 22 of this appendix, the FDIC will notify the 
bank in writing of the bank's failure to comply.
    (2) The bank must establish and submit a plan satisfactory to the 
FDIC to return to compliance with the qualification requirements.
    (3) In addition, if the FDIC determines that the bank's risk-based 
capital requirements are not commensurate with the bank's credit, 
market, operational, or other risks, the FDIC may require such a bank to 
calculate its risk-based capital requirements:
    (i) Under 12 CFR part 325, appendix A; or
    (ii) Under this appendix with any modifications provided by the 
FDIC.

      Section 24. Merger and Acquisition Transitional Arrangements

    (a) Mergers and acquisitions of companies without advanced systems. 
If a bank merges with or acquires a company that does not calculate its 
risk-based capital requirements using advanced systems, the bank may use 
12 CFR part 325, appendix A to determine the risk-weighted asset amounts 
for, and deductions from capital associated with, the merged or acquired 
company's exposures for up to 24 months after the calendar quarter 
during which the merger or acquisition consummates. The FDIC may extend 
this transition period for up to an additional 12 months. Within 90 days 
of consummating the merger or acquisition, the bank must submit to the 
FDIC an implementation plan for using its advanced systems for the 
acquired company. During the period when 12 CFR part 325, appendix A 
apply to the merged or acquired company, any ALLL, net of allocated 
transfer risk reserves established pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 3904, 
associated with the merged or acquired company's exposures may be 
included in the acquiring bank's tier 2 capital up to 1.25 percent of 
the acquired company's risk-weighted assets. All general allowances of 
the merged or acquired company must be excluded from the bank's eligible 
credit reserves. In addition, the risk-weighted assets of the merged or 
acquired company are not included in the bank's credit-risk-weighted 
assets but are included in total risk-weighted assets. If a bank relies 
on this paragraph, the bank must disclose publicly the amounts of risk-
weighted assets and qualifying capital calculated under this appendix 
for the acquiring bank and under 12 CFR part 325, appendix A for the 
acquired company.
    (b) Mergers and acquisitions of companies with advanced systems--(1) 
If a bank merges with or acquires a company that calculates its risk-
based capital requirements using advanced systems, the bank may use the 
acquired company's advanced systems to determine the risk-weighted asset 
amounts for, and deductions from capital associated with, the merged or 
acquired company's exposures for up to 24 months after the calendar 
quarter during which the acquisition or merger consummates. The FDIC may 
extend this transition period for up to an additional 12 months. Within 
90 days of consummating the merger or acquisition, the bank must submit 
to the FDIC an implementation plan for using its advanced systems for 
the merged or acquired company.
    (2) If the acquiring bank is not subject to the advanced approaches 
in this appendix at the time of acquisition or merger, during the period 
when 12 CFR part 325, appendix A apply to the acquiring bank, the ALLL 
associated with the exposures of the merged or

[[Page 498]]

acquired company may not be directly included in tier 2 capital. Rather, 
any excess eligible credit reserves associated with the merged or 
acquired company's exposures may be included in the bank's tier 2 
capital up to 0.6 percent of the credit-risk-weighted assets associated 
with those exposures.

          Part IV. Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk

 Section 31. Mechanics for Calculating Total Wholesale and Retail Risk-
                             Weighted Assets

    (a) Overview. A bank must calculate its total wholesale and retail 
risk-weighted asset amount in four distinct phases:
    (1) Phase 1--categorization of exposures;
    (2) Phase 2--assignment of wholesale obligors and exposures to 
rating grades and segmentation of retail exposures;
    (3) Phase 3--assignment of risk parameters to wholesale exposures 
and segments of retail exposures; and
    (4) Phase 4--calculation of risk-weighted asset amounts.
    (b) Phase 1--Categorization. The bank must determine which of its 
exposures are wholesale exposures, retail exposures, securitization 
exposures, or equity exposures. The bank must categorize each retail 
exposure as a residential mortgage exposure, a QRE, or an other retail 
exposure. The bank must identify which wholesale exposures are HVCRE 
exposures, sovereign exposures, OTC derivative contracts, repo-style 
transactions, eligible margin loans, eligible purchased wholesale 
exposures, unsettled transactions to which section 35 of this appendix 
applies, and eligible guarantees or eligible credit derivatives that are 
used as credit risk mitigants. The bank must identify any on-balance 
sheet asset that does not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, 
equity, or securitization exposure, as well as any non-material 
portfolio of exposures described in paragraph (e)(4) of this section.
    (c) Phase 2--Assignment of wholesale obligors and exposures to 
rating grades and retail exposures to segments--(1) Assignment of 
wholesale obligors and exposures to rating grades. (i) The bank must 
assign each obligor of a wholesale exposure to a single obligor rating 
grade and must assign each wholesale exposure to which it does not 
directly assign an LGD estimate to a loss severity rating grade.
    (ii) The bank must identify which of its wholesale obligors are in 
default.
    (2) Segmentation of retail exposures. (i) The bank must group the 
retail exposures in each retail subcategory into segments that have 
homogeneous risk characteristics.
    (ii) The bank must identify which of its retail exposures are in 
default. The bank must segment defaulted retail exposures separately 
from non-defaulted retail exposures.
    (iii) If the bank determines the EAD for eligible margin loans using 
the approach in paragraph (b) of section 32 of this appendix, the bank 
must identify which of its retail exposures are eligible margin loans 
for which the bank uses this EAD approach and must segment such eligible 
margin loans separately from other retail exposures.
    (3) Eligible purchased wholesale exposures. A bank may group its 
eligible purchased wholesale exposures into segments that have 
homogeneous risk characteristics. A bank must use the wholesale exposure 
formula in Table 2 in this section to determine the risk-based capital 
requirement for each segment of eligible purchased wholesale exposures.
    (d) Phase 3--Assignment of risk parameters to wholesale exposures 
and segments of retail exposures--(1) Quantification process. Subject to 
the limitations in this paragraph (d), the bank must:
    (i) Associate a PD with each wholesale obligor rating grade;
    (ii) Associate an LGD with each wholesale loss severity rating grade 
or assign an LGD to each wholesale exposure;
    (iii) Assign an EAD and M to each wholesale exposure; and
    (iv) Assign a PD, LGD, and EAD to each segment of retail exposures.
    (2) Floor on PD assignment. The PD for each wholesale obligor or 
retail segment may not be less than 0.03 percent, except for exposures 
to or directly and unconditionally guaranteed by a sovereign entity, the 
Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, the 
European Commission, the European Central Bank, or a multilateral 
development bank, to which the bank assigns a rating grade associated 
with a PD of less than 0.03 percent.
    (3) Floor on LGD estimation. The LGD for each segment of residential 
mortgage exposures (other than segments of residential mortgage 
exposures for which all or substantially all of the principal of each 
exposure is directly and unconditionally guaranteed by the full faith 
and credit of a sovereign entity) may not be less than 10 percent.
    (4) Eligible purchased wholesale exposures. A bank must assign a PD, 
LGD, EAD, and M to each segment of eligible purchased wholesale 
exposures. If the bank can estimate ECL (but not PD or LGD) for a 
segment of eligible purchased wholesale exposures, the bank must assume 
that the LGD of the segment equals 100 percent and that the PD of the 
segment equals ECL divided by EAD. The estimated ECL must be calculated 
for the exposures without regard to any assumption of recourse or 
guarantees from the seller or other parties.
    (5) Credit risk mitigation--credit derivatives, guarantees, and 
collateral. (i) A bank may take into account the risk reducing effects 
of eligible guarantees and eligible credit derivatives in support of a 
wholesale exposure

[[Page 499]]

by applying the PD substitution or LGD adjustment treatment to the 
exposure as provided in section 33 of this appendix or, if applicable, 
applying double default treatment to the exposure as provided in section 
34 of this appendix. A bank may decide separately for each wholesale 
exposure that qualifies for the double default treatment under section 
34 of this appendix whether to apply the double default treatment or to 
use the PD substitution or LGD adjustment treatment without recognizing 
double default effects.
    (ii) A bank may take into account the risk reducing effects of 
guarantees and credit derivatives in support of retail exposures in a 
segment when quantifying the PD and LGD of the segment.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(6) of this section, a bank 
may take into account the risk reducing effects of collateral in support 
of a wholesale exposure when quantifying the LGD of the exposure and may 
take into account the risk reducing effects of collateral in support of 
retail exposures when quantifying the PD and LGD of the segment.
    (6) EAD for OTC derivative contracts, repo-style transactions, and 
eligible margin loans. (i) A bank must calculate its EAD for an OTC 
derivative contract as provided in paragraphs (c) and (d) of section 32 
of this appendix. A bank may take into account the risk-reducing effects 
of financial collateral in support of a repo-style transaction or 
eligible margin loan and of any collateral in support of a repo-style 
transaction that is included in the bank's VaR-based measure under 12 
CFR part 325, appendix C through an adjustment to EAD as provided in 
paragraphs (b) and (d) of section 32 of this appendix. A bank that takes 
collateral into account through such an adjustment to EAD under section 
32 of this appendix may not reflect such collateral in LGD.
    (ii) A bank may attribute an EAD of zero to:
    (A) Derivative contracts that are publicly traded on an exchange 
that requires the daily receipt and payment of cash-variation margin;
    (B) Derivative contracts and repo-style transactions that are 
outstanding with a qualifying central counterparty (but not for those 
transactions that a qualifying central counterparty has rejected); and
    (C) Credit risk exposures to a qualifying central counterparty in 
the form of clearing deposits and posted collateral that arise from 
transactions described in paragraph (d)(6)(ii)(B) of this section.
    (7) Effective maturity. An exposure's M must be no greater than five 
years and no less than one year, except that an exposure's M must be no 
less than one day if the exposure has an original maturity of less than 
one year and is not part of a bank's ongoing financing of the obligor. 
An exposure is not part of a bank's ongoing financing of the obligor if 
the bank:
    (i) Has a legal and practical ability not to renew or roll over the 
exposure in the event of credit deterioration of the obligor;
    (ii) Makes an independent credit decision at the inception of the 
exposure and at every renewal or roll over; and
    (iii) Has no substantial commercial incentive to continue its credit 
relationship with the obligor in the event of credit deterioration of 
the obligor.
    (e) Phase 4--Calculation of risk-weighted assets--(1) Non-defaulted 
exposures. (i) A bank must calculate the dollar risk-based capital 
requirement for each of its wholesale exposures to a non-defaulted 
obligor (except eligible guarantees and eligible credit derivatives that 
hedge another wholesale exposure and exposures to which the bank applies 
the double default treatment in section 34 of this appendix) and 
segments of non-defaulted retail exposures by inserting the assigned 
risk parameters for the wholesale obligor and exposure or retail segment 
into the appropriate risk-based capital formula specified in Table 2 and 
multiplying the output of the formula (K) by the EAD of the exposure or 
segment. Alternatively, a bank may apply a 300 percent risk weight to 
the EAD of an eligible margin loan if the bank is not able to meet the 
agencies' requirements for estimation of PD and LGD for the margin loan.

[[Page 500]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.005

    (ii) The sum of all the dollar risk-based capital requirements for 
each wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor and segment of non-
defaulted retail exposures calculated in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this 
section and in paragraph (e) of section 34 of this appendix equals the 
total dollar risk-based capital requirement for those exposures and 
segments.
    (iii) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for wholesale 
exposures to non-defaulted obligors and segments of non-defaulted retail 
exposures equals the total dollar risk-based capital requirement 
calculated in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section multiplied by 12.5.
    (2) Wholesale exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of 
defaulted retail exposures. (i) The dollar risk-based capital 
requirement for each wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor equals 
0.08 multiplied by the EAD of the exposure.
    (ii) The dollar risk-based capital requirement for a segment of 
defaulted retail exposures equals 0.08 multiplied by the EAD of the 
segment.
    (iii) The sum of all the dollar risk-based capital requirements for 
each wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor calculated in paragraph 
(e)(2)(i) of this section plus the dollar risk-based capital 
requirements for each segment of defaulted retail exposures

[[Page 501]]

calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section equals the total 
dollar risk-based capital requirement for those exposures and segments.
    (iv) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for wholesale 
exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of defaulted retail 
exposures equals the total dollar risk-based capital requirement 
calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section multiplied by 12.5.
    (3) Assets not included in a defined exposure category. (i) A bank 
may assign a risk-weighted asset amount of zero to cash owned and held 
in all offices of the bank or in transit and for gold bullion held in 
the bank's own vaults, or held in another bank's vaults on an allocated 
basis, to the extent the gold bullion assets are offset by gold bullion 
liabilities.
    (ii) The risk-weighted asset amount for the residual value of a 
retail lease exposure equals such residual value.
    (iii) The risk-weighted asset amount for any other on-balance-sheet 
asset that does not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, 
securitization, or equity exposure equals the carrying value of the 
asset.
    (4) Non-material portfolios of exposures. The risk-weighted asset 
amount of a portfolio of exposures for which the bank has demonstrated 
to the FDIC's satisfaction that the portfolio (when combined with all 
other portfolios of exposures that the bank seeks to treat under this 
paragraph) is not material to the bank is the sum of the carrying values 
of on-balance sheet exposures plus the notional amounts of off-balance 
sheet exposures in the portfolio. For purposes of this paragraph (e)(4), 
the notional amount of an OTC derivative contract that is not a credit 
derivative is the EAD of the derivative as calculated in section 32 of 
this appendix.

    Section 32. Counterparty Credit Risk of Repo-Style Transactions, 
           Eligible Margin Loans, and OTC Derivative Contracts

    (a) In General. (1) This section describes two methodologies--a 
collateral haircut approach and an internal models methodology--that a 
bank may use instead of an LGD estimation methodology to recognize the 
benefits of financial collateral in mitigating the counterparty credit 
risk of repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, collateralized 
OTC derivative contracts, and single product netting sets of such 
transactions and to recognize the benefits of any collateral in 
mitigating the counterparty credit risk of repo-style transactions that 
are included in a bank's VaR-based measure under 12 CFR part 325, 
appendix C. A third methodology, the simple VaR methodology, is 
available for single product netting sets of repo-style transactions and 
eligible margin loans.
    (2) This section also describes the methodology for calculating EAD 
for an OTC derivative contract or a set of OTC derivative contracts 
subject to a qualifying master netting agreement. A bank also may use 
the internal models methodology to estimate EAD for qualifying cross-
product master netting agreements.
    (3) A bank may only use the standard supervisory haircut approach 
with a minimum 10-business-day holding period to recognize in EAD the 
benefits of conforming residential mortgage collateral that secures 
repo-style transactions (other than repo-style transactions included in 
the bank's VaR-based measure under 12 CFR part 325, appendix C), 
eligible margin loans, and OTC derivative contracts.
    (4) A bank may use any combination of the three methodologies for 
collateral recognition; however, it must use the same methodology for 
similar exposures.
    (b) EAD for eligible margin loans and repo-style transactions--(1) 
General. A bank may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of 
financial collateral that secures an eligible margin loan, repo-style 
transaction, or single-product netting set of such transactions by 
factoring the collateral into its LGD estimates for the exposure. 
Alternatively, a bank may estimate an unsecured LGD for the exposure, as 
well as for any repo-style transaction that is included in the bank's 
VaR-based measure under 12 CFR part 325, appendix C, and determine the 
EAD of the exposure using:
    (i) The collateral haircut approach described in paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section;
    (ii) For netting sets only, the simple VaR methodology described in 
paragraph (b)(3) of this section; or
    (iii) The internal models methodology described in paragraph (d) of 
this section.
    (2) Collateral haircut approach--(i) EAD equation. A bank may 
determine EAD for an eligible margin loan, repo-style transaction, or 
netting set by setting EAD equal to max 0, [(SE ^ SC) + S(Es  x  Hs) + 
S(Efx  x  Hfx)] , where:
    (A) SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the bank has lent, sold 
subject to repurchase, or posted as collateral to the counterparty under 
the transaction (or netting set));
    (B) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the bank has borrowed, 
purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral from the 
counterparty under the transaction (or netting set));
    (C) Es equals the absolute value of the net position in a given 
instrument or in gold (where the net position in a given instrument or 
in gold equals the sum of the current market values of the instrument or 
gold the bank has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted as 
collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current

[[Page 502]]

market values of that same instrument or gold the bank has borrowed, 
purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral from the 
counterparty);
    (D) Hs equals the market price volatility haircut appropriate to the 
instrument or gold referenced in Es;
    (E) Efx equals the absolute value of the net position of instruments 
and cash in a currency that is different from the settlement currency 
(where the net position in a given currency equals the sum of the 
current market values of any instruments or cash in the currency the 
bank has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted as collateral to 
the counterparty minus the sum of the current market values of any 
instruments or cash in the currency the bank has borrowed, purchased 
subject to resale, or taken as collateral from the counterparty); and
    (F) Hfx equals the haircut appropriate to the mismatch between the 
currency referenced in Efx and the settlement currency.
    (ii) Standard supervisory haircuts. (A) Under the standard 
supervisory haircuts approach:
    (1) A bank must use the haircuts for market price volatility (Hs) in 
Table 3, as adjusted in certain circumstances as provided in paragraph 
(b)(2)(ii)(A)(3) and (4) of this section;

                       Table 3--Standard Supervisory Market Price Volatility Haircuts \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                              Issuers exempt
 Applicable external rating grade    Residual maturity for debt securities   from the 3 basis    Other issuers
   category for debt securities                                                point floor
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Two highest investment-grade        1 year................................              0.005               0.01
 rating categories for long-term    >1 year, 5 years......................               0.02               0.04
 ratings/highest investment-grade   >5 years..............................               0.04               0.08
 rating category for short-term
 ratings.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Two lowest investment-grade rating  1 year................................               0.01               0.02
 categories for both short- and     >1 year, 5 years......................               0.03               0.06
 long-term ratings.                 >5 years..............................               0.06               0.12
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
One rating category below           All...................................               0.15               0.25
 investment grade.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Main index equities (including convertible bonds) and gold.....0.15.......
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Other publicly traded equities (including convertible bonds), c0.25rming
 residential mortgages, and nonfinancial collateral.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mutual funds.........................Highest haircut applicable to any security in which the
                                                         fund can invest.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cash on deposit with the bank (including a certificate of deposi0 issued
 by the bank).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The market price volatility haircuts in Table 3 are based on a ten-business-day holding period.

    (2) For currency mismatches, a bank must use a haircut for foreign 
exchange rate volatility (Hfx) of 8 percent, as adjusted in certain 
circumstances as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A)(3) and (4) of this 
section.
    (3) For repo-style transactions, a bank may multiply the supervisory 
haircuts provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section 
by the square root of \1/2\ (which equals 0.707107).
    (4) A bank must adjust the supervisory haircuts upward on the basis 
of a holding period longer than ten business days (for eligible margin 
loans) or five business days (for repo-style transactions) where and as 
appropriate to take into account the illiquidity of an instrument.
    (iii) Own internal estimates for haircuts. With the prior written 
approval of the FDIC, a bank may calculate haircuts (Hs and Hfx) using 
its own internal estimates of the volatilities of market prices and 
foreign exchange rates.
    (A) To receive FDIC approval to use its own internal estimates, a 
bank must satisfy the following minimum quantitative standards:
    (1) A bank must use a 99th percentile one-tailed confidence 
interval.
    (2) The minimum holding period for a repo-style transaction is five 
business days and for an eligible margin loan is ten business days. When 
a bank calculates an own-estimates haircut on a TN-day 
holding period, which is different from the minimum holding period for 
the transaction type, the applicable haircut (HM) is 
calculated using the following square root of time formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.014

    (i) TM equals 5 for repo-style transactions and 10 for 
eligible margin loans;
    (ii) TN equals the holding period used by the bank to 
derive HN; and
    (iii) HN equals the haircut based on the holding period 
TN.

[[Page 503]]

    (3) A bank must adjust holding periods upwards where and as 
appropriate to take into account the illiquidity of an instrument.
    (4) The historical observation period must be at least one year.
    (5) A bank must update its data sets and recompute haircuts no less 
frequently than quarterly and must also reassess data sets and haircuts 
whenever market prices change materially.
    (B) With respect to debt securities that have an applicable external 
rating of investment grade, a bank may calculate haircuts for categories 
of securities. For a category of securities, the bank must calculate the 
haircut on the basis of internal volatility estimates for securities in 
that category that are representative of the securities in that category 
that the bank has lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as 
collateral, borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral. In determining relevant categories, the bank must at a 
minimum take into account:
    (1) The type of issuer of the security;
    (2) The applicable external rating of the security;
    (3) The maturity of the security; and
    (4) The interest rate sensitivity of the security.
    (C) With respect to debt securities that have an applicable external 
rating of below investment grade and equity securities, a bank must 
calculate a separate haircut for each individual security.
    (D) Where an exposure or collateral (whether in the form of cash or 
securities) is denominated in a currency that differs from the 
settlement currency, the bank must calculate a separate currency 
mismatch haircut for its net position in each mismatched currency based 
on estimated volatilities of foreign exchange rates between the 
mismatched currency and the settlement currency.
    (E) A bank's own estimates of market price and foreign exchange rate 
volatilities may not take into account the correlations among securities 
and foreign exchange rates on either the exposure or collateral side of 
a transaction (or netting set) or the correlations among securities and 
foreign exchange rates between the exposure and collateral sides of the 
transaction (or netting set).
    (3) Simple VaR methodology. With the prior written approval of the 
FDIC, a bank may estimate EAD for a netting set using a VaR model that 
meets the requirements in paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section. In such 
event, the bank must set EAD equal to max 0, [(SE ^ SC) + PFE] , where:
    (i) SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the bank has lent, sold 
subject to repurchase, or posted as collateral to the counterparty under 
the netting set);
    (ii) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the bank has borrowed, 
purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral from the 
counterparty under the netting set); and
    (iii) PFE (potential future exposure) equals the bank's empirically 
based best estimate of the 99th percentile, one-tailed confidence 
interval for an increase in the value of (SE ^ SC) over a five-business-
day holding period for repo-style transactions or over a ten-business-
day holding period for eligible margin loans using a minimum one-year 
historical observation period of price data representing the instruments 
that the bank has lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as 
collateral, borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral. The bank must validate its VaR model, including by 
establishing and maintaining a rigorous and regular back-testing regime.
    (c) EAD for OTC derivative contracts. (1) A bank must determine the 
EAD for an OTC derivative contract that is not subject to a qualifying 
master netting agreement using the current exposure methodology in 
paragraph (c)(5) of this section or using the internal models 
methodology described in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) A bank must determine the EAD for multiple OTC derivative 
contracts that are subject to a qualifying master netting agreement 
using the current exposure methodology in paragraph (c)(6) of this 
section or using the internal models methodology described in paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (3) Counterparty credit risk for credit derivatives. Notwithstanding 
the above, (i) A bank that purchases a credit derivative that is 
recognized under section 33 or 34 of this appendix as a credit risk 
mitigant for an exposure that is not a covered position under 12 CFR 
part 325, appendix C need not compute a separate counterparty credit 
risk capital requirement under this section so long as the bank does so 
consistently for all such credit derivatives and either includes all or 
excludes all such credit derivatives that are subject to a master 
netting agreement from any measure used to determine counterparty credit 
risk exposure to all relevant counterparties for risk-based capital 
purposes.
    (ii) A bank that is the protection provider in a credit derivative 
must treat the credit derivative as a wholesale exposure to the 
reference obligor and need not compute a counterparty credit risk 
capital requirement for the credit derivative under this section, so 
long as it does so consistently for all such credit derivatives and 
either includes all or excludes all such credit derivatives that are 
subject to a master netting agreement from any measure used to determine 
counterparty

[[Page 504]]

credit risk exposure to all relevant counterparties for risk-based 
capital purposes (unless the bank is treating the credit derivative as a 
covered position under 12 CFR part 325, appendix C, in which case the 
bank must compute a supplemental counterparty credit risk capital 
requirement under this section).
    (4) Counterparty credit risk for equity derivatives. A bank must 
treat an equity derivative contract as an equity exposure and compute a 
risk-weighted asset amount for the equity derivative contract under part 
VI (unless the bank is treating the contract as a covered position under 
12 CFR part 325, appendix C). In addition, if the bank is treating the 
contract as a covered position under 12 CFR part 325, appendix C and in 
certain other cases described in section 55 of this appendix, the bank 
must also calculate a risk-based capital requirement for the 
counterparty credit risk of an equity derivative contract under this 
part.
    (5) Single OTC derivative contract. Except as modified by paragraph 
(c)(7) of this section, the EAD for a single OTC derivative contract 
that is not subject to a qualifying master netting agreement is equal to 
the sum of the bank's current credit exposure and potential future 
credit exposure (PFE) on the derivative contract.
    (i) Current credit exposure. The current credit exposure for a 
single OTC derivative contract is the greater of the mark-to-market 
value of the derivative contract or zero.
    (ii) PFE. The PFE for a single OTC derivative contract, including an 
OTC derivative contract with a negative mark-to-market value, is 
calculated by multiplying the notional principal amount of the 
derivative contract by the appropriate conversion factor in Table 4. For 
purposes of calculating either the PFE under this paragraph or the gross 
PFE under paragraph (c)(6) of this section for exchange rate contracts 
and other similar contracts in which the notional principal amount is 
equivalent to the cash flows, notional principal amount is the net 
receipts to each party falling due on each value date in each currency. 
For any OTC derivative contract that does not fall within one of the 
specified categories in Table 4, the PFE must be calculated using the 
``other'' conversion factors. A bank must use an OTC derivative 
contract's effective notional principal amount (that is, its apparent or 
stated notional principal amount multiplied by any multiplier in the OTC 
derivative contract) rather than its apparent or stated notional 
principal amount in calculating PFE. PFE of the protection provider of a 
credit derivative is capped at the net present value of the amount of 
unpaid premiums.

                                           Table 4--Conversion Factor Matrix for OTC Derivative Contracts \1\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                            Credit       Credit (non-
                                                                            Foreign      (investment-     investment-               Precious
                  Remaining maturity \2\                     Interest    exchange rate       grade           grade       Equity  metals (except   Other
                                                               rate        and gold        reference       reference                  gold)
                                                                                         obligor) \3\      obligor)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
One year or less.........................................        0.00            0.01             0.05            0.10     0.06            0.07     0.10
Over one to five years...................................        0.005           0.05             0.05            0.10     0.08            0.07     0.12
Over five years..........................................        0.015           0.075            0.05            0.10     0.10            0.08    0.15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For an OTC derivative contract with multiple exchanges of principal, the conversion factor is multiplied by the number of remaining payments in the
  derivative contract.
\2\ For an OTC derivative contract that is structured such that on specified dates any outstanding exposure is settled and the terms are reset so that
  the market value of the contract is zero, the remaining maturity equals the time until the next reset date. For an interest rate derivative contract
  with a remaining maturity of greater than one year that meets these criteria, the minimum conversion factor is 0.005.
\3\ A bank must use the column labeled ``Credit (investment-grade reference obligor)'' for a credit derivative whose reference obligor has an
  outstanding unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement that has a long-term applicable external rating of at least investment grade.
  A bank must use the column labeled ``Credit (non-investment-grade reference obligor)'' for all other credit derivatives.

    (6) Multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master 
netting agreement. Except as modified by paragraph (c)(7) of this 
section, the EAD for multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a 
qualifying master netting agreement is equal to the sum of the net 
current credit exposure and the adjusted sum of the PFE exposure for all 
OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying master netting 
agreement.
    (i) Net current credit exposure. The net current credit exposure is 
the greater of:
    (A) The net sum of all positive and negative mark-to-market values 
of the individual OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying 
master netting agreement; or
    (B) zero.
    (ii) Adjusted sum of the PFE. The adjusted sum of the PFE, Anet, is 
calculated as Anet = (0.4  x  Agross) + (0.6  x  NGR  x  Agross), where:
    (A) Agross = the gross PFE (that is, the sum of the PFE amounts (as 
determined under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section) for each 
individual OTC derivative contract subject to the qualifying master 
netting agreement); and
    (B) NGR = the net to gross ratio (that is, the ratio of the net 
current credit exposure

[[Page 505]]

to the gross current credit exposure). In calculating the NGR, the gross 
current credit exposure equals the sum of the positive current credit 
exposures (as determined under paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section) of 
all individual OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying master 
netting agreement.
    (7) Collateralized OTC derivative contracts. A bank may recognize 
the credit risk mitigation benefits of financial collateral that secures 
an OTC derivative contract or single-product netting set of OTC 
derivatives by factoring the collateral into its LGD estimates for the 
contract or netting set. Alternatively, a bank may recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefits of financial collateral that secures such a 
contract or netting set that is marked to market on a daily basis and 
subject to a daily margin maintenance requirement by estimating an 
unsecured LGD for the contract or netting set and adjusting the EAD 
calculated under paragraph (c)(5) or (c)(6) of this section using the 
collateral haircut approach in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. The 
bank must substitute the EAD calculated under paragraph (c)(5) or (c)(6) 
of this section for SE in the equation in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this 
section and must use a ten-business-day minimum holding period 
(TM = 10).
    (d) Internal models methodology. (1) With prior written approval 
from the FDIC, a bank may use the internal models methodology in this 
paragraph (d) to determine EAD for counterparty credit risk for OTC 
derivative contracts (collateralized or uncollateralized) and single-
product netting sets thereof, for eligible margin loans and single-
product netting sets thereof, and for repo-style transactions and 
single-product netting sets thereof. A bank that uses the internal 
models methodology for a particular transaction type (OTC derivative 
contracts, eligible margin loans, or repo-style transactions) must use 
the internal models methodology for all transactions of that transaction 
type. A bank may choose to use the internal models methodology for one 
or two of these three types of exposures and not the other types. A bank 
may also use the internal models methodology for OTC derivative 
contracts, eligible margin loans, and repo-style transactions subject to 
a qualifying cross-product netting agreement if:
    (i) The bank effectively integrates the risk mitigating effects of 
cross-product netting into its risk management and other information 
technology systems; and
    (ii) The bank obtains the prior written approval of the FDIC. A bank 
that uses the internal models methodology for a transaction type must 
receive approval from the FDIC to cease using the methodology for that 
transaction type or to make a material change to its internal model.
    (2) Under the internal models methodology, a bank uses an internal 
model to estimate the expected exposure (EE) for a netting set and then 
calculates EAD based on that EE.
    (i) The bank must use its internal model's probability distribution 
for changes in the market value of a netting set that are attributable 
to changes in market variables to determine EE.
    (ii) Under the internal models methodology, EAD = a  x  effective 
EPE, or, subject to FDIC approval as provided in paragraph (d)(7), a 
more conservative measure of EAD.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.026

(that is, effective EPE is the time-weighted average of effective EE 
where the weights are the proportion that an individual effective EE 
represents in a one-year time interval) where:
    (1) Effective EEtk = max (Effective EEtk^1, 
EEtk) (that is, for a specific datetk, effective 
EE is the greater of EE at that date or the effective EE at the previous 
date); and
    (2) tk represents the kth future time period in the model 
and there are n time periods represented in the model over the first 
year; and
    (B) a = 1.4 except as provided in paragraph (d)(6), or when the FDIC 
has determined that the bank must set a higher based on the bank's 
specific characteristics of counterparty credit risk.
    (iii) A bank may include financial collateral currently posted by 
the counterparty as collateral (but may not include other forms of 
collateral) when calculating EE.
    (iv) If a bank hedges some or all of the counterparty credit risk 
associated with a netting set using an eligible credit derivative, the 
bank may take the reduction in exposure to the counterparty into account 
when estimating EE. If the bank recognizes this reduction in exposure to 
the counterparty in its estimate of EE, it must also use its internal 
model to estimate a separate EAD for the bank's exposure to the 
protection provider of the credit derivative.
    (3) To obtain FDIC approval to calculate the distributions of 
exposures upon which the EAD calculation is based, the bank must 
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that it has been using for 
at least one year an internal model that broadly meets the following 
minimum standards, with which the bank must maintain compliance:
    (i) The model must have the systems capability to estimate the 
expected exposure to the counterparty on a daily basis (but is not 
expected to estimate or report expected exposure on a daily basis).
    (ii) The model must estimate expected exposure at enough future 
dates to reflect accurately all the future cash flows of contracts in 
the netting set.

[[Page 506]]

    (iii) The model must account for the possible non-normality of the 
exposure distribution, where appropriate.
    (iv) The bank must measure, monitor, and control current 
counterparty exposure and the exposure to the counterparty over the 
whole life of all contracts in the netting set.
    (v) The bank must be able to measure and manage current exposures 
gross and net of collateral held, where appropriate. The bank must 
estimate expected exposures for OTC derivative contracts both with and 
without the effect of collateral agreements.
    (vi) The bank must have procedures to identify, monitor, and control 
specific wrong-way risk throughout the life of an exposure. Wrong-way 
risk in this context is the risk that future exposure to a counterparty 
will be high when the counterparty's probability of default is also 
high.
    (vii) The model must use current market data to compute current 
exposures. When estimating model parameters based on historical data, at 
least three years of historical data that cover a wide range of economic 
conditions must be used and must be updated quarterly or more frequently 
if market conditions warrant. The bank should consider using model 
parameters based on forward-looking measures, where appropriate.
    (viii) A bank must subject its internal model to an initial 
validation and annual model review process. The model review should 
consider whether the inputs and risk factors, as well as the model 
outputs, are appropriate.
    (4) Maturity. (i) If the remaining maturity of the exposure or the 
longest-dated contract in the netting set is greater than one year, the 
bank must set M for the exposure or netting set equal to the lower of 
five years or M(EPE), \3\ where:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ Alternatively, a bank that uses an internal model to calculate a 
one-sided credit valuation adjustment may use the effective credit 
duration estimated by the model as M(EPE) in place of the formula in 
paragraph (d)(4).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.015

    (B) dfk is the risk-free discount factor for future time 
period tk; and
    (C) Dtk = tk^tk^1.
    (ii) If the remaining maturity of the exposure or the longest-dated 
contract in the netting set is one year or less, the bank must set M for 
the exposure or netting set equal to one year, except as provided in 
paragraph (d)(7) of section 31 of this appendix.
    (5) Collateral agreements. A bank may capture the effect on EAD of a 
collateral agreement that requires receipt of collateral when exposure 
to the counterparty increases but may not capture the effect on EAD of a 
collateral agreement that requires receipt of collateral when 
counterparty credit quality deteriorates. For this purpose, a collateral 
agreement means a legal contract that specifies the time when, and 
circumstances under which, the counterparty is required to pledge 
collateral to the bank for a single financial contract or for all 
financial contracts in a netting set and confers upon the bank a 
perfected, first priority security interest (notwithstanding the prior 
security interest of any custodial agent), or the legal equivalent 
thereof, in the collateral posted by the counterparty under the 
agreement. This security interest must provide the bank with a right to 
close out the financial positions and liquidate the collateral upon an 
event of default of, or failure to perform by, the counterparty under 
the collateral agreement. A contract would not satisfy this requirement 
if the bank's exercise of rights under the agreement may be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions. Two methods 
are available to capture the effect of a collateral agreement:
    (i) With prior written approval from the FDIC, a bank may include 
the effect of a collateral agreement within its internal model used to 
calculate EAD. The bank may set EAD equal to the expected exposure at 
the end of the margin period of risk. The margin period of risk means, 
with respect to a netting set subject to a collateral agreement, the 
time period from the most recent exchange of collateral with a 
counterparty until the next required exchange of collateral plus the 
period of time required to sell and realize the proceeds of the least 
liquid collateral that can be delivered under the terms of the 
collateral agreement and, where

[[Page 507]]

applicable, the period of time required to re-hedge the resulting market 
risk, upon the default of the counterparty. The minimum margin period of 
risk is five business days for repo-style transactions and ten business 
days for other transactions when liquid financial collateral is posted 
under a daily margin maintenance requirement. This period should be 
extended to cover any additional time between margin calls; any 
potential closeout difficulties; any delays in selling collateral, 
particularly if the collateral is illiquid; and any impediments to 
prompt re-hedging of any market risk.
    (ii) A bank that can model EPE without collateral agreements but 
cannot achieve the higher level of modeling sophistication to model EPE 
with collateral agreements can set effective EPE for a collateralized 
netting set equal to the lesser of:
    (A) The threshold, defined as the exposure amount at which the 
counterparty is required to post collateral under the collateral 
agreement, if the threshold is positive, plus an add-on that reflects 
the potential increase in exposure of the netting set over the margin 
period of risk. The add-on is computed as the expected increase in the 
netting set's exposure beginning from current exposure of zero over the 
margin period of risk. The margin period of risk must be at least five 
business days for netting sets consisting only of repo-style 
transactions subject to daily re-margining and daily marking-to-market, 
and ten business days for all other netting sets; or
    (B) Effective EPE without a collateral agreement.
    (6) Own estimate of alpha. With prior written approval of the FDIC, 
a bank may calculate alpha as the ratio of economic capital from a full 
simulation of counterparty exposure across counterparties that 
incorporates a joint simulation of market and credit risk factors 
(numerator) and economic capital based on EPE (denominator), subject to 
a floor of 1.2. For purposes of this calculation, economic capital is 
the unexpected losses for all counterparty credit risks measured at a 
99.9 percent confidence level over a one-year horizon. To receive 
approval, the bank must meet the following minimum standards to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC:
    (i) The bank's own estimate of alpha must capture in the numerator 
the effects of:
    (A) The material sources of stochastic dependency of distributions 
of market values of transactions or portfolios of transactions across 
counterparties;
    (B) Volatilities and correlations of market risk factors used in the 
joint simulation, which must be related to the credit risk factor used 
in the simulation to reflect potential increases in volatility or 
correlation in an economic downturn, where appropriate; and
    (C) The granularity of exposures (that is, the effect of a 
concentration in the proportion of each counterparty's exposure that is 
driven by a particular risk factor).
    (ii) The bank must assess the potential model uncertainty in its 
estimates of alpha.
    (iii) The bank must calculate the numerator and denominator of alpha 
in a consistent fashion with respect to modeling methodology, parameter 
specifications, and portfolio composition.
    (iv) The bank must review and adjust as appropriate its estimates of 
the numerator and denominator of alpha on at least a quarterly basis and 
more frequently when the composition of the portfolio varies over time.
    (7) Other measures of counterparty exposure. With prior written 
approval of the FDIC, a bank may set EAD equal to a measure of 
counterparty credit risk exposure, such as peak EAD, that is more 
conservative than an alpha of 1.4 (or higher under the terms of 
paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(B) of this section) times EPE for every 
counterparty whose EAD will be measured under the alternative measure of 
counterparty exposure. The bank must demonstrate the conservatism of the 
measure of counterparty credit risk exposure used for EAD. For material 
portfolios of new OTC derivative products, the bank may assume that the 
current exposure methodology in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this 
section meets the conservatism requirement of this paragraph for a 
period not to exceed 180 days. For immaterial portfolios of OTC 
derivative contracts, the bank generally may assume that the current 
exposure methodology in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section 
meets the conservatism requirement of this paragraph.

 Section 33. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: PD Substitution and LGD 
                          Adjustment Approaches

    (a) Scope. (1) This section applies to wholesale exposures for 
which:
    (i) Credit risk is fully covered by an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative; or
    (ii) Credit risk is covered on a pro rata basis (that is, on a basis 
in which the bank and the protection provider share losses 
proportionately) by an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative.
    (2) Wholesale exposures on which there is a tranching of credit risk 
(reflecting at least two different levels of seniority) are 
securitization exposures subject to the securitization framework in part 
V.
    (3) A bank may elect to recognize the credit risk mitigation 
benefits of an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative covering 
an exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section by using the 
PD substitution approach or the LGD adjustment approach in paragraph (c) 
of this section or, if the transaction qualifies, using the double

[[Page 508]]

default treatment in section 34 of this appendix. A bank's PD and LGD 
for the hedged exposure may not be lower than the PD and LGD floors 
described in paragraphs (d)(2) and (d)(3) of section 31 of this 
appendix.
    (4) If multiple eligible guarantees or eligible credit derivatives 
cover a single exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, a 
bank may treat the hedged exposure as multiple separate exposures each 
covered by a single eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative and 
may calculate a separate risk-based capital requirement for each 
separate exposure as described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (5) If a single eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative 
covers multiple hedged wholesale exposures described in paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section, a bank must treat each hedged exposure as covered by a 
separate eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative and must 
calculate a separate risk-based capital requirement for each exposure as 
described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (6) A bank must use the same risk parameters for calculating ECL as 
it uses for calculating the risk-based capital requirement for the 
exposure.
    (b) Rules of recognition. (1) A bank may only recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefits of eligible guarantees and eligible credit 
derivatives.
    (2) A bank may only recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of 
an eligible credit derivative to hedge an exposure that is different 
from the credit derivative's reference exposure used for determining the 
derivative's cash settlement value, deliverable obligation, or 
occurrence of a credit event if:
    (i) The reference exposure ranks pari passu (that is, equally) with 
or is junior to the hedged exposure; and
    (ii) The reference exposure and the hedged exposure are exposures to 
the same legal entity, and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-
acceleration clauses are in place to assure payments under the credit 
derivative are triggered when the obligor fails to pay under the terms 
of the hedged exposure.
    (c) Risk parameters for hedged exposures--(1) PD substitution 
approach--(i) Full coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is greater than or equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure, a 
bank may recognize the guarantee or credit derivative in determining the 
bank's risk-based capital requirement for the hedged exposure by 
substituting the PD associated with the rating grade of the protection 
provider for the PD associated with the rating grade of the obligor in 
the risk-based capital formula applicable to the guarantee or credit 
derivative in Table 2 and using the appropriate LGD as described in 
paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section. If the bank determines that full 
substitution of the protection provider's PD leads to an inappropriate 
degree of risk mitigation, the bank may substitute a higher PD than that 
of the protection provider.
    (ii) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged exposure, the bank must 
treat the hedged exposure as two separate exposures (protected and 
unprotected) in order to recognize the credit risk mitigation benefit of 
the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (A) The bank must calculate its risk-based capital requirement for 
the protected exposure under section 31 of this appendix, where PD is 
the protection provider's PD, LGD is determined under paragraph 
(c)(1)(iii) of this section, and EAD is P. If the bank determines that 
full substitution leads to an inappropriate degree of risk mitigation, 
the bank may use a higher PD than that of the protection provider.
    (B) The bank must calculate its risk-based capital requirement for 
the unprotected exposure under section 31 of this appendix, where PD is 
the obligor's PD, LGD is the hedged exposure's LGD (not adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative), and EAD is the EAD of the 
original hedged exposure minus P.
    (C) The treatment in this paragraph (c)(1)(ii) is applicable when 
the credit risk of a wholesale exposure is covered on a partial pro rata 
basis or when an adjustment is made to the effective notional amount of 
the guarantee or credit derivative under paragraph (d), (e), or (f) of 
this section.
    (iii) LGD of hedged exposures. The LGD of a hedged exposure under 
the PD substitution approach is equal to:
    (A) The lower of the LGD of the hedged exposure (not adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative) and the LGD of the guarantee 
or credit derivative, if the guarantee or credit derivative provides the 
bank with the option to receive immediate payout upon triggering the 
protection; or
    (B) The LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee 
or credit derivative does not provide the bank with the option to 
receive immediate payout upon triggering the protection.
    (2) LGD adjustment approach--(i) Full coverage. If an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative meets the conditions in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section and the protection amount (P) of 
the guarantee or credit derivative is greater than or equal to the EAD 
of the hedged exposure, the bank's risk-based capital requirement for 
the hedged exposure is the greater of:
    (A) The risk-based capital requirement for the exposure as 
calculated under section 31

[[Page 509]]

of this appendix, with the LGD of the exposure adjusted to reflect the 
guarantee or credit derivative; or
    (B) The risk-based capital requirement for a direct exposure to the 
protection provider as calculated under section 31 of this appendix, 
using the PD for the protection provider, the LGD for the guarantee or 
credit derivative, and an EAD equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure.
    (ii) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged exposure, the bank must 
treat the hedged exposure as two separate exposures (protected and 
unprotected) in order to recognize the credit risk mitigation benefit of 
the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (A) The bank's risk-based capital requirement for the protected 
exposure would be the greater of:
    (1) The risk-based capital requirement for the protected exposure as 
calculated under section 31 of this appendix, with the LGD of the 
exposure adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative and EAD 
set equal to P; or
    (2) The risk-based capital requirement for a direct exposure to the 
guarantor as calculated under section 31 of this appendix, using the PD 
for the protection provider, the LGD for the guarantee or credit 
derivative, and an EAD set equal to P.
    (B) The bank must calculate its risk-based capital requirement for 
the unprotected exposure under section 31 of this appendix, where PD is 
the obligor's PD, LGD is the hedged exposure's LGD (not adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative), and EAD is the EAD of the 
original hedged exposure minus P.
    (3) M of hedged exposures. The M of the hedged exposure is the same 
as the M of the exposure if it were unhedged.
    (d) Maturity mismatch. (1) A bank that recognizes an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative in determining its risk-based 
capital requirement for a hedged exposure must adjust the effective 
notional amount of the credit risk mitigant to reflect any maturity 
mismatch between the hedged exposure and the credit risk mitigant.
    (2) A maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of a 
credit risk mitigant is less than that of the hedged exposure(s).
    (3) The residual maturity of a hedged exposure is the longest 
possible remaining time before the obligor is scheduled to fulfill its 
obligation on the exposure. If a credit risk mitigant has embedded 
options that may reduce its term, the bank (protection purchaser) must 
use the shortest possible residual maturity for the credit risk 
mitigant. If a call is at the discretion of the protection provider, the 
residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant is at the first call date. 
If the call is at the discretion of the bank (protection purchaser), but 
the terms of the arrangement at origination of the credit risk mitigant 
contain a positive incentive for the bank to call the transaction before 
contractual maturity, the remaining time to the first call date is the 
residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant. For example, where there 
is a step-up in cost in conjunction with a call feature or where the 
effective cost of protection increases over time even if credit quality 
remains the same or improves, the residual maturity of the credit risk 
mitigant will be the remaining time to the first call.
    (4) A credit risk mitigant with a maturity mismatch may be 
recognized only if its original maturity is greater than or equal to one 
year and its residual maturity is greater than three months.
    (5) When a maturity mismatch exists, the bank must apply the 
following adjustment to the effective notional amount of the credit risk 
mitigant: Pm = E  x  (t ^ 0.25)/(T ^ 0.25), where:
    (i) Pm = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for maturity mismatch;
    (ii) E = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant;
    (iii) t = the lesser of T or the residual maturity of the credit 
risk mitigant, expressed in years; and
    (iv) T = the lesser of five or the residual maturity of the hedged 
exposure, expressed in years.
    (e) Credit derivatives without restructuring as a credit event. If a 
bank recognizes an eligible credit derivative that does not include as a 
credit event a restructuring of the hedged exposure involving 
forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest, or fees that results 
in a credit loss event (that is, a charge-off, specific provision, or 
other similar debit to the profit and loss account), the bank must apply 
the following adjustment to the effective notional amount of the credit 
derivative: Pr = Pm  x  0.60, where:
    (1) Pr = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for lack of restructuring event (and maturity mismatch, if 
applicable); and
    (2) Pm = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant 
adjusted for maturity mismatch (if applicable).
    (f) Currency mismatch. (1) If a bank recognizes an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative that is denominated in a 
currency different from that in which the hedged exposure is 
denominated, the bank must apply the following formula to the effective 
notional amount of the guarantee or credit derivative: Pc = Pr  x  (1 ^ 
HFX), where:
    (i) Pc = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for currency mismatch (and maturity mismatch and lack of 
restructuring event, if applicable);

[[Page 510]]

    (ii) Pr = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant 
(adjusted for maturity mismatch and lack of restructuring event, if 
applicable); and
    (iii) HFX = haircut appropriate for the currency mismatch 
between the credit risk mitigant and the hedged exposure.
    (2) A bank must set HFX equal to 8 percent unless it 
qualifies for the use of and uses its own internal estimates of foreign 
exchange volatility based on a ten-business-day holding period and daily 
marking-to-market and remargining. A bank qualifies for the use of its 
own internal estimates of foreign exchange volatility if it qualifies 
for:
    (i) The own-estimates haircuts in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of section 
32 of this appendix;
    (ii) The simple VaR methodology in paragraph (b)(3) of section 32 of 
this appendix; or
    (iii) The internal models methodology in paragraph (d) of section 32 
of this appendix.
    (3) A bank must adjust HFX calculated in paragraph (f)(2) 
of this section upward if the bank revalues the guarantee or credit 
derivative less frequently than once every ten business days using the 
square root of time formula provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(A)(2) of 
section 32 of this appendix.

 Section 34. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: Double Default Treatment

    (a) Eligibility and operational criteria for double default 
treatment. A bank may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of a 
guarantee or credit derivative covering an exposure described in 
paragraph (a)(1) of section 33 of this appendix by applying the double 
default treatment in this section if all the following criteria are 
satisfied.
    (1) The hedged exposure is fully covered or covered on a pro rata 
basis by:
    (i) An eligible guarantee issued by an eligible double default 
guarantor; or
    (ii) An eligible credit derivative that meets the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(2) of section 33 of this appendix and is issued by an 
eligible double default guarantor.
    (2) The guarantee or credit derivative is:
    (i) An uncollateralized guarantee or uncollateralized credit 
derivative (for example, a credit default swap) that provides protection 
with respect to a single reference obligor; or
    (ii) An nth-to-default credit derivative (subject to the 
requirements of paragraph (m) of section 42 of this appendix).
    (3) The hedged exposure is a wholesale exposure (other than a 
sovereign exposure).
    (4) The obligor of the hedged exposure is not:
    (i) An eligible double default guarantor or an affiliate of an 
eligible double default guarantor; or
    (ii) An affiliate of the guarantor.
    (5) The bank does not recognize any credit risk mitigation benefits 
of the guarantee or credit derivative for the hedged exposure other than 
through application of the double default treatment as provided in this 
section.
    (6) The bank has implemented a process (which has received the 
prior, written approval of the FDIC) to detect excessive correlation 
between the creditworthiness of the obligor of the hedged exposure and 
the protection provider. If excessive correlation is present, the bank 
may not use the double default treatment for the hedged exposure.
    (b) Full coverage. If the transaction meets the criteria in 
paragraph (a) of this section and the protection amount (P) of the 
guarantee or credit derivative is at least equal to the EAD of the 
hedged exposure, the bank may determine its risk-weighted asset amount 
for the hedged exposure under paragraph (e) of this section.
    (c) Partial coverage. If the transaction meets the criteria in 
paragraph (a) of this section and the protection amount (P) of the 
guarantee or credit derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged 
exposure, the bank must treat the hedged exposure as two separate 
exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to recognize double 
default treatment on the protected portion of the exposure.
    (1) For the protected exposure, the bank must set EAD equal to P and 
calculate its risk-weighted asset amount as provided in paragraph (e) of 
this section.
    (2) For the unprotected exposure, the bank must set EAD equal to the 
EAD of the original exposure minus P and then calculate its risk-
weighted asset amount as provided in section 31 of this appendix.
    (d) Mismatches. For any hedged exposure to which a bank applies 
double default treatment, the bank must make applicable adjustments to 
the protection amount as required in paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) of 
section 33 of this appendix.
    (e) The double default dollar risk-based capital requirement. The 
dollar risk-based capital requirement for a hedged exposure to which a 
bank has applied double default treatment is KDD multiplied 
by the EAD of the exposure. KDD is calculated according to 
the following formula: KDD = Ko  x  (0.15 + 160 
x  PDg),

Where:

(1)

[[Page 511]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.016

(2) PDg = PD of the protection provider.
(3) PDo = PD of the obligor of the hedged exposure.
(4) LGDg = (i) The lower of the LGD of the hedged exposure 
          (not adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative) 
          and the LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the 
          guarantee or credit derivative provides the bank with the 
          option to receive immediate payout on triggering the 
          protection; or
(ii) The LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee or 
          credit derivative does not provide the bank with the option to 
          receive immediate payout on triggering the protection.
(5) rOS (asset value correlation of the obligor) is 
          calculated according to the appropriate formula for (R) 
          provided in Table 2 in section 31 of this appendix, with PD 
          equal to PDo.
(6) b (maturity adjustment coefficient) is calculated according to the 
          formula for b provided in Table 2 in section 31 of this 
          appendix, with PD equal to the lesser of PDo and 
          PDg.
(7) M (maturity) is the effective maturity of the guarantee or credit 
          derivative, which may not be less than one year or greater 
          than five years.

  Section 35. Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Unsettled Transactions

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
    (1) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) transaction means a securities or 
commodities transaction in which the buyer is obligated to make payment 
only if the seller has made delivery of the securities or commodities 
and the seller is obligated to deliver the securities or commodities 
only if the buyer has made payment.
    (2) Payment-versus-payment (PvP) transaction means a foreign 
exchange transaction in which each counterparty is obligated to make a 
final transfer of one or more currencies only if the other counterparty 
has made a final transfer of one or more currencies.
    (3) Normal settlement period. A transaction has a normal settlement 
period if the contractual settlement period for the transaction is equal 
to or less than the market standard for the instrument underlying the 
transaction and equal to or less than five business days.
    (4) Positive current exposure. The positive current exposure of a 
bank for a transaction is the difference between the transaction value 
at the agreed settlement price and the current market price of the 
transaction, if the difference results in a credit exposure of the bank 
to the counterparty.
    (b) Scope. This section applies to all transactions involving 
securities, foreign exchange instruments, and commodities that have a 
risk of delayed settlement or delivery. This section does not apply to:
    (1) Transactions accepted by a qualifying central counterparty that 
are subject to daily marking-to-market and daily receipt and payment of 
variation margin;
    (2) Repo-style transactions, including unsettled repo-style 
transactions (which are addressed in sections 31 and 32 of this 
appendix);
    (3) One-way cash payments on OTC derivative contracts (which are 
addressed in sections 31 and 32 of this appendix); or
    (4) Transactions with a contractual settlement period that is longer 
than the normal settlement period (which are treated as OTC derivative 
contracts and addressed in sections 31 and 32 of this appendix).
    (c) System-wide failures. In the case of a system-wide failure of a 
settlement or clearing system, the FDIC may waive risk-based capital 
requirements for unsettled and failed transactions until the situation 
is rectified.
    (d) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) and payment-versus-payment (PvP) 
transactions. A bank must hold risk-based capital against any DvP or PvP 
transaction with a normal settlement period if the bank's counterparty 
has not made delivery or payment within five business days after the 
settlement date. The bank must determine its risk-weighted asset amount 
for such a transaction by multiplying the positive current exposure of 
the transaction for the bank by the appropriate risk weight in Table 5.

      Table 5--Risk Weights for Unsettled DvP and PvP Transactions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                       Risk weight to be
Number of business days after contractual settlement      applied to
                        date                           positive current
                                                      exposure (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
From 5 to 15........................................               100
From 16 to 30.......................................               625
From 31 to 45.......................................               937.5
46 or more..........................................             1,250
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Non-DvP/non-PvP (non-delivery-versus-payment/non-payment-versus-
payment) transactions. (1) A bank must hold risk-based capital against 
any non-DvP/non-PvP transaction with a normal settlement period if

[[Page 512]]

the bank has delivered cash, securities, commodities, or currencies to 
its counterparty but has not received its corresponding deliverables by 
the end of the same business day. The bank must continue to hold risk-
based capital against the transaction until the bank has received its 
corresponding deliverables.
    (2) From the business day after the bank has made its delivery until 
five business days after the counterparty delivery is due, the bank must 
calculate its risk-based capital requirement for the transaction by 
treating the current market value of the deliverables owed to the bank 
as a wholesale exposure.
    (i) A bank may assign an obligor rating to a counterparty for which 
it is not otherwise required under this appendix to assign an obligor 
rating on the basis of the applicable external rating of any outstanding 
unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement issued by 
the counterparty.
    (ii) A bank may use a 45 percent LGD for the transaction rather than 
estimating LGD for the transaction provided the bank uses the 45 percent 
LGD for all transactions described in paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) of 
this section.
    (iii) A bank may use a 100 percent risk weight for the transaction 
provided the bank uses this risk weight for all transactions described 
in paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) of this section.
    (3) If the bank has not received its deliverables by the fifth 
business day after the counterparty delivery was due, the bank must 
deduct the current market value of the deliverables owed to the bank 50 
percent from tier 1 capital and 50 percent from tier 2 capital.
    (f) Total risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions. Total 
risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions is the sum of the risk-
weighted asset amounts of all DvP, PvP, and non-DvP/non-PvP 
transactions.

        Part V. Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures

  Section 41. Operational Criteria for Recognizing the Transfer of Risk

    (a) Operational criteria for traditional securitizations. A bank 
that transfers exposures it has originated or purchased to a 
securitization SPE or other third party in connection with a traditional 
securitization may exclude the exposures from the calculation of its 
risk-weighted assets only if each of the conditions in this paragraph 
(a) is satisfied. A bank that meets these conditions must hold risk-
based capital against any securitization exposures it retains in 
connection with the securitization. A bank that fails to meet these 
conditions must hold risk-based capital against the transferred 
exposures as if they had not been securitized and must deduct from tier 
1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from the transaction. The 
conditions are:
    (1) The transfer is considered a sale under GAAP;
    (2) The bank has transferred to third parties credit risk associated 
with the underlying exposures; and
    (3) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls.
    (b) Operational criteria for synthetic securitizations. For 
synthetic securitizations, a bank may recognize for risk-based capital 
purposes the use of a credit risk mitigant to hedge underlying exposures 
only if each of the conditions in this paragraph (b) is satisfied. A 
bank that fails to meet these conditions must hold risk-based capital 
against the underlying exposures as if they had not been synthetically 
securitized. The conditions are:
    (1) The credit risk mitigant is financial collateral, an eligible 
credit derivative from an eligible securitization guarantor or an 
eligible guarantee from an eligible securitization guarantor;
    (2) The bank transfers credit risk associated with the underlying 
exposures to third parties, and the terms and conditions in the credit 
risk mitigants employed do not include provisions that:
    (i) Allow for the termination of the credit protection due to 
deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures;
    (ii) Require the bank to alter or replace the underlying exposures 
to improve the credit quality of the pool of underlying exposures;
    (iii) Increase the bank's cost of credit protection in response to 
deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures;
    (iv) Increase the yield payable to parties other than the bank in 
response to a deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying 
exposures; or
    (v) Provide for increases in a retained first loss position or 
credit enhancement provided by the bank after the inception of the 
securitization;
    (3) The bank obtains a well-reasoned opinion from legal counsel that 
confirms the enforceability of the credit risk mitigant in all relevant 
jurisdictions; and
    (4) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls.

 Section 42. Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Securitization Exposures

    (a) Hierarchy of approaches. Except as provided elsewhere in this 
section:
    (1) A bank must deduct from tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-
sale resulting from a securitization and must deduct from total capital 
in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section the portion of any CEIO 
that does not constitute gain-on-sale.
    (2) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of

[[Page 513]]

this section and qualifies for the Ratings-Based Approach in section 43 
of this appendix, a bank must apply the Ratings-Based Approach to the 
exposure.
    (3) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section and does not qualify for the Ratings-
Based Approach, the bank may either apply the Internal Assessment 
Approach in section 44 of this appendix to the exposure (if the bank, 
the exposure, and the relevant ABCP program qualify for the Internal 
Assessment Approach) or the Supervisory Formula Approach in section 45 
of this appendix to the exposure (if the bank and the exposure qualify 
for the Supervisory Formula Approach).
    (4) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section and does not qualify for the Ratings-
Based Approach, the Internal Assessment Approach, or the Supervisory 
Formula Approach, the bank must deduct the exposure from total capital 
in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
    (5) If a securitization exposure is an OTC derivative contract 
(other than a credit derivative) that has a first priority claim on the 
cash flows from the underlying exposures (notwithstanding amounts due 
under interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other 
similar payments), with approval of the FDIC, a bank may choose to set 
the risk-weighted asset amount of the exposure equal to the amount of 
the exposure as determined in paragraph (e) of this section rather than 
apply the hierarchy of approaches described in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(4) of this section.
    (b) Total risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures. A 
bank's total risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures is equal 
to the sum of its risk-weighted assets calculated using the Ratings-
Based Approach in section 43 of this appendix, the Internal Assessment 
Approach in section 44 of this appendix, and the Supervisory Formula 
Approach in section 45 of this appendix, and its risk-weighted assets 
amount for early amortization provisions calculated in section 47 of 
this appendix.
    (c) Deductions. (1) If a bank must deduct a securitization exposure 
from total capital, the bank must take the deduction 50 percent from 
tier 1 capital and 50 percent from tier 2 capital. If the amount 
deductible from tier 2 capital exceeds the bank's tier 2 capital, the 
bank must deduct the excess from tier 1 capital.
    (2) A bank may calculate any deduction from tier 1 capital and tier 
2 capital for a securitization exposure net of any deferred tax 
liabilities associated with the securitization exposure.
    (d) Maximum risk-based capital requirement. Regardless of any other 
provisions of this part, unless one or more underlying exposures does 
not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, securitization, or 
equity exposure, the total risk-based capital requirement for all 
securitization exposures held by a single bank associated with a single 
securitization (including any risk-based capital requirements that 
relate to an early amortization provision of the securitization but 
excluding any risk-based capital requirements that relate to the bank's 
gain-on-sale or CEIOs associated with the securitization) may not exceed 
the sum of:
    (1) The bank's total risk-based capital requirement for the 
underlying exposures as if the bank directly held the underlying 
exposures; and
    (2) The total ECL of the underlying exposures.
    (e) Amount of a securitization exposure. (1) The amount of an on-
balance sheet securitization exposure that is not a repo-style 
transaction, eligible margin loan, or OTC derivative contract (other 
than a credit derivative) is:
    (i) The bank's carrying value minus any unrealized gains and plus 
any unrealized losses on the exposure, if the exposure is a security 
classified as available-for-sale; or
    (ii) The bank's carrying value, if the exposure is not a security 
classified as available-for-sale.
    (2) The amount of an off-balance sheet securitization exposure that 
is not an OTC derivative contract (other than a credit derivative) is 
the notional amount of the exposure. For an off-balance-sheet 
securitization exposure to an ABCP program, such as a liquidity 
facility, the notional amount may be reduced to the maximum potential 
amount that the bank could be required to fund given the ABCP program's 
current underlying assets (calculated without regard to the current 
credit quality of those assets).
    (3) The amount of a securitization exposure that is a repo-style 
transaction, eligible margin loan, or OTC derivative contract (other 
than a credit derivative) is the EAD of the exposure as calculated in 
section 32 of this appendix.
    (f) Overlapping exposures. If a bank has multiple securitization 
exposures that provide duplicative coverage of the underlying exposures 
of a securitization (such as when a bank provides a program-wide credit 
enhancement and multiple pool-specific liquidity facilities to an ABCP 
program), the bank is not required to hold duplicative risk-based 
capital against the overlapping position. Instead, the bank may apply to 
the overlapping position the applicable risk-based capital treatment 
that results in the highest risk-based capital requirement.
    (g) Securitizations of non-IRB exposures. If a bank has a 
securitization exposure where any underlying exposure is not a wholesale 
exposure, retail exposure, securitization exposure, or equity exposure, 
the bank must:

[[Page 514]]

    (1) If the bank is an originating bank, deduct from tier 1 capital 
any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from the securitization and deduct 
from total capital in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section the 
portion of any CEIO that does not constitute gain-on-sale;
    (2) If the securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (g)(1), apply the RBA in section 43 of this appendix to the 
securitization exposure if the exposure qualifies for the RBA;
    (3) If the securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (g)(1) and does not qualify for the RBA, apply the IAA in 
section 44 of this appendix to the exposure (if the bank, the exposure, 
and the relevant ABCP program qualify for the IAA); and
    (4) If the securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (g)(1) and does not qualify for the RBA or the IAA, deduct the 
exposure from total capital in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (h) Implicit support. If a bank provides support to a securitization 
in excess of the bank's contractual obligation to provide credit support 
to the securitization (implicit support):
    (1) The bank must hold regulatory capital against all of the 
underlying exposures associated with the securitization as if the 
exposures had not been securitized and must deduct from tier 1 capital 
any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from the securitization; and
    (2) The bank must disclose publicly:
    (i) That it has provided implicit support to the securitization; and
    (ii) The regulatory capital impact to the bank of providing such 
implicit support.
    (i) Eligible servicer cash advance facilities. Regardless of any 
other provisions of this part, a bank is not required to hold risk-based 
capital against the undrawn portion of an eligible servicer cash advance 
facility.
    (j) Interest-only mortgage-backed securities. Regardless of any 
other provisions of this part, the risk weight for a non-credit-
enhancing interest-only mortgage-backed security may not be less than 
100 percent.
    (k) Small-business loans and leases on personal property transferred 
with recourse. (1) Regardless of any other provisions of this appendix, 
a bank that has transferred small-business loans and leases on personal 
property (small-business obligations) with recourse must include in 
risk-weighted assets only the contractual amount of retained recourse if 
all the following conditions are met:
    (i) The transaction is a sale under GAAP.
    (ii) The bank establishes and maintains, pursuant to GAAP, a non-
capital reserve sufficient to meet the bank's reasonably estimated 
liability under the recourse arrangement.
    (iii) The loans and leases are to businesses that meet the criteria 
for a small-business concern established by the Small Business 
Administration under section 3(a) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 
632).
    (iv) The bank is well capitalized, as defined in the FDIC 's prompt 
corrective action regulation at 12 CFR part 325, subpart B. For purposes 
of determining whether a bank is well capitalized for purposes of this 
paragraph, the bank's capital ratios must be calculated without regard 
to the capital treatment for transfers of small-business obligations 
with recourse specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section. For 
purposes of determining whether a bank is well capitalized for purposes 
of this paragraph, the bank's capital ratios must be calculated without 
regard to the capital treatment for transfers of small-business 
obligations with recourse specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section.
    (2) The total outstanding amount of recourse retained by a bank on 
transfers of small-business obligations receiving the capital treatment 
specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section cannot exceed 15 percent 
of the bank's total qualifying capital.
    (3) If a bank ceases to be well capitalized or exceeds the 15 
percent capital limitation, the preferential capital treatment specified 
in paragraph (k)(1) of this section will continue to apply to any 
transfers of small-business obligations with recourse that occurred 
during the time that the bank was well capitalized and did not exceed 
the capital limit.
    (4) The risk-based capital ratios of the bank must be calculated 
without regard to the capital treatment for transfers of small-business 
obligations with recourse specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section 
as provided in 12 CFR part 325, appendix A.
    (l) Nth-to-default credit derivatives--(1) First-to-default credit 
derivatives--(i) Protection purchaser. A bank that obtains credit 
protection on a group of underlying exposures through a first-to-default 
credit derivative must determine its risk-based capital requirement for 
the underlying exposures as if the bank synthetically securitized the 
underlying exposure with the lowest risk-based capital requirement and 
had obtained no credit risk mitigant on the other underlying exposures.
    (ii) Protection provider. A bank that provides credit protection on 
a group of underlying exposures through a first-to-default credit 
derivative must determine its risk-weighted asset amount for the 
derivative by applying the RBA in section 43 of this appendix (if the 
derivative qualifies for the RBA) or, if the derivative does not qualify 
for the RBA, by setting its risk-weighted asset amount for the 
derivative equal to the product of:
    (A) The protection amount of the derivative;
    (B) 12.5; and

[[Page 515]]

    (C) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements of the individual 
underlying exposures, up to a maximum of 100 percent.
    (2) Second-or-subsequent-to-default credit derivatives--(i) 
Protection purchaser. (A) A bank that obtains credit protection on a 
group of underlying exposures through a n\th\-to-default credit 
derivative (other than a first-to-default credit derivative) may 
recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of the derivative only if:
    (1) The bank also has obtained credit protection on the same 
underlying exposures in the form of first-through-(n-1)-to-default 
credit derivatives; or
    (2) If n-1 of the underlying exposures have already defaulted.
    (B) If a bank satisfies the requirements of paragraph (m)(2)(i)(A) 
of this section, the bank must determine its risk-based capital 
requirement for the underlying exposures as if the bank had only 
synthetically securitized the underlying exposure with the 
nth lowest risk-based capital requirement and had obtained no 
credit risk mitigant on the other underlying exposures.
    (ii) Protection provider. A bank that provides credit protection on 
a group of underlying exposures through a nth-to-default 
credit derivative (other than a first-to-default credit derivative) must 
determine its risk-weighted asset amount for the derivative by applying 
the RBA in section 43 of this appendix (if the derivative qualifies for 
the RBA) or, if the derivative does not qualify for the RBA, by setting 
its risk-weighted asset amount for the derivative equal to the product 
of:
    (A) The protection amount of the derivative;
    (B) 12.5; and
    (C) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements of the individual 
underlying exposures (excluding the n-1 underlying exposures with the 
lowest risk-based capital requirements), up to a maximum of 100 percent.

                Section 43. Ratings-Based Approach (RBA)

    (a) Eligibility requirements for use of the RBA--(1) Originating 
bank. An originating bank must use the RBA to calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for a securitization exposure if the exposure has 
two or more external ratings or inferred ratings (and may not use the 
RBA if the exposure has fewer than two external ratings or inferred 
ratings).
    (2) Investing bank. An investing bank must use the RBA to calculate 
its risk-based capital requirement for a securitization exposure if the 
exposure has one or more external or inferred ratings (and may not use 
the RBA if the exposure has no external or inferred rating).
    (b) Ratings-based approach. (1) A bank must determine the risk-
weighted asset amount for a securitization exposure by multiplying the 
amount of the exposure (as defined in paragraph (e) of section 42 of 
this appendix) by the appropriate risk weight provided in Table 6 and 
Table 7.
    (2) A bank must apply the risk weights in Table 6 when the 
securitization exposure's applicable external or applicable inferred 
rating represents a long-term credit rating, and must apply the risk 
weights in Table 7 when the securitization exposure's applicable 
external or applicable inferred rating represents a short-term credit 
rating.
    (i) A bank must apply the risk weights in column 1 of Table 6 or 
Table 7 to the securitization exposure if:
    (A) N (as calculated under paragraph (e)(6) of section 45 of this 
appendix) is six or more (for purposes of this section only, if the 
notional number of underlying exposures is 25 or more or if all of the 
underlying exposures are retail exposures, a bank may assume that N is 
six or more unless the bank knows or has reason to know that N is less 
than six); and
    (B) The securitization exposure is a senior securitization exposure.
    (ii) A bank must apply the risk weights in column 3 of Table 6 or 
Table 7 to the securitization exposure if N is less than six, regardless 
of the seniority of the securitization exposure.
    (iii) Otherwise, a bank must apply the risk weights in column 2 of 
Table 6 or Table 7.

                         Table 6--Long-Term Credit Rating Risk Weights Under RBA and IAA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Column 1        Column 2        Column 3
                                                    -----------------------------------------------    Applicable
                                                      Risk weights    Risk weights    Risk weights    external or
       Applicable external or inferred rating          for senior    for non-senior        for          inferred
           (Illustrative rating example)             securitization  securitization  securitization      rating
                                                        exposures       exposures       exposures    (Illustrative
                                                        backed by       backed by    backed by non-      rating
                                                     granular pools  granular pools  granular pools     example)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Highest investment grade (for example, AAA)........              7%             12%             20%
Second highest investment grade (for example, AA)..              8%             15%             25%
Third-highest investment grade--positive                        10%             18%             35%
 designation (for example, A + )...................
Third-highest investment grade (for example, A)....             12%             20%
Third-highest investment grade--negative                        20%             35%
 designation (for example, A^).....................
                                                                    --------------------------------------------

[[Page 516]]

 
Lowest investment grade--positive designation (for              35%                50%
 example, BBB + )..................................
Lowest investment grade (for example, BBB).........             60%                75%
                                                    ------------------------------------------------------------
Lowest investment grade--negative designation (for
 example, BBB^)....................................                       100%
One category below investment grade--positive
 designation (for example, BB + )..................                       250%
One category below investment grade (for example,
 BB)...............................................                       425%
One category below investment grade--negative
 designation (for example, BB^)....................                       650%
More than one category below investment grade......     Deduction from tier 1 and tier 2 capital.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                        Table 7--Short-Term Credit Rating Risk Weights Under RBA and IAA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Column 1        Column 2        Column 3
                                                    -----------------------------------------------    Applicable
                                                      Risk weights    Risk weights    Risk weights    external or
       Applicable external or inferred rating          for senior    for non-senior        for          inferred
           (Illustrative rating example)             securitization  securitization  securitization      rating
                                                        exposures       exposures       exposures    (Illustrative
                                                        backed by       backed by    backed by non-      rating
                                                     granular pools  granular pools  granular pools     example)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
Highest investment grade (for example, A1).........              7%             12%             20%
Second highest investment grade (for example, A2)..             12%             20%             35%
Third highest investment grade (for example, A3)...             60%             75%             75%
All other ratings..................................     Deduction from tier 1 and tier 2 capital.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

             Section 44. Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)

    (a) Eligibility requirements. A bank may apply the IAA to calculate 
the risk-weighted asset amount for a securitization exposure that the 
bank has to an ABCP program (such as a liquidity facility or credit 
enhancement) if the bank, the ABCP program, and the exposure qualify for 
use of the IAA.
    (1) Bank qualification criteria. A bank qualifies for use of the IAA 
if the bank has received the prior written approval of the FDIC. To 
receive such approval, the bank must demonstrate to the FDIC's 
satisfaction that the bank's internal assessment process meets the 
following criteria:
    (i) The bank's internal credit assessments of securitization 
exposures must be based on publicly available rating criteria used by an 
NRSRO.
    (ii) The bank's internal credit assessments of securitization 
exposures used for risk-based capital purposes must be consistent with 
those used in the bank's internal risk management process, management 
information reporting systems, and capital adequacy assessment process.
    (iii) The bank's internal credit assessment process must have 
sufficient granularity to identify gradations of risk. Each of the 
bank's internal credit assessment categories must correspond to an 
external rating of an NRSRO.
    (iv) The bank's internal credit assessment process, particularly the 
stress test factors for determining credit enhancement requirements, 
must be at least as conservative as the most conservative of the 
publicly available rating criteria of the NRSROs that have provided 
external ratings to the commercial paper issued by the ABCP program.
    (A) Where the commercial paper issued by an ABCP program has an 
external rating from two or more NRSROs and the different NRSROs' 
benchmark stress factors require different levels of credit enhancement 
to achieve the same external rating equivalent, the bank must apply the 
NRSRO stress factor that requires the highest level of credit 
enhancement.
    (B) If any NRSRO that provides an external rating to the ABCP 
program's commercial paper changes its methodology (including stress 
factors), the bank must evaluate whether to revise its internal 
assessment process.
    (v) The bank must have an effective system of controls and oversight 
that ensures compliance with these operational requirements and 
maintains the integrity and accuracy of the internal credit assessments. 
The bank must have an internal audit function

[[Page 517]]

independent from the ABCP program business line and internal credit 
assessment process that assesses at least annually whether the controls 
over the internal credit assessment process function as intended.
    (vi) The bank must review and update each internal credit assessment 
whenever new material information is available, but no less frequently 
than annually.
    (vii) The bank must validate its internal credit assessment process 
on an ongoing basis and at least annually.
    (2) ABCP-program qualification criteria. An ABCP program qualifies 
for use of the IAA if all commercial paper issued by the ABCP program 
has an external rating.
    (3) Exposure qualification criteria. A securitization exposure 
qualifies for use of the IAA if the exposure meets the following 
criteria:
    (i) The bank initially rated the exposure at least the equivalent of 
investment grade.
    (ii) The ABCP program has robust credit and investment guidelines 
(that is, underwriting standards) for the exposures underlying the 
securitization exposure.
    (iii) The ABCP program performs a detailed credit analysis of the 
sellers of the exposures underlying the securitization exposure.
    (iv) The ABCP program's underwriting policy for the exposures 
underlying the securitization exposure establishes minimum asset 
eligibility criteria that include the prohibition of the purchase of 
assets that are significantly past due or of assets that are defaulted 
(that is, assets that have been charged off or written down by the 
seller prior to being placed into the ABCP program or assets that would 
be charged off or written down under the program's governing contracts), 
as well as limitations on concentration to individual obligors or 
geographic areas and the tenor of the assets to be purchased.
    (v) The aggregate estimate of loss on the exposures underlying the 
securitization exposure considers all sources of potential risk, such as 
credit and dilution risk.
    (vi) Where relevant, the ABCP program incorporates structural 
features into each purchase of exposures underlying the securitization 
exposure to mitigate potential credit deterioration of the underlying 
exposures. Such features may include wind-down triggers specific to a 
pool of underlying exposures.
    (b) Mechanics. A bank that elects to use the IAA to calculate the 
risk-based capital requirement for any securitization exposure must use 
the IAA to calculate the risk-based capital requirements for all 
securitization exposures that qualify for the IAA approach. Under the 
IAA, a bank must map its internal assessment of such a securitization 
exposure to an equivalent external rating from an NRSRO. Under the IAA, 
a bank must determine the risk-weighted asset amount for such a 
securitization exposure by multiplying the amount of the exposure (as 
defined in paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix) by the 
appropriate risk weight in Table 6 and Table 7 in paragraph (b) of 
section 43 of this appendix.

             Section 45. Supervisory Formula Approach (SFA)

    (a) Eligibility requirements. A bank may use the SFA to determine 
its risk-based capital requirement for a securitization exposure only if 
the bank can calculate on an ongoing basis each of the SFA parameters in 
paragraph (e) of this section.
    (b) Mechanics. Under the SFA, a securitization exposure incurs a 
deduction from total capital (as described in paragraph (c) of section 
42 of this appendix) and/or an SFA risk-based capital requirement, as 
determined in paragraph (c) of this section. The risk-weighted asset 
amount for the securitization exposure equals the SFA risk-based capital 
requirement for the exposure multiplied by 12.5.
    (c) The SFA risk-based capital requirement. (1) If KIRB 
is greater than or equal to L + T, the entire exposure must be deducted 
from total capital.
    (2) If KIRB is less than or equal to L, the exposure's 
SFA risk-based capital requirement is UE multiplied by TP multiplied by 
the greater of:
    (i) 0.0056 * T; or
    (ii) S[L + T] ^ S[L].
    (3) If KIRB is greater than L and less than L + T, the 
bank must deduct from total capital an amount equal to 
UE*TP*(KIRB ^ L), and the exposure's SFA risk-based capital 
requirement is UE multiplied by TP multiplied by the greater of:
    (i) 0.0056 * (T ^ (KIRB ^ L)); or
    (ii) S[L + T] ^ S[KIRB].
    (d) The supervisory formula:

[[Page 518]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.017

    (11) In these expressions, b[Y; a, b] refers to the cumulative beta 
distribution with parameters a and b evaluated at Y. In the case where N 
= 1 and EWALGD = 100 percent, S[Y] in formula (1) must be calculated 
with K[Y] set equal to the product of KIRB and Y, and d set 
equal to 1 ^ KIRB.
    (e) SFA parameters--(1) Amount of the underlying exposures (UE). UE 
is the EAD of any underlying exposures that are wholesale and retail 
exposures (including the amount of any funded spread accounts, cash 
collateral accounts, and other similar funded credit enhancements) plus 
the amount of any underlying exposures that are securitization exposures 
(as defined in paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix) plus the 
adjusted carrying value of any underlying exposures that are equity 
exposures (as defined in paragraph (b) of section 51 of this appendix).
    (2) Tranche percentage (TP). TP is the ratio of the amount of the 
bank's securitization

[[Page 519]]

exposure to the amount of the tranche that contains the securitization 
exposure.
    (3) Capital requirement on underlying exposures (KIRB). (i) 
KIRB is the ratio of:
    (A) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements for the 
underlying exposures plus the expected credit losses of the underlying 
exposures (as determined under this appendix as if the underlying 
exposures were directly held by the bank); to
    (B) UE.
    (ii) The calculation of KIRB must reflect the effects of 
any credit risk mitigant applied to the underlying exposures (either to 
an individual underlying exposure, to a group of underlying exposures, 
or to the entire pool of underlying exposures).
    (iii) All assets related to the securitization are treated as 
underlying exposures, including assets in a reserve account (such as a 
cash collateral account).
    (4) Credit enhancement level (L). (i) L is the ratio of:
    (A) The amount of all securitization exposures subordinated to the 
tranche that contains the bank's securitization exposure; to
    (B) UE.
    (ii) A bank must determine L before considering the effects of any 
tranche-specific credit enhancements.
    (iii) Any gain-on-sale or CEIO associated with the securitization 
may not be included in L.
    (iv) Any reserve account funded by accumulated cash flows from the 
underlying exposures that is subordinated to the tranche that contains 
the bank's securitization exposure may be included in the numerator and 
denominator of L to the extent cash has accumulated in the account. 
Unfunded reserve accounts (that is, reserve accounts that are to be 
funded from future cash flows from the underlying exposures) may not be 
included in the calculation of L.
    (v) In some cases, the purchase price of receivables will reflect a 
discount that provides credit enhancement (for example, first loss 
protection) for all or certain tranches of the securitization. When this 
arises, L should be calculated inclusive of this discount if the 
discount provides credit enhancement for the securitization exposure.
    (5) Thickness of tranche (T). T is the ratio of:
    (i) The amount of the tranche that contains the bank's 
securitization exposure; to
    (ii) UE.
    (6) Effective number of exposures (N). (i) Unless the bank elects to 
use the formula provided in paragraph (f) of this section,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.018

where EADi represents the EAD associated with the ith 
instrument in the pool of underlying exposures.
    (ii) Multiple exposures to one obligor must be treated as a single 
underlying exposure.
    (iii) In the case of a re-securitization (that is, a securitization 
in which some or all of the underlying exposures are themselves 
securitization exposures), the bank must treat each underlying exposure 
as a single underlying exposure and must not look through to the 
originally securitized underlying exposures.
    (7) Exposure-weighted average loss given default (EWALGD). EWALGD is 
calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.019

where LGDi represents the average LGD associated with all 
exposures to the ith obligor. In the case of a re-securitization, an LGD 
of 100 percent must be assumed for the underlying exposures that are 
themselves securitization exposures.
    (f) Simplified method for computing N and EWALGD. (1) If all 
underlying exposures of a securitization are retail exposures, a bank 
may apply the SFA using the following simplifications:
    (i) h = 0; and
    (ii) v = 0.
    (2) Under the conditions in paragraphs (f)(3) and (f)(4) of this 
section, a bank may employ a simplified method for calculating N and 
EWALGD.
    (3) If C1 is no more than 0.03, a bank may set EWALGD = 
0.50 if none of the underlying exposures is a securitization exposure or 
EWALGD = 1 if one or more of the underlying exposures is a 
securitization exposure, and may set N equal to the following amount:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.020


[[Page 520]]


where:
    (i) Cm is the ratio of the sum of the amounts of the `m' 
largest underlying exposures to UE; and
    (ii) The level of m is to be selected by the bank.

    (4) Alternatively, if only C1 is available and 
C1 is no more than 0.03, the bank may set EWALGD = 0.50 if 
none of the underlying exposures is a securitization exposure or EWALGD 
= 1 if one or more of the underlying exposures is a securitization 
exposure and may set N = 1/C1.

  Section 46. Recognition of Credit Risk Mitigants for Securitization 
                                Exposures

    (a) General. An originating bank that has obtained a credit risk 
mitigant to hedge its securitization exposure to a synthetic or 
traditional securitization that satisfies the operational criteria in 
section 41 of this appendix may recognize the credit risk mitigant, but 
only as provided in this section. An investing bank that has obtained a 
credit risk mitigant to hedge a securitization exposure may recognize 
the credit risk mitigant, but only as provided in this section. A bank 
that has used the RBA in section 43 of this appendix or the IAA in 
section 44 of this appendix to calculate its risk-based capital 
requirement for a securitization exposure whose external or inferred 
rating (or equivalent internal rating under the IAA) reflects the 
benefits of a credit risk mitigant provided to the associated 
securitization or that supports some or all of the underlying exposures 
may not use the credit risk mitigation rules in this section to further 
reduce its risk-based capital requirement for the exposure to reflect 
that credit risk mitigant.
    (b) Collateral--(1) Rules of recognition. A bank may recognize 
financial collateral in determining the bank's risk-based capital 
requirement for a securitization exposure (other than a repo-style 
transaction, an eligible margin loan, or an OTC derivative contract for 
which the bank has reflected collateral in its determination of exposure 
amount under section 32 of this appendix) as follows. The bank's risk-
based capital requirement for the collateralized securitization exposure 
is equal to the risk-based capital requirement for the securitization 
exposure as calculated under the RBA in section 43 of this appendix or 
under the SFA in section 45 of this appendix multiplied by the ratio of 
adjusted exposure amount (SE*) to original exposure amount (SE), where:
    (i) SE* = max 0, [SE--C  x  (1^Hs^Hfx)] ;
    (ii) SE = the amount of the securitization exposure calculated under 
paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix;
    (iii) C = the current market value of the collateral;
    (iv) Hs = the haircut appropriate to the collateral type; and
    (v) Hfx = the haircut appropriate for any currency mismatch between 
the collateral and the exposure.
    (2) Mixed collateral. Where the collateral is a basket of different 
asset types or a basket of assets denominated in different currencies, 
the haircut on the basket will be
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.023

where ai is the current market value of the asset in the 
basket divided by the current market value of all assets in the basket 
and Hi is the haircut applicable to that asset.
    (3) Standard supervisory haircuts. Unless a bank qualifies for use 
of and uses own-estimates haircuts in paragraph (b)(4) of this section:
    (i) A bank must use the collateral type haircuts (Hs) in Table 3;
    (ii) A bank must use a currency mismatch haircut (Hfx) of 8 percent 
if the exposure and the collateral are denominated in different 
currencies;
    (iii) A bank must multiply the supervisory haircuts obtained in 
paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) by the square root of 6.5 (which equals 
2.549510); and
    (iv) A bank must adjust the supervisory haircuts upward on the basis 
of a holding period longer than 65 business days where and as 
appropriate to take into account the illiquidity of the collateral.
    (4) Own estimates for haircuts. With the prior written approval of 
the FDIC, a bank may calculate haircuts using its own internal estimates 
of market price volatility and foreign exchange volatility, subject to 
paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of section 32 of this appendix. The minimum 
holding period (TM) for securitization exposures is 65 business days.
    (c) Guarantees and credit derivatives--(1) Limitations on 
recognition. A bank may only recognize an eligible guarantee or eligible 
credit derivative provided by an eligible securitization guarantor in 
determining the bank's risk-based capital requirement for a 
securitization exposure.
    (2) ECL for securitization exposures. When a bank recognizes an 
eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative provided by an eligible 
securitization guarantor in determining the bank's risk-based capital 
requirement for a securitization exposure, the bank must also:
    (i) Calculate ECL for the protected portion of the exposure using 
the same risk parameters that it uses for calculating the risk-weighted 
asset amount of the exposure as described in paragraph (c)(3) of this 
section; and
    (ii) Add the exposure's ECL to the bank's total ECL.

[[Page 521]]

    (3) Rules of recognition. A bank may recognize an eligible guarantee 
or eligible credit derivative provided by an eligible securitization 
guarantor in determining the bank's risk-based capital requirement for 
the securitization exposure as follows:
    (i) Full coverage. If the protection amount of the eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative equals or exceeds the amount of 
the securitization exposure, the bank may set the risk-weighted asset 
amount for the securitization exposure equal to the risk-weighted asset 
amount for a direct exposure to the eligible securitization guarantor 
(as determined in the wholesale risk weight function described in 
section 31 of this appendix), using the bank's PD for the guarantor, the 
bank's LGD for the guarantee or credit derivative, and an EAD equal to 
the amount of the securitization exposure (as determined in paragraph 
(e) of section 42 of this appendix).
    (ii) Partial coverage. If the protection amount of the eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative is less than the amount of the 
securitization exposure, the bank may set the risk-weighted asset amount 
for the securitization exposure equal to the sum of:
    (A) Covered portion. The risk-weighted asset amount for a direct 
exposure to the eligible securitization guarantor (as determined in the 
wholesale risk weight function described in section 31 of this 
appendix), using the bank's PD for the guarantor, the bank's LGD for the 
guarantee or credit derivative, and an EAD equal to the protection 
amount of the credit risk mitigant; and
    (B) Uncovered portion. (1) 1.0 minus the ratio of the protection 
amount of the eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative to the 
amount of the securitization exposure); multiplied by
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure 
without the credit risk mitigant (as determined in sections 42-45 of 
this appendix).
    (4) Mismatches. The bank must make applicable adjustments to the 
protection amount as required in paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) of section 
33 of this appendix for any hedged securitization exposure and any more 
senior securitization exposure that benefits from the hedge. In the 
context of a synthetic securitization, when an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative covers multiple hedged exposures that have 
different residual maturities, the bank must use the longest residual 
maturity of any of the hedged exposures as the residual maturity of all 
the hedged exposures.

   Section 47. Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Early Amortization 
                               Provisions

    (a) General. (1) An originating bank must hold risk-based capital 
against the sum of the originating bank's interest and the investors' 
interest in a securitization that:
    (i) Includes one or more underlying exposures in which the borrower 
is permitted to vary the drawn amount within an agreed limit under a 
line of credit; and
    (ii) Contains an early amortization provision.
    (2) For securitizations described in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section, an originating bank must calculate the risk-based capital 
requirement for the originating bank's interest under sections 42-45 of 
this appendix, and the risk-based capital requirement for the investors' 
interest under paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Risk-weighted asset amount for investors' interest. The 
originating bank's risk-weighted asset amount for the investors' 
interest in the securitization is equal to the product of the following 
5 quantities:
    (1) The investors' interest EAD;
    (2) The appropriate conversion factor in paragraph (c) of this 
section;
    (3) KIRB (as defined in paragraph (e)(3) of section 45 of 
this appendix);
    (4) 12.5; and
    (5) The proportion of the underlying exposures in which the borrower 
is permitted to vary the drawn amount within an agreed limit under a 
line of credit.
    (c) Conversion factor. (1)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) 
of this section, to calculate the appropriate conversion factor, a bank 
must use Table 8 for a securitization that contains a controlled early 
amortization provision and must use Table 9 for a securitization that 
contains a non-controlled early amortization provision. In circumstances 
where a securitization contains a mix of retail and nonretail exposures 
or a mix of committed and uncommitted exposures, a bank may take a pro 
rata approach to determining the conversion factor for the 
securitization's early amortization provision. If a pro rata approach is 
not feasible, a bank must treat the mixed securitization as a 
securitization of nonretail exposures if a single underlying exposure is 
a nonretail exposure and must treat the mixed securitization as a 
securitization of committed exposures if a single underlying exposure is 
a committed exposure.
    (ii) To find the appropriate conversion factor in the tables, a bank 
must divide the three-month average annualized excess spread of the 
securitization by the excess spread trapping point in the securitization 
structure. In securitizations that do not require excess spread to be 
trapped, or that specify trapping points based primarily on performance 
measures other than the three-month average annualized excess spread, 
the excess spread trapping point is 4.5 percent.

[[Page 522]]



            Table 8--Controlled Early Amortization Provisions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Uncommitted          Committed
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Retail Credit Lines............  Three-month average     90% CF
                                  annualized excess
                                  spread Conversion
                                  Factor (CF).
                                 133.33% of trapping
                                  point or more, 0% CF.
                                 less than 133.33% to
                                  100% of trapping
                                  point, 1% CF.
                                 less than 100% to 75%
                                  of trapping point, 2%
                                  CF.
                                 less than 75% to 50%
                                  of trapping point,
                                  10% CF.
                                 less than 50% to 25%
                                  of trapping point,
                                  20% CF.
                                 less than 25% of
                                  trapping point, 40%
                                  CF.
Non-retail Credit Lines........  90% CF................  90% CF
------------------------------------------------------------------------


          Table 9--Non-Controlled Early Amortization Provisions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Uncommitted          Committed
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Retail Credit Lines............  Three-month average     100% CF
                                  annualized excess
                                  spread Conversion
                                  Factor (CF).
                                 133.33% of trapping
                                  point or more, 0% CF.
                                 less than 133.33% to
                                  100% of trapping
                                  point, 5% CF.
                                 less than 100% to 75%
                                  of trapping point,
                                  15% CF.
                                 less than 75% to 50%
                                  of trapping point,
                                  50% CF.
                                 less than 50% of
                                  trapping point, 100%
                                  CF.
Non-retail Credit Lines........  100% CF...............  100% CF
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For a securitization for which all or substantially all of the 
underlying exposures are residential mortgage exposures, a bank may 
calculate the appropriate conversion factor using paragraph (c)(1) of 
this section or may use a conversion factor of 10 percent. If the bank 
chooses to use a conversion factor of 10 percent, it must use that 
conversion factor for all securitizations for which all or substantially 
all of the underlying exposures are residential mortgage exposures.

           Part VI. Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures

            Section 51. Introduction and Exposure Measurement

    (a) General. To calculate its risk-weighted asset amounts for equity 
exposures that are not equity exposures to investment funds, a bank may 
apply either the Simple Risk Weight Approach (SRWA) in section 52 of 
this appendix or, if it qualifies to do so, the Internal Models Approach 
(IMA) in section 53 of this appendix. A bank must use the look-through 
approaches in section 54 of this appendix to calculate its risk-weighted 
asset amounts for equity exposures to investment funds.
    (b) Adjusted carrying value. For purposes of this part, the adjusted 
carrying value of an equity exposure is:
    (1) For the on-balance sheet component of an equity exposure, the 
bank's carrying value of the exposure reduced by any unrealized gains on 
the exposure that are reflected in such carrying value but excluded from 
the bank's tier 1 and tier 2 capital; and
    (2) For the off-balance sheet component of an equity exposure, the 
effective notional principal amount of the exposure, the size of which 
is equivalent to a hypothetical on-balance sheet position in the 
underlying equity instrument that would evidence the same change in fair 
value (measured in dollars) for a given small change in the price of the 
underlying equity instrument, minus the adjusted carrying value of the 
on-balance sheet component of the exposure as calculated in paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section. For unfunded equity commitments that are 
unconditional, the effective notional principal amount is the notional 
amount of the commitment. For unfunded equity commitments that are 
conditional, the effective notional principal amount is the bank's best 
estimate of the amount that would be funded under economic downturn 
conditions.

             Section 52. Simple Risk Weight Approach (SRWA)

    (a) General. Under the SRWA, a bank's aggregate risk-weighted asset 
amount for its equity exposures is equal to the sum of the risk-weighted 
asset amounts for each of the bank's individual equity exposures (other 
than equity exposures to an investment fund) as determined in this 
section and the risk-weighted asset amounts for each of the bank's 
individual equity exposures to an investment fund as determined in 
section 54 of this appendix.
    (b) SRWA computation for individual equity exposures. A bank must 
determine the risk-weighted asset amount for an individual equity 
exposure (other than an equity exposure to an investment fund) by 
multiplying the adjusted carrying value of the equity exposure or the 
effective portion and ineffective

[[Page 523]]

portion of a hedge pair (as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) by 
the lowest applicable risk weight in this paragraph (b).
    (1) 0 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to an 
entity whose credit exposures are exempt from the 0.03 percent PD floor 
in paragraph (d)(2) of section 31 of this appendix is assigned a 0 
percent risk weight.
    (2) 20 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to a 
Federal Home Loan Bank or Farmer Mac is assigned a 20 percent risk 
weight.
    (3) 100 percent risk weight equity exposures. The following equity 
exposures are assigned a 100 percent risk weight:
    (i) Community development equity exposures. An equity exposure that 
qualifies as a community development investment under 12 U.S.C. 24 
(Eleventh), excluding equity exposures to an unconsolidated small 
business investment company and equity exposures held through a 
consolidated small business investment company described in section 302 
of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682).
    (ii) Effective portion of hedge pairs. The effective portion of a 
hedge pair.
    (iii) Non-significant equity exposures. Equity exposures, excluding 
exposures to an investment firm that would meet the definition of a 
traditional securitization were it not for the FDIC's application of 
paragraph (8) of that definition and has greater than immaterial 
leverage, to the extent that the aggregate adjusted carrying value of 
the exposures does not exceed 10 percent of the bank's tier 1 capital 
plus tier 2 capital.
    (A) To compute the aggregate adjusted carrying value of a bank's 
equity exposures for purposes of this paragraph (b)(3)(iii), the bank 
may exclude equity exposures described in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), 
(b)(3)(i), and (b)(3)(ii) of this section, the equity exposure in a 
hedge pair with the smaller adjusted carrying value, and a proportion of 
each equity exposure to an investment fund equal to the proportion of 
the assets of the investment fund that are not equity exposures or that 
meet the criterion of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. If a bank 
does not know the actual holdings of the investment fund, the bank may 
calculate the proportion of the assets of the fund that are not equity 
exposures based on the terms of the prospectus, partnership agreement, 
or similar contract that defines the fund's permissible investments. If 
the sum of the investment limits for all exposure classes within the 
fund exceeds 100 percent, the bank must assume for purposes of this 
paragraph (b)(3)(iii) that the investment fund invests to the maximum 
extent possible in equity exposures.
    (B) When determining which of a bank's equity exposures qualify for 
a 100 percent risk weight under this paragraph, a bank first must 
include equity exposures to unconsolidated small business investment 
companies or held through consolidated small business investment 
companies described in section 302 of the Small Business Investment Act 
of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682), then must include publicly traded equity 
exposures (including those held indirectly through investment funds), 
and then must include non-publicly traded equity exposures (including 
those held indirectly through investment funds).
    (4) 300 percent risk weight equity exposures. A publicly traded 
equity exposure (other than an equity exposure described in paragraph 
(b)(6) of this section and including the ineffective portion of a hedge 
pair) is assigned a 300 percent risk weight.
    (5) 400 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure 
(other than an equity exposure described in paragraph (b)(6) of this 
section) that is not publicly traded is assigned a 400 percent risk 
weight.
    (6) 600 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to 
an investment firm that:
    (i) Would meet the definition of a traditional securitization were 
it not for the FDIC's application of paragraph (8) of that definition; 
and
    (ii) Has greater than immaterial leverage is assigned a 600 percent 
risk weight.
    (c) Hedge transactions--(1) Hedge pair. A hedge pair is two equity 
exposures that form an effective hedge so long as each equity exposure 
is publicly traded or has a return that is primarily based on a publicly 
traded equity exposure.
    (2) Effective hedge. Two equity exposures form an effective hedge if 
the exposures either have the same remaining maturity or each has a 
remaining maturity of at least three months; the hedge relationship is 
formally documented in a prospective manner (that is, before the bank 
acquires at least one of the equity exposures); the documentation 
specifies the measure of effectiveness (E) the bank will use for the 
hedge relationship throughout the life of the transaction; and the hedge 
relationship has an E greater than or equal to 0.8. A bank must measure 
E at least quarterly and must use one of three alternative measures of 
E:
    (i) Under the dollar-offset method of measuring effectiveness, the 
bank must determine the ratio of value change (RVC). The RVC is the 
ratio of the cumulative sum of the periodic changes in value of one 
equity exposure to the cumulative sum of the periodic changes in the 
value of the other equity exposure. If RVC is positive, the hedge is not 
effective and E equals 0. If RVC is negative and greater than or equal 
to ^1 (that is, between zero and ^1), then E equals the absolute value 
of RVC. If RVC is negative and less than ^1, then E equals 2 plus RVC.
    (ii) Under the variability-reduction method of measuring 
effectiveness:

[[Page 524]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07DE07.021

    (A) Xt = At ^ Bt;
    (B) At = the value at time t of one exposure in a hedge 
pair; and
    (C) Bt = the value at time t of the other exposure in a 
hedge pair.
    (iii) Under the regression method of measuring effectiveness, E 
equals the coefficient of determination of a regression in which the 
change in value of one exposure in a hedge pair is the dependent 
variable and the change in value of the other exposure in a hedge pair 
is the independent variable. However, if the estimated regression 
coefficient is positive, then the value of E is zero.
    (3) The effective portion of a hedge pair is E multiplied by the 
greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures forming 
a hedge pair.
    (4) The ineffective portion of a hedge pair is (1-E) multiplied by 
the greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures 
forming a hedge pair.

               Section 53. Internal Models Approach (IMA)

    (a) General. A bank may calculate its risk-weighted asset amount for 
equity exposures using the IMA by modeling publicly traded and non-
publicly traded equity exposures (in accordance with paragraph (c) of 
this section) or by modeling only publicly traded equity exposures (in 
accordance with paragraph (d) of this section).
    (b) Qualifying criteria. To qualify to use the IMA to calculate 
risk-based capital requirements for equity exposures, a bank must 
receive prior written approval from the FDIC. To receive such approval, 
the bank must demonstrate to the FDIC's satisfaction that the bank meets 
the following criteria:
    (1) The bank must have one or more models that:
    (i) Assess the potential decline in value of its modeled equity 
exposures;
    (ii) Are commensurate with the size, complexity, and composition of 
the bank's modeled equity exposures; and
    (iii) Adequately capture both general market risk and idiosyncratic 
risk.
    (2) The bank's model must produce an estimate of potential losses 
for its modeled equity exposures that is no less than the estimate of 
potential losses produced by a VaR methodology employing a 99.0 percent, 
one-tailed confidence interval of the distribution of quarterly returns 
for a benchmark portfolio of equity exposures comparable to the bank's 
modeled equity exposures using a long-term sample period.
    (3) The number of risk factors and exposures in the sample and the 
data period used for quantification in the bank's model and benchmarking 
exercise must be sufficient to provide confidence in the accuracy and 
robustness of the bank's estimates.
    (4) The bank's model and benchmarking process must incorporate data 
that are relevant in representing the risk profile of the bank's modeled 
equity exposures, and must include data from at least one equity market 
cycle containing adverse market movements relevant to the risk profile 
of the bank's modeled equity exposures. In addition, the bank's 
benchmarking exercise must be based on daily market prices for the 
benchmark portfolio. If the bank's model uses a scenario methodology, 
the bank must demonstrate that the model produces a conservative 
estimate of potential losses on the bank's modeled equity exposures over 
a relevant long-term market cycle. If the bank employs risk factor 
models, the bank must demonstrate through empirical analysis the 
appropriateness of the risk factors used.
    (5) The bank must be able to demonstrate, using theoretical 
arguments and empirical evidence, that any proxies used in the modeling 
process are comparable to the bank's modeled equity exposures and that 
the bank has made appropriate adjustments for differences. The bank must 
derive any proxies for its modeled equity exposures and benchmark 
portfolio using historical market data that are relevant to the bank's 
modeled equity exposures and benchmark portfolio (or, where not, must 
use appropriately adjusted data), and such proxies must be robust 
estimates of the risk of the bank's modeled equity exposures.
    (c) Risk-weighted assets calculation for a bank modeling publicly 
traded and non-publicly traded equity exposures. If a bank models 
publicly traded and non-publicly traded equity exposures, the bank's 
aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for its equity exposures is equal 
to the sum of:
    (1) The risk-weighted asset amount of each equity exposure that 
qualifies for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 (as determined under 
section 52 of this appendix) and each equity exposure to

[[Page 525]]

an investment fund (as determined under section 54 of this appendix); 
and
    (2) The greater of:
    (i) The estimate of potential losses on the bank's equity exposures 
(other than equity exposures referenced in paragraph (c)(1) of this 
section) generated by the bank's internal equity exposure model 
multiplied by 12.5; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the bank's publicly traded equity exposures that do not belong to a 
hedge pair, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent 
risk weight under paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 of 
this appendix, and are not equity exposures to an investment fund;
    (B) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate ineffective portion of 
all hedge pairs; and
    (C) 300 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the bank's equity exposures that are not publicly traded, do not 
qualify for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix, and 
are not equity exposures to an investment fund.
    (d) Risk-weighted assets calculation for a bank using the IMA only 
for publicly traded equity exposures. If a bank models only publicly 
traded equity exposures, the bank's aggregate risk-weighted asset amount 
for its equity exposures is equal to the sum of:
    (1) The risk-weighted asset amount of each equity exposure that 
qualifies for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 (as determined under 
section 52 of this appendix), each equity exposure that qualifies for a 
400 percent risk weight under paragraph (b)(5) of section 52 or a 600 
percent risk weight under paragraph (b)(6) of section 52 (as determined 
under section 52 of this appendix), and each equity exposure to an 
investment fund (as determined under section 54 of this appendix); and
    (2) The greater of:
    (i) The estimate of potential losses on the bank's equity exposures 
(other than equity exposures referenced in paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section) generated by the bank's internal equity exposure model 
multiplied by 12.5; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the bank's publicly traded equity exposures that do not belong to a 
hedge pair, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent 
risk weight under paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 of 
this appendix, and are not equity exposures to an investment fund; and
    (B) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate ineffective portion of 
all hedge pairs.

            Section 54. Equity Exposures to Investment Funds

    (a) Available approaches. (1) Unless the exposure meets the 
requirements for a community development equity exposure in paragraph 
(b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix, a bank must determine the 
risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an investment fund 
under the Full Look-Through Approach in paragraph (b) of this section, 
the Simple Modified Look-Through Approach in paragraph (c) of this 
section, the Alternative Modified Look-Through Approach in paragraph (d) 
of this section, or, if the investment fund qualifies for the Money 
Market Fund Approach, the Money Market Fund Approach in paragraph (e) of 
this section.
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an 
investment fund that meets the requirements for a community development 
equity exposure in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix is 
its adjusted carrying value.
    (3) If an equity exposure to an investment fund is part of a hedge 
pair and the bank does not use the Full Look-Through Approach, the bank 
may use the ineffective portion of the hedge pair as determined under 
paragraph (c) of section 52 of this appendix as the adjusted carrying 
value for the equity exposure to the investment fund. The risk-weighted 
asset amount of the effective portion of the hedge pair is equal to its 
adjusted carrying value.
    (b) Full Look-Through Approach. A bank that is able to calculate a 
risk-weighted asset amount for its proportional ownership share of each 
exposure held by the investment fund (as calculated under this appendix 
as if the proportional ownership share of each exposure were held 
directly by the bank) may either:
    (1) Set the risk-weighted asset amount of the bank's exposure to the 
fund equal to the product of:
    (i) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amounts of the exposures held 
by the fund as if they were held directly by the bank; and
    (ii) The bank's proportional ownership share of the fund; or
    (2) Include the bank's proportional ownership share of each exposure 
held by the fund in the bank's IMA.
    (c) Simple Modified Look-Through Approach. Under this approach, the 
risk-weighted asset amount for a bank's equity exposure to an investment 
fund equals the adjusted carrying value of the equity exposure 
multiplied by the highest risk weight in Table 10 that applies to any 
exposure the fund is permitted to hold under its prospectus, partnership 
agreement, or similar contract that defines the fund's permissible 
investments (excluding derivative contracts that are used for hedging 
rather than speculative purposes

[[Page 526]]

and that do not constitute a material portion of the fund's exposures).

   Table 10--Modified Look-Through Approaches for Equity Exposures to
                            Investment Funds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
               Risk weight                         Exposure class
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 percent................................  Sovereign exposures with a
                                            long-term applicable
                                            external rating in the
                                            highest investment-grade
                                            rating category and
                                            sovereign exposures of the
                                            United States.
20 percent...............................  Non-sovereign exposures with
                                            a long-term applicable
                                            external rating in the
                                            highest or second-highest
                                            investment-grade rating
                                            category; exposures with a
                                            short-term applicable
                                            external rating in the
                                            highest investment-grade
                                            rating category; and
                                            exposures to, or guaranteed
                                            by, depository institutions,
                                            foreign banks (as defined in
                                            12 CFR 211.2), or securities
                                            firms subject to
                                            consolidated supervision and
                                            regulation comparable to
                                            that imposed on U.S.
                                            securities broker-dealers
                                            that are repo-style
                                            transactions or bankers'
                                            acceptances.
50 percent...............................  Exposures with a long-term
                                            applicable external rating
                                            in the third-highest
                                            investment-grade rating
                                            category or a short-term
                                            applicable external rating
                                            in the second-highest
                                            investment-grade rating
                                            category.
100 percent..............................  Exposures with a long-term or
                                            short-term applicable
                                            external rating in the
                                            lowest investment-grade
                                            rating category.
200 percent..............................  Exposures with a long-term
                                            applicable external rating
                                            one rating category below
                                            investment grade.
300 percent..............................  Publicly traded equity
                                            exposures.
400 percent..............................  Non-publicly traded equity
                                            exposures; exposures with a
                                            long-term applicable
                                            external rating two rating
                                            categories or more below
                                            investment grade; and
                                            exposures without an
                                            external rating (excluding
                                            publicly traded equity
                                            exposures).
1,250 percent............................  OTC derivative contracts and
                                            exposures that must be
                                            deducted from regulatory
                                            capital or receive a risk
                                            weight greater than 400
                                            percent under this appendix.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) Alternative Modified Look-Through Approach. Under this approach, 
a bank may assign the adjusted carrying value of an equity exposure to 
an investment fund on a pro rata basis to different risk weight 
categories in Table 10 based on the investment limits in the fund's 
prospectus, partnership agreement, or similar contract that defines the 
fund's permissible investments. The risk-weighted asset amount for the 
bank's equity exposure to the investment fund equals the sum of each 
portion of the adjusted carrying value assigned to an exposure class 
multiplied by the applicable risk weight. If the sum of the investment 
limits for exposure classes within the fund exceeds 100 percent, the 
bank must assume that the fund invests to the maximum extent permitted 
under its investment limits in the exposure class with the highest risk 
weight under Table 10, and continues to make investments in order of the 
exposure class with the next highest risk weight under Table 10 until 
the maximum total investment level is reached. If more than one exposure 
class applies to an exposure, the bank must use the highest applicable 
risk weight. A bank may exclude derivative contracts held by the fund 
that are used for hedging rather than for speculative purposes and do 
not constitute a material portion of the fund's exposures.
    (e) Money Market Fund Approach. The risk-weighted asset amount for a 
bank's equity exposure to an investment fund that is a money market fund 
subject to 17 CFR 270.2a-7 and that has an applicable external rating in 
the highest investment-grade rating category equals the adjusted 
carrying value of the equity exposure multiplied by 7 percent.

                 Section 55. Equity Derivative Contracts

    Under the IMA, in addition to holding risk-based capital against an 
equity derivative contract under this part, a bank must hold risk-based 
capital against the counterparty credit risk in the equity derivative 
contract by also treating the equity derivative contract as a wholesale 
exposure and computing a supplemental risk-weighted asset amount for the 
contract under part IV. Under the SRWA, a bank may choose not to hold 
risk-based capital against the counterparty credit risk of equity 
derivative contracts, as long as it does so for all such contracts. 
Where the equity derivative contracts are subject to a qualified master 
netting agreement, a bank using the SRWA must either include all or 
exclude all of the contracts from any measure used to determine 
counterparty credit risk exposure.

           Part VII. Risk-Weighted Assets for Operational Risk

Section 61. Qualification Requirements for Incorporation of Operational 
                             Risk Mitigants

    (a) Qualification to use operational risk mitigants. A bank may 
adjust its estimate of operational risk exposure to reflect qualifying 
operational risk mitigants if:
    (1) The bank's operational risk quantification system is able to 
generate an estimate of the bank's operational risk exposure (which does 
not incorporate qualifying operational risk mitigants) and an estimate 
of

[[Page 527]]

the bank's operational risk exposure adjusted to incorporate qualifying 
operational risk mitigants; and
    (2) The bank's methodology for incorporating the effects of 
insurance, if the bank uses insurance as an operational risk mitigant, 
captures through appropriate discounts to the amount of risk mitigation:
    (i) The residual term of the policy, where less than one year;
    (ii) The cancellation terms of the policy, where less than one year;
    (iii) The policy's timeliness of payment;
    (iv) The uncertainty of payment by the provider of the policy; and
    (v) Mismatches in coverage between the policy and the hedged 
operational loss event.
    (b) Qualifying operational risk mitigants. Qualifying operational 
risk mitigants are:
    (1) Insurance that:
    (i) Is provided by an unaffiliated company that has a claims payment 
ability that is rated in one of the three highest rating categories by a 
NRSRO;
    (ii) Has an initial term of at least one year and a residual term of 
more than 90 days;
    (iii) Has a minimum notice period for cancellation by the provider 
of 90 days;
    (iv) Has no exclusions or limitations based upon regulatory action 
or for the receiver or liquidator of a failed depository institution; 
and
    (v) Is explicitly mapped to a potential operational loss event; and
    (2) Operational risk mitigants other than insurance for which the 
FDIC has given prior written approval. In evaluating an operational risk 
mitigant other than insurance, the FDIC will consider whether the 
operational risk mitigant covers potential operational losses in a 
manner equivalent to holding regulatory capital.

        Section 62. Mechanics of Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation

    (a) If a bank does not qualify to use or does not have qualifying 
operational risk mitigants, the bank's dollar risk-based capital 
requirement for operational risk is its operational risk exposure minus 
eligible operational risk offsets (if any).
    (b) If a bank qualifies to use operational risk mitigants and has 
qualifying operational risk mitigants, the bank's dollar risk-based 
capital requirement for operational risk is the greater of:
    (1) The bank's operational risk exposure adjusted for qualifying 
operational risk mitigants minus eligible operational risk offsets (if 
any); or
    (2) 0.8 multiplied by the difference between:
    (i) The bank's operational risk exposure; and
    (ii) Eligible operational risk offsets (if any).
    (c) The bank's risk-weighted asset amount for operational risk 
equals the bank's dollar risk-based capital requirement for operational 
risk determined under paragraph (a) or (b) of this section multiplied by 
12.5.

                          Part VIII. Disclosure

                   Section 71. Disclosure Requirements

    (a) Each bank must publicly disclose each quarter its total and tier 
1 risk-based capital ratios and their components (that is, tier 1 
capital, tier 2 capital, total qualifying capital, and total risk-
weighted assets). \4\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ Other public disclosure requirements continue to apply--for 
example, Federal securities law and regulatory reporting requirements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) A bank must comply with paragraph (b) of section 71 of appendix 
G to the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation Y (12 CFR part 225, appendix 
G) unless it is a consolidated subsidiary of a bank holding company or 
depository institution that is subject to these requirements.

                     Part IX. Transition Provisions

Section 81. Optional Transition Provisions Related to the Implementation 
               of Consolidation Requirements Under FAS 167

    (a) Scope, applicability, and purpose. This section 81 provides 
optional transition provisions for a State nonmember bank that is 
required for financial and regulatory reporting purposes, as a result of 
its implementation of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 
167, Amendments to FASB Interpretation No. 46(R) (FAS 167), to 
consolidate certain variable interest entities (VIEs) as defined under 
GAAP. These transition provisions apply through the end of the fourth 
quarter following the date of a bank's implementation of FAS 167 
(implementation date).
    (b) Exclusion period--(1) Exclusion of risk-weighted assets for the 
first and second quarters. For the first two quarters after the 
implementation date (exclusion period), including for the two calendar 
quarter-end regulatory report dates within those quarters, a bank may 
exclude from risk-weighted assets:
    (i) Subject to the limitations in paragraph (d) of this section 81, 
assets held by a VIE, provided that the following conditions are met:
    (A) The VIE existed prior to the implementation date,
    (B) The bank did not consolidate the VIE on its balance sheet for 
calendar quarter-end regulatory report dates prior to the implementation 
date,
    (C) The bank must consolidate the VIE on its balance sheet beginning 
as of the implementation date as a result of its implementation of FAS 
167, and

[[Page 528]]

    (D) The bank excludes all assets held by VIEs described in 
paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this section 81; and
    (ii) Subject to the limitations in paragraph (d) of this section 81, 
assets held by a VIE that is a consolidated ABCP program, provided that 
the following conditions are met:
    (A) The bank is the sponsor of the ABCP program,
    (B) Prior to the implementation date, the bank consolidated the VIE 
onto its balance sheet under GAAP and excluded the VIE's assets from the 
bank's risk-weighted assets, and
    (C) The bank chooses to exclude all assets held by ABCP program VIEs 
described in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section 81.
    (2) Risk-weighted assets during exclusion period. During the 
exclusion period, including for the two calendar quarter-end regulatory 
report dates within the exclusion period, a bank adopting the optional 
provisions in paragraph (b) of this section must calculate risk-weighted 
assets for its contractual exposures to the VIEs referenced in paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section 81 on the implementation date and include this 
calculated amount in risk-weighted assets. Such contractual exposures 
may include direct-credit substitutes, recourse obligations, residual 
interests, liquidity facilities, and loans.
    (3) Inclusion of ALLL in Tier 2 capital for the first and second 
quarters. During the exclusion period, including for the two calendar 
quarter-end regulatory report dates within the exclusion period, a bank 
that excludes VIE assets from risk-weighted assets pursuant to paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section 81 may include in Tier 2 capital the full amount 
of the ALLL calculated as of the implementation date that is 
attributable to the assets it excludes pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section 81 (inclusion amount). The amount of ALLL includable in 
Tier 2 capital in accordance with this paragraph shall not be subject to 
the limitations set forth in section 13(a)(2) and (b) of this Appendix.
    (c) Phase-in period--(1) Exclusion amount. For purposes of this 
paragraph (c), exclusion amount is defined as the amount of risk-
weighted assets excluded in paragraph (b)(1) of this section as of the 
implementation date.
    (2) Risk-weighted assets for the third and fourth quarters. A bank 
that excludes assets of consolidated VIEs from risk-weighted assets 
pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section may, for the third and 
fourth quarters after the implementation date (phase-in period), 
including for the two calendar quarter-end regulatory report dates 
within those quarters, exclude from risk-weighted assets 50 percent of 
the exclusion amount, provided that the bank may not include in risk-
weighted assets pursuant to this paragraph an amount less than the 
aggregate risk-weighted assets calculated pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section 81.
    (3) Inclusion of ALLL in Tier 2 capital for the third and fourth 
quarters. A bank that excludes assets of consolidated VIEs from risk-
weighted assets pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section may, for 
the phase-in period, include in Tier 2 capital 50 percent of the 
inclusion amount it included in Tier 2 capital during the exclusion 
period, notwithstanding the limit on including ALLL in Tier 2 capital in 
section 13(a)(2) and (b) of this Appendix.
    (d) Implicit recourse limitation. Notwithstanding any other 
provision in this section 81, assets held by a VIE to which the bank has 
provided recourse through credit enhancement beyond any contractual 
obligation to support assets it has sold may not be excluded from risk-
weighted assets.

[72 FR 69396, 69437, Dec. 7, 2007; 73 FR 21690, Apr. 22, 2008; 75 FR 
4651, Jan. 28, 2010; 76 FR 37629, June 28, 2011]



PART 326_MINIMUM SECURITY DEVICES AND PROCEDURES AND BANK SECRECY 
ACT \1\ COMPLIANCE--Table of Contents


---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ In its original form, subchapter II of chapter 53 of title 31 
U.S.C., was part of Pub. L. 91-508 which requires recordkeeping for and 
reporting of currency transactions by banks and others and is commonly 
known as the Bank Secrecy Act.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                  Subpart A_Minimum Security Procedures

Sec.
326.0  Authority, purpose, and scope.
326.1  Definitions.
326.2  Designation of security officer.
326.3  Security program.
326.4  Reports.

    Subpart B_Procedures for Monitoring Bank Secrecy Act Complianace

326.8  Bank Secrecy Act compliance.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1813, 1815, 1817, 1818, 1819 (Tenth), 1881-
1883; 31 U.S.C. 5311-5314 and 5316-5332.2



                  Subpart A_Minimum Security Procedures

    Source: 56 FR 13581, Apr. 3, 1991, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 326.0  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) This part is issued by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
(``FDIC'') pursuant to section 3 of the

[[Page 529]]

Bank Protection Act of 1968 (12 U.S.C. 1882). It applies to insured 
state banks that are not members of the Federal Reserve System. It 
requires each bank to adopt appropriate security procedures to 
discourage robberies, burglaries, and larcenies and to assist in 
identifying and apprehending persons who commit such acts.
    (b) It is the responsibility of the bank's board of directors to 
comply with this part and ensure that a written security program for the 
bank's main office and branches is developed and implemented.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
3064-0095)



Sec. 326.1  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this part--
    (a) The term insured nonmember bank means any bank, including a 
foreign bank having a branch the deposits of which are insured in 
accordance with the provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 
which is not a member of the Federal Reserve System. The term does not 
include any institution chartered or licensed by the Comptroller of the 
Currency, any District bank, or any savings association.
    (b) The term banking office includes any branch of an insured 
nonmember bank, and, in the case of an insured state nonmember bank, it 
includes the main office of that bank.
    (c) The term branch for a bank chartered under the laws of any state 
of the United States includes any branch bank, branch office, branch 
agency, additional office, or any branch place of business located in 
any state or territory of the United States, District of Columbia, 
Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the Trust Territory of the Pacific 
Islands, the Northern Mariana Islands or the Virgin Islands at which 
deposits are received or checks paid or money lent. In the case of a 
foreign bank, as defined in Sec. 347.202 of this chapter, the term 
branch has the same meaning given in Sec. 347.202 of this chapter.

[56 FR 13581, Apr. 3, 1991, as amended at 63 FR 17075, Apr. 8, 1998]



Sec. 326.2  Designation of security officer.

    Upon the issuance of federal deposit insurance, the board of 
directors of each insured nonmember bank \2\ shall designate a security 
officer who shall have the authority, subject to the approval of the 
board of directors, to develop, within a reasonable time, but no later 
than 180 days, and to administer a written security program for each 
banking office.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ The term board of directors includes the managing official of an 
insured branch of a foreign bank for purposes of 12 CFR 326.0-326.4.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 326.3  Security program.

    (a) Contents of security program. The security program shall:
    (1) Establish procedures for opening and closing for business and 
for the safekeeping of all currency, negotiable securities, and similar 
valuables at all times;
    (2) Establish procedures that will assist in identifying persons 
committing crimes against the bank and that will preserve evidence that 
may aid in their identification and prosecution; such procedures may 
include, but are not limited to:
    (i) Retaining a record of any robbery, burglary, or larceny 
committed against the bank;
    (ii) Maintaining a camera that records activity in the banking 
office; and
    (iii) Using identification devices, such as prerecorded serial-
numbered bills, or chemical and electronic devices;
    (3) Provide for initial and periodic training of officers and 
employees in their responsibilities under the security program and in 
proper employee conduct during and after a robbery, burglary or larceny; 
and
    (4) Provide for selecting, testing, operating and maintaining 
appropriate security devices, as specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (b) Security devices. Each insured nonmember bank shall have, at a 
minimum, the following security devices:
    (1) A means of protecting cash or other liquid assets, such as a 
vault, safe, or other secure space;

[[Page 530]]

    (2) A lighting system for illuminating, during the hours of 
darkness, the area around the vault, if the vault is visible from 
outside the banking office;
    (3) An alarm system or other appropriate device for promptly 
notifying the nearest responsible law enforcement officers of an 
attempted or perpetrated robbery or burglary;
    (4) Tamper-resistant locks on exterior doors and exterior windows 
that may be opened; and
    (5) Such other devices as the security officer determines to be 
appropriate, taking into consideration:
    (i) The incidence of crimes against financial institutions in the 
area;
    (ii) The amount of currency or other valuables exposed to robbery, 
burglary, and larceny;
    (iii) The distance of the banking office from the nearest 
responsible law enforcement officers;
    (iv) The cost of the security devices;
    (v) Other security measures in effect at the banking office; and
    (vi) The physical characteristics of the structure of the banking 
office and its surroundings.



Sec. 326.4  Reports.

    The security officer for each insured nonmember bank shall report at 
least annually to the bank's board of directors on the implementation, 
administration, and effectiveness of the security program.



     Subpart B_Procedures for Monitoring Bank Secrecy Act Compliance



Sec. 326.8  Bank Security Act compliance.

    (a) Purpose. This subpart is issued to assure that all insured 
nonmember banks as defined in 12 CFR 326.1 establish and maintain 
procedures reasonably designed to assure and monitor their compliance 
with the requirements of subchapter II of chapter 53 of title 31, United 
States Code, and the implementing regulations promulgated thereunder by 
the Department of Treasury at 31 CFR Chapter X.
    (b) Compliance procedures--(1) Program requirement. Each bank shall 
develop and provide for the continued administration of a program 
reasonably designed to assure and monitor compliance with recordkeeping 
and reporting requirements set forth in subchapter II of chapter 53 of 
title 31, United States Code, and the implementing regulations issued by 
the Department of Treasury at 31 CFR Chapter X. The compliance program 
shall be written, approved by the bank's board of directors, and noted 
in the minutes.
    (2) Customer identification program. Each bank is subject to the 
requirements of 31 U.S.C. 5318(l) and the implementing regulation 
jointly promulgated by the FDIC and the Department of the Treasury at 31 
CFR 1020.220.
    (c) Contents of compliance program. The compliance program shall, at 
a minimum:
    (1) Provide for a system of internal controls to assure ongoing 
compliance;
    (2) Provide for independent testing for compliance to be conducted 
by bank personnel or by an outside party;
    (3) Designate an individual or individuals responsible for 
coordinating and monitoring day-to-day compliance; and
    (4) Provide training for appropriate personnel.

[76 FR 14793, Mar. 18, 2011, as amended at 77 FR 30371, May 23, 2012]



PART 327_ASSESSMENTS--Table of Contents



                          Subpart A_In General

Sec.
327.1  Purpose and scope.
327.2  Certified statements.
327.3  Payment of assessments.
327.4  Assessment rates.
327.5  Assessment base.
327.6  Mergers and consolidations; other terminations of insurance.
327.7  Payment of interest on assessment underpayments and overpayments.
327.8  Definitions.
327.9  Assessment pricing methods.
327.10  Assessment rate schedules.
327.11  Surcharges and assessments required to raise the reserve ratio 
          of the DIF to 1.35 percent.
327.12  Prepayment of quarterly risk-based assessments.
327.15  Emergency special assessments.
327.16  Assessment pricing methods--beginning the first assessment 
          period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of the DIF 
          as of the end of the prior assessment period has reached or 
          exceeded 1.15 percent.

[[Page 531]]


Appendix A to Subpart A of Part 327--Method to Derive Pricing 
          Multipliers and Uniform Amount
Appendix B to Subpart A of Part 327--Conversion of Scorecard Measures 
          into Score
Appendix C to Subpart A of Part 327
Appendix D to Subpart A of Part 327--Description of the Loss Severity 
          Measure

         Subpart B_Implementation of One-Time Assessment Credit

327.30  Purpose and scope.
327.31  Definitions.
327.32  Determination of aggregate credit amount.
327.33  Determination of eligible institution's credit amount.
327.34  Transferability of credits.
327.35  Application of credits.
327.36  Requests for review of credit amount.

            Subpart C_Implementation of Dividend Requirements

327.50  Dividends.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1441, 1813, 1815, 1817-19, 1821.

    Source: 54 FR 51374, Dec. 15, 1989, unless otherwise noted.



                          Subpart A_In General

    Source: Sections 327.1 through 327.8 appear at 71 FR 69277, Nov. 30, 
2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 327.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Scope. This part 327 applies to any insured depository 
institution, including any insured branch of a foreign bank.
    (b) Purpose. (1) Except as specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section, this part 327 sets forth the rules for:
    (i) The time and manner of filing certified statements by insured 
depository institutions;
    (ii) The time and manner of payment of assessments by such 
institutions;
    (iii) The payment of assessments by depository institutions whose 
insured status has terminated;
    (iv) The classification of depository institutions for risk; and
    (v) The processes for review of assessments.
    (2) Deductions from the assessment base of an insured branch of a 
foreign bank are stated in subpart B part 347 of this chapter.



Sec. 327.2  Certified statements.

    (a) Required. (1) The certified statement shall also be known as the 
quarterly certified statement invoice. Each insured depository 
institution shall file and certify its quarterly certified statement 
invoice in the manner and form set forth in this section.
    (2) The quarterly certified statement invoice shall reflect the 
institution's risk assignment, assessment base, assessment computation, 
and assessment amount, for each quarterly assessment period.
    (b) Availability and access. (1) The Corporation shall make 
available to each insured depository institution via the FDIC's e-
business Web site FDICconnect a quarterly certified statement invoice 
each assessment period.
    (2) Insured depository institutions shall access their quarterly 
certified statement invoices via FDICconnect, unless the FDIC provides 
notice to insured depository institutions of a successor system. In the 
event of a contingency, the FDIC may employ an alternative means of 
delivering the quarterly certified statement invoices. A quarterly 
certified statement invoice delivered by any alternative means will be 
treated as if it had been downloaded from FDICconnect.
    (3) Institutions that do not have Internet access may request a 
renewable one-year exemption from the requirement that quarterly 
certified statement invoices be accessed through FDICconnect. Any 
exemption request must be submitted in writing to the Manager of the 
Assessments Section.
    (4) Each assessment period, the FDIC will provide courtesy e-mail 
notification to insured depository institutions indicating that new 
quarterly certified statement invoices are available and may be accessed 
on FDICconnect. E-mail notification will be sent to all individuals with 
FDICconnect access to quarterly certified statement invoices.
    (5) E-mail notification may be used by the FDIC to communicate with 
insured depository institutions regarding quarterly certified statement 
invoices and other assessment-related matters.

[[Page 532]]

    (c) Review by institution. The president of each insured depository 
institution, or such other officer as the institution's president or 
board of directors or trustees may designate, shall review the 
information shown on each quarterly certified statement invoice.
    (d) Retention by institution. If the appropriate officer of the 
insured depository institution agrees that, to the best of his or her 
knowledge and belief, the information shown on the quarterly certified 
statement invoice is true, correct, and complete and in accordance with 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act and the regulations issued under it, 
the institution shall pay the amount specified on the quarterly 
certified statement invoice and shall retain it in the institution's 
files for three years as specified in section 7(b)(4) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act.
    (e) Amendment by institution. If the appropriate officer of the 
insured depository institution determines that, to the best of his or 
her knowledge and belief, the information shown on the quarterly 
certified statement invoice is not true, correct, and complete and in 
accordance with the Federal Deposit Insurance Act and the regulations 
issued under it, the institution shall pay the amount specified on the 
quarterly certified statement invoice, and may:
    (1) Amend its report of condition, or other similar report, to 
correct any data believed to be inaccurate on the quarterly certified 
statement invoice; amendments to such reports timely filed under section 
7(g) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act but not permitted to be made 
by an institution's primary federal regulator may be filed with the FDIC 
for consideration in determining deposit insurance assessments; or
    (2) Amend and sign its quarterly certified statement invoice to 
correct a calculation believed to be inaccurate and return it to the 
FDIC by the applicable payment date specified in Sec. 327.3(b)(2).
    (f) Certification. Data used by the Corporation to complete the 
quarterly certified statement invoice has been previously attested to by 
the institution in its reports of condition, or other similar reports, 
filed with the institution's primary federal regulator. When an insured 
institution pays the amount shown on the quarterly certified statement 
invoice and does not correct that invoice as provided in paragraph (e) 
of this section, the information on that invoice shall be deemed true, 
correct, complete, and certified for purposes of paragraph (a) of this 
section and section 7(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (g) Requests for revision of assessment computation. (1) The timely 
filing of an amended report of condition or other similar report under 
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, or the timely filing of an amended 
quarterly certified statement invoice under paragraph (e)(2), that will 
result in a change to deposit insurance assessments owed or paid by an 
insured depository institution, shall be treated as a timely filed 
request for revision of computation of quarterly assessment payment 
under Sec. 327.3(f).
    (2) The assessment rate on the quarterly certified statement invoice 
shall be amended only if it is inconsistent with the assessment risk 
assignment(s) provided to the institution by the Corporation for the 
assessment period in question pursuant to Sec. 327.4(a). Agreement with 
the assessment rate shall not be deemed to constitute agreement with the 
assessment risk assignment. An institution may request review of an 
assessment risk assignment it believes to be incorrect pursuant to 
Sec. 327.4(c).



Sec. 327.3  Payment of assessments.

    (a) Required--(1) In general. Each insured depository institution 
shall pay to the Corporation for each assessment period an assessment 
determined in accordance with this part 327.
    (2) Notice of designated deposit account. For the purpose of making 
such payments, each insured depository institution shall designate a 
deposit account for direct debit by the Corporation. No later than 30 
days prior to the next payment date specified in paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section, each institution shall provide notice to the Corporation 
via FDICconnect of the account designated, including all information and 
authorizations needed by the Corporation for direct debit of the 
account.

[[Page 533]]

After the initial notice of the designated account, no further notice is 
required unless the institution designates a different account for 
assessment debit by the Corporation, in which case the requirements of 
the preceding sentence apply.
    (3) Transition Rule for Financing Corporation (FICO) Payments. 
Quarterly FICO payments shall be collected by the FDIC without 
interruption during the assessment system transitional period in 2007. 
All insured depository institutions shall make scheduled quarterly FICO 
payments on January 2, 2007 (unless prepaid on December 30, 2006), and 
March 30, 2007, based upon, respectively, their September 30, 2006, and 
December 31, 2006 reported assessment bases, which shall be the final 
assessment bases calculated pursuant to 12 CFR 327.5(a) and (b) (2006). 
Simultaneous collection of deposit insurance assessments and FICO 
assessments will resume in June of 2007, based on the March 31, 2007 
reported assessment base.
    (b) Assessment payment--(1) Quarterly certified statement invoice. 
Starting with the first assessment period of 2007, no later than 15 days 
prior to the payment date specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, 
the Corporation will provide to each insured depository institution a 
quarterly certified statement invoice showing the amount of the 
assessment payment due from the institution for the prior quarter (net 
of credits or dividends, if any), and the computation of that amount. 
Subject to paragraph (e) of this section, the invoiced amount on the 
quarterly certified statement invoice shall be the product of the 
following: the assessment base of the institution for the prior quarter 
computed in accordance with Sec. 327.5 multiplied by the institution's 
rate for that prior quarter as assigned to the institution pursuant to 
Sec. 327.4(a) and Sec. 327.9 or Sec. 327.16.
    (2) Quarterly payment date and manner. The Corporation will cause 
the amount stated in the applicable quarterly certified statement 
invoice to be directly debited on the appropriate payment date from the 
deposit account designated by the insured depository institution for 
that purpose, as follows:
    (i) In the case of the assessment payment for the quarter that 
begins on January 1, the payment date is the following June 30;
    (ii) In the case of the assessment payment for the quarter that 
begins on April 1, the payment date is the following September 30;
    (iii) In the case of the assessment payment for the quarter that 
begins on July 1, the payment date is the following December 30; and
    (iv) In the case of the assessment payment for the quarter that 
begins on October 1, the payment date is the following March 30.
    (c) Necessary action, sufficient funding by institution. Each 
insured depository institution shall take all actions necessary to allow 
the Corporation to debit assessments from the insured depository 
institution's designated deposit account. Each insured depository 
institution shall, prior to each payment date indicated in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section, ensure that funds in an amount at least equal to 
the amount on the quarterly certified statement invoice are available in 
the designated account for direct debit by the Corporation. Failure to 
take any such action or to provide such funding of the account shall be 
deemed to constitute nonpayment of the assessment. Penalties for failure 
to timely pay assessments are provided for at 12 CFR 308.132(d)(9).
    (d) Business days. If a payment date specified in paragraph (b)(2) 
falls on a date that is not a business day, the applicable date shall be 
the previous business day.
    (e) Payment adjustments in succeeding quarters. Quarterly certified 
statement invoices provided by the Corporation may reflect adjustments, 
initiated by the Corporation or an institution, resulting from such 
factors as amendments to prior quarterly reports of condition, 
retroactive revision of the institution's assessment risk assignment, 
and revision of the Corporation's assessment computations for prior 
quarters.
    (f) Request for revision of computation of quarterly assessment 
payment--(1) In general. An institution may submit a written request for 
revision of the computation of the institution's quarterly

[[Page 534]]

assessment payment as shown on the quarterly certified statement invoice 
in the following circumstances:
    (i) The institution disagrees with the computation of the assessment 
base as stated on the quarterly certified statement invoice;
    (ii) The institution determines that the rate applied by the 
Corporation is inconsistent with the assessment risk assignment(s) 
provided to the institution in writing by the Corporation for the 
assessment period for which the payment is due; or
    (iii) The institution believes that the quarterly certified 
statement invoice does not fully or accurately reflect adjustments 
provided for in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (2) Inapplicability. This paragraph (f) is not applicable to 
requests for review of an institution's assessment risk assignment, 
which are covered by Sec. 327.4(c) of this part.
    (3) Requirements. Any such request for revision must be submitted 
within 90 days from the date the computation being challenged appears on 
the institution's quarterly certified statement invoice. The request for 
revision shall be submitted to the Manager of the Assessments Section 
and shall provide documentation sufficient to support the change sought 
by the institution. If additional information is requested by the 
Corporation, such information shall be provided by the institution 
within 21 days of the date of the request for additional information. 
Any institution submitting a timely request for revision will receive 
written notice from the Corporation regarding the outcome of its 
request. Upon completion of a review, the DOF Director (or designee) 
shall promptly notify the institution in writing of his or her 
determination of whether revision is warranted. If the institution 
requesting revision disagrees with that determination, it may appeal to 
the FDIC's Assessment Appeals Committee. Notice of the procedures 
applicable to appeals will be included with the written determination.
    (g) Quarterly certified statement invoice unavailable. Any 
institution whose quarterly certified statement invoice is unavailable 
on FDICconnect by the fifteenth day of the month in which the payment is 
due shall promptly notify the Corporation. Failure to provide prompt 
notice to the Corporation shall not affect the institution's obligation 
to make full and timely assessment payment. Unless otherwise directed by 
the Corporation, the institution shall preliminarily pay the amount 
shown on its quarterly certified statement invoice for the preceding 
assessment period, subject to subsequent correction.

[54 FR 51374, Dec. 15, 1989, as amended at 74 FR 9550, Mar. 4, 2009; 81 
FR 32201, May 20, 2016; 81 FR 42243, June 29, 2016]



Sec. 327.4  Assessment rates.

    (a) Assessment risk assignment. For the purpose of determining the 
annual assessment rate for insured depository institutions under 
Sec. 327.9 or Sec. 327.16 , each insured depository institution will be 
provided an assessment risk assignment. Notice of an institution's 
current assessment risk assignment will be provided to the institution 
with each quarterly certified statement invoice. Adjusted assessment 
risk assignments for prior periods may also be provided by the 
Corporation. Notice of the procedures applicable to reviews will be 
included with the notice of assessment risk assignment provided pursuant 
to paragraph (a) of this section.
    (b) Payment of assessment at rate assigned. Institutions shall make 
timely payment of assessments based on the assessment risk assignment in 
the notice provided to the institution pursuant to paragraph (a) of this 
section. Timely payment is required notwithstanding any request for 
review filed pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section. Assessment risk 
assignments remain in effect for future assessment periods until 
changed. If the risk assignment in the notice is subsequently changed, 
any excess assessment paid by the institution will be credited by the 
Corporation, with interest, and any additional assessment owed shall be 
paid by the institution, with interest, in the next assessment payment 
after such subsequent assignment or change. Interest payable under this 
paragraph shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 327.7.
    (c) Requests for review. An institution that believes any assessment 
risk assignment provided by the Corporation

[[Page 535]]

pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section is incorrect and seeks to 
change it must submit a written request for review of that risk 
assignment. An institution cannot request review through this process of 
the CAMELS ratings assigned by its primary federal regulator or 
challenge the appropriateness of any such rating; each federal regulator 
has established procedures for that purpose. An institution may also 
request review of a determination by the FDIC to assess the institution 
as a large, highly complex, or a small institution (Secs. 327.9(e)(3) 
and 327.16(f)(3)) or a determination by the FDIC that the institution is 
a new institution (Secs. 327.9(f)(5) and 327.16(g)(5)). Any request for 
review must be submitted within 90 days from the date the assessment 
risk assignment being challenged pursuant to paragraph (a) of this 
section appears on the institution's quarterly certified statement 
invoice. The request shall be submitted to the Corporation's Director of 
the Division of Insurance and Research in Washington, DC, and shall 
include documentation sufficient to support the change sought by the 
institution. If additional information is requested by the Corporation, 
such information shall be provided by the institution within 21 days of 
the date of the request for additional information. Any institution 
submitting a timely request for review will receive written notice from 
the Corporation regarding the outcome of its request. Upon completion of 
a review, the Director of the Division of Insurance and Research (or 
designee) or the Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer 
Protection (or designee) or any successor divisions, as appropriate, 
shall promptly notify the institution in writing of his or her 
determination of whether a change is warranted. If the institution 
requesting review disagrees with that determination, it may appeal to 
the FDIC's Assessment Appeals Committee. Notice of the procedures 
applicable to appeals will be included with the written determination.
    (d) Disclosure restrictions. The portion of an assessment risk 
assignment provided to an institution by the Corporation pursuant to 
paragraph (a) of this section that reflects any supervisory evaluation 
or confidential information is deemed to be exempt information within 
the scope of Sec. 309.5(g)(8) of this chapter and, accordingly, is 
governed by the disclosure restrictions set out at Sec. 309.6 of this 
chapter.
    (e) Limited use of assessment risk assignment. Any assessment risk 
assignment provided to a depository institution under this part 327 is 
for purposes of implementing and operating the FDIC's risk-based 
assessment system. Unless permitted by the Corporation or otherwise 
required by law, no institution may state in any advertisement or 
promotional material, or in any other public place or manner, the 
assessment risk assignment provided to it pursuant to this part.
    (f) Effective date for changes to risk assignment. Changes to an 
insured institution's risk assignment resulting from a supervisory 
ratings change become effective as of the date of written notification 
to the institution by its primary federal regulator or state authority 
of its supervisory rating (even when the CAMELS component ratings have 
not been disclosed to the institution), if the FDIC, after taking into 
account other information that could affect the rating, agrees with the 
rating. If the FDIC does not agree, the FDIC will notify the institution 
of the FDIC's supervisory rating; resulting changes to an insured 
institution's risk assignment become effective as of the date of written 
notification to the institution by the FDIC.
    (g) Designated Reserve Ratio. The designated reserve ratio for the 
Deposit Insurance Fund is 2 percent.

[71 FR 69277, 69326, Nov. 30, 2006, as amended at 75 FR 79293, Dec. 20, 
2010; 76 FR 10704, Feb. 25, 2011; 81 FR 32201, May 20, 2016]



Sec. 327.5  Assessment base.

    (a) Assessment base for all insured depository institutions. Except 
as provided in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, the 
assessment base for an insured depository institution shall equal the 
average consolidated total assets of the insured depository institution 
during the assessment period minus the average tangible equity of the 
insured depository institution during the assessment period.

[[Page 536]]

    (1) Average consolidated total assets defined and calculated. 
Average consolidated total assets are defined in the schedule of 
quarterly averages in the Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income, 
using either a daily averaging method or a weekly averaging method as 
described in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. The amounts 
to be reported as daily averages are the sum of the gross amounts of 
consolidated total assets for each calendar day during the quarter 
divided by the number of calendar days in the quarter. The amounts to be 
reported as weekly averages are the sum of the gross amounts of 
consolidated total assets for each Wednesday during the quarter divided 
by the number of Wednesdays in the quarter. For days that an office of 
the reporting institution (or any of its subsidiaries or branches) is 
closed (e.g., Saturdays, Sundays, or holidays), the amounts outstanding 
from the previous business day will be used. An office is considered 
closed if there are no transactions posted to the general ledger as of 
that date. For institutions that begin operating during the calendar 
quarter, the amounts to be reported as daily averages are the sum of the 
gross amounts of consolidated total assets for each calendar day the 
institution was operating during the quarter divided by the number of 
calendar days the institution was operating during the quarter.
    (i) Institutions that must report average consolidated total assets 
using a daily averaging method. All insured depository institutions that 
report $1 billion or more in quarter-end consolidated total assets on 
their March 31, 2011 Consolidated Report of Condition and Income or 
Thrift Financial Report (or successor report), and all institutions that 
become insured after March 31, 2011, shall report average consolidated 
total assets as of the close of business for each day of the calendar 
quarter.
    (ii) Institutions that may report average consolidated total assets 
using a weekly averaging method. All insured depository institutions 
that report less than $1 billion in quarter-end consolidated total 
assets on their March 31, 2011, Consolidated Report of Condition and 
Income or Thrift Financial Report may report average consolidated total 
assets as an average of the balances as of the close of business on each 
Wednesday during the calendar quarter, or may at any time opt 
permanently to report average consolidated total assets on a daily basis 
as set forth in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section. Once an institution 
that reports average consolidated total assets using a weekly average 
reports average consolidated total assets equal to or greater than $1 
billion for two consecutive quarters, it shall permanently report 
average consolidated total assets using daily averaging starting in the 
next quarter.
    (iii) Mergers and consolidations. The average calculation of the 
assets of the surviving or resulting institution in a merger or 
consolidation shall include the assets of all the merged or consolidated 
institutions for the days in the quarter prior to the merger or 
consolidation, whether reported by the daily or weekly method.
    (2) Average tangible equity defined and calculated. Tangible equity 
is defined as Tier 1 capital.
    (i) Calculation of average tangible equity. Except as provided in 
paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section, average tangible equity shall be 
calculated using monthly averaging. Monthly averaging means the average 
of the three month-end balances within the quarter.
    (ii) Alternate calculation of average tangible equity. Institutions 
that report less than $1 billion in quarter-end consolidated total 
assets on their March 31, 2011 Consolidated Reports of Condition and 
Income or Thrift Financial Reports may report average tangible equity 
using an end-of-quarter balance or may at any time opt permanently to 
report average tangible equity using a monthly average balance. An 
institution that reports average tangible equity using an end-of-quarter 
balance and reports average daily or weekly consolidated assets of $1 
billion or more for two consecutive quarters shall permanently report 
average tangible equity using monthly averaging starting in the next 
quarter. Newly insured institutions shall report using monthly 
averaging.
    (iii) Calculation of average tangible equity for the surviving 
institution in a

[[Page 537]]

merger or consolidation. For the surviving institution in a merger or 
consolidation, Tier 1 capital shall be calculated as if the merger 
occurred on the first day of the quarter in which the merger or 
consolidation occurred.
    (3) Consolidated subsidiaries--(i) Reporting for insured depository 
institutions with consolidated subsidiaries that are not insured 
depository institutions. For insured institutions with consolidated 
subsidiaries that are not insured depository institutions, assets, 
including assets eliminated in consolidation, shall be calculated using 
a daily or weekly averaging method, corresponding to the daily or weekly 
averaging requirement of the parent institution. The Consolidated 
Reports of Condition and Income instructions in effect for the quarter 
for which data is being reported shall govern calculation of the average 
amount of subsidiaries' assets, including those assets eliminated in 
consolidation. An insured depository institution that reports average 
tangible equity using a monthly averaging method and that has 
subsidiaries that are not insured depository institutions shall use 
monthly average reporting for the subsidiaries. The monthly average data 
for these subsidiaries, however, may be calculated for the current 
quarter or for the prior quarter consistent with the method used to 
report average consolidated total assets and in conformity with 
Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income requirements. Once the 
method of reporting the subsidiaries' assets and tangible equity is 
chosen, however (current quarter or prior quarter), insured depository 
institutions cannot change the reporting method from quarter to quarter. 
An institution that reports consolidated assets and tangible equity 
using data for the prior quarter may switch to concurrent reporting on a 
permanent basis.
    (ii) Reporting for insured depository institutions with consolidated 
insured depository subsidiaries. Insured depository institutions that 
consolidate with other insured depository institutions for financial 
reporting purposes shall report for the parent and for each subsidiary 
individually, daily average consolidated total assets or weekly average 
consolidated total assets, as appropriate under paragraph (a)(1)(i) or 
(ii) above, and tangible equity, without consolidating their insured 
depository institution subsidiaries into the calculations. Investments 
in insured depository institution subsidiaries should be included in 
total assets using the equity method of accounting.
    (b) Assessment base for banker's banks--(1) Bankers bank defined. A 
banker's bank for purposes of calculating deposit insurance assessments 
shall meet the definition of banker's bank as that term is used in 12 
U.S.C. 24. Banker's banks that have funds from government capital 
infusion programs (such as TARP and the Small Business Lending Fund), 
and stock owned by the FDIC resulting from banks failures, as well as 
non-bank-owned stock resulting from equity compensation programs, are 
not thereby excluded from the definition of banker's banks.
    (2) Self-certification. Institutions that meet the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall so certify to that effect each 
quarter on the Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income or Thrift 
Financial Report or successor report.
    (3) Assessment base calculation for banker's banks. A banker's bank 
shall pay deposit insurance assessments on its assessment base as 
calculated in paragraph (a) of this section provided that it conducts 50 
percent or more of its business with entities other than its parent 
holding company or entities other than those controlled (control has the 
same meaning as in section 3(w)(5) of the FDI Act) either directly or 
indirectly by its parent holding company. The assessment base will 
exclude the average (daily or weekly depending on how the institution 
calculates its average consolidated total assets) amount of reserve 
balances passed through to the Federal Reserve, the average amount of 
reserve balances held at the Federal Reserve for its own account 
(including all balances due from the Federal Reserve as described in the 
instructions to line 4 of Schedule RC-A of the Consolidated Report of 
Condition and Income as of December 31, 2010), and the average amount of 
the institution's federal funds sold, but in

[[Page 538]]

no case shall the amount excluded exceed the sum of the bank's average 
amount of total deposits of commercial banks and other depository 
institutions in the United States and the average amount of its federal 
funds purchased.
    (c) Assessment base for custodial banks--(1) Custodial bank defined. 
A custodial bank for purposes of calculating deposit insurance 
assessments shall be an insured depository institution with previous 
calendar-year trust assets (fiduciary and custody and safekeeping 
assets, as described in the instructions to Schedule RC-T of the 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income) of at least $50 billion or 
an insured depository institution that derived more than 50 percent of 
its total revenue (interest income plus non-interest income) from trust 
activity over the previous calendar year.
    (2) Assessment base calculation for custodial banks. A custodial 
bank shall pay deposit insurance assessments on its assessment base as 
calculated in paragraph (a) of this section, but the FDIC will exclude 
from that assessment base the daily or weekly average (depending on how 
the bank reports its average consolidated total assets) of all asset 
types described in the instructions to lines 1, 2, and 3 of Schedule RC 
of the Consolidated Report of Condition and Income with a standardized 
approach risk weight of 0 percent, regardless of maturity, plus 50 
percent of those asset types described in the instructions to lines 1, 
2, and 3 of Schedule RC of the Consolidated Report of Condition and 
Income, with a standardized approach risk-weight greater than 0 and up 
to and including 20 percent, regardless of maturity, subject to the 
limitation that the daily or weekly average (depending on how the bank 
reports its average consolidated total assets) value of all assets that 
serve as the basis for a deduction under this section cannot exceed the 
daily or weekly average value of those deposits that are classified as 
transaction accounts in the instructions to Schedule RC-E of the 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income and that are identified by 
the institution as being directly linked to a fiduciary or custodial and 
safekeeping account asset.
    (d) Assessment base for insured branches of foreign banks. Average 
consolidated total assets for an insured branch of a foreign bank are 
defined as total assets of the branch (including net due from related 
depository institutions) in accordance with the schedule of assets and 
liabilities in the Report of Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and 
Agencies of Foreign Banks as of the assessment period for which the 
assessment is being calculated, but measured using the definition for 
reporting total assets in the schedule of quarterly averages in the 
Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income, and calculated using the 
appropriate daily or weekly averaging method under paragraph (a)(1)(i) 
or (ii) of this section. Tangible equity for an insured branch of a 
foreign bank is eligible assets (determined in accordance with 
Sec. 347.210 of the FDIC's regulations) less the book value of 
liabilities (exclusive of liabilities due to the foreign bank's head 
office, other branches, agencies, offices, or wholly owned subsidiaries) 
calculated on a monthly or end-of-quarter basis, according to the 
branch's size.
    (e) Newly insured institutions. A newly insured institution shall 
pay an assessment for the assessment period during which it became 
insured. The FDIC will prorate the newly insured institution's 
assessment amount to reflect the number of days it was insured during 
the period.

[76 FR 10704, Feb. 25, 2011, as amended at 79 FR 70437, Nov. 26, 2014]



Sec. 327.6  Mergers and consolidations; other terminations of 
insurance.

    (a) Final quarterly certified invoice for acquired institution. An 
institution that is not the resulting or surviving institution in a 
merger or consolidation must file a report of condition for every 
assessment period prior to the assessment period in which the merger or 
consolidation occurs. The surviving or resulting institution shall be 
responsible for ensuring that these reports of condition are filed and 
shall be liable for any unpaid assessments on the part of the 
institution that is not the resulting or surviving institution.
    (b) Assessment for quarter in which the merger or consolidation 
occurs. For an

[[Page 539]]

assessment period in which a merger or consolidation occurs, 
consolidated total assets for the surviving or resulting institution 
shall include the consolidated total assets of all insured depository 
institutions that are parties to the merger or consolidation as if the 
merger or consolidation occurred on the first day of the assessment 
period. Tier 1 capital shall be reported in the same manner.
    (c) Other termination. When the insured status of an institution is 
terminated, and the deposit liabilities of such institution are not 
assumed by another insured depository institution--
    (1) Payment of assessments; quarterly certified statement invoices. 
The depository institution whose insured status is terminating shall 
continue to file and certify its quarterly certified statement invoice 
and pay assessments for the assessment period its deposits are insured. 
Such institution shall not be required to certify its quarterly 
certified statement invoice and pay further assessments after it has 
paid in full its deposit liabilities and the assessment to the 
Corporation required to be paid for the assessment period in which its 
deposit liabilities are paid in full, and after it, under applicable 
law, goes out of business or transfers all or substantially all of its 
assets and liabilities to other institutions or otherwise ceases to be 
obliged to pay subsequent assessments.
    (2) Payment of deposits; certification to Corporation. When the 
deposit liabilities of the depository institution have been paid in 
full, the depository institution shall certify to the Corporation that 
the deposit liabilities have been paid in full and give the date of the 
final payment. When the depository institution has unclaimed deposits, 
the certification shall further state the amount of the unclaimed 
deposits and the disposition made of the funds to be held to meet the 
claims. For assessment purposes, the following will be considered as 
payment of the unclaimed deposits:
    (i) The transfer of cash funds in an amount sufficient to pay the 
unclaimed and unpaid deposits to the public official authorized by law 
to receive the same; or
    (ii) If no law provides for the transfer of funds to a public 
official, the transfer of cash funds or compensatory assets to an 
insured depository institution in an amount sufficient to pay the 
unclaimed and unpaid deposits in consideration for the assumption of the 
deposit obligations by the insured depository institution.
    (3) Notice to depositors. (i) The depository institution whose 
insured status is terminating shall give sufficient advance notice of 
the intended transfer to the owners of the unclaimed deposits to enable 
the depositors to obtain their deposits prior to the transfer. The 
notice shall be mailed to each depositor and shall be published in a 
local newspaper of general circulation. The notice shall advise the 
depositors of the liquidation of the depository institution, request 
them to call for and accept payment of their deposits, and state the 
disposition to be made of their deposits if they fail to promptly claim 
the deposits.
    (ii) If the unclaimed and unpaid deposits are disposed of as 
provided in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section, a certified copy of the 
public official's receipt issued for the funds shall be furnished to the 
Corporation.
    (iii) If the unclaimed and unpaid deposits are disposed of as 
provided in paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, an affidavit of the 
publication and of the mailing of the notice to the depositors, together 
with a copy of the notice and a certified copy of the contract of 
assumption, shall be furnished to the Corporation.
    (4) Notice to Corporation. The depository institution whose insured 
status is terminating shall advise the Corporation of the date on which 
it goes out of business or transfers all or substantially all of its 
assets and liabilities to other institutions or otherwise ceases to be 
obligated to pay subsequent assessments and the method whereby the 
termination has been effected.
    (d) Resumption of insured status before insurance of deposits 
ceases. If a depository institution whose insured status has been 
terminated is permitted by the Corporation to continue or resume its 
status as an insured depository institution before the insurance of its 
deposits has ceased, the institution will

[[Page 540]]

be deemed, for assessment purposes, to continue as an insured depository 
institution and must thereafter file and certify its quarterly certified 
statement invoices and pay assessments as though its insured status had 
not been terminated. The procedure for applying for the continuance or 
resumption of insured status is set forth in Sec. 303.248 of this 
chapter.

[76 FR 10706, Feb. 25, 2011]



Sec. 327.7  Payment of interest on assessment underpayments and 
overpayments.

    (a) Payment of interest--(1) Payment by institutions. Each insured 
depository institution shall pay interest to the Corporation on any 
underpayment of the institution's assessment.
    (2) Payment by Corporation. The Corporation will pay interest on any 
overpayment by the institution of its assessment.
    (3) Accrual of interest. (i) Interest on an amount owed to or by the 
Corporation for the underpayment or overpayment of an assessment shall 
accrue interest at the relevant interest rate.
    (ii) Interest on an amount specified in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this 
section shall begin to accrue on the day following the regular payment 
date, as provided for in Sec. 327.3(b)(2), for the amount so overpaid or 
underpaid, provided, however, that interest shall not begin to accrue on 
any overpayment until the day following the date such overpayment was 
received by the Corporation. Interest shall continue to accrue through 
the date on which the overpayment or underpayment (together with any 
interest thereon) is discharged.
    (iii) The relevant interest rate shall be redetermined for each 
quarterly assessment interval. A quarterly assessment interval begins on 
the day following a regular payment date, as specified in 
Sec. 327.3(b)(2), and ends on the immediately following regular payment 
date.
    (b) Interest rates. (1) The relevant interest rate for a quarterly 
assessment interval that includes the month of January, April, July, and 
October, respectively, is the coupon equivalent yield of the average 
discount rate set on the 3-month Treasury bill at the last auction held 
by the United States Treasury Department during the preceding December, 
March, June, and September, respectively.
    (2) The relevant interest rate for a quarterly assessment interval 
will apply to any amounts overpaid or underpaid on the payment date 
immediately prior to the beginning of the quarterly assessment interval. 
The relevant interest rate will also apply to any amounts owed for 
previous overpayments or underpayments (including any interest thereon) 
that remain outstanding, after any adjustments to such overpayments or 
underpayments have been made thereon, at the end of the regular payment 
date immediately prior to the beginning of the quarterly assessment 
interval. Interest will be compounded daily.



Sec. 327.8  Definitions.

    For the purpose of this part 327:
    (a) Deposits. The term deposit has the meaning specified in section 
3(l) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (b) Quarterly report of condition. The term quarterly report of 
condition means a report required to be filed pursuant to section 
7(a)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (c) Assessment period--In general. The term assessment period means 
a period beginning on January 1 of any calendar year and ending on March 
31 of the same year, or a period beginning on April 1 of any calendar 
year and ending on June 30 of the same year; or a period beginning on 
July 1 of any calendar year and ending on September 30 of the same year; 
or a period beginning on October 1 of any calendar year and ending on 
December 31 of the same year.
    (d) Acquiring institution. The term acquiring institution means an 
insured depository institution that assumes some or all of the deposits 
of another insured depository institution in a terminating transfer.
    (e) Small institution. An insured depository institution with assets 
of less than $10 billion as of December 31, 2006, and an insured branch 
of a foreign institution shall be classified as a small institution. If, 
after December 31, 2006, an institution classified as large under 
paragraph (f) of this section (other than an institution classified as 
large

[[Page 541]]

for purposes of Secs. 327.9(e) and 327.16(f)) reports assets of less 
than $10 billion in its quarterly reports of condition for four 
consecutive quarters, the FDIC will reclassify the institution as small 
beginning the following quarter.
    (f) Large institution. An institution classified as large for 
purposes of Secs. 327.9(e) and 327.16(f) or an insured depository 
institution with assets of $10 billion or more as of December 31, 2006 
(other than an insured branch of a foreign bank or a highly complex 
institution) shall be classified as a large institution. If, after 
December 31, 2006, an institution classified as small under paragraph 
(e) of this section reports assets of $10 billion or more in its 
quarterly reports of condition for four consecutive quarters, the FDIC 
will reclassify the institution as large beginning the following 
quarter.
    (g) Highly complex institution. (1) A highly complex institution is:
    (i) An insured depository institution (excluding a credit card bank) 
that has had $50 billion or more in total assets for at least four 
consecutive quarters that is controlled by a U.S. parent holding company 
that has had $500 billion or more in total assets for four consecutive 
quarters, or controlled by one or more intermediate U.S. parent holding 
companies that are controlled by a U.S. holding company that has had 
$500 billion or more in assets for four consecutive quarters; or
    (ii) A processing bank or trust company.
    (2) Control has the same meaning as in section 3(w)(5) of the FDI 
Act. A U.S. parent holding company is a parent holding company 
incorporated or organized under the laws of the United States or any 
State, as the term ``State'' is defined in section 3(a)(3) of the FDI 
Act. If, after December 31, 2010, an institution classified as highly 
complex under paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section falls below $50 
billion in total assets in its quarterly reports of condition for four 
consecutive quarters, or its parent holding company or companies fall 
below $500 billion in total assets for four consecutive quarters, the 
FDIC will reclassify the institution beginning the following quarter. 
If, after December 31, 2010, an institution classified as highly complex 
under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section falls below $10 billion in 
total assets for four consecutive quarters, the FDIC will reclassify the 
institution beginning the following quarter.
    (h) CAMELS composite and CAMELS component ratings. The terms CAMELS 
composite ratings and CAMELS component ratings shall have the same 
meaning as in the Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System as 
published by the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council.
    (i) ROCA supervisory ratings. ROCA supervisory ratings rate risk 
management, operational controls, compliance, and asset quality.
    (j) New depository institution. A new insured depository institution 
is a bank or savings association that has been federally insured for 
less than five years as of the last day of any quarter for which it is 
being assessed.
    (k) Established depository institution. An established insured 
depository institution is a bank or savings association that has been 
federally insured for at least five years as of the last day of any 
quarter for which it is being assessed.
    (1) Merger or consolidation involving new and established 
institution(s). Subject to paragraphs (k)(2), (3), (4), and (5) of this 
section and Secs. 327.9(f)(3) and (4) and 327.16 (g)(3) and (4), when an 
established institution merges into or consolidates with a new 
institution, the resulting institution is a new institution unless:
    (i) The assets of the established institution, as reported in its 
report of condition for the quarter ending immediately before the 
merger, exceeded the assets of the new institution, as reported in its 
report of condition for the quarter ending immediately before the 
merger; and
    (ii) Substantially all of the management of the established 
institution continued as management of the resulting or surviving 
institution.
    (2) Consolidation involving established institutions. When 
established institutions consolidate, the resulting institution is an 
established institution.
    (3) Grandfather exception. If a new institution merges into an 
established institution, and the merger agreement was entered into on or 
before July 11,

[[Page 542]]

2006, the resulting institution shall be deemed to be an established 
institution for purposes of this part.
    (4) Subsidiary exception. Subject to paragraph (k)(5) of this 
section, a new institution will be considered established if it is a 
wholly owned subsidiary of:
    (i) A company that is a bank holding company under the Bank Holding 
Company Act of 1956 or a savings and loan holding company under the Home 
Owners' Loan Act, and:
    (A) At least one eligible depository institution (as defined in 12 
CFR 303.2(r)) that is owned by the holding company has been chartered as 
a bank or savings association for at least five years as of the date 
that the otherwise new institution was established; and
    (B) The holding company has a composite rating of at least ``2'' for 
bank holding companies or an above average or ``A'' rating for savings 
and loan holding companies and at least 75 percent of its insured 
depository institution assets are assets of eligible depository 
institutions, as defined in 12 CFR 303.2(r); or
    (ii) An eligible depository institution, as defined in 12 CFR 
303.2(r), that has been chartered as a bank or savings association for 
at least five years as of the date that the otherwise new institution 
was established.
    (5) Effect of credit union conversion. In determining whether an 
insured depository institution is new or established, the FDIC will 
include any period of time that the institution was a federally insured 
credit union.
    (l) Risk assignment. Under Sec. 327.9, for all small institutions 
and insured branches of foreign banks, risk assignment includes 
assignment to Risk Category I, II, III, or IV and, within Risk Category 
I, assignment to an assessment rate. Under Sec. 327.16, for all new 
small institutions and insured branches of foreign banks, risk 
assignment includes assignment to Risk Category I, II, III, or IV, and 
for insured branches of foreign banks within Risk Category I, assignment 
to an assessment rate or rates. For all established small institutions, 
and all large institutions and all highly complex institutions, risk 
assignment includes assignment to an assessment rate.
    (m) Unsecured debt--For purposes of the unsecured debt adjustment as 
set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(1) and 327.16(e)(1) and the depository 
institution debt adjustment as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(2) and 
327.16(e)(2), unsecured debt shall include senior unsecured liabilities 
and subordinated debt.
    (n) Senior unsecured liability--For purposes of the unsecured debt 
adjustment as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(1) and 327.16(e)(1) and the 
depository institution debt adjustment as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(2) 
and 327.16(e)(2), senior unsecured liabilities shall be the unsecured 
portion of other borrowed money as defined in the quarterly report of 
condition for the reporting period as defined in paragraph (b) of this 
section, but shall not include any senior unsecured debt that the FDIC 
has guaranteed under the Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program, 12 CFR 
part 370.
    (o) Subordinated debt--For purposes of the unsecured debt adjustment 
as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(1) and 327.16(e)(1) and the depository 
institution debt adjustment as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(2) and 
327.16(e)(2), subordinated debt shall be as defined in the quarterly 
report of condition for the reporting period; however, subordinated debt 
shall also include limited-life preferred stock as defined in the 
quarterly report of condition for the reporting period.
    (p) Long-term unsecured debt--For purposes of the unsecured debt 
adjustment as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(1) and 327.16(e)(1)and the 
depository institution debt adjustment as set forth in Secs. 327.9(d)(2) 
and 327.16(e)(2), long-term unsecured debt shall be unsecured debt with 
at least one year remaining until maturity; however, any such debt where 
the holder of the debt has a redemption option that is exercisable 
within one year of the reporting date shall not be deemed long-term 
unsecured debt.
    (q) Reciprocal deposits--Deposits that an insured depository 
institution receives through a deposit placement network on a reciprocal 
basis, such that: (1) for any deposit received, the institution (as 
agent for depositors) places the same amount with other insured 
depository institutions through the network; and (2) each member of the 
network sets the interest rate to be

[[Page 543]]

paid on the entire amount of funds it places with other network members.
    (r) Parent holding company--A parent holding company has the same 
meaning as ``depository institution holding company,'' as defined in 
Sec. 3(w) of the FDI Act.
    (s) Processing bank or trust company--A processing bank or trust 
company is an institution whose last three years' non-lending interest 
income, fiduciary revenues, and investment banking fees, combined, 
exceed 50 percent of total revenues (and its last three years fiduciary 
revenues are non-zero), and whose total fiduciary assets total $500 
billion or more, and whose total assets for at least four consecutive 
quarters have been $10 billion or more.
    (t) Credit card bank--A credit card bank is a bank for which credit 
card receivables plus securitized receivables exceed 50 percent of 
assets plus securitized receivables.
    (u) Control--Control has the same meaning as in section 2 of the 
Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, 12 U.S.C. 1841(a)(2).
    (v) Established small institution. An established small institution 
is a ``small institution'' as defined under paragraph (e) of this 
section that meets the definition of ``established depository 
institution'' under paragraph (k) of this section.
    (w) New small institution. A new small institution is a ``small 
institution'' as defined under paragraph (e) of this section that meets 
the definition of ``new depository institution'' under paragraph (j) of 
this section.
    (x) Deposit Insurance Fund and DIF. The Deposit Insurance Fund as 
defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813(y)(1).
    (y) Reserve ratio of the DIF. The reserve ratio as defined in 12 
U.S.C. 1813(y)(3).

[54 FR 51374, Dec. 15, 1989, as amended at 74 FR 9551, Mar. 4, 2009; 76 
FR 10707, Feb. 25, 2011; 81 FR 32201, May 20, 2016]



Sec. 327.9  Assessment pricing methods.

     The following pricing methods shall apply through the later of June 
30, 2016, or the subsequent calendar quarter in which the reserve ratio 
of the DIF reaches 1.15 percent.
    (a) Small institutions--(1) Risk Categories. Each small insured 
depository institution shall be assigned to one of the following four 
Risk Categories based upon the institution's capital evaluation and 
supervisory evaluation as defined in this section.
    (i) Risk Category I. Small institutions in Supervisory Group A that 
are Well Capitalized will be assigned to Risk Category I.
    (ii) Risk Category II. Small institutions in Supervisory Group A 
that are Adequately Capitalized, and small institutions in Supervisory 
Group B that are either Well Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized will 
be assigned to Risk Category II.
    (iii) Risk Category III. Small institutions in Supervisory Groups A 
and B that are Undercapitalized, and small institutions in Supervisory 
Group C that are Well Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized will be 
assigned to Risk Category III.
    (iv) Risk Category IV. Small institutions in Supervisory Group C 
that are Undercapitalized will be assigned to Risk Category IV.
    (2) Capital evaluations. Each small institution will receive one of 
the following three capital evaluations on the basis of data reported in 
the institution's Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income or Thrift 
Financial Report (or successor report, as appropriate) dated as of March 
31 for the assessment period beginning the preceding January 1; dated as 
of June 30 for the assessment period beginning the preceding April 1; 
dated as of September 30 for the assessment period beginning the 
preceding July 1; and dated as of December 31 for the assessment period 
beginning the preceding October 1.
    (i) Well Capitalized. A Well Capitalized institution is one that 
satisfies each of the following capital ratio standards: Total risk-
based capital ratio, 10.0 percent or greater; tier 1 risk-based capital 
ratio, 8.0 percent or greater; leverage ratio, 5.0 percent or greater; 
common equity tier 1 capital ratio, 6.5 percent or greater; and, if the 
institution is an insured depository institution subject to the enhanced 
supplementary leverage ratio standards under 12 CFR 6.4(c)(1)(iv)(B), 12 
CFR 208.43(c)(2)(iv)(B), or 12 CFR

[[Page 544]]

324.403(b)(1)(v), as each may be amended from time to time, a 
supplementary leverage ratio of 6.0 percent or greater.
    (ii) Adequately Capitalized. An Adequately Capitalized institution 
is one that does not satisfy the standards of Well Capitalized in 
paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section but satisfies each of the following 
capital ratio standards: Total risk-based capital ratio, 8.0 percent or 
greater; tier 1 risk-based capital ratio, 6.0 percent or greater; 
leverage ratio, 4.0 percent or greater; common equity tier 1 capital 
ratio, 4.5 percent or greater; and, if the institution is subject to the 
advanced approaches risk-based capital rules under 12 CFR 
6.4(c)(2)(iv)(B), 12 CFR 208.43(c)(2)(iv)(B), or 12 CFR 
324.403(b)(2)(vi), as each may be amended from time to time, a 
supplementary leverage ratio of 3.0 percent or greater.
    (iii) Undercapitalized. An undercapitalized institution is one that 
does not qualify as either Well Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized 
under paragraphs (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (3) Supervisory evaluations. Each small institution will be assigned 
to one of three Supervisory Groups based on the Corporation's 
consideration of supervisory evaluations provided by the institution's 
primary federal regulator. The supervisory evaluations include the 
results of examination findings by the primary federal regulator, as 
well as other information that the primary federal regulator determines 
to be relevant. In addition, the Corporation will take into 
consideration such other information (such as state examination 
findings, as appropriate) as it determines to be relevant to the 
institution's financial condition and the risk posed to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund. The three Supervisory Groups are:
    (i) Supervisory Group ``A.'' This Supervisory Group consists of 
financially sound institutions with only a few minor weaknesses;
    (ii) Supervisory Group ``B.'' This Supervisory Group consists of 
institutions that demonstrate weaknesses which, if not corrected, could 
result in significant deterioration of the institution and increased 
risk of loss to the Deposit Insurance Fund; and
    (iii) Supervisory Group ``C.'' This Supervisory Group consists of 
institutions that pose a substantial probability of loss to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund unless effective corrective action is taken.
    (4) Financial ratios method. A small insured depository institution 
in Risk Category I shall have its initial base assessment rate 
determined using the financial ratios method.
    (i) Under the financial ratios method, each of six financial ratios 
and a weighted average of CAMELS component ratings will be multiplied by 
a corresponding pricing multiplier. The sum of these products will be 
added to a uniform amount. The resulting sum shall equal the 
institution's initial base assessment rate; provided, however, that no 
institution's initial base assessment rate shall be less than the 
minimum initial base assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I 
institutions for that quarter nor greater than the maximum initial base 
assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I institutions for that 
quarter. An institution's initial base assessment rate, subject to 
adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (d)(1), (2), and (3) of this section, 
as appropriate (resulting in the institution's total base assessment 
rate, which in no case can be lower than 50 percent of the institution's 
initial base assessment rate), and adjusted for the actual assessment 
rates set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f), will equal an institution's 
assessment rate. The six financial ratios are: Leverage ratio; Loans 
past due 30-89 days/gross assets; Nonperforming assets/gross assets; Net 
loan charge-offs/gross assets; Net income before taxes/risk-weighted 
assets; and the Adjusted brokered deposit ratio. The ratios are defined 
in Table A.1 of Appendix A to this subpart. The ratios will be 
determined for an assessment period based upon information contained in 
an institution's report of condition filed as of the last day of the 
assessment period as set out in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. The 
weighted average of CAMELS component ratings is created by multiplying 
each component by the following percentages and adding the products: 
Capital adequacy--25%, Asset quality--20%, Management--25%, Earnings--
10%, Liquidity--10%, and Sensitivity to market risk--10%. The following 
table sets

[[Page 545]]

forth the initial values of the pricing multipliers:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Pricing
                     Risk measures *                      multipliers **
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio..........................................      (0.056)
Loans Past Due 30-89 Days/Gross Assets..................        0.575
Nonperforming Assets/Gross Assets.......................        1.074
Net Loan Charge-Offs/Gross Assets.......................        1.210
Net Income before Taxes/Risk-Weighted Assets............      (0.764)
Adjusted brokered deposit ratio.........................        0.065
Weighted Average CAMELS Component Rating................        1.095
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Ratios are expressed as percentages.
** Multipliers are rounded to three decimal places.

    (ii) The six financial ratios and the weighted average CAMELS 
component rating will be multiplied by the respective pricing 
multiplier, and the products will be summed. To this result will be 
added the uniform amount. The resulting sum shall equal the 
institution's initial base assessment rate; provided, however, that no 
institution's initial base assessment rate shall be less than the 
minimum initial base assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I 
institutions for that quarter nor greater than the maximum initial base 
assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I institutions for that 
quarter.
    (iii) Uniform amount and pricing multipliers. Except as adjusted for 
the actual assessment rates set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f), the 
uniform amount shall be:
    (A) 4.861 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(a) is in effect;
    (B) 2.861 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(b) is in effect;
    (C) 1.861 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(c) is in effect; or
    (D) 0.861 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(d) is in effect.
    (iv) Implementation of CAMELS rating changes--(A) Changes between 
risk categories. If, during a quarter, a CAMELS composite rating change 
occurs that results in a Risk Category I institution moving from Risk 
Category I to Risk Category II, III or IV, the institution's initial 
base assessment rate for the portion of the quarter that it was in Risk 
Category I shall be determined using the supervisory ratings in effect 
before the change and the financial ratios as of the end of the quarter, 
subject to adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (d)(1), (2), and (3) of 
this section, as appropriate, and adjusted for the actual assessment 
rates set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f). For the portion of the 
quarter that the institution was not in Risk Category I, the 
institution's initial base assessment rate, which shall be subject to 
adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (d)(1), (2), and (3), shall be 
determined under the assessment schedule for the appropriate Risk 
Category. If, during a quarter, a CAMELS composite rating change occurs 
that results in an institution moving from Risk Category II, III or IV 
to Risk Category I, then the financial ratios method shall apply for the 
portion of the quarter that it was in Risk Category I, subject to 
adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (d)(1), (2) and (3) of this section, 
as appropriate, and adjusted for the actual assessment rates set by the 
Board under Sec. 327.10(f). For the portion of the quarter that the 
institution was not in Risk Category I, the institution's initial base 
assessment rate, which shall be subject to adjustment pursuant to 
paragraphs (d)(1), (2), and (3) of this section shall be determined 
under the assessment schedule for the appropriate Risk Category.
    (B) Changes within Risk Category I. If, during a quarter, an 
institution's CAMELS component ratings change in a way that will change 
the institution's initial base assessment rate within Risk Category I, 
the initial base assessment rate for the period before the change shall 
be determined under the financial ratios method using the CAMELS 
component ratings in effect before the change, subject to adjustment 
pursuant to paragraphs (d)(1), (2), and (3) of this section, as 
appropriate. Beginning on the date of the CAMELS component ratings 
change, the initial base assessment rate for the remainder of the 
quarter shall be determined using the CAMELS component ratings in effect 
after the change, again subject to adjustment pursuant to paragraphs 
(d)(1), (2), and (3) of this section, as appropriate.
    (b) Large and Highly Complex institutions--(1) Assessment scorecard 
for large institutions (other than highly complex institutions). (i) A 
large institution

[[Page 546]]

other than a highly complex institution shall have its initial base 
assessment rate determined using the scorecard for large institutions.

                    Scorecard for Large Institutions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Measure   Component
                         Scorecard measures and      weights    weights
                               components           (percent)  (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
P..................  Performance Score
P.1................  Weighted Average CAMELS           100         30
                      Rating.
P.2................  Ability to Withstand Asset-                   50
                      Related Stress.
                       Leverage ratio.............      10
                       Concentration Measure......      35
                       Core Earnings/Average            20
                      Quarter-End Total Assets *.
                       Credit Quality Measure.....      35
P.3................  Ability to Withstand Funding-                 20
                      Related Stress.
                       Core Deposits/Total              60
                      Liabilities.
                       Balance Sheet Liquidity          40
                      Ratio.
L..................  Loss Severity Score..........
L.1................  Loss Severity Measure........                100
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Average of five quarter-end total assets (most recent and four prior
  quarters)

    (ii) The scorecard for large institutions produces two scores: 
performance score and loss severity score.
    (A) Performance score for large institutions. The performance score 
for large institutions is a weighted average of the scores for three 
measures: the weighted average CAMELS rating score, weighted at 30 
percent; the ability to withstand asset-related stress score, weighted 
at 50 percent; and the ability to withstand funding-related stress 
score, weighted at 20 percent.
    (1) Weighted average CAMELS rating score. (i) To compute the 
weighted average CAMELS rating score, a weighted average of an 
institution's CAMELS component ratings is calculated using the following 
weights:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25FE11.006

    (ii) A weighted average CAMELS rating converts to a score that 
ranges from 25 to 100. A weighted average rating of 1 equals a score of 
25 and a weighted average of 3.5 or greater equals a score of 100. 
Weighted average CAMELS ratings between 1 and 3.5 are assigned a score 
between 25 and 100. The score increases at an increasing rate as the 
weighted average CAMELS rating increases. Appendix B of this subpart 
describes the conversion of a weighted average CAMELS rating to a score.
    (2) Ability to withstand asset-related stress score. (i) The ability 
to withstand asset-related stress score is a weighted average of the 
scores for four measures: Leverage ratio; concentration measure; the 
ratio of core earnings to average quarter-end total assets; and the 
credit quality measure. Appendices A and C of this subpart define these 
measures.
    (ii) The Leverage ratio and the ratio of core earnings to average 
quarter-end total assets are described in appendix A and the method of 
calculating the scores is described in appendix C of this subpart.
    (iii) The score for the concentration measure is the greater of the 
higher-

[[Page 547]]

risk assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or the growth-adjusted 
portfolio concentrations score. Both ratios are described in appendix C.
    (iv) The score for the credit quality measure is the greater of the 
criticized and classified items to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or 
the underperforming assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves score.
    (v) The following table shows the cutoff values and weights for the 
measures used to calculate the ability to withstand asset-related stress 
score. Appendix B of this subpart describes how each measure is 
converted to a score between 0 and 100 based upon the minimum and 
maximum cutoff values, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a 
score of 100 reflects the highest risk.

Cutoff Values and Weights for Measures To Calculate Ability To Withstand
                       Asset-Related Stress Score
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Cutoff values
Measures of the ability to withstand ------------------------   Weights
        asset-related stress            Minimum     Maximum    (percent)
                                       (percent)   (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio......................           6          13          10
Concentration Measure...............  ..........  ..........          35
    Higher-Risk Assets to Tier 1               0         135
     Capital and Reserves; or.......
    Growth-Adjusted Portfolio                  4          56
     Concentrations.................
Core Earnings/Average Quarter-End              0           2          20
 Total Assets *.....................
Credit Quality Measure..............  ..........  ..........          35
    Criticized and Classified Items/           7         100
     Tier 1 Capital and Reserves; or
    Underperforming Assets/Tier 1              2          35
     Capital and Reserves...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Average of five quarter-end total assets (most recent and four prior
  quarters).

    (vi) The score for each measure in the table in paragraph 
(b)(1)(ii)(A)(2)(v) is multiplied by its respective weight and the 
resulting weighted score is summed to arrive at the score for an ability 
to withstand asset-related stress, which can range from 0 to 100, where 
a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a score of 100 reflects the 
highest risk.
    (3) Ability to withstand funding-related stress score. Two measures 
are used to compute the ability to withstand funding-related stress 
score: a core deposits to total liabilities ratio, and a balance sheet 
liquidity ratio. Appendix A of this subpart describes these measures. 
Appendix B of this subpart describes how these measures are converted to 
a score between 0 and 100, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk 
and a score of 100 reflects the highest risk. The ability to withstand 
funding-related stress score is the weighted average of the scores for 
the two measures. In the following table, cutoff values and weights are 
used to derive an institution's ability to withstand funding-related 
stress score:

  Cutoff Values and Weights To Calculate Ability To Withstand Funding-
                          Related Stress Score
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Cutoff values
Measures of the ability to withstand ------------------------   Weights
       funding-related stress           Minimum     Maximum    (percent)
                                       (percent)   (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Deposits/Total Liabilities.....           5          87          60
Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio.......           7         243          40
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Calculation of Performance Score. In paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A)(3), 
the scores for the weighted average CAMELS rating, the ability to 
withstand asset-related stress, and the ability to withstand funding-
related stress are multiplied by their respective weights (30 percent, 
50 percent and 20 percent, respectively) and the results are summed to 
arrive at the performance score. The performance score cannot be less 
than 0 or more than 100, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and 
a score of 100 reflects the highest risk.

[[Page 548]]

    (B) Loss severity score. The loss severity score is based on a loss 
severity measure that is described in appendix D of this subpart. 
Appendix B also describes how the loss severity measure is converted to 
a score between 0 and 100. The loss severity score cannot be less than 0 
or more than 100, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a 
score of 100 reflects the highest risk. Cutoff values for the loss 
severity measure are:

             Cutoff Values To Calculate Loss Severity Score
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Cutoff values
                                                   ---------------------
             Measure of loss severity                Minimum    Maximum
                                                    (percent)  (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss Severity.....................................          0         28
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Total Score. The performance and loss severity scores are 
combined to produce a total score. The loss severity score is converted 
into a loss severity factor that ranges from 0.8 (score of 5 or lower) 
to 1.2 (score of 85 or higher). Scores at or below the minimum cutoff of 
5 receive a loss severity factor of 0.8, and scores at or above the 
maximum cutoff of 85 receive a loss severity factor of 1.2. The 
following linear interpolation converts loss severity scores between the 
cutoffs into a loss severity factor:

(Loss Severity Factor = 0.8 + [0.005 * (Loss Severity Score ^ 5)].


The performance score is multiplied by the loss severity factor to 
produce a total score (total score = performance score * loss severity 
factor). The total score can be up to 20 percent higher or lower than 
the performance score but cannot be less than 30 or more than 90. The 
total score is subject to adjustment, up or down, by a maximum of 15 
points, as set forth in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The resulting 
total score after adjustment cannot be less than 30 or more than 90.
    (D) Initial base assessment rate. A large institution with a total 
score of 30 pays the minimum initial base assessment rate and an 
institution with a total score of 90 pays the maximum initial base 
assessment rate. For total scores between 30 and 90, initial base 
assessment rates rise at an increasing rate as the total score 
increases, calculated according to the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25FE11.007


where Rate is the initial base assessment rate (expressed in basis 
points), Maximum Rate is the maximum initial base assessment rate then 
in effect (expressed in basis points), and Minimum Rate is the minimum 
initial base assessment rate then in effect (expressed in basis points). 
Initial base assessment rates are subject to adjustment pursuant to 
paragraphs (b)(3), (d)(1), (d)(2), of this section; large institutions 
that are not well capitalized or have a CAMELS composite rating of 3, 4 
or 5 shall be subject to the adjustment at paragraph (d)(3); these 
adjustments shall result in the institution's total base assessment 
rate, which in no case can be lower than 50 percent of the institution's 
initial base assessment rate.
    (2) Assessment scorecard for highly complex institutions. (i) A 
highly complex institution shall have its initial base assessment rate 
determined using the scorecard for highly complex institutions.

                Scorecard for Highly Complex Institutions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Measure   Component
                        Measures and components      weights    weights
                                                    (percent)  (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
P..................  Performance Score
P.1................  Weighted Average CAMELS           100         30
                      Rating.
P.2................  Ability To Withstand Asset-    .........      50
                      Related Stress.
                       Leverage ratio.............      10
                       Concentration Measure......      35
                       Core Earnings/Average            20
                      Quarter-End Total Assets.
                       Credit Quality Measure and       35
                      Market Risk Measure.

[[Page 549]]

 
P.3................  Ability To Withstand Funding-  .........      20
                      Related Stress.
                       Core Deposits/Total              50
                      Liabilities.
                       Balance Sheet Liquidity          30
                      Ratio.
                       Average Short-Term Funding/      20
                      Average Total Assets.
L..................  Loss Severity Score..........  .........
L.1................  Loss Severity................  .........     100
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The scorecard for highly complex institutions produces two 
scores: performance and loss severity.
    (A) Performance score for highly complex institutions. The 
performance score for highly complex institutions is the weighted 
average of the scores for three components: weighted average CAMELS 
rating, weighted at 30 percent; ability to withstand asset-related 
stress score, weighted at 50 percent; and ability to withstand funding-
related stress score, weighted at 20 percent.
    (1) Weighted average CAMELS rating score. (i) To compute the score 
for the weighted average CAMELS rating, a weighted average of an 
institution's CAMELS component ratings is calculated using the following 
weights:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25FE11.008

    (ii) A weighted average CAMELS rating converts to a score that 
ranges from 25 to 100. A weighted average rating of 1 equals a score of 
25 and a weighted average of 3.5 or greater equals a score of 100. 
Weighted average CAMELS ratings between 1 and 3.5 are assigned a score 
between 25 and 100. The score increases at an increasing rate as the 
weighted average CAMELS rating increases. Appendix B of this subpart 
describes the conversion of a weighted average CAMELS rating to a score.
    (2) Ability to withstand asset-related stress score. (i) The ability 
to withstand asset-related stress score is a weighted average of the 
scores for four measures: Leverage ratio; concentration measure; ratio 
of core earnings to average quarter-end total assets; credit quality 
measure and market risk measure. Appendix A of this subpart describes 
these measures.
    (ii) The Leverage ratio and the ratio of core earnings to average 
quarter-end total assets are described in appendix A and the method of 
calculating the scores is described in appendix B of this subpart.
    (iii) The score for the concentration measure for highly complex 
institutions is the greatest of the higher-risk assets to the sum of 
Tier 1 capital and reserves score, the top 20 counterparty exposure to 
the sum of Tier 1 capital and reserves score, or the largest 
counterparty exposure to the sum of Tier 1 capital and reserves score. 
Each ratio is described in appendix A of this subpart. The method used 
to convert the concentration measure into a score is described in 
appendix C of this subpart.
    (iv) The credit quality score is the greater of the criticized and 
classified items to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or the 
underperforming assets to

[[Page 550]]

Tier 1 capital and reserves score. The market risk score is the weighted 
average of three scores--the trading revenue volatility to Tier 1 
capital score, the market risk capital to Tier 1 capital score, and the 
level 3 trading assets to Tier 1 capital score. All of these ratios are 
described in appendix A of this subpart and the method of calculating 
the scores is described in appendix B. Each score is multiplied by its 
respective weight, and the resulting weighted score is summed to compute 
the score for the market risk measure. An overall weight of 35 percent 
is allocated between the scores for the credit quality measure and 
market risk measure. The allocation depends on the ratio of average 
trading assets to the sum of average securities, loans and trading 
assets (trading asset ratio) as follows:
    (v) Weight for credit quality score = 35 percent * (1--trading asset 
ratio); and,
    (vi) Weight for market risk score = 35 percent * trading asset 
ratio.
    (vii) Each of the measures used to calculate the ability to 
withstand asset-related stress score is assigned the following cutoff 
values and weights:

     Cutoff Values and Weights for Measures To Calculate the Ability To Withstand Asset-Related Stress Score
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Cutoff values
 Measures of the ability to withstand asset- ----------------------  Market risk
               related stress                  Minimum    Maximum      measure           Weights (percent)
                                              (percent)  (percent)    (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio..............................          6         13  ............  10.
Concentration Measure.......................  .........  .........  ............  35.
    Higher Risk Assets/Tier 1 Capital and             0        135  ............
     Reserves;.
    Top 20 Counterparty Exposure/Tier 1               0        125  ............
     Capital and Reserves; or.
    Largest Counterparty Exposure/Tier 1              0         20  ............
     Capital and Reserves.
Core Earnings/Average Quarter-end Total               0          2  ............  20.
 Assets.
Credit Quality Measure *....................  .........  .........  ............  35 * (1 ^ Trading Asset
                                                                                   Ratio).
    Criticized and Classified Items to Tier           7        100  ............
     1 Capital and Reserves; or.
    Underperforming Assets/Tier 1 Capital             2         35  ............
     and Reserves.
Market Risk Measure *.......................  .........  .........  ............  35 * Trading Asset Ratio.
    Trading Revenue Volatility/Tier 1                 0          2            60
     Capital.
    Market Risk Capital/Tier 1 Capital......          0         10            20
    Level 3 Trading Assets/Tier 1 Capital...          0         35            20
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Combined, the credit quality measure and the market risk measure are assigned a 35 percent weight. The
  relative weight of each of the two scores depends on the ratio of average trading assets to the sum of average
  securities, loans and trading assets (trading asset ratio).

    (viii) [Reserved]
    (ix) The score of each measure is multiplied by its respective 
weight and the resulting weighted score is summed to compute the ability 
to withstand asset-related stress score, which can range from 0 to 100, 
where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a score of 100 reflects 
the highest risk.
    (3) Ability to withstand funding related stress score. Three 
measures are used to calculate the score for the ability to withstand 
funding-related stress: a core deposits to total liabilities ratio, a 
balance sheet liquidity ratio, and average short-term funding to average 
total assets ratio. Appendix A of this subpart describes these ratios. 
Appendix B of this subpart describes how each measure is converted to a 
score. The ability to withstand funding-related stress score is the 
weighted average of the scores for the three measures. In the following 
table, cutoff values and weights are used to derive an institution's 
ability to withstand funding-related stress score:

[[Page 551]]



  Cutoff Values and Weights To Calculate Ability To Withstand Funding-
                         Related Stress Measures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Cutoff values
  Measures of the ability to withstand  ----------------------  Weights
         funding-related stress           Minimum    Maximum   (percent)
                                         (percent)  (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Deposits/Total Liabilities........          5         87         50
Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio..........          7        243         30
Average Short-term Funding/Average               2         19         20
 Total Assets..........................
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Calculation of Performance Score. The weighted average CAMELS 
score, the ability to withstand asset-related stress score, and the 
ability to withstand funding-related stress score are multiplied by 
their respective weights (30 percent, 50 percent and 20 percent, 
respectively) and the results are summed to arrive at the performance 
score, which cannot be less than 0 or more than 100.
    (B) Loss severity score. The loss severity score is based on a loss 
severity measure described in appendix D of this subpart. Appendix B of 
this subpart also describes how the loss severity measure is converted 
to a score between 0 and 100. Cutoff values for the loss severity 
measure are:

                 Cutoff Values for Loss Severity Measure
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Cutoff values
                                                   ---------------------
             Measure of loss severity                Minimum    Maximum
                                                    (percent)  (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss Severity.....................................          0         28
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Total Score. The performance and loss severity scores are 
combined to produce a total score. The loss severity score is converted 
into a loss severity factor that ranges from 0.8 (score of 5 or lower) 
to 1.2 (score of 85 or higher). Scores at or below the minimum cutoff of 
5 receive a loss severity factor of 0.8, and scores at or above the 
maximum cutoff of 85 receive a loss severity factor of 1.2. The 
following linear interpolation converts loss severity scores between the 
cutoffs into a loss severity factor: (Loss Severity Factor = 0.8 + 
[0.005 * (Loss Severity Score ^ 5)]. The performance score is multiplied 
by the loss severity factor to produce a total score (total score = 
performance score * loss severity factor). The total score can be up to 
20 percent higher or lower than the performance score but cannot be less 
than 30 or more than 90. The total score is subject to adjustment, up or 
down, by a maximum of 15 points, as set forth in paragraph (b)(3) of 
this section. The resulting total score after adjustment cannot be less 
than 30 or more than 90.
    (D) Initial base assessment rate. A highly complex institution with 
a total score of 30 pays the minimum initial base assessment rate and an 
institution with a total score of 90 pays the maximum initial base 
assessment rate. For total scores between 30 and 90, initial base 
assessment rates rise at an increasing rate as the total score 
increases, calculated according to the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25FE11.009


where Rate is the initial base assessment rate (expressed in basis 
points), Maximum Rate is the maximum initial base assessment rate then 
in effect (expressed in basis points), and Minimum Rate is the minimum 
initial base assessment rate then in effect (expressed in basis points). 
Initial base assessment rates are subject to adjustment pursuant to 
paragraphs (b)(3), (d)(1), and (d)(2) of this section; highly complex 
institutions that are not well capitalized or have a CAMELS composite 
rating of 3, 4 or 5 shall be subject to the adjustment at paragraph 
(d)(3); these adjustments shall result in the institution's total base 
assessment rate, which in no case can be lower than 50 percent of the 
institution's initial base assessment rate.

[[Page 552]]

    (3) Adjustment to total score for large institutions and highly 
complex institutions. The total score for large institutions and highly 
complex institutions is subject to adjustment, up or down, by a maximum 
of 15 points, based upon significant risk factors that are not 
adequately captured in the appropriate scorecard. In making such 
adjustments, the FDIC may consider such information as financial 
performance and condition information and other market or supervisory 
information. The FDIC will also consult with an institution's primary 
federal regulator and, for state chartered institutions, state banking 
supervisor.
    (i) Prior notice of adjustments--(A) Prior notice of upward 
adjustment. Prior to making any upward adjustment to an institution's 
total score because of considerations of additional risk information, 
the FDIC will formally notify the institution and its primary federal 
regulator and provide an opportunity to respond. This notification will 
include the reasons for the adjustment and when the adjustment will take 
effect.
    (B) Prior notice of downward adjustment. Prior to making any 
downward adjustment to an institution's total score because of 
considerations of additional risk information, the FDIC will formally 
notify the institution's primary federal regulator and provide an 
opportunity to respond.
    (ii) Determination whether to adjust upward; effective period of 
adjustment. After considering an institution's and the primary federal 
regulator's responses to the notice, the FDIC will determine whether the 
adjustment to an institution's total score is warranted, taking into 
account any revisions to scorecard measures, as well as any actions 
taken by the institution to address the FDIC's concerns described in the 
notice. The FDIC will evaluate the need for the adjustment each 
subsequent assessment period. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) 
of this section, the amount of adjustment cannot exceed the proposed 
adjustment amount contained in the initial notice unless additional 
notice is provided so that the primary federal regulator and the 
institution may respond.
    (iii) Determination whether to adjust downward; effective period of 
adjustment. After considering the primary federal regulator's responses 
to the notice, the FDIC will determine whether the adjustment to total 
score is warranted, taking into account any revisions to scorecard 
measures. Any downward adjustment in an institution's total score will 
remain in effect for subsequent assessment periods until the FDIC 
determines that an adjustment is no longer warranted. Downward 
adjustments will be made without notification to the institution. 
However, the FDIC will provide advance notice to an institution and its 
primary federal regulator and give them an opportunity to respond before 
removing a downward adjustment.
    (iv) Adjustment without notice. Notwithstanding the notice 
provisions set forth above, the FDIC may change an institution's total 
score without advance notice under this paragraph, if the institution's 
supervisory ratings or the scorecard measures deteriorate.
    (c) Insured branches of foreign banks--(1) Risk categories for 
insured branches of foreign banks. Insured branches of foreign banks 
shall be assigned to risk categories as set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section.
    (2) Capital evaluations for insured branches of foreign banks. Each 
insured branch of a foreign bank will receive one of the following three 
capital evaluations on the basis of data reported in the institution's 
Report of Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and Agencies of 
Foreign Banks dated as of March 31 for the assessment period beginning 
the preceding January 1; dated as of June 30 for the assessment period 
beginning the preceding April 1; dated as of September 30 for the 
assessment period beginning the preceding July 1; and dated as of 
December 31 for the assessment period beginning the preceding October 1.
    (i) Well Capitalized. An insured branch of a foreign bank is Well 
Capitalized if the insured branch:
    (A) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (B) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 108 percent or more of the average book

[[Page 553]]

value of the insured branch's third-party liabilities for the quarter 
ending on the report date specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
    (ii) Adequately Capitalized. An insured branch of a foreign bank is 
Adequately Capitalized if the insured branch:
    (A) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (B) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 106 percent or more of the average book value of the 
insured branch's third-party liabilities for the quarter ending on the 
report date specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section; and
    (C) Does not meet the definition of a Well Capitalized insured 
branch of a foreign bank.
    (iii) Undercapitalized. An insured branch of a foreign bank is 
undercapitalized institution if it does not qualify as either Well 
Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized under paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and 
(ii) of this section.
    (3) Supervisory evaluations for insured branches of foreign banks. 
Each insured branch of a foreign bank will be assigned to one of three 
supervisory groups as set forth in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (4) Assessment method for insured branches of foreign banks in Risk 
Category I. Insured branches of foreign banks in Risk Category I shall 
be assessed using the weighted average ROCA component rating.
    (i) Weighted average ROCA component rating. The weighted average 
ROCA component rating shall equal the sum of the products that result 
from multiplying ROCA component ratings by the following percentages: 
Risk Management--35%, Operational Controls--25%, Compliance--25%, and 
Asset Quality--15%. The weighted average ROCA rating will be multiplied 
by 5.076 (which shall be the pricing multiplier). To this result will be 
added a uniform amount. The resulting sum--the initial base assessment 
rate--will equal an institution's total base assessment rate; provided, 
however, that no institution's total base assessment rate will be less 
than the minimum total base assessment rate in effect for Risk Category 
I institutions for that quarter nor greater than the maximum total base 
assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I institutions for that 
quarter.
    (ii) Uniform amount. Except as adjusted for the actual assessment 
rates set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f), the uniform amount for all 
insured branches of foreign banks shall be:
    (A) ^3.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(a) is in effect;
    (B) ^5.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(b) is in effect;
    (C) ^-6.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(c) is in effect; or
    (D) ^7.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(d) is in effect.
    (iii) Insured branches of foreign banks not subject to certain 
adjustments. No insured branch of a foreign bank in any risk category 
shall be subject to the adjustments in paragraphs (b)(3), (d)(1), or 
(d)(3) of this section.
    (iv) Implementation of changes between Risk Categories for insured 
branches of foreign banks. If, during a quarter, a ROCA rating change 
occurs that results in an insured branch of a foreign bank moving from 
Risk Category I to Risk Category II, III or IV, the institution's 
initial base assessment rate for the portion of the quarter that it was 
in Risk Category I shall be determined using the weighted average ROCA 
component rating. For the portion of the quarter that the institution 
was not in Risk Category I, the institution's initial base assessment 
rate shall be determined under the assessment schedule for the 
appropriate Risk Category. If, during a quarter, a ROCA rating change 
occurs that results in an insured branch of a foreign bank moving from 
Risk Category II, III or IV to Risk Category I, the institution's 
assessment rate for the portion of the quarter that it was in Risk 
Category I shall equal the rate determined as provided using the 
weighted average ROCA component rating. For the portion of the quarter 
that the institution was not in Risk Category I, the institution's 
initial base assessment rate shall be determined under the assessment 
schedule for the appropriate Risk Category.
    (v) Implementation of changes within Risk Category I for insured 
branches of

[[Page 554]]

foreign banks. If, during a quarter, an insured branch of a foreign bank 
remains in Risk Category I, but a ROCA component rating changes that 
will affect the institution's initial base assessment rate, separate 
assessment rates for the portion(s) of the quarter before and after the 
change(s) shall be determined under this paragraph (c)(4) of this 
section.
    (d) Adjustments--(1) Unsecured debt adjustment to initial base 
assessment rate for all institutions. All institutions, except new 
institutions as provided under paragraphs (f)(1) and (2) of this section 
and insured branches of foreign banks as provided under paragraph 
(c)(4)(iii) of this section, shall be subject to an adjustment of 
assessment rates for unsecured debt. Any unsecured debt adjustment shall 
be made after any adjustment under paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
    (i) Application of unsecured debt adjustment. The unsecured debt 
adjustment shall be determined as the sum of the initial base assessment 
rate plus 40 basis points; that sum shall be multiplied by the ratio of 
an insured depository institution's long-term unsecured debt to its 
assessment base. The amount of the reduction in the assessment rate due 
to the adjustment is equal to the dollar amount of the adjustment 
divided by the amount of the assessment base.
    (ii) Limitation--No unsecured debt adjustment for any institution 
shall exceed the lesser of 5 basis points or 50 percent of the 
institution's initial base assessment rate.
    (iii) Applicable quarterly reports of condition--Unsecured debt 
adjustment ratios for any given quarter shall be calculated from 
quarterly reports of condition (Consolidated Reports of Condition and 
Income and Thrift Financial Reports, or any successor reports to either, 
as appropriate) filed by each institution as of the last day of the 
quarter.
    (2) Depository institution debt adjustment to initial base 
assessment rate for all institutions. All institutions shall be subject 
to an adjustment of assessment rates for unsecured debt held that is 
issued by another depository institution. Any such depository 
institution debt adjustment shall be made after any adjustment under 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (d)(1) of this section.
    (i) Application of depository institution debt adjustment. An 
insured depository institution shall pay a 50 basis point adjustment on 
the amount of unsecured debt it holds that was issued by another insured 
depository institution to the extent that such debt exceeds 3 percent of 
the institution's Tier 1 capital. The amount of long-term unsecured debt 
issued by another insured depository institution shall be calculated 
using the same valuation methodology used to calculate the amount of 
such debt for reporting on the asset side of the balance sheets.
    (ii) Applicable quarterly reports of condition. Depository 
institution debt adjustment ratios for any given quarter shall be 
calculated from quarterly reports of condition (Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income and Thrift Financial Reports, or any successor 
reports to either, as appropriate) filed by each institution as of the 
last day of the quarter.
    (3) Brokered Deposit Adjustment. All small institutions in Risk 
Categories II, III, and IV, all large institutions and all highly 
complex institutions, except large and highly complex institutions 
(including new large and new highly complex institutions) that are well 
capitalized and have a CAMELS composite rating of 1 or 2, shall be 
subject to an assessment rate adjustment for brokered deposits. Any such 
brokered deposit adjustment shall be made after any adjustment under 
paragraphs (b)(3), (d)(1), and (d)(2) of this section. The brokered 
deposit adjustment includes all brokered deposits as defined in Section 
29 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831f), and 12 CFR 
337.6, including reciprocal deposits as defined in Sec. 327.8(p), and 
brokered deposits that consist of balances swept into an insured 
institution from another institution. The adjustment under this 
paragraph is limited to those institutions whose ratio of brokered 
deposits to domestic deposits is greater than 10 percent; asset growth 
rates do not affect the adjustment. Insured branches of foreign banks 
are not subject to the brokered deposit adjustment as provided in 
paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section.

[[Page 555]]

    (i) Application of brokered deposit adjustment. The brokered deposit 
adjustment shall be determined by multiplying 25 basis points by the 
ratio of the difference between an insured depository institution's 
brokered deposits and 10 percent of its domestic deposits to its 
assessment base.
    (ii) Limitation. The maximum brokered deposit adjustment will be 10 
basis points; the minimum brokered deposit adjustment will be 0.
    (iii) Applicable quarterly reports of condition. Brokered deposit 
ratios for any given quarter shall be calculated from the quarterly 
reports of condition (Call Reports and Thrift Financial Reports, or any 
successor reports to either, as appropriate) filed by each institution 
as of the last day of the quarter.
    (e) Request to be treated as a large institution--(1) Procedure. Any 
institution with assets of between $5 billion and $10 billion may 
request that the FDIC determine its assessment rate as a large 
institution. The FDIC will consider such a request provided that it has 
sufficient information to do so. Any such request must be made to the 
FDIC's Division of Insurance and Research. Any approved change will 
become effective within one year from the date of the request. If an 
institution whose request has been granted subsequently reports assets 
of less than $5 billion in its report of condition for four consecutive 
quarters, the institution shall be deemed a small institution for 
assessment purposes.
    (2) Time limit on subsequent request for alternate method. An 
institution whose request to be assessed as a large institution is 
granted by the FDIC shall not be eligible to request that it be assessed 
as a small institution for a period of three years from the first 
quarter in which its approved request to be assessed as a large 
institution became effective. Any request to be assessed as a small 
institution must be made to the FDIC's Division of Insurance and 
Research.
    (3) An institution that disagrees with the FDIC's determination that 
it is a large, highly complex, or small institution may request review 
of that determination pursuant to Sec. 327.4(c).
    (f) New and established institutions and exceptions--(1) New small 
institutions. A new small Risk Category I institution shall be assessed 
the Risk Category I maximum initial base assessment rate for the 
relevant assessment period. No new small institution in any risk 
category shall be subject to the unsecured debt adjustment as determined 
under paragraph (d)(1) of this section. All new small institutions in 
any Risk Category shall be subject to the depository institution debt 
adjustment as determined under paragraph (d)(2) of this section. All new 
small institutions in Risk Categories II, III, and IV shall be subject 
to the brokered deposit adjustment as determined under paragraph (d)(3) 
of this section.
    (2) New large institutions and new highly complex institutions. All 
new large institutions and all new highly complex institutions shall be 
assessed under the appropriate method provided at paragraph (b)(1) or 
(2) of this section and subject to the adjustments provided at 
paragraphs (b)(3), (d)(2), and (d)(3) of this section. No new highly 
complex or large institutions are entitled to adjustment under paragraph 
(d)(1) of this section. If a large or highly complex institution has not 
yet received CAMELS ratings, it will be given a weighted CAMELS rating 
of 2 for assessment purposes until actual CAMELS ratings are assigned.
    (3) CAMELS ratings for the surviving institution in a merger or 
consolidation. When an established institution merges with or 
consolidates into a new institution, if the FDIC determines the 
resulting institution to be an established institution under 
Sec. 327.8(k)(1), its CAMELS ratings for assessment purposes will be 
based upon the established institution's ratings prior to the merger or 
consolidation until new ratings become available.
    (4) Rate applicable to institutions subject to subsidiary or credit 
union exception. A small Risk Category I institution that is established 
under Sec. 327.8(k)(4) or (5), but does not have CAMELS component 
ratings, shall be assessed at 2 basis points above the minimum initial 
base assessment rate applicable to Risk Category I institutions until it 
receives CAMELS component ratings. Thereafter, the assessment rate will 
be determined by

[[Page 556]]

annualizing, where appropriate, financial ratios obtained from all 
quarterly reports of condition that have been filed, until the 
institution files four quarterly reports of condition. If a large or 
highly complex institution is considered established under 
Sec. 327.8(k)(4) or (5), but does not have CAMELS component ratings, it 
will be given a weighted CAMELS rating of 2 for assessment purposes 
until actual CAMELS ratings are assigned.
    (5) Request for review. An institution that disagrees with the 
FDIC's determination that it is a new institution may request review of 
that determination pursuant to Sec. 327.4(c).
    (g) Assessment rates for bridge depository institutions and 
conservatorships. Institutions that are bridge depository institutions 
under 12 U.S.C. 1821(n) and institutions for which the Corporation has 
been appointed or serves as conservator shall, in all cases, be assessed 
at the Risk Category I minimum initial base assessment rate, which shall 
not be subject to adjustment under paragraphs (b)(3), (d)(1), (2) or (3) 
of this section.

[76 FR 10708, Feb. 25, 2011, as amended at 79 FR 70437, Nov. 26, 2014; 
81 FR 32201, May 20, 2016]



Sec. 327.10  Assessment rate schedules.

    (a) Assessment rate schedules before the reserve ratio of the DIF 
reaches 1.15 percent--(1) Applicability. The assessment rate schedules 
in paragraph (a) of this section will cease to be applicable when the 
reserve ratio of the DIF first reaches 1.15 percent.
    (2) Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule. Before the reserve ratio 
of the DIF reaches 1.15 percent, the initial base assessment rate for an 
insured depository institution shall be the rate prescribed in the 
following schedule:

         Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule Before the Reserve Ratio of the DIF Reaches 1.15 Percent
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                     Large and
                                   Risk category   Risk category   Risk category   Risk category  highly complex
                                         I              II              III             IV         institutions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial base assessment rate....             5-9              14              23              35            5-35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial base rates that are not the minimum
  or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) Risk Category I Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule. The 
annual initial base assessment rates for all institutions in Risk 
Category I shall range from 5 to 9 basis points.
    (ii) Risk Category II, III, and IV Initial Base Assessment Rate 
Schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates for Risk Categories 
II, III, and IV shall be 14, 23, and 35 basis points, respectively.
    (iii) All institutions in any one risk category, other than Risk 
Category I, will be charged the same initial base assessment rate, 
subject to adjustment as appropriate.
    (iv) Large and Highly Complex Institutions Initial Base Assessment 
Rate Schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates for all large 
and highly complex institutions shall range from 5 to 35 basis points.
    (3) Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule after Adjustments. Before 
the reserve ratio of the DIF reaches 1.15 percent, the total base 
assessment rates after adjustments for an insured depository institution 
shall be as prescribed in the following schedule.

    Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule (After Adjustments)* Before the Reserve Ratio of the DIF Reaches 1.15
                                                   Percent **
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                     Large and
                                   Risk category   Risk category   Risk category   Risk category  highly complex
                                         I              II              III             IV         institutions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial base assessment rate....             5-9              14              23              35            5-35
Unsecured debt adjustment.......         (4.5)-0           (5)-0           (5)-0           (5)-0           (5)-0
Brokered deposit adjustment.....  ..............            0-10            0-10            0-10            0-10

[[Page 557]]

 
    Total base assessment rate..           2.5-9            9-24           18-33           30-45          2.5-45
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Total base rates that are not the minimum or
  maximum rate will vary between these rates.
** Total base assessment rates do not include the depository institution debt adjustment.

    (i) Risk Category I Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule. The annual 
total base assessment rates for all institutions in Risk Category I 
shall range from 2.5 to 9 basis points.
    (ii) Risk Category II Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule. The 
annual total base assessment rates for Risk Category II shall range from 
9 to 24 basis points.
    (iii) Risk Category III Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule. The 
annual total base assessment rates for Risk Category III shall range 
from 18 to 33 basis points.
    (iv) Risk Category IV Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule. The 
annual total base assessment rates for Risk Category IV shall range from 
30 to 45 basis points.
    (v) Large and Highly Complex Institutions Total Base Assessment Rate 
Schedule. The annual total base assessment rates for all large and 
highly complex institutions shall range from 2.5 to 45 basis points.
    (b) Assessment rate schedules for established small institutions and 
large and highly complex institutions applicable in the first assessment 
period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the 
end of the prior assessment period has reached or exceeded 1.15 percent, 
and in all subsequent assessment periods where the reserve ratio of the 
DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period is less than 2 percent.
    (1) Initial base assessment rate schedule for established small 
institutions and large and highly complex institutions. In the first 
assessment period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of the 
DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period has reached or exceeded 
1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment periods where the 
reserve ratio as of the end of the prior assessment period is less than 
2 percent, the initial base assessment rate for established small 
institutions and large and highly complex institutions, except as 
provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall be the rate prescribed 
in the following schedule:

   Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule Beginning the First Assessment Period After June 30, 2016, Where the
   Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Has Reached 1.15 Percent, and for All Subsequent
 Assessment Periods Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Is Less Than 2 Percent
                                                       \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Established small institutions
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------   Large & highly
                                                      CAMELS composite                              complex
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------    institutions
                                      1 or 2                 3                  4 or 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Base Assessment Rate.  3 to 16............  6 to 30............  16 to 30...........  3 to 30.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial base rates that are not the
  minimum or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) CAMELS composite 1- and 2-rated established small institutions 
initial base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base 
assessment rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS 
composite rating of 1 or 2 shall range from 3 to 16 basis points.

[[Page 558]]

    (ii) CAMELS composite 3-rated established small institutions initial 
base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates 
for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite rating of 
3 shall range from 6 to 30 basis points.
    (iii) CAMELS composite 4- and 5-rated established small institutions 
initial base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base 
assessment rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS 
composite rating of 4 or 5 shall range from 16 to 30 basis points.
    (iv) Large and highly complex institutions initial base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates for all large 
and highly complex institutions shall range from 3 to 30 basis points.
    (2) Total base assessment rate schedule after adjustments. In the 
first assessment period after June 30, 2016, that the reserve ratio of 
the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period has reached or 
exceeded 1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment periods where 
the reserve ratio for the prior assessment period is less than 2 
percent, the total base assessment rates after adjustments for 
established small institutions and large and highly complex 
institutions, except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall 
be as prescribed in the following schedule:

Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule (After Adjustments) \1\ Beginning the First Assessment Period After June 30,
2016, Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Has Reached 1.15 Percent, and for All
 Subsequent Assessment Periods Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Is Less Than
                                                  2 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Established small institutions
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------   Large & highly
                                                      CAMELS composite                              complex
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------    institutions
                                      1 or 2                 3                  4 or 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Base Assessment Rate.  3 to 16............  6 to 30............  16 to 30...........  3 to 30.
Unsecured Debt Adjustment....  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0.
Brokered Deposit Adjustment..  N/A................  N/A................  N/A................  0 to 10.
                              ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Total Base Assessment      1.5 to 16..........  3 to 30............  11 to 30...........  1.5 to 40.
     Rate.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Total base rates that are not the minimum
  or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) CAMELS composite 1- and 2-rated established small institutions 
total base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment 
rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite 
rating of 1 or 2 shall range from 1.5 to 16 basis points.
    (ii) CAMELS composite 3-rated established small institutions total 
base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment rates 
for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite rating of 
3 shall range from 3 to 30 basis points.
    (iii) CAMELS composite 4- and 5-rated established small institutions 
total base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment 
rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite 
rating of 4 or 5 shall range from 11 to 30 basis points.
    (iv) Large and highly complex institutions total base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual total base assessment rates for all large and 
highly complex institutions shall range from 1.5 to 40 basis points.
    (c) Assessment rate schedules if the reserve ratio of the DIF as of 
the end of the prior assessment period is equal to or greater than 2 
percent and less than 2.5 percent--(1) Initial base assessment rate 
schedule for established small institutions and large and highly complex 
institutions. If the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior 
assessment period is equal to or greater than 2 percent and less than 
2.5 percent, the initial base assessment rate for established small 
institutions and large and highly complex institutions, except as 
provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall be

[[Page 559]]

the rate prescribed in the following schedule:

Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule if the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Is Equal
                           to or Greater Than 2 Percent But Less Than 2.5 Percent \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Established small institutions
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------   Large & highly
                                                      CAMELS composite                              complex
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------    institutions
                                      1 or 2                 3                  4 or 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Base Assessment Rate.  2 to 14............  5 to 28............  14 to 28...........  2 to 28.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial base rates that are not the
  minimum or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) CAMELS composite 1- and 2-rated established small institutions 
initial base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base 
assessment rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS 
composite rating of 1 or 2 shall range from 2 to 14 basis points.
    (ii) CAMELS composite 3-rated established small institutions initial 
base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates 
for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite rating of 
3 shall range from 5 to 28 basis points.
    (iii) CAMELS composite 4- and 5-rated established small institutions 
initial base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base 
assessment rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS 
composite rating of 4 or 5 shall range from 14 to 28 basis points.
    (iv) Large and highly complex institutions initial base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates for all large 
and highly complex institutions shall range from 2 to 28 basis points.
    (2) Total base assessment rate schedule after adjustments for 
established small institutions and large and highly complex 
institutions. If the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior 
assessment period is equal to or greater than 2 percent and less than 
2.5 percent, the total base assessment rates after adjustments for 
established small institutions and large and highly complex 
institutions, except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall 
be as prescribed in the following schedule:

   Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule (After Adjustments) \1\ If the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior
              Assessment Period Is Equal To or Greater Than 2 Percent but Less Than 2.5 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Established small institutions
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------   Large & highly
                                                      CAMELS composite                              complex
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------    institutions
                                      1 or 2                 3                  4 or 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Base Assessment Rate.  2 to 14............  5 to 28............  14 to 28...........  2 to 28.
Unsecured Debt Adjustment....  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0.
Brokered Deposit Adjustment..  N/A................  N/A................  N/A................  0 to 10.
                              ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Total Base Assessment      1 to 14............  2.5 to 28..........  9 to 28............  1 to 38.
     Rate.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Total base rates that are not the minimum
  or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) CAMELS composite 1- and 2-rated established small institutions 
total base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment 
rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite 
rating of 1 or 2 shall range from 1 to 14 basis points.
    (ii) CAMELS composite 3-rated established small institutions total 
base assessment rate schedule. The annual total

[[Page 560]]

base assessment rates for all established small institutions with a 
CAMELS composite rating of 3 shall range from 2.5 to 28 basis points.
    (iii) CAMELS composite 4- and 5-rated established small institutions 
total base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment 
rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite 
rating of 4 or 5 shall range from 9 to 28 basis points.
    (iv) Large and highly complex institutions total base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual total base assessment rates for all large and 
highly complex institutions shall range from 1 to 38 basis points.
    (d) Assessment rate schedules if the reserve ratio of the DIF as of 
the end of the prior assessment period is greater than 2.5 percent--(1) 
Initial base assessment rate schedule. If the reserve ratio of the DIF 
as of the end of the prior assessment period is greater than 2.5 
percent, the initial base assessment rate for established small 
institutions and large and highly complex institutions, except as 
provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall be the rate prescribed 
in the following schedule:

   Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule if the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Is
                                    Greater Than or Equal to 2.5 Percent \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Established small institutions
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------   Large & highly
                                                      CAMELS composite                              complex
                              ---------------------------------------------------------------    institutions
                                      1 or 2                 3                  4 or 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Base Assessment Rate.  1 to 13............  4 to 25............  13 to 25...........  1 to 25.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial base rates that are not the
  minimum or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) CAMELS composite 1- and 2-rated established small institutions 
initial base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base 
assessment rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS 
composite rating of 1 or 2 shall range from 1 to 13 basis points.
    (ii) CAMELS composite 3-rated established small institutions initial 
base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates 
for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite rating of 
3 shall range from 4 to 25 basis points.
    (iii) CAMELS composite 4- and 5-rated established small institutions 
initial base assessment rate schedule. The annual initial base 
assessment rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS 
composite rating of 4 or 5 shall range from 13 to 25 basis points.
    (iv) Large and highly complex institutions initial base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates for all large 
and highly complex institutions shall range from 1 to 25 basis points.
    (2) Total base assessment rate schedule after adjustments. If the 
reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period is 
greater than 2.5 percent, the total base assessment rates after 
adjustments for established small institutions and large and highly 
complex institutions, except as provided in paragraph (f) of this 
section, shall be the rate prescribed in the following schedule:

   Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule (After Adjustments) \1\ If the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior
                          Assessment Period is Greater Than or Equal to 2.5 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Established small institutions
                               --------------------------------------------------------------   Large & highly
                                                      CAMELS composite                              complex
                               --------------------------------------------------------------    institutions
                                       1 or 2                 3                 4 or 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Base Assessment Rate..  1 to 13............  4 to 25............  13 to 25..........  1 to 25.
Unsecured Debt Adjustment.....  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0............  ^5 to 0...........  ^5 to 0.
Brokered Deposit Adjustment...  N/A................  N/A................  N/A...............  0 to 10.
                               ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 561]]

 
    Total Base Assessment Rate  0.5 to 13..........  2 to 25............  8 to 25...........  0.5 to 35.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Total base rates that are not the minimum
  or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (i) CAMELS composite 1- and 2-rated established small institutions 
total base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment 
rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite 
rating of 1 or 2 shall range from 0.5 to 13 basis points.
    (ii) CAMELS composite 3-rated established small institutions total 
base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment rates 
for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite rating of 
3 shall range from 2 to 25 basis points.
    (iii) CAMELS composite 4- and 5-rated established small institutions 
total base assessment rate schedule. The annual total base assessment 
rates for all established small institutions with a CAMELS composite 
rating of 4 or 5 shall range from 8 to 25 basis points.
    (iv) Large and highly complex institutions total base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual total base assessment rates for all large and 
highly complex institutions shall range from 0.5 to 35 basis points.
    (e) Assessment rate schedules for new institutions and insured 
branches of foreign banks. (1) New depository institutions, as defined 
in Sec. 327.8(j), shall be subject to the assessment rate schedules as 
follows:
    (i) Prior to the reserve ratio of the DIF first reaching 1.15 
percent on or after June 30, 2016. Prior to the reserve ratio of the DIF 
reaching 1.15 percent for the first time on or after June 30, 2016, all 
new institutions shall be subject to the initial and total base 
assessment rate schedules provided for in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (ii) Assessment rate schedules for new large and highly complex 
institutions once the DIF reserve ratio first reaches 1.15 percent on or 
after June 30, 2016. In the first assessment period after June 30, 2016, 
where the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment 
period has reached or exceeded 1.15 percent, and for all subsequent 
assessment periods, even if the reserve ratio equals or exceeds 2 
percent or 2.5 percent, new large and new highly complex institutions 
shall be subject to the initial and total base assessment rate schedules 
provided for in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (iii) Assessment rate schedules for new small institutions beginning 
the first assessment period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio 
of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period has reached or 
exceeded 1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment periods--(A) 
Initial base assessment rate schedule for new small institutions. In the 
first assessment period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of 
the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period has reached or 
exceeded 1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment periods, the 
initial base assessment rate for a new small institution shall be the 
rate prescribed in the following schedule, even if the reserve ratio 
equals or exceeds 2 percent or 2.5 percent:

[[Page 562]]



   Initial Base Assessment Rate Schedule Beginning the First Assessment Period After June 30, 2016, Where the
   Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Has Reached 1.15 Percent, and For All Subsequent
                                             Assessment Periods \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Risk Category    Risk Category    Risk Category
                                              Risk Category I         II              III               IV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Assessment Rate.....................               7               12               19               30
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually.

    (1) Risk category I initial base assessment rate schedule. The 
annual initial base assessment rates for all new small institutions in 
Risk Category I shall be 7 basis points.
    (2) Risk category II, III, and IV initial base assessment rate 
schedule. The annual initial base assessment rates for all new small 
institutions in Risk Categories II, III, and IV shall be 12, 19, and 30 
basis points, respectively.
    (B) Total base assessment rate schedule for new small institutions. 
In the first assessment period after June 30, 2016, that the reserve 
ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period has 
reached or exceeded 1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment 
periods, the total base assessment rates after adjustments for a new 
small institution shall be the rate prescribed in the following 
schedule, even if the reserve ratio equals or exceeds 2 percent or 2.5 
percent:

Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule (After Adjustments) \1\ Beginning the First Assessment Period After June 30,
2016, Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Has Reached 1.15 Percent, and for All
 Subsequent Assessment Periods Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Is Less Than
                                                  2 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Risk Category I      Risk Category II    Risk Category III    Risk Category IV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Assessment Rate......  7..................  12.................  19.................  30.
Brokered Deposit Adjustment    N/A................  0 to 10............  0 to 10............  0 to 10.
 (added).
                              ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Total Assessment Rate....  7..................  12 to 22...........  19 to 29...........  30 to 40.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Total base rates that are not the minimum
  or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (1) Risk category I total assessment rate schedule. The annual total 
base assessment rates for all new small institutions in Risk Category I 
shall be 7 basis points.
    (2) Risk category II total assessment rate schedule. The annual 
total base assessment rates for all new small institutions in Risk 
Category II shall range from 12 to 22 basis points.
    (3) Risk category III total assessment rate schedule. The annual 
total base assessment rates for all new small institutions in Risk 
Category III shall range from 19 to 29 basis points.
    (4) Risk category IV total assessment rate schedule. The annual 
total base assessment rates for all new small institutions in Risk 
Category IV shall range from 30 to 40 basis points.
    (2) Insured branches of foreign banks--(i) Beginning the first 
assessment period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of the 
DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period has reached or exceeded 
1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment periods where the 
reserve ratio as of the end of the prior assessment period is less than 
2 percent. In the first assessment period after June 30, 2016, where the 
reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment period 
has reached or exceeded 1.15 percent, and for all subsequent assessment 
periods where the reserve ratio as of the end of the prior assessment 
period is less than 2 percent, the initial and

[[Page 563]]

total base assessment rates for an insured branch of a foreign bank, 
except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall be the rate 
prescribed in the following schedule:

 Initial and Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule \1\ Beginning the First Assessment Period After June 30, 2016,
   Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Has Reached 1.15 Percent, and for All
 Subsequent Assessment Periods Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment Period Is Less Than
                                                  2 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Risk Category    Risk Category    Risk Category
                                          Risk Category I             II              III               IV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial and Total Assessment Rate..  3 to 7..................              12               19               30
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial and total base rates that are not
  the minimum or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (A) Risk category I initial and total base assessment rate schedule. 
The annual initial and total base assessment rates for an insured branch 
of a foreign bank in Risk Category I shall range from 3 to 7 basis 
points.
    (B) Risk category II, III, and IV initial and total base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual initial and total base assessment rates for 
Risk Categories II, III, and IV shall be 12, 19, and 30 basis points, 
respectively.
    (C) All insured branches of foreign banks in any one risk category, 
other than Risk Category I, will be charged the same initial base 
assessment rate, subject to adjustment as appropriate.
    (ii) Assessment rate schedule for insured branches of foreign banks 
if the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment 
period is equal to or greater than 2 percent and less than 2.5 percent. 
If the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment 
period is equal to or greater than 2 percent and less than 2.5 percent, 
the initial and total base assessment rates for an insured branch of a 
foreign bank, except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, shall 
be the rate prescribed in the following schedule:

 Initial and Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule \1\ if the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment
                   Period is Equal to or Greater Than 2 Percent but Less Than 2.5 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Risk Category    Risk Category    Risk Category
                                          Risk Category I             II              III               IV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial and Total Assessment Rate..  2 to 6..................              10               17               28
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial and total base rates that are not
  the minimum or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (A) Risk category I initial and total base assessment rate schedule. 
The annual initial and total base assessment rates for an insured branch 
of a foreign bank in Risk Category I shall range from 2 to 6 basis 
points.
    (B) Risk category II, III, and IV initial and total base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual initial and total base assessment rates for 
Risk Categories II, III, and IV shall be 10, 17, and 28 basis points, 
respectively.
    (C) All insured branches of foreign banks in any one risk category, 
other than Risk Category I, will be charged the same initial base 
assessment rate, subject to adjustment as appropriate.
    (iii) Assessment rate schedule for insured branches of foreign banks 
if the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the end of the prior assessment 
period is greater than 2.5 percent. If the reserve ratio of the DIF as 
of the end of the prior assessment period is greater than 2.5 percent, 
the initial and total base assessment rate

[[Page 564]]

for an insured branch of foreign bank, except as provided in paragraph 
(f) of this section, shall be the rate prescribed in the following 
schedule:

 Initial and Total Base Assessment Rate Schedule \1\ If the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior Assessment
                               Period Is Greater Than or Equal to 2.5 Percent \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                   Risk Category   Risk Category   Risk Category
                                            Risk Category I             II              III             IV
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial Assessment Rate..............  1 to 5...................               9              15              25
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The depository institution debt adjustment, which is not included in the table, can increase total base
  assessment rates above the maximum assessment rates shown in the table.
\2\ All amounts for all risk categories are in basis points annually. Initial and total base rates that are not
  the minimum or maximum rate will vary between these rates.

    (A) Risk category I initial and total base assessment rate schedule. 
The annual initial and total base assessment rates for an insured branch 
of a foreign bank in Risk Category I shall range from 1 to 5 basis 
points.
    (B) Risk category II, III, and IV initial and total base assessment 
rate schedule. The annual initial and total base assessment rates for 
Risk Categories II, III, and IV shall be 9, 15, and 25 basis points, 
respectively.
    (C) All insured branches of foreign banks in any one risk category, 
other than Risk Category I, will be charged the same initial base 
assessment rate, subject to adjustment as appropriate.
    (f) Total base assessment rate schedule adjustments and procedures--
(1) Board rate adjustments. The Board may increase or decrease the total 
base assessment rate schedule in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this 
section up to a maximum increase of 2 basis points or a fraction thereof 
or a maximum decrease of 2 basis points or a fraction thereof (after 
aggregating increases and decreases), as the Board deems necessary. Any 
such adjustment shall apply uniformly to each rate in the total base 
assessment rate schedule. In no case may such rate adjustments result in 
a total base assessment rate that is mathematically less than zero or in 
a total base assessment rate schedule that, at any time, is more than 2 
basis points above or below the total base assessment schedule for the 
Deposit Insurance Fund in effect pursuant to paragraph (b) of this 
section, nor may any one such adjustment constitute an increase or 
decrease of more than 2 basis points.
    (2) Amount of revenue. In setting assessment rates, the Board shall 
take into consideration the following:
    (i) Estimated operating expenses of the Deposit Insurance Fund;
    (ii) Case resolution expenditures and income of the Deposit 
Insurance Fund;
    (iii) The projected effects of assessments on the capital and 
earnings of the institutions paying assessments to the Deposit Insurance 
Fund;
    (iv) The risk factors and other factors taken into account pursuant 
to 12 U.S.C. 1817(b)(1); and
    (v) Any other factors the Board may deem appropriate.
    (3) Adjustment procedure. Any adjustment adopted by the Board 
pursuant to this paragraph (f) will be adopted by rulemaking, except 
that the Corporation may set assessment rates as necessary to manage the 
reserve ratio, within set parameters not exceeding cumulatively 2 basis 
points, pursuant to paragraph (f)(1) of this section, without further 
rulemaking.
    (4) Announcement. The Board shall announce the assessment schedules 
and the amount and basis for any adjustment thereto not later than 30 
days before the quarterly certified statement invoice date specified in 
Sec. 327.3(b) for the first assessment period for which the adjustment 
shall be effective. Once set, rates will remain in effect until changed 
by the Board.

[76 FR 10717, Feb. 25, 2011, as amended at 81 FR 32201, May 20, 2016]



Sec. 327.11  Surcharges and assessments required to raise the reserve
ratio of the DIF to 1.35 percent.

    (a) Surcharge--(1) Institutions subject to surcharge. The following 
insured depository institutions are subject to the surcharge described 
in this paragraph:
    (i) Large institutions, as defined in Sec. 327.8(f);

[[Page 565]]

    (ii) Highly complex institutions, as defined in Sec. 327.8(g); and
    (iii) Insured branches of foreign banks whose assets are equal to or 
exceed $10 billion, as reported in Schedule RAL of the branch's most 
recent quarterly Report of Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and 
Agencies of Foreign Banks.
    (2) Surcharge period. The surcharge period shall begin the later of 
the first day of the assessment period following the assessment period 
in which the reserve ratio of the DIF first reaches or exceeds 1.15 
percent, or the assessment period beginning on July 1, 2016. The 
surcharge period shall continue through the earlier of the assessment 
period ending December 31, 2018, or the end of the assessment period in 
which the reserve ratio of the DIF first reaches or exceeds 1.35 
percent.
    (3) Notification of surcharge. The FDIC shall notify each insured 
depository institution subject to the surcharge of the amount of such 
surcharge no later than 15 days before such surcharge is due, as 
described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
    (4) Payment of any surcharge. Each insured depository institution 
subject to the surcharge shall pay to the Corporation any surcharge 
imposed under paragraph (a) of this section in compliance with and 
subject to the provisions of Secs. 327.3, 327.6 and 327.7. The payment 
date for any surcharge shall be the date provided in Sec. 327.3(b)(2) 
for the institution's quarterly certified statement invoice for the 
assessment period in which the surcharge was imposed.
    (5) Calculation of surcharge. An insured depository institution's 
surcharge for each assessment period during the surcharge period shall 
be determined by multiplying 1.125 basis points times the institution's 
surcharge base for the assessment period.
    (i) Surcharge base--Insured depository institution that has no 
affiliated insured depository institution subject to the surcharge. The 
surcharge base for an assessment period for an insured depository 
institution subject to the surcharge that has no affiliated insured 
depository institution subject to the surcharge shall equal:
    (A) The institution's deposit insurance assessment base for the 
assessment period, determined according to Sec. 327.5; plus
    (B) The greater of the increase amount determined according to 
paragraph (a)(5)(iii) of this section or zero; minus
    (C) $10 billion; provided, however, that an institution's surcharge 
base for an assessment period cannot be negative.
    (ii) Surcharge base--insured depository institution that has one or 
more affiliated insured depository institutions subject to the 
surcharge. The surcharge base for an assessment period for an insured 
depository institution subject to the surcharge that has one or more 
affiliated insured depository institutions subject to the surcharge 
shall equal:
    (A) The institution's deposit insurance assessment base for the 
assessment period, determined according to Sec. 327.5; plus
    (B) The greater of the institution's portion, determined according 
to paragraph (a)(5)(v) of this section, of the increase amount 
determined according to paragraph (a)(5)(iii) of this section or zero; 
minus
    (C) The institution's portion, determined according to paragraph 
(a)(5)(v) of this section, of $10 billion; provided, however, that an 
institution's surcharge base for an assessment period cannot be 
negative.
    (iii) Surcharge base--determination of increase amount. The increase 
amount for an assessment period shall equal:
    (A) The amount of the aggregate deposit insurance assessment bases 
for the assessment period, determined according to Sec. 327.5, of all of 
the institution's affiliated insured depository institutions that are 
not subject to the surcharge, minus
    (B) The product of the increase multiplier set out in paragraph 
(a)(5)(iv) of this section and the aggregate deposit insurance 
assessment bases, determined according to Sec. 327.5, as of December 31, 
2015, of all of the small institutions, as defined in Sec. 327.8(e), 
that were the institution's affiliated insured depository institutions 
for the assessment period ending December 31, 2015.
    (iv) Increase multiplier for the assessment periods during the 
surcharge period.

[[Page 566]]

During the surcharge period, the increase multiplier shall be the amount 
prescribed in the following schedule:

  Increase Multipliers for the Assessment Periods During the Surcharge
                                 Period
------------------------------------------------------------------------
            For the assessment period ending--
------------------------------------------------------------------------
September 30, 2016......................................       1.0740995
December 31, 2016.......................................       1.1000000
March 31, 2017..........................................       1.1265251
June 30, 2017...........................................       1.1536897
September 30, 2017......................................       1.1815094
December 31, 2017.......................................       1.2100000
 March 31, 2018.........................................       1.2391776
June 30, 2018...........................................       1.2690587
September 30, 2018......................................       1.2996604
December 31, 2018.......................................       1.3310000
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (A) For the assessment period ending September 30, 2016, the 
increase multiplier shall be 1.0740995.
    (B) For the assessment period ending December 31, 2016, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.1000000.
    (C) For the assessment period ending March 31, 2017, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.1265251.
    (D) For the assessment period ending June 30, 2017, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.1536897.
    (E) For the assessment period ending September 30, 2017, the 
increase multiplier shall be 1.1815094.
    (F) For the assessment period ending December 31, 2017, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.2100000.
    (G) For the assessment period ending March 31, 2018, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.2391776.
    (H) For the assessment period ending June 30, 2018, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.2690587.
    (I) For the assessment period ending September 30, 2018, the 
increase multiplier shall be 1.2996604.
    (J) For the assessment period ending December 31, 2018, the increase 
multiplier shall be 1.33100000.
    (v) Surcharge base--institution's portion. For purposes of 
paragraphs (a)(5)(ii)(B) and (C) of this section, an institution's 
portion shall equal the ratio of the institution's deposit insurance 
assessment base for the assessment period, determined according to 
Sec. 327.5, to the sum of the institution's deposit insurance assessment 
base for the assessment period, determined according to Sec. 327.5, and 
the deposit insurance assessment bases for the assessment period, 
determined according to Sec. 327.5, of all of the institution's 
affiliated insured depository institutions subject to the surcharge.
    (vi) For the purposes of this section, an affiliated insured 
depository institution is an insured depository institution that meets 
the definition of ``affiliate'' in section 3 of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 
1813(w)(6).
    (6) Effect of mergers and consolidations on surcharge base. (i) If 
an insured depository institution acquires another insured depository 
institution through merger or consolidation during the surcharge period, 
the acquirer's surcharge base will be calculated consistent with 
Sec. 327.6 and Sec. 327.11(a)(5). For the purposes of the surcharge, a 
merger or consolidation means any transaction in which an insured 
depository institution merges or consolidates with any other insured 
depository institution, and includes transactions in which an insured 
depository institution either directly or indirectly acquires all or 
substantially all of the assets, or assumes all or substantially all of 
the deposit liabilities of any other insured depository institution 
where there is not a legal merger or consolidation of the two insured 
depository institutions.
    (ii) If an insured depository institution not subject to the 
surcharge is the surviving or resulting institution in a merger or 
consolidation with an insured depository institution that is subject to 
the surcharge or acquires all or substantially all of the assets, or 
assumes all or substantially all of the deposit liabilities, of an 
insured depository institution subject to the surcharge, then the 
surviving or resulting insured deposit institution or the insured 
depository institution that acquires such assets or assumes such deposit 
liabilities is subject to the surcharge.
    (b) Shortfall assessment.--(1) Institutions subject to shortfall 
assessment. Any insured depository institution that was subject to a 
surcharge under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, in any assessment 
period during the surcharge period described in paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section, shall be subject to the shortfall assessment described in this 
paragraph (b). If surcharges under paragraph (a) of this section have 
not been in effect,

[[Page 567]]

the insured depository institutions subject to the shortfall assessment 
described in this paragraph (b) will be the insured depository 
institutions described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section as of the 
assessment period in which the reserve ratio of the DIF reaches or 
exceeds 1.15 percent.
    (2) Notification of shortfall. The FDIC shall notify each insured 
depository institution subject to the shortfall assessment of the amount 
of such institution's share of the shortfall assessment described in 
paragraph (b)(5) of this section no later than 15 days before such 
shortfall assessment is due, as described in paragraph (b)(3) of this 
section.
    (3) Payment of any shortfall assessment. Each insured depository 
institution subject to the shortfall assessment shall pay to the 
Corporation such institution's share of any shortfall assessment as 
described in paragraph (b)(5) of this section in compliance with and 
subject to the provisions of Secs. 327.3, 327.6 and 327.7. The payment 
date for any shortfall assessment shall be the date provided in 
Sec. 327.3(b)(2) for the institution's quarterly certified statement 
invoice for the assessment period in which the shortfall assessment is 
imposed.
    (4) Amount of aggregate shortfall assessment. (i) If the reserve 
ratio of the DIF is at least 1.15 percent but has not reached or 
exceeded 1.35 percent as of December 31, 2018, the shortfall assessment 
shall be imposed on March 31, 2019, and shall equal 1.35 percent of 
estimated insured deposits as of December 31, 2018, minus the actual DIF 
balance as of that date.
    (ii) If the reserve ratio of the DIF is less than 1.15 percent and 
has not reached or exceeded 1.35 percent by December 31, 2018, the 
shortfall assessment shall be imposed at the end of the assessment 
period immediately following the assessment period that occurs after 
December 31, 2018, during which the reserve ratio first reaches or 
exceeds 1.15 percent and shall equal 0.2 percent of estimated insured 
deposits as of the end of the calendar quarter in which the reserve 
ratio first reaches or exceeds 1.15 percent.
    (5) Institutions' shares of aggregate shortfall assessment. Each 
insured depository institution's share of the aggregate shortfall 
assessment shall be determined by apportioning the aggregate amount of 
the shortfall assessment among all institutions subject to the shortfall 
assessment in proportion to each institution's shortfall assessment base 
as described in this paragraph.
    (i) Shortfall assessment base if surcharges have been in effect. If 
surcharges have been in effect, an institution's shortfall assessment 
base shall equal the average of the institution's surcharge bases during 
the surcharge period. For purposes of determining the average surcharge 
base, if an institution was not subject to the surcharge during any 
assessment period of the surcharge period, its surcharge base shall 
equal zero for that assessment period.
    (ii) Shortfall assessment base if surcharges have not been in 
effect. If surcharges have not been in effect, an institution's 
shortfall assessment base shall equal the average of what its surcharge 
bases would have been over the four assessment periods ending with the 
assessment period in which the reserve ratio first reaches or exceeds 
1.15 percent. If an institution would not have been subject to a 
surcharge during one of those assessment periods, its surcharge base 
shall equal zero for that assessment period.
    (6) Effect of mergers and consolidations on shortfall assessment. 
(i) If an insured depository institution, through merger or 
consolidation, acquires another insured depository institution that paid 
surcharges for one or more assessment periods, the acquirer will be 
subject to a shortfall assessment and its average surcharge base will be 
increased by the average surcharge base of the acquired institution, 
consistent with paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
    (ii) For the purposes of the shortfall assessment, a merger or 
consolidation means any transaction in which an insured depository 
institution merges or consolidates with any other insured depository 
institution, and includes transactions in which an insured depository 
institution either directly or indirectly acquires all or substantially 
all of the assets, or assumes all or substantially all of the deposit 
liabilities

[[Page 568]]

of any other insured depository institution where there is not a legal 
merger or consolidation of the two insured depository institutions.
    (c) Assessment credits. (1)(i) Eligible Institutions. For the 
purposes of this paragraph (c) an insured depository institution will be 
considered an eligible institution, if, for at least one assessment 
period during the credit calculation period, the institution was a 
credit accruing institution.
    (ii) Credit accruing institutions. A credit accruing institution is 
an institution that, for a particular assessment period, is not:
    (A) A large institution, as defined in Sec. 327.8(f);
    (B) A highly complex institution, as defined in Sec. 327.8(g); or
    (C) An insured branch of a foreign bank whose assets are equal to or 
exceed $10 billion, as reported in Schedule RAL of the branch's most 
recent quarterly Report of Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and 
Agencies of Foreign Banks.
    (2) Credit calculation period. The credit calculation period shall 
begin the first day of the assessment period after the reserve ratio of 
the DIF reaches or exceeds 1.15 percent, and shall continue through the 
earlier of the assessment period that the reserve ratio of the DIF 
reaches or exceeds 1.35 percent or the assessment period that ends 
December 31, 2018.
    (3) Determination of aggregate assessment credit awards to all 
eligible institutions. The FDIC shall award an aggregate amount of 
assessment credits equal to the product of the fraction of quarterly 
regular deposit insurance assessments paid by credit accruing 
institutions during the credit calculation period and the amount by 
which the DIF increase, as determined under paragraph (c)(3)(ii) or 
(iii) of this section, exceeds total surcharges imposed under paragraph 
(b) of this section; provided, however, that the aggregate amount of 
assessment credits cannot exceed the aggregate amount of quarterly 
deposit insurance assessments paid by credit accruing institutions 
during the credit calculation period.
    (i) Fraction of quarterly regular deposit insurance assessments paid 
by credit accruing institutions. The fraction of assessments paid by 
credit accruing institutions shall equal quarterly deposit insurance 
assessments, as determined under Sec. 327.9, paid by such institutions 
for each assessment period during the credit calculation period, divided 
by the total amount of quarterly deposit insurance assessments paid by 
all insured depository institutions during the credit calculation 
period, excluding the aggregate amount of surcharges imposed under 
paragraph (b) of this section.
    (ii) DIF increase if the DIF reserve ratio has reached 1.35 percent 
by December 31, 2018. If the DIF reserve ratio has reached 1.35 percent 
by December 31, 2018, the DIF increase shall equal 0.2 percent of 
estimated insured deposits as of the date that the DIF reserve ratio 
first reaches or exceeds 1.35 percent.
    (iii) DIF Increase if the DIF reserve ratio has not reached 1.35 
percent by December 31, 2018. If the DIF reserve ratio has not reached 
1.35 percent by December 31, 2018, the DIF increase shall equal the DIF 
balance on December 31, 2018, minus 1.15 percent of estimated insured 
deposits on that date.
    (4) Determination of individual eligible institutions' shares of 
aggregate assessment Credit.--
    (i) Assessment credit share. To determine an eligible institution's 
assessment credit share, the aggregate assessment credits awarded by the 
FDIC shall be apportioned among all eligible institutions in proportion 
to their respective assessment credit bases, as described in paragraph 
(c)(4)(ii) of this section.
    (ii) Assessment credit base. An eligible institution's assessment 
credit base shall equal the average of its quarterly deposit insurance 
assessment bases, as determined under Sec. 327.5, during the credit 
calculation period, as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section. An 
eligible institution's credit base shall be deemed to equal zero for any 
assessment period during which the institution was not a credit accruing 
institution.
    (iii) Limitation. The assessment credits awarded to an eligible 
institution shall not exceed the total amount of

[[Page 569]]

quarterly deposit insurance assessments paid by that institution for 
assessment periods during the credit calculation period in which it was 
a credit accruing institution.
    (5) Effect of merger or consolidation on assessment credit base. If 
an eligible institution acquires another eligible institution through 
merger or consolidation before the reserve ratio of the DIF reaches 1.35 
percent, the acquirer's quarterly deposit insurance assessment base (for 
purposes of calculating the acquirer's assessment credit base) shall be 
deemed to include the acquired institution's deposit insurance 
assessment base for the assessment periods during the credit calculation 
period that were prior to the merger or consolidation and in which the 
acquired institution was a credit accruing institution.
    (6) Effect of call report amendments. Amendments to the quarterly 
Reports of Condition and Income or the quarterly Reports of Assets and 
Liabilities of U.S. Branches and Agencies of Foreign Banks that occur 
subsequent to the payment date for the final assessment period of the 
credit calculation period shall not affect an eligible institution's 
credit share.
    (7) Award and notice of assessment credits--(i) Award of assessment 
credits. As soon as practicable after the earlier of either December 31, 
2018, or the date on which the reserve ratio of the DIF reaches 1.35 
percent, the FDIC shall notify an eligible institution of the FDIC's 
preliminary estimate of such institution's assessment credits and the 
manner in which the FDIC calculated such credits.
    (ii) Notice of assessment credits. The FDIC shall provide eligible 
institutions with periodic updated notices reflecting adjustments to the 
institution's assessment credits resulting from requests for review or 
appeals, mergers or consolidations, or the FDIC's application of credits 
to an institution's quarterly deposit insurance assessments.
    (8) Requests for review and appeal of assessment credits. Any 
institution that disagrees with the FDIC's computation of or basis for 
its assessment credits, as determined under this paragraph (c), may 
request review of the FDIC's determination or appeal that determination. 
Such requests for review or appeal shall be filed pursuant to the 
procedures set forth in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (9) Successors. If an insured depository institution acquires an 
eligible institution through merger or consolidation after the reserve 
ratio of the DIF reaches 1.35 percent, the acquirer is successor to any 
assessment credits of the acquired institution.
    (10) Mergers and consolidation include only legal mergers and 
consolidation. For the purposes of this paragraph (c), a merger or 
consolidation does not include transactions in which an insured 
depository institution either directly or indirectly acquires the assets 
of, or assumes liability to pay any deposits made in, any other insured 
depository institution, but there is not a legal merger or consolidation 
of the two insured depository institutions.
    (11) Use of credits. (i) The FDIC shall apply assessment credits 
awarded under paragraph (c) of this section to an institution's deposit 
insurance assessments, as calculated under Sec. 327.9, only for 
assessment periods in which the reserve ratio of the DIF exceeds 1.38 
percent.
    (ii) The FDIC shall apply assessment credits to reduce an 
institution's quarterly deposit insurance assessments by each 
institution's remaining credits. The assessment credit applied to each 
institution's deposit insurance assessment for any assessment period 
shall not exceed the institution's total deposit insurance assessment 
for that assessment period.
    (iii) The amount of credits applied each quarter will not be 
recalculated as a result of amendments to the quarterly Reports of 
Condition and Income or the quarterly Reports of Assets and Liabilities 
of U.S. Branches and Agencies of Foreign Banks pertaining to any quarter 
in which credits have been applied.
    (12) Transfer or sale of credits. Other than through merger or 
consolidation, credits may not be sold or transferred.
    (d) Request for review and appeals of assessment credits. (1) An 
institution that disagrees with the basis for its assessment credits, or 
the Corporation's computation of its assessments credits

[[Page 570]]

under paragraph (c) of this section and seeks to change it must submit a 
written request for review and any supporting documentation to the 
FDIC's Director of the Division of Finance.
    (2) Timing. (i) Any request for review under this paragraph must be 
submitted within 30 days from
    (A) The initial notice provided by the FDIC to the insured 
depository institution under paragraph (c)(7) of this section stating 
the FDIC's preliminary estimate of an eligible institution's assessment 
credit and the manner in which the assessment credit was calculated; or
    (B) Any updated notice provided by the FDIC to the insured 
depository institution under paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
    (ii) Any requests submitted after the deadline in paragraph 
(d)(2)(i) of this section will be considered untimely filed and the 
institution will be subsequently barred from submitting a request for 
review of its assessment credit.
    (3) Process of review. (i) Upon receipt of a request for review, the 
FDIC shall temporarily freeze the amount of the assessment credit being 
reviewed until a final determination is made by the Corporation.
    (ii) The FDIC may request, as part of its review, additional 
information from the insured depository institution involved in the 
request and any such information must be submitted to the FDIC within 21 
days of the FDIC's request;
    (iii) The FDIC's Director of the Division of Finance, or his or her 
designee, will notify the requesting institution of his or her 
determination of whether a change is warranted within 60 days of receipt 
by the FDIC of the request for review, or if additional information had 
been requested from the FDIC, within 60 days of receipt of any such 
additional information.
    (4) Appeal. If the requesting institution disagrees with the final 
determination from the Director of the Division of Finance, that 
institution may appeal its assessment credit determination to the FDIC's 
Assessment Appeals Committee within 30 days from the date of the 
Director's written determination. Notice of the procedures applicable to 
an appeal before the Assessment Appeals Committee will be included in 
the Director's written determination.
    (5) Adjustments to assessment credits. Once the Director of the 
Division of Finance, or the Assessment Appeals Committee, as 
appropriate, has notified the requesting bank of its final 
determination, the FDIC will make appropriate adjustments to assessment 
credit amounts consistent with that determination. Adjustments to an 
insured depository institution's assessment credit amounts will not be 
applied retroactively to reduce or increase the quarterly deposit 
insurance assessment for a prior assessment period.

[81 FR 16069, Mar. 25, 2016]



Sec. 327.12  Prepayment of quarterly risk-based assessments.

    (a) Requirement to prepay assessment. On December 30, 2009, each 
insured depository institution shall pay to the FDIC a prepaid 
assessment, which shall equal its estimated quarterly risk-based 
assessments aggregated for the fourth quarter of 2009, and all of 2010, 
2011, and 2012 (the ``prepayment period'').
    (b) Calculation of prepaid assessment-- (1) Prepaid assessment-- (i) 
Fourth quarter 2009 and all of 2010. An institution's prepaid assessment 
for the fourth quarter of 2009 and for all of 2010 shall be determined 
by multiplying its prepaid assessment rate as defined in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section times the corresponding prepaid assessment base 
for each quarter as determined pursuant to paragraph (b)(3) of this 
section.
    (ii) All of 2011 and 2012. An institution's prepaid assessment for 
each quarter of 2011 and 2012 shall be determined by multiplying the sum 
of its prepaid assessment rate as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section, plus .75 basis points (which implements the 3 basis point 
increase in annual assessment rates adopted by the Board on September 
29, 2009), times the corresponding prepaid assessment base for each 
quarter determined pursuant to paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
    (2) Prepaid assessment rate. For each quarter of the prepayment 
period, an institution's prepaid assessment rate shall equal the total 
base assessment

[[Page 571]]

rate that the institution would have paid for the third quarter of 2009 
had the institution's CAMELS ratings in effect on September 30, 2009, 
and, where applicable, long-term debt issuer ratings in effect on 
September 30, 2009, been in effect for the entire third quarter of 2009.
    (3) Prepaid assessment base. For each quarter of the prepayment 
period, an institution's prepaid assessment base shall be calculated by 
increasing its third quarter 2009 assessment base at an annual rate of 5 
percent.
    (4) Finality of prepaid assessment. The prepaid assessment rate and 
prepaid assessment base defined in paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this 
section shall be determined based upon data in the FDIC's computer 
systems as of December 24, 2009. Changes to data underlying an 
institution's adjusted total base assessment rate or assessment base, 
whether by amendment to a report of condition or otherwise, received by 
the FDIC after December 24, 2009, shall not affect an institution's 
prepaid assessment.
    (5) Prepaid assessment rates for mergers and consolidations. For 
mergers and consolidations recorded in the FDIC's computer systems no 
later than December 24, 2009, the acquired institution's prepaid 
assessment rate under paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall be the 
prepaid assessment rate of the acquiring institution.
    (c) Invoicing of prepaid assessment. The FDIC shall advise each 
insured depository institution of the amount and calculation of its 
prepaid assessment at the same time the FDIC provides the institution's 
quarterly certified statement invoice for the third quarter of 2009. The 
FDIC will re-invoice through FDICconnect based upon any data changes as 
provided in paragraph (b)(4) of this section.
    (d) Payment of prepaid assessment. Each insured depository 
institution shall pay to the Corporation the amount of its prepaid 
assessment as required under paragraph (a) of this section in compliance 
with and subject to the provisions of Secs. 327.3 and 327.7 of subpart 
A.
    (1) Exception to ACH payment. If an institution's prepaid assessment 
is greater than $99 million, the institution shall make payment by wire 
transfer to the FDIC, rather than by funding its designated deposit 
account for payment via ACH as provided in Sec. 327.3 of subpart A.
    (2) One-time assessment credits. The FDIC will not apply an 
institution's one-time assessment credit under subpart B of this part 
327 to reduce an institution's prepaid assessment. The FDIC will apply 
an institution's remaining one-time assessment credits under Part 327 
subpart B to its quarterly deposit insurance assessments before applying 
its prepaid assessments.
    (e) Use of prepaid assessments. Prepaid assessments shall only be 
used to offset regular quarterly risk-based deposit insurance 
assessments payable under this subpart A. The FDIC will begin offsetting 
regular quarterly risk-based deposit insurance assessments against 
prepaid assessments on March 30, 2010. The FDIC will continue to make 
such offsets until the earlier of the exhaustion of the institution's 
prepaid assessment or June 30, 2013. Any prepaid assessment remaining 
after collection of the amount due on June 30, 2013, shall be returned 
to the institution. If the FDIC, in its discretion, determines that its 
liquidity needs allow, it may return any remaining prepaid assessment to 
the institution prior to June 30, 2013.
    (f) Transfers. An insured depository institution may enter into an 
agreement to transfer, but not pledge, any portion of that institution's 
prepaid assessment to another insured depository institution, provided 
that the parties to the agreement notify the FDIC's Division of Finance 
and submit a written agreement, signed by legal representatives of both 
institutions. The parties must include documentation stating that each 
representative has the legal authority to bind the institution. The 
institution transferring its prepaid assessment shall submit the 
required notice and documentation through FDICconnect. That information 
will be presented by the FDIC through FDICconnect to the institution 
acquiring the prepaid assessments for its acceptance. The adjustment to 
the amount of the prepaid assessment for each institution involved in 
the transfer will be made in the next assessment

[[Page 572]]

invoice that is sent at least 10 days after the FDIC's receipt of 
acceptance by the institution acquiring the prepaid assessments.
    (g) Prepaid assessments following a merger. In the event that an 
insured depository institution merges with, or consolidates into, 
another insured depository institution, the surviving or resulting 
institution will be entitled to use any unused portion of the acquired 
institution's prepaid assessment not otherwise transferred pursuant to 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (h) Disposition in the event of failure or termination of insured 
status. In the event of failure of an insured depository institution, 
any amount of its prepaid assessment remaining (other than any amounts 
needed to satisfy its assessment obligations not yet offset against the 
prepaid amount) will be refunded to the institution's receiver. In the 
event that an insured depository institution's insured status 
terminates, any amount of its prepaid assessment remaining (other than 
any amounts needed to satisfy its assessment obligations not yet offset 
against the prepaid amount) will be refunded to the institution, subject 
to the provisions of Sec. 327.6 of subpart A.
    (i) Exemptions--(1) Exemption without application. The FDIC, after 
consultation with an institution's primary federal regulator, will 
exercise its discretion as supervisor and insurer to exempt an 
institution from the prepayment requirement under paragraph (a) of this 
section if the FDIC determines that the prepayment would adversely 
affect the safety and soundness of that institution. No application is 
required for this review and the FDIC will notify any affected 
institution of its exemption by November 23, 2009.
    (2) Application for exemption. An institution may also apply to the 
FDIC for an exemption from the prepayment requirement under paragraph 
(a) of this section if the prepayment would significantly impair the 
institution's liquidity, or would otherwise create extraordinary 
hardship. Written applications for exemption from the prepayment 
obligation must be submitted to the Director of the Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection on or before December 1, 2009, by 
electronic mail ([email protected]) or fax (202-898-6676). The 
application must contain a full explanation of the need for the 
exemption and provide supporting documentation, including current 
financial statements, cash flow projections, and any other relevant 
information, including any information the FDIC may request. The FDIC 
will exercise its discretion in deciding whether to exempt an 
institution that files an application for exemption. An application 
shall be deemed denied unless the FDIC notifies an applying institution 
by December 15, 2009, either that the institution is exempt from the 
prepaid assessment or the FDIC has postponed determination under 
paragraph (i)(4) of this section. The FDIC's denial of applications for 
exemption will be final and not subject to further agency review.
    (3) Application for withdrawal of exemption. An institution that has 
received an exemption under paragraph (i)(1) of this section may request 
that the FDIC withdraw the exemption. Written applications for 
withdrawal of exemption must be submitted to the Director of the 
Division of Supervision and Consumer Protection on or before December 1, 
2009, by electronic mail ([email protected]) or fax (202-898-
6676). The application must contain a full explanation of the reasons 
the exemption is not needed and provide supporting documentation, 
including current financial statements, cash flow projections, and any 
other relevant information, including any information the FDIC may 
request. The FDIC, after consultation with the institution's primary 
Federal regulator, will exercise its discretion in deciding whether to 
withdraw the exemption. The FDIC will notify an institution of its 
decision to withdraw the exemption by December 15, 2009; that 
determination will be final and not subject to further agency review. An 
application shall be deemed denied unless the FDIC notifies an applying 
institution by December 15, 2009, that the exemption is withdrawn.
    (4) Postponement of determination. The FDIC may postpone making a 
determination on any application for exemption filed under paragraph 
(i)(2) of

[[Page 573]]

this section until no later than January 14, 2010. An institution 
notified by the FDIC of such postponement will not have to pay the 
prepaid assessment calculated under paragraph (b) of this section on 
December 30, 2009. If the FDIC denies the application for exemption, the 
FDIC will notify the institution of the denial and of the date by which 
the institution must pay the prepaid assessment. The due date for 
payment of the prepaid assessment after such a denial will be no less 
than 15 days after the date of the notice of denial.
    (5) Obligation to pay third quarter 2009 assessment. Any institution 
exempted from the prepayment requirement or any institution whose 
application for exemption has been postponed under this section shall 
pay to the Corporation on December 30, 2009, any amount due for the 
third quarter of 2009 as shown on the certified statement invoice for 
that quarter.

[74 FR 59065, Nov. 17, 2009]



Sec. 327.15  Emergency special assessments.

    (a) Emergency special assessment imposed on June 30, 2009. On June 
30, 2009, the FDIC shall impose an emergency special assessment of 20 
basis points on each insured depository institution based on the 
institution's assessment base calculated pursuant to Sec. 327.5 for the 
second assessment period of 2009.
    (b) Emergency special assessments after June 30, 2009. After June 
30, 2009, if the reserve ratio of the Deposit Insurance Fund is 
estimated to fall to a level that that the Board believes would 
adversely affect public confidence or to a level which shall be close to 
zero or negative at the end of a calendar quarter, an emergency special 
assessment of up to 10 basis points may be imposed by a vote of the 
Board on all insured depository institutions based on each institution's 
assessment base calculated pursuant to Sec. 327.5 for the corresponding 
assessment period.
    (1) Estimation process. For purposes of any emergency special 
assessment under this paragraph (b), the FDIC shall estimate the reserve 
ratio of the Deposit Insurance Fund for the applicable calendar quarter 
end from available data on, or estimates of, insurance fund assessment 
income, investment income, operating expenses, other revenue and 
expenses, and loss provisions, including provisions for anticipated 
failures. The FDIC will assume that estimated insured deposits will 
increase during the quarter at the average quarterly rate over the 
previous four quarters.
    (2) Imposition and announcement of emergency special assessments. 
Any emergency special assessment under this paragraph (b) shall be on 
the last day of a calendar quarter and shall be announced by the end of 
such quarter. As soon as practicable after announcement, the FDIC will 
have a notice published in the Federal Register of the emergency special 
assessment.
    (c) Invoicing of any emergency special assessments. The FDIC shall 
advise each insured depository institution of the amount and calculation 
of any emergency special assessment imposed under paragraph (a) or (b) 
of this section. This information shall be provided at the same time as 
the institution's quarterly certified statement invoice for the 
assessment period in which the emergency special assessment was imposed.
    (d) Payment of any emergency special assessment. Each insured 
depository institution shall pay to the Corporation any emergency 
special assessment imposed under paragraph (a) or (b) of this section in 
compliance with and subject to the provisions of Secs. 327.3, 327.6 and 
327.7 of subpart A, and the provisions of subpart B. The payment date 
for any emergency special assessment shall be the date provided in 
Sec. 327.3(b)(2) for the institution's quarterly certified statement 
invoice for the calendar quarter in which the emergency special 
assessment was imposed.

[74 FR 9341, Mar. 3, 2009]



Sec. 327.16  Assessment pricing methods--beginning the first assessment
period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of the DIF as of 
the end of the prior assessment period has reached or exceeded 1.15
percent.

    (a) Established small institutions. Beginning the first assessment 
period after June 30, 2016, where the reserve ratio of the DIF as of the 
end of the

[[Page 574]]

prior assessment period has reached or exceeded 1.15 percent, and for 
all subsequent assessment periods, an established small institution 
shall have its initial base assessment rate determined by using the 
financial ratios methods set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (1) Under the financial ratios method, each of seven financial 
ratios and a weighted average of CAMELS component ratings will be 
multiplied by a corresponding pricing multiplier. The sum of these 
products will be added to a uniform amount. The resulting sum shall 
equal the institution's initial base assessment rate; provided, however, 
that no institution's initial base assessment rate shall be less than 
the minimum initial base assessment rate in effect for established small 
institutions with a particular CAMELS composite rating for that 
assessment period nor greater than the maximum initial base assessment 
rate in effect for established small institutions with a particular 
CAMELS composite rating for that assessment period. An institution's 
initial base assessment rate, subject to adjustment pursuant to 
paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section, as appropriate (resulting in 
the institution's total base assessment rate, which in no case can be 
lower than 50 percent of the institution's initial base assessment 
rate), and adjusted for the actual assessment rates set by the Board 
under Sec. 327.10(f), will equal an institution's assessment rate. The 
seven financial ratios are: Leverage Ratio (%); Net Income before Taxes/
Total Assets (%); Nonperforming Loans and Leases/Gross Assets (%); Other 
Real Estate Owned/Gross Assets (%); Brokered Deposit Ratio (%); One Year 
Asset Growth (%); and Loan Mix Index. The ratios and the weighted 
average of CAMELS component ratings are defined in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) 
of this section. The ratios will be determined for an assessment period 
based upon information contained in an institution's report of condition 
filed as of the last day of the assessment period as set out in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section. The weighted average of CAMELS 
component ratings is created by multiplying each component by the 
following percentages and adding the products: Capital adequacy--25%, 
Asset quality--20%, Management--25%, Earnings--10%, Liquidity--10%, and 
Sensitivity to market risk--10%. The following tables set forth the 
values of the pricing multipliers:

  Pricing Multipliers Applicable Beginning the First Assessment Period
 After June 30, 2016, Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior
   Assessment Period Has Reached 1.15 Percent, and for All Subsequent
  Assessment Periods Where the Reserve Ratio as of the End of the Prior
                Assessment Period Is Less Than 2 Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Pricing
                   Risk measures \1\                     multipliers \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio.........................................           ^1.264
Net Income before Taxes/Total Assets...................           ^0.720
Nonperforming Loans and Leases/Gross Assets............            0.942
Other Real Estate Owned/Gross Assets...................            0.533
Brokered Deposit Ratio.................................            0.264
One Year Asset Growth..................................            0.061
Loan Mix Index.........................................            0.081
Weighted Average CAMELS Component Rating...............            1.519
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Ratios are expressed as percentages.
\2\ Multipliers are rounded to three decimal places.


 Pricing Multipliers Applicable When the Reserve Ratio as of the End of
  the Prior Assessment Period Is Equal to or Greater Than 2 Percent but
                          Less Than 2.5 Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Pricing
                   Risk measures \1\                     multipliers \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage Ratio.........................................           ^1.217
Net Income before Taxes/Total Assets...................           ^0.694
Nonperforming Loans and Leases/Gross Assets............            0.907
Other Real Estate Owned/Gross Assets...................            0.513
Brokered Deposit Ratio.................................            0.254
One Year Asset Growth..................................            0.059
Loan Mix Index.........................................            0.078
Weighted Average CAMELS Component Rating...............            1.463
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Ratios are expressed as percentages.
\2\ Multipliers are rounded to three decimal places.


 Pricing Multipliers Applicable When the Reserve Ratio as of the End of
   the Prior Assessment Period Is Greater Than or Equal to 2.5 Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Pricing
                   Risk measures \1\                     multipliers \2\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage Ratio.........................................           ^1.123
Net Income before Taxes/Total Assets...................           ^0.640
Nonperforming Loans and Leases/Gross Assets............            0.837
Other Real Estate Owned/Gross Assets...................            0.474
Brokered Deposit Ratio.................................            0.235

[[Page 575]]

 
One Year Asset Growth..................................            0.054
Loan Mix Index.........................................            0.072
Weighted Average CAMELS Component Rating...............            1.350
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Ratios are expressed as percentages.
\2\ Multipliers are rounded to three decimal places.

    (i) Uniform amount. Except as adjusted for the actual assessment 
rates set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f), the uniform amount shall 
be:
    (A) 7.352 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(b) is in effect;
    (B) 6.188 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(c) is in effect; or
    (C) 4.870 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(d) is in effect.
    (ii) Definitions of measures used in the financial ratios method--
(A) Definitions. The following table lists and defines the measures used 
in the financial ratios method:

       Definitions of Measures Used in the Financial Ratios Method
------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Variables                           Description
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage Ratio (%)................  Tier 1 capital divided by adjusted
                                     average assets. (Numerator and
                                     denominator are both based on the
                                     definition for prompt corrective
                                     action.)
Net Income before Taxes/Total       Income (before applicable income
 Assets (%).                         taxes and discontinued operations)
                                     for the most recent twelve months
                                     divided by total assets.\1\
Nonperforming Loans and Leases/     Sum of total loans and lease
 Gross Assets (%).                   financing receivables past due 90
                                     or more days and still accruing
                                     interest and total nonaccrual loans
                                     and lease financing receivables
                                     (excluding, in both cases, the
                                     maximum amount recoverable from the
                                     U.S. Government, its agencies or
                                     government-sponsored enterprises,
                                     under guarantee or insurance
                                     provisions) divided by gross
                                     assets.\2\
Other Real Estate Owned/Gross       Other real estate owned divided by
 Assets (%).                         gross assets.\2\
Brokered Deposit Ratio............  The ratio of the difference between
                                     brokered deposits and 10 percent of
                                     total assets to total assets. For
                                     institutions that are well
                                     capitalized and have a CAMELS
                                     composite rating of 1 or 2,
                                     reciprocal deposits are deducted
                                     from brokered deposits. If the
                                     ratio is less than zero, the value
                                     is set to zero.
Weighted Average of C, A, M, E, L,  The weighted sum of the ``C,''
 and S Component Ratings.            ``A,'' ``M,'' ``E'', ``L'', and
                                     ``S'' CAMELS components, with
                                     weights of 25 percent each for the
                                     ``C'' and ``M'' components, 20
                                     percent for the ``A'' component,
                                     and 10 percent each for the ``E'',
                                     ``L'', and ``S'' components.
Loan Mix Index....................  A measure of credit risk described
                                     paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this
                                     section.
One-Year Asset Growth (%).........  Growth in assets (adjusted for
                                     mergers \3\) over the previous year
                                     in excess of 10 percent.\4\ If
                                     growth is less than 10 percent, the
                                     value is set to zero.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The ratio of Net Income before Taxes to Total Assets is bounded
  below by (and cannot be less than) ^25 percent and is bounded above by
  (and cannot exceed) 3 percent.
\2\ Gross assets are total assets plus the allowance for loan and lease
  financing receivable losses (ALLL).
\3\ Growth in assets is also adjusted for acquisitions of failed banks.
\4\ The maximum value of the Asset Growth measure is 230 percent; that
  is, asset growth (merger adjusted) over the previous year in excess of
  240 percent (230 percentage points in excess of the 10 percent
  threshold) will not further increase a bank's assessment rate.

    (B) Definition of loan mix index. The Loan Mix Index assigns loans 
in an institution's loan portfolio to the categories of loans described 
in the following table. The Loan Mix Index is calculated by multiplying 
the ratio of an institution's amount of loans in a particular loan 
category to its total assets by the associated weighted average charge-
off rate for that loan category, and summing the products for all loan 
categories. The table gives the weighted average charge-off rate for 
each category of loan. The Loan Mix Index excludes credit card loans.

   Loan Mix Index Categories and Weighted Charge-Off Rate Percentages
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Weighted
                                                            charge-off
                                                           rate percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Construction & Development..............................       4.4965840
Commercial & Industrial.................................       1.5984506
Leases..................................................       1.4974551
Other Consumer..........................................       1.4559717
Loans to Foreign Government.............................      1.33384093
Real Estate Loans Residual..............................       1.0169338
Multifamily Residential.................................       0.8847597
Nonfarm Nonresidential..................................        .7289274
I-4 Family Residential..................................       0.6973778
Loans to Depository banks...............................       0.5760532
Agricultural Real Estate................................       0.2376712

[[Page 576]]

 
Agriculture.............................................       0.2432737
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) Implementation of CAMELS rating changes--(A) Composite rating 
change. If, during an assessment period, a CAMELS composite rating 
change occurs in a way that changes the institution's initial base 
assessment rate, then the institution's initial base assessment rate for 
the portion of the assessment period prior to the change shall be 
determined using the assessment schedule for the appropriate CAMELS 
composite rating in effect before the change, including any minimum or 
maximum initial base assessment rates, and subject to adjustment 
pursuant to paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section, as appropriate, 
and adjusted for actual assessment rates set by the Board under 
Sec. 327.10(f). For the portion of the assessment period after the 
CAMELS composite rating change, the institution's initial base 
assessment rate shall be determined using the assessment schedule for 
the applicable CAMELS composite rating in effect, including any minimum 
or maximum initial base assessment rates, and subject to adjustment 
pursuant to paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section, as appropriate, 
and adjusted for actual assessment rates set by the Board under 
Sec. 327.10(f).
    (B) Component ratings changes. If, during an assessment period, a 
CAMELS component rating change occurs in a way that changes the 
institution's initial base assessment rate, the initial base assessment 
rate for the period before the change shall be determined under the 
financial ratios method using the CAMELS component ratings in effect 
before the change, subject to adjustment under paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) 
of this section, as appropriate. Beginning on the date of the CAMELS 
component rating change, the initial base assessment rate for the 
remainder of the assessment period shall be determined under the 
financial ratios method using the CAMELS component ratings in effect 
after the change, again subject to adjustment under paragraphs (e)(1) 
and (2) of this section, as appropriate.
    (iv) No CAMELS composite rating or no CAMELS component ratings--(A) 
No CAMELS composite rating. If, during an assessment period, an 
institution has no CAMELS composite rating, its initial assessment rate 
will be 2 basis points above the minimum initial assessment rate for 
established small institutions until it receives a CAMELS composite 
rating.
    (B) No CAMELS component ratings. If, during an assessment period, an 
institution has a CAMELS composite rating but no CAMELS component 
ratings, the initial base assessment rate for that institution shall be 
determined under the financial ratios method using the CAMELS composite 
rating for its weighted average CAMELS component rating and, if the 
institution has not yet filed four quarterly reports of condition, by 
annualizing, where appropriate, financial ratios obtained from all 
quarterly reports of condition that have been filed.
    (2) Applicable quarterly reports of condition. The financial ratios 
used to determine the assessment rate for an established small 
institution shall be based upon information contained in an 
institution's Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income (or successor 
report, as appropriate) dated as of March 31 for the assessment period 
beginning the preceding January 1; dated as of June 30 for the 
assessment period beginning the preceding April 1; dated as of September 
30 for the assessment period beginning the preceding July 1; and dated 
as of December 31 for the assessment period beginning the preceding 
October 1.
    (b) Large and highly complex institutions--(1) Assessment scorecard 
for large institutions (other than highly complex institutions). (i) A 
large institution other than a highly complex institution shall have its 
initial base assessment rate determined using the scorecard for large 
institutions.

[[Page 577]]



                                        Scorecard for Large Institutions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                            Measure    Component
                                                    Scorecard measures and components       weights     weights
                                                                                           (percent)   (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P..............................................  Performance Score......................
P.1............................................  Weighted Average CAMELS Rating.........         100          30
P.2............................................  Ability to Withstand Asset-Related       ..........          50
                                                  Stress.
                                                 Leverage ratio.........................          10
                                                 Concentration Measure..................          35
                                                 Core Earnings/Average Quarter-End Total          20
                                                  Assets \1\.
                                                 Credit Quality Measure.................          35
P.3............................................  Ability to Withstand Funding-Related     ..........          20
                                                  Stress.
                                                 Core Deposits/Total Liabilities........          60
                                                 Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio..........          40
L..............................................  Loss Severity Score....................
L.1............................................  Loss Severity Measure..................  ..........         100
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Average of five quarter-end total assets (most recent and four prior quarters).

    (ii) The scorecard for large institutions produces two scores: 
Performance score and loss severity score.
    (A) Performance score for large institutions. The performance score 
for large institutions is a weighted average of the scores for three 
measures: The weighted average CAMELS rating score, weighted at 30 
percent; the ability to withstand asset-related stress score, weighted 
at 50 percent; and the ability to withstand funding-related stress 
score, weighted at 20 percent.
    (1) Weighted average CAMELS rating score. (i) To compute the 
weighted average CAMELS rating score, a weighted average of an 
institution's CAMELS component ratings is calculated using the following 
weights:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     CAMELS component                        Weight (%)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
C.........................................................           25
A.........................................................           20
M.........................................................           25
E.........................................................           10
L.........................................................           10
S.........................................................           10
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) A weighted average CAMELS rating converts to a score that 
ranges from 25 to 100. A weighted average rating of 1 equals a score of 
25 and a weighted average of 3.5 or greater equals a score of 100. 
Weighted average CAMELS ratings between 1 and 3.5 are assigned a score 
between 25 and 100. The score increases at an increasing rate as the 
weighted average CAMELS rating increases. Appendix B of this subpart 
describes the conversion of a weighted average CAMELS rating to a score.
    (2) Ability to withstand asset-related stress score. (i) The ability 
to withstand asset-related stress score is a weighted average of the 
scores for four measures: Leverage ratio; concentration measure; the 
ratio of core earnings to average quarter-end total assets; and the 
credit quality measure. Appendices A and C of this subpart define these 
measures.
    (ii) The Leverage ratio and the ratio of core earnings to average 
quarter-end total assets are described in appendix A and the method of 
calculating the scores is described in appendix C of this subpart.
    (iii) The score for the concentration measure is the greater of the 
higher-risk assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or the growth-
adjusted portfolio concentrations score. Both ratios are described in 
appendix C of this subpart.
    (iv) The score for the credit quality measure is the greater of the 
criticized and classified items to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or 
the underperforming assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves score.
    (v) The following table shows the cutoff values and weights for the 
measures used to calculate the ability to withstand asset-related stress 
score. Appendix B of this subpart describes how each measure is 
converted to a score between 0 and 100 based upon the minimum and 
maximum cutoff values, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a 
score of 100 reflects the highest risk.

[[Page 578]]



       Cutoff Values and Weights for Measures To Calculate Ability To Withstand Asset-Related Stress Score
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                           Cutoff values
                                                                 --------------------------------     Weights
    Measures of the ability to withstand asset-related stress         Minimum         Maximum        (percent)
                                                                     (percent)       (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio..................................................               6              13              10
Concentration Measure...........................................  ..............  ..............              35
    Higher-Risk Assets to Tier 1 Capital and Reserves; or.......               0             135
    Growth-Adjusted Portfolio Concentrations....................               4              56
Core Earnings/Average Quarter-End Total Assets \1\..............               0               2              20
Credit Quality Measure..........................................  ..............  ..............              35
    Criticized and Classified Items/Tier 1 Capital and Reserves;               7             100
     or.........................................................
    Underperforming Assets/Tier 1 Capital and Reserves..........               2              35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Average of five quarter-end total assets (most recent and four prior quarters).

    (vi) The score for each measure in the table in paragraph 
(b)(1)(ii)(A)(2)(v) of this section is multiplied by its respective 
weight and the resulting weighted score is summed to arrive at the score 
for an ability to withstand asset-related stress, which can range from 0 
to 100, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a score of 100 
reflects the highest risk.
    (3) Ability to withstand funding-related stress score. Two measures 
are used to compute the ability to withstand funding-related stress 
score: A core deposits to total liabilities ratio, and a balance sheet 
liquidity ratio. Appendix A of this subpart describes these measures. 
Appendix B of this subpart describes how these measures are converted to 
a score between 0 and 100, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk 
and a score of 100 reflects the highest risk. The ability to withstand 
funding-related stress score is the weighted average of the scores for 
the two measures. In the following table, cutoff values and weights are 
used to derive an institution's ability to withstand funding-related 
stress score:

            Cutoff Values and Weights To Calculate Ability To Withstand Funding-Related Stress Score
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                           Cutoff values
                                                                 --------------------------------     Weights
   Measures of the ability to withstand funding-related stress        Minimum         Maximum        (percent)
                                                                     (percent)       (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Deposits/Total Liabilities.................................               5              87              60
Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio...................................               7             243              40
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Calculation of performance score. In paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A)(3) 
of this section, the scores for the weighted average CAMELS rating, the 
ability to withstand asset-related stress, and the ability to withstand 
funding-related stress are multiplied by their respective weights (30 
percent, 50 percent and 20 percent, respectively) and the results are 
summed to arrive at the performance score. The performance score cannot 
be less than 0 or more than 100, where a score of 0 reflects the lowest 
risk and a score of 100 reflects the highest risk.
    (B) Loss severity score. The loss severity score is based on a loss 
severity measure that is described in appendix D of this subpart. 
Appendix B of this subpart also describes how the loss severity measure 
is converted to a score between 0 and 100. The loss severity score 
cannot be less than 0 or more than 100, where a score of 0 reflects the 
lowest risk and a score of 100 reflects the highest risk. Cutoff values 
for the loss severity measure are:

[[Page 579]]



                                 Cutoff Values To Calculate Loss Severity Score
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                          Cutoff values
                                                                               ---------------------------------
                           Measure of loss severity                                 Minimum          Maximum
                                                                                   (percent)        (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss Severity.................................................................               0               28
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Total score. (1) The performance and loss severity scores are 
combined to produce a total score. The loss severity score is converted 
into a loss severity factor that ranges from 0.8 (score of 5 or lower) 
to 1.2 (score of 85 or higher). Scores at or below the minimum cutoff of 
5 receive a loss severity factor of 0.8, and scores at or above the 
maximum cutoff of 85 receive a loss severity factor of 1.2. The 
following linear interpolation converts loss severity scores between the 
cutoffs into a loss severity factor:

(Loss Severity Factor = 0.8 + [0.005 * (Loss Severity Score ^ 5)]

    (2) The performance score is multiplied by the loss severity factor 
to produce a total score (total score = performance score * loss 
severity factor). The total score can be up to 20 percent higher or 
lower than the performance score but cannot be less than 30 or more than 
90. The total score is subject to adjustment, up or down, by a maximum 
of 15 points, as set forth in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The 
resulting total score after adjustment cannot be less than 30 or more 
than 90.
    (D) Initial base assessment rate. A large institution with a total 
score of 30 pays the minimum initial base assessment rate and an 
institution with a total score of 90 pays the maximum initial base 
assessment rate. For total scores between 30 and 90, initial base 
assessment rates rise at an increasing rate as the total score 
increases, calculated according to the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY16.166

Where:

Rate is the initial base assessment rate (expressed in basis points);
Maximum Rate is the maximum initial base assessment rate then in effect 
          (expressed in basis points); and
Minimum Rate is the minimum initial base assessment rate then in effect 
          (expressed in basis points). Initial base assessment rates are 
          subject to adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (b)(3) and (e)(1) 
          and (2) of this section; large institutions that are not well 
          capitalized or have a CAMELS composite rating of 3, 4 or 5 
          shall be subject to the adjustment at paragraph (e)(3) of this 
          section; these adjustments shall result in the institution's 
          total base assessment rate, which in no case can be lower than 
          50 percent of the institution's initial base assessment rate.

    (2) Assessment scorecard for highly complex institutions. (i) A 
highly complex institution shall have its initial base assessment rate 
determined using the scorecard for highly complex institutions.

                                    Scorecard for Highly Complex Institutions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                            Measure    Component
                                                         Measures and components            weights     weights
                                                                                           (percent)   (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P..............................................  Performance Score......................
P.1............................................  Weighted Average CAMELS Rating.........         100          30
P.2............................................  Ability To Withstand Asset-Related       ..........          50
                                                  Stress.
                                                 Leverage ratio.........................          10
                                                 Concentration Measure..................          35
                                                 Core Earnings/Average Quarter-End Total          20
                                                  Assets.

[[Page 580]]

 
                                                 Credit Quality Measure and Market Risk           35
                                                  Measure.
P.3............................................  Ability To Withstand Funding-Related     ..........          20
                                                  Stress.
                                                 Core Deposits/Total Liabilities........          50
                                                 Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio..........          30
                                                 Average Short-Term Funding/Average               20
                                                  Total Assets.
L..............................................  Loss Severity Score....................
L.1............................................  Loss Severity..........................  ..........         100
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The scorecard for highly complex institutions produces two 
scores: Performance and loss severity.
    (A) Performance score for highly complex institutions. The 
performance score for highly complex institutions is the weighted 
average of the scores for three components: Weighted average CAMELS 
rating, weighted at 30 percent; ability to withstand asset-related 
stress score, weighted at 50 percent; and ability to withstand funding-
related stress score, weighted at 20 percent.
    (1) Weighted average CAMELS rating score. (i) To compute the score 
for the weighted average CAMELS rating, a weighted average of an 
institution's CAMELS component ratings is calculated using the following 
weights:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      CAMELS component                        Weight (%)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
C...........................................................          25
A...........................................................          20
M...........................................................          25
E...........................................................          10
L...........................................................          10
S...........................................................          10
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) A weighted average CAMELS rating converts to a score that 
ranges from 25 to 100. A weighted average rating of 1 equals a score of 
25 and a weighted average of 3.5 or greater equals a score of 100. 
Weighted average CAMELS ratings between 1 and 3.5 are assigned a score 
between 25 and 100. The score increases at an increasing rate as the 
weighted average CAMELS rating increases. Appendix B of this subpart 
describes the conversion of a weighted average CAMELS rating to a score.
    (2) Ability to withstand asset-related stress score. (i) The ability 
to withstand asset-related stress score is a weighted average of the 
scores for four measures: Leverage ratio; concentration measure; ratio 
of core earnings to average quarter-end total assets; credit quality 
measure and market risk measure. Appendix A of this subpart describes 
these measures.
    (ii) The Leverage ratio and the ratio of core earnings to average 
quarter-end total assets are described in appendix A of this subpart and 
the method of calculating the scores is described in appendix B of this 
subpart.
    (iii) The score for the concentration measure for highly complex 
institutions is the greatest of the higher-risk assets to the sum of 
Tier 1 capital and reserves score, the top 20 counterparty exposure to 
the sum of Tier 1 capital and reserves score, or the largest 
counterparty exposure to the sum of Tier 1 capital and reserves score. 
Each ratio is described in appendix A of this subpart. The method used 
to convert the concentration measure into a score is described in 
appendix C of this subpart.
    (iv) The credit quality score is the greater of the criticized and 
classified items to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or the 
underperforming assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves score. The market 
risk score is the weighted average of three scores--the trading revenue 
volatility to Tier 1 capital score, the market risk capital to Tier 1 
capital score, and the level 3 trading assets to Tier 1 capital score. 
All of these ratios are described in appendix A of this subpart and the 
method of calculating the scores is described in appendix B of this 
subpart. Each score is multiplied by its respective weight, and the 
resulting weighted score is summed to compute the score for the market 
risk measure. An overall

[[Page 581]]

weight of 35 percent is allocated between the scores for the credit 
quality measure and market risk measure. The allocation depends on the 
ratio of average trading assets to the sum of average securities, loans 
and trading assets (trading asset ratio) as follows:
    (v) Weight for credit quality score = 35 percent * (1^trading asset 
ratio); and,
    (vi) Weight for market risk score = 35 percent * trading asset 
ratio.
    (vii) Each of the measures used to calculate the ability to 
withstand asset-related stress score is assigned the following cutoff 
values and weights:

     Cutoff Values and Weights for Measures To Calculate the Ability To Withstand Asset-Related Stress Score
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Cutoff values
Measures of the ability to withstand asset--------------------------- Market risk
              related stress                  Minimum      Maximum      measure          Weights (percent)
                                             (percent)    (percent)    (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio............................            6           13  ...........  10.
Concentration Measure.....................  ...........  ...........  ...........  35.
  Higher Risk Assets/Tier 1 Capital and               0          135
   Reserves;.
  Top 20 Counterparty Exposure/Tier 1                 0          125
   Capital and Reserves; or.
  Largest Counterparty Exposure/Tier 1                0           20
   Capital and Reserves.
Core Earnings/Average Quarter-end Total               0            2  ...........  20.
 Assets.
Credit Quality Measure \1\................  ...........  ...........  ...........  35* (1^Trading Asset Ratio).
  Criticized and Classified Items to Tier             7          100
   1 Capital and Reserves; or.
  Underperforming Assets/Tier 1 Capital               2           35
   and Reserves.
Market Risk Measure \1\...................  ...........  ...........  ...........  35* Trading Asset Ratio.
  Trading Revenue Volatility/Tier 1                   0            2           60
   Capital.
  Market Risk Capital/Tier 1 Capital......            0           10           20
  Level 3 Trading Assets/Tier 1 Capital...            0           35           20
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Combined, the credit quality measure and the market risk measure are assigned a 35 percent weight. The
  relative weight of each of the two scores depends on the ratio of average trading assets to the sum of average
  securities, loans and trading assets (trading asset ratio).

    (viii) [Reserved]
    (ix) The score of each measure is multiplied by its respective 
weight and the resulting weighted score is summed to compute the ability 
to withstand asset-related stress score, which can range from 0 to 100, 
where a score of 0 reflects the lowest risk and a score of 100 reflects 
the highest risk.
    (3) Ability to withstand funding related stress score. Three 
measures are used to calculate the score for the ability to withstand 
funding-related stress: A core deposits to total liabilities ratio, a 
balance sheet liquidity ratio, and average short-term funding to average 
total assets ratio. Appendix A of this subpart describes these ratios. 
Appendix B of this subpart describes how each measure is converted to a 
score. The ability to withstand funding-related stress score is the 
weighted average of the scores for the three measures. In the following 
table, cutoff values and weights are used to derive an institution's 
ability to withstand funding-related stress score:

           Cutoff Values and Weights To Calculate Ability To Withstand Funding-Related Stress Measures
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                           Cutoff values
                                                                 --------------------------------     Weights
   Measures of the ability to withstand funding-related stress        Minimum         Maximum        (percent)
                                                                     (percent)       (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Core Deposits/Total Liabilities.................................               5              87              50
Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio...................................               7             243              30
Average Short-term Funding/Average Total Assets.................               2              19              20
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 582]]

    (4) Calculation of performance score. The weighted average CAMELS 
score, the ability to withstand asset-related stress score, and the 
ability to withstand funding-related stress score are multiplied by 
their respective weights (30 percent, 50 percent and 20 percent, 
respectively) and the results are summed to arrive at the performance 
score, which cannot be less than 0 or more than 100.
    (B) Loss severity score. The loss severity score is based on a loss 
severity measure described in appendix D of this subpart. Appendix B of 
this subpart also describes how the loss severity measure is converted 
to a score between 0 and 100. Cutoff values for the loss severity 
measure are:

                                     Cutoff Values for Loss Severity Measure
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                          Cutoff values
                                                                               ---------------------------------
                           Measure of loss severity                                 Minimum          Maximum
                                                                                   (percent)        (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss Severity.................................................................               0               28
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Total score. The performance and loss severity scores are 
combined to produce a total score. The loss severity score is converted 
into a loss severity factor that ranges from 0.8 (score of 5 or lower) 
to 1.2 (score of 85 or higher). Scores at or below the minimum cutoff of 
5 receive a loss severity factor of 0.8, and scores at or above the 
maximum cutoff of 85 receive a loss severity factor of 1.2. The 
following linear interpolation converts loss severity scores between the 
cutoffs into a loss severity factor: (Loss Severity Factor = 0.8 + 
[0.005 * (Loss Severity Score ^ 5)]. The performance score is multiplied 
by the loss severity factor to produce a total score (total score = 
performance score * loss severity factor). The total score can be up to 
20 percent higher or lower than the performance score but cannot be less 
than 30 or more than 90. The total score is subject to adjustment, up or 
down, by a maximum of 15 points, as set forth in paragraph (b)(3) of 
this section. The resulting total score after adjustment cannot be less 
than 30 or more than 90.
    (D) Initial base assessment rate. A highly complex institution with 
a total score of 30 pays the minimum initial base assessment rate and an 
institution with a total score of 90 pays the maximum initial base 
assessment rate. For total scores between 30 and 90, initial base 
assessment rates rise at an increasing rate as the total score 
increases, calculated according to the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20MY16.167

Where:

Rate is the initial base assessment rate (expressed in basis points);
Maximum Rate is the maximum initial base assessment rate then in effect 
          (expressed in basis points); and
Minimum Rate is the minimum initial base assessment rate then in effect 
          (expressed in basis points). Initial base assessment rates are 
          subject to adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (b)(3) and (e)(1) 
          and (2) of this section; highly complex institutions that are 
          not well capitalized or have a CAMELS composite rating of 3, 4 
          or 5 shall be subject to the adjustment at paragraph (e)(3) of 
          this section; these adjustments shall result in the 
          institution's total base assessment rate, which in no case can 
          be lower than 50 percent of the institution's initial base 
          assessment rate.

    (3) Adjustment to total score for large institutions and highly 
complex institutions. The total score for large institutions and highly 
complex institutions is subject to adjustment, up or down, by a maximum 
of 15 points, based upon

[[Page 583]]

significant risk factors that are not adequately captured in the 
appropriate scorecard. In making such adjustments, the FDIC may consider 
such information as financial performance and condition information and 
other market or supervisory information. The FDIC will also consult with 
an institution's primary federal regulator and, for state chartered 
institutions, state banking supervisor.
    (i) Prior notice of adjustments--(A) Prior notice of upward 
adjustment. Prior to making any upward adjustment to an institution's 
total score because of considerations of additional risk information, 
the FDIC will formally notify the institution and its primary federal 
regulator and provide an opportunity to respond. This notification will 
include the reasons for the adjustment and when the adjustment will take 
effect.
    (B) Prior notice of downward adjustment. Prior to making any 
downward adjustment to an institution's total score because of 
considerations of additional risk information, the FDIC will formally 
notify the institution's primary federal regulator and provide an 
opportunity to respond.
    (ii) Determination whether to adjust upward; effective period of 
adjustment. After considering an institution's and the primary federal 
regulator's responses to the notice, the FDIC will determine whether the 
adjustment to an institution's total score is warranted, taking into 
account any revisions to scorecard measures, as well as any actions 
taken by the institution to address the FDIC's concerns described in the 
notice. The FDIC will evaluate the need for the adjustment each 
subsequent assessment period. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) 
of this section, the amount of adjustment cannot exceed the proposed 
adjustment amount contained in the initial notice unless additional 
notice is provided so that the primary federal regulator and the 
institution may respond.
    (iii) Determination whether to adjust downward; effective period of 
adjustment. After considering the primary federal regulator's responses 
to the notice, the FDIC will determine whether the adjustment to total 
score is warranted, taking into account any revisions to scorecard 
measures. Any downward adjustment in an institution's total score will 
remain in effect for subsequent assessment periods until the FDIC 
determines that an adjustment is no longer warranted. Downward 
adjustments will be made without notification to the institution. 
However, the FDIC will provide advance notice to an institution and its 
primary federal regulator and give them an opportunity to respond before 
removing a downward adjustment.
    (iv) Adjustment without notice. Notwithstanding the notice 
provisions set forth in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, the FDIC may 
change an institution's total score without advance notice, if the 
institution's supervisory ratings or the scorecard measures deteriorate.
    (c) New small institutions--(1) Risk categories. Each new small 
institution shall be assigned to one of the following four Risk 
Categories based upon the institution's capital evaluation and 
supervisory evaluation as defined in this section.
    (i) Risk category I. New small institutions in Supervisory Group A 
that are Well Capitalized will be assigned to Risk Category I.
    (ii) Risk category II. New small institutions in Supervisory Group A 
that are Adequately Capitalized, and new small institutions in 
Supervisory Group B that are either Well Capitalized or Adequately 
Capitalized will be assigned to Risk Category II.
    (iii) Risk category III. New small institutions in Supervisory 
Groups A and B that are Undercapitalized, and new small institutions in 
Supervisory Group C that are Well Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized 
will be assigned to Risk Category III.
    (iv) Risk category IV. New small institutions in Supervisory Group C 
that are Undercapitalized will be assigned to Risk Category IV.
    (2) Capital evaluations. Each new small institution will receive one 
of the following three capital evaluations on the basis of data reported 
in the institution's Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income or 
Thrift Financial Report (or successor report, as appropriate) dated as 
of March 31 for the assessment period beginning the preceding January 1; 
dated as of June 30

[[Page 584]]

for the assessment period beginning the preceding April 1; dated as of 
September 30 for the assessment period beginning the preceding July 1; 
and dated as of December 31 for the assessment period beginning the 
preceding October 1.
    (i) Well capitalized. A Well Capitalized institution is one that 
satisfies each of the following capital ratio standards: Total risk-
based capital ratio, 10.0 percent or greater; tier 1 risk-based capital 
ratio, 8.0 percent or greater; leverage ratio, 5.0 percent or greater; 
and common equity tier 1 capital ratio, 6.5 percent or greater, and 
after January 1, 2018, if the institution is an insured depository 
institution subject to the enhanced supplementary leverage ratio 
standards under 12 CFR 6.4(c)(1)(iv)(B), 12 CFR 208.43(c)(1)(iv)(B), or 
12 CFR 324.403(b)(1)(vi), as each may be amended from time to time, a 
supplementary leverage ratio of 6.0 percent or greater.
    (ii) Adequately capitalized. An Adequately Capitalized institution 
is one that does not satisfy the standards of Well Capitalized in 
paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section but satisfies each of the following 
capital ratio standards: Total risk-based capital ratio, 8.0 percent or 
greater; tier 1 risk-based capital ratio, 6.0 percent or greater; 
leverage ratio, 4.0 percent or greater; and common equity tier 1 capital 
ratio, 4.5 percent or greater, and after January 1, 2018, if the 
institution is an insured depository institution subject to the advanced 
approaches risk-based capital rules under 12 CFR 6.4(c)(2)(iv)(B), 12 
CFR 208.43(c)(2)(iv)(B), or 12 CFR 324.403(b)(2)(vi), as each may be 
amended from time to time, a supplementary leverage ratio of 3.0 percent 
or greater.
    (iii) Undercapitalized. An undercapitalized institution is one that 
does not qualify as either Well Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized 
under paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
    (3) Supervisory evaluations. Each new small institution will be 
assigned to one of three Supervisory Groups based on the Corporation's 
consideration of supervisory evaluations provided by the institution's 
primary federal regulator. The supervisory evaluations include the 
results of examination findings by the primary federal regulator, as 
well as other information that the primary federal regulator determines 
to be relevant. In addition, the Corporation will take into 
consideration such other information (such as state examination 
findings, as appropriate) as it determines to be relevant to the 
institution's financial condition and the risk posed to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund. The three Supervisory Groups are:
    (i) Supervisory group ``A.'' This Supervisory Group consists of 
financially sound institutions with only a few minor weaknesses;
    (ii) Supervisory group ``B.'' This Supervisory Group consists of 
institutions that demonstrate weaknesses which, if not corrected, could 
result in significant deterioration of the institution and increased 
risk of loss to the Deposit Insurance Fund; and
    (iii) Supervisory group ``C.'' This Supervisory Group consists of 
institutions that pose a substantial probability of loss to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund unless effective corrective action is taken.
    (4) Assessment method for new small institutions in risk category 
I--(i) Maximum initial base assessment rate for risk category I new 
small institutions. A new small institution in Risk Category I shall be 
assessed the maximum initial base assessment rate for Risk Category I 
small institutions in the relevant assessment period.
    (ii) New small institutions not subject to certain adjustments. No 
new small institution in any risk category shall be subject to the 
adjustment in paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
    (iii) Implementation of CAMELS rating changes--(A) Changes between 
risk categories. If, during an assessment period, a CAMELS composite 
rating change occurs that results in a Risk Category I institution 
moving from Risk Category I to Risk Category II, III or IV, the 
institution's initial base assessment rate for the portion of the 
assessment period that it was in Risk Category I shall be the maximum 
initial base assessment rate for the relevant assessment period, subject 
to adjustment pursuant to paragraph (e)(2) of this section, as 
appropriate, and adjusted for the actual assessment rates set by the 
Board under Sec. 327.10(f). For the portion of the assessment period

[[Page 585]]

that the institution was not in Risk Category I, the institution's 
initial base assessment rate, which shall be subject to adjustment 
pursuant to paragraphs (e)(2) and (3) of this section, as appropriate, 
shall be determined under the assessment schedule for the appropriate 
Risk Category. If, during an assessment period, a CAMELS composite 
rating change occurs that results in an institution moving from Risk 
Category II, III or IV to Risk Category I, then the maximum initial base 
assessment rate for new small institutions in Risk Category I shall 
apply for the portion of the assessment period that it was in Risk 
Category I, subject to adjustment pursuant to paragraph (e)(2) of this 
section, as appropriate, and adjusted for the actual assessment rates 
set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f). For the portion of the assessment 
period that the institution was not in Risk Category I, the 
institution's initial base assessment rate, which shall be subject to 
adjustment pursuant to paragraphs (e)(2) and (3) of this section shall 
be determined under the assessment schedule for the appropriate Risk 
Category.
    (B) [Reserved]
    (d) Insured branches of foreign banks--(1) Risk categories for 
insured branches of foreign banks. Insured branches of foreign banks 
shall be assigned to risk categories as set forth in paragraph (c)(1) of 
this section.
    (2) Capital evaluations for insured branches of foreign banks. Each 
insured branch of a foreign bank will receive one of the following three 
capital evaluations on the basis of data reported in the institution's 
Report of Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and Agencies of 
Foreign Banks dated as of March 31 for the assessment period beginning 
the preceding January 1; dated as of June 30 for the assessment period 
beginning the preceding April 1; dated as of September 30 for the 
assessment period beginning the preceding July 1; and dated as of 
December 31 for the assessment period beginning the preceding October 1.
    (i) Well Capitalized. An insured branch of a foreign bank is Well 
Capitalized if the insured branch:
    (A) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (B) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 108 percent or more of the average book value of the 
insured branch's third-party liabilities for the quarter ending on the 
report date specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
    (ii) Adequately Capitalized. An insured branch of a foreign bank is 
Adequately Capitalized if the insured branch:
    (A) Maintains the pledge of assets required under Sec. 347.209 of 
this chapter; and
    (B) Maintains the eligible assets prescribed under Sec. 347.210 of 
this chapter at 106 percent or more of the average book value of the 
insured branch's third-party liabilities for the quarter ending on the 
report date specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section; and
    (C) Does not meet the definition of a Well Capitalized insured 
branch of a foreign bank.
    (iii) Undercapitalized. An insured branch of a foreign bank is 
undercapitalized institution if it does not qualify as either Well 
Capitalized or Adequately Capitalized under paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and 
(ii) of this section.
    (3) Supervisory evaluations for insured branches of foreign banks. 
Each insured branch of a foreign bank will be assigned to one of three 
supervisory groups as set forth in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
    (4) Assessment method for insured branches of foreign banks in risk 
category I. Insured branches of foreign banks in Risk Category I shall 
be assessed using the weighted average ROCA component rating.
    (i) Weighted average ROCA component rating. The weighted average 
ROCA component rating shall equal the sum of the products that result 
from multiplying ROCA component ratings by the following percentages: 
Risk Management--35%, Operational Controls--25%, Compliance--25%, and 
Asset Quality--15%. The weighted average ROCA rating will be multiplied 
by 5.076 (which shall be the pricing multiplier). To this result will be 
added a uniform amount.

[[Page 586]]

The resulting sum--the initial base assessment rate--will equal an 
institution's total base assessment rate; provided, however, that no 
institution's total base assessment rate will be less than the minimum 
total base assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I institutions 
for that assessment period nor greater than the maximum total base 
assessment rate in effect for Risk Category I institutions for that 
assessment period.
    (ii) Uniform amount. Except as adjusted for the actual assessment 
rates set by the Board under Sec. 327.10(f), the uniform amount for all 
insured branches of foreign banks shall be:
    (A) ^5.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(b) is in effect;
    (B) ^6.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(c) is in effect; or
    (C) ^7.127 whenever the assessment rate schedule set forth in 
Sec. 327.10(d) is in effect.
    (iii) Insured branches of foreign banks not subject to certain 
adjustments. No insured branch of a foreign bank in any risk category 
shall be subject to the adjustments in paragraph (b)(3) or (e)(1) or (3) 
of this section.
    (iv) Implementation of changes between risk categories for insured 
branches of foreign banks. If, during an assessment period, a ROCA 
rating change occurs that results in an insured branch of a foreign bank 
moving from Risk Category I to Risk Category II, III or IV, the 
institution's initial base assessment rate for the portion of the 
assessment period that it was in Risk Category I shall be determined 
using the weighted average ROCA component rating. For the portion of the 
assessment period that the institution was not in Risk Category I, the 
institution's initial base assessment rate shall be determined under the 
assessment schedule for the appropriate Risk Category. If, during an 
assessment period, a ROCA rating change occurs that results in an 
insured branch of a foreign bank moving from Risk Category II, III or IV 
to Risk Category I, the institution's assessment rate for the portion of 
the assessment period that it was in Risk Category I shall equal the 
rate determined as provided using the weighted average ROCA component 
rating. For the portion of the assessment period that the institution 
was not in Risk Category I, the institution's initial base assessment 
rate shall be determined under the assessment schedule for the 
appropriate Risk Category.
    (v) Implementation of changes within risk category I for insured 
branches of foreign banks. If, during an assessment period, an insured 
branch of a foreign bank remains in Risk Category I, but a ROCA 
component rating changes that will affect the institution's initial base 
assessment rate, separate assessment rates for the portion(s) of the 
assessment period before and after the change(s) shall be determined 
under this paragraph (d)(4).
    (e) Adjustments--(1) Unsecured debt adjustment to initial base 
assessment rate for all institutions. All institutions, except new 
institutions as provided under paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section 
and insured branches of foreign banks as provided under paragraph 
(d)(4)(iii) of this section, shall be subject to an adjustment of 
assessment rates for unsecured debt. Any unsecured debt adjustment shall 
be made after any adjustment under paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
    (i) Application of unsecured debt adjustment. The unsecured debt 
adjustment shall be determined as the sum of the initial base assessment 
rate plus 40 basis points; that sum shall be multiplied by the ratio of 
an insured depository institution's long-term unsecured debt to its 
assessment base. The amount of the reduction in the assessment rate due 
to the adjustment is equal to the dollar amount of the adjustment 
divided by the amount of the assessment base.
    (ii) Limitation. No unsecured debt adjustment for any institution 
shall exceed the lesser of 5 basis points or 50 percent of the 
institution's initial base assessment rate.
    (iii) Applicable quarterly reports of condition. Unsecured debt 
adjustment ratios for any given quarter shall be calculated from 
quarterly reports of condition (Consolidated Reports of Condition and 
Income and Thrift Financial

[[Page 587]]

Reports, or any successor reports to either, as appropriate) filed by 
each institution as of the last day of the quarter.
    (2) Depository institution debt adjustment to initial base 
assessment rate for all institutions. All institutions shall be subject 
to an adjustment of assessment rates for unsecured debt held that is 
issued by another depository institution. Any such depository 
institution debt adjustment shall be made after any adjustment under 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (e)(1) of this section.
    (i) Application of depository institution debt adjustment. An 
insured depository institution shall pay a 50 basis point adjustment on 
the amount of unsecured debt it holds that was issued by another insured 
depository institution to the extent that such debt exceeds 3 percent of 
the institution's Tier 1 capital. The amount of long-term unsecured debt 
issued by another insured depository institution shall be calculated 
using the same valuation methodology used to calculate the amount of 
such debt for reporting on the asset side of the balance sheets.
    (ii) Applicable quarterly reports of condition. Depository 
institution debt adjustment ratios for any given quarter shall be 
calculated from quarterly reports of condition (Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income and Thrift Financial Reports, or any successor 
reports to either, as appropriate) filed by each institution as of the 
last day of the quarter.
    (3) Brokered deposit adjustment. All new small institutions in Risk 
Categories II, III, and IV, all large institutions and all highly 
complex institutions, except large and highly complex institutions 
(including new large and new highly complex institutions) that are well 
capitalized and have a CAMELS composite rating of 1 or 2, shall be 
subject to an assessment rate adjustment for brokered deposits. Any such 
brokered deposit adjustment shall be made after any adjustment under 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (e)(1) and (2) of this section. The brokered 
deposit adjustment includes all brokered deposits as defined in Section 
29 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831f), and 12 CFR 
337.6, including reciprocal deposits as defined in Sec. 327.8(p), and 
brokered deposits that consist of balances swept into an insured 
institution from another institution. The adjustment under this 
paragraph is limited to those institutions whose ratio of brokered 
deposits to domestic deposits is greater than 10 percent; asset growth 
rates do not affect the adjustment. Insured branches of foreign banks 
are not subject to the brokered deposit adjustment as provided in 
paragraph (d)(4)(iii) of this section.
    (i) Application of brokered deposit adjustment. The brokered deposit 
adjustment shall be determined by multiplying 25 basis points by the 
ratio of the difference between an insured depository institution's 
brokered deposits and 10 percent of its domestic deposits to its 
assessment base.
    (ii) Limitation. The maximum brokered deposit adjustment will be 10 
basis points; the minimum brokered deposit adjustment will be 0.
    (iii) Applicable quarterly reports of condition. The brokered 
deposit adjustment for any given quarter shall be calculated from the 
quarterly reports of condition (Call Reports and Thrift Financial 
Reports, or any successor reports to either, as appropriate) filed by 
each institution as of the last day of the quarter.
    (f) Request to be treated as a large institution--(1) Procedure. Any 
institution with assets of between $5 billion and $10 billion may 
request that the FDIC determine its assessment rate as a large 
institution. The FDIC will consider such a request provided that it has 
sufficient information to do so. Any such request must be made to the 
FDIC's Division of Insurance and Research. Any approved change will 
become effective within one year from the date of the request. If an 
institution whose request has been granted subsequently reports assets 
of less than $5 billion in its report of condition for four consecutive 
quarters, the institution shall be deemed a small institution for 
assessment purposes.
    (2) Time limit on subsequent request for alternate method. An 
institution whose request to be assessed as a large institution is 
granted by the FDIC shall not

[[Page 588]]

be eligible to request that it be assessed as a small institution for a 
period of three years from the first quarter in which its approved 
request to be assessed as a large institution became effective. Any 
request to be assessed as a small institution must be made to the FDIC's 
Division of Insurance and Research.
    (3) Request for review. An institution that disagrees with the 
FDIC's determination that it is a large, highly complex, or small 
institution may request review of that determination pursuant to 
Sec. 327.4(c).
    (g) New and established institutions and exceptions--(1) New small 
institutions. A new small Risk Category I institution shall be assessed 
the Risk Category I maximum initial base assessment rate for the 
relevant assessment period. No new small institution in any risk 
category shall be subject to the unsecured debt adjustment as determined 
under paragraph (e)(1) of this section. All new small institutions in 
any Risk Category shall be subject to the depository institution debt 
adjustment as determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section. All new 
small institutions in Risk Categories II, III, and IV shall be subject 
to the brokered deposit adjustment as determined under paragraph (e)(3) 
of this section.
    (2) New large institutions and new highly complex institutions. All 
new large institutions and all new highly complex institutions shall be 
assessed under the appropriate method provided at paragraph (b)(1) or 
(2) of this section and subject to the adjustments provided at 
paragraphs (b)(3) and (e)(2) and (3) of this section. No new highly 
complex or large institutions are entitled to adjustment under paragraph 
(e)(1) of this section. If a large or highly complex institution has not 
yet received CAMELS ratings, it will be given a weighted CAMELS rating 
of 2 for assessment purposes until actual CAMELS ratings are assigned.
    (3) CAMELS ratings for the surviving institution in a merger or 
consolidation. When an established institution merges with or 
consolidates into a new institution, if the FDIC determines the 
resulting institution to be an established institution under 
Sec. 327.8(k)(1), its CAMELS ratings for assessment purposes will be 
based upon the established institution's ratings prior to the merger or 
consolidation until new ratings become available.
    (4) Rate applicable to institutions subject to subsidiary or credit 
union exception--(i) Established small institutions. A small institution 
that is established under Sec. 327.8(k)(4) or (5) shall be assessed as 
follows:
    (A) If the institution does not have a CAMELS composite rating, its 
initial base assessment rate shall be 2 basis points above the minimum 
initial base assessment rate applicable to established small 
institutions until it receives a CAMELS composite rating.
    (B) If the institution has a CAMELS composite rating but no CAMELS 
component ratings, its initial assessment rate shall be determined using 
the financial ratios method, as set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section, but its CAMELS composite rating will be substituted for its 
weighted average CAMELS component rating and, if the institution has not 
filed four quarterly reports of condition, then the assessment rate will 
be determined by annualizing, where appropriate, financial ratios from 
all quarterly reports of condition that have been filed.
    (ii) Large or highly complex institutions. If a large or highly 
complex institution is considered established under Sec. 327.8(k)(4) or 
(5), but does not have CAMELS component ratings, it will be given a 
weighted CAMELS rating of 2 for assessment purposes until actual CAMELS 
ratings are assigned.
    (5) Request for review. An institution that disagrees with the 
FDIC's determination that it is a new institution may request review of 
that determination pursuant to Sec. 327.4(c).
    (h) Assessment rates for bridge depository institutions and 
conservatorships. Institutions that are bridge depository institutions 
under 12 U.S.C. 1821(n) and institutions for which the Corporation has 
been appointed or serves as conservator shall, in all cases, be assessed 
at the minimum initial base assessment rate applicable to established 
small institutions, which shall not be subject to adjustment under 
paragraph (b)(3) or (e)(1), (2), or (3) of this section.

[81 FR 32207, May 20, 2016]

[[Page 589]]



   Sec. Appendix A to Subpart A of Part 327--Method to Derive Pricing 
                     Multipliers and Uniform Amount

                             I. Introduction

    The uniform amount and pricing multipliers are derived from:
     A model (the Statistical Model) that estimates the 
probability that a Risk Category I institution will be downgraded to a 
composite CAMELS rating of 3 or worse within one year;
     Minimum and maximum downgrade probability cutoff values, 
based on data from June 30, 2008, that will determine which small 
institutions will be charged the minimum and maximum initial base 
assessment rates applicable to Risk Category I;
     The minimum initial base assessment rate for Risk Category 
I, equal to 12 basis points, and
     The maximum initial base assessment rate for Risk Category 
I, which is four basis points higher than the minimum rate.

                        II. The Statistical Model

    The Statistical Model is defined in equations 1 and 3 below.

                               Equation 1

Downgrade(0,1)i,t = b0 + b1 (Leverage 
          ratioT) + b2 (Loans past due 30 to 89 
          days ratioi,t) + b3 (Nonperforming asset 
          ratioi,t) + b4 (Net loan charge-off 
          ratioi,t) + b5 (Net income before taxes 
          ratioi,t) + b6 (Adjusted brokered 
          deposit ratioi,t) + b7 (Weighted average 
          CAMELS component ratingi,t) where 
          Downgrade(01)i,t (the dependent variable--the event 
          being explained) is the incidence of downgrade from a 
          composite rating of 1 or 2 to a rating of 3 or worse during an 
          on-site examination for an institution i between 3 and 12 
          months after time t. Time t is the end of a year within the 
          multi-year period over which the model was estimated (as 
          explained below). The dependent variable takes a value of 1 if 
          a downgrade occurs and 0 if it does not.
    The explanatory variables (regressors) in the model are six 
financial ratios and a weighted average of the ``C,'' ``A,'' ``M,'' 
``E'' and ``L'' component ratings. The six financial ratios included in 
the model are:
     Leverage ratio
     Loans past due 30-89 days/Gross assets
     Nonperforming assets/Gross assets
     Net loan charge-offs/Gross assets
     Net income before taxes/Risk-weighted assets
     Brokered deposits/domestic deposits above the 10 percent 
threshold, adjusted for the asset growth rate factor
    Table A.1 defines these six ratios along with the weighted average 
of CAMELS component ratings. The adjusted brokered deposit ratio 
(Bi,T) is calculated by multiplying the ratio of brokered 
deposits to domestic deposits above the 10 percent threshold by an asset 
growth rate factor that ranges from 0 to 1 as shown in Equation 2 below. 
The asset growth rate factor (Ai,T) is calculated by 
subtracting 0.4 from the four-year cumulative gross asset growth rate 
(expressed as a number rather than as a percentage), adjusted for 
mergers and acquisitions, and multiplying the remainder by 3\1/3\. The 
factor cannot be less than 0 or greater than 1.

                               Equation 2
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MR09.016

    The component rating for sensitivity to market risk (the ``S'' 
rating) is not available for years prior to 1997. As a result, and as 
described in Table A.1, the Statistical Model is estimated using a 
weighted average of five component ratings excluding the ``S'' 
component. Delinquency and non-accrual data on government guaranteed 
loans are not available before 1993 for Call Report filers and before 
the third quarter of 2005 for TFR filers. As a result, and as also 
described in Table A.1, the Statistical Model is estimated without 
deducting delinquent or past-due government guaranteed loans from either 
the loans past due 30-89 days to gross assets ratio or the nonperforming 
assets to gross assets ratio. Reciprocal deposits are not presently 
reported in the Call Report or TFR. As a result, and as also described 
in Table A.1, the Statistical Model is estimated without deducting 
reciprocal deposits from brokered deposits in determining the adjusted 
brokered deposit ratio.

[[Page 590]]



                  Table A.1--Definitions of Regressors
------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Regressor                           Description
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio (%)................  Tier 1 capital for Prompt Corrective
                                     Action (PCA) divided by adjusted
                                     average assets based on the
                                     definition for prompt corrective
                                     action.
Loans Past Due 30-89 Days/Gross     Total loans and lease financing
 Assets (%).                         receivables past due 30 through 89
                                     days and still accruing interest
                                     divided by gross assets (gross
                                     assets equal total assets plus
                                     allowance for loan and lease
                                     financing receivable losses and
                                     allocated transfer risk).
Nonperforming Assets/Gross Assets   Sum of total loans and lease
 (%).                                financing receivables past due 90
                                     or more days and still accruing
                                     interest, total nonaccrual loans
                                     and lease financing receivables,
                                     and other real estate owned divided
                                     by gross assets.
Net Loan Charge-Offs/Gross Assets   Total charged-off loans and lease
 (%).                                financing receivables debited to
                                     the allowance for loan and lease
                                     losses less total recoveries
                                     credited to the allowance to loan
                                     and lease losses for the most
                                     recent twelve months divided by
                                     gross assets.
Net Income before Taxes/Risk-       Income before income taxes and
 Weighted Assets (%).                extraordinary items and other
                                     adjustments for the most recent
                                     twelve months divided by risk-
                                     weighted assets.
Adjusted brokered deposit ratio     Brokered deposits divided by
 (%).                                domestic deposits less 0.10
                                     multiplied by the asset growth rate
                                     factor (which is the term Ai,T as
                                     defined in equation 2 above) that
                                     ranges between 0 and 1.
Weighted Average of C, A, M, E and  The weighted sum of the ``C,''
 L Component Ratings.                ``A,'' ``M,'' ``E'' and ``L''
                                     CAMELS components, with weights of
                                     28 percent each for the ``C'' and
                                     ``M'' components, 22 percent for
                                     the ``A'' component, and 11 percent
                                     each for the ``E'' and ``L''
                                     components. (For the regression,
                                     the ``S'' component is omitted.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    The financial variable regressors used to estimate the downgrade 
probabilities are obtained from quarterly reports of condition (Reports 
of Condition and Income and Thrift Financial Reports). The weighted 
average of the ``C,'' ``A,'' ``M,'' ``E'' and ``L'' component ratings 
regressor is based on component ratings obtained from the most recent 
bank examination conducted within 24 months before the date of the 
report of condition.
    The Statistical Model uses ordinary least squares (OLS) regression 
to estimate downgrade probabilities. The model is estimated with data 
from a multi-year period (as explained below) for all institutions in 
Risk Category I, except for institutions established within five years 
before the date of the report of condition.
    The OLS regression estimates coefficients, bj for a given 
regressor j and a constant amount, b0, as specified in 
equation 1. As shown in equation 3 below, these coefficients are 
multiplied by values of risk measures at time T, which is the date of 
the report of condition corresponding to the end of the quarter for 
which the assessment rate is computed. The sum of the products is then 
added to the constant amount to produce an estimated probability, 
diT, that an institution will be downgraded to 3 or worse 
within 3 to 12 months from time T.
    The risk measures are financial ratios as defined in Table A.1, 
except that: (1) The loans past due 30 to 89 days ratio and the 
nonperforming asset ratio are adjusted to exclude the maximum amount 
recoverable from the U.S. Government, its agencies or government-
sponsored agencies, under guarantee or insurance provisions; (2) the 
weighted sum of six CAMELS component ratings is used, with weights of 25 
percent each for the ``C'' and ``M'' components, 20 percent for the 
``A'' component, and 10 percent each for the ``E,'' ``L,'' and ``S'' 
components; and (3) reciprocal deposits are deducted from brokered 
deposits in determining the adjusted brokered deposit ratio.

                               Equation 3

diT = b0 + b1 (Leverage 
          ratioiT) + b2 (Loans past due 30 to 89 
          days ratioiT) + b3 (Nonperforming asset 
          ratioiT) + b4 (Net loan charge-off 
          ratioiT) + b5 (Net income before taxes 
          ratioiT) + b6 (Adjusted brokered deposit 
          ratioiT) + b7 (Weighted average CAMELS 
          component ratingiT)

      III. Minimum and Maximum Downgrade Probability Cutoff Values

    The pricing multipliers are also determined by minimum and maximum 
downgrade probability cutoff values, which will be computed as follows:
     The minimum downgrade probability cutoff value will be the 
maximum downgrade probability among the twenty-five percent of all small 
insured institutions in Risk Category I (excluding new institutions) 
with the lowest estimated downgrade probabilities, computed using values 
of the risk measures as of June 30, 2008.\1\ \2\ The minimum downgrade 
probability cutoff value is 0.0182.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ As used in this context, a ``new institution'' means an 
institution that has been chartered as a bank or thrift for less than 
five years.
    \2\ For purposes of calculating the minimum and maximum downgrade 
probability cutoff values, institutions that have less than $100,000 in 
domestic deposits are assumed to have no brokered deposits.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 591]]

     The maximum downgrade probability cutoff value will be the 
minimum downgrade probability among the fifteen percent of all small 
insured institutions in Risk Category I (excluding new institutions) 
with the highest estimated downgrade probabilities, computed using 
values of the risk measures as of June 30, 2008. The maximum downgrade 
probability cutoff value is 0.1506.

        IV. Derivation of Uniform Amount and Pricing Multipliers

    The uniform amount and pricing multipliers used to compute the 
annual base assessment rate in basis points, PiT, for any 
such institution i at a given time T will be determined from the 
Statistical Model, the minimum and maximum downgrade probability cutoff 
values, and minimum and maximum initial base assessment rates in Risk 
Category I as follows:

                               Equation 4

PiT = a0 + a1 * diT subject 
          to Min PiT Min + 4

where a0 and a1 are a constant term and a scale 
factor used to convert diT (the estimated downgrade 
probability for institution i at a given time T from the Statistical 
Model) to an assessment rate, respectively, and Min is the minimum 
initial base assessment rate expressed in basis points. (PiT 
is expressed as an annual rate, but the actual rate applied in any 
quarter will be PiT/4.) The maximum initial base assessment 
rate is 4 basis points above the minimum (Min + 4)
    Solving equation 4 for minimum and maximum initial base assessment 
rates simultaneously,

Min = a0 + a1 * 0.0182 and Min + 4 = a0 
          + a1 * 0.1506

where 0.0182 is the minimum downgrade probability cutoff value and 
0.1506 is the maximum downgrade probability cutoff value, results in 
values for the constant amount, a0 and the scale factor, 
a1:

                               Equation 5
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MR09.017

                             and Equation 6
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR04MR09.018

Substituting equations 3, 5 and 6 into equation 4 produces an annual 
initial base assessment rate for institution i at time T, 
PiT, in terms of the uniform amount, the pricing multipliers 
and the ratios and weighted average CAMELS component rating referred to 
in 12 CFR 327.9(d)(2)(i):

                               Equation 7

PiT = [(Min ^ 0.550) + 30.211* b0] + 30.211 * 
          [b1 (Leverage ratioT)] + 30.211 * 
          [b2 (Loans past due 30 to 89 days 
          ratioT)] + 30.211 * [b3 (Nonperforming 
          asset ratioT)] + 30.211 * [b4 (Net loan 
          charge-off ratioT)] + 30.211 * [b5 (Net 
          income before taxes ratioT)] + 30.211 * 
          [b6 (Adjusted brokered deposit ratioT)] 
          + 30.211 * [b7 (Weighted average CAMELS component 
          ratingT)]

again subject to Min PiT Min + 4

where (Min ^ 0.550) + 30.211 * b0 equals the uniform amount, 
30.211 * bj is a pricing multiplier for the associated risk 
measure j, and T is the date of the report of condition corresponding to 
the end of the quarter for which the assessment rate is computed.

     V. Updating the Statistical Model, Uniform Amount, and Pricing 
                               Multipliers

    The initial Statistical Model is estimated using year-end financial 
ratios and the weighted average of the ``C,'' ``A,'' ``M,'' ``E'' and 
``L'' component ratings over the 1988 to 2006 period and downgrade data 
from the 1989 to 2007 period. The FDIC may, from time to time, but no 
more frequently than annually, re-estimate the Statistical Model with 
updated data and publish a new formula for determining initial base 
assessment rates--equation 7--based on updated uniform amounts and 
pricing multipliers. However, the minimum and maximum downgrade 
probability cutoff values will not change without additional notice-and-
comment rulemaking. The period covered by the analysis will be 
lengthened by one year each year; however, from time to time, the FDIC 
may drop some earlier years from its analysis.

[[Page 592]]

                  VI. Description of Scorecard Measures

------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Scorecard measures \1\                    Description
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Leverage ratio.......................  Tier 1 capital for Prompt
                                        Corrective Action (PCA) divided
                                        by adjusted average assets based
                                        on the definition for prompt
                                        corrective action.
Concentration Measure for Large        The concentration score for large
 Insured depository institutions        institutions is the higher of
 (excluding Highly Complex              the following two scores:
 Institutions).
    (1) Higher-Risk Assets/Tier 1      Sum of construction and land
     Capital and Reserves.              development (C&D) loans (funded
                                        and unfunded), higher-risk C&I
                                        loans (funded and unfunded),
                                        nontraditional mortgages, higher-
                                        risk consumer loans, and higher-
                                        risk securitizations divided by
                                        Tier 1 capital and reserves. See
                                        Appendix C for the detailed
                                        description of the ratio.
    (2) Growth-Adjusted Portfolio      The measure is calculated in the
     Concentrations.                    following steps:
                                          (1) Concentration levels (as a
                                           ratio to Tier 1 capital and
                                           reserves) are calculated for
                                           each broad portfolio
                                           category:
                                             C&D,
                                             Other commercial
                                             real estate loans,
                                             First lien
                                             residential mortgages
                                             (including non-agency
                                             residential mortgage-backed
                                             securities),
                                             Closed-end junior
                                             liens and home equity lines
                                             of credit (HELOCs),
                                             Commercial and
                                             industrial loans,
                                             Credit card loans,
                                             and
                                             Cther consumer
                                             loans.
                                          (2) Risk weights are assigned
                                           to each loan category based
                                           on historical loss rates.
                                          (3) Concentration levels are
                                           multiplied by risk weights
                                           and squared to produce a risk-
                                           adjusted concentration ratio
                                           for each portfolio.
                                          (4) Three-year merger-adjusted
                                           portfolio growth rates are
                                           then scaled to a growth
                                           factor of 1 to 1.2 where a 3-
                                           year cumulative growth rate
                                           of 20 percent or less equals
                                           a factor of 1 and a growth
                                           rate of 80 percent or greater
                                           equals a factor of 1.2. If
                                           three years of data are not
                                           available, a growth factor of
                                           1 will be assigned.
                                          (5) The risk-adjusted
                                           concentration ratio for each
                                           portfolio is multiplied by
                                           the growth factor and
                                           resulting values are summed.
                                       See Appendix C for the detailed
                                        description of the measure.
Concentration Measure for Highly       Concentration score for highly
 Complex Institutions.                  complex institutions is the
                                        highest of the following three
                                        scores:
    (1) Higher-Risk Assets/Tier 1      Sum of C&D loans (funded and
     Capital and Reserves.              unfunded), higher-risk C&I loans
                                        (funded and unfunded),
                                        nontraditional mortgages, higher-
                                        risk consumer loans, and higher-
                                        risk securitizations divided by
                                        Tier 1 capital and reserves. See
                                        Appendix C for the detailed
                                        description of the measure.
(2) Top 20 Counterparty Exposure/Tier  Sum of the 20 largest total
 1 Capital and Reserves.                exposure amounts to
                                        counterparties divided by Tier 1
                                        capital and reserves. The total
                                        exposure amount is equal to the
                                        sum of the institution's
                                        exposure amounts to one
                                        counterparty (or borrower) for
                                        derivatives, securities
                                        financing transactions (SFTs),
                                        and cleared transactions, and
                                        its gross lending exposure
                                        (including all unfunded
                                        commitments) to that
                                        counterparty (or borrower). A
                                        counterparty includes an
                                        entity's own affiliates.
                                        Exposures to entities that are
                                        affiliates of each other are
                                        treated as exposures to one
                                        counterparty (or borrower).
                                        Counterparty exposure excludes
                                        all counterparty exposure to the
                                        U.S. government and departments
                                        or agencies of the U.S.
                                        government that is
                                        unconditionally guaranteed by
                                        the full faith and credit of the
                                        United States. The exposure
                                        amount for derivatives,
                                        including OTC derivatives,
                                        cleared transactions that are
                                        derivative contracts, and
                                        netting sets of derivative
                                        contracts, must be calculated
                                        using the methodology set forth
                                        in 12 CFR 324.34(a), but without
                                        any reduction for collateral
                                        other than cash collateral that
                                        is all or part of variation
                                        margin and that satisfies the
                                        requirements of 12 CFR
                                        324.10(c)(4)(ii)(C)(1)-(7). The
                                        exposure amount associated with
                                        SFTs, including cleared
                                        transactions that are SFTs, must
                                        be calculated using the
                                        standardized approach set forth
                                        in 12 CFR 324.37(b) or (c). For
                                        both derivatives and SFT
                                        exposures, the exposure amount
                                        to central counterparties must
                                        also include the default fund
                                        contribution.\2\

[[Page 593]]

 
(3) Largest Counterparty Exposure/     The largest total exposure amount
 Tier 1 Capital and Reserves.           to one counterparty divided by
                                        Tier 1 capital and reserves. The
                                        total exposure amount is equal
                                        to the sum of the institution's
                                        exposure amounts to one
                                        counterparty (or borrower) for
                                        derivatives, SFTs, and cleared
                                        transactions, and its gross
                                        lending exposure (including all
                                        unfunded commitments) to that
                                        counterparty (or borrower). A
                                        counterparty includes an
                                        entity's own affiliates.
                                        Exposures to entities that are
                                        affiliates of each other are
                                        treated as exposures to one
                                        counterparty (or borrower).
                                        Counterparty exposure excludes
                                        all counterparty exposure to the
                                        U.S. government and departments
                                        or agencies of the U.S.
                                        government that is
                                        unconditionally guaranteed by
                                        the full faith and credit of the
                                        United States. The exposure
                                        amount for derivatives,
                                        including OTC derivatives,
                                        cleared transactions that are
                                        derivative contracts, and
                                        netting sets of derivative
                                        contracts, must be calculated
                                        using the methodology set forth
                                        in 12 CFR 324.34(a), but without
                                        any reduction for collateral
                                        other than cash collateral that
                                        is all or part of variation
                                        margin and that satisfies the
                                        requirements of 12 CFR
                                        324.10(c)(4)(ii)(C)(1)-(7). The
                                        exposure amount associated with
                                        SFTs, including cleared
                                        transactions that are SFTs, must
                                        be calculated using the
                                        standardized approach set forth
                                        in 12 CFR 324.37(b) or (c). For
                                        both derivatives and SFT
                                        exposures, the exposure amount
                                        to central counterparties must
                                        also include the default fund
                                        contribution.\2\
Core Earnings/Average Quarter-End      Core earnings are defined as net
 Total Assets.                          income less extraordinary items
                                        and tax-adjusted realized gains
                                        and losses on available-for-sale
                                        (AFS) and held-to-maturity (HTM)
                                        securities, adjusted for
                                        mergers. The ratio takes a four-
                                        quarter sum of merger-adjusted
                                        core earnings and divides it by
                                        an average of five quarter-end
                                        total assets (most recent and
                                        four prior quarters). If four
                                        quarters of data on core
                                        earnings are not available, data
                                        for quarters that are available
                                        will be added and annualized. If
                                        five quarters of data on total
                                        assets are not available, data
                                        for quarters that are available
                                        will be averaged.
Credit Quality Measure...............  The credit quality score is the
                                        higher of the following two
                                        scores:
    (1) Criticized and Classified      Sum of criticized and classified
     Items/Tier 1 Capital and           items divided by the sum of Tier
     Reserves.                          1 capital and reserves.
                                        Criticized and classified items
                                        include items an institution or
                                        its primary federal regulator
                                        have graded ``Special Mention''
                                        or worse and include retail
                                        items under Uniform Retail
                                        Classification Guidelines,
                                        securities, funded and unfunded
                                        loans, other real estate owned
                                        (ORE), other assets, and marked-
                                        to-market counterparty
                                        positions, less credit valuation
                                        adjustments.\3\ Criticized and
                                        classified items exclude loans
                                        and securities in trading books,
                                        and the amount recoverable from
                                        the U.S. government, its
                                        agencies, or government-
                                        sponsored enterprises, under
                                        guarantee or insurance
                                        provisions.
    (2) Underperforming Assets/Tier 1  Sum of loans that are 30 days or
     Capital and Reserves.              more past due and still accruing
                                        interest, nonaccrual loans,
                                        restructured loans (including
                                        restructured 1-4 family loans),
                                        and ORE, excluding the maximum
                                        amount recoverable from the U.S.
                                        government, its agencies, or
                                        government-sponsored
                                        enterprises, under guarantee or
                                        insurance provisions, divided by
                                        a sum of Tier 1 capital and
                                        reserves.
Core Deposits/Total Liabilities......  Total domestic deposits excluding
                                        brokered deposits and uninsured
                                        non-brokered time deposits
                                        divided by total liabilities.
Balance Sheet Liquidity Ratio........  Sum of cash and balances due from
                                        depository institutions, federal
                                        funds sold and securities
                                        purchased under agreements to
                                        resell, and the market value of
                                        available for sale and held to
                                        maturity agency securities
                                        (excludes agency mortgage-backed
                                        securities but includes all
                                        other agency securities issued
                                        by the U.S. Treasury, U.S.
                                        government agencies, and U.S.
                                        government-sponsored
                                        enterprises) divided by the sum
                                        of federal funds purchased and
                                        repurchase agreements, other
                                        borrowings (including FHLB) with
                                        a remaining maturity of one year
                                        or less, 5 percent of insured
                                        domestic deposits, and 10
                                        percent of uninsured domestic
                                        and foreign deposits.\4\
Potential Losses/Total Domestic        Potential losses to the DIF in
 Deposits (Loss Severity Measure).      the event of failure divided by
                                        total domestic deposits.
                                        Appendix D describes the
                                        calculation of the loss severity
                                        measure in detail.
Market Risk Measure for Highly         The market risk score is a
 Complex Institutions.                  weighted average of the
                                        following three scores:
    (1) Trading Revenue Volatility/    Trailing 4-quarter standard
     Tier 1 Capital.                    deviation of quarterly trading
                                        revenue (merger-adjusted)
                                        divided by Tier 1 capital.
    (2) Market Risk Capital/Tier 1     Market risk capital divided by
     Capital.                           Tier 1 capital.\5\
    (3) Level 3 Trading Assets/Tier 1  Level 3 trading assets divided by
     Capital.                           Tier 1 capital.

[[Page 594]]

 
Average Short-term Funding/Average     Quarterly average of federal
 Total Assets.                          funds purchased and repurchase
                                        agreements divided by the
                                        quarterly average of total
                                        assets as reported on Schedule
                                        RC-K of the Call Reports
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The FDIC retains the flexibility, as part of the risk-based
  assessment system, without the necessity of additional notice-and-
  comment rulemaking, to update the minimum and maximum cutoff values
  for all measures used in the scorecard. The FDIC may update the
  minimum and maximum cutoff values for the higher-risk assets to Tier 1
  capital and reserves ratio in order to maintain an approximately
  similar distribution of higher-risk assets to Tier 1 capital and
  reserves ratio scores as reported prior to April 1, 2013, or to avoid
  changing the overall amount of assessment revenue collected. 76 FR
  10672, 10700 (February 25, 2011). The FDIC will review changes in the
  distribution of the higher-risk assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves
  ratio scores and the resulting effect on total assessments and risk
  differentiation between banks when determining changes to the cutoffs.
  The FDIC may update the cutoff values for the higher-risk assets to
  Tier 1 capital and reserves ratio more frequently than annually. The
  FDIC will provide banks with a minimum one quarter advance notice of
  changes in the cutoff values for the higher-risk assets to Tier 1
  capital and reserves ratio with their quarterly deposit insurance
  invoice.
\2\ EAD and SFTs are defined and described in the compilation issued by
  the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in its June 2006 document,
  ``International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital
  Standards.'' The definitions are described in detail in Annex 4 of the
  document. Any updates to the Basel II capital treatment of
  counterparty credit risk would be implemented as they are adopted.
  http://www.bis.org/publ/bcbs128.pdf
\3\ A marked-to-market counterparty position is equal to the sum of the
  net marked-to-market derivative exposures for each counterparty. The
  net marked-to-market derivative exposure equals the sum of all
  positive marked-to-market exposures net of legally enforceable netting
  provisions and net of all collateral held under a legally enforceable
  CSA plus any exposure where excess collateral has been posted to the
  counterparty. For purposes of the Criticized and Classified Items/Tier
  1 Capital and Reserves definition a marked-to-market counterparty
  position less any credit valuation adjustment can never be less than
  zero.
\4\ Deposit runoff rates for the balance sheet liquidity ratio reflect
  changes issued by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in its
  December 2010 document, ``Basel III: International Framework for
  liquidity risk measurement, standards, and monitoring,'' http://
  www.bis.org/publ/bcbs188.pdf.
\5\ Market risk capital is defined in Appendix C of part 325 of the FDIC
  Rules and Regulations or subpart F of Part 324 of the FDIC Rules and
  Regulations, as applicable.


[74 FR 9557, Mar. 4, 2009, as amended at 76 FR 10720, Feb. 25, 2011; 76 
FR 17521, Mar. 30, 2011; 77 FR 66015, Oct. 31, 2012; 78 FR 55904, Sept. 
10, 2013; 79 FR 70437, Nov. 26, 2014]



   Sec. Appendix B to Subpart A of Part 327--Conversion of Scorecard 
                           Measures into Score

                    1. Weighted Average CAMELS Rating

    Weighted average CAMELS ratings between 1 and 3.5 are assigned a 
score between 25 and 100 according to the following equation:

S = 25 + [(20/3) * (C\2\ ^1)],

where:
S = the weighted average CAMELS score; and
C = the weighted average CAMELS rating.

                       2. Other Scorecard Measures

    For certain scorecard measures, a lower ratio implies lower risk and 
a higher ratio implies higher risk. These measures include:
     Concentration measure;
     Credit quality measure;
     Market risk measure;
     Average short-term funding to average total assets ratio; 
and
     Potential losses to total domestic deposits ratio (loss 
severity measure).
    For those measures, a value between the minimum and maximum cutoff 
values is converted linearly to a score between 0 and 100, according to 
the following formula:

S = (V ^Min) * 100/(Max ^Min),

where S is score (rounded to three decimal points), V is the value of 
          the measure, Min is the minimum cutoff value and Max is the 
          maximum cutoff value.
    For other scorecard measures, a lower value represents higher risk 
and a higher value represents lower risk. These measures include:
     Leverage ratio;
     Core earnings to average quarter-end total assets ratio;
     Core deposits to total liabilities ratio; and
     Balance sheet liquidity ratio.
    For those measures, a value between the minimum and maximum cutoff 
values is converted linearly to a score between 0 and 100, according to 
the following formula:

S = (Max ^V) * 100/(Max ^Min),

where S is score (rounded to three decimal points), V is the value of 
          the measure, Max is the maximum cutoff value and Min is the 
          minimum cutoff value.

[76 FR 10720, Feb. 25, 2011]



                Sec. Appendix C to Subpart A of Part 327

                        I. Concentration Measures

    The concentration score for large banks is the higher of the higher-
risk assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves score or the growth-adjusted 
portfolio concentrations score.\1\ The concentration score for highly 
complex institutions is the highest of the higher-risk assets to Tier 1 
capital and reserves score, the Top 20 counterparty exposure to Tier 1 
capital and reserves score, or the largest counterparty to Tier 1 
capital and reserves

[[Page 595]]

score. The higher-risk assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves ratio and 
the growth-adjusted portfolio concentration measure are described 
herein.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ For the purposes of this Appendix, the term ``bank'' means 
insured depository institution.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

            A. Higher-Risk Assets/Tier 1 Capital and Reserves

    The higher-risk assets to Tier 1 capital and reserves ratio is the 
sum of the concentrations in each of five risk areas described below and 
is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.027

Where:

Hi is bank i's higher-risk concentration measure and k is a 
          risk area.\2\ The five risk areas (k) are: construction and 
          land development (C&D) loans; higher-risk commercial and 
          industrial (C&I) loans and securities; higher-risk consumer 
          loans; nontraditional mortgage loans; and higher-risk 
          securitizations.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ The higher-risk concentration ratio is rounded to two decimal 
points.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

               1. Construction and Land Development Loans

    Construction and land development loans include construction and 
land development loans outstanding and unfunded commitments to fund 
construction and land development loans, whether irrevocable or 
unconditionally cancellable.\3\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ Construction and land development loans are as defined in the 
instructions to Call Report Schedule RC-C Part I--Loans and Leases, as 
they may be amended from time to time, and include items reported on 
line items RC-C 1.a.1 (1-4 family residential construction loans), RC-C 
1.a.2. (Other construction loans and all land development and other land 
loans), and RC-O M.10.a (Total unfunded commitments to fund 
construction, land development, and other land loans secured by real 
estate), and exclude RC-O M.10.b (Portion of unfunded commitments to 
fund construction, land development and other loans that are guaranteed 
or insured by the U.S. government, including the FDIC), RC-O M.13.a 
(Portion of funded construction, land development, and other land loans 
guaranteed or insured by the U.S. government, excluding FDIC loss 
sharing agreements), RC-M 13a.1.a.1 (1-4 family construction and land 
development loans covered by loss sharing agreements with the FDIC), and 
RC-M 13a.1.a.2 (Other construction loans and all land development loans 
covered by loss sharing agreements with the FDIC).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

   2. Higher-Risk Commercial and Industrial (C&I) Loans and Securities

                               Definitions

                  Higher-Risk C&I Loans and Securities

    Higher-risk C&I loans and securities are:
    (a) All commercial and industrial (C&I) loans (including funded 
amounts and the amount of unfunded commitments, whether irrevocable or 
unconditionally cancellable) owed to the reporting bank (i.e., the bank 
filing its report of condition and income, or Call Report) by a higher-
risk C&I borrower, as that term is defined herein, regardless when the 
loans were made; \4 5\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ Commercial and industrial loans are as defined as commercial and 
industrial loans in the instructions to Call Report Schedule RC-C Part 
I--Loans and Leases, as they may be amended from time to time. This 
definition includes purchased credit impaired loans and overdrafts.
    \5\ Unfunded commitments are defined as unused commitments, as this 
term is defined in the instructions to Call Report Schedule RC-L, 
Derivatives and Off-Balance Sheet Items, as they may be amended from 
time to time.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) All securities, except securities classified as trading book, 
issued by a higher-risk C&I borrower, as that term is defined herein, 
that are owned by the reporting bank, without regard to when the 
securities were purchased; however, higher-risk C&I loans and securities 
exclude:
    (a) The maximum amount that is recoverable from the U.S. government 
under guarantee or insurance provisions;
    (b) Loans (including syndicated or participated loans) that are 
fully secured by cash collateral as provided herein;
    (c) Loans that are eligible for the asset-based lending exclusion, 
described herein, provided the bank's primary federal regulator (PFR) 
has not cited a criticism (included in the Matters Requiring Attention, 
or MRA) of the bank's controls or administration of its asset-based loan 
portfolio; and

[[Page 596]]

    (d) Loans that are eligible for the floor plan lending exclusion, 
described herein, provided the bank's PFR has not cited a criticism 
(included in the MRA) of the bank's controls or administration of its 
floor plan loan portfolio.

                        Higher-Risk C&I Borrower

    A ``higher-risk C&I borrower'' is a borrower that:
    (a) Owes the reporting bank on a C&I loan originally made on or 
after April 1, 2013, if:
    (i) The C&I loan has an original amount (including funded amounts 
and the amount of unfunded commitments, whether irrevocable or 
unconditionally cancellable) of at least $5 million;
    (ii) The loan meets the purpose and materiality tests described 
herein; and
    (iii) When the loan is made, the borrower meets the leverage test 
described herein; or
    (b) Obtains a refinance, as that term is defined herein, of an 
existing C&I loan, where the refinance occurs on or after April 1, 2013, 
and the refinanced loan is owed to the reporting bank, if:
    (i) The refinanced loan is in an amount (including funded amounts 
and the amount of unfunded commitments, whether irrevocable or 
unconditionally cancellable) of at least $5 million;
    (ii) The C&I loan being refinanced met the purpose and materiality 
tests (described herein) when it was originally made;
    (iii) The original loan was made no more than 5 years before the 
refinanced loan; and
    (iv) When the loan is refinanced, the borrower meets the leverage 
test.
    When a bank acquires a C&I loan originally made on or after April 1, 
2013, by another lender, it must determine whether the borrower is a 
higher-risk borrower as a result of the loan as soon as reasonably 
practicable, but not later than one year after acquisition. When a bank 
acquires loans from another entity on a recurring or programmatic basis, 
however, the bank must determine whether the borrower is a higher-risk 
borrower as a result of the loan as soon as is practicable, but not 
later than three months after the date of acquisition.
    A borrower ceases to be a ``higher-risk C&I borrower'' only if:
    (a) The borrower no longer has any C&I loans owed to the reporting 
bank that, when originally made, met the purpose and materiality tests 
described herein;
    (b) The borrower has such loans outstanding owed to the reporting 
bank, but they have all been refinanced more than 5 years after 
originally being made; or
    (c) The reporting bank makes a new C&I loan or refinances an 
existing C&I loan and the borrower no longer meets the leverage test 
described herein.

                             Original Amount

    The original amount of a loan, including the amounts to aggregate 
for purposes of arriving at the original amount, as described herein, 
is:
    (a) For C&I loans drawn down under lines of credit or loan 
commitments, the amount of the line of credit or loan commitment on the 
date of its most recent approval, extension or renewal prior to the date 
of the most recent Call Report; if, however, the amount currently 
outstanding on the loan as of the date of the bank's most recent Call 
Report exceeds this amount, then the original amount of the loan is the 
amount outstanding as of the date of the bank's most recent Call Report.
    (b) For syndicated or participated C&I loans, the total amount of 
the loan, rather than just the syndicated or participated portion held 
by the individual reporting bank.
    (c) For all other C&I loans (whether term or non-revolver loans), 
the total amount of the loan as of origination or the amount outstanding 
as of the date of the bank's most recent Call Report, whichever is 
larger.
    For purposes of defining original amount and a higher-risk C&I 
borrower:
    (a) All C&I loans that a borrower owes to the reporting bank that 
meet the purpose test when made, and that are made within six months of 
each other, must be aggregated to determine the original amount of the 
loan; however, only loans in the original amount of $1 million or more 
must be aggregated; and further provided, that loans made before the 
April 1, 2013, need not be aggregated.
    (b) When a C&I loan is refinanced through more than one loan, and 
the loans are made within six months of each other, they must be 
aggregated to determine the original amount.

                                Refinance

    For purposes of a C&I loan, a refinance includes:
    (a) Replacing an original obligation by a new or modified obligation 
or loan agreement;
    (b) Increasing the master commitment of the line of credit (but not 
adjusting sub-limits under the master commitment);
    (c) Disbursing additional money other than amounts already committed 
to the borrower;
    (d) Extending the legal maturity date;
    (e) Rescheduling principal or interest payments to create or 
increase a balloon payment;
    (f) Releasing a substantial amount of collateral;
    (g) Consolidating multiple existing obligations; or
    (h) Increasing or decreasing the interest rate.

[[Page 597]]

    A refinance of a C&I loan does not include a modification or series 
of modifications to a commercial loan other than as described above or 
modifications to a commercial loan that would otherwise meet this 
definition of refinance, but that result in the classification of a loan 
as a troubled debt restructuring (TDR), as this term is defined in the 
glossary of the Call Report instructions, as they may be amended from 
time to time.

                              Purpose Test

    A loan or refinance meets the purpose test if it is to finance:
    (a) A buyout, defined as the purchase or repurchase by the borrower 
of the borrower's outstanding equity, including, but not limited to, an 
equity buyout or funding an Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP);
    (b) An acquisition, defined as the purchase by the borrower of any 
equity interest in another company, or the purchase of all or a 
substantial portion of the assets of another company; or
    (c) A capital distribution, defined as a dividend payment or other 
transaction designed to enhance shareholder value, including, but not 
limited to, a repurchase of stock.
    At the time of refinance, whether the original loan met the purpose 
test may not be easily determined by a new lender. In such a case, the 
new lender must use its best efforts and reasonable due diligence to 
determine whether the original loan met the test.

                            Materiality Test

    A loan or refinance meets the materiality test if:
    (a) The original amount of the loan (including funded amounts and 
the amount of unfunded commitments, whether irrevocable or 
unconditionally cancellable) equals or exceeds 20 percent of the total 
funded debt of the borrower; total funded debt of the borrower is to be 
determined as of the date of the original loan and does not include the 
loan to which the materiality test is being applied; or
    (b) Before the loan was made, the borrower had no funded debt.
    When multiple loans must be aggregated to determine the original 
amount, the materiality test is applied as of the date of the most 
recent loan.
    At the time of refinance, whether the original loan met the 
materiality test may not be easily determined by a new lender. In such a 
case, the new lender must use its best efforts and reasonable due 
diligence to determine whether the original loan met the test.

                              Leverage Test

    A borrower meets the leverage test if:
    (a) The ratio of the borrower's total debt to trailing twelve-month 
EBITDA (commonly known as the operating leverage ratio) is greater than 
4; or
    (b) The ratio of the borrower's senior debt to trailing twelve-month 
EBITDA (also commonly known as the operating leverage ratio) is greater 
than 3.
    EBITDA is defined as earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, 
and amortization.
    Total debt is defined as all interest-bearing financial obligations 
and includes, but is not limited to, overdrafts, borrowings, repurchase 
agreements (repos), trust receipts, bankers acceptances, debentures, 
bonds, loans (including those secured by mortgages), sinking funds, 
capital (finance) lease obligations (including those obligations that 
are convertible, redeemable or retractable), mandatory redeemable 
preferred and trust preferred securities accounted for as liabilities in 
accordance with ASC Subtopic 480-10, Distinguishing Liabilities from 
Equity--Overall (formerly FASB Statement No. 150, ``Accounting for 
Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities 
and Equity''), and subordinated capital notes. Total debt excludes 
pension obligations, deferred tax liabilities and preferred equity.
    Senior debt includes any portion of total debt that has a priority 
claim on any of the borrower's assets. A priority claim is a claim that 
entitles the holder to priority of payment over other debt holders in 
bankruptcy.
    When calculating either of the borrower's operating leverage ratios, 
the only permitted EBITDA adjustments are those specifically permitted 
for that borrower in the loan agreement (at the time of underwriting) 
and only funded amounts of lines of credit must be considered debt.
    The debt-to-EBITDA ratio must be calculated using the consolidated 
financial statements of the borrower. If the loan is made to a 
subsidiary of a larger organization, the debt-to-EBITDA ratio may be 
calculated using the financial statements of the subsidiary or, if the 
parent company has unconditionally and irrevocably guaranteed the 
borrower's debt, using the consolidated financial statements of the 
parent company.
    In the case of a merger of two companies or the acquisition of one 
or more companies or parts of companies, pro-forma debt is to be used as 
well as the trailing twelve-month pro-forma EBITDA for the combined 
companies. When calculating the trailing pro-forma EBITDA for the 
combined company, no adjustments are allowed for economies of scale or 
projected cost savings that may be realized subsequent to the 
acquisition unless specifically permitted for that borrower under the 
loan agreement.

[[Page 598]]

                               Exclusions

                        Cash Collateral Exclusion

    To exclude a loan based on cash collateral, the cash must be in the 
form of a savings or time deposit held by a bank. The bank (or lead bank 
or agent bank in the case of a participation or syndication) must have a 
perfected first priority security interest, a security agreement, and a 
collateral assignment of the deposit account that is irrevocable for the 
remaining term of the loan or commitment. In addition, the bank must 
place a hold on the deposit account that alerts the bank's employees to 
an attempted withdrawal. If the cash collateral is held at another bank 
or at multiple banks, a security agreement must be in place and each 
bank must have an account control agreement in place.\6\ For the 
exclusion to apply to a revolving line of credit, the cash collateral 
must be equal to or greater than the amount of the total loan commitment 
(the aggregate funded and unfunded balance of the loan).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \6\ An account control agreement, for purposes of this Appendix, 
means a written agreement between the lending bank (the secured party), 
the borrower, and the bank that holds the deposit account serving as 
collateral (the depository bank), that the depository bank will comply 
with instructions originated by the secured party directing disposition 
of the funds in the deposit account without further consent by the 
borrower (or any other party).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

              Asset-Based and Floor Plan Lending Exclusions

    The FDIC retains the authority to verify that banks have sound 
internal controls and administration practices for asset-based and floor 
plan loans that are excluded from a bank's reported higher-risk C&I 
loans and securities totals. If the bank's PFR has cited a criticism of 
the bank's controls or administration of its asset-based or floor plan 
loan portfolios in an MRA, the bank is not eligible for the asset-based 
or floor plan lending exclusions.

                     Asset-Based Lending Conditions

    Asset-based loans (loans secured by accounts receivable and 
inventory) that meet all the following conditions are excluded from a 
bank's higher-risk C&I loan totals:
    (a) The loan is managed by a loan officer or group of loan officers 
at the reporting bank who have experience in asset-based lending and 
collateral monitoring, including, but not limited to, experience in 
reviewing the following: Collateral reports, borrowing base certificates 
(which are discussed herein), collateral audit reports, loan-to-
collateral values (LTV), and loan limits, using procedures common to the 
industry.
    (b) The bank has taken, or has the legally enforceable ability to 
take, dominion over the borrower's deposit accounts such that proceeds 
of collateral are applied to the loan balance as collected. Security 
agreements must be in place in all cases; in addition, if a borrower's 
deposit account is held at a bank other than the lending bank, an 
account control agreement must also be in place.
    (c) The bank has a perfected first priority security interest in all 
assets included in the borrowing base certificate.
    (d) If the loan is a credit facility (revolving or term loan), it 
must be fully secured by self-liquidating assets such as accounts 
receivable and inventory.\7\ Other non-self-liquidating assets may be 
part of the borrowing base, but the outstanding balance of the loan must 
be fully secured by the portion of the borrowing base that is composed 
of self-liquidating assets. Fully secured is defined as a 100 percent or 
lower LTV ratio after applying the appropriate discounts (determined by 
the loan agreement) to the collateral. If an over advance (including a 
seasonal over advance) causes the LTV to exceed 100 percent, the loan 
may not be excluded from higher-risk C&I loans owed by a higher-risk C&I 
borrower. Additionally, the bank must have the ability to withhold 
funding of a draw or advance if the loan amount exceeds the amount 
allowed by the collateral formula.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \7\ An asset is self-liquidating if, in the event the borrower 
defaults, the asset can be easily liquidated and the proceeds of the 
sale of the assets would be used to pay down the loan. These assets can 
include machinery, heavy equipment or rental equipment if the machinery 
or equipment is inventory for the borrower's primary business and the 
machinery or equipment is included in the borrowing base.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) A bank's lending policy or procedures must address the 
maintenance of an accounts receivable loan agreement with the borrower. 
This loan agreement must establish a maximum percentage advance, which 
cannot exceed 85 percent, against eligible accounts receivable, include 
a maximum dollar amount due from any one account debtor, address the 
financial strength of debtor accounts, and define eligible receivables. 
The definition of eligible receivables must consider the receivable 
quality, the turnover and dilution rates of receivables pledged, the 
aging of accounts receivable, the concentrations of debtor accounts, and 
the performance of the receivables related to their terms of sale.
    Concentration of debtor accounts is the percentage value of 
receivables associated with one or a few customers relative to the total 
value of receivables. Turnover of receivables is the velocity at which 
receivables

[[Page 599]]

are collected. The dilution rate is the uncollectible accounts 
receivable as a percentage of sales.
    Ineligibles must be established for any debtor account where there 
is concern that the debtor may not pay according to terms. Monthly 
accounts receivable agings must be received in sufficient detail to 
allow the bank to compute the required ineligibles. At a minimum, the 
following items must be deemed ineligible accounts receivable:
    (i) Accounts receivable balances over 90 days beyond invoice date or 
60 days past due, depending upon custom with respect to a particular 
industry with appropriate adjustments made for dated billings;
    (ii) Entire account balances where over 50 percent of the account is 
over 60 days past due or 90 days past invoice date;
    (iii) Accounts arising from sources other than trade (e.g., 
royalties, rebates);
    (iv) Consignment or guaranteed sales;
    (v) Notes receivable;
    (vi) Progress billings;
    (vii) Account balances in excess of limits appropriate to account 
debtor's credit worthiness or unduly concentrated by industry, location 
or customer;
    (viii) Affiliate and intercompany accounts; and
    (ix) Foreign accounts receivable.
    (f) Loans against inventory must be made with advance rates no more 
than 65 percent of eligible inventory (at the lower of cost valued on a 
first-in, first-out (FIFO) basis or market) based on an analysis of 
realizable value. When an appraisal is obtained, or there is a readily 
determinable market price for the inventory, however, up to 85 percent 
of the net orderly liquidation value (NOLV) or the market price of the 
inventory may be financed. Inventory must be valued or appraised by an 
independent third-party appraiser using NOLV, fair value, or forced sale 
value (versus a ``going concern'' value), whichever is appropriate, to 
arrive at a net realizable value. Appraisals are to be prepared in 
accordance with industry standards, unless there is a readily available 
and determinable market price for the inventory (e.g., in the case of 
various commodities), from a recognized exchange or third-party industry 
source, and a readily available market (e.g., for aluminum, crude oil, 
steel, and other traded commodities); in that case, inventory may be 
valued using current market value. When relying upon current market 
value rather than an independent appraisal, the reporting bank's 
management must update the value of inventory as market prices for the 
product change. Valuation updates must be as frequent as needed to 
ensure compliance with margin requirements. In addition, appropriate 
mark-to-market reserves must be established to protect against excessive 
inventory price fluctuations. An asset has a readily identifiable and 
publicly available market price if the asset's price is quoted routinely 
in a widely disseminated publication that is readily available to the 
general public.
    (g) A bank's lending policy or procedures must address the 
maintenance of an inventory loan agreement with the borrower. This loan 
agreement must establish a maximum percentage advance rate against 
acceptable inventory, address acceptable appraisal and valuation 
requirements, and define acceptable and ineligible inventory. 
Ineligibles must be established for inventory that exhibit 
characteristics that make it difficult to achieve a realizable value or 
to obtain possession of the inventory. Monthly inventory agings must be 
received in sufficient detail to allow the bank to compute the required 
ineligibles. At a minimum, ineligible inventory must include:
    (i) Slow moving, obsolete inventory and items turning materially 
slower than industry average;
    (ii) Inventory with value to the client only, which is generally 
work in process, but may include raw materials used solely in the 
client's manufacturing process;
    (iii) Consigned inventory or other inventory where a perfected 
security interest cannot be obtained;
    (iv) Off-premise inventory subject to a mechanic's or other lien; 
and
    (v) Specialized, high technology or other inventory subject to rapid 
obsolescence or valuation problems.
    (h) The bank must maintain documentation of borrowing base 
certificate reviews and collateral trend analyses to demonstrate that 
collateral values are actively, routinely and consistently monitored. A 
borrowing base certificate is a form prepared by the borrower that 
reflects the current status of the collateral. A new borrowing base 
certificate must be obtained within 30 days before or after each draw or 
advance on a loan. A bank is required to validate the borrowing base 
through asset-based tracking reports. The borrowing base validation 
process must include the bank requesting from the borrower a list of 
accounts receivable by creditor and a list of individual items of 
inventory and the bank certifying that the outstanding balance of the 
loan remains within the collateral formula prescribed by the loan 
agreement. Any discrepancies between the list of accounts receivable and 
inventory and the borrowing base certificate must be reconciled with the 
borrower. Periodic, but no less than annual, field examinations (audits) 
must also be performed by individuals who are independent of the credit 
origination or administration process. There must be a process in place 
to ensure that the bank is correcting audit exceptions.

[[Page 600]]

                      Floor Plan Lending Conditions

    Floor plan loans may include, but are not limited to, loans to 
finance the purchase of various vehicles or equipment including 
automobiles, boat or marine equipment, recreational vehicles (RV), 
motorized watersports vehicles such as jet skis, or motorized lawn and 
garden equipment such as tractor lawnmowers. Floor plan loans that meet 
all the following conditions are excluded from a bank's higher-risk C&I 
loan totals:
    (a) The loan is managed by a loan officer or a group of loan 
officers at the reporting bank who are experienced in floor plan lending 
and monitoring collateral to ensure the borrower remains in compliance 
with floor plan limits and repayment requirements. Loan officers must 
have experience in reviewing certain items, including but not limited 
to: Collateral reports, floor plan limits, floor plan aging reports, 
vehicle inventory audits or inspections, and LTV ratios. The bank must 
obtain and review financial statements of the borrower (e.g., tax 
returns, company-prepared financial statements, or dealer statements) on 
at least a quarterly basis to ensure that adequate controls are in 
place. (A ``dealer statement'' is the standard format financial 
statement issued by Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) and used by 
nationally recognized automobile dealer floor plan lenders.)
    (b) For automobile floor plans, each loan advance must be made 
against a specific automobile under a borrowing base certificate held as 
collateral at no more than 100 percent of (i) dealer invoice plus 
freight charges (for new vehicles) or (ii) the cost of a used automobile 
at auction or the wholesale value using the prevailing market guide 
(e.g., NADA, Black Book, Blue Book). The advance rate of 100 percent of 
dealer invoice plus freight charges on new automobiles, and the advance 
rate of the cost of a used automobile at auction or the wholesale value, 
may only be used where there is a manufacturer repurchase agreement or 
an aggressive curtailment program in place that is tracked by the bank 
over time and subject to strong controls. Otherwise, permissible advance 
rates must be lower than 100 percent.
    (c) Advance rates on vehicles other than automobiles must conform to 
industry standards for advance rates on such inventory, but may never 
exceed 100 percent of dealer invoice plus freight charges on new 
vehicles or 100 percent of the cost of a used vehicle at auction or its 
wholesale value.
    (d) Each loan is self-liquidating (i.e., if the borrower defaulted 
on the loan, the collateral could be easily liquidated and the proceeds 
of the sale of the collateral would be used to pay down the loan 
advance).
    (e) Vehicle inventories and collateral values are closely monitored, 
including the completion of regular (at least quarterly) dealership 
automotive or other vehicle dealer inventory audits or inspections to 
ensure accurate accounting for all vehicles held as collateral. The 
lending bank or a third party must prepare inventory audit reports and 
inspection reports for loans to automotive dealerships, or loans to 
other vehicle dealers, and the lending bank must review the reports at 
least quarterly. The reports must list all vehicles held as collateral 
and verify that the collateral is in the dealer's possession.
    (f) Floor plan aging reports must be reviewed by the bank as 
frequently as required under the loan agreement, but no less frequently 
than quarterly. Floor plan aging reports must reflect specific 
information about each automobile or vehicle being financed (e.g., the 
make, model, and color of the automobile or other vehicle, and 
origination date of the loan to finance the automobile or vehicle). 
Curtailment programs should be instituted where necessary and banks must 
ensure that curtailment payments are made on stale automotive or other 
vehicle inventory financed under the floor plan loan.

                            Detailed Reports

    Examples of detailed reports that must be provided to the asset-
based and floor plan lending bank include:
    (a) Borrowing Base Certificates: Borrowing base certificates, along 
with supporting information, must include:
    (i) The accounts receivable balance (rolled forward from the 
previous certificate);
    (ii) Sales (reported as gross billings) with detailed adjustments 
for returns and allowances to allow for proper tracking of dilution and 
other reductions in collateral;
    (iii) Detailed inventory information (e.g., raw materials, work-in-
process, finished goods); and
    (iv) Detail of loan activity.
    (b) Accounts Receivable and Inventory Detail: A listing of accounts 
receivable and inventory that is included on the borrowing base 
certificate. Monthly accounts receivable and inventory agings must be 
received in sufficient detail to allow the lender to compute the 
required ineligibles.
    (c) Accounts Payable Detail: A listing of each accounts payable owed 
to the borrower. Monthly accounts payable agings must be received to 
monitor payable performance and anticipated working capital needs.
    (d) Covenant Compliance Certificates: A listing of each loan 
covenant and the borrower's compliance with each one. Borrowers must 
submit Covenant Compliance Certificates, generally on a monthly or 
quarterly basis (depending on the terms of the loan agreement) to 
monitor compliance with the covenants outlined in the loan agreement. 
Non-compliance with any covenants must be promptly addressed.

[[Page 601]]

    (e) Dealership Automotive Inventory or Other Vehicle Inventory 
Audits or Inspections: The bank or a third party must prepare inventory 
audit reports or inspection reports for loans to automotive dealerships 
and other vehicle dealerships. The bank must review the reports at least 
quarterly. The reports must list all vehicles held as collateral and 
verify that the collateral is in the dealer's possession.
    (f) Floor Plan Aging Reports: Borrowers must submit floor plan aging 
reports on a monthly or quarterly basis (depending on the terms of the 
loan agreement). These reports must reflect specific information about 
each automobile or other type of vehicle being financed (e.g., the make, 
model, and color of the automobile or other type of vehicle, and 
origination date of the loan to finance the automobile or other type of 
vehicle).

                      3. Higher-Risk Consumer Loans

                               Definitions

    Higher-risk consumer loans are defined as all consumer loans where, 
as of origination, or, if the loan has been refinanced, as of refinance, 
the probability of default (PD) within two years (the two-year PD) is 
greater than 20 percent, excluding those consumer loans that meet the 
definition of a nontraditional mortgage loan. \8 9\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \8\ For the purposes of this rule, consumer loans consist of all 
loans secured by 1-4 family residential properties as well as loans and 
leases made to individuals for household, family, and other personal 
expenditures, as defined in the instructions to the Call Report, 
Schedule RC-C, as the instructions may be amended from time to time. 
Higher-risk consumer loans include purchased credit-impaired loans that 
meet the definition of higher-risk consumer loans.
    \9\ The FDIC has the flexibility, as part of its risk-based 
assessment system, to change the 20 percent threshold for identifying 
higher-risk consumer loans without further notice-and-comment rulemaking 
as a result of reviewing data for up to the first two reporting periods 
after the effective date of this rule. Before making any such change, 
the FDIC will analyze the potential effect of changing the PD threshold 
on the distribution of higher-risk consumer loans among banks and the 
resulting effect on assessments collected from the industry. The FDIC 
will provide banks with at least one quarter advance notice of any such 
change to the PD threshold through a Financial Institution Letter.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Higher-risk consumer loans exclude:
    (a) The maximum amounts recoverable from the U.S. government under 
guarantee or insurance provisions; and
    (b) Loans fully secured by cash collateral. To exclude a loan based 
on cash collateral, the cash must be in the form of a savings or time 
deposit held by a bank. The lending bank (or lead or agent bank in the 
case of a participation or syndication) must, in all cases, (including 
instances in which cash collateral is held at another bank or banks) 
have a perfected first priority security interest under applicable state 
law, a security agreement in place, and all necessary documents executed 
and measures taken as required to result in such perfection and 
priority. In addition, the lending bank must place a hold on the deposit 
account that alerts the bank's employees to an attempted withdrawal. For 
the exclusion to apply to a revolving line of credit, the cash 
collateral must be equal to, or greater than, the amount of the total 
loan commitment (the aggregate funded and unfunded balance of the loan).
    Banks must determine the PD of a consumer loan as of the date the 
loan was originated, or, if the loan has been refinanced, as of the date 
it was refinanced. The two-year PD must be estimated using an approach 
that conforms to the requirements detailed herein.

 Loans Originated or Refinanced Before April 1, 2013, and all Acquired 
                                  Loans

    For loans originated or refinanced by a bank before April 1, 2013, 
and all acquired loans regardless of the date of acquisition, if 
information as of the date the loan was originated or refinanced is not 
available, then the bank must use the oldest available information to 
determine the PD. If no information is available, then the bank must 
obtain recent, refreshed data from the borrower or other appropriate 
third party to determine the PD. Refreshed data is defined as the most 
recent data available, and must be as of a date that is no earlier than 
three months before the acquisition of the loan. In addition, for loans 
acquired on or after April 1, 2013, the acquiring bank shall have six 
months from the date of acquisition to determine the PD.
    When a bank acquires loans from another entity on a recurring or 
programmatic basis, the acquiring bank may determine whether the loan 
meets the definition of a higher-risk consumer loan using the 
origination criteria and analysis performed by the original lender only 
if the acquiring bank verifies the information provided. Loans acquired 
from another entity are acquired on a recurring basis if a bank has 
acquired other loans from that entity at least once within the calendar 
year of the acquisition of the loans in question or in the previous 
calendar year. If the acquiring bank cannot or does not verify the 
information provided by the original lender, the acquiring bank must 
obtain the necessary information from the borrower or other appropriate 
third party to make its

[[Page 602]]

own determination of whether the purchased assets should be classified 
as a higher-risk consumer loan.

   Loans That Meet Both Higher-Risk Consumer Loans and Nontraditional 
                       Mortgage Loans Definitions

    A loan that meets both the nontraditional mortgage loan and higher-
risk consumer loan definitions at the time of origination, or, if the 
loan has been refinanced, as of refinance, must be reported only as a 
nontraditional mortgage loan. If, however, the loan ceases to meet the 
nontraditional mortgage loan definition but continues to meet the 
definition of a higher-risk consumer loan, the loan is to be reported as 
a higher-risk consumer loan.

                 General Requirements for PD Estimation

                         Scorable Consumer Loans

    Estimates of the two-year PD for a loan must be based on the 
observed, stress period default rate (defined herein) for loans of a 
similar product type made to consumers with credit risk comparable to 
the borrower being evaluated. While a bank may consider additional risk 
factors beyond the product type and credit score (e.g., geography) in 
estimating the PD of a loan, it must at a minimum account for these two 
factors. The credit risk assessment must be determined using third party 
or internal scores derived using a scoring system that qualifies as 
empirically derived, demonstrably and statistically sound as defined in 
12 CFR 202.2(p), as it may be amended from time to time, and has been 
approved by the bank's model risk oversight and governance process and 
internal audit mechanism. In the case of a consumer loan with a co-
signer or co-borrower, the PD may be determined using the most favorable 
individual credit score.
    In estimating the PD based on such scores, banks must adhere to the 
following requirements:
    (a) The PD must be estimated as the average of the two, 24-month 
default rates observed from July 2007 to June 2009, and July 2009 to 
June 2011, where the average is calculated according to the following 
formula and DRt is the observed default rate over the 24-
month period beginning in July of year t:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.028

    (b) The default rate for each 24-month period must be calculated as 
the number of active loans that experienced at least one default event 
during the period divided by the total number of active loans as of the 
observation date (i.e., the beginning of the 24-month period). An 
``active'' loan is defined as any loan that was open and not in default 
as of the observation date, and on which a payment was made within the 
12 months prior to the observation date.
    (c) The default rate for each 24-month period must be calculated 
using a stratified random sample of loans that is sufficient in size to 
derive statistically meaningful results for the product type and credit 
score (and any additional risk factors) being evaluated. The product 
strata must be as homogenous as possible with respect to the factors 
that influence default, such that products with distinct risk 
characteristics are evaluated separately. The loans should be sampled 
based on the credit score as of the observation date, and each 24-month 
default rate must be calculated using a random sample of at least 1,200 
active loans.
    (d) Credit score strata must be determined by partitioning the 
entire credit score range generated by a given scoring system into a 
minimum of 15 bands. While the width of the credit score bands may vary, 
the scores within each band must reflect a comparable level of credit 
risk. Because performance data for scores at the upper and lower 
extremes of the population distribution is likely to be limited, 
however, the top and bottom bands may include a range of scores that 
suggest some variance in credit quality.
    (e) Each credit score will need to have a unique PD associated with 
it. Therefore, when the number of score bands is less than the number of 
unique credit scores (as will almost always be the case), banks must use 
a linear interpolation between adjacent default rates to determine the 
PD for a particular score. The observed default rate for each band must 
be assumed to correspond to the midpoint of the range for the band. For 
example, if one score band ranges from 621 to 625 and has an observed 
default rate of 4 percent, while the next lowest band ranges from 616 to 
620 and has an observed default rate of 6 percent, a 620 score must be 
assigned a default rate of 5.2 percent, calculated as

[[Page 603]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.029

    When evaluating scores that fall below the midpoint of the lowest 
score band or above the midpoint of the highest score band, the 
interpolation must be based on an assumed adjacent default rate of 1 or 
0, respectively.
    (f) The credit scores represented in the historical sample must have 
been produced by the same entity, using the same or substantially 
similar methodology as the methodology used to derive the credit scores 
to which the default rates will be applied. For example, the default 
rate for a particular vendor score cannot be evaluated based on the 
score-to-default rate relationship for a different vendor, even if the 
range of scores under both systems is the same. On the other hand, if 
the current and historical scores were produced by the same vendor using 
slightly different versions of the same scoring system and equivalent 
scores represent a similar likelihood of default, then the historical 
experience could be applied.
    (g) A loan is to be considered in default when it is 90 + days past 
due, charged-off, or the borrower enters bankruptcy.

                        Unscorable Consumer Loans

    For unscorable consumer loans--where the available information about 
a borrower is insufficient to determine a credit score--the bank will be 
unable to assign a PD to the loan according to the requirements 
described above. If the total outstanding balance of the unscorable 
consumer loans of a particular product type (including, but not limited 
to, student loans) exceeds 5 percent of the total outstanding balance 
for that product type, including both foreign and domestic loans, the 
excess amount shall be treated as higher risk (the de minimis approach). 
Otherwise, the total outstanding balance of unscorable consumer loans of 
a particular product type will not be considered higher risk. The 
consumer product types used to determine whether the 5 percent test is 
satisfied shall correspond to the product types listed in the table used 
for reporting PD estimates.
    A bank may not develop PD estimates for unscorable loans based on 
internal data.
    If, after the origination or refinance of the loan, an unscorable 
consumer loan becomes scorable, a bank must reclassify the loan using a 
PD estimated according to the general requirements above. Based upon 
that PD, the loan will be determined to be either higher risk or not, 
and that determination will remain in effect until a refinancing occurs, 
at which time the loan must be re-evaluated. An unscorable loan must be 
reviewed at least annually to determine if a credit score has become 
available.

                        Alternative Methodologies

    A bank may use internally derived default rates that were calculated 
using fewer observations or score bands than those specified above under 
certain conditions. The bank must submit a written request to the FDIC 
either in advance of, or concurrent with, reporting under the requested 
approach. The request must explain in detail how the proposed approach 
differs from the rule specifications and the bank must provide support 
for the statistical appropriateness of the proposed methodology. The 
request must include, at a minimum, a table with the default rates and 
number of observations used in each score and product segment. The FDIC 
will evaluate the proposed methodology and may request additional 
information from the bank, which the bank must provide. The bank may 
report using its proposed approach while the FDIC evaluates the 
methodology. If, after reviewing the request, the FDIC determines that 
the bank's methodology is unacceptable, the bank will be required to 
amend its Call Reports and report according to the generally applicable 
specifications for PD estimation. The bank will be required to submit 
amended information for no more than the two most recently dated and 
filed Call Reports preceding the FDIC's determination.

                         Foreign Consumer Loans

    A bank must estimate the PD of a foreign consumer loan according to 
the general requirements described above unless doing so would be unduly 
complex or burdensome (e.g., if a bank had to develop separate PD 
mappings for many different countries). A bank may request to use 
default rates calculated using fewer observations or score bands than 
the specified minimums, either in advance of, or concurrent with, 
reporting under that methodology, but must comply with the requirements 
detailed above for using an alternative methodology.
    When estimating a PD according to the general requirements described 
above would be unduly complex or burdensome, a bank that is required to 
calculate PDs for foreign consumer loans under the requirements of the 
Basel II capital framework may: (1) Use the Basel II approach discussed 
herein, subject to the terms discussed herein; (2) submit a written 
request to the FDIC to use its own methodology, but may not use the 
methodology until approved by the FDIC; or (3)

[[Page 604]]

treat the loan as an unscorable consumer loan subject to the de minimis 
approach described above.
    When estimating a PD according to the general requirements described 
above would be unduly complex or burdensome, a bank that is not required 
to calculate PDs for foreign consumer loans under the requirements of 
the Basel II capital framework may: (1) Treat the loan as an unscorable 
consumer loan subject to the de minimis approach described above; or (2) 
submit a written request to the FDIC to use its own methodology, but may 
not use the methodology until approved by the FDIC.
    When a bank submits a written request to the FDIC to use its own 
methodology, the FDIC may request additional information from the bank 
regarding the proposed methodology and the bank must provide the 
information. The FDIC may grant a bank tentative approval to use the 
methodology while the FDIC considers it in more detail. If the FDIC 
ultimately disapproves the methodology, the bank may be required to 
amend its Call Reports; however, the bank will be required to amend no 
more than the two most recently dated and filed Call Reports preceding 
the FDIC's determination. In the amended Call Reports, the bank must 
treat any loan whose PD had been estimated using the disapproved 
methodology as an unscorable domestic consumer loan subject to the de 
minimis approach described above.

                            Basel II Approach

    A bank that is required to calculate PDs for foreign consumer loans 
under the requirements of the Basel II capital framework may estimate 
the two-year PD of a foreign consumer loan based on the one-year PD used 
for Basel II capital purposes.\10\ The bank must submit a written 
request to the FDIC in advance of, or concurrent with, reporting under 
that methodology. The request must explain in detail how one-year PDs 
calculated under the Basel II framework are translated to two-year PDs 
that meet the requirements above. While the range of acceptable 
approaches is potentially broad, any proposed methodology must meet the 
following requirements:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \10\ Using these Basel II PDs for this purpose does not imply that a 
bank's PFR has approved use of these PDs for the Basel II capital 
framework. If a bank's PFR requires it to revise its Basel II PD 
methodology, the bank must use revised Basel II PDs to calculate (or 
recalculate if necessary) corresponding PDs under this Basel II 
approach.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (a) The bank must use data on a sample of loans for which both the 
one-year Basel II PDs and two-year final rule PDs can be calculated. The 
sample may contain both foreign and domestic loans.
    (b) The bank must use the sample data to demonstrate that a 
meaningful relationship exists between the two types of PD estimates, 
and the significance and nature of the relationship must be determined 
using accepted statistical principles and methodologies. For example, to 
the extent that a linear relationship exists in the sample data, the 
bank may use an ordinary least-squares regression to determine the best 
linear translation of Basel II PDs to final rule PDs. The estimated 
equation should fit the data reasonably well based on standard 
statistics such as the coefficient of determination; and
    (c) The method must account for any significant variation in the 
relationship between the two types of PD estimates that exists across 
consumer products based on the empirical analysis of the data. For 
example, if the bank is using a linear regression to determine the 
relationship between PD estimates, it should test whether the parameter 
estimates are significantly different by product type.
    The bank may report using this approach (if it first notifies the 
FDIC of its intention to do so), while the FDIC evaluates the 
methodology. If, after reviewing the methodology, the FDIC determines 
that the methodology is unacceptable, the bank will be required to amend 
its Call Reports. The bank will be required to submit amended 
information for no more than the two most recently dated and filed Call 
Reports preceding the FDIC's determination.

                                Refinance

    For purposes of higher-risk consumer loans, a refinance includes:
    (a) Extending new credit or additional funds on an existing loan;
    (b) Replacing an existing loan with a new or modified obligation;
    (c) Consolidating multiple existing obligations;
    (d) Disbursing additional funds to the borrower. Additional funds 
include a material disbursement of additional funds or, with respect to 
a line of credit, a material increase in the amount of the line of 
credit, but not a disbursement, draw, or the writing of convenience 
checks within the original limits of the line of credit. A material 
increase in the amount of a line of credit is defined as a 10 percent or 
greater increase in the quarter-end line of credit limit; however, a 
temporary increase in a credit card line of credit is not a material 
increase;
    (e) Increasing or decreasing the interest rate (except as noted 
herein for credit card loans); or
    (f) Rescheduling principal or interest payments to create or 
increase a balloon payment or extend the legal maturity date of the loan 
by more than six months.
    A refinance for this purpose does not include:

[[Page 605]]

    (a) A re-aging, defined as returning a delinquent, open-end account 
to current status without collecting the total amount of principal, 
interest, and fees that are contractually due, provided:
    (i) The re-aging is part of a program that, at a minimum, adheres to 
the re-aging guidelines recommended in the interagency approved Uniform 
Retail Credit Classification and Account Management Policy;\11\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \11\ Among other things, for a loan to be considered for re-aging, 
the following must be true: (1) The borrower must have demonstrated a 
renewed willingness and ability to repay the loan; (2) the loan must 
have existed for at least nine months; and (3) the borrower must have 
made at least three consecutive minimum monthly payments or the 
equivalent cumulative amount.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The program has clearly defined policy guidelines and 
parameters for re-aging, as well as internal methods of ensuring the 
reasonableness of those guidelines and monitoring their effectiveness; 
and
    (iii) The bank monitors both the number and dollar amount of re-aged 
accounts, collects and analyzes data to assess the performance of re-
aged accounts, and determines the effect of re-aging practices on past 
due ratios;
    (b) Modifications to a loan that would otherwise meet this 
definition of refinance, but result in the classification of a loan as a 
TDR;
    (c) Any modification made to a consumer loan pursuant to a 
government program, such as the Home Affordable Modification Program or 
the Home Affordable Refinance Program;
    (d) Deferrals under the Servicemembers Civil Relief Act;
    (e) A contractual deferral of payments or change in interest rate 
that is consistent with the terms of the original loan agreement (e.g., 
as allowed in some student loans);
    (f) Except as provided above, a modification or series of 
modifications to a closed-end consumer loan;
    (g) An advance of funds, an increase in the line of credit, or a 
change in the interest rate that is consistent with the terms of the 
loan agreement for an open-end or revolving line of credit (e.g., credit 
cards or home equity lines of credit);
    (h) For credit card loans:
    (i) Replacing an existing card because the original is expiring, for 
security reasons, or because of a new technology or a new system;
    (ii) Reissuing a credit card that has been temporarily suspended (as 
opposed to closed);
    (iii) Temporarily increasing the line of credit;
    (iv) Providing access to additional credit when a bank has 
internally approved a higher credit line than it has made available to 
the customer; or
    (v) Changing the interest rate of a credit card line when mandated 
by law (such as in the case of the Credit CARD Act).
    4. Nontraditional mortgage loans
    Nontraditional mortgage loans include all residential loan products 
that allow the borrower to defer repayment of principal or interest and 
include all interest-only products, teaser rate mortgages, and negative 
amortizing mortgages, with the exception of home equity lines of credit 
(HELOCs) or reverse mortgages. A teaser-rate mortgage loan is defined as 
a mortgage with a discounted initial rate where the lender offers a 
lower rate and lower payments for part of the mortgage term. A mortgage 
loan is no longer considered a nontraditional mortgage loan once the 
teaser rate has expired. An interest-only loan is no longer considered a 
nontraditional mortgage loan once the loan begins to amortize.
    Banks must determine whether residential loans meet the definition 
of a nontraditional mortgage loan as of origination, or, if the loan has 
been refinanced, as of refinance, as refinance is defined in this 
Appendix for purposes of higher-risk consumer loans. When a bank 
acquires a residential loan, it must determine whether the loan meets 
the definition of a nontraditional mortgage loan using the origination 
criteria and analysis performed by the original lender. If this 
information is unavailable, the bank must obtain refreshed data from the 
borrower or other appropriate third party. Refreshed data for 
residential loans is defined as the most recent data available. The 
data, however, must be as of a date that is no earlier than three months 
before the acquisition of the residential loan. The acquiring bank must 
also determine whether an acquired loan is higher risk not later than 
three months after acquisition.
    When a bank acquires loans from another entity on a recurring or 
programmatic basis, however, the acquiring bank may determine whether 
the loan meets the definition of a nontraditional mortgage loan using 
the origination criteria and analysis performed by the original lender 
only if the acquiring bank verifies the information provided. Loans 
acquired from another entity are acquired on a recurring basis if a bank 
has acquired other loans from that entity at least once within the 
calendar year or the previous calendar year of the acquisition of the 
loans in question.

                     5. Higher-Risk Securitizations

    Higher-risk securitizations are defined as securitizations or 
securitization exposures (except securitizations classified as trading 
book), where, in aggregate, more than 50 percent of the assets backing 
the securitization meet either the criteria for higher-risk C &

[[Page 606]]

I loans or securities, higher-risk consumer loans, or nontraditional 
mortgage loans, except those classified as trading book. A 
securitization is as defined in 12 CFR part 325, Appendix A, Section 
II(B)(16), or in 12 CFR 324.2, as applicable, as they may be amended 
from time to time. A higher-risk securitization excludes the maximum 
amount that is recoverable from the U.S. government under guarantee or 
insurance provisions.
    A bank must determine whether a securitization is higher risk based 
upon information as of the date of issuance (i.e., the date the 
securitization is sold on a market to the public for the first time). 
The bank must make this determination within the time limit that would 
apply under this Appendix if the bank were directly acquiring loans or 
securities of the type underlying the securitization. In making the 
determination, a bank must use one of the following methods:
    (a) For a securitization collateralized by a static pool of loans, 
whose underlying collateral changes due to the sale or amortization of 
these loans, the 50 percent threshold is to be determined based upon the 
amount of higher-risk assets, as defined in this Appendix, owned by the 
securitization on the date of issuance of the securitization.
    (b) For a securitization collateralized by a dynamic pool of loans, 
whose underlying collateral may change by the purchase of additional 
assets, including purchases made during a ramp-up period, the 50 percent 
threshold is to be determined based upon the highest amount of higher-
risk assets, as defined in this Appendix, allowable under the portfolio 
guidelines of the securitization.
    A bank is not required to evaluate a securitization on a continuous 
basis when the securitization is collateralized by a dynamic pool of 
loans; rather, the bank is only required to evaluate the securitization 
once.
    A bank is required to use the information that is reasonably 
available to a sophisticated investor in reasonably determining whether 
a securitization meets the 50 percent threshold. Information reasonably 
available to a sophisticated investor includes, but is not limited to, 
offering memoranda, indentures, trustee reports, and requests for 
information from servicers, collateral managers, issuers, trustees, or 
similar third parties. When determining whether a revolving trust or 
similar securitization meets the threshold, a bank may use established 
criteria, model portfolios, or limitations published in the offering 
memorandum, indenture, trustee report, or similar documents.
    Sufficient information necessary for a bank to make a definitive 
determination may not, in every case, be reasonably available to the 
bank as a sophisticated investor. In such a case, the bank may exercise 
its judgment in making the determination. In some cases, the bank need 
not rely upon all of the aforementioned pieces of information to make a 
higher-risk determination if fewer documents provide sufficient data to 
make the determination.
    In cases in which a securitization is required to be consolidated on 
the balance sheet as a result of SFAS 166 and SFAS 167, and a bank has 
access to the necessary information, a bank may opt for an alternative 
method of evaluating the securitization to determine whether it is 
higher risk. The bank may evaluate individual loans in the 
securitization on a loan-by-loan basis and only report as higher risk 
those loans that meet the definition of a higher-risk asset; any loan 
within the securitization that does not meet the definition of a higher-
risk asset need not be reported as such. When making this evaluation, 
the bank must follow the provisions of section I.B herein. Once a bank 
evaluates a securitization for higher-risk asset designation using this 
alternative evaluation method, it must continue to evaluate all 
securitizations that it has consolidated on the balance sheet as a 
result of SFAS 166 and SFAS 167, and for which it has the required 
information, using the alternative evaluation method. For 
securitizations for which the bank does not have access to information 
on a loan-by-loan basis, the bank must determine whether the 
securitization meets the 50 percent threshold in the manner previously 
described for other securitizations.

                      B. Application of Definitions

    Section I of this Appendix applies to:
    (1) All construction and land development loans, whenever originated 
or purchased;
    (2) C&I loans (as that term is defined in this Appendix) owed to a 
reporting bank by a higher-risk C&I borrower (as that term is defined in 
this Appendix) and all securities issued by a higher-risk C&I borrower, 
except securitizations of C&I loans, that are owned by the reporting 
bank;
    (3) Consumer loans (as defined in this Appendix), except 
securitizations of consumer loans, whenever originated or purchased;
    (4) Securitizations of C&I and consumer loans (as defined in this 
Appendix) issued on or after April 1, 2013, including those 
securitizations issued on or after April 1, 2013, that are partially or 
fully collateralized by loans originated before April 1, 2013.
    For C&I loans that are either originated or refinanced by a 
reporting bank before April 1, 2013, or purchased by a reporting bank 
before April 1, 2013, where the loans are owed to the reporting bank by 
a borrower that does not meet the definition of a higher-risk C&I 
borrower as that term is defined in this Appendix (which requires, among 
other things, that the borrower have obtained a C&I loan or refinanced 
an existing C&I loan on or

[[Page 607]]

after April 1, 2013) and securities purchased before April 1, 2013, that 
are issued by an entity that does not meet the definition of a higher-
risk C&I borrower, as that term is defined in this Appendix, banks must 
continue to use the transition guidance in the September 2012 Call 
Report instructions to determine whether to report the loan or security 
as a higher-risk asset for purposes of the higher-risk assets to Tier 1 
capital and reserves ratio. A bank may opt to apply the definition of 
higher-risk C&I loans and securities in this Appendix to all of its C&I 
loans and securities, but, if it does so, it must also apply the 
definition of a higher-risk C&I borrower in this Appendix without regard 
to when the loan is originally made or refinanced (i.e., whether made or 
refinanced before or after April 1, 2013).
    For consumer loans (other than securitizations of consumer loans) 
originated or purchased prior to April 1, 2013, a bank must determine 
whether the loan met the definition of a higher-risk consumer loan no 
later than June 30, 2013.
    For all securitizations issued before April 1, 2013, banks must 
either (1) continue to use the transition guidance or (2) apply the 
definitions in this Appendix to all of its securitizations. If a bank 
applies the definition of higher-risk C&I loans and securities in this 
Appendix to its securitizations, it must also apply the definition of a 
higher-risk C&I borrower in this Appendix to all C&I borrowers without 
regard to when the loans to those borrowers were originally made or 
refinanced (i.e., whether made or refinanced before or after April 1, 
2013).

           II. Growth-Adjusted Portfolio Concentration Measure

    The growth-adjusted concentration measure is the sum of the values 
of concentrations in each of the seven portfolios, each of the values 
being first adjusted for risk weights and growth. The product of the 
risk weight and the concentration ratio is first squared and then 
multiplied by the growth factor. The measure is calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.030

Where:

N is bank i's growth-adjusted portfolio concentration measure; \12\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \12\ The growth-adjusted portfolio concentration measure is rounded 
to two decimal points.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

k is a portfolio;
g is a growth factor for bank i's portfolio k; and,
w is a risk weight for portfolio k.

    The seven portfolios (k) are defined based on the Call Report/TFR 
data and they are:
     Construction and land development loans;
     Other commercial real estate loans;
     First-lien residential mortgages and non-agency residential 
mortgage-backed securities (excludes CMOs, REMICS, CMO and REMIC 
residuals, and stripped MBS issued by non-U.S. government issuers for 
which the collateral consists of MBS issued or guaranteed by U.S. 
government agencies);
     Closed-end junior liens and home equity lines of credit 
(HELOCs);
     Commercial and industrial loans;
     Credit card loans; and
     Other consumer loans. \13 14\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \13\ All loan concentrations should include the fair value of 
purchased credit impaired loans.
    \14\ Each loan concentration category should exclude the amount of 
loans recoverable from the U.S. government under guarantee or insurance 
provisions.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    The growth factor, g, is based on a three-year merger-adjusted 
growth rate for a given portfolio; g ranges from 1 to 1.2 where a 20 
percent growth rate equals a factor of 1 and an 80 percent growth rate 
equals a factor of 1.2.\15\ For growth rates less than 20 percent, g is 
1; for growth rates greater than 80 percent, g is 1.2. For growth rates 
between 20 percent and 80 percent, the growth factor is calculated as:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \15\ The growth factor is rounded to two decimal points.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.031
    

[[Page 608]]


Where:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR31OC12.032


V is the portfolio amount as reported on the Call Report/TFR and t is 
          the quarter for which the assessment is being determined.

    The risk weight for each portfolio reflects relative peak loss rates 
for banks at the 90th percentile during the 1990-2009 period.\16\ These 
loss rates were converted into equivalent risk weights as shown in Table 
C.1.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \16\ The risk weights are based on loss rates for each portfolio 
relative to the loss rate for C&I loans, which is given a risk weight of 
1. The peak loss rates were derived as follows. The loss rate for each 
loan category for each bank with over $5 billion in total assets was 
calculated for each of the last twenty calendar years (1990-2009). The 
highest value of the 90th percentile of each loan category over the 
twenty year period was selected as the peak loss rate.

  Table C.1--90th Percentile Annual Loss Rates for 1990-2009 Period and
                       Corresponding Risk Weights
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Loss rates
                Portfolio                      (90th       Risk weights
                                            percentile)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First-Lien Mortgages....................            2.3%             0.5
Second/Junior Lien Mortgages............            4.6%             0.9
Commercial and Industrial (C&I) Loans...            5.0%             1.0
Construction and Development (C&D) Loans           15.0%             3.0
Commercial Real Estate Loans, excluding             4.3%             0.9
 C&D....................................
Credit Card Loans.......................           11.8%             2.4
Other Consumer Loans....................            5.9%             1.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[77 FR 66017, Oct. 31, 2013, as amended at 78 FR 55594, Sept. 10, 2013]



   Sec. Appendix D to Subpart A of Part 327--Description of the Loss 
                            Severity Measure

    The loss severity measure applies a standardized set of assumptions 
to an institution's balance sheet to measure possible losses to the FDIC 
in the event of an institution's failure. To determine an institution's 
loss severity rate, the FDIC first applies assumptions about uninsured 
deposit and other unsecured liability runoff, and growth in insured 
deposits, to adjust the size and composition of the institution's 
liabilities. Assets are then reduced to match any reduction in 
liabilities.\1\ The institution's asset values are then further reduced 
so that the Leverage ratio reaches 2 percent.\2\ In both cases, assets 
are adjusted pro rata to preserve the institution's asset composition. 
Assumptions regarding loss rates at failure for a given asset category 
and the extent of secured liabilities are then applied to estimated 
assets and liabilities at failure to determine whether the institution 
has enough unencumbered assets to cover domestic deposits. Any projected 
shortfall is divided by current domestic deposits to obtain an end-of-
period loss severity ratio. The loss severity measure is an average loss 
severity ratio for the three most recent quarters of data available.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ In most cases, the model would yield reductions in liabilities 
and assets prior to failure. Exceptions may occur for institutions 
primarily funded through insured deposits, which the model assumes to 
grow prior to failure.
    \2\ Of course, in reality, runoff and capital declines occur more or 
less simultaneously as an institution approaches failure. The loss 
severity measure assumptions simplify this process for ease of modeling.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                Runoff and Capital Adjustment Assumptions

    Table D.1 contains run-off assumptions.

                   Table D.1--Runoff Rate Assumptions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Liability type                  Runoff rate * (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Insured Deposits...............................                     (10)
Uninsured Deposits.............................                       58
Foreign Deposits...............................                       80
Federal Funds Purchased........................                      100
Repurchase Agreements..........................                       75

[[Page 609]]

 
Trading Liabilities............................                       50
Unsecured Borrowings  1 Year...................                       75
Secured Borrowings  1 Year.....................                       25
Subordinated Debt and Limited Liability                               15
 Preferred Stock...............................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* A negative rate implies growth.

    Given the resulting total liabilities after runoff, assets are then 
reduced pro rata to preserve the relative amount of assets in each of 
the following asset categories and to achieve a Leverage ratio of 2 
percent:
     Cash and Interest Bearing Balances;
     Trading Account Assets;
     Federal Funds Sold and Repurchase Agreements;
     Treasury and Agency Securities;
     Municipal Securities;
     Other Securities;
     Construction and Development Loans;
     Nonresidential Real Estate Loans;
     Multifamily Real Estate Loans;
     1-4 Family Closed-End First Liens;
     1-4 Family Closed-End Junior Liens;
     Revolving Home Equity Loans; and
     Agricultural Real Estate Loans.

                   Recovery Value of Assets at Failure

    Table D.2 shows loss rates applied to each of the asset categories 
as adjusted above.

                 Table D.2--Asset Loss Rate Assumptions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Loss rate
                     Asset category                          (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cash and Interest Bearing Balances......................             0.0
Trading Account Assets..................................             0.0
Federal Funds Sold and Repurchase Agreements............             0.0
Treasury and Agency Securities..........................             0.0
Municipal Securities....................................            10.0
Other Securities........................................            15.0
Construction and Development Loans......................            38.2
Nonresidential Real Estate Loans........................            17.6
Multifamily Real Estate Loans...........................            10.8
1-4 Family Closed-End First Liens.......................            19.4
1-4 Family Closed-End Junior Liens......................            41.0
Revolving Home Equity Loans.............................            41.0
Agricultural Real Estate Loans..........................            19.7
Agricultural Loans......................................            11.8
Commercial and Industrial Loans.........................            21.5
Credit Card Loans.......................................            18.3
Other Consumer Loans....................................            18.3
All Other Loans.........................................            51.0
Other Assets............................................            75.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                     Secured Liabilities at Failure

    Federal home loan bank advances, secured federal funds purchased and 
repurchase agreements are assumed to be fully secured. Foreign deposits 
are treated as fully secured because of the potential for ring fencing.

                     Loss Severity Ratio Calculation

    The FDIC's loss given failure (LGD) is calculated as:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR25FE11.013
    
    An end-of-quarter loss severity ratio is LGD divided by total 
domestic deposits at quarter-end and the loss severity measure for the 
scorecard is an average of end-of-period loss severity ratios for three 
most recent quarters.

[76 FR 10724, Feb. 25, 2011]

[[Page 610]]



         Subpart B_Implementation of One-Time Assessment Credit

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1817(e)(3).

    Source: 71 FR 61383, Oct. 18, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 327.30  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Scope. This subpart B of part 327 implements the one-time 
assessment credit required by section 7(e)(3) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1817(e)(3) and applies to insured depository 
institutions.
    (b) Purpose. This subpart B of part 327 sets forth the rules for:
    (1) Determination of the aggregate amount of the one-time credit;
    (2) Identification of eligible insured depository institutions;
    (3) Determination of the amount of each eligible institution's 
December 31, 1996 assessment base ratio and one-time credit;
    (4) Transferability of credit amounts among insured depository 
institutions;
    (5) Application of such credit amounts against assessments; and
    (6) An institution's request for review of the FDIC's determination 
of a credit amount.



Sec. 327.31  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart and subpart C:
    (a) The average assessment rate for any assessment period means the 
aggregate assessment charged all insured depository institutions for 
that period divided by the aggregate assessment base for that period.
    (b) Board means the Board of Directors of the FDIC.
    (c) De facto rule means any transaction in which an insured 
depository institution assumes substantially all of the deposit 
liabilities and acquires substantially all of the assets of any other 
insured depository institution at the time of the transaction.
    (d) An eligible insured depository institution:
    (1) Means an insured depository institution that:
    (i) Was in existence on December 31, 1996, and paid a deposit 
insurance assessment before December 31, 1996; or
    (ii) Is a successor to an insured depository institution referred to 
in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section; and
    (2) does not include an institution if its insured status has 
terminated as of or after the effective date of this regulation.
    (e) Merger means any transaction in which an insured depository 
institution merges or consolidates with any other insured depository 
institution. Notwithstanding part 303, subpart D, for purposes of this 
subpart B and subpart C of this part, merger does not include 
transactions in which an insured depository institution either directly 
or indirectly acquires the assets of, or assumes liability to pay any 
deposits made in, any other insured depository institution, but there is 
not a legal merger or consolidation of the two insured depository 
institutions.
    (f) Resulting institution refers to the acquiring, assuming, or 
resulting institution in a merger.
    (g) Successor means a resulting institution or an insured depository 
institution that acquired part of another insured depository 
institution's 1996 assessment base ratio under paragraph 327.33(c) of 
this subpart under the de facto rule.



Sec. 327.32  Determination of aggregate credit amount.

    The aggregate amount of the one-time credit shall equal 
$4,707,580,238.19.



Sec. 327.33  Determination of eligible institution's credit amount.

    (a) Subject to paragraph (c) of this section, allocation of the one-
time credit shall be based on each eligible insured depository 
institution's 1996 assessment base ratio.
    (b) Subject to paragraph (c) of this section, an eligible insured 
depository institution's 1996 assessment base ratio shall consist of:
    (1) Its assessment base as of December 31, 1996 (adjusted as 
appropriate to reflect the assessment base of December 31, 1996, of all 
institutions for which it is the successor), as the numerator; and
    (2) The combined aggregate assessment bases of all eligible insured 
depository institutions, including any

[[Page 611]]

successor institutions, as of December 31, 1996, as the denominator.
    (c) If an insured depository institution is a successor to an 
eligible insured depository institution under the de facto rule, as 
defined in paragraph 327.31(c) of this subpart, the successor and the 
eligible insured depository institution will divide the eligible insured 
depository institution's 1996 assessment base ratio pro rata, based on 
the deposit liabilities assumed in the transaction. In any subsequent 
transaction involving an insured depository institution that previously 
engaged in a transaction to which the de facto rule applied, the insured 
depository institution may not be deemed to have transferred more than 
its remaining 1996 assessment base ratio. If the transferring 
institution is no longer an insured depository institution after the 
transfer, the last successor will acquire the transferring institution's 
remaining 1996 assessment base ratio.



Sec. 327.34  Transferability of credits.

    (a) Any remaining amount of the one-time assessment credit and the 
associated 1996 assessment base ratio shall transfer to a successor of 
an eligible insured depository institution.
    (b) Prior to the final determination of its 1996 assessment base and 
one-time assessment credit amount by the FDIC, an eligible insured 
depository institution may enter into an agreement to transfer any 
portion of such institution's one-time credit amount and 1996 assessment 
base ratio to another insured depository institution. The parties to the 
agreement shall notify the FDIC's Division of Finance and submit a 
written agreement, signed by legal representatives of both institutions. 
The parties must include documentation stating that each representative 
has the legal authority to bind the institution. The adjustment to 
credit amount and the associated 1996 assessment base ratio shall be 
made in the next assessment invoice that is sent at least 10 days after 
the FDIC's receipt of the written agreement.
    (c) An eligible insured depository institution may enter into an 
agreement after the final determination of its 1996 assessment base 
ratio and one-time credit amount by the FDIC to transfer any portion of 
such institution's one-time credit amount to another insured depository 
institution. The parties to the agreement shall notify the FDIC's 
Division of Finance and submit a written agreement, signed by legal 
representatives of both institutions. The parties must include 
documentation stating that each representative has the legal authority 
to bind the institution. The adjustment to the credit amount shall be 
made in the next assessment invoice that is sent at least 10 days after 
the FDIC's receipt of the written agreement.



Sec. 327.35  Application of credits.

    (a) Subject to the limitations in paragraph (b) of this section, the 
amount of an eligible insured depository institution's one-time credit 
shall be applied to the maximum extent allowable by law against that 
institution's quarterly assessment payment under subpart A of this part, 
after applying assessment credits awarded under Sec. 327.11(c), until 
the institution's credit is exhausted.
    (b) The following limitations shall apply to the application of the 
credit against assessment payments.
    (1) For assessments that become due for assessment periods beginning 
in calendar years 2008, 2009, and 2010, the credit may not be applied to 
more than 90 percent of the quarterly assessment.
    (2) For an insured depository institution that exhibits financial, 
operational, or compliance weaknesses ranging from moderately severe to 
unsatisfactory, or is not at least adequately capitalized (as defined 
pursuant to section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) at the 
beginning of an assessment period, the amount of the credit that may be 
applied against the institution's quarterly assessment for that period 
shall not exceed the amount that the institution would have been 
assessed if it had been assessed at the average assessment rate for all 
insured institutions for that period. The FDIC shall determine the 
average assessment rate for an assessment period based upon its best 
estimate of the average rate for the period. The estimate shall be made 
using the best information available, but shall be made no earlier than 
30 days and no

[[Page 612]]

later than 20 days prior to the payment due date for the period.
    (3) If the FDIC has established a restoration plan pursuant to 
section 7(b)(3)(E) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, the FDIC may 
elect to restrict the application of credit amounts, in any assessment 
period, up to the lesser of:
    (i) The amount of an insured depository institution's assessment for 
that period; or
    (ii) The amount equal to 3 basis points of the institution's 
assessment base.

[71 FR 61383, Oct. 18, 2006, as amended at 81 FR 16073, Mar. 25, 2016]



Sec. 327.36  Requests for review of credit amount.

    (a)(1) As soon as practicable after the publication date of this 
rule, the FDIC shall notify each insured depository institution by 
FDICconnect or mail of its 1996 assessment base ratio and credit amount 
in a Statement of One-Time Credit (``Statement''), if any. An insured 
depository institution may submit a request for review of the FDIC's 
determination of the institution's 1996 assessment base ratio or credit 
amount as shown on the Statement within 30 days after the effective date 
of this rule. Such review may be requested if:
    (i) The institution disagrees with a determination as to eligibility 
for the credit that relates to that institution's credit amount;
    (ii) The institution disagrees with the calculation of the credit as 
stated on the Statement; or
    (iii) The institution believes that the 1996 assessment base ratio 
attributed to the institution on the Statement does not fully or 
accurately reflect its own 1996 assessment base or appropriate 
adjustments for successors.
    (2) If an institution does not submit a timely request for review, 
that institution is barred from subsequently requesting review of its 
credit amount, subject to paragraph (e) of this section.
    (b)(1) An insured depository institution may submit a request for 
review of the FDIC's adjustment to the credit amount in a quarterly 
invoice within 30 days of the date on which the FDIC provides the 
invoice. Such review may be requested if:
    (i) The institution disagrees with the calculation of the credit as 
stated on the invoice; or
    (ii) The institution believes that the 1996 assessment base ratio 
attributed to the institution due to the adjustment to the invoice does 
not fully or accurately reflect appropriate adjustments for successors 
since the last quarterly invoice.
    (2) If an institution does not submit a timely request for review, 
that institution is barred from subsequently requesting review of its 
credit amount, subject to paragraph (e) of this section.
    (c) The request for review shall be submitted to the Division of 
Finance and shall provide documentation sufficient to support the change 
sought by the institution. At the time of filing with the FDIC, the 
requesting institution shall notify, to the extent practicable, any 
other insured depository institution that would be directly and 
materially affected by granting the request for review and provide such 
institution with copies of the request for review, the supporting 
documentation, and the FDIC's procedures for requests under this 
subpart. In addition, the FDIC also shall make reasonable efforts, based 
on its official systems of records, to determine that such institutions 
have been identified and notified.
    (d) During the FDIC's consideration of the request for review, the 
amount of credit in dispute shall not be available for use by any 
institution.
    (e) Within 30 days of being notified of the filing of the request 
for review, those institutions identified as potentially affected by the 
request for review may submit a response to such request, along with any 
supporting documentation, to the Division of Finance, and shall provide 
copies to the requesting institution. If an institution that was 
notified under paragraph (c) does not submit a response to the request 
for review, that institution may not:
    (1) Subsequently dispute the information submitted by other 
institutions on the transaction(s) at issue in the review process; or
    (2) Appeal the decision by the Director of the Division of Finance.
    (f) If additional information is requested of the requesting or 
affected

[[Page 613]]

institutions by the FDIC, such information shall be provided by the 
institution within 21 days of the date of the FDIC's request for 
additional information.
    (g) Any institution submitting a timely request for review will 
receive a written response from the FDIC's Director of the Division of 
Finance, (or his or her designee), notifying the requesting and affected 
institutions of the determination of the Director as to whether the 
requested change is warranted. Notice of the procedures applicable to 
appeals under paragraph (h) of this section will be included with the 
Director's written determination. Whenever feasible, the FDIC will 
provide the institution with the aforesaid written response the later 
of:
    (1) Within 60 days of receipt by the FDIC of the request for 
revision;
    (2) If additional institutions have been notified by the requesting 
institution or the FDIC, within 60 days of the date of the last response 
to the notification; or
    (3) If additional information has been requested by the FDIC, within 
60 days of receipt of the additional information.
    (h) Subject to paragraph (e) of this section, the insured depository 
institution that requested review under this section, or an insured 
depository institution materially affected by the Director's 
determination, that disagrees with that determination may appeal to the 
FDIC's Assessment Appeals Committee on the same grounds as set forth 
under paragraph (a) of this section. Any such appeal must be submitted 
within 30 calendar days from the date of the Director's written 
determination. Notice of the procedures applicable to appeals under this 
section will be included with the Director's written determination. The 
decision of the Assessment Appeals Committee shall be the final 
determination of the FDIC.
    (i) Any adjustment to an institution's credits resulting from a 
determination by the Director of the FDIC's Assessment Appeals Committee 
shall be reflected in the institution's next assessment invoice. The 
adjustment to credits shall affect future assessments only and shall not 
result in a retroactive adjustment of assessment amounts owed for prior 
periods.



            Subpart C_Implementation of Dividend Requirements

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1817(e)(2), (4).

    Source: 73 FR 73162, Dec. 2, 2008, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 327.50  Dividends.

    (a) Suspension of dividends. The Board will suspend dividends 
indefinitely whenever the DIF reserve ratio exceeds 1.50 percent at the 
end of any year.
    (b) Assessment rate schedule if DIF reserve ratio exceeds 1.50 
Percent. In lieu of dividends, when the DIF reserve ratio exceeds 1.50 
percent, assessment rates shall be determined as set forth in section 
327.10, as appropriate.

[76 FR 10725, Feb. 25, 2011]



PART 328_ADVERTISEMENT OF MEMBERSHIP--Table of Contents



Sec.
328.0  Scope.
328.1  Official sign.
328.2  Display and procurement of official sign.
328.3  Official advertising statement requirements.
328.4  Prohibition against receiving deposits at same teller station or 
          window as noninsured institution.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1818(a), 1819 (Tenth), 1828(a).

    Source: 72 FR 66102, Nov. 13, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 328.0  Scope.

    Part 328 describes the official sign of the FDIC and prescribes its 
use by insured depository institutions. It also prescribes the official 
advertising statement insured depository institutions must include in 
their advertisements. For purposes of part 328, the term ``insured 
depository institution'' includes insured branches of a foreign 
depository institution. Part 328 does not apply to non-insured offices 
or branches of insured depository institutions located in foreign 
countries.

[[Page 614]]



Sec. 328.1  Official sign.

    (a) The official sign referred to in this part shall be 7" by 3" in 
size, with black lettering and gold background, and of the following 
design:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13AU10.000

    (b) The ``symbol'' of the Corporation, as used in this part, shall 
be that portion of the official sign consisting of ``FDIC'' and the two 
lines of smaller type above and below ``FDIC.''

[72 FR 66102, Nov. 13, 2006, as amended at 75 FR 49365, Aug. 13, 2010]



Sec. 328.2  Display and procurement of official sign.

    (a) Display of official sign. Each insured depository institution 
shall continuously display the official sign at each station or window 
where insured deposits are usually and normally received in the 
depository institution's principal place of business and in all its 
branches.
    (1) Other locations--(i) Within the institution. In addition to 
locations where display of the official sign is required under this 
Sec. 328.2(a), an insured depository institution may display the 
official sign in other locations at the institution.
    (ii) Other facilities. An insured depository institution may display 
the official sign on or at Remote Service Facilities. If an insured 
depository institution displays the official sign at a Remote Service 
Facility, and if there are any noninsured institutions that share in the 
Remote Service Facility, any insured depository institution that 
displays the official sign must clearly show that the sign refers only 
to a designated insured depository institution(s). As used in this part, 
the term ``Remote Service Facility'' includes any automated teller 
machine, cash dispensing machine, point-of-sale terminal, or other 
remote electronic facility where deposits are received.
    (2) Varied signs. Instead of displaying the official sign, an 
insured depository institution may display signs that vary from the 
official sign in size, color, or material at any location where display 
of the official sign is required or permitted under this Sec. 328.2(a). 
However, any such varied sign that is displayed in locations where 
display of the official sign is required under this Sec. 328.2(a) must 
not be smaller in size than the official sign and must have the same 
color for the text and symbols.
    (3) Newly insured institutions. A depository institution shall 
display the official sign no later than its twenty-first day of 
operation as an insured depository institution, unless the institution 
promptly requested the official sign from the Corporation, but did not 
receive it before that date.
    (b) Procuring official sign. An insured depository institution may 
procure the official sign from the Corporation for official use at no 
charge. Information

[[Page 615]]

on obtaining the official sign is posted on the FDIC's internet Web 
site, http://www.fdic.gov. Alternatively, insured depository 
institutions may, at their expense, procure from commercial suppliers 
signs that vary from the official sign in size, color, or material. Any 
insured depository institution which has promptly submitted a written 
request for an official sign to the Corporation shall not be deemed to 
have violated this Sec. 328.2 by failing to display the official sign, 
unless the insured depository institution fails to display the official 
sign after receipt thereof.
    (c) Required changes in sign. The Corporation may require any 
insured depository institution, upon at least thirty (30) days' written 
notice, to change the wording of the official sign in a manner deemed 
necessary for the protection of depositors or others.



Sec. 328.3  Official advertising statement requirements.

    (a) Advertisement defined. The term ``advertisement,'' as used in 
this part, shall mean a commercial message, in any medium, that is 
designed to attract public attention or patronage to a product or 
business.
    (b) Official advertising statement. The official advertising 
statement shall be in substance as follows: ``Member of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation.''
    (1) Optional short title and symbol. The short title ``Member of 
FDIC'' or ``Member FDIC,'' or a reproduction of the symbol of the 
Corporation (as described in Sec. 328.1(b)), may be used by insured 
depository institutions at their option as the official advertising 
statement.
    (2) Size and print. The official advertising statement shall be of 
such size and print to be clearly legible. If the symbol of the 
Corporation is used as the official advertising statement, and the 
symbol must be reduced to such proportions that the two lines of smaller 
type above and below ``FDIC'' are indistinct and illegible, those lines 
of smaller type may be blocked out or dropped.
    (c) Use of official advertising statement in advertisements--(1) 
General requirement. Except as provided in Sec. 328.3(d), each insured 
depository institution shall include the official advertising statement 
prescribed in Sec. 328.3(b) in all advertisements that either promote 
deposit products and services or promote non-specific banking products 
and services offered by the institution. For purposes of this 
Sec. 328.3, an advertisement promotes non-specific banking products and 
services if it includes the name of the insured depository institution 
but does not list or describe particular products or services offered by 
the institution. An example of such an advertisement would be, ``Anytown 
Bank, offering a full range of banking services.''
    (2) Foreign depository institutions. When a foreign depository 
institution has both insured and noninsured U.S. branches, the 
depository institution must also identify which branches are insured and 
which branches are not insured in all of its advertisements requiring 
use of the official advertising statement.
    (3) Newly insured institutions. A depository institution shall 
include the official advertising statement in its advertisements no 
later than its twenty-first day of operation as an insured depository 
institution.
    (d) Types of advertisements which do not require the official 
advertising statement. The following types of advertisements do not 
require use of the official advertising statement:
    (1) Statements of condition and reports of condition of an insured 
depository institution which are required to be published by State or 
Federal law;
    (2) Insured depository institution supplies such as stationery 
(except when used for circular letters), envelopes, deposit slips, 
checks, drafts, signature cards, deposit passbooks, certificates of 
deposit, etc.;
    (3) Signs or plates in the insured depository institution offices or 
attached to the building or buildings in which such offices are located;
    (4) Listings in directories;
    (5) Advertisements not setting forth the name of the insured 
depository institution;
    (6) Entries in a depository institution directory, provided the name 
of the insured depository institution is listed on any page in the 
directory with a

[[Page 616]]

symbol or other descriptive matter indicating it is a member of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation;
    (7) Joint or group advertisements of depository institution services 
where the names of insured depository institutions and noninsured 
institutions are listed and form a part of such advertisements;
    (8) Advertisements by radio or television, other than display 
advertisements, which do not exceed thirty (30) seconds in time;
    (9) Advertisements which are of the type or character that make it 
impractical to include the official advertising statement, including, 
but not limited to, promotional items such as calendars, matchbooks, 
pens, pencils, and key chains; and
    (10) Advertisements which contain a statement to the effect that the 
depository institution is a member of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, or that the depository institution is insured by the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or that its deposits or 
depositors are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation to 
at least $100,000 for each depositor.
    (e) Restrictions on using the official advertising statement when 
advertising non-deposit products--(1) Definitions--
    (i) Non-deposit product. As used in this part, the term ``non-
deposit product'' shall include, but is not limited to, insurance 
products, annuities, mutual funds, and securities. For purposes of this 
definition, a credit product is not a non-deposit product.
    (ii) Hybrid product. As used in this part, the term ``hybrid 
product'' shall mean a product or service that has both deposit product 
features and non-deposit product features. A sweep account is an example 
of a hybrid product.
    (2) Non-deposit product advertisements. Except as provided in 
Sec. 328.3(e)(4), an insured depository institution shall not include 
the official advertising statement, or any other statement or symbol 
which implies or suggests the existence of Federal deposit insurance, in 
any advertisement relating solely to non-deposit products.
    (3) Hybrid product advertisements. Except as provided in 
Sec. 328.3(e)(4), an insured depository institution shall not include 
the official advertising statement, or any other statement or symbol 
which implies or suggests the existence of federal deposit insurance, in 
any advertisement relating solely to hybrid products.
    (4) Mixed advertisements. In advertisements containing information 
about both insured deposit products and non-deposit products or hybrid 
products, an insured depository institution shall clearly segregate the 
official advertising statement or any similar statement from that 
portion of the advertisement that relates to the non-deposit products.
    (f) Official advertising statement in non-English language. The non-
English equivalent of the official advertising statement may be used in 
any advertisement, provided that the translation has had the prior 
written approval of the Corporation.



Sec. 328.4  Prohibition against receiving deposits at same teller
station or window as noninsured institution.

    (a) Prohibition. An insured depository institution may not receive 
deposits at any teller station or window where any noninsured 
institution receives deposits or similar liabilities.
    (b) Exception. This Sec. 328.4 does not apply to deposits received 
at a Remote Service Facility.



PART 329_LIQUIDITY RISK MEASUREMENT STANDARDS--Table of Contents



                      Subpart A_General Provisions

Sec.
329.1  Purpose and applicability.
329.2  Reservation of authority.
329.3  Definitions.
329.4  Certain operational requirements.

                   Subpart B_Liquidity Coverage Ratio

329.10  Liquidity coverage ratio.

                  Subpart C_High-Quality Liquid Assets

329.20  High-quality liquid asset criteria.
329.21  High-quality liquid asset amount.
329.22  Requirements for eligible high-quality liquid assets.

                    Subpart D_Total Net Cash Outflow

329.30  Total net cash outflow amount.
329.31  Determining maturity.
329.32  Outflow amounts.

[[Page 617]]

329.33  Inflow amounts.

                 Subpart E_Liquidity Coverage Shortfall

329.40  Liquidity coverage shortfall: Supervisory framework.

                          Subpart F_Transitions

329.50  Transitions.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1815, 1816, 1818, 1819, 1828, 1831p-1, 5412.

    Source: 79 FR 61523, Oct. 10, 2014, unless otherwise noted.



                      Subpart A_General Provisions



Sec. 329.1  Purpose and applicability.

    (a) Purpose. This part establishes a minimum liquidity standard for 
certain FDIC-supervised institutions on a consolidated basis, as set 
forth herein.
    (b) Applicability. (1) An FDIC-supervised institution is subject to 
the minimum liquidity standard and other requirements of this part if:
    (i) It has total consolidated assets equal to $250 billion or more, 
as reported on the most recent year-end Consolidated Report of Condition 
and Income;
    (ii) It has total consolidated on-balance sheet foreign exposure at 
the most recent year-end equal to $10 billion or more (where total on-
balance sheet foreign exposure equals total cross-border claims less 
claims with a head office or guarantor located in another country plus 
redistributed guaranteed amounts to the country of the head office or 
guarantor plus local country claims on local residents plus revaluation 
gains on foreign exchange and derivative transaction products, 
calculated in accordance with the Federal Financial Institutions 
Examination Council (FFIEC) 009 Country Exposure Report);
    (iii) It is a depository institution that has total consolidated 
assets equal to $10 billion or more, as reported on the most recent 
year-end Consolidated Report of Condition and Income and is a 
consolidated subsidiary of one of the following:
    (A) A covered depository institution holding company that has total 
assets equal to $250 billion or more, as reported on the most recent 
year-end Consolidated Financial Statements for Holding Companies 
reporting form (FR Y-9C), or, if the covered depository institution 
holding company is not required to report on the FR Y-9C, its estimated 
total consolidated assets as of the most recent year-end, calculated in 
accordance with the instructions to the FR Y-9C;
    (B) A depository institution that has total consolidated assets 
equal to $250 billion or more, as reported on the most recent year-end 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income;
    (C) A covered depository institution holding company or depository 
institution that has total consolidated on-balance sheet foreign 
exposure at the most recent year-end equal to $10 billion or more (where 
total on-balance sheet foreign exposure equals total cross-border claims 
less claims with a head office or guarantor located in another country 
plus redistributed guaranteed amounts to the country of the head office 
or guarantor plus local country claims on local residents plus 
revaluation gains on foreign exchange and derivative transaction 
products, calculated in accordance with the Federal Financial 
Institutions Examination Council (FFIEC) 009 Country Exposure Report); 
or
    (D) A covered nonbank company.
    (iv) The FDIC has determined that application of this part is 
appropriate in light of the FDIC-supervised institutions's asset size, 
level of complexity, risk profile, scope of operations, affiliation with 
foreign or domestic covered entities, or risk to the financial system.
    (2) Subject to the transition periods set forth in subpart F of this 
part:
    (i) An FDIC-supervised institution that is subject to the minimum 
liquidity standard and other requirements of this part under paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section on September 30, 2014, must comply with the 
requirements of this part beginning on January 1, 2015;
    (ii) An FDIC-supervised institution that becomes subject to the 
minimum liquidity standard and other requirements of this part under 
paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section after September 30, 
2014, must comply with the requirements of this part beginning on April 
1 of the year in which

[[Page 618]]

the An FDIC-supervised institution becomes subject to the minimum 
liquidity standard and other requirements of this part, except:
    (A) From April 1 to December 31 of the year in which the FDIC-
supervised institution becomes subject to the minimum liquidity standard 
and other requirements of this part, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage ratio monthly, on each 
calculation date that is the last business day of the applicable 
calendar month; and
    (B) Beginning January 1 of the year after the first year in which 
the [BANK] becomes subject to the minimum liquidity standard and other 
requirements of this part under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, and 
thereafter, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate and maintain 
a liquidity coverage ratio on each calculation date; and
    (iii) An FDIC-supervised institution that becomes subject to the 
minimum liquidity standard and other requirements of this part under 
paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section after September 30, 2014, must 
comply with the requirements of this part subject to a transition period 
specified by the FDIC.
    (3) This part does not apply to:
    (i) A bridge financial company as defined in 12 U.S.C. 5381(a)(3), 
or a subsidiary of a bridge financial company; or
    (ii) A new depository institution or a bridge depository 
institution, as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813(i).
    (4) An FDIC-supervised institution subject to a minimum liquidity 
standard under this part shall remain subject until the FDIC determines 
in writing that application of this part to the FDIC-supervised 
institution is not appropriate in light of the FDIC-supervised 
institution's asset size, level of complexity, risk profile, scope of 
operations, affiliation with foreign or domestic covered entities, or 
risk to the financial system.
    (5) In making a determination under paragraphs (b)(1)(iv) or (4) of 
this section, the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures in the 
same manner and to the same extent as the notice and response procedures 
in 12 CFR 324.5.

[79 FR 61540, Oct. 10, 2014, as amended at 79 FR 61541, Oct. 10, 2014]



Sec. 329.2  Reservation of authority.

    (a) The FDIC may require an FDIC-supervised institution to hold an 
amount of high-quality liquid assets (HQLA) greater than otherwise 
required under this part, or to take any other measure to improve the 
FDIC-supervised institution's liquidity risk profile, if the FDIC 
determines that the FDIC-supervised institution's liquidity requirements 
as calculated under this part are not commensurate with the FDIC-
supervised institutions's liquidity risks. In making determinations 
under this section, the FDIC will apply notice and response procedures 
as set forth in 12 CFR 324.5.
    (b) Nothing in this part limits the authority of the FDIC under any 
other provision of law or regulation to take supervisory or enforcement 
action, including action to address unsafe or unsound practices or 
conditions, deficient liquidity levels, or violations of law.



Sec. 329.3  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this part:
    Affiliated depository institution means with respect to an FDIC-
supervised institution that is a depository institution, another 
depository institution that is a consolidated subsidiary of a bank 
holding company or savings and loan holding company of which the FDIC-
supervised institution is also a consolidated subsidiary.
    Asset exchange means a transaction in which, as of the calculation 
date, the counterparties have previously exchanged non-cash assets, and 
have each agreed to return such assets to each other at a future date. 
Asset exchanges do not include secured funding and secured lending 
transactions.
    Bank holding company is defined in section 2 of the Bank Holding 
Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1841 et seq.).
    Brokered deposit means any deposit held at the FDIC-supervised 
institution that is obtained, directly or indirectly, from or through 
the mediation or assistance of a deposit broker as that

[[Page 619]]

term is defined in section 29 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831f(g)), and includes a reciprocal brokered deposit and a 
brokered sweep deposit.
    Brokered sweep deposit means a deposit held at the FDIC-supervised 
institution by a customer or counterparty through a contractual feature 
that automatically transfers to the FDIC-supervised institution from 
another regulated financial company at the close of each business day 
amounts identified under the agreement governing the account from which 
the amount is being transferred.
    Calculation date means any date on which an FDIC-supervised 
institution calculates its liquidity coverage ratio under Sec. 329.10.
    Client pool security means a security that is owned by a customer of 
the FDIC-supervised institution that is not an asset of the FDIC-
supervised institution, regardless of a FDIC-supervised institution's 
hypothecation rights with respect to the security.
    Collateralized deposit means:
    (1) A deposit of a public sector entity held at the FDIC-supervised 
institution that is secured under applicable law by a lien on assets 
owned by the FDIC-supervised institution and that gives the depositor, 
as holder of the lien, priority over the assets in the event the FDIC-
supervised institution enters into receivership, bankruptcy, insolvency, 
liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding; or
    (2) A deposit of a fiduciary account held at the FDIC-supervised 
institution for which the FDIC-supervised institution is a fiduciary and 
sets aside assets owned by the FDIC-supervised institution as security 
under 12 CFR 9.10 (national bank) or 12 CFR 150.300 through 150.320 
(Federal savings associations) and that gives the depositor priority 
over the assets in the event the FDIC-supervised institution enters into 
receivership, bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or 
similar proceeding.
    Committed means, with respect to a credit facility or liquidity 
facility, that under the terms of the legally binding written agreement 
governing the facility:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution may not refuse to extend credit 
or funding under the facility; or
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution may refuse to extend credit 
under the facility (to the extent permitted under applicable law) only 
upon the satisfaction or occurrence of one or more specified conditions 
not including change in financial condition of the borrower, customary 
notice, or administrative conditions.
    Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability company, 
depository institution, business trust, special purpose entity, 
association, or similar organization.
    Consolidated subsidiary means a company that is consolidated on the 
balance sheet of an FDIC-supervised institution or other company under 
GAAP.
    Controlled subsidiary means, with respect to a company or An FDIC-
supervised institution a consolidated subsidiary or a company that 
otherwise meets the definition of ``subsidiary'' in section 2(d) of the 
Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(d)).
    Covered depository institution holding company means a top-tier bank 
holding company or savings and loan holding company domiciled in the 
United States other than:
    (1) A top-tier savings and loan holding company that is:
    (i) A grandfathered unitary savings and loan holding company as 
defined in section 10(c)(9)(A) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1461 et seq.); and
    (ii) As of June 30 of the previous calendar year, derived 50 percent 
or more of its total consolidated assets or 50 percent of its total 
revenues on an enterprise-wide basis (as calculated under GAAP) from 
activities that are not financial in nature under section 4(k) of the 
Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1842(k));
    (2) A top-tier depository institution holding company that is an 
insurance underwriting company; or
    (3)(i) A top-tier depository institution holding company that, as of 
June 30 of the previous calendar year, held 25 percent or more of its 
total consolidated assets in subsidiaries that are insurance 
underwriting companies (other than assets associated with insurance for 
credit risk); and

[[Page 620]]

    (ii) For purposes of paragraph 3(i) of this definition, the company 
must calculate its total consolidated assets in accordance with GAAP, or 
if the company does not calculate its total consolidated assets under 
GAAP for any regulatory purpose (including compliance with applicable 
securities laws), the company may estimate its total consolidated 
assets, subject to review and adjustment by the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System.
    Covered nonbank company means a designated company that the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System has required by rule or order to 
comply with the requirements of 12 CFR part 249.
    Credit facility means a legally binding agreement to extend funds if 
requested at a future date, including a general working capital facility 
such as a revolving credit facility for general corporate or working 
capital purposes. A credit facility does not include a legally binding 
written agreement to extend funds at a future date to a counterparty 
that is made for the purpose of refinancing the debt of the counterparty 
when it is unable to obtain a primary or anticipated source of funding. 
See liquidity facility.
    Customer short position means a legally binding written agreement 
pursuant to which the customer must deliver to the FDIC-supervised 
institution a non-cash asset that the customer has already sold.
    Deposit means ``deposit'' as defined in section 3(l) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(l)) or an equivalent liability of 
the FDIC-supervised institution in a jurisdiction outside of the United 
States.
    Depository institution is defined in section 3(c) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)).
    Depository institution holding company means a bank holding company 
or savings and loan holding company.
    Deposit insurance means deposit insurance provided by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq.).
    Derivative transaction means a financial contract whose value is 
derived from the values of one or more underlying assets, reference 
rates, or indices of asset values or reference rates. Derivative 
contracts include interest rate derivative contracts, exchange rate 
derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, commodity derivative 
contracts, credit derivative contracts, forward contracts, and any other 
instrument that poses similar counterparty credit risks. Derivative 
contracts also include unsettled securities, commodities, and foreign 
currency exchange transactions with a contractual settlement or delivery 
lag that is longer than the lesser of the market standard for the 
particular instrument or five business days. A derivative does not 
include any identified banking product, as that term is defined in 
section 402(b) of the Legal Certainty for Bank Products Act of 2000 (7 
U.S.C. 27(b)), that is subject to section 403(a) of that Act (7 U.S.C. 
27a(a)).
    Designated company means a company that the Financial Stability 
Oversight Council has determined under section 113 of the Dodd-Frank Act 
(12 U.S.C. 5323) shall be supervised by the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System and for which such determination is still in 
effect.
    Dodd-Frank Act means the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer 
Protection Act, Public Law 111-203, 124 Stat. 1376 (2010).
    Eligible HQLA means a high-quality liquid asset that meets the 
requirements set forth in Sec. 329.22.
    Fair value means fair value as determined under GAAP.
    FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    FDIC-supervised institution means any state nonmember bank or state 
savings association.
    Financial sector entity means an investment adviser, investment 
company, pension fund, non-regulated fund, regulated financial company, 
or identified company.
    Foreign withdrawable reserves means a FDIC-supervised institution's 
balances held by or on behalf of the FDIC-supervised institution at a 
foreign central bank that are not subject to restrictions on the FDIC-
supervised institution's ability to use the reserves.
    GAAP means generally accepted accounting principles as used in the 
United States.

[[Page 621]]

    High-quality liquid asset (HQLA) means an asset that is a level 1 
liquid asset, level 2A liquid asset, or level 2B liquid asset, in 
accordance with the criteria set forth in Sec. 329.20.
    HQLA amount means the HQLA amount as calculated under Sec. 329.21.
    Identified company means any company that the FDIC has determined 
should be treated for the purposes of this part the same as a regulated 
financial company, investment company, non-regulated fund, pension fund, 
or investment adviser, based on activities similar in scope, nature, or 
operations to those entities.
    Individual means a natural person, and does not include a sole 
proprietorship.
    Investment adviser means a company registered with the SEC as an 
investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 
80b-1 et seq.) or foreign equivalents of such company.
    Investment company means a person or company registered with the SEC 
under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.) or 
foreign equivalents of such persons or companies.
    Liquid and readily-marketable means, with respect to a security, 
that the security is traded in an active secondary market with:
    (1) More than two committed market makers;
    (2) A large number of non-market maker participants on both the 
buying and selling sides of transactions;
    (3) Timely and observable market prices; and
    (4) A high trading volume.
    Liquidity facility means a legally binding written agreement to 
extend funds at a future date to a counterparty that is made for the 
purpose of refinancing the debt of the counterparty when it is unable to 
obtain a primary or anticipated source of funding. A liquidity facility 
includes an agreement to provide liquidity support to asset-backed 
commercial paper by lending to, or purchasing assets from, any 
structure, program or conduit in the event that funds are required to 
repay maturing asset-backed commercial paper. Liquidity facilities 
exclude facilities that are established solely for the purpose of 
general working capital, such as revolving credit facilities for general 
corporate or working capital purposes. If a facility has characteristics 
of both credit and liquidity facilities, the facility must be classified 
as a liquidity facility. See credit facility.
    Multilateral development bank means the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the Multilateral Investment Guarantee 
Agency, the International Finance Corporation, the Inter-American 
Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the African Development 
Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the European 
Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, the Nordic Investment 
Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic Development Bank, the 
Council of Europe Development Bank, and any other entity that provides 
financing for national or regional development in which the U.S. 
government is a shareholder or contributing member or which the FDIC 
determines poses comparable risk.
    Non-regulated fund means any hedge fund or private equity fund whose 
investment adviser is required to file SEC Form PF (Reporting Form for 
Investment Advisers to Private Funds and Certain Commodity Pool 
Operators and Commodity Trading Advisors), other than a small business 
investment company as defined in section 102 of the Small Business 
Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 661 et seq.).
    Nonperforming exposure means an exposure that is past due by more 
than 90 days or nonaccrual.
    Operational deposit means unsecured wholesale funding or a 
collateralized deposit that is necessary for the FDIC-supervised 
institution to provide operational services as an independent third-
party intermediary, agent, or administrator to the wholesale customer or 
counterparty providing the unsecured wholesale funding or collateralized 
deposit. In order to recognize a deposit as an operational deposit for 
purposes of this part, an FDIC-supervised institution must comply with 
the requirements of Sec. 329.4(b) with respect to that deposit.

[[Page 622]]

    Operational services means the following services, provided they are 
performed as part of cash management, clearing, or custody services:
    (1) Payment remittance;
    (2) Administration of payments and cash flows related to the 
safekeeping of investment assets, not including the purchase or sale of 
assets;
    (3) Payroll administration and control over the disbursement of 
funds;
    (4) Transmission, reconciliation, and confirmation of payment 
orders;
    (5) Daylight overdraft;
    (6) Determination of intra-day and final settlement positions;
    (7) Settlement of securities transactions;
    (8) Transfer of capital distributions and recurring contractual 
payments;
    (9) Customer subscriptions and redemptions;
    (10) Scheduled distribution of customer funds;
    (11) Escrow, funds transfer, stock transfer, and agency services, 
including payment and settlement services, payment of fees, taxes, and 
other expenses; and
    (12) Collection and aggregation of funds.
    Pension fund means an employee benefit plan as defined in paragraphs 
(3) and (32) of section 3 of the Employee Retirement Income and Security 
Act of 1974 (29 U.S.C. 1001 et seq.), a ``governmental plan'' (as 
defined in 29 U.S.C. 1002(32)) that complies with the tax deferral 
qualification requirements provided in the Internal Revenue Code, or any 
similar employee benefit plan established under the laws of a foreign 
jurisdiction.
    Public sector entity means a state, local authority, or other 
governmental subdivision below the U.S. sovereign entity level.
    Publicly traded means, with respect to an equity security, that the 
equity security is traded on:
    (1) Any exchange registered with the SEC as a national securities 
exchange under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78f); or
    (2) Any non-U.S.-based securities exchange that:
    (i) Is registered with, or approved by, a national securities 
regulatory authority; and
    (ii) Provides a liquid, two-way market for the security in question.
    Qualifying master netting agreement means a written, legally 
enforceable agreement provided that:
    (1) The agreement creates a single legal obligation for all 
individual transactions covered by the agreement upon an event of 
default following any stay permitted by paragraph (2) of this 
definition, including upon an event of receivership, conservatorship, 
insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the counterparty;
    (2) The agreement provides the FDIC-supervised institution the right 
to accelerate, terminate, and close-out on a net basis all transactions 
under the agreement and to liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon 
an event of default, including upon an event of receivership, 
conservatorship, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the 
counterparty, provided that, in any such case,
    (i) Any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions, other than:
    (A) In receivership, conservatorship, or resolution under the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act, or under 
any similar insolvency law applicable to GSEs, or laws of foreign 
jurisdictions that are substantially similar \1\ to the U.S. laws 
referenced in this paragraph (2)(i)(A) in order to facilitate the 
orderly resolution of the defaulting counterparty; or
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ The FDIC expects to evaluate jointly with the Federal Reserve 
and the OCC whether foreign special resolution regimes meet the 
requirements of this paragraph.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) Where the agreement is subject by its terms to, or incorporates, 
any of the laws referenced in paragraph (2)(i)(A) of this definition; 
and
    (ii) The agreement may limit the right to accelerate, terminate, and 
close-out on a net basis all transactions under the agreement and to 
liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon an event of default of the 
counterparty to the extent necessary for the counterparty to comply with 
the requirements of part 382 of this title, subpart I of part 252 of 
this title or part 47 of this title, as applicable;

[[Page 623]]

    (3) The agreement does not contain a walkaway clause (that is, a 
provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make a lower 
payment than it otherwise would make under the agreement, or no payment 
at all, to a defaulter or the estate of a defaulter, even if the 
defaulter or the estate of the defaulter is a net creditor under the 
agreement); and
    (4) In order to recognize an agreement as a qualifying master 
netting agreement for purposes of this subpart, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must comply with the requirements of Sec. 329.4(a) with 
respect to that agreement.
    Reciprocal brokered deposit means a brokered deposit that an FDIC-
supervised institution receives through a deposit placement network on a 
reciprocal basis, such that:
    (1) For any deposit received, the FDIC-supervised institution (as 
agent for the depositors) places the same amount with other depository 
institutions through the network; and
    (2) Each member of the network sets the interest rate to be paid on 
the entire amount of funds it places with other network members.
    Regulated financial company means:
    (1) A depository institution holding company or designated company;
    (2) A company included in the organization chart of a depository 
institution holding company on the Form FR Y-6, as listed in the 
hierarchy report of the depository institution holding company produced 
by the National Information Center (NIC) Web site,\2\ provided that the 
top-tier depository institution holding company is subject to a minimum 
liquidity standard under 12 CFR part 249;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ http://www.ffiec.gov/nicpubweb/nicweb/NicHome.aspx.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) A depository institution; foreign bank; credit union; industrial 
loan company, industrial bank, or other similar institution described in 
section 2 of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 U.S.C. 
1841 et seq.); national bank, state member bank, or state non-member 
bank that is not a depository institution;
    (4) An insurance company;
    (5) A securities holding company as defined in section 618 of the 
Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 1850a); broker or dealer registered with the 
SEC under section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o); 
futures commission merchant as defined in section 1a of the Commodity 
Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1 et seq.); swap dealer as defined in 
section 1a of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a); or security-
based swap dealer as defined in section 3 of the Securities Exchange Act 
(15 U.S.C. 78c);
    (6) A designated financial market utility, as defined in section 803 
of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 5462); and
    (7) Any company not domiciled in the United States (or a political 
subdivision thereof) that is supervised and regulated in a manner 
similar to entities described in paragraphs (1) through (6) of this 
definition (e.g., a foreign banking organization, foreign insurance 
company, foreign securities broker or dealer or foreign financial market 
utility).
    (8) A regulated financial company does not include:
    (i) U.S. government-sponsored enterprises;
    (ii) Small business investment companies, as defined in section 102 
of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 661 et seq.);
    (iii) Entities designated as Community Development Financial 
Institutions (CDFIs) under 12 U.S.C. 4701 et seq. and 12 CFR part 1805; 
or
    (iv) Central banks, the Bank for International Settlements, the 
International Monetary Fund, or multilateral development banks.
    Reserve Bank balances means:
    (1) Balances held in a master account of the FDIC-supervised 
institution at a Federal Reserve Bank, less any balances that are 
attributable to any respondent of the FDIC-supervised institution if the 
FDIC-supervised institution is a correspondent for a pass-through 
account as defined in section 204.2(l) of Regulation D (12 CFR 
204.2(l));
    (2) Balances held in a master account of a correspondent of the 
FDIC-supervised institution that are attributable to the FDIC-supervised 
institution if

[[Page 624]]

the FDIC-supervised institution is a respondent for a pass-through 
account as defined in section 204.2(l) of Regulation D;
    (3) ``Excess balances'' of the FDIC-supervised institution as 
defined in section 204.2(z) of Regulation D (12 CFR 204.2(z)) that are 
maintained in an ``excess balance account'' as defined in section 
204.2(aa) of Regulation D (12 CFR 204.2(aa)) if the FDIC-supervised 
institution is an excess balance account participant; or
    (4) ``Term deposits'' of the FDIC-supervised institution as defined 
in section 204.2(dd) of Regulation D (12 CFR 204.2(dd)) if such term 
deposits are offered and maintained pursuant to terms and conditions 
that:
    (i) Explicitly and contractually permit such term deposits to be 
withdrawn upon demand prior to the expiration of the term, or that
    (ii) Permit such term deposits to be pledged as collateral for term 
or automatically-renewing overnight advances from the Federal Reserve 
Bank.
    Retail customer or counterparty means a customer or counterparty 
that is:
    (1) An individual;
    (2) A business customer, but solely if and to the extent that:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution manages its transactions with 
the business customer, including deposits, unsecured funding, and credit 
facility and liquidity facility transactions, in the same way it manages 
its transactions with individuals;
    (ii) Transactions with the business customer have liquidity risk 
characteristics that are similar to comparable transactions with 
individuals; and
    (iii) The total aggregate funding raised from the business customer 
is less than $1.5 million; or
    (3) A living or testamentary trust that:
    (i) Is solely for the benefit of natural persons;
    (ii) Does not have a corporate trustee; and
    (iii) Terminates within 21 years and 10 months after the death of 
grantors or beneficiaries of the trust living on the effective date of 
the trust or within 25 years, if applicable under state law.
    Retail deposit means a demand or term deposit that is placed with 
the FDIC-supervised institution by a retail customer or counterparty, 
other than a brokered deposit.
    Retail mortgage means a mortgage that is primarily secured by a 
first or subsequent lien on one-to-four family residential property.
    Savings and loan holding company means a savings and loan holding 
company as defined in section 10 of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1467a).
    SEC means the Securities and Exchange Commission.
    Secured funding transaction means any funding transaction that is 
subject to a legally binding agreement as of the calculation date and 
gives rise to a cash obligation of the FDIC-supervised institution to a 
counterparty that is secured under applicable law by a lien on assets 
owned by the FDIC-supervised institution, which gives the counterparty, 
as holder of the lien, priority over the assets in the event the FDIC-
supervised institution enters into receivership, bankruptcy, insolvency, 
liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding. Secured funding 
transactions include repurchase transactions, loans of collateral to the 
FDIC-supervised institution's customers to effect short positions, other 
secured loans, and borrowings from a Federal Reserve Bank.
    Secured lending transaction means any lending transaction that is 
subject to a legally binding agreement of the calculation date and gives 
rise to a cash obligation of a counterparty to the FDIC-supervised 
institution that is secured under applicable law by a lien on assets 
owned by the counterparty, which gives the FDIC-supervised institution, 
as holder of the lien, priority over the assets in the event the 
counterparty enters into receivership, bankruptcy, insolvency, 
liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding, including reverse 
repurchase transactions and securities borrowing transactions.
    Securities Exchange Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 
(15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.).
    Sovereign entity means a central government (including the U.S. 
government) or an agency, department, ministry, or central bank of a 
central government.

[[Page 625]]

    Special purpose entity means a company organized for a specific 
purpose, the activities of which are significantly limited to those 
appropriate to accomplish a specific purpose, and the structure of which 
is intended to isolate the credit risk of the special purpose entity.
    Stable retail deposit means a retail deposit that is entirely 
covered by deposit insurance and:
    (1) Is held by the depositor in a transactional account; or
    (2) The depositor that holds the account has another established 
relationship with the FDIC-supervised institution such as another 
deposit account, a loan, bill payment services, or any similar service 
or product provided to the depositor that the FDIC-supervised 
institution demonstrates to the satisfaction of the FDIC would make 
deposit withdrawal highly unlikely during a liquidity stress event.
    Structured security means a security whose cash flow characteristics 
depend upon one or more indices or that has embedded forwards, options, 
or other derivatives or a security where an investor's investment return 
and the issuer's payment obligations are contingent on, or highly 
sensitive to, changes in the value of underlying assets, indices, 
interest rates, or cash flows.
    Structured transaction means a secured transaction in which 
repayment of obligations and other exposures to the transaction is 
largely derived, directly or indirectly, from the cash flow generated by 
the pool of assets that secures the obligations and other exposures to 
the transaction.
    Two-way market means a market where there are independent bona fide 
offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last 
sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations 
can be determined within one day and settled at that price within a 
relatively short time frame conforming to trade custom.
    U.S. government-sponsored enterprise means an entity established or 
chartered by the Federal government to serve public purposes specified 
by the United States Congress, but whose debt obligations are not 
explicitly guaranteed by the full faith and credit of the United States 
government.
    Unsecured wholesale funding means a liability or general obligation 
of the FDIC-supervised institution to a wholesale customer or 
counterparty that is not secured under applicable law by a lien on 
assets owned by the FDIC-supervised institution, including a wholesale 
deposit.
    Wholesale customer or counterparty means a customer or counterparty 
that is not a retail customer or counterparty.
    Wholesale deposit means a demand or term deposit that is provided by 
a wholesale customer or counterparty.

[79 FR 61523, Oct. 10, 2014, as amended at 81 FR 71354, Oct. 17, 2016; 
82 FR 50261, Oct. 30, 2017; 82 FR 61443, Dec. 28, 2017]



Sec. 329.4  Certain operational requirements.

    (a) Qualifying master netting agreements. In order to recognize an 
agreement as a qualifying master netting agreement as defined in 
Sec. 329.3, an FDIC-supervised institution must:
    (1) Conduct sufficient legal review to conclude with a well-founded 
basis (and maintain sufficient written documentation of that legal 
review) that:
    (i) The agreement meets the requirements of the definition of 
qualifying master netting agreement in Sec. 329.3; and
    (ii) In the event of a legal challenge (including one resulting from 
default or from receivership, bankruptcy, insolvency, liquidation, 
resolution, or similar proceeding) the relevant judicial and 
administrative authorities would find the agreement to be legal, valid, 
binding, and enforceable under the law of the relevant jurisdictions; 
and
    (2) Establish and maintain written procedures to monitor possible 
changes in relevant law and to ensure that the agreement continues to 
satisfy the requirements of the definition of qualifying master netting 
agreement in Sec. 329.3.
    (b) Operational deposits. In order to recognize a deposit as an 
operational deposit as defined in Sec. 329.3:
    (1) The related operational services must be performed pursuant to a 
legally binding written agreement, and:

[[Page 626]]

    (i) The termination of the agreement must be subject to a minimum 30 
calendar-day notice period; or
    (ii) As a result of termination of the agreement or transfer of 
services to a third-party provider, the customer providing the deposit 
would incur significant contractual termination costs or switching costs 
(switching costs include significant technology, administrative, and 
legal service costs incurred in connection with the transfer of the 
operational services to a third-party provider);
    (2) The deposit must be held in an account designated as an 
operational account;
    (3) The customer must hold the deposit at the FDIC-supervised 
institution for the primary purpose of obtaining the operational 
services provided by the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (4) The deposit account must not be designed to create an economic 
incentive for the customer to maintain excess funds therein through 
increased revenue, reduction in fees, or other offered economic 
incentives;
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate that the 
deposit is empirically linked to the operational services and that it 
has a methodology that takes into account the volatility of the average 
balance for identifying any excess amount, which must be excluded from 
the operational deposit amount;
    (6) The deposit must not be provided in connection with the FDIC-
supervised institution's provision of prime brokerage services, which, 
for the purposes of this part, are a package of services offered by the 
FDIC-supervised institution whereby the FDIC-supervised institution, 
among other services, executes, clears, settles, and finances 
transactions entered into by the customer or a third-party entity on 
behalf of the customer (such as an executing broker), and where the 
FDIC-supervised institution has a right to use or rehypothecate assets 
provided by the customer, including in connection with the extension of 
margin and other similar financing of the customer, subject to 
applicable law, and includes operational services provided to a non-
regulated fund; and
    (7) The deposits must not be for arrangements in which the FDIC-
supervised institution (as correspondent) holds deposits owned by 
another depository institution bank (as respondent) and the respondent 
temporarily places excess funds in an overnight deposit with the FDIC-
supervised institution .



                   Subpart B_Liquidity Coverage Ratio



Sec. 329.10  Liquidity coverage ratio.

    (a) Minimum liquidity coverage ratio requirement. Subject to the 
transition provisions in subpart F of this part, an FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage ratio that 
is equal to or greater than 1.0 on each business day in accordance with 
this part. An FDIC-supervised institution must calculate its liquidity 
coverage ratio as of the same time on each business day (elected 
calculation time). The FDIC-supervised institution must select this time 
by written notice to the FDIC prior to the effective date of this rule. 
The FDIC-supervised institution may not thereafter change its elected 
calculation time without prior written approval from the FDIC.
    (b) Calculation of the liquidity coverage ratio. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's liquidity coverage ratio equals:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution's HQLA amount as of the 
calculation date, calculated under subpart C of this part; divided by
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution's total net cash outflow amount 
as of the calculation date, calculated under subpart D of this part.



                  Subpart C_High-Quality Liquid Assets



Sec. 329.20  High-quality liquid asset criteria.

    (a) Level 1 liquid assets. An asset is a level 1 liquid asset if it 
is one of the following types of assets:
    (1) Reserve Bank balances;
    (2) Foreign withdrawable reserves;
    (3) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the

[[Page 627]]

timely payment of principal and interest by, the U.S. Department of the 
Treasury;
    (4) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, a U.S. government 
agency (other than the U.S. Department of the Treasury) whose 
obligations are fully and explicitly guaranteed by the full faith and 
credit of the U.S. government, provided that the security is liquid and 
readily-marketable;
    (5) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, a sovereign entity, 
the Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, 
the European Central Bank, European Community, or a multilateral 
development bank, that is:
    (i) Assigned a zero percent risk weight under subpart D of 12 CFR 
part 324 as of the calculation date;
    (ii) Liquid and readily-marketable;
    (iii) Issued or guaranteed by an entity whose obligations have a 
proven record as a reliable source of liquidity in repurchase or sales 
markets during stressed market conditions; and
    (iv) Not an obligation of a financial sector entity and not an 
obligation of a consolidated subsidiary of a financial sector entity; or
    (6) A security issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as to the 
timely payment of principal and interest by, a sovereign entity that is 
not assigned a zero percent risk weight under subpart D of 12 CFR part 
324, where the sovereign entity issues the security in its own currency, 
the security is liquid and readily-marketable, and the FDIC-supervised 
institution holds the security in order to meet its net cash outflows in 
the jurisdiction of the sovereign entity, as calculated under subpart D 
of this part.
    (b) Level 2A liquid assets. An asset is a level 2A liquid asset if 
the asset is liquid and readily-marketable and is one of the following 
types of assets:
    (1) A security issued by, or guaranteed as to the timely payment of 
principal and interest by, a U.S. government-sponsored enterprise, that 
is investment grade under 12 CFR part 1 as of the calculation date, 
provided that the claim is senior to preferred stock; or
    (2) A security that is issued by, or guaranteed as to the timely 
payment of principal and interest by, a sovereign entity or multilateral 
development bank that is:
    (i) Not included in level 1 liquid assets;
    (ii) Assigned no higher than a 20 percent risk weight under subpart 
D of 12 CFR part 324 as of the calculation date;
    (iii) Issued or guaranteed by an entity whose obligations have a 
proven record as a reliable source of liquidity in repurchase or sales 
markets during stressed market conditions, as demonstrated by:
    (A) The market price of the security or equivalent securities of the 
issuer declining by no more than 10 percent during a 30 calendar-day 
period of significant stress, or
    (B) The market haircut demanded by counterparties to secured lending 
and secured funding transactions that are collateralized by the security 
or equivalent securities of the issuer increasing by no more than 10 
percentage points during a 30 calendar-day period of significant stress; 
and
    (iv) Not an obligation of a financial sector entity, and not an 
obligation of a consolidated subsidiary of a financial sector entity.
    (c) Level 2B liquid assets. An asset is a level 2B liquid asset if 
the asset is liquid and readily-marketable and is one of the following 
types of assets:
    (1) A corporate debt security that is:
    (i) Investment grade under 12 CFR part 1 as of the calculation date;
    (ii) Issued or guaranteed by an entity whose obligations have a 
proven record as a reliable source of liquidity in repurchase or sales 
markets during stressed market conditions, as demonstrated by:
    (A) The market price of the corporate debt security or equivalent 
securities of the issuer declining by no more than 20 percent during a 
30 calendar-day period of significant stress, or
    (B) The market haircut demanded by counterparties to secured lending 
and secured funding transactions that are collateralized by the 
corporate debt security or equivalent securities of the issuer 
increasing by no more than 20

[[Page 628]]

percentage points during a 30 calendar-day period of significant stress; 
and
    (iii) Not an obligation of a financial sector entity and not an 
obligation of a consolidated subsidiary of a financial sector entity; or
    (2) A publicly traded common equity share that is:
    (i) Included in:
    (A) The Russell 1000 Index; or
    (B) An index that an FDIC-supervised institution supervisor in a 
foreign jurisdiction recognizes for purposes of including equity shares 
in level 2B liquid assets under applicable regulatory policy, if the 
share is held in that foreign jurisdiction;
    (ii) Issued in:
    (A) U.S. dollars; or
    (B) The currency of a jurisdiction where the FDIC-supervised 
institution operates and the FDIC-supervised institution holds the 
common equity share in order to cover its net cash outflows in that 
jurisdiction, as calculated under subpart D of this part;
    (iii) Issued by an entity whose publicly traded common equity shares 
have a proven record as a reliable source of liquidity in repurchase or 
sales markets during stressed market conditions, as demonstrated by:
    (A) The market price of the security or equivalent securities of the 
issuer declining by no more than 40 percent during a 30 calendar-day 
period of significant stress, or
    (B) The market haircut demanded by counterparties to securities 
borrowing and lending transactions that are collateralized by the 
publicly traded common equity shares or equivalent securities of the 
issuer increasing by no more than 40 percentage points, during a 30 
calendar day period of significant stress;
    (iv) Not issued by a financial sector entity and not issued by a 
consolidated subsidiary of a financial sector entity;
    (v) If held by a depository institution, is not acquired in 
satisfaction of a debt previously contracted (DPC); and
    (vi) If held by a consolidated subsidiary of a depository 
institution, the depository institution can include the publicly traded 
common equity share in its level 2B liquid assets only if the share is 
held to cover net cash outflows of the depository institution's 
consolidated subsidiary in which the publicly traded common equity share 
is held, as calculated by the FDIC-supervised institution under subpart 
D of this part.



Sec. 329.21  High-quality liquid asset amount.

    (a) Calculation of the HQLA amount. As of the calculation date, a 
FDIC-supervised institution's HQLA amount equals:
    (1) The level 1 liquid asset amount; plus
    (2) The level 2A liquid asset amount; plus
    (3) The level 2B liquid asset amount; minus
    (4) The greater of:
    (i) The unadjusted excess HQLA amount; and
    (ii) The adjusted excess HQLA amount.
    (b) Calculation of liquid asset amounts. (1) Level 1 liquid asset 
amount. The level 1 liquid asset amount equals the fair value of all 
level 1 liquid assets held by the FDIC-supervised institution as of the 
calculation date that are eligible HQLA, less the amount of the reserve 
balance requirement under section 204.5 of Regulation D (12 CFR 204.5).
    (2) Level 2A liquid asset amount. The level 2A liquid asset amount 
equals 85 percent of the fair value of all level 2A liquid assets held 
by the FDIC-supervised institution as of the calculation date that are 
eligible HQLA.
    (3) Level 2B liquid asset amount. The level 2B liquid asset amount 
equals 50 percent of the fair value of all level 2B liquid assets held 
by the FDIC-supervised institution as of the calculation date that are 
eligible HQLA.
    (c) Calculation of the unadjusted excess HQLA amount. As of the 
calculation date, the unadjusted excess HQLA amount equals:
    (1) The level 2 cap excess amount; plus
    (2) The level 2B cap excess amount.
    (d) Calculation of the level 2 cap excess amount. As of the 
calculation date, the level 2 cap excess amount equals the greater of:
    (1) The level 2A liquid asset amount plus the level 2B liquid asset 
amount minus 0.6667 times the level 1 liquid asset amount; and

[[Page 629]]

    (2) 0.
    (e) Calculation of the level 2B cap excess amount. As of the 
calculation date, the level 2B excess amount equals the greater of:
    (1) The level 2B liquid asset amount minus the level 2 cap excess 
amount minus 0.1765 times the sum of the level 1 liquid asset amount and 
the level 2A liquid asset amount; and
    (2) 0.
    (f) Calculation of adjusted liquid asset amounts. (1) Adjusted level 
1 liquid asset amount. A FDIC-supervised institution's adjusted level 1 
liquid asset amount equals the fair value of all level 1 liquid assets 
that would be eligible HQLA and would be held by the FDIC-supervised 
institution upon the unwind of any secured funding transaction (other 
than a collateralized deposit), secured lending transaction, asset 
exchange, or collateralized derivatives transaction that matures within 
30 calendar days of the calculation date where the FDIC-supervised 
institution will provide an asset that is eligible HQLA and the 
counterparty will provide an asset that will be eligible HQLA; less the 
amount of the reserve balance requirement under section 204.5 of 
Regulation D (12 CFR 204.5).
    (2) Adjusted level 2A liquid asset amount. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's adjusted level 2A liquid asset amount equals 85 percent of 
the fair value of all level 2A liquid assets that would be eligible HQLA 
and would be held by the FDIC-supervised institution upon the unwind of 
any secured funding transaction (other than a collateralized deposit), 
secured lending transaction, asset exchange, or collateralized 
derivatives transaction that matures within 30 calendar days of the 
calculation date where the FDIC-supervised institution will provide an 
asset that is eligible HQLA and the counterparty will provide an asset 
that will be eligible HQLA.
    (3) Adjusted level 2B liquid asset amount. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's adjusted level 2B liquid asset amount equals 50 percent of 
the fair value of all level 2B liquid assets that would be eligible HQLA 
and would be held by the FDIC-supervised institution upon the unwind of 
any secured funding transaction (other than a collateralized deposit), 
secured lending transaction, asset exchange, or collateralized 
derivatives transaction that matures within 30 calendar days of the 
calculation date where the FDIC-supervised institution will provide an 
asset that is eligible HQLA and the counterparty will provide an asset 
that will be eligible HQLA.
    (g) Calculation of the adjusted excess HQLA amount. As of the 
calculation date, the adjusted excess HQLA amount equals:
    (1) The adjusted level 2 cap excess amount; plus
    (2) The adjusted level 2B cap excess amount.
    (h) Calculation of the adjusted level 2 cap excess amount. As of the 
calculation date, the adjusted level 2 cap excess amount equals the 
greater of:
    (1) The adjusted level 2A liquid asset amount plus the adjusted 
level 2B liquid asset amount minus 0.6667 times the adjusted level 1 
liquid asset amount; and
    (2) 0.
    (i) Calculation of the adjusted level 2B excess amount. As of the 
calculation date, the adjusted level 2B excess liquid asset amount 
equals the greater of:
    (1) The adjusted level 2B liquid asset amount minus the adjusted 
level 2 cap excess amount minus 0.1765 times the sum of the adjusted 
level 1 liquid asset amount and the adjusted level 2A liquid asset 
amount; and
    (2) 0.



Sec. 329.22  Requirements for eligible high-quality liquid assets.

    (a) Operational requirements for eligible HQLA. With respect to each 
asset that is eligible for inclusion in a FDIC-supervised institution's 
HQLA amount, an FDIC-supervised institution must meet all of the 
following operational requirements:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution must demonstrate the operational 
capability to monetize the HQLA by:
    (i) Implementing and maintaining appropriate procedures and systems 
to monetize any HQLA at any time in accordance with relevant standard 
settlement periods and procedures; and
    (ii) Periodically monetizing a sample of HQLA that reasonably 
reflects the

[[Page 630]]

composition of the FDIC-supervised institution's eligible HQLA, 
including with respect to asset type, maturity, and counterparty 
characteristics;
    (2) The FDIC-supervised institution'' in its place wherever it 
appears. must implement policies that require eligible HQLA to be under 
the control of the management function in the FDIC-supervised 
institution'' in its place wherever it appears. that is charged with 
managing liquidity risk, and this management function must evidence its 
control over the HQLA by either:
    (i) Segregating the HQLA from other assets, with the sole intent to 
use the HQLA as a source of liquidity; or
    (ii) Demonstrating the ability to monetize the assets and making the 
proceeds available to the liquidity management function without 
conflicting with a business or risk management strategy of the FDIC-
supervised institution'' in its place wherever it appears.;
    (3) The fair value of the eligible HQLA must be reduced by the 
outflow amount that would result from the termination of any specific 
transaction hedging eligible HQLA;
    (4) The FDIC-supervised institution'' in its place wherever it 
appears. must implement and maintain policies and procedures that 
determine the composition of its eligible HQLA on each calculation date, 
by:
    (i) Identifying its eligible HQLA by legal entity, geographical 
location, currency, account, or other relevant identifying factors as of 
the calculation date;
    (ii) Determining that eligible HQLA meet the criteria set forth in 
this section; and
    (iii) Ensuring the appropriate diversification of the eligible HQLA 
by asset type, counterparty, issuer, currency, borrowing capacity, or 
other factors associated with the liquidity risk of the assets; and
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution'' in its place wherever it 
appears.must have a documented methodology that results in a consistent 
treatment for determining that the FDIC-supervised institutions eligible 
HQLA meet the requirements set forth in this section.
    (b) Generally applicable criteria for eligible HQLA. A FDIC-
supervised institutions eligible HQLA must meet all of the following 
criteria:
    (1) The assets are unencumbered in accordance with the following 
criteria:
    (i) The assets are free of legal, regulatory, contractual, or other 
restrictions on the ability of the FDIC-supervised institution to 
monetize the assets; and
    (ii) The assets are not pledged, explicitly or implicitly, to secure 
or to provide credit enhancement to any transaction, but the assets may 
be considered unencumbered if the assets are pledged to a central bank 
or a U.S. government-sponsored enterprise where:
    (A) Potential credit secured by the assets is not currently extended 
to the FDIC-supervised institution or its consolidated subsidiaries; and
    (B) The pledged assets are not required to support access to the 
payment services of a central bank;
    (2) The asset is not:
    (i) A client pool security held in a segregated account; or
    (ii) An asset received from a secured funding transaction involving 
client pool securities that were held in a segregated account;
    (3) For eligible HQLA held in a legal entity that is a U.S. 
consolidated subsidiary of an FDIC-supervised institution:
    (i) If the U.S. consolidated subsidiary is subject to a minimum 
liquidity standard under this part, the FDIC-supervised institution may 
include the eligible HQLA of the U.S. consolidated subsidiary in its 
HQLA amount up to:
    (A) The amount of net cash outflows of the U.S. consolidated 
subsidiary calculated by the U.S. consolidated subsidiary for its own 
minimum liquidity standard under this part; plus
    (B) Any additional amount of assets, including proceeds from the 
monetization of assets, that would be available for transfer to the top-
tier FDIC-supervised institution during times of stress without 
statutory, regulatory, contractual, or supervisory restrictions, 
including sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 
371c and 12 U.S.C. 371c-1) and Regulation W (12 CFR part 223); and
    (ii) If the U.S. consolidated subsidiary is not subject to a minimum 
liquidity standard under this part, the

[[Page 631]]

FDIC-supervised institution may include the eligible HQLA of the U.S. 
consolidated subsidiary in its HQLA amount up to:
    (A) The amount of the net cash outflows of the U.S. consolidated 
subsidiary as of the 30th calendar day after the calculation date, as 
calculated by the FDIC-supervised institution for the FDIC-supervised 
institution's minimum liquidity standard under this part; plus
    (B) Any additional amount of assets, including proceeds from the 
monetization of assets, that would be available for transfer to the top-
tier FDIC-supervised institution during times of stress without 
statutory, regulatory, contractual, or supervisory restrictions, 
including sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 
371c and 12 U.S.C. 371c-1) and Regulation W (12 CFR part 223);
    (4) For HQLA held by a consolidated subsidiary of the FDIC-
supervised institution that is organized under the laws of a foreign 
jurisdiction, the FDIC-supervised institution may include the eligible 
HQLA of the consolidated subsidiary organized under the laws of a 
foreign jurisdiction in its HQLA amount up to:
    (i) The amount of net cash outflows of the consolidated subsidiary 
as of the 30th calendar day after the calculation date, as calculated by 
the FDIC-supervised institution for the FDIC-supervised institution's 
minimum liquidity standard under this part; plus
    (ii) Any additional amount of assets that are available for transfer 
to the top-tier FDIC-supervised institution during times of stress 
without statutory, regulatory, contractual, or supervisory restrictions;
    (5) The FDIC-supervised institution must not include as eligible 
HQLA any assets, or HQLA resulting from transactions involving an asset 
that the FDIC-supervised institution received with rehypothecation 
rights, if the counterparty that provided the asset or the beneficial 
owner of the asset has a contractual right to withdraw the assets 
without an obligation to pay more than de minimis remuneration at any 
time during the 30 calendar days following the calculation date; and
    (6) The FDIC-supervised institution has not designated the assets to 
cover operational costs.
    (c) Maintenance of U.S. eligible HQLA. An FDIC-supervised 
institution is generally expected to maintain as eligible HQLA an amount 
and type of eligible HQLA in the United States that is sufficient to 
meet its total net cash outflow amount in the United States under 
subpart D of this part.



                    Subpart D_Total Net Cash Outflow



Sec. 329.30  Total net cash outflow amount.

    (a) Calculation of total net cash outflow amount. As of the 
calculation date, a FDIC-supervised institution's total net cash outflow 
amount equals:
    (1) The sum of the outflow amounts calculated under Sec. 329.32(a) 
through (l); minus
    (2) The lesser of:
    (i) The sum of the inflow amounts calculated under Sec. 329.33(b) 
through (g); and
    (ii) 75 percent of the amount calculated under paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section; plus
    (3) The maturity mismatch add-on as calculated under paragraph (b) 
of this section.
    (b) Calculation of maturity mismatch add-on. (1) For purposes of 
this section:
    (i) The net cumulative maturity outflow amount for any of the 30 
calendar days following the calculation date is equal to the sum of the 
outflow amounts for instruments or transactions identified in 
Sec. 329.32(g), (h)(1), (h)(2), (h)(5), (j), (k), and (l) that have a 
maturity date prior to or on that calendar day minus the sum of the 
inflow amounts for instruments or transactions identified in 
Sec. 329.33(c), (d), (e), and (f) that have a maturity date prior to or 
on that calendar day.
    (ii) The net day 30 cumulative maturity outflow amount is equal to, 
as of the 30th day following the calculation date, the sum of the 
outflow amounts for instruments or transactions identified in 
Sec. 329.32(g), (h)(1), (h)(2), (h)(5), (j), (k), and (l) that have a 
maturity date

[[Page 632]]

30 calendar days or less from the calculation date minus the sum of the 
inflow amounts for instruments or transactions identified in 
Sec. 329.33(c), (d), (e), and (f) that have a maturity date 30 calendar 
days or less from the calculation date.
    (2) As of the calculation date, a FDIC-supervised institution's 
maturity mismatch add-on is equal to:
    (i) The greater of:
    (A) 0; and
    (B) The largest net cumulative maturity outflow amount as calculated 
under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section for any of the 30 calendar 
days following the calculation date; minus
    (ii) The greater of:
    (A) 0; and
    (B) The net day 30 cumulative maturity outflow amount as calculated 
under paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (3) Other than the transactions identified in Sec. 329.32(h)(2), 
(h)(5), or (j) or Sec. 329.33(d) or (f), the maturity of which is 
determined under Sec. 329.31(a), transactions that have no maturity date 
are not included in the calculation of the maturity mismatch add-on.



Sec. 329.31  Determining maturity.

    (a) For purposes of calculating its liquidity coverage ratio and the 
components thereof under this subpart, an FDIC-supervised institution 
shall assume an asset or transaction matures:
    (1) With respect to an instrument or transaction subject to 
Sec. 329.32, on the earliest possible contractual maturity date or the 
earliest possible date the transaction could occur, taking into account 
any option that could accelerate the maturity date or the date of the 
transaction as follows:
    (i) If an investor or funds provider has an option that would reduce 
the maturity, the FDIC-supervised institution must assume that the 
investor or funds provider will exercise the option at the earliest 
possible date;
    (ii) If an investor or funds provider has an option that would 
extend the maturity, the FDIC-supervised institution must assume that 
the investor or funds provider will not exercise the option to extend 
the maturity;
    (iii) If the FDIC-supervised institution has an option that would 
reduce the maturity of an obligation, the FDIC-supervised institution 
must assume that the FDIC-supervised institution will exercise the 
option at the earliest possible date, except if either of the following 
criteria are satisfied, in which case the maturity of the obligation for 
purposes of this part will be the original maturity date at issuance:
    (A) The original maturity of the obligation is greater than one year 
and the option does not go into effect for a period of 180 days 
following the issuance of the instrument; or
    (B) The counterparty is a sovereign entity, a U.S. government-
sponsored enterprise, or a public sector entity.
    (iv) If the FDIC-supervised institution has an option that would 
extend the maturity of an obligation it issued, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must assume the FDIC-supervised institution will not 
exercise that option to extend the maturity; and
    (v) If an option is subject to a contractually defined notice 
period, the FDIC-supervised institution must determine the earliest 
possible contractual maturity date regardless of the notice period.
    (2) With respect to an instrument or transaction subject to 
Sec. 329.33, on the latest possible contractual maturity date or the 
latest possible date the transaction could occur, taking into account 
any option that could extend the maturity date or the date of the 
transaction as follows:
    (i) If the borrower has an option that would extend the maturity, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must assume that the borrower will 
exercise the option to extend the maturity to the latest possible date;
    (ii) If the borrower has an option that would reduce the maturity, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must assume that the borrower will not 
exercise the option to reduce the maturity;
    (iii) If the FDIC-supervised institution has an option that would 
reduce the maturity of an instrument or transaction, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must assume the FDIC-supervised institution will not 
exercise the option to reduce the maturity;
    (iv) If the FDIC-supervised institution has an option that would 
extend the maturity of an instrument or

[[Page 633]]

transaction, the FDIC-supervised institution must assume the FDIC-
supervised institution will exercise the option to extend the maturity 
to the latest possible date; and
    (v) If an option is subject to a contractually defined notice 
period, the FDIC-supervised institution must determine the latest 
possible contractual maturity date based on the borrower using the 
entire notice period.
    (3) With respect to a transaction subject to Sec. 329.33(f)(1)(iii) 
through (vii) (secured lending transactions) or Sec. 329.33(f)(2)(ii) 
through (x) (asset exchanges), to the extent the transaction is secured 
by collateral that has been pledged in connection with either a secured 
funding transaction or asset exchange that has a remaining maturity of 
30 calendar days or less as of the calculation date, the maturity date 
is the later of the maturity date determined under paragraph (a)(2) of 
this section for the secured lending transaction or asset exchange or 
the maturity date determined under paragraph (a)(1) of this section for 
the secured funding transaction or asset exchange for which the 
collateral has been pledged.
    (4) With respect to a transaction that has no maturity date, is not 
an operational deposit, and is subject to the provisions of 
Sec. 329.32(h)(2), (h)(5), (j), or (k) or Sec. 329.33(d) or (f), the 
maturity date is the first calendar day after the calculation date. Any 
other transaction that has no maturity date and is subject to the 
provisions of Sec. 329.32 must be considered to mature within 30 
calendar days of the calculation date.
    (5) With respect to a transaction subject to the provisions of 
Sec. 329.33(g), on the date of the next scheduled calculation of the 
amount required under applicable legal requirements for the protection 
of customer assets with respect to each broker-dealer segregated 
account, in accordance with the FDIC-supervised institution's normal 
frequency of recalculating such requirements.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 329.32  Outflow amounts.

    (a) Retail funding outflow amount. A FDIC-supervised institution's 
retail funding outflow amount as of the calculation date includes 
(regardless of maturity or collateralization):
    (1) 3 percent of all stable retail deposits held at the FDIC-
supervised institution ;
    (2) 10 percent of all other retail deposits held at the FDIC-
supervised institution;
    (3) 20 percent of all deposits placed at the FDIC-supervised 
institution by a third party on behalf of a retail customer or 
counterparty that are not brokered deposits, where the retail customer 
or counterparty owns the account and the entire amount is covered by 
deposit insurance;
    (4) 40 percent of all deposits placed at the FDIC-supervised 
institution by a third party on behalf of a retail customer or 
counterparty that are not brokered deposits, where the retail customer 
or counterparty owns the account and where less than the entire amount 
is covered by deposit insurance; and
    (5) 40 percent of all funding from a retail customer or counterparty 
that is not:
    (i) A retail deposit;
    (ii) A brokered deposit provided by a retail customer or 
counterparty; or
    (iii) A debt instrument issued by the FDIC-supervised institution 
that is owned by a retail customer or counterparty (see paragraph 
(h)(2)(ii) of this section).
    (b) Structured transaction outflow amount. If the FDIC-supervised 
institution is a sponsor of a structured transaction where the issuing 
entity is not consolidated on the FDIC-supervised institution's balance 
sheet under GAAP, the structured transaction outflow amount for each 
such structured transaction as of the calculation date is the greater 
of:
    (1) 100 percent of the amount of all debt obligations of the issuing 
entity that mature 30 calendar days or less from such calculation date 
and all commitments made by the issuing entity to purchase assets within 
30 calendar days or less from such calculation date; and
    (2) The maximum contractual amount of funding the FDIC-supervised 
institution may be required to provide to the issuing entity 30 calendar 
days or less from such calculation date through a liquidity facility, a 
return or

[[Page 634]]

repurchase of assets from the issuing entity, or other funding 
agreement.
    (c) Net derivative cash outflow amount. The net derivative cash 
outflow amount as of the calculation date is the sum of the net 
derivative cash outflow amount for each counterparty. The net derivative 
cash outflow amount does not include forward sales of mortgage loans and 
any derivatives that are mortgage commitments subject to paragraph (d) 
of this section. The net derivative cash outflow amount for a 
counterparty is the sum of:
    (1) The amount, if greater than zero, of contractual payments and 
collateral that the FDIC-supervised institution will make or deliver to 
the counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date 
under derivative transactions other than transactions described in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, less the contractual payments and 
collateral that the FDIC-supervised institution will receive from the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
derivative transactions other than transactions described in paragraph 
(c)(2) of this section, provided that the derivative transactions are 
subject to a qualifying master netting agreement; and
    (2) The amount, if greater than zero, of contractual principal 
payments that the FDIC-supervised institution will make to the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
foreign currency exchange derivative transactions that result in the 
full exchange of contractual cash principal payments in different 
currencies within the same business day, less the contractual principal 
payments that the FDIC-supervised institution will receive from the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
foreign currency exchange derivative transactions that result in the 
full exchange of contractual cash principal payments in different 
currencies within the same business day.
    (d) Mortgage commitment outflow amount. The mortgage commitment 
outflow amount as of a calculation date is 10 percent of the amount of 
funds the FDIC-supervised institution has contractually committed for 
its own origination of retail mortgages that can be drawn upon 30 
calendar days or less from such calculation date.
    (e) Commitment outflow amount. (1) A FDIC-supervised institution's 
commitment outflow amount as of the calculation date includes:
    (i) Zero percent of the undrawn amount of all committed credit and 
liquidity facilities extended by an FDIC-supervised institution that is 
a depository institution to an affiliated depository institution that is 
subject to a minimum liquidity standard under this part;
    (ii) 5 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed credit and 
liquidity facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution to 
retail customers or counterparties;
    (iii) 10 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed credit 
facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution to a wholesale 
customer or counterparty that is not a financial sector entity or a 
consolidated subsidiary thereof, including a special purpose entity 
(other than those described in paragraph (e)(1)(viii) of this section) 
that is a consolidated subsidiary of such wholesale customer or 
counterparty;
    (iv) 30 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed liquidity 
facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution to a wholesale 
customer or counterparty that is not a financial sector entity or a 
consolidated subsidiary thereof, including a special purpose entity 
(other than those described in paragraph (e)(1)(viii) of this section) 
that is a consolidated subsidiary of such wholesale customer or 
counterparty;
    (v) 50 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed credit and 
liquidity facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution to 
depository institutions, depository institution holding companies, and 
foreign banks, but excluding commitments described in paragraph 
(e)(1)(i) of this section;
    (vi) 40 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed credit 
facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution to a financial 
sector entity or a consolidated subsidiary thereof, including a special 
purpose entity (other than those described in

[[Page 635]]

paragraph (e)(1)(viii) of this section) that is a consolidated 
subsidiary of a financial sector entity, but excluding other commitments 
described in paragraph (e)(1)(i) or (v) of this section;
    (vii) 100 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed liquidity 
facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution to a financial 
sector entity or a consolidated subsidiary thereof, including a special 
purpose entity (other than those described in paragraph (e)(1)(viii) of 
this section) that is a consolidated subsidiary of a financial sector 
entity, but excluding other commitments described in paragraph (e)(1)(i) 
or (v) of this section and liquidity facilities included in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section;
    (viii) 100 percent of the undrawn amount of all committed credit and 
liquidity facilities extended to a special purpose entity that issues or 
has issued commercial paper or securities (other than equity securities 
issued to a company of which the special purpose entity is a 
consolidated subsidiary) to finance its purchases or operations, and 
excluding liquidity facilities included in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section; and
    (ix) 100 percent of the undrawn amount of all other committed credit 
or liquidity facilities extended by the an FDIC-supervised institution.
    (2) For the purposes of this paragraph (e), the undrawn amount of a 
committed credit facility or committed liquidity facility is the entire 
unused amount of the facility that could be drawn upon within 30 
calendar days of the calculation date under the governing agreement, 
less the amount of level 1 liquid assets and the amount of level 2A 
liquid assets securing the facility.
    (3) For the purposes of this paragraph (e), the amount of level 1 
liquid assets and level 2A liquid assets securing a committed credit or 
liquidity facility is the fair value of level 1 liquid assets and 85 
percent of the fair value of level 2A liquid assets that are required to 
be pledged as collateral by the counterparty to secure the facility, 
provided that:
    (i) The assets pledged upon a draw on the facility would be eligible 
HQLA; and
    (ii) The FDIC-supervised institution has not included the assets as 
eligible HQLA under subpart C of this part as of the calculation date.
    (f) Collateral outflow amount. The collateral outflow amount as of 
the calculation date includes:
    (1) Changes in financial condition. 100 percent of all additional 
amounts of collateral the FDIC-supervised institution could be 
contractually required to pledge or to fund under the terms of any 
transaction as a result of a change in the FDIC-supervised institution's 
financial condition;
    (2) Derivative collateral potential valuation changes. 20 percent of 
the fair value of any collateral securing a derivative transaction 
pledged to a counterparty by the FDIC-supervised institution that is not 
a level 1 liquid asset;
    (3) Potential derivative valuation changes. The absolute value of 
the largest 30-consecutive calendar day cumulative net mark-to-market 
collateral outflow or inflow realized during the preceding 24 months 
resulting from derivative transaction valuation changes;
    (4) Excess collateral. 100 percent of the fair value of collateral 
that:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised institution could be required by contract to 
return to a counterparty because the collateral pledged to the FDIC-
supervised institution exceeds the current collateral requirement of the 
counterparty under the governing contract;
    (ii) Is not segregated from the FDIC-supervised institution's other 
assets such that it cannot be rehypothecated; and
    (iii) Is not already excluded as eligible HQLA by the FDIC-
supervised institution under Sec. 329.22(b)(5);
    (5) Contractually required collateral. 100 percent of the fair value 
of collateral that the FDIC-supervised institution is contractually 
required to pledge to a counterparty and, as of such calculation date, 
the FDIC-supervised institution has not yet pledged;
    (6) Collateral substitution. (i) Zero percent of the fair value of 
collateral pledged to the FDIC-supervised institution by a counterparty 
where the collateral qualifies as level 1 liquid assets and eligible 
HQLA and where, under

[[Page 636]]

the contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with other assets that qualify as level 1 liquid 
assets, without the consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (ii) 15 percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the FDIC-
supervised institution by a counterparty, where the collateral qualifies 
as level 1 liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under the contract 
governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the pledged 
collateral with assets that qualify as level 2A liquid assets, without 
the consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (iii) 50 percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the 
FDIC-supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral 
qualifies as level 1 liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where under, 
the contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with assets that qualify as level 2B liquid assets, 
without the consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (iv) 100 percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the 
FDIC-supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral 
qualifies as level 1 liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under 
the contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with assets that do not qualify as HQLA, without the 
consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (v) Zero percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the 
FDIC-supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral 
qualifies as level 2A liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under 
the contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with assets that qualify as level 1 or level 2A 
liquid assets, without the consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (vi) 35 percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the FDIC-
supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral qualifies 
as level 2A liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under the 
contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with assets that qualify as level 2B liquid assets, 
without the consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (vii) 85 percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the 
FDIC-supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral 
qualifies as level 2A liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under 
the contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with assets that do not qualify as HQLA, without the 
consent of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (viii) Zero percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the 
FDIC-supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral 
qualifies as level 2B liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under 
the contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with other assets that qualify as HQLA, without the 
consent of the FDIC-supervised institution; and
    (ix) 50 percent of the fair value of collateral pledged to the FDIC-
supervised institution by a counterparty where the collateral qualifies 
as level 2B liquid assets and eligible HQLA and where, under the 
contract governing the transaction, the counterparty may replace the 
pledged collateral with assets that do not qualify as HQLA, without the 
consent of the FDIC-supervised institution.
    (g) Brokered deposit outflow amount for retail customers or 
counterparties. The brokered deposit outflow amount for retail customers 
or counterparties as of the calculation date includes:
    (1) 100 percent of all brokered deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty that are not 
described in paragraphs (g)(5) through (9) of this section and which 
mature 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date;
    (2) 10 percent of all brokered deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty that are not 
described in paragraphs (g)(5) through (9) of this section and which 
mature later than 30 calendar days from the calculation date;
    (3) 20 percent of all brokered deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty that are not 
described in

[[Page 637]]

paragraphs (g)(5) through (9) of this section and which are held in a 
transactional account with no contractual maturity date, where the 
entire amount is covered by deposit insurance;
    (4) 40 percent of all brokered deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty that are not 
described in paragraphs (g)(5) through (9) of this section and which are 
held in a transactional account with no contractual maturity date, where 
less than the entire amount is covered by deposit insurance;
    (5) 10 percent of all reciprocal brokered deposits at the FDIC-
supervised institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty, 
where the entire amount is covered by deposit insurance;
    (6) 25 percent of all reciprocal brokered deposits at the FDIC-
supervised institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty, 
where less than the entire amount is covered by deposit insurance;
    (7) 10 percent of all brokered sweep deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty:
    (i) That are deposited in accordance with a contract between the 
retail customer or counterparty and the FDIC-supervised institution, a 
controlled subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution, or a company 
that is a controlled subsidiary of the same top-tier company of which 
the FDIC-supervised institution is a controlled subsidiary; and
    (ii) Where the entire amount of the deposits is covered by deposit 
insurance;
    (8) 25 percent of all brokered sweep deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty:
    (i) That are not deposited in accordance with a contract between the 
retail customer or counterparty and the FDIC-supervised institution, a 
controlled subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution, or a company 
that is a controlled subsidiary of the same top-tier company of which 
the FDIC-supervised institution is a controlled subsidiary; and
    (ii) Where the entire amount of the deposits is covered by deposit 
insurance; and
    (9) 40 percent of all brokered sweep deposits at the FDIC-supervised 
institution provided by a retail customer or counterparty where less 
than the entire amount of the deposit balance is covered by deposit 
insurance.
    (h) Unsecured wholesale funding outflow amount. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's unsecured wholesale funding outflow amount, for all 
transactions that mature within 30 calendar days or less of the 
calculation date, as of the calculation date includes:
    (1) For unsecured wholesale funding that is not an operational 
deposit and is not provided by a financial sector entity or consolidated 
subsidiary of a financial sector entity:
    (i) 20 percent of all such funding, where the entire amount is 
covered by deposit insurance and the funding is not a brokered deposit;
    (ii) 40 percent of all such funding, where:
    (A) Less than the entire amount is covered by deposit insurance; or
    (B) The funding is a brokered deposit;
    (2) 100 percent of all unsecured wholesale funding that is not an 
operational deposit and is not included in paragraph (h)(1) of this 
section, including:
    (i) Funding provided by a company that is a consolidated subsidiary 
of the same top-tier company of which the FDIC-supervised institutions 
is a consolidated subsidiary; and
    (ii) Debt instruments issued by the FDIC-supervised institutions, 
including such instruments owned by retail customers or counterparties;
    (3) 5 percent of all operational deposits, other than operational 
deposits that are held in escrow accounts, where the entire deposit 
amount is covered by deposit insurance;
    (4) 25 percent of all operational deposits not included in paragraph 
(h)(3) of this section; and
    (5) 100 percent of all unsecured wholesale funding that is not 
otherwise described in this paragraph (h).
    (i) Debt security buyback outflow amount. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's debt security buyback outflow amount for debt securities 
issued by the FDIC-supervised institution that

[[Page 638]]

mature more than 30 calendar days after the calculation date and for 
which the FDIC-supervised institution or a consolidated subsidiary of 
the FDIC-supervised institution is the primary market maker in such debt 
securities includes:
    (1) 3 percent of all such debt securities that are not structured 
securities; and
    (2) 5 percent of all such debt securities that are structured 
securities.
    (j) Secured funding and asset exchange outflow amount. (1) A FDIC-
supervised institution's secured funding outflow amount, for all 
transactions that mature within 30 calendar days or less of the 
calculation date, as of the calculation date includes:
    (i) Zero percent of all funds the FDIC-supervised institution must 
pay pursuant to secured funding transactions, to the extent that the 
funds are secured by level 1 liquid assets;
    (ii) 15 percent of all funds the FDIC-supervised institution must 
pay pursuant to secured funding transactions, to the extent that the 
funds are secured by level 2A liquid assets;
    (iii) 25 percent of all funds the FDIC-supervised institution must 
pay pursuant to secured funding transactions with sovereign entities, 
multilateral development banks, or U.S. government-sponsored enterprises 
that are assigned a risk weight of 20 percent under subpart D of 12 CFR 
part 324, to the extent that the funds are not secured by level 1 or 
level 2A liquid assets;
    (iv) 50 percent of all funds the FDIC-supervised institution must 
pay pursuant to secured funding transactions, to the extent that the 
funds are secured by level 2B liquid assets;
    (v) 50 percent of all funds received from secured funding 
transactions that are customer short positions where the customer short 
positions are covered by other customers' collateral and the collateral 
does not consist of HQLA; and
    (vi) 100 percent of all other funds the FDIC-supervised institution 
must pay pursuant to secured funding transactions, to the extent that 
the funds are secured by assets that are not HQLA.
    (2) If an outflow rate specified in paragraph (j)(1) of this section 
for a secured funding transaction is greater than the outflow rate that 
the FDIC-supervised institution is required to apply under paragraph (h) 
of this section to an unsecured wholesale funding transaction that is 
not an operational deposit with the same counterparty, the FDIC-
supervised institution may apply to the secured funding transaction the 
outflow rate that applies to an unsecured wholesale funding transaction 
that is not an operational deposit with that counterparty, except in the 
case of:
    (i) Secured funding transactions that are secured by collateral that 
was received by the FDIC-supervised institution under a secured lending 
transaction or asset exchange, in which case the FDIC-supervised 
institution must apply the outflow rate specified in paragraph (j)(1) of 
this section for the secured funding transaction; and
    (ii) Collateralized deposits that are operational deposits, in which 
case the FDIC-supervised institution may apply to the operational 
deposit amount, as calculated in accordance with Sec. 329.4(b), the 
operational deposit outflow rate specified in paragraph (h)(3) or (4) of 
this section, as applicable, if such outflow rate is lower than the 
outflow rate specified in paragraph (j)(1) of this section.
    (3) A FDIC-supervised institution's asset exchange outflow amount, 
for all transactions that mature within 30 calendar days or less of the 
calculation date, as of the calculation date includes:
    (i) Zero percent of the fair value of the level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive level 1 
liquid assets from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (ii) 15 percent of the fair value of the level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive level 
2A liquid assets from the asset exchange counterparty;

[[Page 639]]

    (iii) 50 percent of the fair value of the level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive level 
2B liquid assets from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (iv) 100 percent of the fair value of the level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive assets 
that are not HQLA from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (v) Zero percent of the fair value of the level 2A liquid assets 
that FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where FDIC-supervised institution will receive level 1 or 
level 2A liquid assets from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (vi) 35 percent of the fair value of the level 2A liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive level 
2B liquid assets from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (vii) 85 percent of the fair value of the level 2A liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive assets 
that are not HQLA from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (viii) Zero percent of the fair value of the level 2B liquid assets 
the FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive HQLA 
from the asset exchange counterparty; and
    (ix) 50 percent of the fair value of the level 2B liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution must post to a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraphs (j)(3)(x) through (xiii) of 
this section, where the FDIC-supervised institution will receive assets 
that are not HQLA from the asset exchange counterparty;
    (x) Zero percent of the fair value of the level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
an asset exchange where the FDIC-supervised institution has 
rehypothecated the assets posted by the asset exchange counterparty, 
and, as of the calculation date, the assets will not be returned to the 
FDIC-supervised institution within 30 calendar days;
    (xi) 15 percent of the fair value of the level 2A liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
an asset exchange where the [BANK] has rehypothecated the assets posted 
by the asset exchange counterparty, and, as of the calculation date, the 
assets will not be returned to the FDIC-supervised institution within 30 
calendar days;
    (xii) 50 percent of the fair value of the level 2B liquid assets the 
[BANK] will receive from a counterparty pursuant to an asset exchange 
where the FDIC-supervised institution has rehypothecated the assets 
posted by the asset exchange counterparty, and, as of the calculation 
date, the assets will not be returned to the FDIC-supervised institution 
within 30 calendar days; and
    (xiii) 100 percent of the fair value of the non-HQLA the FDIC-
supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to an 
asset exchange where the FDIC-supervised institution has rehypothecated 
the assets posted by the asset exchange counterparty, and, as of the 
calculation date, the assets will not be returned to the FDIC-supervised 
institution within 30 calendar days.
    (k) Foreign central bank borrowing outflow amount. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's foreign central bank borrowing outflow amount is, in a 
foreign jurisdiction where the FDIC-supervised institution has borrowed 
from the jurisdiction's central bank, the outflow amount assigned to 
borrowings from central banks in a minimum liquidity standard 
established in that jurisdiction. If the foreign jurisdiction has not

[[Page 640]]

specified a central bank borrowing outflow amount in a minimum liquidity 
standard, the foreign central bank borrowing outflow amount must be 
calculated in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section.
    (l) Other contractual outflow amount. A FDIC-supervised 
institution's other contractual outflow amount is 100 percent of funding 
or amounts, with the exception of operating expenses of the FDIC-
supervised institution (such as rents, salaries, utilities, and other 
similar payments), payable by the FDIC-supervised institution to 
counterparties under legally binding agreements that are not otherwise 
specified in this section.
    (m) Excluded amounts for intragroup transactions. The outflow 
amounts set forth in this section do not include amounts arising out of 
transactions between:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution and a consolidated subsidiary of 
the FDIC-supervised institution; or
    (2) A consolidated subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution and 
another consolidated subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution.



Sec. 329.33  Inflow amounts.

    (a) The inflows in paragraphs (b) through (g) of this section do not 
include:
    (1) Amounts the FDIC-supervised institution holds in operational 
deposits at other regulated financial companies;
    (2) Amounts the FDIC-supervised institution expects, or is 
contractually entitled to receive, 30 calendar days or less from the 
calculation date due to forward sales of mortgage loans and any 
derivatives that are mortgage commitments subject to Sec. 329.32(d);
    (3) The amount of any credit or liquidity facilities extended to the 
FDIC-supervised institution;
    (4) The amount of any asset that is eligible HQLA and any amounts 
payable to the FDIC-supervised institution with respect to that asset;
    (5) Any amounts payable to the FDIC-supervised institution from an 
obligation of a customer or counterparty that is a nonperforming asset 
as of the calculation date or that the FDIC-supervised institution has 
reason to expect will become a nonperforming exposure 30 calendar days 
or less from the calculation date; and
    (6) Amounts payable to the FDIC-supervised institution with respect 
to any transaction that has no contractual maturity date or that matures 
after 30 calendar days of the calculation date (as determined by 
Sec. 329.31).
    (b) Net derivative cash inflow amount. The net derivative cash 
inflow amount as of the calculation date is the sum of the net 
derivative cash inflow amount for each counterparty. The net derivative 
cash inflow amount does not include amounts excluded from inflows under 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section. The net derivative cash inflow amount 
for a counterparty is the sum of:
    (1) The amount, if greater than zero, of contractual payments and 
collateral that the FDIC-supervised institution will receive from the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
derivative transactions other than transactions described in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section, less the contractual payments and collateral 
that the FDIC-supervised institution will make or deliver to the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
derivative transactions other than transactions described in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section, provided that the derivative transactions are 
subject to a qualifying master netting agreement; and
    (2) The amount, if greater than zero, of contractual principal 
payments that the FDIC-supervised institution will receive from the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
foreign currency exchange derivative transactions that result in the 
full exchange of contractual cash principal payments in different 
currencies within the same business day, less the contractual principal 
payments that the FDIC-supervised institution will make to the 
counterparty 30 calendar days or less from the calculation date under 
foreign currency exchange derivative transactions that result in the 
full exchange of contractual cash principal payments in different 
currencies within the same business day.
    (c) Retail cash inflow amount. The retail cash inflow amount as of 
the calculation date includes 50 percent of all

[[Page 641]]

payments contractually payable to the FDIC-supervised institution from 
retail customers or counterparties.
    (d) Unsecured wholesale cash inflow amount. The unsecured wholesale 
cash inflow amount as of the calculation date includes:
    (1) 100 percent of all payments contractually payable to the FDIC-
supervised institution from financial sector entities, or from a 
consolidated subsidiary thereof, or central banks; and
    (2) 50 percent of all payments contractually payable to the FDIC-
supervised institution from wholesale customers or counterparties that 
are not financial sector entities or consolidated subsidiaries thereof, 
provided that, with respect to revolving credit facilities, the amount 
of the existing loan is not included in the unsecured wholesale cash 
inflow amount and the remaining undrawn balance is included in the 
outflow amount under Sec. 329.32(e)(1).
    (e) Securities cash inflow amount. The securities cash inflow amount 
as of the calculation date includes 100 percent of all contractual 
payments due to the FDIC-supervised institution on securities it owns 
that are not eligible HQLA.
    (f) Secured lending and asset exchange cash inflow amount. (1) A 
FDIC-supervised institution's secured lending cash inflow amount as of 
the calculation date includes:
    (i) Zero percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to secured lending transactions, 
including margin loans extended to customers, to the extent that the 
payments are secured by collateral that has been rehypothecated in a 
transaction and, as of the calculation date, will not be returned to the 
FDIC-supervised institution within 30 calendar days;
    (ii) 100 percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to secured lending transactions not 
described in paragraph (f)(1)(vii) of this section, to the extent that 
the payments are secured by assets that are not eligible HQLA, but are 
still held by the FDIC-supervised institution and are available for 
immediate return to the counterparty at any time;
    (iii) Zero percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to secured lending transactions not 
described in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section, to the extent 
that the payments are secured by level 1 liquid assets;
    (iv) 15 percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to secured lending transactions not 
described in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section, to the extent 
that the payments are secured by level 2A liquid assets;
    (v) 50 percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to secured lending transactions not 
described in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section, to the extent 
that the payments are secured by level 2B liquid assets;
    (vi) 100 percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to secured lending transactions not 
described in paragraphs (f)(1)(i), (ii), or (vii) of this section, to 
the extent that the payments are secured by assets that are not HQLA; 
and
    (vii) 50 percent of all contractual payments due to the FDIC-
supervised institution pursuant to collateralized margin loans extended 
to customers, not described in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, 
provided that the loans are secured by assets that are not HQLA.
    (2) A FDIC-supervised institution's asset exchange inflow amount as 
of the calculation date includes:
    (i) Zero percent of the fair value of assets the FDIC-supervised 
institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to asset 
exchanges, to the extent that the asset received by the FDIC-supervised 
institution from the counterparty has been rehypothecated in a 
transaction and, as of the calculation date, will not be returned to the 
FDIC-supervised institution within 30 calendar days;
    (ii) Zero percent of the fair value of level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post level 1

[[Page 642]]

liquid assets to the asset exchange counterparty;
    (iii) 15 percent of the fair value of level 1 liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post level 2A liquid assets 
to the asset exchange counterparty;
    (iv) 50 percent of the fair value of level 1 liquid assets the FDIC-
supervised institution will receive from counterparty pursuant to asset 
exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, where 
the FDIC-supervised institution must post level 2B liquid assets to the 
asset exchange counterparty;
    (v) 100 percent of the fair value of level 1 liquid assets the FDIC-
supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post assets that are not HQLA 
to the asset exchange counterparty;
    (vi) Zero percent of the fair value of level 2A liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post level 1 or level 2A 
liquid assets to the asset exchange counterparty;
    (vii) 35 percent of the fair value of level 2A liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post level 2B liquid assets 
to the asset exchange counterparty;
    (viii) 85 percent of the fair value of level 2A liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post assets that are not HQLA 
to the asset exchange counterparty;
    (ix) Zero percent of the fair value of level 2B liquid assets the 
FDIC-supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post assets that are HQLA to 
the asset exchange counterparty; and
    (x) 50 percent of the fair value of level 2B liquid assets the FDIC-
supervised institution will receive from a counterparty pursuant to 
asset exchanges, not described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, 
where the FDIC-supervised institution must post assets that are not HQLA 
to the asset exchange counterparty.
    (g) Broker-dealer segregated account inflow amount. A FDIC-
supervised institution's broker-dealer segregated account inflow amount 
is the fair value of all assets released from broker-dealer segregated 
accounts maintained in accordance with statutory or regulatory 
requirements for the protection of customer trading assets, provided 
that the calculation of the broker-dealer segregated account inflow 
amount, for any transaction affecting the calculation of the segregated 
balance (as required by applicable law), shall be consistent with the 
following:
    (1) In calculating the broker-dealer segregated account inflow 
amount, the FDIC-supervised institution must calculate the fair value of 
the required balance of the customer reserve account as of 30 calendar 
days from the calculation date by assuming that customer cash and 
collateral positions have changed consistent with the outflow and inflow 
calculations required under Secs. 329.32 and 329.33.
    (2) If the fair value of the required balance of the customer 
reserve account as of 30 calendar days from the calculation date, as 
calculated consistent with the outflow and inflow calculations required 
under Secs. 329.32 and 329.33, is less than the fair value of the 
required balance as of the calculation date, the difference is the 
segregated account inflow amount.
    (3) If the fair value of the required balance of the customer 
reserve account as of 30 calendar days from the calculation date, as 
calculated consistent with the outflow and inflow calculations required 
under Secs. 329.32 and 329.33, is more than the fair value of

[[Page 643]]

the required balance as of the calculation date, the segregated account 
inflow amount is zero.
    (h) Other cash inflow amounts. A FDIC-supervised institution's 
inflow amount as of the calculation date includes zero percent of other 
cash inflow amounts not included in paragraphs (b) through (g) of this 
section.
    (i) Excluded amounts for intragroup transactions. The inflow amounts 
set forth in this section do not include amounts arising out of 
transactions between:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution and a consolidated subsidiary of 
the FDIC-supervised institution; or
    (2) A consolidated subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution and 
another consolidated subsidiary of the FDIC-supervised institution.



                 Subpart E_Liquidity Coverage Shortfall



Sec. 329.40  Liquidity coverage shortfall: Supervisory framework.

    (a) Notification requirements. must notify the FDIC on any business 
day when its liquidity coverage ratio is calculated to be less than the 
minimum requirement in Sec. 329.10.
    (b) Liquidity plan. (1) For the period during which an FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate a liquidity coverage ratio on the 
last business day of each applicable calendar month under subpart F of 
this part, if the FDIC-supervised institution's liquidity coverage ratio 
is below the minimum requirement in Sec. 329.10 for any calculation date 
that is the last business day of the applicable calendar month, or if 
the FDIC has determined that the FDIC-supervised institution is 
otherwise materially noncompliant with the requirements of this part, 
the FDIC-supervised institution must promptly consult with the FDIC to 
determine whether the FDIC-supervised institution must provide to the 
FDIC a plan for achieving compliance with the minimum liquidity 
requirement in Sec. 329.10 and all other requirements of this part.
    (2) For the period during which an FDIC-supervised institution must 
calculate a liquidity coverage ratio each business day under subpart F 
of this part, if a FDIC-supervised institution's liquidity coverage 
ratio is below the minimum requirement in Sec. 329.10 for three 
consecutive business days, or if the FDIC has determined that the FDIC-
supervised institution is otherwise materially noncompliant with the 
requirements of this part, the FDIC-supervised institution must promptly 
provide to the FDIC a plan for achieving compliance with the minimum 
liquidity requirement in Sec. 329.10 and all other requirements of this 
part.
    (3) The plan must include, as applicable:
    (i) An assessment of the FDIC-supervised institution's liquidity 
position;
    (ii) The actions the FDIC-supervised institution has taken and will 
take to achieve full compliance with this part, including:
    (A) A plan for adjusting the FDIC-supervised institution's risk 
profile, risk management, and funding sources in order to achieve full 
compliance with this part; and
    (B) A plan for remediating any operational or management issues that 
contributed to noncompliance with this part;
    (iii) An estimated time frame for achieving full compliance with 
this part; and
    (iv) A commitment to report to the FDIC no less than weekly on 
progress to achieve compliance in accordance with the plan until full 
compliance with this part is achieved.
    (c) Supervisory and enforcement actions. The FDIC may, at its 
discretion, take additional supervisory or enforcement actions to 
address noncompliance with the minimum liquidity standard and other 
requirements of this part.



                          Subpart F_Transitions



Sec. 329.50  Transitions.

    (a) Covered depository institution holding companies with $700 
billion or more in total consolidated assets or $10 trillion or more in 
assets under custody. For any depository institution holding company 
that has total consolidated assets equal to $700 billion or more, as 
reported on the company's most recent Consolidated Financial Statements 
for Holding Companies (FR Y-9C), or $10 trillion or more in assets

[[Page 644]]

under custody, as reported on the company's most recent Banking 
Organization Systemic Risk Report (FR Y-15), and any depository 
institution that is a consolidated subsidiary of such depository 
institution holding company that has total consolidated assets equal to 
$10 billion or more, as reported on the most recent year-end 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income:
    (1) Beginning January 1, 2015, through June 30, 2015, the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage 
ratio monthly, on each calculation date that is the last business day of 
the applicable calendar month, in accordance with this part, that is 
equal to or greater than 0.80.
    (2) Beginning July 1, 2015 through December 31, 2015, the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage 
ratio on each calculation date in accordance with this part that is 
equal to or greater than 0.80.
    (3) Beginning January 1, 2016, through December 31, 2016, the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage 
ratio on each calculation date in accordance with this part that is 
equal to or greater than 0.90.
    (4) On January 1, 2017, and thereafter, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage ratio on 
each calculation date that is equal to or greater than 1.0.
    (b) Other FDIC-supervised institution's For any FDIC-supervised 
institution subject to a minimum liquidity standard under this part not 
described in paragraph (a) of this section:
    (1) Beginning January 1, 2015, through December 31, 2015, the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage 
ratio monthly, on each calculation date that is the last business day of 
the applicable calendar month, in accordance with this part, that is 
equal to or greater than 0.80.
    (2) Beginning January 1, 2016, through June 30, 2016, the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage 
ratio monthly, on each calculation date that is the last business day of 
the applicable calendar month, in accordance with this part, that is 
equal to or greater than 0.90.
    (3) Beginning July 1, 2016, through December 31, 2016, the FDIC-
supervised institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage 
ratio on each calculation date in accordance with this part that is 
equal to or greater than 0.90.
    (4) On January 1, 2017, and thereafter, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must calculate and maintain a liquidity coverage ratio on 
each calculation date that is equal to or greater than 1.0.



PART 330_DEPOSIT INSURANCE COVERAGE--Table of Contents



Sec.
330.1  Definitions.
330.2  Purpose.
330.3  General principles.
330.4  Continuation of separate deposit insurance after merger of 
          insured depository institutions.
330.5  Recognition of deposit ownership and fiduciary relationships.
330.6  Single ownership accounts.
330.7  Accounts held by an agent, nominee, guardian, custodian or 
          conservator.
330.8  Annuity contract accounts.
330.9  Joint ownership accounts.
330.10  Revocable trust accounts.
330.11  Accounts of a corporation, partnership or unincorporated 
          association.
330.12  Accounts held by a depository institution as the trustee of an 
          irrevocable trust.
330.13  Irrevocable trust accounts.
330.14  Retirement and other employee benefit plan accounts.
330.15  Accounts held by government depositors.
330.16  [Reserved]
330.101  Premiums.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1813(l), 1813(m), 1817(i), 1818(q), 
1819(a)(Tenth), 1820(f), 1820(g), 1821(a), 1821(d), 1822(c).

    Source: 63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 330.1  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this part:
    (a) Act means the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1811 et 
seq.).
    (b) Corporation means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (c) Default has the same meaning as provided under section 3(x) of 
the Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(x)).

[[Page 645]]

    (d) Deposit has the same meaning as provided under section 3(l) of 
the Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(l)).
    (e) Deposit account records means account ledgers, signature cards, 
certificates of deposit, passbooks, corporate resolutions authorizing 
accounts in the possession of the insured depository institution and 
other books and records of the insured depository institution, including 
records maintained by computer, which relate to the insured depository 
institution's deposit taking function, but does not mean account 
statements, deposit slips, items deposited or cancelled checks.
    (f) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (g) Independent activity. A corporation, partnership or 
unincorporated association shall be deemed to be engaged in an 
``independent activity'' if the entity is operated primarily for some 
purpose other than to increase deposit insurance.
    (h) Insured branch means a branch of a foreign bank any deposits in 
which are insured in accordance with the provisions of the Act.
    (i) Insured deposit has the same meaning as that provided under 
section 3(m)(1) of the Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(m)(1)) and this part.
    (j) Insured depository institution is any depository institution 
whose deposits are insured pursuant to the Act, including a foreign bank 
having an insured branch.
    (k) Interest, with respect to a deposit, means any payment to or for 
the account of any depositor as compensation for the use of funds 
constituting a deposit. A bank's absorption of expenses incident to 
providing a normal banking function or its forbearance from charging a 
fee in connection with such a service is not considered a payment of 
interest.
    (l) Natural person means a human being.
    (m) Non-contingent trust interest means a trust interest capable of 
determination without evaluation of contingencies except for those 
covered by the present worth tables and rules of calculation for their 
use set forth in Sec. 20.2031-7 of the Federal Estate Tax Regulations 
(26 CFR 20.2031-7) or any similar present worth or life expectancy 
tables which may be adopted by the Internal Revenue Service.
    (n) Sole proprietorship means a form of business in which one person 
owns all the assets of the business, in contrast to a partnership or 
corporation.
    (o) Standard maximum deposit insurance amount, referred to as the 
``SMDIA'' hereafter, means $250,000 adjusted pursuant to subparagraph 
(F) of section 11(a)(1) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(a)(1)(F)).
    (p) Trust estate means the determinable and beneficial interest of a 
beneficiary or principal in trust funds but does not include the 
beneficial interest of an heir or devisee in a decedent's estate.
    (q) Trust funds means funds held by an insured depository 
institution as trustee pursuant to any irrevocable trust established 
pursuant to any statute or written trust agreement.
    (r) Trust interest means the interest of a beneficiary in an 
irrevocable express trust (other than an employee benefit plan) created 
either by written trust instrument or by statute, but does not include 
any interest retained by the settlor.
    (s) [Reserved]

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 73 
FR 61660, Oct. 17, 2008; 74 FR 47716, Sept. 17, 2009; 75 FR 49365, Aug. 
13, 2010; 75 FR 69583, Nov. 15, 2010; 76 FR 4816, Jan. 27, 2011; 76 FR 
41395, July 14, 2011; 78 FR 56588, Sept. 13, 2013; 80 FR 65921, Oct. 28, 
2015]



Sec. 330.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to clarify the rules and define the 
terms necessary to afford deposit insurance coverage under the Act and 
provide rules for the recognition of deposit ownership in various 
circumstances.



Sec. 330.3  General principles.

    (a) Ownership rights and capacities. The insurance coverage provided 
by the Act and this part is based upon the ownership rights and 
capacities in which deposit accounts are maintained at insured 
depository institutions. All deposits in an insured depository 
institution which are maintained in the same right and capacity (by or 
for the benefit of a particular depositor or depositors) shall be added 
together and

[[Page 646]]

insured in accordance with this part. Deposits maintained in different 
rights and capacities, as recognized under this part, shall be insured 
separately from each other. (Example: Single ownership accounts and 
joint ownership accounts are insured separately from each other.)
    (b) Deposits maintained in separate insured depository institutions 
or in separate branches of the same insured depository institution. Any 
deposit accounts maintained by a depositor at one insured depository 
institution are insured separately from, and without regard to, any 
deposit accounts that the same depositor maintains at any other 
separately chartered and insured depository institution, even if two or 
more separately chartered and insured depository institutions are 
affiliated through common ownership. (Example: Deposits held by the same 
individual at two different banks owned by the same bank holding company 
would be insured separately, per bank.)
    The deposit accounts of a depositor maintained in the same right and 
capacity at different branches or offices of the same insured depository 
institution are not separately insured; rather they shall be added 
together and insured in accordance with this part.
    (c) Deposits maintained by foreigners and deposits denominated in 
foreign currency. The availability of deposit insurance is not limited 
to citizens and residents of the United States. Any person or entity 
that maintains deposits in an insured depository institution is entitled 
to the deposit insurance provided by the Act and this part. In addition, 
deposits denominated in a foreign currency shall be insured in 
accordance with this part. Deposit insurance for such deposits shall be 
determined and paid in the amount of United States dollars that is 
equivalent in value to the amount of the deposit denominated in the 
foreign currency as of close of business on the date of default of the 
insured depository institution. The exchange rates to be used for such 
conversions are the 12 PM rates (the ``noon buying rates for cable 
transfers'') quoted for major currencies by the Federal Reserve Bank of 
New York on the date of default of the insured depository institution, 
unless the deposit agreement specifies that some other widely recognized 
exchange rates are to be used for all purposes under that agreement, in 
which case, the rates so specified shall be used for such conversions.
    (d) Deposits in insured branches of foreign banks. Deposits in an 
insured branch of a foreign bank which are payable by contract in the 
United States shall be insured in accordance with this part, except that 
any deposits to the credit of the foreign bank, or any office, branch, 
agency or any wholly owned subsidiary of the foreign bank, shall not be 
insured. All deposits held by a depositor in the same right and capacity 
in more than one insured branch of the same foreign bank shall be added 
together for the purpose of determining the amount of deposit insurance.
    (e) Deposits payable outside of the United States and certain other 
locations. (1) Any obligation of an insured depository institution which 
is payable solely at an office of that institution located outside any 
State, as the term ``State'' is defined in section 3(a)(3) of the Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1813(a)(3)), is not a deposit for the purposes of this part.
    (2) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, any 
obligation of an insured depository institution which is carried on the 
books and records of an office of that institution located outside any 
State, as referred to in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, shall not be 
an insured deposit for purposes of this part, or any other provision of 
this part, notwithstanding that the obligation may also be payable at an 
office of that institution located within any State.
    (3) Rule of construction. For purposes of this paragraph (e), 
Overseas Military Banking Facilities operated under Department of 
Defense regulations, 32 CFR Parts 230 and 231, are not considered to be 
offices located outside any State, as referred to in paragraph (e)(1) of 
this section.
    (f) International banking facility deposits. An ``international 
banking facility time deposit,'' as defined by the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System in Regulation D (12 CFR

[[Page 647]]

204.8(a)(2)), or in any successor regulation, is not a deposit for the 
purposes of this part.
    (g) Bank investment contracts. As required by section 11(a)(8) of 
the Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(a)(8)), any liability arising under any 
investment contract between any insured depository institution and any 
employee benefit plan which expressly permits ``benefit responsive 
withdrawals or transfers'' (as defined in section 11(a)(8) of the Act) 
are not insured deposits for purposes of this part. The term 
``substantial penalty or adjustment'' used in section 11(a)(8) of the 
Act means, in the case of a deposit having an original term which 
exceeds one year, all interest earned on the amount withdrawn from the 
date of deposit or for six months, whichever is less; or, in the case of 
a deposit having an original term of one year or less, all interest 
earned on the amount withdrawn from the date of deposit or three months, 
whichever is less.
    (h) Application of state or local law to deposit insurance 
determinations. In general, deposit insurance is for the benefit of the 
owner or owners of funds on deposit. However, while ownership under 
state law of deposited funds is a necessary condition for deposit 
insurance, ownership under state law is not sufficient for, or decisive 
in, determining deposit insurance coverage. Deposit insurance coverage 
is also a function of the deposit account records of the insured 
depository institution and of the provisions of this part, which, in the 
interest of uniform national rules for deposit insurance coverage, are 
controlling for purposes of determining deposit insurance coverage.
    (i) Determination of the amount of a deposit--(1) General rule. The 
amount of a deposit is the balance of principal and interest 
unconditionally credited to the deposit account as of the date of 
default of the insured depository institution, plus the ascertainable 
amount of interest to that date, accrued at the contract rate (or the 
anticipated or announced interest or dividend rate), which the insured 
depository institution in default would have paid if the deposit had 
matured on that date and the insured depository institution had not 
failed. In the absence of any such announced or anticipated interest or 
dividend rate, the rate for this purpose shall be whatever rate was paid 
in the immediately preceding payment period.
    (2) Discounted certificates of deposit. The amount of a certificate 
of deposit sold by an insured depository institution at a discount from 
its face value is its original purchase price plus the amount of accrued 
earnings calculated by compounding interest annually at the rate 
necessary to increase the original purchase price to the maturity value 
over the life of the certificate.
    (3) Waiver of minimum requirements. In the case of a deposit with a 
fixed payment date, fixed or minimum term, or a qualifying or notice 
period that has not expired as of such date, interest thereon to the 
date of closing shall be computed according to the terms of the deposit 
contract as if interest had been credited and as if the deposit could 
have been withdrawn on such date without any penalty or reduction in the 
rate of earnings.
    (j) Continuation of insurance coverage following the death of a 
deposit owner. The death of a deposit owner shall not affect the 
insurance coverage of the deposit for a period of six months following 
the owner's death unless the deposit account is restructured. The 
operation of this grace period, however, shall not result in a reduction 
of coverage. If an account is not restructured within six months after 
the owner's death, the insurance shall be provided on the basis of 
actual ownership in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 330.5(a)(1).

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 64 FR 15656, Apr. 1, 1999; 78 
FR 56589, Sept. 13, 2013]



Sec. 330.4  Continuation of separate deposit insurance after merger
of insured depository institutions.

    Whenever the liabilities of one or more insured depository 
institutions for deposits are assumed by another insured depository 
institution, whether by merger, consolidation, other statutory 
assumption or contract:

[[Page 648]]

    (a) The insured status of the institutions whose liabilities have 
been assumed terminates on the date of receipt by the FDIC of 
satisfactory evidence of the assumption; and
    (b) The separate insurance of deposits assumed continues for six 
months from the date the assumption takes effect or, in the case of a 
time deposit, the earliest maturity date after the six-month period. In 
the case of time deposits which mature within six months of the date the 
deposits are assumed and which are renewed at the same dollar amount 
(either with or without accrued interest having been added to the 
principal amount) and for the same term as the original deposit, the 
separate insurance applies to the renewed deposits until the first 
maturity date after the six-month period. Time deposits that mature 
within six months of the deposit assumption and that are renewed on any 
other basis, or that are not renewed and thereby become demand deposits, 
are separately insured only until the end of the six-month period.



Sec. 330.5  Recognition of deposit ownership and fiduciary 
relationships.

    (a) Recognition of deposit ownership--(1) Evidence of deposit 
ownership. Except as indicated in this paragraph (a)(1) or as provided 
in Sec. 330.3(j), in determining the amount of insurance available to 
each depositor, the FDIC shall presume that deposited funds are actually 
owned in the manner indicated on the deposit account records of the 
insured depository institution. If the FDIC, in its sole discretion, 
determines that the deposit account records of the insured depository 
institution are clear and unambiguous, those records shall be considered 
binding on the depositor, and the FDIC shall consider no other records 
on the manner in which the funds are owned. If the deposit account 
records are ambiguous or unclear on the manner in which the funds are 
owned, then the FDIC may, in its sole discretion, consider evidence 
other than the deposit account records of the insured depository 
institution for the purpose of establishing the manner in which the 
funds are owned. Despite the general requirements of this paragraph 
(a)(1), if the FDIC has reason to believe that the insured depository 
institution's deposit account records misrepresent the actual ownership 
of deposited funds and such misrepresentation would increase deposit 
insurance coverage, the FDIC may consider all available evidence and pay 
claims for insured deposits on the basis of the actual rather than the 
misrepresented ownership.
    (2) Recognition of deposit ownership in custodial accounts. In the 
case of custodial deposits, the interest of each beneficial owner may be 
determined on a fractional or percentage basis. This may be accomplished 
in any manner which indicates that where the funds of an owner are 
commingled with other funds held in a custodial capacity and a portion 
thereof is placed on deposit in one or more insured depository 
institutions without allocation, the owner's insured interest in the 
deposit in any one insured depository institution would represent, at 
any given time, the same fractional share as his or her share of the 
total commingled funds.
    (b) Fiduciary relationships--(1) Recognition. The FDIC will 
recognize a claim for insurance coverage based on a fiduciary 
relationship only if the relationship is expressly disclosed, by way of 
specific references, in the ``deposit account records'' (as defined in 
Sec. 330.1(e)) of the insured depository institution. Such relationships 
include, but are not limited to, relationships involving a trustee, 
agent, nominee, guardian, executor or custodian pursuant to which funds 
are deposited. The express indication that the account is held in a 
fiduciary capacity will not be necessary, however, in instances where 
the FDIC determines, in its sole discretion, that the titling of the 
deposit account and the underlying deposit account records sufficiently 
indicate the existence of a fiduciary relationship. This exception may 
apply, for example, where the deposit account title or records indicate 
that the account is held by an escrow agent, title company or a company 
whose business is to hold deposits and securities for others.
    (2) Details of fiduciary relationships. If the deposit account 
records of an insured depository institution disclose the existence of a 
relationship which

[[Page 649]]

might provide a basis for additional insurance (including the exception 
provided for in paragraph (b)(1) of this section), the details of the 
relationship and the interests of other parties in the account must be 
ascertainable either from the deposit account records of the insured 
depository institution or from records maintained, in good faith and in 
the regular course of business, by the depositor or by some person or 
entity that has undertaken to maintain such records for the depositor.
    (3) Multi-tiered fiduciary relationships. In deposit accounts where 
there are multiple levels of fiduciary relationships, there are two 
methods of satisfying paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section to 
obtain insurance coverage for the interests of the true beneficial 
owners of a deposit account.
    (i) One method is to:
    (A) Expressly indicate, on the deposit account records of the 
insured depository institution, the existence of each and every level of 
fiduciary relationships; and
    (B) Disclose, at each level, the name(s) and interest(s) of the 
person(s) on whose behalf the party at that level is acting.
    (ii) An alternative method is to:
    (A) Expressly indicate, on the deposit account records of the 
insured depository institution, that there are multiple levels of 
fiduciary relationships;
    (B) Disclose the existence of additional levels of fiduciary 
relationships in records, maintained in good faith and in the regular 
course of business, by parties at subsequent levels; and
    (C) Disclose, at each of the levels, the name(s) and interest(s) of 
the person(s) on whose behalf the party at that level is acting. No 
person or entity in the chain of parties will be permitted to claim that 
they are acting in a fiduciary capacity for others unless the possible 
existence of such a relationship is revealed at some previous level in 
the chain.
    (4) Exceptions--(i) Deposits evidenced by negotiable instruments. If 
any deposit obligation of an insured depository institution is evidenced 
by a negotiable certificate of deposit, negotiable draft, negotiable 
cashier's or officer's check, negotiable certified check, negotiable 
traveler's check, letter of credit or other negotiable instrument, the 
FDIC will recognize the owner of such deposit obligation for all 
purposes of claim for insured deposits to the same extent as if his or 
her name and interest were disclosed on the records of the insured 
depository institution; provided, that the instrument was in fact 
negotiated to such owner prior to the date of default of the insured 
depository institution. The owner must provide affirmative proof of such 
negotiation, in a form satisfactory to the FDIC, to substantiate his or 
her claim. Receipt of a negotiable instrument directly from the insured 
depository institution in default shall, in no event, be considered a 
negotiation of said instrument for purposes of this provision.
    (ii) Deposit obligations for payment of items forwarded for 
collection by depository institution acting as agent. Where an insured 
depository institution in default has become obligated for the payment 
of items forwarded for collection by a depository institution acting 
solely as agent, the FDIC will recognize the holders of such items for 
all purposes of claim for insured deposits to the same extent as if 
their name(s) and interest(s) were disclosed as depositors on the 
deposit account records of the insured depository institution, when such 
claim for insured deposits, if otherwise payable, has been established 
by the execution and delivery of prescribed forms. The FDIC will 
recognize such depository institution forwarding such items for the 
holders thereof as agent for such holders for the purpose of making an 
assignment to the FDIC of their rights against the insured depository 
institution in default and for the purpose of receiving payment on their 
behalf.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 64 FR 15656, Apr. 1, 1999]



Sec. 330.6  Single ownership accounts.

    (a) Individual accounts. Funds owned by a natural person and 
deposited in one or more deposit accounts in his or her own name shall 
be added together and insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate. 
Exception: Despite the general requirement in this paragraph (a), if 
more than one natural person has the right to withdraw funds from an 
individual account (excluding persons who

[[Page 650]]

have the right to withdraw by virtue of a Power of Attorney), the 
account shall be treated as a joint ownership account (although not 
necessarily a qualifying joint account) and shall be insured in 
accordance with the provisions of Sec. 330.9, unless the deposit account 
records clearly indicate, to the satisfaction of the FDIC, that the 
funds are owned by one individual and that other signatories on the 
account are merely authorized to withdraw funds on behalf of the owner.
    (b) Sole proprietorship accounts. Funds owned by a business which is 
a ``sole proprietorship'' (as defined in Sec. 330.1(n)) and deposited in 
one or more deposit accounts in the name of the business shall be 
treated as the individual account(s) of the person who is the sole 
proprietor, added to any other individual accounts of that person, and 
insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate.
    (c) Single-name accounts containing community property funds. 
Community property funds deposited into one or more deposit accounts in 
the name of one member of a husband-wife community shall be treated as 
the individual account(s) of the named member, added to any other 
individual accounts of that person, and insured up to the SMDIA in the 
aggregate.
    (d) Accounts of a decedent and accounts held by executors or 
administrators of a decedent's estate. Funds held in the name of a 
decedent or in the name of the executor, administrator, or other 
personal representative of his or her estate and deposited into one or 
more deposit accounts shall be added together and insured up to the 
SMDIA in the aggregate; provided, however, that nothing in this 
paragraph (d) shall affect the operation of Sec. 330.3(j). The deposit 
insurance provided by this paragraph (d) shall be separate from any 
insurance coverage provided for the individual deposit accounts of the 
executor, administrator, other personal representative or the 
beneficiaries of the estate.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 76 
FR 41395, July 14, 2011]



Sec. 330.7  Accounts held by an agent, nominee, guardian,
custodian or conservator.

    (a) Agency or nominee accounts. Funds owned by a principal or 
principals and deposited into one or more deposit accounts in the name 
of an agent, custodian or nominee, shall be insured to the same extent 
as if deposited in the name of the principal(s). When such funds are 
deposited by an insured depository institution acting as a trustee of an 
irrevocable trust, the insurance coverage shall be governed by the 
provisions of Sec. 330.13.
    (b) Guardian, custodian or conservator accounts. Funds held by a 
guardian, custodian, or conservator for the benefit of his or her ward, 
or for the benefit of a minor under the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act, and 
deposited into one or more accounts in the name of the guardian, 
custodian or conservator shall, for purposes of this part, be deemed to 
be agency or nominee accounts and shall be insured in accordance with 
paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) Accounts held by fiduciaries on behalf of two or more persons. 
Funds held by an agent, nominee, guardian, custodian, conservator or 
loan servicer, on behalf of two or more persons jointly, shall be 
treated as a joint ownership account and shall be insured in accordance 
with the provisions of Sec. 330.9.
    (d) Mortgage servicing accounts. Accounts maintained by a mortgage 
servicer, in a custodial or other fiduciary capacity, which are 
comprised of payments by mortgagors of principal and interest, shall be 
insured for the cumulative balance paid into the account by the 
mortgagors, up to the limit of the SMDIA per mortgagor. Accounts 
maintained by a mortgage servicer, in a custodial or other fiduciary 
capacity, which are comprised of payments by mortgagors of taxes and 
insurance premiums shall be added together and insured in accordance 
with paragraph (a) of this section for the ownership interest of each 
mortgagor in such accounts. This provision is effective as of October 
10, 2008, for all existing and future mortgage servicing accounts.
    (e) Custodian accounts for American Indians. Paragraph (a) of this 
section

[[Page 651]]

shall not apply to any interest an individual American Indian may have 
in funds deposited by the Bureau of Indian Affairs of the United States 
Department of the Interior (the ``BIA'') on behalf of that person 
pursuant to 25 U.S.C. 162(a), or by any other disbursing agent of the 
United States on behalf of that person pursuant to similar authority, in 
an insured depository institution. The interest of each American Indian 
in all such accounts maintained at the same insured depository 
institution shall be added together and insured, up to the SMDIA, 
separately from any other accounts maintained by that person in the same 
insured depository institution.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 73 
FR 61660, Oct. 17, 2008; 74 FR 47716, Sept. 17, 2009]



Sec. 330.8  Annuity contract accounts.

    (a) Funds held by an insurance company or other corporation in a 
deposit account for the sole purpose of funding life insurance or 
annuity contracts and any benefits incidental to such contracts, shall 
be insured separately in the amount of up to the SMDIA per annuitant, 
provided that, pursuant to a state statute:
    (1) The corporation establishes a separate account for such funds;
    (2) The account cannot be charged with the liabilities arising out 
of any other business of the corporation; and
    (3) The account cannot be invaded by other creditors of the 
corporation in the event that the corporation becomes insolvent and its 
assets are liquidated.
    (b) Such insurance coverage shall be separate from the insurance 
provided for any other accounts maintained by the corporation or the 
annuitants at the same insured depository institution.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006]



Sec. 330.9  Joint ownership accounts.

    (a) Separate insurance coverage. Qualifying joint accounts, whether 
owned as joint tenants with the right of survivorship, as tenants in 
common or as tenants by the entirety, shall be insured separately from 
any individually owned (single ownership) deposit accounts maintained by 
the co-owners. (Example: If A has a single ownership account and also is 
a joint owner of a qualifying joint account, A's interest in the joint 
account would be insured separately from his or her interest in the 
individual account.) Qualifying joint accounts in the names of both 
husband and wife which are comprised of community property funds shall 
be added together and insured up to twice the SMDIA, separately from any 
funds deposited into accounts bearing their individual names.
    (b) Determination of insurance coverage. The interests of each co-
owner in all qualifying joint accounts shall be added together and the 
total shall be insured up to the SMDIA. (Example: ``A&B'' have a 
qualifying joint account with a balance of $150,000; ``A&C'' have a 
qualifying joint account with a balance of $200,000; and ``A&B&C'' have 
a qualifying joint account with a balance of $375,000. A's combined 
ownership interest in all qualifying joint accounts would be $300,000 
($75,000 plus $100,000 plus $125,000); therefore, A's interest would be 
insured in the amount of $250,000 and uninsured in the amount of 
$50,000. B's combined ownership interest in all qualifying joint 
accounts would be $200,000 ($75,000 plus $125,000); therefore, B's 
interest would be fully insured. C's combined ownership interest in all 
qualifying joint accounts would be $225,000 ($100,000 plus $125,000); 
therefore, C's interest would be fully insured.
    (c) Qualifying joint accounts. (1) A joint deposit account shall be 
deemed to be a qualifying joint account, for purposes of this section, 
only if:
    (i) All co-owners of the funds in the account are ``natural 
persons'' (as defined in Sec. 330.1(l)); and
    (ii) Each co-owner has personally signed a deposit account signature 
card; and
    (iii) Each co-owner possesses withdrawal rights on the same basis.
    (2) The signature-card requirement of paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this 
section shall not apply to certificates of deposit, to any deposit 
obligation evidenced by a negotiable instrument, or to any account 
maintained by an agent, nominee, guardian, custodian or conservator on 
behalf of two or more persons.

[[Page 652]]

    (3) All deposit accounts that satisfy the criteria in paragraph 
(c)(1) of this section, and those accounts that come within the 
exception provided for in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, shall be 
deemed to be jointly owned provided that, in accordance with the 
provisions of Sec. 330.5(a), the FDIC determines that the deposit 
account records of the insured depository institution are clear and 
unambiguous as to the ownership of the accounts. If the deposit account 
records are ambiguous or unclear as to the manner in which the deposit 
accounts are owned, then the FDIC may, in its sole discretion, consider 
evidence other than the deposit account records of the insured 
depository institution for the purpose of establishing the manner in 
which the funds are owned. The signatures of two or more persons on the 
deposit account signature card or the names of two or more persons on a 
certificate of deposit or other deposit instrument shall be conclusive 
evidence that the account is a joint account (although not necessarily a 
qualifying joint account) unless the deposit records as a whole are 
ambiguous and some other evidence indicates, to the satisfaction of the 
FDIC, that there is a contrary ownership capacity.
    (d) Nonqualifying joint accounts. A deposit account held in two or 
more names which is not a qualifying joint account, for purposes of this 
section, shall be treated as being owned by each named owner, as an 
individual, corporation, partnership, or unincorporated association, as 
the case may be, and the actual ownership interest of each individual or 
entity in such account shall be added to any other single ownership 
accounts of such individual or other accounts of such entity, and shall 
be insured in accordance with the provisions of this part governing the 
insurance of such accounts.
    (e) Determination of interests. The interests of the co-owners of 
qualifying joint accounts, held as tenants in common, shall be deemed 
equal, unless otherwise stated in the depository institution's deposit 
account records. This section applies regardless of whether the 
conjunction ``and'' or ``or'' is used in the title of a joint deposit 
account, even when both terms are used, such as in the case of a joint 
deposit account with three or more co-owners.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 64 FR 15656, Apr. 1, 1999; 64 
FR 62102, Nov. 16, 1999; 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 74 FR 47716, Sept. 
17, 2009; 76 FR 41395, July 14, 2011]



Sec. 330.10  Revocable trust accounts.

    (a) General rule. Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this 
section, the funds owned by an individual and deposited into one or more 
accounts with respect to which the owner evidences an intention that 
upon his or her death the funds shall belong to one or more 
beneficiaries shall be separately insured (from other types of accounts 
the owner has at the same insured depository institution) in an amount 
equal to the total number of different beneficiaries named in the 
account(s) multiplied by the SMDIA. This section applies to all accounts 
held in connection with informal and formal testamentary revocable 
trusts. Such informal trusts are commonly referred to as payable-on-
death accounts, in-trust-for accounts or Totten Trust accounts, and such 
formal trusts are commonly referred to as living trusts or family 
trusts. (Example 1: Account Owner ``A'' has a living trust account with 
four different beneficiaries named in the trust. A has no other 
revocable trust accounts at the same FDIC-insured institution. The 
maximum insurance coverage would be $1,000,000, determined by 
multiplying 4 times $250,000 (the number of beneficiaries times the 
SMDIA). (Example 2: Account Owner ``A'' has a payable-on-death account 
naming his niece and cousin as beneficiaries, and A also has, at the 
same FDIC-insured institution, another payable-on-death account naming 
the same niece and a friend as beneficiaries. The maximum coverage 
available to the account owner would be $750,000. This is because the 
account owner has named only three different beneficiaries in the 
revocable trust accounts--his niece and cousin in the first, and the 
same niece and a friend in the second. The naming of the same 
beneficiary in more than one revocable trust account, whether it be a 
payable-on-death account or living trust account, does not increase the 
total coverage amount.) (Example 3: Account

[[Page 653]]

Owner ``A'' establishes a living trust account, with a balance of 
$300,000, naming his two children ``B'' and ``C'' as beneficiaries. A 
also establishes, at the same FDIC-insured institution, a payable-on-
death account, with a balance of $300,000, also naming his children B 
and C as beneficiaries. The maximum coverage available to A is $500,000, 
determined by multiplying 2 times $250,000 (the number of different 
beneficiaries times the SMDIA). A is uninsured in the amount of 
$100,000. This is because all funds that a depositor holds in both 
living trust accounts and payable-on-death accounts, at the same FDIC-
insured institution and naming the same beneficiaries, are aggregated 
for insurance purposes and insured to the applicable coverage limits.)
    (b) Required intention and naming of beneficiaries. (1) The required 
intention in paragraph (a) of this section that upon the owner's death 
the funds shall belong to one or more beneficiaries must be manifested 
in the ``title'' of the account using commonly accepted terms such as, 
but not limited to, ``in trust for,'' ``as trustee for,'' ``payable-on-
death to,'' or any acronym therefor. For purposes of this requirement, 
``title'' includes the electronic deposit account records of the 
institution. (For example, the FDIC would recognize an account as a 
revocable trust account even if the title of the account signature card 
does not designate the account as a revocable trust account as long as 
the institution's electronic deposit account records identify (through a 
code or otherwise) the account as a revocable trust account.) The 
settlor of a revocable trust shall be presumed to own the funds 
deposited into the account.
    (2) For informal revocable trust accounts, the beneficiaries must be 
specifically named in the deposit account records of the insured 
depository institution.
    (c) Definition of beneficiary. For purposes of this section, a 
beneficiary includes a natural person as well as a charitable 
organization and other non-profit entity recognized as such under the 
Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
    (d) Interests of beneficiaries outside the definition of beneficiary 
in this section. If a beneficiary named in a trust covered by this 
section does not meet the definition of beneficiary in paragraph (c) of 
this section, the funds corresponding to that beneficiary shall be 
treated as the individually owned (single ownership) funds of the 
owner(s). As such, they shall be aggregated with any other single 
ownership accounts of such owner(s) and insured up to the SMDIA per 
owner. (Example: Account Owner ``A'' establishes a payable-on-death 
account naming a pet as beneficiary with a balance of $100,000. A also 
has an individual account at the same FDIC-insured institution with a 
balance of $175,000. Because the pet is not a ``beneficiary,'' the two 
accounts are aggregated and treated as a single ownership account. As a 
result, A is insured in the amount of $250,000, but is uninsured for the 
remaining $25,000.)
    (e) Revocable trust accounts with aggregate balances exceeding five 
times the SMDIA and naming more than five different beneficiaries. 
Notwithstanding the general coverage provisions in paragraph (a) of this 
section, for funds owned by an individual in one or more revocable trust 
accounts naming more than five different beneficiaries and whose 
aggregate balance is more than five times the SMDIA, the maximum 
revocable trust account coverage for the account owner shall be the 
greater of either: five times the SMDIA or the aggregate amount of the 
interests of each different beneficiary named in the trusts, to a limit 
of the SMDIA per different beneficiary. (Example 1: Account Owner ``A'' 
has a living trust with a balance of $1 million and names two friends, 
``B'' and ``C'' as beneficiaries. At the same FDIC-insured institution, 
A establishes a payable-on-death account, with a balance of $1 million 
naming his two cousins, ``D'' and ``E'' as beneficiaries. Coverage is 
determined under the general coverage provisions in paragraph (a) of 
this section, and not this paragraph (e). This is because all funds that 
A holds in both living trust accounts and payable-on-death accounts, at 
the same FDIC-insured institution, are aggregated for insurance 
purposes. Although A's aggregated balance of $2 million is more

[[Page 654]]

than five times the SMDIA, A names only four different beneficiaries, 
and coverage under this paragraph (e) applies only if there are more 
than five different beneficiaries. A is insured in the amount of $1 
million (4 beneficiaries times the SMDIA), and uninsured for the 
remaining $1 million.) (Example 2: Account Owner ``A'' has a living 
trust account with a balance of $1,500,000. Under the terms of the 
trust, upon A's death, A's three children are each entitled to $125,000, 
A's friend is entitled to $15,000, and a designated charity is entitled 
to $175,000. The trust also provides that the remainder of the trust 
assets shall belong to A's spouse. In this case, because the balance of 
the account exceeds $1,250,000 (5 times the SMDIA) and there are more 
than five different beneficiaries named in the trust, the maximum 
coverage available to A would be the greater of: $1,250,000 or the 
aggregate of each different beneficiary's interest to a limit of 
$250,000 per beneficiary. The beneficial interests in the trust for 
purposes of determining coverage are: $125,000 for each of the children 
(totaling $375,000), $15,000 for the friend, $175,000 for the charity, 
and $250,000 for the spouse (because the spouse's $935,000 is subject to 
the $250,000 per-beneficiary limitation). The aggregate beneficial 
interests total $815,000. Thus, the maximum coverage afforded to the 
account owner would be $1,250,000, the greater of $1,250,000 or 
$815,000.)
    (f) Co-owned revocable trust accounts. (1) Where an account 
described in paragraph (a) of this section is established by more than 
one owner, the respective interest of each account owner (which shall be 
deemed equal) shall be insured separately, per different beneficiary, up 
to the SMDIA, subject to the limitation imposed in paragraph (e) of this 
section. (Example 1: A and B, two individuals, establish a payable-on-
death account naming their three nieces as beneficiaries. Neither A nor 
B has any other revocable trust accounts at the same FDIC-insured 
institution. The maximum coverage afforded to A and B would be 
$1,500,000, determined by multiplying the number of owners (2) times the 
SMDIA ($250,000) times the number of different beneficiaries (3). In 
this example, A would be entitled to revocable trust coverage of 
$750,000 and B would be entitled to revocable trust coverage of 
$750,000.) (Example 2: A and B, two individuals, establish a payable-on-
death account naming their two children, two cousins, and a charity as 
beneficiaries. The balance in the account is $1,750,000. Neither A nor B 
has any other revocable trust accounts at the same FDIC-insured 
institution. The maximum coverage would be determined (under paragraph 
(a) of this section) by multiplying the number of account owners (2) 
times the number of different beneficiaries (5) times $250,000, totaling 
$2,500,000. Because the account balance ($1,750,000) is less than the 
maximum coverage amount ($2,500,000), the account would be fully 
insured.) (Example 3: A and B, two individuals, establish a living trust 
account with a balance of $3.75 million. Under the terms of the trust, 
upon the death of both A and B, each of their three children is entitled 
to $600,000, B's cousin is entitled to $380,000, A's friend is entitled 
to $70,000, and the remaining amount ($1,500,000) goes to a charity. 
Under paragraph (e) of this section, the maximum coverage, as to each 
co-owned account owner, would be the greater of $1,250,000 or the 
aggregate amount (as to each co-owner) of the interest of each different 
beneficiary named in the trust, to a limit of $250,000 per account owner 
per beneficiary. The beneficial interests in the trust considered for 
purposes of determining coverage for account owner A are: $750,000 for 
the children (each child's interest attributable to A, $300,000, is 
subject to the $250,000-per-beneficiary limitation), $190,000 for the 
cousin, $35,000 for the friend, and $250,000 for the charity (the 
charity's interest attributable to A, $750,000, is subject to the 
$250,000 per-beneficiary limitation). As to A, the aggregate amount of 
the beneficial interests eligible for deposit insurance coverage totals 
$1,225,000. Thus, the maximum coverage afforded to account co-owner A 
would be $1,250,000, which is the greater of $1,250,000 or the aggregate 
of all the beneficial interests attributable to A (limited to $250,000 
per beneficiary), which totaled slightly less at $1,225,000. Because B 
has equal ownership interest

[[Page 655]]

in the trust, the same analysis and coverage determination also would 
apply to B. Thus, of the total account balance of $3.75 million, $2.5 
million would be insured and $1.25 million would be uninsured.)
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (f)(1) of this section, where the 
owners of a co-owned revocable trust account are themselves the sole 
beneficiaries of the corresponding trust, the account shall be insured 
as a joint account under Sec. 330.9 and shall not be insured under the 
provisions of this section. (Example: If A and B establish a payable-on-
death account naming themselves as the sole beneficiaries of the 
account, the account will be insured as a joint account because the 
account does not satisfy the intent requirement (under paragraph (a) of 
this section) that the funds in the account belong to the named 
beneficiaries upon the owners' death. The beneficiaries are in fact the 
actual owners of the funds during the account owners' lifetimes.)
    (g) For deposit accounts held in connection with a living trust that 
provides for a life-estate interest for designated beneficiaries, the 
FDIC shall value each such life estate interest as the SMDIA for 
purposes of determining the insurance coverage available to the account 
owner under paragraph (e) of this section. (Example: Account Owner ``A'' 
has a living trust account with a balance of $1,500,000. Under the terms 
of the trust, A provides a life estate interest for his spouse. 
Moreover, A's three children are each entitled to $275,000, A's friend 
is entitled to $15,000, and a designated charity is entitled to 
$175,000. The trust also provides that the remainder of the trust assets 
shall belong to A's granddaughter. In this case, because the balance of 
the account exceeds $1,250,000 ((5) five times the SMDIA) and there are 
more than five different beneficiaries named in the trust, the maximum 
coverage available to A would be the greater of: $1,250,000 or the 
aggregate of each different beneficiary's interest to a limit of 
$250,000 per beneficiary. The beneficial interests in the trust 
considered for purposes of determining coverage are: $250,000 for the 
spouse's life estate, $750,000 for the children (because each child's 
$275,000 is subject to the $250,000 per-beneficiary limitation), $15,000 
for the friend, $175,000 for the charity, and $250,000 for the 
granddaughter (because the granddaughter's $310,000 remainder is limited 
by the $250,000 per-beneficiary limitation). The aggregate beneficial 
interests total $1,440,000. Thus, the maximum coverage afforded to the 
account owner would be $1,440,000, the greater of $1,250,000 or 
$1,440,000.)
    (h) Revocable trusts that become irrevocable trusts. Notwithstanding 
the provisions in section 330.13 on the insurance coverage of 
irrevocable trust accounts, if a revocable trust account converts in 
part or entirely to an irrevocable trust upon the death of one or more 
of the trust's owners, the trust account shall continue to be insured 
under the provisions of this section. (Example: Assume A and B have a 
trust account in connection with a living trust, of which they are joint 
grantors. If upon the death of either A or B the trust transforms into 
an irrevocable trust as to the deceased grantor's ownership in the 
trust, the account will continue to be insured under the provisions of 
this section.)
    (i) This section shall apply to all existing and future revocable 
trust accounts and all existing and future irrevocable trust accounts 
resulting from formal revocable trust accounts.

[74 FR 47716, Sept. 17, 2009]



Sec. 330.11  Accounts of a corporation, partnership or unincorporated
association.

    (a) Corporate accounts. (1) The deposit accounts of a corporation 
engaged in any ``independent activity'' (as defined in Sec. 330.1(g)) 
shall be added together and insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate. If 
a corporation has divisions or units which are not separately 
incorporated, the deposit accounts of those divisions or units shall be 
added to any other deposit accounts of the corporation. If a corporation 
maintains deposit accounts in a representative or fiduciary capacity, 
such accounts shall not be treated as the deposit accounts of the 
corporation but shall be treated as fiduciary accounts and insured in 
accordance with the provisions of Sec. 330.7.
    (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of this part, any trust or 
other business arrangement which has filed

[[Page 656]]

or is required to file a registration statement with the Securities and 
Exchange Commission pursuant to section 8 of the Investment Company Act 
of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-8) or that would be required so to register but 
for the fact it is not created under the laws of the United States or a 
state or but for sections 2(b), 3(c)(1), or 6(a)(1) of that act shall be 
deemed to be a corporation for purposes of determining deposit insurance 
coverage. An exception to this paragraph (a)(2) shall exist for any 
trust or other business arrangement established by a state or that is a 
state agency or state public instrumentality as part of a qualified 
tuition savings program under section 529 of the Internal Revenue Code 
(26 U.S.C. 529). A deposit account of such a trust or business 
arrangement shall not be deemed to be the deposit of a corporation 
provided that: The funds in the account may be traced to one or more 
particular investors or participants; and the existence of the trust 
relationships is disclosed in accordance with the requirements of 
Sec. 330.5. If these conditions are satisfied, each participant's funds 
shall be insured as a deposit account of the participant.
    (b) Partnership accounts. The deposit accounts of a partnership 
engaged in any ``independent activity'' (as defined in Sec. 330.1(g)) 
shall be added together and insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate. 
Such insurance coverage shall be separate from any insurance provided 
for individually owned (single ownership) accounts maintained by the 
individual partners. A partnership shall be deemed to exist, for 
purposes of this paragraph, any time there is an association of two or 
more persons or entities formed to carry on, as co-owners, an 
unincorporated business for profit.
    (c) Unincorporated association accounts. The deposit accounts of an 
unincorporated association engaged in any independent activity shall be 
added together and insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate, separately 
from the accounts of the person(s) or entity(ies) comprising the 
unincorporated association. An unincorporated association shall be 
deemed to exist, for purposes of this paragraph, whenever there is an 
association of two or more persons formed for some religious, 
educational, charitable, social or other noncommercial purpose.
    (d) Non-qualifying entities. The deposit accounts of an entity which 
is not engaged in an ``independent activity'' (as defined in 
Sec. 330.1(g)) shall be deemed to be owned by the person or persons 
owning the corporation or comprising the partnership or unincorporated 
association, and, for deposit insurance purposes, the interest of each 
person in such a deposit account shall be added to any other deposit 
accounts individually owned by that person and insured up to the SMDIA 
in the aggregate.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 70 FR 33692, June 9, 2005; 70 
FR 62059, Oct. 28, 2005; 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006]



Sec. 330.12  Accounts held by a depository institution as the trustee
of an irrevocable trust.

    (a) Separate insurance coverage. ``Trust funds'' (as defined in 
Sec. 330.1(q)) held by an insured depository institution in its capacity 
as trustee of an irrevocable trust, whether held in its trust 
department, held or deposited in any other department of the fiduciary 
institution, or deposited by the fiduciary institution in another 
insured depository institution, shall be insured up to the SMDIA for 
each owner or beneficiary represented. This insurance shall be separate 
from, and in addition to, the insurance provided for any other deposits 
of the owners or the beneficiaries.
    (b) Determination of interests. The insurance for funds held by an 
insured depository institution in its capacity as trustee of an 
irrevocable trust shall be determined in accordance with the following 
provisions:
    (1) Allocated funds of a trust estate. If trust funds of a 
particular ``trust estate'' (as defined in Sec. 330.1(p)) are allocated 
by the fiduciary and deposited, the insurance with respect to such trust 
estate shall be determined by ascertaining the amount of its funds 
allocated, deposited and remaining to the credit of the claimant as 
fiduciary at the insured depository institution in default.
    (2) Interest of a trust estate in unallocated trust funds. If funds 
of a particular trust estate are commingled with funds of other trust 
estates and

[[Page 657]]

deposited by the fiduciary institution in one or more insured depository 
institutions to the credit of the depository institution as fiduciary, 
without allocation of specific amounts from a particular trust estate to 
an account in such institution(s), the percentage interest of that trust 
estate in the unallocated deposits in any institution in default is the 
same as that trust estate's percentage interest in the entire commingled 
investment pool.
    (c) Limitation on applicability. This section shall not apply to 
deposits of trust funds belonging to a trust which is classified as a 
corporation under Sec. 330.11(a)(2).

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 76 
FR 41395, July 14, 2011]



Sec. 330.13  Irrevocable trust accounts.

    (a) General rule. Funds representing the ``non-contingent trust 
interest(s)'' (as defined in Sec. 330.1(m)) of a beneficiary deposited 
into one or more deposit accounts established pursuant to one or more 
irrevocable trust agreements created by the same settlor(s) (grantor(s)) 
shall be added together and insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate. 
Such insurance coverage shall be separate from the coverage provided for 
other accounts maintained by the settlor(s), trustee(s) or 
beneficiary(ies) of the irrevocable trust(s) at the same insured 
depository institution. Each ``trust interest'' (as defined in 
Sec. 330.1(r)) in any irrevocable trust established by two or more 
settlors shall be deemed to be derived from each settlor pro rata to his 
or her contribution to the trust.
    (b) Treatment of contingent trust interests. In the case of any 
trust in which certain trust interests do not qualify as non-contingent 
trust interests, the funds representing those interests shall be added 
together and insured up to the SMDIA in the aggregate. Such insurance 
coverage shall be in addition to the coverage provided for the funds 
representing non-contingent trust interests which are insured pursuant 
to paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) Commingled accounts of bankruptcy trustees. Whenever a 
bankruptcy trustee appointed under title 11 of the United States Code 
commingles the funds of various bankruptcy estates in the same account 
at an insured depository institution, the funds of each title 11 
bankruptcy estate will be added together and insured up to the SMDIA, 
separately from the funds of any other such estate.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 76 
FR 41395, July 14, 2011]



Sec. 330.14  Retirement and other employee benefit plan accounts.

    (a) ``Pass-through'' insurance. Any deposits of an employee benefit 
plan in an insured depository institution shall be insured on a ``pass-
through'' basis, in the amount of up to the SMDIA for the non-contingent 
interest of each plan participant, provided the rules in Sec. 330.5 are 
satisfied. Deposits eligible for coverage under paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section that also are deposits of a employee benefit plan or deposits of 
an deferred compensation plan described in section 457 of the Internal 
Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C. 457) in an insured depository 
institution shall be insured on a ``pass-through'' basis in the amount 
of $250,000 for the non-contingent interest of each plan participant, 
provided the rules in Sec. 330.5 are satisfied.
    (b) Aggregation--(1) Multiple plans. Funds representing the non-
contingent interests of a beneficiary in an employee benefit plan, or 
eligible deferred compensation plan described in section 457 of the 
Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C. 457), which are deposited in 
one or more deposit accounts shall be aggregated with any other 
deposited funds representing such interests of the same beneficiary in 
other employee benefit plans, or eligible deferred compensation plans 
described in section 457 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, 
established by the same employer or employee organization.
    (2) Certain retirement accounts. Deposits in an insured depository 
institution made in connection with the following types of retirement 
plans shall be aggregated and insured in the amount of up to $250,000 
per participant:
    (i) Any individual retirement account described in section 408(a) of 
the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C. 408(a)):

[[Page 658]]

    (ii) Any eligible deferred compensation plan described in section 
457 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C. 457); and
    (iii) Any individual account plan defined in section 3(34) of the 
Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) (29 U.S.C. 1002) and any 
plan described in section 401(d) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 
(26 U.S.C. 401(d)), to the extent that participants and beneficiaries 
under such plans have the right to direct the investment of assets held 
in individual accounts maintained on their behalf by the plans.
    (c) Determination of interests--(1) Defined contribution plans. The 
value of an employee's non-contingent interest in a defined contribution 
plan shall be deemed to be the employee's account balance as of the date 
of default of the insured depository institution, regardless of whether 
said amount was derived, in whole or in part, from contributions of the 
employee and/or the employer to the account.
    (2) Defined benefit plans. The value of an employee's non-contingent 
interest in a defined benefit plan shall be deemed to be the present 
value of the employee's interest in the plan, evaluated in accordance 
with the method of calculation ordinarily used under such plan, as of 
the date of default of the insured depository institution.
    (3) Amounts taken into account. For the purposes of applying the 
rule under paragraph (b)(2) of this section, only the present vested and 
ascertainable interests of each participant in an employee benefit plan 
or ``457 Plan,'' excluding any remainder interest created by, or as a 
result of, the plan, shall be taken into account in determining the 
amount of deposit insurance accorded to the deposits of the plan.
    (d) Treatment of contingent interests. In the event that employees' 
interests in an employee benefit plan are not capable of evaluation in 
accordance with the provisions of this section, or an account 
established for any such plan includes amounts for future participants 
in the plan, payment by the FDIC with respect to all such interests 
shall not exceed the SMDIA in the aggregate.
    (e) Overfunded pension plan deposits. Any portion of an employee 
benefit plan's deposits which is not attributable to the interests of 
the beneficiaries under the plan shall be deemed attributable to the 
overfunded portion of the plan's assets and shall be aggregated and 
insured up to the SMDIA, separately from any other deposits.
    (f) Definitions of ``depositor'', ``employee benefit plan'', 
``employee organization'' and ``non-contingent interest''. Except as 
otherwise indicated in this section, for purposes of this section:
    (1) The term depositor means the person(s) administering or managing 
an employee benefit plan.
    (2) The term employee benefit plan has the same meaning given to 
such term in section 3(3) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act 
of 1974 (ERISA) (29 U.S.C. 1002) and includes any plan described in 
section 401(d) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986.
    (3) The term employee organization means any labor union, 
organization, employee representation committee, association, group, or 
plan, in which employees participate and which exists for the purpose, 
in whole or in part, of dealing with employers concerning an employee 
benefit plan, or other matters incidental to employment relationships; 
or any employees' beneficiary association organized for the purpose, in 
whole or in part, of establishing such a plan.
    (4) The term non-contingent interest means an interest capable of 
determination without evaluation of contingencies except for those 
covered by the present worth tables and rules of calculation for their 
use set forth in Sec. 20.2031-7 of the Federal Estate Tax Regulations 
(26 CFR 20.2031-7) or any similar present worth or life expectancy 
tables as may be published by the Internal Revenue Service.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 64 FR 15657, Apr. 1, 1999; 71 
FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006; 71 FR 53550, Sept. 12, 2006]



Sec. 330.15  Accounts held by government depositors.

    (a) Extent of insurance coverage--(1) Accounts of the United States. 
Each official custodian of funds of the United States lawfully 
depositing such funds in an insured depository institution

[[Page 659]]

shall be separately insured in the amount of:
    (i) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all time and savings 
deposits; and
    (ii) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all demand deposits.
    (2) Accounts of a state, county, municipality or political 
subdivision. (i) Each official custodian of funds of any state of the 
United States, or any county, municipality, or political subdivision 
thereof, lawfully depositing such funds in an insured depository 
institution in the state comprising the public unit or wherein the 
public unit is located (including any insured depository institution 
having a branch in said state) shall be separately insured in the amount 
of:
    (A) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all time and savings 
deposits; and
    (B) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all demand deposits.
    (ii) In addition, each such official custodian depositing such funds 
in an insured depository institution outside of the state comprising the 
public unit or wherein the public unit is located, shall be insured in 
the amount of up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all deposits, 
regardless of whether they are time, savings or demand deposits.
    (3) Accounts of the District of Columbia. (i) Each official 
custodian of funds of the District of Columbia lawfully depositing such 
funds in an insured depository institution in the District of Columbia 
(including an insured depository institution having a branch in the 
District of Columbia) shall be separately insured in the amount of:
    (A) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all time and savings 
deposits; and
    (B) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all demand deposits.
    (ii) In addition, each such official custodian depositing such funds 
in an insured depository institution outside of the District of Columbia 
shall be insured in the amount of up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for 
all deposits, regardless of whether they are time, savings or demand 
deposits.
    (4) Accounts of the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico and other government 
possessions and territories. (i) Each official custodian of funds of the 
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, the 
Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Guam, or The Commonwealth of the 
Northern Mariana Islands, or of any county, municipality, or political 
subdivision thereof lawfully depositing such funds in an insured 
depository institution in Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American 
Samoa, the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Guam, or The 
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, respectively, shall be 
separately insured in the amount of:
    (A) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all time and savings 
deposits; and
    (B) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all demand deposits.
    (ii) In addition, each such official custodian depositing such funds 
in an insured depository institution outside of the commonwealth, 
possession or territory comprising the public unit or wherein the public 
unit is located, shall be insured in the amount of up to the SMDIA in 
the aggregate for all deposits, regardless of whether they are time, 
savings or demand deposits.
    (5) Accounts of an Indian tribe. Each official custodian of funds of 
an Indian tribe (as defined in 25 U.S.C. 1452(c)), including an agency 
thereof having official custody of tribal funds, lawfully depositing the 
same in an insured depository institution shall be separately insured in 
the amount of:
    (i) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all time and savings 
deposits; and
    (ii) Up to the SMDIA in the aggregate for all demand deposits.
    (b) Rules relating to the ``official custodian''--(1) Qualifications 
for an ``official custodian''. In order to qualify as an ``official 
custodian'' for the purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, such 
custodian must have plenary authority, including control, over funds 
owned by the public unit which the custodian is appointed or elected to 
serve. Control of public funds includes possession, as well as the 
authority to establish accounts for such funds in insured depository 
institutions and to make deposits, withdrawals, and disbursements of 
such funds.
    (2) Official custodian of the funds of more than one public unit. 
For the purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, if

[[Page 660]]

the same person is an official custodian of the funds of more than one 
public unit, he or she shall be separately insured with respect to the 
funds held by him or her for each such public unit, but shall not be 
separately insured by virtue of holding different offices in such public 
unit or, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, holding 
such funds for different purposes.
    (3) Split of authority or control over public unit funds. If the 
exercise of authority or control over the funds of a public unit 
requires action by, or the consent of, two or more officers, employees, 
or agents of such public unit, then they will be treated as one 
``official custodian'' for the purposes of this section.
    (c) Public bond issues. Where an officer, agent or employee of a 
public unit has custody of certain funds which by law or under a bond 
indenture are required to be set aside to discharge a debt owed to the 
holders of notes or bonds issued by the public unit, any deposit of such 
funds in an insured depository institution shall be deemed to be a 
deposit by a trustee of trust funds of which the noteholders or 
bondholders are pro rata beneficiaries, and the beneficial interest of 
each noteholder or bondholder in the deposit shall be separately insured 
up to the SMDIA.
    (d) Definition of ``political subdivision''. The term ``political 
subdivision'' includes drainage, irrigation, navigation, improvement, 
levee, sanitary, school or power districts, and bridge or port 
authorities and other special districts created by state statute or 
compacts between the states. It also includes any subdivision of a 
public unit mentioned in paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3) and (a)(4) of this 
section or any principal department of such public unit:
    (1) The creation of which subdivision or department has been 
expressly authorized by the law of such public unit;
    (2) To which some functions of government have been delegated by 
such law; and
    (3) Which is empowered to exercise exclusive control over funds for 
its exclusive use.

[63 FR 25756, May 11, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 14631, Mar. 23, 2006]



Sec. 330.16  [Reserved]



Sec. 330.101  Premiums.

    This interpretive rule describes certain payments that are not 
deemed to be ``interest'' as defined in Sec. 330.1(k).
    (a) Premiums, whether in the form of merchandise, credit, or cash, 
given by a bank to the holder of a deposit will not be regarded as 
``interest'' as defined in Sec. 330.1(k) if:
    (1) The premium is given to the depositor only at the time of the 
opening of a new account or an addition to an existing account;
    (2) No more than two premiums per deposit are given in any twelve-
month interval; and
    (3) The value of the premium (in the case of merchandise, the total 
cost to the bank, including shipping, warehousing, packaging, and 
handling costs) does not exceed $10 for a deposit of less than $5,000 or 
$20 for a deposit of $5,000 or more.
    (b) The costs of premiums may not be averaged.
    (c) A bank may not solicit funds for deposit on the basis that the 
bank will divide the funds into several accounts for the purpose of 
enabling the bank to pay the depositor more than two premiums within a 
twelve-month interval on the solicited funds.
    (d) The bank must retain sufficient information for examiners to 
determine that the requirements of this section have been satisfied.
    (e) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this section, any premium that 
is not, directly or indirectly, related to or dependent on the balance 
in a demand deposit account and the duration of the account balance 
shall not be considered the payment of interest on a demand deposit 
account and shall not be subject to the limitations in paragraph (a) of 
this section.

[76 FR 41395, July 14, 2011]

                           PART 331 [RESERVED]



PART 332_PRIVACY OF CONSUMER FINANCIAL INFORMATION--Table of Contents



Sec.
332.1  Purpose and scope.

[[Page 661]]

332.2  Model privacy form and examples.
332.3  Definitions.

                  Subpart A_Privacy and Opt Out Notices

332.4  Initial privacy notice to consumers required.
332.5  Annual privacy notice to customers required.
332.6  Information to be included in privacy notices.
332.7  Form of opt out notice to consumers; opt out methods.
332.8  Revised privacy notices.
332.9  Delivering privacy and opt out notices.

                     Subpart B_Limits on Disclosures

332.10  Limits on disclosure of nonpublic personal information to 
          nonaffiliated third parties.
332.11  Limits on redisclosure and reuse of information.
332.12  Limits on sharing account number information for marketing 
          purposes.

                          Subpart C_Exceptions

332.13  Exception to opt out requirements for service providers and 
          joint marketing.
332.14  Exceptions to notice and opt out requirements for processing and 
          servicing transactions.
332.15  Other exceptions to notice and opt out requirements.

            Subpart D_Relation to Other Laws; Effective Date

332.16  Protection of Fair Credit Reporting Act.
332.17  Relation to State laws.
332.18  Effective date; transition rule.

Appendix A to Part 332--Model Privacy Form

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819 (Seventh and Tenth); 15 U.S.C. 6801 et 
seq.

    Source: 65 FR 35216, June 1, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 332.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Purpose. This part governs the treatment of nonpublic personal 
information about consumers by the financial institutions listed in 
paragraph (b) of this section. This part:
    (1) Requires a financial institution to provide notice to customers 
about its privacy policies and practices;
    (2) Describes the conditions under which a financial institution may 
disclose nonpublic personal information about consumers to nonaffiliated 
third parties; and
    (3) Provides a method for consumers to prevent a financial 
institution from disclosing that information to most nonaffiliated third 
parties by ``opting out'' of that disclosure, subject to the exceptions 
in Secs. 332.13, 332.14, and 332.15.
    (b) Scope. (1) This part applies only to nonpublic personal 
information about individuals who obtain financial products or services 
primarily for personal, family, or household purposes from the 
institutions listed below. This part does not apply to information about 
companies or about individuals who obtain financial products or services 
for business, commercial, or agricultural purposes. This part applies to 
the United States offices of entities for which the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation (FDIC) has primary federal supervisory authority. 
They are referred to in this part as ``you.'' These are: banks insured 
by the FDIC (other than members of the Federal Reserve System), insured 
state branches of foreign banks, and certain subsidiaries of such 
entities.
    (2) Nothing in this part modifies, limits, or supersedes the 
standards governing individually identifiable health information 
promulgated by the Secretary of Health and Human Services under the 
authority of sections 262 and 264 of the Health Insurance Portability 
and Accountability Act of 1996 (42 U.S.C. 1320d-1320d-8).



Sec. 332.2  Model privacy form and examples.

    (a) Model privacy form. Use of the model privacy form in appendix A 
of this part, consistent with the instructions in appendix A, 
constitutes compliance with the notice content requirements of 
Secs. 332.6 and 332.7 of this part, although use of the model privacy 
form is not required.
    (b) Examples. The examples in this part are not exclusive. 
Compliance with an example, to the extent applicable, constitutes 
compliance with this part.

[74 FR 62935, Dec. 1, 2009]



Sec. 332.3  Definitions.

    As used in this part, unless the context requires otherwise:
    (a) Affiliate means any company that controls, is controlled by, or 
is under

[[Page 662]]

common control with another company.
    (b)(1) Clear and conspicuous means that a notice is reasonably 
understandable and designed to call attention to the nature and 
significance of the information in the notice.
    (2) Examples--(i) Reasonably understandable. You make your notice 
reasonably understandable if you:
    (A) Present the information in the notice in clear, concise 
sentences, paragraphs, and sections;
    (B) Use short explanatory sentences or bullet lists whenever 
possible;
    (C) Use definite, concrete, everyday words and active voice whenever 
possible;
    (D) Avoid multiple negatives;
    (E) Avoid legal and highly technical business terminology whenever 
possible; and
    (F) Avoid explanations that are imprecise and readily subject to 
different interpretations.
    (ii) Designed to call attention. You design your notice to call 
attention to the nature and significance of the information in it if 
you:
    (A) Use a plain-language heading to call attention to the notice;
    (B) Use a typeface and type size that are easy to read;
    (C) Provide wide margins and ample line spacing;
    (D) Use boldface or italics for key words; and
    (E) In a form that combines your notice with other information, use 
distinctive type size, style, and graphic devices, such as shading or 
sidebars, when you combine your notice with other information.
    (iii) Notices on web sites. If you provide a notice on a web page, 
you design your notice to call attention to the nature and significance 
of the information in it if you use text or visual cues to encourage 
scrolling down the page if necessary to view the entire notice and 
ensure that other elements on the web site (such as text, graphics, 
hyperlinks, or sound) do not distract attention from the notice, and you 
either:
    (A) Place the notice on a screen that consumers frequently access, 
such as a page on which transactions are conducted; or
    (B) Place a link on a screen that consumers frequently access, such 
as a page on which transactions are conducted, that connects directly to 
the notice and is labeled appropriately to convey the importance, 
nature, and relevance of the notice.
    (c) Collect means to obtain information that you organize or can 
retrieve by the name of an individual or by identifying number, symbol, 
or other identifying particular assigned to the individual, irrespective 
of the source of the underlying information.
    (d) Company means any corporation, limited liability company, 
business trust, general or limited partnership, association, or similar 
organization.
    (e)(1) Consumer means an individual who obtains or has obtained a 
financial product or service from you that is to be used primarily for 
personal, family, or household purposes, or that individual's legal 
representative.
    (2) Examples--(i) An individual who applies to you for credit for 
personal, family, or household purposes is a consumer of a financial 
service, regardless of whether the credit is extended.
    (ii) An individual who provides nonpublic personal information to 
you in order to obtain a determination about whether he or she may 
qualify for a loan to be used primarily for personal, family, or 
household purposes is a consumer of a financial service, regardless of 
whether the loan is extended.
    (iii) An individual who provides nonpublic personal information to 
you in connection with obtaining or seeking to obtain financial, 
investment, or economic advisory services is a consumer regardless of 
whether you establish a continuing advisory relationship.
    (iv) If you hold ownership or servicing rights to an individual's 
loan that is used primarily for personal, family, or household purposes, 
the individual is your consumer, even if you hold those rights in 
conjunction with one or more other institutions. (The individual is also 
a consumer with respect to the other financial institutions involved.) 
An individual who has a loan in which you have ownership or servicing 
rights is your consumer, even if you, or another institution with those 
rights, hire an agent to collect on the loan.

[[Page 663]]

    (v) An individual who is a consumer of another financial institution 
is not your consumer solely because you act as agent for, or provide 
processing or other services to, that financial institution.
    (vi) An individual is not your consumer solely because he or she has 
designated you as trustee for a trust.
    (vii) An individual is not your consumer solely because he or she is 
a beneficiary of a trust for which you are a trustee.
    (viii) An individual is not your consumer solely because he or she 
is a participant or a beneficiary of an employee benefit plan that you 
sponsor or for which you act as a trustee or fiduciary.
    (f) Consumer reporting agency has the same meaning as in section 
603(f) of the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681a(f)).
    (g) Control of a company means:
    (1) Ownership, control, or power to vote 25 percent or more of the 
outstanding shares of any class of voting security of the company, 
directly or indirectly, or acting through one or more other persons;
    (2) Control in any manner over the election of a majority of the 
directors, trustees, or general partners (or individuals exercising 
similar functions) of the company; or
    (3) The power to exercise, directly or indirectly, a controlling 
influence over the management or policies of the company, as the FDIC 
determines.
    (h) Customer means a consumer who has a customer relationship with 
you.
    (i)(1) Customer relationship means a continuing relationship between 
a consumer and you under which you provide one or more financial 
products or services to the consumer that are to be used primarily for 
personal, family, or household purposes.
    (2) Examples--(i) Continuing relationship. A consumer has a 
continuing relationship with you if the consumer:
    (A) Has a deposit or investment account with you;
    (B) Obtains a loan from you;
    (C) Has a loan for which you own the servicing rights;
    (D) Purchases an insurance product from you;
    (E) Holds an investment product through you, such as when you act as 
a custodian for securities or for assets in an Individual Retirement 
Arrangement;
    (F) Enters into an agreement or understanding with you whereby you 
undertake to arrange or broker a home mortgage loan for the consumer;
    (G) Enters into a lease of personal property with you; or
    (H) Obtains financial, investment, or economic advisory services 
from you for a fee.
    (ii) No continuing relationship. A consumer does not, however, have 
a continuing relationship with you if:
    (A) The consumer obtains a financial product or service only in 
isolated transactions, such as using your ATM to withdraw cash from an 
account at another financial institution or purchasing a cashier's check 
or money order;
    (B) You sell the consumer's loan and do not retain the rights to 
service that loan; or
    (C) You sell the consumer airline tickets, travel insurance, or 
traveler's checks in isolated transactions.
    (j) Federal functional regulator means:
    (1) The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System;
    (2) The Office of the Comptroller of the Currency;
    (3) The Board of Directors of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation;
    (4) The Director of the Office of Thrift Supervision;
    (5) The National Credit Union Administration Board; and
    (6) The Securities and Exchange Commission.
    (k)(1) Financial institution means any institution the business of 
which is engaging in activities that are financial in nature or 
incidental to such financial activities as described in section 4(k) of 
the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)).
    (2) Financial institution does not include:
    (i) Any person or entity with respect to any financial activity that 
is subject to the jurisdiction of the Commodity Futures Trading 
Commission under the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1 et seq.);

[[Page 664]]

    (ii) The Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation or any entity 
chartered and operating under the Farm Credit Act of 1971 (12 U.S.C. 
2001 et seq.); or
    (iii) Institutions chartered by Congress specifically to engage in 
securitizations, secondary market sales (including sales of servicing 
rights), or similar transactions related to a transaction of a consumer, 
as long as such institutions do not sell or transfer nonpublic personal 
information to a nonaffiliated third party.
    (l)(1) Financial product or service means any product or service 
that a financial holding company could offer by engaging in an activity 
that is financial in nature or incidental to such a financial activity 
under section 4(k) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 
1843(k)).
    (2) Financial service includes your evaluation or brokerage of 
information that you collect in connection with a request or an 
application from a consumer for a financial product or service.
    (m)(1) Nonaffiliated third party means any person except:
    (i) Your affiliate; or
    (ii) A person employed jointly by you and any company that is not 
your affiliate (but nonaffiliated third party includes the other company 
that jointly employs the person).
    (2) Nonaffiliated third party includes any company that is an 
affiliate solely by virtue of your or your affiliate's direct or 
indirect ownership or control of the company in conducting merchant 
banking or investment banking activities of the type described in 
section 4(k)(4)(H) or insurance company investment activities of the 
type described in section 4(k)(4)(I) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 
1956 (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(4)(H) and (I)).
    (n)(1) Nonpublic personal information means:
    (i) Personally identifiable financial information; and
    (ii) Any list, description, or other grouping of consumers (and 
publicly available information pertaining to them) that is derived using 
any personally identifiable financial information that is not publicly 
available.
    (2) Nonpublic personal information does not include:
    (i) Publicly available information, except as included on a list 
described in paragraph (n)(1)(ii) of this section; or
    (ii) Any list, description, or other grouping of consumers (and 
publicly available information pertaining to them) that is derived 
without using any personally identifiable financial information that is 
not publicly available.
    (3) Examples of lists--(i) Nonpublic personal information includes 
any list of individuals' names and street addresses that is derived in 
whole or in part using personally identifiable financial information 
that is not publicly available, such as account numbers.
    (ii) Nonpublic personal information does not include any list of 
individuals' names and addresses that contains only publicly available 
information, is not derived in whole or in part using personally 
identifiable financial information that is not publicly available, and 
is not disclosed in a manner that indicates that any of the individuals 
on the list is a consumer of a financial institution.
    (o)(1) Personally identifiable financial information means any 
information:
    (i) A consumer provides to you to obtain a financial product or 
service from you;
    (ii) About a consumer resulting from any transaction involving a 
financial product or service between you and a consumer; or
    (iii) You otherwise obtain about a consumer in connection with 
providing a financial product or service to that consumer.
    (2) Examples--(i) Information included. Personally identifiable 
financial information includes:
    (A) Information a consumer provides to you on an application to 
obtain a loan, credit card, or other financial product or service;
    (B) Account balance information, payment history, overdraft history, 
and credit or debit card purchase information;
    (C) The fact that an individual is or has been one of your customers 
or has obtained a financial product or service from you;

[[Page 665]]

    (D) Any information about your consumer if it is disclosed in a 
manner that indicates that the individual is or has been your consumer;
    (E) Any information that a consumer provides to you or that you or 
your agent otherwise obtain in connection with collecting on a loan or 
servicing a loan;
    (F) Any information you collect through an Internet ``cookie'' (an 
information collecting device from a web server); and
    (G) Information from a consumer report.
    (ii) Information not included. Personally identifiable financial 
information does not include:
    (A) A list of names and addresses of customers of an entity that is 
not a financial institution; and
    (B) Information that does not identify a consumer, such as aggregate 
information or blind data that does not contain personal identifiers 
such as account numbers, names, or addresses.
    (p)(1) Publicly available information means any information that you 
have a reasonable basis to believe is lawfully made available to the 
general public from:
    (i) Federal, State, or local government records;
    (ii) Widely distributed media; or
    (iii) Disclosures to the general public that are required to be made 
by Federal, State, or local law.
    (2) Reasonable basis. You have a reasonable basis to believe that 
information is lawfully made available to the general public if you have 
taken steps to determine:
    (i) That the information is of the type that is available to the 
general public; and
    (ii) Whether an individual can direct that the information not be 
made available to the general public and, if so, that your consumer has 
not done so.
    (3) Examples--(i) Government records. Publicly available information 
in government records includes information in government real estate 
records and security interest filings.
    (ii) Widely distributed media. Publicly available information from 
widely distributed media includes information from a telephone book, a 
television or radio program, a newspaper, or a web site that is 
available to the general public on an unrestricted basis. A web site is 
not restricted merely because an Internet service provider or a site 
operator requires a fee or a password, so long as access is available to 
the general public.
    (iii) Reasonable basis. (A) You have a reasonable basis to believe 
that mortgage information is lawfully made available to the general 
public if you have determined that the information is of the type 
included on the public record in the jurisdiction where the mortgage 
would be recorded.
    (B) You have a reasonable basis to believe that an individual's 
telephone number is lawfully made available to the general public if you 
have located the telephone number in the telephone book or the consumer 
has informed you that the telephone number is not unlisted.
    (q) You means:
    (1) A bank insured by the FDIC (other than a member of the Federal 
Reserve System);
    (2) An insured state branch of a foreign bank; and
    (3) A subsidiary of either such entity except:
    (i) A broker or dealer that is registered under the Securities and 
Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.);
    (ii) A registered investment adviser, properly registered by or on 
behalf of either the Securities Exchange Commission or any State, with 
respect to its investment advisory activities and its activities 
incidental to those investment advisory activities;
    (iii) An investment company that is registered under the Investment 
Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.); or
    (iv) An insurance company, with respect to its insurance activities 
and its activities incidental to those insurance activities, that is 
subject to supervision by a State insurance regulator.

[[Page 666]]



                  Subpart A_Privacy and Opt Out Notices



Sec. 332.4  Initial privacy notice to consumers required.

    (a) Initial notice requirement. You must provide a clear and 
conspicuous notice that accurately reflects your privacy policies and 
practices to:
    (1) Customer. An individual who becomes your customer, not later 
than when you establish a customer relationship, except as provided in 
paragraph (e) of this section; and
    (2) Consumer. A consumer, before you disclose any nonpublic personal 
information about the consumer to any nonaffiliated third party, if you 
make such a disclosure other than as authorized by Secs. 332.14 and 
332.15.
    (b) When initial notice to a consumer is not required. You are not 
required to provide an initial notice to a consumer under paragraph (a) 
of this section if:
    (1) You do not disclose any nonpublic personal information about the 
consumer to any nonaffiliated third party, other than as authorized by 
Secs. 332.14 and 332.15; and
    (2) You do not have a customer relationship with the consumer.
    (c) When you establish a customer relationship--(1) General rule. 
You establish a customer relationship when you and the consumer enter 
into a continuing relationship.
    (2) Special rule for loans. You establish a customer relationship 
with a consumer when you originate a loan to the consumer for personal, 
family, or household purposes. If you subsequently transfer the 
servicing rights to that loan to another financial institution, the 
customer relationship transfers with the servicing rights.
    (3)(i) Examples of establishing customer relationship. You establish 
a customer relationship when the consumer:
    (A) Opens a credit card account with you;
    (B) Executes the contract to open a deposit account with you, 
obtains credit from you, or purchases insurance from you;
    (C) Agrees to obtain financial, economic, or investment advisory 
services from you for a fee; or
    (D) Becomes your client for the purpose of your providing credit 
counseling or tax preparation services.
    (ii) Examples of loan rule. You establish a customer relationship 
with a consumer who obtains a loan for personal, family, or household 
purposes when you:
    (A) Originate the loan to the consumer; or
    (B) Purchase the servicing rights to the consumer's loan.
    (d) Existing customers. When an existing customer obtains a new 
financial product or service from you that is to be used primarily for 
personal, family, or household purposes, you satisfy the initial notice 
requirements of paragraph (a) of this section as follows:
    (1) You may provide a revised privacy notice, under Sec. 332.8, that 
covers the customer's new financial product or service; or
    (2) If the initial, revised, or annual notice that you most recently 
provided to that customer was accurate with respect to the new financial 
product or service, you do not need to provide a new privacy notice 
under paragraph (a) of this section.
    (e) Exceptions to allow subsequent delivery of notice. (1) You may 
provide the initial notice required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section 
within a reasonable time after you establish a customer relationship if:
    (i) Establishing the customer relationship is not at the customer's 
election; or
    (ii) Providing notice not later than when you establish a customer 
relationship would substantially delay the customer's transaction and 
the customer agrees to receive the notice at a later time.
    (2) Examples of exceptions--(i) Not at customer's election. 
Establishing a customer relationship is not at the customer's election 
if you acquire a customer's deposit liability or the servicing rights to 
a customer's loan from another financial institution and the customer 
does not have a choice about your acquisition.
    (ii) Substantial delay of customer's transaction. Providing notice 
not later than when you establish a customer relationship would 
substantially delay the customer's transaction when:

[[Page 667]]

    (A) You and the individual agree over the telephone to enter into a 
customer relationship involving prompt delivery of the financial product 
or service; or
    (B) You establish a customer relationship with an individual under a 
program authorized by title IV of the Higher Education Act of 1965 (20 
U.S.C. 1070 et seq.) or similar student loan programs where loan 
proceeds are disbursed promptly without prior communication between you 
and the customer.
    (iii) No substantial delay of customer's transaction. Providing 
notice not later than when you establish a customer relationship would 
not substantially delay the customer's transaction when the relationship 
is initiated in person at your office or through other means by which 
the customer may view the notice, such as on a web site.
    (f) Delivery. When you are required to deliver an initial privacy 
notice by this section, you must deliver it according to Sec. 332.9. If 
you use a short-form initial notice for non-customers according to 
Sec. 332.6(d), you may deliver your privacy notice according to 
Sec. 332.6(d)(3).



Sec. 332.5  Annual privacy notice to customers required.

    (a)(1) General rule. You must provide a clear and conspicuous notice 
to customers that accurately reflects your privacy policies and 
practices not less than annually during the continuation of the customer 
relationship. Annually means at least once in any period of 12 
consecutive months during which that relationship exists. You may define 
the 12-consecutive-month period, but you must apply it to the customer 
on a consistent basis.
    (2) Example. You provide a notice annually if you define the 12-
consecutive-month period as a calendar year and provide the annual 
notice to the customer once in each calendar year following the calendar 
year in which you provided the initial notice. For example, if a 
customer opens an account on any day of year 1, you must provide an 
annual notice to that customer by December 31 of year 2.
    (b)(1) Termination of customer relationship. You are not required to 
provide an annual notice to a former customer.
    (2) Examples. Your customer becomes a former customer when:
    (i) In the case of a deposit account, the account is inactive under 
your policies;
    (ii) In the case of a closed-end loan, the customer pays the loan in 
full, you charge off the loan, or you sell the loan without retaining 
servicing rights;
    (iii) In the case of a credit card relationship or other open-end 
credit relationship, you no longer provide any statements or notices to 
the customer concerning that relationship or you sell the credit card 
receivables without retaining servicing rights; or
    (iv) You have not communicated with the customer about the 
relationship for a period of 12 consecutive months, other than to 
provide annual privacy notices or promotional material.
    (c) Special rule for loans. If you do not have a customer 
relationship with a consumer under the special rule for loans in 
Sec. 332.4(c)(2), then you need not provide an annual notice to that 
consumer under this section.
    (d) Delivery. When you are required to deliver an annual privacy 
notice by this section, you must deliver it according to Sec. 332.9.



Sec. 332.6  Information to be included in privacy notices.

    (a) General rule. The initial, annual and revised privacy notices 
that you provide under Secs. 332.4, 332.5, and 332.8 must include each 
of the following items of information, in addition to any other 
information you wish to provide, that applies to you and to the 
consumers to whom you send your privacy notice:
    (1) The categories of nonpublic personal information that you 
collect;
    (2) The categories of nonpublic personal information that you 
disclose;
    (3) The categories of affiliates and nonaffiliated third parties to 
whom you disclose nonpublic personal information, other than those 
parties to whom you disclose information under Secs. 332.14 and 332.15;
    (4) The categories of nonpublic personal information about your 
former customers that you disclose and the categories of affiliates and 
nonaffiliated third parties to whom you

[[Page 668]]

disclose nonpublic personal information about your former customers, 
other than those parties to whom you disclose information under 
Secs. 332.14 and 332.15;
    (5) If you disclose nonpublic personal information to a 
nonaffiliated third party under Sec. 332.13 (and no other exception in 
Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 applies to that disclosure), a separate statement 
of the categories of information you disclose and the categories of 
third parties with whom you have contracted;
    (6) An explanation of the consumer's right under Sec. 332.10(a) to 
opt out of the disclosure of nonpublic personal information to 
nonaffiliated third parties, including the method(s) by which the 
consumer may exercise that right at that time;
    (7) Any disclosures that you make under section 603(d)(2)(A)(iii) of 
the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681a(d)(2)(A)(iii)) (that is, 
notices regarding the ability to opt out of disclosures of information 
among affiliates);
    (8) Your policies and practices with respect to protecting the 
confidentiality and security of nonpublic personal information; and
    (9) Any disclosure that you make under paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (b) Description of nonaffiliated third parties subject to 
exceptions. If you disclose nonpublic personal information to third 
parties as authorized under Secs. 332.14 and 332.15, you are not 
required to list those exceptions in the initial or annual privacy 
notices required by Secs. 332.4 and 332.5. When describing the 
categories with respect to those parties, it is sufficient to state that 
you make disclosures to other nonaffiliated companies:
    (1) For your everyday business purposes, such as [include all that 
apply] to process transactions, maintain account(s), respond to court 
orders and legal investigations, or report to credit bureaus; or
    (2) As permitted by law.
    (c) Examples--(1) Categories of nonpublic personal information that 
you collect. You satisfy the requirement to categorize the nonpublic 
personal information that you collect if you list the following 
categories, as applicable:
    (i) Information from the consumer;
    (ii) Information about the consumer's transactions with you or your 
affiliates;
    (iii) Information about the consumer's transactions with 
nonaffiliated third parties; and
    (iv) Information from a consumer reporting agency.
    (2) Categories of nonpublic personal information you disclose--(i) 
You satisfy the requirement to categorize the nonpublic personal 
information that you disclose if you list the categories described in 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section, as applicable, and a few examples to 
illustrate the types of information in each category.
    (ii) If you reserve the right to disclose all of the nonpublic 
personal information about consumers that you collect, you may simply 
state that fact without describing the categories or examples of the 
nonpublic personal information you disclose.
    (3) Categories of affiliates and nonaffiliated third parties to whom 
you disclose. You satisfy the requirement to categorize the affiliates 
and nonaffiliated third parties to whom you disclose nonpublic personal 
information if you list the following categories, as applicable, and a 
few examples to illustrate the types of third parties in each category.
    (i) Financial service providers;
    (ii) Non-financial companies; and
    (iii) Others.
    (4) Disclosures under exception for service providers and joint 
marketers. If you disclose nonpublic personal information under the 
exception in Sec. 332.13 to a nonaffiliated third party to market 
products or services that you offer alone or jointly with another 
financial institution, you satisfy the disclosure requirement of 
paragraph (a)(5) of this section if you:
    (i) List the categories of nonpublic personal information you 
disclose, using the same categories and examples you used to meet the 
requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, as applicable; and
    (ii) State whether the third party is:
    (A) A service provider that performs marketing services on your 
behalf or on behalf of you and another financial institution; or

[[Page 669]]

    (B) A financial institution with whom you have a joint marketing 
agreement.
    (5) Simplified notices. If you do not disclose, and do not wish to 
reserve the right to disclose, nonpublic personal information about 
customers or former customers to affiliates or nonaffiliated third 
parties except as authorized under Secs. 332.14 and 332.15, you may 
simply state that fact, in addition to the information you must provide 
under paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(8), (a)(9), and (b) of this section.
    (6) Confidentiality and security. You describe your policies and 
practices with respect to protecting the confidentiality and security of 
nonpublic personal information if you do both of the following:
    (i) Describe in general terms who is authorized to have access to 
the information; and
    (ii) State whether you have security practices and procedures in 
place to ensure the confidentiality of the information in accordance 
with your policy. You are not required to describe technical information 
about the safeguards you use.
    (d) Short-form initial notice with opt out notice for non-
customers--(1) You may satisfy the initial notice requirements in 
Secs. 332.4(a)(2), 332.7(b), and 332.7(c) for a consumer who is not a 
customer by providing a short-form initial notice at the same time as 
you deliver an opt out notice as required in Sec. 332.7.
    (2) A short-form initial notice must:
    (i) Be clear and conspicuous;
    (ii) State that your privacy notice is available upon request; and
    (iii) Explain a reasonable means by which the consumer may obtain 
that notice.
    (3) You must deliver your short-form initial notice according to 
Sec. 332.9. You are not required to deliver your privacy notice with 
your short-form initial notice. You instead may simply provide the 
consumer a reasonable means to obtain your privacy notice. If a consumer 
who receives your short-form notice requests your privacy notice, you 
must deliver your privacy notice according to Sec. 332.9.
    (4) Examples of obtaining privacy notice. You provide a reasonable 
means by which a consumer may obtain a copy of your privacy notice if 
you:
    (i) Provide a toll-free telephone number that the consumer may call 
to request the notice; or
    (ii) For a consumer who conducts business in person at your office, 
maintain copies of the notice on hand that you provide to the consumer 
immediately upon request.
    (e) Future disclosures. Your notice may include:
    (1) Categories of nonpublic personal information that you reserve 
the right to disclose in the future, but do not currently disclose; and
    (2) Categories of affiliates or nonaffiliated third parties to whom 
you reserve the right in the future to disclose, but to whom you do not 
currently disclose, nonpublic personal information.
    (f) Model privacy form. Pursuant to Sec. 332.2(a) of this part, a 
model privacy form that meets the notice content requirements of this 
section is included in appendix A of this part.

[65 FR 35216, June 1, 2000, as amended at 74 FR 62935, Dec. 1, 2009]



Sec. 332.7  Form of opt out notice to consumers; opt out methods.

    (a)(1) Form of opt out notice. If you are required to provide an opt 
out notice under Sec. 332.10(a), you must provide a clear and 
conspicuous notice to each of your consumers that accurately explains 
the right to opt out under that section. The notice must state:
    (i) That you disclose or reserve the right to disclose nonpublic 
personal information about your consumer to a nonaffiliated third party;
    (ii) That the consumer has the right to opt out of that disclosure; 
and
    (iii) A reasonable means by which the consumer may exercise the opt 
out right.
    (2) Examples--(i) Adequate opt out notice. You provide adequate 
notice that the consumer can opt out of the disclosure of nonpublic 
personal information to a nonaffiliated third party if you:
    (A) Identify all of the categories of nonpublic personal information 
that you disclose or reserve the right to disclose, and all of the 
categories of nonaffiliated third parties to which you disclose the 
information, as described

[[Page 670]]

in Sec. 332.6(a)(2) and (3), and state that the consumer can opt out of 
the disclosure of that information; and
    (B) Identify the financial products or services that the consumer 
obtains from you, either singly or jointly, to which the opt out 
direction would apply.
    (ii) Reasonable opt out means. You provide a reasonable means to 
exercise an opt out right if you:
    (A) Designate check-off boxes in a prominent position on the 
relevant forms with the opt out notice;
    (B) Include a reply form together with the opt out notice;
    (C) Provide an electronic means to opt out, such as a form that can 
be sent via electronic mail or a process at your web site, if the 
consumer agrees to the electronic delivery of information; or
    (D) Provide a toll-free telephone number that consumers may call to 
opt out.
    (iii) Unreasonable opt out means. You do not provide a reasonable 
means of opting out if:
    (A) The only means of opting out is for the consumer to write his or 
her own letter to exercise that opt out right; or
    (B) The only means of opting out as described in any notice 
subsequent to the initial notice is to use a check-off box that you 
provide with the initial notice but did not include with the subsequent 
notice.
    (iv) Specific opt out means. You may require each consumer to opt 
out through a specific means, as long as that means is reasonable for 
that consumer.
    (b) Same form as initial notice permitted. You may provide the opt 
out notice together with or on the same written or electronic form as 
the initial notice you provide in accordance with Sec. 332.4.
    (c) Initial notice required when opt out notice delivered subsequent 
to initial notice. If you provide the opt out notice later than required 
for the initial notice in accordance with Sec. 332.4, you must also 
include a copy of the initial notice with the opt out notice in writing 
or, if the consumer agrees, electronically.
    (d) Joint relationships. (1) If two or more consumers jointly obtain 
a financial product or service from you, you may provide a single opt 
out notice. Your opt out notice must explain how you will treat an opt 
out direction by a joint consumer (as explained in paragraph (d)(5) of 
this section).
    (2) Any of the joint consumers may exercise the right to opt out. 
You may either:
    (i) Treat an opt out direction by a joint consumer as applying to 
all of the associated joint consumers; or
    (ii) Permit each joint consumer to opt out separately.
    (3) If you permit each joint consumer to opt out separately, you 
must permit one of the joint consumers to opt out on behalf of all of 
the joint consumers.
    (4) You may not require all joint consumers to opt out before you 
implement any opt out direction.
    (5) Example. If John and Mary have a joint checking account with you 
and arrange for you to send statements to John's address, you may do any 
of the following, but you must explain in your opt out notice which opt 
out policy you will follow:
    (i) Send a single opt out notice to John's address, but you must 
accept an opt out direction from either John or Mary.
    (ii) Treat an opt out direction by either John or Mary as applying 
to the entire account. If you do so, and John opts out, you may not 
require Mary to opt out as well before implementing John's opt out 
direction.
    (iii) Permit John and Mary to make different opt out directions. If 
you do so:
    (A) You must permit John and Mary to opt out for each other;
    (B) If both opt out, you must permit both to notify you in a single 
response (such as on a form or through a telephone call); and
    (C) If John opts out and Mary does not, you may only disclose 
nonpublic personal information about Mary, but not about John and not 
about John and Mary jointly.
    (e) Time to comply with opt out. You must comply with a consumer's 
opt out direction as soon as reasonably practicable after you receive 
it.
    (f) Continuing right to opt out. A consumer may exercise the right 
to opt out at any time.

[[Page 671]]

    (g) Duration of consumer's opt out direction--(1) A consumer's 
direction to opt out under this section is effective until the consumer 
revokes it in writing or, if the consumer agrees, electronically.
    (2) When a customer relationship terminates, the customer's opt out 
direction continues to apply to the nonpublic personal information that 
you collected during or related to that relationship. If the individual 
subsequently establishes a new customer relationship with you, the opt 
out direction that applied to the former relationship does not apply to 
the new relationship.
    (h) Delivery. When you are required to deliver an opt out notice by 
this section, you must deliver it according to Sec. 332.9.
    (i) Model privacy form. Pursuant to Sec. 332.2(a) of this part, a 
model privacy form that meets the notice content requirements of this 
section is included in Appendix A of this part.

[65 FR 35216, June 1, 2000, as amended at 74 FR 62936, Dec. 1, 2009]



Sec. 332.8  Revised privacy notices.

    (a) General rule. Except as otherwise authorized in this part, you 
must not, directly or through any affiliate, disclose any nonpublic 
personal information about a consumer to a nonaffiliated third party 
other than as described in the initial notice that you provided to that 
consumer under Sec. 332.4, unless:
    (1) You have provided to the consumer a clear and conspicuous 
revised notice that accurately describes your policies and practices;
    (2) You have provided to the consumer a new opt out notice;
    (3) You have given the consumer a reasonable opportunity, before you 
disclose the information to the nonaffiliated third party, to opt out of 
the disclosure; and
    (4) The consumer does not opt out.
    (b) Examples--(1) Except as otherwise permitted by Secs. 332.13, 
332.14, and 332.15, you must provide a revised notice before you:
    (i) Disclose a new category of nonpublic personal information to any 
nonaffiliated third party;
    (ii) Disclose nonpublic personal information to a new category of 
nonaffiliated third party; or
    (iii) Disclose nonpublic personal information about a former 
customer to a nonaffiliated third party, if that former customer has not 
had the opportunity to exercise an opt out right regarding that 
disclosure.
    (2) A revised notice is not required if you disclose nonpublic 
personal information to a new nonaffiliated third party that you 
adequately described in your prior notice.
    (c) Delivery. When you are required to deliver a revised privacy 
notice by this section, you must deliver it according to Sec. 332.9.



Sec. 332.9  Delivering privacy and opt out notices.

    (a) How to provide notices. You must provide any privacy notices and 
opt out notices, including short-form initial notices, that this part 
requires so that each consumer can reasonably be expected to receive 
actual notice in writing or, if the consumer agrees, electronically.
    (b) (1) Examples of reasonable expectation of actual notice. You may 
reasonably expect that a consumer will receive actual notice if you:
    (i) Hand-deliver a printed copy of the notice to the consumer;
    (ii) Mail a printed copy of the notice to the last known address of 
the consumer;
    (iii) For the consumer who conducts transactions electronically, 
post the notice on the electronic site and require the consumer to 
acknowledge receipt of the notice as a necessary step to obtaining a 
particular financial product or service; or
    (iv) For an isolated transaction with the consumer, such as an ATM 
transaction, post the notice on the ATM screen and require the consumer 
to acknowledge receipt of the notice as a necessary step to obtaining 
the particular financial product or service.
    (2) Examples of unreasonable expectation of actual notice. You may 
not, however, reasonably expect that a consumer will receive actual 
notice of your privacy policies and practices if you:

[[Page 672]]

    (i) Only post a sign in your branch or office or generally publish 
advertisements of your privacy policies and practices; or
    (ii) Send the notice via electronic mail to a consumer who does not 
obtain a financial product or service from you electronically.
    (c) Annual notices only. You may reasonably expect that a customer 
will receive actual notice of your annual privacy notice if:
    (1) The customer uses your web site to access financial products and 
services electronically and agrees to receive notices at the web site, 
and you post your current privacy notice continuously in a clear and 
conspicuous manner on the web site; or
    (2) The customer has requested that you refrain from sending any 
information regarding the customer relationship, and your current 
privacy notice remains available to the customer upon request.
    (d) Oral description of notice insufficient. You may not provide any 
notice required by this part solely by orally explaining the notice, 
either in person or over the telephone.
    (e) Retention or accessibility of notices for customers. (1) For 
customers only, you must provide the initial notice required by 
Sec. 332.4(a)(1), the annual notice required by Sec. 332.5(a), and the 
revised notice required by Sec. 332.8 so that the customer can retain 
them or obtain them later in writing or, if the customer agrees, 
electronically.
    (2) Examples of retention or accessibility. You provide a privacy 
notice to the customer so that the customer can retain it or obtain it 
later if you:
    (i) Hand-deliver a printed copy of the notice to the customer;
    (ii) Mail a printed copy of the notice to the last known address of 
the customer; or
    (iii) Make your current privacy notice available on a web site (or a 
link to another web site) for the customer who obtains a financial 
product or service electronically and agrees to receive the notice at 
the web site.
    (f) Joint notice with other financial institutions. You may provide 
a joint notice from you and one or more of your affiliates or other 
financial institutions, as identified in the notice, as long as the 
notice is accurate with respect to you and the other institutions.
    (g) Joint relationships. If two or more consumers jointly obtain a 
financial product or service from you, you may satisfy the initial, 
annual, and revised notice requirements of Secs. 332.4(a), 332.5(a), and 
332.8(a), respectively, by providing one notice to those consumers 
jointly.



                     Subpart B_Limits on Disclosures



Sec. 332.10  Limits on disclosure of non-public personal information
to nonaffiliated third parties.

    (a) (1) Conditions for disclosure. Except as otherwise authorized in 
this part, you may not, directly or through any affiliate, disclose any 
nonpublic personal information about a consumer to a nonaffiliated third 
party unless:
    (i) You have provided to the consumer an initial notice as required 
under Sec. 332.4;
    (ii) You have provided to the consumer an opt out notice as required 
in Sec. 332.7;
    (iii) You have given the consumer a reasonable opportunity, before 
you disclose the information to the nonaffiliated third party, to opt 
out of the disclosure; and
    (iv) The consumer does not opt out.
    (2) Opt out definition. Opt out means a direction by the consumer 
that you not disclose nonpublic personal information about that consumer 
to a nonaffiliated third party, other than as permitted by Secs. 332.13, 
332.14, and 332.15.
    (3) Examples of reasonable opportunity to opt out. You provide a 
consumer with a reasonable opportunity to opt out if:
    (i) By mail. You mail the notices required in paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section to the consumer and allow the consumer to opt out by 
mailing a form, calling a toll-free telephone number, or any other 
reasonable means within 30 days from the date you mailed the notices.
    (ii) By electronic means. A customer opens an on-line account with 
you and agrees to receive the notices required in paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section electronically, and you allow the customer to opt out by 
any reasonable means within 30 days after the date that the customer 
acknowledges receipt of the

[[Page 673]]

notices in conjunction with opening the account.
    (iii) Isolated transaction with consumer. For an isolated 
transaction, such as the purchase of a cashier's check by a consumer, 
you provide the consumer with a reasonable opportunity to opt out if you 
provide the notices required in paragraph (a)(1) of this section at the 
time of the transaction and request that the consumer decide, as a 
necessary part of the transaction, whether to opt out before completing 
the transaction.
    (b) Application of opt out to all consumers and all nonpublic 
personal information. (1) You must comply with this section, regardless 
of whether you and the consumer have established a customer 
relationship.
    (2) Unless you comply with this section, you may not, directly or 
through any affiliate, disclose any nonpublic personal information about 
a consumer that you have collected, regardless of whether you collected 
it before or after receiving the direction to opt out from the consumer.
    (c) Partial opt out. You may allow a consumer to select certain 
nonpublic personal information or certain nonaffiliated third parties 
with respect to which the consumer wishes to opt out.



Sec. 332.11  Limits on redisclosure and reuse of information.

    (a)(1) Information you receive under an exception. If you receive 
nonpublic personal information from a nonaffiliated financial 
institution under an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 of this part, 
your disclosure and use of that information is limited as follows:
    (i) You may disclose the information to the affiliates of the 
financial institution from which you received the information;
    (ii) You may disclose the information to your affiliates, but your 
affiliates may, in turn, disclose and use the information only to the 
extent that you may disclose and use the information; and
    (iii) You may disclose and use the information pursuant to an 
exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 in the ordinary course of business to 
carry out the activity covered by the exception under which you received 
the information.
    (2) Example. If you receive a customer list from a nonaffiliated 
financial institution in order to provide account processing services 
under the exception in Sec. 332.14(a), you may disclose that information 
under any exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 in the ordinary course of 
business in order to provide those services. For example, you could 
disclose the information in response to a properly authorized subpoena 
or to your attorneys, accountants, and auditors. You could not disclose 
that information to a third party for marketing purposes or use that 
information for your own marketing purposes.
    (b)(1) Information you receive outside of an exception. If you 
receive nonpublic personal information from a nonaffiliated financial 
institution other than under an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 of 
this part, you may disclose the information only:
    (i) To the affiliates of the financial institution from which you 
received the information;
    (ii) To your affiliates, but your affiliates may, in turn, disclose 
the information only to the extent that you can disclose the 
information; and
    (iii) To any other person, if the disclosure would be lawful if made 
directly to that person by the financial institution from which you 
received the information.
    (2) Example. If you obtain a customer list from a nonaffiliated 
financial institution outside of the exceptions in Sec. 332.14 and 
332.15:
    (i) You may use that list for your own purposes; and
    (ii) You may disclose that list to another nonaffiliated third party 
only if the financial institution from which you purchased the list 
could have lawfully disclosed the list to that third party. That is, you 
may disclose the list in accordance with the privacy policy of the 
financial institution from which you received the list, as limited by 
the opt out direction of each consumer whose nonpublic personal 
information you intend to disclose, and you may disclose the list in 
accordance with an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15, such as to your 
attorneys or accountants.

[[Page 674]]

    (c) Information you disclose under an exception. If you disclose 
nonpublic personal information to a nonaffiliated third party under an 
exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 of this part, the third party may 
disclose and use that information only as follows:
    (1) The third party may disclose the information to your affiliates;
    (2) The third party may disclose the information to its affiliates, 
but its affiliates may, in turn, disclose and use the information only 
to the extent that the third party may disclose and use the information; 
and
    (3) The third party may disclose and use the information pursuant to 
an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 in the ordinary course of business 
to carry out the activity covered by the exception under which it 
received the information.
    (d) Information you disclose outside of an exception. If you 
disclose nonpublic personal information to a nonaffiliated third party 
other than under an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 of this part, the 
third party may disclose the information only:
    (1) To your affiliates;
    (2) To its affiliates, but its affiliates, in turn, may disclose the 
information only to the extent the third party can disclose the 
information; and
    (3) To any other person, if the disclosure would be lawful if you 
made it directly to that person.



Sec. 332.12  Limits on sharing account number information for
marketing purposes.

    (a) General prohibition on disclosure of account numbers. You must 
not, directly or through an affiliate, disclose, other than to a 
consumer reporting agency, an account number or similar form of access 
number or access code for a consumer's credit card account, deposit 
account, or transaction account to any nonaffiliated third party for use 
in telemarketing, direct mail marketing, or other marketing through 
electronic mail to the consumer.
    (b) Exceptions. Paragraph (a) of this section does not apply if you 
disclose an account number or similar form of access number or access 
code:
    (1) To your agent or service provider solely in order to perform 
marketing for your own products or services, as long as the agent or 
service provider is not authorized to directly initiate charges to the 
account; or
    (2) To a participant in a private label credit card program or an 
affinity or similar program where the participants in the program are 
identified to the customer when the customer enters into the program.
    (c) Examples--(1) Account number. An account number, or similar form 
of access number or access code, does not include a number or code in an 
encrypted form, as long as you do not provide the recipient with a means 
to decode the number or code.
    (2) Transaction account. A transaction account is an account other 
than a deposit account or a credit card account. A transaction account 
does not include an account to which third parties cannot initiate 
charges.



                          Subpart C_Exceptions



Sec. 332.13  Exception to opt out requirements for service providers
and joint marketing.

    (a) General rule. (1) The opt out requirements in Secs. 332.7 and 
332.10 do not apply when you provide nonpublic personal information to a 
nonaffiliated third party to perform services for you or functions on 
your behalf, if you:
    (i) Provide the initial notice in accordance with Sec. 332.4; and
    (ii) Enter into a contractual agreement with the third party that 
prohibits the third party from disclosing or using the information other 
than to carry out the purposes for which you disclosed the information, 
including use under an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 in the 
ordinary course of business to carry out those purposes.
    (2) Example. If you disclose nonpublic personal information under 
this section to a financial institution with which you perform joint 
marketing, your contractual agreement with that institution meets the 
requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section if it prohibits the 
institution from disclosing or using the nonpublic personal information 
except as necessary to carry out the joint marketing or under

[[Page 675]]

an exception in Sec. 332.14 or 332.15 in the ordinary course of business 
to carry out that joint marketing.
    (b) Service may include joint marketing. The services a 
nonaffiliated third party performs for you under paragraph (a) of this 
section may include marketing of your own products or services or 
marketing of financial products or services offered pursuant to joint 
agreements between you and one or more financial institutions.
    (c) Definition of joint agreement. For purposes of this section, 
joint agreement means a written contract pursuant to which you and one 
or more financial institutions jointly offer, endorse, or sponsor a 
financial product or service.



Sec. 332.14  Exceptions to notice and opt out requirements for
processing and servicing transactions.

    (a) Exceptions for processing transactions at consumer's request. 
The requirements for initial notice in Sec. 332.4(a)(2), for the opt out 
in Secs. 332.7 and 332.10 and for service providers and joint marketing 
in Sec. 332.13 do not apply if you disclose nonpublic personal 
information as necessary to effect, administer, or enforce a transaction 
that a consumer requests or authorizes, or in connection with:
    (1) Servicing or processing a financial product or service that a 
consumer requests or authorizes;
    (2) Maintaining or servicing the consumer's account with you, or 
with another entity as part of a private label credit card program or 
other extension of credit on behalf of such entity; or
    (3) A proposed or actual securitization, secondary market sale 
(including sales of servicing rights), or similar transaction related to 
a transaction of the consumer.
    (b) Necessary to effect, administer, or enforce a transaction means 
that the disclosure is:
    (1) Required, or is one of the lawful or appropriate methods, to 
enforce your rights or the rights of other persons engaged in carrying 
out the financial transaction or providing the product or service; or
    (2) Required, or is a usual, appropriate or acceptable method:
    (i) To carry out the transaction or the product or service business 
of which the transaction is a part, and record, service, or maintain the 
consumer's account in the ordinary course of providing the financial 
service or financial product;
    (ii) To administer or service benefits or claims relating to the 
transaction or the product or service business of which it is a part;
    (iii) To provide a confirmation, statement, or other record of the 
transaction, or information on the status or value of the financial 
service or financial product to the consumer or the consumer's agent or 
broker;
    (iv) To accrue or recognize incentives or bonuses associated with 
the transaction that are provided by you or any other party;
    (v) To underwrite insurance at the consumer's request or for 
reinsurance purposes, or for any of the following purposes as they 
relate to a consumer's insurance: account administration, reporting, 
investigating, or preventing fraud or material misrepresentation, 
processing premium payments, processing insurance claims, administering 
insurance benefits (including utilization review activities), 
participating in research projects, or as otherwise required or 
specifically permitted by Federal or State law; or
    (vi) In connection with:
    (A) The authorization, settlement, billing, processing, clearing, 
transferring, reconciling or collection of amounts charged, debited, or 
otherwise paid using a debit, credit, or other payment card, check, or 
account number, or by other payment means;
    (B) The transfer of receivables, accounts, or interests therein; or
    (C) The audit of debit, credit, or other payment information.



Sec. 332.15  Other exceptions to notice and opt out requirements.

    (a) Exceptions to opt out requirements. The requirements for initial 
notice in Sec. 332.4(a)(2), for the opt out in Secs. 332.7 and 332.10, 
and for service providers and joint marketing in Sec. 332.13 do not 
apply when you disclose nonpublic personal information:
    (1) With the consent or at the direction of the consumer, provided 
that the

[[Page 676]]

consumer has not revoked the consent or direction;
    (2) (i) To protect the confidentiality or security of your records 
pertaining to the consumer, service, product, or transaction;
    (ii) To protect against or prevent actual or potential fraud, 
unauthorized transactions, claims, or other liability;
    (iii) For required institutional risk control or for resolving 
consumer disputes or inquiries;
    (iv) To persons holding a legal or beneficial interest relating to 
the consumer; or
    (v) To persons acting in a fiduciary or representative capacity on 
behalf of the consumer;
    (3) To provide information to insurance rate advisory organizations, 
guaranty funds or agencies, agencies that are rating you, persons that 
are assessing your compliance with industry standards, and your 
attorneys, accountants, and auditors;
    (4) To the extent specifically permitted or required under other 
provisions of law and in accordance with the Right to Financial Privacy 
Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3401 et seq.), to law enforcement agencies 
(including a federal functional regulator, the Secretary of the 
Treasury, with respect to 31 U.S.C. Chapter 53, Subchapter II (Records 
and Reports on Monetary Instruments and Transactions) and 12 U.S.C. 
Chapter 21 (Financial Recordkeeping), a State insurance authority, with 
respect to any person domiciled in that insurance authority's State that 
is engaged in providing insurance, and the Federal Trade Commission), 
self-regulatory organizations, or for an investigation on a matter 
related to public safety;
    (5) (i) To a consumer reporting agency in accordance with the Fair 
Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681 et seq.), or
    (ii) From a consumer report reported by a consumer reporting agency;
    (6) In connection with a proposed or actual sale, merger, transfer, 
or exchange of all or a portion of a business or operating unit if the 
disclosure of nonpublic personal information concerns solely consumers 
of such business or unit; or
    (7) (i) To comply with Federal, State, or local laws, rules and 
other applicable legal requirements;
    (ii) To comply with a properly authorized civil, criminal, or 
regulatory investigation, or subpoena or summons by Federal, State, or 
local authorities; or
    (iii) To respond to judicial process or government regulatory 
authorities having jurisdiction over you for examination, compliance, or 
other purposes as authorized by law.
    (b) Examples of consent and revocation of consent. (1) A consumer 
may specifically consent to your disclosure to a nonaffiliated insurance 
company of the fact that the consumer has applied to you for a mortgage 
so that the insurance company can offer homeowner's insurance to the 
consumer.
    (2) A consumer may revoke consent by subsequently exercising the 
right to opt out of future disclosures of nonpublic personal information 
as permitted under Sec. 332.7(f).



            Subpart D_Relation to Other Laws; Effective Date



Sec. 332.16  Protection of Fair Credit Reporting Act.

    Nothing in this part shall be construed to modify, limit, or 
supersede the operation of the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681 
et seq.), and no inference shall be drawn on the basis of the provisions 
of this part regarding whether information is transaction or experience 
information under section 603 of that Act.



Sec. 332.17  Relation to State laws.

    (a) In general. This part shall not be construed as superseding, 
altering, or affecting any statute, regulation, order, or interpretation 
in effect in any State, except to the extent that such State statute, 
regulation, order, or interpretation is inconsistent with the provisions 
of this part, and then only to the extent of the inconsistency.
    (b) Greater protection under State law. For purposes of this 
section, a State statute, regulation, order, or interpretation is not 
inconsistent with the provisions of this part if the protection such 
statute, regulation, order, or interpretation affords any consumer is 
greater than the protection provided under this part, as determined by 
the

[[Page 677]]

Federal Trade Commission, after consultation with the FDIC, on the 
Federal Trade Commission's own motion, or upon the petition of any 
interested party.



Sec. 332.18  Effective date; transition rule.

    (a) Effective date. This part is effective November 13, 2000. In 
order to provide sufficient time for you to establish policies and 
systems to comply with the requirements of this part, the FDIC has 
extended the time for compliance with this part until July 1, 2001.
    (b)(1) Notice requirement for consumers who are your customers on 
the compliance date. By July 1, 2001, you must have provided an initial 
notice, as required by Sec. 332.4, to consumers who are your customers 
on July 1, 2001.
    (2) Example. You provide an initial notice to consumers who are your 
customers on July 1, 2001, if, by that date, you have established a 
system for providing an initial notice to all new customers and have 
mailed the initial notice to all your existing customers.
    (c) Two-year grandfathering of service agreements. Until July 1, 
2002, a contract that you have entered into with a nonaffiliated third 
party to perform services for you or functions on your behalf satisfies 
the provisions of Sec. 332.13(a)(1)(ii) of this part, even if the 
contract does not include a requirement that the third party maintain 
the confidentiality of nonpublic personal information, as long as you 
entered into the contract on or before July 1, 2000.

  

[[Page 678]]



             Sec. Appendix A to Part 332--Model Privacy Form

                        A. The Model Privacy Form
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.014


[[Page 679]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.015


[[Page 680]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.016


[[Page 681]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.017


[[Page 682]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.018


[[Page 683]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.019


[[Page 684]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01DE09.020

                         B. General Instructions

                  1. How the Model Privacy Form Is Used

    (a) The model form may be used, at the option of a financial 
institution, including a group of financial institutions that use a 
common privacy notice, to meet the content requirements of the privacy 
notice and opt-out notice set forth in Secs. 332.6 and 332.7 of this 
part.
    (b) The model form is a standardized form, including page layout, 
content, format, style, pagination, and shading. Institutions seeking to 
obtain the safe harbor through use of the model form may modify it only 
as described in these Instructions.
    (c) Note that disclosure of certain information, such as assets, 
income, and information from a consumer reporting agency, may give rise 
to obligations under the Fair Credit Reporting Act [15 U.S.C. 1681-
1681x] (FCRA), such as a requirement to permit a consumer to opt out of 
disclosures to affiliates or designation as a consumer reporting agency 
if disclosures are made to nonaffiliated third parties.
    (d) The word ``customer'' may be replaced by the word ``member'' 
whenever it appears in the model form, as appropriate.

                2. The Contents of the Model Privacy Form

    The model form consists of two pages, which may be printed on both 
sides of a single sheet of paper, or may appear on two separate pages. 
Where an institution provides a long list of institutions at the end of 
the model form in accordance with Instruction C.3(a)(1), or provides 
additional information in accordance with Instruction C.3(c), and such 
list or additional information exceeds the space available on page two 
of the model form, such list or additional information may extend to a 
third page.
    (a) Page One. The first page consists of the following components:
    (1) Date last revised (upper right-hand corner).
    (2) Title.
    (3) Key frame (Why?, What?, How?).
    (4) Disclosure table (``Reasons we can share your personal 
information'').
    (5) ``To limit our sharing'' box, as needed, for the financial 
institution's opt-out information.
    (6) ``Questions'' box, for customer service contact information.
    (7) Mail-in opt-out form, as needed.
    (b) Page Two. The second page consists of the following components:
    (1) Heading (Page 2).
    (2) Frequently Asked Questions (``Who we are'' and ``What we do'').
    (3) Definitions.
    (4) ``Other important information'' box, as needed.

                 3. The Format of the Model Privacy Form

    The format of the model form may be modified only as described 
below.
    (a) Easily readable type font. Financial institutions that use the 
model form must use an easily readable type font. While a number of 
factors together produce easily readable type font, institutions are 
required to use a minimum of 10-point font (unless otherwise expressly 
permitted in these Instructions) and sufficient spacing between the 
lines of type.
    (b) Logo. A financial institution may include a corporate logo on 
any page of the notice, so long as it does not interfere with the

[[Page 685]]

readability of the model form or the space constraints of each page.
    (c) Page size and orientation. Each page of the model form must be 
printed on paper in portrait orientation, the size of which must be 
sufficient to meet the layout and minimum font size requirements, with 
sufficient white space on the top, bottom, and sides of the content.
    (d) Color. The model form must be printed on white or light color 
paper (such as cream) with black or other contrasting ink color. Spot 
color may be used to achieve visual interest, so long as the color 
contrast is distinctive and the color does not detract from the 
readability of the model form. Logos may also be printed in color.
    (e) Languages. The model form may be translated into languages other 
than English.

            C. Information Required in the Model Privacy Form

    The information in the model form may be modified only as described 
below:

1. Name of the Institution or Group of Affiliated Institutions Providing 
                               the Notice

    Insert the name of the financial institution providing the notice or 
a common identity of affiliated institutions jointly providing the 
notice on the form wherever [name of financial institution] appears.

                               2. Page One

    (a) Last revised date. The financial institution must insert in the 
upper right-hand corner the date on which the notice was last revised. 
The information shall appear in minimum 8-point font as ``rev. [month/
year]'' using either the name or number of the month, such as ``rev. 
July 2009'' or ``rev. 7/09''.
    (b) General instructions for the ``What?'' box. (1) The bulleted 
list identifies the types of personal information that the institution 
collects and shares. All institutions must use the term ``Social 
Security number'' in the first bullet.
    (2) Institutions must use five (5) of the following terms to 
complete the bulleted list: income; account balances; payment history; 
transaction history; transaction or loss history; credit history; credit 
scores; assets; investment experience; credit-based insurance scores; 
insurance claim history; medical information; overdraft history; 
purchase history; account transactions; risk tolerance; medical-related 
debts; credit card or other debt; mortgage rates and payments; 
retirement assets; checking account information; employment information; 
wire transfer instructions.
    (c) General instructions for the disclosure table. The left column 
lists reasons for sharing or using personal information. Each reason 
correlates to a specific legal provision described in paragraph C.2(d) 
of this Instruction. In the middle column, each institution must provide 
a ``Yes'' or ``No'' response that accurately reflects its information 
sharing policies and practices with respect to the reason listed on the 
left. In the right column, each institution must provide in each box one 
of the following three (3) responses, as applicable, that reflects 
whether a consumer can limit such sharing: ``Yes'' if it is required to 
or voluntarily provides an opt-out; ``No'' if it does not provide an 
opt-out; or ``We don't share'' if it answers ``No'' in the middle 
column. Only the sixth row (``For our affiliates to market to you'') may 
be omitted at the option of the institution. See paragraph C.2(d)(6) of 
this Instruction.
    (d) Specific disclosures and corresponding legal provisions. (1) For 
our everyday business purposes. This reason incorporates sharing 
information under Secs. 332.14 and 332.15 and with service providers 
pursuant to Sec. 332.13 of this part other than the purposes specified 
in paragraphs C.2(d)(2) or C.2(d)(3) of these Instructions.
    (2) For our marketing purposes. This reason incorporates sharing 
information with service providers by an institution for its own 
marketing pursuant to Sec. 332.13 of this part. An institution that 
shares for this reason may choose to provide an opt-out.
    (3) For joint marketing with other financial companies. This reason 
incorporates sharing information under joint marketing agreements 
between two or more financial institutions and with any service provider 
used in connection with such agreements pursuant to Sec. 332.13 of this 
part. An institution that shares for this reason may choose to provide 
an opt-out.
    (4) For our affiliates' everyday business purposes--information 
about transactions and experiences. This reason incorporates sharing 
information specified in sections 603(d)(2)(A)(i) and (ii) of the FCRA. 
An institution that shares for this reason may choose to provide an opt-
out.
    (5) For our affiliates' everyday business purposes--information 
about creditworthiness. This reason incorporates sharing information 
pursuant to section 603(d)(2)(A)(iii) of the FCRA. An institution that 
shares for this reason must provide an opt-out.
    (6) For our affiliates to market to you. This reason incorporates 
sharing information specified in section 624 of the FCRA. This reason 
may be omitted from the disclosure table when: The institution does not 
have affiliates (or does not disclose personal information to its 
affiliates); the institution's affiliates do not use personal 
information in a manner that requires an opt-out; or the institution 
provides the affiliate marketing notice separately. Institutions that 
include

[[Page 686]]

this reason must provide an opt-out of indefinite duration. An 
institution that is required to provide an affiliate marketing opt-out, 
but does not include that opt-out in the model form under this part, 
must comply with section 624 of the FCRA and 12 CFR part 334, subpart C, 
with respect to the initial notice and opt-out and any subsequent 
renewal notice and opt-out. An institution not required to provide an 
opt-out under this subparagraph may elect to include this reason in the 
model form.
    (7) For nonaffiliates to market to you. This reason incorporates 
sharing described in Secs. 332.7 and 332.10(a) of this part. An 
institution that shares personal information for this reason must 
provide an opt-out.
    (e) To limit our sharing: A financial institution must include this 
section of the model form only if it provides an opt-out. The word 
``choice'' may be written in either the singular or plural, as 
appropriate. Institutions must select one or more of the applicable opt-
out methods described: Telephone, such as by a toll-free number; a Web 
site; or use of a mail-in opt-out form. Institutions may include the 
words ``toll-free'' before telephone, as appropriate. An institution 
that allows consumers to opt out online must provide either a specific 
Web address that takes consumers directly to the opt-out page or a 
general Web address that provides a clear and conspicuous direct link to 
the opt-out page. The opt-out choices made available to the consumer who 
contacts the institution through these methods must correspond 
accurately to the ``Yes'' responses in the third column of the 
disclosure table. In the part titled ``Please note'' institutions may 
insert a number that is 30 or greater in the space marked ``[30].'' 
Instructions on voluntary or state privacy law opt-out information are 
in paragraph C.2(g)(5) of these Instructions.
    (f) Questions box. Customer service contact information must be 
inserted as appropriate, where [phone number] or [Web site] appear. 
Institutions may elect to provide either a phone number, such as a toll-
free number, or a Web address, or both. Institutions may include the 
words ``toll-free'' before the telephone number, as appropriate.
    (g) Mail-in opt-out form. Financial institutions must include this 
mail-in form only if they state in the ``To limit our sharing'' box that 
consumers can opt out by mail. The mail-in form must provide opt-out 
options that correspond accurately to the ``Yes'' responses in the third 
column in the disclosure table. Institutions that require customers to 
provide only name and address may omit the section identified as 
``[account #].'' Institutions that require additional or different 
information, such as a random opt-out number or a truncated account 
number, to implement an opt-out election should modify the ``[account 
#]'' reference accordingly. This includes institutions that require 
customers with multiple accounts to identify each account to which the 
opt-out should apply. An institution must enter its opt-out mailing 
address: In the far right of this form (see version 3); or below the 
form (see version 4). The reverse side of the mail-in opt-out form must 
not include any content of the model form.
    (1) Joint accountholder. Only institutions that provide their joint 
accountholders the choice to opt out for only one accountholder, in 
accordance with paragraph C.3(a)(5) of these Instructions, must include 
in the far left column of the mail-in form the following statement: ``If 
you have a joint account, your choice(s) will apply to everyone on your 
account unless you mark below. v Apply my choice(s) only to me.'' The 
word ``choice'' may be written in either the singular or plural, as 
appropriate. Financial institutions that provide insurance products or 
services, provide this option, and elect to use the model form may 
substitute the word ``policy'' for ``account'' in this statement. 
Institutions that do not provide this option may eliminate this left 
column from the mail-in form.
    (2) FCRA Section 603(d)(2)(A)(iii) opt-out. If the institution 
shares personal information pursuant to section 603(d)(2)(A)(iii) of the 
FCRA, it must include in the mail-in opt-out form the following 
statement: ``v Do not share information about my creditworthiness with 
your affiliates for their everyday business purposes.''
    (3) FCRA Section 624 opt-out. If the institution incorporates 
section 624 of the FCRA in accord with paragraph C.2(d)(6) of these 
Instructions, it must include in the mail-in opt-out form the following 
statement: ``v Do not allow your affiliates to use my personal 
information to market to me.''
    (4) Nonaffiliate opt-out. If the financial institution shares 
personal information pursuant to Sec. 332.10(a) of this part, it must 
include in the mail-in opt-out form the following statement: ``v Do not 
share my personal information with nonaffiliates to market their 
products and services to me.''
    (5) Additional opt-outs. Financial institutions that use the 
disclosure table to provide opt-out options beyond those required by 
Federal law must provide those opt-outs in this section of the model 
form. A financial institution that chooses to offer an opt-out for its 
own marketing in the mail-in opt-out form must include one of the two 
following statements: ``v Do not share my personal information to market 
to me.'' or ``v Do not use my personal information to market to me.'' A 
financial institution that chooses to offer an opt-out for joint 
marketing must include the following statement: ``v Do not share my 
personal information with other financial institutions to jointly market 
to me.''

[[Page 687]]

    (h) Barcodes. A financial institution may elect to include a barcode 
and/or ``tagline'' (an internal identifier) in 6-point font at the 
bottom of page one, as needed for information internal to the 
institution, so long as these do not interfere with the clarity or text 
of the form.

                               3. Page Two

    (a) General Instructions for the Questions. Certain of the Questions 
may be customized as follows:
    (1) ``Who is providing this notice?'' This question may be omitted 
where only one financial institution provides the model form and that 
institution is clearly identified in the title on page one. Two or more 
financial institutions that jointly provide the model form must use this 
question to identify themselves as required by Sec. 332.9(f) of this 
part. Where the list of institutions exceeds four (4) lines, the 
institution must describe in the response to this question the general 
types of institutions jointly providing the notice and must separately 
identify those institutions, in minimum 8-point font, directly following 
the ``Other important information'' box, or, if that box is not included 
in the institution's form, directly following the ``Definitions.'' The 
list may appear in a multi-column format.
    (2) ``How does [name of financial institution] protect my personal 
information?'' The financial institution may only provide additional 
information pertaining to its safeguards practices following the 
designated response to this question. Such information may include 
information about the institution's use of cookies or other measures it 
uses to safeguard personal information. Institutions are limited to a 
maximum of 30 additional words.
    (3) ``How does [name of financial institution] collect my personal 
information?'' Institutions must use five (5) of the following terms to 
complete the bulleted list for this question: Open an account; deposit 
money; pay your bills; apply for a loan; use your credit or debit card; 
seek financial or tax advice; apply for insurance; pay insurance 
premiums; file an insurance claim; seek advice about your investments; 
buy securities from us; sell securities to us; direct us to buy 
securities; direct us to sell your securities; make deposits or 
withdrawals from your account; enter into an investment advisory 
contract; give us your income information; provide employment 
information; give us your employment history; tell us about your 
investment or retirement portfolio; tell us about your investment or 
retirement earnings; apply for financing; apply for a lease; provide 
account information; give us your contact information; pay us by check; 
give us your wage statements; provide your mortgage information; make a 
wire transfer; tell us who receives the money; tell us where to send the 
money; show your government-issued ID; show your driver's license; order 
a commodity futures or option trade. Institutions that collect personal 
information from their affiliates and/or credit bureaus must include 
after the bulleted list the following statement: ``We also collect your 
personal information from others, such as credit bureaus, affiliates, or 
other companies.'' Institutions that do not collect personal information 
from their affiliates or credit bureaus but do collect information from 
other companies must include the following statement instead: ``We also 
collect your personal information from other companies.'' Only 
institutions that do not collect any personal information from 
affiliates, credit bureaus, or other companies can omit both statements.
    (4) ``Why can't I limit all sharing?'' Institutions that describe 
state privacy law provisions in the ``Other important information'' box 
must use the bracketed sentence: ``See below for more on your rights 
under state law.'' Other institutions must omit this sentence.
    (5) ``What happens when I limit sharing for an account I hold 
jointly with someone else?'' Only financial institutions that provide 
opt-out options must use this question. Other institutions must omit 
this question. Institutions must choose one of the following two 
statements to respond to this question: ``Your choices will apply to 
everyone on your account.'' or ``Your choices will apply to everyone on 
your account--unless you tell us otherwise.'' Financial institutions 
that provide insurance products or services and elect to use the model 
form may substitute the word ``policy'' for ``account'' in these 
statements.
    (b) General Instructions for the Definitions. The financial 
institution must customize the space below the responses to the three 
definitions in this section. This specific information must be in 
italicized lettering to set off the information from the standardized 
definitions.
    (1) Affiliates. As required by Sec. 332.6(a)(3) of this part, where 
[affiliate information] appears, the financial institution must:
    (i) If it has no affiliates, state: ``[name of financial 
institution] has no affiliates'';
    (ii) If it has affiliates but does not share personal information, 
state: ``[name of financial institution] does not share with our 
affiliates''; or
    (iii) If it shares with its affiliates, state, as applicable: ``Our 
affiliates include companies with a [common corporate identity of 
financial institution] name; financial companies such as [insert 
illustrative list of companies]; nonfinancial companies, such as [insert 
illustrative list of companies]; and others, such as [insert 
illustrative list].''
    (2) Nonaffiliates. As required by Sec. 332.6(c)(3) of this part, 
where [nonaffiliate information] appears, the financial institution 
must:

[[Page 688]]

    (i) If it does not share with nonaffiliated third parties, state: 
``[name of financial institution] does not share with nonaffiliates so 
they can market to you''; or
    (ii) If it shares with nonaffiliated third parties, state, as 
applicable: ``Nonaffiliates we share with can include [list categories 
of companies such as mortgage companies, insurance companies, direct 
marketing companies, and nonprofit organizations].''
    (3) Joint Marketing. As required by Sec. 332.13 of this part, where 
[joint marketing] appears, the financial institution must:
    (i) If it does not engage in joint marketing, state: ``[name of 
financial institution] doesn't jointly market''; or
    (ii) If it shares personal information for joint marketing, state, 
as applicable: ``Our joint marketing partners include [list categories 
of companies such as credit card companies].''
    (c) General instructions for the ``Other important information'' 
box. This box is optional. The space provided for information in this 
box is not limited. Only the following types of information can appear 
in this box.
    (1) State and/or international privacy law information; and/or
    (2) Acknowledgment of receipt form.

[74 FR 69236, Dec. 1, 2009]



PART 333_EXTENSION OF CORPORATE POWERS--Table of Contents



                               Regulations

Sec.
333.1  Classification of general character of business.
333.2  Change in general character of business.
333.4  Conversions from mutual to stock form.

                             Interpretations

333.101  Prior consent not required.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1816, 1818, 1819 (``Seventh'', ``Eighth'' and 
``Tenth''), 1828, 1828(m), 1831p-1(c).

                               Regulations



Sec. 333.1  Classification of general character of business.

    State nonmember insured banks are divided into five categories for 
the purpose of classifying their general character or type of business, 
\2\ viz: commercial banks, banks and trust companies, savings banks 
(including mutual and stock), industrial banks, and cash depositories.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ A bank's business may include two or more of the general 
classifications.

[15 FR 8644, Dec. 6, 1950]



Sec. 333.2  Change in general character of business.

    No State nonmember insured bank (except a District bank) or branch 
thereof shall hereafter cause or permit any change to be made in the 
general character or type of business exercised by it after the 
effective date of this part without the prior written consent of the 
Corporation.

[15 FR 8644, Dec. 6, 1950]



Sec. 333.4  Conversions from mutual to stock form.

    (a) Scope. This section applies to the conversion of insured mutual 
state savings banks to the stock form of ownership. It supplements the 
procedural and other requirements for such conversions in subpart I of 
part 303 of this chapter. This section also applies, to the extent 
appropriate, to the reorganization of insured mutual state savings banks 
to the mutual holding company form of ownership. As determined by the 
Board of Directors of the FDIC on a case-by-case basis, the requirements 
of paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) of this section do not apply to mutual-
to-stock conversions of insured mutual state savings banks whose capital 
category under Sec. 325.103 of this chapter or Sec. 324.403, as 
applicable, is ``undercapitalized'', ``significantly undercapitalized'' 
or ``critically undercapitalized''. As provided in Sec. 303.162 of this 
chapter, the Board of Directors of the FDIC may grant a waiver in 
writing from any requirement of this section for good cause shown.
    (b) Definition of Eligible Depositor. For purposes of this section, 
eligible depositors are depositors holding qualifying deposits at the 
bank as of a date designated in the bank's plan of conversion that is 
not less than one year prior to the date of adoption of the plan of 
conversion by the converting bank's board of directors/trustees.
    (c) Requirements. In addition to other requirements that may be 
imposed by the applicable state statutes and regulations and other 
federal statutes and regulations, including subpart I of part

[[Page 689]]

303 of this chapter, an insured mutual state savings bank shall not 
convert to the stock form of ownership unless the following requirements 
are satisfied:
    (1) Eligible depositors shall have higher subscription rights than 
employee stock ownership plans;
    (2) The proposed conversion shall be approved by a vote of at least 
a majority of the bank's depositors and, as reasonably determined by the 
bank's directors or trustees, other stakeholders of the bank who are 
entitled to vote on the conversion, unless the applicable state law 
requires a higher percentage, in which case the higher percentage shall 
be used. Voting may be in person or by proxy; and
    (3) Management shall not use proxies executed outside the context of 
the proposed conversion to satisfy the voting requirement imposed in the 
previous paragraph.
    (d) Restriction on repurchase of stock. An insured mutual state 
savings bank that has converted from the mutual to stock form of 
ownership may not repurchase its capital stock within one year following 
the date of its conversion to stock form, except that stock repurchases 
of no greater than 5% of the bank's outstanding capital stock may be 
repurchased during this one-year period where compelling and valid 
business reasons are established, to the satisfaction of the FDIC. Any 
stock repurchases shall be subject to the requirements of section 
18(i)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(i)(1)).
    (e) Stock benefit plan limitations. The FDIC will presume that a 
stock option plan or management or employee stock benefit plan that does 
not conform with the applicable percentage limitations of the 
regulations issued by the Office of Thrift Supervision constitutes 
excessive insider benefits and thereby evidences a breach of the board 
of directors' or trustees' fiduciary responsibility. In addition, no 
converted insured mutual state savings bank shall, for one year from the 
date of the conversion, implement a stock option plan or management or 
employee stock benefit plan, other than a tax-qualified employee stock 
ownership plan, unless each of the following requirements is met:
    (1) Each of the plans was fully disclosed in the proxy solicitation 
and conversion stock offering materials;
    (2) All such plans are approved by a majority of the bank's 
stockholders, or in the case of a recently formed holding company, its 
stockholders, prior to implementation at a duly called meeting of 
shareholders, either annual or special, to be held no sooner than six 
months after the completion of the conversion;
    (3) In the case of a savings bank subsidiary of a mutual holding 
company, all such plans are approved by a majority of stockholders other 
than its parent mutual holding company prior to implementation at a duly 
called meeting of shareholders, either annual or special, to be held no 
sooner than six months following the stock issuance;
    (4) For stock option plans, stock options are granted at no lower 
than the market price at which the stock is trading at the time of 
grant; and
    (5) For management or employee stock benefit plans, no conversion 
stock is used to fund the plans.

[59 FR 61246, Nov. 30, 1994, as amended at 63 FR 44750, Aug. 20, 1998; 
68 FR 50461, Aug. 21, 2003; 78 FR 55595, Sept. 10, 2013]

                             Interpretations



Sec. 333.101  Prior consent not required.

    (a) The extension by any State nonmember insured bank of its 
business to include personal, character or installment loans, or the 
extension by an industrial bank of its business to include the business 
of a commercial bank, is not a change in the general character or type 
of business requiring the prior written consent of the Corporation.
    (b) An insured State nonmember bank, not exercising trust powers, 
may act as trustee or custodian of Individual Retirement Accounts 
established pursuant to the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 
1974 (26 U.S.C. 408), Self-Employed Retirement Plans established 
pursuant to the Self-Employed Individuals Retirement Act of 1962 (26 
U.S.C. 401), Roth Individual Retirement Accounts and Coverdell Education 
Savings Accounts established pursuant to the Taxpayer Relief Act of 1997 
(26 U.S.C. 408A and 530 respectively), Health Savings Accounts

[[Page 690]]

established pursuant to the Medicare Prescription Drug Improvement, and 
Modernization Act of 2003 (26 U.S.C. 223), and other similar accounts 
without the prior written consent of the Corporation provided:
    (1) The bank's duties as trustee or custodian are essentially 
custodial or ministerial in nature,
    (2) The bank is required to invest the funds from such plans only
    (i) In its own time or savings deposits, or
    (ii) In any other assets at the direction of the customer, provided 
the bank does not exercise any investment discretion or provide any 
investment advice with respect to such account assets, and
    (3) The bank's acceptance of such accounts without trust powers is 
not contrary to applicable State law.

[41 FR 2375, Jan. 16, 1976, as amended at 50 FR 10754, Mar. 18, 1985; 70 
FR 60422, Oct. 18, 2005]



PART 334_FAIR CREDIT REPORTING--Table of Contents



                      Subpart A_General Provisions

Sec.
334.1  Purpose and scope.
334.2  Examples.
334.3  Definitions.

Subparts B-H [Reserved]

                       Subpart I_Records Disposal

334.80-334.82  [Reserved]
334.83  Disposal of consumer information.

                   Subpart J_Identity Theft Red Flags

334.90  Duties regarding the detection, prevention, and mitigation of 
          identity theft.
334.91  Duties of card issuers regarding changes of address.

Appendixes A-I to Part 334 [Reserved]
Appendix J to Part 334--Interagency Guidelines on Identity Theft 
          Detection, Prevention, and Mitigation

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1818, 1819 (Tenth), and 1831p-1; 15 U.S.C. 
1681a, 1681b, 1681c, 1681m, 1681s, 1681s-2, 1681s-3, 1681t, 1681w, 6801 
et seq., Pub. L. 108-159, 117 Stat. 1952.

    Source: 69 FR 77618, Dec. 28, 2004, unless otherwise noted.



                      Subpart A_General Provisions

    Source: 70 FR 70685, Nov. 22, 2005, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 334.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Purpose The purpose of this part is to implement the Fair Credit 
Reporting Act.
    (b) Scope Except as otherwise provided in this part, the regulations 
in this part apply to insured state nonmember banks, state savings 
associations whose deposits are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, insured state licensed branches of foreign banks, and 
subsidiaries of such entities (except brokers, dealers, persons 
providing insurance, investment companies, and investment advisers).

[80 FR 65918, Oct. 28, 2015]



Sec. 334.2  Examples.

    The examples in this part are not exclusive. Compliance with an 
example, to the extent applicable, constitutes compliance with this 
part. Examples in a paragraph illustrate only the issue described in the 
paragraph and do not illustrate any other issue that may arise in this 
part.



Sec. 334.3  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, unless explicitly stated otherwise:
    (a) Act means the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681 et 
seq.).
    (b) Affiliate means any company that is related by common ownership 
or common corporate control with another company.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Company means any corporation, limited liability company, 
business trust, general or limited partnership, association, or similar 
organization.
    (e) Consumer means an individual.
    (f)-(h) [Reserved]
    (i) Common ownership or common corporate control means a 
relationship between two companies under which:
    (1) One company has, with respect to the other company:
    (i) Ownership, control, or power to vote 25 percent or more of the 
outstanding shares of any class of voting

[[Page 691]]

security of a company, directly or indirectly, or acting through one or 
more other persons;
    (ii) Control in any manner over the election of a majority of the 
directors, trustees, or general partners (or individuals exercising 
similar functions) of a company; or
    (iii) The power to exercise, directly or indirectly, a controlling 
influence over the management or policies of a company, as the FDIC 
determines; or
    (2) Any other person has, with respect to both companies, a 
relationship described in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) through (i)(1)(iii) of 
this section.
    (j) [Reserved]
    (k) Medical information means:
    (1) Information or data, whether oral or recorded, in any form or 
medium, created by or derived from a health care provider or the 
consumer, that relates to:
    (i) The past, present, or future physical, mental, or behavioral 
health or condition of an individual;
    (ii) The provision of health care to an individual; or
    (iii) The payment for the provision of health care to an individual.
    (2) The term does not include:
    (i) The age or gender of a consumer;
    (ii) Demographic information about the consumer, including a 
consumer's residence address or e-mail address;
    (iii) Any other information about a consumer that does not relate to 
the physical, mental, or behavioral health or condition of a consumer, 
including the existence or value of any insurance policy; or
    (iv) Information that does not identify a specific consumer.
    (l) Person means any individual, partnership, corporation, trust, 
estate cooperative, association, government or governmental subdivision 
or agency, or other entity.
    (m) State savings association has the same meaning as in section 
3(b)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(b)(3).

[70 FR 70685, Nov. 22, 2005, as amended at 72 FR 63760, Nov. 9, 2007; 80 
FR 65919, Oct. 28, 2015]

Subparts B-H [Reserved]



                       Subpart I_Records Disposal



Secs. 334.80-334.82  [Reserved]



Sec. 334.83  Disposal of consumer information.

    (a) In general. You must properly dispose of any consumer 
information that you maintain or otherwise possess in accordance with 
the Interagency Guidelines Establishing Information Security Standards, 
as set forth in appendix B to part 364 of this chapter, prescribed 
pursuant to section 216 of the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act 
of 2003 (15 U.S.C. 1681w) and section 501(b) of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley 
Act (15 U.S.C. 6801(b)), to the extent the Guidelines are applicable to 
you.
    (b) Rule of construction. Nothing in this section shall be construed 
to:
    (1) Require you to maintain or destroy any record pertaining to a 
consumer that is not imposed under any other law; or
    (2) Alter or affect any requirement imposed under any other 
provision of law to maintain or destroy such a record.



                   Subpart J_Identity Theft Red Flags

    Source: 72 FR 63761, Nov. 9, 2007, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 334.90  Duties regarding the detection, prevention,
and mitigation of identity theft.

    (a) Scope This section applies to a financial institution or 
creditor that is an insured state nonmember bank, State savings 
association whose deposits are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, insured state licensed branch of a foreign bank, or a 
subsidiary of such entities (except brokers, dealers, persons providing 
insurance, investment companies, and investment advisers).
    (b) Definitions. For purposes of this section and Appendix J, the 
following definitions apply:
    (1) Account means a continuing relationship established by a person 
with a financial institution or creditor to obtain a product or service 
for personal, family, household or business purposes. Account includes:

[[Page 692]]

    (i) An extension of credit, such as the purchase of property or 
services involving a deferred payment; and
    (ii) A deposit account.
    (2) The term board of directors includes:
    (i) In the case of a branch or agency of a foreign bank, the 
managing official in charge of the branch or agency; and
    (ii) In the case of any other creditor that does not have a board of 
directors, a designated employee at the level of senior management.
    (3) Covered account means:
    (i) An account that a financial institution or creditor offers or 
maintains, primarily for personal, family, or household purposes, that 
involves or is designed to permit multiple payments or transactions, 
such as a credit card account, mortgage loan, automobile loan, margin 
account, cell phone account, utility account, checking account, or 
savings account; and
    (ii) Any other account that the financial institution or creditor 
offers or maintains for which there is a reasonably foreseeable risk to 
customers or to the safety and soundness of the financial institution or 
creditor from identity theft, including financial, operational, 
compliance, reputation, or litigation risks.
    (4) Credit has the same meaning as in 15 U.S.C. 1681a(r)(5).
    (5) Creditor has the same meaning as in 15 U.S.C. 1681m(e)(4).
    (6) Customer means a person that has a covered account with a 
financial institution or creditor.
    (7) Financial institution has the same meaning as in 15 U.S.C. 
1681a(t).
    (8) Identity theft has the same meaning as in 16 CFR 603.2(a).
    (9) Red Flag means a pattern, practice, or specific activity that 
indicates the possible existence of identity theft.
    (10) Service provider means a person that provides a service 
directly to the financial institution or creditor.
    (11) State savings association has the same meaning as in section 
3(b)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(b)(3).
    (c) Periodic identification of covered accounts. Each financial 
institution or creditor must periodically determine whether it offers or 
maintains covered accounts. As a part of this determination, a financial 
institution or creditor must conduct a risk assessment to determine 
whether it offers or maintains covered accounts described in paragraph 
(b)(3)(ii) of this section, taking into consideration:
    (1) The methods it provides to open its accounts;
    (2) The methods it provides to access its accounts; and
    (3) Its previous experiences with identity theft.
    (d) Establishment of an Identity Theft Prevention Program--(1) 
Program requirement. Each financial institution or creditor that offers 
or maintains one or more covered accounts must develop and implement a 
written Identity Theft Prevention Program (Program) that is designed to 
detect, prevent, and mitigate identity theft in connection with the 
opening of a covered account or any existing covered account. The 
Program must be appropriate to the size and complexity of the financial 
institution or creditor and the nature and scope of its activities.
    (2) Elements of the Program. The Program must include reasonable 
policies and procedures to:
    (i) Identify relevant Red Flags for the covered accounts that the 
financial institution or creditor offers or maintains, and incorporate 
those Red Flags into its Program;
    (ii) Detect Red Flags that have been incorporated into the Program 
of the financial institution or creditor;
    (iii) Respond appropriately to any Red Flags that are detected 
pursuant to paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section to prevent and mitigate 
identity theft; and
    (iv) Ensure the Program (including the Red Flags determined to be 
relevant) is updated periodically, to reflect changes in risks to 
customers and to the safety and soundness of the financial institution 
or creditor from identity theft.
    (e) Administration of the Program. Each financial institution or 
creditor that is required to implement a Program must provide for the 
continued administration of the Program and must:
    (1) Obtain approval of the initial written Program from either its 
board

[[Page 693]]

of directors or an appropriate committee of the board of directors;
    (2) Involve the board of directors, an appropriate committee 
thereof, or a designated employee at the level of senior management in 
the oversight, development, implementation and administration of the 
Program;
    (3) Train staff, as necessary, to effectively implement the Program; 
and
    (4) Exercise appropriate and effective oversight of service provider 
arrangements.
    (f) Guidelines. Each financial institution or creditor that is 
required to implement a Program must consider the guidelines in Appendix 
J of this part and include in its Program those guidelines that are 
appropriate.

[72 FR 63761, Nov. 9, 2007, as amended at 80 FR 65919, Oct. 28, 2015]



Sec. 334.91  Duties of card issuers regarding changes of address.

    (a) Scope This section applies to an issuer of a debit or credit 
card (card issuer) that is an insured state nonmember bank, state 
savings association whose deposits are insured by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, insured state licensed branch of a foreign bank, 
or a subsidiary of such entities (except brokers, dealers, persons 
providing insurance, investment companies, or investment advisers).
    (b) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
    (1) Cardholder means a consumer who has been issued a credit or 
debit card.
    (2) Clear and conspicuous means reasonably understandable and 
designed to call attention to the nature and significance of the 
information presented.
    (3) State savings association has the same meaning as in section 
3(b)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(b)(3).
    (c) Address validation requirements. A card issuer must establish 
and implement reasonable policies and procedures to assess the validity 
of a change of address if it receives notification of a change of 
address for a consumer's debit or credit card account and, within a 
short period of time afterwards (during at least the first 30 days after 
it receives such notification), the card issuer receives a request for 
an additional or replacement card for the same account. Under these 
circumstances, the card issuer may not issue an additional or 
replacement card, until, in accordance with its reasonable policies and 
procedures and for the purpose of assessing the validity of the change 
of address, the card issuer:
    (1)(i) Notifies the cardholder of the request:
    (A) At the cardholder's former address; or
    (B) By any other means of communication that the card issuer and the 
cardholder have previously agreed to use; and
    (ii) Provides to the cardholder a reasonable means of promptly 
reporting incorrect address changes; or
    (2) Otherwise assesses the validity of the change of address in 
accordance with the policies and procedures the card issuer has 
established pursuant to Sec. 334.90 of this part.
    (d) Alternative timing of address validation. A card issuer may 
satisfy the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section if it 
validates an address pursuant to the methods in paragraph (c)(1) or 
(c)(2) of this section when it receives an address change notification, 
before it receives a request for an additional or replacement card.
    (e) Form of notice. Any written or electronic notice that the card 
issuer provides under this paragraph must be clear and conspicuous and 
provided separately from its regular correspondence with the cardholder.

[72 FR 63761, Nov. 9, 2007, as amended at 80 FR 65919, Oct. 28, 2015]



               Sec. Appendixes A-I to Part 334 [Reserved]



 Sec. Appendix J to Part 334--Interagency Guidelines on Identity Theft 
                  Detection, Prevention, and Mitigation

    Section 334.90 of this part requires each financial institution and 
creditor that offers or maintains one or more covered accounts, as 
defined in Sec. 334.90(b)(3) of this part, to develop and provide for 
the continued administration of a written Program to detect, prevent, 
and mitigate identity theft in connection with the opening of a covered 
account or any existing covered account. These guidelines are intended 
to assist financial institutions and creditors in the formulation

[[Page 694]]

and maintenance of a Program that satisfies the requirements of 
Sec. 334.90 of this part.

                             I. The Program

    In designing its Program, a financial institution or creditor may 
incorporate, as appropriate, its existing policies, procedures, and 
other arrangements that control reasonably foreseeable risks to 
customers or to the safety and soundness of the financial institution or 
creditor from identity theft.

                   II. Identifying Relevant Red Flags

    (a) Risk Factors. A financial institution or creditor should 
consider the following factors in identifying relevant Red Flags for 
covered accounts, as appropriate:
    (1) The types of covered accounts it offers or maintains;
    (2) The methods it provides to open its covered accounts;
    (3) The methods it provides to access its covered accounts; and
    (4) Its previous experiences with identity theft.
    (b) Sources of Red Flags. Financial institutions and creditors 
should incorporate relevant Red Flags from sources such as:
    (1) Incidents of identity theft that the financial institution or 
creditor has experienced;
    (2) Methods of identity theft that the financial institution or 
creditor has identified that reflect changes in identity theft risks; 
and
    (3) Applicable supervisory guidance.
    (c) Categories of Red Flags. The Program should include relevant Red 
Flags from the following categories, as appropriate. Examples of Red 
Flags from each of these categories are appended as Supplement A to this 
Appendix J.
    (1) Alerts, notifications, or other warnings received from consumer 
reporting agencies or service providers, such as fraud detection 
services;
    (2) The presentation of suspicious documents;
    (3) The presentation of suspicious personal identifying information, 
such as a suspicious address change;
    (4) The unusual use of, or other suspicious activity related to, a 
covered account; and
    (5) Notice from customers, victims of identity theft, law 
enforcement authorities, or other persons regarding possible identity 
theft in connection with covered accounts held by the financial 
institution or creditor.

                        III. Detecting Red Flags.

    The Program's policies and procedures should address the detection 
of Red Flags in connection with the opening of covered accounts and 
existing covered accounts, such as by:
    (a) Obtaining identifying information about, and verifying the 
identity of, a person opening a covered account, for example, using the 
policies and procedures regarding identification and verification set 
forth in the Customer Identification Program rules implementing 31 
U.S.C. 5318(l) (31 CFR 1020.220); and
    (b) Authenticating customers, monitoring transactions, and verifying 
the validity of change of address requests, in the case of existing 
covered accounts.

              IV. Preventing and Mitigating Identity Theft.

    The Program's policies and procedures should provide for appropriate 
responses to the Red Flags the financial institution or creditor has 
detected that are commensurate with the degree of risk posed. In 
determining an appropriate response, a financial institution or creditor 
should consider aggravating factors that may heighten the risk of 
identity theft, such as a data security incident that results in 
unauthorized access to a customer's account records held by the 
financial institution, creditor, or third party, or notice that a 
customer has provided information related to a covered account held by 
the financial institution or creditor to someone fraudulently claiming 
to represent the financial institution or creditor or to a fraudulent 
Web site. Appropriate responses may include the following:
    (a) Monitoring a covered account for evidence of identity theft;
    (b) Contacting the customer;
    (c) Changing any passwords, security codes, or other security 
devices that permit access to a covered account;
    (d) Reopening a covered account with a new account number;
    (e) Not opening a new covered account;
    (f) Closing an existing covered account;
    (g) Not attempting to collect on a covered account or not selling a 
covered account to a debt collector;
    (h) Notifying law enforcement; or
    (i) Determining that no response is warranted under the particular 
circumstances.

                        V. Updating the Program.

    Financial institutions and creditors should update the Program 
(including the Red Flags determined to be relevant) periodically, to 
reflect changes in risks to customers or to the safety and soundness of 
the financial institution or creditor from identity theft, based on 
factors such as:
    (a) The experiences of the financial institution or creditor with 
identity theft;
    (b) Changes in methods of identity theft;
    (c) Changes in methods to detect, prevent, and mitigate identity 
theft;
    (d) Changes in the types of accounts that the financial institution 
or creditor offers or maintains; and

[[Page 695]]

    (e) Changes in the business arrangements of the financial 
institution or creditor, including mergers, acquisitions, alliances, 
joint ventures, and service provider arrangements.

                VI. Methods for Administering the Program

    (a) Oversight of Program. Oversight by the board of directors, an 
appropriate committee of the board, or a designated employee at the 
level of senior management should include:
    (1) Assigning specific responsibility for the Program's 
implementation;
    (2) Reviewing reports prepared by staff regarding compliance by the 
financial institution or creditor with Sec. 334.90 of this part; and
    (3) Approving material changes to the Program as necessary to 
address changing identity theft risks.
    (b) Reports. (1) In general. Staff of the financial institution or 
creditor responsible for development, implementation, and administration 
of its Program should report to the board of directors, an appropriate 
committee of the board, or a designated employee at the level of senior 
management, at least annually, on compliance by the financial 
institution or creditor with Sec. 334.90 of this part.
    (2) Contents of report. The report should address material matters 
related to the Program and evaluate issues such as: the effectiveness of 
the policies and procedures of the financial institution or creditor in 
addressing the risk of identity theft in connection with the opening of 
covered accounts and with respect to existing covered accounts; service 
provider arrangements; significant incidents involving identity theft 
and management's response; and recommendations for material changes to 
the Program.
    (c) Oversight of service provider arrangements. Whenever a financial 
institution or creditor engages a service provider to perform an 
activity in connection with one or more covered accounts the financial 
institution or creditor should take steps to ensure that the activity of 
the service provider is conducted in accordance with reasonable policies 
and procedures designed to detect, prevent, and mitigate the risk of 
identity theft. For example, a financial institution or creditor could 
require the service provider by contract to have policies and procedures 
to detect relevant Red Flags that may arise in the performance of the 
service provider's activities, and either report the Red Flags to the 
financial institution or creditor, or to take appropriate steps to 
prevent or mitigate identity theft.

                VII. Other Applicable Legal Requirements

    Financial institutions and creditors should be mindful of other 
related legal requirements that may be applicable, such as:
    (a) For financial institutions and creditors that are subject to 31 
U.S.C. 5318(g), filing a Suspicious Activity Report in accordance with 
applicable law and regulation;
    (b) Implementing any requirements under 15 U.S.C. 1681c-1(h) 
regarding the circumstances under which credit may be extended when the 
financial institution or creditor detects a fraud or active duty alert;
    (c) Implementing any requirements for furnishers of information to 
consumer reporting agencies under 15 U.S.C. 1681s-2, for example, to 
correct or update inaccurate or incomplete information, and to not 
report information that the furnisher has reasonable cause to believe is 
inaccurate; and
    (d) Complying with the prohibitions in 15 U.S.C. 1681m on the sale, 
transfer, and placement for collection of certain debts resulting from 
identity theft.

                       Supplement A to Appendix J

    In addition to incorporating Red Flags from the sources recommended 
in section II.b. of the Guidelines in Appendix J of this part, each 
financial institution or creditor may consider incorporating into its 
Program, whether singly or in combination, Red Flags from the following 
illustrative examples in connection with covered accounts:

   Alerts, Notifications or Warnings from a Consumer Reporting Agency

    1. A fraud or active duty alert is included with a consumer report.
    2. A consumer reporting agency provides a notice of credit freeze in 
response to a request for a consumer report.
    3. A consumer reporting agency provides a notice of address 
discrepancy, as defined in 12 CFR 1022.82(b).
    4. A consumer report indicates a pattern of activity that is 
inconsistent with the history and usual pattern of activity of an 
applicant or customer, such as:
    a. A recent and significant increase in the volume of inquiries;
    b. An unusual number of recently established credit relationships;
    c. A material change in the use of credit, especially with respect 
to recently established credit relationships; or
    d. An account that was closed for cause or identified for abuse of 
account privileges by a financial institution or creditor.

                          Suspicious Documents

    5. Documents provided for identification appear to have been altered 
or forged.
    6. The photograph or physical description on the identification is 
not consistent with the appearance of the applicant or customer 
presenting the identification.
    7. Other information on the identification is not consistent with 
information provided by the person opening a new covered account or 
customer presenting the identification.

[[Page 696]]

    8. Other information on the identification is not consistent with 
readily accessible information that is on file with the financial 
institution or creditor, such as a signature card or a recent check.
    9. An application appears to have been altered or forged, or gives 
the appearance of having been destroyed and reassembled.

               Suspicious Personal Identifying Information

    10. Personal identifying information provided is inconsistent when 
compared against external information sources used by the financial 
institution or creditor. For example:
    a. The address does not match any address in the consumer report; or
    b. The Social Security Number (SSN) has not been issued, or is 
listed on the Social Security Administration's Death Master File.
    11. Personal identifying information provided by the customer is not 
consistent with other personal identifying information provided by the 
customer. For example, there is a lack of correlation between the SSN 
range and date of birth.
    12. Personal identifying information provided is associated with 
known fraudulent activity as indicated by internal or third-party 
sources used by the financial institution or creditor. For example:
    a. The address on an application is the same as the address provided 
on a fraudulent application; or
    b. The phone number on an application is the same as the number 
provided on a fraudulent application.
    13. Personal identifying information provided is of a type commonly 
associated with fraudulent activity as indicated by internal or third-
party sources used by the financial institution or creditor. For 
example:
    a. The address on an application is fictitious, a mail drop, or a 
prison; or
    b. The phone number is invalid, or is associated with a pager or 
answering service.
    14. The SSN provided is the same as that submitted by other persons 
opening an account or other customers.
    15. The address or telephone number provided is the same as or 
similar to the address or telephone number submitted by an unusually 
large number of other persons opening accounts or by other customers.
    16. The person opening the covered account or the customer fails to 
provide all required personal identifying information on an application 
or in response to notification that the application is incomplete.
    17. Personal identifying information provided is not consistent with 
personal identifying information that is on file with the financial 
institution or creditor.
    18. For financial institutions and creditors that use challenge 
questions, the person opening the covered account or the customer cannot 
provide authenticating information beyond that which generally would be 
available from a wallet or consumer report.

 Unusual Use of, or Suspicious Activity Related to, the Covered Account

    19. Shortly following the notice of a change of address for a 
covered account, the institution or creditor receives a request for a 
new, additional, or replacement card or a cell phone, or for the 
addition of authorized users on the account.
    20. A new revolving credit account is used in a manner commonly 
associated with known patterns of fraud. For example:
    a. The majority of available credit is used for cash advances or 
merchandise that is easily convertible to cash (e.g., electronics 
equipment or jewelry); or
    b. The customer fails to make the first payment or makes an initial 
payment but no subsequent payments.
    21. A covered account is used in a manner that is not consistent 
with established patterns of activity on the account. There is, for 
example:
    a. Nonpayment when there is no history of late or missed payments;
    b. A material increase in the use of available credit;
    c. A material change in purchasing or spending patterns;
    d. A material change in electronic fund transfer patterns in 
connection with a deposit account; or
    e. A material change in telephone call patterns in connection with a 
cellular phone account.
    22. A covered account that has been inactive for a reasonably 
lengthy period of time is used (taking into consideration the type of 
account, the expected pattern of usage and other relevant factors).
    23. Mail sent to the customer is returned repeatedly as 
undeliverable although transactions continue to be conducted in 
connection with the customer's covered account.
    24. The financial institution or creditor is notified that the 
customer is not receiving paper account statements.
    25. The financial institution or creditor is notified of 
unauthorized charges or transactions in connection with a customer's 
covered account.

   Notice From Customers, Victims of Identity Theft, Law Enforcement 
   Authorities, or Other Persons Regarding Possible Identity Theft in 
 Connection With Covered Accounts Held by the Financial Institution or 
                                Creditor

    26. The financial institution or creditor is notified by a customer, 
a victim of identity theft, a law enforcement authority, or any other 
person that it has opened a fraudulent

[[Page 697]]

account for a person engaged in identity theft.

[72 FR 63762, Nov. 9, 2007, as amended at 74 FR 22643, May 14, 2009; 76 
FR 14794, Mar. 18, 2011; 80 FR 65919, Oct. 28, 2015]



PART 335_SECURITIES OF STATE NONMEMBER BANKS AND STATE SAVINGS 
ASSOCIATIONS--Table of Contents



Sec.
335.101  Scope of part, authority and OMB control number.
335.111  Forms and schedules.
335.121  Listing standards related to audit committees.
335.201  Securities exempted from registration.
335.211  Registration and reporting.
335.221  Forms for registration of securities and cross reference to 
          Regulation FD (Fair Disclosure).
335.231  Certification, suspension of trading, and removal from listing 
          by exchanges.
335.241  Unlisted trading.
335.251  Forms for notification of action taken by national securities 
          exchanges.
335.261  Exemptions; terminations; and definitions.
335.301  Reports of issuers of securities registered pursuant to section 
          12.
335.311  Forms for annual, quarterly, current, and other reports of 
          issuers.
335.321  Maintenance of records and issuer's representations in 
          connection with required reports.
335.331  Acquisition statements, acquisition of securities by issuers, 
          and other matters.
335.401  Solicitations of proxies.
335.501  Tender offers.
335.601  Requirements of section 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 
          1934.
335.611  Initial statements of beneficial ownership of securities (Form 
          3).
335.612  Statement of changes in beneficial ownership of securities 
          (Form 4).
335.613  Annual statement of beneficial ownership of securities (Form 
          5).
335.701  Filing requirements, public reference, and confidentiality.
335.801  Inapplicable SEC regulations; FDIC substituted regulations; 
          additional information.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819; 15 U.S.C. 78j-1, 78l(i), 78m, 78n, 78p, 
78w, 5412, 5414, 5415, 7241, 7242, 7243, 7244, 7261, 7262, 7264, and 
7265.

    Source: 62 FR 6856, Feb. 14, 1997, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 335.101  Scope of part, authority and OMB control number.

    (a) This part is issued by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
(the FDIC) under section 12(i) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, 
15 U.S.C. 78 et seq. (the Exchange Act), and applies to all securities 
of FDIC-insured State nonmember banks (including foreign banks having an 
insured branch) and State savings associations that are subject to the 
registration requirements of section 12(b) or section 12(g) of the 
Exchange Act). The FDIC is vested with the powers, functions, and duties 
of the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) to administer and 
enforce sections 10A(m), 12, 13, 14(a), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f), and 16 of 
the Exchange Act) (15 U.S.C. 78j-1, 78l, 78m, 78n(a), 78n(c), 78n(d), 
78n(f), and 78p), and sections 302, 303, 304, 306, 401(b), 404, 406, and 
407 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (15 U.S.C. 7241, 7242, 7243, 7244, 
7261, 7262, 7264, and 7265) regarding State nonmember banks and State 
savings associations with one or more classes of securities subject to 
the registration provisions of sections 12(b) or 12(g) of the Exchange 
Act.
    (b) Part 335 generally incorporates through cross reference the 
regulations of the SEC as these regulations are issued, revised, or 
updated from time to time under sections 10A(m), 12, 13, 14(a), 14(c), 
14(d), 14(f), and 16 of the Exchange Act and sections 302, 303, 304, 
306, 401(b), 404, 406, and 407 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 
(Sarbanes-Oxley Act), except as provided at Sec. 335.801 of this part. 
References to the Commission in the regulations of the SEC are deemed to 
refer to the FDIC unless the context otherwise requires.

[62 FR 6856, Feb. 14, 1997, as amended at 69 FR 19088, Apr. 12, 2004; 69 
FR 59783, Oct. 6, 2004; 70 FR 16400, Mar. 31, 2005; 70 FR 44272, Aug. 2, 
2005; 79 FR 63501, Oct. 24, 2014]



Sec. 335.111  Forms and schedules.

    The Exchange Act regulations of the SEC, which are cross referenced 
under this part, require the filing of forms and schedules as 
applicable. Reference is made to SEC Exchange Act regulation 17 CFR part 
249 regarding the availability of all applicable SEC Exchange Act forms. 
Required schedules are codified and are found within the context of the 
SEC's regulations. All forms and schedules shall be titled

[[Page 698]]

with the name of the FDIC in substitution for the name of the SEC. The 
filing of forms and schedules shall be made with the FDIC at the address 
in Sec. 335.701 or may be filed electronically at FDICconnect at https:/
/www2.fdicconnect.gov/index.asp. However, electronic filing of 
Beneficial Ownership Forms 3, 4 and 5 is required. Copies of Forms 3 
(Sec. 335.611), 4 (Sec. 335.612) and 5 (Sec. 335.613) and the 
instructions thereto may be printed and downloaded from https://
www.fdic.gov/regulations/laws/forms.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.121  Listing standards related to audit committees.

    The provisions of the applicable SEC regulation under section 
10(A)(m) of the Exchange Act shall be followed as codified at 17 CFR 
part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.201  Securities exempted from registration.

    Persons subject to registration requirements under Exchange Act 
section 12 and subject to this part shall follow the applicable and 
currently effective SEC regulations relative to exemptions from 
registration issued under sections 3 and 12 of the Exchange Act as 
codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.211  Registration and reporting.

    Persons with securities subject to registration under Exchange Act 
sections 12(b) and 12(g), required to report under Exchange Act section 
13, and subject to this part shall follow the applicable and currently 
effective SEC regulations issued under section 12(b) of the Exchange Act 
as codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.221  Forms for registration of securities and cross reference
to Regulation FD (Fair Disclosure).

    (a) The applicable forms for registration of securities and similar 
matters are codified in 17 CFR part 249. All forms shall be filed with 
the FDIC as appropriate and shall be titled with the name of the FDIC 
instead of the SEC.
    (b) The requirements for Financial Statements can generally be found 
in Regulation S-X (17 CFR part 210). Banks and State savings 
associations may also refer to the instructions for Federal Financial 
Institutions Examination Council (FFIEC) Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income when preparing unaudited interim statements. The 
requirements for Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial 
Condition and Results of Operations can be found at 17 CFR part 229. 
Additional requirements are provided at Industry Guide 3, Statistical 
Disclosure by Bank Holding Companies, which is found at 17 CFR part 229.
    (c) The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulation FD shall be followed as codified at 17 CFR part 243.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010; 79 FR 63501, Oct. 24, 2014]



Sec. 335.231  Certification, suspension of trading, and removal from 
listing by exchanges.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under section 12(d) of the Exchange Act shall be followed as 
codified at 17 part CFR 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.241  Unlisted trading.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under section 12(f) of the Exchange Act shall be followed as 
codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.251  Forms for notification of action taken by national 
securities exchanges.

    The applicable forms for notification of action taken by national 
securities exchanges are codified in 17 CFR part 249. All forms shall be 
filed with the FDIC as appropriate and shall be titled with the name of 
the FDIC instead of the SEC.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.261  Exemptions, terminations, and definitions.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations

[[Page 699]]

under sections 12(g) and 12(h) of the Exchange Act shall be followed as 
codified in 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.301  Reports of issuers of securities registered pursuant
to section 12.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under section 13(a) of the Exchange Act shall be followed as 
codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.311  Forms for annual, quarterly, current, and other reports
of issuers.

    (a) The applicable forms for annual, quarterly, current, and other 
reports are codified in 17 CFR part 249. All forms shall be filed with 
the FDIC as appropriate and shall be titled with the name of the FDIC 
instead of the SEC.
    (b) The requirements for Financial Statements can generally be found 
in Regulation S-X (17 CFR part 210). Banks and State savings 
associations may also refer to the instructions for FFIEC Consolidated 
Reports of Condition and Income when preparing unaudited interim 
reports. The requirements for Management's Discussion and Analysis of 
Financial Condition and Results of Operations can be found at 17 CFR 
part 229. Additional requirements are included in Industry Guide 3, 
Statistical Disclosure by Bank Holding Companies, which is found at 17 
CFR part 229.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010, as amended at 79 FR 63501, Oct. 24, 2014]



Sec. 335.321  Maintenance of records and issuer's representations 
in connection with required reports.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under 13(b) of the Exchange Act shall be followed as 
codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.331  Acquisition statements, acquisition of securities 
by issuers, and other matters.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under sections 13(d) and 13(e) of the Exchange Act shall be 
followed as codifed at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73949, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.401  Solicitations of proxies.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under sections 14(a) and 14(c) of the Exchange Act shall be 
followed as codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.501  Tender offers.

    The provisions of the applicable and currently effective SEC 
regulations under sections 14(d), 14(e), and 14(f) of the Exchange Act 
shall be followed as codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.601  Requirements of section 16 of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934.

    Persons subject to section 16 of the Exchange Act with respect to 
securities registered under this part shall follow the applicable and 
currently effective SEC regulations issued under section 16 of the 
Exchange Act (17 CFR part 240), except that the forms described in 
Sec. 335.611 (FDIC Form 3), Sec. 335.612 (FDIC Form 4), and Sec. 335.613 
(FDIC Form 5) shall be used in lieu of SEC Form 3, Form 4, and Form 5, 
respectively. FDIC Forms 3, 4, and 5 shall be filed electronically on 
FDICconnect at https://www2.fdicconnect.gov/index.asp. Copies of FDIC 
Forms 3, 4, and 5 and the instructions thereto can be printed and 
downloaded at https://www.fdic.gov/regulations/laws/forms.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.611  Initial statement of beneficial ownership of securities 
(Form 3).

    This form shall be filed in lieu of SEC Form 3 pursuant to SEC rules 
for initial statements of beneficial ownership of securities. The FDIC 
is authorized to solicit the information required by this form pursuant 
to sections 16(a) and 23(a) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78p and 78w) 
and the rules and regulations thereunder. SEC regulations referenced in 
this form are codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010]

[[Page 700]]



Sec. 335.612  Statement of changes in beneficial ownership of 
securities (Form 4).

    This form shall be filed in lieu of SEC Form 4 pursuant to SEC Rules 
for statements of changes in beneficial ownership of securities. The 
FDIC is authorized to solicit the information required by this form 
pursuant to sections 16(a) and 23(a) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78p 
and 78w) and the rules and regulations thereunder. SEC regulations 
referenced in this form are codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.613  Annual statement of beneficial ownership of securities
(Form 5).

    This form shall be filed in lieu of SEC Form 5 pursuant to SEC Rules 
for annual statements of beneficial ownership of securities. The FDIC is 
authorized to solicit the information required by this form pursuant to 
sections 16(a) and 23(a) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78p and 78w) and 
the rules and regulations thereunder. SEC regulations referenced in this 
form are codified at 17 CFR part 240.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010]



Sec. 335.701  Filing requirements, public reference,
and confidentiality.

    (a) Filing requirements. Unless otherwise indicated in this part, 
one original and four conformed copies of all papers required to be 
filed with the FDIC under the Exchange Act or regulations thereunder 
shall be filed at its office in Washington, DC. Official filings may be 
filed electronically at https://www2.fdicconnect.gov/index.asp, except 
for FDIC Beneficial Ownership Forms 3, 4, and 5 for which electronic 
filing is mandatory as described in Sec. 335.801(b). Paper filings 
should be submitted to the FDIC's office in Washington, DC, and should 
be addressed as follows: Accounting and Securities Disclosure Section, 
Division of Risk Management Supervision, Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC 20429. Material may be 
filed by delivery to the FDIC through the mails or otherwise. The date 
on which paper filings are actually received by the designated FDIC 
office shall be the date of filing.
    (b) Inspection. Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, 
all information filed regarding a security registered with the FDIC will 
be available for inspection at the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, Accounting and Securities Disclosure Section, Division of 
Risk Management Supervision, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC. 
Beneficial ownership report forms and other official filings that are 
electronically submitted to the FDIC are available for inspection on the 
FDIC's Web site at http://www2.fdic.gov/efr/
    (c) Nondisclosure of certain information filed. Any person filing 
any statement, report, or document with the FDIC under the Exchange Act 
may make a written objection to the public disclosure of any information 
contained therein in accordance with the procedure set forth in this 
paragraph (c) or the instructions provided for electronic filing 
available on the FDIC's Web site https://www2.fdicconnect.gov/index.asp.
    (1) The person shall omit from the statement, report, or document, 
when it is filed, the portion thereof that it desires to keep 
undisclosed (hereinafter called the confidential portion). In lieu 
thereof, it shall indicate at the appropriate place in the statement, 
report, or document that the confidential portion has been so omitted 
and filed separately with the FDIC.
    (2) The person shall file with the copies of the statement, report, 
or document filed with the FDIC:
    (i) As many copies of the confidential portion, each clearly marked 
``Confidential Treatment,'' as there are copies of the statement, 
report, or document filed with the FDIC and with each exchange, if any. 
Each copy shall contain the complete text of the item and, 
notwithstanding that the confidential portion does not constitute the 
whole of the answer, the entire answer thereto; except that in the case 
where the confidential portion is part of a financial statement or 
schedule, only the particular financial statement or schedule need be 
included. All copies of the confidential portion shall be in the same 
form as the remainder of the statement, report, or document;

[[Page 701]]

    (ii) An application making objection to the disclosure of the 
confidential portion. Such application shall be on a sheet or sheets 
separate from the confidential portion and shall contain:
    (A) An identification of the portion of the statement, report, or 
document that has been omitted;
    (B) A statement of the grounds of the objection;
    (C) Consent that the FDIC may determine the question of public 
disclosure upon the basis of the application, subject to proper judicial 
reviews;
    (D) The name of each exchange, if any, with which the statement, 
report, or document is filed;
    (iii) The copies of the confidential portion and the application 
filed in accordance with this paragraph shall be enclosed in a separate 
envelope marked ``Confidential Treatment'' and addressed to Executive 
Secretary, Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Washington, DC 20429.
    (3) Pending the determination by the FDIC as to the objection filed 
in accordance with paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the 
confidential portion will not be disclosed by the FDIC.
    (4) If the FDIC determines that the objection shall be sustained, a 
notation to that effect will be made at the appropriate place in the 
statement, report, or document.
    (5) If the FDIC determines that disclosure of the confidential 
portion is in the public interest, a finding and determination to that 
effect will be entered and notice of the finding and determination will 
be sent by registered or certified mail to the person.
    (6) The confidential portion shall be made available to the public:
    (i) Upon the lapse of 15 days after the dispatch of notice by 
registered or certified mail of the finding and determination of the 
FDIC described in paragraph (c)(5) of this section, or the date of the 
electronic filing, if prior to the lapse of such 15 days the person 
shall not have filed a written statement that he intends in good faith 
to seek judicial review of the finding and determination;
    (ii) Upon the lapse of 60 days after the dispatch of notice by 
registered or certified mail, or the date of the electronic filing, of 
the finding and determination of the FDIC, if the statement described in 
paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section shall have been filed and if a 
petition for judicial review shall not have been filed within such 60 
days; or
    (iii) If such petition for judicial review shall have been filed 
within such 60 days upon final disposition, adverse to the person, of 
the judicial proceedings.
    (7) If the confidential portion is made available to the public, a 
copy thereof shall be attached to each copy of the statement, report, or 
document filed with the FDIC and with each exchange concerned.

[75 FR 73950, Nov. 30, 2010, as amended at 79 FR 63501, Oct. 24, 2014]



Sec. 335.801  Inapplicable SEC regulations; FDIC substituted 
regulations; additional information.

    (a) Filing fees. Filing fees will not be charged relative to any 
filings or submissions of materials made with the FDIC pursuant to the 
cross reference to regulations of the SEC issued under sections 10A(m), 
12, 13, 14, and 16 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 
78), sections 302, 303, 304, 306, 401(b), 404, 406, and 407 of the 
Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (15 U.S.C. 7241, 7242, 7243, 7244, 7261, 
7262, 7264, and 7265), and this part.
    (b) Electronic filings. (1) The FDIC does not participate in the 
SEC's EDGAR (Electronic Data Gathering Analysis and Retrieval) 
electronic filing program (17 CFR part 232). The FDIC permits voluntary 
electronically transmitted filings and submissions of correspondence and 
other materials in electronic format to the FDIC, with the exception of 
Beneficial Ownership Reports (Forms 3, 4, and 5) for which electronic 
filing is mandatory. Beneficial Ownership Report filing requirements are 
provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (2) All reporting persons must electronically file Beneficial 
Ownership Reports (FDIC Forms 3, 4, and 5), including amendments and 
exhibits thereto, using the Internet-based interagency Beneficial 
Ownership Filings System, except that a reporting person that has 
obtained a continuing hardship exemption under these rules may file the 
forms with the FDIC in paper

[[Page 702]]

format. For electronic filing purposes, FDIC Forms 3, 4, and 5 are 
accessible at the Internet-based interagency Web site for Beneficial 
Ownership Filings at FDICconnect at https://www2.fdicconnect.gov/
index.asp. These forms and the instructions thereto are available for 
printing and downloading at http://www.fdic.gov/regulations/laws/forms. 
A reporting person that has obtained a continuing hardship exemption 
under these rules may file the appropriate forms with the FDIC in paper 
format. Instructions for continuing hardship exemptions are provided in 
paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
    (3) Electronic filings of FDIC beneficial ownership report Forms 3, 
4, and 5 must be submitted to the FDIC through the interagency 
Beneficial Ownership Filings system. Beneficial ownership reports and 
any amendments are deemed filed with the FDIC upon electronic receipt on 
business days from 8 a.m. through 10 p.m., Eastern Standard Time or 
Eastern Daylight Saving Time, whichever is currently in effect (Eastern 
Time). Business days include each day, except Saturdays, Sundays and 
Federal holidays. All filings submitted electronically to the FDIC 
commencing after 10 p.m. Eastern Time on business days shall be deemed 
filed as of 8 a.m. on the following business day. All filings submitted 
electronically to the FDIC on non-business days shall be deemed filed as 
of 8 a.m. on the following business day.
    (4) Adjustment of the filing date. If an electronic filer in good 
faith attempts to file a beneficial ownership report with the FDIC in a 
timely manner but the filing is delayed due to technical difficulties 
beyond the electronic filer's control, the electronic filer may request 
an adjustment of the filing date of such submission. The FDIC may grant 
the request if it appears that such adjustment is appropriate and 
consistent with the public interest and the protection of investors.
    (5) Exhibits. (i) Exhibits to an electronic filing that have not 
previously been filed with the FDIC shall be filed in electronic format, 
absent a hardship exemption.
    (ii) Previously filed exhibits, whether in paper or electronic 
format, may be incorporated by reference into an electronic filing to 
the extent permitted by applicable SEC rules under the Exchange Act. An 
electronic filer may, at its option, restate in electronic format an 
exhibit incorporated by reference that originally was filed in paper 
format.
    (iii) Any document filed in paper format in violation of mandated 
electronic filing requirements shall not be incorporated by reference 
into an electronic filing.
    (6) Continuing Hardship Exemption. The FDIC will not accept in paper 
format any beneficial ownership report filing required to be submitted 
electronically under this part unless the filer satisfies the 
requirements for a continuing hardship exemption:
    (i) A filer may apply in writing for a continuing hardship exemption 
if all or part of a filing or group of filings otherwise required to be 
filed in electronic format cannot be so filed without undue burden or 
expense. Such written application shall be made at least ten business 
days prior to the required due date of the filing(s) or the proposed 
filing date, as appropriate, or within such shorter period as may be 
permitted. The written application shall be sent to the Accounting and 
Securities Disclosure Section, Division of Risk Management Supervision, 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, 
DC 20429, and shall contain the information set forth in paragraph 
(b)(6)(ii) of this section.
    (A) The application shall not be deemed granted until the applicant 
is notified by the FDIC.
    (B) If the FDIC denies the application for a continuing hardship 
exemption, the filer shall file the required document in electronic 
format on the required due date or the proposed filing date or such 
other date as may be permitted.
    (C) If the FDIC determines that the grant of the exemption is 
appropriate and consistent with the public interest and the protection 
of investors and so notifies the applicant, the filer shall follow the 
procedures set forth in paragraph (b)(6)(iii) of this section.
    (ii) The request for the continuing hardship exemption shall 
include, but not be limited to, the following:

[[Page 703]]

    (A) The reason(s) that the necessary hardware and software are not 
available without unreasonable burden and expense;
    (B) The burden and expense involved to employ alternative means to 
make the electronic submission; and/or
    (C) The reasons for not submitting electronically the document or 
group of documents, as well as justification for the requested time 
period for the exemption.
    (iii) If the request for a continuing hardship exemption is granted, 
the electronic filer shall submit the document or group of documents for 
which the exemption is granted in paper format on the required due date 
specified in the applicable form, rule or regulation, or the proposed 
filing date, as appropriate. The paper format document(s) shall have 
placed at the top of page 1, or at the top of an attached cover page, a 
legend in capital letters:

IN ACCORDANCE WITH 12 CFR 335.801(b), THIS (SPECIFY DOCUMENT) IS BEING 
FILED IN PAPER PURSUANT TO A CONTINUING HARDSHIP EXEMPTION.

    (iv) Where a continuing hardship exemption is granted with respect 
to an exhibit only, the paper format exhibit shall be filed with the 
FDIC under Form SE (17 CFR part 249). The name of the FDIC shall be 
substituted for the name of the SEC on the form. Form SE shall be filed 
as a paper cover sheet to all exhibits to Beneficial Ownership Reports 
submitted to the FDIC in paper form pursuant to a hardship exemption.
    (v) Form SE may be filed with the FDIC up to six business days prior 
to, or on the date of filing of, the electronic form to which it relates 
but shall not be filed after such filing date. If a paper exhibit is 
submitted in this manner, requirements that the exhibit be filed with, 
provided with, or accompany the electronic filing shall be satisfied. 
Any requirements as to delivery or furnishing the information to persons 
other than the FDIC shall not be affected by this section.
    (7) Signatures. (i) Required signatures to, or within, any 
electronic submission must be in typed form. When used in connection 
with an electronic filing, the term ``signature'' means an electronic 
entry or other form of computer data compilation of any letters or 
series of letters or characters comprising a name, executed, adopted or 
authorized as a signature.
    (ii) Each signatory to an electronic filing shall manually sign a 
signature page or other document authenticating, acknowledging or 
otherwise adopting his or her signature that appears in typed form 
within the electronic filing. Such document shall be executed before or 
at the time the electronic filing is made and shall be retained by the 
filer for a period of five years. Upon request, an electronic filer 
shall furnish to the FDIC a copy of any or all documents retained 
pursuant to this section.
    (iii) Where the FDIC's rules require a filer to furnish a national 
securities exchange, a national securities association, a bank, or State 
savings association, paper copies of a document filed with the FDIC in 
electronic format, signatures to such paper copies may be in typed form.
    (c) Legal proceedings. Whenever this part or cross referenced 
provisions of the SEC regulations require disclosure of legal 
proceedings, administrative or judicial proceedings arising under 
section 8 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act shall be deemed material 
and shall be described.
    (d) Indebtedness of management. Whenever this part of cross 
referenced provisions of the SEC regulations require disclosure of 
indebtedness of management, extensions of credit to specified persons in 
excess of ten (10) percent of the equity capital accounts of the bank or 
State savings association or $5 million, whichever is less, shall be 
deemed material and shall be disclosed in addition to any other required 
disclosure. The disclosure of this material indebtedness shall include 
the largest aggregate amount of indebtedness (in dollar amounts, and as 
a percentage of total equity capital accounts at the time), including 
extensions of credit or overdrafts, endorsements and guarantees 
outstanding at any time since the beginning of the bank or State savings 
association's last fiscal year, and as of the latest practicable date.
    (1) If aggregate extensions of credit to all specified persons as a 
group exceeded 20 percent of the equity capital

[[Page 704]]

accounts of the bank or State savings association at any time since the 
beginning of the last fiscal year, the aggregate amount of such 
extensions of credit shall also be disclosed.
    (2) Other loans are deemed material and shall be disclosed where:
    (i) The extension(s) of credit was not made on substantially the 
same terms, including interest rates, collateral and repayment terms as 
those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with other than 
the specified persons;
    (ii) The extension(s) of credit was not made in the ordinary course 
of business; or
    (iii) The extension(s) of credit has involved or presently involves 
more than a normal risk of collectibility or other unfavorable features 
including the restructuring of an extension of credit, or a delinquency 
as to payment of interest or principal.
    (e) Proxy material required to be filed. (1) Three preliminary 
copies of each information statement, proxy statement, form of proxy, 
and other item of soliciting material to be furnished to security 
holders concurrently therewith, shall be filed with the FDIC by the 
bank, State savings association, or any other person making a 
solicitation subject to 12 CFR 335.401 at least ten calendar days (or 15 
calendar days in the case of other than routine meetings, as defined in 
paragraph (e)(2) of this section) prior to the date such item is first 
sent or given to any security holders, or such shorter date as may be 
authorized.
    (2) For the purposes of this paragraph (e), a routine meeting means:
    (i) A meeting with respect to which no one is soliciting proxies 
subject to 12 CFR 335.401 other than on behalf of the bank or State 
savings association and at which the bank or State savings association 
intends to present no matters other than:
    (A) The election of directors;
    (B) The election, approval or ratification of accountants;
    (C) A Security holder proposal included pursuant to SEC Rule 14(a)-8 
(17 CFR 240.14a-8); and
    (D) The approval or ratification of a plan as defined in paragraph 
(a)(7)(ii) of Item 402 of SEC Regulation S-K (17 CFR 229.402(a)(7)(ii)) 
or amendments to such a plan; and
    (ii) The bank or State savings association does not comment upon or 
refer to a solicitation in opposition (as defined in 17 CFR 240.14a-6) 
in connection with the meeting in its proxy material.
    (3) Where preliminary copies of material are filed with the FDIC 
under this section, the printing of definitive copies for distribution 
to security holders should be deferred until the comments of the FDIC's 
staff have been received and considered.
    (f) Additional information; filing of other statements in certain 
cases. (1) In addition to the information expressly required to be 
included in a statement, form, schedule or report, there shall be added 
such further material information, if any, as may be necessary to make 
the required statements, in light of the circumstances under which they 
are made, not misleading.
    (2) The FDIC may, upon the written request of the bank or State 
savings association, and where consistent with the protection of 
investors, permit the omission of one or more of the statements or 
disclosures herein required, or the filing in substitution therefor of 
appropriate statements or disclosures of comparable character.
    (3) The FDIC may also require the filing of other statements or 
disclosures in addition to, or in substitution for those herein required 
in any case where such statements are necessary or appropriate for an 
adequate presentation of the financial condition of any person whose 
financial statements are required, or disclosure about which is 
otherwise necessary for the protection of investors.

[62 FR 6856, Feb. 14, 1997, as amended at 69 FR 19088, Apr. 12, 2004; 69 
FR 59783, Oct. 6, 2004; 70 FR 16400, Mar. 31, 2005; 70 FR 44273, Aug. 2, 
2005; 75 FR 73951, Nov. 30, 2010; 79 FR 63501, Oct. 24, 2014]

[[Page 705]]



PART 336_FDIC EMPLOYEES--Table of Contents



             Subpart A_Employee Responsibilities and Conduct

Sec.
336.1  Cross-reference to employee ethical conduct standards and 
          financial disclosure regulations.

 Subpart B_Minimum Standards of Fitness for Employment With the Federal 
                      Deposit Insurance Corporation

336.2  Authority, purpose and scope.
336.3  Definitions.
336.4  Minimum standards for appointment to a position with the FDIC.
336.5  Minimum standards for employment with the FDIC.
336.6  Verification of compliance.
336.7  Employee responsibility, counseling and distribution of 
          regulation.
336.8  Sanctions and remedial actions.
336.9  Finality of determination.

 Subpart C_One-Year Restriction on Post-Employment Activities of Senior 
                                Examiners

336.10  Purpose and scope.
336.11  Definitions.
336.12  One-year post-employment restriction.
336.13  Penalties.

    Source: 61 FR 28728, June 6, 1996, unless otherwise noted.



             Subpart A_Employee Responsibilities and Conduct

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 7301; 12 U.S.C. 1819(a).



Sec. 336.1  Cross-reference to employee ethical conduct standards
and financial disclosure regulations.

    Employees of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Corporation) 
are subject to the Executive Branch-wide Standards of Ethical Conduct at 
5 CFR part 2635, the Corporation regulation at 5 CFR part 3201 which 
supplements the Executive Branch-wide Standards, the Executive Branch-
wide financial disclosure regulations at 5 CFR part 2634, and the 
Corporation regulation at 5 CFR part 3202, which supplements the 
Executive Branch-wide financial disclosure regulations.



 Subpart B_Minimum Standards of Fitness for Employment With the Federal 
                      Deposit Insurance Corporation

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819 (Tenth), 1822(f).



Sec. 336.2  Authority, purpose and scope.

    (a) Authority. This part is adopted pursuant to section 12(f) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1822, and the rulemaking 
authority of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) found at 
12 U.S.C. 1819. This part is in addition to, and not in lieu of, any 
other statutes or regulations which may apply to standards for ethical 
conduct or fitness for employment with the FDIC and is consistent with 
the goals and purposes of 18 U.S.C. 201, 203, 205, 208, and 209.
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of this part is to state the minimum 
standards of fitness and integrity required of individuals who provide 
service to or on behalf of the FDIC and provide procedures for 
implementing these requirements.
    (c) Scope. (1) This part applies to applicants for employment with 
the FDIC under title 5 of the U.S. Code appointing authority in either 
the excepted or competitive service, including Special Government 
Employees. This part applies to all appointments, regardless of tenure, 
including intermittent, temporary, time-limited and permanent 
appointments.
    (2) In addition, this part applies to all employees of the FDIC who 
serve under an appointing authority under chapter 21 of title 5 of the 
U.S. Code.
    (3) Further, this part applies to any individual who, pursuant to a 
contract or any other arrangement, performs functions or activities of 
the Corporation, under the direct supervision of an officer or employee 
of the Corporation.



Sec. 336.3  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this part:
    (a) Company means any corporation, firm, partnership, society, joint 
venture, business trust, association or similar organization, or any 
other trust unless by its terms it must terminate within twenty-five 
years or not later than twenty-one years and ten

[[Page 706]]

months after the death of individuals living on the effective date of 
the trust, or any other organization or institution, but shall not 
include any corporation the majority of the shares of which are owned by 
the United States, any state, or the District of Columbia.
    (b) Control means the power to vote, directly or indirectly, 25 
percent or more of any class of the voting stock of a company, the 
ability to direct in any manner the election of a majority of a 
company's directors or trustees, or the ability to exercise a 
controlling influence over the company's management and policies. For 
purposes of this definition, a general partner of a limited partnership 
is presumed to be in control of that partnership. For purposes of this 
part, an entity or individual shall be presumed to have control of a 
company if the entity or individual directly or indirectly, or acting in 
concert with one or more entities or individuals, or through one or more 
subsidiaries, owns or controls 25 percent or more of its equity, or 
otherwise controls or has power to control its management or policies.
    (c) Default on a material obligation means a loan or advance from an 
insured depository institution which is or was delinquent for 90 or more 
days as to payment of principal or interest, or any combination thereof.
    (d) Employee means any officer or employee, including a liquidation 
graded or temporary employee, providing service to or on behalf of the 
FDIC who has been appointed to a position under an authority contained 
in title 5 of the U.S. Code. This definition excludes those individuals 
designated by title 5 of the U.S. Code as officials in the Federal 
Executive Schedule.
    (e) Federal banking agency means the Office of the Comptroller of 
the Currency, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, or 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, or their predecessors or 
successors.
    (f) Federal deposit insurance fund means the Deposit Insurance Fund, 
the former Bank Insurance Fund, the former Savings Association Insurance 
Fund, the Federal Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation (FSLIC) 
Resolution Trust, or the funds formerly maintained by the Resolution 
Trust Corporation (RTC), or their successors, for the benefit of insured 
depositors.
    (g) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, in its 
receivership and corporate capacities.
    (h) Insured depository institution means any bank or savings 
association the deposits of which are insured by the FDIC.
    (i) Pattern or practice of defalcation regarding obligations means:
    (1) A history of financial irresponsibility with regard to debts 
owed to insured depository institutions which are in default in excess 
of $50,000 in the aggregate. Examples of such financial irresponsibility 
include, without limitation:
    (i) Failure to pay a debt or debts totalling more than $50,000 
secured by an uninsured property which is destroyed; or
    (ii) Abuse of credit cards or incurring excessive debt well beyond 
the individual's ability to repay resulting in default(s) in excess of 
$50,000 in the aggregate.
    (2) Wrongful refusal to fulfill duties and obligations to insured 
depository institutions. Examples of such wrongful refusal to fulfill 
duties and obligations include, without limitation:
    (i) Any use of false financial statements;
    (ii) Misrepresentation as to the individual's ability to repay 
debts;
    (iii) Concealing assets from the insured depository institution;
    (iv) Any instance of fraud, embezzlement or similar misconduct in 
connection with an obligation to the insured depository institution; and
    (v) Any conduct described in any civil or criminal judgment against 
an individual for breach of any obligation, contractual or otherwise, or 
any duty of loyalty or care that the individual owed to an insured 
depository institution.
    (3) Defaults shall not be considered a pattern or practice of 
defalcation where the defaults are caused by catastrophic events beyond 
the control of the employee such as death, disability, illness or loss 
of financial support.
    (j) Substantial loss to federal deposit insurance funds--(1) 
Substantial loss to federal deposit insurance funds means:

[[Page 707]]

    (i) A loan or advance from an insured depository institution, which 
is now owed to the FDIC, RTC, FSLIC or their successors, or any federal 
deposit insurance fund, that is delinquent for ninety (90) or more days 
as to payment of principal, interest, or a combination thereof and on 
which there remains a legal obligation to pay an amount in excess of 
$50,000; or
    (ii) A final judgment in excess of $50,000 in favor of any federal 
deposit insurance fund, the FDIC, RTC, FSLIC, or their successors 
regardless of whether it becomes forgiven in whole or in part in a 
bankruptcy proceeding.
    (2) For purposes of computing the $50,000 ceiling in paragraphs 
(j)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section, all delinquent judgments, loans, or 
advances currently owed to the FDIC, RTC, FSLIC or their successors, or 
any federal deposit insurance fund, shall be aggregated. In no event 
shall delinquent loans or advances from different insured depository 
institutions be separately considered.

[61 FR 28728, June 6, 1996, as amended at 71 FR 20526, Apr. 21, 2006; 79 
FR 42183, July 21, 2014]



Sec. 336.4  Minimum standards for appointment to a position with
the FDIC.

    (a) No person shall become employed on or after June 18, 1994, by 
the FDIC or otherwise perform any service for or on behalf of the FDIC 
who has:
    (1) Been convicted of any felony;
    (2) Been removed from, or prohibited from participating in the 
affairs of, any insured depository institution pursuant to any final 
enforcement action by any appropriate federal banking agency;
    (3) Demonstrated a pattern or practice of defalcation regarding 
obligations to insured depository institutions; or
    (4) Caused a substantial loss to federal deposit insurance funds.
    (b) Prior to an offer of employment, any person applying for 
employment with the FDIC shall sign a certification of compliance with 
the minimum standards listed in paragraphs (a) (1) through (4) of this 
section. In addition, any person applying for employment with the FDIC 
shall provide as an attachment to the certification any instance in 
which the applicant, or a company under the applicant's control, 
defaulted on a material obligation to an insured depository institution 
within the preceding five years.
    (c) Incumbent employees who separate from the FDIC and are 
subsequently reappointed after a break in service of more than three 
days are subject to the minimum standards listed in paragraphs (a) (1) 
though (4) of this section. The former employee is required to submit a 
new certification statement including attachments, as provided in 
paragraph (b) of this section, prior to appointment to the new position.



Sec. 336.5  Minimum standards for employment with the FDIC.

    (a) No person who is employed by the FDIC shall continue in 
employment in any manner whatsoever or perform any service for or on 
behalf of the FDIC who, beginning June 18, 1994 and thereafter:
    (1) Is convicted of any felony;
    (2) Is prohibited from participating in the affairs of any insured 
depository institution pursuant to any final enforcement action by any 
appropriate federal banking agency;
    (3) Demonstrates a pattern or practice of defalcation regarding 
obligations to insured depository institution(s); or
    (4) Causes a substantial loss to federal deposit insurance funds.
    (b) Any noncompliance with the standards listed in paragraphs (a) 
(1) through (4) of this section is a basis for removal from employment 
with the FDIC.



Sec. 336.6  Verification of compliance.

    The FDIC's Division of Administration shall order appropriate 
investigations as authorized by 12 U.S.C. 1819 and 1822 on newly 
appointed employees, either prior to or following appointment, to verify 
compliance with the minimum standards listed under Sec. 336.4(a) (1) 
through (4).

[[Page 708]]



Sec. 336.7  Employee responsibility, counseling and distribution
of regulation.

    (a) Each employee is responsible for being familiar with and 
complying with the provisions of this part.
    (b) The Ethics Counselor shall provide a copy of this part to each 
new employee within 30 days of initial appointment.
    (c) An employee who believes that he or she may not be in compliance 
with the minimum standards provided under Sec. 336.5(a)(1) through (4), 
or who receives a demand letter from the FDIC for any reason, shall make 
a written report of all relevant facts to the Ethics Counselor within 
ten (10) business days after the employee discovers the possible 
noncompliance, or after the receipt of a demand letter from the FDIC.
    (d) The Ethics Counselor shall provide guidance to employees 
regarding the appropriate statutes, regulations and corporate policies 
affecting employee's ethical responsibilities and conduct under this 
part.
    (e) The Ethics Counselor shall provide the Personnel Services Branch 
with notice of an employee's noncompliance.



Sec. 336.8  Sanctions and remedial actions.

    (a) Any employee found not in compliance with the minimum standards 
except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section below shall be 
terminated and prohibited from providing further service for or on 
behalf of the FDIC in any capacity. No other remedial action is 
authorized for sanctions for noncompliance.
    (b) Any employee found not in compliance with the minimum standards 
under Sec. 336.5(a)(3) based on financial irresponsibility as defined in 
Sec. 336.3(i)(1) shall be terminated consistent with applicable 
procedures and prohibited from providing future services for or on 
behalf of the FDIC in any capacity, unless the employee brings him or 
herself into compliance with the minimum standards as provided in 
paragraphs (b) (1) and (2) of this section.
    (1) Upon written notification by the Corporation of financial 
irresponsibility, the employee will be allowed a reasonable period of 
time to establish an agreement that satisfies the creditor and the FDIC 
as to resolution of outstanding indebtedness or otherwise resolves the 
matter to the satisfaction of the FDIC prior to the initiation of a 
termination action.
    (2) As part of the agreement described in paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section, the employee shall provide authority to the creditor to report 
any violation by the employee of the terms of the agreement directly to 
the FDIC Ethics Counselor.



Sec. 336.9  Finality of determination.

    Any determination made by the FDIC pursuant to this part shall be at 
the FDIC's sole discretion and shall not be subject to further review.



 Subpart C_One-Year Restriction on Post-Employment Activities of Senior 
                                Examiners

    Source: 70 FR 69639, Nov. 17, 2005, unless otherwise noted.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819 and 1820(k).



Sec. 336.10  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart applies to officers or employees of the FDIC who are 
subject to the post-employment restrictions set forth in section 10(k) 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1820(k), and implements 
those restrictions as they apply to officers and employees of the FDIC.



Sec. 336.11  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Bank holding company has the meaning given to such term in 
section 2 of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(a)).
    (b) A consultant for an insured depository institution or other 
company shall include only individuals who work directly on matters for, 
or on behalf of, such institution or other company.
    (c) Control has the meaning given to such term in section 336.3(b), 
and a foreign bank shall be deemed to control any insured branch of the 
foreign bank.
    (d) Depository institution means any bank or savings association, 
including a branch of a foreign bank, if such branch is located in the 
United States.

[[Page 709]]

    (e) Foreign bank means any bank or company described in section 8(a) 
of the International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3106(a)).
    (f) Savings and loan holding company has the meaning given to such 
term in section 10(a)(1)(D) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1467a(a)(1)(D)).
    (g) A senior examiner for an insured depository institution means an 
officer or employee of the FDIC--
    (1) who has been authorized by the FDIC to conduct examinations or 
inspections of insured depository institutions on behalf of the FDIC;
    (2) who has been assigned continuing, broad, and lead responsibility 
for the examination or inspection of the institution;
    (3) who routinely interacts with officers or employees of the 
institution or its affiliates; and
    (4) whose responsibilities with respect to the institution represent 
a substantial portion of the FDIC officer or employee's overall 
responsibilities.



Sec. 336.12  One-year post-employment restriction.

    (a) Prohibition. An officer or employee of the FDIC who serves as a 
senior examiner of an insured depository institution for at least 2 
months during the last 12 months of that individual's employment with 
the FDIC may not, within 1 year after the termination date of his or her 
employment with the FDIC, knowingly accept compensation as an employee, 
officer, director, or consultant from--
    (1) The insured depository institution; or
    (2) Any company (including a bank holding company or savings and 
loan holding company) that controls such institution.
    (b) Waivers. The post-employment restrictions in paragraph (a) of 
this section will not apply to a senior examiner if the FDIC Chairperson 
certifies in writing and on a case-by case basis that a waiver of the 
restrictions will not affect the integrity of the FDIC's supervisory 
program.
    (c) Effective Date. The post-employment restrictions in paragraph 
(a) of this section will not apply to any officer or employee of the 
FDIC, or any former officer or employee of the FDIC, who ceased to be an 
officer or employee of the FDIC before December 17, 2005.



Sec. 336.13  Penalties.

    (a) Penalties under section 10(k) of the FDI Act. A senior examiner 
of the FDIC who violates the post-employment restrictions set forth in 
Sec. 336.12 shall be subject to the following penalties--
    (1) An order--
    (i) Removing such person from office or prohibiting such person from 
further participation in the affairs of the relevant insured depository 
institution or company (including a bank holding company or savings and 
loan holding company) that controls such institution for a period of up 
to five years, and
    (ii) Prohibiting any further participation by such person, in any 
manner, in the affairs of any insured depository institution for a 
period of up to five years; or
    (2) A civil monetary penalty of not more than $250,000; or
    (3) Both.
    (b) Enforcement by appropriate Federal banking agency of hiring 
entity. Violations of Sec. 336.12 shall be enforced by the appropriate 
Federal banking agency of the depository institution, depository 
institution holding company, or other company at which the violation 
occurred, as determined under section 10(k)(6), which may be an agency 
other than the FDIC.
    (c) Scope of prohibition orders. Any senior examiner who is subject 
to an order issued under paragraph (a)(1) of this section shall, as 
required by 12 U.S.C. 1820(k)(6)(B), be subject to paragraphs (6) and 
(7) of section 8(e) in the same manner and to the same extent as a 
person subject to an order issued under section 8(e).
    (d) Other penalties. The penalties set forth in paragraph (a) of 
this section are not exclusive, and a senior examiner who violates the 
restrictions in Sec. 336.12 may also be subject to other administrative, 
civil, or criminal remedies or penalties as provided by law.



PART 337_UNSAFE AND UNSOUND BANKING PRACTICES--Table of Contents



Sec.
337.1  Scope.

[[Page 710]]

337.2  Standby letters of credit.
337.3  Limits on extensions of credit to executive officers, directors, 
          and principal shareholders of insured nonmember banks.
337.4  [Reserved]
337.5  Exemption.
337.6  Brokered deposits.
337.7-337.9  [Reserved]
337.10  Waiver.
337.11  Effect on other banking practices.
337.12  Frequency of examination.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 375a(4), 375b, 1463(a)(1), 1816, 1818(a), 
1818(b), 1819, 1820(d), 1828(j)(2), 1831, 1831f, 5412.

    Source: 39 FR 29179, Aug. 14, 1974, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 337.1  Scope.

    The provisions of this part apply to certain banking practices which 
are likely to have adverse effects on the safety and soundness of 
insured State nonmember banks or which are likely to result in 
violations of law, rule, or regulation.



Sec. 337.2  Standby letters of credit.

    (a) Definition. As used in this section, the term standby letter of 
credit means any letter of credit, or similar arrangement however named 
or described, which represents an obligation to the beneficiary on the 
part of the issuer: (1) To repay money borrowed by or advanced to or for 
the account of the account party, or (2) to make payment on account of 
any indebtedness undertaken by the account party, or (3) to make payment 
on account of any default (including any statement of default) by the 
account party in the performance of an obligation. \1\ The term similar 
arrangement includes the creation of an acceptance or similar 
undertaking.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ As defined in this paragraph (a), the term standby letter of 
credit would not include commercial letters of credit and similar 
instruments where the issuing bank expects the beneficiary to draw upon 
the issuer, which do not ``guaranty'' payment of a money obligation of 
the account party and which do not provide that payment is occasioned by 
default on the part of the account party.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Restriction. A standby letter of credit issued by an insured 
State nonmember bank shall be combined with all other standby letters of 
credit and all loans for purposes of applying any legal limitation on 
loans of the bank (including limitations on loans to any one borrower, 
on loans to affiliates of the bank, or on aggregate loans); Provided, 
however, That if such standby letter of credit is subject to separate 
limitation under applicable State or federal law, then the separate 
limitation shall apply in lieu of the loan limitation. \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ Where the standby letter of credit is subject to a non-recourse 
participation agreement with another bank or other banks, this section 
shall apply to the issuer and each participant in the same manner as in 
the case of a participated loan.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Exceptions. All standby letters of credit shall be subject to 
the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section except where:
    (1) Prior to or at the time of issuance, the issuing bank is paid an 
amount equal to the bank's maximum liability under the standby letter of 
credit; or,
    (2) Prior to or at the time of issuance, the issuing bank has set 
aside sufficient funds in a segregated deposit account, clearly 
earmarked for that purpose, to cover the bank's maximum liability under 
the standby letter of credit.
    (d) Disclosure. Each insured State nonmember bank must maintain 
adequate control and subsidiary records of its standby letters of credit 
comparable to the records maintained in connection with the bank's 
direct loans so that at all times the bank's potential liability 
thereunder and the bank's compliance with this section may be readily 
determined. In addition, all such standby letters of credit must be 
adequately reflected on the bank's published financial statements.



Sec. 337.3  Limits on extensions of credit to executive officers,
directors, and principal shareholders of insured nonmember banks.

    (a) With the exception of 12 CFR 215.5(b), 215.5(c)(3), 215.5(c)(4), 
and 215.11, insured nonmember banks are subject to the restrictions 
contained in subpart A of Federal Reserve Board Regulation O (12 CFR 
part 215, subpart A) to the same extent and to the same manner as though 
they were member banks.

[[Page 711]]

    (b) For the purposes of compliance with Sec. 215.4(b) of Federal 
Reserve Board Regulation O, no insured nonmember bank may extend credit 
or grant a line of credit to any of its executive officers, directors, 
or principal shareholders or to any related interest of any such person 
in an amount that, when aggregated with the amount of all other 
extensions of credit and lines of credit by the bank to that person and 
to all related interests of that person, exceeds the greater of $25,000 
or five percent of the bank's capital and unimpaired surplus, \3\ or 
$500,000 unless (1) the extension of credit or line of credit has been 
approved in advance by a majority of the entire board of directors of 
that bank and (2) the interested party has abstained from participating 
directly or indirectly in the voting.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ For the purposes of Sec. 337.3, an insured nonmember bank's 
capital and unimpaired surplus shall have the same meaning as found in 
Sec. 215.2(f) of Federal Reserve Board Regulation O (12 CFR 215.2(f)).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c)(1) No insured nonmember bank may extend credit in an aggregate 
amount greater than the amount permitted in paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section to a partnership in which one or more of the bank's executive 
officers are partners and, either individually or together, hold a 
majority interest. For the purposes of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, 
the total amount of credit extended by an insured nonmember bank to such 
partnership is considered to be extended to each executive officer of 
the insured nonmember bank who is a member of the partnership.
    (2) An insured nonmember bank is authorized to extend credit to any 
executive officer of the bank for any other purpose not specified in 
Sec. 215.5(c)(1) and (2) of Federal Reserve Board Regulation O (12 CFR 
215.5(c)(1) and (2)) if the aggregate amount of such other extensions of 
credit does not exceed at any one time the higher of 2.5 percent of the 
bank's capital and unimpaired surplus or $25,000 but in no event more 
than $100,000, provided, however, that no such extension of credit shall 
be subject to this limit if the extension of credit is secured by:
    (i) A perfected security interest in bonds, notes, certificates of 
indebtedness, or Treasury bills of the United States or in other such 
obligations fully guaranteed as to principal and interest by the United 
States;
    (ii) Unconditional takeout commitments or guarantees of any 
department, agency, bureau, board, commission or establishment of the 
United States or any corporation wholly owned directly or indirectly by 
the United States; or
    (iii) A perfected security interest in a segregated deposit account 
in the lending bank.
    (3) Any extension of credit that was outstanding on May 28, 1992 and 
that would if made on or after that date violate paragraph (c)(1) or 
paragraph (c)(2) of this Sec. 337.3 shall be reduced in amount by May 
28, 1993 so that the extension of credit is in compliance with the 
lending limit set forth in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section. 
Any renewal or extension of such an extension of credit on or after May 
28, 1992 shall be made only on terms that will bring the extension of 
credit into compliance with the lending limit of paragraphs (c)(1) and 
(c)(2) of this section by May 28, 1993, however, any extension of credit 
made before May 28, 1992 that bears a specific maturity date of May 28, 
1993 or later shall be repaid in accordance with its repayment schedule 
in existence on or before May 28, 1992.
    (4) If an insured nonmember bank is unable to bring all extensions 
of credit outstanding as of May 28, 1992 into compliance as required by 
paragraph (c)(3) of this Sec. 337.3, the bank may at the discretion of 
the appropriate FDIC regional director (Division of Supervision and 
Consumer Protection (DSC)) obtain, for good cause shown, not more than 
two additional one-year periods to come into compliance.
    (5) For the purposes of paragraph (c) of this section, the 
definitions of the terms used in Federal Reserve Board Regulation O 
shall apply including the exclusion of executive officers of a bank's 
parent bank holding company and executive officers of any other 
subsidiary of that bank holding company from the definition of executive 
officer for the purposes of complying with the loan restrictions 
contained in section 22(g) of the Federal Reserve Act. For the purposes 
of complying with

[[Page 712]]

Sec. 215.5(d) of Federal Reserve Board Regulation O, the reference to 
``the amount specified for a category of credit in paragraph (c) of this 
section'' shall be understood to refer to the amount specified in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this Sec. 337.3.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
3064-0108)

[47 FR 47003, Oct. 22, 1982, as amended at 48 FR 42971, Sept. 21, 1983; 
57 FR 7649, Mar. 4, 1992; 57 FR 17850, Apr. 28, 1992; 57 FR 28457, June 
25, 1992; 59 FR 66668, Dec. 28, 1994]



Sec. 337.4  [Reserved]



Sec. 337.5  Exemption.

    Check guaranty card programs, customer-sponsored credit card 
programs, and similar arrangements in which a bank undertakes to 
guarantee the obligations of individuals who are its retail banking 
deposit customers are exempted from Sec. 337.2: Provided, however, That 
the bank establishes the creditworthiness of the individual before 
undertaking to guarantee his/her obligations and that any such 
arrangement to which a bank's principal shareholders, directors, or 
executive officers are a party be in compliance with applicable 
provisions of Federal Reserve Regulation O (12 CFR part 215).

[50 FR 10495, Mar. 15, 1985]



Sec. 337.6  Brokered deposits.

    (a) Definitions. For the purposes of this Sec. 337.6, the following 
definitions apply:
    (1) Appropriate Federal banking agency has the same meaning as 
provided under section 3(q) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1813(q)).
    (2) Brokered deposit means any deposit that is obtained, directly or 
indirectly, from or through the mediation or assistance of a deposit 
broker.
    (3) Capital categories. (i) For purposes of section 29 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act and this Sec. 337.6, the terms well 
capitalized, adequately capitalized, and undercapitalized, \11\ shall 
have the same meaning as to each insured depository institution as 
provided under regulations implementing section 38 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act issued by the appropriate federal banking agency 
for that institution. \12\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \11\ The term undercapitalized includes any institution that is 
significantly undercapitalized or critically undercapitalized under 
regulations implementing section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
and issued by the appropriate federal banking agency for that 
institution.
    \12\ For the most part, the capital measure terms are defined in the 
following regulations: FDIC--12 CFR part 325, subpart B or 12 CFR part 
324, subpart H, as applicable; Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System--12 CFR part 208; and Office of the Comptroller of the Currency--
12 CFR part 6.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) If the appropriate federal banking agency reclassifies a well 
capitalized insured depository institution as adequately capitalized 
pursuant to section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, the 
institution so reclassified shall be subject to the provisions 
applicable to such lower capital category under this Sec. 337.6.
    (iii) An insured depository institution shall be deemed to be within 
a given capital category for purposes of this Sec. 337.6 as of the date 
the institution is notified of, or is deemed to have notice of, its 
capital category, under regulations implementing section 38 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act issued by the appropriate federal banking 
agency for that institution. \13\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \13\ The regulations implementing section 38 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act and issued by the federal banking agencies generally 
provide that an insured depository institution is deemed to have been 
notified of its capital levels and its capital category as of the most 
recent date: (1) A Consolidated Report of Condition and Income is 
required to be filed with the appropriate federal banking agency; (2) A 
final report of examination is delivered to the institution; or (3) 
Written notice is provided by the appropriate federal banking agency to 
the institution of its capital category for purposes of section 38 of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act and implementing regulations or that 
the institution's capital category has changed. Provisions specifying 
the effective date of determination of capital category are generally 
published in the following regulations: FDIC--12 CFR 325.102 or 12 CFR 
324.402, as applicable. Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System--12 CFR 208.32. Office of the Comptroller of the Currency--12 CFR 
6.3.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Deposit has the same meaning as provided under section 3(l) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(1)).

[[Page 713]]

    (5) Deposit broker. (i) The term deposit broker means:
    (A) Any person engaged in the business of placing deposits, or 
facilitating the placement of deposits, of third parties with insured 
depository institutions, or the business of placing deposits with 
insured depository institutions for the purpose of selling interests in 
those deposits to third parties; and
    (B) An agent or trustee who establishes a deposit account to 
facilitate a business arrangement with an insured depository institution 
to use the proceeds of the account to fund a prearranged loan.
    (ii) The term deposit broker does not include:
    (A) An insured depository institution, with respect to funds placed 
with that depository institution;
    (B) An employee of an insured depository institution, with respect 
to funds placed with the employing depository institution;
    (C) A trust department of an insured depository institution, if the 
trust or other fiduciary relationship in question has not been 
established for the primary purpose of placing funds with insured 
depository institutions;
    (D) The trustee of a pension or other employee benefit plan, with 
respect to funds of the plan;
    (E) A person acting as a plan administrator or an investment adviser 
in connection with a pension plan or other employee benefit plan 
provided that person is performing managerial functions with respect to 
the plan;
    (F) The trustee of a testamentary account;
    (G) The trustee of an irrevocable trust (other than one described in 
paragraph (a)(5)(i)(B) of this section), as long as the trust in 
question has not been established for the primary purpose of placing 
funds with insured depository institutions;
    (H) A trustee or custodian of a pension or profit-sharing plan 
qualified under section 401(d) or 403(a) of the Internal Revenue Code of 
1986 (26 U.S.C. 401(d) or 403(a));
    (I) An agent or nominee whose primary purpose is not the placement 
of funds with depository institutions; or
    (J) An insured depository institution acting as an intermediary or 
agent of a U.S. government department or agency for a government 
sponsored minority or women-owned depository institution deposit 
program.
    (iii) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(5)(ii) of this section, the term 
deposit broker includes any insured depository institution that is not 
well-capitalized, and any employee of any such insured depository 
institution, which engages, directly or indirectly, in the solicitation 
of deposits by offering rates of interest (with respect to such 
deposits) which are significantly higher than the prevailing rates of 
interest on deposits offered by other insured depository institutions in 
such depository institution's normal market area.
    (6) Employee means any employee: (i) Who is employed exclusively by 
the insured depository institution;
    (ii) Whose compensation is primarily in the form of a salary;
    (iii) Who does not share such employee's compensation with a deposit 
broker; and
    (iv) Whose office space or place of business is used exclusively for 
the benefit of the insured depository institution which employs such 
individual.
    (7) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (8) Insured depository institution means any bank, savings 
association, or branch of a foreign bank insured under the provisions of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq.).
    (b) Solicitation and acceptance of brokered deposits by insured 
depository institutions. (1) A well capitalized insured depository 
institution may solicit and accept, renew or roll over any brokered 
deposit without restriction by this section.
    (2)(i) An adequately capitalized insured depository institution may 
not accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposit unless it has 
applied for and been granted a waiver of this prohibition by the FDIC in 
accordance with the provisions of this section.
    (ii) Any adequately capitalized insured depository institution that 
has been granted a waiver to accept, renew or roll over a brokered 
deposit may not pay an effective yield on any such deposit which, at the 
time that such deposit is accepted, renewed or rolled

[[Page 714]]

over, exceeds by more than 75 basis points:
    (A) The effective yield paid on deposits of comparable size and 
maturity in such institution's normal market area for deposits accepted 
from within its normal market area; or
    (B) The national rate paid on deposits of comparable size and 
maturity for deposits accepted outside the institution's normal market 
area. For purposes of this paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(B), the national rate 
shall be a simple average of rates paid by all insured depository 
institutions and branches for which data are available. This rate shall 
be determined by the FDIC.
    (3)(i) An undercapitalized insured depository institution may not 
accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposit.
    (ii) An undercapitalized insured depository institution may not 
solicit deposits by offering an effective yield that exceeds by more 
than 75 basis points the prevailing effective yields on insured deposits 
of comparable maturity in such institution's normal market area or in 
the market area in which such deposits are being solicited.
    (c) Waiver. The FDIC may, on a case-by-case basis and upon 
application by an adequately capitalized insured depository institution, 
waive the prohibition on the acceptance, renewal or rollover of brokered 
deposits upon a finding that such acceptance, renewal or rollover does 
not constitute an unsafe or unsound practice with respect to such 
institution. The FDIC may conclude that it is not unsafe or unsound and 
may grant a waiver when the acceptance, renewal or rollover of brokered 
deposits is determined to pose no undue risk to the institution. Any 
waiver granted may be revoked at any time by written notice to the 
institution. For filing requirements, consult 12 CFR 303.243.
    (d) Exclusion for institutions in FDIC conservatorship. No insured 
depository institution for which the FDIC has been appointed conservator 
shall be subject to the prohibition on the acceptance, renewal or 
rollover of brokered deposits contained in this Sec. 337.6 or section 29 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act for 90 days after the date on which 
the institution was placed in conservatorship. During this 90-day 
period, the institution shall, nevertheless, be subject to the 
restriction on the payment of interest contained in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) 
of the section. After such 90-day period, the institution may not 
accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposit.
    (e) A market is any readily defined geographical area in which the 
rates offered by any one insured depository institution soliciting 
deposits in that area may affect the rates offered by other insured 
depository institutions operating in the same area. The effective yield 
on a deposit with an odd maturity shall be determined by interpolating 
between the yields offered by other insured depository institutions on 
deposits of the next longer and shorter maturities offered in the 
market. For purposes of this Sec. 337.6, a presumption shall exist that 
the prevailing rate or effective yield in the relevant market is the 
national rate as defined in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(B) of this section 
unless the FDIC determines, in its sole discretion based on available 
evidence, that the effective yield in that market differs from the 
national rate. Evidence of the effective yield in a particular market 
may include (but is not limited to) the following:
    (1) Evidence as to the rates paid by other insured depository 
institutions in the same State, county or metropolitan statistical area 
(though the FDIC shall not be obligated to recognize each State, county 
or metropolitan statistical area as a separate market area);
    (2) Evidence as to the rates paid by credit unions in the same 
market area if the FDIC determines that the insured depository 
institution competes directly with these credit unions; and
    (3) Evidence as to the different rates paid on different deposit 
products in the same market area (though the FDIC shall not be obligated 
to recognize all alleged distinctions among various deposit products). 
(Example: For a particular market, evidence exists that the rates on 
money market deposit accounts (MMDAs) differ from the rates on 
negotiable order of withdrawal (NOW) accounts. MMDAs are distinguishable 
from NOW accounts in that the two types of accounts are subject

[[Page 715]]

to different legal requirements. Under these circumstances, for this 
market, the FDIC could recognize that the prevailing rate on MMDAs is 
different than the prevailing rate on NOW accounts.)

[57 FR 23941, June 5, 1992, as amended at 58 FR 54935, Oct. 25, 1993; 60 
FR 31384, June 15, 1995; 63 FR 44750, Aug. 20, 1998; 66 FR 17622, Apr. 
3, 2001; 74 FR 27683, June 11, 2009; 78 FR 55595, Sept. 10, 2013]



Secs. 337.7-337.9  [Reserved]



Sec. 337.10  Waiver.

    An insured State nonmember bank has the right to petition the Board 
of Directors of the Corporation for a waiver of this part or any subpart 
thereof with respect to any particular transaction or series of similar 
transactions. A waiver may be granted at the discretion of the Board 
upon a showing of good cause. All such petitions should be filed with 
the Executive Secretary, Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th 
Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429.

[39 FR 29179, Aug. 14, 1974, as amended at 67 FR 71071, Nov. 29, 2002]



Sec. 337.11  Effect on other banking practices.

    Nothing in this part shall be construed as restricting in any manner 
the Corporation's authority to deal with any banking practice which is 
deemed to be unsafe or unsound or otherwise not in accordance with law, 
rule, or regulation; or which violates any condition imposed in writing 
by the Corporation in connection with the granting of any application or 
other request by an insured State nonmember bank, or any written 
agreement entered into by such bank with the Corporation. Compliance 
with the provisions of this part shall not relieve an insured State 
nonmember bank from its duty to conduct its operations in a safe and 
sound manner nor prevent the Corporation from taking whatever action it 
deems necessary and desirable to deal with specific acts or practices 
which, although they do not violate the provisions of this part, are 
considered detrimental to the safety and sound operation of the bank 
engaged therein.



Sec. 337.12  Frequency of examination.

    (a) General. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation examines 
insured state nonmember banks pursuant to authority conferred by section 
10 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1820) and examines 
insured State savings associations pursuant to authority conferred by 
section 10 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1820) and 
section 4 of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1463). The FDIC is 
required to conduct a full-scope, on-site examination of every insured 
state nonmember bank and insured State savings association at least once 
during each 12-month period.
    (b) 18-month rule for certain small institutions. The FDIC may 
conduct a full-scope, on-site examination of an insured state nonmember 
bank or insured State savings association at least once during each 18-
month period, rather than each 12-month period as provided in paragraph 
(a) of this section, if the following conditions are satisfied:
    (1) The institution has total assets of less than $1 billion;
    (2) The institution is well capitalized as defined in 
Sec. 324.403(b)(1) of this chapter;
    (3) At the most recent FDIC or applicable State agency examination, 
the FDIC:
    (i) Assigned the institution a rating of 1 or 2 for management as 
part of the institution's composite rating under the Uniform Financial 
Institutions Rating System (commonly referred to as CAMELS); and
    (ii) Assigned the institution a composite rating of 1 or 2 under the 
Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System (copies of which are 
available at the addresses specified in Sec. 309.4 of this chapter);
    (4) The institution currently is not subject to a formal enforcement 
proceeding or order by the FDIC, OCC, or the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System; and
    (5) No person acquired control of the institution during the 
preceding 12-month period in which a full-scope, on-site examination 
would have been required but for this section.
    (c) Authority to conduct more frequent examinations. This section 
does not

[[Page 716]]

limit the authority of the FDIC to examine any insured state nonmember 
bank or insured State savings association as frequently as the agency 
deems necessary.

[81 FR 10069, Feb. 29, 2016]



PART 338_FAIR HOUSING--Table of Contents



                          Subpart A_Advertising

Sec.
338.1  Purpose.
338.2  Definitions applicable to subpart A of this part.
338.3  Nondiscriminatory advertising.
338.4  Fair housing poster.

                         Subpart B_Recordkeeping

338.5  Purpose.
338.6  Definitions applicable to this subpart B.
338.7  Recordkeeping requirements.
338.8  Compilation of loan data in register format.
338.9  Mortgage lending of a controlled entity.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1817, 1818, 1819, 1820(b), 2801 et seq.; 15 
U.S.C. 1691 et seq.; 42 U.S.C. 3605, 3608; 12 CFR parts 202, 203; 24 CFR 
part 110.



                          Subpart A_Advertising



Sec. 338.1  Purpose.

    The purpose of this subpart A is to prohibit insured state nonmember 
banks from engaging in discriminatory advertising with regard to 
residential real estate-related transactions. This subpart A also 
requires insured state nonmember banks to publicly display either the 
Equal Housing Lender poster set forth in Sec. 338.4(b) of the FDIC's 
regulations or the Equal Housing Opportunity poster prescribed by part 
110 of the regulations of the United States Department of Housing and 
Urban Development (24 CFR part 110). This subpart A enforces section 805 
of title VIII of the Civil Rights Act of 1968, 42 U.S.C. 3601-3619 (Fair 
Housing Act), as amended by the Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988.

[62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997]



Sec. 338.2  Definitions applicable to subpart A of this part.

    For purposes of subpart A of this part:
    (a) Bank means an insured State nonmember bank as defined in section 
3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (b) Dwelling means any building, structure, or portion thereof which 
is occupied as, or designed or intended for occupancy as, a residence by 
one or more families, and any vacant land wihch is offered for sale or 
lease for the construction or location thereon of any such building, 
structure, portion thereof.
    (c) Handicap means, with respect to a person:
    (1) A physical or mental impairment which substantially limits one 
or more of such person's major life activities;
    (2) A record of having such an impairment; or
    (3) Being regarded as having such an impairment, but such term does 
not include current, illegal use of or addition to a controlled 
substance (as defined in section 102 of the Controlled Substances Act 
(21 U.S.C. 802)).
    (d) Familial status means one or more individuals (who have not 
attained the age of 18 years) being domiciled with:
    (1) A parent or another person having legal custody of such 
individual or individuals; or
    (2) The designee of such parent or other person having such custody, 
with the written persmission of such parent or other person.

The protections afforded against discrimination on the basis of familial 
status shall apply to any person who is pregnant or is in the process of 
securing legal custody of any indivdual who has not attained the age of 
18 years.

[56 FR 50039, Oct. 3, 1991]



Sec. 338.3  Nondiscriminatory advertising.

    (a) Any bank which directly or through third parties engages in any 
form of advertising of any loan for the purpose of purchasing, 
constructing, improving, repairing, or maintaining a dwelling or any 
loan secured by a dwelling shall prominently indicate in such 
advertisement, in a manner appropriate to the advertising medium and 
format utilized, that the bank

[[Page 717]]

makes such loans without regard to race, color, religion, national 
origin, sex, handicap, or familial status.
    (1) With respect to written and visual advertisements, this 
requirement may be satisfied by including in the advertisement a copy of 
the logotype with the Equal Housing Lender legend contained in the Equal 
Housing Lender poster prescribed in Sec. 338.4(b) of the FDIC's 
regulations or a copy of the logotype with the Equal Housing Opportunity 
legend contained in the Equal Housing Opportunity poster prescribed in 
Sec. 110.25(a) of the United States Department of Housing and Urban 
Development's regulations (24 CFR 110.25(a)).
    (2) With respect to oral advertisements, this requirement may be 
satisfied by a statement, in the spoken text of the advertisement, that 
the bank is an ``Equal Housing Lender'' or an ``Equal Opportunity 
Lender.''
    (3) When an oral advertisement is used in conjunction with a written 
or visual advertisement, the use of either of the methods specified in 
paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this section will satisfy the requirements 
of this paragraph (a).
    (b) No advertisement shall contain any words, symbols, models or 
other forms of communication which express, imply, or suggest a 
discriminatory preference or policy of exclusion in violation of the 
provisions of the Fair Housing Act or the Equal Credit Opportunity Act.

[43 FR 11563, Mar. 20, 1978, as amended at 54 FR 52930, Dec. 26, 1989. 
Redesignated and amended at 56 FR 50039, Oct. 3, 1991; 62 FR 36204, July 
7, 1997]



Sec. 338.4  Fair housing poster.

    (a) Each bank engaged in extending loans for the purpose of 
purchasing, constructing, improving, repairing, or maintaining a 
dwelling or any loan secured by a dwelling shall conspicuously display 
either the Equal Housing Lender poster set forth in paragraph (b) of 
this section or the Equal Housing Opportunity poster prescribed by 
Sec. 110.25(a) of the United States Department of Housing and Urban 
Development's regulations (24 CFR 110.25(a)), in a central location 
within the bank where deposits are received or where such loans are made 
in a manner clearly visible to the general public entering the area, 
where the poster is displayed.
    (b) The Equal Housing Lender Poster shall be at least 11 by 14 
inches in size and have the following text:

[[Page 718]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07AU08.000

    (c) The Equal Housing Lender Poster specified in this section was 
adopted under Sec. 110.25(b) of the United States Department of Housing 
and Urban Development's rules and regulations as an authorized 
substitution for the poster

[[Page 719]]

required in Sec. 110.25(a) of those rules and regulations.

[54 FR 52930, Dec. 26, 1989. Redesignated at 56 FR 50039, Oct. 3, 1991, 
as amended at 59 FR 52667, Oct. 19, 1994; 62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997; 73 
FR 45855, Aug. 7, 2008]



                         Subpart B_Recordkeeping



Sec. 338.5  Purpose.

    The purpose of this subpart B is two-fold. First, this subpart B 
notifies all insured state nonmember banks of their duty to collect and 
retain certain information about a home loan applicant's personal 
characteristics in accordance with Regulation B of the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System (12 CFR part 202) in order to 
monitor an institution's compliance with the Equal Credit Opportunity 
Act of 1974 (15 U.S.C. 1691 et seq.). Second, this subpart B notifies 
certain insured state nonmember banks of their duty to maintain, update 
and report a register of home loan applications in accordance with 
Regulation C of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (12 
CFR part 203), which implements the Home Mortgage Disclosure Act (12 
U.S.C. 2801 et seq.).

[62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997]



Sec. 338.6  Definitions applicable to this subpart B.

    For purposes of this subpart B--
    (a) Bank means an insured state nonmember bank as defined in section 
3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (b) Controlled entity means a corporation, partnership, association, 
or other business entity with respect to which a bank possesses, 
directly or indirectly, the power to direct or cause the direction of 
management and policies, whether through the ownership of voting 
securities, by contract, or otherwise.

[62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997]



Sec. 338.7  Recordkeeping requirements.

    All banks that receive an application for credit primarily for the 
purchase or refinancing of a dwelling occupied or to be occupied by the 
applicant as a principal residence where the extension of credit will be 
secured by the dwelling shall request and retain the monitoring 
information required by Regulation B of the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System (12 CFR part 202).

[62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997]



Sec. 338.8  Compilation of loan data in register format.

    Banks and other lenders required to file a Home Mortgage Disclosure 
Act loan application register (LAR) with the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation shall maintain, update and report such LAR in accordance 
with Regulation C of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System (12 CFR part 203).

[62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997]



Sec. 338.9  Mortgage lending of a controlled entity.

    Any bank which refers any applicants to a controlled entity and 
which purchases any home purchase loans or home improvement loans as 
defined in Regulation C of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
Board (12 CFR part 203) originated by the controlled entity, as a 
condition to transacting any business with the controlled entity, shall 
require the controlled entity to enter into a written agreement with the 
bank. The written agreement shall provide that the entity shall:
    (a) Comply with the requirements of Secs. 338.3, 338.4 and 338.7, 
and, if otherwise subject to Regulation C of the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System (12 CFR part 203), Sec. 338.8;
    (b) Open its books and records to examination by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation; and
    (c) Comply with all instructions and orders issued by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation with respect to its home loan practices.

[49 FR 35764, Sept. 12, 1984. Redesignated and amended at 56 FR 50039, 
Oct. 3, 1991; 62 FR 36204, July 7, 1997]



PART 339_LOANS IN AREAS HAVING SPECIAL FLOOD HAZARDS--
Table of Contents



Sec.
339.1  Authority, purpose, and scope.
339.2  Definitions.
339.3  Requirement to purchase flood insurance where available.
339.4  Exemptions.
339.5  Escrow requirement.

[[Page 720]]

339.6  Required use of standard flood hazard determination form.
339.7  Force placement of flood insurance.
339.8  Determination fees.
339.9  Notice of special flood hazards and availability of Federal 
          disaster relief assistance.
339.10  Notice of servicer's identity.

Appendix A to Part 339--Sample Form of Notice of Special Flood Hazards 
          and Availability of Federal Disaster Relief Assistance
Appendix B to Part 339--Sample Clause for Option to Escrow for 
          Outstanding Loans

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1462a, 1463, 1464, 1819 (Tenth), 5412(b)(2)(C) 
and 42 U.S.C. 4012a, 4104a, 4104b, 4106, and 4128.

    Source: 80 FR 43249, July 21, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 339.1  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) Authority. This part is issued pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1462a, 
1463, 1464, 1819 (Tenth), 5412(b)(2)(C) and 42 U.S.C. 4012a, 4104a, 
4104b, 4106, and 4128.
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of this part is to implement the 
requirements of the National Flood Insurance Act of 1968 and the Flood 
Disaster Protection Act of 1973, as amended (42 U.S.C. 4001-4129).
    (c) Scope. This part, except for Secs. 339.6 and 339.8, applies to 
loans secured by buildings or mobile homes located or to be located in 
areas determined by the Administrator of the Federal Emergency 
Management Agency to have special flood hazards. Sections 339.6 and 
339.8 apply to loans secured by buildings or mobile homes, regardless of 
location.



Sec. 339.2  Definitions.

    As used in this part:
    Act means the National Flood Insurance Act of 1968, as amended (42 
U.S.C. 4001-4129).
    Administrator of FEMA means the Administrator of the Federal 
Emergency Management Agency.
    Building means a walled and roofed structure, other than a gas or 
liquid storage tank, that is principally above ground and affixed to a 
permanent site, and a walled and roofed structure while in the course of 
construction, alteration, or repair.
    Community means a State or a political subdivision of a State that 
has zoning and building code jurisdiction over a particular area having 
special flood hazards.
    Designated loan means a loan secured by a building or mobile home 
that is located or to be located in a special flood hazard area in which 
flood insurance is available under the Act.
    FDIC-supervised institution means any insured depository institution 
for which the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation is the appropriate 
Federal banking agency pursuant to section 3(q) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(q).
    Mobile home means a structure, transportable in one or more 
sections, that is built on a permanent chassis and designed for use with 
or without a permanent foundation when attached to the required 
utilities. The term mobile home does not include a recreational vehicle. 
For purposes of this part, the term mobile home means a mobile home on a 
permanent foundation. The term mobile home includes a manufactured home 
as that term is used in the NFIP.
    NFIP means the National Flood Insurance Program authorized under the 
Act.
    Residential improved real estate means real estate upon which a home 
or other residential building is located or to be located.
    Servicer means the person responsible for:
    (1) Receiving any scheduled, periodic payments from a borrower under 
the terms of a loan, including amounts for taxes, insurance premiums, 
and other charges with respect to the property securing the loan; and
    (2) Making payments of principal and interest and any other payments 
from the amounts received from the borrower as may be required under the 
terms of the loan.
    Special flood hazard area means the land in the flood plain within a 
community having at least a one percent chance of flooding in any given 
year, as designated by the Administrator of FEMA.
    Table funding means a settlement at which a loan is funded by a 
contemporaneous advance of loan funds and an

[[Page 721]]

assignment of the loan to the person advancing the funds.

[80 FR 43249, July 21, 2015, as amended at 81 FR 6170, Feb. 5, 2016]



Sec. 339.3  Requirement to purchase flood insurance where available.

    (a) In general. An FDIC-supervised institution shall not make, 
increase, extend, or renew any designated loan unless the building or 
mobile home and any personal property securing the loan is covered by 
flood insurance for the term of the loan. The amount of insurance must 
be at least equal to the lesser of the outstanding principal balance of 
the designated loan or the maximum limit of coverage available for the 
particular type of property under the Act. Flood insurance coverage 
under the Act is limited to the building or mobile home and any personal 
property that secures a loan and not the land itself.
    (b) Table funded loans. An FDIC-supervised institution that acquires 
a loan from a mortgage broker or other entity through table funding 
shall be considered to be making a loan for the purpose of this part.



Sec. 339.4  Exemptions.

    The flood insurance requirement prescribed by Sec. 339.3 does not 
apply with respect to:
    (a) Any state-owned property covered under a policy of self-
insurance satisfactory to the Administrator of FEMA, who publishes and 
periodically revises the list of states falling within this exemption;
    (b) Property securing any loan with an original principal balance of 
$5,000 or less and a repayment term of one year or less; or
    (c) Any structure that is a part of any residential property but is 
detached from the primary residential structure of such property and 
does not serve as a residence. For purposes of this paragraph (c):
    (1) ``A structure that is a part of a residential property'' is a 
structure used primarily for personal, family, or household purposes, 
and not used primarily for agricultural, commercial, industrial, or 
other business purposes;
    (2) A structure is ``detached'' from the primary residential 
structure if it is not joined by any structural connection to that 
structure; and
    (3) ``Serve as a residence'' shall be based upon the good faith 
determination of the FDIC-supervised institution that the structure is 
intended for use or actually used as a residence, which generally 
includes sleeping, bathroom, or kitchen facilities.



Sec. 339.5  Escrow requirement.

    (a) In general--(1) Applicability. Except as provided in paragraphs 
(a)(2) or (c) of this section, an FDIC-supervised institution, or a 
servicer acting on its behalf, shall require the escrow of all premiums 
and fees for any flood insurance required under Sec. 339.3(a) for any 
designated loan secured by residential improved real estate or a mobile 
home that is made, increased, extended, or renewed on or after January 
1, 2016, payable with the same frequency as payments on the designated 
loan are required to be made for the duration of the loan.
    (2) Exceptions. Paragraph (a)(1) of this section does not apply if:
    (i) The loan is an extension of credit primarily for business, 
commercial, or agricultural purposes;
    (ii) The loan is in a subordinate position to a senior lien secured 
by the same residential improved real estate or mobile home for which 
the borrower has obtained flood insurance coverage that meets the 
requirements of Sec. 339.3(a);
    (iii) Flood insurance coverage for the residential improved real 
estate or mobile home is provided by a policy that:
    (A) Meets the requirements of Sec. 339.3(a);
    (B) Is provided by a condominium association, cooperative, 
homeowners association, or other applicable group; and
    (C) The premium for which is paid by the condominium association, 
cooperative, homeowners association, or other applicable group as a 
common expense;
    (iv) The loan is a home equity line of credit;
    (v) The loan is a nonperforming loan, which is a loan that is 90 or 
more days past due and remains nonperforming until it is permanently 
modified or until the entire amount past due, including principal, 
accrued interest, and

[[Page 722]]

penalty interest incurred as the result of past due status, is collected 
or otherwise discharged in full; or
    (vi) The loan has a term of not longer than 12 months.
    (3) Duration of exception. If an FDIC-supervised institution, or a 
servicer acting on its behalf, determines at any time during the term of 
a designated loan secured by residential improved real estate or a 
mobile home that is made, increased, extended, or renewed on or after 
January 1, 2016, that an exception under paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section does not apply, then the FDIC-supervised institution or its 
servicer shall require the escrow of all premiums and fees for any flood 
insurance required under Sec. 339.3(a) as soon as reasonably practicable 
and, if applicable, shall provide any disclosure required under section 
10 of the Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act of 1974 (12 U.S.C. 2609) 
(RESPA).
    (4) Escrow account. The FDIC-supervised institution, or a servicer 
acting on its behalf, shall deposit the flood insurance premiums and 
fees on behalf of the borrower in an escrow account. This escrow account 
will be subject to escrow requirements adopted pursuant to section 10 of 
RESPA, which generally limits the amount that may be maintained in 
escrow accounts for certain types of loans and requires escrow account 
statements for those accounts, only if the loan is otherwise subject to 
RESPA. Following receipt of a notice from the Administrator of FEMA or 
other provider of flood insurance that premiums are due, the FDIC-
supervised institution, or a servicer acting on its behalf, shall pay 
the amount owed to the insurance provider from the escrow account by the 
date when such premiums are due.
    (b) Notice. For any loan for which an FDIC-supervised institution is 
required to escrow under paragraph (a) or paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section or may be required to escrow under paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section during the term of the loan, the FDIC-supervised institution, or 
a servicer acting on its behalf, shall mail or deliver a written notice 
with the notice provided under Sec. 339.9 informing the borrower that 
the FDIC-supervised institution is required to escrow all premiums and 
fees for required flood insurance, using language that is substantially 
similar to model clauses on the escrow requirement in appendix A.
    (c) Small lender exception--(1) Qualification. Except as may be 
required under applicable State law, paragraphs (a), (b) and (d) of this 
section do not apply to an FDIC-supervised institution:
    (i) That has total assets of less than $1 billion as of December 31 
of either of the two prior calendar years; and
    (ii) On or before July 6, 2012:
    (A) Was not required under Federal or State law to deposit taxes, 
insurance premiums, fees, or any other charges in an escrow account for 
the entire term of any loan secured by residential improved real estate 
or a mobile home; and
    (B) Did not have a policy of consistently and uniformly requiring 
the deposit of taxes, insurance premiums, fees, or any other charges in 
an escrow account for any loans secured by residential improved real 
estate or a mobile home.
    (2) Change in status. If an FDIC-supervised institution previously 
qualified for the exception in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, but no 
longer qualifies for the exception because it had assets of $1 billion 
or more for two consecutive calendar year ends, the FDIC-supervised 
institution must escrow premiums and fees for flood insurance pursuant 
to paragraph (a) for any designated loan made, increased, extended, or 
renewed on or after July 1 of the first calendar year of changed status.
    (d) Option to escrow--(1) In general. An FDIC-supervised 
institution, or a servicer acting on its behalf, shall offer and make 
available to the borrower the option to escrow all premiums and fees for 
any flood insurance required under Sec. 339.3 for any loan secured by 
residential improved real estate or a mobile home that is outstanding on 
January 1, 2016, or July 1 of the first calendar year in which the FDIC-
supervised institution has had a change in status pursuant to paragraph 
(c)(2) of this section, unless:
    (i) The loan or the FDIC-supervised institution qualifies for an 
exception from the escrow requirement under

[[Page 723]]

paragraphs (a)(2) or (c) of this section, respectively;
    (ii) The borrower is already escrowing all premiums and fees for 
flood insurance for the loan; or
    (iii) The FDIC-supervised institution is required to escrow flood 
insurance premiums and fees pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section.
    (2) Notice. For any loan subject to paragraph (d) of this section, 
the FDIC-supervised institution, or a servicer acting on its behalf, 
shall mail or deliver to the borrower no later than June 30, 2016, or 
September 30 of the first calendar year in which the FDIC-supervised 
institution has had a change in status pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section, a notice in writing, or if the borrower agrees, 
electronically, informing the borrower of the option to escrow all 
premiums and fees for any required flood insurance and the method(s) by 
which the borrower may request the escrow, using language similar to the 
model clause in appendix B to this part.
    (3) Timing. The FDIC-supervised institution or servicer must begin 
escrowing premiums and fees for flood insurance as soon as reasonably 
practicable after the FDIC-supervised institution or servicer receives 
the borrower's request to escrow.

[80 FR 43252, July 21, 2015]



Sec. 339.6  Required use of standard flood hazard determination form.

    (a) Use of form. An FDIC-supervised institution shall use the 
standard flood hazard determination form developed by the Administrator 
of FEMA when determining whether the building or mobile home offered as 
collateral security for a loan is or will be located in a special flood 
hazard area in which flood insurance is available under the Act. The 
standard flood hazard determination form may be used in a printed, 
computerized, or electronic manner. An FDIC-supervised institution may 
obtain the standard flood hazard determination form from FEMA's Web site 
at www.fema.gov.
    (b) Retention of form. An FDIC-supervised institution shall retain a 
copy of the completed standard flood hazard determination form, in 
either hard copy or electronic form, for the period of time the FDIC-
supervised institution owns the loan.



Sec. 339.7  Force placement of flood insurance.

    (a) Notice and purchase of coverage. If an FDIC-supervised 
institution, or a servicer acting on its behalf, determines at any time 
during the term of a designated loan, that the building or mobile home 
and any personal property securing the designated loan is not covered by 
flood insurance or is covered by flood insurance in an amount less than 
the amount required under Sec. 339.3, then the FDIC-supervised 
institution or its servicer shall notify the borrower that the borrower 
should obtain flood insurance, at the borrower's expense, in an amount 
at least equal to the amount required under Sec. 339.3, for the 
remaining term of the loan. If the borrower fails to obtain flood 
insurance within 45 days after notification, then the FDIC-supervised 
institution or its servicer shall purchase insurance on the borrower's 
behalf. The FDIC-supervised institution or its servicer may charge the 
borrower for the cost of premiums and fees incurred in purchasing the 
insurance, including premiums or fees incurred for coverage beginning on 
the date on which flood insurance coverage lapsed or did not provide a 
sufficient coverage amount.
    (b) Termination of force-placed insurance--(1) Termination and 
refund. Within 30 days of receipt by an FDIC-supervised institution, or 
a servicer acting on its behalf, of a confirmation of a borrower's 
existing flood insurance coverage, the FDIC-supervised institution or 
its servicer shall:
    (i) Notify the insurance provider to terminate any insurance 
purchased by the FDIC-supervised institution or its servicer under 
paragraph (a) of this section; and
    (ii) Refund to the borrower all premiums paid by the borrower for 
any insurance purchased by the FDIC-supervised institution or its 
servicer under paragraph (a) of this section during any period during 
which the borrower's flood insurance coverage and the insurance coverage 
purchased by the FDIC-supervised institution or its servicer were each 
in effect, and any related

[[Page 724]]

fees charged to the borrower with respect to the insurance purchased by 
the FDIC-supervised institution or its servicer during such period.
    (2) Sufficiency of demonstration. For purposes of confirming a 
borrower's existing flood insurance coverage under paragraph (b) of this 
section, an FDIC-supervised institution or its servicer shall accept 
from the borrower an insurance policy declarations page that includes 
the existing flood insurance policy number and the identity of, and 
contact information for, the insurance company or agent.



Sec. 339.8  Determination fees.

    (a) General. Notwithstanding any Federal or State law other than the 
Flood Disaster Protection Act of 1973, as amended (42 U.S.C. 4001-4129), 
any FDIC-supervised institution, or a servicer acting on its behalf, may 
charge a reasonable fee for determining whether the building or mobile 
home securing the loan is located or will be located in a special flood 
hazard area. A determination fee may also include, but is not limited 
to, a fee for life-of-loan monitoring.
    (b) Borrower fee. The determination fee authorized by paragraph (a) 
of this section may be charged to the borrower if the determination:
    (1) Is made in connection with a making, increasing, extending, or 
renewing of the loan that is initiated by the borrower;
    (2) Reflects the Administrator of FEMA's revision or updating of 
floodplain areas or flood-risk zones;
    (3) Reflects the Administrator of FEMA's publication of a notice or 
compendium that:
    (i) Affects the area in which the building or mobile home securing 
the loan is located; or
    (ii) By determination of the Administrator of FEMA, may reasonably 
require a determination whether the building or mobile home securing the 
loan is located in a special flood hazard area; or
    (4) Results in the purchase of flood insurance coverage by the 
lender or its servicer on behalf of the borrower under Sec. 339.7.
    (c) Purchaser or transferee fee. The determination fee authorized by 
paragraph (a) of this section may be charged to the purchaser or 
transferee of a loan in the case of the sale or transfer of the loan.



Sec. 339.9  Notice of special flood hazards and availability of
Federal disaster relief assistance.

    (a) Notice requirement. When an FDIC-supervised institution makes, 
increases, extends, or renews a loan secured by a building or a mobile 
home located or to be located in a special flood hazard area, the FDIC-
supervised institution shall mail or deliver a written notice to the 
borrower and to the servicer in all cases whether or not flood insurance 
is available under the Act for the collateral securing the loan.
    (b) Contents of notice. The written notice must include the 
following information:
    (1) A warning, in a form approved by the Administrator of FEMA, that 
the building or the mobile home is or will be located in a special flood 
hazard area;
    (2) A description of the flood insurance purchase requirements set 
forth in section 102(b) of the Flood Disaster Protection Act of 1973, as 
amended (42 U.S.C. 4012a(b));
    (3) A statement, where applicable, that flood insurance coverage is 
available from private insurance companies that issue standard flood 
insurance policies on behalf of the NFIP or directly from the NFIP;
    (4) A statement that flood insurance that provides the same level of 
coverage as a standard flood insurance policy under the NFIP may also be 
available from a private insurance company that issues policies on 
behalf of the company.
    (5) A statement that the borrower is encouraged to compare the flood 
insurance coverage, deductibles, exclusions, conditions, and premiums 
associated with flood insurance policies issued on behalf of the NFIP 
and policies issued on behalf of private insurance companies and that 
the borrower should direct inquiries regarding the availability, cost, 
and comparisons of flood insurance coverage to an insurance agent; and

[[Page 725]]

    (6) A statement whether Federal disaster relief assistance may be 
available in the event of damage to the building or mobile home caused 
by flooding in a Federally declared disaster.
    (c) Timing of notice. The FDIC-supervised institution shall provide 
the notice required by paragraph (a) of this section to the borrower 
within a reasonable time before the completion of the transaction, and 
to the servicer as promptly as practicable after the FDIC-supervised 
institution provides notice to the borrower and in any event no later 
than the time the FDIC-supervised institution provides other similar 
notices to the servicer concerning hazard insurance and taxes. Notice to 
the servicer may be made electronically or may take the form of a copy 
of the notice to the borrower.
    (d) Record of receipt. The FDIC-supervised institution shall retain 
a record of the receipt of the notices by the borrower and the servicer 
for the period of time the FDIC-supervised institution owns the loan.
    (e) Alternate method of notice. Instead of providing the notice to 
the borrower required by paragraph (a) of this section, an FDIC-
supervised institution may obtain satisfactory written assurance from a 
seller or lessor that, within a reasonable time before the completion of 
the sale or lease transaction, the seller or lessor has provided such 
notice to the purchaser or lessee. The FDIC-supervised institution shall 
retain a record of the written assurance from the seller or lessor for 
the period of time the FDIC-supervised institution owns the loan.
    (f) Use of sample form of notice. An FDIC-supervised institution 
will be considered to be in compliance with the requirement for notice 
to the borrower of this section by providing written notice to the 
borrower containing the language presented in appendix A to this part 
within a reasonable time before the completion of the transaction. The 
notice presented in appendix A to this part satisfies the borrower 
notice requirements of the Act.

[80 FR 43249, July 21, 2015, as amended at 80 FR 43253, July 21, 2015]



Sec. 339.10  Notice of servicer's identity.

    (a) Notice requirement. When an FDIC-supervised institution makes, 
increases, extends, renews, sells, or transfers a loan secured by a 
building or mobile home located or to be located in a special flood 
hazard area, the FDIC-supervised institution shall notify the 
Administrator of FEMA (or the Administrator of FEMA's designee) in 
writing of the identity of the servicer of the loan. The Administrator 
of FEMA has designated the insurance provider to receive the FDIC-
supervised institution's notice of the servicer's identity. This notice 
may be provided electronically if electronic transmission is 
satisfactory to the Administrator of FEMA's designee.
    (b) Transfer of servicing rights. The FDIC-supervised institution 
shall notify the Administrator of FEMA (or the Administrator of FEMA's 
designee) of any change in the servicer of a loan described in paragraph 
(a) of this section within 60 days after the effective date of the 
change. This notice may be provided electronically if electronic 
transmission is satisfactory to the Administrator or his or her 
designee. Upon any change in the servicing of a loan described in 
paragraph (a) of this section, the duty to provide notice under this 
paragraph (b) shall transfer to the transferee servicer.



  Sec. Appendix A to Part 339--Sample Form of Notice of Special Flood 
     Hazards and Availability of Federal Disaster Relief Assistance

    We are giving you this notice to inform you that:
    The building or mobile home securing the loan for which you have 
applied is or will be located in an area with special flood hazards.
    The area has been identified by the Administrator of the Federal 
Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) as a special flood hazard area using 
FEMA's Flood Insurance Rate Map or the Flood Hazard Boundary Map for the 
following community: ___. This area has a one percent (1%) chance of a 
flood equal to or exceeding the base flood elevation (a 100-year flood) 
in any given year. During the life of a 30-year mortgage loan, the risk 
of a 100-year flood in a special flood hazard area is 26 percent (26%).
    Federal law allows a lender and borrower jointly to request the 
Administrator of FEMA to review the determination of whether the 
property securing the loan is located

[[Page 726]]

in a special flood hazard area. If you would like to make such a 
request, please contact us for further information.
    __The community in which the property securing the loan is located 
participates in the National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP). Federal law 
will not allow us to make you the loan that you have applied for if you 
do not purchase flood insurance. The flood insurance must be maintained 
for the life of the loan. If you fail to purchase or renew flood 
insurance on the property, Federal law authorizes and requires us to 
purchase the flood insurance for you at your expense.
     At a minimum, flood insurance purchased must cover the 
lesser of:
    (1) the outstanding principal balance of the loan; or
    (2) the maximum amount of coverage allowed for the type of property 
under the NFIP.
    Flood insurance coverage under the NFIP is limited to the building 
or mobile home and any personal property that secures your loan and not 
the land itself.
     Federal disaster relief assistance (usually in the form of 
a low-interest loan) may be available for damages incurred in excess of 
your flood insurance if your community's participation in the NFIP is in 
accordance with NFIP requirements.
     Although you may not be required to maintain flood 
insurance on all structures, you may still wish to do so, and your 
mortgage lender may still require you to do so to protect the collateral 
securing the mortgage. If you choose not to maintain flood insurance on 
a structure and it floods, you are responsible for all flood losses 
relating to that structure.

            Availability of Private Flood Insurance Coverage

    Flood insurance coverage under the NFIP may be purchased through an 
insurance agent who will obtain the policy either directly through the 
NFIP or through an insurance company that participates in the NFIP. 
Flood insurance that provides the same level of coverage as a standard 
flood insurance policy under the NFIP may be available from private 
insurers that do not participate in the NFIP. You should compare the 
flood insurance coverage, deductibles, exclusions, conditions, and 
premiums associated with flood insurance policies issued on behalf of 
the NFIP and policies issued on behalf of private insurance companies 
and contact an insurance agent as to the availability, cost, and 
comparisons of flood insurance coverage.

                [Escrow Requirement for Residential Loans

    Federal law may require a lender or its servicer to escrow all 
premiums and fees for flood insurance that covers any residential 
building or mobile home securing a loan that is located in an area with 
special flood hazards. If your lender notifies you that an escrow 
account is required for your loan, then you must pay your flood 
insurance premiums and fees to the lender or its servicer with the same 
frequency as you make loan payments for the duration of your loan. These 
premiums and fees will be deposited in the escrow account, which will be 
used to pay the flood insurance provider.]
    __Flood insurance coverage under the NFIP is not available for the 
property securing the loan because the community in which the property 
is located does not participate in the NFIP. In addition, if the non-
participating community has been identified for at least one year as 
containing a special flood hazard area, properties located in the 
community will not be eligible for Federal disaster relief assistance in 
the event of a Federally declared flood disaster.

[80 FR 43253, July 21, 2015]



  Sec. Appendix B to Part 339--Sample Clause for Option to Escrow for 
                            Outstanding Loans

                          Escrow Option Clause

    You have the option to escrow all premiums and fees for the payment 
on your flood insurance policy that covers any residential building or 
mobile home that is located in an area with special flood hazards and 
that secures your loan. If you choose this option:
     Your payments will be deposited in an escrow account to be 
paid to the flood insurance provider.
     The escrow amount for flood insurance will be added to the 
regular mortgage payment that you make to your lender or its servicer.
     The payments you make into the escrow account will 
accumulate over time and the funds will be used to pay your flood 
insurance policy when your lender or servicer receives a notice from 
your flood insurance provider that the flood insurance premium is due.
    To choose this option, follow the instructions below. If you have 
any questions about the option, contact [Insert Name of Lender or 
Servicer] at [Insert Contact Information].
    [Insert Instructions for Selecting to Escrow]

[80 FR 43254, July 21, 2015]

[[Page 727]]



PART 340_RESTRICTIONS ON SALE OF ASSETS OF A FAILED INSTITUTION BY 
THE FEDERAL DEPOSIT INSURANCE CORPORATION--Table of Contents



Sec.
340.1  What is the statutory authority for the regulation, what are its 
          purpose and scope, and can the FDIC have other policies on 
          related topics?
340.2  Definitions.
340.3  What are the restrictions on the sale of assets by the FDIC if 
          the buyer wants to finance the purchase with a loan from the 
          FDIC?
340.4  What are the restrictions on the sale of assets by the FDIC 
          regardless of the method of financing?
340.5  Can the FDIC deny a loan to a buyer who is not disqualified from 
          purchasing assets using seller-financing under this 
          regulation?
340.6  What is the effect of this part on transactions that were entered 
          into before its effective date?
340.7  When is a certification required, and who does not have to 
          provide a certification?
340.8  Does this part apply in the case of a workout, resolution, or 
          settlement of obligations?

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819 (Tenth), 1821(p).

    Source: 80 FR 22889, Apr. 24, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 340.1  What is the statutory authority for the regulation, 
what are its purpose and scope, and can the FDIC have other 
policies on related topics?

    (a) Authority. The statutory authority for adopting this part is 
section 11(p) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act), 12 U.S.C. 
1821(p). Section 11(p) was added to the FDI Act by section 20 of the 
Resolution Trust Corporation Completion Act (Pub. L. 103-204, 107 Stat. 
2369 (1993)).
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of this part is to prohibit individuals or 
entities that improperly profited or engaged in wrongdoing at the 
expense of a failed institution or covered financial company, or 
seriously mismanaged a failed institution, from buying assets of a 
failed institution from the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
(FDIC).
    (c) Scope. (1) The restrictions of this part generally apply to 
sales of assets of failed institutions owned or controlled by the FDIC 
in any capacity.
    (2) The restrictions in this section apply to the sale of assets of 
a subsidiary of a failed institution or a bridge depository institution 
if the FDIC controls the terms of the sale by agreement or in its role 
as shareholder.
    (3) Unless we determine otherwise, this part does not apply to the 
sale of securities in connection with the investment of corporate and 
receivership funds pursuant to the Investment Policy for Liquidation 
Funds managed by the FDIC as it is in effect from time to time.
    (4) In the case of a sale of securities backed by a pool of assets 
that may include assets of failed institutions by a trust or other 
entity, this part applies only to the sale of assets by the FDIC to an 
underwriter in an initial offering, and not to any other purchaser of 
the securities.
    (5) The restrictions of this part do not apply to a sale of a 
security or a group or index of securities, a commodity, or any 
qualified financial contract that, in each case, customarily is traded 
through a financial intermediary, as defined in Sec. 340.2, where the 
seller cannot control selection of the purchaser and the sale is 
consummated through that customary practice.
    (6) The restrictions of this part do not apply to a judicial sale or 
a trustee's sale of property that secures an obligation to the FDIC 
where the sale is not conducted or controlled by the FDIC.
    (d) The FDIC retains the authority to establish other policies 
restricting asset sales. Neither 12 U.S.C. 1821(p) nor this part in any 
way limits the authority of the FDIC to establish policies prohibiting 
the sale of assets to prospective purchasers who have injured any failed 
institution, or to other prospective purchasers, such as certain 
employees or contractors of the FDIC, or individuals who are not in 
compliance with the terms of any debt or duty owed to the FDIC. Any such 
policies may be independent of, in conjunction with, or in addition to 
the restrictions set forth in this part.

[[Page 728]]



Sec. 340.2  Definitions.

    Many of the terms used in this part are defined in the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1811, et seq. Additionally, for the 
purposes of this part, the following terms are defined:
    (a) Associated person of an individual or entity means:
    (1) With respect to an individual:
    (i) The individual's spouse or dependent child or any member of his 
or her immediate household;
    (ii) A partnership of which the individual is or was a general or 
limited partner;
    (iii) A limited liability company of which the individual is or was 
a member; or
    (iv) A corporation of which the individual is or was an officer or 
director.
    (2) With respect to a partnership, a managing or general partner of 
the partnership or with respect to a limited liability company, a 
manager; or
    (3) With respect to any entity, an individual or entity who, acting 
individually or in concert with one or more individuals or entities, 
owns or controls 25 percent or more of the entity.
    (b) Default means any failure to comply with the terms of an 
obligation to such an extent that:
    (1) A judgment has been rendered in favor of the FDIC or a failed 
institution; or
    (2) In the case of a secured obligation, the property securing such 
obligation is foreclosed on.
    (c) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (d) Failed institution means any insured depository institution (as 
defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813(c)) that has been under the conservatorship or 
receivership of the FDIC or any of its predecessors.
    (e) Financial intermediary means any broker, dealer, bank, 
underwriter, exchange, clearing agency registered with the Securities 
and Exchange Commission (SEC) under section 17A of the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934, transfer agent (as defined in section 3(a)(25) of 
the Securities Exchange Act of 1934), central counterparty or any other 
entity whose role is to facilitate a transaction by, as a riskless 
intermediary, purchasing a security or qualified financial contract from 
one counterparty and then selling it to another.
    (f) Obligation means any debt or duty to pay money owed to the FDIC 
or a failed institution, including any guarantee of any such debt or 
duty.
    (g) Person means an individual, or an entity with a legally 
independent existence, including: A trustee; the beneficiary of at least 
a 25 percent share of the proceeds of a trust; a partnership; a 
corporation; an association; or other organization or society.
    (h) Substantial loss means:
    (1) An obligation that is delinquent for ninety (90) or more days 
and on which there remains an outstanding balance of more than $50,000;
    (2) An unpaid final judgment in excess of $50,000 regardless of 
whether it becomes forgiven in whole or in part in a bankruptcy 
proceeding;
    (3) A deficiency balance following a foreclosure of collateral in 
excess of $50,000, regardless of whether it becomes discharged in whole 
or in part in a bankruptcy proceeding;
    (4) Any loss in excess of $50,000 evidenced by an IRS Form 1099-C 
(Information Reporting for Cancellation of Debt).



Sec. 340.3  What are the restrictions on the sale of assets by 
the FDIC if the buyer wants to finance the purchase with a loan
from the FDIC?

    A person may not borrow money or accept credit from the FDIC in 
connection with the purchase of any assets of a failed institution from 
the FDIC if:
    (a) There has been a default with respect to one or more obligations 
totaling in excess of $1,000,000 owed by that person or its associated 
person; and
    (b) The person or its associated person made any fraudulent 
misrepresentations in connection with any such obligation(s).



Sec. 340.4  What are the restrictions on the sale of assets by
the FDIC regardless of the method of financing?

    (a) A person may not acquire any assets of a failed institution from 
the FDIC if the person or its associated person:
    (1) Has participated, as an officer or director of a failed 
institution or of an affiliate of a failed institution, in a

[[Page 729]]

material way in one or more transaction(s) that caused a substantial 
loss to that failed institution;
    (2) Has been removed from, or prohibited from participating in the 
affairs of, a failed institution pursuant to any final enforcement 
action by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System, the FDIC, or any of their 
predecessors or successors;
    (3) Has demonstrated a pattern or practice of defalcation regarding 
obligations to any failed institution;
    (4) Has been convicted of committing or conspiring to commit any 
offense under 18 U.S.C. 215, 656, 657, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1014, 
1032, 1341, 1343 or 1344 affecting any failed institution and there has 
been a default with respect to one or more obligations owed by that 
person or its associated person; or
    (5) Would be prohibited from purchasing the assets of a covered 
financial company from the FDIC under 12 U.S.C. 5390(r) or its 
implementing regulation at 12 CFR part 380.13.
    (b) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, a person has 
participated ``in a material way in a transaction that caused a 
substantial loss to a failed institution'' if, in connection with a 
substantial loss to a failed institution, the person has been found in a 
final determination by a court or administrative tribunal, or is alleged 
in a judicial or administrative action brought by the FDIC or by any 
component of the government of the United States or of any state:
    (1) To have violated any law, regulation, or order issued by a 
federal or state banking agency, or breached or defaulted on a written 
agreement with a federal or state banking agency, or breached a written 
agreement with a failed institution;
    (2) To have engaged in an unsafe or unsound practice in conducting 
the affairs of a failed institution; or
    (3) To have breached a fiduciary duty owed to a failed institution.
    (c) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, a person or its 
associated person has demonstrated a ``pattern or practice of 
defalcation'' regarding obligations to a failed institution if the 
person or associated person has:
    (1) Engaged in more than one transaction that created an obligation 
on the part of such person or its associated person with intent to cause 
a loss to any insured depository institution or with reckless disregard 
for whether such transactions would cause a loss to any such insured 
depository institution; and
    (2) The transactions, in the aggregate, caused a substantial loss to 
one or more failed institution(s).



Sec. 340.5  Can the FDIC deny a loan to a buyer who is not
disqualified from purchasing assets using seller-financing 
under this regulation?

    The FDIC still has the right to make an independent determination, 
based upon all relevant facts of a person's financial condition and 
history, of that person's eligibility to receive any loan or extension 
of credit from the FDIC, even if the person is not in any way 
disqualified from purchasing assets from the FDIC under the restrictions 
set forth in this part.



Sec. 340.6  What is the effect of this part on transactions that
were entered into before its effective date?

    This part does not affect the enforceability of a contract of sale 
and/or agreement for seller financing in effect prior to July 1, 2000.



Sec. 340.7  When is a certification required, and who does not have
to provide a certification?

    (a) Before any person may purchase any asset from the FDIC that 
person must certify, under penalty of perjury, that none of the 
restrictions contained in this part applies to the purchase. The person 
must also certify that neither the identity nor form of the person, nor 
any aspect of the contemplated transaction, has been created or altered 
with the intent, in whole or in part, to allow an individual or entity 
who otherwise would be ineligible to purchase assets from the FDIC to 
benefit directly or indirectly from the proposed transaction. The FDIC 
may establish the form of the certification and may change the form from 
time to time.
    (b) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this section, and unless the 
Director of the FDIC's Division of Resolutions and

[[Page 730]]

Receiverships or designee in his or her discretion so requires, a 
certification need not be provided by:
    (1) A state or political subdivision of a state;
    (2) A federal agency or instrumentality such as the Government 
National Mortgage Association;
    (3) A federally-regulated, government-sponsored enterprise such as 
the Federal National Mortgage Association or Federal Home Loan Mortgage 
Corporation; or
    (4) A bridge depository institution.



Sec. 340.8  Does this part apply in the case of a workout, resolution,
or settlement of obligations?

    The restrictions of Secs. 340.3 and 340.4 do not apply if the sale 
or transfer of an asset resolves or settles, or is part of the 
resolution or settlement of, one or more obligations or claims that have 
been, or could have been, asserted by the FDIC against the person with 
whom the FDIC is settling regardless of the amount of such obligations 
or claims.



PART 341_REGISTRATION OF SECURITIES TRANSFER AGENTS--Table of Contents



Sec.
341.1  Scope.
341.2  Definitions.
341.3  Registration as securities transfer agent.
341.4  Amendments to registration.
341.5  Withdrawal from registration.
341.6  Reports.

    Authority: Secs. 2, 3, 17, 17A and 23(a), Securities Exchange Act of 
1934, as amended (15 U.S.C. 78b, 78c, 78q, 78q-1 and 78w(a)).

    Source: 47 FR 38106, Aug. 30, 1982, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 341.1  Scope.

    This part is issued by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
(the FDIC) under sections 2, 3(a)(34)(B), 17, 17A and 23(a) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the Act), as amended (15 U.S.C. 78b, 
78c(a)(34)(B), 78q, 78q-1 and 78w(a)) and applies to all insured State 
nonmember banks, insured State savings associations, or subsidiaries of 
such institutions, that act as transfer agents for securities registered 
under section 12 of the Act (15 U.S.C. 78l), or for securities exempt 
from registration under subsections (g)(2)(B) or (g)(2)(G) of section 12 
(15 U.S.C. 781(g)(2)(B) and (G)) (securities of investment companies, 
including mutual funds, and certain insurance companies). Such 
securities are qualifying securities for purposes of this part.

[81 FR 27297, May 6, 2016]



Sec. 341.2  Definitions.

    For the purpose of this part, including all forms and instructions 
promulgated for use in connection herewith, unless the context otherwise 
requires:
    (a) The term transfer agent means any person who engages on behalf 
of an issuer of qualifying securities or on behalf of itself as an 
issuer of qualifying securities in: (1) Countersigning such securities 
upon issuance;
    (2) Monitoring the issuance of such securities with a view to 
preventing unauthorized issuance, a function commonly performed by a 
person called a registrar;
    (3) Registering the transfer of such securities;
    (4) Exchanging or converting such securities; or
    (5) Transferring record ownership of securities by bookkeeping entry 
without physical issuance of such securities certificates. The term 
transfer agent includes any person who performs these functions as a co-
transfer agent with respect to equity or debt issues, and any person who 
performs these functions as registrar or co-registrar with respect to 
debt issued by corporations.

    Note: The following examples are illustrative of the kinds of 
activities engaged in by transfer agents under this part.

    1. A transfer agent of stock or shares in a mutual fund maintains 
the records of shareholders and transfers stock from one shareholder to 
another by cancellation of the surrendered certificates and issuance of 
new certificates in the name of the new shareholder. A co-transfer agent 
also performs these functions.
    2. A registrar of stock or shares in a mutual fund monitors the 
issuance of such securities to prevent over-issuance of shares, affixing 
its signature of each stock certificate issued to

[[Page 731]]

signify its authorized issuance. A co-registrar also performs these 
functions.
    3. A registrar of corporate debt securities maintains the records of 
ownership of registered bonds; makes changes in such records; issues, 
transfers, and exchanges such certificates; and monitors the securities 
to prevent over-issuance of certificates. A co-registrar also performs 
these functions.
    (b) The term Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
    (c) The acronym ARA means the appropriate regulatory agency, as 
defined in section 3(a)(34)(B) of the Act.
    (d) The phrase Federal bank regulators means the Office of the 
Comptroller of the Currency, the Board of Governors of the Federal 
Reserve System, and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (e) The term Form TA-1 means the form and any attachments to that 
form, whether filed as a registration or an amendment to a registration.
    (f) The term registrant means the entity on whose behalf Form TA-1 
is filed.
    (g) The acronym SEC means the Securities and Exchange Commission.
    (h) The term covered institution means an insured State nonmember 
bank, an insured State savings association, and any subsidiary of such 
institutions.
    (i) The term qualifying securities means:
    (1) Securities registered on a national securities exchange (15 
U.S.C. 78l(b)); or
    (2) Securities required to be registered under section 12(g)(1) of 
the Act (15 U.S.C. 78l(g)(1)), except for securities exempted from 
registration with the SEC by section 12(g)(2) (C, D, E, F, and H) of the 
Act.

[47 FR 38106, Aug. 30, 1982, as amended at 81 FR 27297, May 6, 2016]



Sec. 341.3  Registration as securities transfer agent.

    (a) Requirement for registration. Any covered institution that 
performs any of the functions of a transfer agent as described in 
Sec. 341.2(a) with respect to qualifying securities shall register with 
the FDIC in the manner indicated in this section.
    (b) Application to register as transfer agent. An application for 
registration under section 17A(c) of the Act, of a transfer agent for 
which the FDIC is the appropriate regulatory agency, as defined in 
section 3(a)(34)(B)(iii) of the Act, shall be filed with the FDIC at its 
Washington, DC headquarters on Form TA-1, in accordance with the 
instructions contained therein.
    (c) Effective date of registration. Registration shall become 
effective 30 days after the date an application on Form TA-1 is filed 
unless the FDIC accelerates, denies, or postpones such registration in 
accordance with section 17A(c) of the Act. The effective date of such 
registration may be postponed by order for a period not to exceed 15 
days. Postponement of registration for more than 15 days shall be after 
notice and opportunity for hearing. Form TA-1 may be completed 
electronically and is available from the FDIC at www.fdic.gov or the 
Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council at www.ffiec.gov, or 
upon request, from the Director, Division of Risk Management Supervision 
(RMS), FDIC, Washington, DC 20429.

[47 FR 38106, Aug. 30, 1982, as amended at 60 FR 31384, June 15, 1995; 
81 FR 27297, May 6, 2016]



Sec. 341.4  Amendments to registration.

    (a) Within 60 calendar days following the date which any information 
reported on Form TA-1 becomes inaccurate, misleading, or incomplete, the 
registrant shall file an amendment on Form TA-1 correcting the 
inaccurate, misleading, or incomplete information.
    (b) The filing of an amendment to an application for registration as 
a transfer agent under Sec. 341.3, which registration has not become 
effective, shall postpone the effective date of the registration for 30 
days following the date on which the amendment is filed unless the FDIC 
accelerates, denies, or postpones the registration in accordance with 
section 17A(c) of the Act.

[47 FR 38106, Aug. 30, 1982, as amended at 52 FR 1182, Jan. 12, 1987]



Sec. 341.5  Withdrawal from registration.

    (a) Notice of withdrawal from registration. Any transfer agent 
registered under this part that ceases to engage in the functions of a 
transfer agent as defined in Sec. 341.2(a) shall file a written notice 
of withdrawal from registration

[[Page 732]]

with the FDIC. A registered transfer agent that ceases to engage in one 
or more of the functions of transfer agent as defined in Sec. 341.2(a), 
but continues to engage in another such function, shall not withdraw 
from registration.
    (b) A notice of withdrawal shall be filed with the FDIC at its 
Washington, DC headquarters. Deregistration shall be effective upon 
receipt of notice of withdrawal by the FDIC. A Request for 
Deregistration form is available electronically from www.fdic.gov or by 
request from the Director, Division of Risk Management Supervision 
(RMS), FDIC, Washington, DC 20429.
    (c) If the FDIC finds that any registered transfer agent for which 
it is the ARA, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do business as 
a transfer agent, FDIC shall cancel or deny the registration by order of 
the Board of Directors.
    (d) Registration of a transfer agent with another ARA shall cancel 
registration of the transfer agent with FDIC.

[47 FR 38106, Aug. 30, 1982, as amended at 60 FR 31384, June 15, 1995; 
81 FR 27297, May 6, 2016]



Sec. 341.6  Reports.

    Every registration or amendment filed under this section shall 
constitute a report or application within the meaning or sections 17, 
17A(c), and 32(a) of the Act.

                           PART 342 [RESERVED]



PART 343_CONSUMER PROTECTION IN SALES OF INSURANCE--Table of Contents



Sec.
343.10  Purpose and scope.
343.20  Definitions.
343.30  Prohibited practices.
343.40  What you must disclose.
343.50  Where insurance activities may take place.
343.60  Qualification and licensing requirements for insurance sales 
          personnel.

Appendix A to Part 343--Consumer Grievance Process

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819 (Seventh and Tenth); 12 U.S.C. 1831x.

    Source: 65 FR 75843, Dec. 4, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 343.10  Purpose and scope.

    This part establishes consumer protections in connection with retail 
sales practices, solicitations, advertising, or offers of any insurance 
product or annuity to a consumer by:
    (a) Any bank; or
    (b) Any other person that is engaged in such activities at an office 
of the bank or on behalf of the bank.



Sec. 343.20  Definitions.

    As used in this part:
    (a) Affiliate means a company that controls, is controlled by, or is 
under common control with another company.
    (b) Bank means an FDIC-insured, state-chartered commercial or 
savings bank that is not a member of the Federal Reserve System and for 
which the FDIC is the appropriate federal banking agency pursuant to 
section 3(q) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(q)).
    (c) Company means any corporation, partnership, business trust, 
association or similar organization, or any other trust (unless by its 
terms the trust must terminate within twenty-five years or not later 
than twenty-one years and ten months after the death of individuals 
living on the effective date of the trust). It does not include any 
corporation the majority of the shares of which are owned by the United 
States or by any State, or a qualified family partnership, as defined in 
section 2(o)(10) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 
U.S.C. 1841(o)(10)).
    (d) Consumer means an individual who purchases, applies to purchase, 
or is solicited to purchase from you insurance products or annuities 
primarily for personal, family, or household purposes.
    (e) Control of a company has the same meaning as in section 3(w)(5) 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(w)(5)).
    (f) Domestic violence means the occurrence of one or more of the 
following acts by a current or former family member, household member, 
intimate partner, or caretaker:
    (1) Attempting to cause or causing or threatening another person 
physical

[[Page 733]]

harm, severe emotional distress, psychological trauma, rape, or sexual 
assault;
    (2) Engaging in a course of conduct or repeatedly committing acts 
toward another person, including following the person without proper 
authority, under circumstances that place the person in reasonable fear 
of bodily injury or physical harm;
    (3) Subjecting another person to false imprisonment; or
    (4) Attempting to cause or causing damage to property so as to 
intimidate or attempt to control the behavior of another person.
    (g) Electronic media includes any means for transmitting messages 
electronically between you and a consumer in a format that allows visual 
text to be displayed on equipment, for example, a personal computer 
monitor.
    (h) Office means the premises of a bank where retail deposits are 
accepted from the public.
    (i) Subsidiary has the same meaning as in section 3(w)(4) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(w)(4)).
    (j) (1) You means:
    (i) A bank; or
    (ii) Any other person only when the person sells, solicits, 
advertises, or offers an insurance product or annuity to a consumer at 
an office of the bank or on behalf of a bank.
    (2) For purposes of this definition, activities on behalf of a bank 
include activities where a person, whether at an office of the bank or 
at another location sells, solicits, advertises, or offers an insurance 
product or annuity and at least one of the following applies:
    (i) The person represents to a consumer that the sale, solicitation, 
advertisement, or offer of any insurance product or annuity is by or on 
behalf of the bank;
    (ii) The bank refers a consumer to a seller of insurance products or 
annuities and the bank has a contractual arrangement to receive 
commissions or fees derived from a sale of an insurance product or 
annuity resulting from that referral; or
    (iii) Documents evidencing the sale, solicitation, advertising, or 
offer of an insurance product or annuity identify or refer to the bank.



Sec. 343.30  Prohibited practices.

    (a) Anticoercion and antitying rules. You may not engage in any 
practice that would lead a consumer to believe that an extension of 
credit, in violation of section 106(b) of the Bank Holding Company Act 
Amendments of 1970 (12 U.S.C. 1972), is conditional upon either:
    (1) The purchase of an insurance product or annuity from the bank or 
any of its affiliates; or
    (2) An agreement by the consumer not to obtain, or a prohibition on 
the consumer from obtaining, an insurance product or annuity from an 
unaffiliated entity.
    (b) Prohibition on misrepresentations generally. You may not engage 
in any practice or use any advertisement at any office of, or on behalf 
of, the bank or a subsidiary of the bank that could mislead any person 
or otherwise cause a reasonable person to reach an erroneous belief with 
respect to:
    (1) The fact that an insurance product or annuity sold or offered 
for sale by you or any subsidiary of the bank is not backed by the 
Federal government or the bank, or the fact that the insurance product 
or annuity is not insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation;
    (2) In the case of an insurance product or annuity that involves 
investment risk, the fact that there is an investment risk, including 
the potential that principal may be lost and that the product may 
decline in value; or
    (3) In the case of a bank or subsidiary of the bank at which 
insurance products or annuities are sold or offered for sale, the fact 
that:
    (i) The approval of an extension of credit to a consumer by the bank 
or subsidiary may not be conditioned on the purchase of an insurance 
product or annuity by the consumer from the bank or a subsidiary of the 
bank; and
    (ii) The consumer is free to purchase the insurance product or 
annuity from another source.
    (c) Prohibition on domestic violence discrimination. You may not 
sell or offer for sale, as principal, agent, or broker, any life or 
health insurance product if the status of the applicant or insured as a 
victim of domestic violence or as

[[Page 734]]

a provider of services to victims of domestic violence is considered as 
a criterion in any decision with regard to insurance underwriting, 
pricing, renewal, or scope of coverage of such product, or with regard 
to the payment of insurance claims on such product, except as required 
or expressly permitted under State law.



Sec. 343.40  What you must disclose.

    (a) Insurance disclosures. In connection with the initial purchase 
of an insurance product or annuity by a consumer from you, you must 
disclose to the consumer, except to the extent the disclosure would not 
be accurate, that:
    (1) The insurance product or annuity is not a deposit or other 
obligation of, or guaranteed by, the bank or an affiliate of the bank;
    (2) The insurance product or annuity is not insured by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) or any other agency of the United 
States, the bank, or (if applicable) an affiliate of the bank; and
    (3) In the case of an insurance product or annuity that involves an 
investment risk, there is investment risk associated with the product, 
including the possible loss of value.
    (b) Credit disclosure. In the case of an application for credit in 
connection with which an insurance product or annuity is solicited, 
offered, or sold, you must disclose that the bank may not condition an 
extension of credit on either:
    (1) The consumer's purchase of an insurance product or annuity from 
the bank or any of its affiliates; or
    (2) The consumer's agreement not to obtain, or a prohibition on the 
consumer from obtaining, an insurance product or annuity from an 
unaffiliated entity.
    (c) Timing and method of disclosures--(1) In general. The 
disclosures required by paragraph (a) of this section must be provided 
orally and in writing before the completion of the initial sale of an 
insurance product or annuity to a consumer. The disclosure required by 
paragraph (b) of this section must be made orally and in writing at the 
time the consumer applies for an extension of credit in connection with 
which an insurance product or annuity is solicited, offered, or sold.
    (2) Exception for transactions by mail. If a sale of an insurance 
product or annuity is conducted by mail, you are not required to make 
the oral disclosures required by paragraph (a) of this section. If you 
take an application for credit by mail, you are not required to make the 
oral disclosure required by paragraph (b).
    (3) Exception for transactions by telephone. If a sale of an 
insurance product or annuity is conducted by telephone, you may provide 
the written disclosures required by paragraph (a) of this section by 
mail within 3 business days beginning on the first business day after 
the sale, excluding Sundays and the legal public holidays specified in 5 
U.S.C. 6103(a). If you take an application for credit by telephone, you 
may provide the written disclosure required by paragraph (b) of this 
section by mail, provided you mail it to the consumer within three days 
beginning the first business day after the application is taken, 
excluding Sundays and the legal public holidays specified in 5 U.S.C. 
6103(a).
    (4) Electronic form of disclosures. (i) Subject to the requirements 
of section 101(c) of the Electronic Signatures in Global and National 
Commerce Act (12 U.S.C. 7001(c)), you may provide the written 
disclosures required by paragraph (a) and (b) of this section through 
electronic media instead of on paper, if the consumer affirmatively 
consents to receiving the disclosures electronically and if the 
disclosures are provided in a format that the consumer may retain or 
obtain later, for example, by printing or storing electronically (such 
as by downloading).
    (ii) Any disclosure required by paragraphs (a) or (b) of this 
section that is provided by electronic media is not required to be 
provided orally.
    (5) Disclosures must be readily understandable. The disclosures 
provided shall be conspicuous, simple, direct, readily understandable, 
and designed to call attention to the nature and significance of the 
information provided. For instance, you may use the following 
disclosures in visual media, such as television broadcasting, ATM 
screens, billboards, signs, posters and

[[Page 735]]

written advertisements and promotional materials, as appropriate and 
consistent with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section:

 NOT A DEPOSIT
 NOT FDIC-INSURED
 NOT INSURED BY ANY FEDERAL GOVERNMENT AGENCY
 NOT GUARANTEED BY THE BANK
 MAY GO DOWN IN VALUE

    (6) Disclosures must be meaningful. (i) You must provide the 
disclosures required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section in a 
meaningful form. Examples of the types of methods that could call 
attention to the nature and significance of the information provided 
include:
    (A) A plain-language heading to call attention to the disclosures;
    (B) A typeface and type size that are easy to read;
    (C) Wide margins and ample line spacing;
    (D) Boldface or italics for key words; and
    (E) Distinctive type size, style, and graphic devices, such as 
shading or sidebars, when the disclosures are combined with other 
information.
    (ii) You have not provided the disclosures in a meaningful form if 
you merely state to the consumer that the required disclosures are 
available in printed material, but do not provide the printed material 
when required and do not orally disclose the information to the consumer 
when required.
    (iii) With respect to those disclosures made through electronic 
media for which paper or oral disclosures are not required, the 
disclosures are not meaningfully provided if the consumer may bypass the 
visual text of the disclosures before purchasing an insurance product or 
annuity.
    (7) Consumer acknowledgment. You must obtain from the consumer, at 
the time a consumer receives the disclosures required under paragraphs 
(a) or (b) of this section, or at the time of the initial purchase by 
the consumer of an insurance product or annuity, a written 
acknowledgment by the consumer that the consumer received the 
disclosures. You may permit a consumer to acknowledge receipt of the 
disclosures electronically or in paper form. If the disclosures required 
under paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section are provided in connection 
with a transaction that is conducted by telephone, you must:
    (i) Obtain an oral acknowledgment of receipt of the disclosures and 
maintain sufficient documentation to show that the acknowledgment was 
given; and
    (ii) Make reasonable efforts to obtain a written acknowledgment from 
the consumer.
    (d) Advertisements and other promotional material for insurance 
products or annuities. The disclosures described in paragraph (a) of 
this section are required in advertisements and promotional material for 
insurance products or annuities unless the advertisements and 
promotional materials are of a general nature describing or listing the 
services or products offered by the bank.



Sec. 343.50  Where insurance activities may take place.

    (a) General rule. A bank must, to the extent practicable, keep the 
area where the bank conducts transactions involving insurance products 
or annuities physically segregated from areas where retail deposits are 
routinely accepted from the general public, identify the areas where 
insurance product or annuity sales activities occur, and clearly 
delineate and distinguish those areas from the areas where the bank's 
retail deposit-taking activities occur.
    (b) Referrals. Any person who accepts deposits from the public in an 
area where such transactions are routinely conducted in the bank may 
refer a consumer who seeks to purchase an insurance product or annuity 
to a qualified person who sells that product only if the person making 
the referral receives no more than a one-time, nominal fee of a fixed 
dollar amount for each referral that does not depend on whether the 
referral results in a transaction.



Sec. 343.60  Qualification and licensing requirements for insurance
sales personnel.

    A bank may not permit any person to sell or offer for sale any 
insurance product or annuity in any part of its office or on its behalf, 
unless the person is at all times appropriately qualified and licensed 
under applicable State insurance licensing standards

[[Page 736]]

with regard to the specific products being sold or recommended.



         Sec. Appendix A to Part 343--Consumer Grievance Process

    Any consumer who believes that any bank or any other person selling, 
soliciting, advertising, or offering insurance products or annuities to 
the consumer at an office of the bank or on behalf of the bank has 
violated the requirements of this part should contact the Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC), Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, at the following address: 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, 
DC 20429, or telephone 202-942-3100 or 800-934-3342, or e-mail 
[email protected].



PART 344_RECORDKEEPING AND CONFIRMATION REQUIREMENTS FOR SECURITIES 
TRANSACTIONS--Table of Contents



Sec.
344.1  Purpose and scope.
344.2  Exceptions.
344.3  Definitions.
344.4  Recordkeeping.
344.5  Content and time of notification.
344.6  Notification by agreement; alternative forms and times of 
          notification.
344.7  Settlement of securities transactions.
344.8  Securities trading policies and procedures.
344.9  Personal securities trading reporting by officers and employees.
344.10  Waivers.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1817, 1818, 1819, and 5412.

    Source: ,78 FR 76723, Dec. 19, 2013, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 344.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Purpose. The purpose of this part is to ensure that purchasers 
of securities in transactions effected by FDIC-supervised institutions 
are provided adequate information regarding transactions. This part is 
also designed to ensure that FDIC-supervised institutions subject to 
this part maintain adequate records and controls with respect to the 
securities transactions they effect.
    (b) Scope; general. Any security transaction effected for a customer 
by an FDIC-supervised institution is subject to this part unless 
excepted by Sec. 344.2. An FDIC-supervised institution effecting 
transactions in government securities is subject to the notification, 
recordkeeping, and policies and procedures requirements of this part. 
This part also applies to municipal securities transactions by an FDIC-
supervised institution that is not registered as a ``municipal 
securities dealer'' with the Securities and Exchange Commission. See 15 
U.S.C. 78c(a)(30) and 78o-4.



Sec. 344.2  Exceptions.

    (a) An FDIC-supervised institution effecting securities transactions 
for customers is not subject to all or part of this part 344 to the 
extent that they qualify for one or more of the following exceptions:
    (1) Small number of transactions. The requirements of 
Secs. 344.4(a)(2) through (4) and 344.8(a)(1) through (3) do not apply 
to an FDIC-supervised institution effecting an average of fewer than 500 
securities transactions per year for customers over the prior three 
calendar year period. The calculation of this average does not include 
transactions in government securities.
    (2) Government securities. The recordkeeping requirements of 
Sec. 344.4 do not apply to FDIC-supervised institutions effecting fewer 
than 500 government securities brokerage transactions per year. This 
exemption does not apply to government securities dealer transactions by 
FDIC-supervised institutions.
    (3) Municipal securities. This part does not apply to transactions 
in municipal securities effected by an FDIC-supervised institution 
registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission as a ``municipal 
securities dealer'' as defined in title 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(30). See 15 
U.S.C. 78o-4.
    (4) Foreign branches. Activities of foreign branches of FDIC-
supervised institutions shall not be subject to the requirements of this 
part.
    (5) Transactions effected by registered broker/dealers. (i) This 
part does not apply to securities transactions effected for an FDIC-
supervised institution's customer by a registered broker/dealer if:
    (A) The broker/dealer is fully disclosed to the customer; and
    (B) The customer has a direct contractual agreement with the broker/
dealer.
    (ii) This exemption extends to arrangements with broker/dealers 
which

[[Page 737]]

involve FDIC-supervised institution employees when acting as employees 
of, and subject to the supervision of, the registered broker/dealer when 
soliciting, recommending, or effecting securities transactions.
    (b) Safe and sound operations. Notwithstanding this section, every 
FDIC-supervised institution effecting securities transactions for 
customers shall maintain, directly or indirectly, effective systems of 
records and controls regarding their customer securities transactions to 
ensure safe and sound operations. The records and systems maintained 
must clearly and accurately reflect the information required under this 
part and provide an adequate basis for an audit.



Sec. 344.3  Definitions.

    (a) Asset-backed security means a security that is serviced 
primarily by the cash flows of a discrete pool of receivables or other 
financial assets, either fixed or revolving, that by their terms convert 
into cash within a finite time period plus any rights or other assets 
designed to assure the servicing or timely distribution of proceeds to 
the security holders.
    (b) Cash management sweep account means a prearranged, automatic 
transfer of funds above a certain dollar level from a deposit account to 
purchase a security or securities, or any prearranged, automatic 
redemption or sale of a security or securities when a deposit account 
drops below a certain level with the proceeds being transferred into a 
deposit account.
    (c) Collective investment fund means funds held by an FDIC-
supervised institution as fiduciary and, consistent with local law, 
invested collectively:
    (1) In a common trust fund maintained by such FDIC-supervised 
institution exclusively for the collective investment and reinvestment 
of monies contributed thereto by the FDIC-supervised institution in its 
capacity as trustee, executor, administrator, guardian, or custodian 
under the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act; or
    (2) In a fund consisting solely of assets of retirement, pension, 
profit sharing, stock bonus or similar trusts which are exempt from 
Federal income taxation under the Internal Revenue Code (26 U.S.C.).
    (d) Completion of the transaction means:
    (1) For purchase transactions, the time when the customer pays the 
FDIC-supervised institution any part of the purchase price (or the time 
when the FDIC-supervised institution makes the book-entry for any part 
of the purchase price, if applicable), however, if the customer pays for 
the security prior to the time payment is requested or becomes due, then 
the transaction shall be completed when the FDIC-supervised institution 
transfers the security into the account of the customer; and
    (2) For sale transactions, the time when the FDIC-supervised 
institution transfers the security out of the account of the customer 
or, if the security is not in its custody, then the time when the 
security is delivered to it, however, if the customer delivers the 
security to the FDIC-supervised institution prior to the time delivery 
is requested or becomes due then the transaction shall be completed when 
the FDIC-supervised institution makes payment into the account of the 
customer.
    (e) Crossing of buy and sell orders means a security transaction in 
which the same FDIC-supervised institution acts as agent for both the 
buyer and the seller.
    (f) Customer means any person or account, including any agency, 
trust, estate, guardianship, or other fiduciary account for which an 
FDIC-supervised institution effects or participates in effecting the 
purchase or sale of securities, but does not include a broker, dealer, 
insured depository institution acting as a broker or a dealer, issuer of 
the securities that are the subject of the transaction or a person or 
account having a direct, contractual agreement with a fully disclosed 
broker/dealer.
    (g) Debt security means any security, such as a bond, debenture, 
note, or any other similar instrument that evidences a liability of the 
issuer (including any security of this type that is convertible into 
stock or a similar security) and fractional or participation interests 
in one or more of any of the

[[Page 738]]

foregoing; provided, however, that securities issued by an investment 
company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940, 15 U.S.C. 
80a--1 et seq., shall not be included in this definition.
    (h) FDIC-supervised institution means any insured depository 
institution for which the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation is the 
appropriate Federal banking agency pursuant to section 3(q) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(q).
    (i) Government security means:
    (1) A security that is a direct obligation of, or obligation 
guaranteed as to principal and interest by, the United States;
    (2) A security that is issued or guaranteed by a corporation in 
which the United States has a direct or indirect interest and which is 
designated by the Secretary of the Treasury for exemption as necessary 
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of 
investors;
    (3) A security issued or guaranteed as to principal and interest by 
any corporation whose securities are designated, by statute specifically 
naming the corporation, to constitute exempt securities within the 
meaning of the laws administered by the Securities and Exchange 
Commission; or
    (4) Any put, call, straddle, option, or privilege on a security 
described in paragraph (i)(1), (2), or (3) of this section other than a 
put, call, straddle, option, or privilege that is traded on one or more 
national securities exchanges, or for which quotations are disseminated 
through an automated quotation system operated by a registered 
securities association.
    (j) Investment discretion means that, with respect to an account, an 
FDIC-supervised institution directly or indirectly:
    (1) Is authorized to determine what securities or other property 
shall be purchased or sold by or for the account; or
    (2) Makes decisions as to what securities or other property shall be 
purchased or sold by or for the account even though some other person 
may have responsibility for these investment decisions.
    (k) Municipal security means a security which is a direct obligation 
of, or an obligation guaranteed as to principal or interest by, a State 
or any political subdivision, or any agency or instrumentality of a 
State or any political subdivision, or any municipal corporate 
instrumentality of one or more States or any security which is an 
industrial development bond (as defined in 26 U.S.C. 103(c)(2)) the 
interest on which is excludable from gross income under 26 U.S.C. 
103(a)(1) if, by reason of the application of paragraph (4) or (6) of 26 
U.S.C. 103(c) (determined as if paragraphs (4)(A), (5) and (7) were not 
included in 26 U.S.C. 103(c), paragraph (1) of 26 U.S.C. 103(c) does not 
apply to such security. See 15. U.S.C. 78c(a)(29).
    (l) Periodic plan means any written authorization for an FDIC-
supervised institution to act as agent to purchase or sell for a 
customer a specific security or securities, in a specific amount 
(calculated in security units or dollars) or to the extent of dividends 
and funds available, at specific time intervals, and setting forth the 
commission or charges to be paid by the customer or the manner of 
calculating them. Periodic plans include dividend reinvestment plans, 
automatic investment plans, and employee stock purchase plans.
    (m) Security means any note, stock, treasury stock, bond, debenture, 
certificate of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement 
or in any oil, gas, or other mineral royalty or lease, any collateral-
trust certificate, preorganization certificate or subscription, 
transferable share, investment contract, voting-trust certificate, and 
any put, call, straddle, option, or privilege on any security or group 
or index of securities (including any interest therein or based on the 
value thereof), or, in general, any instrument commonly known as a 
``security''; or any certificate of interest or participation in, 
temporary or interim certificate for, receipt for, or warrant or right 
to subscribe to or purchase, any of the foregoing. The term security 
does not include:
    (1) A deposit or share account in a federally or state insured 
depository institution;
    (2) A loan participation;

[[Page 739]]

    (3) A letter of credit or other form of insured depository 
institution indebtedness incurred in the ordinary course of business;
    (4) Currency;
    (5) Any note, draft, bill of exchange, or bankers acceptance which 
has a maturity at the time of issuance of not exceeding nine months, 
exclusive of days of grace, or any renewal thereof the maturity of which 
is likewise limited;
    (6) Units of a collective investment fund;
    (7) Interests in a variable amount (master) note of a borrower of 
prime credit; or
    (8) U.S. Savings Bonds.



Sec. 344.4  Recordkeeping.

    (a) General rule. An FDIC-supervised institution effecting 
securities transactions for customers shall maintain the following 
records for at least three years:
    (1) Chronological records. An itemized daily record of each purchase 
and sale of securities maintained in chronological order, and including:
    (i) Account or customer name for which each transaction was 
effected;
    (ii) Description of the securities;
    (iii) Unit and aggregate purchase or sale price;
    (iv) Trade date; and
    (v) Name or other designation of the broker/dealer or other person 
from whom the securities were purchased or to whom the securities were 
sold;
    (2) Account records. Account records for each customer, reflecting:
    (i) Purchases and sales of securities;
    (ii) Receipts and deliveries of securities;
    (iii) Receipts and disbursements of cash; and
    (iv) Other debits and credits pertaining to transactions in 
securities;
    (3) A separate memorandum (order ticket) of each order to purchase 
or sell securities (whether executed or canceled), which shall include:
    (i) The accounts for which the transaction was effected;
    (ii) Whether the transaction was a market order, limit order, or 
subject to special instructions;
    (iii) The time the order was received by the trader or other FDIC-
supervised institution employee responsible for effecting the 
transaction;
    (iv) The time the order was placed with the broker/dealer, or if 
there was no broker/dealer, time the order was executed or canceled;
    (v) The price at which the order was executed; and
    (vi) The broker/dealer utilized;
    (4) Record of broker/dealers. A record of all broker/dealers 
selected by the FDIC-supervised institution to effect securities 
transactions and the amount of commissions paid or allocated to each 
broker during the calendar year; and
    (5) Notifications. A copy of the written notification required by 
Secs. 344.5 and 344.6.
    (b) Manner of maintenance. Records may be maintained in whatever 
manner, form or format an FDIC-supervised institution deems appropriate, 
provided however, the records required by this section must clearly and 
accurately reflect the information required and provide an adequate 
basis for the audit of the information. Records may be maintained in 
hard copy, automated or electronic form provided the records are easily 
retrievable, readily available for inspection, and capable of being 
reproduced in a hard copy. An FDIC-supervised institution may contract 
with third party service providers, including broker/dealers, to 
maintain records required under this part.



Sec. 344.5  Content and time of notification.

    Every FDIC-supervised institution effecting a securities transaction 
for a customer shall give or send, by mail, facsimile or other means of 
electronic transmission, to the customer at or before completion of the 
transaction one of the types of written notification identified below:
    (a) Broker/dealer's confirmations. (1) A copy of the confirmation of 
a broker/dealer relating to the securities transaction. An FDIC-
supervised institution may either have the broker/dealer send the 
confirmation directly to the FDIC-supervised institution's customer or 
send a copy of the broker/dealer's confirmation to the customer upon 
receipt of the confirmation by the FDIC-supervised institution. If an 
FDIC-supervised

[[Page 740]]

institution chooses to send a copy of the broker/dealer's confirmation, 
it must be sent within one business day from the institution's receipt 
of the broker/dealer's confirmation; and
    (2) If the FDIC-supervised institution is to receive remuneration 
from the customer or any other source in connection with the 
transaction, a statement of the source and amount of any remuneration to 
be received if such would be required under paragraph (b)(6) of this 
section; or
    (b) Written notification. A written notification disclosing:
    (1) Name of the FDIC-supervised institution;
    (2) Name of the customer;
    (3) Whether the FDIC-supervised institution is acting as agent for 
such customer, as agent for both such customer and some other person, as 
principal for its own account, or in any other capacity;
    (4) The date and time of execution, or the fact that the time of 
execution will be furnished within a reasonable time upon written 
request of the customer, and the identity, price, and number of shares 
or units (or principal amount in the case of debt securities) of the 
security purchased or sold by the customer;
    (5) The amount of any remuneration received or to be received, 
directly or indirectly, by any broker/dealer from such customer in 
connection with the transaction;
    (6)(i) The amount of any remuneration received or to be received by 
the FDIC-supervised institution from the customer, and the source and 
amount of any other remuneration received or to be received by the FDIC-
supervised institution in connection with the transaction, unless:
    (A) Remuneration is determined pursuant to a prior written agreement 
between the FDIC-supervised institution and the customer; or
    (B) In the case of government securities and municipal securities, 
the FDIC-supervised institution received the remuneration in other than 
an agency transaction; or
    (C) In the case of open end investment company securities, the FDIC-
supervised institution has provided the customer with a current 
prospectus which discloses all current fees, loads and expenses at or 
before completion of the transaction;
    (ii) If the FDIC-supervised institution elects not to disclose the 
source and amount of remuneration it has received or will receive from a 
party other than the customer pursuant to paragraph (b)(6)(i)(A), (B), 
or (C) of this section, the written notification must disclose whether 
the FDIC-supervised institution has received or will receive 
remuneration from a party other than the customer, and that the FDIC-
supervised institution will furnish within a reasonable time the source 
and amount of this remuneration upon written request of the customer. 
This election is not available, however, if, with respect to a purchase, 
the FDIC-supervised institution was participating in a distribution of 
that security; or, with respect to a sale, the FDIC-supervised 
institution was participating in a tender offer for that security;
    (7) Name of the broker/dealer utilized; or where there is no broker/
dealer, the name of the person from whom the security was purchased or 
to whom the security was sold, or a statement that the FDIC-supervised 
institution will furnish this information within a reasonable time upon 
written request;
    (8) In the case of a transaction in a debt security subject to 
redemption before maturity, a statement to the effect that the debt 
security may be redeemed in whole or in part before maturity, that the 
redemption could affect the yield represented and that additional 
information is available upon request;
    (9) In the case of a transaction in a debt security effected 
exclusively on the basis of a dollar price:
    (i) The dollar price at which the transaction was effected; and
    (ii) The yield to maturity calculated from the dollar price, 
provided however, that this shall not apply to a transaction in a debt 
security that either has a maturity date that may be extended by the 
issuer thereof, with a variable interest payable thereon, or is an 
asset-backed security that represents an interest in or is secured by a 
pool of receivables or other financial assets that are subject 
continuously to prepayment;

[[Page 741]]

    (10) In the case of a transaction in a debt security effected on the 
basis of yield:
    (i) The yield at which the transaction was effected, including the 
percentage amount and its characterization (e.g., current yield, yield 
to maturity, or yield to call) and if effected at yield to call, the 
type of call, the call date and call price;
    (ii) The dollar price calculated from the yield at which the 
transaction was effected; and
    (iii) If effected on a basis other than yield to maturity and the 
yield to maturity is lower than the represented yield, the yield to 
maturity as well as the represented yield; provided however, that this 
paragraph (b)(10) shall not apply to a transaction in a debt security 
that either has a maturity date that may be extended by the issuer with 
a variable interest rate payable thereon, or is an asset-backed security 
that represents an interest in or is secured by a pool of receivables or 
other financial assets that are subject continuously to prepayment;
    (11) In the case of a transaction in a debt security that is an 
asset-backed security, which represents an interest in or is secured by 
a pool of receivables or other financial assets that are subject 
continuously to prepayment, a statement indicating that the actual yield 
of the asset-backed security may vary according to the rate at which the 
underlying receivables or other financial assets are prepaid and a 
statement of the fact that information concerning the factors that 
affect yield (including at a minimum estimated yield, weighted average 
life, and the prepayment assumptions underlying yield) will be furnished 
upon written request of the customer; and
    (12) In the case of a transaction in a debt security, other than a 
government security, that the security is unrated by a nationally 
recognized statistical rating organization, if that is the case.



Sec. 344.6  Notification by agreement; alternative forms and
times of notification.

    An FDIC-supervised institution may elect to use the following 
alternative notification procedures if the transaction is effected for:
    (a) Notification by agreement. Accounts (except periodic plans) 
where the FDIC-supervised institution does not exercise investment 
discretion and the FDIC-supervised institution and the customer agree in 
writing to a different arrangement as to the time and content of the 
written notification; provided however, that such agreement makes clear 
the customer's right to receive the written notification pursuant to 
Sec. 344.5(a) or (b) at no additional cost to the customer.
    (b) Trust accounts. Accounts (except collective investment funds) 
where the FDIC-supervised institution exercises investment discretion in 
other than in an agency capacity, in which instance it shall, upon 
request of the person having the power to terminate the account or, if 
there is no such person, upon the request of any person holding a vested 
beneficial interest in such account, give or send to such person the 
written notification within a reasonable time. The FDIC-supervised 
institution may charge such person a reasonable fee for providing this 
information.
    (c) Agency accounts. Accounts where the FDIC-supervised institution 
exercises investment discretion in an agency capacity, in which 
instance:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised institution shall give or send to each 
customer not less frequently than once every three months an itemized 
statement which shall specify the funds and securities in the custody or 
possession of the FDIC-supervised institution at the end of such period 
and all debits, credits and transactions in the customer's accounts 
during such period; and
    (2) If requested by the customer, the FDIC-supervised institution 
shall give or send to each customer within a reasonable time the written 
notification described in Sec. 344.5. The FDIC-supervised institution 
may charge a reasonable fee for providing the information described in 
Sec. 344.5.
    (d) Cash management sweep accounts. An FDIC-supervised institution 
effecting a securities transaction for a cash management sweep account 
shall give or send its customer a written statement, in the same form as 
required under paragraph (f) of this section, for each month in which a 
purchase or sale

[[Page 742]]

of a security takes place in the account and not less than once every 
three months if there are no securities transactions in the account. 
Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph (d), FDIC-supervised 
institutions that retain custody of government securities that are the 
subject of a hold-in-custody repurchase agreement are subject to the 
requirements of 17 CFR 403.5(d).
    (e) Collective investment fund accounts. The FDIC-supervised 
institution shall at least annually give or send to the customer a copy 
of a financial report of the fund, or provide notice that a copy of such 
report is available and will be furnished upon request to each person to 
whom a regular periodic accounting would ordinarily be rendered with 
respect to each participating account. This report shall be based upon 
an audit made by independent public accountants or internal auditors 
responsible only to the board of directors of the FDIC-supervised 
institution.
    (f) Periodic plan accounts. The FDIC-supervised institution shall 
give or send to the customer not less than once every three months a 
written statement showing:
    (1) The funds and securities in the custody or possession of the 
FDIC-supervised institution;
    (2) All service charges and commissions paid by the customer in 
connection with the transaction; and
    (3) All other debits and credits of the customer's account involved 
in the transaction; provided that upon written request of the customer, 
the FDIC-supervised institution shall give or send the information 
described in Sec. 344.5, except that any such information relating to 
remuneration paid in connection with the transaction need not be 
provided to the customer when the remuneration is paid by a source other 
than the customer. The FDIC-supervised institution may charge a 
reasonable fee for providing information described in Sec. 344.5.



Sec. 344.7  Settlement of securities transactions.

    (a) An FDIC-supervised institution shall not effect or enter into a 
contract for the purchase or sale of a security (other than an exempted 
security as defined in 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(12), government security, 
municipal security, commercial paper, bankers' acceptances, or 
commercial bills) that provides for payment of funds and delivery of 
securities later than the third business day after the date of the 
contract unless otherwise expressly agreed to by the parties at the time 
of the transaction.
    (b) Paragraphs (a) and (c) of this section shall not apply to 
contracts:
    (1) For the purchase or sale of limited partnership interests that 
are not listed on an exchange or for which quotations are not 
disseminated through an automated quotation system of a registered 
securities association; or
    (2) For the purchase or sale of securities that the Securities and 
Exchange Commission (SEC) may from time to time, taking into account 
then existing market practices, exempt by order from the requirements of 
paragraph (a) of SEC Rule 15c6-1, 17 CFR 240.15c6-1(a), either 
unconditionally or on specified terms and conditions, if the SEC 
determines that an exemption is consistent with the public interest and 
the protection of investors.
    (c) Paragraph (a) of this section shall not apply to contracts for 
the sale for cash of securities that are priced after 4:30 p.m. Eastern 
time on the date the securities are priced and that are sold by an 
issuer to an underwriter pursuant to a firm commitment underwritten 
offering registered under the Securities Act of 1933, 15 U.S.C. 77a et 
seq., or sold to an initial purchaser by an FDIC-supervised institution 
participating in the offering. An FDIC-supervised institution shall not 
effect or enter into a contract for the purchase or sale of the 
securities that provides for payment of funds and delivery of securities 
later than the fourth business day after the date of the contract unless 
otherwise expressly agreed to by the parties at the time of the 
transaction.
    (d) For the purposes of paragraphs (a) and (c) of this section, the 
parties to a contract shall be deemed to have expressly agreed to an 
alternate date for payment of funds and delivery of securities at the 
time of the transaction for

[[Page 743]]

a contract for the sale for cash of securities pursuant to a firm 
commitment offering if the managing underwriter and the issuer have 
agreed to the date for all securities sold pursuant to the offering and 
the parties to the contract have not expressly agreed to another date 
for payment of funds and delivery of securities at the time of the 
transaction.



Sec. 344.8  Securities trading policies and procedures.

    (a) Policies and procedures. Every FDIC-supervised institution 
effecting securities transactions for customers shall establish written 
policies and procedures providing:
    (1) Assignment of responsibility for supervision of all officers or 
employees who:
    (i) Transmit orders to or place orders with broker/dealers; or
    (ii) Execute transactions in securities for customers;
    (2) Assignment of responsibility for supervision and reporting, 
separate from those in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, with respect to 
all officers or employees who process orders for notification or 
settlement purposes, or perform other back office functions with respect 
to securities transactions effected for customers;
    (3) For the fair and equitable allocation of securities and prices 
to accounts when orders for the same security are received at 
approximately the same time and are placed for execution either 
individually or in combination; and
    (4) Where applicable, and where permissible under local law, for the 
crossing of buy and sell orders on a fair and equitable basis to the 
parties to the transaction.



Sec. 344.9  Personal securities trading reporting by officers and
employees of FDIC-supervised institutions.

    (a) Officers and employees subject to reporting. FDIC-supervised 
institution officers and employees who:
    (1) Make investment recommendations or decisions for the accounts of 
customers;
    (2) Participate in the determination of such recommendations or 
decisions; or
    (3) In connection with their duties, obtain information concerning 
which securities are being purchased or sold or recommend such action, 
must report to the FDIC-supervised institution, within 30-calendar days 
after the end of the calendar quarter, all transactions in securities 
made by them or on their behalf, either at the FDIC-supervised 
institution or elsewhere in which they have a beneficial interest. The 
report shall identify the securities purchased or sold and indicate the 
dates of the transactions and whether the transactions were purchases or 
sales.
    (b) Exempt transactions. Excluded from this reporting requirement 
are:
    (1) Transactions for the benefit of the officer or employee over 
which the officer or employee has no direct or indirect influence or 
control;
    (2) Transactions in registered investment company shares;
    (3) Transactions in government securities; and
    (4) All transactions involving in the aggregate $10,000 or less 
during the calendar quarter.
    (c) Alternative report. Where an FDIC-supervised institution acts as 
an investment adviser to an investment company registered under the 
Investment Company Act of 1940, the FDIC-supervised institution's 
officers and employees may fulfill their reporting requirement under 
paragraph (a) of this section by filing with the FDIC-supervised 
institution the ``access persons'' personal securities trading report 
required by SEC Rule 17j-1, 17 CFR 270.17j-1.



Sec. 344.10  Waivers.

    The Board of Directors of the FDIC, in its discretion, may waive for 
good cause all or any part of this part 344.



PART 345_COMMUNITY REINVESTMENT--Table of Contents



                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
345.11  Authority, purposes, and scope.
345.12  Definitions.

[[Page 744]]

              Subpart B_Standards for Assessing Performance

345.21  Performance tests, standards, and ratings, in general.
345.22  Lending test.
345.23  Investment test.
345.24  Service test.
345.25  Community development test for wholesale or limited purpose 
          banks.
345.26  Small bank performance standards.
345.27  Strategic plan.
345.28  Assigned ratings.
345.29  Effect of CRA performance on applications.

        Subpart C_Records, Reporting, and Disclosure Requirements

345.41  Assessment area delineation.
345.42  Data collection, reporting, and disclosure.
345.43  Content and availability of public file.
345.44  Public notice by banks.
345.45  Publication of planned examination schedule.

Appendix A to Part 345--Ratings
Appendix B to Part 345--CRA Notice

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1814-1817, 1819-1820, 1828, 1831u and 2901-
2908, 3103-3104, and 3108(a).

    Source: 43 FR 47151, Oct. 12, 1978, unless otherwise noted.



                            Subpart A_General

    Source: 60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 345.11  Authority, purposes, and scope.

    (a) Authority and OMB control number--(1) Authority. The authority 
for this part is 12 U.S.C. 1814-1817, 1819-1820, 1828, 1831u and 2901-
2907, 3103-3104, and 3108(a).
    (2) OMB control number. The information collection requirements 
contained in this part were approved by the Office of Management and 
Budget under the provisions of 44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq. and have been 
assigned OMB control number 3064-0092.
    (b) Purposes. In enacting the Community Reinvestment Act (CRA), the 
Congress required each appropriate Federal financial supervisory agency 
to assess an institution's record of helping to meet the credit needs of 
the local communities in which the institution is chartered, consistent 
with the safe and sound operation of the institution, and to take this 
record into account in the agency's evaluation of an application for a 
deposit facility by the institution. This part is intended to carry out 
the purposes of the CRA by:
    (1) Establishing the framework and criteria by which the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) assesses a bank's record of helping 
to meet the credit needs of its entire community, including low- and 
moderate-income neighborhoods, consistent with the safe and sound 
operation of the bank; and
    (2) Providing that the FDIC takes that record into account in 
considering certain applications.
    (c) Scope--(1) General. Except for certain special purpose banks 
described in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, this part applies to all 
insured State nonmember banks, including insured State branches as 
described in paragraph (c)(2) and any uninsured State branch that 
results from an acquisition described in section 5(a)(8) of the 
International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3103(a)(8)).
    (2) Insured State branches. Insured State branches are branches of a 
foreign bank established and operating under the laws of any State, the 
deposits of which are insured in accordance with the provisions of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act. In the case of insured State branches, 
references in this part to main office mean the principal branch within 
the United States and the term branch or branches refers to any insured 
State branch or branches located within the United States. The 
assessment area of an insured State branch is the community or 
communities located within the United States served by the branch as 
described in Sec. 345.41.
    (3) Certain special purpose banks. This part does not apply to 
special purpose banks that do not perform commercial or retail banking 
services by granting credit to the public in the ordinary course of 
business, other than as incident to their specialized operations. These 
banks include banker's banks, as defined in 12 U.S.C. 24 (Seventh), and 
banks that engage only in one or more of the following activities: 
providing

[[Page 745]]

cash management controlled disbursement services or serving as 
correspondent banks, trust companies, or clearing agents.



Sec. 345.12  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, the following definitions apply:
    (a) Affiliate means any company that controls, is controlled by, or 
is under common control with another company. The term control has the 
meaning given to that term in 12 U.S.C. 1841(a)(2), and a company is 
under common control with another company if both companies are directly 
or indirectly controlled by the same company.
    (b) Area median income means:
    (1) The median family income for the MSA, if a person or geography 
is located in an MSA, or for the metropolitan division, if a person or 
geography is located in an MSA that has been subdivided into 
metropolitan divisions; or
    (2) The statewide nonmetropolitan median family income, if a person 
or geography is located outside an MSA.
    (c) Assessment area means a geographic area delineated in accordance 
with Sec. 345.41.
    (d) Remote Service Facility (RSF) means an automated, unstaffed 
banking facility owned or operated by, or operated exclusively for, the 
bank, such as an automated teller machine, cash dispensing machine, 
point-of-sale terminal, or other remote electronic facility, at which 
deposits are received, cash dispersed, or money lent.
    (e) Bank means a State nonmember bank, as that term is defined in 
section 3(e)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, as amended (FDIA) 
(12 U.S.C. 1813(e)(2)), with Federally insured deposits, except as 
provided in Sec. 345.11(c). The term bank also includes an insured State 
branch as defined in Sec. 345.11(c).
    (f) Branch means a staffed banking facility authorized as a branch, 
whether shared or unshared, including, for example, a mini-branch in a 
grocery store or a branch operated in conjunction with any other local 
business or nonprofit organization. The term ``branch'' only includes a 
``domestic branch'' as that term is defined in section 3(o) of the FDIA 
(12 U.S.C. 1813(o)).
    (g) Community development means:
    (1) Affordable housing (including multifamily rental housing) for 
low- or moderate-income individuals;
    (2) Community services targeted to low- or moderate-income 
individuals;
    (3) Activities that promote economic development by financing 
businesses or farms that meet the size eligibility standards of the 
Small Business Administration's Development Company or Small Business 
Investment Company programs (13 CFR 121.301) or have gross annual 
revenues of $1 million or less; or
    (4) Activities that revitalize or stabilize--
    (i) Low-or moderate-income geographies;
    (ii) Designated disaster areas; or
    (iii) Distressed or underserved nonmetropolitan middle-income 
geographies designated by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System, FDIC, and Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, based on--
    (A) Rates of poverty, unemployment, and population loss; or
    (B) Population size, density, and dispersion. Activities revitalize 
and stabilize geographies designated based on population size, density, 
and dispersion if they help to meet essential community needs, including 
needs of low- and moderate-income individuals.
    (h) Community development loan means a loan that:
    (1) Has as its primary purpose community development; and
    (2) Except in the case of a wholesale or limited purpose bank:
    (i) Has not been reported or collected by the bank or an affiliate 
for consideration in the bank's assessment as a home mortgage, small 
business, small farm, or consumer loan, unless the loan is for a 
multifamily dwelling (as defined in Sec. 1003.2(n) of this title); and
    (ii) Benefits the bank's assessment area(s) or a broader statewide 
or regional area that includes the bank's assessment area(s).
    (i) Community development service means a service that:
    (1) Has as its primary purpose community development;
    (2) Is related to the provision of financial services; and

[[Page 746]]

    (3) Has not been considered in the evaluation of the bank's retail 
banking services under Sec. 345.24(d).
    (j) Consumer loan means a loan to one or more individuals for 
household, family, or other personal expenditures. A consumer loan does 
not include a home mortgage, small business, or small farm loan. 
Consumer loans include the following categories of loans:
    (1) Motor vehicle loan, which is a consumer loan extended for the 
purchase of and secured by a motor vehicle;
    (2) Credit card loan, which is a line of credit for household, 
family, or other personal expenditures that is accessed by a borrower's 
use of a ``credit card,'' as this term is defined in Sec. 1026.2 of this 
title;
    (3) Other secured consumer loan, which is a secured consumer loan 
that is not included in one of the other categories of consumer loans; 
and
    (4) Other unsecured consumer loan, which is an unsecured consumer 
loan that is not included in one of the other categories of consumer 
loans.
    (k) Geography means a census tract delineated by the United States 
Bureau of the Census in the most recent decennial census.
    (l) Home mortgage loan means a closed-end mortgage loan or an open-
end line of credit as these terms are defined under Sec. 1003.2 of this 
title and that is not an excluded transaction under Sec. 1003.3(c)(1) 
through (10) and (13) of this title.
    (m) Income level includes:
    (1) Low-income, which means an individual income that is less than 
50 percent of the area median income or a median family income that is 
less than 50 percent in the case of a geography.
    (2) Moderate-income, which means an individual income that is at 
least 50 percent and less than 80 percent of the area median income or a 
median family income that is at least 50 and less than 80 percent in the 
case of a geography.
    (3) Middle-income, which means an individual income that is at least 
80 percent and less than 120 percent of the area median income or a 
median family income that is at least 80 and less than 120 percent in 
the case of a geography.
    (4) Upper-income, which means an individual income that is 120 
percent or more of the area median income or a median family income that 
is 120 percent or more in the case of a geography.
    (n) Limited purpose bank means a bank that offers only a narrow 
product line (such as credit card or motor vehicle loans) to a regional 
or broader market and for which a designation as a limited purpose bank 
is in effect, in accordance with Sec. 345.25(b).
    (o) Loan location. A loan is located as follows:
    (1) A consumer loan is located in the geography where the borrower 
resides;
    (2) A home mortgage loan is located in the geography where the 
property to which the loan relates is located; and
    (3) A small business or small farm loan is located in the geography 
where the main business facility or farm is located or where the loan 
proceeds otherwise will be applied, as indicated by the borrower.
    (p) Loan production office means a staffed facility, other than a 
branch, that is open to the public and that provides lending-related 
services, such as loan information and applications.
    (q) Metropolitan division means a metropolitan division as defined 
by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget.
    (r) MSA means a metropolitan statistical area as defined by the 
Director of the Office of Management and Budget.
    (s) Nonmetropolitan area means any area that is not located in an 
MSA.
    (t) Qualified investment means a lawful investment, deposit, 
membership share, or grant that has as its primary purpose community 
development.
    (u) Small bank--(1) Definition. Small bank means a bank that, as of 
December 31 of either of the prior two calendar years, had assets of 
less than $1.252 billion. Intermediate small bank means a small bank 
with assets of at least $313 million as of December 31 of both of the 
prior two calendar years and less than $1.252 billion as of December 31 
of either of the prior two calendar years.
    (2) Adjustment. The dollar figures in paragraph (u)(1) of this 
section shall be adjusted annually and published by the FDIC, based on 
the year-to-year change

[[Page 747]]

in the average of the Consumer Price Index for Urban Wage Earners and 
Clerical Workers, not seasonally adjusted, for each twelve-month period 
ending in November, with rounding to the nearest million.
    (v) Small business loan means a loan included in ``loans to small 
businesses'' as defined in the instructions for preparation of the 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income.
    (w) Small farm loan means a loan included in ``loans to small 
farms'' as defined in the instructions for preparation of the 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income.
    (x) Wholesale bank means a bank that is not in the business of 
extending home mortgage, small business, small farm, or consumer loans 
to retail customers, and for which a designation as a wholesale bank is 
in effect, in accordance with Sec. 345.25(b).

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 345.12, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.fdsys.gov.



              Subpart B_Standards for Assessing Performance

    Source: 60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 345.21  Performance tests, standards, and ratings, in general.

    (a) Performance tests and standards. The FDIC assesses the CRA 
performance of a bank in an examination as follows:
    (1) Lending, investment, and service tests. The FDIC applies the 
lending, investment, and service tests, as provided in Secs. 345.22 
through 345.24, in evaluating the performance of a bank, except as 
provided in paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), and (a)(4) of this section.
    (2) Community development test for wholesale or limited purpose 
banks. The FDIC applies the community development test for a wholesale 
or limited purpose bank, as provided in Sec. 345.25, except as provided 
in paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
    (3) Small bank performance standards. The FDIC applies the small 
bank performance standards as provided in Sec. 345.26 in evaluating the 
performance of a small bank or a bank that was a small bank during the 
prior calendar year, unless the bank elects to be assessed as provided 
in paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), or (a)(4) of this section. The bank may 
elect to be assessed as provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section 
only if it collects and reports the data required for other banks under 
Sec. 345.42.
    (4) Strategic plan. The FDIC evaluates the performance of a bank 
under a strategic plan if the bank submits, and the FDIC approves, a 
strategic plan as provided in Sec. 345.27.
    (b) Performance context. The FDIC applies the tests and standards in 
paragraph (a) of this section and also considers whether to approve a 
proposed strategic plan in the context of:
    (1) Demographic data on median income levels, distribution of 
household income, nature of housing stock, housing costs, and other 
relevant data pertaining to a bank's assessment area(s);
    (2) Any information about lending, investment, and service 
opportunities in the bank's assessment area(s) maintained by the bank or 
obtained from community organizations, state, local, and tribal 
governments, economic development agencies, or other sources;
    (3) The bank's product offerings and business strategy as determined 
from data provided by the bank;
    (4) Institutional capacity and constraints, including the size and 
financial condition of the bank, the economic climate (national, 
regional, and local), safety and soundness limitations, and any other 
factors that significantly affect the bank's ability to provide lending, 
investments, or services in its assessment area(s);
    (5) The bank's past performance and the performance of similarly 
situated lenders;
    (6) The bank's public file, as described in Sec. 345.43, and any 
written comments about the bank's CRA performance submitted to the bank 
or the FDIC; and
    (7) Any other information deemed relevant by the FDIC.
    (c) Assigned ratings. The FDIC assigns to a bank one of the 
following four ratings pursuant to Sec. 345.28 and Appendix

[[Page 748]]

A of this part: ``outstanding''; ``satisfactory''; ``needs to improve''; 
or ``substantial noncompliance'' as provided in 12 U.S.C. 2906(b)(2). 
The rating assigned by the FDIC reflects the bank's record of helping to 
meet the credit needs of its entire community, including low- and 
moderate-income neighborhoods, consistent with the safe and sound 
operation of the bank.
    (d) Safe and sound operations. This part and the CRA do not require 
a bank to make loans or investments or to provide services that are 
inconsistent with safe and sound operations. To the contrary, the FDIC 
anticipates banks can meet the standards of this part with safe and 
sound loans, investments, and services on which the banks expect to make 
a profit. Banks are permitted and encouraged to develop and apply 
flexible underwriting standards for loans that benefit low- or moderate-
income geographies or individuals, only if consistent with safe and 
sound operations.
    (e) Low-cost education loans provided to low-income borrowers. In 
assessing and taking into account the record of a bank under this part, 
the FDIC considers, as a factor, low-cost education loans originated by 
the bank to borrowers, particularly in its assessment area(s), who have 
an individual income that is less than 50 percent of the area median 
income. For purposes of this paragraph, ``low-cost education loans'' 
means any education loan, as defined in section 140(a)(7) of the Truth 
in Lending Act (15 U.S.C. 1650(a)(7)) (including a loan under a state or 
local education loan program), originated by the bank for a student at 
an ``institution of higher education,'' as that term is generally 
defined in sections 101 and 102 of the Higher Education Act of 1965 (20 
U.S.C. 1001 and 1002) and the implementing regulations published by the 
U.S. Department of Education, with interest rates and fees no greater 
than those of comparable education loans offered directly by the U.S. 
Department of Education. Such rates and fees are specified in section 
455 of the Higher Education Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 1087e).
    (f) Activities in cooperation with minority- or women-owned 
financial institutions and low-income credit unions. In assessing and 
taking into account the record of a nonminority-owned and nonwomen-owned 
bank under this part, the FDIC considers as a factor capital investment, 
loan participation, and other ventures undertaken by the bank in 
cooperation with minority- and women-owned financial institutions and 
low-income credit unions. Such activities must help meet the credit 
needs of local communities in which the minority- and women-owned 
financial institutions and low-income credit unions are chartered. To be 
considered, such activities need not also benefit the bank's assessment 
area(s) or the broader statewide or regional area that includes the 
bank's assessment area(s).

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 75 FR 61045, Oct. 4, 2010]



Sec. 345.22  Lending test.

    (a) Scope of test. (1) The lending test evaluates a bank's record of 
helping to meet the credit needs of its assessment area(s) through its 
lending activities by considering a bank's home mortgage, small 
business, small farm, and community development lending. If consumer 
lending constitutes a substantial majority of a bank's business, the 
FDIC will evaluate the bank's consumer lending in one or more of the 
following categories: motor vehicle, credit card, other secured, and 
other unsecured loans. In addition, at a bank's option, the FDIC will 
evaluate one or more categories of consumer lending, if the bank has 
collected and maintained, as required in Sec. 345.42(c)(1), the data for 
each category that the bank elects to have the FDIC evaluate.
    (2) The FDIC considers originations and purchases of loans. The FDIC 
will also consider any other loan data the bank may choose to provide, 
including data on loans outstanding, commitments and letters of credit.
    (3) A bank may ask the FDIC to consider loans originated or 
purchased by consortia in which the bank participates or by third 
parties in which the bank has invested only if the loans meet the 
definition of community development loans and only in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section. The FDIC will not consider these loans 
under any criterion of the lending test

[[Page 749]]

except the community development lending criterion.
    (b) Performance criteria. The FDIC evaluates a bank's lending 
performance pursuant to the following criteria:
    (1) Lending activity. The number and amount of the bank's home 
mortgage, small business, small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, 
in the bank's assessment area(s);
    (2) Geographic distribution. The geographic distribution of the 
bank's home mortgage, small business, small farm, and consumer loans, if 
applicable, based on the loan location, including:
    (i) The proportion of the bank's lending in the bank's assessment 
area(s);
    (ii) The dispersion of lending in the bank's assessment area(s); and
    (iii) The number and amount of loans in low-, moderate-, middle-, 
and upper-income geographies in the bank's assessment area(s);
    (3) Borrower characteristics. The distribution, particularly in the 
bank's assessment area(s), of the bank's home mortgage, small business, 
small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, based on borrower 
characteristics, including the number and amount of:
    (i) Home mortgage loans to low-, moderate-, middle-, and upper-
income individuals;
    (ii) Small business and small farm loans to businesses and farms 
with gross annual revenues of $1 million or less;
    (iii) Small business and small farm loans by loan amount at 
origination; and
    (iv) Consumer loans, if applicable, to low-, moderate-, middle-, and 
upper-income individuals;
    (4) Community development lending. The bank's community development 
lending, including the number and amount of community development loans, 
and their complexity and innovativeness; and
    (5) Innovative or flexible lending practices. The bank's use of 
innovative or flexible lending practices in a safe and sound manner to 
address the credit needs of low- or moderate-income individuals or 
geographies.
    (c) Affiliate lending. (1) At a bank's option, the FDIC will 
consider loans by an affiliate of the bank, if the bank provides data on 
the affiliate's loans pursuant to Sec. 345.42.
    (2) The FDIC considers affiliate lending subject to the following 
constraints:
    (i) No affiliate may claim a loan origination or loan purchase if 
another institution claims the same loan origination or purchase; and
    (ii) If a bank elects to have the FDIC consider loans within a 
particular lending category made by one or more of the bank's affiliates 
in a particular assessment area, the bank shall elect to have the FDIC 
consider, in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, all the 
loans within that lending category in that particular assessment area 
made by all of the bank's affiliates.
    (3) The FDIC does not consider affiliate lending in assessing a 
bank's performance under paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section.
    (d) Lending by a consortium or a third party. Community development 
loans originated or purchased by a consortium in which the bank 
participates or by a third party in which the bank has invested:
    (1) Will be considered, at the bank's option, if the bank reports 
the data pertaining to these loans under Sec. 345.42(b)(2); and
    (2) May be allocated among participants or investors, as they 
choose, for purposes of the lending test, except that no participant or 
investor:
    (i) May claim a loan origination or loan purchase if another 
participant or investor claims the same loan origination or purchase; or
    (ii) May claim loans accounting for more than its percentage share 
(based on the level of its participation or investment) of the total 
loans originated by the consortium or third party.
    (e) Lending performance rating. The FDIC rates a bank's lending 
performance as provided in Appendix A of this part.

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 82 FR 55743, Nov. 24, 2017]



Sec. 345.23  Investment test.

    (a) Scope of test. The investment test evaluates a bank's record of 
helping to meet the credit needs of its assessment area(s) through 
qualified investments that benefit its assessment area(s) or a

[[Page 750]]

broader statewide or regional area that includes the bank's assessment 
area(s).
    (b) Exclusion. Activities considered under the lending or service 
tests may not be considered under the investment test.
    (c) Affiliate investment. At a bank's option, the FDIC will 
consider, in its assessment of a bank's investment performance, a 
qualified investment made by an affiliate of the bank, if the qualified 
investment is not claimed by any other institution.
    (d) Disposition of branch premises. Donating, selling on favorable 
terms, or making available on a rent-free basis a branch of the bank 
that is located in a predominantly minority neighborhood to a minority 
depository institution or women's depository institution (as these terms 
are defined in 12 U.S.C. 2907(b)) will be considered as a qualified 
investment.
    (e) Performance criteria. The FDIC evaluates the investment 
performance of a bank pursuant to the following criteria:
    (1) The dollar amount of qualified investments;
    (2) The innovativeness or complexity of qualified investments;
    (3) The responsiveness of qualified investments to credit and 
community development needs; and
    (4) The degree to which the qualified investments are not routinely 
provided by private investors.
    (f) Investment performance rating. The FDIC rates a bank's 
investment performance as provided in Appendix A of this part.



Sec. 345.24  Service test.

    (a) Scope of test. The service test evaluates a bank's record of 
helping to meet the credit needs of its assessment area(s) by analyzing 
both the availability and effectiveness of a bank's systems for 
delivering retail banking services and the extent and innovativeness of 
its community development services.
    (b) Area(s) benefited. Community development services must benefit a 
bank's assessment area(s) or a broader statewide or regional area that 
includes the bank's assessment area(s).
    (c) Affiliate service. At a bank's option, the FDIC will consider, 
in its assessment of a bank's service performance, a community 
development service provided by an affiliate of the bank, if the 
community development service is not claimed by any other institution.
    (d) Performance criteria--retail banking services. The FDIC 
evaluates the availability and effectiveness of a bank's systems for 
delivering retail banking services, pursuant to the following criteria:
    (1) The current distribution of the bank's branches among low-,

moderate-, middle-, and upper-income geographies;
    (2) In the context of its current distribution of the bank's 
branches, the bank's record of opening and closing branches, 
particularly branches located in low- or moderate-income geographies or 
primarily serving low- or moderate-income individuals;
    (3) The availability and effectiveness of alternative systems for 
delivering retail banking services (e.g., RSFs, RSFs not owned or 
operated by or exclusively for the bank, banking by telephone or 
computer, loan production offices, and bank-at-work or bank-by-mail 
programs) in low- and moderate-income geographies and to low- and 
moderate-income individuals; and
    (4) The range of services provided in low-, moderate-, middle-, and 
upper-income geographies and the degree to which the services are 
tailored to meet the needs of those geographies.
    (e) Performance criteria--community development services. The FDIC 
evaluates community development services pursuant to the following 
criteria:
    (1) The extent to which the bank provides community development 
services; and
    (2) The innovativeness and responsiveness of community development 
services.
    (f) Service performance rating. The FDIC rates a bank's service 
performance as provided in Appendix A of this part.



Sec. 345.25  Community development test for wholesale or limited
purpose banks.

    (a) Scope of test. The FDIC assesses a wholesale or limited purpose 
bank's record of helping to meet the credit

[[Page 751]]

needs of its assessment area(s) under the community development test 
through its community development lending, qualified investments, or 
community development services.
    (b) Designation as a wholesale or limited purpose bank. In order to 
receive a designation as a wholesale or limited purpose bank, a bank 
shall file a request, in writing, with the FDIC, at least three months 
prior to the proposed effective date of the designation. If the FDIC 
approves the designation, it remains in effect until the bank requests 
revocation of the designation or until one year after the FDIC notifies 
the bank that the FDIC has revoked the designation on its own 
initiative.
    (c) Performance criteria. The FDIC evaluates the community 
development performance of a wholesale or limited purpose bank pursuant 
to the following criteria:
    (1) The number and amount of community development loans (including 
originations and purchases of loans and other community development loan 
data provided by the bank, such as data on loans outstanding, 
commitments, and letters of credit), qualified investments, or community 
development services;
    (2) The use of innovative or complex qualified investments, 
community development loans, or community development services and the 
extent to which the investments are not routinely provided by private 
investors; and
    (3) The bank's responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs.
    (d) Indirect activities. At a bank's option, the FDIC will consider 
in its community development performance assessment:
    (1) Qualified investments or community development services provided 
by an affiliate of the bank, if the investments or services are not 
claimed by any other institution; and
    (2) Community development lending by affiliates, consortia and third 
parties, subject to the requirements and limitations in Sec. 345.22 (c) 
and (d).
    (e) Benefit to assessment area(s)--(1) Benefit inside assessment 
area(s). The FDIC considers all qualified investments, community 
development loans, and community development services that benefit areas 
within the bank's assessment area(s) or a broader statewide or regional 
area that includes the bank's assessment area(s).
    (2) Benefit outside assessment area(s). The FDIC considers the 
qualified investments, community development loans, and community 
development services that benefit areas outside the bank's assessment 
area(s), if the bank has adequately addressed the needs of its 
assessment area(s).
    (f) Community development performance rating. The FDIC rates a 
bank's community development performance as provided in Appendix A of 
this part.



Sec. 345.26  Small bank performance standards.

    (a) Performance criteria--(1) Small banks that are not intermediate 
small banks. The FDIC evaluates the record of a small bank that is not, 
or that was not during the prior calendar year, an intermediate small 
bank, of helping to meet the credit needs of its assessment area(s) 
pursuant to the criteria set forth in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) Intermediate small banks. The FDIC evaluates the record of a 
small bank that is, or that was during the prior calendar year, an 
intermediate small bank, of helping to meet the credit needs of its 
assessment area(s) pursuant to the criteria set forth in paragraphs (b) 
and (c) of this section.
    (b) Lending test. A small bank's lending performance is evaluated 
pursuant to the following criteria:
    (1) The bank's loan-to-deposit ratio, adjusted for seasonal 
variation, and, as appropriate, other lending-related activities, such 
as loan originations for sale to the secondary markets, community 
development loans, or qualified investments;
    (2) The percentage of loans and, as appropriate, other lending-
related activities located in the bank's assessment area(s);
    (3) The bank's record of lending to and, as appropriate, engaging in 
other lending-related activities for borrowers of different income 
levels and businesses and farms of different sizes;
    (4) The geographic distribution of the bank's loans; and

[[Page 752]]

    (5) The bank's record of taking action, if warranted, in response to 
written complaints about its performance in helping to meet credit needs 
in its assessment area(s).
    (c) Community development test. An intermediate small bank's 
community development performance also is evaluated pursuant to the 
following criteria:
    (1) The number and amount of community development loans;
    (2) The number and amount of qualified investments;
    (3) The extent to which the bank provides community development 
services; and
    (4) The bank's responsiveness through such activities to community 
development lending, investment, and services needs.
    (d) Small bank performance rating. The FDIC rates the performance of 
a bank evaluated under this section as provided in appendix A of this 
part.

[70 FR 44269, Aug. 2, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 78337, Dec. 29, 2006; 72 
FR 72573, Dec. 21, 2007]



Sec. 345.27  Strategic plan.

    (a) Alternative election. The FDIC will assess a bank's record of 
helping to meet the credit needs of its assessment area(s) under a 
strategic plan if:
    (1) The bank has submitted the plan to the FDIC as provided for in 
this section;
    (2) The FDIC has approved the plan;
    (3) The plan is in effect; and
    (4) The bank has been operating under an approved plan for at least 
one year.
    (b) Data reporting. The FDIC's approval of a plan does not affect 
the bank's obligation, if any, to report data as required by 
Sec. 345.42.
    (c) Plans in general--(1) Term. A plan may have a term of no more 
than five years, and any multi-year plan must include annual interim 
measurable goals under which the FDIC will evaluate the bank's 
performance.
    (2) Multiple assessment areas. A bank with more than one assessment 
area may prepare a single plan for all of its assessment areas or one or 
more plans for one or more of its assessment areas.
    (3) Treatment of affiliates. Affiliated institutions may prepare a 
joint plan if the plan provides measurable goals for each institution. 
Activities may be allocated among institutions at the institutions' 
option, provided that the same activities are not considered for more 
than one institution.
    (d) Public participation in plan development. Before submitting a 
plan to the FDIC for approval, a bank shall:
    (1) Informally seek suggestions from members of the public in its 
assessment area(s) covered by the plan while developing the plan;
    (2) Once the bank has developed a plan, formally solicit public 
comment on the plan for at least 30 days by publishing notice in at 
least one newspaper of general circulation in each assessment area 
covered by the plan; and
    (3) During the period of formal public comment, make copies of the 
plan available for review by the public at no cost at all offices of the 
bank in any assessment area covered by the plan and provide copies of 
the plan upon request for a reasonable fee to cover copying and mailing, 
if applicable.
    (e) Submission of plan. The bank shall submit its plan to the FDIC 
at least three months prior to the proposed effective date of the plan. 
The bank shall also submit with its plan a description of its informal 
efforts to seek suggestions from members of the public, any written 
public comment received, and, if the plan was revised in light of the 
comment received, the initial plan as released for public comment.
    (f) Plan content--(1) Measurable goals. (i) A bank shall specify in 
its plan measurable goals for helping to meet the credit needs of each 
assessment area covered by the plan, particularly the needs of low- and 
moderate-income geographies and low- and moderate-income individuals, 
through lending, investment, and services, as appropriate.
    (ii) A bank shall address in its plan all three performance 
categories and, unless the bank has been designated as a wholesale or 
limited purpose bank, shall emphasize lending and lending-related 
activities. Nevertheless, a different emphasis, including a focus on one 
or more performance categories, may be appropriate if responsive to the 
characteristics and credit needs of its assessment area(s), considering 
public comment and the bank's capacity and

[[Page 753]]

constraints, product offerings, and business strategy.
    (2) Confidential information. A bank may submit additional 
information to the FDIC on a confidential basis, but the goals stated in 
the plan must be sufficiently specific to enable the public and the FDIC 
to judge the merits of the plan.
    (3) Satisfactory and outstanding goals. A bank shall specify in its 
plan measurable goals that constitute ``satisfactory'' performance. A 
plan may specify measurable goals that constitute ``outstanding'' 
performance. If a bank submits, and the FDIC approves, both 
``satisfactory'' and ``outstanding'' performance goals, the FDIC will 
consider the bank eligible for an ``outstanding'' performance rating.
    (4) Election if satisfactory goals not substantially met. A bank may 
elect in its plan that, if the bank fails to meet substantially its plan 
goals for a satisfactory rating, the FDIC will evaluate the bank's 
performance under the lending, investment, and service tests, the 
community development test, or the small bank performance standards, as 
appropriate.
    (g) Plan approval--(1) Timing. The FDIC will act upon a plan within 
60 calendar days after the FDIC receives the complete plan and other 
material required under paragraph (e) of this section. If the FDIC fails 
to act within this time period, the plan shall be deemed approved unless 
the FDIC extends the review period for good cause.
    (2) Public participation. In evaluating the plan's goals, the FDIC 
considers the public's involvement in formulating the plan, written 
public comment on the plan, and any response by the bank to public 
comment on the plan.
    (3) Criteria for evaluating plan. The FDIC evaluates a plan's 
measurable goals using the following criteria, as appropriate:
    (i) The extent and breadth of lending or lending-related activities, 
including, as appropriate, the distribution of loans among different 
geographies, businesses and farms of different sizes, and individuals of 
different income levels, the extent of community development lending, 
and the use of innovative or flexible lending practices to address 
credit needs;
    (ii) The amount and innovativeness, complexity, and responsiveness 
of the bank's qualified investments; and
    (iii) The availability and effectiveness of the bank's systems for 
delivering retail banking services and the extent and innovativeness of 
the bank's community development services.
    (h) Plan amendment. During the term of a plan, a bank may request 
the FDIC to approve an amendment to the plan on grounds that there has 
been a material change in circumstances. The bank shall develop an 
amendment to a previously approved plan in accordance with the public 
participation requirements of paragraph (d) of this section.
    (i) Plan assessment. The FDIC approves the goals and assesses 
performance under a plan as provided for in Appendix A of this part.

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 60 FR 66050, Dec. 20, 1995; 69 
FR 41188, July 8, 2004]



Sec. 345.28  Assigned ratings.

    (a) Ratings in general. Subject to paragraphs (b) and (c) of this 
section, the FDIC assigns to a bank a rating of ``outstanding,'' 
``satisfactory,'' ``needs to improve,'' or ``substantial noncompliance'' 
based on the bank's performance under the lending, investment and 
service tests, the community development test, the small bank 
performance standards, or an approved strategic plan, as applicable.
    (b) Lending, investment, and service tests. The FDIC assigns a 
rating for a bank assessed under the lending, investment, and service 
tests in accordance with the following principles:
    (1) A bank that receives an ``outstanding'' rating on the lending 
test receives an assigned rating of at least ``satisfactory'';
    (2) A bank that receives an ``outstanding'' rating on both the 
service test and the investment test and a rating of at least ``high 
satisfactory'' on the lending test receives an assigned rating of 
``outstanding''; and
    (3) No bank may receive an assigned rating of ``satisfactory'' or 
higher unless it receives a rating of at least ``low satisfactory'' on 
the lending test.

[[Page 754]]

    (c) Effect of evidence of discriminatory or other illegal credit 
practices. (1) The FDIC's evaluation of a bank's CRA performance is 
adversely affected by evidence of discriminatory or other illegal credit 
practices in any geography by the bank or in any assessment area by any 
affiliate whose loans have been considered as part of the bank's lending 
performance. In connection with any type of lending activity described 
in Sec. 345.22(a), evidence of discriminatory or other credit practices 
that violate an applicable law, rule, or regulation includes, but is not 
limited to:
    (i) Discrimination against applicants on a prohibited basis in 
violation, for example, of the Equal Credit Opportunity Act or the Fair 
Housing Act;
    (ii) Violations of the Home Ownership and Equity Protection Act;
    (iii) Violations of section 5 of the Federal Trade Commission Act;
    (iv) Violations of section 8 of the Real Estate Settlement 
Procedures Act; and
    (v) Violations of the Truth in Lending Act provisions regarding a 
consumer's right of rescission.
    (2) In determining the effect of evidence of practices described in 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section on the bank's assigned rating, the FDIC 
considers the nature, extent, and strength of the evidence of the 
practices; the policies and procedures that the bank (or affiliate, as 
applicable) has in place to prevent the practices; any corrective action 
that the bank (or affiliate, as applicable) has taken or has committed 
to take, including voluntary corrective action resulting from self-
assessment; and any other relevant information.

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 70 FR 44269, Aug. 2, 2005]



Sec. 345.29  Effect of CRA performance on applications.

    (a) CRA performance. Among other factors, the FDIC takes into 
account the record of performance under the CRA of each applicant bank 
in considering an application for approval of:
    (1) The establishment of a domestic branch or other facility with 
the ability to accept deposits;
    (2) The relocation of the bank's main office or a branch;
    (3) The merger, consolidation, acquisition of assets, or assumption 
of liabilities; and
    (4) Deposit insurance for a newly chartered financial institution.
    (b) New financial institutions. A newly chartered financial 
institution shall submit with its application for deposit insurance a 
description of how it will meet its CRA objectives. The FDIC takes the 
description into account in considering the application and may deny or 
condition approval on that basis.
    (c) Interested parties. The FDIC takes into account any views 
expressed by interested parties that are submitted in accordance with 
the FDIC's procedures set forth in part 303 of this chapter in 
considering CRA performance in an application listed in paragraphs (a) 
and (b) of this section.
    (d) Denial or conditional approval of application. A bank's record 
of performance may be the basis for denying or conditioning approval of 
an application listed in paragraph (a) of this section.



        Subpart C_Records, Reporting, and Disclosure Requirements

    Source: 60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 345.41  Assessment area delineation.

    (a) In general. A bank shall delineate one or more assessment areas 
within which the FDIC evaluates the bank's record of helping to meet the 
credit needs of its community. The FDIC does not evaluate the bank's 
delineation of its assessment area(s) as a separate performance 
criterion, but the FDIC reviews the delineation for compliance with the 
requirements of this section.
    (b) Geographic area(s) for wholesale or limited purpose banks. The 
assessment area(s) for a wholesale or limited purpose bank must consist 
generally of one or more MSAs or metropolitan divisions (using the MSA 
or metropolitan division boundaries that were in effect as of January 1 
of the calendar year in which the delineation is made) or one or more 
contiguous political subdivisions, such as counties, cities, or towns, 
in which the bank has its main office, branches, and deposit-taking 
ATMs.

[[Page 755]]

    (c) Geographic area(s) for other banks. The assessment area(s) for a 
bank other than a wholesale or limited purpose bank must:
    (1) Consist generally of one or more MSAs or metropolitan divisions 
(using the MSA or metropolitan division boundaries that were in effect 
as of January 1 of the calendar year in which the delineation is made) 
or one or more contiguous political subdivisions, such as counties, 
cities, or towns; and
    (2) Include the geographies in which the bank has its main office, 
its branches, and its deposit-taking RSFs, as well as the surrounding 
geographies in which the bank has originated or purchased a substantial 
portion of its loans (including home mortgage loans, small business and 
small farm loans, and any other loans the bank chooses, such as those 
consumer loans on which the bank elects to have its performance 
assessed).
    (d) Adjustments to geographic area(s). A bank may adjust the 
boundaries of its assessment area(s) to include only the portion of a 
political subdivision that it reasonably can be expected to serve. An 
adjustment is particularly appropriate in the case of an assessment area 
that otherwise would be extremely large, of unusual configuration, or 
divided by significant geographic barriers.
    (e) Limitations on the delineation of an assessment area. Each 
bank's assessment area(s):
    (1) Must consist only of whole geographies;
    (2) May not reflect illegal discrimination;
    (3) May not arbitrarily exclude low- or moderate-income geographies, 
taking into account the bank's size and financial condition; and
    (4) May not extend substantially beyond an MSA boundary or beyond a 
state boundary unless the assessment area is located in a multistate 
MSA. If a bank serves a geographic area that extends substantially 
beyond a state boundary, the bank shall delineate separate assessment 
areas for the areas in each state. If a bank serves a geographic area 
that extends substantially beyond an MSA boundary, the bank shall 
delineate separate assessment areas for the areas inside and outside the 
MSA.
    (f) Banks serving military personnel. Notwithstanding the 
requirements of this section, a bank whose business predominantly 
consists of serving the needs of military personnel or their dependents 
who are not located within a defined geographic area may delineate its 
entire deposit customer base as its assessment area.
    (g) Use of assessment area(s). The FDIC uses the assessment area(s) 
delineated by a bank in its evaluation of the bank's CRA performance 
unless the FDIC determines that the assessment area(s) do not comply 
with the requirements of this section.

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 41188, July 8, 2004]



Sec. 345.42  Data collection, reporting, and disclosure.

    (a) Loan information required to be collected and maintained. A 
bank, except a small bank, shall collect, and maintain in machine 
readable form (as prescribed by the FDIC) until the completion of its 
next CRA examination, the following data for each small business or 
small farm loan originated or purchased by the bank:
    (1) A unique number or alpha-numeric symbol that can be used to 
identify the relevant loan file;
    (2) The loan amount at origination;
    (3) The loan location; and
    (4) An indicator whether the loan was to a business or farm with 
gross annual revenues of $1 million or less.
    (b) Loan information required to be reported. A bank, except a small 
bank or a bank that was a small bank during the prior calendar year, 
shall report annually by March 1 to the FDIC in machine readable form 
(as prescribed by the FDIC) the following data for the prior calendar 
year:
    (1) Small business and small farm loan data. For each geography in 
which the bank originated or purchased a small business or small farm 
loan, the aggregate number and amount of loans:
    (i) With an amount at origination of $100,000 or less;
    (ii) With an amount at origination of more than $100,000 but less 
than or equal to $250,000;

[[Page 756]]

    (iii) With an amount at origination of more than $250,000; and
    (iv) To businesses and farms with gross annual revenues of $1 
million or less (using the revenues that the bank considered in making 
its credit decision);
    (2) Community development loan data. The aggregate number and 
aggregate amount of community development loans originated or purchased; 
and
    (3) Home mortgage loans. If the bank is subject to reporting under 
part 1003 of this title, the location of each home mortgage loan 
application, origination, or purchase outside the MSAs in which the bank 
has a home or branch office (or outside any MSA) in accordance with the 
requirements of part 1003 of this title.
    (c) Optional data collection and maintenance--(1) Consumer loans. A 
bank may collect and maintain in machine readable form (as prescribed by 
the FDIC) data for consumer loans originated or purchased by the bank 
for consideration under the lending test. A bank may maintain data for 
one or more of the following categories of consumer loans: motor 
vehicle, credit card, other secured, and other unsecured. If the bank 
maintains data for loans in a certain category, it shall maintain data 
for all loans originated or purchased within that category. The bank 
shall maintain data separately for each category, including for each 
loan:
    (i) A unique number or alpha-numeric symbol that can be used to 
identify the relevant loan file;
    (ii) The loan amount at origination or purchase;
    (iii) The loan location; and
    (iv) The gross annual income of the borrower that the bank 
considered in making its credit decision.
    (2) Other loan data. At its option, a bank may provide other 
information concerning its lending performance, including additional 
loan distribution data.
    (d) Data on affiliate lending. A bank that elects to have the FDIC 
consider loans by an affiliate, for purposes of the lending or community 
development test or an approved strategic plan, shall collect, maintain, 
and report for those loans the data that the bank would have collected, 
maintained, and reported pursuant to paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of 
this section had the loans been originated or purchased by the bank. For 
home mortgage loans, the bank shall also be prepared to identify the 
home mortgage loans reported under part 1003 of this title by the 
affiliate.
    (e) Data on lending by a consortium or a third party. A bank that 
elects to have the FDIC consider community development loans by a 
consortium or third party, for purposes of the lending or community 
development tests or an approved strategic plan, shall report for those 
loans the data that the bank would have reported under paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section had the loans been originated or purchased by the bank.
    (f) Small banks electing evaluation under the lending, investment, 
and service tests. A bank that qualifies for evaluation under the small 
bank performance standards but elects evaluation under the lending, 
investment, and service tests shall collect, maintain, and report the 
data required for other banks pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section.
    (g) Assessment area data. A bank, except a small bank or a bank that 
was a small bank during the prior calendar year, shall collect and 
report to the FDIC by March 1 of each year a list for each assessment 
area showing the geographies within the area.
    (h) CRA Disclosure Statement. The FDIC prepares annually for each 
bank that reports data pursuant to this section a CRA Disclosure 
Statement that contains, on a state-by-state basis:
    (1) For each county (and for each assessment area smaller than a 
county) with a population of 500,000 persons or fewer in which the bank 
reported a small business or small farm loan:
    (i) The number and amount of small business and small farm loans 
reported as originated or purchased located in low-, moderate-, middle-, 
and upper-income geographies;
    (ii) A list grouping each geography according to whether the 
geography is low-, moderate-, middle-, or upper-income;
    (iii) A list showing each geography in which the bank reported a 
small business or small farm loan; and

[[Page 757]]

    (iv) The number and amount of small business and small farm loans to 
businesses and farms with gross annual revenues of $1 million or less;
    (2) For each county (and for each assessment area smaller than a 
county) with a population in excess of 500,000 persons in which the bank 
reported a small business or small farm loan:
    (i) The number and amount of small business and small farm loans 
reported as originated or purchased located in geographies with median 
income relative to the area median income of less than 10 percent, 10 or 
more but less than 20 percent, 20 or more but less than 30 percent, 30 
or more but less than 40 percent, 40 or more but less than 50 percent, 
50 or more but less than 60 percent, 60 or more but less than 70 
percent, 70 or more but less than 80 percent, 80 or more but less than 
90 percent, 90 or more but less than 100 percent, 100 or more but less 
than 110 percent, 110 or more but less than 120 percent, and 120 percent 
or more;
    (ii) A list grouping each geography in the county or assessment area 
according to whether the median income in the geography relative to the 
area median income is less than 10 percent, 10 or more but less than 20 
percent, 20 or more but less than 30 percent, 30 or more but less than 
40 percent, 40 or more but less than 50 percent, 50 or more but less 
than 60 percent, 60 or more but less than 70 percent, 70 or more but 
less than 80 percent, 80 or more but less than 90 percent, 90 or more 
but less than 100 percent, 100 or more but less than 110 percent, 110 or 
more but less than 120 percent, and 120 percent or more;
    (iii) A list showing each geography in which the bank reported a 
small business or small farm loan; and
    (iv) The number and amount of small business and small farm loans to 
businesses and farms with gross annual revenues of $1 million or less;
    (3) The number and amount of small business and small farm loans 
located inside each assessment area reported by the bank and the number 
and amount of small business and small farm loans located outside the 
assessment area(s) reported by the bank; and
    (4) The number and amount of community development loans reported as 
originated or purchased.
    (i) Aggregate disclosure statements. The FDIC, in conjunction with 
the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and the Office of 
the Comptroller of the Currency, prepares annually, for each MSA or 
metropolitan division (including an MSA or metropolitan division that 
crosses a state boundary) and the nonmetropolitan portion of each state, 
an aggregate disclosure statement of small business and small farm 
lending by all institutions subject to reporting under this part or 
parts 25, 195, or 228 of this title. These disclosure statements 
indicate, for each geography, the number and amount of all small 
business and small farm loans originated or purchased by reporting 
institutions, except that the FDIC may adjust the form of the disclosure 
if necessary, because of special circumstances, to protect the privacy 
of a borrower or the competitive position of an institution.
    (j) Central data depositories. The FDIC makes the aggregate 
disclosure statements, described in paragraph (i) of this section, and 
the individual bank CRA Disclosure Statements, described in paragraph 
(h) of this section, available to the public at central data 
depositories. The FDIC publishes a list of the depositories at which the 
statements are available.

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 69 FR 41188, July 8, 2004; 80 
FR 81165, Dec. 29, 2015; 82 FR 55743, Nov. 24, 2017]



Sec. 345.43  Content and availability of public file.

    (a) Information available to the public. A bank shall maintain a 
public file that includes the following information:
    (1) All written comments received from the public for the current 
year and each of the prior two calendar years that specifically relate 
to the bank's performance in helping to meet community credit needs, and 
any response to the comments by the bank, if neither the comments nor 
the responses contain statements that reflect adversely on the good name 
or reputation of any persons other than the

[[Page 758]]

bank or publication of which would violate specific provisions of law;
    (2) A copy of the public section of the bank's most recent CRA 
Performance Evaluation prepared by the FDIC. The bank shall place this 
copy in the public file within 30 business days after its receipt from 
the FDIC;
    (3) A list of the bank's branches, their street addresses, and 
geographies;
    (4) A list of branches opened or closed by the bank during the 
current year and each of the prior two calendar years, their street 
addresses, and geographies;
    (5) A list of services (including hours of operation, available loan 
and deposit products, and transaction fees) generally offered at the 
bank's branches and descriptions of material differences in the 
availability or cost of services at particular branches, if any. At its 
option, a bank may include information regarding the availability of 
alternative systems for delivering retail banking services (e.g., RSFs, 
RSFs not owned or operated by or exclusively for the bank, banking by 
telephone or computer, loan production offices, and bank-at-work or 
bank-by-mail programs);
    (6) A map of each assessment area showing the boundaries of the area 
and identifying the geographies contained within the area, either on the 
map or in a separate list; and
    (7) Any other information the bank chooses.
    (b) Additional information available to the public--(1) Banks other 
than small banks. A bank, except a small bank or a bank that was a small 
bank during the prior calendar year, shall include in its public file 
the following information pertaining to the bank and its affiliates, if 
applicable, for each of the prior two calendar years:
    (i) If the bank has elected to have one or more categories of its 
consumer loans considered under the lending test, for each of these 
categories, the number and amount of loans:
    (A) To low-, moderate-, middle-, and upper-income individuals;
    (B) Located in low-, moderate-, middle-, and upper-income census 
tracts; and
    (C) Located inside the bank's assessment area(s) and outside the 
bank's assessment area(s); and
    (ii) The bank's CRA Disclosure Statement. The bank shall place the 
statement in the public file within three business days of its receipt 
from the FDIC.
    (2) Banks required to report Home Mortgage Disclosure Act (HMDA) 
data. A bank required to report home mortgage loan data pursuant part 
1003 of this title shall include in its public file a written notice 
that the institution's HMDA Disclosure Statement may be obtained on the 
Consumer Financial Protection Bureau's (Bureau's) Web site at 
www.consumerfinance.gov/hmda. In addition, a bank that elected to have 
the FDIC consider the mortgage lending of an affiliate shall include in 
its public file the name of the affiliate and a written notice that the 
affiliate's HMDA Disclosure Statement may be obtained at the Bureau's 
Web site. The bank shall place the written notice(s) in the public file 
within three business days after receiving notification from the Federal 
Financial Institutions Examination Council of the availability of the 
disclosure statement(s).
    (3) Small banks. A small bank or a bank that was a small bank during 
the prior calendar year shall include in its public file:
    (i) The bank's loan-to-deposit ratio for each quarter of the prior 
calendar year and, at its option, additional data on its loan-to-deposit 
ratio; and
    (ii) The information required for other banks by paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section, if the bank has elected to be evaluated under the lending, 
investment, and service tests.
    (4) Banks with strategic plans. A bank that has been approved to be 
assessed under a strategic plan shall include in its public file a copy 
of that plan. A bank need not include information submitted to the FDIC 
on a confidential basis in conjunction with the plan.
    (5) Banks with less than satisfactory ratings. A bank that received 
a less than satisfactory rating during its most recent examination shall 
include in its public file a description of its current efforts to 
improve its performance in helping to meet the credit needs of its 
entire community. The

[[Page 759]]

bank shall update the description quarterly.
    (c) Location of public information. A bank shall make available to 
the public for inspection upon request and at no cost the information 
required in this section as follows:
    (1) At the main office and, if an interstate bank, at one branch 
office in each state, all information in the public file; and
    (2) At each branch:
    (i) A copy of the public section of the bank's most recent CRA 
Performance Evaluation and a list of services provided by the branch; 
and
    (ii) Within five calendar days of the request, all the information 
in the public file relating to the assessment area in which the branch 
is located.
    (d) Copies. Upon request, a bank shall provide copies, either on 
paper or in another form acceptable to the person making the request, of 
the information in its public file. The bank may charge a reasonable fee 
not to exceed the cost of copying and mailing (if applicable).
    (e) Updating. Except as otherwise provided in this section, a bank 
shall ensure that the information required by this section is current as 
of April 1 of each year.

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 80 FR 81165, Dec. 29, 2015; 82 
FR 55743, Nov. 24, 2017]



Sec. 345.44  Public notice by banks.

    A bank shall provide in the public lobby of its main office and each 
of its branches the appropriate public notice set forth in Appendix B of 
this part. Only a branch of a bank having more than one assessment area 
shall include the bracketed material in the notice for branch offices. 
Only a bank that is an affiliate of a holding company shall include the 
next to the last sentence of the notices. A bank shall include the last 
sentence of the notices only if it is an affiliate of a holding company 
that is not prevented by statute from acquiring additional banks.



Sec. 345.45  Publication of planned examination schedule.

    The FDIC publishes at least 30 days in advance of the beginning of 
each calendar quarter a list of banks scheduled for CRA examinations in 
that quarter.

  



                  Sec. Appendix A to Part 345--Ratings

    (a) Ratings in general. (1) In assigning a rating, the FDIC 
evaluates a bank's performance under the applicable performance criteria 
in this part, in accordance with Secs. 345.21 and 345.28. This includes 
consideration of low-cost education loans provided to low-income 
borrowers and activities in cooperation with minority- or women-owned 
financial institutions and low-income credit unions, as well as 
adjustments on the basis of evidence of discriminatory or other illegal 
credit practices.
    (2) A bank's performance need not fit each aspect of a particular 
rating profile in order to receive that rating, and exceptionally strong 
performance with respect to some aspects may compensate for weak 
performance in others. The bank's overall performance, however, must be 
consistent with safe and sound banking practices and generally with the 
appropriate rating profile as follows.
    (b) Banks evaluated under the lending, investment, and service 
tests--(1) Lending performance rating. The FDIC assigns each bank's 
lending performance one of the five following ratings.
    (i) Outstanding. The FDIC rates a bank's lending performance 
``outstanding'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) Excellent responsiveness to credit needs in its assessment 
area(s), taking into account the number and amount of home mortgage, 
small business, small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, in its 
assessment area(s);
    (B) A substantial majority of its loans are made in its assessment 
area(s);
    (C) An excellent geographic distribution of loans in its assessment 
area(s);
    (D) An excellent distribution, particularly in its assessment 
area(s), of loans among individuals of different income levels and 
businesses (including farms) of different sizes, given the product lines 
offered by the bank;
    (E) An excellent record of serving the credit needs of highly 
economically disadvantaged areas in its assessment area(s), low-income 
individuals, or businesses (including farms) with gross annual revenues 
of $1 million or less, consistent with safe and sound operations;
    (F) Extensive use of innovative or flexible lending practices in a 
safe and sound manner to address the credit needs of low- or moderate-
income individuals or geographies; and
    (G) It is a leader in making community development loans.
    (ii) High satisfactory. The FDIC rates a bank's lending performance 
``high satisfactory'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) Good responsiveness to credit needs in its assessment area(s), 
taking into account the number and amount of home mortgage,

[[Page 760]]

small business, small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, in its 
assessment area(s);
    (B) A high percentage of its loans are made in its assessment 
area(s);
    (C) A good geographic distribution of loans in its assessment 
area(s);
    (D) A good distribution, particularly in its assessment area(s), of 
loans among individuals of different income levels and businesses 
(including farms) of different sizes, given the product lines offered by 
the bank;
    (E) A good record of serving the credit needs of highly economically 
disadvantaged areas in its assessment area(s), low-income individuals, 
or businesses (including farms) with gross annual revenues of $1 million 
or less, consistent with safe and sound operations;
    (F) Use of innovative or flexible lending practices in a safe and 
sound manner to address the credit needs of low- or moderate-income 
individuals or geographies; and
    (G) It has made a relatively high level of community development 
loans.
    (iii) Low satisfactory. The FDIC rates a bank's lending performance 
``low satisfactory'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) Adequate responsiveness to credit needs in its assessment 
area(s), taking into account the number and amount of home mortgage, 
small business, small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, in its 
assessment area(s);
    (B) An adequate percentage of its loans are made in its assessment 
area(s);
    (C) An adequate geographic distribution of loans in its assessment 
area(s);
    (D) An adequate distribution, particularly in its assessment 
area(s), of loans among individuals of different income levels and 
businesses (including farms) of different sizes, given the product lines 
offered by the bank;
    (E) An adequate record of serving the credit needs of highly 
economically disadvantaged areas in its assessment area(s), low-income 
individuals, or businesses (including farms) with gross annual revenues 
of $1 million or less, consistent with safe and sound operations;
    (F) Limited use of innovative or flexible lending practices in a 
safe and sound manner to address the credit needs of low- or moderate-
income individuals or geographies; and
    (G) It has made an adequate level of community development loans.
    (iv) Needs to improve. The FDIC rates a bank's lending performance 
``needs to improve'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) Poor responsiveness to credit needs in its assessment area(s), 
taking into account the number and amount of home mortgage, small 
business, small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, in its 
assessment area(s);
    (B) A small percentage of its loans are made in its assessment 
area(s);
    (C) A poor geographic distribution of loans, particularly to low- or 
moderate-income geographies, in its assessment area(s);
    (D) A poor distribution, particularly in its assessment area(s), of 
loans among individuals of different income levels and businesses 
(including farms) of different sizes, given the product lines offered by 
the bank;
    (E) A poor record of serving the credit needs of highly economically 
disadvantaged areas in its assessment area(s), low-income individuals, 
or businesses (including farms) with gross annual revenues of $1 million 
or less, consistent with safe and sound operations;
    (F) Little use of innovative or flexible lending practices in a safe 
and sound manner to address the credit needs of low- or moderate-income 
individuals or geographies; and
    (G) It has made a low level of community development loans.
    (v) Substantial noncompliance. The FDIC rates a bank's lending 
performance as being in ``substantial noncompliance'' if, in general, it 
demonstrates:
    (A) A very poor responsiveness to credit needs in its assessment 
area(s), taking into account the number and amount of home mortgage, 
small business, small farm, and consumer loans, if applicable, in its 
assessment area(s);
    (B) A very small percentage of its loans are made in its assessment 
area(s);
    (C) A very poor geographic distribution of loans, particularly to 
low- or moderate-income geographies, in its assessment area(s);
    (D) A very poor distribution, particularly in its assessment 
area(s), of loans among individuals of different income levels and 
businesses (including farms) of different sizes, given the product lines 
offered by the bank;
    (E) A very poor record of serving the credit needs of highly 
economically disadvantaged areas in its assessment area(s), low-income 
individuals, or businesses (including farms) with gross annual revenues 
of $1 million or less, consistent with safe and sound operations;
    (F) No use of innovative or flexible lending practices in a safe and 
sound manner to address the credit needs of low- or moderate-income 
individuals or geographies; and
    (G) It has made few, if any, community development loans.
    (2) Investment performance rating. The FDIC assigns each bank's 
investment performance one of the five following ratings.
    (i) Outstanding. The FDIC rates a bank's investment performance 
``outstanding'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) An excellent level of qualified investments, particularly those 
that are not routinely provided by private investors, often in a 
leadership position;
    (B) Extensive use of innovative or complex qualified investments; 
and

[[Page 761]]

    (C) Excellent responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs.
    (ii) High satisfactory. The FDIC rates a bank's investment 
performance ``high satisfactory'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) A significant level of qualified investments, particularly those 
that are not routinely provided by private investors, occasionally in a 
leadership position;
    (B) Significant use of innovative or complex qualified investments; 
and
    (C) Good responsiveness to credit and community development needs.
    (iii) Low satisfactory. The FDIC rates a bank's investment 
performance ``low satisfactory'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) An adequate level of qualified investments, particularly those 
that are not routinely provided by private investors, although rarely in 
a leadership position;
    (B) Occasional use of innovative or complex qualified investments; 
and
    (C) Adequate responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs.
    (iv) Needs to improve. The FDIC rates a bank's investment 
performance ``needs to improve'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (A) A poor level of qualified investments, particularly those that 
are not routinely provided by private investors;
    (B) Rare use of innovative or complex qualified investments; and
    (C) Poor responsiveness to credit and community development needs.
    (v) Substantial noncompliance. The FDIC rates a bank's investment 
performance as being in ``substantial noncompliance'' if, in general, it 
demonstrates:
    (A) Few, if any, qualified investments, particularly those that are 
not routinely provided by private investors;
    (B) No use of innovative or complex qualified investments; and
    (C) Very poor responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs.
    (3) Service performance rating. The FDIC assigns each bank's service 
performance one of the five following ratings.
    (i) Outstanding. The FDIC rates a bank's service performance 
``outstanding'' if, in general, the bank demonstrates:
    (A) Its service delivery systems are readily accessible to 
geographies and individuals of different income levels in its assessment 
area(s);
    (B) To the extent changes have been made, its record of opening and 
closing branches has improved the accessibility of its delivery systems, 
particularly in low- or moderate-income geographies or to low- or 
moderate-income individuals;
    (C) Its services (including, where appropriate, business hours) are 
tailored to the convenience and needs of its assessment area(s), 
particularly low- or moderate-income geographies or low- or moderate-
income individuals; and
    (D) It is a leader in providing community development services.
    (ii) High satisfactory. The FDIC rates a bank's service performance 
``high satisfactory'' if, in general, the bank demonstrates:
    (A) Its service delivery systems are accessible to geographies and 
individuals of different income levels in its assessment area(s);
    (B) To the extent changes have been made, its record of opening and 
closing branches has not adversely affected the accessibility of its 
delivery systems, particularly in low- and moderate-income geographies 
and to low- and moderate-income individuals;
    (C) Its services (including, where appropriate, business hours) do 
not vary in a way that inconveniences its assessment area(s), 
particularly low- and moderate-income geographies and low- and moderate-
income individuals; and
    (D) It provides a relatively high level of community development 
services.
    (iii) Low satisfactory. The FDIC rates a bank's service performance 
``low satisfactory'' if, in general, the bank demonstrates:
    (A) Its service delivery systems are reasonably accessible to 
geographies and individuals of different income levels in its assessment 
area(s);
    (B) To the extent changes have been made, its record of opening and 
closing branches has generally not adversely affected the accessibility 
of its delivery systems, particularly in low- and moderate-income 
geographies and to low- and moderate-income individuals;
    (C) Its services (including, where appropriate, business hours) do 
not vary in a way that inconveniences its assessment area(s), 
particularly low- and moderate-income geographies and low- and moderate-
income individuals; and
    (D) It provides an adequate level of community development services.
    (iv) Needs to improve. The FDIC rates a bank's service performance 
``needs to improve'' if, in general, the bank demonstrates:
    (A) Its service delivery systems are unreasonably inaccessible to 
portions of its assessment area(s), particularly to low- or moderate-
income geographies or to low- or moderate-income individuals;
    (B) To the extent changes have been made, its record of opening and 
closing branches has adversely affected the accessibility its delivery 
systems, particularly in low- or moderate-income geographies or to low- 
or moderate-income individuals;
    (C) Its services (including, where appropriate, business hours) vary 
in a way that inconveniences its assessment area(s), particularly low- 
or moderate-income geographies or low- or moderate-income individuals; 
and
    (D) It provides a limited level of community development services.

[[Page 762]]

    (v) Substantial noncompliance. The FDIC rates a bank's service 
performance as being in ``substantial noncompliance'' if, in general, 
the bank demonstrates:
    (A) Its service delivery systems are unreasonably inaccessible to 
significant portions of its assessment area(s), particularly to low- or 
moderate-income geographies or to low- or moderate-income individuals;
    (B) To the extent changes have been made, its record of opening and 
closing branches has significantly adversely affected the accessibility 
of its delivery systems, particularly in low- or moderate-income 
geographies or to low- or moderate-income individuals;
    (C) Its services (including, where appropriate, business hours) vary 
in a way that significantly inconveniences its assessment area(s), 
particularly low- or moderate-income geographies or low- or moderate-
income individuals; and
    (D) It provides few, if any, community development services.
    (c) Wholesale or limited purpose banks. The FDIC assigns each 
wholesale or limited purpose bank's community development performance 
one of the four following ratings.
    (1) Outstanding. The FDIC rates a wholesale or limited purpose 
bank's community development performance ``outstanding'' if, in general, 
it demonstrates:
    (i) A high level of community development loans, community 
development services, or qualified investments, particularly investments 
that are not routinely provided by private investors;
    (ii) Extensive use of innovative or complex qualified investments, 
community development loans, or community development services; and
    (iii) Excellent responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs in its assessment area(s).
    (2) Satisfactory. The FDIC rates a wholesale or limited purpose 
bank's community development performance ``satisfactory'' if, in 
general, it demonstrates:
    (i) An adequate level of community development loans, community 
development services, or qualified investments, particularly investments 
that are not routinely provided by private investors;
    (ii) Occasional use of innovative or complex qualified investments, 
community development loans, or community development services; and
    (iii) Adequate responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs in its assessment area(s).
    (3) Needs to improve. The FDIC rates a wholesale or limited purpose 
bank's community development performance as ``needs to improve'' if, in 
general, it demonstrates:
    (i) A poor level of community development loans, community 
development services, or qualified investments, particularly investments 
that are not routinely provided by private investors;
    (ii) Rare use of innovative or complex qualified investments, 
community development loans, or community development services; and
    (iii) Poor responsiveness to credit and community development needs 
in its assessment area(s).
    (4) Substantial noncompliance. The FDIC rates a wholesale or limited 
purpose bank's community development performance in ``substantial 
noncompliance'' if, in general, it demonstrates:
    (i) Few, if any, community development loans, community development 
services, or qualified investments, particularly investments that are 
not routinely provided by private investors;
    (ii) No use of innovative or complex qualified investments, 
community development loans, or community development services; and
    (iii) Very poor responsiveness to credit and community development 
needs in its assessment area(s).
    (d) Banks evaluated under the small bank performance standards--(1) 
Lending test ratings--(i) Eligibility for a satisfactory lending test 
rating. The FDIC rates a small bank's lending performance 
``satisfactory'' if, in general, the bank demonstrates:
    (A) A reasonable loan-to-deposit ratio (considering seasonal 
variations) given the bank's size, financial condition, the credit needs 
of its assessment area(s), and taking into account, as appropriate, 
other lending-related activities such as loan originations for sale to 
the secondary markets and community development loans and qualified 
investments;
    (B) A majority of its loans and, as appropriate, other lending-
related activities, are in its assessment area;
    (C) A distribution of loans to and, as appropriate, other lending-
related activities for individuals of different income levels (including 
low- and moderate-income individuals) and businesses and farms of 
different sizes that is reasonable given the demographics of the bank's 
assessment area(s);
    (D) A record of taking appropriate action, when warranted, in 
response to written complaints, if any, about the bank's performance in 
helping to meet the credit needs of its assessment area(s); and
    (E) A reasonable geographic distribution of loans given the bank's 
assessment area(s).
    (ii) Eligibility for an ``outstanding'' lending test rating. A small 
bank that meets each of the standards for a ``satisfactory'' rating 
under this paragraph and exceeds some or all of those standards may 
warrant consideration for a lending test rating of ``outstanding.''

[[Page 763]]

    (iii) Needs to improve or substantial noncompliance ratings. A small 
bank may also receive a lending test rating of ``needs to improve'' or 
``substantial noncompliance'' depending on the degree to which its 
performance has failed to meet the standard for a ``satisfactory'' 
rating.
    (2) Community development test ratings for intermediate small 
banks--(i) Eligibility for a satisfactory community development test 
rating. The FDIC rates an intermediate small bank's community 
development performance ``satisfactory'' if the bank demonstrates 
adequate responsiveness to the community development needs of its 
assessment area(s) through community development loans, qualified 
investments, and community development services. The adequacy of the 
bank's response will depend on its capacity for such community 
development activities, its assessment area's need for such community 
development activities, and the availability of such opportunities for 
community development in the bank's assessment area(s).
    (ii) Eligibility for an outstanding community development test 
rating. The FDIC rates an intermediate small bank's community 
development performance ``outstanding'' if the bank demonstrates 
excellent responsiveness to community development needs in its 
assessment area(s) through community development loans, qualified 
investments, and community development services, as appropriate, 
considering the bank's capacity and the need and availability of such 
opportunities for community development in the bank's assessment 
area(s).
    (iii) Needs to improve or substantial noncompliance ratings. An 
intermediate small bank may also receive a community development test 
rating of ``needs to improve'' or ``substantial noncompliance'' 
depending on the degree to which its performance has failed to meet the 
standards for a ``satisfactory'' rating.
    (3) Overall rating--(i) Eligibility for a satisfactory overall 
rating. No intermediate small bank may receive an assigned overall 
rating of ``satisfactory'' unless it receives a rating of at least 
``satisfactory'' on both the lending test and the community development 
test.
    (ii) Eligibility for an outstanding overall rating. (A) An 
intermediate small bank that receives an ``outstanding'' rating on one 
test and at least ``satisfactory'' on the other test may receive an 
assigned overall rating of ``outstanding.''
    (B) A small bank that is not an intermediate small bank that meets 
each of the standards for a ``satisfactory'' rating under the lending 
test and exceeds some or all of those standards may warrant 
consideration for an overall rating of ``outstanding.'' In assessing 
whether a bank's performance is ``outstanding,'' the FDIC considers the 
extent to which the bank exceeds each of the performance standards for a 
``satisfactory'' rating and its performance in making qualified 
investments and its performance in providing branches and other services 
and delivery systems that enhance credit availability in its assessment 
area(s).
    (iii) Needs to improve or substantial noncompliance overall ratings. 
A small bank may also receive a rating of ``needs to improve'' or 
``substantial noncompliance'' depending on the degree to which its 
performance has failed to meet the standards for a ``satisfactory'' 
rating.
    (e) Strategic plan assessment and rating--(1) Satisfactory goals. 
The FDIC approves as ``satisfactory'' measurable goals that adequately 
help to meet the credit needs of the bank's assessment area(s).
    (2) Outstanding goals. If the plan identifies a separate group of 
measurable goals that substantially exceed the levels approved as 
``satisfactory,'' the FDIC will approve those goals as ``outstanding.''
    (3) Rating. The FDIC assesses the performance of a bank operating 
under an approved plan to determine if the bank has met its plan goals:
    (i) If the bank substantially achieves its plan goals for a 
satisfactory rating, the FDIC will rate the bank's performance under the 
plan as ``satisfactory.''
    (ii) If the bank exceeds its plan goals for a satisfactory rating 
and substantially achieves its plan goals for an outstanding rating, the 
FDIC will rate the bank's performance under the plan as ``outstanding.''
    (iii) If the bank fails to meet substantially its plan goals for a 
satisfactory rating, the FDIC will rate the bank as either ``needs to 
improve'' or ``substantial noncompliance,'' depending on the extent to 
which it falls short of its plan goals, unless the bank elected in its 
plan to be rated otherwise, as provided in Sec. 345.27(f)(4).

[60 FR 22201, May 4, 1995, as amended at 70 FR 44270, Aug. 2, 2005; 75 
FR 61045, Oct. 4, 2010]



                 Sec. Appendix B to Part 345--CRA Notice

    (a) Notice for main offices and, if an interstate bank, one branch 
office in each state.

                    Community Reinvestment Act Notice

    Under the Federal Community Reinvestment Act (CRA), the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) evaluates our record of helping to 
meet the credit needs of this community consistent with safe and sound 
operations. The FDIC also takes this record into account when deciding 
on certain applications submitted by us.
    Your involvement is encouraged.
    You are entitled to certain information about our operations and our 
performance

[[Page 764]]

under the CRA, including, for example, information about our branches, 
such as their location and services provided at them; the public section 
of our most recent CRA Performance Evaluation, prepared by the FDIC; and 
comments received from the public relating to our performance in helping 
to meet community credit needs, as well as our responses to those 
comments. You may review this information today.
    At least 30 days before the beginning of each quarter, the FDIC 
publishes a nationwide list of the banks that are scheduled for CRA 
examination in that quarter. This list is available from the Regional 
Director, FDIC (address). You may send written comments about our 
performance in helping to meet community credit needs to (name and 
address of official at bank) and FDIC Regional Director. You may also 
submit comments electronically through the FDIC's Web site at 
www.fdic.gov/regulations/cra. Your letter, together with any response by 
us, will be considered by the FDIC in evaluating our CRA performance and 
may be made public.
    You may ask to look at any comments received by the FDIC Regional 
Director. You may also request from the FDIC Regional Director an 
announcement of our applications covered by the CRA filed with the FDIC. 
We are an affiliate of (name of holding company), a bank holding 
company. You may request from the (title of responsible official), 
Federal Reserve Bank of _______(address) an announcement of applications 
covered by the CRA filed by bank holding companies.

    (b) Notice for branch offices.

                    Community Reinvestment Act Notice

    Under the Federal Community Reinvestment Act (CRA), the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) evaluates our record of helping to 
meet the credit needs of this community consistent with safe and sound 
operations. The FDIC also takes this record into account when deciding 
on certain applications submitted by us.
    Your involvement is encouraged.
    You are entitled to certain information about our operations and our 
performance under the CRA. You may review today the public section of 
our most recent CRA evaluation, prepared by the FDIC, and a list of 
services provided at this branch. You may also have access to the 
following additional information, which we will make available to you at 
this branch within five calendar days after you make a request to us: 
(1) a map showing the assessment area containing this branch, which is 
the area in which the FDIC evaluates our CRA performance in this 
community; (2) information about our branches in this assessment area; 
(3) a list of services we provide at those locations; (4) data on our 
lending performance in this assessment area; and (5) copies of all 
written comments received by us that specifically relate to our CRA 
performance in this assessment area, and any responses we have made to 
those comments. If we are operating under an approved strategic plan, 
you may also have access to a copy of the plan.

[If you would like to review information about our CRA performance in 
other communities served by us, the public file for our entire bank is 
available at (name of office located in state), located at (address).]

    At least 30 days before the beginning of each quarter, the FDIC 
publishes a nationwide list of the banks that are scheduled for CRA 
examination in that quarter. This list is available from the Regional 
Director, FDIC (address). You may send written comments about our 
performance in helping to meet community credit needs to (name and 
address of official at bank) and the FDIC Regional Director. You may 
also submit comments electronically through the FDIC's Web site at 
www.fdic.gov/regulations/cra. Your letter, together with any response by 
us, will be considered by the FDIC in evaluating our CRA performance and 
may be made public.
    You may ask to look at any comments received by the FDIC Regional 
Director. You may also request from the FDIC Regional Director an 
announcement of our applications covered by the CRA filed with the FDIC. 
We are an affiliate of (name of holding company), a bank holding 
company. You may request from the (title of responsible official), 
Federal Reserve Bank of _______(address) an announcement of applications 
covered by the CRA filed by bank holding companies.

[43 FR 47151, Oct. 12, 1978, as amended at 82 FR 5356, Jan. 18, 2017]



PART 346_DISCLOSURE AND REPORTING OF CRA-RELATED AGREEMENTS--
Table of Contents



Sec.
346.1  Purpose and scope of this part.
346.2  Definition of covered agreement.
346.3  CRA communications.
346.4  Fulfillment of the CRA.
346.5  Related agreements considered a single agreement.
346.6  Disclosure of covered agreements.
346.7  Annual reports.
346.8  Release of information under FOIA.
346.9  Compliance provisions.
346.10  Transition provisions.
346.11  Other definitions and rules of construction used in this part.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1831y.

    Source: 80 FR 23692, Apr. 29, 2015, unless otherwise noted.

[[Page 765]]



Sec. 346.1  Purpose and scope of this part.

    (a) General. This part implements section 711 of the Gramm-Leach-
Bliley Act (12 U.S.C. 1831y). That section requires any nongovernmental 
entity or person, insured depository institution, or affiliate of an 
insured depository institution that enters into a covered agreement to--
    (1) Make the covered agreement available to the public and the 
appropriate Federal banking agency; and
    (2) File an annual report with the appropriate Federal banking 
agency concerning the covered agreement.
    (b) Scope of this part. The provisions of this part apply to--
    (1) State nonmember insured banks;
    (2) Subsidiaries of state nonmember insured banks;
    (3) Nongovernmental entities or persons that enter into covered 
agreements with any company listed in paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (4) and 
(5) of this section.
    (4) State savings associations; and
    (5) Subsidiaries of State savings associations.
    (c) Relation to Community Reinvestment Act. This part does not 
affect in any way the Community Reinvestment Act of 1977 (12 U.S.C. 2901 
et seq.) or the FDIC's Community Reinvestment regulation found at 12 CFR 
part 345, or the FDIC's interpretations or administration of that Act or 
regulation.
    (d) Examples. (1) The examples in this part are not exclusive. 
Compliance with an example, to the extent applicable, constitutes 
compliance with this part.
    (2) Examples in a paragraph illustrate only the issue described in 
the paragraph and do not illustrate any other issues that may arise in 
this part.



Sec. 346.2  Definition of covered agreement.

    (a) General definition of covered agreement. A covered agreement is 
any contract, arrangement, or understanding that meets all of the 
following criteria--
    (1) The agreement is in writing.
    (2) The parties to the agreement include--
    (i) One or more insured depository institutions or affiliates of an 
insured depository institution; and
    (ii) One or more nongovernmental entities or persons (referred to 
hereafter as NGEPs).
    (3) The agreement provides for the insured depository institution or 
any affiliate to--
    (i) Provide to one or more individuals or entities (whether or not 
parties to the agreement) cash payments, grants, or other consideration 
(except loans) that have an aggregate value of more than $10,000 in any 
calendar year; or
    (ii) Make to one or more individuals or entities (whether or not 
parties to the agreement) loans that have an aggregate principal amount 
of more than $50,000 in any calendar year.
    (4) The agreement is made pursuant to, or in connection with, the 
fulfillment of the Community Reinvestment Act of 1977 (12 U.S.C. 2901 et 
seq.) (CRA), as defined inSec. 346.4.
    (5) The agreement is with a NGEP that has had a CRA communication as 
described in Sec. 346.3 prior to entering into the agreement.
    (b) Examples concerning written arrangements or understandings--
    (1) Example 1. A NGEP meets with an insured depository institution 
and states that the institution needs to make more community development 
investments in the NGEP's community. The NGEP and insured depository 
institution do not reach an agreement concerning the community 
development investments the institution should make in the community, 
and the parties do not reach any mutual arrangement or understanding. 
Two weeks later, the institution unilaterally issues a press release 
announcing that it has established a general goal of making $100 million 
of community development grants in low- and moderate-income 
neighborhoods served by the insured depository institution over the next 
5 years. The NGEP is not identified in the press release. The press 
release is not a written arrangement or understanding.
    (2) Example 2. A NGEP meets with an insured depository institution 
and states that the institution needs to offer new loan programs in the 
NGEP's community. The NGEP and the insured

[[Page 766]]

depository institution reach a mutual arrangement or understanding that 
the institution will provide additional loans in the NGEP's community. 
The institution tells the NGEP that it will issue a press release 
announcing the program. Later, the insured depository institution issues 
a press release announcing the loan program. The press release 
incorporates the key terms of the understanding reached between the NGEP 
and the insured depository institution. The written press release 
reflects the mutual arrangement or understanding of the NGEP and the 
insured depository institution and is, therefore, a written arrangement 
or understanding.
    (3) Example 3. An NGEP sends a letter to an insured depository 
institution requesting that the institution provide a $15,000 grant to 
the NGEP. The insured depository institution responds in writing and 
agrees to provide the grant in connection with its annual grant program. 
The exchange of letters constitutes a written arrangement or 
understanding.
    (c) Loan agreements that are not covered agreements. A covered 
agreement does not include--
    (1) Any individual loan that is secured by real estate; or
    (2) Any specific contract or commitment for a loan or extension of 
credit to an individual, business, farm, or other entity, or group of 
such individuals or entities if--
    (i) The funds are loaned at rates that are not substantially below 
market rates; and
    (ii) The loan application or other loan documentation does not 
indicate that the borrower intends or is authorized to use the borrowed 
funds to make a loan or extension of credit to one or more third 
parties.
    (d) Examples concerning loan agreements--
    (1) Example 1. An insured depository institution provides an 
organization with a $1 million loan that is documented in writing and is 
secured by real estate owned or to-be-acquired by the organization. The 
agreement is an individual mortgage loan and is exempt from coverage 
under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, regardless of the interest rate 
on the loan or whether the organization intends or is authorized to re-
loan the funds to a third party.
    (2) Example 2. An insured depository institution commits to provide 
a $500,000 line of credit to a small business that is documented by a 
written agreement. The loan is made at rates that are within the range 
of rates offered by the institution to similarly situated small 
businesses in the market and the loan documentation does not indicate 
that the small business intends or is authorized to re-lend the borrowed 
funds. The agreement is exempt from coverage under paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section.
    (3) Example 3. An insured depository institution offers small 
business loans that are guaranteed by the Small Business Administration 
(SBA). A small business obtains a $75,000 loan, documented in writing, 
from the institution under the institution's SBA loan program. The loan 
documentation does not indicate that the borrower intends or is 
authorized to re-lend the funds. Although the rate charged on the loan 
is well below that charged by the institution on commercial loans, the 
rate is within the range of rates that the institution would charge a 
similarly situated small business for a similar loan under the SBA loan 
program. Accordingly, the loan is not made at substantially below market 
rates and is exempt from coverage under paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section.
    (4) Example 4. A bank holding company enters into a written 
agreement with a community development organization that provides that 
insured depository institutions owned by the bank holding company will 
make $250 million in small business loans in the community over the next 
5 years. The written agreement is not a specific contract or commitment 
for a loan or an extension of credit and, thus, is not exempt from 
coverage under paragraph (c)(2) of this section: Each small business 
loan made by the insured depository institution pursuant to this general 
commitment would, however, be exempt from coverage if the loan is made 
at rates that are not substantially below market rates and the loan 
documentation does not indicate that

[[Page 767]]

the borrower intended or was authorized to re-lend the funds.
    (e) Agreements that include exempt loan agreements. If an agreement 
includes a loan, extension of credit or loan commitment that, if 
documented separately, would be exempt under paragraph (c) of this 
section, the exempt loan, extension of credit or loan commitment may be 
excluded for purposes of determining whether the agreement is a covered 
agreement.
    (f) Determining annual value of agreements that lack schedule of 
disbursements. For purposes of paragraph (a)(3) of this section, a 
multi-year agreement that does not include a schedule for the 
disbursement of payments, grants, loans or other consideration by the 
insured depository institution or affiliate, is considered to have a 
value in the first year of the agreement equal to all payments, grants, 
loans and other consideration to be provided at any time under the 
agreement.



Sec. 346.3  CRA communications.

    (a) Definition of CRA communication. A CRA communication is any of 
the following--
    (1) Any written or oral comment or testimony provided to a Federal 
banking agency concerning the adequacy of the performance under the CRA 
of the insured depository institution, any affiliated insured depository 
institution, or any CRA affiliate.
    (2) Any written comment submitted to the insured depository 
institution that discusses the adequacy of the performance under the CRA 
of the institution and must be included in the institution's CRA public 
file.
    (3) Any discussion or other contact with the insured depository 
institution or any affiliate about--
    (i) Providing (or refraining from providing) written or oral 
comments or testimony to any Federal banking agency concerning the 
adequacy of the performance under the CRA of the insured depository 
institution, any affiliated insured depository institution, or any CRA 
affiliate;
    (ii) Providing (or refraining from providing) written comments to 
the insured depository institution that concern the adequacy of the 
institution's performance under the CRA and must be included in the 
institution's CRA public file; or
    (iii) The adequacy of the performance under the CRA of the insured 
depository institution, any affiliated insured depository institution, 
or any CRA affiliate.
    (b) Discussions or contacts that are not CRA communications--(1) 
Timing of contacts with a Federal banking agency. An oral or written 
communication with a Federal banking agency is not a CRA communication 
if it occurred more than 3 years before the parties entered into the 
agreement.
    (2) Timing of contacts with insured depository institutions and 
affiliates. A communication with an insured depository institution or 
affiliate is not a CRA communication if the communication occurred--
    (i) More than 3 years before the parties entered into the agreement, 
in the case of any written communication;
    (ii) More than 3 years before the parties entered into the 
agreement, in the case of any oral communication in which the NGEP 
discusses providing (or refraining from providing) comments or testimony 
to a Federal banking agency or written comments that must be included in 
the institution's CRA public file in connection with a request to, or 
agreement by, the institution or affiliate to take (or refrain from 
taking) any action that is in fulfillment of the CRA; or
    (iii) More than 1 year before the parties entered into the 
agreement, in the case of any other oral communication not described in 
paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section.
    (3) Knowledge of communication by insured depository institution or 
affiliate. (i) A communication is only a CRA communication under 
paragraph (a) of this section if the insured depository institution or 
its affiliate has knowledge of the communication under this paragraph 
(b)(3)(ii) or (iii) of this section.
    (ii) Communication with insured depository institution or affiliate. 
An insured depository institution or affiliate has knowledge of a 
communication by the NGEP to the institution or its affiliate under this 
paragraph only if one of the

[[Page 768]]

following representatives of the insured depository institution or any 
affiliate has knowledge of the communication--
    (A) An employee who approves, directs, authorizes, or negotiates the 
agreement with the NGEP; or
    (B) An employee designated with responsibility for compliance with 
the CRA or executive officer if the employee or executive officer knows 
that the institution or affiliate is negotiating, intends to negotiate, 
or has been informed by the NGEP that it expects to request that the 
institution or affiliate negotiate an agreement with the NGEP.
    (iii) Other communications. An insured depository institution or 
affiliate is deemed to have knowledge of--
    (A) Any testimony provided to a Federal banking agency at a public 
meeting or hearing;
    (B) Any comment submitted to a Federal banking agency that is 
conveyed in writing by the agency to the insured depository institution 
or affiliate; and
    (C) Any written comment submitted to the insured depository 
institution that must be and is included in the institution's CRA public 
file.
    (4) Communication where NGEP has knowledge. A NGEP has a CRA 
communication with an insured depository institution or affiliate only 
if any of the following individuals has knowledge of the communication--
    (i) A director, employee, or member of the NGEP who approves, 
directs, authorizes, or negotiates the agreement with the insured 
depository institution or affiliate;
    (ii) A person who functions as an executive officer of the NGEP and 
who knows that the NGEP is negotiating or intends to negotiate an 
agreement with the insured depository institution or affiliate; or
    (iii) Where the NGEP is an individual, the NGEP.
    (c) Examples of CRA communications--(1) Examples of actions that are 
CRA communications. The following are examples of CRA communications. 
These examples are not exclusive and assume that the communication 
occurs within the relevant time period as described in paragraph (b)(1) 
or (2) of this section and the appropriate representatives have 
knowledge of the communication as specified in paragraphs (b)(3) and (4) 
of this section.
    (i) Example 1. A NGEP files a written comment with a Federal banking 
agency that states than an insured depository institution successfully 
addresses the credit needs of its community. The written comment is in 
response to a general request from the agency for comments on an 
application of the insured depository institution to open a new branch 
and a copy of the comment is provided to the institution.
    (ii) Examples 2. A NGEP meets with an executive officer of an 
insured depository institution and states that the institution must 
improve its CRA performance.
    (iii) Example 3. A NGEP meets with an executive officer of an 
insured depository institution and states that the institution needs to 
make more mortgage loans in low- and moderate-income neighborhoods in 
its community.
    (iv) Example 4. A bank holding company files an application with a 
Federal banking agency to acquire an insured depository institution. Two 
weeks later, the NGEP meets with an executive officer of the bank 
holding company to discuss the adequacy of the performance under the CRA 
of the target insured depository institution. The insured depository 
institution was an affiliate of the bank holding company at the time the 
NGEP met with the target institution. (See Sec. 346.11(a).) Accordingly, 
the NGEP had a CRA communication with an affiliate of the bank holding 
company.
    (2) Examples of actions that are not CRA communications. The 
following are examples of actions that are not by themselves CRA 
communications. These examples are not exclusive.
    (i) Example 1. A NGEP provides to a Federal banking agency comments 
or testimony concerning an insured depository institution or affiliate 
in response to a direct request by the agency for comments or testimony 
from that NGEP. Direct requests for comments or testimony do not include 
a general invitation by a Federal banking agency for comments or 
testimony from the public in connection with a

[[Page 769]]

CRA performance evaluation of, or application for a deposit facility (as 
defined in section 803 of the CRA (12 U.S.C. 2902(3)) by, an insured 
depository institution or an application by a company to acquire an 
insured depository institution.
    (ii) Example 2. A NGEP makes a statement concerning an insured 
depository institution or affiliate at a widely attended conference or 
seminar regarding a general topic. A public or private meeting, public 
hearing, or other meeting regarding one or more specific institutions, 
affiliates or transactions involving an application for a deposit 
facility is not considered a widely attended conference or seminar.
    (iii) Example 3. A NGEP, such as a civil rights group, community 
group providing housing and other services in low- and moderate-income 
neighborhoods, veterans organization, community theater group, or youth 
organization, sends a fundraising letter to insured depository 
institutions and to other businesses in its community. The letter 
encourages all businesses in the community to meet their obligation to 
assist in making the local community a better place to live and work by 
supporting the fundraising efforts of the NGEP.
    (iv) Example 4. A NGEP discusses with an insured depository 
institution or affiliate whether particular loans, services, 
investments, community development activities, or other activities are 
generally eligible for consideration by a Federal banking agency under 
the CRA. The NGEP and insured depository institution or affiliate do not 
discuss the adequacy of the CRA performance of the insured depository 
institution or affiliate.
    (v) Example 5. A NGEP engaged in the sale or purchase of loans in 
the secondary market sends a general offering circular to financial 
institutions offering to sell or purchase a portfolio of loans. An 
insured depository institution that receives the offering circular 
discusses with the NGEP the types of loans included in the loan pool, 
whether such loans are generally eligible for consideration under the 
CRA, and which loans are made to borrowers in the institution's local 
community. The NGEP and insured depository institution do not discuss 
the adequacy of the institution's CRA performance.
    (d) Multiparty covered agreements. (1) A NGEP that is a party to a 
covered agreement that involves multiple NGEPs is not required to comply 
with the requirements of this part if--
    (i) The NGEP has not had a CRA communication; and
    (ii) No representative of the NGEP identified in paragraph (b)(4) of 
this section has knowledge at the time of the agreement that another 
NGEP that is a party to the agreement has had a CRA communication.
    (2) An insured depository institution or affiliate that is a party 
to a covered agreement that involves multiple insured depository 
institutions or affiliates is not required to comply with the disclosure 
and annual reporting requirements in Secs. 346.6 and 346.7 if--
    (i) No NGEP that is a party to the agreement has had a CRA 
communication concerning the insured depository institution or any 
affiliate; and
    (ii) No representative of the insured depository institution or any 
affiliate identified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section has knowledge 
at the time of the agreement that an NGEP that is a party to the 
agreement has had a CRA communication concerning any other insured 
depository institution or affiliate that is a party to the agreement.



Sec. 346.4  Fulfillment of the CRA.

    (a) List of factors that are in fulfillment of the CRA. Fulfillment 
of the CRA, for purposes of this part, means the following list of 
factors--
    (1) Comments to a Federal banking agency or included in CRA public 
file. Providing or refraining from providing written or oral comments or 
testimony to any Federal banking agency concerning the performance under 
the CRA of an insured depository institution or CRA affiliate that is a 
party to the agreement or an affiliate of a party to the agreement or 
written comments that are required to be included in the CRA public file 
of any such insured depository institution; or
    (2) Activities given favorable CRA consideration. Performing any of 
the following activities if the activity is of

[[Page 770]]

the type that is likely to receive favorable consideration by a Federal 
banking agency in evaluating the performance under the CRA of the 
insured depository institution that is a party to the agreement or an 
affiliate of a party to the agreement--
    (i) Home-purchase, home-improvement, small business, small farm, 
community development, and consumer lending, as described in 12 CFR 
345.22, including loan purchases, loan commitments, and letters of 
credit;
    (ii) Making investments, deposits, or grants, or acquiring 
membership shares, that have as their primary purpose community 
development, as described in 12 CFR 345.23;
    (iii) Delivering retail banking services as described in 12 CFR 
345.24(d);
    (iv) Providing community development services, as described in 12 
CFR 345.24(e);
    (v) In the case of a wholesale or limited-purpose insured depository 
institution, community development lending, including originating and 
purchasing loans and making loan commitments and letters of credit, 
making qualified investments, or providing community development 
services, as described in 12 CFR 345.25(c);
    (vi) In the case of a small insured depository institution, any 
lending or other activity described in 12 CFR 345.26(a); or
    (vii) In the case of an insured depository institution that is 
evaluated on the basis of a strategic plan, any element of the strategic 
plan, as described in 12 CFR 345.27(f).
    (b) Agreements relating to activities of CRA affiliates. An insured 
depository institution or affiliate that is a party to a covered 
agreement that concerns any activity described in paragraph (a) of this 
section of a CRA affiliate must, prior to the time the agreement is 
entered into, notify each NGEP that is a party to the agreement that the 
agreement concerns a CRA affiliate.



Sec. 346.5  Related agreements considered a single agreement.

    The following rules must be applied in determining whether an 
agreement is a covered agreement under Sec. 346.2.
    (a) Agreements entered into by same parties. All written agreements 
to which an insured depository institution or an affiliate of the 
insured depository institution is a party shall be considered to be a 
single agreement if the agreements--
    (1) Are entered into with the same NGEP;
    (2) Were entered into within the same 12-month period; and
    (3) Are each in fulfillment of the CRA.
    (b) Substantively related contracts. All written contracts to which 
an insured depository institution or an affiliate of the insured 
depository institution is a party shall be considered to be a single 
agreement, without regard to whether the other parties to the contracts 
are the same or whether each such contract is in fulfillment of the CRA, 
if the contracts were negotiated in a coordinated fashion and a NGEP is 
a party to each contract.



Sec. 346.6  Disclosure of covered agreements.

    (a) Applicability date. This section applies only to covered 
agreements entered into after November 12, 1999.
    (b) Disclosure of covered agreements to the public--(1) Disclosure 
required. Each NGEP and each insured depository institution or affiliate 
that enters into a covered agreement must promptly make a copy of the 
covered agreement available to any individual or entity upon request.
    (2) Nondisclosure of confidential and proprietary information 
permitted. In responding to a request for a covered agreement from any 
individual or entity under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, a NGEP, 
insured depository institution, or affiliate may withhold from public 
disclosure confidential or proprietary information that the party 
believes the relevant supervisory agency could withhold from disclosure 
under the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552 et seq.) (FOIA).
    (3) Information that must be disclosed. Notwithstanding paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section, a party must disclose any of the following 
information that is contained in a covered agreement--
    (i) The names and addresses of the parties to the agreement;
    (ii) The amount of any payments, fees, loans, or other consideration 
to be

[[Page 771]]

made or provided by any party to the agreement;
    (iii) Any description of how the funds or other resources provided 
under the agreement are to be used;
    (iv) The term of the agreement (if the agreement establishes a 
term); and
    (v) Any other information that the relevant supervisory agency 
determines is not properly exempt from public disclosure.
    (4) Request for review of withheld information. Any individual or 
entity may request that the relevant supervisory agency review whether 
any information in a covered agreement withheld by a party must be 
disclosed. Any requests for agency review of withheld information must 
be filed, and will be processed in accordance with, the relevant 
supervisory agency's rules concerning the availability of information 
(see the FDIC's rules regarding Disclosure of Information (12 CFR part 
309)).
    (5) Duration of obligation. The obligation to disclose a covered 
agreement to the public terminates 12 months after the end of the term 
of the agreement.
    (6) Reasonable copy and mailing fees. Each NGEP and each insured 
depository institution or affiliate may charge an individual or entity 
that requests a copy of a covered agreement a reasonable fee not to 
exceed the cost of copying and mailing the agreement.
    (7) Use of CRA public file by insured depository institution or 
affiliate. An insured depository institution and any affiliate of an 
insured depository institution may fulfill its obligation under this 
paragraph (b) by placing a copy of the covered agreement in the insured 
depository institution's CRA public file if the institution makes the 
agreement available in accordance with the procedures set forth in 12 
CFR 345.43.
    (c) Disclosure by NGEPs of covered agreements to the relevant 
supervisory agency. (1) Each NGEP that is a party to a covered agreement 
must provide the following within 30 days of receiving a request from 
the relevant supervisory agency--
    (i) A complete copy of the agreement; and
    (ii) In the event the NGEP proposes the withholding of any 
information contained in the agreement in accordance with paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section, a public version of the agreement that excludes 
such information and an explanation justifying the exclusions. Any 
public version must include the information described in paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section.
    (2) The obligation of a NGEP to provide a covered agreement to the 
relevant supervisory agency terminates 12 months after the end of the 
term of the covered agreement.
    (d) Disclosure by insured depository institution or affiliate of 
covered agreements to the relevant supervisory agency--(1) In general. 
Within 60 days of the end of each calendar quarter, each insured 
depository institution and affiliate must provide each relevant 
supervisory agency with--
    (i)(A) A complete copy of each covered agreement entered into by the 
insured depository institution or affiliate during the calendar quarter; 
and
    (B) In the event the institution or affiliate proposes the 
withholding of any information contained in the agreement in accordance 
with paragraph (b)(2) of this section, a public version of the agreement 
that excludes such information (other than any information described in 
paragraph (b)(3) of this section) and an explanation justifying the 
exclusions; or
    (ii) A list of all covered agreements entered into by the insured 
depository institution or affiliate during the calendar quarter that 
contains--
    (A) The name and address of each insured depository institution or 
affiliate that is a party to the agreement;
    (B) The name and address of each NGEP that is a party to the 
agreement;
    (C) The date the agreement was entered into;
    (D) The estimated total value of all payments, fees, loans, and 
other consideration to be provided by the institution or any affiliate 
of the institution under the agreement; and
    (E) The date the agreement terminates.
    (2) Prompt filing of covered agreements contained in list required. 
(i) If an insured depository institution or affiliate files a list of 
the covered agreements entered into by the institution or affiliate 
pursuant to paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section, the institution or 
affiliate must provide any relevant supervisory

[[Page 772]]

agency a complete copy and public version of any covered agreement 
referenced in the list within 7 calendar days of receiving a request 
from the agency for a copy of the agreement.
    (ii) The obligation of an insured depository institution or 
affiliate to provide a covered agreement to the relevant supervisory 
agency under this paragraph (d)(2) terminates 36 months after the end of 
the term of the agreement.
    (3) Joint filings. In the event that 2 or more insured depository 
institutions or affiliates are parties to a covered agreement, the 
insured depository institution(s) and affiliate(s) may jointly file the 
documents required by this paragraph (d). Any joint filing must identify 
the insured depository institution(s) and affiliate(s) for whom the 
filings are being made.



Sec. 346.7  Annual reports.

    (a) Applicability date. This section applies only to covered 
agreements entered into on or after May 12, 2000.
    (b) Annual report required. Each NGEP and each insured depository 
institution or affiliate that is a party to a covered agreement must 
file an annual report with each relevant supervisory agency concerning 
the disbursement, receipt, and uses of funds or other resources under 
the covered agreement.
    (c) Duration of reporting requirement--(1) NGEPs. A NGEP must file 
an annual report for a covered agreement for any fiscal year in which 
the NGEP receives or uses funds or other resources under the agreement.
    (2) Insured depository institutions and affiliates. An insured 
depository institution or affiliate must file an annual report for a 
covered agreement for any fiscal year in which the institution or 
affiliate--
    (i) Provides or receives any payments, fees, or loans under the 
covered agreement that must be reported under paragraphs (e)(1)(iii) and 
(iv) of this section; or
    (ii) Has data to report on loans, investments, and services provided 
by a party to the covered agreement under the covered agreement under 
paragraph (e)(1)(vi) of this section.
    (d) Annual reports filed by NGEP--(1) Contents of report. The annual 
report filed by a NGEP under this section must include the following--
    (i) The name and mailing address of the NGEP filing the report;
    (ii) Information sufficient to identify the covered agreement for 
which the annual report is being filed, such as by providing the names 
of the parties to the agreement and the date the agreement was entered 
into or by providing a copy of the agreement;
    (iii) The amount of funds or resources received under the covered 
agreement during the fiscal year; and
    (iv) A detailed, itemized list of how any funds or resources 
received by the NGEP under the covered agreement were used during the 
fiscal year, including the total amount used for--
    (A) Compensation of officers, directors, and employees;
    (B) Administrative expenses;
    (C) Travel expenses;
    (D) Entertainment expenses;
    (E) Payment of consulting and professional fees; and
    (F) Other expenses and uses (specify expense or use).
    (2) More detailed reporting of uses of funds or resources 
permitted--(i) In general. If a NGEP allocated and used funds received 
under a covered agreement for a specific purpose, the NGEP may fulfill 
the requirements of paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section with respect to 
such funds by providing--
    (A) A brief description of each specific purpose for which the funds 
or other resources were used; and
    (B) The amount of funds or resources used during the fiscal year for 
each specific purpose.
    (ii) Specific purpose defined. A NGEP allocates and uses funds for a 
specific purpose if the NGEP receives and uses the funds for a purpose 
that is more specific and limited than the categories listed in 
paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (3) Use of other reports. The annual report filed by a NGEP may 
consist of or incorporate a report prepared for any other purpose, such 
as the Internal Revenue Service Return of Organization Exempt From 
Income Tax on

[[Page 773]]

Form 990, or any other Internal Revenue Service form, state tax form, 
report to members or shareholders, audited or unaudited financial 
statements, audit report, or other report, so long as the annual report 
filed by the NGEP contains all of the information required by this 
paragraph (d).
    (4) Consolidated reports permitted. A NGEP that is a party to 2 or 
more covered agreements may file with each relevant supervisory agency a 
single consolidated annual report covering all the covered agreements. 
Any consolidated report must contain all the information required by 
this paragraph (d). The information reported under paragraphs (d)(1)(iv) 
and (d)(2) of this section may be reported on an aggregate basis for all 
covered agreements.
    (5) Examples of annual report requirements for NGEPs--
    (i) Example 1. A NGEP receives an unrestricted grant of $15,000 
under a covered agreement, includes the funds in its general operating 
budget, and uses the funds during its fiscal year. The NGEP's annual 
report for the fiscal year must provide the name and mailing address of 
the NGEP, information sufficient to identify the covered agreement, and 
state that the NGEP received $15,000 during the fiscal year. The report 
must also indicate the total expenditures made by the NGEP during the 
fiscal year for compensation, administrative expenses, travel expenses, 
entertainment expenses, consulting and professional fees, and other 
expenses and uses. The NGEP's annual report may provide this information 
by submitting an Internal Revenue Service Form 990 that includes the 
required information. If the Internal Revenue Service Form does not 
include information for all of the required categories listed in this 
part, the NGEP must report the total expenditures in the remaining 
categories either by providing that information directly or by providing 
another form or report that includes the required information.
    (ii) Examples 2. An organization receives $15,000 from an insured 
depository institution under a covered agreement and allocates and uses 
the $15,000 during the fiscal year to purchase computer equipment to 
support its functions. The organization's annual report must include the 
name and address of the organization, information sufficient to identify 
the agreement, and a statement that the organization received $15,000 
during the year. In addition, since the organization allocated and used 
the funds for a specific purpose that is more narrow and limited than 
the categories of expenses included in the detailed, itemized list of 
expenses, the organization would have the option of providing either the 
total amount it used during the year for each category of expenses 
included in paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section, or a statement that it 
used the $15,000 to purchase computer equipment and a brief description 
of the equipment purchased.
    (iii) Examples 3. A community group receives $50,000 from an insured 
depository institution under a covered agreement. During its fiscal 
year, the community group specifically allocates and uses $5,000 of the 
funds to pay for a particular business trip and uses the remaining 
$45,000 for general operating expenses. The group's annual report for 
the fiscal year must include the name and address of the group, 
information sufficient to identify the agreement, and a statement that 
the group received $50,000. Because the group did not allocate and use 
all of the funds for a specific purpose, the group's annual report must 
provide the total amount of funds it used during the year for each 
category of expenses included in paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section. 
The group's annual report also could state that it used $5,000 for a 
particular business trip and include a brief description of the trip.
    (iv) Example 4. A community development organization is a party to 
two separate covered agreements with two unaffiliated insured depository 
institutions. Under each agreement, the organization receives $15,000 
during its fiscal year and uses the funds to support its activities 
during that year. If the organization elects to file a consolidated 
annual report, the consolidated report must identify the organization 
and the two covered agreements, state that the organization received 
$15,000 during the fiscal year under each agreement, and provide the 
total

[[Page 774]]

amount that the organization used during the year for each category of 
expenses included in paragraph (d)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (e) Annual report filed by insured depository institution or 
affiliate--(1) General. The annual report filed by an insured depository 
institution or affiliate must include the following--
    (i) The name and principal place of business of the insured 
depository institution or affiliate filing the report;
    (ii) Information sufficient to identify the covered agreement for 
which the annual report is being filed, such as by providing the names 
of the parties to the agreement and the date the agreement was entered 
into or by providing a copy of the agreement;
    (iii) The aggregate amount of payments, aggregate amount of fees, 
and aggregate amount of loans provided by the insured depository 
institution or affiliate under the covered agreement to any other party 
to the agreement during the fiscal year;
    (iv) The aggregate amount of payments, aggregate amount of fees, and 
aggregate amount of loans received by the insured depository institution 
or affiliate under the covered agreement from any other party to the 
agreement during the fiscal year;
    (v) A general description of the terms and conditions of any 
payments, fees, or loans reported under paragraphs (e)(1)(iii) and (iv) 
of this section, or, in the event such terms and conditions are set 
forth--
    (A) In the covered agreement, a statement identifying the covered 
agreement and the date the agreement (or a list identifying the 
agreement) was filed with the relevant supervisory agency; or
    (B) In a previous annual report filed by the insured depository 
institution or affiliate, a statement identifying the date the report 
was filed with the relevant supervisory agency; and
    (vi) The aggregate amount and number of loans, aggregate amount and 
number of investments, and aggregate amount of services provided under 
the covered agreement to any individual or entity not a party to the 
agreement--
    (A) By the insured depository institution or affiliate during its 
fiscal year; and
    (B) By any other party to the agreement, unless such information is 
not known to the insured depository institution or affiliate filing the 
report or such information is or will be contained in the annual report 
filed by another party under this section.
    (2) Consolidated reports permitted--(i) Party to multiple 
agreements. An insured depository institution or affiliate that is a 
party to 2 or more covered agreements may file a single consolidated 
annual report with each relevant supervisory agency concerning all the 
covered agreements.
    (ii) Affiliated entities party to the same agreement. An insured 
depository institution and its affiliates that are parties to the same 
covered agreement may file a single consolidated annual report relating 
to the agreement with each relevant supervisory agency for the covered 
agreement.
    (iii) Content of report. Any consolidated annual report must contain 
all the information required by this paragraph (e). The amounts and data 
required to be reported under paragraphs (e)(1)(iv) and (vi) of this 
section may be reported on an aggregate basis for all covered 
agreements.
    (f) Time and place of filing--(1) General. Each party must file its 
annual report with each relevant supervisory agency for the covered 
agreement no later than six months following the end of the fiscal year 
covered by the report.
    (2) Alternative method of fulfilling annual reporting requirement 
for a NGEP. (i) A NGEP may fulfill the filing requirements of this 
section by providing the following materials to an insured depository 
institution or affiliate that is a party to the agreement no later than 
six months following the end of the NGEP's fiscal year--
    (A) A copy of the NGEP's annual report required under paragraph (d) 
of this section for the fiscal year; and
    (B) Written instructions that the insured depository institution or 
affiliate promptly forward the annual report to the relevant supervisory 
agency or agencies on behalf of the NGEP.
    (ii) An insured depository institution or affiliate that receives an 
annual report from a NGEP pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this 
section must file

[[Page 775]]

the report with the relevant supervisory agency or agencies on behalf of 
the NGEP within 30 days.



Sec. 346.8  Release of information under FOIA.

    The FDIC will make covered agreements and annual reports available 
to the public in accordance with the Freedom of Information Act (5 
U.S.C. 552 et seq.) and the FDIC's rules regarding Disclosure of 
Information (12 CFR part 309). A party to a covered agreement may 
request confidential treatment of proprietary and confidential 
information in a covered agreement or an annual report under those 
procedures.



Sec. 346.9  Compliance provisions.

    (a) Willful failure to comply with disclosure and reporting 
obligations. (1) If the FDIC determines that a NGEP has willfully failed 
to comply in a material way with Secs. 346.6 or 346.7, the FDIC will 
notify the NGEP in writing of that determination and provide the NGEP a 
period of 90 days (or such longer period as the FDIC finds to be 
reasonable under the circumstances) to comply.
    (2) If the NGEP does not comply within the time period established 
by the FDIC, the agreement shall thereafter be unenforceable by that 
NGEP by operation of section 48 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831y).
    (3) The FDIC may assist any insured depository institution or 
affiliate that is a party to a covered agreement that is unenforceable 
by a NGEP by operation of section 48 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1831y) in identifying a successor to assume the NGEP's 
responsibilities under the agreement.
    (b) Diversion of funds. If a court or other body of competent 
jurisdiction determines that funds or resources received under a covered 
agreement have been diverted contrary to the purposes of the covered 
agreement for an individual's personal financial gain, the FDIC may take 
either or both of the following actions--
    (1) Order the individual to disgorge the diverted funds or resources 
received under the agreement.
    (2) Prohibit the individual from being a party to any covered 
agreement for a period not to exceed 10 years.
    (c) Notice and opportunity to respond. Before making a determination 
under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, or taking any action under 
paragraph (b) of this section, the FDIC will provide written notice and 
an opportunity to present information to the FDIC concerning any 
relevant facts or circumstances relating to the matter.
    (d) Inadvertent or de minimis errors. Inadvertent or de minimis 
errors in annual reports or other documents filed with the FDIC under 
Secs. 346.6 or 346.7 will not subject the reporting party to any 
penalty.
    (e) Enforcement of provisions in covered agreements. No provision of 
this part shall be construed as authorizing the FDIC to enforce the 
provisions of any covered agreement.



Sec. 346.10  Transition provisions.

    (a) Disclosure of covered agreements entered into before the 
effective date of this part--(1) Disclosure to the public. Each NGEP and 
each insured depository institution or affiliate that was a party to the 
agreement must make the agreement available to the public under 
Sec. 346.6 until at least April 1, 2002.
    (2) Disclosure to the relevant supervisory agency. (i) Each NGEP 
that was a party to the agreement must make the agreement available to 
the relevant supervisory agency under Sec. 346.6 until at least April 1, 
2002.
    (ii) Each insured depository institution or affiliate that was a 
party to the agreement must, by June 30, 2001, provide each relevant 
supervisory agency either--
    (A) A copy of the agreement under Sec. 346.6(d)(1)(i); or
    (B) The information described in Sec. 346.6(d)(1)(ii) for each 
agreement.
    (b) Filing of annual reports that relate to fiscal years ending on 
or before December 31, 2000. In the event that a NGEP, insured 
depository institution or affiliate has any information to report under 
Sec. 346.7 for a fiscal year that ends on or before December 31, 2000, 
and that concerns a covered agreement entered into between May 12, 2000, 
and December 31, 2000, the annual report

[[Page 776]]

for that fiscal year must be provided no later than June 30, 2001, to--
    (1) Each relevant supervisory agency; or
    (2) In the case of a NGEP, to an insured depository institution or 
affiliate that is a party to the agreement in accordance with 
Sec. 346.7(f)(2).



Sec. 346.11  Other definitions and rules of construction used in this part.

    (a) Affiliate. ``Affiliate'' means--
    (1) Any company that controls, is controlled by, or is under common 
control with another company; and
    (2) For the purpose of determining whether an agreement is a covered 
agreement under Sec. 346.2, an ``affiliate'' includes any company that 
would be under common control or merged with another company on 
consummation of any transaction pending before a Federal banking agency 
at the time--
    (i) The parties enter into the agreement; and
    (ii) The NGEP that is a party to the agreement makes a CRA 
communication, as described in Sec. 346.3.
    (b) Control. ``Control'' is defined in section 2(a) of the Bank 
Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841(a)).
    (c) CRA affiliate. A ``CRA affiliate'' of an insured depository 
institution is any company that is an affiliate of an insured depository 
institution to the extent, and only to the extent, that the activities 
of the affiliate were considered by the appropriate Federal banking 
agency when evaluating the CRA performance of the institution at its 
most recent CRA examination prior to the agreement. An insured 
depository institution or affiliate also may designate any company as a 
CRA affiliate at any time prior to the time a covered agreement is 
entered into by informing the NGEP that is a party to the agreement of 
such designation.
    (d) CRA public file. ``CRA public file'' means the public file 
maintained by an insured depository institution and described in 12 CFR 
345.43.
    (e) Executive officer. The term ``executive officer'' has the same 
meaning as in Sec. 215.2(e)(1) of the Board of Governors of the Federal 
Reserve System's Regulation O (12 CFR 215.2(e)(1)).
    (f) Federal banking agency; appropriate Federal banking agency. The 
terms ``Federal banking agency'' and ``appropriate Federal banking 
agency'' have the same meanings as in section 3 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    (g) Fiscal year. (1) The fiscal year for a NGEP that does not have a 
fiscal year shall be the calendar year.
    (2) Any NGEP, insured depository institution, or affiliate that has 
a fiscal year may elect to have the calendar year be its fiscal year for 
purposes of this part.
    (h) Insured depository institution. ``Insured depository 
institution'' has the same meaning as in section 3 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    (i) NGEP. ``NGEP'' means a nongovernmental entity or person.
    (j) Nongovernmental entity or person--(1) General. A 
``nongovernmental entity or person'' is any partnership, association, 
trust, joint venture, joint stock company, corporation, limited 
liability corporation, company, firm, society, other organization, or 
individual.
    (2) Exclusions. A nongovernmental entity or person does not 
include--
    (i) The United States government, a state government, a unit of 
local government (including a county, city, town, township, parish, 
village, or other general-purpose subdivision of a state) or an Indian 
tribe or tribal organization established under Federal, state or Indian 
tribal law (including the Department of Hawaiian Home Lands), or a 
department, agency, or instrumentality of any such entity;
    (ii) A federally-chartered public corporation that receives Federal 
funds appropriated specifically for that corporation;
    (iii) An insured depository institution or affiliate of an insured 
depository institution; or
    (iv) An officer, director, employee, or representative (acting in 
his or her capacity as an officer, director, employee, or 
representative) of an entity listed in paragraphs (j)(2)(i) through 
(iii) of this section.
    (k) Party. The term ``party''. The authority citation for part 405 
continues to read as follows: with respect to a covered agreement means 
each NGEP and each insured depository institution

[[Page 777]]

or affiliate that entered into the agreement.
    (l) Relevant supervisory agency. The ``relevant supervisory agency'' 
for a covered agreement means the appropriate Federal banking agency 
for--
    (1) Each insured depository institution (or subsidiary thereof) that 
is a party to the covered agreement;
    (2) Each insured depository institution (or subsidiary thereof) or 
CRA affiliate that makes payments or loans or provides services that are 
subject to the covered agreement; and
    (3) Any company (other than an insured depository institution or 
subsidiary thereof) that is a party to the covered agreement.
    (m) State savings association. ``State savings association'' has the 
same meaning as in section 3(b)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1813(b)(3)).
    (n) Term of agreement. An agreement that does not have a fixed 
termination date is considered to terminate on the last date on which 
any party to the agreement makes any payment or provides any loan or 
other resources under the agreement, unless the relevant supervisory 
agency for the agreement otherwise notifies each party in writing.



PART 347_INTERNATIONAL BANKING--Table of Contents



  Subpart A_Foreign Banking and Investment by Insured State Nonmember 
                                  Banks

Sec.
347.101  Authority, purpose, and scope.
347.102  Definitions.
347.103  Effect of state law on actions taken under this subpart.
347.104  Insured state nonmember bank investment in foreign 
          organizations.
347.105  Permissible financial activities outside the United States.
347.106  Going concerns.
347.107  Joint ventures.
347.108  Portfolio investments.
347.109  Limitations on indirect investments in nonfinancial 
          organizations.
347.110  Affiliate holdings.
347.111  Underwriting and dealing limits applicable to foreign 
          organizations held by insured state nonmember banks.
347.112  Restrictions applicable to foreign organizations that act as 
          futures commission merchants.
347.113  Restrictions applicable to activities by a foreign organization 
          in the United States.
347.114  Extensions of credit to foreign organizations held by insured 
          state nonmember banks; shares of foreign organizations held in 
          connection with debts previously contracted.
347.115  Permissible activities for a foreign branch of an insured state 
          nonmember bank.
347.116  Recordkeeping and supervision of the foreign activities of 
          insured state nonmember banks.
347.117  General consent.
347.118  Expedited processing.
347.119  Specific consent.
347.120  Computation of investment amounts.
347.121  Requirements for insured state nonmember bank to close a 
          foreign branch.
347.122  Limitations applicable to the authority provided in this 
          subpart.

                         Subpart B_Foreign Banks

347.201  Authority, purpose, and scope.
347.202  Definitions.
347.203  Deposit insurance required for all branches of foreign banks 
          engaged in domestic retail deposit activity in the same state.
347.204  Commitment to be examined and provide information.
347.205  Record maintenance.
347.206  Domestic retail deposit activity requiring deposit insurance by 
          U.S. branch of a foreign bank.
347.207  Disclosure of supervisory information to foreign supervisors.
347.208  Assessment base deductions by insured branch.
347.209  Pledge of assets.
347.210  Asset maintenance.
347.211  Examination of branches of foreign banks.
347.212  FDIC approval to conduct activities that are not permissible 
          for federal branches.
347.213  Establishment or operation of noninsured foreign branch.
347.214  Branch established under section 5 of the International Banking 
          Act.
347.215  Exemptions from deposit insurance requirement.
347.216  Depositor notification.

                     Subpart C_International Lending

347.301  Purpose, authority, and scope.
347.302  Definitions.
347.303  Allocated transfer risk reserve.
347.304  Accounting for fees on international loans.
347.305  Reporting and disclosure of international assets.


[[Page 778]]


    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1813, 1815, 1817, 1819, 1820(d), 1828, 3103, 
3104, 3105, 3108, 3109; Title IX, Publ. L. 98-181, 97 Stat. 1153 (12 
U.S.C. 3901 et seq.).

    Source: 70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005; 70 FR 20704, Apr. 21, 2005, 
unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 347.101  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) This subpart is issued pursuant to section 18(d) and (l) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(d), 1828(l)).
    (b) The rules in subpart A address the FDIC's requirements for 
insured state nonmember bank investments in foreign organizations, 
permissible foreign financial activities, loans or extensions of credit 
to or for the account of foreign organizations, and the FDIC's 
recordkeeping, supervision, and approval requirements. The rules also 
address the permissible activities for foreign branches of insured state 
nonmember banks, as well as the FDIC's requirements for establishing, 
operating, relocating and closing of branches in foreign countries.



Sec. 347.102  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart:
    (a) An affiliate of an insured state nonmember bank means:
    (1) Any entity of which the insured state nonmember bank is a direct 
or indirect subsidiary or which otherwise controls the insured state 
nonmember bank;
    (2) Any organization which is a direct or indirect subsidiary of 
such entity or which is otherwise controlled by such entity; or
    (3) Any other organization that is a direct or indirect subsidiary 
of the insured state nonmember bank or is otherwise controlled by the 
insured state nonmember bank.
    (b) Control means the ability to control in any manner the election 
of a majority of an organization's directors or trustees; or the ability 
to exercise a controlling influence over the management and policies of 
an organization. An insured state nonmember bank is deemed to control an 
organization of which it is a general partner or its affiliate is a 
general partner.
    (c) Domestic means United States.
    (d) Eligible insured state nonmember bank means an eligible 
depository institution as defined in Sec. 303.2(r) of this chapter.
    (e) Equity interest means any ownership interest or rights in an 
organization, whether through an equity security, contribution to 
capital, general or limited partnership interest, debt or warrants 
convertible into ownership interests or rights, loans providing profit 
participation, binding commitments to acquire any such items, or some 
other form of business transaction.
    (f) Equity security means voting or nonvoting shares, stock, 
investment contracts, or other interests representing ownership or 
participation in a company or similar enterprise, as well as any 
instrument convertible to any such interest at the option of the holder 
without payment of substantial additional consideration.
    (g) FRB means the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.
    (h) Foreign bank means an organization that is organized under the 
laws of a foreign country, a territory of the United States, Puerto 
Rico, Guam, American Samoa, or the Virgin Islands that:
    (1) Is recognized as a bank by the bank supervisory or monetary 
authority of the country of its organization or the country in which its 
principal banking operations are located;
    (2) Receives deposits to a substantial extent in the regular course 
of its business; and
    (3) Has the power to accept demand deposits.
    (i) Foreign banking organization means a foreign organization that 
is formed for the sole purpose of either holding shares of a foreign 
bank or performing nominee, fiduciary, or other banking services 
incidental to the activities of a foreign branch or foreign bank 
affiliate of the insured state nonmember bank.
    (j) Foreign branch means an office or place of business located 
outside the United States, its territories, Puerto Rico, Guam, American 
Samoa, the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, or the Virgin 
Islands, at which banking operations are conducted, but does not include 
a representative office.

[[Page 779]]

    (k) Foreign country means any country other than the United States 
and includes any territory, dependency, or possession of any such 
country or of the United States.
    (l) Foreign organization means an organization that is organized 
under the laws of a foreign country.
    (m) Insured state nonmember bank or bank means a state bank, as 
defined by Sec. 3(a)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1813(a)(2)), whose deposits are insured by the FDIC and that is not a 
member of the Federal Reserve System.
    (n) Indirectly means investments held or activities conducted by a 
subsidiary of an organization.
    (o) Investment grade means a security that is rated in one of the 
four highest categories by:
    (1) Two or more NRSROs; or
    (2) One NRSRO if the security is rated by only one NRSRO.
    (p) Loan or extension of credit means all direct and indirect 
advances of funds to a person, government, or entity made on the basis 
of any obligation of that person, government, or entity to repay funds.
    (q) Organization or entity means a corporation, partnership, 
association, bank, or other similar entity.
    (r) NRSRO means a nationally recognized statistical rating 
organization as designated by the Securities and Exchange Commission.
    (s) Representative office means an office that engages solely in 
representative functions such as soliciting new business for its home 
office or acting as liaison between the home office and local customers, 
but which has no authority to make business or contracting decisions 
other than those relating to the personnel and premises of the 
representative office.
    (t) Subsidiary means any organization more than 50 percent of the 
voting equity interests of which are directly or indirectly held by 
another organization.
    (u) Tier 1 capital means Tier 1 capital as defined in Sec. 325.2 of 
this chapter or Sec. 324.2 of this chapter, as applicable.
    (v) Well capitalized means well capitalized as defined in 
Sec. 325.103 of this chapter or Sec. 324.403 of this chapter, as 
applicable.

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005, as amended at 78 FR 55595, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 347.103  Effect of state law on actions taken under this subpart.

    A bank may acquire and retain equity interests in a foreign 
organization or establish a foreign branch, subject to the requirements 
of this subpart, if it is authorized to do so by the law of the state in 
which the bank is chartered.



Sec. 347.104  Insured state nonmember bank investments in foreign
organizations.

    (a) Investment in foreign banks or foreign banking organizations. A 
bank may directly or indirectly acquire and retain equity interests in a 
foreign bank or foreign banking organization.
    (b) Investment in other foreign organizations. A bank may only:
    (1) acquire and retain equity interests in foreign organizations, 
other than foreign banks or foreign banking organizations in amounts of 
50 percent or less of the foreign organization's voting equity 
interests, if the equity interest is held through a domestic or foreign 
subsidiary; and
    (2) The bank meets its minimum capital requirements.



Sec. 347.105  Permissible financial activities outside the 
United States.

    (a) Limitation on authorized activities. A bank may not directly or 
indirectly acquire or hold equity interests in a foreign organization 
that will result in the bank and its affiliates:
    (1) Holding more than 50 percent, in the aggregate, of the voting 
equity interest in such foreign organization; or
    (2) Controlling such foreign organization, unless the activities of 
a foreign organization are limited to those authorized under paragraph 
(b) of this section.
    (b) Authorized activities. The following financial activities are 
authorized outside the United States:
    (1) Commercial and other banking activities.
    (2) Financing, including commercial financing, consumer financing, 
mortgage banking, and factoring, subject to

[[Page 780]]

compliance with any attendant restrictions contained in 12 CFR 
225.28(b).
    (3) Leasing real or personal property, acting as agent, broker or 
advisor in leasing real or personal property, subject to compliance with 
any attendant restrictions in 12 CFR 225.28(b).
    (4) Acting as a fiduciary, subject to compliance with any attendant 
restrictions in 12 CFR 225.28(b).
    (5) Underwriting credit life, credit accident and credit health 
insurance.
    (6) Performing services for other direct or indirect operations of a 
domestic banking organization, including representative functions, sale 
of long-term debt, name saving, liquidating assets acquired to prevent 
loss on a debt previously contracted in good faith, and other activities 
that are permissible for a bank holding company under sections 
4(a)(2)(A) and 4(c)(1)(C) of the Bank Holding Company Act.
    (7) Holding the premises of a branch of an Edge corporation or 
insured state nonmember bank or the premises of a direct or indirect 
subsidiary, or holding or leasing the residence of an officer or 
employee of a branch or a subsidiary.
    (8) Providing investment, financial, or economic services, subject 
to compliance with any attendant restrictions in 12 CFR 225.28(b).
    (9) General insurance agency and brokerage.
    (10) Data processing.
    (11) Organizing, sponsoring, and managing a mutual fund if the 
fund's shares are not sold or distributed in the United States or to 
U.S. residents and the fund does not exercise management control over 
the firms in which it invests.
    (12) Performing management consulting services, provided that such 
services when rendered with respect to the domestic market must be 
restricted to the initial entry.
    (13) Underwriting, distributing, and dealing in debt securities 
outside the United States.
    (14) With the prior approval of the FDIC under section 347.119(d), 
underwriting, distributing, and dealing in equity securities outside the 
United States.
    (15) Operating a travel agency in connection with financial services 
offered outside the United States by the bank or others.
    (16) Providing futures commission merchant services, subject to 
compliance with any attendant restrictions in 12 CFR 225.28(b).
    (17) Engaging in activities that the FRB has determined in 
Regulation Y (12 CFR 225.28(b)) are closely related to banking under 
section 4(c)(8) of the Bank Holding Company Act.
    (18) Engaging in other activities, with the prior approval of the 
FDIC.
    (c) Limitation on activities authorized under Regulation Y. If a 
bank relies solely on the cross-reference to Regulation Y contained in 
paragraph (b)(17) of this section as authority to engage in an activity, 
compliance with any attendant restrictions on the activity that are 
contained in 12 CFR 225.28(b) is required.
    (d) Approval of other activities. Activities that are not 
specifically authorized by this section, but that are authorized by 12 
CFR 211.10 or FRB interpretations of activities authorized by that 
section, may be authorized by specific consent of the FDIC on an 
individual basis and upon such terms and conditions as the FDIC may 
consider appropriate. Activities that will be engaged in as principal 
(defined by reference to section 362.1(b) of this chapter), and that are 
not authorized by 12 CFR 211.10 or FRB interpretations of activities 
authorized under that section, must satisfy the requirements of part 362 
of this chapter and be approved by the FDIC under this part as well as 
part 362 of this chapter.



Sec. 347.106  Going concerns.

    Going concerns. If a bank acquires an equity interest in a foreign 
organization that is a going concern, no more than 5 percent of either 
the consolidated assets or revenues of the foreign organization may be 
attributable to activities that are not permissible under 
Sec. 347.105(b).



Sec. 347.107  Joint ventures.

    (a) Joint ventures. If a bank, directly or indirectly, acquires or 
holds an equity interest in a foreign organization that is a joint 
venture, and the bank or its affiliates do not control the foreign 
organization, no more than 10 percent

[[Page 781]]

of either the consolidated assets or revenues of the foreign 
organization may be attributable to activities that are not permissible 
under Sec. 347.105(b).
    (b) Joint venture defined. For purposes of this section, the term 
``joint venture'' means any organization in which 20 percent or more but 
not in excess of 50 percent of the voting equity interests, in the 
aggregate, are directly or indirectly held by a bank or its affiliates.



Sec. 347.108  Portfolio investments.

    (a) Portfolio investments. If a bank, directly or indirectly, 
acquires or holds an equity interest in a foreign organization as a 
portfolio investment and the foreign organization is not controlled, 
directly or indirectly, by the bank or its affiliates:
    (1) No more than 10 percent of either the consolidated assets or 
revenues of the foreign organization may be attributable to activities 
that are not permissible under Sec. 347.105(b); and
    (2) Any loans or extensions of credit made by the bank and its 
affiliates to the foreign organization must be on substantially the same 
terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at 
the same time for comparable transactions between the bank or its 
affiliates and nonaffiliated organizations.
    (b) Portfolio investment defined. For purposes of this section, the 
term ``portfolio investment'' means an investment in an organization in 
which less than 20 percent of the voting equity interests, in the 
aggregate, are directly or indirectly held by a bank or its affiliates.



Sec. 347.109  Limitations on indirect investments in nonfinancial
foreign organizations.

    (a) A bank may, through a subsidiary authorized by Secs. 347.105 or 
347.106, or an Edge corporation if also authorized by the FRB, acquire 
and hold equity interests in foreign organizations that are not foreign 
banks or foreign banking organizations and that engage generally in 
activities beyond those listed in Sec. 347.105(b), subject to the 
following:
    (1) The amount of the investment does not exceed 15 percent of the 
bank's Tier 1 capital;
    (2) The aggregate holding of voting equity interests of one foreign 
organization by the bank and its affiliates must be less than:
    (i) 20 percent of the foreign organization's voting equity 
interests; and
    (ii) 40 percent of the foreign organization's voting and nonvoting 
equity interests;
    (b) The bank or its affiliates must not otherwise control the 
foreign organization; and
    (c) Loans or extensions of credit made by the bank and its 
affiliates to the foreign organization must be on substantially the same 
terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at 
the same time for comparable transactions between the bank or its 
affiliates and nonaffiliated organizations.



Sec. 347.110  Affiliate holdings.

    References in Secs. 347.107, 347.108, and 347.109 to equity 
interests of foreign organizations held by an affiliate of a bank 
include equity interests held in connection with an underwriting or for 
distribution or dealing by an affiliate permitted to do so by 
Secs. 362.8 or 362.18 of this chapter or section 4(c)(8) of the Bank 
Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(8)).



Sec. 347.111  Underwriting and dealing limits applicable to foreign
organizations held by insured state nonmember banks.

    A bank that holds an equity interest in one or more foreign 
organizations which underwrite, deal, or distribute equity securities 
outside the United States as authorized by Sec. 347.105(b)(14) is 
subject to the following limitations:
    (a) Underwriting commitment limits. (1) The aggregate underwriting 
commitments by the foreign organizations for the equity securities of a 
single entity, taken together with underwriting commitments by any 
affiliate of the bank under the authority of 12 CFR 211.10(b), may not 
exceed the lesser of $60 million or 25 percent of the bank's Tier 1 
capital, except as otherwise provided in this paragraph.
    (2) Underwriting commitments in excess of this limit must be either:
    (i) Covered by binding commitments from subunderwriters or 
purchasers; or

[[Page 782]]

    (ii) Deducted from the capital of the bank, with at least 50 percent 
of the deduction being taken from Tier 1 capital, with the bank 
remaining well capitalized after this deduction.
    (b) Distribution and dealing limits. The equity securities of any 
single entity held for distribution or dealing by the foreign 
organizations, taken together with equity securities held for 
distribution or dealing by any affiliate of the bank under the authority 
of 12 CFR 211.10:
    (1) May not exceed the lesser of $30 million or 5 percent of the 
bank's Tier 1 capital, subject to the following:
    (i) Any equity securities acquired pursuant to any underwriting 
commitment extending up to 90 days after the payment date for the 
underwriting may be excluded from this limit;
    (ii) Any equity securities of the entity held under the authority of 
Secs. 347.105 through 347.109 or 12 CFR 211.10 for purposes other than 
distribution or dealing must be included in this limit; and
    (iii) Up to 75 percent of the position in an equity security may be 
reduced by netting long and short positions in the same security, or 
offsetting cash positions against derivative instruments referenced to 
the same security so long as the derivatives are part of a prudent 
hedging strategy; and
    (2) Must be included in calculating the general consent limits under 
Sec. 347.117(b)(3) if the bank relies on the general consent provisions 
as authority to acquire equity interests of the same foreign entity for 
investment or trading.
    (c) Additional distribution and dealing limits. With the exception 
of equity securities acquired pursuant to any underwriting commitment 
extending up to 90 days after the payment date for the underwriting, 
equity securities of a single entity held for distribution or dealing by 
all affiliates of the bank (this includes shares held in connection with 
an underwriting or for distribution or dealing by an affiliate permitted 
to do so by Secs. 362.8 or 362.18 of this chapter or section 4(c)(8) of 
the Bank Holding Company Act), combined with any equity interests held 
for investment or trading purposes by all affiliates of the bank, must 
conform to the limits of Secs. 347.105 through 347.109.
    (d) Combined limits. The aggregate of the following may not exceed 
25 percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital:
    (1) All equity interests of foreign organizations held for 
investment or trading under Sec. 347.109 or by an affiliate of the bank 
under the corresponding paragraph of 12 CFR 211.10.
    (2) All underwriting commitments under paragraph (a) of this 
section, taken together with all underwriting commitments by any 
affiliate of the bank under the authority of 12 CFR 211.10, after 
excluding the amount of any underwriting commitment:
    (i) Covered by binding commitments from subunderwriters or 
purchasers under paragraph (a)(1) of this section or the comparable 
provision of 12 CFR 211.10; or
    (ii) Already deducted from the bank's capital under paragraph (a)(2) 
of this section, or the appropriate affiliate's capital under the 
comparable provisions of 12 CFR 211.10; and
    (3) All equity securities held for distribution or dealing under 
paragraph (b) of this section, taken together with all equity securities 
held for distribution or dealing by any affiliate of the bank under the 
authority of 12 CFR 211.10, after reducing by up to 75 percent the 
position in any equity security by netting and offset, as permitted by 
paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section or the comparable provision of 12 
CFR 211.10.



Sec. 347.112  Restrictions applicable to foreign organizations that
act as futures commission merchants.

    (a) If a bank acquires or retains an equity interest in a foreign 
organization that acts as a futures commission merchant pursuant to 
Sec. 347.105(b)(16), the foreign organization may not be a member of an 
exchange or clearing association that requires members to guarantee or 
otherwise contract to cover losses suffered by other members unless the:
    (1) Foreign organization's liability does not exceed two percent of 
the bank's Tier 1 capital, or
    (2) Bank has obtained the prior approval of the FDIC under 
Sec. 347.120(d).
    (b) [Reserved]

[[Page 783]]



Sec. 347.113  Restrictions applicable to activities by a foreign
organization in the United States.

    (a) A bank, acting under the authority provided in this subpart, may 
not directly or indirectly hold:
    (1) Equity interests of any foreign organization that engages in the 
general business of buying or selling goods, wares, merchandise, or 
commodities in the United States; or
    (2) More than 5 percent of the equity interests of any foreign 
organization that engages in activities in the United States unless any 
activities in which the foreign organization engages in the United 
States are incidental to its international or foreign business.
    (b) For purposes of this section:
    (1) A foreign organization is not engaged in any business or 
activities in the United States unless it maintains an office in the 
United States other than a representative office.
    (2) The following activities are incidental to international or 
foreign business:
    (i) Activities that are permissible for an Edge corporation in the 
United States under 12 CFR 211.6; or
    (ii) Other activities approved by the FDIC.



Sec. 347.114  Extensions of credit to foreign organizations held
by insured state nonmember banks; shares of foreign organizations
held in connection with debts previously contracted.

    (a) Loans or extensions of credit. A bank that directly or 
indirectly holds equity interests in a foreign organization pursuant to 
the authority of this subpart may make loans or extensions of credit to 
or for the accounts of the organization without regard to the provisions 
of section 18(j) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(j)).
    (b) Debts previously contracted. Equity interests acquired to 
prevent a loss upon a debt previously contracted in good faith are not 
subject to the limitations or procedures of this subpart; however, they 
must be disposed of promptly but in no event later than two years after 
their acquisition, unless the FDIC authorizes retention for a longer 
period.



Sec. 347.115  Permissible activities for a foreign branch of an
insured state nonmember bank.

    In addition to its general banking powers and if permitted by the 
law of the state in which the bank is chartered, a foreign branch of a 
bank may conduct the following activities to the extent that they are 
consistent with banking practices in a foreign country where the bank 
maintains a branch:
    (a) Guarantees. Guarantee debts, or otherwise agree to make payments 
on the occurrence of readily ascertainable events including, without 
limitation, nonpayment of taxes, rentals, customs duties, or costs of 
transport and loss or nonconformance of shipping documents, if:
    (1) The guarantee or agreement specifies a maximum monetary 
liability; and
    (2) To the extent the guarantee or agreement is not subject to a 
separate amount limit under state or federal law, the amount of the 
guarantee or agreement is combined with loans and other obligations for 
purposes of applying any legal lending limits.
    (b) Government obligations. Engage in the following types of 
transactions with respect to the obligations of foreign countries, so 
long as aggregate investments, securities held in connection with 
distribution and dealing, and underwriting commitments do not exceed ten 
percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital:
    (1) Underwrite, distribute and deal, invest in, or trade obligations 
of:
    (i) The national government of the country in which the branch is 
located or its political subdivisions; and
    (ii) An agency or instrumentality of such national government if 
supported by the taxing authority, guarantee, or full faith and credit 
of the national government.
    (2) Underwrite, distribute and deal, invest in or trade obligations 
\1\ rated as investment grade of:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ If the obligation is an equity interest, it must be held through 
a subsidiary of the foreign branch and the insured state nonmember bank 
must meet its minimum capital requirements.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 784]]

    (i) The national government of any foreign country or its political 
subdivisions, to the extent permissible under the law of the issuing 
foreign country; and
    (ii) An agency or instrumentality of the national government of any 
foreign country to the extent permissible under the law of the issuing 
foreign country, if supported by the taxing authority, guarantee, or 
full faith and credit of the national government.
    (c) Local investments. (1) Acquire and hold local investments in:
    (i) Equity securities of the central bank, clearinghouses, 
governmental entities, and government sponsored development banks of the 
country in which the branch is located;
    (ii) Other debt securities eligible to meet local reserve or similar 
requirements; and
    (iii) Shares of automated electronic payment networks, professional 
societies, schools, and similar entities necessary to the business of 
the branch.
    (2) Aggregate local investments (other than those required by the 
law of the foreign country or permissible under section 5136 of the 
Revised Statutes (12 U.S.C. 24 (Seventh)) by all the bank's branches in 
a single foreign country must not exceed 1 percent of the total deposits 
in all the bank's branches in that country as reported in the preceding 
year-end Report of Income and Condition (Call Report): \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ If a branch has recently been acquired by the bank and the 
branch was not previously required to file a Call Report, branch 
deposits as of the acquisition date must be used.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) Insurance. Act as an insurance agent or broker.
    (e) Employee benefits program. Pay to an employee of a branch, as 
part of an employee benefits program, a greater rate of interest than 
that paid to other depositors of the branch.
    (f) Repurchase agreements. Engage in repurchase agreements involving 
securities and commodities that are the functional equivalents of 
extensions of credit.
    (g) Other activities. Engage in other activities, with the prior 
approval of the FDIC.
    (h) Approval of other activities. Activities that are not 
specifically authorized by this section, but that are authorized by 12 
CFR 211.4 or FRB interpretations of activities authorized by that 
section, may be authorized by specific consent of the FDIC on an 
individual basis and upon such terms and conditions as the FDIC may 
consider appropriate. Activities that will be engaged in as principal 
(defined by reference to section 362.1(b) of this chapter), and that are 
not authorized by 12 CFR 211.4 or FRB interpretations of activities 
authorized under that section, must satisfy the requirements of part 362 
of this chapter and be approved by the FDIC under this part as well as 
part 362 of this chapter.



Sec. 347.116  Recordkeeping and supervision of foreign activities 
of insured state nonmember banks.

    (a) Records, controls and reports. A bank with any foreign branch, 
any investment in a foreign organization of 20 percent or more of the 
organization's voting equity interests, or control of a foreign 
organization must maintain a system of records, controls and reports 
that, at minimum, provide for the following:
    (1) Risk assets. To permit assessment of exposure to loss, 
information furnished or available to the main office should be 
sufficient to permit periodic and systematic appraisals of the quality 
of risk assets, including loans and other extensions of credit. Coverage 
should extend to a substantial proportion of the risk assets in the 
branch or foreign organization, and include the status of all large 
credit lines and of credits to customers also borrowing from other 
offices or affiliates of the bank. Appropriate information on risk 
assets may include:
    (i) A recent financial statement of the borrower or obligee and 
current information on the borrower's or obligee's financial condition;
    (ii) Terms, conditions, and collateral;
    (iii) Data on any guarantors;
    (iv) Payment history; and
    (v) Status of corrective measures employed.
    (2) Liquidity. To enable assessment of local management's ability to 
meet its obligations from available resources, reports should identify 
the general sources and character of the deposits, borrowing, and other 
funding sources

[[Page 785]]

employed in the branch or foreign organization with special reference to 
their terms and volatility. Information should be available on sources 
of liquidity--cash, balances with banks, marketable securities, and 
repayment flows--such as will reveal their accessibility in time and any 
risk elements involved.
    (3) Contingencies. Data on the volume and nature of contingent items 
such as loan commitments and guarantees or their equivalents that permit 
analysis of potential risk exposure and liquidity requirements.
    (4) Controls. Reports on the internal and external audits of the 
branch or foreign organization in sufficient detail to permit 
determination of conformance to auditing guidelines. Appropriate audit 
reports may include coverage of:
    (i) Verification and identification of entries on financial 
statements;
    (ii) Income and expense accounts, including descriptions of 
significant chargeoffs and recoveries;
    (iii) Operations and dual-control procedures and other internal 
controls;
    (iv) Conformance to head office guidelines on loans, deposits, 
foreign exchange activities, accounting procedures in compliance with 
applicable accounting standards, and discretionary authority of local 
management;
    (v) Compliance with local laws and regulations; and
    (vi) Compliance with applicable U.S. laws and regulations.
    (b) Availability of information to examiners; reports. (1) 
Information about foreign branches or foreign organizations must be made 
available to the FDIC by the bank for examination and other supervisory 
purposes.
    (2) The FDIC may from time to time require a bank to make and submit 
such reports and information as may be necessary to implement and 
enforce the provisions of this subpart, and the bank shall submit an 
annual report of condition for each foreign branch pursuant to 
instructions provided by the FDIC.



Sec. 347.117  General consent.

    (a) General consent to establish or relocate a foreign branch. 
General consent of the FDIC is granted, subject to the written 
notification requirement contained in section 303.182(a) and consistent 
with the requirements of this subpart, for an:
    (1) Eligible bank to establish a foreign branch conducting 
activities authorized by section 347.115 of this section in any foreign 
country in which:
    (i) The bank already operates one or more foreign branches or 
foreign bank subsidiaries;
    (ii) The bank's holding company operates a foreign bank subsidiary; 
or
    (iii) An affiliated bank or Edge or Agreement corporation operates 
one or more foreign branches or foreign bank subsidiaries.
    (2) Insured state nonmember bank to relocate an existing foreign 
branch within a foreign country.
    (b) General consent to invest in a foreign organization. General 
consent of the FDIC is granted, subject to the written notification 
requirement contained in section 303.183(a) (unless no notification is 
required because the investment is acquired for trading purposes) and 
consistent with the requirements of this subpart, for an eligible bank 
to make investments in foreign organizations, directly or indirectly, 
if:
    (1) The bank operates at least one foreign bank subsidiary or 
foreign branch, an affiliated bank or Edge or Agreement corporation 
operates at least one foreign bank subsidiary or foreign branch, or the 
bank's holding company operates at least one foreign bank subsidiary in 
the country where the foreign organization will be located;
    (2) In any instance where the bank and its affiliates will hold 20 
percent or more of the foreign organization's voting equity interests or 
control the foreign organization, at least one state nonmember bank has 
a foreign bank subsidiary or foreign branch (other than a shell branch) 
in the country where the foreign organization will be located; \3\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ A list of these countries can be obtained from the FDIC's 
Internet Web Site at http://www.fdic.gov.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) The investment is within one of the following limits:
    (i) The investment is acquired at net asset value from an affiliate;

[[Page 786]]

    (ii) The investment is a reinvestment of cash dividends received 
from the same foreign organization during the preceding 12 months; or
    (iii) The total investment, directly or indirectly, in a single 
foreign organization in any transaction or series of transactions during 
a twelve-month period does not exceed 2 percent of the bank's Tier 1 
capital, and such investments in all foreign organizations in the 
aggregate do not exceed:
    (A) 5 percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital during a 12-month period; 
and
    (B) Up to an additional 5 percent of the bank's Tier 1 capital if 
the investments are acquired for trading purposes.



Sec. 347.118  Expedited processing.

    (a) Expedited processing of branch applications. An eligible bank 
may establish a foreign branch conducting activities authorized by 
Sec. 347.115 in an additional foreign country, after complying with the 
expedited processing requirements contained in Sec. 303.182(b) and 
(c)(1), if any of the following are located in two or more foreign 
countries:
    (1) Foreign branches or foreign bank subsidiaries of the eligible 
bank;
    (2) Foreign branches or foreign bank subsidiaries of banks and Edge 
or Agreement corporations affiliated with the eligible bank; and
    (3) Foreign bank subsidiaries of the eligible bank's holding 
company.
    (b) Expedited processing of applications for investment in foreign 
organizations. An investment that does not qualify for general consent 
but is otherwise in conformity with the limits and requirements of this 
subpart may be made 45 days after an eligible bank files a substantially 
complete application with the FDIC in compliance with the expedited 
processing requirements contained in Sec. 303.183(b) and (c)(1), or 
within such earlier time as authorized by the FDIC.



Sec. 347.119  Specific consent.

    General consent and expedited processing under this subpart do not 
apply in the following circumstances:
    (a) Limitation on access to supervisory information in foreign 
country. (1) Applicable law or practice in the foreign country where the 
foreign organization or foreign branch would be located would limit the 
FDIC's access to information for supervisory purposes; and
    (i) A bank would hold 20 percent or more of the voting equity 
interests of a foreign organization or control such organization as a 
result of a foreign investment; or
    (ii) A bank would be establishing a foreign branch.
    (b) World Heritage site. A foreign branch of a bank would be located 
on a site on the World Heritage List or on the foreign country's 
equivalent of the National Register of Historic Places, in accordance 
with section 403 of the National Historic Preservation Act Amendments of 
1980 (16 U.S.C. 470a-2).
    (c) Modification or suspension of general consent or expedited 
processing. The FDIC at any time notifies the bank that the FDIC is 
modifying or suspending its general consent or expedited processing 
procedure.
    (d) Specific consent. Direct or indirect investments in or 
activities of foreign organizations by banks, the establishment of 
foreign branches or issues regarding the types or amounts of activity 
that can be engaged in by foreign branches, which are not authorized 
under Secs. 347.117 or 347.118 require prior review and specific consent 
of the FDIC.



Sec. 347.120  Computation of investment amounts.

    In computing the amount that may be invested in any foreign 
organization under Secs. 347.117 through 347.119, any investments held 
by an affiliate of a bank must be included.



Sec. 347.121  Requirements for insured state nonmember bank 
to close a foreign branch.

    A bank must comply with the written notification requirement 
contained in Sec. 303.182(d) when it closes a foreign branch.



Sec. 347.122  Limitations applicable to the authority provided
in this subpart.

    The FDIC may impose such conditions on authority granted in this 
subpart as it considers appropriate. If a bank is unable or fails to 
comply with the requirements of this subpart or any

[[Page 787]]

conditions imposed by the FDIC regarding transactions under this 
subpart, the FDIC may require termination of any activities or 
divestiture of investments permitted under this subpart after giving the 
bank notice and a reasonable opportunity to be heard on the matter.



                         Subpart B_Foreign Banks



Sec. 347.201  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) This subpart is issued pursuant to sections 5(c) and 10(b)(4) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act)(12 U.S.C. 1815(c) and 
1820(b)(4)) and sections 6, 7, and 15 of the International Banking Act 
of 1978 (IBA)(12 U.S.C. 3104, 3105, and 3109).
    (b) This subpart implements the insured branch asset pledge and 
examination commitment requirement for foreign banks in the FDI Act. It 
also implements the deposit insurance, permissible activity, and cross-
border cooperation provisions of the IBA regarding the FDIC. Sections 
347.203-347.211 apply to state and federal branches whose deposits are 
insured. Sections 347.204 and 347.207 are applicable to depository 
institution subsidiaries of a foreign bank. Section 347.212 applies to 
insured state branches and Secs. 347.213-347.216 apply to state branches 
whose deposits are not insured by the FDIC.



Sec. 347.202  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Affiliate means any entity that controls, is controlled by, or 
is under common control with another entity. An entity shall be deemed 
to ``control'' another entity if the entity directly or indirectly owns, 
controls, or has the power to vote 25 percent or more of any class of 
voting securities of the other entity or controls in any manner the 
election of a majority of the directors or trustees of the other entity.
    (b) Branch means any office or place of business of a foreign bank 
located in any state of the United States at which deposits are 
received. The term does not include any office or place of business 
deemed by the state licensing authority or the Comptroller of the 
Currency to be an agency.
    (c) Deposit has the same meaning as that term in section 3(l) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(l)).
    (d) Depository means any insured state bank, national bank, or 
insured branch.
    (e) Domestic retail deposit activity means the acceptance by a 
Federal or State branch of any initial deposit of less than an amount 
equal to the standard maximum deposit insurance amount (``SMDIA'').
    (f) Federal branch means a branch of a foreign bank established and 
operating under the provisions of section 4 of the International Banking 
Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3102).
    (g) Foreign bank means any company organized under the laws of a 
foreign country, any territory of the United States, Puerto Rico, Guam, 
American Samoa, the Northern Mariana Islands, or the Virgin Islands, 
which engages in the business of banking. The term includes foreign 
commercial banks, foreign merchant banks and other foreign institutions 
that engage in banking activities usual in connection with the business 
of banking in the countries where such foreign institutions are 
organized and operating. Except as otherwise specifically provided by 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, banks organized under the 
laws of a foreign country, any territory of the United States, Puerto 
Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the Northern Mariana Islands, or the Virgin 
Islands which are insured banks other than by reason of having an 
insured branch are not considered to be foreign banks for purposes of 
Secs. 347.204, 347.205, 347.209, and 347.210.
    (h) Foreign business means any entity including, but not limited to, 
a corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship, association, foundation 
or trust, which is organized under the laws of a foreign country or any 
United States entity which is owned or controlled by an entity which is 
organized under the laws of a foreign country or a foreign national.
    (i) Foreign country means any country other than the United States 
and includes any colony, dependency or possession of any such country.

[[Page 788]]

    (j) FRB means the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.
    (k) Home state of a foreign bank means the state so determined by 
the election of the foreign bank, or in default of such election, by the 
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.
    (l) Immediate family member of a natural person means the spouse, 
father, mother, brother, sister, son or daughter of that natural person.
    (m) Initial deposit means the first deposit transaction between a 
depositor and the branch where there is no existing deposit 
relationship. The initial deposit may be placed into different deposit 
accounts or into different kinds of deposit accounts, such as demand, 
savings or time. Deposit accounts that are held by a depositor in the 
same right and capacity may be added together for the purposes of 
determining the dollar amount of the initial deposit.
    (n) Insured bank means any bank, including a foreign bank with an 
insured branch, the deposits of which are insured in accordance with the 
provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (o) Insured branch means a branch of a foreign bank any deposits of 
which branch are insured in accordance with the provisions of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (p) Large United States business means any entity including, but not 
limited to, a corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship, 
association, foundation or trust which is organized under the laws of 
the United States or any state thereof, and:
    (1) Whose securities are registered on a national securities 
exchange or quoted on the National Association of Securities Dealers 
Automated Quotation System; or
    (2) Has annual gross revenues in excess of $1,000,000 for the fiscal 
year immediately preceding the initial deposit.
    (q) A majority owned subsidiary means a company the voting stock of 
which is more than 50 percent owned or controlled by another company.
    (r) Noninsured branch means a branch of a foreign bank deposits of 
which branch are not insured in accordance with the provisions of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (s) OCC means the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency.
    (t) Person means an individual, bank, corporation, partnership, 
trust, association, foundation, joint venture, pool, syndicate, sole 
proprietorship, unincorporated organization, or any other form of 
entity.
    (u) Significant risk to the deposit insurance fund shall be 
understood to be present whenever there is a high probability that the 
Deposit Insurance Fund administered by the FDIC may suffer a loss.
    (v) Standard maximum deposit insurance amount, referred to as the 
``SMDIA'' hereafter, means $250,000 adjusted pursuant to subparagraph 
(F) of section 11(a)(1) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(a)(1)(F)).
    (w) State means any state of the United States or the District of 
Columbia.
    (x) State branch means a branch of a foreign bank established and 
operating under the laws of any state.
    (y) Wholly owned subsidiary means a company the voting stock of 
which is 100 percent owned or controlled by another company except for a 
nominal number of directors' shares.

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005; 70 FR 20704, Apr. 21, 2005, as amended at 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006; 74 FR 47718, Sept. 17, 2009; 75 FR 49365, Aug. 
13, 2010]



Sec. 347.203  Deposit insurance required for all branches of foreign 
banks engaged in domestic retail deposit activity in the same State.

    The FDIC will not insure deposits in any branch of a foreign bank 
unless the foreign bank agrees that every branch established or operated 
by the foreign bank in the same state that engages in domestic retail 
deposit activity will be an insured branch.



Sec. 347.204  Commitment to be examined and provide information.

    (a) In connection with an application for deposit insurance for a 
U.S. branch or depository institution subsidiary of a foreign bank that 
has been determined to be subject to comprehensive consolidated 
supervision by the appropriate Federal banking agency, as defined in 
section 3(q) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(q)), the foreign bank shall

[[Page 789]]

provide binding written commitments (including a consent to U.S. 
jurisdiction and designation of agent for service, acceptable to the 
FDIC) to the following terms:
    (1) The FDIC will be provided with any information about the foreign 
bank and its affiliates located outside of the United States that the 
FDIC requests to determine:
    (i) The relationship between the U.S. branch or depository 
institution subsidiary and its affiliates; and
    (ii) The effect of such relationship on such U.S. branch or 
depository institution subsidiary;
    (2) The FDIC will be allowed to examine the affairs of any office, 
agency, branch or affiliate of the foreign bank located in the United 
States and will be provided any information requested to determine:
    (i) The relationship between the U.S. branch or depository 
institution subsidiary and such offices, agencies, branches or 
affiliates; and
    (ii) The effect of such relationship on such U.S. branch or 
depository institution subsidiary.
    (3) The FDIC will not process a deposit insurance application for 
any U.S. branch or depository institution subsidiary of a foreign bank 
if the foreign bank fails to provide the written commitments, consent to 
U.S. jurisdiction, and designation of agent for service required by this 
section.
    (b) The FDIC will consider the existence and extent of any 
prohibition or restrictions, if any, on its ability to utilize the 
commitments, consent to U.S. jurisdiction, and designation of agent for 
service required by this section, in determining whether to grant or 
deny a deposit insurance application for the U.S. branch or depository 
institution subsidiary of the foreign bank. In addition, the FDIC may 
consider any additional assurances or commitments provided by the 
foreign bank, including that it will cooperate and assist the FDIC, 
without limitation, by seeking to obtain waivers and exemptions from 
applicable confidentiality or secrecy restrictions or requirements to 
enable the foreign bank or its affiliates to make information about the 
foreign bank and its affiliates located outside of the United States 
available to the FDIC for review.
    (c) The foreign bank's commitments, consent to U.S. jurisdiction, 
and designation of agent for service shall be signed by an officer of 
the foreign bank who has been so authorized by the foreign bank's board 
of directors and in all instances will be executed in a manner 
acceptable to the FDIC and shall be included with the branch or 
depository institution application for insurance. Any documents that are 
not in English shall be accompanied by an English translation.



Sec. 347.205  Record maintenance.

    The records of each insured branch shall be kept as though it were a 
separate entity, with its assets and liabilities separate from the other 
operations of the head office, other branches or agencies of the foreign 
bank and its subsidiaries or affiliates. Each insured branch must keep a 
set of accounts and records in the words and figures of the English 
language that accurately reflects the business transactions of the 
insured branch on a daily basis. A foreign bank that has more than one 
insured branch in a state may treat such insured branches as one entity 
for record-keeping purposes and may designate one branch to maintain 
records for all the branches in the state.



Sec. 347.206  Domestic retail deposit activity requiring deposit
insurance by U.S. branch of a foreign bank.

    (a) Domestic retail deposit activity. To initiate or conduct 
domestic retail deposit activity requiring deposit insurance protection 
in any state after December 19, 1991, a foreign bank must establish one 
or more insured U.S. bank subsidiaries for that purpose.
    (b) Exception. Paragraph (a) of this section does not apply to any 
bank organized under the laws of any territory of the United States, 
Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, or the Virgin Islands the deposits of 
which are insured by the FDIC pursuant to the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act.
    (c) Grandfathered insured branches. Domestic retail accounts with 
balances of less than an amount equal to the SMDIA that require deposit 
insurance

[[Page 790]]

protection may be accepted or maintained in an insured branch of a 
foreign bank only if such branch was an insured branch on December 19, 
1991
    (d) Change in ownership of grandfathered insured branch. The 
grandfathered status of an insured branch may not be transferred, except 
in certain merger and acquisition transactions that the FDIC determines 
are not designed, or motivated by the desire, to avoid compliance with 
section 6(d)(1) of the International Banking Act (12 U.S.C. 3104(d)(1)).

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005, as amended at 74 FR 47718, Sept. 17, 2009]



Sec. 347.207  Disclosure of supervisory information to foreign
supervisors.

    (a) Disclosure by the FDIC. The FDIC may disclose information 
obtained in the course of exercising its supervisory or examination 
authority to a foreign bank regulatory or supervisory authority, if the 
FDIC determines that disclosure is appropriate for bank supervisory or 
regulatory purposes and will not prejudice the interests of the United 
States.
    (b) Confidentiality. Before making any disclosure of information 
pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, the FDIC will obtain, to the 
extent necessary, the agreement of the foreign bank regulatory or 
supervisory authority to maintain the confidentiality of such 
information to the extent possible under applicable law. The disclosure 
or transfer of information to a foreign bank regulatory or supervisory 
authority under this section will not waive any privilege applicable to 
the information that is disclosed or transferred.



Sec. 347.208  Assessment base deductions by insured branch.

    Deposits in an insured branch to the credit of the foreign bank or 
any of its offices, branches, agencies, or wholly owned subsidiaries may 
be deducted from the assessment base of the insured branch.



Sec. 347.209  Pledge of assets.

    (a) Purpose. A foreign bank that has an insured branch must pledge 
assets for the benefit of the FDIC or its designee(s). Whenever the FDIC 
is obligated under section 11(f) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1821(f)) to pay the insured deposits of an insured branch, 
the assets pledged under this section must become the property of the 
FDIC and be used to the extent necessary to protect the Deposit 
Insurance Fund.
    (b) Amount of assets to be pledged. (1) For a newly insured branch, 
a foreign bank must pledge assets equal to at least 5 percent of the 
liabilities of the branch, based on the branch's projection of its 
liabilities at the end of each of the first three years of operations. 
For all other insured branches, a foreign bank must pledge assets equal 
to the appropriate percentage applicable to the insured branch, as 
determined by reference to the risk-based assessment schedule contained 
in this paragraph, of the insured branch's average liabilities for the 
last 30 days of the most recent calendar quarter. \4\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ This average must be computed by using the sum of the close of 
business figures for the 30 calendar days of the most recent calendar 
quarter, ending with and including the last day of the calendar quarter, 
divided by 30. For days on which the branch is closed, however, balances 
from the previous business day are to be used in determining its average 
liabilities. In determining its average liabilities, the insured branch 
may exclude liabilities to other offices, agencies, branches, and wholly 
owned subsidiaries of the foreign bank. The value of the pledged assets 
must be computed based on the lesser of the principal amount (par value) 
or market value of such assets at the time of the original pledge and 
thereafter as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Risk-based assessment schedule. The risk-based asset pledge 
required by paragraph (b)(1) will be determined by utilizing the 
following risk-based assessment schedule:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Supervisory risk subgroup
     Asset maintenance level      --------------------------------------
                                      A (%)        B (%)        C (%)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Equal to or greater than 108%....            2            3            4
Equal to or greater than 106%....            4            5            6

[[Page 791]]

 
Less than 106%...................            6            7            8
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    The appropriate asset pledge percentage will be determined based on 
the supervisory risk subgroup and asset maintenance level applicable to 
the insured branch.
    (3) Supervisory risk factors. For purposes of this section, within 
each asset maintenance group, each institution will be assigned to one 
of three subgroups based on consideration by the FDIC of supervisory 
evaluations provided by the primary federal regulator for the insured 
branch. The supervisory evaluations include the results of examination 
findings by the primary federal regulator, as well as other information 
the primary federal regulator determines to be relevant. In addition, 
the FDIC will take into consideration such other information (such as 
state examination findings, if appropriate) as it determines to be 
relevant to the financial condition and the risk posed to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund. The three supervisory subgroups are:
    (i) Subgroup ``A''. This subgroup consists of financially sound 
institutions with only a few minor weaknesses;
    (ii) Subgroup ``B''. This subgroup consists of institutions that 
demonstrate weaknesses which, if not corrected, could result in 
significant deterioration of the institution and increased risk of loss 
to the deposit insurance fund; and
    (iii) Subgroup ``C''. This subgroup consists of institutions that 
pose a substantial probability of loss to the deposit insurance fund.
    (4) The FDIC may require a foreign bank to pledge additional assets 
or to compute its pledge on a daily basis whenever the FDIC determines 
that the condition of the foreign bank or the insured branch is such 
that the assets pledged under this section will not adequately protect 
the deposit insurance fund. In requiring a foreign bank to pledge 
additional assets, the FDIC will consult with the primary regulator for 
the insured branch. Among the factors to be considered in imposing these 
requirements are the concentration of risk to any one borrower or group 
of related borrowers, the concentration of transfer risk related to any 
one country, including the country in which the foreign bank's head 
office is located or any other factor the FDIC determines is relevant.
    (5) Each insured branch must separately comply with the requirements 
of this section. A foreign bank which has more than one insured branch 
in a state may, however, treat all of its insured branches in the same 
state as one entity and will designate one insured branch to be 
responsible for compliance with this section.
    (c) Depository. A foreign bank must place pledged assets for 
safekeeping at any depository which is located in any state. However, a 
depository may not be an affiliate of the foreign bank whose insured 
branch is seeking to use the depository. A foreign bank must obtain the 
FDIC's prior written approval of the depository selected, and such 
approval may be revoked and dismissal of the depository required 
whenever the depository does not fulfill any one of its obligations 
under the pledge agreement. A foreign bank shall appoint and constitute 
the depository as its attorney in fact for the sole purpose of 
transferring title to pledged assets to the FDIC as may be required to 
effectuate the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section.
    (d) Assets that may be pledged. Subject to the right of the FDIC to 
require substitution, a foreign bank may pledge any of the kinds of 
assets listed in this paragraph (d); such assets must be denominated in 
United States dollars. A foreign bank shall be deemed to have pledged 
any such assets for the benefit of the FDIC or its designee at such time 
as any such asset is placed with the depository, as follows:
    (1)(i) Negotiable certificates of deposit that are payable in the 
United States and that are issued by any state bank, national bank, 
state or federal savings association, or branch of a foreign bank which 
has executed a valid

[[Page 792]]

waiver of offset agreement or similar debt instruments that are payable 
in the United States and that are issued by any agency of a foreign bank 
which has executed a valid waiver of offset agreement; provided, that 
the maturity of any certificate or issuance is not greater than one 
year; and provided further, that the issuing branch or agency of a 
foreign bank is not an affiliate of the pledging bank or from the same 
country as the pledging bank's domicile;
    (ii) Non-negotiable certificates of deposit, subject to the terms 
specified in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section other than the 
requirement of negotiability, that were pledged as collateral to the 
FDIC on March 18, 2005, until maturity according to the original terms 
of the existing deposit agreement.
    (2) Treasury bills, interest bearing bonds, notes, debentures, or 
other direct obligations of or obligations fully guaranteed as to 
principal and interest by the United States or any agency or 
instrumentality thereof;
    (3) Commercial paper that is rated P-1 or P-2, or their equivalent 
by a nationally recognized rating service; provided, that any conflict 
in a rating shall be resolved in favor of the lower rating;
    (4) Banker's acceptances that are payable in the United States and 
that are issued by any state bank, national bank, state or federal 
savings association, or branch or agency of a foreign bank; provided, 
that the maturity of any acceptance is not greater than 180 days; and 
provided further, that the branch or agency issuing the acceptance is 
not an affiliate of the pledging bank or from the same country as the 
pledging bank's domicile;
    (5) General obligations of any state of the United States, or any 
county or municipality of any state of the United States, or any agency, 
instrumentality, or political subdivision of the foregoing or any 
obligation guaranteed by a state of the United States or any county or 
municipality of any state of the United States; provided, that such 
obligations have a credit rating within the top two rating bands of a 
nationally recognized rating service (with any conflict in a rating 
resolved in favor of the lower rating);
    (6) Obligations of the African Development Bank, Asian Development 
Bank, Inter-American Development Bank, and the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development;
    (7) Notes issued by bank and thrift holding companies, banks, or 
savings associations organized under the laws of the United States or 
any state thereof or notes issued by United States branches or agencies 
of foreign banks, provided, that the notes have a credit rating within 
the top two rating bands of a nationally recognized rating service (with 
any conflict in a rating resolved in favor of the lower rating) and that 
they are payable in the United States, and provided further, that the 
issuer is not an affiliate of the foreign bank pledging the note; or
    (8) Any other asset determined by the FDIC to be acceptable.
    (e) Pledge agreement. A foreign bank shall not pledge any assets 
unless a pledge agreement in form and substance satisfactory to the FDIC 
has been executed by the foreign bank and the depository. The agreement, 
in addition to other terms not inconsistent with this paragraph (e), 
shall give effect to the following terms:
    (1) Original pledge. The foreign bank shall place with the 
depository assets of the kind described in paragraph (d) of this 
section, having an aggregate value in the amount as required pursuant to 
paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) Additional assets required to be pledged. Whenever the foreign 
bank is required to pledge additional assets for the benefit of the FDIC 
or its designees pursuant to paragraph (b)(4) of this section, it shall 
deliver (within two business days after the last day of the most recent 
calendar quarter, unless otherwise ordered) additional assets of the 
kind described in paragraph (d) of this section, having an aggregate 
value in the amount required by the FDIC.
    (3) Substitution of assets. The foreign bank, at any time, may 
substitute any assets for pledged assets, and, upon such substitution, 
the depository shall promptly release any such assets to the foreign 
bank; provided, that:
    (i) The foreign bank pledges assets of the kind described in 
paragraph (d) of this section having an aggregate value not less than 
the value of the pledged

[[Page 793]]

assets for which they are substituted and certified as such by the 
foreign bank; and
    (ii) The FDIC has not by written notification to the foreign bank, a 
copy of which shall be provided to the depository, suspended or 
terminated the foreign bank's right of substitution.
    (4) Delivery of other documents. Concurrently with the pledge of any 
assets, the foreign bank will deliver to the depository all documents 
and instruments necessary or advisable to effectuate the transfer of 
title to any such assets and thereafter, from time to time, at the 
request of the FDIC, deliver to the depository any such additional 
documents or instruments. The foreign bank shall provide copies of all 
such documents described in this paragraph (e)(4) to the appropriate 
regional director concurrently with their delivery to the depository.
    (5) Acceptance and safekeeping responsibilities of the depository. 
(i) The depository will accept and hold any assets pledged by the 
foreign bank pursuant to the pledge agreement for safekeeping free and 
clear of any lien, charge, right of offset, credit, or preference in 
connection with any claim the depository may assert against the foreign 
bank and shall designate any such assets as a special pledge for the 
benefit of the FDIC or its designee. The depository shall not accept the 
pledge of any such assets unless, concurrently with such pledge, the 
foreign bank delivers to the depository the documents and instruments 
necessary for the transfer of title thereto as provided in this part.
    (ii) The depository shall hold any such assets separate from all 
other assets of the foreign bank or the depository. Such assets may be 
held in book-entry form but must at all times be segregated on the 
records of the depository and clearly identified as assets subject to 
the pledge agreement.
    (6) Reporting requirements of the insured branch and the depository. 
(i) Initial reports. Upon the original pledge of assets as provided in 
paragraph (e)(1) of this section:
    (A) The depository shall provide to the foreign bank and to the 
appropriate FDIC regional director a written report in the form of a 
receipt identifying each asset pledged and specifying in reasonable 
detail with respect to each such asset the complete title, interest 
rate, series, serial number (if any), principal amount (par value), 
maturity date and call date; and
    (B) The foreign bank shall provide to the appropriate regional 
director a written report certified as correct by the foreign bank which 
sets forth the value of each pledged asset and the aggregate value of 
all such assets, and which states that the aggregate value of all such 
assets is at least equal to the amount required pursuant to paragraph 
(b) of this section and that all such assets are of the kind described 
in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (ii) Quarterly reports. Within ten calendar days after the end of 
the most recent calendar quarter:
    (A) The depository shall provide to the appropriate regional 
director a written report specifying in reasonable detail with respect 
to each asset currently pledged (including any asset pledged to satisfy 
the requirements of paragraph (b)(4) of this section and identified as 
such), as of two business days after the end of the most recent calendar 
quarter, the complete title, interest rate, series, serial number (if 
any), principal amount (par value), maturity date, and call date, 
provided, that if no substitution of any asset has occurred during the 
reporting period, the reporting need only specify that no substitution 
of assets has occurred; and
    (B) The foreign bank shall provide as of two business days after the 
end of the most recent calendar quarter to the appropriate regional 
director a written report certified as correct by the foreign bank which 
sets forth the value of each pledged asset and the aggregate value of 
all such assets, which states that the aggregate value of all such 
assets is at least equal to the amount required pursuant to paragraph 
(b) of this section and that all such assets are of the kind described 
in paragraph (d) of this section, and which states the average of the 
liabilities of each insured branch of the foreign bank computed in the 
manner and for the period prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (iii) Additional reports. The foreign bank shall, from time to time, 
as may

[[Page 794]]

be required, provide to the appropriate regional director a written 
report in the form specified containing the information requested with 
respect to any asset then currently pledged.
    (7) Access to assets. With respect to any asset pledged pursuant to 
the pledge agreement, the depository will provide representatives of the 
FDIC or the foreign bank with access (during regular business hours of 
the depository and at the location where any such asset is held, without 
other limitation or qualification) to all original instruments, 
documents, books, and records evidencing or pertaining to any such 
asset.
    (8) Release upon the order of the FDIC. The depository shall release 
to the foreign bank any pledged assets, as specified in a written 
notification of the appropriate regional director, upon the terms and 
conditions provided in such notification, including without limitation 
the waiver of any requirement that any assets be pledged by the foreign 
bank in substitution of any released assets.
    (9) Release to the FDIC. Whenever the FDIC is obligated under 
section 11(f) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act to pay insured 
deposits of an insured branch, the FDIC by written certification shall 
so inform the depository; and the depository, upon receipt of such 
certification, shall thereupon promptly release and transfer title to 
any pledged assets to the FDIC or release such assets to the foreign 
bank, as specified in the certification. Upon release and transfer of 
title to all pledged assets specified in the certification, the 
depository shall be discharged from any further obligation under the 
pledge agreement.
    (10) Interest earned on assets. The foreign bank may retain any 
interest earned with respect to the assets currently pledged unless the 
FDIC by written notice prohibits retention of interest by the foreign 
bank, in which case the notice shall specify the disposition of any such 
interest.
    (11) Expenses of agreement. The FDIC shall not be required to pay 
any fees, costs, or expenses for services provided by the depository to 
the foreign bank pursuant to, or in connection with, the pledge 
agreement.
    (12) Substitution of depository. The depository may resign, or the 
foreign bank may discharge the depository, from its duties and 
obligations under the pledge agreement by giving at least 60 days' 
written notice thereof to the other party and to the appropriate 
regional director. The FDIC, upon 30 days' written notice to the foreign 
bank and the depository, may require the foreign bank to dismiss the 
depository if the FDIC in its discretion determines that the depository 
is in breach of the pledge agreement. The depository shall continue to 
function as such until the appointment of a successor depository becomes 
effective and the depository has released to the successor depository 
the pledged assets and documents and instruments to effectuate transfer 
of title in accordance with the written instructions of the foreign bank 
as approved by the FDIC. The appointment by the foreign bank of a 
successor depository shall not be effective until:
    (i) The FDIC has approved in writing the successor depository; and
    (ii) A pledge agreement in form and substance satisfactory to the 
FDIC has been executed.
    (13) Waiver of terms. The FDIC may by written order waive compliance 
by the foreign bank or the depository with any term or condition of the 
pledge agreement.

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005; 70 FR 20704, Apr. 21, 2005, as amended at 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 347.210  Asset maintenance.

    (a) An insured branch of a foreign bank shall maintain on a daily 
basis eligible assets in an amount not less than 106 percent of the 
preceding quarter's average book value of the insured branch's 
liabilities or, in the case of a newly-established insured branch, the 
estimated book value of its liabilities at the end of the first full 
quarter of operation, exclusive of liabilities due to the foreign bank's 
head office, other branches, agencies, offices, or wholly owned 
subsidiaries. The Director of the Division of Supervision and Consumer 
Protection or his designee may impose a computation of total liabilities 
on a daily basis in those instances where it is found necessary for 
supervisory purposes. The FDIC Board of Directors,

[[Page 795]]

after consulting with the insured branch's primary regulator, may 
require that a higher ratio of eligible assets be maintained if the 
financial condition of the insured branch warrants such action. Among 
the factors which will be considered in requiring a higher ratio of 
eligible assets are the concentration of risk to any one borrower or 
group of related borrowers, the concentration of transfer risk to any 
one country, including the country in which the foreign bank's head 
office is located or any other factor the FDIC determines is relevant. 
Eligible assets shall be payable in United States dollars.
    (b) In determining eligible assets for the purposes of compliance 
with paragraph (a) of this section, the insured branch shall exclude the 
following:
    (1) Any asset due from the foreign bank's head office, or its other 
branches, agencies, offices or affiliates;
    (2) Any asset classified ``Value Impaired,'' to the extent of the 
required Allocated Transfer Risk Reserves or equivalent write down, or 
``Loss'' in the most recent state or federal examination report;
    (3) Any deposit of the insured branch in a bank unless the bank has 
executed a valid waiver of offset agreement;
    (4) Any asset not supported by sufficient credit information to 
allow a review of the asset's credit quality, as determined at the most 
recent state or federal examination, as follows:
    (i) Whether an asset has sufficient credit information will be a 
function of the size of the borrower and the location within the foreign 
bank of the responsibility for authorizing and monitoring extensions of 
credit to the borrower. For large, well known companies, when credit 
responsibility is located in an office of the foreign bank outside the 
insured branch, the insured branch must have adequate documentation to 
show that the asset is of good quality and is being supervised 
adequately by the foreign bank. In such cases, copies of periodic 
memoranda that include an analysis of the borrower's recent financial 
statements and a report on recent developments in the borrower's 
operations and borrowing relationships with the foreign bank generally 
would constitute sufficient information. For other borrowers, periodic 
memoranda must be supplemented by information such as copies of recent 
financial statements, recent correspondence concerning the borrower's 
financial condition and repayment history, credit terms and collateral, 
data on any guarantors, and where necessary, the status of any 
corrective measures being employed;
    (ii) Subsequent to the determination that an asset lacks sufficient 
credit information, an insured branch may not include the amount of that 
asset among eligible assets until the FDIC determines that sufficient 
documentation exists. Such a determination may be made either at the 
next federal examination, or upon request of the insured branch, by the 
appropriate regional director;
    (5) Any asset not in the insured branch's actual possession unless 
the insured branch holds title to such asset and the insured branch 
maintains records sufficient to enable independent verification of the 
insured branch's ownership of the asset, as determined at the most 
recent state or federal examination;
    (6) Any intangible asset;
    (7) Any other asset not considered bankable by the FDIC.
    (c) A foreign bank which has more than one insured branch in a state 
may treat all of its insured branches in the same state as one entity 
for purposes of compliance with paragraph (a) of this section and shall 
designate one insured branch to be responsible for maintaining the 
records of the insured branches' compliance with this section.
    (d) The average book value of the insured branch's liabilities for a 
quarter shall be, at the insured branch's option, either an average of 
the balances as of the close of business for each day of the quarter or 
an average of the balances as of the close of business on each Wednesday 
during the quarter. Quarters end on March 31, June 30, September 30, and 
December 31 of any given year. For days on which the insured branch is 
closed, balances from the previous business day are to be used. 
Calculations of the average book value of the insured branch's 
liabilities for a quarter shall be retained by the

[[Page 796]]

insured branch until the next federal examination.



Sec. 347.211  Examination of branches of foreign banks.

    (a) Frequency of on-site examination. Each branch or agency of a 
foreign bank shall be examined on-site at least once during each 12-
month period (beginning on the date the most recent examination of the 
office ended) by:
    (1) The FRB;
    (2) The FDIC, if an insured branch;
    (3) The OCC, if the branch or agency of the foreign bank is licensed 
by the OCC; or
    (4) The state supervisor, if the office of the foreign bank is 
licensed or chartered by the state.
    (b) 18-month cycle for certain small institutions-- (1) Mandatory 
standards. The FDIC may conduct a full-scope, on-site examination at 
least once during each 18-month period, rather than each 12-month period 
as provided in paragraph (a) of this section, if the insured branch:
    (i) Has total assets of less than $1 billion;
    (ii) Has received a composite ROCA supervisory rating (which rates 
risk management, operational controls, compliance, and asset quality) of 
1 or 2 at its most recent examination;
    (iii) Satisfies the requirement of either the following paragraph 
(b)(iii)(A) or (B):
    (A) The foreign bank's most recently reported capital adequacy 
position consists of, or is equivalent to, Tier 1 and total risk-based 
capital ratios of at least 6 percent and 10 percent, respectively, on a 
consolidated basis; or
    (B) The insured branch has maintained on a daily basis, over the 
past three quarters, eligible assets in an amount not less than 108 
percent of the preceding quarter's average third party liabilities 
(determined consistent with applicable federal and state law) and 
sufficient liquidity is currently available to meet its obligations to 
third parties;
    (iv) Is not subject to a formal enforcement action or order by the 
FRB, FDIC, or the OCC; and
    (v) Has not experienced a change in control during the preceding 12-
month period in which a full-scope, on-site examination would have been 
required but for this section.
    (2) Discretionary standards. In determining whether an insured 
branch that meets the standards of paragraph (b)(1) of this section 
should not be eligible for an 18-month examination cycle pursuant to 
this paragraph (b), the FDIC may consider additional factors, including 
whether:
    (i) Any of the individual components of the ROCA supervisory rating 
of an insured branch is rated ``3'' or worse;
    (ii) The results of any off-site monitoring indicate a deterioration 
in the condition of the insured branch;
    (iii) The size, relative importance, and role of a particular 
insured branch when reviewed in the context of the foreign bank's entire 
U.S. operations otherwise necessitate an annual examination; and
    (iv) The condition of the parent foreign bank gives rise to such a 
need.
    (c) Authority to conduct more frequent examinations. Nothing in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section limits the authority of the FDIC 
to examine any insured branch as frequently as it deems necessary.

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005; 70 FR 20704, Apr. 21, 2005, as amended at 72 
FR 17803, Apr. 10, 2007; 81 FR 10070, Feb. 29, 2016]



Sec. 347.212  FDIC approval to conduct activities that are not
permissible for federal branches.

    (a) Scope. A foreign bank operating an insured state branch which 
desires to engage in or continue to engage in any type of activity that 
is not permissible for a federal branch, pursuant to the National Bank 
Act (12 U.S.C. 21 et seq.) or any other federal statute, regulation, 
official bulletin or circular, written order or interpretation, or 
decision of a court of competent jurisdiction, must file a written 
application for permission to conduct such activity with the FDIC.
    (b) Exceptions. If the FDIC has already determined, pursuant to part 
362 of this chapter, ``Activities and Investment of Insured State 
Banks,'' that an activity does not present a significant risk to the 
Deposit Insurance Fund, no application is required under paragraph (a) 
of this section for a foreign bank operating an insured branch to engage

[[Page 797]]

or continue to engage in the same activity.
    (c) Agency activities. A foreign bank operating an insured state 
branch is not required to submit an application pursuant to paragraph 
(a) of this section to engage in or continue engaging in an activity 
conducted as agent if the activity is:
    (1) permissible agency activity for a state-chartered bank located 
in the state which the state-licensed insured branch of the foreign bank 
is located;
    (2) permissible agency activity for a state-licensed branch of a 
foreign bank located in that state; and
    (3) permissible pursuant to any other applicable federal law or 
regulation.
    (d) Conditions of approval. (1) Approval of such an application 
required by paragraph (a) of this section may be conditioned on the 
agreement by the foreign bank and its insured state branch to conduct 
the activity subject to specific limitations, which may include pledging 
of assets in excess of the asset pledge and asset maintenance 
requirements contained in Secs. 347.209 and 347.210.
    (2) In the case of an application to initially engage in an 
activity, as opposed to an application to continue to conduct an 
activity, the insured state branch shall not commence the activity until 
it has been approved in writing by the FDIC pursuant to this part and 
the FRB, and any and all conditions imposed in such approvals have been 
satisfied.
    (e) Divestiture or cessation. (1) If an application for permission 
to continue to conduct an activity is not approved by the FDIC or the 
FRB, the applicant shall submit a plan of divestiture or cessation of 
the activity to the appropriate regional director.
    (2) A foreign bank operating an insured state branch which elects 
not to apply to the FDIC for permission to continue to conduct an 
activity which is rendered impermissible by any change in statute, 
regulation, official bulletin or circular, written order or 
interpretation, or decision of a court of competent jurisdiction shall 
submit a plan of divestiture or cessation to the appropriate regional 
director.
    (3) All plans of divestitures or cessation required by this 
paragraph must be completed within one year from the date of the 
disapproval, or within such shorter period as the FDIC may direct.
    (f) Procedures. Procedures for applications under this section are 
set out in section 303.187.

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005; 70 FR 20704, Apr. 21, 2005, as amended at 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 347.213  Establishment or operation of noninsured foreign branch.

    (a) A foreign bank may establish or operate a state branch, as 
provided by state law, without federal deposit insurance whenever:
    (1) The branch only accepts initial deposits in an amount equal to 
the SMDIA or greater; or
    (2) The branch meets the criteria set forth in Sec. 347.214 or 
Sec. 347.215.
    (b) [Reserved]

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005, as amended at 74 FR 47718, Sept. 17, 2009]



Sec. 347.214  Branch established under section 5 of the International
Banking Act.

    A foreign bank may operate any state branch as a noninsured branch 
whenever the foreign bank has entered into an agreement with the FRB to 
accept at that branch only those deposits as would be permissible for a 
corporation organized under section 25(a) of the Federal Reserve Act (12 
U.S.C. 611 et seq.) and implementing rules and regulations administered 
by the FRB (12 CFR 211).



Sec. 347.215  Exemptions from deposit insurance requirement.

    (a) Deposit activities not requiring insurance. A State branch will 
not be considered to be engaged in domestic retail deposit activity that 
requires the foreign bank parent to establish an insured U.S. bank 
subsidiary if the State branch accepts initial deposits only in an 
amount of less than an amount equal to the SMDIA that are derived solely 
from the following:
    (1) Individuals who are not citizens or residents of the United 
States at the time of the initial deposit;
    (2) Individuals who:
    (i) Are not citizens of the United States;
    (ii) Are residents of the United States; and

[[Page 798]]

    (iii) Are employed by a foreign bank, foreign business, foreign 
government, or recognized international organization;
    (3) Persons (including immediate family members of natural persons) 
to whom the branch or foreign bank (including any affiliate thereof) has 
extended credit or provided other nondeposit banking services within the 
past twelve months or has entered into a written agreement to provide 
such services within the next twelve months;
    (4) Foreign businesses, large United States businesses, and persons 
from whom an Edge or agreement corporation may accept deposits under 12 
CFR 211.6(a)(1);
    (5) Any governmental unit, including the United States government, 
any state government, any foreign government and any political 
subdivision or agency of any of the foregoing, and recognized 
international organizations;
    (6) Persons who are depositing funds in connection with the issuance 
of a financial instrument by the branch for the transmission of funds or 
the transmission of such funds by any electronic means; and
    (7) Any other depositor, but only if:
    (i) The branch's average deposits under this paragraph (a)(7) do not 
exceed one percent of the branch's average total deposits, as calculated 
under paragraph (a)(7)(ii) if this section (de minimis exception).
    (ii) For purposes of calculating this exception:
    (A) The branch's average deposits under this paragraph and the 
average total deposits must be computed by summing the close of business 
figures for each of the last 30 calendar days, ending with and including 
the last day of the calendar quarter, and dividing the resulting sum by 
30;
    (B) For days on which the branch is closed, balances from the last 
previous business day are to be used;
    (C) The branch may exclude deposits in the branch of other offices, 
branches, agencies or wholly owned subsidiaries of the bank to determine 
its average deposits;
    (D) The branch must not solicit deposits from the general public by 
advertising, display of signs, or similar activity designed to attract 
the attention of the general public; and
    (E) A foreign bank that has more than one state branch in the same 
state may aggregate deposits in such branches (excluding deposits of 
other branches, agencies or wholly owned subsidiaries of the bank) for 
the purpose of this paragraph (a)(7).
    (b) Application for an exemption. (1) Whenever a foreign bank 
proposes to accept at a State branch initial deposits of less than an 
amount equal to the SMDIA and such deposits are not otherwise exempted 
under paragraph (a) of this section, the foreign bank may apply to the 
FDIC for consent to operate the branch as a noninsured branch. The Board 
of Directors may exempt the branch from the insurance requirement if the 
branch is not engaged in domestic retail deposit activities requiring 
insurance protection. The Board of Directors will consider the size and 
nature of depositors and deposit accounts, the importance of maintaining 
and improving the availability of credit to all sectors of the United 
States economy, including the international trade finance sector of the 
United States economy, whether the exemption would give the foreign bank 
an unfair competitive advantage over United States banking 
organizations, and any other relevant factors in making this 
determination.
    (2) Procedures for applications under this section are set out in 
Sec. 303.186.
    (c) Transition period. A noninsured state branch may maintain a 
retail deposit lawfully accepted prior to April 1, 1996 pursuant to 
regulations in effect prior to July 1, 1998:
    (1) If the deposit qualifies pursuant to paragraph (a) or (b) of 
this section; or
    (2) If the deposit does not qualify pursuant to paragraph (a) or (b) 
of this section, in the case of a time deposit, no later than the first 
maturity date of the time deposit after April 1, 1996.

[70 FR 17560, Apr. 6, 2005, as amended at 74 FR 47718, Sept. 17, 2009]



Sec. 347.216  Depositor notification.

    Any state branch that is exempt from the insurance requirement 
pursuant to Sec. 347.215 shall:

[[Page 799]]

    (a) Display conspicuously at each window or place where deposits are 
usually accepted a sign stating that deposits are not insured by the 
FDIC; and
    (b) Include in bold face conspicuous type on each signature card, 
passbook, and instrument evidencing a deposit the statement ``This 
deposit is not insured by the FDIC''; or require each depositor to 
execute a statement which acknowledges that the initial deposit and all 
future deposits at the branch are not insured by the FDIC. This 
acknowledgment shall be retained by the branch so long as the depositor 
maintains any deposit with the branch. This provision applies to any 
negotiable certificates of deposit made in a branch on or after July 6, 
1989, as well as to any renewals of such deposits which become effective 
on or after July 6, 1989.



                     Subpart C_International Lending



Sec. 347.301  Purpose, authority, and scope.

    Under the International Lending Supervision Act of 1983 (Title IX, 
Pub. L. 98-181, 97 Stat. 1153) (12 U.S.C. 3901 et seq.) (ILSA), the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation prescribes the regulations in this 
subpart relating to international lending activities of banks.



Sec. 347.302  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart:
    (a) Administrative cost means those costs which are specifically 
identified with negotiating, processing and consummating the loan. These 
costs include, but are not necessarily limited to: legal fees; costs of 
preparing and processing loan documents; and an allocable portion of 
salaries and related benefits of employees engaged in the international 
lending function. No portion of supervisory and administrative expenses 
or other indirect expenses such as occupancy and other similar overhead 
costs shall be included.
    (b) Banking institution means an insured state nonmember bank.
    (c) Federal banking agencies means the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, 
and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (d) International assets means those assets required to be included 
in banking institutions' ``Country Exposure Report'' form (FFIEC No. 
009).
    (e) International loan means a loan as defined in the instructions 
to the ``Report of Condition and Income'' for the respective banking 
institution (FFIEC Nos. 031, 032, 033 and 034) and made to a foreign 
government, or to an individual, a corporation, or other entity not a 
citizen of, resident in, or organized or incorporated in the United 
States.
    (f) Restructured international loan means a loan that meets the 
following criteria:
    (1) The borrower is unable to service the existing loan according to 
its terms and is a resident of a foreign country in which there is a 
generalized inability of public and private sector obligors to meet 
their external debt obligations on a timely basis because of a lack of, 
or restraints on the availability of, needed foreign exchange in the 
country; and
    (2) Either:
    (i) The terms of the existing loan are amended to reduce stated 
interest or extend the schedule of payments; or
    (ii) A new loan is made to, or for the benefit of, the borrower, 
enabling the borrower to service or refinance the existing debt.
    (g) Transfer risk means the possibility that an asset cannot be 
serviced in the currency of payment because of a lack of, or restraints 
on the availability of, needed foreign exchange in the country of the 
obligor.



Sec. 347.303  Allocated transfer risk reserve.

    (a) Establishment of Allocated Transfer Risk Reserve. A banking 
institution shall establish an allocated transfer risk reserve (ATRR) 
for specified international assets when required by the FDIC in 
accordance with this section.
    (b) Procedures and standards--(1) Joint agency determination. At 
least annually, the federal banking agencies shall determine jointly, 
based on the standards set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, 
the following:
    (i) Which international assets subject to transfer risk warrant 
establishment of an ATRR;
    (ii) The amount of the ATRR for the specified assets; and

[[Page 800]]

    (iii) Whether an ATRR established for specified assets may be 
reduced.
    (2) Standards for requiring ATRR--(i) Evaluation of assets. The 
federal banking agencies shall apply the following criteria in 
determining whether an ATRR is required for particular international 
assets:
    (A) Whether the quality of a banking institution's assets has been 
impaired by a protracted inability of public or private obligors in a 
foreign country to make payments on their external indebtedness as 
indicated by such factors, among others, as whether:
    (1) Such obligors have failed to make full interest payments on 
external indebtedness; or
    (2) Such obligors have failed to comply with the terms of any 
restructured indebtedness; or
    (3) A foreign country has failed to comply with any International 
Monetary Fund or other suitable adjustment program; or
    (B) Whether no definite prospects exist for the orderly restoration 
of debt service.
    (ii) Determination of amount of ATRR. (A) In determining the amount 
of the ATRR, the federal banking agencies shall consider:
    (1) The length of time the quality of the asset has been impaired;
    (2) Recent actions taken to restore debt service capability;
    (3) Prospects for restored asset quality; and
    (4) Such other factors as the federal banking agencies may consider 
relevant to the quality of the asset.
    (B) The initial year's provision for the ATRR shall be ten percent 
of the principal amount of each specified international asset, or such 
greater or lesser percentage determined by the federal banking agencies. 
Additional provision, if any, for the ATRR in subsequent years shall be 
fifteen percent of the principal amount of each specified international 
asset, or such greater or lesser percentage determined by the federal 
banking agencies.
    (3) FDIC notification. Based on the joint agency determinations 
under paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the FDIC shall notify each 
banking institution holding assets subject to an ATRR:
    (i) Of the amount of the ATRR to be established by the institution 
for specified international assets; and
    (ii) That an ATRR established for specified assets may be reduced.
    (c) Accounting treatment of ATRR--(1) Charge to current income. A 
banking institution shall establish an ATRR by a charge to current 
income and the amounts so charged shall not be included in the banking 
institution's capital or surplus.
    (2) Separate accounting. A banking institution shall account for an 
ATRR separately from the Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses, and shall 
deduct the ATRR from ``gross loans and leases'' to arrive at ``net loans 
and leases.'' The ATRR must be established for each asset subject to the 
ATRR in the percentage amount specified.
    (3) Consolidation. A banking institution shall establish an ATRR, as 
required, on a consolidated basis. For banks, consolidation should be in 
accordance with the procedures and tests of significance set forth in 
the instructions for preparation of Consolidated Reports of Condition 
and Income (FFIEC Nos. 031, 032, 033 and 034).
    (4) Alternative accounting treatment. A banking institution need not 
establish an ATRR if it writes down in the period in which the ATRR is 
required, or has written down in prior periods, the value of the 
specified international assets in the requisite amount for each such 
asset. For purposes of this paragraph (c)(4), international assets may 
be written down by a charge to the Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses 
or a reduction in the principal amount of the asset by application of 
interest payments or other collections on the asset; provided, that only 
those international assets that may be charged to the Allowance for Loan 
and Lease Losses pursuant to generally accepted accounting principles 
may be written down by a charge to the Allowance for Loan and Lease 
Losses. However, the Allowance for Loan and Lease Losses must be 
replenished in such amount necessary to restore it to a level which 
adequately provides for the estimated losses inherent in the banking 
institution's loan and lease portfolio.
    (5) Reduction of ATRR. A banking institution may reduce an ATRR when

[[Page 801]]

notified by the FDIC or, at any time, by writing down such amount of the 
international asset for which the ATRR was established.



Sec. 347.304  Accounting for fees on international loans.

    (a) Restrictions on fees for restructured international loans. No 
banking institution shall charge, in connection with the restructuring 
of an international loan, any fee exceeding the administrative cost of 
the restructuring unless it amortizes the amount of the fee exceeding 
the administrative cost over the effective life of the loan.
    (b) Accounting treatment. Subject to paragraph (a) of this section, 
banking institutions shall account for fees on international loans in 
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.



Sec. 347.305  Reporting and disclosure of international assets.

    (a) Requirements. (1) Pursuant to section 907(a) of ILSA, a banking 
institution shall submit to the FDIC, at least quarterly, information 
regarding the amounts and composition of its holdings of international 
assets.
    (2) Pursuant to section 907(b) of ILSA, a banking institution shall 
submit to the FDIC information regarding concentrations in its holdings 
of international assets that are material in relation to total assets 
and to capital of the institution, such information to be made publicly 
available by the FDIC on request.
    (b) Procedures. The format, content and reporting and filing dates 
of the reports required under paragraph (a) of this section shall be 
determined jointly by the federal banking agencies. The requirements to 
be prescribed by the federal banking agencies may include changes to 
existing forms (such as revisions to the Country Exposure Report, Form 
FFIEC No. 009) or such other requirements as the federal banking 
agencies deem appropriate. The federal banking agencies also may 
determine to exempt from the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section banking institutions that, in the federal banking agencies' 
judgment, have de minimis holdings of international assets.
    (c) Reservation of Authority. Nothing contained in this subpart 
shall preclude the FDIC from requiring from a banking institution such 
additional or more frequent information on the institution's holdings of 
international assets as the agency may consider necessary.



PART 348_MANAGEMENT OFFICIAL INTERLOCKS--Table of Contents



Sec.
348.1  Purpose and scope.
348.2  Other definitions and rules of construction.
348.3  Prohibitions.
348.4  Interlocking relationships permitted by statute.
348.5  Small market share exemption.
348.6  General exemption.
348.7  Change in circumstances.
348.8  Enforcement.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 3207, 12 U.S.C. 1823(k).

    Source: 80 FR 79252, Dec. 21, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 348.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Authority. This part is issued under the provisions of the 
Depository Institution Management Interlocks Act (Interlocks Act) (12 
U.S.C. 3201 et seq.), as amended.
    (b) Purpose. The purpose of the Interlocks Act and this part is to 
foster competition by generally prohibiting a management official from 
serving two nonaffiliated depository organizations in situations where 
the management interlock likely would have an anticompetitive effect.
    (c) Scope. This part applies to management officials of FDIC-
supervised institutions and their affiliates.



Sec. 348.2  Other definitions and rules of construction.

    For purposes of this part, the following definitions apply:
    (a) Affiliate. (1) The term affiliate has the meaning given in 
section 202 of the Interlocks Act (12 U.S.C. 3201). For purposes of 
section 202, shares held by an individual include shares held by members 
of his or her immediate family. ``Immediate family'' means spouse, 
mother, father, child, grandchild, sister, brother or any of their 
spouses,

[[Page 802]]

whether or not any of their shares are held in trust.
    (2) For purposes of section 202(3)(B) of the Interlocks Act (12 
U.S.C. 3201(3)(B)), an affiliate relationship involving an FDIC-
supervised institution based on common ownership does not exist if the 
FDIC determines, after giving the affected persons the opportunity to 
respond, that the asserted affiliation was established in order to avoid 
the prohibitions of the Interlocks Act and does not represent a true 
commonality of interest between the depository organizations. In making 
this determination, the FDIC considers, among other things, whether a 
person, including members of his or her immediate family whose shares 
are necessary to constitute the group, owns a nominal percentage of the 
shares of one of the organizations and the percentage is substantially 
disproportionate to that person's ownership of shares in the other 
organization.
    (b) Area median income means:
    (1) The median family income for the metropolitan statistical area 
(MSA), if a depository organization is located in an MSA; or
    (2) The statewide nonmetropolitan median family income, if a 
depository organization is located outside an MSA.
    (c) Community means a city, town, or village, and contiguous or 
adjacent cities, towns, or villages.
    (d) Contiguous or adjacent cities, towns, or villages means cities, 
towns, or villages whose borders touch each other or whose borders are 
within 10 road miles of each other at their closest points. The property 
line of an office located in an unincorporated city, town, or village is 
the boundary line of that city, town, or village for the purpose of this 
definition.
    (e) Depository holding company means a bank holding company or a 
savings and loan holding company (as more fully defined in section 202 
of the Interlocks Act (12 U.S.C. 3201)) having its principal office 
located in the United States.
    (f) Depository institution means a commercial bank (including a 
private bank), a savings bank, a trust company, a savings and loan 
association, a building and loan association, a homestead association, a 
cooperative bank, an industrial bank, or a credit union, chartered under 
the laws of the United States and having a principal office located in 
the United States. Additionally, a United States office, including a 
branch or agency, of a foreign commercial bank is a depository 
institution.
    (g) Depository institution affiliate means a depository institution 
that is an affiliate of a depository organization.
    (h) Depository organization means a depository institution or a 
depository holding company.
    (i) FDIC-supervised institution means either an insured state 
nonmember bank or a State savings association.
    (j) Low- and moderate-income areas means census tracts (or, if an 
area is not in a census tract, block numbering areas delineated by the 
United States Bureau of the Census) where the median family income is 
less than 100 percent of the area median income.
    (k) Management official. (1) The term management official means:
    (i) A director;
    (ii) An advisory or honorary director of a depository institution 
with total assets of $100 million or more;
    (iii) A senior executive officer as that term is defined in 12 CFR 
303.101(b).
    (iv) A branch manager;
    (v) A trustee of a depository organization under the control of 
trustees; and
    (vi) Any person who has a representative or nominee serving in any 
of the capacities in this paragraph (j)(1).
    (2) The term management official does not include:
    (i) A person whose management functions relate exclusively to the 
business of retail merchandising or manufacturing;
    (ii) A person whose management functions relate principally to the 
business outside the United States of a foreign commercial bank; or
    (iii) A person described in the provisos of section 202(4) of the 
Interlocks Act (12 U.S.C. 3201(4)) (referring to an officer of a State-
chartered savings bank, cooperative bank, or trust company that neither 
makes real estate mortgage loans nor accepts savings).

[[Page 803]]

    (l) Office means a principal or branch office of a depository 
institution located in the United States. Office does not include a 
representative office of a foreign commercial bank, an electronic 
terminal, or a loan production office.
    (m) Person means a natural person, corporation, or other business 
entity.
    (n) Relevant metropolitan statistical area (RMSA) means an MSA, a 
primary MSA, or a consolidated MSA that is not comprised of designated 
Primary MSAs to the extent that these terms are defined and applied by 
the Office of Management and Budget.
    (o) Representative or nominee means a natural person who serves as a 
management official and has an obligation to act on behalf of another 
person with respect to management responsibilities. The FDIC will find 
that a person has an obligation to act on behalf of another person only 
if the first person has an agreement, express or implied, to act on 
behalf of the second person with respect to management responsibilities. 
The FDIC will determine, after giving the affected persons an 
opportunity to respond, whether a person is a representative or nominee.
    (p) State savings association has the same meaning as in section 
(3)(b)(3) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(b)(3).
    (q) Total assets. (1) The term total assets includes assets measured 
on a consolidated basis and reported in the most recent fiscal year-end 
Consolidated Report of Condition and Income.
    (2) The term total assets does not include:
    (i) Assets of a diversified savings and loan holding company as 
defined by section 10(a)(1)(F) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1467a(a)(1)(F)) other than the assets of its depository institution 
affiliate;
    (ii) Assets of a bank holding company that are exempt from the 
prohibitions of section 4 of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 
pursuant to an order issued under section 4(d) of that Act (12 U.S.C. 
1843(d)) other than the assets of its depository institution affiliate; 
or
    (iii) Assets of offices of a foreign commercial bank other than the 
assets of its United States branch or agency.
    (r) United States means the United States of America, any State or 
territory of the United States of America, the District of Columbia, 
Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, and the Virgin Islands.



Sec. 348.3  Prohibitions.

    (a) Community. A management official of a depository organization 
may not serve at the same time as a management official of an 
unaffiliated depository organization if the depository organizations in 
question (or a depository institution affiliate thereof) have offices in 
the same community.
    (b) RMSA. A management official of a depository organization may not 
serve at the same time as a management official of an unaffiliated 
depository organization if the depository organizations in question (or 
a depository institution affiliate thereof) have offices in the same 
RMSA and each depository organization has total assets of $50 million or 
more.
    (c) Major assets. A management official of a depository organization 
with total assets exceeding $2.5 billion (or any affiliate of such an 
organization) may not serve at the same time as a management official of 
an unaffiliated depository organization with total assets exceeding $1.5 
billion (or any affiliate of such an organization), regardless of the 
location of the two depository organizations. The FDIC will adjust these 
thresholds, as necessary, based on the year-to-year change in the 
average of the Consumer Price Index for the Urban Wage Earners and 
Clerical Workers, not seasonally adjusted, with rounding to the nearest 
$100 million. The FDIC will announce the revised thresholds by 
publishing a final rule without notice and comment in the Federal 
Register.



Sec. 348.4  Interlocking relationships permitted by statute.

    The prohibitions of Sec. 348.3 do not apply in the case of any one 
or more of the following organizations or to a subsidiary thereof:
    (a) A depository organization that has been placed formally in 
liquidation, or which is in the hands of a receiver, conservator, or 
other official exercising a similar function;
    (b) A corporation operating under section 25 or section 25A of the 
Federal

[[Page 804]]

Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 601 et seq. and 12 U.S.C. 611 et seq., 
respectively) (Edge Corporations and Agreement Corporations);
    (c) A credit union being served by a management official of another 
credit union;
    (d) A depository organization that does not do business within the 
United States except as an incident to its activities outside the United 
States;
    (e) A State-chartered savings and loan guaranty corporation;
    (f) A Federal Home Loan bank or any other bank organized solely to 
serve depository institutions (a bankers' bank) or solely for the 
purpose of providing securities clearing services and services related 
thereto for depository institutions and securities companies;
    (g) A depository organization that is closed or is in danger of 
closing as determined by the appropriate Federal depository institutions 
regulatory agency and is acquired by another depository organization. 
This exemption lasts for five years, beginning on the date the 
depository organization is acquired;
    (h) A savings association whose acquisition has been authorized on 
an emergency basis in accordance with section 13(k) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1823(k)) with resulting dual service by 
a management official that would otherwise be prohibited under the 
Interlocks Act which may continue for up to 10 years from the date of 
the acquisition provided that the FDIC has given its approval for the 
continuation of such service;
    (i)(1) A diversified savings and loan holding company (as defined in 
section 10(a)(1)(F) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 
1467a(a)(1)(F))) with respect to the service of a director of such 
company who is also a director of an unaffiliated depository 
organization if:
    (i) Both the diversified savings and loan holding company and the 
unaffiliated depository organization notify their appropriate Federal 
depository institutions regulatory agency at least 60 days before the 
dual service is proposed to begin; and
    (ii) The appropriate regulatory agency does not disapprove the dual 
service before the end of the 60-day period.
    (2) The FDIC may disapprove a notice of proposed service if it finds 
that:
    (i) The service cannot be structured or limited so as to preclude an 
anticompetitive effect in financial services in any part of the United 
States;
    (ii) The service would lead to substantial conflicts of interest or 
unsafe or unsound practices; or
    (iii) The notificant failed to furnish all the information required 
by the FDIC.
    (3) The FDIC may require that any interlock permitted under this 
paragraph (h) be terminated if a change in circumstances occurs with 
respect to one of the interlocked depository organizations that would 
have provided a basis for disapproval of the interlock during the notice 
period; and
    (j) Any FDIC-supervised institution which is a State savings 
association that has issued stock in connection with a qualified stock 
issuance pursuant to section 10(q) of the Home Owners' Loan Act, except 
that this paragraph (j) shall apply only with regard to service as a 
single management official of such State savings association or any 
subsidiary of such State savings association by a single management 
official of a savings and loan holding company which purchased the stock 
issued in connection with such qualified stock issuance, and shall apply 
only when the FDIC has determined that such service is consistent with 
the purposes of the Interlocks Act and the Home Owners' Loan Act.



Sec. 348.5  Small market share exemption.

    (a) Exemption. A management interlock that is prohibited by 
Sec. 348.3 is permissible, if:
    (1) The interlock is not prohibited by Sec. 348.3(c); and
    (2) The depository organizations (and their depository institution 
affiliates) hold, in the aggregate, no more than 20 percent of the 
deposits in each RMSA or community in which both depository 
organizations (or their depository institution affiliates) have offices. 
The amount of deposits shall be determined by reference to the most 
recent annual Summary of Deposits published by the FDIC for the RMSA or 
community.
    (b) Confirmation and records. Each depository organization must 
maintain

[[Page 805]]

records sufficient to support its determination of eligibility for the 
exemption under paragraph (a) of this section, and must reconfirm that 
determination on an annual basis.



Sec. 348.6  General exemption.

    (a) Exemption. The FDIC may by agency order exempt an interlock from 
the prohibitions in Sec. 348.3 if the FDIC finds that the interlock 
would not result in a monopoly or substantial lessening of competition 
and would not present safety and soundness concerns.
    (b) Presumptions. In reviewing an application for an exemption under 
this section, the FDIC will apply a rebuttable presumption that an 
interlock will not result in a monopoly or substantial lessening of 
competition if the depository organization seeking to add a management 
official:
    (1) Primarily serves low- and moderate-income areas;
    (2) Is controlled or managed by persons who are members of a 
minority group, or women;
    (3) Is a depository institution that has been chartered for less 
than two years; or
    (4) Is deemed to be in ``troubled condition'' as defined in 
Sec. 303.101(c).
    (c) Duration. Unless a shorter expiration period is provided in the 
FDIC approval, an exemption permitted by paragraph (a) of this section 
may continue so long as it does not result in a monopoly or substantial 
lessening of competition, or is unsafe or unsound. If the FDIC grants an 
interlock exemption in reliance upon a presumption under paragraph (b) 
of this section, the interlock may continue for three years, unless 
otherwise provided by the FDIC in writing.
    (d) Procedures. Procedures for applying for an exemption under this 
section are set forth in 12 CFR 303.249.



Sec. 348.7  Change in circumstances.

    (a) Termination. A management official shall terminate his or her 
service or apply for an exemption if a change in circumstances causes 
the service to become prohibited. A change in circumstances may include 
an increase in asset size of an organization, a change in the 
delineation of the RMSA or community, the establishment of an office, an 
increase in the aggregate deposits of the depository organization, or an 
acquisition, merger, consolidation, or reorganization of the ownership 
structure of a depository organization that causes a previously 
permissible interlock to become prohibited.
    (b) Transition period. A management official described in paragraph 
(a) of this section may continue to serve the FDIC-supervised 
institution involved in the interlock for 15 months following the date 
of the change in circumstances. The FDIC may shorten this period under 
appropriate circumstances.



Sec. 348.8  Enforcement.

    Except as provided in this section, the FDIC administers and 
enforces the Interlocks Act with respect to FDIC-supervised institutions 
and their affiliates and may refer any case of a prohibited interlocking 
relationship involving these entities to the Attorney General of the 
United States to enforce compliance with the Interlocks Act and this 
part. If an affiliate of an FDIC-supervised institution is subject to 
the primary regulation of another federal depository organization 
supervisory agency, then the FDIC does not administer and enforce the 
Interlocks Act with respect to that affiliate.



PART 349_DERIVATIVES--Table of Contents



   Subpart A_Margin and Capital Requirements for Covered Swap Entities

Sec.
349.1  Authority, purpose, scope, exemptions and compliance dates.
349.2  Definitions.
349.3  Initial margin.
349.4  Variation margin.
349.5  Netting arrangements, minimum transfer amount and satisfaction of 
          collecting and posting requirements.
349.6  Eligible collateral.
349.7  Segregation of collateral.
349.8  Initial margin models and standardized amounts.
349.9  Cross-border application of margin requirements.
349.10  Documentation of margin matters.
349.11  Special rules for affiliates.
349.12  Capital.

Appendix A to Subpart A of Part 349--Standardized Minimum Initial Margin 
          Requirements for Non-Cleared Swaps

[[Page 806]]

          and Non-Cleared Security-Based Swaps
Appendix B to Subpart A of Part 349--Margin Values for Cash and Eligible 
          Noncash Margin Collateral

             Subpart B_Retail Foreign Exchange Transactions

349.13  Authority, purpose, and scope.
349.14  Definitions.
349.15  Prohibited transactions.
349.16  Filing procedures.
349.17  Application and closing out of offsetting long and short 
          positions.
349.18  Disclosure.
349.19  Recordkeeping.
349.20  Capital requirements.
349.21  Margin requirements.
349.22  Required reporting to customers.
349.23  Unlawful representations.
349.24  Authorization to trade.
349.25  Trading and operational standards.
349.26  Supervision.
349.27  Notice of transfers.
349.28  Customer dispute resolution.

    Source: 76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011, unless otherwise noted.



   Subpart A_Margin and Capital Requirements for Covered Swap Entities

    Authority: 7 U.S.C. 6s(e), 15 U.S.C. 78o-10(e), and 12 U.S.C. 1818 
and 12 U.S.C. 1819(a)(Tenth), 12 U.S.C.1813(q), 1818, 1819, and 3108.

    Source: 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 349.1  Authority, purpose, scope, exemptions and compliance dates.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation (FDIC) under section 4s(e) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 6s(e)), section 15F(e) of the Securities Exchange 
Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o-10(e)), and section 8 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818).
    (b) Purpose. Section 4s of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 6s) 
and section 15F of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o-
10) require the FDIC to establish capital and margin requirements for 
any FDIC-insured state-chartered bank that is not a member of the 
Federal Reserve System or FDIC-insured state-chartered savings 
association that is registered as a swap dealer, major swap participant, 
security-based swap dealer, or major security-based swap participant 
with respect to all non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based 
swaps. This subpart implements section 4s of the Commodity Exchange Act 
and section 15F of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 by defining terms 
used in the statutes and related terms, establishing capital and margin 
requirements, and explaining the statutes' requirements.
    (c) Scope. This subpart establishes minimum capital and margin 
requirements for each covered swap entity subject to this subpart with 
respect to all non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps. 
This subpart applies to any non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-
based swap entered into by a covered swap entity on or after the 
relevant compliance date set forth in paragraph (e) of this section. 
Nothing in this subpart is intended to prevent a covered swap entity 
from collecting margin in amounts greater than are required under this 
subpart.
    (d) Exemptions--(1) Swaps. The requirements of this part (except for 
Sec. 45.12) shall not apply to a non-cleared swap if the counterparty:
    (i) Qualifies for an exception from clearing under section 
2(h)(7)(A) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 2(h)(7)(A)) 
and implementing regulations;
    (ii) Qualifies for an exemption from clearing under a rule, 
regulation, or order that the Commodity Futures Trading Commission 
issued pursuant to its authority under section 4(c)(1) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 6(c)(1)) concerning cooperative entities 
that would otherwise be subject to the requirements of section 
2(h)(1)(A) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 2(h)(1)(A)); 
or
    (iii) Satisfies the criteria in section 2(h)(7)(D) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 2(h)(7)(D)) and implementing regulations.
    (2) Security-based swaps. The requirements of this part (except for 
Sec. 349.12) shall not apply to a non-cleared security-based swap if the 
counterparty:
    (i) Qualifies for an exception from clearing under section 3C(g)(1) 
of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c-3(g)(1)) and 
implementing regulations; or

[[Page 807]]

    (ii) Satisfies the criteria in section 3C(g)(4) of the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c-3(g)(4)) and implementing 
regulations.
    (e) Compliance dates. Covered swap entities shall comply with the 
minimum margin requirements of this subpart on or before the following 
dates for non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps entered 
into on or after the following dates:
    (1) September 1, 2016 with respect to the requirements in Sec. 349.3 
for initial margin and Sec. 349.4 for variation margin for any non-
cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps, where both:
    (i) The covered swap entity combined with all its affiliates; and
    (ii) Its counterparty combined with all its affiliates, have an 
average daily aggregate notional amount of non-cleared swaps, non-
cleared security-based swaps, foreign exchange forwards and foreign 
exchange swaps for March, April and May 2016 that exceeds $3 trillion, 
where such amounts are calculated only for business days; and
    (iii) In calculating the amounts in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii) of 
this section, an entity shall count the average daily aggregate notional 
amount of a non-cleared swap, a non-cleared security-based swap, a 
foreign exchange forward or a foreign exchange swap between the entity 
and an affiliate only one time, and shall not count a swap or security-
based swap that is exempt pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) March 1, 2017 with respect to the requirements in Sec. 349.4 for 
variation margin for any other covered swap entity with respect to non-
cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps entered into with any 
other counterparty.
    (3) September 1, 2017 with respect to the requirements in Sec. 349.3 
for initial margin for any non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-
based swaps, where both:
    (i) The covered swap entity combined with all its affiliates; and
    (ii) Its counterparty combined with all its affiliates, have an 
average daily aggregate notional amount of non-cleared swaps, non-
cleared security-based swaps, foreign exchange forwards and foreign 
exchange swaps for March, April and May 2017 that exceeds $2.25 
trillion, where such amounts are calculated only for business days; and
    (iii) In calculating the amounts in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of 
this section, an entity shall count the average daily aggregate notional 
amount of a non-cleared swap, a non-cleared security-based swap, a 
foreign exchange forward or a foreign exchange swap between the entity 
and an affiliate only one time, and shall not count a swap or security-
based swap that is exempt pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.
    (4) September 1, 2018 with respect to the requirements in Sec. 349.3 
for initial margin for any non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-
based swaps, where both:
    (i) The covered swap entity combined with all its affiliates; and
    (ii) Its counterparty combined with all its affiliates, have an 
average daily aggregate notional amount of non-cleared swaps, non-
cleared security-based swaps, foreign exchange forwards and foreign 
exchange swaps for March, April and May 2018 that exceeds $1.5 trillion, 
where such amounts are calculated only for business days; and
    (iii) In calculating the amounts in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and (ii) of 
this section, an entity shall count the average daily aggregate notional 
amount of a non-cleared swap, a non-cleared security-based swap, a 
foreign exchange forward or a foreign exchange swap between the entity 
and an affiliate only one time, and shall not count a swap or security-
based swap that is exempt pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.
    (5) September 1, 2019 with respect to the requirements in Sec. 349.3 
for initial margin for any non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-
based swaps, where both:
    (i) The covered swap entity combined with all its affiliates; and
    (ii) Its counterparty combined with all its affiliates, have an 
average daily aggregate notional amount of non-cleared swaps, non-
cleared security-based swaps, foreign exchange forwards and foreign 
exchange swaps for March, April and May 2019 that exceeds $0.75

[[Page 808]]

trillion, where such amounts are calculated only for business days; and
    (iii) In calculating the amounts in paragraphs (e)(5)(i) and (ii) of 
this section, an entity shall count the average daily aggregate notional 
amount of a non-cleared swap, a non-cleared security-based swap, a 
foreign exchange forward or a foreign exchange swap between the entity 
and an affiliate only one time, and shall not count a swap or security-
based swap that is exempt pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.
    (6) September 1, 2020 with respect to the requirements in Sec. 349.3 
for initial margin for any other covered swap entity with respect to 
non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps entered into with 
any other counterparty.
    (f) Once a covered swap entity must comply with the margin 
requirements for non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps 
with respect to a particular counterparty based on the compliance dates 
in paragraph (e) of this section, the covered swap entity shall remain 
subject to the requirements of this subpart with respect to that 
counterparty.
    (g)(1) If a covered swap entity's counterparty changes its status 
such that a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap with 
that counterparty becomes subject to stricter margin requirements under 
this subpart (such as if the counterparty's status changes from a 
financial end user without material swaps exposure to a financial end 
user with material swaps exposure), then the covered swap entity shall 
comply with the stricter margin requirements for any non-cleared swap or 
non-cleared security-based swap entered into with that counterparty 
after the counterparty changes its status.
    (2) If a covered swap entity's counterparty changes its status such 
that a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap with that 
counterparty becomes subject to less strict margin requirements under 
this subpart (such as if the counterparty's status changes from a 
financial end user with material swaps exposure to a financial end user 
without material swaps exposure), then the covered swap entity may 
comply with the less strict margin requirements for any non-cleared swap 
or non-cleared security-based swap entered into with that counterparty 
after the counterparty changes its status as well as for any outstanding 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap entered into after 
the applicable compliance date in paragraph (e) of this section and 
before the counterparty changed its status.

[80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.2  Definitions.

    Affiliate. A company is an affiliate of another company if:
    (1) Either company consolidates the other on financial statements 
prepared in accordance with U.S. Generally Accepted Accounting 
Principles, the International Financial Reporting Standards, or other 
similar standards;
    (2) Both companies are consolidated with a third company on a 
financial statement prepared in accordance with such principles or 
standards;
    (3) For a company that is not subject to such principles or 
standards, if consolidation as described in paragraph (1) or (2) of this 
definition would have occurred if such principles or standards had 
applied; or
    (4) The FDIC has determined that a company is an affiliate of 
another company, based on FDIC's conclusion that either company provides 
significant support to, or is materially subject to the risks or losses 
of, the other company.
    Bank holding company has the meaning specified in section 2 of the 
Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841).
    Broker has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(4) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(4)).
    Business day means any day other than a Saturday, Sunday, or legal 
holiday.
    Clearing agency has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(23) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(23)).
    Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability company, 
business trust, special purpose entity, association, or similar 
organization.

[[Page 809]]

    Counterparty means, with respect to any non-cleared swap or non-
cleared security-based swap to which a person is a party, each other 
party to such non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap.
    Covered swap entity means any FDIC-insured state-chartered bank that 
is not a member of the Federal Reserve System or FDIC-insured state-
chartered savings association that is a swap entity, or any other entity 
that the FDIC determines.
    Cross-currency swap means a swap in which one party exchanges with 
another party principal and interest rate payments in one currency for 
principal and interest rate payments in another currency, and the 
exchange of principal occurs on the date the swap is entered into, with 
a reversal of the exchange of principal at a later date that is agreed 
upon when the swap is entered into.
    Currency of settlement means a currency in which a party has agreed 
to discharge payment obligations related to a non-cleared swap, a non-
cleared security-based swap, a group of non-cleared swaps, or a group of 
non-cleared security-based swaps subject to a master agreement at the 
regularly occurring dates on which such payments are due in the ordinary 
course.
    Day of execution means the calendar day at the time the parties 
enter into a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap, 
provided:
    (1) If each party is in a different calendar day at the time the 
parties enter into the non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based 
swap, the day of execution is deemed the latter of the two dates; and
    (2) If a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap is:
    (i) Entered into after 4:00 p.m. in the location of a party; or
    (ii) Entered into on a day that is not a business day in the 
location of a party, then the non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-
based swap is deemed to have been entered into on the immediately 
succeeding day that is a business day for both parties, and both parties 
shall determine the day of execution with reference to that business 
day.
    Dealer has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(5) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(5)).
    Depository institution has the meaning specified in section 3(c) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)).
    Derivatives clearing organization has the meaning specified in 
section 1a(15) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(15)).
    Eligible collateral means collateral described in Sec. 349.6.
    Eligible master netting agreement means a written, legally 
enforceable agreement provided that:
    (1) The agreement creates a single legal obligation for all 
individual transactions covered by the agreement upon an event of 
default following any stay permitted by paragraph (2) of this 
definition, including upon an event of receivership, conservatorship, 
insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the counterparty;
    (2) The agreement provides the covered swap entity the right to 
accelerate, terminate, and close-out on a net basis all transactions 
under the agreement and to liquidate or set-off collateral promptly upon 
an event of default, including upon an event of receivership, 
conservatorship, insolvency, liquidation, or similar proceeding, of the 
counterparty, provided that, in any such case, any exercise of rights 
under the agreement will not be stayed or avoided under applicable law 
in the relevant jurisdictions, other than:
    (i) In receivership, conservatorship, or resolution under the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq.), Title II of the 
Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 
5381 et seq.), the Federal Housing Enterprises Financial Safety and 
Soundness Act of 1992, as amended (12 U.S.C. 4617), or the Farm Credit 
Act of 1971, as amended (12 U.S.C. 2183 and 2279cc), or laws of foreign 
jurisdictions that are substantially similar to the U.S. laws referenced 
in this paragraph (2)(i) in order to facilitate the orderly resolution 
of the defaulting counterparty; or
    (ii) Where the agreement is subject by its terms to, or 
incorporates, any of

[[Page 810]]

the laws referenced in paragraph (2)(i) of this definition;
    (3) The agreement does not contain a walkaway clause (that is, a 
provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make a lower 
payment than it otherwise would make under the agreement, or no payment 
at all, to a defaulter or the estate of a defaulter, even if the 
defaulter or the estate of the defaulter is a net creditor under the 
agreement); and
    (4) A covered swap entity that relies on the agreement for purposes 
of calculating the margin required by this part must:
    (i) Conduct sufficient legal review to conclude with a well-founded 
basis (and maintain sufficient written documentation of that legal 
review) that:
    (A) The agreement meets the requirements of paragraph (2) of this 
definition; and
    (B) In the event of a legal challenge (including one resulting from 
default or from receivership, conservatorship, insolvency, liquidation, 
or similar proceeding), the relevant court and administrative 
authorities would find the agreement to be legal, valid, binding, and 
enforceable under the law of the relevant jurisdictions; and
    (ii) Establish and maintain written procedures to monitor possible 
changes in relevant law and to ensure that the agreement continues to 
satisfy the requirements of this definition.
    Financial end user means:
    (1) Any counterparty that is not a swap entity and that is:
    (i) A bank holding company or an affiliate thereof; a savings and 
loan holding company; a U.S. intermediate holding company established or 
designated for purposes of compliance with 12 CFR 252.153; or a nonbank 
financial institution supervised by the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System under Title I of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street 
Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 5323);
    (ii) A depository institution; a foreign bank; a Federal credit 
union or State credit union as defined in section 2 of the Federal 
Credit Union Act (12 U.S.C. 1752(1) & (6)); an institution that 
functions solely in a trust or fiduciary capacity as described in 
section 2(c)(2)(D) of the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 
1841(c)(2)(D)); an industrial loan company, an industrial bank, or other 
similar institution described in section 2(c)(2)(H) of the Bank Holding 
Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841(c)(2)(H));
    (iii) An entity that is state-licensed or registered as:
    (A) A credit or lending entity, including a finance company; money 
lender; installment lender; consumer lender or lending company; mortgage 
lender, broker, or bank; motor vehicle title pledge lender; payday or 
deferred deposit lender; premium finance company; commercial finance or 
lending company; or commercial mortgage company; except entities 
registered or licensed solely on account of financing the entity's 
direct sales of goods or services to customers;
    (B) A money services business, including a check casher; money 
transmitter; currency dealer or exchange; or money order or traveler's 
check issuer;
    (iv) A regulated entity as defined in section 1303(20) of the 
Federal Housing Enterprises Financial Safety and Soundness Act of 1992, 
as amended (12 U.S.C. 4502(20)) or any entity for which the Federal 
Housing Finance Agency or its successor is the primary federal 
regulator;
    (v) Any institution chartered in accordance with the Farm Credit Act 
of 1971, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 2001 et seq., that is regulated by the 
Farm Credit Administration;
    (vi) A securities holding company; a broker or dealer; an investment 
adviser as defined in section 202(a) of the Investment Advisers Act of 
1940 (15 U.S.C. 80b-2(a)); an investment company registered with the 
U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission under the Investment Company Act 
of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.); or a company that has elected to be 
regulated as a business development company pursuant to section 54(a) of 
the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-53(a));
    (vii) A private fund as defined in section 202(a) of the Investment 
Advisers Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80-b-2(a)); an entity that would be an 
investment company under section 3 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 
(15 U.S.C. 80a-3) but for section 3(c)(5)(C); or an entity that is 
deemed not to be an investment

[[Page 811]]

company under section 3 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 pursuant 
to Investment Company Act Rule 3a-7 (17 CFR 270.3a-7) of the U.S. 
Securities and Exchange Commission;
    (viii) A commodity pool, a commodity pool operator, or a commodity 
trading advisor as defined, respectively, in section 1a(10), 1a(11), and 
1a(12) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(10), 1a(11), 
and 1a(12)); a floor broker, a floor trader, or introducing broker as 
defined, respectively, in 1a(22), 1a(23) and 1a(31) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(22), 1a(23), and 1a(31)); or a futures 
commission merchant as defined in 1a(28) of the Commodity Exchange Act 
of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(28));
    (ix) An employee benefit plan as defined in paragraphs (3) and (32) 
of section 3 of the Employee Retirement Income and Security Act of 1974 
(29 U.S.C. 1002);
    (x) An entity that is organized as an insurance company, primarily 
engaged in writing insurance or reinsuring risks underwritten by 
insurance companies, or is subject to supervision as such by a State 
insurance regulator or foreign insurance regulator;
    (xi) An entity, person or arrangement that is, or holds itself out 
as being, an entity, person, or arrangement that raises money from 
investors, accepts money from clients, or uses its own money primarily 
for the purpose of investing or trading or facilitating the investing or 
trading in loans, securities, swaps, funds or other assets for resale or 
other disposition or otherwise trading in loans, securities, swaps, 
funds or other assets; or
    (xii) An entity that would be a financial end user described in 
paragraph (1) of this definition or a swap entity, if it were organized 
under the laws of the United States or any State thereof.
    (2) The term ``financial end user'' does not include any 
counterparty that is:
    (i) A sovereign entity;
    (ii) A multilateral development bank;
    (iii) The Bank for International Settlements;
    (iv) An entity that is exempt from the definition of financial 
entity pursuant to section 2(h)(7)(C)(iii) of the Commodity Exchange Act 
of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 2(h)(7)(C)(iii)) and implementing regulations; or
    (v) An affiliate that qualifies for the exemption from clearing 
pursuant to section 2(h)(7)(D) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 
U.S.C. 2(h)(7)(D)) or section 3C(g)(4) of the Securities Exchange Act of 
1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c-3(g)(4)) and implementing regulations.
    Foreign bank means an organization that is organized under the laws 
of a foreign country and that engages directly in the business of 
banking outside the United States.
    Foreign exchange forward has the meaning specified in section 1a(24) 
of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(24)).
    Foreign exchange swap has the meaning specified in section 1a(25) of 
the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(25)).
    Initial margin means the collateral as calculated in accordance with 
Sec. 349.8 that is posted or collected in connection with a non-cleared 
swap or non-cleared security-based swap.
    Initial margin collection amount means:
    (1) In the case of a covered swap entity that does not use an 
initial margin model, the amount of initial margin with respect to a 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap that is required 
under appendix A of this subpart; and
    (2) In the case of a covered swap entity that uses an initial margin 
model pursuant to Sec. 349.8, the amount of initial margin with respect 
to a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap that is 
required under the initial margin model.
    Initial margin model means an internal risk management model that:
    (1) Has been developed and designed to identify an appropriate, 
risk-based amount of initial margin that the covered swap entity must 
collect with respect to one or more non-cleared swaps or non-cleared 
security-based swaps to which the covered swap entity is a party; and
    (2) Has been approved by the FDIC pursuant to Sec. 349.8.
    Initial margin threshold amount means an aggregate credit exposure 
of $50 million resulting from all non-cleared

[[Page 812]]

swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps between a covered swap entity 
and its affiliates, and a counterparty and its affiliates. For purposes 
of this calculation, an entity shall not count a swap or security-based 
swap that is exempt pursuant to Sec. 349.1(d).
    Major currency means:
    (1) United States Dollar (USD);
    (2) Canadian Dollar (CAD);
    (3) Euro (EUR);
    (4) United Kingdom Pound (GBP);
    (5) Japanese Yen (JPY);
    (6) Swiss Franc (CHF);
    (7) New Zealand Dollar (NZD);
    (8) Australian Dollar (AUD);
    (9) Swedish Kronor (SEK);
    (10) Danish Kroner (DKK);
    (11) Norwegian Krone (NOK); or
    (12) Any other currency as determined by the FDIC.
    Margin means initial margin and variation margin.
    Market intermediary means a securities holding company; a broker or 
dealer; a futures commission merchant as defined in 1a(28) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(28)); a swap dealer as 
defined in section 1a(49) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 
U.S.C. 1a(49)); or a security-based swap dealer as defined in section 
3(a)(71) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(71)).
    Material swaps exposure for an entity means that an entity and its 
affiliates have an average daily aggregate notional amount of non-
cleared swaps, non-cleared security-based swaps, foreign exchange 
forwards, and foreign exchange swaps with all counterparties for June, 
July, and August of the previous calendar year that exceeds $8 billion, 
where such amount is calculated only for business days. An entity shall 
count the average daily aggregate notional amount of a non-cleared swap, 
a non-cleared security-based swap, a foreign exchange forward or a 
foreign exchange swap between the entity and an affiliate only one time. 
For purposes of this calculation, an entity shall not count a swap or 
security-based swap that is exempt pursuant to Sec. 349.1(d).
    Multilateral development bank means the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the Multilateral Investment Guarantee 
Agency, the International Finance Corporation, the Inter-American 
Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the African Development 
Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the European 
Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, the Nordic Investment 
Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic Development Bank, the 
Council of Europe Development Bank, and any other entity that provides 
financing for national or regional development in which the U.S. 
government is a shareholder or contributing member or which the FDIC 
determines poses comparable credit risk.
    Non-cleared swap means a swap that is not cleared by a derivatives 
clearing organization registered with the Commodity Futures Trading 
Commission pursuant to section 5b(a) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 
1936 (7 U.S.C. 7a-1(a)) or by a clearing organization that the Commodity 
Futures Trading Commission has exempted from registration by rule or 
order pursuant to section 5b(h) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 
U.S.C. 7a-1(h)).
    Non-cleared security-based swap means a security-based swap that is 
not, directly or indirectly, submitted to and cleared by a clearing 
agency registered with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission 
pursuant to section 17A of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78q-1) or by a clearing agency that the U.S. Securities and 
Exchange Commission has exempted from registration by rule or order 
pursuant to section 17A of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78q-1).
    Prudential regulator has the meaning specified in section 1a(39) of 
the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(39)).
    Savings and loan holding company has the meaning specified in 
section 10(n) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1467a(n)).
    Securities holding company has the meaning specified in section 618 
of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 
U.S.C. 1850a).
    Security-based swap has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(68) of 
the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(68)).

[[Page 813]]

    Sovereign entity means a central government (including the U.S. 
government) or an agency, department, ministry, or central bank of a 
central government.
    State means any State, commonwealth, territory, or possession of the 
United States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto 
Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, American Samoa, 
Guam, or the United States Virgin Islands.
    Subsidiary. A company is a subsidiary of another company if:
    (1) The company is consolidated by the other company on financial 
statements prepared in accordance with U.S. Generally Accepted 
Accounting Principles, the International Financial Reporting Standards, 
or other similar standards;
    (2) For a company that is not subject to such principles or 
standards, if consolidation as described in paragraph (1) of this 
definition would have occurred if such principles or standards had 
applied; or
    (3) The FDIC has determined that the company is a subsidiary of 
another company, based on FDIC's conclusion that either company provides 
significant support to, or is materially subject to the risks of loss 
of, the other company.
    Swap has the meaning specified in section 1a(47) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(47)).
    Swap entity means a person that is registered with the Commodity 
Futures Trading Commission as a swap dealer or major swap participant 
pursuant to the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1 et seq.), or 
a person that is registered with the U.S. Securities and Exchange 
Commission as a security-based swap dealer or a major security-based 
swap participant pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78a et seq.).
    U.S. Government-sponsored enterprise means an entity established or 
chartered by the U.S. government to serve public purposes specified by 
federal statute but whose debt obligations are not explicitly guaranteed 
by the full faith and credit of the U.S. government.
    Variation margin means collateral provided by one party to its 
counterparty to meet the performance of its obligations under one or 
more non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps between the 
parties as a result of a change in value of such obligations since the 
last time such collateral was provided.
    Variation margin amount means the cumulative mark-to-market change 
in value to a covered swap entity of a non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap, as measured from the date it is entered into (or, 
in the case of a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap 
that has a positive or negative value to a covered swap entity on the 
date it is entered into, such positive or negative value plus any 
cumulative mark-to-market change in value to the covered swap entity of 
a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap after such date), 
less the value of all variation margin previously collected, plus the 
value of all variation margin previously posted with respect to such 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap.

[80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.3  Initial margin.

    (a) Collection of margin. A covered swap entity shall collect 
initial margin with respect to any non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap from a counterparty that is a financial end user 
with material swaps exposure or that is a swap entity in an amount that 
is no less than the greater of:
    (1) Zero; or
    (2) The initial margin collection amount for such non-cleared swap 
or non-cleared security-based swap less the initial margin threshold 
amount (not including any portion of the initial margin threshold amount 
already applied by the covered swap entity or its affiliates to other 
non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps with the 
counterparty or its affiliates), as applicable.
    (b) Posting of margin. A covered swap entity shall post initial 
margin with respect to any non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-
based swap to a counterparty that is a financial end user with material 
swaps exposure. Such initial margin shall be in an

[[Page 814]]

amount at least as large as the covered swap entity would be required to 
collect under paragraph (a) of this section if it were in the place of 
the counterparty.
    (c) Timing. A covered swap entity shall comply with the initial 
margin requirements described in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section 
on each business day, for a period beginning on or before the business 
day following the day of execution and ending on the date the non-
cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap terminates or expires.
    (d) Other counterparties. A covered swap entity is not required to 
collect or post initial margin with respect to any non-cleared swap or 
non-cleared security-based swap described in Sec. 349.1(d). For any 
other non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap between a 
covered swap entity and a counterparty that is neither a financial end 
user with a material swaps exposure nor a swap entity, the covered swap 
entity shall collect initial margin at such times and in such forms and 
such amounts (if any), that the covered swap entity determines 
appropriately addresses the credit risk posed by the counterparty and 
the risks of such non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap.



Sec. 349.4  Variation margin.

    (a) General. After the date on which a covered swap entity enters 
into a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap with a swap 
entity or financial end user, the covered swap entity shall collect 
variation margin equal to the variation margin amount from the 
counterparty to such non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap 
when the amount is positive and post variation margin equal to the 
variation margin amount to the counterparty to such non-cleared swap or 
non-cleared security-based swap when the amount is negative.
    (b) Timing. A covered swap entity shall comply with the variation 
margin requirements described in paragraph (a) of this section on each 
business day, for a period beginning on or before the business day 
following the day of execution and ending on the date the non-cleared 
swap or non-cleared security based swap terminates or expires.
    (c) Other counterparties. A covered swap entity is not required to 
collect or post variation margin with respect to any non-cleared swap or 
non-cleared security-based swap described in Sec. 349.1(d). For any 
other non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap between a 
covered swap entity and a counterparty that is neither a financial end 
user nor a swap entity, the covered swap entity shall collect variation 
margin at such times and in such forms and such amounts (if any), that 
the covered swap entity determines appropriately addresses the credit 
risk posed by the counterparty and the risks of such non-cleared swap or 
non-cleared security-based swap.



Sec. 349.5  Netting arrangements, minimum transfer amount,
and satisfaction of collecting and posting requirements.

    (a) Netting arrangements. (1) For purposes of calculating and 
complying with the initial margin requirements of Sec. 349.3 using an 
initial margin model as described in Sec. 349.8, or with the variation 
margin requirements of Sec. 349.4, a covered swap entity may net non-
cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps in accordance with 
this subsection.
    (2) To the extent that one or more non-cleared swaps or non-cleared 
security-based swaps are executed pursuant to an eligible master netting 
agreement between a covered swap entity and its counterparty that is a 
swap entity or financial end user, a covered swap entity may calculate 
and comply with the applicable requirements of this subpart on an 
aggregate net basis with respect to all non-cleared swaps and non-
cleared security-based swaps governed by such agreement, subject to 
paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (3)(i) Except as permitted in paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section, 
if an eligible master netting agreement covers non-cleared swaps and 
non-cleared security-based swaps entered into on or after the applicable 
compliance date set forth in Sec. 349.1(e) or (g), all the non-cleared 
swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps covered by that agreement are 
subject to the requirements

[[Page 815]]

of this subpart and included in the aggregate netting portfolio for the 
purposes of calculating and complying with the margin requirements of 
this subpart.
    (ii) An eligible master netting agreement may identify one or more 
separate netting portfolios that independently meet the requirements in 
paragraph (1) of the definition of ``Eligible master netting agreement'' 
in Sec. 349.2 and to which collection and posting of margin applies on 
an aggregate net basis separate from and exclusive of any other non-
cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps covered by the 
eligible master netting agreement. Any such netting portfolio that 
contains any non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap entered 
into on or after the applicable compliance date set forth in 
Sec. 349.1(e) or (g) is subject to the requirements of this subpart. Any 
such netting portfolio that contains only non-cleared swaps or non-
cleared security-based swaps entered into before the applicable 
compliance date is not subject to the requirements of this subpart.
    (4) If a covered swap entity cannot conclude after sufficient legal 
review with a well-founded basis that the netting agreement described in 
this section meets the definition of eligible master netting agreement 
set forth in Sec. 349.2, the covered swap entity must treat the non-
cleared swaps and non-cleared security based swaps covered by the 
agreement on a gross basis for the purposes of calculating and complying 
with the requirements of this subpart to collect margin, but the covered 
swap entity may net those non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-
based swaps in accordance with paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this 
section for the purposes of calculating and complying with the 
requirements of this subpart to post margin.
    (b) Minimum transfer amount. Notwithstanding Sec. 349.3 or 
Sec. 349.4, a covered swap entity is not required to collect or post 
margin pursuant to this subpart with respect to a particular 
counterparty unless and until the combined amount of initial margin and 
variation margin that is required pursuant to this subpart to be 
collected or posted and that has not yet been collected or posted with 
respect to the counterparty is greater than $500,000.
    (c) Satisfaction of collecting and posting requirements. A covered 
swap entity shall not be deemed to have violated its obligation to 
collect or post margin from or to a counterparty under Sec. 349.3, 
Sec. 349.4, or Sec. 349.6(e) if:
    (1) The counterparty has refused or otherwise failed to provide or 
accept the required margin to or from the covered swap entity; and
    (2) The covered swap entity has:
    (i) Made the necessary efforts to collect or post the required 
margin, including the timely initiation and continued pursuit of formal 
dispute resolution mechanisms, or has otherwise demonstrated upon 
request to the satisfaction of the FDIC that it has made appropriate 
efforts to collect or post the required margin; or
    (ii) Commenced termination of the non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap with the counterparty promptly following the 
applicable cure period and notification requirements.



Sec. 349.6  Eligible collateral.

    (a) Non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps with a 
swap entity. For a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap 
with a swap entity, a covered swap entity shall collect initial margin 
and variation margin required pursuant to this subpart solely in the 
form of the following types of collateral:
    (1) Immediately available cash funds that are denominated in:
    (i) U.S. dollars or another major currency; or
    (ii) The currency of settlement for the non-cleared swap or non-
cleared security-based swap;
    (2) With respect to initial margin only:
    (i) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, the U.S. Department 
of the Treasury;
    (ii) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, a U.S. government 
agency (other than the U.S. Department of Treasury) whose obligations 
are fully

[[Page 816]]

guaranteed by the full faith and credit of the United States government;
    (iii) A security that is issued by, or fully guaranteed as to the 
payment of principal and interest by, the European Central Bank or a 
sovereign entity that is assigned no higher than a 20 percent risk 
weight under the capital rules applicable to the covered swap entity as 
set forth in Sec. 349.12;
    (iv) A publicly traded debt security issued by, or an asset-backed 
security fully guaranteed as to the payment of principal and interest 
by, a U.S. Government-sponsored enterprise that is operating with 
capital support or another form of direct financial assistance received 
from the U.S. government that enables the repayments of the U.S. 
Government-sponsored enterprise's eligible securities;
    (v) A publicly traded debt security that meets the terms of 12 CFR 
1.2(d) and is issued by a U.S. Government-sponsored enterprise not 
operating with capital support or another form of direct financial 
assistance from the U.S. government, and is not an asset-backed 
security;
    (vi) A security that is issued by, or fully guaranteed as to the 
payment of principal and interest by, the Bank for International 
Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, or a multilateral 
development bank;
    (vii) A security solely in the form of:
    (A) Publicly traded debt not otherwise described in paragraph (a)(2) 
of this section that meets the terms of 12 CFR 1.2(d) and is not an 
asset-backed security;
    (B) Publicly traded common equity that is included in:
    (1) The Standard & Poor's Composite 1500 Index or any other similar 
index of liquid and readily marketable equity securities as determined 
by the FDIC; or
    (2) An index that a covered swap entity's supervisor in a foreign 
jurisdiction recognizes for purposes of including publicly traded common 
equity as initial margin under applicable regulatory policy, if held in 
that foreign jurisdiction;
    (viii) Securities in the form of redeemable securities in a pooled 
investment fund representing the security-holder's proportional interest 
in the fund's net assets and that are issued and redeemed only on the 
basis of the market value of the fund's net assets prepared each 
business day after the security-holder makes its investment commitment 
or redemption request to the fund, if:
    (A) The fund's investments are limited to the following:
    (1) Securities that are issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, the U.S. Department 
of the Treasury, and immediately-available cash funds denominated in 
U.S. dollars; or
    (2) Securities denominated in a common currency and issued by, or 
fully guaranteed as to the payment of principal and interest by, the 
European Central Bank or a sovereign entity that is assigned no higher 
than a 20 percent risk weight under the capital rules applicable to the 
covered swap entity as set forth in Sec. 349.12, and immediately-
available cash funds denominated in the same currency; and
    (B) Assets of the fund may not be transferred through securities 
lending, securities borrowing, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase 
agreements, or other means that involve the fund having rights to 
acquire the same or similar assets from the transferee; or
    (ix) Gold.
    (b) Non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps with a 
financial end user. For a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based 
swap with a financial end user, a covered swap entity shall collect and 
post initial margin and variation margin required pursuant to this 
subpart solely in the form of the following types of collateral:
    (1) Immediately available cash funds that are denominated in:
    (i) U.S. dollars or another major currency; or
    (ii) The currency of settlement for the non-cleared swap or non-
cleared security-based swap;
    (2) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, the U.S. Department 
of the Treasury;
    (3) A security that is issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the

[[Page 817]]

timely payment of principal and interest by, a U.S. government agency 
(other than the U.S. Department of Treasury) whose obligations are fully 
guaranteed by the full faith and credit of the United States government;
    (4) A security that is issued by, or fully guaranteed as to the 
payment of principal and interest by, the European Central Bank or a 
sovereign entity that is assigned no higher than a 20 percent risk 
weight under the capital rules applicable to the covered swap entity as 
set forth in Sec. 349.12;
    (5) A publicly traded debt security issued by, or an asset-backed 
security fully guaranteed as to the payment of principal and interest 
by, a U.S. Government-sponsored enterprise that is operating with 
capital support or another form of direct financial assistance received 
from the U.S. government that enables the repayments of the U.S. 
Government-sponsored enterprise's eligible securities;
    (6) A publicly traded debt security that meets the terms of 12 CFR 
1.2(d) and is issued by a U.S. Government-sponsored enterprise not 
operating with capital support or another form of direct financial 
assistance from the U.S. government, and is not an asset-backed 
security;
    (7) A security that is issued by, or fully guaranteed as to the 
payment of principal and interest by, the Bank for International 
Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, or a multilateral 
development bank;
    (8) A security solely in the form of:
    (i) Publicly traded debt not otherwise described in this paragraph 
(b) that meets the terms of 12 CFR 1.2(d) and is not an asset-backed 
security;
    (ii) Publicly traded common equity that is included in:
    (A) The Standard & Poor's Composite 1500 Index or any other similar 
index of liquid and readily marketable equity securities as determined 
by the FDIC; or
    (B) An index that a covered swap entity's supervisor in a foreign 
jurisdiction recognizes for purposes of including publicly traded common 
equity as initial margin under applicable regulatory policy, if held in 
that foreign jurisdiction;
    (9) Securities in the form of redeemable securities in a pooled 
investment fund representing the security-holder's proportional interest 
in the fund's net assets and that are issued and redeemed only on the 
basis of the market value of the fund's net assets prepared each 
business day after the security-holder makes its investment commitment 
or redemption request to the fund, if:
    (i) The fund's investments are limited to the following:
    (A) Securities that are issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by, the U.S. Department 
of the Treasury, and immediately-available cash funds denominated in 
U.S. dollars; or
    (B) Securities denominated in a common currency and issued by, or 
fully guaranteed as to the payment of principal and interest by, the 
European Central Bank or a sovereign entity that is assigned no higher 
than a 20 percent risk weight under the capital rules applicable to the 
covered swap entity as set forth in Sec. 349.12, and immediately-
available cash funds denominated in the same currency; and
    (ii) Assets of the fund may not be transferred through securities 
lending, securities borrowing, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase 
agreements, or other means that involve the fund having rights to 
acquire the same or similar assets from the transferee; or
    (10) Gold.
    (c)(1) The value of any eligible collateral collected or posted to 
satisfy margin requirements pursuant to this subpart is subject to the 
sum of the following discounts, as applicable:
    (i) An 8 percent discount for variation margin collateral 
denominated in a currency that is not the currency of settlement for the 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap, except for 
immediately available cash funds denominated in U.S. dollars or another 
major currency;
    (ii) An 8 percent discount for initial margin collateral denominated 
in a currency that is not the currency of settlement for the non-cleared 
swap or

[[Page 818]]

non-cleared security-based swap, except for eligible types of collateral 
denominated in a single termination currency designated as payable to 
the non-posting counterparty as part of the eligible master netting 
agreement; and
    (iii) For variation and initial margin non-cash collateral, the 
discounts described in appendix B of this subpart.
    (2) The value of variation margin or initial margin collateral is 
computed as the product of the cash or market value of the eligible 
collateral asset times one minus the applicable discounts pursuant to 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section expressed in percentage terms. The 
total value of all variation margin or initial margin collateral is 
calculated as the sum of those values for each eligible collateral 
asset.
    (d) Notwithstanding paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, eligible 
collateral for initial margin and variation margin required by this 
subpart does not include a security issued by:
    (1) The party or an affiliate of the party pledging such collateral;
    (2) A bank holding company, a savings and loan holding company, a 
U.S. intermediate holding company established or designated for purposes 
of compliance with 12 CFR 252.153, a foreign bank, a depository 
institution, a market intermediary, a company that would be any of the 
foregoing if it were organized under the laws of the United States or 
any State, or an affiliate of any of the foregoing institutions; or
    (3) A nonbank financial institution supervised by the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System under Title I of the Dodd-Frank 
Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 5323).
    (e) A covered swap entity shall monitor the market value and 
eligibility of all collateral collected and posted to satisfy the 
minimum initial margin and minimum variation margin requirements of this 
subpart. To the extent that the market value of such collateral has 
declined, the covered swap entity shall promptly collect or post such 
additional eligible collateral as is necessary to maintain compliance 
with the margin requirements of this subpart. To the extent that the 
collateral is no longer eligible, the covered swap entity shall promptly 
collect or post sufficient eligible replacement collateral to comply 
with the margin requirements of this subpart.
    (f) A covered swap entity may collect or post initial margin and 
variation margin that is required by Sec. 349.3(d) or Sec. 349.4(c) or 
that is not required pursuant to this subpart in any form of collateral.

[80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.7  Segregation of collateral.

    (a) A covered swap entity that posts any collateral other than for 
variation margin with respect to a non-cleared swap or a non-cleared 
security-based swap shall require that all funds or other property other 
than variation margin provided by the covered swap entity be held by one 
or more custodians that are not the covered swap entity or counterparty 
and not affiliates of the covered swap entity or the counterparty.
    (b) A covered swap entity that collects initial margin required by 
Sec. 349.3(a) with respect to a non-cleared swap or a non-cleared 
security-based swap shall require that such initial margin be held by 
one or more custodians that are not the covered swap entity or 
counterparty and not affiliates of the covered swap entity or the 
counterparty.
    (c) For purposes of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the 
custodian must act pursuant to a custody agreement that:
    (1) Prohibits the custodian from rehypothecating, repledging, 
reusing, or otherwise transferring (through securities lending, 
securities borrowing, repurchase agreement, reverse repurchase agreement 
or other means) the collateral held by the custodian, except that cash 
collateral may be held in a general deposit account with the custodian 
if the funds in the account are used to purchase an asset described in 
Sec. 349.6(a)(2) or (b), such asset is held in compliance with this 
Sec. 349.7, and such purchase takes place within a time period 
reasonably necessary to consummate such purchase after the cash 
collateral is posted as initial margin; and
    (2) Is a legal, valid, binding, and enforceable agreement under the 
laws of all relevant jurisdictions, including in

[[Page 819]]

the event of bankruptcy, insolvency, or a similar proceeding.
    (d) Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(1) of this section, a custody 
agreement may permit the posting party to substitute or direct any 
reinvestment of posted collateral held by the custodian, provided that, 
with respect to collateral collected by a covered swap entity pursuant 
to Sec. 349.3(a) or posted by a covered swap entity pursuant to 
Sec. 349.3(b), the agreement requires the posting party to:
    (1) Substitute only funds or other property that would qualify as 
eligible collateral under Sec. 349.6, and for which the amount net of 
applicable discounts described in appendix B of this subpart would be 
sufficient to meet the requirements of Sec. 349.3; and
    (2) Direct reinvestment of funds only in assets that would qualify 
as eligible collateral under Sec. 349.6, and for which the amount net of 
applicable discounts described in appendix B of this subpart would be 
sufficient to meet the requirements of Sec. 349.3.



Sec. 349.8  Initial margin models and standardized amounts.

    (a) Standardized amounts. Unless a covered swap entity's initial 
margin model conforms to the requirements of this section, the covered 
swap entity shall calculate the amount of initial margin required to be 
collected or posted for one or more non-cleared swaps or non-cleared 
security-based swaps with a given counterparty pursuant to Sec. 349.3 on 
a daily basis pursuant to appendix A of this subpart.
    (b) Use of initial margin models. A covered swap entity may 
calculate the amount of initial margin required to be collected or 
posted for one or more non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based 
swaps with a given counterparty pursuant to Sec. 349.3 on a daily basis 
using an initial margin model only if the initial margin model meets the 
requirements of this section.
    (c) Requirements for initial margin model. (1) A covered swap entity 
must obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC before using any 
initial margin model to calculate the initial margin required in this 
subpart.
    (2) A covered swap entity must demonstrate that the initial margin 
model satisfies all of the requirements of this section on an ongoing 
basis.
    (3) A covered swap entity must notify the FDIC in writing 60 days 
prior to:
    (i) Extending the use of an initial margin model that the FDIC has 
approved under this section to an additional product type;
    (ii) Making any change to any initial margin model approved by the 
FDIC under this section that would result in a material change in the 
covered swap entity's assessment of initial margin requirements; or
    (iii) Making any material change to modeling assumptions used by the 
initial margin model.
    (4) The FDIC may rescind its approval of the use of any initial 
margin model, in whole or in part, or may impose additional conditions 
or requirements if the FDIC determines, in its sole discretion, that the 
initial margin model no longer complies with this section.
    (d) Quantitative requirements. (1) The covered swap entity's initial 
margin model must calculate an amount of initial margin that is equal to 
the potential future exposure of the non-cleared swap, non-cleared 
security-based swap or netting portfolio of non-cleared swaps or non-
cleared security-based swaps covered by an eligible master netting 
agreement. Potential future exposure is an estimate of the one-tailed 99 
percent confidence interval for an increase in the value of the non-
cleared swap, non-cleared security-based swap or netting portfolio of 
non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps due to an 
instantaneous price shock that is equivalent to a movement in all 
material underlying risk factors, including prices, rates, and spreads, 
over a holding period equal to the shorter of ten business days or the 
maturity of the non-cleared swap, non-cleared security-based swap or 
netting portfolio.
    (2) All data used to calibrate the initial margin model must be 
based on an equally weighted historical observation period of at least 
one year and not more than five years and must incorporate a period of 
significant financial stress for each broad asset class that is 
appropriate to the non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based 
swaps

[[Page 820]]

to which the initial margin model is applied.
    (3) The covered swap entity's initial margin model must use risk 
factors sufficient to measure all material price risks inherent in the 
transactions for which initial margin is being calculated. The risk 
categories must include, but should not be limited to, foreign exchange 
or interest rate risk, credit risk, equity risk, and commodity risk, as 
appropriate. For material exposures in significant currencies and 
markets, modeling techniques must capture spread and basis risk and must 
incorporate a sufficient number of segments of the yield curve to 
capture differences in volatility and imperfect correlation of rates 
along the yield curve.
    (4) In the case of a non-cleared cross-currency swap, the covered 
swap entity's initial margin model need not recognize any risks or risk 
factors associated with the fixed, physically-settled foreign exchange 
transaction associated with the exchange of principal embedded in the 
non-cleared cross-currency swap. The initial margin model must recognize 
all material risks and risk factors associated with all other payments 
and cash flows that occur during the life of the non-cleared cross-
currency swap.
    (5) The initial margin model may calculate initial margin for a non-
cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap or a netting portfolio 
of non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps covered by an 
eligible master netting agreement. It may reflect offsetting exposures, 
diversification, and other hedging benefits for non-cleared swaps and 
non-cleared security-based swaps that are governed by the same eligible 
master netting agreement by incorporating empirical correlations within 
the following broad risk categories, provided the covered swap entity 
validates and demonstrates the reasonableness of its process for 
modeling and measuring hedging benefits: Commodity, credit, equity, and 
foreign exchange or interest rate. Empirical correlations under an 
eligible master netting agreement may be recognized by the initial 
margin model within each broad risk category, but not across broad risk 
categories.
    (6) If the initial margin model does not explicitly reflect 
offsetting exposures, diversification, and hedging benefits between 
subsets of non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps within 
a broad risk category, the covered swap entity must calculate an amount 
of initial margin separately for each subset within which such 
relationships are explicitly recognized by the initial margin model. The 
sum of the initial margin amounts calculated for each subset of non-
cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps within a broad risk 
category will be used to determine the aggregate initial margin due from 
the counterparty for the portfolio of non-cleared swaps and non-cleared 
security-based swaps within the broad risk category.
    (7) The sum of the initial margin amounts calculated for each broad 
risk category will be used to determine the aggregate initial margin due 
from the counterparty.
    (8) The initial margin model may not permit the calculation of any 
initial margin collection amount to be offset by, or otherwise take into 
account, any initial margin that may be owed or otherwise payable by the 
covered swap entity to the counterparty.
    (9) The initial margin model must include all material risks arising 
from the nonlinear price characteristics of option positions or 
positions with embedded optionality and the sensitivity of the market 
value of the positions to changes in the volatility of the underlying 
rates, prices, or other material risk factors.
    (10) The covered swap entity may not omit any risk factor from the 
calculation of its initial margin that the covered swap entity uses in 
its initial margin model unless it has first demonstrated to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC that such omission is appropriate.
    (11) The covered swap entity may not incorporate any proxy or 
approximation used to capture the risks of the covered swap entity's 
non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps unless it has 
first demonstrated to the satisfaction of the FDIC that

[[Page 821]]

such proxy or approximation is appropriate.
    (12) The covered swap entity must have a rigorous and well-defined 
process for re-estimating, re-evaluating, and updating its internal 
margin model to ensure continued applicability and relevance.
    (13) The covered swap entity must review and, as necessary, revise 
the data used to calibrate the initial margin model at least annually, 
and more frequently as market conditions warrant, to ensure that the 
data incorporate a period of significant financial stress appropriate to 
the non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps to which the 
initial margin model is applied.
    (14) The level of sophistication of the initial margin model must be 
commensurate with the complexity of the non-cleared swaps and non-
cleared security-based swaps to which it is applied. In calculating an 
initial margin collection amount, the initial margin model may make use 
of any of the generally accepted approaches for modeling the risk of a 
single instrument or portfolio of instruments.
    (15) The FDIC may in its sole discretion require a covered swap 
entity using an initial margin model to collect a greater amount of 
initial margin than that determined by the covered swap entity's initial 
margin model if the FDIC determines that the additional collateral is 
appropriate due to the nature, structure, or characteristics of the 
covered swap entity's transaction(s), or is commensurate with the risks 
associated with the transaction(s).
    (e) Periodic review. A covered swap entity must periodically, but no 
less frequently than annually, review its initial margin model in light 
of developments in financial markets and modeling technologies, and 
enhance the initial margin model as appropriate to ensure that the 
initial margin model continues to meet the requirements for approval in 
this section.
    (f) Control, oversight, and validation mechanisms. (1) The covered 
swap entity must maintain a risk control unit that reports directly to 
senior management and is independent from the business trading units.
    (2) The covered swap entity's risk control unit must validate its 
initial margin model prior to implementation and on an ongoing basis. 
The covered swap entity's validation process must be independent of the 
development, implementation, and operation of the initial margin model, 
or the validation process must be subject to an independent review of 
its adequacy and effectiveness. The validation process must include:
    (i) An evaluation of the conceptual soundness of (including 
developmental evidence supporting) the initial margin model;
    (ii) An ongoing monitoring process that includes verification of 
processes and benchmarking by comparing the covered swap entity's 
initial margin model outputs (estimation of initial margin) with 
relevant alternative internal and external data sources or estimation 
techniques. The benchmark(s) must address the chosen model's 
limitations. When applicable, the covered swap entity should consider 
benchmarks that allow for non-normal distributions such as historical 
and Monte Carlo simulations. When applicable, validation shall include 
benchmarking against observable margin standards to ensure that the 
initial margin required is not less than what a derivatives clearing 
organization or a clearing agency would require for similar cleared 
transactions; and
    (iii) An outcomes analysis process that includes backtesting the 
initial margin model. This analysis must recognize and compensate for 
the challenges inherent in back-testing over periods that do not contain 
significant financial stress.
    (3) If the validation process reveals any material problems with the 
initial margin model, the covered swap entity must promptly notify the 
FDIC of the problems, describe to the FDIC any remedial actions being 
taken, and adjust the initial margin model to ensure an appropriately 
conservative amount of required initial margin is being calculated.
    (4) The covered swap entity must have an internal audit function 
independent of business-line management and the risk control unit that 
at least annually assesses the effectiveness of

[[Page 822]]

the controls supporting the covered swap entity's initial margin model 
measurement systems, including the activities of the business trading 
units and risk control unit, compliance with policies and procedures, 
and calculation of the covered swap entity's initial margin requirements 
under this subpart. At least annually, the internal audit function must 
report its findings to the covered swap entity's board of directors or a 
committee thereof.
    (g) Documentation. The covered swap entity must adequately document 
all material aspects of its initial margin model, including the 
management and valuation of the non-cleared swaps and non-cleared 
security-based swaps to which it applies, the control, oversight, and 
validation of the initial margin model, any review processes and the 
results of such processes.
    (h) Escalation procedures. The covered swap entity must adequately 
document internal authorization procedures, including escalation 
procedures, that require review and approval of any change to the 
initial margin calculation under the initial margin model, demonstrable 
analysis that any basis for any such change is consistent with the 
requirements of this section, and independent review of such 
demonstrable analysis and approval.



Sec. 349.9  Cross-border application of margin requirements.

    (a) Transactions to which this rule does not apply. The requirements 
of Secs. 349.3 through 349.8 and Secs. 349.10 through 349.12 shall not 
apply to any foreign non-cleared swap or foreign non-cleared security-
based swap of a foreign covered swap entity.
    (b) For purposes of this section, a foreign non-cleared swap or 
foreign non-cleared security-based swap is any non-cleared swap or non-
cleared security-based swap with respect to which neither the 
counterparty to the foreign covered swap entity nor any party that 
provides a guarantee of either party's obligations under the non-cleared 
swap or non-cleared security-based swap is:
    (1) An entity organized under the laws of the United States or any 
State (including a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank) 
or a natural person who is a resident of the United States;
    (2) A branch or office of an entity organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State; or
    (3) A swap entity that is a subsidiary of an entity that is 
organized under the laws of the United States or any State.
    (c) For purposes of this section, a foreign covered swap entity is 
any covered swap entity that is not:
    (1) An entity organized under the laws of the United States or any 
State, including a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank;
    (2) A branch or office of an entity organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State; or
    (3) An entity that is a subsidiary of an entity that is organized 
under the laws of the United States or any State.
    (d) Transactions for which substituted compliance determination may 
apply--(1) Determinations and reliance. For non-cleared swaps and non-
cleared security-based swaps entered into by covered swap entities 
described in paragraph (d)(3) of this section, a covered swap entity may 
satisfy the provisions of this subpart by complying with the foreign 
regulatory framework for non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-
based swaps that the prudential regulators jointly, conditionally or 
unconditionally, determine by public order satisfy the corresponding 
requirements of Secs. 349.3 through 349.8 and Secs. 349.10 through 
349.12.
    (2) Standard. In determining whether to make a determination under 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the prudential regulators will 
consider whether the requirements of such foreign regulatory framework 
for non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps applicable to 
such covered swap entities are comparable to the otherwise applicable 
requirements of this subpart and appropriate for the safe and sound 
operation of the covered swap entity, taking into account the risks 
associated with non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps.
    (3) Covered swap entities eligible for substituted compliance. A 
covered swap entity may rely on a determination under paragraph (d)(1) 
of this section only if:

[[Page 823]]

    (i) The covered swap entity's obligations under the non-cleared swap 
or non-cleared security-based swap do not have a guarantee from:
    (A) An entity organized under the laws of the United States or any 
State (other than a U.S. branch or agency of a foreign bank) or a 
natural person who is a resident of the United States; or
    (B) A branch or office of an entity organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State; and
    (ii) The covered swap entity is:
    (A) A foreign covered swap entity;
    (B) A U.S. branch or agency of a foreign bank; or
    (C) An entity that is not organized under the laws of the United 
States or any State and is a subsidiary of a depository institution, 
Edge corporation, or agreement corporation.
    (4) Compliance with foreign margin collection requirement. A covered 
swap entity satisfies its requirement to post initial margin under 
Sec. 349.3(b) by posting to its counterparty initial margin in the form 
and amount, and at such times, that its counterparty is required to 
collect pursuant to a foreign regulatory framework, provided that the 
counterparty is subject to the foreign regulatory framework and the 
prudential regulators have made a determination under paragraph (d)(1) 
of this section, unless otherwise stated in that determination, and the 
counterparty's obligations under the non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap do not have a guarantee from:
    (i) An entity organized under the laws of the United States or any 
State (including a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank) 
or a natural person who is a resident of the United States; or
    (ii) A branch or office of an entity organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State.
    (e) Requests for determinations. (1) A covered swap entity described 
in paragraph (d)(3) of this section may request that the prudential 
regulators make a determination pursuant to this section. A request for 
a determination must include a description of:
    (i) The scope and objectives of the foreign regulatory framework for 
non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps;
    (ii) The specific provisions of the foreign regulatory framework for 
non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based swaps that govern:
    (A) The scope of transactions covered;
    (B) The determination of the amount of initial margin and variation 
margin required and how that amount is calculated;
    (C) The timing of margin requirements;
    (D) Any documentation requirements;
    (E) The forms of eligible collateral;
    (F) Any segregation and rehypothecation requirements; and
    (G) The approval process and standards for models used in 
calculating initial margin and variation margin;
    (iii) The supervisory compliance program and enforcement authority 
exercised by a foreign financial regulatory authority or authorities in 
such system to support its oversight of the application of the non-
cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap regulatory framework and 
how that framework applies to the non-cleared swaps or non-cleared 
security-based swaps of the covered swap entity; and
    (iv) Any other descriptions and documentation that the prudential 
regulators determine are appropriate.
    (2) A covered swap entity described in paragraph (d)(3) of this 
section may make a request under this section only if the non-cleared 
swap or non-cleared security-based swap activities of the covered swap 
entity are directly supervised by the authorities administering the 
foreign regulatory framework for non-cleared swaps and non-cleared 
security-based swaps.
    (f) Segregation unavailable. Sections __.3(b) and __.7 do not apply 
to a non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap entered into 
by:
    (1) A foreign branch of a covered swap entity that is a depository 
institution; or
    (2) A covered swap entity that is not organized under the laws of 
the United States or any State and is a subsidiary of a depository 
institution, Edge corporation, or agreement corporation, if:
    (i) Inherent limitations in the legal or operational infrastructure 
in the

[[Page 824]]

foreign jurisdiction make it impracticable for the covered swap entity 
and the counterparty to post any form of eligible initial margin 
collateral recognized pursuant to Sec. 349.6(b) in compliance with the 
segregation requirements of Sec. 349.7;
    (ii) The covered swap entity is subject to foreign regulatory 
restrictions that require the covered swap entity to transact in the 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap with the 
counterparty through an establishment within the foreign jurisdiction 
and do not accommodate the posting of collateral for the non-cleared 
swap or non-cleared security-based swap outside the jurisdiction;
    (iii) The counterparty to the non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap is not, and the counterparty's obligations under the 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap do not have a 
guarantee from:
    (A) An entity organized under the laws of the United States or any 
State (including a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank) 
or a natural person who is a resident of the United States; or
    (B) A branch or office of an entity organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State;
    (iv) The covered swap entity collects initial margin for the non-
cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap in accordance with 
Sec. 349.3(a) in the form of cash pursuant to Sec. 349.6(b)(1), and 
posts and collects variation margin in accordance with Sec. 349.4(a) in 
the form of cash pursuant to Sec. 349.6(b)(1); and
    (v) The FDIC provides the covered swap entity with prior written 
approval for the covered swap entity's reliance on this paragraph (f) 
for the foreign jurisdiction.
    (g) Guarantee means an arrangement pursuant to which one party to a 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap has rights of 
recourse against a third-party guarantor, with respect to its 
counterparty's obligations under the non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap. For these purposes, a party to a non-cleared swap 
or non-cleared security-based swap has rights of recourse against a 
guarantor if the party has a conditional or unconditional legally 
enforceable right to receive or otherwise collect, in whole or in part, 
payments from the guarantor with respect to its counterparty's 
obligations under the non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based 
swap. In addition, any arrangement pursuant to which the guarantor has a 
conditional or unconditional legally enforceable right to receive or 
otherwise collect, in whole or in part, payments from any other third 
party guarantor with respect to the counterparty's obligations under the 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap, such arrangement 
will be deemed a guarantee of the counterparty's obligations under the 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap by the other 
guarantor.



Sec. 349.10  Documentation of margin matters.

    A covered swap entity shall execute trading documentation with each 
counterparty that is either a swap entity or financial end user 
regarding credit support arrangements that:
    (a) Provides the covered swap entity and its counterparty with the 
contractual right to collect and post initial margin and variation 
margin in such amounts, in such form, and under such circumstances as 
are required by this subpart; and
    (b) Specifies:
    (1) The methods, procedures, rules, and inputs for determining the 
value of each non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap for 
purposes of calculating variation margin requirements; and
    (2) The procedures by which any disputes concerning the valuation of 
non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-based swaps, or the valuation 
of assets collected or posted as initial margin or variation margin, may 
be resolved; and
    (c) Describes the methods, procedures, rules, and inputs used to 
calculate initial margin for non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security 
based swaps entered into between the covered swap entity and the 
counterparty.

[[Page 825]]



Sec. 349.11  Special rules for affiliates.

    (a) Affiliates. This subpart applies to a non-cleared swap or non-
cleared security-based swap of a covered swap entity with its affiliate, 
unless the swap or security-based swap is excluded from coverage under 
Sec. 349.1(d) or as otherwise provided in this section. To the extent of 
any inconsistency between this section and any other provision of this 
subpart, this section will apply.
    (b) Initial margin--(1) Posting of initial margin. The requirement 
for a covered swap entity to post initial margin under Sec. 349.3(b) 
does not apply with respect to any non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap with a counterparty that is an affiliate. A covered 
swap entity shall calculate the amount of initial margin that would be 
required to be posted to an affiliate that is a financial end user with 
material swaps exposure pursuant to Sec. 349.3(b) and provide 
documentation of such amount to each affiliate on a daily basis.
    (2) Initial margin threshold amount. For purposes of calculating the 
amount of initial margin to be collected from an affiliate counterparty 
in accordance with Sec. 349.3(a) or calculating the amount of initial 
margin that would have been posted to an affiliate counterparty in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the initial margin 
threshold amount is an aggregate credit exposure of $20 million 
resulting from all non-cleared swaps and non-cleared security-based 
swaps between the covered swap entity and that affiliate. For purposes 
of this calculation, an entity shall not count a non-cleared swap or 
non-cleared security-based swap that is exempt pursuant to 
Sec. 349.1(d).
    (c) Variation margin. A covered swap entity shall collect and post 
variation margin with respect to a non-cleared swap or non-cleared 
security-based swap with any counterparty that is an affiliate as 
provided in Sec. 349.4.
    (d) Custodian for non-cash collateral. To the extent that a covered 
swap entity collects initial margin required by Sec. 349.3(a) from an 
affiliate with respect to any non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-
based swap in the form of collateral other than cash collateral, the 
custodian for such collateral may be the covered swap entity or an 
affiliate of the covered swap entity.
    (e) Model holding period and netting--(1) Model holding period. For 
any non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap (or netting 
portfolio) between a covered swap entity and an affiliate that would be 
subject to the clearing requirements of section 2(h)(1)(A) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 or section 3C(a)(1) of the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934 but for an exemption under section 2(h)(7)(C)(iii) 
or (D) or section 4(c)(1) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 or 
regulations of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission or section 
3C(g)(4) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 or regulations of the 
U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, the covered swap entity's 
initial margin model calculation as described in Sec. 349.8(d)(1) may 
use a holding period equal to the shorter of five business days or the 
maturity of the non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap (or 
netting portfolio).
    (2) Netting arrangements. Any netting portfolio that contains any 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap with a model holding 
period equal to the shorter of five business days or the maturity of the 
non-cleared swap or non-cleared security-based swap pursuant to 
paragraph (e)(1) of this section must be identified and separate from 
any other netting portfolio for purposes of calculating and complying 
with the initial margin requirements of this subpart.
    (f) Standardized amounts. If a covered swap entity's initial margin 
model does not conform to the requirements of Sec. 349.8, the covered 
swap entity shall calculate the amount of initial margin required to be 
collected for one or more non-cleared swaps or non-cleared security-
based swaps with a given affiliate counterparty pursuant to section 
Sec. 349.3 on a daily basis pursuant to Appendix A with the gross 
initial margin multiplied by 0.7.



Sec. 349.12  Capital.

    A covered swap entity shall comply with the capital requirements 
that are applicable to the covered swap entity under part 324 of this 
chapter.

[80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]

[[Page 826]]



 Sec. Appendix A to Subpart A of Part 349--Standardized Minimum Initial 
  Margin Requirements for Non-cleared Swaps and Non--cleared Security-
                               based Swaps

Table A--Standardized Minimum Gross Initial Margin Requirements for Non-
          cleared Swaps and Non-cleared Security-Based Swaps\1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Gross initial
                                                           margin (% of
                       Asset Class                           notional
                                                             exposure)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Credit: 0-2 year duration...............................               2
Credit: 2-5 year duration...............................               5
Credit: 5+ year duration................................              10
Commodity...............................................              15
Equity..................................................              15
Foreign Exchange/Currency...............................               6
Cross Currency Swaps: 0-2 year duration.................               1
Cross-Currency Swaps: 2-5 year duration.................               2
Cross-Currency Swaps: 5+ year duration..................               4
Interest Rate: 0-2 year duration........................               1
Interest Rate: 2-5 year duration........................               2
Interest Rate: 5+ year duration.........................               4
Other...................................................              15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The initial margin amount applicable to multiple non-cleared swaps
  or non-cleared security-based swaps subject to an eligible master
  netting agreement that is calculated according to Appendix A will be
  computed as follows:
Initial Margin=0.4xGross Initial Margin +0.6x NGRxGross Initial Margin
where;
Gross Initial Margin = the sum of the product of each non-cleared swap's
  or non-cleared security-based swap's effective notional amount and the
  gross initial margin requirement for all non-cleared swaps and non-
  cleared security-based swaps subject to the eligible master netting
  agreement;
and
NGR = the net-to-gross ratio (that is, the ratio of the net current
  replacement cost to the gross current replacement cost). In
  calculating NGR, the gross current replacement cost equals the sum of
  the replacement cost for each non-cleared swap and non-cleared
  security-based swap subject to the eligible master netting agreement
  for which the cost is positive. The net current replacement cost
  equals the total replacement cost for all non-cleared swaps and non-
  cleared security-based swaps subject to the eligible master netting
  agreement. In cases where the gross replacement cost is zero, the NGR
  should be set to 1.0.



  Sec. Appendix B to Subpart A of Part 349--Margin Values for Eligible 
                        Noncash Margin Collateral

      Table B--Margin Values for Eligible Noncash Margin Collateral
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       Asset class                         Discount (%)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eligible government and related (e.g., central bank,                 0.5
 multilateral development bank, GSE securities
 identified in Sec. 349.6(a)(2)(iv) or (b)(5) debt:
 residual maturity less than one-year...................
Eligible government and related (e.g., central bank,                 2.0
 multilateral development bank, GSE securities
 identified in Sec. 349.6(a)(2)(iv) or (b)(5) debt:
 residual maturity between one and five years...........
Eligible government and related (e.g., central bank,                 4.0
 multilateral development bank, GSE securities
 identified in Sec. 349.6(a)(2)(iv) or (b)(5) debt:
 residual maturity greater than five years..............
Eligible GSE debt securities not identified in Sec. 1.0
 349.6(a)(2)(iv) or (b)(5): residual maturity less than
 one-year...............................................
Eligible GSE debt securities not identified in Sec. 4.0
 349.6(a)(2)(iv) or (b)(5): residual maturity between
 one and five years:....................................
Eligible GSE debt securities not identified in Sec. 8.0
 349.6(a)(2)(iv) or (b)(5): residual maturity greater
 than five years:.......................................
Other eligible publicly traded debt: residual maturity               1.0
 less than one-year.....................................
Other eligible publicly traded debt: residual maturity               4.0
 between one and five years.............................
Other eligible publicly traded debt: residual maturity               8.0
 greater than five years................................
Equities included in S&P 500 or related index...........            15.0
Equities included in S&P 1500 Composite or related index            25.0
 but not S&P 500 or related index.......................
Gold....................................................            15.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The discount to be applied to an eligible investment fund is the
  weighted average discount on all assets within the eligible investment
  fund at the end of the prior month. The weights to be applied in the
  weighted average should be calculated as a fraction of the fund's
  total market value that is invested in each asset with a given
  discount amount. As an example, an eligible investment fund that is
  comprised solely of $100 of 91 day Treasury bills and $100 of 3 year
  US Treasury bonds would receive a discount of (100/200)*0.5+(100/
  200)*2.0=(0.5)*0.5+(0.5)*2.0=1.25 percent.


[[Page 827]]



             Subpart B_Retail Foreign Exchange Transactions

    Authority: 12 U.S.C.1813(q), 1818, 1819, and 3108; 7 U.S.C. 
2(c)(2)(E), 27 et seq.



Sec. 349.13  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) Authority. An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
that engages in retail forex transactions shall comply with the 
requirements of this part.
    (b) Purpose. This part establishes rules applicable to retail forex 
transactions engaged in by FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institutions and applies on or after the effective date.
    (c) Scope. Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, this 
part applies to FDIC-supervised insured depository institutions.
    (d) International applicability. Sections 349.15 and 349.17 through 
349.28 do not apply to retail foreign exchange transactions between a 
foreign branch of an FDIC-supervised IDI and a non-U.S. customer. With 
respect to those transactions, an FDIC-supervised IDI must comply with 
any disclosure, recordkeeping, capital, margin, reporting, business 
conduct, documentation, and other requirements of applicable foreign 
law.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated and amended at 80 FR 74912, 
Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.14  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part--
    The following terms have the same meaning as in the Commodity 
Exchange Act: ``Affiliated person of a futures commission merchant''; 
``Associated person''; ``Contract of sale''; ``Commodity''; ``Eligible 
contract participant''; ``Futures commission merchant''; ``Security''; 
and ``Security futures product''.
    Affiliate has the same meaning as in Sec. 2(k) of the Bank Holding 
Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(k)).
    Commodity Exchange Act means the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1 
et seq.).
    FDIC-supervised insured depository institution means any insured 
depository institution for which the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation is the appropriate Federal banking agency pursuant to 
Sec. 3(q) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(q).
    Forex means foreign exchange.
    Institution-affiliated party or IAP has the same meaning as in 12 
U.S.C. 1813(u)(1), (2), or (3).
    Insured depository institution or IDI has the same meaning as in 12 
U.S.C. 1813(c)(2).
    Introducing broker means any person who solicits or accepts orders 
from a retail forex customer in connection with retail forex 
transactions.
    Related person, when used in reference to a retail forex 
counterparty, means:
    (1) Any general partner, officer, director, or owner of ten percent 
or more of the capital stock of the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution;
    (2) An associated person or employee of the retail forex 
counterparty, if the retail forex counterparty is not an FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution;
    (3) An IAP, if the retail forex counterparty is an FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution; and
    (4) Any relative or spouse of any of the foregoing persons, or any 
relative of such spouse, who shares the same home as any of the 
foregoing persons.
    Retail forex account means the account of a retail forex customer, 
established with an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution, in 
which retail forex transactions with the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution as counterparty are undertaken, or the account of 
a retail forex customer that is established in order to enter into such 
transactions.
    Retail forex account agreement means the contractual agreement 
between an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution and a retail 
forex customer that contains the terms governing the customer's retail 
forex account with the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution.
    Retail forex business means engaging in one or more retail forex 
transactions with the intent to derive income from those transactions, 
either directly or indirectly.
    Retail forex counterparty includes, as appropriate:
    (1) An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution;
    (2) A retail foreign exchange dealer;

[[Page 828]]

    (3) A futures commission merchant; and
    (4) An affiliated person of a futures commission merchant.
    Retail forex customer means a customer that is not an eligible 
contract participant, acting on his, her, or its own behalf and engaging 
in retail forex transactions.
    Retail forex obligations means obligations of a retail forex 
customer with respect to retail forex transactions, including, but not 
limited to, trading losses, fees, and commissions.
    Retail forex proprietary account means: a retail forex account 
carried on the books of an FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution for one of the following persons; a retail forex account of 
which 10 percent or more is owned by one of the following persons; or a 
retail forex account of which an aggregate of 10 percent or more of 
which is owned by more than one of the following persons:
    (1) The FDIC-supervised insured depository institution;
    (2) An officer, director or owner of ten percent or more of the 
capital stock of the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution; or
    (3) An employee of the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution, whose duties include:
    (i) The management of the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution's business;
    (ii) The handling of the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution's retail forex transactions;
    (iii) The keeping of records, including without limitation the 
software used to make or maintain those records, pertaining to the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution's retail forex transactions; 
or
    (iv) The signing or co-signing of checks or drafts on behalf of the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution;
    (4) A spouse or minor dependent living in the same household as of 
any of the foregoing persons; or
    (5) An affiliate of the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution;
    Retail forex transaction means an agreement, contract, or 
transaction in foreign currency, other than an identified banking 
product or a part of an identified banking product, that is offered or 
entered into by FDIC-supervised insured depository institution with a 
person that is not an eligible contract participant and that is:
    (1) A contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery or an 
option on such a contract;
    (2) An option, other than an option executed or traded on a national 
securities exchange registered pursuant to Sec. 6(a) of the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78(f)(a)); or
    (3) Offered or entered into on a leveraged or margined basis, or 
financed by an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution, its 
affiliate, or any person acting in concert with the FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution or its affiliate on a similar basis, 
other than:
    (i) A security that is not a security futures product as defined in 
Sec. 1a(47) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(47)); or
    (ii) A contract of sale that--
    (A) Results in actual delivery within two days; or
    (B) Creates an enforceable obligation to deliver between a seller 
and buyer that have the ability to deliver and accept delivery, 
respectively, in connection with their line of business; or
    (iii) An agreement, contract, or transaction that the FDIC 
determines is not functionally or economically similar to:
    (A) A contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery or an 
option on such a contract; or
    (B) An option, other than an option executed or traded on a national 
securities exchange registered pursuant to Section 6(a) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78(f)(a)).
    Retail forex obligations means obligations of a retail forex 
customer with respect to retail forex transactions, including, but not 
limited to, trading losses, fees, and commissions.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.15  Prohibited transactions.

    (a) Fraudulent conduct prohibited. No FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution or its IAPs may, directly or indirectly, in or in 
connection with any retail forex transaction:

[[Page 829]]

    (1) Cheat or defraud or attempt to cheat or defraud any person;
    (2) Willfully make or cause to be made to any person any false 
report or statement or cause to be entered for any person any false 
record; or
    (3) Willfully deceive or attempt to deceive any person by any means 
whatsoever.
    (b) Acting as counterparty and exercising discretion prohibited. If 
an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution can cause retail forex 
transactions to be effected for a retail forex customer without the 
retail forex customer's specific authorization, then neither the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution nor its affiliates may act as 
the counterparty for any retail forex transaction with that retail forex 
customer.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.16  Filing procedures.

    (a) General. Before commencing a retail forex business, an FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution shall provide the FDIC prior 
written notice and obtain the FDIC's prior written consent.
    (b) Where to file. A notice required by this section shall be 
submitted in writing to the appropriate FDIC office.
    (c) Contents of filing. A complete letter notice shall include the 
following information:
    (1) Filings generally. (i) A brief description of the FDIC-
supervised institution's proposed retail forex business and the manner 
in which it will be conducted;
    (ii) The amount of the institution's existing or proposed direct or 
indirect investment in the retail forex business as well as calculations 
sufficient to indicate compliance with all capital requirements in 
Sec. 349.20 and all other applicable capital standards;
    (iii) A copy of the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution's 
comprehensive business plan that includes a discussion of, among other 
things, how the operation of the retail forex business is consistent 
with the institution's overall strategy;
    (iv) A description of the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution's target customers for its proposed retail forex business 
and related information, including without limitation credit 
evaluations, customer appropriateness, and ``know your customer'' 
documentation;
    (v) A resolution by the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution's board of directors that the proposed retail forex business 
is an appropriate activity for the institution and that the 
institution's written policies, procedures, and risk measurement and 
management systems and controls address conducting retail forex business 
in a safe and sound manner and in compliance with this part;
    (vi) Sample risk disclosures sufficient to demonstrate compliance 
with Sec. 349.18.
    (2) Copy of application or notice filed with another agency. If an 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution has filed an application 
or notice with another regulatory authority which contains all of the 
information required by subparagraph (c)(1) of this part, the 
institution may submit a copy to the FDIC in lieu of a separate filing.
    (3) Additional information. The FDIC may request additional 
information to complete the processing of the notification.
    (d) Treatment of Existing Retail Forex Business. Any FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution that is engaged in retail forex business 
on July 15, 2011 may continue to do so for up to six months, subject to 
an extension of time by the FDIC, provided that it notifies the FDIC of 
its retail forex business and requests the FDIC's written consent in 
accordance with paragraph (a) of this section.
    (e) Compliance with the Commodities Exchange Act. Any FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution that is engaged in retail 
forex business on July 15, 2011 shall be deemed, during the six-month 
period (including any extension) provided in paragraph (e) of this 
section, to be acting pursuant to a rule or regulation described in 
Sec. 2(c)(2)(E)(ii)(I) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 
2(c)(2)(E)(ii)(I)).

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated and amended at 80 FR 74912, 
Nov. 30, 2015]

[[Page 830]]



Sec. 349.17  Application and closing out of offsetting long and short
positions.

    (a) Application of purchases and sales. Any FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution that--
    (1) Engages in a retail forex transaction involving the purchase of 
any currency for the account of any retail forex customer when the 
account of such retail forex customer at the time of such purchase has 
an open retail forex transaction for the sale of the same currency;
    (2) Engages in a retail forex transaction involving the sale of any 
currency for the account of any retail forex customer when the account 
of such retail forex customer at the time of such sale has an open 
retail forex transaction for the purchase of the same currency;
    (3) Purchases a put or call option involving foreign currency for 
the account of any retail forex customer when the account of such retail 
forex customer at the time of such purchase has a short put or call 
option position with the same underlying currency, strike price, and 
expiration date as that purchased; or
    (4) Sells a put or call option involving foreign currency for the 
account of any retail forex customer when the account of such retail 
forex customer at the time of such sale has a long put or call option 
position with the same underlying currency, strike price, and expiration 
date as that sold shall:
    (i) Immediately apply such purchase or sale against such previously 
held opposite transaction; and
    (ii) Promptly furnish such retail forex customer with a statement 
showing the financial result of the transactions involved and the name 
of any introducing broker to the account.
    (b) Close-out against oldest open position. In all instances where 
the short or long position in a customer's retail forex account 
immediately prior to an offsetting purchase or sale is greater than the 
quantity purchased or sold, the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution shall apply such offsetting purchase or sale to the oldest 
portion of the previously held short or long position.
    (c) Transactions to be applied as directed by customer. 
Notwithstanding paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the offsetting 
transaction shall be applied as directed by a retail forex customer's 
specific instructions. These instructions may not be made by the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution or an IAP.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.18  Disclosure.

    (a) Risk disclosure statement required. No FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution may open or maintain open an account that will 
engage in retail forex transactions for a retail forex customer unless 
the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution has furnished the 
retail forex customer with a separate written disclosure statement 
containing only the language set forth in paragraph (d) of this section 
and the disclosures required by paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section.
    (b) Acknowledgement of risk disclosure statement required. The FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution must receive from the retail 
forex customer a written acknowledgement signed and dated by the 
customer that the customer received and understood the written 
disclosure statement required by paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) Placement of risk disclosure statement. The disclosure statement 
may be attached to other documents as the initial page(s) of such 
documents and as the only material on such page(s).
    (d) Content of risk disclosure statement. The language set forth in 
the written disclosure statement required by paragraph (a) of this 
section shall be as follows:

                        Risk Disclosure Statement

    Retail forex transactions involve the leveraged trading of contracts 
denominated in foreign currency with an FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution as your counterparty. Because of the leverage and 
the other risks disclosed here, you can rapidly lose all of the funds or 
property you give the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution as 
margin for such trading and you may lose more than you pledge as margin.
    Your FDIC-supervised insured depository institution is prohibited 
from applying losses that you experience on retail forex transactions on 
any funds or property of yours other than funds or property that you 
have

[[Page 831]]

given or pledged as margin for retail forex transactions.
    You should be aware of and carefully consider the following points 
before determining whether such trading is appropriate for you.
    (1) Trading is a not on a regulated market or exchange--your FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution is your trading counterparty 
and has conflicting interests. The retail forex transaction you are 
entering into is not conducted on an interbank market, nor is it 
conducted on a futures exchange subject to regulation as a designated 
contract market by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission. The foreign 
currency trades you transact are trades with your FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution as the counterparty. When you sell, the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution is the buyer. When you 
buy, the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution is the seller. 
As a result, when you lose money trading, your FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution is making money on such trades, in addition to 
any fees, commissions, or spreads the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution may charge.
    (2) An electronic trading platform for retail foreign currency 
transactions is not an exchange. It is an electronic connection for 
accessing your FDIC-supervised insured depository institution. The terms 
of availability of such a platform are governed only by your contract 
with your FDIC-supervised insured depository institution. Any trading 
platform that you may use to enter into off-exchange foreign currency 
transactions is only connected to your FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution. You are accessing that trading platform only to 
transact with your FDIC-supervised insured depository institution. You 
are not trading with any other entities or customers of the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution by accessing such platform. 
The availability and operation of any such platform, including the 
consequences of the unavailability of the trading platform for any 
reason, is governed only by the terms of your account agreement with the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution.
    (3) You may be able to offset or liquidate any trading positions 
only through your banking entity because the transactions are not made 
on an exchange or regulated contract market, and your FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution may set its own prices. Your ability to 
close your transactions or offset positions is limited to what your 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution will offer to you, as 
there is no other market for these transactions. Your FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution may offer any prices it wishes, including 
prices derived from outside sources or not in its discretion. Your FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution may establish its prices by 
offering spreads from third party prices, but it is under no obligation 
to do so or to continue to do so. Your FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution may offer different prices to different customers 
at any point in time on its own terms. The terms of your account 
agreement alone govern the obligations your FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution has to you to offer prices and offer offset or 
liquidating transactions in your account and make any payments to you. 
The prices offered by your FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution may or may not reflect prices available elsewhere at any 
exchange, interbank, or other market for foreign currency.
    (4) Paid solicitors may have undisclosed conflicts. The FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution may compensate introducing 
brokers for introducing your account in ways that are not disclosed to 
you. Such paid solicitors are not required to have, and may not have, 
any special expertise in trading, and may have conflicts of interest 
based on the method by which they are compensated. You should thoroughly 
investigate the manner in which all such solicitors are compensated and 
be very cautious in granting any person or entity authority to trade on 
your behalf. You should always consider obtaining dated written 
confirmation of any information you are relying on from your FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution in making any trading or 
account decisions.
    (5) Retail forex transactions are not insured by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation.
    (6) Retail forex transactions are not a deposit in, or guaranteed 
by, an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution.
    (7) Retail forex transactions are subject to investment risks, 
including possible loss of all amounts invested.
    Finally, you should thoroughly investigate any statements by any 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution that minimize the 
importance of, or contradict, any of the terms of this risk disclosure. 
These statements may indicate sales fraud.
    This brief statement cannot, of course, disclose all the risks and 
other aspects of trading off-exchange foreign currency with an FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution.
    I hereby acknowledge that I have received and understood this risk 
disclosure statement.
________________________________________________________________________
Date

________________________________________________________________________
Signature of Customer

    (e)(1) Disclosure of profitable accounts ratio. Immediately 
following the language set forth in paragraph (d) of this section, the 
statement required by

[[Page 832]]

paragraph (a) of this section shall include, for each of the most recent 
four calendar quarters during which the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution maintained retail forex customer accounts:
    (i) The total number of retail forex customer accounts maintained by 
the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution over which the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution does not exercise investment 
discretion;
    (ii) The percentage of such accounts that were profitable for retail 
forex customer accounts during the quarter; and
    (iii) The percentage of such accounts that were not profitable for 
retail forex customer accounts during the quarter.
    (2) The FDIC-supervised insured depository institution's statement 
of profitable trades shall include the following legend: ``Past 
performance is not necessarily indicative of future results.'' Each 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution shall provide, upon 
request, to any retail forex customer or prospective retail forex 
customer the total number of retail forex accounts maintained by the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution for which the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution does not exercise investment 
discretion, the percentage of such accounts that were profitable, and 
the percentage of such accounts that were not profitable for each 
calendar quarter during the most recent five-year period during which 
the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution maintained such 
accounts.
    (f) Disclosure of fees and other charges. Immediately following the 
language required by paragraph (e) of this section, the statement 
required by paragraph (a) of this section shall include:
    (1) The amount of any fee, charge, commission, or spreads that the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution may impose on the retail 
forex customer in connection with a retail forex account or retail forex 
transaction;
    (2) An explanation of how the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution will determine the amount of such fees, charges, 
commissions, or spreads; and
    (3) The circumstances under which the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution may impose such fees, charges, commissions, or 
spreads.
    (g) Future disclosure requirements. If, with regard to a retail 
forex customer, the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
changes any fee, charge, commission or spreads required to be disclosed 
under paragraph (f) of this section, then the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution shall mail or deliver to the retail forex 
customer a notice of the changes at least 15 days prior to the effective 
date of the change.
    (h) Form of disclosure requirements. The disclosures required by 
this section shall be clear and conspicuous and designed to call 
attention to the nature and significance of the information provided.
    (i) Other disclosure requirements unaffected. This section does not 
relieve an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution from any other 
disclosure obligation it may have under applicable law.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.19  Recordkeeping.

    (a) General rule. An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
engaging in retail forex transactions shall keep full, complete and 
systematic records, together with all pertinent data and memoranda, 
pertaining to its retail forex business, including:
    (1) Retail forex account records. For each retail forex account:
    (i) The name and address of the person for whom the account is 
carried or introduced and the principal occupation or business of the 
person.
    (ii) The name of any other person guaranteeing the account or 
exercising trading control with respect to the account;
    (iii) The establishment or termination of the account; and
    (iv) A means to identify the person who has solicited and is 
responsible for the account or assign account numbers in such a manner 
as to identify that person.
    (v) The funds in the account, net of any commissions and fees;

[[Page 833]]

    (vi) The account's net profits and losses on open trades;
    (vii) The funds in the account plus or minus the net profits and 
losses on open trades, adjusted for the net option value in the case of 
open options positions;
    (viii) Financial ledger records that show separately for each retail 
forex customer all charges against and credits to such retail forex 
customer's account, including deposits, withdrawals, and transfers, and 
charges or credits resulting from losses or gains on closed 
transactions; and
    (ix) A list of all retail forex transactions executed for the 
account, with the details specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section;
    (2) Retail forex transaction records. For each retail forex 
transaction:
    (i) The price at which the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution placed the order, or, in the case of an option, the premium 
that the retail forex customer paid;
    (ii) The customer account identification information;
    (iii) The currency pair;
    (iv) The size or quantity of the order;
    (v) Whether the order was a buy or sell order;
    (vi) The type of order, if the order was not a market order;
    (vii) The size and price at which the order is executed, or in the 
case of an option, the amount of the premium paid for each option 
purchased, or the amount credited for each option sold;
    (viii) For options, whether the option is a put or call, expiration 
date, quantity, underlying contract for future delivery or underlying 
physical, strike price, and details of the purchase price of the option, 
including premium, mark-up, commission, and fees; and
    (ix) For futures, the delivery date; and
    (x) If the order was made on a trading platform:
    (A) The price quoted on the trading platform when the order was 
placed, or, in the case of an option, the premium quoted;
    (B) The date and time the order was transmitted to the trading 
platform; and
    (C) The date and time the order was executed;
    (3) Price changes on a trading platform. If a trading platform is 
used, daily logs showing each price change on the platform, the time of 
the change to the nearest second, and the trading volume at that time 
and price;
    (4) Methods or algorithms. Any method or algorithm used to determine 
the bid or asked price for any retail forex transaction or the prices at 
which customer orders are executed, including, but not limited to, any 
markups, fees, commissions or other items which affect the profitability 
or risk of loss of a retail forex customer's transaction;
    (5) Daily records which show for each business day complete details 
of:
    (i) All retail forex transactions that are futures transactions 
executed on that day, including the date, price, quantity, market, 
currency pair, delivery date, and the person for whom such transaction 
was made;
    (ii) All retail forex transactions that are option transactions 
executed on that day, including the date, whether the transaction 
involved a put or call, the expiration date, quantity, currency pair, 
delivery date, strike price, details of the purchase price of the 
option, including premium, mark-up, commission and fees, and the person 
for whom the transaction was made;
    (iii) All other retail forex transactions executed on that day for 
such account, including the date, price, quantity, currency and the 
person for whom such transaction was made; and
    (6) Other records. Written acknowledgements of receipt of the risk 
disclosure statement required by Sec. 349.18(b), records required under 
paragraph (b) through (f) of this section, trading cards, signature 
cards, street books, journals, ledgers, payment records, copies of 
statements of purchase, and all other records, data and memoranda that 
have been prepared in the course of the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution's retail forex business.
    (b) Ratio of profitable accounts. (1) With respect to its active 
retail forex customer accounts over which it did not exercise investment 
discretion and that are not retail forex proprietary accounts open for 
any period of time during the quarter, an FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution shall

[[Page 834]]

prepare and maintain on a quarterly basis (calendar quarter):
    (i) A calculation of the percentage of such accounts that were 
profitable;
    (ii) A calculation of the percentage of such accounts that were not 
profitable; and
    (iii) Data supporting the calculations described in paragraphs 
(b)(1)(i) and (b)(1)(ii) of this section.
    (2) In calculating whether a retail forex account was profitable or 
not profitable during the quarter, the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution shall compute the realized and unrealized gains 
or losses on all retail forex transactions carried in the retail forex 
account at any time during the quarter, and subtract all fees, 
commissions, and any other charges posted to the retail forex account 
during the quarter, and add any interest income and other income or 
rebates credited to the retail forex account during the quarter. All 
deposits and withdrawals of funds made by the retail forex customer 
during the quarter must be excluded from the computation of whether the 
retail forex account was profitable or not profitable during the 
quarter. Computations that result in a zero or negative number shall be 
considered a retail forex account that was not profitable. Computations 
that result in a positive number shall be considered a retail forex 
account that was profitable.
    (3) A retail forex account shall be considered ``active'' for 
purposes of paragraph (b)(1) of this section if and only if, for the 
relevant calendar quarter, a retail forex transaction was executed in 
that account or the retail forex account contained an open position 
resulting from a retail forex transaction.
    (c) Records related to possible violations of law. An FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution engaging in retail forex 
transactions shall make a record of all communications, including 
customer complaints, received by the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution or its IAPs concerning facts giving rise to possible 
violations of law related to the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution's retail forex business. The record shall contain: the name 
of the complainant, if provided; the date of the communication; the 
relevant agreement, contract, or transaction; the substance of the 
communication; the name of the person who received the communication, 
and the final disposition of the matter.
    (d) Records for noncash margin. An FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution shall maintain a record of all noncash margin 
collected pursuant to Sec. 349.21. The record shall show separately for 
each retail forex customer:
    (1) A description of the securities or property received;
    (2) The name and address of such retail forex customer;
    (3) The dates when the securities or property were received;
    (4) The identity of the depositories or other places where such 
securities or property are segregated or held, if applicable;
    (5) The dates in which the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution placed or removed such securities or property into or from 
such depositories; and
    (6) The dates of return of such securities or property to such 
retail forex customer, or other disposition thereof, together with the 
facts and circumstances of such other disposition.
    (e) Order Tickets. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(2) of 
this section, immediately upon the receipt of a retail forex transaction 
order, an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution must prepare an 
order ticket for the order (whether unfulfilled, executed, or canceled). 
The order ticket must include:
    (i) Account identification (account or customer name with which the 
retail forex transaction was effected);
    (ii) Order number;
    (iii) Type of order (market order, limit order, or subject to 
special instructions);
    (iv) Date and time, to the nearest minute, the retail forex 
transaction order was received (as evidenced by timestamp or other 
timing device);
    (v) Time, to the nearest minute, the retail forex transaction order 
was executed; and
    (vi) Price at which the retail forex transaction was executed.
    (2) Post-execution allocation of bunched orders. Specific 
identifiers for retail

[[Page 835]]

forex accounts included in bunched orders need not be recorded at time 
of order placement or upon report of execution as required under 
paragraph (e)(1) of this section if the following requirements are met:
    (i) The FDIC-supervised insured depository institution placing and 
directing the allocation of an order eligible for post-execution 
allocation has been granted written investment discretion with regard to 
participating customer accounts and makes the following information 
available to retail forex customers upon request:
    (A) The general nature of the post-execution allocation methodology 
the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution will use;
    (B) Whether the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution has 
any interest in accounts which may be included with customer accounts in 
bunched orders eligible for post-execution allocation; and
    (C) Summary or composite data sufficient for that customer to 
compare its results with those of other comparable customers and, if 
applicable, any account in which the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution has an interest.
    (ii) Post-execution allocations are made as soon as practicable 
after the entire transaction is executed;
    (iii) Post-execution allocations are fair and equitable, with no 
account or group of accounts receiving consistently favorable or 
unfavorable treatment; and
    (iv) The post-execution allocation methodology is sufficiently 
objective and specific to permit the FDIC to verify the fairness of the 
allocations using that methodology.
    (f) Record of monthly statements and confirmations. An FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution shall retain a copy of each 
monthly statement and confirmation required by Sec. 349.22.
    (g) Manner of maintenance. The records required by this section must 
clearly and accurately reflect the information required and provide an 
adequate basis for the audit of the information. Record maintenance may 
include the use of automated or electronic records provided that the 
records are easily retrievable, readily available for inspection, and 
capable of being reproduced in hard copy.
    (h) Length of maintenance. An FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution shall keep each record required by this section for at least 
five years from the date the record is created.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated and amended at 80 FR 74912, 
Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.20  Capital requirements.

    An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution offering or 
entering into retail forex transactions must be well capitalized as 
defined by 12 CFR part 325 or 12 CFR part 324, as applicable, unless 
specifically exempted by the FDIC in writing.

[78 FR 55595, Sept. 10, 2013. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 
2015]



Sec. 349.21  Margin requirements.

    (a) Margin required. An FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution engaging, or offering to engage, in retail forex 
transactions must collect from each retail forex customer an amount of 
margin not less than:
    (1) Two percent of the notional value of the retail forex 
transaction for major currency pairs and 5 percent of the notional value 
of the retail forex transaction for all other currency pairs;
    (2) For short options, 2 percent for major currency pairs and 5 
percent for all other currency pairs of the notional value of the retail 
forex transaction, plus the premium received by the retail forex 
customer; or
    (3) For long options, the full premium charged and received by the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution.
    (b)(1) Form of margin. Margin collected under paragraph (a) of this 
section or pledged by a retail forex customer for retail forex 
transactions in excess of the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section must be in the form of cash or the following financial 
instruments:
    (i) Obligations of the United States and obligations fully 
guaranteed as to principal and interest by the United States;
    (ii) General obligations of any State or of any political 
subdivision thereof;

[[Page 836]]

    (iii) General obligations issued or guaranteed by any enterprise, as 
defined in 12 U.S.C. 4502(10);
    (iv) Certificates of deposit issued by an insured depository 
institution, as defined in Sec. 3(c)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(2));
    (v) Commercial paper;
    (vi) Corporate notes or bonds;
    (vii) General obligations of a sovereign nation;
    (viii) Interests in money market mutual funds; and
    (ix) Such other financial instruments as the FDIC deems appropriate.
    (2) Haircuts. An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
shall establish written policies and procedures that include:
    (i) Haircuts for noncash margin collected under this section; and
    (ii) Annual evaluation, and, if appropriate, modification of the 
haircuts.
    (c) Separate margin account. Margin collected by the FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution from a retail forex customer for retail 
forex transactions or pledged by a retail forex customer for retail 
forex transactions shall be placed into a separate account containing 
only such margin.
    (d) Margin calls; liquidation of position. For each retail forex 
customer, at least once per day, an FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution shall:
    (1) Mark the value of the retail forex customer's open retail forex 
positions to market;
    (2) Mark the value of the margin collected under this section from 
the retail forex customer to market;
    (3) Determine if, based on the marks in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of 
this section, the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution has 
collected margin from the retail forex customer sufficient to satisfy 
the requirements of this section; and
    (4) Collect such margin from the retail forex customer as the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution may require to satisfy the 
requirements of this section, or liquidate the retail forex customer's 
retail forex transactions.
    (e) Set-off prohibited. An FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution may not:
    (1) Apply a retail forex customer's retail forex obligations against 
any funds or other asset of the retail forex customer other than margin 
in the separate margin account described in paragraph (c) of this 
section;
    (2) Apply a retail forex customer's retail forex obligations to 
increase the amount owed by the retail forex customer to the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution under any loan; or
    (3) Collect the margin required under this section by use of any 
right of set-off.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.22  Required reporting to customers.

    (a) Monthly statements. Each FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution must promptly furnish to each retail forex customer, as of 
the close of the last business day of each month or as of any regular 
monthly date selected, except for accounts in which there are neither 
open positions at the end of the statement period nor any changes to the 
account balance since the prior statement period, but in any event not 
less frequently than once every three months, a statement that clearly 
shows:
    (1) For each retail forex customer:
    (i) The open retail forex transactions with prices at which 
acquired;
    (ii) The net unrealized profits or losses in all open retail forex 
transactions marked to the market;
    (iii) Any money, securities or other property in the separate margin 
account required by Sec. 349.21(c); and
    (iv) A detailed accounting of all financial charges and credits to 
the retail forex customer's retail forex accounts during the monthly 
reporting period, including: money, securities, or property received 
from or disbursed to such customer; realized profits and losses; and 
fees, charges, commissions, and spreads.
    (2) For each retail forex customer engaging in retail forex 
transactions that are options:

[[Page 837]]

    (i) All such options purchased, sold, exercised, or expired during 
the monthly reporting period, identified by underlying retail forex 
transaction or underlying currency, strike price, transaction date, and 
expiration date;
    (ii) The open option positions carried for such customer and arising 
as of the end of the monthly reporting period, identified by underlying 
retail forex transaction or underlying currency, strike price, 
transaction date, and expiration date;
    (iii) All such option positions marked to the market and the amount 
each position is in the money, if any;
    (iv) Any money, securities or other property in the separate margin 
account required by Sec. 349.21(c); and
    (v) A detailed accounting of all financial charges and credits to 
the retail forex customer's retail forex accounts during the monthly 
reporting period, including: money, securities, or property received 
from or disbursed to such customer; realized profits and losses; 
premiums and mark-ups; and fees, charges, and commissions.
    (b) Confirmation statement. Each FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution must, not later than the next business day after any retail 
forex transaction, send:
    (1) To each retail forex customer, a written confirmation of each 
retail forex transaction caused to be executed by it for the customer, 
including offsetting transactions executed during the same business day 
and the rollover of an open retail forex transaction to the next 
business day;
    (2) To each retail forex customer engaging in forex option 
transactions, a written confirmation of each forex option transaction, 
containing at least the following information:
    (i) The retail forex customer's account identification number;
    (ii) A separate listing of the actual amount of the premium, as well 
as each mark-up thereon, if applicable, and all other commissions, 
costs, fees and other charges incurred in connection with the forex 
option transaction;
    (iii) The strike price;
    (iv) The underlying retail forex transaction or underlying currency;
    (v) The final exercise date of the forex option purchased or sold; 
and
    (vi) The date the forex option transaction was executed.
    (3) To each retail forex customer engaging in forex option 
transactions, upon the expiration or exercise of any option, a written 
confirmation statement thereof, which statement shall include the date 
of such occurrence, a description of the option involved, and, in the 
case of exercise, the details of the retail forex or physical currency 
position which resulted therefrom including, if applicable, the final 
trading date of the retail forex transaction underlying the option.
    (c) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) 
of this section, a retail forex transaction that is caused to be 
executed for a pooled investment vehicle that engages in retail forex 
transactions need be confirmed only to the operator of such pooled 
investment vehicle.
    (d) Controlled accounts. With respect to any account controlled by 
any person other than the retail forex customer for whom such account is 
carried, each FDIC-supervised insured depository institution shall 
promptly furnish in writing to such other person the information 
required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.
    (e) Introduced accounts. Each statement provided pursuant to the 
provisions of this section must, if applicable, show that the account 
for which the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution was 
introduced by an introducing broker and the name of the introducing 
broker.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated and amended at 80 FR 74912, 
Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.23  Unlawful representations.

    (a) No implication or representation of limiting losses. No FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution engaged in retail foreign 
exchange transactions or its IAPs may imply or represent that it will, 
with respect to any retail customer forex account, for or on behalf of 
any person:
    (1) Guarantee such person or account against loss;
    (2) Limit the loss of such person or account; or
    (3) Not call for or attempt to collect margin as established for 
retail forex customers.

[[Page 838]]

    (b) No implication of representation of engaging in prohibited acts. 
No FDIC-supervised insured depository institution or its IAPs may in any 
way imply or represent that it will engage in any of the acts or 
practices described in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) No Federal government endorsement. No FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution or its IAPs may represent or imply in any manner 
whatsoever that any retail forex transaction or retail forex product has 
been sponsored, recommended, or approved by the FDIC, the Federal 
government, or any agency thereof.
    (d) Assuming or sharing of liability from bank error. This section 
shall not be construed to prevent an FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution from assuming or sharing in the losses resulting from the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution's error or mishandling of 
a retail forex transaction.
    (e) Certain guaranties unaffected. This section shall not affect any 
guarantee entered into prior to the effective date of this part, but 
this section shall apply to any extension, modification or renewal 
thereof entered into after such date.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.24  Authorization to trade.

    (a) Specific authorization required. No FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution may directly or indirectly effect a retail forex 
transaction for the account of any retail forex customer unless, before 
the transaction occurs, the retail forex customer specifically 
authorized the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution to effect 
the retail forex transaction.
    (b) Requirements for specific authorization. A retail forex 
transaction is ``specifically authorized'' for purposes of this section 
if the retail forex customer specifies:
    (1) The precise retail forex transaction to be effected;
    (2) The exact amount of the foreign currency to be purchased or 
sold; and
    (3) In the case of an option, the identity of the foreign currency 
or contract that underlies the option.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.25  Trading and operational standards.

    (a) Internal rules, procedures, and controls required. An FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution engaging in retail forex 
transactions shall establish and implement internal policies, 
procedures, and controls designed, at a minimum, to:
    (1) Ensure, to the extent reasonable, that each order received from 
a retail forex transaction that is executable at or near the price that 
the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution has quoted to the 
retail forex customer is entered for execution before any order in any 
retail forex transaction for
    (i) A any proprietary account;
    (ii) An account in which a related person has an interest, or any 
account for which such a related person may originate orders without the 
prior specific consent of the account owner if the related person has 
gained knowledge of the retail forex customer's order prior to the 
transmission of an order for a proprietary account;
    (iii) an account in which such a related person has an interest, if 
the related person has gained knowledge of the retail forex customer's 
order prior to the transmission of an order for a proprietary account; 
or
    (iv) an account in which such a related person may originate orders 
without the prior specific consent of the account owner if the related 
person has gained knowledge of the retail forex customer's order prior 
to the transmission of an order for a proprietary account.
    (2) Prevent FDIC-supervised insured depository institution related 
persons from placing orders, directly or indirectly, with another person 
in a manner designed to circumvent the provisions of paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section;
    (3) Fairly and objectively establish settlement prices for retail 
forex transactions; and

[[Page 839]]

    (b) Disclosure of retail forex transactions. No FDIC-supervised 
insured depository institution engaging in retail forex transactions may 
disclose that an order of another person is being held by the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution, unless the disclosure is 
necessary to the effective execution of such order or the disclosure is 
made at the request of the FDIC.
    (c) Handling of retail forex accounts of related persons of retail 
forex counterparties. No FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
engaging in retail forex transactions may knowingly handle the retail 
forex account of an employee of another retail forex counterparty's 
retail forex business unless the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution:
    (1) Receives written authorization from a person designated by the 
other retail forex counterparty with responsibility for the surveillance 
over the account pursuant to paragraph (a)(2) of this section;
    (2) Prepares immediately upon receipt of an order for the account a 
written record of the order, including the account identification and 
order number, and records thereon to the nearest minute, by time-stamp 
or other timing device, the date and time the order is received; and
    (3) Transmits on a regular basis to the other retail forex 
counterparty copies of all statements for the account and of all written 
records prepared upon the receipt of orders for such account pursuant to 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (d) Related person of FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
establishing account at another retail forex counterparty. No related 
person of an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution working in 
the institution's retail forex business may have an account, directly or 
indirectly, with another retail forex counterparty unless the other 
retail forex counterparty:
    (1) Receives written authorization to open and maintain the an 
account from a person designated by the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution of which it is a related person with 
responsibility for the surveillance over the account pursuant to 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section; and
    (2) Transmits on a regular basis to the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution copies of all statements for such account and of 
all written records prepared by the other retail forex counterparty upon 
receipt of orders for the account pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section are transmitted on a regular basis to the retail forex 
counterparty of which it is a related person.
    (e) Prohibited trading practices. No FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution engaging in retail forex transactions may:
    (1) Enter into a retail forex transaction, to be executed pursuant 
to a market or limit order at a price that is not at or near the price 
at which other retail forex customers, during that same time period, 
have executed retail forex transactions with the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution;
    (2) Adjust or alter prices for a retail forex transaction after the 
transaction has been confirmed to the retail forex customer;
    (3) Provide a retail forex customer a new bid price for a retail 
forex transaction that is higher than its previous bid without providing 
a new asked price that is also higher than its previous asked price by a 
similar amount;
    (4) Provide a retail forex customer a new bid price for a retail 
forex transaction that is lower than its previous bid without providing 
a new asked price that is also lower than its previous asked price by a 
similar amount; or
    (5) Establish a new position for a retail forex customer (except one 
that offsets an existing position for that retail forex customer) where 
the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution holds outstanding 
orders of other retail forex customers for the same currency pair at a 
comparable price.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.26  Supervision.

    (a) Supervision by the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution. An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution engaging 
in retail forex transactions shall diligently supervise the handling by 
its officers, employees, and agents (or persons occupying a similar

[[Page 840]]

status or performing a similar function) of all retail forex accounts 
carried, operated, or advised by at the FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution and all activities of its officers, employees, 
and agents (or persons occupying a similar status or performing a 
similar function) relating to its retail forex business.
    (b) Supervision by officers, employees, or agents. An officer, 
employee, or agent of an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
must diligently supervise his or her subordinates' handling of all 
retail forex accounts at the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution and all the subordinates' activities relating to the FDIC-
supervised insured depository institution's retail forex business.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.27  Notice of transfers.

    (a) Prior notice generally required. Except as provided in paragraph 
(b) of this section, an FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
must provide a retail forex customer with 30 days' prior notice of any 
assignment of any position or transfer of any account of the retail 
forex customer. The notice must include a statement that the retail 
forex customer is not required to accept the proposed assignment or 
transfer and may direct the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution to liquidate the positions of the retail forex customer or 
transfer the account to a retail forex counterparty of the retail forex 
customer's selection.
    (b) Exceptions. The requirements of paragraph (a) of this section 
shall not apply to transfers:
    (1) Requested by the retail forex customer;
    (2) Made by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation as receiver or 
conservator under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act; or
    (3) Otherwise authorized by applicable law.
    (c) Obligations of transferee FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution. An FDIC-supervised insured depository institution to which 
retail forex accounts or positions are assigned or transferred under 
paragraph (a) of this section must provide to the affected retail forex 
customers the risk disclosure statements and forms of acknowledgment 
required by this part and receive the required signed acknowledgments 
within sixty days of such assignments or transfers. This requirement 
shall not apply if the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution 
has clear written evidence that the retail forex customer has received 
and acknowledged receipt of the required disclosure statements.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



Sec. 349.28  Customer dispute resolution.

    (a) Voluntary submission of claims to dispute or settlement 
procedures. No FDIC-supervised insured depository institution may enter 
into any agreement or understanding with a retail forex customer in 
which the customer agrees, prior to the time a claim or grievance 
arises, to submit such claim or grievance to any settlement procedure.
    (b) Election of forum. (1) Within ten business days after receipt of 
notice from the retail forex customer that the customer intends to 
submit a claim to arbitration, the FDIC-supervised insured depository 
institution must provide the customer with a list of persons qualified 
in dispute resolution.
    (2) The customer shall, within 45 days after receipt of such list, 
notify the FDIC-supervised insured depository institution of the person 
selected. The customer's failure to provide such notice shall give the 
FDIC-supervised insured depository institution the right to select a 
person from the list.
    (c) Enforceability. A dispute settlement procedure may require 
parties using such procedure to agree, under applicable state law, 
submission agreement or otherwise, to be bound by an award rendered in 
the procedure, provided that the agreement to submit the claim or 
grievance to the voluntary procedure under paragraph (a) of this section 
or that agreement to submit the claim or grievance was made after the 
claim or grievance arose. Any award so rendered shall be enforceable in 
accordance with applicable law.
    (d) Time limits for submission of claims. The dispute settlement 
procedure used

[[Page 841]]

by the parties shall not include any unreasonably short limitation 
period foreclosing submission of a customer's claims or grievances or 
counterclaims.
    (e) Counterclaims. A procedure for the settlement of a retail forex 
customer's claims or grievances against an FDIC-supervised insured 
depository institution or employee thereof may permit the submission of 
a counterclaim in the procedure by a person against whom a claim or 
grievance is brought. Such a counterclaim may be permitted where it 
arises out of the transaction or occurrence that is the subject of the 
customer's claim or grievance and does not require for adjudication the 
presence of essential witnesses, parties, or third persons over which 
the settlement process lacks jurisdiction.

[76 FR 40789, July 12, 2011. Redesignated at 80 FR 74912, Nov. 30, 2015]



PART 350_DISCLOSURE OF FINANCIAL AND OTHER INFORMATION BY FDIC-INSURED
STATE NONMEMBER BANKS--Table of Contents



Sec.
350.1  Scope.
350.2  Definitions.
350.3  Requirement for annual disclosure statement.
350.4  Contents of annual disclosure statement.
350.5  Alternative annual disclosure statements.
350.6  Signature and attestation.
350.7  Notice and availability.
350.8  Delivery.
350.9  Disclosure of examination reports.
350.10  Prohibited conduct and penalties.
350.11  Safe harbor provision.
350.12  Disclosure required by applicable banking or securities law or 
          regulations.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1817(a)(1), 1819 ``Seventh'' and ``Tenth''.

    Source: 52 FR 49379, Dec. 31, 1987, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 350.1  Scope.

    This part applies to FDIC-insured state-chartered banks that are not 
members of the Federal Reserve System, and to FDIC-Insured state-
licensed branches of foreign banks.



Sec. 350.2  Definitions.

    (a) Bank. For purposes of this part, the term bank means an FDIC-
insured state-chartered organization that is not a member of the Federal 
Reserve System, and an FDIC-insured state-licensed branch of a foreign 
bank.
    (b) Call Report. For purposes of this part, the term Call Report 
means the report filed by a bank pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1817(a)(1).



Sec. 350.3  Requirement for annual disclosure statement.

    (a) Contents. Each bank shall prepare as of December 31 and make 
available on request an annual disclosure statement. The statement shall 
contain information required by Sec. 350.4(a) and (b) and may include 
other information that bank management believes appropriate, as provided 
in Sec. 350.4(c).
    (b) Availability. A bank shall make its annual disclosure statement 
available to the public beginning not later than the following March 31 
or, if the bank mails an annual report to its shareholders, beginning 
not later than five days after the mailing of such reports, whichever 
occurs first. A bank shall make a disclosure statement available 
continuously until the disclosure statement for the succeeding year 
becomes available.

[62 FR 10200, Mar. 6, 1997]



Sec. 350.4  Contents of annual disclosure statement.

    (a) Financial reports. The annual disclosure statement for any year 
shall reflect a fair presentation of the bank's financial condition at 
the end of that year and the preceding year and, except for state-
licensed branches of foreign banks, the results of operations for each 
such year. The annual disclosure statement may, at the option of bank 
management, consist of the bank's entire Call Report, or applicable 
portions thereof, for the relevant dates and periods. At a minimum, the 
statement must contain information comparable to that provided in the 
following Call Report schedules:
    (1) For insured state-chartered organizations that are not members 
of the Federal Reserve System:
    (i) Schedule RC (Balance Sheet);
    (ii) Schedule RC-N (Past Due and Nonaccrual, Loans, Leases, and 
Other Assets--column A covering financial instruments past due 30 
through 89

[[Page 842]]

days and still accruing and Memorandum item 1 need not be included);
    (iii) Schedule RI (Income Statement);
    (iv) Schedule RI-A (Changes in Equity Capital); and
    (v) Schedule RI-B, Part II (Changes in Allowance for Loan and Lease 
Losses).
    (2) For insured state-licensed branches of foreign banks:
    (i) Schedule RAL (Assets and Liabilities);
    (ii) Schedule E (Deposit Liabilities and Credit Balances); and
    (iii) Schedule P (Other Borrowed Money).
    (b) Other required information. The annual disclosure statement 
shall include such other information as the FDIC may require of a 
particular bank. This could include disclosure of enforcement actions 
where the FDIC deems it in the public interest to do so.
    (c) Optional information. A bank may, at its option, provide 
additional information that bank management considers important to an 
evaluation of the overall condition of the bank. This information could 
include, but is not limited to, a discussion of the financial data; 
information relating to mergers and acquisitions; the existence of and 
facts relating to regulatory enforcement actions; business plans; and 
material changes in balance sheet and income statement items.
    (d) Disclaimer. The following legend shall be included in every 
annual disclosure statement to advise the public that the FDIC has not 
reviewed the information contained therein: ``This statement has not 
been reviewed, or confirmed for accuracy or relevance, by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation.''

[62 FR 10200, Mar. 6, 1997]



Sec. 350.5  Alternative annual disclosure statements.

    The requirements of Sec. 350.4(a) may be satisfied:
    (a) In the case of a bank having a class of securities registered 
pursuant to section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, by the 
bank's annual report to security holders for meetings at which directors 
are to be elected or the bank's annual report (see 12 CFR part 335);
    (b) In the case of a bank with independently audited financial 
statements, by copies of the audited financial statements and the 
certificate or report of the independent accountant to the extent that 
such statements contain information comparable to that specified in 
Sec. 350.4(a); and
    (c) In the case of a bank subsidiary of a one-bank holding company, 
by an annual report of the one-bank holding company prepared in 
conformity with the regulations of the Securities and Exchange 
Commission or by sections in the holding company's consolidated 
financial statements on Form FR Y-9C pursuant to Regulation Y of the 
Federal Reserve Board (12 CFR part 225) that are comparable to the Call 
Report schedules enumerated in Sec. 350.4(a)(1), provided that in either 
case not less than 95 percent of the holding company's consolidated 
total assets and total liabilities are assets and liabilities of the 
bank and the bank's consolidated subsidiaries.
    (d) In the case of a bank covered by 12 CFR part 363, by an annual 
report prepared pursuant to 12 CFR 363.4. However, if the annual report 
is for a bank subsidiary of a holding company which provides only the 
consolidated financial statements of the holding company, this annual 
report may be used to satisfy the requirements of this part only if it 
is the report of a one-bank holding company and provided that not less 
than 95 percent of the holding company's consolidated total assets and 
total liabilities are assets and liabilities of the bank and the bank's 
consolidated subsidiaries.

[62 FR 10200, Mar. 6, 1997]



Sec. 350.6  Signature and attestation.

    An authorized officer of the bank shall sign the annual disclosure 
statement. The officer shall also attest to the correctness of the 
information contained in the statement if the financial reports are not 
accompanied by a certificate or report of an independent accountant.

[62 FR 10200, Mar. 6, 1997]



Sec. 350.7  Notice and availability.

    (a) Shareholders. If the bank provides written notice of the annual 
meeting of

[[Page 843]]

shareholders, the bank shall include with, or as part of, that notice an 
announcement that the bank's annual disclosure statement will be sent to 
the shareholder either automatically or upon request. For disclosure 
statements available on request, the announcement shall indicate at a 
minimum an address and telephone number to which requests may be 
directed. The first copy of the annual disclosure statement shall be 
provided to a shareholder without charge.
    (b) Customers and the general public. In the lobby of its main 
office and each branch, the bank shall at all times display a notice 
that the annual disclosure statement may be obtained from the bank. The 
notice shall include at a minimum an address and telephone number of 
which requests should be directed. The first copy of the annual 
disclosure statement shall be provided to a requester free of charge.



Sec. 350.8  Delivery.

    Each bank shall, after receiving a request for an annual disclosure 
statement, promptly mail or otherwise furnish a statement to the 
requester.



Sec. 350.9  Disclosure of examination reports.

    Except as permitted under specific provisions of the FDIC's 
regulations (12 CFR part 309), a bank may not disclose any report of 
examination or report of supervisory activity or any portion thereof 
prepared by the FDIC. The bank also shall not make any representation 
concerning such report or the findings therein.



Sec. 350.10  Prohibited conduct and penalties.

    (a) Misrepresentations. No officer, director, employee, agent, or 
other person participating in the affairs of a bank, shall, directly or 
indirectly:
    (1) Disclose or cause to be disclosed false or misleading 
information in the annual disclosure statement, or omit or cause the 
omission of pertinent or required information in the annual disclosure 
statement; or
    (2) Represent that the FDIC, or any employee thereof, has reviewed, 
or confirmed the accuracy or relevance of the disclosure statement.
    (b) Participating persons. For purposes of this part, a person 
participating in the affairs of a bank shall include (but not be limited 
to) any person who provides information contained in, or directly or 
indirectly assists in the preparation of, the annual disclosure 
statement.
    (c) Enforcement actions. Conduct that violates paragraph (a) of this 
section may constitute an unsafe or unsound banking practice or 
otherwise serve as a basis for an enforcement action by the FDIC.



Sec. 350.11  Safe harbor provision.

    The provisions of Sec. 350.10 shall not apply unless it is shown 
that the information disclosed was included without a reasonable basis 
or other than in good faith.



Sec. 350.12  Disclosure required by applicable banking or securities
law or regulations.

    The requirements of this part are not intended to replace or waive 
any disclosure required to be made under applicable banking or 
securities law or regulations.

[62 FR 10201, Mar. 6, 1997]



PART 351_PROPRIETARY TRADING AND CERTAIN INTERESTS IN AND 
RELATIONSHIPS WITH COVERED FUNDS--Table of Contents



                   Subpart A_Authority and Definitions

Sec.
351.1  Authority, purpose, scope, and relationship to other authorities.
351.2  Definitions.

                      Subpart B_Proprietary Trading

351.3  Prohibition on proprietary trading.
351.4  Permitted underwriting and market making-related activities.
351.5  Permitted risk-mitigating hedging activities.
351.6  Other permitted proprietary trading activities.
351.7  Limitations on permitted proprietary trading activities.
351.8-351.9  [Reserved]

[[Page 844]]

            Subpart C_Covered Fund Activities and Investments

351.10  Prohibition on acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in 
          and having certain relationships with a covered fund.
351.11  Permitted organizing and offering, underwriting, and market 
          making with respect to a covered fund.
351.12  Permitted investment in a covered fund.
351.13  Other permitted covered fund activities and investments.
351.14  Limitations on relationships with a covered fund.
351.15  Other limitations on permitted covered fund activities and 
          investments.
351.16  Ownership of interests in and sponsorship of issuers of certain 
          collateralized debt obligations backed by trust-preferred 
          securities.
351.17-351.19  [Reserved]

          Subpart D_Compliance Program Requirement; Violations

351.20  Program for compliance; reporting.
351.21  Termination of activities or investments; penalties for 
          violations.

Appendix A to Part 351--Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements for 
          Covered Trading Activities
Appendix B to Part 351--Enhanced Minimum Standards for Compliance 
          Programs

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1851; 1811 et seq.; 3101 et seq.; and 5412.

    Source: 79 FR 5805, Jan. 31, 2014, unless otherwise noted.



                   Subpart A_Authority and Definitions



Sec. 351.1  Authority, purpose, scope, and relationship to other
authorities.

    (a) Authority. This part is issued by the FDIC under section 13 of 
the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1851).
    (b) Purpose. Section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act establishes 
prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading and investments in 
or relationships with covered funds by certain banking entities, 
including any insured depository institution as defined in section 
3(c)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(2)) and 
certain subsidiaries thereof for which the FDIC is the appropriate 
Federal banking agency as defined in section 3(q) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(q)). This part implements section 13 of 
the Bank Holding Company Act by defining terms used in the statute and 
related terms, establishing prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary 
trading and investments in or relationships with covered funds, and 
explaining the statute's requirements.
    (c) Scope. This part implements section 13 of the Bank Holding 
Company Act with respect to insured depository institutions for which 
the FDIC is the appropriate Federal banking agency, as defined in 
section 3(q) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, and certain 
subsidiaries of the foregoing.
    (d) Relationship to other authorities. Except as otherwise provided 
in under section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act, and notwithstanding 
any other provision of law, the prohibitions and restrictions under 
section 13 of Bank Holding Company Act shall apply to the activities and 
investments of a banking entity, even if such activities and investments 
are authorized for a banking entity under other applicable provisions of 
law.
    (e) Preservation of authority. Nothing in this part limits in any 
way the authority of the FDIC to impose on a banking entity identified 
in paragraph (c) of this section additional requirements or restrictions 
with respect to any activity, investment, or relationship covered under 
section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act or this part, or additional 
penalties for violation of this part provided under any other applicable 
provision of law.

[79 FR 5805, Jan. 31, 2014]



Sec. 351.2  Definitions.

    Unless otherwise specified, for purposes of this part:
    (a) Affiliate has the same meaning as in section 2(k) of the Bank 
Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(k)).
    (b) Bank holding company has the same meaning as in section 2 of the 
Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841).
    (c) Banking entity. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of 
this section, banking entity means:
    (i) Any insured depository institution;
    (ii) Any company that controls an insured depository institution;

[[Page 845]]

    (iii) Any company that is treated as a bank holding company for 
purposes of section 8 of the International Banking Act of 1978 (12 
U.S.C. 3106); and
    (iv) Any affiliate or subsidiary of any entity described in 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section.
    (2) Banking entity does not include:
    (i) A covered fund that is not itself a banking entity under 
paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section;
    (ii) A portfolio company held under the authority contained in 
section 4(k)(4)(H) or (I) of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(4)(H), (I)), 
or any portfolio concern, as defined under 13 CFR 107.50, that is 
controlled by a small business investment company, as defined in section 
103(3) of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 662), so 
long as the portfolio company or portfolio concern is not itself a 
banking entity under paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this 
section; or
    (iii) The FDIC acting in its corporate capacity or as conservator or 
receiver under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II of the 
Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act.
    (d) Board means the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System.
    (e) CFTC means the Commodity Futures Trading Commission.
    (f) Dealer has the same meaning as in section 3(a)(5) of the 
Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(5)).
    (g) Depository institution has the same meaning as in section 3(c) 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)).
    (h) Derivative. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(2) of this 
section, derivative means:
    (i) Any swap, as that term is defined in section 1a(47) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(47)), or security-based swap, as 
that term is defined in section 3(a)(68) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 
78c(a)(68));
    (ii) Any purchase or sale of a commodity, that is not an excluded 
commodity, for deferred shipment or delivery that is intended to be 
physically settled;
    (iii) Any foreign exchange forward (as that term is defined in 
section 1a(24) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(24)) or 
foreign exchange swap (as that term is defined in section 1a(25) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(25));
    (iv) Any agreement, contract, or transaction in foreign currency 
described in section 2(c)(2)(C)(i) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 
U.S.C. 2(c)(2)(C)(i));
    (v) Any agreement, contract, or transaction in a commodity other 
than foreign currency described in section 2(c)(2)(D)(i) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 2(c)(2)(D)(i)); and
    (vi) Any transaction authorized under section 19 of the Commodity 
Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 23(a) or (b));
    (2) A derivative does not include:
    (i) Any consumer, commercial, or other agreement, contract, or 
transaction that the CFTC and SEC have further defined by joint 
regulation, interpretation, guidance, or other action as not within the 
definition of swap, as that term is defined in section 1a(47) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(47)), or security-based swap, as 
that term is defined in section 3(a)(68) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 
78c(a)(68)); or
    (ii) Any identified banking product, as defined in section 402(b) of 
the Legal Certainty for Bank Products Act of 2000 (7 U.S.C. 27(b)), that 
is subject to section 403(a) of that Act (7 U.S.C. 27a(a)).
    (i) Employee includes a member of the immediate family of the 
employee.
    (j) Exchange Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78a et seq.).
    (k) Excluded commodity has the same meaning as in section 1a(19) of 
the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(19)).
    (l) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    (m) Federal banking agencies means the Board, the Office of the 
Comptroller of the Currency, and the FDIC.
    (n) Foreign banking organization has the same meaning as in section 
211.21(o) of the Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.21(o)), but does not 
include a foreign bank, as defined in section 1(b)(7) of the 
International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3101(7)), that is organized 
under the laws of the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, 
the United States Virgin

[[Page 846]]

Islands, or the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands.
    (o) Foreign insurance regulator means the insurance commissioner, or 
a similar official or agency, of any country other than the United 
States that is engaged in the supervision of insurance companies under 
foreign insurance law.
    (p) General account means all of the assets of an insurance company 
except those allocated to one or more separate accounts.
    (q) Insurance company means a company that is organized as an 
insurance company, primarily and predominantly engaged in writing 
insurance or reinsuring risks underwritten by insurance companies, 
subject to supervision as such by a state insurance regulator or a 
foreign insurance regulator, and not operated for the purpose of evading 
the provisions of section 13 of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1851).
    (r) Insured depository institution has the same meaning as in 
section 3(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)), 
but does not include an insured depository institution that is described 
in section 2(c)(2)(D) of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1841(c)(2)(D)).
    (s) Loan means any loan, lease, extension of credit, or secured or 
unsecured receivable that is not a security or derivative.
    (t) Primary financial regulatory agency has the same meaning as in 
section 2(12) of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer 
Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 5301(12)).
    (u) Purchase includes any contract to buy, purchase, or otherwise 
acquire. For security futures products, purchase includes any contract, 
agreement, or transaction for future delivery. With respect to a 
commodity future, purchase includes any contract, agreement, or 
transaction for future delivery. With respect to a derivative, purchase 
includes the execution, termination (prior to its scheduled maturity 
date), assignment, exchange, or similar transfer or conveyance of, or 
extinguishing of rights or obligations under, a derivative, as the 
context may require.
    (v) Qualifying foreign banking organization means a foreign banking 
organization that qualifies as such under section 211.23(a), (c) or (e) 
of the Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.23(a), (c), or (e)).
    (w) SEC means the Securities and Exchange Commission.
    (x) Sale and sell each include any contract to sell or otherwise 
dispose of. For security futures products, such terms include any 
contract, agreement, or transaction for future delivery. With respect to 
a commodity future, such terms include any contract, agreement, or 
transaction for future delivery. With respect to a derivative, such 
terms include the execution, termination (prior to its scheduled 
maturity date), assignment, exchange, or similar transfer or conveyance 
of, or extinguishing of rights or obligations under, a derivative, as 
the context may require.
    (y) Security has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(10) of the 
Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(10)).
    (z) Security-based swap dealer has the same meaning as in section 
3(a)(71) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(71)).
    (aa) Security future has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(55) 
of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(55)).
    (bb) Separate account means an account established and maintained by 
an insurance company in connection with one or more insurance contracts 
to hold assets that are legally segregated from the insurance company's 
other assets, under which income, gains, and losses, whether or not 
realized, from assets allocated to such account, are, in accordance with 
the applicable contract, credited to or charged against such account 
without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the insurance 
company.
    (cc) State means any State, the District of Columbia, the 
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the United States 
Virgin Islands, and the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands.
    (dd) Subsidiary has the same meaning as in section 2(d) of the Bank 
Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(d)).
    (ee) State insurance regulator means the insurance commissioner, or 
a similar official or agency, of a State that is engaged in the 
supervision of insurance companies under State insurance law.
    (ff) Swap dealer has the same meaning as in section 1(a)(49) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(49)).

[[Page 847]]



                      Subpart B_Proprietary Trading



Sec. 351.3  Prohibition on proprietary trading.

    (a) Prohibition. Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, a 
banking entity may not engage in proprietary trading. Proprietary 
trading means engaging as principal for the trading account of the 
banking entity in any purchase or sale of one or more financial 
instruments.
    (b) Definition of trading account. (1) Trading account means any 
account that is used by a banking entity to:
    (i) Purchase or sell one or more financial instruments principally 
for the purpose of:
    (A) Short-term resale;
    (B) Benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements;
    (C) Realizing short-term arbitrage profits; or
    (D) Hedging one or more positions resulting from the purchases or 
sales of financial instruments described in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A), 
(B), or (C) of this section;
    (ii) Purchase or sell one or more financial instruments that are 
both market risk capital rule covered positions and trading positions 
(or hedges of other market risk capital rule covered positions), if the 
banking entity, or any affiliate of the banking entity, is an insured 
depository institution, bank holding company, or savings and loan 
holding company, and calculates risk-based capital ratios under the 
market risk capital rule; or
    (iii) Purchase or sell one or more financial instruments for any 
purpose, if the banking entity:
    (A) Is licensed or registered, or is required to be licensed or 
registered, to engage in the business of a dealer, swap dealer, or 
security-based swap dealer, to the extent the instrument is purchased or 
sold in connection with the activities that require the banking entity 
to be licensed or registered as such; or
    (B) Is engaged in the business of a dealer, swap dealer, or 
security-based swap dealer outside of the United States, to the extent 
the instrument is purchased or sold in connection with the activities of 
such business.
    (2) Rebuttable presumption for certain purchases and sales. The 
purchase (or sale) of a financial instrument by a banking entity shall 
be presumed to be for the trading account of the banking entity under 
paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section if the banking entity holds the 
financial instrument for fewer than sixty days or substantially 
transfers the risk of the financial instrument within sixty days of the 
purchase (or sale), unless the banking entity can demonstrate, based on 
all relevant facts and circumstances, that the banking entity did not 
purchase (or sell) the financial instrument principally for any of the 
purposes described in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
    (c) Financial instrument. (1) Financial instrument means:
    (i) A security, including an option on a security;
    (ii) A derivative, including an option on a derivative; or
    (iii) A contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, or 
option on a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery.
    (2) A financial instrument does not include:
    (i) A loan;
    (ii) A commodity that is not:
    (A) An excluded commodity (other than foreign exchange or currency);
    (B) A derivative;
    (C) A contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery; or
    (D) An option on a contract of sale of a commodity for future 
delivery; or
    (iii) Foreign exchange or currency.
    (d) Proprietary trading. Proprietary trading does not include:
    (1) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity that arises under a repurchase or reverse repurchase 
agreement pursuant to which the banking entity has simultaneously 
agreed, in writing, to both purchase and sell a stated asset, at stated 
prices, and on stated dates or on demand with the same counterparty;
    (2) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity that arises under a transaction in which the banking 
entity

[[Page 848]]

lends or borrows a security temporarily to or from another party 
pursuant to a written securities lending agreement under which the 
lender retains the economic interests of an owner of such security, and 
has the right to terminate the transaction and to recall the loaned 
security on terms agreed by the parties;
    (3) Any purchase or sale of a security by a banking entity for the 
purpose of liquidity management in accordance with a documented 
liquidity management plan of the banking entity that:
    (i) Specifically contemplates and authorizes the particular 
securities to be used for liquidity management purposes, the amount, 
types, and risks of these securities that are consistent with liquidity 
management, and the liquidity circumstances in which the particular 
securities may or must be used;
    (ii) Requires that any purchase or sale of securities contemplated 
and authorized by the plan be principally for the purpose of managing 
the liquidity of the banking entity, and not for the purpose of short-
term resale, benefitting from actual or expected short-term price 
movements, realizing short-term arbitrage profits, or hedging a position 
taken for such short-term purposes;
    (iii) Requires that any securities purchased or sold for liquidity 
management purposes be highly liquid and limited to securities the 
market, credit, and other risks of which the banking entity does not 
reasonably expect to give rise to appreciable profits or losses as a 
result of short-term price movements;
    (iv) Limits any securities purchased or sold for liquidity 
management purposes, together with any other instruments purchased or 
sold for such purposes, to an amount that is consistent with the banking 
entity's near-term funding needs, including deviations from normal 
operations of the banking entity or any affiliate thereof, as estimated 
and documented pursuant to methods specified in the plan;
    (v) Includes written policies and procedures, internal controls, 
analysis, and independent testing to ensure that the purchase and sale 
of securities that are not permitted under Secs. 351.6(a) or (b) of this 
subpart are for the purpose of liquidity management and in accordance 
with the liquidity management plan described in paragraph (d)(3) of this 
section; and
    (vi) Is consistent with the FDIC's supervisory requirements, 
guidance, and expectations regarding liquidity management;
    (4) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity that is a derivatives clearing organization or a clearing 
agency in connection with clearing financial instruments;
    (5) Any excluded clearing activities by a banking entity that is a 
member of a clearing agency, a member of a derivatives clearing 
organization, or a member of a designated financial market utility;
    (6) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity, so long as:
    (i) The purchase (or sale) satisfies an existing delivery obligation 
of the banking entity or its customers, including to prevent or close 
out a failure to deliver, in connection with delivery, clearing, or 
settlement activity; or
    (ii) The purchase (or sale) satisfies an obligation of the banking 
entity in connection with a judicial, administrative, self-regulatory 
organization, or arbitration proceeding;
    (7) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity that is acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian;
    (8) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity through a deferred compensation, stock-bonus, profit-
sharing, or pension plan of the banking entity that is established and 
administered in accordance with the law of the United States or a 
foreign sovereign, if the purchase or sale is made directly or 
indirectly by the banking entity as trustee for the benefit of persons 
who are or were employees of the banking entity; or
    (9) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a 
banking entity in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously 
contracted

[[Page 849]]

in good faith, provided that the banking entity divests the financial 
instrument as soon as practicable, and in no event may the banking 
entity retain such instrument for longer than such period permitted by 
the FDIC.
    (e) Definition of other terms related to proprietary trading. For 
purposes of this subpart:
    (1) Anonymous means that each party to a purchase or sale is unaware 
of the identity of the other party(ies) to the purchase or sale.
    (2) Clearing agency has the same meaning as in section 3(a)(23) of 
the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(23)).
    (3) Commodity has the same meaning as in section 1a(9) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(9)), except that a commodity does 
not include any security;
    (4) Contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery means a 
contract of sale (as that term is defined in section 1a(13) of the 
Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(13)) for future delivery (as that 
term is defined in section 1a(27) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 
U.S.C. 1a(27))).
    (5) Derivatives clearing organization means:
    (i) A derivatives clearing organization registered under section 5b 
of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 7a-1);
    (ii) A derivatives clearing organization that, pursuant to CFTC 
regulation, is exempt from the registration requirements under section 
5b of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 7a-1); or
    (iii) A foreign derivatives clearing organization that, pursuant to 
CFTC regulation, is permitted to clear for a foreign board of trade that 
is registered with the CFTC.
    (6) Exchange, unless the context otherwise requires, means any 
designated contract market, swap execution facility, or foreign board of 
trade registered with the CFTC, or, for purposes of securities or 
security-based swaps, an exchange, as defined under section 3(a)(1) of 
the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(1)), or security-based swap execution 
facility, as defined under section 3(a)(77) of the Exchange Act (15 
U.S.C. 78c(a)(77)).
    (7) Excluded clearing activities means:
    (i) With respect to customer transactions cleared on a derivatives 
clearing organization, a clearing agency, or a designated financial 
market utility, any purchase or sale necessary to correct trading errors 
made by or on behalf of a customer provided that such purchase or sale 
is conducted in accordance with, for transactions cleared on a 
derivatives clearing organization, the Commodity Exchange Act, CFTC 
regulations, and the rules or procedures of the derivatives clearing 
organization, or, for transactions cleared on a clearing agency, the 
rules or procedures of the clearing agency, or, for transactions cleared 
on a designated financial market utility that is neither a derivatives 
clearing organization nor a clearing agency, the rules or procedures of 
the designated financial market utility;
    (ii) Any purchase or sale in connection with and related to the 
management of a default or threatened imminent default of a customer 
provided that such purchase or sale is conducted in accordance with, for 
transactions cleared on a derivatives clearing organization, the 
Commodity Exchange Act, CFTC regulations, and the rules or procedures of 
the derivatives clearing organization, or, for transactions cleared on a 
clearing agency, the rules or procedures of the clearing agency, or, for 
transactions cleared on a designated financial market utility that is 
neither a derivatives clearing organization nor a clearing agency, the 
rules or procedures of the designated financial market utility;
    (iii) Any purchase or sale in connection with and related to the 
management of a default or threatened imminent default of a member of a 
clearing agency, a member of a derivatives clearing organization, or a 
member of a designated financial market utility;
    (iv) Any purchase or sale in connection with and related to the 
management of the default or threatened default of a clearing agency, a 
derivatives clearing organization, or a designated financial market 
utility; and
    (v) Any purchase or sale that is required by the rules or procedures 
of a clearing agency, a derivatives clearing organization, or a 
designated financial market utility to mitigate the risk to

[[Page 850]]

the clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated 
financial market utility that would result from the clearing by a member 
of security-based swaps that reference the member or an affiliate of the 
member.
    (8) Designated financial market utility has the same meaning as in 
section 803(4) of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 5462(4)).
    (9) Issuer has the same meaning as in section 2(a)(4) of the 
Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77b(a)(4)).
    (10) Market risk capital rule covered position and trading position 
means a financial instrument that is both a covered position and a 
trading position, as those terms are respectively defined:
    (i) In the case of a banking entity that is a bank holding company, 
savings and loan holding company, or insured depository institution, 
under the market risk capital rule that is applicable to the banking 
entity; and
    (ii) In the case of a banking entity that is affiliated with a bank 
holding company or savings and loan holding company, other than a 
banking entity to which a market risk capital rule is applicable, under 
the market risk capital rule that is applicable to the affiliated bank 
holding company or savings and loan holding company.
    (11) Market risk capital rule means the market risk capital rule 
that is contained in subpart F of 12 CFR part 3, 12 CFR parts 208 and 
225, or 12 CFR part 324, as applicable.
    (12) Municipal security means a security that is a direct obligation 
of or issued by, or an obligation guaranteed as to principal or interest 
by, a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any agency or 
instrumentality of a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any 
municipal corporate instrumentality of one or more States or political 
subdivisions thereof.
    (13) Trading desk means the smallest discrete unit of organization 
of a banking entity that purchases or sells financial instruments for 
the trading account of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof.



Sec. 351.4  Permitted underwriting and market making-related
activities.

    (a) Underwriting activities--(1) Permitted underwriting activities. 
The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to a banking 
entity's underwriting activities conducted in accordance with this 
paragraph (a).
    (2) Requirements. The underwriting activities of a banking entity 
are permitted under paragraph (a)(1) of this section only if:
    (i) The banking entity is acting as an underwriter for a 
distribution of securities and the trading desk's underwriting position 
is related to such distribution;
    (ii) The amount and type of the securities in the trading desk's 
underwriting position are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected 
near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, and 
reasonable efforts are made to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting 
position within a reasonable period, taking into account the liquidity, 
maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of security;
    (iii) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains, 
and enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of 
this part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity's 
compliance with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, 
including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal 
controls, analysis and independent testing identifying and addressing:
    (A) The products, instruments or exposures each trading desk may 
purchase, sell, or manage as part of its underwriting activities;
    (B) Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of 
the trading desk's underwriting activities, including the reasonably 
expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, on 
the:
    (1) Amount, types, and risk of its underwriting position;
    (2) Level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its 
underwriting position; and
    (3) Period of time a security may be held;
    (C) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each 
trading desk's compliance with its limits; and

[[Page 851]]

    (D) Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that 
require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading 
desk's limit(s), demonstrable analysis of the basis for any temporary or 
permanent increase to a trading desk's limit(s), and independent review 
of such demonstrable analysis and approval;
    (iv) The compensation arrangements of persons performing the 
activities described in this paragraph (a) are designed not to reward or 
incentivize prohibited proprietary trading; and
    (v) The banking entity is licensed or registered to engage in the 
activity described in this paragraph (a) in accordance with applicable 
law.
    (3) Definition of distribution. For purposes of this paragraph (a), 
a distribution of securities means:
    (i) An offering of securities, whether or not subject to 
registration under the Securities Act of 1933, that is distinguished 
from ordinary trading transactions by the presence of special selling 
efforts and selling methods; or
    (ii) An offering of securities made pursuant to an effective 
registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933.
    (4) Definition of underwriter. For purposes of this paragraph (a), 
underwriter means:
    (i) A person who has agreed with an issuer or selling security 
holder to:
    (A) Purchase securities from the issuer or selling security holder 
for distribution;
    (B) Engage in a distribution of securities for or on behalf of the 
issuer or selling security holder; or
    (C) Manage a distribution of securities for or on behalf of the 
issuer or selling security holder; or
    (ii) A person who has agreed to participate or is participating in a 
distribution of such securities for or on behalf of the issuer or 
selling security holder.
    (5) Definition of selling security holder. For purposes of this 
paragraph (a), selling security holder means any person, other than an 
issuer, on whose behalf a distribution is made.
    (6) Definition of underwriting position. For purposes of this 
paragraph (a), underwriting position means the long or short positions 
in one or more securities held by a banking entity or its affiliate, and 
managed by a particular trading desk, in connection with a particular 
distribution of securities for which such banking entity or affiliate is 
acting as an underwriter.
    (7) Definition of client, customer, and counterparty. For purposes 
of this paragraph (a), the terms client, customer, and counterparty, on 
a collective or individual basis, refer to market participants that may 
transact with the banking entity in connection with a particular 
distribution for which the banking entity is acting as underwriter.
    (b) Market making-related activities--(1) Permitted market making-
related activities. The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not 
apply to a banking entity's market making-related activities conducted 
in accordance with this paragraph (b).
    (2) Requirements. The market making-related activities of a banking 
entity are permitted under paragraph (b)(1) of this section only if:
    (i) The trading desk that establishes and manages the financial 
exposure routinely stands ready to purchase and sell one or more types 
of financial instruments related to its financial exposure and is 
willing and available to quote, purchase and sell, or otherwise enter 
into long and short positions in those types of financial instruments 
for its own account, in commercially reasonable amounts and throughout 
market cycles on a basis appropriate for the liquidity, maturity, and 
depth of the market for the relevant types of financial instruments;
    (ii) The amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in 
the trading desk's market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed, on 
an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, 
customers, or counterparties, based on:
    (A) The liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the 
relevant types of financial instrument(s); and
    (B) Demonstrable analysis of historical customer demand, current 
inventory of financial instruments, and market and other factors 
regarding the amount, types, and risks, of or associated with financial 
instruments in

[[Page 852]]

which the trading desk makes a market, including through block trades;
    (iii) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains, 
and enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of 
this part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity's 
compliance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, 
including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal 
controls, analysis and independent testing identifying and addressing:
    (A) The financial instruments each trading desk stands ready to 
purchase and sell in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this 
section;
    (B) The actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or 
otherwise significantly mitigate promptly the risks of its financial 
exposure consistent with the limits required under paragraph 
(b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section; the products, instruments, and exposures 
each trading desk may use for risk management purposes; the techniques 
and strategies each trading desk may use to manage the risks of its 
market making-related activities and inventory; and the process, 
strategies, and personnel responsible for ensuring that the actions 
taken by the trading desk to mitigate these risks are and continue to be 
effective;
    (C) Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of 
the trading desk's market making-related activities, that address the 
factors prescribed by paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, on:
    (1) The amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory;
    (2) The amount, types, and risks of the products, instruments, and 
exposures the trading desk may use for risk management purposes;
    (3) The level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its 
financial exposure; and
    (4) The period of time a financial instrument may be held;
    (D) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each 
trading desk's compliance with its limits; and
    (E) Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that 
require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading 
desk's limit(s), demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary 
or permanent increase to a trading desk's limit(s) is consistent with 
the requirements of this paragraph (b), and independent review of such 
demonstrable analysis and approval;
    (iv) To the extent that any limit identified pursuant to paragraph 
(b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is exceeded, the trading desk takes 
action to bring the trading desk into compliance with the limits as 
promptly as possible after the limit is exceeded;
    (v) The compensation arrangements of persons performing the 
activities described in this paragraph (b) are designed not to reward or 
incentivize prohibited proprietary trading; and
    (vi) The banking entity is licensed or registered to engage in 
activity described in this paragraph (b) in accordance with applicable 
law.
    (3) Definition of client, customer, and counterparty. For purposes 
of paragraph (b) of this section, the terms client, customer, and 
counterparty, on a collective or individual basis refer to market 
participants that make use of the banking entity's market making-related 
services by obtaining such services, responding to quotations, or 
entering into a continuing relationship with respect to such services, 
provided that:
    (i) A trading desk or other organizational unit of another banking 
entity is not a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk if 
that other entity has trading assets and liabilities of $50 billion or 
more as measured in accordance with Sec. 351.20(d)(1) of subpart D, 
unless:
    (A) The trading desk documents how and why a particular trading desk 
or other organizational unit of the entity should be treated as a 
client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk for purposes of 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section; or
    (B) The purchase or sale by the trading desk is conducted 
anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits 
trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants.
    (4) Definition of financial exposure. For purposes of this paragraph 
(b), financial exposure means the aggregate risks of one or more 
financial instruments and

[[Page 853]]

any associated loans, commodities, or foreign exchange or currency, held 
by a banking entity or its affiliate and managed by a particular trading 
desk as part of the trading desk's market making-related activities.
    (5) Definition of market-maker inventory. For the purposes of this 
paragraph (b), market-maker inventory means all of the positions in the 
financial instruments for which the trading desk stands ready to make a 
market in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, that are 
managed by the trading desk, including the trading desk's open positions 
or exposures arising from open transactions.



Sec. 351.5  Permitted risk-mitigating hedging activities.

    (a) Permitted risk-mitigating hedging activities. The prohibition 
contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the risk-mitigating hedging 
activities of a banking entity in connection with and related to 
individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the 
banking entity and designed to reduce the specific risks to the banking 
entity in connection with and related to such positions, contracts, or 
other holdings.
    (b) Requirements. The risk-mitigating hedging activities of a 
banking entity are permitted under paragraph (a) of this section only 
if:
    (1) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains and 
enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of this 
part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity's 
compliance with the requirements of this section, including:
    (i) Reasonably designed written policies and procedures regarding 
the positions, techniques and strategies that may be used for hedging, 
including documentation indicating what positions, contracts or other 
holdings a particular trading desk may use in its risk-mitigating 
hedging activities, as well as position and aging limits with respect to 
such positions, contracts or other holdings;
    (ii) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring, management, and 
authorization procedures, including relevant escalation procedures; and
    (iii) The conduct of analysis, including correlation analysis, and 
independent testing designed to ensure that the positions, techniques 
and strategies that may be used for hedging may reasonably be expected 
to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, 
identifiable risk(s) being hedged, and such correlation analysis 
demonstrates that the hedging activity demonstrably reduces or otherwise 
significantly mitigates the specific, identifiable risk(s) being hedged;
    (2) The risk-mitigating hedging activity:
    (i) Is conducted in accordance with the written policies, 
procedures, and internal controls required under this section;
    (ii) At the inception of the hedging activity, including, without 
limitation, any adjustments to the hedging activity, is designed to 
reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or 
otherwise significantly mitigates one or more specific, identifiable 
risks, including market risk, counterparty or other credit risk, 
currency or foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, commodity price 
risk, basis risk, or similar risks, arising in connection with and 
related to identified positions, contracts, or other holdings of the 
banking entity, based upon the facts and circumstances of the identified 
underlying and hedging positions, contracts or other holdings and the 
risks and liquidity thereof;
    (iii) Does not give rise, at the inception of the hedge, to any 
significant new or additional risk that is not itself hedged 
contemporaneously in accordance with this section;
    (iv) Is subject to continuing review, monitoring and management by 
the banking entity that:
    (A) Is consistent with the written hedging policies and procedures 
required under paragraph (b)(1) of this section;
    (B) Is designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and 
demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates the specific, 
identifiable risks that develop over time from the risk-mitigating 
hedging activities undertaken under this section and the underlying 
positions, contracts, and

[[Page 854]]

other holdings of the banking entity, based upon the facts and 
circumstances of the underlying and hedging positions, contracts and 
other holdings of the banking entity and the risks and liquidity 
thereof; and
    (C) Requires ongoing recalibration of the hedging activity by the 
banking entity to ensure that the hedging activity satisfies the 
requirements set out in paragraph (b)(2) of this section and is not 
prohibited proprietary trading; and
    (3) The compensation arrangements of persons performing risk-
mitigating hedging activities are designed not to reward or incentivize 
prohibited proprietary trading.
    (c) Documentation requirement--(1) A banking entity must comply with 
the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section with 
respect to any purchase or sale of financial instruments made in 
reliance on this section for risk-mitigating hedging purposes that is:
    (i) Not established by the specific trading desk establishing or 
responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings 
the risks of which the hedging activity is designed to reduce;
    (ii) Established by the specific trading desk establishing or 
responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings 
the risks of which the purchases or sales are designed to reduce, but 
that is effected through a financial instrument, exposure, technique, or 
strategy that is not specifically identified in the trading desk's 
written policies and procedures established under paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section or under Sec. 351.4(b)(2)(iii)(B) of this subpart as a 
product, instrument, exposure, technique, or strategy such trading desk 
may use for hedging; or
    (iii) Established to hedge aggregated positions across two or more 
trading desks.
    (2) In connection with any purchase or sale identified in paragraph 
(c)(1) of this section, a banking entity must, at a minimum, and 
contemporaneously with the purchase or sale, document:
    (i) The specific, identifiable risk(s) of the identified positions, 
contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity that the purchase or 
sale is designed to reduce;
    (ii) The specific risk-mitigating strategy that the purchase or sale 
is designed to fulfill; and
    (iii) The trading desk or other business unit that is establishing 
and responsible for the hedge.
    (3) A banking entity must create and retain records sufficient to 
demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this paragraph (c) for a 
period that is no less than five years in a form that allows the banking 
entity to promptly produce such records to the FDIC on request, or such 
longer period as required under other law or this part.



Sec. 351.6  Other permitted proprietary trading activities.

    (a) Permitted trading in domestic government obligations. The 
prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or 
sale by a banking entity of a financial instrument that is:
    (1) An obligation of, or issued or guaranteed by, the United States;
    (2) An obligation, participation, or other instrument of, or issued 
or guaranteed by, an agency of the United States, the Government 
National Mortgage Association, the Federal National Mortgage 
Association, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, a Federal Home 
Loan Bank, the Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation or a Farm 
Credit System institution chartered under and subject to the provisions 
of the Farm Credit Act of 1971 (12 U.S.C. 2001 et seq.);
    (3) An obligation of any State or any political subdivision thereof, 
including any municipal security; or
    (4) An obligation of the FDIC, or any entity formed by or on behalf 
of the FDIC for purpose of facilitating the disposal of assets acquired 
or held by the FDIC in its corporate capacity or as conservator or 
receiver under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II of the 
Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act.
    (b) Permitted trading in foreign government obligations--(1) 
Affiliates of foreign banking entities in the United States. The 
prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or 
sale of a

[[Page 855]]

financial instrument that is an obligation of, or issued or guaranteed 
by, a foreign sovereign (including any multinational central bank of 
which the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political 
subdivision of such foreign sovereign, by a banking entity, so long as:
    (i) The banking entity is organized under or is directly or 
indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the 
laws of a foreign sovereign and is not directly or indirectly controlled 
by a top-tier banking entity that is organized under the laws of the 
United States;
    (ii) The financial instrument is an obligation of, or issued or 
guaranteed by, the foreign sovereign under the laws of which the foreign 
banking entity referred to in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section is 
organized (including any multinational central bank of which the foreign 
sovereign is a member), or any agency or political subdivision of that 
foreign sovereign; and
    (iii) The purchase or sale as principal is not made by an insured 
depository institution.
    (2) Foreign affiliates of a U.S. banking entity. The prohibition 
contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale of a 
financial instrument that is an obligation of, or issued or guaranteed 
by, a foreign sovereign (including any multinational central bank of 
which the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political 
subdivision of that foreign sovereign, by a foreign entity that is owned 
or controlled by a banking entity organized or established under the 
laws of the United States or any State, so long as:
    (i) The foreign entity is a foreign bank, as defined in section 
211.2(j) of the Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2(j)), or is regulated 
by the foreign sovereign as a securities dealer;
    (ii) The financial instrument is an obligation of, or issued or 
guaranteed by, the foreign sovereign under the laws of which the foreign 
entity is organized (including any multinational central bank of which 
the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political 
subdivision of that foreign sovereign; and
    (iii) The financial instrument is owned by the foreign entity and is 
not financed by an affiliate that is located in the United States or 
organized under the laws of the United States or of any State.
    (c) Permitted trading on behalf of customers--(1) Fiduciary 
transactions. The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply 
to the purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity 
acting as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity, so long as:
    (i) The transaction is conducted for the account of, or on behalf 
of, a customer; and
    (ii) The banking entity does not have or retain beneficial ownership 
of the financial instruments.
    (2) Riskless principal transactions. The prohibition contained in 
Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale of financial 
instruments by a banking entity acting as riskless principal in a 
transaction in which the banking entity, after receiving an order to 
purchase (or sell) a financial instrument from a customer, purchases (or 
sells) the financial instrument for its own account to offset a 
contemporaneous sale to (or purchase from) the customer.
    (d) Permitted trading by a regulated insurance company. The 
prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or 
sale of financial instruments by a banking entity that is an insurance 
company or an affiliate of an insurance company if:
    (1) The insurance company or its affiliate purchases or sells the 
financial instruments solely for:
    (i) The general account of the insurance company; or
    (ii) A separate account established by the insurance company;
    (2) The purchase or sale is conducted in compliance with, and 
subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and 
written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance 
company is domiciled; and
    (3) The appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation 
with the Financial Stability Oversight Council and the relevant 
insurance commissioners of the States and foreign jurisdictions, as 
appropriate, have not jointly determined, after notice and comment, that 
a particular law, regulation, or written guidance described in

[[Page 856]]

paragraph (d)(2) of this section is insufficient to protect the safety 
and soundness of the covered banking entity, or the financial stability 
of the United States.
    (e) Permitted trading activities of foreign banking entities. (1) 
The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.3(a) does not apply to the 
purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity if:
    (i) The banking entity is not organized or directly or indirectly 
controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of the 
United States or of any State;
    (ii) The purchase or sale by the banking entity is made pursuant to 
paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act; and
    (iii) The purchase or sale meets the requirements of paragraph 
(e)(3) of this section.
    (2) A purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity 
is made pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act 
for purposes of paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section only if:
    (i) The purchase or sale is conducted in accordance with the 
requirements of paragraph (e) of this section; and
    (ii)(A) With respect to a banking entity that is a foreign banking 
organization, the banking entity meets the qualifying foreign banking 
organization requirements of section 211.23(a), (c) or (e) of the 
Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.23(a), (c) or (e)), as applicable; or
    (B) With respect to a banking entity that is not a foreign banking 
organization, the banking entity is not organized under the laws of the 
United States or of any State and the banking entity, on a fully-
consolidated basis, meets at least two of the following requirements:
    (1) Total assets of the banking entity held outside of the United 
States exceed total assets of the banking entity held in the United 
States;
    (2) Total revenues derived from the business of the banking entity 
outside of the United States exceed total revenues derived from the 
business of the banking entity in the United States; or
    (3) Total net income derived from the business of the banking entity 
outside of the United States exceeds total net income derived from the 
business of the banking entity in the United States.
    (3) A purchase or sale by a banking entity is permitted for purposes 
of this paragraph (e) if:
    (i) The banking entity engaging as principal in the purchase or sale 
(including any personnel of the banking entity or its affiliate that 
arrange, negotiate or execute such purchase or sale) is not located in 
the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of 
any State;
    (ii) The banking entity (including relevant personnel) that makes 
the decision to purchase or sell as principal is not located in the 
United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any 
State;
    (iii) The purchase or sale, including any transaction arising from 
risk-mitigating hedging related to the instruments purchased or sold, is 
not accounted for as principal directly or on a consolidated basis by 
any branch or affiliate that is located in the United States or 
organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;
    (iv) No financing for the banking entity's purchases or sales is 
provided, directly or indirectly, by any branch or affiliate that is 
located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United 
States or of any State; and
    (v) The purchase or sale is not conducted with or through any U.S. 
entity, other than:
    (A) A purchase or sale with the foreign operations of a U.S. entity 
if no personnel of such U.S. entity that are located in the United 
States are involved in the arrangement, negotiation, or execution of 
such purchase or sale;
    (B) A purchase or sale with an unaffiliated market intermediary 
acting as principal, provided the purchase or sale is promptly cleared 
and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing 
organization acting as a central counterparty; or
    (C) A purchase or sale through an unaffiliated market intermediary 
acting as agent, provided the purchase or sale is conducted anonymously 
on an exchange or similar trading facility and is promptly cleared and 
settled

[[Page 857]]

through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as 
a central counterparty.
    (4) For purposes of this paragraph (e), a U.S. entity is any entity 
that is, or is controlled by, or is acting on behalf of, or at the 
direction of, any other entity that is, located in the United States or 
organized under the laws of the United States or of any State.
    (5) For purposes of this paragraph (e), a U.S. branch, agency, or 
subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is considered to be located in 
the United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls 
that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in 
the United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. 
branch, agency, or subsidiary.
    (6) For purposes of this paragraph (e), unaffiliated market 
intermediary means an unaffiliated entity, acting as an intermediary, 
that is:
    (i) A broker or dealer registered with the SEC under section 15 of 
the Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation 
as such;
    (ii) A swap dealer registered with the CFTC under section 4s of the 
Commodity Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from 
regulation as such;
    (iii) A security-based swap dealer registered with the SEC under 
section 15F of the Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded 
from regulation as such; or
    (iv) A futures commission merchant registered with the CFTC under 
section 4f of the Commodity Exchange Act or exempt from registration or 
excluded from regulation as such.



Sec. 351.7  Limitations on permitted proprietary trading activities.

    (a) No transaction, class of transactions, or activity may be deemed 
permissible under Secs. 351.4 through 351.6 if the transaction, class of 
transactions, or activity would:
    (1) Involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the 
banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties;
    (2) Result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the 
banking entity to a high-risk asset or a high-risk trading strategy; or
    (3) Pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity 
or to the financial stability of the United States.
    (b) Definition of material conflict of interest. (1) For purposes of 
this section, a material conflict of interest between a banking entity 
and its clients, customers, or counterparties exists if the banking 
entity engages in any transaction, class of transactions, or activity 
that would involve or result in the banking entity's interests being 
materially adverse to the interests of its client, customer, or 
counterparty with respect to such transaction, class of transactions, or 
activity, and the banking entity has not taken at least one of the 
actions in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (2) Prior to effecting the specific transaction or class or type of 
transactions, or engaging in the specific activity, the banking entity:
    (i) Timely and effective disclosure. (A) Has made clear, timely, and 
effective disclosure of the conflict of interest, together with other 
necessary information, in reasonable detail and in a manner sufficient 
to permit a reasonable client, customer, or counterparty to meaningfully 
understand the conflict of interest; and
    (B) Such disclosure is made in a manner that provides the client, 
customer, or counterparty the opportunity to negate, or substantially 
mitigate, any materially adverse effect on the client, customer, or 
counterparty created by the conflict of interest; or
    (ii) Information barriers. Has established, maintained, and enforced 
information barriers that are memorialized in written policies and 
procedures, such as physical separation of personnel, or functions, or 
limitations on types of activity, that are reasonably designed, taking 
into consideration the nature of the banking entity's business, to 
prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a 
materially adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty. A 
banking entity may not rely on such information barriers if, in the case 
of any specific transaction, class or type of transactions or activity, 
the banking entity

[[Page 858]]

knows or should reasonably know that, notwithstanding the banking 
entity's establishment of information barriers, the conflict of interest 
may involve or result in a materially adverse effect on a client, 
customer, or counterparty.
    (c) Definition of high-risk asset and high-risk trading strategy. 
For purposes of this section:
    (1) High-risk asset means an asset or group of related assets that 
would, if held by a banking entity, significantly increase the 
likelihood that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial 
loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United 
States.
    (2) High-risk trading strategy means a trading strategy that would, 
if engaged in by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood 
that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial loss or 
would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United States.



Secs. 351.8-351.9  [Reserved]



           Subpart C_Covered Funds Activities and Investments



Sec. 351.10  Prohibition on acquiring or retaining an ownership 
interest in and having certain relationships with a covered fund.

    (a) Prohibition. (1) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, a 
banking entity may not, as principal, directly or indirectly, acquire or 
retain any ownership interest in or sponsor a covered fund.
    (2) Paragraph (a)(1) of this section does not include acquiring or 
retaining an ownership interest in a covered fund by a banking entity:
    (i) Acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian, so long as;
    (A) The activity is conducted for the account of, or on behalf of, a 
customer; and
    (B) The banking entity and its affiliates do not have or retain 
beneficial ownership of such ownership interest;
    (ii) Through a deferred compensation, stock-bonus, profit-sharing, 
or pension plan of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) that is 
established and administered in accordance with the law of the United 
States or a foreign sovereign, if the ownership interest is held or 
controlled directly or indirectly by the banking entity as trustee for 
the benefit of persons who are or were employees of the banking entity 
(or an affiliate thereof);
    (iii) In the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously 
contracted in good faith, provided that the banking entity divests the 
ownership interest as soon as practicable, and in no event may the 
banking entity retain such ownership interest for longer than such 
period permitted by the FDIC; or
    (iv) On behalf of customers as trustee or in a similar fiduciary 
capacity for a customer that is not a covered fund, so long as:
    (A) The activity is conducted for the account of, or on behalf of, 
the customer; and
    (B) The banking entity and its affiliates do not have or retain 
beneficial ownership of such ownership interest.
    (b) Definition of covered fund. (1) Except as provided in paragraph 
(c) of this section, covered fund means:
    (i) An issuer that would be an investment company, as defined in the 
Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.), but for 
section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act (15 U.S.C. 80a-3(c)(1) or (7));
    (ii) Any commodity pool under section 1a(10) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(10)) for which:
    (A) The commodity pool operator has claimed an exemption under 17 
CFR 4.7; or
    (B)(1) A commodity pool operator is registered with the CFTC as a 
commodity pool operator in connection with the operation of the 
commodity pool;
    (2) Substantially all participation units of the commodity pool are 
owned by qualified eligible persons under 17 CFR 4.7(a)(2) and (3); and
    (3) Participation units of the commodity pool have not been publicly 
offered to persons who are not qualified eligible persons under 17 CFR 
4.7(a)(2) and (3); or
    (iii) For any banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or 
indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under 
the laws of the United States or of any State, an entity that:

[[Page 859]]

    (A) Is organized or established outside the United States and the 
ownership interests of which are offered and sold solely outside the 
United States;
    (B) Is, or holds itself out as being, an entity or arrangement that 
raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in 
securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise trading in 
securities; and
    (C)(1) Has as its sponsor that banking entity (or an affiliate 
thereof); or
    (2) Has issued an ownership interest that is owned directly or 
indirectly by that banking entity (or an affiliate thereof).
    (2) An issuer shall not be deemed to be a covered fund under 
paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section if, were the issuer subject to 
U.S. securities laws, the issuer could rely on an exclusion or exemption 
from the definition of ``investment company'' under the Investment 
Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.) other than the exclusions 
contained in section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of that Act.
    (3) For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, a U.S. 
branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is located in 
the United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls 
that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in 
the United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. 
branch, agency, or subsidiary.
    (c) Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of this section, unless the 
appropriate Federal banking agencies, the SEC, and the CFTC jointly 
determine otherwise, a covered fund does not include:
    (1) Foreign public funds. (i) Subject to paragraphs (ii) and (iii) 
below, an issuer that:
    (A) Is organized or established outside of the United States;
    (B) Is authorized to offer and sell ownership interests to retail 
investors in the issuer's home jurisdiction; and
    (C) Sells ownership interests predominantly through one or more 
public offerings outside of the United States.
    (ii) With respect to a banking entity that is, or is controlled 
directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or 
organized under the laws of the United States or of any State and any 
issuer for which such banking entity acts as sponsor, the sponsoring 
banking entity may not rely on the exemption in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of 
this section for such issuer unless ownership interests in the issuer 
are sold predominantly to persons other than:
    (A) Such sponsoring banking entity;
    (B) Such issuer;
    (C) Affiliates of such sponsoring banking entity or such issuer; and
    (D) Directors and employees of such entities.
    (iii) For purposes of paragraph (c)(1)(i)(C) of this section, the 
term ``public offering'' means a distribution (as defined in 
Sec. 351.4(a)(3) of subpart B) of securities in any jurisdiction outside 
the United States to investors, including retail investors, provided 
that:
    (A) The distribution complies with all applicable requirements in 
the jurisdiction in which such distribution is being made;
    (B) The distribution does not restrict availability to investors 
having a minimum level of net worth or net investment assets; and
    (C) The issuer has filed or submitted, with the appropriate 
regulatory authority in such jurisdiction, offering disclosure documents 
that are publicly available.
    (2) Wholly-owned subsidiaries. An entity, all of the outstanding 
ownership interests of which are owned directly or indirectly by the 
banking entity (or an affiliate thereof), except that:
    (i) Up to five percent of the entity's outstanding ownership 
interests, less any amounts outstanding under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of 
this section, may be held by employees or directors of the banking 
entity or such affiliate (including former employees or directors if 
their ownership interest was acquired while employed by or in the 
service of the banking entity); and
    (ii) Up to 0.5 percent of the entity's outstanding ownership 
interests may be held by a third party if the ownership interest is 
acquired or retained by the third party for the purpose of establishing 
corporate separateness or addressing bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar 
concerns.
    (3) Joint ventures. A joint venture between a banking entity or any 
of its affiliates and one or more unaffiliated

[[Page 860]]

persons, provided that the joint venture:
    (i) Is comprised of no more than 10 unaffiliated co-venturers;
    (ii) Is in the business of engaging in activities that are 
permissible for the banking entity or affiliate, other than investing in 
securities for resale or other disposition; and
    (iii) Is not, and does not hold itself out as being, an entity or 
arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose 
of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise 
trading in securities.
    (4) Acquisition vehicles. An issuer:
    (i) Formed solely for the purpose of engaging in a bona fide merger 
or acquisition transaction; and
    (ii) That exists only for such period as necessary to effectuate the 
transaction.
    (5) Foreign pension or retirement funds. A plan, fund, or program 
providing pension, retirement, or similar benefits that is:
    (i) Organized and administered outside the United States;
    (ii) A broad-based plan for employees or citizens that is subject to 
regulation as a pension, retirement, or similar plan under the laws of 
the jurisdiction in which the plan, fund, or program is organized and 
administered; and
    (iii) Established for the benefit of citizens or residents of one or 
more foreign sovereigns or any political subdivision thereof.
    (6) Insurance company separate accounts. A separate account, 
provided that no banking entity other than the insurance company 
participates in the account's profits and losses.
    (7) Bank owned life insurance. A separate account that is used 
solely for the purpose of allowing one or more banking entities to 
purchase a life insurance policy for which the banking entity or 
entities is beneficiary, provided that no banking entity that purchases 
the policy:
    (i) Controls the investment decisions regarding the underlying 
assets or holdings of the separate account; or
    (ii) Participates in the profits and losses of the separate account 
other than in compliance with applicable supervisory guidance regarding 
bank owned life insurance.
    (8) Loan securitizations. (i) Scope. An issuing entity for asset-
backed securities that satisfies all the conditions of this paragraph 
(c)(8) and the assets or holdings of which are comprised solely of:
    (A) Loans as defined in Sec. 351.2(s) of subpart A;
    (B) Rights or other assets designed to assure the servicing or 
timely distribution of proceeds to holders of such securities and rights 
or other assets that are related or incidental to purchasing or 
otherwise acquiring and holding the loans, provided that each asset 
meets the requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(iii) of this section;
    (C) Interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that meet the 
requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(iv) of this section; and
    (D) Special units of beneficial interest and collateral certificates 
that meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(v) of this section.
    (ii) Impermissible assets. For purposes of this paragraph (c)(8), 
the assets or holdings of the issuing entity shall not include any of 
the following:
    (A) A security, including an asset-backed security, or an interest 
in an equity or debt security other than as permitted in paragraph 
(c)(8)(iii) of this section;
    (B) A derivative, other than a derivative that meets the 
requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(iv) of this section; or
    (C) A commodity forward contract.
    (iii) Permitted securities. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(8)(ii)(A) 
of this section, the issuing entity may hold securities if those 
securities are:
    (A) Cash equivalents for purposes of the rights and assets in 
paragraph (c)(8)(i)(B) of this section; or
    (B) Securities received in lieu of debts previously contracted with 
respect to the loans supporting the asset-backed securities.
    (iv) Derivatives. The holdings of derivatives by the issuing entity 
shall be limited to interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that 
satisfy all of the following conditions:
    (A) The written terms of the derivative directly relate to the 
loans, the asset-backed securities, or the contractual rights of other 
assets described in

[[Page 861]]

paragraph (c)(8)(i)(B) of this section; and
    (B) The derivatives reduce the interest rate and/or foreign exchange 
risks related to the loans, the asset-backed securities, or the 
contractual rights or other assets described in paragraph (c)(8)(i)(B) 
of this section.
    (v) Special units of beneficial interest and collateral 
certificates. The assets or holdings of the issuing entity may include 
collateral certificates and special units of beneficial interest issued 
by a special purpose vehicle, provided that:
    (A) The special purpose vehicle that issues the special unit of 
beneficial interest or collateral certificate meets the requirements in 
this paragraph (c)(8);
    (B) The special unit of beneficial interest or collateral 
certificate is used for the sole purpose of transferring to the issuing 
entity for the loan securitization the economic risks and benefits of 
the assets that are permissible for loan securitizations under this 
paragraph (c)(8) and does not directly or indirectly transfer any 
interest in any other economic or financial exposure;
    (C) The special unit of beneficial interest or collateral 
certificate is created solely to satisfy legal requirements or otherwise 
facilitate the structuring of the loan securitization; and
    (D) The special purpose vehicle that issues the special unit of 
beneficial interest or collateral certificate and the issuing entity are 
established under the direction of the same entity that initiated the 
loan securitization.
    (9) Qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduits. (i) An 
issuing entity for asset-backed commercial paper that satisfies all of 
the following requirements:
    (A) The asset-backed commercial paper conduit holds only:
    (1) Loans and other assets permissible for a loan securitization 
under paragraph (c)(8)(i) of this section; and
    (2) Asset-backed securities supported solely by assets that are 
permissible for loan securitizations under paragraph (c)(8)(i) of this 
section and acquired by the asset-backed commercial paper conduit as 
part of an initial issuance either directly from the issuing entity of 
the asset-backed securities or directly from an underwriter in the 
distribution of the asset-backed securities;
    (B) The asset-backed commercial paper conduit issues only asset-
backed securities, comprised of a residual interest and securities with 
a legal maturity of 397 days or less; and
    (C) A regulated liquidity provider has entered into a legally 
binding commitment to provide full and unconditional liquidity coverage 
with respect to all of the outstanding asset-backed securities issued by 
the asset-backed commercial paper conduit (other than any residual 
interest) in the event that funds are required to redeem maturing asset-
backed securities.
    (ii) For purposes of this paragraph (c)(9), a regulated liquidity 
provider means:
    (A) A depository institution, as defined in section 3(c) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c));
    (B) A bank holding company, as defined in section 2(a) of the Bank 
Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(a)), or a subsidiary 
thereof;
    (C) A savings and loan holding company, as defined in section 10a of 
the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1467a), provided all or 
substantially all of the holding company's activities are permissible 
for a financial holding company under section 4(k) of the Bank Holding 
Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)), or a subsidiary thereof;
    (D) A foreign bank whose home country supervisor, as defined in 
Sec. 211.21(q) of the Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.21(q)), has 
adopted capital standards consistent with the Capital Accord for the 
Basel Committee on banking Supervision, as amended, and that is subject 
to such standards, or a subsidiary thereof; or
    (E) The United States or a foreign sovereign.
    (10) Qualifying covered bonds--(i) Scope. An entity owning or 
holding a dynamic or fixed pool of loans or other assets as provided in 
paragraph (c)(8) of this section for the benefit of the holders of 
covered bonds, provided that the assets in the pool are comprised solely 
of assets that meet the conditions in paragraph (c)(8)(i) of this 
section.

[[Page 862]]

    (ii) Covered bond. For purposes of this paragraph (c)(10), a covered 
bond means:
    (A) A debt obligation issued by an entity that meets the definition 
of foreign banking organization, the payment obligations of which are 
fully and unconditionally guaranteed by an entity that meets the 
conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(10)(i) of this section; or
    (B) A debt obligation of an entity that meets the conditions set 
forth in paragraph (c)(10)(i) of this section, provided that the payment 
obligations are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by an entity that 
meets the definition of foreign banking organization and the entity is a 
wholly-owned subsidiary, as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, 
of such foreign banking organization.
    (11) SBICs and public welfare investment funds. An issuer:
    (i) That is a small business investment company, as defined in 
section 103(3) of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 
662), or that has received from the Small Business Administration notice 
to proceed to qualify for a license as a small business investment 
company, which notice or license has not been revoked; or
    (ii) The business of which is to make investments that are:
    (A) Designed primarily to promote the public welfare, of the type 
permitted under paragraph (11) of section 5136 of the Revised Statutes 
of the United States (12 U.S.C. 24), including the welfare of low- and 
moderate-income communities or families (such as providing housing, 
services, or jobs); or
    (B) Qualified rehabilitation expenditures with respect to a 
qualified rehabilitated building or certified historic structure, as 
such terms are defined in section 47 of the Internal Revenue Code of 
1986 or a similar State historic tax credit program.
    (12) Registered investment companies and excluded entities. An 
issuer:
    (i) That is registered as an investment company under section 8 of 
the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-8), or that is formed 
and operated pursuant to a written plan to become a registered 
investment company as described in Sec. 351.20(e)(3) of subpart D and 
that complies with the requirements of section 18 of the Investment 
Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-18);
    (ii) That may rely on an exclusion or exemption from the definition 
of ``investment company'' under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 
U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.) other than the exclusions contained in section 
3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of that Act; or
    (iii) That has elected to be regulated as a business development 
company pursuant to section 54(a) of that Act (15 U.S.C. 80a-53) and has 
not withdrawn its election, or that is formed and operated pursuant to a 
written plan to become a business development company as described in 
Sec. 351.20(e)(3) of subpart D and that complies with the requirements 
of section 61 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-60).
    (13) Issuers in conjunction with the FDIC's receivership or 
conservatorship operations. An issuer that is an entity formed by or on 
behalf of the FDIC for the purpose of facilitating the disposal of 
assets acquired in the FDIC's capacity as conservator or receiver under 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II of the Dodd-Frank Wall 
Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act.
    (14) Other excluded issuers. (i) Any issuer that the appropriate 
Federal banking agencies, the SEC, and the CFTC jointly determine the 
exclusion of which is consistent with the purposes of section 13 of the 
BHC Act.
    (ii) A determination made under paragraph (c)(14)(i) of this section 
will be promptly made public.
    (d) Definition of other terms related to covered funds. For purposes 
of this subpart:
    (1) Applicable accounting standards means U.S. generally accepted 
accounting principles, or such other accounting standards applicable to 
a banking entity that the FDIC determines are appropriate and that the 
banking entity uses in the ordinary course of its business in preparing 
its consolidated financial statements.
    (2) Asset-backed security has the meaning specified in Section 
3(a)(79) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(79).
    (3) Director has the same meaning as provided in section 215.2(d)(1) 
of the

[[Page 863]]

Board's Regulation O (12 CFR 215.2(d)(1)).
    (4) Issuer has the same meaning as in section 2(a)(22) of the 
Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-2(a)(22)).
    (5) Issuing entity means with respect to asset-backed securities the 
special purpose vehicle that owns or holds the pool assets underlying 
asset-backed securities and in whose name the asset-backed securities 
supported or serviced by the pool assets are issued.
    (6) Ownership interest--(i) Ownership interest means any equity, 
partnership, or other similar interest. An ``other similar interest'' 
means an interest that:
    (A) Has the right to participate in the selection or removal of a 
general partner, managing member, member of the board of directors or 
trustees, investment manager, investment adviser, or commodity trading 
advisor of the covered fund (excluding the rights of a creditor to 
exercise remedies upon the occurrence of an event of default or an 
acceleration event);
    (B) Has the right under the terms of the interest to receive a share 
of the income, gains or profits of the covered fund;
    (C) Has the right to receive the underlying assets of the covered 
fund after all other interests have been redeemed and/or paid in full 
(excluding the rights of a creditor to exercise remedies upon the 
occurrence of an event of default or an acceleration event);
    (D) Has the right to receive all or a portion of excess spread (the 
positive difference, if any, between the aggregate interest payments 
received from the underlying assets of the covered fund and the 
aggregate interest paid to the holders of other outstanding interests);
    (E) Provides under the terms of the interest that the amounts 
payable by the covered fund with respect to the interest could be 
reduced based on losses arising from the underlying assets of the 
covered fund, such as allocation of losses, write-downs or charge-offs 
of the outstanding principal balance, or reductions in the amount of 
interest due and payable on the interest;
    (F) Receives income on a pass-through basis from the covered fund, 
or has a rate of return that is determined by reference to the 
performance of the underlying assets of the covered fund; or
    (G) Any synthetic right to have, receive, or be allocated any of the 
rights in paragraphs (d)(6)(i)(A) through (F) of this section.
    (ii) Ownership interest does not include: Restricted profit 
interest. An interest held by an entity (or an employee or former 
employee thereof) in a covered fund for which the entity (or employee 
thereof) serves as investment manager, investment adviser, commodity 
trading advisor, or other service provider so long as:
    (A) The sole purpose and effect of the interest is to allow the 
entity (or employee or former employee thereof) to share in the profits 
of the covered fund as performance compensation for the investment 
management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other 
services provided to the covered fund by the entity (or employee or 
former employee thereof), provided that the entity (or employee or 
former employee thereof) may be obligated under the terms of such 
interest to return profits previously received;
    (B) All such profit, once allocated, is distributed to the entity 
(or employee or former employee thereof) promptly after being earned or, 
if not so distributed, is retained by the covered fund for the sole 
purpose of establishing a reserve amount to satisfy contractual 
obligations with respect to subsequent losses of the covered fund and 
such undistributed profit of the entity (or employee or former employee 
thereof) does not share in the subsequent investment gains of the 
covered fund;
    (C) Any amounts invested in the covered fund, including any amounts 
paid by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) in 
connection with obtaining the restricted profit interest, are within the 
limits of Sec. 351.12 of this subpart; and
    (D) The interest is not transferable by the entity (or employee or 
former employee thereof) except to an affiliate thereof (or an employee 
of the banking entity or affiliate), to immediate family members, or 
through the intestacy, of the employee or former employee, or in 
connection with a sale of the business that gave rise to the restricted

[[Page 864]]

profit interest by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) 
to an unaffiliated party that provides investment management, investment 
advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other services to the fund.
    (7) Prime brokerage transaction means any transaction that would be 
a covered transaction, as defined in section 23A(b)(7) of the Federal 
Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7)), that is provided in connection with 
custody, clearance and settlement, securities borrowing or lending 
services, trade execution, financing, or data, operational, and 
administrative support.
    (8) Resident of the United States means a person that is a ``U.S. 
person'' as defined in rule 902(k) of the SEC's Regulation S (17 CFR 
230.902(k)).
    (9) Sponsor means, with respect to a covered fund:
    (i) To serve as a general partner, managing member, or trustee of a 
covered fund, or to serve as a commodity pool operator with respect to a 
covered fund as defined in (b)(1)(ii) of this section;
    (ii) In any manner to select or to control (or to have employees, 
officers, or directors, or agents who constitute) a majority of the 
directors, trustees, or management of a covered fund; or
    (iii) To share with a covered fund, for corporate, marketing, 
promotional, or other purposes, the same name or a variation of the same 
name.
    (10) Trustee. (i) For purposes of paragraph (d)(9) of this section 
and Sec. 351.11 of subpart C, a trustee does not include:
    (A) A trustee that does not exercise investment discretion with 
respect to a covered fund, including a trustee that is subject to the 
direction of an unaffiliated named fiduciary who is not a trustee 
pursuant to section 403(a)(1) of the Employee's Retirement Income 
Security Act (29 U.S.C. 1103(a)(1)); or
    (B) A trustee that is subject to fiduciary standards imposed under 
foreign law that are substantially equivalent to those described in 
paragraph (d)(10)(i)(A) of this section;
    (ii) Any entity that directs a person described in paragraph 
(d)(10)(i) of this section, or that possesses authority and discretion 
to manage and control the investment decisions of a covered fund for 
which such person serves as trustee, shall be considered to be a trustee 
of such covered fund.



Sec. 351.11  Permitted organizing and offering, underwriting,
and market making with respect to a covered fund.

    (a) Organizing and offering a covered fund in general. 
Notwithstanding Sec. 351.10(a) of this subpart, a banking entity is not 
prohibited from acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, or 
acting as sponsor to, a covered fund in connection with, directly or 
indirectly, organizing and offering a covered fund, including serving as 
a general partner, managing member, trustee, or commodity pool operator 
of the covered fund and in any manner selecting or controlling (or 
having employees, officers, directors, or agents who constitute) a 
majority of the directors, trustees, or management of the covered fund, 
including any necessary expenses for the foregoing, only if:
    (1) The banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) provides bona fide 
trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory 
services;
    (2) The covered fund is organized and offered only in connection 
with the provision of bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, 
or commodity trading advisory services and only to persons that are 
customers of such services of the banking entity (or an affiliate 
thereof), pursuant to a written plan or similar documentation outlining 
how the banking entity or such affiliate intends to provide advisory or 
similar services to its customers through organizing and offering such 
fund;
    (3) The banking entity and its affiliates do not acquire or retain 
an ownership interest in the covered fund except as permitted under 
Sec. 351.12 of this subpart;
    (4) The banking entity and its affiliates comply with the 
requirements of Sec. 351.14 of this subpart;
    (5) The banking entity and its affiliates do not, directly or 
indirectly, guarantee, assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or 
performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such 
covered fund invests;

[[Page 865]]

    (6) The covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or 
other purposes:
    (i) Does not share the same name or a variation of the same name 
with the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof); and
    (ii) Does not use the word ``bank'' in its name;
    (7) No director or employee of the banking entity (or an affiliate 
thereof) takes or retains an ownership interest in the covered fund, 
except for any director or employee of the banking entity or such 
affiliate who is directly engaged in providing investment advisory, 
commodity trading advisory, or other services to the covered fund at the 
time the director or employee takes the ownership interest; and
    (8) The banking entity:
    (i) Clearly and conspicuously discloses, in writing, to any 
prospective and actual investor in the covered fund (such as through 
disclosure in the covered fund's offering documents):
    (A) That ``any losses in [such covered fund] will be borne solely by 
investors in [the covered fund] and not by [the banking entity] or its 
affiliates; therefore, [the banking entity's] losses in [such covered 
fund] will be limited to losses attributable to the ownership interests 
in the covered fund held by [the banking entity] and any affiliate in 
its capacity as investor in the [covered fund] or as beneficiary of a 
restricted profit interest held by [the banking entity] or any 
affiliate'';
    (B) That such investor should read the fund offering documents 
before investing in the covered fund;
    (C) That the ``ownership interests in the covered fund are not 
insured by the FDIC, and are not deposits, obligations of, or endorsed 
or guaranteed in any way, by any banking entity'' (unless that happens 
to be the case); and
    (D) The role of the banking entity and its affiliates and employees 
in sponsoring or providing any services to the covered fund; and
    (ii) Complies with any additional rules of the appropriate Federal 
banking agencies, the SEC, or the CFTC, as provided in section 13(b)(2) 
of the BHC Act, designed to ensure that losses in such covered fund are 
borne solely by investors in the covered fund and not by the covered 
banking entity and its affiliates.
    (b) Organizing and offering an issuing entity of asset-backed 
securities. (1) Notwithstanding Sec. 351.10(a) of this subpart, a 
banking entity is not prohibited from acquiring or retaining an 
ownership interest in, or acting as sponsor to, a covered fund that is 
an issuing entity of asset-backed securities in connection with, 
directly or indirectly, organizing and offering that issuing entity, so 
long as the banking entity and its affiliates comply with all of the 
requirements of paragraph (a)(3) through (8) of this section.
    (2) For purposes of this paragraph (b), organizing and offering a 
covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities means 
acting as the securitizer, as that term is used in section 15G(a)(3) of 
the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-11(a)(3)) of the issuing entity, or 
acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in the issuing entity as 
required by section 15G of that Act (15 U.S.C.78o-11) and the 
implementing regulations issued thereunder.
    (c) Underwriting and market making in ownership interests of a 
covered fund. The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.10(a) of this 
subpart does not apply to a banking entity's underwriting activities or 
market making-related activities involving a covered fund so long as:
    (1) Those activities are conducted in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 351.4(a) or Sec. 351.4(b) of subpart B, 
respectively;
    (2) With respect to any banking entity (or any affiliate thereof) 
that: Acts as a sponsor, investment adviser or commodity trading advisor 
to a particular covered fund or otherwise acquires and retains an 
ownership interest in such covered fund in reliance on paragraph (a) of 
this section; acquires and retains an ownership interest in such covered 
fund and is either a securitizer, as that term is used in section 
15G(a)(3) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-11(a)(3)), or is acquiring 
and retaining an ownership interest in such covered fund in compliance 
with section 15G of that Act (15 U.S.C.78o-11) and the implementing 
regulations issued thereunder each as permitted by

[[Page 866]]

paragraph (b) of this section; or, directly or indirectly, guarantees, 
assumes, or otherwise insures the obligations or performance of the 
covered fund or of any covered fund in which such fund invests, then in 
each such case any ownership interests acquired or retained by the 
banking entity and its affiliates in connection with underwriting and 
market making related activities for that particular covered fund are 
included in the calculation of ownership interests permitted to be held 
by the banking entity and its affiliates under the limitations of 
Sec. 351.12(a)(2)(ii) and Sec. 351.12(d) of this subpart; and
    (3) With respect to any banking entity, the aggregate value of all 
ownership interests of the banking entity and its affiliates in all 
covered funds acquired and retained under Sec. 351.11 of this subpart, 
including all covered funds in which the banking entity holds an 
ownership interest in connection with underwriting and market making 
related activities permitted under this paragraph (c), are included in 
the calculation of all ownership interests under Sec. 351.12(a)(2)(iii) 
and Sec. 351.12(d) of this subpart.



Sec. 351.12  Permitted investment in a covered fund.

    (a) Authority and limitations on permitted investments in covered 
funds. (1) Notwithstanding the prohibition contained in Sec. 351.10(a) 
of this subpart, a banking entity may acquire and retain an ownership 
interest in a covered fund that the banking entity or an affiliate 
thereof organizes and offers pursuant to Sec. 351.11, for the purposes 
of:
    (i) Establishment. Establishing the fund and providing the fund with 
sufficient initial equity for investment to permit the fund to attract 
unaffiliated investors, subject to the limits contained in paragraphs 
(a)(2)(i) and (iii) of this section; or
    (ii) De minimis investment. Making and retaining an investment in 
the covered fund subject to the limits contained in paragraphs 
(a)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (2) Investment limits--(i) Seeding period. With respect to an 
investment in any covered fund made or held pursuant to paragraph 
(a)(1)(i) of this section, the banking entity and its affiliates:
    (A) Must actively seek unaffiliated investors to reduce, through 
redemption, sale, dilution, or other methods, the aggregate amount of 
all ownership interests of the banking entity in the covered fund to the 
amount permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(B) of this section; and
    (B) Must, no later than 1 year after the date of establishment of 
the fund (or such longer period as may be provided by the Board pursuant 
to paragraph (e) of this section), conform its ownership interest in the 
covered fund to the limits in paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section;
    (ii) Per-fund limits. (A) Except as provided in paragraph 
(a)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, an investment by a banking entity and its 
affiliates in any covered fund made or held pursuant to paragraph 
(a)(1)(ii) of this section may not exceed 3 percent of the total number 
or value of the outstanding ownership interests of the fund.
    (B) An investment by a banking entity and its affiliates in a 
covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities may 
not exceed 3 percent of the total fair market value of the ownership 
interests of the fund measured in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of 
this section, unless a greater percentage is retained by the banking 
entity and its affiliates in compliance with the requirements of section 
15G of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-11) and the implementing 
regulations issued thereunder, in which case the investment by the 
banking entity and its affiliates in the covered fund may not exceed the 
amount, number, or value of ownership interests of the fund required 
under section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations 
issued thereunder.
    (iii) Aggregate limit. The aggregate value of all ownership 
interests of the banking entity and its affiliates in all covered funds 
acquired or retained under this section may not exceed 3 percent of the 
tier 1 capital of the banking entity, as provided under paragraph (c) of 
this section, and shall be calculated as of the last day of each 
calendar quarter.

[[Page 867]]

    (iv) Date of establishment. For purposes of this section, the date 
of establishment of a covered fund shall be:
    (A) In general. The date on which the investment adviser or similar 
entity to the covered fund begins making investments pursuant to the 
written investment strategy for the fund;
    (B) Issuing entities of asset-backed securities. In the case of an 
issuing entity of asset-backed securities, the date on which the assets 
are initially transferred into the issuing entity of asset-backed 
securities.
    (b) Rules of construction--(1) Attribution of ownership interests to 
a covered banking entity. (i) For purposes of paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section, the amount and value of a banking entity's permitted investment 
in any single covered fund shall include any ownership interest held 
under Sec. 351.12 directly by the banking entity, including any 
affiliate of the banking entity.
    (ii) Treatment of registered investment companies, SEC-regulated 
business development companies and foreign public funds. For purposes of 
paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, a registered investment company, 
SEC-regulated business development companies or foreign public fund as 
described in Sec. 351.10(c)(1) of this subpart will not be considered to 
be an affiliate of the banking entity so long as the banking entity:
    (A) Does not own, control, or hold with the power to vote 25 percent 
or more of the voting shares of the company or fund; and
    (B) Provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, 
administrative, and other services to the company or fund in compliance 
with the limitations under applicable regulation, order, or other 
authority.
    (iii) Covered funds. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this 
section, a covered fund will not be considered to be an affiliate of a 
banking entity so long as the covered fund is held in compliance with 
the requirements of this subpart.
    (iv) Treatment of employee and director investments financed by the 
banking entity. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, an 
investment by a director or employee of a banking entity who acquires an 
ownership interest in his or her personal capacity in a covered fund 
sponsored by the banking entity will be attributed to the banking entity 
if the banking entity, directly or indirectly, extends financing for the 
purpose of enabling the director or employee to acquire the ownership 
interest in the fund and the financing is used to acquire such ownership 
interest in the covered fund.
    (2) Calculation of permitted ownership interests in a single covered 
fund. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) or (4), for purposes of 
determining whether an investment in a single covered fund complies with 
the restrictions on ownership interests under paragraphs (a)(2)(i)(B) 
and (a)(2)(ii)(A) of this section:
    (i) The aggregate number of the outstanding ownership interests held 
by the banking entity shall be the total number of ownership interests 
held under this section by the banking entity in a covered fund divided 
by the total number of ownership interests held by all entities in that 
covered fund, as of the last day of each calendar quarter (both measured 
without regard to committed funds not yet called for investment);
    (ii) The aggregate value of the outstanding ownership interests held 
by the banking entity shall be the aggregate fair market value of all 
investments in and capital contributions made to the covered fund by the 
banking entity, divided by the value of all investments in and capital 
contributions made to that covered fund by all entities, as of the last 
day of each calendar quarter (all measured without regard to committed 
funds not yet called for investment). If fair market value cannot be 
determined, then the value shall be the historical cost basis of all 
investments in and contributions made by the banking entity to the 
covered fund;
    (iii) For purposes of the calculation under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of 
this section, once a valuation methodology is chosen, the banking entity 
must calculate the value of its investment and the investments of all 
others in the covered fund in the same manner and according to the same 
standards.

[[Page 868]]

    (3) Issuing entities of asset-backed securities. In the case of an 
ownership interest in an issuing entity of asset-backed securities, for 
purposes of determining whether an investment in a single covered fund 
complies with the restrictions on ownership interests under paragraphs 
(a)(2)(i)(B) and (a)(2)(ii)(B) of this section:
    (i) For securitizations subject to the requirements of section 15G 
of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-11), the calculations shall be made 
as of the date and according to the valuation methodology applicable 
pursuant to the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act (15 
U.S.C. 78o-11) and the implementing regulations issued thereunder; or
    (ii) For securitization transactions completed prior to the 
compliance date of such implementing regulations (or as to which such 
implementing regulations do not apply), the calculations shall be made 
as of the date of establishment as defined in paragraph (a)(2)(iv)(B) of 
this section or such earlier date on which the transferred assets have 
been valued for purposes of transfer to the covered fund, and thereafter 
only upon the date on which additional securities of the issuing entity 
of asset-backed securities are priced for purposes of the sales of 
ownership interests to unaffiliated investors.
    (iii) For securitization transactions completed prior to the 
compliance date of such implementing regulations (or as to which such 
implementing regulations do not apply), the aggregate value of the 
outstanding ownership interests in the covered fund shall be the fair 
market value of the assets transferred to the issuing entity of the 
securitization and any other assets otherwise held by the issuing entity 
at such time, determined in a manner that is consistent with its 
determination of the fair market value of those assets for financial 
statement purposes.
    (iv) For purposes of the calculation under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of 
this section, the valuation methodology used to calculate the fair 
market value of the ownership interests must be the same for both the 
ownership interests held by a banking entity and the ownership interests 
held by all others in the covered fund in the same manner and according 
to the same standards.
    (4) Multi-tier fund investments--(i) Master-feeder fund investments. 
If the principal investment strategy of a covered fund (the ``feeder 
fund'') is to invest substantially all of its assets in another single 
covered fund (the ``master fund''), then for purposes of the investment 
limitations in paragraphs (a)(2)(i)(B) and (a)(2)(ii) of this section, 
the banking entity's permitted investment in such funds shall be 
measured only by reference to the value of the master fund. The banking 
entity's permitted investment in the master fund shall include any 
investment by the banking entity in the master fund, as well as the 
banking entity's pro-rata share of any ownership interest of the master 
fund that is held through the feeder fund; and
    (ii) Fund-of-funds investments. If a banking entity organizes and 
offers a covered fund pursuant to Sec. 351.11 of this subpart for the 
purpose of investing in other covered funds (a ``fund of funds'') and 
that fund of funds itself invests in another covered fund that the 
banking entity is permitted to own, then the banking entity's permitted 
investment in that other fund shall include any investment by the 
banking entity in that other fund, as well as the banking entity's pro-
rata share of any ownership interest of the fund that is held through 
the fund of funds. The investment of the banking entity may not 
represent more than 3 percent of the amount or value of any single 
covered fund.
    (c) Aggregate permitted investments in all covered funds. (1) For 
purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section, the aggregate value 
of all ownership interests held by a banking entity shall be the sum of 
all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity in connection with 
acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in covered funds (together 
with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection 
with obtaining a restricted profit interest under Sec. 351.10(d)(6)(ii) 
of this subpart), on a historical cost basis.
    (2) Calculation of tier 1 capital. For purposes of paragraph 
(a)(2)(iii) of this section:

[[Page 869]]

    (i) Entities that are required to hold and report tier 1 capital. If 
a banking entity is required to calculate and report tier 1 capital, the 
banking entity's tier 1 capital shall be equal to the amount of tier 1 
capital of the banking entity as of the last day of the most recent 
calendar quarter, as reported to its primary financial regulatory 
agency; and
    (ii) If a banking entity is not required to calculate and report 
tier 1 capital, the banking entity's tier 1 capital shall be determined 
to be equal to:
    (A) In the case of a banking entity that is controlled, directly or 
indirectly, by a depository institution that calculates and reports tier 
1 capital, be equal to the amount of tier 1 capital reported by such 
controlling depository institution in the manner described in paragraph 
(c)(2)(i) of this section;
    (B) In the case of a banking entity that is not controlled, directly 
or indirectly, by a depository institution that calculates and reports 
tier 1 capital:
    (1) Bank holding company subsidiaries. If the banking entity is a 
subsidiary of a bank holding company or company that is treated as a 
bank holding company, be equal to the amount of tier 1 capital reported 
by the top-tier affiliate of such covered banking entity that calculates 
and reports tier 1 capital in the manner described in paragraph 
(c)(2)(i) of this section; and
    (2) Other holding companies and any subsidiary or affiliate thereof. 
If the banking entity is not a subsidiary of a bank holding company or a 
company that is treated as a bank holding company, be equal to the total 
amount of shareholders' equity of the top-tier affiliate within such 
organization as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter that 
has ended, as determined under applicable accounting standards.
    (iii) Treatment of foreign banking entities--(A) Foreign banking 
entities. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iii)(B) of this 
section, with respect to a banking entity that is not itself, and is not 
controlled directly or indirectly by, a banking entity that is located 
or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State, the 
tier 1 capital of the banking entity shall be the consolidated tier 1 
capital of the entity as calculated under applicable home country 
standards.
    (B) U.S. affiliates of foreign banking entities. With respect to a 
banking entity that is located or organized under the laws of the United 
States or of any State and is controlled by a foreign banking entity 
identified under paragraph (c)(2)(iii)(A) of this section, the banking 
entity's tier 1 capital shall be as calculated under paragraphs 
(c)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (d) Capital treatment for a permitted investment in a covered fund. 
For purposes of calculating compliance with the applicable regulatory 
capital requirements, a banking entity shall deduct from the banking 
entity's tier 1 capital (as determined under paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section) the greater of:
    (1) The sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity 
in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest 
(together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in 
connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under 
Sec. 351.10(d)(6)(ii) of subpart C), on a historical cost basis, plus 
any earnings received; and
    (2) The fair market value of the banking entity's ownership 
interests in the covered fund as determined under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) 
or (b)(3) of this section (together with any amounts paid by the entity 
(or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit 
interest under Sec. 351.10(d)(6)(ii) of subpart C), if the banking 
entity accounts for the profits (or losses) of the fund investment in 
its financial statements.
    (e) Extension of time to divest an ownership interest. (1) Upon 
application by a banking entity, the Board may extend the period under 
paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section for up to 2 additional years if the 
Board finds that an extension would be consistent with safety and 
soundness and not detrimental to the public interest. An application for 
extension must:
    (i) Be submitted to the Board at least 90 days prior to the 
expiration of the applicable time period;
    (ii) Provide the reasons for application, including information that 
addresses the factors in paragraph (e)(2) of this section; and

[[Page 870]]

    (iii) Explain the banking entity's plan for reducing the permitted 
investment in a covered fund through redemption, sale, dilution or other 
methods as required in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (2) Factors governing Board determinations. In reviewing any 
application under paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the Board may 
consider all the facts and circumstances related to the permitted 
investment in a covered fund, including:
    (i) Whether the investment would result, directly or indirectly, in 
a material exposure by the banking entity to high-risk assets or high-
risk trading strategies;
    (ii) The contractual terms governing the banking entity's interest 
in the covered fund;
    (iii) The date on which the covered fund is expected to have 
attracted sufficient investments from investors unaffiliated with the 
banking entity to enable the banking entity to comply with the 
limitations in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section;
    (iv) The total exposure of the covered banking entity to the 
investment and the risks that disposing of, or maintaining, the 
investment in the covered fund may pose to the banking entity and the 
financial stability of the United States;
    (v) The cost to the banking entity of divesting or disposing of the 
investment within the applicable period;
    (vi) Whether the investment or the divestiture or conformance of the 
investment would involve or result in a material conflict of interest 
between the banking entity and unaffiliated parties, including clients, 
customers or counterparties to which it owes a duty;
    (vi) The banking entity's prior efforts to reduce through 
redemption, sale, dilution, or other methods its ownership interests in 
the covered fund, including activities related to the marketing of 
interests in such covered fund;
    (viii) Market conditions; and
    (ix) Any other factor that the Board believes appropriate.
    (3) Authority to impose restrictions on activities or investment 
during any extension period. The Board may impose such conditions on any 
extension approved under paragraph (e)(1) of this section as the Board 
determines are necessary or appropriate to protect the safety and 
soundness of the banking entity or the financial stability of the United 
States, address material conflicts of interest or other unsound banking 
practices, or otherwise further the purposes of section 13 of the BHC 
Act and this part.
    (4) Consultation. In the case of a banking entity that is primarily 
regulated by another Federal banking agency, the SEC, or the CFTC, the 
Board will consult with such agency prior to acting on an application by 
the banking entity for an extension under paragraph (e)(1) of this 
section.



Sec. 351.13  Other permitted covered fund activities and investments.

    (a) Permitted risk-mitigating hedging activities. (1) The 
prohibition contained in Sec. 351.10(a) of this subpart does not apply 
with respect to an ownership interest in a covered fund acquired or 
retained by a banking entity that is designed to demonstrably reduce or 
otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risks to the 
banking entity in connection with a compensation arrangement with an 
employee of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof that directly 
provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory or other 
services to the covered fund.
    (2) Requirements. The risk-mitigating hedging activities of a 
banking entity are permitted under this paragraph (a) only if:
    (i) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains and 
enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of this 
part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity's 
compliance with the requirements of this section, including:
    (A) Reasonably designed written policies and procedures; and
    (B) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring, management, and 
authorization procedures, including relevant escalation procedures; and
    (ii) The acquisition or retention of the ownership interest:
    (A) Is made in accordance with the written policies, procedures and 
internal controls required under this section;

[[Page 871]]

    (B) At the inception of the hedge, is designed to reduce or 
otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or otherwise 
significantly mitigates one or more specific, identifiable risks arising 
in connection with the compensation arrangement with the employee that 
directly provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or 
other services to the covered fund;
    (C) Does not give rise, at the inception of the hedge, to any 
significant new or additional risk that is not itself hedged 
contemporaneously in accordance with this section; and
    (D) Is subject to continuing review, monitoring and management by 
the banking entity.
    (iii) The compensation arrangement relates solely to the covered 
fund in which the banking entity or any affiliate has acquired an 
ownership interest pursuant to this paragraph and such compensation 
arrangement provides that any losses incurred by the banking entity on 
such ownership interest will be offset by corresponding decreases in 
amounts payable under such compensation arrangement.
    (b) Certain permitted covered fund activities and investments 
outside of the United States. (1) The prohibition contained in 
Sec. 351.10(a) of this subpart does not apply to the acquisition or 
retention of any ownership interest in, or the sponsorship of, a covered 
fund by a banking entity only if:
    (i) The banking entity is not organized or directly or indirectly 
controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of the 
United States or of one or more States;
    (ii) The activity or investment by the banking entity is pursuant to 
paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act;
    (iii) No ownership interest in the covered fund is offered for sale 
or sold to a resident of the United States; and
    (iv) The activity or investment occurs solely outside of the United 
States.
    (2) An activity or investment by the banking entity is pursuant to 
paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act for purposes of 
paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section only if:
    (i) The activity or investment is conducted in accordance with the 
requirements of this section; and
    (ii)(A) With respect to a banking entity that is a foreign banking 
organization, the banking entity meets the qualifying foreign banking 
organization requirements of section 211.23(a), (c) or (e) of the 
Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.23(a), (c) or (e)), as applicable; or
    (B) With respect to a banking entity that is not a foreign banking 
organization, the banking entity is not organized under the laws of the 
United States or of one or more States and the banking entity, on a 
fully-consolidated basis, meets at least two of the following 
requirements:
    (1) Total assets of the banking entity held outside of the United 
States exceed total assets of the banking entity held in the United 
States;
    (2) Total revenues derived from the business of the banking entity 
outside of the United States exceed total revenues derived from the 
business of the banking entity in the United States; or
    (3) Total net income derived from the business of the banking entity 
outside of the United States exceeds total net income derived from the 
business of the banking entity in the United States.
    (3) An ownership interest in a covered fund is not offered for sale 
or sold to a resident of the United States for purposes of paragraph 
(b)(1)(iii) of this section only if it is sold or has been sold pursuant 
to an offering that does not target residents of the United States.
    (4) An activity or investment occurs solely outside of the United 
States for purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section only if:
    (i) The banking entity acting as sponsor, or engaging as principal 
in the acquisition or retention of an ownership interest in the covered 
fund, is not itself, and is not controlled directly or indirectly by, a 
banking entity that is located in the United States or organized under 
the laws of the United States or of any State;
    (ii) The banking entity (including relevant personnel) that makes 
the decision to acquire or retain the ownership interest or act as 
sponsor to the

[[Page 872]]

covered fund is not located in the United States or organized under the 
laws of the United States or of any State;
    (iii) The investment or sponsorship, including any transaction 
arising from risk-mitigating hedging related to an ownership interest, 
is not accounted for as principal directly or indirectly on a 
consolidated basis by any branch or affiliate that is located in the 
United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any 
State; and
    (iv) No financing for the banking entity's ownership or sponsorship 
is provided, directly or indirectly, by any branch or affiliate that is 
located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United 
States or of any State.
    (5) For purposes of this section, a U.S. branch, agency, or 
subsidiary of a foreign bank, or any subsidiary thereof, is located in 
the United States; however, a foreign bank of which that branch, agency, 
or subsidiary is a part is not considered to be located in the United 
States solely by virtue of operation of the U.S. branch, agency, or 
subsidiary.
    (c) Permitted covered fund interests and activities by a regulated 
insurance company. The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.10(a) of this 
subpart does not apply to the acquisition or retention by an insurance 
company, or an affiliate thereof, of any ownership interest in, or the 
sponsorship of, a covered fund only if:
    (1) The insurance company or its affiliate acquires and retains the 
ownership interest solely for the general account of the insurance 
company or for one or more separate accounts established by the 
insurance company;
    (2) The acquisition and retention of the ownership interest is 
conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company 
investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or 
jurisdiction in which such insurance company is domiciled; and
    (3) The appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation 
with the Financial Stability Oversight Council and the relevant 
insurance commissioners of the States and foreign jurisdictions, as 
appropriate, have not jointly determined, after notice and comment, that 
a particular law, regulation, or written guidance described in paragraph 
(c)(2) of this section is insufficient to protect the safety and 
soundness of the banking entity, or the financial stability of the 
United States.



Sec. 351.14  Limitations on relationships with a covered fund.

    (a) Relationships with a covered fund. (1) Except as provided for in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, no banking entity that serves, 
directly or indirectly, as the investment manager, investment adviser, 
commodity trading advisor, or sponsor to a covered fund, that organizes 
and offers a covered fund pursuant to Sec. 351.11 of this subpart, or 
that continues to hold an ownership interest in accordance with 
Sec. 351.11(b) of this subpart, and no affiliate of such entity, may 
enter into a transaction with the covered fund, or with any other 
covered fund that is controlled by such covered fund, that would be a 
covered transaction as defined in section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act 
(12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7)), as if such banking entity and the affiliate 
thereof were a member bank and the covered fund were an affiliate 
thereof.
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, a banking 
entity may:
    (i) Acquire and retain any ownership interest in a covered fund in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 351.11, Sec. 351.12, or 
Sec. 351.13 of this subpart; and
    (ii) Enter into any prime brokerage transaction with any covered 
fund in which a covered fund managed, sponsored, or advised by such 
banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) has taken an ownership 
interest, if:
    (A) The banking entity is in compliance with each of the limitations 
set forth in Sec. 351.11 of this subpart with respect to a covered fund 
organized and offered by such banking entity (or an affiliate thereof);
    (B) The chief executive officer (or equivalent officer) of the 
banking entity certifies in writing annually to the FDIC (with a duty to 
update the certification if the information in the certification 
materially changes) that the

[[Page 873]]

banking entity does not, directly or indirectly, guarantee, assume, or 
otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the covered fund or 
of any covered fund in which such covered fund invests; and
    (C) The Board has not determined that such transaction is 
inconsistent with the safe and sound operation and condition of the 
banking entity.
    (b) Restrictions on transactions with covered funds. A banking 
entity that serves, directly or indirectly, as the investment manager, 
investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or sponsor to a covered 
fund, or that organizes and offers a covered fund pursuant to 
Sec. 351.11 of this subpart, or that continues to hold an ownership 
interest in accordance with Sec. 351.11(b) of this subpart, shall be 
subject to section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c-1), as 
if such banking entity were a member bank and such covered fund were an 
affiliate thereof.
    (c) Restrictions on prime brokerage transactions. A prime brokerage 
transaction permitted under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section shall 
be subject to section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c-1) 
as if the counterparty were an affiliate of the banking entity.



Sec. 351.15  Other limitations on permitted covered fund activities.

    (a) No transaction, class of transactions, or activity may be deemed 
permissible under Secs. 351.11 through 351.13 of this subpart if the 
transaction, class of transactions, or activity would:
    (1) Involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the 
banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties;
    (2) Result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the 
banking entity to a high-risk asset or a high-risk trading strategy; or
    (3) Pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity 
or to the financial stability of the United States.
    (b) Definition of material conflict of interest. (1) For purposes of 
this section, a material conflict of interest between a banking entity 
and its clients, customers, or counterparties exists if the banking 
entity engages in any transaction, class of transactions, or activity 
that would involve or result in the banking entity's interests being 
materially adverse to the interests of its client, customer, or 
counterparty with respect to such transaction, class of transactions, or 
activity, and the banking entity has not taken at least one of the 
actions in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (2) Prior to effecting the specific transaction or class or type of 
transactions, or engaging in the specific activity, the banking entity:
    (i) Timely and effective disclosure. (A) Has made clear, timely, and 
effective disclosure of the conflict of interest, together with other 
necessary information, in reasonable detail and in a manner sufficient 
to permit a reasonable client, customer, or counterparty to meaningfully 
understand the conflict of interest; and
    (B) Such disclosure is made in a manner that provides the client, 
customer, or counterparty the opportunity to negate, or substantially 
mitigate, any materially adverse effect on the client, customer, or 
counterparty created by the conflict of interest; or
    (ii) Information barriers. Has established, maintained, and enforced 
information barriers that are memorialized in written policies and 
procedures, such as physical separation of personnel, or functions, or 
limitations on types of activity, that are reasonably designed, taking 
into consideration the nature of the banking entity's business, to 
prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a 
materially adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty. A 
banking entity may not rely on such information barriers if, in the case 
of any specific transaction, class or type of transactions or activity, 
the banking entity knows or should reasonably know that, notwithstanding 
the banking entity's establishment of information barriers, the conflict 
of interest may involve or result in a materially adverse effect on a 
client, customer, or counterparty.
    (c) Definition of high-risk asset and high-risk trading strategy. 
For purposes of this section:
    (1) High-risk asset means an asset or group of related assets that 
would, if held by a banking entity, significantly

[[Page 874]]

increase the likelihood that the banking entity would incur a 
substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial 
stability of the United States.
    (2) High-risk trading strategy means a trading strategy that would, 
if engaged in by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood 
that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial loss or 
would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United States.



Sec. 351.16  Ownership of Interests in and Sponsorship of Issuers
of Certain Collateralized Debt Obligations Backed by Trust-Preferred
Securities.

    (a) The prohibition contained in Sec. 351.10(a)(1) does not apply to 
the ownership by a banking entity of an interest in, or sponsorship of, 
any issuer if:
    (1) The issuer was established, and the interest was issued, before 
May 19, 2010;
    (2) The banking entity reasonably believes that the offering 
proceeds received by the issuer were invested primarily in Qualifying 
TruPS Collateral; and
    (3) The banking entity acquired such interest on or before December 
10, 2013 (or acquired such interest in connection with a merger with or 
acquisition of a banking entity that acquired the interest on or before 
December 10, 2013).
    (b) For purposes of this Sec. 351.16, Qualifying TruPS Collateral 
shall mean any trust preferred security or subordinated debt instrument 
issued prior to May 19, 2010 by a depository institution holding company 
that, as of the end of any reporting period within 12 months immediately 
preceding the issuance of such trust preferred security or subordinated 
debt instrument, had total consolidated assets of less than 
$15,000,000,000 or issued prior to May 19, 2010 by a mutual holding 
company.
    (c) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(3) of this section, a banking 
entity may act as a market maker with respect to the interests of an 
issuer described in paragraph (a) of this section in accordance with the 
applicable provisions of Secs. 351.4 and 351.11.
    (d) Without limiting the applicability of paragraph (a) of this 
section, the Board, the FDIC and the OCC will make public a non-
exclusive list of issuers that meet the requirements of paragraph (a). A 
banking entity may rely on the list published by the Board, the FDIC and 
the OCC.

[79 FR 5228, Jan. 31, 2014]



Secs. 351.17-351.19  [Reserved]



          Subpart D_Compliance Program Requirement; Violations



Sec. 351.20  Program for compliance; reporting

    (a) Program requirement. Each banking entity shall develop and 
provide for the continued administration of a compliance program 
reasonably designed to ensure and monitor compliance with the 
prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading and covered fund 
activities and investments set forth in section 13 of the BHC Act and 
this part. The terms, scope and detail of the compliance program shall 
be appropriate for the types, size, scope and complexity of activities 
and business structure of the banking entity.
    (b) Contents of compliance program. Except as provided in paragraph 
(f) of this section, the compliance program required by paragraph (a) of 
this section, at a minimum, shall include:
    (1) Written policies and procedures reasonably designed to document, 
describe, monitor and limit trading activities subject to subpart B 
(including those permitted under Secs. 351.3 to 351.6 of subpart B), 
including setting, monitoring and managing required limits set out in 
Sec. 351.4 and Sec. 351.5, and activities and investments with respect 
to a covered fund subject to subpart C (including those permitted under 
Secs. 351.11 through 351.14 of subpart C) conducted by the banking 
entity to ensure that all activities and investments conducted by the 
banking entity that are subject to section 13 of the BHC Act and this 
part comply with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;
    (2) A system of internal controls reasonably designed to monitor 
compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and to prevent 
the occurrence of activities or investments that are prohibited by 
section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;

[[Page 875]]

    (3) A management framework that clearly delineates responsibility 
and accountability for compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and 
this part and includes appropriate management review of trading limits, 
strategies, hedging activities, investments, incentive compensation and 
other matters identified in this part or by management as requiring 
attention;
    (4) Independent testing and audit of the effectiveness of the 
compliance program conducted periodically by qualified personnel of the 
banking entity or by a qualified outside party;
    (5) Training for trading personnel and managers, as well as other 
appropriate personnel, to effectively implement and enforce the 
compliance program; and
    (6) Records sufficient to demonstrate compliance with section 13 of 
the BHC Act and this part, which a banking entity must promptly provide 
to the FDIC upon request and retain for a period of no less than 5 years 
or such longer period as required by the FDIC.
    (c) Additional standards. In addition to the requirements in 
paragraph (b) of this section, the compliance program of a banking 
entity must satisfy the requirements and other standards contained in 
Appendix B, if:
    (1) The banking entity engages in proprietary trading permitted 
under subpart B and is required to comply with the reporting 
requirements of paragraph (d) of this section;
    (2) The banking entity has reported total consolidated assets as of 
the previous calendar year end of $50 billion or more or, in the case of 
a foreign banking entity, has total U.S. assets as of the previous 
calendar year end of $50 billion or more (including all subsidiaries, 
affiliates, branches and agencies of the foreign banking entity 
operating, located or organized in the United States); or
    (3) The FDIC notifies the banking entity in writing that it must 
satisfy the requirements and other standards contained in Appendix B to 
this part.
    (d) Reporting requirements under Appendix A to this part. (1) A 
banking entity engaged in proprietary trading activity permitted under 
subpart B shall comply with the reporting requirements described in 
Appendix A, if:
    (i) The banking entity (other than a foreign banking entity as 
provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section) has, together with its 
affiliates and subsidiaries, trading assets and liabilities (excluding 
trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by 
the United States or any agency of the United States) the average gross 
sum of which (on a worldwide consolidated basis) over the previous 
consecutive four quarters, as measured as of the last day of each of the 
four prior calendar quarters, equals or exceeds the threshold 
established in paragraph (d)(2) of this section;
    (ii) In the case of a foreign banking entity, the average gross sum 
of the trading assets and liabilities of the combined U.S. operations of 
the foreign banking entity (including all subsidiaries, affiliates, 
branches and agencies of the foreign banking entity operating, located 
or organized in the United States and excluding trading assets and 
liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the United States 
or any agency of the United States) over the previous consecutive four 
quarters, as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior 
calendar quarters, equals or exceeds the threshold established in 
paragraph (d)(2) of this section; or
    (iii) The FDIC notifies the banking entity in writing that it must 
satisfy the reporting requirements contained in Appendix A.
    (2) The threshold for reporting under paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section shall be $50 billion beginning on June 30, 2014; $25 billion 
beginning on April 30, 2016; and $10 billion beginning on December 31, 
2016.
    (3) Frequency of reporting: Unless the FDIC notifies the banking 
entity in writing that it must report on a different basis, a banking 
entity with $50 billion or more in trading assets and liabilities (as 
calculated in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section) shall 
report the information required by Appendix A for each calendar month 
within 30 days of the end of the relevant calendar month; beginning with 
information for the month of January 2015, such information shall be 
reported

[[Page 876]]

within 10 days of the end of each calendar month. Any other banking 
entity subject to Appendix A shall report the information required by 
Appendix A for each calendar quarter within 30 days of the end of that 
calendar quarter unless the FDIC notifies the banking entity in writing 
that it must report on a different basis.
    (e) Additional documentation for covered funds. Any banking entity 
that has more than $10 billion in total consolidated assets as reported 
on December 31 of the previous two calendar years shall maintain records 
that include:
    (1) Documentation of the exclusions or exemptions other than 
sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 
relied on by each fund sponsored by the banking entity (including all 
subsidiaries and affiliates) in determining that such fund is not a 
covered fund;
    (2) For each fund sponsored by the banking entity (including all 
subsidiaries and affiliates) for which the banking entity relies on one 
or more of the exclusions from the definition of covered fund provided 
by Secs. 351.10(c)(1),351.10(c)(5), 351.10(c)(8), 351.10(c)(9), or 
351.10(c)(10) of subpart C, documentation supporting the banking 
entity's determination that the fund is not a covered fund pursuant to 
one or more of those exclusions;
    (3) For each seeding vehicle described in Sec. 351.10(c)(12)(i) or 
(iii) of subpart C that will become a registered investment company or 
SEC-regulated business development company, a written plan documenting 
the banking entity's determination that the seeding vehicle will become 
a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development 
company; the period of time during which the vehicle will operate as a 
seeding vehicle; and the banking entity's plan to market the vehicle to 
third-party investors and convert it into a registered investment 
company or SEC-regulated business development company within the time 
period specified in Sec. 351.12(a)(2)(i)(B) of subpart C;
    (4) For any banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or 
indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under 
the laws of the United States or of any State, if the aggregate amount 
of ownership interests in foreign public funds that are described in 
Sec. 351.10(c)(1) of subpart C owned by such banking entity (including 
ownership interests owned by any affiliate that is controlled directly 
or indirectly by a banking entity that is located in or organized under 
the laws of the United States or of any State) exceeds $50 million at 
the end of two or more consecutive calendar quarters, beginning with the 
next succeeding calendar quarter, documentation of the value of the 
ownership interests owned by the banking entity (and such affiliates) in 
each foreign public fund and each jurisdiction in which any such foreign 
public fund is organized, calculated as of the end of each calendar 
quarter, which documentation must continue until the banking entity's 
aggregate amount of ownership interests in foreign public funds is below 
$50 million for two consecutive calendar quarters; and
    (5) For purposes of paragraph (e)(4) of this section, a U.S. branch, 
agency, or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is located in the 
United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls that 
branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in the 
United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. 
branch, agency, or subsidiary.
    (f) Simplified programs for less active banking entities--(1) 
Banking entities with no covered activities. A banking entity that does 
not engage in activities or investments pursuant to subpart B or subpart 
C (other than trading activities permitted pursuant to Sec. 351.6(a) of 
subpart B) may satisfy the requirements of this section by establishing 
the required compliance program prior to becoming engaged in such 
activities or making such investments (other than trading activities 
permitted pursuant to Sec. 351.6(a) of subpart B).
    (2) Banking entities with modest activities. A banking entity with 
total consolidated assets of $10 billion or less as reported on December 
31 of the previous two calendar years that engages in activities or 
investments pursuant to subpart B or subpart C (other than trading 
activities permitted under Sec. 351.6(a) of subpart B) may satisfy the 
requirements of this section by including in its existing compliance 
policies and procedures appropriate references

[[Page 877]]

to the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and 
adjustments as appropriate given the activities, size, scope and 
complexity of the banking entity.



Sec. 351.21  Termination of activities or investments;
penalties for violations.

    (a) Any banking entity that engages in an activity or makes an 
investment in violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, or 
acts in a manner that functions as an evasion of the requirements of 
section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, including through an abuse of 
any activity or investment permitted under subparts B or C, or otherwise 
violates the restrictions and requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act 
or this part, shall, upon discovery, promptly terminate the activity 
and, as relevant, dispose of the investment.
    (b) Whenever the FDIC finds reasonable cause to believe any banking 
entity has engaged in an activity or made an investment in violation of 
section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, or engaged in any activity or 
made any investment that functions as an evasion of the requirements of 
section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, the FDIC may take any action 
permitted by law to enforce compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act 
and this part, including directing the banking entity to restrict, 
limit, or terminate any or all activities under this part and dispose of 
any investment.

  



 Sec. Appendix A to Part 351--Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements 
                     for Covered Trading Activities

                               I. Purpose

    a. This appendix sets forth reporting and recordkeeping requirements 
that certain banking entities must satisfy in connection with the 
restrictions on proprietary trading set forth in subpart B 
(``proprietary trading restrictions''). Pursuant to Sec. 351.20(d), this 
appendix generally applies to a banking entity that, together with its 
affiliates and subsidiaries, has significant trading assets and 
liabilities. These entities are required to (i) furnish periodic reports 
to the FDIC regarding a variety of quantitative measurements of their 
covered trading activities, which vary depending on the scope and size 
of covered trading activities, and (ii) create and maintain records 
documenting the preparation and content of these reports. The 
requirements of this appendix must be incorporated into the banking 
entity's internal compliance program under Sec. 351.20 and Appendix B.
    b. The purpose of this appendix is to assist banking entities and 
the FDIC in:
    (i) Better understanding and evaluating the scope, type, and profile 
of the banking entity's covered trading activities;
    (ii) Monitoring the banking entity's covered trading activities;
    (iii) Identifying covered trading activities that warrant further 
review or examination by the banking entity to verify compliance with 
the proprietary trading restrictions;
    (iv) Evaluating whether the covered trading activities of trading 
desks engaged in market making-related activities subject to 
Sec. 351.4(b) are consistent with the requirements governing permitted 
market making-related activities;
    (v) Evaluating whether the covered trading activities of trading 
desks that are engaged in permitted trading activity subject to 
Secs. 351.4, 351.5, or 351.6(a)-(b) (i.e., underwriting and market 
making-related related activity, risk-mitigating hedging, or trading in 
certain government obligations) are consistent with the requirement that 
such activity not result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure 
to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies;
    (vi) Identifying the profile of particular covered trading 
activities of the banking entity, and the individual trading desks of 
the banking entity, to help establish the appropriate frequency and 
scope of examination by the FDIC of such activities; and
    (vii) Assessing and addressing the risks associated with the banking 
entity's covered trading activities.
    c. The quantitative measurements that must be furnished pursuant to 
this appendix are not intended to serve as a dispositive tool for the 
identification of permissible or impermissible activities.
    d. In order to allow banking entities and the Agencies to evaluate 
the effectiveness of these metrics, banking entities must collect and 
report these metrics for all trading desks beginning on the dates 
established in Sec. 351.20 of the final rule. The Agencies will review 
the data collected and revise this collection requirement as appropriate 
based on a review of the data collected prior to September 30, 2015.
    e. In addition to the quantitative measurements required in this 
appendix, a banking entity may need to develop and implement other 
quantitative measurements in order to effectively monitor its covered 
trading activities for compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and 
this part and to have an effective compliance program, as required by

[[Page 878]]

Sec. 351.20 and Appendix B to this part. The effectiveness of particular 
quantitative measurements may differ based on the profile of the banking 
entity's businesses in general and, more specifically, of the particular 
trading desk, including types of instruments traded, trading activities 
and strategies, and history and experience (e.g., whether the trading 
desk is an established, successful market maker or a new entrant to a 
competitive market). In all cases, banking entities must ensure that 
they have robust measures in place to identify and monitor the risks 
taken in their trading activities, to ensure that the activities are 
within risk tolerances established by the banking entity, and to monitor 
and examine for compliance with the proprietary trading restrictions in 
this part.
    f. On an ongoing basis, banking entities must carefully monitor, 
review, and evaluate all furnished quantitative measurements, as well as 
any others that they choose to utilize in order to maintain compliance 
with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. All measurement results 
that indicate a heightened risk of impermissible proprietary trading, 
including with respect to otherwise-permitted activities under 
Secs. 351.4 through 351.6(a) and (b), or that result in a material 
exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies, must be 
escalated within the banking entity for review, further analysis, 
explanation to the FDIC, and remediation, where appropriate. The 
quantitative measurements discussed in this appendix should be helpful 
to banking entities in identifying and managing the risks related to 
their covered trading activities.

                             II. Definitions

    The terms used in this appendix have the same meanings as set forth 
in Secs. 351.2 and 351.3. In addition, for purposes of this appendix, 
the following definitions apply:
    Calculation period means the period of time for which a particular 
quantitative measurement must be calculated.
    Comprehensive profit and loss means the net profit or loss of a 
trading desk's material sources of trading revenue over a specific 
period of time, including, for example, any increase or decrease in the 
market value of a trading desk's holdings, dividend income, and interest 
income and expense.
    Covered trading activity means trading conducted by a trading desk 
under Secs. 351.4, 351.5, 351.6(a), or 351.6(b). A banking entity may 
include trading under Secs. 351.3(d),351.6(c), 351.6(d) or 351.6(e).
    Measurement frequency means the frequency with which a particular 
quantitative metric must be calculated and recorded.
    Trading desk means the smallest discrete unit of organization of a 
banking entity that purchases or sells financial instruments for the 
trading account of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof.

      III. Reporting and Recordkeeping of Quantitative Measurements

                     a. Scope of Required Reporting

    General scope. Each banking entity made subject to this part by 
Sec. 351.20 must furnish the following quantitative measurements for 
each trading desk of the banking entity, calculated in accordance with 
this appendix:
     Risk and Position Limits and Usage;
     Risk Factor Sensitivities;
     Value-at-Risk and Stress VaR;
     Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution;
     Inventory Turnover;
     Inventory Aging; and
     Customer-Facing Trade Ratio

           b. Frequency of Required Calculation and Reporting

    A banking entity must calculate any applicable quantitative 
measurement for each trading day. A banking entity must report each 
applicable quantitative measurement to the FDIC on the reporting 
schedule established in Sec. 351.20 unless otherwise requested by the 
FDIC. All quantitative measurements for any calendar month must be 
reported within the time period required by Sec. 351.20.

                            c. Recordkeeping

    A banking entity must, for any quantitative measurement furnished to 
the FDIC pursuant to this appendix and Sec. 351.20(d), create and 
maintain records documenting the preparation and content of these 
reports, as well as such information as is necessary to permit the FDIC 
to verify the accuracy of such reports, for a period of 5 years from the 
end of the calendar year for which the measurement was taken.

                      IV. Quantitative Measurements

                     a. Risk-Management Measurements

                  1. Risk and Position Limits and Usage

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Risk and Position 
Limits are the constraints that define the amount of risk that a trading 
desk is permitted to take at a point in time, as defined by the banking 
entity for a specific trading desk. Usage represents the portion of the 
trading desk's limits that are accounted for by the current activity of 
the desk. Risk and position limits and their usage are key risk 
management tools used to control and monitor risk taking and include, 
but are not limited, to the limits set out in Sec. 351.4 and Sec. 351.5. 
A number of the metrics that are described below, including ``Risk 
Factor Sensitivities'' and ``Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk,'' 
relate to a trading desk's risk and position

[[Page 879]]

limits and are useful in evaluating and setting these limits in the 
broader context of the trading desk's overall activities, particularly 
for the market making activities under Sec. 351.4(b) and hedging 
activity under Sec. 351.5. Accordingly, the limits required under 
Sec. 351.4(b)(2)(iii) and Sec. 351.5(b)(1)(i) must meet the applicable 
requirements under Sec. 351.4(b)(2)(iii) and Sec. 351.5(b)(1)(i) and 
also must include appropriate metrics for the trading desk limits 
including, at a minimum, the ``Risk Factor Sensitivities'' and ``Value-
at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk'' metrics except to the extent any of 
the ``Risk Factor Sensitivities'' or ``Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-
at-Risk'' metrics are demonstrably ineffective for measuring and 
monitoring the risks of a trading desk based on the types of positions 
traded by, and risk exposures of, that desk.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: Risk and Position Limits must be 
reported in the format used by the banking entity for the purposes of 
risk management of each trading desk. Risk and Position Limits are often 
expressed in terms of risk measures, such as VaR and Risk Factor 
Sensitivities, but may also be expressed in terms of other observable 
criteria, such as net open positions. When criteria other than VaR or 
Risk Factor Sensitivities are used to define the Risk and Position 
Limits, both the value of the Risk and Position Limits and the value of 
the variables used to assess whether these limits have been reached must 
be reported.
    iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

                      2. Risk Factor Sensitivities

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Risk Factor 
Sensitivities are changes in a trading desk's Comprehensive Profit and 
Loss that are expected to occur in the event of a change in one or more 
underlying variables that are significant sources of the trading desk's 
profitability and risk.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: A banking entity must report the 
Risk Factor Sensitivities that are monitored and managed as part of the 
trading desk's overall risk management policy. The underlying data and 
methods used to compute a trading desk's Risk Factor Sensitivities will 
depend on the specific function of the trading desk and the internal 
risk management models employed. The number and type of Risk Factor 
Sensitivities that are monitored and managed by a trading desk, and 
furnished to the FDIC, will depend on the explicit risks assumed by the 
trading desk. In general, however, reported Risk Factor Sensitivities 
must be sufficiently granular to account for a preponderance of the 
expected price variation in the trading desk's holdings.
    A. Trading desks must take into account any relevant factors in 
calculating Risk Factor Sensitivities, including, for example, the 
following with respect to particular asset classes:
     Commodity derivative positions: risk factors with respect 
to the related commodities set out in 17 CFR 20.2, the maturity of the 
positions, volatility and/or correlation sensitivities (expressed in a 
manner that demonstrates any significant non-linearities), and the 
maturity profile of the positions;
     Credit positions: risk factors with respect to credit 
spreads that are sufficiently granular to account for specific credit 
sectors and market segments, the maturity profile of the positions, and 
risk factors with respect to interest rates of all relevant maturities;
     Credit-related derivative positions: risk factor 
sensitivities, for example credit spreads, shifts (parallel and non-
parallel) in credit spreads--volatility, and/or correlation 
sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant 
non-linearities), and the maturity profile of the positions;
     Equity derivative positions: risk factor sensitivities such 
as equity positions, volatility, and/or correlation sensitivities 
(expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-
linearities), and the maturity profile of the positions;
     Equity positions: risk factors for equity prices and risk 
factors that differentiate between important equity market sectors and 
segments, such as a small capitalization equities and international 
equities;
     Foreign exchange derivative positions: risk factors with 
respect to major currency pairs and maturities, exposure to interest 
rates at relevant maturities, volatility, and/or correlation 
sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant 
non-linearities), as well as the maturity profile of the positions; and
     Interest rate positions, including interest rate derivative 
positions: risk factors with respect to major interest rate categories 
and maturities and volatility and/or correlation sensitivities 
(expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-
linearities), and shifts (parallel and non-parallel) in the interest 
rate curve, as well as the maturity profile of the positions.
    B. The methods used by a banking entity to calculate sensitivities 
to a common factor shared by multiple trading desks, such as an equity 
price factor, must be applied consistently across its trading desks so 
that the sensitivities can be compared from one trading desk to another.
    iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

                3. Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Value-at-Risk 
(``VaR'') is the commonly used percentile measurement of the risk of 
future financial loss in the value of a given set of aggregated 
positions over a specified

[[Page 880]]

period of time, based on current market conditions. For purposes of this 
appendix, Stress Value-at-Risk (``Stress VaR'') is the percentile 
measurement of the risk of future financial loss in the value of a given 
set of aggregated positions over a specified period of time, based on 
market conditions during a period of significant financial stress.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: Banking entities must compute and 
report VaR and Stress VaR by employing generally accepted standards and 
methods of calculation. VaR should reflect a loss in a trading desk that 
is expected to be exceeded less than one percent of the time over a one-
day period. For those banking entities that are subject to regulatory 
capital requirements imposed by a Federal banking agency, VaR and Stress 
VaR must be computed and reported in a manner that is consistent with 
such regulatory capital requirements. In cases where a trading desk does 
not have a standalone VaR or Stress VaR calculation but is part of a 
larger aggregation of positions for which a VaR or Stress VaR 
calculation is performed, a VaR or Stress VaR calculation that includes 
only the trading desk's holdings must be performed consistent with the 
VaR or Stress VaR model and methodology used for the larger aggregation 
of positions.
    iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

                    b. Source-of-Revenue Measurements

              1. Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Comprehensive Profit 
and Loss Attribution is an analysis that attributes the daily 
fluctuation in the value of a trading desk's positions to various 
sources. First, the daily profit and loss of the aggregated positions is 
divided into three categories: (i) profit and loss attributable to a 
trading desk's existing positions that were also positions held by the 
trading desk as of the end of the prior day (``existing positions''); 
(ii) profit and loss attributable to new positions resulting from the 
current day's trading activity (``new positions''); and (iii) residual 
profit and loss that cannot be specifically attributed to existing 
positions or new positions. The sum of (i), (ii), and (iii) must equal 
the trading desk's comprehensive profit and loss at each point in time. 
In addition, profit and loss measurements must calculate volatility of 
comprehensive profit and loss (i.e., the standard deviation of the 
trading desk's one-day profit and loss, in dollar terms) for the 
reporting period for at least a 30-, 60- and 90-day lag period, from the 
end of the reporting period, and any other period that the banking 
entity deems necessary to meet the requirements of the rule.
    A. The comprehensive profit and loss associated with existing 
positions must reflect changes in the value of these positions on the 
applicable day. The comprehensive profit and loss from existing 
positions must be further attributed, as applicable, to changes in (i) 
the specific Risk Factors and other factors that are monitored and 
managed as part of the trading desk's overall risk management policies 
and procedures; and (ii) any other applicable elements, such as cash 
flows, carry, changes in reserves, and the correction, cancellation, or 
exercise of a trade.
    B. The comprehensive profit and loss attributed to new positions 
must reflect commissions and fee income or expense and market gains or 
losses associated with transactions executed on the applicable day. New 
positions include purchases and sales of financial instruments and other 
assets/liabilities and negotiated amendments to existing positions. The 
comprehensive profit and loss from new positions may be reported in the 
aggregate and does not need to be further attributed to specific 
sources.
    C. The portion of comprehensive profit and loss that cannot be 
specifically attributed to known sources must be allocated to a residual 
category identified as an unexplained portion of the comprehensive 
profit and loss. Significant unexplained profit and loss must be 
escalated for further investigation and analysis.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: The specific categories used by a 
trading desk in the attribution analysis and amount of detail for the 
analysis should be tailored to the type and amount of trading activities 
undertaken by the trading desk. The new position attribution must be 
computed by calculating the difference between the prices at which 
instruments were bought and/or sold and the prices at which those 
instruments are marked to market at the close of business on that day 
multiplied by the notional or principal amount of each purchase or sale. 
Any fees, commissions, or other payments received (paid) that are 
associated with transactions executed on that day must be added 
(subtracted) from such difference. These factors must be measured 
consistently over time to facilitate historical comparisons.
    iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

                c. Customer-Facing Activity Measurements

                          1. Inventory Turnover

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Inventory Turnover is 
a ratio that measures the turnover of a trading desk's inventory. The 
numerator of the ratio is the absolute value of all transactions over 
the reporting period. The denominator of the ratio is the value of the 
trading desk's inventory at the beginning of the reporting period.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: For purposes of this appendix, for 
derivatives, other

[[Page 881]]

than options and interest rate derivatives, value means gross notional 
value, for options, value means delta adjusted notional value, and for 
interest rate derivatives, value means 10-year bond equivalent value.
    iii. Calculation Period: 30 days, 60 days, and 90 days.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

                           2. Inventory Aging

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Inventory Aging 
generally describes a schedule of the trading desk's aggregate assets 
and liabilities and the amount of time that those assets and liabilities 
have been held. Inventory Aging should measure the age profile of the 
trading desk's assets and liabilities.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: In general, Inventory Aging must 
be computed using a trading desk's trading activity data and must 
identify the value of a trading desk's aggregate assets and liabilities. 
Inventory Aging must include two schedules, an asset-aging schedule and 
a liability-aging schedule. Each schedule must record the value of 
assets or liabilities held over all holding periods. For derivatives, 
other than options, and interest rate derivatives, value means gross 
notional value, for options, value means delta adjusted notional value 
and, for interest rate derivatives, value means 10-year bond equivalent 
value.
    iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

    3. Customer-Facing Trade Ratio--Trade Count Based and Value Based

    i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, the Customer-Facing 
Trade Ratio is a ratio comparing (i) the transactions involving a 
counterparty that is a customer of the trading desk to (ii) the 
transactions involving a counterparty that is not a customer of the 
trading desk. A trade count based ratio must be computed that records 
the number of transactions involving a counterparty that is a customer 
of the trading desk and the number of transactions involving a 
counterparty that is not a customer of the trading desk. A value based 
ratio must be computed that records the value of transactions involving 
a counterparty that is a customer of the trading desk and the value of 
transactions involving a counterparty that is not a customer of the 
trading desk.
    ii. General Calculation Guidance: For purposes of calculating the 
Customer-Facing Trade Ratio, a counterparty is considered to be a 
customer of the trading desk if the counterparty is a market participant 
that makes use of the banking entity's market making-related services by 
obtaining such services, responding to quotations, or entering into a 
continuing relationship with respect to such services. However, a 
trading desk or other organizational unit of another banking entity 
would not be a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk if 
the other entity has trading assets and liabilities of $50 billion or 
more as measured in accordance with Sec. 351.20(d)(1) unless the trading 
desk documents how and why a particular trading desk or other 
organizational unit of the entity should be treated as a client, 
customer, or counterparty of the trading desk. Transactions conducted 
anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits 
trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants would be 
considered transactions with customers of the trading desk. For 
derivatives, other than options, and interest rate derivatives, value 
means gross notional value, for options, value means delta adjusted 
notional value, and for interest rate derivatives, value means 10-year 
bond equivalent value.
    iii. Calculation Period: 30 days, 60 days, and 90 days.
    iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.



 Sec. Appendix B to Part 351--Enhanced Minimum Standards for Compliance 
                                Programs

                               I. Overview

    Section 351.20(c) requires certain banking entities to establish, 
maintain, and enforce an enhanced compliance program that includes the 
requirements and standards in this Appendix as well as the minimum 
written policies and procedures, internal controls, management 
framework, independent testing, training, and recordkeeping provisions 
outlined in Sec. 351.20. This Appendix sets forth additional minimum 
standards with respect to the establishment, oversight, maintenance, and 
enforcement by these banking entities of an enhanced internal compliance 
program for ensuring and monitoring compliance with the prohibitions and 
restrictions on proprietary trading and covered fund activities and 
investments set forth in section 13 of the BHC Act and this part.
    a. This compliance program must:
    1. Be reasonably designed to identify, document, monitor, and report 
the permitted trading and covered fund activities and investments of the 
banking entity; identify, monitor and promptly address the risks of 
these covered activities and investments and potential areas of 
noncompliance; and prevent activities or investments prohibited by, or 
that do not comply with, section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;
    2. Establish and enforce appropriate limits on the covered 
activities and investments of the banking entity, including limits on 
the size, scope, complexity, and risks of the individual activities or 
investments consistent with the requirements of section 13 of the BHC 
Act and this part;

[[Page 882]]

    3. Subject the effectiveness of the compliance program to periodic 
independent review and testing, and ensure that the entity's internal 
audit, corporate compliance and internal control functions involved in 
review and testing are effective and independent;
    4. Make senior management, and others as appropriate, accountable 
for the effective implementation of the compliance program, and ensure 
that the board of directors and chief executive officer (or equivalent) 
of the banking entity review the effectiveness of the compliance 
program; and
    5. Facilitate supervision and examination by the Agencies of the 
banking entity's permitted trading and covered fund activities and 
investments.

                     II. Enhanced Compliance Program

    a. Proprietary Trading Activities. A banking entity must establish, 
maintain and enforce a compliance program that includes written policies 
and procedures that are appropriate for the types, size, and complexity 
of, and risks associated with, its permitted trading activities. The 
compliance program may be tailored to the types of trading activities 
conducted by the banking entity, and must include a detailed description 
of controls established by the banking entity to reasonably ensure that 
its trading activities are conducted in accordance with the requirements 
and limitations applicable to those trading activities under section 13 
of the BHC Act and this part, and provide for appropriate revision of 
the compliance program before expansion of the trading activities of the 
banking entity. A banking entity must devote adequate resources and use 
knowledgeable personnel in conducting, supervising and managing its 
trading activities, and promote consistency, independence and rigor in 
implementing its risk controls and compliance efforts. The compliance 
program must be updated with a frequency sufficient to account for 
changes in the activities of the banking entity, results of independent 
testing of the program, identification of weaknesses in the program, and 
changes in legal, regulatory or other requirements.
    1. Trading Desks: The banking entity must have written policies and 
procedures governing each trading desk that include a description of:
    i. The process for identifying, authorizing and documenting 
financial instruments each trading desk may purchase or sell, with 
separate documentation for market making-related activities conducted in 
reliance on Sec. 351.4(b) and for hedging activity conducted in reliance 
on Sec. 351.5;
    ii. A mapping for each trading desk to the division, business line, 
or other organizational structure that is responsible for managing and 
overseeing the trading desk's activities;
    iii. The mission (i.e., the type of trading activity, such as 
market-making, trading in sovereign debt, etc.) and strategy (i.e., 
methods for conducting authorized trading activities) of each trading 
desk;
    iv. The activities that the trading desk is authorized to conduct, 
including (i) authorized instruments and products, and (ii) authorized 
hedging strategies, techniques and instruments;
    v. The types and amount of risks allocated by the banking entity to 
each trading desk to implement the mission and strategy of the trading 
desk, including an enumeration of material risks resulting from the 
activities in which the trading desk is authorized to engage (including 
but not limited to price risks, such as basis, volatility and 
correlation risks, as well as counterparty credit risk). Risk 
assessments must take into account both the risks inherent in the 
trading activity and the strength and effectiveness of controls designed 
to mitigate those risks;
    vi. How the risks allocated to each trading desk will be measured;
    vii. Why the allocated risks levels are appropriate to the 
activities authorized for the trading desk;
    viii. The limits on the holding period of, and the risk associated 
with, financial instruments under the responsibility of the trading 
desk;
    ix. The process for setting new or revised limits, as well as 
escalation procedures for granting exceptions to any limits or to any 
policies or procedures governing the desk, the analysis that will be 
required to support revising limits or granting exceptions, and the 
process for independently reviewing and documenting those exceptions and 
the underlying analysis;
    x. The process for identifying, documenting and approving new 
products, trading strategies, and hedging strategies;
    xi. The types of clients, customers, and counterparties with whom 
the trading desk may trade; and
    xii. The compensation arrangements, including incentive 
arrangements, for employees associated with the trading desk, which may 
not be designed to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading 
or excessive or imprudent risk-taking.
    2. Description of risks and risk management processes: The 
compliance program for the banking entity must include a comprehensive 
description of the risk management program for the trading activity of 
the banking entity. The compliance program must also include a 
description of the governance, approval, reporting, escalation, review 
and other processes the banking entity will use to reasonably ensure 
that trading activity is conducted in compliance with section 13 of the 
BHC Act and this part. Trading activity in similar financial instruments 
should be

[[Page 883]]

subject to similar governance, limits, testing, controls, and review, 
unless the banking entity specifically determines to establish different 
limits or processes and documents those differences. Descriptions must 
include, at a minimum, the following elements:
    i. A description of the supervisory and risk management structure 
governing all trading activity, including a description of processes for 
initial and senior-level review of new products and new strategies;
    ii. A description of the process for developing, documenting, 
testing, approving and reviewing all models used for valuing, 
identifying and monitoring the risks of trading activity and related 
positions, including the process for periodic independent testing of the 
reliability and accuracy of those models;
    iii. A description of the process for developing, documenting, 
testing, approving and reviewing the limits established for each trading 
desk;
    iv. A description of the process by which a security may be 
purchased or sold pursuant to the liquidity management plan, including 
the process for authorizing and monitoring such activity to ensure 
compliance with the banking entity's liquidity management plan and the 
restrictions on liquidity management activities in this part;
    v. A description of the management review process, including 
escalation procedures, for approving any temporary exceptions or 
permanent adjustments to limits on the activities, positions, 
strategies, or risks associated with each trading desk; and
    vi. The role of the audit, compliance, risk management and other 
relevant units for conducting independent testing of trading and hedging 
activities, techniques and strategies.
    3. Authorized risks, instruments, and products. The banking entity 
must implement and enforce limits and internal controls for each trading 
desk that are reasonably designed to ensure that trading activity is 
conducted in conformance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part 
and with the banking entity's written policies and procedures. The 
banking entity must establish and enforce risk limits appropriate for 
the activity of each trading desk. These limits should be based on 
probabilistic and non-probabilistic measures of potential loss (e.g., 
Value-at-Risk and notional exposure, respectively), and measured under 
normal and stress market conditions. At a minimum, these internal 
controls must monitor, establish and enforce limits on:
    i. The financial instruments (including, at a minimum, by type and 
exposure) that the trading desk may trade;
    ii. The types and levels of risks that may be taken by each trading 
desk; and
    iii. The types of hedging instruments used, hedging strategies 
employed, and the amount of risk effectively hedged.
    4. Hedging policies and procedures. The banking entity must 
establish, maintain, and enforce written policies and procedures 
regarding the use of risk-mitigating hedging instruments and strategies 
that, at a minimum, describe:
    i. The positions, techniques and strategies that each trading desk 
may use to hedge the risk of its positions;
    ii. The manner in which the banking entity will identify the risks 
arising in connection with and related to the individual or aggregated 
positions, contracts or other holdings of the banking entity that are to 
be hedged and determine that those risks have been properly and 
effectively hedged;
    iii. The level of the organization at which hedging activity and 
management will occur;
    iv. The manner in which hedging strategies will be monitored and the 
personnel responsible for such monitoring;
    v. The risk management processes used to control unhedged or 
residual risks; and
    vi. The process for developing, documenting, testing, approving and 
reviewing all hedging positions, techniques and strategies permitted for 
each trading desk and for the banking entity in reliance on Sec. 351.5.
    5. Analysis and quantitative measurements. The banking entity must 
perform robust analysis and quantitative measurement of its trading 
activities that is reasonably designed to ensure that the trading 
activity of each trading desk is consistent with the banking entity's 
compliance program; monitor and assist in the identification of 
potential and actual prohibited proprietary trading activity; and 
prevent the occurrence of prohibited proprietary trading. Analysis and 
models used to determine, measure and limit risk must be rigorously 
tested and be reviewed by management responsible for trading activity to 
ensure that trading activities, limits, strategies, and hedging 
activities do not understate the risk and exposure to the banking entity 
or allow prohibited proprietary trading. This review should include 
periodic and independent back-testing and revision of activities, 
limits, strategies and hedging as appropriate to contain risk and ensure 
compliance. In addition to the quantitative measurements reported by any 
banking entity subject to Appendix A to this part, each banking entity 
must develop and implement, to the extent appropriate to facilitate 
compliance with this part, additional quantitative measurements 
specifically tailored to the particular risks, practices, and strategies 
of its trading desks. The banking entity's analysis and quantitative 
measurements must incorporate the quantitative measurements reported by 
the banking entity pursuant to Appendix A (if applicable) and include, 
at a minimum, the following:

[[Page 884]]

    i. Internal controls and written policies and procedures reasonably 
designed to ensure the accuracy and integrity of quantitative 
measurements;
    ii. Ongoing, timely monitoring and review of calculated quantitative 
measurements;
    iii. The establishment of numerical thresholds and appropriate 
trading measures for each trading desk and heightened review of trading 
activity not consistent with those thresholds to ensure compliance with 
section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, including analysis of the 
measurement results or other information, appropriate escalation 
procedures, and documentation related to the review; and
    iv. Immediate review and compliance investigation of the trading 
desk's activities, escalation to senior management with oversight 
responsibilities for the applicable trading desk, timely notification to 
the FDIC, appropriate remedial action (e.g., divesting of impermissible 
positions, cessation of impermissible activity, disciplinary actions), 
and documentation of the investigation findings and remedial action 
taken when quantitative measurements or other information, considered 
together with the facts and circumstances, or findings of internal 
audit, independent testing or other review suggest a reasonable 
likelihood that the trading desk has violated any part of section 13 of 
the BHC Act or this part.
    6. Other Compliance Matters. In addition to the requirements 
specified above, the banking entity's compliance program must:
    i. Identify activities of each trading desk that will be conducted 
in reliance on exemptions contained in Secs. 351.4 through 351.6, 
including an explanation of:
    A. How and where in the organization the activity occurs; and
    B. Which exemption is being relied on and how the activity meets the 
specific requirements for reliance on the applicable exemption;
    ii. Include an explanation of the process for documenting, approving 
and reviewing actions taken pursuant to the liquidity management plan, 
where in the organization this activity occurs, the securities 
permissible for liquidity management, the process for ensuring that 
liquidity management activities are not conducted for the purpose of 
prohibited proprietary trading, and the process for ensuring that 
securities purchased as part of the liquidity management plan are highly 
liquid and conform to the requirements of this part;
    iii. Describe how the banking entity monitors for and prohibits 
potential or actual material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk 
trading strategies presented by each trading desk that relies on the 
exemptions contained in Secs. 351.3(d)(3), and 351.4 through 351.6, 
which must take into account potential or actual exposure to:
    A. Assets whose values cannot be externally priced or, where 
valuation is reliant on pricing models, whose model inputs cannot be 
externally validated;
    B. Assets whose changes in value cannot be adequately mitigated by 
effective hedging;
    C. New products with rapid growth, including those that do not have 
a market history;
    D. Assets or strategies that include significant embedded leverage;
    E. Assets or strategies that have demonstrated significant 
historical volatility;
    F. Assets or strategies for which the application of capital and 
liquidity standards would not adequately account for the risk; and
    G. Assets or strategies that result in large and significant 
concentrations to sectors, risk factors, or counterparties;
    iv. Establish responsibility for compliance with the reporting and 
recordkeeping requirements of subpart B and Sec. 351.20; and
    v. Establish policies for monitoring and prohibiting potential or 
actual material conflicts of interest between the banking entity and its 
clients, customers, or counterparties.
    7. Remediation of violations. The banking entity's compliance 
program must be reasonably designed and established to effectively 
monitor and identify for further analysis any trading activity that may 
indicate potential violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part 
and to prevent actual violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this 
part. The compliance program must describe procedures for identifying 
and remedying violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, and 
must include, at a minimum, a requirement to promptly document, address 
and remedy any violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, and 
document all proposed and actual remediation efforts. The compliance 
program must include specific written policies and procedures that are 
reasonably designed to assess the extent to which any activity indicates 
that modification to the banking entity's compliance program is 
warranted and to ensure that appropriate modifications are implemented. 
The written policies and procedures must provide for prompt notification 
to appropriate management, including senior management and the board of 
directors, of any material weakness or significant deficiencies in the 
design or implementation of the compliance program of the banking 
entity.
    b. Covered Fund Activities or Investments. A banking entity must 
establish, maintain and enforce a compliance program that includes 
written policies and procedures that are appropriate for the types, 
size, complexity and risks of the covered fund and related activities 
conducted and investments made, by the banking entity.

[[Page 885]]

    1. Identification of covered funds. The banking entity's compliance 
program must provide a process, which must include appropriate 
management review and independent testing, for identifying and 
documenting covered funds that each unit within the banking entity's 
organization sponsors or organizes and offers, and covered funds in 
which each such unit invests. In addition to the documentation 
requirements for covered funds, as specified under Sec. 351.20(e), the 
documentation must include information that identifies all pools that 
the banking entity sponsors or has an interest in and the type of 
exemption from the Commodity Exchange Act (whether or not the pool 
relies on section 4.7 of the regulations under the Commodity Exchange 
Act), and the amount of ownership interest the banking entity has in 
those pools.
    2. Identification of covered fund activities and investments. The 
banking entity's compliance program must identify, document and map each 
unit within the organization that is permitted to acquire or hold an 
interest in any covered fund or sponsor any covered fund and map each 
unit to the division, business line, or other organizational structure 
that will be responsible for managing and overseeing that unit's 
activities and investments.
    3. Explanation of compliance. The banking entity's compliance 
program must explain how:
    i. The banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or actual 
material conflicts of interest between the banking entity and its 
clients, customers, or counterparties related to its covered fund 
activities and investments;
    ii. The banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or 
actual transactions or activities that may threaten the safety and 
soundness of the banking entity related to its covered fund activities 
and investments; and
    iii. The banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or 
actual material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading 
strategies presented by its covered fund activities and investments, 
taking into account potential or actual exposure to:
    A. Assets whose values cannot be externally priced or, where 
valuation is reliant on pricing models, whose model inputs cannot be 
externally validated;
    B. Assets whose changes in values cannot be adequately mitigated by 
effective hedging;
    C. New products with rapid growth, including those that do not have 
a market history;
    D. Assets or strategies that include significant embedded leverage;
    E. Assets or strategies that have demonstrated significant 
historical volatility;
    F. Assets or strategies for which the application of capital and 
liquidity standards would not adequately account for the risk; and
    G. Assets or strategies that expose the banking entity to large and 
significant concentrations with respect to sectors, risk factors, or 
counterparties;
    4. Description and documentation of covered fund activities and 
investments. For each organizational unit engaged in covered fund 
activities and investments, the banking entity's compliance program must 
document:
    i. The covered fund activities and investments that the unit is 
authorized to conduct;
    ii. The banking entity's plan for actively seeking unaffiliated 
investors to ensure that any investment by the banking entity conforms 
to the limits contained in Sec. 351.12 or registered in compliance with 
the securities laws and thereby exempt from those limits within the time 
periods allotted inSec. 351.12; and
    iii. How it complies with the requirements of subpart C.
    5. Internal Controls. A banking entity must establish, maintain, and 
enforce internal controls that are reasonably designed to ensure that 
its covered fund activities or investments comply with the requirements 
of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and are appropriate given the 
limits on risk established by the banking entity. These written internal 
controls must be reasonably designed and established to effectively 
monitor and identify for further analysis any covered fund activity or 
investment that may indicate potential violations of section 13 of the 
BHC Act or this part. The internal controls must, at a minimum require:
    i. Monitoring and limiting the banking entity's individual and 
aggregate investments in covered funds;
    ii. Monitoring the amount and timing of seed capital investments for 
compliance with the limitations under subpart C (including but not 
limited to the redemption, sale or disposition requirements) of 
Sec. 351.12, and the effectiveness of efforts to seek unaffiliated 
investors to ensure compliance with those limits;
    iii. Calculating the individual and aggregate levels of ownership 
interests in one or more covered fund required by Sec. 351.12;
    iv. Attributing the appropriate instruments to the individual and 
aggregate ownership interest calculations above;
    v. Making disclosures to prospective and actual investors in any 
covered fund organized and offered or sponsored by the banking entity, 
as provided under Sec. 351.11(a)(8);
    vi. Monitoring for and preventing any relationship or transaction 
between the banking entity and a covered fund that is prohibited under 
Sec. 351.14, including where the banking entity has been designated as 
the sponsor, investment manager, investment adviser, or commodity 
trading advisor to a covered fund by another banking entity; and

[[Page 886]]

    vii. Appropriate management review and supervision across legal 
entities of the banking entity to ensure that services and products 
provided by all affiliated entities comply with the limitation on 
services and products contained in Sec. 351.14.
    6. Remediation of violations. The banking entity's compliance 
program must be reasonably designed and established to effectively 
monitor and identify for further analysis any covered fund activity or 
investment that may indicate potential violations of section 13 of the 
BHC Act or this part and to prevent actual violations of section 13 of 
the BHC Act and this part. The banking entity's compliance program must 
describe procedures for identifying and remedying violations of section 
13 of the BHC Act and this part, and must include, at a minimum, a 
requirement to promptly document, address and remedy any violation of 
section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, including Sec. 351.21, and 
document all proposed and actual remediation efforts. The compliance 
program must include specific written policies and procedures that are 
reasonably designed to assess the extent to which any activity or 
investment indicates that modification to the banking entity's 
compliance program is warranted and to ensure that appropriate 
modifications are implemented. The written policies and procedures must 
provide for prompt notification to appropriate management, including 
senior management and the board of directors, of any material weakness 
or significant deficiencies in the design or implementation of the 
compliance program of the banking entity.

    III. Responsibility and Accountability for the Compliance Program

    a. A banking entity must establish, maintain, and enforce a 
governance and management framework to manage its business and employees 
with a view to preventing violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and 
this part. A banking entity must have an appropriate management 
framework reasonably designed to ensure that: appropriate personnel are 
responsible and accountable for the effective implementation and 
enforcement of the compliance program; a clear reporting line with a 
chain of responsibility is delineated; and the compliance program is 
reviewed periodically by senior management. The board of directors (or 
equivalent governance body) and senior management should have the 
appropriate authority and access to personnel and information within the 
organizations as well as appropriate resources to conduct their 
oversight activities effectively.
    1. Corporate governance. The banking entity must adopt a written 
compliance program approved by the board of directors, an appropriate 
committee of the board, or equivalent governance body, and senior 
management.
    2. Management procedures. The banking entity must establish, 
maintain, and enforce a governance framework that is reasonably designed 
to achieve compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, 
which, at a minimum, provides for:
    i. The designation of appropriate senior management or committee of 
senior management with authority to carry out the management 
responsibilities of the banking entity for each trading desk and for 
each organizational unit engaged in covered fund activities;
    ii. Written procedures addressing the management of the activities 
of the banking entity that are reasonably designed to achieve compliance 
with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, including:
    A. A description of the management system, including the titles, 
qualifications, and locations of managers and the specific 
responsibilities of each person with respect to the banking entity's 
activities governed by section 13 of the BHC Act and this part; and
    B. Procedures for determining compensation arrangements for traders 
engaged in underwriting or market making-related activities under 
Sec. 351.4 or risk-mitigating hedging activities under Sec. 351.5 so 
that such compensation arrangements are designed not to reward or 
incentivize prohibited proprietary trading and appropriately balance 
risk and financial results in a manner that does not encourage employees 
to expose the banking entity to excessive or imprudent risk.
    3. Business line managers. Managers with responsibility for one or 
more trading desks of the banking entity are accountable for the 
effective implementation and enforcement of the compliance program with 
respect to the applicable trading desk(s).
    4. Board of directors, or similar corporate body, and senior 
management. The board of directors, or similar corporate body, and 
senior management are responsible for setting and communicating an 
appropriate culture of compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and 
this part and ensuring that appropriate policies regarding the 
management of trading activities and covered fund activities or 
investments are adopted to comply with section 13 of the BHC Act and 
this part. The board of directors or similar corporate body (such as a 
designated committee of the board or an equivalent governance body) must 
ensure that senior management is fully capable, qualified, and properly 
motivated to manage compliance with this part in light of the 
organization's business activities and the expectations of the board of 
directors. The board of directors or similar corporate body must also 
ensure that senior management has established appropriate incentives and 
adequate resources to support compliance with this part, including the 
implementation

[[Page 887]]

of a compliance program meeting the requirements of this appendix into 
management goals and compensation structures across the banking entity.
    5. Senior management. Senior management is responsible for 
implementing and enforcing the approved compliance program. Senior 
management must also ensure that effective corrective action is taken 
when failures in compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part 
are identified. Senior management and control personnel charged with 
overseeing compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part 
should review the compliance program for the banking entity periodically 
and report to the board, or an appropriate committee thereof, on the 
effectiveness of the compliance program and compliance matters with a 
frequency appropriate to the size, scope, and risk profile of the 
banking entity's trading activities and covered fund activities or 
investments, which shall be at least annually.
    6. CEO attestation. Based on a review by the CEO of the banking 
entity, the CEO of the banking entity must, annually, attest in writing 
to the FDIC that the banking entity has in place processes to establish, 
maintain, enforce, review, test and modify the compliance program 
established under this Appendix and Sec. 351.20 of this part in a manner 
reasonably designed to achieve compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act 
and this part. In the case of a U.S. branch or agency of a foreign 
banking entity, the attestation may be provided for the entire U.S. 
operations of the foreign banking entity by the senior management 
officer of the United States operations of the foreign banking entity 
who is located in the United States.

                         IV. Independent Testing

    a. Independent testing must occur with a frequency appropriate to 
the size, scope, and risk profile of the banking entity's trading and 
covered fund activities or investments, which shall be at least 
annually. This independent testing must include an evaluation of:
    1. The overall adequacy and effectiveness of the banking entity's 
compliance program, including an analysis of the extent to which the 
program contains all the required elements of this appendix;
    2. The effectiveness of the banking entity's internal controls, 
including an analysis and documentation of instances in which such 
internal controls have been breached, and how such breaches were 
addressed and resolved; and
    3. The effectiveness of the banking entity's management procedures.
    b. A banking entity must ensure that independent testing regarding 
the effectiveness of the banking entity's compliance program is 
conducted by a qualified independent party, such as the banking entity's 
internal audit department, compliance personnel or risk managers 
independent of the organizational unit being tested, outside auditors, 
consultants, or other qualified independent parties. A banking entity 
must promptly take appropriate action to remedy any significant 
deficiencies or material weaknesses in its compliance program and to 
terminate any violations of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part.

                               V. Training

    Banking entities must provide adequate training to personnel and 
managers of the banking entity engaged in activities or investments 
governed by section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, as well as other 
appropriate supervisory, risk, independent testing, and audit personnel, 
in order to effectively implement and enforce the compliance program. 
This training should occur with a frequency appropriate to the size and 
the risk profile of the banking entity's trading activities and covered 
fund activities or investments.

                            VI. Recordkeeping

    Banking entities must create and retain records sufficient to 
demonstrate compliance and support the operations and effectiveness of 
the compliance program. A banking entity must retain these records for a 
period that is no less than 5 years or such longer period as required by 
the FDIC in a form that allows it to promptly produce such records to 
the FDIC on request.



PART 352_NONDISCRIMINATION ON THE BASIS OF DISABILITY--
Table of Contents



Sec.
352.1  Purpose.
352.2  Application.
352.3  Definitions.
352.4  Nondiscrimination in any program or activity conducted by the 
          FDIC.
352.5  Accessibility to electronic and information technology.
352.6  Employment.
352.7  Accessibility of programs, and activities: Existing facilities.
352.8  Program accessibility: New construction and alterations.
352.9  Communications.
352.10  Compliance procedures.
352.11  Notice.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819(a); 29 U.S.C. 794d.

    Source: 69 FR 26492, May 13, 2004, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 352.1  Purpose.

    (a) One purpose of this part is to implement the spirit of section 
504 of the

[[Page 888]]

Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (the Rehabilitation Act) as amended by 
section 119 of the Rehabilitation, Comprehensive Services, and 
Developmental Disabilities Amendments of 1978 and the Workforce 
Investment Act of 1998. Section 504 prohibits discrimination on the 
basis of disability in programs and activities conducted by a federal 
executive agency. Although the FDIC does not believe that Congress 
contemplated coverage of non-appropriated, independent regulatory 
agencies such as the FDIC, the FDIC has chosen to promulgate this final 
regulation to ensure that, to the extent practicable, persons with 
disabilities are provided with equal access to FDIC programs and 
activities.
    (b) This part is also intended to implement section 508 of the 
Rehabilitation Act as amended. Section 508 requires each federal agency 
or department to ensure that the electronic and information technology 
they procure allows individuals with disabilities access to that 
technology comparable to the access of those who are not disabled, 
unless the agency would incur an undue burden.



Sec. 352.2  Application.

    (a) This part applies to all programs, activities, and electronic 
and information technology developed, procured, maintained, used or 
conducted by the FDIC. The following programs and activities involve the 
direct provision of benefits and services to, or participation by, 
members of the public:
    (1) Attending Board of Directors meetings open to the public and all 
other public meetings;
    (2) Making inquiries or filing complaints at the FDIC Office of 
Legislative Affairs and Office of Public Affairs;
    (3) Using the FDIC library in Washington, DC;
    (4) Using the FDIC Web site on the Internet;
    (5) Visiting an insured bank at which they conducted business (or an 
alternative liquidation site selected by the FDIC) and which has become 
insolvent, or been purchased by another bank under FDIC supervision, for 
the purpose of:
    (i) Collecting FDIC checks for the insured amount of their deposits 
previously held in such bank; and/or
    (ii) Discussing with FDIC representatives matters related to the 
repayment of debts which they previously owed to such bank, prior to its 
failure or purchase by another bank under FDIC supervision;
    (6) Seeking employment with the FDIC;
    (b) This regulation governs the conduct of FDIC personnel in their 
interaction with employees of insured banks and employees of other state 
or federal agencies while discharging the FDIC's statutory obligations 
as insurer and/or receiver of financial institutions. It does not apply 
to financial institutions insured by the FDIC.
    (c) Although application for employment and employment with the FDIC 
are programs and activities of the FDIC for purposes of this regulation, 
they shall be governed only by the standards set forth in Sec. 352.6 of 
this part.



Sec. 352.3  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, the term--
    (a) ``Auxiliary aids'' means services or devices that enable persons 
with impaired sensory, manual, or speaking skills to have an equal 
opportunity to participate in, and enjoy the benefits of, the FDIC 
programs or activities, and Electronic and Information Technology set 
forth in Sec. 352.2.
    (b) ``Electronic and Information Technology'' (``EIT'') has the same 
meaning as ``information technology'' except EIT also includes any 
equipment or interconnected system or subsystem of equipment that is 
used in the creation, conversion, or duplication of data or information. 
The term EIT includes, but is not limited to, telecommunication products 
(such as telephones), information kiosks and transaction machines, 
worldwide web sites, multimedia, and office equipment (such as copiers 
and fax machines).
    (c) ``Facility'' means all or any portion of buildings, structures, 
equipment, roads, walks, parking lots and other real or personal 
property. As used in this definition, ``personal property'' means only 
furniture, carpeting

[[Page 889]]

and similar features not considered to be real property.
    (d) ``Individual with a disability'' means any person who has a 
physical or mental impairment that substantially limits one or more 
major life activities, has a record of such an impairment, or is 
regarded as having such an impairment.
    (e) ``Qualified individual with a disability'' means--
    (1) With respect to any FDIC program or activity in which a person 
is required to perform services or to achieve a level of accomplishment, 
an individual with a disability who meets the essential eligibility 
requirements and can achieve the purpose of the program or activity 
without modifications in the program or activity that the FDIC can 
determine on the basis of a written record would result in a fundamental 
alteration in its nature;
    (2) With respect to any other program or activity, an individual 
with a disability who meets the essential eligibility requirements for 
participation in, or receipt of benefits from, that program or activity;
    (3) With respect to employment, an individual with a disability as 
defined in 29 CFR 1630.2(g), which is made applicable to this part by 
Sec. 352.6.
    (f) ``Sections 504 and 508'' mean sections 504 and 508 of the 
Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (Pub. L. 93-112, 87 Stat. 394 (29 U.S.C. 794 
and 794d)), as amended by the Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1974 
(Pub. L. 93-516, 88 Stat. 1617), the Rehabilitation, Comprehensive 
Services, and Developmental Disabilities Amendments of 1978 (Pub. L. 95-
602, 92 Stat. 2955), and the Workforce Investment Act of 1998 (Pub. L. 
105-220, 112 Stat. 936). As used in this regulation, sections 504 and 
508 shall be applied only to the programs, activities, and EIT conducted 
by the FDIC as set forth in Secs. 352.2 and 352.3(b) of this regulation.



Sec. 352.4  Nondiscrimination in any program or activity conducted
by the FDIC.

    In accordance with section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act, no 
qualified individual with a disability shall, solely by reason of his or 
her disability, be excluded from participation in, be denied the 
benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination in any program or 
activity conducted by the FDIC.



Sec. 352.5  Accessibility to electronic and information technology.

    (a) In accordance with section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act, the 
FDIC shall ensure, absent an undue burden, that the electronic and 
information technology the agency develops, procures, maintains or 
allows:
    (1) Individuals with disabilities who are FDIC employees or 
applicants to have access to and use of information and data that is 
comparable to the access to and use of information and data by FDIC 
employees or applicants who are not individuals with disabilities; and
    (2) Individuals with disabilities who are members of the public 
seeking information or services from the FDIC to have access to and use 
of information and data that is comparable to the access to and use of 
information and data by members of the public who are not individuals 
with disabilities.
    (b) When development or procurement of electronic and information 
technology that meets the standards published by the Architectural and 
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board, 36 CFR 1194, would pose an 
undue burden, the FDIC shall provide individuals with disabilities 
covered by paragraph (a) of this section with the information and data 
by an alternative means of access that allows the individuals to use the 
information and data.



Sec. 352.6  Employment.

    No qualified individual with a disability shall, on the basis of 
that disability, be subjected to discrimination in employment in any 
program or activity conducted by the FDIC. The definitions, 
requirements, and procedures (including those pertaining to employment 
discrimination complaints) of sections 501 of the Rehabilitation Act of 
1973, as established in 29 CFR parts 1614 and 1630, shall apply to 
employment in the FDIC.

[[Page 890]]



Sec. 352.7  Accessibility of programs and activities:
Existing facilities.

    The FDIC shall operate each of the programs or activities set forth 
in Sec. 352.2 of this part so that when viewed in its entirety, the 
program or activity is readily accessible to and usable by individuals 
with disabilities.



Sec. 352.8  Program accessibility: New construction and alterations.

    Each building or part of a building, whether newly constructed, or 
substantially altered, in which FDIC programs or activities will be 
conducted, shall be designed, constructed or altered so as to be readily 
accessible to, and usable by, individuals with disabilities.



Sec. 352.9  Communications.

    (a) The FDIC shall take appropriate steps to ensure effective 
communication with participants in FDIC programs, activities and EIT.
    (1) The FDIC shall furnish appropriate auxiliary aids where 
necessary to afford an individual with a disability an equal opportunity 
to participate in, and enjoy the benefits of, the FDIC programs or 
activities.
    (i) In determining what type of auxiliary aid is necessary, the FDIC 
shall give primary consideration to any reasonable requests of the 
individual with a disability.
    (ii) The FDIC need not provide individually prescribed devices, 
readers for personal use or study, or other devices of a personal 
nature.
    (2) Where the FDIC communicates by telephone, it shall use 
telecommunications devices for deaf persons (TDD's) or equally effective 
telecommunication systems with hearing impaired participants and 
beneficiaries.
    (b) The FDIC shall ensure that interested persons, including persons 
with impaired vision or hearing, can obtain information as to the 
existence and location of accessible services, activities, facilities 
and EIT. Interested persons may obtain such information by calling, 
writing or visiting the FDIC Office of Minority and Women Inclusion 
(OMWI), located at 3501 Fairfax Drive, Arlington, VA 22226. The FDIC 
telephone number is (877) 275-3342 or (703) 562-2473 (TTY).
    (c) The FDIC shall provide information at a primary entrance to each 
of its facilities where programs or activities are conducted, directing 
users to a location at which they can obtain information about 
accessible facilities. The international symbol for accessibility shall 
be used at each primary entrance of an accessible facility.

[69 FR 26492, May 13, 2004, as amended at 73 FR 45857, Aug. 7, 2008; 80 
FR 62445, Oct. 16, 2015]



Sec. 352.10  Compliance procedures.

    (a) Applicability. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to 
employment complaints. The remaining sections concern complaints 
alleging disability discrimination in FDIC programs or activities and 
denial of technology access.
    (b) Employment complaints. The FDIC shall process complaints 
alleging employment discrimination on the basis of disability according 
to the procedures established by the Equal Employment Opportunity 
Commission in 29 CFR parts 1614 and 1630 pursuant to section 501 of the 
Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 791).
    (c) Informal process. A complainant shall first exhaust informal 
administrative procedures before filing a formal complaint alleging 
disability discrimination in FDIC programs or activities, or a denial of 
technology access. The FDIC's Office of Minority and Women Inclusion 
shall be responsible for coordinating implementation of this section. An 
aggrieved individual initiates the process by filing an informal 
complaint with OMWI within 180 calendar days from the date of the 
alleged disability discrimination or denial of access to electronic 
information technology. An informal complaint with respect to any FDIC 
program or activity must include a written statement containing the 
individual's name and address which describes the FDIC's action in 
sufficient detail to inform the FDIC of the nature and date of the 
alleged violation of these regulations. An informal complaint for denial 
of technology access must clearly identify the individual and the manner 
in which the EIT was inaccessible. All informal complaints shall be 
signed by the complainant or one authorized to do so on

[[Page 891]]

his or her behalf. Informal complaints filed on behalf of third parties 
shall describe or identify (by name if possible) the alleged victim of 
discrimination or denial of technology access. During the informal 
resolution process, OMWI has 30 days to attempt a resolution of the 
matter. If the aggrieved individual elects to participate in mediation, 
the period for attempting informal resolution will be extended for an 
additional 60 calendar days. If the matter is not resolved informally, 
the individual will be provided written notice of the right to file a 
formal complaint. All complaints should be sent to the FDIC's Office of 
Minority and Women Inclusion, 3501 Fairfax Drive, Arlington, VA 22226.
    (d) If the FDIC receives a complaint over which it does not have 
jurisdiction, it shall promptly notify the complainant and shall make 
reasonable efforts to refer the complainant to the appropriate 
government entity.
    (e) Formal complaints. The individual must file a written formal 
complaint within 15 calendar days after receiving the notice of a right 
to file a formal complaint. Formal complaints must be filed with the 
FDIC Chairman or the OMWI Director. Within 120 days of the receipt of 
such a complaint for which it has jurisdiction, the FDIC shall notify 
the complainant of the results of the investigation in a letter 
containing--
    (1) A finding regarding the alleged violations;
    (2) A description of a remedy for each violation found; and
    (3) A notice of the right to appeal.
    (f) Appeals of the findings or remedies must be filed by the 
complainant within 30 days of receipt from the FDIC of the letter 
required by Sec. 352.10 (e). The FDIC may extend this time for good 
cause.
    (g) Timely appeals shall be accepted and processed by the FDIC 
Chairman or OMWI Director.
    (h) The FDIC Chairman or ODEO Director shall notify the complainant 
of the results of the appeal within 60 days of the receipt of the 
request. If the FDIC Chairman or OMWI Director determines that 
additional information is needed from the complainant, he or she shall 
have 60 days from the date of receipt of the additional information to 
make a determination on the appeal.
    (i) The time limits set forth in (e) and (h) above may be extended 
for an individual case when the FDIC Chairman or OMWI Director 
determines that there is good cause, based on the particular 
circumstances of that case.
    (j) The FDIC may delegate its authority for conducting complaint 
investigations to other federal agencies or independent contractors, 
except that the authority for making the final determination may not be 
delegated.

[69 FR 26492, May 13, 2004, as amended at 73 FR 45857, Aug. 7, 2008; 80 
FR 62445, Oct. 16, 2015]



Sec. 352.11  Notice.

    The FDIC shall make available to employees, applicants, 
participants, beneficiaries, and other interested persons such 
information regarding the provisions of this part and its applicability 
to the programs or activities conducted by the FDIC, and make such 
information available to them in such manner as the Chairman or designee 
finds necessary to apprise such persons of the protections against 
discrimination under section 504 or technology access provided under 
section 508 and this regulation.



PART 353_SUSPICIOUS ACTIVITY REPORTS--Table of Contents



Sec.
353.1  Purpose and scope.
353.2  Definitions.
353.3  Reports and records.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1818, 1819; 31 U.S.C. 5318.

    Source: 61 FR 6099, Feb. 16, 1996, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 353.1  Purpose and scope.

    The purpose of this part is to ensure that an insured state 
nonmember bank files a Suspicious Activity Report when it detects a 
known or suspected criminal violation of federal law or a suspicious 
transaction related to a money laundering activity or a violation of the 
Bank Secrecy Act. This part applies to all insured state nonmember banks 
as well as any insured, state-licensed branches of foreign banks.

[[Page 892]]



Sec. 353.2  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this part:
    (a) FinCEN means the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network of the 
Department of the Treasury.
    (b) Institution-affiliated party means any institution-affiliated 
party as that term is defined in sections 3(u) and 8(b)(5) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(u) and 1818(b)(5)).



Sec. 353.3  Reports and records.

    (a) Suspicious activity reports required. A bank shall file a 
suspicious activity report with the appropriate federal law enforcement 
agencies and the Department of the Treasury, in accordance with the 
form's instructions, by sending a completed suspicious activity report 
to FinCEN in the following circumstances:
    (1) Insider abuse involving any amount. Whenever the bank detects 
any known or suspected federal criminal violation, or pattern of 
criminal violations, committed or attempted against the bank or 
involving a transaction or transactions conducted through the bank, 
where the bank believes it was either an actual or potential victim of a 
criminal violation, or series of criminal violations, or that the bank 
was used to facilitate a criminal transaction, and the bank has a 
substantial basis for identifying one of the bank's directors, officers, 
employees, agents, or other institution-affiliated parties as having 
committed or aided in the commission of the criminal violation, 
regardless of the amount involved in the violation;
    (2) Transactions aggregating $5,000 or more where a suspect can be 
identified. Whenever the bank detects any known or suspected federal 
criminal violation, or pattern of criminal violations, committed or 
attempted against the bank or involving a transaction or transactions 
conducted through the bank, and involving or aggregating $5,000 or more 
in funds or other assets, where the bank believes it was either an 
actual or potential victim of a criminal violation, or series of 
criminal violations, or that the bank was used to facilitate a criminal 
transaction, and the bank has a substantial basis for identifying a 
possible suspect or group of suspects. If it is determined prior to 
filing this report that the identified suspect or group of suspects has 
used an ``alias'', then information regarding the true identity of the 
suspect or group of suspects, as well as alias identifiers, such as 
driver's license or social security numbers, addresses and telephone 
numbers, must be reported;
    (3) Transactions aggregating $25,000 or more regardless of potential 
suspects. Whenever the bank detects any known or suspected federal 
criminal violation, or pattern of criminal violations, committed or 
attempted against the bank or involving a transaction or transactions 
conducted through the bank, involving or aggregating $25,000 or more in 
funds or other assets, where the bank believes it was either an actual 
or potential victim of a criminal violation, or series of criminal 
violations, or that the bank was used to facilitate a criminal 
transaction, even though the bank has no substantial basis for 
identifying a possible suspect or group of suspects; or
    (4) Transactions aggregating $5,000 or more that involve potential 
money laundering or violations of the Bank Secrecy Act. Any transaction 
(which for purposes of this paragraph (a)(4) means a deposit, 
withdrawal, transfer between accounts, exchange of currency, loan, 
extension of credit, purchase or sale of any stock, bond, certificate of 
deposit, or other monetary instrument or investment security, or any 
other payment, transfer, or delivery by, through, or to a financial 
institution, by whatever means effected) conducted or attempted by, at 
or through the bank and involving or aggregating $5,000 or more in funds 
or other assets, if the bank knows, suspects, or has reason to suspect 
that:
    (i) The transaction involves funds derived from illegal activities 
or is intended or conducted in order to hide or disguise funds or assets 
derived from illegal activities (including, without limitation, the 
ownership, nature, source, location, or control of such funds or assets) 
as part of a plan to violate or evade any federal law or regulation or 
to avoid any transaction reporting requirement under federal law;
    (ii) The transaction is designed to evade any regulations 
promulgated under the Bank Secrecy Act; or

[[Page 893]]

    (iii) The transaction has no business or apparent lawful purpose or 
is not the sort of transaction in which the particular customer would 
normally be expected to engage, and the bank knows of no reasonable 
explanation for the transaction after examining the available facts, 
including the background and possible purpose of the transaction.
    (b) Time for reporting. (1) A bank shall file the suspicious 
activity report no later than 30 calendar days after the date of initial 
detection of facts that may constitute a basis for filing a suspicious 
activity report. If no suspect was identified on the date of detection 
of the incident requiring the filing, a bank may delay filing a 
suspicious activity report for an additional 30 calendar days to 
identify a suspect. In no case shall reporting be delayed more than 60 
calendar days after the date of initial detection of a reportable 
transaction.
    (2) In situations involving violations requiring immediate 
attention, such as when a reportable violation is ongoing, the bank 
shall immediately notify, by telephone, an appropriate law enforcement 
authority and the appropriate FDIC regional office (Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection (DSC)) in addition to filing a 
timely report.
    (c) Reports to state and local authorities. A bank is encouraged to 
file a copy of the suspicious activity report with state and local law 
enforcement agencies where appropriate.
    (d) Exemptions. (1) A bank need not file a suspicious activity 
report for a robbery or burglary committed or attempted, that is 
reported to appropriate law enforcement authorities.
    (2) A bank need not file a suspicious activity report for lost, 
missing, counterfeit, or stolen securities if it files a report pursuant 
to the reporting requirements of 17 CFR 240.17f-1.
    (e) Retention of records. A bank shall maintain a copy of any 
suspicious activity report filed and the original or business record 
equivalent of any supporting documentation for a period of five years 
from the date of filing the suspicious activity report. Supporting 
documentation shall be identified and maintained by the bank as such, 
and shall be deemed to have been filed with the suspicious activity 
report. A bank must make all supporting documentation available to 
appropriate law enforcement authorities upon request.
    (f) Notification to board of directors. The management of a bank 
shall promptly notify its board of directors, or a committee thereof, of 
any report filed pursuant to this section. The term ``board of 
directors'' includes the managing official of an insured state-licensed 
branch of a foreign bank for purposes of this part.
    (g) Confidentiality of suspicious activity reports. Suspicious 
activity reports are confidential. Any bank subpoenaed or otherwise 
requested to disclose a suspicious activity report or the information 
contained in a suspicious activity report shall decline to produce the 
suspicious activity report or to provide any information that would 
disclose that a suspicious activity report has been prepared or filed 
citing this part, applicable law (e.g., 31 U.S.C. 5318(g)), or both, and 
notify the appropriate FDIC regional office (Division of Supervision and 
Consumer Protection (DSC)).
    (h) Safe harbor. The safe harbor provisions of 31 U.S.C. 5318(g), 
which exempts any bank that makes a disclosure of any possible violation 
of law or regulation from liability under any law or regulation of the 
United States, or any constitution, law or regulation of any state or 
political subdivision, cover all reports of suspected or known criminal 
violations and suspicious activities to law enforcement and financial 
institution supervisory authorities, including supporting documentation, 
regardless of whether such reports are filed pursuant to this part or 
are filed on a voluntary basis.



PART 357_DETERMINATION OF ECONOMICALLY DEPRESSED REGIONS--
Table of Contents



    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819, 1823(k)(5).



Sec. 357.1  Economically depressed regions.

    (a) Purpose. Section 13(k)(5) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(12 U.S.C. 1823(k)(5)) provides that the

[[Page 894]]

FDIC shall consider proposals for financial assistance for eligible 
insured savings associations before grounds exist for appointment of a 
conservator or receiver for such member. One of the criteria for 
eligibility is that an institution's offices are located in an 
economically depressed region as determined by the FDIC.
    (b) Economically depressed regions. (1) For the purpose of 
determining ``economically depressed regions'', the FDIC will determine 
whether an institution qualifies as being located in an ``economically 
depressed region'' on a case-by-case basis. That determination will be 
based on four criteria:
    (i) High unemployment rates;
    (ii) Significant declines in non-farm employment;
    (iii) High delinquency rates of real estate assets at insured 
depository institutions; and
    (iv) Evidence indicating declining real estate values.
    (2) In addition, the FDIC will also consider relevant information 
from institutions regarding their geographic market area, as well as 
information on whether that market is ``economically depressed''.

[55 FR 11161, Mar. 27, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 10295, Mar. 3, 1998; 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



PART 359_GOLDEN PARACHUTE AND INDEMNIFICATION PAYMENTS--
Table of Contents



Sec.
359.0  Scope.
359.1  Definitions.
359.2  Golden parachute payments prohibited.
359.3  Prohibited indemnification payments.
359.4  Permissible golden parachute payments.
359.5  Permissible indemnification payments.
359.6  Filing instructions.
359.7  Applicability in the event of receivership.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1828(k).

    Source: 61 FR 5930, Feb. 15, 1996, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 359.0  Scope.

    (a) This part limits and/or prohibits, in certain circumstances, the 
ability of insured depository institutions, their subsidiaries and 
affiliated depository institution holding companies to enter into 
contracts to pay and to make golden parachute and indemnification 
payments to institution-affiliated parties (IAPs).
    (b) The limitations on golden parachute payments apply to troubled 
insured depository institutions which seek to enter into contracts to 
pay or to make golden parachute payments to their IAPs. The limitations 
also apply to depository institution holding companies which are 
troubled and seek to enter into contracts to pay or to make golden 
parachute payments to their IAPs as well as healthy holding companies 
which seek to enter into contracts to pay or to make golden parachute 
payments to IAPs of a troubled insured depository institution 
subsidiary. A ``golden parachute payment'' is generally considered to be 
any payment to an IAP which is contingent on the termination of that 
person's employment and is received when the insured depository 
institution making the payment is troubled or, if the payment is being 
made by an affiliated holding company, either the holding company itself 
or the insured depository institution employing the IAP, is troubled. 
The definition of golden parachute payment does not include payments 
pursuant to qualified retirement plans, nonqualified bona fide deferred 
compensation plans, nondiscriminatory severance pay plans, other types 
of common benefit plans, state statutes and death benefits. Certain 
limited exceptions to the golden parachute payment prohibition are 
provided for in cases involving the hiring of a white knight and 
unassisted changes in control. A procedure is also set forth whereby an 
institution or IAP can request permission to make what would otherwise 
be a prohibited golden parachute payment.
    (c) The limitations on indemnification payments apply to all insured 
depository institutions, their subsidiaries and affiliated depository 
institution holding companies regardless of their financial health. 
Generally, this part prohibits insured depository institutions, their 
subsidiaries and affiliated holding companies from indemnifying an IAP 
for that portion of the costs

[[Page 895]]

sustained with regard to an administrative or civil enforcement action 
commenced by any federal banking agency which results in a final order 
or settlement pursuant to which the IAP is assessed a civil money 
penalty, removed from office, prohibited from participating in the 
affairs of an insured depository institution or required to cease and 
desist from or take an affirmative action described in section 8(b) (12 
U.S.C. 1818(b)) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act). However, 
there are exceptions to this general prohibition. First, an institution 
or holding company may purchase commercial insurance to cover such 
expenses, except judgments and penalties. Second, the institution or 
holding company may advance legal and other professional expenses to an 
IAP directly (except for judgments and penalties) if its board of 
directors makes certain specific findings and the IAP agrees in writing 
to reimburse the institution if it is ultimately determined that the IAP 
violated a law, regulation or other fiduciary duty.



Sec. 359.1  Definitions.

    (a) Act means the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, as amended (12 
U.S.C. 1811, et seq.).
    (b) Appropriate federal banking agency, bank holding company, 
depository institution holding company and savings and loan holding 
company have the meanings given to such terms in section 3 of the Act.
    (c) Benefit plan means any plan, contract, agreement or other 
arrangement which is an ``employee welfare benefit plan'' as that term 
is defined in section 3(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security 
Act of 1974, as amended (29 U.S.C. 1002(1)), or other usual and 
customary plans such as dependent care, tuition reimbursement, group 
legal services or cafeteria plans; provided however, that such term 
shall not include any plan intended to be subject to paragraphs (f)(2) 
(iii) and (v) of this section.
    (d) Bona fide deferred compensation plan or arrangement means any 
plan, contract, agreement or other arrangement whereby:
    (1) An IAP voluntarily elects to defer all or a portion of the 
reasonable compensation, wages or fees paid for services rendered which 
otherwise would have been paid to such party at the time the services 
were rendered (including a plan that provides for the crediting of a 
reasonable investment return on such elective deferrals) and the insured 
depository institution or depository institution holding company either:
    (i) Recognizes compensation expense and accrues a liability for the 
benefit payments according to generally accepted accounting principles 
(GAAP); or
    (ii) Segregates or otherwise sets aside assets in a trust which may 
only be used to pay plan and other benefits, except that the assets of 
such trust may be available to satisfy claims of the institution's or 
holding company's creditors in the case of insolvency; or
    (2) An insured depository institution or depository institution 
holding company establishes a nonqualified deferred compensation or 
supplemental retirement plan, other than an elective deferral plan 
described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section:
    (i) Primarily for the purpose of providing benefits for certain IAPs 
in excess of the limitations on contributions and benefits imposed by 
sections 415, 401(a)(17), 402(g) or any other applicable provision of 
the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 U.S.C. 415, 401(a)(17), 402(g)); 
or
    (ii) Primarily for the purpose of providing supplemental retirement 
benefits or other deferred compensation for a select group of directors, 
management or highly compensated employees (excluding severance payments 
described in paragraph (f)(2)(v) of this section and permissible golden 
parachute payments described in Sec. 359.4); and
    (3) In the case of any nonqualified deferred compensation or 
supplemental retirement plans as described in paragraphs (d) (1) and (2) 
of this section, the following requirements shall apply:
    (i) The plan was in effect at least one year prior to any of the 
events described in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section;
    (ii) Any payment made pursuant to such plan is made in accordance 
with the terms of the plan as in effect no

[[Page 896]]

later than one year prior to any of the events described in paragraph 
(f)(1)(ii) of this section and in accordance with any amendments to such 
plan during such one year period that do not increase the benefits 
payable thereunder;
    (iii) The IAP has a vested right, as defined under the applicable 
plan document, at the time of termination of employment to payments 
under such plan;
    (iv) Benefits under such plan are accrued each period only for 
current or prior service rendered to the employer (except that an 
allowance may be made for service with a predecessor employer);
    (v) Any payment made pursuant to such plan is not based on any 
discretionary acceleration of vesting or accrual of benefits which 
occurs at any time later than one year prior to any of the events 
described in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section;
    (vi) The insured depository institution or depository institution 
holding company has previously recognized compensation expense and 
accrued a liability for the benefit payments according to GAAP or 
segregated or otherwise set aside assets in a trust which may only be 
used to pay plan benefits, except that the assets of such trust may be 
available to satisfy claims of the institution's or holding company's 
creditors in the case of insolvency; and
    (vii) Payments pursuant to such plans shall not be in excess of the 
accrued liability computed in accordance with GAAP.
    (e) Corporation means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, in 
its corporate capacity.
    (f) Golden parachute payment. (1) The term golden parachute payment 
means any payment (or any agreement to make any payment) in the nature 
of compensation by any insured depository institution or an affiliated 
depository institution holding company for the benefit of any current or 
former IAP pursuant to an obligation of such institution or holding 
company that:
    (i) Is contingent on, or by its terms is payable on or after, the 
termination of such party's primary employment or affiliation with the 
institution or holding company; and
    (ii) Is received on or after, or is made in contemplation of, any of 
the following events:
    (A) The insolvency (or similar event) of the insured depository 
institution which is making the payment or bankruptcy or insolvency (or 
similar event) of the depository institution holding company which is 
making the payment; or
    (B) The appointment of any conservator or receiver for such insured 
depository institution; or
    (C) A determination by the insured depository institution's or 
depository institution holding company's appropriate federal banking 
agency, respectively, that the insured depository institution or 
depository institution holding company is in a troubled condition, as 
defined in the applicable regulations of the appropriate federal banking 
agency (Sec. 303.101(c) of this chapter); or
    (D) The insured depository institution is assigned a composite 
rating of 4 or 5 by the appropriate federal banking agency or informed 
in writing by the Corporation that it is rated a 4 or 5 under the 
Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System of the Federal Financial 
Institutions Examination Council, or the depository institution holding 
company is assigned a composite rating of 4 or 5 or unsatisfactory by 
its appropriate federal banking agency; or
    (E) The insured depository institution is subject to a proceeding to 
terminate or suspend deposit insurance for such institution; and
    (iii)(A) Is payable to an IAP whose employment by or affiliation 
with an insured depository institution is terminated at a time when the 
insured depository institution by which the IAP is employed or with 
which the IAP is affiliated satisfies any of the conditions enumerated 
in paragraphs (f)(1)(ii) (A) through (E) of this section, or in 
contemplation of any of these conditions; or
    (B) Is payable to an IAP whose employment by or affiliation with an 
insured depository institution holding company is terminated at a time 
when the insured depository institution holding company by which the IAP 
is

[[Page 897]]

employed or with which the IAP is affiliated satisfies any of the 
conditions enumerated in paragraphs (f)(1)(ii)(A), (C) or (D) of this 
section, or in contemplation of any of these conditions.
    (2) Exceptions. The term golden parachute payment shall not include:
    (i) Any payment made pursuant to a pension or retirement plan which 
is qualified (or is intended within a reasonable period of time to be 
qualified) under section 401 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 
U.S.C. 401) or pursuant to a pension or other retirement plan which is 
governed by the laws of any foreign country; or
    (ii) Any payment made pursuant to a benefit plan as that term is 
defined in paragraph (c) of this section; or
    (iii) Any payment made pursuant to a bona fide deferred compensation 
plan or arrangement as defined in paragraph (d) of this section; or
    (iv) Any payment made by reason of death or by reason of termination 
caused by the disability of an institution-affiliated party; or
    (v) Any payment made pursuant to a nondiscriminatory severance pay 
plan or arrangement which provides for payment of severance benefits to 
all eligible employees upon involuntary termination other than for 
cause, voluntary resignation, or early retirement; provided, however, 
that no employee shall receive any such payment which exceeds the base 
compensation paid to such employee during the twelve months (or such 
longer period or greater benefit as the Corporation shall consent to) 
immediately preceding termination of employment, resignation or early 
retirement, and such severance pay plan or arrangement shall not have 
been adopted or modified to increase the amount or scope of severance 
benefits at a time when the insured depository institution or depository 
institution holding company was in a condition specified in paragraph 
(f)(1)(ii) of this section or in contemplation of such a condition 
without the prior written consent of the appropriate federal banking 
agency; or
    (vi) Any severance or similar payment which is required to be made 
pursuant to a state statute or foreign law which is applicable to all 
employers within the appropriate jurisdiction (with the exception of 
employers that may be exempt due to their small number of employees or 
other similar criteria); or
    (vii) Any other payment which the Corporation determines to be 
permissible in accordance with Sec. 359.4.
    (g) Insured depository institution means any bank or savings 
association the deposits of which are insured by the Corporation 
pursuant to the Act, or any subsidiary thereof.
    (h) Institution-affiliated party (IAP) means:
    (1) Any director, officer, employee, or controlling stockholder 
(other than a depository institution holding company) of, or agent for, 
an insured depository institution or depository institution holding 
company;
    (2) Any other person who has filed or is required to file a change-
in-control notice with the appropriate federal banking agency under 
section 7(j) of the Act (12 U.S.C. 1817(j));
    (3) Any shareholder (other than a depository institution holding 
company), consultant, joint venture partner, and any other person as 
determined by the appropriate federal banking agency (by regulation or 
case-by-case) who participates in the conduct of the affairs of an 
insured depository institution or depository institution holding 
company; and
    (4) Any independent contractor (including any attorney, appraiser, 
or accountant) who knowingly or recklessly participates in: Any 
violation of any law or regulation, any breach of fiduciary duty, or any 
unsafe or unsound practice, which caused or is likely to cause more than 
a minimal financial loss to, or a significant adverse effect on, the 
insured depository institution or depository institution holding 
company.
    (i) Liability or legal expense means:
    (1) Any legal or other professional fees and expenses incurred in 
connection with any claim, proceeding, or action;
    (2) The amount of, and any cost incurred in connection with, any 
settlement of any claim, proceeding, or action; and

[[Page 898]]

    (3) The amount of, and any cost incurred in connection with, any 
judgment or penalty imposed with respect to any claim, proceeding, or 
action.
    (j) Nondiscriminatory means that the plan, contract or arrangement 
in question applies to all employees of an insured depository 
institution or depository institution holding company who meet 
reasonable and customary eligibility requirements applicable to all 
employees, such as minimum length of service requirements. A 
nondiscriminatory plan, contract or arrangement may provide different 
benefits based only on objective criteria such as salary, total 
compensation, length of service, job grade or classification, which are 
applied on a proportionate basis (with a variance in severance benefits 
relating to any criterion of plus or minus ten percent) to groups of 
employees consisting of not less than the lesser of 33 percent of 
employees or 1,000 employees.
    (k) Payment means:
    (1) Any direct or indirect transfer of any funds or any asset;
    (2) Any forgiveness of any debt or other obligation;
    (3) The conferring of any benefit, including but not limited to 
stock options and stock appreciation rights; and
    (4) Any segregation of any funds or assets, the establishment or 
funding of any trust or the purchase of or arrangement for any letter of 
credit or other instrument, for the purpose of making, or pursuant to 
any agreement to make, any payment on or after the date on which such 
funds or assets are segregated, or at the time of or after such trust is 
established or letter of credit or other instrument is made available, 
without regard to whether the obligation to make such payment is 
contingent on:
    (i) The determination, after such date, of the liability for the 
payment of such amount; or
    (ii) The liquidation, after such date, of the amount of such 
payment.
    (l) Prohibited indemnification payment. (1) The term prohibited 
indemnification payment means any payment (or any agreement or 
arrangement to make any payment) by any insured depository institution 
or an affiliated depository institution holding company for the benefit 
of any person who is or was an IAP of such insured depository 
institution or holding company, to pay or reimburse such person for any 
civil money penalty or judgment resulting from any administrative or 
civil action instituted by any federal banking agency, or any other 
liability or legal expense with regard to any administrative proceeding 
or civil action instituted by any federal banking agency which results 
in a final order or settlement pursuant to which such person:
    (i) Is assessed a civil money penalty;
    (ii) Is removed from office or prohibited from participating in the 
conduct of the affairs of the insured depository institution; or
    (iii) Is required to cease and desist from or take any affirmative 
action described in section 8(b) of the Act with respect to such 
institution.
    (2) Exceptions. (i) The term prohibited indemnification payment 
shall not include any reasonable payment by an insured depository 
institution or depository institution holding company which is used to 
purchase any commercial insurance policy or fidelity bond, provided that 
such insurance policy or bond shall not be used to pay or reimburse an 
IAP for the cost of any judgment or civil money penalty assessed against 
such person in an administrative proceeding or civil action commenced by 
any federal banking agency, but may pay any legal or professional 
expenses incurred in connection with such proceeding or action or the 
amount of any restitution to the insured depository institution, 
depository institution holding company or receiver.
    (ii) The term prohibited indemnification payment shall not include 
any reasonable payment by an insured depository institution or 
depository institution holding company that represents partial 
indemnification for legal or professional expenses specifically 
attributable to particular charges for which there has been a formal and 
final adjudication or finding in connection with a settlement that the 
IAP has not violated certain banking laws or regulations or has not 
engaged in certain unsafe or unsound banking practices or breaches of 
fiduciary duty, unless the

[[Page 899]]

administrative action or civil proceeding has resulted in a final 
prohibition order against the IAP.

[61 FR 5930, Feb. 15, 1996, as amended at 68 FR 50461, Aug. 21, 2003]



Sec. 359.2  Golden parachute payments prohibited.

    No insured depository institution or depository institution holding 
company shall make or agree to make any golden parachute payment, except 
as provided in this part.



Sec. 359.3  Prohibited indemnification payments.

    No insured depository institution or depository institution holding 
company shall make or agree to make any prohibited indemnification 
payment, except as provided in this part.



Sec. 359.4  Permissible golden parachute payments.

    (a) An insured depository institution or depository institution 
holding company may agree to make or may make a golden parachute payment 
if and to the extent that:
    (1) The appropriate federal banking agency, with the written 
concurrence of the Corporation, determines that such a payment or 
agreement is permissible; or
    (2) Such an agreement is made in order to hire a person to become an 
IAP either at a time when the insured depository institution or 
depository institution holding company satisfies or in an effort to 
prevent it from imminently satisfying any of the criteria set forth in 
Sec. 359.1(f)(1)(ii), and the institution's appropriate federal banking 
agency and the Corporation consent in writing to the amount and terms of 
the golden parachute payment. Such consent by the FDIC and the 
institution's appropriate federal banking agency shall not improve the 
IAP's position in the event of the insolvency of the institution since 
such consent can neither bind a receiver nor affect the provability of 
receivership claims. In the event that the institution is placed into 
receivership or conservatorship, the FDIC and/or the institution's 
appropriate federal banking agency shall not be obligated to pay the 
promised golden parachute and the IAP shall not be accorded preferential 
treatment on the basis of such prior approval; or
    (3) Such a payment is made pursuant to an agreement which provides 
for a reasonable severance payment, not to exceed twelve months salary, 
to an IAP in the event of a change in control of the insured depository 
institution; provided, however, that an insured depository institution 
or depository institution holding company shall obtain the consent of 
the appropriate federal banking agency prior to making such a payment 
and this paragraph (a)(3) shall not apply to any change in control of an 
insured depository institution which results from an assisted 
transaction as described in section 13 of the Act (12 U.S.C. 1823) or 
the insured depository institution being placed into conservatorship or 
receivership; and
    (4) An insured depository institution, depository institution 
holding company or IAP making a request pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1) 
through (3) of this section shall demonstrate that it does not possess 
and is not aware of any information, evidence, documents or other 
materials which would indicate that there is a reasonable basis to 
believe, at the time such payment is proposed to be made, that:
    (i) The IAP has committed any fraudulent act or omission, breach of 
trust or fiduciary duty, or insider abuse with regard to the depository 
institution or depository institution holding company that has had or is 
likely to have a material adverse effect on the institution or holding 
company;
    (ii) The IAP is substantially responsible for the insolvency of, the 
appointment of a conservator or receiver for, or the troubled condition, 
as defined by applicable regulations of the appropriate federal banking 
agency, of the insured depository institution, depository institution 
holding company or any insured depository institution subsidiary of such 
holding company;
    (iii) The IAP has materially violated any applicable federal or 
state banking law or regulation that has had or is likely to have a 
material effect on the insured depository institution or depository 
institution holding company; and
    (iv) The IAP has violated or conspired to violate section 215, 656, 
657,

[[Page 900]]

1005, 1006, 1007, 1014, 1032, or 1344 of title 18 of the United States 
Code, or section 1341 or 1343 of such title affecting a federally 
insured financial institution as defined in title 18 of the United 
States Code.
    (b) In making a determination under paragraphs (a) (1) through (3) 
of this section, the appropriate federal banking agency and the 
Corporation may consider:
    (1) Whether, and to what degree, the IAP was in a position of 
managerial or fiduciary responsibility;
    (2) The length of time the IAP was affiliated with the insured 
depository institution or depository institution holding company, and 
the degree to which the proposed payment represents a reasonable payment 
for services rendered over the period of employment; and
    (3) Any other factors or circumstances which would indicate that the 
proposed payment would be contrary to the intent of section 18(k) of the 
Act or this part.



Sec. 359.5  Permissible indemnification payments.

    (a) An insured depository institution or depository institution 
holding company may make or agree to make reasonable indemnification 
payments to an IAP with respect to an administrative proceeding or civil 
action initiated by any federal banking agency if:
    (1) The insured depository institution's or depository institution 
holding company's board of directors, in good faith, determines in 
writing after due investigation and consideration that the institution-
affiliated party acted in good faith and in a manner he/she believed to 
be in the best interests of the institution;
    (2) The insured depository institution's or depository institution 
holding company's board of directors, respectively, in good faith, 
determines in writing after due investigation and consideration that the 
payment of such expenses will not materially adversely affect the 
institution's or holding company's safety and soundness;
    (3) The indemnification payments do not constitute prohibited 
indemnification payments as that term is defined in Sec. 359.1(l); and
    (4) The IAP agrees in writing to reimburse the insured depository 
institution or depository institution holding company, to the extent not 
covered by payments from insurance or bonds purchased pursuant to 
Sec. 359.1(l)(2), for that portion of the advanced indemnification 
payments which subsequently become prohibited indemnification payments, 
as defined in Sec. 359.1(l)
    (b) An IAP requesting indemnification payments shall not participate 
in any way in the board's discussion and approval of such payments; 
provided, however, that such IAP may present his/her request to the 
board and respond to any inquiries from the board concerning his/her 
involvement in the circumstances giving rise to the administrative 
proceeding or civil action.
    (c) In the event that a majority of the members of the board of 
directors are named as respondents in an administrative proceeding or 
civil action and request indemnification, the remaining members of the 
board may authorize independent legal counsel to review the 
indemnification request and provide the remaining members of the board 
with a written opinion of counsel as to whether the conditions 
delineated in paragraph (a) of this section have been met. If 
independent legal counsel opines that said conditions have been met, the 
remaining members of the board of directors may rely on such opinion in 
authorizing the requested indemnification.
    (d) In the event that all of the members of the board of directors 
are named as respondents in an administrative proceeding or civil action 
and request indemnification, the board shall authorize independent legal 
counsel to review the indemnification request and provide the board with 
a written opinion of counsel as to whether the conditions delineated in 
paragraph (a) of this section have been met. If independent legal 
counsel opines that said conditions have been met, the board of 
directors may rely on such opinion in authorizing the requested 
indemnification.

[[Page 901]]



Sec. 359.6  Filing instructions.

    Requests to make excess nondiscriminatory severance plan payments 
pursuant to Sec. 359.1(f)(2)(v) and golden parachute payments permitted 
by Sec. 359.4 shall be submitted in writing to the appropriate regional 
director (DSC). For filing requirements, consult 12 CFR 303.244. In the 
event that the consent of the institution's primary federal regulator is 
required in addition to that of the FDIC, the requesting party shall 
submit a copy of its letter to the FDIC to the institution's primary 
federal regulator. In the case of national banks, such written requests 
shall be submitted to the OCC. In the case of state member banks and 
bank holding companies, such written requests shall be submitted to the 
Federal Reserve district bank where the institution or holding company, 
respectively, is located. In the case of savings associations and 
savings association holding companies, such written requests shall be 
submitted to the OTS regional office where the institution or holding 
company, respectively, is located. In cases where only the prior consent 
of the institution's primary federal regulator is required and that 
agency is not the FDIC, a written request satisfying the requirements of 
this section shall be submitted to the primary federal regulator as 
described in this section.

[63 FR 44751, Aug. 20, 1998]



Sec. 359.7  Applicability in the event of receivership.

    The provisions of this part, or any consent or approval granted 
under the provisions of this part by the FDIC (in its corporate 
capacity), shall not in any way bind any receiver of a failed insured 
depository institution. Any consent or approval granted under the 
provisions of this part by the FDIC or any other federal banking agency 
shall not in any way obligate such agency or receiver to pay any claim 
or obligation pursuant to any golden parachute, severance, 
indemnification or other agreement. Claims for employee welfare benefits 
or other benefits which are contingent, even if otherwise vested, when 
the FDIC is appointed as receiver for any depository institution, 
including any contingency for termination of employment, are not 
provable claims or actual, direct compensatory damage claims against 
such receiver. Nothing in this part may be construed to permit the 
payment of salary or any liability or legal expense of any IAP contrary 
to 12 U.S.C. 1828(k)(3).



PART 360_RESOLUTION AND RECEIVERSHIP RULES--Table of Contents



Sec.
360.1  Least-cost resolution.
360.2  Federal Home Loan banks as secured creditors.
360.3  Priorities.
360.4  Administrative expenses.
360.5  Definition of qualified financial contracts.
360.6  Treatment of financial assets transferred in connection with a 
          securitization or participation.
360.7  Post-insolvency interest.
360.8  Method for determining deposit and other liability account 
          balances at a failed insured depository institution.
360.9  Large-bank deposit insurance determination modernization.
360.10  Resolution plans required for insured depository institutions 
          with $50 billion or more in total assets.
360.11  Records of failed insured depository institutions.

Appendix A to Part 360--Non-Monetary Transaction File Structure
Appendix B to Part 360--Debit/Credit File Structure
Appendix C to Part 360--Deposit File Structure
Appendix D to Part 360--Sweep/Automated Credit Account File Structure
Appendix E to Part 360--Hold File Structure
Appendix F to Part 360--Customer File Structure
Appendix G to Part 360--Deposit-Customer Join File Structure
Appendix H to Part 360--Possible File Combinations for Deposit data

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(1), 1821(d)(10)(C), 1821(d)(11), 
1821(e)(1), 1821(e)(8)(D)(i), 1823(c)(4), 1823(e)(2); Sec. 401(h), Pub. 
L. 101-73, 103 Stat. 357.



Sec. 360.1  Least-cost resolution.

    (a) General rule. Except as provided in section 13(c)(4)(G) of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1823 (c)(4)(G)), the FDIC shall not take any action, 
directly or indirectly, under sections 13(c), 13(d), 13(f), 13(h) or 
13(k) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1823 (c), (d), (f), (h) or (k)) with 
respect to any insured depository institution

[[Page 902]]

that would have the effect of increasing losses to any insurance fund by 
protecting:
    (1) Depositors for more than the insured portion of their deposits 
(determined without regard to whether such institution is liquidated); 
or
    (2) Creditors other than depositors.
    (b) Purchase and assumption transactions. Subject to the requirement 
of section 13(c)(4)(A) of the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1823(c)(4)(A)), 
paragraph (a) of this section shall not be construed as prohibiting the 
FDIC from allowing any person who acquires any assets or assumes any 
liabilities of any insured depository institution, for which the FDIC 
has been appointed conservator or receiver, to acquire uninsured deposit 
liabilities of such institution as long as the applicable insurance fund 
does not incur any loss with respect to such uninsured deposit 
liabilities in an amount greater than the loss which would have been 
incurred with respect to such liabilities if the institution had been 
liquidated.

[58 FR 67664, Dec. 22, 1993, as amended at 63 FR 37761, July 14, 1998]



Sec. 360.2  Federal Home Loan banks as secured creditors.

    (a) Notwithstanding any other provisions of federal or state law or 
any other provisions of these regulations, the receiver of a borrower 
from a Federal Home Loan Bank shall recognize the priority of any 
security interest granted to a Federal Home Loan Bank by any member of 
any Federal Home Loan Bank or any affiliate of any such member, whether 
such security interest is in specifically designated assets or a blanket 
interest in all assets or categories of assets, over the claims and 
rights of any other party (including any receiver, conservator, trustee 
or similar party having rights of a lien creditor) other than claims and 
rights that
    (1) Would be entitled to priority under otherwise applicable law; 
and
    (2) Are held by actual bona fide purchasers for value or by actual 
secured parties that are secured by actual perfected security interests.
    (b) If the receiver rather than the Bank shall have possession of 
any collateral consisting of notes, securities, other instruments, 
chattel paper or cash securing advances of the Bank, the receiver shall, 
upon request by the Bank, promptly deliver possession of such collateral 
to the Bank or its designee.
    (c) In the event that a receiver is appointed for any member of a 
Federal Home Loan Bank, the following procedures shall apply:
    (1) The receiver and the Bank shall immediately seek and develop a 
mutually agreeable plan for the payment of any advances made by the Bank 
to such borrower or for the servicing, foreclosure upon and liquidation 
of the collateral securing any such advances, taking into account the 
nature and amount of such collateral, the markets in which such 
collateral is normally traded or sold and other relevant factors.
    (2) In the event that the receiver and the Bank shall not, in good 
faith, be able to develop such a mutually agreeable plan, or, in the 
interim, the Bank in good faith reasonably concludes that the value of 
such collateral is decreasing, because of interest rate or other market 
changes, at such a rate that to delay liquidation or other exercise of 
the Bank's rights as a secured party for the development of a mutually 
agreeable plan could reasonably cause the value of such collateral to 
decrease to an amount that is insufficient to satisfy the Bank's claim 
in full, the Bank may, at any time thereafter if permitted to do so by 
the terms of the advances or other security agreement with such borrower 
or otherwise by applicable law, proceed to foreclose upon, sell, lease 
or otherwise dispose of such collateral (or any portion thereof), or 
otherwise exercise its rights as a secured party, provided that the Bank 
acts in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner and otherwise 
in accordance with applicable law.
    (3) The foregoing provisions of this paragraph (c) shall not apply 
in the event that a purchase and assumption transaction is entered into 
regarding any such member.
    (d) The Bank's rights pursuant to the second sentence of section 
10(d) of the Federal Home Loan Bank Act shall not

[[Page 903]]

be affected or diminished by any provisions of state law that may be 
applicable to a security interest in property of the member.
    (e) The receiver for a borrower from a Federal Home Loan Bank shall 
allow a claim for a prepayment fee by the Bank if, and only if:
    (1) The claim is made pursuant to a written contract that provides 
for a prepayment fee, provided, however, that such prepayment fee 
allowed by the receiver shall not exceed the present value of the loss 
attributable to the difference between the contract rate of the secured 
borrowing and the reinvestment rate then available to the Bank; and
    (2) The indebtedness owed to the Bank by such borrower is secured by 
sufficient collateral in which a perfected security interest in favor of 
the Bank exists or as to which the Bank's security interest is entitled 
to priority under section 306(d) of the Competitive Equality Banking Act 
of 1987 (CEBA) (12 U.S.C. 1430(e), footnote (1), or otherwise so that 
the aggregate of the outstanding principal on the advances secured by 
such collateral, the accrued but unpaid interest thereon and the 
prepayment fee applicable to such advances can be paid in full from the 
amounts realized from such collateral. For purposes of this paragraph 
(e)(2), the adequacy of such collateral shall be determined as of the 
date such prepayment fees shall be due and payable under the terms of 
the written contract providing therefor.

[54 FR 19156, May 4, 1989. Redesignated at 54 FR 42801, Oct. 18, 1989, 
and further redesignated at 55 FR 46496, Nov. 5, 1990. Redesignated at 
58 FR 67664, Dec. 22, 1993, as amended at 63 FR 37761, July 14, 1998]



Sec. 360.3  Priorities.

    (a) Unsecured claims against an association or the receiver that are 
proved to the satisfaction of the receiver shall have priority in the 
following order:
    (1) Administrative expenses of the receiver, including the costs, 
expenses, and debts of the receiver;
    (2) Administrative expenses of the association, provided that such 
expenses were incurred within thirty (30) days prior to the receiver's 
taking possession, and that such expenses shall be limited to reasonable 
expenses incurred for services actually provided by accountants, 
attorneys, appraisers, examiners, or management companies, or reasonable 
expenses incurred by employees which were authorized and reimbursable 
under a pre-existing expense reimbursement policy, that, in the opinion 
of the receiver, are of benefit to the receivership, and shall not 
include wages or salaries of employees of the association;
    (3) Claims for wages and salaries, including vacation and sick leave 
pay and contributions to employee benefit plans, earned prior to the 
appointment of the receiver by an employee of the association whom the 
receiver determines it is in the best interests of the receivership to 
engage or retain for a reasonable period of time;
    (4) If authorized by the receiver, claims for wages and salaries, 
including vacation and sick leave pay and contributions to employee 
benefits plans, earned prior to the appointment of the receiver, up to a 
maximum of three thousand dollars ($3,000) per person, by an employee of 
the association not engaged or retained pursuant to a determination by 
the receiver pursuant to the third category above;
    (5) Claims of governmental units for unpaid taxes, other than 
Federal income taxes, except to the extent subordinated pursuant to 
applicable law; but no other claim of a governmental unit shall have a 
priority higher than that of a general creditor under paragraph (a)(6) 
of this section;
    (6) Claims for withdrawable accounts, including those of the 
Corporation as subrogee or transferee, and all other claims which have 
accrued and become unconditionally fixed on or before the date of 
default, whether liquidated or unliquidated, except as provided in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(5) of this section, provided, however, 
that if the association is chartered and was operated under the laws of 
a state that provided a priority for holders of withdrawable accounts 
over such other claims or general creditors, such priority within this 
paragraph (a)(6) shall be observed by the receiver; and provided 
further, that if deposits of a Federal association are booked or 
registered at an office of such association

[[Page 904]]

that is located in a State that provides such priority with respect to 
State-chartered associations, such deposits in a Federal association 
shall have priority over such other claims or general creditors, which 
shall be observed by the receiver;
    (7) Claims other than those that have accrued and become 
unconditionally fixed on or before the date of default, including claims 
for interest after the date of default on claims under paragraph (a)(6) 
of this section, Provided that any claim based on an agreement for 
accelerated, stipulated, or liquidated damages, which claim did not 
accrue prior to the date of default, shall be considered as not having 
accrued and become unconditionally fixed on or before the date of 
default;
    (8) Claims of the United States for unpaid Federal income taxes;
    (9) Claims that have been subordinated in whole or in part to 
general creditor claims, which shall be given the priority specified in 
the written instruments that evidence such claims; and
    (10) Claims by holders of nonwithdrawable accounts, including stock, 
which shall have priority within this paragraph (a)(10) in accordance 
with the terms of the written instruments that evidence such claims.
    (b) Interest after the date of default on claims under paragraph 
(a)(6) of this section shall be at a rate or rates adjusted monthly to 
reflect the average rate for U.S. Treasury bills with maturities of not 
more than ninety-one (91) days during the preceding three (3) months.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) All unsecured claims of any category or class or priority 
described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(10) of this section shall be 
paid in full, or provision made for such payment, before any claims of 
lesser priority are paid. If there are insufficient funds to pay all 
claims of a category or class in full, distribution to claimants in such 
category or class shall be made pro rata. Notwithstanding anything to 
the contrary herein, the receiver may, at any time, and from time to 
time, prior to the payment in full of all claims of a category or class 
with higher priority, make such distributions to claimants in priority 
classes outlined in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this section as 
the receiver believes are reasonably necessary to conduct the 
receivership,
    Provided that the receiver determines that adequate funds exist or 
will be recovered during the receivership to pay in full all claims of 
any higher priority.
    (e) If the association is in mutual form, and a surplus remains 
after making distribution in full of allowed claims as set forth in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, such surplus shall be 
distributed to the depositors in proportion to their accounts as of the 
date of default.
    (f) Under the provisions of section 11(d)(11) of the Act (12 U.S.C. 
1821(d)(11)), the provisions of this Sec. 360.3 do not apply to any 
receivership established and liquidation or other resolution occurring 
after August 10, 1993.

[53 FR 25132, July 5, 1988, as amended at 53 FR 30667, Aug. 15, 1988. 
Redesignated and amended at 54 FR 42801, Oct. 18, 1989, and further 
redesignated and amended at 55 FR 46496, Nov. 5, 1990; 58 FR 43070, Aug. 
13, 1993. Redesignated at 58 FR 67664, Dec. 22, 1993; 60 FR 35488, July 
10, 1995]



Sec. 360.4  Administrative expenses.

    The priority for administrative expenses of the receiver, as that 
term is used in section 11(d)(11) of the Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(11), 
shall include those necessary expenses incurred by the receiver in 
liquidating or otherwise resolving the affairs of a failed insured 
depository institution. Such expenses shall include pre-failure and 
post-failure obligations that the receiver determines are necessary and 
appropriate to facilitate the smooth and orderly liquidation or other 
resolution of the institution.

[60 FR 35488, July 10, 1995]



Sec. 360.5  Definition of qualified financial contracts.

    (a) Authority and purpose. Sections 11(e) (8) through (10) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1821(e) (8) through (10), 
provide special rules for the treatment of qualified financial contracts 
of an insured depository institution for which the FDIC is appointed 
conservator or receiver, including rules describing the manner in

[[Page 905]]

which qualified financial contracts may be transferred or closed out. 
Section 11(e)(8)(D)(i) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 
1821(e)(8)(D)(i), grants the Corporation authority to determine by 
regulation whether any agreement, other than those identified within 
section 11(e)(8)(D), should be recognized as qualified financial 
contracts under the statute. The purpose of this section is to identify 
additional agreements which the Corporation has determined to be 
qualified financial contracts.
    (b) Repurchase agreements. The following agreements shall be deemed 
``repurchase agreements'' under section 11(e)(8)(D)(v) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)(D)(v)): A 
repurchase agreement on qualified foreign government securities is an 
agreement or combination of agreements (including master agreements) 
which provides for the transfer of securities that are direct 
obligations of, or that are fully guaranteed by, the central governments 
(as set forth at 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, section II.C, n. 17, as 
may be amended from time to time or 12 CFR 324.2 (definition of 
sovereign exposure), as applicable) of the OECD-based group of countries 
(as set forth at 12 CFR part 325, appendix A, section II.B.2., note 12 
as generally discussed in 12 CFR 324.32) against the transfer of funds 
by the transferee of such securities with a simultaneous agreement by 
such transferee to transfer to the transferor thereof securities as 
described above, at a date certain not later than one year after such 
transfers or on demand, against the transfer of funds.
    (c) Swap agreements. The following agreements shall be deemed ``swap 
agreements'' under section 11(e)(8)(D)(vi) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)(D)(vi)): A spot foreign 
exchange agreement is any agreement providing for or effecting the 
purchase or sale of one currency in exchange for another currency (or a 
unit of account established by an intergovernmental organization such as 
the European Currency Unit) with a maturity date of two days or less 
after the agreement has been entered into, and includes short-dated 
transactions such as tomorrow/next day and same day/tomorrow 
transactions.
    (d) Nothing in this section shall be construed as limiting or 
changing a party's obligation to comply with all reasonable trading 
practices and requirements, non-insolvency law requirements and any 
other requirements imposed by other provisions of the FDI Act. This 
section in no way limits the authority of the Corporation to take 
supervisory or enforcement actions, or to otherwise manage the affairs 
of a financial institution for which the Corporation has been appointed 
conservator or receiver.

[60 FR 66865, Dec. 27, 1995, as amended at 78 FR 55595, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 360.6  Treatment of financial assets transferred in connection
with a securitization or participation.

    (a) Definitions--
    (1) Applicable compliance date means, with respect to a 
securitization, the date on which compliance with Section 15G of the 
Securities Exchange Act, 15 U.S.C. 78a et seq., added by Section 941(b) 
of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act is 
required with respect to that securitization.
    (2) Financial asset means cash or a contract or instrument that 
conveys to one entity a contractual right to receive cash or another 
financial instrument from another entity.
    (3) Investor means a person or entity that owns an obligation issued 
by an issuing entity.
    (4) Issuing entity means an entity that owns a financial asset or 
financial assets transferred by the sponsor and issues obligations 
supported by such asset or assets. Issuing entities may include, but are 
not limited to, corporations, partnerships, trusts, and limited 
liability companies and are commonly referred to as special purpose 
vehicles or special purpose entities. To the extent a securitization is 
structured as a multi-step transfer, the term issuing entity would 
include both the issuer of the obligations and any intermediate entities 
that may be a transferee. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Specified GSE 
or an entity established or guaranteed by a Specified GSE shall not 
constitute an issuing entity.

[[Page 906]]

    (5) Monetary default means a default in the payment of principal or 
interest when due following the expiration of any cure period.
    (6) Obligation means a debt or equity (or mixed) beneficial interest 
or security that is primarily serviced by the cash flows of one or more 
financial assets or financial asset pools, either fixed or revolving, 
that by their terms convert into cash within a finite time period, or 
upon the disposition of the underlying financial assets, and by any 
rights or other assets designed to assure the servicing or timely 
distributions of proceeds to the security holders issued by an issuing 
entity. The term may include beneficial interests in a grantor trust, 
common law trust or similar issuing entity to the extent that such 
interests satisfy the criteria set forth in the preceding sentence, but 
does not include LLC interests, partnership interests, common or 
preferred equity, or similar instruments evidencing ownership of the 
issuing entity.
    (7) Participation means the transfer or assignment of an undivided 
interest in all or part of a financial asset, that has all of the 
characteristics of a ``participating interest,'' from a seller, known as 
the ``lead,'' to a buyer, known as the ``participant,'' without recourse 
to the lead, pursuant to an agreement between the lead and the 
participant. ``Without recourse'' means that the participation is not 
subject to any agreement that requires the lead to repurchase the 
participant's interest or to otherwise compensate the participant upon 
the borrower's default on the underlying obligation.
    (8) Securitization means the issuance by an issuing entity of 
obligations for which the investors are relying on the cash flow or 
market value characteristics and the credit quality of transferred 
financial assets (together with any external credit support permitted by 
this section) to repay the obligations.
    (9) Servicer means any entity responsible for the management or 
collection of some or all of the financial assets on behalf of the 
issuing entity or making allocations or distributions to holders of the 
obligations, including reporting on the overall cash flow and credit 
characteristics of the financial assets supporting the securitization to 
enable the issuing entity to make payments to investors on the 
obligations. The term ``servicer'' does not include a trustee for the 
issuing entity or the holders of obligations that makes allocations or 
distributions to holders of the obligations if the trustee receives such 
allocations or distributions from a servicer and the trustee does not 
otherwise perform the functions of a servicer.
    (10) Specified GSE means each of the following:
    (i) The Federal National Mortgage Association and any affiliate 
thereof;
    (ii) Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation and any affiliate 
thereof;
    (iii) The Government National Mortgage Association; and
    (iv) Any federal or state sponsored mortgage finance agency.
    (11) Sponsor means a person or entity that organizes and initiates a 
securitization by transferring financial assets, either directly or 
indirectly, including through an affiliate, to an issuing entity, 
whether or not such person owns an interest in the issuing entity or 
owns any of the obligations issued by the issuing entity.
    (12) Transfer means:
    (i) The conveyance of a financial asset or financial assets to an 
issuing entity or
    (ii) The creation of a security interest in such asset or assets for 
the benefit of the issuing entity.
    (b) Coverage. This section shall apply to securitizations that meet 
the following criteria:
    (1) Capital Structure and Financial Assets. The documents creating 
the securitization must define the payment structure and capital 
structure of the transaction.
    (i) Requirements applicable to all securitizations:
    (A) The securitization shall not consist of re-securitizations of 
obligations or collateralized debt obligations unless the documents 
creating the securitization require that disclosures required in 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section are made available to investors for the 
underlying assets supporting the securitization at initiation and while 
obligations are outstanding; and

[[Page 907]]

    (B) The documents creating the securitization shall require that 
payment of principal and interest on the securitization obligation must 
be primarily based on the performance of financial assets that are 
transferred to the issuing entity and, except for interest rate or 
currency mismatches between the financial assets and the obligations, 
shall not be contingent on market or credit events that are independent 
of such financial assets. The securitization may not be an unfunded 
securitization or a synthetic transaction.
    (ii) Requirements applicable only to securitizations in which the 
financial assets include any residential mortgage loans:
    (A) The capital structure of the securitization shall be limited to 
no more than six credit tranches and cannot include ``sub-tranches,'' 
grantor trusts or other structures. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the 
most senior credit tranche may include time-based sequential pay or 
planned amortization and companion sub-tranches; and
    (B) The credit quality of the obligations cannot be enhanced at the 
issuing entity or pool level through external credit support or 
guarantees. However, the credit quality of the obligations may be 
enhanced by credit support or guarantees provided by Specified GSEs and 
the temporary payment of principal and/or interest may be supported by 
liquidity facilities, including facilities designed to permit the 
temporary payment of interest following appointment of the FDIC as 
conservator or receiver. Individual financial assets transferred into a 
securitization may be guaranteed, insured or otherwise benefit from 
credit support at the loan level through mortgage and similar insurance 
or guarantees, including by private companies, agencies or other 
governmental entities, or government-sponsored enterprises, and/or 
through co-signers or other guarantees.
    (2) Disclosures. The documents shall require that the sponsor, 
issuing entity, and/or servicer, as appropriate, shall make available to 
investors, information describing the financial assets, obligations, 
capital structure, compensation of relevant parties, and relevant 
historical performance data set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section.
    (i) Requirements applicable to all securitizations:
    (A) The documents shall require that, on or prior to issuance of 
obligations and at the time of delivery of any periodic distribution 
report and, in any event, at least once per calendar quarter, while 
obligations are outstanding, information about the obligations and the 
securitized financial assets shall be disclosed to all potential 
investors at the financial asset or pool level, as appropriate for the 
financial assets, and security-level to enable evaluation and analysis 
of the credit risk and performance of the obligations and financial 
assets. The documents shall require that such information and its 
disclosure, at a minimum, shall comply with the requirements of 
Securities and Exchange Commission Regulation AB, 17 CFR 229.1100 
through 1123 (to the extent then in effect) or any successor disclosure 
requirements for public issuances, even if the obligations are issued in 
a private placement or are not otherwise required to be registered. 
Information that is unknown or not available to the sponsor or the 
issuer after reasonable investigation may be omitted if the issuer 
includes a statement in the offering documents disclosing that the 
specific information is otherwise unavailable;
    (B) The documents shall require that, on or prior to issuance of 
obligations, the structure of the securitization and the credit and 
payment performance of the obligations shall be disclosed, including the 
capital or tranche structure, the priority of payments and specific 
subordination features; representations and warranties made with respect 
to the financial assets, the remedies for and the time permitted for 
cure of any breach of representations and warranties, including the 
repurchase of financial assets, if applicable; liquidity facilities and 
any credit enhancements permitted by this rule, any waterfall triggers 
or priority of payment reversal features; and policies governing 
delinquencies, servicer advances, loss mitigation, and write-offs of 
financial assets;
    (C) The documents shall require that while obligations are 
outstanding, the

[[Page 908]]

issuing entity shall provide to investors information with respect to 
the credit performance of the obligations and the financial assets, 
including periodic and cumulative financial asset performance data, 
delinquency and modification data for the financial assets, 
substitutions and removal of financial assets, servicer advances, as 
well as losses that were allocated to such tranche and remaining balance 
of financial assets supporting such tranche, if applicable, and the 
percentage of each tranche in relation to the securitization as a whole; 
and
    (D) In connection with the issuance of obligations, the documents 
shall require that the nature and amount of compensation paid to the 
originator, sponsor, rating agency or third-party advisor, any mortgage 
or other broker, and the servicer(s), and the extent to which any risk 
of loss on the underlying assets is retained by any of them for such 
securitization be disclosed. The securitization documents shall require 
the issuer to provide to investors while obligations are outstanding any 
changes to such information and the amount and nature of payments of any 
deferred compensation or similar arrangements to any of the parties.
    (ii) Requirements applicable only to securitizations in which the 
financial assets include any residential mortgage loans:
    (A) Prior to issuance of obligations, sponsors shall disclose loan 
level information about the financial assets including, but not limited 
to, loan type, loan structure (for example, fixed or adjustable, resets, 
interest rate caps, balloon payments, etc.), maturity, interest rate 
and/or Annual Percentage Rate, and location of property; and
    (B) Prior to issuance of obligations, sponsors shall affirm 
compliance in all material respects with applicable statutory and 
regulatory standards for origination of mortgage loans, including that 
the mortgages are underwritten at the fully indexed rate relying on 
documented income, and comply with supervisory guidance governing the 
underwriting of residential mortgages, including the Interagency 
Guidance on Non-Traditional Mortgage Products, October 5, 2006, and the 
Interagency Statement on Subprime Mortgage Lending, July 10, 2007, and 
such other or additional guidance applicable at the time of loan 
origination. Sponsors shall disclose a third party due diligence report 
on compliance with such standards and the representations and warranties 
made with respect to the financial assets; and
    (C) The documents shall require that prior to issuance of 
obligations and while obligations are outstanding, servicers shall 
disclose any ownership interest by the servicer or an affiliate of the 
servicer in other whole loans secured by the same real property that 
secures a loan included in the financial asset pool. The ownership of an 
obligation, as defined in this regulation, shall not constitute an 
ownership interest requiring disclosure.
    (3) Documentation and recordkeeping. The documents creating the 
securitization must specify the respective contractual rights and 
responsibilities of all parties and include the requirements described 
in paragraph (b)(3) of this section and use as appropriate any available 
standardized documentation for each different asset class.
    (i) Requirements applicable to all securitizations. The documents 
shall define the contractual rights and responsibilities of the parties, 
including but not limited to representations and warranties and ongoing 
disclosure requirements, and any measures to avoid conflicts of 
interest; and provide authority for the parties, including but not 
limited to the originator, sponsor, servicer, and investors, to fulfill 
their respective duties and exercise their rights under the contracts 
and clearly distinguish between any multiple roles performed by any 
party.
    (ii) Requirements applicable only to securitizations in which the 
financial assets include any residential mortgage loans:
    (A) Servicing and other agreements must provide servicers with 
authority, subject to contractual oversight by any master servicer or 
oversight advisor, if any, to mitigate losses on financial assets 
consistent with maximizing the net present value of the financial asset. 
Servicers shall have the authority to modify assets to address 
reasonably foreseeable default, and to take other

[[Page 909]]

action to maximize the value and minimize losses on the securitized 
financial assets. The documents shall require that the servicers apply 
industry best practices for asset management and servicing. The 
documents shall require the servicer to act for the benefit of all 
investors, and not for the benefit of any particular class of investors, 
that the servicer maintain records of its actions to permit full review 
by the trustee or other representative of the investors and that the 
servicer must commence action to mitigate losses no later than ninety 
(90) days after an asset first becomes delinquent unless all 
delinquencies have been cured, provided that this requirement shall not 
be deemed to require that the documents include any provision concerning 
loss mitigation that requires any action that may conflict with the 
requirements of Regulation X (12 CFR part 1024), as Regulation X may be 
amended or modified from time to time.
    (B) The servicing agreement shall not require a primary servicer to 
advance delinquent payments of principal and interest for more than 
three payment periods, unless financing or reimbursement facilities are 
available, which may include, but are not limited to, the obligations of 
the master servicer or issuing entity to fund or reimburse the primary 
servicer, or alternative reimbursement facilities. Such ``financing or 
reimbursement facilities'' under this paragraph shall not be dependent 
for repayment on foreclosure proceeds.
    (4) Compensation. The following requirements apply only to 
securitizations in which the financial assets include any residential 
mortgage loans. Compensation to parties involved in the securitization 
of such financial assets must be structured to provide incentives for 
sustainable credit and the long-term performance of the financial assets 
and securitization as follows:
    (i) The documents shall require that any fees or other compensation 
for services payable to credit rating agencies or similar third-party 
evaluation companies shall be payable, in part, over the five (5) year 
period after the first issuance of the obligations based on the 
performance of surveillance services and the performance of the 
financial assets, with no more than sixty (60) percent of the total 
estimated compensation due at closing; and
    (ii) The documents shall provide that compensation to servicers 
shall include incentives for servicing, including payment for loan 
restructuring or other loss mitigation activities, which maximizes the 
net present value of the financial assets. Such incentives may include 
payments for specific services, and actual expenses, to maximize the net 
present value or a structure of incentive fees to maximize the net 
present value, or any combination of the foregoing that provides such 
incentives.
    (5) Origination and retention requirements--(i) Requirements 
applicable to all securitizations. (A) Prior to the applicable 
compliance date for regulations required under Section 15G of the 
Securities Exchange Act, 15 U.S.C. 78a et seq., added by Section 941(b) 
of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, the 
documents creating the securitization shall require that the sponsor 
retain an economic interest in a material portion, defined as not less 
than five (5) percent, of the credit risk of the financial assets. This 
retained interest may be either in the form of an interest of not less 
than five (5) percent in each of the credit tranches sold or transferred 
to the investors or in a representative sample of the securitized 
financial assets equal to not less than five (5) percent of the 
principal amount of the financial assets at transfer. This retained 
interest may not be sold, pledged or hedged, except for the hedging of 
interest rate or currency risk, during the term of the securitization.
    (B) For any securitization that closes upon or following the 
applicable compliance date for regulations required under Section 15G of 
the Securities Exchange Act, 15 U.S.C. 78a et seq., added by Section 
941(b) of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, 
the documents creating the securitization shall instead require 
retention of an economic interest in the credit risk of the financial 
assets in accordance with such regulations, including the restrictions 
on sale, pledging and hedging set forth therein.

[[Page 910]]

    (C) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(5)(i)(A) of this section, for any 
securitization that closes following ________ November 24, 2015 and 
prior to the applicable compliance date for regulations required under 
Section 15G of the Securities Exchange Act, 15 U.S.C. 78a et seq., added 
by Section 941(b) of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer 
Protection Act, at the option of the sponsor, the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(5)(i)(B) of this section may be satisfied if (in lieu of 
the requirement set forth in paragraph (b)(5)(i)(A) of this section) the 
documents creating the securitization require retention of an economic 
interest in the credit risk of the financial assets in accordance with 
the requirements of the Section 15G regulations as though such 
regulations were then in effect.
    (ii) Requirements applicable only to securitizations in which the 
financial assets include any residential mortgage loans:
    (A) The documents shall require the establishment of a reserve fund 
equal to at least five (5) percent of the cash proceeds of the 
securitization payable to the sponsor to cover the repurchase of any 
financial assets required for breach of representations and warranties. 
The balance of such fund, if any, shall be released to the sponsor one 
year after the date of issuance.
    (B) The documents shall include a representation that the assets 
shall have been originated in all material respects in compliance with 
statutory, regulatory, and originator underwriting standards in effect 
at the time of origination. The documents shall include a representation 
that the mortgages included in the securitization were underwritten at 
the fully indexed rate, based upon the borrowers' ability to repay the 
mortgage according to its terms, and rely on documented income and 
comply with all existing supervisory guidance governing the underwriting 
of residential mortgages, including the Interagency Guidance on Non-
Traditional Mortgage Products, October 5, 2006, and the Interagency 
Statement on Subprime Mortgage Lending, July 10, 2007, and such other or 
additional regulations or guidance applicable to insured depository 
institutions at the time of loan origination. Residential mortgages 
originated prior to the issuance of such guidance shall meet all 
supervisory guidance governing the underwriting of residential mortgages 
then in effect at the time of loan origination.
    (c) Other requirements. (1) The transaction should be an arms 
length, bona fide securitization transaction. The documents shall 
require that the obligations issued in a securitization shall not be 
predominantly sold to an affiliate (other than a wholly-owned subsidiary 
consolidated for accounting and capital purposes with the sponsor) or 
insider of the sponsor;
    (2) The securitization agreements are in writing, approved by the 
board of directors of the bank or its loan committee (as reflected in 
the minutes of a meeting of the board of directors or committee), and 
have been, continuously, from the time of execution in the official 
record of the bank;
    (3) The securitization was entered into in the ordinary course of 
business, not in contemplation of insolvency and with no intent to 
hinder, delay or defraud the bank or its creditors;
    (4) The transfer was made for adequate consideration;
    (5) The transfer and/or security interest was properly perfected 
under the UCC or applicable state law;
    (6) The transfer and duties of the sponsor as transferor must be 
evidenced in a separate agreement from its duties, if any, as servicer, 
custodian, paying agent, credit support provider or in any capacity 
other than the transferor; and
    (7) The documents shall require that the sponsor separately identify 
in its financial asset data bases the financial assets transferred into 
any securitization and maintain an electronic or paper copy of the 
closing documents for each securitization in a readily accessible form, 
a current list of all of its outstanding securitizations and issuing 
entities, and the most recent Form 10-K, if applicable, or other 
periodic financial report for each securitization and issuing entity. 
The documents shall provide that to the extent serving as servicer, 
custodian or paying agent for the securitization, the

[[Page 911]]

sponsor shall not comingle amounts received with respect to the 
financial assets with its own assets except for the time, not to exceed 
two business days, necessary to clear any payments received. The 
documents shall require that the sponsor shall make these records 
readily available for review by the FDIC promptly upon written request.
    (d) Safe harbor--(1) Participations. With respect to transfers of 
financial assets made in connection with participations, the FDIC as 
conservator or receiver shall not, in the exercise of its statutory 
authority to disaffirm or repudiate contracts, reclaim, recover, or 
recharacterize as property of the institution or the receivership any 
such transferred financial assets, provided that such transfer satisfies 
the conditions for sale accounting treatment under generally accepted 
accounting principles, except for the ``legal isolation'' condition that 
is addressed by this section. The foregoing paragraph shall apply to a 
last-in, first-out participation, provided that the transfer of a 
portion of the financial asset satisfies the conditions for sale 
accounting treatment under generally accepted accounting principles that 
would have applied to such portion if it had met the definition of a 
``participating interest,'' except for the ``legal isolation'' condition 
that is addressed by this section.
    (2) Transition period safe harbor. With respect to:
    (i) Any participation or securitization for which transfers of 
financial assets were made on or before December 31, 2010 or
    (ii) Any obligations of revolving trusts or master trusts, for which 
one or more obligations were issued as of the date of adoption of this 
rule, or
    (iii) Any obligations issued under open commitments up to the 
maximum amount of such commitments as of the date of adoption of this 
rule if one or more obligations were issued under such commitments on or 
before December 31, 2010, the FDIC as conservator or receiver shall not, 
in the exercise of its statutory authority to disaffirm or repudiate 
contracts, reclaim, recover, or recharacterize as property of the 
institution or the receivership the transferred financial assets 
notwithstanding that the transfer of such financial assets does not 
satisfy all conditions for sale accounting treatment under generally 
accepted accounting principles as effective for reporting periods after 
November 15, 2009, provided that such transfer satisfied the conditions 
for sale accounting treatment under generally accepted accounting 
principles in effect for reporting periods before November 15, 2009, 
except for the ``legal isolation'' condition that is addressed by this 
paragraph and the transaction otherwise satisfied the provisions of 
Sec. 360.6 in effect prior to the effective date of this regulation.
    (3) For securitizations meeting sale accounting requirements. With 
respect to any securitization for which transfers of financial assets 
were made after December 31, 2010, or from a master trust or revolving 
trust established after adoption of this rule or from any open 
commitments that do not meet the requirements of paragraph (d)(2) of 
this section, and which complies with the requirements applicable to 
that securitization as set forth in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this 
section, the FDIC as conservator or receiver shall not, in the exercise 
of its statutory authority to disaffirm or repudiate contracts, reclaim, 
recover, or recharacterize as property of the institution or the 
receivership such transferred financial assets, provided that such 
transfer satisfies the conditions for sale accounting treatment under 
generally accepted accounting principles in effect for reporting periods 
after November 15, 2009, except for the ``legal isolation'' condition 
that is addressed by this paragraph (d)(3).
    (4) For securitization not meeting sale accounting requirements. 
With respect to any securitization for which transfers of financial 
assets were made after December 31, 2010, or from a master trust or 
revolving trust established after adoption of this rule or from any open 
commitments that do not meet the requirements of paragraph (d)(2) or 
(d)(3) of this section, and which complies with the requirements 
applicable to that securitization as set forth in paragraphs (b) and (c) 
of this section, but where the transfer does not satisfy the

[[Page 912]]

conditions for sale accounting treatment set forth by generally accepted 
accounting principles in effect for reporting periods after November 15, 
2009:
    (i) Monetary default. If at any time after appointment, the FDIC as 
conservator or receiver is in a monetary default under a securitization 
due to its failure to pay or apply collections from the financial assets 
received by it in accordance with the securitization documents, whether 
as servicer or otherwise, and remains in monetary default for ten (10) 
business days after actual delivery of a written notice to the FDIC 
pursuant to paragraph (f) of this section requesting the exercise of 
contractual rights because of such monetary default, the FDIC hereby 
consents pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(13)(C) and 12 U.S.C. 1825(b)(2) 
to the exercise of any contractual rights in accordance with the 
documents governing such securitization, including but not limited to 
taking possession of the financial assets and exercising self-help 
remedies as a secured creditor under the transfer agreements, provided 
no involvement of the receiver or conservator is required other than 
such consents, waivers, or execution of transfer documents as may be 
reasonably requested in the ordinary course of business in order to 
facilitate the exercise of such contractual rights. Such consent shall 
not waive or otherwise deprive the FDIC or its assignees of any seller's 
interest or other obligation or interest issued by the issuing entity 
and held by the FDIC or its assignees, but shall serve as full 
satisfaction of the obligations of the insured depository institution in 
conservatorship or receivership and the FDIC as conservator or receiver 
for all amounts due.
    (ii) Repudiation. If the FDIC as conservator or receiver provides a 
written notice of repudiation of the securitization agreement pursuant 
to which the financial assets were transferred, and the FDIC does not 
pay damages, defined in this paragraph, within ten (10) business days 
following the effective date of the notice, the FDIC hereby consents 
pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(13)(C) and 12 U.S.C. 1825(b)(2) to the 
exercise of any contractual rights in accordance with the documents 
governing such securitization, including but not limited to taking 
possession of the financial assets and exercising self-help remedies as 
a secured creditor under the transfer agreements, provided no 
involvement of the receiver or conservator is required other than such 
consents, waivers, or execution of transfer documents as may be 
reasonably requested in the ordinary course of business in order to 
facilitate the exercise of such contractual rights. For purposes of this 
paragraph, the damages due shall be in an amount equal to the par value 
of the obligations outstanding on the date of appointment of the 
conservator or receiver, less any payments of principal received by the 
investors through the date of repudiation, plus unpaid, accrued interest 
through the date of repudiation in accordance with the contract 
documents to the extent actually received through payments on the 
financial assets received through the date of repudiation. Upon payment 
of such repudiation damages, all liens or claims on the financial assets 
created pursuant to the securitization documents shall be released. Such 
consent shall not waive or otherwise deprive the FDIC or its assignees 
of any seller's interest or other obligation or interest issued by the 
issuing entity and held by the FDIC or its assignees, but shall serve as 
full satisfaction of the obligations of the insured depository 
institution in conservatorship or receivership and the FDIC as 
conservator or receiver for all amounts due.
    (iii) Effect of repudiation. If the FDIC repudiates or disaffirms a 
securitization agreement, it shall not assert that any interest payments 
made to investors in accordance with the securitization documents before 
any such repudiation or disaffirmance remain the property of the 
conservatorship or receivership.
    (e) Consent to certain actions. Prior to repudiation or, in the case 
of a monetary default referred to in paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this 
section, prior to the effectiveness of the consent referred to therein, 
the FDIC as conservator or receiver consents pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
1821(e)(13)(C) to the making of, or if serving as servicer, shall make, 
the

[[Page 913]]

payments to the investors to the extent actually received through 
payments on the financial assets (but in the case of repudiation, only 
to the extent supported by payments on the financial assets received 
through the date of the giving of notice of repudiation) in accordance 
with the securitization documents, and, subject to the FDIC's rights to 
repudiate such agreements, consents to any servicing activity required 
in furtherance of the securitization or, if acting as servicer the FDIC 
as receiver or conservator shall perform such servicing activities in 
accordance with the terms of the applicable servicing agreements, with 
respect to the financial assets included in securitizations that meet 
the requirements applicable to that securitization as set forth in 
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
    (f) Notice for consent. Any party requesting the FDIC's consent as 
conservator or receiver under 12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(13)(C) and 12 U.S.C. 
1825(b)(2) pursuant to paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section shall provide 
notice to the Deputy Director, Division of Resolutions and 
Receiverships, Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, 
NW., F-7076, Washington, DC 20429-0002, and a statement of the basis 
upon which such request is made, and copies of all documentation 
supporting such request, including without limitation a copy of the 
applicable agreements and of any applicable notices under the contract.
    (g) Contemporaneous requirement. The FDIC will not seek to avoid an 
otherwise legally enforceable agreement that is executed by an insured 
depository institution in connection with a securitization or in the 
form of a participation solely because the agreement does not meet the 
``contemporaneous'' requirement of 12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(9), 1821(n)(4)(I), 
or 1823(e).
    (h) Limitations. The consents set forth in this section do not act 
to waive or relinquish any rights granted to the FDIC in any capacity, 
pursuant to any other applicable law or any agreement or contract except 
as specifically set forth herein. Nothing contained in this section 
alters the claims priority of the securitized obligations.
    (i) No waiver. Except as specifically set forth herein, this section 
does not authorize, and shall not be construed as authorizing the waiver 
of the prohibitions in 12 U.S.C. 1825(b)(2) against levy, attachment, 
garnishment, foreclosure, or sale of property of the FDIC, nor does it 
authorize nor shall it be construed as authorizing the attachment of any 
involuntary lien upon the property of the FDIC. Nor shall this section 
be construed as waiving, limiting or otherwise affecting the rights or 
powers of the FDIC to take any action or to exercise any power not 
specifically mentioned, including but not limited to any rights, powers 
or remedies of the FDIC regarding transfers or other conveyances taken 
in contemplation of the institution's insolvency or with the intent to 
hinder, delay or defraud the institution or the creditors of such 
institution, or that is a fraudulent transfer under applicable law.
    (j) No assignment. The right to consent under 12 U.S.C. 
1821(e)(13)(C) or 12 U.S.C. 1825(b)(2), may not be assigned or 
transferred to any purchaser of property from the FDIC, other than to a 
conservator or bridge bank.
    (k) Repeal. This section may be repealed by the FDIC upon 30 days 
notice provided in the Federal Register, but any repeal shall not apply 
to any issuance made in accordance with this section before such repeal.

[75 FR 60297, Sept. 30, 2010, as amended at 80 FR 73089, Nov. 24, 2015; 
81 FR 41423, June 27, 2016]



Sec. 360.7  Post-insolvency interest.

    (a) Purpose and scope. This section establishes rules governing the 
calculation and distribution of post-insolvency interest to creditors 
with proven claims in all FDIC-administered receiverships established 
after June 13, 2002.
    (b) Definitions--(1) Equityholder. The owner of an equity interest 
in a failed depository institution, whether such ownership is 
represented by stock, membership in a mutual association, or otherwise.
    (2) Post-insolvency interest. Interest calculated from the date the 
receivership is established on proven creditor claims in receiverships 
with surplus funds.

[[Page 914]]

    (3) Post-insolvency interest rate. For any calendar quarter, the 
coupon equivalent yield of the average discount rate set on the three-
month Treasury bill at the last auction held by the United States 
Treasury Department during the preceding calendar quarter, and adjusted 
each quarter thereafter.
    (4) Principal amount. The proven claim amount and any interest 
accrued thereon as of the date the receivership is established.
    (5) Proven claim. A claim that is allowed by a receiver or upon 
which a final non-appealable judgment has been entered in favor of a 
claimant against a receivership by a court with jurisdiction to 
adjudicate the claim.
    (c) Post-insolvency interest distributions. (1) Post-insolvency 
interest shall only be distributed following satisfaction by the 
receiver of the principal amount of all creditor claims.
    (2) The receiver shall distribute post-insolvency interest at the 
post-insolvency interest rate prior to making any distribution to 
equityholders. Post-insolvency interest distributions shall be made in 
the order of priority set forth in section 11(d)(11)(A) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(11)(A).
    (3) Post-insolvency interest distributions shall be made at such 
time as the receiver determines that such distributions are appropriate 
and only to the extent of funds available in the receivership estate. 
Post-insolvency interest shall be calculated on the outstanding balance 
of a proven claim, as reduced from time to time by any interim dividend 
distributions, from the date the receivership is established until the 
principal amount of a proven claim has been fully distributed but not 
thereafter. Post-insolvency interest shall be calculated on a contingent 
claim from the date such claim becomes proven.
    (4) Post-insolvency interest shall be determined using a simple 
interest method of calculation.

[67 FR 34386, May 14, 2002]



Sec. 360.8  Method for determining deposit and other liability
account balances at a failed insured depository institution.

    (a) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to describe the process 
the FDIC will use to determine deposit and other liability account 
balances for insurance coverage and receivership purposes at a failed 
insured depository institution.
    (b) Definitions. (1) The FDIC Cutoff Point means the point in time 
the FDIC establishes after it has been appointed receiver of a failed 
insured depository institution and takes control of the failed 
institution.
    (2) The Applicable Cutoff Time for a specific type of deposit 
account transaction means the earlier of either the failed institution's 
normal cutoff time for that specific type of transaction or the FDIC 
Cutoff Point.
    (3) Close-of-Business Account Balance means the closing end-of-day 
ledger balance of a deposit or other liability account on the day of 
failure of an insured depository institution determined by using the 
Applicable Cutoff Times. This balance may be adjusted to reflect steps 
taken by the receiver to ensure that funds are not received by or 
removed from the institution after the FDIC Cutoff Point.
    (4) A sweep account is an account held pursuant to a contract 
between an insured depository institution and its customer involving the 
pre-arranged, automated transfer of funds from a deposit account to 
either another account or investment vehicle located within the 
depository institution (internal sweep account), or an investment 
vehicle located outside the depository institution (external sweep 
account).
    (c) Principles. (1) In making deposit insurance determinations and 
in determining the value and nature of claims against the receivership 
on the institution's date of failure, the FDIC, as insurer and receiver, 
will treat deposits and other liabilities of the failed institution 
according to the ownership and nature of the underlying obligations 
based on end-of-day ledger balances for each account using, except as 
expressly provided otherwise in this section, the

[[Page 915]]

depository institution's normal posting procedures.
    (2) In its role as receiver of a failed insured depository 
institution, in order to ensure the proper distribution of the failed 
institution's assets under the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(11)) as of the 
FDIC Cutoff Point, the FDIC will use its best efforts to take all steps 
necessary to stop the generation, via transactions or transfers coming 
from or going outside the institution, of new liabilities or 
extinguishing existing liabilities for the depository institution.
    (3) End-of-day ledger balances are subject to corrections for posted 
transactions that are inconsistent with the above principles.
    (d) Determining closing day balances. (1) In determining account 
balances for insurance coverage and receivership purposes at a failed 
insured depository institution, the FDIC will use Close-of-Business 
Account Balances.
    (2) A check posted to the Close-of-Business Account Balance but not 
collected by the depository institution will be included as part of the 
balance, subject to the correction of errors and omissions and 
adjustments for uncollectible items that the FDIC may make in its role 
as receiver of the failed depository institution.
    (3) In determining Close-of-Business Account Balances involving 
sweep accounts:
    (i) For internal sweep accounts, the FDIC will determine the 
ownership of the funds and the nature of the receivership claim based on 
the records established and maintained by the institution for that 
specific account or investment vehicle as of the closing day end-of-day 
ledger balance. (For example, if a sweep account entails the daily 
transfer of funds from a demand deposit account to a Eurodollar account 
at a foreign branch of the insured depository institution, if the 
institution should fail on that day, the FDIC would treat the funds 
swept to the Eurodollar account, as reflected on the institution's end-
of-day records, as an unsecured general creditor's claim against the 
receivership.);
    (ii) For external sweep accounts, the FDIC will treat swept funds 
consistent with their status in the end-of-day ledger balances of the 
depository institution and the external entity, as long as the transfer 
of funds is completed prior to the Applicable Cutoff Time. (For example, 
if funds held in connection with a money market sweep account are wired 
from a customer's deposit account at the insured depository institution 
to the mutual fund prior to the Applicable Cutoff Time, if the 
institution should fail on that day, the FDIC would recognize that sweep 
transaction as completed for claims and receivership purposes.);
    (iii) For repurchase agreement sweep accounts, where, as a result of 
the sweep transaction, the customer becomes either the legal owner of 
identified assets subject to repurchase or obtains a perfected security 
interest in those assets, the FDIC will recognize, for receivership 
purposes, the customer's ownership interest or security interest in the 
assets.
    (4) For deposit insurance and receivership purposes in connection 
with the failure of an insured depository institution, the FDIC will 
determine the rights of the depositor or other liability holder as of 
the point the Close-of-Business Account Balance is calculated.
    (e) Disclosure requirements. Beginning July 1, 2009, in all new 
sweep account contracts, in renewals of existing sweep account contracts 
and within sixty days after July 1, 2009, and no less than annually 
thereafter, institutions must prominently disclose in writing to sweep 
account customers whether their swept funds are deposits within the 
meaning of 12 U.S.C. 1813(l). If the funds are not deposits, the 
institution must further disclose the status such funds would have if 
the institution failed--for example, general creditor status or secured 
creditor status. Such disclosures must be consistent with how the 
institution reports such funds on its quarterly Consolidated Reports of 
Condition and Income or Thrift Financial Reports. The disclosure 
requirements imposed under this provision do not apply to sweep accounts 
where: The transfers are within a single account, or a sub-account; or 
the sweep account involves only deposit-to-deposit sweeps, such as zero-
balance accounts, unless the sweep results in a

[[Page 916]]

change in the customer's insurance coverage.

[74 FR 5806, Feb. 2, 2009]



Sec. 360.9  Large-bank deposit insurance determination modernization.

    (a) Purpose and scope. This section is intended to allow the deposit 
and other operations of a large insured depository institution (defined 
as a ``Covered Institution'') to continue functioning on the day 
following failure. It also is intended to permit the FDIC to fulfill its 
legal mandates regarding the resolution of failed insured institutions 
to provide liquidity to depositors promptly, enhance market discipline, 
ensure equitable treatment of depositors at different institutions and 
reduce the FDIC's costs by preserving the franchise value of a failed 
institution.
    (b) Definitions. (1) A covered Institution means an insured 
depository institution which, based on items as defined in Reports of 
Income and Condition or Thrift Financial Reports filed with the 
applicable federal regulator, has at least $2 billion in deposits and at 
least either:
    (i) 250,000 deposit accounts; or
    (ii) $20 billion in total assets, regardless of the number of 
deposit accounts.
    (2) Deposits, number of deposit accounts and total assets are as 
defined in the instructions for the filing of Reports of Income and 
Condition and Thrift Financial Reports, as applicable to the insured 
depository institution for determining whether it qualifies as a covered 
institution. A foreign deposit means an uninsured deposit liability 
maintained in a foreign branch of an insured depository institution. An 
international banking facility deposit is as defined by the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System in Regulation D (12 CFR 
Sec. 204.8(a)(2)). A demand deposit account, NOW account, money market 
deposit account, savings deposit account and time deposit account are as 
defined in the instructions for the filing of Reports of Income and 
Condition and Thrift Financial Reports.
    (3) Sweep account arrangements consist of a deposit account linked 
to an interest-bearing investment vehicle whereby funds are swept to and 
from the deposit account according to prearranged rules, usually on a 
daily basis, where the sweep investment vehicle is not a deposit and is 
reflected on the books and records of the Covered Institution.
    (4) Automated credit account arrangements consist of a deposit 
account into which funds are automatically credited from an interest-
bearing investment vehicle where the funds in the interest-bearing 
investment vehicle were not invested by prearranged rules.
    (5) Non-covered institution means an insured depository institution 
that does not meet the definition of a covered institution.
    (6) Provisional hold means an effective restriction on access to 
some or all of a deposit or other liability account after the failure of 
an insured depository institution.
    (c) Posting and removing provisional holds. (1) A covered 
institution shall have in place an automated process for implementing a 
provisional hold on deposit accounts, foreign deposit accounts and sweep 
and automated credit account arrangements immediately following the 
determination of the close-of-business account balances, as defined in 
Sec. 360.8(b)(3), at the failed covered institution.
    (2) The system requirements under paragraph (c)(1) must have the 
capability of placing the provisional holds prescribed under that 
provision no later than 9 a.m. local time the day following the FDIC 
cutoff point, as defined in Sec. 360.8(b)(1).
    (3) Pursuant to instructions to be provided by the FDIC, a covered 
institution must notify the FDIC of the person(s) responsible for 
producing the standard data download and administering provisional 
holds, both while the functionality is being constructed and on an on-
going basis.
    (4) For deposit accounts held in domestic offices of an insured 
depository institution, the provisional hold algorithm must be designed 
to exempt accounts below a specific account balance threshold, as 
determined by the FDIC. The account balance threshold could be any 
amount, including zero. For accounts above the account balance threshold 
determined by the FDIC, the algorithm must be designed to calculate and 
place a hold equal to the dollar amount of funds in excess of

[[Page 917]]

the account balance threshold multiplied by the provisional hold 
percentage determined by the FDIC. The provisional hold percentage could 
be any amount, from zero to one hundred percent. The account balance 
threshold as well as the provisional hold percentage could vary for the 
following four categories, as the covered institution customarily 
defines consumer accounts:
    (i) Consumer demand deposit, NOW and money market deposit accounts;
    (ii) Other consumer deposit accounts (time deposit and savings 
accounts, excluding NOW and money market deposit accounts);
    (iii) Non-consumer demand deposit, NOW and money market deposit 
accounts; and
    (iv) Other non-consumer deposit accounts (time deposit and savings 
accounts, excluding NOW and money market deposit accounts).
    (5) For deposit accounts held in foreign offices of an insured 
depository institution, other than those connected to a sweep or 
automated credit arrangement, the provisional hold algorithm will apply 
a provisional hold percentage to the entire account balance. For deposit 
accounts held in foreign offices the provisional hold percentage may 
differ from that applied to deposit accounts. Also, the provisional hold 
percentage would not vary by account category (i.e., consumer versus 
non-consumer and transaction versus non-transaction) as is the case with 
deposit accounts.
    (6) For international banking facility deposits, other than those 
connected to a sweep or automated credit arrangements, the provisional 
hold algorithm will apply a provisional hold percentage to the entire 
account balance. For IBF deposits the provisional hold percentage may 
differ from that applied to deposit or foreign deposit accounts. Also, 
the provisional hold percentage would not vary by account category 
(i.e., consumer versus non-consumer, and transaction versus non-
transaction) as is the case with deposit accounts.
    (7) For the interest-bearing investment vehicle of a sweep 
arrangement, the provisional hold algorithm must be designed with the 
capability to place a provisional hold on the interest-bearing 
investment vehicle with possibly a different account balance threshold 
and a different hold percentage according to the type of interest-
bearing investment vehicle.
    (8) For the interest-bearing investment vehicle of an automated 
credit account arrangement, the provisional hold algorithm must be 
designed with the capability to place a provisional hold on the 
interest-bearing investment vehicle with possibly a different account 
balance threshold and a different hold percentage according to the type 
of interest-bearing investment vehicle.
    (9) A covered institution may submit a request to the FDIC, using 
the address indicated in Sec. 360.9(g): to develop a provisional hold 
process involving memo holds or alternative account mechanisms; or to 
exempt from the provisional hold requirements of this section those 
account systems servicing a relatively small number of accounts where 
the manual application of provisional holds is feasible. Such requests 
may be in the form of a letter and must include a justification for the 
request and address the relative effectiveness of the alternative for 
posting provisional holds in the event of failure. The FDIC will 
consider such requests on a case-by-case basis in light of the 
objectives of this section.
    (10) The automated process for provisional holds required by 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section must include the capability of removing 
provisional holds in batch mode and, during the same processing cycle, 
applying debits, credits or additional holds on the deposit or other 
accounts from which the provisional holds were removed, as determined by 
the FDIC. The FDIC will provide files listing the accounts subject to: 
removal of provisional holds or additional holds (file format as 
specified in appendix A); application of debits or credits (file format 
as specified in appendix B); and application of additional holds (file 
format as specified in appendix A). In addition to the batch process 
used to remove provisional holds, the Covered Institution is required to 
have in place a mechanism for manual removal of provisional holds on a 
case-by-case basis.

[[Page 918]]

    (d) Providing a standard data format for generating deposit account 
and customer data. (1) A covered institution must have in place 
practices and procedures for providing the FDIC in a standard format 
upon the close of any day's business with required depositor and 
customer data for all deposit accounts held in domestic and foreign 
offices and interest-bearing investment accounts connected with sweep 
and automated credit arrangements. Such standard data files are to be 
created through a mapping of pre-existing data elements and internal 
institution codes into standard data formats. Deposit account and 
customer data provided must be current as of the close of business for 
that day.
    (2) The requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall be 
provided in five separate files, as indicated in the appendices C 
through G to this part 360.
    (3) Upon request by the FDIC, a covered institution must submit the 
data required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section to the FDIC, in a 
manner prescribed by the FDIC.
    (4) In providing the data required under paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section to the FDIC, the Covered Institution must be able to reconcile 
the total deposit balances and the number of deposit accounts to the 
institution's subsidiary system control totals.
    (e) Implementation requirements. (1) A covered institution must 
comply with the requirements of this section no later than February 18, 
2010.
    (2) An insured depository institution not within the definition of a 
covered institution on the effective date of this section must comply 
with the requirements of this section no later than eighteen months 
following the end of the second calendar quarter for which it meets the 
criteria for a covered institution.
    (3) Upon the merger of two or more non-covered institutions, if the 
resulting institution meets the criteria for a covered institution, that 
covered institution must comply with the requirements of this section no 
later than eighteen months after the effective date of the merger.
    (4) Upon the merger of two or more covered institutions, the merged 
institution must comply with the requirements of this section within 
eighteen months following the effective date of the merger. This 
provision, however, does not supplant any preexisting implementation 
date requirement, in place prior to the date of the merger, for the 
individual covered institution(s) involved in the merger.
    (5) Upon the merger of one or more covered institutions with one or 
more non-covered institutions, the merged institution(s) must comply 
with the requirements of this section within eighteen months following 
the effective date of the merger. This provision, however, does not 
supplant any preexisting implementation date requirement for the 
individual covered institution(s) involved in the merger.
    (6) Notwithstanding the general requirements of this paragraph (e), 
on a case-by-case basis, the FDIC may accelerate, upon notice, the 
implementation timeframe of all or part of the requirements of this 
section for a covered institution that: Has a composite rating of 3, 4, 
or 5 under the Uniform Financial Institution's Rating System, or in the 
case of an insured branch of a foreign bank, an equivalent rating; is 
undercapitalized, as defined under the prompt corrective action 
provisions of 12 CFR part 325 or 12 CFR part 324, as applicable; or is 
determined by the appropriate Federal banking agency or the FDIC in 
consultation with the appropriate Federal banking agency to be 
experiencing a significant deterioration of capital or significant 
funding difficulties or liquidity stress, notwithstanding the composite 
rating of the institution by its appropriate Federal banking agency in 
its most recent report of examination. In implementing this paragraph 
(e)(6), the FDIC must consult with the covered institution's primary 
federal regulator and consider the: Complexity of the institution's 
deposit systems and operations, extent of the institution's asset 
quality difficulties, volatility of the institution's funding sources, 
expected near-term changes in the institution's capital levels, and 
other relevant factors appropriate for the FDIC to consider in its roles 
as insurer and possible receiver of the institution.

[[Page 919]]

    (7) Notwithstanding the general requirements of this paragraph (e), 
a covered institution may request, by letter, that the FDIC extend the 
deadline for complying with the requirements of this section. A request 
for such an extension is subject to the FDIC's rules of general 
applicability under 12 CFR. 303.251.
    (f) A covered institution may apply to the FDIC for an exemption 
from the requirements of this Sec. 360.9 if it has a high concentration 
of deposits incidental to credit card operations. The FDIC will consider 
such applications on a case-by-case basis in light of the objectives of 
this section.
    (g) Requests for exemptions from the requirements of this section, 
for flexibility in the use of provisional holds or for extensions of the 
implementation requirements of this section and the submission of point-
of-contact information should be submitted in writing to: Office of the 
Director, Division of Resolutions and Receiverships, Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429-0002.
    (h) Testing requirements. Covered institutions must provide 
appropriate assistance to the FDIC in its testing of the systems 
required by this section. The FDIC will provide testing details to 
covered institutions through the issuance of subsequent procedures and/
or guidelines.

[73 FR 41195, July 17, 2008, as amended at 78 FR 55595, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 360.10  Resolution plans required for insured depository 
institutions with $50 billion or more in total assets.

    (a) Scope and purpose. This section requires each insured depository 
institution with $50 billion or more in total assets to submit 
periodically to the FDIC a plan for the resolution of such institution 
in the event of its failure. This section also establishes the rules and 
requirements regarding the submission and content of a resolution plan 
as well as procedures for review by the FDIC of a resolution plan. This 
section requires a covered insured depository institution to submit a 
resolution plan that should enable the FDIC, as receiver, to resolve the 
institution under Sections 11 and 13 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (``FDI Act''), 12 U.S.C. 1821 and 1823, in a manner that ensures 
that depositors receive access to their insured deposits within one 
business day of the institution's failure (two business days if the 
failure occurs on a day other than Friday), maximizes the net present 
value return from the sale or disposition of its assets and minimizes 
the amount of any loss realized by the creditors in the resolution. This 
rule is intended to ensure that the FDIC has access to all of the 
material information it needs to resolve efficiently a covered insured 
depository institution in the event of its failure.
    (b) Definitions--(1) Affiliate has the same meaning given such term 
in Section 3(w)(6) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(w)(6).
    (2) Company has the same meaning given such term in Sec. 362.2(d) of 
the FDIC's Regulations, 12 CFR 362.2(d).
    (3) Core business lines means those business lines of the covered 
insured depository institution (``CIDI''), including associated 
operations, services, functions and support, that, in the view of the 
CIDI, upon failure would result in a material loss of revenue, profit, 
or franchise value.
    (4) Covered insured depository institution (``CIDI'') means an 
insured depository institution with $50 billion or more in total assets, 
as determined based upon the average of the institution's four most 
recent Reports of Condition and Income or Thrift Financial Reports, as 
applicable to the insured depository institution.
    (5) Critical services means services and operations of the CIDI, 
such as servicing, information technology support and operations, human 
resources and personnel that are necessary to continue the day-to-day 
operations of the CIDI.
    (6) Foreign-based company means any company that is not incorporated 
or organized under the laws of the United States.
    (7) Insured depository institution shall have the meaning given such 
term in Section 3(c)(2) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(2).
    (8) Material entity means a company that is significant to the 
activities of a critical service or core business line.

[[Page 920]]

    (9) Parent company means the company that controls, directly or 
indirectly, an insured depository institution. In a multi-tiered holding 
company structure, parent company means the top-tier of the multi-tiered 
holding company only.
    (10) Parent company affiliate means any affiliate of the parent 
company other than the CIDI and subsidiaries of the CIDI.
    (11) Resolution plan means the plan described in paragraph (c) of 
this section for resolving the CIDI under Sections 11 and 13 of the FDI 
Act, 12 U.S.C. 1821 and 1823.
    (12) Subsidiary has the same meaning given such term in Section 
3(w)(4) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(w)(4).
    (13) Total assets are defined in the instructions for the filing of 
Reports of Condition and Income and Thrift Financial Reports, as 
applicable to the insured depository institution, for determining 
whether it qualifies as a CIDI.
    (14) United States means the United States and includes any state of 
the United States, the District of Columbia, any territory of the United 
States, Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa and the Virgin Islands.
    (c) Resolution Plans to be submitted by CIDI to FDIC--(1) General. 
(i) Initial Resolution Plans Required. Each CIDI shall submit a 
resolution plan to the FDIC, Attention: Office of Complex Financial 
Institutions, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC 20429, on or before 
the date set forth below (``Initial Submission Date''):
    (A) July 1, 2012, with respect to a CIDI whose parent company, as of 
November 30, 2011, had $250 billion or more in total nonbank assets (or 
in the case of a parent company that is a foreign-based company, such 
company's total U.S. nonbank assets);
    (B) July 1, 2013, with respect to any CIDI not described paragraph 
(c)(1)(i)(A) of this section whose parent company, as of November 30, 
2011, had $100 billion or more in total nonbank assets (or, in the case 
of a parent company that is a foreign-based company, such company's 
total U.S. nonbank assets); and
    (C) December 31, 2013, with respect to any CIDI not described in of 
this paragraph (c)(1)(i)(A) or (B) of this section.
    (ii) Submission by New CIDIs. An insured depository institution that 
becomes a CIDI after April 1, 2012 shall submit its initial resolution 
plan no later than the next July 1 following the date the insured 
depository institution becomes a CIDI, provided such date occurs no 
earlier than 270 days after the date on which the insured depository 
institution became a CIDI.
    (iii) After filing its initial Resolution Plan pursuant to paragraph 
(c)(1)(i) or (c)(1)(ii) of this section, each CIDI shall submit a 
Resolution Plan to the FDIC annually on or before each anniversary date 
of its Initial Submission Date.
    (iv) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this paragraph 
(c)(1), the FDIC may determine that a CIDI shall file its initial or 
annual Resolution Plan by a date other than as provided in this 
paragraph (c). The FDIC shall provide a CIDI with written notice of a 
determination under this paragraph (c)(1)(iv) no later than 180 days 
prior to the date on which the FDIC determines to require the CIDI to 
submit its Resolution Plan.
    (v) Notice of Material Events. (A) Each CIDI shall file with the 
FDIC a notice no later than 45 days after any event, occurrence, change 
in conditions or circumstances or other change that results in, or could 
reasonably be foreseen to have, a material effect on the resolution plan 
of the CIDI. Such notice shall describe the event, occurrence or change 
and explain why the event, occurrence or change may require changes to 
the resolution plan. The CIDI shall address any event, occurrence or 
change with respect to which it has provided notice pursuant hereto in 
the following resolution plan submitted by the CIDI.
    (B) A CIDI shall not be required to file a notice under paragraph 
(c)(1)(v)(A) of this section if the date on which the CIDI would be 
required to submit a notice under paragraph (c)(1)(v)(A) would be within 
90 days prior to the date on which the CIDI is required to file an 
annual Resolution Plan under paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section.

[[Page 921]]

    (vi) Incorporation of data and other information from a Dodd-Frank 
Act resolution plan. The CIDI may incorporate data and other information 
from a resolution plan filed pursuant to Section 165(d) of the Dodd-
Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, 12 U.S.C. 5365(d), 
by its parent company.
    (2) Content of the Resolution Plan. The resolution plan submitted 
should enable the FDIC, as receiver, to resolve the CIDI in the event of 
its insolvency under the FDI Act in a manner that ensures that 
depositors receive access to their insured deposits within one business 
day of the institution's failure (two business days if the failure 
occurs on a day other than Friday), maximizes the net present value 
return from the sale or disposition of its assets and minimizes the 
amount of any loss realized by the creditors in the resolution in 
accordance with Sections 11 and 13 of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1821 and 
1823. The resolution plan strategies should take into account that 
failure of the CIDI may occur under the baseline, adverse and severely 
adverse economic conditions developed by the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5365(i)(1)(B); provided, 
however, a CIDI may submit its initial resolution plan assuming the 
baseline conditions only, or, if a baseline scenario is not then 
available, a reasonable substitute developed by the CIDI. At a minimum, 
the resolution plan shall:
    (i) Executive Summary. Include an executive summary describing the 
key elements of the CIDI's strategic plan for resolution under the FDI 
Act in the event of its insolvency. After the CIDI files its initial 
plan, each annual resolution plan shall also describe:
    (A) Material events, such as acquisitions, sales, litigation and 
operational changes, since the most recently filed plan that may have a 
material effect on the plan;
    (B) Material changes to the CIDI's resolution plan from its most 
recently filed plan; and
    (C) Any actions taken by the CIDI since filing of the previous plan 
to improve the effectiveness of its resolution plan or remediate or 
otherwise mitigate any material weaknesses or impediments to the 
effective and timely execution of the resolution plan.
    (ii) Organizational Structure: Legal Entities; Core Business Lines 
and Branches. Provide the CIDI's, parent company's, and affiliates' 
legal and functional structures and identify core business lines. 
Provide a mapping of core business lines, including material asset 
holdings and liabilities related thereto, to material entities. Discuss 
the CIDI's overall deposit activities including, among other things, 
unique aspects of the deposit base or underlying systems that may create 
operational complexity for the FDIC, result in extraordinary resolution 
expenses in the event of failure and a description of the branch 
organization, both domestic and foreign. Identify key personnel tasked 
with managing core business lines and deposit activities and the CIDI's 
branch organization.
    (iii) Critical Services. Identify critical services and providers of 
critical services. Provide a mapping of critical services to material 
entities and core business lines. Describe the CIDI's strategy for 
continuing critical services in the event of the CIDI's failure. When 
critical services are provided by the parent company or a parent company 
affiliate, describe the CIDI's strategy for continuing critical services 
in the event of the parent company's or parent company affiliate's 
failure. Assess the ability of each parent company affiliate providing 
critical services to function on a stand-alone basis in the event of the 
parent company's failure.
    (iv) Interconnectedness to Parent Company's Organization; Potential 
Barriers or Material Obstacles to Orderly Resolution. Identify the 
elements or aspects of the parent company's organizational structure, 
the interconnectedness of its legal entities, the structure of legal or 
contractual arrangements, or its overall business operations that would, 
in the event the CIDI were placed in receivership, diminish the CIDI's 
franchise value, obstruct its continued business operations or increase 
the operational complexity to the FDIC of resolution of the CIDI. 
Identify potential barriers or other material obstacles to an orderly 
resolution of the

[[Page 922]]

CIDI, inter-connections and inter-dependencies that hinder the timely 
and effective resolution of the CIDI, and include the remediation steps 
or mitigating responses necessary to eliminate or minimize such barriers 
or obstacles.
    (v) Strategy to Separate from Parent Company's Organization. Provide 
a strategy to unwind or separate the CIDI and its subsidiaries from the 
organizational structure of its parent company in a cost-effective and 
timely fashion. Describe remediation or mitigating steps that could be 
taken to eliminate or mitigate obstacles to such separation.
    (vi) Strategy for the Sale or Disposition of Deposit Franchise, 
Business Lines and Assets. Provide a strategy for the sale or 
disposition of the deposit franchise, including branches, core business 
lines and major assets of the CIDI in a manner that ensures that 
depositors receive access to their insured deposits within one business 
day of the institution's failure (two business days if the failure 
occurs on a day other than Friday), maximizes the net present value 
return from the sale or disposition of such assets and minimizes the 
amount of any loss realized in the resolution of cases.
    (vii) Least Costly Resolution Method. Describe how the strategies 
for the separation of the CIDI and its subsidiaries from its parent 
company's organization and sale or disposition of deposit franchise, 
core business lines and major assets can be demonstrated to be the least 
costly to the Deposit Insurance Fund of all possible methods for 
resolving the CIDI.
    (viii) Asset Valuation and Sales. Provide a detailed description of 
the processes the CIDI employs for:
    (A) Determining the current market values and marketability of core 
business lines and material asset holdings;
    (B) Assessing the feasibility of the CIDI's plans, under baseline, 
adverse and severely adverse economic condition scenarios for executing 
any sales, divestitures, restructurings, recapitalizations, or similar 
actions contemplated in the CIDI's resolution plan; and
    (C) Assessing the impact of any sales, divestitures, restructurings, 
recapitalizations, or other similar actions on the value, funding and 
operations of the CIDI and its core business lines.
    (ix) Major Counterparties. Identify the major counterparties of the 
CIDI and describe the interconnections, interdependencies and 
relationships with such major counterparties. Analyze whether the 
failure of each major counterparty would likely have an adverse impact 
on or result in the material financial distress or failure of the CIDI.
    (x) Off-balance-sheet Exposures. Describe any material off-balance-
sheet exposures (including unfunded commitments, guarantees and 
contractual obligations) of the CIDI and map those exposures to core 
business lines.
    (xi) Collateral Pledged. Identify and describe processes used by the 
CIDI to:
    (A) Determine to whom the CIDI has pledged collateral;
    (B) Identify the person or entity that holds such collateral; and
    (C) Identify the jurisdiction in which the collateral is located; 
and if different, the jurisdiction in which the security interest in the 
collateral is enforceable against the CIDI.
    (xii) Trading, derivatives and hedges. Describe the practices of the 
CIDI and its core business lines related to the booking of trading and 
derivative activities. Identify each system on which the CIDI conducts a 
material number or value amount of trades. Map each trading system to 
the CIDI's legal entities and core business lines. Identify material 
hedges of the CIDI and its core business lines related to trading and 
derivative activities, including a mapping to legal entity. Describe 
hedging strategies of the CIDI.
    (xiii) Unconsolidated Balance Sheet of CIDI; Material Entity 
Financial Statements. Provide an unconsolidated balance sheet for the 
CIDI and a consolidating schedule for all material entities that are 
subject to consolidation with the CIDI. Provide financial statements for 
material entities. When available, audited financial statements should 
be provided.
    (xiv) Payment, clearing and settlement systems. Identify each 
payment, clearing and settlement system of which the

[[Page 923]]

CIDI, directly or indirectly, is a member. Map membership in each such 
system to the CIDI's legal entities and core business lines.
    (xv) Capital Structure; Funding Sources. Provide detailed 
descriptions of the funding, liquidity and capital needs of, and 
resources available to, the CIDI and its material entities, which shall 
be mapped to core business lines and critical services. Describe the 
material components of the liabilities of the CIDI and its material 
entities and identify types and amounts of short-term and long-term 
liabilities by type and term to maturity, secured and unsecured 
liabilities and subordinated liabilities.
    (xvi) Affiliate Funding, Transactions, Accounts, Exposures and 
Concentrations. Describe material affiliate funding relationships, 
accounts, and exposures, including terms, purpose, and duration, that 
the CIDI or any of its subsidiaries have with its parent or any parent 
company affiliate. Include in such description material affiliate 
financial exposures, claims or liens, lending or borrowing lines and 
relationships, guaranties, asset accounts, deposits, or derivatives 
transactions. Clearly identify the nature and extent to which parent 
company or parent company affiliates serve as a source of funding to the 
CIDI and its subsidiaries, the terms of any contractual arrangements, 
including any capital maintenance agreements, the location of related 
assets, funds or deposits and the mechanisms by which funds can be 
downstreamed from the parent company to the CIDI and its subsidiaries.
    (xvii) Systemically Important Functions. Describe systemically 
important functions that the CIDI, its subsidiaries and affiliates 
provide, including the nature and extent of the institution's 
involvement in payment systems, custodial or clearing operations, large 
sweep programs, and capital markets operations in which it plays a 
dominant role. Discuss critical vulnerabilities, estimated exposure and 
potential losses, and why certain attributes of the businesses detailed 
in previous sections could pose a systemic risk to the broader economy.
    (xviii) Cross-Border Elements. Describe material components of the 
CIDI's structure that are based or located outside the United States, 
including foreign branches, subsidiaries and offices. Provide detail on 
the location and amount of foreign deposits and assets. Discuss the 
nature and extent of the CIDI's cross-border assets, operations, 
interrelationships and exposures and map to legal entities and core 
business lines.
    (xix) Management Information Systems; Software Licenses; 
Intellectual Property. Provide a detailed inventory and description of 
the key management information systems and applications, including 
systems and applications for risk management, accounting, and financial 
and regulatory reporting, used by the CIDI and its subsidiaries. 
Identify the legal owner or licensor of the systems identified above; 
describe the use and function of the system or application, and provide 
a listing of service level agreements and any software and systems 
licenses or associated intellectual property related thereto. Identify 
and discuss any disaster recovery or other backup plans. Identify common 
or shared facilities and systems as well as personnel necessary to 
operate such facilities and systems. Describe the capabilities of the 
CIDI's processes and systems to collect, maintain, and report the 
information and other data underlying the resolution plan to management 
of the CIDI and, upon request to the FDIC. Describe any deficiencies, 
gaps or weaknesses in such capabilities and the actions the CIDI intends 
to take to promptly address such deficiencies, gaps, or weaknesses, and 
the time frame for implementing such actions.
    (xx) Corporate Governance. Include a detailed description of:
    (A) How resolution planning is integrated into the corporate 
governance structure and processes of the CIDI;
    (B) The CIDI's policies, procedures, and internal controls governing 
preparation and approval of the resolution plan; and
    (C) The identity and position of the senior management official of 
the CIDI who is primarily responsible and accountable for the 
development, maintenance, implementation, and filing of the resolution 
plan and for the CIDI's compliance with this section.

[[Page 924]]

    (xxi) Assessment of the Resolution Plan. Describe the nature, 
extent, and results of any contingency planning or similar exercise 
conducted by the CIDI since the date of the most recently filed 
resolution plan to assess the viability of or improve the resolution 
plan.
    (xxii) Any other material factor. Identify and discuss any other 
material factor that may impede the resolution of the CIDI.
    (3) Approval. The CIDI's board of directors must approve the 
resolution plan. Such approval shall be noted in the Board minutes.
    (4) Review of Resolution Plan.
    (i) Each resolution plan submitted shall be credible. A resolution 
plan is credible if its strategies for resolving the CIDI, and the 
detailed information required by this section, are well-founded and 
based on information and data related to the CIDI that are observable or 
otherwise verifiable and employ reasonable projections from current and 
historical conditions within the broader financial markets.
    (ii) After receiving a resolution plan, the FDIC shall determine 
whether the submitted plan satisfies the minimum informational 
requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section; and either acknowledge 
acceptance of the plan for review or return the resolution plan if the 
FDIC determines that it is incomplete or that substantial additional 
information is required to facilitate review of the resolution plan.
    (iii) If the FDIC determines that a resolution plan is 
informationally incomplete or that additional information is necessary 
to facilitate review of the plan, the FDIC shall inform the CIDI in 
writing of the area(s) in which the plan is informationally incomplete 
or with respect to which additional information is required.
    (iv) The CIDI shall resubmit an informationally complete resolution 
plan or such additional information as requested to facilitate review of 
the resolution plan no later than 30 days after receiving the notice 
described in paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section, or such other time 
period as the FDIC may determine.
    (v) Upon acceptance of a resolution plan as informationally 
complete, the FDIC will review the resolution plan in consultation with 
the appropriate Federal banking agency for the CIDI and its parent 
company. If, after consultation with the appropriate Federal banking 
agency for the CIDI, the FDIC determines that the resolution plan of a 
CIDI submitted is not credible, the FDIC shall notify the CIDI in 
writing of such determination. Any notice provided under this paragraph 
shall identify the aspects of the resolution plan that the FDIC 
determines to be deficient.
    (vi) Within 90 days of receiving a notice of deficiencies issued 
pursuant to the preceding paragraph, or such shorter or longer period as 
the FDIC may determine, a CIDI shall submit a revised resolution plan to 
the FDIC that addresses the deficiencies identified by the FDIC and 
discusses in detail the revisions made to address such deficiencies.
    (vii) Upon its own initiative or a written request by a CIDI, the 
FDIC may extend any time period under this section. Each extension 
request shall be in writing and shall describe the basis and 
justification for the request.
    (d) Implementation Matters. (1) In order to allow evaluation of the 
resolution plan, each CIDI must provide the FDIC such information and 
access to such personnel of the CIDI as the FDIC determines is necessary 
to assess the credibility of the resolution plan and the ability of the 
CIDI to implement the resolution plan. The FDIC will rely to the fullest 
extent possible on examinations conducted by or on behalf of the 
appropriate Federal banking agency for the relevant company.
    (2) Within a reasonable period of time, as determined by the FDIC, 
following its Initial Submission Date, the CIDI shall demonstrate its 
capability to produce promptly, in a time frame and format acceptable to 
the FDIC, the information and data underlying its resolution plan. The 
FDIC shall consult with the appropriate Federal banking agency for the 
CIDI before finding that the CIDI's capability to produce the 
information and data underlying its resolution plan is unacceptable.
    (3) Notwithstanding the general requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of 
this section, on a case-by-case basis, the

[[Page 925]]

FDIC may extend, on its own initiative or upon written request, the 
implementation and updating time frames for all or part of the 
requirements of this section.
    (4) FDIC may, on its own initiative or upon written request, exempt 
a CIDI from one or more of the requirements of this section.
    (e) No limiting effect on FDIC. No resolution plan provided pursuant 
to this section shall be binding on the FDIC as supervisor, deposit 
insurer or receiver for a CIDI or otherwise require the FDIC to act in 
conformance with such plan.
    (f) Form of Resolution Plans; Confidential Treatment of Resolution 
Plans. (1) Each resolution plan of a CIDI shall be divided into a Public 
Section and a Confidential Section. Each CIDI shall segregate and 
separately identify the Public Section from the Confidential Section. 
The Public Section shall consist of an executive summary of the 
resolution plan that describes the business of the CIDI and includes, to 
the extent material to an understanding of the CIDI:
    (i) The names of material entities;
    (ii) A description of core business lines;
    (iii) Consolidated financial information regarding assets, 
liabilities, capital and major funding sources;
    (iv) A description of derivative activities and hedging activities;
    (v) A list of memberships in material payment, clearing and 
settlement systems;
    (vi) A description of foreign operations;
    (vii) The identities of material supervisory authorities;
    (viii) The identities of the principal officers;
    (ix) A description of the corporate governance structure and 
processes related to resolution planning;
    (x) A description of material management information systems; and
    (xi) A description, at a high level, of the CIDI's resolution 
strategy, covering such items as the range of potential purchasers of 
the CIDI, its material entities and core business lines.
    (2) The confidentiality of resolution plans shall be determined in 
accordance with applicable exemptions under the Freedom of Information 
Act (5 U.S.C. 552(b)) and the FDIC's Disclosure of Information Rules (12 
CFR part 309).
    (3) Any CIDI submitting a resolution plan or related materials 
pursuant to this section that desires confidential treatment of the 
information submitted pursuant to 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(4) and the FDIC's 
Disclosure of Information Rules (12 CFR part 309) and related policies 
may file a request for confidential treatment in accordance with those 
rules.
    (4) To the extent permitted by law, information comprising the 
Confidential Section of a resolution plan will be treated as 
confidential.
    (5) To the extent permitted by law, the submission of any 
nonpublicly available data or information under this section shall not 
constitute a waiver of, or otherwise affect, any privilege arising under 
Federal or state law (including the rules of any Federal or state court) 
to which the data or information is otherwise subject. Privileges that 
apply to resolution plans and related materials are protected pursuant 
to Section 18(x) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1828(x).

[77 FR 3084, Jan. 23, 2012]



Sec. 360.11  Records of failed insured depository institutions.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions apply--
    (1) Failed insured depository institution is an insured depository 
institution for which the FDIC has been appointed receiver pursuant to 
12 U.S.C. 1821(c)(1).
    (2) Insured depository institution has the same meaning as provided 
by 12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(2).
    (3) Records means any reasonably accessible document, book, paper, 
map, photograph, microfiche, microfilm, computer or electronically-
created record generated or maintained by an insured depository 
institution in the course of and necessary to its transaction of 
business.
    (i) Examples of records include, without limitation, board or 
committee meeting minutes, contracts to which the insured depository 
institution was a party, deposit account information,

[[Page 926]]

employee and employee benefits information, general ledger and financial 
reports or data, litigation files, and loan documents.
    (ii) Records do not include:
    (A) Multiple copies of records; or
    (B) Examination, operating, or condition reports prepared by, on 
behalf of, or for the use of the FDIC or any agency responsible for the 
regulation or supervision of insured depository institutions.
    (b) Determination of records. In determining whether particular 
documentary material obtained from a failed insured depository 
institution is a record for purposes of 12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(15)(D), the 
FDIC in its discretion will consider the following factors:
    (1) Whether the documentary material related to the business of the 
insured depository institution,
    (2) Whether the documentary material was generated or maintained as 
records in the regular course of the business of the insured depository 
institution in accordance with its own recordkeeping practices and 
procedures or pursuant to standards established by its regulators,
    (3) Whether the documentary material is needed by the FDIC to carry 
out its receivership function, and
    (4) The expected evidentiary needs of the FDIC.
    (c) The FDIC's determination that documentary material from a failed 
insured depository institution constitutes records is solely for the 
purpose of identifying that documentary material that must be maintained 
pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(15)(D) and shall not bear on the 
discoverability or admissibility of such documentary material in any 
court, tribunal or other adjudicative proceeding, nor on whether such 
documentary material is subject to release under the Freedom of 
Information Act, the Privacy Act or other law.
    (d) Destruction of records. (1) Except as provided in paragraph 
(d)(2) of this section, after the end of the six-year period beginning 
on the date the FDIC is appointed as receiver of a failed insured 
depository institution, the FDIC may destroy any records of an 
institution which the FDIC, in its discretion, determines to be 
unnecessary unless directed not to do so by a court of competent 
jurisdiction or governmental agency, prohibited by law, or subject to a 
legal hold imposed by the FDIC.
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the FDIC may 
destroy records of a failed insured depository institution which are at 
least 10 years old as of the date on which the FDIC is appointed as the 
receiver of such institution in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section at any time after such appointment is final, without regard to 
the six-year period of limitation contained in paragraph (d)(1) of this 
section.
    (e) Transfer of records. If the FDIC transfers records to a third 
party in connection with a transaction involving the purchase and 
assumption of assets and liabilities of an insured depository 
institution, the recordkeeping requirements of 12 U.S.C. 1821(d)(15)(D), 
and paragraph (d) of this section shall be satisfied if the transferee 
agrees that it will not destroy such records for at least six years from 
the date the FDIC was appointed as receiver of such failed insured 
depository institution unless otherwise notified in writing by the FDIC.
    (f) Policies and procedures. The FDIC may establish policies and 
procedures with respect to the retention and destruction of records that 
are consistent with this section.

[78 FR 54376, Sept. 4, 2013]



  Sec. Appendix A to Part 360--Non-Monetary Transaction File Structure

    This is the structure of the data file the FDIC will provide to 
remove or add a FDIC hold for an individual account or sub-account. The 
file will be in a tab- or pipe-delimited ASCII format and provided 
through FDICconnect or Direct Connect. The file will be encrypted using 
an FDIC-supplied algorithm.

[[Page 927]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                  Field description            Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. DP_Acct_Identifier...............  Account Identifier.....  The Account Identifier  Character (25).
                                      The primary field used    may be composed of
                                       to identify the          more than one
                                       account. This field      physical data
                                       may be the Account       element. If multiple
                                       Number..                 fields are required
                                                                to identify the
                                                                account, data should
                                                                be placed in separate
                                                                fields and the FDIC
                                                                instructed how these
                                                                fields are combined
                                                                to uniquely identify
                                                                the account.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier--2............  Account Identifier--2..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element used to
                                       identify the account.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier--3............  Account Identifier--3..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
4. DP_Acct_Identifier--4............  Account Identifier--4..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element used to
                                       identify the account.
5. DP_Acct_Identifier--5............  Account Identifier--5..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
6. DP_Sub_Acct_Identifier...........  Sub-Account Identifier.  The Sub-Account         Character (25).
                                      If available, the Sub-    Identifier may
                                       Account identifier for   identify separate
                                       the account..            deposits tied to this
                                                                account where there
                                                                are different
                                                                processing parameters
                                                                such as interest
                                                                rates or maturity
                                                                dates, but all owners
                                                                are the same.
7. PH_Hold_Action...................  Hold Action............  ......................  Character (1).
                                      The requested hold
                                       action to be taken for
                                       this account or sub-
                                       account..
                                      Possible values are:
                                       R = Remove....
                                       A = Add.......
8. PH_Hold_Amt......................  Hold Amount............  ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                      Dollar amount of the
                                       FDIC hold to be
                                       removed or added.
9. PH_Hold_Desc.....................  Hold Description.......  ......................  Character (225).
                                      FDIC hold to be removed
                                       or added.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



        Sec. Appendix B to Part 360--Debit/Credit File Structure

    This is the structure of the data file the FDIC will provide to 
apply debits and credits to an individual account or sub-account after 
the removal of FDIC holds. The file will be in a tab- or pipe-delimited 
ASCII format and provided through FDICconnect or Direct Connect. The 
file will be encrypted using an FDIC-supplied algorithm.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                  Field description            Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. DP_Acct_Identifier...............  Account Identifier.....  The Account Identifier  Character (25).
                                      The primary field used    may be composed of
                                       to identify the          more than one
                                       account. This field      physical data
                                       may the Account          element. If multiple
                                       Number..                 fields are required
                                                                to identify the
                                                                account, data should
                                                                be placed in separate
                                                                fields and the FDIC
                                                                instructed how these
                                                                fields are combined
                                                                to uniquely identify
                                                                the account.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier--2............  Account Identifier--2..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element used to
                                       identify the account.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier--3............  Account Identifier--3..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
4. DP_Acct_Identifier--4............  Account Identifier--4..  ......................  Character (25).

[[Page 928]]

 
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element used to
                                       identify the account.
5. DP_Acct_Identifier--5............  Account Identifier--5..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
6. DP_Sub_Acct_Identifier...........  Sub-Account Identifier.  The Sub-Account         Character (25).
                                      If available, the sub-    Identifier may
                                       account identifier for   identify separate
                                       the account..            deposits tied to this
                                                                account where there
                                                                are different
                                                                processing parameters
                                                                such as interest
                                                                rates or maturity
                                                                dates, but all owners
                                                                are the same.
7. DC_Debit_Amt.....................  Debit Amount...........  ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                      Dollar amount of the
                                       debit to be applied to
                                       the account or sub-
                                       account.
8. DC_Credit_Amt....................  Credit Amount..........  ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                      Dollar amount of the
                                       credit to be applied
                                       to the account or sub-
                                       account.
9. DC_Transaction_Desc..............  Debit/Credit             ......................  Character (225).
                                       Description.
                                      FDIC message associated
                                       with the debit or
                                       credit transaction.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



           Sec. Appendix C to Part 360--Deposit File Structure

    This is the structure for the data file to provide deposit data to 
the FDIC. If data or information are not maintained or do not apply, a 
null value in the appropriate field should be indicated. The file will 
be in a tab-or pipe-delimited ASCII format. Each file name will contain 
the institution's FDIC Certificate Number, an indication that it is a 
deposit file type and the date of the extract. The files will be 
encrypted using an FDIC-supplied algorithm. The FDIC will transmit to 
the covered institution the encryption algorithm over FDICconnect.
    The total deposit balances and the number of deposit accounts in 
each deposit file must be reconciled to the subsidiary system control 
totals.
    The FDIC intends to fully utilize a covered institution's 
understanding of its customers and the data maintained around deposit 
accounts. Should additional information be available to the covered 
institution to help the FDIC more quickly complete its insurance 
determination process, it may add this information to the end of this 
data file. Should additional data elements be provided, a complete data 
dictionary for these elements must be supplied along with a description 
of how this information could be best used to establish account 
ownership or insurance category.
    The deposit data elements provide information specific to deposit 
account balances and account data. The sequencing of these elements, 
their physical data structures and the field data format and field 
length must be provided to the FDIC along with the data structures 
identified below.
    A header record will also be required at the beginning of this file. 
This record will contain the number of accounts to be included in this 
file, the maximum number of characters contained in largest account 
title field maintained within the deposit file and the maximum number of 
characters contained in largest address field maintained within the 
deposit file.

    Note: Each record must contain the account title/name and current 
account statement mailing address. Fields 17-33 relate to the account 
name and address information. Some systems provide for separate fields 
for account title/name, street address, city, state, ZIP, and country, 
all of which are parsed out. Others systems may simply provide multiple 
lines for name, street address, city, state, ZIP, with no distinction. 
Populate fields that best fit the system's data, either fields 17-27 or 
fields 28-33.

[[Page 929]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                  Field description            Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. DP_Acct_Identifier...............  Account Identifier.....  The Account Identifier  Character (25).
                                      The primary field used    may be composed of
                                       to identify the          more than one
                                       account. This field      physical data
                                       may be the Account       element. If multiple
                                       Number.                  fields are required
                                                                to identify the
                                                                account, data should
                                                                be placed in separate
                                                                fields and the FDIC
                                                                instructed how these
                                                                fields are combined
                                                                to uniquely identify
                                                                the account.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier--2............  Account Identifier--2..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element used to
                                       identify the account.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier--3............  Account Identifier--3..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
4. DP_Acct_Identifier--4............  Account Identifier--4..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element used to
                                       identify the account.
5. DP_Acct_Identifier--5............  Account Identifier--5..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
6. DP_Sub_Acct_Identifier...........  Sub-Account Identifier.  The Sub-Account         Character (25).
                                      If available, the sub-    Identifier may
                                       account identifier for   identify separate
                                       the account.             deposits tied to this
                                                                account where there
                                                                are different
                                                                processing parameters
                                                                such as interest
                                                                rates or maturity
                                                                dates, but all owners
                                                                are the same.
7. DP_Bank_No.......................  Bank Number............  ......................  Character (15).
                                      The bank number
                                       assigned to the
                                       deposit account.
8. DP_Tax_ID........................  Tax ID.................  For consumer accounts,  Character (15).
                                      The tax identification    typically, this would
                                       number maintained on     be the primary
                                       the account.             account holder's
                                                                social security
                                                                number (``SSN''). For
                                                                business accounts it
                                                                would be the federal
                                                                tax identification
                                                                number (``TIN'').
                                                                Hyphens are optional
                                                                in this field.
9. DP_Tax_Code......................  Tax ID Code............  Generally deposit       Character (1).
                                      The type of the tax       systems have flags or
                                       identification number.   indicators set to
                                       Possible values are:     indicate whether the
                                       S = Social       number is an SSN or
                                       Security Number.         TIN.
                                       T = Federal
                                       Tax Identification
                                       Number.
                                       O = Other.
10. DP_Branch.......................  Branch Number..........  In lieu of a branch     Character (15).
                                      The branch or office      number this field may
                                       associated with the      represent a specialty
                                       account.                 department or
                                                                division.
11. DP_Cost_Center..................  Cost Center or G/L Code  This field ties to the  Character (20).
                                      The identifier used for   general ledger
                                       organization reporting   accounts.
                                       or ownership of the
                                       account. Insert null
                                       value if the cost
                                       center is not carried
                                       in the deposit record.
12. DP_Dep_Type.....................  Deposit Type Indicator.  A deposit--also called  Character (1).
                                      The type of deposit by    a ``domestic
                                       office location.         deposit''--includes
                                       Possible values are:     only deposit
                                       D = Deposit      liabilities payable
                                       (Domestic).              in the United States,
                                       F = Foreign      typically those
                                       Deposit.                 deposits maintained
                                                                in a domestic office
                                                                of an insured
                                                                depository
                                                                institution, as
                                                                defined in section
                                                                3(l) of the Federal
                                                                Deposit Insurance Act
                                                                (12 U.S.C. 1813(l)).
                                                                A foreign deposit is
                                                                a deposit liability
                                                                in a foreign branch
                                                                payable solely at a
                                                                foreign branch or
                                                                branches.
13. DP_Currency_Type................  Currency Type..........  ......................  Character (3).
                                      The ISO 4217 currency
                                       code.

[[Page 930]]

 
14. DP_Ownership_Ind................  Customer Ownership       Single: Accounts owned  Character (2).
                                       Indicator.               by an individual and
                                      The type of ownership     those accounts held
                                       at the account level.    as Minor Accounts,
                                       Possible values are:     Estate Accounts, Non-
                                       S = Single.      Minor Custodian/
                                       J = Joint        Guardian Accounts,
                                       Account.                 Attorney in Fact
                                       P =              Accounts and Sole
                                       Partnership account.     Proprietorships.
                                       C =             Joint Account:
                                       Corporation.             Accounts owned by two
                                       B = Brokered     or more individuals,
                                       Deposits.                but does not include
                                       I = IRA          the ownership of a
                                       Accounts.                Payable on Death
                                       U =              Account or Trust
                                       Unincorporated           Account..
                                       Association.            Partnership Account:
                                       R = Revocable    Accounts owned by a
                                       Trust.                   Partnership.
                                       IR =            Corporation: Accounts
                                       Irrevocable Trust.       owned by a
                                       G = Government   Corporation (e.g.
                                       Accounts.                Inc., L.L.C., or
                                       E = Employee     P.C.)..
                                       Benefit Plan Accounts.  Brokered Deposits:
                                       O = Other.       Accounts placed by a
                                                                deposit broker who
                                                                acts as an
                                                                intermediary for the
                                                                actual owner or sub-
                                                                broker..
                                                               IRA Accounts: Accounts
                                                                for which the owner
                                                                has the right to
                                                                direct how the funds
                                                                are invested
                                                                including Keoghs and
                                                                other Self-Directed
                                                                Retirement Accounts..
                                                               Unincorporated
                                                                Association: An
                                                                account owned by an
                                                                association of two or
                                                                more persons formed
                                                                for some religious,
                                                                educational,
                                                                charitable, social or
                                                                other non-commercial
                                                                purpose.
                                                               Revocable Trusts:
                                                                Including PODs and
                                                                formal revocable
                                                                trusts (e.g. Living
                                                                Trusts, Intervivos
                                                                Trusts or Family
                                                                Trusts).
                                                               Irrevocable Trusts:
                                                                Accounts held by a
                                                                trust established by
                                                                statute or written
                                                                trust in which the
                                                                grantor relinquishes
                                                                all power to revoke
                                                                the trust.
                                                               Government Accounts:
                                                                Accounts owned by a
                                                                government entity
                                                                (e.g. City, State,
                                                                County or Federal
                                                                government entities
                                                                and their sub-
                                                                divisions).
                                                               Employee Benefit Plan:
                                                                Accounts established
                                                                by the administrator
                                                                of an Employee
                                                                Benefit Plan
                                                                including defined
                                                                contribution, defined
                                                                benefit and employee
                                                                welfare plans.
                                                               Other Accounts:
                                                                Accounts owned by an
                                                                entity not described
                                                                above.
15. DP_Prod_Cat.....................  Product Category.......  Product Category is     Character (3).
                                      The product               sometimes referred to
                                       classification.          as ``application
                                       Possible values are:     type'' or ``system
                                                                type''.
                                       DDA = Non-
                                       Interest Bearing
                                       Checking accounts.
                                       NOW = Interest
                                       Bearing Checking
                                       accounts.
                                       MMA = Money
                                       Market Deposit
                                       Accounts.
                                       SAV = Other
                                       savings accounts.

[[Page 931]]

 
                                       CDS = Time
                                       Deposit accounts and
                                       Certificate of Deposit
                                       accounts, including
                                       any accounts with
                                       specified maturity
                                       dates that may or may
                                       not be renewable.
16. DP_Stat_Code....................  Status Code............                          Character (1).
                                      Status or condition of
                                       the account. Possible
                                       values are:.
                                       O = Open.
                                       D = Dormant.
                                       I = Inactive.
                                       E =
                                       Escheatment.
                                       A = Abandoned.
                                       C = Closing.
                                       R = Restricted/
                                       Frozen/Blocked.
17. DP_Acct_Title--1................  Account Title Line 1...  These data will be      Character (100).
                                      Account styling or        used to identify the
                                       titling of the account.  owners and
                                                                beneficiaries of the
                                                                account.
18. DP_Acct_Title--2................  Account Title Line 2...  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the
                                       second account title
                                       line.
19. DP_Acct_Title--3................  Account Title Line 3...  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the third
                                       account title line.
20. DP_Acct_Title--4................  Account Title Line 4...  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the
                                       fourth account title
                                       line.
21. DP_Street_Add_Ln--1.............  Street Address Line 1..  ......................  Character (100).
                                      The current account
                                       statement mailing
                                       address of record.
22. DP_Street_Add_Ln--2.............  Street Address Line 2..  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the
                                       second mailing address
                                       line.
23. DP_Street_Add_Ln--3.............  Street Address Line 3..  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the third
                                       mailing address line.
24. DP_City.........................  City...................  ......................  Character (50).
                                      The city associated
                                       with the mailing
                                       address.
25. DP_State........................  State..................  Use a two-character     Character (2).
                                      The state abbreviation    state code (official
                                       associated with the      U.S. Postal Service
                                       mailing address.         abbreviations).
26. DP_ZIP..........................  ZIP....................  If the `` + 4'' code    Character (10).
                                      The ZIP + 4 code          is not available
                                       associated with the      provide only the 5-
                                       mailing address.         digit ZIP code.
                                                                Hyphens are optional
                                                                in this field.
27. DP_Country......................  Country................  Provide the country     Character (10).
                                      The country associated    name or the standard
                                       with the mailing         IRS country code.
                                       address.
28. DP_NA_Line--1...................  Name/Address Line 1....  Fields 28-33 are to be  Character (100).
                                      Alternate name/address    used if address data
                                       format for the current   are not parsed to
                                       account statement        populate Fields 17-
                                       mailing address of       27.
                                       record, first line.
29. DP_NA_Line--2...................  Name/Address Line 2....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      Alternate name/address
                                       format, second line.
30. DP_NA_Line--3...................  Name/Address Line 3....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      Alternate name/address
                                       format, third line.
31. DP_NA_Line--4...................  Name/Address Line 4....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      Alternate name/address
                                       format, fourth line.
32. DP_NA_Line--5...................  Name/Address Line 5....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      Alternate name/address
                                       format, fifth line.
33. DP_NA_Line--6...................  Name/Address Line 6....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      Alternate name/address
                                       format, sixth line.

[[Page 932]]

 
34. DP_Cur_Bal......................  Current Balance........  This balance should     Decimal (14,2).
                                      The current balance in    not be reduced by
                                       the account at the end   float or holds. For
                                       of business on the       CDs and time
                                       effective date of this   deposits, the balance
                                       file.                    should reflect the
                                                                principal balance
                                                                plus any interest
                                                                paid and available
                                                                for withdrawal not
                                                                already included in
                                                                the principal (do not
                                                                include accrued
                                                                interest). The total
                                                                of all current
                                                                balances in this file
                                                                should reconcile to
                                                                the total deposit
                                                                trial balance totals
                                                                or other summary
                                                                reconciliation of
                                                                deposits performed by
                                                                the institution.
35. DP_Int_Rate.....................  Interest Rate..........  Interest rate should    Decimal (10,9).
                                      The current interest      be expressed in
                                       rate in effect for       decimal format, i.e.,
                                       interest bearing         2.0% should be
                                       accounts.                represented as
                                                                0.020000000.
36. DP_Acc_Int......................  Accrued Interest.......  ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                      The amount of interest
                                       that has been earned
                                       but not yet paid to
                                       the account as of the
                                       date of the file.
37. DP_Lst_Int_Pd...................  Date Last Interest Paid  ......................  Date (YYYYMMDD).
                                      The date through which
                                       interest was last paid
                                       to the account.
38. DP_Lst_Deposit..................  Date Last Deposit......  For example, a deposit  Date (YYYYMMDD).
                                      The date of the last      that included checks
                                       deposit transaction      and/or cash.
                                       posted to the account.
39. DP_Int_Term_No..................  Interest Term Number...  ......................  Decimal (3,0).
                                      The number of months in
                                       the current interest
                                       term.
40. DP_Nxt_Mat......................  Date of Next Maturity..  For non-renewing CDs    Date (YYYYMMDD).
                                      For CD and time deposit   that have matured and
                                       accounts, the next       are waiting to be
                                       date the account is to   redeemed this date
                                       mature.                  may be in the past.
41. DP_Open_DT......................  Account Open Date......  If the account had      Date (YYYYMMDD).
                                      The date the account      previously been
                                       was opened.              closed and re-opened,
                                                                this should reflect
                                                                the most recent re-
                                                                opened date.
42. DP_Sweep_Code...................  Sweep Code.............  ......................  Character (1).
                                      Indicates if the
                                       account is a sweep
                                       account. Possible
                                       values are:
                                       Y = Yes.
                                       N = No.
43. DP_Hold_To_Post.................  Full Hold on the         ......................  Character (1).
                                       account: Indicator if
                                       all postings to this
                                       account are
                                       restricted. Possible
                                       values are:
                                       Y = Yes.
                                       N = No.
44. DP_Issue_Val_Amt................  Issued Value Amount....  For CDs only.           Decimal (14,2).
                                      The value of the
                                       current CD when issued.
45. DP_Int_CD_Cde...................  Type of Interest for CD  For CDs only.           Character (1).
                                      Possible values are:
                                       C = Rate
                                       Change Allowed.
                                       N = Rate
                                       Change Not Allowed.
                                       R = Change
                                       Rate to Default at
                                       Renewal.
                                       T = Rate
                                       Change Allowed Only
                                       During the Term.

[[Page 933]]

 
46. DP_IRA_Cde......................  IRA Code...............  Optional code field to  Character (1).
                                      The type of IRA.          be used if available
                                       Possible values are:     to help further
                                       C = Corporate    identify the types of
                                       Retirement               IRA accounts.
                                       E =
                                       Educational IRA.
                                       I = IRA
                                       Account.
                                       K = Keogh
                                       Account.
                                       R = Roth IRA
                                       Account.
                                       S = SEP
                                       Account.
                                       T =
                                       Transitional Roth IRA.
                                       V = Versa
                                       Account.
                                       H = Health
                                       Savings Account.
47. DP_Deposit_Class_Type...........  Deposit Class Type.....  The institution may     Character (10).
                                      The deposit class.        also use more or
                                       Possible values are:     fewer class types.
                                       RTL = Retail.
                                       FED = Federal
                                       government.
                                       STATE = State
                                       government.
                                       COMM =
                                       Commercial.
                                       CORP =
                                       Corporate.
                                       BANK = Bank
                                       Owned.
                                       DUE TO = Other
                                       Banks.
48. DP_Product_Class_Cde............  Deposit Class Codes....  These Product Class     Character (2).
                                      The deposit class         codes are used in
                                       codes. Possible values   conjunction with the
                                       are:                     Deposit Class Types
                                      RTL                       in field 51. This
                                       1 = Payable on   field is to be used
                                       Death.                   in concert with
                                       2 =              fields 12 and 13
                                       Individual.              identified above to
                                       3 = Living       enable the financial
                                       Trust--Intervivos or     institution to
                                       Family.                  capture more detailed
                                       4 =              information
                                       Irrevocable Trust        concerning account
                                       (includes Educational    types. It is the
                                       IRAs).                   intent of the FDIC to
                                       5 = Estate.      have the financial
                                       6 = Attorney     institution map its
                                       in Fact.                 detailed account
                                       7 = Minor--      types to the codes
                                       (includes all            identified in this
                                       variations of Uniform    field. The
                                       Gifts to Minor           institution may also
                                       Accounts).               use additional codes,
                                       8 = Bankruptcy   but in this event the
                                       Personal.                institution must
                                       9 = Pre-Need     supply the detailed
                                       Burial.                  description and code
                                       10 = Escrow.     value for each
                                       11 =             additional code used.
                                       Representative Payee/    If no additional
                                       Beneficiary.             account product type
                                       12 = Sole        detail is available
                                       Proprietorship.          then this field
                                       13 = Joint.      should be left blank.
                                       14 = Non-Minor
                                       Custodian/Guardian.
                                       15 = Other
                                       Retail.

[[Page 934]]

 
                                      FED
                                       16 = FHA.
                                       17 = Federal
                                       Government.
                                      STATE
                                       18 = City.
                                       19 = State.
                                       20 = County,
                                       Clerk of Court.
                                       21 = Other
                                       State.
                                      COMMERCIAL
                                       22 = Business
                                       Escrow.
                                       23 =
                                       Bankruptcy.
                                       24 = Club.
                                       25 = Church.
                                       26 =
                                       Unincorporated
                                       Association.
                                       27 =
                                       Unincorporated Non-
                                       Profit.
                                       28 = Other
                                       Commercial.
                                      CORPORATION
                                       29 = Business
                                       Trust.
                                       30 = Business
                                       Agent.
                                       31 = Business
                                       Guardian.
                                       32 =
                                       Incorporated
                                       Association.
                                       33 =
                                       Incorporated Non-
                                       Profit.
                                       33 =
                                       Incorporated Non-
                                       Profit.
                                       34 =
                                       Corporation.
                                       35 = Corporate
                                       Partnership.
                                       36 = Corporate
                                       Partnership Trust.
                                       37 = Corporate
                                       Agent.
                                       38 = Corporate
                                       Guardian.
                                       39 = Pre-Need
                                       Funeral Trust.
                                       40 = Limited
                                       Liability
                                       Incorporation.
                                       41 = LLC
                                       partnership.
                                       42 = Lawyer
                                       Trust.
                                       43 = Realtor
                                       Trust.
                                       44 = Other
                                       Corporation.
                                      BANK
                                       45 = Certified
                                       & Official Checks,
                                       Money Orders, Loan
                                       Disbursements Checks,
                                       and Expense Checks.
                                       46 = ATM
                                       Settlement.
                                       47 = Other
                                       Bank Owned Accounts.
                                      DUE TO (Other Banks)
                                       48 = Due to
                                       U.S. Banks.
                                       49 = Due to
                                       U.S. Branches of
                                       Foreign Banks.
                                       50 = Due to
                                       Other Depository
                                       Institutions.
                                       51 = Due to
                                       Foreign Banks.
                                       52 = Due to
                                       Foreign Branches of
                                       U.S. banks.
                                       53 = Due to
                                       Foreign Governments
                                       and Official
                                       Institutions.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



    Sec. Appendix D to Part 360--Sweep/Automated Credit Account File 
                                Structure

    This is the structure of the data file to provide information to the 
FDIC on funds residing in investment vehicles linked to each non-closed 
deposit account or sub-account: (1) Involved in sweep activity where the 
sweep investment vehicle is not a deposit and is reflected on the books 
and records of the covered institution or (2) which accepts automated 
credits. A single record should be used for each instance where funds 
affiliated with the deposit account are held in an alternative 
investment vehicle. For any alternative investment vehicle, a separate 
account may or may not exist. If an account

[[Page 935]]

exists for the investment vehicle, it should be noted in the record. If 
no account exists, then a null value for the Sweep/Automated Credit 
Account Identifiers should be provided, but the remainder of the data 
fields defined below should be populated.
    For data provided in the Sweep/Automated Credit Account File, the 
total account balances and the number of accounts must be reconciled to 
subsidiary system control totals. The file will be in a tab- or pipe-
delimited ASCII format. The files will be encrypted using an FDIC-
supplied algorithm. The FDIC will transmit the encryption algorithm over 
FDICconnect.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                  Field description            Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. DP_Acct_Identifier...............  Account Identifier.....  The Account Identifier  Character (25).
                                      The primary field used    may be composed of
                                       to identify the          more than one
                                       account from which       physical data
                                       funds are swept or       element. If multiple
                                       debited. The field may   fields are required
                                       be the Account number.   to identify the
                                                                account, data should
                                                                be placed in separate
                                                                fields and the FDIC
                                                                instructed how these
                                                                fields are combined
                                                                to uniquely identify
                                                                the account.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier--2............  Account Identifier--2..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element used to
                                       identify the account
                                       from which funds are
                                       swept or debited.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier--3............  Account Identifier--3..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account
                                       from which funds are
                                       swept or debited.
4. DP_Acct_Identifier--4............  Account Identifier--4..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element used to
                                       identify the account
                                       from which funds are
                                       swept or debited.
5. DP_Acct_Identifier--5............  Account Identifier--5..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account
                                       from which funds are
                                       swept or debited.
6. DP_Sub_Acct_Identifier...........  Sub-Account Identifier.  The Sub-Account         Character (25).
                                      If available, the sub-    Identifier may
                                       account identifier for   identify separate
                                       the account.             deposits tied to this
                                                                account where there
                                                                are different
                                                                processing parameters
                                                                such as interest
                                                                rates or maturity
                                                                dates, but all owners
                                                                are the same.
7. SW_Acct_Identifier...............  Sweep/Automated Credit   Funds may be swept      Character (25).
                                       Account Identifier.      into an investment
                                      The primary field used    vehicle not
                                       to identify the          represented as an
                                       account into which       account. In this case
                                       funds are swept or       this field should be
                                       credited. This field     a null value.
                                       may be the Account      The Sweep/Automated
                                       Number.                  Credit Account
                                                                Identifier may be
                                                                composed of more than
                                                                one physical data
                                                                element. If multiple
                                                                fields are required
                                                                to identify the
                                                                account, data should
                                                                be placed in separate
                                                                fields and the FDIC
                                                                instructed how these
                                                                fields are combined
                                                                to uniquely identify
                                                                the account..
8. SW_Acct_Identifier--2............  Sweep/Automated Credit   ......................  Character (25).
                                       Account Identifier--2.
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element of the
                                       account identifier
                                       used to identify the
                                       account into which
                                       funds are swept or
                                       credited.
9. SW_Acct_Identifier--3............  Sweep/Automated Credit   ......................  Character (25).
                                       Account Identifier--3.
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element of the account
                                       identifier used to
                                       identify the account
                                       into which funds are
                                       swept or credited.

[[Page 936]]

 
10. SW_Acct_Identifier--4...........  Sweep/Automated Credit   ......................  Character (25).
                                       Account Identifier--4.
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element of the
                                       account identifier
                                       used to identify the
                                       account into which
                                       funds are swept or
                                       credited.
11. SW_Acct_Identifier--5...........  Sweep/Automated Credit   ......................  Character (25).
                                       Account Identifier-5.
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element of the account
                                       identifier used to
                                       identify the account
                                       into which funds are
                                       swept or credited.
12. SW_Sub_Acct_Identifier..........  Sweep/Automated Credit   ......................  Character (25).
                                       Sub-Account Identifier.
                                      If available, the sub-
                                       account identifier for
                                       the account.
13. SW_Type.........................  Sweep/Automated Credit   The investment          Character (3).
                                       Type.                    vehicle. Possible
                                                                values are:
                                                                RE =
                                                                Repurchase Agreement.
                                                                DD = Deposit
                                                                Held in a Domestic
                                                                Office.
                                                                DF = Deposit
                                                                Held in a Foreign
                                                                Office.
                                                                IBF = Deposit
                                                                Held in an
                                                                International Banking
                                                                Facility.
                                                                AI = Deposit
                                                                Held in an affiliated
                                                                depository
                                                                institution.
                                                                FF = Federal
                                                                Funds.
                                                                CP =
                                                                Commercial Paper.
                                                                OT = Other.
14. SW_Inv_Amount...................  Fund Balance in Sweep/   ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                       Automated Credit
                                       Investment Vehicle.
                                      Dollar amount residing
                                       in the investment
                                       vehicle.
15. SW_Currency_Type................  Currency Type..........  ......................  Character (3).
                                      The ISO 4217 currency
                                       code.
16. SW_Hold_Amount..................  FDIC Hold Amount.......  ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                      Amount of FDIC hold on
                                       funds residing in the
                                       investment vehicle.
17. SW_Sweep_Interval...............  Sweep/Investment         ......................  Character (2).
                                       Frequency.
                                      The frequency with
                                       which the sweep or
                                       investment occurs.
                                       Possible values are:
                                       D = Daily.
                                       W = Weekly.
                                       BW = Bi-
                                       Weekly.
                                       M = Monthly.
                                       BM = Bi-
                                       Monthly.
                                       Q = Quarterly.
                                       O = Other.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



            Sec. Appendix E to Part 360--Hold File Structure

    This is the structure of the data file to provide information to the 
FDIC for each legal or collateral hold placed on a deposit account or 
sub-account. If data or information are not maintained or do not apply, 
a null value in the appropriate field should be indicated. The file will 
be in a tab-or pipe-delimited ASCII format. Each file name will contain 
the institution's FDIC Certificate Number, an indication that it is a 
hold data file type and the date of the extract. The files will be 
encrypted using an FDIC-supplied algorithm. The FDIC will transmit the 
encryption algorithm over FDICconnect.

[[Page 937]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                  Field description            Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. DP_Acct_Identifier...............  Account Identifier.....  The Account Identifier  Character (25).
                                      The primary field used    may be composed of
                                       to identify the          more than one
                                       account. This field      physical data
                                       may be the Account       element. If multiple
                                       Number.                  fields are required
                                                                to identify the
                                                                account, data should
                                                                be placed in separate
                                                                fields and the FDIC
                                                                instructed how these
                                                                fields are combined
                                                                to uniquely identify
                                                                the account.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier--2............  Account Identifier--2..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element used to
                                       identify the account.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier--3............  Account Identifier--3..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
4. DP_Acct_Identifier--4............  Account Identifier--4..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element used to
                                       identify the account.
5. DP_Acct_Identifier--5............  Account Identifier--5..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
6. DP_Sub_Acct_Identifier...........  Sub-Account Identifier.  The Sub-Account         Character (25).
                                      If available, the sub-    Identifier may
                                       account identifier for   identify separate
                                       the account.             deposits tied to this
                                                                account where there
                                                                are different
                                                                processing parameters
                                                                such as interest
                                                                rates or maturity
                                                                dates, but all owners
                                                                are the same.
7. HD_Hold_Amt......................  Hold Amount............  ......................  Decimal (14,2).
                                      Dollar amount of the
                                       hold.
8. HD_Hold_Reason...................  Hold Reason............  ......................  Character (2).
                                      Reason for the hold.
                                       Possible values are:
                                       LN = Loan
                                       Collateral Hold.
                                       LG = Court
                                       Order Hold.
                                       FD = FDIC hold
                                       OT = Other (do
                                       not include daily
                                       operational type
                                       holds).
9. HD_Hold_Desc.....................  Hold Description.......  ......................  Character (255).
                                      Description of the hold
                                       available on the
                                       system.
10. HD_Hold_Start_Dt................  Hold Start Date........  ......................  Date (YYYYMMDD).
                                      The date the hold was
                                       initiated..
11. HD_Hold_Exp_Dt..................  Hold Expiration Date...  ......................  Date (YYYYMMDD)
                                      The date the hold is to
                                       expire.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



          Sec. Appendix F to Part 360--Customer File Structure

    This is the structure of the data file to provide to the FDIC 
information related to each customer who has an account or sub-account 
reported in the deposit data or sweep/automated credit account file. If 
data or information are not maintained or do not apply, a null value in 
the appropriate field should be indicated. The file will be in a tab-or 
pipe-delimited ASCII format. Each file name will contain the 
institution's FDIC Certificate Number, an indication that it is a 
customer file type and the date of the extract. The files will be 
encrypted using an FDIC-supplied algorithm. The FDIC will transmit the 
encryption algorithm over FDICconnect.

    Note: Each record must contain the customer's name and permanent 
legal address. Fields 4-12 relate to the customer name for individuals 
only. Fields 13-14 relate to the customer name for entities other than 
individuals. Some systems provide for separate fields for name, street 
address, city, state, ZIP, and country, all of which are parsed out. 
Others systems may simply provide multiple lines for name, street 
address, city, state, ZIP, with no distinction. In this case, certain 
name and address data elements must be parsed and provided in the 
appropriate fields.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                  Field description            Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CS_Cust_Identifier...............  Customer Identifier....  ......................  Character (25).

[[Page 938]]

 
                                      The unique field used
                                       by the institution to
                                       identify the customer.
2. CS_Tax_ID........................  Customer Tax ID Number.  Hyphens are optional    Character (11).
                                                                in this field.
                                      The tax identification
                                       number on record for
                                       the customer.
3. CS_Tax_Code......................  Customer Tax ID Code...  ......................  Character (1).
                                      The type of the tax
                                       identification number
                                       of the customer.
                                       Possible values are:
                                       S = Social
                                       Security Number.
                                       T = Federal
                                       Tax Identification
                                       Number.
                                       O = Other.....
4. CS_Name_Line--1..................  Individual Customer      ......................  Character (100).
                                       Name Line 1.
                                      If available, the free-
                                       form name narrative of
                                       the customer, first
                                       line.
5. CS_Name_Line--2..................  Individual Customer      ......................  Character (100).
                                       Name Line 2.
                                      If available, the free-
                                       form name narrative of
                                       the customer, second
                                       line.
6. CS_Last_Name.....................  Individual Customer      This field is required  Character (50).
                                       Last Name.               if the data element
                                      For individuals, the      is in the
                                       customer's last name.    institution's
                                                                records. If
                                                                necessary, data
                                                                should be parsed from
                                                                fields 4 or 5 to
                                                                obtain this element.
7. CS_First_Name....................  Individual Customer      This field is required  Character (50).
                                       First Name.              if the data element
                                      For individuals, the      is in the
                                       customer's first name.   institution's
                                                                records. If
                                                                necessary, data
                                                                should be parsed from
                                                                fields 4 or 5 to
                                                                obtain this element.
8. CS_Middle_Name...................  Individual Customer      This field is required  Character (50).
                                       Middle Name.             if the data element
                                      For individuals, the      is in the
                                       customer's middle name.  institution's
                                                                records. If
                                                                necessary, data
                                                                should be parsed from
                                                                fields 4 or 5 to
                                                                obtain this element.
9. CS_Suffix........................  Individual Professional  This field is required  Character (20).
                                       Suffix.                  if the data element
                                      For individuals, the      is in the
                                       suffix designating       institution's
                                       customer's academic,     records. If
                                       professional or          necessary, data
                                       honorary status, such    should be parsed from
                                       as Esq., Ph.D., M.D.,    fields 4 or 5 to
                                       and D.D.S.               obtain this element.
10. CS_Generation...................  Individual Generational  This field is required  Character (10).
                                       Suffix.                  if the data element
                                      For individuals, the      is in the
                                       suffix designating the   institution's
                                       customer's               records. If
                                       generational status,     necessary, data
                                       such as Jr., Sr. or      should be parsed from
                                       III.                     fields 4 or 5 to
                                                                obtain this element.
11. CS_Prefix.......................  Individual Customer      This field is required  Character (10).
                                       Prefix.                  if the data element
                                      For individuals, the      is in the
                                       prefix of the            institution's
                                       customer, such as        records. If
                                       Rev., Dr., Mrs., Mr.     necessary, data
                                       or Ms.                   should be parsed from
                                                                fields 4 or 5 to
                                                                obtain this element.
12. CS_Birth_Dt.....................  Individual Customer      ......................  Date (YYYYMMDD).
                                       Birth Date.
                                      For individuals, the
                                       customer's birth date.
13. CS_Ent_Name_Line--1.............  Entity Name Line 1.....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      For entities other than
                                       individuals, the free-
                                       form name narrative of
                                       the customer, first
                                       line.
14. CS_Ent_Name_Line--2.............  Entity Name Line 2.....  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available for
                                       entities other than
                                       individuals, the free-
                                       form name narrative of
                                       the customer, second
                                       line.
15. CS_Nar_Addr_Line--1.............  Customer Address Line 1  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the free-
                                       form permanent legal
                                       address narrative for
                                       the customer, line one.
16. CS_Nar_Addr_Line--2.............  Customer Address Line 2  ......................  Character (100).
                                      If available, the free-
                                       form permanent legal
                                       address narrative of
                                       the customer, line two.
17. CS_Nar_Addr_Line--3.............  Customer Address Line 3  ......................  Character (100).

[[Page 939]]

 
                                      If available, the free-
                                       form permanent legal
                                       address narrative of
                                       the customer, line
                                       three.
18. CS_Street_Address--1............  Street Address Line 1..  This field is           Character (100).
                                      The permanent legal       required. If
                                       address of the           necessary, data
                                       customer, line one.      should be parsed from
                                                                fields 16 or 17 to
                                                                obtain this element.
19. CS_Street_Address--2............  Street Address Line 2..  This field is           Character (100).
                                      The permanent legal       required. If
                                       address of the           necessary, data
                                       customer, line two.      should be parsed from
                                                                fields 16 or 17 to
                                                                obtain this element.
20. CS_City.........................  City...................  This field is           Character (25).
                                      The city associated       required. If
                                       with the permanent       necessary, data
                                       legal address.           should be parsed from
                                                                fields 16 or 17 to
                                                                obtain this element.
21. CS_State........................  State..................  This field is           Character (2).
                                      The state abbreviation    required. If
                                       associated with the      necessary, data
                                       permanent legal          should be parsed from
                                       address.                 fields 16 or 17 to
                                                                obtain this element.
                                                                Use a two-character
                                                                state code (official
                                                                U.S. Postal Service
                                                                abbreviations).
22. CS_ZIP..........................  ZIP....................  This field is           Character (10).
                                      The ZIP + 4 code          required. If
                                       associated with the      necessary, data
                                       permanent legal          should be parsed from
                                       address.                 fields 16 or 17 to
                                                                obtain this element.
                                                                If the `` + 4'' code
                                                                is not available,
                                                                provide only the 5-
                                                                digit ZIP code.
                                                                Hyphens are optional
                                                                in this field.
23. CS_Country......................  Country................  This field is           Character (10).
                                      The country associated    required. If
                                       with the permanent       necessary, data
                                       legal address.           should be parsed from
                                                                fields 16 or 17 to
                                                                obtain this element.
                                                                Provide the name of
                                                                the country or the
                                                                standard IRS country
                                                                code.
24. CS_Telephone....................  Customer Telephone       ......................  Character (20).
                                       Number.
                                      The telephone number on
                                       record for the
                                       customer.
25. CS_Email........................  Customer Email Address.  ......................  Character (150).
                                      The e-mail address on
                                       record for the
                                       customer.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



    Sec. Appendix G to Part 360--Deposit-Customer Join File Structure

    This is the structure of the data file to provide to the FDIC 
information necessary to link the records in the deposit and customer 
files. If data or information are not maintained or do not apply, a null 
value in the appropriate field should be indicated. The file will be in 
a tab- or pipe-delimited ASCII format. Each file name will contain the 
institution's FDIC Certificate Number, an indication that it is a join 
file type and the date of the extract. The files will be encrypted using 
an FDIC-supplied algorithm. The FDIC will transmit the encryption 
algorithm over FDICconnect.
    The deposit-customer join file will have one or more records for 
each deposit account, depending on the number of relationships to each 
account. A simple individual account, for example, will be associated 
with only one record in the deposit-customer join file indicating the 
owner of the account. A joint account with two owners will be associated 
with two records in the deposit-customer join file, one for each owner. 
The deposit-customer join file will contain other records associated 
with a deposit account to designate, among other things, beneficiaries, 
custodians, trustees and agents. This methodology allows the FDIC to 
know all of the possible relationships for an individual account and 
also whether a single customer is involved in many accounts.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Field name                FDIC field description         Comments                   Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CS_Cust_Identifier...............  Customer Identifier....  ......................  Character (25).

[[Page 940]]

 
                                      The unique field used
                                       by the institution to
                                       identify the customer.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier...............  Account Identifier.....  The Account Identifier  Character (25).
                                      The primary field used    may be composed of
                                       to identify the          more than one
                                       account. This field      physical data
                                       may be the Account       element. If multiple
                                       Number.                  fields are required
                                                                to identify the
                                                                account, the data
                                                                should be placed in
                                                                separate fields and
                                                                the FDIC instructed
                                                                how these fields are
                                                                combined to uniquely
                                                                identify the account.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier--2............  Account Identifier--2..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       second element used to
                                       identify the account.
4. DP_Acct_Identifier--3............  Account Identifier--3..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the third
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
5. DP_Acct_Identifier--4............  Account Identifier--4..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the
                                       fourth element used to
                                       identify the account.
6. DP_Acct_Identifier--5............  Account Identifier--5..  ......................  Character (25).
                                      If necessary, the fifth
                                       element used to
                                       identify the account.
7. DP_Sub_Acct_Identifier...........  Sub-Account Identifier.  The Sub-Account         Character (25).
                                      If available, the sub-    Identifier may
                                       account identifier for   identify separate
                                       the account.             deposits tied to this
                                                                account where there
                                                                are different
                                                                processing parameters
                                                                such as interest
                                                                rates or maturity
                                                                dates, but all owners
                                                                are the same.
8. CS_Rel_Code......................  Relationship Code......  Institutions must map   Character (5).
                                      The code indicating how   their relationship
                                       the customer is          codes to the codes in
                                       related to the           the list to the left.
                                       account. Possible        If the institution
                                       values are:              maintains more
                                       ADM =            relationships they
                                       Administrator.           must supply the
                                       AGT = Agent/     additional
                                       Representative.          relationship codes
                                       ATF = Attorney   being utilized along
                                       For.                     with the code
                                       AUT =            definition.
                                       Authorized Signer.
                                       BNF =
                                       Beneficiary.
                                       CSV =
                                       Conservator.
                                       CUS =
                                       Custodian.
                                       DBA = Doing
                                       Business As.
                                       EXC = Executor
                                       GDN = Guardian
                                       MIN = Minor...
                                       PRI = Primary
                                       Owner.
                                       SEC =
                                       Secondary Owner(s).
                                       TTE = Trustee.
9. CS_Bene_Code.....................  Beneficiary Type Code..  This includes           Character (1).
                                      If the customer is        beneficiaries on
                                       considered a             retirement accounts,
                                       beneficiary, the type    trust accounts, minor
                                       of account associated    accounts, and payable-
                                       with this customer.      on-death accounts.
                                       Possible values are:
                                       I = IRA.......
                                       T = Trust--
                                       Irrevocable.
                                       R = Trust--
                                       Revocable.
                                       M = Uniform
                                       Gift to Minor.
                                       P = Payable on
                                       Death.
                                       O = Other.....
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



Sec. Appendix H to Part 360--Possible File Combinations for Deposit
Data

    A covered institution must provide deposit data using separate 
deposit, sweep/automated credit, hold, customer, and deposit-customer 
join files. The simplest file structure involves providing one of each 
file. This basic file format is shown in Figure 1.

[[Page 941]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JY08.000

    Multiple combinations of deposit, sweep/automated credit, hold, 
customer, and deposit-customer join files are permissible, but only in 
the following circumstances:
    1. Each separate deposit file must have companion sweep/automated 
credit and hold files covering the same deposit accounts.
    2. A single customer file may be submitted covering customers 
affiliated with deposit accounts in one or more deposit files as long as 
the customer file contains information on all of the customers 
affiliated with the deposit files.
    3. Several customer files may be submitted as long as each separate 
customer file contains information on all of the customers affiliated 
with the associated deposit files.
    Figure 2 shows a permissible file configuration using a single 
Customer File affiliated with Deposit File A and Deposit File B. As 
required, Deposit File A has a companion Sweep/Automated Credit File A 
and Hold File A. The same is true for Deposit File B.
    Another permissible combination of files is shown in Figure 3, which 
is a variation of the basic data file structure shown in Figure 1.

[[Page 942]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JY08.001


[[Page 943]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR17JY08.002


[73 FR 41197, July 17, 2008]



PART 361_MINORITY AND WOMEN OUTREACH PROGRAM CONTRACTING--
Table of Contents



Sec.
361.1  Why do minority- and women-owned businesses need this outreach 
          regulation?
361.2  Why does the FDIC have this outreach program?
361.3  Who may participate in this outreach program?
361.4  What contracts are eligible for this outreach program?
361.5  What are the FDIC's oversight and monitoring responsibilities in 
          administering this program?

[[Page 944]]

361.6  What outreach efforts are included in this program?

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1833e.

    Source: 65 FR 31253, May 17, 2000, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 361.1  Why do minority- and women-owned businesses need this
outreach regulation?

    The purpose of the FDIC Minority and Women Outreach Program (MWOP) 
is to ensure that minority- and women-owned businesses (MWOBs) are given 
the opportunity to participate fully in all contracts entered into by 
the FDIC.



Sec. 361.2  Why does the FDIC have this outreach program?

    It is the policy of the FDIC that minorities and women, and 
businesses owned by them have the maximum practicable opportunity to 
participate in contracts awarded by the FDIC.



Sec. 361.3  Who may participate in this outreach program?

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) Minority has the same meaning as defined by the Small Business 
Administration at 13 CFR 124.103(b).
    (b) Legal Services means all services provided by attorneys or law 
firms (including services of support staff).



Sec. 361.4  What contracts are eligible for this outreach program?

    The FDIC outreach program applies to all contracts entered into by 
the FDIC. The outreach program is incorporated into FDIC policies and 
guidelines governing contracting and the retention of legal services.



Sec. 361.5  What are the FDIC's oversight and monitoring 
responsibilities in administering this program?

    (a) The FDIC Office of Minority and Women Inclusion (OMWI) has 
overall responsibility for nationwide outreach oversight, which 
includes, but is not limited to, the monitoring, review and 
interpretation of relevant regulations. In addition, the OMWI is 
responsible for providing the FDIC with technical assistance and 
guidance to facilitate the identification, registration, and 
solicitation of MWOBs.
    (b) Each FDIC office that performs contracting or outreach 
activities will submit information to the OMWI on a quarterly basis, or 
upon request. Quarterly submissions will include, at a minimum, 
statistical information on contract awards and solicitations by 
designated demographic categories.

[65 FR 31253, May 17, 2000, as amended at 80 FR 62445, Oct. 16, 2015]



Sec. 361.6  What outreach efforts are included in this program?

    (a) Each office engaged in contracting with the private sector will 
designate one or more MWOP coordinators. The coordinators will perform 
outreach activities for MWOP and act as liaison between the FDIC and the 
public on MWOP issues. On a quarterly basis, or as requested by the 
OMWI, the coordinators will report to the OMWI on their implementation 
of the outreach program.
    (b) Outreach includes the identification and registration of MWOBs 
who can provide goods and services utilized by the FDIC. This includes 
distributing information concerning the MWOP.
    (c) The identification of MWOBs for the provision of legal and non-
legal services will primarily be accomplished by:
    (1) Obtaining various lists and directories of MWOBs maintained by 
other federal, state, and local governmental agencies;
    (2) Participating in conventions, seminars and professional meetings 
comprised of, or attended predominately by, MWOBs;
    (3) Conducting seminars, meetings, workshops and other various 
functions to promote the identification and registration of MWOBs;
    (4) Placing MWOP promotional advertisements indicating opportunities 
with the FDIC in minority- and women-owned media; and
    (5) Monitoring to assure that FDIC staff interfacing with the 
contracting community are knowledgeable of, and actively promoting, the 
MWOP.

[65 FR 31253, May 17, 2000, as amended at 80 FR 62445, Oct. 16, 2015]

[[Page 945]]



PART 362_ACTIVITIES OF INSURED STATE BANKS AND INSURED SAVINGS 
ASSOCIATIONS--Table of Contents



               Subpart A_Activities of Insured State Banks

Sec.
362.1  Purpose and scope.
362.2  Definitions.
362.3  Activities of insured State banks.
362.4  Subsidiaries of insured State banks.
362.5  Approvals previously granted.

 Subpart B_Safety and Soundness Rules Governing Insured State Nonmember 
                                  Banks

362.6  Purpose and scope.
362.7  Definitions.
362.8  Restrictions on activities of insured State nonmember banks 
          affiliated with certain securities companies.

       Subpart C_Activities of Insured State Savings Associations

362.9  Purpose and scope.
362.10  Definitions.
362.11  Activities of insured savings associations.
362.12  Service corporations of insured State savings associations.
362.13  Approvals previously granted.

Subpart D_Acquiring, Establishing, or Conducting New Activities Through 
             a Subsidiary by an Insured Savings Association

362.14  Purpose and scope.
362.15  Acquiring or establishing a subsidiary; conducting new 
          activities through a subsidiary.

    Subpart E_Financial Subsidiaries of Insured State Nonmember Banks

362.16  Purpose and scope.
362.17  Definitions.
362.18  Financial subsidiaries of insured state nonmember banks.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1816, 1818, 1819(a)(Tenth), 1828(j), 1828(m), 
1828a, 1831a, 1831e, 1831w, 1843(l).

    Source: 63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, unless otherwise noted.



               Subpart A_Activities of Insured State Banks



Sec. 362.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart, along with the notice and application procedures 
in subpart G of part 303 of this chapter, implements the provisions of 
section 24 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831a) that 
restrict and prohibit insured State banks and their subsidiaries from 
engaging in activities and investments that are not permissible for 
national banks and their subsidiaries. The phrase ``activity permissible 
for a national bank'' means any activity authorized for national banks 
under any statute including the National Bank Act (12 U.S.C. 21 et 
seq.), as well as activities recognized as permissible for a national 
bank in regulations, official circulars, bulletins, orders or written 
interpretations issued by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency 
(OCC).
    (b) This subpart does not cover the following activities:
    (1) Activities conducted other than ``as principal,'' defined for 
purposes of this subpart as activities conducted as agent for a 
customer, conducted in a brokerage, custodial, advisory, or 
administrative capacity, or conducted as trustee, or in any 
substantially similar capacity. For example, this subpart does not cover 
acting solely as agent for the sale of insurance, securities, real 
estate, or travel services; nor does it cover acting as trustee, 
providing personal financial planning advice, or safekeeping services;
    (2) Interests in real estate in which the real property is used or 
intended in good faith to be used within a reasonable time by an insured 
State bank or its subsidiaries as offices or related facilities for the 
conduct of its business or future expansion of its business or used as 
public welfare investments of a type permissible for national banks; and
    (3) Equity investments acquired in connection with debts previously 
contracted (DPC) if the insured State bank does not hold the property 
for speculation and takes only such actions as would be permissible for 
a national bank's DPC. The bank must dispose of the property within the 
shorter of the period set by Federal law for national banks or the 
period allowed under State law. For real estate, national banks may not 
hold DPC for more than 10 years. For equity securities, national banks 
must generally divest

[[Page 946]]

DPC as soon as possible consistent with obtaining a reasonable return.
    (c) A subsidiary of an insured state bank may not engage in real 
estate investment activities that are not permissible for a subsidiary 
of a national bank unless the bank does so through a subsidiary of which 
the bank is a majority owner, is in compliance with applicable capital 
standards, and the FDIC has determined that the activity poses no 
significant risk to the appropriate deposit insurance fund. This subpart 
provides standards for majority-owned subsidiaries of insured state 
banks engaging in real estate investment activities that are not 
permissible for a subsidiary of a national bank.
    (d) The FDIC intends to allow insured State banks and their 
subsidiaries to undertake only safe and sound activities and investments 
that do not present significant risks to the Deposit Insurance Fund and 
that are consistent with the purposes of Federal deposit insurance and 
other applicable law. This subpart does not authorize any insured State 
bank to make investments or to conduct activities that are not 
authorized or that are prohibited by either State or Federal law.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001; 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 362.2  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart, the following definitions will 
apply:
    (a) Bank, State bank, savings association, State savings 
association, depository institution, insured depository institution, 
insured State bank, Federal savings association, and insured State 
nonmember bank shall each have the same respective meaning contained in 
section 3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    (b) Activity means the conduct of business by a state-chartered 
depository institution, including acquiring or retaining an equity 
investment or other investment.
    (c) Change in control means any transaction:
    (1) By a State bank or its holding company for which a notice is 
required to be filed with the FDIC, or the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System (FRB), pursuant to section 7(j) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1817(j)) except a transaction that is 
presumed to be an acquisition of control under the FDIC's or FRB's 
regulations implementing section 7(j);
    (2) As a result of which a State bank eligible for the exception 
described in Sec. 362.3(a)(2)(iii) is acquired by or merged into a 
depository institution that is not eligible for the exception, or as a 
result of which its holding company is acquired by or merged into a 
holding company which controls one or more bank subsidiaries not 
eligible for the exception; or
    (3) In which control of the State bank is acquired by a bank holding 
company in a transaction requiring FRB approval under section 3 of the 
Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1842), other than a one bank holding 
company formation in which all or substantially all of the shares of the 
holding company will be owned by persons who were shareholders of the 
bank.
    (d) Company means any corporation, partnership, limited liability 
company, business trust, association, joint venture, pool, syndicate or 
other similar business organization.
    (e) Control means the power to vote, directly or indirectly, 25 
percent or more of any class of the voting securities of a company, the 
ability to control in any manner the election of a majority of a 
company's directors or trustees, or the ability to exercise a 
controlling influence over the management and policies of a company.
    (f) Convert its charter means an insured State bank undergoes any 
transaction that causes the bank to operate under a different form of 
charter than it had as of December 19, 1991, except a change from mutual 
to stock form shall not be considered a charter conversion.
    (g) Equity investment means an ownership interest in any company; 
any membership interest that includes a voting right in any company; any 
interest in real estate; any transaction which in substance falls into 
any of these categories even though it may be

[[Page 947]]

structured as some other form of business transaction; and includes an 
equity security. The term ``equity investment'' does not include any of 
the foregoing if the interest is taken as security for a loan.
    (h) Equity security means any stock (other than adjustable rate 
preferred stock, money market (auction rate) preferred stock, or other 
newly developed instrument determined by the FDIC to have the character 
of debt securities), certificate of interest or participation in any 
profit-sharing agreement, collateral-trust certificate, preorganization 
certificate or subscription, transferable share, investment contract, or 
voting-trust certificate; any security immediately convertible at the 
option of the holder without payment of substantial additional 
consideration into such a security; any security carrying any warrant or 
right to subscribe to or purchase any such security; and any certificate 
of interest or participation in, temporary or interim certificate for, 
or receipt for any of the foregoing.
    (i) Extension of credit, executive officer, director, principal 
shareholder, and related interest each has the same respective meaning 
as is applicable for the purposes of section 22(h) of the Federal 
Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 375b) and Sec. 337.3 of this chapter.
    (j) Institution shall have the same meaning as ``state-chartered 
depository institution.''
    (k) Majority-owned subsidiary means any corporation in which the 
parent insured State bank owns a majority of the outstanding voting 
stock.
    (l) National securities exchange means a securities exchange that is 
registered as a national securities exchange by the Securities and 
Exchange Commission pursuant to section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act 
of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78f) and the National Market System, i.e., the top 
tier of the National Association of Securities Dealers Automated 
Quotation System.
    (m) Real estate investment activity means any interest in real 
estate (other than as security for a loan) held directly or indirectly 
that is not permissible for a national bank.
    (n) Residents of the state includes individuals living in the State, 
individuals employed in the State, any person to whom the company 
provided insurance as principal without interruption since such person 
resided in or was employed in the State, and companies or partnerships 
incorporated in, organized under the laws of, licensed to do business 
in, or having an office in the State.
    (o) Security has the same meaning as it has in part 344 of this 
chapter.
    (p) Significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund shall be 
understood to be present whenever the FDIC determines there is a high 
probability that the Deposit Insurance Fund administered by the FDIC may 
suffer a loss. Such risk may be present either when an activity 
contributes or may contribute to the decline in condition of a 
particular state-chartered depository institution or when a type of 
activity is found by the FDIC to contribute or potentially contribute to 
the deterioration of the overall condition of the banking system.
    (q) State-chartered depository institution means any State bank or 
State savings association insured by the FDIC.
    (r) Subsidiary means any company that is owned or controlled 
directly or indirectly by one or more insured depository institutions.
    (s) Tier one capital has the same meaning as set forth in part 324 
or 325 of this chapter, as applicable, for an insured State nonmember 
bank. For other state-chartered depository institutions, the term ``tier 
one capital'' has the same meaning as set forth in the capital 
regulations adopted by the appropriate Federal banking agency.
    (t) Well-capitalized has the same meaning set forth in part 324 or 
325 of this chapter, as applicable, of this chapter for an insured State 
nonmember bank. For other state-chartered depository institutions, the 
term ``well-capitalized'' has the same meaning as set forth in the 
capital regulations adopted by the appropriate Federal banking agency.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001; 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006; 78 FR 55596, Sept. 10, 2013]

[[Page 948]]



Sec. 362.3  Activities of insured State banks.

    (a) Equity investments--(1) Prohibited equity investments. No 
insured State bank may directly or indirectly acquire or retain as 
principal any equity investment of a type that is not permissible for a 
national bank unless one of the exceptions in paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section applies.
    (2) Exceptions-- (i) Equity investment in majority-owned 
subsidiaries. An insured State bank may acquire or retain an equity 
investment in a subsidiary of which the bank is a majority owner, 
provided that the subsidiary is engaging in activities that are allowed 
pursuant to the provisions of or by application under Sec. 362.4(b).
    (ii) Investments in qualified housing projects. An insured State 
bank may invest as a limited partner in a partnership, or as a 
noncontrolling interest holder of a limited liability company, the sole 
purpose of which is to invest in the acquisition, rehabilitation, or new 
construction of a qualified housing project, provided that the bank's 
aggregate investment (including legally binding commitments) does not 
exceed, when made, 2 percent of total assets as of the date of the 
bank's most recent consolidated report of condition prior to making the 
investment. For the purposes of this paragraph (a)(2)(ii), Aggregate 
investment means the total book value of the bank's investment in the 
real estate calculated in accordance with the instructions for the 
preparation of the consolidated report of condition. Qualified housing 
project means residential real estate intended to primarily benefit 
lower income persons throughout the period of the bank's investment 
including any project that has received an award of low income housing 
tax credits under section 42 of the Internal Revenue Code (26 U.S.C. 42) 
(such as a reservation or allocation of credits) from a State or local 
housing credit agency. A residential real estate project that does not 
qualify for the tax credit under section 42 of the Internal Revenue Code 
will qualify under this exception if 50 percent or more of the housing 
units are to be occupied by lower income persons. A project will be 
considered residential despite the fact that some portion of the total 
square footage of the project is utilized for commercial purposes, 
provided that such commercial use is not the primary purpose of the 
project. Lower income has the same meaning as ``low income'' and 
``moderate income'' as defined for the purposes of Sec. 345.12(n) (1) 
and (2) of this chapter.
    (iii) Grandfathered investments in common or preferred stock; shares 
of investment companies-- (A) General. An insured State bank that is 
located in a State which as of September 30, 1991, authorized investment 
in:
    (1)(i) Common or preferred stock listed on a national securities 
exchange (listed stock); or
    (ii) Shares of an investment company registered under the Investment 
Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.) (registered shares); and
    (2) Which during the period beginning on September 30, 1990, and 
ending on November 26, 1991, made or maintained an investment in listed 
stock or registered shares, may retain whatever lawfully acquired listed 
stock or registered shares it held and may continue to acquire listed 
stock and/or registered shares, provided that the bank files a notice in 
accordance with section 24(f)(6) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act in 
compliance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and the FDIC processes the 
notice without objection under Sec. 303.122 of this chapter. Approval 
will be granted only if the FDIC determines that acquiring or retaining 
the stock or shares does not pose a significant risk to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund. Approval may be subject to whatever conditions or 
restrictions the FDIC determines are necessary or appropriate.
    (B) Loss of grandfather exception. The exception for grandfathered 
investments under paragraph (a)(2)(iii)(A) of this section shall no 
longer apply if the bank converts its charter or the bank or its parent 
holding company undergoes a change in control. If any of these events 
occur, the bank may retain its existing investments unless directed by 
the FDIC or other applicable authority to divest the listed stock or 
registered shares.
    (C) Maximum permissible investment. A bank's aggregate investment in 
listed

[[Page 949]]

stock and registered shares under paragraph (a)(2)(iii)(A) of this 
section shall in no event exceed, when made, 100 percent of the bank's 
tier one capital as measured on the bank's most recent consolidated 
report of condition (call report) prior to making any such investment. 
The lower of the bank's cost as determined in accordance with call 
report instructions or the market value of the listed stock and shares 
shall be used to determine compliance. The FDIC may determine when 
acting upon a notice filed in accordance with paragraph 
(a)(2)(iii)(A)(2) of this section that the permissible limit for any 
particular insured State bank is something less than 100 percent of tier 
one capital.
    (iv) Stock investment in insured depository institutions owned 
exclusively by other banks and savings associations. An insured State 
bank may acquire or retain the stock of an insured depository 
institution if the insured depository institution engages only in 
activities permissible for national banks; the insured depository 
institution is subject to examination and regulation by a State bank 
supervisor; the voting stock is owned by 20 or more insured depository 
institutions, but no one institution owns more than 15 percent of the 
voting stock; and the insured depository institution's stock (other than 
directors' qualifying shares or shares held under or acquired through a 
plan established for the benefit of the officers and employees) is owned 
only by insured depository institutions.
    (v) Stock investment in insurance companies--(A) Stock of director 
and officer liability insurance company. An insured State bank may 
acquire and retain up to 10 percent of the outstanding stock of a 
corporation that solely provides or reinsures directors', trustees', and 
officers' liability insurance coverage or bankers' blanket bond group 
insurance coverage for insured depository institutions.
    (B) Stock of savings bank life insurance company. An insured State 
bank located in Massachusetts, New York, or Connecticut may own stock in 
a savings bank life insurance company, provided that the savings bank 
life insurance company provides written disclosures to purchasers or 
potential purchasers of life insurance policies, other insurance 
products, and annuities that are consistent with the disclosures 
described in the Interagency Statement on the Retail Sale of Nondeposit 
Investment Products (FIL-9-94, \1\ February 17, 1994) or any successor 
requirement which indicates that the policies, products, and annuities 
are not FDIC insured deposits, are not guaranteed by the bank and are 
subject to investment risks, including possible loss of the principal 
amount invested.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Financial institution letters (FILs) are available in the FDIC 
Public Information Center, room 100, 801 17th Street, N.W., Washington, 
D.C. 20429.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Activities other than equity investments--(1) Prohibited 
activities. An insured State bank may not directly or indirectly engage 
as principal in any activity, that is not an equity investment, and is 
of a type not permissible for a national bank unless one of the 
exceptions in paragraph (b)(2) of this section applies.
    (2) Exceptions--(i) Consent obtained through application. An insured 
State bank that meets and continues to meet the applicable capital 
standards set by the appropriate Federal banking agency may conduct 
activities prohibited by paragraph (b)(1) of this section if the bank 
obtains the FDIC's prior written consent. Consent will be given only if 
the FDIC determines that the activity poses no significant risk to the 
Deposit Insurance Fund. Applications for consent should be filed in 
accordance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and will be processed under 
Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter. Approvals granted under Sec. 303.122(b) 
of this chapter may be made subject to any conditions or restrictions 
found by the FDIC to be necessary to protect the Deposit Insurance Fund 
from risk, to prevent unsafe or unsound banking practices, and/or to 
ensure that the activity is consistent with the purposes of Federal 
deposit insurance and other applicable law.
    (ii) Insurance underwriting--(A) Savings bank life insurance. An 
insured State bank that is located in Massachusetts, New York or 
Connecticut may provide as principal savings bank life insurance through 
a department of

[[Page 950]]

the bank, provided that the department meets the core standards of 
paragraph (c) of this section or submits an application in compliance 
with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and the FDIC grants its consent under 
the procedures in Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter, and the department 
provides purchasers or potential purchasers of life insurance policies, 
other insurance products and annuities written disclosures that are 
consistent with the disclosures described in the Interagency Statement 
on the Retail Sale of Nondeposit Investment Products (FIL-9-94, February 
17, 1994) and any successor requirement which indicates that the 
policies, products and annuities are not FDIC insured deposits, are not 
guaranteed by the bank, and are subject to investment risks, including 
the possible loss of the principal amount invested.
    (B) Federal crop insurance. Any insured State bank that was 
providing insurance as principal on or before September 30, 1991, which 
was reinsured in whole or in part by the Federal Crop Insurance 
Corporation, may continue to do so.
    (C) Grandfathered insurance underwriting. A well-capitalized insured 
State bank that on November 21, 1991, was lawfully providing insurance 
as principal through a department of the bank may continue to provide 
the same types of insurance as principal to the residents of the State 
or States in which the bank did so on such date provided that the bank's 
department meets the core standards of paragraph (c) of this section, or 
submits an application in compliance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter 
and the FDIC grants its consent under the procedures in Sec. 303.122(b) 
of this chapter.
    (iii) Acquiring and retaining adjustable rate and money market 
preferred stock. (A) An insured State bank's investment of up to 15 
percent of the bank's tier one capital in adjustable rate preferred 
stock or money market (auction rate) preferred stock does not represent 
a significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. An insured State bank 
may conduct this activity without first obtaining the FDIC's consent, 
provided that the bank meets and continues to meet the applicable 
capital standards as prescribed by the appropriate Federal banking 
agency. The fact that prior consent is not required by this subpart does 
not preclude the FDIC from taking any appropriate action with respect to 
the activities if the facts and circumstances warrant such action.
    (B) An insured State bank may acquire or retain other instruments of 
a type determined by the FDIC to have the character of debt securities 
and not to represent a significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. 
Such instruments shall be included in the 15 percent of tier one capital 
limit imposed in paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(A) of this section. An insured 
State bank may conduct this activity without first obtaining the FDIC's 
consent, provided that the bank meets and continues to meet the 
applicable capital standards as prescribed by the appropriate Federal 
banking agency. The fact that prior consent is not required by this 
subpart does not preclude the FDIC from taking any appropriate action 
with respect to the activities if the facts and circumstances warrant 
such action.
    (c) Core standards. For any insured State bank to be eligible to 
conduct insurance activities listed in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A) or (C) of 
this section, the bank must conduct the activities in a department that 
meets the following core separation and operating standards:
    (1) The department is physically distinct from the remainder of the 
bank;
    (2) The department maintains separate accounting and other records;
    (3) The department has assets, liabilities, obligations and expenses 
that are separate and distinct from those of the remainder of the bank;
    (4) The department is subject to State statute that requires its 
obligations, liabilities and expenses be satisfied only with the assets 
of the department; and
    (5) The department informs its customers that only the assets of the 
department may be used to satisfy the obligations of the department.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]

[[Page 951]]



Sec. 362.4  Subsidiaries of insured State banks.

    (a) Prohibition. A subsidiary of an insured State bank may not 
engage as principal in any activity that is not of a type permissible 
for a subsidiary of a national bank, unless it meets one of the 
exceptions in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Exceptions--(1) Consent obtained through application. A 
subsidiary of an insured State bank may conduct otherwise prohibited 
activities if the bank obtains the FDIC's prior written consent and the 
insured State bank meets and continues to meet the applicable capital 
standards set by the appropriate Federal banking agency. Consent will be 
given only if the FDIC determines that the activity poses no significant 
risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. Applications for consent should be 
filed in accordance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and will be 
processed under Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter. Approvals granted under 
Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter may be made subject to any conditions or 
restrictions found by the FDIC to be necessary to protect the Deposit 
Insurance Fund from risk, to prevent unsafe or unsound banking 
practices, and/or to ensure that the activity is consistent with the 
purposes of Federal deposit insurance and other applicable law.
    (2) Grandfathered insurance underwriting subsidiaries. A subsidiary 
of an insured State bank may:
    (i) Engage in grandfathered insurance underwriting if the insured 
State bank or its subsidiary on November 21, 1991, was lawfully 
providing insurance as principal. The subsidiary may continue to provide 
the same types of insurance as principal to the residents of the State 
or states in which the bank or subsidiary did so on such date provided 
that:
    (A)(1) The bank meets the capital requirements of paragraph (e) of 
this section; and
    (2) The subsidiary is an ``eligible subsidiary'' as described in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section; or
    (B) The bank submits an application in compliance with Sec. 303.121 
of this chapter and the FDIC grants its consent under the procedures in 
Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter.
    (ii) Continue to provide as principal title insurance, provided the 
bank was required before June 1, 1991, to provide title insurance as a 
condition of the bank's initial chartering under State law and neither 
the bank nor its parent holding company undergoes a change in control.
    (iii) May continue to provide as principal insurance which is 
reinsured in whole or in part by the Federal Crop Insurance Corporation 
if the subsidiary was engaged in the activity on or before September 30, 
1991.
    (3) Majority-owned subsidiaries' ownership of equity investments 
that represent a control interest in a company. The FDIC has determined 
that investment in the following by a majority-owned subsidiary of an 
insured State bank does not represent a significant risk to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund:
    (i) Equity investment in a company engaged in real estate or 
securities activities authorized in paragraph (b)(5) of this section if 
the bank complies with the following restrictions and files a notice in 
compliance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and the FDIC processes the 
notice without objection under Sec. 303.122(a) of this chapter. The FDIC 
is not precluded from taking any appropriate action or imposing 
additional requirements with respect to the activity if the facts and 
circumstances warrant such action. If changes to the management or 
business plan of the company at any time result in material changes to 
the nature of the company's business or the manner in which its business 
is conducted, the insured State bank shall advise the appropriate 
regional director (DSC) in writing within 10 business days after such 
change. Investment under this paragraph is authorized if:
    (A) The majority-owned subsidiary controls the company;
    (B) The bank meets the core eligibility criteria of paragraph (c)(1) 
of this section;
    (C) The majority-owned subsidiary meets the core eligibility 
criteria of paragraph (c)(2) of this section (including any 
modifications thereof applicable under paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this 
section), or the company is a corporation meeting such criteria;

[[Page 952]]

    (D) The bank's transactions with the majority-owned subsidiary, and 
the bank's transactions with the company, comply with the investment and 
transaction limits of paragraph (d) of this section;
    (E) The bank complies with the capital requirements of paragraph (e) 
of this section with respect to the majority-owned subsidiary and the 
company; and
    (F) To the extent the company is engaged in securities activities 
authorized by paragraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section, the bank and the 
company comply with the additional requirements therein as if the 
company were a majority-owned subsidiary.
    (ii) Equity securities of a company engaged in the following 
activities, if the majority-owned subsidiary controls the company or the 
company is controlled by insured depository institutions, and the bank 
meets and continues to meet the applicable capital standards as 
prescribed by the appropriate Federal banking agency. The FDIC consents 
that a majority-owned subsidiary may conduct such activity without first 
obtaining the FDIC's consent. The fact that prior consent is not 
required by this subpart does not preclude the FDIC from taking any 
appropriate action with respect to the activity if the facts and 
circumstances warrant such action:
    (A) Any activity that is permissible for a national bank, including 
such permissible activities that may require the company to register as 
a securities broker;
    (B) Acting as an insurance agency;
    (C) Engaging in any activity permissible for an insured State bank 
under Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii) to the same extent permissible for the 
insured bank thereunder, so long as instruments held under this 
paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(C), paragraph (b)(7) of this section, and 
Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii) in the aggregate do not exceed the limit set by 
Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii);
    (D) Engaging in any activity permissible for a majority-owned 
subsidiary of an insured State bank under paragraph (b)(6) of this 
section to the same extent and manner permissible for the majority-owned 
subsidiary thereunder; and
    (4) Majority-owned subsidiary's ownership of certain securities that 
do not represent a control interest--(i) Grandfathered investments in 
common or preferred stock and shares of investment companies. Any 
insured State bank that has received approval to invest in common or 
preferred stock or shares of an investment company pursuant to 
Sec. 362.3(a)(2)(iii) may conduct the approved investment activities 
through a majority-owned subsidiary of the bank without any additional 
approval from the FDIC provided that any conditions or restrictions 
imposed with regard to the approval granted under Sec. 362.3(a)(2)(iii) 
are met.
    (ii) Bank stock. An insured State bank may indirectly through a 
majority-owned subsidiary organized for such purpose invest in up to ten 
percent of the outstanding stock of another insured bank.
    (5) Majority-owned subsidiaries conducting real estate investment 
activities and securities underwriting. The FDIC has determined that the 
following activities do not represent a significant risk to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund, provided that the activities are conducted by a 
majority-owned subsidiary of an insured State bank in compliance with 
the core eligibility requirements listed in paragraph (c) of this 
section; any additional requirements listed in paragraph (b)(5) (i) or 
(ii) of this section; the bank complies with the investment and 
transaction limitations of paragraph (d) of this section; and the bank 
meets the capital requirements of paragraph (e) of this section. The 
FDIC consents that these listed activities may be conducted by a 
majority-owned subsidiary of an insured State bank if the bank files a 
notice in compliance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and the FDIC 
processes the notice without objection under Sec. 303.122(a) of this 
chapter. The FDIC is not precluded from taking any appropriate action or 
imposing additional requirements with respect to the activities if the 
facts and circumstances warrant such action. If changes to the 
management or business plan of the majority-owned subsidiary at any time 
result in material changes to the nature of the majority-owned 
subsidiary's business or the

[[Page 953]]

manner in which its business is conducted, the insured State bank shall 
advise the appropriate regional director (DSC) in writing within 10 
business days after such change. Such a majority-owned subsidiary may:
    (i) Real estate investment activities. Engage in real estate 
investment activities. However, the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) 
(ii), (v), (vi), and (xi) of this section need not be met if the bank's 
investment in the equity securities of the subsidiary does not exceed 2 
percent of the bank's tier one capital; the bank has only one subsidiary 
engaging in real estate investment activities; and the bank's total 
investment in the subsidiary does not include any extensions of credit 
from the bank to the subsidiary, any debt instruments issued by the 
subsidiary, or any other transaction originated by the bank that is used 
to benefit the subsidiary.
    (ii) Securities activities. Engage in the public sale, distribution 
or underwriting of securities that are not permissible for a national 
bank under section 16 of the Banking Act of 1933 (12 U.S.C. 24 Seventh), 
provided that the insured state nonmember bank lawfully controlled or 
acquired the subsidiary and had an approved notice or order from the 
FDIC prior to November 12, 1999 and provided that the following 
additional conditions are, and continue to be, met:
    (A) The state-chartered depository institution adopts policies and 
procedures, including appropriate limits on exposure, to govern the 
institution's participation in financing transactions underwritten or 
arranged by an underwriting majority-owned subsidiary;
    (B) The state-chartered depository institution may not express an 
opinion on the value or the advisability of the purchase or sale of 
securities underwritten or dealt in by a majority-owned subsidiary 
unless the state-chartered depository institution notifies the customer 
that the majority-owned subsidiary is underwriting or distributing the 
security;
    (C) The majority-owned subsidiary is registered with the Securities 
and Exchange Commission, is a member in good standing with the 
appropriate self-regulatory organization, and promptly informs the 
appropriate regional director (DSC) in writing of any material actions 
taken against the majority-owned subsidiary or any of its employees by 
the State, the appropriate self-regulatory organizations or the 
Securities and Exchange Commission; and
    (D) The state-chartered depository institution does not knowingly 
purchase as principal or fiduciary during the existence of any 
underwriting or selling syndicate any securities underwritten by the 
majority-owned subsidiary unless the purchase is approved by the state-
chartered depository institution's board of directors before the 
securities are initially offered for sale to the public.
    (6) Real estate leasing. A majority-owned subsidiary of an insured 
State bank acting as lessor under a real property lease which is the 
equivalent of a financing transaction, meeting the lease criteria of 
paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section and the underlying real estate 
requirements of paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section, does not represent 
a significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. A majority-owned 
subsidiary may conduct this activity without first obtaining the FDIC's 
consent, provided that the bank meets and continues to meet the 
applicable capital standards as prescribed by the appropriate Federal 
banking agency. The fact that prior consent is not required by this 
subpart does not preclude the FDIC from taking any appropriate action 
with respect to the activity if the facts and circumstances warrant such 
action.
    (i) Lease criteria--(A) Capital lease. The lease must qualify as a 
capital lease as to the lessor under generally accepted accounting 
principles.
    (B) Nonoperating basis. The bank and the majority-owned subsidiary 
shall not, directly or indirectly, provide or be obligated to provide 
servicing, repair, or maintenance to the property, except that the lease 
may include provisions permitting the subsidiary to protect the value of 
the leased property in the event of a change in circumstances that 
increases the subsidiary's exposure to loss, or the subsidiary may take 
reasonable and appropriate action to salvage or protect the

[[Page 954]]

value of the leased property in such circumstances.
    (ii) Underlying real property requirements--(A) Acquisition. The 
majority-owned subsidiary may acquire specific real estate to be leased 
only after the subsidiary has entered into:
    (1) A lease meeting the requirements of paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this 
section;
    (2) A legally binding written commitment to enter into such a lease; 
or
    (3) A legally binding written agreement that indemnifies the 
subsidiary against loss in connection with its acquisition of the 
property.
    (B) Improvements. Any expenditures by the majority-owned subsidiary 
to make reasonable repairs, renovations, and improvements necessary to 
render the property suitable to the lessee shall not exceed 25 percent 
of the majority-owned subsidiary's full investment in the real estate.
    (C) Divestiture. At the expiration of the initial lease (including 
any renewals or extensions thereof), the majority-owned subsidiary 
shall, as soon as practicable but in any event no less than two years, 
either:
    (1) Re-lease the property under a lease meeting the requirement of 
paragraph (b)(6)(i)(B) of this section; or
    (2) Divest itself of all interest in the property.
    (7) Acquiring and retaining adjustable rate and money market 
preferred stock and similar instruments. The FDIC has determined it does 
not present a significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund for a 
majority-owned subsidiary of an insured State bank to engage in any 
activity permissible for an insured State bank under 
Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii), so long as instruments held under this paragraph, 
paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(C) of this section, and Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii) in 
the aggregate do not exceed the limit set by Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii). A 
majority-owned subsidiary may conduct this activity without first 
obtaining the FDIC's consent, provided that the bank meets and continues 
to meet the applicable capital standards as prescribed by the 
appropriate Federal banking agency. The fact that prior consent is not 
required by this subpart does not preclude the FDIC from taking any 
appropriate action with respect to the activity if the facts and 
circumstances warrant such action.
    (c) Core eligibility requirements. If specifically required by this 
part or by FDIC order, any state-chartered depository institution that 
wishes to be eligible and continue to be eligible to conduct as 
principal activities through a subsidiary that are not permissible for a 
subsidiary of a national bank must be an ``eligible depository 
institution'' and the subsidiary must be an ``eligible subsidiary''.
    (1) A state-chartered depository institution is an ``eligible 
depository institution'' if it:
    (i) Has been chartered and operating for three or more years, unless 
the appropriate regional director (DSC) finds that the state-chartered 
depository institution is owned by an established, well-capitalized, 
well-managed holding company or is managed by seasoned management;
    (ii) Has an FDIC-assigned composite rating of 1 or 2 assigned under 
the Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System (UFIRS) (or such other 
comparable rating system as may be adopted in the future) as a result of 
its most recent Federal or State examination for which the FDIC assigned 
a rating;
    (iii) Received a rating of 1 or 2 under the ``management'' component 
of the UFIRS as assigned by the institution's appropriate Federal 
banking agency;
    (iv) Has a satisfactory or better Community Reinvestment Act rating 
at its most recent examination conducted by the institution's 
appropriate Federal banking agency;
    (v) Has a compliance rating of 1 or 2 at its most recent examination 
conducted by the institution's appropriate Federal banking agency; and
    (vi) Is not subject to a cease and desist order, consent order, 
prompt corrective action directive, formal or informal written 
agreement, or other administrative agreement with its appropriate 
Federal banking agency or chartering authority.
    (2) A subsidiary of a state-chartered depository institution is an 
``eligible subsidiary'' if it:
    (i) Meets applicable statutory or regulatory capital requirements 
and has sufficient operating capital in light of

[[Page 955]]

the normal obligations that are reasonably foreseeable for a business of 
its size and character within the industry;
    (ii) Is physically separate and distinct in its operations from the 
operations of the state-chartered depository institution, provided that 
this requirement shall not be construed to prohibit the state-chartered 
depository institution and its subsidiary from sharing the same facility 
if the area where the subsidiary conducts business with the public is 
clearly distinct from the area where customers of the state-chartered 
depository institution conduct business with the institution. The extent 
of the separation will vary according to the type and frequency of 
customer contact;
    (iii) Maintains separate accounting and other business records;
    (iv) Observes separate business entity formalities such as separate 
board of directors' meetings;
    (v) Has a chief executive officer of the subsidiary who is not an 
employee of the institution;
    (vi) Has a majority of its board of directors who are neither 
directors nor executive officers of the state-chartered depository 
institution;
    (vii) Conducts business pursuant to independent policies and 
procedures designed to inform customers and prospective customers of the 
subsidiary that the subsidiary is a separate organization from the 
state-chartered depository institution and that the state-chartered 
depository institution is not responsible for and does not guarantee the 
obligations of the subsidiary;
    (viii) Has only one business purpose within the types described in 
paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(5) of this section;
    (ix) Has a current written business plan that is appropriate to the 
type and scope of business conducted by the subsidiary;
    (x) Has qualified management and employees for the type of activity 
contemplated, including all required licenses and memberships, and 
complies with industry standards; and
    (xi) Establishes policies and procedures to ensure adequate 
computer, audit and accounting systems, internal risk management 
controls, and has necessary operational and managerial infrastructure to 
implement the business plan.
    (d) Investment and transaction limits--(1) General. If specifically 
required by this part or FDIC order, the following conditions and 
restrictions apply to an insured State bank and its subsidiaries that 
engage in and wish to continue to engage in activities which are not 
permissible for a national bank subsidiary.
    (2) Investment limits--(i) Aggregate investment in subsidiaries. An 
insured state bank's aggregate investment in all subsidiaries conducting 
activities subject to this paragraph (d) shall not exceed 20 percent of 
the insured State bank's tier one capital.
    (ii) Definition of investment. (A) For purposes of this paragraph 
(d), the term ``investment'' means:
    (1) Any extension of credit to the subsidiary by the insured State 
bank;
    (2) Any debt securities, as such term is defined in part 344 of this 
chapter, issued by the subsidiary held by the insured State bank;
    (3) The acceptance by the insured State bank of securities issued by 
the subsidiary as collateral for an extension of credit to any person or 
company; and
    (4) Any extensions of credit by the insured State bank to any third 
party for the purpose of making a direct investment in the subsidiary, 
making any investment in which the subsidiary has an interest, or which 
is used for the benefit of, or transferred to, the subsidiary.
    (B) For the purposes of this paragraph (d), the term ``investment'' 
does not include:
    (1) Extensions of credit by the insured State bank to finance sales 
of assets by the subsidiary which do not involve more than the normal 
degree of risk of repayment and are extended on terms that are 
substantially similar to those prevailing at the time for comparable 
transactions with or involving unaffiliated persons or companies;
    (2) An extension of credit by the insured State bank to the 
subsidiary that is fully collateralized by government securities, as 
such term is defined in Sec. 344.3 of this chapter; or
    (3) An extension of credit by the insured State bank to the 
subsidiary that

[[Page 956]]

is fully collateralized by a segregated deposit in the insured State 
bank.
    (3) Transaction requirements--(i) Arm's length transaction 
requirement. With the exception of giving the subsidiary immediate 
credit for uncollected items received in the ordinary course of 
business, an insured State bank may not carry out any of the following 
transactions with a subsidiary subject to this paragraph (d) unless the 
transaction is on terms and conditions that are substantially the same 
as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with 
unaffiliated parties:
    (A) Make an investment in the subsidiary;
    (B) Purchase from or sell to the subsidiary any assets (including 
securities);
    (C) Enter into a contract, lease, or other type of agreement with 
the subsidiary;
    (D) Pay compensation to a majority-owned subsidiary or any person or 
company who has an interest in the subsidiary; or
    (E) Engage in any such transaction in which the proceeds thereof are 
used for the benefit of, or are transferred to, the subsidiary.
    (ii) Prohibition on purchase of low quality assets. An insured State 
bank is prohibited from purchasing a low quality asset from a subsidiary 
subject to this paragraph (d). For purposes of this subsection, ``low 
quality asset'' means:
    (A) An asset classified as ``substandard'', ``doubtful'', or 
``loss'' or treated as ``other assets especially mentioned'' in the most 
recent report of examination of the bank;
    (B) An asset in a nonaccrual status;
    (C) An asset on which principal or interest payments are more than 
30 days past due; or
    (D) An asset whose terms have been renegotiated or compromised due 
to the deteriorating financial condition of the obligor.
    (iii) Insider transaction restriction. Neither the insured State 
bank nor the subsidiary subject to this paragraph (d) may enter into any 
transaction (exclusive of those covered by Sec. 337.3 of this chapter) 
with the bank's executive officers, directors, principal shareholders or 
related interests of such persons which relate to the subsidiary's 
activities unless:
    (A) The transactions are on terms and conditions that are 
substantially the same as those prevailing at the time for comparable 
transactions with persons not affiliated with the insured State bank; or
    (B) The transactions are pursuant to a benefit or compensation 
program that is widely available to employees of the bank, and that does 
not give preference to the bank's executive officers, directors, 
principal shareholders or related interests of such persons over other 
bank employees.
    (iv) Anti-tying restriction. Neither the insured State bank nor the 
majority-owned subsidiary may require a customer to either buy any 
product or use any service from the other as a condition of entering 
into a transaction.
    (4) Collateralization requirements. (i) An insured State bank is 
prohibited from making an investment in a subsidiary subject to this 
paragraph (d) unless such transaction is fully-collateralized at the 
time the transaction is entered into. No insured State bank may accept a 
low quality asset as collateral. An extension of credit is fully 
collateralized if it is secured at the time of the transaction by 
collateral having a market value equal to at least:
    (A) 100 percent of the amount of the transaction if the collateral 
is composed of:
    (1) Obligations of the United States or its agencies;
    (2) Obligations fully guaranteed by the United States or its 
agencies as to principal and interest;
    (3) Notes, drafts, bills of exchange or bankers acceptances that are 
eligible for rediscount or purchase by the Federal Reserve Bank; or
    (4) A segregated, earmarked deposit account with the insured State 
bank;
    (B) 110 percent of the amount of the transaction if the collateral 
is composed of obligations of any State or political subdivision of any 
State;
    (C) 120 percent of the amount of the transaction if the collateral 
is composed of other debt instruments, including receivables; or

[[Page 957]]

    (D) 130 percent of the amount of the transaction if the collateral 
is composed of stock, leases, or other real or personal property.
    (ii) An insured State bank may not release collateral prior to 
proportional payment of the extension of credit; however, collateral may 
be substituted if there is no diminution of collateral coverage.
    (5) Investment and transaction limits extended to insured State bank 
subsidiaries. For purposes of applying paragraphs (d)(2) through (d)(4) 
of this section, any reference to ``insured State bank'' means the 
insured State bank and any subsidiaries of the insured State bank which 
are not themselves subject under this part or FDIC order to the 
restrictions of this paragraph (d).
    (e) Capital requirements. If specifically required by this part or 
by FDIC order, any insured State bank that wishes to conduct or continue 
to conduct as principal activities through a subsidiary that are not 
permissible for a subsidiary of a national bank must:
    (1) Be well-capitalized after deducting from its tier one capital 
the investment in equity securities of the subsidiary as well as the 
bank's pro rata share of any retained earnings of the subsidiary;
    (2) Reflect this deduction on the appropriate schedule of the bank's 
consolidated report of income and condition; and
    (3) Use such regulatory capital amount for the purposes of the 
bank's assessment risk classification under part 327 of this chapter and 
its categorization as a ``well-capitalized'', an ``adequately 
capitalized'', an ``undercapitalized'', or a ``significantly 
undercapitalized'' institution as defined in Sec. 325.103(b) of this 
chapter or Sec. 324.403(b) of this chapter, as applicable, provided that 
the capital deduction shall not be used for purposes of determining 
whether the bank is ``critically undercapitalized'' under part 325 of 
this chapter or part 324 of this chapter, as applicable.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001; 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006; 78 FR 55596, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 362.5  Approvals previously granted.

    (a) FDIC consent by order or notice. An insured State bank that 
previously filed an application or notice under part 362 in effect prior 
to January 1, 1999 (see 12 CFR part 362 revised as of January 1, 1998), 
and obtained the FDIC's consent to engage in an activity or to acquire 
or retain a majority-owned subsidiary engaging as principal in an 
activity or acquiring and retaining any investment that is prohibited 
under this subpart may continue that activity or retain that investment 
without seeking the FDIC's consent, provided that the insured State bank 
and its subsidiary, if applicable, continue to meet the conditions and 
restrictions of the approval. An insured State bank which was granted 
approval based on conditions which differ from the requirements of 
Sec. 362.4(c)(2), (d) and (e) will be considered to meet the conditions 
and restrictions of the approval relating to being an eligible 
subsidiary, meeting investment and transactions limits, and meeting 
capital requirements if the insured State bank and subsidiary meet the 
requirements of Sec. 362.4(c)(2), (d) and (e). If the majority-owned 
subsidiary is engaged in real estate investment activities not exceeding 
2 percent of the tier one capital of a bank and meeting the other 
conditions of Sec. 362.4(b)(5)(i), the majority-owned subsidiary's 
compliance with Sec. 362.4(c)(2) under the preceding sentence may be 
pursuant to the modifications authorized by Sec. 362.4(b)(5)(i). Once an 
insured State bank elects to comply with Sec. 362.4 (c)(2), (d), and 
(e), it may not revert to the corresponding provisions of the approval 
order.
    (b) Approvals by regulation--
    (1)-(5) [Reserved]
    (6) Adjustable rate or money market preferred stock. An insured 
State bank owning adjustable rate or money market (auction rate) 
preferred stock pursuant to Sec. 362.4(c)(3)(v) in effect prior to 
January 1, 1999 (see 12 CFR part 362 revised as of January 1, 1998), in 
excess of the amount limit in Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii) may continue to hold 
any overlimit shares of such stock acquired before January 1, 1999, 
until redeemed or repurchased by the issuer, but such stock shall be 
included as part of the amount

[[Page 958]]

limit in Sec. 362.3(b)(2)(iii) when determining whether the bank may 
acquire new stock thereunder.
    (c) Charter conversions. (1) An insured State bank that has 
converted its charter from an insured state savings association may 
continue activities through a majority-owned subsidiary that were 
permissible prior to the time it converted its charter only if the 
insured State bank receives the FDIC's consent. Except as provided in 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the insured State bank should apply 
under Sec. 362.4(b)(1), submit any notice required under Sec. 362.4(b) 
(4) or (5), or comply with the provisions of Sec. 362.4(b) (3), (6), or 
(7) if applicable, to continue the activity.
    (2) Exception for prior consent. If the FDIC had granted consent to 
the savings association under section 28 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831(e)) prior to the time the savings 
association converted its charter, the insured State bank may continue 
the activities without providing notice or making application to the 
FDIC, provided that the bank and its subsidiary as applicable are in 
compliance with:
    (i) The terms of the FDIC approval order; and
    (ii) The provisions of Sec. 362.4(c)(2), (d), and (e) regarding 
operating as an ``eligible subsidiary'', ``investment and transaction 
limits'', and ``capital requirements'.
    (3) Divestiture. An insured State bank that does not receive FDIC 
consent shall divest of the nonconforming investment as soon as 
practical but in no event later than two years from the date of charter 
conversion.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001]



 Subpart B_Safety and Soundness Rules Governing Insured State Nonmember 
                                  Banks



Sec. 362.6  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart, along with the notice and application procedures in 
subpart G of part 303 of this chapter apply to certain banking practices 
that may have adverse effects on the safety and soundness of insured 
state nonmember banks. This subpart contains the required prudential 
separations between certain securities underwriting affiliates and 
insured state nonmember banks. The standards only will apply to 
affiliates of insured state nonmember banks that are not controlled by 
an entity that is supervised by a federal banking agency.

[66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001]



Sec. 362.7  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart, the following definitions apply:
    (a) Affiliate has the same meaning contained in section 3 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    (b) Activity, company, control, equity security, insured state 
nonmember bank, security and subsidiary have the same meaning as 
provided in subpart A of this part.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001]



Sec. 362.8  Restrictions on activities of insured state nonmember
banks affiliated with certain securities companies.

    (a) The FDIC has found that an unrestricted affiliation between an 
insured state nonmember bank and certain companies may have adverse 
effects on the safety and soundness of insured state nonmember banks.
    (b) An insured state nonmember bank is prohibited from becoming or 
remaining affiliated with any securities underwriting affiliate company 
that directly engages in the public sale, distribution or underwriting 
of stocks, bonds, debentures, notes, or other securities activity, of a 
type not permissible for a national bank directly, unless the company is 
controlled by an entity that is supervised by a federal banking agency 
or the state nonmember bank submits an application in compliance with 
Sec. 303.121 of this chapter and the FDIC grants its consent under the 
procedure in Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter, or the state nonmember 
bank and the securities underwriting affiliate company comply with the 
following requirements:
    (1) The securities business of the affiliate is physically separate 
and distinct in its operations from the operations of the bank, provided 
that this

[[Page 959]]

requirement shall not be construed to prohibit the bank and its 
affiliate from sharing the same facility if the area where the affiliate 
conducts retail sales activity with the public is physically distinct 
from the routine deposit taking area of the bank;
    (2) The affiliate conducts business pursuant to independent policies 
and procedures designed to inform customers and prospective customers of 
the affiliate that the affiliate is a separate organization from the 
bank and the state-chartered depository institution is not responsible 
for and does not guarantee the obligations of the affiliate;
    (3) The bank adopts policies and procedures, including appropriate 
limits on exposure, to govern its participation in financing 
transactions underwritten by an underwriting affiliate;
    (4) The bank does not express an opinion on the value or the 
advisability of the purchase or sale of securities underwritten or dealt 
in by an affiliate unless it notifies the customer that the entity 
underwriting, making a market, distributing or dealing in the securities 
is an affiliate of the bank; and
    (5) The bank complies with the investment and transaction 
limitations in sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 
U.S.C. 371c and 371c-1) with respect to the affiliate.

[66 FR 1028, Jan. 5, 2001]



       Subpart C_Activities of Insured State Savings Associations



Sec. 362.9  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart, along with the notice and application procedures 
in subpart H of part 303 of this chapter, implements the provisions of 
section 28(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831e(a)) 
that restrict and prohibit insured state savings associations and their 
service corporations from engaging in activities and investments of a 
type that are not permissible for a Federal savings association and 
their service corporations. This subpart also implements the provision 
of section 28(d) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1831e(d)) that restricts state and federal savings associations from 
investing in certain corporate debt securities. The phrase ``activity 
permissible for a Federal savings association'' means any activity 
authorized for a Federal savings association under any statute including 
the Home Owners' Loan Act (HOLA) (12 U.S.C. 1464 et seq.), as well as 
activities recognized as permissible for a Federal savings association 
in regulations issued by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency 
(OCC) or in bulletins, orders or written interpretations issued by the 
OCC, or by the former Office of Thrift Supervision until modified, 
terminated, set aside, or superseded by the OCC.
    (b) This subpart does not cover the following activities:
    (1) Activities conducted by the insured state savings association 
other than ``as principal'', defined for purposes of this subpart as 
activities conducted as agent for a customer, conducted in a brokerage, 
custodial, advisory, or administrative capacity, or conducted as 
trustee, or in any substantially similar capacity. For example, this 
subpart does not cover acting solely as agent for the sale of insurance, 
securities, real estate, or travel services; nor does it cover acting as 
trustee, providing personal financial planning advice, or safekeeping 
services.
    (2) Interests in real estate in which the real property is used or 
intended in good faith to be used within a reasonable time by an insured 
savings association or its service corporations as offices or related 
facilities for the conduct of its business or future expansion of its 
business or used as public welfare investments of a type and in an 
amount permissible for Federal savings associations.
    (3) Equity investments acquired in connection with debts previously 
contracted (DPC) if the insured savings association or its service 
corporation takes only such actions as would be permissible for a 
Federal savings association's or its service corporation's DPC holdings.
    (c) The FDIC intends to allow insured state savings associations and 
their service corporations to undertake only safe and sound activities 
and investments that do not present significant risks to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund

[[Page 960]]

and that are consistent with the purposes of Federal deposit insurance 
and other applicable law. This subpart does not authorize any insured 
state savings association to make investments or conduct activities that 
are not authorized or that are prohibited by either Federal or state 
law.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006; 77 
FR 43155, July 24, 2012]



Sec. 362.10  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart, the definitions provided in 
Sec. 362.2 apply. Additionally, the following definitions apply to this 
subpart:
    (a) Affiliate has the same meaning as provided in subpart B of this 
part.
    (b) Corporate debt securities not of investment grade means any 
corporate debt security that when acquired was not rated among the four 
highest rating categories by at least one nationally recognized 
statistical rating organization. The term shall not include any 
obligation issued or guaranteed by a corporation that may be held by a 
Federal savings association without limitation as to percentage of 
assets under subparagraphs (D), (E), or (F) of section 5(c)(1) of HOLA 
(12 U.S.C. 1464(c)(1) (D), (E), (F)).
    (c) Insured state savings association means any state-chartered 
savings association insured by the FDIC.
    (d) Qualified affiliate means, in the case of a stock insured state 
savings association, an affiliate other than a subsidiary or an insured 
depository institution. In the case of a mutual savings association, 
``qualified affiliate'' means a subsidiary other than an insured 
depository institution provided that all of the savings association's 
investments in, and extensions of credit to, the subsidiary are deducted 
from the savings association's capital.
    (e) Service corporation means any corporation the capital stock of 
which is available for purchase by savings associations.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1029, Jan. 5, 2001]



Sec. 362.11  Activities of insured savings associations.

    (a) Equity investments--(1) Prohibited investments. No insured state 
savings association may directly acquire or retain as principal any 
equity investment of a type, or in an amount, that is not permissible 
for a Federal savings association unless the exception in paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section applies.
    (2) Exception: Equity investment in service corporations. An insured 
state savings association that is and continues to be in compliance with 
the applicable capital standards as prescribed by the appropriate 
Federal banking agency may acquire or retain an equity investment in a 
service corporation:
    (i) Not permissible for a Federal savings association to the extent 
the service corporation is engaging in activities that are allowed 
pursuant to the provisions of or an application under Sec. 362.12(b); or
    (ii) Of a type permissible for a Federal savings association, but in 
an amount exceeding the investment limits applicable to Federal savings 
associations, if the insured state savings association obtains the 
FDIC's prior consent. Consent will be given only if the FDIC determines 
that the amount of the investment in a service corporation engaged in 
such activities does not present a significant risk to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund. Applications should be filed in accordance with 
Sec. 303.141 of this chapter and will be processed under Sec. 303.142(b) 
of this chapter. Approvals granted under Sec. 303.142(b) of this chapter 
may be made subject to any conditions or restrictions found by the FDIC 
to be necessary to protect the Deposit Insurance Fund from significant 
risk, to prevent unsafe or unsound practices, and/or to ensure that the 
activity is consistent with the purposes of Federal deposit insurance 
and other applicable law.
    (b) Activities other than equity investments--(1) Prohibited 
activities. An insured state savings association may not directly engage 
as principal in any activity, that is not an equity investment, of a 
type not permissible for a Federal savings association, and an insured 
state savings association shall not make nonresidential real property 
loans in an amount exceeding that described in section 5(c)(2)(B) of 
HOLA (12 U.S.C. 1464(c)(2)(B)), unless one of the exceptions in 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section applies. This section shall not

[[Page 961]]

be read to require the divestiture of any asset (including a 
nonresidential real estate loan), if the asset was acquired prior to 
August 9, 1989; however, any activity conducted with such asset must be 
conducted in accordance with this subpart. On and after July 21, 2012, 
an insured savings association directly or through a subsidiary (other 
than, in the case of a mutual savings association, a subsidiary that is 
a qualified affiliate), shall not acquire or retain a corporate debt 
security unless the savings association, prior to acquiring the security 
and periodically thereafter, determines that the issuer of the security 
has adequate capacity to meet all financial commitments under the 
security for the projected life of the security. Saving associations 
have until January 1, 2013 to come into compliance with this treatment 
of corporate debt securities.
    (2) Exceptions--(i) Consent obtained through application. An insured 
state savings association that meets and continues to meet the 
applicable capital standards set by the appropriate Federal banking 
agency may directly conduct activities prohibited by paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section if the savings association obtains the FDIC's prior 
consent. Consent will be given only if the FDIC determines that 
conducting the activity designated poses no significant risk to the 
Deposit Insurance Fund. Applications should be filed in accordance with 
Sec. 303.141 of this chapter and will be processed under Sec. 303.142(b) 
of this chapter. Approvals granted under Sec. 303.142(b) of this chapter 
may be made subject to any conditions or restrictions found by the FDIC 
to be necessary to protect the Deposit Insurance Fund from significant 
risk, to prevent unsafe or unsound practices, and/or to ensure that the 
activity is consistent with the purposes of Federal deposit insurance 
and other applicable law.
    (ii) Nonresidential realty loans permissible for a Federal savings 
association conducted in an amount not permissible. An insured state 
savings association that meets and continues to meet the applicable 
capital standards set by the appropriate Federal banking agency may make 
nonresidential real property loans in an amount exceeding the amount 
described in section 5(c)(2)(B) of HOLA, if the savings association 
files a notice in compliance with Sec. 303.141 of this chapter and the 
FDIC processes the notice without objection under Sec. 303.142(a) of 
this chapter. Consent will be given only if the FDIC determines that 
engaging in such lending in the amount designated poses no significant 
risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund.
    (iii) Acquiring and retaining adjustable rate and money market 
preferred stock. (A) An insured state savings association's investment 
of up to 15 percent of the association's tier one capital in adjustable 
rate preferred stock or money market (auction rate) preferred stock does 
not represent a significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. An 
insured state savings association may conduct this activity without 
first obtaining the FDIC's consent, provided that the association meets 
and continues to meet the applicable capital standards as prescribed by 
the appropriate Federal banking agency. The fact that prior consent is 
not required by this subpart does not preclude the FDIC from taking any 
appropriate action with respect to the activities if the facts and 
circumstances warrant such action.
    (B) An insured state savings association may acquire or retain other 
instruments of a type determined by the FDIC to have the character of 
debt securities and not to represent a significant risk to the Deposit 
Insurance Fund. Such instruments shall be included in the 15 percent of 
tier one capital limit imposed in paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(A) of this 
section. An insured state savings association may conduct this activity 
without first obtaining the FDIC's consent, provided that the 
association meets and continues to meet the applicable capital standards 
as prescribed by the appropriate Federal banking agency. The fact that 
prior consent is not required by this subpart does not preclude the FDIC 
from taking any appropriate action with respect to the activities if the 
facts and circumstances warrant such action.
    (3) Activities permissible for a Federal savings association 
conducted in an

[[Page 962]]

amount not permissible. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of 
this section, an insured state savings association may engage as 
principal in any activity, which is not an equity investment of a type 
permissible for a Federal savings association, in an amount in excess of 
that permissible for a Federal savings association, if the savings 
association meets and continues to meet the applicable capital standards 
set by the appropriate Federal banking agency, the institution has 
advised the appropriate regional director (DSC) under the procedure in 
Sec. 303.142(c) of this chapter within thirty days before engaging in 
the activity, and the FDIC has not advised the insured state savings 
association that conducting the activity in the amount indicated poses a 
significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. This section shall not 
be read to require the divestiture of any asset if the asset was 
acquired prior to August 9, 1989; however, any activity conducted with 
such asset must be conducted in accordance with this subpart.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 71 FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006; 77 
FR 43155, July 24, 2012]



Sec. 362.12  Service corporations of insured State savings 
associations.

    (a) Prohibition. A service corporation of an insured state savings 
association may not engage in any activity that is not permissible for a 
service corporation of a Federal savings association, unless it meets 
one of the exceptions in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Exceptions--(1) Consent obtained through application. A service 
corporation of an insured state savings association may conduct 
activities prohibited by paragraph (a) of this section if the savings 
association obtains the FDIC's prior written consent and the insured 
state savings association meets and continues to meet the applicable 
capital standards set by the appropriate Federal banking agency. Consent 
will be given only if the FDIC determines that the activity poses no 
significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund. Applications for consent 
should be filed in accordance with Sec. 303.141 of this chapter and will 
be processed under Sec. 303.142(b) of this chapter. Approvals granted 
under Sec. 303.142(b) of this chapter may be made subject to any 
conditions or restrictions found by the FDIC to be necessary to protect 
the Deposit Insurance Fund from risk, to prevent unsafe or unsound 
banking practices, and/or to ensure that the activity is consistent with 
the purposes of Federal deposit insurance and other applicable law. The 
activities covered by this paragraph may include, but are not limited 
to, acquiring and retaining equity securities of a company engaged in 
the public sale distribution or underwriting of securities.
    (2) Service corporations conducting unrestricted activities. The 
FDIC has determined that the following activities do not represent a 
significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund:
    (i) [Reserved]
    (ii) A service corporation of an insured state savings association 
may acquire and retain equity securities of a company engaged in the 
following activities, if the service corporation controls the company or 
the company is controlled by insured depository institutions, and the 
association continues to meet the applicable capital standards as 
prescribed by the appropriate Federal banking agency. The FDIC consents 
that such activity may be conducted by a service corporation of an 
insured state savings association without first obtaining the FDIC's 
consent. The fact that prior consent is not required by this subpart 
does not preclude the FDIC from taking any appropriate action with 
respect to the activities if the facts and circumstances warrant such 
action.
    (A) Equity securities of a company that engages in permissible 
activities. A service corporation may own the equity securities of a 
company that engages in any activity permissible for a Federal savings 
association.
    (B) Equity securities of a company that acquires and retains 
adjustable-rate and money market preferred stock. A service corporation 
may own the equity securities of a company that engages in any activity 
permissible for an insured state savings association under 
Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(iii) so long as instruments held under this paragraph 
(b)(2)(ii)(B), paragraph (b)(2)(iv) of this section, and 
Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(iii) in the aggregate do not exceed the limit set by 
Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(iii).

[[Page 963]]

    (C) Equity securities of a company acting as an insurance agency. A 
service corporation may own the equity securities of a company that acts 
as an insurance agency.
    (iii) Activities that are not conducted ``as principal''. A service 
corporation controlled by the insured state savings association may 
engage in activities which are not conducted ``as principal'' such as 
acting as an agent for a customer, acting in a brokerage, custodial, 
advisory, or administrative capacity, or acting as trustee, or in any 
substantially similar capacity.
    (iv) Acquiring and retaining adjustable-rate and money market 
preferred stock. A service corporation may engage in any activity 
permissible for an insured state savings association under 
Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(iii) so long as instruments held under this paragraph 
(b)(2)(iv), paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, and 
Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(iii) in the aggregate do not exceed the limit set by 
Sec. 362.11(b)(2)(iii).
    (3)-(4) [Reserved]
    (c) Investment and transaction limits. The restrictions detailed in 
Sec. 362.4(d) apply to transactions between an insured state savings 
association and any service corporation engaging in activities which are 
not permissible for a service corporation of a Federal savings 
association if specifically required by this part or FDIC order. For 
purposes of applying the investment limits in Sec. 362.4(d)(2), the term 
``investment'' includes only those items described in 
Sec. 362.4(d)(2)(ii)(A) (3) and (4). For purposes of applying 
Sec. 362.4(d) (2), (3), and (4) to this paragraph (c), references to the 
terms ``insured State bank'' and ``subsidiary'' in Sec. 362.4(d)(2), 
(3), and (4), shall be deemed to refer, respectively, to the insured 
state savings association and the service corporation. For purposes of 
applying Sec. 362.4(d)(5), references to the terms ``insured State 
bank'' and ``subsidiary'' in Sec. 362.4(d)(5) shall be deemed to refer, 
respectively, to the insured state savings association and the service 
corporations or subsidiaries.
    (d) Capital requirements. If specifically required by this part or 
by FDIC order, an insured state savings association that wishes to 
conduct as principal activities through a service corporation which are 
not permissible for a service corporation of a Federal savings 
association must:
    (1) Be well-capitalized after deducting from its capital any 
investment in the service corporation, both equity and debt.
    (2) Use such regulatory capital amount for the purposes of the 
insured state savings association's assessment risk classification under 
part 327 of this chapter.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 66 FR 1029, Jan. 5, 2001; 71 
FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]]



Sec. 362.13  Approvals previously granted.

    FDIC consent by order or notice. An insured state savings 
association that previously filed an application and obtained the FDIC's 
consent to engage in an activity or to acquire or retain an investment 
in a service corporation engaging as principal in an activity or 
acquiring and retaining any investment that is prohibited under this 
subpart may continue that activity or retain that investment without 
seeking the FDIC's consent, provided the insured state savings 
association and the service corporation, if applicable, continue to meet 
the conditions and restrictions of approval. An insured state savings 
association which was granted approval based on conditions which differ 
from the requirements of Secs. 362.4(c)(2) and 362.12 (c) and (d) will 
be considered to meet the conditions and restrictions of the approval if 
the insured state savings association and any applicable service 
corporation meet the requirements of Secs. 362.4(c)(2) and 362.12 (c) 
and (d). For the purposes of applying Sec. 362.4(c)(2), references to 
the terms ``eligible subsidiary'' and ``subsidiary'' in Sec. 362.4(c)(2) 
shall be deemed to refer, respectively, to the eligible service 
corporation and the service corporation.



Subpart D_Acquiring, Establishing, or Conducting New Activities Through 
             a Subsidiary by an Insured Savings Association



Sec. 362.14  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart implements section 18(m) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance

[[Page 964]]

Act (12 U.S.C. 1828(m)) which requires that prior notice be given the 
FDIC when an insured savings association establishes or acquires a 
subsidiary or engages in any new activity in a subsidiary. For the 
purposes of this subpart, the term ``subsidiary'' does not include any 
insured depository institution as that term is defined in the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act. Unless otherwise indicated, the definitions 
provided in Sec. 362.2 apply to this subpart.



Sec. 362.15  Acquiring or establishing a subsidiary; conducting 
new activities through a subsidiary.

    No state or Federal insured savings association may establish or 
acquire a subsidiary, or conduct any new activity through a subsidiary, 
unless it files a notice in compliance with Sec. 303.142(c) of this 
chapter at least 30 days prior to establishment of the subsidiary or 
commencement of the activity and the FDIC does not object to the notice. 
This requirement does not apply to any Federal savings bank that was 
chartered prior to October 15, 1982, as a savings bank under State law 
or any savings association that acquired its principal assets from such 
an institution.



    Subpart E_Financial Subsidiaries of Insured State Nonmember Banks

    Source: 66 FR 1029, Jan. 5, 2001, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 362.16  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart, along with the notice and application procedures 
in subpart G of part 303 of this chapter, implements section 46 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831w) and requires that an 
insured state nonmember bank certify certain facts and file a notice 
with the FDIC before the insured state nonmember bank may control or 
hold an interest in a financial subsidiary under section 46(a) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act. This subpart also implements the 
statutory Community Reinvestment Act (CRA) (12 U.S.C. 2901 et seq.) 
requirement set forth in subsection (4)(l)(2) of the Bank Holding 
Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1843(l)(2)), which is applicable to state 
nonmember banks that commence new activities through a financial 
subsidiary or directly or indirectly acquire control of a company 
engaged in an activity under section 46(a).
    (b) This subpart does not cover activities conducted other than ``as 
principal''. For purposes of this subpart, activities conducted other 
than ``as principal'' are defined as activities conducted as agent for a 
customer, conducted in a brokerage, custodial, advisory, or 
administrative capacity, or conducted as trustee, or in any 
substantially similar capacity. For example, this subpart does not cover 
acting solely as agent for the sale of insurance, securities, real 
estate, or travel services; nor does it cover acting as trustee, 
providing personal financial planning advice, or safekeeping services.



Sec. 362.17  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart, the following definitions will 
apply:
    (a) Activity, company, control, insured depository institution, 
insured state bank, insured state nonmember bank and subsidiary have the 
same meaning as provided in subpart A of this part.
    (b) Affiliate has the same meaning provided in subpart B of this 
part.
    (c) Financial subsidiary means any company that is controlled by one 
or more insured depository institutions other than:
    (1) A subsidiary that only engages in activities that the state 
nonmember bank is permitted to engage in directly and that are conducted 
on the same terms and conditions that govern the conduct of the 
activities by the state nonmember bank; or
    (2) A subsidiary that the state nonmember bank is specifically 
authorized to control by the express terms of a federal statute (other 
than section 46(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1831w)), and not by implication or interpretation, such as the Bank 
Service Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1861 et seq.).
    (d) Tangible equity and Tier 2 capital have the same meaning as set 
forth in part 325 of this chapter or part 324 of this chapter, as 
applicable.
    (e) Well-managed means:
    (1) Unless otherwise determined in writing by the appropriate 
federal

[[Page 965]]

banking agency, the institution has received a composite rating of 1 or 
2 under the Uniform Financial Institutions Rating System (or an 
equivalent rating under an equivalent rating system) in connection with 
the most recent state or federal examination or subsequent review of the 
depository institution and at least a rating of 2 for management, if 
such a rating is given; or
    (2) In the case of any depository institution that has not been 
examined by its appropriate federal banking agency, the existence and 
use of managerial resources that the appropriate federal banking agency 
determines are satisfactory.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 78 FR 55596, Sept. 10, 2013]



Sec. 362.18  Financial subsidiaries of insured state nonmember banks.

    (a) ``As principal'' activities. An insured state nonmember bank may 
not obtain control of or hold an interest in a financial subsidiary that 
engages in activities as principal or commence any such new activity 
pursuant to section 46(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831w) unless the insured state nonmember bank files a notice 
containing the information required in Sec. 303.121(b) of this chapter 
and certifies that:
    (1) The insured state nonmember bank is well-managed;
    (2) The insured state nonmember bank and all of its insured 
depository institution affiliates are well-capitalized as defined in the 
appropriate capital regulation and guidance of each institution's 
primary federal regulator; and
    (3) The insured state nonmember bank will deduct the aggregate 
amount of its outstanding equity investment, including retained 
earnings, in all financial subsidiaries that engage in activities as 
principal pursuant to section 46(a) of the Federal Deposit Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831w(a)), from the bank's total assets and tangible equity and 
deduct such investment from its total risk-based capital (this deduction 
shall be made equally from tier 1 and tier 2 capital) or from common 
equity tier 1 capital in accordance with 12 CFR part 324, subpart C, as 
applicable.
    (b) Community Reinvestment Act (CRA). An insured state nonmember 
bank may not commence any new activity subject to section 46(a) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831w) or directly or 
indirectly acquire control of a company engaged in any such activity 
pursuant to Sec. 362.18(a)(1), if the bank or any of its insured 
depository institution affiliates received a CRA rating of less than 
``satisfactory record of meeting community credit needs'' in its most 
recent CRA examination.
    (c) Other requirements. An insured state nonmember bank controlling 
or holding an interest in a financial subsidiary under section 46(a) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831w) must meet and 
continue to meet the requirements set forth in paragraph (a) of this 
section as long as the insured state nonmember bank holds the financial 
subsidiary and:
    (1) Disclose and continue to disclose the capital separation 
required in paragraph (a)(3) in any published financial statements;
    (2) Comply and continue to comply with sections 23A and 23B of the 
Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c and 371c-1) as if the subsidiary 
were a financial subsidiary of a national bank; and
    (3) Comply and continue to comply with the financial and operational 
standards provided by section 5136A(d) of the Revised Statutes of the 
United States (12 U.S.C. 24A(d)), unless otherwise determined by the 
FDIC.
    (d) Securities underwriting. If the financial subsidiary of the 
insured state nonmember bank will engage in the public sale, 
distribution or underwriting of stocks, bonds, debentures, notes, or 
other securities activity of a type permissible for a national bank only 
through a financial subsidiary, then the state nonmember bank and the 
financial subsidiary also must comply and continue to comply with the 
following additional requirements:
    (1) The securities business of the financial subsidiary must be 
physically separate and distinct in its operations from the operations 
of the bank, provided that this requirement shall not be construed to 
prohibit the bank and its financial subsidiary from sharing

[[Page 966]]

the same facility if the area where the financial subsidiary conducts 
securities business with the public is physically distinct from the 
routine deposit taking area of the bank;
    (2) The financial subsidiary must conduct its securities business 
pursuant to independent policies and procedures designed to inform 
customers and prospective customers of the financial subsidiary that the 
financial subsidiary is a separate organization from the insured state 
nonmember bank and that the insured state nonmember bank is not 
responsible for and does not guarantee the obligations of the financial 
subsidiary;
    (3) The bank must adopt policies and procedures, including 
appropriate limits on exposure, to govern its participation in financing 
transactions underwritten by its financial subsidiary; and
    (4) The bank must not express an opinion on the value or the 
advisability of the purchase or sale of securities underwritten or dealt 
in by its financial subsidiary unless the bank notifies the customer 
that the entity underwriting, making a market, distributing or dealing 
in the securities is a financial subsidiary of the bank.
    (e) Applications for exceptions to certain requirements. Any insured 
state nonmember bank that is unable to comply with the well-managed 
requirement of Sec. 362.18(a)(1) and (c)(1), any state nonmember bank 
that has appropriate reasons for not meeting the financial and 
operational standards applicable to a financial subsidiary of a national 
bank conducting the same activities as provided in Sec. 362.18(c)(3) or 
any state nonmember bank and its financial subsidiary subject to the 
securities underwriting activities requirements in Sec. 362.18(d) that 
is unable to meet such requirements may submit an application in 
compliance with Sec. 303.121 of this chapter to seek a waiver or 
modification of such requirements under the procedure in Sec. 303.122(b) 
of this chapter. The FDIC may impose additional prudential safeguards as 
are necessary as a condition of its consent.
    (f) Failure to meet requirements--(1) Notification by FDIC. The FDIC 
will notify the insured state nonmember bank in writing and identify the 
areas of noncompliance, if:
    (i) The FDIC finds that an insured state nonmember bank or any of 
its insured depository institution affiliates is not in compliance with 
the CRA requirement of Sec. 362.18(b) at the time any new activity is 
commenced or control of the financial subsidiary is acquired;
    (ii) The FDIC finds that the facts to which an insured state 
nonmember bank certified under Sec. 362.18(a) are not accurate in whole 
or in part; or
    (iii) The FDIC finds that the insured state nonmember bank or any of 
its insured depository institution affiliates or the financial 
subsidiary fails to meet or continue to comply with the requirements of 
Sec. 362.18(c) and (d), if applicable, and the FDIC has not granted an 
exception under the procedures set forth in Sec. 362.18(e) and in 
Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter.
    (2) Notification by state nonmember bank. An insured state nonmember 
bank that controls or holds an interest in a financial subsidiary must 
promptly notify the FDIC if the bank becomes aware that any depository 
institution affiliate of the bank has ceased to be well-capitalized.
    (3) Subsequent action by FDIC. The FDIC may take any appropriate 
action or impose any limitations, including requiring that the insured 
state nonmember bank to divest control of any such financial subsidiary, 
on the conduct or activities of the insured state nonmember bank or any 
financial subsidiary of the insured state bank that fails to:
    (i) Meet the requirements listed in Sec. 362.18(a) and (b) at the 
time that any new section 46 activity is commenced or control of a 
financial subsidiary is acquired by an insured state nonmember bank; or
    (ii) Meet and continue to meet the requirements listed in 
Sec. 362.18(c) and (d), as applicable.
    (g) Coordination with section 24 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act--(1) Continuing authority under section 24. Notwithstanding 
Sec. 362.18(a) through (f), an insured state bank may retain its 
interest in any subsidiary:
    (i) That was conducting a financial activity with authorization in 
accordance with section 24 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831a)

[[Page 967]]

and the applicable implementing regulation found in subpart A of this 
part 362 before the date on which any such activity became for the first 
time permissible for a financial subsidiary of a national bank; and
    (ii) Which insured state nonmember bank and its subsidiary continue 
to meet the conditions and restrictions of the section 24 order or 
regulation approving the activity as well as other applicable law.
    (2) Continuing authority under section 24(f) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act. Notwithstanding Sec. 362.18(a) through (f), an insured 
state bank with authority under section 24(f) of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831a(f)) to hold equity securities may 
continue to establish new subsidiaries to engage in that investment 
activity.
    (3) Relief from conditions. Any state nonmember bank that meets the 
requirements of paragraph (g)(1) of this section or that is subject to 
section 46(b) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831w(b)) 
may submit an application in compliance with Sec. 303.121 of this 
chapter and seek the consent of the FDIC under the procedure in 
Sec. 303.122(b) of this chapter for modification of any conditions or 
restrictions the FDIC previously imposed in connection with a section 24 
order or regulation approving the activity.
    (4) New financial subsidiaries. Notwithstanding subpart A of this 
part 362, an insured state bank may not, on or after November 12, 1999, 
acquire control of, or acquire an interest in, a financial subsidiary 
that engages in activities as principal or commences any new activity 
under section 46(a) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1831w) other than as provided in this section.

[63 FR 66326, Dec. 1, 1998, as amended at 78 FR 55596, Sept. 10, 2013]



PART 363_ANNUAL INDEPENDENT AUDITS AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS--
Table of Contents



Sec.
363.0  OMB control number.
363.1  Scope and definitions.
363.2  Annual reporting requirements.
363.3  Independent public accountant.
363.4  Filing and notice requirements.
363.5  Audit committees.

Appendix A to Part 363--Guidelines and Interpretations
Appendix B to Part 363--Illustrative Management Reports

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1831m.

    Source: 74 FR 35745, July 20, 2009, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 363.0  OMB control number.

    The information collection requirements in this part have been 
approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 
3064-0113.



Sec. 363.1  Scope and definitions.

    (a) Applicability. This part applies to any insured depository 
institution with respect to any fiscal year in which its consolidated 
total assets as of the beginning of such fiscal year are $500 million or 
more. The requirements specified in this part are in addition to any 
other statutory and regulatory requirements otherwise applicable to an 
insured depository institution.
    (b) Compliance by subsidiaries of holding companies. (1) For an 
insured depository institution that is a subsidiary of a holding 
company, the audited financial statements requirement of Sec. 363.2(a) 
may be satisfied:
    (i) For fiscal years ending on or before June 14, 2010, by audited 
consolidated financial statements of the top-tier or any mid-tier 
holding company.
    (ii) For fiscal years ending on or after June 15, 2010, by audited 
consolidated financial statements of the top-tier or any mid-tier 
holding company provided that the consolidated total assets of the 
insured depository institution (or the consolidated total assets of all 
of the holding company's insured depository institution subsidiaries, 
regardless of size, if the holding company owns or controls more than 
one insured depository institution) comprise 75 percent or more of the 
consolidated total assets of this top-tier or mid-tier holding company 
as of the beginning of its fiscal year.
    (2) The other requirements of this part for an insured depository 
institution that is a subsidiary of a holding company may be satisfied 
by the top-tier or any mid-tier holding company if the insured 
depository institution meets the criterion specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1) 
and if:

[[Page 968]]

    (i) The services and functions comparable to those required of the 
insured depository institution by this part are provided at this top-
tier or mid-tier holding company level; and
    (ii) The insured depository institution has as of the beginning of 
its fiscal year:
    (A) Total assets of less than $5 billion; or
    (B) Total assets of $5 billion or more and a composite CAMELS rating 
of 1 or 2.
    (3) The appropriate Federal banking agency may revoke the exception 
in paragraph (b)(2) of this section for any institution with total 
assets in excess of $9 billion for any period of time during which the 
appropriate Federal banking agency determines that the institution's 
exemption would create a significant risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund.
    (c) Financial reporting. For purposes of the management report 
requirement of Sec. 363.2(b) and the internal control reporting 
requirement of Sec. 363.3(b), ``financial reporting,'' at a minimum, 
includes both financial statements prepared in accordance with generally 
accepted accounting principles for the insured depository institution or 
its holding company and financial statements prepared for regulatory 
reporting purposes. For recognition and measurement purposes, financial 
statements prepared for regulatory reporting purposes shall conform to 
generally accepted accounting principles and section 37 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act.
    (d) Definitions. For purposes of this part, the following 
definitions apply:
    (1) AICPA means the American Institute of Certified Public 
Accountants.
    (2) GAAP means generally accepted accounting principles.
    (3) PCAOB means the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board.
    (4) Public company means an insured depository institution or other 
company that has a class of securities registered with the U.S. 
Securities and Exchange Commission or the appropriate Federal banking 
agency under Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and 
nonpublic company means an insured depository institution or other 
company that does not meet the definition of a public company.
    (5) SEC means the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.
    (6) SOX means the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.



Sec. 363.2  Annual reporting requirements.

    (a) Audited financial statements. Each insured depository 
institution shall prepare annual financial statements in accordance with 
GAAP, which shall be audited by an independent public accountant. The 
annual financial statements must reflect all material correcting 
adjustments necessary to conform with GAAP that were identified by the 
independent public accountant.
    (b) Management report. Each insured depository institution annually 
shall prepare, as of the end of the institution's most recent fiscal 
year, a management report that must contain the following:
    (1) A statement of management's responsibilities for preparing the 
institution's annual financial statements, for establishing and 
maintaining an adequate internal control structure and procedures for 
financial reporting, and for complying with laws and regulations 
relating to safety and soundness that are designated by the FDIC and the 
appropriate Federal banking agency;
    (2) An assessment by management of the insured depository 
institution's compliance with such laws and regulations during such 
fiscal year. The assessment must state management's conclusion as to 
whether the insured depository institution has complied with the 
designated safety and soundness laws and regulations during the fiscal 
year and disclose any noncompliance with these laws and regulations; and
    (3) For an insured depository institution with consolidated total 
assets of $1 billion or more as of the beginning of such fiscal year, an 
assessment by management of the effectiveness of such internal control 
structure and procedures as of the end of such fiscal year that must 
include the following:

[[Page 969]]

    (i) A statement identifying the internal control framework \14\ used 
by management to evaluate the effectiveness of the insured depository 
institution's internal control over financial reporting;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \14\ For example, in the United States, the Committee of Sponsoring 
Organizations (COSO) of the Treadway Commission has published Internal 
Control--Integrated Framework, including an addendum on safeguarding 
assets. Known as the COSO report, this publication provides a suitable 
and available framework for purposes of management's assessment.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) A statement that the assessment included controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with 
regulatory reporting instructions including identification of such 
regulatory reporting instructions; and
    (iii) A statement expressing management's conclusion as to whether 
the insured depository institution's internal control over financial 
reporting is effective as of the end of its fiscal year. Management must 
disclose all material weaknesses in internal control over financial 
reporting, if any, that it has identified that have not been remediated 
prior to the insured depository institution's fiscal year-end. 
Management is precluded from concluding that the institution's internal 
control over financial reporting is effective if there are one or more 
material weaknesses.
    (c) Management report signatures. Subject to the criteria specified 
in Sec. 363.1(b):
    (1) If the audited financial statements requirement specified in 
Sec. 363.2(a) is satisfied at the insured depository institution level 
and the management report requirement specified in Sec. 363.2(b) is 
satisfied in its entirety at the insured depository institution level, 
the management report must be signed by the chief executive officer and 
the chief accounting officer or chief financial officer of the insured 
depository institution;
    (2) If the audited financial statements requirement specified in 
Sec. 363.2(a) is satisfied at the holding company level and the 
management report requirement specified in Sec. 363.2(b) is satisfied in 
its entirety at the holding company level, the management report must be 
signed by the chief executive officer and the chief accounting officer 
or chief financial officer of the holding company; and
    (3) If the audited financial statements requirement specified in 
Sec. 363.2(a) is satisfied at the holding company level and (i) the 
management report requirement specified in Sec. 363.2(b) is satisfied in 
its entirety at the insured depository institution level or (ii) one or 
more of the components of the management report specified in 
Sec. 363.2(b) is satisfied at the holding company level and the 
remaining components of the management report are satisfied at the 
insured depository institution level, the management report must be 
signed by the chief executive officers and the chief accounting officers 
or chief financial officers of both the holding company and the insured 
depository institution and the management report must clearly indicate 
the level (institution or holding company) at which each of its 
components is being satisfied.



Sec. 363.3  Independent public accountant.

    (a) Annual audit of financial statements. Each insured depository 
institution shall engage an independent public accountant to audit and 
report on its annual financial statements in accordance with generally 
accepted auditing standards or the PCAOB's auditing standards, if 
applicable, and section 37 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831n). The scope of the audit engagement shall be sufficient to 
permit such accountant to determine and report whether the financial 
statements are presented fairly and in accordance with GAAP.
    (b) Internal control over financial reporting. For each insured 
depository institution with total assets of $1 billion or more at the 
beginning of the institution's fiscal year, the independent public 
accountant who audits the institution's financial statements shall 
examine, attest to, and report separately on the assertion of management 
concerning the effectiveness of the institution's internal control 
structure and procedures for financial reporting. The attestation and 
report shall be made in accordance with generally accepted standards for 
attestation engagements

[[Page 970]]

or the PCAOB's auditing standards, if applicable. The accountant's 
report must not be dated prior to the date of the management report and 
management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over 
financial reporting. Notwithstanding the requirements set forth in 
applicable professional standards, the accountant's report must include 
the following:
    (1) A statement identifying the internal control framework used by 
the independent public accountant, which must be the same as the 
internal control framework used by management, to evaluate the 
effectiveness of the insured depository institution's internal control 
over financial reporting;
    (2) A statement that the independent public accountant's evaluation 
included controls over the preparation of regulatory financial 
statements in accordance with regulatory reporting instructions 
including identification of such regulatory reporting instructions; and
    (3) A statement expressing the independent public accountant's 
conclusion as to whether the insured depository institution's internal 
control over financial reporting is effective as of the end of its 
fiscal year. The report must disclose all material weaknesses in 
internal control over financial reporting that the independent public 
accountant has identified that have not been remediated prior to the 
insured depository institution's fiscal year-end. The independent public 
accountant is precluded from concluding that the insured depository 
institution's internal control over financial reporting is effective if 
there are one or more material weaknesses.
    (c) Notice by accountant of termination of services. An independent 
public accountant performing an audit under this part who ceases to be 
the accountant for an insured depository institution shall notify the 
FDIC, the appropriate Federal banking agency, and any appropriate State 
bank supervisor in writing of such termination within 15 days after the 
occurrence of such event, and set forth in reasonable detail the reasons 
for such termination. The written notice shall be filed at the place 
identified in Sec. 363.4(f).
    (d) Communications with audit committee. In addition to the 
requirements for communications with audit committees set forth in 
applicable professional standards, the independent public accountant 
must report the following on a timely basis to the audit committee:
    (1) All critical accounting policies and practices to be used by the 
insured depository institution,
    (2) All alternative accounting treatments within GAAP for policies 
and practices related to material items that the independent public 
accountant has discussed with management, including the ramifications of 
the use of such alternative disclosures and treatments, and the 
treatment preferred by the independent public accountant, and
    (3) Other written communications the independent public accountant 
has provided to management, such as a management letter or schedule of 
unadjusted differences.
    (e) Retention of working papers. The independent public accountant 
must retain the working papers related to the audit of the insured 
depository institution's financial statements and, if applicable, the 
evaluation of the institution's internal control over financial 
reporting for seven years from the report release date, unless a longer 
period of time is required by law.
    (f) Independence. The independent public accountant must comply with 
the independence standards and interpretations of the AICPA, the SEC, 
and the PCAOB. To the extent that any of the rules within any one of 
these independence standards (AICPA, SEC, and PCAOB) is more or less 
restrictive than the corresponding rule in the other independence 
standards, the independent public accountant must comply with the more 
restrictive rule.
    (g) Peer reviews and inspection reports. (1) Prior to commencing any 
services for an insured depository institution under this part, the 
independent public accountant must have received a peer review, or be 
enrolled in a peer review program, that meets acceptable guidelines. 
Acceptable peer reviews include peer reviews performed in accordance 
with the AICPA's Peer Review Standards and inspections conducted by the 
PCAOB.

[[Page 971]]

    (2) Within 15 days of receiving notification that a peer review has 
been accepted or a PCAOB inspection report has been issued, or before 
commencing any audit under this part, whichever is earlier, the 
independent public accountant must file two copies of the most recent 
peer review report and the public portion of the most recent PCAOB 
inspection report, if any, accompanied by any letters of comments, 
response, and acceptance, with the FDIC, Accounting and Securities 
Disclosure Section, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429, if the 
report has not already been filed. The peer review reports and the 
public portions of the PCAOB inspection reports will be made available 
for public inspection by the FDIC.
    (3) Within 15 days of the PCAOB making public a previously nonpublic 
portion of an inspection report, the independent public accountant must 
file two copies of the previously nonpublic portion of the inspection 
report with the FDIC, Accounting and Securities Disclosure Section, 550 
17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429. Such previously nonpublic 
portion of the PCAOB inspection report will be made available for public 
inspection by the FDIC.



Sec. 363.4  Filing and notice requirements.

    (a) Part 363 Annual Report. (1) Each insured depository institution 
shall file with each of the FDIC, the appropriate Federal banking 
agency, and any appropriate State bank supervisor, two copies of its 
Part 363 Annual Report. A Part 363 Annual Report must contain audited 
comparative annual financial statements, the independent public 
accountant's report thereon, a management report, and, if applicable, 
the independent public accountant's attestation report on management's 
assessment concerning the institution's internal control structure and 
procedures for financial reporting as required by Secs. 363.2(a), 
363.3(a), 363.2(b), and 363.3(b), respectively.
    (2) Subject to the criteria specified in Sec. 363.1(b), each insured 
depository institution with consolidated total assets of less than $1 
billion as of the beginning of its fiscal year that is required to file, 
or whose parent holding company is required to file, management's 
assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial 
reporting with the SEC or the appropriate Federal banking agency in 
accordance with section 404 of SOX must submit a copy of such assessment 
to the FDIC, the appropriate Federal banking agency, and any appropriate 
State bank supervisor with its Part 363 Annual Report as additional 
information. This assessment will not be considered part of the 
institution's Part 363 Annual Report.
    (3)(i) Each insured depository institution that is neither a public 
company nor a subsidiary of a public company that meets the criterion 
specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1) shall file its Part 363 Annual Report 
within 120 days after the end of its fiscal year. (ii) Each insured 
depository institution that is a public company or a subsidiary of 
public company that meets the criterion specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1) 
shall file its Part 363 Annual Report within 90 days after the end of 
its fiscal year.
    (b) Public availability. Except for the annual report in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section and the peer reviews and inspection reports in 
Sec. 363.3(g), which shall be available for public inspection, the FDIC 
has determined that all other reports and notifications required by this 
part are exempt from public disclosure by the FDIC.
    (c) Independent public accountant's letters and reports. Except for 
the independent public accountant's reports that are included in its 
Part 363 Annual Report, each insured depository institution shall file 
with the FDIC, the appropriate Federal banking agency, and any 
appropriate State bank supervisor, a copy of any management letter or 
other report issued by its independent public accountant with respect to 
such institution and the services provided by such accountant pursuant 
to this part within 15 days after receipt. Such reports include, but are 
not limited to:
    (1) Any written communication regarding matters that are required to 
be communicated to the audit committee (for example, critical accounting 
policies, alternative accounting treatments discussed with management, 
and any schedule of unadjusted differences),

[[Page 972]]

    (2) Any written communication of significant deficiencies and 
material weaknesses in internal control required by the AICPA's or the 
PCAOB's auditing standards;
    (3) For institutions with total assets of less than $1 billion as of 
the beginning of their fiscal year that are public companies or 
subsidiaries of public companies that meet the criterion specified in 
Sec. 363.1(b)(1), any independent public accountant's report on the 
audit of internal control over financial reporting required by section 
404 of SOX and the PCAOB's auditing standards; and
    (4) For all institutions that are public companies or subsidiaries 
of public companies that meet the criterion specified in 
Sec. 363.1(b)(1), any independent public accountant's written 
communication of all deficiencies in internal control over financial 
reporting that are of a lesser magnitude than significant deficiencies 
required by the PCAOB's auditing standards.
    (d) Notice of engagement or change of accountants. Each insured 
depository institution shall provide, within 15 days after the 
occurrence of any such event, written notice to the FDIC, the 
appropriate Federal banking agency, and any appropriate State bank 
supervisor of the engagement of an independent public accountant, or the 
resignation or dismissal of the independent public accountant previously 
engaged. The notice shall include a statement of the reasons for any 
such resignation or dismissal in reasonable detail.
    (e) Notification of late filing. No extensions of time for filing 
reports required by Sec. 363.4 shall be granted. An insured depository 
institution that is unable to timely file all or any portion of its Part 
363 Annual Report or any other report or notice required by Sec. 363.4 
shall submit a written notice of late filing to the FDIC, the 
appropriate Federal banking agency, and any appropriate State bank 
supervisor. The notice shall disclose the institution's inability to 
timely file all or specified portions of its Part 363 Annual Report or 
any other report or notice and the reasons therefore in reasonable 
detail. The late filing notice shall also state the date by which the 
report or notice will be filed. The written notice shall be filed on or 
before the deadline for filing the Part 363 Annual Report or any other 
report or notice, as appropriate.
    (f) Place for filing. The Part 363 Annual Report, any written 
notification of late filing, and any other report or notice required by 
Sec. 363.4 should be filed as follows:
    (1) FDIC: Appropriate FDIC Regional or Area Office (Division of 
Supervision and Consumer Protection), i.e., the FDIC regional or area 
office in the FDIC region or area that is responsible for monitoring the 
institution or, in the case of a subsidiary institution of a holding 
company, the consolidated company. A filing made on behalf of several 
covered institutions owned by the same parent holding company should be 
accompanied by a transmittal letter identifying all of the institutions 
covered.
    (2) Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (OCC): Appropriate OCC 
Supervisory Office.
    (3) Federal Reserve: Appropriate Federal Reserve Bank.
    (4) Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS): Appropriate OTS District 
Office.
    (5) State bank supervisor: The filing office of the appropriate 
State bank supervisor.



Sec. 363.5  Audit committees.

    (a) Composition and duties. Each insured depository institution 
shall establish an audit committee of its board of directors, the 
composition of which complies with paragraphs (a)(1), (2), and (3) of 
this section. The duties of the audit committee shall include the 
appointment, compensation, and oversight of the independent public 
accountant who performs services required under this part, and reviewing 
with management and the independent public accountant the basis for the 
reports issued under this part.
    (1) Each insured depository institution with total assets of $1 
billion or more as of the beginning of its fiscal year shall establish 
an independent audit committee of its board of directors, the members of 
which shall be outside directors who are independent of management of 
the institution.
    (2) Each insured depository institution with total assets of $500 
million or

[[Page 973]]

more but less than $1 billion as of the beginning of its fiscal year 
shall establish an audit committee of its board of directors, the 
members of which shall be outside directors, the majority of whom shall 
be independent of management of the institution. The appropriate Federal 
banking agency may, by order or regulation, permit the audit committee 
of such an insured depository institution to be made up of less than a 
majority of outside directors who are independent of management, if the 
agency determines that the institution has encountered hardships in 
retaining and recruiting a sufficient number of competent outside 
directors to serve on the audit committee of the institution.
    (3) An outside director is a director who is not, and within the 
preceding fiscal year has not been, an officer or employee of the 
institution or any affiliate of the institution.
    (b) Committees of large institutions. The audit committee of any 
insured depository institution with total assets of more than $3 billion 
as of the beginning of its fiscal year shall include members with 
banking or related financial management expertise, have access to its 
own outside counsel, and not include any large customers of the 
institution. If a large institution is a subsidiary of a holding company 
and relies on the audit committee of the holding company to comply with 
this rule, the holding company's audit committee shall not include any 
members who are large customers of the subsidiary institution.
    (c) Independent public accountant engagement letters. (1) In 
performing its duties with respect to the appointment of the 
institution's independent public accountant, the audit committee shall 
ensure that engagement letters and any related agreements with the 
independent public accountant for services to be performed under this 
part do not contain any limitation of liability provisions that:
    (i) Indemnify the independent public accountant against claims made 
by third parties;
    (ii) Hold harmless or release the independent public accountant from 
liability for claims or potential claims that might be asserted by the 
client insured depository institution, other than claims for punitive 
damages; or
    (iii) Limit the remedies available to the client insured depository 
institution.
    (2) Alternative dispute resolution agreements and jury trial waiver 
provisions are not precluded from engagement letters provided that they 
do not incorporate any limitation of liability provisions set forth in 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section.



       Sec. Appendix A to Part 363--Guidelines and Interpretations

                            Table of Contents

Introduction
Scope of Rule and Definitions (Sec. 363.1)
    1. Measuring Total Assets
    2. Insured Branches of Foreign Banks
    3. Compliance by Holding Company Subsidiaries
    4. Comparable Services and Functions
    4A. Financial Reporting
Annual Reporting Requirements (Sec. 363.2)
    5. Annual Financial Statements
    5A. Institutions Merged out of Existence
    6. Holding Company Statements
    7. Insured Branches of Foreign Banks
    7A. Compliance with Designated Laws and Regulations
    8. Management Report
    8A. Management's Reports on Internal Control over Financial 
Reporting under Part 363 and Section 404 of SOX
    8B. Internal Control Reports and Part 363 Annual Reports for 
Acquired Businesses
    8C. Management's Disclosure of Noncompliance with the Designated 
Laws and Regulations
    9. Safeguarding of Assets
    10. Standards for Internal Control
    11. Service Organizations
    12. Reserved
Role of Independent Public Accountant (Sec. 363.3)
    13. General Qualifications
    14. Reserved
    15. Peer Review Guidelines
    16. Reserved
    17. Information to be Provided to the Independent Public Accountant
    18. Attestation Report and Management Letters
    18A. Internal Control Attestation Standards for Independent Auditors
    19. Reviews with Audit Committee and Management
    20. Notice of Termination
    21. Reliance on Internal Auditors
Filing and Notice Requirements (Sec. 363.4)
    22. Reserved
    23. Notification of Late Filing
    24. Public Availability

[[Page 974]]

    25. Reserved
    26. Notices Concerning Accountants
Audit Committees (Sec. 363.5)
    27. Composition
    28. ``Independent of Management'' Considerations
    29. Reserved
    30. Holding Company Audit Committees
    31. Duties
    32. Banking or Related Financial Management Expertise
    33. Large Customers
    34. Access to Counsel
    35. Transition Period for Forming and Restructuring Audit Committees
Other
    36. Modifications of Guidelines

                              Introduction

    Congress added section 36, ``Early Identification of Needed 
Improvements in Financial Management'' (section 36), to the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act) in 1991.
    The FDIC Board of Directors adopted 12 CFR part 363 of its rules and 
regulations (the Rule) to implement those provisions of section 36 that 
require rulemaking. The FDIC also approved these ``Guidelines and 
Interpretations'' (the Guidelines) and directed that they be published 
with the Rule to facilitate a better understanding of, and full 
compliance with, the provisions of section 36.
    Although not contained in the Rule itself, some of the guidance 
offered restates or refers to statutory requirements of section 36 and 
is therefore mandatory. If that is the case, the statutory provision is 
cited.
    Furthermore, upon adopting the Rule, the FDIC reiterated its belief 
that every insured depository institution, regardless of its size or 
charter, should have an annual audit of its financial statements 
performed by an independent public accountant, and should establish an 
audit committee comprised entirely of outside directors.
    The following Guidelines reflect the views of the FDIC concerning 
the interpretation of section 36. The Guidelines are intended to assist 
insured depository institutions (institutions), their boards of 
directors, and their advisors, including their independent public 
accountants and legal counsel, and to clarify section 36 and the Rule. 
It is recognized that reliance on the Guidelines may result in 
compliance with section 36 and the Rule which may vary from institution 
to institution. Terms which are not explained in the Guidelines have the 
meanings given them in the Rule, the FDI Act, or professional accounting 
and auditing literature.

               Scope of Rule and Definitions (Sec. 363.1)

    1. Measuring Total Assets. To determine whether this part applies, 
an institution should use total assets as reported on its most recent 
Report of Condition (Call Report) or Thrift Financial Report (TFR), the 
date of which coincides with the end of its preceding fiscal year. If 
its fiscal year ends on a date other than the end of a calendar quarter, 
it should use its Call Report or TFR for the quarter end immediately 
preceding the end of its fiscal year.
    2. Insured Branches of Foreign Banks. Unlike other institutions, 
insured branches of foreign banks are not separately incorporated or 
capitalized. To determine whether this part applies, an insured branch 
should measure claims on non-related parties reported on its Report of 
Assets and Liabilities of U.S. Branches and Agencies of Foreign Banks 
(form FFIEC 002).
    3. Compliance by Holding Company Subsidiaries. Audited consolidated 
financial statements and other reports or notices required by this part 
that are submitted by a holding company for any subsidiary institution 
should be accompanied by a cover letter identifying all subsidiary 
institutions subject to part 363 that are included in the holding 
company's submission. When submitting a Part 363 Annual Report, the 
cover letter should identify all subsidiary institutions subject to part 
363 included in the consolidated financial statements and state whether 
the other annual report requirements (i.e., management's statement of 
responsibilities, management's assessment of compliance with designated 
safety and soundness laws and regulations, and, if applicable, 
management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over 
financial reporting and the independent public accountant's attestation 
report on management's internal control assessment) are being satisfied 
for these institutions at the holding company level or at the 
institution level. An institution filing holding company consolidated 
financial statements as permitted by Sec. 363.1(b)(1) also may report on 
changes in its independent public accountant on a holding company basis. 
An institution that does not meet the criteria in Sec. 363.1(b)(2) must 
satisfy the remaining provisions of this part on an individual 
institution basis and maintain its own audit committee. Subject to the 
criteria in Secs. 363.1(b)(1) and (2), a multi-tiered holding company 
may satisfy all of the requirements of this part at the top-tier or any 
mid-tier holding company level.
    4. Comparable Services and Functions. Services and functions will be 
considered ``comparable'' to those required by this part if the holding 
company:
    (a) Prepares reports used by the subsidiary institution to meet the 
requirements of this part;
    (b) Has an audit committee that meets the requirements of this part 
appropriate to its largest subsidiary institution; and
    (c) Prepares and submits management's assessment of compliance with 
the Designated Laws and Regulations defined in guideline

[[Page 975]]

7A and, if applicable, management's assessment of the effectiveness of 
internal control over financial reporting based on information 
concerning the relevant activities and operations of those subsidiary 
institutions within the scope of the Rule.
    4A. Financial Statements Prepared for Regulatory Reporting Purposes. 
(a) As set forth in Sec. 363.3(c) of this part, ``financial reporting,'' 
at a minimum, includes both financial statements prepared in accordance 
with generally accepted accounting principles for the insured depository 
institution or its holding company and financial statements prepared for 
regulatory reporting purposes. More specifically, financial statements 
prepared for regulatory reporting purposes include the schedules 
equivalent to the basic financial statements that are included in an 
insured depository institution's or its holding company's appropriate 
regulatory report (for example, Schedules RC, RI, and RI-A in the 
Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income (Call Report) for an 
insured bank; and Schedules SC and SO, and the Summary of Changes in 
Equity Capital section in Schedule SI in the Thrift Financial Report 
(TFR) for an insured thrift institution). For recognition and 
measurement purposes, financial statements prepared for regulatory 
reporting purposes shall conform to generally accepted accounting 
principles and section 37 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act.
    (b) Financial statements prepared for regulatory reporting purposes 
do not include regulatory reports prepared by a non-bank subsidiary of a 
holding company or an institution. For example, if a bank holding 
company or an insured depository institution owns an insurance 
subsidiary, financial statements prepared for regulatory reporting 
purposes would not include any regulatory reports that the insurance 
subsidiary is required to submit to its appropriate insurance regulatory 
agency.

               Annual Reporting Requirements (Sec. 363.2)

    5. Annual Financial Statements. Each institution (other than an 
insured branch of a foreign bank) should prepare comparative annual 
consolidated financial statements (balance sheets and statements of 
income, changes in equity capital, and cash flows, with accompanying 
footnote disclosures) in accordance with GAAP for each of its two most 
recent fiscal years. Statements for the earlier year may be presented on 
an unaudited basis if the institution was not subject to this part for 
that year and audited statements were not prepared.
    5A. Institutions Merged Out of Existence. An institution that is 
merged out of existence after the end of its fiscal year, but before the 
deadline for filing its Part 363 Annual Report (120 days after the end 
of its fiscal year for an institution that is neither a public company 
nor a subsidiary of a public company that meets the criterion specified 
in Sec. 363.1(b)(1), and 90 days after the end of its fiscal year for an 
institution that is a public company or a subsidiary of a public company 
that meets the criterion specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1)), is not required 
to file a Part 363 Annual Report for the last fiscal year of its 
existence.
    6. Holding Company Statements. Subject to the criterion specified in 
Sec. 363.1(b)(1), subsidiary institutions may file copies of their 
holding company's audited financial statements filed with the SEC or 
prepared for their FR Y-6 Annual Report under the Bank Holding Company 
Act of 1956 to satisfy the audited financial statements requirement of 
Sec. 363.2(a).
    7. Insured Branches of Foreign Banks. An insured branch of a foreign 
bank should satisfy the financial statements requirement by filing one 
of the following for each of its two most recent fiscal years:
    (a) Audited balance sheets, disclosing information about financial 
instruments with off-balance-sheet risk;
    (b) Schedules RAL and L of form FFIEC 002, prepared and audited on 
the basis of the instructions for its preparation; or
    (c) With written approval of the appropriate Federal banking agency, 
consolidated financial statements of the parent bank.
    7A. Compliance with Designated Laws and Regulations. The designated 
laws and regulations are the Federal laws and regulations concerning 
loans to insiders and the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and 
regulations concerning dividend restrictions (the Designated Laws and 
Regulations). Table 1 to this Appendix A lists the designated Federal 
laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and dividend 
restrictions (but not the State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions) that are applicable to each type of institution.
    8. Management Report. Management should perform its own 
investigation and review of compliance with the Designated Laws and 
Regulations and, if required, the effectiveness of internal control over 
financial reporting. Management should maintain records of its 
determinations and assessments until the next Federal safety and 
soundness examination, or such later date as specified by the FDIC or 
the appropriate Federal banking agency. Management should provide in its 
assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial 
reporting, or supplementally, sufficient information to enable the 
accountant to report on its assertions. The management report of an 
insured branch of a foreign bank should be signed by the branch's 
managing official if the branch does not have a chief executive officer 
or a chief accounting or financial officer.
    8A. Management's Reports on Internal Control over Financial 
Reporting under Part 363 and Section 404 of SOX. An institution with $1

[[Page 976]]

billion or more in total assets as of the beginning of its fiscal year 
that is subject to both part 363 and the SEC's rules implementing 
section 404 of SOX (as well as a public holding company permitted under 
the holding company exception in Sec. 363.1(b)(2) to file an internal 
control report on behalf of one or more subsidiary institutions with $1 
billion or more in total assets) can choose either of the following two 
options for filing management's report on internal control over 
financial reporting.
    (i) Management can prepare two separate reports on the institution's 
or the holding company's internal control over financial reporting to 
satisfy the FDIC's part 363 requirements and the SEC's section 404 
requirements; or
    (ii) Management can prepare a single report on internal control over 
financial reporting provided that it satisfies all of the FDIC's part 
363 requirements and all of the SEC's section 404 requirements.
    8B. Internal Control Reports and Part 363 Annual Reports for 
Acquired Businesses. Generally, the FDIC expects management's and the 
related independent public accountant's report on an institution's 
internal control over financial reporting to include controls at an 
institution in its entirety, including all of its consolidated entities. 
However, it may not always be possible for management to conduct an 
assessment of the internal control over financial reporting of an 
acquired business in the period between the consummation date of the 
acquisition and the due date of management's internal control 
assessment.
    (a) In such instances, the acquired business's internal control 
structure and procedures for financial reporting may be excluded from 
management's assessment report and the accountant's attestation report 
on internal control over financial reporting. However, the FDIC expects 
management's assessment report to identify the acquired business, state 
that the acquired business is excluded, and indicate the significance of 
this business to the institution's consolidated financial statements. 
Notwithstanding management's exclusion of the acquired business's 
internal control from its assessment, management should disclose any 
material change to the institution's internal control over financial 
reporting due to the acquisition of this business. Also, management may 
not omit the assessment of the acquired business's internal control from 
more than one annual part 363 assessment report on internal control over 
financial reporting. When the acquired business's internal control over 
financial reporting is excluded from management's assessment, the 
independent public accountant may likewise exclude this acquired 
business's internal control over financial reporting from the 
accountant's evaluation of internal control over financial reporting.
    (b) If the acquired business is or has a consolidated subsidiary 
that is an insured depository institution subject to part 363 and the 
institution is not merged out of existence before the deadline for 
filing its Part 363 Annual Report (120 days after the end of its fiscal 
year for an institution that is neither a public company nor a 
subsidiary of a public company that meets the criterion specified in 
Sec. 363.1(b)(1), and 90 days after the end of its fiscal year for an 
institution that is a public company or a subsidiary of public company 
that meets the criterion specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1)), the acquired 
institution must continue to comply with all of the applicable 
requirements of part 363, including filing its Part 363 Annual Report.
    8C. Management's Disclosure of Noncompliance with the Designated 
Laws and Regulations. Management's disclosure of noncompliance, if any, 
with the Designated Laws and Regulations should separately indicate the 
number of instances or frequency of noncompliance with the Federal laws 
and regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal (and, if 
applicable, State) laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions. The disclosure is not required to specifically identify by 
name the individuals (e.g., officers or directors) who were responsible 
for or were the subject of any such noncompliance. However, the 
disclosure should include appropriate qualitative and quantitative 
information to describe the nature, type, and severity of the 
noncompliance and the dollar amount of the insider loan(s) or 
dividend(s) involved. Similar instances of noncompliance may be 
aggregated as to number of instances and quantified as to the dollar 
amounts or the range of dollar amounts of insider loans and/or dividends 
for which noncompliance occurred. Management may also wish to describe 
any corrective actions taken in response to the instances of 
noncompliance as well any controls or procedures that are being 
developed or that have been developed and implemented to prevent or 
detect and correct future instances of noncompliance on a timely basis.
    9. Safeguarding of Assets. ``Safeguarding of assets,'' as the term 
relates to internal control policies and procedures regarding financial 
reporting and which has precedent in accounting and auditing literature, 
should be encompassed in the management report and the independent 
public accountant's attestation discussed in guideline 18. Testing the 
existence of and compliance with internal controls on the management of 
assets, including loan underwriting and documentation, represents a 
reasonable implementation of section 36. The FDIC expects such internal 
controls to be encompassed by the assertion in the management report, 
but the term ``safeguarding of assets'' need not be specifically

[[Page 977]]

stated. The FDIC does not require the accountant to attest to the 
adequacy of safeguards, but does require the accountant to determine 
whether safeguarding policies exist.\15\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \15\ It is management's responsibility to establish policies 
concerning underwriting and asset management and to make credit 
decisions. The auditor's role is to test compliance with management's 
policies relating to financial reporting.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    10. Standards for Internal Control. The management of each insured 
depository institution with $1 billion or more in total assets as of the 
beginning of its fiscal year should base its assessment of the 
effectiveness of the institution's internal control over financial 
reporting on a suitable, recognized control framework established by a 
body of experts that followed due-process procedures, including the 
broad distribution of the framework for public comment. In addition to 
being available to users of management's reports, a framework is 
suitable only when it:
     Is free from bias;
     Permits reasonably consistent qualitative and quantitative 
measurements of an institution's internal control over financial 
reporting;
     Is sufficiently complete so that those relevant factors 
that would alter a conclusion about the effectiveness of an 
institution's internal control over financial reporting are not omitted; 
and
     Is relevant to an evaluation of internal control over 
financial reporting.
    In the United States, Internal Control--Integrated Framework, 
including its addendum on safeguarding assets, which was published by 
the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, 
and is known as the COSO report, provides a suitable and recognized 
framework for purposes of management's assessment. Other suitable 
frameworks have been published in other countries or may be developed in 
the future. Such other suitable frameworks may be used by management and 
the institution's independent public accountant in assessments, 
attestations, and audits of internal control over financial reporting.
    11. Service Organizations. Although service organizations should be 
considered in determining if internal control over financial reporting 
is effective, an institution's independent public accountant, its 
management, and its audit committee should exercise independent judgment 
concerning that determination. Onsite reviews of service organizations 
may not be necessary to prepare the report required by the Rule, and the 
FDIC does not intend that the Rule establish any such requirement.
    12. [Reserved]

           Role of Independent Public Accountant (Sec. 363.3)

    13. General Qualifications. To provide audit and attest services to 
insured depository institutions, an independent public accountant should 
be registered or licensed to practice as a public accountant, and be in 
good standing, under the laws of the State or other political 
subdivision of the United States in which the home office of the 
institution (or the insured branch of a foreign bank) is located. As 
required by section 36(g)(3)(A)(i), the accountant must agree to provide 
copies of any working papers, policies, and procedures relating to 
services performed under this part.
    14. [Reserved]
    15. Peer Review Guidelines. The following peer review guidelines are 
acceptable:
    (a) The external peer review should be conducted by an organization 
independent of the accountant or firm being reviewed, as frequently as 
is consistent with professional accounting practices;
    (b) The peer review (other than a PCAOB inspection) should be 
generally consistent with AICPA Peer Review Standards; and
    (c) The review should include, if available, at least one audit on 
an insured depository institution or consolidated depository institution 
holding company.
    16. [Reserved]
    17. Information to be Provided to the Independent Public Accountant. 
Attention is directed to section 36(h) which requires institutions to 
provide specified information to their accountants. An institution also 
should provide its accountant with copies of any notice that the 
institution's capital category is being changed or reclassified under 
section 38 of the FDI Act, and any correspondence from the appropriate 
Federal banking agency concerning compliance with this part.
    18. Attestation Report and Management Letters. The independent 
public accountant should provide the institution with any management 
letter and, if applicable, an internal control attestation report (as 
required by section 36(c)(1)) at the conclusion of the audit. The 
independent public accountant's attestation report on internal control 
over financial reporting must specifically include a statement as to 
regulatory reporting. If a holding company subsidiary relies on its 
holding company's management report to satisfy the Part 363 Annual 
Report requirements, the accountant may attest to and report on the 
management's assertions in one report, without reporting separately on 
each subsidiary covered by the Rule. The FDIC has determined that 
management letters are exempt from public disclosure.
    18A. Internal Control Attestation Standards for Independent 
Auditors. (a) Sec. 363.3(b) provides

[[Page 978]]

that the independent public accountant's attestation and report on 
management's assertion concerning the effectiveness of an institution's 
internal control structure and procedures for financial reporting shall 
be made in accordance with generally accepted standards for attestation 
engagements or the PCAOB's auditing standards, if applicable. The 
standards that should be followed by the institution's independent 
public accountant concerning internal control over financial reporting 
for institutions with $1 billion or more in total assets can be 
summarized as follows:
    (1) For an insured institution that is neither a public company nor 
a subsidiary of a public company, its independent public accountant need 
only follow the AICPA's attestation standards.
    (2) For an insured institution that is a public company that is 
required to comply with the auditor attestation requirement of section 
404 of SOX, its independent public accountant should follow the PCAOB's 
auditing standards.
    (3) For an insured institution that is a public company but is not 
required to comply with the auditor attestation requirement of section 
404 of SOX, its independent public accountant is not required to follow 
the PCAOB's auditing standards. In this case, the accountant need only 
follow the AICPA's attestation standards.
    (4) For an insured institution that is a subsidiary of a public 
company that is required to comply with the auditor attestation 
requirement of section 404 of SOX, but is not itself a public company, 
the institution and its independent public accountant have flexibility 
in complying with the internal control requirements of part 363. If the 
conditions specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(2) are met, management and the 
independent public accountant may choose to report on internal control 
over financial reporting at the consolidated holding company level. In 
this situation, the independent public accountant's work would be 
performed for the public company in accordance with the PCAOB's auditing 
standards. Alternatively, the institution may choose to comply with the 
internal control reporting requirements of part 363 at the institution 
level and its independent public accountant could follow the AICPA's 
attestation standards.
    (b) If an independent public accountant need only follow the AICPA's 
attestation standards, the accountant and the insured institution may 
instead agree to have the internal control attestation performed under 
the PCAOB's auditing standards.
    19. Reviews with Audit Committee and Management. The independent 
public accountant should meet with the institution's audit committee to 
review the accountant's reports required by this part before they are 
filed. It also may be appropriate for the accountant to review its 
findings with the institution's board of directors and management.
    20. Notice of Termination. The notice of termination required by 
Sec. 363.3(c) should state whether the independent public accountant 
agrees with the assertions contained in any notice filed by the 
institution under Sec. 363.4(d), and whether the institution's notice 
discloses all relevant reasons for the accountant's termination. Subject 
to the criterion specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1) regarding compliance with 
the audited financial statements requirement at the holding company 
level, the independent public accountant for an insured depository 
institution that is a public company and files reports with its 
appropriate Federal banking agency, or is a subsidiary of a public 
company that files reports with the SEC, may submit the letter it 
furnished to management to be filed with the institution's or the 
holding company's current report (e.g., SEC Form 8-K) concerning a 
change in accountant to satisfy the notice requirements of 
Sec. 363.3(c). Alternatively, if the independent public accountant 
confirms that management has filed a current report (e.g., SEC Form 8-K) 
concerning a change in accountant that satisfies the notice requirements 
of Sec. 363.4(d) and includes an independent public accountant's letter 
that satisfies the requirements of Sec. 363.3(c), the independent public 
accountant may rely on the current report (e.g., SEC Form 8-K) filed 
with the FDIC by management concerning a change in accountant to satisfy 
the notice requirements of Sec. 363.3(c).
    21. Reliance on Internal Auditors. Nothing in this part or this 
Appendix is intended to preclude the ability of the independent public 
accountant to rely on the work of an institution's internal auditor.

               Filing and Notice Requirements (Sec. 363.4)

    22. [Reserved]
    23. Notification of Late Filing. (a) An institution's submission of 
a written notice of late filing does not cure the requirement to timely 
file the Part 363 Annual Report or other reports or notices required by 
Sec. 363.4. An institution's failure to timely file is considered an 
apparent violation of part 363.
    (b) If the late filing notice submitted pursuant to Sec. 363.4(e) 
relates only to a portion of a Part 363 Annual Report or any other 
report or notice, the insured depository institution should file the 
other components of the report or notice within the prescribed filing 
period together with a cover letter that indicates which components of 
its Part 363 Annual Report or other report or notice are omitted. An 
institution may combine the written late filing notice and the cover 
letter into a single notice that is submitted together with the other 
components of the report or notice that are being timely filed.

[[Page 979]]

    24. Public Availability. Each institution's Part 363 Annual Report 
should be available for public inspection at its main and branch offices 
no later than 15 days after it is filed with the FDIC. Alternatively, an 
institution may elect to mail one copy of its Part 363 Annual Report to 
any person who requests it. The Part 363 Annual Report should remain 
available to the public until the Part 363 Annual Report for the next 
year is available. An institution may use its Part 363 Annual Report 
under this part to meet the annual disclosure statement required by 12 
CFR 350.3, if the institution satisfies all other requirements of 12 CFR 
Part 350.
    25. [Reserved]
    26. Notices Concerning Accountants. With respect to any selection, 
change, or termination of an independent public accountant, an 
institution's management and audit committee should be familiar with the 
notice requirements in Sec. 363.4(d) and guideline 20, and management 
should send a copy of any notice required under Sec. 363.4(d) to the 
independent public accountant when it is filed with the FDIC. An insured 
depository institution that is a public company and files reports 
required under the Federal securities laws with its appropriate Federal 
banking agency, or is a subsidiary of a public company that files such 
reports with the SEC, may use its current report (e.g., SEC Form 8-K) 
concerning a change in accountant to satisfy the notice requirements of 
Sec. 363.4(d) subject to the criterion of Sec. 363.1(b)(1) regarding 
compliance with the audited financial statements requirement at the 
holding company level.

                      Audit Committees (Sec. 363.5)

    27. Composition. The board of directors of each institution should 
determine whether each existing or potential audit committee member 
meets the requirements of section 36 and this part. To do so, the board 
of directors should maintain an approved set of written criteria for 
determining whether a director who is to serve on the audit committee is 
an outside director (as defined in Sec. 363.5(a)(3)) and is independent 
of management. At least annually, the board of each institution should 
determine whether each existing or potential audit committee member is 
an outside director. In addition, at least annually, the board of an 
institution with $1 billion or more in total assets as of the beginning 
of its fiscal year should determine whether all existing and potential 
audit committee members are ``independent of management of the 
institution'' and the board of an institution with total assets of $500 
million or more but less than $1 billion as of the beginning of its 
fiscal year should determine whether the majority of all existing and 
potential audit committee members are ``independent of management of the 
institution.'' The minutes of the board of directors should contain the 
results of and the basis for its determinations with respect to each 
existing and potential audit committee member. Because an insured branch 
of a foreign bank does not have a separate board of directors, the FDIC 
will not apply the audit committee requirements to such branch. However, 
any such branch is encouraged to make a reasonable good faith effort to 
see that similar duties are performed by persons whose experience is 
generally consistent with the Rule's requirements for an institution the 
size of the insured branch.
    28. ``Independent of Management'' Considerations. It is not possible 
to anticipate, or explicitly provide for, all circumstances that might 
signal potential conflicts of interest in, or that might bear on, an 
outside director's relationship to an insured depository institution and 
whether the outside director should be deemed ``independent of 
management.'' When assessing an outside director's relationship with an 
institution, the board of directors should consider the issue not merely 
from the standpoint of the director himself or herself, but also from 
the standpoint of persons or organizations with which the director has 
an affiliation. These relationships can include, but are not limited to, 
commercial, banking, consulting, charitable, and family relationships. 
To assist boards of directors in fulfilling their responsibility to 
determine whether existing and potential members of the audit committee 
are ``independent of management,'' paragraphs (a) through (d) of this 
guideline provide guidance for making this determination.
    (a) If an outside director, either directly or indirectly, owns or 
controls, or has owned or controlled within the preceding fiscal year, 
10 percent or more of any outstanding class of voting securities of the 
institution, the institution's board of directors should determine, and 
document its basis and rationale for such determination, whether such 
ownership of voting securities would interfere with the outside 
director's exercise of independent judgment in carrying out the 
responsibilities of an audit committee member, including the ability to 
evaluate objectively the propriety of management's accounting, internal 
control, and reporting policies and practices. Notwithstanding the 
criteria set forth in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this guideline, if 
the board of directors determines that such ownership of voting 
securities would interfere with the outside director's exercise of 
independent judgment, the outside director will not be considered 
``independent of management.''
    (b) The following list sets forth additional criteria that, at a 
minimum, a board of directors should consider when determining whether 
an outside director is ``independent of management.'' The board of 
directors may conclude that additional criteria are also

[[Page 980]]

relevant to this determination in light of the particular circumstances 
of its institution. Accordingly, an outside director will not be 
considered ``independent of management'' if: (1) The director serves, or 
has served within the last three years, as a consultant, advisor, 
promoter, underwriter, legal counsel, or trustee of or to the 
institution or its affiliates.
    (2) The director has been, within the last three years, an employee 
of the institution or any of its affiliates or an immediate family 
member is, or has been within the last three years, an executive officer 
of the institution or any of its affiliates.
    (3) The director has participated in the preparation of the 
financial statements of the institution or any of its affiliates at any 
time during the last three years.
    (4) The director has received, or has an immediate family member who 
has received, during any twelve-month period within the last three 
years, more than $100,000 in direct and indirect compensation from the 
institution, its subsidiaries, and its affiliates for consulting, 
advisory, or other services other than director and committee fees and 
pension or other forms of deferred compensation for prior service 
(provided such compensation is not contingent in any way on continued 
service). Direct compensation also would not include compensation 
received by the director for former service as an interim chairman or 
interim chief executive officer.
    (5) The director or an immediate family member is a current partner 
of a firm that performs internal or external auditing services for the 
institution or any of its affiliates; the director is a current employee 
of such a firm; the director has an immediate family member who is a 
current employee of such a firm and who participates in the firm's 
audit, assurance, or tax compliance practice; or the director or an 
immediate family member was within the last three years (but no longer 
is) a partner or employee of such a firm and personally worked on the 
audit of the insured depository institution or any of its affiliates 
within that time.
    (6) The director or an immediate family member is, or has been 
within the last three years, employed as an executive officer of another 
entity where any of the present executive officers of the institution or 
any of its affiliates at the same time serves or served on that entity's 
compensation committee.
    (7) The director is a current employee, or an immediate family 
member is a current executive officer, of an entity that has made 
payments to, or received payments from, the institution or any of its 
affiliates for property or services in an amount which, in any of the 
last three fiscal years, exceeds the greater of $200 thousand, or 5 
percent of such entity's consolidated gross revenues. This would include 
payments made by the institution or any of its affiliates to not-for-
profit entities where the director is an executive officer or where an 
immediate family member of the director is an executive officer.
    (8) For purposes of paragraph (b) of this guideline:
    (i) An ``immediate family member'' includes a person's spouse, 
parents, children, siblings, mothers- and fathers-in-law, sons- and 
daughters-in-law, brothers- and sisters-in-law, and anyone (other than 
domestic employees) who shares such person's home.
    (ii) The term affiliate of, or a person affiliated with, a specified 
person, means a person or entity that directly, or indirectly through 
one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is under 
common control with, the person specified.
    (iii) The term indirect compensation for consulting, advisory, or 
other services includes the acceptance of a fee for such services by a 
director's immediate family member or by an organization in which the 
director is a partner or principal that provides accounting, consulting, 
legal, investment banking, or financial advisory services to the 
institution, any of its subsidiaries, or any of its affiliates.
    (iv) The terms direct and indirect compensation and payments do not 
include payments such as dividends arising solely from investments in 
the institution's equity securities, provided the same per share amounts 
are paid to all shareholders of that class; interest income from 
investments in the institution's deposit accounts and debt securities; 
loans from the institution that conform to all regulatory requirements 
applicable to such loans except that interest payments or other fees 
paid in association with such loans would be considered payments; and 
payments under non-discretionary charitable contribution matching 
programs.
    (c) An insured depository institution that is a public company and a 
listed issuer (as defined in Rule 10A-3 of the Securities Exchange Act 
of 1934 (Exchange Act)), or is a subsidiary of a public company that 
meets the criterion specified in Sec. 363.1(b)(1) and is a listed 
issuer, may choose to use the definition of audit committee member 
independence set forth in the listing standards applicable to the public 
institution or its public company parent for purposes of determining 
whether an outside director is ``independent of management.''
    (d) All other insured depository institutions may choose to use the 
definition of audit committee member independence set forth in the 
listing standards of a national securities exchange that is registered 
with the SEC pursuant to section 6 of the Exchange Act or a national 
securities association that is registered with the SEC pursuant to 
section 15A(a) of the Exchange Act for

[[Page 981]]

purposes of determining whether an outside director is ``independent of 
management.''
    29. [Reserved]
    30. Holding Company Audit Committees. (a) When an insured depository 
institution satisfies the requirements for the holding company exception 
specified in Secs. 363.1(b)(1) and (2), the audit committee requirement 
of this part may be satisfied by the audit committee of the top-tier or 
any mid-tier holding company. Members of the audit committee of the 
holding company should meet all the membership requirements applicable 
to the largest subsidiary depository institution subject to part 363 and 
should perform all the duties of the audit committee of a subsidiary 
institution subject to part 363, even if the holding company directors 
are not directors of the institution.
    (b) When an insured depository institution subsidiary with total 
assets of $1 billion or more as of the beginning of its fiscal year does 
not meet the requirements for the holding company exception specified in 
Secs. 363.1(b)(1) and (2) or maintains its own separate audit committee 
to satisfy the requirements of this part, the members of the audit 
committee of the top-tier or any mid-tier holding company may serve on 
the audit committee of the subsidiary institution if they are otherwise 
independent of management of the subsidiary institution, and, if 
applicable, meet any other requirements for a large subsidiary 
institution covered by this part.
    (c) When an insured depository institution with total assets of $500 
million or more but less than $1 billion as of the beginning of its 
fiscal year does not meet the requirements for the holding company 
exception specified in Secs. 363.1(b)(1) and (2) or maintains its own 
separate audit committee to satisfy the requirements of this part, the 
members of the audit committee of the top-tier or any mid-tier holding 
company may serve on the audit committee of the subsidiary institution 
provided a majority of the institution's audit committee members are 
independent of management of the subsidiary institution.
    (d) Officers and employees of a top-tier or any mid-tier holding 
company may not serve on the audit committee of a subsidiary institution 
subject to part 363.
    31. Duties. The audit committee should perform all duties determined 
by the institution's board of directors and it should maintain minutes 
and other relevant records of its meetings and decisions. The duties of 
the audit committee should be appropriate to the size of the institution 
and the complexity of its operations, and, at a minimum, should include 
the appointment, compensation, and oversight of the independent public 
accountant; reviewing with management and the independent public 
accountant the basis for their respective reports issued under 
Secs. 363.2(a) and (b) and Secs. 363.3(a) and (b); reviewing and 
satisfying itself as to the independent public accountant's compliance 
with the required qualifications for independent public accountants set 
forth in Secs. 363.3(f) and (g) and guidelines 13 through 16; ensuring 
that audit engagement letters comply with the provisions of 
Sec. 363.5(c) before engaging an independent public accountant; being 
familiar with the notice requirements in Sec. 363.4(d) and guideline 20 
regarding the selection, change, or termination of an independent public 
accountant; and ensuring that management sends a copy of any notice 
required under Sec. 363.4(d) to the independent public accountant when 
it is filed with the FDIC. Appropriate additional duties could include:
    (a) Reviewing with management and the independent public accountant 
the scope of services required by the audit, significant accounting 
policies, and audit conclusions regarding significant accounting 
estimates;
    (b) Reviewing with management and the accountant their assessments 
of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, and 
the resolution of identified material weaknesses and significant 
deficiencies in internal control over financial reporting, including the 
prevention or detection of management override or compromise of the 
internal control system;
    (c) Reviewing with management the institution's compliance with the 
Designated Laws and Regulations identified in guideline 7A;
    (d) Discussing with management and the independent public accountant 
any significant disagreements between management and the independent 
public accountant; and
    (e) Overseeing the internal audit function.
    32. Banking or Related Financial Management Expertise. At least two 
members of the audit committee of a large institution shall have 
``banking or related financial management expertise'' as required by 
section 36(g)(1)(C)(i). This determination is to be made by the board of 
directors of the insured depository institution. A person will be 
considered to have such required expertise if the person has significant 
executive, professional, educational, or regulatory experience in 
financial, auditing, accounting, or banking matters as determined by the 
board of directors. Significant experience as an officer or member of 
the board of directors or audit committee of a financial services 
company would satisfy these criteria. A person who has the attributes of 
an ``audit committee financial expert'' as set forth in the SEC's rules 
would also satisfy these criteria.
    33. Large Customers. Any individual or entity (including a 
controlling person of any such entity) which, in the determination of 
the board of directors, has such significant direct or indirect credit 
or other relationships with the institution, the termination

[[Page 982]]

of which likely would materially and adversely affect the institution's 
financial condition or results of operations, should be considered a 
``large customer'' for purposes of Sec. 363.5(b).
    34. Access to Counsel. The audit committee should be able to retain 
counsel at its discretion without prior permission of the institution's 
board of directors or its management. Section 36 does not preclude 
advice from the institution's internal counsel or regular outside 
counsel. It also does not require retaining or consulting counsel, but 
if the committee elects to do either, it also may elect to consider 
issues affecting the counsel's independence. Such issues would include 
whether to retain or consult only counsel not concurrently representing 
the institution or any affiliate, and whether to place limitations on 
any counsel representing the institution concerning matters in which 
such counsel previously participated personally and substantially as 
outside counsel to the committee.
    35. Transition Period for Forming and Restructuring Audit 
Committees.
    (a) When an insured depository institution's total assets as of the 
beginning of its fiscal year are $500 million or more for the first time 
and it thereby becomes subject to part 363, no regulatory action will be 
taken if the institution (1) develops and approves a set of written 
criteria for determining whether a director who is to serve on the audit 
committee is an outside director and is independent of management and 
(2) forms or restructures its audit committee to comply with 
Sec. 363.5(a)(2) by the end of that fiscal year.
    (b) When an insured depository institution's total assets as of the 
beginning of its fiscal year are $1 billion or more for the first time, 
no regulatory action will be taken if the institution forms or 
restructures its audit committee to comply with Sec. 363.5(a)(1) by the 
end of that fiscal year, provided that the composition of its audit 
committee meets the requirements specified in Sec. 363.5(a)(2) at the 
beginning of that fiscal year, if such requirements were applicable.
    (c) When an insured depository institution's total assets as of the 
beginning of its fiscal year are $3 billion or more for the first time, 
no regulatory action will be taken if the institution forms or 
restructures its audit committee to comply with Sec. 363.5(b) by the end 
of that fiscal year, provided that the composition of its audit 
committee meets the requirements specified in Sec. 363.5(a)(1) at the 
beginning of that fiscal year, if such requirements were applicable.

                                  Other

    36. Modifications of Guidelines. The FDIC's Board of Directors has 
delegated to the Director of the FDIC's Division of Supervision and 
Consumer Protection authority to make and publish in the Federal 
Register minor technical amendments to the Guidelines in this Appendix 
and the guidance and illustrative reports in Appendix B, in consultation 
with the other appropriate Federal banking agencies, to reflect the 
practical experience gained from implementation of this part. It is not 
anticipated any such modification would be effective until affected 
institutions have been given reasonable advance notice of the 
modification. Any material modification or amendment will be subject to 
review and approval of the FDIC Board of Directors.

                                      Table 1 to Appendix A--Designated Federal Laws and Regulations Applicable to:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                         State member      State non-        Savings
                                                                                       National banks       banks         member banks     associations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Insider Loans--Parts and/or Sections of Title 12 of the United States Code
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
375a............................................  Loans to Executive Officers of                                 (A)              (A)
                                                   Banks.
375b............................................  Extensions of Credit to Executive                              (A)              (A)
                                                   Officers, Directors, and
                                                   Principal Shareholders of Banks.
1468(b).........................................  Extensions of Credit to Executive   ...............  ...............  ...............       
                                                   Officers, Directors, and
                                                   Principal Shareholders.
1828(j)(2)......................................  Extensions of Credit to Officers,   ...............  ...............       
                                                   Directors, and Principal
                                                   Shareholders.
1828(j)(3)(B)...................................  Extensions of Credit to Officers,              (B)   ...............               (C)
                                                   Directors, and Principal
                                                   Shareholders.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Parts and/or Sections of Title 12 of the Code of Federal Regulations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
31..............................................  Extensions of Credit to Insiders..          ...............  ...............
32..............................................  Lending Limits....................          ...............  ...............
215.............................................  Loans to Executive Officers,                                   (D)              (E)
                                                   Directors, and Principal
                                                   Shareholders of Member Banks.

[[Page 983]]

 
337.3...........................................  Limits on Extensions of Credit to   ...............  ...............       
                                                   Executive Officers, Directors,
                                                   and Principal Shareholders of
                                                   Insured Nonmember Banks.
563.43..........................................  Loans by Savings Associations to    ...............  ...............  ...............       
                                                   Their Executive Officers,
                                                   Directors, and Principal
                                                   Shareholders.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Dividend Restrictions--Parts and/or Sections of Title 12 of the United States Code
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
56..............................................  Prohibition on Withdrawal of                        ...............
                                                   Capital and Unearned Dividends.
60..............................................  Dividends and Surplus Fund........                  ...............
1467a(f)........................................  Declaration of Dividend...........  ...............  ...............  ...............       
1831o(d)(1).....................................  Prompt Corrective Action--Capital                                
                                                   Distributions Restricted.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Parts and/or Sections of Title 12 of the Code of Federal Regulations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 Subpart E.....................................  Payment of Dividends..............          ...............  ...............
6.6.............................................  Prompt Corrective Action--                  ...............  ...............
                                                   Restrictions on Undercapitalized
                                                   Institutions.
208.5...........................................  Dividends and Other Distributions.  ...............          ...............
208.45..........................................  Prompt Corrective Action--          ...............          ...............
                                                   Restrictions on Undercapitalized
                                                   Institutions.
325.105 or 324.403, as applicable...............  Prompt Corrective Action--          ...............  ...............       
                                                   Restrictions on Undercapitalized
                                                   Institutions.
563 Subpart E...................................  Capital Distributions.............  ...............  ...............  ...............       
565.6...........................................  Prompt Corrective Action--          ...............  ...............  ...............       
                                                   Restrictions on Undercapitalized
                                                   Institutions.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Subsections (g) and (h) of section 22 of the Federal Reserve Act [12 U.S.C. 375a, 375b].
B. Applies only to insured Federal branches of foreign banks.
C. Applies only to insured State branches of foreign banks.
D. See 12 CFR 337.3.
E. See 12 CFR 563.43.


[74 FR 35745, July 20, 2009, as amended at 78 FR 55596, Sept. 10, 2013]



      Sec. Appendix B to Part 363--Illustrative Management Reports

                            Table of Contents

1. General
2. Reporting Scenarios for Institutions that are Holding Company 
          Subsidiaries
3. Illustrative Statements of Management's Responsibilities
4. Illustrative Reports on Management's Assessment of Compliance with 
          Designated Laws and Regulations
5. Illustrative Reports on Management's Assessment of Internal Control 
          Over Financial Reporting
6. Illustrative Management Report--Combined Statement of Management's 
          Responsibilities, Report on Management's Assessment of 
          Compliance With Designated Laws and Regulations, and Report on 
          Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial 
          Reporting
7. Illustrative Cover Letter--Compliance by Holding Company Subsidiaries

    1. General. The reporting scenarios, illustrative management 
reports, and the cover letter (when complying at the holding company 
level) in Appendix B to part 363 are intended to assist managements of 
insured depository institutions in complying with the annual reporting 
requirements of Sec. 363.2 and guideline 3, Compliance by Holding 
Company Subsidiaries, of Appendix A to part 363. However, use of the 
illustrative management reports and cover letter is not required. The 
managements of insured depository institutions are encouraged to tailor 
the wording of their management reports and cover letters to fit their 
particular circumstances, especially when reporting on material 
weaknesses in internal control over financial reporting or noncompliance 
with designated laws and regulations. Terms that are not explained in 
Appendix B have the meanings

[[Page 984]]

given them in part 363, the FDI Act, or professional accounting and 
auditing literature. Instructions to the preparer of the management 
reports are shown in brackets within the illustrative reports.
    2. Reporting Scenarios for Institutions that are Holding Company 
Subsidiaries. (a) Subject to the criteria specified in Sec. 363.1(b), an 
insured depository institution that is a subsidiary of a holding company 
has flexibility in satisfying the reporting requirements of part 363. 
When reporting at the holding company level, the management report, or 
the individual components thereof, should identify those subsidiary 
institutions that are subject to part 363 and the extent to which they 
are included in the scope of the management report or a component of the 
report. The following reporting scenarios reflect how an insured 
depository institution that meets the criteria set forth in 
Sec. 363.1(b) could satisfy the annual reporting requirements of 
Sec. 363.2. Other reporting scenarios are possible.
    (i) An institution that is a subsidiary of a holding company may 
satisfy the requirements for audited financial statements; management's 
statement of responsibilities; management's assessment of the 
institution's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions; management's 
assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial 
reporting, if applicable; and the independent public accountant's 
attestation on management's assertion as to the effectiveness of 
internal control over financial reporting, if applicable, at the insured 
depository institution level.
    (ii) An institution that is a subsidiary of a holding company may 
satisfy the requirements for audited financial statements; management's 
statement of responsibilities; management's assessment of the 
institution's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions; management's 
assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial 
reporting, if applicable; and the independent public accountant's 
attestation on management's assertion as to the effectiveness of 
internal control over financial reporting, if applicable, at the holding 
company level.
    (iii) An institution that is a subsidiary of a holding company may 
satisfy the requirement for audited financial statements at the holding 
company level and may satisfy the requirements for management's 
statement of responsibilities; management's assessment of the 
institution's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions; management's 
assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial 
reporting, if applicable; and the independent public accountant's 
attestation on management's assertion as to the effectiveness of 
internal control over financial reporting, if applicable, at the insured 
depository institution level.
    (iv) An institution that is a subsidiary of a holding company may 
satisfy the requirements for audited financial statements; management's 
statement of responsibilities; and management's assessment of the 
institution's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions at the insured 
depository institution level and may satisfy the requirements for the 
assessment by management of the effectiveness of internal control over 
financial reporting, if applicable; and the independent public 
accountant's attestation on management's assertion as to the 
effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, if 
applicable, at the holding company level.
    (b) For an institution with total assets of $1 billion or more as of 
the beginning of its fiscal year, the assessment by management of the 
effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting and the 
independent public accountant's attestation on management's assertion as 
to the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, if 
applicable, must both be performed at the same level, i.e., either at 
the insured depository institution level or at the holding company 
level.
    (c) Financial statements prepared for regulatory reporting purposes 
encompass the schedules equivalent to the basic financial statements in 
an institution's appropriate regulatory report, e.g., the bank 
Consolidated Reports of Condition and Income (Call Report) and the 
Thrift Financial Report (TFR). Guideline 4A in Appendix A to part 363 
identifies the schedules equivalent to the basic financial statements in 
the Call Report and TFR. When internal control assessments and 
attestations are performed at the holding company level, the FDIC 
believes that holding companies have flexibility in interpreting 
``financial reporting'' as it relates to ``regulatory reporting'' and 
has not objected to several reporting approaches employed by holding 
companies to cover ``regulatory reporting.'' Certain holding companies 
have had management's assessment and the accountant's attestation cover 
the schedules equivalent to the basic financial statements that are 
included in the appropriate regulatory report, e.g., Call Report and the 
TFR, of each subsidiary institution subject to part 363. Other holding 
companies have had management's assessment and the accountant's 
attestation cover the schedules equivalent to

[[Page 985]]

the basic financial statements that are included in the holding 
company's year-end regulatory report (FR Y-9C report) to the Federal 
Reserve Board.
    3. Illustrative Statements of Management's Responsibilities. The 
following illustrative statements of management's responsibilities 
satisfy the requirements of Sec. 363.2(b)(1).
    (a) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level

               Statement of Management's Responsibilities

    The management of ABC Depository Institution (the ``Institution'') 
is responsible for preparing the Institution's annual financial 
statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles; 
for establishing and maintaining an adequate internal control structure 
and procedures for financial reporting, including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with the 
instructions for the [specify the regulatory report]; and for complying 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions.

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

               (b) Statement Made at Holding Company Level

               Statement of Management's Responsibilities

    The management of BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') is 
responsible for preparing the Company's annual financial statements in 
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles; for 
establishing and maintaining an adequate internal control structure and 
procedures for financial reporting, including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with the 
instructions for the [specify the regulatory report]; and for complying 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions. The following subsidiary institutions of the 
Company that are subject to Part 363 are included in this statement of 
management's responsibilities: [Identify the subsidiary institutions.]

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

    4. Illustrative Reports on Management's Assessment of Compliance 
with Designated Laws and Regulations. The following illustrative reports 
on management's assessment of compliance with Designated Laws and 
Regulations satisfy the requirements of Sec. 363.2(b)(2).

 (a) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--Compliance 
  With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider Loans and 
                          Dividend Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of ABC Depository Institution (the ``Institution'') 
has assessed the Institution's compliance with the Federal laws and 
regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. 
Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that the Institution 
complied with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider 
loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on 
December 31, 20XX.

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

      (b) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--
 Noncompliance With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Both 
                 Insider Loans and Dividend Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of ABC Depository Institution (the ``Institution'') 
has assessed the Institution's compliance with the Federal laws and 
regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. 
Based upon its assessment, management has determined

[[Page 986]]

that, because of the instance(s) of noncompliance noted below, the 
Institution did not comply with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the 
fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX.
    [Identify and describe the instance or instances of noncompliance 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions, including appropriate qualitative and 
quantitative information to describe the nature, type, and severity of 
the noncompliance and the dollar amounts of the insider loan(s) and 
dividend(s) involved.]

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

 (c) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--Compliance 
  With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider Loans and 
    Noncompliance With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to 
                          Dividend Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of ABC Depository Institution (the ``Institution'') 
has assessed the Institution's compliance with the Federal laws and 
regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. 
Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that the Institution 
complied with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider 
loans during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. Also, 
based upon its assessment, management has determined that, because of 
the instance(s) of noncompliance noted below, the Institution did not 
comply with the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on 
December 31, 20XX.
    [Identify and describe the instance or instances of noncompliance 
with the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions, including appropriate qualitative 
and quantitative information to describe the nature, type, and severity 
of the noncompliance and the dollar amount(s) of the dividend(s) 
involved.]

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

      (d) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--
Noncompliance With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider 
Loans and Compliance With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to 
                          Dividend Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of ABC Depository Institution (the ``Institution'') 
has assessed the Institution's compliance with the Federal laws and 
regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. 
Based upon its assessment, management has determined that, because of 
the instance(s) of noncompliance noted below, the Institution did not 
comply with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans 
during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. Also, based upon 
its assessment, management has concluded that the Institution complied 
with the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on 
December 31, 20XX.
    [Identify and describe the instance or instances of noncompliance 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans, 
including appropriate qualitative and quantitative information to 
describe the nature, type, and severity of the noncompliance and the 
dollar amount(s) of the insider loan(s) involved.]

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

(e) Statement Made at Holding Company Level--Compliance With Designated 
     Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider Loans and Dividend 
                              Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') has assessed 
the Company's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and

[[Page 987]]

the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 
20XX. Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that the 
Company complied with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to 
insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and 
regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year 
that ended on December 31, 20XX. The following subsidiary institutions 
of the Company that are subject to Part 363 are included in this 
assessment of compliance with these designated laws and regulations: 
[Identify the subsidiary institutions.]

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

    (f) Statement Made at Holding Company Level--Noncompliance With 
  Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Both Insider Loans and 
                          Dividend Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') has assessed 
the Company's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the 
fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. The following subsidiary 
institutions of the Company that are subject to Part 363 are included in 
this assessment of compliance with these designated laws and 
regulations: [Identify the subsidiary institutions.]
    Based upon its assessment, management has determined that, because 
of the instance(s) of noncompliance noted below, the Company did not 
comply with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans 
and the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on 
December 31, 20XX.
    [Identify and describe the instance or instances of noncompliance 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions, including appropriate qualitative and 
quantitative information to identify the subsidiary institutions of the 
Company that are subject to Part 363 that had instances of noncompliance 
and describe the nature, type, and severity of the noncompliance and the 
dollar amount(s) of the insider loan(s) and dividend(s) involved.]

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

(g) Statement Made at Holding Company Level--Compliance With Designated 
Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider Loans and Noncompliance With 
   Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Dividend Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') has assessed 
the Company's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the 
fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. The following subsidiary 
institutions of the Company that are subject to Part 363 are included in 
this assessment of compliance with these designated laws and 
regulations: [Identify the subsidiary institutions.]
    Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that the Company 
complied with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider 
loans during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. Also, 
based upon its assessment, management has determined that, because of 
the instance(s) of noncompliance noted below, the Company did not comply 
with the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on 
December 31, 20XX.
    [Identify and describe the instance or instances of noncompliance 
with the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions, including appropriate qualitative 
and quantitative information to identify the subsidiary institutions of 
the Company that are subject to Part 363 that had instances of 
noncompliance and describe the nature, type, and severity of the 
noncompliance and the dollar amount(s) of the dividend(s) involved.]

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

[[Page 988]]

    (h) Statement Made at Holding Company Level--Noncompliance With 
    Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider Loans and 
 Compliance With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Dividend 
                              Restrictions

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') has assessed 
the Company's compliance with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the 
fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. The following subsidiary 
institutions of the Company that are subject to Part 363 are included in 
this assessment of compliance with these designated laws and 
regulations: [Identify the subsidiary institutions.]
    Based upon its assessment, management has determined that, because 
of the instance(s) of noncompliance noted below, the Company did not 
comply with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans 
during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX. Also, based upon 
its assessment, management has concluded that the Company complied with 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 
20XX.
    [Identify and describe the instance or instances of noncompliance 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans, 
including appropriate qualitative and quantitative information to 
identify the subsidiary institutions of the Company that are subject to 
Part 363 that had instances of noncompliance and describe the nature, 
type, and severity of the noncompliance and the dollar amount(s) of the 
insider loan(s) involved.]

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

    5. Illustrative Reports on Management's Assessment of Internal 
Control Over Financial Reporting. The following illustrative reports on 
management's assessment of internal control over financial reporting 
satisfy the requirements of Sec. 363.2(b)(3).

(a) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--No Material 
                               Weaknesses

  Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

    ABC Depository Institution's (the ``Institution'') internal control 
over financial reporting is a process effected by those charged with 
governance, management, and other personnel, designed to provide 
reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting 
and the preparation of reliable financial statements in accordance with 
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America 
and financial statements for regulatory reporting purposes, i.e., 
[specify the regulatory reports]. The Institution's internal control 
over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) 
pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, 
accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the 
assets of the Institution; (2) provide reasonable assurance that 
transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of 
financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America and financial statements for 
regulatory reporting purposes, and that receipts and expenditures of the 
Institution are being made only in accordance with authorizations of 
management and directors of the Institution; and (3) provide reasonable 
assurance regarding prevention, or timely detection and correction of 
unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the Institution's 
assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
    Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial 
reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements. Also, 
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are 
subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of 
changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the 
policies and procedures may deteriorate.
    Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining effective 
internal control over financial reporting including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements. Management assessed the 
effectiveness of the Institution's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, based on the 
framework set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the 
Treadway Commission in Internal Control--Integrated Framework. Based 
upon its assessment, management has concluded that, as of December 31, 
20XX, the Institution's internal control over financial reporting, 
including controls over

[[Page 989]]

the preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with 
the instructions for the [specify the regulatory report], is effective 
based on the criteria established in Internal Control--Integrated 
Framework.
    Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control 
over financial reporting, including controls over the preparation of 
regulatory financial statements in accordance with the instructions for 
the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, has been 
audited by [name of auditing firm], an independent public accounting 
firm, as stated in their report dated March XX, 20XY.

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

(b) Statement Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--One or More 
                           Material Weaknesses

  Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

    ABC Depository Institution's (the ``Institution'') internal control 
over financial reporting is a process effected by those charged with 
governance, management, and other personnel, designed to provide 
reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting 
and the preparation of reliable financial statements in accordance with 
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America 
and financial statements for regulatory reporting purposes, i.e., 
[specify the regulatory reports]. The Institution's internal control 
over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) 
pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, 
accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the 
assets of the Institution; (2) provide reasonable assurance that 
transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of 
financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America and financial statements for 
regulatory reporting purposes, and that receipts and expenditures of the 
Institution are being made only in accordance with authorizations of 
management and directors of the Institution; and (3) provide reasonable 
assurance regarding prevention, or timely detection and correction of 
unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the Institution's 
assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
    Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial 
reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements. Also, 
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are 
subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of 
changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the 
policies and procedures may deteriorate.
    Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining effective 
internal control over financial reporting including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements. Management assessed the 
effectiveness of the Institution's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, based on the 
framework set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the 
Treadway Commission in Internal Control--Integrated Framework. Because 
of the material weakness (or weaknesses) noted below, management 
determined that the Institution's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], was not effective as of December 31, 
20XX.
    [Identify and describe the material weakness or weaknesses.]
    Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control 
over financial reporting, including controls over the preparation of 
regulatory financial statements in accordance with the instructions for 
the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, has been 
audited by [name of auditing firm], an independent public accounting 
firm, as stated in their report dated March XX, 20XY.

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

   (c) Statement Made at Holding Company Level--No Material Weaknesses

  Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

    BCD Holding Company's (the ``Company'') internal control over 
financial reporting is a process designed and effected by those charged 
with governance, management, and

[[Page 990]]

other personnel, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the 
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of reliable 
financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America and financial statements for 
regulatory reporting purposes, i.e., [specify the regulatory reports]. 
The Company's internal control over financial reporting includes those 
policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records 
that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the 
transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company; (2) provide 
reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to 
permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with accounting 
principles generally accepted in the United States of America and 
financial statements for regulatory reporting purposes, and that 
receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in 
accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the 
Company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention, or 
timely detection and correction of unauthorized acquisition, use, or 
disposition of the Company's assets that could have a material effect on 
the financial statements.
    Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial 
reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements. Also, 
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are 
subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of 
changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the 
policies and procedures may deteriorate.
    Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining effective 
internal control over financial reporting including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements. Management assessed the 
effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, based on the 
framework set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the 
Treadway Commission in Internal Control--Integrated Framework. Based on 
that assessment, management concluded that, as of December 31, 20XX, the 
Company's internal control over financial reporting, including controls 
over the preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance 
with the instructions for the [specify the regulatory report], is 
effective based on the criteria established in Internal Control--
Integrated Framework. The following subsidiary institutions of the 
Company that are subject to Part 363 are included in this assessment of 
the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting: 
[Identify the subsidiary institutions.]
    Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control 
over financial reporting, including controls over the preparation of 
regulatory financial statements in accordance with the instructions for 
the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, has been 
audited by [name of auditing firm], an independent public accounting 
firm, as stated in their report dated March XX, 20XY.

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

   (d) Statement Made at Holding Company Level--One or More Material 
                               Weaknesses

  Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

    BCD Holding Company's (the ``Company'') internal control over 
financial reporting is a process effected by those charged with 
governance, management, and other personnel, designed to provide 
reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting 
and the preparation of reliable financial statements in accordance with 
accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America 
and financial statements for regulatory reporting purposes, i.e., 
[specify the regulatory reports]. The Company's internal control over 
financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) 
pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, 
accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the 
assets of the Company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that 
transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of 
financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America and financial statements for 
regulatory reporting purposes, and that receipts and expenditures of the 
Company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of 
management and directors of the Company; and (3) provide reasonable 
assurance regarding prevention, or timely detection and correction of 
unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the Company's assets 
that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
    Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial 
reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements. Also, 
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are 
subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of 
changes in conditions,

[[Page 991]]

or that the degree of compliance with the policies and procedures may 
deteriorate.
    Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining effective 
internal control over financial reporting including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements. Management assessed the 
effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, based on the 
framework set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the 
Treadway Commission in Internal Control--Integrated Framework. Because 
of the material weakness (or weaknesses) noted below, management 
determined that the Company's internal control over financial reporting, 
including controls over the preparation of regulatory financial 
statements in accordance with the instructions for the [specify the 
regulatory report], was not effective as of December 31, 20XX. The 
following subsidiary institutions of the Company that are subject to 
Part 363 are included in this assessment of the effectiveness of 
internal control over financial reporting: [Identify the subsidiary 
institutions.]
    [Identify and describe the material weakness or weaknesses.]
    Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control 
over financial reporting, including controls over the preparation of 
regulatory financial statements in accordance with the instructions for 
the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, has been 
audited by [name of auditing firm], an independent public accounting 
firm, as stated in their report dated March XX, 20XY.

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

    6. Illustrative Management Report--Combined Statement of 
Management's Responsibilities, Report on Management's Assessment of 
Compliance With Designated Laws and Regulations, and Report on 
Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting, if 
applicable. The following illustrative management reports satisfy the 
requirements of Secs. 363.2(b)(1), (2), and (3).

  (a) Management Report Made at Insured Depository Institution Level--
 Compliance With Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider 
 Loans and Dividend Restrictions and No Material Weaknesses in Internal 
                    Control Over Financial Reporting

                            Management Report

               Statement of Management's Responsibilities

    The management of ABC Depository Institution (the ``Institution'') 
is responsible for preparing the Institution's annual financial 
statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles; 
for establishing and maintaining an adequate internal control structure 
and procedures for financial reporting, including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with the 
instructions for the [specify the regulatory report]; and for complying 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions.

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of the Institution has assessed the Institution's 
compliance with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider 
loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations 
pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on 
December 31, 20XX. Based upon its assessment, management has concluded 
that the Institution complied with the Federal laws and regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State 
laws and regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the 
fiscal year that ended on December 31, 20XX.

  Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

    The Institution's internal control over financial reporting is a 
process effected by those charged with governance, management, and other 
personnel, designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the 
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of reliable 
financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America and financial statements for 
regulatory reporting purposes, i.e., [specify the regulatory reports]. 
The Institution's internal control over financial reporting includes 
those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of 
records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the 
transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Institution; (2) 
provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as

[[Page 992]]

necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance 
with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of 
America and financial statements for regulatory reporting purposes, and 
that receipts and expenditures of the Institution are being made only in 
accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the 
Institution; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention, 
or timely detection and correction of unauthorized acquisition, use, or 
disposition of the Institution's assets that could have a material 
effect on the financial statements.
    Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial 
reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements. Also, 
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are 
subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of 
changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the 
policies and procedures may deteriorate.
    Management assessed the effectiveness of the Institution's internal 
control over financial reporting, including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with the 
instructions for the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 
20XX, based on the framework set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring 
Organizations of the Treadway Commission in Internal Control--Integrated 
Framework.
    Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that, as of 
December 31, 20XX, the Institution's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], is effective based on the criteria 
established in Internal Control--Integrated Framework.
    Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control 
over financial reporting, including controls over the preparation of 
regulatory financial statements in accordance with the instructions for 
the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, has been 
audited by [name of auditing firm], an independent public accounting 
firm, as stated in their report dated March XX, 20XY.

                       ABC Depository Institution

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

  (b) Management Report Made at Holding Company Level--Compliance With 
Designated Laws and Regulations Pertaining to Insider Loans and Dividend 
    Restrictions and No Material Weaknesses in Internal Control Over 
                           Financial Reporting

                            Management Report

    [Instruction--The following illustrative introductory paragraph for 
the management report is applicable only if the same group of subsidiary 
institutions of the holding company that are subject to Part 363 are 
included in all three components of the management report required by 
Part 363: the statement of management's responsibilities, the report on 
management's assessment of compliance with the Designated Laws and 
Regulations pertaining to insider loans and dividend restrictions, and 
the report on management's assessment of internal control over financial 
reporting.]
    In this management report, the following subsidiary institutions of 
the BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') that are subject to Part 363 
are included in the statement of management's responsibilities; the 
report on management's assessment of compliance with the Federal laws 
and regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions; and the report on management's assessment of internal 
control over financial reporting: [Identify the subsidiary 
institutions.]
    [Instruction--The following illustrative introductory paragraph for 
the management report is applicable if the same group of subsidiary 
institutions of the holding company that are subject to Part 363 are 
included in the statement of management's responsibilities and 
management's assessment of compliance with the Designated Laws and 
Regulations pertaining to insider loans and dividend restrictions, but 
only some of the subsidiary institutions in the group are included in 
management's assessment of internal control over financial reporting.]
    In this management report, the following subsidiary institutions of 
BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') that are subject to Part 363 are 
included in the statement of management's responsibilities and the 
report on management's assessment of compliance with the Federal laws 
and regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions: [Identify the subsidiary institutions.] In addition, the 
following subsidiary institutions of the Company that are subject to 
Part 363 are included in the report on management's assessment of 
internal control over financial reporting: [Identify the subsidiary 
institutions.]

[[Page 993]]

               Statement of Management's Responsibilities

    The management of the Company is responsible for preparing the 
Company's annual financial statements in accordance with generally 
accepted accounting principles; for establishing and maintaining an 
adequate internal control structure and procedures for financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report]; and for complying with the Federal laws 
and regulations pertaining to insider loans and the Federal and, if 
applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to dividend 
restrictions.

     Management's Assessment of Compliance With Designated Laws and 
                               Regulations

    The management of the Company has assessed the Company's compliance 
with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to insider loans and 
the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and regulations pertaining to 
dividend restrictions during the fiscal year that ended on December 31, 
20XX. Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that the 
Company complied with the Federal laws and regulations pertaining to 
insider loans and the Federal and, if applicable, State laws and 
regulations pertaining to dividend restrictions during the fiscal year 
that ended on December 31, 20XX.

  Management's Assessment of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

    The Company's internal control over financial reporting is a process 
effected by those charged with governance, management, and other 
personnel, designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the 
reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of reliable 
financial statements in accordance with accounting principles generally 
accepted in the United States of America and financial statements for 
regulatory reporting purposes, i.e., [specify the regulatory reports]. 
The Company's internal control over financial reporting includes those 
policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records 
that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the 
transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company; (2) provide 
reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to 
permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with accounting 
principles generally accepted in the United States of America and 
financial statements for regulatory reporting purposes, and that 
receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in 
accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the 
Company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention, or 
timely detection and correction of unauthorized acquisition, use, or 
disposition of the Company's assets that could have a material effect on 
the financial statements.
    Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial 
reporting may not prevent, or detect and correct misstatements. Also, 
projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are 
subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of 
changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the 
policies and procedures may deteriorate.
    Management assessed the effectiveness of the Company's internal 
control over financial reporting, including controls over the 
preparation of regulatory financial statements in accordance with the 
instructions for the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 
20XX, based on the framework set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring 
Organizations of the Treadway Commission in Internal Control--Integrated 
Framework. Based upon its assessment, management has concluded that, as 
of December 31, 20XX, the Company's internal control over financial 
reporting, including controls over the preparation of regulatory 
financial statements in accordance with the instructions for the 
[specify the regulatory report], is effective based on the criteria 
established in Internal Control--Integrated Framework.
    Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control 
over financial reporting, including controls over the preparation of 
regulatory financial statements in accordance with the instructions for 
the [specify the regulatory report], as of December 31, 20XX, has been 
audited by [name of auditing firm], an independent public accounting 
firm, as stated in their report dated March XX, 20XY.

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________
John Doe, Chief Executive Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________
Jane Doe, Chief Financial Officer

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

    7. Illustrative Cover Letter--Compliance by Holding Company 
Subsidiaries. The following illustrative cover letter satisfies the 
requirements of guideline 3, Compliance by Holding Company Subsidiaries, 
of Appendix A to part 363.

To: (Appropriate FDIC Regional or Area Office) Division of Supervision 
          and Consumer Protection, FDIC, and (Appropriate District or 
          Regional Office of the Primary Federal Regulator(s), if not 
          the FDIC), and
    (Appropriate State Bank Supervisor(s), if applicable)

Dear [Insert addressees]:


[[Page 994]]


    BCD Holding Company (the ``Company'') is filing two copies of the 
Part 363 Annual Report for the fiscal year ended December 31, 20XX, on 
behalf of its insured depository institution subsidiaries listed in the 
chart below that are subject to Part 363. The Part 363 Annual Report 
contains audited comparative annual financial statements, the 
independent public accountant's report on the audited financial 
statements, management's statement of responsibilities, management's 
assessment of compliance with the Designated Laws and Regulations 
pertaining to insider loans and dividend restrictions, and [if 
applicable] management's assessment of and the independent public 
accountant's attestation report on internal control over financial 
reporting. The chart below also indicates the level (institution or 
holding company) at which the requirements of Part 363 are being 
satisfied for each listed insured depository institution subsidiary. [If 
applicable] The Company's other insured depository institution 
subsidiaries that are subject to Part 363, which comply with all of the 
Part 363 annual reporting requirements at the institution level, have 
filed [or will file] their Part 363 Annual Reports separately.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                          Management's
                                                                                         assessment of                             Independent auditor's
  Institutions subject to Part 363      Audited financial    Management's statement     compliance with     Management's internal     internal control
                                           statements          of responsibilities    designated laws and     control assessment     attestation report
                                                                                          regulations
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ABC Depository Institution.........  Holding Company Level.  Holding Company Level.  Holding Company Level  Holding Company Level  Holding Company
                                                                                                                                    Level.
DEF Depository Institution.........  Holding Company Level.  Institution Level.....  Institution Level....  Institution Level....  Institution Level.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    If you have any questions regarding the annual report [or reports] 
of the Company's insured depository institution subsidiaries subject to 
Part 363 or if you need any further information, you may contact me at 
987-654-3210.

                           BCD Holding Company

________________________________________________________________________

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

[Insert officer's name and title.]



PART 364_STANDARDS FOR SAFETY AND SOUNDNESS--Table of Contents



Sec.
364.100  Purpose.
364.101  Standards for safety and soundness.

Appendix A to Part 364--Interagency Guidelines Establishing Standards 
          for Safety and Soundness
Appendix B to Part 364--Interagency Guidelines Establishing Information 
          Security Standards

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1818 and 1819 (Tenth), 1831p-1; 15 U.S.C. 
1681b, 1681s, 1681w, 6801(b), 6805(b)(1).

    Source: 80 FR 65907, Oct. 28, 2015, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 364.100  Purpose.

    Section 39 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act requires the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation to establish safety and soundness 
standards. Pursuant to section 39, this part establishes safety and 
soundness standards by guideline.



Sec. 364.101  Standards for safety and soundness.

    (a) General standards. The Interagency Guidelines Establishing 
Standards for Safety and Soundness prescribed pursuant to section 39 of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831p-1), as set forth as 
appendix A to this part, apply to all insured state nonmember banks, to 
state-licensed insured branches of foreign banks, that are subject to 
the provisions of section 39 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, and 
to state savings associations (in aggregate, bank or banks and savings 
association or savings associations).
    (b) Interagency Guidelines Establishing Information Security 
Standards. The Interagency Guidelines Establishing Information Security 
Standards prescribed pursuant to section 39 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1831p-1), and sections 501 and 505(b) of the 
Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (15 U.S.C. 6801, 6805(b)), and with respect to 
the proper disposal of consumer information requirements pursuant to 
section 628 of the Fair Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681w), as set 
forth in appendix B to this part, apply to all insured state nonmember 
banks,

[[Page 995]]

insured state licensed branches of foreign banks, any subsidiaries of 
such entities (except brokers, dealers, persons providing insurance, 
investment companies, and investment advisers), and to state savings 
associations. The interagency regulations and guidelines on identity 
theft detection, prevention, and mitigation prescribed pursuant to 
section 114 of the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003, 15 
U.S.C. 1681m(e), are set forth in Secs. 334.90, 334.91, and appendix J 
of part 334.



    Sec. Appendix A to Part 364--Interagency Guidelines Establishing 
                   Standards for Safety and Soundness

I. Introduction.
A. Preservation of existing authority.
    B. Definitions.
II. Operational and Managerial Standards.
    A. Internal controls and information systems.
    B. Internal audit system.
    C. Loan documentation.
    D. Credit underwriting.
    E. Interest rate exposure.
    F. Asset growth.
    G. Asset quality.
    H. Earnings.
    I. Compensation, fees and benefits.
III. Prohibition on Compensation That Constitutes an Unsafe and Unsound 
          Practice.
    A. Excessive compensation.
    B. Compensation leading to material financial loss.

                             I. Introduction

    i. Section 39 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act \1\ (FDI Act) 
requires each Federal banking agency (collectively, the agencies) to 
establish certain safety and soundness standards by regulation or by 
guidelines for all insured depository institutions. Under section 39, 
the agencies must establish three types of standards: (1) Operational 
and managerial standards; (2) compensation standards; and (3) such 
standards relating to asset quality, earnings, and stock valuation as 
they determine to be appropriate.
    ii. Section 39(a) requires the agencies to establish operational and 
managerial standards relating to: (1) Internal controls, information 
systems and internal audit systems, in accordance with section 36 of the 
FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1831m); (2) loan documentation; (3) credit 
underwriting; (4) interest rate exposure; (5) asset growth; and (6) 
compensation, fees, and benefits, in accordance with subsection (c) of 
section 39. Section 39(b) requires the agencies to establish standards 
relating to asset quality, earnings, and stock valuation that the 
agencies determine to be appropriate.
    iii. Section 39(c) requires the agencies to establish standards 
prohibiting as an unsafe and unsound practice any compensatory 
arrangement that would provide any executive officer, employee, 
director, or principal shareholder of the institution with excessive 
compensation, fees or benefits and any compensatory arrangement that 
could lead to material financial loss to an institution. Section 39(c) 
also requires that the agencies establish standards that specify when 
compensation is excessive.
    iv. If an agency determines that an institution fails to meet any 
standard established by guidelines under subsection (a) or (b) of 
section 39, the agency may require the institution to submit to the 
agency an acceptable plan to achieve compliance with the standard. In 
the event that an institution fails to submit an acceptable plan within 
the time allowed by the agency or fails in any material respect to 
implement an accepted plan, the agency must, by order, require the 
institution to correct the deficiency. The agency may, and in some cases 
must, take other supervisory actions until the deficiency has been 
corrected.
    v. The agencies have adopted amendments to their rules and 
regulations to establish deadlines for submission and review of 
compliance plans.\2\
    vi. The following Guidelines set out the safety and soundness 
standards that the agencies use to identify and address problems at 
insured depository institutions before capital becomes impaired. The 
agencies believe that the standards adopted in these Guidelines serve 
this end without dictating how institutions must be managed and 
operated. These standards are designed to identify potential safety and 
soundness concerns and ensure that action is taken to address those 
concerns before they pose a risk to the Deposit Insurance Fund.

                  A. Preservation of Existing Authority

    Neither section 39 nor these Guidelines in any way limits the 
authority of the agencies to address unsafe or unsound practices, 
violations of law, unsafe or unsound conditions, or other practices. 
Action under section 39 and these Guidelines may be taken independently 
of, in conjunction with, or in addition to any other enforcement action 
available to the agencies. Nothing in these Guidelines limits the 
authority of the FDIC pursuant to section 38(i)(2)(F) of the FDI Act (12 
U.S.C. 1831(o)) and Part 325 of Title 12 of the Code of Federal 
Regulations.

                             B. Definitions

    1. In general. For purposes of these Guidelines, except as modified 
in the Guidelines or unless the context otherwise requires, the

[[Page 996]]

terms used have the same meanings as set forth in sections 3 and 39 of 
the FDI Act (12 U.S.C. 1813 and 1831p-1).
    2. Board of directors, in the case of a state-licensed insured 
branch of a foreign bank and in the case of a federal branch of a 
foreign bank, means the managing official in charge of the insured 
foreign branch.
    3. Compensation means all direct and indirect payments or benefits, 
both cash and non-cash, granted to or for the benefit of any executive 
officer, employee, director, or principal shareholder, including but not 
limited to payments or benefits derived from an employment contract, 
compensation or benefit agreement, fee arrangement, perquisite, stock 
option plan, postemployment benefit, or other compensatory arrangement.
    4. Director shall have the meaning described in 12 CFR 215.2(d).\3\
    5. Executive officer shall have the meaning described in 12 CFR 
215.2(e).\4\
    6. Principal shareholder shall have the meaning described in 12 CFR 
215.2(m).\5\

                II. Operational and Managerial Standards

    A. Internal controls and information systems. An institution should 
have internal controls and information systems that are appropriate to 
the size of the institution and the nature, scope and risk of its 
activities and that provide for:
    1. An organizational structure that establishes clear lines of 
authority and responsibility for monitoring adherence to established 
policies;
    2. Effective risk assessment;
    3. Timely and accurate financial, operational and regulatory 
reports;
    4. Adequate procedures to safeguard and manage assets; and
    5. Compliance with applicable laws and regulations.
    B. Internal audit system. An institution should have an internal 
audit system that is appropriate to the size of the institution and the 
nature and scope of its activities and that provides for:
    1. Adequate monitoring of the system of internal controls through an 
internal audit function. For an institution whose size, complexity or 
scope of operations does not warrant a full scale internal audit 
function, a system of independent reviews of key internal controls may 
be used;
    2. Independence and objectivity;
    3. Qualified persons;
    4. Adequate testing and review of information systems;
    5. Adequate documentation of tests and findings and any corrective 
actions;
    6. Verification and review of management actions to address material 
weaknesses; and
    7. Review by the institution's audit committee or board of directors 
of the effectiveness of the internal audit systems.
    C. Loan documentation. An institution should establish and maintain 
loan documentation practices that:
    1. Enable the institution to make an informed lending decision and 
to assess risk, as necessary, on an ongoing basis;
    2. Identify the purpose of a loan and the source of repayment, and 
assess the ability of the borrower to repay the indebtedness in a timely 
manner;
    3. Ensure that any claim against a borrower is legally enforceable;
    4. Demonstrate appropriate administration and monitoring of a loan; 
and
    5. Take account of the size and complexity of a loan.
    D. Credit underwriting. An institution should establish and maintain 
prudent credit underwriting practices that:
    1. Are commensurate with the types of loans the institution will 
make and consider the terms and conditions under which they will be 
made;
    2. Consider the nature of the markets in which loans will be made;
    3. Provide for consideration, prior to credit commitment, of the 
borrower's overall financial condition and resources, the financial 
responsibility of any guarantor, the nature and value of any underlying 
collateral, and the borrower's character and willingness to repay as 
agreed;
    4. Establish a system of independent, ongoing credit review and 
appropriate communication to management and to the board of directors;
    5. Take adequate account of concentration of credit risk; and
    6. Are appropriate to the size of the institution and the nature and 
scope of its activities.
    E. Interest rate exposure. An institution should:
    1. Manage interest rate risk in a manner that is appropriate to the 
size of the institution and the complexity of its assets and 
liabilities; and
    2. Provide for periodic reporting to management and the board of 
directors regarding interest rate risk with adequate information for 
management and the board of directors to assess the level of risk.
    F. Asset growth. An institution's asset growth should be prudent and 
consider:
    1. The source, volatility and use of the funds that support asset 
growth;
    2. Any increase in credit risk or interest rate risk as a result of 
growth; and
    3. The effect of growth on the institution's capital.
    G. Asset quality. An insured depository institution should establish 
and maintain a system that is commensurate with the institution's size 
and the nature and scope of its operations to identify problem assets 
and prevent deterioration in those assets. The institution should:

[[Page 997]]

    1. Conduct periodic asset quality reviews to identify problem 
assets;
    2. Estimate the inherent losses in those assets and establish 
reserves that are sufficient to absorb estimated losses;
    3. Compare problem asset totals to capital;
    4. Take appropriate corrective action to resolve problem assets;
    5. Consider the size and potential risks of material asset 
concentrations; and
    6. Provide periodic asset reports with adequate information for 
management and the board of directors to assess the level of asset risk.
    H. Earnings. An insured depository institution should establish and 
maintain a system that is commensurate with the institution's size and 
the nature and scope of its operations to evaluate and monitor earnings 
and ensure that earnings are sufficient to maintain adequate capital and 
reserves. The institution should:
    1. Compare recent earnings trends relative to equity, assets, or 
other commonly used benchmarks to the institution's historical results 
and those of its peers;
    2. Evaluate the adequacy of earnings given the size, complexity, and 
risk profile of the institution's assets and operations;
    3. Assess the source, volatility, and sustainability of earnings, 
including the effect of nonrecurring or extraordinary income or expense;
    4. Take steps to ensure that earnings are sufficient to maintain 
adequate capital and reserves after considering the institution's asset 
quality and growth rate; and
    5. Provide periodic earnings reports with adequate information for 
management and the board of directors to assess earnings performance.
    I. Compensation, fees and benefits. An institution should maintain 
safeguards to prevent the payment of compensation, fees, and benefits 
that are excessive or that could lead to material financial loss to the 
institution.

III. Prohibition on Compensation That Constitutes an Unsafe and Unsound 
                                Practice

                        A. Excessive Compensation

    Excessive compensation is prohibited as an unsafe and unsound 
practice. Compensation shall be considered excessive when amounts paid 
are unreasonable or disproportionate to the services performed by an 
executive officer, employee, director, or principal shareholder, 
considering the following:
    1. The combined value of all cash and noncash benefits provided to 
the individual;
    2. The compensation history of the individual and other individuals 
with comparable expertise at the institution;
    3. The financial condition of the institution;
    4. Comparable compensation practices at comparable institutions, 
based upon such factors as asset size, geographic location, and the 
complexity of the loan portfolio or other assets;
    5. For postemployment benefits, the projected total cost and benefit 
to the institution;
    6. Any connection between the individual and any fraudulent act or 
omission, breach of trust or fiduciary duty, or insider abuse with 
regard to the institution; and
    7. Any other factors the agencies determine to be relevant.
    B. Compensation Leading to Material Financial Loss
    Compensation that could lead to material financial loss to an 
institution is prohibited as an unsafe and unsound practice.

    \1\ Section 39 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1831p-1) was added by section 132 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (FDICIA), Pub. L. 102-242, 105 Stat. 
2236 (1991), and amended by section 956 of the Housing and Community 
Development Act of 1992, Pub. L. 102-550, 106 Stat. 3895 (1992) and 
section 318 of the Riegle Community Development and Regulatory 
Improvement Act of 1994, Pub. L. 103-325, 108 Stat. 2160 (1994).
    \2\ For the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, these 
regulations appear at 12 CFR Part 30; for the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System, these regulations appear at 12 CFR Part 263; and 
for the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, these regulations appear 
at 12 CFR Part 308, subpart R.
    \3\ In applying these definitions for savings associations, pursuant 
to 12 U.S.C. 1464, savings associations shall use the terms ``savings 
association'' and ``insured savings association'' in place of the terms 
``member bank'' and ``insured bank''.
    \4\ See footnote 3 in section I.B.4. of this appendix.
    \5\ See footnote 3 in section I.B.4. of this appendix.



    Sec. Appendix B to Part 364--Interagency Guidelines Establishing 
                     Information Security Standards

                            Table of Contents

I. Introduction
    A. Scope
    B. Preservation of Existing Authority
    C. Definitions
II. Standards for Safeguarding Customer Information
    A. Information Security Program
    B. Objectives
III. Development and Implementation of Customer Information Security 
          Program
    A. Involve the Board of Directors
    B. Assess Risk

[[Page 998]]

    C. Manage and Control Risk
    D. Oversee Service Provider Arrangements
    E. Adjust the Program
    F. Report to the Board
    G. Implement the Standards

                             I. Introduction

    The Interagency Guidelines Establishing Information Security 
Standards (Guidelines) set forth standards pursuant to section 39 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1831p-1, and sections 501 and 
505(b), 15 U.S.C. 6801 and 6805(b), of the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act. These 
Guidelines address standards for developing and implementing 
administrative, technical, and physical safeguards to protect the 
security, confidentiality, and integrity of customer information. These 
Guidelines also address standards with respect to the proper disposal of 
consumer information pursuant to sections 621 and 628 of the Fair Credit 
Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681s and 1681w).
    A. Scope. The Guidelines apply to customer information maintained by 
or on behalf of, and to the disposal of consumer information by or on 
the behalf of, entities over which the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation (FDIC) has authority. Such entities, referred to as 
``insured depository institution'' or ``institution'' are banks insured 
by the FDIC (other than members of the Federal Reserve System), state 
savings associations insured by the FDIC, insured state branches of 
foreign banks, and any subsidiaries of such entities (except brokers, 
dealers, persons providing insurance, investment companies, and 
investment advisers).
    B. Preservation of Existing Authority. Neither section 39 nor these 
Guidelines in any way limit the authority of the FDIC to address unsafe 
or unsound practices, violations of law, unsafe or unsound conditions, 
or other practices. The FDIC may take action under section 39 and these 
Guidelines independently of, in conjunction with, or in addition to, any 
other enforcement action available to the FDIC.
    C. Definitions. 1. Except as modified in the Guidelines, or unless 
the context otherwise requires, the terms used in these Guidelines have 
the same meanings as set forth in sections 3 and 39 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813 and 1831p-1).
    2. For purposes of the Guidelines, the following definitions apply:
    a. Board of directors, in the case of a branch or agency of a 
foreign bank, means the managing official in charge of the branch or 
agency.
    b. Consumer Information means any record about an individual, 
whether in paper, electronic, or other form, that is a consumer report 
or is derived from a consumer report and that is maintained or otherwise 
possessed by or on behalf of the institution for a business purpose. 
Consumer information also means a compilation of such records. The term 
does not include any record that does not personally identify an 
individual.
    i. Examples: (1) Consumer information includes:
    (A) A consumer report that an institution obtains;
    (B) information from a consumer report that the institution obtains 
from its affiliate after the consumer has been given a notice and has 
elected not to opt out of that sharing;
    (C) information from a consumer report that the institution obtains 
about an individual who applies for but does not receive a loan, 
including any loan sought by an individual for a business purpose;
    (D) information from a consumer report that the institution obtains 
about an individual who guarantees a loan (including a loan to a 
business entity); or
    (E) information from a consumer report that the institution obtains 
about an employee or prospective employee.
    (2) Consumer information does not include:
    (A) aggregate information, such as the mean score, derived from a 
group of consumer reports; or
    (B) blind data, such as payment history on accounts that are not 
personally identifiable, that may be used for developing credit scoring 
models or for other purposes.
    c. Consumer report has the same meaning as set forth in the Fair 
Credit Reporting Act, 15 U.S.C. 1681a(d).
    d. Customer means any customer of the institution as defined in 
Sec. 332.3(h) of this chapter.
    e. Customer information means any record containing nonpublic 
personal information, as defined in Sec. 332.3(n) of this chapter, about 
a customer, whether in paper, electronic, or other form, that is 
maintained by or on behalf of the institution.
    f. Customer information systems means any methods used to access, 
collect, store, use, transmit, protect, or dispose of customer 
information.
    g. Service provider means any person or entity that maintains, 
processes, or otherwise is permitted access to customer information or 
consumer information through its provision of services directly to the 
institution.

                 II. Standards for Information Security

    A. Information Security Program. Each insured depository institution 
shall implement a comprehensive written information security program 
that includes administrative, technical, and physical safeguards 
appropriate to the size and complexity of the institution and the nature 
and scope of its activities. While all parts of the institution are not 
required to implement a uniform set of policies, all elements of the 
information security program must be coordinated.

[[Page 999]]

    B. Objectives. An institution's information security program shall 
be designed to:
    1. Ensure the security and confidentiality of customer information;
    2. Protect against any anticipated threats or hazards to the 
security or integrity of such information;
    3. Protect against unauthorized access to or use of such information 
that could result in substantial harm or inconvenience to any customer; 
and
    4. Ensure the proper disposal of customer information and consumer 
information.

   III. Development and Implementation of Information Security Program

    A. Involve the Board of Directors. The board of directors or an 
appropriate committee of the board of each insured depository 
institution shall:
    1. Approve the institution's written information security program; 
and
    2. Oversee the development, implementation, and maintenance of the 
institution's information security program, including assigning specific 
responsibility for its implementation and reviewing reports from 
management.
    B. Assess Risk.
    Each institution shall:
    1. Identify reasonably foreseeable internal and external threats 
that could result in unauthorized disclosure, misuse, alteration, or 
destruction of customer information or customer information systems.
    2. Assess the likelihood and potential damage of these threats, 
taking into consideration the sensitivity of customer information.
    3. Assess the sufficiency of policies, procedures, customer 
information systems, and other arrangements in place to control risks.
    C. Manage and Control Risk. Each institution shall:
    1. Design its information security program to control the identified 
risks, commensurate with the sensitivity of the information as well as 
the complexity and scope of the institution's activities. Each 
institution must consider whether the following security measures are 
appropriate for the institution and, if so, adopt those measures the 
institution concludes are appropriate:
    a. Access controls on customer information systems, including 
controls to authenticate and permit access only to authorized 
individuals and controls to prevent employees from providing customer 
information to unauthorized individuals who may seek to obtain this 
information through fraudulent means.
    b. Access restrictions at physical locations containing customer 
information, such as buildings, computer facilities, and records storage 
facilities to permit access only to authorized individuals;
    c. Encryption of electronic customer information, including while in 
transit or in storage on networks or systems to which unauthorized 
individuals may have access;
    d. Procedures designed to ensure that customer information system 
modifications are consistent with the institution's information security 
program;
    e. Dual control procedures, segregation of duties, and employee 
background checks for employees with responsibilities for or access to 
customer information;
    f. Monitoring systems and procedures to detect actual and attempted 
attacks on or intrusions into customer information systems;
    g. Response programs that specify actions to be taken when the 
institution suspects or detects that unauthorized individuals have 
gained access to customer information systems, including appropriate 
reports to regulatory and law enforcement agencies; and
    h. Measures to protect against destruction, loss, or damage of 
customer information due to potential environmental hazards, such as 
fire and water damage or technological failures.
    2. Train staff to implement the institution's information security 
program.
    3. Regularly test the key controls, systems and procedures of the 
information security program. The frequency and nature of such tests 
should be determined by the institution's risk assessment. Tests should 
be conducted or reviewed by independent third parties or staff 
independent of those that develop or maintain the security programs.
    4. Develop, implement, and maintain, as part of its information 
security program, appropriate measures to properly dispose of customer 
information and consumer information in accordance with each of the 
requirements of this paragraph III.
    D. Oversee Service Provider Arrangements. Each institution shall:
    1. Exercise appropriate due diligence in selecting its service 
providers;
    2. Require its service providers by contract to implement 
appropriate measures designed to meet the objectives of these 
Guidelines; and
    3. Where indicated by the institution's risk assessment, monitor its 
service providers to confirm that they have satisfied their obligations 
as required by paragraph D.2. As part of this monitoring, an institution 
should review audits, summaries of test results, or other equivalent 
evaluations of its service providers.
    E. Adjust the Program. Each institution shall monitor, evaluate, and 
adjust, as appropriate, the information security program in light of any 
relevant changes in technology, the sensitivity of its customer 
information, internal or external threats to information, and the 
institution's own changing business arrangements, such as mergers and

[[Page 1000]]

acquisitions, alliances and joint ventures, outsourcing arrangements, 
and changes to customer information systems.
    F. Report to the Board. Each institution shall report to its board 
or an appropriate committee of the board at least annually. This report 
should describe the overall status of the information security program 
and the institution's compliance with these Guidelines. The report, 
which will vary depending upon the complexity of each institution's 
program should discuss material matters related to its program, 
addressing issues such as: Risk assessment; risk management and control 
decisions; service provider arrangements; results of testing; security 
breaches or violations, and management's responses; and recommendations 
for changes in the information security program.
    G. Implement the Standards. 1. Effective date. Each institution must 
implement an information security program pursuant to these Guidelines 
by July 1, 2001.
    2. Two-year grandfathering of agreements with service providers. 
Until July 1, 2003, a contract that an institution has entered into with 
a service provider to perform services for it or functions on its 
behalf, satisfies the provisions of paragraph III.D., even if the 
contract does not include a requirement that the servicer maintain the 
security and confidentiality of customer information as long as the 
institution entered into the contract on or before March 5, 2001.
    3. Effective date for measures relating to the disposal of consumer 
information. Each institution must satisfy these Guidelines with respect 
to the proper disposal of consumer information by July 1, 2005.
    4. Exception for existing agreements with service providers relating 
to the disposal of consumer information. Notwithstanding the requirement 
in paragraph III.G.3., an institution's contracts with its service 
providers that have access to consumer information and that may dispose 
of consumer information, entered into before July 1, 2005, must comply 
with the provisions of the Guidelines relating to the proper disposal of 
consumer information by July 1, 2006.


Supplement A to Appendix B to Part 364 Interagency Guidance on Response 
 Programs for Unauthorized Access to Customer Information and Customer 
                                 Notice

                              I. Background

    This Guidance \1\ interprets section 501(b) of the Gramm-Leach-
Bliley Act (GLBA) and the Interagency Guidelines Establishing 
Information Security Standards (the Security Guidelines) \2\ and 
describes response programs, including customer notification procedures, 
that a financial institution should develop and implement to address 
unauthorized access to or use of customer information that could result 
in substantial harm or inconvenience to a customer. The scope of, and 
definitions of terms used in, this Guidance are identical to those of 
the Security Guidelines. For example, the term ``customer information'' 
is the same term used in the Security Guidelines, and means any record 
containing nonpublic personal information about a customer, whether in 
paper, electronic, or other form, maintained by or on behalf of the 
institution.

                   A. Interagency Security Guidelines

    Section 501(b) of the GLBA required the Agencies to establish 
appropriate standards for financial institutions subject to their 
jurisdiction that include administrative, technical, and physical 
safeguards, to protect the security and confidentiality of customer 
information. Accordingly, the Agencies issued Security Guidelines 
requiring every financial institution to have an information security 
program designed to:
    1. Ensure the security and confidentiality of customer information;
    2. Protect against any anticipated threats or hazards to the 
security or integrity of such information; and
    3. Protect against unauthorized access to or use of such information 
that could result in substantial harm or inconvenience to any customer.

                     B. Risk Assessment and Controls

    1. The Security Guidelines direct every financial institution to 
assess the following risks, among others, when developing its 
information security program:
    a. Reasonably foreseeable internal and external threats that could 
result in unauthorized disclosure, misuse, alteration, or destruction of 
customer information or customer information systems;
    b. The likelihood and potential damage of threats, taking into 
consideration the sensitivity of customer information; and
    c. The sufficiency of policies, procedures, customer information 
systems, and other arrangements in place to control risks.\3\
    2. Following the assessment of these risks, the Security Guidelines 
require a financial institution to design a program to address the 
identified risks. The particular security measures an institution should 
adopt will depend upon the risks presented by the complexity and scope 
of its business. At a minimum, the financial institution is required to 
consider the specific security measures enumerated in the Security 
Guidelines,\4\ and adopt those that are appropriate for the institution, 
including:
    a. Access controls on customer information systems, including 
controls to authenticate and permit access only to authorized

[[Page 1001]]

individuals and controls to prevent employees from providing customer 
information to unauthorized individuals who may seek to obtain this 
information through fraudulent means;
    b. Background checks for employees with responsibilities for access 
to customer information; and
    c. Response programs that specify actions to be taken when the 
financial institution suspects or detects that unauthorized individuals 
have gained access to customer information systems, including 
appropriate reports to regulatory and law enforcement agencies.\5\

                          C. Service Providers

    The Security Guidelines direct every financial institution to 
require its service providers by contract to implement appropriate 
measures designed to protect against unauthorized access to or use of 
customer information that could result in substantial harm or 
inconvenience to any customers.\6\

                          II. Response Program

    Millions of Americans, throughout the country, have been victims of 
identity theft.\7\ Identity thieves misuse personal information they 
obtain from a number of sources, including financial institutions, to 
perpetrate identity theft. Therefore, financial institutions should take 
preventative measures to safeguard customer information against attempts 
to gain unauthorized access to the information. For example, financial 
institutions should place access controls on customer information 
systems and conduct background checks for employees who are authorized 
to access customer information.\8\ However, every financial institution 
should also develop and implement a risk-based response program to 
address incidents of unauthorized access to customer information in 
customer information systems \9\ that occur nonetheless. A response 
program should be a key part of an institution's information security 
program.\10\ The program should be appropriate to the size and 
complexity of the institution and the nature and scope of its 
activities.
    In addition, each institution should be able to address incidents of 
unauthorized access to customer information in customer information 
systems maintained by its domestic and foreign service providers. 
Therefore, consistent with the obligations in the Guidelines that relate 
to these arrangements, and with existing guidance on this topic issued 
by the Agencies,\11\ an institution's contract with its service provider 
should require the service provider to take appropriate actions to 
address incidents of unauthorized access to the financial institution's 
customer information, including notification to the institution as soon 
as possible of any such incident, to enable the institution to 
expeditiously implement its response program.

                   A. Components of a Response Program

    1. At a minimum, an institution's response program should contain 
procedures for the following:
    a. Assessing the nature and scope of an incident, and identifying 
what customer information systems and types of customer information have 
been accessed or misused;
    b. Notifying its primary Federal regulator as soon as possible when 
the institution becomes aware of an incident involving unauthorized 
access to or use of sensitive customer information, as defined below;
    c. Consistent with the Agencies' Suspicious Activity Report 
(``SAR'') regulations,\12\ notifying appropriate law enforcement 
authorities, in addition to filing a timely SAR in situations involving 
Federal criminal violations requiring immediate attention, such as when 
a reportable violation is ongoing;
    d. Taking appropriate steps to contain and control the incident to 
prevent further unauthorized access to or use of customer information, 
for example, by monitoring, freezing, or closing affected accounts, 
while preserving records and other evidence; \13\ and
    e. Notifying customers when warranted.
    2. Where an incident of unauthorized access to customer information 
involves customer information systems maintained by an institution's 
service providers, it is the responsibility of the financial institution 
to notify the institution's customers and regulator. However, an 
institution may authorize or contract with its service provider to 
notify the institutions' customers or regulator on its behalf.

                          III. Customer Notice

    Financial institutions have an affirmative duty to protect their 
customers' information against unauthorized access or use. Notifying 
customers of a security incident involving the unauthorized access or 
use of the customer's information in accordance with the standard set 
forth below is a key part of that duty. Timely notification of customers 
is important to manage an institution's reputation risk. Effective 
notice also may reduce an institution's legal risk, assist in 
maintaining good customer relations, and enable the institution's 
customers to take steps to protect themselves against the consequences 
of identity theft. When customer notification is warranted, an 
institution may not forgo notifying its customers of an incident because 
the institution believes that it may be potentially embarrassed or 
inconvenienced by doing so.

                    A. Standard for Providing Notice

    When a financial institution becomes aware of an incident of 
unauthorized access

[[Page 1002]]

to sensitive customer information, the institution should conduct a 
reasonable investigation to promptly determine the likelihood that the 
information has been or will be misused. If the institution determines 
that misuse of its information about a customer has occurred or is 
reasonably possible, it should notify the affected customer as soon as 
possible. Customer notice may be delayed if an appropriate law 
enforcement agency determines that notification will interfere with a 
criminal investigation and provides the institution with a written 
request for the delay. However, the institution should notify its 
customers as soon as notification will no longer interfere with the 
investigation.

                    1. Sensitive Customer Information

    Under the Guidelines, an institution must protect against 
unauthorized access to or use of customer information that could result 
in substantial harm or inconvenience to any customer. Substantial harm 
or inconvenience is most likely to result from improper access to 
sensitive customer information because this type of information is most 
likely to be misused, as in the commission of identity theft. For 
purposes of this Guidance, sensitive customer information means a 
customer's name, address, or telephone number, in conjunction with the 
customer's social security number, driver's license number, account 
number, credit or debit card number, or a personal identification number 
or password that would permit access to the customer's account. 
Sensitive customer information also includes any combination of 
components of customer information that would allow someone to log onto 
or access the customer's account, such as user name or password or 
password and account number.

                          2. Affected Customers

    If a financial institution, based upon its investigation, can 
determine from its logs or other data precisely which customers' 
information has been improperly accessed, it may limit notification to 
those customers with regard to whom the institution determines that 
misuse of their information has occurred or is reasonably possible. 
However, there may be situations where the institution determines that a 
group of files has been accessed improperly, but is unable to identify 
which specific customers' information has been accessed. If the 
circumstances of the unauthorized access lead the institution to 
determine that misuse of the information is reasonably possible, it 
should notify all customers in the group.

                      B. Content of Customer Notice

    1. Customer notice should be given in a clear and conspicuous 
manner. The notice should describe the incident in general terms and the 
type of customer information that was the subject of unauthorized access 
or use. It also should generally describe what the institution has done 
to protect the customers' information from further unauthorized access. 
In addition, it should include a telephone number that customers can 
call for further information and assistance.\14\ The notice also should 
remind customers of the need to remain vigilant over the next twelve to 
twenty-four months, and to promptly report incidents of suspected 
identify theft to the institution. The notice should include the 
following additional items, when appropriate:
    a. A recommendation that the customer review account statements and 
immediately report any suspicious activity to the institution;
    b. A description of fraud alerts and an explanation of how the 
customer may place a fraud alert in the customer's consumer reports to 
put the customer's creditors on notice that the customer may be a victim 
of fraud;
    c. A recommendation that the customer periodically obtain credit 
reports from each nationwide credit reporting agency and have 
information relating to fraudulent transactions deleted;
    d. An explanation of how the customer may obtain a credit report 
free of charge; and
    e. Information about the availability of the FTC's online guidance 
regarding steps a consumer can take to protect against identity theft. 
The notice should encourage the customer to report any incidents of 
identity theft to the FTC, and should provide the FTC's Web site address 
and toll-free telephone number that customers may use to obtain the 
identity theft guidance and report suspected incidents of identity 
theft.\15\
    2. The Agencies encourage financial institutions to notify the 
nationwide consumer reporting agencies prior to sending notices to a 
large number of customers that include contact information for the 
reporting agencies.

                     C. Delivery of Customer Notice

    Customer notice should be delivered in any manner designed to ensure 
that a customer can reasonably be expected to receive it. For example, 
the institution may choose to contact all customers affected by 
telephone or by mail, or by electronic mail for those customers for whom 
it has a valid email address and who have agreed to receive 
communications electronically.

    \1\ This Guidance was jointly issued by the Board of Governors of 
the Federal Reserve System (Board), the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation (FDIC), the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (OCC), 
and the Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS). Pursuant

[[Page 1003]]

to 12 U.S.C. 5412, the OTS is no longer a party to this Guidance.
    \2\ 12 CFR part 30, app. B (OCC); 12 CFR part 208, app. D-2 and part 
225, app. F (Board); and 12 CFR part 364, app. B (FDIC). The 
``Interagency Guidelines Establishing Information Security Standards'' 
were formerly known as ``The Interagency Guidelines Establishing 
Standards for Safeguarding Customer Information.''
    \3\ See Security Guidelines, III.B.
    \4\ See Security Guidelines, III.C.
    \5\ See Security Guidelines, III.C.
    \6\ See Security Guidelines, II.B, and III.D. Further, the Agencies 
note that, in addition to contractual obligations to a financial 
institution, a service provider may be required to implement its own 
comprehensive information security program in accordance with the 
Safeguards Rule promulgated by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC), 12 
CFR part 314.
    \7\ The FTC estimates that nearly 10 million Americans discovered 
they were victims of some form of identity theft in 2002. See The 
Federal Trade Commission. Identity Theft Survey Report (September 2003), 
available at http://www.ftc.gov/os/2003/09/synovatereport.pdf.
    \8\ Institutions should also conduct background checks of employees 
to ensure that the institution does not violate 12 U.S.C. 1829, which 
prohibits an institution from hiring an individual convicted of certain 
criminal offenses or who is subject to a prohibition order under 12 
U.S.C. 1818(e)(6).
    \9\ Under the Guidelines, an institution's customer information 
systems consist of all of the methods used to access, collect, store, 
use, transmit, protect, or dispose of customer information, including 
the systems maintained by its service providers. See Security 
Guidelines, I.C.2.d.
    \10\ See FFIEC Information Technology Examination Handbook, 
Information Security Booklet, Dec. 2002 available at http://
ithandbook.ffiec.gov/it-booklets/information-security.aspx. Federal 
Reserve SR 97-32, Sound Practice Guidance for Information Security for 
Networks, Dec. 4, 1997; OCC Bulletin 2000-14, ``Infrastructure Threats--
Intrusion Risks'' (May 15, 2000), for additional guidance on preventing, 
detecting, and responding to intrusions into financial institutions 
computer systems.
    \11\ See Federal Reserve SR Ltr. 13-19, Guidance on Managing 
Outsourcing Risk, Dec. 5, 2013; OCC Bulletin 2013-29, ``Third-Party 
Relationships--Risk Management Guidance,'' Oct. 30, 2013; and FDIC FIL 
44-08, Guidance for Managing Third Party Risk, June 6, 2008 and FIL 68-
99, Risk Assessment Tools and Practices for Information System Security, 
July 7, 1999.
    \12\ An institution's obligations to file a SAR is set out in the 
Agencies' SAR regulations and Agency guidance. See, for example, 12 CFR 
21.11 (national banks, Federal branches and agencies); 12 CFR 163.180 
(Federal savings associations); 12 CFR 208.62 (State member banks); 12 
CFR 211.5(k) (Edge and agreement corporations); 12 CFR 211.24(f) 
(uninsured State branches and agencies of foreign banks); 12 CFR 
225.4(f) (bank holding companies and their nonbank subsidiaries); and 12 
CFR part 353 (FDIC-supervised institutions). National banks must file 
SARs in connection with computer intrusions and other computer crimes. 
See OCC Bulletin 2000-14, ``Infrastructure Threats--Intrusion Risks'' 
(May 15, 2000); Advisory Letter 97-9, ``Reporting Computer Related 
Crimes'' (November 19, 1997) (general guidance still applicable though 
instructions for new SAR form published in 65 FR 1229, 1230 (January 7, 
2000)). See also Federal Reserve SR 01-11, Identity Theft and Pretext 
Calling, Apr. 26, 2001.
    \13\ See FFIEC Information Technology Examination Handbook, 
Information Security Booklet, Dec. 2002, pp. 68-74.
    \14\ The institution should, therefore, ensure that it has 
reasonable policies and procedures in place, including trained 
personnel, to respond appropriately to customer inquiries and requests 
for assistance.
    \15\ Currently, the FTC Web site for the ID Theft brochure and the 
FTC Hotline phone number are http://www.consumer.gov/idtheft and 1-877-
IDTHEFT. The institution may also refer customers to any materials 
developed pursuant to section 151(b) of the FACT Act (educational 
materials developed by the FTC to teach the public how to prevent 
identity theft).



PART 365_REAL ESTATE LENDING STANDARDS--Table of Contents



                 Subpart A_Real Estate Lending Standards

Sec.
365.1  Purpose and scope.
365.2  Real estate lending standards.

Appendix A to Subpart A of Part 365--Interagency Guidelines for Real 
          Estate Lending Policies

     Subpart B_Registration of Residential Mortgage Loan Originators

365.101  Authority, purpose, and scope.
365.102  Definitions.
365.103  Registration of mortgage loan originators.
365.104  Policies and procedures.
365.105  Use of unique identifier.

Appendix A to Subpart B of Part 365--Examples of Mortgage Loan 
          Originator Activities

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1828(o) and 5101 et seq.

    Source: 57 FR 62896, 62900, Dec. 31, 1992, unless otherwise noted.

[[Page 1004]]



                 Subpart A_Real Estate Lending Standards



Sec. 365.1  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart, issued pursuant to section 304 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991, 12 U.S.C. 1828(o), 
prescribes standards for real estate lending to be used by insured state 
nonmember banks (including state-licensed insured branches of foreign 
banks) in adopting internal real estate lending policies.

[57 FR 62896, 62900, Dec. 31, 1992, as amended at 75 FR 44692, July 28, 
2010]



Sec. 365.2  Real estate lending standards.

    (a) Each insured state nonmember bank shall adopt and maintain 
written policies that establish appropriate limits and standards for 
extensions of credit that are secured by liens on or interests in real 
estate, or that are made for the purpose of financing permanent 
improvements to real estate.
    (b)(1) Real estate lending policies adopted pursuant to this section 
must:
    (i) Be consistent with safe and sound banking practices;
    (ii) Be appropriate to the size of the institution and the nature 
and scope of its operations; and
    (iii) Be reviewed and approved by the bank's board of directors at 
least annually.
    (2) The lending policies must establish:
    (i) Loan portfolio diversification standards;
    (ii) Prudent underwriting standards, including loan-to-value limits, 
that are clear and measurable;
    (iii) Loan administration procedures for the bank's real estate 
portfolio; and
    (iv) Documentation, approval, and reporting requirements to monitor 
compliance with the bank's real estate lending policies.
    (c) Each insured state nonmember bank must monitor conditions in the 
real estate market in its lending area to ensure that its real estate 
lending policies continue to be appropriate for current market 
conditions.
    (d) The real estate lending policies adopted pursuant to this 
section should reflect consideration of the Interagency Guidelines for 
Real Estate Lending Policies established by the Federal bank and thrift 
supervisory agencies.



  Sec. Appendix A to Subpart A of Part 365--Interagency Guidelines for 
                      Real Estate Lending Policies

    The agencies' regulations require that each insured depository 
institution adopt and maintain a written policy that establishes 
appropriate limits and standards for all extensions of credit that are 
secured by liens on or interests in real estate or made for the purpose 
of financing the construction of a building or other improvements. \5\ 
These guidelines are intended to assist institutions in the formulation 
and maintenance of a real estate lending policy that is appropriate to 
the size of the institution and the nature and scope of its individual 
operations, as well as satisfies the requirements of the regulation.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \5\ The agencies have adopted a uniform rule on real estate lending. 
See 12 CFR part 365 (FDIC); 12 CFR part 208, subpart C (FRB); 12 CFR 
part 34, subpart D (OCC); and 12 CFR 563.100-101 (OTS).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Each institution's policies must be comprehensive, and consistent 
with safe and sound lending practices, and must ensure that the 
institution operates within limits and according to standards that are 
reviewed and approved at least annually by the board of directors. Real 
estate lending is an integral part of many institutions' business plans 
and, when undertaken in a prudent manner, will not be subject to 
examiner criticism.

                Loan Portfolio Management Considerations

    The lending policy should contain a general outline of the scope and 
distribution of the institution's credit facilities and the manner in 
which real estate loans are made, serviced, and collected. In 
particular, the institution's policies on real estate lending should:
     Identify the geographic areas in which the institution will 
consider lending.
     Establish a loan portfolio diversification policy and set 
limits for real estate loans by type and geographic market (e.g., limits 
on higher risk loans).
     Identify appropriate terms and conditions by type of real 
estate loan.
     Establish loan origination and approval procedures, both 
generally and by size and type of loan.
     Establish prudent underwriting standards that are clear and 
measurable, including loan-to-value limits, that are consistent with 
these supervisory guidelines.
     Establish review and approval procedures for exception 
loans, including loans with

[[Page 1005]]

loan-to-value percentages in excess of supervisory limits.
     Establish loan administration procedures, including 
documentation, disbursement, collateral inspection, collection, and loan 
review.
     Establish real estate appraisal and evaluation programs.
     Require that management monitor the loan portfolio and 
provide timely and adequate reports to the board of directors.

    The institution should consider both internal and external factors 
in the formulation of its loan policies and strategic plan. Factors that 
should be considered include:
     The size and financial condition of the institution.
     The expertise and size of the lending staff.
     The need to avoid undue concentrations of risk.
     Compliance with all real estate related laws and 
regulations, including the Community Reinvestment Act, anti-
discrimination laws, and for savings associations, the Qualified Thrift 
Lender test.
     Market conditions.

    The institution should monitor conditions in the real estate markets 
in its lending area so that it can react quickly to changes in market 
conditions that are relevant to its lending decisions. Market supply and 
demand factors that should be considered include:
     Demographic indicators, including population and employment 
trends.
     Zoning requirements.
     Current and projected vacancy, construction, and absorption 
rates.
     Current and projected lease terms, rental rates, and sales 
prices, including concessions.
     Current and projected operating expenses for different 
types of projects.
     Economic indicators, including trends and diversification 
of the lending area.
     Valuation trends, including discount and direct 
capitalization rates.

                         Underwriting Standards

    Prudently underwritten real estate loans should reflect all relevant 
credit factors, including:
     The capacity of the borrower, or income from the underlying 
property, to adequately service the debt.
     The value of the mortgaged property.
     The overall creditworthiness of the borrower.
     The level of equity invested in the property.
     Any secondary sources of repayment.
     Any additional collateral or credit enhancements (such as 
guarantees, mortgage insurance or takeout commitments).

    The lending policies should reflect the level of risk that is 
acceptable to the board of directors and provide clear and measurable 
underwriting standards that enable the institution's lending staff to 
evaluate these credit factors. The underwriting standards should 
address:
     The maximum loan amount by type of property.
     Maximum loan maturities by type of property.
     Amortization schedules.
     Pricing structure for different types of real estate loans.
     Loan-to-value limits by type of property.

    For development and construction projects, and completed commercial 
properties, the policy should also establish, commensurate with the size 
and type of the project or property:
     Requirements for feasibility studies and sensitivity and 
risk analyses (e.g., sensitivity of income projections to changes in 
economic variables such as interest rates, vacancy rates, or operating 
expenses).
     Minimum requirements for initial investment and maintenance 
of hard equity by the borrower (e.g., cash or unencumbered investment in 
the underlying property).
     Minimum standards for net worth, cash flow, and debt 
service coverage of the borrower or underlying property.
     Standards for the acceptability of and limits on non-
amortizing loans.
     Standards for the acceptability of and limits on the use of 
interest reserves.
     Pre-leasing and pre-sale requirements for income-producing 
property.
     Pre-sale and minimum unit release requirements for non-
income-producing property loans.
     Limits on partial recourse or nonrecourse loans and 
requirements for guarantor support.
     Requirements for takeout commitments.
     Minimum covenants for loan agreements.

                           Loan Administration

    The institution should also establish loan administration procedures 
for its real estate portfolio that address:
     Documentation, including:

      Type and frequency of financial statements, including requirements 
for verification of information provided by the borrower;
      Type and frequency of collateral evaluations (appraisals and other 
estimates of value).

     Loan closing and disbursement.
     Payment processing.
     Escrow administration.
     Collateral administration.
     Loan payoffs.
     Collections and foreclosure, including:


[[Page 1006]]


      Delinquency follow-up procedures;
      Foreclosure timing;
      Extensions and other forms of forbearance;
      Acceptance of deeds in lieu of foreclosure.

     Claims processing (e.g., seeking recovery on a defaulted 
loan covered by a government guaranty or insurance program).
     Servicing and participation agreements.

                    Supervisory Loan-to-Value Limits

    Institutions should establish their own internal loan-to-value 
limits for real estate loans. These internal limits should not exceed 
the following supervisory limits:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Loan-to-
                                                                 value
                        Loan category                            limit
                                                               (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raw land....................................................          65
Land development............................................          75
Construction:
    Commercial, multifamily, \1\ and other nonresidential...          80
    1- to 4-family residential..............................          85
Improved property...........................................          85
Owner-occupied 1- to 4-family and home equity...............       (\2\)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Multifamily construction includes condominiums and cooperatives.
\2\ A loan-to-value limit has not been established for permanent
  mortgage or home equity loans on owner-occupied, 1- to 4-family
  residential property. However, for any such loan with a loan-to-value
  ratio that equals or exceeds 90 percent at origination, an institution
  should require appropriate credit enhancement in the form of either
  mortgage insurance or readily marketable collateral.

    The supervisory loan-to-value limits should be applied to the 
underlying property that collateralizes the loan. For loans that fund 
multiple phases of the same real estate project (e.g., a loan for both 
land development and construction of an office building), the 
appropriate loan-to-value limit is the limit applicable to the final 
phase of the project funded by the loan; however, loan disbursements 
should not exceed actual development or construction outlays. In 
situations where a loan is fully cross-collateralized by two or more 
properties or is secured by a collateral pool of two or more properties, 
the appropriate maximum loan amount under supervisory loan-to-value 
limits is the sum of the value of each property, less senior liens, 
multiplied by the appropriate loan-to-value limit for each property. To 
ensure that collateral margins remain within the supervisory limits, 
lenders should redetermine conformity whenever collateral substitutions 
are made to the collateral pool.
    In establishing internal loan-to-value limits, each lender is 
expected to carefully consider the institution-specific and market 
factors listed under ``Loan Portfolio Management Considerations,'' as 
well as any other relevant factors, such as the particular subcategory 
or type of loan. For any subcategory of loans that exhibits greater 
credit risk than the overall category, a lender should consider the 
establishment of an internal loan-to-value limit for that subcategory 
that is lower than the limit for the overall category.
    The loan-to-value ratio is only one of several pertinent credit 
factors to be considered when underwriting a real estate loan. Other 
credit factors to be taken into account are highlighted in the 
``Underwriting Standards'' section above. Because of these other 
factors, the establishment of these supervisory limits should not be 
interpreted to mean that loans at these levels will automatically be 
considered sound.

         Loans in Excess of the Supervisory Loan-to-Value Limits

    The agencies recognize that appropriate loan-to-value limits vary 
not only among categories of real estate loans but also among individual 
loans. Therefore, it may be appropriate in individual cases to originate 
or purchase loans with loan-to-value ratios in excess of the supervisory 
loan-to-value limits, based on the support provided by other credit 
factors. Such loans should be identified in the institution's records, 
and their aggregate amount reported at least quarterly to the 
institution's board of directors. (See additional reporting requirements 
described under ``Exceptions to the General Policy.'')
    The aggregate amount of all loans in excess of the supervisory loan-
to-value limits should not exceed 100 percent of total capital. \2\ 
Moreover, within the aggregate limit, total loans for all commercial, 
agricultural, multifamily or other non-1-to-4 family residential 
properties should not exceed 30 percent of total capital. An institution 
will come under increased supervisory scrutiny as the total of such 
loans approaches these levels.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ For insured state non-member banks, ``total capital'' refers to 
that term described in table I of appendix A to 12 CFR part 325 or 12 
CFR 324.2, as applicable. For state savings associations, the term 
``total capital'' is defined at 12 CFR part 390, subpart Z or 12 CFR 
324.2, as applicable.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

                          Excluded Transactions

    The agencies also recognize that there are a number of lending 
situations in which other factors significantly outweigh the need to 
apply the supervisory loan-to-value limits. These include:
     Loans guaranteed or insured by the U.S. government or its 
agencies, provided that the amount of the guaranty or insurance is at 
least equal to the portion of the loan that exceeds the supervisory 
loan-to-value limit.

[[Page 1007]]

     Loans backed by the full faith and credit of a state 
government, provided that the amount of the assurance is at least equal 
to the portion of the loan that exceeds the supervisory loan-to-value 
limit.
     Loans guaranteed or insured by a state, municipal or local 
government, or an agency thereof, provided that the amount of the 
guaranty or insurance is at least equal to the portion of the loan that 
exceeds the supervisory loan-to-value limit, and provided that the 
lender has determined that the guarantor or insurer has the financial 
capacity and willingness to perform under the terms of the guaranty or 
insurance agreement.
     Loans that are to be sold promptly after origination, 
without recourse, to a financially responsible third party.
     Loans that are renewed, refinanced, or restructured without 
the advancement of new funds or an increase in the line of credit 
(except for reasonable closing costs), or loans that are renewed, 
refinanced, or restructured in connection with a workout situation, 
either with or without the advancement of new funds, where consistent 
with safe and sound banking practices and part of a clearly defined and 
well-documented program to achieve orderly liquidation of the debt, 
reduce risk of loss, or maximize recovery on the loan.
     Loans that facilitate the sale of real estate acquired by 
the lender in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously 
contracted in good faith.
     Loans for which a lien on or interest in real property is 
taken as additional collateral through an abundance of caution by the 
lender (e.g., the institution takes a blanket lien on all or 
substantially all of the assets of the borrower, and the value of the 
real property is low relative to the aggregate value of all other 
collateral).
     Loans, such as working capital loans, where the lender does 
not rely principally on real estate as security and the extension of 
credit is not used to acquire, develop, or construct permanent 
improvements on real property.
     Loans for the purpose of financing permanent improvements 
to real property, but not secured by the property, if such security 
interest is not required by prudent underwriting practice.

                Exceptions to the General Lending Policy

    Some provision should be made for the consideration of loan requests 
from creditworthy borrowers whose credit needs do not fit within the 
institution's general lending policy. An institution may provide for 
prudently underwritten exceptions to its lending policies, including 
loan-to-value limits, on a loan-by-loan basis. However, any exceptions 
from the supervisory loan-to-value limits should conform to the 
aggregate limits on such loans discussed above.
    The board of directors is responsible for establishing standards for 
the review and approval of exception loans. Each institution should 
establish an appropriate internal process for the review and approval of 
loans that do not conform to its own internal policy standards. The 
approval of any such loan should be supported by a written justification 
that clearly sets forth all of the relevant credit factors that support 
the underwriting decision. The justification and approval documents for 
such loans should be maintained as a part of the permanent loan file. 
Each institution should monitor compliance with its real estate lending 
policy and individually report exception loans of a significant size to 
its board of directors.

    Supervisory Review of Real Estate Lending Policies and Practices

    The real estate lending policies of institutions will be evaluated 
by examiners during the course of their examinations to determine if the 
policies are consistent with safe and sound lending practices, these 
guidelines, and the requirements of the regulation. In evaluating the 
adequacy of the institution's real estate lending policies and 
practices, examiners will take into consideration the following factors:
     The nature and scope of the institution's real estate 
lending activities.
     The size and financial condition of the institution.
     The quality of the institution's management and internal 
controls.
     The expertise and size of the lending and loan 
administration staff.
     Market conditions.
    Lending policy exception reports will also be reviewed by examiners 
during the course of their examinations to determine whether the 
institutions' exceptions are adequately documented and appropriate in 
light of all of the relevant credit considerations. An excessive volume 
of exceptions to an institution's real estate lending policy may signal 
a weakening of its underwriting practices, or may suggest a need to 
revise the loan policy.

                               Definitions

    For the purposes of these Guidelines:
    Construction loan means an extension of credit for the purpose of 
erecting or rehabilitating buildings or other structures, including any 
infrastructure necessary for development.
    Extension of credit or loan means:
    (1) The total amount of any loan, line of credit, or other legally 
binding lending commitment with respect to real property; and
    (2) The total amount, based on the amount of consideration paid, of 
any loan, line of

[[Page 1008]]

credit, or other legally binding lending commitment acquired by a lender 
by purchase, assignment, or otherwise.
    Improved property loan means an extension of credit secured by one 
of the following types of real property:
    (1) Farmland, ranchland or timberland committed to ongoing 
management and agricultural production;
    (2) 1- to 4-family residential property that is not owner-occupied;
    (3) Residential property containing five or more individual dwelling 
units;
    (4) Completed commercial property; or
    (5) Other income-producing property that has been completed and is 
available for occupancy and use, except income-producing owner-occupied 
1- to 4-family residential property.
    Land development loan means an extension of credit for the purpose 
of improving unimproved real property prior to the erection of 
structures. The improvement of unimproved real property may include the 
laying or placement of sewers, water pipes, utility cables, streets, and 
other infrastructure necessary for future development.
    Loan origination means the time of inception of the obligation to 
extend credit (i.e., when the last event or prerequisite, controllable 
by the lender, occurs causing the lender to become legally bound to fund 
an extension of credit).
    Loan-to-value or loan-to-value ratio means the percentage or ratio 
that is derived at the time of loan origination by dividing an extension 
of credit by the total value of the property(ies) securing or being 
improved by the extension of credit plus the amount of any readily 
marketable collateral and other acceptable collateral that secures the 
extension of credit. The total amount of all senior liens on or 
interests in such property(ies) should be included in determining the 
loan-to-value ratio. When mortgage insurance or collateral is used in 
the calculation of the loan-to-value ratio, and such credit enhancement 
is later released or replaced, the loan-to-value ratio should be 
recalculated.
    Other acceptable collateral means any collateral in which the lender 
has a perfected security interest, that has a quantifiable value, and is 
accepted by the lender in accordance with safe and sound lending 
practices. Other acceptable collateral should be appropriately 
discounted by the lender consistent with the lender's usual practices 
for making loans secured by such collateral. Other acceptable collateral 
includes, among other items, unconditional irrevocable standby letters 
of credit for the benefit of the lender.
    Owner-occupied, when used in conjunction with the term 1- to 4-
family residential property means that the owner of the underlying real 
property occupies at least one unit of the real property as a principal 
residence of the owner.
    Readily marketable collateral means insured deposits, financial 
instruments, and bullion in which the lender has a perfected interest. 
Financial instruments and bullion must be salable under ordinary 
circumstances with reasonable promptness at a fair market value 
determined by quotations based on actual transactions, on an auction or 
similarly available daily bid and ask price market. Readily marketable 
collateral should be appropriately discounted by the lender consistent 
with the lender's usual practices for making loans secured by such 
collateral.
    Value means an opinion or estimate, set forth in an appraisal or 
evaluation, whichever may be appropriate, of the market value of real 
property, prepared in accordance with the agency's appraisal regulations 
and guidance. For loans to purchase an existing property, the term 
``value'' means the lesser of the actual acquisition cost or the 
estimate of value.
    1- to 4-family residential property means property containing fewer 
than five individual dwelling units, including manufactured homes 
permanently affixed to the underlying property (when deemed to be real 
property under state law).

[57 FR 62896, 62900, Dec. 31, 1992; 58 FR 4460, Jan. 14, 1993. 
Redesignated at 75 FR 44692, July 28, 2010; 78 FR 55597, Sept. 10, 2013]



     Subpart B_Registration of Residential Mortgage Loan Originators

    Source: 75 FR 44692, July 28, 2010, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 365.101  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued pursuant to the Secure and 
Fair Enforcement for Mortgage Licensing Act of 2008, title V of the 
Housing and Economic Recovery Act of 2008 (S.A.F.E. Act) (Pub. L. 110-
289, 122 Stat. 2654, 12 U.S.C. 5101 et seq.).
    (b) Purpose. This subpart implements the S.A.F.E. Act's Federal 
registration requirement for mortgage loan originators. The S.A.F.E. Act 
provides that the objectives of this registration include aggregating 
and improving the flow of information to and between regulators; 
providing increased accountability and tracking of mortgage loan 
originators; enhancing consumer protections; supporting anti-fraud 
measures; and providing consumers with

[[Page 1009]]

easily accessible information at no charge regarding the employment 
history of, and publicly adjudicated disciplinary and enforcement 
actions against, mortgage loan originators.
    (c) Scope--(1) In general. This subpart applies to insured State 
nonmember banks (including State-licensed insured branches of foreign 
banks), their subsidiaries (except brokers, dealers, persons providing 
insurance, investment companies, and investment advisers) (collectively 
referred to in this subpart as insured State nonmember banks), and 
employees of such banks or subsidiaries who act as mortgage loan 
originators.
    (2) De minimis exception. (i) This subpart and the requirements of 
12 U.S.C. 5103(a)(1)(A) and (2) of the S.A.F.E. Act do not apply to any 
employee of an insured State nonmember bank who has never been 
registered or licensed through the Registry as a mortgage loan 
originator if during the past 12 months the employee acted as a mortgage 
loan originator for 5 or fewer residential mortgage loans.
    (ii) Prior to engaging in mortgage loan origination activity that 
exceeds the exception limit in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section, an 
insured State nonmember bank employee must register with the Registry 
pursuant to this subpart.
    (iii) Evasion. Insured State nonmember banks are prohibited from 
engaging in any act or practice to evade the limits of the de minimis 
exception set forth in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section.



Sec. 365.102  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart, the following definitions apply:
    (a) Annual renewal period means November 1 through December 31 of 
each year.
    (b)(1) Mortgage loan originator \1\ means an individual who:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Appendix A of this subpart provides examples of activities that 
would, and would not, cause an employee to fall within this definition 
of mortgage loan originator.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) Takes a residential mortgage loan application; and
    (ii) Offers or negotiates terms of a residential mortgage loan for 
compensation or gain.
    (2) The term mortgage loan originator does not include:
    (i) An individual who performs purely administrative or clerical 
tasks on behalf of an individual who is described in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section;
    (ii) An individual who only performs real estate brokerage 
activities (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 5102(3)(D)) and is licensed or 
registered as a real estate broker in accordance with applicable State 
law, unless the individual is compensated by a lender, a mortgage 
broker, or other mortgage loan originator or by any agent of such 
lender, mortgage broker, or other mortgage loan originator, and meets 
the definition of mortgage loan originator in paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section; or
    (iii) An individual or entity solely involved in extensions of 
credit related to timeshare plans, as that term is defined in 11 U.S.C. 
101(53D).
    (3) Administrative or clerical tasks means the receipt, collection, 
and distribution of information common for the processing or 
underwriting of a loan in the residential mortgage industry and 
communication with a consumer to obtain information necessary for the 
processing or underwriting of a residential mortgage loan.
    (c) Nationwide Mortgage Licensing System and Registry or Registry 
means the system developed and maintained by the Conference of State 
Bank Supervisors and the American Association of Residential Mortgage 
Regulators for the State licensing and registration of State-licensed 
mortgage loan originators and the registration of mortgage loan 
originators pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5107.
    (d) Registered mortgage loan originator or registrant means any 
individual who:
    (1) Meets the definition of mortgage loan originator and is an 
employee of an insured State nonmember bank; and
    (2) Is registered pursuant to this subpart with, and maintains a 
unique identifier through, the Registry.
    (e) Residential mortgage loan means any loan primarily for personal, 
family, or household use that is secured by a mortgage, deed of trust, 
or other equivalent consensual security interest

[[Page 1010]]

on a dwelling (as defined in section 103(v) of the Truth in Lending Act, 
15 U.S.C. 1602(v)) or residential real estate upon which is constructed 
or intended to be constructed a dwelling, and includes refinancings, 
reverse mortgages, home equity lines of credit and other first and 
additional lien loans that meet the qualifications listed in this 
definition.
    (f) Unique identifier means a number or other identifier that:
    (1) Permanently identifies a registered mortgage loan originator;
    (2) Is assigned by protocols established by the Nationwide Mortgage 
Licensing System and Registry, the Federal banking agencies, and the 
Farm Credit Administration to facilitate:
    (i) Electronic tracking of mortgage loan originators; and
    (ii) Uniform identification of, and public access to, the employment 
history of and the publicly adjudicated disciplinary and enforcement 
actions against mortgage loan originators; and
    (3) Must not be used for purposes other than those set forth under 
the S.A.F.E. Act.



Sec. 365.103  Registration of mortgage loan originators.

    (a) Registration requirement--(1) Employee registration. Each 
employee of an insured State nonmember bank who acts as a mortgage loan 
originator must register with the Registry, obtain a unique identifier, 
and maintain this registration in accordance with the requirements of 
this subpart. Any such employee who is not in compliance with the 
registration and unique identifier requirements set forth in this 
subpart is in violation of the S.A.F.E. Act and this subpart.
    (2) Insured State nonmember bank requirement--(i) In general. An 
insured State nonmember bank that employs one or more individuals who 
act as a residential mortgage loan originator must require each such 
employee to register with the Registry, maintain this registration, and 
obtain a unique identifier in accordance with the requirements of this 
subpart.
    (ii) Prohibition. An insured State nonmember bank must not permit an 
employee of the bank who is subject to the registration requirements of 
this subpart to act as a mortgage loan originator for the bank unless 
such employee is registered with the Registry pursuant to this subpart.
    (3) Implementation period for initial registration. An employee of 
an insured State nonmember bank who is a mortgage loan originator must 
complete an initial registration with the Registry pursuant to this 
subpart within 180 days from the date that the FDIC provides in a public 
notice that the Registry is accepting registrations.
    (4) Employees previously registered or licensed through the 
Registry--(i) In general. If an employee of an insured State nonmember 
bank was registered or licensed through, and obtained a unique 
identifier from, the Registry and has maintained this registration or 
license before the employee becomes subject to this subpart at this 
bank, then the registration requirements of the S.A.F.E. Act and this 
subpart are deemed to be met, provided that:
    (A) The employment information in paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(C) and 
(d)(1)(ii) of this section is updated and the requirements of paragraph 
(d)(2) of this section are met;
    (B) New fingerprints of the employee are submitted to the Registry 
for a background check, as required by paragraph (d)(1)(ix) of this 
section, unless the employee has fingerprints on file with the Registry 
that are less than 3 years old;
    (C) The insured State nonmember bank information required in 
paragraphs (e)(1)(i) (to the extent the bank has not previously met 
these requirements) and (e)(2)(i) of this section is submitted to the 
Registry; and
    (D) The registration is maintained pursuant to paragraphs (b) and 
(e)(1)(ii) of this section, as of the date that the employee becomes 
subject to this subpart.
    (ii) Rule for certain acquisitions, mergers, or reorganizations. 
When registered or licensed mortgage loan originators become insured 
State nonmember bank employees as a result of an acquisition, merger, or 
reorganization, only the requirements of paragraphs (a)(4)(i)(A), (C), 
and (D) of this section must be met, and these requirements must be met 
within 60 days from the effective

[[Page 1011]]

date of the acquisition, merger, or reorganization.
    (b) Maintaining registration. (1) A mortgage loan originator who is 
registered with the Registry pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section 
must:
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, renew 
the registration during the annual renewal period, confirming the 
responses set forth in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (viii) of this 
section remain accurate and complete, and updating this information, as 
appropriate; and
    (ii) Update the registration within 30 days of any of the following 
events:
    (A) A change in the name of the registrant;
    (B) The registrant ceases to be an employee of the insured State 
nonmember bank; or
    (C) The information required under paragraphs (d)(1)(iii) through 
(viii) of this section becomes inaccurate, incomplete, or out-of-date.
    (2) A registered mortgage loan originator must maintain his or her 
registration, unless the individual is no longer engaged in the activity 
of a mortgage loan originator.
    (3) The annual registration renewal requirement set forth in 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section does not apply to a registered mortgage 
loan originator who has completed his or her registration with the 
Registry pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section less than 6 months 
prior to the end of the annual renewal period.
    (c) Effective dates--(1) Registration. A registration pursuant to 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section is effective on the date the Registry 
transmits notification to the registrant that the registrant is 
registered.
    (2) Renewals or updates. A renewal or update pursuant to paragraph 
(b) of this section is effective on the date the Registry transmits 
notification to the registrant that the registration has been renewed or 
updated.
    (d) Required employee information--(1) In general. For purposes of 
the registration required by this section, an insured State nonmember 
bank must require each employee who is a mortgage loan originator to 
submit to the Registry, or must submit on behalf of the employee, the 
following categories of information to the extent this information is 
collected by the Registry:
    (i) Identifying information, including the employee's:
    (A) Name and any other names used;
    (B) Home address and contact information;
    (C) Principal business location address and business contact 
information;
    (D) Social security number;
    (E) Gender; and
    (F) Date and place of birth;
    (ii) Financial services-related employment history for the 10 years 
prior to the date of registration or renewal, including the date the 
employee became an employee of the bank;
    (iii) Convictions of any criminal offense involving dishonesty, 
breach of trust, or money laundering against the employee or 
organizations controlled by the employee, or agreements to enter into a 
pretrial diversion or similar program in connection with the prosecution 
for such offense(s);
    (iv) Civil judicial actions against the employee in connection with 
financial services-related activities, dismissals with settlements, or 
judicial findings that the employee violated financial services-related 
statutes or regulations, except for actions dismissed without a 
settlement agreement;
    (v) Actions or orders by a State or Federal regulatory agency or 
foreign financial regulatory authority that:
    (A) Found the employee to have made a false statement or omission or 
been dishonest, unfair or unethical; to have been involved in a 
violation of a financial services-related regulation or statute; or to 
have been a cause of a financial services-related business having its 
authorization to do business denied, suspended, revoked, or restricted;
    (B) Are entered against the employee in connection with a financial 
services-related activity;
    (C) Denied, suspended, or revoked the employee's registration or 
license to engage in a financial services-related activity; disciplined 
the employee or otherwise by order prevented the employee from 
associating with a financial services-related business or restricted the 
employee's activities; or
    (D) Barred the employee from association with an entity or its 
officers

[[Page 1012]]

regulated by the agency or authority or from engaging in a financial 
services-related business;
    (vi) Final orders issued by a State or Federal regulatory agency or 
foreign financial regulatory authority based on violations of any law or 
regulation that prohibits fraudulent, manipulative, or deceptive 
conduct;
    (vii) Revocation or suspension of the employee's authorization to 
act as an attorney, accountant, or State or Federal contractor;
    (viii) Customer-initiated financial services-related arbitration or 
civil action against the employee that required action, including 
settlements, or which resulted in a judgment; and
    (ix) Fingerprints of the employee, in digital form if practicable, 
and any appropriate identifying information for submission to the 
Federal Bureau of Investigation and any governmental agency or entity 
authorized to receive such information in connection with a State and 
national criminal history background check; however, fingerprints 
provided to the Registry that are less than 3 years old may be used to 
satisfy this requirement.
    (2) Employee authorizations and attestation. An employee registering 
as a mortgage loan originator or renewing or updating his or her 
registration under this subpart, and not the employing insured State 
nonmember bank or other employees of the insured State nonmember bank, 
must:
    (i) Authorize the Registry and the employing institution to obtain 
information related to sanctions or findings in any administrative, 
civil, or criminal action, to which the employee is a party, made by any 
governmental jurisdiction;
    (ii) Attest to the correctness of all information required by 
paragraph (d) of this section, whether submitted by the employee or on 
behalf of the employee by the employing bank; and
    (iii) Authorize the Registry to make available to the public 
information required by paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A) and (C), and (d)(1)(ii) 
through (viii) of this section.
    (3) Submission of information. An insured State nonmember bank may 
identify one or more employees of the bank who may submit the 
information required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section to the Registry 
on behalf of the bank's employees provided that this individual, and any 
employee delegated such authority, does not act as a mortgage loan 
originator, consistent with paragraph (e)(1)(i)(F) of this section. In 
addition, an insured State nonmember bank may submit to the Registry 
some or all of the information required by paragraphs (d)(1) and (e)(2) 
of this section for multiple employees in bulk through batch processing 
in a format to be specified by the Registry, to the extent such batch 
processing is made available by the Registry.
    (e) Required bank information. An insured State nonmember bank must 
submit the following categories of information to the Registry:
    (1) Bank record. (i) In connection with the registration of one or 
more mortgage loan originators:
    (A) Name, main office address, and business contact information;
    (B) Internal Revenue Service Employer Tax Identification Number 
(EIN);
    (C) Research Statistics Supervision and Discount (RSSD) number, as 
issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System;
    (D) Identification of its primary Federal regulator;
    (E) Name(s) and contact information of the individual(s) with 
authority to act as the bank's primary point of contact for the 
Registry;
    (F) Name(s) and contact information of the individual(s) with 
authority to enter the information required by paragraphs (d)(1) and (e) 
of this section to the Registry and who may delegate this authority to 
other individuals. For the purpose of providing information required by 
paragraph (e) of this section, this individual and their delegates must 
not act as mortgage loan originators unless the bank has 10 or fewer 
full time or equivalent employees and is not a subsidiary; and
    (G) If a subsidiary of an insured State nonmember bank, indication 
that it is a subsidiary and the RSSD number of the parent bank.
    (ii) Attestation. The individual(s) identified in paragraphs 
(e)(1)(i)(E) and (F) of this section must comply with

[[Page 1013]]

Registry protocols to verify their identity and must attest that they 
have the authority to enter data on behalf of the insured State 
nonmember bank, that the information provided to the Registry pursuant 
to this paragraph (e) is correct, and that the insured State nonmember 
bank will keep the information required by this paragraph (e) current 
and will file accurate supplementary information on a timely basis.
    (iii) An insured State nonmember bank must update the information 
required by this paragraph (e) of this section within 30 days of the 
date that this information becomes inaccurate.
    (iv) An insured State nonmember bank must renew the information 
required by paragraph (e) of this section on an annual basis.
    (2) Employee information. In connection with the registration of 
each employee who acts as a mortgage loan originator:
    (i) After the information required by paragraph (d) of this section 
has been submitted to the Registry, confirmation that it employs the 
registrant; and
    (ii) Within 30 days of the date the registrant ceases to be an 
employee of the bank, notification that it no longer employs the 
registrant and the date the registrant ceased being an employee.



Sec. 365.104  Policies and procedures.

    An insured State nonmember bank that employs one or more mortgage 
loan originators must adopt and follow written policies and procedures 
designed to assure compliance with this subpart. These policies and 
procedures must be appropriate to the nature, size, complexity, and 
scope of the mortgage lending activities of the bank, and apply only to 
those employees acting within the scope of their employment at the bank. 
At a minimum, these policies and procedures must:
    (a) Establish a process for identifying which employees of the bank 
are required to be registered mortgage loan originators;
    (b) Require that all employees of the insured State nonmember bank 
who are mortgage loan originators be informed of the registration 
requirements of the S.A.F.E. Act and this subpart and be instructed on 
how to comply with such requirements and procedures;
    (c) Establish procedures to comply with the unique identifier 
requirements in Sec. 365.105;
    (d) Establish reasonable procedures for confirming the adequacy and 
accuracy of employee registrations, including updates and renewals, by 
comparisons with its own records;
    (e) Establish reasonable procedures and tracking systems for 
monitoring compliance with registration and renewal requirements and 
procedures;
    (f) Provide for independent testing for compliance with this subpart 
to be conducted at least annually by bank personnel or by an outside 
party;
    (g) Provide for appropriate action in the case of any employee who 
fails to comply with the registration requirements of the S.A.F.E. Act, 
this subpart, or the bank's related policies and procedures, including 
prohibiting such employees from acting as mortgage loan originators or 
other appropriate disciplinary actions;
    (h) Establish a process for reviewing employee criminal history 
background reports received pursuant to this subpart, taking appropriate 
action consistent with applicable Federal law, including section 19 of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1829) and implementing 
regulations with respect to these reports, and maintaining records of 
these reports and actions taken with respect to applicable employees; 
and
    (i) Establish procedures designed to ensure that any third party 
with which the bank has arrangements related to mortgage loan 
origination has policies and procedures to comply with the S.A.F.E. Act, 
including appropriate licensing and/or registration of individuals 
acting as mortgage loan originators.



Sec. 365.105  Use of unique identifier.

    (a) The insured State nonmember bank shall make the unique 
identifier(s) of its registered mortgage loan originator(s) available to 
consumers in a manner and method practicable to the institution.

[[Page 1014]]

    (b) A registered mortgage loan originator shall provide his or her 
unique identifier to a consumer:
    (1) Upon request;
    (2) Before acting as a mortgage loan originator; and
    (3) Through the originator's initial written communication with a 
consumer, if any, whether on paper or electronically.



  Sec. Appendix A to Subpart B of Part 365--Examples of Mortgage Loan 
                          Originator Activities

    This Appendix provides examples to aid in the understanding of 
activities that would cause an employee of an insured State nonmember 
bank to fall within or outside the definition of mortgage loan 
originator. The examples in this appendix are not all inclusive. They 
illustrate only the issue described and do not illustrate any other 
issues that may arise under this subpart. For purposes of the examples 
below, the term ``loan'' refers to a residential mortgage loan.
    (a) Taking a loan application. The following examples illustrate 
when an employee takes, or does not take, a loan application.
    (1) Taking an application includes: receiving information provided 
in connection with a request for a loan to be used to determine whether 
the consumer qualifies for a loan, even if the employee:
    (i) Has received the consumer's information indirectly in order to 
make an offer or negotiate a loan;
    (ii) Is not responsible for verifying information;
    (iii) Is inputting information into an online application or other 
automated system on behalf of the consumer; or
    (iv) Is not engaged in approval of the loan, including determining 
whether the consumer qualifies for the loan.
    (2) Taking an application does not include any of the following 
activities performed solely or in combination:
    (i) Contacting a consumer to verify the information in the loan 
application by obtaining documentation, such as tax returns or payroll 
receipts;
    (ii) Receiving a loan application through the mail and forwarding 
it, without review, to loan approval personnel;
    (iii) Assisting a consumer who is filling out an application by 
clarifying what type of information is necessary for the application or 
otherwise explaining the qualifications or criteria necessary to obtain 
a loan product;
    (iv) Describing the steps that a consumer would need to take to 
provide information to be used to determine whether the consumer 
qualifies for a loan or otherwise explaining the loan application 
process;
    (v) In response to an inquiry regarding a prequalified offer that a 
consumer has received from a bank, collecting only basic identifying 
information about the consumer and forwarding the consumer to a mortgage 
loan originator; or
    (vi) Receiving information in connection with a modification to the 
terms of an existing loan to a borrower as part of the bank's loss 
mitigation efforts when the borrower is reasonably likely to default.
    (b) Offering or negotiating terms of a loan. The following examples 
are designed to illustrate when an employee offers or negotiates terms 
of a loan, and conversely, what does not constitute offering or 
negotiating terms of a loan.
    (1) Offering or negotiating the terms of a loan includes:
    (i) Presenting a loan offer to a consumer for acceptance, either 
verbally or in writing, including, but not limited to, providing a 
disclosure of the loan terms after application under the Truth in 
Lending Act, even if:
    (A) Further verification of information is necessary;
    (B) The offer is conditional;
    (C) Other individuals must complete the loan process; or
    (D) Only the rate approved by the bank's loan approval mechanism 
function for a specific loan product is communicated without authority 
to negotiate the rate.
    (ii) Responding to a consumer's request for a lower rate or lower 
points on a pending loan application by presenting to the consumer a 
revised loan offer, either verbally or in writing, that includes a lower 
interest rate or lower points than the original offer.
    (2) Offering or negotiating terms of a loan does not include solely 
or in combination:
    (i) Providing general explanations or descriptions in response to 
consumer queries regarding qualification for a specific loan product, 
such as explaining loan terminology (i.e., debt-to-income ratio); 
lending policies (i.e., the loan-to-value ratio policy of the insured 
State nonmember bank); or product-related services;
    (ii) In response to a consumer's request, informing a consumer of 
the loan rates that are publicly available, such as on the insured State 
nonmember bank's Web site, for specific types of loan products without 
communicating to the consumer whether qualifications are met for that 
loan product;
    (iii) Collecting information about a consumer in order to provide 
the consumer with information on loan products for which the consumer 
generally may qualify, without presenting a specific loan offer to the 
consumer for acceptance, either verbally or in writing;
    (iv) Arranging the loan closing or other aspects of the loan 
process, including communicating with a consumer about those 
arrangements, provided that communication

[[Page 1015]]

with the consumer only verifies loan terms already offered or 
negotiated;
    (v) Providing a consumer with information unrelated to loan terms, 
such as the best days of the month for scheduling loan closings at the 
bank;
    (vi) Making an underwriting decision about whether the consumer 
qualifies for a loan;
    (vii) Explaining or describing the steps or process that a consumer 
would need to take in order to obtain a loan offer, including 
qualifications or criteria that would need to be met without providing 
guidance specific to that consumer's circumstances; or
    (viii) Communicating on behalf of a mortgage loan originator that a 
written offer, including disclosures provided pursuant to the Truth in 
Lending Act, has been sent to a consumer without providing any details 
of that offer.
    (c) Offering or negotiating a loan for compensation or gain. The 
following examples illustrate when an employee does or does not offer or 
negotiate terms of a loan ``for compensation or gain.''
    (1) Offering or negotiating terms of a loan for compensation or gain 
includes engaging in any of the activities in paragraph (b)(1) of this 
Appendix in the course of carrying out employment duties, even if the 
employee does not receive a referral fee or commission or other special 
compensation for the loan.
    (2) Offering or negotiating terms of a loan for compensation or gain 
does not include engaging in a seller-financed transaction for the 
employee's personal property that does not involve the insured State 
nonmember bank.



PART 366_MINIMUM STANDARDS OF INTEGRITY AND FITNESS FOR AN FDIC
CONTRACTOR--Table of Contents



Sec.
366.0  Definitions.
366.1  What is the purpose of this part?
366.2  What is the scope of this part?
366.3  Who cannot perform contractual services for the FDIC?
366.4  When is there a pattern or practice of defalcation?
366.5  What causes a substantial loss to a federal deposit insurance 
          fund?
366.6  How is my ownership or control determined?
366.7  Will the FDIC waive the prohibitions under Sec. 366.3?
366.8  Who can grant a waiver of a prohibition or conflict of interest?
366.9  What other requirements could prevent me from performing 
          contractual services for the FDIC?
366.10  When would I have a conflict of interest?
366.11  Will the FDIC waive a conflict of interest?
366.12  What are the FDIC's minimum standards of ethical responsibility?
366.13  What is my obligation regarding confidential information?
366.14  What information must I provide the FDIC?
366.15  What advice or determinations will the FDIC provide me on the 
          applicability of this part?
366.16  When may I seek a reconsideration or review of an FDIC 
          determination?
366.17  What are the possible consequences for violating this part?

    Authority: Section 9 (Tenth) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 
(FDI Act), 12 U.S.C. 1819 (Tenth); sections 12(f)(3) and (4) of the FDI 
Act, 12 U.S.C. 1822(f)(3) and (4); and section 19 of Pub. L. 103-204, 
107 Stat. 2369.

    Source: 67 FR 69991, Nov. 20, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 366.0  Definitions.

    As used in this part:
    (a) The word person refers to an individual, corporation, 
partnership, or other entity with a legally independent existence.
    (b) The terms we, our, and us refer to the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation (FDIC), except when acting as conservator or operator of a 
bridge bank.
    (c) The terms I, me, my, mine, you, and yourself refer to a person 
who submits an offer to perform or performs, directly or indirectly, 
contractual services or functions on our behalf.
    (d) The phrase insured depository institution refers to any bank or 
savings association whose deposits are insured by the FDIC.



Sec. 366.1  What is the purpose of this part?

    This part establishes the minimum standards of integrity and fitness 
that contractors, subcontractors, and employees of contractors and 
subcontractors must meet if they perform any service or function on our 
behalf. This part includes regulations governing conflicts of interest, 
ethical responsibility, and use of confidential information in 
accordance with section 12(f)(3) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1822(f)(3), 
and the prohibitions and the requirements for submission of information 
in accordance with section 12(f)(4) of the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 
1822(f)(4).

[[Page 1016]]



Sec. 366.2  What is the scope of this part?

    (a) This part applies to a person who submits an offer to perform or 
performs, directly or indirectly, a contractual service or function on 
our behalf.
    (b) This part does not apply to:
    (1) An FDIC employee for the purposes of title 18, United States 
Code; or
    (2) The FDIC when we operate an insured depository institution such 
as a bridge bank or conservatorship.



Sec. 366.3  Who cannot perform contractual services for the FDIC?

    We will not enter into a contract with you to perform a service or 
function on our behalf, if you or any person that owns or controls you, 
or any entity you own or control:
    (a) Has a felony conviction;
    (b) Was removed from or is prohibited from participating in the 
affairs of an insured depository institution as a result of a federal 
banking agency final enforcement action;
    (c) Has a pattern or practice of defalcation; or
    (d) Is responsible for a substantial loss to the Deposit Insurance 
Fund (or any predecessor deposit insurance fund).

[67 FR 69991, Nov. 20, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 366.4  When is there a pattern or practice of defalcation?

    (a) You have a pattern or practice of defalcation under 
Sec. 366.3(c) when you, any person that owns or controls you, or any 
entity you own or control has a legal responsibility for the payment on 
at least two obligations that are:
    (1) To one or more insured depository institutions;
    (2) More than 90 days delinquent in the payment of principal, 
interest, or a combination thereof; and
    (3) More than $50,000 each.
    (b) The following are examples of when you have or do not have a 
pattern or practice of defalcation. These examples are not inclusive.
    (1) You have five loans at insured depository institutions. Three of 
them are 90 days past due. Two of the three loans have outstanding 
balances of more than $50,000 each. You have a pattern or practice of 
defalcation.
    (2) You have five loans at insured depository institutions. Two of 
them are 90 days past due. One of the two is with ABC Bank for $170,000. 
The other one is with XYZ bank for $60,000. You have a pattern or 
practice of defalcation.
    (3) You have five loans at insured depository institutions. Three of 
them are 90 days past due. One of the three has an outstanding balance 
of more than $50,000. The other two have outstanding balances of less 
than $50,000. You do not have a pattern or practice of defalcation.
    (4) You have five loans at insured depository institutions. Three of 
them have outstanding balances of more than $50,000. Two of those three 
were 90 days past due but are now current. You do not have a pattern or 
practice of defalcation.



Sec. 366.5  What causes a substantial loss to a federal deposit 
insurance fund?

    You cause a substantial loss to the Deposit Insurance Fund (or any 
predecessor deposit insurance fund) under Sec. 366.3(d) when you, or any 
person that owns or controls you, or any entity you own or control has:
    (a) An obligation to us that is delinquent for 90 days or more and 
on which there is an outstanding balance of principal, interest, or a 
combination thereof of more than $50,000;
    (b) An unpaid final judgment in our favor that is in excess of 
$50,000, regardless of whether it becomes discharged in whole or in part 
in a bankruptcy proceeding;
    (c) A deficiency balance following foreclosure of collateral on an 
obligation owed to us that is in excess of $50,000, regardless of 
whether it becomes discharged in whole or in part in a bankruptcy 
proceeding; or
    (d) A loss to us that is in excess of $50,000 that we report on IRS 
Form 1099-C, Information Reporting for Discharge of Indebtedness.

[67 FR 69991, Nov. 20, 2002, as amended at 71 FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 366.6  How is my ownership or control determined?

    (a) Your ownership or control is determined on a case-by-case basis. 
Your ownership or control depends on the specific facts of your 
situation and the

[[Page 1017]]

particular industry and legal entity involved. You must provide 
documentation to us to use in determining your ownership or control.
    (b) The interest of a spouse or other family member in the same 
organization is imputed to you in determining your ownership or control.
    (c) The following are examples of when your ownership or control may 
or may not exist. These examples are not inclusive.
    (1) You have control if you are the president or chief executive 
officer of an organization.
    (2) You have ownership or control if you are a partner in a small 
law firm. You might not have ownership or control if you are a partner 
in a large national law firm.
    (3) You have control if you are a general partner of a limited 
partnership. You have ownership or control if you have a limited 
partnership interest of 25 percent or more.
    (4) You have ownership or control if you have the:
    (i) Power to vote, directly or indirectly, 25% or more interest of 
any class of voting stock of a company;
    (ii) Ability to direct in any manner the election of a majority of a 
company's directors or trustees; or
    (iii) Ability to exercise a controlling influence over the company's 
management and policies.



Sec. 366.7  Will the FDIC waive the prohibitions under Sec. 366.3?

    We may waive the prohibitions for entities other than individuals 
for good cause shown at our discretion when our need to contract for 
your services outweighs all relevant factors. The statute does not allow 
us to waive the prohibitions for individuals.



Sec. 366.8  Who can grant a waiver of a prohibition or conflict
of interest?

    The FDIC's Board of Directors delegates to the Chairman, or his 
designee, authority to issue waivers and implement procedures for part 
366.



Sec. 366.9  What other requirements could prevent me from performing
contractual services for the FDIC?

    You must avoid a conflict of interest, be ethically responsible, and 
maintain confidential information as described in Secs. 366.10 through 
366.13. You must also provide us with the information we require in 
Sec. 366.14. Failure to meet these requirements may prevent you from 
contracting with us.



Sec. 366.10  When would I have a conflict of interest?

    (a) You have a conflict of interest when you, any person that owns 
or controls you, or any entity you own or control:
    (1) Has a personal, business, or financial interest or relationship 
that relates to the services you perform under the contract;
    (2) Is a party to litigation against us, or represents a party that 
is;
    (3) Submits an offer to acquire an asset from us for which services 
were performed during the past three years, unless the contract allows 
for the acquisition; or
    (4) Engages in an activity that would cause us to question the 
integrity of the service you provided, are providing or offer to provide 
us, or impairs your independence.
    (b) The following are examples of a conflict of interest. These 
examples are not inclusive.
    (1) You submit an offer to perform property management services for 
us and you own or manage a competing property.
    (2) You audit a business under a contract with us and you or a 
partner in your firm has an ownership interest in that business.
    (3) You perform loan services on a pool of loans we are selling, and 
you submit a bid to purchase one or more of the loans in the pool.
    (4) You audit your own work or provide nonaudit services that are 
significant or material to the subject matter of the audit.



Sec. 366.11  Will the FDIC waive a conflict of interest?

    (a) We may waive a conflict of interest for good cause shown at our 
discretion when our need to contract for your services outweighs all 
relevant factors.
    (b) The following are examples of when we may grant you a waiver for 
a conflict of interest. These examples are not inclusive.

[[Page 1018]]

    (1) We may grant a waiver to an outside counsel who has a 
representational conflict. We will weigh all relevant facts and 
circumstances in making our determination.
    (2) We may grant a waiver to allow a contractor to acquire an asset 
from us who is providing or has provided services on that asset. We will 
consider whether granting the waiver will adversely affect the fairness 
of the sale, the type of services provided, and other facts and 
circumstances relevant to the sale in making our determination.



Sec. 366.12  What are the FDIC's minimum standards of ethical responsibility?

    (a) You and any person who performs services for us must not provide 
preferential treatment to any person in your dealings with the public on 
our behalf.
    (b) You must ensure that any person you employ to perform services 
for us is informed about their responsibilities under this part.
    (c) You must disclose to us waste, fraud, abuse or corruption. 
Contact the Inspector General at 1-800-964-FDIC or [email protected].
    (d) You and any person who performs contract services to us must 
not:
    (1) Accept or solicit for yourself or others any favor, gift, or 
other item of monetary value from any person who you reasonably believe 
is seeking an official action from you on our behalf, or has an interest 
that the performance or nonperformance of your duties to us may 
substantially affect;
    (2) Use or allow the use of our property, except as specified in the 
contract;
    (3) Make an unauthorized promise or commitment on our behalf; or
    (4) Provide impermissible gifts or entertainment to an FDIC employee 
or other person providing services to us.
    (e) The following are examples of when you are engaging in unethical 
behavior. These examples are not inclusive.
    (1) Using government resources, including our Internet connection, 
to conduct any business that is unrelated to the performance of your 
contract with us.
    (2) Submitting false invoices or claims, or making misleading or 
false statements.
    (3) Committing us to forgive or restructure a debt or portion of a 
debt, unless we provide you with written authority to do so.



Sec. 366.13  What is my obligation regarding confidential information?

    (a) Neither you nor any person who performs services on your behalf 
may use or disclose information obtained from us or a third party in 
connection with an FDIC contract, unless:
    (1) The contract allows or we authorize the use or disclosure;
    (2) The information is generally available to the general public; or
    (3) We make the information available to the general public.
    (b) The following are examples of when your use of confidential 
information is inappropriate. These examples are not inclusive.
    (1) Disclosing information about an asset, such as internal asset 
valuations, appraisals or environmental reports, except as part of 
authorized due diligence materials, to a prospective asset purchaser.
    (2) Disclosing a borrower's or guarantor's personal or financial 
information, such as a financial statement to an unauthorized party.



Sec. 366.14  What information must I provide the FDIC?

    You must:
    (a) Certify in writing that you can perform services for us under 
Sec. 366.3 and have no conflict of interest under Sec. 366.10(a).
    (b) Submit a list and description of any instance during the 
preceding five years in which you, any person that owns or controls you, 
or any entity you own or control, defaulted on a material obligation to 
an insured depository institution. A default on a material obligation 
occurs when a loan or advance with an outstanding balance of more than 
$50,000 is or was delinquent for 90 days or more.
    (c) Notify us within 10 business days after you become aware that 
you, or any person you employ to perform services for us, are not in 
compliance

[[Page 1019]]

with this part. Your notice must include a detailed description of the 
facts of the situation and how you intend to resolve the matter.
    (d) Agree in writing that you will employ only persons who meet the 
requirements of this part to perform services on our behalf.
    (e) Comply with any request from us for information.
    (f) Retain any information you prepare or rely upon regarding the 
provisions of this part for a period of three years following 
termination or expiration and final payment of the related contract for 
services whichever occurs last.



Sec. 366.15  What advice or determinations will the FDIC provide 
me on the applicability of this part?

    (a) We are available to you for consultation on those determinations 
you are responsible for making under this part, including those with 
respect to any person you employ or engage to perform services for us.
    (b) We will determine if this part prohibits you from performing 
services for us prior to contract award, after contract award, and 
during the performance of a contract.
    (c) We may determine what corrective action you must take.
    (d) We may grant you a waiver for good cause shown where provided 
for under this part.



Sec. 366.16  When may I seek a reconsideration or review of an
FDIC determination?

    (a) You may seek reconsideration or review of our initial 
determination by sending a written request to the individual who issued 
you the initial decision.
    (b) You must provide new information or explain a change in 
circumstances for our reconsideration of an initial decision. The 
individual who issued you the initial decision may either make a new 
determination or refer your request to a higher authority for review.
    (c) You must provide an explanation of how you perceive that we 
misapplied this part that sets forth the legal or factual errors for our 
review of an initial decision.



Sec. 366.17  What are the possible consequences for violating this
part?

    Depending on the circumstances, violations of this part may result 
in rescission or termination of a contract, as well as administrative, 
civil, or criminal sanctions.



PART 367_SUSPENSION AND EXCLUSION OF CONTRACTOR AND TERMINATION
OF CONTRACTS--Table of Contents



Sec.
367.1  Authority, purpose, scope and application.
367.2  Definitions.
367.3  Appropriate officials.
367.4  [Reserved]
367.5  Exclusions.
367.6  Causes for exclusion.
367.7  Suspensions.
367.8  Causes for suspension.
367.9  Imputation of causes.
367.10-67.11  [Reserved]
367.12  Procedures.
367.13  Notices.
367.14  Responses.
367.15  Additional proceedings as to disputed material facts.
367.16  Ethics Counselor decisions.
367.17  Duration of suspensions and exclusions.
367.18  Abrogation of contracts.
367.19  Exceptions to suspensions and exclusions.
367.20  Review and reconsideration of Ethics Counselor decisions.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1822(f) (4) and (5).

    Source: 61 FR 68560, Dec. 30, 1996, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 367.1  Authority, purpose, scope and application.

    (a) Authority. This part is adopted pursuant to section 12(f) (4) 
and (5) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1822(f) (4) and 
(5), and the rule-making authority of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation (FDIC) found at 12 U.S.C. 1819. Other regulations 
implementing these statutory directives appear at 12 CFR part 366.
    (b) Purpose. This part is designed to inform contractors and 
subcontractors (including their affiliated business entities, key 
employees and management officials) regarding their rights to notice and 
an opportunity to be heard on FDIC actions involving suspension and 
exclusion from contracting and rescission of existing contracts. This 
part is

[[Page 1020]]

in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other statute or regulation that 
may apply to such contractual activities.
    (c) Scope. This part applies to:
    (1) Contractors, other than attorneys or law firms providing legal 
services, submitting offers to provide services or entering into 
contracts to provide services to the FDIC acting in any capacity; and
    (2) Subcontractors entering into contracts to perform services under 
a proposed or existing contract with the FDIC.
    (d) Application. (1) This part will apply to entities that become 
contractors, as defined in Sec. 367.2(f), on or after December 30, 1996. 
In addition, this part will apply to contractors as defined in 
Sec. 367.2(f) that are performing contracts on December 30, 1996.
    (2) This part will also apply to actions initiated on or after 
December 30, 1996 regardless of the date of the cause giving rise to the 
actions.
    (3) Contracts entered into by the former Resolution Trust 
Corporation (RTC) that were transferred to the FDIC will be treated in 
the same manner as FDIC contracts under this part.
    (4) RTC actions taken under the RTC regulations on or before 
December 31, 1995, will be honored as if taken by the FDIC. A contractor 
subject to an RTC exclusion or suspension will be precluded thereby from 
participation in the FDIC's contracting program unless that exclusion or 
suspension is modified or terminated under the provisions of this part.



Sec. 367.2  Definitions.

    (a) Adequate evidence means information sufficient to support the 
reasonable belief that a particular act or omission has occurred.
    (b) Affiliated business entity means a company that is under the 
control of the contractor, is in control of the contractor, or is under 
common control with the contractor.
    (c) Civil judgment means a judgment of a civil offense or liability 
by any court of competent jurisdiction in the United States.
    (d) Company means any corporation, firm, partnership, society, joint 
venture, business trust, association, consortium or similar 
organization.
    (e) Conflict of interest means a situation in which:
    (1) A contractor; any management officials or affiliated business 
entities of a contractor; or any employees, agents, or subcontractors of 
a contractor who will perform services under a proposed or existing 
contract with the FDIC:
    (i) Has one or more personal, business, or financial interests or 
relationships which would cause a reasonable individual with knowledge 
of the relevant facts to question the integrity or impartiality of those 
who are or will be acting under a proposed or existing FDIC contract;
    (ii) Is an adverse party to the FDIC, RTC, the former Federal 
Savings and Loan Insurance Corporation (FSLIC), or their successors in a 
lawsuit; or
    (iii) Has ever been suspended, excluded, or debarred from 
contracting with a federal entity or has ever had a contract with the 
FDIC, RTC, FSLIC or their successors rescinded or terminated prior to 
the contract's completion and which rescission or termination involved 
issues of conflicts of interest or ethical responsibilities; or
    (2) Any other facts exist which the FDIC, in its sole discretion, 
determines may, through performance of a proposed or existing FDIC 
contract, provide a contractor with an unfair competitive advantage 
which favors the interests of the contractor or any person with whom the 
contractor has or is likely to have a personal or business relationship.
    (f) Contractor means a person or company which has submitted an 
offer to perform services for the FDIC or has a contractual arrangement 
with the FDIC to perform services. For purposes of this part, contractor 
also includes:
    (1) A contractor's affiliated business entities, key employees, and 
management officials of the contractor;
    (2) Any subcontractor performing services for the FDIC and the 
management officials and key employees of such subcontractors; and
    (3) Any entity or organization seeking to perform services for the 
FDIC as a minority or woman-owned business (MWOB).
    (g) Contract(s) means agreement(s) between FDIC and a contractor, 
including, but not limited to, agreements

[[Page 1021]]

identified as ``Task Orders'', for a contractor to provide services to 
FDIC. Contracts also mean contracts between a contractor and its 
subcontractor.
    (h) Control means the power to vote, directly or indirectly, 25 
percent or more of any class of the voting stock of a company; the 
ability to direct in any manner the election of a majority of a 
company's directors or trustees; or the ability to exercise a 
controlling influence over the company's management and policies. For 
purposes of this definition, a general partner of a limited partnership 
is presumed to be in control of that partnership.
    (i) Conviction means a judgment or conviction of a criminal offense 
by any court of competent jurisdiction, whether entered upon a verdict 
or plea, and includes pleas of nolo contendere.
    (j) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation acting in 
its receivership and corporate capacities, and FDIC officials or 
committees acting under delegated authority.
    (k) Indictment shall include an information or other filing by a 
competent authority charging a criminal offense.
    (l) Key employee means an individual who participates personally and 
substantially in the negotiation of, performance of, and/or monitoring 
for compliance under a contract with the FDIC. Such participation is 
made through, but is not limited to, decision, approval, disapproval, 
recommendation, or the rendering of advice under the contract.
    (m) Management official means any shareholder, employee or partner 
who controls a company and any individual who directs the day-to-day 
operations of a company. With respect to a partnership, all partners are 
deemed to be management officials unless the partnership is governed by 
a management or executive committee with responsibility for the day-to-
day operations. In partnerships with such committees, management 
official means only those partners who are a member of such a committee.
    (n) Material fact means one that is necessary to determine the 
outcome of an issue or case and without which the case could not be 
supported.
    (o) Offer means a proposal or other written or oral offer to provide 
services to FDIC.
    (p) Pattern or practice of defalcation regarding obligations means 
two or more instances in which a loan or advance from an insured 
depository institution:
    (1) Is in default for ninety (90) or more days as to payment of 
principal, interest, or a combination thereof, and there remains a legal 
obligation to pay an amount in excess of $50,000; or
    (2) Where there has been a failure to comply with the terms of a 
loan or advance to such an extent that the collateral securing the loan 
or advance was foreclosed upon, resulting in a loss in excess of $50,000 
to the insured depository institution.
    (q) Preponderance of the evidence means proof by information that, 
compared with that opposing it, leads to the conclusion that the fact at 
issue is more probably true than not.
    (r) Subcontractor means an entity or organization that enters into a 
contract with an FDIC contractor or another subcontractor to perform 
services under a proposed or existing contract with the FDIC.
    (s) Substantial loss to federal deposit insurance funds means:
    (1) A loan or advance from an insured depository institution, which 
is currently owed to the FDIC, RTC, FSLIC or their successors, or the 
former Bank Insurance Fund (BIF), the former Savings Association 
Insurance Fund (SAIF) or the Deposit Insurance Fund, the FSLIC Reserve 
Fund (FRF), or funds that were maintained by the RTC for the benefit of 
insured depositors, that is or has ever been delinquent for ninety (90) 
or more days as to payment of principal, interest, or a combination 
thereof and on which there remains a legal obligation to pay an amount 
in excess of $50,000;
    (2) An obligation to pay an outstanding, unsatisfied, final judgment 
in excess of $50,000 in favor of the FDIC, RTC, FSLIC, or their 
successors, or the BIF, the SAIF, the FRF or the funds that were 
maintained by the RTC for the benefit of insured depositors; or
    (3) A loan or advance from an insured depository institution which 
is currently owed to the FDIC, RTC, FSLIC or their successors, or the 
former BIF,

[[Page 1022]]

the former SAIF, the Deposit Insurance Fund , the FRF or the funds that 
were maintained by the RTC for the benefit of insured depositors, where 
there has been a failure to comply with the terms to such an extent that 
the collateral securing the loan or advance was foreclosed upon, 
resulting in a loss in excess of $50,000.

[61 FR 68560, Dec. 30, 1996, as amended at 71 FR 20527, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 367.3  Appropriate officials.

    (a) The Ethics Counselor is the Executive Secretary of the FDIC. The 
Ethics Counselor shall act as the official responsible for rendering 
suspension and exclusion decisions under this part. In addition to 
taking suspension and/or exclusion action under this part, the Ethics 
Counselor has authority to terminate exclusion and suspension 
proceedings. As used in this part, ``Ethics Counselor'' includes any 
official designated by the Ethics Counselor to act on the Ethics 
Counselor's behalf.
    (b) The Corporation Ethics Committee is the Committee appointed by 
the Chairman of the FDIC, or Chairman's designee, which provides review 
of any suspension or exclusion decision rendered by the Ethics Counselor 
that is appealed by a contractor who has been suspended and/or excluded 
from FDIC contracting.
    (c) Information concerning the possible existence of any cause for 
suspension or exclusion shall be reported to the Office of the Executive 
Secretary (Ethics Section). This part does not modify the responsibility 
to report allegations of fraud, waste and abuse, including but not 
limited to criminal violations, to the Office of Inspector General.



Sec. 367.4  [Reserved]



Sec. 367.5  Exclusions.

    (a) The Ethics Counselor may exclude a contractor from the FDIC 
contracting program for any of the causes set forth in Sec. 367.6, using 
procedures established in this part.
    (b) Exclusion is a serious action to be imposed when there exists a 
preponderance of the evidence that a contractor has violated one or more 
of the causes set forth in Sec. 367.6. Contractors excluded from FDIC 
contracting programs are prohibited from entering into any new contracts 
with FDIC for the duration of the period of exclusion as determined 
pursuant to this part. The FDIC shall not solicit offers from, award 
contracts to, extend or modify existing contracts, award task orders 
under existing contracts, or consent to subcontracts with such 
contractors. Excluded contractors are also prohibited from conducting 
business with FDIC as agents or representatives of other contractors. 
Provided however, that these limitations do not become effective upon 
the notification of the contractor that there is a possible cause to 
exclude under Sec. 367.13. Rather, they become effective only upon the 
Ethics Counselor's decision to exclude the contractor pursuant to 
Sec. 367.16. Provided further, that the causes for exclusion set forth 
in Sec. 367.6(a)(1) through (4) reflect statutorily established 
mandatory bars to contracting with the FDIC.
    (c) Except when one or more of the statutorily established mandatory 
bars to contracting are shown to exist, the existence of a cause for 
exclusion does not necessarily require that the contractor be excluded; 
the seriousness of the contractor's acts or omissions and any mitigating 
or aggravating circumstances shall be considered in making any exclusion 
decision.



Sec. 367.6  Causes for exclusion.

    The FDIC may exclude a contractor, in accordance with the procedures 
set forth in this part, upon a finding that:
    (a) The contractor has been convicted of any felony;
    (b) The contractor has been removed from, or prohibited from 
participating in the affairs of, any insured depository institution 
pursuant to any final enforcement action by the Office of the 
Comptroller of the Currency, the Office of Thrift Supervision, the Board 
of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, or the FDIC or their 
successors;
    (c) The contractor has demonstrated a pattern or practice of 
defalcation;
    (d) The contractor has caused a substantial loss to Deposit 
Insurance Fund (or any predecessor deposit insurance fund);

[[Page 1023]]

    (e) The contractor has failed to disclose, pursuant to 12 CFR 366.6, 
a material fact to the FDIC;
    (f) The contractor has failed to disclosed any material adverse 
change in the representations and certifications provided to FDIC under 
12 CFR 366.6;
    (g) The contractor has miscertified its status as a minority and/or 
woman owned business (MWOB);
    (h) The contractor has a conflict of interest that was not waived by 
the Ethics Counselor or designee;
    (i) The contractor has been subject to a final enforcement action by 
any federal financial institution regulatory agency, or has stipulated 
to such action;
    (j) The contractor is debarred from participating in other federal 
programs;
    (k) The contractor has been convicted of, or subject to a civil 
judgment for:
    (1) Commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with 
obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public or private 
agreement or transaction, or conspiracy to do the same;
    (2) Violation of federal or state antitrust statutes, including 
those proscribing price fixing between competitors, allocation of 
customers between competitors, and bid rigging, or conspiracy to do the 
same;
    (3) Commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, 
falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, 
receiving stolen property, making false claims, obstructing of justice, 
or conspiracy to do the same;
    (4) Commission of any other offense indicating a breach of trust, 
dishonesty or lack of integrity, or conspiracy to do the same;
    (l) The contractor's performance under previous contract(s) with 
FDIC or RTC has resulted in:
    (1) The FDIC or RTC declaring such contract(s) to be in default; or
    (2) The termination of such contract(s) for poor performance; or
    (3) A violation of the terms of a contract that would have resulted 
in a default or termination of the contract for poor performance if that 
violation had been discovered during the course of the contract; or
    (m) The contractor has engaged in any conduct:
    (1) Indicating a breach of trust, dishonesty, or lack of integrity 
that seriously and directly affects its ability to meet standards of 
present responsibility required of an FDIC contractor; or
    (2) So serious or compelling in nature that it adversely affects the 
ability of a contractor to meet the minimum ethical standards required 
by 12 CFR part 366.

[61 FR 68560, Dec. 30, 1996, as amended at 71 FR 20528, Apr. 21, 2006]



Sec. 367.7  Suspensions.

    (a) The Ethics Counselor may suspend a contractor for any of the 
causes in Sec. 367.8 using the procedures established in this section.
    (b) Suspension is an action to be imposed when there exists adequate 
evidence of one or more of the causes set out in Sec. 367.8. This 
includes, but is not limited to, situations where immediate action is 
necessary to protect the integrity of the FDIC contracting program and/
or the security of FDIC assets during the pendency of legal or 
investigative proceedings initiated by FDIC, any federal agency or any 
law enforcement authority.
    (c) The duration of any suspension action shall be for a temporary 
period pending the completion of an investigation and such other legal 
proceedings as may ensue.
    (d) A suspension shall become effective immediately upon issuance of 
the notice specified in Sec. 367.13(b).
    (e) Contractors suspended from FDIC contracting programs are 
prohibited from entering into any new contracts with the FDIC for the 
duration of the period of suspension. The FDIC shall not solicit offers 
from, award contracts to, extend or modify existing contracts, award 
task orders under existing contracts, or consent to subcontracts with 
such contractors. Suspended contractors are also prohibited from 
conducting business with FDIC as agents or representatives of other 
contractors.

[[Page 1024]]



Sec. 367.8  Causes for suspension.

    (a) Suspension may be imposed under the procedures set forth in this 
section upon adequate evidence:
    (1) Of suspension by another federal agency;
    (2) That a cause for exclusion under Sec. 367.6 may exist;
    (3) Of the commission of any other offense indicating a breach of 
trust, dishonesty, or lack of integrity that seriously and directly 
affects the minimum ethical standards required of an FDIC contractor; or
    (4) Of any other cause so serious or compelling in nature that it 
adversely affects the ability of a contractor to meet the minimal 
ethical standards required by 12 CFR part 366.
    (b) Indictment for any offense described in Sec. 367.6 is adequate 
evidence to suspend a contractor.
    (c) In assessing the adequacy of the evidence, FDIC will consider 
how much information is available, how credible it is given the 
circumstances, whether or not important allegations are corroborated and 
what inferences can reasonably be drawn as a result.



Sec. 367.9  Imputation of causes.

    (a) Where there is cause to suspend and/or exclude any affiliated 
business entity of the contractor, that conduct may be imputed to the 
contractor if the conduct occurred in connection with the affiliated 
business entity's performance of duties for or on behalf of the 
contractor, or with the contractor's knowledge, approval, or 
acquiescence. The contractor's acceptance of the benefits derived from 
the conduct shall be evidence of such knowledge, approval, or 
acquiescence.
    (b) Where there is cause to suspend and/or exclude any contractor, 
that conduct may be imputed to any affiliated business entity, key 
employee, or management official of a contractor who participated in, 
knew of or had reason to know of the contractor's conduct.
    (c) Where there is cause to suspend and/or exclude a key employee or 
management official of a contractor, that cause may be imputed to the 
contractor if the conduct occurred in connection with the key employee 
or management official's performance of duties for or on behalf of the 
contractor, or with the contractor's knowledge, approval, or 
acquiescence. The contractor's acceptance of the benefits derived from 
the conduct shall be evidence of such knowledge, approval, or 
acquiescence.
    (d) Where there is cause to suspend and/or exclude one contractor 
participating in a joint venture or similar arrangement, that cause may 
be imputed to other participating contractors if the conduct occurred 
for or on behalf of the joint venture or similar arrangement, or with 
the knowledge, approval, or acquiescence of these contractors. 
Acceptance of the benefits derived from the conduct shall be evidence of 
such knowledge, approval, or acquiescence.
    (e) Where there is cause to suspend and/or exclude a subcontractor, 
that cause may be imputed to the contractor for which the subcontractor 
performed services, if the conduct occurred for or on behalf of the 
contractor and with the contractor's knowledge, approval, or 
acquiescence. Acceptance of the benefits derived from the conduct shall 
be evidence of such knowledge, approval, or acquiescence.



Secs. 367.10-367.11  [Reserved]



Sec. 367.12  Procedures.

    (a) FDIC shall process suspension and exclusion actions as 
informally as practicable, consistent with its policy of providing 
contractors with adequate information on the grounds that give rise to 
the proposed action and affording contractors with a reasonable 
opportunity to respond.
    (b) For purposes of determining filing dates for the pleadings 
required by this part, including responses, notices of appeal, appeals 
and requests for reconsideration, the provisions relating to the 
construction of time limits in 12 CFR 308.12 will control.



Sec. 367.13  Notices.

    (a) Exclusions. Before excluding a contractor, the FDIC shall send 
it a written notice of possible cause to exclude. Such notice shall 
include:

[[Page 1025]]

    (1) Notification that exclusion for a specified period of time is 
being considered based on the specified cause(s) in Sec. 367.6 to be 
relied upon;
    (2) Identification of the event(s), circumstance(s), or condition(s) 
that indicates that there is cause to believe a cause for exclusion 
exists, described in sufficient detail to put the contractor on notice 
of the conduct or transaction(s) upon which an exclusion proceeding is 
based;
    (3) Notification that the contractor is not prohibited from 
contracting with the FDIC unless and until it is either suspended from 
FDIC contracting or the FDIC Ethics Counselor issues a decision 
excluding the contractor, provided however, in any case where the 
possible cause for exclusion would also be an impediment to the 
contractor's eligibility pursuant to 12 CFR part 366, the contractor's 
eligibility for any contract will be determined under that part; and
    (4) Notification of the regulatory provisions governing the 
exclusion proceeding and the potential effect of a final exclusion 
decision.
    (b) Suspensions. Before suspending a contractor, the FDIC shall send 
it notice, including:
    (1) Notice that a suspension is being imposed based on specified 
causes in Sec. 367.8;
    (2) Identification of the event(s), circumstance(s), or condition(s) 
that indicate that there is adequate evidence to believe a cause for 
suspension exists, described in sufficient detail to put the contractor 
on notice of the basis for the suspension, recognizing that the conduct 
of ongoing investigations and legal proceedings, including criminal 
proceedings, place limitations on the evidence that can be released;
    (3) Notification that the suspension prohibits the contractor from 
contracting with the FDIC for a temporary period, pending the completion 
of an investigation or other legal proceedings; and
    (4) Notification of the regulatory provisions governing the 
suspension proceeding.
    (c) Service of notices. Notices will be sent to the contractor by 
first class mail, postage prepaid. For purposes of compliance with this 
section, notice shall be considered to have been received by the 
contractor if the notice is properly mailed to the last known address of 
such contractor. Whenever practical, a copy of the notice will also be 
transmitted to the contractor by facsimile. In the event the notice is 
not sent by facsimile, a copy will be sent by an overnight delivery 
service such as Express Mail or a commercial equivalent.



Sec. 367.14  Responses.

    (a) The contractor will have 15 days from the date of the notice 
within which to respond.
    (b) The response shall be in writing and may include: information 
and argument in opposition to the proposed exclusion and/or suspension, 
including any additional specific information pertaining to the possible 
causes for exclusion; and information and argument in mitigation of the 
proposed period of exclusion.
    (c) The response may request a meeting with an FDIC official 
identified in the notice to permit the contractor to discuss issues of 
fact or law relating to the suspension and/or proposed exclusion or to 
otherwise resolve the pending matters.
    (1) Any such meetings between a contractor and FDIC shall take such 
form as the FDIC deems appropriate.
    (2) In cases of suspensions, no meeting will be held where a 
representative of the Department of Justice has advised in writing that 
the substantial interests of the Government would be prejudiced by such 
a meeting and the Ethics Counselor determines that a suspension is based 
on the same facts as pending or contemplated legal proceedings 
referenced by the representative of the Department of Justice.
    (d) Failure to respond to the notice shall be deemed an admission of 
the existence of the cause(s) for suspension and/or exclusion set forth 
in the notice and an acceptance of the period of exclusion proposed 
therein. In such circumstances, the FDIC may proceed to a final decision 
without further proceedings.
    (e) Where a contractor has received more than one notice, the FDIC 
may consolidate the pending proceedings,

[[Page 1026]]

including the scheduling of any meetings, in accordance with this 
section.



Sec. 367.15  Additional proceedings as to disputed material facts.

    (a) In actions not based upon a conviction or civil judgment, if the 
Ethics Counselor finds that the contractor's submission raises a genuine 
dispute over facts material to the proposed suspension and/or exclusion, 
the contractor shall be afforded an opportunity to appear (with counsel, 
if desired), submit documentary evidence, present witnesses, and 
confront any witnesses the FDIC presents.
    (b) The Ethics Counselor may refer disputed material facts to 
another official for analysis and recommendation.
    (c) If requested, a transcribed record of any additional proceedings 
shall be made available at cost to the contractor.



Sec. 367.16  Ethics Counselor decisions.

    (a) Standard of proof:
    (1) An exclusion must be based on a finding that the cause(s) for 
exclusion is established by a preponderance of the evidence in the 
administrative record of the case; and
    (2) A suspension must be based on a finding that the cause(s) for 
suspension is established by adequate evidence in the administrative 
record of the case.
    (b) The administrative record consists of the portion of any 
information, reports, documents or other evidence identified and relied 
upon in the Notice of Possible Cause to Exclude, the Notice of 
Suspension and/or supplemental notices, if any, together with any 
material portions of the contractor's response. When additional 
proceedings are necessary to determine disputed material facts, the 
Ethics Counselor shall base the decision on the facts as found, together 
with any information and argument submitted by the contractor and any 
other information in the administrative record.
    (c) In actions based upon a conviction, judgment, a final 
enforcement action by a federal financial institution regulatory agency, 
or in which all facts and circumstances material to the exclusion action 
have been finally adjudicated in another forum, the Ethics Counselor may 
exclude a contractor without regard to the procedures set out in 
Secs. 367.13 and 367.14. Any such decisions will be subject to the 
review and reconsideration provisions of Sec. 367.20.
    (d) Notice of decisions. Contractors shall be given prompt notice of 
the Ethics Counselor's decision in the manner described in 
Sec. 367.13(c). If the Ethics Counselor suspends a contractor or imposes 
a period of exclusion, the decision shall:
    (1) Set forth the cause(s) for suspension and/or exclusion included 
in the notice that were found by a preponderance of the evidence with 
reference to the administrative record support for that finding;
    (2) Set forth the effect of the exclusion action and the effective 
dates of that action;
    (3) Refer the contractor to its procedural rights of review and 
reconsideration under Sec. 367.20; and
    (4) Inform the contractor that a copy of the exclusion decision 
shall be placed in the FDIC Public Reading Room.
    (e) If the FDIC Ethics Counselor decides that a period of exclusion 
is not warranted, the Notice of Possible Cause to Exclude may be 
withdrawn or the proceeding may be otherwise terminated. A decision to 
terminate an exclusion proceeding may include the imposition of 
appropriate conditions on the contractor in their future dealings with 
the FDIC.



Sec. 367.17  Duration of suspensions and exclusions.

    (a) Suspensions. (1) Suspensions shall be for a temporary period 
pending the completion of an investigation or other legal or exclusion 
proceedings.
    (2) If legal or administrative proceedings are not initiated within 
12 months after the date of the suspension notice, the suspension shall 
be terminated unless a representative of the Department of Justice 
requests its extension in writing. In such cases, the suspension may be 
extended for an additional six months. In no event may a suspension be 
imposed for more than 18 months, unless such proceedings have been 
initiated within that period.
    (3) FDIC shall notify the Department of Justice of an impending 
termination

[[Page 1027]]

of a suspension at least 30 days before the 12-month period expires to 
give the Department of Justice an opportunity to request an extension.
    (4) The time limitations for suspension in this section may be 
waived by the affected contractor.
    (b) Exclusions. (1) Exclusions shall be for a period commensurate 
with the seriousness of the cause(s) after due consideration of 
mitigating evidence presented by the contractor.
    (2) If a suspension precedes an exclusion, the suspension period 
shall be considered in determining the exclusion period.
    (3) Exclusion for causes other than the mandatory bars in 12 CFR 
366.4(a) generally should not exceed three years, but where 
circumstances warrant, a longer period of exclusion may be imposed.
    (4) The Ethics Counselor may extend an existing exclusion for an 
additional period if the Ethics Counselor determines that an extension 
is necessary to protect the integrity of the FDIC contracting program 
and the public interest. However, an exclusion may not be extended 
solely on the basis of the facts and circumstances upon which the 
initial exclusion action was based. The standards and procedures in this 
part shall be applied in any proceeding to extend an exclusion.



Sec. 367.18  Abrogation of contracts.

    (a) The FDIC may, in its discretion, rescind or terminate any 
contract in existence at the time a contractor is suspended or excluded.
    (b) Any contract not rescinded or terminated shall continue in force 
in accordance with the terms thereof.
    (c) The right to rescind or terminate a contract in existence is 
cumulative and in addition to any other remedies or rights the FDIC may 
have under the terms of the contract, at law, or otherwise.



Sec. 367.19  Exceptions to suspensions and exclusions.

    (a) Exceptions to the effects of suspensions and exclusions may be 
available in unique circumstances, where there are compelling reasons to 
utilize a particular contractor for a specific task. Requests for such 
exceptions may be submitted only by the FDIC program office requesting 
the contract services.
    (b) In the case of the modification or extension of an existing 
contract, the Ethics Counselor may except such a contracting action from 
the effects of suspension and/or exclusion upon a determination, in 
writing, that a compelling reason exists for utilization of the 
contractor in the particular instance. The Ethics Counselor's authority 
under this section shall not be delegated to any lower official.
    (c) In the case of new contracts, the Corporation Ethics Committee 
may except a particular new contract from the effects of suspension and/
or exclusion upon a determination in writing that a compelling reason 
exists for utilization of the contractor in the particular instance.



Sec. 367.20  Review and reconsideration of Ethics Counselor decisions.

    (a) Review. (1) A suspended and/or excluded contractor may appeal 
the exclusion decision to the Corporation Ethics Committee.
    (2) In order to avail itself of the right to appeal, a suspended 
and/or excluded contractor must file a written notice of intent to 
appeal within 5 days of the Ethics Counselor's decision.
    (3) The appeal shall be filed in writing within 30 days of the 
decision.
    (4) The Corporation Ethics Committee, at its discretion and after 
determining that it is in the best interests of the FDIC, may stay the 
effect of the suspension and/or exclusion pending conclusion of its 
review of the matter.
    (b) Reconsideration. (1) A suspended and/or excluded contractor may 
submit a request to the Ethics Counselor to reconsider the suspension 
and/or exclusion decision, reduce the period of exclusion or terminate 
the suspension and/or exclusion.
    (2) Such requests shall be in writing and supported by documentation 
that the requested action is justified by:
    (i) Reversal of the conviction or civil judgment upon which the 
suspension and/or exclusion was based;
    (ii) Newly discovered material evidence;

[[Page 1028]]

    (iii) Bona fide change in ownership or management;
    (iv) Elimination of other causes for which the suspension and/or 
exclusion was imposed; or
    (v) Other reasons the FDIC Ethics Counselor deems appropriate.
    (3) A request for reconsideration based on the reversal of the 
conviction or civil judgment may be filed at any time.
    (4) Requests for reconsideration based on other grounds may only be 
filed during the period commencing 60 days after the Ethics Counselor's 
decision imposing the suspension and/or exclusion. Only one such request 
may be filed in any twelve month period.
    (5) The Ethics Counselor's decision on a request for reconsideration 
is subject to the review procedure set forth in paragraph (a) of this 
section.



PART 368_GOVERNMENT SECURITIES SALES PRACTICES--Table of Contents



Sec.
368.1  Scope.
368.2  Definitions.
368.3  Business conduct.
368.4  Recommendations to customers.
368.5  Customer information.
368.100  Obligations concerning institutional customers.

    Authority: 15 U.S.C. 78o-5.

    Source: 62 FR 13287, Mar. 19, 1997, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 368.1  Scope.

    This part is applicable to state nonmember banks and insured state 
branches of foreign banks that have filed notice as, or are required to 
file notice as, government securities brokers or dealers pursuant to 
section 15C of the Securities Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-5) and 
Department of the Treasury rules under section 15C (17 CFR 400.1(d) and 
part 401).



Sec. 368.2  Definitions.

    (a) Bank that is a government securities broker or dealer means a 
state nonmember bank or an insured state branch of a foreign bank that 
has filed notice, or is required to file notice, as a government 
securities broker or dealer pursuant to section 15C of the Securities 
Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-5) and Department of the Treasury rules 
under section 15C (17 CFR 400.1(d) and part 401).
    (b) Customer does not include a broker or dealer or a government 
securities broker or dealer.
    (c) Government security has the same meaning as this term has in 
section 3(a)(42) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 
78c(a)(42)).
    (d) Non-institutional customer means any customer other than:
    (1) A bank, savings association, insurance company, or registered 
investment company;
    (2) An investment adviser registered under section 203 of the 
Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80b-3); or
    (3) Any entity (whether a natural person, corporation, partnership, 
trust, or otherwise) with total assets of at least $50 million.



Sec. 368.3  Business conduct.

    A bank that is a government securities broker or dealer shall 
observe high standards of commercial honor and just and equitable 
principles of trade in the conduct of its business as a government 
securities broker or dealer.



Sec. 368.4  Recommendations to customers.

    In recommending to a customer the purchase, sale or exchange of a 
government security, a bank that is a government securities broker or 
dealer shall have reasonable grounds for believing that the 
recommendation is suitable for the customer upon the basis of the facts, 
if any, disclosed by the customer as to the customer's other security 
holdings and as to the customer's financial situation and needs.



Sec. 368.5  Customer information.

    Prior to the execution of a transaction recommended to a non-
institutional customer, a bank that is a government securities broker or 
dealer shall make reasonable efforts to obtain information concerning:
    (a) The customer's financial status;
    (b) The customer's tax status;
    (c) The customer's investment objectives; and
    (d) Such other information used or considered to be reasonable by 
such

[[Page 1029]]

bank in making recommendations to the customer.



Sec. 368.100  Obligations concerning institutional customers.

    (a) As a result of broadened authority provided by the Government 
Securities Act Amendments of 1993 (15 U.S.C. 78o-3 and 78o-5), the FDIC 
is adopting sales practice rules for the government securities market, a 
market with a particularly broad institutional component. Accordingly, 
the FDIC believes it is appropriate to provide further guidance to banks 
on their suitability obligations when making recommendations to 
institutional customers.
    (b) The FDIC's suitability rule (Sec. 368.4) is fundamental to fair 
dealing and is intended to promote ethical sales practices and high 
standards of professional conduct. Banks' responsibilities include 
having a reasonable basis for recommending a particular security or 
strategy, as well as having reasonable grounds for believing the 
recommendation is suitable for the customer to whom it is made. Banks 
are expected to meet the same high standards of competence, 
professionalism, and good faith regardless of the financial 
circumstances of the customer.
    (c) In recommending to a customer the purchase, sale, or exchange of 
any government security, the bank shall have reasonable grounds for 
believing that the recommendation is suitable for the customer upon the 
basis of the facts, if any, disclosed by the customer as to the 
customer's other security holdings and financial situation and needs.
    (d) The interpretation in this section concerns only the manner in 
which a bank determines that a recommendation is suitable for a 
particular institutional customer. The manner in which a bank fulfills 
this suitability obligation will vary, depending on the nature of the 
customer and the specific transaction. Accordingly, the interpretation 
in this section deals only with guidance regarding how a bank may 
fulfill customer-specific suitability obligations under Sec. 368.4. \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ The interpretation in this section does not address the 
obligation related to suitability that requires that a bank have `` * * 
* a `reasonable basis' to believe that the recommendation could be 
suitable for at least some customers.'' In the Matter of the Application 
of F.J. Kaufman and Company of Virginia and Frederick J. Kaufman, Jr., 
50 SEC 164 (1989).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) While it is difficult to define in advance the scope of a bank's 
suitability obligation with respect to a specific institutional customer 
transaction recommended by a bank, the FDIC has identified certain 
factors that may be relevant when considering compliance with 
Sec. 368.4. These factors are not intended to be requirements or the 
only factors to be considered but are offered merely as guidance in 
determining the scope of a bank's suitability obligations.
    (f) The two most important considerations in determining the scope 
of a bank's suitability obligations in making recommendations to an 
institutional customer are the customer's capability to evaluate 
investment risk independently and the extent to which the customer is 
exercising independent judgement in evaluating a bank's recommendation. 
A bank must determine, based on the information available to it, the 
customer's capability to evaluate investment risk. In some cases, the 
bank may conclude that the customer is not capable of making independent 
investment decisions in general. In other cases, the institutional 
customer may have general capability, but may not be able to understand 
a particular type of instrument or its risk. This is more likely to 
arise with relatively new types of instruments, or those with 
significantly different risk or volatility characteristics than other 
investments generally made by the institution. If a customer is either 
generally not capable of evaluating investment risk or lacks sufficient 
capability to evaluate the particular product, the scope of a bank's 
customer-specific obligations under Sec. 368.4 would not be diminished 
by the fact that the bank was dealing with an institutional customer. On 
the other hand, the fact that a customer initially needed help 
understanding a potential investment need not necessarily imply that the 
customer did not ultimately develop an

[[Page 1030]]

understanding and make an independent investment decision.
    (g) A bank may conclude that a customer is exercising independent 
judgement if the customer's investment decision will be based on its own 
independent assessment of the opportunities and risks presented by a 
potential investment, market factors and other investment 
considerations. Where the bank has reasonable grounds for concluding 
that the institutional customer is making independent investment 
decisions and is capable of independently evaluating investment risk, 
then a bank's obligations under Sec. 368.4 for a particular customer are 
fulfilled. \2\ Where a customer has delegated decision-making authority 
to an agent, such as an investment advisor or a bank trust department, 
the interpretation in this section shall be applied to the agent.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ See footnote 1 in paragraph (d) of this section.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (h) A determination of capability to evaluate investment risk 
independently will depend on an examination of the customer's capability 
to make its own investment decisions, including the resources available 
to the customer to make informed decisions. Relevant considerations 
could include:
    (1) The use of one or more consultants, investment advisers, or bank 
trust departments;
    (2) The general level of experience of the institutional customer in 
financial markets and specific experience with the type of instruments 
under consideration;
    (3) The customer's ability to understand the economic features of 
the security involved;
    (4) The customer's ability to independently evaluate how market 
developments would affect the security; and
    (5) The complexity of the security or securities involved.
    (i) A determination that a customer is making independent investment 
decisions will depend on the nature of the relationship that exists 
between the bank and the customer. Relevant considerations could 
include:
    (1) Any written or oral understanding that exists between the bank 
and the customer regarding the nature of the relationship between the 
bank and the customer and the services to be rendered by the bank;
    (2) The presence or absence of a pattern of acceptance of the bank's 
recommendations;
    (3) The use by the customer of ideas, suggestions, market views and 
information obtained from other government securities brokers or dealers 
or market professionals, particularly those relating to the same type of 
securities; and
    (4) The extent to which the bank has received from the customer 
current comprehensive portfolio information in connection with 
discussing recommended transactions or has not been provided important 
information regarding its portfolio or investment objectives.
    (j) Banks are reminded that these factors are merely guidelines that 
will be utilized to determine whether a bank has fulfilled its 
suitability obligation with respect to a specific institutional customer 
transaction and that the inclusion or absence of any of these factors is 
not dispositive of the determination of suitability. Such a 
determination can only be made on a case-by-case basis taking into 
consideration all the facts and circumstances of a particular bank/
customer relationship, assessed in the context of a particular 
transaction.
    (k) For purposes of the interpretation in this section, an 
institutional customer shall be any entity other than a natural person. 
In determining the applicability of the interpretation in this section 
to an institutional customer, the FDIC will consider the dollar value of 
the securities that the institutional customer has in its portfolio and/
or under management. While the interpretation in this section is 
potentially applicable to any institutional customer, the guidance 
contained in this section is more appropriately applied to an 
institutional customer with at least $10 million invested in securities 
in the aggregate in its portfolio and/or under management.

[[Page 1031]]



PART 369_PROHIBITION AGAINST USE OF INTERSTATE BRANCHES PRIMARILY
FOR DEPOSIT PRODUCTION--Table of Contents



Sec.
369.1  Purpose and scope.
369.2  Definitions.
369.3  Loan-to-deposit ratio screen.
369.4  Credit needs determination.
369.5  Sanctions.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819 (Tenth) and 1835a.

    Source: 62 FR 47737, Sept. 10, 1997, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 369.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Purpose. The purpose of this part is to implement section 109 
(12 U.S.C. 1835a) of the Riegle-Neal Interstate Banking and Branching 
Efficiency Act of 1994 (Interstate Act).
    (b) Scope. (1) This part applies to any State nonmember bank that 
has operated a covered interstate branch for a period of at least one 
year.
    (2) This part describes the requirements imposed under 12 U.S.C. 
1835a, which requires the appropriate Federal banking agencies (the 
FDIC, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, and the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System) to prescribe uniform rules that 
prohibit a bank from using any authority to engage in interstate 
branching pursuant to the Interstate Act, or any amendment made by the 
Interstate Act to any other provision of law, primarily for the purpose 
of deposit production.



Sec. 369.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, the following definitions apply:
    (a) Bank means, unless the context indicates otherwise:
    (1) A State nonmember bank; and
    (2) A foreign bank as that term is defined in 12 U.S.C. 3101(7) and 
12 CFR 346.1(a).
    (b) Covered interstate branch means:
    (1) Any branch of a State nonmember bank, and any insured branch of 
a foreign bank licensed by a State, that:
    (i) Is established or acquired outside the bank's home State 
pursuant to the interstate branching authority granted by the Interstate 
Act or by any amendment made by the Interstate Act to any other 
provision of law; or
    (ii) Could not have been established or acquired outside of the 
bank's home State but for the establishment or acquisition of a branch 
described in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section; and
    (2) Any bank or branch of a bank controlled by an out-of-State bank 
holding company.
    (c) Home State means:
    (1) With respect to a State bank, the State that chartered the bank;
    (2) With respect to a national bank, the State in which the main 
office of the bank is located;
    (3) With respect to a bank holding company, the State in which the 
total deposits of all banking subsidiaries of such company are the 
largest on the later of:
    (i) July 1, 1966; or
    (ii) The date on which the company becomes a bank holding company 
under the Bank Holding Company Act;
    (4) With respect to a foreign bank:
    (i) For purposes of determining whether a U.S. branch of a foreign 
bank is a covered interstate branch, the home State of the foreign bank 
as determined in accordance with 12 U.S.C. 3103(c) and 12 CFR 
347.202(j); and
    (ii) For purposes of determining whether a branch of a U.S. bank 
controlled by a foreign bank is a covered interstate branch, the State 
in which the total deposits of all banking subsidiaries of such foreign 
bank are the largest on the later of:
    (A) July 1, 1966; or
    (B) The date on which the foreign bank becomes a bank holding 
company under the Bank Holding Company Act.
    (d) Host State means a State in which a covered interstate branch is 
established or acquired.
    (e) Host state loan-to-deposit ratio generally means, with respect 
to a particular host state, the ratio of total loans in the host state 
relative to total deposits from the host state for all banks (including 
institutions covered under the definition of ``bank'' in 12 U.S.C. 
1813(a)(1)) that have that state as their home state, as determined and 
updated periodically by the appropriate Federal banking agencies and 
made available to the public.

[[Page 1032]]

    (f) Out-of-State bank holding company means, with respect to any 
State, a bank holding company whose home State is another State.
    (g) State means state as that term is defined in 12 U.S.C. 
1813(a)(3).
    (h) Statewide loan-to-deposit ratio means, with respect to a bank, 
the ratio of the bank's loans to its deposits in a state in which the 
bank has one or more covered interstate branches, as determined by the 
FDIC.

[62 FR 47737, Sept. 10, 1997, as amended at 67 FR 38848, June 6, 2002]



Sec. 369.3  Loan-to-deposit ratio screen.

    (a) Application of screen. Beginning no earlier than one year after 
a covered interstate branch is acquired or established, the FDIC will 
consider whether the bank's statewide loan-to-deposit ratio is less than 
50 percent of the relevant host State loan-to-deposit ratio.
    (b) Results of screen. (1) If the FDIC determines that the bank's 
statewide loan-to-deposit ratio is 50 percent or more of the host state 
loan-to-deposit ratio, no further consideration under this part is 
required.
    (2) If the FDIC determines that the bank's statewide loan-to-deposit 
ratio is less than 50 percent of the host state loan-to-deposit ratio, 
or if reasonably available data are insufficient to calculate the bank's 
statewide loan-to-deposit ratio, the FDIC will make a credit needs 
determination for the bank as provided in Sec. 369.4.

[62 FR 47737, Sept. 10, 1997, as amended at 67 FR 38848, June 6, 2002]



Sec. 369.4  Credit needs determination.

    (a) In general. The FDIC will review the loan portfolio of the bank 
and determine whether the bank is reasonably helping to meet the credit 
needs of the communities in the host state that are served by the bank.
    (b) Guidelines. The FDIC will use the following considerations as 
guidelines when making the determination pursuant to paragraph (a) of 
this section:
    (1) Whether covered interstate branches were formerly part of a 
failed or failing depository institution;
    (2) Whether covered interstate branches were acquired under 
circumstances where there was a low loan-to-deposit ratio because of the 
nature of the acquired institution's business or loan portfolio;
    (3) Whether covered interstate branches have a high concentration of 
commercial or credit card lending, trust services, or other specialized 
activities, including the extent to which the covered interstate 
branches accept deposits in the host state;
    (4) The Community Reinvestment Act (CRA) ratings received by the 
bank, if any, under 12 U.S.C. 2901 et seq.;
    (5) Economic conditions, including the level of loan demand, within 
the communities served by the covered interstate branches;
    (6) The safe and sound operation and condition of the bank; and
    (7) The FDIC's Community Reinvestment regulations (12 CFR Part 345) 
and interpretations of those regulations.



Sec. 369.5  Sanctions.

    (a) In general. If the FDIC determines that a bank is not reasonably 
helping to meet the credit needs of the communities served by the bank 
in the host state, and that the bank's statewide loan-to-deposit ratio 
is less than 50 percent of the host state loan-to-deposit ratio, the 
FDIC:
    (1) May order that a bank's covered interstate branch or branches be 
closed unless the bank provides reasonable assurances to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC, after an opportunity for public comment, that 
the bank has an acceptable plan under which the bank will reasonably 
help to meet the credit needs of the communities served by the bank in 
the host state; and
    (2) Will not permit the bank to open a new branch in the host state 
that would be considered to be a covered interstate branch unless the 
bank provides reasonable assurances to the satisfaction of the FDIC, 
after an opportunity for public comment, that the bank will reasonably 
help to meet the credit needs of the community that the new branch will 
serve.
    (b) Notice prior to closure of a covered interstate branch. Before 
exercising the FDIC's authority to order the bank to close a covered 
interstate branch, the FDIC will issue to the bank a notice of the 
FDIC's intent to order the closure

[[Page 1033]]

and will schedule a hearing within 60 days of issuing the notice.
    (c) Hearing. The FDIC will conduct a hearing scheduled under 
paragraph (b) of this section in accordance with the provisions of 12 
U.S.C. 1818(h) and 12 CFR part 308.



PART 370_RECORDKEEPING FOR TIMELY DEPOSIT INSURANCE DETERMINATION
--Table of Contents



Sec.
370.1  Purpose and scope.
370.2  Definitions.
370.3  Information technology system requirements.
370.4  Recordkeeping requirements.
370.5  Actions required for certain deposit accounts with transactional 
          features.
370.6  Implementation.
370.7  Accelerated implementation.
370.8  Relief.
370.9  Communication with the FDIC.
370.10  Compliance.

Appendix A to Part 370--Ownership Right and Capacity Codes
Appendix B to Part 370--Output Files Structure

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1817(a)(9), 1819 (Tenth), 1821(f)(1), 1822(c), 
1823(c)(4).

    Source: 81 87759, Dec. 5, 2016, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 370.1  Purpose and scope.

    Unless otherwise provided in this part, each ``covered institution'' 
(defined in Sec. 370.2(a)) is required to implement the information 
technology system and recordkeeping capabilities needed to calculate the 
amount of deposit insurance coverage available for each deposit account 
in the event of its failure. Doing so will improve the FDIC's ability to 
fulfill its statutory mandates to pay deposit insurance as soon as 
possible after a covered institution's failure and to resolve a covered 
institution at the least cost to the Deposit Insurance Fund.



Sec. 370.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) Account holder means the person or entity who has opened a 
deposit account with a covered institution and with whom the covered 
institution has a direct legal and contractual relationship with respect 
to the deposit.
    (b) Brokered deposit has the same meaning as provided in 12 CFR 
337.6(a)(2).
    (c) Covered institution means an insured depository institution 
which, based on its Reports of Condition and Income filed with the 
appropriate federal banking agency, has 2 million or more deposit 
accounts during the two consecutive quarters preceding the effective 
date of this part or thereafter.
    (d) Compliance date means the date that is three years after the 
later of the effective date of this part or the date on which an insured 
depository institution becomes a covered institution.
    (e) Deposit has the same meaning as provided under section 3(l) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(l)).
    (f) Deposit account records has the same meaning as provided in 12 
CFR 330.1(e).
    (g) Ownership rights and capacities are set forth in 12 CFR part 
330.
    (h) Payment instrument means a check, draft, warrant, money order, 
traveler's check, electronic instrument, or other instrument, payment of 
funds, or monetary value (other than currency).
    (i) Standard maximum deposit insurance amount (or ``SMDIA'') has the 
same meaning as provided pursuant to section 11(a)(1)(E) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(a)(1)(E)) and 12 CFR 330.1(o).
    (j) Transactional features with respect to a deposit account means 
that the depositor or account holder can make transfers or withdrawals 
from the deposit account to make payments or transfers to third persons 
or others (including another account of the depositor or account holder 
at the same institution or at a different institution) by means of a 
negotiable or transferable instrument, payment order of withdrawal, 
check, draft, prepaid account access device, debit card, or other 
similar order made by the depositor and payable to third parties, or by 
means of a telephonic (including data transmission) agreement, order or 
instruction, or by means of an instruction made at an automated teller 
machine or similar terminal or unit. For purposes of this definition, 
``telephonic

[[Page 1034]]

(including data transmission) agreement, order or instruction'' includes 
orders and instructions made by means of facsimile, computer, internet, 
handheld device, or other similar means.
    (k) Unique identifier means an alpha-numeric code associated with an 
individual or entity that is used consistently and continuously by a 
covered institution to monitor the covered institution's relationship 
with that individual or entity.



Sec. 370.3  Information technology system requirements.

    (a) A covered institution must configure its information technology 
system to be capable of performing the functions set forth in paragraph 
(b) of this section within 24 hours after the appointment of the FDIC as 
receiver. To the extent that a covered institution does not maintain its 
deposit account records in the manner prescribed under Sec. 370.4(a) but 
instead in the manner prescribed under Sec. 370.4(b) or (c), the covered 
institution's information technology system must be able to perform the 
functions set forth in paragraph (b) of this section upon input by the 
FDIC of additional information collected from account holders after 
failure of the covered institution.
    (b) Each covered institution's information technology system must be 
capable of:
    (1) Accurately calculating the deposit insurance coverage for each 
deposit account in accordance with 12 CFR part 330;
    (2) Generating and retaining output records in the data format and 
layout specified in Appendix B;
    (3) Restricting access to some or all of the deposits in a deposit 
account until the FDIC has made its deposit insurance determination for 
that deposit account using the covered institution's information 
technology system; and
    (4) Debiting from each deposit account the amount that is uninsured 
as calculated pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section.



Sec. 370.4  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) General recordkeeping requirements. Except as otherwise provided 
in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, a covered institution must 
maintain in its deposit account records for each account the information 
necessary for its information technology system to meet the requirements 
set forth in Sec. 370.3. The information must include:
    (1) The unique identifier of each
    (i) Account holder;
    (ii) Beneficial owner of a deposit, if the account holder is not the 
beneficial owner;
    (iii) Grantor and each beneficiary, if the deposit account is held 
in connection with an informal revocable trust that is insured pursuant 
to 12 CFR 330.10 (e.g., payable-on-death accounts, in-trust-for 
accounts, and Totten Trust accounts); and
    (iv) Grantor and each beneficiary, if the deposit account is held by 
the covered institution as the trustee of an irrevocable trust that is 
insured pursuant to 12 CFR 330.12.
    (2) The applicable ownership right and capacity code listed and 
described in Appendix A to this part.
    (b) Alternative recordkeeping requirements. As permitted under this 
paragraph, a covered institution may maintain in its deposit account 
records less information than is required under paragraph (a) of this 
section.
    (1) For each deposit account for which a covered institution's 
deposit account records disclose the existence of a relationship which 
might provide a basis for additional deposit insurance in accordance 
with 12 CFR 330.5 or 330.7 and for which the covered institution does 
not maintain information that would be needed for its information 
technology system to meet the requirements set forth in Sec. 370.3, the 
covered institution must maintain, at a minimum, the following in its 
deposit account records:
    (i) The unique identifier of the account holder; and
    (ii) The corresponding ``pending reason'' code in data field 2 of 
the pending file format set forth in Appendix B (and need not maintain a 
``right and capacity'' code).
    (2) For each formal revocable trust account that is insured as 
described in 12 CFR 330.10 and for each irrevocable trust account that 
is insured as described in 12 CFR 330.13, and for which

[[Page 1035]]

the covered institution does not maintain the information that would be 
needed for its information technology system to meet the requirements 
set forth in Sec. 370.3, the covered institution must, at a minimum, 
maintain in its deposit account records:
    (i) The unique identifier of the account holder;
    (ii) The unique identifier of the grantor if the deposit account has 
transactional features; and
    (iii) The corresponding ``pending reason'' code in data field 2 of 
the pending file format set forth in Appendix B (and need not maintain a 
``right and capacity'' code).
    (c) Recordkeeping requirements for official items. A covered 
institution must maintain in its deposit account records the information 
needed for its information technology system to meet the requirements 
set forth in Sec. 370.3 with respect to accounts held in the name of the 
covered institution from which withdrawals are made to honor a payment 
instrument issued by the covered institution, such as a certified check, 
loan disbursement check, interest check, traveler's check, expense 
check, official check, cashier's check, money order, or any similar 
payment instrument that the FDIC identifies in guidance issued to 
covered institutions in connection with this part. To the extent that 
the covered institution does not have such information, it need only 
maintain in its deposit account records for those accounts the 
corresponding ``pending reason'' code in data field 2 of the pending 
file format set forth in Appendix B (and need not maintain ``right and 
capacity'' codes).



Sec. 370.5  Actions required for certain deposit accounts with 
transactional features.

    (a) For each deposit account with transactional features for which 
the covered institution maintains its deposit account records in 
accordance with Sec. 370.4(b)(1), a covered institution must certify to 
the FDIC that the account holder will provide to the FDIC the 
information needed for the covered institution's information technology 
system to calculate deposit insurance coverage as set forth in 
Sec. 370.3(b) within 24 hours after the appointment of the FDIC as 
receiver. Such certification may be part of the annual certification of 
compliance required pursuant to Sec. 370.10(a)(1).
    (b) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this section, a covered 
institution need not provide such certification with respect to:
    (1) Accounts maintained by a mortgage servicer, in a custodial or 
other fiduciary capacity, which are comprised of payments by mortgagors 
of principal, interest, taxes and insurance;
    (2) Accounts maintained by real estate brokers, real estate agents, 
or title companies in which funds from multiple clients are deposited 
and held for a short period of time in connection with a real estate 
transaction;
    (3) Accounts established by an attorney or law firm on behalf of 
clients, commonly known as an Interest on Lawyers Trust Accounts, or 
functionally equivalent accounts; and
    (4) Accounts held in connection with an employee benefit plan (as 
defined in 12 CFR 330.15(f)(2)).
    (c) The covered institution's failure to provide the certification 
required under paragraph (a) of this section shall be deemed not to 
constitute a violation of this part if the FDIC has granted the covered 
institution relief from that certification requirement.



Sec. 370.6  Implementation.

    (a) A covered institution must satisfy the information technology 
system and recordkeeping requirements set forth in this part before the 
compliance date.
    (b) A covered institution may submit a request to the FDIC for an 
extension of its compliance date. The request shall state the amount of 
additional time needed to meet the requirements of this part, the 
reason(s) for which such additional time is needed, and the total number 
and dollar value of accounts for which deposit insurance coverage could 
not be calculated using the covered institution's information technology 
system were the covered institution to fail as of the date of the 
request. The FDIC's grant of a covered institution's request for 
extension may be conditional or time-limited.

[[Page 1036]]



Sec. 370.7  Accelerated implementation.

    (a) On a case-by-case basis, the FDIC may accelerate, upon notice, 
the implementation time frame for all or part of the requirements of 
this part for a covered institution that:
    (1) Has a composite rating of 3, 4, or 5 under the Uniform Financial 
Institution's Rating System (CAMELS rating), or in the case of an 
insured branch of a foreign bank, an equivalent rating;
    (2) Is undercapitalized, as defined under the prompt corrective 
action provisions of 12 CFR part 325; or
    (3) Is determined by the appropriate federal banking agency or the 
FDIC in consultation with the appropriate federal banking agency to be 
experiencing a significant deterioration of capital or significant 
funding difficulties or liquidity stress, notwithstanding the composite 
rating of the covered institution by its appropriate federal banking 
agency in its most recent report of examination.
    (b) In implementing this section, the FDIC must consult with the 
covered institution's appropriate federal banking agency and consider 
the complexity of the covered institution's deposit system and 
operations, extent of the covered institution's asset quality 
difficulties, volatility of the institution's funding sources, expected 
near-term changes in the covered institution's capital levels, and other 
relevant factors appropriate for the FDIC to consider in its role as 
insurer of the covered institution.



Sec. 370.8  Relief.

    (a) Exemption. A covered institution may submit a request in the 
form of a letter to the FDIC for an exemption from this part if it 
demonstrates that it does not take deposits from any account holder 
which, when aggregated, would exceed the SMDIA for any owner of the 
funds on deposit and will not in the future.
    (b) Exception. A covered institution may submit a request in the 
form of a letter to the FDIC for exception from any specific aspect of 
the information technology system requirements, recordkeeping 
requirements, certification requirements, or reporting requirements set 
forth in this part if circumstances exist that would make it 
impracticable or overly burdensome to meet those requirements. In its 
request letter, the covered institution must demonstrate the need for 
exception, describe the impact of an exception on the ability to quickly 
and accurately calculate deposit insurance for the related deposit 
accounts, and state the number of, and the dollar value of deposits in, 
the related deposit accounts.
    (c) Release from this part. A covered institution may submit a 
request in the form of a letter to the FDIC for release from this part 
if, based on its Reports of Condition and Income filed with the 
appropriate federal banking agency, it has less than two million deposit 
accounts during any three consecutive quarters after becoming a covered 
institution.
    (d) Release from 12 CFR 360.9 requirements. A covered institution is 
released from the provisional hold and standard data format requirements 
of 12 CFR 360.9 upon submitting to the FDIC the compliance certification 
required under Sec. 370.10(a).
    (e) FDIC approval of a request. The FDIC will consider all requests 
submitted in writing by a covered institution on a case-by-case basis in 
light of the objectives of this part, and the FDIC's grant of any 
request made by a covered institution pursuant to this section may be 
conditional or time-limited.



Sec. 370.9  Communication with the FDIC.

    (a) Point of contact. Not later than ten business days after either 
the effective date of this part or becoming a covered institution, a 
covered institution must notify the FDIC of the person(s) responsible 
for implementing the recordkeeping and information technology system 
capabilities required by this part.
    (b) Address. Point-of-contact information, reports and requests made 
under this part shall be submitted in writing to: Office of the 
Director, Division of Resolutions and Receiverships, Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street NW., Washington, DC 20429-0002.



Sec. 370.10  Compliance.

    (a) Certification and report. A covered institution shall submit to 
the FDIC a

[[Page 1037]]

certification of compliance and a deposit insurance coverage summary 
report on or before the compliance date and annually thereafter.
    (1) The certification must:
    (i) Confirm that the covered institution has implemented and 
successfully tested its information technology system for compliance 
with this part during the preceding calendar year; and
    (ii) Be signed by the covered institution's chief executive officer 
or chief operating officer.
    (2) The deposit insurance coverage summary report must include:
    (i) A description of any material change to the covered 
institution's information technology system or deposit taking operations 
since the prior annual certification;
    (ii) The number of deposit accounts, number of different account 
holders, and dollar amount of deposits by ownership right and capacity 
code (as listed and described in Appendix A);
    (iii) The total number of fully-insured deposit accounts and the 
total dollar amount of deposits in all such accounts;
    (iv) The total number of deposit accounts with uninsured deposits 
and the total dollar amount of uninsured amounts in all of those 
accounts; and
    (v) By deposit account type, the total number of, and dollar amount 
of deposits in, deposit accounts for which the covered institution's 
information technology system cannot calculate deposit insurance 
coverage using information currently maintained in the covered 
institution's deposit account records.
    (3) If a covered institution experiences a significant change in its 
deposit taking operations, the FDIC may require that it submit a 
certification of compliance and a deposit insurance coverage summary 
report more frequently than annually.
    (b) FDIC Testing. (1) The FDIC will conduct periodic tests of a 
covered institution's compliance with this part. These tests will begin 
no sooner than the last day of the first calendar quarter following the 
compliance date and would occur no more frequently than on a three-year 
cycle thereafter, unless there is a material change to the covered 
institution's information technology system, deposit-taking operations, 
or financial condition.
    (2) A covered institution shall provide the appropriate assistance 
to the FDIC as the FDIC tests the covered institution's ability to 
satisfy the requirements set forth in this part.
    (c) Effect of pending requests. A covered institution that has 
submitted a request pursuant to Sec. 370.6(b) or Sec. 370.8(a) through 
(c) will not be considered to be in violation of this part as to the 
requirements that are the subject of the request while awaiting the 
FDIC's response to such request.



     Sec. Appendix A to Part 370--Ownership Right and Capacity Codes

    A covered institution must use the codes defined below when 
assigning ownership right and capacity codes.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Code                       Illustrative description
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SGL.......................................  Single Account (12 CFR
                                             330.6): An account owned by
                                             one person with no
                                             testamentary or ``payable-
                                             on-death'' beneficiaries.
                                             It includes individual
                                             accounts, sole
                                             proprietorship accounts,
                                             single-name accounts
                                             containing community
                                             property funds, and
                                             accounts of a decedent and
                                             accounts held by executors
                                             or administrators of a
                                             decedent's estate.
JNT.......................................  Joint Account (12 CFR
                                             330.9): An account owned by
                                             two or more persons with no
                                             testamentary or ``payable-
                                             on-death'' beneficiaries
                                             (other than surviving co-
                                             owners). An account does
                                             not qualify as a joint
                                             account unless: (1) All co-
                                             owners are living persons;
                                             (2) each co-owner has
                                             personally signed a deposit
                                             account signature card
                                             (except that the signature
                                             requirement does not apply
                                             to certificates of deposit,
                                             to any deposit obligation
                                             evidenced by a negotiable
                                             instrument, or to any
                                             account maintained on
                                             behalf of the co-owners by
                                             an agent or custodian); and
                                             (3) each co-owner possesses
                                             withdrawal rights on the
                                             same basis.
REV.......................................  Revocable Trust Account (12
                                             CFR 330.10): An account
                                             owned by one or more
                                             persons that evidences an
                                             intention that, upon the
                                             death of the owner(s), the
                                             funds shall belong to one
                                             or more beneficiaries.
                                             There are two types of
                                             revocable trust accounts:
                                            (1) Payable-on-Death Account
                                             (Informal Revocable Trust
                                             Account): An account owned
                                             by one or more persons with
                                             one or more testamentary or
                                             ``payable-on-death''
                                             beneficiaries.
                                            (2) Revocable Living Trust
                                             Account (Formal Revocable
                                             Trust Account): An account
                                             in the name of a formal
                                             revocable ``living trust''
                                             with one or more grantors
                                             and one or more
                                             testamentary beneficiaries.

[[Page 1038]]

 
IRR.......................................  Irrevocable Trust Account
                                             (12 CFR 330.13): An account
                                             in the name of an
                                             irrevocable trust (unless
                                             the trustee is an insured
                                             depository institution, in
                                             which case the applicable
                                             code is DIT.
CRA.......................................  Certain Other Retirement
                                             Accounts (12 CFR 330.14 (b)-
                                             (c)) to the extent that
                                             participants under such
                                             plan have the right to
                                             direct the investment of
                                             assets held in individual
                                             accounts maintained on
                                             their behalf by the plan,
                                             including an individual
                                             retirement account
                                             described in section 408(a)
                                             of the Internal Revenue
                                             Code (26 U.S.C. 408(a)), an
                                             account of a deferred
                                             compensation plan described
                                             in section 457 of the
                                             Internal Revenue Code (26
                                             U.S.C. 457), an account of
                                             an individual account plan
                                             as defined in section 3(34)
                                             of the Employee Retirement
                                             Income Security Act (29
                                             U.S.C. 1002), a plan
                                             described in section 401(d)
                                             of the Internal Revenue
                                             Code (26 U.S.C. 401(d)).
EBP.......................................  Employee Benefit Plan
                                             Account (12 CFR 330.14): An
                                             account of an employee
                                             benefit plan as defined in
                                             section 3(3) of the
                                             Employee Retirement Income
                                             Security Act (29 U.S.C.
                                             1002), including any plan
                                             described in section 401(d)
                                             of the Internal Revenue
                                             Code (26 U.S.C. 401(d)),
                                             but not including any
                                             account classified as a
                                             Certain Retirement Account.
BUS.......................................  Business/Organization
                                             Account (12 CFR 330.11): An
                                             account of an organization
                                             engaged in an `independent
                                             activity' (as defined in
                                             Sec. 330.1(g)), but not an
                                             account of a sole
                                             proprietorship.
                                            This category includes:
                                            a. Corporation Account: An
                                             account owned by a
                                             corporation.
                                            b. Partnership Account: An
                                             account owned by a
                                             partnership.
                                            c. Unincorporated
                                             Association Account: An
                                             account owned by an
                                             unincorporated association
                                             (i.e., an account owned by
                                             an association of two or
                                             more persons formed for
                                             some religious,
                                             educational, charitable,
                                             social, or other
                                             noncommercial purpose).
GOV1-GOV2-GOV3............................  Government Account (12 CFR
                                             330.15): An account of a
                                             governmental entity.
    GOV1..................................     All time and savings
                                                deposit accounts of the
                                                United States and all
                                                time and savings deposit
                                                accounts of a state,
                                                county, municipality, or
                                                political subdivision
                                                depositing funds in an
                                                insured depository
                                                institution in the state
                                                comprising the public
                                                unit or wherein the
                                                public unit is located
                                                (including any insured
                                                depository institution
                                                having a branch in said
                                                state).
    GOV2..................................     All demand deposit
                                                accounts of the United
                                                States and all demand
                                                deposit accounts of a
                                                state, county,
                                                municipality, or
                                                political subdivision
                                                depositing funds in an
                                                insured depository
                                                institution in the state
                                                comprising the public
                                                unit or wherein the
                                                public unit is located
                                                (including any insured
                                                depository institution
                                                having a branch in said
                                                state).
    GOV3..................................     All deposits, regardless
                                                of whether they are
                                                time, savings or demand
                                                deposit accounts of a
                                                state, county,
                                                municipality or
                                                political subdivision
                                                depositing funds in an
                                                insured depository
                                                institution outside of
                                                the state comprising the
                                                public unit or wherein
                                                the public unit is
                                                located.
MSA.......................................  Mortgage Servicing Account
                                             (12 CFR 330.7(d)): An
                                             account held by a mortgage
                                             servicer, funded by
                                             payments by mortgagors of
                                             principal and interest.
PBA.......................................  Public Bond Accounts (12 CFR
                                             330.15(c)): An account
                                             consisting of funds held by
                                             an officer, agent or
                                             employee of a public unit
                                             for the purpose of
                                             discharging a debt owed to
                                             the holders of notes or
                                             bonds issued by the public
                                             unit.
DIT.......................................  IDI as trustee of
                                             irrevocable trust accounts
                                             (12 CFR 330.12): ``Trust
                                             funds'' (as defined in Sec.
                                              330.1(q)) account held by
                                             an insured depository
                                             institution as trustee of
                                             an irrevocable trust.
ANC.......................................  Annuity Contract Accounts
                                             (12 CFR 330.8): Funds held
                                             by an insurance company or
                                             other corporation in a
                                             deposit account for the
                                             sole purpose of funding
                                             life insurance or annuity
                                             contracts and any benefits
                                             incidental to such
                                             contracts.
BIA.......................................  Custodian accounts for
                                             American Indians (12 CFR
                                             330.7(e)): Funds deposited
                                             by the Bureau of Indian
                                             Affairs of the United
                                             States Department of the
                                             Interior (the ``BIA'') on
                                             behalf of American Indians
                                             pursuant to 25 U.S.C.
                                             162(a), or by any other
                                             disbursing agent of the
                                             United States on behalf of
                                             American Indians pursuant
                                             to similar authority, in an
                                             insured depository
                                             institution.
DOE.......................................  IDI Accounts under
                                             Department of Energy
                                             Program: Funds deposited by
                                             an insured depository
                                             institution pursuant to the
                                             Bank Deposit Financial
                                             Assistance Program of the
                                             Department of Energy.
------------------------------------------------------------------------



           Sec. Appendix B to Part 370--Output Files Structure

    The output files will include the data necessary for the FDIC to 
determine the deposit insurance coverage in a resolution. A covered 
institution must have the capability to prepare and maintain the files 
detailed below. These files must be prepared in successive iterations as 
the covered institution receives additional data from external sources 
necessary to complete any pending deposit insurance calculations. The 
unique identifier is required in all four files to link the customer 
information. All files are pipe delimited. Do not pad leading and 
trailing spacing or zeros for the data fields.

[[Page 1039]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05DE16.001

    Customer File. Customer File will be used by the FDIC to identify 
the customers. One record represents one unique customer.
    The data elements will include:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Field name                           Description                           Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CS_Unique_ID..........................  This field is the unique        Variable Character.
                                            identifier that is the
                                            primary key for the depositor
                                            data record. It will be
                                            generated by the covered
                                            institution and there shall
                                            not be duplicates.
2. CS_Govt_ID............................  This field shall contain the    Variable Character.
                                            ID number that identifies the
                                            entity based on a government
                                            issued ID or corporate
                                            filling. Populate as follows:.
                                           --For a United States
                                            individual--Legal
                                            identification number (e.g.,
                                            SSN, TIN, Driver's License,
                                            or Passport Number).
                                           --For a foreign national
                                            individual--where a SSN or
                                            TIN does not exist, a foreign
                                            passport or other legal
                                            identification number (e.g.,
                                            Alien Card).
                                           --For a Non-Individual--the
                                            Tax identification Number
                                            (TIN), or other register
                                            entity number.
3. CS_Govt_ID_Type.......................  The valid customer              Character (3).
                                            identification types, are
                                            noted below:.
                                           --SSN--Social Security Number.
                                           --TIN--Tax Identification
                                            Number.
                                           --DL--Driver's License, issued
                                            by a State or Territory of
                                            the United States.
                                           --ML--Military ID.............
                                           --PPT--Valid Passport.........
                                           --AID--Alien Identification
                                            Card.
                                           --OTH--Other..................
4. CS_Type...............................  The customer type field         Character (3).
                                            indicates the type of entity
                                            the customer is at the
                                            covered institution. The
                                            valid values are:.
                                           --IND--Individual.............
                                           --BUS--Business...............
                                           --TRT--Trust..................
                                           --NFP--Non-Profit.............
                                           --GOV--Government.............
                                           --OTH--Other..................
5. CS_First_Name.........................  Customer first name. Use only   Variable Character.
                                            for the name of individuals
                                            and the primary contact for
                                            entity.
6. CS_Middle_Name........................  Customer middle name. Use only  Variable Character.
                                            for the name of individuals
                                            and the primary contact for
                                            entity.
7. CS_Last_Name..........................  Customer last name. Use only    Variable Character.
                                            for the name of individuals
                                            and the primary contact for
                                            entity.
8. CS_Name_Suffix........................  Customer suffix...............  Variable Character.
9. CS_Entity_Name........................  The registered name of the      Variable Character.
                                            entity. Do not use this field
                                            if the customer is an
                                            individual.
10. CS_Street_Add_Ln1....................  Street address line 1. The      Variable Character.
                                            current account statement
                                            mailing address of record.
11. CS_Street_Add_Ln2....................  Street address line 2. If       Variable Character.
                                            available, the second address
                                            line.
12. CS_Street_Add_Ln3....................  Street address line 3. If       Variable Character.
                                            available, the third address
                                            line.
13. CS_City..............................  The city associated with the    Variable Character.
                                            permanent legal address.
14. CS_State.............................  The state for United States     Variable Character.
                                            addresses or state/province/
                                            county for international
                                            addresses.
                                           --For United States addresses
                                            use a two-character state
                                            code (official United States
                                            Postal Service abbreviations)
                                            associated with the permanent
                                            legal address.
                                           --For international address
                                            follow that country state
                                            code.
15. CS_ZIP...............................  The Zip/Postal Code associated  Variable Character.
                                            with the customers' permanent
                                            legal address.
                                           --For United States zip codes,
                                            use the United States Postal
                                            Service ZIP+4 standard.

[[Page 1040]]

 
                                           --For international zip codes
                                            follow that standard format
                                            of that country.
16. CS_Country...........................  The country associated with     Variable Character.
                                            the permanent legal address.
                                            Provide the country name or
                                            the standard International
                                            Organization for
                                            Standardization (ISO) country
                                            code.
17. CS_Telephone.........................  Customer telephone number. The  Variable Character.
                                            telephone number on record
                                            for the customer, including
                                            the country code if not
                                            within the United States.
18. CS_Email.............................  The email address on record     Variable Character.
                                            for the customer.
19. CS_Outstanding_Debt_Flag.............  This field indicates whether    Character (1).
                                            the customer has outstanding
                                            debt with covered
                                            institution. This field may
                                            be used by the FDIC to
                                            determine offsets. Enter
                                            ``Y'' if customer has
                                            outstanding debt with covered
                                            institutions, enter ``N''
                                            otherwise.
20. CS_Security_Pledge_Flag..............  This field shall only be used   Character (1).
                                            for Government customers.
                                            This field indicates whether
                                            the covered institution has
                                            pledged securities to the
                                            government entity, to cover
                                            any shortfall in deposit
                                            insurance. Enter ``Y'' if the
                                            government entity has
                                            outstanding security pledge
                                            with covered institutions,
                                            enter ``N'' otherwise.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Account File. The Account File contains the deposit ownership rights 
and capacities information, allocated balances, insured amounts, and 
uninsured amounts. The balances are in U.S. dollars. The Account file is 
linked to the Customer File by the CS_Unique_ID.
    The data elements will include:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Field name                           Description                           Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CS_Unique_ID..........................  This field is the unique        Variable Character.
                                            identifier that is the
                                            primary key for the depositor
                                            data record. It will be
                                            generated by the covered
                                            institution and there cannot
                                            be duplicates.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier....................  Deposit account identifier.     Variable Character.
                                            The primary field used to
                                            identify a deposit account.
                                           The account identifier may be
                                            composed of more than one
                                            physical data element to
                                            uniquely identify a deposit
                                            account..
3. DP_Right_Capacity.....................  Account ownership categories..  Character (4).
                                           --SGL--Single accounts........
                                           --JNT--Joint accounts.........
                                           --REV--Revocable trust
                                            accounts.
                                           --RR--Irrevocable trust
                                            accounts.
                                           --CRA--Certain retirement
                                            accounts.
                                           --EBP--Employee benefit plan
                                            accounts.
                                           --BUS--Business/Organization
                                            accounts.
                                           --GOV1, GOV2, GOV3--Government
                                            accounts (public unit
                                            accounts).
                                           --MSA--Mortgage servicing
                                            accounts for principal and
                                            interest payments.
                                           --DIT--Accounts held by a
                                            depository institution as the
                                            trustee of an irrevocable
                                            trust.
                                           --ANC--Annuity contract
                                            accounts.
                                           --PBA--Public bond accounts...
                                           --BIA--Custodian accounts for
                                            American Indians.
                                           --DOE--Accounts of an IDI
                                            pursuant to the Bank Deposit
                                            Financial Assistance Program
                                            of the Department of Energy.
4. DP_Prod_Cat...........................  Product category or             Character (3).
                                            classification.
                                           --DDA--Demand Deposit Accounts
                                           --NOW--Negotiable Order of
                                            Withdrawal.
                                           --MMA--Money Market Deposit
                                            Accounts.
                                           --SAV--Other savings accounts.
                                           --CDS--Time Deposit accounts
                                            and Certificate of Deposit
                                            accounts, including any
                                            accounts with specified
                                            maturity dates that may or
                                            may not be renewable..
5. DP_Allocated_Amt......................  The current balance in the      Decimal (14,2).
                                            account at the end of
                                            business on the effective
                                            date of the file, allocated
                                            to a specific owner in that
                                            insurance category.
                                           For JNT accounts, this is a
                                            calculated field that
                                            represents the allocated
                                            amount to each owner in JNT
                                            category..

[[Page 1041]]

 
                                           For REV accounts, this is a
                                            calculated field that
                                            represents the allocated
                                            amount to each owner-
                                            beneficiary in REV category..
                                           For other accounts with only
                                            one owner, this is the
                                            account current balance..
                                           This balance shall not be
                                            reduced by float or holds.
                                            For CDs and time deposits,
                                            the balance shall reflect the
                                            principal balance plus any
                                            interest paid and available
                                            for withdrawal not already
                                            included in the principal (do
                                            not include accrued interest).
6. DP_Acc_Int............................  Accrued interest allocated      Decimal (14,2).
                                            similarly as data field #5
                                            DP_Allocated_Amt.
                                           The amount of interest that
                                            has been earned but not yet
                                            paid to the account as of the
                                            date of the file..
7. DP_Total_PI...........................  Total amount adding #5          Decimal (14,2).
                                            DP_Allocated_Amt and #6
                                            DP_Acc_Int.
8. DP_Hold_Amount........................  Hold amount on the account....  Decimal (14,2).
                                           The available balance of the
                                            account is reduced by the
                                            hold amount. It has no effect
                                            on current balance (ledger
                                            balance).
9. DP_Insured_Amount.....................  The insured amount of the       Decimal (14,2).
                                            account.
10. DP_Uninsured_Amount..................  The uninsured amount of the     Decimal (14,2).
                                            account.
11. DP_Prepaid_Account_Flag..............  This field indicates a prepaid  Character (1).
                                            account with covered
                                            institution. Enter ``Y'' if
                                            account is a prepaid account
                                            with covered institutions,
                                            enter ``N'' otherwise.
12. DP_PT_Account_Flag...................  This field indicates a pass-    Character (1).
                                            through account with covered
                                            institution. Enter ``Y'' if
                                            account is a pass-through
                                            with covered institutions,
                                            enter ``N'' otherwise.
13. DP_PT_Trans_Flag.....................  This field indicates whether    Character (1).
                                            the fiduciary account has sub-
                                            accounts that have
                                            transactional features. Enter
                                            ``Y'' if account has
                                            transactional features, enter
                                            ``N'' otherwise.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Account Participant File. The Account Participant File will be used 
by the FDIC to identify account participants, to include the official 
custodian, beneficiary, bond holder, mortgagor, or employee benefit plan 
participant, for each account and account holder. One record represents 
one unique account participant. The Account Participant File is linked 
to the Account File by CS_Unique_ID and DP_Acct_Identifier.
    The data elements will include:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Field name                            Description                           Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CS_Unique_ID...........................  This field is the unique         Variable Character.
                                             identifier that is the primary
                                             key for the depositor data
                                             record. It will be generated
                                             by the covered institution and
                                             there shall not be duplicates.
2. DP_Acct_Identifier.....................  Deposit account identifier. The  Variable Character.
                                             primary field used to identify
                                             a deposit account..
                                            The account identifier may be
                                             composed of more than one
                                             physical data element to
                                             uniquely identify a deposit
                                             account.
3. DP_Right_Capacity......................  Account ownership categories...  Character (4).
                                            --SGL--Single accounts.........
                                            --JNT--Joint accounts..........
                                            --REV--Revocable trust accounts
                                            --IRR--Irrevocable trust
                                             accounts.
                                            --CRA--Certain retirement
                                             accounts.
                                            --EBP--Employee benefit plan
                                             accounts.
                                            --BUS--Business/Organization
                                             accounts.
                                            --GOV1, GOV2, GOV3--Government
                                             accounts (public unit
                                             accounts).
                                            --MSA--Mortgage servicing
                                             accounts for principal and
                                             interest payments.
                                            --DIT--Accounts held by a
                                             depository institution as the
                                             trustee of an irrevocable
                                             trust.
                                            --ANC--Annuity contract
                                             accounts.
                                            --PBA--Public bond accounts....
                                            --BIA--Custodian accounts for
                                             American Indians.
                                            --DOE--Accounts of an IDI
                                             pursuant to the Bank Deposit
                                             Financial Assistance Program
                                             of the Department of Energy.
4. DP_Prod_Category.......................  Product category or              Character (3).
                                             classification.
                                            --DDA--Demand Deposit Accounts.

[[Page 1042]]

 
                                            --NOW--Negotiable Order of
                                             Withdrawal.
                                            --MMA--Money Market Deposit
                                             Accounts.
                                            --SAV--Other savings accounts..
                                            --CDS--Time Deposit accounts
                                             and Certificate of Deposit
                                             accounts, including any
                                             accounts with specified
                                             maturity dates that may or may
                                             not be renewable.
5. AP_Allocated_Amount....................  Amount of funds attributable to  Decimal (14,2).
                                             the account participant as an
                                             account holder (e.g., Public
                                             account holder of a public
                                             bond account) or the amount of
                                             funds entitled to the
                                             beneficiary for the purpose of
                                             insurance determination (e.g.,
                                             Revocable Trust).
6. AP_Participant_ID......................  This field is the unique         Variable Character.
                                             identifier for the Account
                                             Participant. It will be
                                             generated by the covered
                                             institution and there shall
                                             not be duplicates. If the
                                             account participant is an
                                             existing bank customer this
                                             field is the same as
                                             CS_Unique_ID field.
7. AP_Govt_ID.............................  This field shall contain the ID  Variable Character.
                                             number that identifies the
                                             entity based on a government
                                             issued ID or corporate
                                             filling. Populate as follows:
                                            --For a United States
                                             individual--Legal
                                             identification number (e.g.,
                                             SSN, TIN, Driver's License, or
                                             Passport Number).
                                            --For a foreign national
                                             individual--where a SSN or TIN
                                             does not exist, a foreign
                                             passport or other legal
                                             identification number (e.g.,
                                             Alien Card).
                                            --For a Non-Individual--the Tax
                                             identification Number (TIN),
                                             or other register entity
                                             number.
8. AP_Govt_ID_Type........................  The valid customer               Character (3).
                                             identification types, are:.
                                            --SSN--Social Security Number..
                                            --TIN--Tax Identification
                                             Number.
                                            --DL--Driver's License, issued
                                             by a State or Territory of the
                                             United States.
                                            --ML--Military ID..............
                                            --PPT--Valid Passport..........
                                            --AID--Alien Identification
                                             Card.
                                            --OTH--Other...................
9. AP_First_Name..........................  Customer first name. Use only    Variable Character.
                                             for the name of individuals
                                             and the primary contact for
                                             entity.
10. AP_Middle_Name........................  Customer middle name. Use only   Variable Character.
                                             for the name of individuals
                                             and the primary contact for
                                             entity.
11. AP_Last_Name..........................  Customer last name. Use only     Variable Character.
                                             for the name of individuals
                                             and the primary contact for
                                             entity.
12. AP_Entity_Name........................  The registered name of the       Variable Character.
                                             entity. Do not use this field
                                             if the participant is an
                                             individual.
13. AP_Participant_Type...................  This field is used as the        Character (3).
                                             participant type identifier.
                                             The field will list the
                                             ``beneficial owner'' type:
                                            --OC--Official Custodian.......
                                            --BEN--Beneficiary.............
                                            --BHR--Bond Holder.............
                                            --MOR--Mortgagor...............
                                            --EPP--Employee Benefit Plan
                                             Participant.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Pending File. The Pending File contains the information needed for 
the FDIC to contact the owner or agent requesting additional information 
to complete the deposit insurance calculation. Each record represents a 
deposit account.
    The data elements will include:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Field name                            Description                           Format
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. CS_Unique_ID...........................  This field is the unique         Variable Character.
                                             identifier that is the primary
                                             key for the depositor data
                                             record. It will be generated
                                             by the covered institution and
                                             there cannot be duplicates.
2. Pending_Reason.........................  Reason code for the account to   Character (5).
                                             be included in Pending file.
                                            For deposit account records
                                             maintained by the bank, use
                                             the following codes.
                                            --A--agency or custodian.......
                                            --B--beneficiary...............
                                            --OI--official item............
                                            --RAC--right and capacity code.
                                            For alternative recordkeeping
                                             requirements, use the
                                             following codes.
                                            --ARB--direct obligation
                                             brokered deposit.

[[Page 1043]]

 
                                            --ARBN--non-direct obligation
                                             brokered deposit.
                                            --ARCRA--certain retirement
                                             accounts.
                                            --AREBP--employee benefit plan
                                             accounts.
                                            --ARM--mortgage servicing for
                                             principal and interest
                                             payments.
                                            --ARO--other deposits..........
                                            --ARTR--trust accounts.........
                                            The FDIC needs these codes to
                                             initiate the collection of
                                             needed information.
3. DP_Acct_Identifier.....................  Deposit account identifier. The  Variable Character.
                                             primary field used to identify
                                             a deposit account.
                                            The account identifier may be
                                             composed of more than one
                                             physical data element to
                                             uniquely identify a deposit
                                             account.
4. DP_Right_Capacity......................  Account ownership categories...  Character (4).
                                            --SGL--Single accounts.........
                                            --JNT--Joint accounts..........
                                            --REV--Revocable trust accounts
                                            --IRR--Irrevocable trust
                                             accounts.
                                            --CRA--Certain retirement
                                             accounts.
                                            --EBP--Employee benefit plan
                                             accounts.
                                            --BUS--Business/Organization
                                             accounts.
                                            --GOV1, GOV2, GOV3--Government
                                             accounts (public unit
                                             accounts).
                                            --MSA--Mortgage servicing
                                             accounts for principal and
                                             interest payments.
                                            --DIT--Accounts held by a
                                             depository institution as the
                                             trustee of an irrevocable
                                             trust.
                                            --ANC--Annuity contract
                                             accounts.
                                            --PBA--Public bond accounts....
                                            --BIA--Custodian accounts for
                                             American Indians.
                                            --DOE--Accounts of an IDI
                                             pursuant to the Bank Deposit
                                             Financial Assistance Program
                                             of the Department of Energy.
5. DP_Prod_Category.......................  Product category or              Character (3).
                                             classification.
                                            --DDA--Demand Deposit Accounts.
                                            --NOW--Negotiable Order of
                                             Withdrawal.
                                            --MMA--Money Market Deposit
                                             Accounts.
                                            --SAV--Other savings accounts..
                                            --CDS--Time Deposit accounts
                                             and Certificate of Deposit
                                             accounts, including any
                                             accounts with specified
                                             maturity dates that may or may
                                             not be renewable.
6. DP_Cur_Bal.............................  Current balance................  Decimal (14,2).
                                            The current balance in the
                                             account at the end of business
                                             on the effective date of the
                                             file.
                                            This balance shall not be
                                             reduced by float or holds. For
                                             CDs and time deposits, the
                                             balance shall reflect the
                                             principal balance plus any
                                             interest paid and available
                                             for withdrawal not already
                                             included in the principal (do
                                             not include accrued interest).
7. DP_Acc_Int.............................  Accrued interest...............  Decimal (14,2).
                                            The amount of interest that has
                                             been earned but not yet paid
                                             to the account as of the date
                                             of the file.
8. DP_Total_PI............................  Total of principal and accrued   Decimal (14,2).
                                             interest.
9. DP_Hold_Amount.........................  Hold amount on the account.....  Decimal (14,2).
                                            The available balance of the
                                             account is reduced by the hold
                                             amount. It has no impact on
                                             current balance (ledger
                                             balance).
10. DP_Prepaid_Account_Flag...............  This field indicates a prepaid   Character (1).
                                             account with covered
                                             institution. Enter ``Y'' if
                                             account is a prepaid account,
                                             enter ``N'' otherwise.
11. CS_Govt_ID............................  This field shall contain the ID  Variable Character.
                                             number that identifies the
                                             entity based on a government
                                             issued ID or corporate
                                             filling. Populate as follows:.
                                            --For a United States
                                             individual--Legal
                                             identification number (e.g.,
                                             SSN, TIN, Driver's License or
                                             Passport Number).
                                            --For a foreign national
                                             individual--where a SSN or TIN
                                             does not exist, a foreign
                                             passport or other legal
                                             identification number (e.g.,
                                             Alien Card).
                                            --For a Non-Individual--the Tax
                                             identification Number (TIN),
                                             or other register entity
                                             number.
12. CS_Govt_ID_Type.......................  The valid customer               Character (3).
                                             identification types:.
                                            --SSN--Social Security Number..
                                            --TIN--Tax Identification
                                             Number.

[[Page 1044]]

 
                                            --DL--Driver's License, issued
                                             by a State or Territory of the
                                             United States.
                                            --ML--Military ID..............
                                            --PPT--Valid Passport..........
                                            --AID--Alien Identification
                                             Card.
                                            --OTH--Other...................
13. CS_First_Name.........................  Customer first name. Use only    Variable Character.
                                             for the name of individuals
                                             and the primary contact for
                                             entity.
14. CS_Middle_Name........................  Customer middle name. Use only   Variable Character.
                                             for the name of individuals
                                             and the primary contact for
                                             entity.
15. CS_Last_Name..........................  Customer last name. Use only     Variable Character.
                                             for the name of individuals
                                             and the primary contact for
                                             entity.
16. CS_Name_Suffix........................  Customer suffix................  Variable Character.
17. CS_Entity_Name........................  The registered name of the       Variable Character.
                                             entity. Do not use this field
                                             if the customer is an
                                             individual.
18. CS_Street_Add_Ln1.....................  Street address line 1..........  Variable Character.
                                            The current account statement
                                             mailing address of record.
19. CS_Street_Add_Ln2.....................  Street address line 2..........  Variable Character.
                                            If available, the second
                                             address line.
20. CS_Street_Add_Ln3.....................  Street address line 3..........  Variable Character.
                                            If available, the third address
                                             line.
21. CS_City...............................  The city associated with the     Variable Character.
                                             permanent legal address.
22. CS_State..............................  The state for United States      Variable Character.
                                             addresses or state/province/
                                             county for international
                                             addresses.
                                            --For United States addresses
                                             use a two-character state code
                                             (official United States Postal
                                             Service abbreviations)
                                             associated with the permanent
                                             legal address.
                                            --For international address
                                             follow that country state code.
23. CS_ZIP................................  The Zip/Postal Code associated   Variable Character.
                                             with the customers' permanent
                                             legal address.
                                            --For United States zip codes,
                                             use the United States Postal
                                             Service ZIP+4 standard.
                                            --For international zip codes
                                             follow the standard format of
                                             that country.
24. CS_Country............................  The country associated with the  Variable Character.
                                             permanent legal address.
                                             Provide the country name or
                                             the standard International
                                             Organization for
                                             Standardization (ISO) country
                                             code.
25. CS_Telephone..........................  Customer telephone number. The   Variable Character.
                                             telephone number on record for
                                             the customer, including the
                                             country code if not within the
                                             United States.
26. CS_Email..............................  The email address on record for  Variable Character.
                                             the customer.
27. CS_Outstanding_Debt_Flag..............  This field indicates whether     Character (1).
                                             the customer has outstanding
                                             debt with covered institution.
                                             This field may be used to
                                             determine offsets. Enter ``Y''
                                             if customer has outstanding
                                             debt with covered
                                             institutions, enter ``N''
                                             otherwise.
28. CS_Security_Pledge_Flag...............  This field indicates whether     Character (1).
                                             the CI has pledged securities
                                             to the government entity, to
                                             cover any shortfall in deposit
                                             insurance. Enter ``Y'' if the
                                             government entity has
                                             outstanding security pledge
                                             with covered institutions,
                                             enter ``N'' otherwise. This
                                             field shall only be used for
                                             Government customers.
29. DP_PT_Account_Flag....................  This field indicates a pass-     Character (1).
                                             through account with covered
                                             institution. Enter ``Y'' if
                                             account is a pass-through with
                                             covered institutions, enter
                                             ``N'' otherwise.
30. PT_Parent_Customer_ID.................  This field contains the unique   Variable Character.
                                             identifier of the parent
                                             customer ID who has the
                                             fiduciary responsibility at
                                             the covered institution.
31. DP_PT_Trans_Flag......................  This field indicates whether     Character (1).
                                             the fiduciary account has sub-
                                             accounts that have
                                             transactional features. Enter
                                             ``Y'' if account has
                                             transactional features, enter
                                             ``N'' otherwise.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



PART 371_RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALIFIED FINANCIAL 
CONTRACTS--Table of Contents



Sec.
371.1  Scope, purpose, and compliance dates.
371.2  Definitions.
371.3  Maintenance of records.
371.4  Content of records.
371.5  Exemptions.
371.6  Transition for existing records entities.
371.7  Enforcement actions.

Appendix A to Part 371--File Structure for Qualified Financial Contract 
          (QFC) Records for Limited Scope Entities

[[Page 1045]]

Appendix B to Part 371--File Structure for Qualified Financial Contract 
          Records for Full Scope Entities

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819(a)(Tenth); 1820(g); 1821(e)(8)(D) and (H); 
1831g; 1831i; and 1831s.

    Source: 82 FR 35599, July 31, 2017, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 371.1  Scope, purpose, and compliance dates.

    (a) Scope. This part applies to each insured depository institution 
that qualifies as a ``records entity'' under the definition set forth in 
Sec. 371.2(r).
    (b) Purpose. This part establishes recordkeeping requirements with 
respect to qualified financial contracts for insured depository 
institutions that are in a troubled condition.
    (c) Compliance dates. (1) Within 3 business days of becoming a 
records entity, the records entity shall provide to the FDIC, in 
writing, the name and contact information for the person at the records 
entity who is responsible for recordkeeping under this part and, unless 
not required to maintain files in electronic form pursuant to 
Sec. 371.4(d), a directory of the electronic files that will be used to 
maintain the information required to be kept by this part.
    (2) Except as provided in Sec. 371.6:
    (i) A records entity, other than an accelerated records entity, 
shall comply with all applicable recordkeeping requirements of this part 
within 270 days after it becomes a records entity.
    (ii) An accelerated records entity shall comply with all applicable 
recordkeeping requirements of this part within 60 days after it becomes 
a records entity.
    (iii) Notwithstanding paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section, 
a records entity that becomes an accelerated records entity after it 
became a records entity shall comply with all applicable recordkeeping 
requirements of this part within 60 days after it becomes an accelerated 
records entity or its original 270 day compliance period, whichever time 
period is shorter.
    (d) Extensions of time to comply. The FDIC may, in its discretion, 
grant one or more extensions of time for compliance with the 
recordkeeping requirements of this part.
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, no 
single extension for a records entity shall be for a period of more than 
120 days.
    (2) For a records entity that is an accelerated records entity at 
the time of a request for an extension, no single extension shall be for 
a period of more than 30 days.
    (3) A records entity may request an extension of time by submitting 
a written request to the FDIC at least 15 days prior to the deadline for 
its compliance with the recordkeeping requirements of this part. The 
written request for an extension must contain a statement of the reasons 
why the records entity cannot comply by the deadline for compliance, a 
project plan (including timeline) for achieving compliance, and a 
progress report describing the steps taken to achieve compliance.



Sec. 371.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) Accelerated records entity means a records entity that:
    (1) Has a composite rating, as determined by its appropriate Federal 
banking agency in its most recent report of examination, of 4 or 5 under 
the Uniform Financial Institution Rating System, or in the case of an 
insured branch of a foreign bank, an equivalent rating; or
    (2) Is determined by the appropriate Federal banking agency or by 
the FDIC in consultation with the appropriate Federal banking agency to 
be experiencing a significant deterioration of capital or significant 
funding difficulties or liquidity stress, notwithstanding the composite 
rating of the institution by its appropriate Federal banking agency in 
its most recent report of examination.
    (b) Affiliate means any entity that controls, is controlled by, or 
is under common control with another entity.
    (c) Appropriate Federal banking agency means the agency or agencies 
designated under 12 U.S.C. 1813(q).
    (d) Business day means any day other than any Saturday, Sunday or 
any day on which either the New York Stock Exchange or the Federal 
Reserve Bank of New York is closed.
    (e) Control. An entity controls another entity if:

[[Page 1046]]

    (1) The entity directly or indirectly or acting through one or more 
persons owns, controls, or has power to vote 25 per centum or more of 
any class of voting securities of the other entity;
    (2) The entity controls in any manner the election of a majority of 
the directors or trustees of the other entity; or
    (3) The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System has 
determined, after notice and opportunity for hearing in accordance with 
12 CFR 225.31, that the entity directly or indirectly exercises a 
controlling influence over the management or policies of the other 
entity.
    (f) Corporate group means an entity and all affiliates of that 
entity.
    (g) Counterparty means any natural person or entity (or separate 
non-U.S. branch of any entity) that is a party to a QFC with a records 
entity or, if the records entity is required or chooses to maintain the 
records specified in Sec. 371.4(b), a reportable subsidiary of such 
records entity.
    (h) Effective date means October 1, 2017.
    (i) Full scope entity means a records entity that has total 
consolidated assets equal to or greater than $50 billion or that is a 
Part 148 affiliate.
    (j) Insured depository institution means any bank or savings 
association, as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813, the deposits of which are 
insured by the FDIC.
    (k) Legal entity identifier or LEI for an entity means the global 
legal entity identifier maintained for such entity by a utility 
accredited by the Global LEI Foundation or by a utility endorsed by the 
Regulatory Oversight Committee. As used in this definition:
    (1) Regulatory Oversight Committee means the Regulatory Oversight 
Committee (of the Global LEI System), whose charter was set forth by the 
Finance Ministers and Central Bank Governors of the Group of Twenty and 
the Financial Stability Board, or any successor thereof; and
    (2) Global LEI Foundation means the not-for-profit organization 
organized under Swiss law by the Financial Stability Board in 2014, or 
any successor thereof.
    (l) Limited scope entity means a records entity that is not a full 
scope entity.
    (m) Parent entity with respect to an entity means an entity that 
controls that entity.
    (n) Part 148 means 31 CFR part 148.
    (o) Part 148 affiliate means a records entity that, on financial 
statements prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted 
accounting principles or other applicable accounting standards, 
consolidates, or is consolidated by or with (or is required to 
consolidate or be consolidated by or with), a member of a corporate 
group one or more members of which are required to maintain QFC records 
pursuant to Part 148.
    (p) Position means an individual transaction under a qualified 
financial contract and includes the rights and obligations of a person 
or entity as a party to an individual transaction under a qualified 
financial contract.
    (q) Qualified financial contract or QFC means any qualified 
financial contract as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)(D), and any 
agreement or transaction that the FDIC determines by regulation, 
resolution, or order to be a QFC, including without limitation, any 
securities contract, commodity contract, forward contract, repurchase 
agreement, and swap agreement.
    (r) Records entity means any insured depository institution that has 
received written notice from the institution's appropriate Federal 
banking agency or the FDIC that it is in a troubled condition and 
written notice from the FDIC that it is subject to the recordkeeping 
requirements of this part.
    (s) Reportable subsidiary means any subsidiary of a records entity 
that is incorporated or organized under U.S. federal law or the laws of 
any State that is not:
    (1) A functionally regulated subsidiary as defined in 12 U.S.C. 
1844(c)(5);
    (2) A security-based swap dealer as defined in 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(71); 
or
    (3) A major security-based swap participant as defined in 15 U.S.C. 
78c(a)(67).
    (t) State means any state, commonwealth, territory or possession of 
the United States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto 
Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, American Samoa,

[[Page 1047]]

Guam or the United States Virgin Islands.
    (u) Subsidiary, with respect to another entity, means an entity that 
is, or is required to be, consolidated by such other entity on such 
other entity's financial statements prepared in accordance with U.S. 
generally accepted accounting principles or other applicable accounting 
standards.
    (v) Total consolidated assets means the total consolidated assets of 
a records entity and its consolidated subsidiaries as reported in the 
records entity's most recent year-end audited consolidated statement of 
financial condition filed with the appropriate Federal banking agency.
    (w) Troubled condition means an insured depository institution that:
    (1) Has a composite rating, as determined by its appropriate Federal 
banking agency in its most recent report of examination, of 3 (only for 
insured depository institutions with total consolidated assets of $10 
billion or greater), 4 or 5 under the Uniform Financial Institution 
Rating System, or in the case of an insured branch of a foreign bank, an 
equivalent rating;
    (2) Is subject to a proceeding initiated by the FDIC for termination 
or suspension of deposit insurance;
    (3) Is subject to a cease-and-desist order or written agreement 
issued by the appropriate Federal banking agency, as defined in 12 
U.S.C. 1813(q), that requires action to improve the financial condition 
of the insured depository institution or is subject to a proceeding 
initiated by the appropriate Federal banking agency which contemplates 
the issuance of an order that requires action to improve the financial 
condition of the insured depository institution, unless otherwise 
informed in writing by the appropriate Federal banking agency;
    (4) Is informed in writing by the insured depository institution's 
appropriate Federal banking agency that it is in troubled condition for 
purposes of 12 U.S.C. 1831i on the basis of the institution's most 
recent report of condition or report of examination, or other 
information available to the institution's appropriate Federal banking 
agency; or
    (5) Is determined by the appropriate Federal banking agency or the 
FDIC in consultation with the appropriate Federal banking agency to be 
experiencing a significant deterioration of capital or significant 
funding difficulties or liquidity stress, notwithstanding the composite 
rating of the institution by its appropriate Federal banking agency in 
its most recent report of examination.



Sec. 371.3  Maintenance of records.

    (a) Form and availability. (1) Unless it is not required to maintain 
records in electronic form as provided in Sec. 371.4(d), a records 
entity shall maintain the records described in Sec. 371.4 in electronic 
form and shall be capable of producing such records electronically in 
the format set forth in the appendices of this part.
    (2) All such records shall be updated on a daily basis and shall be 
based upon values and information no less current than previous end-of-
day values and information.
    (3) Except as provided in Sec. 371.4(d), a records entity shall 
compile the records described in Sec. 371.4(a) or Sec. 371.4(b) (as 
applicable) in a manner that permits aggregation and disaggregation of 
such records by counterparty. If the records are maintained pursuant to 
Sec. 371.4(b), they must be compiled by the records entity on a 
consolidated basis for itself and its reportable subsidiaries in a 
manner that also permits aggregation and disaggregation of such records 
by the records entity and its reportable subsidiary.
    (4) Records maintained pursuant to Sec. 371.4(b) by a records entity 
that is a Part 148 affiliate shall be compiled consistently, in all 
respects, with records compiled by its affiliate(s) pursuant to Part 
148.
    (5) A records entity shall maintain each set of daily records for a 
period of not less than five business days.
    (b) Change in point of contact. A records entity shall provide to 
the FDIC, in writing, any change to the name and contact information for 
the person at the records entity who is responsible for recordkeeping 
under this part within 3 business days of any change to such 
information.

[[Page 1048]]

    (c) Access to records. A records entity shall be capable of 
providing the records specified in Sec. 371.4 (based on the immediately 
preceding day's end-of-day values and information) to the FDIC no later 
than 7 a.m. (Eastern Time) each day. A records entity is required to 
make such records available to the FDIC following a written request by 
the FDIC for such records. Any such written request shall specify the 
date such records are to be made available (and the period of time 
covered by the request) and shall provide the records entity at least 8 
hours to respond to the request. If the request is made less than 8 
hours before such 7 a.m. deadline, the deadline shall be automatically 
extended to the time that is 8 hours following the time of the request.
    (d) Maintenance of records after a records entity is no longer in a 
troubled condition. A records entity shall continue to maintain the 
capacity to produce the records required under this part on a daily 
basis for a period of one year after the date that the appropriate 
Federal banking agency or the FDIC notifies the institution, in writing, 
that it is no longer in a troubled condition as defined in 
Sec. 371.2(w).
    (e) Maintenance of records after an acquisition of a records entity. 
If a records entity ceases to exist as an insured depository institution 
as a result of a merger or a similar transaction with an insured 
depository institution that is not in a troubled condition immediately 
following the transaction, the obligation to maintain records under this 
part on a daily basis will terminate when the records entity ceases to 
exist as a separately insured depository institution.



Sec. 371.4  Content of records.

    (a) Limited scope entities. Except as provided in Sec. 371.6, a 
limited scope entity must maintain (at the election of such records 
entity) either the records described in paragraph (b) of this section or 
the following records:
    (1) The position-level data listed in Table A-1 in Appendix A of 
this part with respect to each QFC to which it is a party, without 
duplication.
    (2) The counterparty-level data listed in Table A-2 in Appendix A of 
this part with respect to each QFC to which it is a party, without 
duplication.
    (3) The corporate organization master table in Appendix A of this 
part for the records entity and its affiliates.
    (4) The counterparty master table in Appendix A of this part with 
respect to each QFC to which it is a party, without duplication.
    (5) All documents that govern QFC transactions between the records 
entity and each counterparty, including, without limitation, master 
agreements and annexes, schedules, netting agreements, supplements, or 
other modifications with respect to the agreements, confirmations for 
each QFC position that has been confirmed and all trade acknowledgments 
for each QFC position that has not been confirmed, all credit support 
documents including, but not limited to, credit support annexes, 
guarantees, keep-well agreements, or net worth maintenance agreements 
that are relevant to one or more QFCs, and all assignment or novation 
documents, if applicable, including documents that confirm that all 
required consents, approvals, or other conditions precedent for such 
assignment or novation have been obtained or satisfied.
    (6) A list of vendors directly supporting the QFC-related activities 
of the records entity and the vendors' contact information.
    (b) Full scope entities. Except as provided in Sec. 371.6, a full 
scope entity must maintain the following records:
    (1) The position-level data listed in Table A-1 in Appendix B of 
this part with respect to each QFC to which it or any of its reportable 
subsidiaries is a party, without duplication.
    (2) The counterparty-level data listed in Table A-2 in Appendix B of 
this part with respect to each QFC to which it or any of its reportable 
subsidiaries is a party, without duplication.
    (3) The legal agreements information listed in Table A-3 in Appendix 
B of this part with respect to each QFC to which it or any of its 
reportable subsidiaries is a party, without duplication.
    (4) The collateral detail data listed in Table A-4 in Appendix B of 
this part with respect to each QFC to which it or

[[Page 1049]]

any of its reportable subsidiaries is a party, without duplication.
    (5) The corporate organization master table in Appendix B of this 
part for the records entity and its affiliates.
    (6) The counterparty master table in Appendix B of this part with 
respect to each QFC to which it or any of its reportable subsidiaries is 
a party, without duplication.
    (7) The booking location master table in Appendix B of this part for 
each booking location used with respect to each QFC to which it or any 
of its reportable subsidiaries is a party, without duplication.
    (8) The safekeeping agent master table in Appendix B of this part 
for each safekeeping agent used with respect to each QFC to which it or 
any of its reportable subsidiaries is a party, without duplication.
    (9) All documents that govern QFC transactions between the records 
entity (or any of its reportable subsidiaries) and each counterparty, 
including, without limitation, master agreements and annexes, schedules, 
netting agreements, supplements, or other modifications with respect to 
the agreements, confirmations for each QFC position that has been 
confirmed and all trade acknowledgments for each QFC position that has 
not been confirmed, all credit support documents including, but not 
limited to, credit support annexes, guarantees, keep-well agreements, or 
net worth maintenance agreements that are relevant to one or more QFCs, 
and all assignment or novation documents, if applicable, including 
documents that confirm that all required consents, approvals, or other 
conditions precedent for such assignment or novation have been obtained 
or satisfied.
    (10) A list of vendors directly supporting the QFC-related 
activities of the records entity and its reportable subsidiaries and the 
vendors' contact information.
    (c) Change in recordkeeping status. (1) A records entity that was a 
limited scope entity maintaining the records specified in paragraphs 
(a)(1) through (6) of this section and that subsequently becomes a full 
scope entity must maintain the records specified in paragraph (b) of 
this section within 270 days of becoming a full scope entity (or 60 days 
of becoming a full scope entity if it is an accelerated records entity). 
Until the records entity maintains the records required by paragraph (b) 
of this section it must continue to maintain the records required by 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this section.
    (2) A records entity that was a full scope entity maintaining the 
records specified in paragraph (b) of this section and that subsequently 
becomes a limited scope entity may continue to maintain the records 
specified in paragraph (b) of this section or, at its option, may 
maintain the records specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this 
section, provided however, that such records entity shall continue to 
maintain the records specified in paragraph (b) of this section until it 
maintains the records specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this 
section.
    (3) A records entity that changes from a limited scope entity to a 
full scope entity and at the time it becomes a full scope entity is not 
yet maintaining the records specified in paragraph (a) of this section 
or paragraph (b) of this section must satisfy the recordkeeping 
requirements of paragraph (b) of this section within 270 days of first 
becoming a records entity (or 60 days of first becoming a records entity 
if it is an accelerated records entity).
    (4) A records entity that changes from a full scope entity to a 
limited scope entity and at the time it becomes a limited scope entity 
is not yet maintaining the records specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section must satisfy the recordkeeping requirements of paragraph (a) of 
this section within 270 days of first becoming a record entity (or 60 
days of first becoming a record entity if it is an accelerated records 
entity).
    (d) Records entities with 50 or fewer QFC positions. Notwithstanding 
any other requirement of this part, if a records entity and, if it is a 
full scope entity, its reportable subsidiaries, have 50 or fewer open 
QFC positions in total (without duplication) on the date the institution 
becomes a records entity, the records required by this section are not 
required to be recorded and maintained in electronic form as would 
otherwise be required by this section, so

[[Page 1050]]

long as all required records are capable of being updated on a daily 
basis. If at any time after it becomes a records entity, the institution 
and, if it is a full scope entity, its reportable subsidiaries, if 
applicable, have more than 50 open QFC positions in total (without 
duplication), it must record and maintain records in electronic form as 
required by this section within 270 days (or, if it is an accelerated 
records entity at that time, within 60 days). The records entity must 
provide to the FDIC, within 3 business days of reaching the 51-QFC 
threshold, a directory of the electronic files that will be used to 
maintain the information required to be kept by this section.



Sec. 371.5  Exemptions.

    (a) Request. A records entity may request an exemption from one or 
more of the requirements of Sec. 371.4 by submitting a written request 
to the Executive Secretary of the FDIC referring to this part. The 
written request for an exemption must:
    (1) Specify the requirement(s) under this part from which the 
records entity is requesting to be exempt and whether the exemption is 
sought to apply solely to the records entity or to one or more 
identified reportable subsidiaries of the records entity or to the 
records entity and one or more identified reportable subsidiaries;
    (2) Specify the reasons why it would be appropriate for the FDIC to 
grant the exemption;
    (3) Specify the reasons why granting the exemption will not impair 
or impede the FDIC's ability to fulfill its statutory obligations under 
12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8), (9), or (10) or the FDIC's ability to obtain a 
comprehensive understanding of the QFC exposures of the records entity 
and its reportable subsidiaries; and
    (4) Include such additional information (if any) that the FDIC may 
require.
    (b) Determination. Following its evaluation of a request for 
exemption, the FDIC will determine, in its sole discretion, whether to 
grant or deny the request.



Sec. 371.6  Transition for existing records entities.

    (a) Limited scope entities. Notwithstanding any other provision of 
this part, an insured depository institution that became a records 
entity prior to October 1, 2017, and constitutes a limited scope entity 
on October 1, 2017, shall continue to comply with this part as in effect 
immediately prior to October 1, 2017, or, if it elects to comply with 
this part as in effect on and after October 1, 2017, as so in effect, 
for so long as the entity remains a limited scope entity that has not 
ceased to be required to maintain the capacity to produce records 
pursuant to Sec. 371.3(d).
    (b) Transition for full scope entities maintaining records on 
effective date. If an insured depository institution that constitutes a 
full scope entity on October 1, 2017, became a records entity prior to 
October 1, 2017, and is maintaining the records required by this part as 
in effect immediately prior to October 1, 2017, then:
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, such 
records entity shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements of this 
part within 270 days after October 1, 2017 (or no later than 60 days 
after October 1, 2017 if it is an accelerated records entity); and
    (2) If--
    (i) Such records entity is a Part 148 affiliate and, on October 1, 
2017, is not an accelerated records entity; and
    (ii) The compliance date for any other member of such record 
entity's corporate group to comply with Part 148 is set forth in 31 CFR 
148.1(d)(1)(i)(B),(C), or (D), as in effect on October 1, 2017, such 
records entity shall be permitted to delay compliance with the 
recordkeeping requirements of this part until the first date on which 
members of any corporate group of which such records entity is a member 
is required to comply with Part 148 pursuant to 31 CFR 
148.1(d)(1)(i)(B),(C), or (D), as in effect on October 1, 2017; 
provided, that if such records entity becomes an accelerated records 
entity, it shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements of this part 
no later than 60 days after it becomes an accelerated records entity; 
provided, that in the case of each of paragraphs (b)(1) and (2)

[[Page 1051]]

of this section until such full scope entity maintains the records 
required by Sec. 371.4, it continues to maintain the records required by 
this part as in effect immediately prior to October 1, 2017.
    (c) Transition for full scope entities not maintaining records on 
effective date. If an insured depository institution that constitutes a 
full scope entity on October 1, 2017, became a records entity prior to 
October 1, 2017, but is not maintaining the records required by this 
part as in effect immediately prior to October 1, 2017, such records 
entity shall comply with all recordkeeping requirements of this part 
within 270 days after the date that it first became a records entity (or 
no later than 60 days after it first became a records entity if it is an 
accelerated records entity).



Sec. 371.7  Enforcement actions.

    Violating the terms or requirements set forth in this part 
constitutes a violation of a regulation and subjects the records entity 
to enforcement actions under Section 8 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1818).



  Sec. Appendix A to Part 371--File Structure for Qualified Financial 
            Contract (QFC) Records for Limited Scope Entities

                                                             Table A-1--Position-Level Data
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application               Definition              Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A1.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Provide data           YYYY-MM-DD...............
                                                                                   extraction date.
A1.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide LEI for        Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   records entity if                                 CO.2.
                                                                                   available.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to review position-
                                                                                   level data by
                                                                                   records entity.
A1.3..............................  Position identifier..  20058953.............  Provide a position     Varchar(100).
                                                                                   identifier. Use the
                                                                                   unique transaction
                                                                                   identifier if
                                                                                   available.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to readily track and
                                                                                   distinguish
                                                                                   positions.
A1.4..............................  Counterparty           888888888............  Provide a              Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   counterparty                                      CP.2.
                                                                                   identifier. Use LEI
                                                                                   if counterparty has
                                                                                   one. Information
                                                                                   needed to identify
                                                                                   counterparty by
                                                                                   reference to
                                                                                   Counterparty Master
                                                                                   Table.
A1.5..............................  Internal booking       New York, New York...  Provide office where   Varchar(50).
                                     location identifier.                          the position is
                                                                                   booked. Information
                                                                                   needed to determine
                                                                                   system on which the
                                                                                   trade is booked and
                                                                                   settled.
A1.6..............................  Unique booking unit    xxxxxx...............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     or desk identifier.                           for unit or desk at
                                                                                   which the position
                                                                                   is booked.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to help determine
                                                                                   purpose of position.
A1.7..............................  Type of QFC..........  Credit, equity,        Provide type of QFC.   Varchar(100).
                                                            foreign exchange,      Use unique product
                                                            interest rate          identifier if
                                                            (including cross-      available.
                                                            currency), other       Information needed
                                                            commodity,             to determine the
                                                            securities             nature of the QFC.
                                                            repurchase
                                                            agreement,
                                                            securities lending,
                                                            loan repurchase
                                                            agreement, guarantee
                                                            or other third party
                                                            credit enhancement
                                                            of a QFC.

[[Page 1052]]

 
A1.8..............................  Type of QFC covered    Credit, equity,        If QFC type is         Varchar(200).............  Only required if QFC
                                     by guarantee or        foreign exchange,      guarantee or other                                type (A1.7) is a
                                     other third party      interest rate          third party credit                                guarantee or other
                                     credit enhancement.    (including cross-      enhancement, provide                              third party credit
                                                            currency), other       type of QFC that is                               enhancement.
                                                            commodity,             covered by such
                                                            securities             guarantee or other
                                                            repurchase             third party credit
                                                            agreement,             enhancement. Use
                                                            securities lending,    unique product
                                                            or loan repurchase     identifier if
                                                            agreement.             available. If
                                                                                   multiple asset
                                                                                   classes are covered
                                                                                   by the guarantee or
                                                                                   credit enhancement,
                                                                                   enter the asset
                                                                                   classes separated by
                                                                                   comma. If all the
                                                                                   QFCs of the
                                                                                   underlying QFC
                                                                                   obligor identifier
                                                                                   are covered by the
                                                                                   guarantee or other
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement, enter
                                                                                   ``All''.
A1.9..............................  Underlying QFC         888888888............  If QFC type is         Varchar(50)..............  Only required if QFC
                                     obligor identifier.                           guarantee or other                                asset type (A1.7)
                                                                                   third party credit                                is a guarantee or
                                                                                   enhancement, provide                              other third party
                                                                                   an identifier for                                 credit enhancement.
                                                                                   the QFC obligor                                   Validated against
                                                                                   whose obligation is                               CO.2 if affiliate
                                                                                   covered by the                                    or CP.2 if non-
                                                                                   guarantee or other                                affiliate.
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement. Use LEI
                                                                                   if underlying QFC
                                                                                   obligor has one.
                                                                                   Complete the
                                                                                   counterparty master
                                                                                   table with respect
                                                                                   to a QFC obligor
                                                                                   that is a non-
                                                                                   affiliate.
A1.10.............................  Agreement identifier.  xxxxxxxxx............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                                                                   for primary
                                                                                   governing
                                                                                   documentation, e.g.
                                                                                   the master agreement
                                                                                   or guarantee
                                                                                   agreement, as
                                                                                   applicable.
A1.11.............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     identifier.                                   for netting
                                                                                   agreement. If this
                                                                                   agreement is the
                                                                                   same as provided in
                                                                                   A1.10, use same
                                                                                   identifier.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify unique
                                                                                   netting sets.
A1.12.............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide a netting      Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     counterparty                                  agreement                                         CP.2
                                     identifier.                                   counterparty
                                                                                   identifier. Use same
                                                                                   identifier as
                                                                                   provided in A1.4 if
                                                                                   counterparty and
                                                                                   netting agreement
                                                                                   counterparty are the
                                                                                   same. Use LEI if
                                                                                   netting agreement
                                                                                   counterparty has
                                                                                   one. Information
                                                                                   needed to identify
                                                                                   unique netting sets.

[[Page 1053]]

 
A1.13.............................  Trade date...........  2014-12-20...........  Provide trade or       YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   other commitment
                                                                                   date for the QFC.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine when
                                                                                   the entity's rights
                                                                                   and obligations
                                                                                   regarding the
                                                                                   position originated.
A1.14.............................  Termination date.....  2014-03-31...........  Provide date the QFC   YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   terminates or is
                                                                                   expected to
                                                                                   terminate, expire,
                                                                                   mature, or when
                                                                                   final performance is
                                                                                   required.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine when
                                                                                   the entity's rights
                                                                                   and obligations
                                                                                   regarding the
                                                                                   position are
                                                                                   expected to end.
A1.15.............................  Next call, put, or     2015-01-25...........  Provide next call,     YYYY-MM-DD.
                                     cancellation date.                            put, or cancellation
                                                                                   date.
A1.16.............................  Next payment date....  2015-01-25...........  Provide next payment   YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   date.
A1.17.............................  Current market value   995000...............  In the case of a       Num (25,5).
                                     of the position in                            guarantee or other
                                     U.S. dollars.                                 third party credit
                                                                                   enhancements,
                                                                                   provide the current
                                                                                   mark-to-market
                                                                                   expected value of
                                                                                   the exposure.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine the
                                                                                   current size of the
                                                                                   obligation/benefit
                                                                                   associated with the
                                                                                   QFC.
A1.18.............................  Notional or principal  1000000..............  Provide the notional   Num (25,5).
                                     amount of the                                 or principal amount,
                                     position In U.S.                              as applicable, in
                                     dollars.                                      U.S. dollars. In the
                                                                                   case of a guarantee
                                                                                   or other third party
                                                                                   credit enhancements,
                                                                                   provide the maximum
                                                                                   possible exposure.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to help evaluate the
                                                                                   position.
A1.19.............................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Indicate whether QFC   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  is covered by a                                   ``N``
                                     enhancement                                   guarantee or other
                                     agreement (for the                            third-party credit
                                     benefit of the                                enhancement.
                                     records entity)?                              Information needed
                                                                                   to determine credit
                                                                                   enhancement.
A1.20.............................  Third-party credit     999999999............  If QFC is covered by   Varchar(50)..............  Required if A1.20 is
                                     enhancement provider                          a guarantee or other                              ``Y''. Validated
                                     identifier (for the                           third-party credit                                against CP.2
                                     benefit of the                                enhancement, provide
                                     records entity).                              an identifier for
                                                                                   provider. Use LEI if
                                                                                   available. Complete
                                                                                   the counterparty
                                                                                   master table with
                                                                                   respect to a
                                                                                   provider that is a
                                                                                   non-affiliate.

[[Page 1054]]

 
A1.21.............................  Third-party credit     .....................  If QFC is covered by   Varchar(50)..............  Required if A1.20 is
                                     enhancement                                   a guarantee or other                              ``Y''.
                                     agreement identifier                          third-party credit
                                     (for the benefit of                           enhancement, provide
                                     the records entity).                          an identifier for
                                                                                   the agreement.
A1.22.............................  Related position of    3333333..............  Use this field to      Varchar(100).
                                     records entity.                               link any related
                                                                                   positions of the
                                                                                   records entity. All
                                                                                   positions that are
                                                                                   related to one
                                                                                   another should have
                                                                                   same designation in
                                                                                   this field.
A1.23.............................  Reference number for   9999999..............  Provide a unique       Varchar(500).
                                     any related loan.                             reference number for
                                                                                   any loan held by the
                                                                                   records entity or a
                                                                                   member of its
                                                                                   corporate group
                                                                                   related to the
                                                                                   position (with
                                                                                   multiple entries
                                                                                   delimited by commas).
A1.24.............................  Identifier of the      999999999............  For any loan recorded  Varchar(500).              ....................
                                     lender of the                                 in A1.23, provide
                                     related loan.                                 identifier for
                                                                                   records entity or
                                                                                   member of its
                                                                                   corporate group that
                                                                                   holds any related
                                                                                   loan. Use LEI if
                                                                                   entity has one.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                        Table A-2--Counterparty Netting Set Data
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A2.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD...............
A2.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide the LEI for    Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   the records entity                                CO.2.
                                                                                   if available.
A2.3..............................  Netting agreement      888888888............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     counterparty                                  for the netting                                   CP.2.
                                     identifier.                                   agreement
                                                                                   counterparty. Use
                                                                                   LEI if counterparty
                                                                                   has one.
A2.4..............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     identifier.                                   for the netting
                                                                                   agreement.
A2.5..............................  Underlying QFC         888888888............  Provide identifier     Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     obligor identifier.                           for underlying QFC                                CO.2 or CP.2.
                                                                                   obligor if netting
                                                                                   agreement is
                                                                                   associated with a
                                                                                   guarantee or other
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement. Use LEI
                                                                                   if available.
A2.6..............................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  positions subject to                              ``N''.
                                     enhancement                                   the netting set
                                     agreement (for the                            agreement are
                                     benefit of the                                covered by a third-
                                     records entity)?.                             party credit
                                                                                   enhancement
                                                                                   agreement.

[[Page 1055]]

 
A2.7..............................  Third-party credit     999999999............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A2.6 is
                                     enhancement provider                          Information needed                                ``Y''. Should be a
                                     identifier (for the                           to identity third-                                valid entry in the
                                     benefit of the                                party credit                                      Counterparty Master
                                     records entity).                              enhancement provider.                             Table. Validated
                                                                                                                                     against CP.2.
A2.8..............................  Third-party credit     4444444..............  .....................  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A2.6 is
                                     enhancement                                                                                     ``Y''.
                                     agreement identifier
                                     (for the benefit of
                                     the records entity).
A2.9..............................  Aggregate current      -1000000.............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     market value in U.S.                          help evaluate the                                 positions in A1 for
                                     dollars of all                                positions subject to                              the given netting
                                     positions under this                          the netting                                       agreement
                                     netting agreement.                            agreement.                                        identifier should
                                                                                                                                     be equal to this
                                                                                                                                     value. A2.9 = A2.10
                                                                                                                                     + A2.11.
A2.10.............................  Current market value   3000000..............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            help evaluate the                                 positive positions
                                     all positive                                  positions subject to                              in A1 for the given
                                     positions, as                                 the netting                                       netting agreement
                                     aggregated under                              agreement.                                        identifier should
                                     this netting                                                                                    be equal to this
                                     agreement.                                                                                      value. A2.9 = A2.10
                                                                                                                                     + A2.11.
A2.11.............................  Current market value   -4000000.............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            help evaluate the                                 negative positions
                                     all negative                                  positions subject to                              in A1 for the given
                                     positions, as                                 the netting                                       Netting Agreement
                                     aggregated under                              agreement.                                        Identifier should
                                     this netting                                                                                    be equal to this
                                     agreement.                                                                                      value. A2.9 = A2.10
                                                                                                                                     + A2.11.
A2.12.............................  Current market value   950000...............  Information needed to  Num (25,5).
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            determine the extent
                                     all collateral                                to which collateral
                                     posted by records                             has been provided by
                                     entity, as                                    records entity.
                                     aggregated under
                                     this netting
                                     agreement.
A2.13.............................  Current market value   50000................  Information needed to  Num (25,5).
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            determine the extent
                                     all collateral                                to which collateral
                                     posted by                                     has been provided by
                                     counterparty, as                              counterparty.
                                     aggregated under
                                     this netting
                                     agreement.

[[Page 1056]]

 
A2.14.............................  Records entity         950,000..............  Provide records        Num (25,5)...............  Should be less than
                                     collateral--net.                              entity's collateral                               or equal to A2.15.
                                                                                   excess or deficiency
                                                                                   with respect to all
                                                                                   of its positions, as
                                                                                   determined under
                                                                                   each applicable
                                                                                   agreement, including
                                                                                   thresholds and
                                                                                   haircuts where
                                                                                   applicable.
A2.15.............................  Counterparty           950,000..............  Provide                Num (25,5)...............  Should be less than
                                     collateral--net.                              counterparty's                                    or equal to A2.16.
                                                                                   collateral excess or
                                                                                   deficiency with
                                                                                   respect to all of
                                                                                   its positions, as
                                                                                   determined under
                                                                                   each applicable
                                                                                   agreement, including
                                                                                   thresholds and
                                                                                   haircuts where
                                                                                   applicable.
A2.16.............................  Next margin payment    2015-11-05...........  Provide next margin    YYYY-MM-DD.
                                     date.                                         payment date for
                                                                                   position.
A2.17.............................  Next margin payment    150,000..............  Use positive value if  Num (25,5).                ....................
                                     amount in U.S.                                records entity is
                                     dollars.                                      due a payment and
                                                                                   use negative value
                                                                                   if records entity
                                                                                   has to make the
                                                                                   payment.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                          Corporate Organization Master Table *
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CO.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.
CO.2..............................  Entity identifier....  888888888............  Provide unique         Varchar(50)..............  Should be unique
                                                                                   identifier. Use LEI                               across all record
                                                                                   if available.                                     entities.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify entity.
CO.3..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Specify whether the    Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     entity identifier?                            entity identifier                                 ``N''.
                                                                                   provided is an LEI..
CO.4..............................  Legal name of entity.  John Doe & Co........  Provide legal name of  Varchar(200).
                                                                                   entity.
CO.5..............................  Immediate parent       77777777.............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50).
                                     entity identifier.                            Information needed
                                                                                   to complete org
                                                                                   structure.
CO.6..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Specify whether the    Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     immediate parent                              immediate parent                                  ``N''.
                                     entity identifier?                            entity identifier
                                                                                   provided is an LEI.
CO.7..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     immediate parent                              complete org
                                     entity.                                       structure.
CO.8..............................  Percentage ownership   100.00...............  Information needed to  Num (5,2).
                                     of immediate parent                           complete org
                                     entity in the entity.                         structure.
CO.9..............................  Entity type..........  Subsidiary, foreign    Information needed to  Varchar(50).
                                                            branch, foreign        complete org
                                                            division.              structure.
CO.10.............................  Domicile.............  New York, New York...  Enter as city, state   Varchar(50).
                                                                                   or city, foreign
                                                                                   country.
CO.11.............................  Jurisdiction under     New York.............  Enter as state or      Varchar(50).
                                     which incorporated                            foreign jurisdiction.
                                     or organized.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Foreign branches and divisions shall be separately identified to the extent they are identified in an entity's reports to its appropriate Federal
  banking agency.


[[Page 1057]]


                                                                Counterparty Master Table
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CP.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.
CP.2..............................  Counterparty           888888888............  Use LEI if             Varchar(50).
                                     identifier.                                   counterparty has one.
                                                                                  The counterparty
                                                                                   identifier shall be
                                                                                   the global legal
                                                                                   entity identifier if
                                                                                   one has been issued
                                                                                   to the entity. If a
                                                                                   counterparty
                                                                                   transacts with the
                                                                                   records entity
                                                                                   through one or more
                                                                                   separate foreign
                                                                                   branches or
                                                                                   divisions and any
                                                                                   such branch or
                                                                                   division does not
                                                                                   have its own unique
                                                                                   global legal entity
                                                                                   identifier, the
                                                                                   records entity must
                                                                                   include additional
                                                                                   identifiers, as
                                                                                   appropriate to
                                                                                   enable the FDIC to
                                                                                   aggregate or
                                                                                   disaggregate the
                                                                                   data for each
                                                                                   counterparty and for
                                                                                   each entity with the
                                                                                   same ultimate parent
                                                                                   entity as the
                                                                                   counterparty.
CP.3..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     counterparty                                  counterparty                                      ``N''.
                                     identifier?                                   identifier is an LEI.
CP.4..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     counterparty.                                 identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with
                                                                                   counterparty.
CP.5..............................  Domicile.............  New York, New York...  Enter as city, state   Varchar(50).
                                                                                   or city, foreign
                                                                                   country.
CP.6..............................  Jurisdiction under     New York.............  Enter as state or      Varchar(50).
                                     which incorporated                            foreign jurisdiction.
                                     or organized.
CP.7..............................  Immediate parent       77777777.............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     entity identifier.                            for the parent
                                                                                   entity that directly
                                                                                   controls the
                                                                                   counterparty. Use
                                                                                   LEI if immediate
                                                                                   parent entity has
                                                                                   one.
CP.8..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     immediate parent                              immediate parent                                  ``N''.
                                     entity identifier?                            entity identifier is
                                                                                   an LEI.
CP.9..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     immediate parent                              identify and, if
                                     entity.                                       necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with
                                                                                   counterparty.
CP.10.............................  Ultimate parent        666666666............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     entity identifier.                            for the parent
                                                                                   entity that is a
                                                                                   member of the
                                                                                   corporate group of
                                                                                   the counterparty
                                                                                   that is not
                                                                                   controlled by
                                                                                   another entity.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify
                                                                                   counterparty. Use
                                                                                   LEI if ultimate
                                                                                   parent entity has
                                                                                   one.

[[Page 1058]]

 
CP.11.............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     ultimate parent                               ultimate parent                                   ``N''.
                                     entity identifier?                            entity identifier is
                                                                                   an LEI.
CP.12.............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(100).              ....................
                                     ultimate parent                               identify and, if
                                     entity.                                       necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with
                                                                                   counterparty.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                               Details of Formats
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
               Format                     Content in brief      Additional explanation           Examples
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
YYYY-MM-DD..........................  Date...................  YYYY = four digit date,   2015-11-12
                                                                MM = 2 digit month, DD
                                                                = 2 digit date
Num (25,5)..........................  Up to 25 numerical       Up to 20 numerical        1352.67
                                       characters including 5   characters before the    12345678901234567890
                                       decimals.                decimal point and up to  12345
                                                                5 numerical characters   0
                                                                after the decimal        ^20000.25
                                                                point. The dot           ^0.257
                                                                character is used to
                                                                separate decimals.
Char(3).............................  3 alphanumeric           The length is fixed at 3  USD
                                       characters.              alphanumeric characters. X1X
                                                                                         999
Varchar(25).........................  Up to 25 alphanumeric    The length is not fixed   asgaGEH3268EFdsagtTRCF5
                                       characters.              but limited at up to 25   43
                                                                alphanumeric characters.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



  Sec. Appendix B to Part 371--File Structure for Qualified Financial 
                Contract Records for Full Scope Entities

    Pursuant to Sec. 371.4(b), the records entity is required to provide 
the information required by this appendix B for itself and each of its 
reportable subsidiaries in a manner that can be disaggregated by legal 
entity. Accordingly, the reference to ``records entity'' in the tables 
of appendix B should be read as referring to each of the separate legal 
entities (i.e., the records entity and each reportable subsidiary).

                                                             Table A-1--Position-Level Data
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application               Definition              Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A1.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Provide data           YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   extraction date.
A1.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide LEI for        Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   records entity.                                   CO.2.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to review position-
                                                                                   level data by
                                                                                   records entity.
A1.3..............................  Position identifier..  20058953.............  Provide a position     Varchar(100).
                                                                                   identifier. Should
                                                                                   be used consistently
                                                                                   across all records
                                                                                   entities. Use the
                                                                                   unique transaction
                                                                                   identifier if
                                                                                   available.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to readily track and
                                                                                   distinguish
                                                                                   positions.
A1.4..............................  Counterparty           888888888............  Provide a              Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   counterparty                                      CP.2.
                                                                                   identifier. Use LEI
                                                                                   if counterparty has
                                                                                   one. Should be used
                                                                                   consistently by all
                                                                                   records entities.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify
                                                                                   counterparty by
                                                                                   reference to
                                                                                   Counterparty Master
                                                                                   Table.

[[Page 1059]]

 
A1.5..............................  Internal booking       New York, New York...  Provide office where   Varchar(50)..............  Combination A1.2 +
                                     location identifier.                          the position is                                   A1.5 + A1.6 should
                                                                                   booked. Information                               have a
                                                                                   needed to determine                               corresponding
                                                                                   system on which the                               unique combination
                                                                                   trade is booked and                               BL.2 + BL.3 + BL.4
                                                                                   settled.                                          entry in Booking
                                                                                                                                     Location Master
                                                                                                                                     Table.
A1.6..............................  Unique booking unit    xxxxxx...............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Combination A1.2 +
                                     or desk identifier.                           for unit or desk at                               A1.5 + A1.6 should
                                                                                   which the position                                have a
                                                                                   is booked.                                        corresponding
                                                                                   Information needed                                unique combination
                                                                                   to help determine                                 BL.2 + BL.3 + BL.4
                                                                                   purpose of position.                              entry in Booking
                                                                                                                                     Location Master
                                                                                                                                     Table.
A1.7..............................  Type of QFC..........  Credit, equity,        Provide type of QFC.   Varchar(100).
                                                            foreign exchange,      Use unique product
                                                            interest rate          identifier if
                                                            (including cross-      available.
                                                            currency), other       Information needed
                                                            commodity,             to determine the
                                                            securities             nature of the QFC.
                                                            repurchase
                                                            agreement,
                                                            securities lending,
                                                            loan repurchase
                                                            agreement, guarantee
                                                            or other third party
                                                            credit enhancement
                                                            of a QFC.
A1.7.1............................  Type of QFC covered    Credit, equity,        If QFC type is         Varchar(500).............  Only required if QFC
                                     by guarantee or        foreign exchange,      guarantee or other                                type (A1.7) is a
                                     other third party      interest rate          third party credit                                guarantee or other
                                     credit enhancement.    (including cross-      enhancement, provide                              third party credit
                                                            currency), other       type of QFC that is                               enhancement.
                                                            commodity,             covered by such
                                                            securities             guarantee or other
                                                            repurchase             third party credit
                                                            agreement,             enhancement. Use
                                                            securities lending,    unique product
                                                            or loan repurchase     identifier if
                                                            agreement.             available. If
                                                                                   multiple asset
                                                                                   classes are covered
                                                                                   by the guarantee or
                                                                                   credit enhancement,
                                                                                   enter the asset
                                                                                   classes separated by
                                                                                   comma. If all the
                                                                                   QFCs of the
                                                                                   underlying QFC
                                                                                   obligor identifier
                                                                                   are covered by the
                                                                                   guarantee or other
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement, enter
                                                                                   ``All.''.
A1.7.2............................  Underlying QFC         888888888............  If QFC type is         Varchar(50)..............  Only required if QFC
                                     obligor identifier.                           guarantee or other                                asset type (A1.7)
                                                                                   third party credit                                is a guarantee or
                                                                                   enhancement, provide                              other third party
                                                                                   an identifier for                                 credit enhancement.
                                                                                   the QFC obligor                                   Validated against
                                                                                   whose obligation is                               CO.2 if affiliate
                                                                                   covered by the                                    or CP.2 if non-
                                                                                   guarantee or other                                affiliate.
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement. Use LEI
                                                                                   if underlying QFC
                                                                                   obligor has one.
                                                                                   Complete the
                                                                                   counterparty master
                                                                                   table with respect
                                                                                   to a QFC obligor
                                                                                   that is a non-
                                                                                   affiliate.

[[Page 1060]]

 
A1.8..............................  Agreement identifier.  xxxxxxxxx............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                                                                   for the primary                                   A3.3.
                                                                                   governing
                                                                                   documentation, e.g.,
                                                                                   the master agreement
                                                                                   or guarantee
                                                                                   agreement, as
                                                                                   applicable.
A1.9..............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   for netting                                       A3.3.
                                                                                   agreement. If this
                                                                                   agreement is the
                                                                                   same as provided in
                                                                                   A1.8, use same
                                                                                   identifier.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify unique
                                                                                   netting sets.
A1.10.............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide a netting      Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     counterparty                                  agreement                                         CP.2.
                                     identifier.                                   counterparty
                                                                                   identifier. Use same
                                                                                   identifier as
                                                                                   provided in A1.4 if
                                                                                   counterparty and
                                                                                   netting agreement
                                                                                   counterparty are the
                                                                                   same. Use LEI if
                                                                                   netting agreement
                                                                                   counterparty has
                                                                                   one. Information
                                                                                   needed to identify
                                                                                   unique netting sets.
A1.11.............................  Trade date...........  2014-12-20...........  Provide trade or       YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   other commitment
                                                                                   date for the QFC.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine when
                                                                                   the entity's rights
                                                                                   and obligations
                                                                                   regarding the
                                                                                   position originated.
A1.12.............................  Termination date.....  2014-03-31...........  Provide date the QFC   YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   terminates or is
                                                                                   expected to
                                                                                   terminate, expire,
                                                                                   mature, or when
                                                                                   final performance is
                                                                                   required.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine when
                                                                                   the entity's rights
                                                                                   and obligations
                                                                                   regarding the
                                                                                   position are
                                                                                   expected to end.
A1.13.............................  Next call, put, or     2015-01-25...........  Provide next call,     YYYY-MM-DD.
                                     cancellation date.                            put, or cancellation
                                                                                   date.
A1.14.............................  Next payment date....  2015-01-25...........  Provide next payment   YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   date.
A1.15.............................  Local Currency Of      USD..................  Provide currency in    Char(3).
                                     Position.                                     which QFC is
                                                                                   denominated. Use ISO
                                                                                   currency code.
A1.16.............................  Current market value   995000...............  Provide current        Num (25,5).
                                     of the position in                            market value of the
                                     local currency.                               position in local
                                                                                   currency. In the
                                                                                   case of a guarantee
                                                                                   or other third party
                                                                                   credit enhancements,
                                                                                   provide the current
                                                                                   mark-to-market
                                                                                   expected value of
                                                                                   the exposure.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine the
                                                                                   current size of the
                                                                                   obligation or
                                                                                   benefit associated
                                                                                   with the QFC.

[[Page 1061]]

 
A1.17.............................  Current market value   995000...............  In the case of a       Num (25,5).
                                     of the position in                            guarantee or other
                                     U.S. dollars.                                 third party credit
                                                                                   enhancements,
                                                                                   provide the current
                                                                                   mark-to-market
                                                                                   expected value of
                                                                                   the exposure.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine the
                                                                                   current size of the
                                                                                   obligation/benefit
                                                                                   associated with the
                                                                                   QFC.
A1.18.............................  Asset Classification.  1....................  Provide fair value     Char(1).
                                                                                   asset classification
                                                                                   under GAAP, IFRS, or
                                                                                   other accounting
                                                                                   principles or
                                                                                   standards used by
                                                                                   records entity.
                                                                                   Provide ``1'' for
                                                                                   Level 1, ``2'' for
                                                                                   Level 2, or ``3''
                                                                                   for Level 3.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to assess fair value
                                                                                   of the position.
A1.19.............................  Notional or principal  1000000..............  Provide the notional   Num (25,5).
                                     amount of the                                 or principal amount,
                                     position in local                             as applicable, in
                                     currency.                                     local currency. In
                                                                                   the case of a
                                                                                   guarantee or other
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement, provide
                                                                                   the maximum possible
                                                                                   exposure.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to help evaluate the
                                                                                   position.
A1.20.............................  Notional or principal  1000000..............  Provide the notional   Num (25,5).
                                     amount of the                                 or principal amount,
                                     position In U.S.                              as applicable, in
                                     dollars.                                      U.S. dollars. In the
                                                                                   case of a guarantee
                                                                                   or other third party
                                                                                   credit enhancements,
                                                                                   provide the maximum
                                                                                   possible exposure.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to help evaluate the
                                                                                   position.
A1.21.............................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Indicate whether QFC   Char(1).                   Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  is covered by a                                   ``N``.
                                     enhancement                                   guarantee or other
                                     agreement (for the                            third-party credit
                                     benefit of the                                enhancement.
                                     records entity)?                              Information needed
                                                                                   to determine credit
                                                                                   enhancement.
A1.21.1...........................  Third-party credit     999999999............  If QFC is covered by   Varchar(50)..............  Required if A1.21 is
                                     enhancement provider                          a guarantee or other                              ``Y''. Validated
                                     identifier (for the                           third-party credit                                against CP.2.
                                     benefit of the                                enhancement, provide
                                     records entity).                              an identifier for
                                                                                   provider. Use LEI if
                                                                                   available. Complete
                                                                                   the counterparty
                                                                                   master table with
                                                                                   respect to a
                                                                                   provider that is a
                                                                                   non-affiliate.

[[Page 1062]]

 
A1.21.2...........................  Third-party credit     4444444..............  If QFC is covered by   Varchar(50)..............  Required if A1.21 is
                                     enhancement                                   a guarantee or other                              ``Y.'' Validated
                                     agreement identifier                          third-party credit                                against A3.3.
                                     (for the benefit of                           enhancement, provide
                                     the records entity).                          an identifier for
                                                                                   the agreement.
A1.21.3...........................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Indicate whether QFC   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  is covered by a                                   ``N``.
                                     enhancement                                   guarantee or other
                                     agreement (for the                            third-party credit
                                     benefit of the                                enhancement.
                                     counterparty)?                                Information needed
                                                                                   to determine credit
                                                                                   enhancement.
A1.21.4...........................  Third-party credit     999999999............  If QFC is covered by   Varchar(50)..............  Required if A1.21.3
                                     enhancement provider                          a guarantee or other                              is ``Y''. Validated
                                     identifier (for the                           third-party credit                                against CO.2 or
                                     benefit of the                                enhancement, provide                              CP.2.
                                     counterparty).                                an identifier for
                                                                                   provider. Use LEI if
                                                                                   available. Complete
                                                                                   the counterparty
                                                                                   master table with
                                                                                   respect to a
                                                                                   provider that is a
                                                                                   non-affiliate.
A1.21.5...........................  Third-party credit     4444444..............  If QFC is covered by   Varchar(50)..............  Required if A1.21.3
                                     enhancement                                   a guarantee or other                              is ``Y''. Validated
                                     agreement identifier                          third-party credit                                against A3.3.
                                     (for the benefit of                           enhancement, provide
                                     the counterparty).                            an identifier for
                                                                                   agreement.
A1.22.............................  Related position of    3333333..............  Use this field to      Varchar(100).
                                     records entity.                               link any related
                                                                                   positions of the
                                                                                   records entity. All
                                                                                   positions that are
                                                                                   related to one
                                                                                   another should have
                                                                                   same designation in
                                                                                   this field.
A1.23.............................  Reference number for   9999999..............  Provide a unique       Varchar(500).
                                     any related loan.                             reference number for
                                                                                   any loan held by the
                                                                                   records entity or a
                                                                                   member of its
                                                                                   corporate group
                                                                                   related to the
                                                                                   position (with
                                                                                   multiple entries
                                                                                   delimited by commas).
A1.24.............................  Identifier of the      999999999............  For any loan recorded  Varchar(500).              ....................
                                     lender of the                                 in A1.23, provide
                                     related loan.                                 identifier for
                                                                                   records entity or
                                                                                   member of its
                                                                                   corporate group that
                                                                                   holds any related
                                                                                   loan. Use LEI if
                                                                                   entity has one.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                        Table A-2--Counterparty Netting Set Data
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A2.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD...............

[[Page 1063]]

 
A2.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide the LEI for    Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   the records entity.                               CO.2.
A2.3..............................  Netting agreement      888888888............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     counterparty                                  for the netting                                   CP.2.
                                     identifier.                                   agreement
                                                                                   counterparty. Use
                                                                                   LEI if counterparty
                                                                                   has one.
A2.4..............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   for the netting                                   A3.3.
                                                                                   agreement.
A2.4.1............................  Underlying QFC         888888888............  Provide identifier     Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     obligor identifier.                           for underlying QFC                                CO.2 or CP.2.
                                                                                   obligor if netting
                                                                                   agreement is
                                                                                   associated with a
                                                                                   guarantee or other
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement. Use LEI
                                                                                   if available.
A2.5..............................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  positions subject to                              ``N''.
                                     enhancement                                   the netting set
                                     agreement (for the                            agreement are
                                     benefit of the                                covered by a third-
                                     records entity)?                              party credit
                                                                                   enhancement
                                                                                   agreement.
A2.5.1............................  Third-party credit     999999999............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A2.5 is
                                     enhancement provider                          Information needed                                ``Y''. Validated
                                     identifier (for the                           to identity third-                                against CP.2.
                                     benefit of the                                party credit
                                     records entity).                              enhancement provider.
A2.5.2............................  Third-party credit     4444444..............  .....................  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A2.5 is
                                     enhancement                                                                                     ``Y''. Validated
                                     agreement identifier                                                                            against A3.3.
                                     (for the benefit of
                                     the records entity).
A2.5.3............................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Information needed to  Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  determine credit                                  ``N''.
                                     enhancement                                   enhancement.
                                     agreement (for the
                                     benefit of the
                                     counterparty)?
A2.5.4............................  Third-party credit     999999999............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A2.5.3
                                     enhancement provider                          Information needed                                is ``Y''. Should be
                                     identifier (for the                           to identity third-                                a valid entry in
                                     benefit of the                                party credit                                      the Counterparty
                                     counterparty).                                enhancement provider.                             Master Table.
                                                                                                                                     Validated against
                                                                                                                                     CP.2.
A2.5.5............................  Third-party credit     4444444..............  Information used to    Varchar(50)..............  Required if A2.5.3
                                     enhancement                                   determine guarantee                               is ``Y''. Validated
                                     agreement identifier                          or other third-party                              against A3.3.
                                     (for the benefit of                           credit enhancement.
                                     the counterparty).

[[Page 1064]]

 
A2.6..............................  Aggregate current      -1000000.............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     market value in U.S.                          help evaluate the                                 positions in A1 for
                                     dollars of all                                positions subject to                              the given netting
                                     positions under this                          the netting                                       agreement
                                     netting agreement.                            agreement.                                        identifier should
                                                                                                                                     be equal to this
                                                                                                                                     value. A2.6 = A2.7
                                                                                                                                     + A2.8.
A2.7..............................  Current market value   3000000..............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            help evaluate the                                 positive positions
                                     all positive                                  positions subject to                              in A1 for the given
                                     positions, as                                 the netting                                       netting agreement
                                     aggregated under                              agreement.                                        identifier should
                                     this netting                                                                                    be equal to this
                                     agreement.                                                                                      value. A2.6 = A2.7
                                                                                                                                     + A2.8.
A2.8..............................  Current market value   -4000000.............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            help evaluate the                                 negative positions
                                     all negative                                  positions subject to                              in A1 for the given
                                     positions, as                                 the netting                                       Netting Agreement
                                     aggregated under                              agreement.                                        Identifier should
                                     this netting                                                                                    be equal to this
                                     agreement.                                                                                      value. A2.6 = A2.7
                                                                                                                                     + A2.8.
A2.9..............................  Current market value   950000...............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            determine the extent                              collateral posted
                                     all collateral                                to which collateral                               by records entity
                                     posted by records                             has been provided by                              for the given
                                     entity, as                                    records entity.                                   netting agreement
                                     aggregated under                                                                                Identifier should
                                     this netting                                                                                    be equal to sum of
                                     agreement.                                                                                      all A4.9 for the
                                                                                                                                     same netting
                                                                                                                                     agreement
                                                                                                                                     identifier in A4.
A2.10.............................  Current market value   50000................  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            determine the extent                              collateral posted
                                     all collateral                                to which collateral                               by counterparty for
                                     posted by                                     has been provided by                              the given netting
                                     counterparty, as                              counterparty.                                     agreement
                                     aggregated under                                                                                identifier should
                                     this netting                                                                                    be equal to sum of
                                     agreement.                                                                                      all A4.9 for the
                                                                                                                                     same netting
                                                                                                                                     agreement
                                                                                                                                     identifier in A4.
A2.11.............................  Current market value   950,000..............  Information needed to  Num (25,5).
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            determine the extent
                                     all collateral                                to which collateral
                                     posted by records                             has been provided by
                                     entity that is                                records entity.
                                     subject to re-
                                     hypothecation, as
                                     aggregated under
                                     this netting
                                     agreement.

[[Page 1065]]

 
A2.12.............................  Current market value   950,000..............  Information needed to  Num (25,5).
                                     in U.S. dollars of                            determine the extent
                                     all collateral                                to which collateral
                                     posted by                                     has been provided by
                                     counterparty that is                          records entity.
                                     subject to re-
                                     hypothecation, as
                                     aggregated under
                                     this netting
                                     agreement.
A2.13.............................  Records entity         950,000..............  Provide records        Num (25,5)...............  Should be less than
                                     collateral--net.                              entity's collateral                               or equal to A2.9.
                                                                                   excess or deficiency
                                                                                   with respect to all
                                                                                   of its positions, as
                                                                                   determined under
                                                                                   each applicable
                                                                                   agreement, including
                                                                                   thresholds and
                                                                                   haircuts where
                                                                                   applicable.
A2.14.............................  Counterparty           950,000..............  Provide                Num (25,5)...............  Should be less than
                                     collateral--net.                              counterparty's                                    or equal to A2.10.
                                                                                   collateral excess or
                                                                                   deficiency with
                                                                                   respect to all of
                                                                                   its positions, as
                                                                                   determined under
                                                                                   each applicable
                                                                                   agreement, including
                                                                                   thresholds and
                                                                                   haircuts where
                                                                                   applicable.
A2.15.............................  Next margin payment    2015-11-05...........  Provide next margin    YYYY-MM-DD.
                                     date.                                         payment date for
                                                                                   position.
A2.16.............................  Next margin payment    150,000..............  Use positive value if  Num (25,5).
                                     amount in U.S.                                records entity is
                                     dollars.                                      due a payment and
                                                                                   use negative value
                                                                                   if records entity
                                                                                   has to make the
                                                                                   payment.
A2.17.............................  Safekeeping agent      888888888............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier for                                for the records                                   SA.2.
                                     records entity.                               entity's safekeeping
                                                                                   agent, if any. Use
                                                                                   LEI if safekeeping
                                                                                   agent has one.
A2.18.............................  Safekeeping agent      888888888............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier for                                for the                                           SA.2.
                                     counterparty.                                 counterparty's
                                                                                   safekeeping agent,
                                                                                   if any. Use LEI if
                                                                                   safekeeping agent
                                                                                   has one.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                               Table A-3--Legal Agreements
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A3.1..............................  As of Date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.
A3.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide LEI for        Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   records entity.                                   CO.2.
A3.3..............................  Agreement identifier.  xxxxxx...............  Provide identifier     Varchar(50).
                                                                                   for each master
                                                                                   agreement, governing
                                                                                   document, netting
                                                                                   agreement or third-
                                                                                   party credit
                                                                                   enhancement
                                                                                   agreement.

[[Page 1066]]

 
A3.4..............................  Name of agreement or   ISDA Master 1992 or    Provide name of        Varchar(50).
                                     governing document.    Guarantee Agreement    agreement or
                                                            or Master Netting      governing document.
                                                            Agreement.
A3.5..............................  Agreement date.......  2010-01-25...........  Provide the date of    YYYY-MM-DD.
                                                                                   the agreement.
A3.6..............................  Agreement              888888888............  Use LEI if             Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     counterparty                                  counterparty has                                  field CP.2.
                                     identifier.                                   one. Information
                                                                                   needed to identify
                                                                                   counterparty.
A3.6.1............................  Underlying QFC         888888888............  Provide underlying     Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     obligor identifier.                           QFC obligor                                       CO.2 or CP.2.
                                                                                   identifier if
                                                                                   document identifier
                                                                                   is associated with a
                                                                                   guarantee or other
                                                                                   third party credit
                                                                                   enhancement. Use LEI
                                                                                   if underlying QFC
                                                                                   obligor has one.
A3.7..............................  Agreement governing    New York.............  Provide law governing  Varchar(50).
                                     law.                                          contract disputes.
A3.8..............................  Cross-default          Y/N..................  Specify whether        Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     provision?.                                   agreement includes                                ``N''.
                                                                                   default or other
                                                                                   termination event
                                                                                   provisions that
                                                                                   reference an entity
                                                                                   not a party to the
                                                                                   agreement (``cross-
                                                                                   default Entity'').
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to determine
                                                                                   exposure to
                                                                                   affiliates or other
                                                                                   entities.
A3.9..............................  Identity of cross-     777777777............  Provide identity of    Varchar(500).............  Required if A3.8 is
                                     default entities.                             any cross-default                                 ``Y''. ID should be
                                                                                   entities referenced                               a valid entry in
                                                                                   in A3.8. Use LEI if                               Corporate Org
                                                                                   entity has one.                                   Master Table or
                                                                                   Information needed                                Counterparty Master
                                                                                   to determine                                      Table, if
                                                                                   exposure to other                                 applicable.
                                                                                   entities.                                         Multiple entries
                                                                                                                                     comma separated.
A3.10.............................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Information needed to  Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  determine credit                                  ``N''.
                                     enhancement                                   enhancement.
                                     agreement (for the
                                     benefit of the
                                     records entity)?.
A3.11.............................  Third-party credit     999999999............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A3.10 is
                                     enhancement provider                          Information needed                                ``Y''. Should be a
                                     identifier (for the                           to identity Third-                                valid entry in the
                                     benefit of the                                Party Credit                                      Counterparty Master
                                     records entity).                              Enhancement Provider.                             Table. Validated
                                                                                                                                     against CP.2.

[[Page 1067]]

 
A3.12.............................  Associated third-      33333333.............  Information needed to  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A3.10 is
                                     party credit                                  determine credit                                  ``Y''. Validated
                                     enhancement                                   enhancement.                                      against field A3.3.
                                     agreement document
                                     identifier (for the
                                     benefit of the
                                     records entity).
A3.12.1...........................  Covered by third-      Y/N..................  Information needed to  Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     party credit                                  determine credit                                  ``N''.
                                     enhancement                                   enhancement.
                                     agreement (for the
                                     benefit of the
                                     counterparty)?.
A3.12.2...........................  Third-party credit     999999999............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A3.12.1
                                     enhancement provider                          Information needed                                is ``Y''. Should be
                                     identifier (for the                           to identity Third-                                a valid entry in
                                     benefit of the                                Party Credit                                      the Counterparty
                                     counterparty).                                Enhancement Provider.                             Master. Validated
                                                                                                                                     against CP.2.
A3.12.3...........................  Associated third-      33333333.............  Information needed to  Varchar(50)..............  Required if A3.12.1
                                     party credit                                  determine credit                                  is ``Y''. Validated
                                     enhancement                                   enhancement.                                      against field A3.3.
                                     agreement document
                                     identifier (for the
                                     benefit of the
                                     counterparty).
A3.13.............................  Counterparty contact   John Doe & Co........  Provide contact name   Varchar(200).
                                     information: name.                            for counterparty as
                                                                                   provided under
                                                                                   notice section of
                                                                                   agreement.
A3.14.............................  Counterparty contact   123 Main St, City,     Provide contact        Varchar(100).
                                     information: address.  State Zip code.        address for
                                                                                   counterparty as
                                                                                   provided under
                                                                                   notice section of
                                                                                   agreement.
A3.15.............................  Counterparty contact   1-999-999-9999.......  Provide contact phone  Varchar(50).
                                     information: phone.                           number for
                                                                                   counterparty as
                                                                                   provided under
                                                                                   notice section of
                                                                                   agreement.
A3.16.............................  Counterparty's         [email protected].....  Provide contact email  Varchar(100).              ....................
                                     contact information:                          address for
                                     email address.                                counterparty as
                                                                                   provided under
                                                                                   notice section of
                                                                                   agreement.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                            Table A-4--Collateral Detail Data
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A4.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD...............
A4.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide LEI for        Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   records entity.                                   CO.2.

[[Page 1068]]

 
A4.3..............................  Collateral posted/     P/N..................  Enter ``P'' if         Char(1).
                                     collateral received                           collateral has been
                                     flag.                                         posted by the
                                                                                   records entity.
                                                                                   Enter ``R'' for
                                                                                   collateral received
                                                                                   by Records Entity.
A4.4..............................  Counterparty           888888888............  Provide identifier     Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   for counterparty.                                 CP.2.
                                                                                   Use LEI if
                                                                                   counterparty has one.
A4.5..............................  Netting agreement      xxxxxxxxx............  Provide identifier     Varchar(50)..............  Validated against
                                     identifier.                                   for applicable                                    field A3.3.
                                                                                   netting agreement.
A4.6..............................  Unique collateral      CUSIP/ISIN...........  Provide identifier to  Varchar(50).
                                     item identifier.                              reference individual
                                                                                   collateral posted.
A4.7..............................  Original face amount   1500000..............  Information needed to  Num (25,5).
                                     of collateral item                            evaluate collateral
                                     in local currency.                            sufficiency and
                                                                                   marketability.
A4.8..............................  Local currency of      USD..................  Use ISO currency code  Char(3).
                                     collateral item.
A4.9..............................  Market value amount    850000...............  Information needed to  Num (25,5)...............  Market value of all
                                     of collateral item                            evaluate collateral                               collateral posted
                                     in U.S. dollars.                              sufficiency and                                   by Records Entity
                                                                                   marketability and to                              or Counterparty
                                                                                   permit aggregation                                A2.9 or A2.10 for
                                                                                   across currencies.                                the given netting
                                                                                                                                     agreement
                                                                                                                                     identifier should
                                                                                                                                     be equal to sum of
                                                                                                                                     all A4.9 for the
                                                                                                                                     same netting
                                                                                                                                     agreement
                                                                                                                                     identifier in A4.
A4.10.............................  Description of         U.S. Treasury Strip,   Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     collateral item.       maturity 2020/6/30.    evaluate collateral
                                                                                   sufficiency and
                                                                                   marketability.
A4.11.............................  Asset classification.  1....................  Provide fair value     Char(1)..................  Should be ``1'' or
                                                                                   asset classification                              ``2'' or ``3''.
                                                                                   for the collateral
                                                                                   item under GAAP,
                                                                                   IFRS, or other
                                                                                   accounting
                                                                                   principles or
                                                                                   standards used by
                                                                                   records entity.
                                                                                   Provide ``1'' for
                                                                                   Level 1, ``2'' for
                                                                                   Level 2, or ``3''
                                                                                   for Level 3.
A4.12.............................  Collateral or          Y/N..................  Specify whether the    Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     portfolio                                     specific item of                                  ``N''.
                                     segregation status.                           collateral or the
                                                                                   related collateral
                                                                                   portfolio is
                                                                                   segregated from
                                                                                   assets of the
                                                                                   safekeeping agent.
A4.13.............................  Collateral location..  ABC broker-dealer (in  Provide location of    Varchar(200).
                                                            safekeeping account    collateral posted.
                                                            of counterparty).
A4.14.............................  Collateral             New York, New York...  Provide jurisdiction   Varchar(50).
                                     jurisdiction.                                 of location of
                                                                                   collateral posted.
A4.15.............................  Is collateral re-      Y/N..................  Information needed to  Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     hypothecation                                 evaluate exposure of                              ``N''.
                                     allowed?.                                     the records entity
                                                                                   to the counterparty
                                                                                   or vice-versa for re-
                                                                                   hypothecated
                                                                                   collateral.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 1069]]


                                                          Corporate Organization Master Table *
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CO.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.
CO.2..............................  Entity identifier....  888888888............  Provide unique         Varchar(50)..............  Should be unique
                                                                                   identifier. Use LEI                               across all records
                                                                                   if available.                                     entities.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify entity.
CO.3..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Specify whether the    Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     entity identifier?.                           entity identifier                                 ``N''.
                                                                                   provided is an LEI.
CO.4..............................  Legal name of entity.  John Doe & Co........  Provide legal name of  Varchar(200).
                                                                                   entity.
CO.5..............................  Immediate parent       77777777.............  Use LEI if available.  Varchar(50).
                                     entity identifier.                            Information needed
                                                                                   to complete org
                                                                                   structure.
CO.6..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Specify whether the    Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     immediate parent                              immediate parent                                  ``N''.
                                     entity identifier?                            entity identifier
                                                                                   provided is an LEI.
CO.7..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     immediate parent                              complete org
                                     entity.                                       structure.
CO.8..............................  Percentage ownership   100.00...............  Information needed to  Num (5,2).
                                     of immediate parent                           complete org
                                     entity in the entity.                         structure.
CO.9..............................  Entity type..........  Subsidiary, foreign    Information needed to  Varchar(50).
                                                            branch, foreign        complete org
                                                            division.              structure.
CO.10.............................  Domicile.............  New York, New York...  Enter as city, state   Varchar(50).
                                                                                   or city, foreign
                                                                                   country.
CO.11.............................  Jurisdiction under     New York.............  Enter as state or      Varchar(50).
                                     which incorporated                            foreign jurisdiction.
                                     or organized.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Foreign branches and divisions shall be separately identified to the extent they are identified in an entity's reports to its appropriate Federal
  banking agency.


                                                                Counterparty Master Table
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CP.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.

[[Page 1070]]

 
CP.2..............................  Counterparty           888888888............  Use LEI if             Varchar(50).
                                     identifier.                                   counterparty has
                                                                                   one. Should be used
                                                                                   consistently across
                                                                                   all records entities
                                                                                   within a corporate
                                                                                   group. The
                                                                                   counterparty
                                                                                   identifier shall be
                                                                                   the global legal
                                                                                   entity identifier if
                                                                                   one has been issued
                                                                                   to the entity. If a
                                                                                   counterparty
                                                                                   transacts with the
                                                                                   records entity
                                                                                   through one or more
                                                                                   separate foreign
                                                                                   branches or
                                                                                   divisions and any
                                                                                   such branch or
                                                                                   division does not
                                                                                   have its own unique
                                                                                   global legal entity
                                                                                   identifier, the
                                                                                   records entity must
                                                                                   include additional
                                                                                   identifiers, as
                                                                                   appropriate to
                                                                                   enable the FDIC to
                                                                                   aggregate or
                                                                                   disaggregate the
                                                                                   data for each
                                                                                   counterparty and for
                                                                                   each entity with the
                                                                                   same ultimate parent
                                                                                   entity as the
                                                                                   counterparty.
CP.3..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     counterparty                                  counterparty                                      ``N''.
                                     identifier?.                                  identifier is an LEI.
CP.4..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     counterparty.                                 identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with
                                                                                   counterparty.
CP.5..............................  Domicile.............  New York, New York...  Enter as city, state   Varchar(50).
                                                                                   or city, foreign
                                                                                   country.
CP.6..............................  Jurisdiction under     New York.............  Enter as state or      Varchar(50).
                                     which incorporated                            foreign jurisdiction.
                                     or organized.
CP.7..............................  Immediate parent       77777777.............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     entity identifier.                            for the parent
                                                                                   entity that directly
                                                                                   controls the
                                                                                   counterparty. Use
                                                                                   LEI if immediate
                                                                                   parent entity has
                                                                                   one.
CP.8..............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     immediate parent                              immediate parent                                  ``N''.
                                     entity identifier?                            entity identifier is
                                                                                   an LEI.
CP.9..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     immediate parent                              identify and, if
                                     entity.                                       necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with
                                                                                   counterparty.
CP.10.............................  Ultimate parent        666666666............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     entity identifier.                            for the parent
                                                                                   entity that is a
                                                                                   member of the
                                                                                   corporate group of
                                                                                   the counterparty
                                                                                   that is not
                                                                                   controlled by
                                                                                   another entity.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to identify
                                                                                   counterparty. Use
                                                                                   LEI if ultimate
                                                                                   parent entity has
                                                                                   one.

[[Page 1071]]

 
CP.11.............................  Has LEI been used for  Y/N..................  Indicate whether the   Char(1)..................  Should be ``Y'' or
                                     ultimate parent                               ultimate parent                                   ``N''.
                                     entity identifier?.                           entity identifier is
                                                                                   an LEI.
CP.12.............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(100).              ....................
                                     ultimate parent                               identify and, if
                                     entity.                                       necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with
                                                                                   Counterparty.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                              Booking Location Master Table
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BL.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.
BL.2..............................  Records entity         999999999............  Provide LEI..........  Varchar(50)..............  Should be a valid
                                     identifier.                                                                                     entry in the
                                                                                                                                     Corporate Org
                                                                                                                                     Master Table.
BL.3..............................  Internal booking       New York, New York...  Provide office where   Varchar(50).
                                     location identifier.                          the position is
                                                                                   booked. Information
                                                                                   needed to determine
                                                                                   the headquarters or
                                                                                   branch where the
                                                                                   position is booked,
                                                                                   including the system
                                                                                   on which the trade
                                                                                   is booked, as well
                                                                                   as the system on
                                                                                   which the trade is
                                                                                   settled.
BL.4..............................  Unique booking unit    xxxxxx...............  Provide unit or desk   Varchar(50).
                                     or desk identifier.                           at which the
                                                                                   position is booked.
                                                                                   Information needed
                                                                                   to help determine
                                                                                   purpose of position.
BL.5..............................  Unique booking unit    North American         Additional             Varchar(50).
                                     or desk description.   trading desk.          information to help
                                                                                   determine purpose of
                                                                                   position.
BL.6..............................  Booking unit or desk   1-999-999-9999.......  Information needed to  Varchar(50).
                                     contact--phone.                               communicate with the
                                                                                   booking unit or desk.
BL.7..............................  Booking unit or desk   [email protected]........  Information needed to  Varchar(100).              ....................
                                     contact--email.                               communicate with the
                                                                                   booking unit or desk.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                                             Safekeeping Agent Master Table
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                  Instructions and data
                                            Field                 Example              application                  Def                  Validation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SA.1..............................  As of date...........  2015-01-05...........  Data extraction date.  YYYY-MM-DD.
SA.2..............................  Safekeeping agent      888888888............  Provide an identifier  Varchar(50).
                                     identifier.                                   for the safekeeping
                                                                                   agent. Use LEI if
                                                                                   safekeeping agent
                                                                                   has one.
SA.3..............................  Legal name of          John Doe & Co........  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     safekeeping agent.                            identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with the
                                                                                   safekeeping agent.
SA.4..............................  Point of contact--     John Doe.............  Information needed to  Varchar(200).
                                     name.                                         identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with the
                                                                                   safekeeping agent.

[[Page 1072]]

 
SA.5..............................  Point of contact--     123 Main St, City,     Information needed to  Varchar(100).
                                     address.               State Zip Code.        identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with the
                                                                                   safekeeping agent.
SA.6..............................  Point of contact--     1-999-999-9999.......  Information needed to  Varchar(50).
                                     phone.                                        identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with the
                                                                                   safekeeping agent.
SA.7..............................  Point of contact--     [email protected].....  Information needed to  Varchar(100).              ....................
                                     email.                                        identify and, if
                                                                                   necessary,
                                                                                   communicate with the
                                                                                   safekeeping agent.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                               Details of Formats
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
               Format                     Content in brief      Additional explanation           Examples
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
YYYY-MM-DD..........................  Date...................  YYYY = four digit date,   2015-11-12
                                                                MM = 2 digit month, DD
                                                                = 2 digit date
Num (25,5)..........................  Up to 25 numerical       Up to 20 numerical        1352.67
                                       characters including 5   characters before the    12345678901234567890.12
                                       decimals.                decimal point and up to   345
                                                                5 numerical characters   0
                                                                after the decimal        ^20000.25
                                                                point. The dot           ^0.257
                                                                character is used to
                                                                separate decimals.
Char(3).............................  3 alphanumeric           The length is fixed at 3  USD
                                       characters.              alphanumeric characters. X1X
                                                                                         999
Varchar(25).........................  Up to 25 alphanumeric    The length is not fixed   asgaGEH3268EFdsagtTRCF5
                                       characters.              but limited at up to 25   43
                                                                alphanumeric characters.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



PART 373_CREDIT RISK RETENTION--Table of Contents



           Subpart A_Authority, Purpose, Scope and Definitions

Sec.
373.1  Purpose and scope.
373.2  Definitions.

                     Subpart B_Credit Risk Retention

373.3  Base risk retention requirement.
373.4  Standard risk retention.
373.5  Revolving pool securitizations.
373.6  Eligible ABCP conduits.
373.7  Commercial mortgage-backed securities.
373.8  Federal National Mortgage Association and Federal Home Loan 
          Mortgage Corporation ABS.
373.9  Open market CLOs.
373.10  Qualified tender option bonds.

                  Subpart C_Transfer of Risk Retention

373.11  Allocation of risk retention to an originator.
373.12  Hedging, transfer and financing prohibitions.

                   Subpart D_Exceptions and Exemptions

373.13  Exemption for qualified residential mortgages.
373.14  Definitions applicable to qualifying commercial loans, 
          commercial real estate loans, and automobile loans.
373.15  Qualifying commercial loans, commercial real estate loans, and 
          automobile loans.
373.16  Underwriting standards for qualifying commercial loans.
373.17  Underwriting standards for qualifying CRE loans.
373.18  Underwriting standards for qualifying automobile loans.
373.19  General exemptions.
373.20  Safe harbor for certain foreign-related transactions.
373.21  Additional exemptions.
373.22  Periodic review of the QRM definition, exempted three-to-four 
          unit residential mortgage loans, and community-focused 
          residential mortgage exemption.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq. and 3103 et seq., and 15 U.S.C. 
78o-11.

    Source: 79 FR 77740, Dec. 24, 2014, unless otherwise noted.

[[Page 1073]]



           Subpart A_Authority, Purpose, Scope and Definitions



Sec. 373.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Authority. (1) In general. This part is issued by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) under section 15G of the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (Exchange Act) (15 U.S.C. 78o-11), as 
well as the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq.) and 
the International Banking Act of 1978, as amended (12 U.S.C. 3101 et 
seq.).
    (2) Nothing in this part shall be read to limit the authority of the 
FDIC to take action under provisions of law other than 15 U.S.C. 78o-11, 
including to address unsafe or unsound practices or conditions, or 
violations of law or regulation under section 8 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818).
    (b) Purpose. This part requires securitizers to retain an economic 
interest in a portion of the credit risk for any asset that the 
securitizer, through the issuance of an asset-backed security, 
transfers, sells, or conveys to a third party in a transaction within 
the scope of section 15G of the Exchange Act. This part specifies the 
permissible types, forms, and amounts of credit risk retention, and it 
establishes certain exemptions for securitizations collateralized by 
assets that meet specified underwriting standards or that otherwise 
qualify for an exemption.
    (c) Scope. This part applies to any securitizer that is:
    (1) A state nonmember bank (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813(e)(2));
    (2) An insured state branch of a foreign bank (as defined in 12 CFR 
347.202);
    (3) A state savings association (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 
1813(b)(3)); or
    (4) Any subsidiary of an entity described in paragraph (c)(1), (2), 
or (3) of this section.

[79 FR 77740, Dec. 24, 2014]



Sec. 373.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, the following definitions apply:
    ABS interest means:
    (1) Any type of interest or obligation issued by an issuing entity, 
whether or not in certificated form, including a security, obligation, 
beneficial interest or residual interest (other than an uncertificated 
regular interest in a REMIC that is held by another REMIC, where both 
REMICs are part of the same structure and a single REMIC in that 
structure issues ABS interests to investors, or a non-economic residual 
interest issued by a REMIC), payments on which are primarily dependent 
on the cash flows of the collateral owned or held by the issuing entity; 
and
    (2) Does not include common or preferred stock, limited liability 
interests, partnership interests, trust certificates, or similar 
interests that:
    (i) Are issued primarily to evidence ownership of the issuing 
entity; and
    (ii) The payments, if any, on which are not primarily dependent on 
the cash flows of the collateral held by the issuing entity; and
    (3) Does not include the right to receive payments for services 
provided by the holder of such right, including servicing, trustee 
services and custodial services.
    Affiliate of, or a person affiliated with, a specified person means 
a person that directly, or indirectly through one or more 
intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is under common 
control with, the person specified.
    Appropriate Federal banking agency has the same meaning as in 
section 3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    Asset means a self-liquidating financial asset (including but not 
limited to a loan, lease, mortgage, or receivable).
    Asset-backed security has the same meaning as in section 3(a)(79) of 
the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(79)).
    Collateral means, with respect to any issuance of ABS interests, the 
assets that provide the cash flow and the servicing assets that support 
such cash flow for the ABS interests irrespective of the legal structure 
of issuance, including security interests in assets or other property of 
the issuing entity, fractional undivided property interests in the 
assets or other property of the issuing entity, or any other property 
interest in or rights to cash flow from such assets and related 
servicing assets. Assets or other property

[[Page 1074]]

collateralize an issuance of ABS interests if the assets or property 
serve as collateral for such issuance.
    Commercial real estate loan has the same meaning as in Sec. 373.14.
    Commission means the Securities and Exchange Commission.
    Control including the terms ``controlling,'' ``controlled by'' and 
``under common control with'':
    (1) Means the possession, direct or indirect, of the power to direct 
or cause the direction of the management and policies of a person, 
whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract, or 
otherwise.
    (2) Without limiting the foregoing, a person shall be considered to 
control another person if the first person:
    (i) Owns, controls or holds with power to vote 25 percent or more of 
any class of voting securities of the other person; or
    (ii) Controls in any manner the election of a majority of the 
directors, trustees or persons performing similar functions of the other 
person.
    Credit risk means:
    (1) The risk of loss that could result from the failure of the 
borrower in the case of a securitized asset, or the issuing entity in 
the case of an ABS interest in the issuing entity, to make required 
payments of principal or interest on the asset or ABS interest on a 
timely basis;
    (2) The risk of loss that could result from bankruptcy, insolvency, 
or a similar proceeding with respect to the borrower or issuing entity, 
as appropriate; or
    (3) The effect that significant changes in the underlying credit 
quality of the asset or ABS interest may have on the market value of the 
asset or ABS interest.
    Creditor has the same meaning as in 15 U.S.C. 1602(g).
    Depositor means:
    (1) The person that receives or purchases and transfers or sells the 
securitized assets to the issuing entity;
    (2) The sponsor, in the case of a securitization transaction where 
there is not an intermediate transfer of the assets from the sponsor to 
the issuing entity; or
    (3) The person that receives or purchases and transfers or sells the 
securitized assets to the issuing entity in the case of a securitization 
transaction where the person transferring or selling the securitized 
assets directly to the issuing entity is itself a trust.
    Eligible horizontal residual interest means, with respect to any 
securitization transaction, an ABS interest in the issuing entity:
    (1) That is an interest in a single class or multiple classes in the 
issuing entity, provided that each interest meets, individually or in 
the aggregate, all of the requirements of this definition;
    (2) With respect to which, on any payment date or allocation date on 
which the issuing entity has insufficient funds to satisfy its 
obligation to pay all contractual interest or principal due, any 
resulting shortfall will reduce amounts payable to the eligible 
horizontal residual interest prior to any reduction in the amounts 
payable to any other ABS interest, whether through loss allocation, 
operation of the priority of payments, or any other governing 
contractual provision (until the amount of such ABS interest is reduced 
to zero); and
    (3) That, with the exception of any non-economic REMIC residual 
interest, has the most subordinated claim to payments of both principal 
and interest by the issuing entity.
    Eligible horizontal cash reserve account means an account meeting 
the requirements of Sec. 373.4(b).
    Eligible vertical interest means, with respect to any securitization 
transaction, a single vertical security or an interest in each class of 
ABS interests in the issuing entity issued as part of the securitization 
transaction that constitutes the same proportion of each such class.
    Federal banking agencies means the Office of the Comptroller of the 
Currency, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, and the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
    GAAP means generally accepted accounting principles as used in the 
United States.
    Issuing entity means, with respect to a securitization transaction, 
the trust or other entity:
    (1) That owns or holds the pool of assets to be securitized; and

[[Page 1075]]

    (2) In whose name the asset-backed securities are issued.
    Majority-owned affiliate of a person means an entity (other than the 
issuing entity) that, directly or indirectly, majority controls, is 
majority controlled by or is under common majority control with, such 
person. For purposes of this definition, majority control means 
ownership of more than 50 percent of the equity of an entity, or 
ownership of any other controlling financial interest in the entity, as 
determined under GAAP.
    Originator means a person who:
    (1) Through an extension of credit or otherwise, creates an asset 
that collateralizes an asset-backed security; and
    (2) Sells the asset directly or indirectly to a securitizer or 
issuing entity.
    REMIC has the same meaning as in 26 U.S.C. 860D.
    Residential mortgage means:
    (1) A transaction that is a covered transaction as defined in 
Sec. 1026.43(b) of Regulation Z (12 CFR 1026.43(b)(1));
    (2) Any transaction that is exempt from the definition of ``covered 
transaction'' under Sec. 1026.43(a) of Regulation Z (12 CFR 1026.43(a)); 
and
    (3) Any other loan secured by a residential structure that contains 
one to four units, whether or not that structure is attached to real 
property, including an individual condominium or cooperative unit and, 
if used as a residence, a mobile home or trailer.
    Retaining sponsor means, with respect to a securitization 
transaction, the sponsor that has retained or caused to be retained an 
economic interest in the credit risk of the securitized assets pursuant 
to subpart B of this part.
    Securitization transaction means a transaction involving the offer 
and sale of asset-backed securities by an issuing entity.
    Securitized asset means an asset that:
    (1) Is transferred, sold, or conveyed to an issuing entity; and
    (2) Collateralizes the ABS interests issued by the issuing entity.
    Securitizer means, with respect to a securitization transaction, 
either:
    (1) The depositor of the asset-backed securities (if the depositor 
is not the sponsor); or
    (2) The sponsor of the asset-backed securities.
    Servicer means any person responsible for the management or 
collection of the securitized assets or making allocations or 
distributions to holders of the ABS interests, but does not include a 
trustee for the issuing entity or the asset-backed securities that makes 
allocations or distributions to holders of the ABS interests if the 
trustee receives such allocations or distributions from a servicer and 
the trustee does not otherwise perform the functions of a servicer.
    Servicing assets means rights or other assets designed to assure the 
servicing or timely distribution of proceeds to ABS interest holders and 
rights or other assets that are related or incidental to purchasing or 
otherwise acquiring and holding the issuing entity's securitized assets. 
Servicing assets include amounts received by the issuing entity as 
proceeds of securitized assets, including proceeds of rights or other 
assets, whether as remittances by obligors or as other recoveries.
    Single vertical security means, with respect to any securitization 
transaction, an ABS interest entitling the sponsor to a specified 
percentage of the amounts paid on each class of ABS interests in the 
issuing entity (other than such single vertical security).
    Sponsor means a person who organizes and initiates a securitization 
transaction by selling or transferring assets, either directly or 
indirectly, including through an affiliate, to the issuing entity.
    State has the same meaning as in Section 3(a)(16) of the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(16)).
    United States or U.S. means the United States of America, including 
its territories and possessions, any State of the United States, and the 
District of Columbia.
    Wholly-owned affiliate means a person (other than an issuing entity) 
that, directly or indirectly, wholly controls, is wholly controlled by, 
or is wholly under common control with, another person. For purposes of 
this definition, ``wholly controls'' means ownership of 100 percent of 
the equity of an entity.

[[Page 1076]]



                     Subpart B_Credit Risk Retention



Sec. 373.3  Base risk retention requirement.

    (a) Base risk retention requirement. Except as otherwise provided in 
this part, the sponsor of a securitization transaction (or majority-
owned affiliate of the sponsor) shall retain an economic interest in the 
credit risk of the securitized assets in accordance with any one of 
Secs. 373.4 through 373.10. Credit risk in securitized assets required 
to be retained and held by any person for purposes of compliance with 
this part, whether a sponsor, an originator, an originator-seller, or a 
third-party purchaser, except as otherwise provided in this part, may be 
acquired and held by any of such person's majority-owned affiliates 
(other than an issuing entity).
    (b) Multiple sponsors. If there is more than one sponsor of a 
securitization transaction, it shall be the responsibility of each 
sponsor to ensure that at least one of the sponsors of the 
securitization transaction (or at least one of their majority-owned or 
wholly-owned affiliates, as applicable) retains an economic interest in 
the credit risk of the securitized assets in accordance with any one of 
Secs. 373.4, 373.5, 373.8, 373.9, or 373.10.



Sec. 373.4  Standard risk retention.

    (a) General requirement. Except as provided in Secs. 373.5 through 
373.10, the sponsor of a securitization transaction must retain an 
eligible vertical interest or eligible horizontal residual interest, or 
any combination thereof, in accordance with the requirements of this 
section.
    (1) If the sponsor retains only an eligible vertical interest as its 
required risk retention, the sponsor must retain an eligible vertical 
interest in a percentage of not less than 5 percent.
    (2) If the sponsor retains only an eligible horizontal residual 
interest as its required risk retention, the amount of the interest must 
equal at least 5 percent of the fair value of all ABS interests in the 
issuing entity issued as a part of the securitization transaction, 
determined using a fair value measurement framework under GAAP.
    (3) If the sponsor retains both an eligible vertical interest and an 
eligible horizontal residual interest as its required risk retention, 
the percentage of the fair value of the eligible horizontal residual 
interest and the percentage of the eligible vertical interest must equal 
at least five.
    (4) The percentage of the eligible vertical interest, eligible 
horizontal residual interest, or combination thereof retained by the 
sponsor must be determined as of the closing date of the securitization 
transaction.
    (b) Option to hold base amount in eligible horizontal cash reserve 
account. In lieu of retaining all or any part of an eligible horizontal 
residual interest under paragraph (a) of this section, the sponsor may, 
at closing of the securitization transaction, cause to be established 
and funded, in cash, an eligible horizontal cash reserve account in the 
amount equal to the fair value of such eligible horizontal residual 
interest or part thereof, provided that the account meets all of the 
following conditions:
    (1) The account is held by the trustee (or person performing similar 
functions) in the name and for the benefit of the issuing entity;
    (2) Amounts in the account are invested only in cash and cash 
equivalents; and
    (3) Until all ABS interests in the issuing entity are paid in full, 
or the issuing entity is dissolved:
    (i) Amounts in the account shall be released only to:
    (A) Satisfy payments on ABS interests in the issuing entity on any 
payment date on which the issuing entity has insufficient funds from any 
source to satisfy an amount due on any ABS interest; or
    (B) Pay critical expenses of the trust unrelated to credit risk on 
any payment date on which the issuing entity has insufficient funds from 
any source to pay such expenses and:
    (1) Such expenses, in the absence of available funds in the eligible 
horizontal cash reserve account, would be paid prior to any payments to 
holders of ABS interests; and
    (2) Such payments are made to parties that are not affiliated with 
the sponsor; and

[[Page 1077]]

    (ii) Interest (or other earnings) on investments made in accordance 
with paragraph (b)(2) of this section may be released once received by 
the account.
    (c) Disclosures. A sponsor relying on this section shall provide, or 
cause to be provided, to potential investors, under the caption ``Credit 
Risk Retention'', a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of the 
asset-backed securities in the securitization transaction the following 
disclosures in written form and within the time frames set forth in this 
paragraph (c):
    (1) Horizontal interest. With respect to any eligible horizontal 
residual interest held under paragraph (a) of this section, a sponsor 
must disclose:
    (i) A reasonable period of time prior to the sale of an asset-backed 
security issued in the same offering of ABS interests,
    (A) The fair value (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of 
all of the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction and 
dollar amount (or corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which 
the ABS interests are issued, as applicable)) of the eligible horizontal 
residual interest that the sponsor expects to retain at the closing of 
the securitization transaction. If the specific prices, sizes, or rates 
of interest of each tranche of the securitization are not available, the 
sponsor must disclose a range of fair values (expressed as a percentage 
of the fair value of all of the ABS interests issued in the 
securitization transaction and dollar amount (or corresponding amount in 
the foreign currency in which the ABS interests are issued, as 
applicable)) of the eligible horizontal residual interest that the 
sponsor expects to retain at the close of the securitization transaction 
based on a range of bona fide estimates or specified prices, sizes, or 
rates of interest of each tranche of the securitization. A sponsor 
disclosing a range of fair values based on a range of bona fide 
estimates or specified prices, sizes or rates of interest of each 
tranche of the securitization must also disclose the method by which it 
determined any range of prices, tranche sizes, or rates of interest.
    (B) A description of the material terms of the eligible horizontal 
residual interest to be retained by the sponsor;
    (C) A description of the valuation methodology used to calculate the 
fair values or range of fair values of all classes of ABS interests, 
including any portion of the eligible horizontal residual interest 
retained by the sponsor;
    (D) All key inputs and assumptions or a comprehensive description of 
such key inputs and assumptions that were used in measuring the 
estimated total fair value or range of fair values of all classes of ABS 
interests, including the eligible horizontal residual interest to be 
retained by the sponsor.
    (E) To the extent applicable to the valuation methodology used, the 
disclosure required in paragraph (c)(1)(i)(D) of this section shall 
include, but should not be limited to, quantitative information about 
each of the following:
    (1) Discount rates;
    (2) Loss given default (recovery);
    (3) Prepayment rates;
    (4) Default rates;
    (5) Lag time between default and recovery; and
    (6) The basis of forward interest rates used.
    (F) The disclosure required in paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(C) and (D) of 
this section shall include, at a minimum, descriptions of all inputs and 
assumptions that either could have a material impact on the fair value 
calculation or would be material to a prospective investor's ability to 
evaluate the sponsor's fair value calculations. To the extent the 
disclosure required in this paragraph (c)(1) includes a description of a 
curve or curves, the description shall include a description of the 
methodology that was used to derive each curve and a description of any 
aspects or features of each curve that could materially impact the fair 
value calculation or the ability of a prospective investor to evaluate 
the sponsor's fair value calculation. To the extent a sponsor uses 
information about the securitized assets in its calculation of fair 
value, such information shall not be as of a date more than 60 days 
prior to the date of first use with investors; provided that for a 
subsequent issuance of ABS interests by the same issuing entity with the 
same sponsor for which

[[Page 1078]]

the securitization transaction distributes amounts to investors on a 
quarterly or less frequent basis, such information shall not be as of a 
date more than 135 days prior to the date of first use with investors; 
provided further, that the balance or value (in accordance with the 
transaction documents) of the securitized assets may be increased or 
decreased to reflect anticipated additions or removals of assets the 
sponsor makes or expects to make between the cut-off date or similar 
date for establishing the composition of the asset pool collateralizing 
such asset-backed security and the closing date of the securitization.
    (G) A summary description of the reference data set or other 
historical information used to develop the key inputs and assumptions 
referenced in paragraph (c)(1)(i)(D) of this section, including loss 
given default and default rates;
    (ii) A reasonable time after the closing of the securitization 
transaction:
    (A) The fair value (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of 
all of the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction and 
dollar amount (or corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which 
the ABS are issued, as applicable)) of the eligible horizontal residual 
interest the sponsor retained at the closing of the securitization 
transaction, based on actual sale prices and finalized tranche sizes;
    (B) The fair value (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of 
all of the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction and 
dollar amount (or corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which 
the ABS are issued, as applicable)) of the eligible horizontal residual 
interest that the sponsor is required to retain under this section; and
    (C) To the extent the valuation methodology or any of the key inputs 
and assumptions that were used in calculating the fair value or range of 
fair values disclosed prior to sale and required under paragraph 
(c)(1)(i) of this section materially differs from the methodology or key 
inputs and assumptions used to calculate the fair value at the time of 
closing, descriptions of those material differences.
    (iii) If the sponsor retains risk through the funding of an eligible 
horizontal cash reserve account:
    (A) The amount to be placed (or that is placed) by the sponsor in 
the eligible horizontal cash reserve account at closing, and the fair 
value (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of all of the ABS 
interests issued in the securitization transaction and dollar amount (or 
corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which the ABS interests 
are issued, as applicable)) of the eligible horizontal residual interest 
that the sponsor is required to fund through the eligible horizontal 
cash reserve account in order for such account, together with other 
retained interests, to satisfy the sponsor's risk retention requirement;
    (B) A description of the material terms of the eligible horizontal 
cash reserve account; and
    (C) The disclosures required in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of 
this section.
    (2) Vertical interest. With respect to any eligible vertical 
interest retained under paragraph (a) of this section, the sponsor must 
disclose:
    (i) A reasonable period of time prior to the sale of an asset-backed 
security issued in the same offering of ABS interests,
    (A) The form of the eligible vertical interest;
    (B) The percentage that the sponsor is required to retain as a 
vertical interest under this section; and
    (C) A description of the material terms of the vertical interest and 
the amount that the sponsor expects to retain at the closing of the 
securitization transaction.
    (ii) A reasonable time after the closing of the securitization 
transaction, the amount of the vertical interest the sponsor retained at 
closing, if that amount is materially different from the amount 
disclosed under paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section.
    (d) Record maintenance. A sponsor must retain the certifications and 
disclosures required in paragraphs (a) and (c) of this section in its 
records and must provide the disclosure upon request to the Commission 
and its appropriate Federal banking agency, if any, until three years 
after all ABS interests are no longer outstanding.

[[Page 1079]]



Sec. 373.5  Revolving pool securitizations.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions apply:
    Revolving pool securitization means an issuing entity that is 
established to issue on multiple issuance dates more than one series, 
class, subclass, or tranche of asset-backed securities that are 
collateralized by a common pool of securitized assets that will change 
in composition over time, and that does not monetize excess interest and 
fees from its securitized assets.
    Seller's interest means an ABS interest or ABS interests:
    (1) Collateralized by the securitized assets and servicing assets 
owned or held by the issuing entity, other than the following that are 
not considered a component of seller's interest:
    (i) Servicing assets that have been allocated as collateral only for 
a specific series in connection with administering the revolving pool 
securitization, such as a principal accumulation or interest reserve 
account; and
    (ii) Assets that are not eligible under the terms of the 
securitization transaction to be included when determining whether the 
revolving pool securitization holds aggregate securitized assets in 
specified proportions to aggregate outstanding investor ABS interests 
issued; and
    (2) That is pari passu with each series of investor ABS interests 
issued, or partially or fully subordinated to one or more series in 
identical or varying amounts, with respect to the allocation of all 
distributions and losses with respect to the securitized assets prior to 
early amortization of the revolving securitization (as specified in the 
securitization transaction documents); and
    (3) That adjusts for fluctuations in the outstanding principal 
balance of the securitized assets in the pool.
    (b) General requirement. A sponsor satisfies the risk retention 
requirements of Sec. 373.3 with respect to a securitization transaction 
for which the issuing entity is a revolving pool securitization if the 
sponsor maintains a seller's interest of not less than 5 percent of the 
aggregate unpaid principal balance of all outstanding investor ABS 
interests in the issuing entity.
    (c) Measuring the seller's interest. In measuring the seller's 
interest for purposes of meeting the requirements of paragraph (b) of 
this section:
    (1) The unpaid principal balance of the securitized assets for the 
numerator of the 5 percent ratio shall not include assets of the types 
excluded from the definition of seller's interest in paragraph (a) of 
this section;
    (2) The aggregate unpaid principal balance of outstanding investor 
ABS interests in the denominator of the 5 percent ratio may be reduced 
by the amount of funds held in a segregated principal accumulation 
account for the repayment of outstanding investor ABS interests, if:
    (i) The terms of the securitization transaction documents prevent 
funds in the principal accumulation account from being applied for any 
purpose other than the repayment of the unpaid principal of outstanding 
investor ABS interests; and
    (ii) Funds in that account are invested only in the types of assets 
in which funds held in an eligible horizontal cash reserve account 
pursuant to Sec. 373.4 are permitted to be invested;
    (3) If the terms of the securitization transaction documents set 
minimum required seller's interest as a proportion of the unpaid 
principal balance of outstanding investor ABS interests for one or more 
series issued, rather than as a proportion of the aggregate outstanding 
investor ABS interests in all outstanding series combined, the 
percentage of the seller's interest for each such series must, when 
combined with the percentage of any minimum seller's interest set by 
reference to the aggregate outstanding investor ABS interests, equal at 
least 5 percent;
    (4) The 5 percent test must be determined and satisfied at the 
closing of each issuance of ABS interests to investors by the issuing 
entity, and
    (i) At least monthly at a seller's interest measurement date 
specified under the securitization transaction documents, until no ABS 
interest in the issuing entity is held by any person not a wholly-owned 
affiliate of the sponsor; or

[[Page 1080]]

    (ii) If the revolving pool securitization fails to meet the 5 
percent test as of any date described in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this 
section, and the securitization transaction documents specify a cure 
period, the 5 percent test must be determined and satisfied within the 
earlier of the cure period, or one month after the date described in 
paragraph (c)(4)(i).
    (d) Measuring outstanding investor ABS interests. In measuring the 
amount of outstanding investor ABS interests for purposes of this 
section, ABS interests held for the life of such ABS interests by the 
sponsor or its wholly-owned affiliates may be excluded.
    (e) Holding and retention of the seller's interest; legacy trusts. 
(1) Notwithstanding Sec. 373.12(a), the seller's interest, and any 
offsetting horizontal retention interest retained pursuant to paragraph 
(g) of this section, must be retained by the sponsor or by one or more 
wholly-owned affiliates of the sponsor, including one or more depositors 
of the revolving pool securitization.
    (2) If one revolving pool securitization issues collateral 
certificates representing a beneficial interest in all or a portion of 
the securitized assets held by that securitization to another revolving 
pool securitization, which in turn issues ABS interests for which the 
collateral certificates are all or a portion of the securitized assets, 
a sponsor may satisfy the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this 
section by retaining the seller's interest for the assets represented by 
the collateral certificates through either of the revolving pool 
securitizations, so long as both revolving pool securitizations are 
retained at the direction of the same sponsor or its wholly-owned 
affiliates.
    (3) If the sponsor retains the seller's interest associated with the 
collateral certificates at the level of the revolving pool 
securitization that issues those collateral certificates, the proportion 
of the seller's interest required by paragraph (b) of this section 
retained at that level must equal the proportion that the principal 
balance of the securitized assets represented by the collateral 
certificates bears to the principal balance of the securitized assets in 
the revolving pool securitization that issues the ABS interests, as of 
each measurement date required by paragraph (c) of this section.
    (f) Offset for pool-level excess funding account. The 5 percent 
seller's interest required on each measurement date by paragraph (c) of 
this section may be reduced on a dollar-for-dollar basis by the balance, 
as of such date, of an excess funding account in the form of a 
segregated account that:
    (1) Is funded in the event of a failure to meet the minimum seller's 
interest requirements or other requirement to maintain a minimum balance 
of securitized assets under the securitization transaction documents by 
distributions otherwise payable to the holder of the seller's interest;
    (2) Is invested only in the types of assets in which funds held in a 
horizontal cash reserve account pursuant to Sec. 373.4 are permitted to 
be invested; and
    (3) In the event of an early amortization, makes payments of amounts 
held in the account to holders of investor ABS interests in the same 
manner as payments to holders of investor ABS interests of amounts 
received on securitized assets.
    (g) Combined seller's interests and horizontal interest retention. 
The 5 percent seller's interest required on each measurement date by 
paragraph (c) of this section may be reduced to a percentage lower than 
5 percent to the extent that, for all series of investor ABS interests 
issued after the applicable effective date of this Sec. 373.5, the 
sponsor, or notwithstanding Sec. 373.12(a) a wholly-owned affiliate of 
the sponsor, retains, at a minimum, a corresponding percentage of the 
fair value of ABS interests issued in each series, in the form of one or 
more of the horizontal residual interests meeting the requirements of 
paragraphs (h) or (i).
    (h) Residual ABS interests in excess interest and fees. The sponsor 
may take the offset described in paragraph (g) of this section for a 
residual ABS interest in excess interest and fees, whether certificated 
or uncertificated, in a single or multiple classes, subclasses, or 
tranches, that meets, individually or in the aggregate, the requirements 
of this paragraph (h);

[[Page 1081]]

    (1) Each series of the revolving pool securitization distinguishes 
between the series' share of the interest and fee cash flows and the 
series' share of the principal repayment cash flows from the securitized 
assets collateralizing the revolving pool securitization, which may 
according to the terms of the securitization transaction documents, 
include not only the series' ratable share of such cash flows but also 
excess cash flows available from other series;
    (2) The residual ABS interest's claim to any part of the series' 
share of the interest and fee cash flows for any interest payment period 
is subordinated to all accrued and payable interest due on the payment 
date to more senior ABS interests in the series for that period, and 
further reduced by the series' share of losses, including defaults on 
principal of the securitized assets collateralizing the revolving pool 
securitization (whether incurred in that period or carried over from 
prior periods) to the extent that such payments would have been included 
in amounts payable to more senior interests in the series;
    (3) The revolving pool securitization continues to revolve, with one 
or more series, classes, subclasses, or tranches of asset-backed 
securities that are collateralized by a common pool of assets that 
change in composition over time; and
    (4) For purposes of taking the offset described in paragraph (g) of 
this section, the sponsor determines the fair value of the residual ABS 
interest in excess interest and fees, and the fair value of the series 
of outstanding investor ABS interests to which it is subordinated and 
supports using the fair value measurement framework under GAAP, as of:
    (i) The closing of the securitization transaction issuing the 
supported ABS interests; and
    (ii) The seller's interest measurement dates described in paragraph 
(c)(4) of this section, except that for these periodic determinations 
the sponsor must update the fair value of the residual ABS interest in 
excess interest and fees for the numerator of the percentage ratio, but 
may at the sponsor's option continue to use the fair values determined 
in (h)(4)(i) for the outstanding investor ABS interests in the 
denominator.
    (i) Offsetting eligible horizontal residual interest. The sponsor 
may take the offset described in paragraph (g) of this section for ABS 
interests that would meet the definition of eligible horizontal residual 
interests in Sec. 373.2 but for the sponsor's simultaneous holding of 
subordinated seller's interests, residual ABS interests in excess 
interests and fees, or a combination of the two, if:
    (1) The sponsor complies with all requirements of paragraphs (b) 
through (e) of this section for its holdings of subordinated seller's 
interest, and paragraph (h) for its holdings of residual ABS interests 
in excess interests and fees, as applicable;
    (2) For purposes of taking the offset described in paragraph (g) of 
this section, the sponsor determines the fair value of the eligible 
horizontal residual interest as a percentage of the fair value of the 
outstanding investor ABS interests in the series supported by the 
eligible horizontal residual interest, determined using the fair value 
measurement framework under GAAP:
    (i) As of the closing of the securitization transaction issuing the 
supported ABS interests; and
    (ii) Without including in the numerator of the percentage ratio any 
fair value based on:
    (A) The subordinated seller's interest or residual ABS interest in 
excess interest and fees;
    (B) the interest payable to the sponsor on the eligible horizontal 
residual interest, if the sponsor is including the value of residual ABS 
interest in excess interest and fees pursuant to paragraph (h) of this 
section in taking the offset in paragraph (g) of this section; and,
    (C) the principal payable to the sponsor on the eligible horizontal 
residual interest, if the sponsor is including the value of the seller's 
interest pursuant to paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section and 
distributions on that seller's interest are available to reduce charge-
offs that would otherwise be allocated to reduce principal payable to 
the offset eligible horizontal residual interest.

[[Page 1082]]

    (j) Specified dates. A sponsor using data about the revolving pool 
securitization's collateral, or ABS interests previously issued, to 
determine the closing-date percentage of a seller's interest, residual 
ABS interest in excess interest and fees, or eligible horizontal 
residual interest pursuant to this Sec. 373.5 may use such data prepared 
as of specified dates if:
    (1) The sponsor describes the specified dates in the disclosures 
required by paragraph (k) of this section; and
    (2) The dates are no more than 60 days prior to the date of first 
use with investors of disclosures required for the interest by paragraph 
(k) of this section, or for revolving pool securitizations that make 
distributions to investors on a quarterly or less frequent basis, no 
more than 135 days prior to the date of first use with investors of such 
disclosures.
    (k) Disclosure and record maintenance. (1) Disclosure. A sponsor 
relying on this section shall provide, or cause to be provided, to 
potential investors, under the caption ``Credit Risk Retention'' the 
following disclosure in written form and within the time frames set 
forth in this paragraph (k):
    (i) A reasonable period of time prior to the sale of an asset-backed 
security, a description of the material terms of the seller's interest, 
and the percentage of the seller's interest that the sponsor expects to 
retain at the closing of the securitization transaction, measured in 
accordance with the requirements of this Sec. 373.5, as a percentage of 
the aggregate unpaid principal balance of all outstanding investor ABS 
interests issued, or as a percentage of the aggregate unpaid principal 
balance of outstanding investor ABS interests for one or more series 
issued, as required by the terms of the securitization transaction;
    (ii) A reasonable time after the closing of the securitization 
transaction, the amount of seller's interest the sponsor retained at 
closing, if that amount is materially different from the amount 
disclosed under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section; and
    (iii) A description of the material terms of any horizontal residual 
interests offsetting the seller's interest in accordance with paragraphs 
(g), (h), and (i) of this section; and
    (iv) Disclosure of the fair value of those horizontal residual 
interests retained by the sponsor for the series being offered to 
investors and described in the disclosures, as a percentage of the fair 
value of the outstanding investor ABS interests issued, described in the 
same manner and within the same timeframes required for disclosure of 
the fair values of eligible horizontal residual interests specified in 
Sec. 373.4(c).
    (2) Adjusted data. Disclosures required by this paragraph (k) to be 
made a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of an asset-backed 
security of the amount of seller's interest, residual ABS interest in 
excess interest and fees, or eligible horizontal residual interest may 
include adjustments to the amount of securitized assets for additions or 
removals the sponsor expects to make before the closing date and 
adjustments to the amount of outstanding investor ABS interests for 
expected increases and decreases of those interests under the control of 
the sponsor.
    (3) Record maintenance. A sponsor must retain the disclosures 
required in paragraph (k)(1) of this section in its records and must 
provide the disclosure upon request to the Commission and its 
appropriate Federal banking agency, if any, until three years after all 
ABS interests are no longer outstanding.
    (l) Early amortization of all outstanding series. A sponsor that 
organizes a revolving pool securitization that relies on this Sec. 373.5 
to satisfy the risk retention requirements of Sec. 373.3, does not 
violate the requirements of this part if its seller's interest falls 
below the level required by Sec. 373. 5 after the revolving pool 
securitization commences early amortization, pursuant to the terms of 
the securitization transaction documents, of all series of outstanding 
investor ABS interests, if:
    (1) The sponsor was in full compliance with the requirements of this 
section on all measurement dates specified in paragraph (c) of this 
section prior to the commencement of early amortization;
    (2) The terms of the seller's interest continue to make it pari 
passu with or

[[Page 1083]]

subordinate in identical or varying amounts to each series of 
outstanding investor ABS interests issued with respect to the allocation 
of all distributions and losses with respect to the securitized assets;
    (3) The terms of any horizontal interest relied upon by the sponsor 
pursuant to paragraph (g) to offset the minimum seller's interest amount 
continue to require the interests to absorb losses in accordance with 
the terms of paragraph (h) or (i) of this section, as applicable; and
    (4) The revolving pool securitization issues no additional ABS 
interests after early amortization is initiated to any person not a 
wholly-owned affiliate of the sponsor, either at the time of issuance or 
during the amortization period.



Sec. 373.6  Eligible ABCP conduits.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
additional definitions apply:
    100 percent liquidity coverage means an amount equal to the 
outstanding balance of all ABCP issued by the conduit plus any accrued 
and unpaid interest without regard to the performance of the ABS 
interests held by the ABCP conduit and without regard to any credit 
enhancement.
    ABCP means asset-backed commercial paper that has a maturity at the 
time of issuance not exceeding 397 days, exclusive of days of grace, or 
any renewal thereof the maturity of which is likewise limited.
    ABCP conduit means an issuing entity with respect to ABCP.
    Eligible ABCP conduit means an ABCP conduit, provided that:
    (1) The ABCP conduit is bankruptcy remote or otherwise isolated for 
insolvency purposes from the sponsor of the ABCP conduit and from any 
intermediate SPV;
    (2) The ABS interests acquired by the ABCP conduit are:
    (i) ABS interests collateralized solely by assets originated by an 
originator-seller and by servicing assets;
    (ii) Special units of beneficial interest (or similar ABS interests) 
in a trust or special purpose vehicle that retains legal title to leased 
property underlying leases originated by an originator-seller that were 
transferred to an intermediate SPV in connection with a securitization 
collateralized solely by such leases and by servicing assets;
    (iii) ABS interests in a revolving pool securitization 
collateralized solely by assets originated by an originator-seller and 
by servicing assets; or
    (iv) ABS interests described in paragraph (2)(i), (ii), or (iii) of 
this definition that are collateralized, in whole or in part, by assets 
acquired by an originator-seller in a business combination that 
qualifies for business combination accounting under GAAP, and, if 
collateralized in part, the remainder of such assets are assets 
described in paragraph (2)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this definition; and
    (v) Acquired by the ABCP conduit in an initial issuance by or on 
behalf of an intermediate SPV:
    (A) Directly from the intermediate SPV,
    (B) From an underwriter of the ABS interests issued by the 
intermediate SPV, or
    (C) From another person who acquired the ABS interests directly from 
the intermediate SPV;
    (3) The ABCP conduit is collateralized solely by ABS interests 
acquired from intermediate SPVs as described in paragraph (2) of this 
definition and servicing assets; and
    (4) A regulated liquidity provider has entered into a legally 
binding commitment to provide 100 percent liquidity coverage (in the 
form of a lending facility, an asset purchase agreement, a repurchase 
agreement, or other similar arrangement) to all the ABCP issued by the 
ABCP conduit by lending to, purchasing ABCP issued by, or purchasing 
assets from, the ABCP conduit in the event that funds are required to 
repay maturing ABCP issued by the ABCP conduit. With respect to the 100 
percent liquidity coverage, in the event that the ABCP conduit is unable 
for any reason to repay maturing ABCP issued by the issuing entity, the 
liquidity provider shall be obligated to pay an amount equal to any 
shortfall, and the total amount that may be due pursuant to the 100 
percent liquidity coverage shall be equal to 100 percent of the amount 
of the ABCP outstanding at any time plus accrued and unpaid

[[Page 1084]]

interest (amounts due pursuant to the required liquidity coverage may 
not be subject to credit performance of the ABS interests held by the 
ABCP conduit or reduced by the amount of credit support provided to the 
ABCP conduit and liquidity support that only funds performing loans or 
receivables or performing ABS interests does not meet the requirements 
of this section).
    Intermediate SPV means a special purpose vehicle that:
    (1) (i) Is a direct or indirect wholly-owned affiliate of the 
originator-seller; or
    (ii) Has nominal equity owned by a trust or corporate service 
provider that specializes in providing independent ownership of special 
purpose vehicles, and such trust or corporate service provider is not 
affiliated with any other transaction parties;
    (2) Is bankruptcy remote or otherwise isolated for insolvency 
purposes from the eligible ABCP conduit and from each originator-seller 
and each majority-owned affiliate in each case that, directly or 
indirectly, sells or transfers assets to such intermediate SPV;
    (3) Acquires assets from the originator-seller that are originated 
by the originator-seller or acquired by the originator-seller in the 
acquisition of a business that qualifies for business combination 
accounting under GAAP or acquires ABS interests issued by another 
intermediate SPV of the originator-seller that are collateralized solely 
by such assets; and
    (4) Issues ABS interests collateralized solely by such assets, as 
applicable.
    Originator-seller means an entity that originates assets and sells 
or transfers those assets, directly or through a majority-owned 
affiliate, to an intermediate SPV, and includes (except for the purposes 
of identifying the sponsorship and affiliation of an intermediate SPV 
pursuant to this Sec. 373.6) any affiliate of the originator-seller 
that, directly or indirectly, majority controls, is majority controlled 
by or is under common majority control with, the originator-seller. For 
purposes of this definition, majority control means ownership of more 
than 50 percent of the equity of an entity, or ownership of any other 
controlling financial interest in the entity, as determined under GAAP.
    Regulated liquidity provider means:
    (1) A depository institution (as defined in section 3 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813));
    (2) A bank holding company (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1841), or a 
subsidiary thereof;
    (3) A savings and loan holding company (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 
1467a), provided all or substantially all of the holding company's 
activities are permissible for a financial holding company under 12 
U.S.C. 1843(k), or a subsidiary thereof; or
    (4) A foreign bank whose home country supervisor (as defined in 
Sec. 211.21 of the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.21)) 
has adopted capital standards consistent with the Capital Accord of the 
Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, as amended, and that is subject 
to such standards, or a subsidiary thereof.
    (b) In general. An ABCP conduit sponsor satisfies the risk retention 
requirement of Sec. 373.3 with respect to the issuance of ABCP by an 
eligible ABCP conduit in a securitization transaction if, for each ABS 
interest the ABCP conduit acquires from an intermediate SPV:
    (1) An originator-seller of the intermediate SPV retains an economic 
interest in the credit risk of the assets collateralizing the ABS 
interest acquired by the eligible ABCP conduit in the amount and manner 
required under Sec. 373.4 or Sec. 373.5; and
    (2) The ABCP conduit sponsor:
    (i) Approves each originator-seller permitted to sell or transfer 
assets, directly or indirectly, to an intermediate SPV from which an 
eligible ABCP conduit acquires ABS interests;
    (ii) Approves each intermediate SPV from which an eligible ABCP 
conduit is permitted to acquire ABS interests;
    (iii) Establishes criteria governing the ABS interests, and the 
securitized assets underlying the ABS interests, acquired by the ABCP 
conduit;
    (iv) Administers the ABCP conduit by monitoring the ABS interests 
acquired by the ABCP conduit and the assets supporting those ABS 
interests,

[[Page 1085]]

arranging for debt placement, compiling monthly reports, and ensuring 
compliance with the ABCP conduit documents and with the ABCP conduit's 
credit and investment policy; and
    (v) Maintains and adheres to policies and procedures for ensuring 
that the requirements in this paragraph (b) of this section have been 
met.
    (c) Originator-seller compliance with risk retention. The use of the 
risk retention option provided in this section by an ABCP conduit 
sponsor does not relieve the originator-seller that sponsors ABS 
interests acquired by an eligible ABCP conduit from such originator-
seller's obligation to comply with its own risk retention obligations 
under this part.
    (d) Disclosures--(1) Periodic disclosures to investors. An ABCP 
conduit sponsor relying upon this section shall provide, or cause to be 
provided, to each purchaser of ABCP, before or contemporaneously with 
the first sale of ABCP to such purchaser and at least monthly 
thereafter, to each holder of commercial paper issued by the ABCP 
conduit, in writing, each of the following items of information, which 
shall be as of a date not more than 60 days prior to date of first use 
with investors:
    (i) The name and form of organization of the regulated liquidity 
provider that provides liquidity coverage to the eligible ABCP conduit, 
including a description of the material terms of such liquidity 
coverage, and notice of any failure to fund.
    (ii) With respect to each ABS interest held by the ABCP conduit:
    (A) The asset class or brief description of the underlying 
securitized assets;
    (B) The standard industrial category code (SIC Code) for the 
originator-seller that will retain (or has retained) pursuant to this 
section an interest in the securitization transaction; and
    (C) A description of the percentage amount of risk retention 
pursuant to the rule by the originator-seller, and whether it is in the 
form of an eligible horizontal residual interest, vertical interest, or 
revolving pool securitization seller's interest, as applicable.
    (2) Disclosures to regulators regarding originator-sellers. An ABCP 
conduit sponsor relying upon this section shall provide, or cause to be 
provided, upon request, to the Commission and its appropriate Federal 
banking agency, if any, in writing, all of the information required to 
be provided to investors in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, and the 
name and form of organization of each originator-seller that will retain 
(or has retained) pursuant to this section an interest in the 
securitization transaction.
    (e) Sale or transfer of ABS interests between eligible ABCP 
conduits. At any time, an eligible ABCP conduit that acquired an ABS 
interest in accordance with the requirements set forth in this section 
may transfer, and another eligible ABCP conduit may acquire, such ABS 
interest, if the following conditions are satisfied:
    (1) The sponsors of both eligible ABCP conduits are in compliance 
with this section; and
    (2) The same regulated liquidity provider has entered into one or 
more legally binding commitments to provide 100 percent liquidity 
coverage to all the ABCP issued by both eligible ABCP conduits.
    (f) Duty to comply. (1) The ABCP conduit sponsor shall be 
responsible for compliance with this section.
    (2) An ABCP conduit sponsor relying on this section:
    (i) Shall maintain and adhere to policies and procedures that are 
reasonably designed to monitor compliance by each originator-seller 
which is satisfying a risk retention obligation in respect of ABS 
interests acquired by an eligible ABCP conduit with the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section; and
    (ii) In the event that the ABCP conduit sponsor determines that an 
originator-seller no longer complies with the requirements of paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section, shall:
    (A) Promptly notify the holders of the ABCP, and upon request, the 
Commission and its appropriate Federal banking agency, if any, in 
writing of:
    (1) The name and form of organization of any originator-seller that 
fails to retain risk in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section 
and the

[[Page 1086]]

amount of ABS interests issued by an intermediate SPV of such 
originator-seller and held by the ABCP conduit;
    (2) The name and form of organization of any originator-seller that 
hedges, directly or indirectly through an intermediate SPV, its risk 
retention in violation of paragraph (b)(1) of this section and the 
amount of ABS interests issued by an intermediate SPV of such 
originator-seller and held by the ABCP conduit; and
    (3) Any remedial actions taken by the ABCP conduit sponsor or other 
party with respect to such ABS interests; and
    (B) Take other appropriate steps pursuant to the requirements of 
paragraphs (b)(2)(iv) and (v) of this section which may include, as 
appropriate, curing any breach of the requirements in this section, or 
removing from the eligible ABCP conduit any ABS interest that does not 
comply with the requirements in this section.



Sec. 373.7  Commercial mortgage-backed securities.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definition shall apply:
    Special servicer means, with respect to any securitization of 
commercial real estate loans, any servicer that, upon the occurrence of 
one or more specified conditions in the servicing agreement, has the 
right to service one or more assets in the transaction.
    (b) Third-party purchaser. A sponsor may satisfy some or all of its 
risk retention requirements under Sec. 373.3 with respect to a 
securitization transaction if a third party (or any majority-owned 
affiliate thereof) purchases and holds for its own account an eligible 
horizontal residual interest in the issuing entity in the same form, 
amount, and manner as would be held by the sponsor under Sec. 373.4 and 
all of the following conditions are met:
    (1) Number of third-party purchasers. At any time, there are no more 
than two third-party purchasers of an eligible horizontal residual 
interest. If there are two third-party purchasers, each third-party 
purchaser's interest must be pari passu with the other third-party 
purchaser's interest.
    (2) Composition of collateral. The securitization transaction is 
collateralized solely by commercial real estate loans and servicing 
assets.
    (3) Source of funds. (i) Each third-party purchaser pays for the 
eligible horizontal residual interest in cash at the closing of the 
securitization transaction.
    (ii) No third-party purchaser obtains financing, directly or 
indirectly, for the purchase of such interest from any other person that 
is a party to, or an affiliate of a party to, the securitization 
transaction (including, but not limited to, the sponsor, depositor, or 
servicer other than a special servicer affiliated with the third-party 
purchaser), other than a person that is a party to the transaction 
solely by reason of being an investor.
    (4) Third-party review. Each third-party purchaser conducts an 
independent review of the credit risk of each securitized asset prior to 
the sale of the asset-backed securities in the securitization 
transaction that includes, at a minimum, a review of the underwriting 
standards, collateral, and expected cash flows of each commercial real 
estate loan that is collateral for the asset-backed securities.
    (5) Affiliation and control rights. (i) Except as provided in 
paragraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section, no third-party purchaser is 
affiliated with any party to the securitization transaction (including, 
but not limited to, the sponsor, depositor, or servicer) other than 
investors in the securitization transaction.
    (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section, a third-
party purchaser may be affiliated with:
    (A) The special servicer for the securitization transaction; or
    (B) One or more originators of the securitized assets, as long as 
the assets originated by the affiliated originator or originators 
collectively comprise less than 10 percent of the unpaid principal 
balance of the securitized assets included in the securitization 
transaction at the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the 
composition of the securitized assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction.

[[Page 1087]]

    (6) Operating Advisor. The underlying securitization transaction 
documents shall provide for the following:
    (i) The appointment of an operating advisor (the Operating Advisor) 
that:
    (A) Is not affiliated with other parties to the securitization 
transaction;
    (B) Does not directly or indirectly have any financial interest in 
the securitization transaction other than in fees from its role as 
Operating Advisor; and
    (C) Is required to act in the best interest of, and for the benefit 
of, investors as a collective whole;
    (ii) Standards with respect to the Operating Advisor's experience, 
expertise and financial strength to fulfill its duties and 
responsibilities under the applicable transaction documents over the 
life of the securitization transaction;
    (iii) The terms of the Operating Advisor's compensation with respect 
to the securitization transaction;
    (iv) When the eligible horizontal residual interest has been reduced 
by principal payments, realized losses, and appraisal reduction amounts 
(which reduction amounts are determined in accordance with the 
applicable transaction documents) to a principal balance of 25 percent 
or less of its initial principal balance, the special servicer for the 
securitized assets must consult with the Operating Advisor in connection 
with, and prior to, any material decision in connection with its 
servicing of the securitized assets, including, without limitation:
    (A) Any material modification of, or waiver with respect to, any 
provision of a loan agreement (including a mortgage, deed of trust, or 
other security agreement);
    (B) Foreclosure upon or comparable conversion of the ownership of a 
property; or
    (C) Any acquisition of a property.
    (v) The Operating Advisor shall have adequate and timely access to 
information and reports necessary to fulfill its duties under the 
transaction documents, including all reports made available to holders 
of ABS interests and third-party purchasers, and shall be responsible 
for:
    (A) Reviewing the actions of the special servicer;
    (B) Reviewing all reports provided by the special servicer to the 
issuing entity or any holder of ABS interests;
    (C) Reviewing for accuracy and consistency with the transaction 
documents calculations made by the special servicer; and
    (D) Issuing a report to investors (including any third-party 
purchasers) and the issuing entity on a periodic basis concerning:
    (1) Whether the Operating Advisor believes, in its sole discretion 
exercised in good faith, that the special servicer is operating in 
compliance with any standard required of the special servicer in the 
applicable transaction documents; and
    (2) Which, if any, standards the Operating Advisor believes, in its 
sole discretion exercised in good faith, the special servicer has failed 
to comply.
    (vi)(A) The Operating Advisor shall have the authority to recommend 
that the special servicer be replaced by a successor special servicer if 
the Operating Advisor determines, in its sole discretion exercised in 
good faith, that:
    (1) The special servicer has failed to comply with a standard 
required of the special servicer in the applicable transaction 
documents; and
    (2) Such replacement would be in the best interest of the investors 
as a collective whole; and
    (B) If a recommendation described in paragraph (b)(6)(vi)(A) of this 
section is made, the special servicer shall be replaced upon the 
affirmative vote of a majority of the outstanding principal balance of 
all ABS interests voting on the matter, with a minimum of a quorum of 
ABS interests voting on the matter. For purposes of such vote, the 
applicable transaction documents shall specify the quorum and may not 
specify a quorum of more than the holders of 20 percent of the 
outstanding principal balance of all ABS interests in the issuing 
entity, with such quorum including at least three ABS interest holders 
that are not affiliated with each other.
    (7) Disclosures. The sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, to 
potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of the 
asset-backed securities as part of the securitization transaction and, 
upon request, to the

[[Page 1088]]

Commission and its appropriate Federal banking agency, if any, the 
following disclosure in written form under the caption ``Credit Risk 
Retention'':
    (i) The name and form of organization of each initial third-party 
purchaser that acquired an eligible horizontal residual interest at the 
closing of a securitization transaction;
    (ii) A description of each initial third-party purchaser's 
experience in investing in commercial mortgage-backed securities;
    (iii) Any other information regarding each initial third-party 
purchaser or each initial third-party purchaser's retention of the 
eligible horizontal residual interest that is material to investors in 
light of the circumstances of the particular securitization transaction;
    (iv) The fair value (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of 
all of the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction and 
dollar amount (or corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which 
the ABS interests are issued, as applicable)) of the eligible horizontal 
residual interest that will be retained (or was retained) by each 
initial third-party purchaser, as well as the amount of the purchase 
price paid by each initial third-party purchaser for such interest;
    (v) The fair value (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of 
all of the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction and 
dollar amount (or corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which 
the ABS interests are issued, as applicable)) of the eligible horizontal 
residual interest in the securitization transaction that the sponsor 
would have retained pursuant to Sec. 373.4 if the sponsor had relied on 
retaining an eligible horizontal residual interest in that section to 
meet the requirements of Sec. 373.3 with respect to the transaction;
    (vi) A description of the material terms of the eligible horizontal 
residual interest retained by each initial third-party purchaser, 
including the same information as is required to be disclosed by 
sponsors retaining horizontal interests pursuant to Sec. 373.4;
    (vii) The material terms of the applicable transaction documents 
with respect to the Operating Advisor, including without limitation:
    (A) The name and form of organization of the Operating Advisor;
    (B) A description of any material conflict of interest or material 
potential conflict of interest between the Operating Advisor and any 
other party to the transaction;
    (C) The standards required by paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section 
and a description of how the Operating Advisor satisfies each of the 
standards; and
    (D) The terms of the Operating Advisor's compensation under 
paragraph (b)(6)(iii) of this section; and
    (viii) The representations and warranties concerning the securitized 
assets, a schedule of any securitized assets that are determined not to 
comply with such representations and warranties, and what factors were 
used to make the determination that such securitized assets should be 
included in the pool notwithstanding that the securitized assets did not 
comply with such representations and warranties, such as compensating 
factors or a determination that the exceptions were not material.
    (8) Hedging, transfer and pledging--(i) General rule. Except as set 
forth in paragraph (b)(8)(ii) of this section, each third-party 
purchaser and its affiliates must comply with the hedging and other 
restrictions in Sec. 373.12 as if it were the retaining sponsor with 
respect to the securitization transaction and had acquired the eligible 
horizontal residual interest pursuant to Sec. 373.4; provided that, the 
hedging and other restrictions in Sec. 373.12 shall not apply on or 
after the date that each CRE loan (as defined in Sec. 373.14) that 
serves as collateral for outstanding ABS interests has been defeased. 
For purposes of this section, a loan is deemed to be defeased if:
    (A) cash or cash equivalents of the types permitted for an eligible 
horizontal cash reserve account pursuant to Sec. 373.4 whose maturity 
corresponds to the remaining debt service obligations, have been pledged 
to the issuing entity as collateral for the loan and are in such amounts 
and payable at such times as necessary to timely generate cash 
sufficient to make all remaining

[[Page 1089]]

debt service payments due on such loan; and
    (B) the issuing entity has an obligation to release its lien on the 
loan.
    (ii) Exceptions--(A) Transfer by initial third-party purchaser or 
sponsor. An initial third-party purchaser that acquired an eligible 
horizontal residual interest at the closing of a securitization 
transaction in accordance with this section, or a sponsor that acquired 
an eligible horizontal residual interest at the closing of a 
securitization transaction in accordance with this section, may, on or 
after the date that is five years after the date of the closing of the 
securitization transaction, transfer that interest to a subsequent 
third-party purchaser that complies with paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(C) of this 
section. The initial third-party purchaser shall provide the sponsor 
with complete identifying information for the subsequent third-party 
purchaser.
    (B) Transfer by subsequent third-party purchaser. At any time, a 
subsequent third-party purchaser that acquired an eligible horizontal 
residual interest pursuant to this section may transfer its interest to 
a different third-party purchaser that complies with paragraph 
(b)(8)(ii)(C) of this section. The transferring third-party purchaser 
shall provide the sponsor with complete identifying information for the 
acquiring third-party purchaser.
    (C) Requirements applicable to subsequent third-party purchasers. A 
subsequent third-party purchaser is subject to all of the requirements 
of paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3) through (5), and (b)(8) of this section 
applicable to third-party purchasers, provided that obligations under 
paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3) through (5), and (b)(8) of this section that 
apply to initial third-party purchasers at or before the time of closing 
of the securitization transaction shall apply to successor third-party 
purchasers at or before the time of the transfer of the eligible 
horizontal residual interest to the successor third-party purchaser.
    (c) Duty to comply. (1) The retaining sponsor shall be responsible 
for compliance with this section by itself and for compliance by each 
initial or subsequent third-party purchaser that acquired an eligible 
horizontal residual interest in the securitization transaction.
    (2) A sponsor relying on this section:
    (i) Shall maintain and adhere to policies and procedures to monitor 
each third-party purchaser's compliance with the requirements of 
paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3) through (5), and (b)(8) of this section; and
    (ii) In the event that the sponsor determines that a third-party 
purchaser no longer complies with one or more of the requirements of 
paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3) through (5), or (b)(8) of this section, shall 
promptly notify, or cause to be notified, the holders of the ABS 
interests issued in the securitization transaction of such noncompliance 
by such third-party purchaser.



Sec. 373.8  Federal National Mortgage Association and Federal Home 
Loan Mortgage Corporation ABS.

    (a) In general. A sponsor satisfies its risk retention requirement 
under this part if the sponsor fully guarantees the timely payment of 
principal and interest on all ABS interests issued by the issuing entity 
in the securitization transaction and is:
    (1) The Federal National Mortgage Association or the Federal Home 
Loan Mortgage Corporation operating under the conservatorship or 
receivership of the Federal Housing Finance Agency pursuant to section 
1367 of the Federal Housing Enterprises Financial Safety and Soundness 
Act of 1992 (12 U.S.C. 4617) with capital support from the United 
States; or
    (2) Any limited-life regulated entity succeeding to the charter of 
either the Federal National Mortgage Association or the Federal Home 
Loan Mortgage Corporation pursuant to section 1367(i) of the Federal 
Housing Enterprises Financial Safety and Soundness Act of 1992 (12 
U.S.C. 4617(i)), provided that the entity is operating with capital 
support from the United States.
    (b) Certain provisions not applicable. The provisions of 
Sec. 373.12(b), (c), and (d) shall not apply to a sponsor described in 
paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section, its affiliates, or the issuing 
entity

[[Page 1090]]

with respect to a securitization transaction for which the sponsor has 
retained credit risk in accordance with the requirements of this 
section.
    (c) Disclosure. A sponsor relying on this section shall provide to 
investors, in written form under the caption ``Credit Risk Retention'' 
and, upon request, to the Federal Housing Finance Agency and the 
Commission, a description of the manner in which it has met the credit 
risk retention requirements of this part.



Sec. 373.9  Open market CLOs.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions shall apply:
    CLO means a special purpose entity that:
    (i) Issues debt and equity interests, and
    (ii) Whose assets consist primarily of loans that are securitized 
assets and servicing assets.
    CLO-eligible loan tranche means a term loan of a syndicated facility 
that meets the criteria set forth in paragraph (c) of this section.
    CLO manager means an entity that manages a CLO, which entity is 
registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act of 
1940, as amended (15 U.S.C. 80b-1 et seq.), or is an affiliate of such a 
registered investment adviser and itself is managed by such registered 
investment adviser.
    Commercial borrower means an obligor under a corporate credit 
obligation (including a loan).
    Initial loan syndication transaction means a transaction in which a 
loan is syndicated to a group of lenders.
    Lead arranger means, with respect to a CLO-eligible loan tranche, an 
institution that:
    (i) Is active in the origination, structuring and syndication of 
commercial loan transactions (as defined in Sec. 373.14) and has played 
a primary role in the structuring, underwriting and distribution on the 
primary market of the CLO-eligible loan tranche.
    (ii) Has taken an allocation of the funded portion of the syndicated 
credit facility under the terms of the transaction that includes the 
CLO-eligible loan tranche of at least 20 percent of the aggregate 
principal balance at origination, and no other member (or members 
affiliated with each other) of the syndication group that funded at 
origination has taken a greater allocation; and
    (iii) Is identified in the applicable agreement governing the CLO-
eligible loan tranche; represents therein to the holders of the CLO-
eligible loan tranche and to any holders of participation interests in 
such CLO-eligible loan tranche that such lead arranger satisfies the 
requirements of paragraph (i) of this definition and, at the time of 
initial funding of the CLO-eligible tranche, will satisfy the 
requirements of paragraph (ii) of this definition; further represents 
therein (solely for the purpose of assisting such holders to determine 
the eligibility of such CLO-eligible loan tranche to be held by an open 
market CLO) that in the reasonable judgment of such lead arranger, the 
terms of such CLO-eligible loan tranche are consistent with the 
requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section; and covenants 
therein to such holders that such lead arranger will fulfill the 
requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
    Open market CLO means a CLO:
    (i) Whose assets consist of senior, secured syndicated loans 
acquired by such CLO directly from the sellers thereof in open market 
transactions and of servicing assets,
    (ii) That is managed by a CLO manager, and
    (iii) That holds less than 50 percent of its assets, by aggregate 
outstanding principal amount, in loans syndicated by lead arrangers that 
are affiliates of the CLO or the CLO manager or originated by 
originators that are affiliates of the CLO or the CLO manager.
    Open market transaction means:
    (i) Either an initial loan syndication transaction or a secondary 
market transaction in which a seller offers senior, secured syndicated 
loans to prospective purchasers in the loan market on market terms on an 
arm's length basis, which prospective purchasers include, but are not 
limited to, entities that are not affiliated with the seller, or
    (ii) A reverse inquiry from a prospective purchaser of a senior, 
secured syndicated loan through a dealer in the

[[Page 1091]]

loan market to purchase a senior, secured syndicated loan to be sourced 
by the dealer in the loan market.
    Secondary market transaction means a purchase of a senior, secured 
syndicated loan not in connection with an initial loan syndication 
transaction but in the secondary market.
    Senior, secured syndicated loan means a loan made to a commercial 
borrower that:
    (i) Is not subordinate in right of payment to any other obligation 
for borrowed money of the commercial borrower,
    (ii) Is secured by a valid first priority security interest or lien 
in or on specified collateral securing the commercial borrower's 
obligations under the loan, and
    (iii) The value of the collateral subject to such first priority 
security interest or lien, together with other attributes of the obligor 
(including, without limitation, its general financial condition, ability 
to generate cash flow available for debt service and other demands for 
that cash flow), is adequate (in the commercially reasonable judgment of 
the CLO manager exercised at the time of investment) to repay the loan 
and to repay all other indebtedness of equal seniority secured by such 
first priority security interest or lien in or on the same collateral, 
and the CLO manager certifies, on or prior to each date that it acquires 
a loan constituting part of a new CLO-eligible tranche, that it has 
policies and procedures to evaluate the likelihood of repayment of loans 
acquired by the CLO and it has followed such policies and procedures in 
evaluating each CLO-eligible loan tranche.
    (b) In general. A sponsor satisfies the risk retention requirements 
of Sec. 373.3 with respect to an open market CLO transaction if:
    (1) The open market CLO does not acquire or hold any assets other 
than CLO-eligible loan tranches that meet the requirements of paragraph 
(c) of this section and servicing assets;
    (2) The governing documents of such open market CLO require that, at 
all times, the assets of the open market CLO consist of senior, secured 
syndicated loans that are CLO-eligible loan tranches and servicing 
assets;
    (3) The open market CLO does not invest in ABS interests or in 
credit derivatives other than hedging transactions that are servicing 
assets to hedge risks of the open market CLO;
    (4) All purchases of CLO-eligible loan tranches and other assets by 
the open market CLO issuing entity or through a warehouse facility used 
to accumulate the loans prior to the issuance of the CLO's ABS interests 
are made in open market transactions on an arms-length basis;
    (5) The CLO manager of the open market CLO is not entitled to 
receive any management fee or gain on sale at the time the open market 
CLO issues its ABS interests.
    (c) CLO-eligible loan tranche. To qualify as a CLO-eligible loan 
tranche, a term loan of a syndicated credit facility to a commercial 
borrower must have the following features:
    (1) A minimum of 5 percent of the face amount of the CLO-eligible 
loan tranche is retained by the lead arranger thereof until the earliest 
of the repayment, maturity, involuntary and unscheduled acceleration, 
payment default, or bankruptcy default of such CLO-eligible loan 
tranche, provided that such lead arranger complies with limitations on 
hedging, transferring and pledging in Sec. 373.12 with respect to the 
interest retained by the lead arranger.
    (2) Lender voting rights within the credit agreement and any 
intercreditor or other applicable agreements governing such CLO-eligible 
loan tranche are defined so as to give holders of the CLO-eligible loan 
tranche consent rights with respect to, at minimum, any material waivers 
and amendments of such applicable documents, including but not limited 
to, adverse changes to the calculation or payments of amounts due to the 
holders of the CLO-eligible tranche, alterations to pro rata provisions, 
changes to voting provisions, and waivers of conditions precedent; and
    (3) The pro rata provisions, voting provisions, and similar 
provisions applicable to the security associated with such CLO-eligible 
loan tranches under the CLO credit agreement and any intercreditor or 
other applicable agreements governing such CLO-eligible

[[Page 1092]]

loan tranches are not materially less advantageous to the holder(s) of 
such CLO-eligible tranche than the terms of other tranches of comparable 
seniority in the broader syndicated credit facility.
    (d) Disclosures. A sponsor relying on this section shall provide, or 
cause to be provided, to potential investors a reasonable period of time 
prior to the sale of the asset-backed securities in the securitization 
transaction and at least annually with respect to the information 
required by paragraph (d)(1) of this section and, upon request, to the 
Commission and its appropriate Federal banking agency, if any, the 
following disclosure in written form under the caption ``Credit Risk 
Retention'':
    (1) Open market CLOs. A complete list of every asset held by an open 
market CLO (or before the CLO's closing, in a warehouse facility in 
anticipation of transfer into the CLO at closing), including the 
following information:
    (i) The full legal name, Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) 
category code, and legal entity identifier (LEI) issued by a utility 
endorsed or otherwise governed by the Global LEI Regulatory Oversight 
Committee or the Global LEI Foundation (if an LEI has been obtained by 
the obligor) of the obligor of the loan or asset;
    (ii) The full name of the specific loan tranche held by the CLO;
    (iii) The face amount of the entire loan tranche held by the CLO, 
and the face amount of the portion thereof held by the CLO;
    (iv) The price at which the loan tranche was acquired by the CLO; 
and
    (v) For each loan tranche, the full legal name of the lead arranger 
subject to the sales and hedging restrictions of Sec. 373.12; and
    (2) CLO manager. The full legal name and form of organization of the 
CLO manager.



Sec. 373.10  Qualified tender option bonds.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions shall apply:
    Municipal security or municipal securities shall have the same 
meaning as the term ``municipal securities'' in Section 3(a)(29) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(29)) and any rules 
promulgated pursuant to such section.
    Qualified tender option bond entity means an issuing entity with 
respect to tender option bonds for which each of the following applies:
    (i) Such entity is collateralized solely by servicing assets and by 
municipal securities that have the same municipal issuer and the same 
underlying obligor or source of payment (determined without regard to 
any third-party credit enhancement), and such municipal securities are 
not subject to substitution.
    (ii) Such entity issues no securities other than:
    (A) A single class of tender option bonds with a preferred variable 
return payable out of capital that meets the requirements of paragraph 
(b) of this section, and
    (B) One or more residual equity interests that, in the aggregate, 
are entitled to all remaining income of the issuing entity.
    (C) The types of securities referred to in paragraphs (ii)(A) and 
(B) of this definition must constitute asset-backed securities.
    (iii) The municipal securities held as assets by such entity are 
issued in compliance with Section 103 of the Internal Revenue Code of 
1986, as amended (the ``IRS Code'', 26 U.S.C. 103), such that the 
interest payments made on those securities are excludable from the gross 
income of the owners under Section 103 of the IRS Code.
    (iv) The terms of all of the securities issued by the entity are 
structured so that all holders of such securities who are eligible to 
exclude interest received on such securities will be able to exclude 
that interest from gross income pursuant to Section 103 of the IRS Code 
or as ``exempt-interest dividends'' pursuant to Section 852(b)(5) of the 
IRS Code (26 U.S.C. 852(b)(5)) in the case of regulated investment 
companies under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.
    (v) Such entity has a legally binding commitment from a regulated 
liquidity provider as defined in Sec. 373.6(a), to provide a 100 percent 
guarantee or liquidity coverage with respect to all of the

[[Page 1093]]

issuing entity's outstanding tender option bonds.
    (vi) Such entity qualifies for monthly closing elections pursuant to 
IRS Revenue Procedure 2003-84, as amended or supplemented from time to 
time.
    Tender option bond means a security which has features which entitle 
the holders to tender such bonds to the issuing entity for purchase at 
any time upon no more than 397 days' notice, for a purchase price equal 
to the approximate amortized cost of the security, plus accrued 
interest, if any, at the time of tender.
    (b) Risk retention options. Notwithstanding anything in this 
section, the sponsor with respect to an issuance of tender option bonds 
may retain an eligible vertical interest or eligible horizontal residual 
interest, or any combination thereof, in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 373.4. In order to satisfy its risk retention 
requirements under this section, the sponsor with respect to an issuance 
of tender option bonds by a qualified tender option bond entity may 
retain:
    (1) An eligible vertical interest or an eligible horizontal residual 
interest, or any combination thereof, in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 373.4; or
    (2) An interest that meets the requirements set forth in paragraph 
(c) of this section; or
    (3) A municipal security that meets the requirements set forth in 
paragraph (d) of this section; or
    (4) Any combination of interests and securities described in 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section such that the sum of 
the percentages held in each form equals at least five.
    (c) Tender option termination event. The sponsor with respect to an 
issuance of tender option bonds by a qualified tender option bond entity 
may retain an interest that upon issuance meets the requirements of an 
eligible horizontal residual interest but that upon the occurrence of a 
``tender option termination event'' as defined in Section 4.01(5) of IRS 
Revenue Procedure 2003-84, as amended or supplemented from time to time 
will meet the requirements of an eligible vertical interest.
    (d) Retention of a municipal security outside of the qualified 
tender option bond entity. The sponsor with respect to an issuance of 
tender option bonds by a qualified tender option bond entity may satisfy 
its risk retention requirements under this Section by holding municipal 
securities from the same issuance of municipal securities deposited in 
the qualified tender option bond entity, the face value of which 
retained municipal securities is equal to 5 percent of the face value of 
the municipal securities deposited in the qualified tender option bond 
entity.
    (e) Disclosures. The sponsor shall provide, or cause to be provided, 
to potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of 
the asset-backed securities as part of the securitization transaction 
and, upon request, to the Commission and its appropriate Federal banking 
agency, if any, the following disclosure in written form under the 
caption ``Credit Risk Retention'':
    (1) The name and form of organization of the qualified tender option 
bond entity;
    (2) A description of the form and subordination features of such 
retained interest in accordance with the disclosure obligations in 
Sec. 373.4(c);
    (3) To the extent any portion of the retained interest is claimed by 
the sponsor as an eligible horizontal residual interest (including any 
interest held in compliance with Sec. 373.10(c)), the fair value of that 
interest (expressed as a percentage of the fair value of all of the ABS 
interests issued in the securitization transaction and as a dollar 
amount);
    (4) To the extent any portion of the retained interest is claimed by 
the sponsor as an eligible vertical interest (including any interest 
held in compliance with Sec. 373.10(c)), the percentage of ABS interests 
issued represented by the eligible vertical interest; and
    (5) To the extent any portion of the retained interest claimed by 
the sponsor is a municipal security held outside of the qualified tender 
option bond entity, the name and form of organization of the qualified 
tender option bond entity, the identity of the issuer of the municipal 
securities, the face value of the municipal securities deposited into 
the qualified tender option bond entity,

[[Page 1094]]

and the face value of the municipal securities retained by the sponsor 
or its majority-owned affiliates and subject to the transfer and hedging 
prohibition.
    (f) Prohibitions on Hedging and Transfer. The prohibitions on 
transfer and hedging set forth in Sec. 373.12, apply to any interests or 
municipal securities retained by the sponsor with respect to an issuance 
of tender option bonds by a qualified tender option bond entity pursuant 
to of this section.



                  Subpart C_Transfer of Risk Retention



Sec. 373.11  Allocation of risk retention to an originator.

    (a) In general. A sponsor choosing to retain an eligible vertical 
interest or an eligible horizontal residual interest (including an 
eligible horizontal cash reserve account), or combination thereof under 
Sec. 373.4, with respect to a securitization transaction may offset the 
amount of its risk retention requirements under Sec. 373.4 by the amount 
of the eligible interests, respectively, acquired by an originator of 
one or more of the securitized assets if:
    (1) At the closing of the securitization transaction:
    (i) The originator acquires the eligible interest from the sponsor 
and retains such interest in the same manner and proportion (as between 
horizontal and vertical interests) as the sponsor under Sec. 373.4, as 
such interest was held prior to the acquisition by the originator;
    (ii) The ratio of the percentage of eligible interests acquired and 
retained by the originator to the percentage of eligible interests 
otherwise required to be retained by the sponsor pursuant to Sec. 373.4, 
does not exceed the ratio of:
    (A) The unpaid principal balance of all the securitized assets 
originated by the originator; to
    (B) The unpaid principal balance of all the securitized assets in 
the securitization transaction;
    (iii) The originator acquires and retains at least 20 percent of the 
aggregate risk retention amount otherwise required to be retained by the 
sponsor pursuant to Sec. 373.4; and
    (iv) The originator purchases the eligible interests from the 
sponsor at a price that is equal, on a dollar-for-dollar basis, to the 
amount by which the sponsor's required risk retention is reduced in 
accordance with this section, by payment to the sponsor in the form of:
    (A) Cash; or
    (B) A reduction in the price received by the originator from the 
sponsor or depositor for the assets sold by the originator to the 
sponsor or depositor for inclusion in the pool of securitized assets.
    (2) Disclosures. In addition to the disclosures required pursuant to 
Sec. 373.4(c), the sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, to 
potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of the 
asset-backed securities as part of the securitization transaction and, 
upon request, to the Commission and its appropriate Federal banking 
agency, if any, in written form under the caption ``Credit Risk 
Retention'', the name and form of organization of any originator that 
will acquire and retain (or has acquired and retained) an interest in 
the transaction pursuant to this section, including a description of the 
form and amount (expressed as a percentage and dollar amount (or 
corresponding amount in the foreign currency in which the ABS interests 
are issued, as applicable)) and nature (e.g., senior or subordinated) of 
the interest, as well as the method of payment for such interest under 
paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section.
    (3) Hedging, transferring and pledging. The originator and each of 
its affiliates complies with the hedging and other restrictions in 
Sec. 373.12 with respect to the interests retained by the originator 
pursuant to this section as if it were the retaining sponsor and was 
required to retain the interest under subpart B of this part.
    (b) Duty to comply. (1) The retaining sponsor shall be responsible 
for compliance with this section.
    (2) A retaining sponsor relying on this section:
    (i) Shall maintain and adhere to policies and procedures that are 
reasonably designed to monitor the compliance by

[[Page 1095]]

each originator that is allocated a portion of the sponsor's risk 
retention obligations with the requirements in paragraphs (a)(1) and (3) 
of this section; and
    (ii) In the event the sponsor determines that any such originator no 
longer complies with any of the requirements in paragraphs (a)(1) and 
(3) of this section, shall promptly notify, or cause to be notified, the 
holders of the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction of 
such noncompliance by such originator.



Sec. 373.12  Hedging, transfer and financing prohibitions.

    (a) Transfer. Except as permitted by Sec. 373.7(b)(8), and subject 
to Sec. 373.5, a retaining sponsor may not sell or otherwise transfer 
any interest or assets that the sponsor is required to retain pursuant 
to subpart B of this part to any person other than an entity that is and 
remains a majority-owned affiliate of the sponsor and each such 
majority-owned affiliate shall be subject to the same restrictions.
    (b) Prohibited hedging by sponsor and affiliates. A retaining 
sponsor and its affiliates may not purchase or sell a security, or other 
financial instrument, or enter into an agreement, derivative or other 
position, with any other person if:
    (1) Payments on the security or other financial instrument or under 
the agreement, derivative, or position are materially related to the 
credit risk of one or more particular ABS interests that the retaining 
sponsor (or any of its majority-owned affiliates) is required to retain 
with respect to a securitization transaction pursuant to subpart B of 
this part or one or more of the particular securitized assets that 
collateralize the asset-backed securities issued in the securitization 
transaction; and
    (2) The security, instrument, agreement, derivative, or position in 
any way reduces or limits the financial exposure of the sponsor (or any 
of its majority-owned affiliates) to the credit risk of one or more of 
the particular ABS interests that the retaining sponsor (or any of its 
majority-owned affiliates) is required to retain with respect to a 
securitization transaction pursuant to subpart B of this part or one or 
more of the particular securitized assets that collateralize the asset-
backed securities issued in the securitization transaction.
    (c) Prohibited hedging by issuing entity. The issuing entity in a 
securitization transaction may not purchase or sell a security or other 
financial instrument, or enter into an agreement, derivative or 
position, with any other person if:
    (1) Payments on the security or other financial instrument or under 
the agreement, derivative or position are materially related to the 
credit risk of one or more particular ABS interests that the retaining 
sponsor for the transaction (or any of its majority-owned affiliates) is 
required to retain with respect to the securitization transaction 
pursuant to subpart B of this part; and
    (2) The security, instrument, agreement, derivative, or position in 
any way reduces or limits the financial exposure of the retaining 
sponsor (or any of its majority-owned affiliates) to the credit risk of 
one or more of the particular ABS interests that the sponsor (or any of 
its majority-owned affiliates) is required to retain pursuant to subpart 
B of this part.
    (d) Permitted hedging activities. The following activities shall not 
be considered prohibited hedging activities under paragraph (b) or (c) 
of this section:
    (1) Hedging the interest rate risk (which does not include the 
specific interest rate risk, known as spread risk, associated with the 
ABS interest that is otherwise considered part of the credit risk) or 
foreign exchange risk arising from one or more of the particular ABS 
interests required to be retained by the sponsor (or any of its 
majority-owned affiliates) under subpart B of this part or one or more 
of the particular securitized assets that underlie the asset-backed 
securities issued in the securitization transaction; or
    (2) Purchasing or selling a security or other financial instrument 
or entering into an agreement, derivative, or other position with any 
third party where payments on the security or other financial instrument 
or under the agreement, derivative, or position are based,

[[Page 1096]]

directly or indirectly, on an index of instruments that includes asset-
backed securities if:
    (i) Any class of ABS interests in the issuing entity that were 
issued in connection with the securitization transaction and that are 
included in the index represents no more than 10 percent of the dollar-
weighted average (or corresponding weighted average in the currency in 
which the ABS interests are issued, as applicable) of all instruments 
included in the index; and
    (ii) All classes of ABS interests in all issuing entities that were 
issued in connection with any securitization transaction in which the 
sponsor (or any of its majority-owned affiliates) is required to retain 
an interest pursuant to subpart B of this part and that are included in 
the index represent, in the aggregate, no more than 20 percent of the 
dollar-weighted average (or corresponding weighted average in the 
currency in which the ABS interests are issued, as applicable) of all 
instruments included in the index.
    (e) Prohibited non-recourse financing. Neither a retaining sponsor 
nor any of its affiliates may pledge as collateral for any obligation 
(including a loan, repurchase agreement, or other financing transaction) 
any ABS interest that the sponsor is required to retain with respect to 
a securitization transaction pursuant to subpart B of this part unless 
such obligation is with full recourse to the sponsor or affiliate, 
respectively.
    (f) Duration of the hedging and transfer restrictions--(1) General 
rule. Except as provided in paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the 
prohibitions on sale and hedging pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of 
this section shall expire on or after the date that is the latest of:
    (i) The date on which the total unpaid principal balance (if 
applicable) of the securitized assets that collateralize the 
securitization transaction has been reduced to 33 percent of the total 
unpaid principal balance of the securitized assets as of the cut-off 
date or similar date for establishing the composition of the securitized 
assets collateralizing the asset-backed securities issued pursuant to 
the securitization transaction;
    (ii) The date on which the total unpaid principal obligations under 
the ABS interests issued in the securitization transaction has been 
reduced to 33 percent of the total unpaid principal obligations of the 
ABS interests at closing of the securitization transaction; or
    (iii) Two years after the date of the closing of the securitization 
transaction.
    (2) Securitizations of residential mortgages. (i) If all of the 
assets that collateralize a securitization transaction subject to risk 
retention under this part are residential mortgages, the prohibitions on 
sale and hedging pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section 
shall expire on or after the date that is the later of:
    (A) Five years after the date of the closing of the securitization 
transaction; or
    (B) The date on which the total unpaid principal balance of the 
residential mortgages that collateralize the securitization transaction 
has been reduced to 25 percent of the total unpaid principal balance of 
such residential mortgages at the cut-off date or similar date for 
establishing the composition of the securitized assets collateralizing 
the asset-backed securities issued pursuant to the securitization 
transaction.
    (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this section, the 
prohibitions on sale and hedging pursuant to paragraphs (a) and (b) of 
this section shall expire with respect to the sponsor of a 
securitization transaction described in paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this 
section on or after the date that is seven years after the date of the 
closing of the securitization transaction.
    (3) Conservatorship or receivership of sponsor. A conservator or 
receiver of the sponsor (or any other person holding risk retention 
pursuant to this part) of a securitization transaction is permitted to 
sell or hedge any economic interest in the securitization transaction if 
the conservator or receiver has been appointed pursuant to any provision 
of federal or State law (or regulation promulgated thereunder) that 
provides for the appointment of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, or an agency or instrumentality

[[Page 1097]]

of the United States or of a State as conservator or receiver, including 
without limitation any of the following authorities:
    (i) 12 U.S.C. 1811;
    (ii) 12 U.S.C. 1787;
    (iii) 12 U.S.C. 4617; or
    (iv) 12 U.S.C. 5382.
    (4) Revolving pool securitizations. The provisions of paragraphs 
(f)(1) and (2) are not available to sponsors of revolving pool 
securitizations with respect to the forms of risk retention specified in 
Sec. 373.5.



                   Subpart D_Exceptions and Exemptions



Sec. 373.13  Exemption for qualified residential mortgages.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions shall apply:
    Currently performing means the borrower in the mortgage transaction 
is not currently thirty (30) days or more past due, in whole or in part, 
on the mortgage transaction.
    Qualified residential mortgage means a ``qualified mortgage'' as 
defined in section 129C of the Truth in Lending Act (15 U.S.C.1639c) and 
regulations issued thereunder, as amended from time to time.
    (b) Exemption. A sponsor shall be exempt from the risk retention 
requirements in subpart B of this part with respect to any 
securitization transaction, if:
    (1) All of the assets that collateralize the asset-backed securities 
are qualified residential mortgages or servicing assets;
    (2) None of the assets that collateralize the asset-backed 
securities are asset-backed securities;
    (3) As of the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the 
composition of the securitized assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction, each 
qualified residential mortgage collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities is currently performing; and
    (4)(i) The depositor with respect to the securitization transaction 
certifies that it has evaluated the effectiveness of its internal 
supervisory controls with respect to the process for ensuring that all 
assets that collateralize the asset-backed security are qualified 
residential mortgages or servicing assets and has concluded that its 
internal supervisory controls are effective; and
    (ii) The evaluation of the effectiveness of the depositor's internal 
supervisory controls must be performed, for each issuance of an asset-
backed security in reliance on this section, as of a date within 60 days 
of the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the composition of 
the asset pool collateralizing such asset-backed security; and
    (iii) The sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, a copy of the 
certification described in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section to 
potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of 
asset-backed securities in the issuing entity, and, upon request, to the 
Commission and its appropriate Federal banking agency, if any.
    (c) Repurchase of loans subsequently determined to be non-qualified 
after closing. A sponsor that has relied on the exemption provided in 
paragraph (b) of this section with respect to a securitization 
transaction shall not lose such exemption with respect to such 
transaction if, after closing of the securitization transaction, it is 
determined that one or more of the residential mortgage loans 
collateralizing the asset-backed securities does not meet all of the 
criteria to be a qualified residential mortgage provided that:
    (1) The depositor complied with the certification requirement set 
forth in paragraph (b)(4) of this section;
    (2) The sponsor repurchases the loan(s) from the issuing entity at a 
price at least equal to the remaining aggregate unpaid principal balance 
and accrued interest on the loan(s) no later than 90 days after the 
determination that the loans do not satisfy the requirements to be a 
qualified residential mortgage; and
    (3) The sponsor promptly notifies, or causes to be notified, the 
holders of the asset-backed securities issued in the securitization 
transaction of any loan(s) included in such securitization transaction 
that is (or are) required to be repurchased by the sponsor pursuant

[[Page 1098]]

to paragraph (c)(2) of this section, including the amount of such 
repurchased loan(s) and the cause for such repurchase.



Sec. 373.14  Definitions applicable to qualifying commercial loans,
qualifying commercial real estate loans, and qualifying automobile
loans.

    The following definitions apply for purposes of Secs. 373.15 through 
373.18:
    Appraisal Standards Board means the board of the Appraisal 
Foundation that develops, interprets, and amends the Uniform Standards 
of Professional Appraisal Practice (USPAP), establishing generally 
accepted standards for the appraisal profession.
    Automobile loan:
    (1) Means any loan to an individual to finance the purchase of, and 
that is secured by a first lien on, a passenger car or other passenger 
vehicle, such as a minivan, van, sport-utility vehicle, pickup truck, or 
similar light truck for personal, family, or household use; and
    (2) Does not include any:
    (i) Loan to finance fleet sales;
    (ii) Personal cash loan secured by a previously purchased 
automobile;
    (iii) Loan to finance the purchase of a commercial vehicle or farm 
equipment that is not used for personal, family, or household purposes;
    (iv) Lease financing;
    (v) Loan to finance the purchase of a vehicle with a salvage title; 
or
    (vi) Loan to finance the purchase of a vehicle intended to be used 
for scrap or parts.
    Combined loan-to-value (CLTV) ratio means, at the time of 
origination, the sum of the principal balance of a first-lien mortgage 
loan on the property, plus the principal balance of any junior-lien 
mortgage loan that, to the creditor's knowledge, would exist at the 
closing of the transaction and that is secured by the same property, 
divided by:
    (1) For acquisition funding, the lesser of the purchase price or the 
estimated market value of the real property based on an appraisal that 
meets the requirements set forth in Sec. 373.17(a)(2)(ii); or
    (2) For refinancing, the estimated market value of the real property 
based on an appraisal that meets the requirements set forth in 
Sec. 373.17(a)(2)(ii).
    Commercial loan means a secured or unsecured loan to a company or an 
individual for business purposes, other than any:
    (1) Loan to purchase or refinance a one-to-four family residential 
property;
    (2) Commercial real estate loan.
    Commercial real estate (CRE) loan means:
    (1) A loan secured by a property with five or more single family 
units, or by nonfarm nonresidential real property, the primary source 
(50 percent or more) of repayment for which is expected to be:
    (i) The proceeds of the sale, refinancing, or permanent financing of 
the property; or
    (ii) Rental income associated with the property;
    (2) Loans secured by improved land if the obligor owns the fee 
interest in the land and the land is leased to a third party who owns 
all improvements on the land, and the improvements are nonresidential or 
residential with five or more single family units; and
    (3) Does not include:
    (i) A land development and construction loan (including 1- to 4-
family residential or commercial construction loans);
    (ii) Any other land loan; or
    (iii) An unsecured loan to a developer.
    Debt service coverage (DSC) ratio means:
    (1) For qualifying leased CRE loans, qualifying multi-family loans, 
and other CRE loans:
    (i) The annual NOI less the annual replacement reserve of the CRE 
property at the time of origination of the CRE loan(s) divided by
    (ii) The sum of the borrower's annual payments for principal and 
interest (calculated at the fully-indexed rate) on any debt obligation.
    (2) For commercial loans:
    (i) The borrower's EBITDA as of the most recently completed fiscal 
year divided by
    (ii) The sum of the borrower's annual payments for principal and 
interest on all debt obligations.

[[Page 1099]]

    Debt to income (DTI) ratio means the borrower's total debt, 
including the monthly amount due on the automobile loan, divided by the 
borrower's monthly income.
    Earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization 
(EBITDA) means the annual income of a business before expenses for 
interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization are deducted, as 
determined in accordance with GAAP.
    Environmental risk assessment means a process for determining 
whether a property is contaminated or exposed to any condition or 
substance that could result in contamination that has an adverse effect 
on the market value of the property or the realization of the collateral 
value.
    First lien means a lien or encumbrance on property that has priority 
over all other liens or encumbrances on the property.
    Junior lien means a lien or encumbrance on property that is lower in 
priority relative to other liens or encumbrances on the property.
    Leverage ratio means the borrower's total debt divided by the 
borrower's EBITDA.
    Loan-to-value (LTV) ratio means, at the time of origination, the 
principal balance of a first-lien mortgage loan on the property divided 
by:
    (1) For acquisition funding, the lesser of the purchase price or the 
estimated market value of the real property based on an appraisal that 
meets the requirements set forth in Sec. 373.17(a)(2)(ii); or
    (2) For refinancing, the estimated market value of the real property 
based on an appraisal that meets the requirements set forth in 
Sec. 373.17(a)(2)(ii).
    Model year means the year determined by the manufacturer and 
reflected on the vehicle's Motor Vehicle Title as part of the vehicle 
description.
    Net operating income (NOI) refers to the income a CRE property 
generates for the owner after all expenses have been deducted for 
federal income tax purposes, except for depreciation, debt service 
expenses, and federal and state income taxes, and excluding any unusual 
and nonrecurring items of income.
    Operating affiliate means an affiliate of a borrower that is a 
lessor or similar party with respect to the commercial real estate 
securing the loan.
    Payments-in-kind means payments of accrued interest that are not 
paid in cash when due, and instead are paid by increasing the principal 
balance of the loan or by providing equity in the borrowing company.
    Purchase money security interest means a security interest in 
property that secures the obligation of the obligor incurred as all or 
part of the price of the property.
    Purchase price means the amount paid by the borrower for the vehicle 
net of any incentive payments or manufacturer cash rebates.
    Qualified tenant means:
    (1) A tenant with a lease who has satisfied all obligations with 
respect to the property in a timely manner; or
    (2) A tenant who originally had a lease that subsequently expired 
and currently is leasing the property on a month-to-month basis, has 
occupied the property for at least three years prior to the date of 
origination, and has satisfied all obligations with respect to the 
property in a timely manner.
    Qualifying leased CRE loan means a CRE loan secured by commercial 
nonfarm real property, other than a multi-family property or a hotel, 
inn, or similar property:
    (1) That is occupied by one or more qualified tenants pursuant to a 
lease agreement with a term of no less than one (1) month; and
    (2) Where no more than 20 percent of the aggregate gross revenue of 
the property is payable from one or more tenants who:
    (i) Are subject to a lease that will terminate within six months 
following the date of origination; or
    (ii) Are not qualified tenants.
    Qualifying multi-family loan means a CRE loan secured by any 
residential property (excluding a hotel, motel, inn, hospital, nursing 
home, or other similar facility where dwellings are not leased to 
residents):
    (1) That consists of five or more dwelling units (including 
apartment buildings, condominiums, cooperatives

[[Page 1100]]

and other similar structures) primarily for residential use; and
    (2) Where at least 75 percent of the NOI is derived from residential 
rents and tenant amenities (including income from parking garages, 
health or swim clubs, and dry cleaning), and not from other commercial 
uses.
    Rental income means:
    (1) Income derived from a lease or other occupancy agreement between 
the borrower or an operating affiliate of the borrower and a party which 
is not an affiliate of the borrower for the use of real property or 
improvements serving as collateral for the applicable loan; and
    (2) Other income derived from hotel, motel, dormitory, nursing home, 
assisted living, mini-storage warehouse or similar properties that are 
used primarily by parties that are not affiliates or employees of the 
borrower or its affiliates.
    Replacement reserve means the monthly capital replacement or 
maintenance amount based on the property type, age, construction and 
condition of the property that is adequate to maintain the physical 
condition and NOI of the property.
    Salvage title means a form of vehicle title branding, which notes 
that the vehicle has been severely damaged and/or deemed a total loss 
and uneconomical to repair by an insurance company that paid a claim on 
the vehicle.
    Total debt, with respect to a borrower, means:
    (1) In the case of an automobile loan, the sum of:
    (i) All monthly housing payments (rent- or mortgage-related, 
including property taxes, insurance and home owners association fees); 
and
    (ii) Any of the following that is dependent upon the borrower's 
income for payment:
    (A) Monthly payments on other debt and lease obligations, such as 
credit card loans or installment loans, including the monthly amount due 
on the automobile loan;
    (B) Estimated monthly amortizing payments for any term debt, debts 
with other than monthly payments and debts not in repayment (such as 
deferred student loans, interest-only loans); and
    (C) Any required monthly alimony, child support or court-ordered 
payments; and
    (2) In the case of a commercial loan, the outstanding balance of all 
long-term debt (obligations that have a remaining maturity of more than 
one year) and the current portion of all debt that matures in one year 
or less.
    Total liabilities ratio means the borrower's total liabilities 
divided by the sum of the borrower's total liabilities and equity, less 
the borrower's intangible assets, with each component determined in 
accordance with GAAP.
    Trade-in allowance means the amount a vehicle purchaser is given as 
a credit at the purchase of a vehicle for the fair exchange of the 
borrower's existing vehicle to compensate the dealer for some portion of 
the vehicle purchase price, not to exceed the highest trade-in value of 
the existing vehicle, as determined by a nationally recognized 
automobile pricing agency and based on the manufacturer, year, model, 
features, mileage, and condition of the vehicle, less the payoff balance 
of any outstanding debt collateralized by the existing vehicle.
    Uniform Standards of Professional Appraisal Practice (USPAP) means 
generally accepted standards for professional appraisal practice issued 
by the Appraisal Standards Board of the Appraisal Foundation.



Sec. 373.15  Qualifying commercial loans, commercial real estate
loans, and automobile loans.

    (a) General exception for qualifying assets. Commercial loans, 
commercial real estate loans, and automobile loans that are securitized 
through a securitization transaction shall be subject to a 0 percent 
risk retention requirement under subpart B, provided that the following 
conditions are met:
    (1) The assets meet the underwriting standards set forth in 
Secs. 373.16 (qualifying commercial loans), 373.17 (qualifying CRE 
loans), or 373.18 (qualifying automobile loans) of this part, as 
applicable;
    (2) The securitization transaction is collateralized solely by loans 
of the same asset class and by servicing assets;

[[Page 1101]]

    (3) The securitization transaction does not permit reinvestment 
periods; and
    (4) The sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, to potential 
investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of asset-backed 
securities of the issuing entity, and, upon request, to the Commission, 
and to its appropriate Federal banking agency, if any, in written form 
under the caption ``Credit Risk Retention'', a description of the manner 
in which the sponsor determined the aggregate risk retention requirement 
for the securitization transaction after including qualifying commercial 
loans, qualifying CRE loans, or qualifying automobile loans with 0 
percent risk retention.
    (b) Risk retention requirement. For any securitization transaction 
described in paragraph (a) of this section, the percentage of risk 
retention required under Sec. 373.3(a) is reduced by the percentage 
evidenced by the ratio of the unpaid principal balance of the qualifying 
commercial loans, qualifying CRE loans, or qualifying automobile loans 
(as applicable) to the total unpaid principal balance of commercial 
loans, CRE loans, or automobile loans (as applicable) that are included 
in the pool of assets collateralizing the asset-backed securities issued 
pursuant to the securitization transaction (the qualifying asset ratio); 
provided that:
    (1) The qualifying asset ratio is measured as of the cut-off date or 
similar date for establishing the composition of the securitized assets 
collateralizing the asset-backed securities issued pursuant to the 
securitization transaction;
    (2) If the qualifying asset ratio would exceed 50 percent, the 
qualifying asset ratio shall be deemed to be 50 percent; and
    (3) The disclosure required by paragraph (a)(4) of this section also 
includes descriptions of the qualifying commercial loans, qualifying CRE 
loans, and qualifying automobile loans (qualifying assets) and 
descriptions of the assets that are not qualifying assets, and the 
material differences between the group of qualifying assets and the 
group of assets that are not qualifying assets with respect to the 
composition of each group's loan balances, loan terms, interest rates, 
borrower credit information, and characteristics of any loan collateral.
    (c) Exception for securitizations of qualifying assets only. 
Notwithstanding other provisions of this section, the risk retention 
requirements of subpart B of this part shall not apply to securitization 
transactions where the transaction is collateralized solely by servicing 
assets and either qualifying commercial loans, qualifying CRE loans, or 
qualifying automobile loans.
    (d) Record maintenance. A sponsor must retain the disclosures 
required in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section and the 
certifications required in Secs. 373.16(a)(8), 373.17(a)(10), and 
373.18(a)(8), as applicable, in its records until three years after all 
ABS interests issued in the securitization are no longer outstanding. 
The sponsor must provide the disclosures and certifications upon request 
to the Commission and the sponsor's appropriate Federal banking agency, 
if any.



Sec. 373.16  Underwriting standards for qualifying commercial loans.

    (a) Underwriting, product and other standards. (1) Prior to 
origination of the commercial loan, the originator:
    (i) Verified and documented the financial condition of the borrower:
    (A) As of the end of the borrower's two most recently completed 
fiscal years; and
    (B) During the period, if any, since the end of its most recently 
completed fiscal year;
    (ii) Conducted an analysis of the borrower's ability to service its 
overall debt obligations during the next two years, based on reasonable 
projections;
    (iii) Determined that, based on the previous two years' actual 
performance, the borrower had:
    (A) A total liabilities ratio of 50 percent or less;
    (B) A leverage ratio of 3.0 or less; and
    (C) A DSC ratio of 1.5 or greater;
    (iv) Determined that, based on the two years of projections, which 
include the new debt obligation, following the closing date of the loan, 
the borrower will have:
    (A) A total liabilities ratio of 50 percent or less;
    (B) A leverage ratio of 3.0 or less; and
    (C) A DSC ratio of 1.5 or greater.

[[Page 1102]]

    (2) Prior to, upon or promptly following the inception of the loan, 
the originator:
    (i) If the loan is originated on a secured basis, obtains a 
perfected security interest (by filing, title notation or otherwise) or, 
in the case of real property, a recorded lien, on all of the property 
pledged to collateralize the loan; and
    (ii) If the loan documents indicate the purpose of the loan is to 
finance the purchase of tangible or intangible property, or to refinance 
such a loan, obtains a first lien on the property.
    (3) The loan documentation for the commercial loan includes 
covenants that:
    (i) Require the borrower to provide to the servicer of the 
commercial loan the borrower's financial statements and supporting 
schedules on an ongoing basis, but not less frequently than quarterly;
    (ii) Prohibit the borrower from retaining or entering into a debt 
arrangement that permits payments-in-kind;
    (iii) Impose limits on:
    (A) The creation or existence of any other security interest or lien 
with respect to any of the borrower's property that serves as collateral 
for the loan;
    (B) The transfer of any of the borrower's assets that serve as 
collateral for the loan; and
    (C) Any change to the name, location or organizational structure of 
the borrower, or any other party that pledges collateral for the loan;
    (iv) Require the borrower and any other party that pledges 
collateral for the loan to:
    (A) Maintain insurance that protects against loss on the collateral 
for the commercial loan at least up to the amount of the loan, and that 
names the originator or any subsequent holder of the loan as an 
additional insured or loss payee;
    (B) Pay taxes, charges, fees, and claims, where non-payment might 
give rise to a lien on any collateral;
    (C) Take any action required to perfect or protect the security 
interest and first lien (as applicable) of the originator or any 
subsequent holder of the loan in any collateral for the commercial loan 
or the priority thereof, and to defend any collateral against claims 
adverse to the lender's interest;
    (D) Permit the originator or any subsequent holder of the loan, and 
the servicer of the loan, to inspect any collateral for the commercial 
loan and the books and records of the borrower; and
    (E) Maintain the physical condition of any collateral for the 
commercial loan.
    (4) Loan payments required under the loan agreement are:
    (i) Based on level monthly payments of principal and interest (at 
the fully indexed rate) that fully amortize the debt over a term that 
does not exceed five years from the date of origination; and
    (ii) To be made no less frequently than quarterly over a term that 
does not exceed five years.
    (5) The primary source of repayment for the loan is revenue from the 
business operations of the borrower.
    (6) The loan was funded within the six (6) months prior to the cut-
off date or similar date for establishing the composition of the 
securitized assets collateralizing the asset-backed securities issued 
pursuant to the securitization transaction.
    (7) At the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the 
composition of the securitized assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction, all 
payments due on the loan are contractually current.
    (8)(i) The depositor of the asset-backed security certifies that it 
has evaluated the effectiveness of its internal supervisory controls 
with respect to the process for ensuring that all qualifying commercial 
loans that collateralize the asset-backed security and that reduce the 
sponsor's risk retention requirement under Sec. 373.15 meet all of the 
requirements set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (7) of this section 
and has concluded that its internal supervisory controls are effective;
    (ii) The evaluation of the effectiveness of the depositor's internal 
supervisory controls referenced in paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section 
shall be performed, for each issuance of an asset-backed security, as of 
a date within 60 days of the cut-off date or similar date

[[Page 1103]]

for establishing the composition of the asset pool collateralizing such 
asset-backed security; and
    (iii) The sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, a copy of the 
certification described in paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section to 
potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of 
asset-backed securities in the issuing entity, and, upon request, to its 
appropriate Federal banking agency, if any.
    (b) Cure or buy-back requirement. If a sponsor has relied on the 
exception provided in Sec. 373.15 with respect to a qualifying 
commercial loan and it is subsequently determined that the loan did not 
meet all of the requirements set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (7) 
of this section, the sponsor shall not lose the benefit of the exception 
with respect to the commercial loan if the depositor complied with the 
certification requirement set forth in paragraph (a)(8) of this section 
and:
    (1) The failure of the loan to meet any of the requirements set 
forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (7) of this section is not material; 
or
    (2) No later than 90 days after the determination that the loan does 
not meet one or more of the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(7) of this section, the sponsor:
    (i) Effectuates cure, establishing conformity of the loan to the 
unmet requirements as of the date of cure; or
    (ii) Repurchases the loan(s) from the issuing entity at a price at 
least equal to the remaining principal balance and accrued interest on 
the loan(s) as of the date of repurchase.
    (3) If the sponsor cures or repurchases pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section, the sponsor must promptly notify, or cause to be 
notified, the holders of the asset-backed securities issued in the 
securitization transaction of any loan(s) included in such 
securitization transaction that is required to be cured or repurchased 
by the sponsor pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this section, including 
the principal amount of such loan(s) and the cause for such cure or 
repurchase.



Sec. 373.17  Underwriting standards for qualifying CRE loans.

    (a) Underwriting, product and other standards. (1) The CRE loan must 
be secured by the following:
    (i) An enforceable first lien, documented and recorded appropriately 
pursuant to applicable law, on the commercial real estate and 
improvements;
    (ii)(A) An assignment of:
    (1) Leases and rents and other occupancy agreements related to the 
commercial real estate or improvements or the operation thereof for 
which the borrower or an operating affiliate is a lessor or similar 
party and all payments under such leases and occupancy agreements; and
    (2) All franchise, license and concession agreements related to the 
commercial real estate or improvements or the operation thereof for 
which the borrower or an operating affiliate is a lessor, licensor, 
concession granter or similar party and all payments under such other 
agreements, whether the assignments described in this paragraph 
(a)(1)(ii)(A)(2) are absolute or are stated to be made to the extent 
permitted by the agreements governing the applicable franchise, license 
or concession agreements;
    (B) An assignment of all other payments due to the borrower or due 
to any operating affiliate in connection with the operation of the 
property described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section; and
    (C) The right to enforce the agreements described in paragraph 
(a)(1)(ii)(A) of this section and the agreements under which payments 
under paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section are due against, and 
collect amounts due from, each lessee, occupant or other obligor whose 
payments were assigned pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) or (B) of 
this section upon a breach by the borrower of any of the terms of, or 
the occurrence of any other event of default (however denominated) 
under, the loan documents relating to such CRE loan; and
    (iii) A security interest:
    (A) In all interests of the borrower and any applicable operating 
affiliate in all tangible and intangible personal property of any kind, 
in or used in the

[[Page 1104]]

operation of or in connection with, pertaining to, arising from, or 
constituting, any of the collateral described in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) or 
(ii) of this section; and
    (B) In the form of a perfected security interest if the security 
interest in such property can be perfected by the filing of a financing 
statement, fixture filing, or similar document pursuant to the law 
governing the perfection of such security interest;
    (2) Prior to origination of the CRE loan, the originator:
    (i) Verified and documented the current financial condition of the 
borrower and each operating affiliate;
    (ii) Obtained a written appraisal of the real property securing the 
loan that:
    (A) Had an effective date not more than six months prior to the 
origination date of the loan by a competent and appropriately State-
certified or State-licensed appraiser;
    (B) Conforms to generally accepted appraisal standards as evidenced 
by the USPAP and the appraisal requirements \1\ of the Federal banking 
agencies; and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ 12 CFR part 34, subpart C (OCC); 12 CFR part 208, subpart E, and 
12 CFR part 225, subpart G (Board); and 12 CFR part 323 (FDIC).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Provides an ``as is'' opinion of the market value of the real 
property, which includes an income approach; \2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ See USPAP, Standard 1.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) Qualified the borrower for the CRE loan based on a monthly 
payment amount derived from level monthly payments consisting of both 
principal and interest (at the fully-indexed rate) over the term of the 
loan, not exceeding 25 years, or 30 years for a qualifying multi-family 
property;
    (iv) Conducted an environmental risk assessment to gain 
environmental information about the property securing the loan and took 
appropriate steps to mitigate any environmental liability determined to 
exist based on this assessment;
    (v) Conducted an analysis of the borrower's ability to service its 
overall debt obligations during the next two years, based on reasonable 
projections (including operating income projections for the property);
    (vi)(A) Determined that based on the two years' actual performance 
immediately preceding the origination of the loan, the borrower would 
have had:
    (1) A DSC ratio of 1.5 or greater, if the loan is a qualifying 
leased CRE loan, net of any income derived from a tenant(s) who is not a 
qualified tenant(s);
    (2) A DSC ratio of 1.25 or greater, if the loan is a qualifying 
multi-family property loan; or
    (3) A DSC ratio of 1.7 or greater, if the loan is any other type of 
CRE loan;
    (B) If the borrower did not own the property for any part of the 
last two years prior to origination, the calculation of the DSC ratio, 
for purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(vi)(A) of this section, shall include 
the property's operating income for any portion of the two-year period 
during which the borrower did not own the property;
    (vii) Determined that, based on two years of projections, which 
include the new debt obligation, following the origination date of the 
loan, the borrower will have:
    (A) A DSC ratio of 1.5 or greater, if the loan is a qualifying 
leased CRE loan, net of any income derived from a tenant(s) who is not a 
qualified tenant(s);
    (B) A DSC ratio of 1.25 or greater, if the loan is a qualifying 
multi-family property loan; or
    (C) A DSC ratio of 1.7 or greater, if the loan is any other type of 
CRE loan.
    (3) The loan documentation for the CRE loan includes covenants that:
    (i) Require the borrower to provide the borrower's financial 
statements and supporting schedules to the servicer on an ongoing basis, 
but not less frequently than quarterly, including information on 
existing, maturing and new leasing or rent-roll activity for the 
property securing the loan, as appropriate; and
    (ii) Impose prohibitions on:
    (A) The creation or existence of any other security interest with 
respect to the collateral for the CRE loan described in paragraphs 
(a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(ii)(A) of this section, except as provided in 
paragraph (a)(4) of this section;
    (B) The transfer of any collateral for the CRE loan described in 
paragraph

[[Page 1105]]

(a)(1)(i) or (a)(1)(ii)(A) of this section or of any other collateral 
consisting of fixtures, furniture, furnishings, machinery or equipment 
other than any such fixture, furniture, furnishings, machinery or 
equipment that is obsolete or surplus; and
    (C) Any change to the name, location or organizational structure of 
any borrower, operating affiliate or other pledgor unless such borrower, 
operating affiliate or other pledgor shall have given the holder of the 
loan at least 30 days advance notice and, pursuant to applicable law 
governing perfection and priority, the holder of the loan is able to 
take all steps necessary to continue its perfection and priority during 
such 30-day period.
    (iii) Require each borrower and each operating affiliate to:
    (A) Maintain insurance that protects against loss on collateral for 
the CRE loan described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section for an 
amount no less than the replacement cost of the property improvements, 
and names the originator or any subsequent holder of the loan as an 
additional insured or lender loss payee;
    (B) Pay taxes, charges, fees, and claims, where non-payment might 
give rise to a lien on collateral for the CRE loan described in 
paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section;
    (C) Take any action required to:
    (1) Protect the security interest and the enforceability and 
priority thereof in the collateral described in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and 
(a)(1)(ii)(A) of this section and defend such collateral against claims 
adverse to the originator's or any subsequent holder's interest; and
    (2) Perfect the security interest of the originator or any 
subsequent holder of the loan in any other collateral for the CRE loan 
to the extent that such security interest is required by this section to 
be perfected;
    (D) Permit the originator or any subsequent holder of the loan, and 
the servicer, to inspect any collateral for the CRE loan and the books 
and records of the borrower or other party relating to any collateral 
for the CRE loan;
    (E) Maintain the physical condition of collateral for the CRE loan 
described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section;
    (F) Comply with all environmental, zoning, building code, licensing 
and other laws, regulations, agreements, covenants, use restrictions, 
and proffers applicable to collateral for the CRE loan described in 
paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section;
    (G) Comply with leases, franchise agreements, condominium 
declarations, and other documents and agreements relating to the 
operation of collateral for the CRE loan described in paragraph 
(a)(1)(i) of this section, and to not modify any material terms and 
conditions of such agreements over the term of the loan without the 
consent of the originator or any subsequent holder of the loan, or the 
servicer; and
    (H) Not materially alter collateral for the CRE loan described in 
paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section without the consent of the 
originator or any subsequent holder of the loan, or the servicer.
    (4) The loan documentation for the CRE loan prohibits the borrower 
and each operating affiliate from obtaining a loan secured by a junior 
lien on collateral for the CRE loan described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) or 
(a)(1)(ii)(A) of this section, unless:
    (i) The sum of the principal amount of such junior lien loan, plus 
the principal amount of all other loans secured by collateral described 
in paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (a)(1)(ii)(A) of this section, does not exceed 
the applicable CLTV ratio in paragraph (a)(5) of this section, based on 
the appraisal at origination of such junior lien loan; or
    (ii) Such loan is a purchase money obligation that financed the 
acquisition of machinery or equipment and the borrower or operating 
affiliate (as applicable) pledges such machinery and equipment as 
additional collateral for the CRE loan.
    (5) At origination, the applicable loan-to-value ratios for the loan 
are:
    (i) LTV less than or equal to 65 percent and CLTV less than or equal 
to 70 percent; or
    (ii) LTV less than or equal to 60 percent and CLTV less than or 
equal to 65 percent, if an appraisal used to meet

[[Page 1106]]

the requirements set forth in paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section used 
a direct capitalization rate, and that rate is less than or equal to the 
sum of:
    (A) The 10-year swap rate, as reported in the Federal Reserve's H.15 
Report (or any successor report) as of the date concurrent with the 
effective date of such appraisal; and
    (B) 300 basis points.
    (iii) If the appraisal required under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this 
section included a direct capitalization method using an overall 
capitalization rate, that rate must be disclosed to potential investors 
in the securitization.
    (6) All loan payments required to be made under the loan agreement 
are:
    (i) Based on level monthly payments of principal and interest (at 
the fully indexed rate) to fully amortize the debt over a term that does 
not exceed 25 years, or 30 years for a qualifying multifamily loan; and
    (ii) To be made no less frequently than monthly over a term of at 
least ten years.
    (7) Under the terms of the loan agreement:
    (i) Any maturity of the note occurs no earlier than ten years 
following the date of origination;
    (ii) The borrower is not permitted to defer repayment of principal 
or payment of interest; and
    (iii) The interest rate on the loan is:
    (A) A fixed interest rate;
    (B) An adjustable interest rate and the borrower, prior to or 
concurrently with origination of the CRE loan, obtained a derivative 
that effectively results in a fixed interest rate; or
    (C) An adjustable interest rate and the borrower, prior to or 
concurrently with origination of the CRE loan, obtained a derivative 
that established a cap on the interest rate for the term of the loan, 
and the loan meets the underwriting criteria in paragraphs (a)(2)(vi) 
and (vii) of this section using the maximum interest rate allowable 
under the interest rate cap.
    (8) The originator does not establish an interest reserve at 
origination to fund all or part of a payment on the loan.
    (9) At the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the 
composition of the securitized assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction, all 
payments due on the loan are contractually current.
    (10)(i) The depositor of the asset-backed security certifies that it 
has evaluated the effectiveness of its internal supervisory controls 
with respect to the process for ensuring that all qualifying CRE loans 
that collateralize the asset-backed security and that reduce the 
sponsor's risk retention requirement under Sec. 373.15 meet all of the 
requirements set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (9) of this section 
and has concluded that its internal supervisory controls are effective;
    (ii) The evaluation of the effectiveness of the depositor's internal 
supervisory controls referenced in paragraph (a)(10)(i) of this section 
shall be performed, for each issuance of an asset-backed security, as of 
a date within 60 days of the cut-off date or similar date for 
establishing the composition of the asset pool collateralizing such 
asset-backed security;
    (iii) The sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, a copy of the 
certification described in paragraph (a)(10)(i) of this section to 
potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of 
asset-backed securities in the issuing entity, and, upon request, to its 
appropriate Federal banking agency, if any; and
    (11) Within two weeks of the closing of the CRE loan by its 
originator or, if sooner, prior to the transfer of such CRE loan to the 
issuing entity, the originator shall have obtained a UCC lien search 
from the jurisdiction of organization of the borrower and each operating 
affiliate, that does not report, as of the time that the security 
interest of the originator in the property described in paragraph 
(a)(1)(iii) of this section was perfected, other higher priority liens 
of record on any property described in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this 
section, other than purchase money security interests.
    (b) Cure or buy-back requirement. If a sponsor has relied on the 
exception provided in Sec. 373.15 with respect to a qualifying CRE loan 
and it is subsequently determined that the CRE loan did not meet all of 
the requirements set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through

[[Page 1107]]

(9) and (a)(11) of this section, the sponsor shall not lose the benefit 
of the exception with respect to the CRE loan if the depositor complied 
with the certification requirement set forth in paragraph (a)(10) of 
this section, and:
    (1) The failure of the loan to meet any of the requirements set 
forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (9) and (a)(11) of this section is 
not material; or;
    (2) No later than 90 days after the determination that the loan does 
not meet one or more of the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(9) or (a)(11) of this section, the sponsor:
    (i) Effectuates cure, restoring conformity of the loan to the unmet 
requirements as of the date of cure; or
    (ii) Repurchases the loan(s) from the issuing entity at a price at 
least equal to the remaining principal balance and accrued interest on 
the loan(s) as of the date of repurchase.
    (3) If the sponsor cures or repurchases pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section, the sponsor must promptly notify, or cause to be 
notified, the holders of the asset-backed securities issued in the 
securitization transaction of any loan(s) included in such 
securitization transaction that is required to be cured or repurchased 
by the sponsor pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this section, including 
the principal amount of such repurchased loan(s) and the cause for such 
cure or repurchase.



Sec. 373.18  Underwriting standards for qualifying automobile loans.

    (a) Underwriting, product and other standards. (1) Prior to 
origination of the automobile loan, the originator:
    (i) Verified and documented that within 30 days of the date of 
origination:
    (A) The borrower was not currently 30 days or more past due, in 
whole or in part, on any debt obligation;
    (B) Within the previous 24 months, the borrower has not been 60 days 
or more past due, in whole or in part, on any debt obligation;
    (C) Within the previous 36 months, the borrower has not:
    (1) Been a debtor in a proceeding commenced under Chapter 7 
(Liquidation), Chapter 11 (Reorganization), Chapter 12 (Family Farmer or 
Family Fisherman plan), or Chapter 13 (Individual Debt Adjustment) of 
the U.S. Bankruptcy Code; or
    (2) Been the subject of any federal or State judicial judgment for 
the collection of any unpaid debt;
    (D) Within the previous 36 months, no one-to-four family property 
owned by the borrower has been the subject of any foreclosure, deed in 
lieu of foreclosure, or short sale; or
    (E) Within the previous 36 months, the borrower has not had any 
personal property repossessed;
    (ii) Determined and documented that the borrower has at least 24 
months of credit history; and
    (iii) Determined and documented that, upon the origination of the 
loan, the borrower's DTI ratio is less than or equal to 36 percent.
    (A) For the purpose of making the determination under paragraph 
(a)(1)(iii) of this section, the originator must:
    (1) Verify and document all income of the borrower that the 
originator includes in the borrower's effective monthly income (using 
payroll stubs, tax returns, profit and loss statements, or other similar 
documentation); and
    (2) On or after the date of the borrower's written application and 
prior to origination, obtain a credit report regarding the borrower from 
a consumer reporting agency that compiles and maintain files on 
consumers on a nationwide basis (within the meaning of 15 U.S.C. 
1681a(p)) and verify that all outstanding debts reported in the 
borrower's credit report are incorporated into the calculation of the 
borrower's DTI ratio under paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section;
    (2) An originator will be deemed to have met the requirements of 
paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section if:
    (i) The originator, no more than 30 days before the closing of the 
loan, obtains a credit report regarding the borrower from a consumer 
reporting agency that compiles and maintains files on consumers on a 
nationwide basis (within the meaning of 15 U.S.C. 1681a(p));
    (ii) Based on the information in such credit report, the borrower 
meets all of the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, 
and no information in a credit report subsequently obtained by the 
originator before the closing of the

[[Page 1108]]

loan contains contrary information; and
    (iii) The originator obtains electronic or hard copies of the credit 
report.
    (3) At closing of the automobile loan, the borrower makes a down 
payment from the borrower's personal funds and trade-in allowance, if 
any, that is at least equal to the sum of:
    (i) The full cost of the vehicle title, tax, and registration fees;
    (ii) Any dealer-imposed fees;
    (iii) The full cost of any additional warranties, insurance or other 
products purchased in connection with the purchase of the vehicle; and
    (iv) 10 percent of the vehicle purchase price.
    (4) The originator records a first lien securing the loan on the 
purchased vehicle in accordance with State law.
    (5) The terms of the loan agreement provide a maturity date for the 
loan that does not exceed the lesser of:
    (i) Six years from the date of origination; or
    (ii) 10 years minus the difference between the current model year 
and the vehicle's model year.
    (6) The terms of the loan agreement:
    (i) Specify a fixed rate of interest for the life of the loan;
    (ii) Provide for a level monthly payment amount that fully amortizes 
the amount financed over the loan term;
    (iii) Do not permit the borrower to defer repayment of principal or 
payment of interest; and
    (iv) Require the borrower to make the first payment on the 
automobile loan within 45 days of the loan's contract date.
    (7) At the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the 
composition of the securitized assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction, all 
payments due on the loan are contractually current; and
    (8)(i) The depositor of the asset-backed security certifies that it 
has evaluated the effectiveness of its internal supervisory controls 
with respect to the process for ensuring that all qualifying automobile 
loans that collateralize the asset-backed security and that reduce the 
sponsor's risk retention requirement under Sec. 373.15 meet all of the 
requirements set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (7) of this section 
and has concluded that its internal supervisory controls are effective;
    (ii) The evaluation of the effectiveness of the depositor's internal 
supervisory controls referenced in paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section 
shall be performed, for each issuance of an asset-backed security, as of 
a date within 60 days of the cut-off date or similar date for 
establishing the composition of the asset pool collateralizing such 
asset-backed security; and
    (iii) The sponsor provides, or causes to be provided, a copy of the 
certification described in paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section to 
potential investors a reasonable period of time prior to the sale of 
asset-backed securities in the issuing entity, and, upon request, to its 
appropriate Federal banking agency, if any.
    (b) Cure or buy-back requirement. If a sponsor has relied on the 
exception provided in Sec. 373.15 with respect to a qualifying 
automobile loan and it is subsequently determined that the loan did not 
meet all of the requirements set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (7) 
of this section, the sponsor shall not lose the benefit of the exception 
with respect to the automobile loan if the depositor complied with the 
certification requirement set forth in paragraph (a)(8) of this section, 
and:
    (1) The failure of the loan to meet any of the requirements set 
forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (7) of this section is not material; 
or
    (2) No later than ninety (90) days after the determination that the 
loan does not meet one or more of the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) 
through (7) of this section, the sponsor:
    (i) Effectuates cure, establishing conformity of the loan to the 
unmet requirements as of the date of cure; or
    (ii) Repurchases the loan(s) from the issuing entity at a price at 
least equal to the remaining principal balance and accrued interest on 
the loan(s) as of the date of repurchase.
    (3) If the sponsor cures or repurchases pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section, the sponsor must promptly notify, or cause to be 
notified, the holders of the asset-backed securities issued in the 
securitization transaction

[[Page 1109]]

of any loan(s) included in such securitization transaction that is 
required to be cured or repurchased by the sponsor pursuant to paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section, including the principal amount of such loan(s) 
and the cause for such cure or repurchase.



Sec. 373.19  General exemptions.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definitions shall apply:
    Community-focused residential mortgage means a residential mortgage 
exempt from the definition of ``covered transaction'' under 
Sec. 1026.43(a)(3)(iv) and (v) of the CFPB's Regulation Z (12 CFR 
1026.43(a)).
    First pay class means a class of ABS interests for which all 
interests in the class are entitled to the same priority of payment and 
that, at the time of closing of the transaction, is entitled to 
repayments of principal and payments of interest prior to or pro-rata 
with all other classes of securities collateralized by the same pool of 
first-lien residential mortgages, until such class has no principal or 
notional balance remaining.
    Inverse floater means an ABS interest issued as part of a 
securitization transaction for which interest or other income is payable 
to the holder based on a rate or formula that varies inversely to a 
reference rate of interest.
    Qualifying three-to-four unit residential mortgage loan means a 
mortgage loan that is:
    (i) Secured by a dwelling (as defined in 12 CFR 1026.2(a)(19)) that 
is owner occupied and contains three-to-four housing units;
    (ii) Is deemed to be for business purposes for purposes of 
Regulation Z under 12 CFR part 1026, Supplement I, paragraph 3(a)(5)(i); 
and
    (iii) Otherwise meets all of the requirements to qualify as a 
qualified mortgage under Sec. 1026.43(e) and (f) of Regulation Z (12 CFR 
1026.43(e) and (f)) as if the loan were a covered transaction under that 
section.
    (b) This part shall not apply to:
    (1) U.S. Government-backed securitizations. Any securitization 
transaction that:
    (i) Is collateralized solely by residential, multifamily, or health 
care facility mortgage loan assets that are insured or guaranteed (in 
whole or in part) as to the payment of principal and interest by the 
United States or an agency of the United States, and servicing assets; 
or
    (ii) Involves the issuance of asset-backed securities that:
    (A) Are insured or guaranteed as to the payment of principal and 
interest by the United States or an agency of the United States; and
    (B) Are collateralized solely by residential, multifamily, or health 
care facility mortgage loan assets or interests in such assets, and 
servicing assets.
    (2) Certain agricultural loan securitizations. Any securitization 
transaction that is collateralized solely by loans or other assets made, 
insured, guaranteed, or purchased by any institution that is subject to 
the supervision of the Farm Credit Administration, including the Federal 
Agricultural Mortgage Corporation, and servicing assets;
    (3) State and municipal securitizations. Any asset-backed security 
that is a security issued or guaranteed by any State, or by any 
political subdivision of a State, or by any public instrumentality of a 
State that is exempt from the registration requirements of the 
Securities Act of 1933 by reason of section 3(a)(2) of that Act (15 
U.S.C. 77c(a)(2)); and
    (4) Qualified scholarship funding bonds. Any asset-backed security 
that meets the definition of a qualified scholarship funding bond, as 
set forth in section 150(d)(2) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (26 
U.S.C. 150(d)(2)).
    (5) Pass-through resecuritizations. Any securitization transaction 
that:
    (i) Is collateralized solely by servicing assets, and by asset-
backed securities:
    (A) For which credit risk was retained as required under subpart B 
of this part; or
    (B) That were exempted from the credit risk retention requirements 
of this part pursuant to subpart D of this part;
    (ii) Is structured so that it involves the issuance of only a single 
class of ABS interests; and

[[Page 1110]]

    (iii) Provides for the pass-through of all principal and interest 
payments received on the underlying asset-backed securities (net of 
expenses of the issuing entity) to the holders of such class.
    (6) First-pay-class securitizations. Any securitization transaction 
that:
    (i) Is collateralized solely by servicing assets, and by first-pay 
classes of asset-backed securities collateralized by first-lien 
residential mortgages on properties located in any state:
    (A) For which credit risk was retained as required under subpart B 
of this part; or
    (B) That were exempted from the credit risk retention requirements 
of this part pursuant to subpart D of this part;
    (ii) Does not provide for any ABS interest issued in the 
securitization transaction to share in realized principal losses other 
than pro rata with all other ABS interests issued in the securitization 
transaction based on the current unpaid principal balance of such ABS 
interests at the time the loss is realized;
    (iii) Is structured to reallocate prepayment risk;
    (iv) Does not reallocate credit risk (other than as a consequence of 
reallocation of prepayment risk); and
    (v) Does not include any inverse floater or similarly structured ABS 
interest.
    (7) Seasoned loans. (i) Any securitization transaction that is 
collateralized solely by servicing assets, and by seasoned loans that 
meet the following requirements:
    (A) The loans have not been modified since origination; and
    (B) None of the loans have been delinquent for 30 days or more.
    (ii) For purposes of this paragraph, a seasoned loan means:
    (A) With respect to asset-backed securities collateralized by 
residential mortgages, a loan that has been outstanding and performing 
for the longer of:
    (1) A period of five years; or
    (2) Until the outstanding principal balance of the loan has been 
reduced to 25 percent of the original principal balance.
    (3) Notwithstanding paragraphs (b)(7)(ii)(A)(1) and (2) of this 
section, any residential mortgage loan that has been outstanding and 
performing for a period of at least seven years shall be deemed a 
seasoned loan.
    (B) With respect to all other classes of asset-backed securities, a 
loan that has been outstanding and performing for the longer of:
    (1) A period of at least two years; or
    (2) Until the outstanding principal balance of the loan has been 
reduced to 33 percent of the original principal balance.
    (8) Certain public utility securitizations. (i) Any securitization 
transaction where the asset-back securities issued in the transaction 
are secured by the intangible property right to collect charges for the 
recovery of specified costs and such other assets, if any, of an issuing 
entity that is wholly owned, directly or indirectly, by an investor 
owned utility company that is subject to the regulatory authority of a 
State public utility commission or other appropriate State agency.
    (ii) For purposes of this paragraph:
    (A) Specified cost means any cost identified by a State legislature 
as appropriate for recovery through securitization pursuant to specified 
cost recovery legislation; and
    (B) Specified cost recovery legislation means legislation enacted by 
a State that:
    (1) Authorizes the investor owned utility company to apply for, and 
authorizes the public utility commission or other appropriate State 
agency to issue, a financing order determining the amount of specified 
costs the utility will be allowed to recover;
    (2) Provides that pursuant to a financing order, the utility 
acquires an intangible property right to charge, collect, and receive 
amounts necessary to provide for the full recovery of the specified 
costs determined to be recoverable, and assures that the charges are 
non-bypassable and will be paid by customers within the utility's 
historic service territory who receive utility goods or services through 
the utility's transmission and distribution system, even if those 
customers elect to purchase these goods or services from a third party; 
and

[[Page 1111]]

    (3) Guarantees that neither the State nor any of its agencies has 
the authority to rescind or amend the financing order, to revise the 
amount of specified costs, or in any way to reduce or impair the value 
of the intangible property right, except as may be contemplated by 
periodic adjustments authorized by the specified cost recovery 
legislation.
    (c) Exemption for securitizations of assets issued, insured or 
guaranteed by the United States. This part shall not apply to any 
securitization transaction if the asset-backed securities issued in the 
transaction are:
    (1) Collateralized solely by obligations issued by the United States 
or an agency of the United States and servicing assets;
    (2) Collateralized solely by assets that are fully insured or 
guaranteed as to the payment of principal and interest by the United 
States or an agency of the United States (other than those referred to 
in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section) and servicing assets; or
    (3) Fully guaranteed as to the timely payment of principal and 
interest by the United States or any agency of the United States;
    (d) Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation securitizations. This part 
shall not apply to any securitization transaction that is sponsored by 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation acting as conservator or 
receiver under any provision of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or of 
Title II of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection 
Act.
    (e) Reduced requirement for certain student loan securitizations. 
The 5 percent risk retention requirement set forth in Sec. 373.4 shall 
be modified as follows:
    (1) With respect to a securitization transaction that is 
collateralized solely by student loans made under the Federal Family 
Education Loan Program (``FFELP loans'') that are guaranteed as to 100 
percent of defaulted principal and accrued interest, and servicing 
assets, the risk retention requirement shall be 0 percent;
    (2) With respect to a securitization transaction that is 
collateralized solely by FFELP loans that are guaranteed as to at least 
98 percent but less than 100 percent of defaulted principal and accrued 
interest, and servicing assets, the risk retention requirement shall be 
2 percent; and
    (3) With respect to any other securitization transaction that is 
collateralized solely by FFELP loans, and servicing assets, the risk 
retention requirement shall be 3 percent.
    (f) Community-focused lending securitizations. (1) This part shall 
not apply to any securitization transaction if the asset-backed 
securities issued in the transaction are collateralized solely by 
community-focused residential mortgages and servicing assets.
    (2) For any securitization transaction that includes both community-
focused residential mortgages and residential mortgages that are not 
exempt from risk retention under this part, the percent of risk 
retention required under Sec. 373.4(a) is reduced by the ratio of the 
unpaid principal balance of the community-focused residential mortgages 
to the total unpaid principal balance of residential mortgages that are 
included in the pool of assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction (the 
community-focused residential mortgage asset ratio); provided that:
    (i) The community-focused residential mortgage asset ratio is 
measured as of the cut-off date or similar date for establishing the 
composition of the pool assets collateralizing the asset-backed 
securities issued pursuant to the securitization transaction; and
    (ii) If the community-focused residential mortgage asset ratio would 
exceed 50 percent, the community-focused residential mortgage asset 
ratio shall be deemed to be 50 percent.
    (g) Exemptions for securitizations of certain three-to-four unit 
mortgage loans. A sponsor shall be exempt from the risk retention 
requirements in subpart B of this part with respect to any 
securitization transaction if:
    (1)(i) The asset-backed securities issued in the transaction are 
collateralized solely by qualifying three-to-four unit residential 
mortgage loans and servicing assets; or
    (ii) The asset-backed securities issued in the transaction are 
collateralized solely by qualifying three-to-four unit residential 
mortgage loans, qualified residential mortgages

[[Page 1112]]

as defined in Sec. 373.13, and servicing assets.
    (2) The depositor with respect to the securitization provides the 
certifications set forth in Sec. 373.13(b)(4) with respect to the 
process for ensuring that all assets that collateralize the asset-backed 
securities issued in the transaction are qualifying three-to-four unit 
residential mortgage loans, qualified residential mortgages, or 
servicing assets; and
    (3) The sponsor of the securitization complies with the repurchase 
requirements in Sec. 373.13(c) with respect to a loan if, after closing, 
it is determined that the loan does not meet all of the criteria to be 
either a qualified residential mortgage or a qualifying three-to-four 
unit residential mortgage loan, as appropriate.
    (h) Rule of construction. Securitization transactions involving the 
issuance of asset-backed securities that are either issued, insured, or 
guaranteed by, or are collateralized by obligations issued by, or loans 
that are issued, insured, or guaranteed by, the Federal National 
Mortgage Association, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, or a 
Federal home loan bank shall not on that basis qualify for exemption 
under this part.



Sec. 373.20  Safe harbor for certain foreign-related transactions.

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section, the following 
definition shall apply:
    U.S. person means:
    (i) Any of the following:
    (A) Any natural person resident in the United States;
    (B) Any partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or 
other organization or entity organized or incorporated under the laws of 
any State or of the United States;
    (C) Any estate of which any executor or administrator is a U.S. 
person (as defined under any other clause of this definition);
    (D) Any trust of which any trustee is a U.S. person (as defined 
under any other clause of this definition);
    (E) Any agency or branch of a foreign entity located in the United 
States;
    (F) Any non-discretionary account or similar account (other than an 
estate or trust) held by a dealer or other fiduciary for the benefit or 
account of a U.S. person (as defined under any other clause of this 
definition);
    (G) Any discretionary account or similar account (other than an 
estate or trust) held by a dealer or other fiduciary organized, 
incorporated, or (if an individual) resident in the United States; and
    (H) Any partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or 
other organization or entity if:
    (1) Organized or incorporated under the laws of any foreign 
jurisdiction; and
    (2) Formed by a U.S. person (as defined under any other clause of 
this definition) principally for the purpose of investing in securities 
not registered under the Act; and
    (ii) ``U.S. person(s)'' does not include:
    (A) Any discretionary account or similar account (other than an 
estate or trust) held for the benefit or account of a person not 
constituting a U.S. person (as defined in paragraph (i) of this section) 
by a dealer or other professional fiduciary organized, incorporated, or 
(if an individual) resident in the United States;
    (B) Any estate of which any professional fiduciary acting as 
executor or administrator is a U.S. person (as defined in paragraph (i) 
of this section) if:
    (1) An executor or administrator of the estate who is not a U.S. 
person (as defined in paragraph (i) of this section) has sole or shared 
investment discretion with respect to the assets of the estate; and
    (2) The estate is governed by foreign law;
    (C) Any trust of which any professional fiduciary acting as trustee 
is a U.S. person (as defined in paragraph (i) of this section), if a 
trustee who is not a U.S. person (as defined in paragraph (i) of this 
section) has sole or shared investment discretion with respect to the 
trust assets, and no beneficiary of the trust (and no settlor if the 
trust is revocable) is a U.S. person (as defined in paragraph (i) of 
this section);
    (D) An employee benefit plan established and administered in 
accordance with the law of a country other than

[[Page 1113]]

the United States and customary practices and documentation of such 
country;
    (E) Any agency or branch of a U.S. person (as defined in paragraph 
(i) of this section) located outside the United States if:
    (1) The agency or branch operates for valid business reasons; and
    (2) The agency or branch is engaged in the business of insurance or 
banking and is subject to substantive insurance or banking regulation, 
respectively, in the jurisdiction where located;
    (F) The International Monetary Fund, the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the Inter-American Development Bank, the 
Asian Development Bank, the African Development Bank, the United 
Nations, and their agencies, affiliates and pension plans, and any other 
similar international organizations, their agencies, affiliates and 
pension plans.
    (b) In general. This part shall not apply to a securitization 
transaction if all the following conditions are met:
    (1) The securitization transaction is not required to be and is not 
registered under the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77a et seq.);
    (2) No more than 10 percent of the dollar value (or equivalent 
amount in the currency in which the ABS interests are issued, as 
applicable) of all classes of ABS interests in the securitization 
transaction are sold or transferred to U.S. persons or for the account 
or benefit of U.S. persons;
    (3) Neither the sponsor of the securitization transaction nor the 
issuing entity is:
    (i) Chartered, incorporated, or organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State;
    (ii) An unincorporated branch or office (wherever located) of an 
entity chartered, incorporated, or organized under the laws of the 
United States or any State; or
    (iii) An unincorporated branch or office located in the United 
States or any State of an entity that is chartered, incorporated, or 
organized under the laws of a jurisdiction other than the United States 
or any State; and
    (4) If the sponsor or issuing entity is chartered, incorporated, or 
organized under the laws of a jurisdiction other than the United States 
or any State, no more than 25 percent (as determined based on unpaid 
principal balance) of the assets that collateralize the ABS interests 
sold in the securitization transaction were acquired by the sponsor or 
issuing entity, directly or indirectly, from:
    (i) A majority-owned affiliate of the sponsor or issuing entity that 
is chartered, incorporated, or organized under the laws of the United 
States or any State; or
    (ii) An unincorporated branch or office of the sponsor or issuing 
entity that is located in the United States or any State.
    (c) Evasions prohibited. In view of the objective of these rules and 
the policies underlying Section 15G of the Exchange Act, the safe harbor 
described in paragraph (b) of this section is not available with respect 
to any transaction or series of transactions that, although in technical 
compliance with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, is part of a 
plan or scheme to evade the requirements of section 15G and this part. 
In such cases, compliance with section 15G and this part is required.



Sec. 373.21  Additional exemptions.

    (a) Securitization transactions. The federal agencies with 
rulewriting authority under section 15G(b) of the Exchange Act (15 
U.S.C. 78o-11(b)) with respect to the type of assets involved may 
jointly provide a total or partial exemption of any securitization 
transaction as such agencies determine may be appropriate in the public 
interest and for the protection of investors.
    (b) Exceptions, exemptions, and adjustments. The Federal banking 
agencies and the Commission, in consultation with the Federal Housing 
Finance Agency and the Department of Housing and Urban Development, may 
jointly adopt or issue exemptions, exceptions or adjustments to the 
requirements of this part, including exemptions, exceptions or 
adjustments for classes of institutions or assets in accordance with 
section 15G(e) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-11(e)).

[[Page 1114]]



Sec. 373.22  Periodic review of the QRM definition, exempted three-
to-four unit residential mortgage loans, and community-focused
residential mortgage exemption

    (a) The Federal banking agencies and the Commission, in consultation 
with the Federal Housing Finance Agency and the Department of Housing 
and Urban Development, shall commence a review of the definition of 
qualified residential mortgage in Sec. 373.13, a review of the 
community-focused residential mortgage exemption in Sec. 373.19(f), and 
a review of the exemption for qualifying three-to-four unit residential 
mortgage loans in Sec. 373.19(g):
    (1) No later than four years after the effective date of the rule 
(as it relates to securitizers and originators of asset-backed 
securities collateralized by residential mortgages), five years 
following the completion of such initial review, and every five years 
thereafter; and
    (2) At any time, upon the request of any Federal banking agency, the 
Commission, the Federal Housing Finance Agency or the Department of 
Housing and Urban Development, specifying the reason for such request, 
including as a result of any amendment to the definition of qualified 
mortgage or changes in the residential housing market.
    (b) The Federal banking agencies, the Commission, the Federal 
Housing Finance Agency and the Department of Housing and Urban 
Development shall publish in the Federal Register notice of the 
commencement of a review and, in the case of a review commenced under 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the reason an agency is requesting 
such review. After completion of any review, but no later than six 
months after the publication of the notice announcing the review, unless 
extended by the agencies, the agencies shall jointly publish a notice 
disclosing the determination of their review. If the agencies determine 
to amend the definition of qualified residential mortgage, the agencies 
shall complete any required rulemaking within 12 months of publication 
in the Federal Register of such notice disclosing the determination of 
their review, unless extended by the agencies.



PART 380_ORDERLY LIQUIDATION AUTHORITY--Table of Contents



             Subpart A_General and Miscellaneous Provisions

Sec.
380.1  Definitions.
380.2  [Reserved]
380.3  Treatment of personal service agreements.
380.4  [Reserved]
380.5  Treatment of covered financial companies that are subsidiaries of 
          insurance companies.
380.6  Limitation on liens on assets of covered financial companies that 
          are insurance companies or covered subsidiaries of insurance 
          companies.
380.7  Recoupment of compensation from senior executives and directors.
380.8  Predominantly engaged in activities that are financial or 
          incidental thereto.
380.9  Treatment of fraudulent and preferential transfers.
380.10  Maximum obligation limitation.
380.11  Treatment of mutual insurance holding companies.
380.12  Enforcement of subsidiary and affiliate contracts by the FDIC as 
          receiver of a covered financial company.
380.13  Restrictions on sale of assets of a covered financial company by 
          the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.
380.14  Record retention requirements.
380.15-380.19  [Reserved]

                          Subpart B_Priorities

380.20  [Reserved]
380.21  Priorities.
380.22  Administrative expenses of the receiver.
380.23  Amounts owed to the United States.
380.24  Priority of claims arising out ofloss of setoff rights.
380.25  Post-insolvency interest.
380.26  Effect of transfer of assets and obligations to a bridge 
          financial company.
380.27  Treatment of similarly situated claimants.
380.28-380.29  [Reserved]

          Subpart C_Receivership Administrative Claims Process

380.30  Receivership administrative claims process.
380.31  Scope.
380.32  Claims bar date.
380.33  Notice requirements.
380.34  Procedures for filing claim.
380.35  Determination of claims.
380.36  Decision period.
380.37  Notification of determination.
380.38  Procedures for seeking judicial determination of disallowed 
          claim.

[[Page 1115]]

380.39  Contingent claims.
380.40-380.49  [Reserved]
380.50  Determination of secured claims.
380.51  Consent to certain actions.
380.52  Adequate protection.
380.53  Repudiation of secured contract.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 5389; 12 U.S.C. 5390(s)(3); 12 U.S.C. 
5390(b)(1)(C); 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(7)(D); 12 U.S.C. 5381(b); 12 U.S.C. 
5390(r); 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(16)(D).

    Source: 76 FR 4215, Jan. 25, 2011, unless otherwise noted.



             Subpart A_General and Miscellaneous Provisions



Sec. 380.1  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, the following terms are defined as 
follows:
    Affiliate. The term ``affiliate'' means any company that controls, 
is controlled by, or is under common control with another company at the 
time of, or immediately prior to, the appointment of receiver of the 
covered financial company.
    Allowed claim. The term ``allowed claim'' means a claim against the 
covered financial company or receiver that is allowed by the Corporation 
as receiver or upon which a final non-appealable judgment has been 
entered in favor of a claimant against a receivership by a court with 
jurisdiction to adjudicate the claim.
    Board of Governors. The term ``Board of Governors'' means the Board 
of Governors of the Federal Reserve System.
    Bridge financial company. The term ``bridge financial company'' 
means a new financial company organized by the Corporation in accordance 
with 12 U.S.C. 5390(h) for the purpose of resolving a covered financial 
company.
    Business day. The term ``business day'' means any day other than any 
Saturday, Sunday or any day on which either the New York Stock Exchange 
or the Federal Reserve Bank of New York is closed.
    Claim. The term ``claim'' means any right to payment from either the 
covered financial company or the Corporation as receiver, whether or not 
such right is reduced to judgment, liquidated, unliquidated, fixed, 
contingent, matured, unmatured, disputed, undisputed, legal, equitable, 
secured, or unsecured.
    Compensation. The term ``compensation'' means any direct or indirect 
financial remuneration received from the covered financial company, 
including, but not limited to, salary; bonuses; incentives; benefits; 
severance pay; deferred compensation; golden parachute benefits; 
benefits derived from an employment contract, or other compensation or 
benefit arrangement; perquisites; stock option plans; post-employment 
benefits; profits realized from a sale of securities in the covered 
financial company; or any cash or non-cash payments or benefits granted 
to or for the benefit of the senior executive or director.
    Control. The term ``control'', when used in the definitions of 
``affiliate'' and ``subsidiary'', has the meaning given to such term 
under 12 U.S.C. 1841(a)(2)(A) and (B) as such law, or any successor, may 
be in effect at the date of the appointment of the receiver, together 
with any regulations promulgated thereunder then in effect.
    Corporation. The term ``Corporation'' means the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation.
    Covered financial company. The term ``covered financial company'' 
means (a) a financial company for which a determination has been made 
under 12 U.S.C. 5383(b) and (b) does not include an insured depository 
institution.
    Covered subsidiary. The term ``covered subsidiary'' means a 
subsidiary of a covered financial company other than:
    (1) An insured depository institution;
    (2) An insurance company; or
    (3) A covered broker or dealer.
    Creditor. The term ``creditor'' means a person asserting a claim.
    Director. The term ``director'' means a member of the board of 
directors of a company or of a board or committee performing a similar 
function to a board of directors with authority to vote on matters 
before the board or committee.
    Dodd-Frank Act. The term ``Dodd-Frank Act'' shall mean the Dodd-
Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, Public Law 111-
203, 12 U.S.C. 5301 et seq. (2010).
    Employee benefit plan. The term ``employee benefit plan'' has the 
meaning set forth in the Employee Retirement Income Security Act, 29 
U.S.C. 1002(3).

[[Page 1116]]

    Insurance company. The term ``insurance company'' means any entity 
that is:
    (1) Engaged in the business of insurance,
    (2) Subject to regulation by a State insurance regulator, and
    (3) Covered by a State law that is designed to specifically deal 
with the rehabilitation, liquidation or insolvency of an insurance 
company.
    Intermediate insurance stock holding company. The term 
``intermediate insurance stock holding company'' means a corporation 
organized either at the time of, or at any time after, the organization 
of the mutual insurance holding company that:
    (1) Is a subsidiary of a mutual insurance holding company;
    (2) Holds a majority of the issued and outstanding voting stock of 
the converted mutual insurance company created at the time of formation 
of the mutual insurance holding company; and
    (3) Holds, as its largest United States subsidiary (as measured by 
total assets as of the end of the previous calendar quarter), an 
insurance company.
    Mutual insurance company. The term ``mutual insurance company'' 
means an insurance company organized under the laws of a State that 
provides for the formation of such an entity as a non-stock mutual 
corporation in which the surplus and voting rights are vested in the 
policyholders.
    Mutual insurance holding company. The term ``mutual insurance 
holding company'' means a corporation that:
    (1) Is lawfully organized under state law authorizing its formation 
in connection with the reorganization of a mutual insurance company that 
converts the mutual insurance company to a stock insurance company, 
and--
    (2) Holds either:
    (i) A majority of the issued and outstanding voting stock of the 
intermediate insurance stock holding company, if any, or
    (ii) If there is no intermediate insurance stock holding company, a 
majority of the issued and outstanding voting stock of the converted 
mutual insurance company.
    Senior executive. The term ``senior executive'' means any person who 
participates or has authority to participate (other than in the capacity 
of a director) in major policymaking functions of the company, whether 
or not: The person has an official title; the title designates the 
officer an assistant; or the person is serving without salary or other 
compensation. The chairman of the board, the president, every vice 
president, the secretary, and the treasurer or chief financial officer, 
general partner and manager of a company are considered senior 
executives, unless the person is excluded, by resolution of the board of 
directors, the bylaws, the operating agreement or the partnership 
agreement of the company, from participation (other than in the capacity 
of a director) in major policymaking functions of the company, and the 
person does not actually participate therein.
    Subsidiary. The term ``subsidiary'' means any company which is 
controlled by another company at the time of, or immediately prior to, 
the appointment of receiver of the covered financial company.

[76 FR 41639, July 15, 2011, as amended at 77 FR 25353, Apr. 30, 2012; 
77 FR 63214, Oct. 16, 2012]



Sec. 380.2  [Reserved]



Sec. 380.3  Treatment of personal service agreements.

    (a) For the purposes of this section, the term ``personal service 
agreement'' means a written agreement between an employee and a covered 
financial company or a bridge financial company setting forth the terms 
of employment. This term also includes an agreement between any group or 
class of employees and a covered financial company, or a bridge 
financial company, including, without limitation, a collective 
bargaining agreement.
    (b)(1) If before repudiation or disaffirmance of a personal service 
agreement, the Corporation as receiver of a covered financial company, 
or a bridge financial company accepts performance of services rendered 
under such agreement, then:
    (i) The terms and conditions of such agreement shall apply to the 
performance of such services; and

[[Page 1117]]

    (ii) Any payments for the services accepted by the Corporation as 
receiver shall be treated as an administrative expense of the receiver.
    (2) If a bridge financial company accepts performance of services 
rendered under such agreement, then the terms and conditions of such 
agreement shall apply to the performance of such services.
    (c) No party acquiring a covered financial company or any 
operational unit, subsidiary or assets thereof from the Corporation as 
receiver or from any bridge financial company shall be bound by a 
personal service agreement unless the acquiring party expressly assumes 
the personal service agreement.
    (d) The acceptance by the Corporation as receiver for a covered 
financial company, or by any bridge financial company or the Corporation 
as receiver for a bridge financial company of services subject to a 
personal service agreement shall not limit or impair the authority of 
the receiver to disaffirm or repudiate any personal service agreement in 
the manner provided for the disaffirmance or repudiation of any 
agreement under 12 U.S.C. 5390(c).
    (e) Paragraph (b) of this section shall not apply to any personal 
service agreement with any senior executive or director of the covered 
financial company or covered subsidiary, nor shall it in any way limit 
or impair the ability of the receiver to recover compensation from any 
senior executive or director of a covered financial company under 12 
U.S.C. 5390 and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

[76 FR 41640, July 15, 2011]



Sec. 380.4  [Reserved]



Sec. 380.5  Treatment of covered financial companies that are
subsidiaries of insurance companies.

    The Corporation as receiver shall distribute the value realized from 
the liquidation, transfer, sale or other disposition of the direct or 
indirect subsidiaries of an insurance company, that are not themselves 
insurance companies, solely in accordance with the order of priorities 
set forth in 12 U.S.C. 5390(b)(1) and the regulations promulgated 
thereunder.

[76 FR 41640, July 15, 2011]



Sec. 380.6  Limitation on liens on assets of covered financial
companies that are insurance companies or covered subsidiaries
of insurance companies.

    (a) In the event that the Corporation makes funds available to a 
covered financial company that is an insurance company or to any covered 
subsidiary of an insurance company, or enters into any other transaction 
with respect to such covered entity under 12 U.S.C. 5384(d), the 
Corporation will exercise its right to take liens on any or all assets 
of the covered entities receiving such funds to secure repayment of any 
such transactions only when the Corporation, in its sole discretion, 
determines that:
    (1) Taking such lien is necessary for the orderly liquidation of the 
entity; and
    (2) Taking such lien will not either unduly impede or delay the 
liquidation or rehabilitation of such insurance company, or the recovery 
by its policyholders.
    (b) This section shall not be construed to restrict or impair the 
ability of the Corporation to take a lien on any or all of the assets of 
any covered financial company or covered subsidiary in order to secure 
financing provided by the Corporation or the receiver in connection with 
the sale or transfer of the covered financial company or covered 
subsidiary or any or all of the assets of such covered entity.

[76 FR 41640, July 15, 2011]



Sec. 380.7  Recoupment of compensation from senior executives
and directors.

    (a) Substantially responsible. The Corporation, as receiver of a 
covered financial company, may file an action to recover from any 
current or former senior executive or director substantially responsible 
for the failed condition of the covered financial company any 
compensation received during the 2-year period preceding the date on 
which the Corporation was appointed as the receiver of the covered 
financial company, except that, in the case of

[[Page 1118]]

fraud, no time limit shall apply. A senior executive or director shall 
be deemed to be substantially responsible for the failed condition of a 
covered financial company that is placed into receivership under the 
orderly liquidation authority of the Dodd-Frank Act if he or she:
    (1) Failed to conduct his or her responsibilities with the degree of 
skill and care an ordinarily prudent person in a like position would 
exercise under similar circumstances, and
    (2) As a result, individually or collectively, caused a loss to the 
covered financial company that materially contributed to the failure of 
the covered financial company under the facts and circumstances.
    (b) Presumptions. The following presumptions shall apply for 
purposes of assessing whether a senior executive or director is 
substantially responsible for the failed condition of a covered 
financial company:
    (1) It shall be presumed that a senior executive or director is 
substantially responsible for the failed condition of a covered 
financial company that is placed into receivership under the orderly 
liquidation authority of the Dodd-Frank Act under any of the following 
circumstances:
    (i) The senior executive or director served as the chairman of the 
board of directors, chief executive officer, president, chief financial 
officer, or in any other similar role regardless of his or her title if 
in this role he or she had responsibility for the strategic, 
policymaking, or company-wide operational decisions of the covered 
financial company prior to the date that it was placed into receivership 
under the orderly liquidation authority of the Dodd-Frank Act;
    (ii) The senior executive or director is adjudged liable by a court 
or tribunal of competent jurisdiction for having breached his or her 
duty of loyalty to the covered financial company;
    (iii) The senior executive was removed from the management of the 
covered financial company under 12 U.S.C. 5386(4); or
    (iv) The director was removed from the board of directors of the 
covered financial company under 12 U.S.C. 5386(5).
    (2) The presumption under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section may be 
rebutted by evidence that the senior executive or director conducted his 
or her responsibilities with the degree of skill and care an ordinarily 
prudent person in a like position would exercise under similar 
circumstances. The presumptions under paragraphs (b)(1)(ii), (b)(1)(iii) 
and (b)(1)(iv) of this section may be rebutted by evidence that the 
senior executive or director did not cause a loss to the covered 
financial company that materially contributed to the failure of the 
covered financial company under the facts and circumstances.
    (3) The presumptions do not apply to:
    (i) A senior executive hired by the covered financial company during 
the two years prior to the Corporation's appointment as receiver to 
assist in preventing further deterioration of the financial condition of 
the covered financial company; or
    (ii) A director who joined the board of directors of the covered 
financial company during the two years prior to the Corporation's 
appointment as receiver under an agreement or resolution to assist in 
preventing further deterioration of the financial condition of the 
covered financial company.
    (4) Notwithstanding that the presumption does not apply under 
paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, the Corporation as 
receiver still may pursue recoupment of compensation from a senior 
executive or director in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) or (ii) if they are 
substantially responsible for the failed condition of the covered 
financial company.
    (c) Savings Clause. Nothing in this section shall limit or impair 
any rights of the Corporation as receiver under other applicable law, 
including any rights under title II of the Dodd-Frank Act to pursue any 
other claims or causes of action it may have against senior executives 
and directors of the covered financial company for losses they cause to 
the covered financial company in the same or separate actions.

[76 FR 41640, July 15, 2011]

[[Page 1119]]



Sec. 380.8  Predominantly engaged in activities that are financial
or incidental thereto.

    (a) For purposes of sections 201(a)(11) and 201(b) of the Dodd-Frank 
Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act \1\ (``Dodd-Frank Act'') 
and this part, a company is predominantly engaged in activities that the 
Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (``Board of 
Governors'') has determined are financial in nature or incidental 
thereto for purposes of section 4(k) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 
1956 (``BHC Act'') (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)), if:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ 12 U.S.C. 5381(a)(11) and (b).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) At least 85 percent of the total consolidated revenues of such 
company (determined in accordance with applicable accounting standards) 
for either of its two most recently completed fiscal years were derived, 
directly or indirectly, from financial activities, or
    (2) Based upon all of the relevant facts and circumstances, the 
consolidated revenues of the company from financial activities 
constitute 85 percent or more of the total consolidated revenues of the 
company.
    (b) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the following 
definitions apply:
    (1) The term ``applicable accounting standards'' means the 
accounting standards utilized by the company in the ordinary course of 
business in preparing its consolidated financial statements, provided 
that those standards are:
    (i) U.S. generally accepted accounting principles,
    (ii) International Financial Reporting Standards, or
    (iii) Such other accounting standards that are determined to be 
appropriate on a case-by-case basis.
    (2) The terms ``broker'' and ``dealer'' have the same meanings as in 
section 3 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78c).
    (3) The term ``financial activity'' means:
    (i) Lending, exchanging, transferring, investing for others, or 
safeguarding money or securities.
    (ii) Insuring, guaranteeing, or indemnifying against loss, harm, 
damage, illness, disability, or death, or providing and issuing 
annuities, and acting as principal, agent, or broker for purposes of the 
foregoing, in any state.
    (iii) Providing financial, investment, or economic advisory 
services, including advising an investment company (as defined in 
section 3 of the Investment Company Act of 1940).
    (iv) Issuing or selling instruments representing interests in pools 
of assets permissible for a bank to hold directly.
    (v) Underwriting, dealing in, or making a market in securities.
    (vi) Engaging in any activity that the Board of Governors has 
determined to be so closely related to banking or managing or 
controlling banks as to be a proper incident thereto, which include--
    (A) Extending credit and servicing loans. Making, acquiring, 
brokering, or servicing loans or other extensions of credit (including 
factoring, issuing letters of credit and accepting drafts) for the 
company's account or for the account of others.
    (B) Activities related to extending credit. Any activity usual in 
connection with making, acquiring, brokering or servicing loans or other 
extensions of credit, including the following activities--
    (1) Real estate and personal property appraising. Performing 
appraisals of real estate and tangible and intangible personal property, 
including securities.
    (2) Arranging commercial real estate equity financing. Acting as 
intermediary for the financing of commercial or industrial income-
producing real estate by arranging for the transfer of the title, 
control, and risk of such a real estate project to one or more 
investors.
    (3) Check-guaranty services. Authorizing a subscribing merchant to 
accept personal checks tendered by the merchant's customers in payment 
for goods and services, and purchasing from the merchant validly 
authorized checks that are subsequently dishonored.
    (4) Collection agency services. Collecting overdue accounts 
receivable, either retail or commercial.
    (5) Credit bureau services. Maintaining information related to the 
credit history of consumers and providing the

[[Page 1120]]

information to a credit grantor who is considering a borrower's 
application for credit or who has extended credit to the borrower.
    (6) Asset management, servicing, and collection activities. Engaging 
under contract with a third party in asset management, servicing, and 
collection \2\ of assets of a type that an insured depository 
institution may originate and own.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ Asset management services include acting as agent in the 
liquidation or sale of loans and collateral for loans, including real 
estate and other assets acquired through foreclosure or in satisfaction 
of debts previously contracted.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (7) Acquiring debt in default. Acquiring debt that is in default at 
the time of acquisition.
    (8) Real estate settlement servicing. Providing real estate 
settlement services.\3\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ For purposes of this section, real estate settlement services do 
not include providing title insurance as principal, agent, or broker.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Leasing personal or real property. Leasing personal or real 
property or acting as agent, broker, or adviser in leasing such property 
if--
    (1) The lease is on a nonoperating basis; \4\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ The requirement that the lease is on a nonoperating basis means 
that the company does not, directly or indirectly, engage in operating, 
servicing, maintaining, or repairing leased property during the lease 
term. For purposes of the leasing of automobiles, the requirement that 
the lease is on a nonoperating basis means that the company does not, 
directly or indirectly: (1) Provide servicing, repair, or maintenance of 
the leased vehicle during the lease term; (2) purchase parts and 
accessories in bulk or for an individual vehicle after the lessee has 
taken delivery of the vehicle; (3) provide the loan of an automobile 
during servicing of the leased vehicle; (4) purchase insurance for the 
lessee; or (5) provide for the renewal of the vehicle's license merely 
as a service to the lessee where the lessee could renew the license 
without authorization from the lessor.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) The initial term of the lease is at least 90 days; and
    (3) In the case of leases involving real property:
    (i) At the inception of the initial lease, the effect of the 
transaction will yield a return that will compensate the lessor for not 
less than the lessor's full investment in the property plus the 
estimated total cost of financing the property over the term of the 
lease from rental payments, estimated tax benefits, and the estimated 
residual value of the property at the expiration of the initial lease; 
and
    (ii) The estimated residual value of property for purposes of 
paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(C)(3)(i) of this section shall not exceed 25 
percent of the acquisition cost of the property to the lessor.
    (D) Operating nonbank depository institutions--(1) Industrial 
banking. Owning, controlling, or operating an industrial bank, Morris 
Plan bank, or industrial loan company that is not a bank for purposes of 
the BHC Act.
    (2) Operating savings associations. Owning, controlling, or 
operating a savings association.
    (E) Trust company functions. Performing functions or activities that 
may be performed by a trust company (including activities of a 
fiduciary, agency, or custodial nature), in the manner authorized by 
federal or state law that is not a bank for purposes of section 2(c) of 
the BHC Act.
    (F) Financial and investment advisory activities. Acting as 
investment or financial advisor to any person, including (without, in 
any way, limiting the foregoing):
    (1) Serving as investment adviser (as defined in section 2(a)(20) of 
the Investment Company Act of 1940, 15 U.S.C. 80a-2(a)(20)), to an 
investment company registered under that act, including sponsoring, 
organizing, and managing a closed-end investment company;
    (2) Furnishing general economic information and advice, general 
economic statistical forecasting services, and industry studies;
    (3) Providing advice in connection with mergers, acquisitions, 
divestitures, investments, joint ventures, leveraged buyouts, 
recapitalizations, capital structurings, financing transactions and 
similar transactions, and conducting financial feasibility studies; \5\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \5\ Feasibility studies do not include assisting management with the 
planning or marketing for a given project or providing general 
operational or management advice.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Providing information, statistical forecasting, and advice with 
respect to any transaction in foreign exchange,

[[Page 1121]]

swaps, and similar transactions, commodities, and any forward contract, 
option, future, option on a future, and similar instruments;
    (5) Providing educational courses, and instructional materials to 
consumers on individual financial management matters; and
    (6) Providing tax-planning and tax-preparation services to any 
person.
    (G) Agency transactional services for customer investments--(1) 
Securities brokerage. Providing securities brokerage services (including 
securities clearing and/or securities execution services on an 
exchange), whether alone or in combination with investment advisory 
services, and incidental activities (including related securities credit 
activities and custodial services).
    (2) Riskless principal transactions. Buying and selling in the 
secondary market all types of securities on the order of customers as a 
``riskless principal'' to the extent of engaging in a transaction in 
which the company, after receiving an order to buy (or sell) a security 
from a customer, purchases (or sells) the security for its own account 
to offset a contemporaneous sale to (or purchase from) the customer.
    (3) Private placement services. Acting as agent for the private 
placement of securities in accordance with the requirements of the 
Securities Act of 1933 (``1933 Act'') and the rules of the Securities 
and Exchange Commission.
    (4) Futures commission merchant. Acting as a futures commission 
merchant (``FCM'') for unaffiliated persons in the execution, clearance, 
or execution and clearance of any futures contract and option on a 
futures contract.
    (5) Other transactional services. Providing to customers as agent 
transactional services with respect to swaps and similar transactions, 
any transaction described in paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(H) of this section, 
any transaction that is permissible for a state member bank, and any 
other transaction involving a forward contract, option, futures, option 
on a futures or similar contract (whether traded on an exchange or not) 
relating to a commodity that is traded on an exchange.
    (H) Investment transactions as principal--(1) Underwriting and 
dealing in government obligations and money market instruments. 
Underwriting and dealing in obligations of the United States, general 
obligations of states and their political subdivisions, and other 
obligations that state member banks of the Federal Reserve System may be 
authorized to underwrite and deal in under 12 U.S.C. 24 and 335, 
including banker's acceptances and certificates of deposit.
    (2) Investing and trading activities. Engaging as principal in:
    (i) Foreign exchange;
    (ii) Forward contracts, options, futures, options on futures, swaps, 
and similar contracts, whether traded on exchanges or not, based on any 
rate, price, financial asset (including gold, silver, platinum, 
palladium, copper, or any other metal), nonfinancial asset, or group of 
assets, other than a bank- ineligible security,\6\ if: a state member 
bank is authorized to invest in the asset underlying the contract; the 
contract requires cash settlement; the contract allows for assignment, 
termination, or offset prior to delivery or expiration, and the company 
makes every reasonable effort to avoid taking or making delivery of the 
asset underlying the contract, or receives and instantaneously transfers 
title to the underlying asset, by operation of contract and without 
taking or making physical delivery of the asset; or the contract does 
not allow for assignment, termination, or offset prior to delivery or 
expiration and is based on an asset for which futures contracts or 
options on futures contracts have been approved for trading on a U.S. 
contract market by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, and the 
company makes every reasonable effort to avoid taking or making delivery 
of the asset underlying the contract, or receives and instantaneously 
transfers title to the underlying asset, by operation of contract and 
without taking or making physical delivery of the asset.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \6\ A bank-ineligible security is any security that a state member 
bank is not permitted to underwrite or deal in under 12 U.S.C. 24 and 
335.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) Forward contracts, options,\7\ futures, options on futures, 
swaps, and

[[Page 1122]]

similar contracts, whether traded on exchanges or not, based on an index 
of a rate, a price, or the value of any financial asset, nonfinancial 
asset, or group of assets, if the contract requires cash settlement.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \7\ This reference does not include acting as a dealer in options 
based on indices of bank-ineligible securities when the options are 
traded on securities exchanges. These options are securities for 
purposes of the federal securities laws and bank-ineligible securities 
for purposes of section 20 of the Glass-Steagall Act, 12 U.S.C. 337. 
Similarly, this reference does not include acting as a dealer in any 
other instrument that is a bank-ineligible security for purposes of 
section 20. Bank holding companies that deal in these instruments must 
do so in accordance with the Board of Governor's orders on dealing in 
bank-ineligible securities.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Buying and selling bullion, and related activities. Buying, 
selling and storing bars, rounds, bullion, and coins of gold, silver, 
platinum, palladium, copper, and any other metal for the company's own 
account and the account of others, and providing incidental services 
such as arranging for storage, safe custody, assaying, and shipment.
    (I) Management consulting and counseling activities--(1) Management 
consulting. Providing management consulting advice: \8\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \8\ In performing this activity, companies are not authorized to 
perform tasks or operations or provide services to client institutions 
either on a daily or continuing basis, except as necessary to instruct 
the client institution on how to perform such services for itself. See 
also the Board of Governors' interpretation of bank management 
consulting advice (12 CFR 225.131).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) On any matter to unaffiliated depository institutions, including 
commercial banks, savings and loan associations, savings banks, credit 
unions, industrial banks, Morris Plan banks, cooperative banks, 
industrial loan companies, trust companies, and branches or agencies of 
foreign banks;
    (ii) On any financial, economic, accounting, or audit matter to any 
other company.
    (2) Revenues derived from a company's management consulting 
activities under this paragraph (b)(3)(vi) will not be considered to be 
financial if the company:
    (i) Owns or controls, directly or indirectly, more than 5 percent of 
the voting securities of the client institution; or
    (ii) Allows a management official, as defined in 12 CFR 212.2(h), of 
the company or any of its affiliates to serve as a management official 
of the client institution, except where such interlocking relationship 
is permitted pursuant to an exemption permitted by the Board of 
Governors.
    (3) Up to 30 percent of a nonbank company's revenues related to 
management consulting services provided to customers not described in 
paragraph (b)(3)(vi)(I)(1)(i) or regarding matters not described in 
paragraph (b)(3)(vi)(I)(1)(ii) of this section will be included in the 
company's financial revenues.
    (4) Employee benefits consulting services. Providing consulting 
services to employee benefit, compensation and insurance plans, 
including designing plans, assisting in the implementation of plans, 
providing administrative services to plans, and developing employee 
communication programs for plans.
    (5) Career counseling services. Providing career counseling services 
to:
    (i) A financial organization \9\ and individuals currently employed 
by, or recently displaced from, a financial organization;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \9\ Financial organization refers to insured depository institution 
holding companies and their subsidiaries, other than nonbanking 
affiliates of diversified savings and loan holding companies that engage 
in activities not permissible under section 4(c)(8) of the BHC Act (12 
U.S.C. 1842(c)(8)).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Individuals who are seeking employment at a financial 
organization; and
    (iii) Individuals who are currently employed in or who seek 
positions in the finance, accounting, and audit departments of any 
company.
    (J) Support services--(1) Courier services. Providing courier 
services for:
    (i) Checks, commercial papers, documents, and written instruments 
(excluding currency or bearer-type negotiable instruments) that are 
exchanged among banks and financial institutions; and
    (ii) Audit and accounting media of a banking or financial nature and 
other

[[Page 1123]]

business records and documents used in processing such media.\10\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \10\ See also the Board of Governors' interpretation on courier 
activities (12 CFR 225.129), which sets forth conditions for company 
entry into the activity.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Printing and selling MICR-encoded items. Printing and selling 
checks and related documents, including corporate image checks, cash 
tickets, voucher checks, deposit slips, savings withdrawal packages, and 
other forms that require Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) 
encoding.
    (K) Insurance agency and underwriting--(1) Credit insurance. Acting 
as principal, agent, or broker for insurance (including home mortgage 
redemption insurance) that is:
    (i) Directly related to an extension of credit by the company or any 
of its subsidiaries; and
    (ii) Limited to ensuring the repayment of the outstanding balance 
due on the extension of credit \11\ in the event of the death, 
disability, or involuntary unemployment of the debtor.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \11\ Extension of credit includes direct loans to borrowers, loans 
purchased from other lenders, and leases of real or personal property so 
long as the leases are nonoperating and full-payout leases that meet the 
requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(vi)(C) of this section.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Finance company subsidiary. Acting as agent or broker for 
insurance directly related to an extension of credit by a finance 
company \12\ that is a subsidiary of a company, if:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \12\ Finance company includes all non-deposit-taking financial 
institutions that engage in a significant degree of consumer lending 
(excluding lending secured by first mortgages) and all financial 
institutions specifically defined by individual states as finance 
companies and that engage in a significant degree of consumer lending.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) The insurance is limited to ensuring repayment of the 
outstanding balance on such extension of credit in the event of loss or 
damage to any property used as collateral for the extension of credit; 
and
    (ii) The extension of credit is not more than $10,000, or $25,000 if 
it is to finance the purchase of a residential manufactured home \13\ 
and the credit is secured by the home; and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \13\ These limitations increase at the end of each calendar year, 
beginning with 1982, by the percentage increase in the Consumer Price 
Index for Urban Wage Earners and Clerical Workers published by the 
Bureau of Labor Statistics.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) The applicant commits to notify borrowers in writing that: 
they are not required to purchase such insurance from the applicant; 
such insurance does not insure any interest of the borrower in the 
collateral; and the applicant will accept more comprehensive property 
insurance in place of such single-interest insurance.
    (3) Insurance in small towns. Engaging in any insurance agency 
activity in a place where the company or a subsidiary has a lending 
office and that:
    (i) Has a population not exceeding 5,000 (as shown in the preceding 
decennial census); or
    (ii) Has inadequate insurance agency facilities, as determined by 
the Board of Governors, after notice and opportunity for hearing.
    (4) Insurance-agency activities conducted on May 1, 1982. Engaging 
in any specific insurance-agency activity \14\ if the company, or 
subsidiary conducting the specific activity, conducted such activity on 
May 1, 1982, or received approval from the Board of Governors to conduct 
such activity on or before May 1, 1982.\15\ Revenues derived from a 
company's specific insurance agency activity under this clause will be 
considered financial only if the company:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \14\ Nothing contained in this provision precludes a subsidiary that 
is authorized to engage in a specific insurance-agency activity under 
this clause from continuing to engage in the particular activity after 
merger with an affiliate, if the merger is for legitimate business 
purposes.
    \15\ For the purposes of this paragraph, activities engaged in on 
May 1, 1982, include activities carried on subsequently as the result of 
an application to engage in such activities pending before the Board of 
Governors on May 1, 1982, and approved subsequently by the Board of 
Governors or as the result of the acquisition by such company pursuant 
to a binding written contract entered into on or before May 1, 1982, of 
another company engaged in such activities at the time of the 
acquisition.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) Engages in such specific insurance agency activity only at 
locations: in the state in which the company has its principal place of 
business (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1842(d)); in any state or states 
immediately adjacent to such state; and in any state in which the

[[Page 1124]]

specific insurance-agency activity was conducted (or was approved to be 
conducted) by such company or subsidiary thereof or by any other 
subsidiary of such company on May 1, 1982; and
    (ii) Provides other insurance coverages that may become available 
after May 1, 1982, so long as those coverages insure against the types 
of risks as (or are otherwise functionally equivalent to) coverages sold 
or approved to be sold on May 1, 1982, by the company or subsidiary.
    (5) Supervision of retail insurance agents. Supervising on behalf of 
insurance underwriters the activities of retail insurance agents who 
sell:
    (i) Fidelity insurance and property and casualty insurance on the 
real and personal property used in the operations of the company or its 
subsidiaries; and
    (ii) Group insurance that protects the employees of the company or 
its subsidiaries.
    (6) Small companies. Engaging in any insurance-agency activity if 
the company has total consolidated assets of $50 million or less. 
Revenues derived from a company's insurance-agency activities under this 
paragraph will be considered financial only if the company does not 
engage in the sale of life insurance or annuities except as provided in 
paragraphs (b)(3)(vi)(K)(1) and (3) of this section, and does not 
continue to engage in insurance-agency activities pursuant to this 
provision more than 90 days after the end of the quarterly reporting 
period in which total assets of the company and its subsidiaries exceed 
$50 million.
    (7) Insurance-agency activities conducted before 1971. Engaging in 
any insurance-agency activity performed at any location in the United 
States directly or indirectly by a company that was engaged in 
insurance-agency activities prior to January 1, 1971, as a consequence 
of approval by the Board of Governors prior to January 1, 1971.
    (L) Community development activities --(1) Financing and investment 
activities. Making equity and debt investments in corporations or 
projects designed primarily to promote community welfare, such as the 
economic rehabilitation and development of low-income areas by providing 
housing, services, or jobs for residents.
    (2) Advisory activities. Providing advisory and related services for 
programs designed primarily to promote community welfare.
    (M) Money orders, savings bonds, and traveler's checks. The issuance 
and sale at retail of money orders and similar consumer-type payment 
instruments; the sale of U.S. savings bonds; and the issuance and sale 
of traveler's checks.
    (N) Data processing.
    (1) Providing data processing, data storage and data transmission 
services, facilities (including data processing, data storage and data 
transmission hardware, software, documentation, or operating personnel), 
databases, advice, and access to such services, facilities, or databases 
by any technological means, if the data to be processed, stored or 
furnished are financial, banking or economic.
    (2) Up to 30 percent of a nonbank company's revenues related to 
providing general purpose hardware in connection with providing data 
processing products or services described in (b)(2)(vi)(N)(1) of this 
section will be included in the company's financial revenues.
    (O) Administrative services. Providing administrative and other 
services to mutual funds.
    (P) Securities exchange. Owning shares of a securities exchange.
    (Q) Certification authority. Acting as a certification authority for 
digital signatures and authenticating the identity of persons conducting 
financial and nonfinancial transactions.
    (R) Employment histories. Providing employment histories to third 
parties for use in making credit decisions and to depository 
institutions and their affiliates for use in the ordinary course of 
business.
    (S) Check cashing and wire transmission. Check cashing and wire 
transmission services.
    (T) Services offered in connection with banking services. In 
connection with offering banking services, providing notary public 
services, selling postage stamps and postage-paid envelopes, providing 
vehicle registration

[[Page 1125]]

services, and selling public transportation tickets and tokens.
    (U) Real estate title abstracting.
    (vii) Engaging, in the United States, in any activity that a bank 
holding company may engage in outside of the United States; and the 
Board has determined, under regulations prescribed or interpretations 
issued pursuant to section 4(c)(13) of the BHC Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 
1843(c)(13)) to be usual in connection with the transaction of banking 
or other financial operations abroad. Those activities include--
    (A) Providing management consulting services, including to any 
person with respect to nonfinancial matters, so long as the management 
consulting services are advisory and do not allow the company to control 
the person to which the services are provided.
    (B) Operating a travel agency in connection with financial services.
    (C) Organizing, sponsoring, and managing a mutual fund.
    (D) Commercial banking and other banking activities.
    (viii) (A) Acting as a finder in bringing together one or more 
buyers and sellers of any product or service for transactions that the 
parties themselves negotiate and consummate, including providing any or 
all of the following services through any means--
    (1) Identifying potential parties, making inquiries as to interest, 
introducing, and referring potential parties to each other, and 
arranging contacts between and meetings of interested parties;
    (2) Conveying between interested parties expressions of interest, 
bids, offers, orders and confirmations relating to a transaction; and
    (3) Transmitting information conveying products and services to 
potential parties in connection with the activities described paragraphs 
(b)(3)(viii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section.
    (B) The following are examples of finder services when done in 
accordance with paragraphs (b)(3)(viii)(C)-(D) of this section. These 
examples are not exclusive.
    (1) Hosting an electronic marketplace on the company's Internet Web 
site by providing hypertext or similar links to the Web sites of third 
party buyers or sellers.
    (2) Hosting on the company's servers the Internet Web site of--
    (i) A buyer (or seller) that provides information concerning the 
buyer (or seller) and the products or services it seeks to buy (or sell) 
and allows sellers (or buyers) to submit expressions of interest, bids, 
offers, orders and confirmations relating to such products or services; 
or
    (ii) A government or government agency that provides the information 
concerning the services or benefits made available by government or 
government agency, assists persons in completing applications to receive 
such services or benefits from the government or agency, and allows 
persons to transmit their applications for services or benefits to the 
government or agency.
    (3) Operating an Internet Web site that allows multiple buyers and 
sellers to exchange information concerning the products and services 
that they are willing to purchase or sell, locate potential 
counterparties for transactions, aggregate orders for goods or services 
with those made by other parties, and enter into transactions between 
themselves.
    (4) Operating a telephone call center that provides permissible 
finder services.
    (C) To be a finder service for purposes of this section, the company 
providing the service must comply with the following limitations.
    (1) A company providing the service may act only as an intermediary 
between a buyer and a seller.
    (2) A company providing the service may not bind any buyer or seller 
to the terms of a specific transaction or negotiate the terms of a 
specific transaction on behalf of a buyer or seller, except that the 
company may--
    (i) Arrange for buyers to receive preferred terms from sellers so 
long as the terms are not negotiated as part of any individual 
transaction, are provided generally to customers or broad categories of 
customers, and are made available by the seller (and not by the 
company); and
    (ii) Establish rules of general applicability governing the use and 
operation

[[Page 1126]]

of the finder service, including rules that govern the submission of 
bids and offers by buyers and sellers that use the finder service and 
the circumstances under which the finder service will match bids and 
offers submitted by buyers and sellers, and govern the manner in which 
buyers and sellers may bind themselves to the terms of a specific 
transaction.
    (3) Services provided by a company will not be considered finder 
services if the company providing the service--
    (i) Takes title to or acquires or holds an ownership interest in any 
product or service offered or sold through the finder service;
    (ii) Provides distribution services for physical products or 
services offered or sold through the finder service;
    (iii) Owns or operates any real or personal property that is used 
for the purpose of manufacturing, storing, transporting, or assembling 
physical products offered or sold by third parties; or
    (iv) Owns or operates any real or personal property that serves as a 
physical location for the physical purchase, sale or distribution of 
products or services offered or sold by third parties.
    (D) Services provided by a company will not be considered finder 
services if the company providing such services engages in any activity 
that would require the company to register or obtain a license as a real 
estate agent or broker under applicable law.
    (E) To be a finder service for purposes of this section, a company 
providing the service must distinguish the products and services offered 
by the company from those offered by a third party through the finder 
service.
    (ix) Directly, or indirectly acquiring or controlling, whether as 
principal, on behalf of one or more entities, or otherwise, shares, 
assets, or ownership interests (including debt or equity securities, 
partnership interests, trust certificates, or other instruments 
representing ownership) of a company or other entity, whether or not 
constituting control of such company or entity, engaged in any activity 
not financial in nature as defined in this section if:
    (A) Such shares, assets, or ownership interests are acquired and 
held as part of a bona fide underwriting or merchant or investment 
banking activity, including investment activities engaged in for the 
purpose of appreciation and ultimate resale or disposition of the 
investment;
    (B) Such shares, assets, or ownership interests are held for a 
period of time to enable the sale or disposition thereof on a reasonable 
basis consistent with the financial viability of the activities 
described in paragraph (b)(3)(ix)(A) of this section; and
    (C) During the period such shares, assets, or ownership interests 
are held, the company does not routinely manage or operate such company 
or entity except as may be necessary or required to obtain a reasonable 
return on investment upon resale or disposition.
    (x) Directly or indirectly acquiring or controlling, whether as 
principal, on behalf of one or more entities, or otherwise, shares, 
assets, or ownership interests (including debt or equity securities, 
partnership interests, trust certificates or other instruments 
representing ownership) of a company or other entity, whether or not 
constituting control of such company or entity engaged in any activity 
not financial in nature as defined in this section if--
    (A) Such shares, assets, or ownership interests are acquired and 
held by an insurance company that is predominantly engaged in 
underwriting life, accident and health, or property and casualty 
insurance (other than credit-related insurance) or providing and issuing 
annuities;
    (B) Such shares, assets, or ownership interests represent an 
investment made in the ordinary course of business of such insurance 
company in accordance with relevant State law governing such 
investments; and
    (C) During the period such shares, assets, or ownership interests 
are held, the company does not routinely manage or operate such company 
except as may be necessary or required to obtain a reasonable return on 
investment.
    (xi) Lending, exchanging, transferring, investing for others, or 
safeguarding financial assets other than money or securities.
    (xii) Providing any device or other instrumentality for transferring 
money or other financial assets.

[[Page 1127]]

    (xiii) Arranging, effecting, or facilitating financial transactions 
for the account of third parties.
    (xiv) Ownership or control of one or more depository institutions.
    (4) The term ``recommending agencies'' means:
    (i) The Board of Governors and the Securities and Exchange 
Commission in consultation with the FDIC, for a company;
    (A) That is a broker or a dealer; or
    (B) Whose largest U.S. subsidiary is a broker or a dealer;
    (ii) The Board of Governors and the Director of the Federal 
Insurance Office in consultation with the FDIC, for a company that is an 
``insurance company'', or whose largest U.S. subsidiary is an insurance 
company, as that term is defined in section 201(a)(13) of the Dodd-Frank 
Act; \16\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \16\ 12 U.S.C. 5381(a)(13).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) The Board of Governors and the FDIC, for any other company.
    (5) The term ``total consolidated revenues'' means the total gross 
revenues of the company and all entities subject to consolidation by the 
company for a fiscal year.
    (c) Effect of other authority. Any activity described in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section is considered financial in nature or incidental 
thereto for purposes of this section regardless of whether--
    (1) A bank holding company (including a financial holding company or 
a foreign bank) may be authorized to engage in the activity, or own or 
control shares of a company engaged in such activity, under any other 
provisions of the BHC Act or other Federal law including, but not 
limited to, section 4(a)(2), section 4(c)(5), section 4(c)(6), section 
4(c)(7), section 4(c)(9), or section 4(c)(13) of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 
1843(a)(2), (c)(5), (c)(6), (c)(7), (c)(9), or (c)(13)) and the Board of 
Governors' implementing regulations; or
    (2) Other provisions of Federal or state law or regulations 
prohibit, restrict, or otherwise place conditions on the conduct of the 
activity by a bank holding company (including a financial holding 
company or foreign bank) or bank holding companies generally.
    (d) Rule of construction. Revenues derived from an investment by the 
company in an entity whose financial statements are not consolidated 
with those of the company will be treated as revenues derived from 
financial activities, unless such treatment is not appropriate based on 
information that the recommending agencies or the Secretary, have at the 
time a written recommendation or determination is made under section 203 
of the Dodd-Frank Act.

[78 FR 34731, June 10, 2013]



Sec. 380.9  Treatment of fraudulent and preferential transfers.

    (a) Coverage. This section shall apply to all receiverships in which 
the FDIC is appointed as receiver under 12 U.S.C. 5382(a) or 
5390(a)(1)(E) of a covered financial company or a covered subsidiary, 
respectively, as defined in 12 U.S.C. 5381(a)(8) and (9).
    (b) Avoidance standard for transfer of property. (1) In applying 12 
U.S.C. 5390(a)(11)(H)(i)(II) to a transfer of property for purposes of 
12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(11)(A), the Corporation, as receiver of a covered 
financial company or a covered subsidiary, which is thereafter deemed to 
be a covered financial company pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(1)(E)(ii), 
shall determine whether the transfer has been perfected such that a bona 
fide purchaser from such covered financial company or such covered 
subsidiary, as applicable, against whom applicable law permits such 
transfer to be perfected cannot acquire an interest in the property 
transferred that is superior to the interest in such property of the 
transferee.
    (2) In applying 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(11)(H)(i)(II) to a transfer of 
real property, other than fixtures, but including the interest of a 
seller or purchaser under a contract for the sale of real property, for 
purposes of 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(11)(B), the Corporation, as receiver of a 
covered financial company or a covered subsidiary, which is thereafter 
deemed to be a covered financial company pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
5390(a)(1)(E)(ii), shall determine whether the transfer has been 
perfected such that a bona fide purchaser from such covered financial 
company or such covered subsidiary, as applicable, against

[[Page 1128]]

whom applicable law permits such transfer to be perfected cannot acquire 
an interest in the property transferred that is superior to the interest 
in such property of the transferee. For purposes of this section, the 
term fixture shall be interpreted in accordance with U.S. Federal 
bankruptcy law.
    (3) In applying 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(11)(H)(i)(II) to a transfer of a 
fixture or property, other than real property, for purposes of 12 U.S.C. 
5390(a)(11)(B), the Corporation, as receiver of a covered financial 
company or a covered subsidiary which is thereafter deemed to be a 
covered financial company pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(1)(E)(ii), shall 
determine whether the transfer has been perfected such that a creditor 
on a simple contract cannot acquire a judicial lien that is superior to 
the interest of the transferee, and the standard of whether the transfer 
is perfected such that a bona fide purchaser cannot acquire an interest 
in the property transferred that is superior to the interest in such 
property of the transferee of such property shall not apply to any such 
transfer under this paragraph (b)(3).
    (c) Grace period for perfection. In determining when a transfer 
occurs for purposes of 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(11)(B), the Corporation, as 
receiver of a covered financial company or a covered subsidiary, which 
is thereafter deemed to be a covered financial company pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 5390(a)(1)(E)(ii), shall apply the following standard:
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, a 
transfer shall be deemed to have been made
    (i) At the time such transfer takes effect between the transferor 
and the transferee, if such transfer is perfected at, or within 30 days 
after, such time, except as provided in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this 
section;
    (ii) At the time such transfer takes effect between the transferor 
and the transferee, with respect to a transfer of an interest of the 
transferor in property that creates a security interest in property 
acquired by the transferor:
    (A) To the extent such security interest secures new value that was:
    (1) Given at or after the signing of a security agreement that 
contains a description of such property as collateral;
    (2) Given by or on behalf of the secured party under such agreement;
    (3) Given to enable the transferor to acquire such property; and
    (4) In fact used by the transferor to acquire such property; and
    (B) That is perfected on or before 30 days after the transferor 
receives possession of such property;
    (iii) At the time such transfer is perfected, if such transfer is 
perfected after the 30-day period described in paragraph (c)(1)(i) or 
(ii) of this section, as applicable; or
    (iv) Immediately before the appointment of the Corporation as 
receiver of a covered financial company or a covered subsidiary which is 
thereafter deemed to be a covered financial company pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 5390(a)(1)(E)(ii), if such transfer is not perfected at the later 
of--
    (A) The earlier of
    (1) The date of the filing, if any, of a petition by or against the 
transferor under title 11 of the United States Code; and
    (2) The date of the appointment of the Corporation as receiver of 
such covered financial company or such covered subsidiary; or
    (B) Thirty days after such transfer takes effect between the 
transferor and the transferee.
    (2) For the purposes of this paragraph (c), a transfer is not made 
until the covered financial company or a covered subsidiary, which is 
thereafter deemed to be a covered financial company pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 5390(a)(1)(E)(ii), has acquired rights in the property 
transferred.
    (d) Limitations. The provisions of this section do not act to waive, 
relinquish, limit or otherwise affect any rights or powers of the 
Corporation in any capacity, whether pursuant to applicable law or any 
agreement or contract.

[76 FR 41641, July 15, 2011]



Sec. 380.10  Maximum obligation limitation.

    (a) General rule. The FDIC shall not, in connection with the orderly 
liquidation of a covered financial company, issue or incur any 
obligation, if, after issuing or incurring the obligation, the aggregate 
amount of such obligations

[[Page 1129]]

outstanding for each covered financial company would exceed--
    (1) An amount that is equal to 10 percent of the total consolidated 
assets of the covered financial company, based on the most recent 
financial statement available, during the 30-day period immediately 
following the date of appointment of the FDIC as receiver (or a shorter 
time period if the FDIC has calculated the amount described under 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section); and
    (2) The amount that is equal to 90 percent of the fair value of the 
total consolidated assets of each covered financial company that are 
available for repayment, after the time period described in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section.
    (b) Definitions: For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section:
    (1) The term ``fair value'' means the expected total aggregate value 
of each asset, or group of assets that are managed within a portfolio, 
of a covered financial company on a consolidated basis if such asset, or 
group of assets, was sold or otherwise disposed of in an orderly 
transaction.
    (2) The term ``most recent financial statement available'' means a 
covered financial company's:
    (i) Most recent financial statement filed with the Securities and 
Exchange Commission or any other regulatory body;
    (ii) Most recent financial statement audited by an independent CPA 
firm; or
    (iii) Other available financial statements. The FDIC and the 
Treasury will jointly determine the most pertinent of the above 
financial statements, taking into consideration the timeliness and 
reliability of the statements being considered.
    (3) The term ``obligation'' means, with respect to any covered 
financial company:
    (i) Any guarantee issued by the FDIC on behalf of the covered 
financial company;
    (ii) Any amount borrowed pursuant to section 210(n)(5)(A) of the 
Dodd-Frank Act; and
    (iii) Any other obligation with respect to the covered financial 
company for which the FDIC has a direct or contingent liability to pay 
any amount.
    (4) The term ``total consolidated assets of each covered financial 
company that are available for repayment'' means the difference between:
    (i) The total assets of the covered financial company on a 
consolidated basis that are available for liquidation during the 
operation of the receivership; and
    (ii) To the extent included in (b)(4)(i) of this section, all assets 
that are separated from, or made unavailable to, the covered financial 
company by a statutory or regulatory barrier that prevents the covered 
financial company from possessing or selling assets and using the 
proceeds from the sale of such assets.

[77 FR 37557, June 22, 2012]



Sec. 380.11  Treatment of mutual insurance holding companies.

    A mutual insurance holding company shall be treated as an insurance 
company for the purpose of section 203(e) of the Dodd-Frank Act, 12 
U.S.C. 5383(e); provided that--
    (a) The company is subject to the insurance laws of the state of its 
domicile, including, specifically and without limitation, a statutory 
regime for the rehabilitation or liquidation of insurance companies that 
are in default or in danger of default;
    (b) The company is not subject to bankruptcy proceedings under title 
11 of the United States Code;
    (c) The largest United States subsidiary of the company (as measured 
by total assets as of the end of the previous calendar quarter) is an 
insurance company or an intermediate insurance stock holding company; 
and
    (d) The assets and investments of the company are limited to the 
securities of an intermediate insurance stock holding company, the 
securities of the converted mutual insurance company and other assets 
and securities of the type authorized for holding and investment by an 
insurance company domiciled in its state of incorporation.

[77 FR 25353, Apr. 30, 2012]

[[Page 1130]]



Sec. 380.12  Enforcement of subsidiary and affiliate contracts by 
the FDIC as receiver of a covered financial company.

    (a) General. (1) Contracts of subsidiaries or affiliates of a 
covered financial company that are linked to or supported by the covered 
financial company shall remain in full force and effect notwithstanding 
any specified financial condition clause contained in such contract and 
no counterparty shall be entitled to terminate, accelerate, liquidate or 
exercise any other remedy arising solely by reason of such specified 
financial condition clause. The Corporation as receiver for the covered 
financial company shall have the power to enforce such contracts 
according to their terms.
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, if the 
obligations under such contract are supported by the covered financial 
company then such contract shall be enforceable only if--
    (i) Any such support together with all related assets and 
liabilities are transferred to and assumed by a qualified transferee not 
later than 5 p.m. (eastern time) on the business day following the date 
of appointment of the Corporation as receiver for the covered financial 
company; or
    (ii) If and to the extent paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section is not 
satisfied, the Corporation as receiver otherwise provides adequate 
protection to the counterparties to such contracts with respect to the 
covered financial company's support of the obligations or liabilities of 
the subsidiary or affiliate and provides notice consistent with the 
requirements of paragraph (d) of this section not later than 5 p.m. 
(eastern time) on the business day following the date of appointment of 
the Corporation as receiver.
    (3) The Corporation as receiver of a subsidiary of a covered 
financial company (including a failed insured depository institution 
that is a subsidiary of a covered financial company) may enforce any 
contract that is enforceable by the Corporation as receiver for a 
covered financial company under paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this 
section.
    (b) Definitions. For purposes of this part, the following terms 
shall have the meanings set forth below:
    (1) A contract is ``linked'' to a covered financial company if it 
contains a specified financial condition clause that specifies the 
covered financial company.
    (2)(i) A ``specified financial condition clause'' means any 
provision of any contract (whether expressly stated in the contract or 
incorporated by reference to any other contract, agreement or document) 
that permits a contract counterparty to terminate, accelerate, liquidate 
or exercise any other remedy under any contract to which the subsidiary 
or affiliate is a party or to obtain possession or exercise control over 
any property of the subsidiary or affiliate or affect any contractual 
rights of the subsidiary or affiliate directly or indirectly based upon 
or by reason of
    (A) A change in the financial condition or the insolvency of a 
specified company that is a covered financial company;
    (B) The appointment of the FDIC as receiver for the specified 
company or any actions incidental thereto including, without limitation, 
the filing of a petition seeking judicial action with respect to the 
appointment of the Corporation as receiver for the specified company or 
the issuance of recommendations or determinations of systemic risk;
    (C) The exercise of rights or powers by the Corporation as receiver 
for the specified company, including, without limitation, the 
appointment of the Securities Investor Protection Corporation (SIPC) as 
trustee in the case of a specified company that is a covered broker-
dealer and the exercise by SIPC of all of its rights and powers as 
trustee;
    (D) The transfer of assets or liabilities to a bridge financial 
company or other qualified transferee;
    (E) Any actions taken by the FDIC as receiver for the specified 
company to effectuate the liquidation of the specified company;
    (F) Any actions taken by or on behalf of the bridge financial 
company to operate and terminate the bridge financial company including 
the dissolution, conversion, merger or termination of a bridge financial 
company or actions incidental or related thereto; or

[[Page 1131]]

    (G) The transfer of assets or interests in a transferee bridge 
financial company or its successor in full or partial satisfaction of 
creditors' claims against the covered financial company.
    (ii) Without limiting the general language of paragraphs (b)(1) and 
(2) of this section, a specified financial condition clause includes a 
``walkaway clause'' as defined in 12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(8)(F)(iii) or any 
regulations promulgated thereunder.
    (3) The term ``support'' means undertaking any of the following for 
the purpose of supporting the contractual obligations of a subsidiary or 
affiliate of a covered financial company for the benefit of a 
counterparty to a linked contract--
    (i) To guarantee, indemnify, undertake to make any loan or advance 
to or on behalf of the subsidiary or affiliate;
    (ii) To undertake to make capital contributions to the subsidiary or 
affiliate; or
    (iii) To be contractually obligated to provide any other financial 
assistance to the subsidiary or affiliate.
    (4) The term ``related assets and liabilities'' means--
    (i) Any assets of the covered financial company that directly serve 
as collateral for the covered financial company's support (including a 
perfected security interest therein or equivalent under applicable law);
    (ii) Any rights of offset or setoff or netting arrangements that 
directly arise out of or directly relate to the covered financial 
company's support of the obligations or liabilities of its subsidiary or 
affiliate; and
    (iii) Any liabilities of the covered financial company that directly 
arise out of or directly relate to its support of the obligations or 
liabilities of the subsidiary or affiliate.
    (5) A ``qualified transferee'' means any bridge financial company or 
any third party (other than a third party for which a conservator, 
receiver, trustee in bankruptcy, or other legal custodian has been 
appointed, or which is otherwise the subject of a bankruptcy or 
insolvency proceeding).
    (6) A ``successor'' of a bridge financial company means
    (i) A company into which the bridge financial company is converted 
by way of incorporation under the laws of a State of the United States; 
or
    (ii) The surviving company of a merger or consolidation of the 
bridge financial company with another company (whether before or after 
the conversion (if any) of the bridge financial company).
    (c) Adequate protection. The Corporation as receiver for a covered 
financial company may provide adequate protection with respect to a 
covered financial company's support of the obligations and liabilities 
of a subsidiary or an affiliate pursuant to paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this 
section by any of the following means:
    (1) Making a cash payment or periodic cash payments to the 
counterparties of the contract to the extent that the failure to cause 
the assignment and assumption of the covered financial company's support 
and related assets and liabilities causes a loss to the counterparties;
    (2) Providing to the counterparties a guaranty, issued by the 
Corporation as receiver for the covered financial company, of the 
obligations of the subsidiary or affiliate of the covered financial 
company under the contract; or
    (3) Providing relief that will result in the realization by the 
counterparty of the indubitable equivalent of the covered financial 
company's support of such obligations or liabilities.
    (d) Notice of transfer of support or provision of adequate 
protection. If the Corporation as receiver for a covered financial 
company transfers any support and related assets and liabilities of the 
covered financial company in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this 
section or provides adequate protection in accordance with paragraph 
(a)(2)(ii) of this section, it shall promptly take steps to notify 
contract counterparties of such transfer or provision of adequate 
protection. Notice shall be given in a manner reasonably calculated to 
provide notification in a timely manner, including, but not limited to, 
notice posted on the Web site of the Corporation, the covered financial 
company or the subsidiary or affiliate, notice via electronic media, or 
notice by publication. Neither the failure to provide actual notice to 
any party nor the lack of actual knowledge on the part of

[[Page 1132]]

any party shall affect the authority of the Corporation to enforce any 
contract or exercise any rights or powers under this section.

[77 FR 63214, Oct. 16, 2012]



Sec. 380.13  Restrictions on sale of assets of a covered financial
company by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.

    (a) Purpose and applicability. (1) Purpose. The purpose of this 
section is to prohibit individuals or entities that profited or engaged 
in wrongdoing at the expense of a covered financial company or an 
insured depository institution, or seriously mismanaged a covered 
financial company or an insured depository institution, from buying 
assets of a covered financial company from the FDIC.
    (2) Applicability. (i) The restrictions of this section apply to the 
sale of assets of a covered financial company by the FDIC as receiver or 
in its corporate capacity.
    (ii) The restrictions in this section apply to the sale of assets of 
a bridge financial company if:
    (A) The sale is not in the ordinary course of business of the bridge 
financial company, and
    (B) The approval or non-objection of the FDIC is required in 
connection with the sale according to the charter, articles of 
association, bylaws or other documents or instruments establishing the 
governance of the bridge financial company and the authorities of its 
board of directors and executive officers.
    (iii) In the case of a sale of securities backed by a pool of assets 
that may include assets of a covered financial company by a trust or 
other entity, this section applies only to the sale of assets by the 
FDIC to an underwriter in an initial offering, and not to any other 
purchaser of the securities.
    (iv) The restrictions of this section do not apply to a sale of a 
security or a group or index of securities, a commodity, or any 
qualified financial contract that customarily is traded through a 
financial intermediary, as defined in paragraph (b) of this section, 
where the seller cannot control selection of the purchaser and the sale 
is consummated through that customary practice.
    (v) The restrictions of this section do not apply to a judicial sale 
or a trustee's sale of property that secures an obligation to the FDIC 
where the sale is not conducted or controlled by the FDIC.
    (vi) The restrictions of this section do not apply to the sale or 
transfer of an asset if such sale or transfer resolves or settles, or is 
part of the resolution or settlement of, one (1) or more claims or 
obligations that have been, or could have been, asserted by the FDIC 
against the person with whom the FDIC is settling regardless of the 
amount of such claims or obligations.
    (3) The FDIC retains the authority to establish other policies 
restricting asset sales. Neither 12 U.S.C. 5390(r) nor this section in 
any way limits the authority of the FDIC to establish policies 
prohibiting the sale of assets to prospective purchasers who have 
injured the respective covered financial company, or to other 
prospective purchasers, such as certain employees or contractors of the 
FDIC, or individuals who are not in compliance with the terms of any 
debt or duty owed to the FDIC in any of its capacities. Any such 
policies may be independent of, in conjunction with, or in addition to 
the restrictions set forth in this part.
    (b) Definitions. Many of the terms used in this section are defined 
in the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, 12 
U.S.C. 5301, et seq. Additionally, for the purposes of this section, the 
following terms are defined:
    (1) Associated person. An ``associated person'' of an individual or 
entity means:
    (i) With respect to an individual:
    (A) The individual's spouse or dependent child or any member of his 
or her immediate household;
    (B) A partnership of which the individual is or was a general or 
limited partner or a limited liability company of which the individual 
is or was a member; or
    (C) A corporation of which the individual is or was an officer or 
director;
    (ii) With respect to a partnership, a managing or general partner of 
the

[[Page 1133]]

partnership or with respect to a limited liability company, a manager; 
or
    (iii) With respect to any entity, an individual or entity who, 
acting individually or in concert with one or more individuals or 
entities, owns or controls 25 percent or more of the entity.
    (2) Default. The term ``default'' means any failure to comply with 
the terms of an obligation to such an extent that:
    (i) A judgment has been rendered in favor of the FDIC or a covered 
financial company; or
    (ii) In the case of a secured obligation, the lien on property 
securing such obligation has been foreclosed.
    (3) Financial intermediary. The term ``financial intermediary'' 
means any broker, dealer, bank, underwriter, exchange, clearing agency 
registered with the SEC under section 17A of the Securities Exchange Act 
of 1934, transfer agent (as defined in section 3(a)(25) of the 
Securities Exchange Act of 1934), central counterparty or any other 
entity whose role is to facilitate a transaction by, as a riskless 
intermediary, purchasing a security or qualified financial contract from 
one counterparty and then selling it to another.
    (4) Obligation. The term ``obligation'' means any debt or duty to 
pay money owed to the FDIC or a covered financial company, including any 
guarantee of any such debt or duty.
    (5) Person. The term ``person'' means an individual, or an entity 
with a legally independent existence, including: A trustee; the 
beneficiary of at least a 25 percent share of the proceeds of a trust; a 
partnership; a limited liability company; a corporation; an association; 
or other organization or society.
    (6) Substantial loss. The term ``substantial loss'' means:
    (i) An obligation that is delinquent for ninety (90) or more days 
and on which there remains an outstanding balance of more than $50,000;
    (ii) An unpaid final judgment in excess of $50,000 regardless of 
whether it becomes forgiven in whole or in part in a bankruptcy 
proceeding;
    (iii) A deficiency balance following a foreclosure of collateral in 
excess of $50,000, regardless of whether it becomes forgiven in whole or 
in part in a bankruptcy proceeding; or
    (iv) Any loss in excess of $50,000 evidenced by an IRS Form 1099-C 
(Information Reporting for Cancellation of Debt).
    (c) Restrictions on the sale of assets. (1) A person may not acquire 
any assets of a covered financial company from the FDIC if, prior to the 
appointment of the FDIC as receiver for the covered financial company, 
the person or its associated person:
    (i) Has participated as an officer or director of a covered 
financial company or of an affiliate of a covered financial company in a 
material way in one or more transactions that caused a substantial loss 
to a covered financial company;
    (ii) Has been removed from, or prohibited from participating in the 
affairs of, a financial company pursuant to any final enforcement action 
by its primary financial regulatory agency;
    (iii) Has demonstrated a pattern or practice of defalcation 
regarding obligations to a covered financial company;
    (iv) Has been convicted of committing or conspiring to commit any 
offense under 18 U.S.C. 215, 656, 657, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1014, 
1032, 1341, 1343 or 1344 affecting any covered financial company and 
there has been a default with respect to one or more obligations owed by 
that person or its associated person; or
    (v) Would be prohibited from purchasing the assets of a failed 
insured depository institution from the FDIC under 12 U.S.C. 1821(p) or 
its implementing regulation at 12 CFR part 340.
    (2) For purposes of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, a person has 
participated in a ``material way in a transaction that caused a 
substantial loss to a covered financial company'' if, in connection with 
a substantial loss to the covered financial company, the person has been 
found in a final determination by a court or administrative tribunal, or 
is alleged in a judicial or administrative action brought by a primary 
financial regulatory agency or by any component of the government of the 
United States or of any state:
    (i) To have violated any law, regulation, or order issued by a 
federal or

[[Page 1134]]

state regulatory agency, or breached or defaulted on a written agreement 
with a federal or state regulatory agency, or breached a written 
agreement with a covered financial company; or
    (ii) To have breached a fiduciary duty owed to a covered financial 
company.
    (3) For purposes of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, a person or 
its associated person has demonstrated a ``pattern or practice of 
defalcation'' regarding obligations to a covered financial company if 
the person or associated person has:
    (i) Engaged in more than one transaction that created an obligation 
on the part of such person or its associated person with intent to cause 
a loss to any financial company or with reckless disregard for whether 
such transactions would cause a loss to any such financial company; and
    (ii) The transactions, in the aggregate, caused a substantial loss 
to one or more covered financial companies.
    (d) Restrictions when FDIC provides seller financing. A person may 
not borrow money or accept credit from the FDIC in connection with the 
purchase of any assets from the FDIC or any covered financial company 
if:
    (1) There has been a default with respect to one or more obligations 
totaling in excess of $1,000,000 owed by that person or its associated 
person; and
    (2) The person or its associated person made any fraudulent 
misrepresentations in connection with any such obligation(s).
    (e) No obligation to provide seller financing. The FDIC still has 
the right to make an independent determination, based upon all relevant 
facts of a person's financial condition and history, of that person's 
eligibility to receive any loan or extension of credit from the FDIC, 
even if the person is not in any way disqualified from purchasing assets 
from the FDIC under the restrictions set forth in this section.
    (f) Purchaser eligibility certificate required. (1) Before any 
person may purchase any asset from the FDIC that person must certify, 
under penalty of perjury, that none of the restrictions contained in 
this section applies to the purchase. The person must also certify that 
neither the identity nor form of the person, nor any aspect of the 
contemplated transaction, has been created or altered with the intent, 
in whole or in part, to allow an individual or entity who otherwise 
would be ineligible to purchase assets from the FDIC to benefit directly 
or indirectly from the proposed transaction. The FDIC may establish the 
form of the certification and may change the form from time to time.
    (2) Notwithstanding paragraph (f)(1) of this section, and unless the 
Director of the FDIC's Division of Resolutions and Receiverships, or 
designee, in his or her discretion so requires, a certification need not 
be provided by:
    (i) A state or political subdivision of a state;
    (ii) A federal agency or instrumentality such as the Government 
National Mortgage Association;
    (iii) A federally-regulated, government-sponsored enterprise such as 
Federal National Mortgage Association or Federal Home Loan Mortgage 
Corporation; or
    (iv) A bridge financial company.

[79 FR 20766, Apr. 14, 2014]



Sec. 380.14  Record retention requirements.

    (a) Scope. 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(16)(D) requires that the Corporation 
establish retention schedules for the maintenance of certain documents 
and records of a covered financial company for which the Corporation has 
been appointed receiver and certain documents and records generated by 
the Corporation as receiver for a covered financial company in 
connection with the exercise of its authorities under Title II of the 
Dodd-Frank Act, 12 U.S.C. 5381 through 5397. This section addresses 
retention of those two categories of documents and records.
    (b) Definitions. For the purposes of this section, the following 
terms shall have the following meanings:
    (1) Documentary material. The term documentary material means any 
reasonably accessible document, book, paper, map, photograph, 
microfiche, microfilm, or writing regardless of physical form or 
characteristics and includes any computer or electronically-created data 
or file.
    (2) Inherited record. The term inherited record means documentary 
material of a covered financial company, provided

[[Page 1135]]

that such documentary material existed on the date of the appointment of 
the Corporation as receiver for such covered financial company and was 
generated or maintained by the covered financial company in the course 
of, and necessary to, the transaction of its business. The determination 
of whether documentary material was generated or maintained by the 
covered financial company in the course of, and necessary to, the 
transaction of its business shall be based on an analysis of the 
following factors;
    (i) Whether such documentary material was generated or maintained in 
accordance with the covered financial company's own practices and 
procedures (including the document retention policies of the covered 
financial company) or pursuant to standards established by the covered 
financial company's regulators;
    (ii) Whether such documentary material is necessary for the 
Corporation to carry out its obligations as receiver for the covered 
financial company; and
    (iii) Whether there is a present or reasonably foreseeable 
evidentiary need for such documentary material by the Corporation as 
receiver for the covered financial company or the public.
    (3) Receivership record. The term receivership record means 
documentary material generated or maintained by the Corporation in 
accordance with the policies and procedures of the Corporation 
(including the document retention policies of the Corporation) that 
relates to the Corporation's appointment as receiver for a covered 
financial company or the exercise of its authorities as receiver for the 
covered financial company under 12 U.S.C. 5381 through 5397.
    (c) Inherited records.--(1) Retention schedule for inherited 
records. The Corporation shall retain any inherited record of a covered 
financial company that was created fewer than ten years before the date 
of the appointment of the Corporation as receiver for the covered 
financial company for a period of no less than six years from the date 
of such appointment, provided however that an inherited record shall be 
retained indefinitely so long as it is:
    (i) Subject to a litigation hold imposed by the Corporation;
    (ii) Subject to a Congressional subpoena or relates to an ongoing 
investigation by Congress, the United States Government Accountability 
Office, or the Corporation's Inspector General; or
    (iii) An inherited record that the Corporation has determined is 
necessary for a present or reasonably foreseeable future evidentiary 
need of the Corporation or the public.
    (2) Examples. Examples of inherited records include, without 
limitation: Correspondence; tax forms, accounting forms, and related 
work papers; internal audits; inventories; board of directors or 
committee meeting minutes; personnel files and employee benefits 
information; general ledger and financial reports; financial data; 
litigation files; loan documents including records relating to 
intercompany debt; contracts and agreements to which the covered 
financial company was a party; customer accounts and transactions; 
qualified financial contracts and related information; and reports or 
other records of subsidiaries or affiliates of the covered financial 
company that were provided to the covered financial company.
    (3) Transfer of an inherited record to an acquirer of assets or 
liabilities of a covered financial company. If the Corporation transfers 
an inherited record of a covered financial company to a third party 
(including a bridge financial company) in connection with the 
acquisition of assets or liabilities of the covered financial company by 
such third party, the record retention requirements of 12 U.S.C. 
5390(a)(16)(D) and paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall be satisfied 
if the third party agrees, in writing, that:
    (i) It will maintain the inherited record for at least six years 
from the date of the appointment of the Corporation as receiver for the 
covered financial company unless otherwise notified in writing by the 
Corporation; and
    (ii) Prior to destruction of such inherited record it will provide 
the Corporation with notice and the opportunity to cause the inherited 
record to be returned to the Corporation.
    (d) Receivership records--(1) Retention schedule for receivership 
records. (i) A receivership record shall be retained indefinitely to the 
extent that there is a

[[Page 1136]]

present or reasonably foreseeable future evidentiary or historical need 
for such receivership record.
    (ii) A receivership record that is subject to a litigation hold 
imposed by the Corporation, is subject to a Congressional subpoena, or 
relates to an ongoing investigation by Congress, the United States 
Government Accountability Office, or the Corporation's Office of 
Inspector General shall be retained pursuant to the conditions of such 
hold, subpoena, or investigation.
    (iii) In no event shall a receivership record be retained by the 
Corporation for a period of less than six years following the 
termination of the receivership to which it relates.
    (2) Not included in receivership records. Receivership records do 
not include inherited records.
    (3) Examples. Examples of receivership records include, without 
limitation: Correspondence; tax forms, accounting forms and related work 
papers; inventories; contracts and other information relating to the 
management and disposition of the assets of the covered financial 
company; documentary material relating to the appointment of the 
Corporation as receiver; administrative records and other information 
relating to administrative proceedings; pleadings and similar documents 
in civil litigation, criminal restitution, forfeiture litigation, and 
all other litigation matters in which the Corporation as receiver is a 
party; the charter and formation documents of a bridge financial 
company; contracts, other documents, and information relating to the 
role of the Corporation as receiver in overseeing the operations of the 
bridge financial company; reports or other records of the bridge 
financial company and its subsidiaries or affiliates that were provided 
to the Corporation as receiver; and documentary material relating to the 
administration, determination, and payment of claims by the Corporation 
as receiver.
    (e) General provisions. With respect to any documentary material 
described in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, the following 
applies:
    (1) Impact on discoverability, admissibility, or release; compliance 
with court orders. The Corporation's determination that documentary 
material must be maintained pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(16)(D) and 
this section shall not bear on the discoverability or admissibility of 
such documentary material in any court, tribunal, or other adjudicative 
proceeding nor on whether such documentary material is subject to 
release under the Freedom of Information Act, 5 U.S.C. 552, the Privacy 
Act of 1974, 5 U.S.C. 552a, or any other law. The Corporation shall 
comply with any applicable court order concerning mandatory retention or 
destruction of any documentary material subject to this section.
    (2) Exclusions. Documentary material is not an inherited record nor 
a receivership record and is not subject to the record retention 
requirements of section 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(16)(D) and this section if it 
is:
    (i) A duplicate copy of retained documentary material, reference 
material, a draft of a document that is superseded by later drafts or 
revisions, documentary material provided to the Corporation by other 
parties in concluded litigation for which all appeals have expired, 
transitory information including routine system messages and system-
generated log files, notes and other material of a personal nature, or 
other documentary material not routinely maintained under the standard 
record retention policies and procedures of the Corporation;
    (ii) Documentary material generated or maintained by a bridge 
financial company, or by a subsidiary or affiliate of a covered 
financial company, that was not provided to the covered financial 
company or to the Corporation as receiver; or
    (iii) Non-publicly available confidential supervisory information or 
operating or condition reports prepared by, on behalf of, or at the 
requirement of any agency responsible for the regulation or supervision 
of financial companies or their subsidiaries.
    (f) Policies and procedures. The Corporation may establish policies 
and procedures with respect to the retention of inherited records and 
receivership records that are consistent with this section.

[81 FR 41417, June 27, 2016]

[[Page 1137]]



Secs. 380.15-380.19  [Reserved]



                          Subpart B_Priorities

    Source: 76 FR 41642, July 15, 2011, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 380.20  [Reserved]



Sec. 380.21  Priorities.

    (a) The unsecured amount of allowed claims shall be paid in the 
following order of priority:
    (1) Repayment of debt incurred by or credit obtained by the 
Corporation as receiver for a covered financial company, provided that 
the receiver has determined that it is otherwise unable to obtain 
unsecured credit for the covered financial company from commercial 
sources.
    (2) Administrative expenses of the receiver, as defined in 
Sec. 380.22, other than those described in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section.
    (3) Any amounts owed to the United States, as defined in Sec. 380.23 
(which is not an obligation described in paragraphs (a)(1) or (2) of 
this section).
    (4) Wages, salaries, or commissions, including vacation, severance, 
and sick leave pay earned by an individual (other than an individual 
described in paragraph (a)(9) of this section), but only to the extent 
of $11,725 for each individual (as adjusted for inflation in accordance 
with paragraph (b) of this section) earned within 180 days before the 
date of appointment of the receiver.
    (5) Contributions owed to employee benefit plans arising from 
services rendered within 180 days before the date of appointment of the 
receiver, to the extent of the number of employees covered by each such 
plan multiplied by $11,725 (as adjusted for inflation in accordance with 
paragraph (b) of this section); less the sum of (i) the aggregate amount 
paid to such employees under paragraph (a)(4) of this section, plus (ii) 
the aggregate amount paid by the Corporation as receiver on behalf of 
such employees to any other employee benefit plan.
    (6) Any amounts due to creditors who have an allowed claim for loss 
of setoff rights as described in Sec. 380.24.
    (7) Any other general or senior liability of the covered financial 
company (which is not a liability described under paragraphs (a)(8), (9) 
or (11) of this section).
    (8) Any obligation subordinated to general creditors (which is not 
an obligation described under paragraphs (a)(9) or (11) of this 
section).
    (9) Any wages, salaries, or commissions, including vacation, 
severance, and sick leave pay earned, that is owed to senior executives 
and directors of the covered financial company.
    (10) Post-insolvency interest in accordance with Sec. 380.25, 
provided that interest shall be paid on allowed claims in the order of 
priority of the claims set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (9) of 
this section.
    (11) Any amount remaining shall be distributed to shareholders, 
members, general partners, limited partners, or other persons with 
interests in the equity of the covered financial company arising as a 
result of their status as shareholders, members, general partners, 
limited partners, or other persons with interests in the equity of the 
covered financial company, in proportion to their relative equity 
interests.
    (b) All payments under paragraphs (a)(4) and (a)(5) of this section 
shall be adjusted for inflation in the same manner that claims under 11 
U.S.C. 507(a)(1)(4) are adjusted for inflation by the Judicial 
Conference of the United States pursuant to 11 U.S.C. 104.
    (c) All unsecured claims of any category or priority described in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(10) of this section shall be paid in full 
or provision made for such payment before any claims of lesser priority 
are paid. If there are insufficient funds to pay all claims of a 
particular category or priority of claims in full, then distributions to 
creditors in such category or priority shall be made pro rata. A 
subordination agreement is enforceable with respect to the priority of 
payment of allowed claims within any creditor class or among creditor 
classes to the extent that such agreement is enforceable under 
applicable non-insolvency law.

[[Page 1138]]



Sec. 380.22  Administrative expenses of the receiver.

    (a) The term ``administrative expenses of the receiver'' includes 
those actual and necessary pre- and post-failure costs and expenses 
incurred by the Corporation in connection with its role as receiver in 
liquidating the covered financial company; together with any obligations 
that the receiver for the covered financial company determines to be 
necessary and appropriate to facilitate the smooth and orderly 
liquidation of the covered financial company. Administrative expenses of 
the Corporation as receiver for a covered financial company include:
    (1) Contractual rent pursuant to an existing lease or rental 
agreement accruing from the date of the appointment of the Corporation 
as receiver until the later of
    (i) The date a notice of the dissaffirmance or repudiation of such 
lease or rental agreement is mailed, or
    (ii) The date such disaffirmance or repudiation becomes effective; 
provided that the lesser of such lease is not in default or breach of 
the terms of the lease.
    (2) Amounts owed pursuant to the terms of a contract for services 
performed and accepted by the receiver after the date of appointment of 
the receiver up to the date the receiver repudiates, terminates, cancels 
or otherwise discontinues such contract or notifies the counterparty 
that it no longer accepts performance of such services;
    (3) Amounts owed under the terms of a contract or agreement executed 
in writing and entered into by the Corporation as receiver for the 
covered financial company after the date of appointment, or any contract 
or agreement entered into by the covered financial company before the 
date of appointment of the receiver that has been expressly approved in 
writing by the receiver after the date of appointment; and
    (4) Expenses of the Inspector General of the Corporation incurred in 
carrying out its responsibilities under 12 U.S.C. 5391(d).
    (b) Obligations to repay any extension of credit obtained by the 
Corporation as receiver through enforcement of any contract to extend 
credit to the covered financial company that was in existence prior to 
appointment of the receiver pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(13)(D) shall 
be treated as administrative expenses of the receiver. Other unsecured 
credit extended to the receivership shall be treated as administrative 
expenses except with respect to debt incurred by, or credit obtained by, 
the Corporation as receiver for a covered financial company as described 
in Sec. 380.21(a)(1).



Sec. 380.23  Amounts owed to the United States.

    (a) The term ``amounts owed to the United States'' as used in 
Sec. 380.21(a)(3) includes all unsecured amounts owed to the United 
States, other than expenses included in the definition of administrative 
expenses of the receiver under Sec. 380.22 that are related to funds 
provided for the orderly liquidation of a covered financial company, 
funds provided to avoid or mitigate adverse effects on the financial 
stability of the United States or unsecured amounts owed to the U.S. 
Treasury on account of tax liabilities of the covered financial company, 
without regard for whether such amounts are included as debt or capital 
on the books and records of the covered financial company. Such amounts 
shall include obligations incurred before and after the appointment of 
the Corporation as receiver. Without limitation, ``amounts owed to the 
United States'' include all of the following, which all shall have equal 
priority under Sec. 380.21(a)(3):
    (1) Unsecured amounts owed to the Corporation for any extension of 
credit by the Corporation, including any amounts made available under 12 
U.S.C. 5384(d);
    (2) Unsecured amounts owed to the U.S. Treasury on account of 
unsecured tax liabilities of the covered financial company;
    (3) Unsecured amounts paid or payable by the Corporation pursuant to 
its guarantee of any debt issued by the covered financial company under 
the Temporary Liquidity Guaranty Program, 12 CFR part 370, any widely 
available debt guarantee program authorized under 12 U.S.C. 5612, or any 
other debt or obligation of any kind or

[[Page 1139]]

nature that is guaranteed by the Corporation;
    (4) The unsecured amount of any debt owed to a Federal reserve bank 
including loans made through programs or facilities authorized under the 
Federal Reserve Act, 12 U.S.C. 221 et seq.; and
    (5) Any unsecured amount expressly designated in writing in a form 
acceptable to the Corporation by the appropriate United States 
department, agency or instrumentality that shall specify the particular 
debt, obligation or amount to be included as an ``amount owed to the 
United States'' for the purpose of this rule at the time of such 
advance, guaranty or other transaction.
    (b) Other than those amounts included in paragraph (a) of this 
section, unsecured amounts owed to a department, agency or 
instrumentality of the United States that are obligations incurred in 
the ordinary course of the business of the covered financial company 
prior to the appointment of the receiver generally will not be in the 
class of claims designated as ``amounts owed to the United States'' 
under section 380.21(a)(3), including, but not limited to:
    (1) Unsecured amounts owed to government sponsored entities 
including, without limitation, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage 
Corporation and the Federal National Mortgage Corporation;
    (2) Unsecured amounts owed to Federal Home Loan Banks; and
    (3) Unsecured amounts owed as satisfaction of filing, registration 
or permit fees due to any government department, agency or 
instrumentality.
    (c) The United States may, in its sole discretion, consent to 
subordinate the repayment of any amount owed to the United States to any 
other obligation of the covered financial company provided that such 
consent is provided in writing in a form acceptable to the Corporation 
by the appropriate department, agency or instrumentality and shall 
specify the particular debt, obligation or other amount to be 
subordinated including the amount thereof and shall reference this 
paragraph (c) or 12 U.S.C. 5390(b)(1); and provided further that 
unsecured claims of the United States shall, at a minimum, have a higher 
priority than liabilities of the covered financial company that count as 
regulatory capital on the books and records of the covered financial 
company.



Sec. 380.24  Priority of claims arising out of loss of setoff rights.

    (a) Notwithstanding any right of any creditor to offset a mutual 
debt owed by such creditor to any covered financial company that arose 
before the date of appointment of the receiver against a claim by such 
creditor against the covered financial company, the Corporation as 
receiver may sell or transfer any assets of the covered financial 
company to a bridge financial company or to a third party free and clear 
of any such rights of setoff.
    (b) If the Corporation as receiver sells or transfers any asset free 
and clear of the setoff rights of any party, such party shall have a 
claim against the receiver in the amount of the value of such setoff 
established as of the date of the sale or transfer of such assets, 
provided that the setoff rights meet all of the criteria established 
under 12 U.S.C. 3590(a)(12).
    (c) Any allowed claim pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(12) shall be 
paid prior to any other general or senior liability of the covered 
financial company described in section 380.21(a)(7). In the event that 
the setoff amount is less than the amount of the allowed claim, the 
balance of the allowed claim shall be paid at the otherwise applicable 
level of priority for such category of claim under Sec. 380.21.
    (d) Nothing in this section shall modify in any way the treatment of 
qualified financial contracts under title II of the Dodd-Frank Wall 
Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act.



Sec. 380.25  Post-insolvency interest.

    (a) Date of accrual. Post-insolvency interest shall be paid at the 
post-insolvency interest rate calculated on the principal amount of an 
allowed claim from the later of (i) the date of the appointment of the 
Corporation as receiver for the covered financial company; or (ii) in 
the case of a claim arising or becoming fixed and certain after the date 
of the appointment of the receiver, the date such claim arises or 
becomes fixed and certain.

[[Page 1140]]

    (b) Interest rate. Post-insolvency interest rate shall equal, for 
any calendar quarter, the coupon equivalent yield of the average 
discount rate set on the three-month U.S. Treasury bill at the last 
auction held by the United States Treasury Department during the 
preceding calendar quarter. Post-insolvency interest shall be computed 
quarterly and shall be computed using a simple interest method of 
calculation.
    (c) Principal amount. The principal amount of an allowed claim shall 
be the full allowed claim amount, including any interest that may have 
accrued to the extent such interest is included in the allowed claim.
    (d) Post-insolvency interest distributions. (1) Post-insolvency 
interest shall only be distributed following satisfaction of the 
principal amount of all creditor claims set forth in Sec. 380.21(a)(1) 
through 380.21(a)(9) and prior to any distribution pursuant to 
Sec. 380.21(a)(11).
    (2) Post-insolvency interest distributions shall be made at such 
time as the Corporation as receiver determines that such distributions 
are appropriate and only to the extent of funds available in the 
receivership estate. Post-insolvency interest shall be calculated on the 
outstanding principal amount of an allowed claim, as reduced from time 
to time by any interim distributions on account of such claim by the 
receiver.



Sec. 380.26  Effect of transfer of assets and obligations to a bridge
financial company.

    (a) The purchase of any asset or assumption of any asset or 
liability of a covered financial company by a bridge financial company, 
through the express agreement of such bridge financial company, 
constitutes assumption of any contract or agreement giving rise to such 
asset or liability. Such contracts or agreements, together with any 
contract the bridge financial company may through its express agreement 
enter into with any other party, shall become the obligation of the 
bridge financial company from and after the effective date of the 
purchase, assumption or agreement, and the bridge financial company 
shall have the right and obligation to observe, perform and enforce 
their terms and provisions. In the event that the Corporation shall act 
as receiver of the bridge financial company any allowed claim arising 
out of any breach of such contract or agreement by the bridge financial 
company shall be paid as an administrative expense of the receiver of 
the bridge financial company.
    (b) In the event that the Corporation as receiver of a bridge 
financial company shall act to dissolve the bridge financial company, it 
shall wind up the affairs of the bridge financial company in conformity 
with the laws, rules and regulations relating to the liquidation of 
covered financial companies, including the laws, rules and regulations 
governing priorities of claims, subject however to the authority of the 
Corporation to authorize the bridge financial company to obtain 
unsecured credit or issue unsecured debt with priority over any or all 
of the other unsecured obligations of the bridge financial company, 
provided that unsecured debt is not otherwise generally available to the 
bridge financial company.
    (c) Upon the final dissolution or termination of the bridge 
financial company whether following a merger or consolidation, a stock 
sale, a sale of assets, or dissolution and liquidation at the end of the 
term of existence of such bridge financial company, any proceeds that 
remain after payment of all administrative expenses of the bridge 
financial company and all other claims against such bridge financial 
company will be distributed to the receiver for the related covered 
financial company.



Sec. 380.27  Treatment of similarly situated claimants.

    (a) For the purposes of this section, the term ``long-term senior 
debt'' means senior debt issued by the covered financial company to 
bondholders or other creditors that has a term of more than 360 days. It 
does not include partially funded, revolving or other open lines of 
credit that are necessary to continuing operations essential to the 
receivership or any bridge financial company, nor to any contracts to 
extend credit enforced by the receiver under 12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(13)(D).
    (b) In applying any provision of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform 
and Consumer Protection Act permitting

[[Page 1141]]

the Corporation as receiver to exercise its discretion, upon appropriate 
determination, to make payments or credit amounts, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
5390(b)(4), (d)(4), or (h)(5)(E) to or for some creditors but not others 
similarly situated at the same level of payment priority, the receiver 
shall not exercise such authority in a manner that would result in the 
following recovering more than the amount established and due under 12 
U.S.C. 5390(b)(1), or other priorities of payment specified by law:
    (1) Holders of long-term senior debt who have a claim entitled to 
priority of payment at the level set out under 12 U.S.C. 5390(b)(1)(E);
    (2) Holders of subordinated debt who have a claim entitled to 
priority of payment at the level set out under 12 U.S.C. 5390(b)(1)(F);
    (3) Shareholders, members, general partners, limited partners, or 
other persons who have a claim entitled to priority of payment at the 
level set out under 12 U.S.C. 5390 (b)(1)(H); or
    (4) Other holders of claims entitled to priority of payment at the 
level set out under 12 U.S.C. 5390(b)(1)(E) unless the Corporation, 
through the affirmative vote of a majority the members of the Board of 
Directors then serving, and in its sole discretion, specifically 
determines that additional payments or credit amounts to such holders 
are necessary and meet all of the requirements under 12 U.S.C. 
5390(b)(4), (d)(4), or (h)(5)(E), as applicable. The authority of the 
Board to make the foregoing determination cannot be delegated.



Secs. 380.28-380.29  [Reserved]



          Subpart C_Receivership Administrative Claims Process

    Source: 76 FR 41644, July 15, 2011, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 380.30  Receivership administrative claims process.

    The Corporation as receiver of a covered financial company shall 
determine claims against the covered financial company and the receiver 
of the covered financial company in accordance with the procedures set 
forth in 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(2)-(5) and the regulations promulgated by the 
Corporation.



Sec. 380.31  Scope.

    Nothing in this subpart C shall apply to any liability or obligation 
of a bridge financial company or its assets or liabilities, or to any 
extension of credit from a Federal reserve bank or the Corporation to a 
covered financial company.



Sec. 380.32  Claims bar date.

    Upon its appointment as receiver for a covered financial company, 
the Corporation as receiver shall establish a claims bar date by which 
date creditors of the covered financial company shall present their 
claims, together with proof, to the receiver. The claims bar date shall 
be not less than 90 days after the date on which the notice to creditors 
to file claims is first published under Sec. 380.33(a).



Sec. 380.33  Notice requirements.

    (a) Notice by publication. Promptly after its appointment as 
receiver for a covered financial company, the Corporation as receiver 
shall publish a notice to the creditors of the covered financial company 
to file their claims with the receiver no later than the claims bar 
date. The Corporation as receiver shall republish such notice 1 month 
and 2 months, respectively, after the date the notice is first 
published. The notice to creditors shall be published in one or more 
newspapers of general circulation where the covered financial company 
has its principal place or places of business. In addition to such 
publication in a newspaper, the Corporation as receiver may post the 
notice on the FDIC's Web site at www.fdic.gov.
    (b) Notice by mailing. At the time of the first publication of the 
notice to creditors, the Corporation as receiver shall mail a notice to 
present claims no later than the claims bar date to any creditor shown 
in the books and records of the covered financial company. Such notice 
shall be sent to the last known address of the creditor appearing in the 
books and records or appearing in any claim found in the records of the 
covered financial company.
    (c) Notice by electronic media. After publishing and mailing notice 
as required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this

[[Page 1142]]

section, the Corporation as receiver may communicate by electronic media 
with any claimant who expressly agrees to such form of communication.
    (d) Discovered claimants. Upon discovery of the name and address of 
a claimant not appearing in the books and records of the covered 
financial company, the Corporation as receiver shall, not later than 30 
days after the discovery of such name and address, mail a notice to such 
claimant to file a claim no later than the claims bar date. Any claimant 
not appearing on the books and records that is discovered before the 
claims bar date shall be required to file a claim before the claims bar 
date, subject to the exception of Sec. 380.35(b)(2). If a claimant not 
appearing on the books and records is discovered after the claims bar 
date, the Corporation as receiver shall notify the claimant to file a 
claim by a date not later than 90 days from the date appearing on the 
notice that is mailed to such creditor. Any claim filed after such date 
shall be disallowed, and such disallowance shall be final.



Sec. 380.34  Procedures for filing claim.

    (a) In general. The Corporation as receiver shall provide, in a 
reasonably practicable manner, instructions for filing a claim, 
including by the following means:
    (1) Providing contact information in the publication notice;
    (2) Including in the mailed notice a proof of claim form that has 
filing instructions; or
    (3) Posting filing instructions on the Corporation's public Web site 
at www.fdic.gov.
    (b) When claim is deemed filed. A claim that is mailed to the 
receiver in accordance with the instructions established under paragraph 
(a) of this section shall be deemed to be filed as of the date of 
postmark. A claim that is sent to the receiver by electronic media or 
fax in accordance with the instructions established under paragraph (a) 
shall be deemed to be filed as of the date of transmission by the 
claimant.
    (c) Class claimants. If a claimant is a member of a class for 
purposes of a class action lawsuit, whether or not the class has been 
certified by a court, each claimant must file its claim with the 
Corporation as receiver separately.
    (d) Indenture trustee. A trustee appointed under an indenture or 
other applicable trust document related to investments or other 
financial activities may file a claim on behalf of the persons who 
appointed the trustee.
    (e) Legal effect of filing. (1) Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
5390(a)(3)(E)(i), the filing of a claim with the receiver shall 
constitute a commencement of an action for purposes of any applicable 
statute of limitations.
    (2) No prejudice to continuation of action. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
5390(a)(3)(E)(ii) and subject to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(8), the filing of a 
claim with the receiver shall not prejudice any right of the claimant to 
continue, after the receiver's determination of the claim, any action 
which was filed before the date of appointment of the receiver for the 
covered financial company.



Sec. 380.35  Determination of claims.

    (a) In general. The Corporation as receiver shall allow any claim 
received by the receiver on or before the claims bar date if such claim 
is proved to the satisfaction of the receiver. Except as provided in 12 
U.S.C. 5390(a)(3)(D)(iii), the Corporation as receiver may disallow any 
portion of any claim by a creditor or claim of a security, preference, 
setoff, or priority which is not proved to the satisfaction of the 
receiver.
    (b) Disallowance of claims filed after the claims bar date. (1) 
Except as otherwise provided in this section, any claim filed after the 
claims bar date shall be disallowed, and such disallowance shall be 
final, as provided by 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(3)(C)(i).
    (2) Certain exceptions. Paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall not 
apply with respect to any claim filed by a claimant after the claims bar 
date and such claim shall be considered by the receiver if:
    (i) The claimant did not receive notice of the appointment of the 
receiver in time to file such claim before the claims bar date, or the 
claim is based upon an act or omission of the Corporation as receiver 
that occurs after the claims bar date has passed, and

[[Page 1143]]

    (ii) The claim is filed in time to permit payment. A claim is 
``filed in time to permit payment'' when it is filed before a final 
distribution is made by the receiver.



Sec. 380.36  Decision period.

    (a) In general. Prior to the 180th day after the date on which a 
claim against a covered financial company or the Corporation as receiver 
is filed with the receiver, the receiver shall notify the claimant 
whether it allows or disallows the claim.
    (b) Extension of time. The 180-day period described in paragraph (a) 
of this section may be extended by a written agreement between the 
claimant and the Corporation as receiver executed not later than 180 
days after the date on which the claim against the covered financial 
company or the receiver is filed with the receiver. If an extension is 
agreed to, the Corporation as receiver shall notify the claimant whether 
it allows or disallows the claim prior to the end of the extended claims 
determination period.



Sec. 380.37  Notification of determination.

    (a) In general. The Corporation as receiver shall notify the 
claimant by mail of the decision to allow or disallow the claim. Notice 
shall be mailed to the address of the claimant as it last appears on the 
books, records, or both of the covered financial company; in the claim 
filed by the claimant with the Corporation as receiver; or in documents 
submitted in the proof of the claim. If the claimant has filed the claim 
electronically, the receiver may notify the claimant of the 
determination by electronic means.
    (b) Contents of notice of disallowance. If the Corporation as 
receiver disallows a claim, the notice to the claimant shall contain a 
statement of each reason for the disallowance, and the procedures 
required to file or continue an action in court.
    (c) Failure to notify deemed to be disallowance. If the Corporation 
as receiver does not notify the claimant before the end of the 180-day 
claims determination period, or before the end of any extended claims 
determination period, the claim shall be deemed to be disallowed, and 
the claimant may file or continue an action in court pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 5390(a)(4)(A).



Sec. 380.38  Procedures for seeking judicial determination of 
disallowed claim.

    (a) In general. In order to seek a judicial determination of a claim 
that has been disallowed, in whole or in part, by the Corporation as 
receiver, the claimant, pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(4)(A), may either:
    (1) File suit on such claim in the district or territorial court of 
the United States for the district within which the principal place of 
business of the covered financial company is located; or
    (2) Continue an action commenced before the date of appointment of 
the receiver, in the court in which the action was pending.
    (b) Timing. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(4)(B), a claimant who 
seeks a judicial determination of a claim disallowed by the Corporation 
as receiver must file suit on such claim before the end of the 60-day 
period beginning on the earlier of:
    (1) The date of any notice of disallowance of such claim;
    (2) The end of the 180-day claims determination period; or
    (3) If the claims determination period was extended with respect to 
such claim under Sec. 380.36(b), the end of such extended claims 
determination period.
    (c) Statute of limitations. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(4)(C), if 
any claimant fails to file suit on such claim (or to continue an action 
on such claim commenced before the date of appointment of the 
Corporation as receiver) prior to the end of the 60-day period described 
in 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(4)(B), the claim shall be deemed to be disallowed 
(other than any portion of such claim which was allowed by the receiver) 
as of the end of such period, such disallowance shall be final, and the 
claimant shall have no further rights or remedies with respect to such 
claim.
    (d) Jurisdiction. Pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(9)(D), unless the 
claimant has first exhausted its administrative remedies by obtaining a 
determination from the receiver regarding a claim filed with the 
receiver, no court shall have jurisdiction over:

[[Page 1144]]

    (1) Any claim or action for payment from, or any action seeking a 
determination of rights with respect to, the assets of any covered 
financial company for which the Corporation has been appointed receiver, 
including any assets which the Corporation may acquire from itself as 
such receiver; or
    (2) Any claim relating to any act or omission of such covered 
financial company or the Corporation as receiver.



Sec. 380.39  Contingent claims.

    (a) The Corporation as receiver shall not disallow a claim based on 
an obligation of the covered financial company solely because the 
obligation is contingent. To the extent the obligation is contingent, 
the receiver shall estimate the value of the claim, as such value is 
measured based upon the likelihood that such contingent obligation would 
become fixed and the probable magnitude thereof.
    (b) If the receiver repudiates a contingent obligation of a covered 
financial company consisting of a guarantee, letter of credit, loan 
commitment, or similar credit obligation, the actual direct compensatory 
damages for repudiation shall be no less than the estimated value of the 
claim as of the date the Corporation was appointed receiver of the 
covered financial company, as such value is measured based upon the 
likelihood that such contingent claim would become fixed and the 
probable magnitude thereof.
    (c) The Corporation as receiver shall estimate the value of a claim 
under paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section no later than 180 days after 
the claim is filed, unless such period is extended by a written 
agreement between the claimant and the receiver.
    (d) Except for a contingent claim that becomes absolute and fixed 
prior to the receiver's determination of the estimated value, such 
estimated value of a contingent claim shall be recognized as the allowed 
amount of the claim for purposes of distribution.
    (e) The estimated value of a contingent claim shall constitute the 
receiver's determination of the claim for purposes of Sec. 380.38(d) and 
12 U.S.C. 5390(a)(9)(D).



Secs. 380.40-380.49  [Reserved]



Sec. 380.50  Determination of secured claims.

    (a) In the case of a claim against a covered financial company that 
is secured by any property of the covered financial company, the 
Corporation as receiver shall determine the amount of the claim, whether 
the claimant's security interest is legally enforceable and perfected, 
the priority of the claimant's security interest, and the fair market 
value of the property that is subject to the security interest. The 
Corporation as receiver may treat the portion of the claim which exceeds 
an amount equal to the fair market value of such property as an 
unsecured claim.
    (b) The fair market value of any property of a covered financial 
company that secures a claim shall be determined in light of the purpose 
of the valuation and of the proposed disposition or use of such property 
and at the time of such proposed disposition or use.
    (c) The Corporation as receiver may recover from any property of a 
covered financial company that secures a claim the reasonable and 
necessary costs and expenses of preserving or disposing of such property 
to the extent of any benefit to the claimant, including the payment of 
all ad valorem property taxes with respect to such property.
    (d) To the extent that a claim is secured by property of a covered 
financial company and the value of such property, after any recovery 
under paragraph (c) of this section, is greater than the amount of such 
claim, there shall be allowed to the claimant a secured claim for 
interest on such claim and any reasonable fees, costs, or charges 
provided for under the agreement or State statute under which the claim 
arose to the extent of the value of such property.



Sec. 380.51  Consent to certain actions.

    (a) In general. Any claimant alleging a legally valid and 
enforceable or perfected security interest in property of a covered 
financial company or control of any legally valid and enforceable 
security entitlement in respect of any asset held by the covered 
financial company for which the Corporation has

[[Page 1145]]

been appointed receiver may seek the consent of the receiver for relief 
from the provisions of 12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(13)(C).
    (b) Contents of request. A request for consent of the Corporation as 
receiver for relief from the provisions of 12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(13)(C) 
shall be in writing and contain the following information:
    (1) The amount of the claim, with supporting documentation;
    (2) A description of the property that secures the claim, with 
supporting documentation of the claimant's interest in the property;
    (3) The value of the property, as established by an appraisal or 
other supporting documentation; and
    (4) The proposed disposition of the property by the claimant, 
including the expected date of such disposition.
    (c) Determination by receiver. The Corporation as receiver shall 
grant its consent to a request for relief from the provisions of 12 
U.S.C. 5390(c)(13)(C) if it determines that the claimant has a legally 
valid and enforceable or perfected security interest or other lien 
against the property of a covered financial company and the receiver 
will not use, sell, or lease the property. If the Corporation as 
receiver determines that it will use, sell, or lease such property and 
that adequate protection is necessary and appropriate, the receiver may 
provide adequate protection instead of granting consent.
    (d) Consent deemed granted. If the Corporation as receiver has not 
notified the claimant of the determination whether to grant or withhold 
consent under this section within 30 days after a request for consent 
has been submitted, consent shall be deemed to be granted.
    (e) Expiration by operation of law. Notwithstanding any 
determination by the Corporation as receiver to withhold consent under 
this section, the prohibitions described in 12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(13)(C)(i) 
are no longer applicable 90 days after the appointment of the receiver.
    (f) Limitations. Any consent granted by the Corporation as receiver 
under this section shall not act to waive or relinquish any rights 
granted to the Corporation in any capacity, pursuant to any other 
applicable law or any agreement or contract, and shall not be construed 
as waiving, limiting or otherwise affecting the rights or powers of the 
Corporation as receiver to take any action or to exercise any power not 
specifically mentioned, including but not limited to any rights, powers 
or remedies of the receiver regarding transfers taken in contemplation 
of the covered financial company's insolvency or with the intent to 
hinder, delay or defraud the covered financial company or the creditors 
of such company, or that is a fraudulent transfer under applicable law.
    (g) Exceptions. (1) This section shall not apply in the case of a 
contract that is repudiated or disaffirmed by the Corporation as 
receiver.
    (2) This section shall not apply to a director or officer liability 
insurance contract, a financial institution bond, the rights of parties 
to certain qualified financial contracts pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
5390(c)(8), the rights of parties to netting contracts pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 4401 et seq., or any extension of credit from any Federal reserve 
bank or the Corporation to any covered financial company or any security 
interest in the assets of a covered financial company securing any such 
extension of credit.



Sec. 380.52  Adequate protection.

    (a) If the Corporation as receiver determines that it will use, 
sell, or lease or grant a security interest or other lien against 
property of the covered financial company that is subject to a security 
interest of a claimant, the receiver shall provide adequate protection 
by any of the following means:
    (1) Making a cash payment or periodic cash payments to the claimant 
to the extent that the sale, use, or lease of the property or the grant 
of a security interest or other lien against the property by the 
Corporation as receiver results in a decrease in the value of such 
claimant's security interest in the property;
    (2) Providing to the claimant an additional or replacement lien to 
the extent that the sale, use, or lease of the

[[Page 1146]]

property or the grant of a security interest against the property by the 
Corporation as receiver results in a decrease in the value of the 
claimant's security interest in the property; or
    (3) Providing any other relief that will result in the realization 
by the claimant of the indubitable equivalent of the claimant's security 
interest in the property.
    (b) Adequate protection of the claimant's security interest will be 
presumed if the value of the property is not depreciating or is 
sufficiently greater than the amount of the claim so that the claimant's 
security interest is not impaired.



Sec. 380.53  Repudiation of secured contract.

    To the extent that a contract to which a covered financial company 
is a party is secured by property of the covered financial company, the 
repudiation of the contract by the Corporation as receiver shall not be 
construed as permitting the avoidance of any legally enforceable and 
perfected security interest in the property, and the security interest 
shall secure any claim for repudiation damages.



PART 381_RESOLUTION PLANS--Table of Contents



Sec.
381.1  Authority and scope.
381.2  Definitions.
381.3  Resolution plan required.
381.4  Informational content of a resolution plan.
381.5  Review of resolution plans; resubmission of deficient resolution 
          plans.
381.6  Failure to cure deficiencies on resubmission of a resolution 
          plan.
381.7  Consultation.
381.8  No limiting effect or private right of action; confidentiality of 
          resolution plans.
381.9  Enforcement.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 5365(d).

    Source: 76 FR 67334, Nov. 1, 2011, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 381.1  Authority and scope.

    (a) Authority. This part is issued pursuant to section 165(d)(8) of 
the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the Dodd-
Frank Act) (Pub. L. 111-203, 124 Stat. 1376, 1426-1427), 12 U.S.C. 
5365(d)(8), which requires the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve 
System (Board) and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
(Corporation) to jointly issue rules implementing the provisions of 
section 165(d) of the Dodd-Frank Act.
    (b) Scope. This part applies to each covered company and establishes 
rules and requirements regarding the submission and content of a 
resolution plan, as well as procedures for review by the Board and 
Corporation of a resolution plan.



Sec. 381.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) Bankruptcy Code means title 11 of the United States Code.
    (b) Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability 
company, depository institution, business trust, special purpose entity, 
association, or similar organization, but does not include any 
organization, the majority of the voting securities of which are owned 
by the United States.
    (c) Control. A company controls another company when the first 
company, directly or indirectly, owns, or holds with power to vote, 25 
percent or more of any class of the second company's outstanding voting 
securities.
    (d) Core business lines means those business lines of the covered 
company, including associated operations, services, functions and 
support, that, in the view of the covered company, upon failure would 
result in a material loss of revenue, profit, or franchise value.
    (e) Council means the Financial Stability Oversight Council 
established by section 111 of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 5321).
    (f) Covered company-- (1) In general. A ``covered company'' means:
    (i) Any nonbank financial company supervised by the Board;
    (ii) Any bank holding company, as that term is defined in section 2 
of the Bank Holding Company Act, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1841), and the 
Board's Regulation Y (12 CFR part 225), that has $50 billion or more in 
total consolidated assets, as determined based on the average of the 
company's four most recent Consolidated Financial Statements for Bank 
Holding Companies as reported on the Federal Reserve's Form FR Y-9C 
(``FR Y-9C''); and

[[Page 1147]]

    (iii) Any foreign bank or company that is a bank holding company or 
is treated as a bank holding company under section 8(a) of the 
International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3106(a)), and that has $50 
billion or more in total consolidated assets, as determined based on the 
foreign bank's or company's most recent annual or, as applicable, the 
average of the four most recent quarterly Capital and Asset Reports for 
Foreign Banking Organizations as reported on the Federal Reserve's Form 
FR Y-7Q (``FR Y-7Q'').
    (2) Once a covered company meets the requirements described in 
paragraph (f)(1)(ii) or (iii) of this section, the company shall remain 
a covered company for purposes of this part unless and until the company 
has less than $45 billion in total consolidated assets, as determined 
based on the--
    (i) Average total consolidated assets as reported on the company's 
four most recent FR Y-9Cs, in the case of a covered company described in 
paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section; or
    (ii) Total consolidated assets as reported on the company's most 
recent annual FR Y-7Q, or, as applicable, average total consolidated 
assets as reported on the company's four most recent quarterly FR Y-7Qs, 
in the case of a covered company described in paragraph (f)(1)(iii) of 
this section.Nothing in this paragraph (f)(2) shall preclude a company 
from becoming a covered company pursuant to paragraph (f)(1) of this 
section.
    (3) Multi-tiered holding company. In a multi-tiered holding company 
structure, covered company means the top-tier of the multi-tiered 
holding company only.
    (4) Asset threshold for bank holding companies and foreign banking 
organizations. The Board may, pursuant to a recommendation of the 
Council, raise any asset threshold specified in paragraph (f)(1)(ii) or 
(iii) of this section.
    (5) Exclusion. A bridge financial company chartered pursuant to 12 
U.S.C. 5390(h) shall not be deemed to be a covered company hereunder.
    (g) Critical operations means those operations of the covered 
company, including associated services, functions and support, the 
failure or discontinuance of which, in the view of the covered company 
or as jointly directed by the Board and the Corporation, would pose a 
threat to the financial stability of the United States.
    (h) Depository institution has the same meaning as in section 
3(c)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(1)) and 
includes a state-licensed uninsured branch, agency, or commercial 
lending subsidiary of a foreign bank.
    (i) Foreign banking organization means--
    (1) A foreign bank, as defined in section 1(b)(7) of the 
International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3101(7)), that:
    (i) Operates a branch, agency, or commercial lending company 
subsidiary in the United States;
    (ii) Controls a bank in the United States; or
    (iii) Controls an Edge corporation acquired after March 5, 1987; and
    (2) Any company of which the foreign bank is a subsidiary.
    (j) Foreign-based company means any covered company that is not 
incorporated or organized under the laws of the United States.
    (k) Functionally regulated subsidiary has the same meaning as in 
section 5(c)(5) of the Bank Holding Company Act, as amended (12 U.S.C. 
1844(c)(5)).
    (l) Material entity means a subsidiary or foreign office of the 
covered company that is significant to the activities of a critical 
operation or core business line (as defined in this part).
    (m) Material financial distress with regard to a covered company 
means that:
    (1) The covered company has incurred, or is likely to incur, losses 
that will deplete all or substantially all of its capital, and there is 
no reasonable prospect for the company to avoid such depletion;
    (2) The assets of the covered company are, or are likely to be, less 
than its obligations to creditors and others; or
    (3) The covered company is, or is likely to be, unable to pay its 
obligations (other than those subject to a bona fide dispute) in the 
normal course of business.
    (n) Nonbank financial company supervised by the Board means a 
nonbank financial company or other company that the Council has 
determined under section 113 of the Dodd-Frank Act (12

[[Page 1148]]

U.S.C. 5323) shall be supervised by the Board and for which such 
determination is still in effect.
    (o) Rapid and orderly resolution means a reorganization or 
liquidation of the covered company (or, in the case of a covered company 
that is incorporated or organized in a jurisdiction other than the 
United States, the subsidiaries and operations of such foreign company 
that are domiciled in the United States) under the Bankruptcy Code that 
can be accomplished within a reasonable period of time and in a manner 
that substantially mitigates the risk that the failure of the covered 
company would have serious adverse effects on financial stability in the 
United States.
    (p) Subsidiary means a company that is controlled by another 
company, and an indirect subsidiary is a company that is controlled by a 
subsidiary of a company.
    (q) United States means the United States and includes any state of 
the United States, the District of Columbia, any territory of the United 
States, Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, and the Virgin Islands.



Sec. 381.3  Resolution plan required.

    (a) Initial and annual resolution plans required. (1) Each covered 
company shall submit its initial resolution plan to the Board and the 
Corporation on or before the date set forth below (``Initial Submission 
Date''):
    (i) July 1, 2012, with respect to any covered company that, as of 
the effective date of this part, had $250 billion or more in total 
nonbank assets (or, in the case of a covered company that is a foreign-
based company, in total U.S. nonbank assets);
    (ii) July 1, 2013, with respect to any covered company that is not 
described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, and that, as of the 
effective date of this part had $100 billion or more in total nonbank 
assets (or, in the case of a covered company that is a foreign-based 
company, in total U.S. nonbank assets); and
    (iii) December 31, 2013, with respect to any other covered company 
that is a covered company as of the effective date of this part but that 
is not described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
    (2) A company that becomes a covered company after the effective 
date of this part shall submit its initial resolution plan no later than 
the next July 1 following the date the company becomes a covered 
company, provided such date occurs no earlier than 270 days after the 
date on which the company became a covered company.
    (3) After filing its initial resolution plan pursuant to paragraph 
(a)(1) or (2) of this section, each covered company shall annually 
submit a resolution plan to the Board and the Corporation on or before 
each anniversary date of its Initial Submission Date.
    (4) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this paragraph (a), 
the Board and Corporation may jointly determine that a covered company 
shall file its initial or annual resolution plan by a date other than as 
provided in this paragraph (a). The Board and the Corporation shall 
provide a covered company with written notice of a determination under 
this paragraph (a)(4) no later than 180 days prior to the date on which 
the Board and Corporation jointly determined to require the covered 
company to submit its resolution plan.
    (b) Authority to require interim updates and notice of material 
events--(1)In general. The Board and the Corporation may jointly require 
that a covered company file an update to a resolution plan submitted 
under paragraph (a) of this section, within a reasonable amount of time, 
as jointly determined by the Board and Corporation. The Board and the 
Corporation shall make a request pursuant to this paragraph (b)(1) in 
writing, and shall specify the portions or aspects of the resolution 
plan the covered company shall update.
    (2) Notice of material events. Each covered company shall provide 
the Board and the Corporation with a notice no later than 45 days after 
any event, occurrence, change in conditions or circumstances, or other 
change that results in, or could reasonably be foreseen to have, a 
material effect on the resolution plan of the covered company. Such 
notice should describe the event, occurrence or change and explain why 
the event, occurrence or

[[Page 1149]]

change may require changes to the resolution plan. The covered company 
shall address any event, occurrence or change with respect to which it 
has provided notice pursuant to this paragraph (b)(2) in the following 
resolution plan submitted by the covered company.
    (3) Exception. A covered company shall not be required to file a 
notice under paragraph (b)(2) of this section if the date on which the 
covered company would be required to submit the notice under paragraph 
(b)(2) would be within 90 days prior to the date on which the covered 
company is required to file an annual resolution plan under paragraph 
(a) of this section.
    (c) Authority to require more frequent submissions or extend time 
period. The Board and Corporation may jointly:
    (1) Require that a covered company submit a resolution plan more 
frequently than required pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section; and
    (2) Extend the time period that a covered company has to submit a 
resolution plan or a notice following material events under paragraphs 
(a) and (b) of this section.
    (d) Access to information. In order to allow evaluation of the 
resolution plan, each covered company must provide the Board and the 
Corporation such information and access to personnel of the covered 
company as the Board and the Corporation jointly determine during the 
period for reviewing the resolution plan is necessary to assess the 
credibility of the resolution plan and the ability of the covered 
company to implement the resolution plan. The Board and the Corporation 
will rely to the fullest extent possible on examinations conducted by or 
on behalf of the appropriate Federal banking agency for the relevant 
company.
    (e) Board of directors approval of resolution plan. Prior to 
submission of a resolution plan under paragraph (a) of this section, the 
resolution plan of a covered company shall be approved by:
    (1) The board of directors of the covered company and noted in the 
minutes; or
    (2) In the case of a foreign-based covered company only, a delegee 
acting under the express authority of the board of directors of the 
covered company to approve the resolution plan.
    (f) Resolution plans provided to the Council.--The Board shall make 
the resolution plans and updates submitted by the covered company 
pursuant to this section available to the Council upon request.



Sec. 381.4  Informational content of a resolution plan.

    (a) In general (1) Domestic covered companies. Except as otherwise 
provided in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, the resolution plan of a 
covered company that is organized or incorporated in the United States 
shall include the information specified in paragraphs (b) through (i) of 
this section with respect to the subsidiaries and operations that are 
domiciled in the United States as well as the foreign subsidiaries, 
offices, and operations of the covered company.
    (2) Foreign-based covered companies Except as otherwise provided in 
paragraph (a)(3) of the section, the resolution plan of a covered 
company that is organized or incorporated in a jurisdiction other than 
the United States (other than a bank holding company) or that is a 
foreign banking organization shall include:
    (i) The information specified in paragraphs (b) through (i) of this 
section with respect to the subsidiaries, branches and agencies, and 
critical operations and core business lines, as applicable, that are 
domiciled in the United States or conducted in whole or material part in 
the United States. With respect to the information specified in 
paragraph (g) of this section, the resolution plan of a foreign-based 
covered company shall also identify, describe in detail, and map to 
legal entity the interconnections and interdependencies among the U.S. 
subsidiaries, branches and agencies, and critical operations and core 
business lines of the foreign-based covered company and any foreign-
based affiliate; and
    (ii) A detailed explanation of how resolution planning for the 
subsidiaries, branches and agencies, and critical operations and core 
business lines of the foreign-based covered company that are domiciled 
in the United States or conducted in whole or material part in the 
United States is integrated into

[[Page 1150]]

the foreign-based covered company's overall resolution or other 
contingency planning process.
    (3) Tailored resolution plan (i) Eligible covered company. Paragraph 
(a)(3)(ii) of this section applies to any covered company that as of 
December 31 of the calendar year prior to the date its resolution plan 
is required to be submitted under this part--
    (A) Has less than $100 billion in total nonbank assets (or, in the 
case of a covered company that is a foreign-based company, in total U.S. 
nonbank assets); and
    (B) The total insured depository institution assets of which 
comprise 85 percent or more of the covered company's total consolidated 
assets (or, in the case of a covered company that is a foreign-based 
company, the assets of the U.S. insured depository institution 
operations, branches, and agencies of which comprise 85 percent or more 
of such covered company's U.S. total consolidated assets).
    (ii) Tailored resolution plan elements. A covered company described 
in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section may file a resolution plan that 
is limited to the following items--
    (A) An executive summary, as specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section;
    (B) The information specified in paragraphs (c) through (f) and 
paragraph (h) of this section, but only with respect to the covered 
company and its nonbanking material entities and operations;
    (C) The information specified in paragraphs (g) and (i) of this 
section with respect to the covered company and all of its insured 
depository institutions (or, in the case of a covered company that is a 
foreign-based company, the U.S. insured depository institutions, 
branches, and agencies) and nonbank material entities and operations. 
The interconnections and interdependencies identified pursuant to (g) of 
this section shall be included in the analysis provided pursuant to 
paragraph (c) of this section.
    (iii) Notice. A covered company that meets the requirements of 
paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section and that intends to submit a 
resolution plan pursuant to this paragraph (a)(3), shall provide the 
Board and Corporation with written notice of such intent and its 
eligibility under paragraph (a)(3)(i) no later than 270 days prior to 
the date on which the covered company is required to submit its 
resolution plan. Within 90 of receiving such notice, the Board and 
Corporation may jointly determine that the covered company must submit a 
resolution plan that meets some or all of the requirements as set forth 
in paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section, as applicable.
    (4) Required and prohibited assumptions. In preparing its plan for 
rapid and orderly resolution in the event of material financial distress 
or failure required by this part, a covered company shall:
    (i) Take into account that such material financial distress or 
failure of the covered company may occur under the baseline, adverse and 
severely adverse economic conditions provided to the covered company by 
the Board pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 5365(i)(1)(B); provided, however, a 
covered company may submit its initial resolution plan assuming the 
baseline conditions only, or, if a baseline scenario is not then 
available, a reasonable substitute developed by the covered company; and
    (ii) Not rely on the provision of extraordinary support by the 
United States or any other government to the covered company or its 
subsidiaries to prevent the failure of the covered company.
    (b) Executive summary. Each resolution plan of a covered company 
shall include an executive summary describing:
    (1) The key elements of the covered company's strategic plan for 
rapid and orderly resolution in the event of material financial distress 
at or failure of the covered company.
    (2) Material changes to the covered company's resolution plan from 
the company's most recently filed resolution plan (including any notices 
following a material event or updates to the resolution plan).
    (3) Any actions taken by the covered company since filing of the 
previous resolution plan to improve the effectiveness of the covered 
company's resolution plan or remediate or otherwise mitigate any 
material weaknesses or

[[Page 1151]]

impediments to effective and timely execution of the resolution plan.
    (c) Strategic analysis. Each resolution plan shall include a 
strategic analysis describing the covered company's plan for rapid and 
orderly resolution in the event of material financial distress or 
failure of the covered company. Such analysis shall--
    (1) Include detailed descriptions of the--
    (i) Key assumptions and supporting analysis underlying the covered 
company's resolution plan, including any assumptions made concerning the 
economic or financial conditions that would be present at the time the 
covered company sought to implement such plan;
    (ii) Range of specific actions to be taken by the covered company to 
facilitate a rapid and orderly resolution of the covered company, its 
material entities, and its critical operations and core business lines 
in the event of material financial distress or failure of the covered 
company;
    (iii) Funding, liquidity and capital needs of, and resources 
available to, the covered company and its material entities, which shall 
be mapped to its critical operations and core business lines, in the 
ordinary course of business and in the event of material financial 
distress at or failure of the covered company;
    (iv) Covered company's strategy for maintaining operations of, and 
funding for, the covered company and its material entities, which shall 
be mapped to its critical operations and core business lines;
    (v) Covered company's strategy in the event of a failure or 
discontinuation of a material entity, core business line or critical 
operation, and the actions that will be taken by the covered company to 
prevent or mitigate any adverse effects of such failure or 
discontinuation on the financial stability of the United States; 
provided, however, if any such material entity is subject to an 
insolvency regime other than the Bankruptcy Code, a covered company may 
exclude that entity from its strategic analysis unless that entity 
either has $50 billion or more in total assets or conducts a critical 
operation; and
    (vi) Covered company's strategy for ensuring that any insured 
depository institution subsidiary of the covered company will be 
adequately protected from risks arising from the activities of any 
nonbank subsidiaries of the covered company (other than those that are 
subsidiaries of an insured depository institution);
    (2) Identify the time period(s) the covered company expects would be 
needed for the covered company to successfully execute each material 
aspect and step of the covered company's plan;
    (3) Identify and describe any potential material weaknesses or 
impediments to effective and timely execution of the covered company's 
plan;
    (4) Discuss the actions and steps the covered company has taken or 
proposes to take to remediate or otherwise mitigate the weaknesses or 
impediments identified by the covered company, including a timeline for 
the remedial or other mitigatory action; and
    (5) Provide a detailed description of the processes the covered 
company employs for:
    (i) Determining the current market values and marketability of the 
core business lines, critical operations, and material asset holdings of 
the covered company;
    (ii) Assessing the feasibility of the covered company's plans 
(including timeframes) for executing any sales, divestitures, 
restructurings, recapitalizations, or other similar actions contemplated 
in the covered company's resolution plan; and
    (iii) Assessing the impact of any sales, divestitures, 
restructurings, recapitalizations, or other similar actions on the 
value, funding, and operations of the covered company, its material 
entities, critical operations and core business lines.
    (d) Corporate governance relating to resolution planning. Each 
resolution plan shall:
    (1) Include a detailed description of:
    (i) How resolution planning is integrated into the corporate 
governance structure and processes of the covered company;

[[Page 1152]]

    (ii) The covered company's policies, procedures, and internal 
controls governing preparation and approval of the covered company's 
resolution plan;
    (iii) The identity and position of the senior management official(s) 
of the covered company that is primarily responsible for overseeing the 
development, maintenance, implementation, and filing of the covered 
company's resolution plan and for the covered company's compliance with 
this part; and
    (iv) The nature, extent, and frequency of reporting to senior 
executive officers and the board of directors of the covered company 
regarding the development, maintenance, and implementation of the 
covered company's resolution plan;
    (2) Describe the nature, extent, and results of any contingency 
planning or similar exercise conducted by the covered company since the 
date of the covered company's most recently filed resolution plan to 
assess the viability of or improve the resolution plan of the covered 
company; and
    (3) Identify and describe the relevant risk measures used by the 
covered company to report credit risk exposures both internally to its 
senior management and board of directors, as well as any relevant risk 
measures reported externally to investors or to the covered company's 
appropriate Federal regulator.
    (e) Organizational structure and related information. Each 
resolution plan shall--
    (1) Provide a detailed description of the covered company's 
organizational structure, including:
    (i) A hierarchical list of all material entities within the covered 
company's organization (including legal entities that directly or 
indirectly hold such material entities) that:
    (A) Identifies the direct holder and the percentage of voting and 
nonvoting equity of each legal entity and foreign office listed; and
    (B) The location, jurisdiction of incorporation, licensing, and key 
management associated with each material legal entity and foreign office 
identified;
    (ii) A mapping of the covered company's critical operations and core 
business lines, including material asset holdings and liabilities 
related to such critical operations and core business lines, to material 
entities;
    (2) Provide an unconsolidated balance sheet for the covered company 
and a consolidating schedule for all material entities that are subject 
to consolidation by the covered company;
    (3) Include a description of the material components of the 
liabilities of the covered company, its material entities, critical 
operations and core business lines that, at a minimum, separately 
identifies types and amounts of the short-term and long-term 
liabilities, the secured and unsecured liabilities, and subordinated 
liabilities;
    (4) Identify and describe the processes used by the covered company 
to:
    (i) Determine to whom the covered company has pledged collateral;
    (ii) Identify the person or entity that holds such collateral; and
    (iii) Identify the jurisdiction in which the collateral is located, 
and, if different, the jurisdiction in which the security interest in 
the collateral is enforceable against the covered company;
    (5) Describe any material off-balance sheet exposures (including 
guarantees and contractual obligations) of the covered company and its 
material entities, including a mapping to its critical operations and 
core business lines;
    (6) Describe the practices of the covered company, its material 
entities and its core business lines related to the booking of trading 
and derivatives activities;
    (7) Identify material hedges of the covered company, its material 
entities, and its core business lines related to trading and derivative 
activities, including a mapping to legal entity;
    (8) Describe the hedging strategies of the covered company;
    (9) Describe the process undertaken by the covered company to 
establish exposure limits;
    (10) Identify the major counterparties of the covered company and 
describe the interconnections, interdependencies and relationships with 
such major counterparties;
    (11) Analyze whether the failure of each major counterparty would 
likely have an adverse impact on or result in

[[Page 1153]]

the material financial distress or failure of the covered company; and
    (12) Identify each trading, payment, clearing, or settlement system 
of which the covered company, directly or indirectly, is a member and on 
which the covered company conducts a material number or value amount of 
trades or transactions. Map membership in each such system to the 
covered company's material entities, critical operations and core 
business lines.
    (f) Management information systems. (1) Each resolution plan shall 
include--
    (i) A detailed inventory and description of the key management 
information systems and applications, including systems and applications 
for risk management, accounting, and financial and regulatory reporting, 
used by the covered company and its material entities. The description 
of each system or application provided shall identify the legal owner or 
licensor, the use or function of the system or application, service 
level agreements related thereto, any software and system licenses, and 
any intellectual property associated therewith;
    (ii) A mapping of the key management information systems and 
applications to the material entities, critical operations and core 
business lines of the covered company that use or rely on such systems 
and applications;
    (iii) An identification of the scope, content, and frequency of the 
key internal reports that senior management of the covered company, its 
material entities, critical operations and core business lines use to 
monitor the financial health, risks, and operation of the covered 
company, its material entities, critical operations and core business 
lines; and
    (iv) A description of the process for the appropriate supervisory or 
regulatory agencies to access the management information systems and 
applications identified in paragraph (f) of this section; and
    (v) A description and analysis of--
    (A) The capabilities of the covered company's management information 
systems to collect, maintain, and report, in a timely manner to 
management of the covered company, and to the Board, the information and 
data underlying the resolution plan; and
    (B) Any deficiencies, gaps or weaknesses in such capabilities, and a 
description of the actions the covered company intends to take to 
promptly address such deficiencies, gaps, or weaknesses, and the time 
frame for implementing such actions.
    (2) The Board will use its examination authority to review the 
demonstrated capabilities of each covered company to satisfy the 
requirements of paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section. The Board will 
share with the Corporation information regarding the capabilities of the 
covered company to collect, maintain, and report in a timely manner 
information and data underlying the resolution plan.
    (g) Interconnections and interdependencies. To the extent not 
elsewhere provided, identify and map to the material entities the 
interconnections and interdependencies among the covered company and its 
material entities, and among the critical operations and core business 
lines of the covered company that, if disrupted, would materially affect 
the funding or operations of the covered company, its material entities, 
or its critical operations or core business lines. Such interconnections 
and interdependencies may include:
    (1) Common or shared personnel, facilities, or systems (including 
information technology platforms, management information systems, risk 
management systems, and accounting and recordkeeping systems);
    (2) Capital, funding, or liquidity arrangements;
    (3) Existing or contingent credit exposures;
    (4) Cross-guarantee arrangements, cross-collateral arrangements, 
cross-default provisions, and cross-affiliate netting agreements;
    (5) Risk transfers; and
    (6) Service level agreements.
    (h) Supervisory and regulatory information. Each resolution plan 
shall--
    (1) Identify any:
    (i) Federal, state, or foreign agency or authority (other than a 
Federal banking agency) with supervisory authority or responsibility for 
ensuring the safety and soundness of the covered company, its material 
entities, critical operations and core business lines; and

[[Page 1154]]

    (ii) Other Federal, state, or foreign agency or authority (other 
than a Federal banking agency) with significant supervisory or 
regulatory authority over the covered company, and its material entities 
and critical operations and core business lines.
    (2) Identify any foreign agency or authority responsible for 
resolving a foreign-based material entity and critical operations or 
core business lines of the covered company; and
    (3) Include contact information for each agency identified in 
paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) of this section.
    (i) Contact information. Each resolution plan shall identify a 
senior management official at the covered company responsible for 
serving as a point of contact regarding the resolution plan of the 
covered company, and include contact information (including phone 
number, email address, and physical address) for a senior management 
official of the material entities of the covered company.
    (j) Inclusion of previously submitted resolution plan informational 
elements by reference. An annual submission of or update to a resolution 
plan submitted by a covered company may include by reference 
informational elements (but not strategic analysis or executive summary 
elements) from a resolution plan previously submitted by the covered 
company to the Board and the Corporation, provided that:
    (1) The resolution plan seeking to include informational elements by 
reference clearly indicates:
    (i) The informational element the covered company is including by 
reference; and
    (ii) Which of the covered company's previously submitted resolution 
plan(s) originally contained the information the covered company is 
including by reference; and
    (2) The covered company certifies that the information the covered 
company is including by reference remains accurate.
    (k) Exemptions. The Board and the Corporation may jointly exempt a 
covered company from one or more of the requirements of this section.



Sec. 381.5  Review of resolution plans; resubmission of deficient
resolution plans.

    (a) Acceptance of submission and review. (1) The Board and 
Corporation shall review a resolution plan submitted under section this 
subpart within 60 days.
    (2) If the Board and Corporation jointly determine within the time 
described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section that a resolution plan is 
informationally incomplete or that substantial additional information is 
necessary to facilitate review of the resolution plan:
    (i) The Board and Corporation shall jointly inform the covered 
company in writing of the area(s) in which the resolution plan is 
informationally incomplete or with respect to which additional 
information is required; and
    (ii) The covered company shall resubmit an informationally complete 
resolution plan or such additional information as jointly requested to 
facilitate review of the resolution plan no later than 30 days after 
receiving the notice described in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section, 
or such other time period as the Board and Corporation may jointly 
determine.
    (b) Joint determination regarding deficient resolution plans. If the 
Board and Corporation jointly determine that the resolution plan of a 
covered company submitted under Sec. 381.3(a) is not credible or would 
not facilitate an orderly resolution of the covered company under the 
Bankruptcy Code, the Board and Corporation shall jointly notify the 
covered company in writing of such determination. Any joint notice 
provided under this paragraph shall identify the aspects of the 
resolution plan that the Board and Corporation jointly determined to be 
deficient.
    (c) Resubmission of a resolution plan. Within 90 days of receiving a 
notice of deficiencies issued pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, 
or such shorter or longer period as the Board and Corporation may 
jointly determine, a covered company shall submit a revised resolution 
plan to the Board and Corporation that addresses the deficiencies 
jointly identified by the Board and Corporation, and that discusses in 
detail:

[[Page 1155]]

    (1) The revisions made by the covered company to address the 
deficiencies jointly identified by the Board and the Corporation;
    (2) Any changes to the covered company's business operations and 
corporate structure that the covered company proposes to undertake to 
facilitate implementation of the revised resolution plan (including a 
timeline for the execution of such planned changes); and
    (3) Why the covered company believes that the revised resolution 
plan is credible and would result in an orderly resolution of the 
covered company under the Bankruptcy Code.
    (d) Extensions of time. Upon their own initiative or a written 
request by a covered company, the Board and Corporation may jointly 
extend any time period under this section. Each extension request shall 
be supported by a written statement of the covered company describing 
the basis and justification for the request.



Sec. 381.6  Failure to cure deficiencies on resubmission of
a resolution plan.

    (a) In general. The Board and Corporation may jointly determine that 
a covered company or any subsidiary of a covered company shall be 
subject to more stringent capital, leverage, or liquidity requirements, 
or restrictions on the growth, activities, or operations of the covered 
company or the subsidiary if:
    (1) The covered company fails to submit a revised resolution plan 
under Sec. 381.5(c) within the required time period; or
    (2) The Board and the Corporation jointly determine that a revised 
resolution plan submitted under Sec. 381.5(c) does not adequately remedy 
the deficiencies jointly identified by the Board and the Corporation 
under Sec. 381.5(b).
    (b) Duration of requirements or restrictions.--Any requirements or 
restrictions imposed on a covered company or a subsidiary thereof 
pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section shall cease to apply to the 
covered company or subsidiary, respectively, on the date that the Board 
and the Corporation jointly determine the covered company has submitted 
a revised resolution plan that adequately remedies the deficiencies 
jointly identified by the Board and the Corporation under Sec. 381.5(b).
    (c) Divestiture. The Board and Corporation, in consultation with the 
Council, may jointly, by order, direct the covered company to divest 
such assets or operations as are jointly identified by the Board and 
Corporation if:
    (1) The Board and Corporation have jointly determined that the 
covered company or a subsidiary thereof shall be subject to requirements 
or restrictions pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section; and
    (2) The covered company has failed, within the 2-year period 
beginning on the date on which the determination to impose such 
requirements or restrictions under paragraph (a) of this section was 
made, to submit a revised resolution plan that adequately remedies the 
deficiencies jointly identified by the Board and the Corporation under 
Sec. 381.5(b); and
    (3) The Board and Corporation jointly determine that the divestiture 
of such assets or operations is necessary to facilitate an orderly 
resolution of the covered company under the Bankruptcy Code in the event 
the company was to fail.



Sec. 381.7  Consultation.

    Prior to issuing any notice of deficiencies under Sec. 381.5(b), 
determining to impose requirements or restrictions under Sec. 381.6(a), 
or issuing a divestiture order pursuant to Sec. 381.6(c) with respect to 
a covered company that is likely to have a significant impact on a 
functionally regulated subsidiary or a depository institution subsidiary 
of the covered company, the Board--
    (a) Shall consult with each Council member that primarily supervises 
any such subsidiary; and
    (b) May consult with any other Federal, state, or foreign supervisor 
as the Board considers appropriate.



Sec. 381.8  No limiting effect or private right of action;
confidentiality of resolution plans.

    (a) No limiting effect on bankruptcy or other resolution 
proceedings. A resolution plan submitted pursuant to this part shall not 
have any binding effect on:

[[Page 1156]]

    (1) A court or trustee in a proceeding commenced under the 
Bankruptcy Code;
    (2) A receiver appointed under title II of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 
U.S.C. 5381 et seq.);
    (3) A bridge financial company chartered pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 
5390(h); or
    (4) Any other authority that is authorized or required to resolve a 
covered company (including any subsidiary or affiliate thereof) under 
any other provision of Federal, state, or foreign law.
    (b) No private right of action. Nothing in this part creates or is 
intended to create a private right of action based on a resolution plan 
prepared or submitted under this part or based on any action taken by 
the Board or the Corporation with respect to any resolution plan 
submitted under this part.
    (c) Form of resolution plans. Each resolution plan of a covered 
company shall be divided into a public section and a confidential 
section. Each covered company shall segregate and separately identify 
the public section from the confidential section. The public section 
shall consist of an executive summary of the resolution plan that 
describes the business of the covered company and includes, to the 
extent material to an understanding of the covered company:
    (1) The names of material entities;
    (2) A description of core business lines;
    (3) Consolidated or segment financial information regarding assets, 
liabilities, capital and major funding sources;
    (4) A description of derivative activities and hedging activities;
    (5) A list of memberships in material payment, clearing and 
settlement systems;
    (6) A description of foreign operations;
    (7) The identities of material supervisory authorities;
    (8) The identities of the principal officers;
    (9) A description of the corporate governance structure and 
processes related to resolution planning;
    (10) A description of material management information systems; and
    (11) A description, at a high level, of the covered company's 
resolution strategy, covering such items as the range of potential 
purchasers of the covered company, its material entities and core 
business lines.
    (d) Confidential treatment of resolution plans. (1) The 
confidentiality of resolution plans and related materials shall be 
determined in accordance with applicable exemptions under the Freedom of 
Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552(b)) and the Board's Rules Regarding 
Availability of Information (12 CFR part 261), and the Corporation's 
Disclosure of Information Rules (12 CFR part 309).
    (2) Any covered company submitting a resolution plan or related 
materials pursuant to this part that desires confidential treatment of 
the information under 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(4), the Board's Rules Regarding 
Availability of Information (12 CFR part 261), and the Corporation's 
Disclosure of Information Rules (12 CFR part 309) may file a request for 
confidential treatment in accordance with those rules.
    (3) To the extent permitted by law, information comprising the 
Confidential Section of a resolution plan will be treated as 
confidential.
    (4) To the extent permitted by law, the submission of any nonpublic 
data or information under this part shall not constitute a waiver of, or 
otherwise affect, any privilege arising under Federal or state law 
(including the rules of any Federal or state court) to which the data or 
information is otherwise subject. Privileges that apply to resolution 
plans and related materials are protected pursuant to Section 18(x) of 
the FDI Act, 12 U.S.C. 1828(x).



Sec. 381.9  Enforcement.

    The Board and Corporation may jointly enforce an order jointly 
issued by the Board and Corporation under Sec. 3816(a) or 381.6(c) of 
this part. The Board, in consultation with the Corporation, may take any 
action to address any violation of this part by a covered company under 
section 8 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818).
      

[[Page 1157]]



PART 382_RESTRICTIONS ON QUALIFIED FINANCIAL CONTRACTS--
Table of Contents



Sec.
382.1  Definitions.
382.2  Applicability.
382.3  U.S. Special resolution regimes.
382.4  Insolvency proceedings.
382.5  Approval of enhanced creditor protection conditions.
382.6  [Reserved]
382.7  Exclusion of certain QFCs.

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1816, 1818, 1819, 1820(g) 1828, 1828(m), 1831n, 
1831o,1831p-l, 1831(u), 1831w.

    Source: 82 FR 50262, Oct. 30, 2017, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 382.1  Definitions.

    Affiliate has the same meaning as in section 12 U.S.C. 1813(w).
    Central counterparty (CCP) has the same meaning as in Sec. 324.2 of 
this chapter.
    Chapter 11 proceeding means a proceeding under Chapter 11 of Title 
11, United States Code (11 U.S.C. 1101-74).
    Consolidated affiliate means an affiliate of another company that:
    (1) Either consolidates the other company, or is consolidated by the 
other company, on financial statements prepared in accordance with U.S. 
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, the International Financial 
Reporting Standards, or other similar standards;
    (2) Is, along with the other company, consolidated with a third 
company on a financial statement prepared in accordance with principles 
or standards referenced in paragraph (1) of this definition; or
    (3) For a company that is not subject to principles or standards 
referenced in paragraph (1), if consolidation as described in paragraph 
(1) or (2) of this definition would have occurred if such principles or 
standards had applied.
    Control has the same meaning as in section 3(w) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(w)).
    Covered bank means a covered bank as defined by the Office of the 
Comptroller of the Currency in 12 CFR part 47.
    Covered entity means a covered entity as defined by the Federal 
Reserve Board in 12 CFR 252.82.
    Covered QFC means a QFC as defined in Sec. 382.2 of this part.
    Credit enhancement means a QFC of the type set forth in sections 
210(c)(8)(D)(ii)(XII), (iii)(X), (iv)(V), (v)(VI), or (vi)(VI) of Title 
II of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 
U.S.C. 5390(c)(8)(D)(ii)(XII), (iii)(X), (iv)(V), (v)(VI), or (vi)(VI)) 
or a credit enhancement that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
determines is a QFC pursuant to section 210(c)(8)(D)(i) of Title II of 
the act (12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(8)(D)(i)).
    Default right means:
    (1) With respect to a QFC, any
    (i) Right of a party, whether contractual or otherwise (including, 
without limitation, rights incorporated by reference to any other 
contract, agreement, or document, and rights afforded by statute, civil 
code, regulation, and common law), to liquidate, terminate, cancel, 
rescind, or accelerate such agreement or transactions thereunder, set 
off or net amounts owing in respect thereto (except rights related to 
same-day payment netting), exercise remedies in respect of collateral or 
other credit support or property related thereto (including the purchase 
and sale of property), demand payment or delivery thereunder or in 
respect thereof (other than a right or operation of a contractual 
provision arising solely from a change in the value of collateral or 
margin or a change in the amount of an economic exposure), suspend, 
delay, or defer payment or performance thereunder, or modify the 
obligations of a party thereunder, or any similar rights; and
    (ii) Right or contractual provision that alters the amount of 
collateral or margin that must be provided with respect to an exposure 
thereunder, including by altering any initial amount, threshold amount, 
variation margin, minimum transfer amount, the margin value of 
collateral, or any similar amount, that entitles a party to demand the 
return of any collateral or margin transferred by it to the other party 
or a custodian or that modifies a transferee's right to reuse collateral 
or margin (if such right previously existed), or any similar rights, in 
each case, other than a right or operation of

[[Page 1158]]

a contractual provision arising solely from a change in the value of 
collateral or margin or a change in the amount of an economic exposure;
    (2) With respect to Sec. 382.4, does not include any right under a 
contract that allows a party to terminate the contract on demand or at 
its option at a specified time, or from time to time, without the need 
to show cause.
    FDI Act proceeding means a proceeding in which the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation is appointed as conservator or receiver under 
section 11 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821).
    FDI Act stay period means, in connection with an FDI Act proceeding, 
the period of time during which a party to a QFC with a party that is 
subject to an FDI Act proceeding may not exercise any right that the 
party that is not subject to an FDI Act proceeding has to terminate, 
liquidate, or net such QFC, in accordance with section 11(e) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)) and any implementing 
regulations.
    Financial counterparty means a person that is:
    (1)(i) A bank holding company or an affiliate thereof; a savings and 
loan holding company as defined in section 10(n) of the Home Owners' 
Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1467a(n)); a U.S. intermediate holding company that 
is established or designated for purposes of compliance with 12 CFR 
252.153; or a nonbank financial institution supervised by the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System under Title I of the Dodd-Frank 
Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 5323);
    (ii) A depository institution as defined, in section 3(c) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)); an organization that 
is organized under the laws of a foreign country and that engages 
directly in the business of banking outside the United States; a Federal 
credit union or State credit union as defined in section 2 of the 
Federal Credit Union Act (12 U.S.C. 1752(1) and (6)); an institution 
that functions solely in a trust or fiduciary capacity as described in 
section 2(c)(2)(D) of the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841 
(c)(2)(D)); an industrial loan company, an industrial bank, or other 
similar institution described in section 2(c)(2)(H) of the Bank Holding 
Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841(c)(2)(H));
    (iii) An entity that is State-licensed or registered as;
    (A) A credit or lending entity, including a finance company; money 
lender; installment lender; consumer lender or lending company; mortgage 
lender, broker, or bank; motor vehicle title pledge lender; payday or 
deferred deposit lender; premium finance company; commercial finance or 
lending company; or commercial mortgage company; except entities 
registered or licensed solely on account of financing the entity's 
direct sales of goods or services to customers;
    (B) A money services business, including a check casher; money 
transmitter; currency dealer or exchange; or money order or traveler's 
check issuer;
    (iv) A regulated entity as defined in section 1303(20) of the 
Federal Housing Enterprises Financial Safety and Soundness Act of 1992, 
as amended (12 U.S.C. 4502(20)) or any entity for which the Federal 
Housing Finance Agency or its successor is the primary Federal 
regulator;
    (v) Any institution chartered in accordance with the Farm Credit Act 
of 1971, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 2001 et seq. that is regulated by the 
Farm Credit Administration;
    (vi) Any entity registered with the Commodity Futures Trading 
Commission as a swap dealer or major swap participant pursuant to the 
Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1 et seq.), or an entity that 
is registered with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission as a 
security-based swap dealer or a major security-based swap participant 
pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78a et seq.);
    (vii) A securities holding company within the meaning specified in 
section 618 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection 
act (12 U.S.C. 1850a); a broker or dealer as defined in sections 3(a)(4) 
and 3(a)(5) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 
78c(a)(45); an investment adviser as defined in section 202(a) of the 
Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (15

[[Page 1159]]

U.S.C. 80b-2(a)); an investment company registered with the U.S. 
Securities and Exchange Commission under the Investment Company Act of 
1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-1 et seq.); or a company that has elected to be 
regulated as a business development company pursuant to section 54(a) of 
the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a-53(a));
    (viii) A private fund as defined in section 202(a) of the Investment 
Advisers Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80b-2(a)); an entity that would be an 
investment company under section 3 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 
(15 U.S.C. 80a-3) but for section 3(c)(5)(C); or an entity that is 
deemed not to be an investment company under section 3 of the Investment 
Company Act of 1940 pursuant to Investment Company Act Rule 3a-7 (17 CFR 
270.3a-7) of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission;
    (ix) A commodity pool, a commodity pool operator, or a commodity 
trading advisor as defined, respectively, in section 1a(10), 1a(11), and 
1a(12) of the Commodity Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(10), 1a(11), 
and 1a(12)); a floor broker, a floor trader, or introducing broker as 
defined, respectively, in 1a(22), 1a(23) and 1a(31) of the Commodity 
Exchange Act of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(22), 1a(23), and 1a(31)); or a futures 
commission merchant as defined in 1a(28) of the Commodity Exchange Act 
of 1936 (7 U.S.C. 1a(28));
    (x) An employee benefit plan as defined in paragraphs (3) and (32) 
of section 3 of the Employee Retirement Income and Security Act of 1974 
(29 U.S.C. 1002);
    (xi) An entity that is organized as an insurance company, primarily 
engaged in writing insurance or reinsuring risks underwritten by 
insurance companies, or is subject to supervision as such by a State 
insurance regulator or foreign insurance regulator; or
    (xii) An entity that would be a financial counterparty described in 
paragraphs (1)(i) through (xi) of this definition, if the entity were 
organized under the laws of the United States or any State thereof.
    (2) The term ``financial counterparty'' does not include any 
counterparty that is:
    (i) A sovereign entity;
    (ii) A multilateral development bank; or
    (iii) The Bank for International Settlements.
    Financial market utility (FMU) means any person, regardless of the 
jurisdiction in which the person is located or organized, that manages 
or operates a multilateral system for the purpose of transferring, 
clearing, or settling payments, securities, or other financial 
transactions among financial institutions or between financial 
institutions and the person, but does not include:
    (1) Designated contract markets, registered futures associations, 
swap data repositories, and swap execution facilities registered under 
the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1 et seq.), or national securities 
exchanges, national securities associations, alternative trading 
systems, security-based swap data repositories, and swap execution 
facilities registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78a et seq.), solely by reason of their providing facilities for 
comparison of data respecting the terms of settlement of securities or 
futures transactions effected on such exchange or by means of any 
electronic system operated or controlled by such entities, provided that 
the exclusions in this clause apply only with respect to the activities 
that require the entity to be so registered; or
    (2) Any broker, dealer, transfer agent, or investment company, or 
any futures commission merchant, introducing broker, commodity trading 
advisor, or commodity pool operator, solely by reason of functions 
performed by such institution as part of brokerage, dealing, transfer 
agency, or investment company activities, or solely by reason of acting 
on behalf of a FMU or a participant therein in connection with the 
furnishing by the FMU of services to its participants or the use of 
services of the FMU by its participants, provided that services 
performed by such institution do not constitute critical risk management 
or processing functions of the FMU.
    Investment advisory contract means any contract or agreement whereby 
a person agrees to act as investment adviser to or to manage any 
investment or trading account of another person.

[[Page 1160]]

    Master agreement means a QFC of the type set forth in sections 
210(c)(8)(D)(ii)(XI), (iii)(IX), (iv)(IV), (v)(V), or (vi)(V) of Title 
II of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 
U.S.C. 5390(c)(8)(D)(ii)(XI), (iii)(IX), (iv)(IV), (v)(V), or (vi)(V)) 
or a master agreement that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
determines is a QFC pursuant to section 210(c)(8)(D)(i) of Title II of 
the act (12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(8)(D)(i)).
    Person has the same meaning as in 12 CFR 225.2.
    Qualified financial contract (QFC) has the same meaning as in 
section 210(c)(8)(D) of Title II of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform 
and Consumer Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 5390(c)(8)(D)).
    Retail customer or counterparty has the same meaning as in 
Sec. 329.3 of this chapter.
    Small financial institution means a company that:
    (1) Is organized as a bank, as defined in section 3(a) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act, the deposits of which are insured by the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation; a savings association, as defined 
in section 3(b) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, the deposits of 
which are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation; a farm 
credit system institution chartered under the Farm Credit Act of 1971; 
or an insured Federal credit union or State-chartered credit union under 
the Federal Credit Union Act; and
    (2) Has total assets of $10,000,000,000 or less on the last day of 
the company's most recent fiscal year.
    State means any State, commonwealth, territory, or possession of the 
United States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto 
Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, American Samoa, 
Guam, or the United States Virgin Islands.
    Subsidiary of a covered FSI means any subsidiary of a covered FSI as 
defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813(w).
    U.S. agency has the same meaning as the term ``agency'' in 12 U.S.C. 
3101.
    U.S. branch has the same meaning as the term ``branch'' in 12 U.S.C. 
3101.
    U.S. special resolution regimes means the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act (12 U.S.C. 1811-1835a) and regulations promulgated thereunder and 
Title II of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection 
Act (12 U.S.C. 5381-5394) and regulations promulgated thereunder.

[82 FR 50261, 50267, Oct. 30, 2017; 82 FR 61443, Dec. 28, 2017]



Sec. 382.2  Applicability.

    (a) General requirement. A covered FSI must ensure that each covered 
QFC conforms to the requirements of Secs. 382.3 and 382.4 of this part.
    (b) Covered FSI. For purposes of this part a covered FSI means
    (1) Any State savings association or State non-member bank (as 
defined in the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1813(e)(2)) that 
is a direct or indirect subsidiary of:
    (i) A global systemically important bank holding company that has 
been designated pursuant to Sec. 252.82(a)(1) of the Federal Reserve 
Board's Regulation YY (12 CFR 252.82); or
    (ii) A global systemically important foreign banking organization 
that has been designated pursuant to subpart I of 12 CFR part 252 (FRB 
Regulation YY), and
    (2) Any subsidiary of a covered FSI other than:
    (i) A subsidiary that is owned in satisfaction of debt previously 
contracted in good faith;
    (ii) A portfolio concern that is a small business investment 
company, as defined in section 103(3) of the Small Business Investment 
Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 662), or that has received from the Small 
Business Administration notice to proceed to qualify for a license as a 
Small Business Investment Company, which notice or license has not been 
revoked; or
    (iii) A subsidiary designed to promote the public welfare, of the 
type permitted under paragraph (11) of section 5136 of the Revised 
Statutes of the United States (12 U.S.C. 24), including the welfare of 
low- to moderate-income communities or families (such as providing 
housing, services, or jobs).
    (c) Covered QFCs. For purposes of this part, a covered QFC is:

[[Page 1161]]

    (1) With respect to a covered FSI that is a covered FSI on January 
1, 2018, an in-scope QFC that the covered FSI:
    (i) Enters, executes, or otherwise becomes a party to on or after 
January 1, 2019; or
    (ii) Entered, executed, or otherwise became a party to before 
January 1, 2019, if the covered FSI or any affiliate that is a covered 
entity, covered bank, or covered FSI also enters, executes, or otherwise 
becomes a party to a QFC with the same person or a consolidated 
affiliate of the same person on or after January 1, 2019.
    (2) With respect to a covered FSI that becomes a covered FSI after 
January 1, 2018, an in-scope QFC that the covered FSI:
    (i) Enters, executes, or otherwise becomes a party to on or after 
the later of the date the covered FSI first becomes a covered FSI and 
January 1, 2019; or
    (ii) Entered, executed, or otherwise became a party to before the 
date identified in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section with respect to 
the covered FSI, if the covered FSI or any affiliate that is a covered 
entity, covered bank or covered FSI also enters, executes, or otherwise 
becomes a party to a QFC with the same person or consolidated affiliate 
of the same person on or after the date identified in paragraph 
(c)(2)(i) of this section with respect to the covered FSI.
    (d) In-scope QFCs. An in-scope QFC is a QFC that explicitly:
    (1) Restricts the transfer of a QFC (or any interest or obligation 
in or under, or any property securing, the QFC) from a covered FSI; or
    (2) Provides one or more default rights with respect to a QFC that 
may be exercised against a covered FSI.
    (e) Rules of construction. For purposes of this part,
    (1) A covered FSI does not become a party to a QFC solely by acting 
as agent with respect to the QFC; and
    (2) The exercise of a default right with respect to a covered QFC 
includes the automatic or deemed exercise of the default right pursuant 
to the terms of the QFC or other arrangement.
    (f) Initial applicability of requirements for covered QFCs. (1) With 
respect to each of its covered QFCs, a covered FSI that is a covered FSI 
on January 1, 2018 must conform the covered QFC to the requirements of 
this part by:
    (i) January 1, 2019, if each party to the covered QFC is a covered 
entity, covered bank, or covered FSI.
    (ii) July 1, 2019, if each party to the covered QFC (other than the 
covered FSI) is a financial counterparty that is not a covered entity, 
covered bank or covered FSI; or
    (iii) January 1, 2020, if a party to the covered QFC (other than the 
covered FSI) is not described in paragraph (f)(1)(i) or (ii) of this 
section or if, notwithstanding paragraph (f)(1)(ii), a party to the 
covered QFC (other than the covered FSI) is a small financial 
institution.
    (2) With respect to each of its covered QFCs, a covered FSI that is 
not a covered FSI on January 1, 2018 must conform the covered QFC to the 
requirements of this part by:
    (i) The first day of the calendar quarter immediately following 1 
year after the date the covered FSI first becomes a covered FSI if each 
party to the covered QFC is a covered entity, covered bank, or covered 
FSI;
    (ii) The first day of the calendar quarter immediately following 18 
months from the date the covered FSI first becomes a covered FSI if each 
party to the covered QFC (other than the covered FSI) is a financial 
counterparty that is not a covered entity, covered bank or covered FSI; 
or
    (iii) The first day of the calendar quarter immediately following 2 
years from the date the covered FSI first becomes a covered FSI if a 
party to the covered QFC (other than the covered FSI) is not described 
in paragraph (f)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section or if, notwithstanding 
paragraph (f)(2)(ii), a party to the covered QFC (other than the covered 
FSI) is a small financial institution.
    (g) Rights of receiver unaffected. Nothing in this part shall in any 
manner limit or modify the rights and powers of the FDIC as receiver 
under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II of the Dodd-Frank 
Act, including, without limitation, the rights of the receiver to 
enforce provisions of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II of 
the Dodd-Frank Act that limit the

[[Page 1162]]

enforceability of certain contractual provisions.

[82 FR 50261, Oct. 30, 2017; 82 FR 61443, Dec. 28, 2017]



Sec. 382.3  U.S. special resolution regimes.

    (a) Covered QFCs not required to be conformed. (1) Notwithstanding 
Sec. 382.2 of this part, a covered FSI is not required to conform a 
covered QFC to the requirements of this section if:
    (i) The covered QFC designates, in the manner described in paragraph 
(a)(2) of this section, the U.S. special resolution regimes as part of 
the law governing the QFC; and
    (ii) Each party to the covered QFC, other than the covered FSI, is
    (A) An individual that is domiciled in the United States, including 
any State;
    (B) A company that is incorporated in or organized under the laws of 
the United States or any State;
    (C) A company the principal place of business of which is located in 
the United States, including any State; or
    (D) A U.S. branch or U.S. agency.
    (2) A covered QFC designates the U.S. special resolution regimes as 
part of the law governing the QFC if the covered QFC:
    (i) Explicitly provides that the covered QFC is governed by the laws 
of the United States or a State of the United States; and
    (ii) Does not explicitly provide that one or both of the U.S. 
special resolution regimes, or a broader set of laws that includes a 
U.S. special resolution regime, is excluded from the laws governing the 
covered QFC.
    (b) Provisions required. A covered QFC must explicitly provide that:
    (1) In the event the covered FSI becomes subject to a proceeding 
under a U.S. special resolution regime, the transfer of the covered QFC 
(and any interest and obligation in or under, and any property securing, 
the covered QFC) from the covered FSI will be effective to the same 
extent as the transfer would be effective under the U.S. special 
resolution regime if the covered QFC (and any interest and obligation in 
or under, and any property securing, the covered QFC) were governed by 
the laws of the United States or a State of the United States; and
    (2) In the event the covered FSI or an affiliate of the covered FSI 
becomes subject to a proceeding under a U.S. special resolution regime, 
default rights with respect to the covered QFC that may be exercised 
against the covered FSI are permitted to be exercised to no greater 
extent than the default rights could be exercised under the U.S. special 
resolution regime if the covered QFC were governed by the laws of the 
United States or a State of the United States.
    (c) Relevance of creditor protection provisions. The requirements of 
this section apply notwithstanding Sec. 382.4(d), (f), and (h) of this 
part.



Sec. 382.4  Insolvency proceedings.

    This section does not apply to proceedings under Title II of the 
Dodd-Frank Act.
    (a) Covered QFCs not required to be conformed. Notwithstanding 
Sec. 382.2 of this part, a covered FSI is not required to conform a 
covered QFC to the requirements of this section if the covered QFC:
    (1) Does not explicitly provide any default right with respect to 
the covered QFC that is related, directly or indirectly, to an affiliate 
of the direct party becoming subject to a receivership, insolvency, 
liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding; and
    (2) Does not explicitly prohibit the transfer of a covered affiliate 
credit enhancement, any interest or obligation in or under the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement, or any property securing the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement to a transferee upon or following an 
affiliate of the direct party becoming subject to a receivership, 
insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding or would 
prohibit such a transfer only if the transfer would result in the 
supported party being the beneficiary of the credit enhancement in 
violation of any law applicable to the supported party.
    (b) General prohibitions. (1) A covered QFC may not permit the 
exercise of any default right with respect to the covered QFC that is 
related, directly or indirectly, to an affiliate of the direct party 
becoming subject to a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, resolution, 
or similar proceeding.

[[Page 1163]]

    (2) A covered QFC may not prohibit the transfer of a covered 
affiliate credit enhancement, any interest or obligation in or under the 
covered affiliate credit enhancement, or any property securing the 
covered affiliate credit enhancement to a transferee upon or following 
an affiliate of the direct party becoming subject to a receivership, 
insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding unless the 
transfer would result in the supported party being the beneficiary of 
the credit enhancement in violation of any law applicable to the 
supported party.
    (c) Definitions relevant to the general prohibitions--(1) Direct 
party. Direct party means a covered entity, covered bank, or covered FSI 
that is a party to the direct QFC.
    (2) Direct QFC. Direct QFC means a QFC that is not a credit 
enhancement, provided that, for a QFC that is a master agreement that 
includes an affiliate credit enhancement as a supplement to the master 
agreement, the direct QFC does not include the affiliate credit 
enhancement.
    (3) Affiliate credit enhancement. Affiliate credit enhancement means 
a credit enhancement that is provided by an affiliate of a party to the 
direct QFC that the credit enhancement supports.
    (d) General creditor protections. Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of 
this section, a covered direct QFC and covered affiliate credit 
enhancement that supports the covered direct QFC may permit the exercise 
of a default right with respect to the covered QFC that arises as a 
result of
    (1) The direct party becoming subject to a receivership, insolvency, 
liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding;
    (2) The direct party not satisfying a payment or delivery obligation 
pursuant to the covered QFC or another contract between the same parties 
that gives rise to a default right in the covered QFC; or
    (3) The covered affiliate support provider or transferee not 
satisfying a payment or delivery obligation pursuant to a covered 
affiliate credit enhancement that supports the covered direct QFC.
    (e) Definitions relevant to the general creditor protections--(1) 
Covered direct QFC. Covered direct QFC means a direct QFC to which a 
covered entity, covered bank, or covered FSI is a party.
    (2) Covered affiliate credit enhancement. Covered affiliate credit 
enhancement means an affiliate credit enhancement in which a covered 
entity, covered bank, or covered FSI is the obligor of the credit 
enhancement.
    (3) Covered affiliate support provider. Covered affiliate support 
provider means, with respect to a covered affiliate credit enhancement, 
the affiliate of the direct party that is obligated under the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement and is not a transferee.
    (4) Supported party. Supported party means, with respect to a 
covered affiliate credit enhancement and the direct QFC that the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement supports, a party that is a beneficiary of 
the covered affiliate support provider's obligation(s) under the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement.
    (f) Additional creditor protections for supported QFCs. 
Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of this section, with respect to a covered 
direct QFC that is supported by a covered affiliate credit enhancement, 
the covered direct QFC and the covered affiliate credit enhancement may 
permit the exercise of a default right after the stay period that is 
related, directly or indirectly, to the covered affiliate support 
provider becoming subject to a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, 
resolution, or similar proceeding if:
    (1) The covered affiliate support provider that remains obligated 
under the covered affiliate credit enhancement becomes subject to a 
receivership, insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding 
other than a Chapter 11 proceeding;
    (2) Subject to paragraph (h) of this section, the transferee, if 
any, becomes subject to a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, 
resolution, or similar proceeding;
    (3) The covered affiliate support provider does not remain, and a 
transferee does not become, obligated to the same, or substantially 
similar, extent as the covered affiliate support provider was obligated 
immediately prior

[[Page 1164]]

to entering the receivership, insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or 
similar proceeding with respect to:
    (i) The covered affiliate credit enhancement;
    (ii) All other covered affiliate credit enhancements provided by the 
covered affiliate support provider in support of other covered direct 
QFCs between the direct party and the supported party under the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement referenced in paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this 
section; and
    (iii) All covered affiliate credit enhancements provided by the 
covered affiliate support provider in support of covered direct QFCs 
between the direct party and affiliates of the supported party 
referenced in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section; or
    (4) In the case of a transfer of the covered affiliate credit 
enhancement to a transferee,
    (i) All of the ownership interests of the direct party directly or 
indirectly held by the covered affiliate support provider are not 
transferred to the transferee; or
    (ii) Reasonable assurance has not been provided that all or 
substantially all of the assets of the covered affiliate support 
provider (or net proceeds therefrom), excluding any assets reserved for 
the payment of costs and expenses of administration in the receivership, 
insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding, will be 
transferred or sold to the transferee in a timely manner.
    (g) Definitions relevant to the additional creditor protections for 
supported QFCs--(1) Stay period. Stay period means, with respect to a 
receivership, insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or similar 
proceeding, the period of time beginning on the commencement of the 
proceeding and ending at the later of 5 p.m. (EST) on the business day 
following the date of the commencement of the proceeding and 48 hours 
after the commencement of the proceeding.
    (2) Business day. Business day means a day on which commercial banks 
in the jurisdiction the proceeding is commenced are open for general 
business (including dealings in foreign exchange and foreign currency 
deposits).
    (3) Transferee. Transferee means a person to whom a covered 
affiliate credit enhancement is transferred upon the covered affiliate 
support provider entering a receivership, insolvency, liquidation, 
resolution, or similar proceeding or thereafter as part of the 
resolution, restructuring, or reorganization involving the covered 
affiliate support provider.
    (h) Creditor protections related to FDI Act proceedings. 
Notwithstanding paragraphs (d) and (f) of this section, which are 
inapplicable to FDI Act proceedings, and notwithstanding paragraph (b) 
of this section, with respect to a covered direct QFC that is supported 
by a covered affiliate credit enhancement, the covered direct QFC and 
the covered affiliate credit enhancement may permit the exercise of a 
default right that is related, directly or indirectly, to the covered 
affiliate support provider becoming subject to FDI Act proceedings only 
in the following circumstances:
    (1) After the FDI Act stay period, if the covered affiliate credit 
enhancement is not transferred pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(9)-(10) and 
any regulations promulgated thereunder; or
    (2) During the FDI Act stay period, if the default right may only be 
exercised so as to permit the supported party under the covered 
affiliate credit enhancement to suspend performance with respect to the 
supported party's obligations under the covered direct QFC to the same 
extent as the supported party would be entitled to do if the covered 
direct QFC were with the covered affiliate support provider and were 
treated in the same manner as the covered affiliate credit enhancement.
    (i) Prohibited terminations. A covered QFC must require, after an 
affiliate of the direct party has become subject to a receivership, 
insolvency, liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding,
    (1) The party seeking to exercise a default right to bear the burden 
of proof that the exercise is permitted under the covered QFC; and
    (2) Clear and convincing evidence or a similar or higher burden of 
proof to exercise a default right.



Sec. 382.5  Approval of enhanced creditor protection conditions.

    (a) Protocol compliance. (1) Unless the FDIC determines otherwise 
based on

[[Page 1165]]

the specific facts and circumstances, a covered QFC is deemed to comply 
with this part if it is amended by the universal protocol or the U.S. 
protocol.
    (2) A covered QFC will be deemed to be amended by the universal 
protocol for purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of this section 
notwithstanding the covered QFC being amended by one or more Country 
Annexes, as the term is defined in the universal protocol.
    (3) For purposes of paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section:
    (i) The universal protocol means the ISDA 2015 Universal Resolution 
Stay Protocol, including the Securities Financing Transaction Annex and 
Other Agreements Annex, published by the International Swaps and 
Derivatives Association, Inc., as of May 3, 2016, and minor or technical 
amendments thereto;
    (ii) The U.S. protocol means a protocol that is the same as the 
universal protocol other than as provided in paragraphs (a)(3)(ii)(A) 
through (F) of this section.
    (A) The provisions of Section 1 of the attachment to the universal 
protocol may be limited in their application to covered entities, 
covered banks, and covered FSIs and may be limited with respect to 
resolutions under the Identified Regimes, as those regimes are 
identified by the universal protocol;
    (B) The provisions of Section 2 of the attachment to the universal 
protocol may be limited in their application to covered entities, 
covered banks, and covered FSIs;
    (C) The provisions of Section 4(b)(i)(A) of the attachment to the 
universal protocol must not apply with respect to U.S. special 
resolution regimes;
    (D) The provisions of Section 4(b) of the attachment to the 
universal protocol may only be effective to the extent that the covered 
QFCs affected by an adherent's election thereunder would continue to 
meet the requirements of this part;
    (E) The provisions of Section 2(k) of the attachment to the 
universal protocol must not apply; and
    (F) The U.S. protocol may include minor and technical differences 
from the universal protocol and differences necessary to conform the 
U.S. protocol to the differences described in paragraphs (a)(3)(ii)(A) 
through (E) of this section.
    (iii) Amended by the universal protocol or the U.S. protocol, with 
respect to covered QFCs between adherents to the protocol, includes 
amendments through incorporation of the terms of the protocol (by 
reference or otherwise) into the covered QFC; and
    (iv) The attachment to the universal protocol means the attachment 
that the universal protocol identifies as ``ATTACHMENT to the ISDA 2015 
UNIVERSAL RESOLUTION STAY PROTOCOL.''
    (b) Proposal of enhanced creditor protection conditions. (1) A 
covered FSI may request that the FDIC approve as compliant with the 
requirements of Secs. 382.3 and 382.4 proposed provisions of one or more 
forms of covered QFCs, or proposed amendments to one or more forms of 
covered QFCs, with enhanced creditor protection conditions.
    (2) Enhanced creditor protection conditions means a set of limited 
exemptions to the requirements of Sec. 382.4(b) of this part that is 
different than that of Sec. 382.4(d), (f), and (h).
    (3) A covered FSI making a request under paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section must provide
    (i) An analysis of the proposal that addresses each consideration in 
paragraph (d) of this section;
    (ii) A written legal opinion verifying that proposed provisions or 
amendments would be valid and enforceable under applicable law of the 
relevant jurisdictions, including, in the case of proposed amendments, 
the validity and enforceability of the proposal to amend the covered 
QFCs; and
    (iii) Any other relevant information that the FDIC requests.
    (c) FDIC approval. The FDIC may approve, subject to any conditions 
or commitments the FDIC may set, a proposal by a covered FSI under 
paragraph (b) of this section if the proposal, as compared to a covered 
QFC that contains only the limited exemptions in Sec. 382.4(d), (f), and 
(h) or that is amended as provided under paragraph (a) of this section, 
would promote the safety and

[[Page 1166]]

soundness of covered FSIs by mitigating the potential destabilizing 
effects of the resolution of a global significantly important banking 
entity that is an affiliate of the covered FSI to at least the same 
extent.
    (d) Considerations. In reviewing a proposal under this section, the 
FDIC may consider all facts and circumstances related to the proposal, 
including:
    (1) Whether, and the extent to which, the proposal would reduce the 
resiliency of such covered FSIs during distress or increase the impact 
on U.S. financial stability were one or more of the covered FSIs to 
fail;
    (2) Whether, and the extent to which, the proposal would materially 
decrease the ability of a covered FSI, or an affiliate of a covered FSI, 
to be resolved in a rapid and orderly manner in the event of the 
financial distress or failure of the entity that is required to submit a 
resolution plan;
    (3) Whether, and the extent to which, the set of conditions or the 
mechanism in which they are applied facilitates, on an industry-wide 
basis, contractual modifications to remove impediments to resolution and 
increase market certainty, transparency, and equitable treatment with 
respect to the default rights of non-defaulting parties to a covered 
QFC;
    (4) Whether, and the extent to which, the proposal applies to 
existing and future transactions;
    (5) Whether, and the extent to which, the proposal would apply to 
multiple forms of QFCs or multiple covered FSIs;
    (6) Whether the proposal would permit a party to a covered QFC that 
is within the scope of the proposal to adhere to the proposal with 
respect to only one or a subset of covered FSIs;
    (7) With respect to a supported party, the degree of assurance the 
proposal provides to the supported party that the material payment and 
delivery obligations of the covered affiliate credit enhancement and the 
covered direct QFC it supports will continue to be performed after the 
covered affiliate support provider enters a receivership, insolvency, 
liquidation, resolution, or similar proceeding;
    (8) The presence, nature, and extent of any provisions that require 
a covered affiliate support provider or transferee to meet conditions 
other than material payment or delivery obligations to its creditors;
    (9) The extent to which the supported party's overall credit risk to 
the direct party may increase if the enhanced creditor protection 
conditions are not met and the likelihood that the supported party's 
credit risk to the direct party would decrease or remain the same if the 
enhanced creditor protection conditions are met; and
    (10) Whether the proposal provides the counterparty with additional 
default rights or other rights.



Sec. 382.6  [Reserved]



Sec. 382.7  Exclusion of certain QFCs.

    (a) Exclusion of QFCs with FMUs. Notwithstanding Sec. 382.2 of this 
part, a covered FSI is not required to conform to the requirements of 
this part a covered QFC to which:
    (1) A CCP is party; or
    (2) Each party (other than the covered FSI) is an FMU.
    (b) Exclusion of certain covered entity and covered bank QFCs. If a 
covered QFC is also a covered QFC under part 252 or part 47 of this 
title that an affiliate of the covered FSI is also required to conform 
pursuant to part 252 or part 47 and the covered FSI is:
    (1) The affiliate credit enhancement provider with respect to the 
covered QFC, then the covered FSI is required to conform the credit 
enhancement to the requirements of this part but is not required to 
conform the direct QFC to the requirements of this part; or
    (2) The direct party to which the covered entity or covered bank is 
the affiliate credit enhancement provider, then the covered FSI is 
required to conform the direct QFC to the requirements of this part but 
is not required to conform the credit enhancement to the requirements of 
this part.
    (c) Exclusion of certain contracts. Notwithstanding Sec. 382.2 of 
this part, a covered FSI is not required to conform the following types 
of contracts or agreements to the requirements of this part:
    (1) An investment advisory contract that:
    (i) Is with a retail customer or counterparty;

[[Page 1167]]

    (ii) Does not explicitly restrict the transfer of the contract (or 
any QFC entered into pursuant thereto or governed thereby, or any 
interest or obligation in or under, or any property securing, any such 
QFC or the contract) from the covered FSI except as necessary to comply 
with section 205(a)(2) of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 
80b-5(a)(2)); and
    (iii) Does not explicitly provide a default right with respect to 
the contract or any QFC entered pursuant thereto or governed thereby.
    (2) A warrant that:
    (i) Evidences a right to subscribe to or otherwise acquire a 
security of the covered FSI or an affiliate of the covered FSI; and
    (ii) Was issued prior to January 1, 2018.
    (d) Exemption by order. The FDIC may exempt by order one or more 
covered FSI(s) from conforming one or more contracts or types of 
contracts to one or more of the requirements of this part after 
considering:
    (1) The potential impact of the exemption on the ability of the 
covered FSI(s), or affiliates of the covered FSI(s), to be resolved in a 
rapid and orderly manner in the event of the financial distress or 
failure of the entity that is required to submit a resolution plan;
    (2) The burden the exemption would relieve; and
    (3) Any other factor the FDIC deems relevant.
      



PART 390_REGULATIONS TRANSFERRED FROM THE OFFICE OF THRIFT SUPERVISION
--Table of Contents



Subparts A-E [Reserved]

               Subpart F_Application Processing Procedures

Sec.
390.100  What does this subpart do?
390.101  Do the same procedures apply to all applications under this 
          subpart?
390.102  How does the FDIC compute time periods under this subpart?
390.103  Must I meet with the FDIC before I file my application?
390.104  What information must I include in my draft business plan?
390.105  What type of application must I file?
390.106  What information must I provide with my application?
390.107  May I keep portions of my application confidential?
390.108  Where do I file my application?
390.109  What is the filing date of my application?
390.110  How do I amend or supplement my application?
390.111  Who must publish a public notice of an application?
390.112  What information must I include in my public notice?
390.113  When must I publish the public notice?
390.114  Where must I publish the public notice?
390.115  What language must I use in my publication?
390.116  Comment procedures.
390.117  Who may submit a written comment?
390.118  What information should a comment include?
390.119  Where are comments filed?
390.120  How long is the comment period?
390.121  Meeting procedures.
390.122  When will the FDIC conduct a meeting on an application?
390.123  What procedures govern the conduct of the meeting?
390.124  Will the FDIC approve or disapprove an application at a 
          meeting?
390.125  Will a meeting affect application processing time frames?
390.126  If I file a notice under expedited treatment, when may I engage 
          in the proposed activities?
390.127  What will the FDIC do after I file my application?
390.128  If the FDIC requests additional information to complete my 
          application, how will it process my application?
390.129  Will the FDIC conduct an eligibility examination?
390.130  What may the FDIC require me to do after my application is 
          deemed complete?
390.131  Will the FDIC require me to publish a new public notice?
390.132  May the FDIC suspend processing of my application?
390.133  How long is the FDIC review period?
390.134  How will I know if my application has been approved?
390.135  What will happen if the FDIC does not approve or disapprove my 
          application within two calendar years after the filing date?

                Subpart G_Nondiscrimination Requirements

390.140  Definitions.
390.141  Supplementary guidelines.
390.142  Nondiscrimination in lending and other services.

[[Page 1168]]

390.143  Nondiscriminatory appraisal and underwriting.
390.144  Nondiscrimination in applications.
390.145  Nondiscriminatory advertising.
390.146  Equal Housing Lender Poster.
390.147  Loan application register.
390.148  Nondiscrimination in employment.
390.149  Complaints.
390.150  Guidelines relating to nondiscrimination in lending.

Subpart H [Reserved]

           Subpart I_Consumer Protection in Sales of Insurance

390.180  Purpose and scope.
390.181  Definitions.
390.182  Prohibited practices.
390.183  What you must disclose.
390.184  Where insurance activities may take place.
390.185  Qualification and licensing requirements for insurance sales 
          personnel.

Appendix A to Subpart I of Part 390--Consumer Grievance Process

        Subpart J_Fiduciary Powers of State Savings Associations

390.190  What regulations govern the fiduciary operations of State 
          savings associations?

Subparts K-L [Reserved]

                           Subpart M_Deposits

390.230  What does this subpart do?
390.231  What records should I maintain on deposit activities?

Subpart N [Reserved]

                   Subpart O_Subordinate Organizations

390.250  What does this subpart cover?
390.251  Definitions.
390.252  How must separate corporate identities be maintained?
390.253  What notices are required to establish or acquire a new 
          subsidiary or engage in new activities through an existing 
          subsidiary?
390.254  How may a subsidiary of a State savings association issue 
          securities?
390.255  How may a State savings association exercise its salvage power 
          in connection with a service corporation or lower-tier 
          entities?

                    Subpart P_Lending and Investment

390.260  General.
390.261  [Reserved]
390.262  Definitions.
390.263  [Reserved]
390.264  Real estate lending standards; purpose and scope.
390.265  Real estate lending standards.
390.266  [Reserved]
390.267  Letters of credit and other independent undertakings to pay 
          against documents.
390.268  Investment in State housing corporations.
390.269  Prohibition on loan procurement fees.
390.270  Asset classification.
390.271  Records for lending transactions.
390.272  Re-evaluation of real estate owned.

   Subpart Q_Definitions for Regulations Affecting All State Savings 
                              Associations

390.280  When do the definitions in this subpart apply?
390.281  Account.
390.282  Accountholder.
390.283  Affiliate.
390.284  Affiliated person.
390.285  Audit period.
390.286  Certificate account.
390.287  Consumer credit.
390.288  Controlling person.
390.289  Corporation.
390.290  Demand accounts.
390.291  Director.
390.292  Financial institution.
390.293  Immediate family.
390.294  Land loan.
390.295  Low-rent housing.
390.296  Money Market Deposit Accounts.
390.297  Negotiable Order of Withdrawal Accounts.
390.298  Nonresidential construction loan.
390.299  Nonwithdrawable account.
390.300  Note account.
390.301  [Reserved]
390.302  Officer.
390.303  Parent company; subsidiary.
390.304  Political subdivision.
390.305  Principal office.
390.306  Public unit.
390.307  Savings account.
390.308  State savings association.
390.309  Security.
390.310  Service corporation.
390.311  State.
390.312  Subordinated debt security.
390.313  Tax and loan account.
390.314  United States Treasury General Account.
390.315  United States Treasury Time Deposit Open Account.
390.316  With recourse.

                Subpart R_Regulatory Reporting Standards

390.320  Regulatory reporting requirements.
390.321  Regulatory reports.
390.322  Audit of State savings associations.

[[Page 1169]]

             Subpart S_State Savings Associations_Operations

390.330  Chartering documents.
390.331  Securities: Statement of non-insurance.
390.332  Merger, consolidation, purchase or sale of assets, or 
          assumption of liabilities.
390.333  Advertising.
390.334  Directors, officers, and employees.
390.335  Tying restriction exception.
390.336  Employment contracts.
390.337  Transactions with affiliates.
390.338  Loans by State savings associations to their executive 
          officers, directors and principal shareholders.
390.339  Pension plans.
390.340  Offers and sales of securities at an office of a State savings 
          association.
390.341  Inclusion of subordinated debt securities and mandatorily 
          redeemable preferred stock as supplementary capital.
390.342  Capital distributions by State savings associations.
390.343  What is a capital distribution?
390.344  Definitions applicable to capital distributions.
390.345  Must I file with the FDIC?
390.346  How do I file with the FDIC?
390.347  May I combine my notice or application with other notices or 
          applications?
390.348  Will the FDIC permit my capital distribution?
390.349  Management and financial policies.
390.350  Examinations and audits; appraisals; establishment and 
          maintenance of records.
390.352  Financial derivatives.
390.353  Interest-rate-risk-management procedures.
390.354  Procedures for monitoring Bank Secrecy Act (BSA) compliance.
390.355  Suspicious Activity Reports and other reports and statements.
390.356  Bonds for directors, officers, employees, and agents; form of 
          and amount of bonds.
390.357  Bonds for agents.
390.358  Conflicts of interest.
390.359  Corporate opportunity.
390.360  Change of director or senior executive officer.
390.361  Applicable definitions.
390.362  Who must give prior notice?
390.363  What procedures govern the filing of my notice?
390.364  What information must I include in my notice?
390.365  What procedures govern the FDIC's review of my notice for 
          completeness?
390.366  What standards and procedures will govern the FDIC review of 
          the substance of my notice?
390.367  When may a proposed director or senior executive officer begin 
          service?
390.368  When will the FDIC waive the prior notice requirement?

                    Subpart T_Accounting Requirements

390.380  Form and content of financial statements.
390.381  Definitions.
390.382  Qualification of public accountant.
390.383  Condensed financial information [Parent only].
390.384  Financial statements for conversions, SEC filings, and offering 
          circulars.

Subparts U-V [Reserved]

                     Subpart W_Securities Offerings

390.410  Definitions.
390.411  Offering circular requirement.
390.412  Exemptions.
390.413  Non-public offering.
390.414  Filing and signature requirements.
390.415  Effective date.
390.416  Form, content, and accounting.
390.417  Use of the offering circular.
390.418  Escrow requirement.
390.419  Unsafe or unsound practices.
390.420  Withdrawal or abandonment.
390.421  Securities sale report.
390.422  Public disclosure and confidential treatment.
390.423  Waiver.
390.424  Requests for interpretive advice or waiver.
390.425  Delayed or continuous offering and sale of securities.
390.426  Sales of securities at an office of a State savings 
          association.
390.427  Current and periodic reports.
390.428  Approval of the security.
390.429  Form for securities sale report.
390.430  Filing of copies of offering circulars in certain exempt 
          offerings.

Subpart X [Reserved]

                   Subpart Y_Prompt Corrective Action

390.450  Authority, purpose, scope, other supervisory authority, and 
          disclosure of capital categories.
390.451  Definitions.
390.452  Notice of capital category.
390.453  Capital measures and capital category definitions.
390.454  Capital restoration plans.
390.455  Mandatory and discretionary supervisory actions under section 
          38.
390.456  Directives to take prompt corrective action.
390.457  Procedures for reclassifying a State savings association based 
          on criteria other than capital.
390.458  Order to dismiss a director or senior executive officer.
390.459  Enforcement of directives.

[[Page 1170]]

                            Subpart Z_Capital

390.460  Scope.
390.461  Definitions.
390.462  Minimum regulatory capital requirement.
390.463  Individual minimum capital requirements.
390.464  Capital directives.
390.465  Components of capital.
390.466  Risk-based capital credit risk-weight categories.
390.467  Leverage ratio.
390.468  Tangible capital requirement.
390.469  Consequences of failure to meet capital requirements.
390.470  Reservation of authority.
390.471  Purchased credit card relationships, servicing assets, 
          intangible assets (other than purchased credit card 
          relationships and servicing assets), credit-enhancing 
          interest-only strips, and deferred tax assets.

Appendix A to Subpart Z of Part 390--Risk-Based Capital Requirements--
          Internal-Ratings-Based and Advanced Measurement Approaches

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819.
    Subpart A also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1820.
    Subpart B also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1818.
    Subpart C also issued under 5 U.S.C. 504; 554-557; 12 U.S.C. 1464; 
1467; 1468; 1817; 1818; 1820; 1829; 3349, 4717; 15 U.S.C. 78 l; 78o-5; 
78u-2; 28 U.S.C. 2461 note; 31 U.S.C. 5321; 42 U.S.C. 4012a.
    Subpart D also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1817; 1818; 1820; 15 U.S.C. 78 
l.
    Subpart E also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1813; 1831m; 15 U.S.C. 78.
    Subpart F also issued under 5 U.S.C. 552; 559; 12 U.S.C. 2901 et 
seq.
    Subpart G also issued under 12 U.S.C. 2810 et seq., 2901 et seq.; 15 
U.S.C. 1691; 42 U.S.C. 1981, 1982, 3601-3619.
    Subpart H also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1464; 1831y.
    Subpart I also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1831x.
    Subpart J also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1831p-1.
    Subpart M also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1818.
    Subpart N also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1821.
    Subpart O also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1828.
    Subpart P also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1470; 1831e; 1831n; 1831p-1; 
3339.
    Subpart Q also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462; 1462a; 1463; 1464.
    Subpart R also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1463; 1464; 1831m; 1831n; 
1831p-1.
    Subpart S also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462; 1462a; 1463; 1464; 
1468a; 1817; 1820; 1828; 1831e; 1831o; 1831p-1; 1881-1884; 3207; 3339; 
15 U.S.C. 78b; 78 l; 78m; 78n; 78p; 78q; 78w; 31 U.S.C. 5318; 42 U.S.C. 
4106.
    Subpart T also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462a; 1463; 1464; 15 U.S.C. 
78c; 78 l; 78m; 78n; 78w.
    Subpart U also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462a; 1463; 1464; 15 U.S.C. 
78c; 78 l; 78m; 78n; 78p; 78w; 78d-1; 7241; 7242; 7243; 7244; 7261; 
7264; 7265.
    Subpart V also issued under 12 U.S.C. 3201-3208.
    Subpart W also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462a; 1463; 1464; 15 U.S.C. 
78c; 78 l; 78m; 78n; 78p; 78w.
    Subpart X also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462; 1462a; 1463; 1464; 1828; 
3331 et seq.
    Subpart Y also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1831o.
    Subpart Z also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462; 1462a; 1463; 1464; 1828 
(note).

    Source: 76 FR 47655, Aug. 5, 2011, unless otherwise noted.

Subparts A--E [Reserved]



               Subpart F_Application Processing Procedures



Sec. 390.100  What does this subpart do?

    (a) This subpart explains the FDIC's procedures for processing 
applications, notices, or filings (applications) under parts 390 and 391 
for State savings associations. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of 
this section, Secs. 390.103 through 390.110 and Secs. 390.126 through 
390.135 apply whenever an FDIC regulation requires any person (you) to 
file an application with the FDIC. Sections 390.111 through 390.125, 
however, only apply when a FDIC regulation incorporates the procedures 
in those sections or where otherwise required by the FDIC.
    (b) This subpart does not apply to any of the following:
    (1) An application related to a transaction under section 13(c) or 
(k) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1823(c) or (k).
    (2) A request for reconsideration, modification, or appeal of a 
final FDIC action.
    (3) A request related to litigation, an enforcement proceeding, a 
supervisory directive or supervisory agreement. Such requests include a 
request seeking approval under, modification of, or termination of an 
order issued under subparts C or D, a supervisory agreement, a 
supervisory directive, a consent merger agreement or a document 
negotiated in settlement of an enforcement matter or other litigation, 
unless

[[Page 1171]]

an applicable FDIC regulation specifically requires an application
under his subpart.
    (4) An application filed under a FDIC regulation that prescribes 
other application processing procedures and time frames for the approval 
of applications.
    (c) If a FDIC regulation for a specific type of application 
prescribes some application processing procedures, or time frames, the 
FDIC will apply this subpart to the extent necessary to process the 
application. For example, if a FDIC regulation for a specific type of 
application does not identify time periods for the processing of an 
application, the time periods in this subpart apply.



Sec. 390.101  Do the same procedures apply to all applications under 
this subpart?

    The FDIC processes applications for State savings associations under 
this subpart using two procedures, expedited treatment and standard 
treatment. To determine which treatment applies, you may use the 
following chart:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Then the FDIC will process
                 If . . .                   your application under . . .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a) The applicable regulation does not      Standard treatment.
 specifically state that expedited
 treatment is available.
(b) You are not a State savings             Standard treatment.
 association.
(c) Your composite rating is 3, 4, or 5.    Standard treatment.
 The composite rating is the composite
 numeric rating that the FDIC or the other
 federal banking regulator assigned to you
 under the Uniform Financial Institutions
 Rating System or under a comparable
 rating system. The composite rating
 refers to the rating assigned and
 provided to you, in writing, as a result
 of the most recent examination.
(d) Your Community Reinvestment Act (CRA)   Standard treatment.
 rating is Needs to Improve or Substantial
 Noncompliance. The CRA rating is the
 Community Reinvestment Act performance
 rating that the FDIC or the other federal
 banking regulator assigned and provided
 to you, in writing, as a result of the
 most recent compliance examination. See,
 for example, 12 CFR 195.28.
(e) Your compliance rating is 3, 4, or 5.   Standard treatment.
 The compliance rating is the numeric
 rating that the FDIC or the other federal
 banking regulator assigned to you under
 the FDIC compliance rating system, or a
 comparable rating system used by the
 other federal banking regulator. The
 compliance rating refers to the rating
 assigned and provided to you, in writing,
 as a result of the most recent compliance
 examination.
(f) You fail any one of your capital        Standard treatment.
 requirements under subpart Z.
(g) The FDIC has notified you that you are  Standard treatment.
 an association in troubled condition.
(h) Neither the FDIC nor any other federal  Standard treatment.
 banking regulator has assigned you a
 composite rating, a CRA rating or a
 compliance rating.
(i) You do not meet any of the criteria     Expedited treatment.
 listed in paragraphs (a) through (h) of
 this section.
------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 390.102  How does the FDIC compute time periods under this
subpart?

    In computing time periods under this subpart, the FDIC does not 
include the day of the act or event that commences the time period. When 
the last day of a time period is a Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday, 
the time period runs until the end of the next day that is not a 
Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday.



Sec. 390.103  Must I meet with the FDIC before I file my application?

    (a) Chart. To determine whether you must attend a pre-filing meeting 
before you file an application, please consult the following chart:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
      If you file . . .                        Then . . .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
An application to acquire      The FDIC may require you to meet with the
 control of a State savings     FDIC before filing your application and
 association.                   may require you to submit a draft
                                business plan or other relevant
                                information before this meeting.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Contacting the appropriate FDIC region. (1) You must contact the 
appropriate FDIC region a reasonable time before you file an application 
described in paragraph (a) of this section. Unless paragraph (a) already 
requires a pre-filing meeting or a draft business plan, the appropriate 
FDIC region will determine whether it will require a pre-filing meeting, 
and whether you must submit a business plan or other relevant 
information before the meeting.

[[Page 1172]]

The appropriate FDIC region will also establish a schedule for any 
meeting and the submission of any information.
    (2) All other applicants are encouraged to contact the appropriate 
FDIC region to determine whether a pre-filing meeting or the submission 
of a draft business plan or other relevant information would expedite 
the application review process.



Sec. 390.104  What information must I include in my draft business
plan?

    If you are required to submit a draft business plan under 
Sec. 309.103, your plan must:
    (a) Clearly and completely describe the State savings association's 
projected operations and activities;
    (b) Describe the risks associated with the transaction and the 
impact of this transaction on any existing activities and operations of 
the State savings association, including financial projections for a 
minimum of three years;
    (c) Identify the majority of the proposed board of directors and the 
key senior executive officers (as defined in Sec. 390.361) of the State 
savings association and demonstrate that these individuals have the 
expertise to prudently manage the activities and operations described in 
the savings association's draft business plan; and
    (d) Demonstrate how applicable requirements regarding serving the 
credit and lending needs in the market areas served by the State savings 
association will be met.



Sec. 390.105  What type of application must I file?

    (a) Expedited treatment. If you are eligible for expedited treatment 
under Sec. 390.101, you may file your application in the form of a 
notice that includes all information required by the applicable 
substantive regulation. If the FDIC has designated a form for your 
notice, you must file that form. Your notice is an application for the 
purposes of all statutory and regulatory references to ``applications.''
    (b) Standard treatment. If you are subject to standard treatment 
under Sec. 390.101, you must file your application following all 
applicable substantive regulations and guidelines governing the filing 
of applications. If the FDIC has a designated form for your application, 
you must file that form.
    (c) Waiver requests. If you want the FDIC to waive a requirement 
that you provide certain information with the notice or application, you 
must include a written waiver request:
    (1) Describing the requirement to be waived and
    (2) Explaining why the information is not needed to enable the FDIC 
to evaluate your notice or application under applicable standards.



Sec. 390.106  What information must I provide with my application?

    (a) Required information. You may obtain information about required 
certifications, other regulations and guidelines affecting particular 
notices and applications, appropriate forms, and instructions from the 
appropriate FDIC region.
    (b) Captions and exhibits. You must caption the original application 
and required copies with the type of filing, and must include all 
exhibits and other pertinent documents with the original application and 
all required copies. You are not required to include original signatures 
on copies if you include a copy of the signed signature page or the copy 
otherwise indicates that the original was signed.



Sec. 390.107  May I keep portions of my application confidential?

    (a) Confidentiality. The FDIC makes submissions under this subpart 
available to the public, but may keep portions of your application 
confidential based on the rules in this section.
    (b) Confidentiality request. (1) You may request the FDIC to keep 
portions of your application confidential. You must submit your request 
in writing with your application and must explain in detail how your 
request is consistent with the standards under the Freedom of 
Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552) and part 309 of this chapter. For 
example, you should explain how you will be substantially harmed by 
public disclosure of the information. You must separately bind and mark 
the portions of the application you consider confidential and the 
portions you consider non-confidential.

[[Page 1173]]

    (2) The FDIC will not treat as confidential the portion of your 
application describing how you plan to meet your Community Reinvestment 
Act (CRA) objectives. The FDIC will make information in your CRA plan, 
including any information incorporated by reference from other parts of 
your application, available to the public upon request.
    (c) FDIC determination on confidentiality. The FDIC will determine 
whether information that you designate as confidential may be withheld 
from the public under the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552) and 
part 309 of this chapter. The FDIC will advise you before it makes 
information you designate as confidential available to the public.



Sec. 390.108  Where do I file my application?

    (a) Appropriate FDIC region. (1) You must file the original 
application and the number of copies indicated on the applicable form 
with the appropriate FDIC region. The appropriate FDIC region addresses 
are listed in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. If the form does not 
indicate the number of copies you must file or if FDIC has not 
prescribed a form for your application, you must file the original 
application and two copies.
    (2) The addresses of appropriate FDIC region and the states covered 
by each office are:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Region                Office address         States served
------------------------------------------------------------------------
New York....................  350 Fifth Avenue,     Connecticut,
                               Suite 1200, New       Delaware, District
                               York, NY 10118.       of Columbia, Maine,
                                                     Maryland,
                                                     Massachusetts, New
                                                     Hampshire, New
                                                     Jersey, New York,
                                                     Pennsylvania,
                                                     Puerto Rico, Rhode
                                                     Island, Vermont,
                                                     Virgin Islands.
Atlanta.....................  10 Tenth Street,      Alabama, Florida,
                               NE., Suite 800,       Georgia, North
                               Atlanta, GA 30309-    Carolina, South
                               3906.                 Carolina, Virginia,
                                                     West Virginia.
Chicago.....................  300 South Riverside   Illinois, Indiana,
                               Plaza, Suite 1700,    Kentucky, Ohio,
                               Chicago, Illinois     Michigan,
                               60606.                Wisconsin.
Kansas......................  1100 Walnut St.,      Iowa, Kansas,
                               Suite 2100, Kansas    Minnesota,
                               City, MO 64106.       Missouri, Nebraska,
                                                     North Dakota, South
                                                     Dakota.
Dallas......................  1601 Bryan Street,    Arkansas, Colorado,
                               Dallas, TX 75201.     Louisiana,
                                                     Mississippi, New
                                                     Mexico, Oklahoma,
                                                     Tennessee, Texas.
San Francisco...............  25 Jessie Street at   Alaska, Arizona,
                               Ecker Square, Suite   California, Guam,
                               2300, San             Hawaii, Idaho,
                               Francisco, CA 94105-  Montana, Nevada,
                               2780.                 Northern Mariana
                                                     Islands, Oregon,
                                                     Utah, Washington,
                                                     Wyoming.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Additional filings with FDIC headquarters. (1) In addition to 
filing in the appropriate FDIC region, if your application involves a 
significant issue of law or policy or if an applicable regulation or 
form directs you to file with FDIC Headquarters, you must also file 
copies of your application with the Risk Management and Applications 
Section at FDIC headquarters, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 
20429. You must file the number of copies indicated on the applicable 
form. If the form does not indicate the number of copies you must file 
or if FDIC has not prescribed a form for your application, you must file 
three copies.
    (2)(i) You may request a list of applications involving significant 
issues of law or policy by contacting appropriate FDIC region.
    (ii) The FDIC reserves the right to identify significant issues of 
law or policy in a particular application. The FDIC will advise you, in 
writing, if it makes this determination.



Sec. 390.109  What is the filing date of my application?

    (a) Your application's filing date is the date that you complete all 
of the following requirements.
    (1) You attend a pre-filing meeting and submit a draft business plan 
or relevant information, if the FDIC requires you to do so under 
Sec. 390.103.
    (2) You file your application and all required copies with the FDIC, 
as described under Sec. 390.108.
    (i) If you are required to file with an appropriate FDIC region and 
with the FDIC headquarters, you have not filed

[[Page 1174]]

with the FDIC until you file with both offices.
    (ii) You have not filed with the appropriate FDIC region or the FDIC 
headquarters until you file the application and the required number of 
copies with that office.
    (iii) If you file after the close of business established by 
appropriate FDIC region or the FDIC headquarters, you have filed with 
that office on the next business day.
    (3) [Reserved]
    (b) The FDIC may notify you that it has adjusted your application 
filing date if you fail to meet any applicable publication requirements.
    (c) If, after you properly file your application with the 
appropriate FDIC region, the FDIC determines that a significant issue of 
law or policy exists under Sec. 390.108(b)(2)(ii), the filing date of 
your application is the day you filed with the appropriate FDIC region. 
The 30-day review period under Sec. 390.126 or Sec. 390.127 will restart 
in its entirety when the appropriate FDIC region forwards the 
appropriate number of copies of your application to the FDIC 
headquarters.



Sec. 390.110  How do I amend or supplement my application?

    To amend or supplement your application, you must file the amendment 
or supplemental information at the appropriate FDIC region along with 
the number of copies required under Sec. 390.108. Your amendment or 
supplemental information also must meet the caption and exhibit 
requirements at Sec. 390.106(b).



Sec. 390.111  Who must publish a public notice of an application?

    Sections 390.111 through 390.115 apply whenever a FDIC regulation 
requires an applicant (``you'') to follow the public notice procedures 
in this subpart.



Sec. 390.112  What information must I include in my public notice?

    Your public notice must include the following:
    (a) Your name and address.
    (b) The type of application.
    (c) The name of the depository institution(s) that is the subject 
matter of the application.
    (d) A statement indicating that the public may submit comments to 
the appropriate FDIC region.
    (e) The address of the appropriate FDIC region where the public may 
submit comments.
    (f) The date that the comment period closes.
    (g) A statement indicating that the nonconfidential portions of the 
application are on file in the appropriate FDIC region, and are 
available for public inspection during regular business hours.
    (h) Any other information that the FDIC requires you to publish. You 
may find the format for various publication notices in the appendix to 
the FDIC application processing handbook.



Sec. 390.113  When must I publish the public notice?

    You must publish a public notice of the application no earlier than 
seven days before and no later than the date of filing of the 
application.



Sec. 390.114  Where must I publish the public notice?

    You must publish the notice in a newspaper having a general 
circulation in the communities indicated in the following chart:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   You must publish in the following
      If you file . . .                    communities . . .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a) Bank Merger Act            The community in which your home office
 application under              is located.
 390.332(a), or an
 application for a mutual to
 stock conversion under 12
 CFR part 192.
(b) A change of control        The community in which the home office of
 notice under part 391,         the State savings association whose
 subpart E.                     stock is to be acquired is located and,
                                if applicable, the community in which
                                the home office of the acquiror's
                                largest subsidiary State savings
                                association is located.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 1175]]



Sec. 390.115  What language must I use in my publication?

    (a) English. You must publish the notice in a newspaper printed in 
the English language.
    (b) Other than English. If the FDIC determines that the primary 
language of a significant number of adult residents of the community is 
a language other than English, the FDIC may require that you 
simultaneously publish additional notice(s) in the community in the 
appropriate language(s).



Sec. 390.116  Comment procedures.

    Sections 390.116 though 390.120 contain the procedures governing the 
submission of public comments on certain types of applications or 
notices (``applications'') pending before the FDIC. It applies whenever 
a regulation incorporates the procedures in Secs. 390.116 through 
390.120, or where otherwise required by the FDIC.



Sec. 390.117  Who may submit a written comment?

    Any person may submit a written comment supporting or opposing an 
application.



Sec. 390.118  What information should a comment include?

    (a) A comment should recite relevant facts, including any 
demographic, economic, or financial data, supporting the commenter's 
position. A comment opposing an application should also:
    (1) Address at least one of the reasons why the FDIC may deny the 
application under the relevant statute or regulation;
    (2) Recite any relevant facts and supporting data addressing these 
reasons; and
    (3) Address how the approval of the application could harm the 
commenter or any community.
    (b) A commenter must include any request for a meeting under 
Sec. 390.122 in its comment. The commenter must describe the nature of 
the issues or facts to be discussed and the reasons why written 
submissions are insufficient to adequately address these facts or 
issues.



Sec. 390.119  Where are comments filed?

    A commenter must file with the appropriate FDIC region (See table at 
Sec. 390.108(a)(2)). The commenter must simultaneously send a copy of 
the comment to the applicant.



Sec. 390.120  How long is the comment period?

    (a) General. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, a 
commenter must file a written comment with the FDIC within 30 calendar 
days after the date of publication of the initial public notice.
    (b) Late-filed comments. The FDIC may consider late-filed comments 
if the FDIC determines that the comment will assist in the disposition 
of the application.



Sec. 390.121  Meeting procedures.

    Sections 390.121 through 390.125 contain meeting procedures. They 
apply whenever a regulation incorporates the procedures in Secs. 390.121 
through 390.125, or when otherwise required by the FDIC.



Sec. 390.122  When will the FDIC conduct a meeting on an application?

    (a) The FDIC will grant a meeting request or conduct a meeting on 
its own initiative, if it finds that written submissions are 
insufficient to address facts or issues raised in an application, or 
otherwise determines that a meeting will benefit the decision-making 
process. The FDIC may limit the issues considered at the meeting to 
issues that the FDIC decides are relevant or material.
    (b) The FDIC will inform the applicant and all commenters requesting 
a meeting of its decision to grant or deny a meeting request, or of its 
decision to conduct a meeting on its own initiative.
    (c) If the FDIC decides to conduct a meeting, the FDIC will invite 
the applicant and any commenters requesting a meeting and raising an 
issue that FDIC intends to consider at the meeting. The FDIC may also 
invite other interested persons to attend. The FDIC will inform the 
participants of the date, time, location, issues to be considered, and 
format for the meeting a reasonable time before the meeting.

[[Page 1176]]



Sec. 390.123  What procedures govern the conduct of the meeting?

    (a) The FDIC may conduct meetings in any format including, but not 
limited to, a telephone conference, a face-to-face meeting, or a more 
formal meeting.
    (b) The Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. 551 et seq.), the 
Federal Rules of Evidence (28 U.S.C. Appendix), the Federal Rules of 
Civil Procedure (28 U.S.C. Rule 1 et seq.) and the FDIC Rules of 
Practice and Procedure in Adjudicatory Proceedings (subpart C) do not 
apply to meetings under this section.



Sec. 390.124  Will FDIC approve or disapprove an application at a meeting?

    The FDIC will not approve or deny an application at a meeting under 
Secs. 390.121 through 390.125.



Sec. 390.125  Will a meeting affect application processing time frames?

    If the FDIC decides to conduct a meeting, it may suspend applicable 
application processing time frames, including the time frames for 
deeming an application complete and the applicable approval time frames 
in Secs. 390.126 through 390.135. If the FDIC suspends applicable 
application processing time frames, the time period will resume when the 
FDIC determines that a record has been developed that sufficiently 
supports a determination on the issues considered at the meeting.



Sec. 390.126  If I file a notice under expedited treatment, 
when may I engage in the proposed activities?

    If you are eligible for expedited treatment and you have 
appropriately filed your notice with the FDIC, you may engage in the 
proposed activities upon the expiration of 30 days after the filing date 
of your notice, unless the FDIC takes one of the following actions 
before the expiration of that time period:
    (a) The FDIC notifies you in writing that you must file additional 
information supplementing your notice. If you are required to file 
additional information, you may engage in the proposed activities upon 
the expiration of 30 calendar days after the date you file the 
additional information, unless the FDIC takes one of the actions 
described in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section before the 
expiration of that time period;
    (b) The FDIC notifies you in writing that your notice is subject to 
standard treatment under Secs. 390.126 through 390.135. The FDIC will 
subject your notice to standard treatment if it raises a supervisory 
concern, raises a significant issue of law or policy, or requires 
significant additional information;
    (c) The FDIC notifies you in writing that it is suspending the 
applicable time frames under Sec. 390.125; or
    (d) The FDIC notifies you that it disapproves your notice.



Sec. 390.127  What will the FDIC do after I file my application?

    (a) FDIC action. Within 30 calendar days after the filing date of 
your application, the FDIC will take one of the following actions:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
           If the FDIC . . .                        Then . . .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Notifies you, in writing, that your  The applicable review period
 application is complete * * *.           will begin on the date that
                                          the FDIC deems your
                                          application complete.
(2) Notifies you, in writing, that you   You must submit the required
 must submit addition information to      additional information under
 complete your application * * *.         Sec. 390.128.
(3) Notifies you, in writing, that your  The FDIC will not process your
 application is materially deficient *    application.
 * *.
(4) Takes no action * * *..............  Your application is deemed
                                          complete. The applicable
                                          review period will begin on
                                          the day the 30-day time period
                                          expires.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Waiver requests. If your application includes a request for 
waiver of an information requirement under Sec. 390.105(b), and the FDIC 
has not notified you that you must submit additional information under 
paragraph

[[Page 1177]]

(a)(2) of this section, your request for waiver is granted.



Sec. 390.128  If the FDIC requests additional information to complete
my application, how will it process my application?

    (a) You may use the following chart to determine the procedure that 
applies to your submission of additional information under 
Sec. 390.127(a)(1):

------------------------------------------------------------------------
 If, within 30 calendar days
  after the date of FDIC's    Then, FDIC may . . .
   request for additional                                 And . . .
      information . . .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) You file a response to    (i) Notify you in     The applicable
 all information requests *    writing within 15     review period will
 * *.                          days after the        begin on the date
                               filing date of your   that the FDIC deems
                               response that your    your application
                               application is        complete.
                               complete * * *
                               applicable to all
                               response that your
                               application is
                               complete * * *.
                              (ii) Notify you in    You must respond to
                               writing within 15     the additional
                               calendar days after   information request
                               the filing date of    within the time
                               your response that    period required by
                               you must submit       the FDIC. The FDIC
                               additional            will review your
                               information           response under the
                               regarding matters     procedures
                               derived from or       described in this
                               prompted by           section.
                               information already
                               furnished or any
                               additional
                               information
                               necessary to
                               resolve the issues
                               presented in your
                               application * * *.
                              (iii) Notify you in   The FDIC will not
                               writing within 15     process your
                               calendar days after   application.
                               the filing date of
                               your response that
                               your application is
                               materially
                               deficient * * *.
                              (iv) Take no action   Your application is
                               within 15 calendar    deemed complete.
                               days after the        The applicable
                               filing date of your   review period will
                               response * * *.       begin on the day
                                                     that the 15-day
                                                     time period
                                                     expires.
(2) You request an extension  (i) Grant an          You must fully
 of time to file additional    extension, in         respond within the
 information * * *.            writing, specifying   extended time
                               the number of days    period specified by
                               for the extension *   the FDIC. The FDIC
                               * *.                  will review your
                                                     response under the
                                                     procedures
                                                     described under
                                                     this section.
                              (ii) Notify you in    The FDIC will not
                               writing that your     process your
                               extension request     application
                               is disapproved * *    further. You may
                               *.                    resubmit the
                                                     application for
                                                     processing as a new
                                                     filing under the
                                                     applicable
                                                     regulation.
(3) You fail to respond       (i) Notify you in     The FDIC will not
 completely * * *.             writing that your     process your
                               application is        application
                               deemed withdrawn *    further. You may
                               * *.                  resubmit the
                                                     application for
                                                     processing as a new
                                                     filing under the
                                                     applicable
                                                     regulation.
                              (ii) Notify you, in   You must fully
                               writing, that your    respond within the
                               response is           extended time
                               incomplete and        period specified by
                               extend the response   the FDIC. The FDIC
                               period, specifying    will review your
                               the number of days    response under the
                               for the respond       procedures
                               extension * * *.      described under
                                                     this section.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) The FDIC may extend the 15-day period referenced in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section by up to 15 calendar days, if the FDIC requires 
the additional time to review your response. The FDIC will notify you 
that it has extended the period before the end of the initial 15-day 
period and will briefly explain why the extension is necessary.
    (c) If your response filed under paragraph (a)(1) of this section 
includes a request for a waiver of an informational requirement, your 
request for a waiver is granted if the FDIC fails to act on it within 15 
calendar days after the filing of your response, unless the FDIC extends 
the review period under paragraph (b) of this section. If the FDIC 
extends the review period under paragraph (b), your request is granted 
if the FDIC fails to act on it by the end of the extended review period.



Sec. 390.129  Will the FDIC conduct an eligibility examination?

    (a) Eligibility examination. The FDIC may notify you at any time 
before it deems your application complete that it will conduct an 
eligibility examination. If the FDIC decides to conduct an eligibility 
examination, it will not deem your application complete until it 
concludes the examination.

[[Page 1178]]

    (b) Additional information. The FDIC may, as a result of the 
eligibility examination, notify you that you must submit additional 
information to complete your application. If so, you must respond to the 
additional information request within the time period required by the 
FDIC. The FDIC will review your response under the procedures described 
in Sec. 390.128.



Sec. 390.130  What may the FDIC require me to do after my application 
is deemed complete?

    After your application is deemed complete, but before the end of the 
applicable review period,
    (a) The FDIC may require you to provide additional information if 
the information is necessary to resolve or clarify the issues presented 
by your application.
    (b) The FDIC may determine that a major issue of law or a change in 
circumstances arose after you filed your application, and that the issue 
or changed circumstances will substantially effect your application. If 
the FDIC identifies such an issue or changed circumstances, it may:
    (1) Notify you, in writing, that your application is now incomplete 
and require you to submit additional information to complete the 
application under the procedures described at Sec. 390.128; and
    (2) Require you to publish a new public notice of your application 
under Sec. 390.131.



Sec. 390.131  Will the FDIC require me to publish a new public
notice?

    (a) If your application was subject to a publication requirement, 
the FDIC may require you to publish a new public notice of your 
application if:
    (1) You submitted a revision to the application, you submitted new 
or additional information, or a major issue of law or a change in 
circumstances arose after the filing of your application; and
    (2) The FDIC determines that additional comment on these matters is 
appropriate because of the significance of the new information or 
circumstances.
    (b) The FDIC will notify you in writing if you must publish a new 
public notice of your revised application.
    (c) If you are required to publish a new public notice of your 
revised application, you must notify the FDIC after you publish the new 
public notice.



Sec. 390.132  May the FDIC suspend processing of my application?

    (a) Suspension. The FDIC may, at any time, indefinitely suspend 
processing of your application if:
    (1) The FDIC, another governmental entity, or a self-regulatory 
trade or professional organization initiates an investigation, 
examination, or administrative proceeding that is relevant to the FDIC's 
evaluation of your application;
    (2) You request the suspension or there are other extraordinary 
circumstances that have a significant impact on the processing of your 
application.
    (b) Notice. The FDIC will promptly notify you, in writing, if it 
suspends your application.



Sec. 390.133  How long is the FDIC review period?

    (a) General. The applicable FDIC review period is 60 calendar days 
after the date that your application is deemed complete, unless an 
applicable FDIC regulation specifies a different review period.
    (b) Multiple applications. If you submit more than one application 
in connection with a proposed action or if two or more applicants submit 
related applications, the applicable review period for all applications 
is the review period for the application with the longest review period, 
subject to statutory review periods.
    (c) Extensions. (1) The FDIC may extend the review period for up to 
30 calendar days beyond the period described in paragraph (a) or (b) of 
this section. The FDIC must notify you in writing of the extension and 
the duration of the extension. The FDIC must issue the written extension 
before the end of the review period.
    (2) The FDIC may also extend the review period as needed until it 
acts on the application, if the application presents a significant issue 
of law or policy that requires additional time to resolve. The FDIC must 
notify you in

[[Page 1179]]

writing of the extension and the general reasons for the extension. The 
FDIC must issue the written extension before the end of the review 
period, including any extension of that period under paragraph (c)(1) of 
this section.



Sec. 390.134  How will I know if my application has been approved?

    (a) FDIC approval or denial. (1) The FDIC will approve or deny your 
application before the expiration of the applicable review period, 
including any extensions of the review period.
    (2) The FDIC will promptly notify you in writing of its decision to 
approve or deny your application.
    (b) No FDIC action. If the FDIC fails to act under paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section, your application is approved.



Sec. 390.135  What will happen if the FDIC does not approve or 
disapprove my application within two calendar years after the 
filing date?

    (a) Withdrawal. If the FDIC has not approved or denied your pending 
application within two calendar years after the filing date under 
Sec. 390.109, the FDIC will notify you, in writing, that your 
application is deemed withdrawn unless the FDIC determines that you are 
actively pursuing a final FDIC determination on your application. You 
are not actively pursuing a final FDIC determination if you have failed 
to timely take an action required under this part, including filing 
required additional information, or the FDIC has suspended processing of 
your application under Sec. 390.132 based on circumstances that are, in 
whole or in part, within your control and you have failed to take 
reasonable steps to resolve these circumstances.
    (b) [Reserved]



                Subpart G_Nondiscrimination Requirements



Sec. 390.140  Definitions.

    As used in this subpart--
    Application. For purposes of this part, an application for a loan or 
other service is as defined in Regulation C, 12 CFR 203.2(b).
    Dwelling. The term ``dwelling'' means a residential structure 
(whether or not it is attached to real property) located in a state of 
the United States of America, the District of Colombia, or the 
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico. The term includes an individual condominium 
unit, cooperative unit, or mobile or manufactured home.
    State savings association. The term ``State savings association'' 
means any State savings association as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1813(b).



Sec. 390.141  Supplementary guidelines.

    The FDIC's policy statement found at 12 CFR 390.150 supplements this 
subpart and should be read together with this subpart. Refer also to the 
HUD Fair Housing regulations at 24 CFR parts 100 et seq., Federal 
Reserve Regulation B at 12 CFR part 202, and Federal Reserve Regulation 
C at 12 CFR part 203.



Sec. 390.142  Nondiscrimination in lending and other services.

    (a) No State savings association may deny a loan or other service, 
or discriminate in the purchase of loans or securities or discriminate 
in fixing the amount, interest rate, duration, application procedures, 
collection or enforcement procedures, or other terms or conditions of 
such loan or other service on the basis of the age or location of the 
dwelling, or on the basis of the race, color, religion, sex, handicap, 
familial status (having one or more children under the age of 18), 
marital status, age (provided the person has the capacity to contract) 
or national origin of:
    (1) An applicant or joint applicant;
    (2) Any person associated with an applicant or joint applicant 
regarding such loan or other service, or with the purposes of such loan 
or other service;
    (3) The present or prospective owners, lessees, tenants, or 
occupants of the dwelling(s) for which such loan or other service is to 
be made or given;
    (4) The present or prospective owners, lessees, tenants, or 
occupants of other dwellings in the vicinity of the dwelling(s) for 
which such loan or other service is to be made or given.
    (b) A State savings association shall consider without prejudice the 
combined income of joint applicants for a loan or other service.

[[Page 1180]]

    (c) No State savings association may discriminate against an 
applicant for a loan or other service on any prohibited basis (as 
defined in 12 CFR 202.2(z) and 24 CFR part 100).



Sec. 390.143  Nondiscriminatory appraisal and underwriting.

    (a) Appraisal. No State savings association may use or rely upon an 
appraisal of a dwelling which the State savings association knows, or 
reasonably should know, is discriminatory on the basis of the age or 
location of the dwelling, or is discriminatory per se or in effect under 
the Fair Housing Act of 1968 or the Equal Credit Opportunity Act.
    (b) Underwriting. Each State savings association shall have clearly 
written, non-discriminatory loan underwriting standards, available to 
the public upon request, at each of its offices. Each association shall, 
at least annually, review its standards, and business practices 
implementing them, to ensure equal opportunity in lending.



Sec. 390.144  Nondiscrimination in applications.

    (a) No State savings association may discourage, or refuse to allow, 
receive, or consider, any application, request, or inquiry regarding a 
loan or other service, or discriminate in imposing conditions upon, or 
in processing, any such application, request, or inquiry on the basis of 
the age or location of the dwelling, or on the basis of the race, color, 
religion, sex, handicap, familial status (having one or more children 
under the age of 18), marital status, age (provided the person has the 
capacity to contract), national origin, or other characteristics 
prohibited from consideration in Sec. 390.142(c), of the prospective 
borrower or other person, who:
    (1) Makes application for any such loan or other service;
    (2) Requests forms or papers to be used to make application for any 
such loan or other service; or
    (3) Inquires about the availability of such loan or other service.
    (b) A State savings association shall inform each inquirer of his or 
her right to file a written loan application, and to receive a copy of 
the association's underwriting standards.



Sec. 390.145  Nondiscriminatory advertising.

    No State savings association may directly or indirectly engage in 
any form of advertising that implies or suggests a policy of 
discrimination or exclusion in violation of title VIII of the Civil 
Rights Acts of 1968, the Equal Credit Opportunity Act, or this subpart. 
Advertisements for any loan for the purpose of purchasing, constructing, 
improving, repairing, or maintaining a dwelling or any loan secured by a 
dwelling shall include a facsimile of the following logotype and legend:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.000



Sec. 390.146  Equal Housing Lender Poster.

    (a) Each State savings association shall post and maintain one or 
more Equal Housing Lender Posters, the text of which is prescribed in 
paragraph (b) of this section, in the lobby of each of its offices in a 
prominent place or places readily apparent to all persons seeking loans. 
The poster shall be at least 11 by 14 inches in size, and the text shall 
be easily legible. It is recommended that savings associations post a 
Spanish language version of the

[[Page 1181]]

poster in offices serving areas with a substantial Spanish-speaking 
population.
    (b) The text of the Equal Housing Lender Poster shall be as follows:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.001
    
    We Do Business In Accordance With Federal Fair Lending Laws.
    UNDER THE FEDERAL FAIR HOUSING ACT, IT IS ILLEGAL, ON THE BASIS OF 
RACE, COLOR, NATIONAL ORIGIN, RELIGION, SEX, HANDICAP, OR FAMILIAL 
STATUS (HAVING CHILDREN UNDER THE AGE OF 18) TO:
    [  ] Deny a loan for the purpose of purchasing, constructing, 
improving, repairing or maintaining a dwelling or to deny any loan 
secured by a dwelling; or
    [  ] Discriminate in fixing the amount, interest rate, duration, 
application procedures, or other terms or conditions of such a loan or 
in appraising property.
    IF YOU BELIEVE YOU HAVE BEEN DISCRIMINATED AGAINST, YOU SHOULD:
    SEND A COMPLAINT TO:
    Assistant Secretary for Fair Housing and Equal Opportunity, 
Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC 20410.
    For processing under the Federal Fair Housing Act
    AND TO:
    Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Consumer Response Center, 
1100 Walnut St, Box #11, Kansas City, MO 64106
    For processing under FDIC Regulations.
    UNDER THE EQUAL CREDIT OPPORTUNITY ACT, IT IS ILLEGAL TO 
DISCRIMINATE IN ANY CREDIT TRANSACTION:
    [  ] On the basis of race, color, national origin, religion, sex, 
marital status, or age;
    [  ] Because income is from public assistance; or
    [  ] Because a right has been exercised under the Consumer Credit 
Protection Act.
    IF YOU BELIEVE YOU HAVE BEEN DISCRIMINATED AGAINST, YOU SHOULD SEND 
A COMPLAINT TO:
    Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Consumer Response Center, 
1100 Walnut St, Box #11, Kansas City, MO 64106



Sec. 390.147  Loan application register.

    State savings associations and other lenders required to file Home 
Mortgage Disclosure Act Loan Application Registers with the FDIC in 
accordance with 12 CFR part 203 must enter the reason for denial, using 
the codes provided in 12 CFR part 203, with respect to all loan denials.



Sec. 390.148  Nondiscrimination in employment.

    (a) No State savings association shall, because of an individual's 
race, color, religion, sex, or national origin:
    (1) Fail or refuse to hire such individual;
    (2) Discharge such individual;
    (3) Otherwise discriminate against such individual with respect to 
such individual's compensation, promotion, or the terms, conditions, or 
privileges of such individual's employment; or
    (4) Discriminate in admission to, or employment in, any program of 
apprenticeship, training, or retraining, including on-the-job training.
    (b) No State savings association shall limit, segregate, or classify 
its employees in any way which would deprive or tend to deprive any 
individual of employment opportunities or otherwise adversely affect 
such individual's status as an employee because of such individual's 
race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
    (c) No State savings association shall discriminate against any 
employee or applicant for employment because such employee or applicant 
has opposed any employment practice made unlawful by

[[Page 1182]]

Federal, State, or local law or regulation or because he has in good 
faith made a charge of such practice or testified, assisted, or 
participated in any manner in an investigation, proceeding, or hearing 
of such practice by any lawfully constituted authority.
    (d) No State savings association shall print or publish or cause to 
be printed or published any notice or advertisement relating to 
employment by such savings association indicating any preference, 
limitation, specification, or discrimination based on race, color, 
religion, sex, or national origin.
    (e) This regulation shall not apply in any case in which the Federal 
Equal Employment Opportunities law is made inapplicable by the 
provisions of section 2000e-1 or sections 2000e-2 (e) through (j) of 
title 42, United States Code.
    (f) Any violation of the following laws or regulations by a State 
savings association shall be deemed to be a violation of this subpart:
    (1) The Equal Employment Opportunity Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 
2000e-2000h-2, and Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) 
regulations at 29 CFR part 1600;
    (2) The Age Discrimination in Employment Act, 29 U.S.C. 621-633, and 
EEOC and Department of Labor regulations;
    (3) Department of the Treasury regulations at 31 CFR part 12 and 
Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs (OFCCP) regulations at 41 
CFR part 60;
    (4) The Veterans Employment and Readjustment Act of 1972, 38 U.S.C. 
2011-2012, and the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Adjustment 
Assistance Act of 1974, 38 U.S.C. 2021-2026;
    (5) The Rehabilitation Act of 1973, 29 U.S.C. 701 et al.; and
    (6) The Immigration and Nationality Act, 8 U.S.C. 1324b, and INS 
regulations at 8 CFR part 274a.



Sec. 390.149  Complaints.

    Complaints regarding discrimination in lending by a State savings 
association shall be referred to the Assistant Secretary for Fair 
Housing and Equal Opportunity, U.S. Department of Housing and Urban 
Development, Washington, DC 20410 for processing under the Fair Housing 
Act, and to the Director, Division of Depositor and Consumer Protection, 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, 
DC 20249 for processing under FDIC regulations. Complaints regarding 
discrimination in employment by a State savings association should be 
referred to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, Washington, DC 
20506 and a copy, for information only, sent to the Director, Division 
of Depositor and Consumer Protection, Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20249.



Sec. 390.150  Guidelines relating to nondiscrimination in lending.

    (a) General. Fair housing and equal opportunity in home financing is 
a policy of the United States established by Federal statutes and 
Presidential orders and proclamations. In furtherance of the Federal 
civil rights laws and the economical home financing purposes of the 
statutes administered by the FDIC, the FDIC has adopted, in this 
subpart, nondiscrimination regulations that, among other things, 
prohibit arbitrary refusals to consider loan applications on the basis 
of the age or location of a dwelling, and prohibit discrimination based 
on race, color, religion, sex, handicap, familial status (having one or 
more children under the age of 18), marital status, age (provided the 
person has the capacity to contract), or national origin in fixing the 
amount, interest rate, duration, application procedures, collection or 
enforcement procedures, or other terms or conditions of housing related 
loans. Such discrimination is also prohibited in the purchase of loans 
and securities. This section provides supplementary guidelines to aid 
savings associations in developing and implementing nondiscriminatory 
lending policies. Each State savings association should reexamine its 
underwriting standards at least annually in order to ensure equal 
opportunity.
    (b) Loan underwriting standards. The basic purpose of the FDIC's 
nondiscrimination regulations is to require that every applicant be 
given an equal opportunity to obtain a loan. Each loan applicant's 
creditworthiness

[[Page 1183]]

should be evaluated on an individual basis without reference to presumed 
characteristics of a group. The use of lending standards which have no 
economic basis and which are discriminatory in effect is a violation of 
law even in the absence of an actual intent to discriminate. However, a 
standard which has a discriminatory effect is not necessarily improper 
if its use achieves a genuine business need which cannot be achieved by 
means which are not discriminatory in effect or less discriminatory in 
effect.
    (c) Discriminatory practices-- (1) Discrimination on the basis of 
sex or marital status. The Civil Rights Act of 1968 and the National 
Housing Act prohibit discrimination in lending on the basis of sex. The 
Equal Credit Opportunity Act, in addition to this prohibition, forbids 
discrimination on the basis of marital status. Refusing to lend to, 
requiring higher standards of creditworthiness of, or imposing different 
requirements on, members of one sex or individuals of one marital 
status, is discrimination based on sex or marital status. Loan 
underwriting decisions must be based on an applicant's credit history 
and present and reasonably foreseeable economic prospects, rather than 
on the basis of assumptions regarding comparative differences in 
creditworthiness between married and unmarried individuals, or between 
men and women.
    (2) Discrimination on the basis of language. Requiring fluency in 
the English language as a prerequisite for obtaining a loan may be a 
discriminatory practice based on national origin.
    (3) Income of husbands and wives. A practice of discounting all or 
part of either spouse's income where spouses apply jointly is a 
violation of section 527 of the National Housing Act. As with other 
income, when spouses apply jointly for a loan, the determination as to 
whether a spouse's income qualifies for credit purposes should depend 
upon a reasonable evaluation of his or her past, present, and reasonably 
foreseeable economic circumstances. Information relating to child-
bearing intentions of a couple or an individual may not be requested.
    (4) Supplementary income. Lending standards which consider as 
effective only the non-overtime income of the primary wage-earner may 
result in discrimination because they do not take account of variations 
in employment patterns among individuals and families. The FDIC favors 
loan underwriting which reasonably evaluates the credit worthiness of 
each applicant based on a realistic appraisal of his or her own past, 
present, and foreseeable economic circumstances. The determination as to 
whether primary income or additional income qualifies as effective for 
credit purposes should depend upon whether such income may reasonably be 
expected to continue through the early period of the mortgage risk. 
Automatically discounting other income from bonuses, overtime, or part-
time employment, will cause some applicants to be denied financing 
without a realistic analysis of their credit worthiness. Since 
statistics show that minority group members and low- and moderate-income 
families rely more often on such supplemental income, the practice may 
be racially discriminatory in effect, as well as artificially 
restrictive of opportunities for home financing.
    (5) Applicant's prior history. Loan decisions should be based upon a 
realistic evaluation of all pertinent factors respecting an individual's 
creditworthiness, without giving undue weight to any one factor. The 
State savings association should, among other things, take into 
consideration that:
    (i) In some instances, past credit difficulties may have resulted 
from discriminatory practices;
    (ii) A policy favoring applicants who previously owned homes may 
perpetuate prior discrimination;
    (iii) A current, stable earnings record may be the most reliable 
indicator of credit-worthiness, and entitled to more weight than factors 
such as educational level attained;
    (iv) Job or residential changes may indicate upward mobility; and
    (v) Preferring applicants who have done business with the lender can 
perpetuate previous discriminatory policies.
    (6) Income level or racial composition of area. Refusing to lend or 
lending on less favorable terms in particular areas because of their 
racial composition is

[[Page 1184]]

unlawful. Refusing to lend, or offering less favorable terms (such as 
interest rate, downpayment, or maturity) to applicants because of the 
income level in an area can discriminate against minority group persons.
    (7) Age and location factors. Sections 390.142-390.144 prohibit loan 
denials based upon the age or location of a dwelling. These restrictions 
are intended to prohibit use of unfounded or unsubstantiated assumptions 
regarding the effect upon loan risk of the age of a dwelling or the 
physical or economic characteristics of an area. Loan decisions should 
be based on the present market value of the property offered as security 
(including consideration of specific improvements to be made by the 
borrower) and the likelihood that the property will retain an adequate 
value over the term of the loan. Specific factors which may negatively 
affect its short-range future value (up to 3-5 years) should be clearly 
documented. Factors which in some cases may cause the market value of a 
property to decline are recent zoning changes or a significant number of 
abandoned homes in the immediate vicinity of the property. However, not 
all zoning changes will cause a decline in property values, and 
proximity to abandoned buildings may not affect the market value of a 
property because of rehabilitation programs or affirmative lending 
programs, or because the cause of abandonment is unrelated to high risk. 
Proper underwriting considerations include the condition and utility of 
the improvements, and various physical factors such as street 
conditions, amenities such as parks and recreation areas, availability 
of public utilities and municipal services, and exposure to flooding and 
land faults. However, arbitrary decisions based on age or location are 
prohibited, since many older, soundly constructed homes provide housing 
opportunities which may be precluded by an arbitrary lending policy.
    (8) Fair Housing Act (title VIII, Civil Rights Act of 1968, as 
amended). State savings associations, must comply with all regulations 
promulgated by the Department of Housing and Urban Development to 
implement the Fair Housing Act, found at 24 CFR part 100 et seq., except 
that they shall use the Equal Housing Lender logo and poster prescribed 
by FDIC regulations at Secs. 390.145 and 390.146 rather than the Equal 
Housing Opportunity logo and poster required by 24 CFR parts 109 and 
110.
    (d) Marketing practices. State savings associations should review 
their advertising and marketing practices to ensure that their services 
are available without discrimination to the community they serve. 
Discrimination in lending is not limited to loan decisions and 
underwriting standards; a State savings association does not meet its 
obligations to the community or implement its equal lending 
responsibility if its marketing practices and business relationships 
with developers and real estate brokers improperly restrict its 
clientele to segments of the community. A review of marketing practices 
could begin with an examination of an association's loan portfolio and 
applications to ascertain whether, in view of the demographic 
characteristics and credit demands of the community in which the 
institution is located, it is adequately serving the community on a 
nondiscriminatory basis. The FDIC will systematically review marketing 
practices where evidence of discrimination in lending is discovered.

Subpart H [Reserved]



           Subpart I_Consumer Protection in Sales of Insurance



Sec. 390.180  Purpose and scope.

    (a) General rule. This subpart establishes consumer protections in 
connection with retail sales practices, solicitations, advertising, or 
offers of any insurance product or annuity to a consumer by:
    (1) Any State savings association, as defined in section 3 of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDIA), (12 U.S.C. 1813(b)); or
    (2) Any other person that is engaged in such activities at an office 
of a State savings association or on behalf of a State savings 
association.
    (b) Application to subsidiaries. A subsidiary is subject to this 
subpart only to the extent that it sells, solicits, advertises, or 
offers insurance products

[[Page 1185]]

or annuities at an office of a State savings association or on behalf of 
a State savings association.



Sec. 390.181  Definitions.

    As used in this subpart:
    Affiliate means a company that controls, is controlled by, or is 
under common control with another company.
    Company means any corporation, partnership, business trust, 
association or similar organization, or any other trust (unless by its 
terms the trust must terminate within twenty-five years or not later 
than twenty-one years and ten months after the death of individuals 
living on the effective date of the trust). It does not include any 
corporation the majority of the shares of which are owned by the United 
States or by any State, or a qualified family partnership, as defined in 
section 2(o)(10) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 
U.S.C. 1841(o)(10)).
    Consumer means an individual who purchases, applies to purchase, or 
is solicited to purchase from a covered person insurance products or 
annuities primarily for personal, family, or household purposes.
    Control of a company has the same meaning as in section 3(w)(5) of 
the FDIA, (12 U.S.C. 1813(w)(5)).
    Domestic violence means the occurrence of one or more of the 
following acts by a current or former family member, household member, 
intimate partner, or caretaker:
    (1) Attempting to cause or causing or threatening another person 
physical harm, severe emotional distress, psychological trauma, rape, or 
sexual assault;
    (2) Engaging in a course of conduct or repeatedly committing acts 
toward another person, including following the person without proper 
authority, under circumstances that place the person in reasonable fear 
of bodily injury or physical harm;
    (3) Subjecting another person to false imprisonment; or
    (4) Attempting to cause or causing damage to property so as to 
intimidate or attempt to control the behavior of another person.
    Electronic media includes any means for transmitting messages 
electronically between a covered person and a consumer in a format that 
allows visual text to be displayed on equipment, for example, a personal 
computer monitor.
    Office means the premises of a State savings association where 
retail deposits are accepted from the public.
    Subsidiary has the same meaning as in section 3(w)(4) of the FDIA, 
(12 U.S.C. 1813(w)(4)).
    You means:
    (1) A State savings association, as defined in Sec. 390.308; or
    (2) Any other person only when the person sells, solicits, 
advertises, or offers an insurance product or annuity to a consumer at 
an office of a State savings association, or on behalf of a State 
savings association. For purposes of this definition, activities on 
behalf of a State savings association include activities where a person, 
whether at an office of the State savings association or at another 
location, sells, solicits, advertises, or offers an insurance product or 
annuity and at least one of the following applies:
    (i) The person represents to a consumer that the sale, solicitation, 
advertisement, or offer of any insurance product or annuity is by or on 
behalf of the State savings association;
    (ii) The State savings association refers a consumer to a seller of 
insurance products and annuities and the State savings association has a 
contractual arrangement to receive commissions or fees derived from a 
sale of an insurance product or annuity resulting from that referral; or
    (iii) Documents evidencing the sale, solicitation, advertising, or 
offer of an insurance product or annuity identify or refer to the State 
savings association.



Sec. 390.182  Prohibited practices.

    (a) Anti-coercion and anti-tying rules. You may not engage in any 
practice that would lead a consumer to believe that an extension of 
credit, in violation of section 5(q) of the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 
U.S.C. 1464(q)), is conditional upon either:
    (1) The purchase of an insurance product or annuity from a State 
savings association or any of its affiliates; or

[[Page 1186]]

    (2) An agreement by the consumer not to obtain, or a prohibition on 
the consumer from obtaining, an insurance product or annuity from an 
unaffiliated entity.
    (b) Prohibition on misrepresentations generally. You may not engage 
in any practice or use any advertisement at any office of, or on behalf 
of, a State savings association or a subsidiary of a State savings 
association that could mislead any person or otherwise cause a 
reasonable person to reach an erroneous belief with respect to:
    (1) The fact that an insurance product or annuity you or any 
subsidiary of a State savings association sell or offer for sale is not 
backed by the Federal government or a State savings association, or the 
fact that the insurance product or annuity is not insured by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation;
    (2) In the case of an insurance product or annuity that involves 
investment risk, the fact that there is an investment risk, including 
the potential that principal may be lost and that the product may 
decline in value; or
    (3) In the case of a State savings association or subsidiary of a 
State savings association at which insurance products or annuities are 
sold or offered for sale, the fact that:
    (i) The approval of an extension of credit to a consumer by the 
State savings association or subsidiary may not be conditioned on the 
purchase of an insurance product or annuity by the consumer from the 
State savings association or a subsidiary of a State savings 
association; and
    (ii) The consumer is free to purchase the insurance product or 
annuity from another source.
    (c) Prohibition on domestic violence discrimination. You may not 
sell or offer for sale, as principal, agent, or broker, any life or 
health insurance product if the status of the applicant or insured as a 
victim of domestic violence or as a provider of services to victims of 
domestic violence is considered as a criterion in any decision with 
regard to insurance underwriting, pricing, renewal, or scope of coverage 
of such product, or with regard to the payment of insurance claims on 
such product, except as required or expressly permitted under State law.



Sec. 390.183  What you must disclose.

    (a) Insurance disclosures. In connection with the initial purchase 
of an insurance product or annuity by a consumer from you, you must 
disclose to the consumer, except to the extent the disclosure would not 
be accurate, that:
    (1) The insurance product or annuity is not a deposit or other 
obligation of, or guaranteed by, a State savings association or an 
affiliate of a State savings association;
    (2) The insurance product or annuity is not insured by the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) or any other agency of the United 
States, a State savings association, or (if applicable) an affiliate of 
a State savings association; and
    (3) In the case of an insurance product or annuity that involves an 
investment risk, there is investment risk associated with the product, 
including the possible loss of value.
    (b) Credit disclosures. In the case of an application for credit in 
connection with which an insurance product or annuity is solicited, 
offered, or sold, you must disclose that a State savings association may 
not condition an extension of credit on either:
    (1) The consumer's purchase of an insurance product or annuity from 
the State savings association or any of its affiliates; or
    (2) The consumer's agreement not to obtain, or a prohibition on the 
consumer from obtaining, an insurance product or annuity from an 
unaffiliated entity.
    (c) Timing and method of disclosures--(1) In general. The 
disclosures required by paragraph (a) of this section must be provided 
orally and in writing before the completion of the initial sale of an 
insurance product or annuity to a consumer. The disclosure required by 
paragraph (b) of this section must be made orally and in writing at the 
time the consumer applies for an extension of credit in connection with 
which an insurance product or annuity is solicited, offered, or sold.
    (2) Exception for transactions by mail. If you conduct an insurance 
product or

[[Page 1187]]

annuity sale by mail, you are not required to make the oral disclosures 
required by paragraph (a) of this section. If you take an application 
for credit by mail, you are not required to make the oral disclosure 
required by paragraph (b) of this section.
    (3) Exception for transactions by telephone. If a sale of an 
insurance product or annuity is conducted by telephone, you may provide 
the written disclosures required by paragraph (a) of this section by 
mail within 3 business days beginning on the first business day after 
the sale, solicitation, or offer, excluding Sundays and the legal public 
holidays specified in 5 U.S.C. 6103(a). If you take an application for 
credit by telephone, you may provide the written disclosure required by 
paragraph (b) of this section by mail, provided you mail it to the 
consumer within three days beginning the first business day after the 
application is taken, excluding Sundays and the legal public holidays 
specified in 5 U.S.C. 6103(a).
    (4) Electronic form of disclosures. (i) Subject to the requirements 
of section 101(c) of the Electronic Signatures in Global and National 
Commerce Act (12 U.S.C. 7001(c)), you may provide the written 
disclosures required by paragraph (a) and (b) of this section through 
electronic media instead of on paper, if the consumer affirmatively 
consents to receiving the disclosures electronically and if the 
disclosures are provided in a format that the consumer may retain or 
obtain later, for example, by printing or storing electronically (such 
as by downloading).
    (ii) You are not required to provide orally any disclosures required 
by paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section that you provide by electronic 
media.
    (5) Disclosures must be readily understandable. The disclosures 
provided shall be conspicuous, simple, direct, readily understandable, 
and designed to call attention to the nature and significance of the 
information provided. For instance, you may use the following 
disclosures in visual media, such as television broadcasting, ATM 
screens, billboards, signs, posters and written advertisements and 
promotional materials, as appropriate and consistent with paragraphs (a) 
and (b) of this section:
     NOT A DEPOSIT
     NOT FDIC-INSURED
     NOT INSURED BY ANY FEDERAL GOVERNMENT AGENCY
     NOT GUARANTEED BY THE STATE SAVINGS ASSOCIATION
     MAY GO DOWN IN VALUE
    (6) Disclosures must be meaningful. (i) You must provide the 
disclosures required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section in a 
meaningful form. Examples of the types of methods that could call 
attention to the nature and significance of the information provided 
include:
    (A) A plain-language heading to call attention to the disclosures;
    (B) A typeface and type size that are easy to read;
    (C) Wide margins and ample line spacing;
    (D) Boldface or italics for key words; and
    (E) Distinctive type size, style, and graphic devices, such as 
shading or sidebars, when the disclosures are combined with other 
information.
    (ii) You have not provided the disclosures in a meaningful form if 
you merely state to the consumer that the required disclosures are 
available in printed material, but do not provide the printed material 
when required and do not orally disclose the information to the consumer 
when required.
    (iii) With respect to those disclosures made through electronic 
media for which paper or oral disclosures are not required, the 
disclosures are not meaningfully provided if the consumer may bypass the 
visual text of the disclosures before purchasing an insurance product or 
annuity.
    (7) Consumer acknowledgment. You must obtain from the consumer, at 
the time a consumer receives the disclosures required under paragraphs 
(a) or (b) of this section, or at the time of the initial purchase by 
the consumer of an insurance product or annuity, a written 
acknowledgment by the consumer that the consumer received the 
disclosures. You may permit a consumer to acknowledge receipt of the 
disclosures electronically or in paper form. If the disclosures required 
under paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section are provided in connection 
with a transaction that is conducted by telephone, you must:

[[Page 1188]]

    (i) Obtain an oral acknowledgment of receipt of the disclosures and 
maintain sufficient documentation to show that the acknowledgment was 
given; and
    (ii) Make reasonable efforts to obtain a written acknowledgment from 
the consumer.
    (d) Advertisements and other promotional material for insurance 
products or annuities. The disclosures described in paragraph (a) of 
this section are required in advertisements and promotional material for 
insurance products or annuities unless the advertisements and 
promotional material are of a general nature describing or listing the 
services or products offered by a State savings association.



Sec. 390.184  Where insurance activities may take place.

    (a) General rule. A State savings association must, to the extent 
practicable:
    (1) Keep the area where the State savings association conducts 
transactions involving insurance products or annuities physically 
segregated from areas where retail deposits are routinely accepted from 
the general public;
    (2) Identify the areas where insurance product or annuity sales 
activities occur; and
    (3) Clearly delineate and distinguish those areas from the areas 
where the State savings association's retail deposit-taking activities 
occur.
    (b) Referrals. Any person who accepts deposits from the public in an 
area where such transactions are routinely conducted in a State savings 
association may refer a consumer who seeks to purchase an insurance 
product or annuity to a qualified person who sells that product only if 
the person making the referral receives no more than a one-time, nominal 
fee of a fixed dollar amount for each referral that does not depend on 
whether the referral results in a transaction.



Sec. 390.185  Qualification and licensing requirements for insurance
sales personnel.

    A State savings association may not permit any person to sell or 
offer for sale any insurance product or annuity in any part of the State 
savings association's office or on its behalf, unless the person is at 
all times appropriately qualified and licensed under applicable State 
insurance licensing standards with regard to the specific products being 
sold or recommended.



  Sec. Appendix A to Subpart I of Part 390--Consumer Grievance Process

    Any consumer who believes that any State savings association or any 
other person selling, soliciting, advertising, or offering insurance 
products or annuities to the consumer at an office of the State savings 
association or on behalf of the State savings association has violated 
the requirements of this subpart should contact the FDIC at the 
following address: Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, Consumer 
Response Center, 1100 Walnut St, Box #11, Kansas City, MO 64106, or 
telephone 1-877-275-3342 (1-877-ASK FDIC), or e-mail http://
www.fdic.gov/consumers/consumer/ccc/contact.html.



        Subpart J_Fiduciary Powers of State Savings Associations



Sec. 390.190  What regulations govern the fiduciary operations of
State savings associations?

    A State savings association must conduct its fiduciary operations in 
accordance with applicable State law, and must exercise its fiduciary 
powers in a safe and sound manner.

Subparts K-L [Reserved]



                           Subpart M_Deposits



Sec. 390.230  What does this subpart do?

    This subpart applies to the deposit activities of State savings 
associations.



Sec. 390.231  What records should I maintain on deposit activities?

    All State savings associations (``you'') should establish and 
maintain deposit documentation practices and records that demonstrate 
that you appropriately administer and monitor deposit-related 
activities. Your records should adequately evidence ownership, balances, 
and all transactions involving each account. You may maintain records on 
deposit activities in any format that is consistent with standard 
business practices.

Subpart N [Reserved]

[[Page 1189]]



                   Subpart O_Subordinate Organizations



Sec. 390.250  What does this subpart cover?

    (a) The FDIC is issuing this subpart O pursuant to its general 
rulemaking and supervisory authority under the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act, 12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq., and its specific authority under section 
18(m) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 12 U.S.C. 1828(m). This 
subpart applies to subordinate organizations of State savings 
associations. The FDIC may, at any time, limit a State savings 
association's investment in any of these entities, or may limit or 
refuse to permit any activities of any of these entities for 
supervisory, legal, or safety and soundness reasons.
    (b) Notices under this subpart are applications for purposes of 
statutory and regulatory references to ``applications.'' Any conditions 
that the FDIC imposes in approving any application are enforceable as a 
condition imposed in writing by the FDIC in connection with the granting 
of a request by a State savings association within the meaning of 12 
U.S.C. 1818(b) or 1818(i).



Sec. 390.251  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    Control has the same meaning as in part 391, subpart E.
    GAAP-consolidated subsidiary means an entity in which a State 
savings association has a direct or indirect ownership interest and 
whose assets are consolidated with those of the savings association for 
purposes of reporting under Generally Accepted Accounting Principles 
(GAAP). Generally, these are entities in which a State savings 
association has a majority ownership interest.
    Lower-tier entity includes any company in which a subsidiary has a 
direct or indirect ownership interest.
    Ownership interest means any equity interest in a business 
organization, including stock, limited or general partnership interests, 
or shares in a limited liability company.
    Subordinate organization means any corporation, partnership, 
business trust, association, joint venture, pool, syndicate, or other 
similar business organization in which a State savings association has a 
direct or indirect ownership interest, unless that ownership interest 
qualifies as a pass-through investment and is so designated by the 
investing State savings association.
    Subsidiary means any subordinate organization directly or indirectly 
controlled by a State savings association.



Sec. 390.252  How must separate corporate identities be maintained?

    (a) Each State savings association and subordinate organization 
thereof must be operated in a manner that demonstrates to the public 
that each maintains a separate corporate existence. Each must operate so 
that:
    (1) Their respective business transactions, accounts, and records 
are not intermingled;
    (2) Each observes the formalities of their separate corporate 
procedures;
    (3) Each is adequately financed as a separate unit in light of 
normal obligations reasonably foreseeable in a business of its size and 
character;
    (4) Each is held out to the public as a separate enterprise; and
    (5) Unless the parent State savings association has guaranteed a 
loan to the subordinate organization, all borrowings by the subordinate 
organization indicate that the parent is not liable.
    (b) The FDIC regulations that apply both to State savings 
associations and subordinate organizations shall not be construed as 
requiring a State savings association and its subordinate organizations 
to operate as a single entity.



Sec. 390.253  What notices are required to establish or acquire a
new subsidiary or engage in new activities through an existing
subsidiary?

    When required by section 18(m) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, 
a State savings association (``you'') must file a notice (``Notice'') 
with the FDIC before establishing or acquiring a subsidiary or engaging 
in new activities in a subsidiary. The Notice must contain all of the 
information the required under 12 CFR 362.15. If the FDIC notifies you 
within 30 days that the Notice presents supervisory concerns, or raises 
significant issues of law or policy, you must apply for and receive the 
FDIC's prior

[[Page 1190]]

written approval before establishing or acquiring the subsidiary or 
engaging in new activities in the subsidiary.



Sec. 390.254  How may a subsidiary of a State savings association 
issue securities?

    (a) A subsidiary may issue, either directly or through a third party 
intermediary, any securities that its parent State savings association 
(``you'') may issue. The subsidiary must not state or imply that the 
securities it issues are covered by federal deposit insurance. A 
subsidiary may not issue any security the payment, maturity, or 
redemption of which may be accelerated upon the condition that you are 
insolvent or have been placed into receivership.
    (b) You must file a notice with the FDIC in accordance with 
Sec. 390.253 at least 30 days before your first issuance of any 
securities through an existing subsidiary or in conjunction with 
establishing or acquiring a new subsidiary. If the FDIC notifies you 
within 30 days that the notice presents supervisory concerns or raises 
significant issues of law or policy, you must receive the FDIC's prior 
written approval before issuing securities through your subsidiary.
    (c) For as long as any securities are outstanding, you must maintain 
all records generated through each securities issuance in the ordinary 
course of business, including a copy of any prospectus, offering 
circular, or similar document concerning such issuance, and make such 
records available for examination by the FDIC. Such records must 
include, but are not limited to:
    (1) The amount of your assets or liabilities (including any 
guarantees you make with respect to the securities issuance) that have 
been transferred or made available to the subsidiary; the percentage 
that such amount represents of the current book value of your assets on 
an unconsolidated basis; and the current book value of all such assets 
of the subsidiary;
    (2) The terms of any guarantee(s) issued by you or any third party;
    (3) A description of the securities the subsidiary issued;
    (4) The net proceeds from the issuance of securities (or the pro 
rata portion of the net proceeds from securities issued through a 
jointly owned subsidiary); the gross proceeds of the securities 
issuance; and the market value of assets collateralizing the securities 
issuance (any assets of the subsidiary, including any guarantees of its 
securities issuance you have made);
    (5) The interest or dividend rates and yields, or the range thereof, 
and the frequency of payments on the subsidiary's securities;
    (6) The minimum denomination of the subsidiary's securities; and
    (7) Where the subsidiary marketed or intends to market the 
securities.



Sec. 390.255  How may a State savings association exercise its salvage
power in connection with a service corporation or lower-tier entities?

    (a) In accordance with this section, a State savings association 
(``you'') may exercise your salvage power to make a contribution or a 
loan (including a guarantee of a loan made by any other person) to a 
lower-tier entity (``salvage investment'') that exceeds the maximum 
amount otherwise permitted under law or regulation. You must notify the 
FDIC at least 30 days before making such a salvage investment. This 
notice must demonstrate that:
    (1) The salvage investment protects your interest in the lower-tier 
entity;
    (2) The salvage investment is consistent with safety and soundness; 
and
    (3) You considered alternatives to the salvage investment and 
determined that such alternatives would not adequately satisfy 
paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section.
    (b) If the FDIC notifies you within 30 days that the Notice presents 
supervisory concerns, or raises significant issues of law or policy, you 
must apply for and receive the FDIC's prior written approval before 
making a salvage investment.
    (c) If your lower-tier entity is a GAAP-consolidated subsidiary, 
your salvage investment under this section will be considered an 
investment in a subsidiary for purposes of subpart Z.

[[Page 1191]]



                    Subpart P_Lending and Investment



Sec. 390.260  General.

    (a) Authority and scope. This subpart is being issued by the FDIC 
under its general rulemaking and supervisory authority under the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (FDIA), 12 U.S.C. 1811 et seq. Sections 390.264, 
390.265, and 390.267 through 390.272 contain safety-and-soundness based 
lending and investment provisions applicable to State savings 
associations.
    (b) General lending standards. Each State savings association is 
expected to conduct its lending and investment activities prudently. 
Each State savings association should use lending and investment 
standards that are consistent with safety and soundness, ensure adequate 
portfolio diversification and are appropriate for the size and condition 
of the institution, the nature and scope of its operations, and 
conditions in its lending market. Each State savings association should 
adequately monitor the condition of its portfolio and the adequacy of 
any collateral securing its loans.



Sec. 390.261  [Reserved]



Sec. 390.262  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart:
    Consumer loans include loans for personal, family, or household 
purposes and loans reasonably incident thereto, and may be made as 
either open-end or closed-end consumer credit (as defined at 12 CFR 
226.2(a)(10) and (20)). Consumer loans do not include credit extended in 
connection with credit card loans, bona fide overdraft loans, and other 
loans that the State savings association has designated as made under 
investment or lending authority other than section 5(c)(2)(D) of the 
HOLA.
    Credit card is any card, plate, coupon book, or other single credit 
device that may be used from time to time to obtain credit.
    Credit card account is a credit account established in conjunction 
with the issuance of, or the extension of credit through, a credit card. 
This term includes loans made to consolidate credit card debt, including 
credit card debt held by other lenders, and participation certificates, 
securities and similar instruments secured by credit card receivables.
    Home loans include any loans made on the security of a home 
(including a dwelling unit in a multi-family residential property such 
as a condominium or a cooperative), combinations of homes and business 
property (i.e., a home used in part for business), farm residences, and 
combinations of farm residences and commercial farm real estate.
    Loan commitment includes a loan in process, a letter of credit, or 
any other commitment to extend credit.
    Real estate loan is a loan for which the State savings association 
substantially relies upon a security interest in real estate given by 
the borrower as a condition of making the loan. A loan is made on the 
security of real estate if:
    (1) The security property is real estate pursuant to the law of the 
state in which the property is located;
    (2) The security interest of the State savings association may be 
enforced as a real estate mortgage or its equivalent pursuant to the law 
of the state in which the property is located;
    (3) The security property is capable of separate appraisal; and
    (4) With regard to a security property that is a leasehold or other 
interest for a period of years, the term of the interest extends, or is 
subject to extension or renewal at the option of the State savings 
association for a term of at least five years following the maturity of 
the loan.
    Small business includes a small business concern or entity as 
defined by section 3(a) of the Small Business Act, 15 U.S.C. 632(a), and 
implemented by the regulations of the Small Business Administration at 
13 CFR part 121.
    Small business loans and loans to small businesses include any loan 
to a small business as defined in this section; or a loan that does not 
exceed $2 million (including a group of loans to one borrower) and is 
for commercial, corporate, business, or agricultural purposes.

[[Page 1192]]



Sec. 390.263  [Reserved]



Sec. 390.264  Real estate lending standards; purpose and scope.

    This section, and Sec. 390.265, issued pursuant to section 18(o) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, (12 U.S.C. 1828(o)), prescribe 
standards for real estate lending to be used by State savings 
associations and all their includable subsidiaries, as defined in 
Sec. 390.461, over which the State savings associations exercise 
control, in adopting internal real estate lending policies.



Sec. 390.265  Real estate lending standards.

    (a) Each State savings association shall adopt and maintain written 
policies that establish appropriate limits and standards for extensions 
of credit that are secured by liens on or interests in real estate, or 
that are made for the purpose of financing permanent improvements to 
real estate.
    (b)(1) Real estate lending policies adopted pursuant to this section 
must:
    (i) Be consistent with safe and sound banking practices;
    (ii) Be appropriate to the size of the institution and the nature 
and scope of its operations; and
    (iii) Be reviewed and approved by the State savings association's 
board of directors at least annually.
    (2) The lending policies must establish:
    (i) Loan portfolio diversification standards;
    (ii) Prudent underwriting standards, including loan-to-value limits, 
that are clear and measurable;
    (iii) Loan administration procedures for the State savings 
association's real estate portfolio; and
    (iv) Documentation, approval, and reporting requirements to monitor 
compliance with the State savings association's real estate lending 
policies.
    (c) Each State savings association must monitor conditions in the 
real estate market in its lending area to ensure that its real estate 
lending policies continue to be appropriate for current market 
conditions.
    (d) The real estate lending policies adopted pursuant to this 
section should reflect consideration of the Interagency Guidelines for 
Real Estate Lending Policies established by the Federal banking 
agencies.

Appendix to Sec. 390.265--Interagency Guidelines for Real Estate Lending 
                                Policies

    The agencies' regulations require that each insured depository 
institution adopt and maintain a written policy that establishes 
appropriate limits and standards for all extensions of credit that are 
secured by liens on or interests in real estate or made for the purpose 
of financing the construction of a building or other improvements.\1\ 
These guidelines are intended to assist institutions in the formulation 
and maintenance of a real estate lending policy that is appropriate to 
the size of the institution and the nature and scope of its individual 
operations, as well as satisfies the requirements of the regulation.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ The agencies have adopted a uniform rule on real estate lending. 
See 12 CFR part 365 and Secs. 390.264-390.265 (FDIC); 12 CFR part 208, 
subpart C (FRB); and 12 CFR part 34, subpart D (OCC).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Each institution's policies must be comprehensive, and consistent 
with safe and sound lending practices, and must ensure that the 
institution operates within limits and according to standards that are 
reviewed and approved at least annually by the board of directors. Real 
estate lending is an integral part of many institutions' business plans 
and, when undertaken in a prudent manner, will not be subject to 
examiner criticism.

                Loan Portfolio Management Considerations

    The lending policy should contain a general outline of the scope and 
distribution of the institution's credit facilities and the manner in 
which real estate loans are made, serviced, and collected. In 
particular, the institution's policies on real estate lending should:
     Identify the geographic areas in which the institution will 
consider lending.
     Establish a loan portfolio diversification policy and set 
limits for real estate loans by type and geographic market (e.g., limits 
on higher risk loans).
     Identify appropriate terms and conditions by type of real 
estate loan.
     Establish loan origination and approval procedures, both 
generally and by size and type of loan.
     Establish prudent underwriting standards that are clear and 
measurable, including loan-to-value limits, that are consistent with 
these supervisory guidelines.
     Establish review and approval procedures for exception 
loans, including loans with loan-to-value percentages in excess of 
supervisory limits.

[[Page 1193]]

     Establish loan administration procedures, including 
documentation, disbursement, collateral inspection, collection, and loan 
review.
     Establish real estate appraisal and evaluation programs.
     Require that management monitor the loan portfolio and 
provide timely and adequate reports to the board of directors.
    The institution should consider both internal and external factors 
in the formulation of its loan policies and strategic plan. Factors that 
should be considered include:
     The size and financial condition of the institution.
     The expertise and size of the lending staff.
     The need to avoid undue concentrations of risk.
     Compliance with all real estate related laws and 
regulations, including the Community Reinvestment Act, anti-
discrimination laws, and for State savings associations, the Qualified 
Thrift Lender test.
     Market conditions.
    The institution should monitor conditions in the real estate markets 
in its lending area so that it can react quickly to changes in market 
conditions that are relevant to its lending decisions. Market supply and 
demand factors that should be considered include:
     Demographic indicators, including population and employment 
trends.
     Zoning requirements.
     Current and projected vacancy, construction, and absorption 
rates.
     Current and projected lease terms, rental rates, and sales 
prices, including concessions.
     Current and projected operating expenses for different 
types of projects.
     Economic indicators, including trends and diversification 
of the lending area.
     Valuation trends, including discount and direct 
capitalization rates.

                         Underwriting Standards

    Prudently underwritten real estate loans should reflect all relevant 
credit factors, including:
     The capacity of the borrower, or income from the underlying 
property, to adequately service the debt.
     The value of the mortgaged property.
     The overall creditworthiness of the borrower.
     The level of equity invested in the property.
     Any secondary sources of repayment.
     Any additional collateral or credit enhancements (such as 
guarantees, mortgage insurance or takeout commitments).
    The lending policies should reflect the level of risk that is 
acceptable to the board of directors and provide clear and measurable 
underwriting standards that enable the institution's lending staff to 
evaluate these credit factors. The underwriting standards should 
address:
     The maximum loan amount by type of property.
     Maximum loan maturities by type of property.
     Amortization schedules.
     Pricing structure for different types of real estate loans.
     Loan-to-value limits by type of property.
    For development and construction projects, and completed commercial 
properties, the policy should also establish, commensurate with the size 
and type of the project or property:
     Requirements for feasibility studies and sensitivity and 
risk analyses (e.g., sensitivity of income projections to changes in 
economic variables such as interest rates, vacancy rates, or operating 
expenses).
     Minimum requirements for initial investment and maintenance 
of hard equity by the borrower (e.g., cash or unencumbered investment in 
the underlying property).
     Minimum standards for net worth, cash flow, and debt 
service coverage of the borrower or underlying property.
     Standards for the acceptability of and limits on non-
amortizing loans.
     Standards for the acceptability of and limits on the use of 
interest reserves.
     Pre-leasing and pre-sale requirements for income-producing 
property.
     Pre-sale and minimum unit release requirements for non-
income-producing property loans.
     Limits on partial recourse or nonrecourse loans and 
requirements for guarantor support.
     Requirements for takeout commitments.
     Minimum covenants for loan agreements.

                           Loan Administration

    The institution should also establish loan administration procedures 
for its real estate portfolio that address:
     Documentation, including:
    Type and frequency of financial statements, including requirements 
for verification of information provided by the borrower;
    Type and frequency of collateral evaluations (appraisals and other 
estimates of value).
     Loan closing and disbursement.
     Payment processing.
     Escrow administration.
     Collateral administration.
     Loan payoffs.
     Collections and foreclosure, including:
    Delinquency follow-up procedures;
    Foreclosure timing;
    Extensions and other forms of forbearance;
    Acceptance of deeds in lieu of foreclosure.

[[Page 1194]]

     Claims processing (e.g., seeking recovery on a defaulted 
loan covered by a government guaranty or insurance program).
     Servicing and participation agreements.

                    Supervisory Loan-to-Value Limits

    Institutions should establish their own internal loan-to-value 
limits for real estate loans. These internal limits should not exceed 
the following supervisory limits:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Loan-to-
                                                                 value
                        Loan category                            limit
                                                               (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Raw land....................................................          65
Land development............................................          75
Construction:
  Commercial, multifamily,\2\ and other nonresidential......          80
  1- to 4-family residential................................          85
Improved property...........................................          85
Owner-occupied 1- to 4-family and home equity...............       (\3\)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

      
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ Multifamily construction includes condominiums and cooperatives.
    \3\ A loan-to-value limit has not been established for permanent 
mortgage or home equity loans on owner-occupied, 1- to 4-family 
residential property. However, for any such loan with a loan-to-value 
ratio that equals or exceeds 90 percent at origination, an institution 
should require appropriate credit enhancement in the form of either 
mortgage insurance or readily marketable collateral.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    The supervisory loan-to-value limits should be applied to the 
underlying property that collateralizes the loan. For loans that fund 
multiple phases of the same real estate project (e.g., a loan for both 
land development and construction of an office building), the 
appropriate loan-to-value limit is the limit applicable to the final 
phase of the project funded by the loan; however, loan disbursements 
should not exceed actual development or construction outlays. In 
situations where a loan is fully cross-collateralized by two or more 
properties or is secured by a collateral pool of two or more properties, 
the appropriate maximum loan amount under supervisory loan-to-value 
limits is the sum of the value of each property, less senior liens, 
multiplied by the appropriate loan-to-value limit for each property. To 
ensure that collateral margins remain within the supervisory limits, 
lenders should redetermine conformity whenever collateral substitutions 
are made to the collateral pool.
    In establishing internal loan-to-value limits, each lender is 
expected to carefully consider the institution-specific and market 
factors listed under ``Loan Portfolio Management Considerations,'' as 
well as any other relevant factors, such as the particular subcategory 
or type of loan. For any subcategory of loans that exhibits greater 
credit risk than the overall category, a lender should consider the 
establishment of an internal loan-to-value limit for that subcategory 
that is lower than the limit for the overall category.
    The loan-to-value ratio is only one of several pertinent credit 
factors to be considered when underwriting a real estate loan. Other 
credit factors to be taken into account are highlighted in the 
``Underwriting Standards'' section above. Because of these other 
factors, the establishment of these supervisory limits should not be 
interpreted to mean that loans at these levels will automatically be 
considered sound.

         Loans in Excess of the Supervisory Loan-to-Value Limits

    The agencies recognize that appropriate loan-to-value limits vary 
not only among categories of real estate loans but also among individual 
loans. Therefore, it may be appropriate in individual cases to originate 
or purchase loans with loan-to-value ratios in excess of the supervisory 
loan-to-value limits, based on the support provided by other credit 
factors. Such loans should be identified in the institutions' records, 
and their aggregate amount reported at least quarterly to the 
institution's board of directors. (See additional reporting requirements 
described under ``Exceptions to the General Policy.'') The aggregate 
amount of all loans in excess of the supervisory loan-to-value limits 
should not exceed 100 percent of total capital.\4\ Moreover, within the 
aggregate limit, total loans for all commercial, agricultural, 
multifamily or other non-1- to 4-family residential properties should 
not exceed 30 percent of total capital. An institution will come under 
increased supervisory scrutiny as the total of such loans approaches 
these levels.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ For the state member banks, the term ``total capital'' means 
``total risk-based capital'' as defined in appendix A to 12 CFR part 
208. For insured state non-member banks, ``total capital'' refers to 
that term described in table I of appendix A to 12 CFR part 325 or 12 
CFR 324.2, as applicable. For national banks, the term ``total capital'' 
is defined at 12 CFR 3.2(e). For savings associations, the term ``total 
capital'' is defined at 12 CFR 390, subpart Z or 12 CFR 324.2, as 
applicable.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    In determining the aggregate amount of such loans, institutions 
should: (a) Include all loans secured by the same property if any one of 
those loans exceeds the supervisory loan-to-value limits; and (b) 
include the recourse obligation of any such loan sold with recourse. 
Conversely, a loan should no longer be reported to the directors as part 
of aggregate totals when reduction in principal or senior liens, or 
additional contribution of

[[Page 1195]]

collateral or equity (e.g., improvements to the real property securing 
the loan), bring the loan-to-value ratio into compliance with 
supervisory limits.

                          Excluded Transactions

    The agencies also recognize that there are a number of lending 
situations in which other factors significantly outweigh the need to 
apply the supervisory loan-to-value limits.
    These include:
     Loans guaranteed or insured by the U.S. government or its 
agencies, provided that the amount of the guaranty or insurance is at 
least equal to the portion of the loan that exceeds the supervisory 
loan-to-value limit.
     Loans backed by the full faith and credit of a state 
government, provided that the amount of the assurance is at least equal 
to the portion of the loan that exceeds the supervisory loan-to-value 
limit.
     Loans guaranteed or insured by a state, municipal or local 
government, or an agency thereof, provided that the amount of the 
guaranty or insurance is at least equal to the portion of the loan that 
exceeds the supervisory loan-to-value limit, and provided that the 
lender has determined that the guarantor or insurer has the financial 
capacity and willingness to perform under the terms of the guaranty or 
insurance agreement.
     Loans that are to be sold promptly after origination, 
without recourse, to a financially responsible third party.
     Loans that are renewed, refinanced, or restructured without 
the advancement of new funds or an increase in the line of credit 
(except for reasonable closing costs), or loans that are renewed, 
refinanced, or restructured in connection with a workout situation, 
either with or without the advancement of new funds, where consistent 
with safe and sound banking practices and part of a clearly defined and 
well-documented program to achieve orderly liquidation of the debt, 
reduce risk of loss, or maximize recovery on the loan.
     Loans that facilitate the sale of real estate acquired by 
the lender in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously 
contracted in good faith.
     Loans for which a lien on or interest in real property is 
taken as additional collateral through an abundance of caution by the 
lender (e.g., the institution takes a blanket lien on all or 
substantially all of the assets of the borrower, and the value of the 
real property is low relative to the aggregate value of all other 
collateral).
     Loans, such as working capital loans, where the lender does 
not rely principally on real estate as security and the extension of 
credit is not used to acquire, develop, or construct permanent 
improvements on real property.
     Loans for the purpose of financing permanent improvements 
to real property, but not secured by the property, if such security 
interest is not required by prudent underwriting practice.

                Exceptions to the General Lending Policy

    Some provision should be made for the consideration of loan requests 
from creditworthy borrowers whose credit needs do not fit within the 
institution's general lending policy. An institution may provide for 
prudently underwritten exceptions to its lending policies, including 
loan-to-value limits, on a loan-by-loan basis. However, any exceptions 
from the supervisory loan-to-value limits should conform to the 
aggregate limits on such loans discussed above.
    The board of directors is responsible for establishing standards for 
the review and approval of exception loans. Each institution should 
establish an appropriate internal process for the review and approval of 
loans that do not conform to its own internal policy standards. The 
approval of any such loan should be supported by a written justification 
that clearly sets forth all of the relevant credit factors that support 
the underwriting decision. The justification and approval documents for 
such loans should be maintained as a part of the permanent loan file. 
Each institution should monitor compliance with its real estate lending 
policy and individually report exception loans of a significant size to 
its board of directors.

    Supervisory Review of Real Estate Lending Policies and Practices

    The real estate lending policies of institutions will be evaluated 
by examiners during the course of their examinations to determine if the 
policies are consistent with safe and sound lending practices, these 
guidelines, and the requirements of the regulation. In evaluating the 
adequacy of the institution's real estate lending policies and 
practices, examiners will take into consideration the following factors:
     The nature and scope of the institution's real estate 
lending activities.
     The size and financial condition of the institution.
     The quality of the institution's management and internal 
controls.
     The expertise and size of the lending and loan 
administration staff.
     Market conditions.
    Lending policy exception reports will also be reviewed by examiners 
during the course of their examinations to determine whether the 
institutions' exceptions are adequately documented and appropriate in 
light of all of the relevant credit considerations. An excessive volume 
of exceptions to an institution's real estate lending policy may signal 
a

[[Page 1196]]

weakening of its underwriting practices, or may suggest a need to revise 
the loan policy.

                               Definitions

    For the purposes of these Guidelines:
    Construction loan means an extension of credit for the purpose of 
erecting or rehabilitating buildings or other structures, including any 
infrastructure necessary for development.
    Extension of credit or loan means:
    (1) The total amount of any loan, line of credit, or other legally 
binding lending commitment with respect to real property; and
    (2) The total amount, based on the amount of consideration paid, of 
any loan, line of credit, or other legally binding lending commitment 
acquired by a lender by purchase, assignment, or otherwise.
    Improved property loan means an extension of credit secured by one 
of the following types of real property:
    (1) Farmland, ranchland or timberland committed to ongoing 
management and agricultural production;
    (2) 1- to 4-family residential property that is not owner-occupied;
    (3) Residential property containing five or more individual dwelling 
units;
    (4) Completed commercial property; or
    (5) Other income-producing property that has been completed and is 
available for occupancy and use, except income-producing owner-occupied 
1- to 4-family residential property.
    Land development loan means an extension of credit for the purpose 
of improving unimproved real property prior to the erection of 
structures. The improvement of unimproved real property may include the 
laying or placement of sewers, water pipes, utility cables, streets, and 
other infrastructure necessary for future development.
    Loan origination means the time of inception of the obligation to 
extend credit (i.e., when the last event or prerequisite, controllable 
by the lender, occurs causing the lender to become legally bound to fund 
an extension of credit).
    Loan-to-value or loan-to-value ratio means the percentage or ratio 
that is derived at the time of loan origination by dividing an extension 
of credit by the total value of the property(ies) securing or being 
improved by the extension of credit plus the amount of any readily 
marketable collateral and other acceptable collateral that secures the 
extension of credit. The total amount of all senior liens on or 
interests in such property(ies) should be included in determining the 
loan-to-value ratio. When mortgage insurance or collateral is used in 
the calculation of the loan-to-value ratio, and such credit enhancement 
is later released or replaced, the loan-to-value ratio should be 
recalculated.
    Other acceptable collateral means any collateral in which the lender 
has a perfected security interest, that has a quantifiable value, and is 
accepted by the lender in accordance with safe and sound lending 
practices. Other acceptable collateral should be appropriately 
discounted by the lender consistent with the lender's usual practices 
for making loans secured by such collateral. Other acceptable collateral 
includes, among other items, unconditional irrevocable standby letters 
of credit for the benefit of the lender.
    Owner-occupied, when used in conjunction with the term 1- to 4-
family residential property means that the owner of the underlying real 
property occupies at least one unit of the real property as a principal 
residence of the owner.
    Readily marketable collateral means insured deposits, financial 
instruments, and bullion in which the lender has a perfected interest. 
Financial instruments and bullion must be salable under ordinary 
circumstances with reasonable promptness at a fair market value 
determined by quotations based on actual transactions, on an auction or 
similarly available daily bid and ask price market. Readily marketable 
collateral should be appropriately discounted by the lender consistent 
with the lender's usual practices for making loans secured by such 
collateral.
    Value means an opinion or estimate, set forth in an appraisal or 
evaluation, whichever may be appropriate, of the market value of real 
property, prepared in accordance with the agency's appraisal regulations 
and guidance. For loans to purchase an existing property, the term 
``value'' means the lesser of the actual acquisition cost or the 
estimate of value.
    1- to 4-family residential property means property containing fewer 
than five individual dwelling units, including manufactured homes 
permanently affixed to the underlying property (when deemed to be real 
property under state law).

[76 FR 47655, Aug. 5, 2011, as amended at 78 FR 55597, Sept. 30, 2013]



Sec. 390.266  [Reserved]



Sec. 390.267  Letters of credit and other independent undertakings
to pay against documents.

    (a) General authority. A State savings association may issue and 
commit to issue letters of credit within the scope of applicable laws or 
rules of practice recognized by law. It may also issue other independent 
undertakings within the scope of such laws or rules of practice 
recognized by law, that have been

[[Page 1197]]

approved by the FDIC (approved undertaking).\1\ Under such letters of 
credit and approved undertakings, the State savings association's 
obligation to honor depends upon the presentation of specified documents 
and not upon nondocumentary conditions or resolution of questions of 
fact or law at issue between the account party and the beneficiary. A 
State savings association may also confirm or otherwise undertake to 
honor or purchase specified documents upon their presentation under 
another person's independent undertaking within the scope of such laws 
or rules.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Samples of laws or rules of practice applicable to letters of 
credit and other independent undertakings include, but are not limited 
to: the applicable version of Article 5 of the Uniform Commercial Code 
(UCC) (1962, as amended 1990) or revised Article 5 of the UCC (as 
amended 1995) (available from West Publishing Co., 1/800/328-4880); the 
Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits (International 
Chamber of Commerce (ICC) Publication No. 500) (available from ICC 
Publishing, Inc., 212/206-1150; the United Nations Convention on 
Independent Guarantees and Standby Letters of Credit (adopted by the 
U.N. General Assembly in 1995 and signed by the U.S. in 1997) (available 
from the U.N. Commission on International Trade Law, 212/963-5353); and 
the Uniform Rules for Bank-to-Bank Reimbursements Under Documentary 
Credits (ICC Publication No. 525) (available from ICC Publishing, Inc., 
212/206-1150).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Safety and soundness considerations--(1) Terms. As a matter of 
safe and sound banking practice, State savings associations that issue 
letters of credit or approved undertakings should not be exposed to 
undue risk. At a minimum, State savings associations should consider the 
following:
    (i) The independent character of the letter of credit or approved 
undertaking should be apparent from its terms (such as terms that 
subject it to laws or rules providing for its independent character);
    (ii) The letter of credit or approved undertaking should be limited 
in amount;
    (iii) The letter of credit or approved undertaking should:
    (A) Be limited in duration; or
    (B) Permit the State savings association to terminate the letter of 
credit or approved undertaking, either on a periodic basis (consistent 
with the State savings association's ability to make any necessary 
credit assessments) or at will upon either notice or payment to the 
beneficiary; or
    (C) Entitle the State savings association to cash collateral from 
the account party on demand (with a right to accelerate the customer's 
obligations, as appropriate); and
    (iv) The State savings association either should be fully 
collateralized or have a post-honor right of reimbursement from its 
customer or from another issuer of a letter of credit or an independent 
undertaking. Alternatively, if the State savings association's 
undertaking is to purchase documents of title, securities, or other 
valuable documents, it should obtain a first priority right to realize 
on the documents if the State savings association is not otherwise to be 
reimbursed.
    (2) Additional considerations in special circumstances. Certain 
letters of credit and approved undertakings require particular 
protections against credit, operational, and market risk:
    (i) In the event that the undertaking is to honor by delivery of an 
item of value other than money, the State savings association should 
ensure that market fluctuations that affect the value of the item will 
not cause the State savings association to assume undue market risk;
    (ii) In the event that the undertaking provides for automatic 
renewal, the terms for renewal should allow the State savings 
association to make any necessary credit assessment prior to renewal;
    (iii) In the event that a State savings association issues an 
undertaking for its own account, the underlying transaction for which it 
is issued must be within the State savings association's authority and 
comply with any safety and soundness requirements applicable to that 
transaction.
    (3) Operational expertise. The State savings association should 
possess operational expertise that is commensurate with the 
sophistication of its letter of credit or independent undertaking 
activities.
    (4) Documentation. The State savings association must accurately 
reflect its

[[Page 1198]]

letters of credit or approved undertakings in its records, including any 
acceptance or deferred payment or other absolute obligation arising out 
of its contingent undertaking.



Sec. 390.268  Investment in State housing corporations.

    (a) Any State savings association to the extent it has legal 
authority to do so, may make investments in, commitments to invest in, 
loans to, or commitments to lend to any state housing corporation; 
provided, that such obligations or loans are secured directly, or 
indirectly through a fiduciary, by a first lien on improved real estate 
which is insured under the National Housing Act, as amended, and that in 
the event of default, the holder of such obligations or loans has the 
right directly, or indirectly through a fiduciary, to subject to the 
satisfaction of such obligations or loans the real estate described in 
the first lien, or the insurance proceeds.
    (b) Any State savings association that is adequately capitalized 
may, to the extent it has legal authority to do so, invest in 
obligations (including loans) of, or issued by, any state housing 
corporation incorporated in the state in which such State savings 
association has its home or a branch office; provided (except with 
respect to loans), that:
    (1) The obligations are rated in one of the four highest grades as 
shown by the most recently published rating made of such obligations by 
a nationally recognized rating service; or
    (2) The obligations, if not rated, are approved by the FDIC. The 
aggregate outstanding direct investment in obligations under paragraph 
(b) of this section shall not exceed the amount of the State savings 
association's total capital.
    (c) Each state housing corporation in which a State savings 
association invests under the authority of paragraph (b) of this section 
shall agree, before accepting any such investment (including any loan or 
loan commitment), to make available at any time to the FDIC such 
information as the FDIC may consider to be necessary to ensure that 
investments are properly made under this section.



Sec. 390.269  Prohibition on loan procurement fees.

    If you are a director, officer, or other natural person having the 
power to direct the management or policies of a State savings 
association, you must not receive, directly or indirectly, any 
commission, fee, or other compensation in connection with the 
procurement of any loan made by the State savings association or a 
subsidiary of the State savings association.



Sec. 390.270  Asset classification.

    (a)(1) Each State savings association must evaluate and classify its 
assets on a regular basis in a manner consistent with, or reconcilable 
to, the asset classification system used by the FDIC.
    (2) In connection with the examination of a State savings 
association or its affiliates, the FDIC examiners may identify problem 
assets and classify them, if appropriate. The association must recognize 
such examiner classifications in its subsequent reports to the FDIC.
    (b) Based on the evaluation and classification of its assets, each 
State savings association shall establish adequate valuation allowances 
or charge-offs, as appropriate, consistent with generally accepted 
accounting principles and the practices of the federal banking agencies.



Sec. 390.271  Records for lending transactions.

    In establishing and maintaining its records pursuant to 
Sec. 390.350, each State savings association should establish and 
maintain loan documentation practices that:
    (a) Ensure that the institution can make an informed lending 
decision and can assess risk on an ongoing basis;
    (b) Identify the purpose and all sources of repayment for each loan, 
and assess the ability of the borrower(s) and any guarantor(s) to repay 
the indebtedness in a timely manner;
    (c) Ensure that any claims against a borrower, guarantor, security 
holders, and collateral are legally enforceable;
    (d) Demonstrate appropriate administration and monitoring of its 
loans; and
    (e) Take into account the size and complexity of its loans.

[[Page 1199]]



Sec. 390.272  Re-evaluation of real estate owned.

    A State savings association shall appraise each parcel of real 
estate owned at the earlier of in-substance foreclosure or at the time 
of the State savings association's acquisition of such property, and at 
such times thereafter as dictated by prudent management policy; such 
appraisals shall be consistent with the requirements of subpart X of 
this part. The appropriate regional director or his or her designee may 
require subsequent appraisals if, in his or her discretion, such 
subsequent appraisal is necessary under the particular circumstances. 
The foregoing requirement shall not apply to any parcel of real estate 
that is sold and reacquired less than 12 months subsequent to the most 
recent appraisal made pursuant to this subpart. A dated, signed copy of 
each report of appraisal made pursuant to any provisions of this subpart 
shall be retained in the State savings association's records.



   Subpart Q_Definitions for Regulations Affecting All State Savings 
                              Associations



Sec. 390.280  When do the definitions in this subpart apply?

    The definitions in this subpart apply throughout parts 390 and 391, 
unless another definition is specifically provided.



Sec. 390.281  Account.

    The term account means any savings account, demand account, 
certificate account, tax and loan account, note account, United States 
Treasury general account or United States Treasury time deposit-open 
account, whether in the form of a deposit or a share, held by an 
accountholder in a State savings association.



Sec. 390.282  Accountholder.

    The term accountholder means the holder of an account or accounts in 
a State savings association insured by the Deposit Insurance Fund. The 
term does not include the holder of any subordinated debt security or 
any mortgage-backed bond issued by the State savings association.



Sec. 390.283  Affiliate.

    The term affiliate of a State savings association, unless otherwise 
defined, means any corporation, business trust, association, or other 
similar organization:
    (a) Of which a State savings association, directly or indirectly, 
owns or controls either a majority of the voting shares or more than 50 
per centum of the number of shares voted for the election of its 
directors, trustees, or other persons exercising similar functions at 
the preceding election, or controls in any manner the election of a 
majority of its directors, trustees, or other persons exercising similar 
functions; or
    (b) Of which control is held, directly or indirectly through stock 
ownership or in any other manner, by the shareholders of a State savings 
association who own or control either a majority of the shares of such 
State savings association or more than 50 per centum of the number of 
shares voted for the election of directors of such State savings 
association at the preceding election, or by trustees for the benefit of 
the shareholders of any such State savings association; or
    (c) Of which a majority of its directors, trustees, or other persons 
exercising similar functions are directors of any one State savings 
association.



Sec. 390.284  Affiliated person.

    The term affiliated person of a State savings association means the 
following:
    (a) A director, officer, or controlling person of such association;
    (b) A spouse of a director, officer, or controlling person of such 
association;
    (c) A member of the immediate family of a director, officer, or 
controlling person of such association, who has the same home as such 
person or who is a director or officer of any subsidiary of such 
association or of any holding company affiliate of such association;
    (d) Any corporation or organization (other than the State savings 
association or a corporation or organization through which the State 
savings association operates) of which a director,

[[Page 1200]]

officer or the controlling person of such association:
    (1) Is chief executive officer, chief financial officer, or a person 
performing similar functions;
    (2) Is a general partner;
    (3) Is a limited partner who, directly or indirectly either alone or 
with his or her spouse and the members of his or her immediate family 
who are also affiliated persons of the association, owns an interest of 
10 percent or more in the partnership (based on the value of his or her 
contribution) or who, directly or indirectly with other directors, 
officers, and controlling persons of such association and their spouses 
and their immediate family members who are also affiliated persons of 
the association, owns an interest of 25 percent or more in the 
partnership; or
    (4) Directly or indirectly either alone or with his or her spouse 
and the members of his or her immediate family who are also affiliated 
persons of the association, owns or controls 10 percent or more of any 
class of equity securities or owns or controls, with other directors, 
officers, and controlling persons of such association and their spouses 
and their immediate family members who are also affiliated persons of 
the association, 25 percent or more of any class of equity securities; 
and
    (5) Any trust or other estate in which a director, officer, or 
controlling person of such association or the spouse of such person has 
a substantial beneficial interest or as to which such person or his or 
her spouse serves as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity.



Sec. 390.285  Audit period.

    The audit period of a State savings association means the twelve 
month period (or other period in the case of a change in audit period) 
covered by the annual audit conducted to satisfy Sec. 390.350.



Sec. 390.286  Certificate account.

    The term certificate account means a savings account evidenced by a 
certificate that must be held for a fixed or minimum term.



Sec. 390.287  Consumer credit.

    The term consumer credit means credit extended to a natural person 
for personal, family, or household purposes, including loans secured by 
liens on real estate and chattel liens secured by mobile homes and 
leases of personal property to consumers that may be considered the 
functional equivalent of loans on personal security: Provided, the State 
savings association relies substantially upon other factors, such as the 
general credit standing of the borrower, guaranties, or security other 
than the real estate or mobile home, as the primary security for the 
loan. Appropriate evidence to demonstrate justification for such 
reliance should be retained in a State savings association's files. 
Among the types of credit included within this term are consumer loans; 
educational loans; unsecured loans for real property alteration, repair 
or improvement, or for the equipping of real property; loans in the 
nature of overdraft protection; and credit extended in connection with 
credit cards.



Sec. 390.288  Controlling person.

    The term controlling person of a State savings association means any 
person or entity which, either directly or indirectly, or acting in 
concert with one or more other persons or entities, owns, controls, or 
holds with power to vote, or holds proxies representing, ten percent or 
more of the voting shares or rights of such State savings association; 
or controls in any manner the election or appointment of a majority of 
the directors of such State savings association. However, a director of 
a State savings association will not be deemed to be a controlling 
person of such State savings association based upon his or her voting, 
or acting in concert with other directors in voting, proxies:
    (a) Obtained in connection with an annual solicitation of proxies, 
or
    (b) Obtained from savings account holders and borrowers if such 
proxies are voted as directed by a majority vote of the entire board of 
directors of such association, or of a committee of such directors if 
such committee's composition and authority are controlled by a majority 
vote of the entire

[[Page 1201]]

board and if its authority is revocable by such a majority.



Sec. 390.289  Corporation.

    The terms Corporation and FDIC mean the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation.



Sec. 390.290  Demand accounts.

    The term demand accounts means non-interest-bearing demand deposits 
that are subject to check or to withdrawal or transfer on negotiable or 
transferable order to the State savings association and that are 
permitted to be issued by statute, regulation, or otherwise and are 
payable on demand.



Sec. 390.291  Director.

    The term director means any director, trustee, or other person 
performing similar functions with respect to any organization whether 
incorporated or unincorporated. Such term does not include an advisory 
director, honorary director, director emeritus, or similar person, 
unless the person is otherwise performing functions similar to those of 
a director.



Sec. 390.292  Financial institution.

    The term financial institution has the same meaning as the term 
depository institution set forth in 12 U.S.C. 1813(c)(1).



Sec. 390.293  Immediate family.

    The term immediate family of any natural person means the following 
(whether by the full or half blood or by adoption):
    (a) Such person's spouse, father, mother, children, brothers, 
sisters, and grandchildren;
    (b) The father, mother, brothers, and sisters of such person's 
spouse; and
    (c) The spouse of a child, brother, or sister of such person.



Sec. 390.294  Land loan.

    The term land loan means a loan:
    (a) Secured by real estate upon which all facilities and 
improvements have been completely installed, as required by local 
regulations and practices, so that it is entirely prepared for the 
erection of structures;
    (b) To finance the purchase of land and the accomplishment of all 
improvements required to convert it to developed building lots; or
    (c) Secured by land upon which there is no structure.



Sec. 390.295  Low-rent housing.

    The term low-rent housing means real estate which is, or which is 
being constructed, remodeled, rehabilitated, modernized, or renovated to 
be, the subject of an annual contributions contract for low-rent housing 
under the provisions of the United States Housing Act of 1937, as 
amended.



Sec. 390.296  Money Market Deposit Accounts.

    (a) Money Market Deposit Accounts (MMDAs) offered by State savings 
associations in accordance with applicable state law are savings 
accounts on which interest may be paid if issued subject to the 
following limitations:
    (1) The State savings association shall reserve the right to require 
at least seven days' notice prior to withdrawal or transfer of any funds 
in the account; and
    (2)(i) The depositor is authorized by the State savings association 
to make no more than six transfers per calendar month or statement cycle 
(or similar period) of at least four weeks by means of preauthorized, 
automatic, telephonic, or data transmission agreement, order, or 
instruction to another account of the depositor at the same State 
savings association to the State savings association itself, or to a 
third party.
    (ii) State savings associations may permit holders of MMDAs to make 
unlimited transfers for the purpose of repaying loans (except overdraft 
loans on the depositor's demand account) and associated expenses at the 
same State savings association (as originator or servicer), to make 
unlimited transfers of funds from this account to another account of the 
same depositor at the same State savings association or to make 
unlimited payments directly to the depositor from the account when such 
transfers or payments are made by mail, messenger, automated teller 
machine, or in person, or when such payments are made by telephone (via 
check mailed to the depositor).

[[Page 1202]]

    (3) In order to ensure that no more than the number of transfers 
specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section are made, a State 
savings association must either:
    (i) Prevent transfers of funds in excess of the limitations; or
    (ii) Adopt procedures to monitor those transfers on an after-the-
fact basis and contact customers who exceed the limits on more than an 
occasional basis. For customers who continue to violate those limits 
after being contacted by the depository State savings association the 
depository State savings association must either place funds in another 
account that the depositor is eligible to maintain or take away the 
account's transfer and draft capacities.
    (iii) Insured State savings associations at their option, may use on 
a consistent basis either the date on a check or the date it is paid in 
determining whether the transfer limitations within the specified 
interval are exceeded.
    (b) State savings associations may offer MMDAs to any depositor not 
inconsistent with applicable state law.



Sec. 390.297  Negotiable Order of Withdrawal Accounts.

    (a) Negotiable Order of Withdrawal (NOW) accounts are savings 
accounts authorized by 12 U.S.C. 1832 on which the State savings 
association reserves the right to require at least seven days' notice 
prior to withdrawal or transfer of any funds in the account.
    (b) For purposes of 12 U.S.C. 1832:
    (1) An organization shall be deemed ``operated primarily for 
religious, philanthropic, charitable, educational, or other similar 
purposes and * * * not * * * for profit'' if it is described in sections 
501(c)(3) through (13), 501(c)(19), or 528 of the Internal Revenue Code; 
and
    (2) The funds of a sole proprietorship or unincorporated business 
owned by a husband and wife shall be deemed beneficially owned by ``one 
or more individuals.''



Sec. 390.298  Nonresidential construction loan.

    The term nonresidential construction loan means a loan for 
construction of other than one or more dwelling units.



Sec. 390.299  Nonwithdrawable account.

    The term nonwithdrawable account means an account which by the terms 
of the contract of the accountholder with the State savings association 
or by provisions of state law cannot be paid to the accountholder until 
all liabilities, including other classes of share liability of the State 
savings association have been fully liquidated and paid upon the winding 
up of the State savings association is referred to as a nonwithdrawable 
account.



Sec. 390.300  Note account.

    The term note account means a note, subject to the right of 
immediate call, evidencing funds held by depositories electing the note 
option under applicable United States Treasury Department regulations. 
Note accounts are not savings accounts or savings deposits.



Sec. 390.301  [Reserved]



Sec. 390.302  Officer.

    The term Officer means the president, any vice-president (but not an 
assistant vice-president, second vice-president, or other vice president 
having authority similar to an assistant or second vice-president), the 
secretary, the treasurer, the comptroller, and any other person 
performing similar functions with respect to any organization whether 
incorporated or unincorporated. The term officer also includes the 
chairman of the board of directors if the chairman is authorized by the 
charter or by-laws of the organization to participate in its operating 
management or if the chairman in fact participates in such management.



Sec. 390.303  Parent company; subsidiary.

    The term parent company means any company which directly or 
indirectly controls any other company or companies. The term subsidiary 
means any company which is owned or controlled directly or indirectly by 
a person, and includes a subsidiary owned in whole or in part by a State 
savings association, or a subsidiary of that subsidiary.



Sec. 390.304  Political subdivision.

    The term political subdivision includes any subdivision of a public 
unit, any

[[Page 1203]]

principal department of such public unit:
    (a) The creation of which subdivision or department has been 
expressly authorized by state statute,
    (b) To which some functions of government have been delegated by 
state statute, and
    (c) To which funds have been allocated by statute or ordinance for 
its exclusive use and control. It also includes drainage, irrigation, 
navigation, improvement, levee, sanitary, school or power districts and 
bridge or port authorities and other special districts created by state 
statute or compacts between the states. Excluded from the term are 
subordinate or nonautonomous divisions, agencies or boards within 
principal departments.



Sec. 390.305  Principal office.

    The term principal office means the home office of a State savings 
association established as such in conformity with the laws under which 
the State savings association is organized.



Sec. 390.306  Public unit.

    The term public unit means the United States, any state of the 
United States, the District of Columbia, any territory of the United 
States, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, any county, any municipality or 
any political subdivision thereof.



Sec. 390.307  Savings account.

    The term savings account means any withdrawable account, except a 
demand account as defined in Sec. 390.290, a tax and loan account, a 
note account, a United States Treasury general account, or a United 
States Treasury time deposit-open account.



Sec. 390.308  State savings association.

    The term State savings association means a State savings association 
as defined in section 3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, the 
deposits of which are insured by the Corporation. It includes a building 
and loan, savings and loan, or homestead association, or a cooperative 
bank (other than a cooperative bank which is a State bank as defined in 
section 3(a)(2) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) organized and 
operating according to the laws of the State in which it is chartered or 
organized, or a corporation (other than a bank as defined in section 
3(a)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act) that the Board of 
Directors of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation determine to be 
operating substantially in the same manner as a State savings 
association.



Sec. 390.309  Security.

    The term security means any non-withdrawable account, note, stock, 
treasury stock, bond, debenture, evidence of indebtedness, certificate 
of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement, 
collateral-trust certificate, preorganization certificate or 
subscription, transferable share, investment contract, voting-trust 
certificate, or, in general, any interest or instrument commonly known 
as a security, or any certificate of interest or participation in, 
temporary or interim certificate for, receipt for, guarantee of, or 
warrant or right to subscribe to or purchase, any of the foregoing, 
except that a security shall not include an account or deposit insured 
by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.



Sec. 390.310  Service corporation.

    The term service corporation means any corporation, the majority of 
the capital stock of which is owned by one or more savings associations 
and which engages, directly or indirectly, in any activities similar to 
activities which may be engaged in by a service corporation in which a 
Federal savings association may invest.



Sec. 390.311  State.

    The term State means a State, the District of Columbia, Guam, Puerto 
Rico, and the Virgin Islands of the United States.



Sec. 390.312  Subordinated debt security.

    The term subordinated debt security means any unsecured note, 
debenture, or other debt security issued by a State savings association 
and subordinated on liquidation to all claims having the same priority 
as account holders or any higher priority.

[[Page 1204]]



Sec. 390.313  Tax and loan account.

    The term tax and loan account means an account, the balance of which 
is subject to the right of immediate withdrawal, established for receipt 
of payments of Federal taxes and certain United States obligations. Such 
accounts are not savings accounts or savings deposits.



Sec. 390.314  United States Treasury General Account.

    The term United States Treasury General Account means an account 
maintained in the name of the United States Treasury the balance of 
which is subject to the right of immediate withdrawal, except in the 
case of the closure of the member, and in which a zero balance may be 
maintained. Such accounts are not savings accounts or savings deposits.



Sec. 390.315  United States Treasury Time Deposit Open Account.

    The term United States Treasury Time Deposit Open Account means a 
non-interest-bearing account maintained in the name of the United States 
Treasury which may not be withdrawn prior to the expiration of 30 days' 
written notice from the United States Treasury, or such other period of 
notice as the Treasury may require. Such accounts are not savings 
accounts or savings deposits.



Sec. 390.316  With recourse.

    (a) The term with recourse means, in connection with the sale of a 
loan or a participation interest in a loan, an agreement or arrangement 
under which the purchaser is to be entitled to receive from the seller a 
sum of money or thing of value, whether tangible or intangible 
(including any substitution), upon default in payment of any loan 
involved or any part thereof or to withhold or to have withheld from the 
seller a sum of money or anything of value by way of security against 
default. The recourse liability resulting from a sale with recourse 
shall be the total book value of any loan sold with recourse less:
    (1) The amount of any insurance or guarantee against loss in the 
event of default provided by a third party,
    (2) The amount of any loss to be borne by the purchaser in the event 
of default, and
    (3) The amount of any loss resulting from a recourse obligation 
entered on the books and records of the State savings association.
    (b) The term with recourse does not include loans or interests 
therein where the agreement of sale provides for the State savings 
association directly or indirectly
    (1) To hold or retain a subordinate interest in a specified 
percentage of the loans or interests; or
    (2) To guarantee against loss up to a specified percentage of the 
loans or interests, which specified percentage shall not exceed ten 
percent of the outstanding balance of the loans or interests at the time 
of sale: Provided, that the State savings association designates 
adequate reserves for the subordinate interest or guarantee.
    (c) This definition does not apply for purposes of determining the 
capital adequacy requirements under subpart Z.



                Subpart R_Regulatory Reporting Standards



Sec. 390.320  Regulatory reporting requirements.

    (a) Authority and scope. This subpart is issued by the FDIC pursuant 
to 12 U.S.C. sections 1831m; 1831n(a)(2); 1831p-1;1464(v)(1). It applies 
to all State savings associations regulated by the FDIC.
    (b) Records and reports--general--(1) Records. Each State savings 
association and its affiliates shall maintain accurate and complete 
records of all business transactions. Such records shall support and be 
readily reconcilable to any regulatory reports submitted to the FDIC and 
financial reports prepared in accordance with GAAP. The records shall be 
maintained in the United States and be readily accessible for 
examination and other supervisory purposes within 5 business days upon 
request by the FDIC, at a location acceptable to the FDIC.
    (2) Reports. For purposes of examination by and regulatory reports 
to the FDIC and compliance with this section, all State savings 
associations shall use

[[Page 1205]]

such forms and follow such regulatory reporting requirements as the FDIC 
may require by regulation or otherwise.



Sec. 390.321  Regulatory reports.

    (a) Definition and scope. This section applies to all regulatory 
reports, as defined herein. A regulatory report is any report that the 
FDIC prepares, or is submitted to, or is used by the FDIC, to determine 
compliance with its rules and regulations, and to evaluate the safe and 
sound condition and operation of State savings associations. Regulatory 
reports are regulatory documents, not accounting documents.
    (b) Regulatory reporting requirements--(1) General. The instructions 
to regulatory reports are referred to as ``regulatory reporting 
requirements.'' Regulatory reporting requirements include, but are not 
limited to, the accounting instructions, guidance contained in FDIC 
regulations, financial institution letters, manuals, bulletins, 
examination handbooks, and safe and sound practices. Regulatory 
reporting requirements are not limited to the minimum requirements under 
generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) because of the special 
supervisory, regulatory, and economic policy needs served by such 
reports. Regulatory reporting by State savings associations that 
purports to comply with GAAP shall incorporate the GAAP that best 
reflects the underlying economic substance of the transaction at issue. 
Regulatory reporting requirements shall, at a minimum:
    (i) Incorporate GAAP whenever GAAP is the referenced accounting 
instruction for regulatory reports to the Federal banking agencies;
    (ii) Incorporate safe and sound practices contained in FDIC 
regulations, financial institution letters, bulletins, examination 
handbooks, manuals, and instructions to regulatory reports; and
    (iii) Incorporate additional safety and soundness requirements more 
stringent than GAAP, as the FDIC may prescribe.
    (2) Exceptions. Regulatory reporting requirements that are not 
consistent with GAAP, if any, are not required to be reflected in the 
audited financial statements, including financial statements contained 
in securities filings submitted to the FDIC pursuant to the Securities 
Exchange Act of 1934 or subpart W and 12 CFR part 192.
    (3) Compliance. When the FDIC determines that a State savings 
association's regulatory reports did not conform to regulatory reporting 
requirements in previous reporting periods, the association shall 
correct its regulatory reports in accordance with the directions of the 
FDIC.

[76 FR 47655, Aug. 5, 2011, as amended at 79 FR 63502, Oct. 24, 2014]



Sec. 390.322  Audit of State savings associations.

    (a) General. The FDIC may require, at any time, an independent audit 
of the financial statements of, or the application of procedures agreed 
upon by the FDIC to a State savings association, by qualified 
independent public accountants when needed for any safety and soundness 
reason identified by the FDIC.
    (b) Audits required for safety and soundness purposes. The FDIC 
requires an independent audit for safety and soundness purposes:
    (1) If a State savings association has received a composite rating 
of 3, 4 or 5, as defined at Sec. 390.101(c).
    (2) [Reserved]
    (c) Procedures. (1) When the FDIC requires an independent audit 
because such an audit is needed for safety and soundness purposes, the 
FDIC shall determine whether the audit was conducted and filed in a 
manner satisfactory to the FDIC.
    (2) The FDIC may waive the independent audit requirement described 
at paragraph (b)(1) of this section, if the FDIC determines that an 
audit would not provide further information on safety and soundness 
issues relevant to the examination rating.
    (3) When the FDIC requires the application of procedures agreed upon 
by the FDIC for safety and soundness purposes, the FDIC shall identify 
the procedures to be performed. The FDIC shall also determine whether 
the agreed upon procedures were conducted and filed in a manner 
satisfactory to the FDIC.

[[Page 1206]]

    (d) Qualifications for independent public accountants. The audit 
shall be conducted by an independent public accountant who:
    (1) Is registered or licensed to practice as a public accountant, 
and is in good standing, under the laws of the state or other political 
subdivision of the United States in which the State savings 
association's or holding company's principal office is located;
    (2) Agrees in the engagement letter to provide the FDIC with access 
to and copies of any work papers, policies, and procedures relating to 
the services performed;
    (3)(i) Is in compliance with the American Institute of Certified 
Public Accountants' (AICPA) Code of Professional Conduct; and
    (ii) Meets the independence requirements and interpretations of the 
Securities and Exchange Commission and its staff; and
    (4) Has received, or is enrolled in, a peer review program that 
meets guidelines acceptable to the FDIC.
    (e) Voluntary audits. When a State savings association obtains an 
independent audit voluntarily, it must be performed by an independent 
public accountant who satisfies the requirements of paragraphs (d)(1), 
(2), and (3)(i) of this section.



             Subpart S_State Savings Associations_Operations



Sec. 390.330  Chartering documents.

    (a) Submission for approval. Any de novo State savings association 
prior to commencing operations shall file its charter and bylaws with 
the FDIC for approval, together with a certification that such charter 
and bylaws are permissible under all applicable laws, rules and 
regulations.
    (b) Availability of chartering documents. Each State savings 
association shall cause a true copy of its charter and bylaws and all 
amendments thereto to be available to accountholders at all times in 
each office of the State savings association, and shall upon request 
deliver to any accountholders a copy of such charter and bylaws or 
amendments thereto.



Sec. 390.331  Securities: Statement of non-insurance.

    Every security issued by a State savings association must include in 
its provisions a clear statement that the security is not insured by the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.



Sec. 390.332  Merger, consolidation, purchase or sale of assets,
or assumption of liabilities.

    (a) No State savings association may, without application to and 
approval by the FDIC:
    (1) Combine with any insured depository institution, if the 
acquiring or resulting institution is to be a State savings association; 
or
    (2) Assume liability to pay any deposit made in, any insured 
depository institution.
    (b)(1) No State savings association may, without notifying the FDIC, 
as provided in paragraph (h)(1) of this section:
    (i) Combine with another insured depository institution where a 
State savings association is not the resulting institution; or
    (ii) In the case of a State savings association that meets the 
conditions for expedited treatment under Sec. 390.101, convert, directly 
or indirectly, to a national or state bank.
    (2) A State savings association that does not meet the conditions 
for expedited treatment under Sec. 390.101 may not, directly or 
indirectly, convert to a national or state bank without prior 
application to and approval of FDIC, as provided in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) 
of this section.
    (c) No State savings association may make any transfer (excluding 
transfers subject to paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section) without 
notice or application to the FDIC, as provided in paragraph (h)(2) of 
this section. For purposes of this paragraph, the term ``transfer'' 
means purchases or sales of assets or liabilities in bulk not made in 
the ordinary course of business including, but not limited to, transfers 
of assets or savings account liabilities, purchases of assets, and 
assumptions of deposit accounts or other liabilities, and combinations 
with a depository institution other than an insured depository 
institution.

[[Page 1207]]

    (d)(1) In determining whether to confer approval for a transaction 
under paragraphs (a), (b)(2), or (c) of this section, the FDIC shall 
take into account the following:
    (i) The capital level of any resulting State savings association;
    (ii) The financial and managerial resources of the constituent 
institutions;
    (iii) The future prospects of the constituent institutions;
    (iv) The convenience and needs of the communities to be served;
    (v) The conformity of the transaction to applicable law, regulation, 
and supervisory policies;
    (vi) Factors relating to the fairness of and disclosure concerning 
the transaction, including, but not limited to:
    (A) Equitable treatment. The transaction should be equitable to all 
concerned--savings account holders, borrowers, creditors and 
stockholders (if any) of each State savings association--giving proper 
recognition of and protection to their respective legal rights and 
interests. The transaction will be closely reviewed for fairness where 
the transaction does not appear to be the result of arms' length 
bargaining or, in the case of a stock State savings association, where 
controlling stockholders are receiving different consideration from 
other stockholders. No finder's or similar fee should be paid to any 
officer, director, or controlling person of a State savings association 
which is a party to the transaction.
    (B) Full disclosure. The filing should make full disclosure of all 
written or oral agreements or understandings by which any person or 
company will receive, directly or indirectly, any money, property, 
service, release of pledges made, or other thing of value, whether 
tangible or intangible, in connection with the transaction.
    (C) Compensation to officers. Compensation, including deferred 
compensation, to officers, directors and controlling persons of the 
disappearing State savings association by the resulting institution or 
an affiliate thereof should not be in excess of a reasonable amount, and 
should be commensurate with their duties and responsibilities. The 
filing should fully justify the compensation to be paid to such persons. 
The transaction will be particularly scrutinized where any of such 
persons is to receive a material increase in compensation above that 
paid by the disappearing State savings association prior to the 
commencement of negotiations regarding the proposed transaction. An 
increase in compensation in excess of the greater of 15% or $10,000 
gives rise to presumptions of unreasonableness and sale of control. In 
the case of such an increase, evidence sufficient to rebut such 
presumptions should be submitted.
    (D) Advisory boards. Advisory board members should be elected for a 
term not exceeding one year. No advisory board fees should be paid to 
salaried officers or employees of the resulting State savings 
association. The filing should describe and justify the duties and 
responsibilities and any compensation paid to any advisory board of the 
resulting State savings association that consists of officers, directors 
or controlling persons of the disappearing institution, particularly if 
the disappearing institution experienced significant supervisory 
problems prior to the transaction. No advisory board fees should exceed 
the director fees paid by the resulting State savings association. 
Advisory board fees that are in excess of 115 percent of the director 
fees paid by the disappearing State savings association prior to 
commencement of negotiations regarding the transaction give rise to 
presumptions of unreasonableness and sale of control unless sufficient 
evidence to rebut such presumptions is submitted. Rebuttal evidence is 
not required if:
    (1) The advisory board fees do not exceed the fee that advisory 
board members of the resulting institution receive for each monthly 
meeting attended or $150, whichever is greater; or
    (2) The advisory board fees do not exceed $100 per meeting attended 
for disappearing State savings associations with assets greater than 
$10,000,000 or $50 per meeting attended for disappearing State savings 
associations with assets of $10,000,000 or less, based on a schedule of 
12 meetings per year.
    (E) The accounting and tax treatment of the transaction; and

[[Page 1208]]

    (F) Fees paid and professional services rendered in connection with 
the transaction.
    (2) In conferring approval of a transaction under paragraph (a) of 
this section, the FDIC also will consider the competitive impact of the 
transaction, including whether:
    (i) The transaction would result in a monopoly, or would be in 
furtherance of any monopoly or conspiracy to monopolize or to attempt to 
monopolize the State savings association business in any part of the 
United States; or
    (ii) The effect of the transaction on any section of the country may 
be substantially to lessen competition, or tend to create a monopoly, or 
in any other manner would be in restraint of trade, unless the FDIC 
finds that the anticompetitive effects of the proposed transaction are 
clearly outweighed in the public interest by the probable effect of the 
transaction in meeting the convenience and needs of the communities to 
be served.
    (3) Applications and notices filed under this section shall be upon 
forms prescribed by the FDIC.
    (4) Applications filed under paragraph (a) of this section must be 
processed in accordance with the time frames set forth in Secs. 390.127 
through 390.135, provided that the period for review may be extended 
only if the FDIC determines that the applicant has failed to furnish all 
requested information or that the information submitted is substantially 
inaccurate, in which case the review period may be extended for up to 30 
days.
    (e)(1) The following procedures apply to applications described in 
paragraph (a) of this section, unless the FDIC finds that it must act 
immediately to prevent the probable default of one of the depository 
institutions involved:
    (i) The applicant must publish a public notice of the application in 
accordance with the procedures in Secs. 390.111 through 390.115. In 
addition to the initial publication, the applicant must also publish on 
a weekly basis during the public comment period.
    (ii) Commenters may submit comments on an application in accordance 
with the procedures in Secs. 390.116 through 390.120. The public comment 
period is 30 calendar days after the date of publication of the initial 
public notice. However, if the FDIC has advised the Attorney General 
that an emergency exists requiring expeditious action, the public 
comment period is 10 calendar days after the date of publication of the 
initial public notice.
    (iii) The FDIC may arrange a meeting in accordance with the 
procedures in Secs. 390.121 through 390.125.
    (iv) The FDIC will request the Attorney General, the Office of the 
Comptroller of the Currency, and the Board of Governors of the Federal 
Reserve System to provide reports on the competitive impacts involved in 
the transaction.
    (v) The FDIC will immediately notify the Attorney General of the 
approval of the transaction. The applicant may not consummate the 
transaction before the date established under 12 U.S.C. 1828(c)(6).
    (2) For applications described in Sec. 390.332, certain State 
savings associations described below must provide affected 
accountholders with a notice of a proposed account transfer and an 
option of retaining the account in the transferring State savings 
association. The notice must allow affected accountholders at least 30 
days to consider whether to retain their accounts in the transferring 
State savings association. The following State savings associations must 
provide the notices:
    (i) A State savings association transferring account liabilities to 
an institution the accounts of which are not insured by the Deposit 
Insurance Fund or the National Credit Union Share Insurance Fund; and
    (ii) Any mutual State savings association transferring account 
liabilities to a stock form depository institution.
    (f) Automatic approvals by the FDIC. Applications filed pursuant to 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be deemed to be approved 
automatically by the FDIC 30 calendar days after the FDIC sends written 
notice to the applicant that the application is complete, unless:
    (1) The acquiring State savings association does not meet the 
criteria for expedited treatment under Sec. 390.101;
    (2) The FDIC recommends the imposition of non-standard conditions 
prior to approving the application;

[[Page 1209]]

    (3) The FDIC suspends the applicable processing time frames under 
Sec. 390.125;
    (4) The FDIC raises objections to the transaction;
    (5) The resulting State savings association would be one of the 3 
largest depository institutions competing in the relevant geographic 
area where before the transaction there were 5 or fewer depository 
institutions, the resulting State savings association would have 25 
percent or more of the total deposits held by depository institutions in 
the relevant geographic area, and the share of total deposits would have 
increased by 5 percent or more;
    (6) The resulting State savings association would be one of the 2 
largest depository institutions competing in the relevant geographic 
area where before the transaction there were 6 to 11 depository 
institutions the resulting State savings association would have 30 
percent or more of the total deposits held by depositing institutions in 
the relevant geographic area, and the share of total deposits would have 
increased by 10 percent or more;
    (7) The resulting State savings association would be one of the 2 
largest depository institutions competing in the relevant geographic 
area where before the transaction there were 12 or more depository 
institutions, the resulting State savings association would have 35 
percent or more of the total deposits held by the depository 
institutions in the relevant geographic area, and the share of total 
deposits would have increased by 15 percent or more;
    (8) The Herfindahl-Hirschman Index (HHI) in the relevant geographic 
area was more than 1800 before the transaction, and the increase in the 
HHI used by the transaction would be 50 or more;
    (9) In a transaction involving potential competition, the FDIC 
determines that the acquiring State savings association is one of three 
or fewer potential entrants into the relevant geographic area;
    (10) The acquiring State savings association has assets of $1 
billion or more and proposes to acquire assets of $1 billion or more;
    (11) The State savings association that will be the resulting State 
savings association in the transaction has a composite Community 
Reinvestment Act rating of less than satisfactory, or is otherwise 
seriously deficient with respect to the FDIC's nondiscrimination 
regulations and the deficiencies have not been resolved to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC;
    (12) The transaction involves any supervisory or assistance 
agreement with the FDIC;
    (13) The transaction is part of a conversion under 12 CFR part 192;
    (14) The transaction raises a significant issue of law or policy; or
    (15) The transaction is opposed by any constituent institution or 
contested by a competing acquiror.
    (g) Definitions. (1) The terms used in this subpart shall have the 
same meaning as set forth in 12 CFR 152.13(b).
    (2) Insured depository institution. Insured depository institution 
has the same meaning as defined in section 3(c)(2) of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act.
    (3) With regard to paragraph (f) of this section, the term relevant 
geographic area is used as a substitute for relevant geographic market, 
which means the area within which the competitive effects of a merger or 
other combination may be evaluated. The relevant geographic area shall 
be delineated as a county or similar political subdivision, an area 
smaller than a county, or an aggregation of counties within which the 
merging or combining insured depository institutions compete. In 
addition, the FDIC may consider commuting patterns, newspaper and other 
advertising activities, or other factors as the FDIC deems relevant.
    (h) Special requirements and procedures for transactions under 
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section--(1)(i) Certain transactions with 
no surviving State savings association. The FDIC must be notified of any 
transaction under paragraph (b)(1) of this section. Such notification 
must be submitted to the appropriate FDIC region, as defined in 
Sec. 303.2 of this chapter, at least 30 days prior to the effective date 
of the transaction, but not later than the date on which an application 
relating to the proposed transaction is filed with the primary regulator 
of the resulting institution; the FDIC may, upon request or on its own 
initiative, shorten the 30-day prior notification requirement. 
Notifications

[[Page 1210]]

under this paragraph must demonstrate compliance with applicable 
stockholder or accountholder approval requirements. Where the State 
savings association submitting the notification maintains a liquidation 
account established pursuant to 12 CFR part 192, the notification must 
state that the resulting institution will assume such liquidation 
account.
    (ii) The notification may be in the form of either a letter 
describing the material features of the transaction or a copy of a 
filing made with another Federal or state regulatory agency seeking 
approval from that agency for the transaction under the Bank Merger Act 
or other applicable statute. If the action contemplated by the 
notification is not completed within one year after the FDIC's receipt 
of the notification, a new notification must be submitted to the FDIC.
    (2) Other transfer transactions--(i) Expedited treatment. A notice 
in conformity with Sec. 390.105(a) may be submitted to the appropriate 
FDIC region, as defined in Sec. 303.2 of this chapter, under 
Sec. 390.108 for any transaction under paragraph (c) of this section, 
provided all constituent State savings associations meet the conditions 
for expedited treatment under Sec. 390.101. Notices submitted under this 
paragraph must be deemed approved automatically by the FDIC 30 days 
after receipt, unless the FDIC advises the applicant in writing prior to 
the expiration of such period that the proposed transaction may not be 
consummated without the FDIC's approval of an application under 
paragraphs (h)(2)(ii) or (h)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (ii) Standard treatment. An application in conformity with 
Sec. 390.105(b) and paragraph (d) of this section must be submitted to 
the appropriate FDIC region, as defined in Sec. 303.2 of this chapter, 
under Sec. 390.108 by each State savings association participating in a 
transaction under paragraph (b)(2) or (c) of this section, where any 
constituent State savings association does not meet the conditions for 
expedited treatment under Sec. 390.101. Applications under this 
paragraph must be processed in accordance with Secs. 390.103 through 
390.110 and Secs. 390.126 through 390.135.



Sec. 390.333  Advertising.

    No State savings association shall use advertising (which includes 
print or broadcast media, displays or signs, stationery, and all other 
promotional materials), or make any representation which is inaccurate 
in any particular or which in any way misrepresents its services, 
contracts, investments, or financial condition.



Sec. 390.334  Directors, officers, and employees.

    (a) Directors--(1) Requirements. The composition of the board of 
directors of a State savings association must be in accordance with the 
following requirements:
    (i) A majority of the directors must not be salaried officers or 
employees of the State savings association or of any subsidiary or 
(except in the case of a State savings association having 80% or more of 
any class of voting shares owned by a holding company) any holding 
company affiliate thereof.
    (ii) Not more than two of the directors may be members of the same 
immediate family.
    (iii) Not more than one director may be an attorney with a 
particular law firm.
    (2) Prospective application. In the case of an association whose 
board of directors does not conform with any requirement set forth in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section as of October 5, 1983, this paragraph 
(a) shall not prohibit the uninterrupted service, including re-election 
and re-appointment, of any person serving on the board of directors at 
that date.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 390.335  Tying restriction exception.

    For applicable rules, see the regulations issued by the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System.



Sec. 390.336  Employment contracts.

    (a) General. A State savings association may enter into an 
employment contract with its officers and other employees only in 
accordance with the requirements of this section. All employment 
contracts shall be in writing and shall be approved specifically by a 
State savings association's board of directors. A State savings 
association

[[Page 1211]]

shall not enter into an employment contract with any of its officers or 
other employees if such contract would constitute an unsafe or unsound 
practice. The making of such an employment contract would be an unsafe 
or unsound practice if such contract could lead to material financial 
loss or damage to the State savings association or could interfere 
materially with the exercise by the members of its board of directors of 
their duty or discretion provided by law, charter, bylaw or regulation 
as to the employment or termination of employment of an officer or 
employee of the State savings association. This may occur, depending 
upon the circumstances of the case, where an employment contract 
provides for an excessive term.
    (b) Required provisions. Each employment contract shall provide 
that:
    (1) The State savings association's board of directors may terminate 
the officer or employee's employment at any time, but any termination by 
the State savings association's board of directors other than 
termination for cause, shall not prejudice the officer or employee's 
right to compensation or other benefits under the contract. The officer 
or employee shall have no right to receive compensation or other 
benefits for any period after termination for cause. Termination for 
cause shall include termination because of the officer or employee's 
personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, breach of 
fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform 
stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule, or regulation (other 
than traffic violations or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist 
order, or material breach of any provision of the contract.
    (2) If the officer or employee is suspended and/or temporarily 
prohibited from participating in the conduct of the State savings 
association's affairs by a notice served under section 8(e)(3) or (g)(1) 
of Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818(e)(3) and (g)(1)), the 
State savings association's obligations under the contract shall be 
suspended as of the date of service unless stayed by appropriate 
proceedings. If the charges in the notice are dismissed, the State 
savings association may in its discretion:
    (i) Pay the officer or employee all or part of the compensation 
withheld while its contract obligations were suspended; and
    (ii) Reinstate (in whole or in part) any of its obligations which 
were suspended.
    (3) If the officer or employee is removed and/or permanently 
prohibited from participating in the conduct of the State savings 
association's affairs by an order issued under section 8 (e)(4) or 
(g)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1818 (e)(4) or 
(g)(1)), all obligations of the State savings association under the 
contract shall terminate as of the effective date of the order, but 
vested rights of the contracting parties shall not be affected.
    (4) If the State savings association is in default (as defined in 
section 3(x)(1) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act), all obligations 
under the contract shall terminate as of the date of default, but this 
paragraph (b)(4) shall not affect any vested rights of the contracting 
parties: Provided, that this paragraph (b)(4) need not be included in an 
employment contract if prior written approval is secured from the FDIC.
    (5)(i) All obligations under the contract shall be terminated, 
except to the extent determined that continuation of the contract is 
necessary of the continued operation of the State savings association
    (A) By the FDIC, at the time the FDIC enters into an agreement to 
provide assistance to or on behalf of the State savings association 
under the authority contained in 13(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Act; or
    (B) By the FDIC, at the time the FDIC approves a supervisory merger 
to resolve problems related to operation of the State savings 
association or when the State savings association is determined by the 
FDIC to be in an unsafe or unsound condition.
    (ii) Any rights of the parties that have already vested, however, 
shall not be affected by such action.



Sec. 390.337  Transactions with affiliates.

    For applicable rules, see the regulations issued by the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System.

[[Page 1212]]



Sec. 390.338  Loans by State savings associations to their executive
officers, directors, and principal shareholders.

    For applicable rules, see the regulations issued by the Board of 
Governors of the Federal Reserve System.



Sec. 390.339  Pension plans.

    (a) General. No State savings association shall sponsor an employee 
pension plan which, because of unreasonable costs or any other reason, 
could lead to material financial loss or damage to the sponsor. For 
purposes of this section, an employee pension plan is defined in section 
3(2) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended. 
The prospective obligation or liability of a plan sponsor to each plan 
participant shall be stated in or determinable from the plan, and, for a 
defined benefit plan, shall also be based upon an actuarial estimate of 
future experience under the plan.
    (b) Funding. Actuarial cost methods permitted under the Employee 
Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 and the Internal Revenue Code of 
1954, as amended, shall be used to determine plan funding.
    (c) Plan amendment. A plan may be amended to provide reasonable 
annual cost-of-living increases to retired participants: Provided, That
    (1) Any such increase shall be for a period and amount determined by 
the sponsor's board of directors, but in no event shall it exceed the 
annual increase in the Consumer Price Index published by the Bureau of 
Labor Statistics; and
    (2) No increase shall be granted unless:
    (i) Anticipated charges to net income for future periods have first 
been found by such board of directors to be reasonable and are 
documented by appropriate resolution and supporting analysis; and
    (ii) The increase will not reduce the State savings association's 
regulatory capital below its regulatory capital requirement.
    (d) Termination. The plan shall permit the sponsor's board of 
directors and its successors to terminate such plan. Notice of intent to 
terminate shall be filed with the FDIC at least 60 days prior to the 
proposed termination date.
    (e) Records. Each State savings association maintaining a plan not 
subject to recordkeeping and reporting requirements of the Employee 
Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, and the Internal Revenue Code of 
1954, as amended, shall establish and maintain records containing the 
following:
    (1) Plan description;
    (2) Schedule of participants and beneficiaries;
    (3) Schedule of participants and beneficiaries' rights and 
obligations;
    (4) Plan's financial statements; and
    (5) Except for defined contribution plans, an opinion signed by an 
enrolled actuary (as defined by the Employee Retirement Income Security 
Act of 1974) affirming that actuarial assumptions in the aggregate are 
reasonable, take into account the plan's experience and expectations, 
and represent the actuary's best estimate of the plan's projected 
experiences.



Sec. 390.340  Offers and sales of securities at an office of a State
savings association.

    (a) A State saving association may not offer or sell debt or equity 
securities issued by the State savings association or an affiliate of 
the State savings association at an office of the State savings 
association; except that equity securities issued by the State savings 
association or an affiliate in connection with the State savings 
association's conversion from the mutual to stock form of organization 
in a conversion approved pursuant to 12 CFR part 192 may be offered and 
sold at the State savings association's offices: Provided, That:
    (1) The FDIC does not object on supervisory grounds that the offer 
and sale of the securities at the offices of the State savings 
association;
    (2) No commissions, bonuses, or comparable payments are paid to any 
employee of the State savings association or its affiliates or to any 
other person in connection with the sale of securities at an office of a 
State savings association; except that compensation and commissions 
consistent with industry norms may be paid to securities personnel of 
registered broker-dealers;

[[Page 1213]]

    (3) No offers or sales are made by tellers or at the teller counter, 
or by comparable persons at comparable locations;
    (4) Sales activity is conducted in a segregated or separately 
identifiable area of the State savings association's offices apart from 
the area accessible to the general public for the purposes of making or 
withdrawing deposits;
    (5) Offers and sales are made only by regular, full-time employees 
of the State savings association or by securities personnel who are 
subject to supervision by a registered broker-dealer;
    (6) An acknowledgment, in the form set forth in paragraph (c) of 
this section, is signed by any customer to whom the security is sold in 
the State savings association's offices prior to the sale of any such 
securities;
    (7) A legend that the security is not a deposit or account and is 
not federally insured or guaranteed appears conspicuously on the 
security and in all offering documents and advertisements for the 
securities; the legend must state in bold or other prominent type at 
least as large as other textual type in the document that ``This 
security is not a deposit or account and is not federally insured or 
guaranteed''; and
    (8) The State savings association will be in compliance with its 
current capital requirements upon completion of the conversion stock 
offering.
    (b) Securities sales practices, advertisements, and other sales 
literature used in connection with offers and sales of securities by 
State savings associations shall be subject to Sec. 390.419.
    (c) Offers and sales of securities of a State savings association or 
its affiliates in any office of the State savings association must use a 
one-page, unambiguous, certification in substantially the following 
form:

                          FORM OF CERTIFICATION

    I ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THIS SECURITY IS NOT A DEPOSIT OR ACCOUNT AND IS 
NOT FEDERALLY INSURED, AND IS NOT GUARANTEED BY [insert name of State 
savings association] OR BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT.
    If anyone asserts that this security is federally insured or 
guaranteed, or is as safe as an insured deposit, I should call the 
FDIC's appropriate regional director [insert name and telephone number 
with area code of the appropriate regional director, as defined in 
section 303.2 of this chapter].
    I further certify that, before purchasing the [description of 
security being offered] of [name of issuer, name of State savings 
association and affiliation to issuer (if different)], I received an 
offering circular.
    The offering circular that I received contains disclosure concerning 
the nature of the security being offered and describes the risks 
involved in the investment, including:
    [List briefly the principal risks involved and cross reference 
certain specified pages of the offering circular where a more complete 
description of the risks is made.]
 Signature:_____________________________________________________________

 Date:__________________________________________________________________

    (d) For purposes of this section, an ``office'' of a State savings 
association means any premises used by the State savings association 
that are identified to the public through advertising or signage using 
the State savings association's name, trade name, or logo.



Sec. 390.341  Inclusion of subordinated debt securities and 
mandatorily redeemable preferred stock as supplementary capital.

    (a) Scope. A State savings association must comply with this section 
in order to include subordinated debt securities or mandatorily 
redeemable preferred stock (``covered securities'') in supplementary 
capital (tier 2 capital) under subpart Z. If a State savings association 
does not include covered securities in supplementary capital, it is not 
required to comply with this section.
    (b) Application and notice procedures. (1) A State savings 
association must file an application or notice under Secs. 390.103 
through 390.110 seeking FDIC approval of, or non-objection to, the 
inclusion of covered securities in supplementary capital. The State 
savings association may file its application or notice before or after 
it issues covered securities, but may not include covered securities in 
supplementary capital until the FDIC approves the application or does 
not object to the notice.
    (2) A State savings association must also comply with the securities 
offering rules at subpart W by filing an offering circular for a 
proposed issuance of covered securities, unless the offering qualifies 
for an exemption under that subpart.

[[Page 1214]]

    (c) Securities requirements. To be included in supplementary 
capital, covered securities must meet the following requirements:
    (1) Form. (i) Each certificate evidencing a covered security must:
    (A) Bear the following legend on its face, in bold type: ``This 
security is not a savings account or deposit and it is not insured by 
the United States or any agency or fund of the United States;''
    (B) State that the security is subordinated on liquidation, as to 
principal, interest, and premium, to all claims against the State 
savings association that have the same priority as savings accounts or a 
higher priority;
    (C) State that the security is not secured by the State savings 
association's assets or the assets of any affiliate of the State savings 
association. For purposes of this subpart, the term affiliate means any 
person or company which controls, is controlled by, or is under common 
control with such State savings association.
    (D) State that the security is not eligible collateral for a loan by 
the State savings association;
    (E) State the prohibition on the payment of dividends or interest at 
12 U.S.C. 1828(b) and, in the case of subordinated debt securities, 
state the prohibition on the payment of principal and interest at 12 
U.S.C. 1831o(h);
    (F) For subordinated debt securities, state or refer to a document 
stating the terms under which the State savings association may prepay 
the obligation; and
    (G) State or refer to a document stating that the State savings 
association must obtain FDIC approval before the voluntarily prepayment 
of principal on subordinated debt securities, the acceleration of 
payment of principal on subordinated debt securities, or the voluntarily 
redemption of mandatorily redeemable preferred stock (other than 
scheduled redemptions), if the State savings association is 
undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or critically 
undercapitalized as described in Sec. 390.453(4)(b), fails to meet the 
regulatory capital requirements at subpart Z, or would fail to meet any 
of these standards following the payment.
    (ii) A State savings association must include such additional 
statements as the FDIC may prescribe for certificates, purchase 
agreements, indentures, and other related documents.
    (2) Maturity requirements. Covered securities must have an original 
weighted average maturity or original weighted average period to 
required redemption of at least five years.
    (3) Mandatory prepayment. Subordinated debt securities and related 
documents may not provide events of default or contain other provisions 
that could result in a mandatory prepayment of principal, other than 
events of default that:
    (i) Arise from the State savings association's failure to make 
timely payment of interest or principal;
    (ii) Arise from its failure to comply with reasonable financial, 
operating, and maintenance covenants of a type that are customarily 
included in indentures for publicly offered debt securities; or
    (iii) Relate to bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership, or similar 
events.
    (4) Indenture. (i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of 
this section, a State savings association must use an indenture for 
subordinated debt securities. If the aggregate amount of subordinated 
debt securities publicly offered (excluding sales in a non-public 
offering as defined in Sec. 390.413 and sold in any consecutive 12-month 
or 36-month period exceeds $5,000,000 or $10,000,000 respectively (or 
such lesser amount that the Securities and Exchange Commission shall 
establish by rule or regulation under 15 U.S.C. 77ddd), the indenture 
must provide for the appointment of a trustee other than the State 
savings association or an affiliate of the State savings association (as 
defined at Sec. 390.283) and for collective enforcement of the security 
holders' rights and remedies.
    (ii) A State savings association is not required to use an indenture 
if the subordinated debt securities are sold only to accredited 
investors, as that term is defined in 15 U.S.C. 77d(6). A State savings 
association must have an indenture that meets the requirements of 
paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section in place before any debt securities 
for which an exemption from the indenture requirement is claimed, are 
transferred to any non-accredited investor. If a

[[Page 1215]]

State savings association relies on this exemption from the indenture 
requirement, it must place a legend on the debt securities indicating 
that an indenture must be in place before the debt securities are 
transferred to any non-accredited investor.
    (d) FDIC review. (1) The FDIC will review notices and applications 
under Secs. 390.126 through 390.135.
    (2) In reviewing notices and applications under this section, the 
FDIC will consider whether:
    (i) The issuance of the covered securities is authorized under 
applicable laws and regulations and is consistent with the State savings 
association's charter and bylaws.
    (ii) The State savings association is at least adequately 
capitalized under Sec. 390.453(4)(b) and meets the regulatory capital 
requirements at subpart Z.
    (iii) The State savings association is or will be able to service 
the covered securities.
    (iv) The covered securities are consistent with the requirements of 
this section.
    (v) The covered securities and related transactions sufficiently 
transfer risk from the Deposit Insurance Fund.
    (vi) The FDIC has no objection to the issuance based on the State 
savings association's overall policies, condition, and operations.
    (3) The FDIC approval or non-objection is conditioned upon no 
material changes to the information disclosed in the application or 
notice submitted to the FDIC. The FDIC may impose such additional 
requirements or conditions as it may deem necessary to protect 
purchasers, the State savings association, or the Deposit Insurance 
Fund.
    (e) Amendments. If a State savings association amends the covered 
securities or related documents following the completion of the FDIC's 
review, it must obtain the FDIC's approval or non-objection under this 
section before it may include the amended securities in supplementary 
capital.
    (f) Sale of covered securities. The State savings association must 
complete the sale of covered securities within one year after the FDIC's 
approval or non-objection under this section. A State savings 
association may request an extension of the offering period by filing a 
written request with the FDIC. The State savings association must 
demonstrate good cause for the extension and file the request at least 
30 days before the expiration of the offering period or any extension of 
the offering period.
    (g) Reports. A State savings association must file the following 
information with the FDIC within 30 days after the State savings 
association completes the sale of covered securities includable as 
supplementary capital. If the State savings association filed its 
application or notice following the completion of the sale, it must 
submit this information with its application or notice:
    (1) A written report indicating the number of purchasers, the total 
dollar amount of securities sold, the net proceeds received by the State 
savings association from the issuance, and the amount of covered 
securities, net of all expenses, to be included as supplementary 
capital;
    (2) Three copies of an executed form of the securities and a copy of 
any related documents governing the issuance or administration of the 
securities; and
    (3) A certification by the appropriate executive officer indicating 
that the State savings association complied with all applicable laws and 
regulations in connection with the offering, issuance, and sale of the 
securities.



Sec. 390.342  Capital distributions by State savings associations.

    Sections 390.342 through 390.348 apply to all capital distributions 
by a State savings association (``you'').



Sec. 390.343  What is a capital distribution?

    A capital distribution is:
    (a) A distribution of cash or other property to your owners made on 
account of their ownership, but excludes:
    (1) Any dividend consisting only of your shares or rights to 
purchase your shares; or
    (2) If you are a mutual State savings association, any payment that 
you are required to make under the terms of a deposit instrument and any 
other amount paid on deposits that the FDIC

[[Page 1216]]

determines is not a distribution for the purposes of this section;
    (b) Your payment to repurchase, redeem, retire or otherwise acquire 
any of your shares or other ownership interests, any payment to 
repurchase, redeem, retire, or otherwise acquire debt instruments 
included in your total capital under subpart Z, and any extension of 
credit to finance an affiliate's acquisition of your shares or 
interests;
    (c) Any direct or indirect payment of cash or other property to 
owners or affiliates made in connection with a corporate restructuring. 
This includes your payment of cash or property to shareholders of 
another savings association or to shareholders of its holding company to 
acquire ownership in that savings association, other than by a 
distribution of shares;
    (d) Any other distribution charged against your capital accounts if 
you would not be well capitalized, as set forth in Sec. 390.453(b)(1), 
following the distribution; and
    (e) Any transaction that the FDIC determines, by order or 
regulation, to be in substance a distribution of capital.



Sec. 390.344  Definitions applicable to capital distributions.

    The following definitions apply to sections 390.342 through 390.348:
    Affiliate means an affiliate, as defined in regulations governing 
transactions with affiliates as issued by the Board of Governors of the 
Federal Reserve System.
    Capital means total capital, as computed under subpart Z.
    Net income means your net income computed in accordance with 
generally accepted accounting principles.
    Retained net income means your net income for a specified period 
less total capital distributions declared in that period.
    Shares means common and preferred stock, and any options, warrants, 
or other rights for the acquisition of such stock. The term ``share'' 
also includes convertible securities upon their conversion into common 
or preferred stock. The term does not include convertible debt 
securities prior to their conversion into common or preferred stock or 
other securities that are not equity securities at the time of a capital 
distribution.



Sec. 390.345  Must I file with the FDIC?

    Whether and what you must file with the FDIC depends on whether you 
and your proposed capital distribution fall within certain criteria.
    (a) Application required.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     If:                               Then you:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) You are not eligible for expedited         Must file an application
 treatment under Sec. 390.101.                 with the FDIC.
(2) The total amount of all of your capital    Must file an application
 distributions (including the proposed          with the FDIC.
 capital distribution) for the applicable
 calendar year exceeds your net income for
 that year to date plus your retained net
 income for the preceding two years.
(3) You would not be at least adequately       Must file an application
 capitalized, as set forth in Sec. with the FDIC.
 390.453(b)(2), following the distribution.
(4) Your proposed capital distribution would   Must file an application
 violate a prohibition contained in any         with the FDIC.
 applicable statute, regulation, or agreement
 between you and the FDIC, or violate a
 condition imposed on you in an FDIC-approved
 application or notice.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Notice required.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
      If you are not required to file an
   application under paragraph (a) of this             Then you:
                section, but:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) You would not be well capitalized, as set  Must file a notice with
 forth under Sec. 390.453(b)(1), following     the FDIC.
 the distribution.
(2) Your proposed capital distribution would   Must file a notice with
 reduce the amount of or retire any part of     the FDIC.
 your common or preferred stock or retire any
 part of debt instruments such as notes or
 debentures included in capital under subpart
 Z (other than regular payments required
 under a debt instrument approved under Sec.
 390.341).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) No prior notice required.

[[Page 1217]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
If neither you nor your proposed capital       Then you do not need to
 distribution meet any of the criteria listed   file a notice or an
 in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.     application with the
                                                FDIC before making a
                                                capital distribution.
------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 390.346  How do I file with the FDIC?

    (a) Contents. Your notice or application must:
    (1) Be in narrative form.
    (2) Include all relevant information concerning the proposed capital 
distribution, including the amount, timing, and type of distribution.
    (3) Demonstrate compliance with Sec. 390.348.
    (b) Schedules. Your notice or application may include a schedule 
proposing capital distributions over a specified period, not to exceed 
12 months.
    (c) Timing. You must file your notice or application at least 30 
days before the proposed declaration of dividend or approval of the 
proposed capital distribution by your board of directors.



Sec. 390.347  May I combine my notice or application with other
notices or applications?

    You may combine the notice or application required under 
Sec. 390.345 with any other notice or application, if the capital 
distribution is a part of, or is proposed in connection with, another 
transaction requiring a notice or application under Parts 390 and 391. 
If you submit a combined filing, you must:
    (a) State that the related notice or application is intended to 
serve as a notice or application under Secs. 390.342 through 390.348; 
and
    (b) Submit the notice or application in a timely manner.



Sec. 390.348  Will the FDIC permit my capital distribution?

    The FDIC will review your notice or application under the review 
procedures in Secs. 390.126 through 390.135. The FDIC may disapprove 
your notice or deny your application filed under Sec. 390.345 in whole 
or in part, if the FDIC makes any of the following determinations.
    (a) You will be undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or 
critically undercapitalized as set forth in Sec. 390.453(b), following 
the capital distribution. If so, the FDIC will determine if your capital 
distribution is permitted under 12 U.S.C. 1831o(d)(1)(B).
    (b) Your proposed capital distribution raises safety or soundness 
concerns.
    (c) Your proposed capital distribution violates a prohibition 
contained in any statute, regulation, agreement between you and the FDIC 
or a condition imposed on you in an FDIC-approved application or notice. 
If so, the FDIC will determine whether it may permit your capital 
distribution notwithstanding the prohibition or condition.



Sec. 390.349  Management and financial policies.

    (a)(1) For the protection of depositors and other State savings 
associations, each State savings association must be well managed and 
operate safely and soundly. Each also must pursue financial policies 
that are safe and consistent with economical home financing and the 
purposes of State savings associations.
    (2) As part of meeting its requirements under paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section, each State savings association must maintain sufficient 
liquidity to ensure its safe and sound operation.
    (b) Compensation to officers, directors, and employees of each State 
savings association shall not be in excess of that which is reasonable 
and commensurate with their duties and responsibilities. Former 
officers, directors, and employees of State savings association who 
regularly perform services therefor under consulting contracts are 
employees thereof for purposes of this paragraph (b).



Sec. 390.350  Examinations and audits; appraisals; establishment
and maintenance of records.

    (a) Examinations and audits. Each State savings association and 
affiliate thereof shall be examined periodically, and may be examined at 
any time, by the FDIC, with appraisals when deemed

[[Page 1218]]

advisable, in accordance with general policies from time to time 
established by the FDIC.
    (b) Appraisals. (1) Unless otherwise ordered by the FDIC, appraisal 
of real estate by the FDIC in connection with any examination or audit 
of a State savings association or its affiliate shall be made by an 
appraiser, or by appraisers, selected by the appropriate FDIC region, as 
that term is defined in Sec. 303.2 of this chapter, in which such State 
savings association is located. The cost of such appraisal shall 
promptly be paid by such State savings association or its affiliate 
direct to such appraiser or appraisers upon receipt by the State savings 
association or its affiliate of a statement of such cost as approved by 
the appropriate regional director. A copy of the report of each 
appraisal made by the FDIC pursuant to any of the foregoing provisions 
of this section shall be furnished to the State savings association or 
its affiliate, as appropriate within a reasonable time, not to exceed 90 
days, following the completion of such appraisals and the filing of a 
report thereof by the appraiser, or appraisers, with the appropriate 
FDIC office.
    (2) The FDIC may obtain at any time, at its expense, such appraisals 
of any of the assets, including the security therefor, of a State 
savings association or its affiliate as the FDIC deems appropriate.
    (c) Establishment and maintenance of records. To enable the FDIC to 
examine State savings associations and affiliates and audit State 
savings associations and its affiliates, pursuant to the provisions of 
paragraph (a) of this section, each State savings association, and its 
affiliate shall establish and maintain such accounting and other records 
as will provide an accurate and complete record of all business it 
transacts. This includes, without limitation, establishing and 
maintaining such other records as are required by statute or any other 
regulation to which the State savings association and its affiliate is 
subject. The documents, files, and other material or property comprising 
said records shall at all times be available for such examination and 
audit wherever any of said records, documents, files, material, or 
property may be.
    (d) Change in location of records. A State savings association shall 
not transfer the location of any of its general accounting or control 
records, or the maintenance thereof, from its home office to a branch or 
service office, or from a branch or service office to its home office or 
to another branch or service office unless prior to the date of transfer 
its board of directors has:
    (1) By resolution authorized the transfer or maintenance and;
    (2) Sent a certified copy of the resolution to the appropriate 
regional director for the region in which the principal office of the 
State savings association is located.
    (e) Use of data processing services for maintenance of records. A 
State savings association which determines to maintain any of its 
records by means of data processing services shall so notify the 
appropriate regional director for the region in which the principal 
office of such State savings association is located, in writing, at 
least 90 days prior to the date on which such maintenance of records 
will begin. Such notification shall include identification of the 
records to be maintained by data processing services and a statement as 
to the location at which such records will be maintained. Any contract, 
agreement, or arrangement made by a State savings association pursuant 
to which data processing services are to be performed for such State 
savings association shall be in writing and shall expressly provide that 
the records to be maintained by such services shall at all times be 
available for examination and audit.
      



Sec. 390.352  Financial derivatives.

    (a) What is a financial derivative? A financial derivative is a 
financial contract whose value depends on the value of one or more 
underlying assets, indices, or reference rates. The most common types of 
financial derivatives are futures, forward commitments, options, and 
swaps. A mortgage derivative security, such as a collateralized mortgage 
obligation or a real estate

[[Page 1219]]

mortgage investment conduit, is not a financial derivative under this 
section.
    (b) May I engage in transactions involving financial derivatives? 
(1) [Reserved]
    (2) If you are a State savings association, you may engage in a 
transaction involving a financial derivative if your charter or 
applicable State law authorizes you to engage in such transactions, the 
transaction is safe and sound, and you otherwise meet the requirements 
in this section.
    (3) In general, if you engage in a transaction involving a financial 
derivative, you should do so to reduce your risk exposure.
    (c) What are my board of directors' responsibilities with respect to 
financial derivatives? (1) Your board of directors is responsible for 
effective oversight of financial derivatives activities.
    (2) Before you may engage in any transaction involving a financial 
derivative, your board of directors must establish written policies and 
procedures governing authorized financial derivatives. Your board of 
directors should review Thrift Bulletin 13a, ``Management of Interest 
Rate Risk, Investment Securities, and Derivatives Activities,'' and 
other applicable agency guidance on establishing a sound risk management 
program.
    (3) Your board of directors must periodically review:
    (i) Compliance with the policies and procedures established under 
paragraph (c)(2) of this section; and
    (ii) The adequacy of these policies and procedures to ensure that 
they continue to be appropriate to the nature and scope of your 
operations and existing market conditions.
    (4) Your board of directors must ensure that management establishes 
an adequate system of internal controls for transactions involving 
financial derivatives.
    (d) What are management's responsibilities with respect to financial 
derivatives? (1) Management is responsible for daily oversight and 
management of financial derivatives activities. Management must 
implement the policies and procedures established by the board of 
directors and must establish a system of internal controls. This system 
of internal controls should, at a minimum, provide for periodic 
reporting to the board of directors and management, segregation of 
duties, and internal review procedures.
    (2) Management must ensure that financial derivatives activities are 
conducted in a safe and sound manner and should review Thrift Bulletin 
13a, ``Management of Interest Rate Risk, Investment Securities, and 
Derivatives Activities,'' and other applicable agency guidance on 
implementing a sound risk management program.
    (e) What records must I keep on financial derivative transactions? 
You must maintain records adequate to demonstrate compliance with this 
section and with your board of directors' policies and procedures on 
financial derivatives.



Sec. 390.353  Interest-rate-risk-management procedures.

    State savings associations shall take the following actions:
    (a) The board of directors or a committee thereof shall review the 
State savings association's interest-rate-risk exposure and devise a 
policy for the State savings association's management of that risk.
    (b) The board of directors shall formerly adopt a policy for the 
management of interest-rate risk. The management of the State savings 
association shall establish guidelines and procedures to ensure that the 
board's policy is successfully implemented.
    (c) The management of the State savings association shall 
periodically report to the board of directors regarding implementation 
of the State savings association's policy for interest-rate-risk 
management and shall make that information available upon request to the 
FDIC.
    (d) The State savings association's board of directors shall review 
the results of operations at least quarterly and shall make such 
adjustments as it considers necessary and appropriate to the policy for 
interest-rate-risk management, including adjustments to the authorized 
acceptable level of interest-rate risk.

[[Page 1220]]



Sec. 390.354  Procedures for monitoring Bank Secrecy Act (BSA) 
compliance.

    (a) Purpose. The purpose of this regulation is to require State 
savings associations (as defined by Sec. 390.308 to establish and 
maintain procedures reasonably designed to assure and monitor compliance 
with the requirements of subchapter II of chapter 53 of title 31, United 
States Code, and the implementing regulations promulgated thereunder by 
the U.S. Department of Treasury, 31 CFR part 103.
    (b) Establishment of a BSA compliance program--(1) Program 
requirement. Each State savings association shall develop and provide 
for the continued administration of a program reasonably designed to 
assure and monitor compliance with the recordkeeping and reporting 
requirements set forth in subchapter II of chapter 53 of title 31, 
United States Code and the implementing regulations issued by the 
Department of the Treasury at 31 CFR part 103. The compliance program 
must be written, approved by the State savings association's board of 
directors, and reflected in the minutes of the State savings 
association.
    (2) Customer identification program. Each State savings association 
is subject to the requirements of 31 U.S.C. 5318(l) and the implementing 
regulation promulgated at 31 CFR 103.121, which require a customer 
identification program to be implemented as part of the BSA compliance 
program required under this section.
    (c) Contents of compliance program. The compliance program shall, at 
a minimum:
    (1) Provide for a system of internal controls to assure ongoing 
compliance;
    (2) Provide for independent testing for compliance to be conducted 
by a savings association's in-house personnel or by an outside party;
    (3) Designate individual(s) responsible for coordinating and 
monitoring day-to-day compliance; and
    (4) Provide training for appropriate personnel.



Sec. 390.355  Suspicious Activity Reports and other reports 
and statements.

    (a) Periodic reports. Each State savings association shall make such 
periodic or other reports of its affairs in such manner and on such 
forms as the FDIC may prescribe. The FDIC may provide that reports filed 
by State savings associations to meet the requirements of other 
regulations also satisfy requirements imposed under this section.
    (b) False or misleading statements or omissions. No State savings 
association or director, officer, agent, employee, affiliated person, or 
other person participating in the conduct of the affairs of such State 
savings association nor any person filing or seeking approval of any 
application shall knowingly:
    (1) Make any written or oral statement to the FDIC or to an agent, 
representative or employee of the FDIC that is false or misleading with 
respect to any material fact or omits to state a material fact 
concerning any matter within the jurisdiction of the FDIC; or
    (2) Make any such statement or omission to a person or organization 
auditing a State savings association or otherwise preparing or reviewing 
its financial statements concerning the accounts, assets, management 
condition, ownership, safety, or soundness, or other affairs of the 
State savings association.
    (c) Notifications of loss and reports of increase in deductible 
amount of bond. A State savings association maintaining bond coverage as 
required by Sec. 390.356 shall promptly notify its bond company and file 
a proof of loss under the procedures provided by its bond, concerning 
any covered losses greater than twice the deductible amount.
    (d) Suspicious Activity Reports--(1) Purpose and scope. This 
paragraph (d) ensures that State savings associations and service 
corporations file a Suspicious Activity Report when they detect a known 
or suspected violation of Federal law or a suspicious transaction 
related to a money laundering activity or a violation of the Bank 
Secrecy Act.
    (2) Definitions. For the purposes of this paragraph (d):
    (i) FinCEN means the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network of the 
Department of the Treasury.
    (ii) Institution-affiliated party means any institution-affiliated 
party as that term is defined in sections 3(u) and

[[Page 1221]]

8(b)(9) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(u) and 
1818(b)(9)).
    (iii) SAR means a Suspicious Activity Report on the form prescribed 
by the FDIC.
    (3) SARs required. A State savings association shall file a SAR with 
the appropriate Federal law enforcement agencies and the Department of 
the Treasury in accordance with the form's instructions, by sending a 
completed SAR to FinCEN in the following circumstances:
    (i) Insider abuse involving any amount. Whenever the State savings 
association detects any known or suspected Federal criminal violation, 
or pattern of criminal violations, committed or attempted against the 
State savings association or involving a transaction or transactions 
conducted through the State savings association where the State savings 
association believes that it was either an actual or potential victim of 
a criminal violation, or series of criminal violations, or that it was 
used to facilitate a criminal transaction, and it has a substantial 
basis for identifying one of its directors, officers, employees, agents 
or other institution-affiliated parties as having committed or aided in 
the commission of a criminal act, regardless of the amount involved in 
the violation.
    (ii) Violations aggregating $5,000 or more where a suspect can be 
identified. Whenever the State savings association detects any known or 
suspected Federal criminal violation, or pattern of criminal violations, 
committed or attempted against the State savings association involving a 
transaction or transactions conducted through the State savings 
association and involving or aggregating $5,000 or more in funds or 
other assets, where the State savings association believes that it was 
either an actual or potential victim of a criminal violation or series 
of criminal violations, or that it was used to facilitate a criminal 
transaction, and it has a substantial basis for identifying a possible 
suspect or group of suspects. If it is determined prior to filing this 
report that the identified suspect or group of suspects has used an 
alias, then information regarding the true identity of the suspect or 
group of suspects, as well as alias identifiers, such as drivers' 
license or social security numbers, addresses and telephone numbers, 
must be reported.
    (iii) Violations aggregating $25,000 or more regardless of potential 
suspects. Whenever the State savings association detects any known or 
suspected Federal criminal violation, or pattern of criminal violations, 
committed or attempted against the State savings association involving a 
transaction or transactions conducted through the State savings 
association and involving or aggregating $25,000 or more in funds or 
other assets, where the State savings association believes that it was 
either an actual or potential victim of a criminal violation or series 
of criminal violations, or that it was used to facilitate a criminal 
transaction, even though there is no substantial basis for identifying a 
possible suspect or group of suspects.
    (iv) Transactions aggregating $5,000 or more that involve potential 
money laundering or violations of the Bank Secrecy Act. Any transaction 
(which for purposes of this paragraph (d)(3)(iv) means a deposit, 
withdrawal, transfer between accounts, exchange of currency, loan, 
extension of credit, purchase or sale of any stock, bond, certificate of 
deposit, or other monetary instrument or investment security, or any 
other payment, transfer, or delivery by, through, or to a financial 
institution, by whatever means effected) conducted or attempted by, at 
or through the State savings association involving or aggregating $5,000 
or more in funds or other assets, if the State savings association 
knows, suspects, or has reason to suspect that:
    (A) The transaction involves funds derived from illegal activities 
or is intended or conducted in order to hide or disguise funds or assets 
derived from illegal activities (including, without limitation, the 
ownership, nature, source, location, or control of such funds or assets) 
as part of a plan to violate or evade any law or regulation or to avoid 
any transaction reporting requirement under Federal law;
    (B) The transaction is designed to evade any regulations promulgated 
under the Bank Secrecy Act; or
    (C) The transaction has no business or apparent lawful purpose or is 
not

[[Page 1222]]

the sort in which the particular customer would normally be expected to 
engage, and the institution knows of no reasonable explanation for the 
transaction after examining the available facts, including the 
background and possible purpose of the transaction.
    (4) [Reserved]
    (5) Time for reporting. A State savings association is required to 
file a SAR no later than 30 calendar days after the date of initial 
detection of facts that may constitute a basis for filing a SAR. If no 
suspect was identified on the date of detection of the incident 
requiring the filing, a State savings association may delay filing a SAR 
for an additional 30 calendar days to identify a suspect. In no case 
shall reporting be delayed more than 60 calendar days after the date of 
initial detection of a reportable transaction. In situations involving 
violations requiring immediate attention, such as when a reportable 
violation is ongoing, the State savings association shall immediately 
notify, by telephone, an appropriate law enforcement authority and the 
FDIC in addition to filing a timely SAR.
    (6) Reports to state and local authorities. A State savings 
association is encouraged to file a copy of the SAR with state and local 
law enforcement agencies where appropriate.
    (7) Exception. A State savings association need not file a SAR for a 
robbery or burglary committed or attempted that is reported to 
appropriate law enforcement authorities.
    (8) Retention of records. A State savings association shall maintain 
a copy of any SAR filed and the original or business record equivalent 
of any supporting documentation for a period of five years from the date 
of the filing of the SAR. Supporting documentation shall be identified 
and maintained by the State savings association as such, and shall be 
deemed to have been filed with the SAR. A State savings association 
shall make all supporting documentation available to appropriate law 
enforcement agencies upon request.
    (9) Notification to board of directors--(i) Generally. Whenever a 
State savings association files a SAR pursuant to this paragraph (d), 
the management of the State savings association shall promptly notify 
its board of directors, or a committee of directors or executive 
officers designated by the board of directors to receive notice.
    (ii) Suspect is a director or executive officer. If the State 
savings association files a SAR pursuant to this paragraph (d) and the 
suspect is a director or executive officer, the State savings 
association may not notify the suspect, pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 
5318(g)(2), but shall notify all directors who are not suspects.
    (10) Compliance. Failure to file a SAR in accordance with this 
section and the instructions may subject the State savings association, 
its directors, officers, employees, agents, or other institution-
affiliated parties to supervisory action.
    (11) Obtaining SARs. A State savings association may obtain SARs and 
the instructions from the appropriate FDIC region as defined in 
Sec. 303.2 of this chapter.
    (12) Confidentiality of SARs. SARs are confidential. Any institution 
or person subpoenaed or otherwise requested to disclose a SAR or the 
information contained in a SAR shall decline to produce the SAR or to 
provide any information that would disclose that a SAR has been prepared 
or filed, citing this paragraph (d), applicable law (e.g., 31 U.S.C. 
5318(g)), or both, and shall notify the FDIC.
    (13) Safe harbor. The safe harbor provision of 31 U.S.C. 5318(g), 
which exempts any financial institution that makes a disclosure of any 
possible violation of law or regulation from liability under any law or 
regulation of the United States, or any constitution, law or regulation 
of any state or political subdivision, covers all reports of suspected 
or known criminal violations and suspicious activities to law 
enforcement and financial institution supervisory authorities, including 
supporting documentation, regardless of whether such reports are filed 
pursuant to this paragraph (d), or are filed on a voluntary basis.
    (e) Adjustable-rate mortgage indices--(1) Reporting obligation. Upon 
the request of a Federal Home Loan Bank, all State savings associations 
within the jurisdiction of that Federal Home

[[Page 1223]]

Loan Bank shall report the data items set forth in paragraph (e)(2) of 
this section for the Federal Home Loan Bank to use in calculating and 
publishing an adjustable-rate mortgage index.
    (2) Data to be reported. For purposes of paragraph (e)(1) of this 
section, the term ``data items'' means the data items previously 
collected from the monthly Thrift Financial Report or Consolidated 
Reports of Condition or Income (``Call Report''), as applicable, and 
such data items as may be altered, amended, or substituted by the 
requesting Federal Home Loan Bank.
    (3) Applicable indices. For the purpose of this reporting 
requirement, the term ``adjustable-rate mortgage index'' means any of 
the adjustable-rate mortgage indices calculated and published by a 
Federal Home Loan Bank or the Federal Home Loan Bank Board on or before 
August 9, 1989.



Sec. 390.356  Bonds for directors, officers, employees, and agents;
form of and amount of bonds.

    (a) Each State savings association shall maintain fidelity bond 
coverage. The bond shall cover each director, officer, employee, and 
agent who has control over or access to cash, securities, or other 
property of the State savings association.
    (b) The amount of coverage to be required for each State savings 
association shall be determined by the association's management, based 
on its assessment of the level that would be safe and sound in view of 
the association's potential exposure to risk; provided, such 
determination shall be subject to approval by the association's board of 
directors.
    (c) Each State savings association may maintain bond coverage in 
addition to that provided by the insurance underwriter industry's 
standard forms, through the use of endorsements, riders, or other forms 
of supplemental coverage, if, in the judgment of the State savings 
association's board of directors, additional coverage is warranted.
    (d) The board of directors of each State savings association shall 
formally approve the State savings association's bond coverage. In 
deciding whether to approve the bond coverage, the board shall review 
the adequacy of the standard coverage and the need for supplemental 
coverage. Documentation of the board's approval shall be included as a 
part of the minutes of the meeting at which the board approves coverage. 
Additionally, the board of directors shall review the State savings 
association's bond coverage at least annually to assess the continuing 
adequacy of coverage.



Sec. 390.357  Bonds for agents.

    In lieu of the bond provided in Sec. 390.356 in the case of agents 
appointed by a State savings association, a fidelity bond may be 
provided in an amount at least twice the average monthly collections of 
such agents, provided such agents shall be required to make settlement 
with the State savings association at least monthly, and provided such 
bond is approved by the board of directors of the State savings 
association. No bond need be obtained for any agent that is a financial 
institution insured by the FDIC.



Sec. 390.358  Conflicts of interest.

    If you are a director, officer, or employee of a State savings 
association, or have the power to direct its management or policies, or 
otherwise owe a fiduciary duty to a State savings association:
    (a) You must not advance your own personal or business interests, or 
those of others with whom you have a personal or business relationship, 
at the expense of the State savings association; and
    (b) You must, if you have an interest in a matter or transaction 
before the board of directors:
    (1) Disclose to the board all material nonprivileged information 
relevant to the board's decision on the matter or transaction, 
including:
    (i) The existence, nature and extent of your interests; and
    (ii) The facts known to you as to the matter or transaction under 
consideration;
    (2) Refrain from participating in the board's discussion of the 
matter or transaction; and
    (3) Recuse yourself from voting on the matter or transaction (if you 
are a director).

[[Page 1224]]



Sec. 390.359  Corporate opportunity.

    (a) If you are a director or officer of a State savings association, 
or have the power to direct its management or policies, or otherwise owe 
a fiduciary duty to a State savings association, you must not take 
advantage of corporate opportunities belonging to the State savings 
association.
    (b) A corporate opportunity belongs to a State savings association 
if:
    (1) The opportunity is within the corporate powers of the State 
savings association or a subsidiary of the State savings association; 
and
    (2) The opportunity is of present or potential practical advantage 
to the State savings association, either directly or through its 
subsidiary.
    (c) The FDIC will not deem you to have taken advantage of a 
corporate opportunity belonging to the State savings association if a 
disinterested and independent majority of the State savings 
association's board of directors, after receiving a full and fair 
presentation of the matter, rejected the opportunity as a matter of 
sound business judgment.



Sec. 390.360  Change of director or senior executive officer.

    Sections 390.360 through 390.368 implement 12 U.S.C. 1831i, which 
requires certain State savings associations to notify the FDIC before 
appointing or employing directors and senior executive officers.



Sec. 390.361  Applicable definitions.

    The following definitions apply to Secs. 390.360 through 390.368:
    Director means an individual who serves on the board of directors of 
a State savings association. This term does not include an advisory 
director who:
    (1) Is not elected by the shareholders;
    (2) Is not authorized to vote on any matters before the board of 
directors or any committee of the board of directors;
    (3) Provides only general policy advice to the board of directors or 
any committee of the board of directors; and
    (4) Has not been identified by the FDIC in writing as an individual 
who performs the functions of a director, or who exercises significant 
influence over, or participates in, major policymaking decisions of the 
board of directors.
    Senior executive officer means an individual who holds the title or 
performs the function of one or more of the following positions (without 
regard to title, salary, or compensation): president, chief executive 
officer, chief operating officer, chief financial officer, chief lending 
officer, or chief investment officer. Senior executive officer also 
includes any other person identified by the FDIC in writing as an 
individual who exercises significant influence over, or participates in, 
major policymaking decisions, whether or not hired as an employee.
    Troubled condition means:
    (1) A State savings association that has a composite rating of 4 or 
5, as composite rating is defined in Sec. 390.101(c).
    (2) [Reserved]
    (3) A State savings association that is subject to a capital 
directive, a cease-and-desist order, a consent order, a formal written 
agreement, or a prompt corrective action directive relating to the 
safety and soundness or financial viability of the State savings 
association, unless otherwise informed in writing by the FDIC; or
    (4) A State savings association that is informed in writing by the 
FDIC that it is in troubled condition based on information available to 
the FDIC.



Sec. 390.362  Who must give prior notice?

    (a) State savings association. Except as provided under 
Sec. 390.368, you must notify the FDIC at least 30 days before adding or 
replacing any member of your board of directors, employing any person as 
a senior executive officer, or changing the responsibilities of any 
senior executive officer so that the person would assume a different 
senior executive position if:
    (1) You are a State savings association and at least one of the 
following circumstances apply:
    (i) You do not comply with all minimum capital requirements under 
subpart Z;
    (ii) You are in troubled condition; or
    (iii) The FDIC has notified you, in connection with its review of a 
capital

[[Page 1225]]

restoration plan required under section 38 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act or subpart Y or otherwise, that a notice is required under 
Secs. 390.360 through 390.368; or
    (2) [Reserved]
    (b) Notice by individual. If you are an individual seeking election 
to the board of directors of a State savings association described in 
paragraph (a) of this section, and have not been nominated by 
management, you must either provide the prior notice required under 
paragraph (a) of this section or follow the process under 
Sec. 390.368(b).



Sec. 390.363  What procedures govern the filing of my notice?

    The procedures found in Secs. 390.103 through 390.110 govern the 
filing of your notice under Sec. 390.362.



Sec. 390.364  What information must I include in my notice?

    (a) Content requirements. Your notice must include:
    (1) The information required under 12 U.S.C. 1817(j)(6)(A), and the 
information prescribed in the Interagency Notice of Change in Director 
or Senior Executive Officer and the Interagency Biographical and 
Financial Report which are available from the appropriate FDIC regions 
as defined in Sec. 303.2 of this chapter;
    (2) Legible fingerprints of the proposed director or senior 
executive officer. You are not required to file fingerprints if, within 
three years prior to the date of submission of the notice, the proposed 
director or senior executive officer provided legible fingerprints as 
part of a notice filed with the FDIC under 12 U.S.C. 1831i; and
    (3) Such other information required by the FDIC.
    (b) Modification of content requirements. The FDIC may require or 
accept other information in place of the content requirements in 
paragraph (a) of this section.



Sec. 390.365  What procedures govern the FDIC's review of my notice
for completeness?

    The FDIC will first review your notice to determine whether it is 
complete.
    (a) If your notice is complete, the FDIC will notify you in writing 
of the date that the FDIC received the complete notice.
    (b) If your notice is not complete, the FDIC will notify you in 
writing what additional information you need to submit, why we need the 
information, and when you must submit it. You must, within the specified 
time period, provide additional information or request that the FDIC 
suspend processing of the notice. If you fail to act within the 
specified time period, the FDIC may treat the notice as withdrawn or may 
review the application based on the information provided.



Sec. 390.366  What standards and procedures will govern the FDIC 
review of the substance of my notice?

    The FDIC will disapprove a notice if, pursuant to the standard set 
forth in 12 U.S.C. 1831i(e), the FDIC finds that the competence, 
experience, character, or integrity of the proposed FDIC or senior 
executive officer indicates that it would not be in the best interests 
of the depositors of the State savings association or of the public to 
permit the individual to be employed by, or associated with, the State 
savings association. If the FDIC disapproves a notice, it will issue a 
written notice that explains why the FDIC disapproved the notice. The 
FDIC will send the notice to the State savings association and the 
individual.



Sec. 390.367  When may a proposed director or senior executive officer
begin service?

    (a) A proposed director or senior executive officer may begin 
service 30 days after the date the FDIC receives all required 
information, unless:
    (1) The FDIC notifies you that it has disapproved the notice; or
    (2) The FDIC extends the 30-day period for an additional period not 
to exceed 60 days. If the FDIC extends the 30-day period, it will notify 
you in writing that the period has been extended, and will state the 
reason for the extension. The proposed director or senior executive 
officer may begin service upon expiration of the extended period, unless 
the FDIC notifies you

[[Page 1226]]

that it has disapproved the notice during the extended period.
    (b) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this section, a proposed or 
senior executive officer may begin service after the FDIC notifies you, 
in writing, of its intention not to disapprove the notice.



Sec. 390.368  When will the FDIC waive the prior notice requirement?

    (a) Waiver request. (1) An individual may serve as a director or 
senior executive officer before filing a notice as described in 
Secs. 390.360 through 390.368 if the FDIC issues a written finding that:
    (i) Delay would threaten the safety or soundness of the State 
savings association;
    (ii) Delay would not be in the public interest; or
    (iii) Other extraordinary circumstances exist that justify waiver of 
prior notice.
    (2) If the FDIC grants a waiver, you must file a notice as described 
in Secs. 390.360-390.368 within the time period specified by the FDIC.
    (b) Automatic waiver. An individual may serve as a director before 
filing a notice as described in Secs. 390.360 through 390.368, if the 
individual was not nominated by management and the individual submits a 
notice as described in Secs. 390.360 through 390.368 within seven days 
after election as a director.
    (c) Subsequent FDIC action. The FDIC may disapprove a notice within 
30 days after the FDIC issues a waiver under paragraph (a) of this 
section or within 30 days after the election of an individual who has 
filed a notice and is serving pursuant to an automatic waiver under 
paragraph (b) of this section.



                    Subpart T_Accounting Requirements



Sec. 390.380  Form and content of financial statements.

    (a) This section states the requirements as to form and content of 
financial statements included by a State savings association in the 
following documents. However, the FDIC's regulations governing the 
applicable documents specify the actual financial statements that are to 
be included in that document.
    (1) Any proxy statement or offering circular required to be used in 
connection with a conversion under 12 CFR part 192.
    (2) Any offering circular or nonpublic offering materials required 
to be used in connection with an offer or sale of securities under 
subpart W.
    (b) Except as otherwise provided by the FDIC by rule, regulation, or 
order made specifically applicable to financial statements governed by 
this section, financial statements shall:
    (1) Be prepared and presented in accordance with generally accepted 
accounting principles;
    (2) Comply with Sec. 390.384;
    (3) Consistent with the provisions of this subpart, comply with 
articles 1, 2, 3, 4, 10, and 11 of Regulation S-X adopted by the 
Securities and Exchange Commission (17 CFR 210.l through 210.4, 210.10, 
and 210.11).
    (4) Be audited, when required, by an independent auditor in 
accordance with the standards imposed by the American Institute of 
Certified Public Accountants.
    (c) The term ``financial statements'' includes all notes to the 
statements and related schedules.

[76 FR 47655, Aug. 5, 2011, as amended at 79 FR 63502, Oct. 24, 2014]



Sec. 390.381  Definitions.

    (See also 17 CFR 210.1-02.)
    (a) Registrant. The term ``registrant'' means an applicant, a State 
savings association, or any other person required to prepare financial 
statements in accordance with this subpart.
    (b) Significant subsidiary. The term ``significant subsidiary'' 
means a subsidiary, including its subsidiaries, which meets any of the 
following conditions:
    (1) The State savings association's and its other subsidiaries' 
investments in and advances to the subsidiary exceed 10 percent of the 
total assets of the association and its subsidiaries consolidated as of 
the end of the most recently completed fiscal year (for purposes of 
determining whether financial statements of a business acquired or to be 
acquired in a business combination accounted for as a pooling of 
interests are required pursuant to 17 CFR 210.3-05, this condition is 
also met when the

[[Page 1227]]

number of common shares exchanged by the State savings association 
exceeds 10 percent of its total common shares outstanding at the date 
the combination is initiated); or
    (2) The State savings association's and its other subsidiaries' 
proportionate share of the total assets (after intercompany 
eliminations) of the subsidiary exceeds 10 percent of the total assets 
of the State savings association and its subsidiaries consolidated as of 
the end of the most recently completed fiscal year; or
    (3) The State savings association's and its other subsidiaries' 
equity in the income from continuing operations before income taxes, 
extraordinary items, and cumulative effect of a change in accounting 
principle of the subsidiary exceeds 10 percent of such income of the 
State savings association and its subsidiaries consolidated for the most 
recently completed fiscal year.
    (4) Computational note: For purposes of making the prescribed income 
test the following guidance should be applied:
    (i) When a loss has been incurred by either the parent or its 
consolidated subsidiaries or the tested subsidiary, but not both, the 
equity in the income or loss of the tested subsidiary should be excluded 
from the income of the State savings association and its subsidiaries 
consolidated for purposes of the computation.
    (ii) If income of the State savings association and its subsidiaries 
consolidated for the most recent fiscal year is at least 10 percent 
lower than the average of the income for the last five fiscal years, 
such average income should be substituted for purposes of the 
computation. Any loss years should be omitted for purposes of computing 
average income.



Sec. 390.382  Qualification of public accountant.
(See also 17 CFR 210.2-01.)

    The term ``qualified public accountant'' means a certified public 
accountant or licensed public accountant certified or licensed by a 
regulatory authority of a State or other political subdivision of the 
United States who is in good standing as such under the laws of the 
jurisdiction where the home office of the registrant to be audited is 
located. Any person or firm who is suspended from practice before the 
Securities and Exchange Commission or other governmental agency is not a 
``qualified public accountant'' for purposes of this section.



Sec. 390.383  Condensed financial information [Parent only].

    (a) The information prescribed by Schedule III required by section 
IV of the appendix to Sec. 390.384 shall be presented in a note to the 
financial statements when the restricted net assets (17 CFR 210.4-
08(e)(3)) of consolidated subsidiaries exceed 25 percent of consolidated 
net assets as of the end of the most recently completed fiscal year. The 
investment in and indebtedness of and to State savings association 
subsidiaries shall be stated separately in the condensed balance sheet 
from amounts for other subsidiaries; and the amount of cash dividends 
paid to the parent State savings association for each of the last three 
years by the State savings association subsidiaries shall be stated 
separately in the condensed income statement from amounts for other 
subsidiaries.
    (b) For purposes of the above test, restricted net assets of 
consolidated subsidiaries shall mean that amount of the State savings 
association's proportionate share of net assets of consolidated 
subsidiaries (after intercompany eliminations) which as of the end of 
the most recent year may not be transferred to the parent company by 
subsidiaries in the form of loans, advances, or cash dividends without 
the consent of a third party (i.e., lender, regulatory agency, foreign 
government, etc.).
    (c) Where restrictions on the amount of funds which may be loaned or 
advanced differ from the amount restricted as to transfer in the form of 
cash dividends, the amount least restrictive to the subsidiary shall be 
used. Redeemable preferred stocks (See item I (22) in the appendix to 
Sec. 390.384) and minority interest (See item I (21) in the appendix to 
Sec. 390.384) shall be deducted in computing net assets for purposes of 
this test.

[[Page 1228]]



Sec. 390.384  Financial statements for conversions, SEC filings,
and offering circulars.

    This section and its appendix pertain to the form and content of 
financial statements included as part of:
    (a) A conversion application under 12 CFR part 192 including 
financial statements in proxy statements and offering circulars,
    (b) A filing under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, 15 U.S.C. 
78a et seq., and
    (c) Any offering circular required to be used in connection with the 
issuance of mutual capital certificates under 12 CFR 163.74 and debt 
securities under Sec. 390.341.

       Appendix to Sec. 390.384--Financial Statement Presentation.

    This appendix specifies the various line items which should appear 
on the face of the financial statements governed by Sec. 390.384 and 
additional disclosures which should be included with the financial 
statements in related notes.

                            I. Balance Sheet

    Balance sheets shall comply with the following provisions:

                                 Assets

    1. Cash and amounts due from depository institutions. (a) The 
amounts in this caption should include noninterest-bearing deposits with 
depository institutions.
    (b) State in a note the amount and terms of any deposits in 
depository institutions held as compensating balances against long- or 
short-term borrowing arrangements. This disclosure should include the 
provisions of any restrictions as to withdrawal or usage. Restrictions 
may include legally restricted deposits held as compensating balances 
against short-term borrowing arrangements, contracts entered into with 
others, or company statements of intention with regard to particular 
deposits; however, time deposits and short-term certificates of deposits 
are not generally included in legally restricted deposits. In cases 
where compensating balance arrangements exist but are not agreements 
which legally restrict the use of cash amounts shown on the balance 
sheet, describe in the notes to the financial statements these 
arrangements and the amount involved, if determinable, for the most 
recent audited balance sheet required and for any subsequent unaudited 
balance sheet required. Compensating balances that are maintained under 
an agreement to ensure future credit availability shall be disclosed in 
the notes to the financial statements along with the amount and terms of 
the agreement.
    (c) Checks outstanding in excess of an applicant's book balance in a 
demand deposit account shall be shown as a liability.
    2. Interest-bearing deposits in other banks.
    3. Federal funds sold and securities purchased under resale 
agreements or similar arrangements. These amounts should be presented, 
i.e., gross and not netted against Federal funds purchased and 
securities sold under agreement to repurchase, as reported in caption 
15.
    4. Trading account assets. Include securities considered to be held 
for trading purposes.
    5. Other short-term investments.
    6. Investment securities. (a) Include securities considered to be 
held for investment purposes. Disclose the aggregate book value of 
investment securities as the line item on the balance sheet; and also 
show on the face of the balance sheet the aggregate market value at the 
balance sheet date. The aggregate amounts should include securities 
pledged, loaned, or sold under repurchase agreements and similar 
arrangements. Borrowed securities and securities purchased under resale 
agreements or similar arrangements should be excluded.
    (b) Disclose in a note the carrying value and market value of 
securities of (i) the U.S. Treasury and other U.S. Government agencies 
and corporations; (ii) states of the U.S. and political subdivisions 
thereof; and (iii) other securities.
    7. Assets held for sale. Investments in assets considered to be held 
for sale purposes should be reported separately in the statement of 
financial condition.
    8. Loans. (a) Disclose separately: (i) Total loans (including 
financing type leases), (ii) allowance for loan losses, (iii) unearned 
income on installment loans, (iv) discount on loans purchased, and (v) 
loans in process.
    (b) State on the balance sheet or in a note the amount of loans in 
each of the following categories: (i) Real estate mortgage; (ii) real 
estate construction; (iii) installment; and (iv) commercial, financial, 
and agricultural.
    (c)(i) Include under the real estate mortgage category loans payable 
in monthly, quarterly, or other periodic installments and secured by 
developed income property and/or personal residences.
    (ii) Include under the real estate construction category loans 
secured by real estate which are made for the purpose of financing 
construction of real estate and land development projects.
    (iii) Include under the installment category loans to individuals 
generally repayable in monthly installments. This category shall 
include, but not be limited to, credit card and related activities, 
individual automobile loans, other installment loans, mobile home loans, 
and residential repair and modernization loans.

[[Page 1229]]

    (iv) Include under the commercial, financial, and agricultural 
category all loans not included in another category. This category shall 
include, but not be limited to, loans to real estate investment trusts, 
mortgage companies, banks, and other financial institutions; loans for 
carrying securities; and loans for agricultural purposes. Do not include 
loans secured primarily by developed real estate.
    (d) State separately any other loan category regardless of relative 
size if necessary to reflect any unusual risk concentration.
    (e) Unearned income on installment loans shall be shown and deducted 
separately from total loans.
    (f) Unamortized discounts on purchased loans shall be deducted 
separately from total loans.
    (g) Loans in process shall be deducted separately from total loans.
    (h) A series of categories other than those specified in item (b) of 
paragraph 8. may be used to present details of loans if considered a 
more appropriate presentation. The categories specified in item (b) of 
paragraph 8. should be considered the minimum categories that may be 
presented.
    (i) For each period for which an income statement is presented, 
disclose in a note the total dollar amount of loans being serviced by 
the State savings association for the benefit of others.
    (j)(i)(A) As of each balance sheet date, disclose in a note the 
aggregate dollar amount of loans (exclusive of loans to any such persons 
which in the aggregate do not exceed $60,000 during the last year) made 
by the State savings association or any of its subsidiaries to 
directors, executive officers, or principal holders of equity securities 
(17 CFR 210.1-02) of the State savings association or any of its 
significant subsidiaries (17 CFR 210.1-02) or to any associate of such 
persons. For the latest fiscal year, an analysis of activity with 
respect to such aggregate loans to related parties should be provided. 
The analysis should include at the beginning of the period new loans, 
repayments, and other changes. (Other changes, if significant, should be 
explained.)
    (B) This disclosure need not be furnished when the aggregate amount 
of such loans at the balance sheet date (or with respect to the latest 
fiscal year, the maximum amount outstanding during the period) does not 
exceed 5 percent of stockholders' equity at the balance sheet date.
    (ii) If a significant portion of the aggregate amount of loans 
outstanding at the end of the fiscal year disclosed pursuant to item 
(i)(A) of this paragraph (j) relates to nonaccrual, past due, 
restructured, and potential problem loans (see Securities and Exchange 
Commission's Securities Act Industry Guide 3, section III.C.), so state 
and disclose the aggregate amount of such loans along with such other 
information necessary to an understanding of the effects of the 
transactions on the financial statements.
    (iii) Notwithstanding the aggregate disclosure called for by 
paragraph (j)(i) of this balance sheet caption 8, if any loans were not 
made in the ordinary course of business during any period for which an 
income statement is required to be filed, provide an appropriate 
description of each such loan (see 17 CFR 210.9-03.7(e)(3)).
    (iv) For purposes only of Balance Sheet item 8(j), the following 
definitions shall apply:
    (A) Associate used to indicate a relationship with any person means 
(1) any corporation, venture, or organization of which such person is a 
general partner or is, directly or indirectly, the beneficial owner of 
10 percent or more of any class of equity securities; (2) any trust or 
other estate in which such person has a substantial beneficial interest 
or for which such person serves as trustee or in a similar capacity; and 
(3) any member of the immediate family of any of the foregoing persons.
    (B) Executive officer means the president, any vice president in 
charge of a principal business unit, division, or function (such as 
loans, investments, operations, administration, or finance), and any 
other officer or person who performs similar policy-making functions.
    (C) Immediate family with regard to a person means such person's 
spouse, parents, children, siblings, mother- and father-in-law, sons- 
and daughters-in-law, and brothers- and sisters-in-law.
    (D) Ordinary course of business with regard to loans means those 
loans which were made on substantially the same terms, including 
interest rate and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for 
comparable transactions with unrelated persons and did not involve more 
than the normal risk of collectibility or present other unfavorable 
features.
    (k) For each period for which an income statement is presented, 
furnish in a note a statement of changes in the allowance for loan 
losses, showing balances at beginning and end of the period, provision 
charged to income, recoveries of amounts previously charged off, and 
losses charged to the allowance.
    9. Premises and equipment.
    10. Real estate owned. State, parenthetically or otherwise:
    (a) The amount of real estate owned by class as described in item 
(b) of paragraph 10. and the basis for determining that amount; and
    (b) A description of each class of real estate owned (i) acquired by 
foreclosure or by deed in lieu of foreclosure, (ii) in judgment and 
subject to redemption, or (iii) acquired for development or resale. Show 
separately

[[Page 1230]]

any accumulated depreciation or valuation allowances. Disclose the 
policies regarding, and amounts of, capitalized costs, including 
interest.
    11. Investment in joint ventures. In a note, present summarized 
aggregate financial statements for investments in real estate or other 
joint ventures which individually (a) are 20 percent or more owned by 
the State savings association or any of its subsidiaries, or (b) have 
liabilities (including contingent liabilities) to the parent exceeding 
10 percent of the parent's regulatory capital. If an allowance for real 
estate losses subsequent to acquisition is maintained, the amount shall 
be disclosed, deducted from the other real estate owned, and a statement 
of changes in the allowance showing balances at beginning and end of 
period should be included. Provision charged to income and losses 
charged to the allowance account shall be furnished for each period for 
which an income statement is filed.
    12. Other assets. (a) Disclose separately on the balance sheet or in 
a note thereto any of the following assets or any other asset the amount 
of which exceeds 30 percent of stockholders' equity. The remaining 
assets may be shown as one amount.
    (i) Accrued interest receivable. State separately those amounts 
relating to loans and those amounts relating to investments.
    (ii) Excess of cost over assets acquired (net of amortization).
    (b) State in a note (i) amounts representing investments in 
affiliates and investments in other persons which are accounted for by 
the equity method, and (ii) indebtedness of affiliates and other 
persons, the investments in which are accounted for by the equity 
method. State the basis of determining the amounts reported under 
paragraph (b)(i).
    13. Total assets.

                  Liabilities, and Stockholders' Equity

    14. Deposits. (a) Disclose separately on the balance sheet or in a 
note the amounts in the following categories of interest-bearing and 
noninterest-bearing deposits: (i) NOW account and MMDA deposits, (ii) 
savings deposits, and (iii) time deposits.
    (b) Include under the savings-deposits category interest-bearing 
deposits without specified maturity or contractual provisions requiring 
advance notice of intention to withdraw funds. Include deposits for 
which a State savings association may require at its option written 
notice of intended withdrawal not less than 14 days in advance.
    (c) Include under the time-deposits category deposits subject to 
provisions specifying maturity or other withdrawal conditions such as 
time certificates of deposits, open account time deposits, and deposits 
accumulated for the payment of personal loans.
    (d) Include accrued interest or dividends, if appropriate.
    15. Short-term borrowings. (a) State separately, here or in a note, 
the amounts payable for (i) Federal funds purchased and securities sold 
under agreements to repurchase, (ii) commercial paper, and (iii) other 
short-term borrowings.
    (b) Federal funds purchased and sales of securities under repurchase 
agreements shall be reported gross and not netted against sales of 
Federal funds and purchase of securities under resale agreements.
    (c) Include as securities sold under agreements to repurchase all 
transactions of this type regardless of (i) whether they are called 
simultaneous purchases and sales, buy-backs, turnarounds, overnight 
transactions, delayed deliveries, or other terms signifying the same 
substantive transaction, and (ii) whether the transactions are with the 
same or different institutions, if the purpose of the transactions is to 
repurchase identical or similar securities.
    (d) The amount and terms (including commitment fees and the 
conditions under which lines may be withdrawn) of unused lines of credit 
for short-term financing shall be disclosed, if significant, in the 
notes to the financial statements. The amount of these lines of credit 
which support a commercial paper borrowing arrangement or similar 
arrangements shall be separately identified.
    16. Advance payments by borrowers for taxes and insurance.
    17. Other liabilities. Disclose separately on the balance sheet or 
in a note any of the following liabilities or any other items which are 
individually in excess of 30 percent of stockholders' equity (except 
that amounts in excess of 5 percent of stockholders' equity should be 
disclosed with respect to item (d)). The remaining items may be shown as 
one amount.
    (a) Income taxes payable.
    (b) Deferred income taxes.
    (c) Indebtedness to affiliate and other persons the investment in 
which is accounted for by the equity method.
    (d) Indebtedness to directors, executive officers, and principal 
holders of equity securities of the registrant or any of its significant 
subsidiaries. (The guidance in balance sheet caption ``8(j)'' shall be 
used to identify related parties for purposes of this disclosure.)
    18. Bonds, mortgages, and similar debt. (a) Include bonds, Federal 
Home Loan Bank advances, capital notes, debentures, mortgages, and 
similar debt.
    (b) For each issue or type of obligation state in a note:
    (i) The general character of each type of debt, including: (A) The 
rate of interest, (B) the date of maturity, or, if maturing serially, a 
brief indication of the serial maturities, such as ``maturing serially 
from 1980 to 1990,'' (C) if the payment of principal or

[[Page 1231]]

interest is contingent, an appropriate indication of such contingency, 
(D) a brief indication of priority, and (E) if convertible, the basis. 
For amounts owed to related parties see 17 CFR 210.4-08(k).
    (ii) The amount and terms (including commitment fees and the 
conditions under which commitments may be withdrawn) of unused 
commitments for long-term financing arrangements that, if used, would be 
disclosed under this caption shall be disclosed in the notes to the 
financial statements, if significant.
    (c) State in the notes with appropriate explanations (i) the title 
and amount of each issue of debt of a subsidiary included in item (a) of 
paragraph 18 which has not been assumed or guaranteed by the State 
savings association, and (ii) any liens on premises of a subsidiary or 
its consolidated subsidiaries which have not been assumed by the 
subsidiary or its consolidated subsidiaries.
    19. Deferred credits. State separately those items which exceed 30 
percent of stockholders' equity.
    20. Commitments and contingent liabilities. Total commitments to 
fund loans should be disclosed. The dollar amounts and terms of other 
than floating market-rate commitments should also be disclosed.
    21. Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries.
    22. Preferred stock subject to mandatory redemption requirements or 
the redemption of which is outside the control of the issuer. (a) 
Include under this caption amounts applicable to any class of stock 
which has any of the following characteristics: (i) It is redeemable at 
a fixed or determinable price on a fixed or determinable date or dates, 
whether by operation of a sinking fund or otherwise; (ii) it is 
redeemable at the option of the holder; or (iii) it has conditions for 
redemption which are not solely within the control of the issuer, such 
as stock which must be redeemed out of future earnings. Amounts 
attributable to preferred stock which is not redeemable or is redeemable 
solely at the option of the issuer shall be included under caption 23 
unless it meets one or more of the above criteria.
    (b) State on the face of the balance sheet the title, carrying 
amount, and redemption amount of each issue. (If there is more than one 
issue, these amounts may be aggregated on the face of the balance sheet 
and details concerning each issue may be presented in the note required 
by item (c) of paragraph 22.) Show also the dollar amount of any shares 
subscribed for but unissued, and show the deduction of subscriptions 
receivable therefrom. If the carrying value is different from the 
redemption amount, describe the accounting treatment for such difference 
in the note required by item (c) of paragraph 22. Also state in this 
note or on the face of the balance sheet, for each issue, the number of 
shares authorized and the number of shares issued or outstanding, as 
appropriate. (See 17 CFR 210.4-07.)
    (c) State in a separate note captioned ``Redeemable Preferred 
Stock'' (i) a general description of each issue, including its 
redemption features (e.g., sinking fund, at option of holders, out of 
future earnings) and the rights, if any, of holders in the event of 
default, including the effect, if any, on junior securities in the event 
a required dividend, sinking fund, or other redemption payment(s) is not 
made, (ii) the combined aggregate amount of redemption requirements for 
all issues each year for the five years following the date of the latest 
balance sheet, and (iii) the changes in each issue for each period for 
which an income statement is required to be presented. (See also 17 CFR 
210.4-08(d).)
    (d) Securities reported under this caption are not to be included 
under a general heading ``stockholders' equity'' or combined in a total 
with items described in captions 23, 24 or 25, which follow.
    23. Preferred stock which is not redeemable or is redeemed solely at 
the option of the issuer. State on the face of the balance sheet, or, if 
more than one issue is outstanding, state in a note, the title of each 
issue and the dollar amount thereof. Show also the dollar amount of any 
shares subscribed for but unissued, and show the deduction of 
subscriptions receivable. State on the face of the balance sheet or in a 
note, for each issue, the number of shares authorized and the number of 
shares issued or outstanding, as appropriate. (See 17 CFR 210.4-07.) 
Show in a note or separate statement the changes in each class of 
preferred shares reported under this caption for each period for which 
an income statement is required to be presented. (See also 17 CFR 210.4-
08(d).)
    24. Common stock. For each class of common shares state, on the face 
of the balance sheet, the number of shares issued or outstanding, as 
appropriate (see 17 CFR 210.4-07), and the dollar amount thereof. If 
convertible, this fact should be indicated on the face of the balance 
sheet. For each class of common stock state, on the face of the balance 
sheet or in a note, the title of the issue, the number of shares 
authorized, and, if convertible, the basis for conversion (see also 17 
CFR 210.4-08(d).) Show also the dollar amount of any common stock 
subscribed for but unissued, and show the deduction of subscriptions 
receivable. Show in a note or statement the changes in each class of 
common stock for each period for which an income statement is required 
to be presented.
    25. Other stockholders' equity. (a) Separate captions shall be shown 
on the face of the balance sheet for (i) additional paid-in capital, 
(ii) other additional capital, and (iii) retained earnings, both (A) 
restricted and (B)

[[Page 1232]]

unrestricted. (See 17 CFR 210.4-08(e).) Additional paid-in capital and 
other additional capital may be combined with the stock caption to which 
it applies, if appropriate. State whether or not the State savings 
association is in compliance with the Federal regulatory capital 
requirements (and state requirements where applicable). Also include the 
dollar amount of those regulatory capital requirements and the amount by 
which the State savings association exceeds or fails to meet those 
requirements.
    (b) For a period of at least 10 years subsequent to the effective 
date of a quasi-reorganization, any description of retained earnings 
shall indicate the point in time from which the new retained earnings 
dates, and for a period of at least three years shall indicate, on the 
face of the balance sheet, the total amount of the deficit eliminated.
    (c) Changes in stockholders' equity shall be disclosed in accordance 
with the requirements of 17 CFR 210.3-04.
    26. Total liabilities and stockholders' equity.

                          II. Income Statement

    Income statements shall comply with the following provisions:
    1. Interest and fees on loans. (a) Include interest, service 
charges, and fees which are related to or are an adjustment of the loan 
interest yield.
    (b) Current amortization of premiums on mortgages or other loans 
shall be deducted from interest on loans, and current accretion of 
discount on such items shall be added to interest on loans.
    (c) Discounts and other deferred amounts which are related to or are 
an adjustment of the loan interest yield shall be amortized into income 
using the interest (level yield) method.
    2. Interest and dividends on investment securities. Include 
accretion of discount on securities and deduct amortization of premiums 
on securities.
    3. Trading account interest. Include interest from securities 
carried in a dealer trading account or accounts that are held 
principally for resale to customers.
    4. Other interest income. Include interest on short-term investments 
(Federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell) 
and interest on bank deposits.
    5. Total interest income.
    6. Interest on deposits. Include interest on all deposits. On the 
income statement or in a note, state separately, in the same categories 
as those specified for deposits at balance sheet caption 14(a), the 
interest on those deposits. Early withdrawal penalties should be netted 
against interest on deposits and, if material, disclosed on the income 
statement.
    7. Interest on short-term borrowings. Include interest on borrowed 
funds, including Federal funds purchased, securities sold under 
agreements to repurchase, commercial paper, and other short-term 
borrowings.
    8. Interest on long-term borrowings. Include interest on bonds, 
capital notes, debentures, mortgages on State savings association 
premises, capitalized leases, and similar debt.
    9. Total interest expense.
    10. Net interest income.
    11. Provision for loan losses.
    12. Net interest income after provision for loan losses.
    13. Other income. Disclose separately any of the following amounts, 
or any other item of other income, which exceeds 1 percent of the 
aggregate of total interest income and other income. The remaining 
amount may be shown as one amount, except for investment securities 
gains or losses which shall be shown separately regardless of size.
    (a) Commissions and fees from fiduciary activities.
    (b) Fees for other services to customers.
    (c) Commissions, fees, and markups on securities underwriting and 
other securities activities.
    (d) Profit or loss on transactions in investment securities.
    (e) Equity in earnings of unconsolidated subsidiaries and 50-
percent- or less-owned persons.
    (f) Gains or losses on disposition of investments in securities of 
subsidiaries and 50-percent- or less-owned persons.
    (g) Profit or loss from real estate operations.
    (h) Other fees related to loan originations or commitments not 
included in income statement caption 1.
    The remaining other income may be shown in one amount.
    (i) Investment securities gains or losses. The method followed in 
determining the cost of investments sold (e.g., ``average cost,'' 
``first-in, first-out,'' or ``identified certificate'') and related 
income taxes shall be disclosed.
    14. Other expenses. Disclose separately any of the following 
amounts, or any other item of other expense, which exceeds 1 percent of 
the aggregate of total interest income and other income. The remaining 
amounts may be shown as one amount.
    (a) Salaries and employee benefits.
    (b) Net occupancy expense of premises.
    (c) Net cost of operations of other real estate (including 
provisions for real estate losses, rental income, and gains and losses 
on sales of real estate).
    (d) Minority interest in income of consolidated subsidiaries.
    (e) Goodwill amortization.
    15. Other income and expenses. State separately material events or 
transactions that are unusual in nature or occur infrequently, but not 
both, and therefore do not meet both

[[Page 1233]]

criteria for classification as an extraordinary item. Examples of items 
which would be reported separately are gain or loss from the sale of 
premises and equipment, provision for loss on real estate owned, or 
provision for gain or loss on the sale of loans.
    16. Income or losses before income tax expense.
    17. Income tax expense. The information required by 17 CFR 210.4-
08(h) should be disclosed.
    18. Income or loss before extraordinary items effects of changes in 
accounting principles.
    19. Extraordinary items, less applicable tax.
    20. Cumulative effects of changes in accounting principles.
    21. Net income or loss.
    22. Earnings-per-share data.
    23. Conversion footnote. If the State savings association is an 
applicant for conversion from a mutual to a stock association or has 
converted within the last three years, describe in a note the general 
terms of the conversion and restrictions on the operations of the State 
savings association imposed by the conversion. Also, state the amount of 
net proceeds received from the conversion and costs associated with the 
conversion.
    24. Mergers and acquisitions. For the period in which a business 
combination occurs and is accounted for by the purchase method of 
accounting, in addition to those disclosures required by Accounting 
Principles Board Opinion No. 16, the State savings association shall 
make those disclosures as noted below for all combinations involving 
significant acquisitions. (A significant acquisition is defined for this 
purpose to be one in which the assets of the acquired State savings 
association, or group of State savings associations, exceed 10 percent 
of the assets of the consolidated State savings association at the end 
of the most recent period being reported upon).
    (a) Amounts and descriptions of discounts and premiums related to 
recording the aggregate interest-bearing assets and liabilities at their 
fair market value. The disclosure should also include the methods of 
amortization or accretion and the estimated remaining lives.
    (b) The net effect on net income before taxes of the amortization 
and accretion of discounts, premiums, and intangible assets related to 
the purchase accounting transaction(s). For subsequent periods, the 
State savings association shall disclose the remaining total unamortized 
or unaccreted amounts of discounts, premiums, and intangible assets as 
of the date of the most recent balance sheet presented. In addition, the 
State savings association shall disclose the net effect on net income 
before taxes of the amortization and accretion of discounts, premiums, 
and intangible assets related to prior business combinations accounted 
for by the purchase method of accounting. Such disclosures need not be 
made if the total amounts of discounts, premiums, or intangible assets 
do not exceed 30 percent of stockholders' equity as of the date of the 
most recent balance sheet presented.

                      III. Statement of Cash Flows

    The amounts shown in this statement should be those items which 
materially enhance the reader's understanding of the State savings 
association's business. For example, gains from sales of loans should be 
segregated from sales of mortgage-backed securities and other 
securities, if material, proceeds from principal repayments and 
maturities from loans and mortgage-backed securities should be 
segregated from proceeds from sales of loans and mortgage-backed 
securities, purchases of loans, mortgage-backed securities and other 
securities should be segregated, if material. Additional guidance may be 
found in the FASB's Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 95 
Statement of Cash Flows.

                   IV. Schedules Required To Be Filed

    The following schedules, which should be examined by an independent 
accountant, shall be filed unless the required information is not 
applicable or is presented in the related financial statements:
    (1) Schedule I--Indebtedness of and to related parties--Not Current. 
For each period for which an income statement is required, the following 
schedule should be filed in support of the amounts required to be 
reported by balance sheet items 8(j) and 17(c) unless such aggregate 
amount does not exceed 5 percent of stockholders' equity at either the 
beginning or the end of the period:

                               Indebtedness of and to Related Parties--Not Current
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                Indebtedness of--
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Name of person \1\    Balance at beginning      Additions \2\          Deductions \3\        Balance at end
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                A                      B                       C                     D                      E
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The persons named shall be grouped as in the related schedule required for investments in related parties.
  The information called for shall be shown separately for any persons whose investments were shown separately
  in such related schedule.
\2\ For each person named in column A, explain in a note the nature and purpose of any increase during the
  period that is in excess of 10 percent of the related balance at either the beginning or end of the period.
\3\ If deduction was other than a receipt or disbursement of cash, explain.


[[Page 1234]]


                               Indebtedness of and to Related Parties--Not Current
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                Indebtedness to--
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Name of person \1\    Balance at beginning      Additions \2\          Deductions \3\        Balance at end
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                A                      F                      G                      H                      I
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The persons named shall be grouped as in the related schedule required for investments in related parties.
  The information called for shall be shown separately for any persons whose investments were shown separately
  in such related schedule.
\2\ For each person named in column A, explain in a note the nature and purpose of any increase during the
  period that is in excess of 10 percent of the related balance at either the beginning or end of the period.
\3\ If deduction was other than a receipt or disbursement of cash, explain.

    (2) Schedule II--Guarantees of securities of other issuers. The 
following schedule should be filed as of the date of the most recently 
audited balance sheet with respect to any guarantees of securities of 
other issuers by the person for which the statements are being filed:

              Guarantees of Securities of Other Issuers \4\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Col. A. Name of
    issuer of       Col. B. Title of                     Col. D. Amount
    securities       issue of each      Col. C. Total    owned by person
  guaranteed by         class of           amount        or persons for
 person for which      securities      guaranteed and    which statement
   statement is        guaranteed      outstanding \5\      is filed
      filed
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\4\ Indicate in a note to the most recent schedule being filed for a
  particular person or group any significant changes since the date of
  the related balance sheet. If this schedule is filed in support of
  consolidated or combined statements, there shall be set forth
  guarantees by any person included in the consolidation or combination,
  except that such guarantees of securities which are included in the
  consolidated or combined balance sheet need not be set forth.
\5\ Indicate any amounts included in column C which are included also in
  column D or E.


              Guarantees of Securities of Other Issuers \4\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Col. G. Nature
                                                         of any default
                                                           by issue of
 Col. A. Name of                                           securities
    issuer of      Col. E. Amount in                      guaranteed in
    securities        treasury of      Col. F. Nature      principal,
  guaranteed by        issuer of      of guarantee \6\      interest,
 person for which      securities                        sinking fund or
   statement is        guaranteed                          redemption
      filed                                              provisions, or
                                                           payment of
                                                          dividends \7\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\4\ Indicate in a note to the most recent schedule being filed for a
  particular person or group any significant changes since the date of
  the related balance sheet. If this schedule is filed in support of
  consolidated or combined statements, there shall be set forth
  guarantees by any person included in the consolidation or combination,
  except that such guarantees of securities which are included in the
  consolidated or combined balance sheet need not be set forth.
\6\ There need be made only a brief statement of the nature of the
  guarantee, such as ``Guarantee of principal and interest,'' or
  ``Guarantee of dividends.'' If the guarantee is of interest or
  dividends, state the annual aggregate amount of interest or dividends
  so guaranteed.
\7\ Only a brief statement as to any such defaults need be made.

    (3) Schedule III--Condensed financial information. The following 
schedule shall be filed as of the dates and for the periods specified in 
the schedule.

                     Condensed Financial Information

    [Parent only]
    [The State savings association may determine disclosure based on 
information provided in footnotes below]
    (a) Provide condensed financial information as to financial 
position, changes in financial position, and results of operations of 
the State savings association as of the same dates and for the same 
periods for which audited consolidated financial statements are 
required. The financial information required need not be presented in 
greater detail than is required for condensed statement by 17 CFR 
210.10-01(a) (2), (3), (4). Detailed footnote disclosure which would 
normally be included with complete financial statements may be omitted 
with the exception of disclosure regarding material contingencies, long-
term obligations, and guarantees. Description of significant provisions 
of the state savings association's long-term obligations, mandatory 
dividend, or redemption requirements of redeemable stocks, and 
guarantees of the State savings association shall be provided along with 
a 5-year schedule of maturities of debt. If the material contingencies, 
long-term obligations, redeemable stock requirements, and guarantees of 
the State savings association have been separately disclosed in the 
consolidated statements, they need not be repeated in this schedule.
    (b) Disclose separately the amount of cash dividends paid to the 
State savings association for each of the last three fiscal years by

[[Page 1235]]

consolidated subsidiaries, unconsolidated subsidiaries, and 50-percent- 
or less-owned persons accounted for by the equity method, respectively.

Subparts U-V [Reserved]



                     Subpart W_Securities Offerings



Sec. 390.410  Definitions.

    (a) For purposes of this subpart, the following definitions apply:
    (1) Accredited investor means the same as in Commission Rule 501(a) 
(17 CFR 230.501(a)) under the Securities Act, and includes any State 
savings association.
    (2) Commission means the Securities and Exchange Commission.
    (3) Dividend or interest reinvestment plan means a plan which is 
offered solely to existing security holders of the State savings 
association which allows such persons to reinvest dividends or interest 
paid to them on securities issued by the State savings association, and 
which also may allow additional cash amounts to be contributed by the 
participants in the plan, provided that the securities to be issued are 
newly issued, or are purchased for the account of plan participants, at 
prices not in excess of current market prices at the time of purchase, 
or at prices not in excess of an amount determined in accordance with a 
pricing formula specified in the plan and based upon average or current 
market prices at the time of purchase.
    (4) Employee benefit plan means any purchase, savings, option, 
rights, bonus, ownership, appreciation, profit sharing, thrift, 
incentive, pension or similar plan solely for officers, directors or 
employees.
    (5) Exchange Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78a-78jj).
    (6) Filing date means the date on which a document is actually 
received during business hours, 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. Eastern Standard Time, 
by the FDIC, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429. However if the 
last date on which a document can be accepted falls on a Saturday, 
Sunday, or holiday, such document may be filed on the next business day.
    (7) Issuer means a State savings association which issues or 
proposes to issue any security.
    (8) Offer; Sale or sell. For purposes of this subpart, the term 
offer, offer to sell, or offer for sale shall include every attempt or 
offer to dispose of, or solicitation of an offer to buy, a security or 
interest in a security, for value. However, these terms shall not 
include preliminary negotiations or agreements between an issuer and any 
underwriter or among underwriters who are or are to be in privity of 
contract with the issuer. Sale and sell includes every contract to sell 
or otherwise dispose of a security or interest in a security for value. 
Every offer or sale of a warrant or right to purchase or subscribe to 
another security of the same or another issuer, as well as every sale or 
offer of a security which gives the holder a present or future right or 
privilege to convert the security into another security of the same or 
another issuer, includes an offer and sale of the other security only at 
the time of the offer or sale of the warrant or right or convertible 
security; but neither the exercise of the right to purchase or subscribe 
or to convert nor the issuance of securities pursuant thereto is an 
offer or sale.
    (9) Person means the same as in 12 CFR 192.25, and includes a State 
savings association.
    (10) Purchase and buy mean the same as in 12 CFR 192.25.
    (11) State savings association means the same as in section 3(b) of 
the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(b)), and includes a 
state-chartered savings association in organization which is granted 
conditional approval of insurance of accounts by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation. In addition, for purposes of Sec. 390.411, State 
savings association includes any underwriter participating in the 
distribution of securities of a State savings association.
    (12) Securities Act means the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77a-
77aa).
    (13) Security means any non-withdrawable account, note, stock, 
treasury stock, bond, debenture, evidence of indebtedness, certificate 
of interest or participation in any profit-sharing agreement, 
collateral-trust

[[Page 1236]]

certificate, preorganization or subscription, transferable share, 
investment contract, voting trust certificate or, in general, any 
interest or instrument commonly known as a security, or any certificate 
of interest or participation in, temporary or interim certificate for, 
receipt for, guarantee of, or warrant or right to subscribe to or 
purchase any of the foregoing, except that a security shall not include 
an account insured, in whole or in part, by the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Corporation.
    (14) Underwriter means any person who has purchased from an issuer 
with a view to, or offers or sells for an issuer in connection with, the 
distribution of any security, or participates or has a participation in 
the direct or indirect underwriting of any such undertaking; but such 
term shall not include a person whose interest is limited to a 
commission from an underwriter or dealer not in excess of the usual and 
customary distributors' or sellers' commission and such term shall also 
not include any person who has continually held the securities being 
transferred for a period of two (2) consecutive years provided that the 
securities sold in any one (1) transaction shall be less than ten 
percent (10%) of the issued and outstanding securities of the same 
class. The following shall apply for the purpose of determining the 
period securities have been held:
    (i) Stock dividends, splits and recapitalizations. Securities 
acquired from the issuer as a dividend or pursuant to a stock split, 
reverse split or recapitalization shall be deemed to have been acquired 
at the same time as the securities on which the dividend or, if more 
than one, the initial dividend was paid, the securities involved in the 
split or reverse split, or the securities surrendered in connection with 
the recapitalization.
    (ii) Conversions. If the securities sold were acquired from the 
issuer for consideration consisting solely of other securities of the 
same issuer surrendered for conversion, the securities so acquired shall 
be deemed to have been acquired at the same time as the securities 
surrendered for conversion.
    (iii) Contingent issuance of securities. Securities acquired as a 
contingent payment of the purchase price of an equity interest in a 
business, or the assets of a business, sold to the issuer or an 
affiliate of the issuer shall be deemed to have been acquired at the 
time of such sale if the issuer was then committed to issue the 
securities subject only to conditions other than the payment of further 
consideration for such securities. An agreement entered into in 
connection with any such purchase to remain in the employment of, or not 
to compete with, the issuer or affiliate or the rendering of services 
pursuant to such agreement shall not be deemed to be the payment of 
further consideration for such securities.
    (iv) Pledged securities. Securities which are bona fide pledged by 
any person other than the issuer when sold by the pledgee, or by a 
purchaser, after a default in the obligation secured by the pledge, 
shall be deemed to have been acquired when they were acquired by the 
pledgor, except that if the securities were pledged without recourse 
they shall be deemed to have been acquired by the pledgee at the time of 
the pledge or by the purchaser at the time of purchase.
    (v) Gifts of securities. Securities acquired from any person, other 
than the issuer, by gift shall be deemed to have been acquired by the 
donee when they were acquired by the donor.
    (vi) Trusts. Securities acquired from the settler of a trust by the 
trust or acquired from the trust by the beneficiaries thereof shall be 
deemed to have been acquired when they were acquired by the settler.
    (vii) Estates. Securities held by the estate of a deceased person or 
acquired from such an estate by the beneficiaries thereof shall be 
deemed to have been acquired when they were acquired by the deceased 
person, except that no holding period is required if the estate is not 
an affiliate of the issuer or if the securities are sold by a 
beneficiary of the estate who is not such an affiliate.
    (viii) Exchange transactions. A person receiving securities in a 
transaction involving an exchange of the securities of one issuer for 
securities of another issuer shall be deemed to have acquired the 
securities received when such person acquired the securities exchanged.

[[Page 1237]]

    (b) A term not defined in this subpart but defined elsewhere in this 
part, when used in subpart, shall have the meanings given elsewhere in 
this part, unless the context otherwise requires.
    (c) When used in the rules, regulations, or forms of the Commission 
referred to in this subpart, the term Commission shall be deemed to 
refer to the FDIC, the term registrant shall be deemed to refer to an 
issuer defined in this subpart, and the term registration statement or 
prospectus shall be deemed to refer to an offering circular filed under 
this subpart, unless the context otherwise requires.



Sec. 390.411  Offering circular requirement.

    (a) General. No State savings association shall offer or sell, 
directly or indirectly, any security issued by it unless:
    (1) The offer or sale is accompanied or preceded by an offering 
circular which includes the information required by this subpart and 
which has been filed and declared effective pursuant to this subpart; or
    (2) An exemption is available under this subpart.
    (b) Communications not deemed an offer. The following communications 
shall not be deemed an offer under this subpart:
    (1) Prior to filing an offering circular, any notice of a proposed 
offering which satisfies the requirements of Commission Rule 135 (17 CFR 
230.135) under the Securities Act;
    (2) Subsequent to filing an offering circular, any notice circular, 
advertisement, letter, or other communication published or transmitted 
to any person which satisfies the requirements of Commission Rule 134 
(17 CFR 230.134) under the Securities Act; and
    (3) Oral offers of securities covered by an offering circular made 
after filing the offering circular with the FDIC.
    (c) Preliminary offering circular. Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of 
this section, a preliminary offering circular may be used for an offer 
of any security prior to the effective date of the offering circular if:
    (1) The preliminary offering circular has been filed pursuant to 
this subpart;
    (2) The preliminary offering circular includes the information 
required by this subpart, except for the omission of information 
relating to offering price, discounts or commissions, amount of 
proceeds, conversion rates, call prices, or other matters dependent on 
the offering price; and
    (3) The offering circular declared effective by the FDIC is 
furnished to the purchaser prior to, or simultaneously with, the sale of 
any such security.



Sec. 390.412  Exemptions.

    The offering circular requirement of Sec. 390.411 shall not apply to 
an issuer's offer or sale of securities:
    (a) [Reserved]
    (b) Exempt from registration under either section 3(a) or section 4 
of the Securities Act, but only by reason of an exemption other than 
section 3(a)(5) (for regulated State savings associations), and section 
3(a)(11) (for intrastate offerings) of the Securities Act;
    (c) In a conversion from the mutual to the stock form of 
organization pursuant to12 CFR part 192, except for a supervisory 
conversion undertaken pursuant to subpart C of 12 CFR part 192;
    (d) In a non-public offering which satisfies the requirements of 
Sec. 390.413;
    (e) That are debt securities issued in denominations of $100,000 or 
more, which are fully collateralized by cash, any security issued, or 
guaranteed as to principal and interest, by the United States, the 
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, Federal National Mortgage 
Association, Government National Mortgage Association or by interests in 
mortgage notes secured by real property;
    (f) Distributed exclusively abroad to foreign nationals: Provided, 
That--
    (1) The offering is made subject to safeguards reasonably designed 
to preclude distribution or redistribution of the securities within, or 
to nationals of, the United States; and
    (2) Such safeguards include, without limitation, measures that would 
be sufficient to ensure that registration of the securities would not be 
required if the securities were not exempt under the Securities Act; or
    (g) To its officers, directors or employees pursuant to an employee 
benefit plan or a dividend or interest reinvestment plan, and provided 
that any

[[Page 1238]]

such plan has been approved by the majority of shareholders present in 
person or by proxy at an annual or special meeting of the shareholders 
of the State savings association.



Sec. 390.413  Non-public offering.

    Offers and sales of securities by an issuer that satisfy the 
conditions of paragraph (a) or (b) of this section and the requirements 
of paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section shall be deemed to be 
transactions not involving any public offering within the meaning of 
section 4(2) of the Securities Act and Secs. 390.412(b) and 390.412(d). 
However, an issuer shall not be deemed to be not in compliance with the 
provisions of this subpart solely by reason of making an untimely filing 
of the notice required to be filed by paragraph (c) of this section so 
long as the notice is actually filed and all other conditions and 
requirements of this subpart are satisfied.
    (a) Regulation D. The offer and sale of all securities in the 
transaction satisfies the Commission's Regulation D (17 CFR 230.501-
230.506), except for the notice requirements of Commission Rule 503 (17 
CFR 230.503) and the limitations on resale in Commission Rule 502(d) (17 
CFR 230.502(d)).
    (b) Sales to 35 persons. The offer and sale of all securities in the 
transaction satisfies each of the following conditions:
    (1) Sales of the security are not made to more than 35 persons 
during the offering period, as determined under the integration 
provisions of Commission Rule 502(a) (17 CFR 230.502(a)). The number of 
purchasers referred to above is exclusive of any accredited investor, 
officer, director or affiliate of the issuer. For purposes of paragraph 
(b) of this section, a husband and wife (together with any custodian or 
trustee acting for the account of their minor children) are counted as 
one person and a partnership, corporation or other organization which 
was not specifically formed for the purpose of purchasing the security 
offered in reliance upon this exemption, is counted as one person.
    (2) All purchasers either have a preexisting personal or business 
relationship with the issuer or any of its officers, directors or 
controlling persons, or by reason of their business or financial 
experience or the business or financial experience of their professional 
advisors who are unaffiliated with and who are not compensated by the 
issuer or any affiliate or selling agent of the issuer, directly or 
indirectly, could reasonably be assumed to have the capacity to protect 
their own interests in connection with the transaction.
    (3) Each purchaser represents that the purchaser is purchasing for 
the purchaser's own account (or a trust account if the purchaser is a 
trustee) and not with a view to or for sale in connection with any 
distribution of the security.
    (4) The offer and sale of the security is not accomplished by the 
publication of any advertisement.
    (c) Filing of notice of sales. Within 30 days after the first sale 
of the securities, every six months after the first sale of the 
securities and not later than 30 days after the last sale of securities 
in an offering pursuant to this subpart, the issuer, shall file with the 
FDIC a report describing the results of the sale of securities as 
required by Sec. 390.421(b).
    (d) Limitation on resale. The issuer shall exercise reasonable care 
to assure that the purchasers of the securities are not underwriters 
within the meaning of Sec. 390.410(a)(14), which reasonable care shall 
include, but not be limited to, the following:
    (1) Reasonable inquiry to determine if the purchaser is acquiring 
the securities for the purchaser or for other persons;
    (2) Written disclosure to each purchaser prior to the sale that the 
securities are not offered by an offering circular filed with, and 
declared effective by, the FDIC pursuant to Sec. 390.411, but instead 
are being sold in reliance upon the exemption from the offering circular 
requirement provided for by this subpart; and
    (3) Placement of a legend on the certificate, or other document 
evidencing the securities, indicating that the securities have not been 
offered by an offering circular filed with, and declared effective by, 
the FDIC and that due care

[[Page 1239]]

should be taken to ensure that the seller of the securities is not an 
underwriter within the meaning of Sec. 390.410(a)(14).



Sec. 390.414  Filing and signature requirements.

    (a) Procedures. An offering circular, amendment, notice, report, or 
other document required by this subpart shall, unless otherwise 
indicated, be filed in accordance with the requirements of 12 CFR 
192.115(a), 192.150(a)(6), 192.155, 192.180(b), and Form AC, General 
Instruction B, of this subpart.
    (b) Number of copies. (1) Unless otherwise required, any filing 
under this subpart shall include nine copies of the document to be filed 
with the FDIC, as follows:
    (i) Seven copies, which shall include one manually signed copy with 
exhibits, three conformed copies with exhibits, and three conformed 
copies without exhibits, to the FDIC, ATTN: Accounting and Securities 
Disclosure Section, 550 17th Street NW, Washington, DC 20429; and
    (ii) Two copies, which shall include one manually signed copy with 
exhibits and one conformed copy, without exhibits, to the appropriate 
regional director.
    (2) Within five days after the effective date of an offering 
circular or the commencement of a public offering after the effective 
date, whichever occurs later, nine copies of the offering circular used 
shall be filed with the FDIC as follows: Seven copies to the FDIC, 550 
17th Street NW., ATTN: Accounting and Securities Disclosure Section, 
Washington, DC, and two copies to the appropriate Regional Director.
    (3) After the effective date of an offering circular, an offering 
circular which varies from the form previously filed shall not be used, 
unless it includes only non-material supplemental or additional 
information and until 10 copies have been filed with the FDIC in the 
manner required.
    (c) Signature. (1) Any offering circular, amendment, or consent 
filed with the FDIC pursuant to this subpart shall include an attached 
manually signed signature page which authorizes the filing and has been 
signed by:
    (i) The issuer, by its duly authorized representative;
    (ii) The issuer's principal executive officer;
    (iii) The issuer's principal financial officer;
    (iv) The issuer's principal accounting officer; and
    (v) At least a majority of the issuer's directors.
    (2) Any other document filed pursuant to this subpart shall be 
signed by a person authorized to do so.
    (3) At least one copy of every document filed pursuant to this 
subpart shall be manually signed, and every copy of a document filed 
shall:
    (i) Have the name of each person who signs typed or printed beneath 
the signature;
    (ii) State the capacity or capacities in which the signature is 
provided;
    (iii) Provide the name of each director of the issuer, if a majority 
of directors is required to sign the document; and
    (iv) With regard to any copies not manually signed, bear typed or 
printed signatures.



Sec. 390.415  Effective date.

    (a) Except as provided for in paragraph (d) of this section, an 
offering circular filed by a State savings association shall be deemed 
to be automatically declared effective by the FDIC on the twentieth day 
after filing or on such earlier date as the FDIC may determine for good 
cause shown.
    (b) If any amendment is filed prior to the effective date, the 
offering circular shall be deemed to have been filed when such amendment 
was filed.
    (c) The period until automatic effectiveness under this subpart 
shall be stated at the bottom of the facing page of the Form OC or any 
amendment.
    (d) The effectiveness will be delayed if a duly authorized 
amendment, telegram confirmed in writing, or letter states that the 
effective date is delayed until a further amendment is filed 
specifically stating that the offering circular will become effective in 
accordance with this subpart.
    (e) An amendment filed after the effective date of the offering 
circular shall become effective on such date as the FDIC may determine.

[[Page 1240]]

    (f) If it appears to the FDIC at any time that the offering circular 
includes any untrue statement of a material fact or omits to state any 
material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the 
statements therein not misleading, then the FDIC may pursue any remedy 
it is authorized to pursue under section 8 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1818), including, but not limited 
to, institution of cease-and-desist proceedings.



Sec. 390.416  Form, content, and accounting.

    (a) Form and content. Any offering circular or amendment filed 
pursuant to this subpart shall:
    (1) Be filed under cover of Form OC, which is under 12 CFR part 192;
    (2) Comply with the requirements of Items 3 and 4 of Form OC and the 
requirements of all items of the form for registration (17 CFR part 239) 
that the issuer would be eligible to use were it required to register 
the securities under the Securities Act;
    (3) Comply with all item requirements of the Form S-1 (17 CFR part 
239) for registration under the Securities Act, if the association 
issuing the securities is not in compliance with the FDIC's regulatory 
capital requirements during the time the offering is made;
    (4) Where a form specifies that the information required by an item 
in the Commission's Regulation S-K (17 CFR part 229) should be 
furnished, include such information and all of the information required 
by Item 7 of Form PS, which is under 12 CFR part 192;
    (5) Include after the facing page of the Form OC a cross-reference 
sheet listing each item requirement of the form for registration under 
the Securities Act and indicate for each item the applicable heading or 
subheading in the offering circular under which the required information 
is disclosed;
    (6) Include in part II of the Form OC the applicable undertakings 
required by the form for registration under the Securities Act;
    (7) If the issuer has not previously been required to file reports 
pursuant to section 13(a) of the Exchange Act or Sec. 390.427, include 
in part II of Form OC the following undertaking: ``The issuer hereby 
undertakes, in connection with any distribution of the offering 
circular, to have a preliminary or effective offering circular including 
the information required by this subpart distributed to all persons 
expected to be mailed confirmations of sale not less than 48 hours prior 
to the time such confirmations are expected to be mailed;''
    (8) In offerings involving the issuance of options, warrants, 
subscription rights or conversion rights within the meaning of 
Sec. 390.410(a)(8), include in part II of Form OC an undertaking to 
provide a copy of the issuer's most recent audited financial statements 
to persons exercising such options, warrants or rights promptly upon 
receiving written notification of the exercise thereof;
    (9) Include as supplemental information and not as part of the Form 
OC and only with respect to de novo offerings, a copy of the application 
for insurance of accounts as submitted to the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation for state-chartered savings associations; and
    (10) In addition to the information expressly required to be 
included by this subpart, there shall be added such further material 
information, if any, as may be necessary to make the required 
statements, in light of the circumstances under which they are made, not 
misleading.
    (b) Accounting requirements. To be declared effective an offering 
circular or amendment shall satisfy the accounting requirements in 
subpart T.



Sec. 390.417  Use of the offering circular.

    (a) An offering circular or amendment declared effective by the FDIC 
shall not be used more than nine months after the effective date, unless 
the information contained therein is as of a date not more than 16 
months prior to such use.
    (b) An offering circular filed under Sec. 390.414(b)(3) shall not 
extend the period for which an effective offering circular or amendment 
may be used under paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) If any event arises, or change in fact occurs, after the 
effective date and such event or change in fact, individually or in the 
aggregate, results in the

[[Page 1241]]

offering circular containing any untrue statement of material fact, or 
omitting to state a material fact necessary in order to make statements 
made in the offering circular not misleading under the circumstances, 
then no offering circular, which has been declared effective under this 
subpart, shall be used until an amendment reflecting such event or 
change in fact has been filed with, and declared effective by, the FDIC.



Sec. 390.418  Escrow requirement.

    (a) Any funds received in an offering which is offered and sold on a 
best efforts all-or-none condition or with a minimum-maximum amount to 
be sold shall be held in an escrow or similar separate account until 
such time as all of the securities are sold with respect to a best 
efforts all-or-none offering or the stated minimum amount of securities 
are sold in a minimum-maximum offering.
    (b) If the amount of securities required to be sold under escrow 
conditions in paragraph (a) of this section are not sold within the time 
period for the offering as disclosed in the offering circular, all funds 
in the escrow account shall be promptly refunded unless the FDIC 
otherwise approves an extension of the offering period upon a showing of 
good cause and provided that the extension is consistent with the public 
interest and the protection of investors.



Sec. 390.419  Unsafe or unsound practices.

    (a) No person shall directly or indirectly,
    (1) Employ any device, scheme or artifice to defraud,
    (2) Make any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a 
material fact necessary in order to make statements made, in light of 
the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading, or
    (3) Engage in any act, practice, or course of business which 
operates as a fraud or deceit upon any person, in connection with the 
purchase or sale of any security of a State savings association.
    (b) Violations of this subpart shall constitute an unsafe or unsound 
practice within the meaning of section 8 of the Federal Deposit 
Insurance Act, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1818.
    (c) Nothing in this subpart shall be construed as a limitation on 
the applicability of section 10(b) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 
78j(b)) or Rule 10b-5 promulgated thereunder (17 CFR 240.10b-5).



Sec. 390.420  Withdrawal or abandonment.

    (a) Any offering circular, amendment, or exhibit may be withdrawn 
prior to the effective date. A withdrawal shall be signed and state the 
grounds upon which it is made. Any document withdrawn will not be 
removed from the files of the FDIC, but will be marked ``Withdrawn upon 
the request of the issuer on (date).''
    (b) When an offering circular or amendment has been on file with the 
FDIC for a period of nine months and has not become effective, the FDIC 
may, in its discretion, determine whether the filing has been abandoned, 
after notifying the issuer that the filing is out of date and must 
either be amended to comply with the applicable requirements of this 
subpart or be withdrawn within 30 days after the date of such notice. 
When a filing is abandoned, the filing will not be removed from the 
files of the FDIC, but will be marked ``Declared abandoned by the FDIC 
on (date).''



Sec. 390.421  Securities sale report.

    (a) Within 30 days after the first sale of the securities, every six 
months after such 30 day period and not later than 30 days after the 
later of the last sale of securities in an offering pursuant to 
Sec. 390.411 or the application of the proceeds therefrom, the issuer 
shall file with the FDIC a report describing the results of the sale of 
the securities and the application of the proceeds, which shall include 
all of the information required by Form G-12 set forth at Sec. 390.429 
and shall also include the following:
    (1) The name, address, and docket number of the issuer;
    (2) The title, number, aggregate and per-unit offering price of the 
securities sold;
    (3) The aggregate and per-unit dollar amounts of actual itemized 
expenses,

[[Page 1242]]

discounts or commissions, and other fees;
    (4) The aggregate and per-unit dollar amounts of the net proceeds 
raised, and the use of proceeds therefrom; and
    (5) The number of purchasers of each class of securities sold and 
the number of owners of record of each class of the issuer's equity 
securities after the issuance of the securities or termination of the 
offer.
    (b) Within 30 days after the first sale of the securities, every six 
months after the first sale of the securities and not later than 30 days 
after the last sale of securities in an offering pursuant to 
Sec. 390.413, the issuer shall file with the FDIC a report describing 
the results of the sale of securities, which shall include all of the 
information required by Form G-12 set forth at Sec. 390.429, and shall 
also include the following:
    (1) All of the information required by paragraph (a) of this 
section; and
    (2) A detailed statement of the factual and legal grounds for the 
exemption claimed.



Sec. 390.422  Public disclosure and confidential treatment.

    (a) Any offering circular, amendment, exhibit, notice, or report 
filed pursuant to this subpart will be publicly available. Any other 
related documents will be treated in accordance with the provisions of 
the Freedom of Information Act (5 U.S.C. 552), the Privacy Act of 1974 
(5 U.S.C. 552a), and parts 309 and 310 of this chapter.
    (b) Any requests for confidential treatment of information in a 
document required to be filed under this subpart shall be made as 
required under Commission Rule 24b-2 (17 CFR 240.24b-2) under the 
Exchange Act.



Sec. 390.423  Waiver.

    (a) The FDIC may waive any requirement of this subpart, or any 
required information:
    (1) Determined to be unnecessary by the FDIC;
    (2) In connection with a transaction approved by the FDIC for 
supervisory reasons, or
    (3) Where a provision of this subpart conflicts with a requirement 
of applicable state law.
    (b) Any condition, stipulation or provision binding any person 
acquiring a security issued by a State savings association which seeks 
to waive compliance with any provision of this subpart shall be void, 
unless approved by the FDIC.



Sec. 390.424  Requests for interpretive advice or waiver.

    Any requests to the FDIC for interpretive advice or a waiver with 
respect to any provision of this subpart shall satisfy the following 
requirements:
    (a) A copy of the request, including any attachments, shall be filed 
with the FDIC;
    (b) The provisions of this subpart to which the request relates, the 
participants in the proposed transaction, and the reasons for the 
request, shall be specifically identified or described; and
    (c) The request shall include a legal opinion as to each legal issue 
raised and an accounting opinion as to each accounting issue raised.



Sec. 390.425  Delayed or continuous offering and sale of securities.

    Any offer or sale of securities under Sec. 390.411 may be made on a 
continuous or delayed basis in the future, if:
    (a) The securities would satisfy all of the eligibility requirements 
of the Commission's Rule 415, 17 CFR 230.415; and
    (b) The association issuing the securities is in compliance with the 
FDIC's regulatory capital requirements during the time the offering is 
made.



Sec. 390.426  Sales of securities at an office of a State savings 
association.

    Sales of securities of a State savings association or its affiliates 
at an office of a State savings association may only be made in 
accordance with the provisions of Sec. 390.340.



Sec. 390.427  Current and periodic reports.

    (a) Each State savings association which files an offering circular 
which becomes effective pursuant to this subpart, after such effective 
date, shall file with the FDIC periodic and current reports on Forms 8-
K, 10-Q and 10-K as may be required by section 13 of the Exchange Act 
(15 U.S.C. 78m) as if the securities sold by such offering circular

[[Page 1243]]

were securities registered pursuant to section 12 of the Exchange Act 
(15 U.S.C. 78l). The duty to file periodic and current reports under 
this subpart shall be automatically suspended if and so long as any 
issue of securities of the State savings association is registered 
pursuant to section 12 of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78l). The duty to 
file under this subpart shall also be automatically suspended as to any 
fiscal year, other than the fiscal year within which such offering 
circular became effective, if, at the beginning of such fiscal year, the 
securities of each class to which the offering circular relates are held 
of record by less than three hundred persons and upon the filing of a 
Form 15.
    (b) For purposes of registering securities under section 12(b) or 
12(g) of the Exchange Act, an issuer subject to the reporting 
requirements of paragraph (a) of this section may use the Commission's 
registration statement on Form 10 or Form 8-A or 8-B as applicable.



Sec. 390.428  Approval of the security.

    Any securities of a State savings association which are not exempt 
under this subpart and are offered or sold pursuant to an offering 
circular which becomes effective under this subpart, are deemed to be 
approved as to form and terms for purposes of this subpart.



Sec. 390.429  Form for securities sale report.

            FDIC, 550 17th Street, NW., Washington, DC 20429

                               [Form G-12]

             Securities Sale Report Pursuant to Sec. 390.12

 FDIC No._______________________________________________________________
 Issuer's Name:_________________________________________________________
 Address:_______________________________________________________________

    If in organization, state the date of FDIC certification of 
insurance of accounts: __
    State the title, number, aggregate and per-unit offering price of 
the securities sold: ____
    State the aggregate and per-unit dollar amounts of actual itemized 
offering expenses, discounts, commissions, and other fees: ____
    State the aggregate and per-unit dollar amounts of the net proceeds 
raised: ____
    Describe the use of proceeds. If unknown, provide reasonable 
estimates of the dollar amount allocated to each purpose for which the 
proceeds will be used: ____
    State the number of purchasers of each class of securities sold and 
the number of owners of record of each class of the issuer's equity 
securities at the close or termination of the offering: ____
    For a non-public offering, also state the factual and legal grounds 
for the exemption claimed (attach additional pages if necessary): ____
    For a non-public offering, all offering materials used should be 
listed: ____

 Person to Contact:_____________________________________________________
 Telephone No.:_________________________________________________________

    This issuer has duly caused this securities sale report to be signed 
on its behalf by the undersigned person.

 Date of securities sale report_________________________________________
 Issuer:________________________________________________________________
 Signature:_____________________________________________________________
 Name:__________________________________________________________________
 Title:_________________________________________________________________

    Instruction: Print the name and title of the signing representative 
under his or her signature. Ten copies of the securities sale report 
should be filed, including one copy manually signed, as required under 
12 CFR 390.414.
    Attention
    Intentional misstatements or omissions of fact constitute violations 
of Federal law (See 18 U.S.C. 1001 and Sec. 390.355(b)).



Sec. 390.430  Filing of copies of offering circulars in certain exempt
offerings.

    A copy of the offering circular, or similar document, if any, used 
in connection with an offering exempt from the offering circular 
requirement of Sec. 390.411 by reason of Sec. 390.412(e) or Sec. 390.413 
shall be mailed to the FDIC within 30 days after the first sale of such 
securities. Such copy of the offering circular, or similar document, is 
solely for the information of the FDIC and shall not be deemed to be 
``filed'' with the FDIC pursuant to Sec. 390.411.

[[Page 1244]]

The mailing to the FDIC of such offering circular, or similar document, 
shall not be a pre-condition of the applicable exemption from the 
offering circular requirements of Sec. 390.411.

Subpart X [Reserved]



                   Subpart Y_Prompt Corrective Action



Sec. 390.450  Authority, purpose, scope, other supervisory authority,
and disclosure of capital categories.

    (a) Authority. This subpart is issued by the FDIC pursuant to 
section 38 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDI Act) as added by 
section 131 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act 
of 1991 (Pub. L. 102-242, 105 Stat. 2236 (1991)) (12 U.S.C. 1831o).
    (b) Purpose. Section 38 of the FDI Act establishes a framework of 
supervisory actions for insured depository institutions that are not 
adequately capitalized. The principal purpose of this subpart is to 
define, for State savings associations, the capital measures and capital 
levels that are used for determining the supervisory actions authorized 
under section 38 of the FDI Act. This subpart also establishes 
procedures for submission and review of capital restoration plans and 
for issuance and review of directives and orders pursuant to section 38.
    (c) Scope. This subpart implements the provisions of section 38 of 
the FDI Act as they apply to State savings associations. Certain of 
these provisions also apply to officers, directors and employees of 
State savings associations.
    (d) Other supervisory authority. Neither section 38 nor this subpart 
in any way limits the authority of the FDIC under any other provision of 
law to take supervisory actions to address unsafe or unsound practices, 
deficient capital levels, violations of law, unsafe or unsound 
conditions, or other practices. Action under section 38 of the FDI Act 
and this subpart may be taken independently of, in conjunction with, or 
in addition to any other enforcement action available to the FDIC, 
including issuance of cease and desist orders, capital directives, 
approval or denial of applications or notices, assessment of civil money 
penalties, or any other actions authorized by law.
    (e) Disclosure of capital categories. The assignment of a State 
savings association under this subpart within a particular capital 
category is for purposes of implementing and applying the provisions of 
section 38. Unless permitted by the FDIC or otherwise required by law, 
no State savings association may state in any advertisement or 
promotional material its capital category under this subpart or that the 
FDIC or any other federal banking agency has assigned the State savings 
association to a particular category.



Sec. 390.451  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart, except as modified in this section or 
unless the context otherwise requires, the terms used in this subpart 
have the same meanings as set forth in sections 38 and 3 of the FDI Act.
    (a)(1) Control has the same meaning assigned to it in section 2 of 
the Bank Holding Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841), and the term 
``controlled'' shall be construed consistently with the term 
``control.''
    (2) Exclusion for fiduciary ownership. No insured depository 
institution or company controls another insured depository institution 
or company by virtue of its ownership or control of shares in a 
fiduciary capacity. Shares shall not be deemed to have been acquired in 
a fiduciary capacity if the acquiring insured depository institution or 
company has sole discretionary authority to exercise voting rights with 
respect thereto.
    (3) Exclusion for debts previously contracted. No insured depository 
institution or company controls another insured depository institution 
or company by virtue of its ownership or control of shares acquired in 
securing or collecting a debt previously contracted in good faith, until 
two years after the date of acquisition. The two-year period may be 
extended at the discretion of the appropriate federal banking agency for 
up to three one-year periods.
    (b) Controlling person means any person having control of an insured 
depository institution and any company controlled by that person.

[[Page 1245]]

    (c) Leverage ratio means the ratio of Tier 1 capital to adjusted 
total assets, as calculated in accordance with subpart Z.
    (d) Management fee means any payment of money or provision of any 
other thing of value to a company or individual for the provision of 
management services or advice to the State savings association or 
related overhead expenses, including payments related to supervisory, 
executive, managerial or policymaking functions, other than compensation 
to an individual in the individual's capacity as an officer or employee 
of the State savings association.
    (e) Risk-weighted assets means total risk-weighted assets, as 
calculated in accordance with subpart Z.
    (f) Tangible equity means the amount of a State savings 
association's core capital as computed in subpart Z plus the amount of 
its outstanding cumulative perpetual preferred stock (including related 
surplus), minus intangible assets as defined in Sec. 390.461, except 
mortgage servicing assets to the extent they are includable under 
Sec. 390.471. Non-mortgage servicing assets that have not been 
previously deducted in calculating core capital are deducted.
    (g) Tier 1 capital means the amount of core capital as defined in 
subpart Z.
    (h) Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio means the ratio of Tier 1 
capital to risk-weighted assets, as calculated in accordance with 
subpart Z.
    (i) Total assets, for purposes of Sec. 390.453(b)(5), means adjusted 
total assets as calculated in accordance with subpart Z, minus 
intangible assets as provided in the definition of tangible equity.
    (j) Total risk-based capital ratio means the ratio of total capital 
to risk-weighted assets, as calculated in accordance with subpart Z.



Sec. 390.452  Notice of capital category.

    (a) Effective date of determination of capital category. A State 
savings association shall be deemed to be within a given capital 
category for purposes of section 38 of the FDI Act and this subpart as 
of the date the State savings association is notified of, or is deemed 
to have notice of, its capital category, pursuant to paragraph (b) of 
this section.
    (b) Notice of capital category. A State savings association shall be 
deemed to have been notified of its capital levels and its capital 
category as of the most recent date:
    (1) A Thrift Financial Report (TFR) or Consolidated Reports of 
Condition or Income (``Call Report''), as applicable, is required to be 
filed with the FDIC;
    (2) A final report of examination is delivered to the State savings 
association; or
    (3) Written notice is provided by the FDIC to the State savings 
association of its capital category for purposes of section 38 of the 
FDI Act and this subpart or that the State savings association's capital 
category has changed as provided in paragraph (c) of this section or 
Sec. 390.453(c).
    (c) Adjustments to reported capital levels and category--(1) Notice 
of adjustment by State savings association. A State savings association 
shall provide the FDIC with written notice that an adjustment to the 
State savings association's capital category may have occurred no later 
than 15 calendar days following the date that any material event has 
occurred that would cause the State savings association to be placed in 
a lower capital category from the category assigned to the State savings 
association for purposes of section 38 and this section on the basis of 
the State savings association's most recent report of examination.
    (2) Determination by the FDIC to change capital category. After 
receiving notice pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the FDIC 
shall determine whether to change the capital category of the State 
savings association and shall notify the State savings association of 
the FDIC's determination.



Sec. 390.453  Capital measures and capital category definitions.

    (a) Capital measures. For purposes of section 38 and this subpart, 
the relevant capital measures shall be:
    (1) The total risk-based capital ratio;
    (2) The Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio; and
    (3) The leverage ratio.

[[Page 1246]]

    (b) Capital categories. For purposes of section 38 and this subpart, 
a State savings association shall be deemed to be:
    (1) Well capitalized if the State savings association:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio of 10.0 percent or greater; 
and
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6.0 percent or 
greater; and
    (iii) Has a leverage ratio of 5.0 percent or greater; and
    (iv) Is not subject to any written agreement, order, capital 
directive, or prompt corrective action directive issued by FDIC under 
section 8 of the FDI Act, the International Lending Supervision Act of 
1983 (12 U.S.C. 3907), the Home Owners' Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1464(t)(6)), 
or section 38 of the FDI Act, or any regulation thereunder, to meet and 
maintain a specific capital level for any capital measure.
    (2) Adequately capitalized if the State savings association:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio of 8.0 percent or greater; 
and
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 4.0 percent or 
greater; and
    (iii) Has:
    (A) A leverage ratio of 4.0 percent or greater; or
    (B) A leverage ratio of 3.0 percent or greater if the State savings 
association is assigned a composite rating of 1, as composite rating is 
defined in Sec. 390.101(c); and
    (iv) Does not meet the definition of a well capitalized State 
savings association.
    (3) Undercapitalized if the State savings association:
    (i) Has a total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 8.0 
percent; or
    (ii) Has a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio that is less than 4.0 
percent; or
    (iii) (A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iii)(B) of this 
section, has a leverage ratio that is less than 4.0 percent; or
    (B) Has a leverage ratio that is less than 3.0 percent if the State 
savings association is assigned a composite rating of 1, as composite 
rating is defined in Sec. 390.101(c).
    (4) Significantly undercapitalized if the State savings association 
has:
    (i) A total risk-based capital ratio that is less than 6.0 percent; 
or
    (ii) A Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio that is less than 3.0 
percent; or
    (iii) A leverage ratio that is less than 3.0 percent.
    (5) Critically undercapitalized if the State savings association has 
a ratio of tangible equity to total assets that is equal to or less than 
2.0 percent.
    (c) Reclassification based on supervisory criteria other than 
capital. The FDIC may reclassify a well capitalized State savings 
association as adequately capitalized and may require an adequately 
capitalized or undercapitalized State savings association to comply with 
certain mandatory or discretionary supervisory actions as if the State 
savings association were in the next lower capital category (except that 
the FDIC may not reclassify a significantly undercapitalized State 
savings association as critically undercapitalized) (each of these 
actions are hereinafter referred to generally as ``reclassifications'') 
in the following circumstances:
    (1) Unsafe or unsound condition. The FDIC has determined, after 
notice and opportunity for hearing pursuant to Sec. 390.457(a), that the 
State savings association is in an unsafe or unsound condition; or
    (2) Unsafe or unsound practice. The FDIC has determined, after 
notice and an opportunity for hearing pursuant to Sec. 390.457(a) that 
the State savings association received a less-than-satisfactory rating 
for any rating category (other than in a rating category specifically 
addressing capital adequacy) under the Uniform Financial Institutions 
Rating System,\1\ or an equivalent rating under a comparable rating 
system adopted by the FDIC; and has not corrected the conditions that 
served as the basis for the less than satisfactory rating. Ratings under 
this paragraph (c)(2) refer to the most recent ratings (as determined 
either on-site or off-site by the most recent examination) of which the 
State savings association has been notified in writing.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Copies are available at the address specified in Sec. 390.108.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 390.454  Capital restoration plans.

    (a) Schedule for filing plan--(1) In general. A State savings 
association shall

[[Page 1247]]

file a written capital restoration plan with the appropriate Regional 
Office within 45 days of the date that the State savings association 
receives notice or is deemed to have notice that the State savings 
association is undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or 
critically undercapitalized, unless the FDIC notifies the State savings 
association in writing that the plan is to be filed within a different 
period. An adequately capitalized State savings association that has 
been required pursuant to Sec. 390.453(c) to comply with supervisory 
actions as if the State savings association were undercapitalized is not 
required to submit a capital restoration plan solely by virtue of the 
reclassification.
    (2) Additional capital restoration plans. Notwithstanding paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, a State savings association that has already 
submitted and is operating under a capital restoration plan approved 
under section 38 and this subpart is not required to submit an 
additional capital restoration plan based on a revised calculation of 
its capital measures or a reclassification of the institution under 
Sec. 390.453(c) unless the FDIC notifies the State savings association 
that it must submit a new or revised capital plan. A State savings 
association that is notified that it must submit a new or revised 
capital restoration plan shall file the plan in writing with the 
appropriate Regional Office within 45 days of receiving such notice, 
unless the FDIC notifies the State savings association in writing that 
the plan is to be filed within a different period.
    (b) Contents of plan. All financial data submitted in connection 
with a capital restoration plan shall be prepared in accordance with the 
instructions provided on the TFR, or Consolidated Reports of Condition 
or Income (``Call Report''), as applicable, unless the FDIC instructs 
otherwise. The capital restoration plan shall include all of the 
information required to be filed under section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act. 
A State savings association that is required to submit a capital 
restoration plan as the result of a reclassification of the State 
savings association pursuant to Sec. 390.453(c) shall include a 
description of the steps the State savings association will take to 
correct the unsafe or unsound condition or practice. No plan shall be 
accepted unless it includes any performance guarantee described in 
section 38(e)(2)(C) of the FDI Act by each company that controls the 
State savings association.
    (c) Review of capital restoration plans. Within 60 days after 
receiving a capital restoration plan under this subpart, the FDIC shall 
provide written notice to the State savings association of whether the 
plan has been approved. The FDIC may extend the time within which notice 
regarding approval of a plan shall be provided.
    (d) Disapproval of capital plan. If a capital restoration plan is 
not approved by the FDIC, the State savings association shall submit a 
revised capital restoration plan, when directed to do so, within the 
time specified by the FDIC. Upon receiving notice that its capital 
restoration plan has not been approved, any undercapitalized State 
savings association (as defined in Sec. 390.453(b)(3)) shall be subject 
to all of the provisions of section 38 and this section applicable to 
significantly undercapitalized institutions. These provisions shall be 
applicable until such time as a new or revised capital restoration plan 
submitted by the State savings association has been approved by the 
FDIC.
    (e) Failure to submit a capital restoration plan. A State savings 
association that is undercapitalized (as defined in Sec. 390.453(b)(3)) 
and that fails to submit a written capital restoration plan within the 
period provided in this section shall, upon the expiration of that 
period, be subject to all of the provisions of section 38 and this 
subpart applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions.
    (f) Failure to implement a capital restoration plan. Any 
undercapitalized State savings association that fails in any material 
respect to implement a capital restoration plan shall be subject to all 
of the provisions of section 38 and this subpart applicable to 
significantly undercapitalized institutions.
    (g) Amendment of capital plan. A State savings association that has 
filed an approved capital restoration plan may,

[[Page 1248]]

after prior written notice to and approval by the FDIC, amend the plan 
to reflect a change in circumstance. Until such time as a proposed 
amendment has been approved, the State savings association shall 
implement the capital restoration plan as approved prior to the proposed 
amendment.
    (h) [Reserved]
    (i) Performance guarantee by companies that control a State savings 
association--(1) Limitation on liability--(i) Amount limitation. The 
aggregate liability under the guarantee provided under section 38 and 
this subpart for all companies that control a specific State savings 
association that is required to submit a capital restoration plan under 
this subpart shall be limited to the lesser of:
    (A) An amount equal to 5.0 percent of the State savings 
association's total assets at the time the State savings association was 
notified or deemed to have notice that the State savings association was 
undercapitalized; or
    (B) The amount necessary to restore the relevant capital measures of 
the State savings association to the levels required for the State 
savings association to be classified as adequately capitalized, as those 
capital measures and levels are defined at the time that the State 
savings association initially fails to comply with a capital restoration 
plan under this subpart.
    (ii) Limit on duration. The guarantee and limit of liability under 
section 38 and this subpart shall expire after the FDIC notifies the 
State savings association that it has remained adequately capitalized 
for each of four consecutive calendar quarters. The expiration or 
fulfillment by a company of a guarantee of a capital restoration plan 
shall not limit the liability of the company under any guarantee 
required or provided in connection with any capital restoration plan 
filed by the same State savings association after expiration of the 
first guarantee.
    (iii) Collection on guarantee. Each company that controls a given 
State savings association shall be jointly and severally liable for the 
guarantee for such State savings association as required under section 
38 and this subpart, and the FDIC may require and collect payment of the 
full amount of that guarantee from any or all of the companies issuing 
the guarantee.
    (2) Failure to provide guarantee. In the event that a State savings 
association that is controlled by any company submits a capital 
restoration plan that does not contain the guarantee required under 
section 38(e)(2) of the FDI Act, the State savings association shall, 
upon submission of the plan, be subject to the provisions of section 38 
and this subpart are applicable to State savings associations that have 
not submitted an acceptable capital restoration plan.
    (3) Failure to perform guarantee. Failure by any company that 
controls a State savings association to perform fully its guarantee of 
any capital plan shall constitute a material failure to implement the 
plan for purposes of section 38(f) of the FDI Act. Upon such failure, 
the State savings association shall be subject to the provisions of 
section 38 and this subpart that are applicable to State savings 
associations that have failed in a material respect to implement a 
capital restoration plan.



Sec. 390.455  Mandatory and discretionary supervisory actions under
section 38.

    (a) Mandatory supervisory actions--(1) Provisions applicable to all 
State savings associations. All State savings associations are subject 
to the restrictions contained in section 38(d) of the FDI Act on payment 
of capital distributions and management fees.
    (2) Provisions applicable to undercapitalized, significantly 
undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized State savings 
associations. Immediately upon receiving notice or being deemed to have 
notice, as provided in Sec. 390.452 or Sec. 390.454, that the State 
savings association is undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, 
or critically undercapitalized, the State savings association shall 
become subject to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act:
    (i) Restricting payment of capital distributions and management fees 
(section 38(d));
    (ii) Requiring that the FDIC monitor the condition of the State 
savings association (section 38(e)(1));

[[Page 1249]]

    (iii) Requiring submission of a capital restoration plan within the 
schedule established in this subpart (section 38(e)(2));
    (iv) Restricting the growth of the State savings association's 
assets (section 38(e)(3)); and
    (v) Requiring prior approval of certain expansion proposals (section 
38(e)(4)).
    (3) Additional provisions applicable to significantly 
undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized State savings 
associations. In addition to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act 
described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, immediately upon 
receiving notice or being deemed to have notice, as provided in 
Sec. 390.452 or Sec. 390.454, that the State savings association is 
significantly undercapitalized, or critically undercapitalized, or that 
the State savings association is subject to the provisions applicable to 
institutions that are significantly undercapitalized because the State 
savings association failed to submit or implement in any material 
respect an acceptable capital restoration plan, the State savings 
association shall become subject to the provisions of section 38 of the 
FDI Act that restrict compensation paid to senior executive officers of 
the institution (section 38(f)(4)).
    (4) Additional provisions applicable to critically undercapitalized 
State savings associations. In addition to the provisions of section 38 
of the FDI Act described in paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3) of this 
section, immediately upon receiving notice or being deemed to have 
notice, as provided in Sec. 390.452 that the State savings association 
is critically undercapitalized, the State savings association shall 
become subject to the provisions of section 38 of the FDI Act:
    (i) Restricting the activities of the State savings association 
(section 38(h)(1)); and
    (ii) Restricting payments on subordinated debt of the State savings 
association (section 38(h)(2)).
    (b) Discretionary supervisory actions. In taking any action under 
section 38 that is within the FDIC's discretion to take in connection 
with: A State savings association that is deemed to be undercapitalized, 
significantly undercapitalized or critically undercapitalized, or has 
been reclassified as undercapitalized, or significantly 
undercapitalized; an officer or director of such State savings 
association; or a company that controls such State savings association, 
the FDIC shall follow the procedures for issuing directives under 
Secs. 390.456 and 390.458 unless otherwise provided in section 38 or 
this subpart.



Sec. 390.456  Directives to take prompt corrective action.

    (a) Notice of intent to issue a directive--(1) In general. The FDIC 
shall provide an undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, or 
critically undercapitalized State savings association or, where 
appropriate, any company that controls the State savings association, 
prior written notice of the FDIC's intention to issue a directive 
requiring such State savings association or company to take actions or 
to follow proscriptions described in section 38 that are within the 
FDIC's discretion to require or impose under section 38 of the FDI Act, 
including sections 38(e)(5), (f)(2), (f)(3), or (f)(5). The State 
savings association shall have such time to respond to a proposed 
directive as provided by the FDIC under paragraph (c) of this section.
    (2) Immediate issuance of final directive. If the FDIC finds it 
necessary in order to carry out the purposes of section 38 of the FDI 
Act, the FDIC may, without providing the notice prescribed in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section, issue a directive requiring a State savings 
association or any company that controls a State savings association 
immediately to take actions or to follow proscriptions described in 
section 38 that are within the FDIC's discretion to require or impose 
under section 38 of the FDI Act, including section 38(e)(5), (f)(2), 
(f)(3), or (f)(5). A State savings association or company that is 
subject to such an immediately effective directive may submit a written 
appeal of the directive to the FDIC. Such an appeal must be received by 
the FDIC within 14 calendar days of the issuance of the directive, 
unless the FDIC permits a longer period. The FDIC shall consider any 
such appeal, if filed in a timely matter, within 60 days of receiving 
the appeal. During such period of

[[Page 1250]]

review, the directive shall remain in effect unless the FDIC, in its 
sole discretion, stays the effectiveness of the directive.
    (b) Contents of notice. A notice of intention to issue a directive 
shall include:
    (1) A statement of the State savings association's capital measures 
and capital levels;
    (2) A description of the restrictions, prohibitions or affirmative 
actions that the FDIC proposes to impose or require;
    (3) The proposed date when such restrictions or prohibitions would 
be effective or the proposed date for completion of such affirmative 
actions; and
    (4) The date by which the State savings association or company 
subject to the directive may file with the FDIC a written response to 
the notice.
    (c) Response to notice--(1) Time for response. A State savings 
association or company may file a written response to a notice of intent 
to issue a directive within the time period set by the FDIC. The date 
shall be at least 14 calendar days from the date of the notice unless 
the FDIC determines that a shorter period is appropriate in light of the 
financial condition of the State savings association or other relevant 
circumstances.
    (2) Content of response. The response should include:
    (i) An explanation why the action proposed by the FDIC is not an 
appropriate exercise of discretion under section 38;
    (ii) Any recommended modification of the proposed directive; and
    (iii) Any other relevant information, mitigating circumstances, 
documentation, or other evidence in support of the position of the State 
savings association or company regarding the proposed directive.
    (d) FDIC consideration of response. After considering the response, 
the FDIC may:
    (1) Issue the directive as proposed or in modified form;
    (2) Determine not to issue the directive and so notify the State 
savings association or company; or
    (3) Seek additional information or clarification of the response 
from the State savings association or company, or any other relevant 
source.
    (e) Failure to file response. Failure by a State savings association 
or company to file with the FDIC, within the specified time period, a 
written response to a proposed directive shall constitute a waiver of 
the opportunity to respond and shall constitute consent to the issuance 
of the directive.
    (f) Request for modification or rescission of directive. Any State 
savings association or company that is subject to a directive under this 
subpart, upon a change in circumstances, request in writing that the 
FDIC reconsider the terms of the directive, and may propose that the 
directive be rescinded or modified. Unless otherwise ordered by the 
FDIC, the directive shall continue in place while such request is 
pending before the FDIC.



Sec. 390.457  Procedures for reclassifying a State savings 
association based on criteria other than capital.

    (a) Reclassification based on unsafe or unsound condition or 
practice--(1) Issuance of notice of proposed reclassification--(i) 
Grounds for reclassification. (A) Pursuant to Sec. 390.453(c), the FDIC 
may reclassify a well capitalized State savings association as 
adequately capitalized or subject an adequately capitalized or 
undercapitalized institution to the supervisory actions applicable to 
the next lower capital category if:
    (1) The FDIC determines that the State savings association is in 
unsafe or unsound condition; or
    (2) The FDIC deems the State savings association to be engaged in an 
unsafe or unsound practice and not to have corrected the deficiency.
    (B) Any action pursuant to this paragraph (a)(1)(i) shall 
hereinafter be referred to as ``reclassification.''
    (ii) Prior notice to institution. Prior to taking action pursuant to 
Sec. 390.453(c)(1), the FDIC shall issue and serve on the State savings 
association a written notice of the FDIC's intention to reclassify the 
State savings association.
    (2) Contents of notice. A notice of intention to reclassify a State 
savings association based on unsafe or unsound condition shall include:

[[Page 1251]]

    (i) A statement of the State savings association's capital measures 
and capital levels and the category to which the State savings 
association would be reclassified;
    (ii) The reasons for reclassification of the State savings 
association;
    (iii) The date by which the State savings association subject to the 
notice of reclassification may file with the FDIC a written appeal of 
the proposed reclassification and a request for a hearing, which shall 
be at least 14 calendar days from the date of service of the notice 
unless the FDIC determines that a shorter period is appropriate in light 
of the financial condition of the State savings association or other 
relevant circumstances.
    (3) Response to notice of proposed reclassification. A State savings 
association may file a written response to a notice of proposed 
reclassification within the time period set by the FDIC. The response 
should include:
    (i) An explanation of why the State savings association is not in 
unsafe or unsound condition or otherwise should not be reclassified; and
    (ii) Any other relevant information, mitigating circumstances, 
documentation, or other evidence in support of the position of the State 
savings association or company regarding the reclassification.
    (4) Failure to file response. Failure by a State savings association 
to file, within the specified time period, a written response with the 
FDIC to a notice of proposed reclassification shall constitute a waiver 
of the opportunity to respond and shall constitute consent to the 
reclassification.
    (5) Request for hearing and presentation of oral testimony or 
witnesses. The response may include a request for an informal hearing 
before the FDIC or its designee under this section. If the State savings 
association desires to present oral testimony or witnesses at the 
hearing, the State savings association shall include a request to do so 
with the request for an informal hearing. A request to present oral 
testimony or witnesses shall specify the names of the witnesses and the 
general nature of their expected testimony. Failure to request a hearing 
shall constitute a waiver of any right to a hearing, and failure to 
request the opportunity to present oral testimony or witnesses shall 
constitute a waiver of any right to present oral testimony or witnesses.
    (6) Order for informal hearing. Upon receipt of a timely written 
request that includes a request for a hearing, the FDIC shall issue an 
order directing an informal hearing to commence no later than 30 days 
after receipt of the request, unless the FDIC allows further time at the 
request of the State savings association. The hearing shall be held in 
Washington, DC or at such other place as may be designated by the FDIC, 
before a presiding officer(s) designated by the FDIC to conduct the 
hearing.
    (7) Hearing procedures. (i) The State savings association shall have 
the right to introduce relevant written materials and to present oral 
argument at the hearing. The State savings association may introduce 
oral testimony and present witnesses only if expressly authorized by the 
FDIC or the presiding officer(s). Neither the provisions of the 
Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. 554-557) governing adjudications 
required by statute to be determined on the record nor subpart C apply 
to an informal hearing under this section unless the FDIC orders that 
such procedures shall apply.
    (ii) The informal hearing shall be recorded and a transcript 
furnished to the State savings association upon request and payment of 
the cost thereof. Witnesses need not be sworn, unless specifically 
requested by a party or the presiding officer(s). The presiding 
officer(s) may ask questions of any witness.
    (iii) The presiding officer(s) may order that the hearing be 
continued for a reasonable period (normally five business days) 
following completion of oral testimony or argument to allow additional 
written submissions to the hearing record.
    (8) Recommendation of presiding officers. Within 20 calendar days 
following the date the hearing and the record on the proceeding are 
closed, the presiding officer(s) shall make a recommendation to the FDIC 
on the reclassification.

[[Page 1252]]

    (9) Time for decision. Not later than 60 calendar days after the 
date the record is closed or the date of the response in a case where no 
hearing was requested, the FDIC will decide whether to reclassify the 
State savings association and notify the State savings association of 
the FDIC's decision.
    (b) Request for rescission of reclassification. Any State savings 
association that has been reclassified under this section, may, upon a 
change in circumstances, request in writing that the FDIC reconsider the 
reclassification, and may propose that the reclassification be rescinded 
and that any directives issued in connection with the reclassification 
be modified, rescinded, or removed. Unless otherwise ordered by the 
FDIC, the State savings association shall remain subject to the 
reclassification and to any directives issued in connection with that 
reclassification while such request is pending before the FDIC.



Sec. 390.458  Order to dismiss a director or senior executive officer.

    (a) Service of notice. When the FDIC issues and serves a directive 
on a State savings association pursuant to Sec. 390.456 requiring the 
State savings association to dismiss any director or senior executive 
officer under section 38(f)(2)(F)(ii) of the FDI Act, the FDIC shall 
also serve a copy of the directive, or the relevant portions of the 
directive where appropriate, upon the person to be dismissed.
    (b) Response to directive--(1) Request for reinstatement. A director 
or senior executive officer who has been served with a directive under 
paragraph (a) of this section (Respondent) may file a written request 
for reinstatement. The request for reinstatement shall be filed within 
10 calendar days of the receipt of the directive by the Respondent, 
unless further time is allowed by the FDIC at the request of the 
Respondent.
    (2) Contents of request; informal hearing. The request for 
reinstatement should include reasons why the Respondent should be 
reinstated, and may include a request for an informal hearing before the 
FDIC or its designee under this section. If the Respondent desires to 
present oral testimony or witnesses at the hearing, the Respondent shall 
include a request to do so with the request for an informal hearing. The 
request to present oral testimony or witnesses shall specify the names 
of the witnesses and the general nature of their expected testimony. 
Failure to request a hearing shall constitute a waiver of any right to a 
hearing and failure to request the opportunity to present oral testimony 
or witnesses shall constitute a waiver of any right or opportunity to 
present oral testimony or witnesses.
    (3) Effective date. Unless otherwise ordered by the FDIC, the 
dismissal shall remain in effect while a request for reinstatement is 
pending.
    (c) Order for informal hearing. Upon receipt of a timely written 
request from a Respondent for an informal hearing on the portion of a 
directive requiring a State savings association to dismiss from office 
any director or senior executive officer, the FDIC shall issue an order 
directing an informal hearing to commence no later than 30 days after 
receipt of the request, unless the Respondent requests a later date. The 
hearing shall be held in Washington, DC, or at such other place as may 
be designated by the FDIC, before a presiding officer(s) designated by 
the FDIC to conduct the hearing.
    (d) Hearing procedures. (1) A Respondent may appear at the hearing 
personally or through counsel. A Respondent shall have the right to 
introduce relevant written materials and to present oral argument. A 
Respondent may introduce oral testimony and present witnesses only if 
expressly authorized by the FDIC or the presiding officer(s). Neither 
the provisions of the Administrative Procedure Act governing 
adjudications required by statute to be determined on the record nor 
subpart C apply to an informal hearing under this section unless the 
FDIC orders that such procedures shall apply.
    (2) The informal hearing shall be recorded and a transcript 
furnished to the Respondent upon request and payment of the cost 
thereof. Witnesses need not be sworn, unless specifically requested by a 
party or the presiding officer(s). The presiding officer(s) may ask 
questions of any witness.

[[Page 1253]]

    (3) The presiding officer(s) may order that the hearing be continued 
for a reasonable period (normally five business days) following 
completion of oral testimony or argument to allow additional written 
submissions to the hearing record.
    (e) Standard for review. A Respondent shall bear the burden of 
demonstrating that his or her continued employment by or service with 
the State savings association would materially strengthen the State 
savings association's ability:
    (1) To become adequately capitalized, to the extent that the 
directive was issued as a result of the State savings association's 
capital level or failure to submit or implement a capital restoration 
plan; and
    (2) To correct the unsafe or unsound condition or unsafe or unsound 
practice, to the extent that the directive was issued as a result of 
classification of the State savings association based on supervisory 
criteria other than capital, pursuant to section 38(g) of the FDI Act.
    (f) Recommendation of presiding officers. Within 20 calendar days 
following the date the hearing and the record on the proceeding are 
closed, the presiding officer(s) shall make a recommendation to the FDIC 
concerning the Respondent's request for reinstatement with the State 
savings association.
    (g) Time for decision. Not later than 60 calendar days after the 
date the record is closed or the date of the response in a case where no 
hearing has been requested, the FDIC shall grant or deny the request for 
reinstatement and notify the Respondent of the FDIC's decision. If the 
FDIC denies the request for reinstatement, the FDIC shall set forth in 
the notification the reasons for the FDIC's action.



Sec. 390.459  Enforcement of directives.

    (a) Judicial remedies. Whenever a State savings association or 
company that controls a State savings association fails to comply with a 
directive issued under section 38, the FDIC may seek enforcement of the 
directive in the appropriate United States district court pursuant to 
section 8(i)(1) of the FDI Act.
    (b) Administrative remedies--(1) Failure to comply with directive. 
Pursuant to section 8(i)(2)(A) of the FDI Act, the FDIC may assess a 
civil money penalty against any State savings association or company 
that controls a State savings association that violates or otherwise 
fails to comply with any final directive issued under section 38 and 
against any institution-affiliated party who participates in such 
violation or noncompliance.
    (2) Failure to implement capital restoration plan. The failure of a 
State savings association to implement a capital restoration plan 
required under section 38, or this subpart, or the failure of a company 
having control of a State savings association to fulfill a guarantee of 
a capital restoration plan made pursuant to section 38(e)(2) of the FDI 
Act shall subject the State savings association or company to the 
assessment of civil money penalties pursuant to section 8(i)(2)(A) of 
the FDI Act.
    (c) Other enforcement action. In addition to the actions described 
in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the FDIC may seek enforcement 
of the provisions of section 38 or this subpart through any other 
judicial or administrative proceeding authorized by law.



                            Subpart Z_Capital



Sec. 390.460  Scope.

    (a) This subpart prescribes the minimum regulatory capital 
requirements for State savings associations. The subpart applies to 
State savings associations, except as described in paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (b)(1) A State savings association that uses appendix A must comply 
with the minimum qualifying criteria for internal risk measurement and 
management processes for calculating risk-based capital requirements, 
utilize the methodologies for calculating risk-based capital 
requirements, and make the required disclosures described in that 
appendix.
    (2) Sections 390.461 through 390.471 do not apply to the computation 
of risk-based capital requirements by a State savings association that 
uses appendix A of this subpart. However, these State savings 
associations:
    (i) Must compute the components of capital under Sec. 390.465, 
subject to the

[[Page 1254]]

modifications in sections 11 and 12 of appendix A of this subpart.
    (ii) Must meet the leverage ratio requirement at Secs. 390.462(a)(2) 
and 390.467 with tier 1 capital, as computed under sections 11 and 12 of 
appendix A of this subpart.
    (iii) Must meet the tangible capital requirement described at 
Secs. 390.462(a)(3) and 390.468.
    (iv) Are subject to Secs. 390.463 (individual minimum capital 
requirement), 390.464 (capital directives); and 390.469 (consequences of 
failure to meet capital requirements).
    (v) Are subject to the reservations of authority at Sec. 390.470, 
which supplement the reservations of authority at section 1 of appendix 
A of this subpart.



Sec. 390.461  Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subpart:
    Adjusted total assets. The term adjusted total assets means:
    (1) A State savings association's total assets as that term is 
defined in this section;
    (2) Plus
    (i) The prorated assets of any includable subsidiary in which the 
State savings association has a minority ownership interest that is not 
consolidated under generally accepted accounting principles; and
    (ii) The remaining goodwill (FSLIC Capital Contributions) resulting 
from prior regulatory accounting practices as provided in the definition 
of qualifying supervisory goodwill in this section;
    (3) Minus
    (i) Assets not included in the applicable capital standard except 
for those subject to paragraphs (3)(ii) and (3)(iii) of this definition;
    (ii) Investments in any includable subsidiary in which a State 
savings association has a minority interest;
    (iii) Investments in any subsidiary subject to consolidation under 
paragraph (2)(ii) of this definition; and
    (iv) For purposes of determining core capital, qualifying 
supervisory goodwill.
    Asset-backed commercial paper program. The term asset-backed 
commercial paper program (ABCP program) means a program that primarily 
issues commercial paper that has received a credit rating from an NRSRO 
and that is backed by assets or other exposures held in a bankruptcy-
remote special purpose entity. The term sponsor of an ABCP program means 
a State savings association that:
    (1) Establishes an ABCP program;
    (2) Approves the sellers permitted to participate in an ABCP 
program;
    (3) Approves the asset pools to be purchased by an ABCP program; or
    (4) Administers the ABCP program by monitoring the assets, arranging 
for debt placement, compiling monthly reports, or ensuring compliance 
with the program documents and with the program's credit and investment 
policy.
    Cash items in the process of collection. The term cash items in the 
process of collection means checks or drafts in the process of 
collection that are drawn on another depository institution, including a 
central bank, and that are payable immediately upon presentation; U.S. 
Government checks that are drawn on the United States Treasury or any 
other U.S. Government or Government-sponsored agency and that are 
payable immediately upon presentation; broker's security drafts and 
commodity or bill-of-lading drafts payable immediately upon 
presentation; and unposted debits.
    Commitment. The term commitment means any arrangement that obligates 
a State savings association to:
    (1) Purchase loans or securities;
    (2) Extend credit in the form of loans or leases, participations in 
loans or leases, overdraft facilities, revolving credit facilities, home 
equity lines of credit, eligible ABCP liquidity facilities, or similar 
transactions.
    Common stockholders' equity. The term common stockholders' equity 
means common stock, common stock surplus, retained earnings, and 
adjustments for the cumulative effect of foreign currency translation, 
less net unrealized losses on available-for-sale equity securities with 
readily determinable fair values.
    Conditional guarantee. The term conditional guarantee means a 
contingent obligation of the United States Government or its agencies, 
the validity of which to the beneficiary is dependent upon some 
affirmative action--e.g., servicing requirements--on the part of

[[Page 1255]]

the beneficiary of the guarantee or a third party.
    Credit derivative. The term credit derivative means a contract that 
allows one party (the protection purchaser) to transfer the credit risk 
of an asset or off-balance sheet credit exposure to another party (the 
protection provider). The value of a credit derivative is dependent, at 
least in part, on the credit performance of a ``referenced asset.''
    Credit-enhancing interest-only strip. (1) The term credit-enhancing 
interest-only strip means an on-balance sheet asset that, in form or in 
substance:
    (i) Represents the contractual right to receive some or all of the 
interest due on transferred assets; and
    (ii) Exposes the State savings association to credit risk directly 
or indirectly associated with the transferred assets that exceeds its 
pro rata share of the State savings association's claim on the assets 
whether through subordination provisions or other credit enhancement 
techniques.
    (2) The FDIC reserves the right to identify other cash flows or 
related interests as a credit-enhancing interest-only strip. In 
determining whether a particular interest cash flow functions as a 
credit-enhancing interest-only strip, the FDIC will consider the 
economic substance of the transaction.
    Credit-enhancing representations and warranties. (1) The term 
credit-enhancing representations and warranties means representations 
and warranties that are made or assumed in connection with a transfer of 
assets (including loan servicing assets) and that obligate a State 
savings association to protect investors from losses arising from credit 
risk in the assets transferred or loans serviced.
    (2) Credit-enhancing representations and warranties include promises 
to protect a party from losses resulting from the default or 
nonperformance of another party or from an insufficiency in the value of 
the collateral.
    (3) Credit-enhancing representations and warranties do not include:
    (i) Early-default clauses and similar warranties that permit the 
return of, or premium refund clauses covering, qualifying mortgage loans 
for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date of transfer. These 
warranties may cover only those loans that were originated within one 
year of the date of the transfer;
    (ii) Premium refund clauses covering assets guaranteed, in whole or 
in part, by the United States government, a United States government 
agency, or a United States government-sponsored enterprise, provided the 
premium refund clause is for a period not to exceed 120 days from the 
date of transfer; or
    (iii) Warranties that permit the return of assets in instances of 
fraud, misrepresentation or incomplete documentation.
    Depository institution. The term domestic depository institution 
means a financial institution that engages in the business of banking; 
that is recognized as a bank by the bank supervisory or monetary 
authorities of the country of its incorporation and the country of its 
principal banking operations; that receives deposits to a substantial 
extent in the regular course of business; and that has the power to 
accept demand deposits. In the United States, this definition 
encompasses all federally insured offices of commercial banks, mutual 
and stock savings banks, savings or building and loan associations 
(stock and mutual), cooperative banks, credit unions, and international 
banking facilities of domestic depository institutions. Bank holding 
companies and savings and loan holding companies are excluded from this 
definition. For the purposes of assigning risk weights, the 
differentiation between OECD depository institutions and non-OECD 
depository institutions is based on the country of incorporation. Claims 
on branches and agencies of foreign banks located in the United States 
are to be categorized on the basis of the parent bank's country of 
incorporation.
    Direct credit substitute. The term direct credit substitute means an 
arrangement in which a State savings association assumes, in form or in 
substance, credit risk associated with an on- or off-balance sheet asset 
or exposure that was not previously owned by the State savings 
association (third-party asset) and the risk assumed by the State 
savings association exceeds the pro rata share of the State savings 
association's interest in the third-party asset. If a

[[Page 1256]]

State savings association has no claim on the third-party asset, then 
the State savings association's assumption of any credit risk is a 
direct credit substitute. Direct credit substitutes include:
    (1) Financial standby letters of credit that support financial 
claims on a third party that exceed a State savings association's pro 
rata share in the financial claim;
    (2) Guarantees, surety arrangements, credit derivatives, and similar 
instruments backing financial claims that exceed a State savings 
association's pro rata share in the financial claim;
    (3) Purchased subordinated interests that absorb more than their pro 
rata share of losses from the underlying assets;
    (4) Credit derivative contracts under which the State savings 
association assumes more than its pro rata share of credit risk on a 
third-party asset or exposure;
    (5) Loans or lines of credit that provide credit enhancement for the 
financial obligations of a third party;
    (6) Purchased loan servicing assets if the servicer is responsible 
for credit losses or if the servicer makes or assumes credit-enhancing 
representations and warranties with respect to the loans serviced. 
Servicer cash advances as defined in this section are not direct credit 
substitutes;
    (7) Clean-up calls on third party assets. However, clean-up calls 
that are 10 percent or less of the original pool balance and that are 
exercisable at the option of the State savings association are not 
direct credit substitutes; and
    (8) Liquidity facilities that provide support to asset-backed 
commercial paper (other than eligible ABCP liquidity facilities).
    Eligible ABCP liquidity facility. The term eligible ABCP liquidity 
facility means a liquidity facility that supports asset-backed 
commercial paper, in form or in substance, and that meets the following 
criteria:
    (1)(i) At the time of the draw, the liquidity facility must be 
subject to an asset quality test that precludes funding against assets 
that are 90 days or more past due or in default; and
    (ii) If the assets that the liquidity facility is required to fund 
against are assets or exposures that have received a credit rating by a 
NRSRO at the time the inception of the facility, the facility can be 
used to fund only those assets or exposures that are rated investment 
grade by an NRSRO at the time of funding; or
    (2) If the assets that are funded under the liquidity facility do 
not meet the criteria described in paragraph (1) of this definition, the 
assets must be guaranteed, conditionally or unconditionally, by the 
United States Government, its agencies, or the central government of an 
OECD country.
    Eligible State savings association. (1) The term eligible State 
savings association means a State savings association with respect to 
which the FDIC has determined, on the basis of information available at 
the time, that:
    (i) The State savings association's management appears to be 
competent;
    (ii) The State savings association, as certified by its Board of 
Directors, is in substantial compliance with all applicable statutes, 
regulations, orders and written agreements and directives; and
    (iii) The State savings association's management, as certified by 
its Board of Directors, has not engaged in insider dealing, speculative 
practices, or any other activities that have or may jeopardize the 
association's safety and soundness or contributed to impairing the 
association's capital.
    (2) State savings associations, for purposes of this paragraph, will 
be deemed to be eligible unless the FDIC makes a determination otherwise 
or notifies the State savings association of its intent to conduct 
either an informal or formal examination to determine eligibility and 
provides written notification thereof to the State savings association.
    Equity investments. (1) The term equity investments includes 
investments in equity securities and real property that would be 
considered an equity investment under generally accepted accounting 
principles.
    (2)(i) The term equity securities means any:
    (A) Stock, certificate of interest of participation in any profit-
sharing agreement, collateral trust certificate or subscription, 
preorganization certificate or subscription, transferable

[[Page 1257]]

share, investment contract, or voting trust certificate; or
    (B) In general, any interest or instrument commonly known as an 
equity security; or
    (C) Loans having profit sharing features which generally accepted 
accounting principles would reclassify as equity securities; or
    (D) Any security immediately convertible at the option of the holder 
without payment of substantial additional consideration into such a 
security; or
    (E) Any security carrying any warrant or right to subscribe to or 
purchase such a security; or
    (F) Any certificate of interest or participation in, temporary or 
Interim certificate for, or receipt for any of the foregoing or any 
partnership interest; or
    (G) Investments in equity securities and loans or advances to and 
guarantees issued on behalf of partnerships or joint ventures in which a 
State savings association holds an interest in real property under 
generally accepted accounting principles.
    (ii) The term equity securities does not include investments in a 
subsidiary as that term is defined in this section, equity investments 
that are permissible for national banks, ownership interests in pools of 
assets that are risk-weighted in accordance with Sec. 390.466(a)(1)(vi), 
or the stock of Federal Home Loan Banks or Federal Reserve Banks.
    (3) For purposes of this subpart, the term equity investments in 
real property does not include interests in real property that are 
primarily used or intended to be used by the State savings association, 
its subsidiaries, or its affiliates as offices or related facilities for 
the conduct of its business.
    (4) In addition, for purposes of this part, the term equity 
investments in real property does not include interests in real property 
that are acquired in satisfaction of a debt previously contracted in 
good faith or acquired in sales under judgments, decrees, or mortgages 
held by the State savings association, provided that the property is not 
intended to be held for real estate investment purposes but is expected 
to be disposed of within five years or a longer period approved by the 
FDIC.
    Exchange rate contracts. The term exchange rate contracts includes 
cross-currency interest rate swaps; forward foreign exchange rate 
contracts; currency options purchased; and any similar instrument that, 
in the opinion of the FDIC, may give rise to similar risks.
    Face amount. The term face amount means the notational principal, or 
face value, amount of an off-balance sheet item or the amortized cost of 
an on-balance sheet asset.
    Financial asset. The term financial asset means cash or other 
monetary instrument, evidence of debt, evidence of an ownership interest 
in an entity, or a contract that conveys a right to receive or exchange 
cash or another financial instrument from another party.
    Financial standby letter of credit. The term financial standby 
letter of credit means a letter of credit or similar arrangement that 
represents an irrevocable obligation to a third-party beneficiary:
    (1) To repay money borrowed by, or advanced to, or for the account 
of, a second party (the account party); or
    (2) To make payment on behalf of the account party, in the event 
that the account party fails to fulfill its obligation to the 
beneficiary.
    Includable subsidiary. The term includable subsidiary means a 
subsidiary of a State savings association that is:
    (1) Engaged solely in activities not impermissible for a national 
bank;
    (2) Engaged in activities not permissible for a national bank, but 
only if acting solely as agent for its customers and such agency 
position is clearly documented in the State savings association's files;
    (3) Engaged solely in mortgage-banking activities;
    (4)(i) Itself an insured depository institution or a company the 
sole investment of which is an insured depository institution, and
    (ii) Was acquired by the parent State savings association prior to 
May 1, 1989; or
    (5) A subsidiary of any Federal savings association existing as a 
Federal savings association on August 9, 1989 that

[[Page 1258]]

    (i) Was chartered prior to October 15, 1982, as a savings bank or a 
cooperative bank under State law, or
    (ii) Acquired its principal assets from an association that was 
chartered prior to October 15, 1982, as a savings bank or a cooperative 
bank under State law.
    Intangible assets. The term intangible assets means assets 
considered to be intangible assets under generally accepted accounting 
principles. These assets include, but are not limited to, goodwill, core 
deposit premiums, purchased credit card relationships, favorable 
leaseholds, and servicing assets (mortgage and non-mortgage). Interest-
only strips receivable and other nonsecurity financial instruments are 
not intangible assets under this definition.
    Interest-rate contracts. The term interest-rate contracts includes 
single currency interest-rate swaps; basis swaps; forward rate 
agreements; interest-rate options purchased; forward deposits accepted; 
and any other instrument that, in the opinion of the FDIC, may give rise 
to similar risks, including when-issued securities.
    Liquidity facility. The term liquidity facility means a legally 
binding commitment to provide liquidity support to asset-backed 
commercial paper by lending to, or purchasing assets from any structure, 
program or conduit in the event that funds are required to repay 
maturing asset-backed commercial paper.
    Mortgage-related securities. The term mortgage-related securities 
means any mortgage-related qualifying securities under section 3(a)(41) 
of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(41), Provided, 
That the rating requirements of that section shall not be considered for 
purposes of this definition.
    Nationally recognized statistical rating organization (NRSRO). The 
term nationally recognized statistical rating organization means an 
entity recognized by the Division of Market Regulation of the Securities 
and Exchange Commission (Commission) as a nationally recognized 
statistical rating organization for various purposes, including the 
Commission's uniform net capital requirements for brokers and dealers.
    OECD-based country. The term OECD-based country means a member of 
that grouping of countries that are full members of the Organization for 
Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) plus countries that have 
concluded special lending arrangements with the International Monetary 
Fund (IMF) associated with the IMF's General Arrangements to Borrow. 
This term excludes any country that has rescheduled its external 
sovereign debt within the previous five years. A rescheduling of 
external sovereign debt generally would include any renegotiation of 
terms arising from a country's inability or unwillingness to meet its 
external debt service obligations, but generally would not include 
renegotiations of debt in the normal course of business, such as a 
renegotiation to allow the borrower to take advantage of a decline in 
interest rates or other change in market conditions.
    Original maturity. The term original maturity means, with respect to 
a commitment, the earliest date after a commitment is made on which the 
commitment is scheduled to expire (i.e., it will reach its stated 
maturity and cease to be binding on either party), Provided, That 
either:
    (i) The commitment is not subject to extension or renewal and will 
actually expire on its stated expiration date; or
    (ii) If the commitment is subject to extension or renewal beyond its 
stated expiration date, the stated expiration date will be deemed the 
original maturity only if the extension or renewal must be based upon 
terms and conditions independently negotiated in good faith with the 
customer at the time of the extension or renewal and upon a new, bona 
fide credit analysis utilizing current information on financial 
condition and trends.
    Performance-based standby letter of credit. The term performance-
based standby letter of credit means any letter of credit, or similar 
arrangement, however named or described, which represents an irrevocable 
obligation to the beneficiary on the part of the issuer to make payment 
on account of any default by a third party in the performance of a 
nonfinancial or commercial

[[Page 1259]]

obligation. Such letters of credit include arrangements backing 
subcontractors' and suppliers' performance, labor and materials 
contracts, and construction bids.
    Perpetual preferred stock. The term perpetual preferred stock means 
preferred stock without a fixed maturity date that cannot be redeemed at 
the option of the holder, and that has no other provisions that will 
require future redemption of the issue. For purposes of these 
instruments, preferred stock that can be redeemed at the option of the 
holder is deemed to have an ``original maturity'' of the earliest 
possible date on which it may be so redeemed. Cumulative perpetual 
preferred stock is preferred stock where the dividends accumulate from 
one period to the next. Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock is 
preferred stock where the unpaid dividends are not carried over to 
subsequent dividend periods.
    Problem institution. The term problem institution means a State 
savings association that, at the time of its acquisition, merger, 
purchase of assets or other business combination with or by another 
State savings association:
    (1) Was subject to special regulatory controls by its primary 
Federal or state regulatory authority;
    (2) Posed particular supervisory concerns to its primary Federal or 
state regulatory authority; or
    (3) Failed to meet its regulatory capital requirement immediately 
before the transaction.
    Prorated assets. The term prorated assets means the total assets (as 
determined in the most recently available GAAP report but in no event 
more than one year old) of a subsidiary (including those subsidiaries 
where the State savings association has a minority interest) multiplied 
by the State savings association's percentage of ownership of that 
subsidiary.
    Qualifying mortgage loan. (1) The term qualifying mortgage loan 
means a loan that:
    (i) Is fully secured by a first lien on a one-to four-family 
residential property;
    (ii) Is underwritten in accordance with prudent underwriting 
standards, including standards relating the ratio of the loan amount to 
the value of the property (LTV ratio). See Appendix to 12 CFR 390.265. A 
nonqualifying mortgage loan that is paid down to an appropriate LTV 
ratio (calculated using value at origination) may become a qualifying 
loan if it meets all other requirements of this definition;
    (iii) Maintains an appropriate LTV ratio based on the amortized 
principal balance of the loan; and
    (iv) Is performing and is not more than 90 days past due.
    (2) If a State savings association holds the first and junior 
lien(s) on a residential property and no other party holds an 
intervening lien, the transaction is treated as a single loan secured by 
a first lien for the purposes of determining the LTV ratio and the 
appropriate risk weight under Sec. 390.466(a).
    (3) A loan to an individual borrower for the construction of the 
borrower's home may be included as a qualifying mortgage loan.
    (4) A loan that meets the requirements of this section prior to 
modification on a permanent or trial basis under the U.S. Department of 
Treasury's Home Affordable Mortgage Program may be included as a 
qualifying mortgage loan, so long as the loan is not 90 days or more 
past due.
    Qualifying multifamily mortgage loan. (1) The term qualifying 
multifamily mortgage loan means a loan secured by a first lien on 
multifamily residential properties consisting of 5 or more dwelling 
units, provided that:
    (i) The amortization of principal and interest occurs over a period 
of not more than 30 years;
    (ii) The original minimum maturity for repayment of principal on the 
loan is not less than seven years;
    (iii) When considering the loan for placement in a lower risk-weight 
category, all principal and interest payments have been made on a timely 
basis in accordance with its terms for the preceding year;
    (iv) The loan is performing and not 90 days or more past due;
    (v) The loan is made by the State savings association in accordance 
with prudent underwriting standards; and
    (vi) If the interest rate on the loan does not change over the term 
of the loan:

[[Page 1260]]

    (A) The current loan balance amount does not exceed 80 percent of 
the value of the property securing the loan; and
    (B) For the property's most recent fiscal year, the ratio of annual 
net operating income generated by the property (before payment of any 
debt service on the loan) to annual debt service on the loan is not less 
than 120 percent, or in the case of cooperative or other not-for-profit 
housing projects, the property generates sufficient cash flows to 
provide comparable protection to the institution; or
    (vii) If the interest rate on the loan changes over the term of the 
loan:
    (A) The current loan balance amount does not exceed 75 percent of 
the value of the property securing the loan; and
    (B) For the property's most recent fiscal year, the ratio of annual 
net operating income generated by the property (before payment of any 
debt service on the loan) to annual debt service on the loan is not less 
than 115 percent, or in the case of cooperative or other not-for-profit 
housing projects, the property generates sufficient cash flows to 
provide comparable protection to the institution.
    (2) The term qualifying multifamily mortgage loan also includes a 
multifamily mortgage loan that on March 18, 1994 was a first mortgage 
loan on an existing property consisting of 5-36 dwelling units with an 
initial loan-to-value ratio of not more than 80% where an average annual 
occupancy rate of 80% or more of total units had existed for at least 
one year, and continues to meet these criteria.
    (3) For purposes of paragraphs (1)(vi) and (vii) of this definition, 
the term value of the property means, at origination of a loan to 
purchase a multifamily property: the lower of the purchase price or the 
amount of the initial appraisal, or if appropriate, the initial 
evaluation. In cases not involving the purchase of a multifamily loan, 
the value of the property is determined by the most current appraisal, 
or if appropriate, the most current evaluation.
    (4) In cases where a borrower refinances a loan on an existing 
property, as an alternative to paragraphs (1)(iii), (vi), and (vii) of 
this definition:
    (i) All principal and interest payments on the loan being refinanced 
have been made on a timely basis in accordance with the terms of that 
loan for the preceding year; and
    (ii) The net income on the property for the preceding year would 
support timely principal and interest payments on the new loan in 
accordance with the applicable debt service requirement.
    Qualifying residential construction loan. (1) The term qualifying 
residential construction loan, also referred to as a residential bridge 
loan, means a loan made in accordance with sound lending principles 
satisfying the following criteria:
    (i) The builder must have substantial project equity in the home 
construction project;
    (ii) The residence being constructed must be a 1-4 family residence 
sold to a home purchaser;
    (iii) The lending State savings association must obtain sufficient 
documentation from a permanent lender (which may be the construction 
lender) demonstrating that:
    (A) The home buyer intends to purchase the residence; and
    (B) Has the ability to obtain a permanent qualifying mortgage loan 
sufficient to purchase the residence;
    (iv) The home purchaser must have made a substantial earnest money 
deposit;
    (v) The construction loan must not exceed 80 percent of the sales 
price of the residence;
    (vi) The construction loan must be secured by a first lien on the 
lot, residence under construction, and other improvements;
    (vii) The lending State savings association must retain sufficient 
undisbursed loan funds throughout the construction period to ensure 
project completion;
    (viii) The builder must incur a significant percentage of direct 
costs (i.e., the actual costs of land, labor, and material) before any 
drawdown on the loan;
    (ix) If at any time during the life of the construction loan any of 
the criteria of this rule are no longer satisfied, the State savings 
association must immediately recategorize the loan at a 100 percent 
risk-weight and must accurately report the loan in the

[[Page 1261]]

State savings association's next quarterly Thrift Financial Report or 
Consolidated Reports of Condition or Income (``Call Report''), as 
applicable;
    (x) The home purchaser must intend that the home will be owner-
occupied;
    (xi) The home purchaser(s) must be an individual(s), not a 
partnership, joint venture, trust corporation, or any other entity 
(including an entity acting as a sole proprietorship) that is purchasing 
the home(s) for speculative purposes; and
    (xii) The loan must be performing and not more than 90 days past 
due.
    (2) The documentation for each loan and home sale must be sufficient 
to demonstrate compliance with the criteria in paragraph (1) of this 
definition. The FDIC retains the discretion to determine that any loans 
not meeting sound lending principles must be placed in a higher risk-
weight category. The FDIC also reserves the discretion to modify these 
criteria on a case-by-case basis provided that any such modifications 
are not inconsistent with the safety and soundness objectives of this 
definition.
    Qualifying securities firm. The term qualifying securities firm 
means:
    (1) A securities firm incorporated in the United States that is a 
broker-dealer that is registered with the Securities and Exchange 
Commission (SEC) and that complies with the SEC's net capital 
regulations (17 CFR 240.15c3(1)); and
    (2) A securities firm incorporated in any other OECD-based country, 
if the State savings association is able to demonstrate that the 
securities firm is subject to consolidated supervision and regulation 
(covering its subsidiaries, but not necessarily its parent 
organizations) comparable to that imposed on depository institutions in 
OECD countries. Such regulation must include risk-based capital 
requirements comparable to those imposed on depository institutions 
under the Accord on International Convergence of Capital Measurement and 
Capital Standards (1988, as amended in 1998).
    Reciprocal holdings of depository institution instruments. The term 
reciprocal holdings of depository institution instruments means cross-
holdings or other formal or informal arrangements in which two or more 
depository institutions swap, exchange, or otherwise agree to hold each 
other's capital instruments. This definition does not include holdings 
of capital instruments issued by other depository institutions that were 
taken in satisfaction of debts previously contracted, provided that the 
reporting State savings association has not held such instruments for 
more than five years or a longer period approved by the FDIC.
    Recourse. The term recourse means a State savings association's 
retention, in form or in substance, of any credit risk directly or 
indirectly associated with an asset it has sold (in accordance with 
generally accepted accounting principles) that exceeds a pro rata share 
of that State savings association's claim on the asset. If a State 
savings association has no claim on an asset it has sold, then the 
retention of any credit risk is recourse. A recourse obligation 
typically arises when a State savings association transfers assets in a 
sale and retains an explicit obligation to repurchase assets or to 
absorb losses due to a default on the payment of principal or interest 
or any other deficiency in the performance of the underlying obligor or 
some other party. Recourse may also exist implicitly if a State savings 
association provides credit enhancement beyond any contractual 
obligation to support assets it has sold. Recourse obligations include:
    (1) Credit-enhancing representations and warranties made on 
transferred assets;
    (2) Loan servicing assets retained pursuant to an agreement under 
which the State savings association will be responsible for losses 
associated with the loans serviced. Servicer cash advances as defined in 
this section are not recourse obligations;
    (3) Retained subordinated interests that absorb more than their pro 
rata share of losses from the underlying assets;
    (4) Assets sold under an agreement to repurchase, if the assets are 
not already included on the balance sheet;
    (5) Loan strips sold without contractual recourse where the maturity 
of the transferred portion of the loan is

[[Page 1262]]

shorter than the maturity of the commitment under which the loan is 
drawn;
    (6) Credit derivatives that absorb more than the State savings 
association's pro rata share of losses from the transferred assets;
    (7) Clean-up calls on assets the State savings association has sold. 
However, clean-up calls that are 10 percent or less of the original pool 
balance and that are exercisable at the option of the State savings 
association are not recourse arrangements; and
    (8) Liquidity facilities that provide support to asset-backed 
commercial paper (other than eligible ABCP liquidity facilities).
    Replacement cost. The term replacement cost means, with respect to 
interest rate and exchange-rate contracts, the loss that would be 
incurred in the event of a counterparty default, as measured by the net 
cost of replacing the contract at the current market value. If default 
would result in a theoretical profit, the replacement value is 
considered to be zero. This mark-to-market process must incorporate 
changes in both interest rates and counterparty credit quality.
    Residential properties. The term residential properties means 
houses, condominiums, cooperative units, and manufactured homes. This 
definition does not include boats or motor homes, even if used as a 
primary residence, or timeshare properties.
    Residual characteristics. The term residual characteristics means 
interests similar to a multi-class pay-through obligation representing 
the excess cash flow generated from mortgage collateral over the amount 
required for the issue's debt service and ongoing administrative 
expenses or interests presenting similar degrees of interest-rate/
prepayment risk and principal loss risks.
    Residual interest. (1) The term residual interest means any on-
balance sheet asset that:
    (i) Represents an interest (including a beneficial interest) created 
by a transfer that qualifies as a sale (in accordance with generally 
accepted accounting principles) of financial assets, whether through a 
securitization or otherwise; and
    (ii) Exposes a State savings association to credit risk directly or 
indirectly associated with the transferred asset that exceeds a pro rata 
share of that State savings association's claim on the asset, whether 
through subordination provisions or other credit enhancement techniques.
    (2) Residual interests generally include credit-enhancing interest-
only strips, spread accounts, cash collateral accounts, retained 
subordinated interests (and other forms of overcollateralization), and 
similar assets that function as a credit enhancement.
    (3) Residual interests further include those exposures that, in 
substance, cause the State savings association to retain the credit risk 
of an asset or exposure that had qualified as a residual interest before 
it was sold.
    (4) Residual interests generally do not include assets purchased 
from a third party. However, a credit-enhancing interest-only strip that 
is acquired in any asset transfer is a residual interest.
    Risk participation. The term risk participation means a 
participation in which the originating party remains liable to the 
beneficiary for the full amount of an obligation (e.g., a direct credit 
substitute), notwithstanding that another party has acquired a 
participation in that obligation.
    Risk-weighted assets. The term risk-weighted assets means the sum 
total of risk-weighted on-balance sheet assets and the total of risk-
weighted off-balance sheet credit equivalent amounts. These assets are 
calculated in accordance with Sec. 390.466.
    Securitization. The term securitization means the pooling and 
repackaging by a special purpose entity of assets or other credit 
exposures that can be sold to investors. Securitization includes 
transactions that create stratified credit risk positions whose 
performance is dependent upon an underlying pool of credit exposures, 
including loans and commitments.
    Servicer cash advance. The term servicer cash advance means funds 
that a residential mortgage servicer advances to ensure an uninterrupted 
flow of payments, including advances made

[[Page 1263]]

to cover foreclosure costs or other expenses to facilitate the timely 
collection of the loan. A servicer cash advance is not a recourse 
obligation or a direct credit substitute if:
    (1) The servicer is entitled to full reimbursement and this right is 
not subordinated to other claims on the cash flows from the underlying 
asset pool; or
    (2) For any one loan, the servicer's obligation to make 
nonreimbursable advances is contractually limited to an insignificant 
amount of the outstanding principal amount on that loan.
    State. The term State means any one of the several states of the 
United States of America, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the 
territories and possessions of the United States.
    Structured financing program. The term structured financing program 
means a program where receivable interests and asset- or mortgage-backed 
securities issued by multiple participants are purchased by a special 
purpose entity that repackages those exposures into securities that can 
be sold to investors. Structured financing programs allocate credit 
risk, generally, between the participants and credit enhancement 
provided to the program.
    Subsidiary. The term subsidiary means any corporation, partnership, 
business trust, joint venture, association or similar organization in 
which a State savings association directly or indirectly holds an 
ownership interest and the assets of which are consolidated with those 
of the State savings association for purposes of reporting under 
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). Generally, these are 
majority-owned subsidiaries.\1\ This definition does not include 
ownership interests that were taken in satisfaction of debts previously 
contracted, provided that the reporting State savings association has 
not held the interest for more than five years or a longer period 
approved by the FDIC.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ The FDIC reserves the right to review a State savings 
association's investment in a subsidiary on a case-by-case basis. If the 
FDIC determines that such investment is more appropriately treated as an 
equity security or an ownership interest in a subsidiary, it will make 
such determination regardless of the percentage of ownership held by the 
State savings association.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Tier 1 capital. The term Tier 1 capital means core capital as 
computed in accordance with Sec. 390.465(a).
    Tier 2 capital. The term Tier 2 capital means supplementary capital 
as computed in accordance with Sec. 390.465.
    Total assets. The term total assets means total assets as would be 
required to be reported for consolidated entities on period-end reports 
filed with the FDIC in accordance with generally accepted accounting 
principles.
    Traded position. The term traded position means a position retained, 
assumed, or issued in connection with a securitization that is rated by 
a NRSRO, where there is a reasonable expectation that, in the near 
future, the rating will be relied upon by:
    (1) Unaffiliated investors to purchase the security; or
    (2) An unaffiliated third party to enter into a transaction 
involving the position, such as a purchase, loan, or repurchase 
agreement.
    Unconditionally cancelable. The term unconditionally cancelable 
means, with respect to a commitment-type lending arrangement, that the 
State savings association may, at any time, with or without cause, 
refuse to advance funds or extend credit under the facility. In the case 
of home equity lines of credit, the State savings association is deemed 
able to unconditionally cancel the commitment if it can, at its option, 
prohibit additional extensions of credit, reduce the line, and terminate 
the commitment to the full extent permitted by relevant Federal law.
    United States Government or its agencies. The term United States 
Government or its agencies means an instrumentality of the U.S. 
Government whose debt obligations are fully and explicitly guaranteed as 
to the timely payment of principal and interest by the full faith and 
credit of the United States Government.
    United States Government-sponsored agency or corporation. The term 
United States Government-sponsored agency or corporation means an agency 
or corporation originally established or chartered to serve public 
purposes specified by the United States Congress but

[[Page 1264]]

whose obligations are not explicitly guaranteed by the full faith and 
credit of the United States Government.



Sec. 390.462  Minimum regulatory capital requirement.

    (a) To meet its regulatory capital requirement a State savings 
association must satisfy each of the following capital standards:
    (1) Risk-based capital requirement. (i) A State savings 
association's minimum risk-based capital requirement shall be an amount 
equal to 8% of its risk-weighted assets as measured under Sec. 390.466.
    (ii) A State savings association may not use supplementary capital 
to satisfy this requirement in an amount greater than 100% of its core 
capital as defined in Sec. 390.465.
    (2) Leverage ratio requirement. (i) A State savings association's 
minimum leverage ratio requirement shall be the amount set forth in 
Sec. 390.467.
    (ii) A State savings association must satisfy this requirement with 
core capital as defined in Sec. 390.465(a).
    (3) Tangible capital requirement. (i) A State savings association's 
minimum tangible capital requirement shall be the amount set forth in 
Sec. 390.468.
    (ii) A State savings association must satisfy this requirement with 
tangible capital as defined in Sec. 390.468 in an amount not less than 
1.5% of its adjusted total assets.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) State savings associations are expected to maintain compliance 
with all of these standards at all times.



Sec. 390.463  Individual minimum capital requirements.

    (a) Purpose and scope. The rules and procedures specified in this 
section apply to the establishment of an individual minimum capital 
requirement for a State savings association that varies from the risk-
based capital requirement, the leverage ratio requirement or the 
tangible capital requirement that would otherwise apply to the State 
savings association under this subpart.
    (b) Appropriate considerations for establishing individual minimum 
capital requirements. Minimum capital levels higher than the risk-based 
capital requirement, the leverage ratio requirement or the tangible 
capital requirement required under this subpart may be appropriate for 
individual State savings associations. Increased individual minimum 
capital requirements may be established upon a determination that the 
State savings association's capital is or may become inadequate in view 
of its circumstances. For example, higher capital levels may be 
appropriate for:
    (1) A State savings association receiving special supervisory 
attention;
    (2) A State savings association that has or is expected to have 
losses resulting in capital inadequacy;
    (3) A State savings association that has a high degree of exposure 
to interest rate risk, prepayment risk, credit risk, concentration of 
credit risk, certain risks arising from nontraditional activities, or 
similar risks; or a high proportion of off-balance sheet risk, 
especially standby letters of credit;
    (4) A State savings association that has poor liquidity or cash 
flow;
    (5) A State savings association growing, either internally or 
through acquisitions, at such a rate that supervisory problems are 
presented that are not dealt with adequately by other FDIC regulations 
or other guidance;
    (6) A State savings association that may be adversely affected by 
the activities or condition of its holding company, affiliate(s), 
subsidiaries, or other persons or State savings associations with which 
it has significant business relationships, including concentrations of 
credit;
    (7) A State savings association with a portfolio reflecting weak 
credit quality or a significant likelihood of financial loss, or that 
has loans in nonperforming status or on which borrowers fail to comply 
with repayment terms;
    (8) A State savings association that has inadequate underwriting 
policies, standards, or procedures for its loans and investments; or
    (9) A State savings association that has a record of operational 
losses that exceeds the average of other, similarly situated State 
savings associations; has management deficiencies, including failure to 
adequately monitor and control financial and operating risks, 
particularly the risks presented by

[[Page 1265]]

concentrations of credit and nontraditional activities; or has a poor 
record of supervisory compliance.
    (c) Standards for determination of appropriate individual minimum 
capital requirements. The appropriate minimum capital level for an 
individual State savings association cannot be determined solely through 
the application of a rigid mathematical formula or wholly objective 
criteria. The decision is necessarily based, in part, on subjective 
judgment grounded in agency expertise. The factors to be considered in 
the determination will vary in each case and may include, for example:
    (1) The conditions or circumstances leading to the determination 
that a higher minimum capital requirement is appropriate or necessary 
for the State savings association;
    (2) The exigency of those circumstances or potential problems;
    (3) The overall condition, management strength, and future prospects 
of the State savings association and, if applicable, its holding 
company, subsidiaries, and affiliates;
    (4) The State savings association's liquidity, capital and other 
indicators of financial stability, particularly as compared with those 
of similarly situated State savings associations; and
    (5) The policies and practices of the State savings association's 
directors, officers, and senior management as well as the internal 
control and internal audit systems for implementation of such adopted 
policies and practices.
    (d) Procedures--(1) Notification. When the FDIC determines that a 
minimum capital requirement is necessary or appropriate for a particular 
State savings association, it shall notify the State savings association 
in writing of its proposed individual minimum capital requirement; the 
schedule for compliance with the new requirement; and the specific 
causes for determining that the higher individual minimum capital 
requirement is necessary or appropriate for the State savings 
association. The FDIC shall forward the notifying letter to the 
appropriate state supervisor if a state-chartered savings association 
would be subject to an individual minimum capital requirement.
    (2) Response. (i) The response shall include any information that 
the State savings association wants the FDIC to consider in deciding 
whether to establish or to amend an individual minimum capital 
requirement for the State savings association, what the individual 
capital requirement should be, and, if applicable, what compliance 
schedule is appropriate for achieving the required capital level. The 
responses of the State savings association and appropriate state 
supervisor must be in writing and must be delivered to the FDIC within 
30 days after the date on which the notification was received. Such 
response must be filed in accordance with Secs. 390.106 and 390.108. The 
FDIC may extend the time period for good cause. The time period for 
response by the insured State savings association may be shortened for 
good cause:
    (A) When, in the opinion of the FDIC, the condition of the State 
savings association so requires, and the FDIC informs the State savings 
association of the shortened response period in the notice;
    (B) With the consent of the State savings association; or
    (C) When the State savings association already has advised the FDIC 
that it cannot or will not achieve its applicable minimum capital 
requirement.
    (ii) Failure to respond within 30 days, or such other time period as 
may be specified by the FDIC, may constitute a waiver of any objections 
to the proposed individual minimum capital requirement or to the 
schedule for complying with it, unless the FDIC has provided an 
extension of the response period for good cause.
    (3) Decision. After expiration of the response period, the FDIC 
shall decide whether or not it believes the proposed individual minimum 
capital requirement should be established for the State savings 
association, or whether that proposed requirement should be adopted in 
modified form, based on a review of the State savings association's 
response and other relevant information. The FDIC's decision shall 
address comments received within the response period from the State 
savings association and the appropriate state supervisor and shall state 
the level of capital required, the schedule for compliance with this 
requirement, and any

[[Page 1266]]

specific remedial action the State savings association could take to 
eliminate the need for continued applicability of the individual minimum 
capital requirement. The FDIC shall provide the State savings 
association and the appropriate state supervisor with a written decision 
on the individual minimum capital requirement, addressing the 
substantive comments made by the State savings association and setting 
forth the decision and the basis for that decision. Upon receipt of this 
decision by the State savings association, the individual minimum 
capital requirement becomes effective and binding upon the State savings 
association. This decision represents final agency action.
    (4) Failure to comply. Failure to satisfy an individual minimum 
capital requirement, or to meet any required incremental additions to 
capital under a schedule for compliance with such an individual minimum 
capital requirement, shall constitute a legal basis for issuing a 
capital directive pursuant to Sec. 390.464.
    (5) Change in circumstances. If, after a decision is made under 
paragraph (d)(3) of this section, there is a change in the circumstances 
affecting the State savings association's capital adequacy or its 
ability to reach its required minimum capital level by the specified 
date, FDIC may amend the individual minimum capital requirement or the 
State savings association's schedule for such compliance. The FDIC may 
decline to consider a State savings association's request for such 
changes that are not based on a significant change in circumstances or 
that are repetitive or frivolous. Pending the FDIC's reexamination of 
the original decision, that original decision and any compliance 
schedule established thereunder shall continue in full force and effect.



Sec. 390.464  Capital directives.

    (a) Issuance of a Capital Directive--(1) Purpose. In addition to any 
other action authorized by law, the FDIC, may issue a capital directive 
to a State savings association that does not have an amount of capital 
satisfying its minimum capital requirement. Issuance of such a capital 
directive may be based on a State savings association's noncompliance 
with the risk-based capital requirement, the leverage ratio requirement, 
the tangible capital requirement, or individual minimum capital 
requirement established under this subpart, by a written agreement under 
12 U.S.C. 1464(s), or as a condition for approval of an application. A 
capital directive may order a State savings association to:
    (i) Achieve its minimum capital requirement by a specified date;
    (ii) Adhere to the compliance schedule for achieving its individual 
minimum capital requirement;
    (iii) Submit and adhere to a capital plan acceptable to the FDIC 
describing the means and a time schedule by which the State savings 
association shall reach its required capital level;
    (iv) Take other action, including but not limited to, reducing the 
State savings association's assets or its rate of liability growth, or 
imposing restrictions on the State savings association's payment of 
dividends, in order to cause the State savings association to reach its 
required capital level;
    (v) Take any action authorized under Sec. 390.469(e); or
    (vi) Take a combination of any of these actions.
    (2) Enforcement of capital directive. A capital directive issued 
under this section, including a plan submitted pursuant to a capital 
directive, is enforceable under 12 U.S.C. 1818 in the same manner and to 
the same extent as an effective and outstanding cease and desist order 
which has become final under 12 U.S.C. 1818.
    (3) Notice of intent to issue capital directive. The FDIC will 
determine whether to initiate the process of issuing a capital 
directive. The FDIC will notify a State savings association in writing 
by registered mail of its intention to issue a capital directive. Since 
a state-chartered savings association is involved, the FDIC will also 
notify and solicit comment from the appropriate state supervisor. The 
notice will state:
    (i) The reasons for issuance of the capital directive and
    (ii) The proposed contents of the capital directive.
    (3) Response to notice of intent. (i) A State savings association 
may respond

[[Page 1267]]

to the notice of intent by submitting its own compliance plan, or may 
propose an alternative plan. The response should also include any 
information that the State savings association wishes the FDIC to 
consider in deciding whether to issue a capital directive. The 
appropriate state supervisor may also submit a response. These responses 
must be in writing and be delivered within 30 days after the receipt of 
the notices. Such responses must be filed in accordance with 
Secs. 390.106 and 390.108. In its discretion, the FDIC may extend the 
time period for the response for good cause. The FDIC may, for good 
cause, shorten the 30-day time period for response by the insured State 
savings association:
    (A) When, in the opinion of the FDIC, the condition of the State 
savings association so requires, and the FDIC informs the State savings 
association of the shortened response period in the notice;
    (B) With the consent of the State savings association; or
    (C) When the State savings association already has advised the FDIC 
that it cannot or will not achieve its applicable minimum capital 
requirement.
    (ii) Failure to respond within 30 days of receipt, or such other 
time period as may be specified by the FDIC, may constitute a waiver of 
any objections to the capital directive unless the FDIC grants an 
extension of the time period for good cause.
    (4) Decision. After the closing date of the State savings 
association's response period, or upon receipt of the State savings 
association's response, if earlier, the FDIC shall consider the State 
savings association's response and may seek additional information or 
clarification of the response. Thereafter, the FDIC will determine 
whether or not to issue a capital directive and, if one is to be issued, 
whether it should be as originally proposed or in modified form.
    (5) Service and effectiveness. (i) Upon issuance, a capital 
directive will be served upon the State savings association. It will 
include or be accompanied by a statement of reasons for its issuance and 
shall address the responses received during the response period.
    (ii) A capital directive shall become effective upon the expiration 
of 30 days after service upon the State savings association, unless the 
FDIC determines that a shorter effective period is necessary either on 
account of the public interest or in order to achieve the capital 
directive's purpose. If the State savings association has consented to 
issuance of the capital directive, it may become effective immediately. 
A capital directive shall remain in effect and enforceable unless, and 
then only to the extent that, it is stayed, modified, or terminated by 
the FDIC.
    (6) Change in circumstances. Upon a change in circumstances, a State 
savings association may submit a request to the FDIC to reconsider the 
terms of the capital directive or consider changes in the State savings 
association's capital plan issued under a directive for the State 
savings association to achieve its minimum capital requirement. If the 
FDIC believes such a change is warranted, the FDIC may modify the State 
savings association's capital requirement or may refuse to make such 
modification if it determines that there are not significant changes in 
circumstances. Pending a decision on reconsideration, the capital 
directive and capital plan shall continue in full force and effect.
    (b) Relation to other administrative actions. The FDIC--
    (1) May consider a State savings association's progress in adhering 
to any capital plan required under this section whenever such State 
savings association or any affiliate of such State savings association 
seeks approval for any proposal that would have the effect of diverting 
earnings, diminishing capital, or otherwise impeding such State savings 
association's progress in meeting its minimum capital requirement; and
    (2) May disapprove any proposal referred to in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section if the FDIC determines that the proposal would adversely 
affect the ability of the State savings association on a current or pro 
forma basis to satisfy its capital requirement.

[[Page 1268]]



Sec. 390.465  Components of capital.

    (a) Core Capital. (1) The following elements,\1\ less the amount of 
any deductions pursuant to paragraph (a)(2) of this section, comprise a 
State savings association' s core capital:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Stock issues where the dividend is reset periodically based on 
current market conditions and the State savings association's current 
credit rating, including but not limited to, auction rate, money market 
or remarketable preferred stock, are assigned to supplementary capital, 
regardless of cumulative or noncumulative characteristics.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i) Common stockholders' equity (including retained earnings);
    (ii) Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock and related surplus; 
\2\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ Stock issued by subsidiaries that may not be counted by the 
parent State savings association on the Thrift Financial Report or 
Consolidated Reports of Condition or Income (``Call Report''), as 
applicable, likewise shall not be considered in calculating capital. For 
example, preferred stock issued by a State savings association or a 
subsidiary that is, in effect, collateralized by assets of the State 
savings association or one of its subsidiaries shall not be included in 
capital. Similarly, common stock with mandatorily redeemable provisions 
is not includable in core capital.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) Minority interests in the equity accounts of the subsidiaries 
that are fully consolidated.
    (iv) Nonwithdrawable accounts and pledged deposits of mutual State 
savings associations (excluding any treasury shares held by the State 
savings association) meeting the criteria of regulations and memoranda 
of the FDIC to the extent that such accounts or deposits have no fixed 
maturity date, cannot be withdrawn at the option of the accountholder, 
and do not earn interest that carries over to subsequent periods;
    (2) Deductions from core capital. (i) Intangible assets, as defined 
in Sec. 390.461, are deducted from assets and capital in computing core 
capital, except as otherwise provided by Sec. 390.471.
    (ii) Servicing assets that are not includable in core capital 
pursuant to Sec. 390.471 are deducted from assets and capital in 
computing core capital.
    (iii) Credit-enhancing interest-only strips that are not includable 
in core capital under Sec. 390.471 are deducted from assets and capital 
in computing core capital.
    (iv) Investments, both equity and debt, in subsidiaries that are not 
includable subsidiaries (including those subsidiaries where the State 
savings association has a minority ownership interest) are deducted from 
assets and, thus core capital except as provided in paragraphs (a)(2)(v) 
and (vi) of this section.
    (v) If a State savings association has any investments (both debt 
and equity) in one or more subsidiaries engaged in any activity that 
would not fall within the scope of activities in which includable 
subsidiaries may engage, it must deduct such investments from assets 
and, thus, core capital in accordance with this paragraph (a)(2)(v). The 
State savings association must first deduct from assets and, thus, core 
capital the amount by which any investments in such subsidiary(ies) 
exceed the amount of such investments held by the State savings 
association as of April 12, 1989. Next the State savings association 
must deduct from assets and, thus, core capital, the State savings 
association's investments in and extensions of credit to the subsidiary 
on the date as of which the State savings association's capital is being 
determined.
    (vi) If a State savings association holds a subsidiary (either 
directly or through a subsidiary) that is itself a domestic depository 
institution, the FDIC may, in its sole discretion upon determining that 
the amount of core capital that would be required would be higher if the 
assets and liabilities of such subsidiary were consolidated with those 
of the parent State savings association than the amount that would be 
required if the parent State savings association's investment were 
deducted pursuant to paragraphs (a)(2)(iv) and (v) of this section, 
consolidate the assets and liabilities of that subsidiary with those of 
the parent State savings association in calculating the capital adequacy 
of the parent State savings association, regardless of whether the 
subsidiary would otherwise be an includable subsidiary as defined in 
Sec. 390.461.
    (vii) Deferred tax assets that are not includable in core capital 
pursuant to Sec. 390.471 are deducted from assets and capital in 
computing core capital.

[[Page 1269]]

    (b) Supplementary Capital. Supplementary capital counts towards a 
State savings association's total capital up to a maximum of 100% of the 
State savings association's core capital. The following elements 
comprise a State savings association's supplementary capital:
    (1) Permanent Capital Instruments. (i) Cumulative perpetual 
preferred stock and other perpetual preferred stock \3\ issued pursuant 
to regulations and memoranda of the FDIC;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \3\ Preferred stock issued by subsidiaries that may not be counted 
by the parent State savings association on the Thrift Financial Report 
or Consolidated Reports of Condition or Income (``Call Report''), as 
applicable, likewise may not be considered in calculating capital. 
Preferred stock issued by a State savings association or a subsidiary 
that is, in effect, collateralized by assets of the State savings 
association or one of its subsidiaries may not be included in capital.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) [Reserved]
    (iii) Nonwithdrawable accounts and pledged deposits (excluding any 
treasury shares held by the State savings association) meeting the 
criteria of 12 CFR 390.307 to the extent that such instruments are not 
included in core capital under paragraph (a) of this section;
    (iv) Perpetual subordinated debt issued pursuant to regulations and 
memoranda of the FDIC; and
    (v) Mandatory convertible subordinated debt (capital notes) issued 
pursuant to regulations and memoranda of the FDIC.
    (2) Maturing Capital Instruments. (i) Subordinated debt issued 
pursuant to regulations and memoranda of the FDIC;
    (ii) Intermediate-term preferred stock issued pursuant to 
regulations and memoranda of the FDIC and any related surplus:
    (iii) Mandatory convertible subordinated debt (commitment notes) 
issued pursuant to regulations and memoranda of the FDIC; and
    (iv) Mandatorily redeemable preferred stock that was issued before 
July 23, 1985 or issued pursuant to regulations and memoranda of the 
Office of Thrift Supervision and approved in writing by the FSLIC for 
inclusion as regulatory capital before or after issuance.
    (3) Transition rules for maturing capital instruments--A State 
savings association may include maturing capital instruments issued on 
or before November 7, 1989, in supplementary capital in accordance with 
the treatment set forth in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (A) At the beginning of each of the last five years of the life of 
the maturing capital instrument, the amount that is eligible to be 
included as supplementary capital is reduced by 20% of the original 
amount of that instrument (net of redemptions).\4\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ Capital instruments may be redeemed prior to maturity and 
without the prior approval of the FDIC, as long as the instruments are 
redeemed with the proceeds of, or replaced by, a like amount of a 
similar or higher quality capital instrument. However, the FDIC must be 
notified in writing at least 30 days in advance of such redemption.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) Only the aggregate amount of maturing capital instruments that 
mature in any one year during the seven years immediately prior to an 
instrument's maturity that does not exceed 20% of an institution's 
capital will qualify as supplementary capital.
    (C) Once a State savings association selects either paragraph 
(b)(3)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section for the issuance of a maturing 
capital instrument, it must continue to elect that option for all 
subsequent issuances of maturing capital instruments for as long as 
there is a balance outstanding of such post-November 7, 1989, issuances. 
Only when such issuances have all been repaid and the State savings 
association has no balance of such issuances outstanding may the State 
savings association elect the other option.
    (4) Allowance for loan and lease losses. Allowance for loan and 
lease losses established under FDIC regulations and memoranda to a 
maximum of 1.25 percent of risk-weighted assets.\5\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \5\ The amount of the allowance for loan and lease losses that may 
be included in capital is based on a percentage of risk-weighted assets. 
The gross sum of risk-weighted assets used in this calculation includes 
all risk-weighted assets, with the exception of assets required to be 
deducted under Sec. 390.466 in establishing risk-weighted assets. 
``Excess reserves for loan and lease losses'' is defined as assets 
required to be deducted from capital under Sec. 390.465(a)(2). A State 
savings association may deduct excess reserves for loan and lease losses 
from the gross sum of risk-weighted assets (i.e., risk-weighted assets 
including allowance for loan and lease losses) in computing the 
denominator of the risk-based capital standard. Thus, a State savings 
association will exclude the same amount of excess allowance for loan 
and lease losses from both the numerator and the denominator of the 
risk-based capital ratio.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 1270]]

    (5) Unrealized gains on equity securities. Up to 45 percent of 
unrealized gains on available-for-sale equity securities with readily 
determinable fair values may be included in supplementary capital. 
Unrealized gains are unrealized holding gains, net of unrealized holding 
losses, before income taxes, calculated as the amount, if any, by which 
fair value exceeds historical cost. The FDIC may disallow such inclusion 
in the calculation of supplementary capital if the FDIC determines that 
the equity securities are not prudently valued.
    (c) Total capital. (1) A State savings association's total capital 
equals the sum of its core capital and supplementary capital (to the 
extent that such supplementary capital does not exceed 100% of its core 
capital).
    (2) The following assets, in addition to assets required to be 
deducted elsewhere in calculating core capital, are deducted from assets 
for purposes of determining total capital:
    (i) Reciprocal holdings of depository institution capital 
instruments; and
    (ii) All equity investments.



Sec. 390.466  Risk-based capital credit risk-weight categories.

    (a) Risk-weighted assets. Risk-weighted assets equal risk-weighted 
on-balance sheet assets (computed under paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section), plus risk-weighted off-balance sheet activities (computed 
under paragraph (a)(2) of this section), plus risk-weighted recourse 
obligations, direct credit substitutes, and certain other positions 
(computed under paragraph (b) of this section). Assets not included 
(i.e., deducted from capital) for purposes of calculating capital under 
Sec. 390.465 are not included in calculating risk-weighted assets.
    (1) On-balance sheet assets. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of 
this section, risk-weighted on-balance sheet assets are computed by 
multiplying the on-balance sheet asset amounts times the appropriate 
risk-weight categories. The risk-weight categories are:
    (i) Zero percent Risk Weight (Category 1). (A) Cash, including 
domestic and foreign currency owned and held in all offices of a State 
savings association or in transit. Any foreign currency held by a State 
savings association must be converted into U.S. dollar equivalents;
    (B) Securities issued by and other direct claims on the U.S. 
Government or its agencies (to the extent such securities or claims are 
unconditionally backed by the full faith and credit of the United States 
Government) or the central government of an OECD country;
    (C) Notes and obligations issued by either the Federal Savings and 
Loan Insurance Corporation or the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation 
and backed by the full faith and credit of the United States Government;
    (D) Deposit reserves at, claims on, and balances due from Federal 
Reserve Banks;
    (E) The book value of paid-in Federal Reserve Bank stock;
    (F) That portion of assets that is fully covered against capital 
loss and/or yield maintenance agreements by the Federal Savings and Loan 
Insurance Corporation or any successor agency;
    (G) That portion of assets directly and unconditionally guaranteed 
by the United States Government or its agencies, or the central 
government of an OECD country;
    (H) Claims on, and claims guaranteed by, a qualifying securities 
firm that are collateralized by cash on deposit in the State savings 
association or by securities issued or guaranteed by the United States 
Government or its agencies, or the central government of an OECD 
country. To be eligible for this risk weight, the State savings 
association must maintain a positive margin of collateral on the claim 
on a daily basis, taking into account any change in a State savings 
association's exposure to the obligor or counterparty

[[Page 1271]]

under the claim in relation to the market value of the collateral held 
in support of the claim.
    (ii) 20 percent Risk Weight (Category 2). (A) Cash items in the 
process of collection;
    (B) That portion of assets collateralized by the current market 
value of securities issued or guaranteed by the United States government 
or its agencies, or the central government of an OECD country;
    (C) That portion of assets conditionally guaranteed by the United 
States Government or its agencies, or the central government of an OECD 
country;
    (D) Securities (not including equity securities) issued by and other 
claims on the U.S. Government or its agencies which are not backed by 
the full faith and credit of the United States Government;
    (E) Securities (not including equity securities) issued by, or other 
direct claims on, United States Government-sponsored agencies;
    (F) That portion of assets guaranteed by United States Government-
sponsored agencies;
    (G) That portion of assets collateralized by the current market 
value of securities issued or guaranteed by United States Government-
sponsored agencies;
    (H) Claims on, and claims guaranteed by, a qualifying securities 
firm, subject to the following conditions:
    (1) A qualifying securities firm must have a long-term issuer credit 
rating, or a rating on at least one issue of long-term unsecured debt, 
from a NRSRO. The rating must be in one of the three highest investment 
grade categories used by the NRSRO. If two or more NRSROs assign ratings 
to the qualifying securities firm, the State savings association must 
use the lowest rating to determine whether the rating requirement of 
this paragraph is met. A qualifying securities firm may rely on the 
rating of its parent consolidated company, if the parent consolidated 
company guarantees the claim.
    (2) A collateralized claim on a qualifying securities firm does not 
have to comply with the rating requirements under paragraph 
(a)(1)(ii)(H)(1) of this section if the claim arises under a contract 
that:
    (i) Is a reverse repurchase/repurchase agreement or securities 
lending/borrowing transaction executed using standard industry 
documentation;
    (ii) Is collateralized by debt or equity securities that are liquid 
and readily marketable;
    (iii) Is marked-to-market daily;
    (iv) Is subject to a daily margin maintenance requirement under the 
standard industry documentation; and
    (v) Can be liquidated, terminated or accelerated immediately in 
bankruptcy or similar proceeding, and the security or collateral 
agreement will not be stayed or avoided under applicable law of the 
relevant jurisdiction. For example, a claim is exempt from the automatic 
stay in bankruptcy in the United States if it arises under a securities 
contract or a repurchase agreement subject to section 555 or 559 of the 
Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.C. 555 or 559), a qualified financial contract 
under section 11(e)(8) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1821(e)(8)), or a netting contract between or among financial 
institutions under sections 401-407 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 U.S.C. 4401-4407), or Regulation 
EE (12 CFR part 231).
    (3) If the securities firm uses the claim to satisfy its applicable 
capital requirements, the claim is not eligible for a risk weight under 
this paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(H);
    (I) Claims representing general obligations of any public-sector 
entity in an OECD country, and that portion of any claims guaranteed by 
any such public-sector entity;
    (J) Bonds issued by the Financing Corporation or the Resolution 
Funding Corporation;
    (K) Balances due from and all claims on domestic depository 
institutions. This includes demand deposits and other transaction 
accounts, savings deposits and time certificates of deposit, federal 
funds sold, loans to other depository institutions, including overdrafts 
and term federal funds, holdings of the State savings association's own 
discounted acceptances for which the account party is a depository 
institution, holdings of bankers acceptances of

[[Page 1272]]

other institutions and securities issued by depository institutions, 
except those that qualify as capital;
    (L) The book value of paid-in Federal Home Loan Bank stock;
    (M) Deposit reserves at, claims on and balances due from the Federal 
Home Loan Banks;
    (N) Assets collateralized by cash held in a segregated deposit 
account by the reporting State savings association;
    (O) Claims on, or guaranteed by, official multilateral lending 
institutions or regional development institutions in which the United 
States Government is a shareholder or contributing member; \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ These institutions include, but are not limited to, the 
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (World Bank), the 
Inter-American Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the African 
Development Bank, the European Investments Bank, the International 
Monetary Fund and the Bank for International Settlements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (P) That portion of assets collateralized by the current market 
value of securities issued by official multilateral lending institutions 
or regional development institutions in which the United States 
Government is a shareholder or contributing member;
    (Q) All claims on depository institutions incorporated in an OECD 
country, and all assets backed by the full faith and credit of 
depository institutions incorporated in an OECD country. This includes 
the credit equivalent amount of participations in commitments and 
standby letters of credit sold to other depository institutions 
incorporated in an OECD country, but only if the originating bank 
remains liable to the customer or beneficiary for the full amount of the 
commitment or standby letter of credit. Also included in this category 
are the credit equivalent amounts of risk participations in bankers' 
acceptances conveyed to other depository institutions incorporated in an 
OECD country. However, bank-issued securities that qualify as capital of 
the issuing bank are not included in this risk category;
    (R) Claims on, or guaranteed by depository institutions other than 
the central bank, incorporated in a non-OECD country, with a remaining 
maturity of one year or less;
    (S) That portion of local currency claims conditionally guaranteed 
by central governments of non-OECD countries, to the extent the State 
savings association has local currency liabilities in that country.
    (iii) 50 percent Risk Weight (Category 3). (A) Revenue bonds issued 
by any public-sector entity in an OECD country for which the underlying 
obligor is a public-sector entity, but which are repayable solely from 
the revenues generated from the project financed through the issuance of 
the obligations;
    (B) Qualifying mortgage loans and qualifying multifamily mortgage 
loans;
    (C) Privately-issued mortgage-backed securities (i.e., those that do 
not carry the guarantee of a government or government sponsored entity) 
representing an interest in qualifying mortgage loans or qualifying 
multifamily mortgage loans. If the security is backed by qualifying 
multifamily mortgage loans, the State savings association must receive 
timely payments of principal and interest in accordance with the terms 
of the security. Payments will generally be considered timely if they 
are not 30 days past due;
    (D) Qualifying residential construction loans as defined in 
Sec. 390.461.
    (iv) 100 percent Risk Weight (Category 4). All assets not specified 
above or deducted from calculations of capital pursuant to Sec. 390.465, 
including, but not limited to:
    (A) Consumer loans;
    (B) Commercial loans;
    (C) Home equity loans;
    (D) Non-qualifying mortgage loans;
    (E) Non-qualifying multifamily mortgage loans;
    (F) Residential construction loans;
    (G) Land loans;
    (H) Nonresidential construction loans;
    (I) Obligations issued by any state or any political subdivision 
thereof for the benefit of a private party or enterprise where that 
party or enterprise, rather than the issuing state or political 
subdivision, is responsible for the timely payment of principal and 
interest on the obligations, e.g., industrial development bonds;

[[Page 1273]]

    (J) Debt securities not otherwise described in this section;
    (K) Investments in fixed assets and premises;
    (L) Certain nonsecurity financial instruments including servicing 
assets and intangible assets includable in core capital under 
Sec. 390.471;
    (M) Interest-only strips receivable, other than credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips;
    (N)-(O) [Reserved]
    (P) That portion of equity investments not deducted pursuant to 
Sec. 390.465;
    (Q) The prorated assets of subsidiaries (except for the assets of 
includable, fully consolidated subsidiaries) to the extent such assets 
are included in adjusted total assets;
    (R) All repossessed assets or assets that are more than 90 days past 
due; and
    (S) Equity investments that the FDIC determines have the same risk 
characteristics as foreclosed real estate by the State savings 
association;
    (T) Equity investments permissible for a national bank.
    (v) [Reserved]
    (vi) Indirect ownership interests in pools of assets. Assets 
representing an indirect holding of a pool of assets, e.g., mutual 
funds, are assigned to risk-weight categories under this section based 
upon the risk weight that would be assigned to the assets in the 
portfolio of the pool. An investment in shares of a mutual fund whose 
portfolio consists primarily of various securities or money market 
instruments that, if held separately, would be assigned to different 
risk-weight categories, generally is assigned to the risk-weight 
category appropriate to the highest risk-weighted asset that the fund is 
permitted to hold in accordance with the investment objectives set forth 
in its prospectus. The State savings association may, at its option, 
assign the investment on a pro rata basis to different risk-weight 
categories according to the investment limits in its prospectus. In no 
case will an investment in shares in any such fund be assigned to a 
total risk weight less than 20 percent. If the State savings association 
chooses to assign investments on a pro rata basis, and the sum of the 
investment limits of assets in the fund's prospectus exceeds 100 
percent, the State savings association must assign the highest pro rata 
amounts of its total investment to the higher risk categories. If, in 
order to maintain a necessary degree of short-term liquidity, a fund is 
permitted to hold an insignificant amount of its assets in short-term, 
highly liquid securities of superior credit quality that do not qualify 
for a preferential risk weight, such securities will generally be 
disregarded in determining the risk-weight category into which the State 
savings association's holding in the overall fund should be assigned. 
The prudent use of hedging instruments by a mutual fund to reduce the 
risk of its assets will not increase the risk weighting of the mutual 
fund investment. For example, the use of hedging instruments by a mutual 
fund to reduce the interest rate risk of its government bond portfolio 
will not increase the risk weight of that fund above the 20 percent 
category. Nonetheless, if the fund engages in any activities that appear 
speculative in nature or has any other characteristics that are 
inconsistent with the preferential risk-weighting assigned to the fund's 
assets, holdings in the fund will be assigned to the 100 percent risk-
weight category.
    (2) Off-balance sheet items. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of 
this section, risk-weighted off-balance sheet items are determined by 
the following two-step process. First, the face amount of the off-
balance sheet item must be multiplied by the appropriate credit 
conversion factor listed in this paragraph (a)(2). This calculation 
translates the face amount of an off-balance sheet exposure into an on-
balance sheet credit-equivalent amount. Second, the credit-equivalent 
amount must be assigned to the appropriate risk-weight category using 
the criteria regarding obligors, guarantors, and collateral listed in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section, provided that the maximum risk weight 
assigned to the credit-equivalent amount of an interest-rate or 
exchange-rate contract is 50 percent. The following are the credit 
conversion factors and the off-balance sheet items to which they apply.

[[Page 1274]]

    (i) 100 percent credit conversion factor (Group A). (A) [Reserved]
    (B) Risk participations purchased in bankers' acceptances;
    (C) [Reserved]
    (D) Forward agreements and other contingent obligations with a 
certain draw down, e.g., legally binding agreements to purchase assets 
at a specified future date. On the date an institution enters into a 
forward agreement or similar obligation, it should convert the principal 
amount of the assets to be purchased at 100 percent as of that date and 
then assign this amount to the risk-weight category appropriate to the 
obligor or guarantor of the item, or the nature of the collateral;
    (E) Indemnification of customers whose securities the State savings 
association has lent as agent. If the customer is not indemnified 
against loss by the State savings association, the transaction is 
excluded from the risk-based capital calculation. When a State savings 
association lends its own securities, the transaction is treated as a 
loan. When a State savings association lends its own securities or is 
acting as agent, agrees to indemnify a customer, the transaction is 
assigned to the risk weight appropriate to the obligor or collateral 
that is delivered to the lending or indemnifying institution or to an 
independent custodian acting on their behalf.
    (ii) 50 percent credit conversion factor (Group B). (A) Transaction-
related contingencies, including, among other things, performance bonds 
and performance-based standby letters of credit related to a particular 
transaction;
    (B) Unused portions of commitments (including home equity lines of 
credit and eligible ABCP liquidity facilities) with an original maturity 
exceeding one year except those listed in paragraph (a)(2)(v) of this 
section. For eligible ABCP liquidity facilities, the resulting credit 
equivalent amount is assigned to the risk category appropriate to the 
assets to be funded by the liquidity facility based on the assets or the 
obligor, after considering any collateral or guarantees, or external 
credit ratings under paragraph (b)(3) of this section, if applicable; 
and
    (C) Revolving underwriting facilities, note issuance facilities, and 
similar arrangements pursuant to which the State savings association's 
customer can issue short-term debt obligations in its own name, but for 
which the State savings association has a legally binding commitment to 
either:
    (1) Purchase the obligations the customer is unable to sell by a 
stated date; or
    (2) Advance funds to its customer, if the obligations cannot be 
sold.
    (iii) 20 percent credit conversion factor (Group C). Trade-related 
contingencies, i.e., short-term, self-liquidating instruments used to 
finance the movement of goods and collateralized by the underlying 
shipment. A commercial letter of credit is an example of such an 
instrument.
    (iv) 10 percent credit conversion factor (Group D). Unused portions 
of eligible ABCP liquidity facilities with an original maturity of one 
year or less. The resulting credit equivalent amount is assigned to the 
risk category appropriate to the assets to be funded by the liquidity 
facility based on the assets or the obligor, after considering any 
collateral or guarantees, or external credit ratings under paragraph 
(b)(3) of this section, if applicable;
    (v) Zero percent credit conversion factor (Group E). (A) Unused 
portions of commitments with an original maturity of one year or less, 
except for eligible ABCP liquidity facilities;
    (B) Unused commitments with an original maturity greater than one 
year, if they are unconditionally cancelable at any time at the option 
of the State savings association and the State savings association has 
the contractual right to make, and in fact does make, either:
    (1) A separate credit decision based upon the borrower's current 
financial condition before each drawing under the lending facility; or
    (2) An annual (or more frequent) credit review based upon the 
borrower's current financial condition to determine whether or not the 
lending facility should be continued; and
    (C) The unused portion of retail credit card lines or other related 
plans that are unconditionally cancelable by the State savings 
association in accordance with applicable law.

[[Page 1275]]

    (vi) Off-balance sheet contracts; interest-rate and foreign exchange 
rate contracts (Group F)--(A) Calculation of credit equivalent amounts. 
The credit equivalent amount of an off-balance sheet interest rate or 
foreign exchange rate contract that is not subject to a qualifying 
bilateral netting contract in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(vi)(B) of 
this section is equal to the sum of the current credit exposure, i.e., 
the replacement cost of the contract, and the potential future credit 
exposure of the off-balance sheet rate contract. The calculation of 
credit equivalent amounts is measured in U.S. dollars, regardless of the 
currency or currencies specified in the off-balance sheet rate contract.
    (1) Current credit exposure. The current credit exposure of an off-
balance sheet rate contract is determined by the mark-to-market value of 
the contract. If the mark-to-market value is positive, then the current 
credit exposure equals that mark-to-market value. If the mark-to-market 
value is zero or negative, then the current exposure is zero. In 
determining its current credit exposure for multiple off-balance sheet 
rate contracts executed with a single counterparty, a State savings 
association may net positive and negative mark-to-market values of off-
balance sheet rate contracts if subject to a bilateral netting contract 
as provided in paragraph (a)(2)(vi)(B) of this section.
    (2) Potential future credit exposure. The potential future credit 
exposure of an off-balance sheet rate contract, including a contract 
with a negative mark-to-market value, is estimated by multiplying the 
notional principal \2\ by a credit conversion factor. State savings 
associations, subject to examiner review, should use the effective 
rather than the apparent or stated notional amount in this calculation. 
The conversion factors are: \3\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ For purposes of calculating potential future credit exposure for 
foreign exchange contracts and other similar contracts, in which 
notional principal is equivalent to cash flows, total notional principal 
is defined as the net receipts to each party falling due on each value 
date in each currency.
    \3\ No potential future credit exposure is calculated for single 
currency interest rate swaps in which payments are made based upon two 
floating rate indices, so-called floating/floating or basis swaps; the 
credit equivalent amount is measured solely on the basis of the current 
credit exposure.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Foreign
                                                  Interest     exchange
              Remaining maturity                    rate         rate
                                                 contracts    contracts
                                                 (percents)   (percents)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
One year or less..............................          0.0          1.0
Over one year.................................          0.5          5.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (B) Off-balance sheet rate contracts subject to bilateral netting 
contracts. In determining its current credit exposure for multiple off-
balance sheet rate contracts executed with a single counterparty, a 
State savings association may net off-balance sheet rate contracts 
subject to a bilateral netting contract by offsetting positive and 
negative mark-to-market values, provided that:
    (1) The bilateral netting contract is in writing;
    (2) The bilateral netting contract creates a single legal obligation 
for all individual off-balance sheet rate contracts covered by the 
bilateral netting contract. In effect, the bilateral netting contract 
provides that the State savings association has a single claim or 
obligation either to receive or pay only the net amount of the sum of 
the positive and negative mark-to-market values on the individual off-
balance sheet rate contracts covered by the bilateral netting contract. 
The single legal obligation for the net amount is operative in the event 
that a counterparty, or a counterparty to whom the bilateral netting 
contract has been validly assigned, fails to perform due to any of the 
following events: default, insolvency, bankruptcy, or other similar 
circumstances;
    (3) The State savings association obtains a written and reasoned 
legal opinion(s) representing, with a high degree of certainty, that in 
the event of a legal challenge, including one resulting from default, 
insolvency, bankruptcy or similar circumstances, the relevant court and 
administrative authorities would find the State savings association's 
exposure to be the net amount under:
    (i) The law of the jurisdiction in which the counterparty is 
chartered or

[[Page 1276]]

the equivalent location in the case of noncorporate entities, and if a 
branch of the counterparty is involved, then also under the law of the 
jurisdiction in which the branch is located;
    (ii) The law that governs the individual off-balance sheet rate 
contracts covered by the bilateral netting contract; and
    (iii) The law that governs the bilateral netting contract;
    (4) The State savings association establishes and maintains 
procedures to monitor possible changes in relevant law and to ensure 
that the bilateral netting contract continues to satisfy the 
requirements of this section; and
    (5) The State savings association maintains in its files 
documentation adequate to support the netting of an off-balance sheet 
rate contract.\4\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \4\ By netting individual off-balance sheet rate contracts for the 
purpose of calculating its credit equivalent amount, a State savings 
association represents that documentation adequate to support the 
netting of an off-balance sheet rate contract is in the State savings 
association's files and available for inspection by the FDIC. Upon 
determination by the FDIC that a State savings association's files are 
inadequate or that a bilateral netting contract may not be legally 
enforceable under any one of the bodies of law described in paragraphs 
(a)(2)(vi)(B)(3) (i) through (iii) of this section, the underlying 
individual off-balance sheet rate contracts may not be netted for the 
purposes of this section.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (C) Walkaway clause. A bilateral netting contract that contains a 
walkaway clause is not eligible for netting for purposes of calculating 
the current credit exposure amount. The term ``walkaway clause'' means a 
provision in a bilateral netting contract that permits a nondefaulting 
counterparty to make a lower payment than it would make otherwise under 
the bilateral netting contract, or no payment at all, to a defaulter or 
the estate of a defaulter, even if the defaulter or the estate of the 
defaulter is a net creditor under the bilateral netting contract.
    (D) Risk weighting. Once the State savings association determines 
the credit equivalent amount for an off-balance sheet rate contract, 
that amount is assigned to the risk-weight category appropriate to the 
counterparty, or, if relevant, to the nature of any collateral or 
guarantee. Collateral held against a netting contract is not recognized 
for capital purposes unless it is legally available for all contracts 
included in the netting contract. However, the maximum risk weight for 
the credit equivalent amount of such off-balance sheet rate contracts is 
50 percent.
    (E) Exceptions. The following off-balance sheet rate contracts are 
not subject to the above calculation, and therefore, are not part of the 
denominator of a State savings association's risk-based capital ratio:
    (1) A foreign exchange rate contract with an original maturity of 14 
calendar days or less; and
    (2) Any interest rate or foreign exchange rate contract that is 
traded on an exchange requiring the daily payment of any variations in 
the market value of the contract.
    (3) If a State savings association has multiple overlapping 
exposures (such as a program-wide credit enhancement and a liquidity 
facility) to an ABCP program that is not consolidated for risk-based 
capital purposes, the State savings association is not required to hold 
duplicative risk-based capital under this subpart against the 
overlapping position. Instead, the State savings association should 
apply to the overlapping position the applicable risk-based capital 
treatment that results in the highest capital charge.
    (b) Recourse obligations, direct credit substitutes, and certain 
other positions--(1) In general. Except as otherwise permitted in this 
paragraph (b), to determine the risk-weighted asset amount for a 
recourse obligation or a direct credit substitute (but not a residual 
interest):
    (i) Multiply the full amount of the credit-enhanced assets for which 
the State savings association directly or indirectly retains or assumes 
credit risk by a 100 percent conversion factor. (For a direct credit 
substitute that is an on-balance sheet asset (e.g., a purchased 
subordinated security), a State savings association must use the amount 
of the direct credit substitute and the full amount of the asset its 
supports, i.e., all the more senior positions in the structure); and

[[Page 1277]]

    (ii) Assign this credit equivalent amount to the risk-weight 
category appropriate to the obligor in the underlying transaction, after 
considering any associated guarantees or collateral. Paragraph (a)(1) of 
this section lists the risk-weight categories.
    (2) Residual interests. Except as otherwise permitted under this 
paragraph (b), a State savings association must maintain risk-based 
capital for residual interests as follows:
    (i) Credit-enhancing interest-only strips. After applying the 
concentration limit under Sec. 390.471(e)(2), a state saving association 
must maintain risk-based capital for a credit-enhancing interest-only 
strip equal to the remaining amount of the strip (net of any existing 
associated deferred tax liability), even if the amount of risk-based 
capital that must be maintained exceeds the full risk-based capital 
requirement for the assets transferred. Transactions that, in substance, 
result in the retention of credit risk associated with a transferred 
credit-enhancing interest-only strip are treated as if the strip was 
retained by the State savings association and was not transferred.
    (ii) Other residual interests. A state saving association must 
maintain risk-based capital for a residual interest (excluding a credit-
enhancing interest-only strip) equal to the face amount of the residual 
interest (net of any existing associated deferred tax liability), even 
if the amount of risk-based capital that must be maintained exceeds the 
full risk-based capital requirement for the assets transferred. 
Transactions that, in substance, result in the retention of credit risk 
associated with a transferred residual interest are treated as if the 
residual interest was retained by the State savings association and was 
not transferred.
    (iii) Residual interests and other recourse obligations. Where a 
State savings association holds a residual interest (including a credit-
enhancing interest-only strip) and another recourse obligation in 
connection with the same transfer of assets, the State savings 
association must maintain risk-based capital equal to the greater of:
    (A) The risk-based capital requirement for the residual interest as 
calculated under paragraph (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section; or
    (B) The full risk-based capital requirement for the assets 
transferred, subject to the low-level recourse rules under paragraph 
(b)(7) of this section.
    (3) Ratings-based approach--(i) Calculation. A State savings 
association may calculate the risk-weighted asset amount for an eligible 
position described in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section by 
multiplying the face amount of the position by the appropriate risk 
weight determined in accordance with Table A or B of this section.

    Note: Stripped mortgage-backed securities or other similar 
instruments, such as interest-only and principal-only strips, that are 
not credit enhancing must be assigned to the 100% risk-weight category.

                        Table A to Sec. 390.466
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Risk weight
                Long term rating category                  (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highest or second highest investment grade..............              20
Third highest investment grade..........................              50
Lowest investment grade.................................             100
One category below investment grade.....................             200
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                        Table B to Sec. 390.466
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Risk weight
               Short term rating category                  (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highest investment grade................................              20
Second highest investment grade.........................              50
Lowest investment grade.................................             100
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Eligibility--(A) Traded positions. A position is eligible for 
the treatment described in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, if:
    (1) The position is a recourse obligation, direct credit substitute, 
residual interest, or asset- or mortgage-backed security and is not a 
credit-enhancing interest-only strip;
    (2) The position is a traded position; and
    (3) The NRSRO has rated a long term position as one grade below 
investment grade or better or a short term position as investment grade. 
If two or more NRSROs assign ratings to a traded position, the State 
savings association must use the lowest rating to determine the 
appropriate risk-weight category under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this 
section.
    (B) Non-traded positions. A position that is not traded is eligible 
for the

[[Page 1278]]

treatment described in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section if:
    (1) The position is a recourse obligation, direct credit substitute, 
residual interest, or asset- or mortgage-backed security extended in 
connection with a securitization and is not a credit-enhancing interest-
only strip;
    (2) More than one NRSRO rate the position;
    (3) All of the NRSROs that provide a rating rate a long term 
position as one grade below investment grade or better or a short term 
position as investment grade. If the NRSROs assign different ratings to 
the position, the State savings association must use the lowest rating 
to determine the appropriate risk-weight category under paragraph 
(b)(3)(i) of this section;
    (4) The NRSROs base their ratings on the same criteria that they use 
to rate securities that are traded positions; and
    (5) The ratings are publicly available.
    (C) Unrated senior positions. If a recourse obligation, direct 
credit substitute, residual interest, or asset- or mortgage-backed 
security is not rated by an NRSRO, but is senior or preferred in all 
features to a traded position (including collateralization and 
maturity), the State savings association may risk-weight the face amount 
of the senior position under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, based 
on the rating of the traded position, subject to supervisory guidance. 
The State savings association must satisfy FDIC that this treatment is 
appropriate. This paragraph (b)(3)(i)(C) applies only if the traded 
position provides substantive credit support to the unrated position 
until the unrated position matures.
    (4) Certain positions that are not rated by NRSROs--(i) Calculation. 
A State savings association may calculate the risk-weighted asset amount 
for eligible position described in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section 
based on the State savings association's determination of the credit 
rating of the position. To risk-weight the asset, the State savings 
association must multiply the face amount of the position by the 
appropriate risk weight determined in accordance with Table C of this 
section.

                        Table C to Sec. 390.466
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Risk weight
                     Rating category                       (in percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Investment grade........................................             100
One category below investment grade.....................             200
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Eligibility. A position extended in connection with a 
securitization is eligible for the treatment described in paragraph 
(b)(4)(i) of this section if it is not rated by an NRSRO, is not a 
residual interest, and meets one of the three alternative standards 
described in paragraph (b)(4)(ii)(A), (B), or (C) of this section:
    (A) Position rated internally. A direct credit substitute, but not a 
purchased credit-enhancing interest-only strip, is eligible for the 
treatment described under paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section, if the 
position is assumed in connection with an asset-backed commercial paper 
program sponsored by the State savings association. Before it may rely 
on an internal credit risk rating system, the state saving association 
must demonstrate to FDIC's satisfaction that the system is adequate. 
Adequate internal credit risk rating systems typically:
    (1) Are an integral part of the State savings association's risk 
management system that explicitly incorporates the full range of risks 
arising from the State savings association's participation in 
securitization activities;
    (2) Link internal credit ratings to measurable outcomes, such as the 
probability that the position will experience any loss, the expected 
loss on the position in the event of default, and the degree of variance 
in losses in the event of default on that position;
    (3) Separately consider the risk associated with the underlying 
loans or borrowers, and the risk associated with the structure of the 
particular securitization transaction;
    (4) Identify gradations of risk among ``pass'' assets and other risk 
positions;
    (5) Use clear, explicit criteria to classify assets into each 
internal rating grade, including subjective factors;
    (6) Employ independent credit risk management or loan review 
personnel to assign or review the credit risk ratings;

[[Page 1279]]

    (7) Include an internal audit procedure to periodically verify that 
internal risk ratings are assigned in accordance with the State savings 
association's established criteria;
    (8) Monitor the performance of the assigned internal credit risk 
ratings over time to determine the appropriateness of the initial credit 
risk rating assignment, and adjust individual credit risk ratings or the 
overall internal credit risk rating system, as needed; and
    (9) Make credit risk rating assumptions that are consistent with, or 
more conservative than, the credit risk rating assumptions and 
methodologies of NRSROs.
    (B) Program ratings. (1) A recourse obligation or direct credit 
substitute, but not a residual interest, is eligible for the treatment 
described in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section, if the position is 
retained or assumed in connection with a structured finance program and 
an NRSRO has reviewed the terms of the program and stated a rating for 
positions associated with the program. If the program has options for 
different combinations of assets, standards, internal or external credit 
enhancements and other relevant factors, and the NRSRO specifies ranges 
of rating categories to them, the State savings association may apply 
the rating category applicable to the option that corresponds to the 
State savings association's position.
    (2) To rely on a program rating, the State savings association must 
demonstrate to FDIC's satisfaction that the credit risk rating assigned 
to the program meets the same standards generally used by NRSROs for 
rating traded positions. The State savings association must also 
demonstrate to FDIC's satisfaction that the criteria underlying the 
assignments for the program are satisfied by the particular position.
    (3) If a State savings association participates in a securitization 
sponsored by another party, FDIC may authorize the State savings 
association to use this approach based on a program rating obtained by 
the sponsor of the program.
    (C) Computer program. A recourse obligation or direct credit 
substitute, but not a residual interest, is eligible for the treatment 
described in paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section, if the position is 
extended in connection with a structured financing program and the State 
savings association uses an acceptable credit assessment computer 
program to determine the rating of the position. An NRSRO must have 
developed the computer program and the State savings association must 
demonstrate to FDIC's satisfaction that the ratings under the program 
correspond credibly and reliably with the rating of traded positions.
    (5) Alternative capital computation for small business obligations--
(i) Definitions. For the purposes of this paragraph (b)(5):
    (A) Qualified State savings association means a State savings 
association that:
    (1) Is well capitalized as defined in Sec. 390.453 without applying 
the capital treatment described in this paragraph (b)(5); or
    (2) Is adequately capitalized as defined in Sec. 390.453 without 
applying the capital treatment described in this paragraph (b)(5) and 
has received written permission from the FDIC to apply that capital 
treatment.
    (B) Small business means a business that meets the criteria for a 
small business concern established by the Small Business Administration 
in 13 CFR 121 pursuant to 15 U.S.C. 632.
    (ii) Capital requirement. Notwithstanding any other provision of 
this paragraph (b), with respect to a transfer of a small business loan 
or lease of personal property with recourse that is a sale under 
generally accepted accounting principles, a qualified State savings 
association may elect to include only the amount of its recourse in its 
risk-weighted assets. To qualify for this election, the State savings 
association must establish and maintain a reserve under generally 
accepted accounting principles sufficient to meet the reasonable 
estimated liability of the State savings association under the recourse 
obligation.
    (iii) Aggregate amount of recourse. The total outstanding amount of 
recourse retained by a qualified State savings association with respect 
to transfers of

[[Page 1280]]

small business loans and leases of personal property and included in the 
risk-weighted assets of the State savings association as described in 
paragraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section, may not exceed 15 percent of the 
association's total capital computed under Sec. 390.465(c).
    (iv) State savings association that ceases to be a qualified State 
savings association or that exceeds aggregate limits. If a State savings 
association ceases to be a qualified State savings association or 
exceeds the aggregate limit described in paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of this 
section, the State savings association may continue to apply the capital 
treatment described in paragraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section to transfers 
of small business loans and leases of personal property that occurred 
when the association was a qualified State savings association and did 
not exceed the limit.
    (v) Prompt corrective action not affected. (A) A State savings 
association shall compute its capital without regard to this paragraph 
(b)(5) of this section for purposes of prompt corrective action (12 
U.S.C. 1831o), unless the State savings association is adequately or 
well capitalized without applying the capital treatment described in 
this paragraph (b)(5) and would be well capitalized after applying that 
capital treatment.
    (B) A State savings association shall compute its capital 
requirement without regard to this paragraph (b)(5) for the purposes of 
applying 12 U.S.C. 1831o(g), regardless of the association's capital 
level.
    (6) Risk participations and syndications of direct credit 
substitutes. A State savings association must calculate the risk-
weighted asset amount for a risk participation in, or syndication of, a 
direct credit substitute as follows:
    (i) If a State savings association conveys a risk participation in a 
direct credit substitute, the State savings association must convert the 
full amount of the assets that are supported by the direct credit 
substitute to a credit equivalent amount using a 100 percent conversion 
factor. The State savings association must assign the pro rata share of 
the credit equivalent amount that was conveyed through the risk 
participation to the lower of: The risk-weight category appropriate to 
the obligor in the underlying transaction, after considering any 
associated guarantees or collateral; or the risk-weight category 
appropriate to the party acquiring the participation. The State savings 
association must assign the pro rata share of the credit equivalent 
amount that was not participated out to the risk-weight category 
appropriate to the obligor, after considering any associated guarantees 
or collateral.
    (ii) If a State savings association acquires a risk participation in 
a direct credit substitute, the State savings association must multiply 
its pro rata share of the direct credit substitute by the full amount of 
the assets that are supported by the direct credit substitute, and 
convert this amount to a credit equivalent amount using a 100 percent 
conversion factor. The State savings association must assign the 
resulting credit equivalent amount to the risk-weight category 
appropriate to the obligor in the underlying transaction, after 
considering any associated guarantees or collateral.
    (iii) If the State savings association holds a direct credit 
substitute in the form of a syndication where each State savings 
association or other participant is obligated only for its pro rata 
share of the risk and there is no recourse to the originating party, the 
State savings association must calculate the credit equivalent amount by 
multiplying only its pro rata share of the assets supported by the 
direct credit substitute by a 100 percent conversion factor. The State 
savings association must assign the resulting credit equivalent amount 
to the risk-weight category appropriate to the obligor in the underlying 
transaction after considering any associated guarantees or collateral.
    (7) Limitations on risk-based capital requirements--(i) Low-level 
exposure rule. If the maximum contractual exposure to loss retained or 
assumed by a State savings association is less than the effective risk-
based capital requirement, as determined in accordance with this 
paragraph (b), for the assets supported

[[Page 1281]]

by the State savings association's position, the risk-based capital 
requirement is limited to the State savings association's contractual 
exposure less any recourse liability account established in accordance 
with generally accepted accounting principles. This limitation does not 
apply when a State savings association provides credit enhancement 
beyond any contractual obligation to support assets it has sold.
    (ii) Mortgage-related securities or participation certificates 
retained in a mortgage loan swap. If a State savings association holds a 
mortgage-related security or a participation certificate as a result of 
a mortgage loan swap with recourse, it must hold risk-based capital to 
support the recourse obligation and that percentage of the mortgage-
related security or participation certificate that is not covered by the 
recourse obligation. The total amount of risk-based capital required for 
the security (or certificate) and the recourse obligation is limited to 
the risk-based capital requirement for the underlying loans, calculated 
as if the State savings association continued to hold these loans as an 
on-balance sheet asset.
    (iii) Related on-balance sheet assets. If an asset is included in 
the calculation of the risk-based capital requirement under this 
paragraph (b) and also appears as an asset on the State savings 
association's balance sheet, the State savings association must risk-
weight the asset only under this paragraph (b), except in the case of 
loan servicing assets and similar arrangements with embedded recourse 
obligations or direct credit substitutes. In that case, the State 
savings association must separately risk-weight the on-balance sheet 
servicing asset and the related recourse obligations and direct credit 
substitutes under this section, and incorporate these amounts into the 
risk-based capital calculation.
    (8) Obligations of subsidiaries. If a State savings association 
retains a recourse obligation or assumes a direct credit substitute on 
the obligation of a subsidiary that is not an includable subsidiary, and 
the recourse obligation or direct credit substitute is an equity or debt 
investment in that subsidiary under generally accepted accounting 
principles, the face amount of the recourse obligation or direct credit 
substitute is deducted for capital under Secs. 390.465(a)(2) and 
390.468(c). All other recourse obligations and direct credit substitutes 
retained or assumed by a State savings association on the obligations of 
an entity in which the State savings association has an equity 
investment are risk-weighted in accordance with this paragraph (b).



Sec. 390.467  Leverage ratio.

    (a) The minimum leverage capital requirement for a State savings 
association assigned a composite rating of 1, as defined in this 
subpart, shall consist of a ratio of core capital to adjusted total 
assets of 3 percent. These generally are strong State savings 
associations that are not anticipating or experiencing significant 
growth and have well-diversified risks, including no undue interest rate 
risk exposure, excellent asset quality, high liquidity, and good 
earnings.
    (b) For all State savings associations not meeting the conditions 
set forth in paragraph (a) of this section, the minimum leverage capital 
requirement shall consist of a ratio of core capital to adjusted total 
assets of 4 percent. Higher capital ratios may be required if warranted 
by the particular circumstances or risk profiles of an individual State 
savings association. In all cases, State savings associations should 
hold capital commensurate with the level and nature of all risks, 
including the volume and severity of problem loans, to which they are 
exposed.



Sec. 390.468  Tangible capital requirement.

    (a) State savings associations shall have and maintain tangible 
capital in an amount equal to at least 1.5% of adjusted total assets.
    (b) The following elements, less the amount of any deductions 
pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section, comprise a State savings 
association's tangible capital:
    (1) Common stockholders' equity (including retained earnings);
    (2) Noncumulative perpetual preferred stock and related earnings;

[[Page 1282]]

    (3) Nonwithdrawable accounts and pledged deposits that would qualify 
as core capital under Sec. 390.465; and
    (4) Minority interests in the equity accounts of fully consolidated 
subsidiaries.
    (c) Deductions from tangible capital. In calculating tangible 
capital, a State savings association must deduct from assets, and, thus, 
from capital:
    (1) Intangible assets (as defined in Sec. 390.461) except for 
mortgage servicing assets to the extent they are includable in tangible 
capital under Sec. 390.471, and credit enhancing interest-only strips 
and deferred tax assets not includable in tangible capital under 
Sec. 390.471.
    (2) Investments, both equity and debt, in subsidiaries that are not 
includable subsidiaries (including those subsidiaries where the State 
savings association has a minority ownership interest), except as 
provided in paragraphs (c)(3) and (4) of this section.
    (3) If a State savings association has any investments (both debt 
and equity) in one or more subsidiary(ies) engaged as of April 12, 1989, 
and continuing to be engaged in any activity that would not fall within 
the scope of activities in which includable subsidiaries may engage, it 
must deduct such investments from assets and, thus, tangible capital in 
accordance with this paragraph (c)(3). The State savings association 
must first deduct from assets and, thus, capital the amount by which any 
investments in such a subsidiary(ies) exceed the amount of such 
investments held by the State savings association as of April 12, 1989. 
Next, the State savings association must deduct from assets and, thus, 
tangible capital the lesser of:
    (i) The State savings association's investments in and extensions of 
credit to the subsidiary as of April 12, 1989; or
    (ii) The State savings association's investments in and extensions 
of credit to the subsidiary on the date as of which the State savings 
association's capital is being determined.
    (4) If a State savings association holds a subsidiary (either 
directly or through a subsidiary) that is itself a domestic depository 
institution the FDIC may, in its sole discretion upon determining that 
the amount of tangible capital that would be required would be higher if 
the assets and liabilities of such subsidiary were consolidated with 
those of the parent State savings association than the amount that would 
be required if the parent State savings association's investment were 
deducted pursuant to paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section, 
consolidate the assets and liabilities of that subsidiary with those of 
the parent State savings association in calculating the capital adequacy 
of the parent State savings association, regardless of whether the 
subsidiary would otherwise be an includable subsidiary as defined in 
Sec. 390.461.



Sec. 390.469  Consequences of failure to meet capital requirements.

    (a) Capital plans. (1) [Reserved]
    (2) The FDIC shall require any State savings association not in 
compliance with capital standards to submit a capital plan that:
    (i) Addresses the State savings association's need for increased 
capital;
    (ii) Describes the manner in which the State savings association 
will increase capital so as to achieve compliance with capital 
standards;
    (iii) Specifies types and levels of activities in which the State 
savings association will engage;
    (iv) Requires any increase in assets to be accompanied by increase 
in tangible capital not less in percentage amount than the leverage 
limit then applicable;
    (v) Requires any increase in assets to be accompanied by an increase 
in capital not less in percentage amount than required under the risk-
based capital standard then applicable; and
    (vi) Is acceptable to the FDIC.
    (3) To be acceptable to the FDIC under this section, a plan must, in 
addition to satisfying all of the requirements set forth in paragraphs 
(a)(2)(i) through (v) of this section, contain a certification that 
while the plan is under review by the FDIC, the State savings 
association will not, without the prior written approval of the 
appropriate Regional Director:
    (i) Grow beyond net interest credited;
    (ii) Make any capital distributions; or

[[Page 1283]]

    (iii) Act inconsistently with any other limitations on activities 
established by statute, regulation or by the FDIC in supervisory 
guidance for State savings associations not meeting capital standards.
    (4) If the plan submitted to the FDIC under paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section is not approved by the FDIC, the State savings association shall 
immediately and without any further action, be subject to the following 
restrictions:
    (i) It may not increase its assets beyond the amount held on the day 
it receives written notice of the FDIC's disapproval of the plan; and
    (ii) It must comply with any other restrictions or limitations set 
forth in the written notice of the FDIC's disapproval of the plan.
    (b) On or after January 1, 1991, the FDIC shall:
    (1) Prohibit any asset growth by any State savings association not 
in compliance with capital standards, except as provided in paragraph 
(d) of this section; and
    (2) Require any State savings association not in compliance with 
capital standards to comply with a capital directive issued by the FDIC 
which may include the restrictions contained in paragraph (e) of this 
section and any other restrictions the FDIC determines appropriate.
    (c) A State savings association that wishes to obtain an exemption 
from the sanctions provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section must 
file a request for exemption with the appropriate Regional Director. 
Such request must include a capital plan that satisfies the requirements 
of paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (d) The FDIC may permit any State savings association that is 
subject to paragraph (b) of this section to increase its assets in an 
amount not exceeding the amount of net interest credited to the State 
savings association's deposit liabilities, if:
    (1) The State savings association obtains the FDIC's prior approval;
    (2) Any increase in assets is accompanied by an increase in tangible 
capital in an amount not less than 3% of the increase in assets;
    (3) Any increase in assets is accompanied by an increase in capital 
not less in percentage amount than required under the risk-based capital 
standards then applicable;
    (4) Any increase in assets is invested in low-risk assets; and
    (5) The State savings association's ratio of core capital to total 
assets is not less than the ratio existing on January 1, 1991.
    (e) If a State savings association fails to meet the risk-based 
capital requirement, the leverage ratio requirement, or the tangible 
capital requirement established under this subpart, the FDIC may, 
through enforcement proceedings or otherwise, require such State savings 
association to take one or more of the following corrective actions:
    (1) Increase the amount of its regulatory capital to a specified 
level or levels;
    (2) Convene a meeting or meetings with the FDIC for the purpose of 
accomplishing the objectives of this section;
    (3) Reduce the rate of earnings that may be paid on savings 
accounts;
    (4) Limit the receipt of deposits to those made to existing 
accounts;
    (5) Cease or limit the issuance of new accounts of any or all 
classes or categories, except in exchange for existing accounts;
    (6) Cease or limit lending or the making of a particular type or 
category of loan;
    (7) Cease or limit the purchase of loans or the making of specified 
other investments;
    (8) Limit operational expenditures to specified levels;
    (9) Increase liquid assets and maintain such increased liquidity at 
specified levels; or
    (10) Take such other action or actions as the FDIC may deem 
necessary or appropriate for the safety and soundness of the State 
savings association, or depositors or investors in the State savings 
association.
    (f) The FDIC shall treat as an unsafe and unsound practice any 
material failure by a State savings association to comply with any plan, 
regulation, written agreement undertaken under this section or order or 
directive issued to comply with the requirements of this subpart.

[[Page 1284]]



Sec. 390.470  Reservation of authority.

    (a) Transactions for purposes of evasion. The FDIC may disregard any 
transaction entered into primarily for the purpose of reducing the 
minimum required amount of regulatory capital or otherwise evading the 
requirements of this subpart.
    (b) Average versus period-end figures. The FDIC reserves the right 
to require a State savings association to compute its capital ratios on 
the basis of average, rather than period-end, assets when the FDIC 
determines appropriate to carry out the purposes of this subpart.
    (c)(1) Reservation of authority. Notwithstanding the definitions of 
core and supplementary capital in Sec. 390.465, the FDIC may find that a 
particular type of purchased intangible asset or capital instrument 
constitutes or may constitute core or supplementary capital, and may 
permit one or more State savings associations to include all or a 
portion of such intangible asset or funds obtained through such capital 
instrument as core or supplementary capital, permanently or on a 
temporary basis, for the purposes of compliance with this subpart or for 
any other purposes. Similarly, the FDIC may find that a particular asset 
or core or supplementary capital component has characteristics or terms 
that diminish its contribution to a State savings association's ability 
to absorb losses, and the FDIC may require the discounting or deduction 
of such asset or component from the computation of core, supplementary, 
or total capital.
    (2) Notwithstanding Sec. 390.466, the FDIC will look to the 
substance of a transaction and may find that the assigned risk weight 
for any asset, or credit equivalent amount or credit conversion factor 
for any off-balance sheet item does not appropriately reflect the risks 
imposed on the State savings association. The FDIC may require the State 
savings association to apply another risk-weight, credit equivalent 
amount, or credit conversion factor that the FDIC deems appropriate.
    (3) The FDIC may find that the capital treatment for an exposure to 
a transaction not subject to consolidation on the State savings 
association's balance sheet does not appropriately reflect the risks 
imposed on the State savings association. Accordingly, the FDIC may 
require the State savings association to treat the transaction as if it 
were consolidated on the State savings association's balance sheet. The 
FDIC will look to the substance of and risk associated with the 
transaction as well as other relevant factors in determining whether to 
require such treatment and in calculating risk based capital as the FDIC 
deems appropriate.
    (4) If this subpart does not specifically assign a risk weight, 
credit equivalent amount, or credit conversion factor, the FDIC may 
assign any risk weight, credit equivalent amount, or credit conversion 
factor that it deems appropriate. In making this determination, the FDIC 
will consider the risks associated with the asset or off-balance sheet 
item as well as other relevant factors.
    (d) In making a determination under this paragraph (c) of this 
section, the FDIC will notify the State savings association of the 
determination and solicit a response from the State savings association. 
After review of the response by the State savings association, the FDIC 
shall issue a final supervisory decision regarding the determination 
made under paragraph (c) of this section.



Sec. 390.471  Purchased credit card relationships, servicing assets,
intangible assets (other than purchased credit card relationships
and servicing assets),credit-enhancing interest-only strips,
and deferred tax assets.

    (a) Scope. This section prescribes the maximum amount of purchased 
credit card relationships, serving assets, intangible assets (other than 
purchased credit card relationships and servicing assets), credit-
enhancing interest-only strips, and deferred tax assets that State 
savings associations may include in calculating tangible and core 
capital.
    (b) Computation of core and tangible capital. (1) Purchased credit 
card relationships may be included (that is, not deducted) in computing 
core capital in accordance with the restrictions in this section, but 
must be deducted in computing tangible capital.

[[Page 1285]]

    (2) In accordance with the restrictions in this section, mortgage 
servicing assets may be included in computing core and tangible capital 
and nonmortgage servicing assets may be included in core capital.
    (3) Intangible assets, as defined in Sec. 390.461, other than 
purchased credit card relationships described in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section, servicing assets described in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section, and core deposit intangibles described in paragraph (g)(3) of 
this section, are deducted in computing tangible and core capital, 
subject to paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section.
    (4) Credit-enhancing interest-only strips may be included (that is 
not deducted) in computing core capital subject to the restrictions of 
this section, and may be included in tangible capital in the same 
amount.
    (5) Deferred tax assets may be included (that is not deducted) in 
computing core capital subject to the restrictions of paragraph (h) of 
this section, and may be included in tangible capital in the same 
amount.
    (c) Market valuations. The FDIC reserves the authority to require 
any State savings association to perform an independent market valuation 
of assets subject to this section on a case-by-case basis or through the 
issuance of policy guidance. An independent market valuation, if 
required, shall be conducted in accordance with any policy guidance 
issued by the FDIC. A required valuation shall include adjustments for 
any significant changes in original valuation assumptions, including 
changes in prepayment estimates or attrition rates. The valuation shall 
determine the current fair value of assets subject to this section. This 
independent market valuation may be conducted by an independent 
valuation expert evaluating the reasonableness of the internal 
calculations and assumptions used by the State savings association in 
conducting its internal analysis. The State savings association shall 
calculate an estimated fair value for assets subject to this section at 
least quarterly regardless of whether an independent valuation expert is 
required to perform an independent market valuation.
    (d) Value limitation. For purposes of calculating core capital under 
this subpart (but not for financial statement purposes), purchased 
credit card relationships and servicing assets must be valued at the 
lesser of:
    (1) Ninety (90) percent of their fair value determined in accordance 
with paragraph (c) of this section; or
    (2) One hundred (100) percent of their remaining unamortized book 
value determined in accordance with the instructions for the Thrift 
Financial Report or Consolidated Reports of Condition or Income (``Call 
Report.''), as applicable.
    (e) Core capital limitations--(1) Servicing assets and purchased 
credit card relationships. (i) The maximum aggregate amount of servicing 
assets and purchased credit card relationships that may be included in 
core capital is limited to the lesser of:
    (A) 100 percent of the amount of core capital; or
    (B) The amount of servicing assets and purchased credit card 
relationships determined in accordance with paragraph (d) of this 
section.
    (ii) In addition to the aggregate limitation in paragraph (e)(1)(i) 
of this section, a sublimit applies to purchased credit card 
relationships and non mortgage-related serving assets. The maximum 
allowable amount of these two types of assets combined is limited to the 
lesser of:
    (A) 25 percent the amount of core capital; and
    (B) The amount of purchased credit card relationships and non 
mortgage-related servicing assets determined in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) Credit-enhancing interest-only strips. The maximum aggregate 
amount of credit-enhancing interest-only strips that may be included in 
core capital is limited to 25 percent of the amount of core capital. 
Purchased and retained credit-enhancing interest-only strips, on a non-
tax adjusted basis, are included in the total amount that is used for 
purposes of determining whether a State savings association exceeds the 
core capital limit.
    (3) Computation. (i) For purposes of computing the limits and 
sublimits in paragraphs (e) and (h) of this section,

[[Page 1286]]

core capital is computed before the deduction of disallowed servicing 
assets, disallowed purchased credit card relationships, disallowed 
credit-enhancing interest-only strips (purchased and retained), and 
disallowed deferred tax assets.
    (ii) A State savings association may elect to deduct the following 
items on a basis net of deferred tax liabilities:
    (A) Disallowed servicing assets;
    (B) Goodwill such that only the net amount must be deducted from 
Tier 1 capital;
    (C) Disallowed credit-enhancing interest-only strips (both purchased 
and retained); and
    (D) Other intangible assets arising from non-taxable business 
combinations. A deferred tax liability that is specifically related to 
an intangible asset (other than purchased credit card relationships) 
arising from a nontaxable business combination may be netted against 
this intangible asset. The net amount of the intangible asset must be 
deducted from Tier 1 capital.
    (iii) Deferred tax liabilities that are netted in accordance with 
paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section cannot also be netted against 
deferred tax assets when determining the amount of deferred tax assets 
that are dependent upon future taxable income.
    (f) Tangible capital limitation. The maximum amount of mortgage 
servicing assets that may be included in tangible capital shall be the 
same amount includable in core capital in accordance with the 
limitations set by paragraph (e) of this section. All nonmortgage 
servicing assets are deducted in computing tangible capital.
    (g) Exemption for certain subsidiaries--(1) Exemption standard. A 
State savings association holding purchased mortgage servicing rights in 
separately capitalized, non-includable subsidiaries may submit an 
application for approval by the FDIC for an exemption from the 
deductions and limitations set forth in this section. The deductions and 
limitations will apply to such purchased mortgage servicing rights, 
however, if the FDIC determines that:
    (i) The State savings association and subsidiary are not conducting 
activities on an arm's length basis; or
    (ii) The exemption is not consistent with the State savings 
association's safe and sound operation.
    (2) Applicable requirements. If the FDIC determines to grant or to 
permit the continuation of an exemption under paragraph (h)(1) of this 
section, the State savings association receiving the exemption must 
ensure the following:
    (i) The State savings association's investments in, and extensions 
of credit to, the subsidiary are deducted from capital when calculating 
capital under this subpart;
    (ii) Extensions of credit and other transactions with the subsidiary 
are conducted in compliance with the rules for covered transactions with 
affiliates set forth in sections 23A and 23B of the Federal Reserve Act, 
as applied to State savings associations; and
    (iii) Any contracts entered into by the subsidiary include a written 
disclosure indicating that the subsidiary is not a bank or State savings 
association; the subsidiary is an organization separate and apart from 
any bank or State savings association; and the obligations of the 
subsidiary are not backed or guaranteed by any bank or State savings 
association and are not insured by the FDIC.
    (h) Treatment of deferred tax assets. For purposes of calculating 
Tier 1 capital under this subpart (but not for financial statement 
purposes) deferred tax assets are subject to the conditions, 
limitations, and restrictions described in this section.
    (1) Tier 1 capital limitations. (i) The maximum allowable amount of 
deferred tax assets net of any valuation allowance that are dependent 
upon future taxable income will be limited to the lesser of:
    (A) The amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent upon future 
taxable income that is expected to be realized within one year of the 
calendar quarter-end date, based on a projected future taxable income 
for that year; or
    (B) Ten percent of the amount of Tier 1 capital that exists before 
the deduction of any disallowed servicing assets, any disallowed 
purchased credit card relationships, any disallowed credit-enhancing 
interest-only strips, and any disallowed deferred tax assets.

[[Page 1287]]

    (ii) For purposes of this limitation, all existing temporary 
differences should be assumed to fully reverse at the calendar quarter-
end date. The recorded amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent 
upon future taxable income, net of any valuation allowance for deferred 
tax assets, in excess of this limitation will be deducted from assets 
and from equity capital for purposes of determining Tier 1 capital under 
this subpart. The amount of deferred tax assets that can be realized 
from taxes paid in prior carryback years and from the reversal of 
existing taxable temporary differences generally would not be deducted 
from assets and from equity capital.
    (iii) Notwithstanding paragraph (h)(1)(B)(ii) of this section, the 
amount of carryback potential that may be considered in calculating the 
amount of deferred tax assets that a State savings association that is 
part of a consolidated group (for tax purposes) may include in Tier 1 
capital may not exceed the amount which the association could reasonably 
expect to have refunded by its parent.
    (2) Projected future taxable income. Projected future taxable income 
should not include net operating loss carryforwards to be used within 
one year of the most recent calendar quarter-end date or the amount of 
existing temporary differences expected to reverse within that year. 
Projected future taxable income should include the estimated effect of 
tax planning strategies that are expected to be implemented to realize 
tax carryforwards that will otherwise expire during that year. Future 
taxable income projections for the current fiscal year (adjusted for any 
significant changes that have occurred or are expected to occur) may be 
used when applying the capital limit at an interim calendar quarter-end 
date rather than preparing a new projection each quarter.
    (3) Unrealized holding gains and losses on available-for-sale debt 
securities. The deferred tax effects of any unrealized holding gains and 
losses on available-for-sale debt securities may be excluded from the 
determination of the amount of deferred tax assets that are dependent 
upon future taxable income and the calculation of the maximum allowable 
amount of such assets. If these deferred tax effects are excluded, this 
treatment must be followed consistently over time.



      Sec. Appendix A to Subpart Z of Part 390--Risk-Based Capital 
Requirements--Internal-Ratings-Based and Advanced Measurement Approaches

Part I  General Provisions
Section 1  Purpose, Applicability, Reservation of Authority, and 
Principle of Conservatism
Section 2  Definitions
Section 3  Minimum Risk-Based Capital Requirements
Part II  Qualifying Capital
Section 11  Additional Deductions
Section 12  Deductions and Limitations Not Required
Section 13  Eligible Credit Reserves
Part III  Qualification
Section 21  Qualification Process
Section 22  Qualification Requirements
Section 23  Ongoing Qualification
Section 24  Merger and Acquisition Transitional Arrangements
Part IV  Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk
Section 31  Mechanics for Calculating Total Wholesale and Retail Risk-
Weighted Assets
Section 32  Counterparty Credit Risk of Repo-Style Transactions, 
Eligible Margin Loans, and OTC Derivative Contracts
Section 33  Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: PD Substitution and LGD 
Adjustment Approaches
Section 34  Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: Double Default Treatment
Section 35  Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Unsettled Transactions
Part V  Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures
Section 41  Operational Criteria for Recognizing the Transfer of Risk
Section 42  Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Securitization Exposures
Section 43  Ratings-Based Approach (RBA)
Section 44  Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)
Section 45  Supervisory Formula Approach (SFA)
Section 46  Recognition of Credit Risk Mitigants for Securitization 
Exposures
Section 47  Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Early Amortization 
Provisions
Part VI  Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures
Section 51  Introduction and Exposure Measurement
Section 52  Simple Risk Weight Approach (SRWA)
Section 53  Internal Models Approach (IMA)

[[Page 1288]]

Section 54  Equity Exposures to Investment Funds
Section 55  Equity Derivative Contracts
Part VII  Risk-Weighted Assets for Operational Risk
Section 61  Qualification Requirements for Incorporation of Operational 
Risk Mitigants
Section 62  Mechanics of Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation
Part VIII  Disclosure
Section 71  Disclosure Requirements
Part IX  Transition Provisions
Section 81  Optional Transition Provisions Related to the Implementation 
of Consolidation Requirements Under FAS 167

                       Part I. General Provisions

    Section 1. Purpose, Applicability, Reservation of Authority, and 
                        Principle of Conservatism

    (a) Purpose. This appendix establishes:
    (1) Minimum qualifying criteria for State savings associations using 
State savings association-specific internal risk measurement and 
management processes for calculating risk-based capital requirements;
    (2) Methodologies for such State savings associations to calculate 
their risk-based capital requirements; and
    (3) Public disclosure requirements for such State savings 
associations.
    (b) Applicability. (1) This appendix applies to a State savings 
association that:
    (i) Has consolidated assets, as reported on the most recent year-end 
Thrift Financial Report (TFR) or Consolidated Reports of Condition or 
Income (``Call Report''), as applicable, equal to $250 billion or more;
    (ii) Has consolidated total on-balance sheet foreign exposure at the 
most recent year-end equal to $10 billion or more (where total on-
balance sheet foreign exposure equals total cross-border claims less 
claims with head office or guarantor located in another country plus 
redistributed guaranteed amounts to the country of head office or 
guarantor plus local country claims on local residents plus revaluation 
gains on foreign exchange and derivative products, calculated in 
accordance with the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 
(FFIEC) 009 Country Exposure Report);
    (iii) Is a subsidiary of a depository institution that uses 12 CFR 
part 3, appendix C, 12 CFR part 208, appendix F, 12 CFR part 325, 
appendix D, or 12 CFR subpart Z of part 390, appendix A, to calculate 
its risk-based capital requirements; or
    (iv) Is a subsidiary of a bank holding company that uses 12 CFR part 
225, appendix G, to calculate its risk-based capital requirements.
    (2) Any State savings association may elect to use this appendix to 
calculate its risk-based capital requirements.
    (3) A State savings association that is subject to this appendix 
must use this appendix unless the FDIC determines in writing that 
application of this appendix is not appropriate in light of the State 
savings association's asset size, level of complexity, risk profile, or 
scope of operations. In making a determination under this paragraph, the 
FDIC will apply notice and response procedures in the same manner and to 
the same extent as the notice and response procedures in 
Sec. 390.463(d).
    (c) Reservation of authority--(1) Additional capital in the 
aggregate. The FDIC may require a State savings association to hold an 
amount of capital greater than otherwise required under this appendix if 
the FDIC determines that the State savings association's risk-based 
capital requirement under this appendix is not commensurate with the 
State savings association's credit, market, operational, or other risks. 
In making a determination under this paragraph, the FDIC will apply 
notice and response procedures in the same manner and to the same extent 
as the notice and response procedures in Sec. 390.463(d).
    (2) Specific risk-weighted asset amounts. (i) If the FDIC determines 
that the risk-weighted asset amount calculated under this appendix by 
the State savings association for one or more exposures is not 
commensurate with the risks associated with those exposures, the FDIC 
may require the State savings association to assign a different risk-
weighted asset amount to the exposures, to assign different risk 
parameters to the exposures (if the exposures are wholesale or retail 
exposures), or to use different model assumptions for the exposures (if 
relevant), all as specified by the FDIC.
    (ii) If the FDIC determines that the risk-weighted asset amount for 
operational risk produced by the State savings association under this 
appendix is not commensurate with the operational risks of the State 
savings association, the FDIC may require the State savings association 
to assign a different risk-weighted asset amount for operational risk, 
to change elements of its operational risk analytical framework, 
including distributional and dependence assumptions, or to make other 
changes to the State savings association's operational risk management 
processes, data and assessment systems, or quantification systems, all 
as specified by the FDIC.
    (3) Regulatory capital treatment of unconsolidated entities. The 
FDIC may find that the capital treatment for an exposure to a 
transaction not subject to consolidation on the State savings 
association's balance sheet does not appropriately reflect the risks 
imposed on the State savings association. Accordingly, the FDIC may 
require the State savings association to treat the transaction

[[Page 1289]]

as if it were consolidated on the State savings association's balance 
sheet. The FDIC will look to the substance of and risk associated with 
the transaction as well as other relevant factors in determining whether 
to require such treatment and in calculating risk-based capital as the 
FDIC deems appropriate.
    (4) Other supervisory authority. Nothing in this appendix limits the 
authority of the FDIC under any other provision of law or regulation to 
take supervisory or enforcement action, including action to address 
unsafe or unsound practices or conditions, deficient capital levels, or 
violations of law.
    (d) Principle of conservatism. Notwithstanding the requirements of 
this appendix, a State savings association may choose not to apply a 
provision of this appendix to one or more exposures, provided that:
    (1) The State savings association can demonstrate on an ongoing 
basis to the satisfaction of the FDIC that not applying the provision 
would, in all circumstances, unambiguously generate a risk-based capital 
requirement for each such exposure greater than that which would 
otherwise be required under this appendix;
    (2) The State savings association appropriately manages the risk of 
each such exposure;
    (3) The State savings association notifies the FDIC in writing prior 
to applying this principle to each such exposure; and
    (4) The exposures to which the State savings association applies 
this principle are not, in the aggregate, material to the State savings 
association.

                         Section 2. Definitions

    Advanced internal ratings-based (IRB) systems means a State savings 
association's internal risk rating and segmentation system; risk 
parameter quantification system; data management and maintenance system; 
and control, oversight, and validation system for credit risk of 
wholesale and retail exposures.
    Advanced systems means a State savings association's advanced IRB 
systems, operational risk management processes, operational risk data 
and assessment systems, operational risk quantification systems, and, to 
the extent the State savings association uses the following systems, the 
internal models methodology, double default excessive correlation 
detection process, IMA for equity exposures, and IAA for securitization 
exposures to ABCP programs.
    Affiliate with respect to a company means any company that controls, 
is controlled by, or is under common control with, the company.
    Applicable external rating means:
    (1) With respect to an exposure that has multiple external ratings 
assigned by NRSROs, the lowest solicited external rating assigned to the 
exposure by any NRSRO; and
    (2) With respect to an exposure that has a single external rating 
assigned by an NRSRO, the external rating assigned to the exposure by 
the NRSRO.
    Applicable inferred rating means:
    (1) With respect to an exposure that has multiple inferred ratings, 
the lowest inferred rating based on a solicited external rating; and
    (2) With respect to an exposure that has a single inferred rating, 
the inferred rating.
    Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program means a program that 
primarily issues commercial paper that:
    (1) Has an external rating; and
    (2) Is backed by underlying exposures held in a bankruptcy-remote 
SPE.
    Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program sponsor means a State 
savings association that:
    (1) Establishes an ABCP program;
    (2) Approves the sellers permitted to participate in an ABCP 
program;
    (3) Approves the exposures to be purchased by an ABCP program; or
    (4) Administers the ABCP program by monitoring the underlying 
exposures, underwriting or otherwise arranging for the placement of debt 
or other obligations issued by the program, compiling monthly reports, 
or ensuring compliance with the program documents and with the program's 
credit and investment policy.
    Backtesting means the comparison of a State savings association's 
internal estimates with actual outcomes during a sample period not used 
in model development. In this context, backtesting is one form of out-
of-sample testing.
    Bank holding company is defined in section 2 of the Bank Holding 
Company Act (12 U.S.C. 1841).
    Benchmarking means the comparison of a State savings association's 
internal estimates with relevant internal and external data or with 
estimates based on other estimation techniques.
    Business environment and internal control factors means the 
indicators of a State savings association's operational risk profile 
that reflect a current and forward-looking assessment of the State 
savings association's underlying business risk factors and internal 
control environment.
    Carrying value means, with respect to an asset, the value of the 
asset on the balance sheet of the State savings association, determined 
in accordance with GAAP.
    Clean-up call means a contractual provision that permits an 
originating State savings association or servicer to call securitization 
exposures before their stated maturity or call date. See also eligible 
clean-up call.
    Commodity derivative contract means a commodity-linked swap, 
purchased commodity-linked option, forward commodity-linked

[[Page 1290]]

contract, or any other instrument linked to commodities that gives rise 
to similar counterparty credit risks.
    Company means a corporation, partnership, limited liability company, 
depository institution, business trust, special purpose entity, 
association, or similar organization.
    Control. A person or company controls a company if it:
    (1) Owns, controls, or holds with power to vote 25 percent or more 
of a class of voting securities of the company; or
    (2) Consolidates the company for financial reporting purposes.
    Controlled early amortization provision means an early amortization 
provision that meets all the following conditions:
    (1) The originating State savings association has appropriate 
policies and procedures to ensure that it has sufficient capital and 
liquidity available in the event of an early amortization;
    (2) Throughout the duration of the securitization (including the 
early amortization period), there is the same pro rata sharing of 
interest, principal, expenses, losses, fees, recoveries, and other cash 
flows from the underlying exposures based on the originating State 
savings association's and the investors' relative shares of the 
underlying exposures outstanding measured on a consistent monthly basis;
    (3) The amortization period is sufficient for at least 90 percent of 
the total underlying exposures outstanding at the beginning of the early 
amortization period to be repaid or recognized as in default; and
    (4) The schedule for repayment of investor principal is not more 
rapid than would be allowed by straight-line amortization over an 18-
month period.
    Credit derivative means a financial contract executed under standard 
industry credit derivative documentation that allows one party (the 
protection purchaser) to transfer the credit risk of one or more 
exposures (reference exposure) to another party (the protection 
provider). See also eligible credit derivative.
    Credit-enhancing interest-only strip (CEIO) means an on-balance 
sheet asset that, in form or in substance:
    (1) Represents a contractual right to receive some or all of the 
interest and no more than a minimal amount of principal due on the 
underlying exposures of a securitization; and
    (2) Exposes the holder to credit risk directly or indirectly 
associated with the underlying exposures that exceeds a pro rata share 
of the holder's claim on the underlying exposures, whether through 
subordination provisions or other credit-enhancement techniques.
    Credit-enhancing representations and warranties means 
representations and warranties that are made or assumed in connection 
with a transfer of underlying exposures (including loan servicing 
assets) and that obligate a State savings association to protect another 
party from losses arising from the credit risk of the underlying 
exposures. Credit-enhancing representations and warranties include 
provisions to protect a party from losses resulting from the default or 
nonperformance of the obligors of the underlying exposures or from an 
insufficiency in the value of the collateral backing the underlying 
exposures. Credit-enhancing representations and warranties do not 
include:
    (1) Early default clauses and similar warranties that permit the 
return of, or premium refund clauses that cover, first-lien residential 
mortgage exposures for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date of 
transfer, provided that the date of transfer is within one year of 
origination of the residential mortgage exposure;
    (2) Premium refund clauses that cover underlying exposures 
guaranteed, in whole or in part, by the U.S. government, a U.S. 
government agency, or a U.S. government sponsored enterprise, provided 
that the clauses are for a period not to exceed 120 days from the date 
of transfer; or
    (3) Warranties that permit the return of underlying exposures in 
instances of misrepresentation, fraud, or incomplete documentation.
    Credit risk mitigant means collateral, a credit derivative, or a 
guarantee.
    Credit-risk-weighted assets means 1.06 multiplied by the sum of:
    (1) Total wholesale and retail risk-weighted assets;
    (2) Risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures; and
    (3) Risk-weighted assets for equity exposures.
    Current exposure means, with respect to a netting set, the larger of 
zero or the market value of a transaction or portfolio of transactions 
within the netting set that would be lost upon default of the 
counterparty, assuming no recovery on the value of the transactions. 
Current exposure is also called replacement cost.
    Default--(1) Retail. (i) A retail exposure of a State savings 
association is in default if:
    (A) The exposure is 180 days past due, in the case of a residential 
mortgage exposure or revolving exposure;
    (B) The exposure is 120 days past due, in the case of all other 
retail exposures; or
    (C) The State savings association has taken a full or partial 
charge-off, write-down of principal, or material negative fair value 
adjustment of principal on the exposure for credit-related reasons.
    (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (1)(i) of this definition, for a 
retail exposure held by a non-U.S. subsidiary of the State savings

[[Page 1291]]

association that is subject to an internal ratings-based approach to 
capital adequacy consistent with the Basel Committee on Banking 
Supervision's ``International Convergence of Capital Measurement and 
Capital Standards: A Revised Framework'' in a non-U.S. jurisdiction, the 
State savings association may elect to use the definition of default 
that is used in that jurisdiction, provided that the State savings 
association has obtained prior approval from the FDIC to use the 
definition of default in that jurisdiction.
    (iii) A retail exposure in default remains in default until the 
State savings association has reasonable assurance of repayment and 
performance for all contractual principal and interest payments on the 
exposure.
    (2) Wholesale. (i) A State savings association's wholesale obligor 
is in default if:
    (A) The State savings association determines that the obligor is 
unlikely to pay its credit obligations to the State savings association 
in full, without recourse by the State savings association to actions 
such as realizing collateral (if held); or
    (B) The obligor is past due more than 90 days on any material credit 
obligation(s) to the State savings association. \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Overdrafts are past due once the obligor has breached an advised 
limit or been advised of a limit smaller than the current outstanding 
balance.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) An obligor in default remains in default until the State 
savings association has reasonable assurance of repayment and 
performance for all contractual principal and interest payments on all 
exposures of the State savings association to the obligor (other than 
exposures that have been fully written-down or charged-off).
    Dependence means a measure of the association among operational 
losses across and within units of measure.
    Depository institution is defined in section 3 of the Federal 
Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813).
    Derivative contract means a financial contract whose value is 
derived from the values of one or more underlying assets, reference 
rates, or indices of asset values or reference rates. Derivative 
contracts include interest rate derivative contracts, exchange rate 
derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, commodity derivative 
contracts, credit derivatives, and any other instrument that poses 
similar counterparty credit risks. Derivative contracts also include 
unsettled securities, commodities, and foreign exchange transactions 
with a contractual settlement or delivery lag that is longer than the 
lesser of the market standard for the particular instrument or five 
business days.
    Early amortization provision means a provision in the documentation 
governing a securitization that, when triggered, causes investors in the 
securitization exposures to be repaid before the original stated 
maturity of the securitization exposures, unless the provision:
    (1) Is triggered solely by events not directly related to the 
performance of the underlying exposures or the originating State savings 
association (such as material changes in tax laws or regulations); or
    (2) Leaves investors fully exposed to future draws by obligors on 
the underlying exposures even after the provision is triggered.
    Economic downturn conditions means, with respect to an exposure held 
by the State savings association, those conditions in which the 
aggregate default rates for that exposure's wholesale or retail exposure 
subcategory (or subdivision of such subcategory selected by the State 
savings association) in the exposure's national jurisdiction (or 
subdivision of such jurisdiction selected by the State savings 
association) are significantly higher than average.
    Effective maturity (M) of a wholesale exposure means:
    (1) For wholesale exposures other than repo-style transactions, 
eligible margin loans, and OTC derivative contracts described in 
paragraph (2) or (3) of this definition:
    (i) The weighted-average remaining maturity (measured in years, 
whole or fractional) of the expected contractual cash flows from the 
exposure, using the undiscounted amounts of the cash flows as weights; 
or
    (ii) The nominal remaining maturity (measured in years, whole or 
fractional) of the exposure.
    (2) For repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and OTC 
derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master netting agreement 
for which the State savings association does not apply the internal 
models approach in paragraph (d) of section 32 of this appendix, the 
weighted-average remaining maturity (measured in years, whole or 
fractional) of the individual transactions subject to the qualifying 
master netting agreement, with the weight of each individual transaction 
set equal to the notional amount of the transaction.
    (3) For repo-style transactions, eligible margin loans, and OTC 
derivative contracts for which the State savings association applies the 
internal models approach in paragraph (d) of section 32 of this 
appendix, the value determined in paragraph (d)(4) of section 32 of this 
appendix.
    Effective notional amount means, for an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative, the lesser of the contractual notional 
amount of the credit risk mitigant and the EAD of the hedged exposure, 
multiplied by the percentage coverage of the credit risk mitigant. For 
example, the effective notional amount of an eligible guarantee that

[[Page 1292]]

covers, on a pro rata basis, 40 percent of any losses on a $100 bond 
would be $40.
    Eligible clean-up call means a clean-up call that:
    (1) Is exercisable solely at the discretion of the originating State 
savings association or servicer;
    (2) Is not structured to avoid allocating losses to securitization 
exposures held by investors or otherwise structured to provide credit 
enhancement to the securitization; and
    (3)(i) For a traditional securitization, is only exercisable when 10 
percent or less of the principal amount of the underlying exposures or 
securitization exposures (determined as of the inception of the 
securitization) is outstanding; or
    (ii) For a synthetic securitization, is only exercisable when 10 
percent or less of the principal amount of the reference portfolio of 
underlying exposures (determined as of the inception of the 
securitization) is outstanding.
    Eligible credit derivative means a credit derivative in the form of 
a credit default swap, nth-to-default swap, total return swap, or any 
other form of credit derivative approved by the FDIC, provided that:
    (1) The contract meets the requirements of an eligible guarantee and 
has been confirmed by the protection purchaser and the protection 
provider;
    (2) Any assignment of the contract has been confirmed by all 
relevant parties;
    (3) If the credit derivative is a credit default swap or nth-to-
default swap, the contract includes the following credit events:
    (i) Failure to pay any amount due under the terms of the reference 
exposure, subject to any applicable minimal payment threshold that is 
consistent with standard market practice and with a grace period that is 
closely in line with the grace period of the reference exposure; and
    (ii) Bankruptcy, insolvency, or inability of the obligor on the 
reference exposure to pay its debts, or its failure or admission in 
writing of its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due, 
and similar events;
    (4) The terms and conditions dictating the manner in which the 
contract is to be settled are incorporated into the contract;
    (5) If the contract allows for cash settlement, the contract 
incorporates a robust valuation process to estimate loss reliably and 
specifies a reasonable period for obtaining post-credit event valuations 
of the reference exposure;
    (6) If the contract requires the protection purchaser to transfer an 
exposure to the protection provider at settlement, the terms of at least 
one of the exposures that is permitted to be transferred under the 
contract provides that any required consent to transfer may not be 
unreasonably withheld;
    (7) If the credit derivative is a credit default swap or nth-to-
default swap, the contract clearly identifies the parties responsible 
for determining whether a credit event has occurred, specifies that this 
determination is not the sole responsibility of the protection provider, 
and gives the protection purchaser the right to notify the protection 
provider of the occurrence of a credit event; and
    (8) If the credit derivative is a total return swap and the State 
savings association records net payments received on the swap as net 
income, the State savings association records offsetting deterioration 
in the value of the hedged exposure (either through reductions in fair 
value or by an addition to reserves).
    Eligible credit reserves means all general allowances that have been 
established through a charge against earnings to absorb credit losses 
associated with on- or off-balance sheet wholesale and retail exposures, 
including the allowance for loan and lease losses (ALLL) associated with 
such exposures but excluding specific reserves created against 
recognized losses.
    Eligible double default guarantor, with respect to a guarantee or 
credit derivative obtained by a State savings association, means:
    (1) U.S.-based entities. A depository institution, a bank holding 
company, a savings and loan holding company (as defined in 12 U.S.C. 
1467a) provided all or substantially all of the holding company's 
activities are permissible for a financial holding company under 12 
U.S.C. 1843(k), a securities broker or dealer registered with the SEC 
under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o et seq.), or an 
insurance company in the business of providing credit protection (such 
as a monoline bond insurer or re-insurer) that is subject to supervision 
by a State insurance regulator, if:
    (i) At the time the guarantor issued the guarantee or credit 
derivative or at any time thereafter, the State savings association 
assigned a PD to the guarantor's rating grade that was equal to or lower 
than the PD associated with a long-term external rating in the third-
highest investment-grade rating category; and
    (ii) The State savings association currently assigns a PD to the 
guarantor's rating grade that is equal to or lower than the PD 
associated with a long-term external rating in the lowest investment-
grade rating category; or
    (2) Non-U.S.-based entities. A foreign bank (as defined in 
Sec. 211.2 of the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2)), 
a non-U.S.-based securities firm, or a non-U.S.-based insurance company 
in the business of providing credit protection, if:
    (i) The State savings association demonstrates that the guarantor is 
subject to

[[Page 1293]]

consolidated supervision and regulation comparable to that imposed on 
U.S. depository institutions, securities broker-dealers, or insurance 
companies (as the case may be), or has issued and outstanding an 
unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement that has a 
long-term applicable external rating of at least investment grade;
    (ii) At the time the guarantor issued the guarantee or credit 
derivative or at any time thereafter, the State savings association 
assigned a PD to the guarantor's rating grade that was equal to or lower 
than the PD associated with a long-term external rating in the third-
highest investment-grade rating category; and
    (iii) The State savings association currently assigns a PD to the 
guarantor's rating grade that is equal to or lower than the PD 
associated with a long-term external rating in the lowest investment-
grade rating category.
    Eligible guarantee means a guarantee that:
    (1) Is written and unconditional;
    (2) Covers all or a pro rata portion of all contractual payments of 
the obligor on the reference exposure;
    (3) Gives the beneficiary a direct claim against the protection 
provider;
    (4) Is not unilaterally cancelable by the protection provider for 
reasons other than the breach of the contract by the beneficiary;
    (5) Is legally enforceable against the protection provider in a 
jurisdiction where the protection provider has sufficient assets against 
which a judgment may be attached and enforced;
    (6) Requires the protection provider to make payment to the 
beneficiary on the occurrence of a default (as defined in the guarantee) 
of the obligor on the reference exposure in a timely manner without the 
beneficiary first having to take legal actions to pursue the obligor for 
payment;
    (7) Does not increase the beneficiary's cost of credit protection on 
the guarantee in response to deterioration in the credit quality of the 
reference exposure; and
    (8) Is not provided by an affiliate of the State savings 
association, unless the affiliate is an insured depository institution, 
bank, securities broker or dealer, or insurance company that:
    (i) Does not control the State savings association; and
    (ii) Is subject to consolidated supervision and regulation 
comparable to that imposed on U.S. depository institutions, securities 
broker-dealers, or insurance companies (as the case may be).
    Eligible margin loan means an extension of credit where:
    (1) The extension of credit is collateralized exclusively by liquid 
and readily marketable debt or equity securities, gold, or conforming 
residential mortgages;
    (2) The collateral is marked to market daily, and the transaction is 
subject to daily margin maintenance requirements;
    (3) The extension of credit is conducted under an agreement that 
provides the State savings association the right to accelerate and 
terminate the extension of credit and to liquidate or set off collateral 
promptly upon an event of default (including upon an event of 
bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding) of the counterparty, 
provided that, in any such case, any exercise of rights under the 
agreement will not be stayed or avoided under applicable law in the 
relevant jurisdictions; \2\ and
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ This requirement is met where all transactions under the 
agreement are (i) executed under U.S. law and (ii) constitute 
``securities contracts'' under section 555 of the Bankruptcy Code (11 
U.S.C. 555), qualified financial contracts under section 11(e)(8) of the 
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1821(e)(8)), or netting 
contracts between or among financial institutions under sections 401-407 
of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 
U.S.C. 4401-4407) or the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR 
part 231).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) The State savings association has conducted sufficient legal 
review to conclude with a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient 
written documentation of that legal review) that the agreement meets the 
requirements of paragraph (3) of this definition and is legal, valid, 
binding, and enforceable under applicable law in the relevant 
jurisdictions.
    Eligible operational risk offsets means amounts, not to exceed 
expected operational loss, that:
    (1) Are generated by internal business practices to absorb highly 
predictable and reasonably stable operational losses, including reserves 
calculated consistent with GAAP; and
    (2) Are available to cover expected operational losses with a high 
degree of certainty over a one-year horizon.
    Eligible purchased wholesale exposure means a purchased wholesale 
exposure that:
    (1) The State savings association or securitization SPE purchased 
from an unaffiliated seller and did not directly or indirectly 
originate;
    (2) Was generated on an arm's-length basis between the seller and 
the obligor (intercompany accounts receivable and receivables subject to 
contra-accounts between firms that buy and sell to each other do not 
satisfy this criterion);
    (3) Provides the State savings association or securitization SPE 
with a claim on all proceeds from the exposure or a pro rata interest in 
the proceeds from the exposure;
    (4) Has an M of less than one year; and

[[Page 1294]]

    (5) When consolidated by obligor, does not represent a concentrated 
exposure relative to the portfolio of purchased wholesale exposures.
    Eligible securitization guarantor means:
    (1) A sovereign entity, the Bank for International Settlements, the 
International Monetary Fund, the European Central Bank, the European 
Commission, a Federal Home Loan Bank, Federal Agricultural Mortgage 
Corporation (Farmer Mac), a multilateral development bank, a depository 
institution, a bank holding company, a savings and loan holding company 
(as defined in 12 U.S.C. 1467a) provided all or substantially all of the 
holding company's activities are permissible for a financial holding 
company under 12 U.S.C. 1843(k), a foreign bank (as defined in 
Sec. 211.2 of the Federal Reserve Board's Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2)), 
or a securities firm;
    (2) Any other entity (other than a securitization SPE) that has 
issued and outstanding an unsecured long-term debt security without 
credit enhancement that has a long-term applicable external rating in 
one of the three highest investment-grade rating categories; or
    (3) Any other entity (other than a securitization SPE) that has a PD 
assigned by the State savings association that is lower than or equal to 
the PD associated with a long-term external rating in the third highest 
investment-grade rating category.
    Eligible servicer cash advance facility means a servicer cash 
advance facility in which:
    (1) The servicer is entitled to full reimbursement of advances, 
except that a servicer may be obligated to make non-reimbursable 
advances for a particular underlying exposure if any such advance is 
contractually limited to an insignificant amount of the outstanding 
principal balance of that exposure;
    (2) The servicer's right to reimbursement is senior in right of 
payment to all other claims on the cash flows from the underlying 
exposures of the securitization; and
    (3) The servicer has no legal obligation to, and does not, make 
advances to the securitization if the servicer concludes the advances 
are unlikely to be repaid.
    Equity derivative contract means an equity-linked swap, purchased 
equity-linked option, forward equity-linked contract, or any other 
instrument linked to equities that gives rise to similar counterparty 
credit risks.
    Equity exposure means:
    (1) A security or instrument (whether voting or non-voting) that 
represents a direct or indirect ownership interest in, and is a residual 
claim on, the assets and income of a company, unless:
    (i) The issuing company is consolidated with the State savings 
association under GAAP;
    (ii) The State savings association is required to deduct the 
ownership interest from tier 1 or tier 2 capital under this appendix;
    (iii) The ownership interest incorporates a payment or other similar 
obligation on the part of the issuing company (such as an obligation to 
make periodic payments); or
    (iv) The ownership interest is a securitization exposure;
    (2) A security or instrument that is mandatorily convertible into a 
security or instrument described in paragraph (1) of this definition;
    (3) An option or warrant that is exercisable for a security or 
instrument described in paragraph (1) of this definition; or
    (4) Any other security or instrument (other than a securitization 
exposure) to the extent the return on the security or instrument is 
based on the performance of a security or instrument described in 
paragraph (1) of this definition.
    Excess spread for a period means:
    (1) Gross finance charge collections and other income received by a 
securitization SPE (including market interchange fees) over a period 
minus interest paid to the holders of the securitization exposures, 
servicing fees, charge-offs, and other senior trust or similar expenses 
of the SPE over the period; divided by
    (2) The principal balance of the underlying exposures at the end of 
the period.
    Exchange rate derivative contract means a cross-currency interest 
rate swap, forward foreign-exchange contract, currency option purchased, 
or any other instrument linked to exchange rates that gives rise to 
similar counterparty credit risks.
    Excluded mortgage exposure means any one- to four-family residential 
pre-sold construction loan for a residence for which the purchase 
contract is cancelled that would receive a 100 percent risk weight under 
section 618(a)(2) of the Resolution Trust Corporation Refinancing, 
Restructuring, and Improvement Act and under 12 CFR 390.461 (definition 
of ``qualifying residential construction loan'') and 12 CFR 
390.466(a)(1)(iv).
    Expected credit loss (ECL) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor or segment 
of non-defaulted retail exposures that is carried at fair value with 
gains and losses flowing through earnings or that is classified as held-
for-sale and is carried at the lower of cost or fair value with losses 
flowing through earnings, zero.
    (2) For all other wholesale exposures to non-defaulted obligors or 
segments of non-defaulted retail exposures, the product of PD times LGD 
times EAD for the exposure or segment.
    (3) For a wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor or segment of 
defaulted retail exposures, the State savings association's impairment 
estimate for allowance purposes for the exposure or segment.

[[Page 1295]]

    (4) Total ECL is the sum of expected credit losses for all wholesale 
and retail exposures other than exposures for which the State savings 
association has applied the double default treatment in section 34 of 
this appendix.
    Expected exposure (EE) means the expected value of the probability 
distribution of non-negative credit risk exposures to a counterparty at 
any specified future date before the maturity date of the longest term 
transaction in the netting set. Any negative market values in the 
probability distribution of market values to a counterparty at a 
specified future date are set to zero to convert the probability 
distribution of market values to the probability distribution of credit 
risk exposures.
    Expected operational loss (EOL) means the expected value of the 
distribution of potential aggregate operational losses, as generated by 
the State savings association's operational risk quantification system 
using a one-year horizon.
    Expected positive exposure (EPE) means the weighted average over 
time of expected (non-negative) exposures to a counterparty where the 
weights are the proportion of the time interval that an individual 
expected exposure represents. When calculating risk-based capital 
requirements, the average is taken over a one-year horizon.
    Exposure at default (EAD). (1) For the on-balance sheet component of 
a wholesale exposure or segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC 
derivative contract, or a repo-style transaction, or eligible margin 
loan for which the State savings association determines EAD under 
section 32 of this appendix), EAD means:
    (i) If the exposure or segment is a security classified as 
available-for-sale, the State savings associations carrying value 
(including net accrued but unpaid interest and fees) for the exposure or 
segment less any unrealized gains on the exposure or segment and plus 
any unrealized losses on the exposure or segment; or
    (ii) If the exposure or segment is not a security classified as 
available-for-sale, the State savings association's carrying value 
(including net accrued but unpaid interest and fees) for the exposure or 
segment.
    (2) For the off-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, or a 
repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan for which the State 
savings association determines EAD under section 32 of this appendix) in 
the form of a loan commitment, line of credit, trade-related letter of 
credit, or transaction-related contingency, EAD means the State savings 
association's best estimate of net additions to the outstanding amount 
owed the State savings association, including estimated future 
additional draws of principal and accrued but unpaid interest and fees, 
that are likely to occur over a one-year horizon assuming the wholesale 
exposure or the retail exposures in the segment were to go into default. 
This estimate of net additions must reflect what would be expected 
during economic downturn conditions. Trade-related letters of credit are 
short-term, self-liquidating instruments that are used to finance the 
movement of goods and are collateralized by the underlying goods. 
Transaction-related contingencies relate to a particular transaction and 
include, among other things, performance bonds and performance-based 
letters of credit.
    (3) For the off-balance sheet component of a wholesale exposure or 
segment of retail exposures (other than an OTC derivative contract, or a 
repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan for which the State 
savings association determines EAD under section 32 of this appendix) in 
the form of anything other than a loan commitment, line of credit, 
trade-related letter of credit, or transaction-related contingency, EAD 
means the notional amount of the exposure or segment.
    (4) EAD for OTC derivative contracts is calculated as described in 
section 32 of this appendix. A State savings association also may 
determine EAD for repo-style transactions and eligible margin loans as 
described in section 32 of this appendix.
    (5) For wholesale or retail exposures in which only the drawn 
balance has been securitized, the State savings association must reflect 
its share of the exposures' undrawn balances in EAD. Undrawn balances of 
revolving exposures for which the drawn balances have been securitized 
must be allocated between the seller's and investors' interests on a pro 
rata basis, based on the proportions of the seller's and investors' 
shares of the securitized drawn balances.
    Exposure category means any of the wholesale, retail, 
securitization, or equity exposure categories.
    External operational loss event data means, with respect to a State 
savings association, gross operational loss amounts, dates, recoveries, 
and relevant causal information for operational loss events occurring at 
organizations other than the State savings association.
    External rating means a credit rating that is assigned by an NRSRO 
to an exposure, provided:
    (1) The credit rating fully reflects the entire amount of credit 
risk with regard to all payments owed to the holder of the exposure. If 
a holder is owed principal and interest on an exposure, the credit 
rating must fully reflect the credit risk associated with timely 
repayment of principal and interest. If a holder is owed only principal 
on an exposure, the credit rating must fully reflect only the credit 
risk associated with timely repayment of principal; and

[[Page 1296]]

    (2) The credit rating is published in an accessible form and is or 
will be included in the transition matrices made publicly available by 
the NRSRO that summarize the historical performance of positions rated 
by the NRSRO.
    Financial collateral means collateral:
    (1) In the form of:
    (i) Cash on deposit with the State savings association (including 
cash held for the State savings association by a third-party custodian 
or trustee);
    (ii) Gold bullion;
    (iii) Long-term debt securities that have an applicable external 
rating of one category below investment grade or higher;
    (iv) Short-term debt instruments that have an applicable external 
rating of at least investment grade;
    (v) Equity securities that are publicly traded;
    (vi) Convertible bonds that are publicly traded;
    (vii) Money market mutual fund shares and other mutual fund shares 
if a price for the shares is publicly quoted daily; or
    (viii) Conforming residential mortgages; and
    (2) In which the State savings association has a perfected, first 
priority security interest or, outside of the United States, the legal 
equivalent thereof (with the exception of cash on deposit and 
notwithstanding the prior security interest of any custodial agent).
    GAAP means generally accepted accounting principles as used in the 
United States.
    Gain-on-sale means an increase in the equity capital (as reported on 
Schedule SC of the Thrift Financial Report or in the Consolidated 
Reports of Condition or Income (``Call Report''), as applicable, of a 
State savings association that results from a securitization (other than 
an increase in equity capital that results from the State savings 
association's receipt of cash in connection with the securitization).
    Guarantee means a financial guarantee, letter of credit, insurance, 
or other similar financial instrument (other than a credit derivative) 
that allows one party (beneficiary) to transfer the credit risk of one 
or more specific exposures (reference exposure) to another party 
(protection provider). See also eligible guarantee.
    High volatility commercial real estate (HVCRE) exposure means a 
credit facility that finances or has financed the acquisition, 
development, or construction (ADC) of real property, unless the facility 
finances:
    (1) One- to four-family residential properties; or
    (2) Commercial real estate projects in which:
    (i) The loan-to-value ratio is less than or equal to the applicable 
maximum supervisory loan-to-value ratio in the FDIC's real estate 
lending standards at 12 CFR 390.264-390.265;
    (ii) The borrower has contributed capital to the project in the form 
of cash or unencumbered readily marketable assets (or has paid 
development expenses out-of-pocket) of at least 15 percent of the real 
estate's appraised ``as completed'' value; and
    (iii) The borrower contributed the amount of capital required by 
paragraph (2)(ii) of this definition before the State savings 
association advances funds under the credit facility, and the capital 
contributed by the borrower, or internally generated by the project, is 
contractually required to remain in the project throughout the life of 
the project. The life of a project concludes only when the credit 
facility is converted to permanent financing or is sold or paid in full. 
Permanent financing may be provided by the State savings association 
that provided the ADC facility as long as the permanent financing is 
subject to the State savings association's underwriting criteria for 
long-term mortgage loans.
    Inferred rating. A securitization exposure has an inferred rating 
equal to the external rating referenced in paragraph (2)(i) of this 
definition if:
    (1) The securitization exposure does not have an external rating; 
and
    (2) Another securitization exposure issued by the same issuer and 
secured by the same underlying exposures:
    (i) Has an external rating;
    (ii) Is subordinated in all respects to the unrated securitization 
exposure;
    (iii) Does not benefit from any credit enhancement that is not 
available to the unrated securitization exposure; and
    (iv) Has an effective remaining maturity that is equal to or longer 
than that of the unrated securitization exposure.
    Interest rate derivative contract means a single-currency interest 
rate swap, basis swap, forward rate agreement, purchased interest rate 
option, when-issued securities, or any other instrument linked to 
interest rates that gives rise to similar counterparty credit risks.
    Internal operational loss event data means, with respect to a State 
savings association, gross operational loss amounts, dates, recoveries, 
and relevant causal information for operational loss events occurring at 
the State savings association.
    Investing State savings association means, with respect to a 
securitization, a State savings association that assumes the credit risk 
of a securitization exposure (other than an originating State savings 
association of the securitization). In the typical synthetic 
securitization, the investing State savings association sells credit 
protection on a pool of underlying exposures to the originating State 
savings association.
    Investment fund means a company:

[[Page 1297]]

    (1) All or substantially all of the assets of which are financial 
assets; and
    (2) That has no material liabilities.
    Investors' interest EAD means, with respect to a securitization, the 
EAD of the underlying exposures multiplied by the ratio of:
    (1) The total amount of securitization exposures issued by the 
securitization SPE to investors; divided by
    (2) The outstanding principal amount of underlying exposures.
    Loss given default (LGD) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure, the greatest of:
    (i) Zero;
    (ii) The State savings association's empirically based best estimate 
of the long-run default-weighted average economic loss, per dollar of 
EAD, the State savings association would expect to incur if the obligor 
(or a typical obligor in the loss severity grade assigned by the State 
savings association to the exposure) were to default within a one-year 
horizon over a mix of economic conditions, including economic downturn 
conditions; or
    (iii) The State savings association's empirically based best 
estimate of the economic loss, per dollar of EAD, the State savings 
association would expect to incur if the obligor (or a typical obligor 
in the loss severity grade assigned by the State savings association to 
the exposure) were to default within a one-year horizon during economic 
downturn conditions.
    (2) For a segment of retail exposures, the greatest of:
    (i) Zero;
    (ii) The State savings association's empirically based best estimate 
of the long-run default-weighted average economic loss, per dollar of 
EAD, the State savings association would expect to incur if the 
exposures in the segment were to default within a one-year horizon over 
a mix of economic conditions, including economic downturn conditions; or
    (iii) The State savings association's empirically based best 
estimate of the economic loss, per dollar of EAD, the State savings 
association would expect to incur if the exposures in the segment were 
to default within a one-year horizon during economic downturn 
conditions.
    (3) The economic loss on an exposure in the event of default is all 
material credit-related losses on the exposure (including accrued but 
unpaid interest or fees, losses on the sale of collateral, direct 
workout costs, and an appropriate allocation of indirect workout costs). 
Where positive or negative cash flows on a wholesale exposure to a 
defaulted obligor or a defaulted retail exposure (including proceeds 
from the sale of collateral, workout costs, additional extensions of 
credit to facilitate repayment of the exposure, and draw-downs of unused 
credit lines) occur after the date of default, the economic loss must 
reflect the net present value of cash flows as of the default date using 
a discount rate appropriate to the risk of the defaulted exposure.
    Main index means the Standard & Poor's 500 Index, the FTSE All-World 
Index, and any other index for which the State savings association can 
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that the equities 
represented in the index have comparable liquidity, depth of market, and 
size of bid-ask spreads as equities in the Standard & Poor's 500 Index 
and FTSE All-World Index.
    Multilateral development bank means the International Bank for 
Reconstruction and Development, the International Finance Corporation, 
the Inter-American Development Bank, the Asian Development Bank, the 
African Development Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and 
Development, the European Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, 
the Nordic Investment Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic 
Development Bank, the Council of Europe Development Bank, and any other 
multilateral lending institution or regional development bank in which 
the U.S. government is a shareholder or contributing member or which the 
FDIC determines poses comparable credit risk.
    Nationally recognized statistical rating organization (NRSRO) means 
an entity registered with the SEC as a nationally recognized statistical 
rating organization under section 15E of the Securities Exchange Act of 
1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o-7).
    Netting set means a group of transactions with a single counterparty 
that are subject to a qualifying master netting agreement or qualifying 
cross-product master netting agreement. For purposes of the internal 
models methodology in paragraph (d) of section 32 of this appendix, each 
transaction that is not subject to such a master netting agreement is 
its own netting set.
    Nth-to-default credit derivative means a credit derivative that 
provides credit protection only for the nth-defaulting reference 
exposure in a group of reference exposures.
    Obligor means the legal entity or natural person contractually 
obligated on a wholesale exposure, except that a State savings 
association may treat the following exposures as having separate 
obligors:
    (1) Exposures to the same legal entity or natural person denominated 
in different currencies;
    (2)(i) An income-producing real estate exposure for which all or 
substantially all of the repayment of the exposure is reliant on the 
cash flows of the real estate serving as collateral for the exposure; 
the State savings association, in economic substance, does not have 
recourse to the borrower beyond the real estate collateral; and no 
cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place other

[[Page 1298]]

than clauses obtained solely out of an abundance of caution; and
    (ii) Other credit exposures to the same legal entity or natural 
person; and
    (3) (i) A wholesale exposure authorized under section 364 of the 
U.S. Bankruptcy Code (11 U.S.C. 364) to a legal entity or natural person 
who is a debtor-in-possession for purposes of Chapter 11 of the 
Bankruptcy Code; and
    (ii) Other credit exposures to the same legal entity or natural 
person.
    Operational loss means a loss (excluding insurance or tax effects) 
resulting from an operational loss event. Operational loss includes all 
expenses associated with an operational loss event except for 
opportunity costs, forgone revenue, and costs related to risk management 
and control enhancements implemented to prevent future operational 
losses.
    Operational loss event means an event that results in loss and is 
associated with any of the following seven operational loss event type 
categories:
    (1) Internal fraud, which means the operational loss event type 
category that comprises operational losses resulting from an act 
involving at least one internal party of a type intended to defraud, 
misappropriate property, or circumvent regulations, the law, or company 
policy, excluding diversity- and discrimination-type events.
    (2) External fraud, which means the operational loss event type 
category that comprises operational losses resulting from an act by a 
third party of a type intended to defraud, misappropriate property, or 
circumvent the law. Retail credit card losses arising from non-
contractual, third-party initiated fraud (for example, identity theft) 
are external fraud operational losses. All other third-party initiated 
credit losses are to be treated as credit risk losses.
    (3) Employment practices and workplace safety, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from an act inconsistent with employment, health, or safety 
laws or agreements, payment of personal injury claims, or payment 
arising from diversity- and discrimination-type events.
    (4) Clients, products, and business practices, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from the nature or design of a product or from an 
unintentional or negligent failure to meet a professional obligation to 
specific clients (including fiduciary and suitability requirements).
    (5) Damage to physical assets, which means the operational loss 
event type category that comprises operational losses resulting from the 
loss of or damage to physical assets from natural disaster or other 
events.
    (6) Business disruption and system failures, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from disruption of business or system failures.
    (7) Execution, delivery, and process management, which means the 
operational loss event type category that comprises operational losses 
resulting from failed transaction processing or process management or 
losses arising from relations with trade counterparties and vendors.
    Operational risk means the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or 
failed internal processes, people, and systems or from external events 
(including legal risk but excluding strategic and reputational risk).
    Operational risk exposure means the 99.9th percentile of the 
distribution of potential aggregate operational losses, as generated by 
the State savings association's operational risk quantification system 
over a one-year horizon (and not incorporating eligible operational risk 
offsets or qualifying operational risk mitigants).
    Originating State savings association, with respect to a 
securitization, means a State savings association that:
    (1) Directly or indirectly originated or securitized the underlying 
exposures included in the securitization; or
    (2) Serves as an ABCP program sponsor to the securitization.
    Other retail exposure means an exposure (other than a securitization 
exposure, an equity exposure, a residential mortgage exposure, an 
excluded mortgage exposure, a qualifying revolving exposure, or the 
residual value portion of a lease exposure) that is managed as part of a 
segment of exposures with homogeneous risk characteristics, not on an 
individual-exposure basis, and is either:
    (1) An exposure to an individual for non-business purposes; or
    (2) An exposure to an individual or company for business purposes if 
the State savings association's consolidated business credit exposure to 
the individual or company is $1 million or less.
    Over-the-counter (OTC) derivative contract means a derivative 
contract that is not traded on an exchange that requires the daily 
receipt and payment of cash-variation margin.
    Probability of default (PD) means:
    (1) For a wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor, the State 
savings association's empirically based best estimate of the long-run 
average one-year default rate for the rating grade assigned by the State 
savings association to the obligor, capturing the average default 
experience for obligors in the rating grade over a mix of economic 
conditions (including economic downturn conditions) sufficient to 
provide a reasonable estimate of the average one-year default rate over 
the economic cycle for the rating grade.

[[Page 1299]]

    (2) For a segment of non-defaulted retail exposures, the State 
savings association's empirically based best estimate of the long-run 
average one-year default rate for the exposures in the segment, 
capturing the average default experience for exposures in the segment 
over a mix of economic conditions (including economic downturn 
conditions) sufficient to provide a reasonable estimate of the average 
one-year default rate over the economic cycle for the segment and 
adjusted upward as appropriate for segments for which seasoning effects 
are material. For purposes of this definition, a segment for which 
seasoning effects are material is a segment where there is a material 
relationship between the time since origination of exposures within the 
segment and the State savings association's best estimate of the long-
run average one-year default rate for the exposures in the segment.
    (3) For a wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor or segment of 
defaulted retail exposures, 100 percent.
    Protection amount (P) means, with respect to an exposure hedged by 
an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative, the effective 
notional amount of the guarantee or credit derivative, reduced to 
reflect any currency mismatch, maturity mismatch, or lack of 
restructuring coverage (as provided in section 33 of this appendix).
    Publicly traded means traded on:
    (1) Any exchange registered with the SEC as a national securities 
exchange under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 
U.S.C. 78f); or
    (2) Any non-U.S.-based securities exchange that:
    (i) Is registered with, or approved by, a national securities 
regulatory authority; and
    (ii) Provides a liquid, two-way market for the instrument in 
question, meaning that there are enough independent bona fide offers to 
buy and sell so that a sales price reasonably related to the last sales 
price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations can be 
determined promptly and a trade can be settled at such a price within 
five business days.
    Qualifying central counterparty means a counterparty (for example, a 
clearinghouse) that:
    (1) Facilitates trades between counterparties in one or more 
financial markets by either guaranteeing trades or novating contracts;
    (2) Requires all participants in its arrangements to be fully 
collateralized on a daily basis; and
    (3) The State savings association demonstrates to the satisfaction 
of the FDIC is in sound financial condition and is subject to effective 
oversight by a national supervisory authority.
    Qualifying cross-product master netting agreement means a qualifying 
master netting agreement that provides for termination and close-out 
netting across multiple types of financial transactions or qualifying 
master netting agreements in the event of a counterparty's default, 
provided that:
    (1) The underlying financial transactions are OTC derivative 
contracts, eligible margin loans, or repo-style transactions; and
    (2) The State savings association obtains a written legal opinion 
verifying the validity and enforceability of the agreement under 
applicable law of the relevant jurisdictions if the counterparty fails 
to perform upon an event of default, including upon an event of 
bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding.
    Qualifying master netting agreement means any written, legally 
enforceable bilateral agreement, provided that:
    (1) The agreement creates a single legal obligation for all 
individual transactions covered by the agreement upon an event of 
default, including bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding, of the 
counterparty;
    (2) The agreement provides the State savings association the right 
to accelerate, terminate, and close-out on a net basis all transactions 
under the agreement and to liquidate or set off collateral promptly upon 
an event of default, including upon an event of bankruptcy, insolvency, 
or similar proceeding, of the counterparty, provided that, in any such 
case, any exercise of rights under the agreement will not be stayed or 
avoided under applicable law in the relevant jurisdictions;
    (3) The State savings association has conducted sufficient legal 
review to conclude with a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient 
written documentation of that legal review) that:
    (i) The agreement meets the requirements of paragraph (2) of this 
definition; and
    (ii) In the event of a legal challenge (including one resulting from 
default or from bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding) the 
relevant court and administrative authorities would find the agreement 
to be legal, valid, binding, and enforceable under the law of the 
relevant jurisdictions;
    (4) The State savings association establishes and maintains 
procedures to monitor possible changes in relevant law and to ensure 
that the agreement continues to satisfy the requirements of this 
definition; and
    (5) The agreement does not contain a walkaway clause (that is, a 
provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make a lower 
payment than it would make otherwise under the agreement, or no payment 
at all, to a defaulter or the estate of a defaulter, even if the 
defaulter or the estate of the defaulter is a net creditor under the 
agreement).
    Qualifying revolving exposure (QRE) means an exposure (other than a 
securitization exposure or equity exposure) to an individual

[[Page 1300]]

that is managed as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, not on an individual-exposure basis, and:
    (1) Is revolving (that is, the amount outstanding fluctuates, 
determined largely by the borrower's decision to borrow and repay, up to 
a pre-established maximum amount);
    (2) Is unsecured and unconditionally cancelable by the State savings 
association to the fullest extent permitted by Federal law; and
    (3) Has a maximum exposure amount (drawn plus undrawn) of up to 
$100,000.
    Repo-style transaction means a repurchase or reverse repurchase 
transaction, or a securities borrowing or securities lending 
transaction, including a transaction in which the State savings 
association acts as agent for a customer and indemnifies the customer 
against loss, provided that:
    (1) The transaction is based solely on liquid and readily marketable 
securities, cash, gold, or conforming residential mortgages;
    (2) The transaction is marked-to-market daily and subject to daily 
margin maintenance requirements;
    (3)(i) The transaction is a ``securities contract'' or ``repurchase 
agreement'' under section 555 or 559, respectively, of the Bankruptcy 
Code (11 U.S.C. 555 or 559), a qualified financial contract under 
section 11(e)(8) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 
1821(e)(8)), or a netting contract between or among financial 
institutions under sections 401-407 of the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (12 U.S.C. 4401-4407) or the Federal 
Reserve Board's Regulation EE (12 CFR part 231); or
    (ii) If the transaction does not meet the criteria set forth in 
paragraph (3)(i) of this definition, then either:
    (A) The transaction is executed under an agreement that provides the 
State savings association the right to accelerate, terminate, and close-
out the transaction on a net basis and to liquidate or set off 
collateral promptly upon an event of default (including upon an event of 
bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding) of the counterparty, 
provided that, in any such case, any exercise of rights under the 
agreement will not be stayed or avoided under applicable law in the 
relevant jurisdictions; or
    (B) The transaction is:
    (1) Either overnight or unconditionally cancelable at any time by 
the State savings association; and
    (2) Executed under an agreement that provides the State savings 
association the right to accelerate, terminate, and close-out the 
transaction on a net basis and to liquidate or set off collateral 
promptly upon an event of counterparty default; and
    (4) The State savings association has conducted sufficient legal 
review to conclude with a well-founded basis (and maintains sufficient 
written documentation of that legal review) that the agreement meets the 
requirements of paragraph (3) of this definition and is legal, valid, 
binding, and enforceable under applicable law in the relevant 
jurisdictions.
    Residential mortgage exposure means an exposure (other than a 
securitization exposure, equity exposure, or excluded mortgage exposure) 
that is managed as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, not on an individual-exposure basis, and is:
    (1) An exposure that is primarily secured by a first or subsequent 
lien on one- to four-family residential property; or
    (2) An exposure with an original and outstanding amount of $1 
million or less that is primarily secured by a first or subsequent lien 
on residential property that is not one to four family.
    Retail exposure means a residential mortgage exposure, a qualifying 
revolving exposure, or another retail exposure.
    Retail exposure subcategory means the residential mortgage exposure, 
qualifying revolving exposure, or other retail exposure subcategory.
    Risk parameter means a variable used in determining risk-based 
capital requirements for wholesale and retail exposures, specifically 
probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD), exposure at 
default (EAD), or effective maturity (M).
    Scenario analysis means a systematic process of obtaining expert 
opinions from business managers and risk management experts to derive 
reasoned assessments of the likelihood and loss impact of plausible 
high-severity operational losses. Scenario analysis may include the 
well-reasoned evaluation and use of external operational loss event 
data, adjusted as appropriate to ensure relevance to a State savings 
association's operational risk profile and control structure.
    SEC means the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.
    Securitization means a traditional securitization or a synthetic 
securitization.
    Securitization exposure means an on-balance sheet or off-balance 
sheet credit exposure that arises from a traditional or synthetic 
securitization (including credit-enhancing representations and 
warranties).
    Securitization special purpose entity (securitization SPE) means a 
corporation, trust, or other entity organized for the specific purpose 
of holding underlying exposures of a securitization, the activities of 
which are limited to those appropriate to accomplish this purpose, and 
the structure of which is intended to isolate the underlying exposures 
held by the entity from the credit risk of the seller of the underlying 
exposures to the entity.

[[Page 1301]]

    Senior securitization exposure means a securitization exposure that 
has a first priority claim on the cash flows from the underlying 
exposures. When determining whether a securitization exposure has a 
first priority claim on the cash flows from the underlying exposures, a 
State savings association is not required to consider amounts due under 
interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other 
similar payments. Both the most senior commercial paper issued by an 
ABCP program and a liquidity facility that supports the ABCP program may 
be senior securitization exposures if the liquidity facility provider's 
right to reimbursement of the drawn amounts is senior to all claims on 
the cash flows from the underlying exposures except amounts due under 
interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other 
similar payments.
    Servicer cash advance facility means a facility under which the 
servicer of the underlying exposures of a securitization may advance 
cash to ensure an uninterrupted flow of payments to investors in the 
securitization, including advances made to cover foreclosure costs or 
other expenses to facilitate the timely collection of the underlying 
exposures. See also eligible servicer cash advance facility.
    Sovereign entity means a central government (including the U.S. 
government) or an agency, department, ministry, or central bank of a 
central government.
    Sovereign exposure means:
    (1) A direct exposure to a sovereign entity; or
    (2) An exposure directly and unconditionally backed by the full 
faith and credit of a sovereign entity.
    Subsidiary means, with respect to a company, a company controlled by 
that company.
    Synthetic securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties through the use of 
one or more credit derivatives or guarantees (other than a guarantee 
that transfers only the credit risk of an individual retail exposure);
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches reflecting different levels of 
seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures; and
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities).
    Tier 1 capital is defined in Secs. 390.461-390.471, as modified in 
part II of this appendix.
    Tier 2 capital is defined in Secs. 390.461-390.471, as modified in 
part II of this appendix.
    Total qualifying capital means the sum of tier 1 capital and tier 2 
capital, after all deductions required in this appendix.
    Total risk-weighted assets means:
    (1) The sum of:
    (i) Credit risk-weighted assets; and
    (ii) Risk-weighted assets for operational risk; minus
    (2) Excess eligible credit reserves not included in tier 2 capital.
    Total wholesale and retail risk-weighted assets means the sum of 
risk-weighted assets for wholesale exposures to non-defaulted obligors 
and segments of non-defaulted retail exposures; risk-weighted assets for 
wholesale exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of defaulted 
retail exposures; risk-weighted assets for assets not defined by an 
exposure category; and risk-weighted assets for non-material portfolios 
of exposures (all as determined in section 31 of this appendix) and 
risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions (as determined in 
section 35 of this appendix) minus the amounts deducted from capital 
pursuant to Secs. 390.461-390.471 (excluding those deductions reversed 
in section 12 of this appendix).
    Traditional securitization means a transaction in which:
    (1) All or a portion of the credit risk of one or more underlying 
exposures is transferred to one or more third parties other than through 
the use of credit derivatives or guarantees;
    (2) The credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has 
been separated into at least two tranches reflecting different levels of 
seniority;
    (3) Performance of the securitization exposures depends upon the 
performance of the underlying exposures;
    (4) All or substantially all of the underlying exposures are 
financial exposures (such as loans, commitments, credit derivatives, 
guarantees, receivables, asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed 
securities, other debt securities, or equity securities);
    (5) The underlying exposures are not owned by an operating company;
    (6) The underlying exposures are not owned by a small business 
investment company described in section 302 of the Small Business 
Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682); and
    (7) The underlying exposures are not owned by a firm an investment 
in which is designed primarily to promote community welfare, including 
the welfare of low- and moderate-income communities or families, such as 
by providing services or jobs.
    (8) The FDIC may determine that a transaction in which the 
underlying exposures are owned by an investment firm that exercises 
substantially unfettered control over the

[[Page 1302]]

size and composition of its assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet 
exposures is not a traditional securitization based on the transaction's 
leverage, risk profile, or economic substance.
    (9) The FDIC may deem a transaction that meets the definition of a 
traditional securitization, notwithstanding paragraph (5), (6), or (7) 
of this definition, to be a traditional securitization based on the 
transaction's leverage, risk profile, or economic substance.
    Tranche means all securitization exposures associated with a 
securitization that have the same seniority level.
    Underlying exposures means one or more exposures that have been 
securitized in a securitization transaction.
    Unexpected operational loss (UOL) means the difference between the 
State savings association's operational risk exposure and the State 
savings association's expected operational loss.
    Unit of measure means the level (for example, organizational unit or 
operational loss event type) at which the State savings association's 
operational risk quantification system generates a separate distribution 
of potential operational losses.
    Value-at-Risk (VaR) means the estimate of the maximum amount that 
the value of one or more exposures could decline due to market price or 
rate movements during a fixed holding period within a stated confidence 
interval.
    Wholesale exposure means a credit exposure to a company, natural 
person, sovereign entity, or governmental entity (other than a 
securitization exposure, retail exposure, excluded mortgage exposure, or 
equity exposure). Examples of a wholesale exposure include:
    (1) A non-tranched guarantee issued by a State savings association 
on behalf of a company;
    (2) A repo-style transaction entered into by a State savings 
association with a company and any other transaction in which a State 
savings association posts collateral to a company and faces counterparty 
credit risk;
    (3) An exposure that a State savings association treats as a covered 
position under any applicable market risk rule for which there is a 
counterparty credit risk capital requirement;
    (4) A sale of corporate loans by a State savings association to a 
third party in which the State savings association retains full 
recourse;
    (5) An OTC derivative contract entered into by a State savings 
association with a company;
    (6) An exposure to an individual that is not managed by a State 
savings association as part of a segment of exposures with homogeneous 
risk characteristics; and
    (7) A commercial lease.
    Wholesale exposure subcategory means the HVCRE or non-HVCRE 
wholesale exposure subcategory.

           Section 3. Minimum Risk-Based Capital Requirements

    (a) Except as modified by paragraph (c) of this section or by 
section 23 of this appendix, each State savings association must meet a 
minimum ratio of:
    (1) Total qualifying capital to total risk-weighted assets of 8.0 
percent; and
    (2) Tier 1 capital to total risk-weighted assets of 4.0 percent.
    (b) Each State savings association must hold capital commensurate 
with the level and nature of all risks to which the State savings 
association is exposed.
    (c) When a State savings association subject to any applicable 
market risk rule calculates its risk-based capital requirements under 
this appendix, the State savings association must also refer to any 
applicable market risk rule for supplemental rules to calculate risk-
based capital requirements adjusted for market risk.

                       Part II. Qualifying Capital

                    Section 11. Additional Deductions

    (a) General. A State savings association that uses this appendix 
must make the same deductions from its tier 1 capital and tier 2 capital 
required in Secs. 390.461-390.471 except that:
    (1) A State savings association is not required to deduct certain 
equity investments and CEIOs (as provided in section 12 of this 
appendix); and
    (2) A State savings association also must make the deductions from 
capital required by paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
    (b) Deductions from tier 1 capital. A State savings association must 
deduct from tier 1 capital any gain-on-sale associated with a 
securitization exposure as provided in paragraph (a) of section 41 and 
paragraphs (a)(1), (c), (g)(1), and (h)(1) of section 42 of this 
appendix.
    (c) Deductions from tier 1 and tier 2 capital. A State savings 
association must deduct the exposures specified in paragraphs (c)(1) 
through (c)(7) in this section 50 percent from tier 1 capital and 50 
percent from tier 2 capital. If the amount deductible from tier 2 
capital exceeds the State savings association's actual tier 2 capital, 
however, the State savings association must deduct the excess from tier 
1 capital.
    (1) Credit-enhancing interest-only strips (CEIOs). In accordance 
with paragraphs (a)(1) and (c) of section 42 of this appendix, any CEIO 
that does not constitute gain-on-sale.
    (2) Non-qualifying securitization exposures. In accordance with 
paragraphs (a)(4) and (c) of section 42 of this appendix, any 
securitization exposure that does not qualify

[[Page 1303]]

for the Ratings-Based Approach, the Internal Assessment Approach, or the 
Supervisory Formula Approach under sections 43, 44, and 45 of this 
appendix, respectively.
    (3) Securitizations of non-IRB exposures. In accordance with 
paragraphs (c) and (g)(4) of section 42 of this appendix, certain 
exposures to a securitization any underlying exposure of which is not a 
wholesale exposure, retail exposure, securitization exposure, or equity 
exposure.
    (4) Low-rated securitization exposures. In accordance with section 
43 and paragraph (c) of section 42 of this appendix, any securitization 
exposure that qualifies for and must be deducted under the Ratings-Based 
Approach.
    (5) High-risk securitization exposures subject to the Supervisory 
Formula Approach. In accordance with paragraphs (b) and (c) of section 
45 of this appendix and paragraph (c) of section 42 of this appendix, 
certain high-risk securitization exposures (or portions thereof) that 
qualify for the Supervisory Formula Approach.
    (6) Eligible credit reserves shortfall. In accordance with paragraph 
(a)(1) of section 13 of this appendix, any eligible credit reserves 
shortfall.
    (7) Certain failed capital markets transactions. In accordance with 
paragraph (e)(3) of section 35 of this appendix, the State savings 
association's exposure on certain failed capital markets transactions.

           Section 12. Deductions and Limitations Not Required

    (a) Deduction of CEIOs. A State savings association is not required 
to make the deduction from capital for CEIOs in 12 CFR 
390.465(a)(2)(iii) and 390.471(e).
    (b) Deduction for certain equity investments. A State savings 
association is not required to deduct equity securities from capital 
under 12 CFR 390.465(c)(2)(ii). However, it must continue to deduct 
equity investments in real estate under that section. See 12 CFR 
390.461, which defines equity investments, including equity securities 
and equity investments in real estate.

                  Section 13. Eligible Credit Reserves

    (a) Comparison of eligible credit reserves to expected credit 
losses--(1) Shortfall of eligible credit reserves. If a State savings 
association's eligible credit reserves are less than the State savings 
association's total expected credit losses, the State savings 
association must deduct the shortfall amount 50 percent from tier 1 
capital and 50 percent from tier 2 capital. If the amount deductible 
from tier 2 capital exceeds the State savings association's actual tier 
2 capital, the State savings association must deduct the excess amount 
from tier 1 capital.
    (2) Excess eligible credit reserves. If a State savings 
association's eligible credit reserves exceed the State savings 
association's total expected credit losses, the State savings 
association may include the excess amount in tier 2 capital to the 
extent that the excess amount does not exceed 0.6 percent of the State 
savings association's credit-risk-weighted assets.
    (b) Treatment of allowance for loan and lease losses. Regardless of 
any provision in Secs. 390.461 through 390.471, the ALLL is included in 
tier 2 capital only to the extent provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section and in section 24 of this appendix.

                         Part III. Qualification

                    Section 21. Qualification Process

    (a) Timing. (1) A State savings association that is described in 
paragraph (b)(1) of section 1 of this appendix must adopt a written 
implementation plan no later than six months after the later of April 1, 
2008, or the date the State savings association meets a criterion in 
that section. The implementation plan must incorporate an explicit first 
floor period start date no later than 36 months after the later of April 
1, 2008, or the date the State savings association meets at least one 
criterion under paragraph (b)(1) of section 1 of this appendix. The FDIC 
may extend the first floor period start date.
    (2) A State savings association that elects to be subject to this 
appendix under paragraph (b)(2) of section 1 of this appendix must adopt 
a written implementation plan.
    (b) Implementation plan. (1) The State savings association's 
implementation plan must address in detail how the State savings 
association complies, or plans to comply, with the qualification 
requirements in section 22 of this appendix. The State savings 
association also must maintain a comprehensive and sound planning and 
governance process to oversee the implementation efforts described in 
the plan. At a minimum, the plan must:
    (i) Comprehensively address the qualification requirements in 
section 22 of this appendix for the State savings association and each 
consolidated subsidiary (U.S. and foreign-based) of the State savings 
association with respect to all portfolios and exposures of the State 
savings association and each of its consolidated subsidiaries;
    (ii) Justify and support any proposed temporary or permanent 
exclusion of business lines, portfolios, or exposures from application 
of the advanced approaches in this appendix (which business lines, 
portfolios, and exposures must be, in the aggregate, immaterial to the 
State savings association);
    (iii) Include the State savings association's self-assessment of:

[[Page 1304]]

    (A) The State savings association's current status in meeting the 
qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix; and
    (B) The consistency of the State savings association's current 
practices with the FDIC's supervisory guidance on the qualification 
requirements;
    (iv) Based on the State savings association's self-assessment, 
identify and describe the areas in which the State savings association 
proposes to undertake additional work to comply with the qualification 
requirements in section 22 of this appendix or to improve the 
consistency of the State savings association's current practices with 
the FDIC's supervisory guidance on the qualification requirements (gap 
analysis);
    (v) Describe what specific actions the State savings association 
will take to address the areas identified in the gap analysis required 
by paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section;
    (vi) Identify objective, measurable milestones, including delivery 
dates and a date when the State savings association's implementation of 
the methodologies described in this appendix will be fully operational;
    (vii) Describe resources that have been budgeted and are available 
to implement the plan; and
    (viii) Receive approval of the State savings association's board of 
directors.
    (2) The State savings association must submit the implementation 
plan, together with a copy of the minutes of the board of directors' 
approval, to the FDIC at least 60 days before the State savings 
association proposes to begin its parallel run, unless the FDIC waives 
prior notice.
    (c) Parallel run. Before determining its risk-based capital 
requirements under this appendix and following adoption of the 
implementation plan, the State savings association must conduct a 
satisfactory parallel run. A satisfactory parallel run is a period of no 
less than four consecutive calendar quarters during which the State 
savings association complies with the qualification requirements in 
section 22 of this appendix to the satisfaction of the FDIC. During the 
parallel run, the State savings association must report to the FDIC on a 
calendar quarterly basis its risk-based capital ratios using 
Secs. 390.461 through 390.471 and the risk-based capital requirements 
described in this appendix. During this period, the State savings 
association is subject to Secs. 390.461 through 390.471.
    (d) Approval to calculate risk-based capital requirements under this 
appendix. The FDIC will notify the State savings association of the date 
that the State savings association may begin its first floor period if 
the FDIC determines that:
    (1) The State savings association fully complies with all the 
qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix;
    (2) The State savings association has conducted a satisfactory 
parallel run under paragraph (c) of this section; and
    (3) The State savings association has an adequate process to ensure 
ongoing compliance with the qualification requirements in section 22 of 
this appendix.
    (e) Transitional floor periods. Following a satisfactory parallel 
run, a State savings association is subject to three transitional floor 
periods.
    (1) Risk-based capital ratios during the transitional floor 
periods--(i) Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio. During a State savings 
association's transitional floor periods, the State savings 
association's tier 1 risk-based capital ratio is equal to the lower of:
    (A) The State savings association's floor-adjusted tier 1 risk-based 
capital ratio; or
    (B) The State savings association's advanced approaches tier 1 risk-
based capital ratio.
    (ii) Total risk-based capital ratio. During a State savings 
association's transitional floor periods, the State savings 
association's total risk-based capital ratio is equal to the lower of:
    (A) The State savings association's floor-adjusted total risk-based 
capital ratio; or
    (B) The State savings association's advanced approaches total risk-
based capital ratio.
    (2) Floor-adjusted risk-based capital ratios. (i) A State savings 
association's floor-adjusted tier 1 risk-based capital ratio during a 
transitional floor period is equal to the State savings association's 
tier 1 capital as calculated under Secs. 390.461-390.471, divided by the 
product of:
    (A) The State savings association's total risk-weighted assets as 
calculated under Secs. 390.461 through 390.471; and
    (B) The appropriate transitional floor percentage in Table 1.
    (ii) A State savings association's floor-adjusted total risk-based 
capital ratio during a transitional floor period is equal to the sum of 
the State savings association's tier 1 and tier 2 capital as calculated 
under Secs. 390.461 through 390.471, divided by the product of:
    (A) The State savings association's total risk-weighted assets as 
calculated under Secs. 390.461 through 390.471; and
    (B) The appropriate transitional floor percentage in Table 1.
    (iii) A State savings association that meets the criteria in 
paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of section 1 of this appendix as of April 1, 
2008, must use Secs. 390.461 through 390.471 during the parallel run and 
as the basis for its transitional floors.

[[Page 1305]]



                      Table 1--Transitional Floors
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Transitional
                Transitional floor period                      floor
                                                            percentage
------------------------------------------------------------------------
First floor period......................................              95
Second floor period.....................................              90
Third floor period......................................              85
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Advanced approaches risk-based capital ratios. (i) A State 
savings association's advanced approaches tier 1 risk-based capital 
ratio equals the State savings association's tier 1 risk-based capital 
ratio as calculated under this appendix (other than this section on 
transitional floor periods).
    (ii) A State savings association's advanced approaches total risk-
based capital ratio equals the State savings association's total risk-
based capital ratio as calculated under this appendix (other than this 
section on transitional floor periods).
    (4) Reporting. During the transitional floor periods, a State 
savings association must report to the FDIC on a calendar quarterly 
basis both floor-adjusted risk-based capital ratios and both advanced 
approaches risk-based capital ratios.
    (5) Exiting a transitional floor period. A State savings association 
may not exit a transitional floor period until the State savings 
association has spent a minimum of four consecutive calendar quarters in 
the period and the FDIC has determined that the State savings 
association may exit the floor period. The FDIC's determination will be 
based on an assessment of the State savings association's ongoing 
compliance with the qualification requirements in section 22 of this 
appendix.
    (6) Interagency study. After the end of the second transition year 
(2010), the Federal banking agencies will publish a study that evaluates 
the advanced approaches to determine if there are any material 
deficiencies. For any primary Federal supervisor to authorize any 
institution to exit the third transitional floor period, the study must 
determine that there are no such material deficiencies that cannot be 
addressed by then-existing tools, or, if such deficiencies are found, 
they are first remedied by changes to this appendix. Notwithstanding the 
preceding sentence, a primary Federal supervisor that disagrees with the 
finding of material deficiency may not authorize any institution under 
its jurisdiction to exit the third transitional floor period unless it 
provides a public report explaining its reasoning.

                 Section 22. Qualification Requirements

    (a) Process and systems requirements. (1) A State savings 
association must have a rigorous process for assessing its overall 
capital adequacy in relation to its risk profile and a comprehensive 
strategy for maintaining an appropriate level of capital.
    (2) The systems and processes used by a State savings association 
for risk-based capital purposes under this appendix must be consistent 
with the State savings association's internal risk management processes 
and management information reporting systems.
    (3) Each State savings association must have an appropriate 
infrastructure with risk measurement and management processes that meet 
the qualification requirements of this section and are appropriate given 
the State savings association's size and level of complexity. Regardless 
of whether the systems and models that generate the risk parameters 
necessary for calculating a State savings association's risk-based 
capital requirements are located at any affiliate of the State savings 
association, the State savings association itself must ensure that the 
risk parameters and reference data used to determine its risk-based 
capital requirements are representative of its own credit risk and 
operational risk exposures.
    (b) Risk rating and segmentation systems for wholesale and retail 
exposures. (1) A State savings association must have an internal risk 
rating and segmentation system that accurately and reliably 
differentiates among degrees of credit risk for the State savings 
association's wholesale and retail exposures.
    (2) For wholesale exposures:
    (i) A State savings association must have an internal risk rating 
system that accurately and reliably assigns each obligor to a single 
rating grade (reflecting the obligor's likelihood of default). A State 
savings association may elect, however, not to assign to a rating grade 
an obligor to whom the State savings association extends credit based 
solely on the financial strength of a guarantor, provided that all of 
the State savings association's exposures to the obligor are fully 
covered by eligible guarantees, the State savings association applies 
the PD substitution approach in paragraph (c)(1) of section 33 of this 
appendix to all exposures to that obligor, and the State savings 
association immediately assigns the obligor to a rating grade if a 
guarantee can no longer be recognized under this appendix. The State 
savings association's wholesale obligor rating system must have at least 
seven discrete rating grades for non-defaulted obligors and at least one 
rating grade for defaulted obligors.
    (ii) Unless the State savings association has chosen to directly 
assign LGD estimates to each wholesale exposure, the State savings 
association must have an internal risk rating system that accurately and 
reliably assigns each wholesale exposure to a loss severity rating grade 
(reflecting the State savings association's estimate of the LGD of the

[[Page 1306]]

exposure). A State savings association employing loss severity rating 
grades must have a sufficiently granular loss severity grading system to 
avoid grouping together exposures with widely ranging LGDs.
    (3) For retail exposures, a State savings association must have an 
internal system that groups retail exposures into the appropriate retail 
exposure subcategory, groups the retail exposures in each retail 
exposure subcategory into separate segments with homogeneous risk 
characteristics, and assigns accurate and reliable PD and LGD estimates 
for each segment on a consistent basis. The State savings association's 
system must identify and group in separate segments by subcategories 
exposures identified in paragraphs (c)(2)(ii) and (iii) of section 31 of 
this appendix.
    (4) The State savings association's internal risk rating policy for 
wholesale exposures must describe the State savings association's rating 
philosophy (that is, must describe how wholesale obligor rating 
assignments are affected by the State savings association's choice of 
the range of economic, business, and industry conditions that are 
considered in the obligor rating process).
    (5) The State savings association's internal risk rating system for 
wholesale exposures must provide for the review and update (as 
appropriate) of each obligor rating and (if applicable) each loss 
severity rating whenever the State savings association receives new 
material information, but no less frequently than annually. The State 
savings association's retail exposure segmentation system must provide 
for the review and update (as appropriate) of assignments of retail 
exposures to segments whenever the State savings association receives 
new material information, but generally no less frequently than 
quarterly.
    (c) Quantification of risk parameters for wholesale and retail 
exposures. (1) The State savings association must have a comprehensive 
risk parameter quantification process that produces accurate, timely, 
and reliable estimates of the risk parameters for the State savings 
association's wholesale and retail exposures.
    (2) Data used to estimate the risk parameters must be relevant to 
the State savings association's actual wholesale and retail exposures, 
and of sufficient quality to support the determination of risk-based 
capital requirements for the exposures.
    (3) The State savings association's risk parameter quantification 
process must produce appropriately conservative risk parameter estimates 
where the State savings association has limited relevant data, and any 
adjustments that are part of the quantification process must not result 
in a pattern of bias toward lower risk parameter estimates.
    (4) The State savings association's risk parameter estimation 
process should not rely on the possibility of U.S. government financial 
assistance, except for the financial assistance that the U.S. government 
has a legally binding commitment to provide.
    (5) Where the State savings association's quantifications of LGD 
directly or indirectly incorporate estimates of the effectiveness of its 
credit risk management practices in reducing its exposure to troubled 
obligors prior to default, the State savings association must support 
such estimates with empirical analysis showing that the estimates are 
consistent with its historical experience in dealing with such exposures 
during economic downturn conditions.
    (6) PD estimates for wholesale obligors and retail segments must be 
based on at least five years of default data. LGD estimates for 
wholesale exposures must be based on at least seven years of loss 
severity data, and LGD estimates for retail segments must be based on at 
least five years of loss severity data. EAD estimates for wholesale 
exposures must be based on at least seven years of exposure amount data, 
and EAD estimates for retail segments must be based on at least five 
years of exposure amount data.
    (7) Default, loss severity, and exposure amount data must include 
periods of economic downturn conditions, or the State savings 
association must adjust its estimates of risk parameters to compensate 
for the lack of data from periods of economic downturn conditions.
    (8) The State savings association's PD, LGD, and EAD estimates must 
be based on the definition of default in this appendix.
    (9) The State savings association must review and update (as 
appropriate) its risk parameters and its risk parameter quantification 
process at least annually.
    (10) The State savings association must at least annually conduct a 
comprehensive review and analysis of reference data to determine 
relevance of reference data to the State savings association's 
exposures, quality of reference data to support PD, LGD, and EAD 
estimates, and consistency of reference data to the definition of 
default contained in this appendix.
    (d) Counterparty credit risk model. A State savings association must 
obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC under section 32 of this 
appendix to use the internal models methodology for counterparty credit 
risk.
    (e) Double default treatment. A State savings association must 
obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC under section 34 of this 
appendix to use the double default treatment.
    (f) Securitization exposures. A State savings association must 
obtain the prior written approval of the FDIC under section 44 of this 
appendix to use the Internal Assessment Approach for securitization 
exposures to ABCP programs.

[[Page 1307]]

    (g) Equity exposures model. A State savings association must obtain 
the prior written approval of the FDIC under section 53 of this appendix 
to use the Internal Models Approach for equity exposures.
    (h) Operational risk--(1) Operational risk management processes. A 
State savings association must:
    (i) Have an operational risk management function that:
    (A) Is independent of business line management; and
    (B) Is responsible for designing, implementing, and overseeing the 
State savings association's operational risk data and assessment 
systems, operational risk quantification systems, and related processes;
    (ii) Have and document a process (which must capture business 
environment and internal control factors affecting the State savings 
association's operational risk profile) to identify, measure, monitor, 
and control operational risk in State savings association products, 
activities, processes, and systems; and
    (iii) Report operational risk exposures, operational loss events, 
and other relevant operational risk information to business unit 
management, senior management, and the board of directors (or a 
designated committee of the board).
    (2) Operational risk data and assessment systems. A State savings 
association must have operational risk data and assessment systems that 
capture operational risks to which the State savings association is 
exposed. The State savings association's operational risk data and 
assessment systems must:
    (i) Be structured in a manner consistent with the State savings 
association's current business activities, risk profile, technological 
processes, and risk management processes; and
    (ii) Include credible, transparent, systematic, and verifiable 
processes that incorporate the following elements on an ongoing basis:
    (A) Internal operational loss event data. The State savings 
association must have a systematic process for capturing and using 
internal operational loss event data in its operational risk data and 
assessment systems.
    (1) The State savings association's operational risk data and 
assessment systems must include a historical observation period of at 
least five years for internal operational loss event data (or such 
shorter period approved by the FDIC to address transitional situations, 
such as integrating a new business line).
    (2) The State savings association must be able to map its internal 
operational loss event data into the seven operational loss event type 
categories.
    (3) The State savings association may refrain from collecting 
internal operational loss event data for individual operational losses 
below established dollar threshold amounts if the State savings 
association can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that the 
thresholds are reasonable, do not exclude important internal operational 
loss event data, and permit the State savings association to capture 
substantially all the dollar value of the State savings association's 
operational losses.
    (B) External operational loss event data. The State savings 
association must have a systematic process for determining its 
methodologies for incorporating external operational loss event data 
into its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (C) Scenario analysis. The State savings association must have a 
systematic process for determining its methodologies for incorporating 
scenario analysis into its operational risk data and assessment systems.
    (D) Business environment and internal control factors. The State 
savings association must incorporate business environment and internal 
control factors into its operational risk data and assessment systems. 
The State savings association must also periodically compare the results 
of its prior business environment and internal control factor 
assessments against its actual operational losses incurred in the 
intervening period.
    (3) Operational risk quantification systems. (i) The State savings 
association's operational risk quantification systems:
    (A) Must generate estimates of the State savings association's 
operational risk exposure using its operational risk data and assessment 
systems;
    (B) Must employ a unit of measure that is appropriate for the State 
savings association's range of business activities and the variety of 
operational loss events to which it is exposed, and that does not 
combine business activities or operational loss events with demonstrably 
different risk profiles within the same loss distribution;
    (C) Must include a credible, transparent, systematic, and verifiable 
approach for weighting each of the four elements, described in paragraph 
(h)(2)(ii) of this section, that a State savings association is required 
to incorporate into its operational risk data and assessment systems;
    (D) May use internal estimates of dependence among operational 
losses across and within units of measure if the State savings 
association can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that its 
process for estimating dependence is sound, robust to a variety of 
scenarios, and implemented with integrity, and allows for the 
uncertainty surrounding the estimates. If the State savings association 
has not made such a demonstration, it must sum operational risk exposure 
estimates across units of measure to calculate its total operational 
risk exposure; and

[[Page 1308]]

    (E) Must be reviewed and updated (as appropriate) whenever the State 
savings association becomes aware of information that may have a 
material effect on the State savings association's estimate of 
operational risk exposure, but the review and update must occur no less 
frequently than annually.
    (ii) With the prior written approval of the FDIC, a State savings 
association may generate an estimate of its operational risk exposure 
using an alternative approach to that specified in paragraph (h)(3)(i) 
of this section. A State savings association proposing to use such an 
alternative operational risk quantification system must submit a 
proposal to the FDIC. In determining whether to approve a State savings 
association's proposal to use an alternative operational risk 
quantification system, the FDIC will consider the following principles:
    (A) Use of the alternative operational risk quantification system 
will be allowed only on an exception basis, considering the size, 
complexity, and risk profile of the State savings association;
    (B) The State savings association must demonstrate that its estimate 
of its operational risk exposure generated under the alternative 
operational risk quantification system is appropriate and can be 
supported empirically; and
    (C) A State savings association must not use an allocation of 
operational risk capital requirements that includes entities other than 
depository institutions or the benefits of diversification across 
entities.
    (i) Data management and maintenance. (1) A State savings association 
must have data management and maintenance systems that adequately 
support all aspects of its advanced systems and the timely and accurate 
reporting of risk-based capital requirements.
    (2) A State savings association must retain data using an electronic 
format that allows timely retrieval of data for analysis, validation, 
reporting, and disclosure purposes.
    (3) A State savings association must retain sufficient data elements 
related to key risk drivers to permit adequate monitoring, validation, 
and refinement of its advanced systems.
    (j) Control, oversight, and validation mechanisms. (1) The State 
savings association's senior management must ensure that all components 
of the State savings association's advanced systems function effectively 
and comply with the qualification requirements in this section.
    (2) The State savings association's board of directors (or a 
designated committee of the board) must at least annually review the 
effectiveness of, and approve, the State savings association's advanced 
systems.
    (3) A State savings association must have an effective system of 
controls and oversight that:
    (i) Ensures ongoing compliance with the qualification requirements 
in this section;
    (ii) Maintains the integrity, reliability, and accuracy of the State 
savings association's advanced systems; and
    (iii) Includes adequate governance and project management processes.
    (4) The State savings association must validate, on an ongoing 
basis, its advanced systems. The State savings association's validation 
process must be independent of the advanced systems' development, 
implementation, and operation, or the validation process must be 
subjected to an independent review of its adequacy and effectiveness. 
Validation must include:
    (i) An evaluation of the conceptual soundness of (including 
developmental evidence supporting) the advanced systems;
    (ii) An ongoing monitoring process that includes verification of 
processes and benchmarking; and
    (iii) An outcomes analysis process that includes back-testing.
    (5) The State savings association must have an internal audit 
function independent of business-line management that at least annually 
assesses the effectiveness of the controls supporting the State savings 
association's advanced systems and reports its findings to the State 
savings association's board of directors (or a committee thereof).
    (6) The State savings association must periodically stress test its 
advanced systems. The stress testing must include a consideration of how 
economic cycles, especially downturns, affect risk-based capital 
requirements (including migration across rating grades and segments and 
the credit risk mitigation benefits of double default treatment).
    (k) Documentation. The State savings association must adequately 
document all material aspects of its advanced systems.

                    Section 23. Ongoing Qualification

    (a) Changes to advanced systems. A State savings association must 
meet all the qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix 
on an ongoing basis. A State savings association must notify the FDIC 
when the State savings association makes any change to an advanced 
system that would result in a material change in the State savings 
association's risk-weighted asset amount for an exposure type, or when 
the State savings association makes any significant change to its 
modeling assumptions.
    (b) Failure to comply with qualification requirements. (1) If the 
FDIC determines that a State savings association that uses this appendix 
and has conducted a satisfactory parallel run fails to comply with the 
qualification requirements in section 22 of this appendix, the FDIC will 
notify the State savings association in writing of the State savings 
association's failure to comply.

[[Page 1309]]

    (2) The State savings association must establish and submit a plan 
satisfactory to the FDIC to return to compliance with the qualification 
requirements.
    (3) In addition, if the FDIC determines that the State savings 
association's risk-based capital requirements are not commensurate with 
the State savings association's credit, market, operational, or other 
risks, the FDIC may require such a State savings association to 
calculate its risk-based capital requirements:
    (i) Under Secs. 390.461 through 390.471; or
    (ii) Under this appendix with any modifications provided by the 
FDIC.

      Section 24. Merger and Acquisition Transitional Arrangements

    (a) Mergers and acquisitions of companies without advanced systems. 
If a State savings association merges with or acquires a company that 
does not calculate its risk-based capital requirements using advanced 
systems, the State savings association may use Secs. 390.461 through 
390.471 to determine the risk-weighted asset amounts for, and deductions 
from capital associated with, the merged or acquired company's exposures 
for up to 24 months after the calendar quarter during which the merger 
or acquisition consummates. The FDIC may extend this transition period 
for up to an additional 12 months. Within 90 days of consummating the 
merger or acquisition, the State savings association must submit to the 
FDIC an implementation plan for using its advanced systems for the 
acquired company. During the period when Sec. 390.460 applies to the 
merged or acquired company, any ALLL associated with the merged or 
acquired company's exposures may be included in the State savings 
association's tier 2 capital up to 1.25 percent of the acquired 
company's risk-weighted assets. All general allowances of the merged or 
acquired company must be excluded from the State savings association's 
eligible credit reserves. In addition, the risk-weighted assets of the 
merged or acquired company are not included in the State savings 
association's credit-risk-weighted assets but are included in total 
risk-weighted assets. If a State savings association relies on this 
paragraph, the State savings association must disclose publicly the 
amounts of risk-weighted assets and qualifying capital calculated under 
this appendix for the acquiring State savings association and under 
Secs. 390.461 through 390.471 for the acquired company.
    (b) Mergers and acquisitions of companies with advanced systems--(1) 
If a State savings association merges with or acquires a company that 
calculates its risk-based capital requirements using advanced systems, 
the State savings association may use the acquired company's advanced 
systems to determine the risk-weighted asset amounts for, and deductions 
from capital associated with, the merged or acquired company's exposures 
for up to 24 months after the calendar quarter during which the 
acquisition or merger consummates. The FDIC may extend this transition 
period for up to an additional 12 months. Within 90 days of consummating 
the merger or acquisition, the State savings association must submit to 
the FDIC an implementation plan for using its advanced systems for the 
merged or acquired company.
    (2) If the acquiring State savings association is not subject to the 
advanced approaches in this appendix at the time of acquisition or 
merger, during the period when Secs. 390.461 through 390.471 apply to 
the acquiring State savings association, the ALLL associated with the 
exposures of the merged or acquired company may not be directly included 
in tier 2 capital. Rather, any excess eligible credit reserves 
associated with the merged or acquired company's exposures may be 
included in the State savings association's tier 2 capital up to 0.6 
percent of the credit-risk-weighted assets associated with those 
exposures.

          Part IV. Risk-Weighted Assets for General Credit Risk

 Section 31. Mechanics for Calculating Total Wholesale and Retail Risk-
                             Weighted Assets

    (a) Overview. A State savings association must calculate its total 
wholesale and retail risk-weighted asset amount in four distinct phases:
    (1) Phase 1--categorization of exposures;
    (2) Phase 2--assignment of wholesale obligors and exposures to 
rating grades and segmentation of retail exposures;
    (3) Phase 3--assignment of risk parameters to wholesale exposures 
and segments of retail exposures; and
    (4) Phase 4--calculation of risk-weighted asset amounts.
    (b) Phase 1--Categorization. The State savings association must 
determine which of its exposures are wholesale exposures, retail 
exposures, securitization exposures, or equity exposures. The State 
savings association must categorize each retail exposure as a 
residential mortgage exposure, a QRE, or an other retail exposure. The 
State savings association must identify which wholesale exposures are 
HVCRE exposures, sovereign exposures, OTC derivative contracts, repo-
style transactions, eligible margin loans, eligible purchased wholesale 
exposures, unsettled transactions to which section 35 of this appendix 
applies, and eligible guarantees or eligible credit derivatives that are 
used as credit risk mitigants. The State savings association must 
identify any on-balance sheet asset that does not meet the definition of 
a wholesale, retail, equity, or securitization exposure, as well as any 
non-material portfolio of exposures described in paragraph (e)(4) of 
this section.

[[Page 1310]]

    (c) Phase 2--Assignment of wholesale obligors and exposures to 
rating grades and retail exposures to segments--(1) Assignment of 
wholesale obligors and exposures to rating grades.
    (i) The State savings association must assign each obligor of a 
wholesale exposure to a single obligor rating grade and must assign each 
wholesale exposure to which it does not directly assign an LGD estimate 
to a loss severity rating grade.
    (ii) The State savings association must identify which of its 
wholesale obligors are in default.
    (2) Segmentation of retail exposures. (i) The State savings 
association must group the retail exposures in each retail subcategory 
into segments that have homogeneous risk characteristics.
    (ii) The State savings association must identify which of its retail 
exposures are in default. The State savings association must segment 
defaulted retail exposures separately from non-defaulted retail 
exposures.
    (iii) If the State savings association determines the EAD for 
eligible margin loans using the approach in paragraph (b) of section 32 
of this appendix, the State savings association must identify which of 
its retail exposures are eligible margin loans for which the State 
savings association uses this EAD approach and must segment such 
eligible margin loans separately from other retail exposures.
    (3) Eligible purchased wholesale exposures. A State savings 
association may group its eligible purchased wholesale exposures into 
segments that have homogeneous risk characteristics. A State savings 
association must use the wholesale exposure formula in Table 2 in this 
section to determine the risk-based capital requirement for each segment 
of eligible purchased wholesale exposures.
    (d) Phase 3--Assignment of risk parameters to wholesale exposures 
and segments of retail exposures--(1) Quantification process. Subject to 
the limitations in this paragraph (d), the State savings association 
must:
    (i) Associate a PD with each wholesale obligor rating grade;
    (ii) Associate an LGD with each wholesale loss severity rating grade 
or assign an LGD to each wholesale exposure;
    (iii) Assign an EAD and M to each wholesale exposure; and
    (iv) Assign a PD, LGD, and EAD to each segment of retail exposures.
    (2) Floor on PD assignment. The PD for each wholesale obligor or 
retail segment may not be less than 0.03 percent, except for exposures 
to or directly and unconditionally guaranteed by a sovereign entity, the 
Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, the 
European Commission, the European Central Bank, or a multilateral 
development bank, to which the State savings association assigns a 
rating grade associated with a PD of less than 0.03 percent.
    (3) Floor on LGD estimation. The LGD for each segment of residential 
mortgage exposures (other than segments of residential mortgage 
exposures for which all or substantially all of the principal of each 
exposure is directly and unconditionally guaranteed by the full faith 
and credit of a sovereign entity) may not be less than 10 percent.
    (4) Eligible purchased wholesale exposures. A State savings 
association must assign a PD, LGD, EAD, and M to each segment of 
eligible purchased wholesale exposures. If the State savings association 
can estimate ECL (but not PD or LGD) for a segment of eligible purchased 
wholesale exposures, the State savings association must assume that the 
LGD of the segment equals 100 percent and that the PD of the segment 
equals ECL divided by EAD. The estimated ECL must be calculated for the 
exposures without regard to any assumption of recourse or guarantees 
from the seller or other parties.
    (5) Credit risk mitigation--credit derivatives, guarantees, and 
collateral. (i) A State savings association may take into account the 
risk reducing effects of eligible guarantees and eligible credit 
derivatives in support of a wholesale exposure by applying the PD 
substitution or LGD adjustment treatment to the exposure as provided in 
section 33 of this appendix or, if applicable, applying double default 
treatment to the exposure as provided in section 34 of this appendix. A 
State savings association may decide separately for each wholesale 
exposure that qualifies for the double default treatment under section 
34 of this appendix whether to apply the double default treatment or to 
use the PD substitution or LGD adjustment treatment without recognizing 
double default effects.
    (ii) A State savings association may take into account the risk 
reducing effects of guarantees and credit derivatives in support of 
retail exposures in a segment when quantifying the PD and LGD of the 
segment.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(6) of this section, a 
State savings association may take into account the risk reducing 
effects of collateral in support of a wholesale exposure when 
quantifying the LGD of the exposure and may take into account the risk 
reducing effects of collateral in support of retail exposures when 
quantifying the PD and LGD of the segment.
    (6) EAD for OTC derivative contracts, repo-style transactions, and 
eligible margin loans. (i) A State savings association must calculate 
its EAD for an OTC derivative contract as provided in paragraphs (c) and 
(d) of section 32 of this appendix. A State savings association may take 
into account the risk-reducing effects of financial collateral in 
support of a repo-style transaction or eligible margin loan and of any 
collateral in support of a repo-style transaction that is included in 
the

[[Page 1311]]

State savings association's VaR-based measure under any applicable 
market risk rule through an adjustment to EAD as provided in paragraphs 
(b) and (d) of section 32 of this appendix. A State savings association 
that takes collateral into account through such an adjustment to EAD 
under section 32 of this appendix may not reflect such collateral in 
LGD.
    (ii) A State savings association may attribute an EAD of zero to:
    (A) Derivative contracts that are publicly traded on an exchange 
that requires the daily receipt and payment of cash-variation margin;
    (B) Derivative contracts and repo-style transactions that are 
outstanding with a qualifying central counterparty (but not for those 
transactions that a qualifying central counterparty has rejected); and
    (C) Credit risk exposures to a qualifying central counterparty in 
the form of clearing deposits and posted collateral that arise from 
transactions described in paragraph (d)(6)(ii)(B) of this section.
    (7) Effective maturity. An exposure's M must be no greater than five 
years and no less than one year, except that an exposure's M must be no 
less than one day if the exposure has an original maturity of less than 
one year and is not part of a State savings association's ongoing 
financing of the obligor. An exposure is not part of a State savings 
association's ongoing financing of the obligor if the State savings 
association:
    (i) Has a legal and practical ability not to renew or roll over the 
exposure in the event of credit deterioration of the obligor;
    (ii) Makes an independent credit decision at the inception of the 
exposure and at every renewal or roll over; and
    (iii) Has no substantial commercial incentive to continue its credit 
relationship with the obligor in the event of credit deterioration of 
the obligor.
    (e) Phase 4--Calculation of risk-weighted assets--(1) Non-defaulted 
exposures. (i) A State savings association must calculate the dollar 
risk-based capital requirement for each of its wholesale exposures to a 
non-defaulted obligor (except eligible guarantees and eligible credit 
derivatives that hedge another wholesale exposure and exposures to which 
the State savings association applies the double default treatment in 
section 34 of this appendix) and segments of non-defaulted retail 
exposures by inserting the assigned risk parameters for the wholesale 
obligor and exposure or retail segment into the appropriate risk-based 
capital formula specified in Table 2 and multiplying the output of the 
formula (K) by the EAD of the exposure or segment. Alternatively, a 
State savings association may apply a 300 percent risk weight to the EAD 
of an eligible margin loan if the State savings association is not able 
to meet the agencies' requirements for estimation of PD and LGD for the 
margin loan.

[[Page 1312]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.002

    (ii) The sum of all the dollar risk-based capital requirements for 
each wholesale exposure to a non-defaulted obligor and segment of non-
defaulted retail exposures calculated in paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this 
section and in paragraph (e) of section 34 of this appendix equals the 
total dollar risk-based capital requirement for those exposures and 
segments.
    (iii) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for wholesale 
exposures to non-defaulted obligors and segments of non-defaulted retail 
exposures equals the total dollar risk-based capital requirement 
calculated in paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section multiplied by 12.5.
    (2) Wholesale exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of 
defaulted retail exposures. (i) The dollar risk-based capital 
requirement for each wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor equals 
0.08 multiplied by the EAD of the exposure.
    (ii) The dollar risk-based capital requirement for a segment of 
defaulted retail exposures equals 0.08 multiplied by the EAD of the 
segment.
    (iii) The sum of all the dollar risk-based capital requirements for 
each wholesale exposure to a defaulted obligor calculated in paragraph 
(e)(2)(i) of this section plus the dollar risk-based capital 
requirements for each segment of defaulted retail exposures

[[Page 1313]]

calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(ii) of this section equals the total 
dollar risk-based capital requirement for those exposures and segments.
    (iv) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for wholesale 
exposures to defaulted obligors and segments of defaulted retail 
exposures equals the total dollar risk-based capital requirement 
calculated in paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section multiplied by 12.5.
    (3) Assets not included in a defined exposure category. (i) A State 
savings association may assign a risk-weighted asset amount of zero to 
cash owned and held in all offices of the State savings association or 
in transit and for gold bullion held in the State savings association's 
own vaults, or held in another State savings association's vaults on an 
allocated basis, to the extent the gold bullion assets are offset by 
gold bullion liabilities.
    (ii) The risk-weighted asset amount for the residual value of a 
retail lease exposure equals such residual value.
    (iii) The risk-weighted asset amount for any other on-balance-sheet 
asset that does not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, 
securitization, or equity exposure equals the carrying value of the 
asset.
    (4) Non-material portfolios of exposures. The risk-weighted asset 
amount of a portfolio of exposures for which the State savings 
association has demonstrated to the FDIC's satisfaction that the 
portfolio (when combined with all other portfolios of exposures that the 
State savings association seeks to treat under this paragraph) is not 
material to the State savings association is the sum of the carrying 
values of on-balance sheet exposures plus the notional amounts of off-
balance sheet exposures in the portfolio. For purposes of this paragraph 
(e)(4), the notional amount of an OTC derivative contract that is not a 
credit derivative is the EAD of the derivative as calculated in section 
32 of this appendix.

    Section 32. Counterparty Credit Risk of Repo-Style Transactions, 
           Eligible Margin Loans, and OTC Derivative Contracts

    (a) In General. (1) This section describes two methodologies--a 
collateral haircut approach and an internal models methodology--that a 
State savings association may use instead of an LGD estimation 
methodology to recognize the benefits of financial collateral in 
mitigating the counterparty credit risk of repo-style transactions, 
eligible margin loans, collateralized OTC derivative contracts, and 
single product netting sets of such transactions and to recognize the 
benefits of any collateral in mitigating the counterparty credit risk of 
repo-style transactions that are included in a State savings 
association's VaR-based measure under any applicable market risk rule. A 
third methodology, the simple VaR methodology, is available for single 
product netting sets of repo-style transactions and eligible margin 
loans.
    (2) This section also describes the methodology for calculating EAD 
for an OTC derivative contract or a set of OTC derivative contracts 
subject to a qualifying master netting agreement. A State savings 
association also may use the internal models methodology to estimate EAD 
for qualifying cross-product master netting agreements.
    (3) A State savings association may only use the standard 
supervisory haircut approach with a minimum 10-business-day holding 
period to recognize in EAD the benefits of conforming residential 
mortgage collateral that secures repo-style transactions (other than 
repo-style transactions included in the State savings association's VaR-
based measure under any applicable market risk rule), eligible margin 
loans, and OTC derivative contracts.
    (4) A State savings association may use any combination of the three 
methodologies for collateral recognition; however, it must use the same 
methodology for similar exposures.
    (b) EAD for eligible margin loans and repo-style transactions--(1) 
General. A State savings association may recognize the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of financial collateral that secures an eligible 
margin loan, repo-style transaction, or single-product netting set of 
such transactions by factoring the collateral into its LGD estimates for 
the exposure. Alternatively, a State savings association may estimate an 
unsecured LGD for the exposure, as well as for any repo-style 
transaction that is included in the State savings association's VaR-
based measure under any applicable market risk rule, and determine the 
EAD of the exposure using:
    (i) The collateral haircut approach described in paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section;
    (ii) For netting sets only, the simple VaR methodology described in 
paragraph (b)(3) of this section; or
    (iii) The internal models methodology described in paragraph (d) of 
this section.
    (2) Collateral haircut approach--(i) EAD equation. A State savings 
association may determine EAD for an eligible margin loan, repo-style 
transaction, or netting set by setting EAD equal to max 0, [(SE ^ SC) + 
S(Es  x  Hs) + S(Efx  x  Hfx)] , where:
    (A) SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the State savings 
association has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted as 
collateral to the counterparty under the transaction (or netting set));
    (B) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the State savings 
association has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from

[[Page 1314]]

the counterparty under the transaction (or netting set));
    (C) Es equals the absolute value of the net position in a given 
instrument or in gold (where the net position in a given instrument or 
in gold equals the sum of the current market values of the instrument or 
gold the State savings association has lent, sold subject to repurchase, 
or posted as collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current 
market values of that same instrument or gold the State savings 
association has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from the counterparty);
    (D) Hs equals the market price volatility haircut appropriate to the 
instrument or gold referenced in Es;
    (E) Efx equals the absolute value of the net position of instruments 
and cash in a currency that is different from the settlement currency 
(where the net position in a given currency equals the sum of the 
current market values of any instruments or cash in the currency the 
State savings association has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or 
posted as collateral to the counterparty minus the sum of the current 
market values of any instruments or cash in the currency the State 
savings association has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken 
as collateral from the counterparty); and
    (F) Hfx equals the haircut appropriate to the mismatch between the 
currency referenced in Efx and the settlement currency.
    (ii) Standard supervisory haircuts. (A) Under the standard 
supervisory haircuts approach:
    (1) A State savings association must use the haircuts for market 
price volatility (Hs) in Table 3, as adjusted in certain circumstances 
as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(A)(3) and (4) of this section;

                       Table 3--Standard Supervisory Market Price Volatility Haircuts \3\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Issuers exempt
  Applicable external rating grade category     Residual maturity for debt       from the 3
             for debt securities                        securities              basis point      Other issuers
                                                                                   floor
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Two highest investment-grade rating           1 year........................            0.005               0.01
 categories for long-term ratings/highest     >1 year, 5 years..............             0.02               0.04
 investment-grade rating category for short-  >5 years......................             0.04               0.08
 term ratings.
Two lowest investment-grade rating            1 year........................             0.01               0.02
 categories for both short- and long-term     >1 year, 5 years..............             0.03               0.06
 ratings.                                     >5 years......................             0.06               0.12
One rating category below investment grade..  All...........................             0.15               0.25
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Main index equities (including convertible bonds) and gold..........0.15....
Other publicly traded equities (including convertible bonds), confor0.25
 residential mortgages, and nonfinancial collateral.
Mutual funds...................................Highest haircut applicable to any security in
                                                         which the fund can invest.
Cash on deposit with the State savings association (including a certi0icate
 of deposit issued by the State savings association).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\3\ The market price volatility haircuts in Table 3 are based on a ten-business-day holding period.

    (2) For currency mismatches, a State savings association must use a 
haircut for foreign exchange rate volatility (Hfx) of 8 percent, as 
adjusted in certain circumstances as provided in paragraph 
(b)(2)(ii)(A)(3) and (4) of this section.
    (3) For repo-style transactions, a State savings association may 
multiply the supervisory haircuts provided in paragraphs 
(b)(2)(ii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section by the square root of \1/2\ 
(which equals 0.707107).
    (4) A State savings association must adjust the supervisory haircuts 
upward on the basis of a holding period longer than ten business days 
(for eligible margin loans) or five business days (for repo-style 
transactions) where and as appropriate to take into account the 
illiquidity of an instrument.
    (iii) Own internal estimates for haircuts. With the prior written 
approval of the FDIC, a State savings association may calculate haircuts 
(Hs and Hfx) using its own internal estimates of the volatilities of 
market prices and foreign exchange rates.
    (A) To receive FDIC approval to use its own internal estimates, a 
State savings association must satisfy the following minimum 
quantitative standards:
    (1) A State savings association must use a 99th percentile one-
tailed confidence interval.
    (2) The minimum holding period for a repo-style transaction is five 
business days and for an eligible margin loan is ten business days. When 
a State savings association calculates an own-estimates haircut on a 
TN-day holding period, which is different from the minimum 
holding period for the transaction type, the applicable haircut 
(HM) is calculated using the following square root of time 
formula:

[[Page 1315]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.003

(i) TM equals 5 for repo-style transactions and 10 for 
          eligible margin loans;
(ii) TN equals the holding period used by the State savings 
          association to derive HN; and
(iii) HN equals the haircut based on the holding period 
          TN.

    (3) A State savings association must adjust holding periods upwards 
where and as appropriate to take into account the illiquidity of an 
instrument.
    (4) The historical observation period must be at least one year.
    (5) A State savings association must update its data sets and 
recompute haircuts no less frequently than quarterly and must also 
reassess data sets and haircuts whenever market prices change 
materially.
    (B) With respect to debt securities that have an applicable external 
rating of investment grade, a State savings association may calculate 
haircuts for categories of securities. For a category of securities, the 
State savings association must calculate the haircut on the basis of 
internal volatility estimates for securities in that category that are 
representative of the securities in that category that the State savings 
association has lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as collateral, 
borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral. In 
determining relevant categories, the State savings association must at a 
minimum take into account:
    (1) The type of issuer of the security;
    (2) The applicable external rating of the security;
    (3) The maturity of the security; and
    (4) The interest rate sensitivity of the security.
    (C) With respect to debt securities that have an applicable external 
rating of below investment grade and equity securities, a State savings 
association must calculate a separate haircut for each individual 
security.
    (D) Where an exposure or collateral (whether in the form of cash or 
securities) is denominated in a currency that differs from the 
settlement currency, the State savings association must calculate a 
separate currency mismatch haircut for its net position in each 
mismatched currency based on estimated volatilities of foreign exchange 
rates between the mismatched currency and the settlement currency.
    (E) A State savings association's own estimates of market price and 
foreign exchange rate volatilities may not take into account the 
correlations among securities and foreign exchange rates on either the 
exposure or collateral side of a transaction (or netting set) or the 
correlations among securities and foreign exchange rates between the 
exposure and collateral sides of the transaction (or netting set).
    (3) Simple VaR methodology. With the prior written approval of the 
FDIC, a State savings association may estimate EAD for a netting set 
using a VaR model that meets the requirements in paragraph (b)(3)(iii) 
of this section. In such event, the State savings association must set 
EAD equal to max 0, [(SE ^ SC) + PFE] , where:

    (i) SE equals the value of the exposure (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the State savings 
association has lent, sold subject to repurchase, or posted as 
collateral to the counterparty under the netting set);
    (ii) SC equals the value of the collateral (the sum of the current 
market values of all instruments, gold, and cash the State savings 
association has borrowed, purchased subject to resale, or taken as 
collateral from the counterparty under the netting set); and
    (iii) PFE (potential future exposure) equals the State savings 
association's empirically based best estimate of the 99th percentile, 
one-tailed confidence interval for an increase in the value of (SE ^ SC) 
over a five-business-day holding period for repo-style transactions or 
over a ten-business-day holding period for eligible margin loans using a 
minimum one-year historical observation period of price data 
representing the instruments that the State savings association has 
lent, sold subject to repurchase, posted as collateral, borrowed, 
purchased subject to resale, or taken as collateral. The State savings 
association must validate its VaR model, including by establishing and 
maintaining a rigorous and regular back-testing regime.

    (c) EAD for OTC derivative contracts. (1) A State savings 
association must determine the EAD for an OTC derivative contract that 
is not subject to a qualifying master netting agreement using the 
current exposure methodology in paragraph (c)(5) of this section or 
using the internal models methodology described in paragraph (d) of this 
section.
    (2) A State savings association must determine the EAD for multiple 
OTC derivative contracts that are subject to a qualifying master netting 
agreement using the current exposure methodology in paragraph (c)(6) of 
this section or using the internal models methodology described in 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (3) Counterparty credit risk for credit derivatives. Notwithstanding 
the above, (i) a State

[[Page 1316]]

savings association that purchases a credit derivative that is 
recognized under section 33 or 34 of this appendix as a credit risk 
mitigant for an exposure that is not a covered position under any 
applicable market risk rule need not compute a separate counterparty 
credit risk capital requirement under this section so long as the State 
savings association does so consistently for all such credit derivatives 
and either includes all or excludes all such credit derivatives that are 
subject to a master netting agreement from any measure used to determine 
counterparty credit risk exposure to all relevant counterparties for 
risk-based capital purposes.
    (ii) A State savings association that is the protection provider in 
a credit derivative must treat the credit derivative as a wholesale 
exposure to the reference obligor and need not compute a counterparty 
credit risk capital requirement for the credit derivative under this 
section, so long as it does so consistently for all such credit 
derivatives and either includes all or excludes all such credit 
derivatives that are subject to a master netting agreement from any 
measure used to determine counterparty credit risk exposure to all 
relevant counterparties for risk-based capital purposes (unless the 
State savings association is treating the credit derivative as a covered 
position under any applicable market risk rule, in which case the State 
savings association must compute a supplemental counterparty credit risk 
capital requirement under this section).
    (4) Counterparty credit risk for equity derivatives. A State savings 
association must treat an equity derivative contract as an equity 
exposure and compute a risk-weighted asset amount for the equity 
derivative contract under part VI (unless the State savings association 
is treating the contract as a covered position under any applicable 
market risk rule). In addition, if the State savings association is 
treating the contract as a covered position under any applicable market 
risk rule and in certain other cases described in section 55 of this 
appendix, the State savings association must also calculate a risk-based 
capital requirement for the counterparty credit risk of an equity 
derivative contract under this subpart.
    (5) Single OTC derivative contract. Except as modified by paragraph 
(c)(7) of this section, the EAD for a single OTC derivative contract 
that is not subject to a qualifying master netting agreement is equal to 
the sum of the State savings association's current credit exposure and 
potential future credit exposure (PFE) on the derivative contract.
    (i) Current credit exposure. The current credit exposure for a 
single OTC derivative contract is the greater of the mark-to-market 
value of the derivative contract or zero.
    (ii) PFE. The PFE for a single OTC derivative contract, including an 
OTC derivative contract with a negative mark-to-market value, is 
calculated by multiplying the notional principal amount of the 
derivative contract by the appropriate conversion factor in Table 4. For 
purposes of calculating either the PFE under this paragraph or the gross 
PFE under paragraph (c)(6) of this section for exchange rate contracts 
and other similar contracts in which the notional principal amount is 
equivalent to the cash flows, notional principal amount is the net 
receipts to each party falling due on each value date in each currency. 
For any OTC derivative contract that does not fall within one of the 
specified categories in Table 4, the PFE must be calculated using the 
``other'' conversion factors. A State savings association must use an 
OTC derivative contract's effective notional principal amount (that is, 
its apparent or stated notional principal amount multiplied by any 
multiplier in the OTC derivative contract) rather than its apparent or 
stated notional principal amount in calculating PFE. PFE of the 
protection provider of a credit derivative is capped at the net present 
value of the amount of unpaid premiums.

                                           Table 4--Conversion Factor Matrix for OTC Derivative Contracts \4\
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                              Credit     Credit (non-
                                                                                Foreign    (investment-  investment-               Precious
                    Remaining maturity \5\                       Interest      exchange        grade        grade       Equity      metals       Other
                                                                   rate        rate and      reference    reference                 (except
                                                                                 gold      obligor) \6\    obligor)                  gold)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
One year or less.............................................         0.00          0.01           0.05         0.10        0.06        0.07        0.10
Over one to five years.......................................         0.005         0.05           0.05         0.10        0.08        0.07        0.12
Over five years..............................................         0.015         0.075          0.05         0.10        0.10        0.08        0.15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\4\ For an OTC derivative contract with multiple exchanges of principal, the conversion factor is multiplied by the number of remaining payments in the
  derivative contract.
\5\ For an OTC derivative contract that is structured such that on specified dates any outstanding exposure is settled and the terms are reset so that
  the market value of the contract is zero, the remaining maturity equals the time until the next reset date. For an interest rate derivative contract
  with a remaining maturity of greater than one year that meets these criteria, the minimum conversion factor is 0.005.
\6\ A State savings association must use the column labeled ``Credit (investment-grade reference obligor)'' for a credit derivative whose reference
  obligor has an outstanding unsecured long-term debt security without credit enhancement that has a long-term applicable external rating of at least
  investment grade. A State savings association must use the column labeled ``Credit (non-investment-grade reference obligor)'' for all other credit
  derivatives.


[[Page 1317]]

    (6) Multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a qualifying master 
netting agreement. Except as modified by paragraph (c)(7) of this 
section, the EAD for multiple OTC derivative contracts subject to a 
qualifying master netting agreement is equal to the sum of the net 
current credit exposure and the adjusted sum of the PFE exposure for all 
OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying master netting 
agreement.
    (i) Net current credit exposure. The net current credit exposure is 
the greater of:
    (A) The net sum of all positive and negative mark-to-market values 
of the individual OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying 
master netting agreement; or
    (B) zero.
    (ii) Adjusted sum of the PFE. The adjusted sum of the PFE, Anet, is 
calculated as Anet = (0.4  x  Agross) + (0.6  x  NGR  x  Agross), where:

(A) Agross = the gross PFE (that is, the sum of the PFE amounts (as 
          determined under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section) for 
          each individual OTC derivative contract subject to the 
          qualifying master netting agreement); and
(B) NGR = the net to gross ratio (that is, the ratio of the net current 
          credit exposure to the gross current credit exposure). In 
          calculating the NGR, the gross current credit exposure equals 
          the sum of the positive current credit exposures (as 
          determined under paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section) of all 
          individual OTC derivative contracts subject to the qualifying 
          master netting agreement.

    (7) Collateralized OTC derivative contracts. A State savings 
association may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of 
financial collateral that secures an OTC derivative contract or single-
product netting set of OTC derivatives by factoring the collateral into 
its LGD estimates for the contract or netting set. Alternatively, a 
State savings association may recognize the credit risk mitigation 
benefits of financial collateral that secures such a contract or netting 
set that is marked to market on a daily basis and subject to a daily 
margin maintenance requirement by estimating an unsecured LGD for the 
contract or netting set and adjusting the EAD calculated under paragraph 
(c)(5) or (c)(6) of this section using the collateral haircut approach 
in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. The State savings association must 
substitute the EAD calculated under paragraph (c)(5) or (c)(6) of this 
section for SE in the equation in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section 
and must use a ten-business-day minimum holding period (TM= 
10).
    (d) Internal models methodology. (1) With prior written approval 
from the FDIC, a State savings association may use the internal models 
methodology in this paragraph (d) to determine EAD for counterparty 
credit risk for OTC derivative contracts (collateralized or 
uncollateralized) and single-product netting sets thereof, for eligible 
margin loans and single-product netting sets thereof, and for repo-style 
transactions and single-product netting sets thereof. A State savings 
association that uses the internal models methodology for a particular 
transaction type (OTC derivative contracts, eligible margin loans, or 
repo-style transactions) must use the internal models methodology for 
all transactions of that transaction type. A State savings association 
may choose to use the internal models methodology for one or two of 
these three types of exposures and not the other types. A State savings 
association may also use the internal models methodology for OTC 
derivative contracts, eligible margin loans, and repo-style transactions 
subject to a qualifying cross-product netting agreement if:
    (i) The State savings association effectively integrates the risk 
mitigating effects of cross-product netting into its risk management and 
other information technology systems; and
    (ii) The State savings association obtains the prior written 
approval of the FDIC. A State savings association that uses the internal 
models methodology for a transaction type must receive approval from the 
FDIC to cease using the methodology for that transaction type or to make 
a material change to its internal model.
    (2) Under the internal models methodology, a State savings 
association uses an internal model to estimate the expected exposure 
(EE) for a netting set and then calculates EAD based on that EE.
    (i) The State savings association must use its internal model's 
probability distribution for changes in the market value of a netting 
set that are attributable to changes in market variables to determine 
EE.
    (ii) Under the internal models methodology, EAD = a  x  effective 
EPE, or, subject to FDIC approval as provided in paragraph (d)(7), a 
more conservative measure of EAD.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.004


[[Page 1318]]


(that is, effective EPE is the time-weighted average of effective EE 
where the weights are the proportion that an individual effective EE 
represents in a one-year time interval) where:

(1) Effective EEtk = max (Effective EEtk^1, 
          EEtk) (that is, for a specific datetk, 
          effective EE is the greater of EE at that date or the 
          effective EE at the previous date); and
(2)tk represents the kth future time period in the model and 
          there are n time periods represented in the model over the 
          first year; and
(B) a = 1.4 except as provided in paragraph (d)(6), or when the FDIC has 
          determined that the State savings association must set a 
          higher based on the State savings association's specific 
          characteristics of counterparty credit risk.

    (iii) A State savings association may include financial collateral 
currently posted by the counterparty as collateral (but may not include 
other forms of collateral) when calculating EE.
    (iv) If a State savings association hedges some or all of the 
counterparty credit risk associated with a netting set using an eligible 
credit derivative, the State savings association may take the reduction 
in exposure to the counterparty into account when estimating EE. If the 
State savings association recognizes this reduction in exposure to the 
counterparty in its estimate of EE, it must also use its internal model 
to estimate a separate EAD for the State savings association's exposure 
to the protection provider of the credit derivative.
    (3) To obtain the FDIC's approval to calculate the distributions of 
exposures upon which the EAD calculation is based, the State savings 
association must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the FDIC that it has 
been using for at least one year an internal model that broadly meets 
the following minimum standards, with which the State savings 
association must maintain compliance:
    (i) The model must have the systems capability to estimate the 
expected exposure to the counterparty on a daily basis (but is not 
expected to estimate or report expected exposure on a daily basis).
    (ii) The model must estimate expected exposure at enough future 
dates to reflect accurately all the future cash flows of contracts in 
the netting set.
    (iii) The model must account for the possible non-normality of the 
exposure distribution, where appropriate.
    (iv) The State savings association must measure, monitor, and 
control current counterparty exposure and the exposure to the 
counterparty over the whole life of all contracts in the netting set.
    (v) The State savings association must be able to measure and manage 
current exposures gross and net of collateral held, where appropriate. 
The State savings association must estimate expected exposures for OTC 
derivative contracts both with and without the effect of collateral 
agreements.
    (vi) The State savings association must have procedures to identify, 
monitor, and control specific wrong-way risk throughout the life of an 
exposure. Wrong-way risk in this context is the risk that future 
exposure to a counterparty will be high when the counterparty's 
probability of default is also high.
    (vii) The model must use current market data to compute current 
exposures. When estimating model parameters based on historical data, at 
least three years of historical data that cover a wide range of economic 
conditions must be used and must be updated quarterly or more frequently 
if market conditions warrant. The State savings association should 
consider using model parameters based on forward-looking measures, where 
appropriate.
    (viii) A State savings association must subject its internal model 
to an initial validation and annual model review process. The model 
review should consider whether the inputs and risk factors, as well as 
the model outputs, are appropriate.
    (4) Maturity. (i) If the remaining maturity of the exposure or the 
longest-dated contract in the netting set is greater than one year, the 
State savings association must set M for the exposure or netting set 
equal to the lower of five years or M(EPE), \7\ where:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \7\ Alternatively, a State savings association that uses an internal 
model to calculate a one-sided credit valuation adjustment may use the 
effective credit duration estimated by the model as M(EPE) in place of 
the formula in paragraph (d)(4).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.005


[[Page 1319]]


    (B) dfk is the risk-free discount factor for future time period tk; 
and
    (C) Dtk = tk^ tk^1.
    (ii) If the remaining maturity of the exposure or the longest-dated 
contract in the netting set is one year or less, the State savings 
association must set M for the exposure or netting set equal to one 
year, except as provided in paragraph (d)(7) of section 31 of this 
appendix.
    (5) Collateral agreements. A State savings association may capture 
the effect on EAD of a collateral agreement that requires receipt of 
collateral when exposure to the counterparty increases but may not 
capture the effect on EAD of a collateral agreement that requires 
receipt of collateral when counterparty credit quality deteriorates. For 
this purpose, a collateral agreement means a legal contract that 
specifies the time when, and circumstances under which, the counterparty 
is required to pledge collateral to the State savings association for a 
single financial contract or for all financial contracts in a netting 
set and confers upon the State savings association a perfected, first 
priority security interest (notwithstanding the prior security interest 
of any custodial agent), or the legal equivalent thereof, in the 
collateral posted by the counterparty under the agreement. This security 
interest must provide the State savings association with a right to 
close out the financial positions and liquidate the collateral upon an 
event of default of, or failure to perform by, the counterparty under 
the collateral agreement. A contract would not satisfy this requirement 
if the State savings association's exercise of rights under the 
agreement may be stayed or avoided under applicable law in the relevant 
jurisdictions. Two methods are available to capture the effect of a 
collateral agreement:
    (i) With prior written approval from the FDIC, a State savings 
association may include the effect of a collateral agreement within its 
internal model used to calculate EAD. The State savings association may 
set EAD equal to the expected exposure at the end of the margin period 
of risk. The margin period of risk means, with respect to a netting set 
subject to a collateral agreement, the time period from the most recent 
exchange of collateral with a counterparty until the next required 
exchange of collateral plus the period of time required to sell and 
realize the proceeds of the least liquid collateral that can be 
delivered under the terms of the collateral agreement and, where 
applicable, the period of time required to re-hedge the resulting market 
risk, upon the default of the counterparty. The minimum margin period of 
risk is five business days for repo-style transactions and ten business 
days for other transactions when liquid financial collateral is posted 
under a daily margin maintenance requirement. This period should be 
extended to cover any additional time between margin calls; any 
potential closeout difficulties; any delays in selling collateral, 
particularly if the collateral is illiquid; and any impediments to 
prompt re-hedging of any market risk.
    (ii) A State savings association that can model EPE without 
collateral agreements but cannot achieve the higher level of modeling 
sophistication to model EPE with collateral agreements can set effective 
EPE for a collateralized netting set equal to the lesser of:
    (A) The threshold, defined as the exposure amount at which the 
counterparty is required to post collateral under the collateral 
agreement, if the threshold is positive, plus an add-on that reflects 
the potential increase in exposure of the netting set over the margin 
period of risk. The add-on is computed as the expected increase in the 
netting set's exposure beginning from current exposure of zero over the 
margin period of risk. The margin period of risk must be at least five 
business days for netting sets consisting only of repo-style 
transactions subject to daily re-margining and daily marking-to-market, 
and ten business days for all other netting sets; or
    (B) Effective EPE without a collateral agreement.
    (6) Own estimate of alpha. With prior written approval of the FDIC, 
a State savings association may calculate alpha as the ratio of economic 
capital from a full simulation of counterparty exposure across 
counterparties that incorporates a joint simulation of market and credit 
risk factors (numerator) and economic capital based on EPE 
(denominator), subject to a floor of 1.2. For purposes of this 
calculation, economic capital is the unexpected losses for all 
counterparty credit risks measured at a 99.9 percent confidence level 
over a one-year horizon. To receive approval, the State savings 
association must meet the following minimum standards to the 
satisfaction of the FDIC:
    (i) The State savings association's own estimate of alpha must 
capture in the numerator the effects of:
    (A) The material sources of stochastic dependency of distributions 
of market values of transactions or portfolios of transactions across 
counterparties;
    (B) Volatilities and correlations of market risk factors used in the 
joint simulation, which must be related to the credit risk factor used 
in the simulation to reflect potential increases in volatility or 
correlation in an economic downturn, where appropriate; and
    (C) The granularity of exposures (that is, the effect of a 
concentration in the proportion of each counterparty's exposure that is 
driven by a particular risk factor).

[[Page 1320]]

    (ii) The State savings association must assess the potential model 
uncertainty in its estimates of alpha.
    (iii) The State savings association must calculate the numerator and 
denominator of alpha in a consistent fashion with respect to modeling 
methodology, parameter specifications, and portfolio composition.
    (iv) The State savings association must review and adjust as 
appropriate its estimates of the numerator and denominator of alpha on 
at least a quarterly basis and more frequently when the composition of 
the portfolio varies over time.
    (7) Other measures of counterparty exposure. With prior written 
approval of the FDIC, a State savings association may set EAD equal to a 
measure of counterparty credit risk exposure, such as peak EAD, that is 
more conservative than an alpha of 1.4 (or higher under the terms of 
paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(B) of this section) times EPE for every 
counterparty whose EAD will be measured under the alternative measure of 
counterparty exposure. The State savings association must demonstrate 
the conservatism of the measure of counterparty credit risk exposure 
used for EAD. For material portfolios of new OTC derivative products, 
the State savings association may assume that the current exposure 
methodology in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section meets the 
conservatism requirement of this paragraph for a period not to exceed 
180 days. For immaterial portfolios of OTC derivative contracts, the 
State savings association generally may assume that the current exposure 
methodology in paragraphs (c)(5) and (c)(6) of this section meets the 
conservatism requirement of this paragraph.

 Section 33. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: PD Substitution and LGD 
                          Adjustment Approaches

    (a) Scope. (1) This section applies to wholesale exposures for 
which:
    (i) Credit risk is fully covered by an eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative; or
    (ii) Credit risk is covered on a pro rata basis (that is, on a basis 
in which the State savings association and the protection provider share 
losses proportionately) by an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative.
    (2) Wholesale exposures on which there is a tranching of credit risk 
(reflecting at least two different levels of seniority) are 
securitization exposures subject to the securitization framework in part 
V.
    (3) A State savings association may elect to recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefits of an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative covering an exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section by using the PD substitution approach or the LGD adjustment 
approach in paragraph (c) of this section or, if the transaction 
qualifies, using the double default treatment in section 34 of this 
appendix. A State savings association's PD and LGD for the hedged 
exposure may not be lower than the PD and LGD floors described in 
paragraphs (d)(2) and (d)(3) of section 31 of this appendix.
    (4) If multiple eligible guarantees or eligible credit derivatives 
cover a single exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, a 
State savings association may treat the hedged exposure as multiple 
separate exposures each covered by a single eligible guarantee or 
eligible credit derivative and may calculate a separate risk-based 
capital requirement for each separate exposure as described in paragraph 
(a)(3) of this section.
    (5) If a single eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative 
covers multiple hedged wholesale exposures described in paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section, a State savings association must treat each hedged 
exposure as covered by a separate eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative and must calculate a separate risk-based capital requirement 
for each exposure as described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (6) A State savings association must use the same risk parameters 
for calculating ECL as it uses for calculating the risk-based capital 
requirement for the exposure.
    (b) Rules of recognition. (1) A State savings association may only 
recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of eligible guarantees and 
eligible credit derivatives.
    (2) A State savings association may only recognize the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of an eligible credit derivative to hedge an 
exposure that is different from the credit derivative's reference 
exposure used for determining the derivative's cash settlement value, 
deliverable obligation, or occurrence of a credit event if:
    (i) The reference exposure ranks pari passu (that is, equally) with 
or is junior to the hedged exposure; and
    (ii) The reference exposure and the hedged exposure are exposures to 
the same legal entity, and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-
acceleration clauses are in place to assure payments under the credit 
derivative are triggered when the obligor fails to pay under the terms 
of the hedged exposure.
    (c) Risk parameters for hedged exposures--(1) PD substitution 
approach--(i) Full coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is greater than or equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure, a 
State savings association may recognize the guarantee or credit 
derivative in determining the State savings association's risk-based 
capital requirement for the hedged exposure by substituting the PD 
associated with the rating grade of the protection provider for the PD 
associated with the rating grade of the obligor in the risk-based 
capital formula applicable to the

[[Page 1321]]

guarantee or credit derivative in Table 2 and using the appropriate LGD 
as described in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section. If the State 
savings association determines that full substitution of the protection 
provider's PD leads to an inappropriate degree of risk mitigation, the 
State savings association may substitute a higher PD than that of the 
protection provider.
    (ii) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged exposure, the State 
savings association must treat the hedged exposure as two separate 
exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefit of the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (A) The State savings association must calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for the protected exposure under section 31 of this 
appendix, where PD is the protection provider's PD, LGD is determined 
under paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section, and EAD is P. If the State 
savings association determines that full substitution leads to an 
inappropriate degree of risk mitigation, the State savings association 
may use a higher PD than that of the protection provider.
    (B) The State savings association must calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for the unprotected exposure under section 31 of 
this appendix, where PD is the obligor's PD, LGD is the hedged 
exposure's LGD (not adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit 
derivative), and EAD is the EAD of the original hedged exposure minus P.
    (C) The treatment in this paragraph (c)(1)(ii) is applicable when 
the credit risk of a wholesale exposure is covered on a partial pro rata 
basis or when an adjustment is made to the effective notional amount of 
the guarantee or credit derivative under paragraph (d), (e), or (f) of 
this section.
    (iii) LGD of hedged exposures. The LGD of a hedged exposure under 
the PD substitution approach is equal to:
    (A) The lower of the LGD of the hedged exposure (not adjusted to 
reflect the guarantee or credit derivative) and the LGD of the guarantee 
or credit derivative, if the guarantee or credit derivative provides the 
State savings association with the option to receive immediate payout 
upon triggering the protection; or
    (B) The LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee 
or credit derivative does not provide the State savings association with 
the option to receive immediate payout upon triggering the protection.
    (2) LGD adjustment approach--(i) Full coverage. If an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative meets the conditions in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section and the protection amount (P) of 
the guarantee or credit derivative is greater than or equal to the EAD 
of the hedged exposure, the State savings association's risk-based 
capital requirement for the hedged exposure is the greater of:
    (A) The risk-based capital requirement for the exposure as 
calculated under section 31 of this appendix, with the LGD of the 
exposure adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative; or
    (B) The risk-based capital requirement for a direct exposure to the 
protection provider as calculated under section 31 of this appendix, 
using the PD for the protection provider, the LGD for the guarantee or 
credit derivative, and an EAD equal to the EAD of the hedged exposure.
    (ii) Partial coverage. If an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative meets the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section and the protection amount (P) of the guarantee or credit 
derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged exposure, the State 
savings association must treat the hedged exposure as two separate 
exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to recognize the credit 
risk mitigation benefit of the guarantee or credit derivative.
    (A) The State savings association's risk-based capital requirement 
for the protected exposure would be the greater of:
    (1) The risk-based capital requirement for the protected exposure as 
calculated under section 31 of this appendix, with the LGD of the 
exposure adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative and EAD 
set equal to P; or
    (2) The risk-based capital requirement for a direct exposure to the 
guarantor as calculated under section 31 of this appendix, using the PD 
for the protection provider, the LGD for the guarantee or credit 
derivative, and an EAD set equal to P.
    (B) The State savings association must calculate its risk-based 
capital requirement for the unprotected exposure under section 31 of 
this appendix, where PD is the obligor's PD, LGD is the hedged 
exposure's LGD (not adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit 
derivative), and EAD is the EAD of the original hedged exposure minus P.
    (3) M of hedged exposures. The M of the hedged exposure is the same 
as the M of the exposure if it were unhedged.
    (d) Maturity mismatch. (1) A State savings association that 
recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative in 
determining its risk-based capital requirement for a hedged exposure 
must adjust the effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant to 
reflect any maturity mismatch between the hedged exposure and the credit 
risk mitigant.
    (2) A maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of a 
credit risk mitigant is less than that of the hedged exposure(s).

[[Page 1322]]

    (3) The residual maturity of a hedged exposure is the longest 
possible remaining time before the obligor is scheduled to fulfill its 
obligation on the exposure. If a credit risk mitigant has embedded 
options that may reduce its term, the State savings association 
(protection purchaser) must use the shortest possible residual maturity 
for the credit risk mitigant. If a call is at the discretion of the 
protection provider, the residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant 
is at the first call date. If the call is at the discretion of the State 
savings association (protection purchaser), but the terms of the 
arrangement at origination of the credit risk mitigant contain a 
positive incentive for the State savings association to call the 
transaction before contractual maturity, the remaining time to the first 
call date is the residual maturity of the credit risk mitigant. For 
example, where there is a step-up in cost in conjunction with a call 
feature or where the effective cost of protection increases over time 
even if credit quality remains the same or improves, the residual 
maturity of the credit risk mitigant will be the remaining time to the 
first call.
    (4) A credit risk mitigant with a maturity mismatch may be 
recognized only if its original maturity is greater than or equal to one 
year and its residual maturity is greater than three months.
    (5) When a maturity mismatch exists, the State savings association 
must apply the following adjustment to the effective notional amount of 
the credit risk mitigant: Pm = E  x  (t^0.25)/(T^0.25), where:
    (i) Pm = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for maturity mismatch;
    (ii) E = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant;
    (iii) t = the lesser of T or the residual maturity of the credit 
risk mitigant, expressed in years; and
    (iv) T = the lesser of five or the residual maturity of the hedged 
exposure, expressed in years.
    (e) Credit derivatives without restructuring as a credit event. If a 
State savings association recognizes an eligible credit derivative that 
does not include as a credit event a restructuring of the hedged 
exposure involving forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest, 
or fees that results in a credit loss event (that is, a charge-off, 
specific provision, or other similar debit to the profit and loss 
account), the State savings association must apply the following 
adjustment to the effective notional amount of the credit derivative: Pr 
= Pm  x  0.60, where:
    (1) Pr = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for lack of restructuring event (and maturity mismatch, if 
applicable); and
    (2) Pm = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant 
adjusted for maturity mismatch (if applicable).
    (f) Currency mismatch. (1) If a State savings association recognizes 
an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative that is denominated 
in a currency different from that in which the hedged exposure is 
denominated, the State savings association must apply the following 
formula to the effective notional amount of the guarantee or credit 
derivative: Pc = Pr  x  (1^HFX), where:
    (i) Pc = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant, 
adjusted for currency mismatch (and maturity mismatch and lack of 
restructuring event, if applicable);
    (ii) Pr = effective notional amount of the credit risk mitigant 
(adjusted for maturity mismatch and lack of restructuring event, if 
applicable); and
    (iii) HFX= haircut appropriate for the currency mismatch 
between the credit risk mitigant and the hedged exposure.
    (2) A State savings association must set HFX equal to 8 
percent unless it qualifies for the use of and uses its own internal 
estimates of foreign exchange volatility based on a ten-business-day 
holding period and daily marking-to-market and remargining. A State 
savings association qualifies for the use of its own internal estimates 
of foreign exchange volatility if it qualifies for:
    (i) The own-estimates haircuts in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of section 
32 of this appendix;
    (ii) The simple VaR methodology in paragraph (b)(3) of section 32 of 
this appendix; or
    (iii) The internal models methodology in paragraph (d) of section 32 
of this appendix.
    (3) A State savings association must adjust HFX 
calculated in paragraph (f)(2) of this section upward if the State 
savings association revalues the guarantee or credit derivative less 
frequently than once every ten business days using the square root of 
time formula provided in paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(A)(2) of section 32 of 
this appendix.

 Section 34. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives: Double Default Treatment

    (a) Eligibility and operational criteria for double default 
treatment. A State savings association may recognize the credit risk 
mitigation benefits of a guarantee or credit derivative covering an 
exposure described in paragraph (a)(1) of section 33 of this appendix by 
applying the double default treatment in this section if all the 
following criteria are satisfied.
    (1) The hedged exposure is fully covered or covered on a pro rata 
basis by:
    (i) An eligible guarantee issued by an eligible double default 
guarantor; or
    (ii) An eligible credit derivative that meets the requirements of 
paragraph (b)(2) of section 33 of this appendix and is issued by an 
eligible double default guarantor.
    (2) The guarantee or credit derivative is:

[[Page 1323]]

    (i) An uncollateralized guarantee or uncollateralized credit 
derivative (for example, a credit default swap) that provides protection 
with respect to a single reference obligor; or
    (ii) An nth-to-default credit derivative (subject to the 
requirements of paragraph (m) of section 42 of this appendix).
    (3) The hedged exposure is a wholesale exposure (other than a 
sovereign exposure).
    (4) The obligor of the hedged exposure is not:
    (i) An eligible double default guarantor or an affiliate of an 
eligible double default guarantor; or
    (ii) An affiliate of the guarantor.
    (5) The State savings association does not recognize any credit risk 
mitigation benefits of the guarantee or credit derivative for the hedged 
exposure other than through application of the double default treatment 
as provided in this section.
    (6) The State savings association has implemented a process (which 
has received the prior, written approval of the FDIC) to detect 
excessive correlation between the creditworthiness of the obligor of the 
hedged exposure and the protection provider. If excessive correlation is 
present, the State savings association may not use the double default 
treatment for the hedged exposure.
    (b) Full coverage. If the transaction meets the criteria in 
paragraph (a) of this section and the protection amount (P) of the 
guarantee or credit derivative is at least equal to the EAD of the 
hedged exposure, the State savings association may determine its risk-
weighted asset amount for the hedged exposure under paragraph (e) of 
this section.
    (c) Partial coverage. If the transaction meets the criteria in 
paragraph (a) of this section and the protection amount (P) of the 
guarantee or credit derivative is less than the EAD of the hedged 
exposure, the State savings association must treat the hedged exposure 
as two separate exposures (protected and unprotected) in order to 
recognize double default treatment on the protected portion of the 
exposure.
    (1) For the protected exposure, the State savings association must 
set EAD equal to P and calculate its risk-weighted asset amount as 
provided in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (2) For the unprotected exposure, the State savings association must 
set EAD equal to the EAD of the original exposure minus P and then 
calculate its risk-weighted asset amount as provided in section 31 of 
this appendix.
    (d) Mismatches. For any hedged exposure to which a State savings 
association applies double default treatment, the State savings 
association must make applicable adjustments to the protection amount as 
required in paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) of section 33 of this appendix.
    (e) The double default dollar risk-based capital requirement. The 
dollar risk-based capital requirement for a hedged exposure to which a 
State savings association has applied double default treatment is 
KDD multiplied by the EAD of the exposure. KDD is 
calculated according to the following formula: KDD= 
Ko  x  (0.15 + 160  x  PDg),

Where:

(1)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.006

(2) PDg = PD of the protection provider.
(3) PDo = PD of the obligor of the hedged exposure.
(4) LGDg = (i) The lower of the LGD of the hedged exposure 
          (not adjusted to reflect the guarantee or credit derivative) 
          and the LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the 
          guarantee or credit derivative provides the State savings 
          association with the option to receive immediate payout on 
          triggering the protection; or
(ii) The LGD of the guarantee or credit derivative, if the guarantee or 
          credit derivative does not provide the State savings 
          association with the option to receive immediate payout on 
          triggering the protection.
(5) rOS(asset value correlation of the obligor) is calculated 
          according to the appropriate formula for (R) provided in Table 
          2 in section 31 of this appendix, with PD equal to 
          PDo.
(6) b (maturity adjustment coefficient) is calculated according to the 
          formula for b provided in Table 2 in section 31 of this 
          appendix, with PD equal to the lesser of PDo and 
          PDg.
(7) M (maturity) is the effective maturity of the guarantee or credit 
          derivative, which may not be less than one year or greater 
          than five years.

  Section 35. Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Unsettled Transactions

    (a) Definitions. For purposes of this section:

[[Page 1324]]

    (1) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) transaction means a securities or 
commodities transaction in which the buyer is obligated to make payment 
only if the seller has made delivery of the securities or commodities 
and the seller is obligated to deliver the securities or commodities 
only if the buyer has made payment.
    (2) Payment-versus-payment (PvP) transaction means a foreign 
exchange transaction in which each counterparty is obligated to make a 
final transfer of one or more currencies only if the other counterparty 
has made a final transfer of one or more currencies.
    (3) Normal settlement period. A transaction has a normal settlement 
period if the contractual settlement period for the transaction is equal 
to or less than the market standard for the instrument underlying the 
transaction and equal to or less than five business days.
    (4) Positive current exposure. The positive current exposure of a 
State savings association for a transaction is the difference between 
the transaction value at the agreed settlement price and the current 
market price of the transaction, if the difference results in a credit 
exposure of the State savings association to the counterparty.
    (b) Scope. This section applies to all transactions involving 
securities, foreign exchange instruments, and commodities that have a 
risk of delayed settlement or delivery. This section does not apply to:
    (1) Transactions accepted by a qualifying central counterparty that 
are subject to daily marking-to-market and daily receipt and payment of 
variation margin;
    (2) Repo-style transactions, including unsettled repo-style 
transactions (which are addressed in sections 31 and 32 of this 
appendix);
    (3) One-way cash payments on OTC derivative contracts (which are 
addressed in sections 31 and 32 of this appendix); or
    (4) Transactions with a contractual settlement period that is longer 
than the normal settlement period (which are treated as OTC derivative 
contracts and addressed in sections 31 and 32 of this appendix).
    (c) System-wide failures. In the case of a system-wide failure of a 
settlement or clearing system, the FDIC may waive risk-based capital 
requirements for unsettled and failed transactions until the situation 
is rectified.
    (d) Delivery-versus-payment (DvP) and payment-versus-payment (PvP) 
transactions. A State savings association must hold risk-based capital 
against any DvP or PvP transaction with a normal settlement period if 
the State savings association's counterparty has not made delivery or 
payment within five business days after the settlement date. The State 
savings association must determine its risk-weighted asset amount for 
such a transaction by multiplying the positive current exposure of the 
transaction for the State savings association by the appropriate risk 
weight in Table 5.

      Table 5--Risk Weights for Unsettled DvP and PvP Transactions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Risk weight to
                                                          be applied to
 Number of business days after contractual settlement   positive current
                         date                               exposure
                                                            (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
From 5 to 15..........................................               100
From 16 to 30.........................................               625
From 31 to 45.........................................             937.5
46 or more............................................             1,250
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Non-DvP/non-PvP (non-delivery-versus-payment/non-payment-versus-
payment) transactions. (1) A State savings association must hold risk-
based capital against any non-DvP/non-PvP transaction with a normal 
settlement period if the State savings association has delivered cash, 
securities, commodities, or currencies to its counterparty but has not 
received its corresponding deliverables by the end of the same business 
day. The State savings association must continue to hold risk-based 
capital against the transaction until the State savings association has 
received its corresponding deliverables.
    (2) From the business day after the State savings association has 
made its delivery until five business days after the counterparty 
delivery is due, the State savings association must calculate its risk-
based capital requirement for the transaction by treating the current 
market value of the deliverables owed to the State savings association 
as a wholesale exposure.
    (i) A State savings association may assign an obligor rating to a 
counterparty for which it is not otherwise required under this appendix 
to assign an obligor rating on the basis of the applicable external 
rating of any outstanding unsecured long-term debt security without 
credit enhancement issued by the counterparty.
    (ii) A State savings association may use a 45 percent LGD for the 
transaction rather than estimating LGD for the transaction provided the 
State savings association uses the 45 percent LGD for all transactions 
described in paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) of this section.
    (iii) A State savings association may use a 100 percent risk weight 
for the transaction provided the State savings association uses this 
risk weight for all transactions described in paragraphs (e)(1) and 
(e)(2) of this section.
    (3) If the State savings association has not received its 
deliverables by the fifth business day after the counterparty delivery 
was due, the State savings association must deduct the current market 
value of the deliverables owed to the State savings association 50 
percent from tier 1 capital and 50 percent from tier 2 capital.

[[Page 1325]]

    (f) Total risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions. Total 
risk-weighted assets for unsettled transactions is the sum of the risk-
weighted asset amounts of all DvP, PvP, and non-DvP/non-PvP 
transactions.

        Part V. Risk-Weighted Assets for Securitization Exposures

  Section 41. Operational Criteria for Recognizing the Transfer of Risk

    (a) Operational criteria for traditional securitizations. A State 
savings association that transfers exposures it has originated or 
purchased to a securitization SPE or other third party in connection 
with a traditional securitization may exclude the exposures from the 
calculation of its risk-weighted assets only if each of the conditions 
in this paragraph (a) is satisfied. A State savings association that 
meets these conditions must hold risk-based capital against any 
securitization exposures it retains in connection with the 
securitization. A State savings association that fails to meet these 
conditions must hold risk-based capital against the transferred 
exposures as if they had not been securitized and must deduct from tier 
1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from the transaction. The 
conditions are:
    (1) The transfer is considered a sale under GAAP;
    (2) The State savings association has transferred to third parties 
credit risk associated with the underlying exposures; and
    (3) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls.
    (b) Operational criteria for synthetic securitizations. For 
synthetic securitizations, a State savings association may recognize for 
risk-based capital purposes the use of a credit risk mitigant to hedge 
underlying exposures only if each of the conditions in this paragraph 
(b) is satisfied. A State savings association that fails to meet these 
conditions must hold risk-based capital against the underlying exposures 
as if they had not been synthetically securitized. The conditions are:
    (1) The credit risk mitigant is financial collateral, an eligible 
credit derivative from an eligible securitization guarantor or an 
eligible guarantee from an eligible securitization guarantor;
    (2) The State savings association transfers credit risk associated 
with the underlying exposures to third parties, and the terms and 
conditions in the credit risk mitigants employed do not include 
provisions that:
    (i) Allow for the termination of the credit protection due to 
deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures;
    (ii) Require the State savings association to alter or replace the 
underlying exposures to improve the credit quality of the pool of 
underlying exposures;
    (iii) Increase the State savings association's cost of credit 
protection in response to deterioration in the credit quality of the 
underlying exposures;
    (iv) Increase the yield payable to parties other than the State 
savings association in response to a deterioration in the credit quality 
of the underlying exposures; or
    (v) Provide for increases in a retained first loss position or 
credit enhancement provided by the State savings association after the 
inception of the securitization;
    (3) The State savings association obtains a well-reasoned opinion 
from legal counsel that confirms the enforceability of the credit risk 
mitigant in all relevant jurisdictions; and
    (4) Any clean-up calls relating to the securitization are eligible 
clean-up calls.

 Section 42. Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Securitization Exposures

    (a) Hierarchy of approaches. Except as provided elsewhere in this 
section:
    (1) A State savings association must deduct from tier 1 capital any 
after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from a securitization and must deduct 
from total capital in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section the 
portion of any CEIO that does not constitute gain-on-sale.
    (2) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section and qualifies for the Ratings-Based 
Approach in section 43 of this appendix, a State savings association 
must apply the Ratings-Based Approach to the exposure.
    (3) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section and does not qualify for the Ratings-
Based Approach, the State savings association may either apply the 
Internal Assessment Approach in section 44 of this appendix to the 
exposure (if the State savings association, the exposure, and the 
relevant ABCP program qualify for the Internal Assessment Approach) or 
the Supervisory Formula Approach in section 45 of this appendix to the 
exposure (if the State savings association and the exposure qualify for 
the Supervisory Formula Approach).
    (4) If a securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section and does not qualify for the Ratings-
Based Approach, the Internal Assessment Approach, or the Supervisory 
Formula Approach, the State savings association must deduct the exposure 
from total capital in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
    (5) If a securitization exposure is an OTC derivative contract 
(other than a credit derivative) that has a first priority claim on the 
cash flows from the underlying exposures (notwithstanding amounts due 
under interest rate or currency derivative contracts, fees due, or other 
similar payments), with

[[Page 1326]]

approval of the FDIC, a State savings association may choose to set the 
risk-weighted asset amount of the exposure equal to the amount of the 
exposure as determined in paragraph (e) of this section rather than 
apply the hierarchy of approaches described in paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(4) of this section.
    (b) Total risk-weighted assets for securitization exposures. A State 
savings association's total risk-weighted assets for securitization 
exposures is equal to the sum of its risk-weighted assets calculated 
using the Ratings-Based Approach in section 43 of this appendix, the 
Internal Assessment Approach in section 44 of this appendix, and the 
Supervisory Formula Approach in section 45 of this appendix, and its 
risk-weighted assets amount for early amortization provisions calculated 
in section 47 of this appendix.
    (c) Deductions. (1) If a State savings association must deduct a 
securitization exposure from total capital, the State savings 
association must take the deduction 50 percent from tier 1 capital and 
50 percent from tier 2 capital. If the amount deductible from tier 2 
capital exceeds the State savings association's tier 2 capital, the 
State savings association must deduct the excess from tier 1 capital.
    (2) A State savings association may calculate any deduction from 
tier 1 capital and tier 2 capital for a securitization exposure net of 
any deferred tax liabilities associated with the securitization 
exposure.
    (d) Maximum risk-based capital requirement. Regardless of any other 
provisions of this subpart, unless one or more underlying exposures does 
not meet the definition of a wholesale, retail, securitization, or 
equity exposure, the total risk-based capital requirement for all 
securitization exposures held by a single State savings association 
associated with a single securitization (including any risk-based 
capital requirements that relate to an early amortization provision of 
the securitization but excluding any risk-based capital requirements 
that relate to the State savings association's gain-on-sale or CEIOs 
associated with the securitization) may not exceed the sum of:
    (1) The State savings association's total risk-based capital 
requirement for the underlying exposures as if the State savings 
association directly held the underlying exposures; and
    (2) The total ECL of the underlying exposures.
    (e) Amount of a securitization exposure. (1) The amount of an on-
balance sheet securitization exposure that is not a repo-style 
transaction, eligible margin loan, or OTC derivative contract (other 
than a credit derivative) is:
    (i) The State savings association's carrying value minus any 
unrealized gains and plus any unrealized losses on the exposure, if the 
exposure is a security classified as available-for-sale; or
    (ii) The State savings association's carrying value, if the exposure 
is not a security classified as available-for-sale.
    (2) The amount of an off-balance sheet securitization exposure that 
is not an OTC derivative contract (other than a credit derivative) is 
the notional amount of the exposure. For an off-balance-sheet 
securitization exposure to an ABCP program, such as a liquidity 
facility, the notional amount may be reduced to the maximum potential 
amount that the State savings association could be required to fund 
given the ABCP program's current underlying assets (calculated without 
regard to the current credit quality of those assets).
    (3) The amount of a securitization exposure that is a repo-style 
transaction, eligible margin loan, or OTC derivative contract (other 
than a credit derivative) is the EAD of the exposure as calculated in 
section 32 of this appendix.
    (f) Overlapping exposures. If a State savings association has 
multiple securitization exposures that provide duplicative coverage of 
the underlying exposures of a securitization (such as when a State 
savings association provides a program-wide credit enhancement and 
multiple pool-specific liquidity facilities to an ABCP program), the 
State savings association is not required to hold duplicative risk-based 
capital against the overlapping position. Instead, the State savings 
association may apply to the overlapping position the applicable risk-
based capital treatment that results in the highest risk-based capital 
requirement.
    (g) Securitizations of non-IRB exposures. If a State savings 
association has a securitization exposure where any underlying exposure 
is not a wholesale exposure, retail exposure, securitization exposure, 
or equity exposure, the State savings association must:
    (1) If the State savings association is an originating State savings 
association, deduct from tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale 
resulting from the securitization and deduct from total capital in 
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section the portion of any CEIO 
that does not constitute gain-on-sale;
    (2) If the securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (g)(1), apply the RBA in section 43 of this appendix to the 
securitization exposure if the exposure qualifies for the RBA;
    (3) If the securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (g)(1) and does not qualify for the RBA, apply the IAA in 
section 44 of this appendix to the exposure (if the State savings 
association, the exposure, and the relevant ABCP program qualify for the 
IAA); and
    (4) If the securitization exposure does not require deduction under 
paragraph (g)(1) and

[[Page 1327]]

does not qualify for the RBA or the IAA, deduct the exposure from total 
capital in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
    (h) Implicit support. If a State savings association provides 
support to a securitization in excess of the State savings association's 
contractual obligation to provide credit support to the securitization 
(implicit support):
    (1) The State savings association must hold regulatory capital 
against all of the underlying exposures associated with the 
securitization as if the exposures had not been securitized and must 
deduct from tier 1 capital any after-tax gain-on-sale resulting from the 
securitization; and
    (2) The State savings association must disclose publicly:
    (i) That it has provided implicit support to the securitization; and
    (ii) The regulatory capital impact to the State savings association 
of providing such implicit support.
    (i) Eligible servicer cash advance facilities. Regardless of any 
other provisions of this part, a State savings association is not 
required to hold risk-based capital against the undrawn portion of an 
eligible servicer cash advance facility.
    (j) Interest-only mortgage-backed securities. Regardless of any 
other provisions of this part, the risk weight for a non-credit-
enhancing interest-only mortgage-backed security may not be less than 
100 percent.
    (k) Small-business loans and leases on personal property transferred 
with recourse. (1) Regardless of any other provisions of this part, a 
State savings association that has transferred small-business loans and 
leases on personal property (small-business obligations) with recourse 
must include in risk-weighted assets only the contractual amount of 
retained recourse if all the following conditions are met:
    (i) The transaction is a sale under GAAP.
    (ii) The State savings association establishes and maintains, 
pursuant to GAAP, a non-capital reserve sufficient to meet the State 
savings association's reasonably estimated liability under the recourse 
arrangement.
    (iii) The loans and leases are to businesses that meet the criteria 
for a small-business concern established by the Small Business 
Administration under section 3(a) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 
632).
    (iv) The State savings association is well capitalized, as defined 
in the FDIC's prompt corrective action regulation at Subpart Y of Part 
390. For purposes of determining whether a State savings association is 
well capitalized for purposes of this paragraph, the State savings 
association's capital ratios must be calculated without regard to the 
capital treatment for transfers of small-business obligations with 
recourse specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section.
    (2) The total outstanding amount of recourse retained by a State 
savings association on transfers of small-business obligations receiving 
the capital treatment specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section 
cannot exceed 15 percent of the State savings association's total 
qualifying capital.
    (3) If a State savings association ceases to be well capitalized or 
exceeds the 15 percent capital limitation, the preferential capital 
treatment specified in paragraph (k)(1) of this section will continue to 
apply to any transfers of small-business obligations with recourse that 
occurred during the time that the State savings association was well 
capitalized and did not exceed the capital limit.
    (4) The risk-based capital ratios of the State savings association 
must be calculated without regard to the capital treatment for transfers 
of small-business obligations with recourse specified in paragraph 
(k)(1) of this section as provided in 12 CFR 390.466(b)(5)(v).
    (l) Nth-to-default credit derivatives--(1) First-to-default credit 
derivatives--(i) Protection purchaser. A State savings association that 
obtains credit protection on a group of underlying exposures through a 
first-to-default credit derivative must determine its risk-based capital 
requirement for the underlying exposures as if the State savings 
association synthetically securitized the underlying exposure with the 
lowest risk-based capital requirement and had obtained no credit risk 
mitigant on the other underlying exposures.
    (ii) Protection provider. A State savings association that provides 
credit protection on a group of underlying exposures through a first-to-
default credit derivative must determine its risk-weighted asset amount 
for the derivative by applying the RBA in section 43 of this appendix 
(if the derivative qualifies for the RBA) or, if the derivative does not 
qualify for the RBA, by setting its risk-weighted asset amount for the 
derivative equal to the product of:
    (A) The protection amount of the derivative;
    (B) 12.5; and
    (C) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements of the individual 
underlying exposures, up to a maximum of 100 percent.
    (2) Second-or-subsequent-to-default credit derivatives--(i) 
Protection purchaser. (A) A State savings association that obtains 
credit protection on a group of underlying exposures through a nth-to-
default credit derivative (other than a first-to-default credit 
derivative) may recognize the credit risk mitigation benefits of the 
derivative only if:
    (1) The State savings association also has obtained credit 
protection on the same underlying exposures in the form of first-
through-(n-1)-to-default credit derivatives; or
    (2) If n-1 of the underlying exposures have already defaulted.

[[Page 1328]]

    (B) If a State savings association satisfies the requirements of 
paragraph (m)(2)(i)(A) of this section, the State savings association 
must determine its risk-based capital requirement for the underlying 
exposures as if the State savings association had only synthetically 
securitized the underlying exposure with the nth-lowest risk-based 
capital requirement and had obtained no credit risk mitigant on the 
other underlying exposures.
    (ii) Protection provider. A State savings association that provides 
credit protection on a group of underlying exposures through a nth-to-
default credit derivative (other than a first-to-default credit 
derivative) must determine its risk-weighted asset amount for the 
derivative by applying the RBA in section 43 of this appendix (if the 
derivative qualifies for the RBA) or, if the derivative does not qualify 
for the RBA, by setting its risk-weighted asset amount for the 
derivative equal to the product of:
    (A) The protection amount of the derivative;
    (B) 12.5; and
    (C) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements of the individual 
underlying exposures (excluding the n-1 underlying exposures with the 
lowest risk-based capital requirements), up to a maximum of 100 percent.

                Section 43. Ratings-Based Approach (RBA)

    (a) Eligibility requirements for use of the RBA--(1) Originating 
State savings association. An originating State savings association must 
use the RBA to calculate its risk-based capital requirement for a 
securitization exposure if the exposure has two or more external ratings 
or inferred ratings (and may not use the RBA if the exposure has fewer 
than two external ratings or inferred ratings).
    (2) Investing State savings association. An investing State savings 
association must use the RBA to calculate its risk-based capital 
requirement for a securitization exposure if the exposure has one or 
more external or inferred ratings (and may not use the RBA if the 
exposure has no external or inferred rating).
    (b) Ratings-based approach. (1) A State savings association must 
determine the risk-weighted asset amount for a securitization exposure 
by multiplying the amount of the exposure (as defined in paragraph (e) 
of section 42 of this appendix) by the appropriate risk weight provided 
in Table 6 and Table 7.
    (2) A State savings association must apply the risk weights in Table 
6 when the securitization exposure's applicable external or applicable 
inferred rating represents a long-term credit rating, and must apply the 
risk weights in Table 7 when the securitization exposure's applicable 
external or applicable inferred rating represents a short-term credit 
rating.
    (i) A State savings association must apply the risk weights in 
column 1 of Table 6 or Table 7 to the securitization exposure if:
    (A) N (as calculated under paragraph (e)(6) of section 45 of this 
appendix) is six or more (for purposes of this section only, if the 
notional number of underlying exposures is 25 or more or if all of the 
underlying exposures are retail exposures, a State savings association 
may assume that N is six or more unless the State savings association 
knows or has reason to know that N is less than six); and
    (B) The securitization exposure is a senior securitization exposure.
    (ii) A State savings association must apply the risk weights in 
column 3 of Table 6 or Table 7 to the securitization exposure if N is 
less than six, regardless of the seniority of the securitization 
exposure.
    (iii) Otherwise, a State savings association must apply the risk 
weights in column 2 of Table 6 or Table 7.

                         Table 6--Long-Term Credit Rating Risk Weights Under RBA and IAA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Column 1           Column 2           Column 3
                                                        --------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Risk weights for   Risk weights for
  Applicable external or inferred rating (Illustrative         senior           non-senior      Risk weights for
                    rating example)                        securitization     securitization     securitization
                                                          exposures backed   exposures backed   exposures backed
                                                         by granular pools  by granular pools   by non-granular
                                                             (percent)          (percent)       pools (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highest investment grade (for example, AAA)............                 7                 12                 20
Second highest investment grade (for example, AA)......                 8                 15                 25
Third-highest investment grade--positive designation                   10                 18                 35
 (for example, A + )...................................
Third-highest investment grade (for example, A)........                12                 20
Third-highest investment grade--negative designation                   20                 35
 (for example, A^).....................................
                                                        --------------------------------------------------------
Lowest investment grade--positive designation (for                     35                 50                 50
 example, BBB + )......................................
Lowest investment grade (for example, BBB).............                60                 75                 75
                                                        --------------------------------------------------------
Lowest investment grade--negative designation (for
 example, BBB^)........................................                            100

[[Page 1329]]

 
One category below investment grade--positive
 designation (for example, BB + )......................                            250
One category below investment grade (for example, BB)..                            425
One category below investment grade--negative
 designation (for example, BB^)........................                            650
More than one category below investment grade..........         Deduction from tier 1 and tier 2 capital.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                        Table 7--Short-Term Credit Rating Risk Weights Under RBA and IAA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Column 1           Column 2           Column 3
                                                        --------------------------------------------------------
                                                          Risk weights for   Risk weights for
  Applicable external or inferred rating (Illustrative         senior           non-senior      Risk weights for
                    rating example)                        securitization     securitization     securitization
                                                          exposures backed   exposures backed   exposures backed
                                                         by granular pools  by granular pools   by non-granular
                                                             (percent)          (percent)       pools (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Highest investment grade (for example, A1).............                 7                 12                 20
Second highest investment grade (for example, A2)......                12                 20                 35
Third highest investment grade (for example, A3).......                60                 75                 75
                                                        --------------------------------------------------------
All other ratings......................................         Deduction from tier 1 and tier 2 capital.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

             Section 44. Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)

    (a) Eligibility requirements. A State savings association may apply 
the IAA to calculate the risk-weighted asset amount for a securitization 
exposure that the State savings association has to an ABCP program (such 
as a liquidity facility or credit enhancement) if the State savings 
association, the ABCP program, and the exposure qualify for use of the 
IAA.
    (1) State savings association qualification criteria. A State 
savings association qualifies for use of the IAA if the State savings 
association has received the prior written approval of the FDIC. To 
receive such approval, the State savings association must demonstrate to 
the FDIC's satisfaction that the State savings association's internal 
assessment process meets the following criteria:
    (i) The State savings association's internal credit assessments of 
securitization exposures must be based on publicly available rating 
criteria used by an NRSRO.
    (ii) The State savings association's internal credit assessments of 
securitization exposures used for risk-based capital purposes must be 
consistent with those used in the State savings association's internal 
risk management process, management information reporting systems, and 
capital adequacy assessment process.
    (iii) The State savings association's internal credit assessment 
process must have sufficient granularity to identify gradations of risk. 
Each of the State savings association's internal credit assessment 
categories must correspond to an external rating of an NRSRO.
    (iv) The State savings association's internal credit assessment 
process, particularly the stress test factors for determining credit 
enhancement requirements, must be at least as conservative as the most 
conservative of the publicly available rating criteria of the NRSROs 
that have provided external ratings to the commercial paper issued by 
the ABCP program.
    (A) Where the commercial paper issued by an ABCP program has an 
external rating from two or more NRSROs and the different NRSROs' 
benchmark stress factors require different levels of credit enhancement 
to achieve the same external rating equivalent, the State savings 
association must apply the NRSRO stress factor that requires the highest 
level of credit enhancement.
    (B) If any NRSRO that provides an external rating to the ABCP 
program's commercial paper changes its methodology (including stress 
factors), the State savings association must evaluate whether to revise 
its internal assessment process.
    (v) The State savings association must have an effective system of 
controls and oversight that ensures compliance with

[[Page 1330]]

these operational requirements and maintains the integrity and accuracy 
of the internal credit assessments. The State savings association must 
have an internal audit function independent from the ABCP program 
business line and internal credit assessment process that assesses at 
least annually whether the controls over the internal credit assessment 
process function as intended.
    (vi) The State savings association must review and update each 
internal credit assessment whenever new material information is 
available, but no less frequently than annually.
    (vii) The State savings association must validate its internal 
credit assessment process on an ongoing basis and at least annually.
    (2) ABCP-program qualification criteria. An ABCP program qualifies 
for use of the IAA if all commercial paper issued by the ABCP program 
has an external rating.
    (3) Exposure qualification criteria. A securitization exposure 
qualifies for use of the IAA if the exposure meets the following 
criteria:
    (i) The State savings association initially rated the exposure at 
least the equivalent of investment grade.
    (ii) The ABCP program has robust credit and investment guidelines 
(that is, underwriting standards) for the exposures underlying the 
securitization exposure.
    (iii) The ABCP program performs a detailed credit analysis of the 
sellers of the exposures underlying the securitization exposure.
    (iv) The ABCP program's underwriting policy for the exposures 
underlying the securitization exposure establishes minimum asset 
eligibility criteria that include the prohibition of the purchase of 
assets that are significantly past due or of assets that are defaulted 
(that is, assets that have been charged off or written down by the 
seller prior to being placed into the ABCP program or assets that would 
be charged off or written down under the program's governing contracts), 
as well as limitations on concentration to individual obligors or 
geographic areas and the tenor of the assets to be purchased.
    (v) The aggregate estimate of loss on the exposures underlying the 
securitization exposure considers all sources of potential risk, such as 
credit and dilution risk.
    (vi) Where relevant, the ABCP program incorporates structural 
features into each purchase of exposures underlying the securitization 
exposure to mitigate potential credit deterioration of the underlying 
exposures. Such features may include wind-down triggers specific to a 
pool of underlying exposures.
    (b) Mechanics. A State savings association that elects to use the 
IAA to calculate the risk-based capital requirement for any 
securitization exposure must use the IAA to calculate the risk-based 
capital requirements for all securitization exposures that qualify for 
the IAA approach. Under the IAA, a State savings association must map 
its internal assessment of such a securitization exposure to an 
equivalent external rating from an NRSRO. Under the IAA, a State savings 
association must determine the risk-weighted asset amount for such a 
securitization exposure by multiplying the amount of the exposure (as 
defined in paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix) by the 
appropriate risk weight in Table 6 and Table 7 in paragraph (b) of 
section 43 of this appendix.

             Section 45. Supervisory Formula Approach (SFA)

    (a) Eligibility requirements. A State savings association may use 
the SFA to determine its risk-based capital requirement for a 
securitization exposure only if the State savings association can 
calculate on an ongoing basis each of the SFA parameters in paragraph 
(e) of this section.
    (b) Mechanics. Under the SFA, a securitization exposure incurs a 
deduction from total capital (as described in paragraph (c) of section 
42 of this appendix) and/or an SFA risk-based capital requirement, as 
determined in paragraph (c) of this section. The risk-weighted asset 
amount for the securitization exposure equals the SFA risk-based capital 
requirement for the exposure multiplied by 12.5.
    (c) The SFA risk-based capital requirement. (1) If KIRB 
is greater than or equal to L + T, the entire exposure must be deducted 
from total capital.
    (2) If KIRB is less than or equal to L, the exposure's 
SFA risk-based capital requirement is UE multiplied by TP multiplied by 
the greater of:
    (i) 0.0056 * T; or
    (ii) S[L + T] ^ S[L].
    (3) If KIRB is greater than L and less than L + T, the 
State savings association must deduct from total capital an amount equal 
to UE *TP * (KIRB^ L), and the exposure's SFA risk-based 
capital requirement is UE multiplied by TP multiplied by the greater of:
    (i) 0.0056 * (T ^ (KIRB^ L)); or
    (ii) S[L + T] ^ S[KIRB].
    (d) The supervisory formula:

[[Page 1331]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.007

    (11) In these expressions, b[Y; a, b] refers to the cumulative beta 
distribution with parameters a and b evaluated at Y. In the case where N 
= 1 and EWALGD = 100 percent, S[Y] in formula (1) must be calculated 
with K[Y] set equal to the product of KIRB and Y, and d set 
equal to 1 ^ KIRB.
    (e) SFA parameters--(1) Amount of the underlying exposures (UE). UE 
is the EAD of any underlying exposures that are wholesale and retail 
exposures (including the amount of any funded spread accounts, cash 
collateral accounts, and other similar funded credit enhancements) plus 
the amount of any underlying exposures that are securitization exposures 
(as defined in paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix) plus the 
adjusted carrying value of any underlying exposures that are equity 
exposures (as defined in paragraph (b) of section 51 of this appendix).
    (2) Tranche percentage (TP). TP is the ratio of the amount of the 
State savings association's securitization exposure to the amount of the 
tranche that contains the securitization exposure.
    (3) Capital requirement on underlying exposures (KIRB). (i) 
KIRB is the ratio of:
    (A) The sum of the risk-based capital requirements for the 
underlying exposures plus the expected credit losses of the underlying 
exposures (as determined under this appendix as if the underlying 
exposures were directly held by the State savings association); to
    (B) UE.
    (ii) The calculation of KIRB must reflect the effects of 
any credit risk mitigant applied to the underlying exposures (either to 
an individual underlying exposure, to a group of underlying exposures, 
or to the entire pool of underlying exposures).

[[Page 1332]]

    (iii) All assets related to the securitization are treated as 
underlying exposures, including assets in a reserve account (such as a 
cash collateral account).
    (4) Credit enhancement level (L). (i) L is the ratio of:
    (A) The amount of all securitization exposures subordinated to the 
tranche that contains the State savings association's securitization 
exposure; to
    (B) UE.
    (ii) A State savings association must determine L before considering 
the effects of any tranche-specific credit enhancements.
    (iii) Any gain-on-sale or CEIO associated with the securitization 
may not be included in L.
    (iv) Any reserve account funded by accumulated cash flows from the 
underlying exposures that is subordinated to the tranche that contains 
the State savings association's securitization exposure may be included 
in the numerator and denominator of L to the extent cash has accumulated 
in the account. Unfunded reserve accounts (that is, reserve accounts 
that are to be funded from future cash flows from the underlying 
exposures) may not be included in the calculation of L.
    (v) In some cases, the purchase price of receivables will reflect a 
discount that provides credit enhancement (for example, first loss 
protection) for all or certain tranches of the securitization. When this 
arises, L should be calculated inclusive of this discount if the 
discount provides credit enhancement for the securitization exposure.
    (5) Thickness of tranche (T). T is the ratio of:
    (i) The amount of the tranche that contains the State savings 
association's securitization exposure; to
    (ii) UE.
    (6) Effective number of exposures (N). (i) Unless the State savings 
association elects to use the formula provided in paragraph (f) of this 
section,
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.008


where EADi represents the EAD associated with the ith 
instrument in the pool of underlying exposures.

    (ii) Multiple exposures to one obligor must be treated as a single 
underlying exposure.
    (iii) In the case of a re-securitization (that is, a securitization 
in which some or all of the underlying exposures are themselves 
securitization exposures), the State savings association must treat each 
underlying exposure as a single underlying exposure and must not look 
through to the originally securitized underlying exposures.
    (7) Exposure-weighted average loss given default (EWALGD). EWALGD is 
calculated as:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.009


where LGDi represents the average LGD associated with all 
exposures to the ith obligor. In the case of a re-securitization, an LGD 
of 100 percent must be assumed for the underlying exposures that are 
themselves securitization exposures.

    (f) Simplified method for computing N and EWALGD. (1) If all 
underlying exposures of a securitization are retail exposures, a State 
savings association may apply the SFA using the following 
simplifications:
    (i) h = 0; and
    (ii) v = 0.
    (2) Under the conditions in paragraphs (f)(3) and (f)(4) of this 
section, a State savings association may employ a simplified method for 
calculating N and EWALGD.
    (3) If C1is no more than 0.03, a State savings 
association may set EWALGD = 0.50 if none of the underlying exposures is 
a securitization exposure or EWALGD = 1 if one or more of the underlying 
exposures is a securitization exposure, and may set N equal to the 
following amount:

[[Page 1333]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.010

Where:

(i) Cm is the ratio of the sum of the amounts of the `m' 
          largest underlying exposures to UE; and
(ii) The level of m is to be selected by the State savings association.
(4) Alternatively, if only C1 is available and C1 
          is no more than 0.03, the State savings association may set 
          EWALGD = 0.50 if none of the underlying exposures is a 
          securitization exposure or EWALGD = 1 if one or more of the 
          underlying exposures is a securitization exposure and may set 
          N = 1/C1.

  Section 46. Recognition of Credit Risk Mitigants for Securitization 
                                Exposures

    (a) General. An originating State savings association that has 
obtained a credit risk mitigant to hedge its securitization exposure to 
a synthetic or traditional securitization that satisfies the operational 
criteria in section 41 of this appendix may recognize the credit risk 
mitigant, but only as provided in this section. An investing State 
savings association that has obtained a credit risk mitigant to hedge a 
securitization exposure may recognize the credit risk mitigant, but only 
as provided in this section. A State savings association that has used 
the RBA in section 43 of this appendix or the IAA in section 44 of this 
appendix to calculate its risk-based capital requirement for a 
securitization exposure whose external or inferred rating (or equivalent 
internal rating under the IAA) reflects the benefits of a credit risk 
mitigant provided to the associated securitization or that supports some 
or all of the underlying exposures may not use the credit risk 
mitigation rules in this section to further reduce its risk-based 
capital requirement for the exposure to reflect that credit risk 
mitigant.
    (b) Collateral--(1) Rules of recognition. A State savings 
association may recognize financial collateral in determining the State 
savings association's risk-based capital requirement for a 
securitization exposure (other than a repo-style transaction, an 
eligible margin loan, or an OTC derivative contract for which the State 
savings association has reflected collateral in its determination of 
exposure amount under section 32 of this appendix) as follows. The State 
savings association's risk-based capital requirement for the 
collateralized securitization exposure is equal to the risk-based 
capital requirement for the securitization exposure as calculated under 
the RBA in section 43 of this appendix or under the SFA in section 45 of 
this appendix multiplied by the ratio of adjusted exposure amount (SE*) 
to original exposure amount (SE),

where:

(i) SE* = max 0, [SE--C  x  (1^Hs^Hfx)] ;
(ii) SE = the amount of the securitization exposure calculated under 
          paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix;
(iii) C = the current market value of the collateral;
(iv) Hs = the haircut appropriate to the collateral type; and
(v) Hfx = the haircut appropriate for any currency mismatch between the 
          collateral and the exposure.

    (2) Mixed collateral. Where the collateral is a basket of different 
asset types or a basket of assets denominated in different currencies, 
the haircut on the basket will be
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.011

where ai is the current market value of the asset in the 
basket divided by the current market value of all assets in the basket 
and Hi is the haircut applicable to that asset.
    (3) Standard supervisory haircuts. Unless a State savings 
association qualifies for use of and uses own-estimates haircuts in 
paragraph (b)(4) of this section:
    (i) A State savings association must use the collateral type 
haircuts (Hs) in Table 3;
    (ii) A State savings association must use a currency mismatch 
haircut (Hfx) of 8 percent if the exposure and the collateral are 
denominated in different currencies;
    (iii) A State savings association must multiply the supervisory 
haircuts obtained in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) by the square root of 
6.5 (which equals 2.549510); and
    (iv) A State savings association must adjust the supervisory 
haircuts upward on the

[[Page 1334]]

basis of a holding period longer than 65 business days where and as 
appropriate to take into account the illiquidity of the collateral.
    (4) Own estimates for haircuts. With the prior written approval of 
the FDIC, a State savings association may calculate haircuts using its 
own internal estimates of market price volatility and foreign exchange 
volatility, subject to paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of section 32 of this 
appendix. The minimum holding period (TM) for securitization exposures 
is 65 business days.
    (c) Guarantees and credit derivatives--(1) Limitations on 
recognition. A State savings association may only recognize an eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative provided by an eligible 
securitization guarantor in determining the State savings association's 
risk-based capital requirement for a securitization exposure.
    (2) ECL for securitization exposures. When a State savings 
association recognizes an eligible guarantee or eligible credit 
derivative provided by an eligible securitization guarantor in 
determining the State savings association's risk-based capital 
requirement for a securitization exposure, the State savings association 
must also:
    (i) Calculate ECL for the protected portion of the exposure using 
the same risk parameters that it uses for calculating the risk-weighted 
asset amount of the exposure as described in paragraph (c)(3) of this 
section; and
    (ii) Add the exposure's ECL to the State savings association's total 
ECL.
    (3) Rules of recognition. A State savings association may recognize 
an eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative provided by an 
eligible securitization guarantor in determining the State savings 
association's risk-based capital requirement for the securitization 
exposure as follows:
    (i) Full coverage. If the protection amount of the eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative equals or exceeds the amount of 
the securitization exposure, the State savings association may set the 
risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure equal to the 
risk-weighted asset amount for a direct exposure to the eligible 
securitization guarantor (as determined in the wholesale risk weight 
function described in section 31 of this appendix), using the State 
savings association's PD for the guarantor, the State savings 
association's LGD for the guarantee or credit derivative, and an EAD 
equal to the amount of the securitization exposure (as determined in 
paragraph (e) of section 42 of this appendix).
    (ii) Partial coverage. If the protection amount of the eligible 
guarantee or eligible credit derivative is less than the amount of the 
securitization exposure, the State savings association may set the risk-
weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure equal to the sum 
of:
    (A) Covered portion. The risk-weighted asset amount for a direct 
exposure to the eligible securitization guarantor (as determined in the 
wholesale risk weight function described in section 31 of this 
appendix), using the State savings association's PD for the guarantor, 
the State savings association's LGD for the guarantee or credit 
derivative, and an EAD equal to the protection amount of the credit risk 
mitigant; and
    (B) Uncovered portion. (1) 1.0 minus the ratio of the protection 
amount of the eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative to the 
amount of the securitization exposure); multiplied by
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount for the securitization exposure 
without the credit risk mitigant (as determined in sections 42 through 
45 of this appendix).
    (4) Mismatches. The State savings association must make applicable 
adjustments to the protection amount as required in paragraphs (d), (e), 
and (f) of section 33 of this appendix for any hedged securitization 
exposure and any more senior securitization exposure that benefits from 
the hedge. In the context of a synthetic securitization, when an 
eligible guarantee or eligible credit derivative covers multiple hedged 
exposures that have different residual maturities, the State savings 
association must use the longest residual maturity of any of the hedged 
exposures as the residual maturity of all the hedged exposures.

   Section 47. Risk-Based Capital Requirement for Early Amortization 
                               Provisions

    (a) General. (1) An originating State savings association must hold 
risk-based capital against the sum of the originating State savings 
association's interest and the investors' interest in a securitization 
that:
    (i) Includes one or more underlying exposures in which the borrower 
is permitted to vary the drawn amount within an agreed limit under a 
line of credit; and
    (ii) Contains an early amortization provision.
    (2) For securitizations described in paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section, an originating State savings association must calculate the 
risk-based capital requirement for the originating State savings 
association's interest under sections 42 through 45 of this appendix, 
and the risk-based capital requirement for the investors' interest under 
paragraph (b) of this section.
    (b) Risk-weighted asset amount for investors' interest. The 
originating State savings association's risk-weighted asset amount for 
the investors' interest in the securitization is equal to the product of 
the following 5 quantities:
    (1) The investors' interest EAD;
    (2) The appropriate conversion factor in paragraph (c) of this 
section;

[[Page 1335]]

    (3) KIRB (as defined in paragraph (e)(3) of section 45 of 
this appendix);
    (4) 12.5; and
    (5) The proportion of the underlying exposures in which the borrower 
is permitted to vary the drawn amount within an agreed limit under a 
line of credit.
    (c) Conversion factor. (1)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) 
of this section, to calculate the appropriate conversion factor, a State 
savings association must use Table 8 for a securitization that contains 
a controlled early amortization provision and must use Table 9 for a 
securitization that contains a non-controlled early amortization 
provision. In circumstances where a securitization contains a mix of 
retail and nonretail exposures or a mix of committed and uncommitted 
exposures, a State savings association may take a pro rata approach to 
determining the conversion factor for the securitization's early 
amortization provision. If a pro rata approach is not feasible, a State 
savings association must treat the mixed securitization as a 
securitization of nonretail exposures if a single underlying exposure is 
a nonretail exposure and must treat the mixed securitization as a 
securitization of committed exposures if a single underlying exposure is 
a committed exposure.
    (ii) To find the appropriate conversion factor in the tables, a 
State savings association must divide the three-month average annualized 
excess spread of the securitization by the excess spread trapping point 
in the securitization structure. In securitizations that do not require 
excess spread to be trapped, or that specify trapping points based 
primarily on performance measures other than the three-month average 
annualized excess spread, the excess spread trapping point is 4.5 
percent.

                                Table 8--Controlled Early Amortization Provisions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Uncommitted                         Committed
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Retail Credit Lines......................  Three-month average annualized excess       90% CF.
                                            spread Conversion Factor (CF).
                                           133.33% of trapping point or more, 0% CF..
                                           less than 133.33% to 100% of trapping
                                            point, 1% CF.
                                           less than 100% to 75% of trapping point,
                                            2% CF.
                                           less than 75% to 50% of trapping point,
                                            10% CF.
                                           less than 50% to 25% of trapping point,
                                            20% CF.
                                           less than 25% of trapping point, 40% CF...
Non-retail Credit Lines..................  90% CF....................................  90% CF.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                              Table 9--Non-Controlled Early Amortization Provisions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Uncommitted                         Committed
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Retail Credit Lines......................  Three-month average annualized excess       100% CF.
                                            spread Conversion Factor (CF).
                                           133.33% of trapping point or more, 0% CF..
                                           less than 133.33% to 100% of trapping
                                            point, 5% CF.
                                           less than 100% to 75% of trapping point,
                                            15% CF.
                                           less than 75% to 50% of trapping point,
                                            50% CF.
                                           less than 50% of trapping point, 100% CF..
Non-retail Credit Lines..................  100% CF...................................  100% CF.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For a securitization for which all or substantially all of the 
underlying exposures are residential mortgage exposures, a State savings 
association may calculate the appropriate conversion factor using 
paragraph (c)(1) of this section or may use a conversion factor of 10 
percent. If the State savings association chooses to use a conversion 
factor of 10 percent, it must use that conversion factor for all 
securitizations for which all or substantially all of the underlying 
exposures are residential mortgage exposures.

           Part VI. Risk-Weighted Assets for Equity Exposures

            Section 51. Introduction and Exposure Measurement

    (a) General. To calculate its risk-weighted asset amounts for equity 
exposures that are not equity exposures to investment funds, a State 
savings association may apply either the Simple Risk Weight Approach 
(SRWA) in section 52 of this appendix or, if it qualifies to do so, the 
Internal Models Approach (IMA) in section 53 of this appendix. A State 
savings association must use the look-through approaches in section 54 
of this appendix to calculate its risk-weighted asset amounts for equity 
exposures to investment funds.

[[Page 1336]]

    (b) Adjusted carrying value. For purposes of this part, the adjusted 
carrying value of an equity exposure is:
    (1) For the on-balance sheet component of an equity exposure, the 
State savings association's carrying value of the exposure reduced by 
any unrealized gains on the exposure that are reflected in such carrying 
value but excluded from the State savings association's tier 1 and tier 
2 capital; and
    (2) For the off-balance sheet component of an equity exposure, the 
effective notional principal amount of the exposure, the size of which 
is equivalent to a hypothetical on-balance sheet position in the 
underlying equity instrument that would evidence the same change in fair 
value (measured in dollars) for a given small change in the price of the 
underlying equity instrument, minus the adjusted carrying value of the 
on-balance sheet component of the exposure as calculated in paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section. For unfunded equity commitments that are 
unconditional, the effective notional principal amount is the notional 
amount of the commitment. For unfunded equity commitments that are 
conditional, the effective notional principal amount is the State 
savings association's best estimate of the amount that would be funded 
under economic downturn conditions.

             Section 52. Simple Risk Weight Approach (SRWA)

    (a) General. Under the SRWA, a State savings association's aggregate 
risk-weighted asset amount for its equity exposures is equal to the sum 
of the risk-weighted asset amounts for each of the State savings 
association's individual equity exposures (other than equity exposures 
to an investment fund) as determined in this section and the risk-
weighted asset amounts for each of the State savings association's 
individual equity exposures to an investment fund as determined in 
section 54 of this appendix.
    (b) SRWA computation for individual equity exposures. A State 
savings association must determine the risk-weighted asset amount for an 
individual equity exposure (other than an equity exposure to an 
investment fund) by multiplying the adjusted carrying value of the 
equity exposure or the effective portion and ineffective portion of a 
hedge pair (as defined in paragraph (c) of this section) by the lowest 
applicable risk weight in this paragraph (b).
    (1) 0 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to an 
entity whose credit exposures are exempt from the 0.03 percent PD floor 
in paragraph (d)(2) of section 31 of this appendix is assigned a 0 
percent risk weight.
    (2) 20 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to a 
Federal Home Loan Bank or Farmer Mac is assigned a 20 percent risk 
weight.
    (3) 100 percent risk weight equity exposures. The following equity 
exposures are assigned a 100 percent risk weight:
    (i) An equity exposure that is designed primarily to promote 
community welfare, including the welfare of low- and moderate-income 
communities or families, such as by providing services or jobs, 
excluding equity exposures to an unconsolidated small business 
investment company and equity exposures held through a consolidated 
small business investment company described in section 302 of the Small 
Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682).
    (ii) Effective portion of hedge pairs. The effective portion of a 
hedge pair.
    (iii) Non-significant equity exposures. Equity exposures, excluding 
exposures to an investment firm that would meet the definition of a 
traditional securitization were it not for the FDIC's application of 
paragraph (8) of that definition and has greater than immaterial 
leverage, to the extent that the aggregate adjusted carrying value of 
the exposures does not exceed 10 percent of the State savings 
association's tier 1 capital plus tier 2 capital.
    (A) To compute the aggregate adjusted carrying value of a State 
savings association's equity exposures for purposes of this paragraph 
(b)(3)(iii), the State savings association may exclude equity exposures 
described in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3)(i), and (b)(3)(ii) of 
this section, the equity exposure in a hedge pair with the smaller 
adjusted carrying value, and a proportion of each equity exposure to an 
investment fund equal to the proportion of the assets of the investment 
fund that are not equity exposures or that meet the criterion of 
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. If a State savings association does 
not know the actual holdings of the investment fund, the State savings 
association may calculate the proportion of the assets of the fund that 
are not equity exposures based on the terms of the prospectus, 
partnership agreement, or similar contract that defines the fund's 
permissible investments. If the sum of the investment limits for all 
exposure classes within the fund exceeds 100 percent, the State savings 
association must assume for purposes of this paragraph (b)(3)(iii) that 
the investment fund invests to the maximum extent possible in equity 
exposures.
    (B) When determining which of a State savings association's equity 
exposures qualify for a 100 percent risk weight under this paragraph, a 
State savings association first must include equity exposures to 
unconsolidated small business investment companies or held through 
consolidated small business investment companies described in section 
302 of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 682), then 
must include publicly traded equity exposures (including those held 
indirectly through investment funds), and then must include non-publicly

[[Page 1337]]

traded equity exposures (including those held indirectly through 
investment funds).
    (4) 300 percent risk weight equity exposures. A publicly traded 
equity exposure (other than an equity exposure described in paragraph 
(b)(6) of this section and including the ineffective portion of a hedge 
pair) is assigned a 300 percent risk weight.
    (5) 400 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure 
(other than an equity exposure described in paragraph (b)(6) of this 
section) that is not publicly traded is assigned a 400 percent risk 
weight.
    (6) 600 percent risk weight equity exposures. An equity exposure to 
an investment firm that:
    (i) Would meet the definition of a traditional securitization were 
it not for the FDIC's application of paragraph (8) of that definition; 
and
    (ii) Has greater than immaterial leverage is assigned a 600 percent 
risk weight.
    (c) Hedge transactions--(1) Hedge pair. A hedge pair is two equity 
exposures that form an effective hedge so long as each equity exposure 
is publicly traded or has a return that is primarily based on a publicly 
traded equity exposure.
    (2) Effective hedge. Two equity exposures form an effective hedge if 
the exposures either have the same remaining maturity or each has a 
remaining maturity of at least three months; the hedge relationship is 
formally documented in a prospective manner (that is, before the State 
savings association acquires at least one of the equity exposures); the 
documentation specifies the measure of effectiveness (E) the State 
savings association will use for the hedge relationship throughout the 
life of the transaction; and the hedge relationship has an E greater 
than or equal to 0.8. A State savings association must measure E at 
least quarterly and must use one of three alternative measures of E:
    (i) Under the dollar-offset method of measuring effectiveness, the 
State savings association must determine the ratio of value change 
(RVC). The RVC is the ratio of the cumulative sum of the periodic 
changes in value of one equity exposure to the cumulative sum of the 
periodic changes in the value of the other equity exposure. If RVC is 
positive, the hedge is not effective and E equals 0. If RVC is negative 
and greater than or equal to ^1 (that is, between zero and ^1), then E 
equals the absolute value of RVC. If RVC is negative and less than ^1, 
then E equals 2 plus RVC.
    (ii) Under the variability-reduction method of measuring 
effectiveness:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR05AU11.012

    (A) Xt = At^ Bt;
    (B) At = the value at time t of one exposure in a hedge 
pair; and
    (C) Bt = the value at time t of the other exposure in a 
hedge pair.
    (iii) Under the regression method of measuring effectiveness, E 
equals the coefficient of determination of a regression in which the 
change in value of one exposure in a hedge pair is the dependent 
variable and the change in value of the other exposure in a hedge pair 
is the independent variable. However, if the estimated regression 
coefficient is positive, then the value of E is zero.
    (3) The effective portion of a hedge pair is E multiplied by the 
greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures forming 
a hedge pair.
    (4) The ineffective portion of a hedge pair is (1-E) multiplied by 
the greater of the adjusted carrying values of the equity exposures 
forming a hedge pair.

               Section 53. Internal Models Approach (IMA)

    (a) General. A State savings association may calculate its risk-
weighted asset amount for equity exposures using the IMA by modeling 
publicly traded and non-publicly traded equity exposures (in accordance 
with paragraph (c) of this section) or by modeling only publicly traded 
equity exposures (in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section).
    (b) Qualifying criteria. To qualify to use the IMA to calculate 
risk-based capital requirements for equity exposures, a State savings 
association must receive prior written approval from the FDIC. To 
receive such approval, the State savings association must demonstrate to 
the FDIC's satisfaction that the State savings association meets the 
following criteria:
    (1) The State savings association must have one or more models that:
    (i) Assess the potential decline in value of its modeled equity 
exposures;

[[Page 1338]]

    (ii) Are commensurate with the size, complexity, and composition of 
the State savings association's modeled equity exposures; and
    (iii) Adequately capture both general market risk and idiosyncratic 
risk.
    (2) The State savings association's model must produce an estimate 
of potential losses for its modeled equity exposures that is no less 
than the estimate of potential losses produced by a VaR methodology 
employing a 99.0 percent, one-tailed confidence interval of the 
distribution of quarterly returns for a benchmark portfolio of equity 
exposures comparable to the State savings association's modeled equity 
exposures using a long-term sample period.
    (3) The number of risk factors and exposures in the sample and the 
data period used for quantification in the State savings association's 
model and benchmarking exercise must be sufficient to provide confidence 
in the accuracy and robustness of the State savings association's 
estimates.
    (4) The State savings association's model and benchmarking process 
must incorporate data that are relevant in representing the risk profile 
of the State savings association's modeled equity exposures, and must 
include data from at least one equity market cycle containing adverse 
market movements relevant to the risk profile of the State savings 
association's modeled equity exposures. In addition, the State savings 
association's benchmarking exercise must be based on daily market prices 
for the benchmark portfolio. If the State savings association's model 
uses a scenario methodology, the State savings association must 
demonstrate that the model produces a conservative estimate of potential 
losses on the State savings association's modeled equity exposures over 
a relevant long-term market cycle. If the State savings association 
employs risk factor models, the State savings association must 
demonstrate through empirical analysis the appropriateness of the risk 
factors used.
    (5) The State savings association must be able to demonstrate, using 
theoretical arguments and empirical evidence, that any proxies used in 
the modeling process are comparable to the State savings association's 
modeled equity exposures and that the State savings association has made 
appropriate adjustments for differences. The State savings association 
must derive any proxies for its modeled equity exposures and benchmark 
portfolio using historical market data that are relevant to the State 
savings association's modeled equity exposures and benchmark portfolio 
(or, where not, must use appropriately adjusted data), and such proxies 
must be robust estimates of the risk of the State savings association's 
modeled equity exposures.
    (c) Risk-weighted assets calculation for a State savings association 
modeling publicly traded and non-publicly traded equity exposures. If a 
State savings association models publicly traded and non-publicly traded 
equity exposures, the State savings association's aggregate risk-
weighted asset amount for its equity exposures is equal to the sum of:
    (1) The risk-weighted asset amount of each equity exposure that 
qualifies for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 (as determined under 
section 52 of this appendix) and each equity exposure to an investment 
fund (as determined under section 54 of this appendix); and
    (2) The greater of:
    (i) The estimate of potential losses on the State savings 
association's equity exposures (other than equity exposures referenced 
in paragraph (c)(1) of this section) generated by the State savings 
association's internal equity exposure model multiplied by 12.5; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the State savings association's publicly traded equity exposures that 
do not belong to a hedge pair, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 
percent, or 100 percent risk weight under paragraphs (b)(1) through 
(b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix, and are not equity exposures 
to an investment fund;
    (B) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate ineffective portion of 
all hedge pairs; and
    (C) 300 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the State savings association's equity exposures that are not 
publicly traded, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 
percent risk weight under paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 
52 of this appendix, and are not equity exposures to an investment fund.
    (d) Risk-weighted assets calculation for a State savings association 
using the IMA only for publicly traded equity exposures. If a State 
savings association models only publicly traded equity exposures, the 
State savings association's aggregate risk-weighted asset amount for its 
equity exposures is equal to the sum of:
    (1) The risk-weighted asset amount of each equity exposure that 
qualifies for a 0 percent, 20 percent, or 100 percent risk weight under 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3)(i) of section 52 (as determined under 
section 52 of this appendix), each equity exposure that qualifies for a 
400 percent risk weight under paragraph (b)(5) of section 52 or a 600 
percent risk weight under paragraph (b)(6) of section 52 (as determined 
under section 52 of this appendix), and each equity exposure to an 
investment fund (as determined under section 54 of this appendix); and
    (2) The greater of:
    (i) The estimate of potential losses on the State savings 
association's equity exposures (other than equity exposures referenced 
in

[[Page 1339]]

paragraph (d)(1) of this section) generated by the State savings 
association's internal equity exposure model multiplied by 12.5; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate adjusted carrying value 
of the State savings association's publicly traded equity exposures that 
do not belong to a hedge pair, do not qualify for a 0 percent, 20 
percent, or 100 percent risk weight under paragraphs (b)(1) through 
(b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix, and are not equity exposures 
to an investment fund; and
    (B) 200 percent multiplied by the aggregate ineffective portion of 
all hedge pairs.

            Section 54. Equity Exposures to Investment Funds

    (a) Available approaches. (1) Unless the exposure meets the 
requirements for a community development equity exposure in paragraph 
(b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix, a State savings association 
must determine the risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to 
an investment fund under the Full Look-Through Approach in paragraph (b) 
of this section, the Simple Modified Look-Through Approach in paragraph 
(c) of this section, the Alternative Modified Look-Through Approach in 
paragraph (d) of this section, or, if the investment fund qualifies for 
the Money Market Fund Approach, the Money Market Fund Approach in 
paragraph (e) of this section.
    (2) The risk-weighted asset amount of an equity exposure to an 
investment fund that meets the requirements for a community development 
equity exposure in paragraph (b)(3)(i) of section 52 of this appendix is 
its adjusted carrying value.
    (3) If an equity exposure to an investment fund is part of a hedge 
pair and the State savings association does not use the Full Look-
Through Approach, the State savings association may use the ineffective 
portion of the hedge pair as determined under paragraph (c) of section 
52 of this appendix as the adjusted carrying value for the equity 
exposure to the investment fund. The risk-weighted asset amount of the 
effective portion of the hedge pair is equal to its adjusted carrying 
value.
    (b) Full Look-Through Approach. A State savings association that is 
able to calculate a risk-weighted asset amount for its proportional 
ownership share of each exposure held by the investment fund (as 
calculated under this appendix as if the proportional ownership share of 
each exposure were held directly by the State savings association) may 
either:
    (1) Set the risk-weighted asset amount of the State savings 
association's exposure to the fund equal to the product of:
    (i) The aggregate risk-weighted asset amounts of the exposures held 
by the fund as if they were held directly by the State savings 
association; and
    (ii) The State savings association's proportional ownership share of 
the fund; or
    (2) Include the State savings association's proportional ownership 
share of each exposure held by the fund in the State savings 
association's IMA.
    (c) Simple Modified Look-Through Approach. Under this approach, the 
risk-weighted asset amount for a State savings association's equity 
exposure to an investment fund equals the adjusted carrying value of the 
equity exposure multiplied by the highest risk weight in Table 10 that 
applies to any exposure the fund is permitted to hold under its 
prospectus, partnership agreement, or similar contract that defines the 
fund's permissible investments (excluding derivative contracts that are 
used for hedging rather than speculative purposes and that do not 
constitute a material portion of the fund's exposures).

   Table 10--Modified Look-Through Approaches for Equity Exposures to
                            Investment Funds
------------------------------------------------------------------------
         Risk weight                         Exposure class
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 percent....................  Sovereign exposures with a long-term
                                applicable external rating in the
                                highest investment-grade rating category
                                and sovereign exposures of the United
                                States.
20 percent...................  Non-sovereign exposures with a long-term
                                applicable external rating in the
                                highest or second-highest investment-
                                grade rating category; exposures with a
                                short-term applicable external rating in
                                the highest investment-grade rating
                                category; and exposures to, or
                                guaranteed by, depository institutions,
                                foreign banks (as defined in 12 CFR
                                211.2), or securities firms subject to
                                consolidated supervision and regulation
                                comparable to that imposed on U.S.
                                securities broker-dealers that are repo-
                                style transactions or bankers'
                                acceptances.
50 percent...................  Exposures with a long-term applicable
                                external rating in the third-highest
                                investment-grade rating category or a
                                short-term applicable external rating in
                                the second-highest investment-grade
                                rating category.
100 percent..................  Exposures with a long-term or short-term
                                applicable external rating in the lowest
                                investment-grade rating category.
200 percent..................  Exposures with a long-term applicable
                                external rating one rating category
                                below investment grade.
300 percent..................  Publicly traded equity exposures.
400 percent..................  Non-publicly traded equity exposures;
                                exposures with a long-term applicable
                                external rating two rating categories or
                                more below investment grade; and
                                exposures without an external rating
                                (excluding publicly traded equity
                                exposures).
1,250 percent................  OTC derivative contracts and exposures
                                that must be deducted from regulatory
                                capital or receive a risk weight greater
                                than 400 percent under this appendix.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 1340]]

    (d) Alternative Modified Look-Through Approach. Under this approach, 
a State savings association may assign the adjusted carrying value of an 
equity exposure to an investment fund on a pro rata basis to different 
risk weight categories in Table 10 based on the investment limits in the 
fund's prospectus, partnership agreement, or similar contract that 
defines the fund's permissible investments. The risk-weighted asset 
amount for the State savings association's equity exposure to the 
investment fund equals the sum of each portion of the adjusted carrying 
value assigned to an exposure class multiplied by the applicable risk 
weight. If the sum of the investment limits for exposure classes within 
the fund exceeds 100 percent, the State savings association must assume 
that the fund invests to the maximum extent permitted under its 
investment limits in the exposure class with the highest risk weight 
under Table 10, and continues to make investments in order of the 
exposure class with the next highest risk weight under Table 10 until 
the maximum total investment level is reached. If more than one exposure 
class applies to an exposure, the State savings association must use the 
highest applicable risk weight. A State savings association may exclude 
derivative contracts held by the fund that are used for hedging rather 
than for speculative purposes and do not constitute a material portion 
of the fund's exposures.
    (e) Money Market Fund Approach. The risk-weighted asset amount for a 
State savings association's equity exposure to an investment fund that 
is a money market fund subject to 17 CFR 270.2a-7 and that has an 
applicable external rating in the highest investment-grade rating 
category equals the adjusted carrying value of the equity exposure 
multiplied by 7 percent.

                 Section 55. Equity Derivative Contracts

    Under the IMA, in addition to holding risk-based capital against an 
equity derivative contract under this part, a State savings association 
must hold risk-based capital against the counterparty credit risk in the 
equity derivative contract by also treating the equity derivative 
contract as a wholesale exposure and computing a supplemental risk-
weighted asset amount for the contract under part IV. Under the SRWA, a 
State savings association may choose not to hold risk-based capital 
against the counterparty credit risk of equity derivative contracts, as 
long as it does so for all such contracts. Where the equity derivative 
contracts are subject to a qualified master netting agreement, a State 
savings association using the SRWA must either include all or exclude 
all of the contracts from any measure used to determine counterparty 
credit risk exposure.

           Part VII. Risk-Weighted Assets for Operational Risk

Section 61. Qualification Requirements for Incorporation of Operational 
                             Risk Mitigants

    (a) Qualification to use operational risk mitigants. A State savings 
association may adjust its estimate of operational risk exposure to 
reflect qualifying operational risk mitigants if:
    (1) The State savings association's operational risk quantification 
system is able to generate an estimate of the State savings 
association's operational risk exposure (which does not incorporate 
qualifying operational risk mitigants) and an estimate of the State 
savings association's operational risk exposure adjusted to incorporate 
qualifying operational risk mitigants; and
    (2) The State savings association's methodology for incorporating 
the effects of insurance, if the State savings association uses 
insurance as an operational risk mitigant, captures through appropriate 
discounts to the amount of risk mitigation:
    (i) The residual term of the policy, where less than one year;
    (ii) The cancellation terms of the policy, where less than one year;
    (iii) The policy's timeliness of payment;
    (iv) The uncertainty of payment by the provider of the policy; and
    (v) Mismatches in coverage between the policy and the hedged 
operational loss event.
    (b) Qualifying operational risk mitigants. Qualifying operational 
risk mitigants are:
    (1) Insurance that:
    (i) Is provided by an unaffiliated company that has a claims payment 
ability that is rated in one of the three highest rating categories by a 
NRSRO;
    (ii) Has an initial term of at least one year and a residual term of 
more than 90 days;
    (iii) Has a minimum notice period for cancellation by the provider 
of 90 days;
    (iv) Has no exclusions or limitations based upon regulatory action 
or for the receiver or liquidator of a failed depository institution; 
and
    (v) Is explicitly mapped to a potential operational loss event; and
    (2) Operational risk mitigants other than insurance for which the 
FDIC has given prior written approval. In evaluating an operational risk 
mitigant other than insurance, the FDIC will consider whether the 
operational risk mitigant covers potential operational losses in a 
manner equivalent to holding regulatory capital.

        Section 62. Mechanics of Risk-Weighted Asset Calculation

    (a) If a State savings association does not qualify to use or does 
not have qualifying operational risk mitigants, the State savings

[[Page 1341]]

association's dollar risk-based capital requirement for operational risk 
is its operational risk exposure minus eligible operational risk offsets 
(if any).
    (b) If a State savings association qualifies to use operational risk 
mitigants and has qualifying operational risk mitigants, the State 
savings association's dollar risk-based capital requirement for 
operational risk is the greater of:
    (1) The State savings association's operational risk exposure 
adjusted for qualifying operational risk mitigants minus eligible 
operational risk offsets (if any); or
    (2) 0.8 multiplied by the difference between:
    (i) The State savings association's operational risk exposure; and
    (ii) Eligible operational risk offsets (if any).
    (c) The State savings association's risk-weighted asset amount for 
operational risk equals the State savings association's dollar risk-
based capital requirement for operational risk determined under 
paragraph (a) or (b) of this section multiplied by 12.5.

                          Part VIII. Disclosure

                   Section 71. Disclosure Requirements

    (a) Each State savings association must publicly disclose each 
quarter its total and tier 1 risk-based capital ratios and their 
components (that is, tier 1 capital, tier 2 capital, total qualifying 
capital, and total risk-weighted assets). \8\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \8\ Other public disclosure requirements continue to apply--for 
example, Federal securities law and regulatory reporting requirements.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) A State savings association must comply with paragraph (c) of 
section 71 of this appendix unless it is a consolidated subsidiary of a 
depository institution or bank holding company that is subject to these 
requirements.
    (c)(1) Each consolidated State savings association described in 
paragraph (b) of this section that is not a subsidiary of a non-U.S. 
banking organization that is subject to comparable public disclosure 
requirements in its home jurisdiction and has successfully completed its 
parallel run must provide timely public disclosures each calendar 
quarter of the information in tables 11.1 through 11.11 of this 
appendix. If a significant change occurs, such that the most recent 
reported amounts are no longer reflective of the State savings 
association's capital adequacy and risk profile, then a brief discussion 
of this change and its likely impact must be provided as soon as 
practicable thereafter. Qualitative disclosures that typically do not 
change each quarter (for example, a general summary of the State savings 
association's risk management objectives and policies, reporting system, 
and definitions) may be disclosed annually, provided any significant 
changes to these are disclosed in the interim. Management is encouraged 
to provide all of the disclosures required by this appendix in one place 
on the State savings association's public Web site. \9\ The State 
savings association must make these disclosures publicly available for 
each of the last three years (twelve quarters) or such shorter period 
since it began its first floor period.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \9\ Alternatively, a State savings association may provide the 
disclosures in more than one place, as some of them may be included in 
public financial reports (for example, in Management's Discussion and 
Analysis included in SEC filings) or other regulatory reports. The State 
savings association must provide a summary table on its public Web site 
that specifically indicates where all the disclosures may be found (for 
example, regulatory report schedules, page numbers in annual reports).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Each State savings association is required to have a formal 
disclosure policy approved by the board of directors that addresses its 
approach for determining the disclosures it makes. The policy must 
address the associated internal controls and disclosure controls and 
procedures. The board of directors and senior management are responsible 
for establishing and maintaining an effective internal control structure 
over financial reporting, including the disclosures required by this 
appendix, and must ensure that appropriate review of the disclosures 
takes place. One or more senior officers of the State savings 
association must attest that the disclosures required by this appendix 
meet the requirements of this appendix.
    (3) If a State savings association believes that disclosure of 
specific commercial or financial information would prejudice seriously 
its position by making public information that is either proprietary or 
confidential in nature, the State savings association need not disclose 
those specific items, but must disclose more general information about 
the subject matter of the requirement, together with the fact that, and 
the reason why, the specific items of information have not been 
disclosed.

                    Table 11.1--Scope of Application
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The name of the top corporate
                                     entity in the group to which the
                                     appendix applies.

[[Page 1342]]

 
                                    (b) An outline of differences in the
                                     basis of consolidation for
                                     accounting and regulatory purposes,
                                     with a brief description of the
                                     entities \10\ within the group that
                                     are fully consolidated; that are
                                     deconsolidated and deducted; for
                                     which the regulatory capital
                                     requirement is deducted; and that
                                     are neither consolidated nor
                                     deducted (for example, where the
                                     investment is risk-weighted).
                                    (c) Any restrictions, or other major
                                     impediments, on transfer of funds
                                     or regulatory capital within the
                                     group.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (d) The aggregate amount of surplus
                                     capital of insurance subsidiaries
                                     (whether deducted or subjected to
                                     an alternative method) included in
                                     the regulatory capital of the
                                     consolidated group.
                                    (e) The aggregate amount by which
                                     actual regulatory capital is less
                                     than the minimum regulatory capital
                                     requirement in all subsidiaries
                                     with regulatory capital
                                     requirements and the name(s) of the
                                     subsidiaries with such
                                     deficiencies.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                      Table 11.2--Capital Structure
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) Summary information on the terms
                                     and conditions of the main features
                                     of all capital instruments,
                                     especially in the case of
                                     innovative, complex or hybrid
                                     capital instruments.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) The amount of tier 1 capital,
                                     with separate disclosure of:
                                       Common stock/surplus;
                                       Retained earnings;
                                       Minority interests in the
                                    equity of subsidiaries;
                                       Regulatory calculation
                                    differences deducted from tier 1
                                    capital; \11\ and
                                       Other amounts deducted
                                    from tier 1 capital, including
                                    goodwill and certain intangibles.
                                    (c) The total amount of tier 2
                                     capital.
                                    (d) Other deductions from capital.
                                     \12\
                                    (e) Total eligible capital.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                      Table 11.3--Capital Adequacy
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) A summary discussion of the
                                     State savings association's
                                     approach to assessing the adequacy
                                     of its capital to support current
                                     and future activities.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) Risk-weighted assets for credit
                                     risk from:
                                       Wholesale exposures;
                                       Residential mortgage
                                    exposures;
                                       Qualifying revolving
                                    exposures;
                                       Other retail exposures;
                                       Securitization exposures;
                                       Equity exposures;
                                       Equity exposures subject
                                    to the simple risk weight approach;
                                    and
                                       Equity exposures subject
                                    to the internal models approach.
                                    (c) Risk-weighted assets for market
                                     risk as calculated under any
                                     applicable market risk rule: \13\
                                       Standardized approach for
                                    specific risk; and
                                       Internal models approach
                                    for specific risk.
                                    (d) Risk-weighted assets for
                                     operational risk.
                                    (e) Total and tier 1 risk-based
                                     capital ratios: \14\
                                       For the top consolidated
                                    group; and
                                       For each DI subsidiary.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\10\ Entities include securities, insurance and other financial
  subsidiaries, commercial subsidiaries (where permitted), and
  significant minority equity investments in insurance, financial and
  commercial entities.
\11\ Representing 50 percent of the amount, if any, by which total
  expected credit losses as calculated within the IRB approach exceed
  eligible credit reserves, which must be deducted from tier 1 capital.
\12\ Including 50 percent of the amount, if any, by which total expected
  credit losses as calculated within the IRB approach exceed eligible
  credit reserves, which must be deducted from tier 2 capital.
\13\ Risk-weighted assets determined under any applicable market risk
  rule are to be disclosed only for the approaches used.
\14\ Total risk-weighted assets should also be disclosed.

               General Qualitative Disclosure Requirement

    For each separate risk area described in tables 11.4 through 11.11, 
the State savings association must describe its risk management 
objectives and policies, including:
     Strategies and processes;
     The structure and organization of the relevant risk 
management function;
     The scope and nature of risk reporting and/or measurement 
systems;
     Policies for hedging and/or mitigating risk and strategies 
and processes for monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges/
mitigants.

[[Page 1343]]



            Table 11.4 \15\--Credit Risk: General Disclosures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The general qualitative
                                     disclosure requirement with respect
                                     to credit risk (excluding
                                     counterparty credit risk disclosed
                                     in accordance with Table 11.6),
                                     including:
                                       Definitions of past due
                                    and impaired (for accounting
                                    purposes);
                                       Description of approaches
                                    followed for allowances, including
                                    statistical methods used where
                                    applicable; and
                                       Discussion of the State
                                    savings association's credit risk
                                    management policy.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) Total credit risk exposures and
                                     average credit risk exposures,
                                     after accounting offsets in
                                     accordance with GAAP, \16\ and
                                     without taking into account the
                                     effects of credit risk mitigation
                                     techniques (for example, collateral
                                     and netting), over the period
                                     broken down by major types of
                                     credit exposure. \17\
                                    (c) Geographic \18\ distribution of
                                     exposures, broken down in
                                     significant areas by major types of
                                     credit exposure.
                                    (d) Industry or counterparty type
                                     distribution of exposures, broken
                                     down by major types of credit
                                     exposure.
                                    (e) Remaining contractual maturity
                                     breakdown (for example, one year or
                                     less) of the whole portfolio,
                                     broken down by major types of
                                     credit exposure.
                                    (f) By major industry or
                                     counterparty type:
                                       Amount of impaired loans;
                                       Amount of past due loans;
                                    \19\
                                       Allowances; and
                                       Charge-offs during the
                                    period.
                                    (g) Amount of impaired loans and, if
                                     available, the amount of past due
                                     loans broken down by significant
                                     geographic areas including, if
                                     practical, the amounts of
                                     allowances related to each
                                     geographical area. \20\
                                    (h) Reconciliation of changes in the
                                     allowance for loan and lease
                                     losses. \21\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\15\ Table 4 does not include equity exposures.
\16\ For example, FASB Interpretations 39 and 41.
\17\ For example, State savings associations could apply a breakdown
  similar to that used for accounting purposes.
\18\ Geographical areas may comprise individual countries, groups of
  countries, or regions within countries.
\19\ A State savings association is encouraged also to provide an
  analysis of the aging of past-due loans.
\20\ The portion of general allowance that is not allocated to a
  geographical area should be disclosed separately.
\21\ The reconciliation should include the following: a description of
  the allowance; the opening balance of the allowance; charge-offs taken
  against the allowance during the period; amounts provided (or
  reversed) for estimated probable loan losses during the period; any
  other adjustments (for example, exchange rate differences, business
  combinations, acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries), including
  transfers between allowances; and the closing balance of the
  allowance. Charge-offs and recoveries that have been recorded directly
  to the income statement should be disclosed separately.

    Such a breakdown might, for instance, be (a) loans, off-balance 
sheet commitments, and other non-derivative off-balance sheet exposures, 
(b) debt securities, and (c) OTC derivatives.
    A State savings association might choose to define the geographical 
areas based on the way the company's portfolio is geographically 
managed. The criteria used to allocate the loans to geographical areas 
must be specified.

Table 11.5--Credit Risk: Disclosures for Portfolios Subject to IRB Risk-
                         Based Capital Formulas
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures             (a) Explanation and review of the:
                                       Structure of internal
                                    rating systems and relation between
                                    internal and external ratings;
                                       Use of risk parameter
                                    estimates other than for regulatory
                                    capital purposes;
                                       Process for managing and
                                    recognizing credit risk mitigation
                                    (see table 11.7); and
                                       Control mechanisms for
                                    the rating system, including
                                    discussion of independence,
                                    accountability, and rating systems
                                    review.
                                    (b) Description of the internal
                                     ratings process, provided
                                     separately for the following:
                                       Wholesale category;
                                       Retail subcategories;
                                       Residential mortgage
                                    exposures;
                                       Qualifying revolving
                                    exposures; and
                                       Other retail exposures.
                                      For each category and subcategory
                                    the description should include:
                                       The types of exposure
                                    included in the category/
                                    subcategories; and
                                       The definitions, methods
                                    and data for estimation and
                                    validation of PD, LGD, and EAD,
                                    including assumptions employed in
                                    the derivation of these variables.
                                    \22\
Quantitative Disclosures: Risk      (c) For wholesale exposures, present
 assessment.                         the following information across a
                                     sufficient number of PD grades
                                     (including default) to allow for a
                                     meaningful differentiation of
                                     credit risk: \23\
                                       Total EAD; \24\
                                       Exposure-weighted average
                                    LGD (percentage);
                                       Exposure-weighted average
                                    risk weight; and
                                       Amount of undrawn
                                    commitments and exposure-weighted
                                    average EAD for wholesale exposures.
                                    For each retail subcategory, present
                                     the disclosures outlined above
                                     across a sufficient number of
                                     segments to allow for a meaningful
                                     differentiation of credit risk.

[[Page 1344]]

 
Quantitative Disclosures:           (d) Actual losses in the preceding
 Historical results.                 period for each category and
                                     subcategory and how this differs
                                     from past experience. A discussion
                                     of the factors that impacted the
                                     loss experience in the preceding
                                     period--for example, has the State
                                     savings association experienced
                                     higher than average default rates,
                                     loss rates or EADs.
                                    (e) State savings association's
                                     estimates compared against actual
                                     outcomes over a longer period. \25\
                                     At a minimum, this should include
                                     information on estimates of losses
                                     against actual losses in the
                                     wholesale category and each retail
                                     subcategory over a period
                                     sufficient to allow for a
                                     meaningful assessment of the
                                     performance of the internal rating
                                     processes for each category/
                                     subcategory. \26\ Where
                                     appropriate, the State savings
                                     association should further
                                     decompose this to provide analysis
                                     of PD, LGD, and EAD outcomes
                                     against estimates provided in the
                                     quantitative risk assessment
                                     disclosures above. \27\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\22\ This disclosure does not require a detailed description of the
  model in full--it should provide the reader with a broad overview of
  the model approach, describing definitions of the variables and
  methods for estimating and validating those variables set out in the
  quantitative risk disclosures below. This should be done for each of
  the four category/subcategories. The State savings association should
  disclose any significant differences in approach to estimating these
  variables within each category/subcategories.
\23\ The PD, LGD and EAD disclosures in Table 11.5(c) should reflect the
  effects of collateral, qualifying master netting agreements, eligible
  guarantees and eligible credit derivatives as defined in part I.
  Disclosure of each PD grade should include the exposure-weighted
  average PD for each grade. Where a State savings association
  aggregates PD grades for the purposes of disclosure, this should be a
  representative breakdown of the distribution of PD grades used for
  regulatory capital purposes.
\24\ Outstanding loans and EAD on undrawn commitments can be presented
  on a combined basis for these disclosures.
\25\ These disclosures are a way of further informing the reader about
  the reliability of the information provided in the ``quantitative
  disclosures: risk assessment'' over the long run. The disclosures are
  requirements from year-end 2010; in the meantime, early adoption is
  encouraged. The phased implementation is to allow a State savings
  association sufficient time to build up a longer run of data that will
  make these disclosures meaningful.
\26\ This regulation is not prescriptive about the period used for this
  assessment. Upon implementation, it might be expected that a State
  savings association would provide these disclosures for as long a run
  of data as possible--for example, if a State savings association has
  10 years of data, it might choose to disclose the average default
  rates for each PD grade over that 10-year period. Annual amounts need
  not be disclosed.
\27\ A State savings association should provide this further
  decomposition where it will allow users greater insight into the
  reliability of the estimates provided in the ``quantitative
  disclosures: risk assessment.'' In particular, it should provide this
  information where there are material differences between its estimates
  of PD, LGD or EAD compared to actual outcomes over the long run. The
  State savings association should also provide explanations for such
  differences.


   Table 11.6--General Disclosure for Counterparty Credit Risk of OTC
Derivative Contracts, Repo-Style Transactions, and Eligible Margin Loans
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The general qualitative
                                     disclosure requirement with respect
                                     to OTC derivatives, eligible margin
                                     loans, and repo-style transactions,
                                     including:
                                       Discussion of methodology
                                    used to assign economic capital and
                                    credit limits for counterparty
                                    credit exposures;
                                       Discussion of policies
                                    for securing collateral, valuing and
                                    managing collateral, and
                                    establishing credit reserves;
                                       Discussion of the primary
                                    types of collateral taken;
                                       Discussion of policies
                                    with respect to wrong-way risk
                                    exposures; and
                                       Discussion of the impact
                                    of the amount of collateral the
                                    State savings association would have
                                    to provide if the State savings
                                    association were to receive a credit
                                    rating downgrade.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) Gross positive fair value of
                                     contracts, netting benefits, netted
                                     current credit exposure, collateral
                                     held (including type, for example,
                                     cash, government securities), and
                                     net unsecured credit exposure. \28\
                                     Also report measures for EAD used
                                     for regulatory capital for these
                                     transactions, the notional value of
                                     credit derivative hedges purchased
                                     for counterparty credit risk
                                     protection, and, for State savings
                                     associations not using the internal
                                     models methodology in section 32(d)
                                     of this appendix, the distribution
                                     of current credit exposure by types
                                     of credit exposure. \29\
                                    (c) Notional amount of purchased and
                                     sold credit derivatives, segregated
                                     between use for the State savings
                                     association's own credit portfolio
                                     and for its intermediation
                                     activities, including the
                                     distribution of the credit
                                     derivative products used, broken
                                     down further by protection bought
                                     and sold within each product group.
                                    (d) The estimate of alpha if the
                                     State savings association has
                                     received supervisory approval to
                                     estimate alpha.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


            Table 11.7--Credit Risk Mitigation \30\ \31\ \32\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........    (a) The general qualitative
                                    disclosure requirement with respect
                                    to credit risk mitigation including:
                                     Policies and processes for,
                                     and an indication of the extent to
                                     which the State savings association
                                     uses, on- and off-balance sheet
                                     netting;
                                       Policies and processes
                                    for collateral valuation and
                                    management;
                                       A description of the main
                                    types of collateral taken by the
                                    State savings association;
                                       The main types of
                                    guarantors/credit derivative
                                    counterparties and their
                                    creditworthiness; and
                                       Information about (market
                                    or credit) risk concentrations
                                    within the mitigation taken.

[[Page 1345]]

 
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) For each separately disclosed
                                     portfolio, the total exposure
                                     (after, where applicable, on-or off-
                                     balance sheet netting) that is
                                     covered by guarantees/credit
                                     derivatives.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                       Table 11.8--Securitization
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The general qualitative
                                     disclosure requirement with respect
                                     to securitization (including
                                     synthetics), including a discussion
                                     of:
                                       The State savings
                                    association's objectives relating to
                                    securitization activity, including
                                    the extent to which these activities
                                    transfer credit risk of the
                                    underlying exposures away from the
                                    State savings association to other
                                    entities;
                                       The roles played by the
                                    State savings association in the
                                    securitization process \33\ and an
                                    indication of the extent of the
                                    State savings association's
                                    involvement in each of them; and
                                       The regulatory capital
                                    approaches (for example, RBA, IAA
                                    and SFA) that the State savings
                                    association follows for its
                                    securitization activities.
                                    (b) Summary of the State savings
                                     association's accounting policies
                                     for securitization activities,
                                     including:
                                       Whether the transactions
                                    are treated as sales or financings;
                                       Recognition of gain-on-
                                    sale;
                                       Key assumptions for
                                    valuing retained interests,
                                    including any significant changes
                                    since the last reporting period and
                                    the impact of such changes; and
                                       Treatment of synthetic
                                    securitizations.
                                    (c) Names of NRSROs used for
                                     securitizations and the types of
                                     securitization exposure for which
                                     each agency is used.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (d) The total outstanding exposures
                                     securitized by the State savings
                                     association in securitizations that
                                     meet the operational criteria in
                                     section 41 of this appendix (broken
                                     down into traditional/synthetic),
                                     by underlying exposure type. \34\
                                     \35\ \36\
                                    (e) For exposures securitized by the
                                     State savings association in
                                     securitizations that meet the
                                     operational criteria in Section 41
                                     of this appendix:
                                       Amount of securitized
                                    assets that are impaired/past due;
                                    and
                                       Losses recognized by the
                                    State savings association during the
                                    current period \37\ broken down by
                                    exposure type.
                                    (f) Aggregate amount of
                                     securitization exposures broken
                                     down by underlying exposure type.
                                    (g) Aggregate amount of
                                     securitization exposures and the
                                     associated IRB capital requirements
                                     for these exposures broken down
                                     into a meaningful number of risk
                                     weight bands. Exposures that have
                                     been deducted from capital should
                                     be disclosed separately by type of
                                     underlying asset.
                                    (h) For securitizations subject to
                                     the early amortization treatment,
                                     the following items by underlying
                                     asset type for securitized
                                     facilities:
                                       The aggregate drawn
                                    exposures attributed to the seller's
                                    and investors' interests; and
                                       The aggregate IRB capital
                                    charges incurred by the State
                                    savings association against the
                                    investors' shares of drawn balances
                                    and undrawn lines.
                                    (i) Summary of current year's
                                     securitization activity, including
                                     the amount of exposures securitized
                                     (by exposure type), and recognized
                                     gain or loss on sale by asset type.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\28\ Net unsecured credit exposure is the credit exposure after
  considering the benefits from legally enforceable netting agreements
  and collateral arrangements, without taking into account haircuts for
  price volatility, liquidity, etc.
\29\ This may include interest rate derivative contracts, foreign
  exchange derivative contracts, equity derivative contracts, credit
  derivatives, commodity or other derivative contracts, repo-style
  transactions, and eligible margin loans.
\30\ At a minimum, a State savings association must provide the
  disclosures in Table 11.7 in relation to credit risk mitigation that
  has been recognized for the purposes of reducing capital requirements
  under this appendix. Where relevant, State savings associations are
  encouraged to give further information about mitigants that have not
  been recognized for that purpose.
\31\ Credit derivatives that are treated, for the purposes of this
  appendix, as synthetic securitization exposures should be excluded
  from the credit risk mitigation disclosures and included within those
  relating to securitization.
\32\ Counterparty credit risk-related exposures disclosed pursuant to
  Table 11.6 should be excluded from the credit risk mitigation
  disclosures in Table 11.7.
\33\ For example: originator, investor, servicer, provider of credit
  enhancement, sponsor of asset backed commercial paper facility,
  liquidity provider, or swap provider.
\34\ Underlying exposure types may include, for example, one- to four-
  family residential loans, home equity lines, credit card receivables,
  and auto loans.
\35\ Securitization transactions in which the originating State savings
  association does not retain any securitization exposure should be
  shown separately but need only be reported for the year of inception.
\36\ Where relevant, a State savings association is encouraged to
  differentiate between exposures resulting from activities in which
  they act only as sponsors, and exposures that result from all other
  State savings association securitization activities.
\37\ For example, charge-offs/allowances (if the assets remain on the
  State savings association's balance sheet) or write-downs of I/O
  strips and other residual interests.


                      Table 11.9--Operational Risk
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The general qualitative
                                     disclosure requirement for
                                     operational risk.
                                    (b) Description of the AMA,
                                     including a discussion of relevant
                                     internal and external factors
                                     considered in the State savings
                                     association's measurement approach.
                                    (c) A description of the use of
                                     insurance for the purpose of
                                     mitigating operational risk.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 1346]]


          Table 11.10--Equities Not Subject to Market Risk Rule
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The general qualitative
                                     disclosure requirement with respect
                                     to equity risk, including:
                                       Differentiation between
                                    holdings on which capital gains are
                                    expected and those held for other
                                    objectives, including for
                                    relationship and strategic reasons;
                                    and
                                       Discussion of important
                                    policies covering the valuation of
                                    and accounting for equity holdings
                                    in the banking book. This includes
                                    the accounting techniques and
                                    valuation methodologies used,
                                    including key assumptions and
                                    practices affecting valuation as
                                    well as significant changes in these
                                    practices.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) Value disclosed in the balance
                                     sheet of investments, as well as
                                     the fair value of those
                                     investments; for quoted securities,
                                     a comparison to publicly-quoted
                                     share values where the share price
                                     is materially different from fair
                                     value.
                                    (c) The types and nature of
                                     investments, including the amount
                                     that is:
                                       Publicly traded; and
                                       Non-publicly traded.
                                    (d) The cumulative realized gains
                                     (losses) arising from sales and
                                     liquidations in the reporting
                                     period.
                                    (e)  Total unrealized gains
                                     (losses) \38\
                                       Total latent revaluation
                                    gains (losses) \39\
                                       Any amounts of the above
                                    included in tier 1 and/or tier 2
                                    capital.
                                    (f) Capital requirements broken down
                                     by appropriate equity groupings,
                                     consistent with the State savings
                                     association's methodology, as well
                                     as the aggregate amounts and the
                                     type of equity investments subject
                                     to any supervisory transition
                                     regarding regulatory capital
                                     requirements. \40\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\38\ Unrealized gains (losses) recognized in the balance sheet but not
  through earnings.
\39\ Unrealized gains (losses) not recognized either in the balance
  sheet or through earnings.
\40\ This disclosure should include a breakdown of equities that are
  subject to the 0 percent, 20 percent, 100 percent, 300 percent, 400
  percent, and 600 percent risk weights, as applicable.


       Table 11.11--Interest Rate Risk for Non-trading Activities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Qualitative Disclosures...........  (a) The general qualitative
                                     disclosure requirement, including
                                     the nature of interest rate risk
                                     for non-trading activities and key
                                     assumptions, including assumptions
                                     regarding loan prepayments and
                                     behavior of non-maturity deposits,
                                     and frequency of measurement of
                                     interest rate risk for non-trading
                                     activities.
Quantitative Disclosures..........  (b) The increase (decline) in
                                     earnings or economic value (or
                                     relevant measure used by
                                     management) for upward and downward
                                     rate shocks according to
                                     management's method for measuring
                                     interest rate risk for non-trading
                                     activities, broken down by currency
                                     (as appropriate).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                     Part IX--Transition Provisions

Section 81. Optional Transition Provisions Related to the Implementation 
               of Consolidation Requirements Under FAS 167

    (a) Scope, applicability, and purpose. This section 81 provides 
optional transition provisions for a State savings association that is 
required for financial and regulatory reporting purposes, as a result of 
its implementation of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 
167, Amendments to FASB Interpretation No. 46(R) (FAS 167), to 
consolidate certain variable interest entities (VIEs) as defined under 
GAAP. These transition provisions apply through the end of the fourth 
quarter following the date of a State savings association's 
implementation of FAS 167 (implementation date).
    (b) Exclusion period. (1) Exclusion of risk-weighted assets for the 
first and second quarters. For the first two quarters after the 
implementation date (exclusion period), including for the two calendar 
quarter-end regulatory report dates within those quarters, a State 
savings association may exclude from risk-weighted assets:
    (i) Subject to the limitations in paragraph (d) of section 81, 
assets held by a VIE, provided that the following conditions are met:
    (A) The VIE existed prior to the implementation date,
    (B) The State savings association did not consolidate the VIE on its 
balance sheet for calendar quarter-end regulatory report dates prior to 
the implementation date,
    (C) The State savings association must consolidate the VIE on its 
balance sheet beginning as of the implementation date as a result of its 
implementation of FAS 167, and
    (D) The State savings association excludes all assets held by VIEs 
described in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A) through (C) of this section 81; and
    (ii) Subject to the limitations in paragraph (d) of this section 81, 
assets held by a VIE that is a consolidated ABCP program, provided that 
the following conditions are met:
    (A) The State savings association is the sponsor of the ABCP 
program,
    (B) Prior to the implementation date, the State savings association 
consolidated the VIE onto its balance sheet under GAAP and excluded the 
VIE's assets from the State savings association's risk-weighted assets, 
and

[[Page 1347]]

    (C) The State savings association chooses to exclude all assets held 
by ABCP program VIEs described in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii)(A) and (B) of 
this section 81.
    (2) Risk-weighted assets during exclusion period. During the 
exclusion period, including for the two calendar quarter-end regulatory 
report dates within the exclusion period, a State savings association 
adopting the optional provisions in paragraph (b) of this section must 
calculate risk-weighted assets for its contractual exposures to the VIEs 
referenced in paragraph (b)(1) of this section 81 on the implementation 
date and include this calculated amount in risk-weighted assets. Such 
contractual exposures may include direct-credit substitutes, recourse 
obligations, residual interests, liquidity facilities, and loans.
    (3) Inclusion of ALLL in tier 2 capital for the first and second 
quarters. During the exclusion period, including for the two calendar 
quarter-end regulatory report dates within the exclusion period, a State 
savings association that excludes VIE assets from risk-weighted assets 
pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section 81 may include in tier 2 
capital the full amount of the ALLL calculated as of the implementation 
date that is attributable to the assets it excludes pursuant to 
paragraph (b)(1) of this section 81 (inclusion amount). The amount of 
ALLL includable in tier 2 capital in accordance with this paragraph 
shall not be subject to the limitations set forth in section 13(A)(2) 
and 13(b) of this Appendix.
    (c) Phase-in period. (1) Exclusion amount. For purposes of this 
paragraph (c), exclusion amount is defined as the amount of risk-
weighted assets excluded in paragraph (b)(1) of this section as of the 
implementation date.
    (2) Risk-weighted assets for the third and fourth quarters. A State 
savings association that excludes assets of consolidated VIEs from risk-
weighted assets pursuant to paragraph (b)(1) of this section may, for 
the third and fourth quarters after the implementation date (phase-in 
period), including for the two calendar quarter-end regulatory report 
dates within those quarters, exclude from risk-weighted assets 50 
percent of the exclusion amount, provided that the State savings 
association may not include in risk-weighted assets pursuant to this 
paragraph an amount less than the aggregate risk-weighted assets 
calculated pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this section 81.
    (3) Inclusion of ALLL in tier 2 capital for the third and fourth 
quarters. A State savings association that excludes assets of 
consolidated VIEs from risk-weighted assets pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) 
of this section may, for the phase-in period, include in tier 2 capital 
50 percent of the inclusion amount it included in tier 2 capital, during 
the exclusion period, notwithstanding the limit on including ALLL in 
tier 2 capital in section 13(a)(2) and 13(b) of this Appendix.
    (d) Implicit recourse limitation. Notwithstanding any other 
provision in this section 81, assets held by a VIE to which the State 
savings association has provided recourse through credit enhancement 
beyond any contractual obligation to support assets it has sold may not 
be excluded from risk-weighted assets.



PART 391_FORMER OFFICE OF THRIFT SUPERVISION REGULATIONS--
Table of Contents



                      Subpart A_Security Procedures

Sec.
391.1  Authority, purpose, and scope.
391.2  Designation of security officer.
391.3  Security program.
391.4  Report.
391.5  Protection of customer information.

Subparts B-E [Reserved]

    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1819(a) (Tenth).; Subpart A also issued under 
12 U.S.C. 1462a; 1463; 1464; 1828; 1831p-1; 1881-1884; 15 U.S.C. 1681w; 
15 U.S.C. 6801; 6805.; Subpart B also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462a; 
1463; 1464; 1828; 1831p-1; 1881-1884; 15 U.S.C.1681w; 15 U.S.C. 6801; 
6805.; Subpart C also issued under 12 U.S.C. 1462a; 1463; 1464; 1828; 
1831p-1; and 1881-1884; 15 U.S.C. 1681m; 1681w.; Subpart D also issued 
under 12 U.S.C. 1462; 1462a; 1463; 1464; 42 U.S.C. 4012a; 4104a; 4104b; 
4106; 4128.

    Source: 76 FR 47811, Aug. 5, 2011, unless otherwise noted.



                      Subpart A_Security Procedures



Sec. 391.1  Authority, purpose, and scope.

    (a) This subpart is issued by the Federal Deposit Insurance 
Corporation (FDIC) under section 3 of the Bank Protection Act of 1968 
(12 U.S.C 1828), and sections 501 and 505(b)(1) of the Gramm-Leach-
Bliley Act (15 U.S.C. 6801 and 6805(b)(1)), and section 628 of the Fair 
Credit Reporting Act (15 U.S.C. 1681w). This subpart is applicable to 
State savings associations. It requires each State savings association 
to adopt appropriate security procedures to discourage robberies, 
burglaries, and larcenies and to assist in the identification and 
prosecution of persons who commit such acts. Section 391.5 is applicable 
to State savings associations and their subsidiaries (except brokers, 
dealers, persons providing insurance, investment companies, and

[[Page 1348]]

investment advisers). Section 391.5 requires covered institutions to 
establish and implement appropriate administrative, technical, and 
physical safeguards to protect the security, confidentiality, and 
integrity of customer information.
    (b) It is the responsibility of a State savings association's board 
of directors to comply with this regulation and ensure that a written 
security program for the State savings association's main office and 
branches is developed and implemented.



Sec. 391.2  Designation of security officer.

    Within 30 days after the effective date of insurance of accounts, 
the board of directors of each State savings association shall designate 
a security officer who shall have the authority, subject to the approval 
of the board of directors, to develop, within a reasonable time but no 
later than 180 days, and to administer a written security program for 
each of the State savings association's offices.



Sec. 391.3  Security program.

    (a) Contents of security program. The security program shall:
    (1) Establish procedures for opening and closing for business and 
for the safekeeping of all currency, negotiable securities, and similar 
valuables at all times;
    (2) Establish procedures that will assist in identifying persons 
committing crimes against the State savings association and that will 
preserve evidence that may aid in their identification and prosecution. 
Such procedures may include, but are not limited to:
    (i) Maintaining a camera that records activity in the office;
    (ii) Using identification devices, such as prerecorded serial-
numbered bills, or chemical and electronic devices; and
    (iii) Retaining a record of any robbery, burglary, or larceny 
committed against the State savings association;
    (3) Provide for initial and periodic training of officers and 
employees in their responsibilities under the security program and in 
proper employee conduct during and after a burglary, robbery, or 
larceny; and
    (4) Provide for selecting, testing, operating and maintaining 
appropriate security devices, as specified in paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (b) Security devices. Each State savings association shall have, at 
a minimum, the following security devices:
    (1) A means of protecting cash and other liquid assets, such as a 
vault, safe, or other secure space;
    (2) A lighting system for illuminating, during the hours of 
darkness, the area around the vault, if the vault is visible from 
outside the office;
    (3) Tamper-resistant locks on exterior doors and exterior windows 
that may be opened;
    (4) An alarm system or other appropriate device for promptly 
notifying the nearest responsible law enforcement officers of an 
attempted or perpetrated robbery or burglary; and
    (5) Such other devices as the security officer determines to be 
appropriate, taking into consideration:
    (i) The incidence of crimes against financial institutions in the 
area;
    (ii) The amount of currency and other valuables exposed to robbery, 
burglary, or larceny;
    (iii) The distance of the office from the nearest responsible law 
enforcement officers;
    (iv) The cost of the security devices;
    (v) Other security measures in effect at the office; and
    (vi) The physical characteristics of the structure of the office and 
its surroundings.



Sec. 391.4  Report.

    The security officer for each State savings association shall report 
at least annually to the State savings association's board of directors 
on the implementation, administration, and effectiveness of the security 
program.



Sec. 391.5  Protection of customer information.

    State savings associations and their subsidiaries (except brokers, 
dealers, persons providing insurance, investment companies, and 
investment advisers) must comply with the Interagency Guidelines 
Establishing Information Security Standards set forth in appendix B to 
subpart B. Supplement A to appendix B to subpart B provides interpretive 
guidance.

[[Page 1349]]

Subparts B-E [Reserved]

                        PARTS 392	399 [RESERVED]

[[Page 1351]]



           CHAPTER IV--EXPORT-IMPORT BANK OF THE UNITED STATES




  --------------------------------------------------------------------
Part                                                                Page
400             Employee financial disclosure and ethical 
                    conduct standards regulations...........        1353
403             Classification, declassification, and 
                    safeguarding of national security 
                    information.............................        1353
404             Information disclosure......................        1364
405             [Reserved]

407             Regulations governing public observation of 
                    Eximbank meetings.......................        1381
408             Procedures for compliance with the National 
                    Environmental Policy Act................        1385
410             Enforcement of nondiscrimination on the 
                    basis of handicap in programs or 
                    activities conducted by Export-Import 
                    Bank of the United States...............        1387
411             New restrictions on lobbying................        1393
412             Acceptance of payment from a non-Federal 
                    source for travel expenses..............        1404
414             Conference and other fees...................        1406
415-499         [Reserved]

[[Page 1353]]



PART 400_EMPLOYEE FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE AND ETHICAL CONDUCT
STANDARDS REGULATIONS--Table of Contents



    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 7301.

    Source: 60 FR 17628, Apr. 7, 1995, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 400.101  Cross-reference to employee financial disclosure and
ethical conduct standards regulations.

    Employees of the Export-Import Bank of the United States (Bank) 
should refer to:
    (a) The executive branch-wide financial disclosure regulations at 5 
CFR part 2634;
    (b) The executive branch-wide Standards of Ethical Conduct at 5 CFR 
part 2635; and
    (c) The Bank regulations at 5 CFR part 6201 which supplement the 
executive branch-wide standards.



PART 403_CLASSIFICATION, DECLASSIFICATION, AND SAFEGUARDING OF
NATIONAL SECURITY INFORMATION--Table of Contents



Sec.
403.1  General policies and definitions.
403.2  Responsibilities.
403.3  Classification principles and authority.
403.4  Derivative classification.
403.5  Declassification and downgrading.
403.6  Systematic review for declassification.
403.7  Mandatory review for declassification.
403.8  Appeals.
403.9  Fees.
403.10  Safeguarding.
403.11  Enforcement and investigation procedures.

    Authority: E.O. 12356, National Security Information, April 2, 1982 
(3 CFR, 1982 Comp. p. 166) (hereafter referred to as the Order), 
Information Security Oversight Directive No. 1, June 25, 1982 (32 CFR 
part 2001) (hereafter referred to as the Directive), and National 
Security Decision Directive 84, ``Safeguarding National 
SecurityInformation,'' signed by the President on March 11, 1983 
(hereafter referred to as NSDD 84).

    Source: 50 FR 27215, July 2, 1985, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 403.1  General policies and definitions.

    (a) This regulation of the Export-Import Bank (the Bank) implements 
executive orders which govern the classification, declassification, and 
safeguarding of national security information and material of the United 
States. This regulation is based on Executive Order 12356, National 
Security Information, April 2, 1982 (3 CFR, 1982 Comp. p. 166) 
(hereafter referred to as the Order), Information Security Oversight 
Directive No. 1, June 25, 1982 (32 CFR part 2001) (hereafter referred to 
as the Directive), and National Security Decision Directive 84, 
``Safeguarding National Security Information,'' signed by the President 
on March 11, 1983 (hereafter referred to as NSDD 84). Violation of the 
provisions of part 403 may result in the imposition of administrative 
penalties, and civil and criminal penalties under applicable law. 
Executive Order 12356 prescribes a uniform system for classifying, 
declassifying, and safeguarding national security information. It 
recognizes that it is essential that the public be informed concerning 
the activities of the Government, but that the interests of the United 
States and its citizens require that certain information concerning the 
national defense and foreign relations be protected against unauthorized 
disclosure. Information may not be classified under the Order unless its 
disclosure reasonably could be expected to cause damage to the national 
security.
    (b) For the purposes of the Order, the Directive and these 
guidelines, the following terms shall have the meanings specified below:
    (1) Information means any information or material, regardless of its 
physical form or characteristics, that is owned by, produced by or for, 
or is under the control of the United States Government.
    (2) National security information means information that has been 
determined pursuant to this Order or any predecessor order to require 
protection against unauthorized disclosure and that is so designated.
    (3) Foreign government information means: (i) Information provided 
by a foreign government or governments, an international organization of 
governments, or any element thereof with the expectation, expressed or 
implied, that

[[Page 1354]]

the information, the source of the information, or both, are to be held 
in confidence; or
    (ii) Information produced by the United States pursuant to or as a 
result of a joint arrangement with a foreign government or governments 
or an international organization of governments, or any element thereof, 
requiring that the information, the arrangement, or both, are to be held 
in confidence.
    (4) National security means the national defense or foreign 
relations of the United States.
    (5) Confidential source means any individual or organization that 
has provided, or that may reasonably be expected to provide, information 
to the United States on matters pertaining to the national security with 
the expectation, expressed or implied, that the information or 
relationship, or both, be held in confidence.
    (6) Original classification means an initial determination that 
information requires, in the interest of national security, protection 
against unauthorized disclosure, together with a classification 
designation signifying the level of protection required.



Sec. 403.2  Responsibilities.

    In the carrying out of security procedures, responsibility falls on 
all personnel generally and on certain personnel in a more particular 
manner.
    (a) Individual. Each employee of the Bank having access to 
classified material has an individual responsibility to protect such 
information. Classified information should be secured in approved 
equipment or facilities whenever it is not under the direct control of 
the employee.
    (b) Office and Division Heads. These officials have the additional 
responsibility of a continuing review for ascertaining that security 
procedures are properly observed by the personnel comprising their 
respective offices.
    (c) Security Officer. (1) The Security Officer has the 
responsibility for developing, inspecting, and advising on procedures 
and controls for safeguarding classified material originating in, 
received by, in transit through, or in custody of the Bank; the training 
and orientation of employees; the carrying out of inspections; and the 
destruction of obsolete and non-record material.
    (2) The Security Officer shall be responsible for disseminating 
written material and conducting oral briefings to inform Bank personnel 
of the Order, Directive, and regulations. An explanation of the 
practical application of these procedures and the underlying policy 
objectives thereof shall be emphasized.
    (d) Security Committee. (1) This Committee consists of the General 
Counsel, as Chairperson, the Security Officer, and other Bank employees, 
as designated by the President and Chairman (hereinafter referred to as 
the Chairman) and is responsible for the implementation and enforcement 
of the Order and the Directive. This Committee will act on all matters 
with respect to the Bank's administration of these regulations.
    (2) All suggestions and complaints regarding the Bank's Information 
Security Program, including those regarding over-classification, failure 
to declassify, or delay in declassifying, not otherwise provided for 
herein, shall be referred to the Security Committee for review.
    (3) The Security Committee shall have responsibility for 
recommending to the Chairman appropriate administrative action to 
correct abuse or violation of these regulations or of any provision of 
the Order or Directive thereunder, including but not limited to 
notification by warning letter, formal suspension without pay, and 
removal. Upon receipt of such a recommendation, the Chairman shall make 
a decision and advise the Security Committee of this action.



Sec. 403.3  Classification principles and authority.

    (a) Classification Principles. (1) Except as provided in the Atomic 
Energy Act of 1954, as amended, the Order provides the only basis for 
classifying national security information. Information held by the Bank 
will be made available to the public to the extent possible consistent 
with the need to protect the national defense or foreign relations, as 
required by the interests of the United

[[Page 1355]]

States and its citizens. Accordingly, security classification shall be 
applied only to protect the national security.
    (2) Before a classification determination is made, each item of 
information that may require protection shall be identified exactly. 
This requires identification of that specific information, disclosure of 
which could affect the national security. When there is reasonable doubt 
about the need to classify, the information should be safeguarded as if 
it were confidential until a final determination is made by an 
authorized classifier as to its classification. The final determination 
must be made within thirty (30) days.
    (b) Classification Designations. Information which requires 
protection against unauthorized disclosure in the interest of national 
security (classified information) shall be classified at one of the 
following three levels:
    (1) TOP SECRET shall be applied only to information, the 
unauthorized disclosure of which reasonably could be expected to cause 
exceptionally grave damage to the national security.
    (2) SECRET shall be applied only to information, the unauthorized 
disclosure of which reasonably could be expected to cause serious damage 
to the national security.
    (3) CONFIDENTIAL shall be applied to information, the unauthorized 
disclosure of which reasonably could be expected to cause damage to the 
national security.

Except as provided by statute, no other terms, such as SENSITIVE, 
OFFICIAL BUSINESS ONLY, AGENCY, BUSINESS, ADMINISTRATIVELY, etc., shall 
be used within the Bank in conjunction with any of the three 
classification levels defined above.
    (c) Original Classification Authority and Criteria. (1) The Bank's 
authority to assign original classification to any document is limited 
as follows and is nondelegable:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Classification                         Classifier
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CONFIDENTIAL..............................
                                            President and Chairman.
                                            First Vice President and
                                             Vice Chairman.
                                            General Counsel.
                                            Senior Vice Presidents.
                                            Security Officer.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) A determination to classify information shall be made by an 
original classification authority when the information concerns one or 
more of categories (i) through (x) of this paragraph, and when the 
unauthorized disclosure of the information, either by itself or in the 
context of other information, reasonably could be expected to cause 
damage to the national security. Information shall be considered for 
classification if it concerns:
    (i) Military plans, weapons, or operations;
    (ii) The vulnerabilities or capabilities of systems, installations, 
projects, or plans relating to the national security;
    (iii) Foreign government information;
    (iv) Intelligence activities (including special activities), or 
intelligence sources or methods;
    (v) Foreign relations or foreign activities of the United States;
    (vi) Scientific, technological, or economic matters relating to the 
national security;
    (vii) United States Government programs for safeguarding nuclear 
materials or facilities;
    (viii) Cryptology;
    (ix) A confidential source; or
    (x) Other categories of information that are related to the national 
security and that require protection against unauthorized disclosure as 
determined by the President of the United States, by the Chairman or by 
other officials who have been delegated original classification 
authority by the President. Recommendations concerning the need to 
designate additional categories of information that may be considered 
for classification shall be forwarded through the Security Officer to 
the Chairman for determination. Such a determination shall be reported 
to the Director of the Information Security Oversight Office.
    (3) Information that is determined to concern one or more of the 
above categories shall be classified when an original classification 
authority also determines that its unauthorized disclosure, either by 
itself or in the context of other information, reasonably could be 
expected to cause damage to

[[Page 1356]]

the national security. Accordingly, certain information which would 
otherwise be unclassified may require classification when associated 
with other unclassified or classified information. Classification on 
this basis shall be supported by a written explanation that, at a 
minimum, shall be maintained with the file or reference on the recent 
copy of the information.
    (4) Unauthorized disclosure of foreign government information, the 
identity of a confidential foreign source, or disclosure of intelligence 
sources or methods is presumed to cause damage to the national security.
    (5) Information classified in accordance with the above 
classification categories shall not be declassified automatically as a 
result of any unofficial publication or inadvertent or unauthorized 
disclosure in the United States or abroad of identical or similar 
information.
    (d) Duration of Original Classification. (1) Information shall be 
classified as long as required by national security considerations. When 
it can be determined, a specific date or event for declassification 
shall be set by the original classification authority at the time the 
information is originally classified. If the date or event for 
declassification cannot be determined at the time of classification, the 
standard notation ``Originating Agency's Determination Required'', or 
its abbreviation ``OADR'', should be entered on the ``Declassify on'' 
line.
    (2) Automatic declassification determinations under predecessor 
orders shall remain valid unless the classification is extended by an 
authorized declassification authority. These extensions may be by 
individual documents or categories of information, provided, however, 
that any extension of classification on other than an individual 
document basis shall be reported to the Director of the Information 
Security Oversight Office. The declassification authority shall be 
responsible for notifying holders of the information of such extensions.
    (3) Information classified under predecessor orders and marked for 
declassification review shall remain classified until reviewed for 
declassification under the provisions of the Order.
    (e) Marking and Identification. (1) Classified information must be 
marked, or otherwise identified, to inform and warn the holder of the 
information of its sensitivity. The classifier is responsible for 
ensuring that proper classification markings are applied. At the time of 
classification, the following information shall be shown on the face of 
all classified documents, or clearly associated with other forms of 
classified information in a manner appropriate to the medium involved, 
unless this information itself would reveal a confidential source or 
relationship not otherwise evident in the document or information:
    (i) One of the three classification levels defined in Sec. 403.3(b); 
``(TS)'' for Top Secret, ``(S)'' for Secret, ``(C)'' for Confidential, 
and ``(U)'' for Unclassified; with each page marked at top and bottom 
according to the highest level of classified information on each page.
    (ii) The identity of the original classification authority if other 
than the person whose name appears as the approving or signing official;
    (iii) The agency and office of origin; and
    (iv) The date or event for declassification, or the notation 
``Originating Agency's Determination Required.''
    (2) Each classified document shall, by marking or other means, 
indicate which portions are classified, with the applicable 
classification level, and which portions are not classified. The 
Chairman may, for good cause, grant and revoke waivers of this 
requirement for specified classes of documents or information. The 
Director of the Information Security Oversight Office shall be notified 
of any waivers.
    (3) Marking designations implementing the provisions of the Order, 
including abbreviations, shall conform to the standards prescribed in 
implementing directives issued by the Information Security Oversight 
Office. All authorized classifiers shall be issued a uniform stamp that 
has a ``Classified by'' line and a ``Declassify on'' line.
    (4) Documents that contain foreign government information shall 
include either the marking, ``FOREIGN GOVERNMENT INFORMATION'', or a 
marking that otherwise indicates that the information is foreign 
government

[[Page 1357]]

information. If that fact must be concealed, the document will be marked 
as if it were of U.S. origin. Foreign government information shall 
either retain its original classification or be assigned a United States 
classification that shall ensure a degree of protection at least 
equivalent to that required by the entity that furnished the 
information.
    (5) Documents that contain information relating to intelligence 
sources or methods shall include the following marking unless proscribed 
by the Director of the Central Intelligence; WARNING NOTICE--
INTELLIGENCE SOURCES OR METHODS INVOLVED.
    (6) Information assigned a level of classification under predecessor 
orders shall be considered as classified at that level of classification 
despite the omission of other required markings. Omitted markings may be 
inserted on a document by the General Counsel or the Security Officer.
    (f) Limitations on Classification. (1) In no case shall information 
be classified in order to conceal violations of law, inefficiency, or 
administrative error; to prevent embarrassment to a person, 
organization, or agency; to restrain competition; or to prevent or delay 
the release of information that does not require protection in the 
interest of national security.
    (2) Basic scientific research information not clearly related to the 
national security may not be classified.
    (3) The Chairman or other authorized original classifiers may 
reclassify information previously declassified and disclosed if it is 
determined in writing that--
    (i) The information requires protection in the interest of national 
security, and
    (ii) The information may reasonably be recovered.


In making such determination, the Chairman or any other authorized 
original classifier shall consider the following factors: The lapse of 
time following disclosure; the nature and extent of disclosure; the 
ability to bring the fact of reclassification to the attention of 
persons to whom the information was disclosed; the ability to prevent 
further disclosure; and the ability to retrieve the information 
voluntarily from persons not authorized access to its reclassified 
state. These reclassification actions shall be reported promptly to the 
Director of the Information Security Oversight Office.
    (4) Information may be classified or reclassified after an agency 
has received a request for it under the Freedom of Information Act (5 
U.S.C. 552) or the Privacy Act of 1974 (5 U.S.C. 552a), or the mandatory 
review provisions of the Order and these regulations, if such 
classification meets the requirements of the Order and is accomplished 
personally and on a document-by-document basis by the Chairman, the Vice 
Chairman, or the Security Officer.



Sec. 403.4  Derivative classification.

    (a) Use of derivative classification. (1) Unlike original 
classification which is an initial determination, derivative 
classification is an incorporation, paraphrasing, restatement, or 
generation in new form of information that is already classified. 
Derivative classification is the responsibility of those who only 
reproduce, extract, or summarize classified information, or who only 
apply classification markings derived from source material or as 
directed by a classification guide. Original classification authority is 
not required for derivative classification.
    (2) Persons who apply such derivative classification markings shall:
    (i) Respect original classification decisions;
    (ii) Verify the information's current level of classification so far 
as practicable before applying the markings; and
    (iii) Carry forward to any newly created documents the assigned 
dates or events for declassification or review. The latest date for 
declassification should be entered in the case of multiple source 
documents.
    (b) New Material. (1) New material that derives its classification 
from information classified on or after the effective date of the Order, 
April 2, 1982, shall be marked with the declassification date or event, 
or the date for review, as assigned to the source information.

[[Page 1358]]

    (2) New material that derives its classification under prior orders 
shall be treated as follows:
    (i) If the source material bears a classification date or event 20 
years or less from the date or origin, that date or event shall be 
carried forward on the new material.
    (ii) If the source material bears no declassification date or event 
or is marked for declassification beyond 20 years, the new material 
shall be marked with a date for review for declassification at 20 years 
from the date of original classification of the source material.
    (iii) If the source material is foreign government information 
bearing no date or event for declassification or is marked for 
declassification beyond 30 years, the new material shall be marked for 
review for declassification at 30 years from the date of original 
classification of the source materials.
    (iv) A copy of the source document or documents should be maintained 
with the file copy of the new document or documents which have been 
derivatively classified.



Sec. 403.5  Declassification and downgrading.

    (a) Authority and policy for declassification and downgrading. 
Information that continues to meet the classification requirements 
prescribed in Sec. 403.3(c) despite the passage of time will continue to 
be safeguarded. However, information which is properly classified at the 
time it is developed may not necessarily require protection 
indefinitely. National security information over which the Bank 
exercises final classification jurisdiction shall be declassified or 
downgraded as soon as national security considerations permit. 
Information shall be declassified or downgraded by:
    (1) The official who authorized the original classification, if that 
official is still serving in the same position, by a successor, or by a 
supervisory official of either; or
    (2) Officials specifically delegated this authority in writing by 
the Chairman or by the Security Officer. A list of those who may be so 
delegated shall be maintained by the Security Officer.
    (3) If the Director of the Information Security Oversight Office 
determines that information is unlawfully classified, the Director may 
require the Export-Import Bank to declassify it. Any such decision by 
the Director may be appealed to the National Security Council. The 
information shall remain classified until the appeal is decided.
    (b) Declassification Procedure. Information marked with a specific 
declassification date or event shall be declassified on that date or 
upon occurrence of that event. The overall classification markings shall 
be lined through a statement placed on the cover or first page to 
indicate the declassification authority, by name and title, and the date 
of declassification. If practicable, the classification markings on each 
page shall be cancelled; otherwise, the statement on the cover or first 
page shall indicate that the declassification applies to the entire 
document.
    (c) Notification to Holders. When classified information has been 
properly marked with specific dates or events for declassification it is 
not necessary to issue notices of declassification to any holders. 
However, when declassification action is taken earlier than originally 
scheduled, or the duration of classification is extended, the authority 
making such changes shall promptly notify all holders to whom the 
information was originally transmitted. This notification shall include 
the marking action to be taken, the authority for the change (name and 
title), and the effective date of the change. Upon receipt of 
notification, recipients shall make the proper changes and shall notify 
holders to whom they have transmitted the classified information.
    (d) Downgrading. Information designated a particular level of 
classification may be assigned a lower classification level by the 
original classifier or by an official authorized to declassify the same 
information. Prompt notice of such downgrading shall be provided to 
known holders of the information. Classified information marked for 
automatic downgrading under previous Executive Orders shall be reviewed 
to determine that it no longer continues to meet classification 
requirements despite the passage of time.

[[Page 1359]]

    (e) Transferred Information. Classified information transferred from 
one agency to another in conjunction with a transfer of functions, and 
not merely for storage purposes, shall be considered under the control 
of the receiving agency for purposes of downgrading and 
declassification, subject to consultation with any other agency that has 
an interest in the subject matter of the information. Prior to 
forwarding classified information to an approved storage facility of the 
Bank, to a Federal records center, or to the National Archives for 
permanent preservation, the information shall be reviewed for 
downgrading or declassification.



Sec. 403.6  Systematic review for declassification.

    Classified information determined by the Archivist of the United 
States to be of sufficient value to warrant permanent retention will be 
subject to systematic declassification review by the Archivist in 
accordance with guidelines provided by the Bank, as originator of the 
information. These guidelines shall be developed by the Security Officer 
who is designated by the Bank to assist the Archivist in the review 
process. The guidelines shall be reviewed every five years or as 
requested by the Archivist of the United States.



Sec. 403.7  Mandatory review for declassification.

    (a) Classified information under the jurisdiction of the Bank shall 
be reviewed for declassification upon receipt of a request by a United 
States citizen or permanent resident alien, a Federal agency, or a State 
or local government. A request for mandatory review of classified 
information shall be submitted in writing and describe the information 
with sufficient particularity to locate it with a reasonable amount of 
effort. Requests may be addressed to the:

General Counsel, Export-Import Bank of the U.S., 811 Vermont Avenue, 
NW., Washington, DC 20571

    (b) The Bank's response to mandatory review requests will be 
governed by the amount of search and review time required to process the 
request. The Bank will acknowledge receipt of all requests, and will 
inform the requester if additional time is needed to process the 
request. Except in unusual circumstances, the Bank will make a final 
determination within one year from the date of receipt of the request.
    (c) When information cannot be declassified in its entirety, the 
Bank will make a reasonable effort to release, consistent with other 
applicable laws, those declassified portions that constitute a coherent 
segment.
    (d) The bank shall determine whether information under the 
classification jurisdiction of the Bank or any reasonably segregable 
portion of it no longer requires protection. If so, the General Counsel 
shall promptly make such information available to the requester, and 
shall inform the requester of any fees due before releasing the 
document. If the information may not be released, in whole or in part, 
the General Counsel shall give the requester a brief statement of the 
reasons, and a notice, mailed with return receipt requested, of the 
right to appeal the determination within 60 days of the denial letter's 
receipt.
    (e) The agency that initially received or classified records 
containing foreign government information shall be responsible for 
making a declassification determination on review requests for 
classified records which contain such foreign government information. 
Such requests shall be referred to the appropriate agency for action.
    (f) When the Bank receives a mandatory declassification review 
request for records in its possession that were originated by another 
agency, it shall forward the request to that agency. The Bank may 
request notification of the declassification determination.
    (g) Information originated by a President, the White House staff, by 
committees, commissions, or boards appointed by the President, or other 
specifically providing advice and counsel to a President or acting on 
behalf of a President is exempted from the provisions of mandatory 
review for declassification, except as consistent with applicable laws 
that pertain to presidential papers or records.
    (h) The bank shall process requests for declassification that are 
submitted under the provisions of the Freedom of Information Act, as 
amended, or the

[[Page 1360]]

Privacy Act of 1974, in accordance with the provisions of those acts. 
(See, 12 CFR part 404 and 12 CFR part 405, respectively.) In any case, 
however, exemptions under the Freedom of Information Act or other 
exemptions under applicable law may be invoked by the Bank to deny 
material on grounds other than classification.
    (i) The Bank shall refuse to confirm or deny the existence or non-
existence of requested information whenever the fact of its existence or 
non-existence is itself classifiable under the Order.



Sec. 403.8  Appeals.

    (a) The Vice Chairman is designated to receive appeals on requests 
for declassification which have been denied by the Bank. Such appeals 
shall be addressed to:

First Vice President & Vice Chairman, Export-Import Bank of the United 
States, 811 Vermont Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20571


The appeal must be received within 60 days after receipt by appellant of 
the denial letter. Appeals shall be decided within 30 days of their 
receipt by the Vice Chairman.
    (1) If the decision is to declassify the materials in their 
entirety, the Vice Chairman shall promptly make such information 
available to the requester, and inform the requester of any fees due 
before releasing the documents.
    (2) If the decision is to deny declassification of a portion of the 
material, the Vice Chairman shall promptly make the part which was 
declassified available to the requester, and shall advise the requester, 
in writing, of the reasons for the partial denial of declassification.
    (3) If the decision is to deny declassification of all the material, 
the Vice Chairman shall promptly advise the requester, in writing, of 
the reasons for such denial.



Sec. 403.9  Fees.

    The following specific fees shall be applicable with respect to 
services rendered to members of the public under these regulations, by 
the Bank, except that the search fee will normally be waived when the 
search involves less than one-half hour of clerical time.

    (a) Search for records, per hour or fraction thereof:
  (i) Professional............................................... $11.00
     (ii) Clerical...................................................   
                                                                    6.00
  (b) Computer service charges per second for actual use of computer 
 central processing unit............................................    
                                                                     .25
  (c) Copies made by photostat or otherwise (per page); maximum of 5 
 copies will be provided............................................    
                                                                     .10
     (d) Certification of each record as a true copy.................   
                                                                    1.00
  (e) Certification of each record as a true copy under official seal 
                                                                    1.50
     (f) Duplication of architectural photographs and drawings.......   
                                                                    2.00


Fees must be paid in full prior to issuance of requested copies. 
Remittances shall be in the form either of a personal check or bank 
draft drawn on a bank in the United States, or postal money order. 
Remittances shall be made payable to the order of the Export-Import Bank 
of the United States, and mailed to:

General Counsel, Export-Import Bank of the United States, 811 Vermont 
Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20571



Sec. 403.10  Safeguarding.

    (a) General Access Requirements. Except as provided in 
Sec. 403.10(c), access to classified information shall be granted in 
accordance with the following:
    (1) Determination of Trustworthiness. No person shall be given 
access to classified information or material unless a favorable 
determination has been made as to his trustworthiness. The determination 
of eligibility, referred to as a security clearance, shall be based on 
such investigations as the Bank may require in accordance with the 
standards and criteria of applicable law and Executive orders.
    (2) Determination of Need to Know. In addition to a security 
clearance, a person must have a need for access to the particular 
classified information or material sought in connection with the 
performance of official duties or contractual obligations. The 
determination of that need shall be made by officials having 
responsibility for the classified information or material.
    (b) Classified Information Nondisclosure Agreement. All persons with 
authorized access to classified information shall be required to sign a 
nondisclosure agreement, Standard Form 189, as a

[[Page 1361]]

condition of access. This form shall be retained in the security file of 
the individual for 50 years.
    (c) Access by Historical Researchers and Former Presidential 
Appointees. The Bank shall obtain written agreements from requesters to 
safeguard the information to which they are given access as permitted by 
the Order and written consent to the Bank's review of their notes and 
manuscripts for the purpose of determining that no classified 
information is contained therein. A determination of trustworthiness is 
a pre-condition to a requester's access. If the access requested by 
historical researchers and former Presidential Appointees requires the 
rendering of services for which fair and equitable fees may be charged 
pursuant to title 5 of the Independent Offices Appropriations Act, 65 
Stat. 290, 31 U.S.C. 483a (1976), the requester shall be so notified and 
the fees may be imposed.
    (d) Media Contacts. All contacts by members of the media which 
concern classified information shall be directed to the attention of the 
Security Officer, Room 1031, Export-Import Bank of the United States, 
811 Vermont Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20571.
    (e) Dissemination. Except as otherwise provided by directives issued 
by the President through the National Security Council, classified 
information originating in another agency and in the possession of the 
Bank may not be disseminated outside the Bank without the consent of the 
originating agency.
    (f) Accountability Procedures. Dissemination of various levels of 
classified information or material shall be within the control and 
responsibility of designated control officers. Particularly stringent 
controls shall be placed on information and material classified as TOP 
SECRET.
    (1) TOP SECRET. Designated as TOP SECRET control officers are the 
Chairman, Vice Chairman and the Security Officer who alone have 
authority to receive TOP SECRET information for the Bank. Other 
personnel authorized in writing by the Chairman or Security Officer also 
may receive TOP SECRET information for the Bank. It shall be the 
responsibility of these individuals with respect to all TOP SECRET 
information:
    (i) To receive the material for the Bank;
    (ii) To maintain registers which will reflect the routing of the 
material and the return thereof in a reasonable length of time for 
security storage;
    (iii) To dispatch and make record of material disseminated to 
authorize persons outside the Bank;
    (iv) To make a physical inventory of all material at least annually; 
and
    (v) To maintain current access records.
    (2) SECRET. Designated as SECRET control officers are the Security 
Officer and the Analysis, Records & Communications Manager, who have the 
responsibility with respect to all information classified in this 
category:
    (i) To receive the material for the Bank;
    (ii) To maintain registers which will reflect the routing of the 
material and the return thereof in a reasonable length of time for 
security storage;
    (iii) To dispatch and make record of material disseminated to 
authorized persons outside the Bank;
    (iv) To maintain current access records.
    (3) CONFIDENTIAL. Designated as CONFIDENTIAL control officers are 
the Security Officer and the Analysis, Records & Communications Manager 
who have responsibility with respect to all information classified in 
this category:
    (i) To review material for the Bank;
    (ii) To route the material to proper Bank offices;
    (iii) To dispatch and make record of material disseminated to 
authorized persons outside the Bank;
    (iv) To maintain current access records.
    (g) Storage. Classified information shall be stored only in 
facilities or under conditions adequate to prevent unauthorized persons 
from gaining access to it and in accordance with the Directive as well 
as General Services Administration standards and specifications. 
Reference may be made to 32 CFR 2001.41, 2001.43 for preliminary 
guidance regarding these standards and specifications.
    (h) Coversheets. Department of State (DSC) classified incoming 
cables are to

[[Page 1362]]

be logged in and routed to the appropriate offices in double envelopes. 
When these cables are being used in various offices, classified 
coversheets must be used to protect the documents. This practice 
eliminates the possibility of inadvertently mixing classified with non-
classified material, and promotes security awareness. Coversheets are 
obtainable from the Office of the Security Director.
    (i) Transmittal. (1) To be transmitted outside the Bank, all 
classified documents must be sent through the Security Office and have 
attached EIB Form 71-2, approved by one of the following: the President 
and Chairman, First Vice President and Vice Chairman, a Senior Vice 
President, General Counsel, Vice President or Security Officer.
    (2) Preparation and Receipting. Classified information shall be 
enclosed in opaque inner and outer covers before transmitting. The inner 
cover shall be a sealed wrapper or envelope plainly marked with the 
assigned classification and addresses of both sender and addressee. 
Transmittal documents shall indicate on their face the highest level of 
any information transmitted, and must clearly state whether or not the 
transmittal document itself is classified after removal of enclosures 
and attachments. The outer cover shall be sealed and addressed with no 
identification of the classification of its contents. A receipt shall be 
attached to or enclosed in the inner cover, except that CONFIDENTIAL 
information shall require a receipt only if the sender deems it 
necessary. The receipt shall identify the sender, addressee, and the 
document but shall contain no classified information. It shall be 
immediately signed by the recipient and returned to the sender. Any of 
these wrapping and receipting requirements may be waived by agency heads 
under conditions that will provide adequate protection and prevent 
access by unauthorized persons.
    (3) Transmittal of CONFIDENTIAL information. CONFIDENTIAL 
information shall be transmitted within and between the fifty States, 
the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and U.S. 
territories or possessions by one of the means established for higher 
classifications, or by United States Postal Service, certified first 
class, or express mail service, when prescribed by an agency head. 
Outside these areas, CONFIDENTIAL information shall be transmitted only 
as is authorized for higher classification levels.
    (4) Transmittal of TOP SECRET and SECRET information shall be in 
accordance with the Directive. Reference may be made to 32 CFR 2001.44 
for preliminary guidance.
    (j) Destruction. Classified information no longer needed in working 
files or for record or reference purposes shall be processed for 
appropriate disposition in accordance with Chapters 21 and 33 of title 
44 U.S.C., when govern disposition of Federal Records. All classified 
information approved for destruction must be torn and placed in 
containers designated as burnbags which are available through the Office 
Services Section of the Bank. Destruction of such information will be 
carried out by the Security Officer or a designee by use of a 
disintegrator or by burning. The method of destruction selected must 
preclude recognition or reconstruction of the classified information or 
material. Records of destruction will be maintained by the Security 
Office for TOP SECRET information and material with serialized markings 
or material for which there is a special need to record its destruction.
    (k) Reproduction controls. (1) Reproduction of classified documents 
is prohibited, except by personnel authorized in writing by the Chairman 
or Security Officer.
    (2) TOP SECRET documents may not be reproduced without the consent 
of the originating agency unless otherwise marked by the originating 
office.
    (3) Reproduction of SECRET and CONFIDENTIAL documents may be 
restricted by the originating agency.
    (4) Reproduced copies of classified documents are subject to the 
same accountability and controls as the original documents.
    (5) Records shall be maintained by the Security Officer to show the 
number and distribution or reproduced copies of all TOP SECRET 
documents, of all documents covered by special access programs 
distributed outside the

[[Page 1363]]

originating agency, and all SECRET and all CONFIDENTIAL documents which 
are marked with special dissemination and reproduction limitations.



Sec. 403.11  Enforcement and investigation procedures.

    (a) Loss or Possible Compromise. Any person who has knowledge of the 
loss or possible compromise of classified information shall immediately 
report the circumstances to the Security Officer of the Bank. In turn, 
the originating agency shall be notified about the loss or compromise in 
order that a damage assessment may be conducted and appropriate measures 
taken to negate or minimize any adverse effect, and prevent further such 
loss or compromise. An immediate inquiry shall be initiated by the Bank 
for the purposes: (1) Of determining cause and responsibility and (2) 
taking corrective measures and appropriate administrative, disciplinary, 
or legal action.
    (b) Reporting and Investigating Unauthorized Disclosures. (1) 
Employees who have reason to believe that an unauthorized disclosure of 
classified information has occurred shall report the disclosure to their 
supervisor, who shall inform the Security Officer.
    (2) The Bank shall promptly notify the Information Security 
Oversight Office at the General Services Administration, Washington, DC 
20405, of all unauthorized disclosures of classified information.
    (3) If the Bank believes that it is the source of an unauthorized 
disclosure of classified information that it originated, it shall 
evaluate the disclosure under paragraph (b)(7) of this section. If the 
disclosure is serious, the Bank shall report the disclosure and the 
results of the evaluation to the Department of Justice together with 
notification that it is conducting an internal investigation.
    (4) If the Bank believes that it is the source of an unauthorized 
disclosure of classified information that it handled but did not 
originate, it shall report the disclosure to the Department of Justice 
and to the originating agency(ies) or department(s) for evaluation under 
paragraph (b)(7) of this section. If the Bank cannot determine the 
identity of the originating agency(ies) or department(s), it shall 
report the disclosure to the Department of Justice together with any 
information or reasonable inferences as to the identity of the 
originating agency(ies) or department(s).
    (5) If the Bank receives a request for an evaluation of information 
it originated, it shall, if the evaluation shows the disclosure was 
serious, inform the agency(ies) or department(s) from which the 
disclosure occurred of this conclusion and request that the agency(ies) 
or department(s) conduct an internal investigation.
    (6) If the Bank determines that an unauthorized disclosure of 
classified information has occurred but that it neither originated, 
handled nor disclosed the information, it shall report the disclosure to 
the likely originating agency(ies) or department(s).
    (7) In determining whether a disclosure is sufficiently serious to 
warrant reporting to the Department of Justice, the Bank, if it is the 
originating agency, shall ascertain the nature of the disclosed 
information, determine the extent to which it disseminated the 
information and evaluate the disclosure to determine whether it 
seriously damages its mission and responsibilities. In evaluating the 
damage caused by the disclosure, the Bank shall consider such matters as 
whether the disclosure jeopardizes an ongoing project, operation or 
source of information and to what extent the policy goals underlying the 
project or operation must be altered.
    (8) In any instance where the Bank is determined to be the source of 
an unauthorized disclosure and an evaluation by the Bank or the 
originating agency(ies) or department(s) determines the disclosure to be 
of a serious nature, an internal investigation will be initiated and an 
investigation report, containing such information as may be required by 
the Department of Justice, will be submitted to the Department of 
Justice within 15 days after notification from the originating agency or 
Department of Justice, but in any case no later than 30 days. If the 
investigation report is not completed within 15 days, the Bank shall 
submit as much of the required information as is available at that time 
and furnish

[[Page 1364]]

additional information as it is developed.
    (9) Whenever the Bank determines during the course of an 
investigation that it is necessary to compel or induce the cooperation 
of an employee, the Bank shall first consult with the Department of 
Justice. The Department of Justice will coordinate with the Bank to 
determine the procedures the Bank may use to compel an employee's 
participation without foreclosing possible criminal proceedings.
    (10) The Bank shall maintain records of all disclosures that have 
been reported or investigated.
    (11) All employees shall cooperate fully with officials of the Bank 
or other agencies who are conducting investigations of unauthorized 
disclosures of classified information.
    (12) Employees determined by the Bank to have knowingly participated 
in an unauthorized disclosure of classified information or who have 
refused to cooperate with an investigation of such a disclosure shall be 
denied further access to classified information and shall be subject to 
other appropriate administrative sanctions. Prior to taking action 
against an employee in connection with the unauthorized disclosure or 
classified information, the Bank shall consult with the Department of 
Justice, National Security Division.

[50 FR 27215, July 2, 1985, as amended at 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007]



PART 404_INFORMATION DISCLOSURE--Table of Contents



  Subpart A_Procedures for Disclosure of Records Under the Freedom of 
                            Information Act.

Sec.
404.1  General provisions.
404.2  Definitions.
404.3  Public reference facilities.
404.4  Request requirements.
404.5  Time for processing.
404.6  Release of records under the Freedom of Information Act.
404.7  Confidential business information.
404.8  Initial determination.
404.9  Schedule of fees.
404.10  Fee waivers or reductions.
404.11  Administrative appeal.

Subpart B_Protection of Privacy and Access to Records Under the Privacy 
                               Act of 1974

404.12  General provisions.
404.13  Definitions.
404.14  Requirements of request for access.
404.15  Initial determination.
404.16  Schedule of fees.
404.17  Appeal of denials of access.
404.18  Requests for correction of records.
404.19  Request for accounting of record disclosures.
404.20  Notice of court-ordered and emergency disclosures.
404.21  Submission of social security and passport numbers.
404.22  Government contracts.
404.23  Other rights and services.

    Subpart C_Demands for Testimony of Current and Former Ex-Im Bank 
           Personnel and for Production of Ex-Im Bank Records

404.24  Exemptions: EIB-35--Office of Inspector General Investigative 
          Records.
404.25  Applicability.
404.26  Definitions.
404.27  Demand requirements.
404.28  Notification of General Counsel required.
404.29  Restrictions on testimony and production of records.
404.30  Factors General Counsel may consider in determining whether to 
          authorize testimony and/or the production of records.
404.31  Procedure for declining to testify and/or produce records.
404.32  Procedure in the event a decision concerning a demand is not 
          made prior to the time a response to the demand is required.
404.33  Procedure in the event of an adverse ruling.
404.34  Procedure for demands for testimony or production of documents 
          regarding confidential information.
404.35  Procedure for requests for Ex-Im Bank employees to provide 
          expert or opinion testimony.
404.36  No private right of action.

Subparts D-E [Reserved]

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552 and 552a.
    Section 404.7 also issued under E.O. 12600, 52 FR 23781, 3 CFR, 1987 
Comp., p. 235.
    Section 404.21 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 552a note.
    Subpart C also issued under 5 U.S.C. 301, 12 U.S.C. 635.

[[Page 1365]]


    Source: 64 FR 14374, Mar. 25, 1999, unless otherwise noted.



  Subpart A_Procedures for Disclosure of Records Under the Freedom of 
                            Information Act.



Sec. 404.1  General provisions.

    (a) Purpose. This subpart establishes policy, procedures, 
requirements, and responsibilities for administration of the Freedom of 
Information Act (FOIA), 5 U.S.C. 552, at the Export-Import Bank of the 
United States (Ex-Im Bank).
    (b) Policy. It is Ex-Im Bank's policy to honor all requests for the 
disclosure of its records, provided that disclosure would not adversely 
affect a legitimate public or private interest and would not impose an 
unreasonable burden on Ex-Im Bank. However, this subpart also recognizes 
that the soundness of many Ex-Im Bank programs depends upon the receipt 
of reliable commercial, technical, financial, and business information 
relating to applicants for Ex-Im Bank assistance and that receipt of 
such information depends on Ex-Im Bank's ability to hold such 
information in confidence. Consequently, except as provided by 
applicable law and this regulation, information provided to Ex-Im Bank 
in confidence will not be disclosed without the submitter's consent.
    (c) Scope. All record requests made to Ex-Im Bank shall be processed 
under this subpart, except that information customarily furnished to the 
public in the regular course of the performance of official duties may 
continue to be furnished to the public without complying with this 
subpart. Requests made by individuals under the Privacy Act of 1974 
which are processed under subpart B of this part also shall be processed 
under this subpart A.
    (d) Ex-Im Bank Internet site. Ex-Im Bank maintains an Internet site 
at http://www.exim.gov. The site contains information on Ex-Im Bank 
functions, activities, programs, and transactions. Web site visitors 
have access to Board of Directors and Loan Committee meeting minutes, 
country information, and Ex-Im Bank press releases, among other 
information. Ex-Im Bank encourages all prospective FOIA requesters to 
visit the site prior to submission of a FOIA request.
    (e) Delegation. Any action or determination in this subpart which is 
the responsibility of a specific Ex-Im Bank employee, may be delegated 
to a duly designated alternate.
    (f) Ex-Im Bank address. The Export-Import Bank of the United States 
is located at 811 Vermont Avenue, NW, Washington, DC 20571.



Sec. 404.2  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart, the following definitions shall apply:
    All other requesters--Requesters other than commercial use 
requesters, educational and non-commercial scientific requesters, or 
representatives of the news media.
    Appeal--A written request to the Ex-Im Bank Assistant General 
Counsel for Administration for reversal of an adverse initial 
determination.
    Business information--Potentially confidential commercial or 
financial information that is provided to Ex-Im Bank.
    Business submitter--Any person who provides business information to 
Ex-Im Bank.
    Commercial use request--A request for a use or purpose that furthers 
the commercial, trade or profit interest of the requester.
    Direct costs--Expenditures incurred in the search, review, and 
duplication of records in response to a FOIA request.
    Educational institution--A preschool, a public or private elementary 
or secondary school, an institution of undergraduate or graduate higher 
education, or an institution of professional or vocational education.
    Final determination--The written decision by the Assistant General 
Counsel for Administration on an appeal.
    Initial determination--The initial written determination by Ex-Im 
Bank regarding disclosure of requested records.
    Non-commercial scientific institution--An institution that is 
operated for the purpose of conducting scientific research the results 
of which are not intended to promote any particular product or industry 
and that is not operated solely for purposes of furthering a business, 
trade or profit interest.

[[Page 1366]]

    Person--An individual, partnership, corporation, association or 
organization other than a federal government agency.
    Record--All papers, memoranda or other documentary material, or 
copies thereof, regardless of physical form or characteristics, created 
or received by Ex-Im Bank and preserved as evidence of the activities of 
Ex-Im Bank. ``Record'' does not include publications which are available 
to the public through the Federal Register, sale or free distribution.
    Redaction--The process of removing non-disclosable material from a 
record so that the remainder may be released.
    Representative of the news media--A person actively gathering 
information on behalf of an entity organized and operated to publish or 
broadcast news to the public. Freelance journalists shall qualify as 
representatives of the news media when they can demonstrate that a 
request is reasonably likely to lead to publication.
    Request--Any record request made to Ex-Im Bank under the FOIA.
    Requester--Any person making a request.
    Review--The process of examining a record to determine whether any 
portion is required to be withheld. It includes redaction, duplication, 
and any other preparation for release. Review does not include time 
spent resolving general legal and policy issues regarding the 
application of exemptions.
    Search--The process of identifying and collecting records pursuant 
to a request.
    Trade secrets--All forms and types of financial, business, 
scientific, technical, economic or engineering information, including, 
but not limited to, patterns, plans, compilations, program devices, 
formulas, designs, prototypes, methods, techniques, processes, 
procedures, programs or codes.
    Unusual circumstances--The need to search for and collect requested 
records from facilities that are separate from Ex-Im Bank headquarters; 
the need to search for, collect, and appropriately examine a voluminous 
amount of separate and distinct records which are demanded in a single 
request; or the need for consultation with another agency a person that 
has a substantial interest in the determination of the request.
    Working days--All calendar days excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and 
Federal Government holidays.



Sec. 404.3  Public reference facilities.

    Ex-Im Bank maintains a public reading room which contains the Ex-Im 
Bank records that the FOIA requires to be made available for public 
inspection and copying. The records available under this section include 
copies of records released pursuant to the FOIA that Ex-Im Bank 
determines have, or are likely to, become the subject of subsequent 
requests for substantially the same records. Requesters shall be 
responsible for the cost of duplicating such material in accordance with 
the provisions of Sec. 404.9(e). Persons desiring to use the reading 
room should contact the Ex-Im Bank Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office, either in writing at the address at Sec. 404.1(f) or by 
telephone at (202) 565-3946 or (800) 565-3946, to arrange a time to 
inspect the available records.



Sec. 404.4  Request requirements.

    (a) Form. Requests must be made in writing and must be signed by, or 
on behalf of, the requester. Requests should be addressed to the Freedom 
of Information and Privacy Office at the address in Sec. 404.1(f) and 
should contain both the return address and telephone number of the 
requester.
    (b) Description of records requested. Each request must describe the 
records sought in sufficient detail so as to enable a professional 
employee of Ex-Im Bank familiar with the subject matter of the request 
to locate the record with a reasonable amount of effort. A request shall 
not be deemed to have been received until such time as the request 
adequately identifies the records sought. To the extent practicable, a 
description should include relevant dates, format, subject matter, and 
the name of any person to whom the record is known to relate. A general 
request for records with no accompanying date restriction, either 
express or implied, shall be deemed to be a request for records created 
within the preceding twelve months.

[[Page 1367]]

    (c) Fee statement. The request must contain a statement expressing 
willingness to pay fees for the requested records or a request for a fee 
waiver (see Sec. 404.10) before the request shall be deemed to have been 
received. A fee statement may specify the maximum amount a requester is 
willing to pay for processing the request.
    (1) Whenever a requester submits a FOIA request that does not 
contain a fee statement or a request for a fee waiver, Ex-Im Bank shall 
advise the requester of the requirements of this paragraph. If the 
requester fails to respond within ten working days of such notification, 
then the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office shall notify the 
requester, in writing, that Ex-Im Bank will not process the request.
    (2) A general statement by the requester expressing willingness to 
pay all applicable fees under Sec. 404.9 shall be deemed an agreement to 
pay up to $50.00. If Ex-Im Bank estimates that the fees for a request 
will exceed $50.00, then Ex-Im Bank shall offer the requester the 
opportunity to agree, in writing, either to pay a greater fee or to 
modify the request as a means of limiting the cost.
    (d) Written notice of amendment. The requester should provide any 
amendment to the original request in writing to Ex-Im Bank.
    (e) Requester assistance. Ex-Im Bank shall make reasonable efforts 
to assist a requester in complying with the requirements of this 
section.



Sec. 404.5  Time for processing.

    (a) General. Ex-Im Bank shall respond to requests within twenty 
working days of the date of receipt of the request unless unusual 
circumstances exist. Ex-Im Bank shall provide written notice to the 
requester whenever such unusual circumstances necessitate an extension. 
If the extension is expected to exceed ten working days, then Ex-Im Bank 
shall offer the requester the opportunity to:
    (1) Alter the request so that it may be processed within the time 
limit; or
    (2) Propose an alternative, feasible time frame for processing the 
request.
    (b) Date of receipt. A request shall be deemed to have been received 
on the date that the request is received in the Freedom of Information 
and Privacy Office, provided that the requester has met all the 
requirements of Sec. 404.4. Ex-Im Bank shall notify the requester of the 
date on which a request was officially received.
    (c) Order of processing. Ex-Im Bank ordinarily shall process 
requests according to their order of receipt.
    (d) Expedited processing. A request for expedited processing must be 
included in the original request for records and may be granted at the 
discretion of Ex-Im Bank based upon the requester's demonstration of:
    (1) An imminent threat to the life or physical safety of an 
individual; or
    (2) In the case of a requester who is a representative of the news 
media, an urgency to inform the public concerning actual or alleged 
Federal Government activity. Ex-Im Bank shall provide notice of its 
determination on expedited processing to the requester. A requester may 
file an administrative appeal, as set forth at Sec. 404.11, based on a 
denial of a request for expedited processing. Ex-Im Bank shall grant 
expeditious consideration to any such appeal.



Sec. 404.6  Release of records under the Freedom of Information Act.

    (a) Creation of records. A reasonable request for material not in 
existence may be honored at Ex-Im Bank's discretion when tabulation or 
compilation will not significantly burden Ex-Im Bank, its programs or 
its activities.
    (b) Discretionary release. Consistent with federal government 
policy, material technically qualifying for exemption from disclosure 
under 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(5) may be made available when disclosure would not 
adversely affect legitimate public or private interests, violate law or 
impose an unreasonable burden on Ex-Im Bank. This policy does not, 
however, create any right enforceable in a court of law.
    (c) Segregable records. Whenever it is determined that a portion of 
a record is exempt from disclosure, any reasonably segregable portion of 
the record shall be provided to the requester after redaction of the 
exempt material. If segregation would render the document meaningless, 
Ex-Im Bank shall withhold the entire record.

[[Page 1368]]

    (d) Date for determining responsive records. Only those records 
within Ex-Im Bank's possession and control as of the date of receipt of 
a request shall be deemed to be responsive to a request.



Sec. 404.7  Confidential business information.

    (a) Scope. This section applies to all business information, as 
defined in Sec. 404.2. Such information shall only be disclosed pursuant 
to a FOIA request in accordance with this section.
    (b) Submitter designation. All business submitters should designate, 
by appropriate markings, either at the time of submission or at a 
reasonable time thereafter, any portion of any submission that they 
consider to be exempt from disclosure under 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(4).
    (c) Pre-disclosure notice to the business submitter. Whenever Ex-Im 
Bank receives a FOIA request seeking disclosure of business information, 
Ex-Im Bank shall provide prompt written notice to the submitter of such 
information. This notice shall include a description or a copy of the 
records containing the business information. Such notice shall not be 
required, however, if:
    (1) Ex-Im Bank determines that the records shall not be disclosed;
    (2) The records have been published or otherwise made available to 
the public; or
    (3) disclosure of the records is required by law.
    (d) Opportunity to object to disclosure. The business submitter 
shall have ten working days from and including the date of the 
notification letter to provide Ex-Im Bank with a detailed statement of 
any objection to disclosure of the records. A submitter located outside 
the United States shall have twenty working days to object to 
disclosure. Ex-Im Bank may extend the time for objection upon timely 
request from the submitter and for good cause shown. A statement of 
objection must specify all grounds under the FOIA for withholding the 
information.
    (e) Notice to the requester. The Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office shall notify the requester in writing whenever a business 
submitter is afforded the opportunity to object to disclosure of records 
pursuant to paragraph (c) of this section.
    (f) Disclosure of confidential business information. Ex-Im Bank 
shall consider any objections raised by the business submitter prior to 
making its disclosure decision.
    (g) Notice of intent to disclose. Whenever Ex-Im Bank determines to 
disclose business information over the objection of a business 
submitter, Ex-Im Bank shall notify the business submitter, in writing, 
of such determination, the reasons for the decision, and the expected 
disclosure date. This notification--which shall be provided at least ten 
days prior to the planned disclosure date and which shall include a copy 
or description of the records at issue--is intended to afford the 
submitter the opportunity to seek judicial review.
    (h) Notice to requester of disclosure date. If Ex-Im Bank determines 
to disclose records over a business submitter's objection, then Ex-Im 
Bank shall notify the requester of the expected disclosure date.
    (i) Appeal. Whenever Ex-Im Bank determines to disclose, pursuant to 
an administrative appeal, business information that initially was 
withheld from disclosure under 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(4), Ex-Im Bank shall 
notify the business submitter. Such notice shall be in writing and shall 
be provided ten working days prior to the proposed disclosure date. It 
shall include a copy or description of the records at issue and a 
statement of Ex-Im Bank's reasons for disclosure.
    (j) Notice of FOIA lawsuit. Ex-Im Bank shall promptly notify the 
submitter whenever a requester brings suit against Ex-Im Bank seeking to 
compel the release of business information covered by this section. Ex-
Im Bank shall promptly notify the requester when a submitter brings suit 
against Ex-Im seeking to restrict the release of business information 
that is covered by this section.
    (k) Exception. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this 
part, Ex-Im Bank may, upon request or on its own initiative, publicly 
disclose the parties to transactions for which Ex-Im Bank approves 
support, the amount of such

[[Page 1369]]

support, the identity of any participants involved, a general 
description of the related U.S. exports, and the country to which such 
exports are destined.



Sec. 404.8  Initial determination.

    (a) Authority to grant or deny requests. The Freedom of Information 
and Privacy Office shall be responsible for search, review, and the 
initial determination.
    (b) Referrals to other government agencies. A requested record in 
Ex-Im Bank's possession that was created or classified by another 
Federal agency shall be referred to such agency for direct response to 
the requester. The Freedom of Information and Privacy Office shall 
notify the requester of any such referral, the number of documents so 
referred, and the name and address of each agency to which the request 
has been referred.
    (c) Notification of Ex-Im Bank action. The Freedom of Information 
and Privacy Office shall notify the requester in writing of its decision 
to grant or deny the request.
    (1) If the decision is made to grant a request, then Ex-Im Bank 
shall promptly disclose the requested records and shall inform the 
requester of any fee payable under Sec. 404.9.
    (2) A denial is a determination to withhold any requested record in 
whole or in part, a determination that a requested record does not exist 
or cannot be located or a determination that what has been requested is 
not a record subject to the FOIA. Whenever Ex-Im Bank withholds 
information, such notice shall include:
    (i) The name, title, and signature of the person responsible for the 
determination;
    (ii) The statutory basis for non-disclosure; and
    (iii) A statement that any denial may be appealed under Sec. 404.11 
and a brief description of the requirements of that section.
    (d) Material withheld. Ex-Im Bank shall make reasonable efforts to 
inform the requester of the volume of material withheld pursuant to a 
full or partial denial and the extent of any redaction. Ex-Im Bank shall 
not, however, indicate the extent of any denial when doing so could harm 
an interest protected by an applicable exemption.



Sec. 404.9  Schedule of fees.

    (a) General. Ex-Im Bank shall charge fees to recover the full 
allowable direct costs it incurs in processing requests. Ex-Im Bank 
shall attempt to conduct searches in the most efficient manner to 
minimize costs for both Ex-Im Bank and the requester.
    (b) Categories of requesters. Fees shall be assessed according to 
the status of the requester. The specific schedule of fees for each 
requester category (each as defined in Sec. 404.2) is prescribed as 
follows:
    (1) Commercial use requesters. Ex-Im Bank shall charge the full 
costs for search, review, and duplication.
    (2) Educational and non-commercial scientific institution 
requesters. Ex-Im Bank shall charge only for the cost of duplication in 
excess of 100 pages. No fee will be charged for search or review.
    (3) Representatives of the news media. Ex-Im Bank shall charge only 
for the cost of duplication in excess of 100 pages. No fee will be 
charged for search or review.
    (4) All other requesters. Ex-Im Bank shall charge for the cost of 
search, review, and duplication, except that 100 pages of duplication 
and two hours of professional search time shall be furnished without 
charge.
    (c) Search and review fees. Ex-Im Bank shall charge the following 
fees for search and review:
    (1) Clerical. Hourly rate--$16.00.
    (2) Professional. Hourly rate--$32.00.
    (3) Computer Searches. Hourly rate--based upon the salary of the 
employee performing the work and the cost of operating any equipment.
    (d) Administrative appeals. Ex-Im Bank shall not charge for 
administrative review of an exemption applied in an initial 
determination. Ex-Im Bank shall charge, however, for search and review 
pursuant to an administrative appeal if the appeal is based on a claim 
other than the application of an exemption in the initial determination.
    (e) Duplication. Ex-Im Bank shall charge $.10 per page for paper 
copy duplication. Ex-Im Bank shall charge the actual or estimated cost 
of copies prepared by computer, such as tape or

[[Page 1370]]

printouts, or for other methods of duplication. When duplication charges 
are expected to exceed $50.00, Ex-Im Bank shall seek the requester's 
consent to be responsible for the estimated charges unless a requester 
has already expressed a willingness to pay duplication fees in excess of 
$50.00. Ex-Im Bank shall also offer the requester the opportunity to 
alter the request in order to reduce duplication costs.
    (f) Fees for searches that produce no records. Fees shall be payable 
as provided in this section even though searches and review do not 
generate any disclosable records.
    (g) Aggregating requests. A requester, or a group of requesters 
acting in concert, shall not file multiple requests, seeking portions of 
a record or similar or related records, in order to avoid payment of 
fees. Ex-Im Bank shall aggregate any such requests and charge as if the 
requests were a single request.
    (h) Special services charges. Complying with requests for special 
services such as those listed in this paragraph is entirely at the 
discretion of Ex-Im Bank. Ex-Im Bank shall recover the full costs of 
providing such services to the extent that it elects to provide them.
    (1) Certifications. Ex-Im Bank shall charge $25.00 to certify the 
authenticity of any Ex-Im Bank record or any copy of such record.
    (2) Special shipping. Ex-Im Bank may ship by special means (e.g., 
express mail) if the requester so desires, provided that the requester 
has paid or has expressly undertaken to pay all costs of such special 
services. Ex-Im Bank shall not charge for ordinary packaging and 
mailing.
    (i) Minimum fee. Ex-Im Bank shall waive a final fee of $5.00 or 
less.
    (j) Advance payment. Whenever Ex-Im Bank estimates that the fees are 
likely to exceed $250.00, Ex-Im Bank shall notify the requester of the 
likely cost and shall require an advance payment of an amount up to the 
full estimated charges.
    (k) Failure to pay fee. Ex-Im Bank shall not process a request by a 
requester who has failed to pay a fee for a previous request unless and 
until such a requester had paid the full amount owed and also has paid, 
in advance, the total estimated charges for the new request. The 
administrative time limits for the new request--set forth in 
Sec. 404.5--shall begin to run only after Ex-Im Bank has received the 
payments described in this section.



Sec. 404.10  Fee waivers or reductions.

    (a) General. Upon request, Ex-Im Bank shall consider a discretionary 
fee waiver or reduction of the fees chargeable under Sec. 404.9.
    (b) Form of request for fee waiver. Ex-Im Bank shall deny a request 
for a waiver or reduction of fees that does not clearly address each of 
the following:
    (1) The proposed use of the records and whether the requester will 
derive income or other benefit from such use;
    (2) An explanation of the reasons why the public will benefit from 
such use; and
    (3) If specialized use of the records is contemplated, a statement 
of the requester's qualifications that are relevant to the specialized 
use.
    (d) Burden of proof. In all cases, the requester has the burden of 
presenting sufficient evidence or information to justify the fee waiver 
or reduction. The requester may use the procedures set forth in 
Sec. 404.11 to appeal a denial of a fee waiver request.
    (e) Employee requests. Fees of less than $50.00 shall be waived in 
connection with any request by an employee, former employee, or 
applicant for employment, related to a grievance or complaint of 
discrimination against Ex-Im Bank.



Sec. 404.11  Administrative appeal.

    (a) General. Whenever a request for records, a fee waiver or 
expedited processing has been denied, the requester may appeal the 
denial within thirty days of the date of Ex-Im Bank's issuance of notice 
of such action. Any denial under this subpart must be appealed according 
to this section before a requester is eligible to seek judicial review.
    (b) Form. Appeals must be made in writing and must be signed by the 
appellant. Appeals should be addressed to the Assistant General Counsel 
for Administration at the address at Sec. 404.1(f). Both the envelope 
and the appeal letter

[[Page 1371]]

should be clearly marked in capital letters: ``FREEDOM OF INFORMATION 
ACT APPEAL.'' Failure to properly mark or address the appeal may slow 
its processing. The letter should include:
    (1) A copy of the denied request or a description of the records 
requested;
    (2) The name and title of the Ex-Im Bank employee who denied the 
request;
    (3) The date on which the request was denied;
    (4) The Ex-Im Bank identification number assigned to the request; 
and
    (5) The return address and telephone number of the appellant.
    (c) Processing schedule. Appeals shall not be deemed to have been 
received until the Assistant General Counsel for Administration receives 
the appeal. Ex-Im Bank shall notify the requester of the date on which 
an appeal was officially received. The disposition of an appeal shall be 
made in writing within twenty working days after the date of receipt of 
an appeal. The Assistant General Counsel for Administration may extend 
the time for response an additional ten working days if unusual 
circumstances exist, provided that the Assistant General Counsel for 
Administration notifies the requester in writing.
    (d) Ex-Im Bank decision. A final determination which affirms an 
adverse initial determination shall set forth the reasons for affirming 
the denial and shall advise the requester of the right to seek judicial 
review. If the initial determination is reversed on appeal, the request 
shall be remanded to the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office to be 
processed promptly in accordance with the decision on appeal, subject to 
Sec. 404.7(i).



        Subpart B_Access to Records Under the Privacy Act of 1974



Sec. 404.12  General provisions.

    (a) Purpose. This subpart establishes policies, procedures, 
requirements, and responsibilities for administration of the Privacy Act 
of 1974, 5 U.S.C. 552a, at the Export-Import Bank of the United States 
(Ex-Im Bank).
    (b) Relationship to the Freedom of Information Act. The Privacy Act 
applies to records contained in a systems of records, as defined in 
Sec. 404.13. If an individual submits a request for access to records 
and cites the Privacy Act, but the records sought are not contained in a 
Privacy Act system of records, then the request shall be processed only 
under subpart A of this part, Procedures for Disclosure of Records Under 
the Freedom of Information Act. All requests properly processed under 
this subpart B shall also be processed under subpart A of this part.
    (c) Appellate authority. The Ex-Im Bank Assistant General Counsel 
for Administration is the appellate authority for all Privacy Act 
requests.
    (d) Delegation. Any action or determination in this subpart which is 
the responsibility of a specific Ex-Im Bank employee may be delegated to 
a duly designated alternate.
    (e) Ex-Im Bank address. The Export-Import Bank of the United States 
is located at 811 Vermont Avenue, NW, Washington, DC 20571.



Sec. 404.13  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart, the following definitions shall apply:
    Appeal--A written request to the Ex-Im Bank Assistant General 
Counsel for Administration for reversal of an adverse initial 
determination.
    Final determination--The written decision by the Assistant General 
Counsel for Administration on an appeal.
    Individual--A citizen of the United States or an alien lawfully 
admitted for permanent residence.
    Initial determination--The initial written determination in response 
to a Privacy Act request.
    Record--Any item, collection or grouping of information about an 
individual that is maintained within a system of records and that 
contains the individual's name or an identifying number, symbol or other 
identifying particular assigned to the individual.
    Redaction--The process of removing non-disclosable material from a 
record so that the remainder may be released.
    Request for access--A request to view a record.
    Request for accounting--A request for a list of all disclosures of a 
record.
    Request for correction--A request to modify a record.

[[Page 1372]]

    Requester--An individual who makes a request under the Privacy Act.
    Review--The process of examining a record to determine whether any 
portion is required to be withheld.
    Search--The process of identifying and collecting records pursuant 
to a request.
    System of records--A group of any records under the control of an 
agency from which information is retrieved by the name of the individual 
or some identifying number, symbol or other identifying particular 
assigned to the individual.
    Working days--All calendar days excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and 
Federal Government holidays.



Sec. 404.14  Requirements of request for access.

    (a) Form. Requests for access must be made in writing and must be 
signed by the requester. Requests should be addressed to the Freedom of 
Information and Privacy Office at the address in Sec. 404.12(e) and 
should contain both the return address and telephone number of the 
requester.
    (b) Description of records sought. A request for access must 
describe the records sought in sufficient detail so as to enable Ex-Im 
Bank personnel to locate the system of records containing the records 
with a reasonable amount of effort. To the extent practicable, such 
description should include the nature of the record sought, the date of 
the record or the period in which the record was compiled, and the name 
or identifying number of the system of records in which the requester 
believes the record is kept. A requester may include his or her social 
security number in the request in order to facilitate the identification 
and location of the requested records.
    (c) Fee statement. The request must contain a statement expressing 
willingness to pay fees for processing the request or a request for a 
fee waiver (see Sec. 404.16(d)).
    (1) Whenever a requester submits a request for access that does not 
contain a fee statement or a request for a fee waiver, Ex-Im Bank shall 
advise the requester of the requirements of this section. If the 
requester fails to respond within ten working days of such notification, 
then the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office shall notify the 
requester, in writing, that Ex-Im Bank will not process the request.
    (2) A general statement by the requester expressing willingness to 
pay all applicable fees shall be deemed an agreement to pay up to 
$25.00. If Ex-Im Bank estimates that the fees for a request will exceed 
$25.00, then Ex-Im Bank shall notify the requester. Ex-Im Bank shall 
offer the requester the opportunity to agree, in writing, either to pay 
a greater fee or to modify the request as a means of limiting the cost.
    (3) Whenever the estimated fee chargeable under this section exceeds 
$25.00, Ex-Im Bank reserves the right to require a requester to make an 
advance payment prior to processing the request.
    (4) Ex-Im Bank shall not process a request by a requester who has 
failed to pay a fee for a previous request unless and until such 
requester had paid the full amount owed and also has paid, in advance, 
the total estimated charges for the new request.
    (d) Verification of identity. An individual who submits a request 
for access must verify his or her identity. The request must include the 
requesters full name, current address, and date and place of birth. In 
addition, such requester must provide a notarized statement attesting to 
his or her identity.
    (e) Verification of guardianship. When a parent or guardian of a 
minor or the guardian of a person judicially determined to be 
incompetent submits a request for access to records that relate to the 
minor or incompetent, such parent or guardian must establish:
    (1) His or her own identity and the identity of the subject of the 
record in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section; and
    (2) Parentage or guardianship of the subject of the record, either 
by providing a copy of the subject's birth certificate showing parentage 
or by providing a court order establishing guardianship.
    (f) Written notice of amendment. The requester must provide any 
amendment to the original request in writing to Ex-Im Bank.
    (g) Requester assistance. Ex-Im Bank shall make reasonable efforts 
to assist

[[Page 1373]]

a requester in complying with the requirements of this section.
    (h) Date of receipt. Requests for access shall be deemed to have 
been received on the date that the request is received by the Freedom of 
Information and Privacy Office, provided that all the requirements of 
this section have been met. Ex-Im Bank shall notify the requester of the 
date on which it officially received a request.



Sec. 404.15  Initial determination.

    (a) Time for processing. The Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office shall respond to valid requests for access within twenty working 
days of the date of receipt of the request letter. The time for response 
may be extended an additional ten working days for good cause, provided 
that the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office notifies the 
requester in writing.
    (b) Notice regarding request for access. The Freedom of Information 
and Privacy Office shall notify the requester in writing of its decision 
to grant or deny a request for access.
    (1) If the request is granted, then the notice shall either include 
the requested records, in releasable form, or shall describe the manner 
in which access to the record will be granted. The notice also shall 
inform the requester of any processing fee.
    (2) A denial is a determination to withhold any requested record in 
whole or in part or a determination that the requested record does not 
exist or cannot be located. If the request is denied, then the denial 
notice shall state:
    (i) The name, signature, and title or position of the person 
responsible for the denial;
    (ii) The reasons for the denial; and
    (iii) The procedure for appeal of the denial under Sec. 404.17 and a 
brief description of the requirements of that section.
    (c) Form of record disclosure. Ex-Im Bank shall grant access to the 
requested records either by providing the requester with a copy of the 
record or, at the requester's option, by making the record available for 
inspection at a reasonable time and place. If Ex-Im Bank makes the 
record available for inspection, such inspection shall not unreasonably 
disrupt Ex-Im Bank operations. In addition, the requester must provide a 
form of official photographic identification--such as a passport, 
driver's license or identification badge--and any other form of 
identification bearing his or her name and address prior to inspection 
of the requested records. Records may be inspected by the requester in 
the presence of another individual, provided that the requester signs a 
form stating that Ex-Im Bank is authorized to disclose the record in the 
presence of both individuals.



Sec. 404.16  Schedule of fees.

    (a) Search and review. Ex-Im Bank shall not charge for search and 
review.
    (b) Duplication. Ex-Im Bank shall charge $.10 per page for paper 
copy duplication. Ex-Im Bank shall charge the actual or estimated cost 
of copies prepared by computer, such as tape or printouts, or for other 
methods of reproduction or duplication.
    (c) Minimum fee. Ex-Im Bank shall waive final fees of $5.00 or less.
    (d) Fee waivers. Ex-Im Bank may waive fees whenever it is determined 
to be in the public interest. Fees of less than $50.00 shall be waived 
in connection with any request by an employee, former employee or 
applicant for employment, related to a grievance or complaint of 
discrimination against Ex-Im Bank.
    (e) Special services charges. Complying with requests for special 
services such as those listed in this paragraph is entirely at the 
discretion of Ex-Im Bank. Ex-Im Bank shall recover the full costs of 
providing such services to the extent that it elects to provide them.
    (1) Certifications. Ex-Im Bank shall charge $25.00 to certify the 
authenticity of any Ex-Im Bank record or any copy of such record.
    (2) Special shipping. Ex-Im Bank may ship by special means (e.g., 
express mail) if the requester so desires, provided that the requester 
has paid or has expressly undertaken to pay all costs of such special 
services. Ex-Im Bank shall not charge for ordinary packaging and 
mailing.



Sec. 404.17  Appeal of denials of access.

    (a) Appeals to the Assistant General Counsel for Administration. 
Whenever

[[Page 1374]]

Ex-Im Bank denies a request for access or for waiver or reduction of 
fees, the requester may appeal the denial to the Assistant General 
Counsel for Administration within 30 working days of the date of Ex-Im 
Bank's issuance of notice of such action. Appeals must be made in 
writing and must be signed by the appellant. Appeals should be addressed 
to the Assistant General Counsel for Administration at the address in 
Sec. 404.12(e). Both the envelope and the appeal letter should be 
clearly marked in capital letters: ``PRIVACY ACT APPEAL.'' Failure to 
properly mark or address the appeal may slow its processing. An appeal 
shall not be deemed to have been received by Ex-Im Bank until the 
Assistant General Counsel for Administration receives the appeal letter. 
The letter should include:
    (1) A copy of the denied request or a description of the records 
requested;
    (2) The name and title of the Ex-Im Bank employee who denied the 
request;
    (3) The date on which the request was denied; and
    (4) The Ex-Im Bank identification number assigned to the request.
    (b) Final determination. The disposition of an access appeal shall 
be made in writing within twenty working days after the date of receipt 
of the appeal. The Assistant General Counsel for Administration may 
extend the time for response an additional ten working days for good 
cause, provided that the requester is notified in writing. A decision 
affirming the denial of a request for access shall include a brief 
statement of the reasons for affirming the denial and shall advise the 
requester of the right to seek judicial review. If the initial 
determination is reversed, then the request shall be remanded to the 
Freedom of Information and Privacy Office to be processed in accordance 
with the decision on appeal.



Sec. 404.18  Requests for correction of records.

    (a) Form. Requests for correction must be made in writing and must 
be signed by the requester. Requests should be addressed to the Freedom 
of Information and Privacy Office at the address in Sec. 404.12(e) and 
should contain both the return address and telephone number of the 
requester. The request must identify the particular record in question, 
state the correction sought, and set forth the justification for the 
correction. The requester also must verify his or her identity in 
accordance with the procedures set forth at Sec. 404.14(d) and (e). Both 
the envelope and the request for correction itself should be clearly 
marked in capital letters: ``PRIVACY ACT CORRECTION REQUEST.''
    (b) Initial determination. The Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office shall respond to valid correction requests within ten working 
days of receipt of the request letter. If Ex-Im Bank grants the request 
for correction, then the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office shall 
advise the requester of his or her right to obtain a copy, in releasable 
form, of the corrected record. A denial notice shall state the reasons 
for the denial and shall advise the requester of the right to appeal. 
Ex-Im Bank shall not charge for processing requests for correction.
    (c) Appeal of denial of request for correction. Whenever Ex-Im Bank 
denies a request for correction, the requester may appeal the denial to 
the Assistant General Counsel for Administration within thirty working 
days of Ex-Im Bank's issuance of notice of such action. Appeals must be 
made in writing and must be signed by the appellant. Appeals should be 
addressed to the Assistant General Counsel for Administration at the 
address set forth in Sec. 404.12(e). Both the envelope and the appeal 
letter should be clearly marked in capital letters: ``PRIVACY ACT 
CORRECTION APPEAL.'' Failure to properly mark or address the appeal may 
slow its processing. An appeal shall not be deemed to have been received 
by Ex-Im Bank until the Assistant General Counsel for Administration 
receives the appeal letter. The letter must include:
    (1) A copy of the denied request or a description of the correction 
sought;
    (2) The name and title of the Ex-Im Bank employee who denied the 
request;
    (3) The date on which the request was denied;
    (4) The Ex-Im Bank identification number assigned to the request; 
and
    (5) Any information said to justify the correction.

[[Page 1375]]

    (d) Final determination on correction appeal. (1) The disposition of 
an appeal shall be made in writing within twenty working days after the 
date of receipt of an appeal. The Assistant General Counsel for 
Administration may extend the time for response an additional ten 
working days for good cause, provided that the requester is notified in 
writing.
    (2) A decision affirming the denial of a request for access shall 
advise the appellant of the:
    (i) Reasons for affirming the denial;
    (ii) Right to seek judicial review; and
    (iii) Right to file a statement of disagreement, as provided in 
paragraph (e) of this section.
    (3) If the initial determination is reversed, then the request shall 
be remanded to the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office to be 
processed in accordance with the decision on appeal.
    (e) Statement of disagreement. Upon denial of a correction appeal, 
the appellant shall have the right to file a statement of disagreement 
with Ex-Im Bank, setting forth his or her reasons for disagreeing with 
the Agency's action. The statement should be addressed to the Freedom of 
Information and Privacy Office at the address in Sec. 404.12(e) and must 
be received within thirty working days of Ex-Im Bank's issuance of the 
denial notice. A statement of disagreement must not exceed one typed 
page per fact disputed. Statements exceeding this limit shall be 
returned to the requester for editing. Upon receipt of a statement of 
disagreement under this section, the Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office shall have the statement included in the system of records in 
which the disputed record is maintained and shall have the disputed 
record marked so as to indicate that a Statement of Disagreement has 
been filed. Ex-Im Bank may also append to the disputed record a written 
statement regarding Ex-Im Bank's reasons for denying the request to 
correct the record.
    (f) Notices of correction or disagreement. In any disclosure of a 
record for which Ex-Im Bank has received a statement of disagreement, 
Ex-Im Bank shall clearly note any portion of the record which is 
disputed and shall provide a copy of the statement of disagreement. Ex-
Im Bank also may provide its own statement regarding the disputed 
record. In addition, whenever Ex-Im Bank corrects a record or receives a 
statement of disagreement, Ex-Im Bank shall, as is reasonable under the 
circumstances, advise any person or agency to which it previously 
disclosed such record of the correction or statement, provided that an 
accounting of such disclosure exists.



Sec. 404.19  Request for accounting of record disclosures.

    (a) Required information. With respect to each system of records 
under Ex-Im Bank control, Ex-Im Bank shall maintain an accurate 
accounting of the date, nature, and purpose of each external disclosure 
of a record and the name and address of all persons, organizations, and 
agencies to which disclosure has been made. Ex-Im Bank shall retain this 
accounting for at least five years or the life of the record, whichever 
is longer.
    (b) Form. An individual may obtain an accounting of all disclosures 
of a record, provided that such individual establishes his or her 
identity as the subject of such record in accordance with the procedures 
set forth at Sec. 404.14(d) and (e). A request for an accounting must be 
made in writing and must be signed by the requester. The request should 
be addressed to the Freedom of Information and Privacy Office at the 
address in Sec. 404.12(e) and should contain both the return address and 
telephone number of the requester. Both the envelope and the request 
itself should be clearly be marked in capital letters: ``PRIVACY ACT 
ACCOUNTING REQUEST.'' Failure to properly mark or address the request 
may slow its processing. The request shall not be deemed to have been 
received by Ex-Im Bank until the Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office receives the request. The letter must clearly identify the 
particular record for which the accounting is requested.
    (c) Initial determination. The Freedom of Information and Privacy 
Office shall notify the requester whether the request will be granted or 
denied within ten working days of receipt of a valid request for an 
accounting. Ex-Im Bank

[[Page 1376]]

shall not charge for processing such a request.
    (d) Exceptions. Ex-Im Bank shall not be required to provide an 
accounting to an individual when the accounting relates to a disclosure 
made:
    (1) To an employee within the agency;
    (2) Under the FOIA; or
    (3) To a law enforcement agency for an authorized law enforcement 
activity in response to a written request from such agency which 
specified the law enforcement activity for which the disclosure was 
sought.



Sec. 404.20  Notice of court-ordered and emergency disclosures.

    (a) Court-ordered disclosures. When a record pertaining to an 
individual is required to be disclosed by a court order, the Assistant 
General Counsel for Administration shall make reasonable efforts to 
provide notice to the subject individual. Notice shall be given within a 
reasonable time after Ex-Im Bank's receipt of the order, except that in 
a case in which the order is not a matter of public record, notice shall 
be given only after the order becomes public. Such notice shall be 
mailed to the individual's last known address and shall contain a copy 
of the order and a description of the information disclosed.
    (b) Emergency disclosures. If a record has been disclosed by Ex-Im 
Bank under compelling circumstances affecting the health or safety of 
any person, then, within ten working days, the Assistant General Counsel 
for Administration shall notify the subject individual of the disclosure 
at his or her last known address. The notice of such disclosure shall be 
in writing and shall state the:
    (1) Nature of the information disclosed;
    (2) Person, organization or agency to which it was disclosed;
    (3) Date of disclosure; and
    (4) Compelling circumstances justifying the disclosure.



Sec. 404.21  Submission of social security and passport numbers.

    (a) Policy. Ex-Im Bank recognizes the importance of assessing, to 
the extent reasonably possible, the risks associated with transactions 
supported by Ex-Im Bank. It is often difficult to assess risks related 
to individuals and non-publicly trade entities. Therefore, when an 
individual or a non-publicly traded entity applies for participation in 
an Ex-Im Bank program or is proposed as a guarantor for an Ex-Im Bank 
transaction, Ex-Im Bank may request social security and/or U.S. passport 
numbers from such individual or from the principals of such entity. Ex-
Im Bank shall not require submission of this information, and 
unwillingness or inability to provide a social security or passport 
number shall not affect Ex-Im Bank's decision on an application for Ex-
Im Bank assistance.
    (b) Use. Ex-Im Bank shall use social security and passport numbers 
to assess the creditworthiness of Ex-Im Bank program participants and as 
a mechanism for enforcing agreements with Ex-Im Bank. Such information 
shall not be disclosed, except as warranted by law and regulation.
    (c) Notice. Whenever Ex-Im Bank requests a social security or 
passport number, Ex-Im Bank shall place an appropriate Privacy Act 
notification on the form used to collect the information.



Sec. 404.22  Government contracts.

    (a) Approval by Assistant General Counsel for Administration. Ex-Im 
Bank shall not contract for the operation of a system of records or for 
an activity that requires access to a system of records without the 
express, written approval of the Assistant General Counsel for 
Administration.
    (b) Contract clauses. Any contract authorized under paragraph (a) of 
this section shall contain the standard contract clauses required by the 
Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR 24.104) to ensure compliance with 
the requirements imposed by the Privacy Act. The division within Ex-Im 
Bank that is responsible for technical supervision of the contract shall 
be responsible for ensuring that the contractor complies with the 
Privacy Act contract requirements.
    (c) Contractor status. Any contractor that operates an Ex-Im Bank 
system of records or engages in an activity that requires access to an 
Ex-Im Bank system of records shall be considered an

[[Page 1377]]

Ex-Im Bank employee for purposes of this subpart. Ex-Im Bank shall 
supply any such contractor with a copy of the regulations in this 
subpart upon entering into a contract with Ex-Im Bank.



Sec. 404.23  Other rights and services.

    Nothing in this subpart shall be construed to entitle any person to 
any service or to the disclosure of any record to which such person is 
not entitled under the Privacy Act.



    Subpart C_Demands for Testimony of Current and Former Ex-Im Bank 
           Personnel and for Production of Ex-Im Bank Records

    Source: 71 FR 14361, Mar. 22, 2006, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 404.24  Exemptions: EIB-35--Office of Inspector General
Investigative Records.

    (a) Criminal Law Enforcement--(1) Exemption. Under the authority 
granted by 5 U.S.C. 552a(j)(2), Ex-Im Bank hereby exempts the system of 
records entitled ``EIB-35--Office of Inspector General Investigative 
Records'' from the provisions of 5 U.S.C. 552a(c)(3), (c)(4), (d)(1) 
through (4), (e)(1) through (3), (e)(4)(G) and (H), (e)(5), (e)(8), (f), 
and (g) because the system contains information pertaining to the 
enforcement of criminal laws. ``EIB-35--Office of Inspector General 
Investigative Records'' is maintained by the Ex-Im Bank Office of 
Inspector General (``OIG'' or ``Ex-Im Bank OIG.'')
    (2) Reasons for exemption. The reasons for asserting this exemption 
are:
    (i) Disclosure to the individual named in the record pursuant to 5 
U.S.C. 552a(c)(3), (c)(4), or (d)(1) through (4) could seriously impede 
or compromise the investigation by alerting the target(s), subjecting a 
potential witness or witnesses to intimidation or improper influence, 
and leading to destruction of evidence. Disclosure could enable suspects 
to take action to prevent detection of criminal activities, conceal 
evidence, or escape prosecution.
    (ii) Application of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e)(1) is impractical because the 
relevance of specific information might be established only after 
considerable analysis and as the investigation progresses. Effective law 
enforcement requires the OIG to keep information that may not be 
relevant to a specific OIG investigation, but which may provide leads 
for appropriate law enforcement and to establish patterns of activity 
that might relate to the jurisdiction of the OIG and/or other agencies.
    (iii) Application of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e)(2) would be counterproductive 
to the performance of a criminal investigation because it would alert 
the individual to the existence of an investigation. In any 
investigation, it is necessary to obtain evidence from a variety of 
sources other than the subject of the investigation in order to verify 
the evidence necessary for successful litigation or prosecution.
    (iv) Application of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e)(3) could discourage the free 
flow of information in a criminal law enforcement inquiry.
    (v) The requirements of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e)(4)(G) and (H) and (f) would 
be counterproductive to the performance of a criminal investigation. To 
notify an individual at the individual's request of the existence of 
records in an investigative file pertaining to such individual, or to 
grant access to an investigative file could interfere with investigative 
and enforcement proceedings, deprive co-defendants of a right to a fair 
trial or other impartial adjudication, constitute an unwarranted 
invasion of personal privacy of others, disclose the identity or 
confidential sources, reveal confidential information supplied by these 
sources and disclose investigative techniques and procedures. 
Nevertheless, Ex-Im Bank OIG has published notice of its notification, 
access, and contest procedures because access may be appropriate in some 
cases.
    (vi) Although the OIG endeavors to maintain accurate records, 
application of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e)(5) is impractical because maintaining 
only those records that are accurate, relevant, timely, and complete and 
that assure fairness

[[Page 1378]]

in determination is contrary to established investigative techniques. 
Information that may initially appear inaccurate, irrelevant, untimely, 
or incomplete may, when collated and analyzed with other available 
information, become more pertinent as an investigation progresses.
    (vii) Application of 5 U.S.C. 552a(e)(8) could prematurely reveal an 
ongoing criminal investigation to the subject of the investigation.
    (viii) The provisions of subsection (g) do not apply to this system 
if an exemption otherwise applies.
    (b) Other Law Enforcement--(1) Exemption. Under the authority 
granted by 5 U.S.C. 552a(k)(2), Ex-Im Bank hereby exempts the system of 
records entitled ``EIB-35--Office of Inspector General Investigative 
Records'' from the provisions of 5 U.S.C. 552a(c)(3), (d)(1) through 
(4), (e)(1), (e)(4)(G) and (H), and (f) for the same reasons as stated 
in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, that is, because the system 
contains investigatory material compiled for law enforcement purposes 
other than material within the scope of subsection 552a(j)(2).
    (2) Reasons for exemption. The reasons for asserting this exemption 
are because the disclosure and other requirements of the Privacy Act 
could substantially compromise the efficacy and integrity of OIG 
operations. Disclosure could invade the privacy of other individuals and 
disclose their identity when they were expressly promised 
confidentiality. Disclosure could interfere with the integrity of 
information which would otherwise be subject to privileges (see, e.g., 5 
U.S.C. 552(b)(5)), and which could interfere with other important law 
enforcement concerns (see, e.g., 5 U.S.C. 552(b)(7)).
    (c) Federal Civilian or Contract Employment--(1) Exemption. Under 
the authority granted by 5 U.S.C. 552a(k)(5), Ex-Im Bank hereby exempts 
the system of records entitled ``EIB-35--Office of Inspector General 
Investigative Records'' from the provisions of 5 U.S.C. 552a(c)(3), 
(d)(1) through (4), (e)(1), (e)(4)(G) and (H), and (f) because the 
system contains investigatory material compiled for the purpose of 
determining eligibility or qualifications for federal civilian or 
contract employment.
    (2) Reasons for exemption. The reasons for asserting this exemption 
are the same as described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.

[77 FR 41886, July 17, 2012, as amended at 77 FR 42949, July 23, 2012]



Sec. 404.25  Applicability.

    This subpart applies exclusively to demands for testimony and/or 
production of records issued to Ex-Im Bank personnel, in connection with 
legal proceedings to which Ex-Im Bank is not a party, regarding 
information acquired in the course of the performance of official duties 
or due to their official status. Nothing in this subpart shall be 
construed to waive the sovereign immunity of the United States. This 
subpart shall not apply to the following:
    (a) Demands for testimony and/or production of records pursuant to a 
legal proceeding to which Ex-Im Bank is a party:
    (b) Demands for testimony and/or production of records in those 
instances in which Ex-Im Bank personnel are asked to disclose 
information wholly unrelated to their official duties; and
    (c) Congressional demands and requests for testimony or records.



Sec. 404.26  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart, the following definitions shall 
apply--
    Demand--includes an order, subpoena, or other compulsory process 
issued by a party in litigation or a court of competent jurisdiction, 
requiring the production or release of Ex-Im Bank information or 
records, or requiring the testimony of Ex-Im Bank personnel.
    Ex-Im Bank personnel--includes any current or former officer or 
employee of Ex-Im Bank, including all individuals who have been 
appointed by, or subject to, the official supervision, jurisdiction, or 
control of any Ex-Im Bank employees. This definition encompasses all 
individuals hired through contractual agreements with Ex-Im Bank, such 
as: consultants, contractors, sub-contractors, and their employees.

[[Page 1379]]

    Legal proceeding--a case or controversy pending before any federal, 
state, or local court, including a grand jury proceeding; a proceeding 
before a federal, state, or local administrative judge, board, or other 
similar body with adjudicative powers; or a legislative proceeding 
before a state or local legislative body.
    Records--all documentary materials that Ex-Im Bank creates or 
receives in connection with the transaction of official business, 
including any materials classified as ``Federal records'' under 44 
U.S.C. 3301 and its implementing regulations.
    Testimony--written or oral statements, including, but not limited 
to, depositions, answers to interrogatories, affidavits, declarations, 
and any other statements made in a legal proceeding, including any 
expert or opinion testimony.



Sec. 404.27  Demand requirements.

    A party's demand for testimony and/or production of records by Ex-Im 
Bank personnel regarding information acquired in the course of their 
performance of official duties or due to their official status shall be 
set forth in, or accompanied by, a signed affidavit or other written 
statement. Such affidavit or written statement must be submitted at 
least 30 days prior to the date such testimony and/or production of 
records is requested to be taken and/or produced. A copy of the 
affidavit or written statement shall be served on the other parties to 
the legal proceeding. The affidavit or written statement must:
    (a) Be addressed to the Export-Import Bank of the United States, 
Office of the General Counsel, 811 Vermont Ave., NW., Washington, DC 
20571;
    (b) State the nature of the legal proceeding, including any docket 
number, title of the case, and the name of the administrative or 
adjudicative body before which the proceedings are to be heard;
    (c) State the nature of the testimony or records sought;
    (d) State the relevance of the information sought to the legal 
proceedings;
    (e) State why such information can only be obtained through 
testimony or production of records by Ex-Im Bank personnel; and
    (f) Comply with all procedures governing valid service of process.



Sec. 404.28  Notification of General Counsel required.

    Ex-Im Bank personnel receiving a demand for testimony and/or 
production of records regarding information acquired in the course of 
their performance of official duties, or due to their official status, 
shall immediately notify the General Counsel of Ex-Im Bank (``General 
Counsel'') upon receipt of such demand. The General Counsel maintains 
the exclusive authority to waive the requirements of any or all sections 
of this subpart and reserves the right to delegate his or her authority 
under this subpart to other appropriate Ex-Im Bank personnel.



Sec. 404.29  Restrictions on testimony and production of records.

    Ex-Im Bank personnel may not provide testimony and/or produce 
records regarding information acquired in the course of their 
performance of official duties, or due to their official status, in 
connection with any legal proceeding to which this subpart applies, 
without authorization by the General Counsel. Such authorization must be 
in writing, unless the General Counsel determines that circumstances 
warrant an oral authorization, and such oral authorization is 
subsequently documented.



Sec. 404.30  Factors General Counsel may consider in determining
whether to authorize testimony and/or the production of records.

    In determining whether to authorize Ex-Im Bank personnel to provide 
testimony and/or produce records regarding information acquired in the 
course of their performance of official duties, or due to their official 
status, the General Counsel may consider factors including, but not 
limited to, the following:
    (a) Efficiency--the conservation of the time and resources of Ex-Im 
Bank personnel for the conduct of official business;
    (b) Undue burden--whether the demand creates an undue burden upon

[[Page 1380]]

Ex-Im Bank or is otherwise inappropriate under any applicable 
administrative or court rules;
    (c) Appearance of bias--whether the testimony and/or production of 
records could result in the public perception that Ex-Im Bank is 
favoring one party over another, or advocating the position of a party 
to the proceeding;
    (d) Furtherance of agency policy--whether the testimony and/or 
production of records is consistent with the policy and mission of the 
Ex-Im Bank;
    (e) Prevention of fraud or injustice--whether the disclosure of the 
information requested is necessary to prevent the perpetration of fraud 
or injustice;
    (f) Relevance to litigation--whether the testimony and/or production 
of records sought is relevant to the subject litigation;
    (g) Necessity--whether the testimony and/or production of records, 
including a release of such in camera, is appropriate or necessary as 
determined by either the procedural rules governing the legal 
proceeding, or according to the relevant laws concerning privilege;
    (h) Availability from another source--whether the information sought 
through testimony or production of records is available from another 
source;
    (i) Violations of laws or regulations--whether the testimony and/or 
production of records would violate a statute, regulation, executive 
order, or other official directive;
    (j) Classified information--whether the testimony and/or production 
of records would improperly reveal information classified pursuant to 
applicable statute or Executive Order; and
    (k) Compromise of rights and interests--whether the testimony and/or 
production of records would compromise any of the following: law 
enforcement interests, constitutional rights, national security 
interests, foreign policy interests, or the confidentiality of 
commercial and/or financial information.



Sec. 404.31  Procedure for declining to testify and/or produce records.

    Ex-Im Bank personnel receiving a demand to provide testimony and/or 
produce records regarding information acquired in the course of their 
performance of official duties, or due to their official status, and who 
have not received written authorization from the General Counsel to 
provide such information, shall:
    (a) Respectfully decline to answer or appear for examination on the 
grounds that such testimony is forbidden by this subpart;
    (b) Request the opportunity to consult with the General Counsel;
    (c) Explain that only upon consultation may they be granted approval 
to provide such testimony;
    (d) Explain that providing such testimony or records absent approval 
may subject the individual to criminal liability under 18 U.S.C. 641, as 
well as other applicable laws, and other disciplinary action; and
    (e) Request a stay of the request or demand pending a determination 
by the General Counsel.



Sec. 404.32  Procedure in the event a decision concerning a demand
is not made prior to the time a response to the demand is required.

    If response to a demand is required before a determination has been 
rendered by the General Counsel, the U.S. Attorney or such other 
attorney as may be designated for the purpose will appear with the Ex-Im 
Bank personnel upon whom the demand has been made, and will furnish the 
court or other authority with a copy of the regulations contained in 
this subpart and inform the court or other authority that the demand has 
been or is being, as the case may be, referred for prompt consideration 
of the General Counsel. The court or other authority shall be requested 
respectfully to stay the demand pending determination by the General 
Counsel.



Sec. 404.33  Procedure in the event of an adverse ruling.

    If the court or other authority declines to stay the effect of the 
demand in response to a request made in accordance with Sec. 404.32 
pending a determination by the General Counsel, or if the court or other 
authority rules that the demand must be complied with irrespective of 
the instructions from the General Counsel not to produce the material or 
disclose the information

[[Page 1381]]

sought, the Ex-Im Bank personnel upon whom the demand has been made 
shall respectfully decline to comply with the demand (United States ex 
rel. Touhy v. Ragen, 340 U.S. 462).



Sec. 404.34  Procedure for demands for testimony or production of
documents regarding confidential information.

    In addition to compliance with the requirements of this subpart, 
demands to provide testimony and/or produce records that concern 
information protected by the Privacy Act, 5 U.S.C. 552a, or any other 
authority mandating confidentiality of certain classes of records or 
information, must also satisfy the requirements for disclosure imposed 
by such authority before records may be produced or testimony given.



Sec. 404.35  Procedures for requests for Ex-Im Bank employees to 
provide expert or opinion testimony.

    No Ex-Im Bank personnel may, unless specifically authorized by the 
General Counsel, testify in any legal proceeding as an expert or opinion 
witness as to any matter related to his or her duties or the functions 
of the Ex-Im Bank, including the meaning of Ex-Im Bank documents. Any 
demand for expert or opinion testimony shall comply with the policies 
and procedures outlined in this subpart.



Sec. 404.36  No private right of action.

    Nothing in this subpart shall be construed as creating any right, 
substantive or procedural, enforceable at law or equity by a party 
against Ex-Im Bank or the United States.

Subparts D-E [Reserved]

                           PART 405 [RESERVED]



PART 407_REGULATIONS GOVERNING PUBLIC OBSERVATION OF EXIMBANK MEETINGS
--Table of Contents



Sec.
407.1  Purpose, scope and definitions.
407.2  Closing meetings.
407.3  Procedures applicable to regularly scheduled meetings.
407.4  Procedures applicable to other meetings.
407.5  Certification by General Counsel.
407.6  Transcripts, recordings and minutes of closed meetings.
407.7  Relationship to Freedom of Information Act.

    Authority: Sec. (g) Government in the Sunshine Act, 5 U.S.C. 
552b(g); secs. (b) through (f), 5 U.S.C. 552b.

    Source: 42 FR 12417, Mar. 4, 1977, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 407.1  Purpose, scope and definitions.

    (a) Consistent with the principles that: (1) The public is entitled 
to the fullest practicable information regarding the decision-making 
processes of the Federal Government, and (2) the rights of individuals 
and the ability of the Export-Import Bank of the United States to carry 
out its statutory responsibilities should be protected, this part is 
promulgated pursuant to the directive of section (g) of the Government 
in the Sunshine Act, 5 U.S.C. 552b(g), and specifically implements 
sections (b) through (f) of said Act, 5 U.S.C. 552b (b) through (f).
    (b) The term meeting means any meeting of the Board of Directors of 
Eximbank at which a quorum is present and where deliberations determine 
or result in the joint conduct or disposition of official Eximbank 
business.
    (c) The term regularly scheduled meeting means meetings of the Board 
of Directors or the Executive Committee which are held at 9:30 a.m. on 
Thursday of each week.
    (d) The term General Counsel means the General Counsel and his or 
her designees.

[42 FR 12417, Mar. 4, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 12136, Mar. 22, 1982; 49 
FR 41237, Oct. 22, 1984; 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007]



Sec. 407.2  Closing meetings.

    (a) Except where Eximbank finds that the public interest requires 
otherwise, a meeting, or any portion thereof, may be closed to the 
public, where the Board of Directors determines that such meetings, or 
any portion thereof, or information pertaining to such meeting, or any 
portion thereof, is likely to:

[[Page 1382]]

    (1) Disclose matters that are: (i) Specifically authorized under 
criteria established by an Executive order to be kept secret in the 
interests of national defense or foreign policy and (ii) in fact 
properly classified pursuant to such Executive order;
    (2) Relate solely to the internal personnel rules and practices of 
Eximbank or any other agency;
    (3) Disclose matters specifically exempted from disclosure by 
statute (other than section 552 of title 5 U.S.C.), provided that such 
statute: (i) Requires that the matters be withheld from the public in 
such a manner as to leave no discretion on the issue, or (ii) 
establishes particular criteria for withholding or refers to particular 
types of matters to be withheld;
    (4) Disclose trade secrets and commercial or financial information 
obtained from a person and privileged or confidential;
    (5) Involve accusing any person of a crime, or formally censuring 
any person;
    (6) Disclose information of a personal nature where disclosure would 
constitute a clearly unwarranted invasion of personal privacy;
    (7) Disclose investigatory records compiled for law enforcement 
purposes, or information which if written would be contained in such 
records, but only to the extent that the production of such records or 
information would:
    (i) Interfere with enforcement proceedings,
    (ii) Deprive a person of a right to a fair trial or an impartial 
adjudication,
    (iii) Constitute an unwarranted invasion of personal privacy,
    (iv) Disclose the identity of a confidential source and, in the case 
of a record compiled by a criminal law enforcement authority in the 
course of a criminal investigation, or by an agency conducting a lawful 
national security intelligence investigation, confidential information 
funished only by the confidential source,
    (v) Disclose investigative techniques and procedures, or
    (vi) Endanger the life or physical safety of law enforcement 
personnel;
    (8) Disclose information contained in or related to examination, 
operating, or condition reports prepared by, on behalf of, or for the 
use of an agency responsible for the regulation or supervision of 
financial institutions;
    (9) Disclose information the premature disclosure of which would:
    (i) In the case of an agency which regulates currencies, securities, 
commodities, or financial institutions, be likely to: (A) Lead to 
significant financial speculation in currencies, securities, or 
commodities, or (B) significantly endanger the stability of any 
financial institution; or
    (ii) In the case of Eximbank or any other agency, be likely to 
significantly frustrate implementation of a proposed agency action;

except that paragraph (a)(9)(ii) of this section shall not apply in any 
instance where the agency has already disclosed to the public the 
content or nature of its proposed action, or where the agency is 
required by law to make such disclosure on its own initiative prior to 
taking final agency on such proposal; or
    (10) Specifically concern Eximbank's issuance of a subpoena, or 
Eximbank's participation in a civil action or proceeding, an action in a 
foreign court or international tribunal, or an arbitration.
    (b) Inasmuch as opening any regularly scheduled meeting, or any 
portion thereof, to public observation will be likely to result in the 
disclosure of the kind of information set forth in paragraph (a) (4), 
(8), (9)(i) or (a)(10) of this section, or any combination thereof, of 
paragraph (a) of this section, the Board of Directors expects to close 
all regularly scheduled meetings to the public.
    (c) Any other meeting of Eximbank, or any portion thereof, will be 
open to public observation except where the Board of Directors 
determines that such meeting, or any portion thereof, is likely to 
disclose information of the kind set forth in any paragraph of 
Sec. 407.2(a). In the event that the Board of Directors closes such 
meeting, or any portion thereof, by virtue of paragraph (a)(4), (8), 
(9)(i)(A) or (a)(10) of this section, or any combination thereof, the 
procedure set forth in Sec. 407.3 below will apply, and in the event 
that the Board of Directors closes such meeting, or any portion thereof, 
by virtue of any of the remaining paragraphs of Sec. 407.2(a),

[[Page 1383]]

or any combination thereof, the procedures set forth in Sec. 407.4 will 
apply.

[42 FR 12417, Mar. 4, 1977, as amended at 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007]



Sec. 407.3  Procedures applicable to regularly scheduled meetings.

    (a) Announcements. Regularly scheduled meetings of the Board of 
Directors will be held at 9:30 a.m. every Thursday in the Board Room 
(Room 1141) of the Bank's headquarters. In the event that a regularly 
scheduled meeting is rescheduled, public announcement of the time, date 
and place of such meeting will be made at the earliest practicable time 
in the form of a notice posted in the Office of the Secretary. An agenda 
setting forth the subject matter of each regularly scheduled meeting 
will be made available in the Office of the Secretary (Room 935), 
telephone number (202) (566-8871) at the earliest practicable time, 
Provided, That individual items may be added to or deleted from any 
agenda at any time. Inquiries from the public regarding any regularly 
scheduled meeting shall be directed to the Office of the Secretary.
    (b) Voting. At the beginning of each regularly scheduled meeting, 
the Board of Directors will vote by recorded vote on whether to close 
such meeting. No proxy vote will be permitted. A record of such vote 
indicating the vote of each Director will be posted in the Office of the 
Secretary immediately following the conclusion of such meeting.

[42 FR 12417, Mar. 4, 1977, as amended at 47 FR 12136, Mar. 22, 1982; 49 
FR 9560, Mar. 14, 1984; 49 FR 41237, Oct. 22, 1984; 50 FR 8606, Mar. 4, 
1985; 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007]



Sec. 407.4  Procedures applicable to other meetings.

    (a) Amendments. (1) For every meeting which is to be open to public 
observation or which is to be closed pursuant to any paragraph of 
Sec. 407.2(a) other than paragraphs (a) (4), (8), (9)(i) or (10), or any 
combination thereof, public announcement will be made at least one week 
before the meeting of the time, place, and the agenda setting forth the 
subject matter of such meeting, and whether the meeting, or any portion 
thereof, is to be open or closed to the public.
    (2) Inquiries from the public regarding any such meeting shall be 
directed to the Office of the Secretary.
    (3) The one-week period for the announcement required by paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section may be reduced if the Board of Directors 
determines by a recorded vote that Eximbank business requires such 
meeting to be called at an earlier date. Public announcement of the 
time, place, and subject matter of such meeting, and whether open or 
closed to the public, will be made at the earliest practicable time.
    (4) The time or place of a meeting may be changed following the 
announcement required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section only if public 
announcement is made of such change at the earliest practicable time.
    (5) The subject matter of a meeting or the determination of the 
Board of Directors to open or close a meeting, or any portion thereof, 
to the public, may be changed following the announcement required by 
paragraph (a) of this section only if:
    (i) A majority of the entire voting membership of the Board of 
Directors determines by a recorded vote that Eximbank business so 
requires and that no earlier announcement of the change was possible; 
and
    (ii) The Board of Directors announces such change and the vote of 
each Director upon such change at the earliest practicable time.
    (6) Individual items may be added to or deleted from any agenda at 
any time.
    (7) The announcements required pursuant to this section shall be 
made in the form of a notice posted in the Office of the Secretary. In 
addition, immediately following each announcement required by this 
section, notice of: (i) The time, place and subject matter of a meeting 
which is to be open to public observation or which is to be closed 
pursuant to any section of Sec. 407.2(a) other than paragraphs (a) (4), 
(8), (9)(i) or (10), or any combination thereof, (ii) the decision to 
open or close such meeting, or any portion thereof, or (iii) any change 
in any announcement previously made shall be submitted for publication 
in the Federal Register.

[[Page 1384]]

    (8) The information required by this subsection shall be disclosed 
except to the extent that it is exempt from disclosure under any section 
of Sec. 407.2(a).
    (b) Voting. (1) Action to close a meeting, or any portion thereof, 
pursuant to any section of Sec. 407.2(a), other than paragraphs (a) (4), 
(8), (9)(i), or (10), or any combination thereof, shall be taken only 
when a majority of the entire voting membership of the Board of 
Directors votes to take such action.
    (2) A separate vote of the Board of Directors shall be taken with 
respect to each meeting, or any portion thereof, which is proposed to be 
closed to the public pursuant to any section of Sec. 407.2(a) other than 
paragraphs (a) (4), (8), (9)(i) or (10), or any combination thereof, or 
with respect to any information which is proposed to be withheld under 
any section of Sec. 407.2(a), other than paragraphs (a) (4), (8), (9)(i) 
or (10), or any combination thereof.
    (3) A single vote of the Board of Directors may be taken with 
respect to a series of meetings, or any portion thereof, which are 
proposed to be closed to the public pursuant to any paragraph of 
Sec. 407.2(a), other than paragraphs (a) (4), (8), (9)(i) or (10), or 
combination thereof, or with respect to any information concerning such 
series of meetings, so long as each meeting in such series involves the 
same particular matters and is scheduled to be held no more than 30 days 
after the initial meeting in such series.
    (4) Whenever any person whose interests may be directly affected by 
any portion of a meeting which is to be open to public observation 
submits a request in writing to the Office of the Secretary that the 
Board of Directors close such portion to the public under paragraph (a) 
(5), (6) or (7) of Sec. 407.2, the Board of Directors, shall vote by 
recorded vote on whether to close such portion.
    (5) No proxy vote will be permitted for any vote required under this 
section.
    (6) A record of each vote indicating the vote of each Director 
pursuant to paragraphs (b) (1), (2), (3) or (4) of this section will be 
posted in the Office of the Secretary within one day after it has been 
taken, Provided, That if a meeting or portion thereof is to be closed, 
such record shall be accompanied by: (i) A full written explanation of 
the reasons for closing such meeting or portion thereof and (ii) a list 
of all persons expected to attend such meeting or portion thereof and 
their affiliation.

[42 FR 12417, Mar. 4, 1977, as amended at 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007]



Sec. 407.5  Certification by General Counsel.

    For every meeting closed pursuant to any paragraph of Sec. 407.2(a), 
the General Counsel of Eximbank will be asked to certify prior to such 
meeting that in his or her opinion such meeting may properly be closed 
to the public, and to state which of the exemptions set forth in 
Sec. 407.2(a) he or she has relied upon. A copy of such certification 
will be posted in the Office of the Secretary. The original 
certification together with a statement from the presiding officer of 
such meeting setting forth the time, date and place of such meeting and 
the persons present will be retained by Eximbank as part of the 
transcript, recording or minutes of such meeting described below.



Sec. 407.6  Transcripts, recordings and minutes of closed meetings.

    Eximbank will maintain a complete transcript or electronic recording 
of the proceedings of every meeting or portion thereof closed to the 
public, Provided, however, That if any meeting or portion thereof is 
closed pursuant to paragraphs (8), (9)(i) or (10) of Sec. 407.2(a), 
Eximbank may maintain a set of detailed minutes for such meetings in 
lieu of a transcript or electronic recording. The entire transcript, 
electronic recording or set of minutes of a meeting will be made 
promptly available to the public for inspection and copying in the 
Office of the Secretary. Copies of such transcript or minutes, as well 
as copies of the transcription of such recording disclosing the identity 
of each speaker, will be furnished to any person at the actual cost of 
duplication or transcription. However, Eximbank will not make available 
for inspection or copying the transcript, electronic recording or 
minutes of the discussions of any item on the agenda

[[Page 1385]]

of such meeting which contains information of the kind described in 
Sec. 407.2(a). Requests to inspect or to have copies made of any 
transcript, electronic recording or set of minutes of any meeting or 
item(s) on the agenda, thereof should be made in writing to the General 
Counsel and if possible, identify the time, date and place of such 
meeting and briefly describe the item(s) being sought. Eximbank will 
maintain a complete verbatim copy of the transcript, a complete 
electronic recording or a complete copy of the minutes of each meeting, 
or portion thereof, closed to the public for two years after such 
meeting or one year from the date of final action of the Board of 
Directors on all items on the agenda of such meeting, whichever occurs 
later.

[42 FR 12417, Mar. 4, 1977, as amended at 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007]



Sec. 407.7  Relationship to Freedom of Information Act.

    Nothing in this part expands or limits the present rights of any 
person under part 404, except that the exemptions contained in 
Sec. 407.2 shall govern in the case of any request made pursuant to part 
404 to copy or inspect the transcripts, recordings or minutes described 
in Sec. 407.6.



PART 408_PROCEDURES FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL
POLICY ACT--Table of Contents



                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
408.1  Background.
408.2  Purpose.
408.3  Applicability.

               Subpart B_Eximbank Implementing Procedures

408.4  Early involvement in foreign activities for which Eximbank 
          financing may be requested.
408.5  Ensuring environmental documents are actually considered in 
          Agency decision-making.
408.6  Typical classes of action.
408.7  Environmental information.

    Authority: National Environmental Policy Act of 1969; 42 U.S.C. 4321 
et seq.

    Source: 44 FR 50811, Aug. 30, 1979, unless otherwise noted.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec. 408.1  Background.

    (a) The National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) of 1969 (42 U.S.C. 
4321 et seq.) establishes national policies and goals for the protection 
of the environment. Section 102(2) of NEPA contains certain procedural 
requirements directed toward the attainment of such goals. In 
particular, all Federal agencies are required to give appropriate 
consideration to the environmental effects of their proposed actions in 
their decision-making and to prepare detailed environmental statements 
on recommendations or reports on proposals for legislation and other 
major Federal Actions significantly affecting the quality of the human 
environment.
    (b) Executive Order 11991 of May 24, 1977, directed the Council on 
Environmental Quality (CEQ) to issue regulations to implement the 
procedural provisions of NEPA (NEPA Regulations). Accordingly, CEQ 
issued final NEPA Regulations which are binding on all Federal agencies 
as of July 30, 1979 (40 CFR parts 1500 through 1508) on November 29, 
1979. These Regulations provide that each Federal agency shall as 
necessary adopt implementing procedures to supplement the NEPA 
Regulations. Section 1507.3(b) of the NEPA Regulations identifies those 
sections of the NEPA Regulations which must be addressed in agency 
procedures.



Sec. 408.2  Purpose.

    The purpose of this part is to establish procedures which supplement 
the NEPA Regulations and provide for the implementation of those 
provisions identified in Sec. 1507.3(b) of the NEPA Regulations.



Sec. 408.3  Applicability.

    Historically, virtually all financing provided by Eximbank has been 
in aid of U.S. exports which involve no effects on the quality of the 
environment within the United States, its territories or possessions. 
Eximbank has

[[Page 1386]]

separate procedures for conducting environmental reviews where such 
reviews are required by E.O. 12114 (January 4, 1979) because of 
potential effects on the environment of global commons areas or on the 
environment of foreign nations. The procedures set forth in this part 
apply to the relatively rare cases where Eximbank financing of U.S. 
exports may affect environmental quality in the United States, its 
territories or possessions.



               Subpart B_Eximbank Implementing Procedures



Sec. 408.4  Early involvement in foreign activities for which Eximbank
financing may be requested.

    (a) Section 1501.2(d) of the NEPA Regulations requires agencies to 
provide for early involvement in actions which, while planned by private 
applicants or other non-Federal entities, require some form of Federal 
approval. Pursuant to the Export-Import Bank Act of 1945, as amended, 
Eximbank is asked to provide financing for transactions involving 
exports of U.S. goods and services for projects in foreign countries 
which are planned by non-U.S. entities (Transactions).
    (b) To implement the requirements of Sec. 1501.2(d) with respect to 
these Transactions, Eximbank:
    (1) Will provide on a project-by-project basis to applicant seeking 
financing from Eximbank guidance as to the scope and level of 
environmental information to be used in evaluating a proposed 
Transaction where: (i) The proposed Eximbank financing would be a major 
action and (ii) a Transaction may significantly affect the quality of 
the human environment in the United States, its territories or 
possessions.
    (2) Upon receipt of an application for Eximbank financing or 
notification that an application will be filed, will consult as required 
with other appropriate parties to initiate and coordinate the necessary 
environmental analyses.


These responsibilities will be performed by the General Counsel and the 
Engineers of Eximbank.
    (c) To facilitate Eximbank review of Transactions for which positive 
determinations have been made under paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of 
this section, applicants should:
    (1) Consult with the Engineer as early as possible in the planning 
process for guidance on the scope and level of environmental information 
required to be submitted in support of their application;
    (2) Conduct any studies which are deemed necessary and appropriate 
by Eximbank to determine the impact of the proposed action on the 
quality of the human environment;
    (3) Consult with appropriate U.S. (Federal, regional, State and 
local) agencies and other potentially interested parties during 
preliminary planning stages to ensure that all environmental factors are 
identified;
    (4) Submit applications for all U.S. (Federal, regional, State and 
local) approvals as early as possible in the planning process;
    (5) Notify Eximbank as early as possible of all other applicable 
legal requirements for project completion so that all applicable Federal 
environmental reviews may be coordinated; and
    (6) Notify Eximbank of all known parties potentially affected by or 
interested in the proposed action.



Sec. 408.5  Ensuring environmental documents are actually considered
in Agency decision-making.

    Section 1505.1 of the NEPA Regulations contains requirements to 
ensure adequate consideration of environmental documents in agency 
decision-making. To implement these requirements, Eximbank officials 
will:
    (a) Consider all relevant environmental documents in evaluating 
applications for Eximbank financing;
    (b) Ensure that all relevant environmental documents, comments and 
responses accompany the application through Eximbank's review processes;
    (c) Consider only those alternatives encompassed by the range of 
alternatives discussed in the relevant environmental documents when 
evaluating an application which is the subject of an EIS.

[[Page 1387]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                     Key officials or offices
         Eximbank actions           Start of NEPA process    Completion of NEPA        required to consider
                                                                  process             environmental documents
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issuance of Preliminary Commitment  When application is    When the Board of      Under Sec. 408.4(b)(1) (i)
 (P.C.).                             received.              Directors meets to     and (ii), General Counsel to
                                                            consider               determine whether requested
                                                            application. The       Eximbank financing is a major
                                                            Board may notify       action and Engineer to
                                                            applicant that         determine whether proposed
                                                            environmental          Transaction may significantly
                                                            effects will be        affect the quality of the
                                                            considered when        human environment in the
                                                            final commitment is    United States, its
                                                            requested and          territories or possessions.
                                                            request information
                                                            on environmental
                                                            matters.
Issuance of Final Commitment......  When application is    When the Board of      (If no P.C. has been issued,
                                     received.              Directors meets to     key offices will make
                                                            consider application.  determinations mentioned
                                                                                   above.) Engineer to collect,
                                                                                   prepare or arrange for
                                                                                   preparation of all
                                                                                   environmental documents.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 408.6  Typical classes of action.

    (a) Section 1507.3(c)(2) of the NEPA Regulations in conjunction with 
Sec. 1508.4 thereof requires agencies to establish three typical classes 
of action for similar treatment under NEPA. These typical classes of 
action are set forth below:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Actions normally requiring
    Actions normally requiring EIS's        assessments but not necessarily      Actions normally not requiring
                                                         EIS's                        assessments or EIS's
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None...................................  Applications for Eximbank financing   Applications for Eximbank
                                          under the direct lending program in   financing in the form of
                                          support of transactions for which     insurance or guarantees.
                                          determinations under Sec.
                                          408.4(b)(1) (i) and (ii) above may
                                          be affirmative.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Eximbank will independently determine whether an EIS or an 
environmental assessment is required where:
    (1) A proposal for agency action is not covered by one of the 
typical classes of action above; or
    (2) For actions which are covered, the presence of extraordinary 
circumstances indicates that some other level of environmental review 
may be appropriate.



Sec. 408.7  Environmental information.

    Interested persons may contact the General Counsel regarding 
Eximbank's compliance with NEPA.



PART 410_ENFORCEMENT OF NONDISCRIMINATION ON THE BASIS OF HANDICAP
IN PROGRAMS OR ACTIVITIES CONDUCTED BY EXPORT-IMPORT BANK OF THE 
UNITED STATES--Table of Contents



Sec.
410.101  Purpose.
410.102  Application.
410.103  Definitions.
410.104-410.109  [Reserved]
410.110  Self-evaluation.
410.111  Notice.
410.112-410.129  [Reserved]
410.130  General prohibitions against discrimination.
410.131-410.139  [Reserved]
410.140  Employment.
410.141-410.148  [Reserved]
410.149  Program accessibility: Discrimination prohibited.
410.150  Program accessibility: Existing facilities.
410.151  Program accessibility: New construction and alterations.
410.152-410.159  [Reserved]
410.160  Communications.
410.161-410.169  [Reserved]
410.170  Compliance procedures.
410.171-410.999  [Reserved]

    Authority: 29 U.S.C. 794.

    Source: 51 FR 4575, 4579, Feb. 5, 1986, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 410.101  Purpose.

    This part effectuates section 119 of the Rehabilitation, 
Comprehensive Services, and Developmental Disabilities Amendments of 
1978, which amended section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 to 
prohibit discrimination on the basis of handicap in programs or 
activities conducted by Executive agencies or the United States Postal 
Service.

[[Page 1388]]



Sec. 410.102  Application.

    This part applies to all programs or activities conducted by the 
agency.



Sec. 410.103  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part, the term--
    Assistant Attorney General means the Assistant Attorney General, 
Civil Rights Division, United States Department of Justice.
    Auxiliary aids means services or devices that enable persons with 
impaired sensory, manual, or speaking skills to have an equal 
opportunity to participate in, and enjoy the benefits of, programs or 
activities conducted by the agency. For example, auxiliary aids useful 
for persons with impaired vision include readers, Brailled materials, 
audio recordings, telecommunications devices and other similar services 
and devices. Auxiliary aids useful for persons with impaired hearing 
include telephone handset amplifiers, telephones compatible with hearing 
aids, telecommunication devices for deaf persons (TDD's), interpreters, 
notetakers, written materials, and other similar services and devices.
    Complete complaint means a written statement that contains the 
complainant's name and address and describes the agency's alleged 
discriminatory action in sufficient detail to inform the agency of the 
nature and date of the alleged violation of section 504. It shall be 
signed by the complainant or by someone authorized to do so on his or 
her behalf. Complaints filed on behalf of classes or third parties shall 
describe or identify (by name, if possible) the alleged victims of 
discrimination.
    Facility means all or any portion of buildings, structures, 
equipment, roads, walks, parking lots, rolling stock or other 
conveyances, or other real or personal property.
    Handicapped person means any person who has a physical or mental 
impairment that substantially limits one or more major life activities, 
has a record of such an impairment, or is regarded as having such an 
impairment.
    As used in this definition, the phrase:
    (l) Physical or mental impairment includes--
    (i) Any physiological disorder or condition, cosmetic disfigurement, 
or anatomical loss affecting one of more of the following body systems: 
Neurological; musculoskeletal; special sense organs; respiratory, 
including speech organs; cardiovascular; reproductive; digestive; 
genitourinary; hemic and lymphatic; skin; and endocrine; or
    (ii) Any mental or psychological disorder, such as mental 
retardation, organic brain syndrome, emotional or mental illness, and 
specific learning disabilities. The term physical or mental impairment 
includes, but is not limited to, such diseases and conditions as 
orthopedic, visual, speech, and hearing impairments, cerebral palsy, 
epilepsy, muscular dystrophy, multiple sclerosis, cancer, heart disease, 
diabetes, mental retardation, emotional illness, and drug addition and 
alcholism.
    (2) Major life activities includes functions such as caring for 
one's self, performing manual tasks, walking, seeing, hearing, speaking, 
breathing, learning, and working.
    (3) Has a record of such an impairment means has a history of, or 
has been misclassified as having, a mental or physical impairment that 
substantially limits one or more major life activities.
    (4) Is regarded as having an impairment means--
    (i) Has a physical or mental impairment that does not substantially 
limit major life activities but is treated by the agency as constituting 
such a limitation;
    (ii) Has a physical or mental impairment that substantially limits 
major life activities only as a result of the attitudes of others toward 
such impairment; or
    (iii) Has none of the impairments defined in paragraph (1) of this 
definition but is treated by the agency as having such an impairment.
    Qualified handicapped person means--
    (1) With respect to any agency program or activity under which a 
person is required to perform services or to achieve a level of 
accomplishment, a handicapped person who meets the essential eligibility 
requirements and who can achieve the purpose of the program or activity 
without modifications in the program or activity that the agency can 
demonstrate would result in a fundamental alteration in its nature; or

[[Page 1389]]

    (2) With respect to any other program or activity, a handicapped 
person who meets the essential eligibility requirements for 
participation in, or receipt of benefits from, that program or activity.
    (3) Qualified handicapped person is defined for purposes of 
employment in 29 CFR 1613.702(f), which is made applicable to this part 
by Sec. 410.140.
    Section 504 means section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 
(Pub. L. 93-112, 87 Stat. 394 (29 U.S.C. 794)), as amended by the 
Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1974 (Pub. L. 93-516, 88 Stat. 1617), 
and the Rehabilitation, Comprehensive Services, and Developmental 
Disabilities Amendments of 1978 (Pub. L. 95-602, 92 Stat. 2955). As used 
in this part, section 504 applies only to programs or activities 
conducted by Executive agencies and not to federally assisted programs.

[51 FR 4575, 4579, Feb. 5, 1986; 51 FR 7543, Mar. 5, 1986]



Secs. 410.104-410.109  [Reserved]



Sec. 410.110  Self-evaluation.

    (a) The agency shall, by April 9, 1987, evaluate its current 
policies and practices, and the effects thereof, that do not or may not 
meet the requirements of this part, and, to the extent modification of 
any such policies and practices is required, the agency shall proceed to 
make the necessary modifications.
    (b) The agency shall provide an opportunity to interested persons, 
including handicapped persons or organizations representing handicapped 
persons, to participate in the self-evaluation process by submitting 
comments (both oral and written).
    (c) The agency shall, until three years following the completion of 
the self-evaluation, maintain on file and make available for public 
inspections:
    (1) A description of areas examined and any problems identified, and
    (2) A description of any modifications made.



Sec. 410.111  Notice.

    The agency shall make available to employees, applicants, 
participants, beneficiaries, and other interested persons such 
information regarding the provisions of this part and its applicability 
to the programs or activities conducted by the agency, and make such 
information available to them in such manner as the head of the agency 
finds necessary to apprise such persons of the protections against 
discrimination assured them by section 504 and this regulation.



Secs. 410.112-410.129  [Reserved]



Sec. 410.130  General prohibitions against discrimination.

    (a) No qualified handicapped person shall, on the basis of handicap, 
be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or 
otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity 
conducted by the agency.
    (b)(1) The agency, in providing any aid, benefit, or service, may 
not, directly or through contractual, licensing, or other arrangements, 
on the basis of handicap--
    (i) Deny a qualified handicapped person the opportunity to 
participate in or benefit from the aid, benefit, or service;
    (ii) Afford a qualfied handicapped person an opportunity to 
participate in or benefit from the aid, benefit, or service that is not 
equal to that afforded others;
    (iii) Provide a qualified handicapped person with an aid, benefit, 
or service that is not as effective in affording equal opportunity to 
obtain the same result, to gain the same benefit, or to reach the same 
level of achievement as that provided to others;
    (iv) Provide different or separate aid, benefits, or services to 
handicapped persons or to any class of handicapped persons than is 
provided to others unless such action is necessary to provide qualified 
handicapped persons with aid, benefits, or services that are as 
effective as those provided to others;
    (v) Deny a qualified handicapped person the opportunity to 
participate as a member of planning or advisory boards; or
    (vi) Otherwise limit a qualified handicapped person in the enjoyment 
of any right, privilege, advantage, or opportunity enjoyed by others 
receiving the aid, benefit, or service.

[[Page 1390]]

    (2) The agency may not deny a qualified handicapped person the 
opportunity to participate in programs or activities that are not 
separate or different, despite the existence of permissibly separate or 
different programs or activities.
    (3) The agency may not, directly or through contractual or other 
arrangements, utilize criteria or methods of administration the purpose 
or effect of which would--
    (i) Subject qualified handicapped persons to discrimination on the 
basis of handicap; or
    (ii) Defeat or substantially impair accomplishment of the objectives 
of a program or activity with respect to handicapped persons.
    (4) The agency may not, in determining the site or location of a 
facility, make selections the purpose or effect of which would--
    (i) Exclude handicapped persons from, deny them the benefits of, or 
otherwise subject them to discrimination under any program or activity 
conducted by the agency; or
    (ii) Defeat or substantially impair the accomplishment of the 
objectives of a program or activity with respect to handicapped persons.
    (5) The agency, in the selection of procurement contractors, may not 
use criteria that subject qualified handicapped persons to 
discrimination on the basis of handicap.
    (c) The exclusion of nonhandicapped persons from the benefits of a 
program limited by Federal statute or Executive order to handicapped 
persons or the exclusion of a specific class of handicapped persons from 
a program limited by Federal statute or Executive order to a different 
class of handicapped persons is not prohibited by this part.
    (d) The agency shall administer programs and activities in the most 
integrated setting appropriate to the needs of qualified handicapped 
persons.



Secs. 410.131-410.139  [Reserved]



Sec. 410.140  Employment.

    No qualified handicapped person shall, on the basis of handicap, be 
subjected to discrimination in employment under any program or activity 
conducted by the agency. The definitions, requirements, and procedures 
of section 501 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. 791), as 
established by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission in 29 CFR 
part 1613, shall apply to employment in federally conducted programs or 
activities.



Secs. 410.141-410.148  [Reserved]



Sec. 410.149  Program accessibility: Discrimination prohibited.

    Except as otherwise provided in Sec. 410.150, no qualified 
handicapped person shall, because the agency's facilities are 
inaccessible to or unusable by handicapped persons, be denied the 
benefits of, be excluded from participation in, or otherwise be 
subjected to discrimination under any program or activity conducted by 
the agency.



Sec. 410.150  Program accessibility: Existing facilities.

    (a) General. The agency shall operate each program or activity so 
that the program or activity, when viewed in its entirety, is readily 
accessible to and usable by handicapped persons. This paragraph does 
not--
    (1) Necessarily require the agency to make each of its existing 
facilities accessible to and usable by handicapped persons; or
    (2) Require the agency to take any action that it can demonstrate 
would result in a fundamental alteration in the nature of a program or 
activity or in undue financial and administrative burdens. In those 
circumstances where agency personnel believe that the proposed action 
would fundamentally alter the program or activity or would result in 
undue financial and administrative burdens, the agency has the burden of 
proving that compliance with Sec. 410.150(a) would result in such 
alteration or burdens. The decision that compliance would result in such 
alteration or burdens must be made by the agency head or his or her 
designee after considering all agency resources available for use in the 
funding and operation of the conducted program or activity, and must be 
accompanied by a written statement of the reasons for reaching that 
conclusion. If an action would result in such an alteration or

[[Page 1391]]

such burdens, the agency shall take any other action that would not 
result in such an alteration or such burdens but would nevertheless 
ensure that handicapped persons receive the benefits and services of the 
program or activity.
    (b) Methods. The agency may comply with the requirements of this 
section through such means as redesign of equipment, reassignment of 
services to accessible buildings, assignment of aides to beneficiaries, 
home visits, delivery of services at alternate accessible sites, 
alteration of existing facilities and construction of new facilities, 
use of accessible rolling stock, or any other methods that result in 
making its programs or activities readily accessible to and usable by 
handicapped persons. The agency is nor required to make structural 
changes in existing facilities where other methods are effective in 
achieving compliance with this section. The agency, in making 
alterations to existing buildings, shall meet accessibility requirements 
to the extent compelled by the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, as 
amended (42 U.S.C. 4151 through 4157), and any regulations implementing 
it. In choosing among available methods for meeting the requirements of 
this section, the agency shall give priority to those methods that offer 
programs and activities to qualified handicapped persons in the most 
integrated setting appropriate.
    (c) Time period for compliance. The agency shall comply with the 
obligations established under this section by June 6, 1986, except that 
where structural changes in facilities are undertaken, such changes 
shall be made by April 7, 1989, but in any event as expeditiously as 
possible.
    (d) Transition plan. In the event that structural changes to 
facilities will be undertaken to achieve program accessibility, the 
agency shall develop, by October 7, 1986, a transition plan setting 
forth the steps necessary to complete such changes. The agency shall 
provide an opportunity to interested persons, including handicapped 
persons or organizations representing handicapped persons, to 
participate in the development of the transition plan by submitting 
comments (both oral and written). A copy of the transition plan shall be 
made available for public inspection. The plan shall, at a minimum--
    (1) Identify physical obstacles in the agency's facilities that 
limit the accessibility of its programs or activities to handicapped 
persons;
    (2) Describe in detail the methods that will be used to make the 
facilities accessible;
    (3) Specify the schedule for taking the steps necessary to achieve 
compliance with this section and, if the time period of the transition 
plan is longer than one year, identify steps that will be taken during 
each year of the transition period; and
    (4) Indicate the official responsible for implementation of the 
plan.

[51 FR 4575, 4579, Feb. 5, 1986; 51 FR 7543, Mar. 5, 1986]



Sec. 410.151  Program accessibility: New construction and alterations.

    Each building or part of a building that is constructed or altered 
by, on behalf of, or for the use of the agency shall be designed, 
constructed, or altered so as to be readily accessible to and usable by 
handicapped persons. The definitions, requirements, and standards of the 
Architectural Barriers Act (42 U.S.C. 4151 through 4157), as established 
in 41 CFR 101-19.600 to 101-19.607, apply to buildings covered by this 
section.



Secs. 410.152-410.159  [Reserved]



Sec. 410.160  Communications.

    (a) The agency shall take appropriate steps to ensure effective 
communication with applicants, participants, personnel of other Federal 
entities, and members of the public.
    (1) The agency shall furnish appropriate auxiliary aids where 
necessary to afford a handicapped person an equal opportunity to 
participate in, and enjoy the benefits of, a program or activity 
conducted by the agency.
    (i) In determining what type of auxiliary aid is necessary, the 
agency shall give primary consideration to the requests of the 
handicapped person.
    (ii) The agency need not provide individually prescribed devices, 
readers for

[[Page 1392]]

personal use or study, or other devices of a personal nature.
    (2) Where the agency communicates with applicants and beneficiaries 
by telephone, telecommunication devices for deaf persons (TDD's) or 
equally effective telecommunication systems shall be used.
    (b) The agency shall ensure that interested persons, including 
persons with impaired vision or hearing, can obtain information as to 
the existence and location of accessible services, activities, and 
facilities.
    (c) The agency shall provide signage at a primary entrance to each 
of its inaccessible facilities, directing users to a location at which 
they can obtain information about accessible facilities. The 
international symbol for accessibility shall be used at each primary 
entrance of an accessible facility.
    (d) This section does not require the agency to take any action that 
it can demonstrate would result in a fundamental alteration in the 
nature of a program or activity or in undue financial and administrative 
burdens. In those circumstances where agency personnel believe that the 
proposed action would fundamentally alter the program or activity or 
would result in undue financial and administrative burdens, the agency 
has the burden of proving that compliance with Sec. 410.160 would result 
in such alteration or burdens. The decision that compliance would result 
in such alteration or burdens must be made by the agency head or his or 
her designee after considering all agency resources available for use in 
the funding and operation of the conducted program or activity, and must 
be accompanied by a written statement of the reasons for reaching that 
conclusion. If an action required to comply with this section would 
result in such an alteration or such burdens, the agency shall take any 
other action that would not result in such an alteration or such burdens 
but would nevertheless ensure that, to the maximum extent possible, 
handicapped persons receive the benefits and services of the program or 
activity.



Secs. 410.161-410.169  [Reserved]



Sec. 410.170  Compliance procedures.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, this 
section applies to all allegations of discrimination on the basis of 
handicap in programs or activities conducted by the agency.
    (b) The agency shall process complaints alleging violations of 
section 504 with respect to employment according to the procedures 
established by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission in 29 CFR 
part 1613 pursuant to section 501 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 
U.S.C. 791).
    (c) General Counsel, Export-Import Bank of the United States shall 
be responsible for coordinating implementation of this section. 
Complaints may be sent to General Counsel, Export-Import Bank of the 
United States, 811 Vermont Avenue, NW., Room 947, Washington, DC 20571.
    (d) The agency shall accept and investigate all complete complaints 
for which it has jurisdiction. All complete complaints must be filed 
within 180 days of the alleged act of discrimination. The agency may 
extend this time period for good cause.
    (e) If the agency receives a complaint over which it does not have 
jurisdiction, it shall promptly notify the complainant and shall make 
reasonable efforts to refer the complaint to the appropriate government 
entity.
    (f) The agency shall notify the Architectural and Transportation 
Barriers Compliance Board upon receipt of any complaint alleging that a 
building or facility that is subject to the Architectural Barriers Act 
of 1968, as amended (42 U.S.C. 4151 through 4157), or section 502 of the 
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (29 U.S.C. 792), is not readily 
accessible to and usable by handicapped persons.
    (g) Within 180 days of the receipt of a complete complaint for which 
it has jurisdiction, the agency shall notify the complainant of the 
results of the investigation in a letter containing--
    (1) Findings of fact and conclusions of law;
    (2) A description of a remedy for each violation found;
    (3) A notice of the right to appeal.

[[Page 1393]]

    (h) Appeals of the findings of fact and conclusions of law or 
remedies must be filed by the complainant within 90 days of receipt from 
the agency of the letter required by Sec. 410.170(g). The agency may 
extend this time for good cause.
    (i) Timely appeals shall be accepted and processed by the head of 
the agency.
    (j) The head of the agency shall notify the complainant of the 
results of the appeal within 60 days of the receipt of the request. If 
the head of the agency determines that additional information is needed 
from the complainant, he or she shall have 60 days from the date of 
receipt of the additional information to make his or her determination 
on the appeal.
    (k) The time limits cited in paragraphs (g) and (j) of this section 
may be extended with the permission of the Assistant Attorney General.
    (l) The agency may delegate its authority for conducting complaint 
investigations to other Federal agencies, except that the authority for 
making the final determination may not be delegated to another agency.

[51 FR 4575, 4579, Feb. 5, 1986, as amended at 51 FR 7543, Mar. 5, 1986]



Secs. 410.171-410.999  [Reserved]



PART 411_NEW RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING--Table of Contents



                            Subpart A_General

Sec.
411.100  Conditions on use of funds.
411.105  Definitions.
411.110  Certification and disclosure.

                  Subpart B_Activities by Own Employees

411.200  Agency and legislative liaison.
411.205  Professional and technical services.
411.210  Reporting.

            Subpart C_Activities by Other Than Own Employees

411.300  Professional and technical services.

                   Subpart D_Penalties and Enforcement

411.400  Penalties.
411.405  Penalty procedures.
411.410  Enforcement.

                          Subpart E_Exemptions

411.500  Secretary of Defense.

                        Subpart F_Agency Reports

411.600  Semi-annual compilation.
411.605  Inspector General report.

Appendix A to Part 411--Certification Regarding Lobbying
Appendix B to Part 411--Disclosure Form To Report Lobbying

    Authority: Sec. 319, Pub. L. 101-121 (31 U.S.C. 1352); 5 U.S.C. 
552a.

    Source: 55 FR 6737, 6747, Feb. 26, 1990, unless otherwise noted.

    Cross Reference: See also Office of Management and Budget notice 
published at 54 FR 52306, Dec. 20, 1989.



                            Subpart A_General



Sec. 411.100  Conditions on use of funds.

    (a) No appropriated funds may be expended by the recipient of a 
Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative ageement to pay any person 
for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any 
agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an 
employee of a Member of Congress in connection with any of the following 
covered Federal actions: the awarding of any Federal contract, the 
making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the 
entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, 
continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal 
contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.
    (b) Each person who requests or receives from an agency a Federal 
contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement shall file with that 
agency a certification, set forth in appendix A, that the person has not 
made, and will not make, any payment prohibited by paragraph (a) of this 
section.
    (c) Each person who requests or receives from an agency a Federal 
contract, grant, loan, or a cooperative agreement shall file with that 
agency a disclosure form, set forth in appendix B, if such person has 
made or has agreed to make any payment using nonappropriated funds (to 
include profits from any covered Federal action),

[[Page 1394]]

which would be prohibited under paragraph (a) of this section if paid 
for with appropriated funds.
    (d) Each person who requests or receives from an agency a commitment 
providing for the United States to insure or guarantee a loan shall file 
with that agency a statement, set forth in appendix A, whether that 
person has made or has agreed to make any payment to influence or 
attempt to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of 
Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member 
of Congress in connection with that loan insurance or guarantee.
    (e) Each person who requests or receives from an agency a commitment 
providing for the United States to insure or guarantee a loan shall file 
with that agency a disclosure form, set forth in appendix B, if that 
person has made or has agreed to make any payment to influence or 
attempt to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of 
Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member 
of Congress in connection with that loan insurance or guarantee.



Sec. 411.105  Definitions.

    For purposes of this part:
    (a) Agency, as defined in 5 U.S.C. 552(f), includes Federal 
executive departments and agencies as well as independent regulatory 
commissions and Government corporations, as defined in 31 U.S.C. 
9101(1).
    (b) Covered Federal action means any of the following Federal 
actions:
    (1) The awarding of any Federal contract;
    (2) The making of any Federal grant;
    (3) The making of any Federal loan;
    (4) The entering into of any cooperative agreement; and,
    (5) The extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification 
of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.


Covered Federal action does not include receiving from an agency a 
commitment providing for the United States to insure or guarantee a 
loan. Loan guarantees and loan insurance are addressed independently 
within this part.
    (c) Federal contract means an acquisition contract awarded by an 
agency, including those subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulation 
(FAR), and any other acquisition contract for real or personal property 
or services not subject to the FAR.
    (d) Federal cooperative agreement means a cooperative agreement 
entered into by an agency.
    (e) Federal grant means an award of financial assistance in the form 
of money, or property in lieu of money, by the Federal Government or a 
direct appropriation made by law to any person. The term does not 
include technical assistance which provides services instead of money, 
or other assistance in the form of revenue sharing, loans, loan 
guarantees, loan insurance, interest subsidies, insurance, or direct 
United States cash assistance to an individual.
    (f) Federal loan means a loan made by an agency. The term does not 
include loan guarantee or loan insurance.
    (g) Indian tribe and tribal organization have the meaning provided 
in section 4 of the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance 
Act (25 U.S.C. 450B). Alaskan Natives are included under the definitions 
of Indian tribes in that Act.
    (h) Influencing or attempting to influence means making, with the 
intent to influence, any communication to or appearance before an 
officer or employee or any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or 
employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in 
connection with any covered Federal action.
    (i) Loan guarantee and loan insurance means an agency's guarantee or 
insurance of a loan made by a person.
    (j) Local government means a unit of government in a State and, if 
chartered, established, or otherwise recognized by a State for the 
performance of a governmental duty, including a local public authority, 
a special district, an intrastate district, a council of governments, a 
sponsor group representative organization, and any other instrumentality 
of a local government.
    (k) Officer or employee of an agency includes the following 
individuals who are employed by an agency:

[[Page 1395]]

    (1) An individual who is appointed to a position in the Government 
under title 5, U.S. Code, including a position under a temporary 
appointment;
    (2) A member of the uniformed services as defined in section 101(3), 
title 37, U.S. Code;
    (3) A special Government employee as defined in section 202, title 
18, U.S. Code; and,
    (4) An individual who is a member of a Federal advisory committee, 
as defined by the Federal Advisory Committee Act, title 5, U.S. Code 
appendix 2.
    (l) Person means an individual, corporation, company, association, 
authority, firm, partnership, society, State, and local government, 
regardless of whether such entity is operated for profit or not for 
profit. This term excludes an Indian tribe, tribal organization, or any 
other Indian organization with respect to expenditures specifically 
permitted by other Federal law.
    (m) Reasonable compensation means, with respect to a regularly 
employed officer or employee of any person, compensation that is 
consistent with the normal compensation for such officer or employee for 
work that is not furnished to, not funded by, or not furnished in 
cooperation with the Federal Government.
    (n) Reasonable payment means, with respect to perfessional and other 
technical services, a payment in an amount that is consistent with the 
amount normally paid for such services in the private sector.
    (o) Recipient includes all contractors, subcontractors at any tier, 
and subgrantees at any tier of the recipient of funds received in 
connection with a Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative 
agreement. The term excludes an Indian tribe, tribal organization, or 
any other Indian organization with respect to expenditures specifically 
permitted by other Federal law.
    (p) Regularly employed means, with respect to an officer or employee 
of a person requesting or receiving a Federal contract, grant, loan, or 
cooperative agreement or a commitment providing for the United States to 
insure or guarantee a loan, an officer or employee who is employed by 
such person for at least 130 working days within one year immediately 
preceding the date of the submission that initiates agency consideration 
of such person for receipt of such contract, grant, loan, cooperative 
agreement, loan insurance commitment, or loan guarantee commitment. An 
officer or employee who is employed by such person for less than 130 
working days within one year immediately preceding the date of the 
submission that initiates agency consideration of such person shall be 
considered to be regularly employed as soon as he or she is employed by 
such person for 130 working days.
    (q) State means a State of the United States, the District of 
Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, a territory or possession of 
the United States, an agency or instrumentality of a State, and a multi-
State, regional, or interstate entity having governmental duties and 
powers.



Sec. 411.110  Certification and disclosure.

    (a) Each person shall file a certification, and a disclosure form, 
if required, with each submission that initiates agency consideration of 
such person for:
    (1) Award of a Federal contract, grant, or cooperative agreement 
exceeding $100,000; or
    (2) An award of a Federal loan or a commitment providing for the 
United States to insure or guarantee a loan exceeding $150,000.
    (b) Each person shall file a certification, and a disclosure form, 
if required, upon receipt by such person of:
    (1) A Federal contract, grant, or cooperative agreement exceeding 
$100,000; or
    (2) A Federal loan or a commitment providing for the United States 
to insure or guarantee a loan exceeding $150,000,


Unless such person previously filed a certification, and a disclosure 
form, if required, under paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) Each person shall file a disclosure form at the end of each 
calendar quarter in which there occurs any event that requires 
disclosure or that materially affects the accuracy of the information 
contained in any disclosure form previously filed by such person

[[Page 1396]]

under paragraph (a) or (b) of this section. An event that materially 
affects the accuracy of the information reported includes:
    (1) A cumulative increase of $25,000 or more in the amount paid or 
expected to be paid for influencing or attempting to influence a covered 
Federal action; or
    (2) A change in the person(s) or individual(s) influencing or 
attempting to influence a covered Federal action; or,
    (3) A change in the officer(s), employee(s), or Member(s) contacted 
to influence or attempt to influence a covered Federal action.
    (d) Any person who requests or receives from a person referred to in 
paragraph (a) or (b) of this section:
    (1) A subcontract exceeding $100,000 at any tier under a Federal 
contract;
    (2) A subgrant, contract, or subcontract exceeding $100,000 at any 
tier under a Federal grant;
    (3) A contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 at any tier under a 
Federal loan exceeding $150,000; or,
    (4) A contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 at any tier under a 
Federal cooperative agreement,


Shall file a certification, and a disclosure form, if required, to the 
next tier above.
    (e) All disclosure forms, but not certifications, shall be forwarded 
from tier to tier until received by the person referred to in paragraph 
(a) or (b) of this section. That person shall forward all disclosure 
forms to the agency.
    (f) Any certification or disclosure form filed under paragraph (e) 
of this section shall be treated as a material representation of fact 
upon which all receiving tiers shall rely. All liability arising from an 
erroneous representation shall be borne solely by the tier filing that 
representation and shall not be shared by any tier to which the 
erroneous representation is forwarded. Submitting an erroneous 
certification or disclosure constitutes a failure to file the required 
certification or disclosure, respectively. If a person fails to file a 
required certification or disclosure, the United States may pursue all 
available remedies, including those authorized by section 1352, title 
31, U.S. Code.
    (g) For awards and commitments in process prior to December 23, 
1989, but not made before that date, certifications shall be required at 
award or commitment, covering activities occurring between December 23, 
1989, and the date of award or commitment. However, for awards and 
commitments in process prior to the December 23, 1989 effective date of 
these provisions, but not made before December 23, 1989, disclosure 
forms shall not be required at time of award or commitment but shall be 
filed within 30 days.
    (h) No reporting is required for an activity paid for with 
appropriated funds if that activity is allowable under either subpart B 
or C.



                  Subpart B_Activities by Own Employees



Sec. 411.200  Agency and legislative liaison.

    (a) The prohibition on the use of appropriated funds, in 
Sec. 411.100 (a), does not apply in the case of a payment of reasonable 
compensation made to an officer or employee of a person requesting or 
receiving a Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement if 
the payment is for agency and legislative liaison activities not 
directly related to a covered Federal action.
    (b) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, providing any 
information specifically requested by an agency or Congress is allowable 
at any time.
    (c) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the following 
agency and legislative liaison activities are allowable at any time only 
where they are not related to a specific solicitation for any covered 
Federal action:
    (1) Discussing with an agency (including individual demonstrations) 
the qualities and characteristics of the person's products or services, 
conditions or terms of sale, and service capabilities; and,
    (2) Technical discussions and other activities regarding the 
application or adaptation of the person's products or services for an 
agency's use.
    (d) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the following 
agencies and

[[Page 1397]]

legislative liaison activities are allowable only where they are prior 
to formal solicitation of any covered Federal action:
    (1) Providing any information not specifically requested but 
necessary for an agency to make an informed decision about initiation of 
a covered Federal action;
    (2) Technical discussions regarding the preparation of an 
unsolicited proposal prior to its official submission; and,
    (3) Capability presentations by persons seeking awards from an 
agency pursuant to the provisions of the Small Business Act, as amended 
by Pub. L. 95-507 and other subsequent amendments.
    (e) Only those activities expressly authorized by this section are 
allowable under this section.



Sec. 411.205  Professional and technical services.

    (a) The prohibition on the use of appropriated funds, in 
Sec. 411.100 (a), does not apply in the case of a payment of reasonable 
compensation made to an officer or employee of a person requesting or 
receiving a Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement or 
an extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of a 
Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement if payment is 
for professional or technical services rendered directly in the 
preparation, submission, or negotiation of any bid, proposal, or 
application for that Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative 
agreement or for meeting requirements imposed by or pursuant to law as a 
condition for receiving that Federal contract, grant, loan, or 
cooperative agreement.
    (b) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, professional and 
technical services shall be limited to advice and analysis directly 
applying any professional or technical discipline. For example, drafting 
of a legal document accompanying a bid or proposal by a lawyer is 
allowable. Similarly, technical advice provided by an engineer on the 
performance or operational capability of a piece of equipment rendered 
directly in the negotiation of a contract is allowable. However, 
communications with the intent to influence made by a professional (such 
as a licensed lawyer) or a technical person (such as a licensed 
accountant) are not allowable under this section unless they provide 
advice and analysis directly applying their professional or technical 
expertise and unless the advice or analysis is rendered directly and 
solely in the preparation, submission or negotiation of a covered 
Federal action. Thus, for example, communications with the intent to 
influence made by a lawyer that do not provide legal advice or analysis 
directly and solely related to the legal aspects of his or her client's 
proposal, but generally advocate one proposal over another are not 
allowable under this section because the lawyer is not providing 
professional legal services. Similarly, communications with the intent 
to influence made by an engineer providing an engineering analysis prior 
to the preparation or submission of a bid or proposal are not allowable 
under this section since the engineer is providing technical services 
but not directly in the preparation, submission or negotiation of a 
covered Federal action.
    (c) Requirements imposed by or pursuant to law as a condition for 
receiving a covered Federal award include those required by law or 
regulation, or reasonably expected to be required by law or regulation, 
and any other requirements in the actual award documents.
    (d) Only those services expressly authorized by this section are 
allowable under this section.



Sec. 411.210  Reporting.

    No reporting is required with respect to payments of reasonable 
compensation made to regularly employed officers or employees of a 
person.



            Subpart C_Activities by Other Than Own Employees



Sec. 411.300  Professional and technical services.

    (a) The prohibition on the use of appropriated funds, in 
Sec. 411.100 (a), does not apply in the case of any reasonable

[[Page 1398]]

payment to a person, other than an officer or employee of a person 
requesting or receiving a covered Federal action, if the payment is for 
professional or technical services rendered directly in the preparation, 
submission, or negotiation of any bid, proposal, or application for that 
Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement or for meeting 
requirements imposed by or pursuant to law as a condition for receiving 
that Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.
    (b) The reporting requirements in Sec. 411.110 (a) and (b) regarding 
filing a disclosure form by each person, if required, shall not apply 
with respect to professional or technical services rendered directly in 
the preparation, submission, or negotiation of any commitment providing 
for the United States to insure or guarantee a loan.
    (c) For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, professional and 
technical services shall be limited to advice and analysis directly 
applying any professional or technical discipline. For example, drafting 
or a legal document accompanying a bid or proposal by a lawyer is 
allowable. Similarly, technical advice provided by an engineer on the 
performance or operational capability of a piece of equipment rendered 
directly in the negotiation of a contract is allowable. However, 
communications with the intent to influence made by a professional (such 
as a licensed lawyer) or a technical person (such as a licensed 
accountant) are not allowable under this section unless they provide 
advice and analysis directly applying their professional or technical 
expertise and unless the advice or analysis is rendered directly and 
solely in the preparation, submission or negotiation of a covered 
Federal action. Thus, for example, communications with the intent to 
influence made by a lawyer that do not provide legal advice or analysis 
directly and solely related to the legal aspects of his or her client's 
proposal, but generally advocate one proposal over another are not 
allowable under this section because the lawyer is not providing 
professional legal services. Similarly, communications with the intent 
to influence made by an engineer providing an engineering analysis prior 
to the preparation or submission of a bid or proposal are not allowable 
under this section since the engineer is providing technical services 
but not directly in the preparation, submission or negotiation of a 
covered Federal action.
    (d) Requirements imposed by or pursuant to law as a condition for 
receiving a covered Federal award include those required by law or 
regulation, or reasonably expected to be required by law or regulation, 
and any other requirements in the actual award documents.
    (e) Persons other than officers or employees of a person requesting 
or receiving a covered Federal action include consultants and trade 
associations.
    (f) Only those services expressly authorized by this section are 
allowable under this section.



                   Subpart D_Penalties and Enforcement



Sec. 411.400  Penalties.

    (a) Any person who makes an expenditure prohibited herein shall be 
subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than 
$100,000 for each such expenditure.
    (b) Any person who fails to file or amend the disclosure form (see 
appendix B) to be filed or amended if required herein, shall be subject 
to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 
for each such failure.
    (c) A filing or amended filing on or after the date on which an 
administrative action for the imposition of a civil penalty is commenced 
does not prevent the imposition of such civil penalty for a failure 
occurring before that date. An administrative action is commenced with 
respect to a failure when an investigating official determines in 
writing to commence an investigation of an allegation of such failure.
    (d) In determining whether to impose a civil penalty, and the amount 
of any such penalty, by reason of a violation by any person, the agency 
shall consider the nature, circumstances, extent, and gravity of the 
violation, the effect on the ability of such person to

[[Page 1399]]

continue in business, any prior violations by such person, the degree of 
culpability of such person, the ability of the person to pay the 
penalty, and such other matters as may be appropriate.
    (e) First offenders under paragraph (a) or (b) of this section shall 
be subject to a civil penalty of $10,000, absent aggravating 
circumstances. Second and subsequent offenses by persons shall be 
subject to an appropriate civil penalty between $10,000 and $100,000, as 
determined by the agency head or his or her designee.
    (f) An imposition of a civil penalty under this section does not 
prevent the United States from seeking any other remedy that may apply 
to the same conduct that is the basis for the imposition of such civil 
penalty.



Sec. 411.405  Penalty procedures.

    Agencies shall impose and collect civil penalties pursuant to the 
provisions of the Program Fraud and Civil Remedies Act, 31 U.S.C. 
sections 3803 (except subsection (c)), 3804, 3805, 3806, 3807, 3808, and 
3812, insofar as these provisions are not inconsistent with the 
requirements herein.



Sec. 411.410  Enforcement.

    The head of each agency shall take such actions as are necessary to 
ensure that the provisions herein are vigorously implemented and 
enforced in that agency.



                          Subpart E_Exemptions



Sec. 411.500  Secretary of Defense.

    (a) The Secretary of Defense may exempt, on a case-by-case basis, a 
covered Federal action from the prohibition whenever the Secretary 
determines, in writing, that such an exemption is in the national 
interest. The Secretary shall transmit a copy of each such written 
exemption to Congress immediately after making such a determination.
    (b) The Department of Defense may issue supplemental regulations to 
implement paragraph (a) of this section.



                        Subpart F_Agency Reports



Sec. 411.600  Semi-annual compilation.

    (a) The head of each agency shall collect and compile the disclosure 
reports (see appendix B) and, on May 31 and November 30 of each year, 
submit to the Secretary of the Senate and the Clerk of the House of 
Representatives a report containing a compilation of the information 
contained in the disclosure reports received during the six-month period 
ending on March 31 or September 30, respectively, of that year.
    (b) The report, including the compilation, shall be available for 
public inspection 30 days after receipt of the report by the Secretary 
and the Clerk.
    (c) Information that involves intelligence matters shall be reported 
only to the Select Committee on Intelligence of the Senate, the 
Permanent Select Committee on Intelligence of the House of 
Representatives, and the Committees on Appropriations of the Senate and 
the House of Representatives in accordance with procedures agreed to by 
such committees. Such information shall not be available for public 
inspection.
    (d) Information that is classified under Executive Order 12356 or 
any successor order shall be reported only to the Committee on Foreign 
Relations of the Senate and the Committee on Foreign Affairs of the 
House of Representatives or the Committees on Armed Services of the 
Senate and the House of Representatives (whichever such committees have 
jurisdiction of matters involving such information) and to the 
Committees on Appropriations of the Senate and the House of 
Representatives in accordance with procedures agreed to by such 
committees. Such information shall not be available for public 
inspection.
    (e) The first semi-annual compilation shall be submitted on May 31, 
1990, and shall contain a compilation of the disclosure reports received 
from December 23, 1989 to March 31, 1990.
    (f) Major agencies, designated by the Office of Management and 
Budget (OMB), are required to provide machine-readable compilations to 
the Secretary of the Senate and the Clerk of the House of 
Representatives no

[[Page 1400]]

later than with the compilations due on May 31, 1991. OMB shall provide 
detailed specifications in a memorandum to these agencies.
    (g) Non-major agencies are requested to provide machine-readable 
compilations to the Secretary of the Senate and the Clerk of the House 
of Representatives.
    (h) Agencies shall keep the originals of all disclosure reports in 
the official files of the agency.



Sec. 411.605  Inspector General report.

    (a) The Inspector General, or other official as specified in 
paragraph (b) of this section, of each agency shall prepare and submit 
to Congress each year, commencing with submission of the President's 
Budget in 1991, an evaluation of the compliance of that agency with, and 
the effectiveness of, the requirements herein. The evaluation may 
include any recommended changes that may be necessary to strengthen or 
improve the requirements.
    (b) In the case of an agency that does not have an Inspector 
General, the agency official comparable to an Inspector General shall 
prepare and submit the annual report, or, if there is no such comparable 
official, the head of the agency shall prepare and submit the annual 
report.
    (c) The annual report shall be submitted at the same time the agency 
submits its annual budget justifications to Congress.
    (d) The annual report shall include the following: All alleged 
violations relating to the agency's covered Federal actions during the 
year covered by the report, the actions taken by the head of the agency 
in the year covered by the report with respect to those alleged 
violations and alleged violations in previous years, and the amounts of 
civil penalties imposed by the agency in the year covered by the report.

  



      Sec. Appendix A to Part 411--Certification Regarding Lobbying

 Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements

    The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and 
belief, that:
    (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by 
or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or 
attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of 
Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member 
of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the 
making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the 
entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, 
continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal 
contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.
    (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been 
paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to 
influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an 
officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress 
in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative 
agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, 
``Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying,'' in accordance with its 
instructions.
    (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this 
certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at 
all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under 
grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients 
shall certify and disclose accordingly.
    This certification is a material representation of fact upon which 
reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. 
Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or 
entering into this transaction imposed by section 1352, title 31, U.S. 
Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be 
subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than 
$100,000 for each such failure.

            Statement for Loan Guarantees and Loan Insurance

    The undersigned states, to the best of his or her knowledge and 
belief, that:
    If any funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for 
influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any 
agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an 
employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this commitment 
providing for the United States to insure or guarantee a loan, the 
undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, ``Disclosure 
Form to Report Lobbying,'' in accordance with its instructions.
    Submission of this statement is a prerequisite for making or 
entering into this transaction imposed by section 1352, title 31, U.S. 
Code. Any person who fails to file the required statement shall be 
subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than 
$100,000 for each such failure.

[[Page 1401]]



     Sec. Appendix B to Part 411--Disclosure Form To Report Lobbying
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC23SE91.003


[[Page 1402]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC23SE91.004


[[Page 1403]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC23SE91.005


[[Page 1404]]





PART 412_ACCEPTANCE OF PAYMENT FROM A NON-FEDERAL SOURCE FOR TRAVEL
EXPENSES--Table of Contents



Sec.
412.1  Authority.
412.3  General.
412.5  Policy.
412.7  Conditions for acceptance.
412.9  Conflict of interest analysis.
412.11  Payment guidelines.
412.13  Limitations and penalties.

    Authority: 5 U.S.C. 5701-5709; 12 U.S.C. 635(2)(a)(1).

    Source: 59 FR 31136, June 17, 1994, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 412.1  Authority.

    This part is issued under the authority of 5 U.S.C. 553, 5 U.S.C. 
5701-5709 and 12 U.S.C. 635(2)(a)(1).



Sec. 412.3  General.

    (a) Applicability. This part applies to acceptance by the Export-
Import Bank of the United States (Eximbank) of payment from a non-
Federal source for travel, subsistence, and related expenses with 
respect to the attendance of an employee in a travel status at any 
meeting or similar event relating to the official duties of the 
employee, other than those described in 41 CFR 304-1.2. This part does 
not authorize acceptance of such payments by an employee in his/her 
personal capacity.
    (b) Solicitation prohibited. An employee shall not solicit payment 
for travel, subsistence and related expenses from a non-Federal source. 
However, after receipt of an invitation from a non-Federal source to 
attend a meeting or similar event, Eximbank or the employee may inform 
the non-Federal source of this authority.
    (c) Definitions. As used in this part, the following definitions 
apply:
    (1) Conflicting non-Federal source. Conflicting non-Federal source 
means any person who, or entity other than the Government of the United 
States which, has interests that may be substantially affected by the 
performance or nonperformance of the employee's duties.
    (2) Employee. Employee means any director, officer or other employee 
of Eximbank.
    (3) Meeting or similar event. Meeting or similar event means a 
meeting, formal gathering, site visit, negotiation session or similar 
event that takes place away from the employee's official station and 
which is directly related to the mission of Eximbank. This term does not 
include any meeting or similar function described in 41 CFR 304-1.2 or 
sponsored by Eximbank. A meeting or similar event need not be widely 
attended for purposes of this definition.
    (4) Non-Federal source. Non-Federal source means any person or 
entity other than the Government of the United States. The term includes 
any individual, private or commercial entity, nonprofit organization or 
association, state, local, or foreign government, or international or 
multinational organization.
    (5) Payment. Payment means funds paid or reimbursed to Eximbank by a 
non-Federal source for travel, subsistence, and related expenses by 
check or similar instrument, or payment in kind.
    (6) Payment in kind. Payment in kind means goods, services or other 
benefits provided by a non-Federal source for travel, subsistence, and 
related expenses in lieu of funds paid to Eximbank by check or similar 
instrument for the same purpose.
    (7) Travel, subsistence and related expenses. Travel, subsistence 
and related expenses means the same types of expenses payable under 41 
CFR chapter 301.



Sec. 412.5  Policy.

    As provided in this part, Eximbank may accept payment from a non-
Federal source (or authorize an employee to receive such payment on its 
behalf) with respect to attendance of the employee at a meeting or 
similar event which the employee has been authorized to attend in an 
official capacity on behalf of Eximbank. The employee's immediate 
supervisor and Eximbank's designated agency ethics official or his/her 
designee (DAEO) must approve any offer and acceptance of payment under 
this part in accordance with the procedures described below. If the 
employee is a member of Eximbank's Board of Directors, only the DAEO's 
approval is required. Any employee authorized to

[[Page 1405]]

travel in accordance with this part is subject to the maximum per diem 
or actual subsistence expense rates and transportation class of service 
limitations prescribed in 41 CFR chapter 301.



Sec. 412.7  Conditions for acceptance.

    (a) Eximbank may accept payment for employee travel from a non-
Federal source when a written authorization to accept payment is issued 
in advance of the travel following a determination by the employee's 
supervisor (except in the case of Board members) and the DAEO that the 
payment is:
    (1) For travel relating to an employee's official duties under an 
official travel authorization issued to the employee;
    (2) For attendance at a meeting or similar event as defined in 
Sec. 412.3(c)(3):
    (i) In which the employee's participation is necessary in order to 
further the mission of Eximbank;
    (ii) Which cannot be held at the offices of Eximbank for justifiable 
business reasons in light of the location and number of participants and 
the purpose of the meeting or similar event; and
    (iii) Which is taking place at a location and for a period of time 
that is appropriate for the purpose of the meeting or similar event;
    (3) From a non-Federal source that is not a conflicting non-Federal 
source or from a conflicting non-Federal source that has been approved 
under Sec. 412.9; and
    (4) In an amount which does not exceed the maximum per diem or 
actual subsistence expense rates and transportation class of service 
limitations prescribed in 41 CFR chapter 301.
    (b) An employee requesting approval of payment of travel expenses by 
a non-Federal source under this part shall submit to the employee's 
supervisor (except in the case of Board members) and the DAEO a written 
description of the following: the nature of the meeting or similar event 
and the reason that it cannot be held at Eximbank, the date(s) and 
location of the meeting or similar event, the identities of all 
participants in the meeting or similar event, the name of the non-
Federal source offering to make the payment, the amount and method of 
the proposed payment, and the nature of the expenses.
    (c) Payments may be accepted from multiple sources under paragraph 
(a) of this section.



Sec. 412.9  Conflict of interest analysis.

    Eximbank may accept payment from a conflicting non-Federal source if 
the conditions of Sec. 412.7 are met and the employee's supervisor 
(except in the case of Board members) and the DAEO determine that 
Eximbank's interest in the employee's attendance at or participation in 
the meeting or similar event outweighs concern that acceptance of the 
payment by Eximbank may cause a reasonable person to question the 
integrity of Eximbank's programs and operations. In determining whether 
to accept payment, Eximbank shall consider all relevant factors, 
including the purpose of the meeting or similar event, the importance of 
the travel for Eximbank, the nature and sensitivity of any pending 
matter affecting the interests of the conflicting non-Federal source, 
the significance of the employee's role in any such matter, the identity 
of other expected participants, and the location and duration of the 
meeting or similar event.



Sec. 412.11  Payment guidelines.

    (a) Payments from a non-Federal source, other than payments in kind, 
shall be by check or similar instrument made payable to Eximbank. 
Payments from a non-Federal source, including payments in kind, are 
subject to the maximum per diem or actual subsistence expense rates and 
transportation class of service limitations prescribed in 41 CFR chapter 
301.
    (b) If Eximbank determines in advance of the travel that a payment 
covers some but not all of the per diem costs to be incurred by the 
employee, Eximbank shall authorize a reduced per diem rate, in 
accordance with 41 CFR part 301-7.12.



Sec. 412.13  Limitations and penalties.

    (a) This part is in addition to and not in place of any other 
authority under which Eximbank may accept payment from a non-Federal 
source or authorize an employee to accept such payment on behalf of 
Eximbank. This part shall

[[Page 1406]]

not be applied in connection with the acceptance by Eximbank of payment 
for travel, subsistence, and related expenses incurred by an employee to 
attend a meeting or similar function described in and authorized by 41 
CFR part 304-1.
    (b) An employee who accepts any payment in violation of this part is 
subject to the following:
    (1) The employee may be required, in addition to any penalty 
provided by law and applicable regulations, to repay for deposit to the 
general fund of the Treasury, an amount equal to the amount of the 
payment so accepted; and
    (2) When repayment is required under paragraph (b)(1) of this 
section, the employee shall not be entitled to any payment or 
reimbursement from Eximbank for such expenses.



PART 414_CONFERENCE AND OTHER FEES--Table of Contents



    Authority: 12 U.S.C. 635(a)(1), 5 U.S.C. 553.

    Source: 72 FR 66043, Nov. 27, 2007, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 414.1  Collection of conference and other fees.

    Ex-Im Bank may impose and collect reasonable fees to cover the costs 
of conferences and seminars sponsored by, and publications provided by 
Ex-Im Bank. Amounts received under the preceding sentence shall be 
credited to the fund which initially paid for such activities and shall 
be offset against the expenses of Ex-Im Bank for such activities.

                        PARTS 415	499 [RESERVED]

[[Page 1407]]



                              FINDING AIDS




  --------------------------------------------------------------------

  A list of CFR titles, subtitles, chapters, subchapters and parts and 
an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are included in 
the CFR Index and Finding Aids volume to the Code of Federal Regulations 
which is published separately and revised annually.

  Table of CFR Titles and Chapters
  Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR
  List of CFR Sections Affected

[[Page 1409]]



                    Table of CFR Titles and Chapters




                     (Revised as of January 1, 2018)

                      Title 1--General Provisions

         I  Administrative Committee of the Federal Register 
                (Parts 1--49)
        II  Office of the Federal Register (Parts 50--299)
       III  Administrative Conference of the United States (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  Miscellaneous Agencies (Parts 400--599)
        VI  National Capital Planning Commission (Parts 600--699)

                    Title 2--Grants and Agreements

            Subtitle A--Office of Management and Budget Guidance 
                for Grants and Agreements
         I  Office of Management and Budget Governmentwide 
                Guidance for Grants and Agreements (Parts 2--199)
        II  Office of Management and Budget Guidance (Parts 200--
                299)
            Subtitle B--Federal Agency Regulations for Grants and 
                Agreements
       III  Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 300--
                399)
        IV  Department of Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
        VI  Department of State (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Agency for International Development (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Department of Energy (Parts 900--999)
         X  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  Department of Defense (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  Department of Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
      XIII  Department of Commerce (Parts 1300--1399)
       XIV  Department of the Interior (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1500--1599)
     XVIII  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1800--1899)
        XX  United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 
                2000--2099)
      XXII  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                2200--2299)
     XXIII  Social Security Administration (Parts 2300--2399)
      XXIV  Housing and Urban Development (Parts 2400--2499)
       XXV  National Science Foundation (Parts 2500--2599)
      XXVI  National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 
                2600--2699)

[[Page 1410]]

     XXVII  Small Business Administration (Parts 2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Department of Justice (Parts 2800--2899)
      XXIX  Department of Labor (Parts 2900--2999)
       XXX  Department of Homeland Security (Parts 3000--3099)
      XXXI  Institute of Museum and Library Services (Parts 3100--
                3199)
     XXXII  National Endowment for the Arts (Parts 3200--3299)
    XXXIII  National Endowment for the Humanities (Parts 3300--
                3399)
     XXXIV  Department of Education (Parts 3400--3499)
      XXXV  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Parts 3500--
                3599)
     XXXVI  Office of National Drug Control Policy, Executive 
                Office of the President (Parts 3600--3699)
    XXXVII  Peace Corps (Parts 3700--3799)
     LVIII  Election Assistance Commission (Parts 5800--5899)
       LIX  Gulf Coast Ecosystem Restoration Council (Parts 5900--
                5999)

                        Title 3--The President

         I  Executive Office of the President (Parts 100--199)

                           Title 4--Accounts

         I  Government Accountability Office (Parts 1--199)

                   Title 5--Administrative Personnel

         I  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1--1199)
        II  Merit Systems Protection Board (Parts 1200--1299)
       III  Office of Management and Budget (Parts 1300--1399)
        IV  Office of Personnel Management and Office of the 
                Director of National Intelligence (Parts 1400--
                1499)
         V  The International Organizations Employees Loyalty 
                Board (Parts 1500--1599)
        VI  Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      VIII  Office of Special Counsel (Parts 1800--1899)
        IX  Appalachian Regional Commission (Parts 1900--1999)
        XI  Armed Forces Retirement Home (Parts 2100--2199)
       XIV  Federal Labor Relations Authority, General Counsel of 
                the Federal Labor Relations Authority and Federal 
                Service Impasses Panel (Parts 2400--2499)
       XVI  Office of Government Ethics (Parts 2600--2699)
       XXI  Department of the Treasury (Parts 3100--3199)
      XXII  Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Parts 3200--
                3299)
     XXIII  Department of Energy (Parts 3300--3399)
      XXIV  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (Parts 3400--
                3499)
       XXV  Department of the Interior (Parts 3500--3599)
      XXVI  Department of Defense (Parts 3600--3699)

[[Page 1411]]

    XXVIII  Department of Justice (Parts 3800--3899)
      XXIX  Federal Communications Commission (Parts 3900--3999)
       XXX  Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 4000--
                4099)
      XXXI  Farm Credit Administration (Parts 4100--4199)
    XXXIII  Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Parts 4300--
                4399)
     XXXIV  Securities and Exchange Commission (Parts 4400--4499)
      XXXV  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 4500--4599)
     XXXVI  Department of Homeland Security (Parts 4600--4699)
    XXXVII  Federal Election Commission (Parts 4700--4799)
        XL  Interstate Commerce Commission (Parts 5000--5099)
       XLI  Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Parts 5100--
                5199)
      XLII  Department of Labor (Parts 5200--5299)
     XLIII  National Science Foundation (Parts 5300--5399)
       XLV  Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 5500--
                5599)
      XLVI  Postal Rate Commission (Parts 5600--5699)
     XLVII  Federal Trade Commission (Parts 5700--5799)
    XLVIII  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 5800--5899)
      XLIX  Federal Labor Relations Authority (Parts 5900--5999)
         L  Department of Transportation (Parts 6000--6099)
       LII  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Parts 6200--
                6299)
      LIII  Department of Education (Parts 6300--6399)
       LIV  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 6400--6499)
        LV  National Endowment for the Arts (Parts 6500--6599)
       LVI  National Endowment for the Humanities (Parts 6600--
                6699)
      LVII  General Services Administration (Parts 6700--6799)
     LVIII  Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System 
                (Parts 6800--6899)
       LIX  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                6900--6999)
        LX  United States Postal Service (Parts 7000--7099)
       LXI  National Labor Relations Board (Parts 7100--7199)
      LXII  Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Parts 7200--
                7299)
     LXIII  Inter-American Foundation (Parts 7300--7399)
      LXIV  Merit Systems Protection Board (Parts 7400--7499)
       LXV  Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                7500--7599)
      LXVI  National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 
                7600--7699)
     LXVII  Institute of Museum and Library Services (Parts 7700--
                7799)
    LXVIII  Commission on Civil Rights (Parts 7800--7899)
      LXIX  Tennessee Valley Authority (Parts 7900--7999)
       LXX  Court Services and Offender Supervision Agency for the 
                District of Columbia (Parts 8000--8099)
      LXXI  Consumer Product Safety Commission (Parts 8100--8199)
    LXXIII  Department of Agriculture (Parts 8300--8399)

[[Page 1412]]

     LXXIV  Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 8400--8499)
     LXXVI  Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Parts 
                8600--8699)
    LXXVII  Office of Management and Budget (Parts 8700--8799)
      LXXX  Federal Housing Finance Agency (Parts 9000--9099)
   LXXXIII  Special Inspector General for Afghanistan 
                Reconstruction (Parts 9300--9399)
    LXXXIV  Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection (Parts 9400--
                9499)
    LXXXVI  National Credit Union Administration (Parts 9600--
                9699)
     XCVII  Department of Homeland Security Human Resources 
                Management System (Department of Homeland 
                Security--Office of Personnel Management) (Parts 
                9700--9799)
    XCVIII  Council of the Inspectors General on Integrity and 
                Efficiency (Parts 9800--9899)
      XCIX  Military Compensation and Retirement Modernization 
                Commission (Parts 9900--9999)
         C  National Council on Disability (Parts 10000--10049)

                      Title 6--Domestic Security

         I  Department of Homeland Security, Office of the 
                Secretary (Parts 1--199)
         X  Privacy and Civil Liberties Oversight Board (Parts 
                1000--1099)

                         Title 7--Agriculture

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Agriculture 
                (Parts 0--26)
            Subtitle B--Regulations of the Department of 
                Agriculture
         I  Agricultural Marketing Service (Standards, 
                Inspections, Marketing Practices), Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 27--209)
        II  Food and Nutrition Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 210--299)
       III  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Federal Crop Insurance Corporation, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
         V  Agricultural Research Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Natural Resources Conservation Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Farm Service Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                700--799)
      VIII  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards 
                Administration (Federal Grain Inspection Service), 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Fruits, Vegetables, Nuts), Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 900--999)

[[Page 1413]]

         X  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Milk), Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 1000--1199)
        XI  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Miscellaneous Commodities), Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 1200--1299)
       XIV  Commodity Credit Corporation, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  Foreign Agricultural Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Rural Telephone Bank, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      XVII  Rural Utilities Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 1700--1799)
     XVIII  Rural Housing Service, Rural Business-Cooperative 
                Service, Rural Utilities Service, and Farm Service 
                Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1800--
                2099)
        XX  Local Television Loan Guarantee Board (Parts 2200--
                2299)
       XXV  Office of Advocacy and Outreach, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 2500--2599)
      XXVI  Office of Inspector General, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 2600--2699)
     XXVII  Office of Information Resources Management, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Office of Operations, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                2800--2899)
      XXIX  Office of Energy Policy and New Uses, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 2900--2999)
       XXX  Office of the Chief Financial Officer, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3000--3099)
      XXXI  Office of Environmental Quality, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3100--3199)
     XXXII  Office of Procurement and Property Management, 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 3200--3299)
    XXXIII  Office of Transportation, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3300--3399)
     XXXIV  National Institute of Food and Agriculture (Parts 
                3400--3499)
      XXXV  Rural Housing Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3500--3599)
     XXXVI  National Agricultural Statistics Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 3600--3699)
    XXXVII  Economic Research Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3700--3799)
   XXXVIII  World Agricultural Outlook Board, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3800--3899)
       XLI  [Reserved]
      XLII  Rural Business-Cooperative Service and Rural Utilities 
                Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 4200--
                4299)

[[Page 1414]]

                    Title 8--Aliens and Nationality

         I  Department of Homeland Security (Immigration and 
                Naturalization) (Parts 1--499)
         V  Executive Office for Immigration Review, Department of 
                Justice (Parts 1000--1399)

                 Title 9--Animals and Animal Products

         I  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 1--199)
        II  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards 
                Administration (Packers and Stockyards Programs), 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 200--299)
       III  Food Safety and Inspection Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 300--599)

                           Title 10--Energy

         I  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 0--199)
        II  Department of Energy (Parts 200--699)
       III  Department of Energy (Parts 700--999)
         X  Department of Energy (General Provisions) (Parts 
                1000--1099)
      XIII  Nuclear Waste Technical Review Board (Parts 1300--
                1399)
      XVII  Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board (Parts 1700--
                1799)
     XVIII  Northeast Interstate Low-Level Radioactive Waste 
                Commission (Parts 1800--1899)

                      Title 11--Federal Elections

         I  Federal Election Commission (Parts 1--9099)
        II  Election Assistance Commission (Parts 9400--9499)

                      Title 12--Banks and Banking

         I  Comptroller of the Currency, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 1--199)
        II  Federal Reserve System (Parts 200--299)
       III  Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Parts 400--
                499)
         V  Office of Thrift Supervision, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Farm Credit Administration (Parts 600--699)
       VII  National Credit Union Administration (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Federal Financing Bank (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Federal Housing Finance Board (Parts 900--999)
         X  Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection (Parts 1000--
                1099)
        XI  Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  Federal Housing Finance Agency (Parts 1200--1299)

[[Page 1415]]

      XIII  Financial Stability Oversight Council (Parts 1300--
                1399)
       XIV  Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 1400--
                1499)
        XV  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Office of Financial Research (Parts 1600--1699)
      XVII  Office of Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                1700--1799)
     XVIII  Community Development Financial Institutions Fund, 
                Department of the Treasury (Parts 1800--1899)

               Title 13--Business Credit and Assistance

         I  Small Business Administration (Parts 1--199)
       III  Economic Development Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Emergency Steel Guarantee Loan Board (Parts 400--499)
         V  Emergency Oil and Gas Guaranteed Loan Board (Parts 
                500--599)

                    Title 14--Aeronautics and Space

         I  Federal Aviation Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1--199)
        II  Office of the Secretary, Department of Transportation 
                (Aviation Proceedings) (Parts 200--399)
       III  Commercial Space Transportation, Federal Aviation 
                Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 400--1199)
         V  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1200--1299)
        VI  Air Transportation System Stabilization (Parts 1300--
                1399)

                 Title 15--Commerce and Foreign Trade

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Commerce (Parts 
                0--29)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Commerce and 
                Foreign Trade
         I  Bureau of the Census, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                30--199)
        II  National Institute of Standards and Technology, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 200--299)
       III  International Trade Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Foreign-Trade Zones Board, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 400--499)
       VII  Bureau of Industry and Security, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Bureau of Economic Analysis, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 800--899)
        IX  National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 900--999)

[[Page 1416]]

        XI  National Technical Information Service, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 1100--1199)
      XIII  East-West Foreign Trade Board (Parts 1300--1399)
       XIV  Minority Business Development Agency (Parts 1400--
                1499)
            Subtitle C--Regulations Relating to Foreign Trade 
                Agreements
        XX  Office of the United States Trade Representative 
                (Parts 2000--2099)
            Subtitle D--Regulations Relating to Telecommunications 
                and Information
     XXIII  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                2300--2399) [Reserved]

                    Title 16--Commercial Practices

         I  Federal Trade Commission (Parts 0--999)
        II  Consumer Product Safety Commission (Parts 1000--1799)

             Title 17--Commodity and Securities Exchanges

         I  Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Parts 1--199)
        II  Securities and Exchange Commission (Parts 200--399)
        IV  Department of the Treasury (Parts 400--499)

          Title 18--Conservation of Power and Water Resources

         I  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, Department of 
                Energy (Parts 1--399)
       III  Delaware River Basin Commission (Parts 400--499)
        VI  Water Resources Council (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Susquehanna River Basin Commission (Parts 800--899)
      XIII  Tennessee Valley Authority (Parts 1300--1399)

                       Title 19--Customs Duties

         I  U.S. Customs and Border Protection, Department of 
                Homeland Security; Department of the Treasury 
                (Parts 0--199)
        II  United States International Trade Commission (Parts 
                200--299)
       III  International Trade Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)
        IV  U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement, Department 
                of Homeland Security (Parts 400--599) [Reserved]

                     Title 20--Employees' Benefits

         I  Office of Workers' Compensation Programs, Department 
                of Labor (Parts 1--199)
        II  Railroad Retirement Board (Parts 200--399)

[[Page 1417]]

       III  Social Security Administration (Parts 400--499)
        IV  Employees' Compensation Appeals Board, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 500--599)
         V  Employment and Training Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 600--699)
        VI  Office of Workers' Compensation Programs, Department 
                of Labor (Parts 700--799)
       VII  Benefits Review Board, Department of Labor (Parts 
                800--899)
      VIII  Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries (Parts 
                900--999)
        IX  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans' 
                Employment and Training Service, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 1000--1099)

                       Title 21--Food and Drugs

         I  Food and Drug Administration, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 1--1299)
        II  Drug Enforcement Administration, Department of Justice 
                (Parts 1300--1399)
       III  Office of National Drug Control Policy (Parts 1400--
                1499)

                      Title 22--Foreign Relations

         I  Department of State (Parts 1--199)
        II  Agency for International Development (Parts 200--299)
       III  Peace Corps (Parts 300--399)
        IV  International Joint Commission, United States and 
                Canada (Parts 400--499)
         V  Broadcasting Board of Governors (Parts 500--599)
       VII  Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Parts 700--
                799)
        IX  Foreign Service Grievance Board (Parts 900--999)
         X  Inter-American Foundation (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  International Boundary and Water Commission, United 
                States and Mexico, United States Section (Parts 
                1100--1199)
       XII  United States International Development Cooperation 
                Agency (Parts 1200--1299)
      XIII  Millennium Challenge Corporation (Parts 1300--1399)
       XIV  Foreign Service Labor Relations Board; Federal Labor 
                Relations Authority; General Counsel of the 
                Federal Labor Relations Authority; and the Foreign 
                Service Impasse Disputes Panel (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  African Development Foundation (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Japan-United States Friendship Commission (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      XVII  United States Institute of Peace (Parts 1700--1799)

                          Title 23--Highways

         I  Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1--999)

[[Page 1418]]

        II  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and 
                Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
       III  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 1300--1399)

                Title 24--Housing and Urban Development

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary, Department of 
                Housing and Urban Development (Parts 0--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Housing and Urban 
                Development
         I  Office of Assistant Secretary for Equal Opportunity, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                100--199)
        II  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing-Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 200--299)
       III  Government National Mortgage Association, Department 
                of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Housing and Office of Multifamily Housing 
                Assistance Restructuring, Department of Housing 
                and Urban Development (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning 
                and Development, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning 
                and Development, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 600--699) [Reserved]
       VII  Office of the Secretary, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Housing Assistance Programs and 
                Public and Indian Housing Programs) (Parts 700--
                799)
      VIII  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Section 8 Housing Assistance 
                Programs, Section 202 Direct Loan Program, Section 
                202 Supportive Housing for the Elderly Program and 
                Section 811 Supportive Housing for Persons With 
                Disabilities Program) (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Office of Assistant Secretary for Public and Indian 
                Housing, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 900--1699)
         X  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Interstate Land Sales 
                Registration Program) (Parts 1700--1799)
       XII  Office of Inspector General, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 2000--2099)
        XV  Emergency Mortgage Insurance and Loan Programs, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                2700--2799) [Reserved]
        XX  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 3200--3899)

[[Page 1419]]

      XXIV  Board of Directors of the HOPE for Homeowners Program 
                (Parts 4000--4099) [Reserved]
       XXV  Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation (Parts 4100--
                4199)

                           Title 25--Indians

         I  Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--299)
        II  Indian Arts and Crafts Board, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 300--399)
       III  National Indian Gaming Commission, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 500--599)
        IV  Office of Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation (Parts 
                700--899)
         V  Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior, 
                and Indian Health Service, Department of Health 
                and Human Services (Part 900)
        VI  Office of the Assistant Secretary, Indian Affairs, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 1000--1199)
       VII  Office of the Special Trustee for American Indians, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 1200--1299)

                      Title 26--Internal Revenue

         I  Internal Revenue Service, Department of the Treasury 
                (Parts 1--End)

           Title 27--Alcohol, Tobacco Products and Firearms

         I  Alcohol and Tobacco Tax and Trade Bureau, Department 
                of the Treasury (Parts 1--399)
        II  Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives, 
                Department of Justice (Parts 400--699)

                   Title 28--Judicial Administration

         I  Department of Justice (Parts 0--299)
       III  Federal Prison Industries, Inc., Department of Justice 
                (Parts 300--399)
         V  Bureau of Prisons, Department of Justice (Parts 500--
                599)
        VI  Offices of Independent Counsel, Department of Justice 
                (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Office of Independent Counsel (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Court Services and Offender Supervision Agency for the 
                District of Columbia (Parts 800--899)
        IX  National Crime Prevention and Privacy Compact Council 
                (Parts 900--999)
        XI  Department of Justice and Department of State (Parts 
                1100--1199)

[[Page 1420]]

                            Title 29--Labor

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Labor (Parts 
                0--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Labor
         I  National Labor Relations Board (Parts 100--199)
        II  Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 200--299)
       III  National Railroad Adjustment Board (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 400--499)
         V  Wage and Hour Division, Department of Labor (Parts 
                500--899)
        IX  Construction Industry Collective Bargaining Commission 
                (Parts 900--999)
         X  National Mediation Board (Parts 1200--1299)
       XII  Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service (Parts 
                1400--1499)
       XIV  Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Parts 1600--
                1699)
      XVII  Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 
                Department of Labor (Parts 1900--1999)
        XX  Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 2200--2499)
       XXV  Employee Benefits Security Administration, Department 
                of Labor (Parts 2500--2599)
     XXVII  Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 2700--2799)
        XL  Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation (Parts 4000--
                4999)

                      Title 30--Mineral Resources

         I  Mine Safety and Health Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 1--199)
        II  Bureau of Safety and Environmental Enforcement, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 200--299)
        IV  Geological Survey, Department of the Interior (Parts 
                400--499)
         V  Bureau of Ocean Energy Management, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 500--599)
       VII  Office of Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 700--999)
       XII  Office of Natural Resources Revenue, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 1200--1299)

                 Title 31--Money and Finance: Treasury

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of the Treasury 
                (Parts 0--50)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Money and Finance
         I  Monetary Offices, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                51--199)
        II  Fiscal Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                200--399)
        IV  Secret Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                400--499)
         V  Office of Foreign Assets Control, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 500--599)

[[Page 1421]]

        VI  Bureau of Engraving and Printing, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Department of 
                the Treasury (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Office of Investment Security, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Federal Claims Collection Standards (Department of the 
                Treasury--Department of Justice) (Parts 900--999)
         X  Financial Crimes Enforcement Network, Department of 
                the Treasury (Parts 1000--1099)

                      Title 32--National Defense

            Subtitle A--Department of Defense
         I  Office of the Secretary of Defense (Parts 1--399)
         V  Department of the Army (Parts 400--699)
        VI  Department of the Navy (Parts 700--799)
       VII  Department of the Air Force (Parts 800--1099)
            Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to National 
                Defense
       XII  Defense Logistics Agency (Parts 1200--1299)
       XVI  Selective Service System (Parts 1600--1699)
      XVII  Office of the Director of National Intelligence (Parts 
                1700--1799)
     XVIII  National Counterintelligence Center (Parts 1800--1899)
       XIX  Central Intelligence Agency (Parts 1900--1999)
        XX  Information Security Oversight Office, National 
                Archives and Records Administration (Parts 2000--
                2099)
       XXI  National Security Council (Parts 2100--2199)
      XXIV  Office of Science and Technology Policy (Parts 2400--
                2499)
     XXVII  Office for Micronesian Status Negotiations (Parts 
                2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Office of the Vice President of the United States 
                (Parts 2800--2899)

               Title 33--Navigation and Navigable Waters

         I  Coast Guard, Department of Homeland Security (Parts 
                1--199)
        II  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army, Department 
                of Defense (Parts 200--399)
        IV  Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 400--499)

                          Title 34--Education

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary, Department of 
                Education (Parts 1--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations of the Offices of the 
                Department of Education
         I  Office for Civil Rights, Department of Education 
                (Parts 100--199)

[[Page 1422]]

        II  Office of Elementary and Secondary Education, 
                Department of Education (Parts 200--299)
       III  Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative 
                Services, Department of Education (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Career, Technical and Adult Education, 
                Department of Education (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Bilingual Education and Minority Languages 
                Affairs, Department of Education (Parts 500--599) 
                [Reserved]
        VI  Office of Postsecondary Education, Department of 
                Education (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Office of Educational Research and Improvement, 
                Department of Education (Parts 700--799) 
                [Reserved]
            Subtitle C--Regulations Relating to Education
        XI  (Parts 1100--1199) [Reserved]
       XII  National Council on Disability (Parts 1200--1299)

                          Title 35 [Reserved]

             Title 36--Parks, Forests, and Public Property

         I  National Park Service, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--199)
        II  Forest Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 200--
                299)
       III  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  American Battle Monuments Commission (Parts 400--499)
         V  Smithsonian Institution (Parts 500--599)
        VI  [Reserved]
       VII  Library of Congress (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Advisory Council on Historic Preservation (Parts 800--
                899)
        IX  Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation (Parts 
                900--999)
         X  Presidio Trust (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance 
                Board (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 
                1200--1299)
        XV  Oklahoma City National Memorial Trust (Parts 1500--
                1599)
       XVI  Morris K. Udall Scholarship and Excellence in National 
                Environmental Policy Foundation (Parts 1600--1699)

             Title 37--Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights

         I  United States Patent and Trademark Office, Department 
                of Commerce (Parts 1--199)
        II  U.S. Copyright Office, Library of Congress (Parts 
                200--299)
       III  Copyright Royalty Board, Library of Congress (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  National Institute of Standards and Technology, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 400--599)

[[Page 1423]]

           Title 38--Pensions, Bonuses, and Veterans' Relief

         I  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 0--199)
        II  Armed Forces Retirement Home (Parts 200--299)

                       Title 39--Postal Service

         I  United States Postal Service (Parts 1--999)
       III  Postal Regulatory Commission (Parts 3000--3099)

                  Title 40--Protection of Environment

         I  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1--1099)
        IV  Environmental Protection Agency and Department of 
                Justice (Parts 1400--1499)
         V  Council on Environmental Quality (Parts 1500--1599)
        VI  Chemical Safety and Hazard Investigation Board (Parts 
                1600--1699)
       VII  Environmental Protection Agency and Department of 
                Defense; Uniform National Discharge Standards for 
                Vessels of the Armed Forces (Parts 1700--1799)
      VIII  Gulf Coast Ecosystem Restoration Council (Parts 1800--
                1899)

          Title 41--Public Contracts and Property Management

            Subtitle A--Federal Procurement Regulations System 
                [Note]
            Subtitle B--Other Provisions Relating to Public 
                Contracts
        50  Public Contracts, Department of Labor (Parts 50-1--50-
                999)
        51  Committee for Purchase From People Who Are Blind or 
                Severely Disabled (Parts 51-1--51-99)
        60  Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal 
                Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor (Parts 
                60-1--60-999)
        61  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans' 
                Employment and Training Service, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 61-1--61-999)
   62--100  [Reserved]
            Subtitle C--Federal Property Management Regulations 
                System
       101  Federal Property Management Regulations (Parts 101-1--
                101-99)
       102  Federal Management Regulation (Parts 102-1--102-299)
  103--104  [Reserved]
       105  General Services Administration (Parts 105-1--105-999)
       109  Department of Energy Property Management Regulations 
                (Parts 109-1--109-99)
       114  Department of the Interior (Parts 114-1--114-99)
       115  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 115-1--115-99)
       128  Department of Justice (Parts 128-1--128-99)
  129--200  [Reserved]
            Subtitle D--Other Provisions Relating to Property 
                Management [Reserved]

[[Page 1424]]

            Subtitle E--Federal Information Resources Management 
                Regulations System [Reserved]
            Subtitle F--Federal Travel Regulation System
       300  General (Parts 300-1--300-99)
       301  Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances (Parts 301-1--
                301-99)
       302  Relocation Allowances (Parts 302-1--302-99)
       303  Payment of Expenses Connected with the Death of 
                Certain Employees (Part 303-1--303-99)
       304  Payment of Travel Expenses from a Non-Federal Source 
                (Parts 304-1--304-99)

                        Title 42--Public Health

         I  Public Health Service, Department of Health and Human 
                Services (Parts 1--199)
   ii--III  [Reserved]
        IV  Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services, Department 
                of Health and Human Services (Parts 400--699)
         V  Office of Inspector General-Health Care, Department of 
                Health and Human Services (Parts 1000--1099)

                   Title 43--Public Lands: Interior

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--199)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Public Lands
         I  Bureau of Reclamation, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 400--999)
        II  Bureau of Land Management, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1000--9999)
       III  Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation 
                Commission (Parts 10000--10099)

             Title 44--Emergency Management and Assistance

         I  Federal Emergency Management Agency, Department of 
                Homeland Security (Parts 0--399)
        IV  Department of Commerce and Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 400--499)

                       Title 45--Public Welfare

            Subtitle A--Department of Health and Human Services 
                (Parts 1--199)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Public Welfare
        II  Office of Family Assistance (Assistance Programs), 
                Administration for Children and Families, 
                Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 
                200--299)

[[Page 1425]]

       III  Office of Child Support Enforcement (Child Support 
                Enforcement Program), Administration for Children 
                and Families, Department of Health and Human 
                Services (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Refugee Resettlement, Administration for 
                Children and Families, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 400--499)
         V  Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the United 
                States, Department of Justice (Parts 500--599)
        VI  National Science Foundation (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Commission on Civil Rights (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Denali Commission (Parts 900--999)
         X  Office of Community Services, Administration for 
                Children and Families, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                1200--1299)
      XIII  Administration for Children and Families, Department 
                of Health and Human Services (Parts 1300--1399)
       XVI  Legal Services Corporation (Parts 1600--1699)
      XVII  National Commission on Libraries and Information 
                Science (Parts 1700--1799)
     XVIII  Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation (Parts 1800--
                1899)
       XXI  Commission of Fine Arts (Parts 2100--2199)
     XXIII  Arctic Research Commission (Part 2301)
      XXIV  James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation (Parts 
                2400--2499)
       XXV  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                2500--2599)

                          Title 46--Shipping

         I  Coast Guard, Department of Homeland Security (Parts 
                1--199)
        II  Maritime Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 200--399)
       III  Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage), Department of 
                Homeland Security (Parts 400--499)
        IV  Federal Maritime Commission (Parts 500--599)

                      Title 47--Telecommunication

         I  Federal Communications Commission (Parts 0--199)
        II  Office of Science and Technology Policy and National 
                Security Council (Parts 200--299)
       III  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                300--399)

[[Page 1426]]

        IV  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce, and 
                National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 400--499)
         V  The First Responder Network Authority (Parts 500--599)

           Title 48--Federal Acquisition Regulations System

         1  Federal Acquisition Regulation (Parts 1--99)
         2  Defense Acquisition Regulations System, Department of 
                Defense (Parts 200--299)
         3  Health and Human Services (Parts 300--399)
         4  Department of Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
         5  General Services Administration (Parts 500--599)
         6  Department of State (Parts 600--699)
         7  Agency for International Development (Parts 700--799)
         8  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 800--899)
         9  Department of Energy (Parts 900--999)
        10  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1000--1099)
        12  Department of Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
        13  Department of Commerce (Parts 1300--1399)
        14  Department of the Interior (Parts 1400--1499)
        15  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1500--1599)
        16  Office of Personnel Management, Federal Employees 
                Health Benefits Acquisition Regulation (Parts 
                1600--1699)
        17  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1700--1799)
        18  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1800--1899)
        19  Broadcasting Board of Governors (Parts 1900--1999)
        20  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 2000--2099)
        21  Office of Personnel Management, Federal Employees 
                Group Life Insurance Federal Acquisition 
                Regulation (Parts 2100--2199)
        23  Social Security Administration (Parts 2300--2399)
        24  Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                2400--2499)
        25  National Science Foundation (Parts 2500--2599)
        28  Department of Justice (Parts 2800--2899)
        29  Department of Labor (Parts 2900--2999)
        30  Department of Homeland Security, Homeland Security 
                Acquisition Regulation (HSAR) (Parts 3000--3099)
        34  Department of Education Acquisition Regulation (Parts 
                3400--3499)
        51  Department of the Army Acquisition Regulations (Parts 
                5100--5199)
        52  Department of the Navy Acquisition Regulations (Parts 
                5200--5299)
        53  Department of the Air Force Federal Acquisition 
                Regulation Supplement (Parts 5300--5399) 
                [Reserved]

[[Page 1427]]

        54  Defense Logistics Agency, Department of Defense (Parts 
                5400--5499)
        57  African Development Foundation (Parts 5700--5799)
        61  Civilian Board of Contract Appeals, General Services 
                Administration (Parts 6100--6199)
        99  Cost Accounting Standards Board, Office of Federal 
                Procurement Policy, Office of Management and 
                Budget (Parts 9900--9999)

                       Title 49--Transportation

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Transportation 
                (Parts 1--99)
            Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to 
                Transportation
         I  Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety 
                Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 100--199)
        II  Federal Railroad Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 200--299)
       III  Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Coast Guard, Department of Homeland Security (Parts 
                400--499)
         V  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Federal Transit Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 600--699)
       VII  National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK) 
                (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  National Transportation Safety Board (Parts 800--999)
         X  Surface Transportation Board (Parts 1000--1399)
        XI  Research and Innovative Technology Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 1400--1499) 
                [Reserved]
       XII  Transportation Security Administration, Department of 
                Homeland Security (Parts 1500--1699)

                   Title 50--Wildlife and Fisheries

         I  United States Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of 
                the Interior (Parts 1--199)
        II  National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic 
                and Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 200--299)
       III  International Fishing and Related Activities (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  Joint Regulations (United States Fish and Wildlife 
                Service, Department of the Interior and National 
                Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic and 
                Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce); Endangered Species Committee 
                Regulations (Parts 400--499)
         V  Marine Mammal Commission (Parts 500--599)

[[Page 1428]]

        VI  Fishery Conservation and Management, National Oceanic 
                and Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 600--699)

[[Page 1429]]





           Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR




                     (Revised as of January 1, 2018)

                                                  CFR Title, Subtitle or 
                     Agency                               Chapter

Administrative Committee of the Federal Register  1, I
Administrative Conference of the United States    1, III
Advisory Council on Historic Preservation         36, VIII
Advocacy and Outreach, Office of                  7, XXV
Afghanistan Reconstruction, Special Inspector     5, LXXXIII
     General for
African Development Foundation                    22, XV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 57
Agency for International Development              2, VII; 22, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 7
Agricultural Marketing Service                    7, I, IX, X, XI
Agricultural Research Service                     7, V
Agriculture Department                            2, IV; 5, LXXIII
  Advocacy and Outreach, Office of                7, XXV
  Agricultural Marketing Service                  7, I, IX, X, XI
  Agricultural Research Service                   7, V
  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service      7, III; 9, I
  Chief Financial Officer, Office of              7, XXX
  Commodity Credit Corporation                    7, XIV
  Economic Research Service                       7, XXXVII
  Energy Policy and New Uses, Office of           2, IX; 7, XXIX
  Environmental Quality, Office of                7, XXXI
  Farm Service Agency                             7, VII, XVIII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 4
  Federal Crop Insurance Corporation              7, IV
  Food and Nutrition Service                      7, II
  Food Safety and Inspection Service              9, III
  Foreign Agricultural Service                    7, XV
  Forest Service                                  36, II
  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards        7, VIII; 9, II
       Administration
  Information Resources Management, Office of     7, XXVII
  Inspector General, Office of                    7, XXVI
  National Agricultural Library                   7, XLI
  National Agricultural Statistics Service        7, XXXVI
  National Institute of Food and Agriculture      7, XXXIV
  Natural Resources Conservation Service          7, VI
  Operations, Office of                           7, XXVIII
  Procurement and Property Management, Office of  7, XXXII
  Rural Business-Cooperative Service              7, XVIII, XLII
  Rural Development Administration                7, XLII
  Rural Housing Service                           7, XVIII, XXXV
  Rural Telephone Bank                            7, XVI
  Rural Utilities Service                         7, XVII, XVIII, XLII
  Secretary of Agriculture, Office of             7, Subtitle A
  Transportation, Office of                       7, XXXIII
  World Agricultural Outlook Board                7, XXXVIII
Air Force Department                              32, VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement       48, 53
Air Transportation Stabilization Board            14, VI
Alcohol and Tobacco Tax and Trade Bureau          27, I
Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives,       27, II
     Bureau of
AMTRAK                                            49, VII
American Battle Monuments Commission              36, IV
American Indians, Office of the Special Trustee   25, VII

[[Page 1430]]

Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service        7, III; 9, I
Appalachian Regional Commission                   5, IX
Architectural and Transportation Barriers         36, XI
     Compliance Board
Arctic Research Commission                        45, XXIII
Armed Forces Retirement Home                      5, XI
Army Department                                   32, V
  Engineers, Corps of                             33, II; 36, III
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 51
Bilingual Education and Minority Languages        34, V
     Affairs, Office of
Blind or Severely Disabled, Committee for         41, 51
     Purchase from People Who Are
Broadcasting Board of Governors                   22, V
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 19
Career, Technical and Adult Education, Office of  34, IV
Census Bureau                                     15, I
Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services          42, IV
Central Intelligence Agency                       32, XIX
Chemical Safety and Hazardous Investigation       40, VI
     Board
Chief Financial Officer, Office of                7, XXX
Child Support Enforcement, Office of              45, III
Children and Families, Administration for         45, II, III, IV, X, XIII
Civil Rights, Commission on                       5, LXVIII; 45, VII
Civil Rights, Office for                          34, I
Council of the Inspectors General on Integrity    5, XCVIII
     and Efficiency
Court Services and Offender Supervision Agency    5, LXX
     for the District of Columbia
Coast Guard                                       33, I; 46, I; 49, IV
Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage)                46, III
Commerce Department                               2, XIII; 44, IV; 50, VI
  Census Bureau                                   15, I
  Economic Analysis, Bureau of                    15, VIII
  Economic Development Administration             13, III
  Emergency Management and Assistance             44, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 13
  Foreign-Trade Zones Board                       15, IV
  Industry and Security, Bureau of                15, VII
  International Trade Administration              15, III; 19, III
  National Institute of Standards and Technology  15, II; 37, IV
  National Marine Fisheries Service               50, II, IV
  National Oceanic and Atmospheric                15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, 
       Administration                             VI
  National Technical Information Service          15, XI
  National Telecommunications and Information     15, XXIII; 47, III, IV
       Administration
  National Weather Service                        15, IX
  Patent and Trademark Office, United States      37, I
  Secretary of Commerce, Office of                15, Subtitle A
Commercial Space Transportation                   14, III
Commodity Credit Corporation                      7, XIV
Commodity Futures Trading Commission              5, XLI; 17, I
Community Planning and Development, Office of     24, V, VI
     Assistant Secretary for
Community Services, Office of                     45, X
Comptroller of the Currency                       12, I
Construction Industry Collective Bargaining       29, IX
     Commission
Consumer Financial Protection Bureau              5, LXXXIV; 12, X
Consumer Product Safety Commission                5, LXXI; 16, II
Copyright Royalty Board                           37, III
Corporation for National and Community Service    2, XXII; 45, XII, XXV
Cost Accounting Standards Board                   48, 99
Council on Environmental Quality                  40, V
Court Services and Offender Supervision Agency    5, LXX; 28, VIII
     for the District of Columbia
Customs and Border Protection                     19, I
Defense Contract Audit Agency                     32, I
Defense Department                                2, XI; 5, XXVI; 32, 
                                                  Subtitle A; 40, VII
  Advanced Research Projects Agency               32, I

[[Page 1431]]

  Air Force Department                            32, VII
  Army Department                                 32, V; 33, II; 36, III; 
                                                  48, 51
  Defense Acquisition Regulations System          48, 2
  Defense Intelligence Agency                     32, I
  Defense Logistics Agency                        32, I, XII; 48, 54
  Engineers, Corps of                             33, II; 36, III
  National Imagery and Mapping Agency             32, I
  Navy Department                                 32, VI; 48, 52
  Secretary of Defense, Office of                 2, XI; 32, I
Defense Contract Audit Agency                     32, I
Defense Intelligence Agency                       32, I
Defense Logistics Agency                          32, XII; 48, 54
Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board           10, XVII
Delaware River Basin Commission                   18, III
Denali Commission                                 45, IX
District of Columbia, Court Services and          5, LXX; 28, VIII
     Offender Supervision Agency for the
Drug Enforcement Administration                   21, II
East-West Foreign Trade Board                     15, XIII
Economic Analysis, Bureau of                      15, VIII
Economic Development Administration               13, III
Economic Research Service                         7, XXXVII
Education, Department of                          2, XXXIV; 5, LIII
  Bilingual Education and Minority Languages      34, V
       Affairs, Office of
  Career, Technical and Adult Education, Office   34, IV
       of
  Civil Rights, Office for                        34, I
  Educational Research and Improvement, Office    34, VII
       of
  Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of   34, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 34
  Postsecondary Education, Office of              34, VI
  Secretary of Education, Office of               34, Subtitle A
  Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,  34, III
       Office of
  Career, Technical, and Adult Education, Office  34, IV
       of
Educational Research and Improvement, Office of   34, VII
Election Assistance Commission                    2, LVIII; 11, II
Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of     34, II
Emergency Oil and Gas Guaranteed Loan Board       13, V
Emergency Steel Guarantee Loan Board              13, IV
Employee Benefits Security Administration         29, XXV
Employees' Compensation Appeals Board             20, IV
Employees Loyalty Board                           5, V
Employment and Training Administration            20, V
Employment Standards Administration               20, VI
Endangered Species Committee                      50, IV
Energy, Department of                             2, IX; 5, XXIII; 10, II, 
                                                  III, X
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 9
  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission            5, XXIV; 18, I
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 109
Energy, Office of                                 7, XXIX
Engineers, Corps of                               33, II; 36, III
Engraving and Printing, Bureau of                 31, VI
Environmental Protection Agency                   2, XV; 5, LIV; 40, I, IV, 
                                                  VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 15
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 115
Environmental Quality, Office of                  7, XXXI
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission           5, LXII; 29, XIV
Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant Secretary  24, I
     for
Executive Office of the President                 3, I
  Environmental Quality, Council on               40, V
  Management and Budget, Office of                2, Subtitle A; 5, III, 
                                                  LXXVII; 14, VI; 48, 99
  National Drug Control Policy, Office of         2, XXXVI; 21, III
  National Security Council                       32, XXI; 47, 2

[[Page 1432]]

  Presidential Documents                          3
  Science and Technology Policy, Office of        32, XXIV; 47, II
  Trade Representative, Office of the United      15, XX
       States
Export-Import Bank of the United States           2, XXXV; 5, LII; 12, IV
Family Assistance, Office of                      45, II
Farm Credit Administration                        5, XXXI; 12, VI
Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation          5, XXX; 12, XIV
Farm Service Agency                               7, VII, XVIII
Federal Acquisition Regulation                    48, 1
Federal Aviation Administration                   14, I
  Commercial Space Transportation                 14, III
Federal Claims Collection Standards               31, IX
Federal Communications Commission                 5, XXIX; 47, I
Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office of   41, 60
Federal Crop Insurance Corporation                7, IV
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation             5, XXII; 12, III
Federal Election Commission                       5, XXXVII; 11, I
Federal Emergency Management Agency               44, I
Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal    48, 21
     Acquisition Regulation
Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition     48, 16
     Regulation
Federal Energy Regulatory Commission              5, XXIV; 18, I
Federal Financial Institutions Examination        12, XI
     Council
Federal Financing Bank                            12, VIII
Federal Highway Administration                    23, I, II
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation            1, IV
Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight Office       12, XVII
Federal Housing Finance Agency                    5, LXXX; 12, XII
Federal Housing Finance Board                     12, IX
Federal Labor Relations Authority                 5, XIV, XLIX; 22, XIV
Federal Law Enforcement Training Center           31, VII
Federal Management Regulation                     41, 102
Federal Maritime Commission                       46, IV
Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service        29, XII
Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission  5, LXXIV; 29, XXVII
Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration       49, III
Federal Prison Industries, Inc.                   28, III
Federal Procurement Policy Office                 48, 99
Federal Property Management Regulations           41, 101
Federal Railroad Administration                   49, II
Federal Register, Administrative Committee of     1, I
Federal Register, Office of                       1, II
Federal Reserve System                            12, II
  Board of Governors                              5, LVIII
Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board        5, VI, LXXVI
Federal Service Impasses Panel                    5, XIV
Federal Trade Commission                          5, XLVII; 16, I
Federal Transit Administration                    49, VI
Federal Travel Regulation System                  41, Subtitle F
Financial Crimes Enforcement Network              31, X
Financial Research Office                         12, XVI
Financial Stability Oversight Council             12, XIII
Fine Arts, Commission of                          45, XXI
Fiscal Service                                    31, II
Fish and Wildlife Service, United States          50, I, IV
Food and Drug Administration                      21, I
Food and Nutrition Service                        7, II
Food Safety and Inspection Service                9, III
Foreign Agricultural Service                      7, XV
Foreign Assets Control, Office of                 31, V
Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the       45, V
     United States
Foreign Service Grievance Board                   22, IX
Foreign Service Impasse Disputes Panel            22, XIV
Foreign Service Labor Relations Board             22, XIV
Foreign-Trade Zones Board                         15, IV
Forest Service                                    36, II
General Services Administration                   5, LVII; 41, 105

[[Page 1433]]

  Contract Appeals, Board of                      48, 61
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 5
  Federal Management Regulation                   41, 102
  Federal Property Management Regulations         41, 101
  Federal Travel Regulation System                41, Subtitle F
  General                                         41, 300
  Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel    41, 304
       Expenses
  Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death    41, 303
       of Certain Employees
  Relocation Allowances                           41, 302
  Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances          41, 301
Geological Survey                                 30, IV
Government Accountability Office                  4, I
Government Ethics, Office of                      5, XVI
Government National Mortgage Association          24, III
Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards          7, VIII; 9, II
     Administration
Gulf Coast Ecosystem Restoration Council          2, LIX; 40, VIII
Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation            45, XVIII
Health and Human Services, Department of          2, III; 5, XLV; 45, 
                                                  Subtitle A
  Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services        42, IV
  Child Support Enforcement, Office of            45, III
  Children and Families, Administration for       45, II, III, IV, X, XIII
  Community Services, Office of                   45, X
  Family Assistance, Office of                    45, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 3
  Food and Drug Administration                    21, I
  Indian Health Service                           25, V
  Inspector General (Health Care), Office of      42, V
  Public Health Service                           42, I
  Refugee Resettlement, Office of                 45, IV
Homeland Security, Department of                  2, XXX; 5, XXXVI; 6, I; 8, 
                                                  I
  Coast Guard                                     33, I; 46, I; 49, IV
  Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage)              46, III
  Customs and Border Protection                   19, I
  Federal Emergency Management Agency             44, I
  Human Resources Management and Labor Relations  5, XCVII
       Systems
  Immigration and Customs Enforcement Bureau      19, IV
  Transportation Security Administration          49, XII
HOPE for Homeowners Program, Board of Directors   24, XXIV
     of
Housing and Urban Development, Department of      2, XXIV; 5, LXV; 24, 
                                                  Subtitle B
  Community Planning and Development, Office of   24, V, VI
       Assistant Secretary for
  Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant          24, I
       Secretary for
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 24
  Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, Office    12, XVII
       of
  Government National Mortgage Association        24, III
  Housing--Federal Housing Commissioner, Office   24, II, VIII, X, XX
       of Assistant Secretary for
  Housing, Office of, and Multifamily Housing     24, IV
       Assistance Restructuring, Office of
  Inspector General, Office of                    24, XII
  Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant  24, IX
       Secretary for
  Secretary, Office of                            24, Subtitle A, VII
Housing--Federal Housing Commissioner, Office of  24, II, VIII, X, XX
     Assistant Secretary for
Housing, Office of, and Multifamily Housing       24, IV
     Assistance Restructuring, Office of
Immigration and Customs Enforcement Bureau        19, IV
Immigration Review, Executive Office for          8, V
Independent Counsel, Office of                    28, VII
Independent Counsel, Offices of                   28, VI
Indian Affairs, Bureau of                         25, I, V
Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant           25, VI
   Secretary
[[Page 1434]]

Indian Arts and Crafts Board                      25, II
Indian Health Service                             25, V
Industry and Security, Bureau of                  15, VII
Information Resources Management, Office of       7, XXVII
Information Security Oversight Office, National   32, XX
     Archives and Records Administration
Inspector General
  Agriculture Department                          7, XXVI
  Health and Human Services Department            42, V
  Housing and Urban Development Department        24, XII, XV
Institute of Peace, United States                 22, XVII
Inter-American Foundation                         5, LXIII; 22, X
Interior Department                               2, XIV
  American Indians, Office of the Special         25, VII
       Trustee
  Endangered Species Committee                    50, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 14
  Federal Property Management Regulations System  41, 114
  Fish and Wildlife Service, United States        50, I, IV
  Geological Survey                               30, IV
  Indian Affairs, Bureau of                       25, I, V
  Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant         25, VI
       Secretary
  Indian Arts and Crafts Board                    25, II
  Land Management, Bureau of                      43, II
  National Indian Gaming Commission               25, III
  National Park Service                           36, I
  Natural Resource Revenue, Office of             30, XII
  Ocean Energy Management, Bureau of              30, V
  Reclamation, Bureau of                          43, I
  Safety and Enforcement Bureau, Bureau of        30, II
  Secretary of the Interior, Office of            2, XIV; 43, Subtitle A
  Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement,     30, VII
       Office of
Internal Revenue Service                          26, I
International Boundary and Water Commission,      22, XI
     United States and Mexico, United States 
     Section
International Development, United States Agency   22, II
     for
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 7
International Development Cooperation Agency,     22, XII
     United States
International Joint Commission, United States     22, IV
     and Canada
International Organizations Employees Loyalty     5, V
     Board
International Trade Administration                15, III; 19, III
International Trade Commission, United States     19, II
Interstate Commerce Commission                    5, XL
Investment Security, Office of                    31, VIII
James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation      45, XXIV
Japan-United States Friendship Commission         22, XVI
Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries       20, VIII
Justice Department                                2, XXVIII; 5, XXVIII; 28, 
                                                  I, XI; 40, IV
  Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives,     27, II
       Bureau of
  Drug Enforcement Administration                 21, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 28
  Federal Claims Collection Standards             31, IX
  Federal Prison Industries, Inc.                 28, III
  Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the     45, V
       United States
  Immigration Review, Executive Office for        8, V
  Independent Counsel, Offices of                 28, VI
  Prisons, Bureau of                              28, V
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 128
Labor Department                                  2, XXIX; 5, XLII
  Employee Benefits Security Administration       29, XXV
  Employees' Compensation Appeals Board           20, IV
  Employment and Training Administration          20, V
  Employment Standards Administration             20, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 29
  Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office    41, 60
     of
[[Page 1435]]

  Federal Procurement Regulations System          41, 50
  Labor-Management Standards, Office of           29, II, IV
  Mine Safety and Health Administration           30, I
  Occupational Safety and Health Administration   29, XVII
  Public Contracts                                41, 50
  Secretary of Labor, Office of                   29, Subtitle A
  Veterans' Employment and Training Service,      41, 61; 20, IX
       Office of the Assistant Secretary for
  Wage and Hour Division                          29, V
  Workers' Compensation Programs, Office of       20, I, VII
Labor-Management Standards, Office of             29, II, IV
Land Management, Bureau of                        43, II
Legal Services Corporation                        45, XVI
Library of Congress                               36, VII
  Copyright Royalty Board                         37, III
  U.S. Copyright Office                           37, II
Local Television Loan Guarantee Board             7, XX
Management and Budget, Office of                  5, III, LXXVII; 14, VI; 
                                                  48, 99
Marine Mammal Commission                          50, V
Maritime Administration                           46, II
Merit Systems Protection Board                    5, II, LXIV
Micronesian Status Negotiations, Office for       32, XXVII
Military Compensation and Retirement              5, XCIX
     Modernization Commission
Millennium Challenge Corporation                  22, XIII
Mine Safety and Health Administration             30, I
Minority Business Development Agency              15, XIV
Miscellaneous Agencies                            1, IV
Monetary Offices                                  31, I
Morris K. Udall Scholarship and Excellence in     36, XVI
     National Environmental Policy Foundation
Museum and Library Services, Institute of         2, XXXI
National Aeronautics and Space Administration     2, XVIII; 5, LIX; 14, V
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 18
National Agricultural Library                     7, XLI
National Agricultural Statistics Service          7, XXXVI
National and Community Service, Corporation for   2, XXII; 45, XII, XXV
National Archives and Records Administration      2, XXVI; 5, LXVI; 36, XII
  Information Security Oversight Office           32, XX
National Capital Planning Commission              1, IV, VI
National Commission for Employment Policy         1, IV
National Commission on Libraries and Information  45, XVII
     Science
National Council on Disability                    5, C; 34, XII
National Counterintelligence Center               32, XVIII
National Credit Union Administration              5, LXXXVI; 12, VII
National Crime Prevention and Privacy Compact     28, IX
     Council
National Drug Control Policy, Office of           2, XXXVI; 21, III
National Endowment for the Arts                   2, XXXII
National Endowment for the Humanities             2, XXXIII
National Foundation on the Arts and the           45, XI
     Humanities
National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency           32, I
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration    23, II, III; 47, VI; 49, V
National Imagery and Mapping Agency               32, I
National Indian Gaming Commission                 25, III
National Institute of Food and Agriculture        7, XXXIV
National Institute of Standards and Technology    15, II; 37, IV
National Intelligence, Office of Director of      5, IV; 32, XVII
National Labor Relations Board                    5, LXI; 29, I
National Marine Fisheries Service                 50, II, IV
National Mediation Board                          29, X
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration   15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, 
                                                  VI
National Park Service                             36, I
National Railroad Adjustment Board                29, III
National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK)  49, VII
National Science Foundation                       2, XXV; 5, XLIII; 45, VI

[[Page 1436]]

  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 25
National Security Council                         32, XXI
National Security Council and Office of Science   47, II
     and Technology Policy
National Telecommunications and Information       15, XXIII; 47, III, IV, V
     Administration
National Transportation Safety Board              49, VIII
Natural Resources Conservation Service            7, VI
Natural Resource Revenue, Office of               30, XII
Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation, Office of      25, IV
Navy Department                                   32, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 52
Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation             24, XXV
Northeast Interstate Low-Level Radioactive Waste  10, XVIII
     Commission
Nuclear Regulatory Commission                     2, XX; 5, XLVIII; 10, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 20
Occupational Safety and Health Administration     29, XVII
Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission  29, XX
Ocean Energy Management, Bureau of                30, V
Oklahoma City National Memorial Trust             36, XV
Operations Office                                 7, XXVIII
Overseas Private Investment Corporation           5, XXXIII; 22, VII
Patent and Trademark Office, United States        37, I
Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel      41, 304
     Expenses
Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death of   41, 303
     Certain Employees
Peace Corps                                       2, XXXVII; 22, III
Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation       36, IX
Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation              29, XL
Personnel Management, Office of                   5, I, XXXV; 5, IV; 45, 
                                                  VIII
  Human Resources Management and Labor Relations  5, XCVII
       Systems, Department of Homeland Security
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 17
  Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal  48, 21
       Acquisition Regulation
  Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition   48, 16
       Regulation
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety           49, I
     Administration
Postal Regulatory Commission                      5, XLVI; 39, III
Postal Service, United States                     5, LX; 39, I
Postsecondary Education, Office of                34, VI
President's Commission on White House             1, IV
     Fellowships
Presidential Documents                            3
Presidio Trust                                    36, X
Prisons, Bureau of                                28, V
Privacy and Civil Liberties Oversight Board       6, X
Procurement and Property Management, Office of    7, XXXII
Public Contracts, Department of Labor             41, 50
Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant    24, IX
     Secretary for
Public Health Service                             42, I
Railroad Retirement Board                         20, II
Reclamation, Bureau of                            43, I
Refugee Resettlement, Office of                   45, IV
Relocation Allowances                             41, 302
Research and Innovative Technology                49, XI
     Administration
Rural Business-Cooperative Service                7, XVIII, XLII
Rural Development Administration                  7, XLII
Rural Housing Service                             7, XVIII, XXXV
Rural Telephone Bank                              7, XVI
Rural Utilities Service                           7, XVII, XVIII, XLII
Safety and Environmental Enforcement, Bureau of   30, II
Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation     33, IV
Science and Technology Policy, Office of          32, XXIV
Science and Technology Policy, Office of, and     47, II
     National Security Council
Secret Service                                    31, IV

[[Page 1437]]

Securities and Exchange Commission                5, XXXIV; 17, II
Selective Service System                          32, XVI
Small Business Administration                     2, XXVII; 13, I
Smithsonian Institution                           36, V
Social Security Administration                    2, XXIII; 20, III; 48, 23
Soldiers' and Airmen's Home, United States        5, XI
Special Counsel, Office of                        5, VIII
Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,    34, III
     Office of
State Department                                  2, VI; 22, I; 28, XI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 6
Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement,       30, VII
     Office of
Surface Transportation Board                      49, X
Susquehanna River Basin Commission                18, VIII
Tennessee Valley Authority                        5, LXIX; 18, XIII
Thrift Supervision Office, Department of the      12, V
     Treasury
Trade Representative, United States, Office of    15, XX
Transportation, Department of                     2, XII; 5, L
  Commercial Space Transportation                 14, III
  Emergency Management and Assistance             44, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 12
  Federal Aviation Administration                 14, I
  Federal Highway Administration                  23, I, II
  Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration     49, III
  Federal Railroad Administration                 49, II
  Federal Transit Administration                  49, VI
  Maritime Administration                         46, II
  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  23, II, III; 47, IV; 49, V
  Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety         49, I
       Administration
  Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation   33, IV
  Secretary of Transportation, Office of          14, II; 49, Subtitle A
  Transportation Statistics Bureau                49, XI
Transportation, Office of                         7, XXXIII
Transportation Security Administration            49, XII
Transportation Statistics Bureau                  49, XI
Travel Allowances, Temporary Duty (TDY)           41, 301
Treasury Department                               2, X;5, XXI; 12, XV; 17, 
                                                  IV; 31, IX
  Alcohol and Tobacco Tax and Trade Bureau        27, I
  Community Development Financial Institutions    12, XVIII
       Fund
  Comptroller of the Currency                     12, I
  Customs and Border Protection                   19, I
  Engraving and Printing, Bureau of               31, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 10
  Federal Claims Collection Standards             31, IX
  Federal Law Enforcement Training Center         31, VII
  Financial Crimes Enforcement Network            31, X
  Fiscal Service                                  31, II
  Foreign Assets Control, Office of               31, V
  Internal Revenue Service                        26, I
  Investment Security, Office of                  31, VIII
  Monetary Offices                                31, I
  Secret Service                                  31, IV
  Secretary of the Treasury, Office of            31, Subtitle A
  Thrift Supervision, Office of                   12, V
Truman, Harry S. Scholarship Foundation           45, XVIII
United States and Canada, International Joint     22, IV
     Commission
United States and Mexico, International Boundary  22, XI
     and Water Commission, United States Section
U.S. Copyright Office                             37, II
Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation      43, III
     Commission
Veterans Affairs Department                       2, VIII; 38, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 8
Veterans' Employment and Training Service,        41, 61; 20, IX
     Office of the Assistant Secretary for
Vice President of the United States, Office of    32, XXVIII
Wage and Hour Division                            29, V
Water Resources Council                           18, VI

[[Page 1438]]

Workers' Compensation Programs, Office of         20, I, VII
World Agricultural Outlook Board                  7, XXXVIII

[[Page 1439]]



List of CFR Sections Affected



All changes in this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) that 
were made by documents published in the Federal Register since January 
1, 2013 are enumerated in the following list. Entries indicate the 
nature of the changes effected. Page numbers refer to Federal Register 
pages. The user should consult the entries for chapters, parts and 
subparts as well as sections for revisions.
For changes to this volume of the CFR prior to this listing, consult the 
annual edition of the monthly List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA). The 
LSA is available at www.fdsys.gov. For changes to this volume of the CFR 
prior to 2001, see the ``List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949-1963, 1964-
1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000'' published in 11 separate volumes. The 
``List of CFR Sections Affected 1986-2000'' is available at 
www.fdsys.gov.

                                  2013

12 CFR
                                                                   78 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter III
Chapter III  Policy statement......................................22771
303.2  (b), (ee) and (ff) revised; interim.........................55470
303.64  (a)(4)(i) revised; interim.................................55470
303.181  (c)(4) revised; interim...................................55470
303.184  (d)(1)(ii) revised; interim...............................55470
303.200  (a)(2) and (b) revised; interim...........................55470
303.207  (b)(2) revised; interim...................................55470
303.241  (c)(4) revised; interim...................................55470
308.200  Revised; interim..........................................55470
308.202  (a)(1)(i)(A) introductory text and (ii) revised; interim 
                                                                   55470
308.204  (b)(2) and (c) revised; interim...........................55471
324  Added; interim................................................55471
324.63  (a) correctly revised; interim.............................62417
325  Policy statement; eff. 1-2-14.................................72534
327.1--327.15 (Subpart A)  Appendixes A and C amended;  interim....55594
330  Authority citation revised....................................56588
330.1  (i) revised.................................................56588
330.3  (e) revised.................................................56589
333.4  (a) amended; interim........................................55595
337.6  (a) footnotes 12 and 13 revised; interim....................55595
337.12  (b)(2) revised; interim....................................55595
344  Revised; eff. 1-21-14.........................................76723
345.12  (u)(1) revised; eff. 1-1-14................................79285
347.102  (u) and (v) revised; interim..............................55595
349.8  Revised; interim............................................55595
360  Authority citation revised....................................54376
360.5  (b) revised; interim........................................55595
360.9  (e)(6) amended; interim.....................................55595
360.11  Added......................................................54376
362.2  (s) and (t) revised; interim................................55596
362.4  (e)(3) revised; interim.....................................55596
362.17  (d) revised; interim.......................................55596
362.18  (a)(3) revised; interim....................................55596
363  Appendix A amended; interim...................................55596
364  Appendix A amended; interim...................................55597
365.1--365.2 (Subpart A)  Appendix A amended; interim..............55597
380  Authority citation revised....................................34731
380.8  Added.......................................................34731
390  Technical correction; CFR correction..........................52405
    Authority citation revised; eff. 1-21-14.......................76728
390.200--390.214 (Subpart K)  removed; eff. 1-21-14................76728
390.265  Appendix A amended; interim...............................55597
391.10--391.14 (Subpart B)  Appendix A amended; interim............55598

[[Page 1440]]

                                  2014

12 CFR
                                                                   79 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter III
303.2  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.........................20758
303.64  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed........................20758
303.181  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
303.184  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
303.200  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
303.207  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
303.241  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
308.200  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
308.202  Regulation at 78 FR 55470 confirmed.......................20758
308.204  Regulation at 78 FR 55471 confirmed.......................20758
324  Regulation at 78 FR 55471 confirmed...........................20758
324.1  (d)(4) amended..............................................57748
324.2  Amended.......................................20758, 44124, 57748
324.3  (a) introductory text revised...............................20758
324.10  (b)(4) revised.............................................20758
    (c)(4) revised.................................................57748
324.11  (b)(1)(iv)(C) revised......................................20758
324.21  (c)(2)(i) revised..........................................20759
324.22  (a) introductory text, (b)(1) introductory text, (d)(1) 
        introductory text, (3), (e)(3) introductory text, (5), 
        (h)(2)(iii)(B)(1), (3)(i) and (iii)(A) revised; 
        (b)(2)(iv)(C), (c)(4)(i) and (5) amended...................20759
324.32  (k) introductory text revised..............................20759
324.34  (a)(1)(ii)(B) revised......................................20760
324.35  (b)(2)(i)(A), (ii)(A), (c)(2)(i)(A), (ii)(A) and 
        (d)(3)(i)(F) revised; text following (d)(3)(ii) formula 
        designated as (d)(3)(ii)(A); new (d)(3)(ii)(A) amended.....20760
324.37  (c)(4)(i)(A) revised.......................................20760
324.41  (b) amended................................................20760
324.42  (h)(1)(iv) and (i)(1) amended..............................20760
324.43  (c) introductory text amended; (e)(3)(i) revised...........20760
324.51  (a)(3)(i)(A) revised.......................................20760
324.63  (a) amended................................................20760
324.124  (a) amended...............................................20761
324.131  (e)(4) amended............................................20761
324.132  (d)(2)(iv)(A) and (5)(iii)(B) amended.....................20761
324.133  (d)(3)(i)(F) revised......................................20761
324.142  (k)(1)(iv) and (l)(1) amended; (m)(2)(ii)(B) revised......20761
324.144  (c) introductory text amended.............................20761
324.172  (d) added.................................................57750
324.173  (a) introductory text revised; (c) and Table 13 added.....57750
324.210  (e) introductory text amended.............................20761
324.211  (c) introductory text amended.............................20761
324.403  (b)(1)(v) revised; eff. 1-1-18............................24541
325  Policy statement..............................................14153
    Authority citation revised.....................................69368
325.202  (m) added.................................................69368
325.203  (b) revised...............................................69368
325.204  Revised...................................................69368
325.206  (a) revised...............................................69368
325.207  (a) revised...............................................69369
327.1--327.15 (Subpart A)  Regulation at 78 FR 55594 confirmed.....20758
    Nomenclature change............................................70437
327.5  (c)(1) and (2) revised......................................70437
327.9  (a)(2)(i) and (ii) revised..................................70437
327.9  (a)(2)(i) and (ii) revised; eff. 1-1-18.....................70437
327.1--327.15 (Subpart A)  Appendix A amended......................70437
329  Part and authority citation added; nomenclature changes.......61540
329.1  (b)(1)(iii) revised.........................................61541
329.3  Amended.....................................................61541
333.4  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed.........................20758
335  Heading and authority citation revised........................63500
    Technical correction...........................................64504
335.101  (a) revised...............................................63501
335.221  (b) revised...............................................63501
335.311  (b) revised...............................................63501
335.701  (a) and (b) revised.......................................63501
335.801  (b)(6)(i) introductory text, (7)(iii), (d) introductory 
        text, (1), (e)(1), (2)(i) introductory text, (ii) and 
        (f)(2) revised.............................................63501
335.901  Removed...................................................63502
336.3  (e) revised.................................................42183

[[Page 1441]]

337.6  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed.........................20758
337.12  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed........................20758
339  Revised; eff. 1-20-15.........................................75744
345.12  (u)(1) revised.............................................77854
346  Revised.......................................................42185
347.102  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed.......................20758
349.8  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed.........................20758
351  Added; nomenclature change.....................................5805
351.1  Revised......................................................5805
351.16  Added; interim..............................................5228
360.5  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed.........................20758
360.9  Regulation at 78 FR 55595 confirmed.........................20758
362.2  Regulation at 78 FR 55596 confirmed.........................20758
362.4  Regulation at 78 FR 55596 confirmed.........................20758
362.17  Regulation at 78 FR 55596 confirmed........................20758
362.18  Regulation at 78 FR 55596 confirmed........................20758
363  Regulation at 78 FR 55596 confirmed...........................20758
364  Regulation at 78 FR 55597 confirmed...........................20758
365.1--365.2 (Subpart A)  Regulation at 78 FR 55597 confirmed......20758
373  Added; eff.2-23-15............................................77765
373  Authority citation added; eff. 2-23-15........................77765
373.1  Added; eff. 2-23-15.........................................77765
380  Authority citation revised....................................20766
380.13  Added......................................................20766
390  Authority citation revised.............................42183, 63502
    Technical correction...........................................64504
390.1--390.5 (Subpart A)  Removed..................................42183
390.160--390.170 (Subpart H)  Removed..............................42186
390.265  Regulation at 78 FR 55597 confirmed.......................20758
390.321  (b)(2) revised............................................63502
390.380  (a)(3) removed............................................63502
390.390--390.395 (Subpart U)  Removed..............................63502
391  Authority citation revised....................................75746
391.10--391.14 (Subpart B)  Regulation at 78 FR 55597 confirmed....20758
391.30--391.39 (Subpart D)  Removed; eff. 1-20-15..................75746

                                  2015

12 CFR
                                                                   80 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter III
303  Authority citation revised....................................65899
303.80--303.99 (Subpart E)  Revised................................65899
308  Authority citation revised.....................................5011
308.1  (e) introductory text, (1) and (9) revised; (a)(12), (13) 
        and (14) added..............................................5011
308.3  (k) through (r) redesignated as (l) through (s); (e), 
        (j)(3) and new (l) through (s) revised; new (l) added.......5012
308.25  (b) revised.................................................5012
308.101  (a) revised; (d) added.....................................5012
308.107  (a) revised................................................5012
308.109  (b)(1) and (2) revised.....................................5012
308.144  Revised....................................................5013
308.145  Revised....................................................5013
308.146  Revised....................................................5013
308.147  Revised....................................................5013
308.148  Introductory text and (c) revised..........................5013
308.150  (a) revised................................................5013
308.161  (a) revised................................................5013
308.163  (a)(2) and (c) revised; (d) added..........................5014
308.164  (b)(1), (3) and (5) revised; (b)(10) added.................5014
308.300--308.305 (Subpart R)  Revised..............................65906
323  Authority citation revised....................................32684
323.1--323.7 (Subpart A)  Designated as Subpart A; heading added 
                                                                   32684
323.1  Amended.....................................................32684
323.3  Amended.....................................................32684
323.4  Amended.....................................................32684
323.5  Amended.....................................................32684
323.8--323.14 (Subpart B)  Added...................................32684
324.2  Amended.....................................................41422
324.10  (c) introductory text revised..............................41422
324.22  (b)(1)(iii) revised........................................41423
324.100  (b)(1)(ii) revised........................................41423

[[Page 1442]]

324.122  (c)(9) and (10) redesignated as (c)(10) and (11); (a)(3), 
        (b)(1), (3), (5), (c)(1), (2), (5), (6), new (c)(10), (11) 
        and (i)(5) revised; (b)(2)(iii) and new (c)(9) added.......41423
324.131  (d)(5)(ii) and (iii) revised; (e)(3)(vi) amended..........41424
324.132  Table 1 amended; (c)(1), (2) and (d)(5)(iii)(B) revised; 
        (d)(2)(iv)(C), (7)(iv)(B) and (d)(9)(ii) amended...........41424
324.133  (b)(3)(i)(B), (4)(ii) and (c)(4)(ii) amended; (c)(3)(iii) 
        added......................................................41425
324.136  (e)(2)(i) and (ii) amended................................41425
324.172  (d) revised...............................................41425
324.173  (a) redesignated as (a)(1) and revised; (a)(2) and (3) 
        added; Table 6 and Table 9 amended.........................41425
324.403  (b) revised...............................................41426
325.203  (b)(3) amended; CFR correction............................81738
330.1  (s) removed.................................................65921
330.16  Removed....................................................65921
334.1  Revised.....................................................65918
334.3  (m) added...................................................65919
334.20--334.28 (Subpart C)  Removed................................65919
334.30--334.32 (Subpart D)  Removed................................65919
334.40--334.43 (Subpart E)  Removed................................65919
334.80--334.83 (Subpart I)  Heading revised........................65919
334.82  Removed....................................................65919
334.90  (a) and (b)(5) revised; (b)(11) added......................65919
334.91  (a) revised; (b)(3) added..................................65919
334  Appendix J amended............................................65919
339  Revised.......................................................43249
339.5  Revised.....................................................43252
339.9  (b) revised.................................................43253
339  Appendix A revised............................................43253
    Appendix B added...............................................43254
340  Revised.......................................................22889
345.12  (h)(2)(i), (j)(2) and (l) amended; (u)(1) revised..........81164
345.42  (b)(3), (d) and (i) amended................................81165
345.43  (b)(2) amended.............................................81165
346  Correctly revised.............................................23692
348  Revised; eff. 1-20-16.........................................79252
349  Heading revised; authority citation redesignated as Subpart B 
        authority citation; eff. 4-1-16............................74912
349.1--349.12 (Subpart A)  Added; amended; eff. 4-1-16.............74912
349.1  Redesignated as 349.13; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
    (a), (b) and (c) added; eff. 4-1-16............................74912
    (d) added and amended; interim; eff. 4-1-16....................74924
349.2  Redesignated as 349.14; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
    Amended; eff. 4-1-16...........................................74913
349.3  Redesignated as 349.15; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
349.4  Redesignated as 349.16; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
349.5  Redesignated as 349.17; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
349.6  Redesignated as 349.18; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
    Amended; eff. 4-1-16...........................................74913
349.7  Redesignated as 349.19; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
349.8  Redesignated as 349.20; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
349.9  Redesignated as 349.21; eff. 4-1-16.........................74912
349.10  Redesignated as 349.22; eff. 4-1-16........................74912
349.11  Redesignated as 349.23; eff. 4-1-16........................74912
349.12  Redesignated as 349.24; eff. 4-1-16........................74912
    Added; eff. 4-1-16.............................................74913
349.13--349.16 (Subpart B)  Heading added; authority citation 
        redesignated from Part 349 authority citation; eff. 4-1-16
                                                                   74912
349.13  Redesignated as 349.25; redesignated from 349.1; (d) 
        amended; eff. 4-1-16.......................................74912
349.14  Redesignated as 349.26; redesignated from 349.2; eff. 4-1-
        16.........................................................74912
349.15  Redesignated as 349.27; redesignated from 349.3; eff. 4-1-
        16.........................................................74912
349.16  Redesignated as 349.28; redesignated from 349.4; amended; 
        eff. 4-1-16................................................74912
349.17  Redesignated from 349.5; eff. 4-1-16.......................74912

[[Page 1443]]

349.18  Redesignated from 349.6; eff. 4-1-16.......................74912
349.19  Redesignated from 349.7; amended; eff. 4-1-16..............74912
349.20  Redesignated from 349.8; eff. 4-1-16.......................74912
349.21  Redesignated from 349.9; eff. 4-1-16.......................74912
349.22  Redesignated from 349.10; amended; eff. 4-1-16.............74912
349.23  Redesignated from 349.11; eff. 4-1-16......................74912
349.24  Redesignated from 349.12; eff. 4-1-16......................74912
349.25  Redesignated from 349.13; eff. 4-1-16......................74912
349.26  Redesignated from 349.14; eff. 4-1-16......................74912
349.27  Redesignated from 349.15; eff. 4-1-16......................74912
349.28  Redesignated from 349.16; eff. 4-1-16......................74912
352.9  (b) amended.................................................62445
352.10  (c), (e) introductory text, (g), (h) and (i) amended.......62445
360.6  (a)(1) through (11) redesignated as (a)(2) through (12); 
        new (a)(1) added; (b)(5)(i) revised; eff. 1-25-16..........73089
361.5  (a) and (b) amended.........................................62445
361.6  (a) amended.................................................62445
364  Revised.......................................................65907
370  Removed.......................................................65921
390  Authority citation revised..........5014, 5017, 32686, 65613, 79255
390.10--390.23 (Subpart B)  Removed.................................5014
390.30--390.75 (Subpart C)  Removed.................................5014
390.80--390.86 (Subpart D)  Removed.................................5014
390.90--390.97 (Subpart E)  Removed.................................5015
390.220--390.222 (Subpart L)  Removed..............................65614
390.240--390.241 (Subpart N)  Revised...............................5017
390.400--390.408 (Subpart V)  Removed; eff. 1-20-16................79255
390.440--390.447 (Subpart X)  Removed..............................32687
391  Authority citation revised.............................65903, 65913
391.10--391.14 (Subpart B)  Removed................................65913
391.20--391.23 (Subpart C)  Removed................................65919
391.40--391.48 (Subpart E)  Removed................................65903

                                  2016

12 CFR
                                                                   81 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter III
308  Authority citation revised....................................42239
308.116  (b)(4) revised; interim...................................42239
    (b)(4) revised; eff. 1-15-17...................................95416
308.132  (c)(1) revised; (d) added; interim........................42239
    (c) and (d) revised; eff. 1-15-17..............................95416
308.502  (a)(6), (b)(4) and (d) revised; interim...................42242
309.2  (e) revised; interim........................................83646
309.4  (a)(2) heading, (i) introductory text, (D) and (b) revised; 
        interim....................................................83646
309.5  (d)(6), (7), (h) and (i) redesignated as (d)(7), (8), new 
        (i) and (j); new (d)(8)(iii) redesignated as (d)(8)(iv); 
        new (d)(6), new (8)(iii), (iv)(E) and new (h) added; 
        (a)(6), (d)(1), (4), new (8)(iv)(C), (D), (f)(1)(x), 
        (g)(3), and new (i)(2) revised; interim....................83647
323  Policy statement..............................................75315
324.2  Footnote 5 redesignated as footnote 9; amended..............71354
324.4  Footnote 6 redesignated as footnote 10......................71354
324.11  Footnote 7 redesignated as footnote 11.....................71354
324.20  Footnotes 8 through 17 redesignated as footnotes 12 
        through 21.................................................71354
324.22  Footnotes 18 through 24 redesignated as footnotes 22 
        through 28.................................................71354
324.101  Footnote 25 redesignated as footnote 29...................71354
324.134  Footnote 26 redesignated as footnote 30...................71354
324.202  Footnotes 27 and 28 redesignated as footnotes 31 and 32 
                                                                   71354
324.210  Footnote 29 redesignated as footnote 33...................71354
324.403  Correctly revised.........................................22173
327.3  (b)(1) amended..............................................32201
    (c) revised; interim...........................................42243
327.4  (a) and (c) amended.........................................32201

[[Page 1444]]

327.8  (e), (f), (k)(1) and (m) through (p) amended; (l) revised; 
        (v) through (y) added......................................32201
327.9  Introductory text added.....................................32201
327.10  (b) through (f) revised....................................32201
327.11  Revised....................................................16069
327.16  Added......................................................32207
327.35  (a) revised................................................16073
329.3  Footnote 1 redesignated as footnote 2; amended..............71356
334  Appendices C and E removed....................................58382
337  Authority  citation revised...................................10069
    Regulation at 81 FR 10069 confirmed; eff. 1-17-17..............90952
337.12  Revised; interim...........................................10069
    Regulation at 81 FR 10069 confirmed; eff. 1-17-17..............90952
339  Authority citation correctly added.............................6170
339.2  Correctly amended............................................6170
341.1  Revised.....................................................27297
341.2  (h) and (i) revised.........................................27297
341.3  (a) revised; (c) amended....................................27297
341.5  (b) amended.................................................27297
341.7  Removed.....................................................27298
345  Policy statement..............................................48506
347  Authority citation revised....................................10070
    Regulation at 81 FR 10070 confirmed; eff. 1-17-17..............90952
347.211  (b)(1)(i) revised; interim................................10070
    Regulation at 81 FR 10070 confirmed; eff. 1-17-17..............90952
349.1  Regulation at 80 FR 74924 confirmed.........................50613
360  Authority citation revised....................................41423
360.6  (b)(3)(ii)(A) revised.......................................41423
370  Added; eff. 4-1-17............................................87759
380  Authority citation revised....................................41417
380.14  Added......................................................41417
390.351  Removed; interim..........................................10070
    Regulation at 81 FR 10070 confirmed; eff. 1-17-17..............90952

                                  2017

12 CFR
                                                                   82 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter III
323  Policy statement..............................................49089
324.2  Amended.....................................................50260
324.300  (b)(4), (d)(1) and table 9 revised; (b)(5) added..........55317
329.3  Amended.....................................................50261
    corrected......................................................61443
345.12  (u)(1) revised..............................................5356
    (g)(3), (4)(iii)(B), (h)(2)(i) and (l) amended; (g)(5) and 
(j)(3) removed; (j)(4) and (5) redesignated as new (j)(3) and (5) 
                                                                   55743
    (j)(5) redesignated as (j)(4); (u)(1) revised..................61145
345.22  (a)(1) amended.............................................55743
345.42  (c)(1) introductory text amended...........................55743
345.43  (b)(2) revised.............................................55743
345  Appendix B amended.............................................5356
371  Revised.......................................................35599
382  Added.........................................................50262
382.1  Amended.....................................................50267
    Regulation at 82 FR 50267 eff. date confirmed..................61443
382.2  (c)(1)(ii) corrected........................................61443


                                    